Konica Minolta Documentation - Guides - Manuels Utilisateur - Konica Minolta Revenir à l'accueil Voir une liste d'imprimantes Vous souhaitez un imprimante ou un photocopieur Konica, contactez nous

Résultats recherche : 1 - 50 de 266 

Produit	Sous-catégorie	Langue	Titre	Version	Date de sortie	Lien
7823	Guide d’utilisation	Français	Konica 7823 User Manual	1.1.1	2004-03-16
7823	Abrégé d'utilisation	Français	Konica 7823 Quick Guide	1.1.1	2004-03-16
7915	Abrégé d'utilisation	Français	Konica 7915/7920 Short Guide	1.1.1	2004-05-10
7920	Abrégé d'utilisation	Français	Konica 7915/7920 Short Guide	1.1.1	2004-05-10
8020	Guide d’utilisation	Français	Konica 8020/8031 Advanced Informations	7.1.1	2004-03-09
8020	Guide d’utilisation	Français	URG 8020/8031 Guide de l´utilisateur	7.1.1	2004-09-08
8031	Guide d’utilisation	Français	Konica 8020/8031 Advanced Informations	7.1.1	2004-03-09
8031	Guide d’utilisation	Français	URG 8020/8031 Guide de l´utilisateur	7.1.1	2004-09-08
8050	Guide d’utilisation	Français	CN5001Pro	1.1.1	2003-12-12
8050	Guide d’utilisation	Français	CN5001Pro	1.1.1	2003-12-12
8050	Abrégé d'utilisation	Français	Konica 8050 Quick Guide	1.1.1	2004-09-08
8050	Guide d’utilisation	Français	IP-921 - Documents from EFI	1.0.0	2004-06-08
8050	Guide d’utilisation	Français	IP-921 - Release Notes	1.0.0	2004-04-22
8150	Guide d’utilisation	Français	CN5001Pro	1.1.1	2003-12-12
8150	Guide d’utilisation	Français	CN5001Pro	1.1.1	2003-12-12
8150	Guide d’utilisation	Français	IP-921 - Documents from EFI	1.0.0	2004-06-08
8150	Guide d’utilisation	Français	IP-921 - Release Notes	1.0.0	2004-04-22
bizhub C10	Guide d’utilisation	Français	bizhub C10 User Manuals	1.1.1	2007-08-03
bizhub C10	Guide d’utilisation	Multi-Langues	bizhub C10 Installation Guide and Safety Information	1.1.0	2007-08-03
bizhub C10P	Guide d’utilisation	Français	bizhub C10P User Manual	1.0.1	2007-03-01
bizhub C10P	Guide d’installation	Anglais	bizhub C10P Installation Manual	1.0.0	2007-03-01
bizhub C20	Guide d’utilisation	Français	bizhub C20 User Guides	1.1.1	2008-10-28
bizhub C200	Guide d’utilisation	Français	bizhub C200 User Manuals	1-1-1	2008-07-07
bizhub C200	Guide d’utilisation	Français	bizhub C200 Phase2 User Manuals	1-1-1 Phase2	2009-02-23
bizhub C200	Abrégé d'utilisation	Français	bizhub C200 Phase2 Quick Guide	1-1-1 Phase2	2009-02-23
bizhub C203	Guide d’utilisation	Français	Advanced Function Operations (i-Option)	1.1.1	2008-03-20
bizhub C203	Guide d’utilisation	Français	Advanced Function Operations (i-Option)	1.1.1	2008-03-20
bizhub C203	Guide d’utilisation	Français	Advanced Function Operations (i-Option2)	2.1.1	2008-07-07
bizhub C203	Guide d’utilisation	Français	bizhub C203/C253/C353 User Manual	2.1.1	2007-09-04
bizhub C203	Guide d’utilisation	Français	bizhub C203/C253/C353 User Manual	3.1.1	2007-09-04
bizhub C20P	Guide d’utilisation	Français	Installation notes Windows 7 / Server 2008 R2	T1 R06	2009-11-05
bizhub C20P	Guide d’utilisation	Français	bizhub C20P User Manual	1.0.1	2008-04-17
bizhub C220	Abrégé d'utilisation	Français	bizhub C360/C280/C220 Quick Guide & Poster	3-2-1	2009-08-28
bizhub C220	Guide d’utilisation	Français	bizhub C360/C280/C220 User's Guides	3-2-1	2009-08-28
bizhub C224	Guide d’utilisation	Français	bizhub C554/C454/C364/C284/C224 User Guides (part 1/2) (French)	1-1-1	2012-06-04
bizhub C224	Guide d’utilisation	Français	bizhub C554/C454/C364/C284/C224 User Guides (part 2/2)(French)	1-1-1	2012-06-04
bizhub C25	Guide d’utilisation	Français	User's guides (French)	01	2011-03-14
bizhub C25	Abrégé d'utilisation	Français	Quick guide (French)	00	2011-03-14
bizhub C25	Guide d’installation	Arabe	Installation guide	00	2011-03-14
bizhub C25	Guide d’installation	Turc	Installation guide	00	2011-03-14
bizhub C25	Guide d’installation	Suédois	Installation guide	00	2011-03-14
bizhub C25	Guide d’installation	slovaque	Installation guide	00	2011-03-14
bizhub C25	Guide d’installation	Russe	Installation guide	00	2011-03-14
bizhub C25	Guide d’installation	Polonais	Installation guide	00	2011-03-14
bizhub C25	Guide d’installation	Norvégien	Installation guide	00	2011-03-14
bizhub C25	Guide d’installation	Hongrois	Installation guide	00	2011-03-14
bizhub C25	Guide d’installation	Grec	Installation guide	00	2011-03-14
bizhub C25	Guide d’installation	Finnois	Installation guide	00	2011-03-14
bizhub C25	Guide d’installation	Hollandais	Installation guide	00	2011-03-14
bizhub C25	Guide d’installation	Danois	Installation guide	00	2011-03-14

Résultats recherche : 1 - 50 de 266 

Résultats recherche :  51 - 100 de 266 

Produit	Sous-catégorie	Langue	Titre	Version	Date de sortie	Lien
bizhub C25	Guide d’installation	Tchèque	Installation guide	00	2011-03-14
bizhub C25	Guide d’installation	Espagnol	Installation guide	00	2011-03-14
bizhub C25	Guide d’installation	Portugais	Installation guide	00	2011-03-14
bizhub C25	Guide d’installation	Italien	Installation guide	00	2011-03-14
bizhub C25	Guide d’installation	Français	Installation guide	00	2011-03-14
bizhub C25	Guide d’installation	Allemand	Installation guide	00	2011-03-14
bizhub C25	Guide d’installation	Anglais	Installation guide	00	2011-03-14
bizhub C25	Guide d’utilisation	Arabe	Safety information guide	00	2011-03-14
bizhub C25	Guide d’utilisation	Turc	Safety information guide	00	2011-03-14
bizhub C25	Guide d’utilisation	Suédois	Safety information guide	00	2011-03-14
bizhub C25	Guide d’utilisation	slovaque	Safety information guide	00	2011-03-14
bizhub C25	Guide d’utilisation	Russe	Safety information guide	00	2011-03-14
bizhub C25	Guide d’utilisation	Polonais	Safety information guide	00	2011-03-14
bizhub C25	Guide d’utilisation	Norvégien	Safety information guide	00	2011-03-14
bizhub C25	Guide d’utilisation	Hongrois	Safety information guide	00	2011-03-14
bizhub C25	Guide d’utilisation	Grec	Safety information guide	00	2011-03-14
bizhub C25	Guide d’utilisation	Finnois	Safety information guide	00	2011-03-14
bizhub C25	Guide d’utilisation	Hollandais	Safety information guide	00	2011-03-14
bizhub C25	Guide d’utilisation	Danois	Safety information guide	00	2011-03-14
bizhub C25	Guide d’utilisation	Tchèque	Safety information guide	00	2011-03-14
bizhub C25	Guide d’utilisation	Coréen	Safety information guide	00	2011-03-14
bizhub C25	Guide d’utilisation	Simplified Chinese	Safety information guide	00	2011-03-14
bizhub C25	Guide d’utilisation	Traditional Chinese	Safety information guide	00	2011-03-14
bizhub C25	Guide d’utilisation	Espagnol	Safety information guide	00	2011-03-14
bizhub C25	Guide d’utilisation	Portugais	Safety information guide	00	2011-03-14
bizhub C25	Guide d’utilisation	Italien	Safety information guide	00	2011-03-14
bizhub C25	Guide d’utilisation	Français	Safety information guide	00	2011-03-14
bizhub C25	Guide d’utilisation	Allemand	Safety information guide	00	2011-03-14
bizhub C25	Guide d’utilisation	Anglais	Safety information guide	00	2011-03-14
bizhub C250	Guide d’utilisation	Français	User Manual FK-502 (Fax Option for bizhub C450/C351/C250/C252/C300/C352)	1.1.1 (Phase3)	2005-04-13
bizhub C250	Guide d’utilisation	Français	Network Fax Operations	1.1.1	2006-08-22
bizhub C250	Guide d’utilisation	Français	bizhub C250 Phase3 User Manuals (complete set)	1.1.1 (Phase3)	2006-11-01
bizhub C250P	Guide d’utilisation	Français	bizhub C250P User Manual	1.1.1 (Phase3)	2005-09-13
bizhub C252	Guide d’utilisation	Français	User Manual FK-502 (Fax Option for bizhub C450/C351/C250/C252/C300/C352)	1.1.1 (Phase3)	2005-04-13
bizhub C252	Guide d’utilisation	Français	Network Fax Operations	1.1.1	2006-08-22
bizhub C252	Guide d’utilisation	Français	User Manual bizhub C252 Phase3 (complete set)	1.1.1 (Phase3)	2006-04-28
bizhub C252P	Guide d’utilisation	Français	bizhub C252P User Manual	1.1.1	2006-08-22
bizhub C253	Guide d’utilisation	Français	Advanced Function Operations (i-Option)	1.1.1	2008-03-20
bizhub C253	Guide d’utilisation	Français	Advanced Function Operations (i-Option)	1.1.1	2008-03-20
bizhub C253	Guide d’utilisation	Français	Advanced Function Operations (i-Option2)	2.1.1	2008-07-07
bizhub C253	Guide d’utilisation	Français	bizhub C203/C253/C353 User Manual	2.1.1	2007-09-04
bizhub C253	Guide d’utilisation	Français	bizhub C203/C253/C353 User Manual	3.1.1	2007-09-04
bizhub C280	Abrégé d'utilisation	Français	bizhub C360/C280/C220 Quick Guide & Poster	3-2-1	2009-08-28
bizhub C280	Guide d’utilisation	Français	bizhub C360/C280/C220 User's Guides	3-2-1	2009-08-28
bizhub C284	Guide d’utilisation	Français	bizhub C554/C454/C364/C284/C224 User Guides (part 1/2) (French)	1-1-1	2012-06-04
bizhub C284	Guide d’utilisation	Français	bizhub C554/C454/C364/C284/C224 User Guides (part 2/2)(French)	1-1-1	2012-06-04
bizhub C300	Guide d’utilisation	Français	HDD Twain manual	1.0.1	2006-05-23
bizhub C300	Guide d’utilisation	Français	Real time mode Twain manual	1.0.1	2006-05-23
bizhub C300	Guide d’utilisation	Français	User Manual FK-502 (Fax Option for bizhub C450/C351/C250/C252/C300/C352)	1.1.1 (Phase3)	2005-04-13
bizhub C300	Guide d’utilisation	Français	bizhub C300 User Manuals (complete set)	1.1.1 (Phase3)	2006-04-21

Résultats recherche :  51 - 100 de 266 

Résultats recherche :  101 - 150 de 266 

Produit	Sous-catégorie	Langue	Titre	Version	Date de sortie	Lien
bizhub C300	Guide d’utilisation	Français	Network Fax Operations	1.1.1	2006-08-22
bizhub C300	Guide d’utilisation	Français	IC-406, Manuals from EFI (same as IC-402, V.2)	1.1.1	2006-05-24
bizhub C30P	Guide d’utilisation	Français	bizhub C30P User Manual	1.0.1	2007-03-01
bizhub C30P	Guide d’installation	Anglais	bizhub C30P Installation Manual	1.0.0	2007-03-01
bizhub C31P	Guide d’utilisation	Français	Installation notes Windows 7 / Server 2008 R2	T1 R06	2009-11-05
bizhub C31P	Guide d’utilisation	Français	bizhub C31P User Manual	1.1.1	2008-03-28
bizhub C35	Guide d’utilisation	Français	bizhub C35 User's Guide	2-1-1	2010-06-16
bizhub C35	Abrégé d'utilisation	Français	bizhub C35 Quick Guide	2-1-2	2010-06-16
bizhub C35	Guide d’utilisation	Français	bizhub C35 French Short Guide	1-1-1	2010-07-14
bizhub C35	Guide d’utilisation	Anglais	bizhub C35 Reference Guide	1-1-0	2010-06-16
bizhub C35	Guide d’installation	Arabe	bizhub C35 Installation Guide	1-0-0	2010-06-16
bizhub C35	Guide d’installation	Turc	bizhub C35 Installation Guide	1-0-0	2010-06-16
bizhub C35	Guide d’installation	Suédois	bizhub C35 Installation Guide	1-0-0	2010-06-16
bizhub C35	Guide d’installation	slovaque	bizhub C35 Installation Guide	1-0-0	2010-06-16
bizhub C35	Guide d’installation	Russe	bizhub C35 Installation Guide	1-0-0	2010-06-16
bizhub C35	Guide d’installation	Polonais	bizhub C35 Installation Guide	1-0-0	2010-06-16
bizhub C35	Guide d’installation	Norvégien	bizhub C35 Installation Guide	1-0-0	2010-06-16
bizhub C35	Guide d’installation	Hongrois	bizhub C35 Installation Guide	1-0-0	2010-06-16
bizhub C35	Guide d’installation	Grec	bizhub C35 Installation Guide	1-0-0	2010-06-16
bizhub C35	Guide d’installation	Finnois	bizhub C35 Installation Guide	1-0-0	2010-06-16
bizhub C35	Guide d’installation	Hollandais	bizhub C35 Installation Guide	1-0-0	2010-06-16
bizhub C35	Guide d’installation	Danois	bizhub C35 Installation Guide	1-0-0	2010-06-16
bizhub C35	Guide d’installation	Tchèque	bizhub C35 Installation Guide	1-0-0	2010-06-16
bizhub C35	Guide d’installation	Coréen	bizhub C35 Installation Guide	1-0-0	2010-06-16
bizhub C35	Guide d’installation	Simplified Chinese	bizhub C35 Installation Guide	1-0-0	2010-06-16
bizhub C35	Guide d’installation	Traditional Chinese	bizhub C35 Installation Guide	1-0-0	2010-06-16
bizhub C35	Guide d’installation	Espagnol	bizhub C35 Installation Guide	1-0-0	2010-06-16
bizhub C35	Guide d’installation	Portugais	bizhub C35 Installation Guide	1-0-0	2010-06-16
bizhub C35	Guide d’installation	Italien	bizhub C35 Installation Guide	1-0-0	2010-06-16
bizhub C35	Guide d’installation	Français	bizhub C35 Installation Guide	1-0-0	2010-06-16
bizhub C35	Guide d’installation	Allemand	bizhub C35 Installation Guide	1-0-0	2010-06-16
bizhub C35	Guide d’installation	Anglais	bizhub C35 Installation Guide	1-0-0	2010-06-16
bizhub C35	Abrégé d'utilisation	Français	bizhub C35, Step 2, Quick Guide	3-2-1	2010-12-01
bizhub C350	Guide d’utilisation	Français	C350 Printer Controller User Manual	1.1.1	2004-05-21
bizhub C350	Guide d’utilisation	Français	C350 Advanced Information	1.1.1	2004-05-21
bizhub C350	Guide d’utilisation	Français	C350 User Manual	1.1.1	2004-02-09
bizhub C350	Guide d’utilisation	Français	C350 Printer Controller Advanced Information	1.1.1	2004-02-09
bizhub C351	Guide d’utilisation	Français	User Manual FK-502 (Fax Option for bizhub C450/C351/C250/C252/C300/C352)	1.1.1 (Phase3)	2005-04-13
bizhub C351	Guide d’utilisation	Français	Network Fax Operations	1.1.1	2006-08-22
bizhub C351	Guide d’utilisation	Français	User Manual bizhub C351 Phase3 (complete set)	1.1.1 (Phase3)	2006-11-15
bizhub C352	Guide d’utilisation	Français	HDD Twain manual	1.0.1	2006-05-23
bizhub C352	Guide d’utilisation	Français	Real time mode Twain manual	1.0.1	2006-05-23
bizhub C352	Guide d’utilisation	Français	User Manual FK-502 (Fax Option for bizhub C450/C351/C250/C252/C300/C352)	1.1.1 (Phase3)	2005-04-13
bizhub C352	Guide d’utilisation	Français	User Manual bizhub C352 Phase3 (complete set)	1.1.1 (Phase3)	2006-04-28
bizhub C352	Guide d’utilisation	Français	IC-406, Manuals from EFI (same as IC-402, V.2)	1.1.1	2006-05-24
bizhub C352P	Guide d’utilisation	Français	bizhub C352P User Manual	1.1.1 Phase3	2006-03-09
bizhub C353	Guide d’utilisation	Français	Advanced Function Operations (i-Option)	1.1.1	2008-03-20
bizhub C353	Guide d’utilisation	Français	Advanced Function Operations (i-Option)	1.1.1	2008-03-20
bizhub C353	Guide d’utilisation	Français	Advanced Function Operations (i-Option2)	2.1.1	2008-07-07
bizhub C353	Guide d’utilisation	Français	bizhub C203/C253/C353 User Manual	2.1.1	2007-09-04

Résultats recherche :  101 - 150 de 266 

Résultats recherche :  151 - 200 de 266 

Produit	Sous-catégorie	Langue	Titre	Version	Date de sortie	Lien
bizhub C353	Guide d’utilisation	Français	bizhub C203/C253/C353 User Manual	3.1.1	2007-09-04
bizhub C353P	Guide d’utilisation	Français	bizhub C353P	1.1.1	2007-11-13
bizhub C35P	Guide d’utilisation	Tchèque	User's guide	12	2010-06-29
bizhub C35P	Guide d’utilisation	Anglais	bizhub C35P Reference Guide	00A	2010-02-02
bizhub C35P	Guide d’utilisation	Français	User's Guide - Manuel Utilisateur (Fr)	12	2010-06-29
bizhub C360	Abrégé d'utilisation	Français	bizhub C360/C280/C220 Quick Guide & Poster	3-2-1	2009-08-28
bizhub C360	Guide d’utilisation	Français	bizhub C360/C280/C220 User's Guides	3-2-1	2009-08-28
bizhub C364	Guide d’utilisation	Français	bizhub C554/C454/C364/C284/C224 User Guides (part 1/2) (French)	1-1-1	2012-06-04
bizhub C364	Guide d’utilisation	Français	bizhub C554/C454/C364/C284/C224 User Guides (part 2/2)(French)	1-1-1	2012-06-04
bizhub C450	Guide d’utilisation	Français	User Manual FK-502 (Fax Option for bizhub C450/C351/C250/C252/C300/C352)	1.1.1 (Phase3)	2005-04-13
bizhub C450	Guide d’utilisation	Français	User Manual bizhub C450 Phase3 (complete set)	1.1.1 (Phase3)	2006-04-28
bizhub C450P	Guide d’utilisation	Français	bizhub C450P User Manual	1.1.1 (Phase2)	2005-11-14
bizhub C451	Guide d’utilisation	Français	Advanced Function Operations (i-Option)	1.1.1	2008-03-20
bizhub C451	Guide d’utilisation	Français	Advanced Function Operations (i-Option)	1.1.1	2008-03-20
bizhub C451	Guide d’utilisation	Français	bizhub C451/C550/C650 User Manual	2.1.1	2007-02-27
bizhub C451	Guide d’utilisation	Français	Advanced Function Operations (i-Option2)	2.1.1	2008-07-07
bizhub C451	Guide d’utilisation	Français	bizhub C451/C550/C650 FE2 User Manual	3.1.1	2007-02-27
bizhub C451	Guide d’utilisation	Français	bizhub C451/C550/C650 FE3 User Manual	4.1.1	2007-02-27
bizhub C452	Abrégé d'utilisation	Français	bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C452 Quick Guide and Poster	2-1-1	2009-09-11
bizhub C452	Guide d’utilisation	Français	bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C452 User Guides	2-1-1	2009-09-11
bizhub C454	Guide d’utilisation	Français	bizhub C554/C454/C364/C284/C224 User Guides (part 1/2) (French)	1-1-1	2012-06-04
bizhub C454	Guide d’utilisation	Français	bizhub C554/C454/C364/C284/C224 User Guides (part 2/2)(French)	1-1-1	2012-06-04
bizhub C550	Guide d’utilisation	Français	Advanced Function Operations (i-Option)	1.1.1	2008-03-20
bizhub C550	Guide d’utilisation	Français	Advanced Function Operations (i-Option)	1.1.1	2008-03-20
bizhub C550	Guide d’utilisation	Français	bizhub C451/C550/C650 User Manual	2.1.1	2007-02-27
bizhub C550	Guide d’utilisation	Français	Advanced Function Operations (i-Option2)	2.1.1	2008-07-07
bizhub C550	Guide d’utilisation	Français	bizhub C451/C550/C650 FE2 User Manual	3.1.1	2007-02-27
bizhub C550	Guide d’utilisation	Français	bizhub C451/C550/C650 FE3 User Manual	4.1.1	2007-02-27
bizhub C552	Abrégé d'utilisation	Français	bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C452 Quick Guide and Poster	2-1-1	2009-09-11
bizhub C552	Guide d’utilisation	Français	bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C452 User Guides	2-1-1	2009-09-11
bizhub C552	Abrégé d'utilisation	Français	bizhub C652/C552 Quick Guide Copy/Print/Fax/Scan/Box	1-1-1	2009-02-18
bizhub C554	Guide d’utilisation	Français	bizhub C554/C454/C364/C284/C224 User Guides (part 1/2) (French)	1-1-1	2012-06-04
bizhub C554	Guide d’utilisation	Français	bizhub C554/C454/C364/C284/C224 User Guides (part 2/2)(French)	1-1-1	2012-06-04
bizhub C650	Guide d’utilisation	Français	Advanced Function Operations (i-Option)	1.1.1	2008-03-20
bizhub C650	Guide d’utilisation	Français	Advanced Function Operations (i-Option)	1.1.1	2008-03-20
bizhub C650	Guide d’utilisation	Français	bizhub C451/C550/C650 User Manual	2.1.1	2007-02-27
bizhub C650	Guide d’utilisation	Français	Advanced Function Operations (i-Option2)	2.1.1	2008-07-07
bizhub C650	Guide d’utilisation	Français	bizhub C451/C550/C650 FE2 User Manual	3.1.1	2007-02-27
bizhub C650	Guide d’utilisation	Français	bizhub C451/C550/C650 FE3 User Manual	4.1.1	2007-02-27
bizhub C652	Abrégé d'utilisation	Français	bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C452 Quick Guide and Poster	2-1-1	2009-09-11
bizhub C652	Guide d’utilisation	Français	bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C452 User Guides	2-1-1	2009-09-11
bizhub C652	Abrégé d'utilisation	Français	bizhub C652/C552 Quick Guide Copy/Print/Fax/Scan/Box	1-1-1	2009-02-18
bizhub C652DS	Abrégé d'utilisation	Français	bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C452 Quick Guide and Poster	2-1-1	2009-09-11
bizhub C652DS	Guide d’utilisation	Français	bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C452 User Guides	2-1-1	2009-09-11
bizhub C654	Guide d’utilisation	Français	bizhub C754/C654 User Guides (French)	1-1-1	2012-02-16
bizhub C754	Guide d’utilisation	Français	bizhub C754/C654 User Guides (French)	1-1-1	2012-02-16
bizhub PRESS C6000	Guide d’utilisation	Français	bizhub-PRO-PRESS-C6000-C7000_ug_Expert Guide	1-1-1	2010-09-23
bizhub PRESS C7000	Guide d’utilisation	Français	bizhub-PRO-PRESS-C6000-C7000_ug_Expert Guide	1-1-1	2010-09-23
bizhub PRESS C7000P	Guide d’utilisation	Français	bizhub-PRO-PRESS-C6000-C7000_ug_Expert Guide	1-1-1	2010-09-23
bizhub PRO C500	Guide d’utilisation	Français	CN5001Pro	1.1.1	2003-12-12

Résultats recherche :  151 - 200 de 266 

Résultats recherche :  201 - 250 de 266 

Produit	Sous-catégorie	Langue	Titre	Version	Date de sortie	Lien
bizhub PRO C500	Guide d’utilisation	Français	CN5001Pro	1.1.1	2003-12-12
bizhub PRO C500	Guide d’utilisation	Français	IP-921 - Documents from EFI	1.0.0	2004-06-08
bizhub PRO C500	Guide d’utilisation	Français	IP-921 - Release Notes	1.0.0	2004-04-22
bizhub PRO C500	Guide d’utilisation	Français	IC-405 (Manuals from EFI)	1.0	2006-06-19
bizhub PRO C500	Guide d’utilisation	Français	bizhub PRO C500	1.1.1	2005-02-28
bizhub PRO C500	Guide d’utilisation	Français	IC-302 (Manuals from EFI)	1.0	2006-06-19
bizhub PRO C5500	Guide d’utilisation	Français	FS-520 User Manual	1.1.1	2007-09-11
bizhub PRO C5500	Guide d’utilisation	Français	bizhub PRO C5500, User manual	1.1.1	2007-06-29
bizhub PRO C5501	Guide d’utilisation	Français	FS-520 User Manual	1.1.1	2007-09-11
bizhub PRO C5501	Guide d’utilisation	Français	bizhub PRO C5501	1-1-1	2008-08-06
bizhub PRO C6500	Guide d’utilisation	Français	FS-520 User Manual	1.1.1	2007-09-11
bizhub PRO C6500	Guide d’utilisation	Français	bizhub PRO C6500/bizhub PRO C6500e - User Manual	111	2006-10-04
bizhub PRO C6500	Guide d’utilisation	Français	bizhub PRO C6500/bizhub PRO C6500e, Phase 2.0 - User Manual	111	2006-10-04
bizhub PRO C6500	Guide d’utilisation	Français	bizhub PRO C6500/bizhub PRO C6500e - User Manual	211	2006-10-04
bizhub PRO C6500	Guide d’utilisation	Français	IC-408 (Manuals from EFI)	100	2006-11-16
bizhub PRO C6500P	Guide d’utilisation	Français	FS-520 User Manual	1.1.1	2007-09-11
bizhub PRO C6501	Guide d’utilisation	Français	FS-520 User Manual	1.1.1	2007-09-11
bizhub PRO C6501	Guide d’utilisation	Français	bizhub PRO C6501/C6501e	1-1-1	2008-06-23
bizhub PRO C6501e	Guide d’utilisation	Français	FS-520 User Manual	1.1.1	2007-09-11
bizhub PRO C6501e	Guide d’utilisation	Français	bizhub PRO C6501/C6501e	1-1-1	2008-06-23
bizhub PRO C6501P	Guide d’utilisation	Français	bizhub PRO C6501eP User`s Guide	1-1-1	2008-07-29
bizhub PRO C65hc	Guide d’utilisation	Français	FS-520 User Manual	1.1.1	2007-09-11
bizhub PRO C65hc	Guide d’utilisation	Français	bizhub PRO C65hc	1.1.1	2008-12-10
CF1501	Guide d’utilisation	Français	PageScope Light Fiery Z5/X3e for CF1501/CF2001	1.1.1	2001-09-12
CF1501	Guide d’utilisation	Français	CF1501/CF2001	Ver1.0.1	2001-05-28
CF2001	Guide d’utilisation	Français	PageScope Light Fiery Z5/X3e for CF1501/CF2001	1.1.1	2001-09-12
CF2001	Guide d’utilisation	Français	CF1501/CF2001	Ver1.0.1	2001-05-28
CF2001P	Guide d’utilisation	Français	CF2001P	1.0.1	2001-11-15
CF2001P	Guide d’utilisation	Français	PageScope Light for CF2001P	1.1.1	2001-09-12
CF2002	Guide d’utilisation	Français	CF2002/CF3102 Utilisation Experte	7.1.1	2003-06-13
CF2002	Guide d’utilisation	Français	Available Features	1.1.1	2002-11-18
CF2002	Guide d’utilisation	Français	CF2002/CF3102 User Manual	7.1.1	2003-06-13
CF2002P	Guide d’utilisation	Français	CF2002/3102 Printer	1.1.1	2003-02-18
CF3102	Guide d’utilisation	Français	CF2002/CF3102 Utilisation Experte	7.1.1	2003-06-13
CF3102	Guide d’utilisation	Français	Available Features	1.1.1	2002-11-18
CF3102	Guide d’utilisation	Français	CF2002/CF3102 User Manual	7.1.1	2003-06-13
CF3102P	Guide d’utilisation	Français	CF2002/3102 Printer	1.1.1	2003-02-18
CF5001	Guide d’utilisation	Français	CF5001 User Manual	1.1.1	2004-01-01
CF9001	Guide d’utilisation	Français	CF9001	VER 1.0.1	2001-05-10
CF9001	Guide d’utilisation	Français	CF9001	VER 1.1.1	2001-05-10
CF9001	Abrégé d'utilisation	Français	CF9001	VER 1.0.0	2001-05-10
CF910	Guide d’utilisation	Français	CF910	VER 1.1.1	2001-05-10
CF911P	Guide d’utilisation	Français	CF911P	VER 1.0.1	2001-05-10
CS520	Guide d’utilisation	Français	CN5001Pro	1.1.1	2003-12-12
CS520	Guide d’utilisation	Français	CN5001Pro	1.1.1	2003-12-12
CS520	Guide d’utilisation	Français	IP-921 - Documents from EFI	1.0.0	2004-06-08
CS520	Guide d’utilisation	Français	IP-921 - Release Notes	1.0.0	2004-04-22
CS550	Guide d’utilisation	Français	FS-520 User Manual	1.1.1	2007-09-11
CS655	Guide d’utilisation	Français	FS-520 User Manual	1.1.1	2007-09-11
CS665 Pro	Guide d’utilisation	Français	FS-520 User Manual	1.1.1	2007-09-11

Résultats recherche :  201 - 250 de 266 

Résultats recherche :  251 - 266 de 266

Produit	Sous-catégorie	Langue	Titre	Version	Date de sortie	Lien
IKON BusinessPro 550c	Guide d’utilisation	Français	FS-520 User Manual	1.1.1	2007-09-11
IKON BusinessPro 650	Guide d’utilisation	Français	FS-520 User Manual	1.1.1	2007-09-11
IKON BusinessPro 660c	Guide d’utilisation	Français	FS-520 User Manual	1.1.1	2007-09-11
IKON CPP550	Guide d’utilisation	Français	FS-520 User Manual	1.1.1	2007-09-11
IKON CPP560	Guide d’utilisation	Français	FS-520 User Manual	1.1.1	2007-09-11
IKON CPP650	Guide d’utilisation	Français	FS-520 User Manual	1.1.1	2007-09-11
ineo+ 5500	Guide d’utilisation	Français	FS-520 User Manual	1.1.1	2007-09-11
ineo+ 5501	Guide d’utilisation	Français	FS-520 User Manual	1.1.1	2007-09-11
ineo+ 6500	Guide d’utilisation	Français	FS-520 User Manual	1.1.1	2007-09-11
LD-5100	Guide d’utilisation	Français	CN5001Pro	1.1.1	2003-12-12
LD-5100	Guide d’utilisation	Français	CN5001Pro	1.1.1	2003-12-12
LD-5100	Guide d’utilisation	Français	IP-921 - Documents from EFI	1.0.0	2004-06-08
LD-5100	Guide d’utilisation	Français	IP-921 - Release Notes	1.0.0	2004-04-22
LD-5501	Guide d’utilisation	Français	FS-520 User Manual	1.1.1	2007-09-11
LD-6501	Guide d’utilisation	Français	FS-520 User Manual	1.1.1	2007-09-11
Linium PRO C5500	Guide d’utilisation	Français	FS-520 User Manual	1.1.1	2007-09-11

Résultats recherche :  251 - 266 de 266

Konica-Minolta-Documentation-2-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-Bizhub-40P-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-Bizhub-C450-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-Bizhub-C250-2-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-Bizhub-601-3-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-IC-408-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-362-282-222-Francais-Manuel

Konica-Minolta-Bizhub-601-2-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-Bizhub-D191F-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-Bizhub-Ineo-7000-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-C552-Francais-Manuel

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-C250-Francais-Manuel

Konica-Minolta-Ineo-951-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-Bizhub-Ineo-1052-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-Ineo-25-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-ineo-163-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-ineo-253-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-Bizhub-282-Francais-documentation-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-documentation-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-Di2510-Di3010-Di3510-Advanced-Information-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-C550-bizhub-C451-bizhub-C203-bizhub-C253-bizhub-C353-bizhub-C650-Advanced-Function-Operations-i-Option-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-Bizhub-C203-Advanced-Function-Operations-i-Option2-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-magicolor-3730DN-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-PageScope-Account-Manager-Ver.2.1-User-s-Guide-EFIGS-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-C554-C454-C364-C284-C224-User-Guides-part-1-2-French-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-162-210-copier-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-552-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-130f-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-PRO-PRESS-C6000-C7000_ug_Expert-Guide-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-magicolor-2400W-User-Documentation-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-User-Manual-bizhub-C252-Phase3-complete-set-Documentation-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-C200-Phase2-User-Manuals-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-C200-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-C10-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-163-211-User-Manual-Copier-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-1600f-User-Manual-Copier-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-131f-190f-User-Manual-Manuels

Konica-bizhub-131f-190f-Advanced-Information-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-190f-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-C253-Advanced-Function-Operations-i-Option-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-C253-Advanced-Function-Operations-i-Option2-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-C250-Francais-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-magicolor-1690MF-Manuel

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-362-282-222-Français-Manuel

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-C552-Français-Manuel

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-C250-Français-Manuel

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-C220-Anglais-English-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-36-Anglais-English-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-363-Anglais-English-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-363-Anglais-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-363-Pays-Bas-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-283-Russe-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-222-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-C552-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-C203-C253-C353-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-601-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-C452-bizhub-C552-bizhub-C652DS-bizhub-C652-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-C554-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-652-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-C224-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-C652DS-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub_c652-c652ds-c552-c452-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-Photocopieur-Multifonctions-Couleur-bizhub-C10P-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-Photocopieur-Multifonctions-Couleur-bizhub-C10-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-Photocopieur-Multifonctions-Couleur-7823-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-C20-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-C25-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-C250-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-magicolor-2490MF-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-magicolor-1600W-Manuel

Konica-Minolta-7823-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-magicolor-5670EN-Couleur-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-magicolor-5650EN-Couleur-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-7823-Couleur-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-magicolor-7450II-Couleur-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-magicolor-8650DN-Couleur-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-magicolor-7450-Couleur-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-magicolor-7300-Couleur-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-magicolor-4750EN-Couleur-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-magicolor-2490MF-Imprimante-Couleur-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-magicolor-4750DN-Couleur-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-magicolor-4690MF-Couleur-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-magicolor-4695MF-Couleur-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-magicolor-4650EN-Couleur-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-magicolor-4650DN-Couleur-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-magicolor-2500W-Couleur-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-magicolor-3730DN-Couleur-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-magicolor-5570-Couleur-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-magicolor-5550-Couleur-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-magicolor-5450-Couleur-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-magicolor-5440DL-Couleur-Manuels

• [Image]: Select this check box to display images. • [Animation]: Select this check box to display animation GIF. • [Table]: Select this check box to recognize the table in HTML and adjust the layout. • [JavaScript]: Select this check box to enable JavaScript in contents. • [CSS]: Select this check box to enable CSS in contents. • [Ward Wrap]: Select this check box to enable the word wrap in contents. • [Line Boundary Char. Check]: Select this check box to enable the line boundary character check in contents. • [Rapid-Render]: Select this check box to enable the Rapid-Render function. • [Pop-Up Window]: Select this check box to allow displaying the pop-up window. • [Offline Permission]: Select this check box to allow the use of the contents off-line. • [Auto Flash Playback]: Select this check box to automatically play a Flash content. • [Enable Offline Display]: Select this check box to enable viewing of the contents off-line. Displayed when [Offline Permission] is allowed by the administrator. [Color Selection Setting] Select a color for the selected item ([Green], [Blue], [Yellow], or [Orange]).bizhub 423/363/283/223 4-17 4.6 Configuring the Web Browser settings 4 4.6.3 [Manage windows] In the [Manage windows] tab, operate the window. Up to five windows can be opened. 4.6.4 [Settings] The [Settings] tab allows you to check and reset the Web browser information. The administrator of the MFP can configure the operating environment and security settings of the Web browser. Reference - Items with * are displayed only for the administrator menu. - The following settings are available for users using the Web browser by linking to My Panel. – [Startup Settings] – Setting for deleting [Cookies] – Setting for deleting [Authentication Information] - My Panel can hold up to 20 items of cookies and authentication information for each user. Item Description [Create new window] Displays the contents of the URL registered as the home page with a new window. [Open in new window] Displays the link destination page with a new window. [Close active window] Closes the active window. [Close other windows] Closes all windows. This is not selectable when only one window is open. Item Description [Startup Settings] * Specify whether to display the page registered as the home page or the last page being displayed when you exited Web Browser previously, at the startup of Web Browser. [Security] * Configure SSL or TLS setting, or display a root certificate or CA certificate. [Cookies] * Configure settings to receive and delete cookies. This menu is also used to delete all cookies saved in the MFP. [Cache] * Configure settings to use and delete caches. This menu is also used to delete all caches saved in the MFP. [Proxy] * Configure the settings for use of proxy. To use the proxy, register the address and port for the proxy server. If proxy authentication is required, register the ID and password for use in proxy authentication. [Authentication Information] * Specify the timing to delete the authentication information you have entered in the contents. This menu is also used to delete all authentication information saved in the MFP. [Access Log] * Check for access history of all users. You can check the [ID], [User Name], [URL] and [Access]. [Web Browser Information] Displays Web Browser information. [Reset] Restart the Web browser.bizhub 423/363/283/223 4-18 4.7 Printing, displaying, or saving a document file 4 4.7 Printing, displaying, or saving a document file If a link to a document file is provided in the displayed contents, you can print, display, or save the document file. - The PDF and XPS formats are supported for the document files. - You cannot display an XPS file. Press the link to the document file in the contents to display the top screen of the document file. 4.7.1 Printing a document file Press [Print] to display the Print screen. Configure the print settings, and then press [Start] or the Start key on the control panel. The document file is downloaded and printed. Reference - If you attempt to print a document file that takes up a large amount of memory, a scan error may occur and printing will be disabled. - If the downloaded PDF is encrypted, it is saved in the Encryption PDF User Box without being printed. - The setting value of [Finishing] varies depending on which options are installed. – The Staple settings are available only if the optional finisher is installed. – The Punch settings are available only if the punch kit is installed on the optional finisher. Item Description [Paper] Select the size of paper for printing. [Simplex/Duplex] Select whether to print in 2-sided mode. [Stamp Settings] Press this button to specify whether to print a [Date/Time] and [Page Number]. [Finishing] Configure settings for collating, grouping, offsetting. stapling, hole punching, folding, or binding.bizhub 423/363/283/223 4-19 4.7 Printing, displaying, or saving a document file 4 – The Fold and Center Staple & Fold functions can be used when a saddle stitcher is installed on the optional finisher. 4.7.2 Displaying a document file Press [View] to display the link destination PDF file. The toolbar on the top of the screen allows you to enlarge, reduce, print, or save the PDF file. Key Description Brings you back to the top page. Brings you back to the previous page. Brings you to the next page. Brings you to the last page. Rotates the display 90 degrees clockwise. Increases the zoom ratio. Reduces the zoom ratio. Displays according to the width of the display area. Displays the entire page. Select the User Box to save the document file. Configure the print settings, and print the document file. Displays the splash window (displayed momentarily when the software activates). Closes the screen.bizhub 423/363/283/223 4-20 4.7 Printing, displaying, or saving a document file 4 4.7.3 Saving a document file Press [Save]. The User Box selection screen is displayed. Select the User Box to save the file, press [OK], and then [Start] or Start. Then the document file is saved in the User Box. Reference - To save a document file to a User Box, you must register the User Box in the MFP in advance. For details, refer to the [User's Guide Box Operations]. - When printing a document file (full color) that was saved in a User Box from the Web browser, you cannot specify [Zoom] or [Combine].bizhub 423/363/283/223 4-21 4.8 Uploading a document file 4 4.8 Uploading a document file If document files are shared on the server, you can upload a scanned document file or a document file in a User Box to the server using a Web Browser. This section explains how to upload a document file, using the following upload site as an example. Example 4.8.1 Restrictions Note that there are following restrictions to use this function. - PDF, TIFF, or XPS is the type of a document file that can be uploaded. A document cannot be divided to upload. - Multiple document files cannot be uploaded at the same time. - The user cannot manually edit the file name text box. - If you perform one of the following operations after selecting a document file to be uploaded, the job is deleted together with the selected document file. – The System Auto Reset function has been started. – The Web browser has been closed. – The upload site has been updated by operating the toolbar of the Web browser. – The Web browser has been restarted. – The user has logged out during login processing. – The sub power switch has been turned off. – Reset has been pressed to reset the panel. 4.8.2 Uploading a scanned document file The following explains the procedure to upload a scanned document file. Reference - This procedure is not available for users who are disabled from scanning data. - The file format cannot be set to JPEG when scanning an original to be uploaded. 1 Display the upload site using the Web browser of the MFP. 2 Press the button to select a document file to be uploaded. % In this example, press [Browse]. Item Description [Browse...] Press this button to select a document file to be uploaded. "type" is set to "file" in the Input tag of HTML. [OK] Press this button to upload a document file. "type" is set to "submit" in the Input tag of HTML.bizhub 423/363/283/223 4-22 4.8 Uploading a document file 4 3 Press [Scan]. 4 Place the original to be uploaded on the MFP. 5 Configure the scan settings, and press [Start] or the Start key. % If Proof Copy is selected, you can check finishing. After scanning is completed, the file name is displayed in the text box. 6 Press the button to start uploading. % In this example, press [OK]. Uploading of a document file then starts. 4.8.3 Uploading a document file in a User Box The following explains the procedure to upload a document file retrieved from a User Box. Reference - This procedure is not available for users who are disabled from accessing the saved documents. - Before uploading a document file in a User Box, create a User Box to save the document file in. - Only the Public User Box and Personal User Box can be selected. - The file format cannot be set to JPEG when selecting a document file to be uploaded from a User Box. When selecting a JPEG document file saved in a User Box, the file format is changed to PDF. If necessary, specify the appropriate file format before uploading a document file. - When uploading a document file saved in a User Box while Page Separation is enabled, Page Separation is canceled and changed to Multi Page. 1 Display the upload site using the Web browser of the MFP.bizhub 423/363/283/223 4-23 4.8 Uploading a document file 4 2 Press the button to select a document file to be uploaded. % In this example, press [Browse]. 3 Press the [User Box] key. 4 Select a desired User Box, and press [Use Document]. 5 Select a document file to be uploaded, and press [File Settings]. % Select multiple document files and press [Combine]; they can be combined as one file. The combination order can be changed as required. % Select a document file and press [Document Details] to check the date and time the document file was saved and to preview the image. 6 Configure the file setting, and press [Start] or the Start key. % Press [Application] to configure the stamp or page number print setting. The file name appears in the text box. 7 Press the button to start uploading. % In this example, press [OK]. Uploading of a document file then starts.5 PageScope Web Connection (Web Browser Function)bizhub 423/363/283/223 5-2 5.1 Using PageScope Web Connection 5 5 PageScope Web Connection (Web Browser Function) 5.1 Using PageScope Web Connection PageScope Web Connection is a device management utility that is supported by the HTTP server built in this machine. To use this utility, directly access the MFP connected to the network using Web Browser. To use this utility using Web Browser installed in the MFP, only the User Box function is available. This chapter describes how to use documents in the User Box of the MFP on the network by operating PageScope Web Connection using the Web Browser installed in the MFP. Reference - This function can be used on the MFP with i-Option LK-101 v2 or i-Option LK-103 v2 registered. - i-Option LK-101 v2 or i-Option LK-103 v2 must be registered also in the MFP access destination. - For details on using the Web Browser installed in the MFP, refer to page 4-2. - To operate PageScope Web Connection from a Web browser of your computer, you can use various functions such as the status check, setting change, and network setting functions of the MFP. For details, refer to the [User's Guide Network Administrator]. 5.1.1 Prior check The most recent information may not appear in PageScope Web Connection screens because older versions of pages are saved in the cache for the Web browser. In addition, problems may occur when the cache is used. When using PageScope Web Connection, disable the cache for the Web browser. Reference - Changing the cache settings requires the administrator authority. 1 Press [Menu] on the toolbar of the Web browser. 2 Press [Administrator]. 3 Enter the administrator password, and then press [OK]. 4 Press the [Settings] tab, and then select [Cache]. 5 Clear the [Use cache] check box, and then press [OK]. 5.1.2 How to access Start the Web browser, and then specify the IP address of the MFP to be accessed. 1 Press [Address] on the toolbar of the Web browser. 2 Press the entry form to display the keyboard screen. 3 Enter the IP address of the MFP to be accessed, and then press [OK]. 4 Press [OK] or [Open New Window]. The PageScope Web Connection screen appears. Reference - If you have specified to not receive cookies for Web browser settings, PageScope Web Connection screen does not appear. For details on configuring cookie settings, refer to page 4-17. - If you display the screen for entering the address, you see the URL of the page being displayed. To delete the URL currently shown, display the keyboard screen and press [Delete]. Press C (clear) in the Control Panel to delete all URL entries.bizhub 423/363/283/223 5-3 5.2 Screen components 5 5.2 Screen components The PageScope Web Connection screen is constructed as shown below. No. Name Description 1 KONICA MINOLTA logo Press the logo to go to the KONICA MINOLTA Web site (http://www.konicaminolta.com/). 2 PageScope Web Connection logo Press the logo to display the version information for PageScope Web Connection. 3 Login user name Displays the icon of the current mode and the name of the user who is logged on (public, registered user, or account). 4 [Logout] Press this button to log out from the current mode. 5 Contents display Displays the contents of PageScope Web Connection. 3 4 5 1 2bizhub 423/363/283/223 5-4 5.3 Logging in and logging out 5 5.3 Logging in and logging out If you have specified to perform User Authentication or Account Track on the MFP, the login screen appears after displaying PageScope Web Connection. Reference - If you have not specified to perform User Authentication or Account Track, the screen displayed when you logged in as a public user appears. - To use PageScope Web Connection using the Web Browser installed in the MFP, its administrator mode is not available. 5.3.1 Login Select whether to log in as a public user or registered user. If External Server Authentication is selected, select an external authentication server. Enter the required information, and press [Login]. Select a display language if necessary. Reference - The User Boxes that can be accessed vary depending on the logged in user or account track. 5.3.2 Logout Press [Logout] on the upper right of the screen to display a logout confirmation screen. Press [OK]. The login screen appears again.bizhub 423/363/283/223 5-5 5.4 Using the User Box function 5 5.4 Using the User Box function To use PageScope Web Connection using the Web Browser installed in the MFP, the following operations are available as the User Box function. - Operating documents in the User Box on the MFP being used or a different MFP connected to the network. - Using the Public, Personal, and Group User Boxes as User Box Types. - Displaying, printing, and deleting a document in the User Box. 5.4.1 Open User Box Logging in using PageScope Web Connection displays the list of User Boxes (Public, Personal, and Group User Boxes) registered in the accessed MFP. [Open User Box] Select a desired User Box name ([User Box Name]) at User Box List. Alternatively, directly enter a User Box number ([User Box Number]) and User Box password ([User Box Password]), and then press [OK]. Reference - When you select a User Box name ([User Box Name]) with a password specified in [User Box List], a screen for entering the password appears. [Open User Box] [User Box List] Item Description [User Box Number] Enter the User Box number to be opened. [User Box Password] If a password is set to the target User Box, enter the password. Item Description [Search from Index] Switch the index display according to the indexes selected when creating a User Box. [Page (Display by 50 cases)] When this machine contains 50 or more User Boxes, specify the desired page to change the display. User Box List Displays the [User Box Number], [User Box Name], [Type] and [Time Stored]. A key icon appears beside User Boxes where a password has been specified.bizhub 423/363/283/223 5-6 5.4 Using the User Box function 5 [File List] Select a User Box in [Open User Box]. The basic information of the User Box is displayed with a list of the documents saved in the User Box. Item Description [Thumbnail View] Specify whether to view the thumbnail images of the document. Set to [OFF] for list display. [Specify operation] Select an operation. For details, refer to page 5-7. [Changes the display] Press this button to display the [Select] check box beside all documents with which the selected operation can be performed. [Select] Displays a check box beside all documents with which the selected operation can be performed. [Thumbnail] Displays thumbnail images of the document. [Document Name] Displays the name of the document. [Number of Originals] Displays the number of originals in a document. [Edit Name] Press this button to change the document name.bizhub 423/363/283/223 5-7 5.4 Using the User Box function 5 5.4.2 Document operations A selected document can be printed or deleted. Printing a document 1 Select [Print] from [Specify operation], and then press [Changes the display]. A check box appears beside all printable documents. 2 Select the check box for the document to be printed, and then press [Print Setting].bizhub 423/363/283/223 5-8 5.4 Using the User Box function 5 3 Configure necessary settings, and then press [OK]. % In [Page Range], select whether to print all pages of the selected document or to print by specifying a page range. % In [Change order], you can change the print order when printing multiple documents. 4 Press [Open File]. 5 Press [Print]. % If [View] is pressed, a PDF file appears. To print the displayed PDF file, press . 6 Configure print settings, and then press [Start] or the Start key on the control panel. Reference - If the [Function Version] of the destination MFP is not [Version 3], press [Open File] in Step 4 to display the PDF file on the panel. To print the displayed PDF file, press . To check the function version of the MFP, select [Device Information] in [Utility].bizhub 423/363/283/223 5-9 5.4 Using the User Box function 5 Deleting a document 1 Select [Delete] from [Specify operation], and then press [Changes the display]. A check box appears beside the documents that can be deleted. 2 Select the check box for the document to be deleted, and then press [Delete]. % Select the [Check/Uncheck (applied to all the documents)] check box to select all documents.bizhub 423/363/283/223 5-10 5.4 Using the User Box function 5 3 Check the document name to be deleted, and then press [OK]. The document is deleted.6 Image Panelbizhub 423/363/283/223 6-2 6.1 Overview 6 6 Image Panel 6.1 Overview Image Panel is a new intuitive and easy-to-understand panel interface. Reference - This function can be used on the MFP with i-Option LK-101 v2 or i-Option LK-103 v2 registered. - If [User Authentication/ Account Track] ö [Scan to Authorized Folder Settings] is set to [Limit] in [Administrator Settings], Image Panel cannot be used. Features Image Panel divides the operation workflow into three processes, "reading a document", "editing a document", and "specifying a destination", which can be operated on one screen. This allows you to easily understand the entire operation workflow and operation in progress. Image Panel focuses on operability. Therefore, the functions available in Image Panel are limited compared with the conventional panel. When the My Panel and My Address function are available, you can customize the Image Panel screen as a user-specific screen. d Reference For details on the My Panel function, refer to page 9-2. For details on the My Address function, refer to page 10-2.bizhub 423/363/283/223 6-3 6.2 Displaying the Image Panel 6 6.2 Displaying the Image Panel In [Application Menu], press [Image Panel] to display the Image Panel top screen. d Reference For details on the [Application Menu], refer to page 3-3.bizhub 423/363/283/223 6-4 6.3 Operating Image Panel 6 6.3 Operating Image Panel 6.3.1 Screen components The Image Panel screen consists of the following. No. Name Description 1 Login Information area Displays the user name and icon of the user who is currently logged in. 2 Read Data area Scan a document, retrieve a document from a User Box or external memory, and send data from a cellular phone or PDA. 3 Desktop area Documents read in the Read Data area are displayed in a thumbnail view or list view. 4 List Display/Thumbnail View switching Switches the desktop area display between the list display and thumbnail view. 5 Message area Displays an auxiliary message such as operating instructions. 6 Status area Displays the date and current time. If an alert occurs, an alert icon appears. 7 Edit tool area Edit the page, combine and change settings of the document after it is scanned. 8 Send Tray/Edit Tool display switching Switches the display between the send tray and edit tool display. For details on the send tray, refer to page 6-16. 9 Document Destination area Specify a destination of the read document from [Print] or [Destination List]. 1 3 4 5 6 9 8 7 2bizhub 423/363/283/223 6-5 6.3 Operating Image Panel 6 6.3.2 General operation The following describes the operation flow from document reading processing to sending processing by showing operations of Image Panel in order of "reading a document", "editing a document", and "specifying a destination". Reference - You can specify a destination first, and then read a document. In the Read Data area, read or retrieve a document. • To scan a document, place the document, and then press [Scan]. Configure the scan settings as needed, and then start to read the document. For details, refer to page 6-7. • To use a document saved in a User Box, select the User Box from [Document Source List], and select the document you want to retrieve. For details, refer to page 6-8. • To use a document saved in an external memory, select [External Memory] from [Document Source List], and select the document you want to retrieve. For details, refer to page 6-9. • To use data saved in a cellular phone or PDA, select [Mobile] from [Document Source List]. For details, refer to page 6-10. Select [Scan] Select [Document Source List]. In the Edit Tool area, edit the read document. For details, refer to page 6-11. In the Document Destination area, specify a destination of the read document. • To print, press [Print]. For details, refer to page 6-14. • To send the document, select a destination from [Destination List]. For details, refer to page 6-15. • To save data in an external memory, press [External Memory] in the Destination List screen. For details, refer to page 6-15. Select [Print]. Select [Destination List]bizhub 423/363/283/223 6-6 6.3 Operating Image Panel 6 If you specify an address, the send tray appears. For details, refer to page 6-16. Press Start to send the document. • To send data from a cellular phone or PDA, press Start to display a PIN code. Enter the PIN code in the cellular phone or PDA to send data to the MFP. Data is sent to the specified destination. For details, refer to page 6-17.bizhub 423/363/283/223 6-7 6.3 Operating Image Panel 6 6.3.3 Reading a document Scan a document, retrieve a document from a User Box or external memory, and send data from a cellular phone or PDA. Scanning a document Press [Scan] to display the Scan Settings screen. Configure the scan settings as needed, and then press [Scan]. Reference - Only one document can be scanned. Item Description [Original Type] Select the image quality from [Text], [Text/Photo], [Photo], [Dot Matrix Original] and [Copied Paper] according to the contents of the original to be scanned. [Simplex/Duplex] Select either to scan a 1-sided original or 2-sided original. [Resolution] Select the scan resolution from [200 e 100dpi (Standard)], [200 e 200dpi (Fine)], [300 e 300dpi], [400 e 400dpi (Super Fine)] and [600 e 600dpi (Ultra Fine)]. [File Type] Select a file type from [PDF], [Compact PDF], [TIFF], [JPEG], [XPS] and [Compact XPS]. Select whether to save the whole scanned pages as one file, or to divide a file in specified number of pages in order to save data. You cannot select [Multi Page] if [JPEG] is selected for file type. To send divided files by attaching them to an E-mail, specify [E-mail Attachment Method]. Select [All Files Sent as one (1) E-mail] to attach all divided files to one E-mail message. Select [One (1) File per E-Mail] to send E-mail messages for each divided file. Selecting [Compact PDF] for file type allows you to specify [Outline PDF]. If either i-Option LK-102 or i-Option LK-103 v2 is registered in the MFP, selecting [PDF] or [Compact PDF] for file type allows you to specify [Encryption] and [PDF Document Properties]. For details on the function, refer to page 7-2. If i-Option LK-105 is registered in the MFP, selecting [PDF] or [Compact PDF] for the file type allows you to specify [Searchable PDF]. For details on the function, refer to page 8-2. [Density] Adjust the density for scanning. [Color] Select the scan color from [Auto Color], [Full Color], [Gray Scale] and [Black]. [Document Name] Specify the document name. [Separate Scan] Press this button to divide scanning of the document into several times. It is useful for the following cases. • When the number of pages of a document is too many, and it cannot be loaded into the ADF • When placing the originals on the original glass • When 1-sided originals and 2-sided originals are mixedbizhub 423/363/283/223 6-8 6.3 Operating Image Panel 6 Retrieving from User Box Select a User Box from [Document Source List] to display the Use Document screen. Select a document to be retrieved, and then press [OK]. Reference - If a password has been specified for the selected User Box, the password input screen appears. Enter the password. - Only one User Box can be selected. - Up to 10 documents can be retrieved from a User Box at one time. - If a User Box is specified as a destination, you cannot retrieve more than one document. - You cannot specify the User Box, from which you retrieved the document, as the destination. Item Description [Edit Name] Press this button to change the name of the selected document. [Document Details] Press this button to check the detailed information or preview image of the selected document.bizhub 423/363/283/223 6-9 6.3 Operating Image Panel 6 Retrieving a document from an external memory Select [External Memory] from [Document Source List] to display the list of documents saved in the external memory. Select a document to be retrieved, and then press [OK]. Reference - To retrieve a document from an external memory, you must configure the following settings in the MFP depending on the purpose of the document to be used. – To print a retrieved document, in [Administrator Settings]ö[System Settings]ö[User Box Settings]ö[External Memory Function Settings], set [Print Document] to [ON]. To additionally perform user authentication, in [Administrator Settings]ö[User Authentication/ Account Track]ö[User Authentication Settings]ö[User Registration], set [Function Permission]ö[Print] to [Allow] for each user. – To save a retrieved document in a User Box, in [Administrator Settings]ö[System Settings]ö[User Box Settings]ö[External Memory Function Settings], set [External Memory Document Scan] to [ON]. To additionally perform user authentication, in [Administrator Settings]ö[User Authentication/ Account Track]ö[User Authentication Settings]ö[User Registration], set [Function Permission]ö[External Memory Document Scan] to [Allow] for each user. - The available file formats are PDF, TIFF, JPEG, and XPS. - Up to 200 documents can be retrieved from an external memory. - To open a folder, select the one you want to open, and then press [Open]. - You cannot specify a JPEG document together with any other format at the same time. - If a document has been retrieved from an external memory, you cannot read the document using [Scan] or [Document Source List]. - You can only specify either [Print] or a User Box as a destination of a document retrieved from an external memory. Also, you can specify only one User Box as a destination. To save a document in a User Box, you must create a User Box and register the User Box in the address book in advance. - If other than User Box is specified as a destination, you cannot select [External Memory].bizhub 423/363/283/223 6-10 6.3 Operating Image Panel 6 Using data saved in a cellular phone or PDA Select [Mobile] from [Document Source List]. Selecting [Mobile/PDA] and pressing [OK] displays the cellular phone icon on the desktop area. Reference - To connect the MFP to a cellular phone or PDA, install the optional Local Interface Kit EK-605 in the MFP. Additionally, configure the following settings in the MFP. – Set [Administrator Settings]ö[Network Settings]ö[Bluetooth Setting] to [Enable]. Also, set [Administrator Settings]ö[System Connection]ö[Cellular Phone/PDA Setting] to [Allow]. – To perform user authentication, in [Administrator Settings]ö[User Authentication/ Account Track]ö[User Authentication Settings]ö[User Registration], set [Function Permission]ö[Cellular Phone/PDA] to [Allow] for each user. - If [Mobile/PDA] is selected, you cannot read a document using [Scan] or [Document Source List]. - You can only specify either [Print] or a User Box as a destination for sending data from a cellular phone or PDA. Also, you can specify only one User Box as a destination. To save a document in a User Box, you must create a User Box and register the User Box in the address book in advance. - If other than [Print] or a User Box is specified as a destination, you cannot select [Mobile]. - This machine supports RepliGo version 2.1.0.8. - To print an XHTML file, since a linked file is retrieved using the WebDAV client function, you must configure the following settings in the MFP in advance. – Set [Administrator Settings]ö[Network Settings]ö[WebDAV Settings]ö[WebDAV Client Settings] to [ON]. – To connect via a proxy, register a proxy server in [Proxy Server Address] of [WebDAV Client Settings]. Additionally, set [User Settings]ö[Cellular Phone/PDA Setting]ö[Proxy Server Use] to [Yes]. – In [User Settings]ö[Cellular Phone/PDA Setting]ö[Link File Error Notification], specify the operation for the machine to execute when it is unable to retrieve the linked file. d Reference For details on how to send data from a cellular phone or PDA, refer to page 6-17. The function to connect the MFP to a cellular phone or PDA is available even if the license kit is not registered. For details, refer to the [User's Guide Box Operations] and [User's Guide Print Operations]. Item Specifications Communication protocol Bluetooth Ver. 2.0 + EDR Supporting profile OPP/BPP/SPP Supporting file type PDF/CPDF/XPS/CXPS/TIFF/JPEG/XHTML/RepliGo Supporting XHTML file Character code: UTF-8, Shift-JIS, ISO-8859 Extension of link file: JPEG, JPG, PNGbizhub 423/363/283/223 6-11 6.3 Operating Image Panel 6 6.3.4 Editing the document Edit the read document. Reference - When using data saved in a cellular phone or PDA, you cannot check the preview image or edit the data. [Preview] Press this button to check the detailed information or preview image of the selected document. Reference - For a document retrieved from an external memory, the [Preview] function is not available. - For a combined document, the preview function is available only for the first document. [Document/Page] - [Edit Document] Edit the pages of a selected document. You can rotate the page that has been scanned in the wrong direction, or delete an unnecessary page. For a document consisting of multiple pages, you can move pages to change the page order. Also, you can preview the pages to check the page content. Reference - If you have selected multiple documents, the edit page function is not available. - If you have selected a combined document, the edit page function is not available. Item Description [Odd Page] Press this button to select the odd page. [Even Page] Press this button to select the even page. [Preview /Set Range] Press this button to preview the page. [Delete Page] Press this button to delete the selected page.bizhub 423/363/283/223 6-12 6.3 Operating Image Panel 6 [Document/Page] - [Combine Documents] Combine selected multiple documents. You can use [Move] to change the combination order. Reference - You can only select either [Print] or [Destination List] as a destination of a combined document. - Up to 10 documents can be combined at one time. - You cannot combine a scanned document with a document retrieved from a User Box. [Rotate Page] Press this button to rotate the selected page. The allowable rotation angles are left 90 degrees, right 90 degrees, and 180 degrees. [Move Page] Press this button to change the order by moving the selected page. While checking the thumbnail images, you can select the moving position. Item Descriptionbizhub 423/363/283/223 6-13 6.3 Operating Image Panel 6 [Document/Page] - [Document Settings] Configure settings for sending the selected document. You can change the resolution of the document, file type, and color setting. Reference - If you have selected multiple documents, the document setting function is not available. - If you have selected a document retrieved from an external memory, the document setting function is not available. [Return to Scan Dest.] Press [Return to Scan Dest.] to restore the selected document to the source location. - The scanned document is deleted from the MFP. - The document retrieved from a User Box is restored to the source User Box. Item Description [Resolution] Select the scan resolution from [Settings when saving], [200 e 100dpi (Standard)], [200 e 200dpi (Fine)], [300 e 300dpi], [400 e 400dpi (Super Fine)] and [600 e 600dpi (Ultra Fine)]. [File Type] Select the file format for sending data from [PDF], [Compact PDF], [TIFF], [JPEG], [XPS] and [Compact XPS]. Select whether to save the whole scanned pages as one file, or to divide a file in specified number of pages in order to save data. You cannot select [Multi Page] if [JPEG] is selected for file type. To send divided files by attaching them to an E-mail, specify [E-mail Attachment Method]. Select [All Files Sent as one (1) E-mail] to attach all divided files to one E-mail message. Select [One (1) File per E-Mail] to send E-mail messages for each divided file. Selecting [Compact PDF] for file type allows you to specify [Outline PDF]. If either i-Option LK-102 or i-Option LK-103 v2 is registered in the MFP, selecting [PDF] or [Compact PDF] for file type allows you to specify [Encryption] and [PDF Document Properties]. For details on the function, refer to page 7-2. If i-Option LK-105 is registered in the MFP, selecting [PDF] or [Compact PDF] for the file type allows you to specify [Searchable PDF]. For details on the function, refer to page 8-2. [Color] Select the scan color for sending data from [Use Existing Color Setting], [Full Color], [Gray Scale] and [Black].bizhub 423/363/283/223 6-14 6.3 Operating Image Panel 6 6.3.5 Specifying a destination Specify a destination of the read document. Printing Press [Print] to print data directly from the MFP. Configure the print settings, and then press [OK]. Reference - If you have scanned multiple documents, the print setting function will not be available. - When you print a combined document, [Combine] and [Zoom] are not available. - When printing a document with an embedded password using the password copy function, you cannot specify [Combine] or [Zoom]. For details on the password copy function, refer to the [User's Guide Copy Operations]. - When you print a document that has been retrieved from an external memory, [Combine] and [Zoom] are not available. - When you print a document of JPEG, XPS, or Compact XPS format that has been retrieved from an external memory, [2-Sided] is not available. Also, Staple and Punch are not available for the [Finishing] setting. - When printing data saved in a cellular phone or PDA, you can only check the print settings. To change print settings, select [User Settings]ö[Cellular Phone/PDA Setting]ö[Print]. Reference - The setting value of [Finishing] varies depending on which option is installed. – The Staple settings are available only if the optional finisher is installed. – The Punch settings are available only if the punch kit is installed on the optional finisher. - [Continuous Print] is displayed when multiple documents are combined using the editing tool, and then [Print] is selected as a destination. Item Description [Copies:] Specify the number of copies to be printed using the Keypad. [Print] Select whether to print in 2-sided mode. [Finishing] Press this button to configure settings for collating, grouping, stapling, or hole punching. [Combine] Press this button to specify whether to combine pages. Multiple pages of a document can be combined and printed on a single page. [Zoom] Press this button to specify a zoom ratio for the document. [Continuous Print] This function is available when printing combined documents in the 2-sided print mode. Multiple document are printed continuously when they are combined. When printing in 2-Sided mode, and the document ends on the front side of a sheet of paper, select whether to start printing of the next document on the back side of the sheet or on the front side of a new sheet.bizhub 423/363/283/223 6-15 6.3 Operating Image Panel 6 Specifying destinations From [Destination List], select an address to which you want to send a document. Press the [Search] tab to reference one-touch destinations registered in the main unit. Press the [Group] tab to reference the group list registered in the main unit. Reference - If you have read multiple documents, the User Box function will not be available. - If My address function is available, pressing [My Address] allows you to view My Address Book. For details on the My Address function, refer to page 10-2. - If you have specified an address, you can check the send tray by pressing [Verify Address Tray/ Remote Address Setting]. - E-mail addresses for which a certificate is registered are displayed with a key icon. - You can only specify User Boxes as an address book destination of a document retrieved from an external memory or a document saved in a cellular phone or PDA. Saving a document in an external memory Select [External Memory] from [Destination List], and press [OK]. Reference - To save data in an external memory, in [Administrator Settings]ö[System Settings]ö[User Box Settings]ö[External Memory Function Settings], set [Save Document] to [ON]. To additionally perform user authentication, in [Administrator Settings]ö[User Authentication/ Account Track]ö[User Authentication Settings]ö[User Registration], set [Function Permission]ö[Save to External Memory] to [Allow] for each user. - If [Print] or a destination is specified as a destination, you cannot select [External Memory].bizhub 423/363/283/223 6-16 6.3 Operating Image Panel 6 6.3.6 Checking the send tray Send Tray If you specify an address, the send tray appears. The send tray displays the icon for the destination you have specified. [Check TX Tray] Press the icon of the send tray to display the Check Send To screen, where you can check the list of specified destinations. If an E-mail address is specified as a destination, you can specify settings for the E-mail encryption and digital signature attachment. No. Name Description 1 Dest. Settings icon Press the Dest. Settings icon to display the Check Send To screen, where you can check the list of specified destinations. 2 Destination icon Displays the icons for destinations. Press the icon for the desired destination to display the Check Send To screen, where you can check the detail information of the destination. 1 2 Item Description [Remote Address Settings] Press this button to configure settings for E-mail encryption based on S/MIME and digital signature attachment. This setting is available when [ON] is selected for [S/MIME Communication Settings] of [Administrator Settings], and E-mail is selected. [Detail] Press this button to check the detailed information of the address.bizhub 423/363/283/223 6-17 6.3 Operating Image Panel 6 Reference - To encrypt an E-mail message and attach a digital signature using S/MIME, set [Administrator Settings]ö[Network Settings]ö[E-Mail Settings]ö[S/MIME Communication Settings] to [ON]. - To encrypt an E-mail, a certificate must be registered in the E-mail address. - To attach a digital signature to an E-mail message, the device certificate must be registered in the MFP. Also, set [Administrator Settings]ö[Network Settings]ö[E-Mail Settings]ö[S/MIME Communication Settings]ö[Digital Signature] to [Always add signature] or [Select when sending]. For details, refer to the [User's Guide Network Administrator]. 6.3.7 Sending data from a cellular phone or PDA Selecting a destination and pressing Start displays the PIN code on the Control Panel. Specify the data you want to use and the MFP to send data in the cellular phone or PDA. Then enter the PIN code to send data to the MFP. Reference - You can only specify either [Print] or a User Box as a destination for sending data from a cellular phone or PDA. Also, you can specify only one User Box as a destination. To save a document in a User Box, you must create a User Box and register the User Box in the address book in advance. – For details on how to create a User Box, refer to the [User's Guide Box Operations]. – For details on how to register a destination to the address book, refer to the [User's Guide Network Scan/Fax/Network Fax Operations]. - For the operation of a cellular phone or PDA, refer to the operation manual of the cellular phone or PDA. - The communication speed may be reduced or communication may be interrupted by obstacles, signal quality, magnetic field or static electricity. - Documents and image data may not be sent correctly depending on the security setting of the cellular phone or PDA. [Delete] Press this button to delete the selected address. Item Descriptionbizhub 423/363/283/223 6-18 6.4 Registering a photo in the address book 6 6.4 Registering a photo in the address book From the Web browser on your computer, you can use PageScope Web Connection to add photo data to registered one-touch destinations. The registered photo data is applied to the [Destination List] of Image Panel. d Reference For details on PageScope Web Connection, refer to the [User's Guide Network Administrator]. 6.4.1 Specifications of photo data The specifications for registerable photo data are as shown below. Reference - Photo data is not enlarged or reduced during photo data registration process. Item Specifications File Type BMP format, 24-bit color, uncompressed Image size 48 e 48 pixels Data size 6,966 bytesbizhub 423/363/283/223 6-19 6.4 Registering a photo in the address book 6 6.4.2 Registering photo data Register photo data by operating PageScope Web Connection from the Web browser on your computer. Reference - To add photo data to the address book, you must register one-touch destinations in advance. - When the My Address function is available, you can add photo data to one-touch destinations in My Address Book. - Photo data can be registered in My Address Book only when you log in as a registered user. 1 Log in to the user mode or administrator mode. 2 Select [Store Address]. 3 Select [Photo/Icon]. 4 Select the one-touch destination to which you want to add photo data, and then click [Edit]. % When the photo data is registered, [Photo/Icon] is displayed in [Photo].bizhub 423/363/283/223 6-20 6.4 Registering a photo in the address book 6 5 Select [Register Photo]. 6 Click [Browse], and then specify the folder where the photo data you want to add is saved. 7 Press [OK]. The photo data is added to the one-touch destination.bizhub 423/363/283/223 6-21 6.5 Customizing Image Panel 6 6.5 Customizing Image Panel When the My Panel and My Address function are available, you can customize the Image Panel screen as a user-specific screen. To customize the Image Panel screen, the following conditions are required. - The My Panel and My Address functions are available on the MFP. - Perform user authentication, and then log in as a registered user. d Reference For details on the My Panel function, refer to page 9-2. For details on the My Address function, refer to page 10-2. 6.5.1 Customizing the Read Data area Shortcut icons for frequently used User Boxes can be registered in the Read Data area. 1 In [Data Source], press [Document Source List]. 2 Press [Customize Basic Screen]. 3 Select the User Box you want to register in the basic screen, and select the location in the Read Data area. % If you have selected a location that is already registered in the basic screen, the data is overwritten. % You cannot register a User Box that is already registered in the basic screen to another location in the basic screen.bizhub 423/363/283/223 6-22 6.5 Customizing Image Panel 6 4 Press [OK]. A shortcut icon is registered. 6.5.2 Customizing the Document Destination area Shortcut icons for frequently used destinations can be registered in the Document Destination area. 1 Press [Destination List] in the [Data Destination] area. 2 Press [Customize Basic Screen]. 3 Select the destination you want to register in the basic screen, and select the location in the Document Destination area. % If you have selected a location that is already registered in the basic screen, the data is overwritten. % You cannot register a destination that is already registered in the basic screen to another location in the basic screen.bizhub 423/363/283/223 6-23 6.5 Customizing Image Panel 6 4 Press [OK]. A shortcut icon is registered. 6.5.3 Deleting a registered shortcut icon 1 Press [Customize Basic Screen]. 2 Select an icon you want to delete. 3 Press [Delete]. 4 Press [OK]. The shortcut icon is deleted.7 PDF Processing Functionbizhub 423/363/283/223 7-2 7.1 Overview 7 7 PDF Processing Function 7.1 Overview The PDF processing function allows you to specify the security level for distributing a scanned document and a document saved in a User Box, such as by encrypting a document or adding a digital signature as required. Reference - This function can be used on the MFP with i-Option LK-102 or i-Option LK-103 v2 registered. Available operations with the PDF processing function The PDF processing function allows you to perform the following operations. - Configuring the PDF document property settings when distributing it with the scan or User Box function (p. 7-3). - Encrypting a PDF document using a password or digital ID (public key) when distributing it with the scan or User Box function (p. 7-4). - Adding a digital signature when distributing an encrypted PDF document (p. 7-4). - An AES-encrypted PDF document can be printed using the direct print mode (p. 7-7). d Reference For details on the scan function, refer to the [User's Guide Network Scan/Fax/Network Fax Operations]. For details on User Box functions, refer to the [User's Guide Box Operations].bizhub 423/363/283/223 7-3 7.2 PDF document properties 7 7.2 PDF document properties Selecting [PDF] or [Compact PDF] as a file type when distributing a scanned document or document saved in a User Box allows you to configure the PDF document property settings. Reference - When saving a document in a User Box using [Save Document] of the User Box function, you cannot configure the PDF document property settings. - When sending a document in a User Box in the PDF format to other device using PageScope Web Connection, you can configure the PDF document property settings. Item Description [Title] If [No] is selected for [Apply file name.], specify the title of the PDF document (up to 64 characters). [Apply file name.] Specify whether to apply the file name as the name of the PDF document. [Author] Enter the author of the PDF document (up to 64 characters). When user authentication is performed, the login name is entered as the author name. [Subject] Enter the sub-title of the PDF document (up to 64 characters). [Keywords] Enter the keywords of the PDF document (up to 64 characters).bizhub 423/363/283/223 7-4 7.3 Encrypting PDF document and adding digital signature 7 7.3 Encrypting PDF document and adding digital signature Selecting [PDF] or [Compact PDF] as a file type when distributing a scanned document or document saved in a User Box allows you to enhance security for the PDF document by encrypting it using a password or the digital ID of a user (public key). When a device certificate is registered in the MFP, a PDF document can be distributed with a digital signature added. Adding a digital signature certifies the author (MFP) of the sent document and guarantees that the document has not been modified after being signed. Reference - Using PageScope Web Connection, you can encrypt and add a digital signature to send a document in a User Box to another device in the PDF format. - To add a digital signature, it is necessary to encrypt the PDF document using a password or digital ID. 7.3.1 Password-based encryption To encrypt a document using a password, configure the following settings. Item Description [Encryption Target] Select an encryption target. Selecting [Other than Metadata] excludes the item specified in [PDF Document Properties] from the encryption target. Selecting [Other than Metadata] does not allow you to select [Low Level] for Encryption Level. [Encryption Type] Select [Password]. [Signature] When a device certificate has been registered in the MFP, specify whether to add a digital signature. For details on registering a device certificate in the MFP, refer to the [User's Guide Network Administrator]. [Encryption Level] Select an encryption level. • [Low Level]: RC4 encoding method (40-bit key length), supported by Acrobat 3.0 or later • [High Level 1]: RC4 encoding method (128-bit key length), supported by Acrobat 5.0 or later • [High Level 2]: AES encoding method (128-bit key length), supported by Acrobat 7.0 or later [Password] Enter the password required to open a PDF document. Enter the password twice for confirmation. [Document Permissions] Enter the password required to change the document permissions. Enter the password twice for confirmation. You cannot use the same password as that specified in [Password]. After you have configured document permissions, press [Detail Settings] to configure the detailed permission settings. The set values vary depending on the encryption level.bizhub 423/363/283/223 7-5 7.3 Encrypting PDF document and adding digital signature 7 [Detail Settings] 7.3.2 Digital ID-based encryption To encrypt a document using the digital ID of a user, configure the following settings. Item Description [Printing Allowed] Specify whether to permit printing of a PDF document. [Low Resolution] is selectable when [High Level 1] or [High Level 2] is selected for Encryption Level. [Enable copying of text, images and other content] Specify whether to enable copying of text, images and other content. [Changes Allowed] Specify the permission level related to making changes to a PDF document. • Select [Inserting, deleting and rotating pages] to insert, delete or rotate the page. Configure this setting for encryption at a higher security level. • Select [Filling in form fields and signing.] to enter information in the form and add a digital signature. Configure this setting for encryption at a higher security level. • Select [Commenting, filling in form fields and signing] to add comments, enter information in the form and add a digital signature. • Select [Page layout, filling in form fields and signing.] to insert, delete or rotate the page, enter information in the form and add a digital signature. Configure this setting for encryption at a lower security level. • Select [Any except extracting pages] to edit a document, create the form field and enter information to it, add comments, and add a digital signature. Item Description [Encryption Target] Select an encryption target. Selecting [Other than Metadata] excludes the item specified in [PDF Document Properties] from the encryption target. [Encryption Type] Select [Digital ID]. Select [Digital ID] to display the screen for selecting destinations. The screen for selecting an address displays a list of E-mail addresses with registered digital IDs for S/MIME sending. Specify a digital ID to be used for encryption by selecting an E-mail address. Selecting [Same as destination] uses the digital ID of the address; you do not need to specify a digital ID on this screen. Specification of the digital ID is independent of specification of an address; therefore, you need to specify an address separately. [Signature] When a device certificate has been registered in the MFP, specify whether to add a digital signature. For details on registering a device certificate in the MFP, refer to the [User's Guide Network Administrator].bizhub 423/363/283/223 7-6 7.3 Encrypting PDF document and adding digital signature 7 [Detail Settings] Reference - Digital ID-based encryption requires registering the certificate of a user in an E-mail address in advance. For details on registering the certificate of a user in an E-mail address, refer to the [User's Guide Network Administrator]. - You can specify up to 100 digital IDs. - The specifiable digital ID depends on the apply level of a user. - When saving a PDF document in a User Box, you cannot encrypt it using a digital ID. - When encrypting a PDF document and creating a searchable PDF document at the same time, the following settings are not available if [Adjust Rotation] is set to [Adjust] in the searchable PDF setting. [Adjust Rotation] is set to [Adjust] by default. Change the setting as necessary. – [Encryption Type]: [Digital ID] – [Encryption Level]: [High Level 2] – [Encryption Target]: [Other than Metadata] – [Signature]: [Yes] - For details on the searchable PDF function, refer to page 8-2. [Encryption Level] Select an encryption level. To encrypt a document using a digital ID, you cannot select [Low Level] for Encryption Level. • [High Level 1]: RC4 encoding method (128-bit key length), supported by Acrobat 5.0 or later • [High Level 2]: AES encoding method (128-bit key length), supported by Acrobat 7.0 or later Item Description [Printing Allowed] Specify whether to permit printing of a PDF document. [Enable copying of text, images and other content] Specify whether to enable copying of text, images and other content. [Changes Allowed] Specify the permission level related to making changes to a PDF document. • Select [Inserting, deleting and rotating pages] to insert, delete or rotate the page. Configure this setting for encryption at a higher security level. • Select [Filling in form fields and signing.] to enter information in the form and add a digital signature. Configure this setting for encryption at a higher security level. • Select [Commenting, filling in form fields and signing] to add comments, enter information in the form and add a digital signature. • Select [Any except extracting pages] to edit a document, create the form field and enter information to it, add comments, and add a digital signature. Item Descriptionbizhub 423/363/283/223 7-7 7.4 Direct Print 7 7.4 Direct Print An AES-encrypted PDF document can be printed in the direct print mode. User PageScope Web Connection to print documents in the direct print mode. Log in as a public user or registered user, and then select [Direct Print]. Click [Browse] to locate the file, and then click [OK]. d Reference For details on PageScope Web Connection, refer to the [User's Guide Print Operations].8 Searchable PDF functionbizhub 423/363/283/223 8-2 8.1 Overview 8 8 Searchable PDF function 8.1 Overview Searchable PDF refers to a function that creates a text searchable PDF file by pasting transparent text data on the area of a document in which characters are recognized through an OCR process. You can create a searchable PDF file when saving or sending an original in the PDF or compact PDF format using the scan or User Box function. The searchable PDF function supports multiple languages. When creating a searchable PDF file, select an appropriate language according to the original for correct OCR processing. Also, you can improve the accuracy of OCR processing by automatically correcting the page direction. If you want to manage paper-based documents in electronic format, it will be convenient to use the searchable PDF function to convert documents into a text-searchable PDF file. Reference - This function is available when i-Option LK-105 is registered with the MFP. - For details on the scan function, refer to the [User's Guide Network Scan/Fax/Network Fax Operations]. - For details on User Box functions, refer to the [User's Guide Box Operations]. Precautions when creating searchable PDF files Depending on the original condition, there may be some problems recognizing the text, the text may become garbled, or other problems may arise. Example - The characters that the MFP does not support will not be correctly recognized. - If any language different from that used in the original is selected when creating a searchable PDF file, text will not be correctly recognized. - If the page direction is not set to be corrected automatically, and the direction of the specified original does not match the direction of the text, text will not be correctly recognized. d Reference For details on the setting to automatically correct the page direction, refer to page 8-4. Recognizable character size Reference - When creating a searchable PDF file, a resolution over 300 dpi cannot be specified for scanning. Japanese European language Asian language Resolution 200 dpi 12 pt to 142 pt 9 pt to 142 pt 20 pt to 142 pt 300 dpi 8 pt to 96 pt 6 pt to 96 pt 12 pt to 96 ptbizhub 423/363/283/223 8-3 8.2 Configuring the OCR operation setting 8 8.2 Configuring the OCR operation setting Before creating a searchable PDF file, you can specify whether to give priority to accuracy or speed for OCR processing. [OCR Operation Setting] 1 Press Utility/Counter. 2 Press [User Settings]. 3 Press [Scan/Fax Settings]. 4 In [Scan/Fax Settings] (2/2), press [OCR Operation Setting]. 5 Select the OCR operation, and press [OK]. % [Prioritize Quality]: Give priority to recognition accuracy of an original text. Also, inclination of the original is adjusted automatically. % [Prioritize Speed]: Give priority to OCR processing speed. Inclination of the original is not adjusted.bizhub 423/363/283/223 8-4 8.3 Configuring the searchable PDF setting 8 8.3 Configuring the searchable PDF setting You can create a searchable PDF file by selecting [PDF] or [Compact PDF] for file type when saving or sending an original in the PDF format using the Scan and User Box functions. d Reference For details on how to specify the file type when using the Scan function, refer to the [User's Guide Network Scan/Fax/Network Fax Operations]. For details on how to specify the file type when using the User Box function, refer to the [User's Guide Box Operations]. Reference - If [Compact PDF] is selected for [File Type] to create a searchable PDF file, the OCR processing speed may be faster than when [PDF] is selected. - When creating a searchable PDF file, [Resolution] cannot be set to [400 e 400dpi (Super Fine)] or [600 e 600dpi (Ultra Fine)]. - To create a searchable PDF file and encrypt a PDF file at the same time, if any of the following settings are specified, [Adjust Rotation] cannot be set to [Adjust] in the PDF encryption setting. – [Encryption Type]: [Digital ID] – [Encryption Level]: [High Level 2] – [Encryption Target]: [Other than Metadata] – [Signature]: [Yes] - For details on how to encrypt a PDF file, refer to page 7-4. - For [Japanese], [Chinese], [Korean] and [Taiwanese], the text direction (vertical or horizontal writing) is recognized automatically. However, for [Chinese], [Korean] and [Taiwanese], if both vertical and horizontal text directions are used on the same page, the original is processed based on one or the other. - Downloading or sending a document configured as a searchable PDF file and saved in a User Box using PageScope Web Connection causes the searchable PDF setting to be canceled and a text search to be disabled. Item Description [Language Selection] Select a language to use to create a searchable PDF file. Text will not be correctly recognized unless an appropriate language is selected according to the original. [Adjust Rotation] Specify whether to automatically rotate each page to correct it according to the text direction detected through an OCR process. If the page direction is not corrected automatically, and the direction of the specified original does not match the direction of the text, text will not be correctly recognized.9 My Panel Functionbizhub 423/363/283/223 9-2 9.1 Overview 9 9 My Panel Function 9.1 Overview The My Panel function allows the user to centrally manage the environment of the Control Panel customized by the user according to the application (My Panel), and to obtain My Panel on the MFP selected by the user. Using My Panel provides the same operationality on multiple MFPs in network environment. d Reference This function is used in connection with the PageScope My Panel Manager. For details on enabling the function, refer to the PageScope My Panel Manager manual. You can also configure My Panel settings using the PageScope My Panel Manager. For details, refer to the PageScope My Panel Manager manual. 9.1.1 Available operations with My Panel My Panel allows you to personalize the Control Panel so that frequently-used functions are preferentially displayed. Also, if the Web browser or Image Panel is available, by linking it with PageScope My Panel Manager, you can manage the Web browser settings and information for each user, and personalize the Image Panel screen. Customizable items My Panel allows you to customize the following items. - Specification of a language displayed on the Control Panel - Specification of a measurement unit to be displayed when entering numbers - Initial display settings for the basic screen of the Copy function and registration of short-cut keys and setting value keys to be arranged in the basic screen - Initial display settings for the basic screen of the fax/scan function and registration of shortcut keys - Initial display settings for the basic screen of the User Box function and registration of shortcut keys - Specification of the color of selected buttons of the Control Panel - Display of the My Panel main menu - Display of the initial screen of the Control Panel Functions available by linking to the Web browser You can personalize the operation environment of the Web browser by linking the Web browser with My Panel. My Panel allows you to manage the following settings and information for each user. - Home page - Favorites - Display history of contents - URL input history - Cookie - Authentication information d Reference Register a home page and favorites using the Web browser. Display history, input history, cookies, authentication information are automatically stored in the server as the user uses the Web browser. For details on how to use the Web browser, refer to page 4-2. You can edit the registration information of a home page and favorites using PageScope My Panel Manager. For details, refer to the PageScope My Panel Manager manual.bizhub 423/363/283/223 9-3 9.1 Overview 9 Functions available with Image Panel By linking the Image Panel with My Panel or My Address Book, you can register shortcuts for the document source and destination in the basic screen of Image Panel to personalize the operation environment of Image Panel. Also, you can refer to My Address Book to specify a destination to send data to. d Reference For details on customizing the Image Panel screen, refer to page 6-21. For details on the My Address function, refer to page 10-2. 9.1.2 My Panel acquisition procedure Perform user authentication on the selected MFP. If the user authentication is succeeded, the MFP automatically accesses the server to obtain My Panel of the user who is logged in. The user can use My Panel while logged in to the MFP. My Panel is not available after the user logs out. 9.1.3 Restrictions on using the My Panel function The following are restrictions on the use of My Panel. - Registering, editing and deleting My Panel are available only for the user who owns the My Panel. The administrator of the MFP cannot operate My Panel. - When you access My Panel for the first time, the language, measurement unit and color selection settings comply with the settings in the MFP. - When you access My Panel for the first time, the main menu of My Panel is displayed in the initial screen. - Only the setting memory (copy program and fax/scan program) registered on the MFP you use is available. - Depending on the functions or option installation status of the MFP on which My Panel is used, the operating environment specified as My Panel may not be available. - When registering, editing, or deleting My panel, an error may occur depending on the connection status to the server. If an error occurs, check the network connection. My Panel is available My Panel is available Server (manages My Panel) (3) Obtain My Panel (2) Access the server (1) Perform authentication My Panel is not available • Authentication failed • Log out • Failed to obtain My Panel, etc.bizhub 423/363/283/223 9-4 9.2 Displaying My Panel 9 9.2 Displaying My Panel 9.2.1 Main Menu Main Menu appears first when displaying My Panel. In Main Menu, you can freely lay out frequently used functions and shortcut keys to the setting memory. In Main Menu, 12 types of shortcut keys can be registered. For details on configuring settings for Main Menu, refer to page 9-12. 9.2.2 Displaying Main Menu When using the My Panel function, you can change the initial screen to be displayed after user authentication is succeeded. To display Main Menu for My Panel from a different initial screen, use the [Application Menu]. In [Application Menu], press [My Panel] to display Main Menu of My Panel. d Reference The initial screen displayed after user authentication is succeeded can be changed in [My Panel Settings] Settings. For details, refer to page 9-13. For details on the [Application Menu], refer to page 3-3.bizhub 423/363/283/223 9-5 9.3 Customizing My Panel 9 9.3 Customizing My Panel Customize My Panel in [My Panel Settings] of [Utility]. 9.3.1 [My Panel Settings] Customizable items are as follows. 9.3.2 Displaying [My Panel Settings] When the My Panel function is available, [My Panel Settings] appears in [Utility]. 1 Log in as a registered user. 2 Press Utility/Counter. 3 Press [My Panel Settings]. Item Description [Language Setting] Select a language to be used on My Panel. For details, refer to page 9-6. [Measurement Unit Settings] Select a measurement unit to be used when displaying values on My Panel. For details, refer to page 9-6. [Copier Settings] Specify the initial display settings for the basic screen of the Copy function and register short-cut keys and setting value keys to be arranged in the basic screen. For details, refer to page 9-7. [Scan/Fax Settings] Initial display settings for the basic screen of the fax/scan function and registration of shortcut keys For details, refer to page 9-9. [User Box Settings] Configure initial display settings for the basic screen of the User Box function and register shortcut keys. For details, refer to page 9-11. [Color Selection Settings] Select a color for the selected buttons on My Panel. For details, refer to page 9-12. [Main Menu Settings] Register the main menu buttons on the Main Menu screen of My Panel. For details, refer to page 9-12. [Initial Screen Settings] Specify the initial screen to be displayed after user authentication is succeeded. For details, refer to page 9-13.bizhub 423/363/283/223 9-6 9.3 Customizing My Panel 9 The My Panel Settings screen appears. 9.3.3 [Language Setting] Select a language to be used on My Panel from the languages available on the MFP. 9.3.4 [Measurement Unit Settings] Select a length unit to be used on My Panel.bizhub 423/363/283/223 9-7 9.3 Customizing My Panel 9 9.3.5 [Copier Settings] Specify the initial display settings for the basic screen of the Copy function and register short-cut keys and setting value keys to be arranged in the basic screen. [Default Tab] Configure the default display settings for the basic screen in the copy mode. [Basic] displays normal basic display. [Quick Copy] displays the setting items of basic settings screen in a single screen. It can be used to specify multiple setting at one time. [Shortcut Key 1] - [Shortcut Key 2] Lay out shortcut keys for frequently used copy application functions on the basic screen. Up to two shortcut keys can be laid out. Even if you log in to another model and register a function in [Shortcut Key 1] and/or [Shortcut Key 2], [OFF] is displayed for this machine when that function is not available with this machine. (Example: [Density], [Background Removal]) In addition, displaying a page with which to register a function in [Shortcut Key 1] and/or [Shortcut Key 2] when that function is not available causes [OFF] to be selected. If [OK] is selected, [OFF] is set for [Shortcut Key 1] and [Shortcut Key 2]. As a result, shortcut keys are not displayed even if you log in to another model.bizhub 423/363/283/223 9-8 9.3 Customizing My Panel 9 [Quick Settings 1] - [Quick Settings 4] Arrange the setting values of the Copy function and copy program keys in the basic screen. By arranging the frequently-used setting values and copy program keys in the basic screen, you can configure the copy settings easily only by pressing the key. You can arrange up to four keys. Even if you log in to another model and register a function in [Quick Settings 1] - [Quick Settings 4], [OFF] is displayed for this machine when that function is not available with this machine. (Example: [Color]) Displaying a page with which to register a function in [Quick Settings 1] - [Quick Settings 4] when that function is not available causes [OFF] to be selected. If [OK] is selected, [OFF] is set for [Quick Settings 1] and [Quick Settings 4]. As a result, quick setting keys are not displayed even if you log in to another model. d Reference To arrange a copy program in the basic screen, you must register the copy program in advance. For details on how to register a copy program, refer to the [User's Guide Copy Operations]. [Default Tab Density Settings] Place the key to adjust the copy density on the basic screen. Reference - When placing the density adjustment key on the basic screen, [Quick Settings 3] and [Quick Settings 4] are not available.bizhub 423/363/283/223 9-9 9.3 Customizing My Panel 9 9.3.6 [Scan/Fax Settings] Configure initial display settings for the basic screen of the fax/scan function and register shortcut keys. [Default Tab] Configure initial display settings for the basic screen in the fax/scan function. [Address Book Index Default] To use the public address book, specify the type of an index to be displayed initially in [Address Book]. By default, [My Address Book] is selected. d Reference For details on the My Address function, refer to page 10-2.bizhub 423/363/283/223 9-10 9.3 Customizing My Panel 9 [Shortcut Key 1] - [Shortcut Key 2] Lay out shortcut keys for frequently used fax/scan application functions on the basic screen. Up to two shortcut keys can be laid out. [Default Address Book] Configure settings for the default screen of [Address Book]. [Default Address Type] When displaying an address book by address type, specify an address type to be displayed by default.bizhub 423/363/283/223 9-11 9.3 Customizing My Panel 9 9.3.7 [User Box Settings] Configure initial display settings for the basic screen of the User Box function and register shortcut keys. [Default Tab] Configure the default display settings for the basic screen (after User Box is pressed on the Control Panel) in the User Box mode. [Shortcut Key 1] - [Shortcut Key 2] Lay out shortcut keys for User Boxes frequently used when using a User Box document on the basic screen. Up to two shortcut keys can be laid out.bizhub 423/363/283/223 9-12 9.3 Customizing My Panel 9 9.3.8 [Color Selection Settings] Select a color for the selected buttons on My Panel. 9.3.9 [Main Menu Settings] Customize the main menu of My Panel. You can freely lay out frequently used functions and shortcut keys to the setting memory (copy programs and fax/scan programs) in Main Menu. Main menu button The shortcut key displayed in Main Menu is called the main menu button, and up to 12 types can be registered. To register the set memory (copy programs and fax/scan programs) as main menu buttons, press [Icon] to select icons for the setting memory to be displayed on Main Menu. Registering a main menu button [Function], [Copy Function Settings], [Scan/Fax Function Settings], [Copy Program Settings], and [Scan/Fax Program Settings] can be assigned as main menu buttons. Item Description [Function] Registers a shortcut key to each of [Copy], [Scan/Fax], [User Box], [Image Panel], and [Web Browser] functions. Shortcut key for the Web Browser or Image Panel functions can be registered in Main Menu only when its function is enabled. [Copy Function Settings] Register shortcut keys in Copy Function Settings for each of [Paper Setting], [Zoom], [Duplex/Combine], and [Finishing].bizhub 423/363/283/223 9-13 9.3 Customizing My Panel 9 9.3.10 [Initial Screen Settings] Specify the initial screen to be displayed after user authentication is succeeded. By default, the My Panel main menu is displayed as the initial screen. Reference - Shortcut key for the Web Browser or Image Panel functions can be registered in the initial screen only when its function is enabled. [Scan/Fax Function Settings] Register shortcut keys in Scan/Fax Function Settings for each of [Scan Settings], [Original Settings] and [Comm. Settings]. [Copy Program Settings] Register a shortcut key to the copier setting memory (copy program) registered in the MFP. Press [Icon] in the Main Menu Settings screen. You can select setting memory icons to be displayed on Main Menu. The shortcut key for the setting memory is available only on the MFP with the setting memory registered. For details on registering the copier setting memory (copy program), refer to the [User's Guide Copy Operations]. [Scan/Fax Program Settings] Register a shortcut key to the fax/scan setting memory (fax/scan program) registered in the MFP. Press [Icon] in the Main Menu Settings screen. You can select setting memory icons to be displayed on Main Menu. The shortcut key for the setting memory is available only on the MFP with the setting memory registered. For details on registering the fax/scan setting memory (fax/scan program), refer to the [User's Guide Network Scan/Fax/Network Fax Operations]. Item Description10 My Address functionbizhub 423/363/283/223 10-2 10.1 Overview 10 10 My Address function 10.1 Overview The My Address function allows the user to centrally manage the personal address book (My Address Book) on the server, and to obtain My Address Book on the MFP selected by the user. Using My Address Book allows you to use the same address book on multiple MFPs in your network environment without registering addresses individually on each MFP. d Reference This function is used in connection with the PageScope My Panel Manager. For details on enabling the function, refer to the PageScope My Panel Manager manual. You can also add entries to My Address Book using PageScope My Panel Manager. For details, refer to the PageScope My Panel Manager manual. 10.1.1 Classification of address books When the My Address function is available, you can use the following two kinds of address books. Public address book Public address book refers to an address book accessible to anyone registered in the main unit of the MFP selected by the user. The public address book is provided with the following features. - In the public address book. one-touch destinations, groups, and programs can be registered. - Since the public address book is registered in the main unit of the MFP, available destinations depend on the selected MFP. - The user or administrator can register, edit, or delete the public address book. - If registration and editing of destinations by a user is restricted by the administrator, registration or editing of the public address book is not possible. My Address Book My Address Book refers to a server-managed address book accessible only to the user. My Address Book is provided with the following features. - In My Address Book, one-touch destinations and groups can be registered. - Since the My Address function is obtained from the server on the MFP selected by the user, it is available on any MFP in which the My Address function is available. - Only the specified user can register, edit or delete My Panel.bizhub 423/363/283/223 10-3 10.1 Overview 10 10.1.2 My Address Book acquisition procedure Perform user authentication on the selected MFP. If the user authentication is succeeded, the MFP automatically accesses the server to obtain My Address Book of the user who is logged in. The user can use My Address Book while logged in to the MFP. My Address Book is not available after the user logs out. 10.1.3 Restrictions on using the My Address function There are following restrictions on My Address Book. - Only the user who owns My Address Book can register, edit or delete My Address Book. The administrator of the MFP cannot operate My Address Book. - My Address Book can contain up to 100 one-touch destinations and up to 10 groups (up to 100 onetouch destinations per group). - If the number of registered destinations in My Address Book exceeds the maximum value, a new destination cannot be registered. - Program cannot be registered in My Address Book. - Destination search by index is not possible in My Address Book. - User Box is available only on the MFPs with registered destinations. - Depending on the MFP settings or options installed in the MFP on which My Address Book is used, sending that has been specified in the address book may not be performed. - When registering, editing, or deleting My address book, an error may occur depending on the connection status to the server. If an error occurs, check the network connection. My Address Book is available My Address Book is available Server (manages My Address Book) (3) Obtain My Address Book (2) Access the server (1) Perform authentication My Address Book is not available • Authentication failed • Log out • Failed to obtain My Panel, etc.bizhub 423/363/283/223 10-4 10.2 Registering and editing a destination 10 10.2 Registering and editing a destination Register frequently used personal addresses in My Address Book. Addresses can be registered using any of the following methods. - Using the Control Panel of the MFP - Using PageScope Web Connection from a computer on the network - Using the PageScope My Panel Manager In My Address Book, one-touch destinations and groups can be registered. This section describes how to register addresses from the Control Panel of the MFP. 10.2.1 Address Book Frequently used fax numbers and E-mail addresses, and registered User Boxes can be registered as onetouch destinations. Up to 100 one-touch destinations can be registered in My Address Book. 1 Log in as a registered user. 2 Press Utility/Counter. 3 Press [One-Touch/User Box Registration]. 4 Press [Create One-Touch Destination]. 5 Press [Address Book (Personal)]. % To add one-touch destinations to the shared address book, press [Address Book (Public)]. A list of personal one-touch destinations appears. 6 Press [New]. % To edit a registered destination, select the destination, and then press [Edit]. % To delete a registered address, select the destination, and then press [Delete]. % To check a registered address, select the address, and then press [Check Job Set.].bizhub 423/363/283/223 10-5 10.2 Registering and editing a destination 10 7 Select the type of address to be registered, and then configure settings for required items. d Reference For details of the address book entries, refer to the [User's Guide Network Scan/Fax/Network Fax Operations]. 10.2.2 Group Multiple one-touch destinations in My Address Book can be grouped, and registered as a group. In My Address Book, up to 10 groups (up to 100 one-touch destinations per group) can be registered. 1 Log in as a registered user. 2 Press Utility/Counter. 3 Press [One-Touch/User Box Registration]. 4 Press [Create One-Touch Destination]. 5 Press [Group]. A list of groups appears. 6 Press [Personal], and then press [New]. % To edit a registered group, select the group, and then press [Edit]. % To delete a registered group, select the group, and then press [Delete]. % To check a registered group, select the group, and then press [Check Job Set.]. % Press [Public] to display the public groups.bizhub 423/363/283/223 10-6 10.2 Registering and editing a destination 10 7 Check that a personal group is selected as a registration destination, and then configure settings for required items. % Select [Select Group]. The addresses registered in My Address Book are displayed. Select onetouch destination to be grouped. d Reference For details on registration contents of the group, refer to the [User's Guide Network Scan/Fax/Network Fax Operations].bizhub 423/363/283/223 10-7 10.3 Copying destinations between address books 10 10.3 Copying destinations between address books Registered one-touch destinations can be copied between the public address book and My Address Book. Reference - Groups cannot be copied between the public address book and My Address Book. 10.3.1 Copying destinations from the public address book to My Address Book Addresses registered in the public address book can be copied to My Address Book. 1 Display [Create One-Touch Destination]. 2 Press [Address Book (Public)]. 3 Select the type of address to be copied. A list of registered address books of the selected address type appears. 4 Select an address to be copied, and then press [Copy to Personal Addr.]. 5 Select [Yes] on the confirmation screen, and then press [OK]. The selected address is copied.bizhub 423/363/283/223 10-8 10.3 Copying destinations between address books 10 10.3.2 Copying destinations from My Address Book to the public address book Destinations registered in My Address Book can be copied to the public address book. 1 Display [Create One-Touch Destination]. 2 Press [Address Book (Personal)]. A list of personal one-touch destinations appears. 3 Select an address to be copied, and then press [Copy to Shared Addr.]. 4 Select [Yes] on the confirmation screen, and then press [OK]. The selected address is copied.bizhub 423/363/283/223 10-9 10.4 Using My Address Book when sending a document 10 10.4 Using My Address Book when sending a document Use My Address Book to specify a destination when sending a document using the Scan/Fax functions, or sending a document in a User Box. 10.4.1 Specifying destinations When the My Address function is available, the following screen appears when specifying an address. Addresses registered in My Address Book appears by address type. Select the desired destination. To select an address registered in the public address book, press [Public]. 10.4.2 Searching for destinations If a desired address is not found, you can search for it. In the screen for specifying a destination, press [Search]. To search for destinations based on the registered address type, press [Address Type]. To search for destinations based on the name and a part of registration contents, press [Detail Search].11 Indexbizhub 423/363/283/223 11-2 11.1 Index by item 11 11 Index 11.1 Index by item A Accessing ....................................................................5-2 Acquiring my panel ......................................................9-3 Address book ............................................................10-4 Application key ....................................................3-2, 3-4 Application menu ........................................................3-3 C Cache ..........................................................................5-2 Cellular phone/PDA .........................................6-10, 6-17 Customizing ..............................................3-4, 6-21, 9-5 D Deleting .......................................................................5-9 Display mode of web browser ...................................4-10 Displaying ..................................................................4-19 E Entering text in web browser ....................................4-10 External memory .......................................................6-15 F Flash player .................................................................4-3 G Group ........................................................................10-5 I Image panel ...................................... 2-3, 6-2, 6-3, 6-21 Image panel operation ................................................6-5 J Just-fit rendering .......................................................4-10 L Logging in ....................................................................5-4 Logging out .................................................................5-4 M Main menu ...................................................................9-4 My address ........................................................2-3, 10-2 My address book ............................................10-2, 10-9 My address book acquisition ....................................10-3 My panel ......................................................2-3, 9-2, 9-4 My panel settings ........................................................9-5 O OCR .............................................................................8-3 Opening user boxes ....................................................5-5 Operating web browser ...............................................4-9 P PageScope Web Connection ......................................5-2 PDF processing .................................................. 2-3, 7-2 Photo .........................................................................6-18 PIN code ....................................................................6-17 Print ...........................................................................6-14 Printing ............................................................. 4-18, 5-7 Public address book ..................................................10-2 R Restriction of web browser .........................................4-5 Restrictions on my address .......................................10-3 Restrictions on my panel .............................................9-3 S Saving ........................................................................4-20 Scanning ......................................................................6-7 Screen components of image panel ...........................6-4 Screen components of PageScope Web Connection ......................................5-3 Screen components of web browser ..........................4-8 Searchable PDF .......................................... 2-3, 8-2, 8-4 Send tray ...................................................................6-16 Smart-fit rendering ....................................................4-10 Speaker .....................................................................4-11 Specifications ................................................... 4-2, 6-18 Specifications for web browser ...................................4-2 T Toolbar ......................................................................4-12 U Upload .......................................................................4-21 User box ............................................................. 5-5, 6-8 W Web browser .............................................. 2-3, 4-2, 4-4 Web browser information ..........................................4-17 Web browser settings ................................................4-16bizhub 423/363/283/223 11-3 11.2 Index by button 11 11.2 Index by button A Access log .................................................................4-17 Access to the Web browser contents .........................4-7 Address Book (Personal) ...........................................10-4 Address Book Index Default .......................................9-9 Application key 1 .........................................................3-2 Application key 2 .........................................................3-3 Application Key Settings .............................................3-4 Application menu ........................................................3-3 Application menu key ..................................................3-2 Authentication information ........................................4-17 C Cache ........................................................................4-17 Cellular Phone ...........................................................6-10 Color Selection Settings ............................................9-12 Combine Documents ................................................6-12 Cookie .......................................................................4-17 Copier Settings ............................................................9-7 Copy to Personal Addr ..............................................10-7 Copy to Shared Addr ................................................10-8 D Default Address Book ...............................................9-10 Default Address Type ................................................9-10 Default Tab ................................................9-7, 9-9, 9-11 Default Tab Density Settings .......................................9-8 Destination List ..........................................................6-15 Digital ID ......................................................................7-5 Direct Print ..................................................................7-7 Document Settings ....................................................6-13 Document Source List .................................................6-8 Document/Page ....................................6-11, 6-12, 6-13 E Easy Setting ................................................................9-8 Edit Document ...........................................................6-11 Encryption ...................................................................7-4 External memory ...............................................6-9, 6-15 F Favorites (Add) ..........................................................4-13 Favorites (View) .........................................................4-13 Function Permission ....................................................4-6 G Group ........................................................................10-5 H History .......................................................................4-14 I Initial Screen Settings ................................................9-13 Input Address ............................................................4-14 L Language Setting ........................................................9-6 M Main Menu Settings ...................................................9-12 Manage windows ......................................................4-17 Measurement Unit Settings .........................................9-6 Menu ..........................................................................4-16 My Panel Settings ........................................................9-5 O OCR operation setting .................................................8-3 P Page Operation .........................................................4-16 Password .....................................................................7-4 PDF Document Properties ...........................................7-3 Photo/Icon .................................................................6-19 Preview ......................................................................6-11 Print ...........................................................................4-15 Print Settings .............................................................6-14 Proxy .........................................................................4-17 R Return to Scan Dest ..................................................6-13 S Scan ............................................................................6-7 Scan/Fax Settings .......................................................9-9 Security ......................................................................4-17 Settings .....................................................................4-17 Shortcut key ........................................... 9-7, 9-10, 9-11 U User Box Settings ......................................................9-11 V View ...........................................................................4-16 W Web browser setting ...................................................4-5Copyright A1UD-9586AF-00 2010 2010. 1 http://konicaminolta.com magicolor 1650EN User’s Guide A034-9571-03Ax-1 Thank You Thank you for purchasing a magicolor 1650EN. You have made an excellent choice. Your magicolor 1650EN is specially designed for optimal performance in Windows, Macintosh and Linux environments. Trademarks KONICA MINOLTA and the KONICA MINOLTA logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of KONICA MINOLTA HOLDINGS, INC. magicolor and PageScope are trademarks or registered trademarks of KONICA MINOLTA BUSINESS TECHNOLOGIES, INC. All other trademarks and registered trademarks are the property of their respective owners. Copyright Notice Copyright © 2008 KONICA MINOLTA BUSINESS TECHNOLOGIES, INC., Marunouchi Center Building, 1-6-1 Marunouchi, Chiyoda-ku, Tokyo, 100-0005, Japan. All Rights Reserved. This document may not be copied, in whole or part, nor transferred to any other media or language, without written permission of KONICA MINOLTA BUSINESS TECHNOLOGIES, INC. Notice KONICA MINOLTA BUSINESS TECHNOLOGIES, INC. reserves the right to make changes to this guide and to the equipment described herein without notice. Considerable effort has been made to ensure that this guide is free of inaccuracies and omissions. However, KONICA MINOLTA BUSINESS TECHNOLOGIES, INC. makes no warranty of any kind including, but not limited to, any implied warranties of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose with regard to this guide. KONICA MINOLTA BUSINESS TECHNOLOGIES, INC. assumes no responsibility for, or liability for, errors contained in this guide or for incidental, special, or consequential damages arising out of the furnishing of this guide, or the use of this guide in operating the equipment, or in connection with the performance of the equipment when so operated.x-2 SOFTWARE LICENSE AGREEMENT This package contains the following materials provided by KONICA MINOLTA BUSINESS TECHNOLOGIES, INC. (KMBT): software included as part of the printing system (“Printing Software”), the digitally-encoded machine-readable outline data encoded in the special format and in the encrypted form (“Font Programs”), other software which runs on a computer system for use in conjunction with the Printing Software (“Host Software”), and related explanatory written materials (“Documentation”). The term “Software” shall be used to describe Printing Software, Font Programs and/or Host Software and also include any upgrades, modified versions, additions, and copies of the Software. The Software is being licensed to you under the terms of this Agreement. KMBT grants to you a non-exclusive sublicense to use the Software and Documentation, provided that you agree to the following: 1. You may use the Software and accompanying Font Programs for imaging to the licensed output device(s), solely for your own internal business purposes. 2. In addition to the license for Font Programs set forth in Section 1 above, you may use Roman Font Programs to reproduce weights, styles, and versions of letters, numerals, characters and symbols (“Typefaces”) on the display or monitor for your own internal business purposes. 3. You may make one backup copy of the Host Software, provided your backup copy is not installed or used on any computer. Notwithstanding the above restrictions, you may install the Host Software on any number of computers solely for use with one or more printing systems running the Printing Software. 4. You may assign its rights under this Agreement to an assignee of all of Licensee’s right and interest to such Software and Documentation (“Assignee”) provided you transfer to Assignee all copies of such Software and Documentation Assignee agrees to be bound by all of the terms and conditions of this Agreement. 5. You agree not to modify, adapt or translate the Software and Documentation. 6. You agree that you will not attempt to alter, disassemble, decrypt, reverse engineer or decompile the Software. 7. Title to and ownership of the Software and Documentation and any reproductions thereof shall remain with KMBT and its licensor. 8. Trademarks shall be used in accordance with accepted trademark practice, including identification of the trademark owner’s name. Trademarks can only be used to identify printed output produced by the Software. Such use of any trademark does not give you any rights of ownership in that trademark. 9. You may not rent, lease, sublicense, lend or transfer versions or copies of the Software Licensee does not use, or Software contained on any unused media, except as part of the permanent transfer of all Software and Documentation as described above. 10. IN NO EVENT WILL KMBT OR ITS LICENSOR BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR ANY CONSEQUENTIAL, INCIDENTAL INDIRECT, PUNITIVE OR SPECIAL DAMAGES, INCLUDING ANY LOST PROFITS OR LOST SAVING, EVEN IF KMBT HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES, OR FOR ANY CLAIM BY ANY THIRD PARTY. KMBT OR ITS LICENSOR DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES WITH REGARD TO THE SOFTWARE, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, TITLE AND NON-INFRINGEMENT OF THIRD PARTY RIGHTS. SOME STATES OR JURISDICTIONS DO NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION OF INCIDENTAL, CONSEQUENTIAL OR SPECIAL DAMAGES, SO THE ABOVE LIMITATIONS MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU.x-3 11. Notice to Government End Users: The Software is a “commercial item,” as that term is defined at 48 C.F.R.2.101, consisting of “commercial computer software” and “commercial computer software documentation,” as such terms are used in 48 C.F.R. 12.212. Consistent with 48 C.F.R. 12.212 and 48 C.F.R. 227.7202-1 through 227.7202-4, all U.S. Government End Users acquire the Software with only those rights set forth herein. 12. You agree that you will not export the Software in any form in violation of any applicable laws and regulations regarding export control of any countries. About Adobe Color Profile ADOBE SYSTEMS INCORPORATED COLOR PROFILE LICENSE AGREEMENT NOTICE TO USER: PLEASE READ THIS CONTRACT CAREFULLY. BY USING ALL OR ANY PORTION OF THE SOFTWARE YOU ACCEPT ALL THE TERMS AND CONDITIONS OF THIS SOFTWARE YOU ACCEPT ALL THE TERMS AND CONDITIONS OF THIS AGREEMENT. IF YOU DO NOT AGREE WITH THE TERMS OF THIS AGREEMENT, DO NOT USE THE SOFTWARE. 1. DEFINITIONS In this Agreement, “Adobe” means Adobe Systems Incorporated, a Delaware corporation, located at 345 Park Avenue, San Jose, California 95110. “Software” means the software and related items with which this Agreement is provided. 2. LICENSE Subject to the terms of this Agreement, Adobe hereby grants you the worldwide, non-exclusive, nontransferable, royalty-free license to use, reproduce and publicly display the Software. Adobe also grants you the rights to distribute the Software only (a) as embedded within digital image files and (b) on a standalone basis. No other distribution of the Software is allowed; including, without limitation, distribution of the Software when incorporated into or bundled with any application software. All individual profiles must be referenced by their ICC Profile description string. You may not modify the Software. Adobe is under no obligation to provide any support under this Agreement, including upgrades or future versions of the Software or other items. No title to the intellectual property in the Software is transferred to you under the terms of this Agreement. You do not acquire any rights to the Software except as expressly set forth in this Agreement. 3. DISTRIBUTION If you choose to distribute the Software, you do so with the understanding that you agree to defend, indemnify and hold harmless Adobe against any losses, damages or costs arising from any claims, lawsuits or other legal actions arising out of such distribution, including without limitation, your failure to comply with this Section 3. If you distribute the Software on a standalone basis, you will do so under the terms of this Agreement or your own license agreement which (a) complies with the terms and conditions of this Agreement; (b) effectively disclaims all warranties and conditions, express or implied, on behalf of Adobe; (c) effectively excludes all liability for damages on behalf of Adobe; (d) states that any provisions that differ from this Agreement are offered by you alone and not Adobe and (e) states that the Software is available from you or Adobe and informs licensees how to obtain it in a reasonable manner on or through a medium customarily used for software exchange. Any distributed Software will include the Adobe copyright notices as included in the Software provided to you by Adobe.x-4 4. DISCLAIMER OF WARRANTY Adobe licenses the Software to you on an “AS IS” basis. Adobe makes no representation as to the adequacy of the Software for any particular purpose or to produce any particular result. Adobe shall not be liable for loss or damage arising out of this Agreement or from the distribution or use of the Software or any other materials. ADOBE AND ITS SUPPLIERS DO NOT AND CANNOT WARRANT THE PERFORMANCE OR RESULTS YOU MAY OBTAIN BY USING THE SOFTWARE, EXCEPT FOR ANY WARRANTY, CONDITION, REPRESENTATION OR TERM TO THE EXTENT TO WHICH THE SAME CANNOT OR MAY NOT BE EXCLUDED OR LIMITED BY LAW APPLICABLE TO YOU IN YOUR JURISDICTION, ADOBE AND ITS SUPPLIERS MAKE NO WARRANTIES, CONDITIONS, REPRESENTATIONS OR TERMS, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, WHETHER BY STATUTE, COMMON LAW, CUSTOM, USAGE OR OTHERWISE AS TO ANY OTHER MATTERS, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO NONINFRINGEMENT OF THIRD PARTY RIGHTS, INTEGRATION, SATISFACTORY QUALITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PARTICULAR PURPOSE. YOU MAY HAVE ADDITIONAL RIGHTS WHICH VARY FROM JURISDICTION TO JURISDICTION. The provisions of Sections 4, 5 and 6 shall survive the termination of this Agreement, howsoever caused, but this shall not imply or create any continued right to use the Software after termination of this Agreement. 5. LIMITATION OF LIABILITY IN NO EVENT WILL ADOBE OR ITS SUPPLIERS BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR ANY DAMAGES, CLAIMS OR COSTS WHATSOEVER OR ANY CONSEQUENTIAL, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL DAMAGES, OR ANY LOST PROFITS OR LOST SAVINGS, EVEN IF AN ADOBE REPRESENTATIVE HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH LOSS, DAMAGES, CLAIMS OR COSTS OR FOR ANY CLAIM BY ANY THIRD PARTY. THE FOREGOING LIMITATIONS AND EXCLUSIONS APPLY TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW IN YOUR JURISDICTION. ADOBE’S AGGREGATE LIABILITY AND THAT OF ITS SUPPLIERS UNDER OR IN CONNECTION WITH THIS AGREEMENT SHALL BE LIMITED TO THE AMOUNT PAID FOR THE SOFTWARE. Nothing contained in this Agreement limits Adobe’s liability to you in the event of death or personal injury resulting from Adobe’s negligence or for the tort of deceit (fraud). Adobe is acting on behalf of its suppliers for the purpose of disclaiming, excluding and/or limiting obligations, warranties and liability as provided in this Agreement, but in no other respects and for no other purpose. 6. TRADEMARKS Adobe and the Adobe logo are the registered trademarks or trademarks of Adobe in the United States and other countries. With the exception of referential use, you will not use such trademarks or any other Adobe trademark or logo without separate prior written permission granted by Adobe. 7. TERM This Agreement is effective until terminated. Adobe has the right to terminate this Agreement immediately if you fail to comply with any term hereof. Upon any such termination, you must return to Adobe all full and partial copies of the Software in your possession or control. 8. GOVERNMENT REGULATIONS If any part of the Software is identified as an export controlled item under the United States Export Administration Act or any other export law, restriction or regulation (the “Export Laws”), you represent and warrant that you are not a citizen, or otherwise located within, an embargoed nation (including without limitation Iran, Iraq, Syria, Sudan, Libya, Cuba, North Korea, and Serbia) and that you are not otherwise prohibited under the Export Laws from receiving the Software. All rights to use the Software are granted on condition that such rights are forfeited if you fail to comply with the terms of this Agreement.x-5 9. GOVERNING LAW This Agreement will be governed by and construed in accordance with the substantive laws in force in the State of California as such laws are applied to agreements entered into and to be performed entirely within California between California residents. This Agreement will not be governed by the conflict of law rules of any jurisdiction or the United Nations Convention on Contracts for the International Sale of Goods, the application of which is expressly excluded. All disputes arising out of, under or related to this Agreement will be brought exclusively in the state Santa Clara County, California, USA. 10. GENERAL You may not assign your rights or obligations granted under this Agreement without the prior written consent of Adobe. None of the provisions of this Agreement shall be deemed to have been waived by any act or acquiescence on the part of Adobe, its agents, or employees, but only by an instrument in writing signed by an authorized signatory of Adobe. When conflicting language exists between this Agreement and any other agreement included in the Software, the terms of such included agreement shall apply. If either you or Adobe employs attorneys to enforce any rights arising out of or relating to this Agreement, the prevailing party shall be entitled to recover reasonable attorneys’ fees. You acknowledge that you have read this Agreement, understand it, and that it is the complete and exclusive statement of your agreement with Adobe which supersedes any prior agreement, oral or written, between Adobe and you with respect to the licensing to you of the Software. No variation of the terms of this Agreement will be enforceable against Adobe unless Adobe gives its express consent, in writing, signed by an authorized signatory of Adobe. ICC Profile for TOYO INK Standard Color on Coated paper (TOYO Offset Coated 2.1) This ICC Profile (TOYO Offset Coated 2.1) characterizes Japanese offset press on Coated paper and is fully compatible with ICC profile format. About “TOYO INK Standard Color on Coated paper” This is the standard for color reproduction of sheet-fed offset press on Coated paper made by TOYO INK MFG.CO., LTD. (“TOYO INK”). This standard is made from printing test with using TOYO INK’s sheet-fed offset printing inks and TOYO INK’s own printing conditions. “TOYO INK Standard Color on Coated paper” is compatible with “JAPAN COLOR”. Agreement 1. The reproduction of images on a printer or a monitor using this ICC Profile do not completely match the TOYO INK Standard Color on Coated paper. 2. Any and all copyrights of this ICC Profile shall remain in TOYO INK; therefore you shall not transfer, provide, rent, distribute, disclose, or grant any rights in this ICC Profile to any third party without the prior written consent of TOYO INK. 3. In no event will TOYO INK its directors, officers, employees or agents be liable to you for any consequential or incidential, either direct or indirect, damages(including damages for loss of business profits, business interruption, loss of business information, and the like) arising out of the use or inability to use this ICC Profile. 4. TOYO INK shall not be responsible for answering any question related to this ICC Profile.x-6 5. All company names and product names used in this document is the trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective holder. This ICC Profile made by GretagMacbeth ProfileMaker and granted TOYO INK certain license to distribute by GretagMacbeth AG. TOYO Offset Coated 2.1 © TOYO INK MFG. CO., LTD. 2004 DIC STANDARD COLOR PROFILE LICENSE AGREEMENT IMPORTANT: PLEASE READ THIS STANDARD COLOR PROFILE LICENSE AGREEMENT ("LICENSE AGREEMENT") CAREFULLY BEFORE USING THE DIC STANDARD COLOR PROFILE, INCLUDING THE DIC STANDARD SFC_AM2.0, DIC STANDARD SFM_AM2.0, DIC STANDARD SFU_AM2.0, DIC STANDARD SFC_FM2.0, DIC WAKIMIZU SFC_AM2.0, DIC WAKIMIZU SFC_FM2.0, DIC ABILIO SFC_AM1.0, DIC HY-BRYTE SFC_AM1.0, DIC STANDARD WEBC_AM2.1, DIC STANDARD WEBC_FM2.1, DIC NEWSCOLOR_AM1.0, DIC NEWSCOLOR_FM1.0, PROVIDED BY DIC HEREWITH, AND ANY CORRESPONDIMG ONLINE OR ELECTRONC DOCUMENTATION AND ALL UPDATES OR UPGRADES OF THE ABOVE THAT ARE PROVIDED TO YOU (COLLECTIVELY, THE "PROFILE"). THIS LICENSE AGREEMENT IS A LEGAL AGREEMENT BETWEEN YOU (EITHER AN INDIVIDUAL OR, IF ACQUIRED BY OR FOR AN ENTITY, AN ENTITY) AND DIC CORPORATION, A JAPANESE COMPANY ("DIC"). THIS LICENSE AGREEMENT PROVIDES A LICENSE TO USE THE PROFILE AND CONTAINS WARRANTY INFORMATION AND LIABILITY DISCLAIMERS. IF YOU DO NOT AGREE TO BE BOUND BY ALL OF THESE TERMS, YOU MAY NOT USE THE PROFILE. 1. License Grant DIC grants you a gratis non-exclusive and non-transferable license to use the Profile and to allow your employees and authorized agents, if any, to use the Profile, solely in connection with their work for you, subject to all of the limitations and restrictions in this License Agreement. 2. Ownership The foregoing license gives you limited license to use the Profile. You will own the rights in the media containing the recorded Profile, but DIC retains all right, title and interest, including all copyright and intellectual property rights, in and to, the Profile and all copies thereof. All rights not specifically granted in this License Agreement, including all copyrights, are reserved by DIC. 3. Term a. This License Agreement is effective until terminated. b. You may terminate this License Agreement by notifying DIC in writing of your intention to terminate this License Agreement and by destroying, all copies of the Profile in your possession or control. c. DIC may terminate this License Agreement without prior notice to you if you fail to comply with any of the terms and conditions of this License Agreement (either directly or through your employees or agents), retroactive to the time of such failure to comply. In such event, you must immediately stop using the Profile and destroy all copies of the Profile in your possession or control. d. All provisions in this License Agreement relating to warranty disclaimers (Section 5) and the limitation of liability (Section 6) shall survive any termination of this License Agreement.x-7 4. License Method and Restrictions a. You may install and use the Profile on a single desktop computer; provided, however, that, notwithstanding anything contrary contained herein, you may not use the Profile on any network system or share, install or use the Profile concurrently on different computers, or electronically transfer the Profile from one computer to another or over a network. b. You may not make or distribute copies, fix, alter, merge, modify, adapt, sublicense, transfer, sell, rent, lease, gift or distribute all or a portion of the Profile, or modify the Profile or create derivative works based upon the Profile. c. You acknowledge that the Profile is not intended for any usage which may cause death or physical injury or environmental damage and agree not to use the Profile for such usage. d. You shall not use the Profile to develop any software or other technology having the same primary function as the Profile, including but not limited to using the Profile in any development or test procedure that seeks to develop like software or other technology, or to determine if such software or other technology performs in a similar manner as the Profile. e. DIC and other trademarks contained in the Profile are trademarks or registered trademarks of DIC in Japan and/or other countries. You may not remove or alter any trademark, trade names, product names, logo, copyright or other proprietary notices, legends, symbols or labels in the Profile. This License Agreement does not authorize you to use DIC’s or its licensors’ names or any of their respective trademarks. 5. WARRANTY DISCLAIMER a. THE PROFILE IS PROVIDED TO YOU FREE OF CHARGE, AND ON AN "AS-IS" BASIS, IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE TERMS AND COONDITIONS OF THIS LICENSE AGREEMENT. DIC PROVIDES NO TECHNICAL SUPPORT, WARRANTIES OR REMEDIES FOR THE PROFILE. b. DIC DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES AND REPRESENTATIONS, WHETHER EXPRESS, IMPLIED, OR OTHERWISE, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, NONINFRINGEMENT, TITLE AND QUIET ENJOYMENT. YOU SHALL ASSUME AND BE FULLY LIABLE AND RESPONSIBLE FOR ALL RISKS IN CONNECTION WITH YOUR USE OF THE PROFILE. DIC DOES NOT WARRANT THAT THE PROFILE IS FREE OF DEFECTS OR FLAWS OR WILL OPERATE WITHOUT INTERRUPTION, AND IS NOT RESPONSIBLE FORCORRECTING OR REPAIRING ANY DEFECTS OR FLAWS, FOR FEE OR GRATIS. NO RIGHTS OR REMEDIES WILL BE CONFERRED ON YOU UNLESS EXPRESSLY GRANTED HEREIN. 6. LIMITATION OF LIABILITY DIC SHALL NOT BE LIABLE TO YOU OR ANY THIRD PARTY FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, PUNITIVE, COVER OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, DAMAGES FOR THE INABILITY TO USE EQUIPMENT OR ACCESS DATA, LOSS OF BUSINESS, LOSS OF PROFITS, BUSINESS INTERRUPTION OR THE LIKE), ARISING OUT OF THE USE OF, OR INABILITY TO USE, THE PROFILE AND BASED ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY INCLUDING BREACH OF CONTRACT, BREACH OF WARRANTY, TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE), PRODUCT LIABILITY OR OTHERWISE, EVEN IF DIC OR ITS REPRESENTATIVES HAVE BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. THE FOREGOING LIMITATIONS ON LIABILITY SHALL APPLY TO ALL ASPECTS OF THIS LICENSE AGREEMENT. 7. General a. This License Agreement shall be governed and construed in accordance with the laws of Japan, without giving effect to principles of conflict of laws. If any provision of this License Agreement shall be held by a court of competent jurisdiction to be contrary to law, that provision will be enforced to the maximum extent permissible, and the remaining provisions of x-8 this License Agreement will remain in full force and effect. You hereby consent to the exclusive jurisdiction and venue of Tokyo District Court to resolve any disputes arising under this License Agreement. b. This License Agreement contains the complete agreement between the parties with respect to the subject matter hereof, and supersedes all prior or contemporaneous agreements or understandings, whether oral or written. You agree that any varying or additional terms contained in any written notification or document issued by you in relation to the Profile licensed hereunder shall be of no effect. c. The failure or delay of DIC to exercise any of its rights under this License Agreement or upon any breach of this License Agreement shall not be deemed a waiver of those rights or of the breach. For EU member states only This symbol means: Do not dispose of this product together with your household waste! Please contact the Local Authority for appropriate disposal instructions. In the case of a new device being purchased, the used one can also be given to our dealer for appropriate disposal. Recycling of this product will help to conserve natural resources and prevent potential negative consequences for the environment and human health caused by inappropriate waste handling. This product complies with RoHS (2002/95/EC) directive.Contents Contents x-9 1 Introduction .................................................................................................... 1-1 Getting Acquainted with Your Printer .......................................................... 1-2 Space Requirements................................................................................... 1-2 Printer Parts ................................................................................................ 1-4 Front View............................................................................................. 1-4 Rear View ............................................................................................. 1-5 Front View with Options ........................................................................ 1-6 Rear View with Options......................................................................... 1-7 Printer Driver CD/DVD ................................................................................... 1-8 PostScript Drivers ....................................................................................... 1-8 PCL Drivers................................................................................................. 1-8 PPD Files .................................................................................................... 1-8 Utilities and Documentation CD/DVD .......................................................... 1-9 Utilities......................................................................................................... 1-9 Documentation.................................................................................... 1-10 System Requirements ................................................................................. 1-11x-10 Contents 2 Using the Printer Driver ................................................................................ 2-1 Selecting Driver Options/Defaults (for Windows) ....................................... 2-2 Windows Server 2008/Vista/XP/Server 2003/2000 (KONICA MINOLTA mc1650 PCL6, KONICA MINOLTA mc1650 PS) .......................................................................................... 2-2 Uninstalling the Printer Driver (for Windows) ............................................. 2-4 Windows Server 2008/Vista/XP/Server 2003/2000 (KONICA MINOLTA mc1650 PCL6, KONICA MINOLTA mc1650 PS) .......................................................................................... 2-4 Displaying Printer Driver Settings (for Windows) ...................................... 2-5 Windows Server 2008/Vista.................................................................. 2-5 Windows XP/Server 2003 ..................................................................... 2-5 Windows 2000 ...................................................................................... 2-5 Using the Postscript and PCL Printer Driver .............................................. 2-6 Common Buttons ........................................................................................ 2-6 OK......................................................................................................... 2-6 Cancel................................................................................................... 2-6 Apply ..................................................................................................... 2-6 Help....................................................................................................... 2-6 Favorite Setting..................................................................................... 2-6 Advanced Tab (PostScript Printer Driver Only)........................................... 2-7 Basic Tab .................................................................................................... 2-8 Layout Tab .................................................................................................. 2-8 Cover Page Tab.......................................................................................... 2-8 Watermark/Overlay Tab.............................................................................. 2-8 Quality Tab.................................................................................................. 2-9 Other Tab.................................................................................................... 2-9 Limitations on printer driver functions installed with Point and Print ......... 2-10 3 Using the Status Monitor (Windows Only) .................................................. 3-1 Working with the Status Monitor .................................................................. 3-2 Introduction ................................................................................................. 3-2 Operating Environment ............................................................................... 3-2 Opening the Status Monitor ........................................................................ 3-2 Using the Status Monitor............................................................................. 3-2 Recognizing Status Monitor Alerts .............................................................. 3-3 Recovering from a Status Monitor Alert ...................................................... 3-3 Closing the Status Monitor ........................................................................... 3-3 4 Printer Control Panel and Configuration Menu .......................................... 4-1 About the Control Panel ................................................................................ 4-2 Control Panel Indicators and Keys.............................................................. 4-2 Toner Supply Indicators .............................................................................. 4-4 Configuration Menu Overview ...................................................................... 4-5 Menu ........................................................................................................... 4-5 MAIN MENU................................................................................................ 4-6Contents x-11 PRINT MENU........................................................................................ 4-6 PAPER MENU ...................................................................................... 4-8 QUALITY MENU ................................................................................. 4-13 INTERFACE MENU ............................................................................ 4-17 SYSTEM DEFAULT............................................................................ 4-22 SERVICE MENU................................................................................. 4-26 LANGUAGE MENU................................................................................... 4-27 5 Media Handling .............................................................................................. 5-1 Print Media ..................................................................................................... 5-2 Media Types ................................................................................................... 5-3 Plain Paper.................................................................................................. 5-3 Thick Stock.................................................................................................. 5-4 Envelopes ................................................................................................... 5-5 Labels.......................................................................................................... 5-6 Letterhead................................................................................................... 5-7 Postcards .................................................................................................... 5-7 Printable Area ................................................................................................ 5-8 Envelopes ................................................................................................... 5-9 Page Margins.............................................................................................. 5-9 Loading Media .............................................................................................. 5-10 Tray 1 (Multipurpose Tray)........................................................................ 5-10 Loading Plain Paper............................................................................ 5-10 Other Media ........................................................................................ 5-13 Loading Envelopes ............................................................................. 5-13 Loading Labels/Postcard/Thick Stock and Letterhead........................ 5-16 Tray 2........................................................................................................ 5-18 Loading Plain Paper............................................................................ 5-18 Duplexing ..................................................................................................... 5-21 Output Tray .................................................................................................. 5-22 Media Storage .............................................................................................. 5-23 6 Replacing Consumables ............................................................................... 6-1 Replacing Consumables ............................................................................... 6-2 About Toner Cartridges............................................................................... 6-2 Replacing a Toner Cartridge................................................................. 6-5 Removing All Toner Cartridges........................................................... 6-12 Replacing the Imaging Cartridge............................................................... 6-16 Replacing the Fuser Unit........................................................................... 6-19 7 Maintaining the Printer .................................................................................. 7-1 Maintaining the Printer .................................................................................. 7-2 Cleaning the Printer ....................................................................................... 7-4 Exterior........................................................................................................ 7-4 Interior......................................................................................................... 7-5 Cleaning the Media Feed Roller ........................................................... 7-5x-12 Contents Cleaning the Print Head Window .......................................................... 7-9 Cleaning the Media Feed Rollers for Tray 2 ....................................... 7-18 Cleaning the Media Feed Rollers for the attachment.......................... 7-20 Cleaning the Duplex Feed Rollers ...................................................... 7-22 8 Troubleshooting ............................................................................................ 8-1 Introduction .................................................................................................... 8-2 Printing a Configuration Page ...................................................................... 8-2 Preventing Media Misfeeds ........................................................................... 8-4 Understanding the Media Path ..................................................................... 8-5 Clearing Media Misfeeds .............................................................................. 8-5 Media Misfeed Messages and Clearing Procedures................................... 8-6 Clearing a Media Misfeed in the Printer................................................ 8-7 Clearing a Media Misfeed From Tray 1............................................... 8-13 Clearing a Media Misfeed From Tray 2............................................... 8-14 Clearing a Media Misfeed from the Duplex Option ............................. 8-17 Solving Problems with Media Misfeeds ..................................................... 8-19 Solving Other Problems .............................................................................. 8-21 Solving Problems with Printing Quality .................................................... 8-25 Status, Error, and Service Messages ......................................................... 8-31 Standard Status Messages....................................................................... 8-31 Error Messages (Warning)........................................................................ 8-32 Error Messages (Operator Call)................................................................ 8-34 Service Messages..................................................................................... 8-36 9 Installing Accessories ................................................................................... 9-1 Introduction .................................................................................................... 9-2 Tray 2 .............................................................................................................. 9-3 Installing Tray 2........................................................................................... 9-3 Duplex Option ................................................................................................ 9-6 Installing Attachment................................................................................... 9-6 Installing the Duplex Option ........................................................................ 9-8 A Appendix ........................................................................................................A-1 Technical Specifications ...............................................................................A-2 Printer..........................................................................................................A-2 Consumable Life Expectancy Chart............................................................A-5 Our Concern for Environmental Protection ................................................A-6 What is an ENERGY STAR product? ...................................................A-6Introduction1-2 Getting Acquainted with Your Printer Getting Acquainted with Your Printer Space Requirements To ensure easy operation, consumable replacement and maintenance, adhere to the recommended space requirements detailed below. Front View 496 mm (19.5") 100 mm (3.9") 396 mm (15.6") 707 mm (27.8") 100 mm (3.9") 380 mm (14.9") 520 mm (20.5") 127 mm (5.0") 245 mm (9.6") 275 mm (10.8") 100 mm (3.9") Side ViewGetting Acquainted with Your Printer 1-3 " The option appears shaded in the above illustrations. " The option appears shaded in the above illustrations. Side View with Options 922 mm (36.3") 100 mm (3.9") 435 mm (17.1") 637 mm (25.0") 157 mm (6.2") 130 mm (5.1") 245 mm (9.6") 392 mm (15.4") (when Tray 2 and the duplex option are installed) 100 mm (3.9") Side View with Options 919 mm (36.2") 100 mm (3.9") 435 mm (17.1") 582 mm (22.9") 157 mm (6.2") 127 mm (5.0") 245 mm (9.6") 337 mm (13.3") (when the attachment and duplex option are installed) 100 mm (3.9")1-4 Getting Acquainted with Your Printer Printer Parts The following drawings illustrate the parts of your printer referred to throughout this guide, so please take some time to become familiar with them. Front View 1—Output tray 2—Control panel 3—Front cover 4—Dust cover 5—Tray 1 (Multipurpose tray) 6—Top cover 7—Fuser unit 8—Fuser separator levers 9—Fuser cover lever 10—Imaging cartridge 11—Toner cartridge 1 2 3 4 6 5 8 8 7 10 11 9 7 11 10Getting Acquainted with Your Printer 1-5 Rear View 1—Power switch 2—Power connection 3—USB port 4—10Base-T/100Base-TX Ethernet Interface port 3 4 2 11-6 Getting Acquainted with Your Printer Front View with Options (when Tray 2 is installed) 1—Lower feeder unit (Tray 2) (when Tray 2 and duplex option are installed) 1—Duplex option 2—Lower feeder unit (Tray 2) (when the attachment and duplex option are installed) 1—Duplex option 2—Attachment 1 1 2 1 2Getting Acquainted with Your Printer 1-7 Rear View with Options (when Tray 2 and duplex option are installed) 1—Duplex option 2—Lower feeder unit (Tray 2) (when the attachment and duplex option are installed) 1—Duplex option 2—Attachment 1 2 1 21-8 Printer Driver CD/DVD Printer Driver CD/DVD PostScript Drivers PCL Drivers PPD Files " For details on the installation of the Windows printer drivers, refer to the Installation Guide. Operating System Use/Benefit Windows Server 2008/Vista/XP/ Server 2003/2000 These drivers give you access to all of the printer features. See also “Displaying Printer Driver Settings (for Windows)” on page 2-5. Windows Server 2008/Vista/XP/ Server 2003 for 64bit Operating System Use/Benefit Windows Server 2008/Vista/XP/ Server 2003/2000 These drivers give you access to all of the printer features. See also “Displaying Printer Driver Settings (for Windows)” on page 2-5. Windows Server 2008/Vista/XP/ Server 2003 for 64bit Operating System Use/Benefit Macintosh OS X (10.2.8/10.3/10.4/ 10.5) These files are required in order to use the printer driver for each operating system. For details of the Macintosh and Linux printer drivers, refer to the Reference Guide on the Utilities and Documentation CD/DVD. Macintosh OS X Server (10.2/10.3/ 10.4/10.5) Red Hat Linux 9.0, SuSE Linux 8.2Utilities and Documentation CD/DVD 1-9 Utilities and Documentation CD/DVD Utilities Utility Use/Benefit Status Monitor (Windows only) The current status of the printer in addition to the status of consumables and error information can be viewed. For details, refer to chapter 3 “Using the Status Monitor (Windows Only)” . PageScope Net Care Device Manager Printer management functions such as status monitoring and network settings can be accessed. For details, refer to the PageScope Net Care Device Manager User’s Guide on the Utilities and Documentation CD/DVD. PageScope Network Setup Using the TCP/IP and IPX protocols, basic network printer settings can be specified. For details, refer to the PageScope Network Setup User Manual on the Utilities and Documentation CD/DVD. PageScope Plug and Print This utility automatically detects a new printer connected to the network and creates a print object on the Windows print server. For details, refer to the PageScope Plug and Print Quick Guide on the Utilities and Documentation CD/DVD. PageScope NDPS Gateway This network utility enables printers and KONICA MINOLTA multifunctional products to be used in an NDPS environment. For details, refer to the PageScope NDPS Gateway User Manual on the Utilities and Documentation CD/DVD. PageScope Direct Print This application provides functions for sending PDF and TIFF files directly to a printer to be printed. For details, refer to the PageScope Direct Print User’s Guide on the Utilities and Documentation CD/DVD.1-10 Utilities and Documentation CD/DVD Documentation Documentation Use/Benefit Installation Guide This manual provides details on the initial operations that must be performed in order to use this printer, such as setting up the printer and installing the drivers. User’s Guide (this manual) This manual provides details on general daily operations, such as using the drivers and control panel and replacing consumables. Reference Guide This manual provides details on installing the Macintosh and Linux drivers and on specifying settings for the network, and the printer management utility. Service & Support Guide The Need Assistance sheet provides information on product support and servicing.System Requirements 1-11 System Requirements „ Personal computer – Pentium 2: 400 MHz (Pentium 3: 500 MHz or higher is recommended) – PowerPC G3 or later (G4 or later is recommended) – Macintosh equipped with an Intel processor „ Operating System – Microsoft Windows Windows Server 2008 Standard/Enterprise, Windows Server 2008 Standard/Enterprise x64 Edition, Windows Vista Home Basic/Home Premium/Ultimate/Business/Enterprise, Windows Vista Home Basic /Home Premium /Ultimate/Business / Enterprise x64 Edition, Windows XP Home Edition/Professional (Service Pack 1 or later; Service Pack 2 or later is recommended), Windows XP Professional x64 Edition, Windows Server 2003, Windows Server 2003 x64 Edition, Windows 2000 (Service Pack 4 or later) – Mac OS X (10.2.8 or later; We recommend installing the newest patch), Mac OS X Server (10.2 or later) – Red Hat Linux 9.0, SuSE Linux 8.2 „ Free hard disk space – Approximately 20 MB of free hard disk space for printer driver and Status Monitor – Approximately 128 MB of free hard disk space for image processing „ RAM 128 MB or more „ CD/DVD-ROM drive „ I/O interface – 10Base-T/100Base-TX Ethernet interface port – USB 2.0 High-Speed compliant port " For details on the Macintosh and Linux printer drivers, refer to the Reference Guide on the Utilities and Documentation CD/DVD.1-12 System RequirementsUsing the Printer Driver2-2 Selecting Driver Options/Defaults (for Windows) Selecting Driver Options/Defaults (for Windows) Before you start working with your printer, you are advised to verify/change the default driver settings. Also, in case you have options installed, you should “declare” the options in the driver. Windows Server 2008/Vista/XP/Server 2003/2000 (KONICA MINOLTA mc1650 PCL6, KONICA MINOLTA mc1650 PS) 1 Choose the driver’s properties as follows: – (Windows Server 2008/Vista) From the Start menu, click Control Panel, then Hardware and Sound, and then click Printers to open the Printers directory. Right-click the KONICA MINOLTA mc1650 PCL6 or KONICA MINOLTA mc1650 PS printer icon, and then click Properties. – (Windows XP/Server 2003) From the Start menu, choose Printers and Faxes to display the Printers and Faxes directory. Right-click the KONICA MINOLTA mc1650 PCL6 or KONICA MINOLTA mc1650 PS printer icon and choose Properties. – (Windows 2000) From the Start menu, choose Settings and then Printers to display the Printers directory. Right-click the KONICA MINOLTA mc1650 PCL6 or KONICA MINOLTA mc1650 PS printer icon and choose Properties. 2 If you have installed options, proceed with the next step. Otherwise, skip to step 9. 3 Select the Configure tab. 4 Check that the installed options are correctly listed. If not, proceed with the next step. Otherwise, continue with step 8. 5 Click the Refresh to automatically configure installed options. " The Refresh is available only if bi-directional communication is available with the printer; otherwise it is grayed out. 6 From the Device Options list, select an option, one at a time, and then select Enable or Disable from the Settings menu. 7 Click Apply. 8 Select the General tab. 9 Click Printing Preferences. The Printing Preference dialog box appears.Selecting Driver Options/Defaults (for Windows) 2-3 10 Select the default settings for your printer, such as the default media format you use, on the appropriate tabs. 11 Click Apply. 12 Click OK to exit from the Print preference dialog box. 13 Click OK to exit from the Properties dialog box.2-4 Uninstalling the Printer Driver (for Windows) Uninstalling the Printer Driver (for Windows) This section describes how to uninstall the printer driver if necessary. " You must have administrator privileges in order to uninstall the printer driver. " If the User Account Control window appears when uninstalling on Windows Server 2008/Vista, click the Allow button or the Continue button. Windows Server 2008/Vista/XP/Server 2003/2000 (KONICA MINOLTA mc1650 PCL6, KONICA MINOLTA mc1650 PS) 1 Close all applications. 2 Choose the Uninstall Program as follows: – (Windows Server 2008/Vista/XP/Server 2003) From the Start menu, choose All programs, KONICA MINOLTA, magicolor 1650, and then Uninstall Printer Driver. – (Windows 2000) From the Start menu, choose Programs, KONICA MINOLTA, magicolor 1650, and then Uninstall Printer Driver. 3 When the Uninstall dialog box appears, select the name of the driver to be deleted, and then click the Uninstall button. 4 Click Uninstall. 5 Click OK, and restart your computer. 6 The printer driver will be uninstalled from your computer.Displaying Printer Driver Settings (for Windows) 2-5 Displaying Printer Driver Settings (for Windows) Windows Server 2008/Vista 1 From the Start menu, click Control Panel, then Hardware and Sound, and then click Printers to open the Printers directory. 2 Right-click the KONICA MINOLTA mc1650 PCL6, or KONICA MINOLTA mc1650 PS printer icon, and then click Printing Preferences. Windows XP/Server 2003 1 From the Start menu, choose Printers and Faxes to display the Printers and Faxes directory. 2 Right-click the KONICA MINOLTA mc1650 PCL6 or KONICA MINOLTA mc1650 PS printer icon and choose Printing Preferences. Windows 2000 1 From the Start menu, point to Settings, and then click Printers to display the Printers directory. 2 Right-click the KONICA MINOLTA mc1650 PCL6 or KONICA MINOLTA mc1650 PS printer icon and choose Printing Preferences.2-6 Using the Postscript and PCL Printer Driver Using the Postscript and PCL Printer Driver Common Buttons The buttons described below appear on each tab. OK Click to exit the Properties dialog box, saving any changes made. Cancel Click to exit the Properties dialog box without saving any changes made. Apply Click to save all changes without exiting the Properties dialog box. Help Click to view the help. Favorite Setting This allows the current settings to be saved. To save the current settings, specify the desired settings, and then click Add. Specify the settings described below, and then click OK. „ Name: Type in the name of the settings to be saved. „ Icon: Select an icon from the icon list to easily identify the settings. The selected icon appears in the drop-down list. „ Sharing: Specify whether or not the settings to be saved can be used by other users logged onto the computer. „ Comment: Add a simple comment to the settings to be saved. Afterward, the saved settings can be selected from the drop-down list. To change the registered setting, click Edit. In addition, predefined settings can be selected. The predefined settings are those for "2-up", "Photo" and "Grayscale". Select Defaults from the drop-down list to reset the functions in all tabs to their default values.Using the Postscript and PCL Printer Driver 2-7 „ Printer View Click the button to display an image of the printer in the figure area. When this button is clicked, it changes to the Paper View button (when a tab other than the Quality tab is selected) or the Quality View button (when the Quality tab is selected). " This button does not appear on the Advanced tab. „ Paper View Click the button to display a sample of the page layout in the figure area. When this button is clicked, it changes to the Printer View button. " This button does not appear on the Quality tab. „ Quality View Click the button to display a sample of the settings selected in the Quality tab. When this button is clicked, it changes to the Printer View button. " This button appears only when the Quality tab is selected. „ Default Click the button to reset the settings to their defaults. " This button does not appear on the Advanced tab. " When this button is clicked, the settings in the displayed dialog box are reset to their defaults. The settings on other tabs are not changed. Advanced Tab (PostScript Printer Driver Only) The Advanced Tab allows you to „ Select whether to enable or disable the settings for advanced printing functions (such as booklet printing) „ Specify the PostScript output method „ Specify whether or not the error messages of a print job are printed „ Print a mirror image „ Specify whether or not the application can directly output PostScript data2-8 Using the Postscript and PCL Printer Driver Basic Tab The Basic Tab allows you to „ Specify the orientation of the media „ Specify the size of the original document „ Select the output media size „ Zoom (expand/reduce) documents „ Specify the paper source „ Specify the type of media „ Specify the number of copies Layout Tab The Layout Tab allows you to „ Print several pages of a document on the same page (N-up printing) „ Print a single copy for enlargement and print several pages (PCL printer driver only) „ Specify booklet printing (when the duplex option is installed) „ Rotate the print image 180 degrees „ Specify whether or not blank pages are printed (PCL printer driver only) „ Specify duplex (double-sided) printing (when the duplex option is installed) „ Adjust the binding margin „ Adjust the printing position (PCL printer driver only) Cover Page Tab The Cover Page Tab allows you to „ Print front and back cover pages and separator pages „ Specify the paper tray that contains the paper for the front and back cover pages and separator pages Watermark/Overlay Tab " Be sure to use overlays with print jobs with a paper size and orientation that matches the overlay form. In addition, if settings have been specified for “N-up” or “Booklet” in the printer driver, the overlay form cannot be adjusted to match the specified settings.Using the Postscript and PCL Printer Driver 2-9 The settings in the "Watermark" function of the Watermark/Overlay tab allows you to „ Select the watermark to be used „ Create, edit or delete watermarks „ Print a frame around watermarks „ Print transparent (shaded) watermarks „ Print the watermark on only the first page „ Print the watermark repeatedly throughout the all pages The settings in the "Overlay" function of the Watermark/Overlay tab allows you to „ Select the form to use „ Add or delete overlay files „ Create a form (PCL printer driver only) „ Specify that the document and form are printed overlapping (PCL printer driver only) „ Display the form information (PCL printer driver only) „ Print the form on All Pages, First Page, Even Pages and Odd Pages „ Place the form in back of the document or in front on the printed document (PCL printer driver only) Quality Tab The Quality Tab allows you to „ Switch between color and grayscale printing „ Specify the printer color settings (Quick Color) „ Specify the resolution for the printout „ Specify the amount of details in graphic patterns (PCL printer driver only) „ Specify the image compression method (PCL printer driver only) „ Select whether or not economy printing is used „ Specify the format of fonts that are to be downloaded „ Print using the printer's fonts Other Tab The Other Tab allows you to „ Select that Microsoft Excel sheets are not to be divided when printing2-10 Using the Postscript and PCL Printer Driver „ Select that the white background of Microsoft PowerPoint data does not hide overlay files (PCL printer driver only) „ Send a notification by e-mail when printing is finished „ Shows the version information for the printer driver Limitations on printer driver functions installed with Point and Print If Point and Print is performed with the following server and client combinations, there are limitations on some printer driver functions. „ Server and client combinations Server: Windows Server 2008/Server 2003/XP/2000/Vista Client: Windows Server 2008/Server 2003/XP/2000/Vista „ Functions with limitations applied Booklet, Skip Blank Pages, Front Cover Page, Back Cover Page, Separator Page, Create Overlay, Print Overlay, WatermarkUsing the Status Monitor (Windows Only)3-2 Working with the Status Monitor Working with the Status Monitor Introduction The Status Monitor shows information about the current status of the printer. The Status Monitor can be installed from the Utilities and Documentation CD/ DVD. For details on the installation, refer to the Reference Guide on the Utilities and Documentation CD/DVD. Operating Environment The Status Monitor can be used on computers running Windows Vista/XP/ Server 2003/2000 connected to the printer using the Ethernet connection. Opening the Status Monitor Use one of the following steps to open the Status Monitor: „ Windows Vista/XP/Server 2003—From the Start menu, choose All Programs, KONICA MINOLTA, and then Status Monitor. Double-click the Status Monitor icon displayed in the taskbar. „ Windows 2000—From the Start menu, choose Programs, KONICA MINOLTA, and then Status Monitor. Double-click the Status Monitor icon displayed in the task bar. Using the Status Monitor Status Tab „ Select Printer—Selects the printer whose status is displayed. In addition, the messages that appear in the message window of the selected printer are displayed. „ Graphic—Normally, the Konica Minolta logo is displayed. When a printer error is detected, a graphic representation of the printer is shown, and the location of the problem is indicated. When the background of the printer graphic is red or yellow, there is an error and the job has been interrupted. „ Advanced Options—Click Advanced Options to display the Advanced Options dialog box. From the Advanced Options dialog box, select whether the Status Monitor automatically starts when the operating system is started and whether error notifications are sent by e-mail. „ Order Supplies—Click Order Supplies to automatically access the order page for supplies. The address of the page that is accessed can be specified from the Advanced Options dialog box.Recognizing Status Monitor Alerts 3-3 „ Printer Alerts—Displays text messages that alert you of conditions such as low toner. „ Recovery Instructions—Provides you with explanations of what you need to do in order to correct problems and recover from error conditions. Consumables Tab Displays the usage status (approximate percentage remaining) of each toner consumables. „ Order Supplies—Click Order Supplies to automatically access the order page for supplies. The address of the page that is accessed can be specified from the Advanced Options dialog box. „ Refresh—Rechecks the supplies and displays their status. " Click Help to display windows containing explanations of the Status Monitor functions. Refer to this help for detailed information. " The percentages remaining for the consumables displayed using the Status Monitor may be different from the actual amounts and should be used only as reference. Recognizing Status Monitor Alerts When the Status Monitor detects a printing problem, the icon on the Windows task bar changes from green (normal) to yellow (warning), orange or red (error), depending on the severity of the printer problem. Recovering from a Status Monitor Alert When the Status Monitor notifies you of a printing problem, double-click its icon on the Windows task bar to open the Status Monitor. The Status Monitor identifies what type of error has occurred. Closing the Status Monitor Click Close to close the Status Monitor window. To exit Status Monitor, right-click the Status Monitor icon in the taskbar, and then click Exit.3-4 Closing the Status MonitorPrinter Control Panel and Configuration Menu4-2 About the Control Panel About the Control Panel The control panel, located on the top of the printer, allows you to direct the printer’s operation. In addition, it displays the current status of the printer, including any condition that needs your attention. Control Panel Indicators and Keys No. Indicator Off On 1 The printer is not ready to accept data. The printer is ready to accept data. 2 No problem. The printer requires operator attention (usually accompanied by a status message in the message window.) Ready Error Cancel 8 MESSAGE WINDOW 3 1 2 6 5 4 7 Ready ErrorAbout the Control Panel 4-3 No. Indicator Function 3 „ Moves up in the menu structure „ Within a menu choice that is changeable character by character, scrolls upward through the available characters 4 „ Moves right in the menu structure „ Moves right through the available menu choices 5 „ Moves down in the menu structure. „ Within a menu choice that is changeable character by character, scrolls downward through the available characters 6 „ Moves left in the menu structure „ Moves left through the available menu choices 7 „ Cancels the currently displayed menu choice „ Allows you to cancel one or all print jobs that are currently being printed or processed: 1. Press the Cancel key. 2. Press the ) or * keys to select either CANCEL JOB/CURRENT or CANCEL JOB/ALL 3. Press the Menu Select key. The print job(s) is (are) cancelled. 8 „ Enters the menu system „ Moves down in the menu structure „ Selects the displayed menu choice Cancel4-4 About the Control Panel Toner Supply Indicators The indicators shown below will appear, indicating the amount of toner that remains in the yellow (Y), magenta (M), cyan (C), and black (K) toner cartridges. I D L EConfiguration Menu Overview 4-5 Configuration Menu Overview The configuration menu accessible from the control panel is structured as shown below. Menu " If MAIN MENU/SYSTEM DEFAULT/SECURITY/CONFIG/ ENABLE is set to ON, the user password or administrator password must be entered to display the main menu. The displayed menu is different according to the authority of the entered password. For details on the default passwords, refer to “SYSTEM DEFAULT” on page 4-22. PRINT MENU PAPER MENU INTERFACE MENU SYSTEM DEFAULT SERVICE MENU QUALITY MENU IDLE LANGUAGE MAIN MENU4-6 Configuration Menu Overview MAIN MENU PRINT MENU With this menu, printer information, such as the configuration page and the demo page, can be printed. " All factory default values are shown in bold. MENU MAP Settings YES/NO Prints the menu map. CONFIGURATION Settings YES/NO Prints the configuration page. STATISTICS PAGE Settings YES/NO Prints the statistics page such as the number of pages printed. POSTSCRIPT PCL MENU MAP DIRECTORY LIST CONFIGURATION FONT LIST DEMO STATISTICS PAGE PRINT MENUConfiguration Menu Overview 4-7 " The amounts remaining for the supplies status and coverage information displayed using the statistics page may be different from the actual amounts and should be used only as reference. FONT LIST POST SCRIPT Settings YES/NO Prints the PostScript font list. PCL Settings YES/NO Prints the PCL font list. DIRECTORY LIST Settings YES/NO Prints the directory list of the flash. DEMO Settings YES/NO Prints the demo page.4-8 Configuration Menu Overview PAPER MENU With this menu, the media used for printing can be managed. " * This menu item appears only if the duplex option is installed. ** These menu items appear only if an optional lower feeder unit is installed. TRAY 1 MODE TRAY1 MEDIA SIZE MEDIA TYPE TRAY2 ** MEDIA SIZE CUSTOM SIZE AUTO CONTINUE INPUT TRAY PAGE RECOVERY DUPLEX * ORIENTATION LENGTH (xx) WIDTH (xx) PAPER MENU TRAY CHAINING ** MAP ** LOGICAL TRAY 0 MODE LOGICAL TRAY 9 ~Configuration Menu Overview 4-9 " All factory default values are shown in bold. INPUT TRAY TRAY 1 MODE Settings AUTO/CASSETTE When printing from Tray 1, select whether the paper size and paper type set from the printer driver or the MEDIA SIZE and MEDIA TYPE settings set by selecting MAIN MENU/PAPER MENU/INPUT TRAY/TRAY 1 in the control panel have priority. If AUTO is selected, the printer driver settings have priority during printing. If CASSETTE is selected, printing is performed when the printer driver settings and the control panel settings are all the same. TRAY1 MEDIA SIZE Settings LETTER/LEGAL/ EXECUTIVE/A4/A5/B5/ B5(ISO)/G LETTER/ STATEMENT/FOLIO/UK QUARTO/FOOLSCAP/G LEGAL/C6/DL/ J-POSTCARD/KAI 16/ KAI 32/16K/SP FOLIO/ OFICIO/CUSTOM Select the setting for the size of paper loaded into Tray 1. "The default setting for North America is LETTER. The default setting for all other regions is A4. MEDIA TYPE Settings PLAIN PAPER/LABELS/ LETTERHEAD/ENVELOPE/ POSTCARD/THICK1/ THICK2 Select the setting for the type of paper loaded into Tray 1. TRAY2 MEDIA SIZE Settings LETTER/A4 Select the setting for the size of paper loaded into Tray 2. "The default setting for North America is LETTER. The default setting for all other regions is A4.4-10 Configuration Menu Overview CUSTOM SIZE WIDTH (xx) Settings 92-216 mm (3.63-8.50 inch)* * With inch measurements, the decimal point does not appear in the message window. For example, 3.63 inches appears as 363. Specify the width of the custom-sized paper loaded into Tray 1. "On the model for North America, the settings appear in inches and the menu item appears as WIDTH(IN). On the models for all other regions, the settings appear in millimeters and the menu item appears as WIDTH(MM). LENGTH (xx) Settings „ With plain paper 195-356 mm (7.69-14.01 inch)* „ With thick stock 184-297 mm (7.24-11.70 inch)* * With inch measurements, the decimal point does not appear in the message window. For example, 7.69 inches appears as 769. Specify the length of the custom-sized paper loaded into Tray 1. "On the model for North America, the settings appear in inches and the menu item appears as LENGTH(IN). On the models for all other regions, the settings appear in millimeters and the menu item appears as LENGTH(MM).Configuration Menu Overview 4-11 AUTO CONTINUE Settings ON/OFF If OFF is selected, an error occurs if the size of paper being printed on is different from the size of paper specified in the printer driver. If ON is selected, no error occurs if the size of paper being printed on is different from the size of paper specified in the printer driver. TRAY CHAINING Settings YES/NO If YES is selected and the specified paper tray runs out of paper during printing, a paper tray loaded with paper of the same size is automatically selected so printing can continue. If NO is selected and the specified paper tray runs out of paper, printing stops. MAP MODE Settings ON/OFF Select whether or not the Tray Mapping function is used. LOGICAL TRAY 0-9 Settings PHYSICAL TRAY 1/ PHYSICAL TRAY 2 Specify whether jobs received from another manufacturer’s printer driver are printed using Tray 1 or Tray 2. PHYSICAL TRAY 2 is the default only for LOGICAL TRAY 2. The default for all other logical trays is PHYSICAL TRAY 1. DUPLEX Settings OFF/SHORTEDGE/LONGEDGE If LONGEDGE is selected, the pages will be printed on both sides of the paper for long-edge binding. If SHORTEDGE is selected, the pages will be printed on both sides of the paper for short-edge binding. ORIENTATION Settings PORTRAIT/LANDSCAPE Specify the orientation of the media.4-12 Configuration Menu Overview PAGE RECOVERY Settings ON/OFF Select whether or not the page is printed again after recovering from a paper misfeed. If ON is selected, the page that was misfed is printed again. If OFF is selected, printing continues with the next page without printing the misfed page.Configuration Menu Overview 4-13 QUALITY MENU With this menu, settings for the print quality can be specified. BLACK CYAN MAGENTA TONER OUT ACTION REPLACE TONER AIDC REQUEST AIDC QUALITY MENU YELLOW P/H CLEAN UP MODE REMOVE ALL IMAGE REFRESH ECONOMY PRINT DUPLEX SPEED4-14 Configuration Menu Overview " All factory default values are shown in bold. REPLACE TONER BLACK Settings YES/NO If YES is selected, the carousel rotates to the black toner cartridge, so that it can be replaced. For details on replacing the toner cartridge, refer to “Replacing a Toner Cartridge” on page 6-5. CYAN Settings YES/NO If YES is selected, the carousel rotates to the cyan toner cartridge, so that it can be replaced. For details on replacing the toner cartridge, refer to “Replacing a Toner Cartridge” on page 6-5. MAGENTA Settings YES/NO If YES is selected, the carousel rotates to the magenta toner cartridge, so that it can be replaced. For details on replacing the toner cartridge, refer to “Replacing a Toner Cartridge” on page 6-5. YELLOW Settings YES/NO If YES is selected, the carousel rotates to the yellow toner cartridge, so that it can be replaced. For details on replacing the toner cartridge, refer to “Replacing a Toner Cartridge” on page 6-5. REMOVE ALL Settings YES/NO If YES is selected, the printer enters REMOVE ALL mode. This mode is used when removing all toner cartridges. For details on removing all toner cartridges, refer to “Removing All Toner Cartridges” on page 6-12. TONER OUT ACTION Settings STOP/CONTINUE If STOP is selected, printing stops when the toner cartridge is empty. If CONTINUE is selected, printing continues even if the toner cartridge is empty. However, the printing result are not guaranteed. If printing is continued, the message "X TONER LIFE END" appears and printing stops.Configuration Menu Overview 4-15 AIDC REQUEST AIDC Settings YES/NO If YES is selected, image adjustments are performed. "The AIDC function consumes toner. MODE Settings ON/OFF If ON is selected, the image adjustments are applied. If OFF is selected, image adjustments are not applied. P/H CLEAN UP Settings YES/NO If YES is selected, the printer enters P/H CLEAN UP mode. P/H CLEAN UP mode is a mode that allows the user to clean the print head window more easily. The print head window is not cleaned automatically. For details on cleaning the print head window, refer to “Cleaning the Print Head Window” on page 7-9. IMAGE REFRESH Settings YES/NO Use when thin white horizontal lines appear at intervals on images. "The IMAGE REFRESH function consumes toner. ECONOMY PRINT Settings ON/OFF Select whether to print graphics with a reduced density by reducing the amount of toner that is used. If ON is selected, the amount of toner used is reduced when printing. If OFF is selected, the amount of toner used is not reduced when printing.4-16 Configuration Menu Overview DUPLEX SPEED Settings AUTOMATIC/SPEED/QUALITY Select the print speed for double-sided printing. If AUTOMATIC is selected, the print speed is automatically selected. If SPEED is selected, the print speed has priority; however, the print quality may decrease. If QUALITY is selected, the print quality has priority; therefore, the print speed will decrease while the print quality may increase.Configuration Menu Overview 4-17 INTERFACE MENU With this menu, interface settings can be specified. The printer must be rebooted after any setting in the ETHERNET menu (for example, the TCP/IP address) is changed. Therefore, the following message appears when the configuration menu is exited (the + key is repeatedly pressed) after a setting has been changed. Select YES, and then press the Menu Select key to reboot the printer. Otherwise, turn off the printer, and then turn the printer on again after a few seconds. ETHERNET * INTERFACE MENU TCP/IP ENABLE IPV4 DHCP/BOOTP IPV4 ADDRESS DEFAULT ROUTER SUBNET MASK ENABLE AUTO IP IPV6 ENABLE IP SERVICES ENABLE HTTP IDENTIFIER4-18 Configuration Menu Overview " * If MAIN MENU/SYSTEM DEFAULT/SECURITY/CONFIG/ ENABLE is set to ON, the administrator password must be entered to display this menu. For details on the default administrator password, refer to “SYSTEM DEFAULT” on page 4-22. IPX/SPX FRAME TYPE ETHERNET SPEED DISABLE 802.1X PS PROTOCOL ENABLE JOB TIMEOUT USB ENABLE AUTO GLOBAL PREFIX DISABLE FILTERS DISABLE IPSECConfiguration Menu Overview 4-19 " All factory default values are shown in bold. ETHERNET TCP/IP ENABLE Settings YES/NO If YES is selected, TCP/IP is enabled. If NO is selected, TCP/IP is disabled. IPV4 DHCP/ BOOTP Settings YES/NO Select whether or not the IP address is automatically acquired. If YES is selected, the IP address is automatically acquired. If NO is selected, the IP address is not automatically acquired. IPV4 ADDRESS Settings 192.168.001.002 Set the IPv4 address for this printer on the network. Use the +, ,, *, and ) keys to specify the value. If the IP address is manually specified, DHCP/BOOTP is automatically set to NO. DEFAULT ROUTER Settings 000.000.000.000 Specify the IPv4 address of the router if one is on the network. Use the +, ,, *, and ) keys to specify the value. SUBNET MASK Settings 000.000.000.000 Specify the subnet mask for the network. Use the +, ,, *, and ) keys to specify the value.4-20 Configuration Menu Overview ENABLE AUTO IP Settings YES/NO Select whether or not the IPv4 address is automatically acquired when DHCP/BOOTP and PING, ARP are not functioning or when there is no response. If YES is selected, the IP address is automatically acquired. If NO is selected, the IP address is not automatically acquired. IPV6 ENABLE Settings YES/NO If YES is selected, IPv6 is enabled. If NO is selected, IPv6 is disabled. IDENTIFIER Displays the Link-Local address. ENABLE AUTO Settings YES/NO If YES is selected, auto configuration of IPv6 is enabled. If NO is selected, auto configuration of IPv6 is disabled. GLOBAL PREFIX Displays the global address. IP SERVICES ENABLE HTTP Settings YES/NO If YES is selected, HTTP is enabled. If NO is selected, HTTP is disabled. DISABLE FILTERS Settings YES/NO If YES is selected, filter is disabled. DISABLE IPSEC Settings YES/NO If YES is selected, IPsec is disabled.Configuration Menu Overview 4-21 IPX/SPX FRAME TYPE Settings AUTO/802.2/802.3/ETHER II/SNAP Specify the protocol used with NetWare. ETHERNET SPEED Settings AUTO/100 FULL DUPLEX/100 HALF DUPLEX/10 FULL DUPLEX/10 HALF DUPLEX Specify the transmission speed for the network and the transmission method for bi-directional transmission. DISABLE 802.1X Settings YES/NO If YES is selected, IEEE802.1x function is disabled. PS PROTOCOL Settings BINARY/QUOTED BINARY Select whether PostScript jobs are received in the binary format or the quoted format. USB ENABLE Settings YES/NO If YES is selected, USB is enabled. If NO is selected, USB is disabled. JOB TIMEOUT Settings 0-60-999 Specify the length of time (in seconds) until the print job being received is timed out when USB is being used.4-22 Configuration Menu Overview SYSTEM DEFAULT With this menu, settings can be specified to adjust the operation of the printer, such as the time until the machine enters Energy Saver mode. " If MAIN MENU/SYSTEM DEFAULT/SECURITY/CONFIG/ ENABLE is set to ON, the administrator password must be entered to display this menu. PRINT QUALITY EMULATIONS DEFAULT AUTO DEFAULT ERROR PAGE PCL LINE TERMINATION FONT PITCH SIZE FONT NUMBER POINT SIZE SYMBOL SET STARTUP OPTIONS START PAGE DATE & TIME ENERGY SAVER SYSTEM DEFAULT COLOR MODE POSTSCRIPTConfiguration Menu Overview 4-23 " All factory default values are shown in bold. PRINT QUALITY Settings HIGH/STANDARD Select the image quality for prints. COLOR MODE Settings COLOR/GRAYSCALE Specify whether printing is in full color or grayscale. "The color mode setting specified from the printer driver has priority over the setting specified for this menu item. FORMAT ERASE FLASH RESTORE/SAVE RESTORE FACTORY SAVE CUSTOM RESTORE CUSTOM SECURITY CONFIG ENABLE SET ADMIN PASSWD SET USER PASSWD4-24 Configuration Menu Overview EMULATIONS DEFAULT Settings AUTOMATIC/POSTSCRIPT/PCL5/ PCL XL/HEX DUMP Specify the printer control language. If AUTOMATIC is selected, the printer automatically selects the printer control language from the data stream. AUTO DEFAULT Settings PCL5/POSTSCRIPT Select the printer description language when it cannot be identified from the data. POSTSCRIPT ERROR PAGE Settings ON/OFF Select whether or not an error page is printed when a PostScript error occurs. PCL LINE TERMINATION Settings CR=CR LF=CRLF/ CR=CR LF=LF/ CR=CRLF LF=LF/ CR=CRLF LF=CRLF Select the definitions of the CR/LF codes in the PCL language. FONT PITCH SIZE Settings 44-1000-9999 Specify the bitmap font size in the PCL language. FONT NUMBER Settings 0-32767 Specify the font used with the PCL language. The font numbers that appear correspond to the PCL font list. For details on printing the font list, refer to “PRINT MENU” on page 4-6. POINT SIZE Settings 400-1200- 99975 Specify the outline font size in the PCL language. SYMBOL SET Specify the symbol set used with the PCL language. The default setting is PC8.Configuration Menu Overview 4-25 STARTUP OPTIONS START PAGE Settings YES/NO Select whether or not a startup page is printed when the printer is turned on. If YES is selected, the startup page is printed when the printer is turned on. If NO is selected, the startup page is not printed. DATE & TIME Settings yyyymmdd:hhmmss Set the date and time on the time-of-day (TOD) clock. The settings appear in the following order: year, month, day:hour, minutes, seconds. ENERGY SAVER Settings 15 MINUTES/30 MINUTES/1 HOUR/ 2 HOURS Specify the length of time until the machine enters Energy Saver mode. "2 HOURS is displayed only on 120 V units. SECURITY CONFIG ENABLE Settings ON/OFF Select whether or not the menus are protected with a password. If ON is selected, all menus are protected with a password. SET USER PASSWD Settings: 1 Specify the user password for displaying the user menus. The specified password is applied only if MAIN MENU/SYSTEM DEFAULT/SECRITY/CONFIG/ ENABLE is set to ON. The password can contain a maximum of 16 characters. "Empty passwords are not allowed.4-26 Configuration Menu Overview SERVICE MENU With this menu, the service representative can adjust the printer and perform maintenance operations. This menu cannot be used by the user. SET ADMIN PASSWD Settings: the last four digits of the printer serial number Specify the administrator password for displaying the administrator menus. The specified password is applied only if MAIN MENU/SYSTEM DEFAULT/ SECRITY/CONFIG/ENABLE is set to ON. The password can contain a maximum of 16 characters. "Empty passwords are not allowed. FORMAT ERASE FLASH Settings YES/NO Select whether or not to initialize the flash RAM. If YES is selected, the flash RAM is initialized. RESTORE /SAVE RESTORE FACTORY Settings YES/NO Select whether or not all menu items are reset to their initial settings. If YES is selected, all menu items are reset to their initial settings. SAVE CUSTOM Settings YES/NO Select whether or not all changed menu settings are saved. If YES is selected, all changes are saved. RESTORE CUSTOM Settings YES/NO Select whether or not menu items are reverted to the previously saved settings. If YES is selected, the menu items revert to the previously saved settings.Configuration Menu Overview 4-27 LANGUAGE MENU ENGLISH/FRENCH/ GERMAN/SPANISH/ ITALIAN/PORTUGUESE/DUTCH/CZECH/ JAPANESE/POLISH The display language of the message window can be changed to the required language. The default setting is English. The language selections appear in the message window in the corresponding language. For example, GERMAN appears as DEUTSCH.4-28 Configuration Menu OverviewMedia Handling5-2 Print Media Print Media Specifications " For custom sizes, use the printer driver to specify the settings within the ranges shown in the above table. Media Media Size Tray* Duplex Inch Millimeter Letter 8.5 x 11.0 215.9 x 279.4 1/2 Yes Legal 8.5 x 14.0 215.9 x 355.6 1 No Statement 5.5 x 8.5 140.0 x 216.0 1 No Executive 7.25 x 10.5 184.0 x 267.0 1 No A4 8.2 x 11.7 210.0 x 297.0 1/2 Yes A5 5.9 x 8.3 148.0 x 210.0 1 No B5 (JIS) 7.2 x 10.1 182.0 x 257.0 1 No B5 (ISO) 6.9 x 9.8 176.0 x 250.0 1 No Folio 8.3 x 13.0 210.0 x 330.0 1 No SP Folio 8.5 x 12.69 215.9 x 322.3 1 No Foolscap 8.0 x 13.0 203.2 x 330.2 1 No UK Quarto 8.0 x 10.0 203.2 x 254.0 1 No Government Letter 8.0 x 10.5 203.2 x 266.7 1 No Government Legal 8.5 x 13.0 216.0 x 330.0 1 No Envelope DL 4.3 x 8.7 110.0 x 220.0 1 No Envelope C6 4.5 x 6.4 114.0 x 162.0 1 No Japanese Postcard 3.9 x 5.8 100.0 x 148.0 1 No 16K 7.7 x 10.6 195.0 x 270.0 1 No Kai 16 7.3 x 10.2 185.0 x 260.0 1 No Kai 32 5.1 x 7.3 130.0 x 185.0 1 No Oficio Mexico 8.5 x 13.5 215.9 x 342.9 1 No Custom Size, Minimum** 3.6 x 7.7 92.0 x 195.0 1 No Custom Size, Maximum** 8.5 x 14.0 216.0 x 356.0 1 No Notes: * Tray 1 = Multipurpose Tray 2 = Plain paper only ** With thick stock The minimum size is 3.6 x 7.25 inch (92.0 x 184.0 mm). The maximum size is 8.5 x 11.7 inch (216.0 x 297.0 mm).Media Types 5-3 Media Types Before purchasing a large quantity of special media, do a trial print with the same media and check the print quality. Keep media on a flat, level surface in its original wrapper until it is time to load it. For a list of approved media, refer to printer.konicaminolta.com. Plain Paper Use plain paper that is „ Suitable for plain paper laser printers, such as standard or recycled office paper. Note Do not use the media types listed below. These could cause poor print quality, media misfeeds, or damage to the printer. DO NOT use media that is „ Coated with a processed surface (such as carbon paper, digitally gloss- coated media, and colored paper that has been treated) „ Carbon backed „ Unapproved iron-on transfer media (such as heat-sensitive paper, heat-pressure paper, and heat-press transfer paper) „ Cold-water-transfer paper „ Pressure sensitive „ Designed specifically for inkjet printers (such as superfine paper, glossy film, and postcards) „ Already been printed on by another printer, copier, or fax machine „ Dusty „ Wet (or damp) Capacity Tray 1 Up to 200 sheets, depending on the paper weight Tray 2 Up to 500 sheets, depending on the paper weight Orientation Face up Driver Media Type Plain paper Weight 60 to 90 g/m² (16 to 24 lb bond) Duplexing Only Letter/A4 plain paper can be autoduplexed.5-4 Media Types " Keep media between 15% and 85% relative humidity. Toner does not adhere well to moist or wet paper. „ Layered „ Adhesive „ Folded, creased, curled, embossed, warped, or wrinkled „ Perforated, three-hole punched, or torn „ Too slick, too coarse, or too textured „ Different in texture (roughness) on the front and back „ Too thin or too thick „ Stuck together with static electricity „ Composed of foil or gilt; too luminous „ Heat sensitive or cannot withstand the fusing temperature (180°C [356°F]) „ Irregularly shaped (not rectangular or not cut at right angles) „ Attached with glue, tape, paper clips, staples, ribbons, hooks, or buttons „ Acidic „ Any other media that is not approved Thick Stock Paper thicker than 90 g/m2 (24 lb bond) is referred to as thick stock. Test all thick stock to ensure acceptable performance and to ensure that the image does not shift. Capacity Tray 1 Up to 50 thick stock sheets, depending on their thickness Tray 2 Not supported Orientation Face up Driver Media Type Thick 1 (91 to163 g/m2 ) Thick 2 (164 to 209 g/m2 ) Weight 91 to 209 g/m² (25 to 55.9 lb) Duplexing Not supportedMedia Types 5-5 DO NOT use thick stock that is „ Mixed with any other media in Tray 1 (as this will cause printer misfeeding) Envelopes Print on the front (address) side only. Some parts of the envelope consist of three layers of paper—the front, back, and flap. Anything printed in these layered regions may be lost or faded. Use envelopes that are „ Envelope C6 or Envelope DL (Other envelope sizes are not supported.) „ Common office envelopes approved for laser printing with diagonal joints, sharp folds and edges, and ordinary gummed flaps " Because the envelopes pass through heated rollers, the gummed area on the flaps may seal. Using envelopes with emulsion-based glue avoids this problem. „ Approved for laser printing „ Dry DO NOT use envelopes that have „ Sticky flaps „ Tape seals, metal clasps, paper clips, fasteners, or peel-off strips for sealing „ Transparent windows „ Too rough of a surface „ Material that will melt, vaporize, offset, discolor, or emit dangerous fumes „ Been presealed Capacity Tray 1 Up to 10 envelopes, depending on their thickness Tray 2 Not supported Orientation Face up Driver Media Type Envelope Duplexing Not supported5-6 Media Types Labels A sheet of labels consists of a face sheet (the printing surface), adhesive, and a carrier sheet: „ The face sheet must follow the plain paper specification. „ The face sheet surface must cover the entire carrier sheet, and no adhesive should come through on the surface. You can print continuously with label sheets. However, this could affect the media feed, depending on the media quality and printing environment. If problems occur, stop the continuous printing and print one sheet at a time. Try printing your data on a sheet of plain paper first to check placement. Check your application documentation for more information on printing labels. Use label sheets that are „ Recommended for laser printers DO NOT use label sheets that „ Have labels that easily peel off or have parts of the label already removed „ Have backing sheets that have peeled away or have exposed adhesive " Labels may stick to the fuser, causing them to peel off and media misfeeds to occur. „ Are precut or perforated Capacity Tray 1 Up to 50 label sheets, depending on their thickness Tray 2 Not supported Orientation Face up Driver Media Type Labels Duplexing Not supported Full-page labels (uncut) Do not use OK to use Shiny backed paperMedia Types 5-7 Letterhead Try printing your data on a sheet of plain paper first to check placement. Postcards Try printing your data on a sheet of plain paper first to check placement. Capacity Tray 1 Up to 50 sheets, depending on their size and thickness Tray 2 Not supported Orientation Face up Driver Media Type Letterhead Duplexing Not supported Capacity Tray 1 Up to 50 postcards, depending on their thickness Tray 2 Not supported Orientation Face up Driver Media Type Postcard Duplexing Not supported5-8 Printable Area Use postcards that are „ Approved for laser printers DO NOT use postcards that are „ Coated „ Designed for inkjet printers „ Precut or perforated „ Preprinted or multicolored „ Folded or wrinkled " If the postcard is warped, press on the warped area before putting it in Tray 1. Printable Area The printable area on all media sizes is up to 4.2 mm (0.165") from the edges of the media. Each media size has a specific printable area (the maximum area on which the machine can print clearly and without distortion). This area is subject to both hardware limits (the physical media size and the margins required by the machine) and software constraints (the amount of memory available for the full-page frame buffer). The printable area for all media sizes is the page size minus 4.2 mm (0.165") from all edges of the media. " When printing in color on legal-size media, the following limitations apply. z The printable area is 339.6 (13.4") mm from the leading edge of the paper. (However, there is a non-printable area up to 4.2 mm (0.165") from the leading edge.) z The bottom margin is 16.0 mm (0.63"). a a a a Printable Area a=4.2 mm (0.165")Printable Area 5-9 Envelopes Envelopes can only be printed on their front sides (side where the recipient’s address is written). In addition, printing on the front side in the area overlapping the back flap cannot be guaranteed. The location of this area differs depending on the envelope type. " The envelope print orientation is determined by your application. " With the Envelope DL size (long edge feeding), the nonprintable areas on the left and right sides are 6 mm. Page Margins Margins are set through your application. Some applications allow you to set custom page sizes and margins while others have only standard page sizes and margins from which to choose. If you choose a standard format, you may lose part of your image (due to printable area constraints). If you can custom-size your page in your application, use those sizes given for the printable area for optimum results. a=4.2 mm (0.165") Non-printable area Non-guaranteed printable area Guaranteed printable area Front side (can be printed) Back side (cannot be printed) a a a a5-10 Loading Media Loading Media How do I load media? Take off the top and bottom sheets of a ream of paper. Holding a stack of approximately 200 sheets at a time, fan the stack to prevent static buildup before inserting it in a tray. Note Although this printer was designed for printing on a wide range of media types, it is not intended to print exclusively on a single media type except plain paper. Continuous printing on media other than plain paper (such as envelopes, labels, or thick stock) may adversely affect print quality or reduce engine life. When refilling media, first remove any media remaining in the tray. Stack it with the new media, even the edges, then reload it. Do not mix media of different types and sizes, as this will cause media misfeeds. Tray 1 (Multipurpose Tray) For details on the types and sizes of media that can be printed from Tray 1, refer to “Print Media” on page 5-2. Loading Plain Paper 1 Remove the dust cover from Tray 1.Loading Media 5-11 2 Slide the media guides to provide more space between them. 3 Load the paper face up in the tray. " Do not load paper above the ▼ mark. Up to 200 sheets (80 g/m2 [21 lb]) of plain paper can be loaded into the tray at one time.5-12 Loading Media 4 Slide the media guides against the edges of the paper. 5 Reattach the dust cover. 6 Select MAIN MENU/PAPER MENU/INPUT TRAY/TRAY1/MEDIA SIZE and MEDIA TYPE in the configuration menu, and then select the settings for the size and type of paper that are loaded. See also “PAPER MENU” on page 4-8.Loading Media 5-13 Other Media When loading media other than plain paper, set the media mode (for example, Envelope, Label, or Thick Stock) in the driver for optimum print quality. Loading Envelopes 1 Remove the dust cover from Tray 1. 2 Remove any media from the tray. 3 Slide the media guides to provide more space between them.5-14 Loading Media 4 Load the envelopes flap side down in the tray. " Before loading envelopes, press them down to make sure that all air is removed, and make sure that the folds of the flaps are firmly pressed; otherwise the envelopes may become wrinkled or a media misfeed may occur. " Up to 10 envelopes can be loaded into the tray at one time. " For envelopes with the flap (Envelope C6 or Envelope DL), load the envelopes with the flap side inserted first. 5 Slide the media guides against the edges of the envelopes. 6 Reattach the dust cover.Loading Media 5-15 7 Select MAIN MENU/PAPER MENU/INPUT TRAY/TRAY1/MEDIA SIZE and MEDIA TYPE in the configuration menu, and then select the settings for the size and type of paper that are loaded. See also “PAPER MENU” on page 4-8.5-16 Loading Media Loading Labels/Postcard/Thick Stock and Letterhead 1 Remove the dust cover from Tray 1. 2 Remove any media from the tray. 3 Slide the media guides to provide more space between them. 4 Load the media face up in the tray. " Up to 50 sheets can be loaded into the tray at one time.Loading Media 5-17 5 Slide the media guides against the edges of the media. 6 Reattach the dust cover. 7 Select MAIN MENU/PAPER MENU/INPUT TRAY/TRAY1/MEDIA SIZE and MEDIA TYPE in the configuration menu, and then select the settings for the size and type of paper that are loaded. See also “PAPER MENU” on page 4-8.5-18 Loading Media Tray 2 Only Letter/A4 plain paper can be loaded in Tray 2. Loading Plain Paper 1 Pull out Tray 2 as far as possible. 2 Lift up Tray 2 to remove it. 3 Remove the lid from Tray 2.Loading Media 5-19 4 Press down the media pressure plate to lock it into place. 5 Load the paper face up in the tray. " Do not load above the 100% line. Up to 500 sheets (80 g/m2 [21 lb]) of plain paper can be loaded into the tray at one time. 6 Reattach the lid to Tray 2. 100% 75 505-20 Loading Media 7 Reinsert Tray 2 into the printer.Duplexing 5-21 Duplexing Select paper with high opacity for duplex (double sided) printing. Opacity refers to how effectively paper blocks out what is written on the opposite side of the page. If the paper has low opacity (high translucency), then the printed data from one side of the page will show through to the other side. Check your application for margin information. For best results, print a small quantity to make sure the opacity is acceptable. Duplex (Double sided) printing can be done automatically with the duplex option installed and selected. Note Only Letter/A4 plain paper, 60–90 g/m2 (16–24 lb bond) can be autoduplexed. See “Print Media” on page 5-2. Duplexing envelopes, labels, postcards, thick stock, or letterhead is not supported. How do I autoduplex? You should verify that the duplex option is physically installed on the printer to successfully duplex the job. Check your application to determine how to set your margins for duplex printing. The following Binding Position settings are available. If “Short Edge” is selected, the pages will be laid out to flip at the top. If “Long Edge” is selected, the pages will be laid out to flip at the sides. 1 3 1 2 1 1 1 1 2 35-22 Output Tray In addition, if “N-up” has been set to “Booklet”, autoduplex printing is performed. The following Order settings are available when “Booklet” is selected. 1 Load plain paper into the tray. 2 From the printer driver, specify the layout for duplex printing. 3 Click OK. " With autoduplexing, the back side is printed first, and then the front side is printed. Output Tray All printed media is output to the face-down output tray on top of the printer. This tray has a capacity of approximately 100 sheets (A4/Letter) of 80 g/m2 (21 lb) paper. " If the media is stacked too high in the output tray, your printer may experience media misfeeds, excessive media curl, or static buildup. If “Left Binding” is selected, the pages can be folded as a left-bound booklet. If “Right Binding” is selected, the pages can be folded as a right-bound booklet. 1 1 2 3 3 3 1 1 2Media Storage 5-23 Media Storage How do I store media? „ Keep media on a flat, level surface in its original wrapper until it is time to load it. Media that has been stored for a long time out of its packaging may dry up too much and cause misfeeding. „ If media has been removed from its wrapper, place it in its original packaging and store in a cool, dark place on a level surface. „ Avoid moisture, excessive humidity, direct sunlight, excessive heat (above 35°C [95°F]), and dust. „ Avoid media leaning against other objects or placing it in an upright position. Before using stored media, do a trial print and check print quality. 5-24 Media StorageReplacing Consumables6-2 Replacing Consumables Replacing Consumables Note Failure to follow instructions as outlined in this manual could result in voiding your warranty. About Toner Cartridges Your printer uses four toner cartridges: black, yellow, magenta, and cyan. Handle the toner cartridges carefully to avoid spilling toner inside the printer or on yourself. " Install only new toner cartridges in your printer. If a used toner cartridge is installed, then toner remaining amount may not be accurate. " The toner is nontoxic. If you get toner on your skin, wash it off with cool water and a mild soap. If you get toner on your clothes, lightly dust them off as best as you can. If some toner remains on your clothes, use cool, not hot water, to rinse the toner off. CAUTION If you get toner in your eyes, wash it out immediately with cool water and consult a doctor. " Refer to the following URL for recycling information. US: printer.konicaminolta.com/products/recycle/index.asp Europe: www.konicaminolta.eu/printing-solutions/more-information/ clean-planet.html Other regions: printer.konicaminolta.com Note Do not use refilled toner cartridges or unapproved toner cartridges. Any damage to the printer or quality problems caused by a refilled toner cartridge or unapproved toner cartridge will void your warranty. No technical support is provided to recover from these problems.Replacing Consumables 6-3 When replacing a toner cartridge, refer to the following table. For optimum print quality and performance, use only approved KONICA MINOLTA toner cartridges for your specific printer type, as listed in the table below. You can find your machine type and the toner cartridge part numbers on the consumables reorder label inside the top cover your machine. " For optimum print quality and performance, use only the corresponded TYPE genuine KONICA MINOLTA toner cartridges. Printer Type Printer Part Number Toner Cartridge Type Toner Cartridge Part Number AM A034 012 Standard-Capacity Toner Cartridge -Yellow (Y) A0V3 05F Standard-Capacity Toner Cartridge -Magenta (M) A0V3 0AF Standard-Capacity Toner Cartridge -Cyan (C) A0V3 0GF High-Capacity Toner Cartridge - Black (K) A0V3 01F High-Capacity Toner Cartridge - Yellow (Y) A0V3 06F High-Capacity Toner Cartridge - Magenta (M) A0V3 0CF High-Capacity Toner Cartridge - Cyan (C) A0V3 0HF EU A034 022 Standard-Capacity Toner Cartridge -Yellow (Y) A0V3 05H Standard-Capacity Toner Cartridge -Magenta (M) A0V3 0AH Standard-Capacity Toner Cartridge -Cyan (C) A0V3 0GH High-Capacity Toner Cartridge - Black (K) A0V3 01H High-Capacity Toner Cartridge - Yellow (Y) A0V3 06H High-Capacity Toner Cartridge - Magenta (M) A0V3 0CH High-Capacity Toner Cartridge - Cyan (C) A0V3 0HH AP A034 042 Standard-Capacity Toner Cartridge -Yellow (Y) A0V3 05K Standard-Capacity Toner Cartridge -Magenta (M) A0V3 0AK Standard-Capacity Toner Cartridge -Cyan (C) A0V3 0GK High-Capacity Toner Cartridge - Black (K) A0V3 01K High-Capacity Toner Cartridge - Yellow (Y) A0V3 06K High-Capacity Toner Cartridge - Magenta (M) A0V3 0CK High-Capacity Toner Cartridge - Cyan (C) A0V3 0HK GC A034 082 Standard-Capacity Toner Cartridge -Yellow (Y) A0V3 05N Standard-Capacity Toner Cartridge -Magenta (M) A0V3 0AN Standard-Capacity Toner Cartridge -Cyan (C) A0V3 0GN High-Capacity Toner Cartridge - Black (K) A0V3 01N High-Capacity Toner Cartridge - Yellow (Y) A0V3 06N High-Capacity Toner Cartridge - Magenta (M) A0V3 0CN High-Capacity Toner Cartridge - Cyan (C) A0V3 0HN6-4 Replacing Consumables Keep toner cartridges: „ In their packaging until you’re ready to install them. „ In a cool, dry location away from sunlight (due to heat). The maximum storage temperature is 35° C (95° F) and the maximum storage humidity is 85% (noncondensing). If the toner cartridge is moved from a cold place to a warm, humid place, condensation may occur, degrading print quality. Allow the toner to adapt to the environment for about one hour before use. „ Level during handling and storage. Do not hold, stand or store cartridges on their ends or turn them upside down; the toner inside the cartridges may become caked or unequally distributed. „ Away from salty air and corrosive gases such as aerosols.Replacing Consumables 6-5 Replacing a Toner Cartridge Note Be careful not to spill toner while replacing a toner cartridge. If toner spills, immediately wipe it off with a soft, dry cloth. If TONER OUT ACTION on the MAIN MENU/QUALITY MENU/TONER OUT ACTION menu is set to STOP, the message X TONER OUT/ REPLACE XXXX (where “X” and “XXXX” represent the color of the toner) appears when a toner cartridge becomes empty. Follow the steps below to replace the toner cartridge. " If TONER OUT ACTION on the MAIN MENU/QUALITY MENU/ TONER OUT ACTION menu is set to CONTINUE, the printing can continue even after the message "X TONER OUT" has appeared; however, the printing quality cannot be guaranteed. If printing is continued and the toner becomes empty, the message "X TONER LIFE END" appears and printing stops. For details on the setting, refer to “QUALITY MENU” on page 4-13. 1 Check the message window to see which color toner cartridge needs replacing. " If the machine detects that a toner cartridge is empty (X TONER OUT or X TONER LIFE END appears), the empty toner cartridge is automatically moved so that it can be replaced. If you wish to change the toner cartridge, use ether operation described below to switch the printer to REPLACE TONER. Press Key Until Display Reads X TONER OUT REPLACE XXXX or X TONER LIFE END MENU MAIN MANU MAIN MENU PRINT MENU6-6 Replacing Consumables × 2 MAIN MENU QUALITY MENU QUALITY MENU REPLACE TONER REPLACE TONER BLACK Press until appropriate color (X) is displayed. REPLACE TONER X X *YES *YES IS SELECTED Then, it displays OPEN DOOR AND REPLACE X TONER Press Key Until Display ReadsReplacing Consumables 6-7 2 Open the front cover. " Before opening the front cover, open Tray 1 if it is not already open. 3 Check that the toner cartridge to be replaced has been moved to the front. " You can identify the toner cartridge by the color of the handle. 4 Pull down the handle on the toner cartridge until the toner cartridge is unlocked and moves out slightly toward you. Remove the toner cartridge. " Do not manually rotate the toner cartridge carousel. In addition, do not rotate the carousel with force, otherwise it may be damaged.6-8 Replacing Consumables Note Do not touch the contact indicated in the illustration. Note Dispose of the empty toner cartridge according to your local regulations. Do not burn the toner cartridge. For details, refer to “About Toner Cartridges” on page 6-2. 5 Prepare a new toner cartridge. 6 Shake the cartridge a few times to distribute the toner. " Make sure that the toner roller cover is securely attached before shaking the toner cartridge.Replacing Consumables 6-9 7 Remove the cover from the toner roller. " Do not touch or scratch the toner roller. 8 Align the shaft on each end of the toner cartridge with its holders, and then insert the cartridge. " Before inserting the toner cartridge, make sure that the color of the toner cartridge to be installed is the same as the label on the toner cartridge carousel.6-10 Replacing Consumables Note Do not touch the contact indicated in the illustration. 9 Press in the toner cartridge until it locks into place. 10 Close the front cover.Replacing Consumables 6-11 " The printer must complete a calibration cycle after the toner cartridge has been replaced. If you open the top or front cover before the message IDLE appears, the printer stops and repeats the calibration cycle.6-12 Replacing Consumables Removing All Toner Cartridges Note Be careful not to spill toner while removing a toner cartridge. If toner spills, immediately wipe it off with a soft, dry cloth. By using the REMOVE ALL mode, all toner cartridges can be removed. Follow the procedure described below to use the REMOVE ALL mode. 1 Perform the operation described below to switch the printer to the REMOVE ALL mode. Press Key Until Display Reads IDLE MANU MAIN MANU MAIN MENU PRINT MENU × 2 MAIN MENU QUALITY MENU QUALITY MENU REPLACE TONER REPLACE TONER BLACK REPLACE TONER REMOVE ALLReplacing Consumables 6-13 " It is not possible to exit REMOVE ALL mode before the operation is finished (even if the Cancel key is pressed). If the printer has incorrectly been switched to REMOVE ALL mode, open, then close the front cover four times to exit REMOVE ALL mode. 2 Open the front cover. " Before opening the front cover, open Tray 1 if it is not already open. REMOVE ALL *NO REMOVE ALL YES *YES IS SELECTED Then, it displays OPEN DOOR AND REMOVE M TONER Press Key Until Display Reads6-14 Replacing Consumables 3 Pull down the handle on the toner cartridge until the toner cartridge is unlocked and moves out slightly toward you. Remove the toner cartridge. " Do not manually rotate the toner cartridge carousel. In addition, do not rotate the carousel with force, otherwise it may be damaged. Note Do not touch the contact indicated in the illustration.Replacing Consumables 6-15 4 Close the front cover. 5 Follow the same procedure to remove the cartridges for the cyan, black, then yellow toners.6-16 Replacing Consumables Replacing the Imaging Cartridge When replacing an imaging cartridge, refer to the following table. For optimum print quality and performance, use only approved KONICA MINOLTA imaging cartridge for your specific printer type, as listed in the table below. You can find your machine type and the imaging cartridge part numbers on the consumables reorder label inside the top cover your machine. " For optimum print quality and performance, use only the corresponded TYPE genuine KONICA MINOLTA imaging cartridge. 1 Open the top cover. " If there is paper in the output tray, remove it, and then fold up the output tray before opening the top cover. 2 Grab the handle and lift it up slightly to the back, and then slowly pull the imaging cartridge out vertically. Printer Type Printer Part Number Part Name Imaging Cartridge Part Number AM A034 012 Imaging Cartridge A0VU 011 EU A034 022 A0VU 0Y1 AP A034 042 A0VU 0Y1 GC A034 082 A0VU 0Y1Replacing Consumables 6-17 Note Dispose of the used imaging cartridge according to your local regulations. Do not burn the imaging cartridge. 3 Prepare the new imaging cartridge. Note Do not touch the PC drum and the transfer belt on the imaging cartridge. 4 Slowly insert the new imaging cartridge vertically, and then push it slightly down toward you to finish installing the imaging cartridge.6-18 Replacing Consumables 5 Carefully close the top cover. " The printer must complete a calibration cycle after the imaging cartridge has been replaced. If you open the top cover before the message IDLE appears, the printer stops and repeats the calibration cycle.Replacing Consumables 6-19 Replacing the Fuser Unit For optimum print quality and performance, use only approved KONICA MINOLTA fuser unit for your specific printer type. 1 Turn off the printer and disconnect the power cord. Note There are extremely hot parts within the printer. Before replacing the fuser unit, wait about 20 minutes after turning off the printer, and then check that the fusing section has reached room temperature, otherwise, you may get burnt. 2 Open the top cover. " If there is paper in the output tray, remove it, and then fold up the output tray before opening the top cover.6-20 Replacing Consumables 3 Push the blue handles back as far as possible. 4 Grab the blue handles and lift the fuser unit to remove it. Note Do not touch the matching connectors of the fuser unit and the machine.Replacing Consumables 6-21 5 Prepare a new fuser unit. 6 Pull the fuser separator levers forward as far as possible.6-22 Replacing Consumables 7 Remove the fuser separator material, and then return the fuser separator levers to their original positions. Note Be careful not to touch the paper exit sensor and the surface of the fuser roller in the fuser unit. 8 While lifting the fuser unit with the blue handles (one on each side), vertically insert the fuser unit.Replacing Consumables 6-23 Note Do not touch the paper exit sensor on the fuser unit. Note Do not touch the matching connectors of the fuser unit and the machine. M6-24 Replacing Consumables 9 After the fuser unit is firmly installed, flip the blue handles down toward you. 10 Carefully close the top cover. 11 Reconnect the power cord, and turn on the printer.Maintaining the Printer7-2 Maintaining the Printer Maintaining the Printer CAUTION Read all caution and warning labels carefully, making sure to follow any instructions contained in them. These labels are located on the inside of the printer’s covers and the interior of the printer body. Handle the printer with care to preserve its life. Abuse handling may cause damage and void your warranty. If dust and paper scraps remain on the inside or outside of the printer, printer performance and print quality will suffer, so the printer should be cleaned periodically. Keep the following guidelines in mind. WARNING! Turn off the printer, unplug the power cord, and disconnect all interface cables before cleaning. Do not spill water or detergent into the printer; otherwise the printer will be damaged and an electric shock may occur. CAUTION The fuser unit is hot. When the top cover is opened, the fuser unit temperature drops gradually (one hour wait time). „ Be careful when cleaning the inside of the printer or removing media misfeeds, as the fuser unit and other internal parts may be very hot. „ Do not place anything on top of the printer. „ Use a soft cloth to clean the printer. „ Never spray cleaning solutions directly on the printer’s surface; the spray could penetrate through the air vents of the printer and damage the internal circuits. „ Avoid using abrasive or corrosive solutions or solutions that contain solvents (such as alcohol and benzene) to clean the printer. „ Always test any cleaning solution (such as mild detergent) on a small inconspicuous area of your printer to check the solution’s performance. „ Never use sharp or rough implements, such as wire or plastic cleaning pads. „ Always close the printer’s covers gently. Never subject the printer to vibration. „ Do not cover the printer immediately after using it. Turn it off and wait until it cools down.Maintaining the Printer 7-3 „ Do not leave the printer’s covers open for any length of time, especially in well-lit places; light may damage the imaging cartridge. „ Do not open the printer during printing. „ Do not tap media stacks on the printer. „ Do not lubricate or disassemble the printer. „ Do not tilt the printer. „ Do not touch the electrical contacts, gears, or laser devices. Doing so may damage the printer and cause the print quality to deteriorate. „ Keep media in the output tray at a minimum level. If the media is stocked too high, your printer may experience media misfeeds and excessive media curl. „ Keep the printer level to avoid toner spillage. „ When lifting the printer, grasp the areas shown in the figure. „ Before moving the printer, remove the dust cover, and fold up Tray 1. „ If the optional lower feeder unit, attachment and duplex option are installed, remove them and move them separately. „ If you get toner on your skin, wash it off with cool water and a mild soap. CAUTION If you get toner in your eyes, wash it out immediately with cool water and consult a doctor. „ Make sure any parts removed during cleaning are replaced before you plug in the printer. 15.1 kg 33.3 lbs7-4 Cleaning the Printer Cleaning the Printer CAUTION Be sure to turn off the printer and unplug the power cord before cleaning. However, be sure to turn on the printer when cleaning the print head window. Exterior Ready Error Cancel Control Panel Ventilation Grill Printer ExteriorCleaning the Printer 7-5 Interior Cleaning the Media Feed Roller 1 Open the top cover. " If there is paper in the output tray, remove it, and then fold up the output tray before opening the top cover. 2 Grab the handle and lift it up slightly to the back, and then slowly pull the imaging cartridge out vertically.7-6 Cleaning the Printer Note Do not touch the PC drum and the transfer belt on the imaging cartridge. Position the removed imaging cartridge horizontally as shown in the illustration at the right. Be sure to keep the imaging cartridge horizontal and place it where it will not become dirty. Do not leave the imaging cartridge removed for more than 15 minutes, and do not place the removed imaging cartridge in a location where it would be exposed to direct light (such as sunlight). 3 Clean the media feed rollers by wiping them with a soft, dry cloth. BOTTOM VIEWCleaning the Printer 7-7 CAUTION The area around the fuser unit is extremely hot. Touching anything other than the indicated levers may result in burns. If you get burned, immediately cool the skin under cold water, and then seek professional medical attention. Note Decreased print quality may result if the surface of the transfer roller is touched. Be careful not to touch the surface of the transfer roller.7-8 Cleaning the Printer 4 Slowly insert the imaging cartridge vertically, and then push it slightly down toward you to finish reinstalling the imaging cartridge. 5 Carefully close the top cover.Cleaning the Printer 7-9 Cleaning the Print Head Window 1 Perform the operation described below to switch the printer to the P/H CLEAN UP mode. Press Key Until Display Reads IDLE MENU MAIN MANU MAIN MENU PRINT MENU × 2 MAIN MENU QUALITY MENU QUALITY MENU REPLACE TONER × 3 QUALITY MENU P/H CLEAN UP P/H CLEAN UP *YES *YES IS SELECTED Then, it displays OPEN DOOR REMOVE TONER7-10 Cleaning the Printer " To exit P/H CLEAN UP mode, press the Cancel key. 2 Open the front cover. " Before opening the front cover, open Tray 1 if it is not already open. 3 The magenta toner cartridge has been moved to the position from where it can be replaced. Pull down the handle on the toner cartridge until the toner cartridge is unlocked and moves out slightly toward you. Remove the toner cartridge. " When the magenta toner cartridge is removed, a gap is created within the printer so that the print head window can easily be cleaned.Cleaning the Printer 7-11 Note Do not touch the contact indicated in the illustration. 4 Close the front cover. " The toner cartridge rotate within the printer. 5 After the toner cartridges have finished rotating, open the top cover.7-12 Cleaning the Printer 6 Grab the handle and lift it up slightly to the back, and then slowly pull the imaging cartridge out vertically. Note Do not touch the PC drum and the transfer belt on the imaging cartridge. Position the removed imaging cartridge horizontally as shown in the illustration at the right. Be sure to keep the imaging cartridge horizontal and place it where it will not become dirty. Do not leave the imaging cartridge removed for more than 15 minutes, and do not place the removed imaging cartridge in a location where it would be exposed to direct light (such as sunlight).Cleaning the Printer 7-13 7 Clean the print head window by wiping it with a soft, dry cloth. CAUTION The area around the fuser unit is extremely hot. Touching anything other than the indicated levers may result in burns. If you get burned, immediately cool the skin under cold water, and then seek professional medical attention. BOTTOM VIEW7-14 Cleaning the Printer Note Decreased print quality may result if the surface of the transfer roller is touched. Be careful not to touch the surface of the transfer roller. 8 Slowly insert the imaging cartridge vertically, and then push it slightly down toward you to finish reinstalling the imaging cartridge.Cleaning the Printer 7-15 9 Close the top cover. 10 After the toner cartridges have finished rotating, open the front cover.7-16 Cleaning the Printer 11 Align the shaft on each end of the toner cartridge with its holders, and then insert the cartridge. Note Do not touch the contact indicated in the illustration.Cleaning the Printer 7-17 12 Press in the magenta toner cartridge until it locks into place. 13 Close the front cover.7-18 Cleaning the Printer Cleaning the Media Feed Rollers for Tray 2 Be sure to remove the duplex option before cleaning the media feed rollers for Tray 2. 1 If the duplex option is installed, remove it. 2 Remove the dust cover from Tray 1. Close Tray 1 and the output tray. 3 Lift the printer off of Tray 2 and temporarily place it on a sturdy flat surface. 4 Clean the media feed rollers by wiping them with a soft, dry cloth.Cleaning the Printer 7-19 5 Lift the printer and reinstall it on top of Tray 2. 6 Open Tray 1 and reattach the dust cover. 7 If you removed the duplex option in step 1, reinstall it.7-20 Cleaning the Printer Cleaning the Media Feed Rollers for the attachment Be sure to remove the duplex option before cleaning the media feed rollers for the attachment. 1 If the duplex option is installed, remove it. 2 Remove the dust cover from Tray 1. Close Tray 1 and the output tray. 3 Lift the printer off of the attachment and temporarily place it on a sturdy flat surface. 4 Clean the media feed rollers by wiping them with a soft, dry cloth.Cleaning the Printer 7-21 5 Lift the printer and reinstall it on top of the attachment. 6 Open Tray 1 and reattach the dust cover. 7 If you removed the duplex option in step 1, reinstall it.7-22 Cleaning the Printer Cleaning the Duplex Feed Rollers 1 Open the duplex cover. 2 Clean the feed rollers by wiping them with a soft, dry cloth. 3 Carefully close the duplex cover.Troubleshooting8-2 Introduction Introduction This chapter provides information to aid you in resolving printer problems you may encounter, or at least guide you to the proper sources for help. Printing a Configuration Page Print a configuration page to verify the printer is configured correctly. Printing the configuration page page 8-2 Preventing media misfeeds page 8-4 Understanding the media path page 8-5 Clearing media misfeeds page 8-5 Solving problems with media misfeeds page 8-19 Solving other problems page 8-21 Solving problems with printing quality page 8-25 Status, error, and service messages page 8-31 Press Key Until Display Reads IDLE MENU MAIN MENU MAIN MENU PRINT MENU PRINT MENU MENU MAP PRINT MENU CONFIGURATIONPrinting a Configuration Page 8-3 CONFIGURATION YES The configuration page prints and the printer goes back to IDLE. Press Key Until Display Reads8-4 Preventing Media Misfeeds Preventing Media Misfeeds Make sure that... Media matches the printer specifications. Media is flat, especially on the leading edge. The printer is on a hard, flat, level surface. You store media in a dry location away from moisture and humidity. You always adjust the media guides in Tray 1 after inserting the media (a guide that is not properly adjusted can cause poor print quality, media misfeeds, and printer damage). You load the media printing-side up in the tray (many manufacturers place an arrow on the end of the wrapper to indicate the printing side). Avoid... Media that is folded, wrinkled, or excessively curled. Double feeding (remove the media and fan the sheets—they may be sticking together). Loading more than one type/size/weight of media in a tray at the same time. Overfilling the trays. Allowing the output tray to overfill (the output tray has a 100-sheet capacity— misfeeding may occur if you allow more than 100 sheets of media to accumulate at one time).Understanding the Media Path 8-5 Understanding the Media Path Understanding the printer’s media path will help you locate media misfeeds. 1 Output tray 2 Imaging cartridge 3 Toner cartridge carousel 4 Tray 1 5 Tray 2 (optional) 6 Fuser unit 7 Duplex option Clearing Media Misfeeds To avoid damage, always remove misfed media gently, without tearing it. Any piece of media left in the printer, whether large or small, can obstruct the media path and cause further misfeeds. Do not reload media that has misfed. Note The image is not fixed on the media before the fusing process. If you touch the printed surface, the toner may stick to your hands, so be careful not to touch the printed face when removing the misfed media. Make sure not to spill any toner inside the printer. CAUTION Unfused toner can dirty your hands, clothes, or anything else it gets on. If you accidentally get toner on your clothes, lightly dust them off as best as you can. If some toner remains on your clothes, use cool, not hot water, to rinse the toner off. If toner gets on your skin, wash it off with cool water and a mild soap. CAUTION If you get toner in your eyes, wash it out immediately with cool water and consult a doctor. If, after clearing the media misfeed, the misfeed message in the control panel window persists, open and close the printer’s top cover. This should clear the misfeed message. 1 6 7 2 3 4 58-6 Clearing Media Misfeeds Media Misfeed Messages and Clearing Procedures Media Misfeed Message Page Reference CHECK TRAY1 PAPER (Displaying alternately) PRESS MENU/SELECT This message appears in the following cases. z When no media is loaded in Tray 1 z When a misfeed has occurred in Tray 1 With the first case, load media into the tray, and then press the Menu Select key. With the second case, refer to page 8-13. PAPER JAM FUSER page 8-7 PAPER JAM EXIT page 8-7 PAPER JAM TRANSFER page 8-7 PAPER JAM TRAY2 OPEN TOP COVER page 8-14 PAPER JAM DUPLEX page 8-17Clearing Media Misfeeds 8-7 Clearing a Media Misfeed in the Printer 1 Open the top cover. " If there is paper in the output tray, remove it, and then fold up the output tray before opening the top cover. 2 Grab the handle and lift it up slightly to the back, and then slowly pull the imaging cartridge out vertically.8-8 Clearing Media Misfeeds Note Do not touch the PC drum and the transfer belt on the imaging cartridge. Position the removed imaging cartridge as shown in the illustration at the right. Be sure to keep the imaging cartridge horizontally horizontal and place it where it will not become dirty. Do not leave the imaging cartridge removed for more than 15 minutes, and do not place the removed imaging cartridge in a location where it would be exposed to direct light (such as sunlight).Clearing Media Misfeeds 8-9 3 Push the fuser separator levers back as far as possible. CAUTION The area around the fuser unit is extremely hot. Touching anything other than the indicated levers may result in burns. If you get burned, immediately cool the skin under cold water, and then seek professional medical attention.8-10 Clearing Media Misfeeds 4 Remove any misfed media. " If a media misfeed occurs near the fuser unit, pull out the media from below the fuser unit, as shown in the illustration at the right. " If the media cannot be removed from below the fuser unit, raise the fuser unit cover, and then remove the media from above the fuser unit. " Remove the dust cover from Tray 1 and remove the media. M MClearing Media Misfeeds 8-11 Note Do not touch the paper exit sensor on the fuser unit. Note Decreased print quality may result if the surface of the transfer roller is touched. Be careful not to touch the surface of the transfer roller. M8-12 Clearing Media Misfeeds 5 Return the fuser separator levers to their original positions. 6 Slowly insert the imaging cartridge vertically, and then push it slightly down toward you to finish reinstalling the imaging cartridge. 7 Carefully close the top cover. MClearing Media Misfeeds 8-13 Clearing a Media Misfeed From Tray 1 1 Remove the dust cover from Tray 1. 2 Carefully pull out the misfed media. " If the media cannot be removed, instead of pulling it with extreme force, clear the media misfeed according to the procedure described in “Clearing a Media Misfeed in the Printer” on page 8-7. 3 Reattach the dust cover. 4 Press the Menu Select key.8-14 Clearing Media Misfeeds Clearing a Media Misfeed From Tray 2 1 Pull out Tray 2 as far as possible. 2 Lift up Tray 2 to remove it. 3 Remove any misfed paper. " If necessary, remove the dust cover from Tray 1 and close the tray.Clearing Media Misfeeds 8-15 4 Remove the lid from Tray 2, and then remove all paper from the tray. 5 Fan the paper, and align its edges. 6 Press down the media pressure plate to lock it into place. 7 Load the media in Tray 2, and attach the lid.8-16 Clearing Media Misfeeds 8 Reinsert Tray 2. 9 Open and close the top cover to clear the misfeed message.Clearing Media Misfeeds 8-17 Clearing a Media Misfeed from the Duplex Option 1 Open the duplex cover. 2 Carefully pull out the misfed media. " Always remove the misfed media in the feed direction as shown only. " If the media misfeed occurs at the bottom feed slot and the media does not stick out enough to be removed, turn the dial at the right in the direction of the arrow until the media can be pulled out.8-18 Clearing Media Misfeeds 3 Close the duplex cover.Solving Problems with Media Misfeeds 8-19 Solving Problems with Media Misfeeds " Frequent misfeeds in any area indicate that area should be checked, repaired, or cleaned. Repeated misfeeds may also happen if you’re using unsupported print media. Symptom Cause Solution Several sheets go through the printer together. The front edges of the media are not even. Remove the media and even up the front edges, then reload it. The media is moist from humidity. Remove the moist media and replace it with new, dry media. Media misfeed message stays on. Top cover needs to be opened and closed again to reset the printer. Open and close the top cover again. Some media remains misfed in the printer. Recheck the media path and make sure that you have removed all of the misfed media. Duplex option misfeeds. Unsupported media (wrong size, thickness, type, etc.) is being used. Use KONICA MINOLTA-approved media. See “Print Media” on page 5-2. Also, refer to http://printer. konicaminolta.com for a complete list of currently approved media. Only Letter/A4 plain paper and recycled paper can be autoduplexed if the duplex option is installed and the media type is set properly in the driver. Make sure that you have not mixed media types in Tray 1. Do not duplex envelopes, labels, thick stock, postcard, or letterheads. Media is still being misfed. Recheck the media path inside the duplex option and make sure that you have removed all of the misfed media.8-20 Solving Problems with Media Misfeeds Media is misfeeding. The media is not correctly positioned in the tray. Remove the misfed media and reposition the media properly in the tray. The number of sheets in the tray exceeds the maximum allowed. Remove the excess media and reload the correct number of sheets in the tray. The media guides are not correctly adjusted to the media size. Adjust the media guides in the Tray 1 to match the size of the media. Warped or wrinkled media is loaded in the tray. Remove the media, smooth it out, and reload it. If it still misfeeds, do not use that media. The media is moist from humidity. Remove the moist media and replace it with new, dry media. Custom-sized media, envelopes, labels, postcards, thick stock, or letterheads are loaded in Tray 2. Special media must be loaded in Tray 1 only. The recommended label sheet is facing the wrong way in Tray 1. Load the label sheets according to the manufacturer’s instructions. Envelopes are facing the wrong way in Tray 1. Load the envelopes in Tray 1 with the flaps facing down. If the flaps are on the long edge (Envelope C6 and Envelope DL), load the envelopes with the flap edge toward the printer and the flap side facing down. Unsupported media (wrong size, thickness, type, etc.) is being used. Use KONICA MINOLTA-approved media. See “Print Media” on page 5-2. Also, refer to http://printer. konicaminolta.com for a complete list of currently approved media. The media feed roller is dirty. Clean the media feed roller. For more details, refer to “Cleaning the Media Feed Roller” on page 7-5. Symptom Cause SolutionSolving Other Problems 8-21 Solving Other Problems " To order KONICA MINOLTA consumables, go to www.q-shop.com. Symptom Cause Solution Printer power is not on. The power cord is not correctly plugged into the outlet. Turn off the printer, confirm that the power cord is correctly plugged into the outlet, and then turn on the printer. Something is wrong with the outlet connected to the printer. Plug another electrical appliance into the outlet and see whether it operates properly. The power switch is not correctly turned on (I position). Turn the power switch off (O position), then turn it back to the on (I position). The printer is connected to an outlet with a voltage or frequency that does not match the printer specifications. Use a power source with the specifications listed in appendix A, “Technical Specifications”. The control panel displays X TONER LOW much sooner than expected. One of the toner cartridges may be defective. Remove the toner cartridges and check each for damage. If one or more is damaged, replace it. You printed with heavy toner coverage. See specifications in appendix A, “Technical Specifications”. You can’t print the configuration page. The tray is empty. Check that at least Tray 1 is loaded with media, in place, and secure. There is a media misfeed. Clear the media misfeed.8-22 Solving Other Problems Printing takes too much time. The printer is set to a slow printing mode (for example, thick stock). It takes more time to print with special media. When using regular paper, make sure that the media type is set properly in the driver. The printer is set to power saving mode. It takes time for printing to start in power saving mode. The job is very complex. Wait. No action needed. A toner cartridge for a different region is installed (X INCORRECT is displayed in the message window). Install a correct KONICA MINOLTA toner cartridge approved for your specific printer. Blank pages are printed. One or more of the toner cartridges are defective or empty. Check the toner cartridges. The image will not print correctly or not at all, if a cartridge is empty. The wrong media is being used. Check that the media type set in the driver matches the media loaded in the printer. Printer returned to IDLE before the configuration menu was changed. The printer was in the configuration menu structure without a selection being made within two minutes. When in the configuration menu structure, select your choice within 2 minutes. Not all pages print. The Cancel key was pressed. Make sure no one pressed the Cancel key while your job was printing. The tray is empty. Check that the tray is loaded with media, in place, and secure. A document is printed with an overlay file which has been created by a non-suitable driver. Print the overlay file using a suitable driver. Symptom Cause SolutionSolving Other Problems 8-23 Printer resets or turns off frequently. The power cord is not correctly plugged into the outlet. Turn off the printer, confirm that the power cord is correctly plugged into the outlet, and then turn on the printer. A system error occurred. Contact Technical Support with the error information. You are experiencing duplex problems. Media or settings are not correct. For autoduplexing, make sure that you have a duplex option installed. Make sure that you are using correct media. „ Only Letter/A4 plain paper can be autoduplexed. „ Do not duplex envelopes, labels, postcards, thick stock, letterheads, or plain paper with a size other than Letter/A4. „ Make sure that you have not mixed media types in Tray 1. Make sure the duplex option is installed and declared in the Windows printer driver (Properties/Configure tab). In the printer driver (Layout tab), choose “Double-sided”. You hear unusual noises. The printer is not level. Place the printer on a flat, hard, level surface. The tray is not installed correctly. Remove the tray that you are printing from and reinsert it completely into the printer. There is a foreign object stuck inside the printer. Turn off the printer and remove the object. If you cannot remove it, contact Technical Support. The web-based utility cannot be accessed. The PageScope Web Connection Administrator’s password is incorrect. The PageScope Web Connection Administrator password has a 1-character minimum and a 16-character maximum. For details of the PageScope Web Connection administrator password, refer to the Reference Guide on the Utilities and Documentation CD/ DVD. Symptom Cause Solution8-24 Solving Other Problems Media is wrinkled. The media is moist from humidity or having water spilled on it. Remove the moist media and replace it with new, dry media. The media feed roller or fuser unit is defective. Check them for damage. If necessary, contact Technical Support with the error information. Unsupported media (wrong size, thickness, type, etc.) is being used. Use KONICA MINOLTA-approved media. See “Print Media” on page 5-2. Also, refer to http://printer. konicaminolta.com for a complete list of currently approved media. The date and time is not correctly maintained on the printer. The backup battery has reached the end of its service life. Contact Technical Support. Symptom Cause SolutionSolving Problems with Printing Quality 8-25 Solving Problems with Printing Quality Symptom Cause Solution Nothing is printed, or there are blank spots on the printed page. One or more of the toner cartridges may be defective. Remove the toner cartridges and check if any is damaged. The imaging cartridge may be defective. Remove the imaging cartridge and check for damage. If it is damaged, replace it. The media is moist from humidity. Adjust the humidity for media storage. Remove the moist media and replace it with new, dry media. The media set in the printer driver mismatches the media loaded in the printer. Load the correct media in the printer. The power source does not match the printer specifications. Use a power source with the proper specifications. Several sheets are being fed at the same time. Remove the media from the tray and check for static electricity. Fan plain paper or other media, and replace it in the tray. Media is not set properly in the tray(s). Remove the media, tap it to straighten it out, return it into the tray, and realign the media guides. Entire sheet is printed in black or color. One or more of the toner cartridges may be defective. Remove the toner cartridges and check each for damage. If one or more is damaged, replace it. The imaging cartridge may be defective. Remove the imaging cartridge and check for damage. If it is damaged, replace it.8-26 Solving Problems with Printing Quality Image is too light; there is low image density. The print head window is dirty. Clean the print head window. The media is moist from humidity. Remove the moist media and replace with new, dry media. There is not much toner left in the cartridge. Replace the toner cartridge. One or more of the toner cartridges may be defective. Remove the toner cartridges and check each for damage. If one or more is damaged, replace it. Media type is set incorrectly. When printing envelopes, labels, postcards, thick stock, or letterheads, specify the appropriate media type in the printer driver. Image is too dark. One or more of the toner cartridges may be defective. Remove the toner cartridges and check each for damage. If one or more is damaged, replace it. The imaging cartridge may be defective. Remove the imaging cartridge and check for damage. If it is damaged, replace it. Image is blurred; background is lightly stained; there is insufficient gloss of the printed image. One or more of the toner cartridges may be defective. Remove the toner cartridges and check each for damage. If one or more is damaged, replace it. The imaging cartridge may be defective. Remove the imaging cartridge and check for damage. If it is damaged, replace it. Symptom Cause SolutionSolving Problems with Printing Quality 8-27 The print or color density is uneven. One or more of the toner cartridges may be defective or low. Remove the toner cartridges and check for damage. If it is damaged, replace it. The imaging cartridge is defective. Remove the imaging cartridge and check for damage. If it is damaged, replace it. The printer is not level. Place the printer on a flat, hard, level surface. Irregular print or mottled image appears. The media is moist from humidity. Adjust the humidity in the media storage area. Remove the moist media and replace it with new, dry media. Unsupported media (wrong size, thickness, type, etc.) is being used. Use KONICA MINOLTA-approved media. See “Print Media” on page 5-2. Also, refer to http://printer. konicaminolta.com for a complete list of currently approved media. One or more of the toner cartridges may be defective. Remove the toner cartridges and check each for damage. If one or more is damaged, replace it. The imaging cartridge is defective. Remove the imaging cartridge and check for damage. If it is damaged, replace it. There is insufficient fusing or the image comes off when rubbed. The media is moist from humidity. Remove the moist media and replace it with new, dry media. Unsupported media (wrong size, thickness, type, etc.) is being used. Use KONICA MINOLTA-approved media. See “Print Media” on page 5-2. Also, refer to http://printer. konicaminolta.com for a complete list of currently approved media. Media type is set incorrectly. When printing envelopes, labels, postcards, thick stock, or letterheads, specify the appropriate media type in the printer driver. Symptom Cause Solution8-28 Solving Problems with Printing Quality There are toner smudges or residual images. One or more of the toner cartridges are defective or installed incorrectly. Remove the toner cartridges and check each for damage. If one or more is damaged, replace it. There are toner smudges on the back side of the page (whether or not it has been duplexed). The media path is dirty with toner. Print several blank sheets and the excess toner should disappear. One or more of the toner cartridges are defective. Remove the toner cartridges and check each for damage. If one or more is damaged, replace it. The imaging cartridge is defective. Remove the imaging cartridge and check for damage. If it is damaged, replace it. Abnormal areas (white, black, or color) appear in a regular pattern. The print head window is dirty. Clean the print head window. A toner cartridge may be defective. Remove the toner cartridge with the color causing the abnormal image. Replace it with a new toner cartridge. The imaging cartridge is defective. Remove the imaging cartridge and check for damage. If it is damaged, replace it. Symptom Cause SolutionSolving Problems with Printing Quality 8-29 Image defects. The print head window is dirty. Clean the print head window. A toner cartridge may be leaking. Remove the toner cartridges and check for damage. If it is damaged, replace it. A toner cartridge may be defective. Remove the toner cartridge with the color causing the abnormal image. Replace it with a new toner cartridge. The imaging cartridge may be defective. Remove the imaging cartridge and check for damage. If it is damaged, replace it. Lateral lines or bands appear on image. The printer is not level. Place the printer on a flat, hard, level surface. The media path is dirty with toner. Print several sheets and the excess toner should disappear. One or more of the toner cartridges may be defective. Remove the toner cartridges and check each for damage. If one or more is damaged, replace it. The imaging cartridge is defective. Remove the imaging cartridge and check for damage. If it is damaged, replace it. Thin white horizontal lines appear at intervals on images. Toner is not evenly adhering to the media. Perform IMAGE REFRESH. (On the control panel menu, go to MAIN MENU/QUALITY MENU/IMAGE REFRESH, then select YES.) If the problem persists, contact your vendor or authorized service provider. Colors look drastically wrong. One or more of the toner cartridges may be defective. Remove the toner cartridges and verify that the toner is distributed evenly on each cartridge roller, and reinstall the toner cartridges. One or more of the toner cartridges may be low or empty. Check the control panel for an X TONER LOW or X TONER OUT message. If necessary, replace the specified toner cartridge. Symptom Cause Solution8-30 Solving Problems with Printing Quality If the problem is not resolved, even after all of the above have been performed, contact Technical Support with the error information. For contact information, refer to the Need Assistance Sheet. Colors are not registering properly; colors are mixed or have pageto-page variation. The imaging cartridge is not correctly seated. Remove the imaging cartridge and reinstall it. One or more of the toner cartridges may be defective. Remove the toner cartridges and check each for damage. If one or more is damaged, replace it. The media is moist from humidity. Remove the moist media and replace it with new, dry media. The color has a poor reproduction or has poor color density. The imaging cartridge may be defective. Remove the imaging cartridge and check for damage. If it is damaged, replace it. Perform AIDC. (On the control panel menu, go to MAIN MENU/QUALITY MENU/AIDC/REQUEST AIDC, then select YES.) Symptom Cause SolutionStatus, Error, and Service Messages 8-31 Status, Error, and Service Messages Status, error, and service messages are displayed in the control panel message window. They provide information about your printer and help you locate many problems. When the condition associated with a displayed message has changed, the message is cleared from the window. Standard Status Messages This message... means... do this... CALIBRATING Whenever you replace a toner cartridge or reboot the printer after making environmental changes, the printer automatically pauses to do an Auto-Image Density Control (AIDC) cycle. This process is provided to make reliable printer operation with optimum output quality possible. No action needed. CANCELLING JOB The job is being cancelled. ENERGY SAVER The printer is in Energy Saver mode to reduce power consumption during periods of inactivity. In addition, the machine will return to its normal operating condition when any key on the control panel is pressed. IDLE The printer is on and ready to receive data. INITIALIZING The printer is being initialized. PRINTING The printer is printing.8-32 Status, Error, and Service Messages Error Messages (Warning) PROCESSING The printer is processing data. No action needed. magicolor 1650 STARTING PRINTER The printer is being started up. PORT AUTH ACTIVE The IEEE802.1x port is being authorized. WARMING UP The printer is warming up. REFRESHING The printer is adjusting the toner distribution. This message... means... do this... CHECK TRAY1 PAPER (Displaying alternately) PRESS MENU/SELECT Tray 1 is empty. Load the media into Tray 1, and then press the Menu Select key. Media has misfed in Tray 1. Remove the misfed media. I/C END The imaging cartridge has reached the end of its life. Replace the imaging cartridge. "Printing can continue, however, the printing result are not guaranteed. If printing is continued, the message "I/C LIFE END" appears and printing stops. I/C LOW The imaging cartridge is near the end of its life. Prepare a new imaging cartridge. TRAY 2 IS EMPTY Tray 2 is empty. Load the media into Tray 2. This message... means... do this...Status, Error, and Service Messages 8-33 TRAY 2 OPEN Tray 2 cassette is not installed or is not fully closed. Close Tray 2 or print from another tray. VIDEO I/F ERROR A video interface error occurred in the printer. Turn off the printer. After a few seconds, turn on the printer. X INCORRECT The X toner cartridge is an unapproved type. Install a KONICA MINOLTA toner cartridge of the appropriate type (AM, EU, AP or GC). See page 6-3. X MEMORY ERROR A memory error occurred in the toner cartridge. Re-install the specified toner cartridge. X TONER LOW The X toner cartridge is nearly empty. Prepare the specified color toner cartridge. X TONER OUT (Ready Indicator: On. Error Indicator: Off) The X toner cartridge is empty. (If the MAIN MENU/ QUALITY MENU/ TONER OUT ACTION menu is set to CONTINUE.) Replace the toner cartridge. "Printing can continue, however, the printing results are not guaranteed. If printing is continued, the message "X TONER LIFE END" appears and printing stops. This message... means... do this...8-34 Status, Error, and Service Messages Error Messages (Operator Call) This message... means... do this... AUTH TIMEOUT The user is automatically logged off due to IEEE802.1x port authorization. Reauthorize the IEEE802.1x port, and then log on. AIDC ERROR AIDC sensor error. Open and close front cover to automatically clean AIDC parts. BELT ERROR The printer detected incorrect image position on the image transfer belt. Check the cyan and black toner cartridges and replace them if they have run out. If the error has not been recovered by this procedure, please call Technical Support. DUPLEX UNIT PANEL OPEN Duplex cover is open. Close the duplex cover. DOWNLOAD IMAGE INVALID While updating code, an error has occurred. The user should attempt the upgrade process again. I/C LIFE END The imaging cartridge is reached the end of its life. Replace the imaging cartridge. PAPER JAM DUPLEX Media has misfed in the duplex option. Locate and remove the misfeed. PAPER JAM EXIT Media has misfed in the fuser area. PAPER JAM FUSER PAPER JAM TRANSFER Media has misfed in the transfer roller area. This type of misfeed means that the media did not make it to the paper exit area. PAPER JAM TRAY 2 Media has misfed while being pulled from Tray 2. Locate and remove the misfeed.Status, Error, and Service Messages 8-35 PUT "SIZE" "TYPE" IN TRAY 1 The size of paper being printed on is different from the size of paper specified in the printer driver. Load the correct paper on Tray1, and press the Menu Select key, then specify the size and type of the paper. PUT “SIZE” “TYPE” IN TRAY 2 The paper size set from the printer driver is different from the size of paper loaded into Tray 2. „ Open Tray 2 and keep correct paper size. Then close Tray 2. „ Specify the correct paper size in the MAIN MENU/ PAPER MENU/INPUT TRAY/TRAY2/MEDIA SIZE menu. TOP COVER OPEN The printer’s top cover is open. Close the top cover. The imaging cartridge is not installed. Install the imaging cartridge. A imaging cartridge incompatible with the machine is installed. Replace the imaging cartridge with a correct one. X TONER LIFE END The X toner cartridge has reached the end of its life. Replace the toner cartridge. "If the MAIN MENU/ QUALITY MENU/ TONER OUT ACTION menu is set to CONTINUE. X TONER MISSING The X toner cartridge is not installed. Install a X toner cartridge. X TONER OUT REPLACE XXXX (Ready Indicator: Off. Error Indicator: On) The X toner cartridge is empty. (If the MAIN MENU/ QUALITY MENU/TONER OUT ACTION menu is set to STOP.) Replace the toner cartridge. "If the MAIN MENU/ QUALITY MENU/ TONER OUT ACTION menu is set to CONTINUE, printing can continue. However, the printing results are not guaranteed. This message... means... do this...8-36 Status, Error, and Service Messages Service Messages These messages indicate a more serious error that can only be corrected by a customer service engineer. If one of these messages appears, turn the printer off, then turn it on again. If the problem persists, contact your local vendor or authorized service provider. This service message... means... do this... SERVICE CALL XXXX An error has been detected with the item indicated “XXXX” in the service message. Reboot the printer. This often clears the service message, and printer operation can resume. If the problem persists, contact Technical Support.Installing Accessories9-2 Introduction Introduction Note Use of accessories not manufactured or supported by KONICA MINOLTA will void your warranty. This chapter provides information about the following accessories. Note Installing accessories always requires that the printer and accessories are turned off and unplugged during installation. " For details on the available options, refer to printer.konicaminolta.com. Tray 2 500-sheet tray Duplex Option Auto duplexing "In order for the duplex option to be installed, Tray 2 must be installed on the printer. Duplex Option and Attachment Auto duplexing "The attachment is an interface unit for installing the duplex option on the machine. "During installation, install the attachment before installing the duplex option.Tray 2 9-3 Tray 2 If Tray 2 is installed, up to 500 additional sheets of A4/Letter-size paper can be loaded. Installing Tray 2 Note Since consumables are installed in the printer, be sure to keep the printer level when moving it in order to prevent accidental spills. 1 Turn off the printer and disconnect the power cord and interface cables.9-4 Tray 2 2 Remove the dust cover from Tray 1. Close Tray 1 and the output tray. 3 Prepare Tray 2. " Be sure to place Tray 2 on a level surface. 4 Lift the printer and place it on top of Tray 2, making sure that the positioning pins on Tray 2 correctly fit into the holes in the bottom of the printer. 5 Open Tray 1 and reattach the dust cover. 6 Load paper into Tray 2. For details on loading paper, refer to “Tray 2” in “Loading Plain Paper” on page 5-18. 7 Insert Tray 2 into the printer. 8 Reconnect all interface cables.Tray 2 9-5 9 Reconnect the power cord, and turn on the printer. 10 Declare the Tray 2 in the Windows printer driver (Properties/Configure tab, see page 2-2).9-6 Duplex Option Duplex Option Duplex (Double Sided) printing can be performed automatically with the duplex option installed. See “Duplexing” on page 5-21. In order for the duplex option to be installed, either of the following must be installed on the printer. z Tray 2 z Attachment " If Tray 2 is installed, it is not necessary to install the attachment. In this case, skip “Installing the Attachment”, and continue with “Installing the Duplex Option” on page 9-8. Installing Attachment If the attachment is installed, the duplex option can be installed. (The attachment cannot be used by itself; it must be used together with the duplex option.) Note Since consumables are installed in the printer, be sure to keep the printer level when moving it in order to prevent accidental spills. Duplex option AttachmentDuplex Option 9-7 1 Turn off the printer and disconnect the power cord and interface cables. 2 Remove the dust cover from Tray 1. Close Tray 1 and the output tray. 3 Prepare the attachment. " Be sure to place the attachment on a level surface. 4 Lift the printer and place it on top the attachment, making sure that the positioning pins on the attachment correctly fit into the holes on the bottom of the printer. 5 Open Tray 1 and reattach the dust cover. Next, install the duplex option.9-8 Duplex Option Installing the Duplex Option " The illustrations in the following installation procedure show the printer with Tray 2 installed; however, the installation procedure would be the same if the attachment was installed. 1 Turn off the printer and disconnect the power cord and interface cables. 2 Remove the tape affixed to the rear cover. 3 Prepare the duplex option.Duplex Option 9-9 4 Install the duplex option. Align the duplex option with its installation position, and then push down on the bottom of the duplex option until it locks into place. Note When attaching the duplex option, attach the bottom of the option first. If the duplex option is attached incorrectly, it may be damaged. 5 Open the duplex cover. While holding the duplex option against the printer, tighten the screws inside the cover to complete the installation of the duplex option.9-10 Duplex Option 6 Reconnect all interface cables. 7 Reconnect the power cord, and turn on the printer. 8 Declare the duplex in the Windows printer driver (Properties/Configure tab, see page 2-2).AppendixA-2 Technical Specifications Technical Specifications Printer Type Desktop full color laser beam printer Printing system Dual laser diode with polygon mirror Developing system Mono component development system Fusing system Heat roller system Resolution 600 dpi × 600 dpi × 4 bits or 600 dpi × 600 dpi × 1 bit First print Simplex „ Monochrome: 13.0 seconds for A4, Letter (plain paper) „ Full color: 22.0 seconds for A4, Letter (plain paper) Duplex „ Monochrome: 26.0 seconds for A4, Letter (plain paper) „ Full color: 35.0 seconds for A4, Letter (plain paper) Print speed Simplex „ Monochrome: 20.0 pages per minute for A4, Letter (plain paper) „ Full color: 5.0 pages per minute for A4, Letter (plain paper) Duplex „ Monochrome: Tray 1: 8.0 pages per minute for A4, Letter (plain paper) Tray 2: 13.2 pages per minute for A4, Letter (plain paper) „ Full color: 5.0 pages per minute for A4, Letter (plain paper) Warm-up time Avg. 45 secondsTechnical Specifications A-3 Media sizes Tray 1 „ Paper width:92 to 216 mm (3.6 to 8.5") „ Paper length: Plain paper: 195 to 356 mm (7.7 to 14.0") Thick stock 1/2: 184 to 297 mm (7.25 to 11.7") Tray 2 (Optional) A4/Letter Paper/Media Plain paper (60 to 90 g/m2 ; 16 to 24 lb bond) Envelope Thick stock 1 (91 to 163 g/m2 ) Thick stock 2 (164 to 209 g/m2 ) Postcard Letterhead Label sheet Input capacity Tray 1 „ Plain paper: 200 sheets „ Envelope: 10 envelopes „ Label/Letterhead/Postcard/Thick Stock: 50 sheets Tray 2 (Optional) Plain paper: 500 sheets Output capacity Output tray: 100 sheets (A4, Letter) Operating temperature 10 to 35°C (50 to 95°F) Operating humidity 15 to 85% Power supply 120 V, 60 Hz 220 to 240 V, 50 to 60 Hz Power consumption 120 V: 1000 W or less 220 to 240 V: 1060 W or less Energy Saver Mode: 18.5 W or less Amperage 120 V: 8.4 A or less 220 to 240 V: 4.4 A or less A-4 Technical Specifications Acoustic Noise Printing: 50 dB or less (monochrome) 49 dB or less (color) Standby: 29 dB or less External dimensions Height: 275 mm (10.8") Width: 396 mm (15.6") Depth: 380 mm (14.9") Weights 11.9 kg (without consumables) 15.1 kg (with consumables) Interface USB 2.0 High-Speed compliant, 10Base-T/ 100Base-TX Ethernet Standard memory 256 MBTechnical Specifications A-5 Consumable Life Expectancy Chart User-Replaceable Service-Replaceable " The values listed in the above table indicate the number of pages for simplex printing using A4/Letter-size media with 5% coverage. The actual life may differ (be shorter) depending on the printing conditions (coverage, paper size, etc.), differences in the printing method, such as continuous printing or intermittent printing (when print jobs of one page are often printed), or the type of paper used, for example, thick paper. In addition, the life will be affected by the temperature and humidity of the operating environment. Item Average Life Expectancy (in Simplex Pages) Toner cartridge Starter Cartridge = 500 pages (Y, M, C) 1,000 pages (K) Replacement Cartridge = Standard-capacity: 1,500 pages (Y, M, C) High-capacity: 2,500 pages (Y, M, C, K) Imaging cartridge Monochrome: 45,000 pages (Continuous) 10,000 pages (1 page per job) Full color: 11,250 pages (Continuous) 7,500 pages (1 page per job) Fuser unit 50,000 pages Item Average Life Expectancy Transfer roller 50,000 pagesA-6 Our Concern for Environmental Protection Our Concern for Environmental Protection As an ENERGY STAR ® Partner, we have determined that this machine meets the ENERGY STAR Guidelines for energy efficiency. What is an ENERGY STAR product? An ENERGY STAR product has a special feature that allows it to automatically switch to a “low-power mode” after a period of inactivity. An ENERGY STAR product uses energy more efficiently, saves you money on utility bills and helps protect the environment.Index Index A-7 A Accessories Duplex option ..............................9-6 Tray 2 ..........................................9-3 C Configuration menu .....................4-5 Consumables Fuser Unit .................................6-19 Imaging Cartridge .....................6-16 Toner cartridge ...........................6-2 Control panel ................................4-2 D Duplexing ....................................5-21 Duplex option ..............................9-6 E Envelope ....................................... 5-5 Error messages .......................... 8-32 L Labels ........................................... 5-6 Letterhead .................................... 5-7 Loading media ........................... 5-10 M Maintenance ................................. 7-2 Media Clearing misfeeds ...................... 8-5 Loading .................................... 5-10 Path ............................................ 8-5 Preventing misfeeds ................... 8-4 Printable area ............................. 5-8 Media misfeed Duplex option ........................... 8-17A-8 Index Interior .........................................8-5 Tray 2 ........................................8-14 Media path .....................................8-5 Media storage .............................5-23 Media type Envelope .....................................5-5 Labels .........................................5-6 Letterhead ...................................5-7 Plain paper ..................................5-3 Postcard ......................................5-7 Thick stock ..................................5-4 Message window ..........................4-2 Messages ....................................8-31 Misfeed problems .......................8-19 Clearing ......................................8-5 Media path ..................................8-5 Preventing ...................................8-4 O Output tray ..................................5-22 P Page margins ................................5-9 Plain paper ....................................5-3 Postcard ........................................5-7 Preventing media misfeeds .........8-4 Print quality .................................8-25 Printable Area ...............................5-8 Printer Parts ...........................................1-4 Printer driver .................................2-6 Advanced tab ..............................2-7 Basic tab .....................................2-8 Cover page tab ...........................2-8 Displaying ...................................2-5 Layout tab ...................................2-8 Other Tab ....................................2-9 Quality Tab .................................2-9 Uninstalling .................................2-4 Watermark/Overlay Tab ..............2-8 S Service messages ......................8-36 Status Monitor ..............................3-2 Closing ....................................... 3-3 Opening ...................................... 3-2 Using .......................................... 3-2 T Thick stock ................................... 5-4 Tray 2 ............................................ 9-3 Troubleshooting .......................... 8-1 User’s Guide [Copy Operations]bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 Contents-1 Table of contents 1 Introduction 1.1 Welcome .......................................................................................................................................... 1-2 1.1.1 User's guides ..................................................................................................................................... 1-2 1.1.2 User's Guide ...................................................................................................................................... 1-3 1.2 Conventions used in this manual .................................................................................................. 1-4 1.2.1 Symbols used in this manual ............................................................................................................. 1-4 To use this machine safely................................................................................................................. 1-4 Procedural instruction........................................................................................................................ 1-4 Key symbols....................................................................................................................................... 1-5 1.2.2 Original and paper indications ........................................................................................................... 1-5 Original and paper sizes .................................................................................................................... 1-5 Original and paper indications ........................................................................................................... 1-5 2 Part names and their functions 2.1 Options............................................................................................................................................. 2-2 2.1.1 bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS................................................................................................ 2-2 2.1.2 bizhub C452....................................................................................................................................... 2-5 2.2 Main Body........................................................................................................................................ 2-7 2.2.1 Outside of the main body (front) ........................................................................................................ 2-7 2.2.2 Outside of the main body (rear) ......................................................................................................... 2-9 2.2.3 Main bodyInside............................................................................................................................... 2-11 bizhub C652/C552/C452 ................................................................................................................. 2-11 bizhub C652DS/C552DS ................................................................................................................. 2-13 2.2.4 Control panel.................................................................................................................................... 2-14 Adjusting the angle of the control panel .......................................................................................... 2-15 2.2.5 Touch panel ..................................................................................................................................... 2-16 2.3 Option............................................................................................................................................. 2-18 2.3.1 Finisher FS-526/Saddle stitcher SD-508/Punch kit PK-516............................................................ 2-18 2.3.2 Job separator JS-602 ...................................................................................................................... 2-20 2.3.3 Z Folding Unit ZU-606 ..................................................................................................................... 2-21 2.3.4 Post Inserter PI-505 ......................................................................................................................... 2-22 2.3.5 Finisher FS-527/ Saddle Stitcher SD-509/ Punch Kit PK-517/ Job Separator JS-603................... 2-23 2.3.6 Job Separator JS-504...................................................................................................................... 2-25 2.3.7 Large capacity unit LU-301/LU-204 ................................................................................................ 2-26 3 Using this machine 3.1 Turning on or off the machine ....................................................................................................... 3-2 3.2 Basic copy operations.................................................................................................................... 3-4 3.2.1 Placing originals................................................................................................................................. 3-4 Loading the original into the ADF ...................................................................................................... 3-4 Placing the original on the original glass ........................................................................................... 3-5 3.2.2 Basic copy operations ....................................................................................................................... 3-5 3.2.3 Copy operations using multiple functions ......................................................................................... 3-6 Functions that cannot be combined .................................................................................................. 3-8 4 Control Panel Keys Control panel and functions............................................................................................................... 4-2 4.1 About the [Start] key, the [Stop] key, and the [Interrupt] key..................................................... 4-4 The [Start] key .................................................................................................................................... 4-4 The [Stop] key .................................................................................................................................... 4-4bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 Contents-2 The [Interrupt] key .............................................................................................................................. 4-4 The [Reset] key .................................................................................................................................. 4-4 4.2 About the [Copy] key, the [Fax/Scan] key, and the [User Box] key ........................................... 4-5 The [Copy] key ................................................................................................................................... 4-5 The [Fax/Scan] key ............................................................................................................................ 4-5 The [User Box] key............................................................................................................................. 4-5 4.3 The [Utility/Counter] key ................................................................................................................ 4-6 4.4 The [Mode Memory] key................................................................................................................. 4-7 4.5 The [Access] key............................................................................................................................. 4-8 Controlling access to the machine by user/account (user authentication/account track)................. 4-8 Using the machine during non-scheduled hours............................................................................. 4-10 4.6 The [Power Save] key ................................................................................................................... 4-11 4.7 The [Accessibility] key.................................................................................................................. 4-12 4.8 The [Enlarge Display] key............................................................................................................. 4-14 4.9 The [Guidance] key ....................................................................................................................... 4-15 4.10 The [C] (Clear) key ........................................................................................................................ 4-17 4.11 The [Proof Copy] key .................................................................................................................... 4-18 Printing one set to check the copy result (Proof Copy) ................................................................... 4-18 Using a preview image to check the copy result (Advanced Preview) ............................................ 4-19 5 Copy Function 5.1 Basic................................................................................................................................................. 5-3 5.1.1 Color .................................................................................................................................................. 5-4 5.1.2 Paper.................................................................................................................................................. 5-5 Configuring a custom size ................................................................................................................. 5-6 Configuring wide paper...................................................................................................................... 5-6 5.1.3 Zoom.................................................................................................................................................. 5-7 5.1.4 Duplex/Combine ................................................................................................................................ 5-8 5.1.5 Finishing........................................................................................................................................... 5-10 5.1.6 Post Inserter..................................................................................................................................... 5-12 Keys on control panel ...................................................................................................................... 5-12 Finishing using Post Inserter............................................................................................................ 5-13 5.1.7 Separate Scan ................................................................................................................................. 5-13 5.1.8 Auto Rotate OFF .............................................................................................................................. 5-14 5.2 Original Setting.............................................................................................................................. 5-15 Copying mixed originals .................................................................................................................. 5-16 Copying Z-folded originals............................................................................................................... 5-17 5.3 Quality/Density .............................................................................................................................. 5-18 5.4 Application..................................................................................................................................... 5-20 5.4.1 Sheet/Cover/Chapter Insert............................................................................................................. 5-21 OHP Interleave................................................................................................................................. 5-21 Cover Sheet ..................................................................................................................................... 5-22 Insert Sheet...................................................................................................................................... 5-23 Insert Image ..................................................................................................................................... 5-24 Chapters .......................................................................................................................................... 5-26 Program Jobs .................................................................................................................................. 5-27 5.4.2 Edit Color ......................................................................................................................................... 5-29 Neg./Pos. Reverse ........................................................................................................................... 5-29 Mirror Image..................................................................................................................................... 5-30 Background Color............................................................................................................................ 5-31 Color Adjustment ............................................................................................................................. 5-31 5.4.3 Book Copy/Repeat .......................................................................................................................... 5-33 Book Copy ....................................................................................................................................... 5-33 Image Repeat................................................................................................................................... 5-34 Poster Mode .................................................................................................................................... 5-35 Booklet Original................................................................................................................................ 5-36 5.4.4 Page Margin..................................................................................................................................... 5-37 5.4.5 Image Adjust .................................................................................................................................... 5-39bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 Contents-3 5.4.6 Booklet............................................................................................................................................. 5-40 5.4.7 Erase ................................................................................................................................................ 5-41 Frame Erase..................................................................................................................................... 5-41 Non-Image Area Erase..................................................................................................................... 5-42 5.4.8 Stamp/Composition......................................................................................................................... 5-43 Date/Time......................................................................................................................................... 5-44 Page Number................................................................................................................................... 5-45 Stamp............................................................................................................................................... 5-47 Copy Protect.................................................................................................................................... 5-48 Copy Guard...................................................................................................................................... 5-49 Password Copy................................................................................................................................ 5-50 Stamp Repeat .................................................................................................................................. 5-51 Header/Footer.................................................................................................................................. 5-53 Watermark........................................................................................................................................ 5-54 Overlay............................................................................................................................................. 5-55 Registered Overlay........................................................................................................................... 5-56 5.4.9 Card Copy........................................................................................................................................ 5-59 5.4.10 Save in User Box ............................................................................................................................. 5-60 5.5 Left panel display .......................................................................................................................... 5-61 5.5.1 Job List ............................................................................................................................................ 5-62 5.5.2 Check Job........................................................................................................................................ 5-64 6 User Settings 6.1 System Settings .............................................................................................................................. 6-3 6.2 Custom Display Settings ................................................................................................................ 6-6 6.3 Copier Settings................................................................................................................................ 6-8 6.4 Fax/Scan Settings......................................................................................................................... 6-11 6.5 Printer Settings ............................................................................................................................. 6-12 6.6 Change Password......................................................................................................................... 6-13 6.7 Change E-Mail Address................................................................................................................ 6-14 6.8 Change Icon .................................................................................................................................. 6-15 6.9 Register Authentication Information........................................................................................... 6-16 6.10 Cellular Phone/PDA Setting ......................................................................................................... 6-18 7 Administrator Settings 7.1 System Settings .............................................................................................................................. 7-3 7.1.1 Power Save Settings.......................................................................................................................... 7-3 7.1.2 Output Settings.................................................................................................................................. 7-4 7.1.3 Date/Time Settings ............................................................................................................................ 7-5 7.1.4 Daylight Saving Time ......................................................................................................................... 7-6 7.1.5 Weekly Timer Setting ......................................................................................................................... 7-7 7.1.6 Restrict User Access.......................................................................................................................... 7-8 7.1.7 Expert Adjustment ............................................................................................................................. 7-9 Leading Edge Adjustment................................................................................................................ 7-13 Centering.......................................................................................................................................... 7-13 Media Adjustment............................................................................................................................ 7-14 Center Staple Position ..................................................................................................................... 7-14 Half-Fold Position ............................................................................................................................ 7-15 Tri-Fold Position Adjustment ........................................................................................................... 7-15 Punch Vertical Position Adjustment................................................................................................. 7-16 Punch Horizontal Position Adjustment ............................................................................................ 7-16 Punch Regist Loop Size Adjustment ............................................................................................... 7-17 Punch Edge Sensor Adjustment...................................................................................................... 7-17 Vertical Punch (Z-Fold) Position Adjustment ................................................................................... 7-17 Horizontal Punch (Z-Fold) Position Adjustment............................................................................... 7-18 1st Z-Fold Position Adjustment ....................................................................................................... 7-18 2nd Z-Fold Position Adjustment ...................................................................................................... 7-19 Punch Unit Size Detect Sensor........................................................................................................ 7-19bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 Contents-4 Color Registration Adjust................................................................................................................. 7-20 Gradation Adjustment...................................................................................................................... 7-21 7.1.8 List/Counter ..................................................................................................................................... 7-22 7.1.9 Reset Settings.................................................................................................................................. 7-23 7.1.10 User Box Settings ............................................................................................................................ 7-24 7.1.11 Standard Size Setting ...................................................................................................................... 7-24 7.1.12 Stamp Settings ................................................................................................................................ 7-25 7.1.13 Blank Page Print Settings ................................................................................................................ 7-26 7.1.14 Skip Job Operation Settings............................................................................................................ 7-26 7.1.15 Default Bypass Paper Type Setting ................................................................................................. 7-27 7.1.16 Advanced Preview Setting............................................................................................................... 7-27 7.1.17 Page Number Print Position............................................................................................................. 7-28 7.2 Administrator/Machine Settings.................................................................................................. 7-29 7.3 One-Touch/User Box Registration.............................................................................................. 7-30 7.4 User Authentication/Account Track............................................................................................ 7-31 7.4.1 General Settings .............................................................................................................................. 7-32 7.4.2 User Authentication Settings ........................................................................................................... 7-34 7.4.3 Account Track Settings.................................................................................................................... 7-37 7.4.4 Print without Authentication............................................................................................................. 7-38 7.4.5 Print Counter List ............................................................................................................................. 7-38 7.4.6 External Server Settings................................................................................................................... 7-39 7.4.7 Limiting Access to Destinations....................................................................................................... 7-39 7.4.8 Authentication Device Settings........................................................................................................ 7-40 7.4.9 User/Account Common Setting....................................................................................................... 7-41 7.4.10 Scan to Home Settings.................................................................................................................... 7-41 7.4.11 Scan to Authorized Folder Settings ................................................................................................. 7-41 7.5 Network Settings .......................................................................................................................... 7-42 7.6 Copier Settings.............................................................................................................................. 7-43 7.7 Printer Settings ............................................................................................................................. 7-45 7.8 Fax Settings................................................................................................................................... 7-46 7.9 System Connection....................................................................................................................... 7-47 7.10 Security Settings ........................................................................................................................... 7-49 7.10.1 Administrator Password................................................................................................................... 7-49 7.10.2 User Box Administrator Setting ....................................................................................................... 7-49 7.10.3 Administrator Security Levels .......................................................................................................... 7-50 7.10.4 Security Details ................................................................................................................................ 7-51 7.10.5 Enhanced Security Mode................................................................................................................. 7-54 Required settings............................................................................................................................. 7-54 Settings to forcibly changed ............................................................................................................ 7-54 7.10.6 HDD Settings ................................................................................................................................... 7-55 7.10.7 Function Management Settings....................................................................................................... 7-56 7.10.8 Stamp Settings ................................................................................................................................ 7-57 7.10.9 Driver Password Encryption Setting ................................................................................................ 7-57 7.11 License Settings............................................................................................................................ 7-58 7.12 OpenAPI Authentication Management Settings ........................................................................ 7-59 8 Maintenance 8.1 Paper ................................................................................................................................................ 8-2 8.1.1 Checking the paper............................................................................................................................ 8-2 Replenishment message.................................................................................................................... 8-2 Precautions regarding the use of paper ............................................................................................ 8-2 Paper storage..................................................................................................................................... 8-2 8.1.2 Loading paper.................................................................................................................................... 8-3 Loading paper into trays 1 and 2....................................................................................................... 8-3 Loading paper into trays 3 and 4....................................................................................................... 8-4bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 Contents-5 Loading paper into the bypass tray ................................................................................................... 8-5 Loading paper into the LCT ............................................................................................................... 8-7 8.2 Consumables................................................................................................................................... 8-8 8.2.1 Checking comsumables .................................................................................................................... 8-8 Replacement message ...................................................................................................................... 8-8 Checking consumables status......................................................................................................... 8-10 Viewing counters.............................................................................................................................. 8-10 Checking the total number of pages printed ................................................................................... 8-11 8.3 Cleaning procedure ...................................................................................................................... 8-12 Slit glass (bizhub C652/C552/C452)................................................................................................ 8-12 Slit glass (front) (bizhub C652DS/C552DS)...................................................................................... 8-12 Slit glass (back) (bizhub C652DS/C552DS) ..................................................................................... 8-13 Original glass, control panel, paper take-up roller........................................................................... 8-13 Housing, document pad .................................................................................................................. 8-14 9 Troubleshooting 9.1 When the message "Trouble" appears (call a service representative)...................................... 9-2 Problems that cannot be corrected by the user ................................................................................ 9-2 9.2 Troubleshooting table..................................................................................................................... 9-4 Simple troubleshooting...................................................................................................................... 9-4 Main messages and their remedies ................................................................................................... 9-8 Icons that appear in the touch-panel screen ................................................................................... 9-10 9.3 If print quality is deteriorated....................................................................................................... 9-12 Cleaning the electrostatic charger wire ........................................................................................... 9-12 Cleaning the print head.................................................................................................................... 9-13 10 Authentication unit (biometric type) 10.1 Using an authentication unit (biometric type) ............................................................................ 10-2 10.1.1 Configuring this machine ................................................................................................................. 10-3 10.1.2 Registering a user ............................................................................................................................ 10-5 Registering a user using the control panel of this machine............................................................. 10-5 Registering a user using Data Administrator ................................................................................... 10-6 Checking the version of the installed Data Administrator................................................................ 10-7 Setup................................................................................................................................................ 10-7 User registration............................................................................................................................. 10-11 10.1.3 Logging in to this machine............................................................................................................. 10-17 When 1-to-many authentication has been specified ..................................................................... 10-17 When 1-to-1 authentication has been specified............................................................................ 10-18 11 Authentication unit (IC card type) 11.1 Using authentication unit (IC card type) ..................................................................................... 11-2 11.1.1 Configuring this machine ................................................................................................................. 11-2 11.1.2 Registering a user ............................................................................................................................ 11-4 Registering a user using the control panel of this machine............................................................. 11-4 Registering a user using Data Administrator ................................................................................... 11-6 Checking the version of the installed Data Administrator................................................................ 11-6 Setup................................................................................................................................................ 11-7 User registration............................................................................................................................. 11-11 11.1.3 Logging in to this machine............................................................................................................. 11-15 When IC card authentication is enabled........................................................................................ 11-15 When IC card authentication + password authentication is enabled ............................................ 11-16 12 Specifications 12.1 Paper .............................................................................................................................................. 12-2 Paper types and paper capacities ................................................................................................... 12-2 12.2 Machine specifications................................................................................................................. 12-4 bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452.................................................................................... 12-4bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 Contents-6 Automatic duplex unit...................................................................................................................... 12-7 Reverse automatic document feeder (bizhub C652/C552/C452).................................................... 12-7 Reverse automatic document feeder (bizhub C652DS/C552DS).................................................... 12-7 12.3 Options........................................................................................................................................... 12-8 Large capacity unit LU-301.............................................................................................................. 12-8 Large capacity unit LU-204.............................................................................................................. 12-8 Finisher FS-526................................................................................................................................ 12-9 Saddle stitcher SD-508.................................................................................................................. 12-10 Punch kit PK-516........................................................................................................................... 12-11 Job Separator JS-602.................................................................................................................... 12-12 Z-Folding Unit ZU-606................................................................................................................... 12-12 Post Inserter PI-505 ....................................................................................................................... 12-13 Finisher FS-527.............................................................................................................................. 12-13 Saddle stitcher SD-509.................................................................................................................. 12-14 Punch Kit PK-517 .......................................................................................................................... 12-15 Job Separator JS-504.................................................................................................................... 12-15 Job Separator JS-603.................................................................................................................... 12-16 Authentication unit (biometric type) AU-101.................................................................................. 12-16 Authentication unit (biometric type) AU-102.................................................................................. 12-17 Authentication unit (IC card type) AU-201 ..................................................................................... 12-17 13 Appendix 13.1 Colors............................................................................................................................................. 13-2 Hue, brightness, and saturation....................................................................................................... 13-2 Red, green, and blue........................................................................................................................ 13-4 13.2 Image quality ................................................................................................................................. 13-5 Contrast, copy density, and sharpness ........................................................................................... 13-5 Color balance (CMYK) ..................................................................................................................... 13-6 13.3 Glossary ......................................................................................................................................... 13-7 14 Index 14.1 Index by item ................................................................................................................................. 14-2 14.2 Index by button.............................................................................................................................. 14-61 Introductionbizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 1-2 1.1 Welcome 1 1 Introduction 1.1 Welcome Thank you for purchasing this machine. This User's Guide describes the functions, operating instructions, precautions for correct operation, and simple troubleshooting guidelines of this machine. In order to obtain maximum performance from this product and use it effectively, please read this User's Guide as necessary. 1.1.1 User's guides Printed manual Overview Quick Guide [Copy/Print/Fax/Scan/Box Operations] This manual describes operating procedures and the functions that are most frequently used in order to enable you to begin using this machine immediately. This manual also contains notes and precautions that should be followed to ensure safe usage of this machine. Please be sure to read this manual before using this machine. User's guide CD manuals Overview Copy Operations This manual describes details on copy mode operations and the settings of this machine. • Specifications of originals and copy paper • Copy function • Maintaining this machine • Troubleshooting Enlarge Display Operations This manual describes details on operating procedures of enlarge display mode. • Copy function • Scanning function • G3 fax function • Network fax function Print Operations This manual describes details on printer functions. • Printer function • Configuring the printer driver Box Operations This manual describes details on the boxed functions using the hard disk. • Saving data in User Boxes • Retrieving data from User Boxes • Printing and transferring data from User Boxes Network Scan/Fax/Network Fax Operations This manual describes details on transmitting scanned data. • Scan to E-Mail, FTP TX, SMB TX, Save in User Box, WebDAV and Web Service • G3 fax • IP Address Fax, Internet Fax Fax Driver Operations This manual describes details on the fax driver function that transmits faxes directly from a computer. • PC-FAX Network Administrator This manual describes details on setting methods for each function using the network connection. • Network settings • Settings using PageScope Web Connectionbizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 1-3 1.1 Welcome 1 1.1.2 User's Guide This User's Guide is intended for a wide range of users ranging from those using this machine for the first time to administrators. It describes basic operations, functions that enable more convenient operations, maintenance procedures, simple troubleshooting operations, and various setting methods of this machine. Note that basic technical knowledge about the product is required to enable users to perform maintenance work or troubleshooting operations. Limit your maintenance and troubleshooting operations to the areas explained in this manual. Should you experience any problems, please contact our service representative. Advanced Function Operations This manual describes details on functions that become available by registering the optional license kit and by connecting to an application. • Web browser function • Image Panel • PDF Processing Function • Searchable PDF • My panel and My address function Trademarks/Copyrights This manual describes details on trademarks and copyrights. • Trademarks and copyrights User's guide CD manuals Overviewbizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 1-4 1.2 Conventions used in this manual 1 1.2 Conventions used in this manual 1.2.1 Symbols used in this manual Symbols are used in this manual to express various types of information. The following describes each symbol related to correct and safe usage of this machine. To use this machine safely 7 WARNING - This symbol indicates that a failure to heed the instructions may lead to death or serious injury. 7 CAUTION - This symbol indicates that negligence of the instructions may lead to mishandling that may cause injury or property damage. NOTICE This symbol indicates a risk that may result in damage to this machine or originals. Follow the instructions to avoid property damage. Procedural instruction 0 This check mark indicates an option that is required in order to use conditions or functions that are prerequisite for a procedure. 1 This format number "1" represents the first step. 2 This format number represents the order of serial steps. % This symbol indicates a supplementary explanation of a procedural instruction. % This symbol indicates transition of the control panel to access a desired menu item. This symbol indicates a desired page. dReference This symbol indicates a reference. A procedural operation is illustrated.bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 1-5 1.2 Conventions used in this manual 1 View the reference as required. Key symbols [ ] This symbol represents a key name on the control panel, touch panel or the computer screen, power switch, etc. 1.2.2 Original and paper indications Original and paper sizes The following explains the indication for originals and paper described in this manual. When indicating the original or paper size, the Y side represents the width and the X side the length. Original and paper indications w indicates the paper size with the length (X) being longer than the width (Y). v indicates the paper size with the length (X) being shorter than the width (Y).2 Part names and their functionsbizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 2-2 2.1 Options 2 2 Part names and their functions 2.1 Options 2.1.1 bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS No. Name Description 1 Main unit The original is scanned by the scanner section, and the scanned image is printed by the printer section. Referred to as the "machine", the "main unit", or the "C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS" throughout the manual. 2 Authentication unit (biometric type) AU-101 Performs user authentication by scanning vein patterns in the finger. Working table WT-506 is required to install the authentication unit. 3 Authentication unit (biometric type) AU-102 4 Authentication unit (IC card type) AU-201 Performs user authentication by scanning information recorded on the IC card. Working table WT-506 is required to install the authentication unit. 5 Working table WT-506 Provides an area to temporarily place an original or other materials. This is also used when the authentication unit is installed. 5 6 2 3 1 4 10 8 9 7 15 16 18 19 20 17 12 11 13 14bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 2-3 2.1 Options 2 6 Keyboard holder KH-101 Mount this kit to use a compact keyboard. For details on compact keyboards, contact your service representative. 7 Output Tray OT-503 Collects printed pages. 8 Mount kit MK-715 Used for banner printing. • This option may not be available depending on the sales area. 9 Image controller IC-412 v1.1 Allows you to use this machine as a network-enabled color printer. 10 Large capacity unit LU-301 Can be loaded with up to 3,000 sheets of 8-1/2 e 11- size (A4 -size) paper. Referred to as the LCT throughout the manual. 11 Large capacity unit LU-204 Can be loaded with up to 2,500 sheets of 12 e 18-size (A3-size) paper. To change the paper size, contact your service representative. Referred to as the LCT throughout the manual. 12 Saddle Stitcher SD-509 Install this unit onto the Finisher to allow Fold/Bind. This unit is hereinafter referred to as the Saddle Stitcher through the manual. 13 Finisher FS-527 Sorts, groups and staples printed paper before feeding out. 14 Punch Kit PK-517 Install this unit onto the Finisher to allow punching holes. 15 Job Separator JS-603 Install this unit onto the Finisher. Collects printed pages. 16 Z Folding Unit ZU-606 Installed onto the finisher to allow Z folding or punching. 17 Saddle stitcher SD-508 Installed onto the finisher to allow Fold/Bind. Referred to as the saddle stitcher throughout the manual. 18 Finisher FS-526 Sorts, groups and staples printed paper before feeding out. 19 Punch kit PK-516 Installed onto the finisher to punch holes. 20 Post Inserter PI-505 Installed onto the finisher to enable insertion of a cover sheet into copied sheets. This unit also allows you to manually operate the finisher (only the lower tray is available). 21 Job Separator JS-602 Install this unit onto the Finisher. Collects printed pages. No illustration is provided as the options are built into the main body. 22 Fax kit FK-502 Allows this machine to function as a fax machine. Alternatively, it allows more telephone lines to be connected. 23 Stamp unit SP-501 Applies a stamp to originals that have been scanned. 24 Spare TX Maker stamp 2 A replacement stamp for the stamp unit. 25 Mount kit MK-720 Attach this kit to install an optional fax kit. 26 Local interface kit EK-604 Install this kit when using the compact keyboard. This kit contains a speaker. For details on compact keyboards, contact your service representative. 27 Local Interface Kit EK-605 Install this kit when using the connection function with a Bluetooth-compatible cellular phone or PDA. This kit contains a speaker and a receiving device for Bluetooth communication. For details on compact keyboards, contact your service representative. No. Name Descriptionbizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 2-4 2.1 Options 2 28 Video interface kit VI-505 Required for installing the image controller onto this machine. 29 Security Kit SC-507 Allows you to use Copy Guard or Password Copy. This kit is used to prevent unauthorized copying. 30 i-Option LK-101 v2 Enables a Web browser and the Image Panel function to be used on the control panel. 31 i-Option LK-102 Enables PDF document encryption with a digital ID, attachment of a digital signature, and property settings when distributing a PDF document using the scan or User Box function. 32 i-Option LK-103 v2 Provides both i-Option LK-101 v2 and LK-102 functions. • This option may not be available depending on the sales area. 33 i-Option LK-105 Provides the searchable PDF function. 34 Upgrade kit UK-203 Required when using Web browser, image panel, PDF processing, searchable PDF, My panel, or My address function. If necessary, you can increase up to nine languages, which can be displayed in the control panel of this machine. No. Name Descriptionbizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 2-5 2.1 Options 2 2.1.2 bizhub C452 No. Name Description 1 Main unit The original is scanned by the scanner section, and the scanned image is printed by the printer section. Referred to as the "machine", the "main unit", or the "C452" throughout the manual. 2 Authentication unit (biometric type) AU-101 Performs user authentication by scanning vein patterns in the finger. Working table WT-506 is required to install the authentication unit. 3 Authentication unit (biometric type) AU-102 4 Authentication unit (IC card type) AU-201 Performs user authentication by scanning information recorded on the IC card. Working table WT-506 is required to install the authentication unit. 5 Working table WT-506 Provides an area to temporarily place an original or other materials. This is also used when the authentication unit is installed. 6 Keyboard holder KH-101 Mount this kit to use a compact keyboard. For details on compact keyboards, contact your service representative. 7 Output Tray OT-503 Collects printed pages. 8 Mount kit MK-715 Used for banner printing. • This option may not be available depending on the sales area. 9 Image controller IC-412 v1.1 Allows you to use this machine as a network-enabled color printer. 10 Large capacity unit LU-301 Can be loaded with up to 3,000 sheets of 8-1/2 e 11-size (A4 -size) paper. Referred to as the LCT throughout the manual. 2 3 1 4 16 11 9 10 8 13 12 14 15 5 6 7bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 2-6 2.1 Options 2 11 Large capacity unit LU-204 Can be loaded with up to 2,500 sheets of 12 e 18-size (A3-size) paper. To change the paper size, contact your service representative. Referred to as the LCT throughout the manual. 12 Saddle Stitcher SD-509 Install this unit onto the Finisher to allow Fold/Bind. This unit is hereinafter referred to as the Saddle Stitcher through the manual. 13 Finisher FS-527 Sorts, groups and staples printed paper before feeding out. 14 Punch Kit PK-517 Install this unit onto the Finisher to allow punching holes. 15 Job Separator JS-603 Install this unit onto the Finisher. Collects printed pages. 16 Job Separator JS-504 Install this unit onto the Output Tray of the main unit to offset the printed papers. This unit is hereinafter referred to as the Job Separator through the manual. No illustration is provided as the options are built into the main body. 17 Fax kit FK-502 Allows this machine to function as a fax machine. Alternatively, it allows more telephone lines to be connected. 18 Stamp unit SP-501 Applies a stamp to originals that have been scanned. 19 Spare TX Maker stamp 2 A replacement stamp for the stamp unit. 20 Mount kit MK-720 Attach this kit to install an optional fax kit. 21 Local interface kit EK-604 Install this kit when using the compact keyboard. This kit contains a speaker. For details on compact keyboards, contact your service representative. 22 Local Interface Kit EK-605 Install this kit when using the connection function with a Bluetooth-compatible cellular phone or PDA. This kit contains a speaker and a receiving device for Bluetooth communication. For details on compact keyboards, contact your service representative. 23 Video interface kit VI-505 Required for installing the image controller onto this machine. 24 Security Kit SC-507 Allows you to use Copy Guard or Password Copy. This kit is used to prevent unauthorized copying. 25 i-Option LK-101 v2 Enables a Web browser and the Image Panel function to be used on the control panel. 26 i-Option LK-102 Enables PDF document encryption with a digital ID, attachment of a digital signature, and property settings when distributing a PDF document using the scan or User Box function. 27 i-Option LK-103 v2 Provides both i-Option LK-101 v2 and LK-102 functions. • This option may not be available depending on the sales area. 28 i-Option LK-105 Provides the searchable PDF function. 29 Upgrade kit UK-203 Required when using Web browser, image panel, PDF processing, searchable PDF, My panel, or My address function. If necessary, you can increase up to nine languages, which can be displayed in the control panel of this machine. 30 Heater HT-508 Install this unit into the tray to dehumidify the paper. Dehumidifying prevents paper in the tray from absorbing moisture. • This option may not be available depending on the sales area. No. Name Descriptionbizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 2-7 2.2 Main Body 2 2.2 Main Body 2.2.1 Outside of the main body (front) No. Name 1 Control panel 2 Left-side cover release lever 3 Left-side cover 4 Lateral guide 5 ADF 6 Original tray 7 Original output tray 8 Sub power switch 9 USB port (type A) USB 2.0/1.1 10 USB port (type A) USB 2.0/1.1 (For compact keyboard) 11 Automatic duplex unit release lever 12 Automatic duplex unit 5 9 10 16 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 1 4 6 7 8 11 14 13 12 15 17 18 19 22 20 21 30 2 3bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 2-8 2.2 Main Body 2 13 Upper right-side door 14 Upper right-side door release lever 15 Bypass tray door 16 Bypass Tray 17 Bypass tray door release lever 18 Lower right-side door 19 Lower right-side door release lever 20 Paper-empty indicator 21 Total counter 22 Main power switch 23 Tray 4 24 Tray 3 25 Tray 2 26 Tray 1 27 Lower front door 28 Upper front door 29 Output tray 30 Status indicator No. Namebizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 2-9 2.2 Main Body 2 2.2.2 Outside of the main body (rear) The illustration above shows the main unit with an optional video interface kit, fax kit, and mount kit. No. Name 1 Finisher connector 2 Filter 3 Power cord 4 Power switch for dehumidifying heater 5 Jack for connecting a telephone (TEL PORT2) 6 Telephone jack 2 (LINE PORT2) 1 2 13 10 11 12 9 8 4 3 7 5 6bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 2-10 2.2 Main Body 2 7 Jack for connecting a telephone (TEL PORT1) 8 Telephone jack 1 (LINE PORT1) 9 USB port (type A) USB 2.0/1.1 10 RS-232C port 11 USB port (type B) USB 2.0/1.1 12 Network connector (10Base-T/100Base-TX/1000Base-T) 13 Ozone filter No. Namebizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 2-11 2.2 Main Body 2 2.2.3 Main bodyInside bizhub C652/C552/C452 No. Name 1 Original glass 2 Fusing unit 3 Fusing unit cover lever 4 Print head glass cleaning tool 1 8 2 3 4 5 9 7 10 11 12 13 6bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 2-12 2.2 Main Body 2 5 Waste toner box 6 Imaging unit 7 Charger-cleaning tool 8 Imaging unit release lever 9 Toner cartridges 10 Slit glass 11 Original scales 12 Jam removal dial 13 Slit glass cleaner No. Namebizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 2-13 2.2 Main Body 2 bizhub C652DS/C552DS No. Name 1 Original glass 2 Fusing unit 3 Fusing unit cover lever 4 Print head glass cleaning tool 1 8 2 3 4 5 9 7 10 11 12 13 14 6bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 2-14 2.2 Main Body 2 2.2.4 Control panel 5 Waste toner box 6 Imaging unit 7 Charger-cleaning tool 8 Imaging unit release lever 9 Toner cartridges 10 Slit glass (front) 11 Original scales 12 Opening and closing guide 13 Slit glass cleaner 14 Slit glass (back) No. Name No. Name 1 Stylus pen 2 Touch panel 3 Main power indicator 4 Sub power switch 5 Function key 6 Data indicator 1 2 3 5 4 8 7 6bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 2-15 2.2 Main Body 2 Adjusting the angle of the control panel You can adjust the angle of the control panel of this machine among three levels. You can also tilt the control panel to the left. Use the control panel at an angle convenient to use. NOTICE When tilting the control panel, do not grab the touch panel. 1 Pull the control panel release lever toward you, and then pull the control panel up or down. You can tilt the angle of the control panel to one of the three positions. 2 To tilt the control panel to the left or right, hold the bottom of the control panel, and then tilt the panel to the left or right. 7 Keypad 8 Brightness adjustment dial No. Namebizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 2-16 2.2 Main Body 2 2.2.5 Touch panel When the machine has been turned on and is ready to begin the copy operation, the basic settings screen appears. To activate a function or to select a setting, lightly press the desired button appearing in the screen. The basic settings screen can be switched between the Basic tab and Quick Copy tab. The arrangement of the buttons and screens differ with the Basic tab and Quick Copy tab; however, the functions that can be set are the same. This manual describes procedures for configuring settings from the Basic tab. The Quick Copy tab displays the setting items of the Basic tab on one screen, which is useful for configuring multiple settings. NOTICE Do not apply excessive pressure on the touch panel. Such impact may leave a flaw on the panel, inviting damage to the touch panel. When operating in the touch panel, never press down on the touch panel with force or with a pointed object such as a mechanical pencil. Basic tab Quick Copy tab No. Name 1 Message display area 2 Functions/settings display area 3 Icon/shortcut key display area 4 Toner supply indicators 5 Left panel 6 Check Job 7 Job List 8 Copier setting button (arrow) 3 2 5 7 6 4 1 3 2 5 7 8 4 1 9bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 2-17 2.2 Main Body 2 dReference To switch the basic settings screen: Press the [Utility/Counter] key ö [User Settings] ö [Custom Display Settings] ö [Copier Settings] ö [Default Tab]. To configure color selection settings for buttons and tabs: Press the [Utility/Counter] key ö [User Settings] ö [Custom Display Settings] ö [Color Selection Settings] . 9 Color settings No. Namebizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 2-18 2.3 Option 2 2.3 Option 2.3.1 Finisher FS-526/Saddle stitcher SD-508/Punch kit PK-516 No. Name 1 Output tray 2 2 Output tray 1 3 Front door 1 26 20 19 18 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 21 22 23 11 12 13 14 16 15 17 25 24bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 2-19 2.3 Option 2 * Press the output tray switch to move folded and center stapled paper to the end of the folding output tray. 4 Horizontal transport unit cover 5 Jam removal dial [FN8] 6 Guide lever [FN7] 7 Guide lever [FN9] 8 Jam removal dial [FN6] 9 Jam removal dial [FN5] 10 Guide lever [FN3] 11 Guide lever [FN4] 12 Punch kit 13 Punch scrap box 14 Guide lever [FN10] 15 Recessed pull 16 Jam removal dial [FN11] 17 Saddle stitcher 18 Output belt 19 Output tray switch * 20 Folding output tray 21 Jam removal dial [FN2] 22 Guide lever [FN1] 23 Staple replacement door 24 Guide lever [FN13] 25 Guide lever [FN14] 26 Exit cover No. Namebizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 2-20 2.3 Option 2 2.3.2 Job separator JS-602 No. Name 1 Finishing tray 2 Job separator cover 1 2bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 2-21 2.3 Option 2 2.3.3 Z Folding Unit ZU-606 No. Name 1 Z folding/conveyance unit 2 Guide lever [FN1] 3 Punch scrap box 4 Front door 5 Guide lever [FN6] 6 Guide lever [FN7] 7 Guide lever [FN8] 8 Recessed pull [FN2] 9 Jam removal dial [FN5] 1 2 4 3 5 8 9 7 11 10 6bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 2-22 2.3 Option 2 2.3.4 Post Inserter PI-505 10 Guide lever [FN3] 11 Jam removal dial [FN4] No. Name No. Name 1 Post inserter control panel 2 Lower tray paper guide 3 Lower Tray 4 Upper Tray 5 Upper Tray paper guide 6 Upper unit release lever 6 1 3 4 5 2bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 2-23 2.3 Option 2 2.3.5 Finisher FS-527/ Saddle Stitcher SD-509/ Punch Kit PK-517/ Job Separator JS-603 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 2-24 2.3 Option 2 No, Name 1 Output tray 2 2 Output tray 1 3 Front door 4 Horizontal transport unit cover 5 Stapler 6 Guide lever [FN3] 7 Jam removal dial [FN2] 8 Guide lever [FN1] 9 Guide lever [FN4] 10 Staple holder 11 Punch scrap box 12 Saddle stitcher 20 17 18 19 15 16bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 2-25 2.3 Option 2 2.3.6 Job Separator JS-504 13 Jam removal dial [FN6] 14 Recessed pull [FN5] 15 Transport unit 16 Punch kit 17 Job separator 18 Staple cartridge 19 Recessed pull [FN7] 20 Folding output tray No, Name No. Name 1 Jam removal dial 2 Eject assist lever 3 Output tray 2 4 Tray extension 5 Output tray 1 1 2 3 4 5bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 2-26 2.3 Option 2 2.3.7 Large capacity unit LU-301/LU-204 No. Name 1 Jam removal cover 2 Upper door 3 Paper take-up roller 4 Paper-empty indicator 5 Release lever 1 3 2 5 4 1 3 2 5 43 Using this machinebizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 3-2 3.1 Turning on or off the machine 3 3 Using this machine 3.1 Turning on or off the machine This machine has two power controls: the [main power switch] and [sub power switch]. The [main power switch] turns on or off all functions of the machine. Normally, keep the [main power switch] on. The [sub power switch] turns on and off machine operations, for example, for copying, printing or scanning. Turning [sub power switch] off causes the machine to enter power-saving mode. 0 When the [sub power switch] is turned on, the indicator on the [Start] key lights up in orange, and a screen appears to indicate that the machine is starting up. After a few seconds, the message "Warming up. Ready to scan." appears in the touch panel, and the indicator on the [Start] key lights up in blue, indicating that a job can now be queued. 0 A job can also be queued while the machine is warming up after the [sub power switch] is turned on. After the machine has finished warming up, the scanned image will be printed. 0 The default settings are the settings that are selected immediately after the machine is turned on and before any settings are configured from the control panel or touch panel, and those that are selected when the [Reset] key is pressed to cancel all settings configured from the control panel or touch panel. The default settings can be changed. 0 Do not turn off the [main power switch] while a queued job or stored data is waiting to be printed. The jobs yet to be printed will be deleted. 0 Settings that have not been registered and jobs in the printing queue are cleared when the [main power switch] and [sub power switch] are turned off. 0 To turn the [main power switch] on immediately after turning it off, wait for 10 or more seconds before turning it on again. Not doing so may result in an operation failure. 0 Do not turn off the [main power switch] or [sub power switch] while images are being scanned, transmitted, or received. Data being scanned or communicated will be deleted. 0 Do not turn off the [main power switch] or [sub power switch] during the copying or printing process. If you turn it off, a paper jam may occur. 0 Do not connect or disconnect the USB cable of the compact keyboard while this machine is turned on. Do not also connect another medium to the USB port for the compact keyboard. 1 To turn the power on, open the main power switch cover, and then press n on the [main power switch]. 2 Close the main power switch cover. 3 Press the [sub power switch]. Check that the touch panel is turned on.bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 3-3 3.1 Turning on or off the machine 3 4 To turn the power off, press the [sub power switch], then the [main power switch]. dReference To change the default settings for Copy: Press the [Utility/Counter] key ö [User Settings] ö [Copier Settings] ö [Default Copy Settings].bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 3-4 3.2 Basic copy operations 3 3.2 Basic copy operations The following procedures describe how to set the original and the basic copy operations. 3.2.1 Placing originals Place the original in the ADF or on the original glass. Select the optimal position for setting the original according to the type of the original to be copied. - Using the ADF, a multi-page original can be fed and scanned automatically, one page at a time from the top. The ADF can also be used to automatically scan 2-sided originals. - When using the original glass, place the original directly on the original glass for scanning. This method is suited for originals in the form of a book and the like that cannot be fed through the ADF. Load the original, and configure settings for relevant functions as needed. Loading the original into the ADF The following types of originals should not be loaded into the ADF. If loaded, paper may be jammed or the original may be damaged. - Wrinkled, folded, curled, or torn originals - Highly translucent or transparent originals , such as OHP transparencies or diazo photosensitive paper - Coated originals such as carbon-backed paper - Originals printed on paper thicker than 55-7/8 lb (210 g/m2 ) - Originals printed on paper thicker than 34-1/16 lb (128 g/m2 ) for 2-sided printing - Originals that are bound, for example, with staples or paper clips - Originals that are bound in a book or booklet form - Originals with pages bound together with glue - Originals with pages that have had cutouts removed or are cutouts - Label sheets - Offset printing masters - Originals with binder holes - Originals that have just been printed with this machine 1 Slide the lateral guides to fit the size of the original. 2 Load the original face up in the original tray and arrange according to the scanning order. Load the original pages so that the top of the original is toward the back side of the machine. % Do not load more than 100 sheets or up to the point where the top of the stack is higher than the , mark. Such an action may cause an original paper jam or damage to the original. It may also invite machine failure. However, an original that exceeds 100 pages can be scanned in separate batches. % If the original is not loaded correctly, it may not be fed in straight, causing it to jam or become damaged. % If the document is loaded in any orientation other than with the top of the document toward the back of the machine, be sure to select the document orientation. 3 Slide the adjustable lateral guides against the edges of the original.bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 3-5 3.2 Basic copy operations 3 Placing the original on the original glass 0 When placing the original on the original glass, be sure to lift open the ADF at least 15°. If the original is placed on the original glass without the ADF being lifted at least 15°, the correct document size may not be detected. 0 Do not place an original weighing more than 4-7/16 lb (2 kg) on the original glass. Furthermore, do not use a strong force to press down on a book or any other form of original that must be spread on the original glass. Otherwise, the machine may be damaged or a failure may occur. 0 For thick books or large objects, perform scanning without closing the ADF. When a document is being scanned with the ADF open, do not look directly at the original glass surface where light may be emitted through. Note, however, that the light coming through the original glass is not a laser beam, and will not expose the user to the related hazards. 0 When Non-Image Area Erase is selected, you do not have to close the ADF to copy the original. Place the original anywhere on the original glass. The area surrounding the original text will be excluded from the copy. For details, refer to page 5-42. 1 Lift open the ADF. 2 Place the original face down on the original glass. % Load the original by placing it so that its top side faces the back side of the machine. 3 Align the original with the mark in the back-left corner of the original scales. % For transparent or translucent originals, place a blank sheet of paper of the same size as the original over the original. % For bound originals spread over two facing pages, such as a book or a magazine, position the top of the original toward the back of this machine and align the original with the mark in the back-left corner of the original scales. % When Non-Image Area Erase is selected, the original can be placed anywhere on the original glass. 4 Close the ADF. 3.2.2 Basic copy operations The following procedure describes the basic copy operations. 1 Arrange originals in the order you want them to be scanned and load them face up in the ADF. % The original should be placed face down on the original glass. 2 Using the keypad, enter a value for the number of copies you desire. % If you have entered incorrect number of copies, press the [C] (clear) key on the keypad, and then reenter the correct number. 3 Press the [Start] key. The original is scanned and copied. % To interrupt the copy operation being performed, press the [Stop] key. % A "Ready to accept another job" message that appears during the current printing job indicates that the next original can be scanned.bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 3-6 3.2 Basic copy operations 3 % If an original with copy guard patterns embedded is scanned, the copy operation is stopped and the job is discarded. % If an original with a password embedded by the password copy function is scanned, the copy operation starts after you enter the password. % If multiple originals with different passwords are scanned at the same time, you will need to enter a password for each original. 3.2.3 Copy operations using multiple functions This section describes copy operations using combination of functions. 1 Load the original. 2 Press [Original Setting]. % For details on original setting, refer to page 5-15. 3 Press [Basic] ö [Duplex/Combine]. % For details on the Duplex/Combine settings, refer to page 5-8.bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 3-7 3.2 Basic copy operations 3 4 Press [Basic] and then configure settings for respective functions. % For details on color setting, refer to page 5-4. % For details on paper size setting, refer to page 5-5. % For details on magnification setting, refer to page 5-7. % For details on image quality of originals, refer to page 5-18. % For details on copy density setting, refer to page 5-18. % For details on the setting not to rotate images, refer to page 5-14. 5 Press [Application] and then configure settings for respective functions. % For setting for the application functions, refer to page 5-20. 6 Press [Basic] ö [Finishing]. % For details on copy finishing and folding/binding, refer to page 5-10.bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 3-8 3.2 Basic copy operations 3 7 Press [Check Job] ö [Check Details]. % For details on checking job settings, refer to page 5-64. 8 Using the keypad, enter a value for the number of copies you desire. % If you have entered incorrect number of copies, press the [C] (clear) key on the keypad, and then reenter the correct number. 9 Press the [Start] key. The original is scanned and copied. % To interrupt the copy operation being performed, press the [Stop] key. % A "Ready to accept another job" message that appears during the current printing job indicates that the next original can be scanned. Functions that cannot be combined Some settings cannot be combined with each other. If they are combined improperly, the settings will be given priorities in either of the two ways described below. - The setting configured last is given priority. (The setting specified first is canceled.) - The setting configured first is given priority. (A warning message appears.)4 Control Panel Keysbizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 4-2 4 4 Control Panel Keys This section describes the functions of the keys on the operation panel. Control panel and functions Press the keys on the operation panel to use the Copy, Fax/Scan, User Box or other functions. No. Name Description Page 1 Touch panel Displays various screens and messages. You can configure various settings by directly touching the touch panel. - 2 Power indicator Lights up in blue when the machine is turned on with the [main power switch]. - 3 [Sub power switch] Turns on or off machine operations. When turned off, the machine is in the power-saving mode. - 4 [Power Save] Enters Power Save mode. While the machine is in Power Save mode, the indicator on the [Power Save] key lights up in green and the touch panel goes off. To exit from Power Save mode, press the [Power Save] key again. p. 4-11 5 [Mode Memory] Allows you to register (store) the desired copy/fax/scan settings as a program or to recall a registered program. p. 4-7 6 [Utility/Counter] Switches to the Utility screen or the Meter Count screen. p. 4-6 7 [Reset] Resets all settings (except programmed settings) entered using the control panel or touch panel. p. 4-4 1 2 5 4 6 3 7 8 9 1413 10 15 16 17 18 12 11 19 20 21 22bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 4-3 4 8 [Interrupt] Switches to Interrupt mode. While the machine is in Interrupt mode, the indicator on the [Interrupt] key lights up in green and the message "Now in Interrupt mode" appears in the touch panel. To cancel Interrupt mode, press the [Interrupt] key again. p. 4-4 9 [Stop] Temporarily stops the operation while copying, scanning or printing. p. 4-4 10 [Proof Copy] Allows you to print a single proof copy to be checked before printing a large number of copies. You can also display a finishing image using the current settings in the touch panel. p. 4-18 11 [Start] Starts the copy, scan or fax operation. p. 4-4 12 Data indicator Flashes in blue while a print job is being received. Lights up in blue when a print job is queued to be printed or while it is being printed. Lights up in blue when there is saved fax data or unprinted fax data. - 13 [C] (Clear) Clears a value (such as the number of copies, a zoom ratio and size) entered using the keypad. p. 4-17 14 Keypad Allows you to enter the number of copies to be produced, the zoom ratio, and various other setting values. - 15 [Guidance] Switches to the Guidance screen. You can display descriptions of the functions and operating procedures. p. 4-15 16 [Enlarge Display] Enters Enlarge Display mode. If you are using PageScope Authentication Manager for authentication, the Enlarge Display screen will not be available. p. 4-14 17 [Accessibility] Switches to the screen for configuring settings for user accessibility functions. p. 4-12 18 [Access] If user authentication or account track settings have been applied, press the [Access] key after entering the user name and password (for user authentication) or the account name and password (for account track) in order to use this machine. p. 4-8 19 [Brightness] dial Allows you to adjust the brightness of the touch panel. - 20 [User Box] Enters User Box mode. While the machine is in User Box mode, the indicator on the [User Box] key lights up in green. For details on User Box functions, refer to the "User's Guide [Box Operations]". p. 4-5 21 [Fax/Scan] Enters Fax/Scan mode. While the machine is in Fax/Scan mode, the indicator on the [Fax/Scan] key lights up in green. For details on the fax/scan function, refer to the "User's Guide [Network Scan/Fax/Network Fax Operations]". p. 4-5 22 [Copy] Enters Copy mode. (As a default, the machine is in Copy mode. ) While the machine is copying, the indicator on the [Copy] key lights up in green. p. 4-5 No. Name Description Pagebizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 4-4 4.1 About the [Start] key, the [Stop] key, and the [Interrupt] key 4 4.1 About the [Start] key, the [Stop] key, and the [Interrupt] key The [Start] key % Start the copy, scan or fax operation. Press this key again to restart a suspended job. % When this machine is ready to begin the operation, the indicator on the [Start] key lights up in blue. If the indicator on the [Start] key lights up in orange, the copy operation cannot begin. (Check that no warning or message is displayed in the touch panel.) The [Stop] key % Press the [Stop] key while copying to temporarily stop the scanning or printing operation. % To resume a temporarily stopped job, press the [Start] key. % To delete a temporarily stopped job, select a job in the suspended job list in the screen, and press the [Delete] key. The [Interrupt] key Press this key to start a new copy job with different copy settings by suspending the current job in process. This is convenient when you need to make copies urgently. 0 The [Interrupt] key cannot be operated while an original is being scanned. 0 Pressing the [Interrupt] key restores the default settings. 1 Load the original. 2 Press the [Interrupt] key. The indicator on the Interrupt key lights up in green and printing of the current job is suspended. 3 Configure the copy settings. 4 Press the [Start] key. 5 After the interrupting job has finished printing, press the [Interrupt] key. The Interrupt indicator goes off and the interrupting copy settings are canceled. The copy settings return to those specified before the interrupting copying job. The [Reset] key Resets all settings (except programmed settings) entered using the control panel or touch panel. % Press the [Reset] key. The basic settings screen appears.bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 4-5 4.2 About the [Copy] key, the [Fax/Scan] key, and the [User Box] key 4 4.2 About the [Copy] key, the [Fax/Scan] key, and the [User Box] key This machine operates in Copy, Fax/Scan and User Box modes, from which the user can select a desired function. The indicator on the selected key lights up in green. The [Copy] key % Enters Copy mode. The basic settings screen appears. The [Fax/Scan] key % Press this key to enter Fax/Scan mode. For details on the fax/scan function, refer to the "User's Guide [Network Scan/Fax/Network Fax Operations]". The [User Box] key % Enters User Box mode. For details on User Box functions, refer to the "User's Guide [Box Operations]".bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 4-6 4.3 The [Utility/Counter] key 4 4.3 The [Utility/Counter] key Press the [Utility/Counter] key to display the Utility screen. You can configure the machine settings and check its use status in the Utility menu screen. % Press the [Utility/Counter] key. Settings One-Touch/User Box Registration Allows you to register items related to the fax/scanner and User Boxes operations. For details, refer to the "User's Guide [Network Scan/Fax/Network Fax Operations]" and "User's Guide [Box Operations]". User Settings Provides setting items that can be operated by the user. Administrator Settings Provides setting items that can only be operated by the administrator of the machine. Check Consumable Life Allows you to check the status (usage level) of consumables. Banner Printing Allows you to select whether to enable or disable printing on long sheets of paper. This menu item appears when the optional finisher is not installed. For details on long paper print, refer to the "User's Guide [Print Operations]". Device Information Displays information about this machine. Function Version: Allows you to check the function version of the currently installed firmware. Check the function version of this machine and of the printer driver. Ensure that they match before using this machine. IPv4 Address: Allows you to check the currently specified IPv4 address. IPv6 Address: Allows you to check the currently specified IPv6 address.bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 4-7 4.4 The [Mode Memory] key 4 4.4 The [Mode Memory] key Combine frequently used copy settings into programs and register them with this machine. These programs can easily be recalled as programs. 0 Up to 30 programs can be registered. 0 To register a program, configure the copy settings to be registered before pressing the [Mode Memory] key. % Press the [Mode Memory] key. dReference To prohibit modification and deletion of copy programs: Press the [Utility/Counter] key ö [Administrator Settings] ö [System Settings] ö [Restrict User Access] ö [Copy Program Lock Settings]. To delete a copy program: Press the [Utility/Counter] key ö [Administrator Settings] ö [System Settings] ö [Restrict User Access] ö [Delete Saved Copy Program]. Settings Recall Copy Program Select the button for the copy program registered with the copy settings to be recalled. Register Program • From the copy program buttons displayed in the screen, press the button you want to register copy settings with, and then press [Register Program]. • Enter the registration name, and then press [OK]. Check Program settings Press this button to check the copy settings registered with the selected copy program button. Edit Name Press this button to rename the registration name of the selected copy program button. After enabling Copy Program Lock, [Edit Name] will not be displayed. Delete Press this button to delete the selected program button. After enabling Copy Program Lock, [Delete] will not be displayed.bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 4-8 4.5 The [Access] key 4 4.5 The [Access] key If the administrator has configured user authentication settings/account track settings, only the users who have been registered or the users whose accounts have been registered can use this machine. If the administrator has configured a usage schedule, a user can use the machine by entering a password for non-business hours. Controlling access to the machine by user/account (user authentication/account track) 0 With the user authentication/account track functions enabled, only the users who enter passwords for users or for accounts can use this machine. 0 Thus, the number of copies among others can be managed by user/account. 0 Contact the administrator for information on the user name, account name, password and server name. 0 The login page that appears may vary depending on the user authentication/account track settings. 0 The user authentication settings can be used together with the account track settings. If the User Authentication/Account Track is set to [Do Not Synchronize], complete user authentication, and then log in by using the Account Track screen. 0 If MFP authentication or external server authentication has been set, a total of 1,000 users and accounts can be registered. 0 After copying is completed, press the [Access] key to log out from the machine. 0 To get permission to use the machine, you can use an authentication unit (biometrics type/IC card type) for authentication. 0 The account, which sets the use of this machine to suspend in Account Track Settings, cannot log in to this machine. The users, who belong to the suspended account, cannot also log in to this machine. 0 If authentication is performed with PageScope Authentication Manager, check with your server administrator for information on the login procedure. % Press the [Access] key. Screen for user authentication Screen for account trackbizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 4-9 4.5 The [Access] key 4 dReference To configure user authentication/account track: Press the [Utility/Counter] key ö [Administrator Settings] ö [User Authentication/Account Track]. Settings User Authentication Performs the user authentication procedure to use this machine. Public User Access Allows users who have no access to the user name or password to use this machine. This item is not displayed when [Public User Access] is set to [Restrict] in the General Settings of Administrator Settings. If enhanced security mode has been enabled, [Public User Access] is not displayed. User Name Enter the user name. User Name List Select a user name from a displayed list. • If enhanced security mode has been enabled, [User Name List] is not displayed. • The user, who has set the use of this machine to suspend in User Authentication Settings, is not displayed in the [User Name List]. Password Enter the password. Server Name Indicates the name of the default server. Press [Server Name] to display the names of the registered servers. Select the desired server. Login Displays the basic settings screen, enabling you to use this machine. Account Track Performs the account track procedure to use this machine. Account Name Enter the account name. Password Enter the password. When the account track input method is set to [Password Only] in Administrator Settings, the login screen displays only [Password]. The user can directly enter the password in the login screen from the keypad. For an all-number password, the user can log in without displaying the keyboard screen, simply by pressing [Login], or the [Access] key. • For a password containing alphabets, numbers and/or symbol characters, press [Password] and then enter the password. • After entering numbers from the keypad, press [Password] to enter alphabets and symbols in succession. Login Displays the basic settings screen, enabling you to use this machine.bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 4-10 4.5 The [Access] key 4 Using the machine during non-scheduled hours The machine can be set to automatically enter Sleep mode according to a usage schedule determined by the administrator so the use of the machine can be limited. This is referred to as Weekly Timer. Follow the procedure described below to use the machine while the Weekly Timer is being used. 0 From the [Password for Non-Business Hours] screen (displayed from Administrator Settings mode), the machine can be set so that the screen for entering the password for non-business hours is not displayed. 1 Press the [Power Save] key. 2 Enter the password for non-business hours. 3 Press [OK]. 4 Using the keypad, enter the length of time to elapse before the machine enters Sleep mode again. 5 Press [OK]. The basic settings screen appears. dReference To configure Weekly Timer: Press the [Utility/Counter] key ö [Administrator Settings] ö [System Settings] ö [Weekly Timer Settings].bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 4-11 4.6 The [Power Save] key 4 4.6 The [Power Save] key If no operation is performed for a specified length of time, the touch panel goes off and the machine automatically enters a mode where it conserves energy. This is referred to as Low Power or Sleep mode. The following describes the procedure for returning from Low Power or Sleep mode. 0 Although the machine conserves more energy in Sleep mode than in Low Power mode, the warm-up process for returning to ready-for-copy state from Sleep mode is more time-consuming. 0 As the factory default, Low Power mode is set to restart after 15 minutes and Sleep mode after 30 minutes. In other words, the machine enters Low Power mode if no operation is performed for 15 minutes. Likewise, it enters Sleep mode after 30 minutes has elapsed. 0 The machine can receive jobs even while it is in Low Power mode. % Press the [Power Save] key. The machine returns from Low Power mode when any other key on the control panel or the touch panel surface is pressed. dReference To enable Low Power mode: Press the [Utility/Counter] key ö [Administrator Settings] ö [System Settings] ö [Power Save Settings].bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 4-12 4.7 The [Accessibility] key 4 4.7 The [Accessibility] key This section describes the procedures for configuring settings for the control panel and adjusting the touch panel. 0 To return to the basic settings screen from the Accessibility Setting screen, press the [Accessibility] key, the [Reset] key or [Close]. 0 In the Enlarge Display screen, [Default Enlarge Display Settings] appears, enabling you to configure default settings for use in the Enlarge Display mode using the copy or fax/scan functions. % Press the [Accessibility] key. Page 1/2 Page 2/2 Settings Touch Panel Adjustment Adjust the position of touch panel buttons when they do not respond correctly because they may not be correctly aligned with the position of the actual touch sensor. • The touch sensors are not aligned in the touch panel if pressing [Touch Panel Adjustment] does not activate any action. Press the [1] key on the keypad. • Press the four check point buttons ([+]) on the touch panel adjustment screen while listening on a buzzer sound each time. When the checking by pressing the check point buttons is completed successfully, the indicator on the [Start] key lights up in blue. Press the [Start] key. • The check point buttons ([+]) can be pressed in any order. • To perform adjustment again, press the [C] (Clear) key, and then press the four check point buttons ([+]) again. • To cancel the touch panel adjustment process, press the [Stop] or [Reset] key. • If the touch panel cannot be adjusted, contact your service representative.bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 4-13 4.7 The [Accessibility] key 4 Key Repeat Start/Interval Time Specify the length of time until the value begins to change after a touch panel button is held down, and also specify the length of time for the value to change to the next number. The settings specified for Key Repeat Start/Interval Time are only applied in Enlarge Display mode. System Auto Reset Confirmation Specify whether to display a message when the system auto reset operation is performed in Enlarge Display mode, allowing the user to choose either to continue operating without exiting Enlarge Display mode or to exit Enlarge Display mode and return to the basic settings screen. Also specify the duration of time for displaying the confirmation screen. Auto Reset Confirmation Specify whether to display a message when the automatic panel reset operation is performed in Enlarge Display mode, allowing the user to choose either to continue operating without resetting the current settings or to reset the settings. Also specify the duration of time for displaying the confirmation screen. Enlarge Display Mode Confirmation Specify whether to display a message when the [Enlarge Display] key is pressed to change the display of the screen, requesting confirmation to cancel the settings that cannot be specified in Enlarge Display mode. Message Display Time Specify the duration of time for displaying warning messages, which appear, for example, when an incorrect operation is performed. Sound Setting Configure the settings for sounding associated with key operations. The following sound setting functions are available. To produce a sound, press [Yes], and then select the volume from [Low], [Medium] and [High]. To not produce a sound, press [No]. [Operation Confirmation Sound] • [Input Confirmation Sound]: A sound produced when a key in the control panel or a button in the touch panel is pressed for an entry • [Invalid Input Sound]: A sound produced for invalid button operation in the control panel or the touch panel • [Basic Sound]: A sound produced when the default value item is selected for an option subject to rotational switching [Successful Completion Sound] • [Completed Operation Sound]: A sound produced when the operation has completed normally • [Completed Transmission Sound]: A sound produced when a communications-related operation is completed normally [Completed Preparation Sound]: A sound produced when a device is ready [Caution Sound] • [Simple Caution Sound (Level 1)]: A sound produced when the replacement time is nearing for supplies or a replaceable part and a message appears in the touch panel • [Simple Caution Sound (Level 2)]: A sound produced for a user error • [Simple Caution Sound (Level 3)]: A sound produced when an error occurs that can be corrected by the user by referring to the message that appears or the User's Guide • [Severe Caution Sound]: A sound produced when an error occurs that cannot be corrected by the user or requires action by a service representative Default Enlarge Display Settings For details, refer to the "User's Guide [Enlarge Display Operations]". Settingsbizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 4-14 4.8 The [Enlarge Display] key 4 4.8 The [Enlarge Display] key Press this key to enter Enlarge Display mode and enable machine operation using a screen with a layout with larger-size characters. For details on the Enlarge Display screen, refer to the "User's Guide [Enlarge Display Operations]". 0 Press the [Enlarge Display] key to return to normal display. 0 If PageScope Authentication Manager is used for authentication, the login screen cannot be switched to the enlarged display mode. % Press the [Enlarge Display] key.bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 4-15 4.9 The [Guidance] key 4 4.9 The [Guidance] key Press this key to view and check descriptions of various functions and operating procedures. When the [Guidance] key is pressed, the Guidance screen for the displayed screen appears. 0 From the Help main menu screen, you can find the target Guidance screen based on the function or purpose. 0 Refer to the left panel of the Guidance screen to check the position of the displayed Guidance screen in the menu structure. 0 Press [Close] in the Guidance screen to move up one level in the menu structure. Press [Exit] to exit Guidance mode and return to the screen that was displayed before the [Guidance] key was pressed. Press [To Menu] to display the Help main menu. 0 In the Main Menu and Guidance Menu screens, select items by pressing the button or by pressing the key in the keypad. 0 The Guidance screens cannot be displayed when the following operations are being performed: Scanning, printing a proof copy, preview of a finished copy, operating in Enlarge Display mode, or operating in Accessibility mode 0 While the Guidance screen is displayed, the following keys on the operation panel are disabled: [Start], [C], [Interrupt], [Proof Copy], [Access], [Mode Memory], and [Enlarge Display] % Press the [Guidance] key. Settings Function Check descriptions by selecting a Guidance menu grouped by function type and name. Search by Operation Check descriptions by selecting a Guidance menu grouped by operation type. • With [Go to function] displayed, the function for the selected operation can be set. However, when the fax/scan function is used, for example, [Go to function] displayed on a Guidance screen for the copy function, for example, cannot be selected as it is a different function from the one in use. • Select [Copy] and press [Scan special original]; instructions and animation guidance are displayed to enable the user to view the procedure for placing an original. However, Start Guidance is not displayed in the animation guidance for placing an original. Function Map Check descriptions from a navigation destination of the current screen or the menu structure it belongs to. Other Functions Check descriptions by selecting a Guidance menu grouped by useful function. Name and Function of Parts Check the description of the main unit and its options. Service/Admin. Information Check the name, extension number and E-mail address of the administrator.bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 4-16 4.9 The [Guidance] key 4 Consumables Replace/ Processing Procedure Check procedures for replacing the toner cartridge, imaging unit or waste toner box, adding staples or discarding punch-hole scraps by viewing animations. Press the target button, and then press [Start Guidance]. Settingsbizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 4-17 4.10 The [C] (Clear) key 4 4.10 The [C] (Clear) key Clears a value (such as the number of copies, a zoom ratio and size) entered using the keypad. % Press the [C] key. The value is deleted. Enter the correct value.bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 4-18 4.11 The [Proof Copy] key 4 4.11 The [Proof Copy] key Printing one set to check the copy result (Proof Copy) Print a single proof copy for checking before printing a large number of copies. This prevents copy errors from occurring. 0 When printing a proof copy, specify multiple copies. 1 Load the original. 2 Select the desired copy settings. 3 Press the [Proof Copy] key. 4 Press [Print] and then select the original direction. 5 Press the [Start] key. This prints one copy when the original has been loaded in the ADF. 6 When it has been loaded on the original glass, press the [Finish], then the [Start] key. A single proof copy is printed. 7 Check the proof copy. % If the proof copy is found all right, go to Step 10. To change the copy settings, go to Step 8. 8 Press [Change Setting] in the proof copy screen. After changing the copy settings in the Change Settings screen, press [OK] % "Number of Sets" in the proof copy screen indicates "the number of sets printed in the proof copy mode/the number of sets specified to be printed", and "Total # of Pages Printed" indicates "the number of sheets printed in the proof copy mode/the total number of sheets to be printed". % To stop copying while the screen for changing the settings is displayed, select the proof copy job to be stopped from the list of jobs in the left panel, and then press [Delete]. % If no operation is performed for the specified length of time while this screen is displayed, the copy job for which proof copy has been completed is registered as a stored job and the basic settings screen appears again. Stored job registration is performed when the System Auto Reset function is activated or one minute after (if System Auto Reset is set to "OFF"). 9 Press the [Proof Copy] key to repeat proof copy. 10 Press [Print]. The number of copies yet to be printed is registered as a copy job.bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 4-19 4.11 The [Proof Copy] key 4 Using a preview image to check the copy result (Advanced Preview) Check the finishing image of a copy in the touch panel before printing. This prevents copy errors from occurring. 0 When you scan the original using the Program Jobs function, scan all originals, press [Finish], and then preview the finishing state. 0 When you attempt to scan the original with an insert page specified, the machine scans the original first, and then the insert original. When this process is complete, you can preview the finishing state. 0 To use the Book Copy or Booklet function, no preview is available. Check the finishing state after printing. 0 The Punch settings are available only if the Punch Kit PK-516 or Z Folding Unit is installed on the Finisher FS-526 or the Punch Kit PK-517 is installed on the Finisher FS-527. 0 Fold and Center Staple & Fold is available only if the Saddle Stitcher is installed on the optional Finisher. 0 The Z-fold settings are available only if the Z Folding Unit is installed on the optional Finisher FS-526. 1 Load the original. 2 Select the desired copy settings. 3 Press the [Proof Copy] key. 4 Press [Preview on Screen] for the proof copy method and then select the original direction. 5 Press the [Start] key. The Preview (View Status) screen appears. 6 Check the preview image. % To change the settings, press [View Pages]. Go to Step 7. % To start printing, press the [Start] key. % To scan another original, press [Finish], load the original, and then press the [Start] key. 7 Change the settings, and then press [View Status]. Settings Prev. Page/ Next Page Switch from the current screen to either the previous or the next screen. Zoom Enlarge the preview image and check the details. Press [+] and [-] to change the zoom ratio from full size to 2, 4 or 8 times the normal size. To select a different area to be enlarged, touch the scroll bar arrows on the right and at the bottom side of the image. The finishing state cannot be displayed if you change the display size.bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 4-20 4.11 The [Proof Copy] key 4 8 Press the [Start] key. Select this menu to start printing. Rotate Image Rotate the preview image 180 degrees in order to correct the orientation of the original if necessary. Pressing rotates the currently displayed page. Pressing [Rotate Pages] displays the Scanned Page List. Select the page to be rotated. Up to six scanned pages can be displayed. Press [ ] or [ ] to change the selection. View Finishing View the finishing settings using icons or in text on the preview screen, and check the finishing state. Change Setting Change the settings for the next original to be scanned. View Pages/View Status Switch between the View Status and View Pages tab in the Preview screen. Perform image rotation and setting changes on [View Pages] and stop scanning on [View Status]. Settings5 Copy Functionbizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 5-2 5 5 Copy Function You can configure the settings for multiple copy features by pressing buttons on the operation or touch panel. This chapter describes the functions that can be configured by pressing the buttons in the touch panel. Item Basic Configure the basic settings for making copies. p. 5-3 Original Setting Configure the type and size of the original. p. 5-15 Quality/Density Configure the quality or density for the original to optimize copy quality. p. 5-18 Application Configure the application settings for making copies. p. 5-20 Left panel Job List Check jobs currently being performed and jobs waiting to be performed. p. 5-62 Check Job Check the current settings and the result of the settings. p. 5-64bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 5-3 5.1 Basic 5 5.1 Basic Configure the basic settings for making copies. Item Color Specify the print color for making copies. p. 5-4 Paper Select the paper type to be printed on and paper tray. p. 5-5 Zoom Select the zoom ratio of the image to be copied. p. 5-7 Duplex/Combine Configure the 2-sided copy and combined copy settings. p. 5-8 Finishing program button Configure frequently used offset and finishing settings in advance. You can activate preferred finishing functions by simply pressing this button. p. 6-8 Finishing Press this button to select the settings for offsetting and finishing copies. p. 5-10 Separate Scan Select this item to divide a large original and scan it in a number of batches. p. 5-13 Auto Rotate OFF Select this item to copy the original according to the paper orientation without rotating the image. p. 5-14 Language Selection Display the Language Selection screen to specify the language to be displayed on the touch panel. This item is not displayed when two shortcut keys are configured. - Shortcut Key Allows you to arrange shortcut keys for the frequently used Application functions on the Basic screen. -bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 5-4 5.1 Basic 5 5.1.1 Color Select the print color for making copies. For the print color, you can select one from [Auto Color], [Full Color], [2 Color], [Black] and [Single Color]. % Press [Basic] ö [Color]. Settings Auto Color Automatically detects whether the scanned original is in color or in black and white, and selects the appropriate color setting (full color or black). Full Color Makes copies in full color, regardless of whether the scanned original is in color or in black and white. 2 Color Prints all areas of the scanned original determined to be in color with the specified color, and prints all areas determined to be black in black. Black Prints the copy in black and white, regardless of whether the scanned original is in color or in black and white. Single Color Prints the copy in the specified single color, regardless of the color of the scanned original. When you specify a single color, the original is copied by converting the color differences (apparent color densities) and the gradation levels into density differences of the single color. Average Density Copies the original by only converting the gradation levels into density differences of the single color, regardless of the color differences in the original, bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 5-5 5.1 Basic 5 5.1.2 Paper Select the paper type and size to be printed, or to change the paper size and paper type settings specified for each paper tray. The paper size can be selected automatically according to the original size or it can be specified manually. 0 If you select [Transparency], specify [Black] for [Color] in advance. 0 The auto zoom setting and the auto paper setting cannot be selected at the same time. 0 If a setting for special paper is selected for a paper tray, that tray is not selected automatically with the Auto Paper setting. (However, a paper tray set to Single Side Only is given priority to be selected with 1-sided printing.) When setting special paper in the paper tray, be sure to set the paper type. For details on special paper, refer to page 12-2. % Press [Basic] ö [Paper]. Settings Auto Automatically selects the paper size according to the original size. 1-4 Trays Allows you to specify the paper manually. # (Bypass Tray) L Large capacity unit (Optional) Change Tray Settings Specify the paper type and paper size for the selected paper tray. Paper Type Specify the paper type for the selected paper tray. Paper Size Specify the paper size for the selected paper tray. [Auto Detect]: Automatically detects the paper size. [12-1/4 e 18 w] (Only for Tray 1 and Tray 2): Enables 12-1/4 e 18 w to be selected. [Standard Size] (only for Bypass Tray): Specify a paper size to use the bypass tray as a paper tray dedicated to the paper size. [Custom Size] (only for Bypass Tray): Enter the paper size. [Wide Paper]: Select a paper size larger than the original.bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 5-6 5.1 Basic 5 Configuring a custom size % [Basic] ö [Paper] ö [Bypass Tray] ö [Change Tray Settings] ö [Custom Size]. Configuring wide paper % [Basic] ö [Paper] ö [Bypass Tray] ö [Change Tray Settings] ö [Wide Paper]. Settings X/Y • North American model (inch): Configure the length [X] and width [Y] with pressing [+] or [-]. • European model (cm): Enter the length [X] and width [Y] of the paper. Store Register custom paper sizes. memory 1 to 5 Select the memory button where the paper size is to be stored. Change Custom Size Name Rename memory button names. Settings Wide Paper Select the size of the paper to be loaded. Change Size X/Y Enter the length [X] and width [Y] of the paper. Preset Paper Sizes Enables 12 e 18 w to be selected.bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 5-7 5.1 Basic 5 5.1.3 Zoom The original image size in the original can be enlarged or reduced. 0 The auto zoom setting and the auto paper setting cannot be selected at the same time. 0 If the auto zoom setting is selected and an enlargement is to be copied on paper larger than the original, load the original with the same orientation as the paper. % Press [Basic] ö [Zoom]. dReference To set image rotation: Press the [Utility/Counter] key ö [User Settings] ö [Copier Settings] ö [Enlargement Rotation]. Settings Auto Automatically selects the most appropriate zoom ratio based on the size of the loaded original and the specified paper size. Full Size Copies the original image in the size identical to the original (100%). Manual • Enter the zoom ratio (25.0% - 400.0%) of the copy. • Under "Set Individual Zoom", you can enter different zoom ratios for the X and Y directions. Set Zoom Enter the desired zoom and select the button to register the value with. "User Preset Zoom" indicates the registered zoom. Minimal Copies an original image slightly smaller than the original size or the specified size. The image in the original is centered on the paper without any cutoff. Select this setting when you want to copy the entire scope of the original within the paper used. -/+ Configure the zoom ratio (25.0% - 400.0%) of the copy without changing the aspect ratio. Fixed Zoom Select a preset zoom when copying from a fixed size original onto a fixed size paper. User Preset Zoom Select a registered copy zoom value. To change the registered zoom values, use [Set Zoom].bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 5-8 5.1 Basic 5 5.1.4 Duplex/Combine Configure whether to scan one side or both sides of the originals and whether to print on one side or both sides of the paper. Multiple (2, 4 or 8) pages of original images can be reduced in size and printed on a single page. Using the Duplex/Combine function, you can save paper sheets for copying. % Press [Basic] ö [Duplex/Combine]. Settings 1-Sided > 1-Sided 2-Sided > 1-Sided 1-Sided > 2-Sided 2-Sided > 2-Sided Binding Position Configure the binding position of the original and copies to be output. Without setting the Binding Position, the resulting copy may not be what you intended. When [1- Sided > 1- Sided] is selected, the binding position cannot be set. Original Binding Position Select the original binding position from [LeftBind], [Right-Bind], [Top] and [Auto]. • If the binding position for the original is set to [Auto], the position of the binding margin is automatically selected. A binding margin along the long side of the paper is selected if the original length is 11-11/16 inch (297 mm) or less. If the original length is more than 11- 11/16 inch (297 mm), a binding margin along the short side of the paper is selected. • If [Auto] is selected for the original binding position, the binding margin is set at the top or on the left.bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 5-9 5.1 Basic 5 Binding Position Output Binding Position Select the output binding position from [Left Bind], [Right Bind], [Top] and [Auto]. • If the binding position for the copy is set to [Auto], the binding position is automatically determined according to the orientation of the loaded original. If the original length is 11- 11/16 inch (297 mm) or less, a binding position along the long side of the paper is selected. If the original length is more than 11-11/16 inch (297 mm), a binding position along the short side of the paper is selected. • If Output Binding Position is set to [Auto], the binding position is set at the top or on the left. Original Direction Select the orientation of the original loaded into the ADF or placed on the original glass. Without setting original direction, the resulting copy may not be what you intended. No Disables combined copy. 2in1 Copies images on two original pages on one sheet of paper. Portrait original pages Landscape original pages 4in1/8in1 4in1 Copies images of four original pages on one sheet of paper. 8in1 Copies images of eight original pages on one sheet of paper. Horizontal Specify the combine order of the original (Numbering Direction setting). Vertical Settingsbizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 5-10 5.1 Basic 5 5.1.5 Finishing Various settings can be selected for sorting and finishing copies fed into the copy output tray. 0 The Staple settings are available only if the optional finisher is installed. 0 The Punch settings are available only if the Punch Kit PK-516 or Z Folding Unit is installed on the Finisher FS-526 or the Punch Kit PK-517 is installed on the Finisher FS-527. 0 The Fold/Bind is available only if the Saddle Stitcher is installed on the optional Finisher. 0 The Z-fold settings are available only if the Z Folding Unit is installed on the optional Finisher FS-526. 0 "Staple" cannot be used together with "Offset". 0 The Half-Fold, Center Staple & Fold or Tri-Fold function cannot be used together with any of "Offset", "Staple" or "Punch". % Press [Basic] ö [Finishing]. Settings Sort Prints the copied sets separately when a multi-page original is copied. Group Makes multiple copies of each page when you make multiple copies of a multipage original. 1 1 1 4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1 1 1 1bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 5-11 5.1 Basic 5 Offset Yes/No Specify whether to separate each set of copies from another set in the output tray when copying multiple sets of multi-page originals. When the Finisher or Job Separator JS-504 is not installed: If the following conditions are met, printed copies are fed out and sorted in an alternating crisscross pattern. • 8-1/2 e 11, A4 or B5 paper is used • Paper of the same size and type is loaded with the w orientation in one paper tray and with the v orientation in another tray • Auto paper selection is specified for the paper size setting When the Finisher or Job Separator JS-504 is installed: The copies are fed out and stacked on top of each other with each set shifted to separate it. Fold/Bind When the Saddle Stitcher SD-508 is installed on the Finisher FS-526: Half Fold Center Staple & Fold Tri-Fold Z-Fold To configure the Z folding setting, install the Z Folding Unit ZU-606. When the Saddle Stitcher SD-509 is installed on the Finisher FS-527: Half Fold Center Staple & Fold Staple Staples copies in corner or at two points before they are output. Punch Punches holes in copies before they are output. Settings 1bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 5-12 5.1 Basic 5 5.1.6 Post Inserter When the Post Inserter PI-505 is installed on the Finisher FS-526, you can manually operate the Finisher FS-526 using the post inserter control panel. Reference - Only the lower tray can be used as the output tray. The upper tray is not available. Keys on control panel Position Setting Configure desired staple or hole-punch positions. Select Auto, and the machine automatically judges the staple or punch positions for the paper relative to the original direction loaded. • A staple or hole-punch position is set along the long side of the paper if the original length is 11-11/16 inch (297 mm) or less. • Staple or hole-punch positions are set along the short side of the paper if the original length is more than 11-11/16 inch (297 mm). • Staple or punching positions are set on the upper or left-side end. • Be sure to load the original so that its top side is placed in the back. • If desired, press [Original Direction], and then select the original direction. Settings No. Name 1 Corner staple lamp 2 Center staple & fold lamp 3 [Finishing] key 4 2-hole lamp 5 3-hole lamp 6 [Select punch] key 7 [Start/stop] key 8 4-hole lamp 9 Tri-fold lamp 10 2 position staple lamp 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 10 9 8bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 5-13 5.1 Basic 5 Finishing using Post Inserter 1 Place paper in the lower tray of the Post Inserter, and align the lateral guide to the paper size. % Set the paper by placing it so that its top side faces the back of the machine. % To use the corner staple or 2-staple option, load the paper face up. % To perform Punch, load the paper face up. % To perform Bind, load the front side of the bound paper face down. % To perform Tri-Fold, load the outside of the tri-folded paper face down. 2 Press [Finishing] key and [Select punch] key, and select the desired finishing. % To configure Finishing settings, press [Finishing] key to turn the LED on. To configure punch settings, press [Select punch] key to turn the LED on. % Punch settings are available together with the corner staple or 2-staple option. 3 Press the [Start/stop] key. % If [Start/stop] key is pressed during operation, the operation will be stopped. 5.1.7 Separate Scan When the original contains pages exceeding the capacity of the ADF, you can divide the original into several batches to handle each lot as a single copy job. You can also use the copy function by switching between the ADF and the original glass for scanning the originals. 0 Do not load original sheets beyond the upper limit for the ADF. It would cause jamming and/or spoiling of the original or failure of the machine. 0 When making 2-sided or combined copies using the original glass, the machine can scan a number of original pages without enabling Separate Scan. 1 Load the original. 2 In the Basic tab, press [Separate Scan]. ABC Front Cover Front Cover ABC ABC ABCbizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 5-14 5.1 Basic 5 3 Press the [Start] key. The original is scanned. 4 Load the next batch of the original, and then press the [Start] key. % To change the scanning settings, press [Change Setting]. 5 Repeat Step 4 until all pages of the original are scanned. 6 After all original pages have been scanned, press [Finish]. 7 Press the [Start] key. dReference To set the Separate Scan output method: Press the [Utility/Counter] key ö [User Settings] ö [Copier Settings] ö [Separate Scan Output Method]. 5.1.8 Auto Rotate OFF Select this setting to copy the original according to the paper orientation without rotating the image. 0 For some paper sizes or zoom values, part of the image may be cut off. % Press [Basic] ö [Auto Rotate OFF].bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 5-15 5.2 Original Setting 5 5.2 Original Setting Configure the original status or original direction for outputting desired copies. % Press [Original Setting]. Settings Mixed Original Loads originals of different sizes into the ADF and scan them at a time. Z-Folded Original Correctly detects the original size when folded originals are loaded into the ADF and copied. Original Size Select [Auto] to detect the size of the original automatically. If the size of the original is not automatically detected, select the original size. Custom Size Enter the original size. Photo Size Select the photo size. Binding Position Specify the original binding position (page margin) to prevent the copy from being printed upside-down when scanning a 2-sided original, Auto Automatically configures the binding position of the original. • A binding margin along the long side of the paper is selected if the original length is 11- 11/16 inch (297 mm) or less. • If the original length is more than 11-11/16 inch (297 mm), a binding margin along the short side of the paper is selected. Original Direction Specify the original direction to load into the ADF or place on the original glass when copying 2-sided originals or making 2-sided or combined copies. Despeckle Reduces the influence of a dirt of the slit glass upon a copy output when loading an original in the ADF.bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 5-16 5.2 Original Setting 5 Copying mixed originals Loads originals of different sizes into the ADF and scan them at a time. To copy onto paper of the same size as the original, select [Full Size] in the Zoom tab and select [Auto] on the Paper tab. To copy all original pages on paper of the same size, select [Auto] in the Zoom tab and select the desired paper size on the Paper tab. 0 When [1-Sided > 2-Sided] is selected together with Auto Paper, the back side becomes blank if its paper size is different from that of the front side. For example, if a single-sided original is copied in the order of 11 × 17 (A3) and 8-1/2 × 11 (A4), it results in copying of the front side (11 × 17 (A3)) / back side (blank) and of the front side (8-1/2 × 11 (A4)) / back side (blank). NOTICE Load all of the original pages into the ADF so that the top of the pages is toward the back or the left side of the machine. 1 Slide the adjustable lateral guides of the ADF to fit the size of the largest original page. 2 Arrange originals in the order you want them to be scanned and load them face up in the ADF. 3 In the basic settings screen, press [Original Setting]. 4 Press [Mixed Original]. % To cancel the setting, press [Mixed Original] again to deselect it. The following chart shows the possible combinations of standard-sized paper that can be used for the Mixed Original setting. Original Size Maximum Original Width 11 e 17 w (A3 w) 8-1/2 e 11 v (A4 v) 8-1/2 e 14 w (B4 w) 8-1/2 e 11 w (A4 w) 5-1/2 e 8-1/2 v (A5 v) 5-1/2 e 8-1/2 w (A5 w) (B5 v) (B5 w) 11 e 17 w (A3 w) o o - - - - - - 8-1/2 e 11 v (A4 v) o o - - - - - - 8-1/2 e 14 w (B4 w) o o o - - - o - 8-1/2 e 11 w (A4 w) o o o o o - o - 5-1/2 e 8-1/2 v (A5 v) - - o o o - o - 5-1/2 e 8-1/2 w (A5 w) - - - - - o - o (B5 v) o o o - - - o - (B5 w) - - o o o - o o o Possible to combine - Not possible to combinebizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 5-17 5.2 Original Setting 5 Copying Z-folded originals Correctly detects the original size when folded originals are loaded into the ADF and copied. The length of the first page of the original is detected, and the subsequent pages are scanned as pages of the same size. NOTICE Unfold folded originals before loading them into the ADF. If the original is copied without being unfolded, a paper jam may occur. 1 Load the original into the ADF. 2 In the basic settings screen, press [Original Setting]. 3 Press [Z-Folded Original]. % To cancel the setting, press [Z-Folded Original] again to deselect it.bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 5-18 5.3 Quality/Density 5 5.3 Quality/Density Select the setting for the image type of the original to better adjust the copy quality/density. % Press [Quality/Density]. Settings Original Type Select the original type (text and image type) to obtain better copy quality. Text Copies originals containing only text. The edges of copied text are reproduced with sharpness, providing an image that is easy to read. Text/Photo [Photo Paper]: Select this setting to print photos from originals containing both text and images onto photographic paper. A smooth copy image is produced. [Printed Photo]: Select this setting to copy printed originals containing both text and images, such as pamphlets or catalogs. Photo [Photo Paper]: Select this setting when the original photos are printed on photographic paper. Halftone original images (photographs, etc.) that cannot be reproduced with the usual settings will be reproduced in as nearly an original state as possible. A smooth copy image is produced. [Printed Photo]: Select this setting to copy printed originals, such as pamphlets or catalogs. Halftone original images (photographs, etc.) that cannot be reproduced with the usual settings will be reproduced in as nearly an original state as possible. Map Select this setting to copy originals with a background color, originals containing pencil markings or fine colored lines such as maps. A sharp copy image is produced.bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 5-19 5.3 Quality/Density 5 Original Type Dot Matrix Original Select this setting to copy originals containing only text that appears faint (such as that written with a pencil). The copied text is reproduced so that it is darker, making it easier to read. Copied Paper Select this setting to copy images (originals) printed using this machine. Density Adjust copy density. Background Removal Adjust the density of the background area for originals with colored background (newsprints, recycle paper, etc.) or originals on thin paper showing text or images from the back. Select [Auto] for "Background Removal Level" to enable automatic background density adjustment for copying with the optimal background density. For "Background Removal", normally [Bleed Removal] is selected. However, when copying an original with colored background, select [Paper Discoloration Adj] to make adjustment for background removal for copying. Text Enhancement Adjust the text reproduction level for an original with a photo overlapping the text (background text) to clarify the text on the background. To emphasize the text on the background, press [Daker Text] to adjust the setting toward +. To emphasize the background image, press [Lighter Text] to adjust the setting toward -. [Text Enhancement] can be configured when an item other than [Photo] is selected. Glossy Makes copies with a glossy finish. Settingsbizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 5-20 5.4 Application 5 5.4 Application Configure the application settings for making copies. Item Sheet/Cover/Chapter Insert Inserts another sheet of paper or adds a cover page to the paper for copying. You can also scan multiple copies of the original with different settings. p. 5-21 Edit Color Inverts the contrast or gradation of the original or prints the original in the mirror image. It also adds a color in the background or adjust the quality of a color image. p. 5-29 Book Copy/Repeat Configure the settings for a book or catalog. An image on a single sheet of original can be repeatedly copied or divided and enlarged in parts to produce copies of the respective parts. p. 5-33 Page Margin Select the binding margin (blank area) of the paper used for copying. p. 5-37 Image Adjust Configure the layout for the image when the paper is larger than the original. p. 5-39 Booklet Automatically arranges the page order of the scanned original and makes 2-sided 2 in 1 copies to produce a page layout for a centerbound book, such as a magazine. p. 5-40 Erase Erases unnecessary outside portion of the original body text or erases the area outside the original placed on the original glass. p. 5-41 Stamp/Composition Prints the date/time, page number or a stamp printed on copies. This function also allows you to embed information for preventing unauthorized copying in a document. p. 5-43 Card Copy Copies the contents of the front and back sides of a card-size original, for example, insurance card, driver's license, or business card, on one sheet. p. 5-59 Save in User Box Saves the scanned original data in a User Box. p. 5-60bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 5-21 5.4 Application 5 5.4.1 Sheet/Cover/Chapter Insert OHP Interleave Prevent copies printed onto OHP transparencies from sticking together because of the heat produced during copying by having paper (interleaves) inserted between the transparencies. 0 Printing on OHP transparencies is possible only in black. 0 Use interleaf paper with the same size as the OHP transparencies. 0 The number of copies is fixed to one. You cannot change. 0 The finishing function cannot be changed. 0 Load transparencies into the bypass tray. 0 Do not use a transparency that has been through the machine even once. It may lead to reduced print quality, a paper jam or a damage to the machine. (Even if a transparency has been discharged without printing, it cannot be reused.) 1 Load the original. 2 Press [Basic] ö [Color] ö [Black]. 3 Load transparencies into the bypass tray. Load the interleave paper into the desired paper tray. 4 Set the paper type of the bypass tray to [Transparency] and press [OK]. 5 Press [Application] ö [Sheet/Cover/Chapter Insert] ö [OHP Interleave]. dReference Setting Black for Color Settings: Press [Basic] ö [Color] ö [Black]. Settings Interleave Paper Select the paper tray loaded with paper with a transparency interleaf. Transparency Indicates the paper size of the loaded transparency. EFGH EFGH EFGH EFGH EFGH EFGHbizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 5-22 5.4 Application 5 Cover Sheet Copies the front and back cover sheets onto separate paper when copying an original with a front/back cover sheet. When the original to copy does not have a front and back cover, you can insert blank sheets of paper as the front and back covers. 0 Use paper of the same size for the body text and cover sheets, and ensure the same orientation of paper for both purposes. % Press [Application] ö [Sheet/Cover/Chapter Insert] ö [Cover Sheet]. dReference To configure the 2-sided copy mode: Press [Basic] ö [Duplex/Combine]. Settings None Disables copying of the front/back cover and blank sheet insertion. Front (Copy) For 1-sided copy: Copies the first page of the original onto paper for the front cover sheet. For 2-sided copy: Copies the second page of the original onto the back of the paper for the front cover sheet. Front (Blank) Adds paper for the front cover sheet as the first page of the copy. Back (Copy) For 1-sided copy: Copies the last page of the original onto the back cover page. For 2-sided copy: Copies the last two pages of the original the 2-sided copy mode onto both sides of the paper for the back cover when copying an original with an even number of pages. Back (Blank) Add paper for the back cover sheet to the last page of the copy. Paper Select the paper tray loaded with the paper for the front/back cover page or blank cover pages. You can select the paper tray of the Post Inserter when [Front(Blank)] or [Back(Blank)] is selected while the optional Post Inserter is installed. 4 4 3 3 2 2 1 1 REPORT 4 4 3 3 2 2 1 1 4 4 3 3 2 2 2 2 1 1 REPORTbizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 5-23 5.4 Application 5 Insert Sheet A different sheet of paper (such as colored paper) can be inserted as specified pages in the copies. You can select from two options: [Copy] and [Blank] to enable or disable copying to the inserted sheet. 0 You can specify up to 30 positions for insert sheets. 0 Use paper of the same size for the sheets to be inserted and for the original copies, and ensure the same orientation of paper for both. % Press [Application] ö [Sheet/Cover/Chapter Insert] ö [Insert Sheet]. Settings P --- Specify where to insert sheets of a different paper type. Sort Sorts specified pages in the ascending order. Insert Paper Select the paper tray loaded with the paper to be inserted. You can select the paper tray of the Post Inserter when [Blank] is selected while the optional Post Inserter is installed. Copy Copies the original with the specified paper inserted for the specified pages. When setting the specified page to "2" For 1-sided copy: Inserts the specified paper as the second page of the copies, and copies the second page of the original onto it. For 2-sided copy: Leaves the back side of the first page of the copy blank, inserts the specified paper for the second page of the copy, and makes a 2-sided copy of the second and third pages of the original onto the inserted sheet. 6 6 4 4 5 2 2 3 6 6 5 5 4 4 3 3 2 2 1 1 REPORT 6 6 5 5 4 4 3 3 2 2 1 1 REPORT 1 1 REPORTbizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 5-24 5.4 Application 5 dReference To configure the 2-sided copy mode: Press [Basic] ö [Duplex/Combine]. Insert Image A multi-page original scanned on the original glass can be inserted at the pre-set location in an original first scanned with the ADF. 0 With the Insert Image function, the inserted original is added after the specified page. 0 You can specify up to 30 positions for the original to be inserted. 0 If the document scanned on the original glass has more pages than the number of pages specified in the Insert Image screen, the remaining pages of the inserted original are printed at the end of the original. 0 The original on the original glass is scanned with the same settings as for the original scanned in the ADF. 0 If the original scanned on the original glass has fewer pages than the number of pages specified in the Insert Image screen, the missing insertion pages will not be printed. 0 If the same page number is specified twice, two insertion original pages are added at the specified location. 0 If the specified page number is greater than the total number of pages in the main original, the corresponding insertion original page is added at the end of the copy. 1 Load the original into the ADF. Blank Select this option to insert the specified paper sheet after the page you have specified. When setting the specified page to "3" For 1-sided copy: Inserts the specified paper as the fourth page of the copy. For 2-sided copy: Leaves the back side of the second page of the copy blank, and inserts the specified paper for the third page of the copy. Settings 6 6 4 4 5 6 6 5 5 4 4 3 3 6 6 5 5 4 4 3 3 2 2 1 1 REPORT 3 3 2 2 1 1 REPORT 1 1 2 REPORT 4 4 3 3 2 2 1 1 REPORT A B 4 3 B 2 1 A 1 REPORTbizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 5-25 5.4 Application 5 2 Press [Application] ö [Sheet/Cover/Chapter Insert] ö [Insert Image]. 3 Press the [Start] key. 4 Place the original to be inserted on the original glass. 5 Press the [Start] key. % To insert a multi-page original, repeat steps 4 and 5 until all pages of the insertion original are scanned in the order that they are to be inserted. 6 Press [Finish]. 7 Press the [Start] key. Copying begins. Settings P --- Specify the position to insert the page scanned through the original glass. Sort Sorts specified pages in the ascending order.bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 5-26 5.4 Application 5 Chapters When making 2-sided copies, the pages specified as the first page of a chapter can be printed on the front side of the paper. If the document was arranged so that the specified page would be printed on the back side of a page, the page is left blank and the specified page is printed on the front side of the next page. 0 You can set up to 30 positions for the first page of chapters. 0 Enable the Chapters function to set [1-Sided > 2-Sided]. For a 2-sided original, select [2-Sided >2- Sided]. 0 Make sure that the paper loaded for the first page of the chapter and for text copies have the same size and orientation. % Press [Application] ö [Sheet/Cover/Chapter Insert] ö [Chapters]. dReference To configure the 2-sided copy mode: Press [Basic] ö [Duplex/Combine]. Settings P --- Specify the first page of the chapters. Sort Sorts specified pages in the ascending order. Chapter Paper Specify the paper tray for paper to be inserted for the first page of the chapter. Copy Insert Makes copies of the first pages of the chapters on paper of a different type from that for the text pages. None Copies all pages with the same type of paper. 3 7 7 8 6 2 6 4 4 5 3 3 3 7 7 8 5 5 6 3 3 4 8 8 7 7 6 6 5 5 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 2 4 4 3 3 2 2 1 1bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 5-27 5.4 Application 5 Program Jobs When the originals to be copied include different types of materials such as a 1-sided original for full size copying and a 2-sided original for enlarged copying among other things, you can use this setting for scanning various originals with different settings and then copy them all in a single copying job. Different Zoom or Paper settings can be specified for a part of the original or Finishing settings or a numbering function can be set after the entire original is scanned, and then all copies can be printed together. 0 Up to 100 types of originals can be scanned. 0 When configuring a program job, the [Group] setting cannot be selected in the Finishing screen. Instead, select [Sort]. 1 Press [Application] ö [Sheet/Cover/Chapter Insert] ö [Program Jobs]. 2 Select the desired copy settings, and then press the [Start] key. 3 Press [Fix]. % Press [Retry] to delete the scanned job. Press [Change Setting] to configure the copy settings. % When the original has been loaded on the original glass, press [Finish]. 4 Load the next original and press [Change Setting]. 4 4 3 3 2 2 1 1 REPORT 4 2 3 3 2 4 4 3 3 2 2 1 1 REPORT 1 1 0001 REPORTbizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 5-28 5.4 Application 5 5 Select the desired copy settings, and then press the [Start] key. % Repeat Steps 3 to 5 until all originals have been scanned. 6 After all original pages have been scanned, press [Finish]. 7 Press [Yes]. 8 Specify finish settings as needed. 9 Press [Start] or the [Start] key.bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 5-29 5.4 Application 5 5.4.2 Edit Color Neg./Pos. Reverse Use this function to enable the original to be copied with the density and gradations of the image inversed. The images in the original are copied and output reversed like negative film of photographs. 0 If a single color is selected, the images are reversed relative to the selected color. 0 If a background color is selected, colors are reversed relative to the selected base color and the color of the images. % Press [Application] ö [Edit Color] ö [Neg./Pos. Reverse]. % To cancel the Neg./Pos. Reverse function, press [Neg./Pos. Reverse] again. dReference To set Single Color: Press [Basic] ö [Color] ö [Single Color]. To Set Background Color: Press [Application] ö [Edit Color] ö [Background Color]. bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 5-30 5.4 Application 5 Mirror Image Copy originals as mirror images. % Press [Application] ö [Edit Color] ö [Mirror Image]. Settings Original Size Select [Auto] to detect the size of the original automatically. If the size of the original is not automatically detected, select the original size. Custom Size Enter the original size. Photo Size Select the photo size.bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 5-31 5.4 Application 5 Background Color Color the blank area of the original with a specified background color. % Press [Application] ö [Edit Color] ö [Background Color]. Color Adjustment Adjust the image quality to fit an image based on the color-copied original. 1 Press [Application] ö [Edit Color] ö [Color Adjust]. Settings Select Color Select a background color.bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 5-32 5.4 Application 5 2 Configure respective functions. % Press [Sample Copy] to see how it will appear with the currently specified color quality adjustment settings. Settings Brightness Adjust the brightness of the copied image. Contrast Adjust the copy density balance. Saturation Adjust how vivid colors should be for full color copies. Red Adjust how vivid red colors should be for full color copies. Green Adjust how vivid green colors should be for full color copies. Blue Adjust how vivid blue colors should be for full color copies. Hue Adjust the hue for full color copies. The hue refers to a color trend relative to discrete colors such as red, blue and yellow. By adjusting the hue, the image can attain more reddish or bluish tone, for example. Copy Density Adjust copy density (lighter or darker). Sharpness Adjust the sharpness to emphasize the edges of text so that copied text can be read more easily. You can make an overly sharp original image softer or a blurry image clearer. Color Balance Adjust the individual concentrations of yellow (Y), magenta (M), cyan (C), and black (K) for full-color copies. Full-color copy reproduces colors of the original by mixing toners of four colors: yellow, magenta, cyan, and black. By changing the amount of each of the four toners, adjust the tints in the copy.bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 5-33 5.4 Application 5 5.4.3 Book Copy/Repeat Book Copy Divides or does not divide page spreads (such as a book or catalog) into left and right pages to copy data. This function enables copying with the ADF open by placing the original on the Original Glass. If necessary, you can place an original image at the center of the paper to copy. 0 Place the original on the original glass. 0 If [Book Copy] is selected, [Image Adjust] is set to [Centering] and [Erase] is set to [Non-Image Area Erase] automatically. For details on [Centering], refer to page 5-39. For details on [Non-Image Area Erase], refer to page 5-41. The automatically set [Centering] or [Non-Image Area Erase] can be cancelled. 0 When [Book Spread] or [Separation] is selected, pressing the [Start] key starts printing. 0 When [Front and Back Cover] is selected, the scanning operation starts with the front cover followed by scanning of the back cover, and ends with scanning of all two-page spreads of the body text in the order of the page numbers. 0 When [Front Cover] is selected, all two-page spreads are scanned in order after the front cover. 0 When [Front and Back Cover] or [Front Cover] is selected, wait until all pages in the original are scanned and then press [Finish] and then the [Start] key to start printing. % Press [Application] ö [Book Copy/Repeat] ö [Book Copy]. Settings Book Spread Copies both pages of a two-page spread original as a one page original. Separation Copies the right and left pages of two-page spreads separately in the order of the page numbers. Front Cover Copies the front cover, the right and left pages of two-page spreads separately in the order of the page numbers, and the back cover in this order. Front and Back Cover Copies the front cover, separate copies of each page in the page spreads and the back cover in the original page order. SURVEYOR’S REPORT SURVEYOR’S REPORTbizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 5-34 5.4 Application 5 Image Repeat An original image can be repeatedly printed on a single sheet of paper. Specify the original and paper sizes or the zoom to automatically calculate the number of images to be copied accordingly. Alternatively, specify the desired number of repetitions. % Press [Application] ö [Book Copy/Repeat] ö [Image Repeat]. Frame Erase Erases projection of the dark shadow around the book. Frame Configure the width of the area around the entire frame to be erased. Top, Right, Bottom, Left Configure the width of the top, right side, bottom and left side of the frame to be erased. None Select this settings to not erase the frame. Center Erase Erases projection of the dark shadow at the center of the book. Binding Position Select the binding position of the original. To indicate it, select [Separation], [Front Cover], and [Front and Back Cover]. Settings With Margin Repeats copying of the scanned area of the original so that the copy area of the sheet is filled with the copied image. If the entire image does not fit into the copy area, the extra range is not copied. Without Margin Repeats copying of the scanned area of the original so that the sheet is filled with the copied image. However, some parts of the image may be lost. Auto Detect Automatically detects the area to be scanned. Settingsbizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 5-35 5.4 Application 5 Poster Mode This function enables enlarged copy of the original image to a size exceeding the paper size that can be loaded in the machine, such as the 34 e 44 (A0) or 24 e 36 (B0) size. Specify the original size and the output size (enlarged copy size) to output enlarged copies of divided sections of the original onto separate sheets of paper respectively. Create an enlarged copy of the specified finished size by joining those copies of sections. To create an 34 e 44-size (A0-size) poster, create copies of sections on eight 11 e 17-size (A3-size) sheets and join them together. 0 Place the original on the original glass. 0 In Poster Mode, the number of copies is set to 1. % Press [Application] ö [Book Copy/Repeat] ö [Poster Mode]. Set Range Select [Auto] to detect the size of the original automatically. If the size of the original is not automatically detected, or the reading range must be specified, select the original size. Custom Size Enter the original size. Photo Size Select the photo size. 2/4/8 Repeat 2 Repeat 4 Repeat 8 Repeat Repeats copying of the scanned area of the original as many times as specified. Note, however, that an image that does not fit within the size of the paper used is copied with partial cutoff. [Repeat Interval Settings] can be configured only for [2 Repeat]. Repeat Interval Settings Specify the clearance between copied images. Settings Image Size Select the finished image size. Custom Size Enter the finished image size. Settingsbizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 5-36 5.4 Application 5 Booklet Original A catalog with its staples removed can be copied and bound with staples at the center to create copies of the original catalog. 0 This function is available if a saddle stitcher is installed in the optional finisher. NOTICE Load a catalog with the staples removed. 1 Load the original. % To use the original glass, position the pages in order, starting with the side that includes the first page, then the side that includes the second page, then the side that includes the third page. Paper Size • North American model(inch): Configure the width of the binding margin (1/16 inch to 3/4 inch) with pressing [+] and [-]. When [None] is selected, the binding margin width is set to 0 inch. • European model(cm): Enter the width of the binding margin (0.1 mm - 20.0 mm). When [None] is selected, the binding margin width is set to 0 mm. Zoom Enter the zoom to output a copy of the finished size. Original Size Select [Auto] to detect the size of the original automatically. If the size of the original is not automatically detected, select the original size. Custom Size Enter the original size. Photo Size Select the photo size. Settings 7 2 2 1 8 2 2 7 7 5 4 4 3 6 5 4 4 3 6 Staples + 2 7 8 1 4 5 6 3bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 5-37 5.4 Application 5 % To use the ADF, load the pages with the side that includes the first page on top. 2 Press [Application] ö [Book Copy/Repeat] ö [Booklet Original]. 3 Press the [Start] key. 4 After all original pages have been scanned, press [Finish] and the [Start] key. 5.4.4 Page Margin Copies can be printed with a binding margin so that the pages can easily be filed. When scanning a 2-sided original, you can specify the paper binding position (binding margin for the paper) to prevent the copy from being printed upside-down. Left Top Right 0 You can specify the binding position without creating a binding margin. 0 For 2-sided copy, you need to set the paper binding position and the original direction. Otherwise, the original image may be copied up-side-down. 0 If the positions of the staples or punched holes are different from the binding position, the positions of the staples or punched holes are given priority. 0 If part of the image is lost when copied with the specified binding margin settings, reduce the zoom and perform copying. % Press [Application] ö [Page Margin]. 3 3 4 6 6 5 1 1 2 8 8 7 4 4 ABC DEF GHI 3 3 ABC DEF GHI 2 2 ABC DEF 1 1 ABC DEF GHI 3 3 ABC DEF GHI 1 2 AB DE GH 4 4 ABC DEF GHI 2 2 ABC DEF GHI 2 2 ABC DEF 1 1 ABC DEF GHI 4 4 ABC DEF GHI 2 2 ABC DEF GHI 2 2 ABC DEF 1 1 ABC DEF GHI 4 4 ABC DEF GHI 3 3 ABC DEF GHI 2 2 ABC DEF 1 1 ABC DEF GHI 3 3 ABC DEF GHI ABC DEF 2 1 ABC DEF 4 4 ABC DEF GHI ABC DEF GHI 2 2 ABC DEF 1 1 ABC DEF GHI 3 3 ABC DEF GHI 1 2 BC EF HI 4 4 ABC DEF GHI 2 2 ABC DEF GHI 2 2 ABC DEF 1 1 ABC DEF GHIbizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 5-38 5.4 Application 5 dReference To set the zoom: Press [Basic] ö [Zoom]. Settings Margin Position Select an option from [Auto], [Left], [Top] and [Right]. When Auto is selected, the binding position is automatically set. • This function automatically determines the binding position according to the orientation of the loaded original. If the original length is 11-11/16 inch (297 mm) or less, a binding position along the long side of the paper is selected. If the original length is more than 11-11/16 inch (297 mm), a binding position along the short side of the paper is selected. • The binding position is set on the upper or left-side end. • Be sure to load the original so that its top side is placed in the back. If the document is loaded in any other orientation, this setting fails. Image Shift Adjust the image position according to the binding margin. Change Back Shift Adjust the image position on the back side of the paper in the 2-sided copy mode. Adjust Value • North American model (inch): Configure the width of the binding margin (1/16 inch to 3/4 inch) with pressing [+] and [-]. When [None] is selected, the binding margin width is set to 0 inch. • European model (cm): Enter the width of the binding margin (0.1 mm - 20.0 mm). When [None] is selected, the binding margin width is set to 0 mm. Original Direction Select the orientation of the original loaded into the ADF or placed on the original glass.bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 5-39 5.4 Application 5 5.4.5 Image Adjust If the paper is larger than the original, you can enlarge the original and copy it into the center of the paper. Full Size Center Zoom Centering % Press [Application] ö [Image Adjust]. Settings Full Size Enlarges the image up to the largest possible paper size that can contain the entire original, and copies the image at the center of the paper. Place the original on the original glass. Center Zoom Enlarges the image up to the largest possible paper size that can contain the entire original, and copies the image at the center of the paper. However, some parts of the image may be lost. Place the original on the original glass. Centering Copies the original image at the center of the paper without enlarging it. Original Size Select [Auto] to detect the size of the original automatically. If the size of the original is not automatically detected, select the original size. Custom Size Enter the original size. Photo Size Select the photo size.bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 5-40 5.4 Application 5 5.4.6 Booklet The page order of the scanned original is automatically arranged to produce 2-sided 2 in 1 copies in a page layout for center binding, such as for a magazine. 0 Center Staple & Fold or Half-Fold is available if the Saddle Stitcher is installed in the optional Finisher. 0 Generally, a multiple of 4 pages is required with a 1-sided original, and a multiple of 2 pages is required with a 2-sided original. If there are not enough pages, blank pages are automatically added at the end. 0 If a booklet is selected with the Auto Paper Select enabled, the zoom is automatically set at 64.7% (70.7%). % Press [Application] ö [Booklet]. Settings Left Bind/Right Bind Select the output binding position for copies to be output. Center Staple & Fold Staples copies at two places along the center, then folds the copies in half before feeding them out. Half-Fold Feeds out a copied sheet by folding it in two. No This setting feeds out a copied sheet without Center Staple & Fold or HalfFold. Paper Select the paper tray loaded with the desired paper. Cover Sheet Copies the front and back cover sheets onto separate paper when copying an original with a front/back cover sheet. When the original to copy does not have a front and back cover, you can insert blank sheets of paper as the front and back covers. 8 8 7 7 3 3 2 2 1 1 REPORT 6 3 6 3 5 4 8 1 8 1 7 REPORT 2 8 8 7 7 3 3 2 2 1 1 REPORT 3 6 6 6 4 5 1 8 1 8 2 REPORT 7 Right binding Left bindingbizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 5-41 5.4 Application 5 dReference To set to an appropriate zoom: Press the [Utility/Counter] key ö [User Settings] ö [Copier Settings] ö [Auto Zoom for Combine/Booklet]. 5.4.7 Erase Frame Erase Copies can be produced by erasing shadows of punched holes, unnecessary areas around the original text, such as the transmission information on received faxes and the shadows of punched holes. All four sides around the original can be erased in the same width or in a different width for each side. % Press [Application] ö [Erase] ö [Frame Erase]. Settings Frame Erases the four sides of the original in the same width. Top Right Bottom Left Erases each frame side in a different width. +/- • North American model (inch): Press [+], [-] to set the erasing width between 1/16 inch and 2 inch. • European model (cm): Press [+], [-] to set the erasing width between 0.1 mm and 50.0 mm. The erasing width can also be entered using the keypad. None Sets the erasing width to 0 inch (0 mm). A A:1/16 inch to 2 inch (0.1 mm to 50.0 mm) Abizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 5-42 5.4 Application 5 Non-Image Area Erase This function enables copying with the ADF open while having an original that cannot be loaded in the ADF placed at a desired position on the original glass. The original is automatically detected and the area outside the original text is erased. Erase methods include "Bevel" and "Rectangular". "Bevel" is used when the background of the original is thin and "Rectangular" is used when it is dark. You can place the original on any position without opening or closing the ADF so that you can make copies promptly. In addition, toner consumption will be reduced as the area outside the original text is erased. 0 If erasing is not performed as desired, set "Erase Operation" under "Erase Adjustment" in Administrator Settings. 0 The size of the original automatically detected is 3/8 inch e 3/8 inch (10 mm e 10 mm) or larger. If the detection fails, a blank sheet of paper is output. 0 You cannot make copies with the ADF closed. 0 The original image may be defected at its top or end. % Press [Application] ö [Erase] ö [Non-Image Area Erase]. dReference To set Erase Operation: Press the [Utility/Counter] key ö [Administrator Settings] ö [System Settings] ö [Expert Adjustment] ö [Erase Adjustment]. Rectangular erasing Bevel erasingbizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 5-43 5.4 Application 5 5.4.8 Stamp/Composition Add date and time, page number, stamp, image, or header or footer to make copies. Item Date/Time Adds date and time to copies. Page Number Adds page numbers or chapter numbers to copies. Stamp Adds preset or registered stamps to copies. Copy Security Adds a hidden text for preventing unauthorized copying in a document when copying. This function also allows you to copy a text with copy inhibit information or password embedded. Using this function, you can prevent original information from being leaked. Stamp Repeat Repeats copying of a stamp or the date and time onto the paper. Header/Footer Adds date and time to the top or bottom of the paper to print copies. Watermark Adds a watermark (watery text) to the center of the copied pages. Overlay Makes copies with the image of the first scanned original page overlapping the subsequent original images. Registered Overlay Saves an image of the scanned original as a registered overlay in the hard disk and later overlay the registered image on the copy of another original.bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 5-44 5.4 Application 5 Date/Time You can select the print position and notation format to print the date and time. Specify whether to print on all pages or only on the first page. 0 The date/time stamp cannot be printed on blank pages inserted using the Cover Sheet, Insert Sheet and Chapters functions. Change the setting for printing on blank pages in Administrator Settings to enable blank page printing. 0 The date/time as of scanning the original is stamped on the paper. % Press [Application] ö [Stamp/Composition] ö [Date/Time]. dReference To enable printing on blank pages: Press the [Utility/Counter] key ö [Administrator Settings] ö [System Settings] ö [Blank Page Print Settings]. Settings Date Format Select the type (format) of date and time notation. Time Format Select the type (format) of date and time notation. When [None] is selected, the time is not printed. Pages Select to print the date/time on all pages or only on the first page. Print Position Select a position from the nine print position options. Adjust Position Adjust horizontal and vertical positions between 1/16 inch (0.1 mm) and 1-15/16 inch (50.0 mm). Text Details Set the text color, size and type.bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 5-45 5.4 Application 5 Page Number You can select the print position and notation format to print page numbers and chapter numbers. Page and chapter numbers are printed on all pages. 0 Page numbers cannot be printed on blank pages inserted using the Cover Sheet, Insert Sheet and Chapters functions. Change the setting for printing on blank pages in Administrator Settings to enable blank page printing. % Press [Application] ö [Stamp/Composition] ö [Page Number]. Settings Starting Page Number • Set [Page Number] between -99999 and 99999, and set [Chapter] between -100 and 100. • Press [*] to switch over the signs (+ and -) of the setting. • If a negative value is specified, the numbers are not printed until the numbering reaches 1. For example, if "-1" was specified, the numbers are printed starting with "1" on the third copied page. • The entered chapter number is printed if [1-1, 1-2...] is selected under "Page Number Type". Starting Chapter Number Page Number Type Select the type (format) of the page.bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 5-46 5.4 Application 5 dReference To configure the settings for the Cover Sheet, Insert Sheet and Chapters functions: Press [Application] ö [Sheet/Cover/Chapter Insert]. To configure the settings for the Chapters function: Press [Application] ö [Sheet/Cover/Chapter Insert] ö [Chapters]. To enable printing on blank pages: Press the [Utility/Counter] key ö [Administrator Settings] ö [System Settings] ö [Blank Page Print Settings]. Insert Sheet Setting Set this parameter when using the Cover Sheet, Insert Sheet and Chapters functions together. Cover Sheet Print on Front and Back Cover: Prints on the front and back covers. Print on Back Cover Only: Prints a page number on the back cover but not on the front cover. Page number printing starts with "2" for 1-sided copy and with "3" for 2-sided copy. Do not print Page Number: Disables printing on the front or back cover. Page number printing starts with "2" for 1-sided copy and with "3" for 2-sided copy. Insert Sheet (Copy) Print page #: Prints on inserted pages. Do Not Print #: Counts but not prints on inserted pages. Skip the Page(s): Disables counting and printing on inserted pages. Insert (Blank) Do Not Print #: Counts but not prints on inserted pages. Skip the Page(s): Disables counting and printing on inserted pages. Print Position Select a position from the nine print position options. Adjust Position Adjust horizontal and vertical positions between 1/16 inch (0.1 mm) and 1-15/16 inch (50.0 mm). Text Details Set the text color, size and type. Settingsbizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 5-47 5.4 Application 5 Stamp You can select the print position and notation format to print the stamp. Select printing on all pages or only on the first page. 0 A stamp refers to text with printing contents fixed and preset. You can also select a stamp registered with the Copy Protection Utility. 0 Stamps cannot be printed on blank pages inserted using the Cover Sheet, Insert Sheet and Chapters functions. Change the setting for printing on blank pages in Administrator Settings to enable blank page printing. % Press [Application] ö [Stamp/Composition] ö [Stamp]. dReference To enable printing on blank pages: Press the [Utility/Counter] key ö [Administrator Settings] ö [System Settings] ö [Blank Page Print Settings]. Settings Stamp Type/Preset Stamps Select a stamp to be printed from the eight types available. Pages Select to print the stamp on all pages or only on the first page. Text Size Select the character size used for the stamp. Text Color Select the text color for the stamp. Print Position Select a position from the nine print position options. Adjust Position Adjust horizontal and vertical positions between 1/16 inch (0.1 mm) and 1-15/16 inch (50.0 mm).bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 5-48 5.4 Application 5 Copy Protect This function allows you to print a hidden text for preventing unauthorized copying, for example, a preset stamp such as Private or date, in the background without particular distinction. If you copy a document with Copy Protect printed, a text is highlighted on the entire sheet of paper to be printed, enabling you to know that the copy is not authorized. 0 The copy protection text is printed on all pages. The page to start with cannot be specified. 0 The selected copy protection text formats appear in the order they are placed, and can be used in combination for up to eight text lines. 0 Use the PageScope Web Connection or Copy Protection Utility to register a registered stamp. 0 Multiple registered stamps or preset stamps cannot be selected. % Press [Application] ö [Stamp/Composition] ö [Copy Security]ö [Copy Protect]. Settings Registered Stamp Select one from registered stamps. Preset Stamp Select a stamp to be printed from the eight types available. Date/Time Select the type of date and time notation. When [None] is selected for Time Format, the time is not printed. The date/time as of scanning the original is stamped on the paper. Other Job Number Select Yes to print the copy job number. Serial Number Select Yes to print the serial number of this machine. For details on setting for the serial number, contact your service representative. Distribution Control Number Prints the distribution control number. Specify the distribution control number using a value between 1 and 99999999. Detail Settings Configure the settings for Text/Background Color, Density, Copy Protect Text, Text Size, Pattern Overwrite and Background Pattern. ABCD Draft Draft Draft Draf aft Draft Draft Draft raft Draft Draft ABCD Draft Draft Draft Draf aft Draft Draft Draft raft Draft Draft ABCDbizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 5-49 5.4 Application 5 dReference To delete a registered stamp: Press the [Utility/Counter] key ö [Administrator Settings] ö [Security Settings] ö [Stamp Settings] ö [Delete Registered Stamp]. Copy Guard This function prints a document, embedding a Copy Guard pattern in a copy protect text, for example, a preset stamp such as Private or date. If an attempt is made to copy copy-guarded sheets, the machine that supports this function scans a Copy Guard pattern, stops copying, and discards the currently running job. 0 For a text, specify the pre-registered preset stamps. 0 The Copy Guard text is printed on all pages. The page to start with cannot be specified. 0 The selected Copy Guards appear in the order they are placed, and can be used in combination for up to six text lines. 0 You can select the preset stamp, date/time, and the other items together. 0 Multiple preset stamps cannot be selected. 0 A Copy Guard cannot be printed on a colored paper, envelope, or transparency film. % [Application] ö [Stamp/Compositon] ö [Copy Security] ö [Copy Guard] Position Change the angle. The angle can be changed when there are no more than four lines in the selected copy protection text. Change Pos./Delete Change the arrangement order. Select the target copy protection text and press [Up] or [Down]. To add a space to the copy protection text, press [Insert Space]. Press either [Up] or [Down] to move o that appears beside the specified copy protection text type, and then press [Insert]. To delete the copy protection text, press [Delete], and then press the button for the copy protection text to be deleted. Settings ABCD Draft Draft Draft Draf aft Draft Draft Draft raft Draft Draft ABCD NGbizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 5-50 5.4 Application 5 dReference To specify and detect a Copy Guard: Select Utility/Counter ö [Administrator Settings] ö [Security Settings] ö [Security Details] ö [Copy Guard]. Password Copy This function prints a document, embedding a copy protect text, for example, a preset stamp such as Private or date, and a password for Password Copy. If an attempt is made to copy password-copied sheets, the machine that supports this function scans a Password Copy pattern and prompts you to enter the password. When the correct password is entered, copying will start. 0 For a text, specify the pre-registered preset stamps. 0 A Password Copy is printed on all pages. The page to start with cannot be specified. 0 The selected Password Copy texts appear in the order they are placed, and can be used in combination for up to six text lines. 0 You can select the preset stamp, date/time, and the other items together. 0 Multiple preset stamps cannot be selected. 0 A Password Copy cannot be printed on a colored paper, envelope, or transparency film. 0 If you fail to enter a password three times, the currently processed copy job will be erased. 0 If a password is detected on copies with Zoom, 2 Color, Grayscale, Color Adjust, Colored Paper, Envelope, or Transparency specified, the currently processed copy job will be erased. 0 If multiple originals with different passwords are scanned, you will need to enter a password for each original. Settings Copy Guard Type Preset Stamp Select a stamp to be printed from the eight types available. Date/Time Specify the type of the date or time to be printed on paper. The date/time as of scanning the original is stamped on the paper. Other Specify Job Number, Serial Number, and Distribution Control Number to be printed on paper. Serial Number is assigned at the time of shipment of this machine. For details on settings, contact your service representative. Detail Settings Specify Text/Background Color, Copy Guard Pattern, Text Size, and Background Pattern to be printed on paper. ABCD 1234 1234 1234 Draft Draft Draft Draf aft Draft Draft Draft raft Draft Draft ABCD NG Draft Draft Draft Draf aft Draft Draft Draft raft Draft Draft ABCD 12bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 5-51 5.4 Application 5 % Select [Application] ö [Stamp/Composition] ö [Copy Security] ö [Password Copy]. dReference To specify and detect a Password Copy: Select [Utility/Counter] ö [Administrator Settings] ö [Security Settings] ö [Security Details] ö [Password Copy]. Stamp Repeat You can print a stamp, the date and time, or other specified items on all pages of the copy. 0 The printing contents of the Stamp Repeat function are printed on all pages. 0 The selected Stamp appear in the order they are placed, and can be used in combination for up to eight text lines. 0 Use the PageScope Web Connection or Copy Protection Utility to register a registered stamp. 0 Multiple registered stamps or preset stamps cannot be selected. Settings Password Enter the password to be embedded in paper. Stamp Type Preset Stamp Select a stamp to be printed from the eight types available. Date/Time Specify the type of the date or time to be printed on paper. The date/time as of scanning the original is stamped on the paper. Other Specify Job Number, Serial Number, and Distribution Control Number to be printed on paper. Serial Number is assigned at the time of shipment of this machine. For details on settings, contact your service representative. Detail Settings Specify Text/Background Color, Password Copy Pattern, Text Size, and Background Pattern to be printed on paper.bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 5-52 5.4 Application 5 % Press [Application] ö [Stamp/Composition] ö [Stamp Repeat]. dReference To delete a registered stamp: Press the [Utility/Counter] key ö [Administrator Settings] ö [Security Settings] ö [Stamp Settings] ö [Delete Registered Stamp]. Settings Registered Stamp Select one from registered stamps. Preset Stamp Select a stamp to be printed from the eight types available. Date/Time Select the type of date and time notation. When [None] is selected for Time Format, the time is not printed. The date/time as of scanning the original is stamped on the paper. Other Job Number Select Yes to print the copy job number. Serial Number Select Yes to print the serial number of this machine. For details on setting for the serial number, contact your service representative. Distribution Control Number Prints the distribution control number. Specify the distribution control number using a value between 1 and 99999999. Detail Settings Select the Text Color, Density, Text Size and Pattern Overwrite. Position Change the angle as required when there are no more than four lines in the selected repeating stamp. Change Pos./Delete Change the arrangement order. Select the target Stamp Repeat and press [Up] or [Down]. To add a space to repeated stamps, press [Insert Space]. Press either [Up] or [Down] to move o that appears beside the specified Stamp Repeat, and then press [Insert]. To delete the Stamp Repeat text, press [Delete], and then press the button for the Stamp Repeat text to be deleted.bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 5-53 5.4 Application 5 Header/Footer This setting enables printing the date/time and text at the top or the bottom of the paper. The date/time or a distribution number can be printed on each page. The header and footer can contain predetermined contents, but you can also temporarily change the contents. 0 In order to use the Header/Footer function, a header/footer must be registered in advance in Administrator Settings. If no header/footer is registered in Administrator Settings, the [Header/Footer] menu does not appear. % Press [Application] ö [Stamp/Composition] ö [Header/Footer]. dReference To register a header/footer: Press the [Utility/Counter] key ö [Administrator Settings] ö [System Settings] ö [Stamp Settings] ö [Header/Footer Settings]. Settings Recall Header/Footer Select a header/footer to be used. Check/Change Temporarily Check or temporarily change the contents of the registered header/footer. Header Settings Select to enable or disable printing of a header/footer. To print a header/footer, configure the following settings: Text: Enter the text for the header/footer. Date/Time: Select the type of date and time notation. Other: Select to print or not to print the distribution control number, job number, or serial number. Footer Settings Pages Select to print the header/footer on all pages or only on the first page. Text Details Select the Text Color, Text Size and Text Type. Reset Reset the settings to the initial contents.bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 5-54 5.4 Application 5 Watermark You can print a watermark (light text) at the center of the paper. Select fixed preset text to be printed such as "Invalid Copy" and "Private". Copying with a watermark enables explicit indication of the use of the copied paper. It also helps prevent unauthorized copy from the copied paper. 0 The watermark is printed on all pages at an angle of 45 degrees. It is printed once per page. 0 In case other settings affect the watermark printing to cause partial loss, the Watermark function is canceled upon copying. % Press [Application] ö [Stamp/Composition] ö [Watermark]. Settings Watermark Type Select a watermark from the eight types available. The watermark selected is printed over the original image. Text Color Select the watermark color from [Black], [Magenta] and [Cyan]. The watermark is printed in the selected color.bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 5-55 5.4 Application 5 Overlay Makes copies with the image of the first scanned original page overlapping the subsequent original images. For example, if you set Overlay to copy three original pages, two pages are output, including "a merged image of the first and second pages" and "a merged images of the first and the third pages". The Overlay function is useful for overlay of text, pictures or figures not prepared in other Stamp/Composition functions on the original. % Press [Application] ö [Stamp/Composition] ö [Overlay]. Settings Pages Select to print the overlay image on all pages or only on the first page. Selecting [1st Page Only] prints only on the second page of the original. Original Size Select [Auto] to detect the size of the original automatically. If the size of the original is not automatically detected, select the original size. Custom Size Enter the original size. Photo Size Select the photo size. Density Use the keypad to enter the density of an overlay image (using a value between 20 to 100%). Color Select the color of overlay image from [full color], [black], [red], [blue], [green], [yellow], [cyan], or [magenta].bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 5-56 5.4 Application 5 Registered Overlay This function enables storing of an image from the scanned original as a registered overlay on the hard disk for later use in copying another original. It is useful to register frequently used overlay images. % Press [Application] ö [Stamp/Composition] ö [Registered Overlay]. Composition Transparent Composes overlay image to be superimposed and increases the brightness of the image. This setting prevents an original from being hidden by the composed overlay image. Background Composition (Original) Composes the original as the background. The overlay image is superimposed on the original when they are printed. Back Composes the overlay image as the background. The original is superimposed on the overlay image when they are printed. Settingsbizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 5-57 5.4 Application 5 Settings Recall Overlay Image Specify whether to print a registered overlay image on the front or back side. Press an item to select an overlay image and configures its setting. • You cannot select an overlay image when no overlay has been registered. Thumbnail View Display Name In the screen view, you can check overlay images. In the Display Name mode, you can check overlay images using their file names. Select the desired overlay image. Detail Settings Density: Use the keypad to enter the density of an overlay image (using a value between 20 to 100%). Color: Select the color of overlay image from [full color], [black], [red], [blue], [green], [yellow], [cyan], or [magenta]. Composition: Transparent Composes overlay image to be superimposed and increases the brightness of the image. This setting prevents an original from being hidden by the composed overlay image. Background Composition(Original) Composes the original as the background. The overlay image is superimposed on the original when they are printed. Back Composes the overlay image as the background. The original is superimposed on the overlay image when they are printed. Image Details Check the "Name", "Registered Date", "Image Size" and "Color" of the overlay image. To confirm the enlarged overlay image, press [Preview]. Register Overlay Image New Enter the name of the overlay image to be registered. Load the overlay image original on the original glass and press the [Start] key to have the overlay image registered. Overwrite Select an overlay image to use for overwrite and press [Overwrite]. Load the overlay image original on the original glass and press the [Start] key to have the overlay image overwritten. Delete Select an overlay image to be deleted and press [Delete]. Detail Settings Density: Specify the density of an overlay to be registered between 20% and 100%. Color: Select the color for the overlay image to be registered from [Auto Color], [Full Color] and [Black]. Pages Select to print the overlay image on all pages or only on the first page. Original Size Select [Auto] to detect the size of the original automatically. If the size of the original is not automatically detected, select the original size. Custom Size Enter the original size. Photo Size Select the photo size.bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 5-58 5.4 Application 5 dReference To prohibit changing the overlay registration: Press the [Utility/Counter] key ö [Administrator Settings] ö [System Settings] ö [Restrict User Access] ö [Restrict Access to Job Settings] ö [Change Registered Overly].bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 5-59 5.4 Application 5 5.4.9 Card Copy Separately scans the contents of the front and back sides of a card, for example, insurance card, driver's license, or business card, and copies them together on one sheet. You can copy a card with the full size or enlarge an image to fit paper. Using the card copy function, you can save the number of sheets to be used. 0 A card must be placed in the erect mode on the original glass. 0 The card copy function and the auto paper function cannot be selected at the same time. 0 For some zoom values, part of the image may be cut off. % Select [Application] ö [Card Copy]. dReference To specify the default of Card Copy: Select [Utility/Counter] ö [Administrator Settings] ö [Copier Settings] ö [Card Copy]. Settings Original Size Press [X] and [Y], and enter the size of the card to be copied. Also select the pre-specified size from [size1] to [size4]. Layout Specify where to place the front and back sides of a card. Zoom You can copy a card with the full size or enlarge an image to fit paper. A A B Bbizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 5-60 5.4 Application 5 5.4.10 Save in User Box This function enables saving of data from the scanned originals on the hard disk (in the User Box) built in the machine. Documents saved in User Boxes can be printed when necessary. For details on using documents saved in User Boxes, refer to the "User's Guide [Box Operations]". % Press [Application] ö [Save in User Box]. Settings User Box Select the destination User Box. Document Name Specify a document name for the read original. A name automatically assigned to the document appears. You can change the file name. Save & Print [Yes]: Select to copy the scanned original and save it in the specified User Box. [No]: Select to save the data of the scanned original in the specified User Box.bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 5-61 5.5 Left panel display 5 5.5 Left panel display In the left panel of the basic settings screen, you can view the job list and the job status information. You can also view the result of the settings being configured. dReference To configure settings displayed as the default in the left panel: Press the [Utility/Counter] key ö [User Settings] ö [Custom Display Settings] ö [Left Panel Display Default]. To prohibit other users from deleting jobs or to give permission to do so: Press the [Utility/Counter] key ö [Administrator Settings] ö [System Settings] ö [Restrict User Access] ö [Restrict Access to Job Settings] ö [Delete Other User Jobs]. To prohibit or permit change if the print priority of jobs: Press the [Utility/Counter] key ö [Administrator Settings] ö [System Settings] ö [Restrict User Access] ö [Restrict Access to Job Settings] ö [Changing Job Priority]. To hide the file name and destination in the job log: Press the [Utility/Counter] key ö [Administrator Settings] ö [Security Settings] ö [Security Details] ö [Hide Personal Information]. To delete all job logs: Press the [Utility/Counter] key ö [Administrator Settings] ö [Security Settings] ö [Security Details] ö [Initialize] ö [Job History]. Job List Check Job Settings Job List Lists jobs currently being performed or waiting to be performed. If the Left Panel Display Default is set to "Status Display" in User Settings, the job status is displayed. Delete To delete a job, select the job from the job list, and then press [Delete]. Job Details Opens the Job List screen. Check Job Displays the result of the settings being configured. Check Details Check or change the current copy settings.bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 5-62 5.5 Left panel display 5 5.5.1 Job List From the Job List screen, lists of jobs being performed by this machine and the jobs that have been performed in addition to the job details can be viewed, and the job settings can be changed. 0 If user authentication settings have been applied and the machine is set so that jobs cannot be deleted by other users, the job is not deleted. 0 If an Administrator Settings parameter was set so that the output priority of jobs cannot be changed, [Increase Priority] does not appear and the output priority of the jobs cannot be specified. 0 When there is a job being printed, another job can be registered. Up to 251 jobs can be registered in total. 0 If the authentication method is changed in Administrator Settings and all management data is cleared, the jobs in the [Job History] are deleted. % Press [Job List] ö [Job Details] ö [Print]. Settings Print Opens the screen for checking print jobs. Send Opens the screen for checking fax and scan transmission jobs. For details, refer to the "User's Guide [Network Scan/Fax/Network Fax Operations]". Receive Opens the screen for checking fax reception jobs. For details, refer to the "User's Guide [Network Scan/Fax/Network Fax Operations]". Save Opens the screen for saving jobs. For details, refer to the "User's Guide [Box Operations]".bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 5-63 5.5 Left panel display 5 Current Jobs Lists the jobs currently processed. Check the current status. Delete Deletes a job. Increase Priority (Displayed for the list of print jobs in process) The currently processed print job is interrupted and printing of the job given priority begins. Printing of the interrupted job is automatically restarted once printing for the job given priority is finished. If the currently processed print job cannot be interrupted because it contains Fold or Staple, the job given priority is executed after the currently processed print job has been completed. Release Held Job (Displayed for the list of print jobs in process) Select to switch to the held job list and change the settings of, print, or delete a held job. The held job list contains jobs that could not be printed because, for example, system auto reset was activated during the proof copy. • If desired, press [Change Settings] to change the copy settings. • For confirmation, press the [Proof Copy] key to print a copy from a stored job. Check Job Set. Check job settings for stored jobs, jobs being printed, jobs queued to be printed, and held jobs. Current Jobs Detail Check the status, results, error details, user name, queued time, completed time, number of original pages and number of copies for jobs in process. To delete the job, press [Delete] in the Detail screen. Job History Lists completed jobs. • This list includes jobs that failed because of an error. • You can check the job logs and results. • [Scanned Image] in the left panel displays the first page of the selected job with a thumbnail. To display thumbnails in [Scanned Image], set [Job History Thumbnail Display] in Administrator Settings to [ON]. For details, refer to page 7-51. Deleted Jobs Displays only jobs that were deleted before they were finished. Finished Jobs Displays only jobs that were completed normally. All Jobs Displays all jobs. Detail Check the status, results, error details, user name, queued time, completed time, number of original pages and number of copies for jobs in the Job History list. Settingsbizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 5-64 5.5 Left panel display 5 5.5.2 Check Job From the Check Job Settings screens, the current copy settings can be checked and changed if desired. 1 Press [Check Job] ö [Check Details]. 2 Check the copy settings. To change the copy settings, press the relevant button. 3 After checking the settings, press [Close].6 User Settingsbizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 6-2 6 6 User Settings User Settings are for setting items that a user can adjust as appropriate. The contents of these setting items depend upon how the Administrator settings are configured. User Settings cannot be initialized all at once. To initialize all settings, either manually reset them one by one or contact your service representative. Settings System Settings Configure the basic functions of this machine. Custom Display Settings Change the touch panel display to the convenience of the user. Copier Settings Configure the settings for copy functions to be used in copy operations. Scan/Fax Settings Configure setting for fax and scan operations. Printer Settings Configure setting is for the printer operations. Change Password Change the password for the user who is currently logged in. Change E-Mail Address Change the E-mail addresses specified for registered users. Change Icon Change the icons specified for registered users. Register Authentication Information Register or delete the biometric authentication information or IC card authentication information of the current login user. Cellular Phone/PDA Setting Configure settings to print data from a cellular phone or PDA.bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 6-3 6.1 System Settings 6 6.1 System Settings Configure the basic functions of this machine. % Press the [Utility/Counter] key ö [User Settings] ö [System Settings]. Settings Language Selection Select the language for display in the touch panel. Measurement Unit Settings Select the units for the values displayed in the touch panel. Paper Tray Settings Auto Tray Selection Settings Select the trays to be selected automatically when the Auto Paper Select function is enabled. Also configure the priority for the auto tray switch operation to switch paper trays when it is enabled. • Configure "Auto Paper Selection Setting" to use paper types other than plain paper as plain paper in a regular auto paper selection mode. Auto Tray Switch ON/OFF Select whether a paper tray loaded with paper of the same size is selected automatically when a paper tray that was selected manually becomes empty while printing copies. No Matching Paper in Tray Setting Specify the action to be taken when the matching paper is not loaded into the specified paper tray. • [Stop Printing (Tray Fixed)] Printing stops. • [Switch Trays (Tray Priority)] Whether the matching paper is loaded into the specified paper tray is determined first. And if not, another tray that has the matching paper loaded (if any) is selected. Print Lists Select the paper tray used for printing lists, such as the sales counter and consumables indicators. Also select whether to print lists in 1-Sided or 2- Sided mode. Post Inserter Settings Specify the paper tray, paper type, or paper size when using the Post Inserter. This button appears only when the Post Inserter is installed. Auto Color Level Adjust. Adjust the reference level for detecting a color or black-and-white original when the Auto Color setting is selected. Power Save Settings Refer to page 7-3. Appears when user access is permitted under Administrator settings. Output Settings Refer to page 7-4. AE Level Adjustment Refer to page 7-9.bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 6-4 6.1 System Settings 6 Auto Paper Select for Small Original Specify the paper size to be used for a case where the document placed on the original glass is too small to be detected in Auto Paper mode. Copy on Small Size Prints on 5-1/2 e 8-1/2 (A5) paper. • If 5-1/2 e 8-1/2 (A5) paper is not loaded in the tray, a message that instructs you to load 5- 1/2 e 8-1/2 (A5) paper in the bypass tray appears. Copy on Letter (Copy on A4) Prints on 8-1/2 e 11 (A4) paper. Prohibit Copy Starts printing when a paper tray is selected manually and the [Start] key is pressed. Blank Page Print Settings Appears when user access is permitted under Administrator settings. For details, refer to page 7-26. Page Number Print Position Specify a page number print position when printing page numbers after configuring 2-sided print or booklet settings. Select whether to print the page numbers on a same position on all pages or on positions symmetric with respect to the stapling position. Select Keyboard Select the keyboard type displayed by default in the touch panel. Factory default Language Selection English Measurement Unit Settings This value varies depending on the area. Auto Tray Selection Settings Tray Priority Tray 1 ö Tray 2 ö Tray 3 ö Tray 4 ö LCT LCT is displayed when the optional LCT is installed. Auto Tray Switch ON/OFF Restrict No Matching Paper in Tray Setting Stop Printing (Tray Fixed) Print Lists • Tray 1 • 1-Sided Post Inserter Settings Paper Tray: F1 Paper Type: Plain Paper Paper size: Auto Detect Paper Type Plain paper Paper Size Auto Detect Auto Color Level Adjust. Standard (3) Low Power Mode Settings 15 min. Sleep Mode Settings 30 min. Print/Fax Output Settings Print: Page Print Fax: Batch Print Output Tray Settings • Copy: Tray 2 • Print: Tray 2 • Print Reports: Tray 1 • Fax: Tray 1 [Output Tray] is displayed when the Finisher FS-526, Finisher FS-527, or Job Separator JS-504 is installed. [Tray 3] is displayed if the Job Separator JS-603 is installed in the Finisher FS-527. AE Level Adjustment Standard (2) Auto Paper Select for Small Original Prohibit Copy Blank Page Print Settings Do Not Print Page Number Print Position Left & Right Bind: All the Same Top & Bottom Bind: All the Same Settingsbizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 6-5 6.1 System Settings 6 dReference To enable Auto Paper: Press [Basic] ö [Paper] ö [Auto Paper]. To enable Auto Color: Press [Basic] ö [Color] ö [Auto Color]. To configure Background Removal to Auto: Press [Quality/Density] ö [Background Removal] ö [Auto]. Select Keyboard Local Keyboard Factory defaultbizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 6-6 6.2 Custom Display Settings 6 6.2 Custom Display Settings Change the touch panel display to the convenience of the user. % Press the [Utility/Counter] key ö [User Settings] ö [Custom Display Settings]. Settings Copier Settings Default Tab Select either the standard Basic tab or the Quick Copy tab as the basic settings screen in Copy mode. Shortcut Key 1 Allocate shortcut keys for frequently used Application functions to be added to the basic settings screen. Pressing a shortcut key displays the desired setting screen. • When the optional image controller is installed, only one shortcut key can be enabled. Shortcut Key 2 Quick Settings 1 Allows you to register setting conditions for frequently used copy functions and place them on the basic settings screen. The registered setting condition can be invoked by only pressing the corresponding easy setting key. Quick Settings 2 Quick Settings 3 Quick Settings 4 Default Tab Density Settings Specify whether to display the copy density setting in the basic settings screen. If [ON] is selected, you can press [Dark] or [Light] in the basic settings screen to adjust the copy density. • If [ON] is selected, [Quick Settings 3] and [Quick Settings 4] cannot be specified. Scan/Fax Settings This setting is for the network scan, fax, and network fax operations. For details, refer to the "User's Guide [Network Scan/Fax/Network Fax Operations]". User Box Settings Configure settings for the User Box operations. For details, refer to the "User's Guide [Box Operations]". Copy Screen Configure whether to display the [Next Box Job], [Next Scan/Fax Job], or [Next Copy Job] button or messages when you program the next job during the printing operation. FAX Active Screen This setting is for the fax and network fax operations. For details, refer to the "User's Guide [Network Scan/Fax/Network Fax Operations]". Color Selection Settings Select the color used for indicating that the button is selected. Left Pane Display Default Left Panel Display Default Configure whether to display a list of jobs in process and in queue or to display the contents of the current Copy settings as the default display of the left panel. Job Display Setting Configure whether to display a list of jobs in process and in queue or to display the progress of the current job in process, when the default display of the left panel set to "Job List".bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 6-7 6.2 Custom Display Settings 6 Search Option Settings This setting is for the network scan, fax, and network fax operations. For details, refer to the "User's Guide [Network Scan/Fax/Network Fax Operations]". Factory default Default Tab Basic Shortcut Key 1/Shortcut Key 2/Quick settings 1/Quick settings 2/Quick settings 3/Quick settings 4 OFF Default Tab Density Settings OFF Default Tab (Fax/Scan Settings) Address Book Program Default (Fax/Scan Settings) PAGE1 Address Book Index Default (Fax/Scan Settings) Favorites Shortcut Key 1/Shortcut Key 2 (Fax/Scan Settings) OFF Default Address Book (Fax/Scan Settings) Index Default Address Type (Fax/Scan Settings) Group Default Tab (User Box Settings) Public Shortcut Key 1/Shortcut Key 2 (User Box Settings) OFF Copy Operating Screen No Color Selection Settings Green Left Panel Display Default Job List Job Display Setting List Display Uppercase and lowercase letters Differentiate Search Option Screen OFF Settingsbizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 6-8 6.3 Copier Settings 6 6.3 Copier Settings Configure the settings used by the copy functions. % Press the [Utility/Counter] key ö [User Settings] ö [Copier Settings]. Settings Auto Booklet ON when Fold & Staple Configure whether to automatically specify Booklet when Center Staple and Fold is selected. This item is displayed if the saddle stitcher is installed in the finisher. Auto Zoom for Combine/Booklet Configure whether the preset zoom ratios are automatically selected when Combine or Booklet is selected in Auto Paper mode. • Select the recommended zoom ratios for the following zoom settings: 2 in 1, Booklet: 64.7% (70.7%) 4 in 1: 50.0% 8 in 1: 32.3% (35.3%) Auto Sort/Group Selection Configure whether to output the copied pages automatically in Sort mode when copying multiple-page original using the ADF. Default Copy Settings Configure the initial values for the Copy function to be displayed when the power in turned on or the [Reset] key is pressed. Current Setting The current settings are used as the default settings. Factory Default The factory settings are used as the default settings. Default Enlarge Display Settings This setting is for the enlarged display screen operations. For details, refer to the "User's Guide [Enlarge Display Operations]". When AMS Direction is Incorrect Configure whether to print or discard the job when the original orientation does not match that of paper in Auto Zoom mode. Separate Scan Output Method Configure the output for divided original loaded in the ADF or for multiple pages of the original scanned on the original glass. Page Print Printing of copies that can be printed begins while the original is being scanned. Batch Print Printing begins after all pages of the original have been scanned. Enlargement Rotation Configure whether to rotate and print a large-size original image when the original orientation does not match that of paper. Auto Zoom (Platen) Appears when user access is permitted under Administrator settings. For details, refer to page 7-43. Auto Zoom (ADF) Specify Default Tray when APS Off Select Tray for Insert Sheet Tri-Fold Print Side This item is displayed when user access is allowed in Administrator settings while the Finisher FS-526 is installed. For details, refer to page 7-43.bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 6-9 6.3 Copier Settings 6 Half-Fold/Tri-Fold Specification Specify whether to apply Half-Fold/Tri-Fold for all pages together or for specific pages when handling a job containing multiple pages. When Booklet is selected simultaneously with Half-Fold, all pages are halffolded together even if [One Sheet at a Time] is selected. If the number of original pages exceeds the folding capacity of this machine, the "Fold" function setting is cancelled automatically, and the sheets are printed without being folded. This item is displayed if the Saddle Stitcher SD-508 is installed in the Finisher FS-526. To change the folding capacity, contact your service representative. Half-folding capacity setting: 1-3 (default:3) Tri-folding capacity setting: 1-3 (default:1) Half-Fold Specification Specify whether to apply Half-Fold together for all pages or for each page when handling a job containing multiple pages. When Booklet is selected simultaneously with Half-Fold, all pages are halffolded together even if [One Sheet at a Time] is selected. If the number of original pages exceeds the folding capacity of this machine, the "Fold" function setting is cancelled automatically, and the sheets are printed without being folded. This item is displayed if the Saddle Stitcher SD-509 is installed in the Finisher FS-527. To change the folding capacity, contact your service representative. Half-folding capacity setting: 1-3 (default:3) Print Jobs During Copy Operation Appears when user access is permitted under Administrator settings. For details, refer to page 7-43. Automatic Image Rotation Finishing Program Configure whether to display the Finishing Program button in the basic settings screen. To display the button, register the contents of the finishing program. Register frequently used finishing functions so that you can set them at once by using the button that appears in the basic settings screen. This item is set if the finisher is installed. Card Shot Settings Appears when user access is permitted under Administrator settings. For details, refer to page 7-43. Factory default Auto Booklet ON when Fold & Staple Auto Select Booklet Auto Zoom for Combine/Booklet Auto Display Zoom Ratio Auto Sort/Group Selection Yes Default Copy Settings Factory Default When AMS Direction is Incorrect Print Separate Scan Output Method Page Print Enlargement Rotation Allow Auto Zoom (Platen) OFF Auto Zoom (ADF) ON Specify Default Tray when APS Off Tray Before APS ON Select Tray for Insert Sheet Tray 2 Tri-Fold Print Side Inside Half-Fold/Tri-Fold Specification Multiple Sheets Half-Fold Specification Multiple Sheets Settingsbizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 6-10 6.3 Copier Settings 6 Print Jobs During Copy Operation Accept Automatic Image Rotation When Auto Paper/Auto Zoom Is Set Finishing Program ON Card Shot Layout: Top/Bottom Zoom: Full Size Store Original Size: X: 3-1/2 inch (89.0 mm) Y: 21 inch (51.0 mm) Factory defaultbizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 6-11 6.4 Fax/Scan Settings 6 6.4 Fax/Scan Settings This setting is for the network scan, fax, and network fax operations. For details, refer to the "User's Guide [Network Scan/Fax/Network Fax Operations]".bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 6-12 6.5 Printer Settings 6 6.5 Printer Settings This setting is for the printer operations. For details, refer to the "User's Guide [Print Operations]".bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 6-13 6.6 Change Password 6 6.6 Change Password Change the password for the user who is currently logged in. 0 A public user cannot use this function. 1 Press the [Utility/Counter] key ö [User Settings] ö [Change Password]. 2 Enter the previous password, and then press [OK]. 3 Enter a new password. 4 Press [Password Confirmation], and then enter the new password again. 5 Press [OK]. The new password is registered.bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 6-14 6.7 Change E-Mail Address 6 6.7 Change E-Mail Address Change the E-mail addresses specified as registered user information. 0 When logged in as a registered user, you can change the E-mail address. 0 Appears when user access is permitted under Administrator settings. For details, refer to page 7-50. 1 Press the [Utility/Counter] key ö [User Settings] ö [Change E-Mail Address]. 2 Press [E-mail Address]. 3 Change the E-mail address. 4 Press [OK].bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 6-15 6.8 Change Icon 6 6.8 Change Icon Change the icon specified as registered user information. 0 When logged in as a registered user, you can change the E-mail address. 1 Press the [Utility/Counter] key ö [User Settings] ö [Change Icon]. 2 Select the icon and press [OK].bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 6-16 6.9 Register Authentication Information 6 6.9 Register Authentication Information Register or delete the biometric authentication information or IC card authentication information about the registered users. You can register or delete authentication information when performing the following operations. 0 Select [Utility/Counter] ö [Administrator Settings] ö [System Settings] ö [Restrict User Access] ö [Restrict Access to Job Settings] ö [Biometric/IC Card Info. Registration] ö [Allow]. 0 Select [Utility/Counter] ö [Administrator Settings] ö [User Authentication/Account Track] ö [User Authentication Settings] ö [User Registration] ö [Function Permission] ö [Biometric/IC Card Info. Registration] ö [Allow]. 0 Log in as a registered user. 1 Select Utility/Counter ö [User Settings] ö [Register Authentication Settings]. 2 Press [Edit]. To delete authentication information, press [Delete]. For biometric authentication For IC card authenticationbizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 6-17 6.9 Register Authentication Information 6 3 Register authentication information. For biometric authentication, place your finger on the Authentication Unit to scan the finger vein pattern. Scan the finger vein pattern three times; reset the same finger each time and then press [Scan] for each scanning. After scanning the finger vein patterns, place the same finger on the authentication unit, and press [Authentication Test]. If your finger vein patterns have been authenticated in the authentication test, press [Register]. If authentication has failed, retry scanning the finger. For IC card authentication, place your IC card on the Authentication Unit, and press [OK]. 4 Press [Close].bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 6-18 6.10 Cellular Phone/PDA Setting 6 6.10 Cellular Phone/PDA Setting Configure settings to print data in a cellular phone or PDA through this machine. For details, refer to the "User's Guide Box Operations" and "User's Guide Print Operations".7 Administrator Settingsbizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 7-2 7 7 Administrator Settings Administrator Settings are used only by the administrator to adjust the settings. Logging on to Administrator Settings requires the administrator password. Settings System Settings Configure the basic functions of this machine. Administrator/Machine Settings Register administrator information and E-mail address of this machine. One-Touch/User Box Registration Configure settings for the User Box, network scan, fax, and network fax operations. User Authentication/Account Track Configure the authentication settings to restrict the functions of this machine. Network Settings Configure settings for the software, cellular phone, or PDA that can be accessed with this machine. Copier Settings Configure the settings for copy functions to be used in copy operations. Printer Settings Configure settings for the print operations. Fax Settings Configure settings for the fax and network fax operations. System Connection Configure network settings. Security Settings Configure settings to restrict the functions of this machine for processing secret data. License Settings Enable an optional i-Option function. OpenAPI Authentication Management Settings Configure settings to prevent our deprecated OpenAPI connection application from being registered in this machine.bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 7-3 7.1 System Settings 7 7.1 System Settings Configure the basic functions of this machine. 7.1.1 Power Save Settings Configure the settings for the power-saving mode. % Press the [Utility/Counter] key ö [Administrator Settings] ö [System Settings] ö [Power Save Settings]. Settings Low Power Mode Settings Enter a time period before switching to the lower power mode when this machine is not being operated. Sleep Mode Settings Enter a time period before switching to the sleep mode when this machine is not being operated. Power Save Key Configure the type of the power save function to be started when you press the [Power Save] key. Low Power Provides power-saving effect higher than normal. Sleep Although this machine conserves more energy in the sleep mode than in the power save mode, the machine must warm-up when the sleep mode is canceled, therefore taking more preparation time than the power save mode. Enter Power Save Mode Configure settings for switching to the power save mode after printing documents from computers or receiving faxes. Normal Enters the power save mode when the time specified in Low Power Mode Settings has elapsed. Immediately Enters the power save mode in a short time. Factory default Low Power Mode Settings 15 minutes Sleep Mode Settings 30 minutes Power Save Key Lower Enter Power Save Mode Immediatelybizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 7-4 7.1 System Settings 7 7.1.2 Output Settings Configure the settings for the output functions. % Press the [Utility/Counter] key ö [Administrator Settings] ö [System Settings] ö [Output Settings]. Settings Print/Fax Output Settings This setting is for the print and fax operations. For details, refer to the "User's Guide [Network Scan/Fax/Network Fax Operations]" and " User's Guide [Print Operations]". Output Tray Settings Configure an output tray given priority for outputting by function. This item is displayed when the Finisher or Job Separator JS-504 is installed. Shift Output Each Job Select whether to shift the output paper for each job. This item is displayed when the Finisher or Job Separator JS-504 is installed. Factory default Print/Fax Output Settings Print: Page Print Fax: Batch Print Output Tray Settings • Copy: Tray 2 • Print: Tray 2 • Print Reports: Tray 1 • Fax: Tray 1 [Tray 3] is displayed when the Job Separator JS-603 is installed in the Finisher FS-527. Shift Output Each Job Yesbizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 7-5 7.1 System Settings 7 7.1.3 Date/Time Settings Configure the current date and time and the time zone. % Press the [Utility/Counter] key ö [Administrator Settings] ö [System Settings] ö [Date/Time Settings]. dReference To cancel the current settings: Press the [C] key. Settings Year Configure the current date and time. Monthly Daily Hour Minute Time Zone Configure the UTC (Coordinate Universal Time) related time zone. Factory default Time Zone +00:00bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 7-6 7.1 System Settings 7 7.1.4 Daylight Saving Time Configure daylight saving time settings. 0 This function is available when this machine is connected to the network where UTC (Coordinate Universal Time) is specified. For details, refer to the "User's Guide [Network Administrator]". % Press the [Utility/Counter] key ö [Administrator Settings] ö [System Settings] ö [Daylight Saving Time]. Settings Configure whether to use daylight saving time and the time difference from UTC (Coordinate Universal Time). Factory default Daylight Saving Time Nobizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 7-7 7.1 System Settings 7 7.1.5 Weekly Timer Setting Configure the weekly timer in order to allow you to turn on and off this machine at the specified date and time. 0 An exact date/time setting must be performed in advance. % Press the [Utility/Counter] key ö [Administrator Settings] ö [System Settings] ö [Weekly Timer Settings]. Settings Weekly Timer ON/OFF Settings Configure whether to use the weekly timer function. Time Settings Configure the time of each day of the week to turn on and off this machine. Set All The setting for the selected day of the week is applied to the same day of the week in other weeks. Delete Cancels the selected input value. Date Settings Configure the days when timer operation is activated individually. To cancel the setting, press the same day again. Daily Setting Configure the days of the week when the timer operation is activated. Select Time for Power Save Configure the time to turn this machine off and on if you want to turn it off at a specific time, for example, during a lunch break. Password for Non- Business Hours Configure whether to require a user to enter the password if the user uses this machine outside the specified time. • To make the user to enter the password, you need to specify the password. Factory default Weekly Timer ON/OFF Settings OFF Select Time for Power Save No Password for Non-Business Hours Nobizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 7-8 7.1 System Settings 7 7.1.6 Restrict User Access Restrict the machine operation, or change or delete the copy programs by the user. % Press the [Utility/Counter] key ö [Administrator Settings] ö [System Settings] ö [Restrict User Access]. Settings Copy Program Lock Settings Configure the registered copy programs that are prevented from being changed or deleted. Delete Saved Copy Program Delete the registered copy programs. Restrict Access to Job Settings Configure whether to allow users to configure the following settings. Changing Job Priority Configure whether to allow users to change the print priority of jobs. Delete Other User Jobs Configure whether to allow other users to delete jobs when the user authentication settings have been specified. Registering and Changing Addresses This setting is for the network scan, fax, and network fax operations. For details, refer to the "User's Guide [Network Scan/Fax/Network Fax Operations]". Changing Zoom Ratio Configure whether to allow users to change registered zoom ratios. Changing the "From" Address This setting is for the network scan operations. For details, refer to the "User's Guide [Network Scan/Fax/Network Fax Operations]". Change Registered Overlay Configure whether to allow users to change registered image overlays. Biometric/IC Card Info. Registration Configure whether to allow a registered user to register or delete biometric authentication information or IC card authentication information of the user. Restrict Operation Restrict Broadcasting This setting is for the network scan, fax, and network fax operations. For details, refer to the "User's Guide [Network Scan/Fax/Network Fax Operations]". Factory default Changing Job Priority Allow Delete Other User Jobs Restrict Registering and Changing Addresses Allow Changing Zoom Ratio Allowbizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 7-9 7.1 System Settings 7 7.1.7 Expert Adjustment Make adjustments so that output quality is increased. % Press the [Utility/Counter] key ö [Administrator Settings] ö [System Settings] ö [Expert Adjustment]. Changing the "From" Address Restrict Change Registered Overlay Allow Biometric/IC card Information Registration Restrict Restrict Broadcasting OFF Factory default Settings AE Level Adjustment Configure the initial value for AE (auto exposure). The higher the setting, the more that the original background is emphasized. Printer Adjustment Adjust the starting print position and defective print images caused by paper type features. dReference The starting print position is factory-adjusted. Normally, you are not required to change the set values. Leading Edge Adjustment p. 7-13 Centering p. 7-13 Leading Edge Adjustment (Duplex Side 2) p. 7-13 Centering (Duplex 2nd Side) p. 7-13 Erase Leading Edge Adjust leading edge erase width. For details on displaying this item, contact your service representative. Vertical Adjustment Adjust the feed direction zoom ratio of paper types. For details on displaying this item, contact your service representative. Media Adjustment p. 7-14bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 7-10 7.1 System Settings 7 Finisher Adjustment Adjust the staple, folding, and punch position of the finisher. This button appears only when the finisher is installed. dReference Create a sample in advance, and then adjust them while checking the sample. Center Staple Position p. 7-14 Half-Fold Position p. 7-15 Tri-Fold Position Adjustment p. 7-15 (This item is displayed when the Finisher FS-526 and Saddle Stitcher SD- 508 are installed.) Punch Vertical Position Adjustment p. 7-16 (This item is displayed when the Finisher FS-526 and Punch Kit PK-516 are installed.) Punch Horizontal Position Adjustment p. 7-16 Punch Regist Loop Size Adjustment p. 7-17 Punch Edge Sensor Adjustment p. 7-17 (This item is displayed when the Finisher FS-526 and Punch Kit PK-516 are installed.) Vertical Punch (Z-Fold) Position Adjustment p. 7-17 (This item is displayed when Z Folding Unit is installed.) Horizontal Punch (Z-Fold) Position Adjustment p. 7-18 (This item is displayed when Z Folding Unit is installed.) 1st Z-Fold Position Adjustment p. 7-18 (This item is displayed when Z Folding Unit is installed.) 2nd Z-Fold Position Adjustment p. 7-19 (This item is displayed when Z Folding Unit is installed.) Punch Unit Size Detect Sensor p. 7-19 (This item is displayed when Z Folding Unit is installed.) Post Inserter Tray Size Adjustment Adjust the paper size to be used in the Post Inserter. You can specify different paper sizes for the upper and lower trays. This button appears when the Post Inserter PI-505 is installed. Density Adjustment Correct the toner amount to be used by color depending on the paper type. • To correct the toner amount to be used in the black print mode, press [Black Image Density]. Image Stabilization Image Stabilization Only Press the [Start] key to stabilize images. Pressing the [Image Stabilization Only] button executes normal image stabilization. If a good result was not achieved after the [Image Stabilization Only] button was pressed, execute [Initialize + Image Stabilization]. Settingsbizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 7-11 7.1 System Settings 7 Image Stabilization Setting Specify the type and opportunity of image stabilization. If [Standard] is selected, normal stabilization is performed during warm-up processing when a change in the absolute humidity has been detected during warm-up processing. If [Color Priority] is selected, color stabilization is performed when the power has been turned on. Selecting [Black & White Priority] executes monochrome stabilization during warm-up when absolute humidity change is detected during the warmup, and then stabilizes color before performing color print. Paper Separation Adjustment Adjust the paper position where the two sides are separated for 2-sided print. Color Registration Adjust Correct color shifts if they are detected in the print result. For details, refer to page 7-20. Gradation Adjustment Adjust irregular gradation levels of print images. For details, refer to page 7-21. Image Stabilization Only Stabilize the image by pressing the [Start] key before performing gradation adjustment. Print Adjust the gradation when the color gradation has been changed in a print image. This function performs adjustment, emphasizing the gradation expression of an image and the reproducibility of texts or lines. Copy Adjust the gradation when the color gradation has been changed in a print image. This function performs adjustment to save as many images as possible in memory. Scanner Area Adjust the scan range of the scanner. For details on displaying this item, contact your service representative. ADF Adjustment Make adjustments for scanning images in the ADF. For details on displaying this item, contact your service representative. Line Detection Prior Detection Setting (bizhub C652/C552/C452) Configure whether to issue an alert when the slit glass is dirty. • Select an alert display format and contamination detection level. Prior Detection Setting (front) (bizhub C652DS/C552DS) Configure whether to issue an alert when the slit glass (front) is dirty. • Select an alert display format and contamination detection level. Prior Detection Setting (back) (bizhub C652DS/C552DS) Configure whether to issue an alert when the slit glass (back) is dirty. • Select an alert display format, contamination detection level and display timing. Feed Cleaning Settings Configure whether to remove a dirt on the slit glass each time one sheet of paper passes through the ADF when scanning an original using the ADF. Trail Edge Adjust Correct a shift if it is detected at the trailing edge of the print result. Place, 11 e 17 w, 8-1/2 e 11 v, A3 w, or A4 v on the bypass tray, and then press the [Start] key to print a test pattern. Settingsbizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 7-12 7.1 System Settings 7 User Paper Settings Configure special paper settings for User Paper 1 through 6. Settings to configure include Basic Weight and Media Adjustment. For details on displaying this item, contact your service representative. Erase Adjustment Non-Image Area Erase Operation Settings Configure Non-Image Area operation settings. [Auto]: Automatically detects the background density of the original, and selects either "Bevel" or "Rectangular" accordingly. [Specify]: Allows you to manually specify an erase method and original density. As an erase method, select "Bevel" or "Rectangular". Specify an original density from five levels. Factory default AE Level Adjustment Standard (2) Leading Edge Adjustment 0.0 mm Centering 0.0 mm Leading Edge Adjustment (Duplex Side 2) 0.0 mm Centering (Duplex 2nd Side) 0.0 mm Media Adjustment Auto Center Staple Position 0.0 mm Half-Fold Position 0.0 mm Tri-Fold Position Adjustment 0.0 mm Punch Vertical Position Adjustment 0.0 mm Punch Horizontal Position Adjustment 0.0 mm Punch Regist Loop Size Adjustment For Finisher FS-526 Finisher: 0.0 mm Finisher (for Z folding): 0.0 mm Post inserter feeder (Upper tray): 0.0 mm Post inserter feeder (Lower tray): 0.0 mm For Finisher FS-527: 0 Vertical Punch (Z-Fold) Position Adjustment 0.0 mm Horizontal Punch (Z-Fold) Position Adjustment 0.0 mm 1st Z-Fold Position Adjustment 0.0 mm 2nd Z-Fold Position Adjustment 0.0 mm Post Inserter Tray Size Adjustment Auto Detect Density Adjustment 0 Image Stabilization Only Image Stabilization Only Image Stabilization Setting Standard Paper Separation Adjustment 0.0 mm Settingsbizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 7-13 7.1 System Settings 7 Leading Edge Adjustment Adjust the starting print position at the leading edge of each type of paper (with respect to the paper feed direction). 1 Press the [Utility/Counter] key ö [Administrator Settings] ö [System Settings] ö [Expert Adjustment] ö [Printer Adjustment] ö [Leading Edge Adjustment]. % To adjust the starting print position at the leading edge of the second side for 2-sided printing (with respect to the paper feed direction), press [Leading Edge Adjustment (Duplex Side 2)]. 2 Select a paper type to be adjusted. 3 Load the paper into the bypass tray. 4 Press the [Start] key. A test pattern is printed. 5 Check that the distance from the starting print position of the test pattern to the edge of the paper (a) is 4.2 mm. % Press [+] or [-] to adjust the width. Press the [Start] key to print a test pattern. 6 Press [OK]. Centering Adjust the starting print position at the left edge of each paper tray (with respect to the paper feed direction). 0 Only 8-1/2 e 11 v (A4 v) paper can be used to adjust the bypass tray. 1 Press the [Utility/Counter] key ö [Administrator Settings] ö [System Settings] ö [Expert Adjustment] ö [Printer Adjustment] ö [Centering]. % To adjust the starting print position at the left edge of the second side for 2-sided printing (with respect to the paper feed direction), press [Centering (Duplex 2nd Side)]. 2 Select a paper tray to be adjusted. 3 Press the [Start] kay. A test pattern is printed. Color Registration Adjust 0 dot Prior Detection Setting Yes Warning Display: TYPE1 Detection Level: Std. Prior Detection Setting (front) Yes Warning Display: TYPE1 Detection Level: Std. Prior Detection Setting (back) Feed Cleaning Settings Remove Non-Image Area Erase Operation Settings Erase Operation: Specify Erase Method: Rectangular Original Density: 3 Factory default a a:4.2mmbizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 7-14 7.1 System Settings 7 4 Check that the distance from the starting print position of the test pattern to the left edge of the paper (b) is 3.0 mm (+/-0.5 mm). % Press [+] or [-] to adjust the width. Press the [Start] key to print a test pattern. 5 Press [OK]. Media Adjustment Adjust defective print images caused by paper type features. 1 Press the [Utility/Counter] key ö [Administrator Settings] ö [System Settings] ö [Expert Adjustment] ö [Printer Adjustment] ö [Media Adjustment]. 2 Select a paper type to be adjusted. % If defective images exist on the back side of 2-sided copy paper, select [2nd Side]. 3 Press [+] or [-] to specify an adjusted value. % If missing parts or white spots exist in print images, press [-]. If the surface of the print image is rough, press [+]. 4 Press [OK] ö [Close]. 5 Copy, and then check the print image. Center Staple Position Adjust the stapling position for each paper size when printing with the center staple function. 0 Adjust the half-fold position before adjusting the center stapling position. 0 Before making any adjustments, create a sample using the center staple function. Adjust the center staple position while checking the created sample. 0 It can be adjusted only when the saddle sticher is installed. 0 When stapling in parallel with the left edge of paper, contact your service representative. 1 Press the [Utility/Counter] key ö [Administrator Settings] ö [System Settings] ö [Expert Adjustment] ö [Finisher Adjustment] ö [Center Staple Position]. 2 Select the size of paper of which the center staple position is adjusted. 3 Press [+] or [-] to adjust the staple position while checking the sample. 4 Press [OK]. 5 Create a sample, and check the print result. b b:3.0mm±0.5mmbizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 7-15 7.1 System Settings 7 dReference To adjust the half-fold position: Press the [Utility/Counter] key ö [Administrator Settings] ö [System Settings] ö [Expert Adjustment] ö [Finisher Adjustment] ö [Half-Fold Position]. Half-Fold Position Adjust the center staple & fold and half-fold positions. 0 Before making any adjustments, create a sample using the half-fold function. Adjust the half-fold position while checking the created sample. 0 It can be adjusted only when the saddle sticher is installed. 0 When adjusting the half-fold position in parallel with the left edge of paper, contact your service representative. 1 Press the [Utility/Counter] key ö [Administrator Settings] ö [System Settings] ö [Expert Adjustment] ö [Finisher Adjustment] ö [Half-Fold Position]. 2 Select the size of paper of which half-fold position is adjusted. 3 Press [+] or [-] to adjust the punched hole position while checking the sample. 4 Press [OK]. 5 Create a sample, and check the print result. Tri-Fold Position Adjustment Adjust the folding position for each paper size when printing with the tri-fold function. The folding width depends on the paper size, which cannot be changed. 0 Before making any adjustments, create a sample using the tri-fold function. Adjust the tri-fold position while checking the created sample. 0 It can be adjusted when the Finisher FS-526 and Saddle Stitcher SD-508 are installed. 1 Press the [Utility/Counter] key ö [Administrator Settings] ö [System Settings] ö [Expert Adjustment] ö [Finisher Adjustment] ö [Tri-Fold Position Adjustment]. 2 Select the size of paper of which tri-fold position is adjusted. 3 Press [+] or [-] to adjust the tri-fold position while checking the sample. 4 Press [OK]. 5 Create a sample, and check the print result.bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 7-16 7.1 System Settings 7 Punch Vertical Position Adjustment Adjust the vertical position of the punched holes for each paper size. 0 Before making any adjustments, create a sample using the punch settings. Adjust the punched hole position while checking the created sample. 0 This adjustment is available if the Finisher FS-526 and Punch Kit PK-516 are installed. 1 Press the [Utility/Counter] key ö [Administrator Settings] ö [System Settings] ö [Expert Adjustment] ö [Finisher Adjustment] ö [Punch Vertical Position Adjustment]. 2 Select the paper size to adjust the vertical punch position. 3 Press [+] or [-] to adjust the punched hole position while checking the sample. 4 Press [OK]. 5 Create a sample, and check the print result. Punch Horizontal Position Adjustment Adjust the horizontal position of the punched holes. Adjust the horizontal position of the punched holes as appropriate for each installed option or paper type. 0 Before making any adjustments, create a sample using the punch settings. Adjust the punched hole position while checking the created sample. 0 The horizontal position of the punched holes can be adjusted as appropriate for each installed option if the finisher FS-526, punch kit PK-516, and post inserter are installed. 0 This adjustment is available for each paper type if the Finisher FS-527 and Punch Kit PK-517 are installed. 1 Press the [Utility/Counter] key ö [Administrator Settings] ö [System Settings] ö [Expert Adjustment] ö [Finisher Adjustment] ö [Punch Horizontal Position Adjustment]. % Select an option to adjust the horizontal position of the punched holes if the post inserter is installed. % First, select the paper type if the finisher FS-527 and punch kit PK-517 are installed. 2 Press [+] or [-] to adjust the punched hole position while checking the sample. 3 Press [OK]. 4 Create a sample, and check the print result.bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 7-17 7.1 System Settings 7 Punch Regist Loop Size Adjustment Correct the orientation of the paper and adjust the punched hole position to be parallel with the left edge of the paper. The punched hole array is corrected by adjusting the resistance applied to the paper for each paper type. 0 This adjustment is available if the punch kit is installed. 1 Press the [Utility/Counter] key ö [Administrator Settings] ö [System Settings] ö [Expert Adjustment] ö [Finisher Adjustment] ö [Punch Regist Loop Size Adjustment]. First select the option to adjust the inclination of punch holes when the Finisher FS-526 and Post Inserter PI-505 or Z Folding Unit ZU-606 are installed. 2 Select a paper type for which the punch hole angle is adjusted. 3 Press [+] or [-] to adjust the punched hole position. 4 Press [OK]. 5 Create a sample, and check the print result. Punch Edge Sensor Adjustment If the punch position is displaced depending on the paper tray, the punch kit is automatically adjusted. 0 This adjustment is available if the Finisher FS-526 and the Punch Kit PK-516 are installed. 1 Press the [Utility/Counter] key ö [Administrator Settings] ö [System Settings] ö [Expert Adjustment] ö [Finisher Adjustment] ö [Punch Edge Sensor Adjustment]. 2 Press the [Start] key. The punch edge sensor is automatically adjusted. The adjusted result appears. Vertical Punch (Z-Fold) Position Adjustment Adjust the vertical position of the punched holes for each paper size. 0 Before making any adjustments, create a sample using the punch settings. Adjust the center staple position while checking the created sample. 0 This adjustment is available if the Z Folding Unit is installed. 1 Select [Utility/Counter] ö [Administrator Settings] ö [System Settings] ö [Expert Adjustment] ö [Finisher Adjustment] ö [Vertical Punch (Z-Fold) Position Adjustment]. 2 Select the size of paper of which the vertical punched hole position is adjusted. 3 Press [+] or [-] to adjust the punched hole position while checking the sample. 4 Press [OK]. 5 Create a sample, and check the print result.bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 7-18 7.1 System Settings 7 Horizontal Punch (Z-Fold) Position Adjustment Adjust the horizontal position of the punched holes for each paper size. 0 Before making any adjustments, create a sample using the punch settings. Adjust the center staple position while checking the created sample. 0 This adjustment is available if the Z Folding Unit is installed. 1 Select [Utility/Counter] ö [Administrator Settings] ö [System Settings] ö [Expert Adjustment] ö [Finisher Adjustment] ö [Horizontal Punch (Z-Fold) Position Adjustment]. 2 Press [+] or [-] to adjust the punched hole position while checking the sample. 3 Press [OK]. 4 Create a sample, and check the print result. 1st Z-Fold Position Adjustment Adjust the first paper folding position for each paper size when using the Z-fold function. 0 Before making any adjustments, create a sample using the Z-fold function. Adjust the center staple position while checking the created sample. 0 This adjustment is available if the Z Folding Unit is installed. 1 Select [Utility/Counter] ö [Administrator Settings] ö [System Settings] ö [Expert Adjustment] ö [Finisher Adjustment] ö [1st Z-Fold Position Adjustment]. 2 While checking the sample, press [+] or [-] to adjust the first folding position. 3 Press [OK]. 4 Create a sample, and check the print result. 1st Z-Fold Positionbizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 7-19 7.1 System Settings 7 2nd Z-Fold Position Adjustment Adjust the second paper folding position for each paper size when using the Z-fold function. 0 Before making any adjustments, create a sample using the Z-fold function. Adjust the center staple position while checking the created sample. 0 This adjustment is available if the Z Folding Unit is installed. 1 Select [Utility/Counter] ö [Administrator Settings] ö [System Settings] ö [Expert Adjustment] ö [Finisher Adjustment] ö [2nd Z-Fold Position Adjustment]. 2 While checking the sample, press [+] or [-] to adjust the second folding position. % The distance between the left end of paper and the second Z-fold position must be 2 mm or more. 3 Press [OK]. 4 Create a sample, and check the print result. Punch Unit Size Detect Sensor If the punch position is displaced depending on the paper tray, the punch unit is automatically adjusted. 0 This adjustment is available if the Z Folding Unit or Punch Kit PK-516 is installed. 1 Select [Utility/Counter] ö [Administrator Settings] ö [System Settings] ö [Expert Adjustment] ö [Finisher Adjustment] ö [Punch Unit Size Detect Sensor]. 2 Press [Start]. % The punch unit edge sensor is automatically adjusted. % The adjusted result appears. 2nd Z-Fold Position 2 mm or morebizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 7-20 7.1 System Settings 7 Color Registration Adjust If color shifts are detected in the print result, adjust the each color print position for each paper type. 0 The procedure for adjusting the color registration is the same for yellow, magenta and cyan. 1 Press the [Utility/Counter] key ö [Administrator Settings] ö [System Settings] ö [Expert Adjustment] ö [Color Registration Adjust]. 2 Select a color to be corrected. 3 Select a paper type for which color registration is adjusted. 4 Load the paper into the bypass tray. % The loadable paper size is 11 e 17w, 8-1/2 e 11v, A3 w, or A4 v. 5 Press the [Start] key. A test pattern is printed. 6 Check that the black line aligns with the color line to be adjusted at the X and Y positions of the test pattern. % Press [+] or [-] to adjust the color line to be corrected while checking the sample. The color registration is adjusted. 7 Press the [Start] key to print a test pattern, and then check the print result. 8 Press [OK].bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 7-21 7.1 System Settings 7 Gradation Adjustment Adjust irregular gradation levels of print images. 0 Adjust each correction item three times. 1 Turn off the main power switch of this machine. 2 Wait at least 10 seconds, and then turn it on again. 3 Press the [Utility/Counter] key ö [Administrator Settings] ö [System Settings] ö [Expert Adjustment] ö [Gradation Adjustment]. 4 Press the [Start] key. The image stabilization operation starts. The correction items on the right of the touch panel become enabled. 5 Select an item to be corrected. 6 Select paper used to output a test pattern. % As a paper size, select 11 e 17w, 8-1/2 e 11v, A3w or A4 v. By default, 11 e 17 w (A3 w) is selected. % Paper in the bypass tray cannot be selected. 7 Press the [Start] key. A test pattern is printed. % Selecting 11 e 17w or A3w outputs one sheets, and selecting 8-1/2 e 11v or A4v outputs two sheets. 8 Place the printed test pattern on the original glass in orientation displayed in the touch panel. % For the test patterns of 8-1/2 e 11v or A4v, place the output two sheets side by side. 9 Place 10 or more sheets of blank paper on top of the test pattern to prevent it from becoming transparent. 10 Close the ADF. 11 Press the [Start] key. The test pattern is scanned. The gradation level is automatically adjusted. 12 Repeat steps 5 through 11 two more times.bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 7-22 7.1 System Settings 7 7.1.8 List/Counter Configure the job settings list print settings and paper count settings for this machine. % Press the [Utility/Counter] key ö [Administrator Settings] ö [System Settings] ö [List/Counter]. Settings Management List Job Settings List Configure paper tray settings for printing the job settings list and specify a print side. Paper Size/Type Counter Register a combination of paper size and paper type for a counter. Every time the counter is changed, the count is reset to 0. Counter Clear Resets the count to 0. Paper Size Select the paper size of the counter. Paper Type Select the paper type of the counter. Factory default Job Settings List • 1-Sided • Tray 1bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 7-23 7.1 System Settings 7 7.1.9 Reset Settings Configure auto reset settings. 0 All settings performed in the following tabs during operation using the copy function are automatically reset to the initial settings after the specified time has elapsed. Basic tab, Original Setting tab, Quality/Density tab, Application tab 0 Even if [OFF] is selected for System Auto Reset Time, the system auto reset function operates when this machine is not used for one minute during user authentication/account track operations. % Press the [Utility/Counter] key ö [Administrator Settings] ö [System Settings] ö [Reset Settings]. Settings System Auto Reset Priority Mode Configure a mode to be displayed in the system auto reset mode. System Auto Reset Time Configure whether to perform system auto reset. Specify a time until the initial screen appears if this machine is not operated. The specified time is not canceled. dReference If user authentication or enhanced security mode is enabled, the administrator settings mode or user authentication mode is logged off according to the setting for System Auto Reset Time. In the enlarge display mode, the system auto reset mode is disabled. Auto Reset Configure whether to perform auto reset in the selected mode. Specify a time until the basic settings screen appears and the settings are reset to the initial values if this machine is not operated. Job Reset When Account is changed Configure whether to reset the settings when you log off if the user authentication or account track settings have been configured. When original is set on ADF Configure whether to reset the settings when an original is loaded in the ADF. Next Job Configure whether to reset the following settings when the next job is selected. • Staple Setting • Original Set/Bind Direction • Reset Data After Job The destination of data is always reset.bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 7-24 7.1 System Settings 7 dReference To configure user authentication/account track: Press the [Utility/Counter] key ö [Administrator Settings] ö [User Authentication/Account Track] ö [General Settings]. 7.1.10 User Box Settings This setting is for the User Box functions. For details, refer to the "User's Guide [Box Operations]". 7.1.11 Standard Size Setting Configure settings relating to the capability for detecting original size and the foolscap paper sizes. For details on displaying this item, contact your service representative. % Press the [Utility/Counter] key ö [Administrator Settings] ö [System Settings] ö [Standard Size Setting]. Factory default Priority Mode Copy System Auto Reset Time 1 minute Auto Reset • Copy: 1 Minute • Scan/Fax: 1 Minute • User Box: 1 Minute When Account is changed Reset When original is set on ADF Do Not Reset Next Job • Staple Setting: OFF • Original Set/Bind Direction: OFF • Reset Data After Job: Reset All Settings Original Glass Original Size Detect Configure the capability for detecting original sizes. 8-1/2 e 14/Foolscap Size Detection European model (cm) only Specify whether to detect a size of 8-1/2 e 14 or a foolscap size. • This item may not be displayed on product sales areas. Foolscap Size Setting Select the size that you want to use when the paper size is close to 13 inches. bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 7-25 7.1 System Settings 7 7.1.12 Stamp Settings Configure header and footer settings to be printed. % Press the [Utility/Counter] key ö [Administrator Settings] ö [System Settings] ö [Stamp Settings]. Factory default Original Glass Original Size Detect Table 1 8-1/2 e 14 Foolscap Size Detection 8-1/2 e 14 Foolscap Size Setting 8 e 13 w Settings Header/Footer Settings Register or change a header and footer. To use the header/footer function in Application Setting, a header and footer must be registered in advance. New Enter a registration name, and then configure detailed header and footer settings. Configure whether to print a header and footer, and then configure print contents. • Text: Enter text. • Date/Time: Select a format to display the date and time. • Other: Specify the distribution control number. Select whether to include the Job Number, Serial Number, and Account/User Name. Configure pages and text details. • Pages: Select whether to print the header and footer on all pages or only on the first page. • Text Details: Select the color, size, and type of the text for the header and footer to be printed. Delete Deletes the selected header or footer. Check/Edit Change the selected header or footer. Fax TX Settings This setting is for the fax and network fax operations. For details, refer to the "User's Guide [Network Scan/Fax/Network Fax Operations]". Factory default FAX TX Settings Cancelbizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 7-26 7.1 System Settings 7 7.1.13 Blank Page Print Settings Configure whether to print stamps or overlay on blank pages. % Press the [Utility/Counter] key ö [Administrator Settings] ö [System Settings] ö [Blank Page Print Settings]. 7.1.14 Skip Job Operation Settings Configure whether to start processing for the next job when the current job stops due to running out of paper in the paper tray. Selecting "Yes" provides no print queue time due to job stopping. % Press the [Utility/Counter] key ö [Administrator Settings] ö [System Settings] ö [Skip Job Operation Settings]. Settings Configure whether to print stamp/composition on blank pages. Factory default Blank Page Print Settings Do Not Print Settings Fax Configure whether to skip a job in the fax mode. Other than Fax Configure whether to skip a job in a mode other than the fax mode. Factory default Skip Job Operation Settings Fax: Yes Other than Fax: Yesbizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 7-27 7.1 System Settings 7 7.1.15 Default Bypass Paper Type Setting Configure the initial settings for the paper type to be used for the bypass tray. The initial setting for the paper type is applied after the job finishes or the tray runs out of paper. % Press the [Utility/Counter] key ö [Administrator Settings] ö [System Settings] ö [Default Bypass Paper Type Setting]. 7.1.16 Advanced Preview Setting Configure settings to fax or scan a document. For details, refer to the "User's Guide [Network Scan/Fax/Network Fax Operations]". Settings Configure whether to specify the initial setting for paper type for the bypass tray. When you specified this, select a paper type. Factory default Default Bypass Paper Type Setting Yes Paper Type: Plain Paperbizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 7-28 7.1 System Settings 7 7.1.17 Page Number Print Position Specify a page number print position when printing page numbers after configuring 2-sided print or booklet settings. Select whether to print the page numbers on a same position on all pages or on positions symmetric with respect to the stapling position. % Press the [Utility/Counter] key ö [Administrator Settings] ö [System Settings] ö [Page Number Print Position]. Settings Left & Right Bind: All the Same Top & Bottom Bind: All the Same Select a desired print position. Left & Right Bind: Symmetrical Top & Bottom Bind: All the Same Left & Right Bind: Symmetrical Top & Bottom Bind: Symmetrical Factory default Page Number Print Position Left & Right Bind: All the Same Top & Bottom Bind: All the Samebizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 7-29 7.2 Administrator/Machine Settings 7 7.2 Administrator/Machine Settings Register administrator information and E-mail address of this machine. 0 The device name entered under the Input Machine Address may not be supported by your operating system. % Press the [Utility/Counter] key ö [Administrator Settings] ö [Administrator/Machine Setting]. Settings Administrator Registration Register administrator information displayed on the Service/Admin. Information screen of the Guidance screen and the From address for sending E-mail from this machine. Input Machine Address Register the device name and E-mail address of this machine. The device name is used as a part of the name of the file created on this machine. The E-mail address can be used for Internet fax. Factory default Device Name The default abbreviation is input for the product name. If necessary, it can be changed freely.bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 7-30 7.3 One-Touch/User Box Registration 7 7.3 One-Touch/User Box Registration This setting is for the User Box, network scan, fax, and network fax operations. For details, refer to the "User's Guide [Network Scan/Fax/Network Fax Operations]" and "User's Guide [Box Operations]".bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 7-31 7.4 User Authentication/Account Track 7 7.4 User Authentication/Account Track Configure the authentication settings to control the use of this machine. Type and functions of authentication - User Authentication Appropriate for controlling users. To allow unregistered users to use this machine, public user settings are required. – Restricts accessible functions. – Counts the number of outputting and scanning by user. – Limits on using color or black printing and on the number of copies that can be set by user. – Operates a Personal User Box for each user and group box. – Controls the access allowed level of the destination. – Prohibits jobs of other users from being deleted. - Account Track Appropriate for controlling groups or multiple users. – Counts the number of outputting and scanning by account. – Limits on using color or black printing and on the number of copies that can be set by account. – Operates the group box. Reference - Either user authentication or account track settings can be configured, or user authentication can be synchronized with account track. Settings can be configured for the both and used without being synchronized. - A total of 1,000 users and accounts can be registered. - To register more than 1,000, use PageScope Authentication Manager. You can register up to 30,000 users and accounts.bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 7-32 7.4 User Authentication/Account Track 7 7.4.1 General Settings Configure the settings for enabling the authentication functions. 0 Before registering a user, select an authentication method. If all management data is cleared after the authentication method was selected, the histories of the registered users, print, send, receive, and save jobs are deleted. % Press the [Utility/Counter] key ö [Administrator Settings] ö [User Authentication/Account Track] ö [General Settings]. Settings User Authentication Configure whether to use user authentication. OFF Disables user authentication. ON (External Server) Restricts users who can access this machine using the external authentication server. This setting is available when external authentication server settings are configured. ON (MFP) Restricts users who can access this machine using this machine. Public User Access Allows public user accesses when the enhanced security mode is disabled. Restrict Prohibits unregistered users from using this machine. ON (With Login) A public user can use this machine after pressing [Public user] in the Login screen to log in to this machine. ON (Without Login) A public user can use this machine without logging in to this machine in the Login screen. Account Track ON/OFF Configure whether to use the account track function. Account Track Input Method Select an authentication method when configuring account track settings. Account Name & Password Enter the account name and password to log in. Password Only Enter only the password to log in. • You cannot configure this when user authentication settings are configured.bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 7-33 7.4 User Authentication/Account Track 7 dReference To configure external server settings: Press the [Utility/Counter] key ö [Administrator Settings] ö [User Authentication/Account Track] ö [External Server Settings]. For details on enhanced security settings, contact your service representative. Synchronize User Authentication & Account Track Configure the authentication operation settings when both user authentication and account track settings are configured. Configure whether to automatically select the account assigned to the user during logging in. Synchronize Allows the user to log in to one account assigned to the user. The user who succeeded in user authentication can log in without account track authentication. dReference This function is appropriate for managing each user by account. Do Not Synchronize Allows the user to log in to some accounts. The user who succeeded in user authentication performs account track authentication to log in. When # of Jobs Reach Maximum Configure the action of this machine that is taken when the output count of the job reaches the limit specified for the user or account. Skip Job Stops the running job, and then automatically starts the next job. Stop Job Stops all jobs. Number of User Counters Assigned Configure how many of a total of 1,000 users and account registrations should be allowed for user registration at maximum. The remaining registration number is for accounts. When user authentication and account track settings are configured, the number of counters assigned for users can be specified. Ticket Hold Time Setting Enter a time to hold the Kerberos authentication tickets. The external server authentication settings are configured, and applied when Active Directory is selected as the authentication server type. Factory default User Authentication OFF Public User Access Restrict Account Track OFF Account Track Input Method Account Name & Password Synchronize User Authentication & Account Track Synchronize When # of Jobs Reach Maximum Skip Job Number of User Counters Assigned 500 Ticket Hold Time Setting 60 min. Settingsbizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 7-34 7.4 User Authentication/Account Track 7 7.4.2 User Authentication Settings Configure the user and user counter management settings. 0 When only user authentication settings are configured, User Authentication Setting are enabled. 0 If only user authentication settings are configured, up to 1,000 users can be registered. If user authentication and account track settings are configured, up to 500 users can be registered as initial settings. % Press the [Utility/Counter] key ö [Administrator Settings] ö [User Authentication/Account Track] ö [User Authentication Settings]. Settings Administrative Settings User Name List Configure whether to display a key to display a list of registered users in the Login screen. This item is enabled when the enhanced security settings are disabled. Default Function Permission Configure an initial value for function permission to users who are authenticated on the external server. ID & Print Settings Configure whether to use the ID & print function. Also configure whether to immediately print unauthenticated jobs or public user job or save it in the ID & Print User Box. ID & Print Operation Settings Configure whether to print all jobs using one authentication or print jobs one by one if multiple ID & print jobs are accumulated. Default Operation Selection In the Login screen for user authentication where ID and print jobs are stored, specify the default values for the operation to be carried out after authentication has been completed. When using this machine while the ID & print function is disabled, the user can select [Access] to log in to this machine without specifying the operation to be carried out after authentication. User Registration Register users who can access this machine. Select a desired registration number, and then press [Edit]. Settings for registered users can be changed. • Selecting a user and pressing [Delete] delete the selected user. • If public user access is allowed, functions available to public users can be restricted. To change the setting for public users, select the registration number "000". User Name Enter a user name. • Once a user name is registered, it cannot be changed. • A user name that has already been registered cannot be used again. Password Enter the password. E-Mail Address Enter an E-mail address.bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 7-35 7.4 User Authentication/Account Track 7 Account Name Specify the account track of the registered user when account track settings are configured, Before you select an account name, you must registered it. Output Permission Apply the following restrictions to the selected user or all users. • Print Configure whether to allow the user to copy and print in color and black, respectively. If black copy or print is restricted, print in black and white cannot be output. • Send Configure whether to allow the user to send fax and E-mail in color. dReference Single color and 2 color output settings can be changed by the administrator. For details, refer to page 7-41. Max. Allowance Set Configure the max. allowance for the selected user or all users. When not specifying it, select [No Limit]. • Total Allowance Specify the number of copies that can be output by the user. • Individual Allowance Specify the number of black copies and color copies that can be output by the user. Auth.-info.registrieren Press [Edit], and then register authentication information. This setting is available when the optional authentication unit is installed. Function Permission Restrict functions available to the selected user or all users. Specify whether to allow the following functions: • Copy • Scan • Fax • Print • User Box • Print Scan/Fax TX • Save to External Memory • External Memory Document Scan • Manual Destination Input (If [Allow] is selected, specify either to allow Manual Destination Input or manage the destination manually.) • Limited Color Print (Public user only) • Biometric/IC Card Regist. Info. • Mobile/PDA Pause Suspends the use of this machine for the selected user. [Stop Job] is selected, the specified user cannot log in to this machine. It is convenient to set suspend for users who do not use this machine temporarily or who have lost an IC card, instead of deleting them. • If [All Users] is selected, you can suspend the use of this machine for all the registered users. • If suspend is selected for a specific account, it is also suspended for users who belong to that account even if [Continue Job] is selected for this setting. Icon Select an icon. Settingsbizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 7-36 7.4 User Authentication/Account Track 7 dReference To specify the maximum number of registrations for the user: Press the [Utility/Counter] key ö [Administrator Settings] ö [User Authentication/Account Track] ö [General Settings] ö [Number of User Counters Assigned]. User Counter Reset All Counters Resets all counters for all users. Counter Details Shows the use status for the selected user. Press [Clear Counter] to reset the counter. • The public user counter is specified for the last page. Factory default User Name List OFF Default Function Permission Save to External Memory/External Memory Document Scan: Restrict Other items: Allow ID & Print Settings ID & Print: OFF (when the authentication unit is not installed) ON (when the authentication unit is installed) Public User: Print Immediately ID & Print Operation Settings Print All Jobs Default Operation Selection Begin Printing Output Permission All Items: Allow Max. Allowance Set Individual Allowance: Color No Limit/Black No Limit Total Allowance: No Limit Function Permission Copy: Allow Scan: Allow Fax: Allow Print: Allow User Box: Allow Print Scan/Fax TX: Allow External Memory Document Scan: Restrict Save to External Memory: Restrict Manual Destination Input: Allow/Allow All Limited Color Print: Restrict Biometric/IC Card Regist. Info.: Restrict Mobile/PDA: Allow Pause Continue Job Icon Settingsbizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 7-37 7.4 User Authentication/Account Track 7 7.4.3 Account Track Settings Configure the account and account counter management settings. 0 When only account track settings are configured, Account Track Settings is enabled. 0 If only account track settings are configured, up to 1,000 accounts can be registered. If user authentication and account track settings are configured, up to 500 accounts can be registered as initial settings. % Press the [Utility/Counter] key ö [Administrator Settings] ö [User Authentication/Account Track] ö [Account Track Settings]. Settings Account Track Registration • Select a desired registration number, press [Edit], and then register or change the account. • Select an account to be deleted, and the press [Delete]. Account name Specify the account name. • An account name that has already been registered cannot be used again. Password Enter the password. Output Permission Apply the following restrictions to the selected account or all accounts. • Print Specify whether to allow color or black copy or print output to the user of the account. If black copy or print is restricted, print in black and white cannot be output. • Send Specify whether to allow the account members to send fax or E-mail in color. dReference Single color and 2 color output settings can be changed by the administrator. For details, refer to page 7-41. Max. Allowance Set Configure the max. allowance for the selected account or all accounts. When not specifying it, select [No Limit]. • Total Allowance Configure the number of copies that can be output by a member of the account. • Individual Allowance Configure the number of black copies and color copies that can be output by a member of the account.bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 7-38 7.4 User Authentication/Account Track 7 dReference To specify the maximum number of registrations for the account: Press the [Utility/Counter] key ö [Administrator Settings] ö [User Authentication/Account Track] ö [General Settings] ö [Number of User Counters Assigned]. 7.4.4 Print without Authentication This setting is for the print operations. For details, refer to the "User's Guide [Print Operations]". 7.4.5 Print Counter List Select the paper tray and print format to be used for printing the counter list. 0 This function is enabled when user authentication or account track settings are configured. % Press the [Utility/Counter] key ö [Administrator Settings] ö [User Authentication/Account Track] ö [Print Counter List]. Pause Suspends the use of this machine for the selected account. If [Stop Job] is selected, the specified user cannot log in to this machine. It is convenient to set suspend for accounts that do not use this machine temporarily, instead of deleting them. • If [All Accounts] is selected, you can suspend the use of this machine for all registered accounts. • If [Stop Job] is selected, it is also suspended for users who are belong to the accounts. Account Track Counter Reset All Counters Resets all counters for all accounts. Counter Details Shows the use status for the selected account. Press [Clear Counter] to reset the counter. Factory default Output Permission All Items: Allow Max. Allowance Set Individual Allowance: Color No Limit/Black No Limit Total Allowance: No Limit Settings Settings Paper Tray Select the desired paper tray. Simplex/Duplex Select Print (1-Sided) or Print (2-Sided). Print Item Configure whether to print all data or printing data only.bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 7-39 7.4 User Authentication/Account Track 7 7.4.6 External Server Settings Configure the external server that performs user authentication. % Press the [Utility/Counter] key ö [Administrator Settings] ö [User Authentication/Account Track] ö [External Server Settings]. dReference For details on configuring external server settings, refer to the "User's Guide [Network Administrator]". 7.4.7 Limiting Access to Destinations This setting is for the network scan, fax, and network fax operations. For details, refer to the "User's Guide [Network Scan/Fax/Network Fax Operations]", "User's Guide [Network Administrator]". Factory default Print Counter List • Paper Tray: Tray 1 • Simplex/Duplex:1-Sided • Print Item: All Data Settings Select a number for the desired external server. You can also change the settings for the registered servers. New/Edit Server Name Enter the name of the external server. Server Type Configure an external server type, and then configure the settings for required items. Delete Delete the selected external server. Set as Default Configure an external server specified as the initial value. Select a desired server, and then press the [Set as Default] button.bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 7-40 7.4 User Authentication/Account Track 7 7.4.8 Authentication Device Settings Configure the authentication operations when the optional authentication unit is installed. 0 This setting is available when the optional authentication unit is installed. % Press the [Utility/Counter] key ö [Administrator Settings] ö [User Authentication/Account Track] ö [Authentication Device Settings]. Settings General Settings Card Authentication Displayed when the Authentication Unit (IC card type) AU-201 is installed. • IC Card Type Select the type of the IC card to be used in this machine. The FeliCa card ([FeliCa], [SSFC], [FCF], or [FCF (Campus)]) or Type A card ([Type A]) can be selected. If [FeliCa+Type A], [SSFC+Type A], [FCF+Type A], or [FCF (Campus)+ Type A] is selected, both the FeliCa and Type A cards can be used in this machine at the same time. If [SSFC] or [SSFC+Type A] is selected, specify [Company Code] or [Company Identification Code]. • Operation Settings Specify how to log in to this machine. [IC Card Authentication] allows the user to log in by simply placing the IC card. [Card Authentication + Password] allows the user to log in by placing the IC card and entering the password. Bio Authentication Displayed when Authentication Unit (biometric type) AU-101 or Authentication Unit (biometric type) AU-102 is installed. • Beep Sound Specify whether to output a beep when reading the finger vein pattern. • Operation Settings Specify how to log in to this machine. [1-tomany authentication] allows the user to log in by simply placing his or her finger on the authentication unit. [1-to-1 authentication] allows the user to log in by entering the user name and placing his or her finger on the authentication unit. Logoff Settings Configure whether to log out when scanning of the original finishes.bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 7-41 7.4 User Authentication/Account Track 7 7.4.9 User/Account Common Setting Configure the settings for the logout confirmation screen and settings for single color and 2 color output management if authentication settings have been configured. 0 This function is enabled if authentication function settings have been configured. % Press the [Utility/Counter] key ö [Administrator Settings] ö [User Authentication/Account Track] ö [User/Account Common Setting]. 7.4.10 Scan to Home Settings This setting is for the network scan operations. For details, refer to the "User's Guide [Network Scan/Fax/Network Fax Operations]""User's Guide [Network Administrator]". 7.4.11 Scan to Authorized Folder Settings This setting is for the network scan, fax, and network fax operations. For details, refer to the "User's Guide [Network Scan/Fax/Network Fax Operations]", "User's Guide [Network Administrator]". Settings Logout Confirmation Screen Display Setting Configure whether to display the logout confirmation screen when you press the [Access] key to log out. Single Color > 2 Color Output Management Configure whether to manage the output of single color or 2 color as color print or black print. When managing it as black print, even a user who is restricted from performing color print can perform single color or 2 color output. dReference For details on output permission for users, refer to page 7-34 or page 7-37. Factory default Logout Confirmation Screen Display Setting ON Single Color > 2 Color Output Management Colorbizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 7-42 7.5 Network Settings 7 7.5 Network Settings This setting is for the network operations. For details, refer to the "User's Guide [Network Administrator]".bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 7-43 7.6 Copier Settings 7 7.6 Copier Settings Configure the settings used by the copy functions. % Press the [Utility/Counter] key ö [Administrator Settings] ö [Copier Settings]. Settings Auto Zoom (Platen) Configure whether Auto Select is automatically selected when a paper tray is selected manually while an original is placed on the original glass. Auto Zoom (ADF) Configure whether Auto Select is automatically selected when a paper tray is selected manually while an original is placed in the ADF. Specify Default Tray when APS Off Configure which paper tray to be selected when the APS (Auto Paper) setting is canceled. Tray Before APS ON Uses the paper tray specified before the APS was selected. Default Tray Uses Tray 1. Select Tray for Insert Sheet Configure the default paper tray loaded with paper for the cover pages (front cover), inserted sheets and the chapter title pages. Print Jobs During Copy Operation Configure whether to accept print data or fax data while a copy operation is being performed. Accept Accepts print data or fax data to print. Receive Only Prints print data or fax data after the copy operation is finished. Tri-Fold Print Side Configure whether the printed side is on the inside or the outside when the page is folded in three. This function is enabled when the finisher FS-526 and Saddle Sticher SD- 508 are installed. Automatic Image Rotation When the original orientation is different from paper orientation, the image is rotated depending on the setting. Configure when the image is automatically rotated. Copy Card Settings Register card copy setting. If [Card Copy] is selected in [Application], the function can be invoked with the registered setting. Layout Specify where to place the front and back sides of a card. Zoom Specify to copy a card with the full size or enlarge an image to fit paper. Store Original Size Change and register the pre-specified original size or [Original Name]. Factory default Auto Zoom (Platen) OFF Auto Zoom (ADF) ONbizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 7-44 7.6 Copier Settings 7 Specify Default Tray when APS Off Tray Before APS ON Select Tray for Insert Sheet Tray 2 Print Jobs During Copy Operation Accept Tri-Fold Print Side Inside Automatic Image Rotation When Auto Paper/Auto Zoom is Set Card Shot Settings Layout: Top/Bottom Zoom: Full Size Factory defaultbizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 7-45 7.7 Printer Settings 7 7.7 Printer Settings This setting is for the print operations. For details, refer to the "User's Guide [Print Operations]".bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 7-46 7.8 Fax Settings 7 7.8 Fax Settings This setting is for the fax and network fax operations. For details, refer to the "User's Guide [Network Scan/Fax/Network Fax Operations]".bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 7-47 7.9 System Connection 7 7.9 System Connection Configure settings for software, cellular phone, or PDA that can be accessed with this machine. % [Utility/Counter] ö [Administrator Settings] ö [System Connection] Settings OpenAPI Settings Access Setting Specify whether to allow the user to access this machine from other system that is using OpenAPI. SSL/Port Settings SSL Setting To use SSL encryption, select [SSL Only] or [SSL/Non-SSL]. • If Enhanced Security Mode is enabled, [SSL Only] is enabled. Port No. Enter a port number. Port No. (SSL) Enter the port number to be used for SSL communication. Client Certificate Request Specify whether to enable a client certificate request. If you authenticate the client by requesting for its certificate (verification of client certificate), select [Enable]. Certificate Verification Level Settings To verify a certificate, configure settings to verify the certificate. [Validity Period]: Select whether to check that the target certificate is within the validity period. [Key Usage]: Select whether to check that the certificate key is being used properly.[Chain]: Select whether to check that the certificate chain (certification path) is correct. [Expiration Date Confirmation]: Select whether to check the target certificate for validation. [CN]: Select whether to check that the CN of the certificate matches the server address. Authentication Specify whether to authenticate an access from other system that is using OpenAPI. • To authenticate, enter the login name and password in [Login Name] and [Password] • When user authentication is performed or when acquiring the device information with the PageScope Authentication Manager, set the Authentication setting of the OpenAPI Setting screen of the machine to [OFF]. Automatic Prefix/Suffix Setting Select whether to automatically add prefix and suffix to a destination number. If [Automatic Prefix/Suffix Setting] is set to [ON], the other settings will be restricted. For details, refer to the "User's Guide [Network Administrator]".bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 7-48 7.9 System Connection 7 Printer Information Specify [Printer Name], [Printer Location], [Printer Information], and [Printer URI]. The [Printer Information] setting is linked to [Printer Information] in [HTTP Server Settings]. Cellular Phone/PDA Setting Specify whether to allow the user to print data in a cellular phone or PDA or save such data in a User Box. Factory default Access Setting Possible to combine SSL Setting Non-SSL Only Client Certificates Disable Validity Period Confirm Key Usage Do Not Confirm Chain Do Not Confirm Expiration Date Confirmation Do Not Confirm CN Do Not Confirm Authenticate OFF Automatic Prefix/Suffix Setting OFF Cellular Phone/PDA Setting Restrict Settingsbizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 7-49 7.10 Security Settings 7 7.10 Security Settings Configure the settings for the restricting the functions of this machine for processing secret data. 7.10.1 Administrator Password Change the administrator password. 0 The administrator password can be entered using 0 through 8 digits. 0 If password rules are specified, an 8-digit password must be entered. 0 If you enter an incorrect administrator password a configured number of times, you are prohibited from using this machine. In this case, contact your service representative. 1 Press the [Utility/Counter] key ö [Administrator Settings] ö [Security Settings] ö [Administrator Password]. 2 Enter the administrator password, and then press [OK]. 3 Enter a new administrator password. 4 Press [Password Confirmation], enter the administrator password again, and then press [OK]. 5 Press [OK]. The password is changed. dReference To configure password rule settings: Press the [Utility/Counter] key ö [Administrator Settings] ö [Security Settings] ö [Security Details] ö [Password Rules]. 7.10.2 User Box Administrator Setting Configure settings for the User Box operations. For details, refer to the "User's Guide [Box Operations]". Factory default Administrator Password 12345678bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 7-50 7.10 Security Settings 7 7.10.3 Administrator Security Levels Configure settings so that the user can change some of the settings accessible only to the administrator. Settings allowed to the user appear in User Settings. % Press the [Utility/Counter] key ö [Administrator Settings] ö [Security Settings] ö [Administrator Security Levels]. Settings Level 1 Allows the user to change the following settings. • Power Save Settings • Auto Zoom (Platen) • Auto Zoom (ADF) • Specify Default Tray when APS Off • Select Tray for Insert Sheet • Automatic Image Rotation • Card Shot Settings Level 2 Allows the user to change the following settings. • All settings allowed in Level 1 • Output Settings • AE Level Adjustment • Blank Page Print Settings • Change E-Mail Address • Print Jobs During Copy Operation Prohibit Does not allow the user to change the settings allowed in Level 1 and Level 2. Factory default Administrator Security Levels Prohibitbizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 7-51 7.10 Security Settings 7 7.10.4 Security Details Configure security detail settings to restrict the functions of this machine. You can restrict the functions to enhance security. % Press the [Utility/Counter] key ö [Administrator Settings] ö [Security Settings] ö [Security Details]. Settings Password Rules Configure whether to enable the password rules. When enabled, the restrictions are applied to the following passwords. The set passwords must be changed to ones that meet the conditions. • Administrator password • User password • Account password • User Box password • Security document password • Specify a password in 8 or more digits. • Uppercase and lowercase letters are differentiated. • Only half-width symbols can be used. For some of the passwords, specification of """, "+", and "space" is restricted. • A password that consists of a repetition of the same character cannot be specified. • The same password as one before being changed cannot be registered. Prohibited Functions When Authentication Error Configure restrictions on operation when you enter one of the following passwords incorrectly. • User password • Account password • User Box password • Security document password • Administrator password Mode 1 Disables operations for a specified time if authentication fails. Mode 2 Disables operations of the control panel if authentication fails. Specify the max. allowance for authentication operation frequency. Release Releases the prohibited operations due to failure in authentication, enabling the operations. Release Time Settings Configure the length of time until prohibited operations are automatically released.bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 7-52 7.10 Security Settings 7 Confidential Document Access Method Synchronizes with the settings for "Prohibited Functions When Authentication Error", automatically changes it. • Mode 1 Requires entering security document ID and password before selecting a security document from a User Box. • Mode 2 Performs authentication based on the password after you enter the security document ID and select a security document from a User Box. Manual Destination Input This setting is for the network scan, fax, and network fax operations. For details, refer to the "User's Guide [Network Scan/Fax/Network Fax Operations]". Print Data Capture This setting is for the print operations. For details, refer to the "User's Guide [Print Operations]". Job Log Settings Configure job log settings to be obtained when power is turned off and on. Specify the type of obtain log and whether to permit overwriting. Pressing [Erase Job Log] erases the job log. Restrict Fax TX This setting is for the fax and network fax operations. For details, refer to the "User's Guide [Network Scan/Fax/Network Fax Operations]". Hide Personal Information Hide Personal Information (MIB) Specify whether to display the file name, address, or User Box number as MIB information in Job List. Display Activity Log This setting is for the fax and network fax operations. For details, refer to the "User's Guide [Network Scan/Fax/Network Fax Operations]". Initialize Initializes Job History, Network Settings, Copy Program, or Store Address. Job History Thumbnail Display Configure whether to perform thumbnail display when displaying the job history. Secure Print Only This setting is for the print operations. For details, refer to the "User's Guide [Print Operations]". Copy Guard Specify whether to use the Copy Guard function. If [Copy Guard] is selected in [Application], you can embed copy inhibit information on paper. You can also detect copy inhibit information embedded on paper. • Displayed when the optional Security Kit is installed. Password Copy Specify whether to use the Password Copy function. If [Password Copy] is selected in [Application], you can embed a password on paper. You can also detect a password embedded on paper. • Displayed when the optional Security Kit is installed. Factory default Password Rules Invalid Prohibited Functions When Authentication Error • Mode 1 • Release Time Settings: 5 min. Confidential Document Access Method Mode 1 Manual Destination Input Allow All Print Data Capture Allow Job Log Settings No Restrict Fax TX OFF Hide Personal Information OFF Hide Personal Information (MIB) ON Display Activity Log ON Job History Thumbnail Display OFF Secure Print Only No Settingsbizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 7-53 7.10 Security Settings 7 Copy Guard No Password Copy No Factory defaultbizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 7-54 7.10 Security Settings 7 7.10.5 Enhanced Security Mode The enhanced security mode cannot be enabled when any of the current functional settings conflict with the enhanced security mode. When the enhanced security mode is enabled, the settings required for the mode or the settings that have been forcibly switched when entering the mode cannot be changed. Required settings To enable the enhanced security mode, the following settings must have been configured. Settings to forcibly changed When the enhanced security is enabled, the following settings are forced. - The changed settings will not revert when the enhanced security mode is turned off. - After the password rules have been changed, any passwords that do not comply with the changed rules will not be authenticated. For details on the password rules, refer to page 7-51. - For details on the network settings to be forcibly changed, refer to the "User's Guide [Network Scan/Fax/Network Fax Operations]". Administrator Settings Required settings User Authentication/Account Track / General Settings / User Authentication Select either [ON (External Server)] or [ON (MFP)]. • When you enable account track, select [Account Name & Password] for the account track input method. Security Settings / Administrator Password Set a password complying with password rules. Security Settings / HDD Settings / HDD Lock Password Set an HDD lock password. [Security] in PageScope Web Connection / PKI Settings / SSL Setting • Set [Mode using SSL/TLS] to [Administrator mode] and [User mode]. • Set [Encryption Strength] to [AES-256] or [3DES-168]. • Image controller setting • Management function setting • CE password • CE authentication function • HDD installation setting All the settings above must be configured by your service representative. These items must be configured by your service representative. For details, contact your service representative. Administrator Settings Settings to forcibly changed System Settings / Restrict User Access / Restrict Access to Job Settings / Registering and Changing Addresses Set to [Restrict]. User Authentication/Account Track / General Settings / Pubic User Access Set to [Restrict]. User Authentication/Account Track / User Authentication Settings / Administrative Settings / User Name List Set to [OFF]. User Authentication/Account Track / Print without Authentication Set to [Restrict]. Network Settings / FTP Setting / [FTP Server Settings] [FTP Server Settings] is not displayed. Network Settings / SNMP Setting / SNMP v1/v2c Settings [Write Setting] is set to [Disable]. Network Settings / SNMP Setting / SNMP v3 Settings In [Write User], [Security Level] cannot be set to [OFF]. Network Settings / TCPSocket Settings [Use SSL/TLS] is set to [ON]. Network Settings / WebDAV Settings / WebDAV Server Settings / SSL Settings Set to [SSL Only].bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 7-55 7.10 Security Settings 7 If [Enhanced Security settings] is enabled, various security functions are configured to allow you to ensure the higher-level security of data management. For details, contact your service representative. To enable the enhanced security mode, the following settings must first be configured. Different screens appear depending on the current settings. 7.10.6 HDD Settings This setting is for the hard disk operations. For details, refer to the "User's Guide [Box Operations]". System Connection / OpenAPI Setting Set to [SSL Only]. Security Settings / User Box Administrator Setting Set to [Restrict]. Security Settings / Security Details / Password Rules Set to [Enable]. Security Settings / Security Details / Prohibited Functions When Authentication Error Set to [Mode 2], and the number of tries is set to 3. • The number of tries can be changed to 1, 2, or 3. Security Settings / Security Details / Prohibited Functions When Authentication Error / Release Time Settings The allowable setting range is limited to 5 or more minutes. This value cannot be less than 5 minutes. Security Settings / Security Details / Confidential Document Access Method Set to [Mode 2]. Security Settings/Security Details/Print Data Capture Set to [Restrict]. Security Settings/Security Details/Hide Personal Information (MIB) Set to [ON]. Security Settings / Security Details / Initialize / Network Settings [Network Settings] is not displayed. Security Settings/Security Details/Job History Thumbnail Display Set to [OFF]. Security Settings / Image Log TX Setting Set to [OFF]. Review Secure Print User Box Only the list is displayed before the password authentication is performed. [Network] in PageScope Web Connection / E-Mail Setting / S/MIME [Automatically Obtain Certificates] is set to [No]. [E-Mail Text Encryption Method] is set to [3DES]. [Maintenance] in PageScope Web Connection / Reset / Network Setting Clear [Network Setting Clear] is not displayed. [Security Administrator] in PageScope Web Connection / Password Setting [Administrator Password Setting] is not displayed. CS Remote Care Restricts the device setting in the remote mode based on CS Remote Care. Administrator Settings Settings to forcibly changedbizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 7-56 7.10 Security Settings 7 7.10.7 Function Management Settings Configure the settings for the network functions that are difficult to count. % Press the [Utility/Counter] key ö [Administrator Settings] ö [Security Settings] ö [Function Management Settings] . Settings Network Function Usage Settings ON Configure the settings for the network management that are difficult to count when managing operations. OFF The following functions cannot be used if "Network Function Usage Settings" is set to "OFF". • PC-FAX transmission • Using the HDD TWAIN driver to view and retrieve documents in User Boxes • Using PageScope Box Operator to view and retrieve documents in User Boxes • Using PageScope Scan Direct to retrieve documents in User Boxes • Box operations using PageScope Web Connection (The User Box tab does not appear.) Factory default Network Function Usage Settings ONbizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 7-57 7.10 Security Settings 7 7.10.8 Stamp Settings Manage the stamp. % Press the [Utility/Counter] key ö [Administrator Settings] ö [Security Settings] ö [Stamp Settings]. dReference To configure copy protect and stamp repeat settings: Press [Application] ö [Stamp/Composition]. 7.10.9 Driver Password Encryption Setting This setting is for the print operations. For details, refer to the "User's Guide [Print Operations]". Settings Stamp Settings Apply Stamps Configure whether to add a stamp when printing or sending. To add a stamp, configure stamp contents settings. dReference If a stamp is added, print settings cannot be configured in "Stamp/Composition" of "Application". Delete Registered Stamp • Stamp Deletes all registered stamps. • Copy Protect/Stamp Repeat Deletes all stamps registered in Copy Protect and the stamp repeat function. Factory default Apply Stamps Printing: Do Not Apply Sending: Do Not Applybizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 7-58 7.11 License Settings 7 7.11 License Settings Enable the functions of an optional component i-Option LK-101, LK-102, LK-103 or LK-105. For details on the enabling procedure, refer to the "Quick Guide [Copy/Print/Fax/Scan/Box Operations]". 0 An optional component i-Option LK-101, LK-102, LK-103 or LK-105 must be purchased. For details, contact your service representative. % Press the [Utility/Counter] key ö [Administrator Settings] ö [License Settings] . Reference - When the functions of an optional component i-Option LK-101, LK-102, LK-103 or LK-105 are enabled, the enabled functions can be checked with [List of Enabled Functions]. Settings Get Request Code Issue a request code for this machine to be registered in the license management server (LMS). Install License Enter the function code and license code obtained from the license management server (LMS).bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 7-59 7.12 OpenAPI Authentication Management Settings 7 7.12 OpenAPI Authentication Management Settings Configure settings to prevent our deprecated OpenAPI connection application from being registered in this machine. For details, contact your service representative.8 Maintenancebizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 8-2 8.1 Paper 8 8 Maintenance 8.1 Paper 8.1.1 Checking the paper Replenishment message If a tray has run out of paper during printing, load paper or change the paper tray. Load paper in the paper tray that is highlighted in color. Precautions regarding the use of paper Do not use the following types of paper. Not observing these precautions may lead to reduced print quality, a paper jam or a damage to the machine. - OHP transparencies that have already been fed through the machine (even if they are still blank) - Paper that has been printed on with a heat-transfer printer or an inkjet printer - Folded, curled, wrinkled, or torn paper - Paper that has been left unwrapped for a long period of time - Damp paper, perforated paper, or paper with punched holes - Extremely smooth or extremely rough paper, or paper with an uneven surface - Paper that has been treated, such as carbon-backed, heat-sensitive or pressure-sensitive paper - Paper that has been decorated with foil or embossing - Paper of a non-standard shape (paper that is not rectangular) - Paper that is bound with glue, staples or paper clips - Paper with labels attached - Paper with ribbons, hooks, buttons, etc., attached Paper storage Store paper in a cool, dark location with little humidity. If the paper becomes damp, a paper jam may occur. Store the paper flat, not on its edge. Curled paper may cause a paper jam.bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 8-3 8.1 Paper 8 8.1.2 Loading paper This section describes how to load paper into each tray. If printing stops due to the tray being empty, load paper into the tray. Printing restarts automatically. For the types of paper to be used, refer to page 12-2. Loading paper into trays 1 and 2 The same procedures can be used to load paper into trays 1 and 2. The following procedure describes how to load paper into tray 1. 0 When "Auto Detect" is selected on the "Paper" tab, the size of loaded paper is automatically detected. 1 Pull out tray 1. NOTICE Be careful not to touch the film. 2 Slide the lateral guides to fit the size of paper being loaded. % If the lateral guides are not positioned correctly for the loaded paper, the paper size will not be correctly detected. 3 Load the paper into the tray so that the side of the paper to be printed on (the side facing up when the package was unwrapped) faces up. % Do not load so many sheets of paper that the top of the stack is higher than the mark. % If paper is curled, flatten it before loading it. % If special paper is loaded, the paper type must be specified. % Load letterhead paper so that the side to be printed on faces down. 4 Close tray 1. dReference To configure paper settings: Press [Basic] ö [Paper]. Filmbizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 8-4 8.1 Paper 8 Loading paper into trays 3 and 4 The same procedures can be used to load paper into trays 3 and 4. The following procedure describes how to load paper into tray 3. 1 Pull out tray 3. NOTICE Be careful not to touch the surface of the paper take-up roller with your hand. 2 Lift up the paper take-up roller, and then load the paper into the tray. % Load the paper into the tray so that the side of the paper to be printed on (the side facing up when the package was unwrapped) faces up. % Do not load so many sheets of paper that the top of the stack is higher than the mark. % Do not load tray 3 with paper of a size other than that previously specified. % If paper is curled, flatten it before loading it. % If special paper is loaded, the paper type must be specified. % Load letterhead paper so that the side to be printed on faces down. % To change the paper size for tray 3, contact your service representative. 3 Lower the paper take-up roller, and then close tray 3. dReference To configure paper settings: Press [Basic] ö [Paper].bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 8-5 8.1 Paper 8 Loading paper into the bypass tray 1 Open the bypass tray. % To load large-sized paper, pull out the tray extension. NOTICE Be careful not to touch the surface of the paper take-up roller with your hand. 2 With the side to be printed on facing down, insert the paper as far as possible into the feed slot. % The image will be printed on the surface of the paper facing down when the paper is loaded into the bypass tray. % Do not load so many sheets of paper that the top of the stack is higher than the mark. % If paper is curled, flatten it before loading it. % Push the paper guides firmly up against the edges of the paper. % Load letterhead paper so that the side to be printed on faces up. % When loading postcards: Load them in the w orientation, as shown in the illustration. To use postcards other than 4 e 6-size (A6-size), check the size of postcards to be used, and then select the size on the Custom Size screen before using them. % When using envelopes: Expel air from the envelopes, and then load them while holding the folds of the envelopes. Load them with the flap side up, as shown in the illustration. The flap side of envelopes cannot be printed on.bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 8-6 8.1 Paper 8 % To load label sheets: Load them in the w orientation, as shown in the illustration. A label sheet consists of the printing surface, sticking layer, and pasteboard. Peel off the pasteboard, then you can stick the label to other objects. 3 Slide the lateral guides to fit the size of paper being loaded. 4 Select the paper type. % To use label sheets, select [Thick 1]. % OHP transparencies can be printed only in black. Before selecting OHP transparencies, select [Black] in the Color tab. % If you select [4 e 6 w (A6 Card w)], the paper type is automatically set to [Thick 3]. dReference To configure paper settings: Press [Basic] ö [Paper].bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 8-7 8.1 Paper 8 Loading paper into the LCT The same procedures can be used to load paper into the Large capacity unit LU-301 and LU-204. The following procedure describes how to load paper into Large capacity unit LU-301. 0 To change the paper size, contact your service representative. 1 Open the upper door. NOTICE Be careful not to touch the surface of the paper take-up roller with your hand. 2 Lift up the paper take-up roller, and then load the paper into the tray. % Load the paper into the tray so that the side of the paper to be printed on (the side facing up when the package was unwrapped) faces down. % Do not load so many sheets of paper that the top of the stack is higher than the mark. % Do not load the LCT with paper of a size other than that previously specified. % If paper is curled, flatten it before loading it. % If special paper is loaded, the paper type must be specified. % Load letterhead paper so that the side to be printed on faces up. dReference To configure paper settings: Press [Basic] ö [Paper].bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 8-8 8.2 Consumables 8 8.2 Consumables 8.2.1 Checking comsumables Replacement message When it is time to replace the Toner Cartridge or Imaging Unit, an advanced warning message appears at the top of the screen. For the replacement procedure, refer to the guidance or the [Quick Guide Copy/Print/Fax/Scan/Box Operations]. For details on using the guidance, refer to the [Quick Guide Copy/Print/Fax/Scan/Box Operations]. When the message appears, make a preparation and replace the Toner Cartridge or Imaging Unit according to the guidance contained in your maintenance agreement. When it is almost time to replace the Toner Cartridge, an advanced warning message similar to the one shown below appears. When the message appears, prepare to replace the Toner Cartridge according to the guidance contained in your maintenance agreement. When it is time to replace the Toner Cartridge or Imaging Unit, an advanced warning message similar to the one shown below appears. Replace them according to the guidance contained in your maintenance agreement. - Do not replace any color other than the one indicated in the message in the touch panel. - For the Toner Cartridge, the machine stops operating after the message appears. Toner Cartridgebizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 8-9 8.2 Consumables 8 Imaging Unit NOTICE Do not replace the Imaging Unit until a "Please replace following unit(s)." message appears. If you continue to use the drum unit while an advanced warning message is displayed, the following replacement message appears. Replace the drum unit according to the guidance contained in your maintenance agreement. Toner Cartridge Imaging Unit If a Toner Cartridge other than for black or the Imaging Unit is empty, printing can continue using black. Press [Continue], and then select the job to be printed. Replacement by user Replacement by service representative Replacement by user Replacement by service representativebizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 8-10 8.2 Consumables 8 Checking consumables status In the Check Consumable Life screen, you can check the status (usage level) of consumables. 1 Press the [Utility/Counter] key. 2 Press [Check Consumable Life]. % To print the list of usage levels, press [Print List], then [Start] or the [Start] key. Viewing counters In the Meter Count screen, you can check the total number of prints since counting started. In the Coverage Rate screen, the consumed amount of toner can be viewed. 1 Press the [Utility/Counter] key. 2 Press [Meter Count] ö [Check Details]. % To print the counter list, press [Print List], select paper, and then press the [Start] key.bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 8-11 8.2 Consumables 8 % To display the Coverage Rate screen, press [Coverage Rate]. Checking the total number of pages printed Pressing Total Counter displays the total number of pages printed to date. Total Counterbizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 8-12 8.3 Cleaning procedure 8 8.3 Cleaning procedure Slit glass (bizhub C652/C552/C452) NOTICE Do not touch the slit glass. 1 Open the ADF, and then remove the slit glass cleaner. 2 Wipe stains off the slit glass using the slit glass cleaner. % Wipe off stains from the back side to the front side along the guide. Slit glass (front) (bizhub C652DS/C552DS) NOTICE Do not touch the slit glass (front). 1 Open the ADF, and then remove the slit glass cleaner. 2 Wipe stains off the slit glass using the slit glass (front) cleaner. % Wipe off stains from the back side to the front side along the guide. bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 8-13 8.3 Cleaning procedure 8 Slit glass (back) (bizhub C652DS/C552DS) NOTICE Do not touch the slit glass (back). 1 Open the ADF, and then remove the slit glass cleaner. 2 Open the opening and closing guide. 3 Wipe stains off the slit glass using the slit glass (back) cleaner. % Wipe off stains from the back side to the front side along the guide. Original glass, control panel, paper take-up roller NOTICE Do not press the control panel hard, or the keys and touch panel may be damaged. % Wipe the surface using a soft, dry cloth.bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 8-14 8.3 Cleaning procedure 8 Housing, document pad NOTICE Never use solvents, such as benzene or thinner, to clean the document pad. % Wipe the surface using a soft cloth moistened with a mild household detergent.9 Troubleshootingbizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 9-2 9.1 When the message "Trouble" appears (call a service representative) 9 9 Troubleshooting This chapter describes troubleshooting. 9.1 When the message "Trouble" appears (call a service representative) If this message appears, perform the operation described in the message. If the problem is not resolved, perform the following operations, and then contact your service representative. Normally, the phone number and fax number of your service representative appear in the center of the screen. If a defective part can be separated in order to be able to continue operations after a problem has been detected, [Continue] or [Recover Data] is displayed. To continue operations, select any key. However, the problem has not been resolved, so contact your service representative immediately. Problems that cannot be corrected by the user 1 Write down the malfunction code in the Service Call screen. 2 Turn off the [sub power switch]. 3 Turn off the [main power switch].bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 9-3 9.1 When the message "Trouble" appears (call a service representative) 9 4 Unplug the machine. 5 Contact your service representative and inform them of the written down malfunction code.bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 9-4 9.2 Troubleshooting table 9 9.2 Troubleshooting table Simple troubleshooting The following explains simple troubleshooting procedures. If the problem is not corrected after the described operation is performed, contact your service representative. Description of problem Check points Remedy The machine does not start up when the [main power switch] is turned on Is power being supplied from the electrical outlet? Correctly insert the power supply plug into the electrical outlet. Has the [sub power switch] been turned on? Turn on the [sub power switch]. Copying does not start Is the upper right-side door of the machine open? Securely close the upper rightside door of the machine. Is there any paper that matches the original? Load paper of the appropriate size into the paper tray. The printed output is too light Is the copy density set to [Light]? Press [Dark] in the Density screen to copy at the desired copy density. (p. 5-18) Is the paper damp? Replace with new paper. (p. 8-3) The printed output is too dark Is the copy density set to [Dark]? Press [Light] in the Density screen to copy at the desired copy density. (p. 5-18) Was the original not pressed close enough against the original glass? Position the original so that it is pressed closely against the original glass. (p. 3-5) The printed image is blurry Is the paper damp? Replace with new paper. (p. 8-3) Was the original not pressed close enough against the original glass? Position the original so that it is pressed closely against the original glass. (p. 3-5) There are dark specks or spots throughout the printed output There are streaks in the printed output Is the original glass dirty? Wipe the glass with a soft, dry cloth. (p. 8-13) Is the slit glass dirty? Clean the slit glass with the slit glass cleaner. (p. 8-12) Is the document pad dirty? Clean the document pad with a soft cloth dampened with a mild detergent. (p. 8-14) Was the original printed on highly translucent material, such as diazo photosensitive paper or OHP transparencies? Place a blank sheet of paper on top of the original. (p. 3-5) Is a 2-sided original being copied? If a thin 2-sided original is being copied, the print on the back side may be reproduced on the front side of the copy. In the Background Removal screen, select a lighter background density. (p. 5-18) Is the electrostatic charger wire dirty? Use the charger-cleaning tool to clean the electrostatic charger. (p. 9-12)bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 9-5 9.2 Troubleshooting table 9 The image is printed at an angle Is the original positioned correctly? Correctly position the original against the document scales. (p. 3-5) Load the original into the ADF, and slide the adjustable lateral guides to fit the size of the original. (p. 3-4) Is the original incorrectly positioned in the ADF? If the original cannot be fed correctly through the ADF, make copies by positioning the original on the original glass. (p. 3-5) Is the slit glass dirty (while using the ADF)? Clean the slit glass with the slit glass cleaner. (p. 8-12) Are the adjustable lateral guides incorrectly positioned against the edges of the paper? Slide the adjustable lateral guides against the edges of the paper. Was curled paper loaded into the paper tray? Flatten the paper before loading it. The printed page is curled Was paper that curls easily (as with recycled paper) used? Remove the paper from the paper tray, turn it over, and then load it again. Replace with new dry paper. (p. 8-3) The edge of the printed image is dirty Is the document pad dirty? Clean the document pad with a soft cloth dampened with a mild detergent. (p. 8-14) Was the selected paper size larger than the original? (With a Zoom setting of "Full Size" (100.0%)) Select a paper size that is the same size as the original. Otherwise, select Auto to enlarge the copy to the selected paper size. (p. 5-7) Is the size or orientation of the original different from that of the paper? (With a Zoom setting of "Full Size" (100.0%)) Select a paper size that is the same size as the original. Otherwise, select a paper orientation that is the same as that of the original. Was the copy reduced to a size smaller than the paper (with a reduced zoom ratio specified)? Select a zoom ratio that adjusts the original size to the selected paper size. Otherwise, select Auto to enlarge the copy to the selected paper size. (p. 5-7) Even though a paper jam was cleared, copies cannot be produced Is paper jammed at other locations? Remove any jammed paper from other locations. Printing with the "2-Sided > 1-Sided" or "2-Sided > 2-Sided" settings are not available Have settings been selected that cannot be combined? Check the combinations of the selected settings. Copying is not possible even though the password is entered on a machine with account track settings configured Did the message "Your account has reached its maximum allowance." appear? Contact your administrator. The original is not fed Is the ADF slightly open? Securely close the ADF. Is the original one that does not meet the specifications? Check that the original is one that can be loaded into the ADF. (p. 12-7) Is the original correctly loaded? Position the original correctly. (p. 3-4) The Finisher or Job Separator JS-504 does not run. Is any power being supplied to the connector? Check that the cord is correctly inserted into the connector. Description of problem Check points Remedybizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 9-6 9.2 Troubleshooting table 9 The staple is incorrectly positioned by 90° Has the staple position been correctly specified? Specify the desired position for stapling. (p. 5-10) The pages that were fed out were not uniformly loaded and the punched holes or staples are incorrectly positioned Is the paper curled? Remove the paper from the paper tray, turn it over, and then load it again. Is there a gap between the lateral guides in the paper tray and the sides of the paper? Slide the lateral guides in the paper tray against the sides of the paper so that there is no gap. Is the paper type configured correctly? Configure the paper type of the selected tray correctly. Though the authentication unit is connected with this machine sing a USB cable, the status indicator LED does not light in green A malfunction of the USB port of this machine is suspected. Turn off the main power of this machine, disconnect the USB cable from this machine or authentication unit, and then connect it again. Wait at least 10 seconds, and then turn on the main power of this machine. Though the authentication unit is connected with the computer using a USB cable, the status indicator LED does not light in green MA malfunction of the USB port of your computer is suspected. Restart your computer. Has the authentication unit driver being installed correctly? Check that your computer is installed to the computer correctly. (p. 10-2) (p. 11-2) No notice sound is given when scanning is started or authentication is finished on this machine Has the notice sound being set to OFF on this machine? Set the notice sound to ON. (p. 10-2) When the "Failed to register" message appears on this machine where registration fails The scanning time on the authentication unit is limited per scanning. If scanning does not finish within the limited time, the corresponding message appears. For details on the scanning time, contact your service representative. To finish scanning within the limited time, confirm how to perform authentication and how to place your finger when scanning. (p. 10-2) During scanning, place the scanned part on the scanning section correctly, and do not move it until results have been obtained. If the scanned part is dusty or rough and dry when performing authentication, a correct image will not be able to be obtained, and scanning may not finish. Clean your finger, and then scan it again, or improve the rough and dry condition of your finger. If the scanned part is too thick or thin (when the finger width is outside the range from 3/8 to 1 inch (10 to 25 mm)), a correct image cannot be obtained, and scanning may not finish. Try "stretching your finger", "placing your finger deeply", or "placing your finger shallowly" on the scanning section. When the "Failed to authenticate." message appears on this machine where login fails When the "Failed to read data. Place your finger once again and click the [Start reading] button." message appears on the computer where registration has failed The scanning time on the authentication unit is limited to five seconds per scan. If scanning does not finish within five seconds, the corresponding message appears. Description of problem Check points Remedybizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 9-7 9.2 Troubleshooting table 9 Scanning does not start Have you placed your finger correctly on the authentication unit? Confirm how to perform authentication and how to place your finger when scanning. (p. 10-2) During scanning, place the scanned part on the scanning section correctly, and do not move it until results have been obtained. If the scanned part is dusty or rough and dry when performing authentication, a correct image will not be able to be obtained, and scanning may not finish. Clean your finger, and then scan it again, or improve the rough and dry condition of your finger. If the scanned part is too thick or thin (when the finger width is outside the range from 3/8 to 1 inch (10 to 25 mm)), a correct image cannot be obtained, and scanning may not finish. Try "stretching your finger", "placing your finger deeply", or "placing your finger shallowly" on the scanning section. Did you restart this machine after connecting the authentication unit to this machine? Turn off the main power of this machine, disconnect the USB cable from this machine or authentication unit, and then connect it again. Wait at least 10 seconds, and then turn on the main power of this machine. Connecting the authentication unit to the computer starts the hardware uninstall wizard Is the USB port to which the authentication unit is connected the same as the one used when installing the driver? If you connect the authentication unit to a different USB port from the one used when installing the driver, the hardware uninstall wizard may start. Use the same USB port as the one used when installing the driver. When the "Failed to register" message appears on this machine where registration fails The scanning time of the authentication unit is limited to 10 seconds. If scanning does not finish within the limited time, the corresponding message appears. To finish scanning within the limited time, confirm how to place the IC card. (p. 11-2) When a message appears on the computer where registration fails When the "Failed to authenticate." message appears on this machine where login fails When IC card authentication + password authentication is enabled Did you enter the correct password? Check the password, and then enter the correct one if not. Scanning does not start Did you restart this machine after connecting the authentication unit to this machine? Turn off the main power of this machine, disconnect the USB cable from this machine or authentication unit, and then connect it again. Wait at least 10 seconds, and then turn on the main power of this machine. Description of problem Check points Remedybizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 9-8 9.2 Troubleshooting table 9 Main messages and their remedies If any message other than those listed below appears, perform the operation described in the message. Message Cause Remedy Originals left on original glass. The original has been left on the original glass. Remove the original from the original glass. Paper of matching size is not available. Select the paper size. Paper of a suitable size is not loaded in a paper tray. Either select paper of a different size or load paper of a suitable size. Place paper in Bypass Tray. Paper of a suitable size is not loaded in the bypass tray. Load paper of the appropriate size into the bypass tray. The original size cannot be detected Select the paper size. (1) The original is not positioned correctly. (2) An original with a nonstandard size or with a size too small to be detected is loaded. (1) Position the original correctly. (2) Select the correct paper size. The image will not fit in the selected paper size. Change the direction of the original The image does not fit in the paper. Turn the original 90° and load it. Cannot be set with XXX. Functions that cannot be used together are selected. Make copies using only one of the functions. The output tray has reached its capacity. Remove paper from the tray indicated by . Copy cannot be performed because the paper loading capacity of the output tray of the displayed Finisher or Job Separator reached the maximum. Remove all paper from the indicated tray. Enter the login user name and password and then touch [Login] or press the [Access] key. User authentication settings have been configured. Copies cannot be made unless a user name and correct password are entered. Enter the correct user name and password. (p. 4-8) Enter Account Name and password, and then touch [Login] or press the [Access] key. Account track settings have been configured. Copies cannot be made unless an account name and correct password are entered. Enter the correct account name and password. (p. 4-8) Your account has reached its maximum allowance. The limit on the number of pages that can be printed has been reached. Contact the administrator of the machine. The part indicated by is open. Ensure that it is properly closed. Since a machine door or cover is open or an option is not installed correctly, the machine is unable to make copies. Make sure that all doors and covers of this machine and options are closed securely. Check covers. The exit cover of the finisher is open. Securely close the exit cover of the finisher. Install the Imaging Unit and close all doors The indicated Imaging Unit is not installed correctly. Reinstall each consumable and replaceable part. Or contact your service representative. [Install a toner cartridge.] The indicated toner cartridge is not installed correctly. Reinstall each consumable and replaceable part. Or contact your service representative. [Set the toner cartridge, and close all doors.] The indicated toner cartridge is not installed correctly. Reinstall each consumable and replaceable part. Or contact your service representative. Install the waste toner box and close all doors. The waste toner box is not installed correctly. Reinstall each consumable and replaceable part. Or contact your service representative. Incorrect Imaging Unit is installed. Install the correct Imaging Unit and close all doors. The correct Imaging Unit is not set. Reinstall each consumable and replaceable part. Or contact your service representative.bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 9-9 9.2 Troubleshooting table 9 Replenish paper. The indicated tray has run out of paper. Add paper. (p. 8-3) Toner (X) is low. Please when indicate. The toner for the indicated color is about to run out. Prepare to replace the toner cartridge following the guidance contained in your maintenance agreement. Install toner cartridge (X) The toner is about to run out. Replace the toner cartridge following the guidance contained in your maintenance agreement. Toner is depleted Replace the toner cartridge following the guidance (explanation). Press the [Continue] button to continue the operations. Toner is depleted Replace the toner cartridge following the guidance contained in your maintenance agreement. No more staples. Replace the staple cartridge, or cancel stapling The staples have run out. Replace the staple cartridge. Misfeed detected. Remove paper according to the instructions. Since a paper jam occurred, the machine is unable to make copies. Clear the jammed paper. Empty hole-punch scrap box To continue the job, disable punching. (1) The punch scrap box is full. (2) The punch scrap box is not installed. (1) Throw punch scraps away from the punch scrap box. (2) Install the punch scrap box. Reset the following number of originals. XX After clearing a paper jam, it is necessary to reload certain pages of the original that have already been fed through the ADF. Load the indicated original pages into the ADF. An internal error occurred. Open and then close the front door. If the trouble code appears again, contact your Service Rep. The machine malfunctioned and is unable to make copies. Take a remedy according to the message displayed in the screen. If the problem is not resolved or released, inform your service representative of the malfunction code displayed in the screen. An internal error occurred. Turn the main switch OFF and ON. If the trouble code appears again, contact your Service Rep. Malfunction detected. Inform the service representative of the error code. The machine malfunctioned and is unable to make copies. Inform your service representative of the code displayed in the screen. Clean the slit scan glass on the far left with a glass cleaner. Continuing using the machine in this condition may cause lines to appear in the output. The slit glass is dirty. User the slit glass cleaner to clean it. Clean the slit glass on the left side of the machine with the glass cleaner. Continuing using the machine in this condition may cause lines to appear in the output. The slit glass (front) is dirty. User the slit glass cleaner to clean it. Clean the slit glass on the left side of the ADF with the glass cleaner. Continuing using the machine in this condition may cause lines to appear in the output. The slit glass (back) is dirty. User the slit glass cleaner to clean it. Message Cause Remedybizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 9-10 9.2 Troubleshooting table 9 Icons that appear in the touch-panel screen Now Downloading Program Data from the Firmware server. (1) CS Remote Care was activated by your service representative. (2) Internet ISW is being downloaded. Do not turn off the sub power switch while this message is displayed. After turning off the sub power switch, turn off the main power switch, and then contact your service representative. Authentication information entered is invalid, due to failed access attempts. Contact the administrator. The authentication information has become invalid since the authentication attempts have failed the specified number of times. Contact the administrator of the machine. Due to failed access attempts, the current administrator password is invalid. The administrator password has become invalid since the authentication attempts have failed the specified number of times. Turn the machine off, then on again. Turn off the main power switch, and then wait at least 10 seconds before turning it on again. The job log has reached the maximum allowed. Contact the administrator. The write area of the job log has reached the maximum allowed. Obtain the job log using PageScope Web Connection. No Animation Guide data available. Contact your administrator. Animation guide data is not installed. For details on installing animation guide data, contact your service representative. Verify that external keyboard is properly connected. It may not be connected or multiple keyboards may be connected. The compact keyboard is not connected to this machine. Turn off the main power of this machine, connect the compact keyboard to this machine. Wait at least 10 seconds, and then turn on the main power of this machine. Message Cause Remedy Icon Description Indicates that data is being sent from the machine, regardless of the current mode. Indicates that the machine is receiving data, regardless of the current mode. Indicates that an error occurred during an image stabilization operation, a print operation or a scan operation. Press this icon to view a screen containing a warning code. If the warning screen was closed when a warning occurred, press this button to display the warning screen again. Appears when there is a message indicating that consumables must be replaced or the machine requires maintenance. Press this button to display the message, and then carry out the replacement or maintenance procedure. Appears when an error occurs with the connection to the POP server. Indicates that paper is not loaded in the paper tray. Indicates that very little paper remains in the paper tray. If the optional image controller is installed, press this icon to display the setting screen for the image controller.bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 9-11 9.2 Troubleshooting table 9 Indicates that "Enhanced Security Mode" is set to "ON". Appears when the external memory (USB memory) is not connected. Indicates that a nonstandard external memory has been connected to this machine, therefore, USB connection is not enabled. Indicates that the job is in the waiting-for-redial status because, for example, the recipient's line is busy when sending with the G3 Fax or IP Address Fax function. Icon Descriptionbizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 9-12 9.3 If print quality is deteriorated 9 9.3 If print quality is deteriorated Cleaning the electrostatic charger wire If the electrostatic charger wire is dirty, streaks will appear though the printed images. If this occurs, follow the procedure described below to clean the electrostatic charger wire. 0 When replacing the waste toner box, follow the "Quick Guide" to clean the electrostatic charger wire. 1 Open the machine's lower front door. 2 Slowly pull out the charger-cleaning tool as far as possible. Next, slowly push in the charger-cleaning tool as far as possible. Repeat the above operations three times. 3 Securely insert the charger-cleaning tool, and then close the front door.bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 9-13 9.3 If print quality is deteriorated 9 Cleaning the print head If the print head becomes dirty, print quality may be reduced. If this occurs, clean the print head according to the following procedure. 1 Pull out tray 1. 2 Remove the print head glass cleaning tool from tray 1. 3 Open the machine's lower front door. 4 Release the securing levers for the waste toner box, and then remove the waste toner box.bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 9-14 9.3 If print quality is deteriorated 9 5 Insert the print head glass cleaning tool into the print head cleaning opening, pull it out, and then repeat this back-and-forth movement two or three times. 6 Install the waste toner box. 7 Place back the print head glass cleaning tool to tray 1. 8 Close tray 1.10 Authentication unit (biometric type)bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 10-2 10.1 Using an authentication unit (biometric type) 10 10 Authentication unit (biometric type) This chapter describes the authentication unit (biometric type). 1. Authentication unit (biometric type) AU-101 2. Authentication unit (biometric type) AU-102 10.1 Using an authentication unit (biometric type) The authentication unit (biometric type) is a "biometrics (biometric authentication)" system that scans a finger vein pattern to perform personal authentication. Using the biometric authentication, you can log in to this machine where user authentication settings are configured in order to execute a print job. Place your forefinger straight so that your forefinger cushion slightly touches the hollow and protuberance part of the scanning section. Secure your middle finger and thumb on the both sides of the authentication unit to prevent your forefinger to be used for authentication from rotating. For details on how to place your forefinger on the authentication unit, refer to page 10-17. NOTICE If you change the authentication unit from AU-101 to AU-102, the users you registered with AU-101 cannot use AU-102. Connect AU-102 to this machine, and then register the users again. Do not place anything other than your finger on the scanning section during scanning operation. Doing so may cause a malfunction. Do not disconnect the USB cable from the authentication unit or computer during a scanning operation. Doing so may cause the system to become unstable. The status indicator LED and notice sound indicate the status of the authentication unit. *1 For authentication unit (biometric type) AU-101 *2 For authentication unit (biometric type) AU-102 1 2 Status indicator LEDs Status Lit in green Ready state or authentication is completed Flash in green During authentication or scanning operation Lit in red Authentication failed or scanning failed Unlit The authentication unit is not recognized Notice sound Status One short blip sound Scanning starts One short blip sound During a retry after authentication failed One short blip sound *1 /two short blip sounds *2 Authentication completed Two short blip sounds *1 / one short blip and one long beep sounds *2 Authentication failed One long beep sound *2 Scanning canceledbizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 10-3 10.1 Using an authentication unit (biometric type) 10 To use the authentication unit, first register the finger vein pattern of the user in this machine. The registered user, who is authenticated with the finger vein pattern, can log in to this machine or execute a print job. This section explains how to configure the required settings in this machine, register users, and log in with authentication. 10.1.1 Configuring this machine NOTICE User authentication settings must be configured with MFP authentication on this machine. This device does not support external server authentication. To combine account track settings with user authentication settings, set Synchronize User Authentication & Account Track to "Synchronize". 1 Use the control panel of this machine to display the Administrator Settings screen. Press [4 User Authentication/Account Track], then [1 General Settings]. 2 Set [User Authentication] to "ON (MFP)", and then press [OK]. 3 Press [Yes], and then [OK]. 4 Press [8 Authentication Device Settings]. 5 Press [1 General Settings]. 6 Press [Bio Authentication].bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 10-4 10.1 Using an authentication unit (biometric type) 10 7 Configure "Beep Sound" and "Operation Settings". % For "Beep Sound", specify whether to give a "blip" sound when the finger vein pattern is scanned successfully. % For "Operation Settings", specify how to log in to this machine after registration. 1-to-many authentication: Allows the user to log in by simply placing his or her finger. 1-to-1 authentication: Allows the user to log in by entering the user name and placing his or her finger. For details on how to log in to this machine, refer to page 10-17. 8 Press [OK] twice. 9 Press [2 Logoff Settings]. 10 Specify whether to log out the user when scanning the original has finished after the user logged in with the authentication unit. 11 Press [OK]. 12 Press [Close] twice.bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 10-5 10.1 Using an authentication unit (biometric type) 10 10.1.2 Registering a user The following two methods can be used to register a user. - Connect the authentication unit to this machine, and directly register the target user in this machine - Connect the authentication unit to your computer, and use Data Administrator to register the target user NOTICE The registered user data is saved in the HDD of this machine. Changing the user authentication type of this machine or formatting the HDD will erase the registered user data. Registering a user using the control panel of this machine 1 Use the control panel of this machine to display the Administrator Settings screen. Press [4 User Authentication/Account Track], and then [2 User Authentication Settings]. NOTICE [2 User Authentication Settings] is disabled when User Authentication is set to [OFF] in General Settings. 2 Press [2 User Registration]. 3 Select a desired registration number, and then press [Edit]. 4 Press [Register Auth. Info.].bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 10-6 10.1 Using an authentication unit (biometric type) 10 5 Press [Edit]. 6 Place your finger on the authentication unit to scan the finger vein pattern. % Scan the finger vein pattern three times; reset the same finger each time and then press [Scan] for each scanning. % After scanning the finger vein pattern, place the same finger on the authentication unit, and press [Authentication Test]. % If your finger vein patterns have been authenticated in the authentication test, press [New]. If authentication has failed, retry scanning the finger. 7 Press [Close] twice. 8 Enter the user name and password. 9 Configure function permission settings as required. 10 Press [OK]. 11 Press [Close]. Registering a user using Data Administrator To use Data Administrator, configure this machine, and set up Data Administrator. For setup, install the BioDriver (USB-Driver) of the authentication unit, and then install Data Administrator Bio Plugin. NOTICE Before setup, install Data Administrator V4.0 or later in your computer. For the Data Administrator operating environment and installation procedure, refer to the Data Administrator User's Guide.bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 10-7 10.1 Using an authentication unit (biometric type) 10 Checking the version of the installed Data Administrator 1 From the "Help" menu of Data Administrator, select "Version Information". NOTICE This software cannot be used if the version is "3.x". Install "4.x". If Data Administrator V3.x is installed, it is removed when V4.x is installed. 2 Click the [Plug-in version]. 3 In "Plug-in information list:", confirm the plugin version of Data Administrator. % This software is available if the plugin version is "4.x". Setup 1 Turn the main power of this machine off, and disconnect the authentication unit from this machine. 2 Install BioDriver (USB-Driver). Connect the authentication unit to the USB port of your computer. The "Found New Hardware" dialog box appears. 3 Select "Locate and install driver software (recommended)". 4 Insert the application CD-ROM provided with the authentication unit into the CD-ROM drive of the computer.bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 10-8 10.1 Using an authentication unit (biometric type) 10 5 Click the "Browse my computer for driver software (advanced)". 6 Check that the driver's search location is the application CD-ROM, and then click the [Next]. % When the driver's search location is not the application CD-ROM, click the [Browse]. Select the BioDriver (USB-Driver) folder on the CD-ROM, and then click the [OK].bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 10-9 10.1 Using an authentication unit (biometric type) 10 % Installation starts. 7 Click the [Close]. Installation of BioDriver (USB-Driver) is completed. 8 Install Data Administrator Bio Plugin. Open the DA_Bio_Plugin folder on the application CD-ROM, and then click setup.exe. 9 Select a language, and then click the [OK]. The installation program starts. 10 Follow the on-screen instructions to proceed with the installation.bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 10-10 10.1 Using an authentication unit (biometric type) 10 11 Click the [Next]. 12 Select "I accept the terms in the license agreement", and then click the [Next]. 13 Click the [Install].bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 10-11 10.1 Using an authentication unit (biometric type) 10 14 Click the [Finish]. Installation of the Data Administrator Bio Plugin is completed, which completes the setup. User registration To register a user with Data Administrator, connect the authentication unit to the USB port of the computer, and also connect the computer to this machine via network. 1 If the authentication unit is already connected to this machine, turn the main power switch of this machine off, and then disconnect the authentication unit. % When the authentication unit is already connected to the computer, go to step 4. NOTICE To turn the main power switch off and on, first turn the main power switch off, and then turn it on after 10 or more seconds has elapsed. Not doing so may result in an operation failure. When connecting or disconnecting the USB cable, hold the plug. Otherwise, the cable may be damaged. 2 Turn the main power on. 3 Connect the authentication unit to the USB port of the computer that contains Data Administrator. NOTICE Do not connect another USB device to the same port as for the authentication unit. Doing so reduces the USB power supply, resulting in an operation failure. To use the USB hub, be sure to connect the self-power USB hub that supplies 500 mA or more. Restart the procedure 5 or more seconds after connecting the authentication unit.bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 10-12 10.1 Using an authentication unit (biometric type) 10 4 Data Administrator starts, and device information of this machine is imported. The Device Information window appears. % For details on how to import device information, refer to the Data Administrator User's Guide. 5 In Select Function, select "Authentication Settings" - "User Setting", and then click the [Add].bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 10-13 10.1 Using an authentication unit (biometric type) 10 6 Select the desired template, and then click the [OK]. The User Registration window appears. 7 Enter the user name and password, select the "AU-101" or "AU-102" tab, and then click the [Register Auth. Info]. % Enter the E-mail address and other information as required.bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 10-14 10.1 Using an authentication unit (biometric type) 10 8 Register finger vein pattern. % Scan the finger vein patterns three times; reset the same finger and then press [Start Reading] for each scanning. % After scanning the finger vein patterns, place the same finger, and click [Authentication Test]. % If the authentication test has succeeded, press [Register]. % If the authentication test has failed, place your finger on the authentication unit again, and click [Authentication Test]. % If the authentication has failed, click [Reset] to repeat the scanning process. For authentication unit AU-101 For authentication unit AU-102 9 Click the [Registration].bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 10-15 10.1 Using an authentication unit (biometric type) 10 10 Click the [OK]. % Repeat steps 5 to 10 to register all users. 11 Click the [Export to the device]. % Select the user name and click the [Edit] to change the registered data.bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 10-16 10.1 Using an authentication unit (biometric type) 10 12 Click the [Write]. % Data Administrator provides the batch copy function that batch-configures the registered user data in multiple machines with the authentication unit enabled. The registered user data is configured in this machine. 13 Click the [OK]. 14 Disconnect the authentication unit from the USB port of the computer. 15 Turn the main power switch of this machine off, connect the authentication unit to this machine, and turn the main power of this machine on. NOTICE To turn the main power switch off and on, first turn the main power switch off, and then turn it on after 10 or more seconds has elapsed. Not doing so may result in an operation failure. When connecting or disconnecting the USB cable, hold the plug. Otherwise, the cable may be damaged.bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 10-17 10.1 Using an authentication unit (biometric type) 10 10.1.3 Logging in to this machine This section explains how to log in to this machine with the finger vein pattern authentication. - To use authentication unit (biometric type), register the finger vein pattern in advance. - If authentication fails frequently, finger vein pattern may not be registered correctly. Register the finger vein pattern again. - Authentication is carried out when you simply place your finger on the 1-to-many authentication. Authentication is carried out when you enter the user name and place your finger on the 1-to-1 authentication. - Press [ID & PW] to log in by entering the user name and the password, without using the authentication unit. When 1-to-many authentication has been specified % Place your finger on the authentication unit. The basic settings screen appears. Authentication unit (biometric type) AU-101 Authentication unit (biometric type) AU-102bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 10-18 10.1 Using an authentication unit (biometric type) 10 When 1-to-1 authentication has been specified 1 Select [User Name], and enter the user name. 2 Place your finger on the authentication unit. The basic settings screen appears. Authentication unit (biometric type) AU-101 Authentication unit (biometric type) AU-10211 Authentication unit (IC card type)bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 11-2 11.1 Using authentication unit (IC card type) 11 11 Authentication unit (IC card type) This chapter describes the authentication unit (IC card type). 1. Authentication unit (IC card type) AU-201 11.1 Using authentication unit (IC card type) The authentication unit (IC card type) is an "IC card authentication " system that reads the IC card to perform personal authentication. Using this system, you can perform authentication with an IC card to log in to this machine or execute a print job when User Authentication is enabled in this machine. To use the authentication unit, first register the card ID of the user in this machine. The registered user, who is authenticated with the card ID, can log in to this machine or execute a print job. This section explains how to configure the required settings in this machine, register users, and log in with authentication. For details on how to place the IC card in the authentication unit, refer to the "Quick Guide [Copy/Print/Fax/Scan/Box Operations]". NOTICE Authentication unit (IC card type) AU-201 must be installed inside the working table WT-506. Do not disconnect the USB cable while using the authentication unit. Doing so may cause the system to become unstable. Do not leave the IC card within 1-9/16 inch (40 mm) of the card reader. 11.1.1 Configuring this machine NOTICE User authentication settings must be configured with MFP authentication on this machine. This device does not support external server authentication. For the [Public User] or [Account Track] settings, refer to page 7-31. To combine account track settings with user authentication settings, set Synchronize User Authentication & Account Track to "Synchronize". 1 Use the control panel of this machine to display the Administrator Settings screen. Press [4 User Authentication/Account Track], then [General Settings]. 1bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 11-3 11.1 Using authentication unit (IC card type) 11 2 Set [User Authentication] to "ON (MFP)", and then press [OK]. 3 Press [Yes], and then [OK]. 4 Press [8 Authentication Device Settings]. 5 Press [1 General Settings]. 6 Press [Card Authentication]. 7 Configure "IC Card Type" and "Operation Settings". % In "IC Card Type", specify the required IC card type. % For "Operation Settings", specify how to log in to this machine after registration. Card Authentication: Allows the user to log in by simply placing the IC card. Card Authentication + Password: Allows the user to log in by placing the IC card and entering the password. For details on how to log in to this machine, refer to page 11-15.bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 11-4 11.1 Using authentication unit (IC card type) 11 8 Press [OK] twice. 9 Press [2 Logoff Settings]. 10 Specify whether to log out the user when scanning the original has finished after the user logged in with the authentication unit. 11 Press [OK]. 12 Press [Close] twice. 11.1.2 Registering a user The following two methods can be used to register a user. - Connect the authentication unit to this machine, and directly register the target user in this machine - Connect the authentication unit to your computer, and use Data Administrator to register the target user NOTICE The registered user data is saved in the HDD of this machine. Changing the user authentication type of this machine or formatting the HDD will erase the registered user data. Registering a user using the control panel of this machine 1 Use the control panel of this machine to display the Administrator Settings screen. Press [4 User Authentication/Account Track], and then [2 User Authentication Settings]. 2 Press [2 User Registration]. 3 Select a desired registration number, and then press [Edit].bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 11-5 11.1 Using authentication unit (IC card type) 11 4 Press [Register Auth. Info.]. 5 Press [Edit]. 6 Place the IC card on the authentication unit, and press [OK]. 7 When message [Registration complete] appears, press [Close] twice. 8 Enter the user name and password. 9 Configure function permission settings as required. 10 Press [OK]. 11 Press [Close].bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 11-6 11.1 Using authentication unit (IC card type) 11 Registering a user using Data Administrator To use Data Administrator, configure this machine, and set up Data Administrator. For setup, install the IC Card Driver (USB-Driver) of the authentication unit, and then install Data Administrator IC Card Plugin. NOTICE Before setup, install Data Administrator V4.0 or later in your computer. For the Data Administrator operating environment and installation procedure, refer to the Data Administrator User's Guide. Checking the version of the installed Data Administrator 1 From the "Help" menu of Data Administrator, select "Version Information". NOTICE This software cannot be used if the version is "3.x". Install "4.x". If Data Administrator V3.x is installed, it is removed when V4.x is installed. 2 Click the [Plug-in version]. 3 In "Plug-in information list", confirm the plugin version of Data Administrator. % This software is available if the plugin version is "4.x".bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 11-7 11.1 Using authentication unit (IC card type) 11 Setup 1 Turn the main power of this machine off, and disconnect the authentication unit from this machine. 2 Install IC Card Driver (USB-Driver). Connect the authentication unit to the USB port of your computer. The "Found New Hardware" dialog box appears. 3 Select "Locate and install driver software (recommended)". 4 Insert the application CD-ROM provided with the authentication unit into the CD-ROM drive of the computer. 5 Click the "Browse my computer for driver software (advanced)".bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 11-8 11.1 Using authentication unit (IC card type) 11 6 Check that the driver's search location is the application CD-ROM, and then click the [Next]. % When the driver's search location is not the application CD-ROM, click the [Browse]. Select the IC Card Driver (USB-Driver) folder in the CD-ROM, and click the [OK]. % Installation starts.bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 11-9 11.1 Using authentication unit (IC card type) 11 7 Click the [Close]. Installation of the IC Card Driver (USB-Driver) is completed. 8 Install Data Administrator IC Card Plugin. Open the IC_Card_Plugin folder on the application CD-ROM, and then click setup.exe. 9 Select a language, and then click the [OK]. The installation program starts. 10 Follow the on-screen instructions to proceed with the installation. 11 Click the [Next].bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 11-10 11.1 Using authentication unit (IC card type) 11 12 Select "I accept the terms in the license agreement", and then click the [Next]. 13 Click the [Install]. 14 Click the [Finish]. Installation of the Data Administrator IC Card Plugin is completed, which completes the setup.bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 11-11 11.1 Using authentication unit (IC card type) 11 User registration To register a user with Data Administrator, connect the authentication unit to the USB port of the computer, and also connect the computer to this machine via network. 1 If the authentication unit is already connected to this machine, turn the main power switch of this machine off, and then disconnect the authentication unit. % When the authentication unit is already connected to the computer, go to step 4. NOTICE To turn the main power switch off and on, first turn the main power switch off, and then turn it on after 10 or more seconds has elapsed. Not doing so may result in an operation failure. When connecting or disconnecting the USB cable, hold the plug. Otherwise, the cable may be damaged. 2 Turn the main power on. 3 Connect the authentication unit to the USB port of the computer that contains Data Administrator. NOTICE Do not connect another USB device to the same port as for the authentication unit. Doing so reduces the USB power supply, resulting in an operation failure. To use the USB hub, be sure to connect the self-power USB hub that supplies 500 mA or more. Restart the procedure 5 or more seconds after connecting the authentication unit. 4 Data Administrator starts, and device information of this machine is imported. The Device Information window appears. % For details on how to import device information, refer to the Data Administrator User 's Guide.bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 11-12 11.1 Using authentication unit (IC card type) 11 5 In Select Function, select "Authentication Settings" - "User Setting", and then click the [Add]. 6 Select the desired template, and then click the [OK]. The User Registration window appears.bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 11-13 11.1 Using authentication unit (IC card type) 11 7 Enter the user name and password, and select the "IC card authentication" tab. % Enter the E-mail address and other information as required. 8 Place the IC card on the authentication unit, and click the [Start reading]. % If necessary, click [Card ID Input] to register the card ID. 9 Click the [OK]. % Repeat steps 5 to 12 to register all users.bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 11-14 11.1 Using authentication unit (IC card type) 11 10 Click [Export to the device]. % Select the user name and click the [Edit] to change the registered data. 11 Click the [Write]. % Data Administrator provides the batch copy function that batch-configures the registered user data in multiple machines with the authentication unit enabled. The registered user data is configured in this machine. 12 Click the [OK]. 13 Disconnect the authentication unit from the USB port of the computer. 14 Turn the main power switch of this machine off, connect the authentication unit to this machine, and turn the main power switch of this machine on.bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 11-15 11.1 Using authentication unit (IC card type) 11 NOTICE To turn the main power switch off and on, first turn the main power switch off, and then turn it on after 10 or more seconds has elapsed. Not doing so may result in an operation failure. When connecting or disconnecting the USB cable, hold the plug. Otherwise, the cable may be damaged. 11.1.3 Logging in to this machine This section explains how to log in to this machine with IC card authentication. - To use authentication unit (IC card type), register the information recorded in the IC card in advance. - If authentication fails frequently, IC card information may not be registered properly. Register IC card information again. - When the IC Card authentication is enabled, a registered user is authenticated by simply placing the IC card. Authentication is carried out when you place the IC card and enter the password when both IC cards and passwords are used for authentication. - Press [ID & PW] to log in by entering the user name and the password, without using the authentication unit. When IC card authentication is enabled % Place the IC card on the working table. The basic settings screen appears.bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 11-16 11.1 Using authentication unit (IC card type) 11 When IC card authentication + password authentication is enabled 1 Place the IC card on the working table. 2 Press [Password], and then enter the password. 3 Press either [Login] or the [Access] key. The basic settings screen appears.12 Specificationsbizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 12-2 12.1 Paper 12 12 Specifications This chapter describes the specifications of the paper, machine, and options. This product specification is subject to change without notice toward the improvement. 12.1 Paper Paper types and paper capacities *1 Paper where you do not print on both sides (for example, when something is already printed on the front side). *2 Fine and other special paper. *3 Paper where company names, preset text, and others are already printed. *4 Colored paper. *5 Paper that is registered as one of frequently used paper types. For paper weight and media adjustment settings, contact your service representative. Paper type Paper weight Paper capacity Plain paper Single Side Only *1 Special Paper *2 Letterhead *3 Colored Paper *4 User Paper 1 *5 User Paper 2 *5 17 lb to 23-15/16 lb (64 to 90 g/m2 ) Bypass tray: 150 sheets, Tray 1/2: 500 sheets Tray 3: 1,500 sheets, Tray 4: 1,000 sheets Large capacity unit LU-301: 3,000 sheets Large capacity unit LU-204: 2,500 sheets Thick 1 User Paper 3 *5 24-3/16 lb to 31-15/16 lb (91 to 120 g/m2 ) Bypass tray: 100 sheets, Tray 1/2: 400 sheets Tray 3: 1,150 sheets, Tray 4: 750 sheets Large capacity unit LU-301: 2,500 sheets Large capacity unit LU-204: 2,000 sheets Thick 1+ User Paper 4 *5 32-3/16 lb to 41-3/4 lb (121 to 157 g/m2 ) Bypass tray: 80 sheets, Tray 1/2: 280 sheets Tray 3: 800 sheets, Tray 4: 500 sheets Large capacity unit LU-301: 1,750 sheets Large capacity unit LU-204: 1,450 sheets Thick 2 User Paper 5 *5 42 lb to 55-5/8 lb (158 to 209 g/m2 ) Bypass tray: 70 sheets, Tray 1/2: 250 sheets Tray 3: 700 sheets, Tray 4: 450 sheets Large capacity unit LU-301: 1,550 sheets Large capacity unit LU-204: 1,250 sheets Thick 3 User Paper 6 *5 55-7/8 lb to 68-1/8 lb (210 to 256 g/m2 ) Bypass tray: 60 sheets, Tray 1/2: 200 sheets Tray 3: 600 sheets, Tray 4: 400 sheets Large capacity unit LU-301: 1,300 sheets Large capacity unit LU-204: 1,000 sheets Thick 4 68-3/8 lb to 79-13/16 lb (257 to 300 g/m2 ) Bypass tray: 50 sheets Transparency - Bypass tray: 20 sheets Postcards - Bypass tray: 50 sheets Tray 3: 200 sheets * , Tray 4: 200 sheets * * Ask the service representative to change the setting. Envelope - Bypass tray: 10 sheets Label sheets - Bypass tray: 50 sheetsbizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 12-3 12.1 Paper 12 NOTICE Paper other than plain paper, such as OHP transparencies and colored paper, is called special paper. Be sure to select a special paper setting for paper trays loaded with media such as OHP transparencies and colored paper. If the paper size and paper type have not been correctly specified, a paper jam may occur or poor image quality may result. When you select Plain Paper, Thick 1, Thick 1+, Thick 2, Thick 3, or Thick 4 for the bypass tray, you can select Duplex 2nd Side. Select Duplex 2nd Side when you load paper where something is printed on one side.bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 12-4 12.2 Machine specifications 12 12.2 Machine specifications bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 Specification Type Scanner, printer, desktop, or stand-alone Document holder Stationary (mirror scanning) Photo conductor OPC Light source White rare-gas fluorescent Copy system Laser electrostatic copying Developing system Dry 2-component HMT developing system Fusing system Belt fusing Resolution Scanning 600 dpi e 600 dpi Output 1,800 dpi e 600 dpi Originals Type Sheets, books (two-page spread), three-dimensional objects Size Max. 11 e17 (A3) Weight 4-7/16 lb (2 kg) (three-dimensional objects) Copying paper type Plain paper (17 lb to 23-15/16 lb (64 to 90 g/m2 )), Thick1 (24-3/16 lb to 31- 15/16 lb (91 to 120 g/m2 )), Thick1+ (32-3/16 lb to 41-3/4 lb (121 to 157 g/m2 )), Thick2 (42 lb to 55-5/8 lb (158 to 209 g/m2 )), Thick3 (55-7/8 lb to 68-1/8 lb (210 to 256 g/m2 )), Thick4 (68-3/8 lb to 79-13/16 lb (257 to 300 g/m2 )) * , Letterhead, colored paper, transparency * , postcard ** , envelope * , label sheet * , banner paper (33-13/16 lb to 55-7/8 lb (127 to 210 g/m2 )) * 2 Sided: Plain paper (17 lb to 23-15/16 lb (64 to 90 g/m2 )), Thick1/1+/2/3 (24-3/16 lb to 68-1/8 lb (91 to 256 g/m2 )) * Available for bypass tray. ** Available for bypass tray or tray 3/4. (When using tray 3/4, ask the service representative to change the setting.) Copy paper size 12-1/4 e 18 w, 12 e 18 w to 8-1/2 e 11 v, A3 w to A5 w, 8 e 13 w*1 , 16K v, 8K w 8-1/2 e 11 v, 5-1/2 e 8-1/2 v * , A4 v to A5 v, 16K v *2 12-1/4 e 18 w, 12 e 18 w to 5-1/2 e 8-1/2 w/v, A3 w to B6 w, A6 w, 4 e 6 w, 8 e 13 w*1 , A6 card w, 16K w/v, 8K w Width: 3-9/16 to 12-1/4 (90 mm to 311.1 mm), length: 5-1/2 to 47-1/4 (139.7 mm to 1,200 mm) *1 There are six types of foolcaps: 8-1/2 e 13-1/2 w, 220 e 330 mmw, 8-1/2 e 13 w, 8-1/4 e 13 w, 8-1/8 e 13-1/4 w, and 8 e 13 w. Any one of these sizes is selectable. For details, contact your service representative. *2 Banner Paper Width: 8-1/4 to 11-11/16 (210 to 297 mm) Length: 18 to 47-1/4 (457 to 1,200 mm) Number of sheets loaded in output tray Plain paper 250 sheets Thick 10 sheets Transparency 1 sheetbizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 12-5 12.2 Machine specifications 12 Number of loadable sheets (8-1/2 e 11 (A4)) Tray 1 or 2 Plain paper: 500 sheets (21-1/4 lb (80 g/m2 ))/550 sheets (17 lb (64 g/m2 )), Thick 1: 400 sheets, Thick 1+: 280 sheets, Thick 2: 250 sheets, Thick 3: 200 sheets Tray 3 Plain paper: 1,500 sheets (21-1/4 lb (80 g/m2 ))/1,650 sheets (17 lb (64 g/m2 )), Thick 1: 1,150 sheets, Thick 1+: 800 sheets, Thick 2: 700 sheets, Thick 3: 600 sheets, Postcard: 200 sheets Tray 4 Plain paper: 1,000 sheets (21-1/4 lb (80 g/m2 ))/1,100 sheets (17 lb (64 g/m2 )), Thick 1: 750 sheets, Thick 1+: 500 sheets, Thick 2: 450 sheets, Thick 3: 400 sheets, Postcard: 200 sheets Bypass tray Plain paper: 150 sheets (21-1/4 lb (80 g/m2 )), Thick 1: 100 sheets, Thick 1+: 80 sheets, Thick 2: 70 sheets, Thick 3: 60 sheets, Thick 4: 50 sheets, Transparency: 20 sheets, Postcard or label sheet: 50 sheets, Envelope: 10 sheets Warm-up time Period from the time the [main power switch] was turned on to the time [sub power switch] was turned on to get ready for printing (room temperature is 73.4 °F (23 °C)) C652/C652DS: 30 sec. or less C552/C552DS: 60 sec. or less C452: 60 sec. or less (Black: 30 sec. or less) Period from the time [main power switch] was turned on to the time this machine is ready for printing (room temperature is 73.4 °F (23 °C)) C652/C652DS: 39 sec. or less C552/C552DS: 39 sec. or less C452: 60 sec. or less (Black: 45 sec. or less) Warm-up time may vary depending on the operating environment and usage. Image chipping width Top edge 3/16 (4.2 mm) Bottom edge 1/8 (3.0 mm) Right edge 1/8 (3.0 mm) Left edge 1/8 (3.0 mm) First copy (When 8-1/2 e 11 v (A4 v) printing) C652/C652DS Full color: 5.5 sec. or less Black: 3.8 sec. or less C552/C552DS Full color: 6.0 sec. or less Black: 4.3 sec. or less C452 Full color: 6.0 sec. or less Black: 4.8 sec. or less Specificationbizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 12-6 12.2 Machine specifications 12 Copy speed (When 8-1/2 e 11 (A4) printing) Full Color (Simplex/Duplex) C652/C652DS Plain paper: 50 sheets/min., Thick1 or 1+: 32 sheets/min., Thick2, 3 or 4, Special paper, Glossy mode: 25 sheets/min. C552/C552DS Plain paper: 45 sheets/min., Thick1 or 1+: 28 sheets/min., Thick 2, 3 or 4, Special paper, Glossy mode: 23 sheets/min. C452 Plain paper: 45 sheets/min., Thick1 or 1+: 28 sheets/min., Thick2, 3 or 4, Special paper, Glossy mode: 23 sheets/min. Black (Simplex/Duplex) C652/C652DS Plain paper: 65 sheets/min., Thick1 or 1+: 32 sheets/min., Thick2, 3 or 4, Special paper, Glossy mode: 25 sheets/min. C552/C552DS Plain paper: 55 sheets/min., Thick1 or 1+: 28 sheets/min., Thick2, 3 or 4, Special paper, Glossy mode: 23 sheets/min. C452 Plain paper: 45 sheets/min., Thick1 or 1+: 28 sheets/min., Thick2, 3 or 4, Special paper, Glossy mode: 23 sheets/min. Copy magnification Full size: 100.0% ± 0.5% Enlarge: 121.4%, 129.4%, 154.5%, or 200.0% (115.4%, 122.4%, 141.4%, or 200.0%) Reduce: 78.5%, 73.3%, 64.7%, or 50.0% (86.6%, 81.6%, 70.7%, or 50.0%) Manual: 25.0 to 400.0% (in 0.1% steps) Number of continuous copies 1 to 9999 sheets Density adjustment Copy density Manual density adjustment (9 levels) Background density Manual or automatic density adjustment (9 levels) Power supply North American model (inch): AC 120 V, 16 A, 60 Hz European model (cm): AC 220 - 240 V, 10 A, 50/60 Hz Max. power consumption C652/C652DS: 2,100W C552/C552DS: 2,000 W C452: 2,000 W Size Width 25-9/16 e Depth 30-9/16 (excluding panel)/34-5/8 (including panel) e Height 45-1/2 (including ADF) (Width 650 mme Depth 777 mm (excluding panel)/879 mm (including panel) e Height 1,155 mm (including ADF)) Machine occupation dimensions C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS: Width 100-9/16 e Depth 60-1/16 e Height 64-15/16 (Width 2,554 mm e Depth 1,525 mm e Height 1,650 mm) The dimensions above are measured when the finisher (FS-526) tray extension, paper trays and LCU (LU-204) are pulled out, and the ADF is open. C452: Width 84-9/16 e Depth 60-1/16 e Height 64-15/16 (Width 2,148mm e Depth 1,525mm e Height1,650mm) The dimensions above are measured when the finisher (FS-527) tray extension and paper trays and LCU (LU-204) are pulled out, and the ADF is open. Memory size (hard disk capacity) 2,048 MB (250 GB) Weight bizhub C652/C552/C452 :Approx. 487-13/16 lb (Approx. 221 kg) bizhub C652DS/C552DS :Approx. 223 kg Specificationbizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 12-7 12.2 Machine specifications 12 Automatic duplex unit Reverse automatic document feeder (bizhub C652/C552/C452) Reverse automatic document feeder (bizhub C652DS/C552DS) Specification Paper type Plain paper (17 lb to 23-15/16 lb (64 to 90 g/m2 )), Thick1 (24-3/16 lb to 31- 15/16 lb (91 to 120 g/m2 )), Thick1+ (32-3/16 lb to 41-3/4 lb (121 to 157 g/m2 )), Thick2 (42 lb to 55-5/8 lb (158 to 209 g/m2 )), Thick3 (55-7/8 lb to 68-1/8 lb (210 to 256 g/m2 )) Paper size 12-1/4 e 18 w, 12 e 18 w to 5-1/2 e 8-1/2 w, A3 w to B6 w, A6 w, 8 e 13 w*1 , 16K w/v, 8K w, 4 e 6 w Width: 3-15/16 to 12-1/4 (100 to 311.1 mm), Length: 5-13/16 to 18 (148 to 457.2 mm) *1 There are six types of foolcaps: 8-1/2 e 13-1/2 w, 220 e 330 mmw, 8-1/2 e 13 w, 8-1/4 e 13 w, 8-1/8 e 13-1/4 w, and 8 e 13 w. Any one of these sizes is selectable. For details, contact your service representative. Power supply Supply from machine Specification Original feed function 1-sided original, 2-sided original, mixed original Original types 1-sided Plain paper (9-5/16 lb to 55-7/8 lb (35 to 210 g/m2 )) 2-sided, mixed original Plain paper (13-5/16 lb to 34-1/16 lb (50 to 128 g/m2 )) Original Size 1-Sided/2-Sided Originals: 11 e 17 w to 5-1/2 e 8-1/2 w/v, A3 w to B6 w, A6 w, 8 e 13 w For details on handling mixed originals, refer to p. 5-16. Original loading capacity 1- or 2-sided original: Max. 100 sheets (21-1/4 lb (80 g/m2 )) Power supply Supply from machine Max. power consumption 60 W or less Size Width 24-5/16 e Depth 22-5/8 e Height 5-1/8 (Width 618 mm e Depth 575 mm e Height 130 mm) Weight Approx. 35-1/4 lb (Approx. 16 kg) Specification Original feed function 1-sided original, 2-sided original, mixed original Original types 1-sided, 2-sided Plain paper (9-5/16 lb to 55-7/8 lb (35 to 210 g/m2 )) mixed original Plain paper (13-5/16 lb to 34-1/16 lb (50 to 128 g/m2 )) Original Size 1-Sided/2-Sided Originals: 11 e 17 w, 8-1/2 e 11 w/v, A3 w to B6 w, A6 w, 8 e 13 w For details on handling mixed originals, refer to p. 5-16. Original loading capacity 1- or 2-sided original: Max. 100 sheets (21-1/4 lb (80 g/m2 )) Power supply Supply from machine Max. power consumption 80 W or less Size Width 24-5/16 e Depth 22-5/8 e Height 5-1/8 (Width 618 mm e Depth 575 mm e Height 129 mm) Weight Approx. 39-11/16 lb (Approx. 18 kg)bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 12-8 12.3 Options 12 12.3 Options Large capacity unit LU-301 Large capacity unit LU-204 * The maximum number of loadable sheets for each paper size is 2,500 sheets (for 21-1/4 lb (80 g/m2 )) or 2,750 sheets (for 17 lb (64 g/m2 )). Specification Paper type Plain paper (17 lb to 23-15/16 lb (64 to 90 g/m2 )), Thick 1 (24-3/16 lb to 31- 15/16 lb (91 to 120 g/m2 )), Thick 1+ (32-3/16 lb to 41-3/4 lb (121 to 157 g/m2 )), Thick 2 (42 lb to 55-5/8 lb (158 to 209 g/m2 )), Thick 3 (55-7/8 lb to 68-1/8 (210 to 256 g/m2 )) Paper size 8-1/2 e 11 v, A4 v Number of loadable sheets Plain paper: 3,000 sheets (21-1/4 lb (80 g/m2 ))/3,300 sheets (17 lb (64 g/m2 )), Thick 1: 2,500 sheets, Thick 1+: 1,750 sheets, Thick 2: 1,550 sheets, Thick 3: 1,300 sheets Power supply Supply from machine Max. power consumption 22W or less Size Width 14-7/16e Depth 20-13/16e Height 15-15/16 (Width 367 mm e Depth 528 mm e Height 405 mm) Weight Approx. 39-11/16 lb (Approx. 18 kg) Specification Paper type Plain paper (17 lb to 23-15/16 lb (64 to 90 g/m2 )), Thick 1 (24-3/16 lb to 31- 15/16 lb (91 to 120 g/m2 )), Thick 1+ (32-3/16 lb to 41-3/4 lb (121 to 157 g/m2 )), Thick 2 (42 lb to 55-5/8 lb (158 to 209 g/m2 )), Thick 3 (55-7/8 lb to 68-1/8 lb (210 to 256 g/m2 )) Paper size * 12 e 18 w, 11 e 17 w to 8-1/2 e 11 w/v, A3w, B4 w, A4 w/v Number of loadable sheets Plain paper: 2,500 sheets (21-1/4 lb (80 g/m2 ))/2,750 sheets (17 lb (64 g/m2 )), Thick 1: 2,000 sheets, Thick 1+: 1,450 sheets, Thick 2: 1,250 sheets, Thick 3: 1,000 sheets Power supply Supply from machine Max. power consumption 22W or less Size Width 24-3/4e Depth 21-7/8e Height 15-15/16 (Width 629 mm e Depth 556 mm e Height 405 mm) Weight Approx. 55-1/8 lb (Approx. 25 kg)bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 12-9 12.3 Options 12 Finisher FS-526 Specification Output tray Output tray 1, output tray 2 Feeding function Group, Sort, Offset Group * , Offset Sort * , Staple * * Fed into output tray 2 Paper type Plain paper (15-15/16 lb to 23-15/16 lb (60 to 90 g/m2 )) Thick (24-3/16 lb to 79-13/16 lb (91 to 300 g/m2 )), transparency, postcard, envelope, label sheet, letterhead paper, colored paper Staple: Plain paper (17 lb to 23-15/16 lb (64 to 90 g/m2 )) Thick (24-3/16 lb to 55-5/8 lb (91 to 209 g/m2 )) * * Can be used only as a cover page Paper size

(Main Tray) 12 e 18 w to 5-1/2 e 8-1/2 w/v, A3 w to A6 w/v, 8 e 13 w*1 , 16K w/v, 8K w Width: 3-15/16 to 13 (100 to 330.2 mm), length: 5-1/2 to 19-1/4 (139 to 488 mm) Staple: 11 e 17 w to 8-1/2 e 11 w/v, A3 w to B5 w/v, A5 v, 8 e 13 w*1 , 5-1/2 e 8-1/2 v, 16K w/v, 8K w, Width: 7-3/16 to 13 (182 to 330 mm), length: 5-1/2 to 19-1/4 (139 to 488 mm)

(Sub Tray) 13 e 19 w to 5-1/2 e 8-1/2 w/v, A3 w to A5 w/v, B6 w, A6 w, 8 e 13 w*1 , 11 e 17 w, 16K w/v, 8K w Width: 3-15/16 to 13-1/16 (100 to 331 mm), length: 5-1/2 to 19-1/4 (139 to 488 mm) *1 There are six types of foolcaps: 8-1/2 e 13-1/2 w, 220 e 330 mmw, 8-1/2 e 13 w, 8-1/4 e 13 w, 8-1/8 e 13-1/4 w, and 8 e 13 w. Any one of these sizes is selectable. For details, contact your service representative. Paper loading capacity < Output tray 2> Group/Sort 3,000 sheets *1 (11 e 8-1/2 w/v, 7-1/4 e 10-1/2 w/v, A4 w/v, B5 w/v, 16K w/v) 1,500 sheets (12 e 18 w*2 , 8-1/2 e 14 w, A3 w, B4 w, 8 e 13 w*3 , 8K w) 500 sheets (5-1/2 e 8-1/2 w/v, A5 w/v, B6 w, A6 w) *1 2,500 sheets when saddle stitcher SD-508 is installed. *2 12 e 18 is 304.8 e 457.2 mm that is one-size larger than A3. *3 There are six types of foolcaps: 8-1/2 e 13-1/2 w, 220 e 330 mm w, 8-1/2 e 13 w, 8-1/4 e 13 w, 8-1/8 e 13- 1/4 w, 8 e 13 w. Any one of these sizes is selectable. For details, contact your service representative. Offset Group/Offset Sort When the length of paper is 5- 15/16 to 12-5/8 (150 mm to 320 mm) 300 sets When the length of paper is other than 5-15/16 to 12-5/8 (150 mm to 320 mm) 150 setsbizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 12-10 12.3 Options 12 Saddle stitcher SD-508 Staple 11 e 17 w, A3 w 2 sheets-9 sheets 50 sets 10 sheets-20 sheets 50 sets 21 sheets-30 sheets 30 sets 31 sheets-40 sheets 25 sets 41 sheets-50 sheets 20 sets Other than 11 e 17 w, A3 w 2 sheets-9 sheets 100 sets 10 sheets-20 sheets 50 sets 21 sheets-30 sheets 30 sets 31 sheets-40 sheets 25 sets 41 sheets-50 sheets 20 sets 51 sheets-60 sheets 15 sets 61 sheets-100 sheets 10 sets Paper loading capacity < Output tray 1> 100 sheets Maximum number of stapled sheets Plain paper (17 to 23-15/16 lb (64 to 90 g/m2 )) 100 sheets Shift amount 1-3/16 (30 mm) Power supply Supply from machine Max. power consumption 105 W or less (when all applicable options are installed) Size Width 28-1/2 (Main tray is pulled output: 33-7/16, Sub tray is pulled output: 34- 11/16) e Depth 27-15/16 e Height 40-3/8 (Width 723.8 (Main tray is pulled output: 848.8 mm, Sub tray is pulled output: 881.2 mm) mm e Depth 709.5 e Height 1,025 mm) Weight Approx. 132-1/4 lb (Approx. 60 kg) Consumables Staples MS-10A For EH-1028 (Product No. 1002 manufactured by MAX) (5,000 staples included) e 1 unit Specification Specification Feeding function Center Staple and Fold, Half-Fold, Tri-Fold (Belt conveyer feeding) Paper type Center Staple and Fold: Plain paper (17 lb to 23-15/16 lb (64 to 90 g/m2 )) Half-Fold or Tri-Fold: Plain paper (17 lb to 23-15/16 lb (64 to 90 g/m2 ))bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 12-11 12.3 Options 12 * Not applicable to multi-function jobs (jobs with multiple functions combined). Punch kit PK-516 Paper size Center Staple and Fold, Half-Fold: 12 e 18 w to 8-1/2 e 11 w, A3w, B4w, A4w, 8K w Width: 8-1/4 to 12-3/8 (210 mm to 314 mm), length: 11 to 18-1/16 (279 mm to 458 mm) Tri-Fold: 8-1/2 e 11 w, A4w, 16K w Maximum number of sheets that can be centerstapled 20 sheets, 19 sheets (21-1/4 lb (80 g/m2 )) or 16 sheets (23-15/16 (90 g/m2 )) + Thick (55-5/8 lb (209 g/m2 )) 1 sheet Maximum number of folded sheets Half-Fold: 3 sheets Tri-Fold: 3 sheets Number of sheets that can be loaded into the folding output tray Plain paper (21-1/4 lb (80 g/m2 )) * When the length of paper is 13 (330 mm) or more One sheet folded 20 sets Two sheets stapled and folded 18 sets Three sheets stapled and folded 15 sets Four sheets stapled 12 sets Five sheets stapled 8 sets Six to 15 sheets stapled 5 sets 16 to 20 sheets stapled 5 sets Tri-Fold - When the length of paper is 13 (330 mm) than less One sheet folded 10 sheets Two sheets stapled and folded 10 sets Three sheets stapled and folded 10 sets Four sheets stapled 5 sets Five sheets stapled 5 sets Six to 15 sheets stapled 5 sets 16 to 20 sheets stapled 4 sets Tri-Fold 20 sets Size Width 11-1/16e Depth 23-1/4e Height 20-7/8 (Width 281.3 mm e Depth 596.4 mm e Height 529.8 mm) Weight Approx. 49-13/16 lb (Approx. 22.6 kg), Approx. 8-3/8 lb (Approx. 3.8 kg) (Output tray) Consumables Staple MS-5C For EH-554 (Product No. 500 manufactured by MAX) (5,000 staples included) e 1 unit Power supply Supply from finisher Specification Specification Number of punch holes 2 holes, 3 holes or 4 holes Paper type Plain paper (17-15/16 lb to 23-15/16 lb (60 g/m2 to 90 g/m2 )), Thick (24-3/16 lb to 79-13/16 lb (91 g/m2 to 300 g/m2 ))bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 12-12 12.3 Options 12 Job Separator JS-602 Z-Folding Unit ZU-606 Paper size "2-Hole" Punch setting: 11 e 17 w to 5-1/2 e 8-1/2 w, A3w to A5w/v, 8 e 13 w* , 16K w/v, 8K w, 7-1/4 e 10-1/2 w/v "3-Hole"/"4-Hole" Punch settings: A3 w, B4 w, A4 v, B5 v, 11 e 17 w, 8-1/2 e 11 v, 7-1/4 e 10-1/2 v, 8K w, 16K v * There are four types of foolcaps: 8-1/2 e 13 w, 8-1/4 e 13 w, 8-1/8 e 13-1/4 w, 8 e 13 w. Any one of these sizes is selectable. For details, contact your service representative. Power supply Supply from finisher Size Width 5-3/4 e Depth 25-3/16e Height 9-3/16 (Width 146.2 mm e Depth 639.2 mm e Height 233.8 mm) Weight Approx. 9-15/16 lb (4.5 kg) Specification Specification Output tray Output tray 3 Feeding function Group, Sort Paper type Plain paper (17 lb to 23-15/16 lb (64 g/m2 to 90 g/m2 )) Paper size 11 e 17 w - 5-1/2 e 8-1/2 w, 8 e 13 w* , A3 w to A5 w * There are five types of foolcaps: 8-1/2 e 13-1/2 w, 8-1/2 e 13 w, 8-1/4 e 13 w, 8-1/8 e 13-1/4 w, 8 e 13 w. Any one of these sizes is selectable. For details, contact your service representative. Paper loading capacity Plain paper (80 g/m2 ) 8-1/2 × 11 w, A4 w 100 sheets Other than 8-1/2 × 11 w, A4 w 50 sheets Size Width 13-7/16 e Depth 21-1/8 e Height 5-7/8 (Width 341 mm e Depth 537 mm e Height 149 mm) Weight Approx. 3-7/8 lb (Approx. 1.75 kg) Specification Number of punch holes 2 holes, 3 holes, 4 holes Paper type when hole punching is selected Plain paper 17 lb to 23-15/16 lb (64g/m2 - 90g/m2 ) Paper size when hole punching is selected 11 e 17 w - 5-1/2 e 8-1/2 w/v, 8 × 13 w* , A3 w to A5 w/v * There are four types of foolcaps: 8-1/2 e 13 w, 8-1/4 e 13 w, 8-1/8 e 13-1/4 w, 8 e 13 w. Any one of these sizes is selectable. For details, contact your service representative. Fold type Z-Fold Paper type when Z-folding is selected Plain paper (64g/m2 - 90g/m2 ) Paper size when Z-folding is selected 11 e 17 w, 8-1/2 e 14 w, A3 w, B4 w Power supply Supply from electrical outlet Size Width 6-11/16 e Depth 26 e Height 40-7/16 (Width 169.7 mm e Depth 660 mm e Height 1027.5 mm) Weight Approx. 99-3/16 lb (Approx. 45 kg)bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 12-13 12.3 Options 12 Post Inserter PI-505 Finisher FS-527 Specification Configuration 2 trays (upper and lower) Cover paper type Plain paper 17 lb to 23-15/16 lb (64-90g/m2 ), Thick 24-1/4 lb to 55-5/8 lb (91 g/m2 -209 g/m2 ) Cover paper size 8-1/2 e 11 w/v, 7-1/4 e 10-1/2 w/v, 5-1/2 e 8-1/2/v, A4 w/v to A5 v, 16K w/v Width: 7-3/16 to 12-1/4 (182 mm to 311.1 mm) Length: 5-1/2 to 11-11/16 (139 mm to 297 mm) 12 e 18 w, 11 e 17 w, 8-1/2 e 14 w, 8-1/2 e 11 w/v, 7-1/4 e 10-1/2 w/v, 5-1/2 e 8-1/2 v, 8 e 13 w*1 , A3 w to 5 v, 16K w/v, 8K w, SRA4 w Width: 7-3/16 to 12-1/4 (182 mm to 311.1 mm) Length: 5-1/2 to 11-11/16 (139 mm to 457.2 mm) *1 There are four types of foolcaps: 8-1/2 e 13-1/2 w, 220 e 330 mm w, 8- 1/2 e 13 w, 8-1/4 e 13 w. Any one of these sizes is selectable. For details, contact your service representative. Paper loading capacity Plain paper 21-1/4 lb (80 g/m2 ) 200 sheets for each tray Power supply Supply from finisher Size Width 20-1/8 e Depth 25 e 8-11/16 (Width 511 mm e Depth 635 mm e Height 220 mm) Weight Approx. 23-1/8 lb (Approx. 10.5 kg) Specification Output tray Output tray 1, Output tray 2 Feeding function Group, Sort, Offset Group*, Offset Sort*, Staple* * Fed into Output tray 2 Paper type Group/Sort: Plain paper (15-15/16 lb to 23-15/16 lb (60 g/m2 to 90 g/m2 )), Thick (24-3/16 lb to 79-13/16 lb (91 g/m2 to 300 g/m2 )), Transparency, Postcards, Envelope, Label sheets, letterhead paper, banner paper Offset Group/ Offset Sort: Plain paper (15-15/16 lb to 23-15/16 lb (60 g/m2 to 90 g/m2 )), Thick (24-3/16 lb to 79-13/16 lb (91 g/m2 to 300 g/m2 )) Staple: Plain paper (15-15/16 lb to 23-15/16 lb (60 g/m2 to 90 g/m2 )), Thick (24-3/16 lb to 82-7/16 lb (91 g/m2 to 310 g/m2 ))* * There is a limit on the number of sheets. Paper size < Output tray 1 > 12-1/4 e 18 w, 11 e 17 w to 5-1/2 e 8-1/2 w/v, A3 w to B6 w, A6 w Width: 3-9/16 to 12/1/4 (90 mm to 311.15 mm), Length: 5-1/2 to 47-1/4 (139.7 mm to 1200 mm) < Output tray 2 > Group/Sort: 12-1/4 e 18 w, 11 e 17 w to 5-1/2 e 8-1/2 w/v, A3 w to B6 w, A6 w Width: 3-15/16 to 12-1/4 (100 mm to 311.15 mm), Length: 5-1/2 to 18 (139.7 mm to 457.2 mm) Offset Group / Offset Sort: 12-1/4 e 18 w, 11 e 17 w, 8-1/2 e 14 w, 8-1/2 e 11 w/v, A3 w to A5 w Width: 7-3/16 to 12-1/4 (182 mm to 311.15 mm), Length: 5-7/8 to 18 (148.5 mm to 457.2 mm) Staple: 11 e 17 w, 8-1/2 e 11 w/v, A3 w to A5 v Width: 7-3/16 to 11-1/4 (182 mm to 297 mm), Length: 5-7/8 to 17(148.5 mm to 431.8 mm)bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 12-14 12.3 Options 12 Saddle stitcher SD-509 Paper loading capacity < Output tray 1> Plain paper (15-15/16 lb to 23-15/16 lb (60 g/m2 to 90 g/m2 )) 200 sheets Thick (24-3/16 lb to 79-13/16 lb (91 g/m2 to 300 g/m2 )), Transparency, Postcards, Envelope, Label sheets, letterhead paper 20 sheets Paper loading height: 1-3/8 (35 mm) Paper loading capacity < Output tray 2> Group/Sort Plain paper (15- 15/16 lb to 23- 15/16 lb (60 g/m2 to 90 g/m2 )) 8-1/2 × 11 w, A4 w or less 3000 sheets 8-1/2 × 14 w, B4 w or more 1500 sheets 5-1/2 × 8-1/2 w, A5 w or less 500 sheets Thick (24-3/16 lb to 79-13/16 lb (91 g/m2 to 300 g/m2 )), Transparency, Postcards, Envelope, Label sheets, letterhead paper 20 sheets Offset Group / Offset Sort Plain paper (15- 15/16 lb to 23- 15/16 lb (60 g/m2 to 90 g/m2 )) 8-1/2 × 11 w, A4 w or less 3000 sheets 8-1/2 × 14 w, B4 w or more 1500 sheets 5-1/2 × 8-1/2 w, A5 w or less 500 sheets Staple Plain paper (15- 15/16 lb to 23- 15/16 lb (60 g/m2 to 90 g/m2 )) 2 sheets-9 sheets: 100 sets * * 8-1/2 × 14 w, B4 w or more: 50 sets 10 sheets-20 sheets: 50 sets 21 sheets-30 sheets: 30 sets 31 sheets-40 sheets: 25 sets 41 sheets-50 sheets: 20 sets Paper loading height: 14-3/4 (375 mm) (8-1/2 × 11 w, A4 w or less)/7-3/8 (187.5 mm) (8-1/2 × 14 w, B4 w or more) Maximum number of folded sheets Plain paper (15-15/16 lb to 23-15/16 lb (60 g/m2 to 90 g/m2 )): 50 sheets Thick (24-3/16 lb to 31-15/16 lb (91g/m2 to 120 g/m2 )): 30 sheets Thick (32-3/16 lb to 55-5/8 lb (121 g/m2 to 209 g/m2 )): 15 sheets Example number of stapled sheets: Thick (55-5/8 lb (209 g/m2 )) 2 sheets + Plain paper 23-15/16 lb (90 g/m2 ) 48 sheets Shift amount 1-/16 (30 mm) Power supply Supply from machine Max. power consumption 56 W or less Size Width 20-13/16 (25-7/8) e Depth 25-1/4 e Height 48-3/8 (Width 528 (658) mm e Depth 641 mm e Height 1025 (1087) mm) The numbers enclosed in parentheses ( ) indicate the values applied when the tray is pulled output Weight Approx. 92-5/8 lb (Approx. 42 kg) Consumables Staples SK-602 For EH-590 (Product No.505 manufactured by MAX) (5,000 staples included) e 1 unit Specification Specification Feeding function Center Staple and Fold, Half-Foldbizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 12-15 12.3 Options 12 Punch Kit PK-517 Job Separator JS-504 Paper type Plain paper (15-15/16 lb to 23-15/16 lb (60 g/m2 to 90 g/m2 )) Thick 24-3/16 lb to 55-5/8 lb (91 g/m2 - 209 g/m2 )* * Can be used only as a cover page Paper size 12-1/4 × 18 w, 11 × 17 w, 8-1/2 × 14 w, 8-1/2 × 11 w, A3 w, B4 w, A4 w Width: 8-1/4 to 12-14 (210 mm to 311.15 mm), Length: 11 to 18 (279.4 mm to 457.2 mm) Maximum number of sheets that can be centerstapled 15 sheets, 14 sheets (15-15/16 lb to 23-15/16 lb (60 g/m2 to 90 g/m2 ))+ 1 sheets 15-15/16 lb to 55-5/8 lb (60 g/m2 to 209 g/m2 ) Maximum number of folded sheets 3 sheets Number of sheets that can be loaded into the folding output tray Number of stapled and folded sheets 1 sheets - 3 sheets 20 sets 4 sheets- 10 sheets 10 sets 11 sheets- 15 sheets 5 sets Size Width 9-7/16 e Depth 22-13/16 e Height 21 (Width 239 mm e Depth 579 mm e Height 534 mm) Weight Approx. 52-15/16 lb (Approx. 24 kg) Consumables Staples SK-602 For EH-280 (Product No.505 manufactured by MAX) (5,000 staples included) e 2 unit Power supply Supply from finisher FS-527 Specification Specification Number of punch holes 2 holes, 3 holes or 4 holes Paper type Plain paper (15-15/16 lb to 23-15/16 lb (60 g/m2 to 90 g/m2 )), Thick 24-3/16 lb to 68-1/8 lb (91 g/m2 to 256 g/m2 ) Paper size "2-Hole"/"3-Hole" Punch settings 11 × 17 w to 8-1/2 × 11 w/v, A3 w to B5 w/v, 16K w/v, 8K w A3 w, B4 w, A4 v, B5 v, 11 e 17 w, 8-1/2 e 11 v, 7-1/4 e 10-1/2 v, 8K w, 16K v Power supply Supply from finisher FS-527 Size Widht 2-5/16 e Depth 18-1/2 e Height 5-5/16 inch (Width 58 mm e Depth 470 mm e Height 135 mm) Weight Approx. 3-15/16 lb (Approx. 1.8 kg) Specification Output tray Output tray 1, Output tray 2 Feeding function Group, Sort, Offset Group, Offset Sort Paper type

Plain paper (15-15/16 lb to 23-15/16 lb (60 g/m2 to 90 g/m2 ))

Plain paper (15-15/16 lb to 23-15/16 lb (60 g/m2 to 90 g/m2 )), Thick 24-3/16 lb to 72-1/16 lb (91 g/m2 - 271 g/m2 ), Transparency, Postcards, Label sheets, Envelope, Banner paper Paper size 12-1/4 e 18 w, Postcards, Banner Paper, 11 e 17 w - 5-1/2 e 8-1/2 w/v, A3 w to B6 w, A6 wbizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 12-16 12.3 Options 12 Job Separator JS-603 Authentication unit (biometric type) AU-101 Paper loading capacity

Plain paper (15-15/16 lb to 23-15/16 lb (60 g/m2 to 90 g/m2 )): 50 sheets

Plain paper (15-15/16 lb to 23-15/16 lb (60 g/m2 to 90 g/m2 )): 150 sheets, Thick 24-3/16 lb to 72-1/16 lb (91 g/m2 - 271 g/m2 ), Transparency, Postcards, Label sheets: 20 sheets Envelope: 10 sheets Banner Paper: 1 sheets Power supply Supply from machine Max. power consumption 40 W or less Shift amount 1-3/16 (30 mm) Offset function

Plain paper, Thick 11 e 17 w to 8-1/2 e 11 w/v, A3 w to B5 w Size Width 16-1/4 (413 mm)/21-8/5 (550 mm) (when tray extension is pulled out) e Depth 18-3/4 (477 mm) e Height 5-1/16 (129 mm) Weight Approx. 11-1/4 lb (Approx. 5 kg) Specification Specification Output tray Output tray 3 Feeding function Group, Sort Paper type Plain paper (15-15/16 lb to 23-15/16 lb (60 g/m2 to 90 g/m2 )), Thick 24-3/16 lb to 68-1/8 lb (91 g/m2 -256 g/m2 ), Transparency, Envelope, Label sheets, Letterhead Paper Paper size 12-1/4 e 18 w, 11 e 17 w to 5-1/2 e 8-1/2 w, A3 w to A5 w Paper loading capacity Plain paper (15-15/16 lb to 23-15/16 lb (60 g/m2 to 90 g/m2 )): 100 sheets, Thick (24-3/16 lb to 79-13/16 lb (91 g/m2 to 300 g/m2 )), Transparency, Envelope, Label sheets, Letterhead Paper: 10 sheets Paper loading height: 7/8 (22 mm) Size Width 14-7/16 e Depth 20-13/16 e Height 15-15/16 inch (Width 165 mm e Depth 389 mm e Height 63 mm) Weight Approx. 2-3/16 lb (Approx. 1 kg) Specification Name AU-101 Applied finger width 3/8 to 1 (10 to 25 mm) Interface USB 2.0 Dimensions Approx. 3-1/16 (W) e 3-3/4 (D) e 2-3/16 (H) (Approx. 78 mm (W) e 95 mm (D) e 55 mm (H)) Weight Approx. 5/16 lb (Approx. 150 g) (excluding USB cable) Max. power consumption (mA) DC 5 V 500 mA System conditions (during operation) Ambient temperature 50 ºF to 95 ºF (10 ºC to 35 ºC) Humidity 10% to 80% (No dew condensation) System conditions (during non-operation) Ambient temperature 14 ºF to 140 ºF (-10 ºC to 60 ºC) Humidity 10% to 80% (No dew condensation)bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 12-17 12.3 Options 12 Authentication unit (biometric type) AU-102 Authentication unit (IC card type) AU-201 Compatible computer CPU PC/AT compatible, 1 GHz or more Memory 128 MB or more HDD Free space: 100 MB or more Monitor 800 e 600 pixels, 16-bit color or more Network TCP/IP Application Microsoft Internet Explorer 6.0 (SP1) or later Microsoft .NET Framework (SP1) or later Interface USB 1.1 or later Supported Operating Systems Windows 2000 Professional (SP4) Windows XP Professional Edition (SP2) Windows Vista Business/Enterprise Specification Specification Name AU-102 Biometric sensor system Transmission-type optical system Verification time Approx. 1 sec. or less Interface USB 2.0 Dimensions Approx. 2-5/16 (W) e 3-1/4 (D) e 2-15/16 (H) (Approx. 59 mm (W) e 82 mm (D) e 74 mm (H)) Weight Approx. 3/16 (96 g) (excluding USB cable) Max. power consumption (mA) DC 5 V 500 mA System conditions (during operation) Ambient temperature 41 ºF to 95 ºF (5 ºC to 35 ºC) Humidity 20% to 80% (No dew condensation) System conditions (during non-operation) Ambient temperature 32 ºF to 122 ºF (0 ºC to 50 ºC) Humidity 20% to 80% (No dew condensation) Compatible computer CPU PC/AT compatible, 1 GHz or more Memory 128 MB or more HDD Free space: 100 MB or more Monitor 800 e 600 pixels, 16-bit color or more Network TCP/IP Application Microsoft Internet Explorer 6.0 (SP1) or later Microsoft .NET Framework (SP1) or later Interface USB 1.1 or later Supported Operating Systems Windows 2000 Professional (SP4) Windows XP Professional Edition (SP2) Windows Vista Business/Enterprise Specification Name AU-201 Dimensions Approx. 3-5/8 (W) e 2-1/2 (D) e 5/8 (H) (Approx. 92 mm (W) e 64 mm (D) e 16 mm (H)) Weight Approx. 1/4 lb (Approx. 120 g) Power supply Power received from USB portbizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 12-18 12.3 Options 12 System conditions (during operation) Ambient temperature 32 ºF to 104 ºF (0 ºC to 40 ºC) Humidity 20% to 85% (No dew condensation) System conditions (during non-operation) Ambient temperature -4 ºF to 122 ºF (-20 ºC to 50 ºC) Humidity 20% to 85% (No dew condensation) Radio law division Self-guided read-write communication facility Applicable card ISO 14443 TypeA, FeliCa-based noncontact IC card, HID iClass Acquired standard VCCI class B Compatible computer CPU PC/AT compatible, 1 GHz or more Memory 128 MB or more HDD Free space: 100 MB or more Monitor 800e 600 pixels, 16-bit color or more Network TCP/IP Application Microsoft Internet Explorer 6.0 (SP1) or later Microsoft .NET Framework (SP1) or later Interface USB 1.1 or later Supported Operating Systems Windows 2000 Professional (SP4) Windows XP Professional Edition (SP2) Windows Vista Business/Enterprise Specification13 Appendixbizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 13-2 13.1 Colors 13 13 Appendix 13.1 Colors Hue, brightness, and saturation Color has three elements: hue, brightness, and saturation. These are referred to as three attributes of colors and all colors are created by combinations these elements. You can adjust the hue, brightness, and saturation in 19 levels. What is hue? Everybody has an idea of what "hue" an object has, for example, an apple is red, a lemon is yellow, and the sky is blue. "Hue" is the tint by which the color of an object is classified as red, yellow, blue, etc. What is brightness? "Brightness" is the degree of lightness in a color, as compared with another color, which makes it a light color or a dark color. For example, when comparing the yellow of a lemon and the yellow of a grapefruit, it is obvious that the yellow of the lemon is brighter. But what about when comparing the yellow of a lemon and the red of a bean? Obviously, the yellow of the lemon is brighter. "Brightness" is this degree of lightness that enables comparison regardless of the hue.bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 13-3 13.1 Colors 13 What is saturation? What makes the difference between the yellow of a lemon and the yellow of a pear? By saying that the lemon is a more vivid yellow and the pear is a duller yellow, the difference between the two colors is stated in terms of "saturation", as opposed to "brightness". As opposed to hue and brightness, "saturation" is the characteristic that indicates the degree of vividness. Hue Brightness Saturationbizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 13-4 13.1 Colors 13 Red, green, and blue This machine allows you to adjust red, green, and blue in 19 levels. Red Green Bulebizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 13-5 13.2 Image quality 13 13.2 Image quality Contrast, copy density, and sharpness Contrast: You can finely adjust an image in between soft/smooth and crisp. Copy density: You can finely adjust the shading of an image. Sharpness: You can adjust the amount of contours in text and images. You can adjust the contrast and copy density in 19 levels and the sharpness in 7 levels. Contrast Copy Density Sharpnessbizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 13-6 13.2 Image quality 13 Color balance (CMYK) Full-color copy reproduces colors of the original by mixing toners of four colors: yellow, magenta, cyan, and black. By changing the amount of each of the four toners, adjust the tints in the copy. You can adjust the color balance in 19 levels. Yellow Bule Magenta Red Green Cyan Blackbizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 13-7 13.3 Glossary 13 13.3 Glossary The following describes the terms used in Copy mode. Term Description ADF The acronym for automatic 2-sided document feeder, which automatically scans originals. (ADF = Automatic document feeder) AE Level Adjustment Function that adjusts the background of the original. The higher the setting, the more that the document background is emphasized. (AE = Auto Exposure) APS The acronym for Auto Paper Select. (APS = Auto Paper Select) ATS Function that automatically switches trays. (ATS=Auto Tray Switch) Auto Paper Function that detects the size of the original placed on the original glass or loaded into the ADF, and automatically selects paper of the same size if it is set to Full Size or selects the paper size appropriate to the specified zoom ratio. Auto Zoom Function that automatically selects the appropriate zoom ratio when you place an original in the ADF or on the original glass, and selects the paper size. Background Color Function that copies the original using one of the 18 colors available for the background color (blank areas). Background Removal Function that adjusts the background density of the original with a colored background. Select a background removal method and level to copy the original. Binding Position Function that allows you to specify the position of the page margin in one side of the loaded original. Selecting the appropriate setting prevents the copy from being printed upside-down when making a 2-sided copy from a 1-sided original or when making a 1-sided copy from a 2-sided original. Blue Function that adjusts the level of blue in the image, for example, if you wish to emphasize the blue of water or the sky. Brightness Function that makes the image either lighter or darker. Center Staple & Fold Function that folds the copies in half and staples them together in the center. Change Tray Settings Function that copies the original with a paper size not specified in the paper tray or copies it on paper other than plain paper. Color Function that copies the original in specified colors. Using the 2 Color function, you can copy in two colors: specified color and black. Color Adjust Function that adjusts the color copy image quality to match the original image. Color Balance Function that adjusts the balance in the concentration for each of cyan (C), magenta (M), yellow (Y) and black (K). You can finely adjust the individual color balance in 19 levels between -3 and +3. Combine Originals Function that arranges reduced copies of multiple original pages on a single copy page. You can select , "2in1", "4in1", or "8in1" depending on the number of pages to be combined. Contrast Function that adjusts the contrast between light and dark. Copy Density Function that allows you to finely adjust the copy density in 19 levels between - 3 and +3. Copy Protect Function that prints hidden text to prevent unauthorized copying. Copying a copy-protected document repeatedly prints hidden text in all pages more clearly than the original to prove the user that it is a copied document. Cover Sheet Function that attaches a sheet in the specified paper tray as a cover page. Density Function that adjusts the density of the print image in nine levels. Duplex 2nd Side Function to use when copying on paper that has already been printed on one side. Duplex/Combine Function to specify the scanning side of the original and the printing side of the paper to be 1-sided or 2-sided. Edit Color Function that configures the image according to the objectives of copy editing. Finishing Allows you to select how to sort or finish copies when feeding them into the output tray.bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 13-8 13.3 Glossary 13 Finishing Preview Function that allows you to check the finishing status with a preview image before printing. Finishing Program Allows you to select a preset offset or finishing method. Glossy Function that improves the glossy level of an image. Green Function that adjusts the level of green in the image, for example, if you wish to emphasize the green of forests and trees. Group (Access permission) Function that limits the addresses that can be accessed by each user in order to assure security. Group (Copy or Finishing) Function that prints copies in pages. This function first prints the specified number of copies of the first page, and then prints the second page in the same way. Half-Fold Function that folds printed paper in half. Hue Function that adjusts the hue level to make the image either more reddish or more bluish. Manual Function that enlarges or reduces the loaded original with the zoom ratio specified using the keypad, and copies it on paper. Minimal This setting slightly reduces the image of the original and copies it at the center of the paper. Mirror Image Function that produces a copy in the mirror image of the original. Mixed Original Function that detects the size of each original page and prints a copy on paper of the appropriate size when loading originals in different page sizes into the ADF. Neg./Pos. Reverse Function that copies the original with the light- and dark-colored areas or the colors (gradations) of the image reversed. Offset Function that sorts copies. Original Direction Function that allows you to configure the orientation of the original that was placed in the ADF or on the original glass. Original Type Function that allows you to select the desired functions according to the original text or image type and adjust it to obtain better image quality. Paper Allows you to configure the type and the size of the paper to be printed on. Proof Copy Function that prints a sample copy and stops printing temporarily before printing a large number of copies. This prevents copy errors from occurring in a large number of copies. Punch Function that punches copies for filing. Red Function that adjusts the level of red in the image, for example, if you wish to redden skin tones. Saturation That adjusts the degree of vividness of the colors in the image. Save in User BOX Function that temporarily saves the job on the hard disk so that it can be recalled later and used again. Separate Scan Function that divides the original into multiple parts for scanning when the number of original pages exceeds the maximum (100 pages) that can be loaded into the ADF. You can scan the original and batch-copies it as one copy job. You can also load the original on the original glass or switch to the ADF during scanning. Sharpness Function that emphasizes the edges of text so that it can be read more easily. This function also enables you to adjust the original image. Sheet/Cover/Chapter Insert Allows you to configure editing functions according to your copying requirement. Sort Function that prints a document in sets of copies. The second copy set is printed after all of the first copy set is finished. Staple Function that staples copies. Text Enhancement Function that allows you to configure the reproduction quality of the text when copying originals consisting of text that overlaps images such as illustrations or graphs (text with a background). Term Descriptionbizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 13-9 13.3 Glossary 13 Transparency Interleave Function that inserts a blank sheet between transparency films each time a transparency film is copied. This function prevents transparency films from sticking together. Tri-Fold Function that tri-folds printed paper. Zoom Function that changes the zoom ratio of the copy. Term Description14 Indexbizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 14-2 14.1 Index by item 14 14 Index 14.1 Index by item Numerics 1st Z-Fold Position Adjustment .................................7-18 2nd Z-Fold Position Adjustment ...............................7-19 A Access .........................................................................4-8 Accessibility ..............................................................4-12 Account track ..............................................................4-8 Account track settings ..............................................7-37 ADF ..............................................................................2-7 Adjusting gradation ...................................................7-21 Adjusting the center staple position ..........................7-14 Adjusting the half-fold position .................................7-15 Adjusting the punch edge sensor .............................7-17 Adjusting the punch horizontal position ....................7-16 Adjusting the punch resistance loop .........................7-17 Adjusting the punch vertical position ........................7-16 Adjusting the tri-fold positions ..................................7-15 Administrator password ............................................7-49 Administrator security levels .....................................7-50 Administrator settings .................................................7-2 Administrator/machine settings ................................7-29 Advanced preview .....................................................4-19 Application settings ...................................................5-20 Authentication device settings ..................................7-40 Authentication method ..............................................7-40 Authentication unit ..............................................2-2, 2-5 Authentication unit (biometric type) ............................................................10-2, 12-16, 12-17 Authentication unit (IC card type) ..................11-2, 12-17 Automatic duplex unit .......................................2-7, 12-7 B Background color ......................................................5-31 Basic tab ...................................................................2-16 Biometric type ...........................................................10-2 Blank page print settings ..........................................7-26 Blue ...........................................................................13-4 Book copy .................................................................5-33 Book copy/repeat ......................................................5-33 Booklet ......................................................................5-40 Booklet original .........................................................5-36 Brightness .................................................................13-2 Brightness adjustment dial ........................................2-14 Bypass tray .................................................................2-7 Bypass tray door .........................................................2-7 C C ................................................................................4-17 Centering ...................................................................7-13 Centering (duplex 2nd side) ......................................7-13 Changing E-mail addresses ......................................6-14 Changing icons ..........................................................6-15 Changing passwords .................................................6-13 Charger-cleaning tool ................................................2-11 Checking comsumables ..............................................8-8 Checking job settings ................................................2-16 Checking job settings. ...............................................5-64 Checking the total number of pages printed .............8-11 Cleaning procedure ...................................................8-12 CMYK ........................................................................13-6 Color ............................................................................5-4 Color adjustment .......................................................5-31 Color balance ............................................................13-6 Color registration adjustment ....................................7-20 Colors ........................................................................13-2 Configuring the basic settings .....................................5-3 Contrast .....................................................................13-5 Control panel .................................. 2-7, 2-14, 4-2, 8-13 Copier settings ................................................. 6-8, 7-43 Copy density .............................................................13-5 Copy function ..............................................................5-2 Copy protection .........................................................5-48 Copying .......................................................................4-5 Copying mixed originals ............................................5-16 Cover sheet ...............................................................5-22 Coverage rate ............................................................8-10 Custom display settings ..............................................6-6 Custom size .................................................................5-6 D Data indicator ............................................................2-14 Date/time ...................................................................5-44 Date/time settings .......................................................7-5 Daylight saving time ....................................................7-6 Default bypass paper type setting ............................7-27 Document pad ...........................................................8-14 Driver password encryption setting ...........................7-57 Duplex/Combine ..........................................................5-8 E Editing colors .............................................................5-29 Editing pages .............................................................5-21 Eject assist lever ........................................................2-25 Electrostatic charger wire ..........................................9-12 Enhanced security mode ...........................................7-54 Enlarge Display ..........................................................4-14 Erasing .......................................................................5-41 Erasing frames ...........................................................5-41bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 14-3 14.1 Index by item 14 Erasing non-image areas ..........................................5-42 Expert adjustment .......................................................7-9 External server settings .............................................7-39 F Fax kit ..................................................................2-2, 2-6 Fax multi line ...............................................................2-2 Fax settings ...............................................................7-46 Fax/Scan .....................................................................4-5 Fax/scan settings ......................................................6-11 Filter .............................................................................2-9 Finisher ......................... 2-2, 2-3, 2-6, 2-18, 2-23, 12-9 Finisher connector .......................................................2-9 Finishing ....................................................................5-10 Folding and binding ...................................................5-10 Front door ..............................................2-18, 2-21, 2-24 Function keys ............................................................2-14 Function management settings .................................7-56 Functions/settings display area ................................2-16 Fusing unit .................................................................2-11 Fusing unit cover lever ..............................................2-11 G General settings ........................................................7-32 Green .........................................................................13-4 Grouping ...................................................................5-10 Guidance ...................................................................4-15 Guide lever ............................................2-18, 2-21, 2-24 H HDD settings .............................................................7-55 Header/footer ............................................................5-53 Hide Personal Information (MIB) ...............................7-52 Horizontal transport unit cover ........................2-18, 2-24 Housing .....................................................................8-14 Hue ............................................................................13-2 I IC card type ...............................................................11-2 Icon/shortcut key display area ..................................2-16 Icons ..........................................................................9-10 Image adjustment ......................................................5-39 Image controller ..................................................2-2, 2-5 Image quality .............................................................13-5 Image Repeat ............................................................5-34 Imaging unit ...............................................................2-11 Imaging unit release lever .........................................2-11 Inserting images ........................................................5-24 Inserting sheets .........................................................5-23 Inside of the main body .............................................2-11 Interleaving OHP transparencies ...............................5-21 Internal controller port .................................................2-9 Interrupt .......................................................................4-4 J Jack for connecting a telephone (TEL PORT1) ...........2-9 Jack for connecting a telephone (TEL PORT2) ...........2-9 Jam removal cover ....................................................2-26 Jam removal dial ............................................ 2-11, 2-18 Job list .......................................................................2-16 Job Separator ................. 2-3, 2-6, 12-12, 12-15, 12-16 Job separator cover ..................................................2-20 Job Separator JS-504 ...............................................2-25 Job separator JS-602 ................................................2-20 Job Separator JS-603 ...............................................2-23 K Keypad ......................................................................2-14 L Large capacity unit ......................... 2-2, 2-5, 2-26, 12-8 Lateral guide ................................................................2-7 Leading edge adjustment ..........................................7-13 Leading edge adjustment (duplex side 2) .................7-13 Left panel ........................................................ 2-16, 5-61 Left-side cover .............................................................2-7 Left-side cover release levert ......................................2-7 License settings .........................................................7-58 Limiting access to destinations .................................7-39 List/counter ...............................................................7-22 Listing jobs ................................................................5-62 Loading paper .............................................................8-3 Loading paper into the bypass tray .............................8-5 Loading paper into the LCT .........................................8-7 Loading paper into trays 1 and 2 ................................8-3 Loading paper into trays 3 and 4 ................................8-4 Local interface kit ............................................... 2-2, 2-6 Lower front door ..........................................................2-7 Lower right-side door ..................................................2-7 Lower right-side door release lever .............................2-8 Lower Tray .................................................................2-22 Lower tray paper guide .............................................2-22 M Machine specifications ..............................................12-4 Main power indicator .................................................2-14 Main power switch ......................................................2-7 Maintenance ................................................................8-2 Media adjustment ......................................................7-14 Message display area ................................................2-16 Meter count ...............................................................8-10 Mirror image ..............................................................5-30 Mode Memory .............................................................4-7 Mount kit ............................................................. 2-2, 2-5 N Negative-positive reversal .........................................5-29 Network connector (10Base-T/100BaseTX/1000Base-T) ...........................2-9 Network settings .......................................................7-42 O Offsetting ...................................................................5-10 OpenAPI Authentication Management Settings ........7-59 Options ............................................................. 2-2, 12-8 Original glass ........................................ 2-11, 8-12, 8-13bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 14-4 14.1 Index by item 14 Original glass cleaner ................................................2-11 Original output tray ......................................................2-7 Original scales ...........................................................2-11 Original setting ..........................................................5-15 Original tray .................................................................2-7 Output belt ................................................................2-18 Output settings ............................................................7-4 Output tray ....................................... 2-2, 2-5, 2-7, 2-18 Output tray 1 .........................................2-18, 2-24, 2-25 Output tray 2 .........................................2-18, 2-24, 2-25 Output tray switch .....................................................2-18 Outside of the main body (front) .................................2-7 Outside of the main body (rear) ...................................2-9 Overlay ......................................................................5-55 Overlaying registered images ....................................5-56 Ozone filter ..................................................................2-9 P Page margin ..............................................................5-37 Page number .............................................................5-45 Page number print position settings .........................7-28 Paper .........................................................5-5, 8-2, 12-2 Paper capacities ........................................................12-2 Paper types ...............................................................12-2 Paper-empty indicator ......................................2-7, 2-26 Password Copy .........................................................5-50 Placing originals ..........................................................3-4 Post Inserter ............................... 2-3, 2-22, 5-12, 12-13 Post inserter control panel ..............................2-22, 5-12 Poster mode ..............................................................5-35 Power cord ..................................................................2-9 Power Save ...............................................................4-11 Power save settings ....................................................7-3 Power switch for dehumidifying heater .......................2-9 Print head ..................................................................9-13 Print head glass cleaning tool ...................................2-11 Print without authentication ......................................7-38 Printer settings ................................................6-12, 7-45 Printing counter list ...................................................7-38 Program jobs .............................................................5-27 Proof copy .................................................................4-18 Punch kit .................................... 2-2, 2-18, 2-23, 12-11 Punch kit PK-516 ......................................................2-18 Punch Kit PK-517 ......................................................2-23 Punch scrap box ...................................2-19, 2-21, 2-24 Punch Unit Size Detect Sensor .................................7-19 Punching ...................................................................5-10 Q Quality/density ..........................................................5-18 Quick Copy tab .........................................................2-16 R Red ............................................................................13-4 Register Authentication Information ..........................6-16 Registering one-touch destinations or User Boxes ................................................................7-30 Release lever .............................................................2-26 Replacement message ................................................8-8 Replenishment message .............................................8-2 Reset ...........................................................................4-4 Reset settings ............................................................7-23 Restricting user accesses ...........................................7-8 Reverse automatic document feeder ........................12-7 RS-232C port ..............................................................2-9 S Saddle stitcher ..................... 2-2, 2-3, 2-6, 2-18, 12-10 Saddle stitcher SD-508 .............................................2-18 Saddle Stitcher SD-509 .............................................2-23 Saturation ..................................................................13-2 Saving in User Boxes ................................................5-60 Scan to authorized folder settings ............................7-41 Scan to home settings ...............................................7-41 Security details ..........................................................7-51 Security kit .......................................................... 2-2, 2-6 Security settings ........................................................7-49 Separate scan ...........................................................5-13 Separating chapters ..................................................5-26 Service call ..................................................................9-2 Settings common to user and account track authentication ............................................................7-41 Sharpness ..................................................................13-5 Skip job operation settings ........................................7-26 Sorting .......................................................................5-10 Specifications ............................................................12-2 Stamp ........................................................................5-47 Stamp repetition ........................................................5-51 Stamp settings ............................................... 7-25, 7-57 Stamp unit .......................................................... 2-3, 2-6 Stamp/composition ...................................................5-43 Staple cartridge .........................................................2-25 Staple holder .............................................................2-24 Staple replacement door ...........................................2-18 Stapler .......................................................................2-24 Stapling .....................................................................5-10 Start .............................................................................4-4 Status indicator ...........................................................2-7 Stop .............................................................................4-4 Stylus pen ..................................................................2-14 Sub power switch ............................................. 2-7, 2-14 System connection ....................................................7-47 System settings .................................................. 6-3, 7-3 T Take-up roller ............................................................8-13 Telephone jack 1 (LINE PORT1) ..................................2-9 Telephone jack 2 (LINE PORT2) ..................................2-9 Toner cartridges ........................................................2-11 Toner supply indicators .............................................2-16 Total counter ...............................................................2-7 Touch panel .................................................... 2-14, 2-16 Touch pen ..................................................................2-14 Tray 1 ...........................................................................2-7bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 14-5 14.1 Index by item 14 Tray 2 ..........................................................................2-7 Tray 3 ..........................................................................2-7 Tray 4 ..........................................................................2-7 Tray extension ...........................................................2-25 Troubleshooting ..........................................................9-2 Troubleshooting table .................................................9-4 Turning off automatic rotation ...................................5-14 U Upper door ................................................................2-26 Upper front door ..........................................................2-7 Upper right-side door ..................................................2-7 Upper right-side door release lever .............................2-8 Upper Tray ................................................................2-22 Upper Tray paper guide ............................................2-22 Upper unit release lever ............................................2-22 USB port (type A) USB 2.0/1.1 ............................2-7, 2-9 USB port (type B) USB 2.0/1.1 ....................................2-9 User authentication .....................................................4-8 User authentication settings .....................................7-34 User authentication/account track ............................7-31 User Box ......................................................................4-5 User Box administrator setting .................................7-49 User Box settings ......................................................7-24 User settings ...............................................................6-2 Utility/Counter .............................................................4-6 V Video interface kit ........................................................2-2 W Waste toner box ........................................................2-11 Watermark .................................................................5-54 Weekly timer setting ....................................................7-7 Wide paper ..................................................................5-6 Working table ......................................................2-2, 2-5 Z Z folding unit .................................................2-21, 12-12 Z-folded original ........................................................5-17 Zoom .................................................................5-7, 5-59bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 14-6 14.2 Index by button 14 14.2 Index by button Numerics 1-Sided > 1-Sided .......................................................5-8 1-Sided > 2-Sided .......................................................5-8 1st Z-Fold Position Adjustment .................................7-18 2 Color .........................................................................5-4 2/4/8 Repeat ..............................................................5-35 2in1 ..............................................................................5-9 2nd Z-Fold Position Adjustment ...............................7-19 2-Sided > 1-Sided .......................................................5-8 2-Sided > 2-Sided .......................................................5-8 4in1/8in1 ......................................................................5-9 A Access .........................................................................4-8 Accessibility ..............................................................4-12 Account Name ...................................................4-9, 7-35 Account Track ...........................................................7-32 Account Track Counter .............................................7-38 Account Track Input Method ....................................7-32 Account Track Registration .......................................7-37 Account Track Settings .............................................7-37 Administrative Settings .............................................7-34 Administrator Password ............................................7-49 Administrator Registration .........................................7-29 Administrator Security Levels ...................................7-50 Administrator Settings .........................................4-6, 7-2 Administrator/Machine Settings ................................7-29 AE Level Adjustment ...........................................6-3, 7-9 All Jobs ......................................................................5-63 Application ................................................................5-20 Apply Stamps ............................................................7-57 Auth.-info.registrieren ................................................7-35 Authentication Device Settings .................................7-40 Auto .............................................................................5-7 Auto Booklet ON when Fold & Staple .........................6-8 Auto Color ...................................................................5-4 Auto Color Level Adjust. ..............................................6-3 Auto Detect ...............................................................5-34 Auto Paper Select for Small Original ...........................6-4 Auto Prefix/Suffix setting ...........................................7-47 Auto Reset .................................................................7-23 Auto Reset Confirmation ...........................................4-13 Auto Rotate OFF .......................................................5-14 Auto Sort/Group Selection ..........................................6-8 Auto Tray Selection Settings .......................................6-3 Auto Tray Switch ON/OFF ...........................................6-3 Auto Zoom (ADF) ...............................................6-8, 7-43 Auto Zoom (Platen) ............................................6-8, 7-43 Auto Zoom for Combine/Booklet ................................6-8 Automatic Image Rotation .................................6-9, 7-43 B Back (Blank) ..............................................................5-22 Back (Copy) ...............................................................5-22 Background Color .....................................................5-31 Background Removal ................................................5-19 Banner Printing ............................................................4-6 Basic ............................................................................5-3 Binding Position ..................................... 5-8, 5-15, 5-34 Bio Authentication .....................................................7-40 Black ............................................................................5-4 Blank ..........................................................................5-24 Blank Page Print Settings ................................. 6-4, 7-26 Blue ...........................................................................5-32 Book Copy .................................................................5-33 Book Copy/Repeat ....................................................5-33 Book Spread ..............................................................5-33 Booklet ......................................................................5-40 Booklet Original .........................................................5-36 Bottom .......................................................................5-41 Brightness .................................................................5-32 Bypass Tray .................................................................5-5 C C ................................................................................4-17 Card Authentication ...................................................7-40 Card Copy .................................................................5-59 Card Shot Settings ......................................................6-9 Cellular Phone/PDA Setting ......................................7-48 Center Erase ..............................................................5-34 Center Staple & Fold .................................................5-40 Center Staple Position ...............................................7-14 Center Zoom .............................................................5-39 Centering ........................................................ 5-39, 7-13 Centering (Duplex 2nd Side) ......................................7-13 Change E-Mail Address .............................................6-14 Change Icon ..............................................................6-15 Change Password .....................................................6-13 Change Setting ..........................................................4-20 Change Size ................................................................5-6 Change Tray Settings ..................................................5-5 Chapter Paper ...........................................................5-26 Chapters ....................................................................5-26 Check Consumable Life ..............................................4-6 Check Details ............................................................5-61 Check Job ...................................................... 5-61, 5-64 Check Job Set. ..........................................................5-63 Check Program Settings .............................................4-7 Check/Change Temporarily .......................................5-53 Color ................................................................. 5-4, 5-55 Color Adjustment .......................................................5-31 Color Balance ............................................................5-32 Color Registration Adjust ............................... 7-11, 7-20 Color Selection Settings ..............................................6-6 Composition ..............................................................5-56 Confidential Document Access Method ....................7-52 Consumables Replace/Processing Procedure ..........4-16 Contrast .....................................................................5-32bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 14-7 14.2 Index by button 14 Copied Paper ............................................................5-19 Copier Settings ..........................................6-6, 6-8, 7-43 Copy ..................................................................4-5, 5-23 Copy Card Settings ...................................................7-43 Copy Density .............................................................5-32 Copy Guard ...............................................................5-49 Copy Insert ................................................................5-26 Copy Program Lock Settings ......................................7-8 Copy Protect .............................................................5-48 Copy Screen ................................................................6-6 Counter Details ................................................7-36, 7-38 Cover Sheet .....................................................5-22, 5-40 Coverage Rate ..........................................................8-10 Current Jobs ..............................................................5-63 Custom Display Settings .............................................6-6 Custom Size ................................................................5-6 D Date Format ..............................................................5-44 Date Settings ...............................................................7-7 Date/Time ......................... 5-44, 5-48, 5-50, 5-51, 5-52 Date/Time Settings ......................................................7-5 Daylight Saving Time ...................................................7-6 Default Bypass Paper Type Setting ..........................7-27 Default Copy Settings .................................................6-8 Default Enlarge Display Settings .................................6-8 Default Function Permission .....................................7-34 Default Operation Selection ......................................7-34 Default Tab ..................................................................6-6 Default Tab Density Settings .......................................6-6 Delete ..............................................................5-61, 5-63 Delete Registered Stamp ..........................................7-57 Delete Saved Copy Program .......................................7-8 Deleted Jobs .............................................................5-63 Density ............................................................5-19, 5-55 Density Adjustment ...................................................7-10 Despeckle ..................................................................5-15 Detail .........................................................................5-63 Detail Settings ............................ 5-48, 5-50, 5-51, 5-52 Detection While Feeding Setting ...............................7-11 Device Information ......................................................4-6 Display Activity Log ...................................................7-52 Document Name .......................................................5-60 Dot Matrix Original ....................................................5-19 Driver Password Encryption Setting .........................7-57 Duplex/Combine .........................................................5-8 E Edit Color ..................................................................5-29 Edit Name ....................................................................4-7 E-Mail Address ..........................................................7-34 Enhanced Security Mode ..........................................7-54 Enlarge Display ..........................................................4-14 Enlarge Display Mode Confirmation ..........................4-13 Enlargement Rotation ..................................................6-8 Enter Power Save Mode .............................................7-3 Erase ..........................................................................5-41 Erase Adjustment ......................................................7-12 Expert Adjustment .......................................................7-9 External Server Settings ............................................7-39 F FAX Active Screen .......................................................6-6 Fax Settings ...............................................................7-46 Fax TX Settings .........................................................7-25 Fax/Scan .....................................................................4-5 Fax/Scan Settings .....................................................6-11 Finished Jobs ............................................................5-63 Finisher Adjustment ...................................................7-10 Finishing ....................................................................5-10 Finishing Program .......................................................6-9 Fixed Zoom .................................................................5-7 Fold/Bind ...................................................................5-11 Frame ........................................................................5-41 Frame Erase ................................................... 5-34, 5-41 Front (Blank) ..............................................................5-22 Front (Copy) ...............................................................5-22 Front and Back Cover ...............................................5-33 Front Cover ................................................................5-33 Full Color .....................................................................5-4 Full Size ............................................................ 5-7, 5-39 Function .....................................................................4-15 Function Management Settings ................................7-56 Function Map ............................................................4-15 Function Permission ..................................................7-35 G General Settings ............................................. 7-32, 7-40 Get Request Code .....................................................7-58 Glossy ........................................................................5-19 Gradation Adjustment .................................... 7-11, 7-21 Green .........................................................................5-32 Group .........................................................................5-10 Guidance ...................................................................4-15 H Half-Fold ....................................................................5-40 Half-Fold Position ......................................................7-15 Half-Fold Specification ................................................6-9 Half-Fold/Tri-Fold Specification ..................................6-9 HDD Settings .............................................................7-55 Header/Footer ...........................................................5-53 Header/Footer Settings .............................................7-25 Hide Personal Information .........................................7-52 Hide Personal Information (MIB) ...............................7-52 Hue ............................................................................5-32 I Icon ............................................................................7-35 ID & Print Operation Settings ....................................7-34 ID & Print Settings .....................................................7-34 Image Adjust ..............................................................5-39 Image Repeat ............................................................5-34bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 14-8 14.2 Index by button 14 Image Shift ................................................................5-38 Image Size .................................................................5-35 Image Stabilization ....................................................7-10 Image Stabilization Only ............................................7-10 Image Stabilization Setting ........................................7-11 Increase Priority ........................................................5-63 Initialize ......................................................................7-52 Input Machine Address .............................................7-29 Insert Image ...............................................................5-24 Insert Paper ...............................................................5-23 Insert Sheet ...............................................................5-23 Insert Sheet Setting ...................................................5-46 Install License ............................................................7-58 Interleave Paper ........................................................5-21 Interrupt .......................................................................4-4 J Job Details ................................................................5-61 Job History ................................................................5-63 Job History Thumbnail Display .................................7-52 Job List ............................................................5-61, 5-62 Job Log Settings .......................................................7-52 Job Reset ..................................................................7-23 K Key Repeat Start/Interval Time .................................4-13 L Language Selection .....................................................6-3 Layout ........................................................................5-59 LCT ..............................................................................5-5 Leading Edge Adjustment .........................................7-13 Leading Edge Adjustment (Duplex Side 2) ................7-13 Left ............................................................................5-41 Left Bind ....................................................................5-40 Left Panel Display Default ...........................................6-6 License Settings ........................................................7-58 Limiting Access to Destinations ................................7-39 Line Detection ...........................................................7-11 List/Counter ...............................................................7-22 Login ............................................................................4-9 Logout Confirmation Screen Display Setting ............7-41 Low Power ..................................................................7-3 Low Power Mode Settings ..........................................7-3 M Management List .......................................................7-22 Manual .........................................................................5-7 Manual Destination Input ..........................................7-52 Map ...........................................................................5-18 Margin Position .........................................................5-38 Max. Allowance Set .........................................7-35, 7-37 Measurement Unit Settings .........................................6-3 Media Adjustment .....................................................7-14 Message Display Time ..............................................4-13 Meter Count ..............................................................8-10 Minimal ........................................................................5-7 Mirror Image ..............................................................5-30 Mixed Original ...........................................................5-15 Mode Memory .............................................................4-7 N Name and Function of Parts ......................................4-15 Neg./Pos. Reverse .....................................................5-29 Network Function Usage Settings .............................7-56 Network Settings .......................................................7-42 No Matching Paper in Tray Setting .............................6-3 None ..........................................................................5-41 Non-Image Area Erase ..............................................5-42 Non-Image Area Erase Operation Settings ...............7-12 Number of User Counters Assigned .........................7-33 O Offset .........................................................................5-11 OHP Interleave ..........................................................5-21 ON (External Server) ..................................................7-32 ON (MFP) ...................................................................7-32 One-Touch/User Box Registration ................... 4-6, 7-30 OpenAPI Authentication Management Settings ........7-59 OpenAPI settings .......................................................7-47 Original Setting ..........................................................5-15 Original Type .............................................................5-18 Other ............................................................... 5-48, 5-52 Other Functions .........................................................4-15 Output Permission .......................................... 7-35, 7-37 Output Settings .................................................. 6-3, 7-4 Output Tray Settings ...................................................7-4 Overlay ......................................................................5-55 P P --- ...................................................... 5-23, 5-25, 5-26 Page Margin ..............................................................5-37 Page Number ............................................................5-45 Page Number Print Position ............................. 6-4, 7-28 Page Number Type ....................................................5-45 Pages .......................................... 5-44, 5-47, 5-55, 5-57 Paper ................................................................ 5-5, 5-22 Paper Separation Adjustment ...................................7-11 Paper Size .................................................................5-36 Paper Size/Type Counter ..........................................7-22 Paper Tray Settings .....................................................6-3 Password .......................................................... 4-9, 7-34 Password Copy .........................................................5-50 Password for Non- Business Hours ............................7-7 Password Rules .........................................................7-51 Pause .............................................................. 7-35, 7-38 Photo .........................................................................5-18 Position ........................................................... 5-49, 5-52 Position Setting .........................................................5-12 Post Inserter ..................................................... 2-3, 5-12 Post inserter control panel ........................................5-12 Poster Mode ..............................................................5-35 Power Save ...............................................................4-11 Power Save Key ..........................................................7-3bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 14-9 14.2 Index by button 14 Power Save Settings ...........................................6-3, 7-3 Preset Stamp ...................................................5-48, 5-52 Print ...........................................................................5-62 Print Counter List ......................................................7-38 Print Data Capture .....................................................7-52 Print Jobs During Copy Operation ....................6-9, 7-43 Print Lists ....................................................................6-3 Print Position .........................................5-44, 5-46, 5-47 Print without Authentication ......................................7-38 Print/Fax Output Settings ............................................7-4 Printer Adjustment .......................................................7-9 Printer Information .....................................................7-48 Printer Settings ........................................6-12, 7-2, 7-45 Prior Detection Setting ..............................................7-11 Program Jobs ............................................................5-27 Prohibited Functions When Authentication Error ......7-51 Proof Copy ................................................................4-18 Public User Access ...........................................4-9, 7-32 Punch ........................................................................5-11 Punch Edge Sensor Adjustment ...............................7-17 Punch Horizontal Position Adjustment ......................7-16 Punch Regist Loop Size Adjustment .........................7-17 Punch Vertical Position Adjustment ..........................7-16 Q Quality/Density ..........................................................5-18 Quick Settings 1 ..........................................................6-6 Quick Settings 2 ..........................................................6-6 Quick Settings 3 ..........................................................6-6 Quick Settings 4 ..........................................................6-6 R Recall Header/Footer ................................................5-53 Recall Overlay Image ................................................5-57 Receive ......................................................................5-62 Red ............................................................................5-32 Register Authentication Information ..........................6-16 Register Overlay Image .............................................5-57 Register Program ........................................................4-7 Registered Overlay ....................................................5-56 Registered Stamp ...........................................5-48, 5-52 Release Held Job ......................................................5-63 Reset .................................................................4-4, 5-53 Reset All Counters ...........................................7-36, 7-38 Reset Settings ...........................................................7-23 Restrict Access to Job Settings ..................................7-8 Restrict Fax TX ..........................................................7-52 Restrict Operation .......................................................7-8 Restrict User Access ...................................................7-8 Right ..........................................................................5-41 Right Bind ..................................................................5-40 Rotate Image .............................................................4-20 S Saturation ..................................................................5-32 Save ..........................................................................5-62 Save & Print ...............................................................5-60 Save in User Box .......................................................5-60 Scan to Authorized Folder Settings ...........................7-41 Scan to Home Settings .............................................7-41 Scan/Fax Settings .......................................................6-6 Search by Operation .................................................4-15 Search Option Settings ...............................................6-7 Secure Print Only .......................................................7-52 Security Details ..........................................................7-51 Security Settings .......................................................7-49 Select Color ...............................................................5-31 Select Keyboard ..........................................................6-4 Select Time for Power Save ........................................7-7 Select Tray for Insert Sheet .............................. 6-8, 7-43 Send ..........................................................................5-62 Separate Scan ...........................................................5-13 Separate Scan Output Method ...................................6-8 Separation .................................................................5-33 Server Name ................................................................4-9 Service/Admin. Information .......................................4-15 Set Range ..................................................................5-35 Sharpness ..................................................................5-32 Sheet/Cover/ Chapter Insert .....................................5-21 Shift Output Each Job .................................................7-4 Shortcut Key 1 .............................................................6-6 Shortcut Key 2 .............................................................6-6 Single Color .................................................................5-4 Single Color > 2 Color Output Management .............7-41 Skip Job Operation Settings .....................................7-26 Sleep ............................................................................7-3 Sleep Mode Settings ...................................................7-3 Sort ............................................. 5-10, 5-23, 5-25, 5-26 Sound Setting ............................................................4-13 Specify Default Tray when APS Off .................. 6-8, 7-43 Stamp ........................................................................5-47 Stamp Repeat ............................................................5-51 Stamp Settings ............................................... 7-25, 7-57 Stamp Type/Preset Stamps ......................................5-47 Stamp/Composition ..................................................5-43 Staple ........................................................................5-11 Start .............................................................................4-4 Starting Chapter Number ..........................................5-45 Starting Page Number ...............................................5-45 Stop .............................................................................4-4 Store ............................................................................5-6 Synchronize User Authentication & Account Track ...........................................................7-33 System Auto Reset ....................................................7-23 System Auto Reset Confirmation ..............................4-13 System Connection ...................................................7-47 System Settings ................................................. 6-3, 7-3 T Text ............................................................................5-18 Text Color ....................................................... 5-47, 5-54 Text Details ..................................................... 5-44, 5-46 Text Enhancement .....................................................5-19bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 14-10 14.2 Index by button 14 Text Size ....................................................................5-47 Text/Photo .................................................................5-18 Ticket Hold Time Setting ...........................................7-33 Time Format ..............................................................5-44 Time Settings ..............................................................7-7 Time Zone ...................................................................7-5 Top ............................................................................5-41 Touch Panel Adjustment ...........................................4-12 Trail Edge Adjust .......................................................7-11 Transparency .............................................................5-21 Tray 1 ..........................................................................5-5 Tray 2 ..........................................................................5-5 Tray 3 ..........................................................................5-5 Tray 4 ..........................................................................5-5 Tri-Fold Position Adjustment .....................................7-15 Tri-Fold Print Side .............................................6-8, 7-43 U User Authentication ...................................................7-32 User Authentication Settings .....................................7-34 User Authentication/Account Track ..........................7-31 User Box ............................................................4-5, 5-60 User Box Administrator Setting .................................7-49 User Box Settings .............................................6-6, 7-24 User Counter .............................................................7-36 User Name ........................................................4-9, 7-34 User Name List ..................................................4-9, 7-34 User Preset Zoom .......................................................5-7 User Registration .......................................................7-34 User Settings .......................................................4-6, 6-2 User/Account Common Setting ................................7-41 Utility/Counter .............................................................4-6 V View Finishing ...........................................................4-20 View Pages ................................................................4-20 View Status ...............................................................4-20 W Watermark .................................................................5-54 Watermark Type ........................................................5-54 Weekly Timer ON/OFF Settings ..................................7-7 Weekly Timer Setting ..................................................7-7 When # of Jobs Reach Maximum .............................7-33 When AMS Direction is Incorrect ................................6-8 Wide Paper ..................................................................5-6 With Margin ...............................................................5-34 Without Margin ..........................................................5-34 X X/Y ...............................................................................5-6 Z Z-Folded Original ......................................................5-15 Zoom .......................................................4-19, 5-7, 5-36http://konicaminolta.com Copyright A1DM-9585CO-00 2009 2009.11 Guide de l’utilisateur IC-202 (Phase 2) Sommaire-1 Sommaire 1 Introduction Déclaration OpenSSL..................................................................... 1-5 Copyright ....................................................................................... 1-7 1.1 Licence d'utilisation du logiciel....................................................... 1-8 1.2 A propos de ce Guide de l'utilisateur............................................ 1-10 Composition du Guide de l'utilisateur.......................................... 1-10 Notations...................................................................................... 1-10 Captures d'écran de ce manuel utilisateur .................................. 1-10 1.3 Explication des conventions.......................................................... 1-11 Recommandations de sécurité .................................................... 1-11 Séquence d'actions ..................................................................... 1-11 Astuces ........................................................................................ 1-12 Repères de texte spéciaux .......................................................... 1-12 2 Présentation 2.1 Configuration du CD-ROM du contrôleur ...................................... 2-3 2.2 Contrôleur d'impression .................................................................. 2-4 Rôle du contrôleur d'impression.................................................... 2-4 Fonctions disponibles du contrôleur d'impression........................ 2-4 Modes machine.............................................................................. 2-5 Flux d'impression........................................................................... 2-6 2.3 Environnement d'exploitation.......................................................... 2-8 Système d'exploitation compatible avec le pilote d'imprimante ... 2-8 Pilote PCL ...................................................................................... 2-8 Pilote PS (PostScript3)................................................................... 2-8 Pilote PPD PostScript (PostScript3) .............................................. 2-9 Interfaces compatibles................................................................... 2-9 2.4 Installation du système .................................................................. 2-11 Pour installer le système d'impression ........................................ 2-11 3 Installation du pilote d'imprimante 3.1 Pilotes d'imprimante et systèmes d'exploitation compatibles .... 3-3 3.2 Utilisé avec Windows ....................................................................... 3-4 Installation du pilote d'imprimante à l'aide de l'Assistant Ajout d'imprimante .................................................................................. 3-5 Pour Windows XP/Server 2003/XP x64/Server 2003 x64.............. 3-6 Sommaire-2 IC-202 (Phase 2) Pour Windows 98SE/Me/NT 4.0/2000............................................ 3-8 Installation à l'aide du câble USB................................................. 3-10 Pour Windows 98SE/Me............................................................... 3-10 Pour Windows 2000...................................................................... 3-12 Pour Windows XP/Server 2003/XP x64/Server 2003 x64 ............ 3-13 Désinstaller le pilote d'imprimante................................................ 3-14 Désinstaller le pilote d'imprimante manuellement ........................ 3-14 3.3 Si vous utilisez Macintosh .............................................................. 3-15 Installation du pilote d'imprimante................................................ 3-15 Pour Mac OS X ............................................................................. 3-15 Sélectionner une imprimante ........................................................ 3-17 Pour Mac OS X ............................................................................. 3-17 Pour Mac OS 9 ............................................................................. 3-20 Désinstaller le pilote d'imprimante................................................ 3-22 Pour Mac OS X ............................................................................. 3-22 Pour Mac OS 9 ............................................................................. 3-23 4 Réglage de l'impression réseau 4.1 Aperçu des fonctions réseau ........................................................... 4-3 Fonctions réseau ............................................................................ 4-3 Caractéristiques des fonctions réseau ........................................... 4-4 Méthodes de connexion réseau que l'on peut sélectionner dans chaque système d'exploitation Windows ....................................... 4-5 Impression réseau à partir d'un système d'exploitation Windows . 4-5 Impression réseau dans un environnement NetWare..................... 4-5 4.2 Réglage de l'adresse IP pour cet appareil ...................................... 4-6 Spécification de l'Adresse IP.......................................................... 4-6 4.3 Accéder à Web Connection.............................................................. 4-8 Pour accéder à Web Connection.................................................... 4-8 4.4 Impression SMB ................................................................................ 4-9 Opérations sur cet appareil ............................................................ 4-9 Paramètres du serveur d'imprimante ........................................... 4-11 Pour Windows 98SE/Me............................................................... 4-11 Pour Windows NT 4.0/2000/XP/Server 2003/XP x64/ Server 2003 x64............................................................................ 4-11 4.5 Impression Raw/LPR ...................................................................... 4-12 Opérations sur cet appareil .......................................................... 4-12 Paramètres du serveur d'imprimante ........................................... 4-12 Pour Windows 2000/XP/Server 2003/XP x64/Server 2003 x64 ... 4-12 Réglage de l'impression Raw ....................................................... 4-13 Réglage de l'impression LPR........................................................ 4-13 Pour Windows NT 4.0 (lors du réglage de l'impression LPR) ....... 4-13 IC-202 (Phase 2) Sommaire-3 4.6 Impression IPP (Windows 2000/XP/Server 2003/XP x64/ Server 2003 x64).............................................................................. 4-14 Opérations sur cet appareil.......................................................... 4-14 Installation du pilote d'imprimante............................................... 4-16 4.7 Imprimer avec NetWare ................................................................. 4-18 Impression réseau dans un environnement NetWare.................. 4-18 Pour le mode Imprimante distante avec l'émulation NetWare 4.x Bindery ......................................................................................... 4-18 Pour le mode Serveur d'impression avec émulation NetWare 4.x BIndery......................................................................................... 4-21 Pour le mode imprimante distante NetWare 4.x (NDS)................ 4-24 Pour le mode Serveur d'impression NetWare 4.x/5.x/6 (NDS) .... 4-27 Pour le service distribué d'impression NetWare 5.x/6 Novell (NDPS).......................................................................................... 4-30 Configurer les paramètres d'un client (Windows) avec le serveur NetWare ....................................................................................... 4-32 4.8 Imprimer avec Macintosh .............................................................. 4-33 Opérations sur cet appareil.......................................................... 4-33 Spécifier les paramètres AppleTalk ............................................. 4-33 Spécifier les paramètres Bonjour................................................. 4-35 Réglage de l'ordinateur Macintosh .............................................. 4-37 Pour Mac OS X ............................................................................ 4-37 Pour Mac OS 9............................................................................. 4-38 5 Diverses méthodes d'impression 5.1 Opérations d'impression.................................................................. 5-3 Pour Windows................................................................................ 5-3 Impression Test.............................................................................. 5-5 Pour Macintosh.............................................................................. 5-6 Pour Mac OS X .............................................................................. 5-6 Pour Mac OS 9............................................................................... 5-7 5.2 Réglage des fonctions d'impression .............................................. 5-8 Liste des fonctions......................................................................... 5-8 Présentation des fonctions .......................................................... 5-11 Orientation.................................................................................... 5-11 Format des originaux et format de sortie..................................... 5-12 Zoom (agrandissement et réduction) ........................................... 5-13 Magasin papier (Source papier) ................................................... 5-14 Type de papier (Support) ............................................................. 5-15 Type d'impression (Impression recto-verso/Impression Livret)... 5-16 Imprimer plusieurs pages sur une seule page ............................. 5-18 Marge ........................................................................................... 5-19 Agrafage et perforation ................................................................ 5-20 Type de sortie (gestion des travaux) ............................................ 5-21 Sommaire-4 IC-202 (Phase 2) Tri (assemblage) et classement (décalage)................................... 5-22 Sauter pages vierges (Économiser papier) ................................... 5-23 Paramètres de page de couverture, de page de dos et d'intercalaire ............................................................................ 5-24 Couverture avec bac d'insertion................................................... 5-25 Chapitre ........................................................................................ 5-26 Combinaison................................................................................. 5-27 Pliage ............................................................................................ 5-28 Décalage d'image ......................................................................... 5-29 Superposition................................................................................ 5-30 Filigrane ........................................................................................ 5-31 Réglage qualité ............................................................................. 5-32 Utiliser polices d'imprimante (Remplacer polices)........................ 5-33 Authentification/Suivi de Volume (E.K.C.) ..................................... 5-34 Envoyer téléfax ............................................................................. 5-35 Pour Windows............................................................................... 5-36 Pour Macintosh............................................................................. 5-39 Pour afficher la boîte de dialogue d'impression ........................... 5-39 Pour afficher la boîte de dialogue Format d'impression............... 5-39 Vérifiez le travail ............................................................................ 5-41 Affichage de la liste d'impression................................................. 5-41 Vérifier Réception/Boîte utilisateur ............................................... 5-42 6 Configuration du pilote PCL 6.1 Paramètres......................................................................................... 6-3 Paramètres communs..................................................................... 6-3 Onglet Configuration....................................................................... 6-4 Onglet Paramétrage par page ........................................................ 6-5 Onglet Fonctions spéciales ............................................................ 6-5 Onglet Superposition ...................................................................... 6-5 Onglet Filigrane............................................................................... 6-5 Onglet Qualité ................................................................................. 6-6 Onglet Police................................................................................... 6-6 Onglet Fax....................................................................................... 6-6 Onglet Version ................................................................................ 6-6 Onglet Option.................................................................................. 6-6 6.2 Spécifier les paramètres de l'onglet Configuration ....................... 6-7 Adapter l'impression au format papier ........................................... 6-7 Enregistrer un format personnalisé................................................. 6-8 Configuration de la position d'impression ...................................... 6-9 Sélectionner la source papier ....................................................... 6-10 Spécifier la source du type de papier ........................................... 6-11 Spécifier l'impression recto-verso/livret ....................................... 6-13 Imprimer plusieurs pages sur une seule page (N en 1)................. 6-14 Régler la marge............................................................................. 6-15 IC-202 (Phase 2) Sommaire-5 Agrafage....................................................................................... 6-16 Perforer ........................................................................................ 6-16 Agrafage central et pliage ............................................................ 6-17 Sélectionner le type de sortie ...................................................... 6-18 Enregistrer dans boîte utilisateur ................................................. 6-20 Attente avec épreuve ................................................................... 6-20 Spécifier les paramètres d'authentification.................................. 6-21 Spécifier les paramètres de Suivi de Volume (E.K.C.) ................. 6-22 6.3 Spécifier les paramètres de l'onglet Paramétrage par page...... 6-23 Imprimer des documents avec page de couverture et de dos .... 6-23 Impression d'une couverture avec bac d'insertion...................... 6-24 Impression de chapitres............................................................... 6-25 Imprimer plusieurs pages............................................................. 6-26 Paramétrage par page ................................................................. 6-26 Utilisation de papier à onglet ....................................................... 6-28 6.4 Spécifier les paramètres de l'onglet Fonctions spéciales.......... 6-32 Une image étalée sur deux pages est imprimée sur une feuille de papier de format double (combinaison)........................ 6-33 Définir le pliage............................................................................. 6-34 Réglage de la position d'impression (Décalage d'image) ............ 6-35 6.5 Spécifier les paramètres de l'onglet Superposition .................... 6-36 Imprimer ensemble des documents originaux différents (Superposition) ............................................................................. 6-36 Créer une superposition............................................................... 6-38 6.6 Spécifier les paramètres de l'onglet Filigrane ............................. 6-40 Imprimer un filigrane .................................................................... 6-40 Modifier un filigrane...................................................................... 6-41 Imprimer le numéro du document................................................ 6-42 6.7 Spécifier les paramètres de l'onglet Qualité................................ 6-43 Motif ............................................................................................. 6-43 Densité d'impression ................................................................... 6-43 Imprimer avec noir ....................................................................... 6-44 Lissage......................................................................................... 6-45 6.8 Spécifier les paramètres de l'onglet Police ................................. 6-46 Spécifier les paramètres .............................................................. 6-46 6.9 Spécifier les paramètres de l'onglet Fax...................................... 6-47 Envoyer un fax ............................................................................. 6-47 Créer une page de garde ............................................................. 6-53 Enregistrer un destinataire dans le répertoire .............................. 6-57 Enregistrer les informations de destinataire................................. 6-57 Enregistrer un groupe .................................................................. 6-59 Sommaire-6 IC-202 (Phase 2) 6.10 Spécifier les paramètres de l'onglet Option ................................. 6-61 Spécifier les paramètres ............................................................... 6-62 6.11 Enregistrer les paramètres de pilote ............................................. 6-63 Enregistrer les paramètres de pilote............................................. 6-63 Rétablir les paramètres................................................................. 6-65 Supprimer les paramètres ............................................................ 6-66 7 Configuration du pilote PS (Windows) 7.1 Paramètres......................................................................................... 7-3 Paramètres communs..................................................................... 7-3 Onglet Configuration....................................................................... 7-5 Onglet Paramétrage par page ........................................................ 7-6 Onglet Fonctions spéciales ............................................................ 7-6 Onglet PostScript............................................................................ 7-7 Onglet Superposition ...................................................................... 7-7 Onglet Qualité ................................................................................. 7-8 Onglet Filigrane............................................................................... 7-8 Onglet Option.................................................................................. 7-8 7.2 Spécifier les paramètres de l'onglet Configuration ....................... 7-9 Adapter l'impression au format papier ........................................... 7-9 Sélectionner une source papier .................................................... 7-10 Utiliser les transparents ................................................................ 7-12 Paramètres format personnalisé................................................... 7-15 Impression Recto-verso/Livret...................................................... 7-16 Agrafage........................................................................................ 7-17 Perforation .................................................................................... 7-18 Impression en mode Disposition .................................................. 7-19 Impression de livret....................................................................... 7-21 Impression en mode Zoom........................................................... 7-22 Imprimer une affiche ..................................................................... 7-23 Changer le papier ......................................................................... 7-24 Sélectionner le type de sortie ....................................................... 7-25 Impression sécurisée .................................................................... 7-26 Enregistrer dans boîte utilisateur .................................................. 7-27 Attente avec épreuve.................................................................... 7-28 Spécifier les paramètres d'authentification .................................. 7-29 Spécifier les paramètres de Suivi de Volume (E.K.C.) .................. 7-31 7.3 Spécifier les paramètres de l'onglet Paramétrage par page ...... 7-32 Imprimer des documents avec page de couverture et de dos..... 7-32 Impression d'une couverture avec bac d'insertion....................... 7-33 Impression de chapitres ............................................................... 7-34 Imprimer plusieurs pages ............................................................. 7-35 Paramétrage par page .................................................................. 7-35 Enregistrer/Charger la configuration............................................. 7-36 IC-202 (Phase 2) Sommaire-7 Enregistrer la configuration .......................................................... 7-36 Charger la configuration............................................................... 7-37 Utilisation de papier à onglet ....................................................... 7-38 7.4 Spécifier les paramètres de l'onglet Fonctions spéciales.......... 7-42 Imprimer le numéro du document................................................ 7-42 Imprimer 2 pages sur du papier deux fois plus grand ................. 7-43 Définir le pliage............................................................................. 7-44 Réglage de la position d'impression (Décalage d'image) ............ 7-45 7.5 Spécifier les paramètres de l'onglet PostScript .......................... 7-46 Impression d'un travail................................................................. 7-46 Compression d'un travail ............................................................. 7-47 Compression des bitmaps........................................................... 7-47 Utiliser le mode PS marqué ......................................................... 7-47 Définir le protocole de sortie ........................................................ 7-47 Régler la valeur gamma ............................................................... 7-48 Configurer les options.................................................................. 7-49 Effacer mémoire par page............................................................ 7-50 Compatibilité................................................................................ 7-50 Lissage bitmap............................................................................. 7-50 7.6 Spécifier les paramètres de l'onglet Superposition .................... 7-51 Créer Superposition ..................................................................... 7-51 Ajouter Superposition .................................................................. 7-53 Effacer Superposition................................................................... 7-54 7.7 Spécifier les paramètres de l'onglet Qualité................................ 7-55 Rotation de l'image...................................................................... 7-55 Imprimer les données en image miroir ou en image négative ..... 7-56 Ajuster la luminosité et le contraste des graphiques ................... 7-57 Lissage......................................................................................... 7-58 Conversion monochromatique..................................................... 7-59 Economie Toner, Brouillon........................................................... 7-60 7.8 Spécifier les paramètres de l'onglet Filigrane ............................. 7-61 Imprimer un filigrane .................................................................... 7-61 Modifier un filigrane...................................................................... 7-62 7.9 Spécifier les paramètres de l'onglet Police ................................. 7-64 Spécifier les paramètres .............................................................. 7-64 7.10 Spécifier les paramètres de l'onglet Option ................................ 7-66 Configurer les options installées.................................................. 7-66 Collecte automatique des informations optionnelles................... 7-67 7.11 Enregistrer les paramètres de pilote ............................................ 7-68 Enregistrer les paramètres de pilote ............................................ 7-68 Rétablir les paramètres ................................................................ 7-69 Modifier les paramètres ............................................................... 7-69 Sommaire-8 IC-202 (Phase 2) 8 Configuration du pilote PPD (Windows) 8.1 Paramètres......................................................................................... 8-3 Onglet Disposition .......................................................................... 8-3 Papier/qualité.................................................................................. 8-3 Avancé ............................................................................................ 8-4 Onglet Paramètres du périphérique................................................ 8-5 8.2 Spécifier les paramètres de l'onglet Disposition ........................... 8-6 Spécifier les paramètres ................................................................. 8-6 8.3 Spécifier les paramètres de l'onglet Papier/qualité....................... 8-7 Spécifier les paramètres ................................................................. 8-7 8.4 Avancé... ............................................................................................. 8-8 Spécifier les paramètres ................................................................. 8-8 8.5 Spécifier les périphériques............................................................. 8-10 Spécifier les paramètres ............................................................... 8-10 9 Configurer le pilote PPD (Mac OS 9) 9.1 Paramètres......................................................................................... 9-3 Boîte de dialogue Format d'impression.......................................... 9-3 Boîte de dialogue Imprimer............................................................. 9-5 9.2 Disposition ......................................................................................... 9-8 Attributs de page (Paramètres de base) ......................................... 9-8 Format papier personnalisés .......................................................... 9-9 Options PostScript........................................................................ 9-10 9.3 Impression ....................................................................................... 9-11 Généralités (Paramètres de base)................................................. 9-11 Disposition (Imprimer plusieurs pages sur une seule page) ......... 9-12 Options de finition......................................................................... 9-13 9.4 Options de réglage.......................................................................... 9-15 Spécifier les paramètres ............................................................... 9-15 10 Configurer le pilote PPD (Mac OS X) 10.1 Paramètres....................................................................................... 10-3 Boîte de dialogue Format d'impression........................................ 10-3 Boîte de dialogue Imprimer........................................................... 10-5 10.2 Disposition ....................................................................................... 10-8 Attributs de page (Paramètres de base) ....................................... 10-8 Format de papier personnalisé (en cas de Mac OS 10.2x/10.3x) .................................................................. 10-10 Format de papier personnalisé (en cas de Mac OS 10.4x)......... 10-11 IC-202 (Phase 2) Sommaire-9 Format papier............................................................................. 10-11 Marges de l'imprimante ............................................................. 10-11 10.3 Impression..................................................................................... 10-12 Copies et pages (Paramètres de base)...................................... 10-12 Disposition (Imprimer plusieurs pages sur une seule page) ...... 10-13 Alimentation papier .................................................................... 10-14 Sécurité ...................................................................................... 10-15 Finition........................................................................................ 10-17 Image/Disposition ...................................................................... 10-18 Configuration.............................................................................. 10-19 10.4 Options de réglage ....................................................................... 10-20 Spécifier les paramètres ............................................................ 10-20 10.5 Enregistrer les paramètres de pilote .......................................... 10-21 Enregistrer les paramètres de pilote .......................................... 10-21 Rétablir les paramètres .............................................................. 10-22 Modifier les paramètres ............................................................. 10-22 11 Divers réglages 11.1 Paramètres d'impression en mode Utilitaires ............................. 11-3 Sélections par défaut ................................................................... 11-3 Pour afficher l'écran de réglage des utilitaires............................. 11-3 Paramètre PDL............................................................................. 11-5 Nombre de jeux............................................................................ 11-6 Direction original .......................................................................... 11-7 Paramètre de désynchronisation ................................................. 11-8 Modifier format papier................................................................ 11-10 Réglage des bannières .............................................................. 11-11 Densité Texte Numérotation Jeux.............................................. 11-13 Bac papier.................................................................................. 11-15 Format de papier par défaut ...................................................... 11-16 Impression recto-verso .............................................................. 11-17 Type de reliure ........................................................................... 11-18 Agrafer........................................................................................ 11-19 Perforation.................................................................................. 11-20 Bac page bannière ..................................................................... 11-21 Numéro de police....................................................................... 11-22 Jeu de symboles ........................................................................ 11-24 Taille caractères ......................................................................... 11-25 Ligne/Page ................................................................................. 11-27 Mappage CR (Retour chariot)/LF (saut de ligne)........................ 11-28 Erreur impression PS ................................................................. 11-30 Imprimer les rapports................................................................. 11-31 11.2 Réglages de l'imprimante en mode administrateur .................. 11-32 Sommaire-10 IC-202 (Phase 2) Pour afficher l'écran Réglage administrateur.............................. 11-32 Système prioritaire...................................................................... 11-34 Délai de connexion I/F ................................................................ 11-36 Capturer les données d'impression............................................ 11-37 11.3 Utiliser Web Connection ............................................................... 11-39 Configuration minimale requise .................................................. 11-39 Accéder à Web Connection........................................................ 11-39 Structure de page ....................................................................... 11-40 Fonction de cache des navigateurs Internet............................... 11-42 Dans Internet Explorer ................................................................ 11-42 Dans Netscape Navigator ........................................................... 11-42 Connexion et déconnexion......................................................... 11-43 Déconnexion............................................................................... 11-44 Se connecter en mode Utilisateur (utilisateur public) ................. 11-45 Se connecter en mode Utilisateur (utilisateur enregistré) ........... 11-47 Se connecter en mode Administrateur ....................................... 11-49 Mode Utilisateur.......................................................................... 11-52 Onglet Système .......................................................................... 11-53 Onglet Système — Info sur le périphérique — Consommables. 11-53 Onglet Système — Info sur le périphérique — Bac d'entrée...... 11-54 Onglet Système — Info sur le périphérique — Bac de sortie ..... 11-55 Onglet Système — Info sur le périphérique — Sommaire de configuration ............................................................................... 11-56 Onglet Système — Info sur le périphérique — Disque dur......... 11-57 Onglet Système — Info sur le périphérique — Information sur interface............................................................. 11-58 Onglet Système — Info sur le périphérique — Information administrateur.......................................................... 11-59 Onglet Système — Compteur..................................................... 11-60 Onglet Système — Assistance en ligne...................................... 11-61 Onglet Système — Authentification d'utilisateur — Modif. du mot de passe utilis. .................................................... 11-62 Onglet Système — Authentification d'utilisateur — Information utilisateur ................................................................. 11-63 Onglet Système — Inform. compte département....................... 11-64 Onglet Tâche............................................................................... 11-65 Onglet Tâche — Tâches en cours .............................................. 11-65 Onglet Tâche — Historique tâches............................................. 11-67 Onglet Impression....................................................................... 11-68 Onglet Impression — Réglage général ....................................... 11-68 Onglet Impression — Sortie rapport........................................... 11-69 Mode Administrateur .................................................................. 11-70 Fonctionnement de base ............................................................ 11-70 Onglet Système .......................................................................... 11-71 Onglet Système — Importer/Exporter ........................................ 11-71 Onglet Système — Date/Heure — Réglage manuel ................... 11-73 IC-202 (Phase 2) Sommaire-11 Onglet Système — Date/Heure — Param. régl. heure .............. 11-74 Onglet Système — Paramètres Machine................................... 11-75 Onglet Système — Info sur le périphérique ............................... 11-76 Onglet Système — Version ROM............................................... 11-77 Onglet Système — Compteur.................................................... 11-78 Onglet Système — Assistance en ligne ..................................... 11-79 Onglet Système — Entretien — Effacer la config. réseau ......... 11-80 Onglet Système — Entretien — Réinitialisation......................... 11-81 Onglet Système — Entretien — Formater ttes destinations...... 11-82 Onglet Système — Paramètres notification statut..................... 11-83 Onglet Système – Configuration rapport compteur total........... 11-86 Onglet Système — Authentification d'utilisateur — Enregist. utilis............................................................................. 11-88 Onglet Système — Authentification d'utilisateur — Perm. par Défaut Fonctions ....................................................... 11-90 Onglet Système — Enregistrement Compte.............................. 11-91 Onglet Système — Mot de passe de l'administrateur ............... 11-93 Onglet Tâche — Historique tâches ............................................ 11-94 Onglet Impression...................................................................... 11-95 Onglet Impression — Interface .................................................. 11-95 Onglet Impression — Paramètre Port RAW............................... 11-96 Onglet Impression — Réglage par défaut — Réglage général .. 11-97 Onglet Impression — Réglage par défaut — Configuration PCL 11-99 Onglet Impression — Réglage par défaut — Configuration PS 11-100 Onglet Lecture ......................................................................... 11-101 Onglet Réseau.......................................................................... 11-102 Onglet Réseau — Paramètre TCP/IP— Paramètre TCP/IP ..... 11-102 11.4 Gestion des tâches d'impression.............................................. 11-104 Spécification des opérations d'impression.............................. 11-104 Spécification des réglages (pour Windows)............................. 11-104 Spécification des réglages (pour Mac OS X) ........................... 11-106 Stockage des tâches ............................................................... 11-107 Rappeler la tâche ..................................................................... 11-107 Impression sécurisée ............................................................... 11-108 Enregistrer dans boîte utilisateur ............................................. 11-109 Imprimer à l'aide du paramètre de suivi de volume................. 11-110 Spécification des réglages (pour Windows)............................. 11-111 Spécification des réglages (pour Mac OS X) ........................... 11-112 Fonctions de travaux dans Web Connection........................... 11-113 Sommaire-12 IC-202 (Phase 2) 12 Dépannage 12.1 Impossible d'imprimer .................................................................... 12-3 12.2 Impossible de définir les paramètres voulus ou impossible d'imprimer comme indiqué.................................... 12-5 13 Annexe 13.1 Spécifications .................................................................................. 13-3 13.2 Page de configuration..................................................................... 13-5 13.3 Liste des polices.............................................................................. 13-6 Liste des polices PCL ................................................................... 13-6 Liste des polices PS ..................................................................... 13-7 Page de test.................................................................................. 13-8 13.4 Polices d'écran ................................................................................ 13-9 Procédure d'installation des polices True type (Windows 98SE/Me/NT4.0/2000) ................................................. 13-9 Procédure d'installation des polices True type (Windows XP/Server 2003/XP x64/Server 2003 x64) ................. 13-11 13.5 Glossaire ........................................................................................ 13-14 13.6 Index ............................................................................................... 13-19 1 Introduction Introduction 1 IC-202 (Phase 2) 1-3 1 Introduction Merci d'avoir acheté le Develop ineo 750/600 Le ineo 750/600 est équipé d'un contrôleur d'impression intégré au copieur vous permettant d'imprimer directement à partir d'ordinateurs compatibles Windows ou d'ordinateurs Macintosh en installant le module IC-202 (puce de contrôleur). Ce manuel utilisateur décrit les fonctions d'impression, les opérations, l'utilisation et les précautions de sécurité du contrôleur d'impression. Avant d'utiliser cet appareil, lisez attentivement ce manuel pour garantir un fonctionnement efficace de l'appareil. Afin de garantir une utilisation en toute sécurité de cet appareil, lisez soigneusement les "Précautions d'installation et d'utilisation" du manuel utilisateur 750/600 [Opérations de copie] avant d'utiliser cet appareil. Les illustrations utilisées dans ce manuel utilisateur peuvent varier par rapport au modèle actuel. Marques commerciales et Copyright - Netscape Communications, le logo Netscape Communications, Netscape Navigator, Netscape Communicator et Netscape sont des marques de fabrique de Netscape Communications Corporation. - Novell et NetWare sont des marques déposées de Novell, Inc. - Microsoft, Windows et Windows NT sont des marques déposées de Microsoft Corporation. - IBM est une marque déposée de International Business Machines, Inc. - Apple, Macintosh et Mac sont des marques déposées de Apple Computer.Inc. - Adobe, le logo Adobe, Acrobat, le logo Acrobat, PostScript et le logo PostScript sont des marques déposées ou des marques commerciales de Adobe Systems, Incorporated. - Ethernet est une marque déposée de Xerox Corporation. - PCL est une marque déposée de Hewlett-Packard Company Limited. - Citrix, MetaFrame et MetaFrameXP sont des marques commerciales ou des marques déposées de Citrix Systems, Inc. aux USA et dans d'autres pays. - Tous les autres produits ou noms de marque sont des marques de fabrique ou des marques déposées de leurs propriétaires respectifs. - En ce qui concerne le réseau partenaire d'accès Citrix Premier, Develop GmbH est membre du réseau partenaire d'accès Citrix. Le réseau partenaire d'accès Citrix est un programme qui, associé à une solution de Citrix, promeut et développe des solutions meilleures pour les clients. 1 Introduction 1-4 IC-202 (Phase 2) - Box Operator : Ce logiciel est en partie basé sur le travail du Independent JPEG Group. - Compact-VJE Copyright 1986-2003 VACS Corp. - RC4® est une marque déposée ou une marque de fabrique de RSA Security Inc. aux Etats-Unis et/ou dans d'autres pays. - RSA® est une marque déposée ou une marque de fabrique de RSA Security Inc. aux Etats-Unis et/ou dans d'autres pays. Introduction 1 IC-202 (Phase 2) 1-5 Déclaration OpenSSL Licence OpenSSL Copyright © 1998-2000 The OpenSSL Project. Tous droits réservés. Toute redistribution et utilisation sous forme source ou binaire, avec ou sans modification, est autorisée sous réserve de satisfaction des conditions suivantes : 1. Les redistributions de code source doivent conserver l'avis de copyright ci-dessus, cette liste de conditions et la décharge de responsabilité suivante. 2. Les redistributions sous forme binaire doivent reproduire l'avis de copyright ci-dessus, cette liste de conditions et la décharge de responsabilité ci-dessous dans la documentation et/ou les autres documents fournis avec la distribution. 3. Tous les documents publicitaires mentionnant des fonctions ou l'utilisation de ce logiciel doivent contenir la déclaration suivante : "Ce produit contient un logiciel développé par OpenSSL Project pour utilisation dans le OpenSSL Toolkit. (http://www.openssl.org/)" 4. Les noms "OpenSSL Toolkit" et "OpenSSL Project" ne doivent pas être utilisés pour exploiter ou promouvoir des produits dérivés de ce logiciel dans accord écrit préalable. Pour l'accord écrit, veuillez contacter openssl-core@openssl.org. 5. Les produits dérivés de ce logiciel ne peuvent pas s'appeler "OpenSSL" et "OpenSSL" ne doit pas figurer dans leurs noms sans l'accord écrit préalable de OpenSSL Project. 6. Toute redistribution sous quelque forme que ce soit doit faire mention de la déclaration suivante : "Ce produit contient un logiciel développé par OpenSSL Project pour utilisation dans le OpenSSL Toolkit (http://www.openssl.org/)" CE LOGICIEL EST FOURNI PAR LE OpenSSL PROJECT "TEL QUEL" ET TOUTE GARANTIE IMPLICITE EXPRESSE ET IMPLICITE, Y COMPRIS, SANS TOUTEFOIS S'Y LIMITER, LES GARANTIES IMPLICITES DE QUALITE MARCHANDE ET D'APTITUDE POUR UNE APPLICATION SPECIFIQUE SERA REJETEE. EN AUCUN CAS, LE OpenSSL PROJECT OU SES COLLABORATEURS NE SAURONT ETRE TENUS POUR RESPONSABLES DES MOINDRES DOMMAGES DIRECTS, INDIRECTS, ACCIDENTELS, SPECIAUX, EXEMPLAIRES OU CONSECUTIFS (Y COMPRIS, SANS TOUTEFOIS S'Y LIMITER, L'APPROVISIONNEMENT OU LE REMPLACEMENT DE MARCHANDISES OU DES SERVICES ; LA PERTE D'EXPLOITATION, DE DONNEES, DE BENEFICES OU L'INTERRUPTION D'ACTIVITE) ENCOURUS ET EN MATIERE DE RESPONSABILITE, QU'IL S'AGISSE D'UNE RESPONSABILITE CONTRACTUELLE, D'UNE RESPONSABILITE CIVILE ABSOLUE OU DELICTUELLE (Y COMPRIS EN CAS DE NEGLIGENCE OU AUTRE) EMANANT DE L'UTILISATION DE CE 1 Introduction 1-6 IC-202 (Phase 2) LOGICIEL, MEME SI VOUS ETES AVERTIS DE L'EVENTUALITE D'UN TEL DOMMAGE. Ce produit contient un logiciel cryptographique créé par Eric Young (eay@crypt-Soft.com). Ce produit contient un logiciel créé par Tim Hudson (tjh@cryptsoft.com). Licence SSLeay d'origine COPYRIGHT © 1995-1998 Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com) Tous droits réservés. Ce progiciel est une implémentation SSL écrite par Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com). L'implémentation a été rédigée en conformité avec le protocole SSL de Netscape. Cette bibliothèque est libre pour un usage commercial et non commercial si les conditions suivantes sont respectées. Les conditions suivantes s'appliquent à tous les codes trouvé dans cette distribution, qu'il existe sous forme de code RC4, RSA, Ihash, DES, etc., et pas seulement pour le code SSL. La documentation SSL fournie avec cette distribution est couverte par les mêmes termes de copyright à la différence que le détenteur est Tim Hudson (tjh@cryptsoft.com). Le copyright est toujours celui d'Eric Young et an tant que tel, il est interdit de supprimer tout avis de copyright du code. Si ce progiciel est utilisé au sein d'un produit, Eric Young doit être cité comme étant l'auteur des parties de la bibliothèque utilisée. Cela peut se faire sous la forme d'un texte affiché au lancement du programme ou dans la documentation (en ligne ou sur papier) fournie avec le progiciel. Toute redistribution et utilisation sous forme source ou binaire,avec ou sans modification, est autorisée sous réserve de satisfaction des conditions. Cela peut se faire sous la forme d'un texte affiché au lancement du programme ou dans la documentation (en ligne ou sur papier) fournie avec le progiciel. ions suivantes : 1. Les redistributions de code source doivent conserver l'avis de copyright, cette liste de conditions et la décharge de responsabilité suivante. 2. Les redistributions sous forme binaire doivent reproduire l'avis de copyright ci-dessus, cette liste de conditions et la décharge de responsabilité ci-dessous dans la documentation et/ou les autres documents fournis avec la distribution. 3. Tous les documents publicitaires mentionnant les fonctions ou l'utilisation de ce logiciel doivent contenir la déclaration suivante : "Ce produit contient un logiciel cryptographique créé par Eric Young (eay@crypt-soft.com)" Le terme ‘cryptographique' peut être ignoré si les routines de la bibliothèque utilisée ne sont pas cryptographiées. Introduction 1 IC-202 (Phase 2) 1-7 4. Si vous incluez du code spécifique Windows (ou tout dérivé de ce dernier) du dossier apps (code d'application), vous devez ajouter une déclaration : "Ce produit contient un logiciel créé par Tim Hudson (tjh@cryptsoft.com)" CE LOGICIEL EST FOURNI PAR ERIC YOUNG "TEL QUEL" ET TOUTE GARANTIE IMPLICITE EXPRESSE ET IMPLICITE, Y COMPRIS, SANS TOUTEFOIS S'Y LIMITER, LES GARANTIES IMPLICITES DE QUALITE MARCHANDE ET D'APTITUDE POUR UNE APPLICATION SPECIFIQUE SERA REJETEE. EN AUCUN CAS, L'AUTEUR OU SES COLLABORATEURS NE SAURONT ETRE TENUS POUR RESPONSABLES DES MOINDRES DOMMAGES DIRECTS, INDIRECTS, ACCIDENTELS, SPECIAUX, EXEMPLAIRES OU CONSECUTIFS (Y COMPRIS, SANS TOUTEFOIS S'Y LIMITER, L'APPROVISIONNEMENT OU LE REMPLACEMENT DE MARCHANDISES OU DES SERVICES ; LA PERTE D'EXPLOITATION, DE DONNEES, DE BENEFICES OU L'INTERRUPTION D'ACTIVITE) ENCOURUS ET EN MATIERE DE RESPONSABILITE, QU'IL S'AGISSE D'UNE RESPONSABILITE CONTRACTUELLE, D'UNE RESPONSABILITE CIVILE ABSOLUE OU DELICTUELLE (Y COMPRIS EN CAS DE NEGLIGENCE OU AUTRE) EMANANT DE L'UTILISATION DE CE LOGICIEL, MEME SI VOUS ETES AVERTIS DE L'EVENTUALITE D'UN TEL DOMMAGE. La licence et les termes de distribution de toute version publiquement disponible ou dérivé de ce code ne peuvent pas être modifiés. C'est-à-dire qu'il n'est pas possible de se contenter de copier ce code pour l'insérer dans une autre licence de distribution [y compris la licence GNU Public Licence]. Tous les autres noms de produits mentionnés ici sont les marques commerciales ou les marques déposées de leurs détenteurs respectifs. Copyright © 2006 Develop GmbH. Tous droits réservés. Remarque - Toute reproduction partielle ou totale de ce manuel utilisateur est interdite sans autorisation. - Develop GmbH ne saurait être tenu pour responsable en cas d'incidents causés par l'utilisation de ce système d'impression ou de ce manuel utilisateur. - Les informations figurant dans ce manuel utilisateur sont susceptibles d'être modifiées sans préavis. - Develop GmbH détient le copyright des pilotes d'imprimante. 1 Introduction 1-8 IC-202 (Phase 2) 1.1 Licence d'utilisation du logiciel Ce progiciel contient les programmes suivants fournis par Develop GmbH : logiciel inclus dans le système d'impression, données vectorielles lisibles par machine à codage numérique au format spécial et sous forme cryptée ("Programmes polices"), logiciel supplémentaire installé dans le système d'un ordinateur à utiliser en relation avec le logiciel d'impression ("logiciel hôte") ainsi que les matériaux écrits explicatifs associés ("Documentation"). L'utilisation du terme "Logiciel" renvoie au logiciel d'impression, aux programmes de polices et/ou au logiciel hôte et regroupe également l'ensemble des mises à jour, des versions modifiées, des ajouts et des copies du logiciel. L'octroi de licence du Logiciel est soumis aux termes du présent contrat. Develop GmbH vous accorde une sous-licence non exclusive d'utilisation du Logiciel et de la Documentation, sous réserve de satisfaction des conditions suivantes : 1. L'utilisation du logiciel d'impression ainsi que des programmes de polices d'accompagnement pour la mise en image sur les périphériques de sortie sous licence est strictement réservée à un usage professionnel en interne. 2. Outre la licence relative aux programmes de polices prévue dans la section 1 mentionnée ci-dessus ("Logiciel d'impression") l'utilisation des programmes de polices de caractères romans est autorisée pour la reproduction de graisse, de styles et de versions des lettres, chiffres, caractères et symboles ("Caractères") à l'écran et ce, à l'usage professionnel interne. 3. Vous êtes autorisé à réaliser une copie de sauvegarde du logiciel hôte sous réserve de ne pas installer ni utiliser cette copie de sauvegarde sur aucun ordinateur. Nonobstant les restrictions susmentionnées, l'installation sur un nombre illimité d'ordinateurs est strictement réservée à une utilisation associée à un ou plusieurs systèmes d'impression exécutant le logiciel d'impression. 4. Vous pouvez concéder les droits inclus dans ce contrat à un cessionnaire de tous les droits et intérêts du titulaire de licence dudit Logiciel et de ladite Documentation ("Cessionnaire") sous réserve de transférer au cessionnaire l'ensemble des copies dudit logiciel et de ladite documentation pour lesquels le cessionnaire est lié par les termes et modalités du présent contrat. 5. Vous vous engagez à ne pas modifier, adapter ni traduire le Logiciel et la Documentation. 6. Vous êtes tenu de ne pas altérer, démanteler, décrypter, rétroconcevoir ou décompiler le Logiciel. 7. Le titre et la propriété du Logiciel et de la Documentation restent ceux de Develop GmbH et de son concédant de licence. Introduction 1 IC-202 (Phase 2) 1-9 8. L'utilisation des marques commerciales doit être conforme aux pratiques acceptées et inclure l'identification du nom du détenteur de la marque commerciale. Les marques commerciales ne peuvent être utilisées que pour identifier les impressions produites par le Logiciel. Une telle utilisation de marque commerciale ne vous octroie aucun droit de propriété de ladite marque commerciale. 9. Vous ne pouvez pas louer, louer à bail, sous-licencier, prêter ni transférer des versions ou copies du Logiciel non utilisées, ou le Logiciel contenu sur tout support non utilisé, sauf partie du transfert permanent de tout le Logiciel et de toute la Documentation selon les modalités susmentionnées. 10. EN AUCUN CAS, DEVELOP GmbH OU SON CONCÉDANT DE LICENCE NE SAURAIT ÊTRE TENU RESPONSABLE DES MOINDRES DOMMAGES CONSÉCUTIFS, ACCIDENTELS, INDIRECTS, EXEMPLAIRES OU PARTICULIERS, Y COMPRIS LA PERTE DE BÉNÉFICES OU DE REVENUS, MÊME SI DEVELOP GmbH EST AVERTI DE L'ÉVENTUALITÉ DE TELS DOMMAGES, NI DE TOUT RECOURS DE TIERS. DEVELOP GmbH OU SON CONCÉDANT DE LICENCE REJETTE TOUTE GARANTIE CONCERNANT LE LOGICIEL, EXPRESSE OU IMPLICITE, Y COMPRIS, ET SANS LIMITATION, LES GARANTIES IMPLICITES CONCERNANT LA COMMERCIALISATION, L'ADÉQUATION À UN USAGE PARTICULIER, LE TITRE ET LA NONVIOLATION DES DROITS DE TIERS. CERTAINS ÉTATS OU JURIDICTIONS N'AUTORISANT PAS L'EXCLUSION OU LA LIMITATION DES DOMMAGES ACCIDENTELS, CONSÉCUTIFS OU SPÉCIAUX, LES LIMITATIONS SUSMENTIONNÉES PEUVENT NE PAS S'APPLIQUER À VOUS. 11. Avis aux utilisateurs finaux gouvernementaux : le Logiciel est un "article commercial" tel que défini dans la disposition 48 C.F.R.2.101 et comprend le "logiciel commercial" et la "documentation du logiciel commercial" tels que définis dans la disposition 48 C.F.R. 12.212. En avec les termes du 48 C.F.R. 12.212 et 48 C.F.R. 227.7202-1 à 227.7202-4, tous les utilisateurs finals du gouvernement américain achètent le Logiciel uniquement avec les droits énoncés au présent. 12. Vous êtes tenu de ne pas exporter le Logiciel sous aucune forme susceptible d'être en violation avec les lois et règlements en vigueur. 1 Introduction 1-10 IC-202 (Phase 2) 1.2 A propos de ce Guide de l'utilisateur Ce Guide de l'utilisateur contie d'utilisateur nt des informations sur l'utilisation des fonctions d'impression du contrôleur d'impression Develop. Pour des détails sur les fonctions de copie, de numérisation, de boîte et de fax, veuillez-vous référer aux guides respectifs. Ce Guide de l'utilisateur est destiné aux utilisateurs possédant déjà une connaissance de base des opérations liées aux ordinateurs et aux copieurs. Pour le système d'exploitation Windows ou Macintosh et les opérations liées aux applications, veuillez-vous référer au manuel du produit correspondant. Composition du Guide de l'utilisateur Les guides d'utilisateur de cet appareil sont divisés par fonction et se présentent comme suit : Notations Captures d'écran de ce manuel utilisateur Sauf mention contraire, les fonctions du pilote d'imprimante sont décrites pour le pilote d'imprimante pour Windows XP. Guide de l'utilisateur Détails Guide de l'utilisateur IC-202 Le présent guide. Lisez le présent manuel avant d'utiliser cet appareil comme imprimante. Opérations Fax Lisez le présent manuel avant d'utiliser cet appareil comme télécopieur. Opérations Scanner Réseau Lisez le présent manuel avant d'utiliser cet appareil comme scanner. Opérations Boîte Lisez le présent manuel avant d'utiliser les fonctions de boîte de cet appareil. Nom du produit Description dans ce guide ineo 750/600 Copieur Copieur ou imprimante Contrôleur de réseau intégré Contrôleur de réseau Contrôleur d'imprimante, y compris cet appareil et ce système d'impression Système d'impression Microsoft Windows Windows Introduction 1 IC-202 (Phase 2) 1-11 1.3 Explication des conventions Les repères et mises en forme utilisés dans le présent manuel sont décrits ci-dessous. Recommandations de sécurité 6 DANGER Tout manquement au respect des instructions mises en évidence de cette manière risquent de causer des blessures graves voire mortelles dues à l'énergie électrique. % Observer tous les dangers afin de prévenir toute blessure. 7 AVERTISSEMENT Tout manquement au respect des instructions mises en valeur de cette manière peut entraîner des blessures graves ou des dommages matériels. % Observer tous les avertissements afin de prévenir toute blessure et garantir l'utilisation correcte de la machine. 7 ATTENTION Tout manquement au respect des instructions mises en valeur de cette manière peut entraîner des blessures légères ou des dommages matériels. % Observer toutes les mises en garde afin de prévenir toute blessure et garantir l'utilisation correcte de la machine. Séquence d'actions 1 Le chiffre 1 ainsi formaté indique la première étape d'une séquence d'actions. 2 Les nombres suivants ainsi formatés indiquent les étapes successives d'une série d'actions. Une illustration insérée ici montre les opérations à effectuer. 1 Introduction 1-12 IC-202 (Phase 2) ? Le texte formaté dans ce style offre une assistance supplémentaire. % Le texte ainsi formaté décrit l'action permettant d'obtenir le résultat escompté. Astuces 2 Remarque Le texte mis en évidence de cette manière contient des informations utiles et des astuces pour garantir l'utilisation en toute sécurité de la machine. 2 Rappel Le texte mis en évidence de cette manière contient des informations importantes (Rappel). ! Détails Le texte mis en évidence de cette manière contient des renvois à des informations plus détaillées. Repères de texte spéciaux Touche [Stop] Les noms des touches du panneau de contrôle sont illustrées comme ci-dessus. RÉGLAGE MACHINE Les textes affichés se présentent sous la forme ci-dessus. 2 Présentation Présentation 2 IC-202 (Phase 2) 2-3 2 Présentation 2.1 Configuration du CD-ROM du contrôleur Les CD-ROM du contrôleur sont les suivants : - CD-ROM du logiciel Utilisateur (Windows/Macintosh) - CD des utilitaires Chaque CD-ROM contient des contrôleurs d'imprimantes (pour Windows et Macintosh), des utilitaires ainsi que des polices d'écran et de la documentation, comme les manuels d'utilisateur et les notes de lancement. 2 Présentation 2-4 IC-202 (Phase 2) 2.2 Contrôleur d'impression Le contrôleur d'impression est un périphérique chargé d'exécuter des fonctions d'impression et d'impression réseau avec cet appareil. Rôle du contrôleur d'impression Le contrôleur d'impression a été intégré au copieur, ce qui vous permet d'imprimer en installant le module IC-202. Vous pouvez imprimer à partir des applications installées sur l'ordinateur relié au système d'impression. Quand vous utilisez cet appareil comme imprimante réseau, vous pouvez imprimer à partir des applications de l'ordinateur. Fonctions disponibles du contrôleur d'impression Le contrôleur d'impression permet les fonctions suivantes. - Impression à partir d'un ordinateur (avec le pilote d'imprimante PCL ou PS) - Support de protocoles réseau dont TCP/IP, NetBEUI, IPX/SPX, AppleTalk et Bonjour/Rendez-vous - Impression directe sur un réseau utilisant l'impression SMB (Windows), LPR et IPP - Accès aux paramètres de cet appareil et du contrôleur d'impression à partir d'un ordinateur client sur le réseau (à l'aide d'un navigateur Internet) - Contrôle du nombre de pages imprimées (fonctions "Authentification utilisateur" et "Suivi de Volume (E.K.C.)") Système d'impression Machine Impression d'impression Ordinateur Le kit d'interface parallèle (en option) est installé. Présentation 2 IC-202 (Phase 2) 2-5 Modes machine Les paramètres du pilote d'imprimante sont principalement définis à partir d'un ordinateur, toutefois, vous pouvez imprimer la liste des polices et les paramètres du contrôleur d'impression ainsi que les paramètres d'impression par défaut peuvent se régler à partir du panneau de contrôle de cet appareil. En outre, vous pouvez utiliser les opérations de numérisation en changeant de mode. Mode Copie Cet appareil peut être utilisé comme copieur. Mode Fax Cet appareil peut être utilisé comme télécopieur. Mode Numérisation Cet appareil peut être utilisé comme scanner. Mode Boîte Cet appareil peut être utilisé pour archiver des travaux et comme dossier de documents pour envoyer des données à un ordinateur sur le réseau. 2 Remarque Vous pouvez utiliser cet appareil comme imprimante dans tous les modes. Modifiez les paramètres d'impression par défaut en mode Utilisateur. 2 Présentation 2-6 IC-202 (Phase 2) Flux d'impression Quand vous utilisez ce système d'impression comme imprimante, le flux du processus principal est décrit ci-dessous. Les commandes d'impression émises par l'application sont réceptionnés par le pilote d'imprimante. Les données sont transférées à cet appareil via une interface parallèle (IEEE 1284) quand cet appareil est utilisé comme imprimante locale, via une interface USB quand cet appareil est utilisé comme imprimante USB ou via une interface Ethernet (TCP/IP, IPX/SPX NetBEUI, AppleTalk ou Bonjour/Rendez-vous) quand cet appareil est utilisé comme imprimante réseau. Les données sont ensuite envoyées au système d'impression qui se charge de la rastérisation d'image (conversion des caractères et des images de sortie en données bitmap). Et pour finir, ces données sont imprimées à partir de cet appareil. Présentation 2 IC-202 (Phase 2) 2-7 2 Remarque Les interfaces Ethernet, USB et parallèle peuvent être utilisées simultanément. Pour utiliser les interfaces USB et parallèle, il faut installer le kit de connexion locale (EK-701) en option. Les fonctions de copie peuvent être utilisées pendant l'utilisation des fonctions d'impression. Pour utiliser cet appareil comme copieur, appuyez sur la touche [Copie] du panneau de contrôle. Quand une tâche d'impression est réceptionnée pendant la copie, les données sont stockées dans la mémoire de cet appareil. Une fois la copie terminée, la tâche d'impression est automatiquement imprimée. Ordinateur Application Application Application Pilote d'imprimante Pilote d'imprimante Pilote d'imprimante USB Système d'impression Impression Traitement d'image Traitement PDL (rastérisation) Utilisée comme imprimante locale Utilisée comme imprimante USB Utilisée comme imprimante réseau Interface parallèle (IEEE 1284) Ethernet (TCP/IP, IPX/SPX ou AppleTalk) Disque dur Impression sécurisée Enregistrer dans boîte utilisateur 2 Présentation 2-8 IC-202 (Phase 2) 2.3 Environnement d'exploitation La configuration système nécessaire pour utiliser ce système d'impression ainsi que les interfaces utilisées pour la connexion sont expliquées cidessous. Système d'exploitation compatible avec le pilote d'imprimante Ce système d'impression est équipé en fourniture standard du pilote d'imprimante PCL ou PostScript3 (PS;PPD PostScript). Pour utiliser ce système d'impression, vous devez installer le pilote d'imprimante sur votre ordinateur. Pilote PCL Compatible Windows - Windows 98 deuxième édition (identifié par Windows 98SE) - Windows Millenium Edition (identifié par Windows Me) - Windows NT 4.0 Service Pack6a ou supérieur (identifié par Windows NT 4.0) - Windows 2000 Service Pack4 ou supérieur (identifié par Windows 2000) - Windows XP Home Edition/Professional Service Pack1 ou supérieur (identifié par Windows XP) - Windows Server 2003 (Service Pack1 ou supérieur) Pilote PS (PostScript3) Compatible Windows - Windows NT 4.0 Service Pack6a ou supérieur - Windows 2000 Service Pack4 ou supérieur - Windows XP Home Edition/Professional Service Pack1 ou supérieur - Windows Server 2003 (Service Pack1 ou supérieur) - Windows XP Professional x64 Edition (identifié par Windows XP x64) - Windows Serveur 2003 x64 Editions (identifié par Windows Serveur 2003 x64) – Pour l'acquisition du pilote PS pour Windows XP x64/ Server 2003 x64, contactez le SAV. Présentation 2 IC-202 (Phase 2) 2-9 Pilote PPD PostScript (PostScript3) Compatible Windows - Windows 98 deuxième édition - Windows Millennium Edition - Windows NT 4.0 Service Pack6a ou supérieur - Windows 2000 Service Pack4 ou supérieur - Windows XP Home Edition/Professional Service Pack1 ou supérieur - Windows Server 2003 (Service Pack1 ou supérieur) - Windows XP Professional x64 Edition - Windows Server 2003 x64 Editions Compatible Macintosh - Mac OS 9.2.x (identifié par Mac OS 9) - Mac OS X v10.2x/v10.3x/10.4x (identifié par Mac OS X) (Inclut Intel Mac (v10.4x)) Interfaces compatibles Les différentes interfaces pouvant être utilisées pour connecter ce système d'impression à un ordinateur sont décrites ci-après. Pour utiliser les interfaces USB et parallèle, il faut installer le kit de connexion locale (EK-701) en option. Interface Ethernet Connecter lors de l'utilisation de ce système d'impression comme imprimante réseau. Pour la connexion, un câble Ethernet (RJ45) est nécessaire. Supporte les normes 10Base-T et 100Base-TX. En outre, l'interface Ethernet supporte les protocoles TCP/IP (LDP/LPR, Raw, IPP, SMB), NetBEUI (SMB), IPX/SPX (NetWare), AppleTalk (EtherTalk) et Bonjour/Rendez-vous. Interface parallèle (en option : EK-701) Connecter lors de l'utilisation de ce système d'impression comme imprimante locale. Pour la connexion, il faut un ordinateur équipé de Windows et d'un câble parallèle IEEE 1284. Utilisez un câble parallèle avec un embout équipé d'un connecteur Amphenol mâle 36 broches. L'interface parallèle supporte les modes compatibles, nibble et ECP. 2 Présentation 2-10 IC-202 (Phase 2) Interface USB (en option : EK-701) Connecter lors de l'utilisation de ce système d'impression comme imprimante réseau. L'interface USB peut se connecter à un ordinateur équipé de Windows ou à un ordinateur Macintosh. La connexion requiert un câble USB. Utilisez un câble USB type A (4 broches, mâle) ou type B (4 broches, mâle). Un câble USB de 3 m ou moins est recommandé. Les interfaces Ethernet, USB et parallèle peuvent être utilisées simultanément. Schéma de connexion Les câbles d'imprimante peuvent se connecter sur chaque port sur le côté de cet appareil. Machine (vue latérale) USB Câble Port Câble Port utilisateur parallèle parallèle Présentation 2 IC-202 (Phase 2) 2-11 2.4 Installation du système Afin de pouvoir utiliser ce système d'impression, il faut d'abord l'installer. L'installation consiste à raccorder cet appareil à un ordinateur et à installer le pilote d'imprimante sur l'ordinateur utilisé. Pour installer le système d'impression Installer le système d'impression comme décrit ci-après. 1 Connectez cet appareil à un ordinateur. (Voir "Interfaces compatibles" à la page 2-9.) 2 Installez le pilote d'imprimante. (Voir "Installation du pilote d'imprimante" à la page 3-3 ou "Si vous utilisez Macintosh" à la page 3-15.) 3 Si vous utilisez une connexion réseau, configurez le réseau. (Voir "Réglage de l'impression réseau" à la page 4-3.) 4 Vérifiez l'installation en imprimant une page test. (Voir "Impression Test" à la page 5-5.) 5 Installez les polices d'écran. – Le CD-ROM du logiciel utilisateur contient les polices Latin TrueType comme polices d'écran. – Voir "Polices d'écran" à la page 13-9 pour de plus amples informations sur l'installation des polices d'écran. L'installation du pilote d'imprimante peut varier en fonction de la méthode de connexion utilisée avec cet appareil en plus du système d'exploitation de l'ordinateur et du type de pilote d'imprimante utilisé. ! Détails Pour plus de détails sur la connexion de cet appareil à un ordinateur, voir "Interfaces compatibles" à la page 2-9. 2 Remarque Pour mettre à jour un pilote d'imprimante existant, commencez pas supprimer le pilote d'imprimante existant. Pour plus de détails, voir "Désinstaller le pilote d'imprimante" à la page 3-14 et page 3-22. 2 Présentation 2-12 IC-202 (Phase 2) 3 Installation du pilote d'imprimante Installation du pilote d'imprimante 3 IC-202 (Phase 2) 3-3 3 Installation du pilote d'imprimante 3.1 Pilotes d'imprimante et systèmes d'exploitation compatibles Afin d'utiliser ce système d'impression, il faut d'abord installer le pilote d'imprimante. Le pilote d'imprimante est un programme qui contrôle le traitement des données pour la sortie. Installez le pilote d'imprimante sur l'ordinateur à partir du CD-ROM fourni. Les pilotes d'imprimante présents sur le CD et les systèmes informatiques d'exploitation compatibles sont énumérés ci-après. Installez le pilote d'imprimante requis. Langage de description de page Pilote d'imprimante Systèmes d'exploitation compatibles PCL PCL Windows 98SE, Windows Me, Windows NT 4.0, Windows 2000, Windows XP, Windows Server 2003 PostScript 3 PS Windows NT 4.0, Windows 2000, Windows XP, Windows Server 2003 Windows XP x64, Windows Serveur 2003 x64 PPD PostScript Windows 98SE, Windows Me, Windows NT 4.0, Windows 2000, Windows XP, Windows Server 2003 Windows XP x64, Windows Server 2003 x64 Mac OS 9, Mac OS X 3 Installation du pilote d'imprimante 3-4 IC-202 (Phase 2) 3.2 Utilisé avec Windows La procédure d'installation pour le pilote d'imprimante Windows varie en fonction de la manière dont cet appareil est raccordé à l'ordinateur et en fonction du pilote d'imprimante utilisé. 2 Remarque Pour obtenir des détails sur l'installation du pilote d'imprimante dans un environnement réseau, voir "Réglage de l'impression réseau" à la page 4-3. Comme il est nécessaire de spécifier à l'avance d'autres paramètres de réseau lors de l'installation du pilote d'imprimante via une connexion réseau, installez-le à ce moment avec une connexion locale. Pour installer le pilote d'imprimante sous Windows NT 4.0, Windows 2000, Windows XP ou Windows Server 2003/XP x64/ Server 2003 x64, connectez-vous avec un nom d'utilisateur autorisé par l'administrateur. Pour brancher cet appareil à un ordinateur par le biais d'une connexion parallèle ou USB, vous avez besoin du kit d'interface locale supplémentaire. Pilote d'imprimante Voir PCL PS "Installation du pilote d'imprimante à l'aide de l'Assistant Ajout d'imprimante" à la page 3-5 "Installation du pilote d'imprimante à l'aide de l'Assistant Ajout d'imprimante" à la page 3-5 "Pour Windows 98SE/Me/NT 4.0/2000" à la page 3-8 "Pour Windows XP/Server 2003/XP x64/Server 2003 x64" à la page 3-6 "Installation à l'aide du câble USB" à la page 3-10 "Pour Windows 98SE/Me" à la page 3-10 "Pour Windows 2000" à la page 3-12 "Pour Windows XP/Server 2003/XP x64/Server 2003 x64" à la page 3-13 PPD PostScript "Installation du pilote d'imprimante à l'aide de l'Assistant Ajout d'imprimante" à la page 3-5 "Pour Windows 98SE/Me/NT 4.0/2000" à la page 3-8 "Pour Windows XP/Server 2003/XP x64/Server 2003 x64" à la page 3-6 "Installation à l'aide du câble USB" à la page 3-10 "Pour Windows 98SE/Me" à la page 3-10 "Pour Windows 2000" à la page 3-12 "Pour Windows XP/Server 2003/XP x64/Server 2003 x64" à la page 3-13 Le pilote PS peut s'utiliser sous Windows NT4.0/2000/XP/Server 2003/ XP x64/Server 2003 x64. Pour l'acquisition du pilote PS pour Windows XP x64/Server 2003 x64, contactez le SAV. Installation du pilote d'imprimante 3 IC-202 (Phase 2) 3-5 Installation du pilote d'imprimante à l'aide de l'Assistant Ajout d'imprimante 2 Remarque Pour l'impression IPP, il n'est pas nécessaire d'installer le pilote d'imprimante à ce moment car le paramétrage de l'impression IPP est effectué lors de l'installation du pilote d'imprimante. Pour de plus amples détails sur l'impression IPP, voir "Impression IPP (Windows 2000/XP/Server 2003/XP x64/Server 2003 x64)" à la page 4-14. 2 Remarque Pour obtenir des détails sur l'installation du pilote d'imprimante dans un environnement réseau, voir "Réglage de l'impression réseau" à la page 4-3. Comme il est nécessaire de spécifier à l'avance d'autres paramètres de réseau lors de l'installation du pilote d'imprimante via une connexion réseau, installez-le à ce moment avec une connexion locale. 3 Installation du pilote d'imprimante 3-6 IC-202 (Phase 2) Pour Windows XP/Server 2003/XP x64/Server 2003 x64 1 Insérez le "CD-ROM du logiciel utilisateur" dans le lecteur de CD-ROM de l'ordinateur. 2 Cliquez sur [Démarrer] et ensuite sur [Imprimantes et télécopieurs]. 3 Pour Windows XP/XP x64, cliquez sur [Ajouter une imprimante] dans le menu "Tâches d'impression". – Pour Windows Server 2003/Server 2003 x64, faites un double clic sur l'icône "Ajout d'imprimante". L'Assistant Ajout d'imprimante démarre. 4 Cliquez sur [Suivant]. 5 Sélectionnez "Imprimante locale connectée à cet ordinateur". – Décochez la case "Détection et installation automatique de l'imprimante Plug and Play" et cliquez sur [Suivant]. 6 La boîte de dialogue Sélectionner le port d'imprimante apparaît. Sélectionnez "LPT1" et cliquez ensuite sur [Suivant]. – Le port LPT1 est généralement le port parallèle utilisé. 7 Cliquez sur [Disque fourni]. Installation du pilote d'imprimante 3 IC-202 (Phase 2) 3-7 8 Cliquez sur [Parcourir]. 9 En fonction de la langue, du système d'exploitation et du pilote d'imprimante que vous utilisez, spécifiez le dossier du CD-ROM contenant le pilote d'imprimante et cliquez ensuite sur [OK]. – Voir "Configuration du CD-ROM du contrôleur" à la page 2-3 pour le dossier contenant le pilote d'imprimante. – Si vous utilisez l'application Adobe PageMaker, copiez le fichier PPD du dossier "PPD_PageMaker" dans un dossier approprié. (Pour plus de détails, reportez-vous au manuel Adobe PageMaker. 10 Cliquez sur [OK]. – La liste "Imprimantes" apparaît. 11 Cliquez sur [Suivant]. 12 Suivez les instructions à l'écran. – Si vous utilisez une connexion réseau, effectuez un test d'impression une fois que vous avez spécifié les paramètres réseau. 13 Une fois l'installation terminée, assurez-vous que l'icône de l'imprimante installée apparaît dans la fenêtre Imprimantes et télécopieurs. 14 Sortez le CD-ROM du lecteur de CD-ROM. L'installation du pilote d'imprimante est terminée. 3 Installation du pilote d'imprimante 3-8 IC-202 (Phase 2) Pour Windows 98SE/Me/NT 4.0/2000 1 Insérez le "CD-ROM du logiciel utilisateur" dans le lecteur de CD-ROM de l'ordinateur. 2 Cliquez sur [Démarrer], pointez sur [Paramètres] et cliquez sur [Imprimantes]. La fenêtre Imprimantes apparaît. 3 Double-cliquez sur l'icône "Ajouter une imprimante". L'Assistant Ajout d'imprimante démarre. 4 Suivez les instructions à l'écran. 5 Sur l'écran de sélection de la connexion de l'imprimante, sélectionnez "Imprimante locale". Utilise les fenêtres de Windows 2000. 6 Cliquez sur [Suivant]. 7 Cliquez sur [Disque fourni]. 8 Cliquez sur [Parcourir]. 9 En fonction de la langue, du système d'exploitation et du pilote d'imprimante que vous utilisez, spécifiez le dossier du CD-ROM contenant le pilote d'imprimante et cliquez ensuite sur [OK]. – Voir "Configuration du CD-ROM du contrôleur" à la page 2-3 pour le dossier contenant le pilote d'imprimante. – Si vous utilisez l'application Adobe PageMaker, copiez le fichier PPD du dossier "PPD_PageMaker" dans un dossier approprié. (Pour plus de détails, reportez-vous au manuel Adobe PageMaker.) 10 Cliquez sur [OK]. La liste "Imprimantes" apparaît. 11 Cliquez sur [Suivant]. 12 Indiquez le port de connexion. Sélectionnez "LPT1". 13 Suivez les instructions à l'écran. – Si vous utilisez une connexion réseau, effectuez un test d'impression une fois que vous avez spécifié les paramètres réseau. Installation du pilote d'imprimante 3 IC-202 (Phase 2) 3-9 14 Une fois l'installation terminée, assurez-vous que l'icône de l'imprimante installée apparaît dans la fenêtre Imprimantes. 15 Sortez le CD-ROM du lecteur de CD-ROM. L'installation du pilote d'imprimante est terminée. 3 Installation du pilote d'imprimante 3-10 IC-202 (Phase 2) Installation à l'aide du câble USB L'ordinateur personnel et le système d'impression peuvent être directement connectés par un câble USB pour l'impression. 2 Remarque Windows NT4.0 ne gère pas l'impression à l'aide d'un câble USB. Les descriptions données ici concernent le pilote PCL . Pour Windows 98SE/Me Lorsque vous utilisez un câble USB pour la première fois, installez le "support d'impression USB", puis le pilote d'imprimante. 1 Allumez le copieur. 2 Insérez le "CD-ROM du logiciel utilisateur" dans le lecteur de CD-ROM de l'ordinateur. – Lorsque vous introduisez le CD-ROM, le "programme d'installation" est lancé automatiquement. Cliquez ensuite sur [Terminer] pour terminer le "programme d'installation". 3 Reliez le copieur et l'ordinateur par un câble USB. 4 La fenêtre de dialogue de l'Assistant Ajout de nouveau matériel apparaît. Cliquez sur [Suivant]. 5 Sélectionnez "Chercher le pilote le mieux adapté à votre système. (Recommandé" et cliquez ensuite sur [Suivant]. – Les écrans Windows 98SE servent ici d'illustration. 6 Sélectionnez "Spécifier un emplacement" et cliquez ensuite sur [Parcourir]. 7 Spécifiez le dossier du CD-ROM qui contient le fichier de pilote du "support d'impression USB" et cliquez ensuite sur [Suivant]. – Pour spécifier le dossier qui contient le fichier du pilote (en cas de pilote PCL: À l'ouverture du lecteur de CD-ROM, sélectionnez "Drivers" – "PCL" – "ineo750_600" – "EN" – "Win9X_Me". Vérifiez que "Recherche du fichier de pilote Windows pour le système" est réglé sur "Support d'impression USB" et cliquez ensuite sur [Suivant]. Installation du pilote d'imprimante 3 IC-202 (Phase 2) 3-11 8 L'installation démarre. Lorsque l'installation est terminée, cliquez sur [Terminer]. L'installation du "support d'impression USB" est alors terminée. Installez ensuite le pilote d'imprimante. 9 La fenêtre de dialogue de l'Assistant Ajout de nouveau matériel apparaît. Cliquez sur [Suivant]. – Le nom à rechercher s'intitule "GENERIC 75/60 BW-1". 10 Sélectionnez "Chercher le pilote le mieux adapté à votre système. (Recommandé" et cliquez ensuite sur [Suivant]. 11 Sélectionnez "Spécifier un emplacement" et cliquez ensuite sur [Parcourir]. 12 Spécifiez le dossier du CD-ROM qui contient le fichier du pilote d'imprimante et cliquez sur [Suivant]. Le dossier est au même endroit qu'à l'étape 7. 13 Une zone de message apparaît avec le message "Windows a décelé un pilote mis à jour pour cet appareil...". Vérifiez que "le pilote mis à jour (recommandé)" est réglé sur "GENERIC 75/60 BW-1 PCL", sélectionnez-le et cliquez sur [Suivant]. 14 Cliquez sur [Suivant]. 15 Pour changer le nom d''imprimante, tapez le nom de l'imprimante désirée. Pour la définir comme "Imprimante par défaut", sélectionnez "Oui" et cliquez sur [Suivant]. – Lorsque vous installez une imprimante pour la première fois, aucun écran de sélection n'apparaît. Elle automatiquement définie comme "Imprimante par défaut". 16 Pour imprimer la "page de test", sélectionnez "Oui (recommandé)" et cliquez sur [Terminer]. 17 Si vous avez installé le pilote d'imprimante et sélectionné "Oui (recommandé)" à l'étape 16, la page de test est imprimée. Si la page de test s'imprime correctement, cliquez sur [Terminer]. L'installation du pilote d'imprimante est terminée. 3 Installation du pilote d'imprimante 3-12 IC-202 (Phase 2) Pour Windows 2000 1 Mettez le copieur sous tension. 2 Insérez le "CD-ROM du logiciel utilisateur" dans le lecteur de CD-ROM de l'ordinateur. – Lorsque vous introduisez le CD-ROM, le "programme d'installation" est lancé automatiquement. Cliquez ensuite sur [Terminer] pour terminer le "programme d'installation". 3 Reliez le copieur et l'ordinateur par un câble USB. 4 La boîte de dialogue de l'Assistant Nouveau matériel détecté apparaît. Cliquez sur [Suivant]. 5 Sélectionnez "Chercher le pilote le mieux adapté à mon système (recommandé)" et cliquez ensuite sur [Suivant]. 6 Cochez la case "lecteurs CD-ROM" et cliquez ensuite sur [Suivant]. 7 La recherche d'un pilote d'imprimante est lancée. Cliquez sur [Suivant]. – Si la recherche ne donne aucun pilote (en cas de pilote PCL): Revenez à l'étape 6, cochez la case "Spécifier un emplacement" ouvrez le lecteur CD-ROM, sélectionnez "Drivers" – "PCL" – "ineo750_600" – "EN" – "Win2000_XP" et cliquez sur [Suivant]. 8 Le pilote d'imprimante est installé. Cliquez sur [Terminer]. L'installation du pilote d'imprimante est terminée. Installation du pilote d'imprimante 3 IC-202 (Phase 2) 3-13 Pour Windows XP/Server 2003/XP x64/Server 2003 x64 1 Mettez le copieur sous tension. 2 Insérez le "CD-ROM du logiciel utilisateur" dans le lecteur de CD-ROM de l'ordinateur. – Lorsque vous introduisez le CD-ROM, le "programme d'installation" est lancé automatiquement. Cliquez ensuite sur [Terminer] pour terminer le "programme d'installation". 3 Reliez le copieur et l'ordinateur par un câble USB. 4 La boîte de dialogue de l'Assistant Nouveau matériel détecté apparaît. Sélectionnez "Installer à partir d'une liste ou d'un emplacement spécifique (avancé)" et cliquez ensuite sur [Suivant]. – Le nom à rechercher s'intitule "GENERIC 75/60 BW-1". 5 Sélectionnez "Chercher le meilleur pilote dans ces emplacements", cochez l'option "Chercher les supports amovibles" et cliquez sur [Suivant]. 6 Un pilote d'imprimante est installé. Cliquez sur [Terminer]. L'installation est terminée. – Si aucun pilote n'est installé (en cas de pilote PCL) : Revenez à l'étape 5, cochez la case "Inclure cet emplacement dans la recherche", ", ouvrez le lecteur CD-ROM, sélectionnez "Drivers" – "PCL" – "ineo750_600" – "EN" – "Win2000_XP" et cliquez ensuite sur [Suivant]. 3 Installation du pilote d'imprimante 3-14 IC-202 (Phase 2) Désinstaller le pilote d'imprimante S'il s'avère nécessaire de supprimer le pilote d'imprimante, par exemple, quand vous voulez réinstaller le pilote d'imprimante, suivez la procédure suivante pour supprimer le pilote. Désinstaller le pilote d'imprimante manuellement 1 Pour Windows 98SE/Me/NT 4.0/2000, cliquez sur [Démarrer], pointez sur [Paramètres] et cliquez ensuite sur [Imprimantes]. Pour Windows XP/Server 2003/XP x64/Server 2003 x64, cliquez sur [Démarrer], et cliquez ensuite sur [Imprimantes et télécopieurs]. 2 Dans la fenêtre Imprimantes (pour Windows XP/Server 2003/XP x64/ Server 2003 x64, fenêtre Imprimantes et télécopieurs), sélectionnez l'icône de l'imprimante que vous voulez supprimer. 3 Appuyez sur la touche [Suppr] du clavier de votre ordinateur pour supprimer le pilote d'imprimante. 4 Redémarrez votre ordinateur. – Une fois que le pilote de l'imprimante a été supprimé, l'icône de l'imprimante va disparaître de la fenêtre Imprimantes (pour Windows XP/Server 2003/XP x64/Server 2003 x64, fenêtre Imprimantes et télécopieurs). La désinstallation de Windows 98SE/Me est terminée. Si vous utilisez Windows NT4.0/2000/XP/Server 2003/XP x64/Server 2003 x64, exécutez les étapes 5 à 8 ci-dessous. 5 Sélectionnez "Propriétés du serveur" dans le menu "Fichier" 6 Cliquez sur l'onglet "Pilotes" et sélectionnez le pilote d'imprimante supprimé à l'étape 3. 7 Appuyez sur la touche [Supprimer] pour supprimer le pilote d'imprimante. 8 Redémarrez votre ordinateur. – Une fois la suppression terminée, le nom du pilote d'imprimante disparaît de l'onglet "Pilotes". Maintenant la désinstallation est terminée. Installation du pilote d'imprimante 3 IC-202 (Phase 2) 3-15 3.3 Si vous utilisez Macintosh La procédure d'installation du pilote d'imprimante Macintosh varie en fonction de la version du système d'exploitation Mac et du pilote d'imprimante utilisé. Veuillez-vous référer au tableau ci-dessous pour trouver la procédure d'installation adéquate du pilote d'imprimante sur votre ordinateur Macintosh. Installation du pilote d'imprimante Pour Mac OS X 1 Allumez l'ordinateur Macintosh. 2 Insérez le CD-ROM du logiciel utilisateur dans le lecteur de CD-ROM de l'ordinateur Macintosh. – Fermez toutes les applications en cours et susceptibles d'avoir démarré lorsque vous avez allumé votre ordinateur Macintosh. 3 Ouvrez le dossier "Driver — OS10_2_X" ou "Drivers — OS10_3_X" sur le CD-ROM. 4 Sélectionnez la version Mac utilisée et copiez le fichier pilote sur le bureau. Mac OS X 10.2 : GENERIC_75_BW-1_102.pkg Mac OS X 10.3/10.4 : GENERIC_75_BW-1_103.pkg 5 Double-cliquez le fichier copié sur le bureau. – Entrez le nom et le mot de passe requis de l'administrateur. – Pour connaître le nom et le mot de passe administrateur, demandez à votre administrateur réseau. – Pour quitter l'installation, cliquez sur [Annuler]. 6 Cliquez sur [Continuer] et suivez les instructions à l'écran jusqu'à ce que la boîte de dialogue Installation apparaisse. Syst. expl. Mac Pilote d'imprimante Voir Mac OS X PPD PostScript "Installation du pilote d'imprimante" à la page 3-15 Mac OS 9 PPD PostScript "Pour Mac OS 9" à la page 3-20 3 Installation du pilote d'imprimante 3-16 IC-202 (Phase 2) 7 Dans la boîte de dialogue Installation, cliquez sur [Installation]. – À partir de la deuxième installation du pilote d'imprimante, la touche "Installation" peut s'appeler "MÁJ(Mise à jour)". Le pilote d'imprimante est installé sur l'ordinateur Macintosh. Une fois l'installation terminée, un message s'affiche. 8 Cliquez sur [Fermer]. L'installation du pilote d'imprimante est terminée. Ensuite, sélectionnez l'imprimante. Installation du pilote d'imprimante 3 IC-202 (Phase 2) 3-17 Sélectionner une imprimante 2 Remarque Si la connexion se fait par AppleTalk, il est nécessaire de spécifier sur cette machine les paramètres AppleTalk. Pour plus de détails sur la définition des paramètres AppleTalk, voir "Imprimer avec Macintosh" à la page 4-33. Si la connexion se fait par Bonjour sous Mac OS X 10.4, il est nécessaire de spécifier sur cette machine les paramètres Bonjour. Pour plus de détails sur la définition des paramètres Bonjour, voir "Imprimer avec Macintosh" à la page 4-33. Si la connexion se fait par Rendez-vous sous Mac OS X 10.3, il est nécessaire de spécifier sur cette machine les paramètres Bonjour. Pour plus de détails sur la définition des paramètres Bonjour, voir "Imprimer avec Macintosh" à la page 4-33. Pour Mac OS X Après avoir branché cette machine à un ordinateur Macintosh, elle peut être utilisée comme imprimante en la sélectionnant dans Centre d'impression ou l'Utilitaire de configuration de l'imprimante comme imprimante à utiliser. 1 Ouvrez le Centre d'impression ou l'utilitaire Configuration de l'imprimante, situé dans "Applications"—"Utilitaires" du "Disque dur". 2 Lorsque la boîte de dialogue Ajout d'imprimante apparaît, cliquez sur [Ajouter]. Lorsque la liste d'imprimantes apparaît, cliquez sur [Ajouter]. – Pour Mac OS X 10.4, passez à l'étape 3. – Pour Mac OS X 10.2 et Mac OS X 10.3, passez à l'étape 4. – Si des imprimantes utilisables ont déjà été configurées, la boîte de dialogue Ajouter imprimante n'apparaît pas. 3 Si cette machine apparaît comme imprimante avec une connexion Bonjour, sélectionnez "GENERIC" dans la liste déroulante "Imprimer avec", sélectionnez "GENERIC 75 BW-1 PS(P)" ou "GENERIC 60 BW- 1 PS(P)" dans la liste des modèles, et cliquez ensuite sur [Ajouter]. – Si l'imprimante sélectionnée est enregistrée dans la liste des imprimantes, cela indique que la procédure d'installation est terminée. 3 Installation du pilote d'imprimante 3-18 IC-202 (Phase 2) – En cas de connexion AppleTalk, si cette machine n'apparaît pas comme imprimante, cliquez sur [Autres imprimantes] et passez ensuite à l'étape 4. 4 Sélectionnez la méthode de connexion et le nom de l'imprimante. – Pour spécifier une zone AppleTalk pour une connexion AppleTalk, sélectionnez "Zone locale AppleTalk". – Si "IPP" est sélectionné comme protocole dans Imprimante IP, la boîte de saisie du nom de la file apparaît. Sous Mac OS 10.3, il convient de laisser cette boîte vide. Sous Mac OS 10.4, entrez "ipp" dans la boîte texte du nom de la file. 5 Sélectionnez "GENERIC" dans la zone de liste déroulante "Modèle de l’imprimante". Installation du pilote d'imprimante 3 IC-202 (Phase 2) 3-19 6 Sélectionnez "GENERIC 75 BW-1 PS(P)" ou "GENERIC 60 BW-1 PS(P)" et cliquez ensuite sur [Ajouter]. – L'imprimante sélectionnée est enregistrée sur la liste des imprimantes. 3 Installation du pilote d'imprimante 3-20 IC-202 (Phase 2) Pour Mac OS 9 Après avoir branché cette machine, elle peut être utilisée comme imprimante en sélectionnant "Imprimante PostScript" sous "Sélecteur" et en spécifiant le fichier de description (PPD) de l'imprimante. Commencez par copier le fichier de description (PPD) de l'imprimante sur l'ordinateur Macintosh. 1 Insérez le CD-ROM du pilote d'imprimante Macintosh dans le lecteur de CD-ROM de l'ordinateur Macintosh. 2 Ouvrez le dossier "Driver — OS9_x — en" sur le CD-ROM. 3 Sélectionnez le fichier PPD "GENERIC75BW-1UVxxx.ppd" et copiezle dans le dossier "Printer descriptions" dans "System folder"— "Extensions" du "Harddisk". – Ensuite, sélectionnez une imprimante. Le pilote d'imprimante peut utiliser une imprimante LaserWriter Macintosh standard. 4 Dans le menu Apple, cliquez sur [Sélecteur] 5 Assurez-vous que "AppleTalk" est réglé sur "Activé" et cliquez ensuite sur l'icône [LaserWriter] 6 Dans la liste "Sélectionner une imprimante PostScript", cliquez sur l'imprimante compatible avec le système d'impression et cliquez ensuite sur [Créer]. – Si un autre fichier PPD a déjà été sélectionné, cliquez sur [Configurer] et cliquez ensuite sur [Sélectionner PPD] sur l'écran déjà affiché. L'écran de sélection du fichier de description (PPD) de l'imprimante PostScript apparaît. Installation du pilote d'imprimante 3 IC-202 (Phase 2) 3-21 7 Sélectionnez le fichier PPD approprié et cliquez ensuite sur [Sélectionner]. L'écran de réglage pour ajouter des options apparaît. 8 Sélectionnez les options installées sur cette machine. 9 Cliquez sur [OK]. La fenêtre du sélecteur réapparaît. 10 Fermez la fenêtre du sélecteur. 3 Installation du pilote d'imprimante 3-22 IC-202 (Phase 2) Désinstaller le pilote d'imprimante S'il s'avère nécessaire de désinstaller le pilote d'imprimante, suivez la procédure ci-dessous pour supprimer le pilote. 2 Remarque Fermez toutes les applications en cours et susceptibles d'avoir démarré lorsque vous avez allumé votre ordinateur Macintosh. Pour Mac OS X 1 Ouvrez le Centre d'impression ou l'utilitaire Configuration de l'imprimante, situé dans "Applications"—"Utilities" du "Disque dur". 2 Sélectionnez le nom de l'imprimante à supprimer et cliquez ensuite sur [Supprimer]. L'imprimante sélectionnée est supprimée. 3 Fermez la liste des imprimantes. 4 Faites glisser le fichier suivant, situé dans "Library"—"Pritners"— "PPD"—"Contents"—"Resources" du "Disque dur" sur l'icône "Corbeille". – "GENERIC 75 BW-1.gz" – "GENERIC 60 BW-1.gz" 5 Supprimez les fichiers inutiles dans "Library"—"Printers". – Avec Mac OS 10.3/10.4 – Faites glisser les fichiers suivants dans "Library"—"Printers"— "GENERIC"—"Filter" vers la "corbeille". – pstokm750 – Faites glisser les fichiers suivants de "Library"—"Receipts" dans la "corbeille". – GENERIC_75_BW-1_103.pkg – Faites glisser les fichiers suivants présents dans "Library"— "Printers" — "GENERIC"— "PDE" dans la "corbeille". – GENERIC75BW-1 Finishing.plugin – GENERIC75BW-1 ImageLayout.plugin – GENERIC75BW-1 Security.plugin – GENERIC75BW-1 Setup.plugin – Pour Mac OS 10.2 – Faites glisser les fichiers suivants dans "Library"—"Printers"— "Plugins PPD" sur l'icône "Corbeille". – GENERIC75BW-1 Finishing.plugin Installation du pilote d'imprimante 3 IC-202 (Phase 2) 3-23 – GENERIC75BW-1 ImageLayout.plugin – GENERIC75BW-1 Security.plugin – GENERIC75BW-1 Setup.plugin 6 Relancez l'ordinateur Macintosh. La procédure de désinstallation est terminée. Pour Mac OS 9 1 Faites glisser le fichier PPD "GENERIC75BW-1UVxxx.ppd", situé dans "System folder"—"Extensions"—"Printer descriptions" du "Disque dur" sur l'icône "Corbeille". Les fichiers associés au pilote d'imprimante sont supprimés. 2 Faites glisser l'"icône Imprimante du bureau" dans la "corbeille". 3 Relancez l'ordinateur Macintosh. La procédure de désinstallation est terminée. 3 Installation du pilote d'imprimante 3-24 IC-202 (Phase 2) 4 Réglage de l'impression réseau Réglage de l'impression réseau 4 IC-202 (Phase 2) 4-3 4 Réglage de l'impression réseau 4.1 Aperçu des fonctions réseau Fonctions réseau En connectant cet appareil à un réseau par l'intermédiaire du port Ethernet, ce système d'impression peut être utilisé comme imprimante réseau. Ce système d'impression supporte les normes 10Base-T et 100Base-TX. En outre, l'interface Ethernet supporte les protocoles TCP/IP (LDP/LPR, Raw, IPP, SMB), NetBEUI (SMB), IPX/SPX (NetWare), AppleTalk (EtherTalk) et Bonjour/Rendez-vous. 2 Remarque Lors de la configuration du réseau, le mot de passe administrateur est obligatoire pour accéder au mode Administrateur. Demandez le mot de passe administrateur à l'administrateur de cet appareil. Vous pouvez également configurer le paramètre réseau sur le panneau de contrôle du copieur. Système d'impression Cet appareil Ethernet Réseau Hub Le kit d'interface parallèle (en option) est installé. 4 Réglage de l'impression réseau 4-4 IC-202 (Phase 2) Caractéristiques des fonctions réseau Ce système d'impression est équipé des fonctions réseau suivantes pour supporter de manière flexible divers environnements de réseau. - Sélection automatique de 10Base-T ou 100Base-TX (Fast Ethernet) - Supporte plusieurs protocoles réseau dont TCP/IP, NetBEUI, IPX/SPX et AppleTalk (EtherTalk) - Supporte l'impression SMB L'impression SMB est une méthode d'impression qui ne requiert pas de serveur d'impression spécifique. - Supporte l'impression Raw (excepté sous Windows NT4.0) - Supporte LPD/LPR sur TCP/IP dans Windows NT 4.0/2000/XP/ Server 2003/XP x64/Server 2003 x64 Vous pouvez imprimer avec LPD/LPR. Windows 98SE et Windows Me ne sont pas compatibles. – LPR (Line Printer Request) : ce système de requête d'impression peut être utilisé sous Windows NT 4.0/2000/XP/Server 2003/XP x64/ Server 2003 x64. - Supporte Novell NetWare ServeurP et RImprimante (NImprimante) - Supporte les fonctions de serveur d'impression Novell NetWare et supporte le mode Bindery et le mode Novell Directory Service (NDS) - Acquisition automatique de l'adresse IP via DHCP Avec NetWare Les fonctions de serveur d'impression Novell NetWare 4.x-6 sont supportées. Vous pouvez connecter ce système d'impression à un réseau via Novell NetWare 4.x-6 comme système d'exploitation du serveur et envoyer les travaux d'impression du client au serveur d'impression (contrôleur réseau). Les trois modes sont supportés comme suit : - NImprimante - ServeurP - NDPS 2 Remarque Pour plus de détails sur les fonctions NetWare, voir le manuel d'exploitation NetWare. Avec Macintosh Vous pouvez imprimer à partir de votre ordinateur Macintosh en utilisant AppleTalk ou Bonjour/Rendez-vous. Vous pouvez connecter ce système d'impression au serveur d'impression dans un environnement AppleTalk, Bonjour/Rendez-vous et envoyer des tâches d'impression de l'ordinateur Macintosh vers cette machine. Réglage de l'impression réseau 4 IC-202 (Phase 2) 4-5 Méthodes de connexion réseau que l'on peut sélectionner dans chaque système d'exploitation Windows Ce chapitre décrit les paramètres à spécifier pour l'impression en réseau. Les procédures de configuration varient selon la méthode d'impression réseau utilisée (impression SMB, Raw, LPR ou IPP). Sélectionnez la meilleure méthode d'impression réseau pour votre environnement Windows. Impression réseau à partir d'un système d'exploitation Windows *1 Pour exécuter l'impression Raw sous Windows 98SE/Me, l'application désignée sous le terme "Peer to Peer Tool" peut s'avérer nécessaire. Pour plus de détails, contactez le SAV. 2 Rappel Avant de configurer l'impression réseau, installez le pilote d'imprimante. Pour des détails sur l'installation du pilote d'imprimante, voir "Installation du pilote d'imprimante" à la page 3-3. Pour imprimer en réseau, changer de port d'imprimante du pilote d'imprimante installé et optez pour une connexion réseau, puis modifiez les paramètres sur cet appareil selon nécessité. Pour une connexion IPP, il faut d'abord installer le pilote d'imprimante. Impression réseau dans un environnement NetWare Protocole utilisé 98SE Me NT 4.0 2000 XP Serveur 2003 XP x64 Server 2003 x64 Impression SMB TCP/IP, NetBEUI o o o o o o o o Impression Raw TCP/IP *1 *1 o o o o o Impression LPR TCP/IP o o o o o o Impression IPP TCP/IP o o o o o Version NetWare Protocole utilisé Emulation Mode Service NetWare 4.x IPX NDS/Bindery ServeurP/Imprimante NetWare 5.x/6 IPX NDS ServeurP TCP/IP NDPS(lpr) 4 Réglage de l'impression réseau 4-6 IC-202 (Phase 2) 4.2 Réglage de l'adresse IP pour cet appareil Servez-vous du panneau de contrôle de cet appareil pour assigner une adresse IP à cet appareil. 2 Rappel Quand vous spécifiez les paramètres réseau, suivez les instructions de l'administrateur réseau. Spécification de l'Adresse IP 1 Appuyez sur la touche [Utilities/Compteur] sur le panneau de contrôle de cet appareil, appuyez sur [Réglage administrateur] et tapez le mot de passe de l'administrateur. – Le mot de passe administrateur est obligatoire pour accéder au mode Administrateur. Demandez le mot de passe administrateur à l'administrateur de cet appareil. 2 Appuyez sur [Paramètres Réseau] puis sur [Paramètre TCP/IP]. 3 Spécifiez les paramètres des éléments suivants : Adresse IP : Définissez l'adresse IP de cet appareil. Masque : Définissez le masque de sous-réseau pour le réseau auquel vous vous connectez. Passerelle par défaut : Définissez l'adresse de la passerelle par défaut pour le réseau auquel vous vous connectez. Réglage de l'impression réseau 4 IC-202 (Phase 2) 4-7 4 Pour appliquer les paramètres, redémarrez cet appareil (éteignez-le puis rallumez-le). Après avoir éteint la machine, attendez au moins de 10 secondes avant de la remettre en marche. La configuration de l'adresse IP devient effective. ! Détails Bien que l'adresse IP soit saisie sans utiliser le serveur DHCP dans la procédure décrite ici, il est également possible d'affecter automatiquement l'adresse IP du serveur DHCP. Quand "Paramètre DHCP" est réglé sur "ON", les paramètres d'adresse IP, de masque de sous-réseau et d'adresse de passerelle sont automatiquement attribués par le serveur DHCP sur le réseau, il n'est donc pas nécessaire de les attribuer manuellement. Cependant, veuillez vous assurer des points suivants si vous réglez "Paramètre DHCP" sur "ON". Consultez l'administrateur réseau pour savoir si le serveur DHCP existe. Si le serveur DHCP n'existe pas, assurez-vous de spécifier les paramètres pour "Adresse IP", "Masque" et "Passerelle par défaut". Si les paramètres de l'adresse IP et d'autres éléments ont été assignés via le serveur DHCP, il se peut qu'ils aient été automatiquement modifiés. Si les paramètres de l'adresse IP et d'autres éléments ont été modifiés, si l'adresse IP a été utilisée pour définir une imprimante sur le réseau pour impression, il se peut que l'impression ne puisse pas se faire parce que cet appareil ne peut pas communiquer avec le réseau. Si "Paramètre DHCP" est réglé sur "ON", il est recommandé de définir l'adresse IP attribuée à cet appareil dans les paramètres de serveur DHCP. 4 Réglage de l'impression réseau 4-8 IC-202 (Phase 2) 4.3 Accéder à Web Connection La définition de l'adresse IP pour cet appareil vous permet d'accéder à Web Connection. Servez-vous de votre navigateur Internet pour accéder directement à Web Connection. Pour accéder à Web Connection 1 Lancez le navigateur Internet. 2 Dans la barre "Adresse", tapez l'adresse IP de cet appareil comme illustré ci-dessous et appuyez sur la touche [Entrée]. – http:/// Exemple : si l'adresse IP de cet appareil est 192.168.1.20 http://192.168.1.20/ L'écran d'accueil de Web Connection apparaît. Pour de plus amples détails sur Web Connection, voir "Utiliser Web Connection" à la page 11-39. Réglage de l'impression réseau 4 IC-202 (Phase 2) 4-9 4.4 Impression SMB Vous pouvez utiliser l'impression SMB (impression Windows) pour imprimer directement sur le réseau Microsoft. Opérations sur cet appareil Définissez l'adresse IP pour cet appareil. Pour la procédure de configuration, voir "Réglage de l'adresse IP pour cet appareil" à la page 4-6. Spécifiez aussi les paramètres d'impression SMB dans Web Connection. 0 Vous pouvez également configurer l'impression SMB sur le panneau de contrôle. Voir le "Guide de l'utilisateur [Scanner réseau]" pour plus de détails. 1 Lancez Web Connection. – Pour terminer une session lorsque la page de connexion n'apparaît pas, cliquez sur [Déconnexion]. 2 Dans la page de connexion, sélectionnez "Administrateur" et cliquez sur [Connexion]. 3 Tapez le mot de passe administrateur et connectez-vous en mode Administrateur. 4 Réglage de l'impression réseau 4-10 IC-202 (Phase 2) 4 Sous l'onglet Réseau, cliquez sur [Paramètre SMB] et ensuite sur [Réglage Impression] dans le sous-menu qui s'affiche. 5 Spécifiez les paramètres des éléments suivants : Impression SMB : Définissez si vous voulez utiliser le service d'impression SMB. Sélectionnez [Oui]. Nom NetBIOS spécifiez le nom NetBIOS (jusqu'à 15 caractères alphanumériques). Nom service d'impression : Spécifiez le nom du service d'impression (jusqu'à 31 caractères alphanumériques). Groupe de travail : Spécifiez le nom du groupe de travail (jusqu'à 15 caractères alphanumériques). 6 Pour appliquer les paramètres, redémarrez cet appareil (éteignez-le puis rallumez-le). Après avoir éteint la machine, attendez au moins 10 secondes avant de la remettre en marche pour que le paramètre soit modifié. Réglage de l'impression réseau 4 IC-202 (Phase 2) 4-11 Paramètres du serveur d'imprimante Pour Windows 98SE/Me 1 Cliquez sur [Démarrer], pointez sur [Paramètres] et cliquez sur [Imprimantes]. 2 Effectuez un clic droit sur l'icône de l'imprimante installée et cliquez ensuite sur [Propriétés] 3 Sous l'onglet Détails, cliquez sur [Ajouter un port]. 4 Sélectionnez "Réseau" et cliquez ensuite sur [Parcourir]. Dans la fenêtre de configuration réseau qui s'est ouverte, sélectionnez l'icône d'imprimante appropriée. Pour Windows NT 4.0/2000/XP/Server 2003/XP x64/Server 2003 x64 1 Pour Windows NT 4.0/2000, cliquez sur [Démarrer], pointez sur [Paramètres] et cliquez ensuite sur [Imprimantes]. Pour Windows XP/Server 2003/XP x64/Server 2003 x64, cliquez sur [Démarrer] et cliquez ensuite sur [Imprimantes et télécopieurs.]. 2 Effectuez un clic droit sur l'icône de l'imprimante installée et cliquez ensuite sur [Propriétés]. 3 Cliquez sur [Ajouter un port] sous l'onglet Ports, double-cliquez sur [Port local] ou sélectionnez [Port local] et cliquez sur [Nouveau port], puis tapez "\\\". – Tapez le même nom NetBIOS et le même nom de service d'impression que vous aviez saisis dans Web Connection. Pour la procédure de configuration, voir "Opérations sur cet appareil" à la page 4-9. 4 Cliquez sur [Fermer] pour appliquer le réglage. 4 Réglage de l'impression réseau 4-12 IC-202 (Phase 2) 4.5 Impression Raw/LPR Ce modèle supporte les services d'impression Raw et LPR. Le service d'impression Raw est disponible sous Windows 98SE/Me/2000/XP/ Server 2003/XP x64/Server 2003 x64 et le service d'impression LPR sous Windows NT 4.0/2000/XP/Server 2003/XP x64/Server 2003 x64. TCP/IP sert de protocole réseau. 2 Remarque Pour exécuter l'impression Raw sous Windows 98SE/Me, l'application désignée sous le terme "Peer to Peer Tool" peut s'avérer nécessaire. Pour plus de détails, contactez le SAV. Opérations sur cet appareil % Définissez l'adresse IP pour cet appareil. – Pour la procédure de configuration, voir "Réglage de l'adresse IP pour cet appareil" à la page 4-6. Paramètres du serveur d'imprimante Pour Windows 2000/XP/Server 2003/XP x64/Server 2003 x64 1 Pour Windows 2000, cliquez sur [Démarrer], pointez sur [Paramètres] et cliquez ensuite sur [Imprimantes]. Pour Windows XP/Server 2003/XP x64/Server 2003 x64, cliquez sur [Démarrer], puis sur [Imprimantes et télécopieurs]. 2 Effectuez un clic droit sur l'icône de l'imprimante installée et cliquez ensuite sur [Propriétés]. 3 Sous l'onglet Ports, cliquez sur [Ajouter un port]. 4 Dans la liste des "Ports d'imprimantes disponibles", sélectionnez "Port standard TCP/IP" et cliquez sur [Nouveau port]. 5 Quand l'Assistant Ajout de port d'imprimante TCP/IP standard s'ouvre cliquez sur [Suivant]. 6 Dans la zone "Nom de l'imprimante ou adresse IP", tapez l'adresse IP de cet appareil et cliquez ensuite sur [Suivant]. 7 Sélectionnez "Personnalisé" et cliquez ensuite sur [Paramètres]. Réglage de l'impression réseau 4 IC-202 (Phase 2) 4-13 Réglage de l'impression Raw 1 Cochez la case "Raw", entrez le numéro de port défini dans la case "Paramètres Raw" et cliquez sur [OK]. 2 Cochez le paramètre de numéro de port dans "Numéro de port RAW" si nécessaire. Voir le "Guide de l'utilisateur ineo 750/600 [Opérations Scanner réseau]" pour de plus amples informations sur le "numéro de port RAW". 3 Cliquez sur [Suivant] et [Terminer] pour terminer cette étape. Réglage de l'impression LPR 1 Sélectionnez "LPR", tapez "Print" dans la case "Nom de file d'attente" et cliquez ensuite sur [OK]. 2 Cliquez sur [Suivant], puis sur [Terminer] pour appliquer le réglage. Pour Windows NT 4.0 (lors du réglage de l'impression LPR) 1 Cliquez sur [Démarrer], pointez sur [Paramètres] et cliquez sur [Imprimantes]. 2 Effectuez un clic droit sur l'icône de l'imprimante installée et cliquez ensuite sur [Propriétés]. 3 Sous l'onglet Ports, cliquez sur [Ajouter un port]. 4 Dans la liste "Ports d'imprimantes disponibles", sélectionnez "Port LPR" et cliquez ensuite sur [Nouveau port]. – Si "Port LPR" ne figure pas dans la liste, cliquez sur [Démarrer], pointez sur [Panneau de configuration] et cliquez sur [Réseau]. Puis,sous l'onglet Service, cliquez sur [Ajouter] et installez le service d'impression Microsoft TCP/IP. 5 Dans le champ "Nom ou adresse du serveur fournissant le lpd" de la boîte de dialogue Ajouter imprimante compatible LPR, tapez l'adresse IP de cet appareil. 6 Dans le champ "Nom de l'imprimante ou de la file d'attente d'impression sur ce serveur", tapez "Print". 7 Cliquez sur [OK] pour appliquer le réglage. 4 Réglage de l'impression réseau 4-14 IC-202 (Phase 2) 4.6 Impression IPP (Windows 2000/XP/Server 2003/XP x64/Server 2003 x64) Le service d'impression IPP (Internet Printing Protocol) est supporté par défaut dans Windows 2000/XP/Server 2003/XP x64/Server 2003 x64. TCP/IP sert de protocole réseau. Opérations sur cet appareil Définissez l'adresse IP pour cet appareil. Pour la procédure de configuration, voir "Réglage de l'adresse IP pour cet appareil" à la page 4-6. Spécifiez aussi les paramètres d'impression dans Web Connection. (L'impression peut s'effectuer avec les paramètres par défaut.) 0 Vous pouvez également configurer l'impression IPP sur le panneau de contrôle. Voir le "Guide de l'utilisateur [Opérations Scanner réseau]" pour plus de détails. 1 Lancez Web Connection. – Pour terminer une session lorsque la page de connexion n'apparaît pas, cliquez sur [Déconnexion]. 2 Dans la page de connexion, sélectionnez "Administrateur" et cliquez sur [Connexion]. 3 Tapez le mot de passe administrateur et connectez-vous en mode administrateur. Réglage de l'impression réseau 4 IC-202 (Phase 2) 4-15 4 Sous l'onglet Réseau, cliquez sur [Paramètre IPP]. 5 Spécifiez les paramètres des éléments suivants : Paramètre IPP : Définir s'il faut effectuer l'impression IPP. Sélectionnez "Oui" ici. Nom de l'imprimante : Spécifiez le nom de l'imprimante (127 caractères alphanumériques max.). Position imprimante : Spécifiez l'emplacement de l'imprimante (127 caractères alphanumériques max.). Informations sur l'imprimante : Spécifiez les coordonnées du fabricant de l'imprimante (127 caractères alphanumériques max.). URL imprimante : affichage de l'URL de l'imprimante qui peut être utilisée pour l'impression IPP. Opération soutenue : Spécifiez les opérations compatibles IPP. Accepter IPP : Définir s'il faut utiliser la fonction de réception IPP. Système d'Authentification IPP : Spécifiez la méthode d'authentification, le nom de propriétaire, et le mot de passe pour la connexion IPP. 4 Réglage de l'impression réseau 4-16 IC-202 (Phase 2) Installation du pilote d'imprimante Pour l'impression IPP, réinstallez le pilote d'imprimante. 1 Insérez le "CD-ROM du logiciel utilisateur" dans le lecteur de CD-ROM de l'ordinateur. 2 Pour Windows 2000, cliquez sur [Démarrer], pointez sur [Paramètres] et cliquez ensuite sur [Imprimantes]. Pour Windows XP/Server 2003/XP x64/Server 2003 x64, cliquez sur [Démarrer], puis sur [Imprimantes et télécopieurs]. 3 Pour Windows 2000, double-cliquez sur l'icône "Ajouter une imprimante". Pour Windows XP/Server 2003/XP x64/Server 2003 x64, cliquez sur [Ajouter une imprimante] dans le menu [Tâches d'impression]. L' "Assistant Ajout d'imprimante" démarre. 4 Cliquez sur [Suivant]. 5 Dans la boîte de dialogue Imprimante locale ou réseau, sélectionnez "Imprimante réseau" et cliquez ensuite sur [Suivant]. 6 Dans la boîte de dialogue : Rechercher votre imprimante, sélectionnez "Vous connecter à une imprimante sur Internet ou sur votre réseau intranet". 7 Dans le champ "URL", tapez l'URL pour cet appareil au format suivant et cliquez sur [Suivant]. – http:///ipp Exemple : si l'adresse IP de cet appareil est 192.168.1.20 http://192.168.1.20/ipp 8 Quand la boîte de confirmation s'affiche, cliquez sur [OK]. 9 Cliquez sur [Disque fourni]. 10 Cliquez sur [Parcourir], spécifiez le dossier du CD-ROM qui contient le pilote d'imprimante et cliquez ensuite sur [OK]. PCL driver :\User Software CD-ROM "Driver\Drivers" folder PostScript PPD Driver : User Software CD-ROM "Driver\Drivers" folder 11 Vérifiez que le nom de l'imprimante figure dans la liste "Imprimantes" et cliquez ensuite sur [Suivant]. Réglage de l'impression réseau 4 IC-202 (Phase 2) 4-17 12 Sélectionnez s'il faut définir l'imprimante en tant qu'imprimante par défaut et cliquez sur [Suivant]. 13 Cliquez sur [Terminer] pour quitter l'Assistant Ajout d'imprimante. Une fois les paramètres spécifiés pour l'imprimante, vous pouvez utiliser l'imprimante de la même manière qu'une imprimante locale par défaut. De même, si vous partagez l'imprimante dans Windows, elle peut être utilisée comme imprimante réseau par d'autres ordinateurs Windows sur le réseau. 4 Réglage de l'impression réseau 4-18 IC-202 (Phase 2) 4.7 Imprimer avec NetWare Le contrôleur d'impression supporte les environnements suivants. Impression réseau dans un environnement NetWare 2 Remarque Avant d'utiliser l'émulation bindery, vérifiez que l'émulation bindery est compatible avec le serveur NetWare. Pour le mode Imprimante distante avec l'émulation NetWare 4.x Bindery 1 À partir d'un ordinateur client, connectez-vous avec des autorisations de Superviseur pour accéder au serveur NetWare sur lequel ServeurP est installé. 2 Lancez Pconsole. 3 Dans la liste "Available Options", sélectionnez "Quick Setup" et cliquez ensuite sur [Entrée]. 4 Tapez les noms appropriés dans les champs "Print Server Name", "Printer Name", "Print Queue Name" et "Print Queue Volume", sélectionnez "Other/Unknown" à partir du champ "Printer Type" et enregistrez les paramètres spécifiés. 5 Cliquez sur [Esc] pour quitter Pconsole. 6 Utilisez la console de serveur NetWare pour charger PSERVER.NLM. – Pour les privilèges d'utilisation de la file d'attente, l'option de notification d'imprimante, l'affectation de plusieurs files d'attente et les mots de passe, veuillez-vous référer à la documentation NetWare et spécifiez les paramètres selon vos besoins. Version NetWare Protocole utilisé Emulation Mode Service NetWare 4.x IPX NDS/Bindery ServeurP/ NImprimante NetWare 5.x/6 IPX NDS ServeurP TCP/IP NDPS(lpr) Réglage de l'impression réseau 4 IC-202 (Phase 2) 4-19 7 En mode administrateur de Web Connection, sélectionnez "Paramètre NetWare" sous l'onglet Réseau et spécifiez les paramètres suivants. Activation IPX : Sélectionnez "Oui". Type trame Ethernet : Sélectionnez "Détect. auto". (Sélectionne le type de trame en fonction de l'environnement réseau). Mode d'Impression NetWare : Sélectionnez "NImprimante/RImprimante". Nom de serveur d'impression : Spécifiez le nom du serveur d'impression créé à l'étape 4. Numéro d'imprimante : Spécifiez le numéro d'imprimante (0 à 255). Si vous spécifiez 255, le paramètre est "Auto". 8 Redémarrez cet appareil (éteignez-le puis rallumez-le). – Lorsque vous mettez l'appareil hors tension et sous tension à nouveau, assurez-vous de commencer par actionner l'interrupteur auxiliaire puis l'interrupteur général. De plus, attendez au moins 10 s avant de remettre l'appareil sous tension, sinon cette machine risque de ne pas fonctionner correctement. 4 Réglage de l'impression réseau 4-20 IC-202 (Phase 2) 9 Utilisez la console de serveur NetWare pour afficher l'écran du serveur d'impression et vérifie ensuite que l'imprimante créée s'affiche comme étant "En attente de travail" pour l'imprimante connectée (0). Réglage de l'impression réseau 4 IC-202 (Phase 2) 4-21 Pour le mode Serveur d'impression avec émulation NetWare 4.x BIndery Avant d'utiliser l'émulation bindery, vérifiez que l'émulation bindery est compatible avec le serveur NetWare. 1 À partir d'un ordinateur client, connectez-vous avec des autorisations de Superviseur pour accéder au serveur NetWare sur lequel ServeurP est installé. 2 Lancez Pconsole. 3 Dans la liste "Options disponibles", sélectionnez "Quick Setup" et cliquez ensuite sur [Entrée]. 4 Tapez les noms appropriés dans les champs "Print Server Name", "Printer Name", "Print Queue Name" et "Print Queue Volume", sélectionnez "Other/Unknown" à partir du champ "Printer Type" et enregistrez les paramètres spécifiés. 5 Cliquez sur [Esc] pour quitter Pconsole. 4 Réglage de l'impression réseau 4-22 IC-202 (Phase 2) 6 En mode administrateur de Web Connection, sélectionnez "Paramètre NetWare" sous l'onglet Réseau et spécifiez les paramètres suivants. Activation IPX : Sélectionnez "Oui". Type trame Ethernet : Sélectionnez "Détect. auto". (Sélectionnez le type de trame en fonction de l'environnement réseau.) Mode d'impression NetWare : Sélectionnez "ServeurP". Nom de serveur d'impression : Spécifiez le nom du serveur d'impression créé à l'étape 4. Mot de passe serveur d'impression : Uniquement à indiquer si le réglage s'effectue à partir du serveur NetWare. (affiché par "----".) Intervalle appel : Spécifiez "1". (Changer selon nécessité.) Paramètre Bindery/NDS : Sélectionnez "Param. NDS/Bindery". Nom serveur de fichiers : Spécifiez le nom du serveur de fichiers qui se connecte au serveurP. Réglage de l'impression réseau 4 IC-202 (Phase 2) 4-23 7 Redémarrez cet appareil (éteignez-le puis rallumez-le). – Lorsque vous mettez l'appareil hors tension et sous tension à nouveau, assurez-vous de commencer par actionner l'interrupteur auxiliaire puis l'interrupteur général. De plus, attendez au moins 10 s avant de remettre l'appareil sous tension, sinon cette machine risque de ne pas fonctionner correctement. 8 Utilisez la console de serveur NetWare pour charger MONITOR.NLM. 9 Sélectionnez les informations de connexion et vérifiez que le PServer créé figure bien dans la colonne de connexion active. 4 Réglage de l'impression réseau 4-24 IC-202 (Phase 2) Pour le mode imprimante distante NetWare 4.x (NDS) 1 Connectez-vous à NetWare en tant qu'administrateur à partir d'un ordinateur client. 2 Lancez NWAdmin. 3 Sélectionnez l'organisation ou l'unité d'organisation du conteneur qui propose le service d'impression et cliquez sur [Print Services Quick Setup] dans le menu "Tools". 4 Tapez les noms appropriés dans les champs "Print Server Name", "Printer Name", "Print Queue Name" et "Print Queue Volume", sélectionnez "Other/Unknown" à partir du champ "Printer Type" et enregistrez les paramètres spécifiés. – Pour les privilèges d'utilisation de la file d'attente, l'option de notification d'imprimante, l'affectation de plusieurs files d'attente et les mots de passe, veuillez-vous référer à la documentation NetWare et spécifiez les paramètres selon vos besoins. Réglage de l'impression réseau 4 IC-202 (Phase 2) 4-25 5 En mode administrateur de Web Connection, sélectionnez "Paramètre NetWare" sous l'onglet Réseau et spécifiez les paramètres suivants. Activation IPX : Sélectionnez "Oui". Type trame Ethernet : Sélectionnez "Détect. auto". (Sélectionne le type de trame en fonction de l'environnement réseau). Mode d'Impression NetWare : Sélectionnez "NImprimante/RImprimante". Nom de serveur d'impression : Spécifiez le nom du serveur d'impression créé à l'étape 4. Numéro d'imprimante : Spécifiez le numéro d'imprimante (0 à 255). Quand vous spécifiez 255, le réglage est "Détect. auto". 6 Redémarrez cet appareil (éteignez-le puis rallumez-le). – Lorsque vous mettez l'appareil hors tension et sous tension à nouveau, assurez-vous de commencer par actionner l'interrupteur auxiliaire puis l'interrupteur général. De plus, attendez au moins 10 s avant de remettre l'appareil sous tension, sinon cette machine risque de ne pas fonctionner correctement. 7 Utilisez la console de serveur NetWare pour charger PSERVER.NLM. 4 Réglage de l'impression réseau 4-26 IC-202 (Phase 2) 8 Utilisez la console de serveur NetWare pour afficher l'écran du serveur d'impression et vérifiez que "ineo 750/600" (imprimante créée) apparaît comme étant "En attente de travail" pour l'imprimante connectée (0). Réglage de l'impression réseau 4 IC-202 (Phase 2) 4-27 Pour le mode Serveur d'impression NetWare 4.x/5.x/6 (NDS) Pour utiliser le mode serveur d'impression, le protocole IPX doit être chargé sur le serveur NetWare. 1 Connectez-vous à NetWare en tant qu'administrateur à partir d'un ordinateur client. 2 Lancez NWAdmin. 3 Sélectionnez l'organisation ou l'unité d'organisation du conteneur qui propose le service d'impression et cliquez sur [Print Services Quick Setup (non-NDPS)] dans le menu "Tools". 4 Tapez les noms appropriés dans les champs "Print Server Name", "Printer Name", "Print Queue Name" et "Print Queue Volume", sélectionnez "Other/Unknown" à partir du champ "Printer Type" et cliquez ensuite sur [Create]. – Pour les privilèges d'utilisation de la file d'attente, l'option de notification d'imprimante, l'affectation de plusieurs files d'attente et les mots de passe, veuillez-vous référer à la documentation NetWare et spécifiez les paramètres selon vos besoins. 4 Réglage de l'impression réseau 4-28 IC-202 (Phase 2) 5 En mode administrateur de Web Connection, sélectionnez "Paramètre NetWare" sous l'onglet Réseau et spécifiez les paramètres suivants. Activation IPX : Sélectionnez "Oui". Type trame Ethernet : Sélectionnez "Détect. auto". (Sélectionnez le type de trame en fonction de l'environnement réseau.) Mode d'impression NetWare : Sélectionnez "ServeurP". Nom de serveur d'impression : Spécifiez le nom du serveur d'impression créé à l'étape 4. Mot de passe serveur d'impression : Uniquement à indiquer si le réglage s'effectue à partir du serveur NetWare. (affiché par "----".) Intervalle appel : Spécifiez "1". (Changer selon nécessité.) Param Bindery/NDS : Sélectionnez "NDS". Nom du contexte DNS : Spécifiez le nom du contexte se connectant sur ServeurP. Nom arborescence DNS : Spécifiez le nom de l'arborescence à laquelle ServeurP se connecte. Réglage de l'impression réseau 4 IC-202 (Phase 2) 4-29 6 Redémarrez cet appareil (éteignez-le puis rallumez-le). – Lorsque vous mettez l'appareil hors tension et sous tension à nouveau, assurez-vous de commencer par actionner l'interrupteur auxiliaire puis l'interrupteur général. De plus, attendez au moins 10 secondes avant de remettre l'appareil sous tension, sinon cette machine risque de ne pas fonctionner correctement. 7 Utilisez la console de serveur NetWare pour charger MONITOR.NLM. 8 Sélectionnez les informations de connexion et vérifiez que le PServer créé figure bien dans la colonne de connexion active. 4 Réglage de l'impression réseau 4-30 IC-202 (Phase 2) Pour le service distribué d'impression NetWare 5.x/6 Novell (NDPS) Avant de configurer NDPS, vérifiez que le courtier et le gestionnaire NDPS ont bien été créés et chargés. De même, avant de démarrer la procédure suivante, vérifiez que le protocole TCP/IP a bien été défini dans le serveur NetWare, et vérifiez que l'adresse IP a bien été définie pour cet appareil et que ce dernier est allumé. 1 Connectez-vous à NetWare en tant qu'administrateur à partir d'un ordinateur client. 2 Lancez NWAdmin. 3 Effectuez un clic droit sur le conteneur de l'organisation ou de l'unité d'organisation pour laquelle vous allez créer l'agent d'impression et cliquez ensuite sur [Imprimante NDPS] dans le sous-menu "Créer". 4 Dans la case "NDPS Printer Name", tapez le nom de l'imprimante. 5 Dans la colonne "Printer Agent Source" sélectionnez "Create a New Pritner Agent" " et cliquez ensuite sur [Create]. 6 Vérifiez le nom de l'agent d'impression, puis dans la case "NDPS Manager name", parcourez les noms de gestionnaires NDPS et activez-en un. 7 Dans "Gateway Types", choisissez une "passerelle d'imprimante Novell" et activez-la. 8 Dans la fenêtre Configure Novell PDS for Printer Agent, sélectionnez "(None)" pour le type d'imprimante et "Novell Port Handler" pour le type de gestionnaire de port, puis enregistrez les paramètres. 9 Dans "Connection Type", sélectionnez "Remote LPR (on IP)" et activez le type voulu. 10 Entrez l'adresse IP définie pour cet appareil comme l'adresse d'hôte, tapez "Print" comme nom d'imprimante et cliquez ensuite sur [Finish] pour valider les paramètres. 11 L'écran d'enregistrement du pilote d'impression s'affiche. Sélectionnez "None" pour chaque système d'exploitation afin de conclure la procédure d'enregistrement. Réglage de l'impression réseau 4 IC-202 (Phase 2) 4-31 2 Remarque Pour configurer les droits d'utilisateur pour les files d'attente, l'option de notification d'imprimante, l'affectation de plusieurs files d'attente et les mots de passe, veuillez-vous référer à la documentation NetWare, puis définissez les paramètres selon vos besoins. 4 Réglage de l'impression réseau 4-32 IC-202 (Phase 2) Configurer les paramètres d'un client (Windows) avec le serveur NetWare 1 Pour Windows 98SE/Me/2000/NT 4.0, cliquez sur [Démarrer], pointez sur [Paramètres] et cliquez ensuite sur [Imprimantes]. Pour Windows XP/Server 2003, cliquez sur [Démarrer] et cliquez ensuite sur [Imprimantes et télécopieurs]. – Si "Imprimantes et télécopieurs" n'apparaît pas dans le menu Démarrer, ouvrez le Panneau de configuration à partir du menu Démarrer, sélectionnez "Imprimantes et autres périphériques" et sélectionnez ensuite "Imprimantes et Fax". 2 Pour Windows 98SE/Me/2000/NT 4.0, double-cliquez sur l'icône [Ajouter imprimante]. Pour Windows XP/Server 2003, cliquez sur [Ajouter une imprimante] dans le menu "Tâches d'impression". L'"Assistant Ajout d'imprimante" démarre. 3 Au paramètres de port, parcourez le réseau et définissez le nom de la file d'attente créée (ou le nom d'imprimante NDPS). 4 Sur la liste "Modèles d'imprimante", spécifiez le dossier du CD-ROM qui contient le pilote d'imprimante pour le système d'exploitation et le pilote d'imprimante à utiliser. – Pour Windows 98SE/Me Pilote PCL : User Software CD-ROM dossier "Driver\Drivers" Pilote PostScript PPD : CD-ROM logiciel utilisateur dossier "Driver\Drivers" – Pour Windows NT4.0/2000/XP/Server 2003 Pilote PCL : CD-ROM logiciel utilisateur dossier "Driver\Drivers" Pilote PS : CD-ROM logiciel utilisateur dossier "Driver\Drivers" Pilote PostScript PPD : CD-ROM logiciel utilisateur dossier "Driver\Drivers" 5 Suivez les instructions à l'écran pour achever l'installation. Réglage de l'impression réseau 4 IC-202 (Phase 2) 4-33 4.8 Imprimer avec Macintosh Cette section décrit les paramètres de cette machine ainsi que les paramètres réseau pour Macintosh. Spécifiez les paramètres du port réseau d'imprimante après avoir installé le pilote d'imprimante et avoir sélectionné une imprimante. Pour sélectionner une imprimante, voir "Sélectionner une imprimante" à la page 3-17. Opérations sur cet appareil Définissez l'adresse IP pour cet appareil. Pour la procédure de configuration, voir "Réglage de l'adresse IP pour cet appareil" à la page 4-6. Dans Web Connection, spécifiez les paramètres AppleTalk ou Bonjour. Spécifier les paramètres AppleTalk Lors de connexion de cet appareil à un ordinateur Macintosh utilisant AppleTalk, il faut spécifier les paramètres AppleTalk. 1 Lancez Web Connection. – Pour terminer une session lorsque la page de connexion n'apparaît pas, cliquez sur [Déconnexion]. 2 Dans la page de connexion, sélectionnez "Administrateur" et cliquez sur [Connexion]. 3 Tapez le mot de passe administrateur et connectez-vous en mode administrateur. 4 Réglage de l'impression réseau 4-34 IC-202 (Phase 2) 4 Sous l'onglet Réseau, cliquez sur [Paramètre AppleTalk] 5 Spécifiez les paramètres des éléments suivants : AppleTalk : Définir s'il faut utiliser AppleTalk. Sélectionnez "ON" ici. Nom de l'imprimante : indiquez le nom de l'imprimante (31 caractères alphanumériques max.). Nom de zone : Spécifiez la zone connectée (31 caractères alphanumériques). 6 Pour appliquer les paramètres, redémarrez cet appareil (éteignez-le puis rallumez-le). – Lorsque vous mettez l'appareil hors tension et sous tension à nouveau, assurez-vous de commencer par actionner l'interrupteur auxiliaire puis l'interrupteur général. De plus, attendez au moins 10 secondes avant de remettre l'appareil sous tension, sinon cette machine risque de ne pas fonctionner correctement. Réglage de l'impression réseau 4 IC-202 (Phase 2) 4-35 Spécifier les paramètres Bonjour Si vous connectez cette machine à une ordinateur Macintosh par Bonjour/Rendez-vous, il faut spécifier les paramètres Bonjour. 1 Lancez Web Connection. – Pour terminer une session lorsque la page de connexion n'apparaît pas, cliquez sur [Déconnexion]. 2 Dans la page de connexion, sélectionnez "Administrateur" et cliquez sur [Connexion]. 3 Tapez le mot de passe administrateur et connectez-vous en mode Administrateur. 4 Sous l'onglet Réseau, cliquez sur [Paramètre Bonjour]. 5 Spécifiez les paramètres des éléments suivants : – Bonjour : Spécifiez s'il faut utiliser une connexion Bonjour/Rendezvous. Sélectionnez "Oui" ici. – Nom Bonjour : Spécifiez le nom Bonjour censé s'afficher comme nom de périphérique connecté (63 caractères alphanumériques et symboles max.). 4 Réglage de l'impression réseau 4-36 IC-202 (Phase 2) 6 Pour appliquer les paramètres, redémarrez cet appareil (éteignez-le puis rallumez-le). 2 Remarque La connexion Bonjour est une fonction de Mac OS X 10.4, elle est l'équivalent de la connexion Rendez-vous de Mac OS 10.3 ou des versions antérieures. Lorsque vous mettez l'appareil hors tension et sous tension à nouveau, assurez-vous de commencer par actionner l'interrupteur auxiliaire puis l'interrupteur général. De plus, attendez au moins 10 s avant de remettre l'appareil sous tension, sinon cette machine risque de ne pas fonctionner correctement. Réglage de l'impression réseau 4 IC-202 (Phase 2) 4-37 Réglage de l'ordinateur Macintosh Utilisez l'ordinateur Macintosh connecté pour spécifier les paramètres TCP/IP et AppleTalk. 2 Rappel Pour les paramètres réseau, consultez votre administrateur réseau. Pour l'installation du pilote d'imprimante, voir "Installation du pilote d'imprimante" à la page 3-3. Comme Bonjour (une fonction Mac OS X 10.4) est toujours activé, il est inutile de modifier les paramètres. Bonjour/Rendez-vous est une fonction Mac OS X. Pour Mac OS 9.2, connectez-vous avec AppleTalk. Pour Mac OS X 1 Dans le menu Apple, sélectionnez "Préférences système". 2 Cliquez sur l'icône "Réseau". 3 Dans "Afficher", sélectionnez "Ethernet intégré". 4 Cliquez sur l'onglet TCP/IP. 5 Sélectionnez les éléments dans "Configurer" qui correspond aux paramètres réseau pour l'ordinateur Macintosh connecté au réseau et réglez ensuite l'adresse IP et le masque de sous-réseau. 6 Si vous utilisez une connexion AppleTalk, cliquez sur l'onglet AppleTalk et vérifiez ensuite que la case "Make AppleTalk Active" (Activer AppleTalk) est cochée. 7 Cliquez sur la touche Fermer en haut à gauche de la boîte de dialogue. Le message "Appliquer les changements de configuration ?" apparaît. 8 Cliquez sur [Appliquer]. Les paramètres modifiés sont enregistrés. 4 Réglage de l'impression réseau 4-38 IC-202 (Phase 2) Pour Mac OS 9 1 Dans le menu Apple, pointez sur [Panneau de contrôle] et ensuite cliquez sur [AppleTalk]. 2 Dans la liste déroulante "Connect via", sélectionnez "Ethernet". 3 Dans le menu Apple, pointez sur [Panneau de contrôle] et ensuite cliquez sur [TCP/IP]. 4 Dans la liste déroulante "Connect via", sélectionnez "Ethernet". 5 Sélectionnez les éléments dans "Configurer" qui correspond aux paramètres réseau pour l'ordinateur Macintosh connecté au réseau et réglez ensuite l'adresse IP et le masque de sous-réseau. 6 Cliquez sur la touche Fermer en haut à gauche de la boîte de dialogue. Le message "Enregistrer les changements dans la configuration actuelle ?"apparaît. 7 Cliquez sur [Enregistrer]. 5 Diverses méthodes d'impression Diverses méthodes d'impression 5 IC-202 (Phase 2) 5-3 5 Diverses méthodes d'impression 5.1 Opérations d'impression Pour Windows Les données peuvent être imprimées depuis une application. Les travaux d'impression sont spécifiés depuis le logiciel d'application. 1 Ouvrez les données dans l'application, "Fichier" et cliquez ensuite sur "Imprimer". 2 Vérifiez que le nom de l'imprimante est bien sélectionné dans "Nom d'imprimante" ou "Sélection de l'imprimante". – Si l'imprimante n'est pas sélectionnée, cliquez pour sélectionner l'imprimante. 3 Spécifiez les pages à imprimer et le nombre d'exemplaires à imprimer. – La boîte de dialogue Imprimer varie en fonction de l'application. 5 Diverses méthodes d'impression 5-4 IC-202 (Phase 2) 4 Cliquez sur [Préférences] ou sur [Propriétés] pour modifier les paramètres du pilote d'imprimante selon vos besoins. – En cliquant sur [Préférences] ou sur [Propriétés] dans la boîte de dialogue Imprimer, vous pouvez spécifier les paramètres de chaque modèle dans la boîte de dialogue de pilote d'impression qui apparaît. Pour plus de détails, voir "Configuration du pilote PCL" à la page 6-3"Configuration du pilote PS (Windows)" à la page 7-3 ou "Configuration du pilote PPD (Windows)" à la page 8-3. 5 Cliquez sur [Imprimer]. L'indicateur de données de cet appareil se met à clignoter. Diverses méthodes d'impression 5 IC-202 (Phase 2) 5-5 Impression Test L'impression est possible quand le pilote d'imprimante est installé et que les paramètres de réseau on été spécifiés. Pour vérifier si la connexion s'est effectuée correctement, vous pouvez imprimer la page de test standard de Windows. Imprimer une page de test depuis la boîte de dialogue Propriétés du pilote d'imprimante. 1 Pour Windows 98SE/Me/NT 4.0/2000, cliquez sur [Démarrer], pointez sur [Paramètres] et cliquez ensuite sur [Imprimantes]. Pour Windows XP/Server 2003/XP x64/Server 2003 x64, cliquez sur [Démarrer], et cliquez ensuite sur [Imprimantes et télécopieurs]. 2 Effectuez un clic droit sur l'icône de l'imprimante installée et cliquez ensuite sur [Propriétés]. 3 Sous l'onglet Général, cliquez sur [Imprimer une page de test] ou sur la touche [Impression Test]. La page de test est imprimée et la boîte de confirmation apparaît. 4 Vérifiez la sortie imprimée, puis cliquez sur [OK] et sur [Oui]. 2 Remarque Si la page de test ne s'est pas imprimée correctement, vérifiez que le pilote d'imprimante a bien été installé correctement et que les paramètres de réseau sont complétés. 5 Diverses méthodes d'impression 5-6 IC-202 (Phase 2) Pour Macintosh L'impression est possible quand le pilote d'imprimante est installé et que les paramètres de réseau on été spécifiés. Les travaux d'impression sont spécifiés depuis le logiciel d'application. Pour Mac OS X 1 Ouvrez les données dans l'application, "Fichier" et cliquez ensuite sur "Imprimer". 2 Vérifiez la sélection de l'imprimante. 3 Spécifiez les pages à imprimer et le nombre d'exemplaires à imprimer et cliquez sur [Imprimer]. L'indicateur de données de cet appareil se met à clignoter. 2 Remarque Si le nom de l'imprimante ne figure pas sur la liste, sélectionnez l'imprimante dans Centre d'impression ou l'Utilitaire de réglage de l'imprimante. Pour plus de détails, voir "Sélectionner une imprimante" à la page 3-17. La boîte de dialogue Imprimer varie en fonction de l'application. Diverses méthodes d'impression 5 IC-202 (Phase 2) 5-7 Pour Mac OS 9 1 Ouvrez les données dans l'application, "Fichier" et cliquez ensuite sur "Imprimer". 2 Vérifiez la sélection de l'imprimante. 3 Sélectionnez "Généralités". 4 Spécifiez les pages à imprimer et le nombre d'exemplaires à imprimer et cliquez sur [Imprimer]. L'indicateur de données de cet appareil se met à clignoter. 2 Remarque Si le nom de l'imprimante ne figure pas sur la liste, sélectionnez l'imprimante dans la fenêtre de choix. Pour plus de détails, voir "Sélectionner une imprimante" à la page 3-17. La boîte de dialogue Imprimer varie en fonction de l'application. Vous pouvez enregistrer les paramètres en cliquant sur [Enregistrer les réglages]. 5 Diverses méthodes d'impression 5-8 IC-202 (Phase 2) 5.2 Réglage des fonctions d'impression Les fonctions de cet appareil comme le tri et le pliage peuvent être définies lors de l'impression à partir d'un ordinateur. En fonction du système d'exploitation installé sur l'ordinateur connecté, la procédure de réglage des fonctions de cet appareil peuvent varier. Liste des fonctions La liste des fonctions contient un récapitulatif des principaux réglages relatifs à l'impression et à la prise en charge par le pilote d'imprimante. 2 Remarque Les noms de fonction sur cette liste se basent sur ceux affichés par le pilote d'imprimante PCL sous Windows XP. En outre, les éléments et les valeurs de réglage affichés peuvent varier selon que les options sont installées ou que les paramètres sont disponibles. Fonction Présentation Pilote d'imprimante PCL PS PPD Orientation Permet de spécifier l'orientation d'impression. o o o Format original Spécifie le format du document original. o o Format de sortie Spécifie le format de papier de sortie. o o o Agr./Réduction Imprime en format agrandi ou réduit. o o o Source papier Sélectionne la source papier pour impression. o o o Configuration du type de papier Spécifie le type de papier de la source papier. o o o Position de reliure Permet de sélectionner la position de reliure. o o o Type d'impression Sélectionne le type d'impression (recto, recto-verso ou livret). o o o Combinaison Imprime plusieurs pages sur une seule page. o o o Marge de fichier Définit des marges pour les trous de perforation et les agrafes. o Agrafer Agrafe les documents.*1 o o o Perforer Perfore les documents.*1 o o o Pliage Exécute le pliage.*1 o o o Agrafage central et pliage Exécute l'agrafage central et le pliage.*1 o o o Diverses méthodes d'impression 5 IC-202 (Phase 2) 5-9 Type de sortie (Gestion des travaux) Pour l'impression non-conventionnelle, sélectionne le format de sortie spécial pour les documents confidentiels ou les données enregistrées dans une boîte. o o (Mac OS X seulement) Copies Spécifie le nombre de copies à imprimer. o o o Bac de sortie Sélectionne le magasin de sortie des pages imprimées. o o o Tri Spécifie s'il faut imprimer les copies multiples par jeux. o o o Décalé Lors de l'impression de plusieurs copies, décale la position de sortie de chaque jeu. o o o Sauter pages vierges N'imprime pas les pages vierges des données. o Couverture avec bac d'insertion Une page de couverture est jointe au document imprimé. o o o Authentification/ Suivi de Volume (E.K.C.) Effectue les opérations d'authentification utilisateur et de Suivi de Volume (E.K.C.). L'impression s'effectue après la saisie de l'ID utilisateur enregistré et du mot de passe. o o (Mac OS X seulement) Paramétrage par page Vous pouvez insérer des feuilles de papier dans le document imprimé ou changer de magasin d'alimentation papier en cours d'impression. o o Couverture Ajoute une page de couverture. o o o Dos Ajoute une page de dos. o o o Chapitre Spécifie toujours la page que vous voulez utiliser comme page de début de chapitre si vous imprimez recto-verso ou en mode livret. o o Combinaison Imprime un document de 2 pages sur la feuille de papier. o o o Décalage d'image Régler en cas de déplacement de l'image à imprimer. o o Superposition Imprime le document original sur le haut des données de forme créées séparément. o o Filigrane Imprime un filigrane (tampon de texte) sur la page imprimée. o o Estampage numéro de distribution Imprime le numéro de la copie. o o Motif Représente l'image à l'aide de points blancs et noirs de densité différente. o Densité d'impression Règle la densité d'impression. o o o Imprimer avec noir Empêche les traits fins, les caractères en couleur, les images d'être imprimées trop clairs. o Fonction Présentation Pilote d'imprimante PCL PS PPD 5 Diverses méthodes d'impression 5-10 IC-202 (Phase 2) *1 Réglage en option. Lissage Impression lisse des parties curvilignes des caractères et des images. o o o Utiliser les polices de l'imprimante Spécifie le remplacement des polices TrueType par les polices de l'imprimante. o o o Sélection du mode (FAX) À définir pour transmettre un document par fax. *1 o Fonction Présentation Pilote d'imprimante PCL PS PPD Diverses méthodes d'impression 5 IC-202 (Phase 2) 5-11 Présentation des fonctions Ce chapitre présente un récapitulatif de chaque fonction. Orientation Vous pouvez spécifier "Portrait" ou "Paysage" comme orientation de la page à imprimer. Portrait Paysage Système d'exploitation Pilote d'imprimante Voir Windows PCL "Spécifier les paramètres de l'onglet Configuration" à la page 6-7 PS "Spécifier les paramètres de l'onglet Configuration" à la page 7-9 PostScript PPD "Spécifier les paramètres de l'onglet Disposition" à la page 8-6 Mac OS X PostScript PPD "Attributs de page (Paramètres de base)" à la page 10-8 Mac OS 9 "Attributs de page (Paramètres de base)" à la page 9-8 5 Diverses méthodes d'impression 5-12 IC-202 (Phase 2) Format des originaux et format de sortie Vous pouvez spécifier la format d'un document original et le format du papier de sortie. En spécifiant chaque format, vous pouvez spécifier le taux d'agrandissement et de réduction. 2 Remarque Le pilote PPD PostScript pour Windows ne permet de spécifier que les formats de papier imprimé. Format original Format de sortie Système d'exploitation Pilote d'imprimante Voir Windows PCL "Spécifier les paramètres de l'onglet Configuration" à la page 6-7 PS "Spécifier les paramètres de l'onglet Configuration" à la page 7-9 PostScript PPD "Avancé..." à la page 8-8 Mac OS X PostScript PPD "Attributs de page (Paramètres de base)" à la page 10-8 Mac OS 9 "Attributs de page (Paramètres de base)" à la page 9-8 Diverses méthodes d'impression 5 IC-202 (Phase 2) 5-13 Zoom (agrandissement et réduction) Vous pouvez spécifier le taux d'agrandissement et de réduction à l'aide de valeurs numériques. Original Réduction Agrandissement Système d'exploitation Pilote d'imprimante Voir Windows PCL "Spécifier les paramètres de l'onglet Configuration" à la page 6-7 PS "Spécifier les paramètres de l'onglet Configuration" à la page 7-9 PostScript PPD "Avancé..." à la page 8-8 Mac OS X PostScript PPD "Attributs de page (Paramètres de base)" à la page 10-8 Mac OS 9 "Attributs de page (Paramètres de base)" à la page 9-8 5 Diverses méthodes d'impression 5-14 IC-202 (Phase 2) Magasin papier (Source papier) Vous pouvez sélectionner le magasin papier comme source papier pour l'impression. Quand vous changez de type de papier, vous pouvez sélectionner un magasin papier en fonction du type de papier. Magasin Système d'exploitation Pilote d'imprimante Voir Windows PCL "Spécifier les paramètres de l'onglet Configuration" à la page 6-7 PS "Spécifier les paramètres de l'onglet Configuration" à la page 7-9 PostScript PPD "Spécifier les paramètres de l'onglet Papier/ qualité" à la page 8-7 Mac OS X PostScript PPD "Alimentation papier" à la page 10-14 Mac OS 9 "Généralités (Paramètres de base)" à la page 9-11 Diverses méthodes d'impression 5 IC-202 (Phase 2) 5-15 Type de papier (Support) Vous pouvez spécifier le type de papier pour l'impression. 2 Remarque Avec le pilote PCL pour Windows, vous pouvez prédéfinir les paramètres de type de papier en spécifiant le type de papier du bac d'alimentation papier. Système d'exploitation Pilote d'imprimante Voir Windows PCL "Spécifier les paramètres de l'onglet Configuration" à la page 6-7 PS "Spécifier les paramètres de l'onglet Configuration" à la page 7-9 PostScript PPD "Spécifier les paramètres de l'onglet Papier/ qualité" à la page 8-7 5 Diverses méthodes d'impression 5-16 IC-202 (Phase 2) Type d'impression (Impression recto-verso/Impression Livret) Vous pouvez imprimer sur les deux côtés d'une page ou au format livret (deux pages en vis-à-vis ou reliées au centre). Cela s'avère pratique quand vous voulez relier des documents de plusieurs pages. La zone de reliure peut être spécifiée en indiquant la position de reliure. Impression recto verso Impression de livret Données Sortie sur Données Reliure à gauche/Reliure à droite Reliure en haut Sortie sur d'impression imprimante d'impression imprimante Données d'impression Sortie sur imprimante Système d'exploitation Pilote d'imprimante Voir Windows PCL "Spécifier les paramètres de l'onglet Configuration" à la page 6-7 PS "Spécifier les paramètres de l'onglet Configuration" à la page 7-9 PostScript PPD "Avancé..." à la page 8-8 Mac OS X PostScript PPD "Finition" à la page 10-17 Mac OS 9 "Options de finition" à la page 9-13 Diverses méthodes d'impression 5 IC-202 (Phase 2) 5-17 2 Remarque "Agrafage central et pliage" accessible en mode Livret peut uniquement être utilisé si le module de finition FS-602 est installé. 5 Diverses méthodes d'impression 5-18 IC-202 (Phase 2) Imprimer plusieurs pages sur une seule page Vous pouvez imprimer plusieurs pages de document sur une seule page. Fonction bien pratique quand vous voulez réduire le nombre de pages imprimées. 2en1 4en1 6en1 9en1 16en1 Système d'exploitation Pilote d'imprimante Voir Windows PCL "Spécifier les paramètres de l'onglet Configuration" à la page 6-7 PS "Spécifier les paramètres de l'onglet Configuration" à la page 7-9 PostScript PPD "Spécifier les paramètres de l'onglet Disposition" à la page 8-6 Mac OS X PostScript PPD "Disposition (Imprimer plusieurs pages sur une seule page)" à la page 10-13 Mac OS 9 "Disposition (Imprimer plusieurs pages sur une seule page)" à la page 9-12 Diverses méthodes d'impression 5 IC-202 (Phase 2) 5-19 Marge Décale la position d'impression à l'écran pour laisser un espace. Portrait Paysage à gauche (Marge) à droite (Marge) en haut (Marge) Système d'exploitation Pilote d'imprimante Voir Windows PCL "Spécifier les paramètres de l'onglet Configuration" à la page 6-7 5 Diverses méthodes d'impression 5-20 IC-202 (Phase 2) Agrafage et perforation Les documents peuvent être agrafés ensemble ou des trous peuvent être perforés dans le document. En spécifiant la marge, vous pouvez spécifier la marge d'agrafage ou de perforation. 2 Remarque La fonction d'agrafage est uniquement disponible quand le module de finition en option (à l'exception du SF-601) est installé. La fonction de perforation est uniquement disponible quand le module de finition en option (à l'exception du SF-601) est installé. En outre, le kit de perforation ou le module de perforation et de pliage en Z doit être installé. Agrafage Perforation Système d'exploitation Pilote d'imprimante Voir Windows PCL "Spécifier les paramètres de l'onglet Configuration" à la page 6-7 PS "Spécifier les paramètres de l'onglet Configuration" à la page 7-9 PostScript PPD "Avancé..." à la page 8-8 Mac OS X PostScript PPD "Finition" à la page 10-17 Mac OS 9 "Options de finition" à la page 9-13 Diverses méthodes d'impression 5 IC-202 (Phase 2) 5-21 Type de sortie (gestion des travaux) Vous pouvez sélectionner "Impression sécurisée", qui exige un mot de passe pour l'impression, ou "Enreg. dans boîte utilisateur", qui enregistre les documents dans un dossier. Système d'exploitation Pilote d'imprimante Voir Windows PCL "Spécifier les paramètres de l'onglet Configuration" à la page 6-7 PS "Spécifier les paramètres de l'onglet Configuration" à la page 7-9 PostScript PPD "Avancé..." à la page 8-8 Mac OS X "Sécurité" à la page 10-15 5 Diverses méthodes d'impression 5-22 IC-202 (Phase 2) Tri (assemblage) et classement (décalage) Vous pouvez imprimer l'ensemble des jeux du document le nombre de fois spécifié ou chaque page le nombre de fois spécifié. En spécifiant décalage, la position de sortie peut être décalée et sortie vers l'avant et vers l'arrière pour chaque copie. (Plusieurs sources de papier sont utilisées quand un module de finition de décalage est installé et quand aucun module de finition n'est installé.) Tri Décalé Système d'exploitation Pilote d'imprimante Voir Windows PCL "Spécifier les paramètres de l'onglet Configuration" à la page 6-7 PS "Spécifier les paramètres de l'onglet Configuration" à la page 7-9 PostScript PPD "Avancé..." à la page 8-8 Mac OS X PostScript PPD "Copies et pages (Paramètres de base)" à la page 10-12 et "Finition" à la page 10-17 Mac OS 9 "Options de finition" à la page 9-13 Diverses méthodes d'impression 5 IC-202 (Phase 2) 5-23 Sauter pages vierges (Économiser papier) N'imprime pas les pages vierges des données. Système d'exploitation Pilote d'imprimante Voir Windows PCL "Spécifier les paramètres de l'onglet Configuration" à la page 6-7 5 Diverses méthodes d'impression 5-24 IC-202 (Phase 2) Paramètres de page de couverture, de page de dos et d'intercalaire Une page de couverture et une page de dos peuvent être ajoutées ainsi que des intercalaires entre les pages. (Le paramètre d'intercalaire est uniquement disponible avec le pilote d'imprimante PCL et PS.) Couverture Dos Système d'exploitation Pilote d'imprimante Voir Windows PCL "Spécifier les paramètres de l'onglet Paramétrage par page" à la page 6-23 PS "Spécifier les paramètres de l'onglet Paramétrage par page" à la page 7-32 PostScript PPD "Avancé..." à la page 8-8 Mac OS X PostScript PPD "Configuration" à la page 10-19 Mac OS 9 "Options de finition" à la page 9-13 Diverses méthodes d'impression 5 IC-202 (Phase 2) 5-25 Couverture avec bac d'insertion Une page de couverture est jointe au document imprimé. Vous pouvez joindre du papier épais ou tout autre papier approprié à un document imprimé en guise de page de couverture. 2 Remarque Cette fonction en peut être utilisée que si le bac d'insertion en option (PI-501) est installé. Système d'exploitation Pilote d'imprimante Voir Windows PCL "Spécifier les paramètres de l'onglet Paramétrage par page" à la page 6-23 PS "Spécifier les paramètres de l'onglet Paramétrage par page" à la page 7-32 PostScript PPD "Avancé..." à la page 8-8 Mac OS X PostScript PPD "Configuration" à la page 10-19 Mac OS 9 "Options de finition" à la page 9-13 5 Diverses méthodes d'impression 5-26 IC-202 (Phase 2) Chapitre En impression Recto-Verso/Livret, certaines pages peuvent toujours être sorties face imprimée vers le haut. Impression Recto-verso normale Impression Recto-verso avec fonction Chapitre. Si une page spécifiée comme page d'ouverture d'un chapitre sort comme page de dos, insérez une page vierge pour décaler l'emplacement de la page spécifiée vers le recto de la feuille de papier suivante. Une page précise L'exemple est plié en long mais l'impression recto-verso peut aussi s'appliquer aux documents pliés côté court. Système d'exploitation Pilote d'imprimante Voir Windows PCL "Spécifier les paramètres de l'onglet Paramétrage par page" à la page 6-23 PS "Spécifier les paramètres de l'onglet Paramétrage par page" à la page 7-32 Diverses méthodes d'impression 5 IC-202 (Phase 2) 5-27 Combinaison Deux pages d'un document peuvent être imprimées sur une feuille de papier (2 en 1) ou 1 page de document et sa copie peuvent être imprimées sur la même page (Répétition 2 en 1). Exemple : 2 pages A4 sont agglomérées sur un papier de format A3. 2 en 1 Répétition 2 en 1 Système d'exploitation Pilote d'imprimante Voir Windows PCL "Spécifier les paramètres de l'onglet Fonctions spéciales" à la page 6-32 PS "Spécifier les paramètres de l'onglet Fonctions spéciales" à la page 7-42 PostScript PPD "Avancé..." à la page 8-8 Mac OS X PostScript PPD "Configuration" à la page 10-19 Mac OS 9 "Options de finition" à la page 9-13 5 Diverses méthodes d'impression 5-28 IC-202 (Phase 2) Pliage Le papier est plié est sorti sous cette forme. 2 Remarque Cette fonction peut uniquement être utilisée si le module de finition FS-602 (Pliage en trois, pliage en deux) en option ou le module de perforation et de pliage en Z (pliage en Z) est installé. Pliage en trois Original Pliage en Z Pliage central Système d'exploitation Pilote d'imprimante Voir Windows PCL "Spécifier les paramètres de l'onglet Fonctions spéciales" à la page 6-32 PS "Spécifier les paramètres de l'onglet Fonctions spéciales" à la page 7-42 PostScript PPD "Avancé..." à la page 8-8 Mac OS X PostScript PPD "Configuration" à la page 10-19 Mac OS 9 "Options de finition" à la page 9-13 Diverses méthodes d'impression 5 IC-202 (Phase 2) 5-29 Décalage d'image La position d'impression est réglée. Exemple : quand les paramètres sont décalés de 100 vers la droite et de 300 vers le bas. (unité : 0,1 mm) Décalage vers la droite de 10 mm Décalage vers le bas de 30 mm Système d'exploitation Pilote d'imprimante Voir Windows PCL "Spécifier les paramètres de l'onglet Fonctions spéciales" à la page 6-32 PS "Spécifier les paramètres de l'onglet Fonctions spéciales" à la page 7-42 5 Diverses méthodes d'impression 5-30 IC-202 (Phase 2) Superposition Imprime le document original sur le haut des données de forme créées séparément. Données de forme Données créées Système d'exploitation Pilote d'imprimante Voir Windows PCL "Spécifier les paramètres de l'onglet Superposition" à la page 6-36 PS "Spécifier les paramètres de l'onglet Superposition" à la page 7-51 Diverses méthodes d'impression 5 IC-202 (Phase 2) 5-31 Filigrane Imprime un filigrane (tampon de texte) sur la page imprimée. Système d'exploitation Pilote d'imprimante Voir Windows PCL "Spécifier les paramètres de l'onglet Filigrane" à la page 6-40 PS "Spécifier les paramètres de l'onglet Filigrane" à la page 7-61 5 Diverses méthodes d'impression 5-32 IC-202 (Phase 2) Réglage qualité Ajuste la qualité de l'image. Système d'exploitation Pilote d'imprimante Voir Windows PCL "Spécifier les paramètres de l'onglet Qualité" à la page 6-43 PS "Spécifier les paramètres de l'onglet Qualité" à la page 7-55 PostScript PPD "Avancé..." à la page 8-8 Mac OS X PostScript PPD "Image/Disposition" à la page 10-18 Mac OS 9 "Options de finition" à la page 9-13 Diverses méthodes d'impression 5 IC-202 (Phase 2) 5-33 Utiliser polices d'imprimante (Remplacer polices) Spécifie le remplacement des polices TrueType par les polices de l'imprimante. Système d'exploitation Pilote d'imprimante Voir Windows PCL "Spécifier les paramètres de l'onglet Police" à la page 6-46 PS "Spécifier les paramètres de l'onglet Police" à la page 7-64 PostScript PPD "Avancé..." à la page 8-8 Mac OS 9 PostScript PPD "Options PostScript" à la page 9-10 5 Diverses méthodes d'impression 5-34 IC-202 (Phase 2) Authentification/Suivi de Volume (E.K.C.) Spécifie quand cette machine fonctionne en mode Authentification/Suivi de volume. Système d'exploitation Pilote d'imprimante Voir Windows PCL "Spécifier les paramètres de l'onglet Configuration" à la page 6-7 PS "Spécifier les paramètres de l'onglet Configuration" à la page 7-9 Mac OS X PostScript PPD "Sécurité" à la page 10-15 Diverses méthodes d'impression 5 IC-202 (Phase 2) 5-35 Envoyer téléfax À définir pour transmettre un document par fax. Système d'exploitation Pilote d'imprimante Voir Windows PCL "Spécifier les paramètres de l'onglet Fax" à la page 6-47 5 Diverses méthodes d'impression 5-36 IC-202 (Phase 2) Pour Windows Les fonctions de cet appareil pouvant être utilisées lors de l'impression peuvent être spécifiées dans la boîte de dialogue du pilote d'imprimante que vous pouvez afficher depuis la fenêtre Imprimantes (pour Windows XP/ Server 2003/XP x64/Server 2003 x64, fenêtre Imprimantes et télécopieurs). Les paramètres spécifiés dans la boîte de dialogue de paramétrage du pilote d'imprimante affichés selon la procédure décrite ci-dessous s'appliqueront lors de l'impression à partir de n'importe quelle application. 1 Pour Windows 98SE/Me/NT 4.0/2000, cliquez sur [Démarrer], pointez sur [Paramètres] et cliquez ensuite sur [Imprimantes]. Pour Windows XP/Server 2003/XP x64/Server 2003 x64, cliquez sur [Démarrer], et cliquez ensuite sur [Imprimantes et télécopieurs]. 2 Pour Windows 98SE/Me, faites un clic droit sur l'icône de l'imprimante installée, puis cliquez sur [Propriétés]. Pour Windows 2000/XP/Server 2003/XP x64/Server 2003 x64, faites un clic droit sur l'icône de l'imprimante installée, puis cliquez sur [Options d'impression]. Pour Windows NT4.0, faites un clic droit sur l'icône de l'imprimante installée, puis cliquez sur [Document par défaut]. La boîte de dialogue de pilote d'imprimante apparaît. Diverses méthodes d'impression 5 IC-202 (Phase 2) 5-37 Pour les paramètres pouvant être spécifiés avec chaque pilote d'imprimante, voir les éléments suivants : - Pilote PCL : "Configuration du pilote PCL" à la page 6-3 - Pilote PS : "Configuration du pilote PS (Windows)" à la page 7-3 - Pilote PPD PostScript PPD : "Configuration du pilote PPD (Windows)" à la page 8-3 Pilote PCL Pilote PS Pilote PPD PostScript 5 Diverses méthodes d'impression 5-38 IC-202 (Phase 2) 2 Remarque Utilisez chaque onglet de la boîte de dialogue pour régler le pilote d'imprimante. Pour spécifier les paramètres personnalisés, cliquez Imprimer dans l'application et cliquez ensuite sur [Préférences] de la boîte de dialogue d'impression. Les paramètres spécifiés dans la boîte de dialogue d'impression ne s'appliquent qu'au fichier actuel. Lors du paramétrage des options installées dans Windows NT 4.0/ 2000/XP/Server 2003/XP x64/Server 2003 x64, faites un clic droit sur l'icône de l'imprimante installée, puis cliquez sur [Propriétés]. Diverses méthodes d'impression 5 IC-202 (Phase 2) 5-39 Pour Macintosh Les fonctions de cet appareil pouvant être utilisées pendant l'impression peuvent être spécifiées dans la boîte de dialogue Imprimer ou dans la boîte de dialogue Format d'impression. Les paramètres ne peuvent s'appliquer que pendant l'utilisation de l'application. Quand vous quittez l'application, les paramètres par défaut sont réactivés. Pour afficher la boîte de dialogue d'impression % Ouvrez les données dans l'application "Fichier" et cliquez ensuite sur [Imprimer]. Pour afficher la boîte de dialogue Format d'impression % Ouvrez les données dans l'application "Fichier" et cliquez ensuite sur [Format d'impression] ou sur [Réglage papier]. 5 Diverses méthodes d'impression 5-40 IC-202 (Phase 2) Pour les paramètres pouvant être spécifiés avec chaque pilote d'imprimante, voir les éléments suivants : - OS X : "Configurer le pilote PPD (Mac OS X)" à la page 10-3 - OS 9 : "Configurer le pilote PPD (Mac OS 9)" à la page 9-3 2 Remarque Le contenu de la boîte de dialogue Imprimer et de la boîte Format d'impression peut varier. Selon l'application, la boîte de dialogue Format d'impression peut être affichée en sélectionnant "Réglage papier" – "Options" du menu "Fichier". Diverses méthodes d'impression 5 IC-202 (Phase 2) 5-41 Vérifiez le travail Vous pouvez vérifier la liste, l'historique ou d'autres conditions d'impression. Affichage de la liste d'impression 1 Appuyez sur [Liste Tâches] sur le panneau de contrôle. L'écran Liste Tâches apparaît et affiche la liste des tâches d'impression en cours. 2 Appuyez sur [Historique tâches]. La liste de l'historique d'impression est affichée en mode "Tous travaux". ! Détails Lorsque vous appuyez sur [Historique tâches], l'écran "Tous travaux" s'affiche en premier. 5 Diverses méthodes d'impression 5-42 IC-202 (Phase 2) Vérifier Réception/Boîte utilisateur L'historique est affiché si la BOÎTE est enregistrée depuis le pilote d'imprimante. 1 Appuyez sur [Liste Tâches] du panneau de contrôle et sur [RX/Boîte utilisat.]. La liste de tous les travaux s'affiche. 2 La touche [Historique tâches] affiche la liste des boîtes enregistrées et des réceptions fax réalisées. 6 Configuration du pilote PCL Configuration du pilote PCL 6 IC-202 (Phase 2) 6-3 6 Configuration du pilote PCL 6.1 Paramètres Paramètres communs Ce chapitre décrit les paramètres communs et les boutons qui figurent sur tous les onglets. Bouton Fonction OK Cliquez sur cette touche pour fermer la boîte de dialogue et appliquer les paramètres modifiés. Annuler Cliquez sur ce bouton pour annuler les paramètres modifiés et fermer la boîte de dialogue. Appliquer Cliquez sur cette touche pour appliquer les paramètres modifiés sans fermer la boîte de dialogue. Aide Cliquez sur ce bouton pour afficher l'aide relative à chaque élément de la boîte de dialogue actuellement affichée. Enregistrer/ Rétablir réglage Cliquez sur ce bouton pour enregistrer les paramètres actuels et les consulter ultérieurement. Rétbl. par. déft. Cliquez sur cette touche pour restaurer les valeurs par défaut des paramètres qui avaient été sélectionnés lors de l'installation du pilote. 6 Configuration du pilote PCL 6-4 IC-202 (Phase 2) 2 Remarque Pour activer des options installées, vous devez spécifier les paramètres Options. Pour plus de détails, voir "Spécifier les paramètres de l'onglet Option" à la page 6-61. Onglet Configuration Afficher Quand "Papier" est sélectionné, un aperçu de la mise en page tel que spécifié dans le réglage actuel est affiché et vous pouvez consulter un aperçu de la tâche d'impression. Quand "Imprimante" est sélectionné, une figure de l'imprimante s'affiche avec toutes les options, comme les bacs d'alimentation papier installés sur cet appareil. Bouton Fonction Papier Imprimante Sous-menu Fonction Papier Spécifie l'orientation, le format papier, la source papier et le type de papier. Reliure Spécifie le format de pliage comme la position de reliure, l'impression recto-verso, l'impression livret, l'agrafage central et pliage, l'impression de plusieurs pages sur une seule page, la marge, l'agrafage ou la perforation. Sortie Spécifie le format de sortie comme la méthode de sortie, le nombre de copies, le plateau de sortie, le mode Tri ou décalage. Configuration du pilote PCL 6 IC-202 (Phase 2) 6-5 Onglet Paramétrage par page Onglet Fonctions spéciales Onglet Superposition Onglet Filigrane Sous-menu Fonction Couverture Ajoute une page de couverture. Dos Ajoute une page de dos. Couverture avec bac d'insertion Régler si vous utilisez une couverture en papier épais. Chapitre Régler pour l'impression Recto-verso/Livret pour que certaines pages soient toujours sorties face imprimée vers le haut. Paramétrage par page Du papier vierge peut être inséré ou la source du papier peut être configurée pour chaque page en plus de l'insertion de feuilles de papier dans un document. Sous-menu Fonction Combinaison Vous pouvez imprimer plusieurs pages de document sur une seule page. Vous pouvez spécifier les détails dans Détails de combinaison. Pliage Plie les copies. Décalage d'image Régler en cas de déplacement de l'image à imprimer. Sous-menu Fonction Superposition Spécifie l'impression superposée. Sous-menu Fonction Filigrane Imprime un filigrane (tampon de texte) sur le document en cours d'impression. Estampage numéro de distribution Imprime le numéro de la copie. 6 Configuration du pilote PCL 6-6 IC-202 (Phase 2) Onglet Qualité Onglet Police Onglet Fax Onglet Version Onglet Option Sous-menu Fonction Motif Représente l'image à l'aide de points blancs et noirs de densité différente. Densité d'impression Règle la densité d'impression. Imprimer avec noir Empêche les traits fins en couleur, les caractères en couleur, les images d'être imprimées trop clairs. Lissage Impression lisse des parties curvilignes des caractères et des images. Sous-menu Fonction Utiliser les polices de l'imprimante Sélectionne l'utilisation des polices TrueType ou des polices de l'imprimante pour imprimer. Format de police à télécharger Sélectionne si les polices sont téléchargées sur l'imprimante en mode point ou vectoriel. Sous-menu Fonction Sélection du mode Choisissez l'impression ou l'envoi de fax. Mode Fax Spécifie la définition du Fax et les conditions d'émission. Page de garde Définit la page de garde du fax. Saisie directe Tapez l'adresse d'émission. Entrée au répertoire téléphonique Enregistrez l'adresse d'émission dans le répertoire téléphonique. Liste des destinataires Indication du correspondant distant ou enregistré dans le répertoire téléphonique. Sous-menu Fonction Version Affiche la version du pilote d'imprimante. Sous-menu Fonction Option Spécifie les options installées sur cet appareil. Informations optionnelles Spécifie automatiquement les paramètres des options du pilote d'imprimante. Configuration du pilote PCL 6 IC-202 (Phase 2) 6-7 6.2 Spécifier les paramètres de l'onglet Configuration Adapter l'impression au format papier Vous pouvez agrandir ou réduire des documents créés lors de l'impression pour les faire correspondre au format de sortie papier. 1 Cliquez sur l'onglet Configuration. 2 A partir des zones de liste déroulante "Format original" et "Format de sortie", sélectionnez les paramètres voulus. – Vous pouvez aussi spécifier un taux d'agrandissement ou de réduction dans la boîte "Zoom". 6 Configuration du pilote PCL 6-8 IC-202 (Phase 2) Enregistrer un format personnalisé Vous pouvez spécifier et enregistrer à l'avance un format personnalisé suivant la procédure ci-après. 1 A partir de la zone de liste déroulante "Format de sortie", sélectionnez "Config. format personnal.". La boîte de dialogue Paramètres de format personnalisé apparaît. 2 Spécifiez les paramètres des éléments suivants : Liste des formats personnalisés : Sélectionnez le format pour le format personnalisé en cours de création. Nom du format personnalisé : Tapez le nom du format personnalisé en cours d'enregistrement. Format : Spécifiez la largeur et la longueur du format personnalisé en fonction des unités de mesure choisies. 3 Cliquez sur [OK]. Configuration du pilote PCL 6 IC-202 (Phase 2) 6-9 Configuration de la position d'impression Vous pouvez régler la position d'impression pour le papier large ou le format personnalisé de papier en sélectionnant "Config. position. impress.". 1 Cliquez sur [Config. position. impress.] dans "Format original" ou dans "Format de sortie" La boîte de dialogue Config. position. impress. apparaît. 2 Sélectionnez "En haut", "Au centre" ou "En bas". 3 Cliquez sur [OK]. 6 Configuration du pilote PCL 6-10 IC-202 (Phase 2) Sélectionner la source papier Lors du changement de type de papier, vous pouvez l'enregistrer sur un magasin papier et vous pourrez sélectionner le magasin papier en fonction du type de papier désiré. 1 Cliquez sur l'onglet Configuration. 2 A partir de la zone de liste déroulante "Source papier", sélectionnez le bac d'alimentation papier contenant le papier à utiliser. Configuration du pilote PCL 6 IC-202 (Phase 2) 6-11 Spécifier la source du type de papier Suivez la procédure décrite ci-dessous pour attribuer un type de papier à un bac d'alimentation papier. 1 Cliquez sur [Configuration du type de papier]. 2 Sélectionnez la "source papier" à changer et cliquez ensuite sur [Modifier]. 3 Sélectionnez le paramètre voulu dans la liste déroulante "Type de papier" et cliquez ensuite sur [OK]. 6 Configuration du pilote PCL 6-12 IC-202 (Phase 2) Si "Transparent" est sélectionné comme type de papier, vous pouvez spécifier des intercalaires sur transparent. Quand la case "Intercalaire sur transparent" est cochée, la boîte de dialogue Config. Intercalaire sur transparent apparaît pour vous permettre de spécifier les sources papier de l'intercalaire sur transparent. Vous pouvez aussi afficher la boîte de dialogue Config. Intercalaire sur transparent en cliquant sur [Paramètres]. Configuration du pilote PCL 6 IC-202 (Phase 2) 6-13 Spécifier l'impression recto-verso/livret Vous pouvez imprimer un document sur les deux côtés d'une page ou au format livret (deux pages en vis-à-vis). Cela s'avère pratique quand vous voulez relier des documents de plusieurs pages. 1 Cliquez sur l'onglet Configuration. 2 A partir de la zone de liste déroulante "Type d'impression", sélectionnez "Recto/verso" ou "Livret". 2 Remarque L'orientation de reliure peut se spécifier à partir de la zone de liste déroulante "Position de reliure". Quand le module de finition FS-602 en option est installé et que "Livret" est spécifié, vous pouvez sélectionner "Agrafage central et pliage" pour relier au centre d'une page. 6 Configuration du pilote PCL 6-14 IC-202 (Phase 2) Imprimer plusieurs pages sur une seule page (N en 1) Vous pouvez imprimer des documents de plusieurs pages sur une seule page. Fonction bien pratique quand vous voulez réduire le nombre de pages imprimées. 1 Cliquez sur l'onglet Configuration. 2 Sélectionnez la case à cocher "Combinaison". 3 A partir de la zone de liste déroulante "Combinaison", sélectionnez le nombre de pages à imprimer sur une page. Pour modifier les paramètres de bordure et d'ordre d'impression, sélectionnez "Détails" et modifiez les paramètres dans la boîte de dialogue qui apparaît. 2 Remarque Quand vous imprimez un travail comprenant plusieurs pages de différents formats et orientées différemment, il se peut que des images manquent ou se superposent lors de l'impression du document. Configuration du pilote PCL 6 IC-202 (Phase 2) 6-15 Régler la marge Des marges sont ajoutées au document avant son impression. 1 Cliquez sur l'onglet Configuration. 2 Sélectionnez la case à cocher "Marge de fichier". 3 Pour régler la largeur de la marge, cliquez sur [Détails] et spécifiez ensuite les paramètres voulus dans la boîte de dialogue Détails de marge de fichier qui apparaît. Recto/Verso : Règle les valeurs de marge. En décochant la case à cocher "Même valeur pour le recto et le verso", vous pouvez spécifier des valeurs différentes pour les cotés recto et verso. Mode de décalage : Sélectionne le processus d'impression pour le document. 6 Configuration du pilote PCL 6-16 IC-202 (Phase 2) Agrafage Vous pouvez agrafer des documents de plusieurs pages. La fonction d'agrafage est uniquement disponible quand le module de finition en option (à l'exception du SF-601) est installé. 1 Cliquez sur l'onglet Configuration. 2 Sélectionnez la case à cocher "Agrafer". 3 A partir de la zone de liste déroulante, spécifiez le nombre d'agrafes et la position d'agrafage. 2 Remarque En fonction du paramètre sélectionné de position de reliure, différentes positions d'agrafage sont possibles. Vous pouvez agrafer jusqu'à 100 feuilles de papier ordinaire au format A4 ou inférieur avec le module FS-505 et 50 feuilles avec le module FS-504 ou 602. Perforer Vous pouvez perforer les documents imprimés. La fonction de perforation est uniquement disponible quand le module de finition en option (à l'exception du SF-601) est installé. En outre, le kit de perforation ou le module de perforation et de pliage en Z doit être installé. 1 Cliquez sur l'onglet Configuration. 2 Sélectionnez la case à cocher "Perforer". 3 A partir de la zone de liste déroulante, spécifiez le nombre de trous à perforer. Configuration du pilote PCL 6 IC-202 (Phase 2) 6-17 Agrafage central et pliage Traitement du document imprimé avec la fonction Agrafage central et Pliage. 1 Cliquez sur l'onglet Configuration. 2 Cochez la case "Agrafage central et pliage". 2 Remarque La fonction de pliage et d'agrafage central est uniquement disponible si le module de finition FS-602 est installé. 6 Configuration du pilote PCL 6-18 IC-202 (Phase 2) Sélectionner le type de sortie Non seulement, vous pouvez imprimer directement, mais vous pouvez aussi sélectionner "Impression sécurisée", qui nécessite un mot de passe pour imprimer ou "Enreg. dans boîte utilisateur", qui enregistre les documents dans le dossier des documents. 0 "Impression sécurisée" et "Enr. dns boîte utilis. (et imprim.)" doivent être réglés au préalable sur "Disque dur imprimante" avec l'onglet Option. 1 Cliquez sur l'onglet Configuration. 2 A partir de la zone de liste déroulante "Type de sortie", sélectionnez la méthode de sortie. Impression : imprime immédiatement. Impression sécurisée : enregistre le document à imprimer dans la boîte des documents classés de cette machine. Pour imprimer, il vous est demandé de saisir l'ID utilisateur et le mot de passe sur le panneau de contrôle de cet appareil. Sélectionnez quand vous imprimez des documents très confidentiels. (jusqu'à 100 documents) Enreg. dans boîte utilisateur : Enregistre le document à imprimer dans une boîte de cet appareil. Enr. dns boîte utilis, imprim. : Enregistre le document dans une boîte et l'imprime simultanément. Attente avec épreuve : après l'impression d'un exemplaire du document, cet appareil s'arrête provisoirement d'imprimer. Sélectionnez pour éviter de mal imprimer les travaux d'impression volumineux. Configuration du pilote PCL 6 IC-202 (Phase 2) 6-19 Impression sécurisée Si "Impression sécurisée" était sélectionné, saisissez l'ID et le mot de passe d'impression sécurisée dans la boîte de dialogue qui apparaît. Pour imprimer le document, appuyez sur [Boîte ut. système] puis sur [Boîte RX sécurisé] en mode Boîte de cette machine. Après avoir saisi l'ID et le mot de passe utilisateur, le document est accessible et peut être imprimé. 2 Remarque Pour de plus amples détails sur les fonctions de boîte de cet appareil, consultez le manuel utilisateur 750/600 [Opérations de boîte]. 6 Configuration du pilote PCL 6-20 IC-202 (Phase 2) Enregistrer dans boîte utilisateur % Quand "Enreg. dans boîte utilisateur" ou "Enr. dns boîte utilis, imprim." est sélectionné, spécifiez le nom de fichier et le numéro de boîte dans la boîte de dialogue qui apparaît pour saisir le nom de fichier et le numéro de la boîte utilisateur. 2 Remarque Pour de plus amples détails sur les fonctions de boîte de cet appareil, consultez le manuel utilisateur 750/600 [Opérations de boîte]. Attente avec épreuve % Lors de l'envoi d'une tâche d'impression, cet appareil s'arrête provisoirement d'imprimer après avoir imprimé un exemplaire du document. Le reste de la tâche d'impression est stocké dans l'appareil en tant que tâche d'impression. Lors de l'impression de plusieurs copies, vous pouvez imprimer la partie restante de la tâche d'impression après avoir vérifié les résultats d 'impression. Pour imprimer, affichez la liste des Tâches en attente de l'écran Liste Tâches sur le panneau de contrôle de cet appareil et appuyez sur [Libérer Tâch Att.]. Configuration du pilote PCL 6 IC-202 (Phase 2) 6-21 Spécifier les paramètres d'authentification Si des paramètres d'authentification ont été spécifiés sur cet appareil, il faut saisir un nom d'utilisateur. 1 Cliquez sur l'onglet Configuration. 2 Cliquez sur [Authentification/Suivi de Volume E.K.C.]. 3 Cochez la case à cocher "Authentification" et sélectionnez "Utilisateur destinataire" et saisissez le nom d'utilisateur et le mot de passe. 4 Cliquez sur [OK]. 2 Remarque Si cet appareil a été réglé pour autoriser les utilisateurs publics, l'appareil peut être utilisé sans nom d'utilisateur ni mot de passe. Pour les paramètres d'authentification, consultez l'administrateur de cet appareil. 6 Configuration du pilote PCL 6-22 IC-202 (Phase 2) Spécifier les paramètres de Suivi de Volume (E.K.C.) Si des paramètres de suivi de volume ont été spécifiés sur cet appareil, vous devez saisir un mot de passe de service pour imprimer une travail. 1 Cliquez sur l'onglet Configuration. 2 Cliquez sur [Authentification/Suivi de Volume E.K.C.]. 3 Sélectionnez la case à cocher "Suivi de Volume (E.K.C.)", puis saisissez le nom et le mot de passe du service. – Vous pouvez enregistrer un mot de passe par défaut plutôt que de saisir un mot de passe pour chaque travail. 4 Cliquez sur [OK]. 2 Remarque Si une tâche d'impression est envoyée avec un nom de service ou un mot de passe ne correspondant pas à un service enregistré sur cet appareil, ou si un travail est envoyé sans cocher la case "Suivi de Volume (E.K.C.)", une erreur va survenir. Vérifiez la liste des journaux à l'aide du panneau de contrôle de cet appareil. Configuration du pilote PCL 6 IC-202 (Phase 2) 6-23 6.3 Spécifier les paramètres de l'onglet Paramétrage par page Imprimer des documents avec page de couverture et de dos 1 Cliquez sur l'onglet Paramétrage par page. 2 Sélectionnez les cases à cocher "Couverture" et "Dos". 3 Pour imprimer sur la page de couverture et de dos, sélectionnez "Imprimé". Pour n'ajouter qu'une page vierge, sélectionnez "Vierge". 4 Sélectionnez la Source papier contenant le papier chargé pour la page de couverture et la page de dos. 6 Configuration du pilote PCL 6-24 IC-202 (Phase 2) Impression d'une couverture avec bac d'insertion Une page de couverture peut être jointe au document imprimé. Définissez le papier épais ou tout autre type de papier pour le bac d'insertion. Le papier chargé dans l'introducteur de papes de couverture est joint au document imprimé comme page de couverture. 1 Cliquez sur l'onglet Paramétrage par page. 2 Cochez les cases à cocher "Couv. avc bac ins." et "Dos avc bac ins." dans "Couvertures avec bac d'insertion". 3 Sélectionnez l'une des deux sources papier correspondant au papier utilisé comme page de couverture ou page de dos. 2 Remarque Une couverture avec bac d'insertion ne peut être jointe que si le bac d'insertion (PI-501) est installé en option. Configuration du pilote PCL 6 IC-202 (Phase 2) 6-25 Impression de chapitres En mode d'impression Recto-verso/Livret, certaines pages peuvent toujours sortir face imprimée vers le haut. Si une page spécifique devient le côté verso en mode d'impression Recto-verso, cette page est décalée vers le recto de la feuille suivante et imprimée. 1 Cliquez sur l'onglet Paramétrage par page. 2 Cochez la case à cocher "Chapitre". 3 Indiquez les pages à sortir face imprimée vers le haut dans la zone de texte "Numéro de page". 6 Configuration du pilote PCL 6-26 IC-202 (Phase 2) Imprimer plusieurs pages La fonction "Paramétrage par page" s'avère bien pratique si vous voulez changer le source papier pendant une tâche d'impression quand vous imprimer plusieurs pages. Paramétrage par page Vous pouvez spécifier le type d'impression et la source papier pour chaque page. 1 Cliquez sur l'onglet Paramétrage par page. 2 Sélectionnez la case à cocher "Paramétrage par page". 3 A partir de la zone de liste déroulante "Nom de liste", sélectionnez le nom de la liste voulue. – Quand vous changez de nom de liste, cliquez sur [Modifier nom de liste...] après avoir sélectionné le nom de liste et appliquez les paramètres dans la boîte de dialogue qui apparaît. 4 Cliquez sur [Ajouter] et spécifiez le numéro de page, le type d'impression et la source papier dans la boîte de dialogue qui apparaît. 5 Cochez la case à cocher "Utilisation de papier à onglet" comme demandé et choisissez d'utiliser le papier à onglet pour le papier inséré. Configuration du pilote PCL 6 IC-202 (Phase 2) 6-27 2 Remarque Voir "Utilisation de papier à onglet" à la page 6-28 pour de plus amples informations sur la configuration de l'Utilisation de papier à onglet. Pour une liste existante, cliquez sur [Modifier] pour modifier les paramètres de page sélectionnés ou cliquez sur [Effacer] pour les supprimer. Cliquez sur [+] ou [,] pour modifier le numéro de page. 6 Configuration du pilote PCL 6-28 IC-202 (Phase 2) Utilisation de papier à onglet Le papier à onglet disponible dans le commerce peut être utilisé par la fonction Paramétrage par page. 1 Cliquez sur l'onglet Paramétrage par page. 2 Sélectionnez la case à cocher "Paramétrage par page". 3 Cliquez sur [,] en regard du champ "Nom de liste" et sélectionnez un nom de liste à utiliser sur la liste qui s'affiche – La configuration de la liste sélectionnée s'affiche dans la zone de liste. – Dix types de nom de liste de "Liste 1" à "Liste 10" ont été préenregistrés. – Vous pouvez enregistrer 10 types de liste fixes. 4 Cliquez sur [Config. papier à onglet]. La boîte de dialogue de configuration du papier à onglet apparaît. Configuration du pilote PCL 6 IC-202 (Phase 2) 6-29 5 Cliquez sur [,] dans le champ "Format" de la boîte "Papier" et sélectionnez un format à utiliser dans la liste affichée. – La valeur par défaut est A4 à onglet. 6 Cliquez sur [,] dans le champ "Nombre d'onglets" de la boîte "Papier". Une liste apparaît. Sélectionnez sur la liste un nombre d'onglets à utiliser. – Vous pouvez directement saisir le nombre dans la boîte "Nombre d'onglets". – La valeur par défaut est 5. – Vous pouvez définir une valeur numérique comprise entre 2 et 15. 7 Définissez le "réglage position" nécessaire en spécifiant les champs "Espace avant onglets", "Espace après onglet", "Espace entre onglets" ou "Position du texte". – La plage de valeur numériques définissables varie en fonction des valeurs numériques dans "Nombre d'onglets". 8 Cliquez sur [OK] et fermez la boîte de dialogue Configuration du papier à onglet. Retournez à l'écran de "Paramétrage par page" de la fenêtre Propriétés. 9 Cliquez sur [Ajouter]. La boîte de dialogue Paramétrage par page apparaît. 6 Configuration du pilote PCL 6-30 IC-202 (Phase 2) 10 Sélectionnez "Numéro de page", "Type d'impression" ou "Source papier" selon nécessité. 11 Sélectionnez la case à cocher "Utilisation du papier à onglet". 12 Entrez votre texte dans la boîte "Texte sur onglet". – Vous pouvez saisir jusqu'à 64 caractères. 13 Cliquez sur [Détails]. – La touche [Détails] ne peut pas être utilisée si vous ne saisissez rien dans la boîte "Texte sur onglet". La boîte de dialogue Détails du texte sur onglet apparaît. Configuration du pilote PCL 6 IC-202 (Phase 2) 6-31 14 Définissez les paramètres "texte sur onglet"-"Orientation", "Position" et "Paramétrage police"-"Nom de police", "Style" ou "Format" selon nécessité. 15 Cliquez sur [OK] et fermez la boîte de dialogue Détails du texte sur onglet. La boîte de dialogue Paramétrage par page réapparaît. 16 Pour spécifier l'onglet pour lequel saisir le "Texte sur onglet", cliquez sur [,] du champ "Position" et sélectionnez un onglet à spécifier. – La valeur par défaut est Continuer page précédente. 17 Cliquez sur [OK] et fermez la boîte de dialogue Paramétrage par page. L'onglet "Paramétrage par page" de la fenêtre "Propriétés" réapparaît. Le paramètre figure dans la zone de liste. 18 Pour utiliser un autre papier à onglet, exécuter les étapes 9 à 16. – Si vous utilisez du papier autre que le papier à onglet, voir "Spécifier les paramètres de l'onglet Paramétrage par page" à la page 6-23. 19 Confirmez le contenu de la liste. 20 Cliquez sur [OK] et fermez la fenêtre "Propriété". – Vous pouvez ajouter jusqu'à 30 paramètres à chaque liste. 6 Configuration du pilote PCL 6-32 IC-202 (Phase 2) 6.4 Spécifier les paramètres de l'onglet Fonctions spéciales Configuration du pilote PCL 6 IC-202 (Phase 2) 6-33 Une image étalée sur deux pages est imprimée sur une feuille de papier de format double (combinaison) Le contenu de deux feuilles au format de sortie peut être collecté et imprimé sur une seule feuille de papier dont le format est le double de celui défini dans "Format de sortie". 1 Cliquez sur l'onglet Fonctions spéciales. 2 Sélectionnez la case à cocher "Combinaison". 3 Cliquez sur [,] pour cocher la case "Combinaison" et sélectionnez "2 en 1" ou "Répétition 2 en 1" dans la liste qui s'affiche. Si vous sélectionnez "2 en 1", l'image sur les 2 pages continues est collectée et imprimée sur une seule feuille de papier. Si vous sélectionnez "Répétition 2 en 1", deux exemplaires de la même page sont imprimées sur une seule feuille de papier. 6 Configuration du pilote PCL 6-34 IC-202 (Phase 2) Définir le pliage Le papier est plié et imprimé. Vous pouvez sélectionner Pliage en deux, Pliage en Z ou Pliage en trois. 1 Cliquez sur l'onglet Fonctions spéciales. 2 Cochez la case à cocher "Pliage". 3 Cliquez sur [,] en regard de la case "Pliage". Sélectionnez "Pliage en deux", "Pliage en Z" ou "Pliage en trois" sur la liste affichée. 2 Remarque Certains des points peuvent ne pas apparaître en fonction du module de finition installé. Configuration du pilote PCL 6 IC-202 (Phase 2) 6-35 Réglage de la position d'impression (Décalage d'image) Vous pouvez régler la position d'impression sur le document imprimé. 1 Cliquez sur l'onglet Fonctions spéciales. 2 Sélectionnez la case à cocher "Décalage d'image". 3 Cliquez sur [Paramètres]. 4 Réglez le décalage vers le haut, vers le bas, vers la droite et vers la gauche côtés recto et verso ou le décalage de gouttière par unités de 0,1 mm. 2 Remarque La fonction "Paramètres à utiliser" ne fonctionne pas. Seul un réglage côté pilote d'imprimante est possible. Cochez la case "Réglage verso auto" pour appliquer le même réglage que pour le recto. 6 Configuration du pilote PCL 6-36 IC-202 (Phase 2) 6.5 Spécifier les paramètres de l'onglet Superposition Imprimer ensemble des documents originaux différents (Superposition) Un document original peut être imprimé sur des données de superposition créées séparément. Cette fonction est bien pratique pour les pages de garde de fax et les formulaires de lettre. Vous devez pré-enregistrer les formulaires à imprimer. Pour plus de détails, voir "Créer une superposition" à la page 6-38. 1 Créez les données d'impression à partir de n'importe quelle application. 2 Dans le menu "Fichier", sélectionnez "Imprimer". 3 Sélectionnez l'imprimante PCL GENERIC 75/60 BW-1 et cliquez ensuite sur [Préférences]. 4 Cliquez sur l'onglet Superposition. 5 Sélectionnez "Imprimer superposition". Configuration du pilote PCL 6 IC-202 (Phase 2) 6-37 6 Sur la liste, sélectionnez la superposition que vous voulez imprimer. – Lorsque seule la première page doit être imprimée en superposition, cochez la case "1ère page seulement". 7 Sélectionnez le nom de fichier et cliquez ensuite sur [OK]. – La boîte de dialogue Imprimer apparaît de nouveau. 8 Cliquez sur [OK]. L'impression de la superposition est exécutée. 6 Configuration du pilote PCL 6-38 IC-202 (Phase 2) Créer une superposition Pour utiliser Superposition, les données d'utilisation de la superposition doivent être préenregistrées. Pour enregistrer une superposition, sélectionnez la case à cocher "Créer superposition" et spécifiez le document que vous voulez enregistrer. 1 Créez les données de superposition à partir de n'importe quelle application. 2 Dans le menu "Fichier", sélectionnez "Imprimer". 3 Sélectionnez l'imprimante PCL GENERIC 75/60 BW-1 et cliquez ensuite sur [Préférences]. 4 Cliquez sur l'onglet Superposition. 5 Sélectionnez "Créer superposition". 6 Cliquez sur [Parcourir fichiers]. Configuration du pilote PCL 6 IC-202 (Phase 2) 6-39 7 Spécifiez l'emplacement de stockage des données de superposition et tapez le nom de fichier dans la case "Nom du fichier". 8 Cliquez sur [Enregistrer]. 9 Sélectionnez le fichier et cliquez ensuite sur [OK]. – La boîte de dialogue Imprimer apparaît de nouveau. 10 Cliquez sur [OK]. Au lieu d'exécuter une tâche d'impression, les données de superposition sont enregistrées. L'extension de fichier est ".kmf". 2 Remarque Sous l'onglet Superposition, vous pouvez supprimer les données de superposition sélectionnées en cliquant sur [Supprimer fichier de superposition]. 6 Configuration du pilote PCL 6-40 IC-202 (Phase 2) 6.6 Spécifier les paramètres de l'onglet Filigrane Imprimer un filigrane Vous pouvez imprimer un texte donné en arrière-plan en tant que filigrane. 1 Cliquez sur l'onglet Filigrane. 2 Sélectionnez la case à cocher "Filigrane". 3 A partir de la zone de liste déroulante, sélectionnez le filigrane que vous voulez imprimer. 4 Spécifiez les paramètres voulus pour "Saisir". Ecraser : L'arrière-plan du filigrane est imprimé en blanc. Transparent : L'arrière-plan du filigrane est transparent. 5 Cochez la case à cocher "1re page uniquement" si vous n'imprimez le filigrane que sur la première page. Configuration du pilote PCL 6 IC-202 (Phase 2) 6-41 Modifier un filigrane Vous pouvez modifier les polices et la position du filigrane et vous pouvez en enregistrer un nouveau. 1 Cliquez sur l'onglet Filigrane. 2 Sélectionnez la case à cocher "Filigrane". 3 Cliquez sur [Modifier]. 4 Spécifiez les paramètres des éléments suivants : – [Ajouter]: cliquez dessus pour saisir un nouveau filigrane dans la case de texte filigrane. – [Effacer] : cliquez dessus pour effacer le filigrane sélectionné. – Paramétrage police : spécifie la police et la taille. – Angle du texte : spécifie l'angle d'impression du filigrane. – Position: spécifie la position du filigrane à l'aide des curseurs verticaux et horizontaux. – Densité du Texte : spécifie la densité du texte avec le curseur. 6 Configuration du pilote PCL 6-42 IC-202 (Phase 2) Imprimer le numéro du document Lors de l'impression de plusieurs copies, vous pouvez imprimer le numéro de chaque document. 1 Cliquez sur l'onglet Filigrane. 2 Cochez la case "Estampage numéro de distribution". 3 Spécifiez les paramètres des éléments suivants : Pages à imprimer : Spécifie les pages sur lesquelles la numérotation doit être imprimée. Numéro de départ : Spécifie le numéro de départ. 2 Remarque La case à cocher "Estampage numéro de distribution" n'est pas disponible si la case "Tri" n'est pas cochée sous l'onglet Configuration. Définissez la position et le format des caractères sur le panneau de contrôle du copieur. Configuration du pilote PCL 6 IC-202 (Phase 2) 6-43 6.7 Spécifier les paramètres de l'onglet Qualité Motif Représente l'image à l'aide de points blancs et noirs de densité différente. En sélectionnant "Fin", vous augmentez la densité des points. "Grossier" est le réglage par défaut. 1 Cliquez sur l'onglet Qualité. 2 Cliquez sur [Fin] dans "Motif". Densité d'impression La sélection de la case à cocher "Economie Toner" ou "Brouillon" permet de réduire la consommation de toner ou imprime en plus clair. 0 Les cases "Economie Toner" et "Brouillon" dans "Densité d'impression" ne peuvent pas être cochées simultanément. 1 Cliquez sur l'onglet Qualité. 2 Pour réduire la consommation de Toner, cochez la case "Economie Toner". 3 Pour imprimer plus clair ou en mode Brouillon, cochez la case "Brouillon". 6 Configuration du pilote PCL 6-44 IC-202 (Phase 2) Imprimer avec noir Empêche les traits fins en couleur, les caractères en couleur, les images d'être imprimées en clair. 1 Cliquez sur l'onglet Qualité. 2 Cochez la case "Imprimer avec noir" et sélectionnez soit "Texte et graphiques" ou "Tous". Sous-menu Fonction Texte et graphiques Les caractères et les images en couleur sont imprimés en noir. Tous Tous les objets, y compris les données d'image comme les images photographiques sont imprimées en noir à l'exception des zones blanches. Configuration du pilote PCL 6 IC-202 (Phase 2) 6-45 Lissage Impression lisse des parties curvilignes des caractères et des images. 1 Cliquez sur l'onglet Qualité. 2 Appuyez sur [,] en regard de "Lissage" et sélectionnez le type voulu dans la liste. Sous-menu Fonction Type 1 Processus convenant à l'impression des lignes diagonales des caractères normaux et des graphiques. Type 2 Processus convenant à l'impression des sections curvilignes des caractères normaux. Type 3 Processus convenant à l'impression des parties curvilignes des écritures ornementales et des caractères fins. 6 Configuration du pilote PCL 6-46 IC-202 (Phase 2) 6.8 Spécifier les paramètres de l'onglet Police Spécifier les paramètres Vous pouvez remplacer les polices TrueType utilisées dans Windows par les polices d'imprimante de cet appareil. L'utilisation des polices d'imprimante va réduire le temps d'impression, mais il risque d'y avoir une différence entre l'affichage à l'écran et les résultats d 'impression. 1 Cliquez sur l'onglet "Police". 2 Sélectionnez la case à cocher "Utiliser les polices de l'imprimante". 3 Sélectionnez la police TrueType que vous voulez remplacer. 4 A partir de la zone de liste déroulante "Police imprimante à utiliser", sélectionnez la police d'imprimante pour remplacer la police TrueType. 5 Cliquez sur [OK]. 2 Remarque Quand vous utilisez les polices TrueType, sélectionnez le type de police à télécharger sur l'imprimante à partir de la zone de liste déroulante "Format de police à télécharger". Configuration du pilote PCL 6 IC-202 (Phase 2) 6-47 6.9 Spécifier les paramètres de l'onglet Fax Envoyer un fax Vous pouvez envoyer par fax les données que vous avez créées. Pour utiliser la fonction de fax, vous devez installer le kit de fax en option sur cet appareil. De plus, vous devez activer le kit de fax sur l'onglet d'option correspondant après installation. Pour plus de détails, voir page 6-61. 1 Créez avec l'application de votre choix les données que vous voulez envoyer. 2 Dans le menu "Fichier", sélectionnez "Imprimer". 3 Sélectionnez l'imprimante PCL GENERIC 75/60 BW-1 et cliquez ensuite sur [Préférences]. 4 Cliquez sur l'onglet "FAX". 5 Sous "Sélection du mode", sélectionnez "FAX". – Quand vous sélectionnez "Format personnalisé" dans la liste déroulante "Format papier" de l'onglet Configuration, la configuration de la fonction fax est impossible. – Pour plus de détails sur les fonctions de fax de la machine, consultez le "Guide de l'utilisateur 750/600 [Opérations Fax]". 6 Configuration du pilote PCL 6-48 IC-202 (Phase 2) 6 Sélectionnez l'information et cliquez ensuite sur [OK]. 7 A partir de la zone de liste déroulante "Résolution", sélectionnez le paramètre voulu. 8 Cliquez sur [Détails]. La boîte de dialogue "Détail Mode Fax" apparaît. 9 Pour imprimer un fichier après l'envoi d'un fax, sélectionnez la case à cocher "Imprimer fichier destinataire". Configuration du pilote PCL 6 IC-202 (Phase 2) 6-49 10 Pour régler l'heure à laquelle le fax doit être envoyé, sélectionnez la case à cocher "Emission programmée" et spécifiez ensuite l'heure à laquelle vous voulez envoyer le fax dans les cases "Heure d'émission". – En cliquant sur [Retourner heure actuelle], l'heure actuelle réglée sur l'ordinateur s'affiche dans les cases "Heure d'émission". – Quand vous utilisez "Emission programmée", assurez-vous que l'heure définie sur l'ordinateur est synchronisée avec l'heure de cet appareil. Si l'heure d'émission est antérieure à l'heure actuelle de l'appareil, le fax sera envoyé le lendemain. 11 Lors de l'émission d'un fax confidentiel, sélectionnez les cases "Sousadresse" et "Envoyer ID" et tapez la sous-adresse et l'ID d'émission. Il est possible d'envoyer des communications confidentielles à un autre modèle de fax à l'aide de F codes. – Vous pouvez saisir jusqu'à 20 caractères (chiffres de 0 à 9) dans la case de texte "Sous-adresse". – Vous pouvez saisir jusqu'à 20 caractères (chiffres de 0 à 9, # et *) dans la case de texte "Envoyer ID". 12 Cliquez sur [OK]. La boîte de dialogue Options d'impression apparaît de nouveau. 13 Spécifier la destination du fax. – Vous pouvez tapez le destinataire du fax directement ou le sélectionner dans le répertoire téléphonique. – Pour effectuer la saisie directe du destinataire du fax, passez à l'étape 14. Pour sélectionner un destinataire dans le répertoire téléphonique, passez à l'étape 15. 6 Configuration du pilote PCL 6-50 IC-202 (Phase 2) 14 Sous "Saisie directe", tapez les informations pertinentes dans les zones de texte "Nom" et "N° télécopie", puis cliquez sur [Ajouter destinataire]. – Vous pouvez saisir jusqu'à 40 caractères dans la case de texte "Nom". – Vous pouvez saisir 38 caractères maximum (chiffres de 0 à 9, tirets (-), #,*, P et T) dans la case "N° télécopie". – Vous pouvez enregistrer 100 destinataires maximum dans la liste "Destinataires". Après avoir saisi les informations relatives au destinataire, sautez à l'étape 19. 15 Cliquez sur [Répertoire]. – Pour plus de détails sur l'enregistrement de destinataires dans le répertoire, voir "Enregistrer un destinataire dans le répertoire" à la page 6-57. La boîte de dialogue Répertoire apparaît. 16 Sélectionnez le destinataire ou le groupe auquel vous voulez envoyer le fax. Configuration du pilote PCL 6 IC-202 (Phase 2) 6-51 17 Cliquez sur [Ajouter destinataire]. Le destinataire sélectionné s'affiche dans la liste "Destinataires". 18 Sélectionnez le destinataire et cliquez ensuite sur [OK]. – Si vous sélectionnez un groupe, tous les membres du groupe s'affichent sur la liste "Destinataires". La boîte de dialogue Options d'impression apparaît de nouveau. 19 Assurez-vous que le destinataire du fichier figure sur la liste "Destinataires". – Pour supprimer un destinataire, sélectionnez le destinataire à supprimer dans la liste "Destinataires", et cliquez ensuite sur [Supprimer]. – Ce n'est pas nécessaire de modifier les paramètres des cases à cocher "ECM", "International" et "V.34". Pour plus de détails, voir le guide de l'utilisateur "ineo 750/600 [Opérations Fax]". 20 Quand vous ajoutez une page de garde, sélectionnez la case à cocher "Page de garde". – Pour définir une page de garde de fax, voir "Créer une page de garde" à la page 6-53. 6 Configuration du pilote PCL 6-52 IC-202 (Phase 2) 21 Cliquez sur [OK]. La boîte de dialogue Imprimer apparaît de nouveau. 22 Cliquez sur [OK]. La boîte de dialogue Confirmation d'envoi de fax apparaît. 23 Cliquez sur [OK]. Le fax est envoyé au destinataire spécifié. 2 Remarque Quand une erreur d'émission de fax survient, un rapport d’émission est automatiquement imprimé. Si vous ne voulez pas que le rapport d'émission soit automatiquement imprimé, réglez "Rapport Emission" sur [OFF] sur l'écran Paramètres de rapport à partir du panneau de contrôle de cet appareil. Configuration du pilote PCL 6 IC-202 (Phase 2) 6-53 Créer une page de garde Vous pouvez créer une page de garde de fax et la joindre à votre message fax. 1 Dans la boîte de dialogue Options d'impression, sélectionnez la case à cocher "Page de garde" sur l'onglet FAX. 2 Cliquez sur [Paramètres]. La boîte de dialogue des Paramètres page de garde FAX apparaît. 3 A partir de la zone de liste déroulante "Style", sélectionnez le format de la page de garde. Styles proposés : de 00 à 03. 4 Sélectionnez la case à cocher "Objet" et tapez le sujet de document à envoyer. – Vous pouvez saisir jusqu'à 64 caractères dans la case de texte "Objet". 6 Configuration du pilote PCL 6-54 IC-202 (Phase 2) 5 Sous "Coordonnées du destinataire", vous pouvez spécifier les informations du destinataire, comme le nom, pour la page de garde à ajouter. Les informations figurant sur la liste "Destinataires" de l'onglet FAX sont saisies sur la page de garde. – Standard: sélectionne les informations de destinataire standard. Sélectionnez "Standard" et, à partir de la zone de liste déroulante, le texte à saisir sur la ligne des informations du destinataire. Vous pouvez aussi saisir des caractères. – Détails: spécifiez séparément les informations de destinataire. Sélectionnez "Détails" et ensuite, sélectionnez les cases à cocher "Entreprise", "Service", "Nom" ou "N° télécopie" pour les informations à saisir sur la ligne d'informations du destinataire. Cliquez sur [Paramètres], pour sélectionner "Inclure coordonnées destinataires", "Changer chaque destinataire" ou "Inclure informations choisies" dans la boîte de dialogue des informations de destinataire. – La première page de garde de destinataire s'affiche en échantillon dans la boîte "Aperçu". – Vous pouvez créer jusqu'à 10 pages de garde différentes si "Changer chaque destinataire" est coché. Quand vous envoyez 11 fax ou plus avec "Inclure coordonnées destinataires" ou "Changer chaque destinataire" coché, les informations spécifiées pour "Standard" apparaissent sur la ligne d'informations destinataire. Configuration du pilote PCL 6 IC-202 (Phase 2) 6-55 – Si "Destination" n'est pas spécifié, "Inclure informations choisies" ne peut pas être sélectionné. – Selon le type de caractères saisis et les paramètres spécifiés avec "Style", il se peut que tous les caractères saisis ne s'affichent pas sur la page de garde. Après avoir saisi les informations, assurezvous que les informations s'affichent correctement dans l'image de la boîte "Aperçu". 6 Sélectionnez les cases "Entreprise", "Service", "Nom", "Téléphone", "N° télécopie" ou "E-mail" sous "Coordonnées de l'expéditeur" pour les informations que vous voulez indiquer sur la ligne des informations d'expéditeur et cliquez ensuite sur [Paramètres] pour entrer les principales informations à envoyer sur la page de garde. – Selon le type de caractères saisis et les paramètres spécifiés avec "Style", il se peut que tous les caractères saisis ne s'affichent pas sur la page de garde. Après avoir saisi les informations, assurezvous que les informations s'affichent correctement dans l'image de la boîte "Aperçu". – Vous pouvez saisir jusqu'à 40 caractères pour chaque élément. Les informations d'expéditeur saisies apparaissent sur l'image de la boîte "Aperçu". 7 Pour saisir la date actuelle sur la page de garde, sélectionnez la case à cocher "Date". 8 Pour saisir le nombre de pages à envoyer, sélectionnez la case à cocher "Pages" et spécifiez le nombre de pages. 6 Configuration du pilote PCL 6-56 IC-202 (Phase 2) 9 Pour écrire un message sur la page de garde, tapez le message dans la case de texte "Commentaire". – Si vous tapez plus de 25 caractères par ligne, il se peut que les caractères n'apparaissent pas correctement sur la page de garde. Contrôlez le texte sur l'image de la boîte "Aperçu" et appuyez sur la touche Retour pour ajuster le nombre de caractères par ligne. – Vous pouvez saisir jusqu'à 640 caractères dans la case de texte "Commentaire". 10 Pour insérer un logo d'entreprise des cartes ou d'autres images sur une page de garde, cochez la case "Image", cliquez sur [Parcourir] et spécifiez le fichier. – Vous pouvez ajuster la position de l'image en spécifiant des valeurs numériques dans les cases "X" et "Y" et vous pouvez ajuster la taille de l'image entre 50% et 800% en indiquant un taux zoom dans la boîte "Zoom". 11 Cliquez sur [Vérifier] pour contrôler les paramètres actuels. La boîte de dialogue Page de garde Fax apparaît et la page de garde est affichée dans une taille plus grande. Vérifiez le contenu de la page de garde en y apportant les modifications nécessaires. 12 Cliquez sur [OK]. La boîte de dialogue de paramétrage de la page de garde fax apparaît de nouveau. 13 Sélectionnez le format de page de garde dans la zone de liste déroulante "Form page garde". 14 Cliquez sur [OK]. La boîte de dialogue Options d'impression apparaît de nouveau. 2 Remarque Pour effacer tous les paramètres modifiés, cliquez sur [Rétbl par déft] dans la boîte de dialogue Paramètres page de garde FAX. Configuration du pilote PCL 6 IC-202 (Phase 2) 6-57 Enregistrer un destinataire dans le répertoire Vous pouvez enregistrer le destinataire du message fax dans le Répertoire. Enregistrer les informations de destinataire 1 Dans la boîte de dialogue Options d'impression, cliquez sur [Répertoire] de l'onglet Fax. La boîte de dialogue Répertoire apparaît. 2 Cliquez sur [Personnel]. La boîte de dialogue "Entrée du répertoire" apparaît. 3 Entrez les informations appropriées dans les zones de texte "Nom", "N° télécopie", "Entreprise" et "Service". Vous pouvez saisir des titres dans la zone de texte "Nom". – Ce n'est pas nécessaire de modifier les paramètres des cases à cocher "ECM", "International" et "V.34". Pour plus de détails, voir le guide de l'utilisateur "ineo 750/600 [Opérations Fax]". – Vous pouvez saisir jusqu'à 40 caractères dans les cases de texte "Nom", "Entreprise" et "Service". 6 Configuration du pilote PCL 6-58 IC-202 (Phase 2) – Vous pouvez saisir 38 caractères maximum (chiffres de 0 à 9, tirets (-), #,*, P et T) dans la case "N° télécopie". 4 Cliquez sur [OK]. Le destinataire est enregistré et apparaît sur la liste "Destinataires". 5 Cliquez sur [OK]. 2 Remarque Lorsque son contenu est modifié, le répertoire téléphonique est réécrit. Pour préparer un nouveau fichier à partir d'une partie du répertoire, sélectionnez "Fichier" – "Ouvrir" ou "Fichier" – "Enregistrer sous" et enregistrez le nouveau fichier séparément. Pour ouvrir le répertoire téléphonique du nouveau fichier, sélectionnez "Fichier" – "Ouvrir" et sélectionnez le fichier du répertoire. L'extension des fichiers Répertoire est ".csv". Configuration du pilote PCL 6 IC-202 (Phase 2) 6-59 Enregistrer un groupe Vous pouvez pré-enregistrer les destinataires auxquels vous voulez envoyer le même fax. Cela s'appelle un "Groupe". 1 Dans la boîte de dialogue Répertoire, sélectionnez le destinataire à enregistrer dans le groupe. Le destinataire sélectionné est mis en évidence. 2 Effectuez un clic droit sur le destinataire sélectionné, puis, dans le sous-menu "Ajouter au groupe", sélectionnez le groupe dans lequel vous voulez enregistrer le destinataire. Le destinataire est copié dans le groupe sélectionné. 2 Remarque Dix groupes ont été créés. Vous ne pouvez ni ajouter ni supprimer de groupe. Vous pouvez enregistrer au total 100 destinataires dans l'ensemble des 10 groupes. Pour modifier le nom de groupe, effectuez un clic droit sur le nom du groupe dans l'arborescence des répertoires sur la gauche de la boîte de dialogue et cliquez sur [Modifier]. 6 Configuration du pilote PCL 6-60 IC-202 (Phase 2) Pour supprimer un destinataire dans un groupe, cliquez sur le groupe dont vous voulez supprimer un destinataire, effectuez un clic droit sur le destinataire dans l'arborescence des répertoires sur la gauche de la boîte de dialogue et cliquez ensuite sur [Retirer du groupe]. Configuration du pilote PCL 6 IC-202 (Phase 2) 6-61 6.10 Spécifier les paramètres de l'onglet Option Vous pouvez spécifier les options installées sur cet appareil pour qu'elles puissent être utilisées par le pilote d'imprimante. 2 Remarque Si les options installées ne sont pas définies à partir de l'onglet Options, la fonction Option ne peut pas être utilisée avec le pilote d'imprimante. Lors de l'installation des options, assurez-vous d'effectuer les réglages corrects. 6 Configuration du pilote PCL 6-62 IC-202 (Phase 2) Spécifier les paramètres 1 Pour Windows 98SE/Me/NT 4.0/2000, cliquez sur [Démarrer], pointez sur [Paramètres], et cliquez ensuite sur [Imprimantes]. Pour Windows XP/Server 2003, cliquez sur [Démarrer], puis sur [Imprimantes et télécopieurs]. 2 Effectuez un clic droit sur l'icône "GENERIC 75/60 BW-1 PCL" et cliquez ensuite sur [Propriétés]. 3 Cliquez sur l'onglet Option. 4 Sélectionnez l'option installée à partir de la zone de liste déroulante. 2 Remarque Pour configurer automatiquement les options installées pendant la connexion au réseau, tapez le nom d'imprimante ou l'adresse IP de cet appareil dans la case "Nom d'imprimante ou Adresse IP" sous "Informations optionnelles" et cliquez ensuite sur [Collecter informations optionnelles]. Configuration du pilote PCL 6 IC-202 (Phase 2) 6-63 6.11 Enregistrer les paramètres de pilote Pour les pilotes PCL, vous pouvez enregistrer les valeurs de paramètres du pilote modifié et les rappeler si nécessaire. Enregistrer les paramètres de pilote 1 Modifiez les paramètres du pilote à partir de l'onglet Configuration et de l'onglet Paramètre par page. 2 Cliquez sur [Enregistrer/rétablir paramètres] et sélectionnez ensuite "Enregistrer paramètres actuels". 6 Configuration du pilote PCL 6-64 IC-202 (Phase 2) 3 Tapez le nom de fichier dans la case de texte "Nom". 4 Tapez un message dans la case de texte "Commentaire" si nécessaire. 5 Spécifiez un dossier dans la case "Emplacement d'enregistrement" et cliquez sur [OK]. Les paramètres sont enregistrés dans une bibliothèque. 2 Remarque L'extension de fichier est ".ksf". Vous pouvez enregistrer jusqu'à 25 éléments dans la bibliothèque. Vous pouvez saisir jusqu'à 40 caractères dans la case de texte "Nom". Vous pouvez saisir jusqu'à 512 caractères dans la case de texte "Commentaire". Configuration du pilote PCL 6 IC-202 (Phase 2) 6-65 Rétablir les paramètres 1 Cliquez sur [Enregistrer/rétablir paramètres] dans la boîte de dialogue Options d'impression et sélectionnez ensuite "Paramètre détaillé de restauration". La boîte de dialogue "Paramètre détaillé de restauration" apparaît. 2 Cochez la case de l'élément à activer. 3 Cliquez sur [OK]. 4 Sélectionnez "Rétablir paramètres enregistrés". 5 Sur la liste "Bibliothèque", sélectionnez le fichier de paramètres voulu. 6 Cliquez sur [OK]. Les valeurs de paramètres sont rappelées et la boîte de dialogue Options d'impression réapparaît. 6 Configuration du pilote PCL 6-66 IC-202 (Phase 2) Supprimer les paramètres 1 Cliquez sur [Enregistrer/rétablir paramètres] dans la boîte de dialogue Options d'impression et sélectionnez ensuite "Modifier bibliothèque". 2 Sur la liste "Bibliothèque", sélectionnez le fichier de paramètres à supprimer. 3 Cliquez sur [Supprimer]. 2 Remarque Même si le fichier de paramètres est supprimé de la liste "Bibliothèque", il restera sur le disque dur de votre ordinateur. En spécifiant le nom de fichier dans "Enregistrer fichier de paramètres dans bibliothèque", vous le sauvegardez sur la liste "Bibliothèque". 7 Configuration du pilote PS (Windows) Configuration du pilote PS (Windows) 7 IC-202 (Phase 2) 7-3 7 Configuration du pilote PS (Windows) 7.1 Paramètres Paramètres communs Ce chapitre décrit les paramètres communs et les boutons qui figurent sur tous les onglets. 2 Remarque Le pilote PS peut s'utiliser uniquement sous Windows NT4.0/2000/XP/Server 2003/XP x64/Server 2003 x64. Il ne peut pas être utilisé sous Windows 98SE/Me ni avec Mac OS. Bouton Fonction OK Cliquez sur cette touche pour fermer la boîte de dialogue et appliquer les paramètres modifiés. Annuler Cliquez sur ce bouton pour annuler les paramètres modifiés et fermer la boîte de dialogue. Appliquer Cliquez sur cette touche pour appliquer les paramètres modifiés sans fermer la boîte de dialogue. Aide Cliquez sur ce bouton pour afficher l'aide relative à chaque élément de la boîte de dialogue actuellement affichée. 7 Configuration du pilote PS (Windows) 7-4 IC-202 (Phase 2) 2 Remarque Pour activer des options installées, vous devez spécifier les paramètres Options. Pour plus de détails, voir "Spécifier les paramètres de l'onglet Option" à la page 7-66. Enregistrer/ Rétablir réglage Cliquez sur ce bouton pour enregistrer les paramètres actuels et les consulter ultérieurement. Rétbl. par Déft Cliquez sur cette touche pour restaurer les valeurs par défaut des paramètres qui avaient été sélectionnés lors de l'installation du pilote. Afficher Quand vous cliquez sur "Papier", un aperçu de la mise en page tel que spécifié dans le réglage actuel s'affiche et vous pouvez consulter un aperçu du tâche d'impression. Quand vous cliquez sur "Imprimante", une figure de l'imprimante s'affiche avec toutes les options, comme les bacs d'alimentation papier installés sur cet appareil. Bouton Fonction Papier Imprimante Configuration du pilote PS (Windows) 7 IC-202 (Phase 2) 7-5 Onglet Configuration Sous-menu Fonction Copies Spécifie le nombre de copies à imprimer. Orientation Spécifie l'orientation de l'image imprimée sur le papier. Format original Spécifie le format du document original. Format de sortie Spécifie le format de papier de sortie. Agrandit ou réduit automatiquement quand le paramètre Format original est modifié. Source papier Sélectionne la source papier pour impression. Configuration du type de papier Sélectionne le type de papier pour impression. Position de reliure Spécifie la position de reliure. Type d'impression Définir s'il faut imprimer uniquement sur une face (recto) du papier ou recto et verso. Agrafer Spécifie l'agrafage. Perforer Spécifie la perforation. Normal Disposition Spécifie le nombre de pages à imprimer sur une page. Livret L'impression est effectuée de manière à former un livret en pliant les documents en deux. Ajuster Une sélection est effectuée quand le Format original diffère du Format de sortie avec l'échelle affichée. Échelle Spécifie le taux d'agrandissement et de réduction. Affiche L'impression est réalisée sur deux feuilles ou plus avec extension des images. Log/Phys L'impression est réalisée sans agrandissement ni réduction même si le Format original diffère du Format de sortie. Type de sortie Spécifie les méthodes de sortie, comme "Impression sécurisée" et "Enreg. dans boîte utilisateur". Bac de sortie Sélectionne le magasin de sortie des pages imprimées. Ordre de sortie Définissez s'il faut orienter le papier à imprimer vers le haut ou vers le bas. Tri Spécifie s'il faut imprimer les copies multiples par jeux. Décalé Lors de l'impression de plusieurs copies, décale la position de sortie de chaque jeu. Authentification/Suivi de Volume (E.K.C.) Spécifie l'ID utilisateur et le mot de passe pour "Authentification utilisateur" et le mot de passe et le nom de boîte pour "Impression sécurisée" et "Enreg. dans boîte utilisateur". 7 Configuration du pilote PS (Windows) 7-6 IC-202 (Phase 2) Onglet Paramétrage par page Onglet Fonctions spéciales Sous-menu Fonction Couverture Ajoute une page de couverture. Dos Ajoute une page de dos. Couverture avec bac d'insertion Une page de couverture est jointe aux documents imprimés. Chapitre En mode d'impression Recto-verso/Livret, l'impression est réalisée de manière à ce qu'une page précise soit assurée de sortir orientée vers le haut, sans erreur. Paramétrage par page Vous pouvez spécifier la page pour modifier le type d'impression et la source du papier. Sous-menu Fonction Estampage numéro de distribution L'impression est réalisée avec un numéro de copie joint au document imprimé. Combinaison Vous pouvez imprimer plusieurs pages de document sur une seule page. Vous pouvez spécifier les détails dans Détails de combinaison. Pliage Plie les copies. (Pliage en Z, Pliage en 2, Pliage en 3 et Agrafage central et pliage) Décalage d'image Régler en cas de déplacement de l'image à imprimer. Configuration du pilote PS (Windows) 7 IC-202 (Phase 2) 7-7 Onglet PostScript Onglet Superposition Sous-menu Fonction Sortie Vous pouvez décider si l'impression est réalisée en tant que fichier d'imprimante ou EPS. Options filigrane En cas d'activation, un filigrane est imprimé sur l'original. Compression des travaux En tant que méthode de compression du travail d'impression, vous avez le choix entre "LZW" et "Flate". Compression des bitmaps En tant que méthode de compression de bitmap, vous avez le choix entre "RLE", "JPEG" et "LZW". PS marqué En cas d'activation, PS Marqué est activé. Protocole de sortie Spécifie le protocole d'envoi à l'imprimante. Niveau Gamma Réglage destiné à corriger la valeur gamma de l'imprimante. Imprimer les informations d'erreurs PostScript En cas d'erreur d'impression des informations sur l'erreur sont imprimées. Utiliser PostScript Pass-through Permet aux applications d'imprimer directement sans recourir à un pilote d'imprimante. Effacer mémoire par page Réglage destiné à effacer la mémoire de l'imprimante pour chaque page. Compatibilité Sélectionnez le type de sortie PostScript. Activer Lissage bitmap Lisse les points du bitmap. Sous-menu Fonction Superposition Créer une superposition. 7 Configuration du pilote PS (Windows) 7-8 IC-202 (Phase 2) Onglet Qualité Onglet Filigrane Onglet Option 2 Remarque Pour afficher l'onglet Option, sélectionnez "Démarrer" – "Imprimantes et télécopieurs" (ou "Démarrer" – "Paramètres" – "Imprimantes"), faites un clic droit sur l'icône de l'imprimante installée et cliquez ensuite sur "Propriétés". Sous-menu Fonction Rotation de l'image Définit les données d'impression par unités de 90 degrés dans le sens contraire des aiguilles d'une montre. Effets En cas d'activation, les données d'impression sont imprimées sous forme d'image miroir ou d'image en négatif. Image Règle la luminosité et le contraste de l'image. Lissage Impression lisse des parties curvilignes des caractères et des images. Conversion monochromatique La conversion monochrome d'une image, spécifiez la méthode de conversion en cas de conversion par l'intermédiaire du pilote d'imprimante ou par le copieur. Economie Toner Réduisez la consommation de toner tout en maintenant la densité d'impression basse. Brouillon Une impression grossière est effectuée pour tous les éléments autre que les caractères. Sous-menu Fonction Filigrane Imprime un filigrane (tampon de texte) sur la page imprimée. Sous-menu Fonction Option Spécifie les options installées sur cet appareil. Informations optionnelles Entrez le nom de l'imprimante ou son adresse IP pour obtenir des informations supplémentaires. Mise à l'échelle pour les applications Le taux d'agrandissement/réduction défini au sein de l'application est verrouillé de la même manière que pour le pilote d'imprimante. Configuration du pilote PS (Windows) 7 IC-202 (Phase 2) 7-9 7.2 Spécifier les paramètres de l'onglet Configuration Adapter l'impression au format papier Vous pouvez agrandir ou réduire des documents créés lors de l'impression pour les faire correspondre au format de sortie papier. 1 Cliquez sur l'onglet Configuration. 2 A partir des zones de liste déroulante "Format original" et "Format de sortie", sélectionnez les paramètres voulus. 2 Remarque Si "Format original" et "Format de sortie" diffèrent, la "Mise en page" est automatiquement réglée sur "Ajuster" et Mise à l'échelle est affiché. 7 Configuration du pilote PS (Windows) 7-10 IC-202 (Phase 2) Sélectionner une source papier Vous pouvez modifier la source du papier ou définir le type de papier comme suit. 1 Cliquez sur l'onglet Configuration. 2 Sélectionnez une source de papier à utiliser avec "Source papier". – Pour définir le type de papier pour la Source papier, procédez à l'étape suivante. 3 Cliquez sur [Configuration du type de papier]. Configuration du pilote PS (Windows) 7 IC-202 (Phase 2) 7-11 4 Sélectionnez une source de papier à modifier et cliquez sur [Modifier] et définissez le type de papier. 7 Configuration du pilote PS (Windows) 7-12 IC-202 (Phase 2) Utiliser les transparents Si vous imprimez sur du papier transparent, vous pouvez choisir d'insérer du papier vierge pour l'impression. 1 Cliquez sur l'onglet Configuration. 2 Réglez la "Source papier" sur "Passe-copie". – "Intercalaire sur transparent" ne peut pas être défini si "Source papier" est réglé sur "Auto". Assurez-vous de bien régler sur "Passe-copie". 3 Cliquez sur [Configuration du type de papier] et sélectionnez "Passe-copie". 4 Cliquez sur [Modifier]. Configuration du pilote PS (Windows) 7 IC-202 (Phase 2) 7-13 5 Sélectionnez "Transparent". 6 Cliquez sur [OK] pour réafficher "Configuration du type de papier". Sélectionnez la case à cocher "Intercalaire sur transparent" et cliquez sur [Paramètres]. 7 Configuration du pilote PS (Windows) 7-14 IC-202 (Phase 2) 7 Sélectionnez un magasin contenant le papier à insérer. 8 Cliquez sur [OK] et fermez la boîte de dialogue "Configuration du type de papier". Configuration du pilote PS (Windows) 7 IC-202 (Phase 2) 7-15 Paramètres format personnalisé Vous pouvez spécifier et enregistrer à l'avance un format personnalisé suivant la procédure ci-après. 1 Cliquez sur [Formats perso.]. La boîte de dialogue Paramètres de format personnalisé apparaît. 2 Spécifiez les paramètres des éléments suivants : – Nom : Tapez le nom à enregistrer et cliquez ensuite sur [Enregistrer] pour enregistrer le format irrégulier défini. – Format : Spécifiez la largeur et la longueur du format personnalisé en fonction des unités de mesure sélectionnées. 3 Cliquez sur [OK]. 7 Configuration du pilote PS (Windows) 7-16 IC-202 (Phase 2) Impression Recto-verso/Livret Vous pouvez imprimer un document en mode Recto-verso ou Livret. Cette fonction est pratique pour relier un document de plusieurs pages. 1 Cliquez sur l'onglet Configuration. 2 Sélectionnez "Recto/verso" ou "Livret" dans "Type d'impression". 2 Remarque Vous pouvez sélectionner "Reliure à gauche", "Reliure en haut (recto/verso uniquement)" ou "Reliure à droite" dans "Position de reliure". Configuration du pilote PS (Windows) 7 IC-202 (Phase 2) 7-17 Agrafage Des documents de plusieurs pages sont agrafés. 1 Cliquez sur l'onglet Configuration. 2 Sélectionnez la case à cocher "Agrafer". 2 Remarque Vous pouvez sélectionner "Reliure à gauche", "Reliure en haut (recto/verso uniquement)" ou "Reliure à droite" dans "Position de reliure". L'option "Agrafer" n'est disponible que si le module de finition (excepté SF-601) est installé. Vous pouvez agrafer jusqu'à 100 feuilles de papier ordinaire au format A4 ou inférieur avec le module FS-505 et 50 feuilles avec le module FS-504 ou 602. 7 Configuration du pilote PS (Windows) 7-18 IC-202 (Phase 2) Perforation Perfore des trous sur le document imprimé. 1 Cliquez sur l'onglet Configuration. 2 Sélectionnez la case à cocher "Perforer". 2 Remarque Vous pouvez sélectionner "Reliure à gauche", "Reliure en haut" ou "Reliure à droite" dans "Position de reliure". Pour utiliser la fonction "Perforer", le module de finition (à l'exception du SF-601) et le kit de perforation ou de pliage en Z doivent être installés. Configuration du pilote PS (Windows) 7 IC-202 (Phase 2) 7-19 Impression en mode Disposition Un document de plusieurs pages peut être imprimé sur une feuille de papier. Cette fonction est pratique pour économiser le nombre de feuilles à imprimer. 1 Cliquez sur l'onglet Configuration. 2 Cliquez sur [Disposition] dans "Mise en page". 3 Sélectionnez le nombre de pages à imprimer sur une feuille dans la liste déroulante "Combinaison". – Pour modifier ou ajouter la "Position" ou la "Bordure", sélectionnez le paramètre voulu dans chacune des zones de liste déroulante. 4 Cliquez sur [Avancées] pour afficher la boîte de dialogue "Fonctions avancées" et régler les différents points suivants de la boîte. – Type de disposition Spécifiez la disposition de la page. – Echelle bordures (case à cocher) Cochez cette case pour réduire aussi la ligne de bordure. – Format/Orientation différent Spécifie la méthode de sortie en cas de différences de format et d'orientation du papier. 7 Configuration du pilote PS (Windows) 7-20 IC-202 (Phase 2) 5 Une fois les réglages terminés, cliquez sur [OK]. Configuration du pilote PS (Windows) 7 IC-202 (Phase 2) 7-21 Impression de livret L'impression d'un livret est réalisée en pliant les pages imprimées en deux. 1 Cliquez sur l'onglet Configuration. 2 Cliquez sur [Livret] dans "Mise en page". – "Gouttière" vous permet de laisser une zone blanche uniforme dans l'unité de points sur les 2 pages étalées après avoir été pliées. La plage admissible va de 0 à 150. – "Glissement" vous permet d'étaler ou de définir l'intervalle entre les pages au centre du papier dans l'unité de points pour la feuille intérieure quand elle est pliée. La plage de réglage oscille entre 0 et 20. – "Grouper par" sert à sélectionner un nombre de pages d'une unité formant un livret. Fonction pratique pour livrets comprenant un grand nombre de feuilles. 3 Cliquez sur [Avancées] pour afficher la boîte de dialogue "Fonctions avancées" et régler les points suivants dans la boîte. – Remplir liasses Si une autre valeur que "Standard" ou "4" est réglée pour "Grouper par" et qu'il y a des pages partielles, de nombreuses pages vierges peuvent être générées en fonction du nombre de pages sorties. En gardant la case à cocher "Remplir liasses" sur Non, "Grouper par" est réglée sur "4" uniquement pour les pages partielles de manière à éviter les pages vierges inutiles. – Format/Orientation différent Spécifie la méthode de sortie en cas de différences de format et d'orientation du papier. 4 Une fois le réglage terminé, cliquez sur [OK]. 7 Configuration du pilote PS (Windows) 7-22 IC-202 (Phase 2) Impression en mode Zoom Vous pouvez imprimer avec des taux d'agrandissement variables sans changer le format de sortie. 1 Cliquez sur l'onglet Configuration. 2 Cliquez sur [%Échelle] dans "Mise en page". 3 Régler le "Taux" en chiffres dans "%". La plage admissible va de 25 à 400. Configuration du pilote PS (Windows) 7 IC-202 (Phase 2) 7-23 Imprimer une affiche L'image est agrandie et imprimée sur plusieurs feuilles. 1 Cliquez sur l'onglet Configuration. 2 Cliquez sur [Affiche] dans "Mise en page". 3 Sélectionnez le "Style poster" voulu dans la zone de liste déroulante. – Pour changer la "Position", choisissez une position dans la zone de liste déroulante "Position". 4 Si vous sélectionnez "Personnalisé" dans "Style poster", réglez le "taux" dans "Echelle (%)". La plage admissible va de 101 à 400. 5 Cliquez sur [Avancées] pour afficher la boîte de dialogue "Fonctions avancées" et réglez les points suivants. – Superposition Réglez la quantité de recouvrement à la limite d'une page divisée. La plage admissible va de 0 à 150. 6 Une fois les réglages terminés, cliquez sur [OK]. 7 Configuration du pilote PS (Windows) 7-24 IC-202 (Phase 2) Changer le papier L'image est imprimée sans être agrandie ni réduite même si le format de sortie est différent. 1 Cliquez sur l'onglet Configuration. 2 Cliquez sur [Log/Phys] dans "Mise en page". 3 Sélectionnez un format de sortie dans "Format de sortie". – Pour modifier ou ajouter une "Bordure" ou une "Position", choisissez dans chaque zone de liste déroulante correspondante. Configuration du pilote PS (Windows) 7 IC-202 (Phase 2) 7-25 Sélectionner le type de sortie Non seulement, vous pouvez imprimer directement, mais vous pouvez aussi sélectionner "Impression sécurisée", qui nécessite un mot de passe pour imprimer ou "Enreg. dans boîte utilisateur", qui enregistre les documents dans le dossier des documents. 0 "Impression sécurisée" et "Enr. dns boîte utilis. (et imprim.)" doivent être réglés au préalable sur "Disque dur imprimante" avec l'onglet Option. 1 Cliquez sur l'onglet Configuration. 2 A partir de la zone de liste déroulante "Type de sortie", sélectionnez la méthode de sortie. – Impression : Imprime immédiatement. – Impression sécurisée : Enregistre le document à imprimer dans la boîte des documents classés de cet appareil. Pour imprimer, il vous est demandé de saisir l'ID utilisateur et le mot de passe sur le panneau de contrôle de cet appareil. Sélectionnez quand vous imprimez des documents très confidentiels. (jusqu'à 100 documents) – Enreg. dans boîte utilisateur : Enregistre le document à imprimer dans une boîte de cette machine. – Enr. dns boîte utilis. imprim. : Enregistre simultanément le document dans une boîte. – Attente avec épreuve : après impression d'un exemplaire du document, la machine s'arrête provisoirement d'imprimer. Sélectionnez pour éviter de mal imprimer les travaux d'impression volumineux. 7 Configuration du pilote PS (Windows) 7-26 IC-202 (Phase 2) Impression sécurisée % Si "Impression sécurisée" était sélectionné, saisissez l'ID et le mot de passe d'impression sécurisée dans la boîte de dialogue qui apparaît. Pour imprimer le document, appuyez sur [Boîte ut. système] puis sur [Boîte RX sécurisé] en mode Boîte de cette machine. Après avoir saisi l'ID et le mot de passe utilisateur, le document est accessible et peut être imprimé. 2 Remarque Pour de plus amples détails sur les fonctions de boîte de cet appareil, consultez le manuel utilisateur 750/600 [Opérations de boîte]. Configuration du pilote PS (Windows) 7 IC-202 (Phase 2) 7-27 Enregistrer dans boîte utilisateur % Quand "Enreg. dans boîte utilisateur" ou "Enr. dns boîte utilis, imprim." est sélectionné, spécifiez le nom de fichier et le numéro de boîte dans la boîte de dialogue qui apparaît pour saisir le nom de fichier et le numéro de la boîte utilisateur. 2 Remarque Pour de plus amples détails sur les fonctions de boîte de cet appareil, consultez le manuel utilisateur 750/600 [Opérations de boîte]. 7 Configuration du pilote PS (Windows) 7-28 IC-202 (Phase 2) Attente avec épreuve % Lors de l'envoi d'une tâche d'impression, cet appareil s'arrête provisoirement d'imprimer après avoir imprimé un exemplaire du document. Le reste de la tâche d'impression est stocké dans l'appareil en tant que tâche d'impression. Lors de l'impression de plusieurs copies, vous pouvez imprimer la partie restante de la tâche d'impression après avoir vérifié les résultats d 'impression. Pour imprimer, affichez la liste des Tâches en attente de l'écran Liste Tâches sur le panneau de contrôle de cet appareil et appuyez sur [Libérer Tâch Att.]. Configuration du pilote PS (Windows) 7 IC-202 (Phase 2) 7-29 Spécifier les paramètres d'authentification Si des paramètres d'authentification ont été spécifiés sur cet appareil, il faut saisir un nom d'utilisateur. 1 Cliquez sur l'onglet Configuration. 2 Cliquez sur [Authentification/Suivi de Volume E.K.C.]. 3 Sélectionnez "Authentification" et sélectionnez ensuite "Utilisateur destinataire". 4 Tapez le nom d'utilisateur et le mot de passe. 7 Configuration du pilote PS (Windows) 7-30 IC-202 (Phase 2) 2 Remarque Si cet appareil a été réglé pour autoriser les utilisateurs publics, l'appareil peut être utilisé sans nom d'utilisateur ni mot de passe. Pour les paramètres d'authentification, consultez l'administrateur de cet appareil. Configuration du pilote PS (Windows) 7 IC-202 (Phase 2) 7-31 Spécifier les paramètres de Suivi de Volume (E.K.C.) Si des paramètres de suivi de volume ont été spécifiés sur cet appareil, vous devez saisir un mot de passe de service pour imprimer une travail. 1 Cliquez sur l'onglet Configuration. 2 Cliquez sur [Authentification/Suivi de Volume E.K.C.]. 3 Sélectionnez "Suivi de Volume (E.K.C)" et tapez le nom et le mot de passe du service. 7 Configuration du pilote PS (Windows) 7-32 IC-202 (Phase 2) 7.3 Spécifier les paramètres de l'onglet Paramétrage par page Imprimer des documents avec page de couverture et de dos 1 Cliquez sur l'onglet Paramétrage par page. 2 Cochez les cases "Couverture" et "Dos". Pour imprimer sur la page de couverture et de dos, sélectionnez "Imprimé". Pour n'ajouter qu'une page vierge, sélectionnez "Vierge". 3 Sélectionnez une source de papier dont le papier est défini pour être utilisé comme "Couverture" ou "Dos". Configuration du pilote PS (Windows) 7 IC-202 (Phase 2) 7-33 Impression d'une couverture avec bac d'insertion Une page de couverture peut être jointe au document imprimé. Définissez le papier épais ou tout autre type de papier pour le bac d'insertion. Le papier chargé dans l'introducteur de papes de couverture est joint au document imprimé comme page de couverture. 1 Cliquez sur l'onglet Paramétrage par page. 2 Cochez les cases à cocher "Couv. avc bac ins." et "Dos avc bac ins." dans "Couvertures avec bac d'insertion". Sélectionnez une source de papier correspondant au papier utilisé comme page de couverture ou page de dos. 2 Remarque Une couverture avec bac d'insertion ne peut être jointe que si le bac d'insertion (PI-501) est installé en option. 7 Configuration du pilote PS (Windows) 7-34 IC-202 (Phase 2) Impression de chapitres En mode d'impression Recto-verso/Livret, certaines pages peuvent toujours sortir face imprimée vers le haut. Si une page spécifique devient le côté verso en mode d'impression Recto-verso, cette page est décalée vers le recto de la feuille suivante et imprimée. 1 Cliquez sur l'onglet Paramétrage par page. 2 Cochez la case "Chapitre". 3 Indiquez les pages à sortir face imprimée vers le haut dans la zone de texte "Numéro de page". Configuration du pilote PS (Windows) 7 IC-202 (Phase 2) 7-35 Imprimer plusieurs pages La fonction "Paramétrage par page" s'avère bien pratique si vous voulez changer de magasin papier pendant une tâche d'impression quand vous imprimer plusieurs pages. Paramétrage par page Vous pouvez spécifier le type d'impression et le magasin papier pour chaque page. 1 Cliquez sur l'onglet Paramétrage par page. 2 Sélectionnez la case à cocher "Paramétrage par page". 3 Cliquez sur [Ajouter] et spécifiez le numéro de page, le type d'impression et la source papier dans la boîte de dialogue qui apparaît. 4 Cochez la case à cocher "Utilisation de papier à onglet" comme demandé et choisissez d'utiliser le papier à onglet pour le papier inséré. 2 Remarque Voir "Utilisation de papier à onglet" à la page 7-38 pour de plus amples informations sur la configuration de l'Utilisation de papier à onglet. Pour une liste existante, cliquez sur [Modifier] pour modifier les paramètres de page sélectionnés ou cliquez sur [Effacer] pour les supprimer. 7 Configuration du pilote PS (Windows) 7-36 IC-202 (Phase 2) Enregistrer/Charger la configuration Vous pouvez enregistrer la configuration comme fichier de définition (xml) et charger le fichier de définition. Enregistrer la configuration 1 Cliquez sur l'onglet Paramétrage par page. 2 Sélectionnez la case à cocher "Paramétrage par page". 3 Suivez la procédure de Paramétrage par page. 4 Cliquez sur [Enregistrer sous]. 5 Tapez le nom du fichier et enregistrez le fichier. Configuration du pilote PS (Windows) 7 IC-202 (Phase 2) 7-37 Charger la configuration 1 Cliquez sur l'onglet Paramétrage par page. 2 Sélectionnez la case à cocher "Paramétrage par page". 3 Cliquez sur [Charger]. 4 Le fichier de définition est chargé. 7 Configuration du pilote PS (Windows) 7-38 IC-202 (Phase 2) Utilisation de papier à onglet Le papier à onglet disponible dans le commerce peut être utilisé par la fonction Paramétrage par page. 1 Cliquez sur l'onglet Paramétrage par page. 2 Sélectionnez la case à cocher "Paramétrage par page". 3 Définissez le paramétrage par page ou chargez le fichier de définition. – Voir "Charger la configuration" à la page 7-37 pour plus d'informations sur le chargement du fichier de définition. 4 Cliquez sur [Config. papier à onglet]. La boîte de dialogue de configuration du papier à onglet apparaît. Configuration du pilote PS (Windows) 7 IC-202 (Phase 2) 7-39 5 Cliquez sur [,] dans le champ "Format" de la boîte "Papier" et sélectionnez un format à utiliser dans la liste affichée. – La valeur par défaut est A4 à onglet. 6 Cliquez sur [,] dans le champ "Nombre d'onglets" de la boîte "Papier". Une liste apparaît. Sélectionnez sur la liste un nombre d'onglets à utiliser. – Vous pouvez directement saisir le nombre dans la boîte "Nombre d'onglets". – La valeur par défaut est 5. – Vous pouvez définir une valeur numérique comprise entre 2 et 15. 7 Définissez le "réglage position" nécessaire en spécifiant les champs "Espace avant onglets", "Espace après onglet", "Espace entre onglets" ou "Position du texte". – La plage de valeur numériques définissables varie en fonction des valeurs numériques dans "Nombre d'onglets". 8 Cliquez sur [OK] et fermez la boîte de dialogue Configuration du papier à onglet. Retournez à l'écran "Paramétrage par page". 9 Cliquez sur [Ajouter]. La boîte de dialogue Paramétrage par page apparaît. 7 Configuration du pilote PS (Windows) 7-40 IC-202 (Phase 2) 10 Sélectionnez "Numéro de page", "Type d'impression" ou "Source papier" selon nécessité. 11 Sélectionnez la case à cocher "Utilisation du papier à onglet". – Cette étape n'est pas nécessaire si le texte de l'onglet ne doit pas être imprimé. Dans un cas pareil, passez à l'étape 17. 12 Entrez votre texte dans la boîte "Texte sur onglet". – Vous pouvez saisir jusqu'à 64 caractères. 13 Cliquez sur [Détails]. – La touche "Détails" ne peut pas être utilisée si vous ne saisissez rien dans la boîte "Texte sur onglet". La boîte de dialogue Détails du texte sur onglet apparaît. Configuration du pilote PS (Windows) 7 IC-202 (Phase 2) 7-41 14 Définissez les paramètres "texte sur onglet"-"Orientation", "Position" et "Paramétrage police"-"Nom de police", "Style" ou "Format" selon nécessité. 15 Cliquez sur [OK] et fermez la boîte de dialogue Détails du texte sur onglet. La boîte de dialogue Paramétrage par page réapparaît. 16 Pour spécifier l'onglet pour lequel saisir le "Texte sur onglet", cliquez sur [,] du champ "Position" et sélectionnez un onglet à spécifier. – La valeur par défaut est Continuer page précédente. 17 Cliquez sur [OK] et fermez la boîte de dialogue Paramétrage par page. L'onglet "Paramétrage par page" de la fenêtre "Propriétés" réapparaît. Le paramètre figure dans la zone de liste. 18 Pour utiliser un autre papier à onglet, exécuter les étapes 9 à 16. – Si vous utilisez du papier autre que le papier à onglet, voir Paramétrage par page. 19 Confirmez le contenu de la liste. 20 Cliquez sur [OK] et fermez la fenêtre "Propriété". – Vous pouvez ajouter jusqu'à 30 paramètres à chaque liste. 7 Configuration du pilote PS (Windows) 7-42 IC-202 (Phase 2) 7.4 Spécifier les paramètres de l'onglet Fonctions spéciales Imprimer le numéro du document Chaque document est numéroté lors de l'impression. 1 Cliquez sur l'onglet Fonctions spéciales. 2 Sélectionnez la case à cocher "Estampage numéro de distribution". 3 Réglez chaque point comme suit. – Pages à imprimer Sélectionnez soit "Toutes les pages" ou "1re page uniquement" comme page à imprimer avec un numéro. – Numéro de départ Définissez le chiffre du numéro de départ. 2 Remarque "Estampage numéro de distribution" ne peut s'utiliser que si "Tri" a été réglé sur l'onglet "Configuration". Le disque dur imprimante doit être installé au préalable avec l'onglet Option pour l'"Estampage numéro de distribution". Configuration du pilote PS (Windows) 7 IC-202 (Phase 2) 7-43 Imprimer 2 pages sur du papier deux fois plus grand Un document de 2 pages peut être imprimé sur une feuille de papier. Dans ce cas, le format du papier de sortie est deux fois plus grand que le format original. Par exemple, quand le "Papier de sortie" a été réglé sur A4, le format du papier de sortie est A3. 1 Cliquez sur l'onglet Fonctions spéciales. 2 Sélectionnez la case à cocher "Combinaison (pas de réduction)". 3 Sélectionnez les points suivants. – 2 en 1 2 pages sont imprimées sur une seule feuille de papier. – Répétition 2 en 1 Une page et sa copie sont imprimées sur une feuille de papier. 7 Configuration du pilote PS (Windows) 7-44 IC-202 (Phase 2) Définir le pliage Le papier est plié est sorti dans cet état. 1 Cliquez sur l'onglet Fonctions spéciales. 2 Cochez la case à cocher "Pliage". 3 Sélectionnez les points voulus. Configuration du pilote PS (Windows) 7 IC-202 (Phase 2) 7-45 Réglage de la position d'impression (Décalage d'image) La position d'impression sur le papier de sortie peut être réglée comme suit. 1 Cliquez sur l'onglet Fonctions spéciales. 2 Sélectionnez la case "Décalage d'image". 3 Cliquez sur [Paramètres]. 4 Réglez le décalage vers le haut, vers le bas, vers la droite et vers la gauche côtés recto et verso et réglez le décalage de gouttière par unités de "0,1mmm". 2 Remarque La fonction "Paramètres à utiliser" ne fonctionne pas. Seul un réglage côté pilote d'imprimante est possible. Sélectionnez la case "Réglage auto verso". Le verso peut être réglé de la même manière que le côté recto de la feuille. 7 Configuration du pilote PS (Windows) 7-46 IC-202 (Phase 2) 7.5 Spécifier les paramètres de l'onglet PostScript Impression d'un travail Définir s'il faut sortir ce travail vers l'imprimante ou sous forme de fichier PostScript Encapsulé. 1 Cliquez sur l'onglet PostScript. 2 Sélectionnez "Vers l'imprimante" ou "PostScript encapsul." dans Sortie. 2 Remarque Si vous sélectionnez "PostScript encapsul.", vous devez définir le nom de fichier. Cliquez sur et définissez un nom de fichier. Si vous ne définissez pas le nom de fichier ici, il vous sera demandé de saisir un nom de fichier à chaque fois que vous imprimerez un document. Configuration du pilote PS (Windows) 7 IC-202 (Phase 2) 7-47 Compression d'un travail Définir s'il faut comprimer ou non le travail comme suit. Les données d'impression sont comprimées afin d'améliorer la vitesse d'impression. 1 Cliquez sur l'onglet PostScript. 2 Sélectionnez "LZW" ou "Flate" dans la zone de liste déroulante "Compression des travaux" sous Paramètres. – Si vous sélectionnez "Flate", vous pourrez sélectionner le type de compression Flate dans la zone de liste déroulante "Compression Flate". Compression des bitmaps Définir s'il faut ou non utiliser la compression des bitmaps. L'utilisation de cette fonction pour l'impression de données d'image améliore la vitesse d'impression. 1 Cliquez sur l'onglet PostScript. 2 Sélectionnez "RLE", "LZW" ou "JPEG" dans la zone de liste déroulante "Compression des bitmaps" sous Paramètres. – Si vous sélectionnez "JPEG", vous pourrez sélectionner le type de compression JPEG dans la zone de liste déroulante "JPEG". Utiliser le mode PS marqué Définir s'il faut utiliser ou non le mode PS marqué. 1 Cliquez sur l'onglet PostScript. 2 Si vous utilisez le mode PS marqué, cochez la case "PS marqué" sous Paramètres. Définir le protocole de sortie Définir le protocole de sortie comme suit. 1 Cliquez sur l'onglet PostScript. 2 Sélectionnez "Binaire pur" ou "ASCII" dans la zone de liste déroulante "Protocole de sortie" sous Paramètres. 7 Configuration du pilote PS (Windows) 7-48 IC-202 (Phase 2) Régler la valeur gamma Définir la valeur de correction gamma comme suit. 1 Cliquez sur l'onglet PostScript. 2 Définir la valeur de correction gamma à partir de la zone de liste déroulante "Niveau Gamma" sous Paramètres. – La plage admissible va de 0,000 à 2,000. Configuration du pilote PS (Windows) 7 IC-202 (Phase 2) 7-49 Configurer les options Définir les détails de PostScript comme suit. 1 Cliquez sur l'onglet PostScript. 2 Cliquez sur [Options PostScript]. 3 Définir chaque point comme souhaité. – Imprimer les informations d'erreurs PostScript. En cochant cette case, les informations d'erreur sont imprimées dès qu'une erreur d'imprimante survient. – Utiliser PostScript Pass-through Lorsque cette case est cochée, une application gérant le PostScript (applications Adobe, Quark Xpress, etc.) prépare les données graphiques de façon à conserver la qualité des dessins d'origine. Toutefois, il est impossible d'utiliser la fonction pour le traitement d'images (Disposition, Livret, etc.). Lorsque la case est décochée, les données graphiques sont préparées côté pilote d'imprimante. Toutefois, si les données sont imprimées avec une application gérant le PostScript, la qualité des dessins risque d'en être altérée. 7 Configuration du pilote PS (Windows) 7-50 IC-202 (Phase 2) 2 Remarque Voir les pages suivantes pour de plus amples informations sur les paramètres Superposition et Filigrane. Effacer mémoire par page Si vous cochez cette case, la mémoire d'imprimante de chaque page sera effacée. Compatibilité Sélectionnez "Optimisation pour vitesse" et d'autres types de sortie PostScript dans la zone de liste déroulante. Lissage bitmap Cochez cette case pour les lisser les points des bitmaps. Sous-menu Description Superposition "Spécifier les paramètres de l'onglet Superposition" à la page 7-51 Filigranes "Spécifier les paramètres de l'onglet Filigrane" à la page 7-61 Configuration du pilote PS (Windows) 7 IC-202 (Phase 2) 7-51 7.6 Spécifier les paramètres de l'onglet Superposition Créer Superposition Pour utiliser Superposition, les données destinées à la superposition doivent être enregistrées au préalable. Pour enregistrer la Superposition, préparez la Superposition pour le document à enregistrer dans "Créer superposition". 1 Préparez les données de superposition avec le logiciel d'application requis. 2 Sélectionnez "Imprimer" dans le menu "Fichier". 3 Sélectionnez "GENERIC 75/60 BW-1 PS(V)" dans "Sélectionner imprimante" et cliquez sur [Préférences]. 4 Cliquez sur l'onglet Superposition. 5 Cliquez sur [Créer superposition]. La boîte de dialogue "Créer superposition" apparaît. 7 Configuration du pilote PS (Windows) 7-52 IC-202 (Phase 2) 6 Tapez le "Nom du fichier". 7 Cliquez sur [Enregistrer]. – Après avoir cliqué sur [Enregistrer], vous devez attendre que la création de la superposition soit terminée. La touche "Créer superposition" se transforme en "Annuler création de superposition". Pour annuler la création de superposition, cliquez sur [Annuler création de superposition]. 8 Confirmez le nom du fichier et cliquez sur [OK]. La boîte de dialogue "Imprimer" réapparaît. 9 Cliquez sur [OK]. L'impression n'a pas lieu et la superposition est enregistrée. L'extension devient "EPS". Configuration du pilote PS (Windows) 7 IC-202 (Phase 2) 7-53 Ajouter Superposition Vous pouvez ajouter des fichiers de superposition à la liste selon la procédure suivante : 1 Préparez les données de superposition avec le logiciel d'application voulu. 2 Sélectionnez "Imprimer" dans le menu "Fichier". 3 Sélectionnez "GENERIC 75/60 BW-1 PS(V)" dans "Sélectionner imprimante" et cliquez sur [Préférences]. 4 Cliquez sur l'onglet Superposition. 5 Cliquez sur [Ajouter superposition]. La boîte de dialogue "Charger fichier pour superposition" apparaît. 6 Sélectionnez un fichier approprié et cliquez sur [Ouvrir]. 7 Configuration du pilote PS (Windows) 7-54 IC-202 (Phase 2) – Le nom de fichier sélectionné apparaît sur la liste dans Superposition. Effacer Superposition Supprimez un fichier de la liste Superposition comme suit. 0 Si vous supprimez un fichier, il n'est pas seulement supprimé de la liste mais le fichier lui-même sera supprimé. 1 Préparez les données pour la superposition avec le logiciel d'application voulu. 2 Sélectionnez "Imprimer" dans le menu "Fichier". 3 Sélectionnez "GENERIC 75/60 BW-1 PS(V)" comme "Imprimante sélectionné" et cliquez sur [Préférences]. 4 Cliquez sur l'onglet Superposition. 5 Sélectionnez un nom de fichier à supprimer et cliquez sur [Supprimer superposition]. Configuration du pilote PS (Windows) 7 IC-202 (Phase 2) 7-55 7.7 Spécifier les paramètres de l'onglet Qualité Rotation de l'image Faites pivoter l'image. Vous pouvez sélectionner 0°, 90°, 180° ou 270° (dans le sens contraire des aiguilles d'une montre). 1 Cliquez sur l'onglet Qualité. 2 Sélectionnez un angle en cochant un bouton radio dans "Rotation de l'image". 7 Configuration du pilote PS (Windows) 7-56 IC-202 (Phase 2) Imprimer les données en image miroir ou en image négative Vous pouvez imprimer les données telles que les regardez dans un miroir ou le noir et le blanc des données peuvent être inversés selon la procédure cidessous. 1 Cliquez sur l'onglet Qualité. 2 Sélectionnez la case à cocher "Image miroir" ou "Image négative" dans "Effets". – Image miroir L'image est imprimée comme une image réfléchie. – Image négative Le noir et le blanc de l'image sont inversés lors des impressions. Configuration du pilote PS (Windows) 7 IC-202 (Phase 2) 7-57 Ajuster la luminosité et le contraste des graphiques Vous pouvez ajuster la luminosité et le contraste des graphiques comme suit. 1 Cliquez sur l'onglet Qualité. 2 Le curseur supérieur dans "Image" indique la luminosité et le curseur inférieur le contraste. – Luminosité La luminosité augmente au fur et à mesure que le curseur approche des 100% et diminue plus il s'approche de 0%. – Contraste Le contraste augmente au fur et à mesure que le curseur approche des 100% et diminue plus il s'approche de 0%. 7 Configuration du pilote PS (Windows) 7-58 IC-202 (Phase 2) Lissage Les sections curvilignes des caractères et des graphiques peuvent être imprimées de manière lissée. 1 Cliquez sur l'onglet Qualité. 2 Sélectionnez un type dans la zone de liste déroulante à côté de "Type". – Type 1 Convient à l'impression des lignes obliques des caractères et des graphiques standard. – Type 2 Convient à l'impression des sections curvilignes des caractères standard. – Type 3 Convient à l'impression des sections curvilignes des caractères ornementaux et des lignes fines. – Non Aucune opération de lissage n'est effectuée. Configuration du pilote PS (Windows) 7 IC-202 (Phase 2) 7-59 Conversion monochromatique Définir s'il faut convertir l'image couleur en image monochrome sur le pilote ou sur l'imprimante. 1 Cliquez sur l'onglet Qualité. 2 Sélectionnez soit "Par le pilote" ou "Par l'imprimante" sous "Conversion monochromatique". 7 Configuration du pilote PS (Windows) 7-60 IC-202 (Phase 2) Economie Toner, Brouillon Réglez cette fonction pour économiser du toner ou imprimer plus clair. 1 Cliquez sur l'onglet Qualité. 2 Réglez en fonction de l'objet. – Pour réduire la consommation de toner Sélectionnez la case à cocher "Economie Toner". – Pour imprimer plus clair Sélectionnez la case à cocher "Brouillon". Configuration du pilote PS (Windows) 7 IC-202 (Phase 2) 7-61 7.8 Spécifier les paramètres de l'onglet Filigrane Imprimer un filigrane Vous pouvez imprimer un texte donné en arrière-plan en tant que filigrane. 1 Cliquez sur l'onglet Filigrane. 2 A partir de la zone de liste déroulante, sélectionnez le filigrane que vous voulez imprimer. – Vous pouvez enregistrer des filigranes. Voir "Modifier un filigrane" à la page 7-62 pour de plus amples informations. 3 Spécifiez les paramètres des éléments suivants : – 1re page uniquement : cochez cette case pour n'imprimer que la première page. – Texte transparent : cochez cette case pour imprimer des filigranes transparents sur le document. – Texte contour: cochez cette case pour n'imprimer que les contours des caractères. 2 Remarque Si "Livret" était sélectionné sur l'onglet "Configuration", le filigrane n'est pas imprimé. 7 Configuration du pilote PS (Windows) 7-62 IC-202 (Phase 2) Modifier un filigrane Vous pouvez modifier les polices et la position du filigrane et vous pouvez en enregistrer un nouveau. 1 Cliquez sur l'onglet Filigrane. 2 Pour créer un filigrane, cliquez sur [Ajouter]. – En cas de nouvelle création Réglez la zone de liste déroulante dans "Filigrane" sur "Aucun" et tapez les caractères à imprimer dans le champ de "Texte de filigrane" dans "Filigrane". – En cas de modification Sélectionnez les caractères à modifier dans la zone de liste déroulante dans "Filigrane". 3 Spécifiez les paramètres des éléments suivants : – Texte: affiche les caractères du filigrane – Échelle de gris : permet de régler les niveaux de gris des caractères à l'aide du curseur. – Taille: permet de régler la taille à l'aide du curseur. – Angle: permet de régler l'angle de rotation des caractères à l'aide du curseur. – Polices : Cliquez sur [Fonts] et réglez la police, le style de police et d'autres éléments Configuration du pilote PS (Windows) 7 IC-202 (Phase 2) 7-63 – Position: faites glisser la position d'impression des caractères directement depuis l'écran d'aperçu ou définissez la position à l'aide des curseurs. – Centrer filigrane : placez les caractères au centre de la feuille. 7 Configuration du pilote PS (Windows) 7-64 IC-202 (Phase 2) 7.9 Spécifier les paramètres de l'onglet Police Spécifier les paramètres Vous pouvez remplacer les polices TrueType utilisées dans Windows par les polices d'imprimante de cet appareil. 0 L'utilisation des polices d'imprimante va réduire le temps d'impression, mais il risque d'y avoir une différence entre l'affichage à l'écran et les résultats d 'impression. 1 Sous Windows XP/Server 2003/XP x64/Server 2003 x64, cliquez sur [Démarrer], puis sur "Imprimantes et télécopieurs". – Sous Windows NT 4.0/2000, cliquez sur [Démarrer], pointez sur "Paramètres" et cliquez ensuite sur "Imprimantes". 2 Effectuez un clic droit sur l'icône "GENERIC 75/60 BW-1 PS" et cliquez ensuite sur "Propriétés". 3 Cliquez sur l'onglet Police. 4 Sélectionne TrueType(Type 42), Bitmap(Type 3) ou Adobe(Type 1) comme méthode d'envoi des polices TrueType à l'imprimante dans "Envoyer à l'imprimante en tant que". 5 Sélectionne des points, 1/100 de pouce ou des pixels dans "Unités de seuil". 6 Réglez le "Seuil". Configuration du pilote PS (Windows) 7 IC-202 (Phase 2) 7-65 7 Sélectionnez la police TrueType que vous voulez remplacer. 8 A partir de la zone de liste déroulante "Police imprimante à utiliser", sélectionnez la police d'imprimante pour remplacer la police TrueType. – Quand "Utiliser l'imprimante pour toutes les polices True Type" est coché, la police TrueType est automatiquement remplacée par le police optimale de l'imprimante et le temps nécessaire à l'impression est réduit. Mais dans ce cas, il peut y avoir une différence entre l'affichage à l'écran et le résultat d'impression. – Activez la case à cocher "Utiliser la table de substitution" pour utiliser la table de remplacement des polices. Pour rétablir l'état d'origine, cliquez sur [Substitution par défaut]. 9 Cliquez sur [OK]. 7 Configuration du pilote PS (Windows) 7-66 IC-202 (Phase 2) 7.10 Spécifier les paramètres de l'onglet Option Configurer les options installées Configurez les modules en option installés sur la machine comme suit. 1 Sous Windows XP/Server 2003/XP x64/Server 2003 x64, cliquez sur [Démarrer], puis sur "Imprimantes et télécopieurs". – Sous Windows NT 4.0/2000, cliquez sur [Démarrer], pointez sur "Paramètres" et cliquez ensuite sur "Imprimantes". 2 Effectuez un clic droit sur l'icône "GENERIC 75/60 BW-1 PS" et cliquez ensuite sur [Propriétés]. 3 Cliquez sur l'onglet Option. 4 Sélectionnez l'option installée à partir de la zone de liste déroulante. 2 Remarque Si vous cochez la case à cocher "Mise à l'échelle pour les applications", les valeurs définies dans "Zoom" du menu d'impression et les valeurs définies dans "Zoom" du menu d'impression sont liées. Cliquez sur [A propos de] pour afficher la version du pilote d'imprimante. Configuration du pilote PS (Windows) 7 IC-202 (Phase 2) 7-67 Collecte automatique des informations optionnelles Si une option est utilisée dans le cadre de la connexion réseau à la machine, les informations optionnelles sont automatiquement détectées. 1 Cliquez sur l'onglet Option. 2 Entrez le nom de l'imprimante ou son adresse IP dans la zone de texte "Nom d'imprimante ou adresse IP". 3 Cliquez sur [Collecter informations optionnelles] pour détecter automatiquement les informations optionnelles. 7 Configuration du pilote PS (Windows) 7-68 IC-202 (Phase 2) 7.11 Enregistrer les paramètres de pilote Vous pouvez enregistrer les valeurs de paramètres du pilote modifié et les rappeler si nécessaire. Enregistrer les paramètres de pilote 1 Changez les paramètres du pilote à partir de l'onglet Configuration. 2 Cliquez sur [Enregistrer]. 3 Tapez le nom de fichier dans la case de texte "Nom". 4 Cliquez sur [OK]. Les paramètres sont enregistrés dans une bibliothèque. Configuration du pilote PS (Windows) 7 IC-202 (Phase 2) 7-69 Rétablir les paramètres % Cliquez sur [Enregistrer/Rétablir réglage] dans la fenêtre Options d'impression et sélectionnez le nom d'un fichier de configuration contenant le réglage enregistré. Le réglage est rappelé et la boîte de dialogue Options d'impression réapparaît. Modifier les paramètres 1 Dans la boîte de dialogue Options d'impression, cliquez sur [Enregistrer/Rétablir réglage]. 2 Sur la liste, sélectionnez le fichier que vous voulez modifier et modifiez le paramètre. – Cliquez sur [Supprimer] si vous voulez supprimer le fichier. La boîte de dialogue "Suppression d'une configuration" apparaît. 3 Cliquez sur [Enregistrer] et tapez dans la zone de texte Nom le même nom que celui du paramètre que vous souhaitez modifier. Le paramètre va être modifié. 4 Cliquez sur [OK]. 7 Configuration du pilote PS (Windows) 7-70 IC-202 (Phase 2) 8 Configuration du pilote PPD (Windows) Configuration du pilote PPD (Windows) 8 IC-202 (Phase 2) 8-3 8 Configuration du pilote PPD (Windows) 8.1 Paramètres Onglet Disposition Papier/qualité Sous-menu Fonction Orientation Spécifie l'orientation. Ordre des pages Réglez l'ordre dans lequel les feuilles de papier sont imprimées. Pages par feuille Spécifie le nombre de pages à imprimer sur une page. Sous-menu Fonction Alimentation Permet de sélectionner le magasin papier. Type de papier Sélectionne le type de papier pour impression. 8 Configuration du pilote PPD (Windows) 8-4 IC-202 (Phase 2) Avancé Sous-menu Fonction Format papier Spécifie le format du papier. Nombre de copies Spécifie le nombre de copies à imprimer. Mise à l'échelle Spécifie le taux d'agrandissement et de réduction. Police TrueType Remplace la police TrueType par la police de l'imprimante. Fonctionnalités d'impression avancées Réglage destiné à décider si les fonctions d'impression détaillées sont activées ou non. Options PostScript Règle le type de sortie du fichier PostScript. Option de téléchargement de police TrueType Lors de l'impression de la police TrueType font, sélectionnez le type de police téléchargée sur l'imprimante. Niveau de langage PostScript Règle le niveau de PostScript. Envoyer une balise d'erreur PostScript Si une erreur PostScript survient, permet de décider si un rapport et imprimé ou non. Sortie en miroir L'impression est inversée (droite/gauche). Sortie en négatif L'impression du noir et du blanc est inversée. Décalé Spécifie le décalage. Position d'impression Règle la position d'impression. Bac de sortie Permet de sélectionner le bac de sortie. Ordre de sortie Définissez s'il faut orienter le papier à imprimer vers le haut ou vers le bas. Position de reliure Permet de sélectionner la position de reliure. Recto-verso Effectue l'impression recto-verso. Combinaison Sélectionne l'impression Livret. Agrafer Agrafe les copies. Perforer Perfore les copies. Pliage Plie les copies. Couverture Ajoute une page de couverture. Magasin papier (couverture) Spécifie le magasin papier de la première page de couverture. Dos Ajoute une page de dos. Magasin papier (dos) Sélectionne le magasin papier pour la dernière page de couverture. Couv. avc bac ins. Permet d'insérer une couverture à partir du bac d'insertion. Dos avec bac ins. Permet d'insérer un dos à partir du bac d'insertion. Intercalaire sur transparent Insère des intercalaires entre les transparents de rétroprojection. Configuration du pilote PPD (Windows) 8 IC-202 (Phase 2) 8-5 Onglet Paramètres du périphérique Magasin papier (Intercalaire sur transparent) Sélectionne le magasin papier pour les intercalaires entre transparents. Mode attente Arrête provisoirement d'imprimer après qu'un exemplaire du document a été imprimée afin de pouvoir vérifier l'épreuve. Lissage Règle le processus de lissage. Densité d'impression Activer en cas de réglage de la densité d'impression. Sous-menu Fonction Sous-menu Fonction Affectation d'un modèle à un bac Règle le format de papier pour chaque magasin d'alimentation. Table de substitution des polices Spécifie le remplacement des polices TrueType par les polices de l'imprimante. Mémoire PostScript disponible Spécifie la taille de la mémoire PostScript utilisable. Protocole de sortie Spécifie le protocole d'envoi à l'imprimante. Envoyer CTRL-D avant chaque tâche Spécifie s'il faut initialiser l'imprimante avant d'imprimer. Envoyer CTRL-D après chaque tâche Spécifie s'il faut initialiser l'imprimante après l'impression. Convertir le texte gris en PostScript gris Spécifie s'il faut convertir le texte gris d'un document en gris PostScript. Convertir les graphiques gris en PostScript gris Spécifie s'il faut convertir les graphiques gris d'un document en gris PostScript. Ajouter le symbole monétaire de l'Euro aux polices PostScript Spécifie s'il faut convertir le symbole de la monnaie Euro d'un document en polices PostScript. Délai d'attente de la tâche L'imprimante s'arrête d'imprimer quand une tâche d'impression n'est pas terminée dans le délai imparti. Délai d'attente L'imprimante s'arrête d'imprimer quand l'imprimante ne reçoit pas de données dans le délai imparti à partir du moment où la tâche avait été envoyée. Taille minimale de la police téléchargée en vectoriel. Taille minimale de police à télécharger en tant que police vectorielle Spécifie le format minimum de police (pixels) lors du téléchargement de polices TrueType en tant que polices vectorielles. Les polices plus petites que le format minimum spécifié sont téléchargées comme polices bitmap. Taille maximale de police à télécharger en tant que bitmap Spécifie le format maximum de police (pixels) lors du téléchargement de polices TrueType en tant que polices bitmap. Les polices plus grandes que le format minimum spécifié sont téléchargées comme polices vectorielles. Options d'installation Spécifie les options installées sur cet appareil. 8 Configuration du pilote PPD (Windows) 8-6 IC-202 (Phase 2) 8.2 Spécifier les paramètres de l'onglet Disposition Vous pouvez régler l'orientation, la disposition et les autres réglages de mise en page avec l'onglet Disposition. Spécifier les paramètres 1 Cliquez sur l'onglet Disposition. 2 Spécifiez les paramètres des éléments suivants : – Orientation : règle le sens du papier. – Ordre des pages : règle l'ordre d'impression des pages. – Pages par feuille : règle la disposition des feuilles (N en 1). 2 Remarque Lors de l'affichage des éléments sur l'onglet "Disposition" dans 98SE/Me, affichez l'onglet Papier ou Images. Configuration du pilote PPD (Windows) 8 IC-202 (Phase 2) 8-7 8.3 Spécifier les paramètres de l'onglet Papier/qualité L'onglet Papier/qualité vous permet de configurer les types de papier ou le magasin d'alimentation papier. Spécifier les paramètres 1 Cliquez sur l'onglet Papier/qualité. 2 Spécifiez les paramètres des éléments suivants : – Alimentation papier : sélectionne une source papier. – Média: sélectionne un type de papier. 2 Remarque Lors de l'affichage des éléments de l'onglet Papier/Qualité sous Windows 98SE/Me, affichez l'onglet Papier. 8 Configuration du pilote PPD (Windows) 8-8 IC-202 (Phase 2) 8.4 Avancé... Vous pouvez régler les fonctions du module de finition, régler la densité d'impression et d'autres fonctions avancées dans la fenêtre Options avancées. Spécifier les paramètres 0 Cette fonction ne peut être utilisée que si le module en option a été réglé sur l'onglet Paramètres du périphérique ("Spécifier les périphériques" à la page 8-10). N'oubliez pas de régler les options si elles sont installées. 0 Un point d'exclamation jaune ( ) apparaît à la sélection d'une fonction. 0 Les causes suivantes sont envisageables : absence de définition d'une fonction en option nécessaire ou définition d'une fonction incompatible avec les autres. 1 Cliquez sur [Avancé] sur l'onglet Disposition ou Papier/qualité. 2 Sélectionnez la fonction dans la zone de liste déroulante qui s'ouvre à la droite de chaque élément. Configuration du pilote PPD (Windows) 8 IC-202 (Phase 2) 8-9 2 Remarque Voir "Paramètres" à la page 8-3 pour les éléments et fonctions disponibles. Pour afficher les éléments dans la fenêtre Options avancées sous 98SE/Me, affichez les onglets Papier, Options de périphérique, PostScript, Images et Polices. ! Détails La fonction de pliage peut uniquement être utilisée si le module de finition FS-602 (Pliage en trois, Pliage en deux) ou le module de perforation et de pliage en Z (Pliage en Z) est installé en option. La fonction d'agrafage peut uniquement être utilisée si le module de finition en option est installé. Vous pouvez agrafer jusqu'à 100 feuilles de papier ordinaire au format A4 ou inférieur avec le module FS-505 et 50 feuilles avec le module FS-504 ou 602. La fonction de perforation peut uniquement être utilisée si le module de finition en option est installé. En outre, le kit de perforation et le module de perforation et de pliage en Z doivent être installé Si le module SF-601 (magasin de décalage) est installé, les fonctions de pliage, d'agrafage et de perforation ne sont pas disponibles. 8 Configuration du pilote PPD (Windows) 8-10 IC-202 (Phase 2) 8.5 Spécifier les périphériques L'option installée sur cette machine est configurée par le pilote d'imprimante et devient utilisable Spécifier les paramètres 1 En cas de Windows XP/Server 2003/XP x64/Server 2003 x64, cliquez sur [Démarrer] et sur [Imprimantes et télécopieurs]. – Sous 98SE/Me/NT4.0/2000, cliquez sur [Démarrer] et ensuite sur [Paramètres] – [Imprimantes]. 2 Effectuez un clic droit sur l'icône de l'imprimante installée, "GENERIC 75/60 BW-1 PS(P)" et cliquez ensuite sur [Propriétés]. 3 Cliquez sur l'onglet paramètres de périphérique. 4 Sélectionnez une fonction dans la zone de liste déroulante qui s'ouvre à la droite de chaque élément. Réglez les conditions d'installation du périphérique optionnel dans "Options d'installation". Configuration du pilote PPD (Windows) 8 IC-202 (Phase 2) 8-11 2 Remarque Affichez l'onglet Options de périphérique, l'onglet PostScript, l'onglet Graphiques et l'onglet Police pour afficher les éléments dans l'onglet Paramètres de périphérique et ouvrez l'onglet options de périphérique pour afficher les conditions d'installation du périphérique optionnel sous Windows 98SE/Me. 8 Configuration du pilote PPD (Windows) 8-12 IC-202 (Phase 2) 9 Configurer le pilote PPD (Mac OS 9) Configurer le pilote PPD (Mac OS 9) 9 IC-202 (Phase 2) 9-3 9 Configurer le pilote PPD (Mac OS 9) 9.1 Paramètres Vous pouvez configurer les fonctions de cet appareil dans les boîtes de dialogue Format d'impression et Imprimer affichées dans n'importe quelle application. Les paramètres ne peuvent s'appliquer que pendant l'utilisation de l'application. Quand vous quittez l'application, les paramètres par défaut sont réactivés. Boîte de dialogue Format d'impression 9 Configurer le pilote PPD (Mac OS 9) 9-4 IC-202 (Phase 2) Eléments de Format d'impression 2 Remarque Selon l'application, "Format d'impression" peut s'afficher sous forme de "Réglage papier". De plus, vous devrez peut-être sélectionner "Réglage papier" — "Options" à partir du menu "Fichier". Les boîtes de dialogue varient en fonction de l'application. Menu Sous-menu Fonction Attributs de page Papier Spécifie le format du papier. Orientation Spécifie l'orientation. Échelle Spécifie le taux d'agrandissement et de réduction. Options PostScript Retourner horizontalement Imprime l'image tournée à l'horizontale. Retourner verticalement Imprime l'image tournée à la verticale. Inverser l'image Imprime un négatif de l'image. Substituer les caractères Remplace certaines polices par des polices d'imprimante. Finition texte Lisse les données de texte. Finition dessin Lisse les données graphiques. Alignement précis mode point Corrige les images dentelées. Polices téléchargeables illimitées Ne limite pas le téléchargement des polices d'écran. Formats de page personnalisés Unités Sélectionne l'unité spécifié. Format papier Spécifie tous les formats papier. Marges Spécifie les marges du papier. Nom du format de page Entre le nom enregistré pour le format papier spécifié et la marge après avoir cliqué sur [OK]. Configurer le pilote PPD (Mac OS 9) 9 IC-202 (Phase 2) 9-5 Boîte de dialogue Imprimer Elément d'impression Menu Sous-menu Fonction Généralités Copies Spécifie le nombre de copies à imprimer. Triées Imprime les copies multiples par jeux. Pages Spécifie les pages à imprimer. Alimentation Permet de sélectionner le magasin papier. Impression de fond Printing In Spécifie l'impression en arrière-plan. Print Time Spécifie le niveau de priorité et l'heure d'impression. Impression des couleurs (Ce système d'impression ne correspond pas à cette fonction.) Print Color Spécifie la couleur pour l'impression. Intent Sélectionne la méthode de correspondance. Printer Profile Spécifie le profil de correction de couleur du périphérique de sortie. Page de garde Print Cover Page Joint une couverture. Cover Page Paper Source Permet de sélectionner le magasin papier de la couverture. Réglages de police Font Documentation Ajoute des informations à la clé de police. Font Downloading Spécifie les conditions de téléchargement de polices. Consignation des tâches If there is a PostScriptTM error Spécifie les conditions de rapport d'erreur PostScript. Job Documentation Spécifie les conditions du dossier d'opération à enregistrer. Job Documentation Folder Spécifie le dossier dans lequel le dossier d'opération doit être enregistré. 9 Configurer le pilote PPD (Mac OS 9) 9-6 IC-202 (Phase 2) Disposition Pages par feuille Spécifie le nombre de pages à imprimer sur une page. Orientation Spécifie l'ordre des pages pour imprimer plusieurs pages sur une seule page. Bordure Spécifie les bordures autour des pages. Enregistrement Format Spécifie le format de sortie du fichier PostScript. PostScript Level Spécifie le niveau PostScript. Data Format Spécifie le format pour enregistrer un document. Font Inclusion Spécifie s'il faut inclure les données de police dans un fichier. Finishing Options 1 Décalage Spécifie le décalage. Position d'impression Règle la position d'impression. Bac de sortie Permet de sélectionner le bac de sortie. Ordre de sortie Définissez s'il faut orienter le papier à imprimer vers le haut ou vers le bas. Position de reliure Permet de sélectionner la position de reliure. Recto-verso Effectue l'impression recto-verso. Combinaison Sélectionne l'impression Livret. Finishing Options 2 Agrafer Agrafe les copies. Perforer Perfore les copies. Plier Plie les copies. Couverture Ajoute une page de couverture. Magasin papier (couverture) Spécifie le magasin papier de la première page de couverture. Dos Ajoute une page de dos. Magasin papier (dos) Sélectionne le magasin papier pour la dernière page de couverture. Menu Sous-menu Fonction Configurer le pilote PPD (Mac OS 9) 9 IC-202 (Phase 2) 9-7 2 Remarque Les boîtes de dialogue varient en fonction de l'application. Finishing Options 3 Couv. avc bac ins. Permet d'insérer une couverture à partir du bac d'insertion. Dos avec bac ins. Permet d'insérer un dos à partir du bac d'insertion. Intercalaire sur transparent Insère des intercalaires entre les transparents de rétroprojection. Magasin papier (intercalaire sur transparent) Sélectionne le magasin papier pour les intercalaires entre transparents. Mode attente Arrête provisoirement d'imprimer après qu'un exemplaire du document a été imprimée afin de pouvoir vérifier l'épreuve. Résolution Spécifie la résolution d'impression. Lissage Règle le processus de lissage. Finishing Options 4 Densité d'impression Activer en cas de réglage de la densité d'impression. Menu Sous-menu Fonction 9 Configurer le pilote PPD (Mac OS 9) 9-8 IC-202 (Phase 2) 9.2 Disposition Attributs de page (Paramètres de base) 1 Sélectionnez "Réglage papier" ou "Format d'impression" dans le menu "Fichier". 2 Sélectionnez "Attributs de page". 3 Spécifiez les paramètres des éléments suivants : – Papier: spécifie le format du papier. – Orientation : spécifie l'orientation. – Échelle: spécifie le taux d'agrandissement et de réduction. 2 Remarque La fonction de mise en page peut être sélectionnée à partir de l'écran qui s'affiche quand "Mise en page" est coché dans la boîte de dialogue Imprimer. Configurer le pilote PPD (Mac OS 9) 9 IC-202 (Phase 2) 9-9 Format papier personnalisés 1 Sélectionnez "Réglage papier" ou "Format d'impression" dans le menu "Fichier". 2 Sélectionnez "Formats de page personnalisés". 3 Cliquez sur [Nouveau] ou [Modifier]. 4 Spécifiez les paramètres des éléments suivants : – Format de papier : spécifie le format du papier. – Marges: spécifie les marges du papier. – Nom du format de page : Entrez le nom enregistré pour le format et la marge spécifiés et cliquez ensuite sur [OK]. – Unités: sélectionne l'unité spécifiée. 5 Cliquez sur [OK]. Enregistre les paramètres de format personnalisés et vous permet de sélectionner le papier sur l'écran qui s'affiche quand "Attributs de page" est sélectionné. 9 Configurer le pilote PPD (Mac OS 9) 9-10 IC-202 (Phase 2) Options PostScript 1 Sélectionnez "Réglage papier" ou "Format d'impression" dans le menu "Fichier". 2 Sélectionnez "Options PostScript". 3 Spécifiez les paramètres des éléments suivants : – Effets visuels : propose "Retourner horizontalement", "Retourner verticalement" et "Inverser l'image" (image négative). – Substituer les caractères : remplace certaines polices par des polices de l'imprimante. – Finition texte : lisse les données de texte. – Finition dessin : lisse les données de dessin. – Alignement précis mode point : corrige les images dentelées. – Polices téléchargeables illimitées : ne limite pas le téléchargement des polices d'écran. Configurer le pilote PPD (Mac OS 9) 9 IC-202 (Phase 2) 9-11 9.3 Impression Généralités (Paramètres de base) 1 Dans le menu "Fichier", sélectionnez "Imprimer". 2 Sélectionnez "Généralités". 3 Spécifiez les paramètres des éléments suivants : – Copies: spécifie le nombre de copies à imprimer. – Triées: imprime plusieurs copies par jeux. – Pages: spécifie le groupe de pages à imprimer. – Alimentation : sélectionne la magasin d'alimentation. 9 Configurer le pilote PPD (Mac OS 9) 9-12 IC-202 (Phase 2) Disposition (Imprimer plusieurs pages sur une seule page) Vous pouvez spécifier l'impression de plusieurs pages sur une même page ou l'impression recto-verso. 1 Dans le menu "Fichier", sélectionnez "Imprimer". 2 Sélectionnez "Mise en page". 3 Spécifiez les paramètres des éléments suivants : – Pages par feuille : spécifie le nombre de pages à imprimer sur une seule page. – Orientation : spécifie l'ordre des pages du document.. – Bordure: spécifie les bordures autour des pages. Configurer le pilote PPD (Mac OS 9) 9 IC-202 (Phase 2) 9-13 Options de finition Vous pouvez spécifier des options spécifiques à l'imprimante. Vous pouvez spécifier cette option quand vous utilisez les fonctions Agrafer et Perforer de cet appareil. 1 Dans le menu "Fichier", sélectionnez "Imprimer". 2 Sélectionnez "Finishing Options 1 à 4". 3 Spécifiez les paramètres des éléments suivants : Sous-menu Fonction Décalé Spécifie le décalage. Position d'impression Règle la position d'impression. Bac de sortie Permet de sélectionner le bac de sortie. Ordre de sortie Définissez s'il faut orienter le papier à imprimer vers le haut ou vers le bas. Position de reliure Permet de sélectionner la position de reliure. Recto-verso Effectue l'impression recto-verso. Combinaison Sélectionne l'impression Livret. Agrafer Agrafe les copies. Perforer Perfore les copies. Pliage Plie les copies. Couverture Ajoute une page de couverture. Magasin papier (couverture) Spécifie le magasin papier de la première page de couverture. Dos Ajoute une page de dos. Magasin papier (dos) Sélectionne le magasin papier pour la dernière page de couverture. 9 Configurer le pilote PPD (Mac OS 9) 9-14 IC-202 (Phase 2) Couv. avc bac ins. Permet d'insérer une couverture à partir du bac d'insertion. Dos avec bac ins. Permet d'insérer un dos à partir du bac d'insertion. Intercalaire sur transparent Insère des intercalaires entre les transparents de rétroprojection. Magasin papier (Intercalaire sur transparent) Sélectionne le magasin papier pour les intercalaires entre transparents. Mode attente Arrête provisoirement d'imprimer après qu'un exemplaire du document a été imprimée afin de pouvoir vérifier l'épreuve. Résolution Spécifie la résolution d'impression. Lissage Règle le processus de lissage. Densité d'impression Activer en cas de réglage de la densité d'impression. Sous-menu Fonction Configurer le pilote PPD (Mac OS 9) 9 IC-202 (Phase 2) 9-15 9.4 Options de réglage Vous pouvez spécifier les options installées sur cet appareil pour qu'elles puissent être utilisées par le pilote d'imprimante. 2 Rappel Si les options installées de cet appareil ne sont pas définies à partir de l'écran Options Installables, la fonction Option ne peut pas être utilisée avec le pilote d'imprimante. Lors de l'installation des options, assurezvous d'effectuer les réglages corrects. Spécifier les paramètres 1 Dans le menu Apple, cliquez sur [Sélecteur] 2 Sélectionnez le nom de l'imprimante. 3 Cliquez sur [Installation]. 4 Cliquez sur [Configurer]. L'écran de réglage pour ajouter des options apparaît. 5 Sélectionnez l'option installée sur cet appareil. 6 Cliquez sur [OK]. La fenêtre du sélecteur réapparaît. 7 Fermez la fenêtre du sélecteur. 9 Configurer le pilote PPD (Mac OS 9) 9-16 IC-202 (Phase 2) 2 Remarque Les paramètres d'option s'affichent automatiquement la première fois que vous sélectionnez le pilote d'imprimante. Pour plus de détails, voir "Pour Mac OS 9" à la page 3-20. 10 Configurer le pilote PPD (Mac OS X) Configurer le pilote PPD (Mac OS X) 10 IC-202 (Phase 2) 10-3 10 Configurer le pilote PPD (Mac OS X) 10.1 Paramètres Vous pouvez configurer les fonctions de cet appareil dans les boîtes de dialogue Mise en page et Imprimer affichées dans l'application. Les paramètres ne peuvent s'appliquer que pendant l'utilisation de l'application. Quand vous quittez l'application, les paramètres par défaut sont réactivés. Boîte de dialogue Format d'impression 10 Configurer le pilote PPD (Mac OS X) 10-4 IC-202 (Phase 2) Eléments de Format d'impression 2 Remarque Selon l'application, "Format d'impression" peut s'afficher sous forme de "Réglage papier". De plus, vous devrez peut-être sélectionner "Réglage papier" — "Options" à partir du menu "Fichier". Les boîtes de dialogue varient en fonction de l'application. Menu Sous-menu Fonction Attributs de page Format papier Spécifie le format du papier. Orientation Spécifie l'orientation. Échelle Spécifie le taux d'agrandissement et de réduction. Format de papier personnalisé Format papier Spécifie tous les formats papier. Marges de l'imprimante Spécifie les marges du papier. Configurer le pilote PPD (Mac OS X) 10 IC-202 (Phase 2) 10-5 Boîte de dialogue Imprimer Elément d'impression Menu Sous-menu Fonction Copies et pages Copies Spécifie le nombre de copies à imprimer. Triées Imprime les copies multiples par jeux. Pages Spécifie les pages à imprimer. Disposition Pages par feuille Spécifie le nombre de pages à imprimer sur une page. Orientation Spécifies l'orientation des pages du document. Bordure Spécifie les bordures autour des pages. Options de sortie Format de sortie Spécifie le format de sortie du fichier à imprimer. Programmateur*1 Print Document Spécifie l'heure d'impression. Preferred Order Spécifie le niveau de priorité. Gestion du papier*1 Reverse Page Order Imprime les pages dans l'ordre inverse. Impression Sélectionne les pages pour impression. Destination Paper Size**2 Définit le format du papier en sortie ColorSync*1 (Ce système d'impression ne correspond pas à cette fonction.) Color Conversion Spécifie la méthode de conversion des couleurs. Quartz Filter Spécifie la couleur pour l'impression. Page de garde*1 Print Cover Page Spécifie s'il faut ajouter une page de titre. Cover Page Type Sélectionner pour imprimer "Confidentiel" ou d'autres commentaires sur la page de titre. Traitement d'erreur PostScript Error Spécifie s'il faut imprimer un rapport d'erreur en cas d'erreur PostScript. 10 Configurer le pilote PPD (Mac OS X) 10-6 IC-202 (Phase 2) Alimentation papier Toutes les pages Permet de sélectionner le magasin papier. Première page Permet de sélectionner le magasin papier. Pages restantes Permet de sélectionner le magasin papier. Finition Tri Imprime les copies multiples par jeux. Décalage Spécifie le décalage. Recto-verso Effectue l'impression recto-verso. Agrafer Agrafe les copies. Perforation Perfore les copies. Position de reliure Permet de spécifier la position de reliure. Plier Plie les copies. Bac de sortie Permet de sélectionner le bac de sortie. Ordre de sortie Définissez s'il faut orienter le papier à imprimer vers le haut ou vers le bas. Image/Disposition Combinaison Spécifie le Livret, 2 en 1 or Répétition 2 en 1. Position d'impression Règle la position d'impression. Résolution Affiche la résolution de l'imprimante. (600 dpi) Lissage Spécifie le lissage dans un document. Densité d'impression Activer en cas de réglage de la densité d'impression. Configuration Type de papier Sélectionne le type de papier. Couverture Ajoute une page de couverture. Magasin papier (couverture) Spécifie le magasin papier de la première page de couverture. Dos Ajoute une page de dos. Magasin papier (dos) Sélectionne le magasin papier pour la dernière page de couverture. Couv. avc bac ins. Permet d'insérer une couverture à partir du bac d'insertion. Dos avec bac ins. Permet d'insérer un dos à partir du bac d'insertion. Intercalaire sur transparent Insère des intercalaires entre les transparents de rétroprojection. Magasin papier (Intercalaire sur transparent) Sélectionne le magasin papier pour les intercalaires entre transparents. Menu Sous-menu Fonction Configurer le pilote PPD (Mac OS X) 10 IC-202 (Phase 2) 10-7 2 Remarque Les boîtes de dialogue varient en fonction de l'application. Les éléments repérés par "*1" ne s'affichent que sous Mac OS 10.3/10.4. Les éléments repérés par "*2" ne s'affichent que sous Mac OS 10.4. Sécurité Méthode de sortie Spécifie les méthodes de sortie, comme "Impression sécurisée" et "Enreg. dans boîte utilisateur". Paramètres d'impression sécurisée Spécifie l'ID et le mot de passe utilisateur pour "Impression sécurisée". Enr. dns Réglages boîte util. Spécifie le nom de fichier et le nom de boîte pour "Enreg. dans boîte utilisateur". Authentification Vérifie si les paramètres d'authentification ont été appliqués et spécifie l'ID et le mot de passe utilisateur. Suivi de Volume (E.K.C.) Vérifie si les paramètres de suivi de volume ont été appliqués et spécifie le nom et le mot de passe du service. Menu Sous-menu Fonction 10 Configurer le pilote PPD (Mac OS X) 10-8 IC-202 (Phase 2) 10.2 Disposition Attributs de page (Paramètres de base) 1 Sélectionnez "Format d'impression" ou "Réglage papier" à partir du menu "Fichier". 2 Sélectionnez "Attributs de page". 3 Spécifiez les paramètres des éléments suivants : Configurer le pilote PPD (Mac OS X) 10 IC-202 (Phase 2) 10-9 – Format de papier : spécifie le format du papier. – Orientation : spécifie l'orientation. – Échelle: spécifie le taux d'agrandissement et de réduction. 10 Configurer le pilote PPD (Mac OS X) 10-10 IC-202 (Phase 2) Format de papier personnalisé (en cas de Mac OS 10.2x/10.3x) 1 Sélectionnez "Format d'impression" ou "Réglage papier" à partir du menu "Fichier". 2 Sélectionnez "Format de papier personnalisé". 3 Cliquez sur [Nouveau]. 4 Tapez le nom du format papier. 5 Spécifiez les paramètres des éléments suivants : – Taille du papier : spécifie les dimensions du papier. – Marges de l'imprimante : spécifie les marges du papier. 6 Cliquez sur [Enregistrer]. 7 Cliquez sur [OK]. Enregistre le format de papier personnalisé et vous permet de sélectionner le format de papier sur l'écran qui s'affiche quand "Attributs de page" est sélectionné. Configurer le pilote PPD (Mac OS X) 10 IC-202 (Phase 2) 10-11 Format de papier personnalisé (en cas de Mac OS 10.4x) Sélectionnez "Custom Page Sizes (Format de page personnalisé)" dans le menu contextuel pour afficher "Format papier" de la fenêtre Format d'impression. Il est possible d'enregistrer un nouveau format de page personnalisé. Le réglage du format de page personnalisé est supprimé. Format papier Définit la hauteur et la largeur du papier d'impression. Marges de l'imprimante Définit les marges du papier. 10 Configurer le pilote PPD (Mac OS X) 10-12 IC-202 (Phase 2) 10.3 Impression Copies et pages (Paramètres de base) 1 Dans le menu "Fichier", sélectionnez "Imprimer". 2 Sélectionnez "Copies et pages". 3 Spécifiez les paramètres des éléments suivants : – Copies: spécifie le nombre de copies à imprimer. – Triées: imprimer plusieurs copies par jeux. – Pages: spécifie le groupe de pages à imprimer. Configurer le pilote PPD (Mac OS X) 10 IC-202 (Phase 2) 10-13 Disposition (Imprimer plusieurs pages sur une seule page) Vous pouvez imprimer plusieurs pages de document sur une seule feuille. 1 Dans le menu "Fichier", sélectionnez "Imprimer". 2 Sélectionnez "Mise en page". 3 Spécifiez les paramètres des éléments suivants : – Pages par feuille : spécifie le nombre de pages à imprimer sur une seule page. – Orientation : spécifie l'ordre des pages du document.. – Bordure: spécifie les bordures autour des pages. 10 Configurer le pilote PPD (Mac OS X) 10-14 IC-202 (Phase 2) Alimentation papier Vous pouvez spécifier le magasin papier pour l'impression. 1 Dans le menu "Fichier", sélectionnez "Imprimer". 2 Sélectionnez "Alimentation". 3 Spécifiez les paramètres des éléments suivants : – Toutes les pages : sélectionne le magasin d'alimentation pour imprimer toutes les pages. – Première page : sélectionne le magasin d'alimentation pour imprimer la première page. – Pages restantes : sélectionne le magasin d'alimentation pour imprimer à partir de la deuxième page. Configurer le pilote PPD (Mac OS X) 10 IC-202 (Phase 2) 10-15 Sécurité Non seulement vous pouvez imprimer directement, mais vous pouvez aussi sélectionner "Impression sécurisée", qui nécessite un mot de passe pour imprimer, "Enreg. dans boîte utilisateur", qui enregistre les documents dans une boîte, "Attente avec épreuve", qui imprime le premier jeu de plusieurs copies et s'arrête provisoirement d'imprimer, "Paramètres d'authentification", qui nécessite une authentification et "Paramètres de Suivi de volume", qui gère le nombre des pages imprimées. 1 Dans le menu "Fichier", sélectionnez "Imprimer". 2 Sélectionnez "Sécurité". 3 Spécifiez les paramètres des éléments suivants : 10 Configurer le pilote PPD (Mac OS X) 10-16 IC-202 (Phase 2) Sous-menu Fonction Type de sortie Spécifie les conditions pour "Impression sécurisée" et "Enreg. dans boîte utilisateur". Paramètres d'impression sécurisée Saisir l'ID et le mot de passe si "Impression sécurisée" est activé dans la liste déroulante "Type de sortie". Tapez l'ID et le mot de passe sur le panneau de contrôle de cet appareil quand vous imprimez. (jusqu'à 100 documents) Enr. dns Réglages boîte util. Entrez le nom de fichier et le numéro de boîte si "Enreg. dans boîte utilisateur" ou "Enr. dns boîte utilis, imprim." est activé dans la liste déroulante "Type de sortie". Authentification Utilisateur Enregistre le nom d'utilisateur et le mot de passe si des paramètres d'authentification ont été appliqués à cette machine et si la case est cochée. Si cet appareil a été réglé pour autoriser les utilisateurs publics, l'appareil peut être utilisé sans nom d'utilisateur ni mot de passe. Suivi de Volume (E.K.C.) Enregistre le nom d'accès et le mot de passe si des paramètres de suivi de volume ont été appliqués à cette machine et si la case est cochée. Configurer le pilote PPD (Mac OS X) 10 IC-202 (Phase 2) 10-17 Finition Vous pouvez spécifier ces options quand vous utilisez les fonctions de finition Agrafage et Perforation de cet appareil. 1 Dans le menu "Fichier", sélectionnez "Imprimer". 2 Sélectionnez "Finition". 3 Spécifiez les paramètres des éléments suivants : Sous-menu Fonction Tri Imprime les copies multiples par jeux. Décalé Spécifie le décalage. Recto-verso Effectue l'impression recto-verso. Agrafer Agrafe les copies. Perforer Perfore les copies. Position de reliure Permet de spécifier la position de reliure. Pliage Plie les copies. Bac de sortie Permet de sélectionner le bac de sortie. Ordre de sortie Définissez s'il faut orienter le papier à imprimer vers le haut ou vers le bas. 10 Configurer le pilote PPD (Mac OS X) 10-18 IC-202 (Phase 2) Image/Disposition 1 Dans le menu "Fichier", sélectionnez "Imprimer". 2 Sélectionnez "Image/Disposition". 3 Spécifiez les paramètres des éléments suivants : Sous-menu Fonction Combinaison Spécifie le Livret, 2 en 1 or Répétition 2 en 1. Position d'impression Règle la position d'impression. Résolution Spécifie la résolution. Lissage Spécifie le lissage dans un document. Densité d'impression Activer en cas de réglage de la densité d'impression. Configurer le pilote PPD (Mac OS X) 10 IC-202 (Phase 2) 10-19 Configuration Vous pouvez spécifier les paramètres NetWare. 1 Dans le menu "Fichier", sélectionnez "Imprimer". 2 Sélectionnez "Configuration". 3 Spécifiez les paramètres des éléments suivants : Sous-menu Fonction Type de papier Sélectionne le type de papier. Couverture Ajoute une page de couverture. Magasin papier (couverture) Spécifie le magasin papier de la première page de couverture. Dos Ajoute une page de dos. Magasin papier (dos) Sélectionne le magasin papier pour la dernière page de couverture. Couv. avc bac ins. Permet d'insérer une couverture à partir du bac d'insertion. Dos avec bac ins. Permet d'insérer un dos à partir du bac d'insertion. Intercalaire sur transparent Insère des intercalaires entre les transparents de rétroprojection. Magasin papier (Intercalaire sur transparent) Sélectionne le magasin papier pour les intercalaires entre transparents. 10 Configurer le pilote PPD (Mac OS X) 10-20 IC-202 (Phase 2) 10.4 Options de réglage Vous pouvez spécifier les options installées sur cet appareil pour qu'elles puissent être utilisées par le pilote d'imprimante. 2 Rappel Si les options installées de cet appareil ne sont pas définies à partir de l'écran Options Installables, la fonction Option ne peut pas être utilisée avec le pilote d'imprimante. Lors de l'installation des options, assurezvous d'effectuer les réglages corrects. Spécifier les paramètres 1 Ouvrez le Centre d'impression ou l'utilitaire Configuration de l'imprimante, situé dans "Applications" — "Utilities" de "Hard Disk" et spécifiez le modèle d'imprimante. 2 A partir du menu "Imprimante (Imprimantes)", sélectionnez "Afficher Infos". La boîte de dialogue "Infos de l'imprimante" apparaît. 3 Sélectionnez "Options installables". 4 Sélectionnez l'option installée sur cet appareil. 5 Cliquez sur [Appliquer les changements] ou cliquez sur [e] pour fermer la boîte de dialogue des Infos de l'imprimante. Configurer le pilote PPD (Mac OS X) 10 IC-202 (Phase 2) 10-21 10.5 Enregistrer les paramètres de pilote Pour les pilotes Max OS X, vous pouvez enregistrer les valeurs de paramètres du pilote modifié et les rappeler si nécessaire. Enregistrer les paramètres de pilote 1 Modifiez les paramètres de pilote dans "Copies et pages" et "Disposition". 2 Dans "Préréglages", cliquez sur [Enregistrer sous]. 3 Entrez le "Enregistrer le préréglage sous". 4 Cliquez sur [OK]. Les paramètres sont enregistrés dans les paramètres prédéfinis. 10 Configurer le pilote PPD (Mac OS X) 10-22 IC-202 (Phase 2) Rétablir les paramètres % Sélectionnez "Préréglages" à partir de la boîte de dialogue "Imprimer" pour rappeler les paramètres. Les paramètres sont rappelés et la boîte de dialogue du pilote d'imprimante apparaît. Modifier les paramètres 1 Sélectionnez "Préréglages" à partir de la boîte de dialogue "Imprimer" pour modifier les paramètres. 2 Modifiez les paramètres de pilote dans "Copies et pages" et "Disposition". 3 Dans "Préréglages", cliquez sur [Enregistrer] Pour supprimer, cliquez sur [Supprimer]. Pour changer de nom, cliquez sur [Renommer]. Les paramètres prédéfinis sont modifiés. 11 Divers réglages Divers réglages 11 IC-202 (Phase 2) 11-3 11 Divers réglages 11.1 Paramètres d'impression en mode Utilitaires Vous pouvez modifier les différents paramètres d'impression sur le panneau de contrôle de cet appareil. Sélections par défaut Pour afficher l'écran de réglage des utilitaires 1 Appuyez sur la touche [Utilitaire/Compteur]. 2 Appuyez sur [2 Réglage Utilisateur]. 11 Divers réglages 11-4 IC-202 (Phase 2) L'écran des Réglages utilisateur apparaît. 2 Remarque En mode Utilitaire, vous pouvez aussi sélectionner un élément en appuyant sur une touche de clavier numérique pour taper le numéro à côté de la touche voulu. Pour [2 Réglage Utilisateur], appuyez sur la touche [2] du clavier. Pour abandonner le réglage dans le mode Utilitaire, appuyez sur [Quitt.] dans la zone d'affichage secondaire ou appuyez sur la touche [Utilitaire/Compteur]. Autrement annulez le mode Utilitaire en appuyant sur [Fermer] dans chaque écran successif jusqu'à ce que l'écran Copie, ou Fax, ou Numérisation, ou Boîte réapparaisse. Divers réglages 11 IC-202 (Phase 2) 11-5 Paramètre PDL Vous pouvez spécifier le paramètre PDL (Langage de description de page). (Sélection par défaut : Auto) 1 Sur l'écran Réglage Utilitaires, appuyez sur [6 Réglage Imprimante]. – Pour des détails sur l'affichage de l'écran Réglage Utilitaires, voir "Pour afficher l'écran de réglage des utilitaires" à la page 11-3. 2 Appuyez sur [1 Fonctions de base]. 3 Appuyez sur [Paramètre PDL]. 4 Appuyez sur la touche correspondant au réglage désiré. – Auto : Bascule automatiquement entre PCL et PS. – PCL : N'utilise que PCL. – PS : N'utilise que PS. 11 Divers réglages 11-6 IC-202 (Phase 2) Nombre de jeux Vous pouvez spécifier le nombre de copies par défaut quand aucun réglage n'a été spécifié à partir du pilote d'imprimante. (Sélection par défaut : 1 jeu) 1 Sur l'écran Réglage Utilitaires, appuyez sur [6 Réglage Imprimante]. – Pour des détails sur l'affichage de l'écran Réglage Utilitaires, voir "Pour afficher l'écran de réglage des utilitaires" à la page 11-3. 2 Appuyez sur [1 Fonctions de base]. 3 Appuyez sur [Nombre de Jeux]. 4 Appuyez sur la touche [C] (correction) pour effacer la valeur et servezvous du clavier pour taper le nombre de copies par défaut (entre 1 et 9999 jeux). – Si vous spécifiez une valeur située hors de la plage autorisée, le message "Erreur de saisie" apparaît. Tapez une valeur comprise dans la plage autorisée. 5 Appuyez sur [OK]. Le nombre de copies par défaut est défini. Pour annuler toute modification des réglages, appuyez sur [Annul.]. Divers réglages 11 IC-202 (Phase 2) 11-7 Direction original Vous pouvez spécifier l'orientation d'image par défaut. (Sélection par défaut : Portrait) 1 Sur l'écran Réglage Utilitaires, appuyez sur [6 Réglage Imprimante]. – Pour des détails sur l'affichage de l'écran Réglage Utilitaires, voir "Pour afficher l'écran de réglage des utilitaires" à la page 11-3. 2 Appuyez sur [1 Fonctions de base]. 3 Appuyez sur [Direction Original]. 4 Appuyez sur la touche correspondant au réglage désiré. – Portrait : L'image est imprimée verticalement sur la page. Paysage : L'image est imprimée horizontalement sur la page. 11 Divers réglages 11-8 IC-202 (Phase 2) Paramètre de désynchronisation Vous choisissez d'utiliser un spoule ou non. (Sélection par défaut : ON) 1 Sur l'écran Réglage Utilitaires, appuyez sur [6 Réglage Imprimante]. – Pour des détails sur l'affichage de l'écran Réglage Utilitaires, voir "Pour afficher l'écran de réglage des utilitaires" à la page 11-3. 2 Appuyez sur [1 Fonctions de base]. 3 Appuyez sur [Spool tâche dans HDD avant RIP]. Divers réglages 11 IC-202 (Phase 2) 11-9 4 Appuyez sur la touche correspondant au réglage désiré. – ON : Quand la tâche suivante est reçue pendant le traitement d'une tâche, les données d'impression sont stockées sur le disque dur. OFF : Les données d'impression ne sont pas stockées sur le disque dur. 2 Remarque Assurez-vous de ne pas modifier le réglage sur [OFF]. L'impression risque de ne pas être possible. 11 Divers réglages 11-10 IC-202 (Phase 2) Modifier format papier Vous pouvez spécifier si des formats de papier similaires 8-1/2 e 11 et A4 et 11 e 17 et A3 sont substitués les uns aux autres quand il n'y a plus de papier au format spécifié avec le pilote d'imprimante. (Sélection par défaut : OFF) 0 L'image risque d'être faussée puisque l'impression est forcée. 1 Sur l'écran Réglage Utilitaires, appuyez sur [6 Réglage Imprimante]. – Pour des détails sur l'affichage de l'écran Réglage Utilitaires, voir "Pour afficher l'écran de réglage des utilitaires" à la page 11-3. 2 Appuyez sur [1 Fonctions de base]. 3 Appuyez sur [A4/A3 <-> LTR/LGR Auto Switch]. 4 Appuyez sur le bouton correspondant au réglage désiré. Divers réglages 11 IC-202 (Phase 2) 11-11 Réglage des bannières Vous pouvez choisir d'imprimer la page bannière (par défaut : OFF). 0 Voir "Pour afficher l'écran de réglage des utilitaires" à la page 11-3 pour la méthode d'affichage de l'écran Réglage Utilisateur. 1 Appuyez sur [6 Réglage Imprimante] sur l'écran Réglage Utilisateur. 2 Appuyez sur [1 Fonctions de base]. 3 Appuyez sur la touche [ ]. 4 Appuyez sur [Réglage Bannière]. 11 Divers réglages 11-12 IC-202 (Phase 2) 5 Appuyez sur le bouton correspondant au réglage désiré. Divers réglages 11 IC-202 (Phase 2) 11-13 Densité Texte Numérotation Jeux Quand vous imprimez avec la fonction de numérotation, réglez la densité d'impression. (Par défaut : Clair) 1 Appuyez sur [6 Réglage Imprimante] sur l'écran Réglage Utilisateur. 2 Appuyez sur [1 Fonctions de base]. 3 Appuyez sur la touche [ ]. 4 Appuyez sur [Densité Texte Numérotation Jeux]. 11 Divers réglages 11-14 IC-202 (Phase 2) 5 Appuyez sur le bouton correspondant au réglage désiré. Divers réglages 11 IC-202 (Phase 2) 11-15 Bac papier Vous pouvez spécifier le magasin papier à utiliser quand aucun n'a été spécifié avec le pilote d'imprimante. (Sélection par défaut : Auto) 1 Sur l'écran Réglage Utilitaires, appuyez sur [6 Réglage Imprimante]. – Pour des détails sur l'affichage de l'écran Réglage Utilitaires, voir "Pour afficher l'écran de réglage des utilitaires" à la page 11-3. 2 Appuyez sur [2 Paramètre Papier]. 3 Appuyez sur [Magasin Papier]. 4 Appuyez sur la touche correspondant au magasin papier désiré. – Pour sélectionner automatiquement le magasin papier, appuyez sur [Auto]. 5 Appuyez sur [OK]. – Pour annuler la modification des réglages, appuyez sur [Annul.]. 11 Divers réglages 11-16 IC-202 (Phase 2) Format de papier par défaut Vous pouvez spécifier le format de papier par défaut quand aucun réglage n'a été spécifié à partir du pilote d'imprimante. (Sélection par défaut : 8-1/2 e 11) 1 Sur l'écran Réglage Utilitaires, appuyez sur [6 Réglage Imprimante]. – Pour des détails sur l'affichage de l'écran Réglage Utilitaires, voir "Pour afficher l'écran de réglage des utilitaires" à la page 11-3. 2 Appuyez sur [2 Paramètre Papier]. 3 Appuyez sur [Format Pap. Défaut]. 4 Appuyez sur la touche correspondant au réglage désiré. – Pour annuler toute modification des paramètres, appuyez sur [Annul.]. 5 Appuyez sur [OK]. Divers réglages 11 IC-202 (Phase 2) 11-17 Impression recto-verso Vous pouvez spécifier le paramètre d'impression recto-verso par défaut. (Sélection par défaut : OFF) 1 Sur l'écran Réglage Utilitaires, appuyez sur [6 Réglage Imprimante]. – Pour des détails sur l'affichage de l'écran Réglage Utilitaires, voir "Pour afficher l'écran de réglage des utilitaires" à la page 11-3. 2 Appuyez sur [2 Paramètre Papier]. 3 Appuyez sur [Impr. recto verso]. 4 Appuyez sur le bouton correspondant au réglage désiré. 11 Divers réglages 11-18 IC-202 (Phase 2) Type de reliure Vous pouvez spécifier la position de reliure par défaut pour l'impression recto verso. (Sélection par défaut : Reliure gauche) 1 Sur l'écran Réglage Utilitaires, appuyez sur [6 Réglage Imprimante]. – Pour des détails sur l'affichage de l'écran Réglage Utilitaires, voir "Pour afficher l'écran de réglage des utilitaires" à la page 11-3. 2 Appuyez sur [2 Paramètre Papier]. 3 Appuyez sur [Position Reliure]. 4 Appuyez sur le bouton correspondant au réglage désiré. Divers réglages 11 IC-202 (Phase 2) 11-19 Agrafer Vous pouvez spécifier les paramètres d'agrafage. (Sélection par défaut : OFF) 1 Sur l'écran Réglage Utilitaires, appuyez sur [6 Réglage Imprimante]. – Pour des détails sur l'affichage de l'écran Réglage Utilitaires, voir "Pour afficher l'écran de réglage des utilitaires" à la page 11-3. 2 Appuyez sur [2 Paramètre Papier]. 3 Appuyez sur [Agrafage]. 4 Appuyez sur le bouton correspondant au réglage désiré. 11 Divers réglages 11-20 IC-202 (Phase 2) Perforation Vous pouvez spécifier les paramètres de perforation. (Sélection par défaut : OFF) 1 Sur l'écran Réglage Utilitaires, appuyez sur [6 Réglage Imprimante]. – Pour des détails sur l'affichage de l'écran Réglage Utilitaires, voir "Pour afficher l'écran de réglage des utilitaires" à la page 11-3. 2 Appuyez sur [2 Paramètre Papier]. 3 Appuyez sur [ ] ou [ ] et appuyez ensuite sur [Perforation]. 4 Appuyez sur la touche correspondant au réglage désiré. Divers réglages 11 IC-202 (Phase 2) 11-21 Bac page bannière Vous pouvez configurer le magasin de la page bannière. (par défaut : Auto) 0 Voir "Pour afficher l'écran de réglage des utilitaires" à la page 11-3 pour la méthode d'affichage de l'écran Réglage Utilisateur. 1 Appuyez sur [6 Réglage Imprimante] sur l'écran Réglage Utilisateur. 2 Appuyez sur [2 Paramètre Papier]. 3 Appuyez sur [ ] ou [ ] et appuyez ensuite sur [Magasin Bannière]. 4 Appuyez sur la touche voulue. 11 Divers réglages 11-22 IC-202 (Phase 2) Numéro de police Vous pouvez spécifier la police à utiliser quand aucun réglage n'a été spécifié à partir du pilote d'imprimante. (Sélection par défaut : Courier) 1 Sur l'écran Réglage Utilitaires, appuyez sur [6 Réglage Imprimante]. – Pour des détails sur l'affichage de l'écran Réglage Utilitaires, voir "Pour afficher l'écran de réglage des utilitaires" à la page 11-3. 2 Appuyez sur [3 Paramètre PCL]. 3 Appuyez sur [1 Numéro de police]. 4 Appuyez sur [Interne]. Divers réglages 11 IC-202 (Phase 2) 11-23 5 Appuyez sur la touche correspondant au réglage désiré. – Appuyez sur [ ] ou [ ] et appuyez ensuite sur la touche du paramètre désiré. – Vous pouvez vérifier le numéro de police choisi ainsi que les unités de format de police. 6 Appuyez sur [OK]. – Pour annuler la modification des réglages, appuyez sur [Annul.]. 11 Divers réglages 11-24 IC-202 (Phase 2) Jeu de symboles Vous pouvez spécifier le jeu de symboles de police à utiliser quand aucun réglage n'a été spécifié à partir du pilote d'imprimante. (Sélection par défaut : PC-8, Code Page 437) 1 Sur l'écran Réglage Utilitaires, appuyez sur [6 Réglage Imprimante]. – Pour des détails sur l'affichage de l'écran Réglage Utilitaires, voir "Pour afficher l'écran de réglage des utilitaires" à la page 11-3. 2 Appuyez sur [3 Paramètre PCL]. 3 Appuyez sur [2 Jeu de symboles]. 4 Appuyez sur la touche correspondant au réglage désiré. – Appuyez sur [ ] ou [ ] et appuyez ensuite sur la touche du paramètre désiré. 5 Appuyez sur [OK]. – Pour annuler la modification des réglages, appuyez sur [Annul.]. Divers réglages 11 IC-202 (Phase 2) 11-25 Taille caractères Vous pouvez spécifier le format de police à utiliser quand aucun réglage n'a été spécifié à partir du pilote d'imprimante. (Sélection par défaut : Police vectorielle – 12,00 points ; Police bitmap – 10,00 caract./pouce) 1 Sur l'écran Réglage Utilitaires, appuyez sur [6 Réglage Imprimante]. – Pour des détails sur l'affichage de l'écran Réglage Utilitaires, voir "Pour afficher l'écran de réglage des utilitaires" à la page 11-3. 2 Appuyez sur [3 Paramètre PCL]. 3 Appuyez sur [3 Taille caractères]. 11 Divers réglages 11-26 IC-202 (Phase 2) 4 Appuyez sur la touche [C] (correction) pour effacer la valeur et à l'aide du clavier tapez la taille de caractères par défaut (Police vectorielle : entre 4,00 et 999,75 points ; police bitmap : entre 0,44 et 99,00 caract./pouce). – Police vectorielle : Spécifie le format de police en points. Police bitmap : Spécifie la largeur de la largeur fixe de police en caractères/pouces. – Si vous spécifiez une valeur située hors de la plage autorisée, le message "Erreur de saisie" apparaît. Tapez une valeur comprise dans la plage autorisée. 5 Appuyez sur [OK]. La taille des caractères est définie. Pour annuler toute modification des paramètres, appuyez sur [Annul.]. Divers réglages 11 IC-202 (Phase 2) 11-27 Ligne/Page Vous pouvez spécifier le nombre de lignes par page lors du test d'impression. (Sélection par défaut : 64 lignes) 1 Sur l'écran Réglage Utilitaires, appuyez sur [6 Réglage Imprimante]. – Pour des détails sur l'affichage de l'écran Réglage Utilitaires, voir "Pour afficher l'écran de réglage des utilitaires" à la page 11-3. 2 Appuyez sur [3 Paramètre PCL]. 3 Appuyez sur [4 Ligne/Page]. 4 Appuyez sur la touche [C] (correction) pour effacer la valeur et servezvous du clavier pour taper le nombre de lignes par défaut (entre 5 et 128 lignes). – Si vous spécifiez une valeur située hors de la plage autorisée, le message "Erreur de saisie" apparaît. Tapez une valeur comprise dans la plage autorisée. 5 Appuyez sur [OK]. Le nombre de lignes/page par défaut est défini. Pour annuler toute modification des réglages, appuyez sur [Annul.]. 11 Divers réglages 11-28 IC-202 (Phase 2) Mappage CR (Retour chariot)/LF (saut de ligne) Vous pouvez spécifier la méthode de substitution des données lors de l'impression de données de texte. (Sélection par défaut : OFF) Mode 1 : remplace les données reçues en CR par CR-LF. Mode 2 : remplace les données reçues en LF par CR-LF. Mode 3 : remplace toutes les données reçues par CR-LF. OFF : n'effectue aucune substitution. 1 Sur l'écran Réglage Utilitaires, appuyez sur [6 Réglage Imprimante]. – Pour des détails sur l'affichage de l'écran Réglage Utilitaires, voir "Pour afficher l'écran de réglage des utilitaires" à la page 11-3. 2 Appuyez sur [3 Paramètre PCL]. 3 Appuyez sur [5 Mappage CR/LF]. – Appuyez sur le bouton correspondant au réglage désiré. 4 Appuyez sur le bouton correspondant au réglage désiré. Divers réglages 11 IC-202 (Phase 2) 11-29 5 Appuyez sur [OK]. – Pour annuler la modification des réglages, appuyez sur [Annul.]. 11 Divers réglages 11-30 IC-202 (Phase 2) Erreur impression PS Vous pouvez spécifier s'il faut imprimer le message d'erreur quand une erreur survient pendant la rastérisation PS. (Sélection par défaut : OFF) 1 Sur l'écran Réglage Utilitaires, appuyez sur [6 Réglage Imprimante]. – Pour des détails sur l'affichage de l'écran Réglage Utilitaires, voir "Pour afficher l'écran de réglage des utilitaires" à la page 11-3. 2 Appuyez sur [4 Paramètre PS]. 3 Appuyez sur [Impress. erreur PS]. 4 Appuyez sur le bouton correspondant au réglage désiré. Divers réglages 11 IC-202 (Phase 2) 11-31 Imprimer les rapports Vous pouvez imprimer les quatre types de rapports suivants. 1 Sur l'écran Réglage Utilitaires, appuyez sur [6 Réglage Imprimante]. 2 Appuyez sur [5 Sortie rapports]. 3 Appuyez sur le bouton correspondant au réglage désiré. – Liste info de réglage : imprime une liste des paramètres de l'appareil. Page de démo : Imprime une page test. Liste polices PCL : Imprime la liste des polices PCL. Liste polices PS : Imprime la liste des polices PS. 4 Appuyez sur la touche correspondant au magasin papier désiré. 5 Pour imprimer un rapport, appuyez sur la touche [Départ]. 11 Divers réglages 11-32 IC-202 (Phase 2) 11.2 Réglages de l'imprimante en mode administrateur Pour afficher l'écran Réglage administrateur 1 Appuyez sur la touche [Utilitaire/Compteur]. 2 Appuyez sur [3 Réglage Administrateur]. 3 Tapez le mot de passe et appuyez ensuite sur [OK]. Divers réglages 11 IC-202 (Phase 2) 11-33 4 L'écran Réglage administrateur apparaît. ! Détails En mode Utilitaire, vous pouvez aussi sélectionner un élément en appuyant sur une touche de clavier numérique pour taper le numéro à côté de la touche voulu. Pour [3 Réglage Administrateur], appuyez sur la touche [3] du clavier. Pour de plus amples détails sur la définition ou la modification du mot de passe, consultez le manuel 750/600 [Opérations de copie]. ! Détails Pour abandonner le réglage dans le mode Utilitaire, appuyez sur [Quitt.] dans la zone d'affichage secondaire ou appuyez sur la touche [Utilitaire/Compteur]. Autrement annulez le mode Utilitaire en appuyant sur [Fermer] dans chaque écran successif jusqu'à ce que l'écran Copie, ou Fax, ou Numérisation, ou Boîte réapparaisse. 11 Divers réglages 11-34 IC-202 (Phase 2) Système prioritaire Vous pouvez spécifier s'il faut imprimer les données après la réception ou s'il faut les imprimer simultanément au fur et à mesure de la réception. (Sélection par défaut : Impression par lots) 1 Sur l'écran Réglage Administrateur, appuyez sur [1 Réglage Système]. – Pour des détails sur l'affichage de l'écran Réglage Administrateur, voir "Pour afficher l'écran Réglage administrateur" à la page 11-32. 2 Sur l'écran Réglage Système, appuyez sur [2 Réglage Sortie]. 3 Sur l'écran de réglage Sortie, appuyez sur [1 Paramètres de sortie Impression/Fax]. L'écran Système Prioritaire apparaît. 4 Appuyez sur [Imprimante]. Les touches des paramètres disponibles apparaissent. 5 Appuyez sur la touche correspondant au réglage désiré. Le timing d'impression est réglé. Divers réglages 11 IC-202 (Phase 2) 11-35 2 Remarque Si [Impression par lots] est sélectionné, l'impression démarre quand toutes les données sont reçues et la tâche d'impression est mise en file d'attente. Si "Impression par page" est sélectionné, l'impression démarre quand les données de la première page sont reçues et la tâche d'impression est mise en file d'attente. 11 Divers réglages 11-36 IC-202 (Phase 2) Délai de connexion I/F Vous pouvez régler l'heure à laquelle survient un délai de connexion pour l'interface parallèle, USB ou réseau. (Sélection par défaut : 60 secondes) 1 Sur l'écran Réglage Utilitaires, appuyez sur [7 Réglage Imprimante]. – Pour des détails sur l'affichage de l'écran Réglage Administrateur, voir "Pour afficher l'écran Réglage administrateur" à la page 11-32. 2 Sur l'écran Paramètre imprimante, appuyez sur [1 Délai I/F]. L'écran Délai I/F apparaît. 3 Appuyez sur [Entrée] sous le paramètre que vous voulez spécifier. 4 Appuyez sur la touche [C] (correction) pour effacer la valeur, puis servez-vous du clavier pour taper la durée par défaut (entre 10 et 1000 secondes). – Si vous spécifiez une valeur située hors de la plage autorisée, le message "Erreur de saisie" apparaît. Tapez une valeur comprise dans la plage de réglage disponible. 5 Appuyez sur [OK]. Le délai avant que l'attente de connexion ne survienne est réglé. Pour annuler toute modification des paramètres, appuyez sur [Annul.]. Divers réglages 11 IC-202 (Phase 2) 11-37 Capturer les données d'impression Vous pouvez spécifier d'autoriser ou d'interdire la capture des données d'une tâche d'impression. (Sélection par défaut : Permis) 1 Sur l'écran Réglage Administrateur, appuyez sur [0 Paramètre Sécurité]. – Pour des détails sur l'affichage de l'écran Réglage Administrateur, voir "Pour afficher l'écran Réglage administrateur" à la page 11-32. 2 Sur l'écran Paramètre Sécurité, appuyez sur [4 Détails Sécurité]. 3 Appuyez sur la touche [ ]. 4 Sur l'écran Détails Sécurité, appuyez sur [Capture Données d'Impression]. Les touches des paramètres disponibles apparaissent. 5 Appuyez sur la touche correspondant au réglage désiré. La capture d'une tâche d'impression est soit permise ou interdite. 11 Divers réglages 11-38 IC-202 (Phase 2) 2 Remarque Pour plus de détails sur la capture d'une tâche d'impression, consultez un technicien de maintenance. Divers réglages 11 IC-202 (Phase 2) 11-39 11.3 Utiliser Web Connection Web Connection est un utilitaire de gestion supporté par le serveur HTTP intégré dans le contrôleur d'impression. Lancez votre navigateur Internet sur un ordinateur du réseau pour accéder à Web Connection et modifier facilement les paramètres de cet appareil. 2 Remarque Flash et HTML sont disponibles dans Mode vue de Web Connection. Pour plus de détails, voir "Connexion et déconnexion" à la page 11-43. Configuration minimale requise Accéder à Web Connection Vous pouvez accéder à Web Connection à partir d'un navigateur Internet. 1 Lancez le navigateur Internet. 2 Dans la barre Adresse, tapez l'adresse IP de cet appareil et appuyez sur la touche [Entrée]. http:/// Exemple : si l'adresse IP de cet appareil est 192.168.1.20 http://192.168.1.20/ ! Détails Si la fonction d'authentification utilisateur est activée, vous devez saisir le nom utilisateur ou le mot de passe. Pour plus de détails, voir "Se connecter en mode Utilisateur (utilisateur public)" à la page 11-45. Pour la procédure de configuration de l'adresse IP de l'appareil, voir "Réglage de l'adresse IP pour cet appareil" à la page 4-6. Sous-menu Configuration minimale requise Réseau EthernetTCP/IP Application informatique Navigateur Internet : Microsoft Internet Explorer 6 ou supérieur recommandé (JavaScript et Cookies activés) Microsoft XML Parser MSXML3.X doit être installé si vous utilisez Internet Explorer 5.X. Netscape Navigator 7.02 ou supérieur (JavaScript activé, Cookies activés) Adobe® Flash® Player (Si "Flash" sélectionné en mode vue, le plugin version 7.0 ou supérieure est nécessaire). 11 Divers réglages 11-40 IC-202 (Phase 2) Structure de page La page qui s'affiche immédiatement après la connexion à Web Connection est la page du mode Utilisateur et elle s'affiche quand vous êtes connecté en tant qu'utilisateur public. 2 Remarque En cliquant sur [Déconnexion], vous pouvez vous connecter comme autre utilisateur ou comme administrateur. Pour plus de détails, voir "Connexion et déconnexion" à la page 11-43. La configuration d'une page Web Connection est présentée ci-dessous. 3 4 5 6 1 2 9 10 7 8 Non. Sous-menu Description 1 Mode de connexion Affiche le mode de connexion actuel (public, utilisateur enregistré, nom de compte, administrateur, administrateur de boîte). 2 [Déconnexion] Cliquez dessus pour vous déconnecter du mode actuel. 3 Affichage des états Affiche l'état des sections imprimante et scanner de cet appareil à l'aide d'icônes. Divers réglages 11 IC-202 (Phase 2) 11-41 4 Afficheur des messages Affiche l'état du problème/de l'erreur et d'autres informations d'erreur si une erreur est survenue sur cet appareil. 5 Page de fonctionnement Affiche l'état de fonctionnement de cette machine. 6 Onglet Affiche les catégories que contrôle Web Connection. Les onglets suivants s'affichent en mode Utilisateur. • Système • Tâche • Boîte • Impression • Lecture 7 Aide La page spécifiée dans "URL Manuel en ligne" s'affiche. Pour la procédure de configuration, voir "Onglet Système — Assistance en ligne" à la page 11-79. 8 Rafraîchir Cliquez dessus pour mettre à jour la page affichée. 9 Menus Etablit une liste des informations et des paramètres pour l'onglet sélectionné. les menus qui s'affichent diffèrent en fonction de l'onglet sélectionné. 10 Affichage d'informations/ de paramètres Affiche les détails de l'élément sélectionné dans le menu. Non. Sous-menu Description 11 Divers réglages 11-42 IC-202 (Phase 2) Fonction de cache des navigateurs Internet Les informations les plus récentes risquent de ne pas s'afficher sur la page de Web Connection à cause de la fonction de cache du navigateur Internet. De plus, des problèmes peuvent survenir quand vous utilisez la fonction de cache. Quand vous utilisez Web Connection, désactivez la fonction de cache de votre navigateur Internet. ! Détails Les menus et commandes peuvent varier d'un navigateur Internet à l'autre. Pour plus de détails, voir l'aide du navigateur Internet. Si la fonction de cache est activée dans le navigateur Internet et qu'une déconnexion survient en mode administrateur, la page d'attente de connexion peut s'afficher même quand vous accédez de nouveau à Page-Scope Web Connection. Quand cela survient, le panneau de contrôle de l'appareil reste bloqué et il faut mettre ce dernier hors tension et le remettre sous tension. Pour éviter de tels problèmes, désactivez la fonction de cache. Lorsque vous mettez l'appareil hors tension et sous tension à nouveau, assurez-vous de commencer par actionner l'interrupteur auxiliaire puis l'interrupteur général. De plus, attendez au moins 10 s avant de remettre l'appareil sous tension, sinon cette machine risque de ne pas fonctionner correctement. Dans Internet Explorer 1 Dans le menu "Outils", cliquez sur [Options Internet]. 2 Sous l'onglet Général, cliquez sur [Paramètres] sous "Fichiers Internet temporaires". 3 Sélectionnez "À chaque visite de la page" et cliquez ensuite sur [OK]. Dans Netscape Navigator 1 Dans le menu "Edition", cliquez sur [Préférences]. 2 Dans la case "Catégorie", choisissez [Avancé], puis "Cache". 3 Sous "Comparer la page du cache à la page du réseau", sélectionnez "A chaque fois que j'affiche la page". Divers réglages 11 IC-202 (Phase 2) 11-43 Connexion et déconnexion Lors de l'accès à Web Connection, c'est la page de connexion qui s'affiche en cas d'authentification utilisateur et de suivi de volume sur cette machine et la page de connexion en tant qu'utilisateur public en l'absence d'authentification et de suivi de volume. Pour vous connecter en tant qu'utilisateur différent et en tant qu'administrateur, vous devez vous déconnecter puis vous reconnecter. 2 Remarque Si aucune opération n'est effectuée pendant un laps de temps défini alors que vous êtes connecté, une déconnexion survient automatiquement et aucune opération ne peut être effectuée. Vous pouvez régler le délai de déconnexion survenant en mode Utilisateur et en mode Administrateur dans "Réseau" – "Authentification" – "Déconnexion auto" du mode Administrateur. 11 Divers réglages 11-44 IC-202 (Phase 2) Déconnexion % Cliquez sur [Déconnexion] en haut à gauche de la page. La page de connexion apparaît en cliquant sur [OK]. Divers réglages 11 IC-202 (Phase 2) 11-45 Se connecter en mode Utilisateur (utilisateur public) En l'absence d'authentification utilisateur, connectez-vous en tant qu'utilisateur public. 1 Sur la page de connexion, sélectionnez "Utilisateur public". – Au besoin, sélectionnez la langue et le format d'affichage. – Si le format d'affichage "Flash" est sélectionné, les éléments suivants sont affichés avec le masque Flash. Icônes et images d'état État "Onglet Système – Info sur le périphérique – Bac d'entrée" État "Onglet Système" – Flash Player est nécessaire au masque "Flash". 11 Divers réglages 11-46 IC-202 (Phase 2) 2 Cliquez sur [Connexion]. La page change et passe en mode Utilisateur. Divers réglages 11 IC-202 (Phase 2) 11-47 Se connecter en mode Utilisateur (utilisateur enregistré) En cas d'authentification utilisateur sur cette machine, vous devez vous connecter avec le nom d'utilisateur et le mot de passe qui sont enregistrés sur cette machine ou sur un serveur d'authentification externe. Ce chapitre décrit la procédure de connexion avec un nom d'utilisateur spécifié en cas d'authentification de l'utilisateur. 1 Sur la page de connexion, entrez le nom d'utilisateur et le mot de passe. – En cas de suivi de volume, entrez le nom du compte et le mot de passe. – Au besoin, sélectionnez la langue et le format d'affichage. – Si le format d'affichage "Flash" est sélectionné, les éléments suivants sont affichés avec le masque Flash. Icônes et images d'état État "Onglet Système – Info sur le périphérique – Bac d'entrée" État "Onglet Système" – Flash Player est nécessaire au masque "Flash". 11 Divers réglages 11-48 IC-202 (Phase 2) 2 Cliquez sur [Connexion]. La page change et passe en mode Utilisateur. 2 Rappel Lorsque les paramètres d'authentification d'utilisateur ou de compte sont spécifiés sur cette machine, que la fonction de restriction des opérations d'authentification est en Mode 2 et que les informations d'authentification ne sont saisies correctement, l'utilisateur ou le compte concerné est verrouillé et plus aucun accès n'est possible. 2 Remarque Cliquez sur l'icône à droite de "Nom de propriétaire" pour sélectionner le nom d'utilisateur sur une liste. Si plusieurs domaines sont spécifiés en tant qu'authentification par serveur externe sur cette machine, ajoutez "@" après le nom d'utilisateur et indiquez le nom du domaine. (Exemple : si le nom d'utilisateur est "utilisateur01" et que le nom de domaine est "domaine", entrez "utilisateur01@domaine".) Divers réglages 11 IC-202 (Phase 2) 11-49 Se connecter en mode Administrateur La connexion en mode Administrateur vous permet de spécifier les paramètres système et les paramètres réseau. 0 Pendant la connexion au mode Administrateur, le panneau de contrôle de la machine est verrouillé et aucune opération n'est disponible. La connexion au mode Administrateur n'est pas toujours disponible en fonction de l'état de la machine. 1 Dans la page de connexion, sélectionnez "Administrateur" et cliquez sur [Connexion]. – Au besoin, sélectionnez la langue et le format d'affichage. – Si le format d'affichage "Flash" est sélectionné, les éléments suivants sont affichés avec le masque Flash. Icônes et images d'état État "Onglet Système – Info sur le périphérique – Bac d'entrée" État "Onglet Système" – Flash Player est nécessaire au masque "Flash". 11 Divers réglages 11-50 IC-202 (Phase 2) 2 Entrez le mot de passe de l'administrateur de cette machine et cliquez ensuite sur [OK]. La page change et passe en mode Administrateur. Divers réglages 11 IC-202 (Phase 2) 11-51 2 Remarque Quand vous êtes connecté en mode administrateur, le panneau de contrôle de la machine est verrouillé et ne peut pas être utilisé. Selon l'état de l'appareil, il se peut que vous ne puissiez pas vous connecter en mode Administrateur. 2 Remarque Si le format d'affichage "Flash" est sélectionné, les éléments suivants sont affichés avec le masque Flash. Icônes et images d'état État "Onglet Système – Info sur le périphérique – Bac d'entrée" État "Onglet Tâche" Flash Player est nécessaire au masque "Flash". Si vous utilisez le logiciel de lecture d'écran, il est recommandé de sélectionner HTML. 11 Divers réglages 11-52 IC-202 (Phase 2) Mode Utilisateur Le mode utilisateur offre des fonctions de contrôle et d'exploitation de l'appareil à un niveau utilisateur. Vous avez le choix entre cinq onglets (Système, Tâche, Boîte, Impression ou Lecture). 2 Remarque Ce manuel décrit les fonctions liées à l'imprimante. Pour les fonctions de boîte et de scanner de cet appareil, consulter le Guide de l'utilisateur [Opérations Boîte] et le Guide de l'utilisateur [Opérations Scanner Réseau]. Divers réglages 11 IC-202 (Phase 2) 11-53 Onglet Système L'onglet Système permet d'afficher des informations et des paramètres relatifs à la configuration système de cet appareil. Onglet Système — Info sur le périphérique — Consommables Sous l'onglet Système, cliquez sur [Info sur le périphérique] et ensuite sur [Consommables] dans le sous-menu qui s'affiche. Par ailleurs, c'est la page d'accueil qui s'affiche quand vous accédez à http:///avec votre navigateur Internet. Cette page affiche les informations de consommable de cette machine. 2 Remarque Les rubriques affichées peuvent varier en fonction des différentes options installées. Sous-menu Description Toner Affiche les informations pour chaque élément. Poussière de perforation Agrafer 11 Divers réglages 11-54 IC-202 (Phase 2) Onglet Système — Info sur le périphérique — Bac d'entrée Sous l'onglet Système, cliquez sur [Info sur le périphérique] et ensuite sur [Bac d'entrée] dans le sous-menu qui s'affiche. Vous pouvez contrôler l'état des bacs d'entrée de cet appareil. 2 Remarque Si le format "HTML" est sélectionné en mode Vue lors de la connexion, vous pouvez vérifier les détails en sélectionnant chaque magasin et en cliquant sur [Détail]. Sous-menu Description Magasin Affiche les informations pour chaque élément. Format papier Type de papier Etat papier Capacité de papier Divers réglages 11 IC-202 (Phase 2) 11-55 Onglet Système — Info sur le périphérique — Bac de sortie Sous l'onglet Système, cliquez sur [Info sur le périphérique] et ensuite sur [Bac de sortie] dans le sous-menu qui s'affiche. Vous pouvez contrôler l'état des bacs de sortie de cet appareil. Sous-menu Description Bac de sortie Affiche le nom du bas et l'état de chaque bac installé. Option Affiche si une option est installée. 11 Divers réglages 11-56 IC-202 (Phase 2) Onglet Système — Info sur le périphérique — Sommaire de configuration Sous l'onglet Système, cliquez sur [Info sur le périphérique] et ensuite sur [Sommaire de configuration] dans le sous-menu qui s'affiche. Cette page affiche la configuration système actuelle ainsi que l'état de cet appareil. Sous-menu Description Sommaire de configuration Affiche la configuration des options installées sur cette machine. Divers réglages 11 IC-202 (Phase 2) 11-57 Onglet Système — Info sur le périphérique — Disque dur Sous l'onglet Système, cliquez sur [Info sur le périphérique] et ensuite sur [Disque dur] dans le sous-menu qui s'affiche. Vous pouvez contrôler l'état du disque dur de cet appareil. Sous-menu Description Nom Affiche le nom du disque dur. Total Affiche la taille totale du disque dur installé. Utilisé Affiche la quantité d'espace occupée par le système sur le disque dur. Reste Affiche la quantité d'espace libre sur le disque dur. 11 Divers réglages 11-58 IC-202 (Phase 2) Onglet Système — Info sur le périphérique — Information sur interface Sous l'onglet Système, cliquez sur [Info sur le périphérique] et ensuite sur [Information sur interface] dans le sous-menu qui s'affiche. Vous pouvez contrôler les informations d'interface pour cet appareil. Sous-menu Description Information sur protocole Affiche l'état d'activité de chaque protocole. Information sur réseau Affiche les informations de réseau. Divers réglages 11 IC-202 (Phase 2) 11-59 Onglet Système — Info sur le périphérique — Information administrateur Sous l'onglet Système, cliquez sur [Info sur le périphérique] et ensuite sur [Information administrateur] dans le sous-menu qui s'affiche. Cette page affiche les informations administrateur de cette machine. 2 Remarque L'état risque de ne pas s'afficher correctement si les consommables ne sont pas installés. Sous-menu Description Information administrateur Affiche les informations sur l'administrateur. 11 Divers réglages 11-60 IC-202 (Phase 2) Onglet Système — Compteur Cliquez sur l'onglet Système puis, dans le menu, cliquez sur [Compteur]. Vous pouvez contrôler les compteurs que gère cet appareil. Sous-menu Description Compteur total Affiche le total du compteur de sortie (copies, impressions, numérisations et fax). Compteur de copies Affiche chaque compteur. Compteur d'impressions Compteur Numéris. (Apparaît comme Compteur Numéris./Fax si le kit Fax en option est installé.) Divers réglages 11 IC-202 (Phase 2) 11-61 Onglet Système — Assistance en ligne Cliquez sur l'onglet Système puis, dans le menu, cliquez sur [Assistance en ligne]. Vous pouvez contrôler les informations d'assistance à propos du produit. Sous-menu Description Nom de la personne de contact Affiche chaque rubrique spécifié sur la page Assistance en ligne à partir de l'onglet Système en mode Administrateur. Information sur la personne de contact URL aide produit URL d'entreprise Fournitures et accessoires URL aide en ligne 11 Divers réglages 11-62 IC-202 (Phase 2) Onglet Système — Authentification d'utilisateur — Modif. du mot de passe utilis. Sous l'onglet Système, cliquez sur [Authentification d'utilisateur] et ensuite sur [Modif. du mot de passe utilis.] dans le sous-menu qui s'affiche. Vous pouvez modifier le mot de passe de l'utilisateur connecté. 2 Remarque Il est impossible de modifier le mot de passe si vous n'êtes pas connecté en tant qu'utilisateur. Sous-menu Description Mot de passe actuel Entrez le mot de passe actuel. Nouveau mot de passe Entrez le nouveau mot de passe. (jusqu'à 64 caractères alphanumériques, sauf " +) Retaper nouveau mot de passe Confirmez le nouveau mot de passe en le retapant. Divers réglages 11 IC-202 (Phase 2) 11-63 Onglet Système — Authentification d'utilisateur — Information utilisateur Sous l'onglet Système, cliquez sur [Authentification d'utilisateur] et ensuite sur [Information utilisateur] dans le sous-menu qui s'affiche. Affiche les informations de l'utilisateur connecté. 2 Remarque Les informations utilisateur ne s'affichent pas si vous n'êtes pas connecté tant qu'utilisateur. Sous-menu Description Information utilisateur Affiche le nom de l'utilisateur. Permission Fonction Affiche les fonctions utilisables sur cette machine. Information compteur Affiche la valeur maximale et le compteur actuel. 11 Divers réglages 11-64 IC-202 (Phase 2) Onglet Système — Inform. compte département Sous l'onglet Système cliquez sur [Inform. compte département]. Affiche les informations de suivi de volume de l'utilisateur connecté. 2 Remarque Les informations de compte de département si la fonction de suivi de volume n'est pas activée sur cette machine. Sous-menu Description Inform. compte département Affiche le nom du compte. Information compteur Affiche la valeur maximale et le compteur actuel. Divers réglages 11 IC-202 (Phase 2) 11-65 Onglet Tâche Sur l'onglet "Tâche", vous pouvez vérifier les tâches gérées par cet appareil. Onglet Tâche — Tâches en cours Sous l'onglet Tâches, cliquez sur [Tâches en cours] dans le menu et sélectionnez ensuite chaque fonction (opération d'impression et de numérisation) par type de tâche. Vous pouvez contrôler des tâches en cours d'impression ou dans la file d'attente d'impression. Page échantillon Sous-menu Description Impression Affiche la liste et les détails des tâches d'impression. Lecture Affiche la liste et les détails des tâches de numérisation. Émission Fax Affiche la liste et les détails des tâches d'émission de fax. Réception Fax Affiche la liste et les détails des tâches de réception de fax. Mémoire HDD Affiche la liste et les détails des tâches de boîte. 11 Divers réglages 11-66 IC-202 (Phase 2) 2 Remarque Le numéro de tâche affecté lors de la mise en file d'attente de cette tâche dans l'appareil apparaît comme numéro de tâche. Pour une sortie prioritaire (tâches d'impression), sélectionnez la tâche et cliquez ensuite sur [Augmenter priorité]. Pour vérifier une adresse (des tâches d'émission), sélectionnez la tâche et cliquez ensuite sur [Afficher la destination de diffusion]. Pour supprimer une tâche, sélectionnez-la et cliquez ensuite sur [Supprimer]. Divers réglages 11 IC-202 (Phase 2) 11-67 Onglet Tâche — Historique tâches Sous l'onglet Tâches, cliquez sur [Historique tâches] dans le menu et sélectionnez ensuite chaque fonction (opération d'impression et de numérisation) par type de tâche. Vous pouvez vérifier les tâches terminées. Page échantillon 2 Remarque Le numéro de tâche affecté lors de la mise en file d'attente de cette tâche dans l'appareil apparaît comme numéro de tâche. Si le format "HTML" est sélectionné en mode Vue lors de la connexion, vous pouvez vérifier les détails en sélectionnant chaque magasin et en cliquant sur [Détail]. Sous-menu Description Impression Affiche la liste et les détails des tâches d'impression. Lecture Affiche la liste et les détails des tâches de numérisation. Émission Fax Affiche la liste et les détails des tâches d'émission de fax. Réception Fax Affiche la liste et les détails des tâches de réception de fax. Mémoire HDD Affiche la liste et les détails des tâches de boîte. 11 Divers réglages 11-68 IC-202 (Phase 2) Onglet Impression Vous pouvez vérifier les paramètres par défaut de l'imprimante et imprimer différents rapports. Onglet Impression — Réglage général Sous l'onglet Tâche, cliquez sur [Réglage général] dans le menu et sélectionnez ensuite chaque catégorie de paramètre (Générale et PCL). En cas d'envoi d'une tâche d'impression dont les paramètres ne sont pas spécifiés, ce sont les paramètres par défaut indiqués ici qui servent à l'impression. Page échantillon des réglages par défaut Sous-menu Description Réglage Général Affiche les informations pour chaque élément. Param. PCL Configuration PS Divers réglages 11 IC-202 (Phase 2) 11-69 Onglet Impression — Sortie rapport Sous l'onglet Impression, cliquez sur [Sortie rapport]. Vous pouvez imprimer diverses informations de configuration, les page de démonstration et des informations sur les polices PCL. Sélectionnez le rapport que vous voulez imprimer, sélectionnez le plateau papier dans la liste déroulante "Bac papier" et cliquez ensuite sur [Impression]. 2 Remarque Quand cet appareil est en train de traiter une tâche, vous ne pouvez pas imprimer de rapports. Sous-menu Description Liste des polices PS Imprime la liste des polices utilisées par PostScript. Liste des polices PCL Imprime la liste des polices utilisées par PCL. Page de démonstration Imprime une page de démonstration. Page de configuration Imprime différentes pages de configuration de cet appareil. Magasin papier Sélectionnez le bac papier pour imprimer les rapports. 11 Divers réglages 11-70 IC-202 (Phase 2) Mode Administrateur En mode Administrateur, vous pouvez spécifier les paramètres système pour cet appareil. Vous avez le choix entre six onglets (Système, Tâche, Boîte, Impression, Lecture ou Réseau). Pour plus de détails sur la connexion en mode administrateur, voir "Se connecter en mode Administrateur" à la page 11-49. 2 Remarque Ce manuel décrit les fonctions liées à l'imprimante. Pour les fonctions de boîte et de scanner et de réseau de cet appareil, consulter le Guide de l'utilisateur [Opérations Boîte] et le Guide de l'utilisateur [Opérations Scanner Réseau]. Fonctionnement de base 1 Cliquez sur un onglet et sélectionnez ensuite un élément du menu. 2 Spécifiez les paramètres pour les éléments affichés. Vous pouvez entrer un paramètre directement ou le choisir dans une zone de liste déroulante. 3 Cliquez sur [Appliquer] pour appliquer les réglages. Divers réglages 11 IC-202 (Phase 2) 11-71 Onglet Système L'onglet Système permet d'afficher des informations et des paramètres relatifs à la configuration système de cet appareil. Onglet Système — Importer/Exporter Vous pouvez enregistrer (exporter) les informations de réglage de cet appareil comme fichier ou écrire (importer) les informations d'un fichier sur cet appareil. Spécifiez les informations à importer ou à exporter et cliquez ensuite sur [Suivant]. Sous-menu Description Réglage du périphérique Indiquez les valeurs de réglage pour les paramètres utilisateur et administrateur de cette machine. Journal de transmission Spécifiez le journal de transmission de cette machine. Information utilisateur Spécifiez les informations d'enregistrement d'utilisateur. 11 Divers réglages 11-72 IC-202 (Phase 2) Spécifiez le fichier à importer ou exporter. 2 Remarque Il n'est pas possible de modifier les fichiers exportés. 2 Remarque Le journal de transmission peut uniquement être exporté. Sous-menu Description Importer Pour importer un fichier, spécifiez le nom que vous voulez importer et cliquez sur [Importer]. Exporter Pour télécharger un fichier, cliquez sur [Exporter]. Divers réglages 11 IC-202 (Phase 2) 11-73 Onglet Système — Date/Heure — Réglage manuel Tapez l'heure et la date pour cet appareil. Sous-menu Description Année Tapez l'année. Mois Tapez le mois. Jour Tapez le jour. Heure Tapez l'heure. Minute Tapez les minutes. Zone d'heure Spécifiez le décalage horaire par rapport à GMT. Heure d'été Spécifiez si l'heure est exprimée en heure d'économie de lumière du jour (plage de saisie : 1 à 150, unité : minutes). 11 Divers réglages 11-74 IC-202 (Phase 2) Onglet Système — Date/Heure — Param. régl. heure L'heure et la date de cet appareil peuvent être définis par acquisition passive auprès du serveur NTP. Cliquez sur [Ajuster] pour se connecter aux conditions spécifiées au serveur NTP et régler l'heure. Sous-menu Description Réglage Date/Heure Spécifiez s'il faut activer l'acquisition automatique de l'heure par NTP. Adresse serveur NTP Tapez l'adresse du serveur NTP (jusqu'à 255 caractères, – . inclus uniquement, format : "***.***.***.***" ou FQDN). Numéro de port Entrez le port du serveur NTP (plage d'entrée : 1 à 65535). Divers réglages 11 IC-202 (Phase 2) 11-75 Onglet Système — Paramètres Machine Vous pouvez modifier les paramètres de la machine. Sous-menu Description Nom périphérique Spécifiez le nom du périphérique (jusqu'à 255 caractères). Emplacement du périphérique Spécifiez l'emplacement du périphérique (jusqu'à 255 caractères). Nom de l'administrateur Spécifiez le nom de l'administrateur (jusqu'à 255 caractères). Numéro extension Définissez le numéro d'extension (jusqu'à huit caractères alphanumériques et symboles). 11 Divers réglages 11-76 IC-202 (Phase 2) Onglet Système — Info sur le périphérique Sous l'onglet Système, cliquez sur [Info sur le périphérique] et sélectionnez ensuite chaque paramètre (Consommables, Bac d'entrée, etc.). Cette page affiche la configuration et l'état de cet appareil. 2 Remarque La rubrique affichée est la même que sur l'onglet Système dans "Info sur le périphérique" en mode Utilisateur. Divers réglages 11 IC-202 (Phase 2) 11-77 Onglet Système — Version ROM Affiche la version ROM. 11 Divers réglages 11-78 IC-202 (Phase 2) Onglet Système — Compteur Sous l'onglet Système cliquez sur [Compteur] dans le menu. Vous pouvez contrôler les compteurs que gère cet appareil. Sous-menu Description Compteur total Affiche le total du compteur de sortie (copies, impressions, numérisations et fax). Compteur de copies Affiche chaque compteur. Compteur d'impressions Compteur Numéris. (Apparaît comme Compteur Numéris./Fax si le kit Fax en option est installé.) Compteur format/type papier Affiche le compteur du format et du type de papier. Divers réglages 11 IC-202 (Phase 2) 11-79 Onglet Système — Assistance en ligne Vous pouvez modifier les informations d'assistance en ligne. Pour afficher ces informations, cliquez sur l'onglet Système en mode utilisateur et cliquez ensuite sur [Assistance en ligne]. Onglet Système — Entretien — Effacer la config. réseau Vous pouvez rétablir la configuration réseau départ usine de cet appareil. Pour procéder au rétablissement, cliquez sur [Effacer]. Sous-menu Description Nom de la personne de contact Spécifiez le nom du contact (jusqu'à 63 caractères). Information sur la personne de contact Spécifiez les informations du contact (jusqu'à 127 caractères). URL aide produit Spécifiez l'URL de la page Internet des informations produit (jusqu'à 127 caractères, sauf < >). URL d'entreprise Spécifiez l'URL de la page Internet du fabricant (jusqu'à 127 caractères, sauf < >). Fournitures et accessoires Spécifiez les informations de contact pour les fournitures et les accessoires (jusqu'à 127 caractères). 11 Divers réglages 11-80 IC-202 (Phase 2) 2 Remarque Si vous effacez les paramètres après avoir terminé la configuration, vous ne pourrez pas vous connecter à Web Connection avant que les réglages ne soient réinitialisés. Si le mode de sécurité avancé est activé, ce menu ne s'affichera pas. Divers réglages 11 IC-202 (Phase 2) 11-81 Onglet Système — Entretien — Réinitialisation Réinitialise le contrôleur d'impression. Pour procéder à la réinitialisation, cliquez sur [Réinitialisation]. 11 Divers réglages 11-82 IC-202 (Phase 2) Onglet Système — Entretien — Formater ttes destinations Toutes les destinations sont effacées. Pour procéder au formatage, cliquez sur [Format], puis sur [OK]. Divers réglages 11 IC-202 (Phase 2) 11-83 Onglet Système — Paramètres notification statut Quand une erreur survient sur cet appareil, la personne enregistrée est avertie. Entrez l'heure de notification et cliquez ensuite sur [Appliquer]. 11 Divers réglages 11-84 IC-202 (Phase 2) Cliquez sur l'icône [Editer] à la droite d'une adresse de notification pour spécifier l'adresse de destination et les conditions de notification. Sous-menu Description Adresse de notification Tapez l'adresse e-mail de destination de notification (320 caractères max.). Remplir bac papier Avertit quand il n'y a plus de papier. BOURRAGE Avertit en cas de bourrage papier. Appel PM Avertit en cas d'entretien programmé. Ajouter pile Avertit quand il n'y a plus d'agrafes. Remettre toner Avertit quand il n'y a plus de toner. Bac de finition plein Avertit quand le bac de finition est plein. Appel service aprèsvente Avertit en cas d'appel service après-vente. Fin du travail Avertit quand une tâche est terminée (terminée normalement). Collecteur de perforat. plein Avertit que la boîte de déchets de perforation doit être vidée. Divers réglages 11 IC-202 (Phase 2) 11-85 2 Remarque L'emplacement de l'imprimante mentionnée dans l'e-mail envoyé par la fonction de notification d'état se saisit dans "Position imprimante" sur l'onglet Réseau — Paramètre IPP. Pour "Position imprimante", voir "Impression IPP (Windows 2000/XP/Server 2003/XP x64/Server 2003 x64)" à la page 4-14. 11 Divers réglages 11-86 IC-202 (Phase 2) Onglet Système – Configuration rapport compteur total Vous pouvez enregistrer les paramètres de notification du compteur total par e-mail ainsi que l'adresse e-mail de notification. Entrez tous les éléments et cliquez sur [Appliquer] pour spécifier les paramètres. Après spécification des paramètres, cliquez sur [Envoyer maintenant] pour envoyer la notification par e-mail. Divers réglages 11 IC-202 (Phase 2) 11-87 Sous-menu Description Config. rapport compteur total (Pseudonyme périphérique) Entrez le nom du modèle à afficher dans la liste (jusqu'à 20 caractères alphanumériques et symboles). Configuration de calendrier Spécifie les conditions du calendrier de notification. Vous pouvez enregistrer des réglages différents pour le calendrier 1 et 2. Adresse de notification Tapez l'adresse e-mail de destination de notification (320 caractères max.). Il est possible de sélectionner un calendrier de notification pour l'adresse entrée. 11 Divers réglages 11-88 IC-202 (Phase 2) Onglet Système — Authentification d'utilisateur — Enregist. utilis. En cas d'authentification utilisateur sur cette machine, vous pouvez enregistrer les utilisateurs pouvant se connecter. Vous pouvez enregistrer un utilisateur dans "Nouvel enregistrement". Cliquez sur l'icône [Editer] à la droite d'un nom d'utilisateur pour modifier les conditions d'un utilisateur enregistré. Divers réglages 11 IC-202 (Phase 2) 11-89 Vous pouvez spécifier les conditions d'un utilisateur en saisissant chaque rubrique et en cliquant sur [Appliquer]. Sous-menu Description Enregist. utilis. Entrez le nom d'utilisateur et le mot de passe. N° : numéro affecté pour le compteur d'utilisateur (jusqu'à 1000) Nom d'utilisateur : 1 à 64 caractères Adresse E-Mail : jusqu'à 320 caractères Mot de passe : jusqu'à 64 caractères, sauf " + Permission Fonction Spécifiez les fonctions utilisables sur cette machine. Définir crédit Spécifiez la valeur maximale pouvant être utilisée. 11 Divers réglages 11-90 IC-202 (Phase 2) Onglet Système — Authentification d'utilisateur — Perm. par Défaut Fonctions Vous pouvez spécifier les valeurs par défaut des fonctions limitées sur la page d'enregistrement d'utilisateur. Divers réglages 11 IC-202 (Phase 2) 11-91 Onglet Système — Enregistrement Compte En cas de suivi de volume sur cette machine ; vous pouvez enregistrer le compte à gérer. Vous pouvez enregistrer un compte dans "Nouvel enregistrement". Cliquez sur l'icône [Editer] à la droite d'un nom de compte pour modifier les conditions d'un compte enregistré. 11 Divers réglages 11-92 IC-202 (Phase 2) Vous pouvez spécifier les données du compte en complétant tous les champs, puis en cliquant sur [Appliquer]. Sous-menu Description Enregistrement Compte Permet d'entrer le nom et le mot de passe du compte. N° : numéro affecté pour le compteur de comptes (jusqu'à 1000) Nom de compte : 1 à 8 caractères, sauf " + Mot de passe : 1à 8 caractères, sauf " + Définir crédit Spécifiez la valeur maximale pouvant être utilisée. Divers réglages 11 IC-202 (Phase 2) 11-93 Onglet Système — Mot de passe de l'administrateur Le mot de passe administrateur peut être modifié. 2 Remarque Le mot de passe ne peut être changé dans le mode sécurité. 11 Divers réglages 11-94 IC-202 (Phase 2) Onglet Tâche — Historique tâches Sous l'onglet Tâches, cliquez sur [Historique tâches] dans le menu. Sélectionnez chaque fonction (opérations d'impression et de numérisation) par type de tâche. Vous pouvez vérifier les tâches terminées. Exemple de page imprimée 2 Remarque La rubrique affichée est la même que sur l'onglet Tâche dans "Historique tâches" en mode Utilisateur. Divers réglages 11 IC-202 (Phase 2) 11-95 Onglet Impression L'onglet Impression comporte des informations et des réglages relatifs à l'interface de connexion et aux paramètres d'impression par défaut. Onglet Impression — Interface Vous pouvez modifier les paramètres de temporisation d'interface. 2 Remarque Les rubriques affichées peuvent varier en fonction des différentes options installées. Sous-menu Description Temporisation parallèle Entrez la temporisation de réception pour le port parallèle (plage d'entrée : 10 à 1000). Temporisation réseau Entrez la temporisation de réception pour le réseau (plage d'entrée : 10 à 1000). Temporisation USB Entrez la temporisation USB (plage d'entrée : 10 à 1000). 11 Divers réglages 11-96 IC-202 (Phase 2) Onglet Impression — Paramètre Port RAW Vous pouvez vérifier l'efficacité du port RAW. Divers réglages 11 IC-202 (Phase 2) 11-97 Onglet Impression — Réglage par défaut — Réglage général Vous pouvez spécifier les valeurs de réglage par défaut de l'imprimante. Sous-menu Description Paramètre PDL Sélectionnez la languie de description de l'imprimante. Bac papier Permet de sélectionner le bac papier. Bac de sortie Permet de sélectionner le bac de sortie. Impression recto-verso Permet de désélectionner l'impression recto-verso. Type de reliure Sélectionnez la position de la marge de reliure. Agrafer Sélectionnez la fonction d'agrafage. Perforation Sélectionnez la fonction de perforation. Nombre de jeux Sélectionnez le nombre de copies à imprimer. Format de papier par défaut Sélectionnez un format papier. Orientation original Permet de sélectionner l'orientation d'impression. Spool tâche dans HDD avant RIP Sélectionnez la fonction de spoule sur disque dur. Réglage Bannière Indiquez s'il faut imprimer les bandeaux. 11 Divers réglages 11-98 IC-202 (Phase 2) 2 Remarque Les rubriques affichées peuvent varier en fonction des différentes options installées. Bac pour bandeau Sélectionne le bac papier à utiliser pour l'impression des bandeaux. Définition Papier inadéquat magasin Sélectionne l'opération lorsque le bac d'entrée ne contient pas le papier approprié. Changer bacs (Priorité bac) : alimente le papier à partir d'un autre bac papier. Stop impression (magasin fixe) : affiche un message d'avertissement sans imprimer. A4/A3 <-> LTR/LGR Auto Switch Décidez d'imprimer des documents 8-1/2 e 11 (A4)/11 e 17 (A3) quand la source papier A4 (8-1/2 e 11)/A3 (11 e 17) est sélectionnée. Sous-menu Description Divers réglages 11 IC-202 (Phase 2) 11-99 Onglet Impression — Réglage par défaut — Configuration PCL Vous pouvez spécifier les valeurs de réglage par défaut du mode PCL. Sous-menu Description Caractères Sélectionnez la police. Jeu de symboles Sélectionnez le jeu de caractères. Taille caractères Spécifiez l'espacement de la police (plage d'entrée : 0,44 à 99,00) ou la taille du point de la police (plage d'entrée : 4,00 à 999,75) selon la police sélectionnée. Ligne/Page Entrez le nombre de lignes par page (plage d'entrée : 5 à 128). Mappage CR/LF Sélectionnez le mode CR/LF. 11 Divers réglages 11-100 IC-202 (Phase 2) Onglet Impression — Réglage par défaut — Configuration PS Vous pouvez spécifier les valeurs de réglage par défaut du mode PS. Sous-menu Description Erreur impression PS Spécifiez s'il faut activer l'impression des erreurs. Divers réglages 11 IC-202 (Phase 2) 11-101 Onglet Lecture L'onglet Lecture permet d'afficher les réglages lors de l'émission et les informations et les réglages relatifs aux limitations de carnet d'adresses. 11 Divers réglages 11-102 IC-202 (Phase 2) Onglet Réseau L'onglet Réseau affiche des informations et des réglages relatifs à la connexion réseau. Onglet Réseau — Paramètre TCP/IP— Paramètre TCP/IP Vous permet de spécifier les paramètres TCP/IP. Divers réglages 11 IC-202 (Phase 2) 11-103 2 Remarque Pour une méthode détaillée de l'onglet Réseau, reportez-vous au "Guide de l'utilisateur (Opérations Scanner réseau)". 11 Divers réglages 11-104 IC-202 (Phase 2) 11.4 Gestion des tâches d'impression Spécification des opérations d'impression % Vous pouvez spécifier le fonctionnement des tâches sur cet appareil en configurant le pilote d'imprimante. 2 Remarque Les trois pilotes d'imprimante utilisables sur cette machine sont les suivants : Pilote d'imprimante PCL pour Windows Pilote d'imprimante PS pour Windows 2000/XP/ Server 2003/XP x64/Server 2003 x64 Pilote d'imprimante pour Mac OS X Spécification des réglages (pour Windows) 1 Cliquez sur [Propriétés] dans la boîte de dialogue Imprimer pour ouvrir la boîte de dialogue de configuration du pilote d'imprimante. 2 Cliquez sur l'onglet Configuration (pilote PCL ou PostScript). 3 A partir de la zone de liste déroulante "Type de sortie", sélectionnez la méthode de sortie. Impression : imprime immédiatement. Impression sécurisée : insère l'ID et le mot de passe sur le panneau de contrôle de cet appareil, avant d'imprimer. (jusqu'à 100 documents) Enreg. dans boîte utilisateur : enregistre le document à imprimer dans une boîte de cet appareil. Enr. dns boîte utilis, imprim. : enregistre le document dans une boîte et l'imprime simultanément. Attente avec épreuve : après l'impression d'une partie du document, cet appareil s'arrête provisoirement d'imprimer. Sélectionnez pour éviter de mal imprimer un grand volume de tâches d'impression. Divers réglages 11 IC-202 (Phase 2) 11-105 ! Détails Pour plus de détails, voir "Sélectionner le type de sortie" à la page 6-18 et page 7-25. 11 Divers réglages 11-106 IC-202 (Phase 2) Spécification des réglages (pour Mac OS X) 1 Dans le menu "Fichier", sélectionnez "Imprimer". 2 Sélectionnez "Sécurité". 3 Spécifiez les paramètres des éléments suivants : Imprimer : Spécifie les conditions pour "Impression sécurisée" et "Tâches en attente". Impression sécurisée : insère ID et mot de passe quand "Impression sécurisée" est sélectionné dans "Type de sortie". Tapez l'ID et le mot de passe sur le panneau de contrôle de cet appareil quand vous imprimez. (jusqu'à 100 documents) Enreg. dans boîte utilisateur : insère le nom de fichier et le numéro de boîte quand "Enreg. dans boîte utilisateur" ou "Enr. dns boîte utilis, imprim." est sélectionné dans "Type de sortie". Attente avec épreuve : après l'impression d'un exemplaire du document, cet appareil s'arrête provisoirement d'imprimer. Sélectionnez pour éviter de mal imprimer un grand volume de tâches d'impression. Divers réglages 11 IC-202 (Phase 2) 11-107 Stockage des tâches En fonction des réglages de "Type de sortie" du pilote d'imprimante, un document d'impression peut être stocké dans cet appareil comme tâche d'impression. Pour imprimer une tâche stockée, vous devez rappeler la tâche à partir du panneau de contrôle de cet appareil. Rappeler la tâche Vous pouvez rappeler une tâche enregistrée dans la machine depuis "Impression sécurisée" ou "Enreg. dans boîte utilisateur". 11 Divers réglages 11-108 IC-202 (Phase 2) Impression sécurisée 1 Appuyez sur [Boîte] sur le panneau de contrôle. 2 Appuyez sur [Boîte Ut. système] et [Boîte RX sécurisé]. 3 Tapez l'ID et mot de passe définis au moment de l'impression. 4 Sélectionnez une tâche à imprimer et appuyez sur [Imprimer]. 5 Appuyez sur [Départ] pour commencer à imprimer. 2 Remarque Vous pouvez modifier l'agrafage, le pliage et d'autres paramètres en appuyant sur [Modifier]. (Certains paramètres ne peuvent pas être modifiés.) Divers réglages 11 IC-202 (Phase 2) 11-109 Enregistrer dans boîte utilisateur 1 Appuyez sur [Boîte] sur le panneau de contrôle. 2 Appuyez sur [Boîte Ut. publique] et ensuite sur [Numéro de boîte] défini au moment de l'impression. 3 Sélectionnez une tâche à imprimer et appuyez sur [Imprimer]. 4 Appuyez sur [Départ] pour commencer à imprimer. 2 Remarque Vous pouvez modifier l'agrafage, le pliage et d'autres paramètres en appuyant sur [Modifier]. (Certains paramètres ne peuvent pas être modifiés.) 11 Divers réglages 11-110 IC-202 (Phase 2) Imprimer à l'aide du paramètre de suivi de volume Si les paramètres de Suivi de Volume (E.K.C.) ont été spécifiés sur cet appareil, vous devez saisir un mot de passe lors de l'impression d'une tâche. 2 Remarque Si une tâche d'impression est envoyée avec un nom de service ou un mot de passe ne correspondant pas à un service enregistré sur cet appareil, ou si un travail est envoyé sans cocher la case "Suivi de Volume (E.K.C.)", une erreur va survenir. Vérifiez le "Liste Impress." à l'aide du panneau de contrôle de cet appareil. Les trois pilotes d'imprimante utilisables sur cette machine sont les suivants : pilote d'imprimante PCL pour Windows Pilote d'imprimante PS pour Windows 2000/XP/ Server 2003/XP x64/Server 2003 x64 Pilote d'imprimante pour Mac OS X Divers réglages 11 IC-202 (Phase 2) 11-111 Spécification des réglages (pour Windows) 1 Cliquez sur [Propriété] dans la boîte de dialogue Imprimer pour afficher la boîte de dialogue Options d'impression. 2 Cliquez sur l'onglet Configuration (pilote PCL ou PostScript). 3 Cliquez sur [Authentification/Suivi de Volume E.K.C.]. 4 Sélectionnez la case à cocher "Suivi de Volume (E.K.C.)", puis saisissez le nom du service et le mot de passe. Vous pouvez enregistrer un nom de service par défaut et l'utiliser au lieu de saisir un service pour chaque tâche. 5 Après avoir spécifié les paramètres, cliquez sur [OK] pour commencer à imprimer. Si le nom de service saisi est un nom enregistré sur cet appareil, la tâche sera imprimée et comptée comme tâche du service concerné. 11 Divers réglages 11-112 IC-202 (Phase 2) Spécification des réglages (pour Mac OS X) 1 Dans le menu "Fichier", sélectionnez "Imprimer". 2 Sélectionnez "Sécurité". 3 Sélectionnez la case à cocher "Suivi de Volume (E.K.C.)", puis saisissez le nom du service et le mot de passe. Divers réglages 11 IC-202 (Phase 2) 11-113 Fonctions de travaux dans Web Connection Vous pouvez aussi contrôler l'état du travail en cours d'exécution par l'appareil dans Web Connection. Pour de plus amples détails, voir les pages suivantes. - "Onglet Tâche — Tâches en cours" à la page 11-65 - "Onglet Tâche — Historique tâches" à la page 11-67 11 Divers réglages 11-114 IC-202 (Phase 2) 12 Dépannage Dépannage 12 IC-202 (Phase 2) 12-3 12 Dépannage 12.1 Impossible d'imprimer Ce chapitre décrit les procédures de dépannage permettant de remédier aux dysfonctionnements. Exécutez les procédures de dépannage décrites ci-dessous si cet appareil n'imprime pas après que vous avez envoyé une tâche d'impression. Symptôme Cause probable Dépannage Le message "Aucune imprimante n'est connectée." ou "Erreur impress." apparaît. Le pilote d'imprimante sélectionné pour l'impression n'est pas compatible avec le contrôleur d'impression. Vérifier le nom de l'imprimante sélectionnée. Le câble réseau, le câble parallèle ou le câble USB est débranché. Vérifiez que le câble est correctement branché. Une erreur est survenue sur cet appareil. Vérifiez le panneau de contrôle de cet appareil. L'espace mémoire disponible est insuffisant. Effectuez un test d'impression pour vérifier si l'impression est possible. Une erreur postscript apparaît. L'espace mémoire disponible de l'ordinateur est insuffisant. Effectuez un test d'impression pour vérifier si l'impression est possible. Les paramètres logiciels de l'application sont erronés. Consultez le manuel du logiciel d'application pour vérifier les paramètres. Les paramètres d'impression du fichier sont incorrects. Modifiez les paramètres et essayez d'imprimer une nouvelle fois. 12 Dépannage 12-4 IC-202 (Phase 2) Si le problème persiste après exécution de toutes ces procédures, reportezvous au manuel utilisateur 750/600 [Opérations de Copie]. L'appareil ne commence pas à imprimer bien que la tâche d'impression ait été réalisée sur l'ordinateur. Le pilote d'imprimante sélectionné pour l'impression n'est pas compatible avec le contrôleur d'impression. Vérifier le nom de l'imprimante sélectionnée. Une erreur est survenue sur cet appareil. Vérifiez le panneau de contrôle de cet appareil. Une tâche d'impression se trouve dans la file d'attente de l'appareil, ce qui retarde l'impression. Vérifiez l'ordre de travail sur l'écran Liste des tâches actives du panneau de contrôle de l'appareil. "Enreg. dans boîte utilisateur" était sélectionné pour la tâche d'impression. Vérifiez si la tâche d'impression figure sur l'écran Boîte du panneau de contrôle de cet appareil. "Impression sécurisée" était sélectionné pour la tâche d'impression. Vérifiez si la tâche d'impression est retenu sur l'écran Boîte Impression sécurisée du panneau de contrôle de cet appareil. Si des paramètres de suivi de volume ont été appliqués, un nom de service (ou mot de passe) non enregistré peut avoir été saisi. Tapez le nom de service (ou mot de passe) correct. L'espace mémoire disponible de l'ordinateur est insuffisant. Effectuez un test d'impression pour vérifier si l'impression est possible. Symptôme Cause probable Dépannage Dépannage 12 IC-202 (Phase 2) 12-5 12.2 Impossible de définir les paramètres voulus ou impossible d'imprimer comme indiqué Exécutez ces procédures de dépannage s'il vous est impossible de définir les paramètres voulus du pilote d'imprimante ou si les résultats d'impression ne correspondent pas aux paramètres définis. 2 Remarque Certaines des fonctions du pilote d'imprimante ne peuvent pas être combinées avec d'autres fonctions. Symptôme Cause probable Dépannage Impossible de sélectionner un paramètre de pilote d'imprimante. Certaines fonctions ne peuvent pas se combiner. Ne pas essayer de sélectionner les paramètres qui ne sont pas disponibles. Le message "Conflit" apparaît avec "Impossible de sélectionner" ou "Fonction". Vous avez indiqué une combinaison incorrecte de fonctions. Vérifiez les paramètres et spécifiez les fonctions correctement. L'impression ne s'exécute pas comme indiqué. Des paramètres incorrects ont été spécifiés. Vérifiez chaque paramètre du pilote d'imprimante. Une combinaison de fonctions, autorisée par le pilote d'imprimante, est impossible avec cet appareil. Le format du papier, son orientation et d'autres paramètres indiqués dans l'application sont plus importants (priorité) que ceux spécifiés dans le pilote d'imprimante. Entrez les paramètres corrects dans l'application. Le filigrane ne peut pas être imprimé. Le filigrane n'est pas correctement défini. Contrôlez les paramètres de filigrane. La densité du filigrane est réglée à un niveau trop bas. Contrôlez les paramètres de densité. Les filigranes ne peuvent pas être imprimés dans les applications graphiques. Aucun filigrane ne peut être imprimé dans ce cas. La fonction d'agrafage ne peut pas être définie. L'agrafage est impossible si "Type de media" est réglé sur "Epais" ou "Transparent". Vérifiez chaque paramètre du pilote d'imprimante. La fonction d'agrafage nécessite un module de finition en option (pas le SF-601). Installez le module de finition supplémentaire requis et activez-le à l'aide du pilote d'imprimante. 12 Dépannage 12-6 IC-202 (Phase 2) Agrafage impossible. Vous pouvez agrafer jusqu'à 100 feuilles de papier ordinaire au format A4 ou inférieur avec le module FS-505 et 50 feuilles avec le module FS-504 ou 602. Modifiez le paramétrage Copies. Nombre de pages pouvant être agrafé au milieu (piqûre à cheval) quand le module FS-602 est installé : jusqu'à 20 pages de papier ordinaire. L'agrafage est impossible si le document comporte des pages de différents formats. Vérifiez le document. La position d'agrafage n'est pas celle qui est attendue. Le paramètre d'orientation est incorrect. Vérifiez la position d'agrafage dans la boîte de dialogue d'installation du pilote d'imprimante. La fonction de perforation ne peut pas être définie. Vous ne pouvez pas définir la fonction de perforation si "Livret", "Transparent" est sélectionné. Vérifiez chaque paramètre du pilote d'imprimante. Si un module de finition (à l'exception du SF-601) est installé en option, en outre, le kit de perforation ou de perforation et de pliage en Z doit être installé. Installez le module de finition supplémentaire requis et activez-le à l'aide du pilote d'imprimante. Les pages ne sont pas perforées. Il se peut que les pages imprimées soient introduites sans être perforées si le papier chargé dans la source papier n'a pas l'orientation correcte. Vérifiez le paramètre d'orientation. La position de perforation n'est pas celle qui est attendue. Le paramètre d'orientation est incorrect. Vérifiez la position de perforation sur l'onglet Disposition page de la boîte de dialogue d'installation du pilote d'imprimante. Le formulaire ne s'imprime pas correctement. L'espace mémoire disponible de l'ordinateur est insuffisant. Simplifiez le formulaire pour réduire la taille des données. L'image ne s'imprime pas correctement. L'espace mémoire disponible de l'ordinateur est insuffisant. Simplifiez l'image pour réduire la taille des données. Le papier n'est pas chargé à partir de la source spécifiée. Le papier peut ne pas provenir de la source spécifiée si cette source est chargée avec du papier de format et d'orientation différents. Chargez la source papier avec du papier du format et de l'orientation appropriée. Symptôme Cause probable Dépannage 13 Annexe Annexe 13 IC-202 (Phase 2) 13-3 13 Annexe 13.1 Spécifications Sous-menu Spécifications Modèle Contrôleur d'impression intégré Alimentation Commune avec le corps principal Processeur Commune avec le corps principal ROM Commune avec le corps principal RAM Commune avec le corps principal Interface Identique à celle du corps principal. Type de trames Ethernet 802.2 Ethernet 802.3 Ethernet II Ethernet SNAP Protocoles supportés TCP/IP IPX/SPX NetBEUI AppleTalk (EtherTalk) Bonjour Vitesse d'impression ineo 750 : 75 pages/minute ineo 600 : 60 pages/minute (A4 600 x 600 dpi) Temps de sortie première page Identique au temps de première impression du corps principal. Langage de description de page PCL5e PCL6 PostScript 3 Conditions ambiantes d'exploitation Identique à celle du corps principal. Résolution Définition des données 600 e 600 dpi Définition de sortie 600 e 2400 dpi (équivalent) Formats de papier supportés Identique à celle du corps principal. Polices d'imprimante PCL Latin 80 polices Postscript 3 Emulation Latin 137 polices Ordinateurs compatibles Compatible IBM PC Macintosh 13 Annexe 13-4 IC-202 (Phase 2) Systèmes d'exploitation compatibles Serveur Windows NT 4.0/2000/Server 2003/Server 2003 x64 Client Windows 98SE/Me Windows 2000/XP/XP x64 Windows NT 4.0 MacOS 9.x/MacOS X 10.2/10.3/10.4 Pilote d'imprimante PCL6 : • Pilote d'imprimante Windows 98SE/Me • Pilote d'imprimante Windows NT 4.0 • Pilote d'imprimante Windows 2000/XP/Server 2003 PS • Pilote d'imprimante Windows NT 4.0/2000/XP/ Server 2003 • Pilote d'imprimante Windows XP x64/Server 2003 x64 PS3 (PPD PostScript) : • FIchier PPD Windows 98SE/Me • Fichier PPD Windows NT 4.0 • Fichier PPD Windows 2000/XP/Server 2003 • Fichier PPD Windows XP x64/Server 2003 x64 • Fichier PPD MacOS 9.x • Fichier PPD MacOS X 10.2/10.3/10.4 Environnements d'exploitation MetaFrame Les opérations de ce pilote d'imprimante ne sont contrôlées que dans les environnements suivants. Système d'exploitation du serveur : Windows 2000 Serveur Avancé/ Windows 2003 Serveur Entreprise MetaFrame : Citrix® MetaFrame XP® Presentation Server, Feature Release 3 Citrix® MetaFrame® Presentation Server 3.0 Prévu pour être compatible Citrix Presentation Server4.0 Système d'exploitation du client : Windows 2000/Windows XP ICAClient : ICA32bit Pour des opérations dans des configurations autres que celles ci-dessus, contactez votre S.A.V. Utilitaires Web Connection Navigateurs Internet : Microsoft Internet Explorer 6 ou supérieur recommandé Microsoft XML Parser MSXML3.X doit être installé si vous utilisez Internet Explorer 5.X. Netscape Navigator 7.02 ou supérieur (JavaScript activé, Cookies activés) J2RE (Java 2 Runtime Environment) obligatoire Sous-menu Spécifications Annexe 13 IC-202 (Phase 2) 13-5 13.2 Page de configuration 13 Annexe 13-6 IC-202 (Phase 2) 13.3 Liste des polices Liste des polices PCL Annexe 13 IC-202 (Phase 2) 13-7 Liste des polices PS 13 Annexe 13-8 IC-202 (Phase 2) Page de test Annexe 13 IC-202 (Phase 2) 13-9 13.4 Polices d'écran Le CD-ROM ci-joint contient dans le dossier Screenfont, une police TrueType différente des polices standard de Windows. L'installation de la police d'écran sur votre système permet d'instaurer l'environnement WYSIWYG de la police d'imprimante et de la police TrueType. Cela peut permettre d'améliorer également les résultats d'impression. Procédure d'installation des polices True type (Windows 98SE/Me/NT4.0/2000) 1 Cliquez sur [Démarrer] dans la barre des tâches. 2 Sélectionnez "Paramètres". 3 Sélectionnez "Panneau de configuration". La fenêtre "Panneau de configuration" apparaît. 4 Double-cliquez sur l'icône [Polices]. – L'écran Windows 98SE sert ici d'illustration. La fenêtre "Polices" apparaît. 13 Annexe 13-10 IC-202 (Phase 2) 5 Sélectionnez le menu "Fichier". – Sélectionnez "Installer une nouvelle police". – La boîte de dialogue "Ajouter police" apparaît. 6 Sélectionnez la police à ajouter dans le dossier "\ScreenFont\PCL" ou dans le dossier "\ScreenFont\PostScript\win" du CD-ROM logiciel utilisateur. – Cochez la case "Copier dans le dossier Polices". 7 Cliquez sur [OK]. Annexe 13 IC-202 (Phase 2) 13-11 Procédure d'installation des polices True type (Windows XP/Server 2003/XP x64/Server 2003 x64) 1 Cliquez sur [Démarrer] dans la barre des tâches. 2 Sélectionnez "Paramètres". (En fonction de la configuration de votre ordinateur, "Paramètres" peut être indisponible. Dans un cas pareil, passez à l'étape 3). 3 Sélectionnez "Panneau de configuration". Si "Basculer vers l'affichage classique" apparaît sous "Panneau de configuration", cliquez dessus. La fenêtre "Panneau de configuration" apparaît. 4 Faites un double clic sur l'icône "Polices". – La fenêtre "Polices" apparaît. – L'écran Windows XP sert ici d'illustration. 13 Annexe 13-12 IC-202 (Phase 2) 5 Sélectionnez le menu "Fichier" et choisissez "Installer une nouvelle police". La boîte de dialogue "Ajouter polices" apparaît. 6 Sélectionnez la police à ajouter dans le dossier "\ScreenFont\PCL" ou "\ScreenFont\PostScript\win" du "CD-ROM logiciel utilisateur". À ce moment, cochez la case "Copier les polices dans le dossier Annexe 13 IC-202 (Phase 2) 13-13 desPolices". 7 Cliquez sur [OK]. 13 Annexe 13-14 IC-202 (Phase 2) 13.5 Glossaire Terme Définition 10Base-T/100Base- TX/1000Base-TX Une norme Ethernet, comprenant un câble constitué de paires de fils de cuivre torsadés. La vitesse d'émission est de 10 Mbps avec 10Base-T, de 100 Mbps avec 100Base-TX et de 1000 Mbps avec 1000Base-TX. Adobe® Flash® Logiciel ou format de fichier permettant de créer les contenus combinés animation/son des graphiques vectoriels développés par Adobe Systems (antérieurement Macromedia). La saisie au clavier et à l'aide de la souris permet la manipulation de contenus interactifs. La taille des fichiers reste relativement faible et leur navigation est rendue possible par l'introduction du plugin spécifique au navigateur Internet. Adresse IP Code (adresse) utilisé pour identifier des périphériques réseau distincts sur Internet. Le numéro est formé de quatre groupes de chiffres (au plus trois chiffres), comme dans 192.168.1.10. Les adresses IP sont affectées à des périphériques comme les ordinateurs qui sont connectés à Internet. Adresse MAC Acronyme de Adresse Media Access Control (Adresse de contrôle d'accès au support). Grâce à un numéro ID spécial pour chaque carte Ethernet, il est possible d'envoyer et de recevoir les données entre les cartes. Un nombre comporte 48 bits. Les 24 premiers bits sont constitués d'un nombre spécial pour chaque fabricant contrôlant et affectant IEEE. Les 24 derniers bits correspondent au numéro unique attribuée à la carte par le fabricant. Aperçu Fonction vous permettant de voir une image avant d'effectuer une tâche d'impression ou de numérisation. AppleTalk Nom générique de la suite de protocole développée par Apple Computer pour la mise en réseau d'ordinateurs. bit Abréviation de Binary Digit (chiffre binaire). La plus petite unité d'information (quantité de données) sur un ordinateur ou une imprimante. Affiche les données avec 0 ou 1. BMP Acronyme de bitmap. Un format de fichier pour sauvegarder les données d'image qui utilise l'extension .bmp. Généralement utilisé sur les plates-formes Windows. Vous pouvez spécifier l'intensité de couleur de monochrome (2 valeurs) à couleur (16 777 216 couleurs). Généralement, les images ne sont pas comprimées lors de la sauvegarde. Bonjour Technologie réseau de Macintosh (Mac OS X uniquement) qui détecte automatiquement un périphérique connecté au réseau. Désignée sous le terme "Rendez-vous" jusqu'à la version 10.3 modifié à partir de la version 10.4. BOOTP Acronyme de BOOTstrap Protocol. C'est un protocole permettant à un ordinateur client sur un réseau TCP/IP de spécifier automatiquement les paramètres réseau sur un serveur. Actuellement, on utilise essentiellement DHCP, qui est un protocole de pointe basé sur BOOTP. Client Ordinateur qui utilise les services fournis par un serveur sur un réseau. Annexe 13 IC-202 (Phase 2) 13-15 CMYK Acronyme de Cyan, Magenta, Yellow et Black (Cyan, Magenta, Jaune et Noir). Les couleurs du toner et de l'encre utilisées pour l'impression couleur peuvent toutes être représentées en modifiant le taux de mélange des quatre couleurs de CMYK. Désinstaller Pour désinstaller des logiciels installés sur un ordinateur. DHCP Abréviation de Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol. C'est un protocole permettant à un ordinateur client sur un réseau TCP/IP de spécifier automatiquement les paramètres réseau sur un serveur. Avec la gestion collective de l'adresse IP pour les clients DHCP sur le serveur DHCP, vous pouvez éviter toute duplication d'adresse et aisément construire un réseau. Disque dur Périphérique de stockage grande capacité pour sauvegarder des données. Les données peuvent être sauvegardées même en cas de mise hors tension. DNS Abréviation pour Domain Name System. Un système d'acquisition des adresses IP à partir de noms d'hôte sur un environnement de réseau. DNS permet à l'utilisateur d'accéder à d'autres ordinateurs sur un réseau en indiquant des noms d'hôtes au lieu d'adresses IP difficiles à comprendre et à mémoriser. DPI (dpi) Abréviation pour Dots Per Inch (points par pouce). Une unité de définition utilisée par les imprimantes et les scanners. Indique combien de points par pouce sont représentés dans une image. Plus la valeur est élevée, plus la définition est importante. Ethernet Norme de ligne d'émission LAN. File d'attente Logiciel qui met en attente sur les périphériques les tâches d'impression générées. FTP Abréviation de File Transfer Protocol. Protocole de transfert de fichiers sur Internet ou un Intranet sur le réseau TCP/IP. HTTP Abréviation pour HyperText Transfer Protocol. C'est un protocole utilisé pour envoyer et recevoir des données entre un serveur Internet et un client (navigateur Internet). Possibilité d'échanger des documents contentant des images, des enregistrements et des clips vidéo avec les informations de forme expressives. IEEE 1284 Acronyme de Institute of Electrical et Electronic Engineers 1284. Standard de port parallèle élaboré pour les imprimantes. imprimante locale Imprimante connectée à un port parallèle ou USB d'un ordinateur. Imprimante partagée Paramétrage d'imprimante qui permet à l'imprimante d'être utilisée par plusieurs ordinateurs connectés sur un serveur ou via réseau. installer Pour installer du matériel, des systèmes d'exploitation, des applications et des pilotes d'imprimante sur un ordinateur. Interface parallèle Méthode de transfert des données pour l'envoi et la réception des données de plusieurs signaux simultanés. IEEE 1284 est généralement utilisé comme connexion d'imprimante. IPP Abréviation de Internet Printing Protocol. Protocole qui envoie et reçoit des données d'impression et contrôle les imprimantes sur Internet sur un réseau TCP/IP. Les données peuvent aussi être envoyées à des imprimantes distantes pour impression sur Internet. Terme Définition 13 Annexe 13-16 IC-202 (Phase 2) IPX/SPX Acronyme de Internetwork Packet eXchange/Sequenced Packet eXchange. Protocole mis au point par Novel, Inc. et généralement utilisé dans un environnement NetWare. LAN Abréviation pour Local Area Network. C'est un réseau qui connecte des ordinateurs sur le même étage, dans le même bâtiment, dans les bâtiments avoisinants. LPR/LPD Acronyme de Line Imprimante Request/Line Imprimante Daemon (Requête d'imprimante ligne par ligne/Démon d'imprimante ligne par ligne). Méthode d'impression sur un réseau dans un système Windows NT ou UNIX. Avec TCP/IP, vous pouvez imprimer des données à partir de Windows ou Unix sur une imprimante via un réseau. Luminosité Luminosité d'un écran d'affichage. Masq s/réseau Unité utilisée pour diviser un réseau TCP/IP en plusieurs petits réseaux (sous-réseaux). Utilisé pour identifier les bits d'une adresse réseau qui sont supérieurs à l'adresse IP. Mémoire Périphérique de stockage temporaire des données. Quand l'appareil est mis hors tension, les données peuvent être effacées ou non. Mémoire tampon d'imprimante Secteur mémoire utilisé temporairement pour le traitement des données d'une tâche d'impression. Navigateur Internet Logiciel comme Internet Explorer et Netscape Navigator utilisé pour afficher des pages Internet. NDPS Acronyme de Novell Distributed Print Services. Offre une solution d'impression très efficace dans un environnement NDS. En utilisant NDPS comme serveur d'impression, vous pouvez imprimer à partir de l'imprimante désirée, télécharger automatiquement le pilote d'imprimante d'une imprimante que vous venez d'installer, simplifier et automatiser les environnements de gestion compliqués liés à l'utilisation de l'imprimante et intégrer la gestion liée à l'imprimante réseau. NDS Acronyme de Novell Directory Services. Les serveurs et les imprimantes sur un réseau et les ressources partagées des informations de l'utilisateur, ainsi que le niveau d'accès de l'utilisateur à ces éléments peuvent être consolidés dans la structure hiérarchique. NetBEUI Acronyme de NetBIOS Extended User Interface. Protocole réseau développé par IBM. En indiquant tout simplement le nom de l'ordinateur, vous pouvez construire un réseau à petite échelle. NetBIOS Acronyme de Network Basic Input Output System. Interface de communication développée par IBM. NetWare Système d'exploitation réseau mis au point par Novell. NetWare IPX/SPX est utilisé comme protocole de communication. NImprimante/ RImprimante Module de support d'imprimante distante pour utiliser une imprimante réseau dans un environnement NetWare. Utilisez NetWare 3.x avec RImprimante et NetWare 4.x avec NImprimante. Niveau de gris Forme expressive d'image monochrome utilisant les informations de dégradé du noir et du blanc. File d'attente Logiciel qui met en attente sur les périphériques les tâches d'impression générées. Nom de la file d'attente Nom d'imprimante logique obligatoire pour l'impression réseau. Terme Définition Annexe 13 IC-202 (Phase 2) 13-17 Nom d'hôte Nom affiché d'un périphérique sur un réseau. Octet Unité d'information (quantité de données) sur un ordinateur ou une imprimante. Configurée comme suit : 1 octet équivaut à 8 bits. OS Abréviation pour Operating System (système d'exploitation). Logiciel de base contrôlant le système d'un ordinateur. Passerelle Matériel et logiciel utilisé comme point de connexion d'un réseau au réseau. Une passerelle change aussi les formats de données, les adresses et les protocoles en fonction du réseau connecté. Passerelle par défaut Périphérique (ordinateur ou routeur) utilisé comme "passerelle" pour accéder à des ordinateurs ne se trouvant pas sur le même LAN. PDF Abréviation de Portable Document Format. Un document formaté électroniquement et utilisant l'extension .pdf. Basé sur le format PostScript, vous pouvez utiliser le logiciel gratuit Adobe Acrobat Reader pour visionner des documents. PDL Acronyme de Page Description Language (Langage de description de page). Langage utilisé pour spécifier l'image d'impression par page pour une imprimante si vous imprimez avec une imprimante de page. Pilote Logiciel travaillant comme pont entre un ordinateur et un périphérique. Plug and play Fonction permettant de trouver et d'utiliser automatiquement le pilote approprié lors de la connexion d'un périphérique à un ordinateur. Police d'écran Police d'affichage de texte et de symboles sur un écran CRT. Police vectorielle Police utilisant des lignes et des courbes pour afficher le pourtour d'un caractère. Permet d'afficher des caractères de grande taille sur un écran ou d'imprimer sans bords dentelés. PostScript Langage type de description de page mis au point par Adobe et généralement utilisé pour l'impression de qualité supérieure. PPD Acronyme de PostScript Printer Description (Description d'imprimante PostScript). Fichier utilisé pour décrire la définition, le format de papier utilisable et les informations spéciales relatives au modèle d'imprimante PostScript. Profil Fichier d'attribut couleur Fichier dédié contenant la corrélation cumulée de l'entrée et la sortie de chaque couleur primaire utilisée permettant aux périphériques d'entrée et de sortie de couleur de reproduire la couleur. Propriété Informations sur les attributs Quand vous utilisez un pilote d'imprimante, plusieurs fonctions peuvent être spécifiées dans les propriétés du fichier. Les propriétés de fichier vous permettent de vérifier les informations d'attribut du fichier. Protocole Règles permettant à des ordinateurs de communiquer avec d'autres ordinateurs ou périphériques. PServer Module de serveur d'impression sous environnement NetWare qui gère, change, suspend, relance ou annule une tâche d'impression. Résolution Affiche la possibilité de reproduire correctement les détails des images et des documents imprimés. Terme Définition 13 Annexe 13-18 IC-202 (Phase 2) RIP Acronyme de Raster Image Processor. Processeur qui rastérise les images de données de texte décrites à l'aide du langage de description de page PostScript. Le processeur est généralement intégré à l'imprimante. RVB Abréviation pour Rouge, Vert et Bleu. Représente toutes les couleurs en changeant le taux de luminosité des 3 couleurs RVB à l'aide des couleurs primaires utilisées pour la représentation couleur dans un écran. Serveur Proxy Serveur installé pour servir de connexion intermédiaire entre chaque client et différents serveurs pour assurer la sécurité de manière efficace sur tout le réseau pour les connexions Internet. SLP Acronyme de Service Location Protocol. Protocole capable de trouver des services sur un réseau TCP/IP et de spécifier automatiquement un client. SMB Abréviation de Server Message Block. Protocole qui partage des fichiers et des imprimantes sur un réseau et principalement utilisé par Microsoft Windows. SMTP Abréviation de Simple Mail Transfer Protocol. Protocole d'envoi et d'acheminement de courrier électronique. SNMP Abréviation de Simple Network Management Protocol. Protocole de gestion utilisant TCP/IP dans un environnement réseau. Spoule En anglais Spool : Acronyme de Simultaneous Peripheral Operation On-Line. Lors de l'impression, les données ne sont pas directement envoyées à l'imprimante, elles sont stockées provisoirement dans un autre emplacement, puis envoyées en bloc à l'imprimante. Tâche d'impression Requête d'impression émise d'un ordinateur vers un périphérique d'impression. TCP/IP Abréviation de Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol. Le protocole standard par défaut utilisé par Internet et utilisant des adresses IP pour identifier chaque périphérique réseau. Transparent Transparents de rétroprojection utilisés pour des présentations. TrueType Police vectorielle mise au point par Apple Computer et Microsoft. Norme utilisée par Macintosh et Microsoft Windows utilisable à la fois pour l'affichage et l'impression. Type de trames Type de format de communication utilisé dans un environnement Netware. La communication est impossible si les types de trames sont différents. USB Acronyme de Universal Serial Bus. Interface standard générale de connexion d'une souris, d'une imprimante et d'autres périphériques à un ordinateur. Terme Définition Annexe 13 IC-202 (Phase 2) 13-19 13.6 Index A Agr./Réduction 5-13 Agrafage 5-20, 6-16, 9-6, 10-6, 11-19, 11-97 Agrafage central et pliage 6-17 Agrandissement et réduction 5-13 Ajuster couleur 9-5 Assistant Ajout d'imprimante 3-5 Attributs de page 9-4, 9-8, 10-4, 10-8 Authentification 6-21, 10-7 Avancé... 8-4 B Bac de sortie 9-6, 10-6, 11-97 Bac papier 5-14, 6-10, 11-15, 11-97 Bindery 4-18 Bordure 9-6, 10-5 C Caractères 11-22 Combinaison 9-6, 10-6 Configuration PS 11-68 Connexion réseau 4-5 Conventions du manuel 1-11 Copies 9-5, 10-5, 11-6, 11-97 Copies & Pages 10-5 Couv. avc bac ins. 9-7 Couverture 5-24, 6-23, 7-32, 9-6, 10-6 Création de formulaires 6-38 D Densité d'impression 9-7 Décalé 5-22, 9-6, 10-6 Dél. attent. paral 11-95 Dél. attent. rés. 11-95 Délai de connexion I/F 11-36 Désinstaller 3-22 Direction original 11-97 Disposition 9-6, 9-12, 10-3, 10-5, 10-13 Dos 5-24, 6-23, 7-32, 9-6, 10-6 Dos avec bac d'insertion 9-7 E Edition de formulaires 6-38 Enregistrer dans boîte utilisateur 6-18, 10-7, 11-104 Epreuve et impression 6-18, 11-104 Erreur d'impression PS 11-100 Erreur PS 11-30 É Échelle 10-4 Émulation de bindery 4-18, 4-21 F Filigrane 5-31, 5-35 Finition 9-6, 9-7, 10-17 Format de sortie 5-12 Format original 5-12 Format papier 10-4, 11-16, 11-97 Format papier personnalisés 9-4, 10-4, 10-10 I Impr. rapports 11-31 Impression 2-6, 9-5, 10-5 Impression de livret 5-16 Impression recto verso 5-16 Impression recto-verso 11-17, 11-97 Opérations Fax x Table des matières C250 x-3 Table des matières 1 Introduction 1.1 Avis aux utilisateurs ......................................................................... 1-4 1.1.1 Canada ........................................................................................... 1-4 1.1.2 U.S.A. ............................................................................................. 1-4 1.1.3 Nouvelle-Zélande ........................................................................... 1-7 1.1.4 Europe ............................................................................................ 1-7 1.2 Mise en route (fax) ............................................................................ 1-8 1.3 Caractéristiques du télécopieur .................................................... 1-10 1.4 Conventions utilisées dans ce manuel ......................................... 1-22 1.5 Descriptions et symboles des documents et du papier ............. 1-24 1.5.1 “Largeur” et “Longueur” .............................................................. 1-24 1.5.2 Orientation du papier ................................................................... 1-24 1.6 Documentation ............................................................................... 1-25 2 Préliminaires 2.1 Restrictions ....................................................................................... 2-3 2.2 Tableau de commande ..................................................................... 2-4 2.2.1 Tableau de commande .................................................................. 2-4 2.3 Réglages de base ............................................................................. 2-7 2.3.1 Réglages indispensables ............................................................... 2-7 2.4 Fonctions utiles ................................................................................. 2-8 2.4.1 Carnet d'adresses .......................................................................... 2-8 2.4.2 Programme .................................................................................. 2-12 2.5 Écran Fax ......................................................................................... 2-15 2.6 Authentification utilisateur et compte de service ........................ 2-17 2.6.1 Si l'authentification utilisateur est paramétrée ............................. 2-17 2.6.2 Si le compte de service est paramétré ........................................ 2-17 2.7 Réception fax dans une boîte ........................................................ 2-18 2.7.1 Types de boîtes ............................................................................ 2-19 2.7.2 Fonctionnement de la Réception PC-fax ..................................... 2-21 x-4 C250 3 Émission 3.1 Émission simple de télécopie ...........................................................3-3 3.2 Positionnement de l'original sur la machine ...................................3-7 3.2.1 Utilisation du chargeur de document (ADF) ....................................3-7 3.2.2 Positionnement des originaux sur la vitre d'exposition ..................3-8 3.2.3 Envoi de plusieurs originaux à partir de la vitre d'exposition .........3-9 3.2.4 Émission d'originaux avec le chargeur ADF et la vitre d'exposition ..................................................................................3-10 3.3 Réglage des conditions d'émission ...............................................3-11 3.3.1 Type d'image original ....................................................................3-12 3.3.2 Densité ..........................................................................................3-13 3.3.3 Recto/Recto-verso ........................................................................3-14 3.3.4 Définition .......................................................................................3-15 3.3.5 Confirmation des réglages et des résultats de la communication 3-16 3.3.6 Enregistrement dans le carnet d'adresses à partir de l'écran Vérifier détails de la tâche .............................................................3-19 3.4 Sélection de la destination .............................................................3-21 3.4.1 Sélection de la destination ............................................................3-21 3.4.2 Sélection de plusieurs destinations ..............................................3-28 3.4.3 Confirmation/Suppression d'une destination ...............................3-29 3.4.4 Rappel manuel ..............................................................................3-30 3.5 Numérisation ....................................................................................3-31 3.5.1 Lorsque la machine ne détecte pas le format d'origine ...............3-31 3.5.2 Lorsque la mémoire est saturée ...................................................3-31 3.5.3 Rotation automatique du document original ................................3-31 3.6 Lorsque l'émission ne s'effectue pas ............................................3-32 3.7 Réservation d'émission ...................................................................3-33 3.8 Émission manuelle ..........................................................................3-34 3.9 Annulation de l'émission .................................................................3-35 3.9.1 Annulation d'une communication en cours ..................................3-35 3.9.2 Annulation des tâches réservées ..................................................3-36 3.10 Confirmation de la liste de tâches .................................................3-37 3.11 Confirmation des résultats de la communication ........................3-38 C250 x-5 3.12 Émissions en mémoire et en mémoire rapide ............................. 3-41 3.12.1 Émission mémoire ........................................................................ 3-41 3.12.2 Émission en mémoire rapide ........................................................ 3-41 3.12.3 Pour émettre en mémoire rapide, procédez de la manière suivante. ....................................................................................... 3-42 3.13 Nombre d'originaux ........................................................................ 3-44 3.14 Émission différée (TX) .................................................................... 3-47 3.15 Communications internationales .................................................. 3-50 3.16 Informations sur l'expéditeur ........................................................ 3-53 3.16.1 Réglage à l'intérieur du corps du texte ........................................ 3-53 3.16.2 Réglage à l'extérieur du corps du texte ....................................... 3-53 3.16.3 Réglage sur OFF .......................................................................... 3-54 4 Réception 4.1 Mode Réception ................................................................................ 4-3 4.1.1 Réception automatique (mode fax uniquement) ............................ 4-3 4.1.2 Réception manuelle (mode téléphone uniquement) ...................... 4-3 4.2 Réception automatique (mode fax uniquement) ........................... 4-4 4.3 Réception manuelle (mode téléphone uniquement) ..................... 4-5 4.4 Réception impossible ....................................................................... 4-6 4.5 Réception en mémoire de substitution .......................................... 4-7 4.6 Enregistrement de la réception ....................................................... 4-8 4.6.1 Enregistrement après réduction minimale ..................................... 4-8 4.6.2 Enregistrement après réduction pour convenir au papier d'impression ................................................................................... 4-9 4.6.3 Enregistrement à l'échelle de 100 % ........................................... 4-16 4.7 Informations de réception ............................................................. 4-18 5 Dépannage 5.1 Impossible d'envoyer des messages .............................................. 5-3 5.2 Impossible de recevoir des messages ........................................... 5-4 5.3 Message d'erreur affiché ................................................................. 5-6 5.4 Appeler SAV ...................................................................................... 5-7 x-6 C250 6 Caractéristiques techniques 6.1 Caractéristiques techniques ............................................................6-3 7 Applications d'émission 7.1 Ouverture des écrans Réglage numérisation et Réglage communication ..................................................................................7-3 7.2 Présentation des fonctions d'application .......................................7-5 7.3 Originaux mixtes ................................................................................7-7 7.4 Position reliure ...................................................................................7-9 7.5 Émission avec effacement des bords ...........................................7-12 7.6 Ajustement fond ..............................................................................7-15 7.7 Netteté ..............................................................................................7-18 7.8 Format de numérisation ..................................................................7-21 7.9 Type de fichier .................................................................................7-24 7.10 Mot de passe émission (TX) ...........................................................7-26 7.11 Communication confidentielle (Émission F-code) .......................7-29 7.12 Requête d'émission en relais (Émission F-code) .........................7-32 7.13 ECM OFF ..........................................................................................7-35 7.14 V34 OFF ............................................................................................7-38 8 Fonctions utiles pour la réception 8.1 Utilisation d'un document reçu en réception confidentielle ......................................................................................8-3 8.1.1 Utilisation d'un document reçu en réception confidentielle ...........8-3 8.1.2 Impression du document reçu dans une boîte utilisateur confidentielle ...................................................................................8-4 8.1.3 Suppression d'un document stocké dans une boîte utilisateur confidentielle ...................................................................................8-5 8.2 Réception mémoire ...........................................................................8-6 8.2.1 Impression d'un document mémorisé ............................................8-6 8.2.2 Suppression d'un document mémorisé ..........................................8-8 8.3 Informations de réception ................................................................8-9 8.3.1 Informations sur la réception et l'impression recto-verso ..............8-9 C250 x-7 9 Relève 9.1 Émission en relève ............................................................................ 9-3 9.1.1 Émission en relève ......................................................................... 9-4 9.2 Réception en relève .......................................................................... 9-6 9.3 Bulletin ............................................................................................... 9-9 9.3.1 Écriture d'un document sur le bulletin board ............................... 9-10 9.3.2 Réception en relève d'un document placé sur le bulletin board d'une destination (fax) .................................................................. 9-13 10 Enregistrement/Réglages 10.1 Affichage de l'écran d'enregistrement du télécopieur ................ 10-3 10.2 Enregistrement du carnet d'adresses .......................................... 10-5 10.3 Enregistrement d'un groupe ........................................................ 10-19 10.4 Enregistrement d'un programme ................................................ 10-25 10.5 Enregistrement du sujet et du texte d'un e-mail ....................... 10-31 10.6 Réglage des boîtes confidentielles ............................................. 10-46 10.7 Réglage du bulletin (tableau électronique) ................................ 10-48 10.8 Réglage de la boîte utilisateur réception mémoire ................... 10-49 11 Mode Utilitaire 11.1 Écran mode Utilitaire ...................................................................... 11-3 11.1.1 Accès à l'écran Réglage Utilisateur ............................................. 11-3 11.1.2 Quitter l'écran Réglage Utilisateur ............................................... 11-4 11.1.3 Accès à l'écran Réglage Administrateur ...................................... 11-5 11.1.4 Quitter l'écran Réglage Administrateur ........................................ 11-6 11.2 Liste du mode Utilitaire fax ............................................................ 11-7 11.2.1 Écran FAX - réglage par défaut .................................................... 11-7 11.2.2 Écran Fax actif ............................................................................. 11-7 11.2.3 Réglage Initial ............................................................................... 11-7 11.2.4 Passage économie énergie (Fax) ................................................. 11-8 11.2.5 Système prioritaire (Réglages sortie Imprimante/Fax) ................. 11-8 11.2.6 Information en-tête ....................................................................... 11-8 11.2.7 Position en-tête / pied de page ................................................... 11-9 11.2.8 Réglage Paramètres ligne ............................................................ 11-9 11.2.9 Réglage Émission/Réception ..................................................... 11-10 x-8 C250 11.2.10 Réglage fonction .........................................................................11-11 11.2.11 Définir CN PBX ............................................................................11-12 11.2.12 Réglage Rapports .......................................................................11-13 11.2.13 Liste Paramètres tâche ...............................................................11-13 11.3 Écran Fax réglage par défaut .......................................................11-14 11.4 Réglage Initial ................................................................................11-17 11.5 Écran Fax actif ...............................................................................11-19 11.6 Passage économie énergie (Fax) .................................................11-22 11.7 Système prioritaire (Réglages sortie Imprimante/Fax) ..............11-25 11.8 Information en-tête .......................................................................11-28 11.9 Position en-tête/pied de page ......................................................11-31 11.10 Réglage Paramètres ligne ............................................................11-34 11.11 Réglage Émission/Réception .......................................................11-37 11.12 Réglage fonction ...........................................................................11-40 11.12.1 Réglage fonction ON/OFF ..........................................................11-40 11.12.2 Réception mémoire obligatoire ...................................................11-43 11.12.3 RX réseau fermé .........................................................................11-46 11.12.4 Réglage Transfert TX ..................................................................11-49 11.12.5 Vérification du mot de passe RX confidentiel .............................11-53 11.12.6 Réglage RX fax ...........................................................................11-56 11.12.7 Paramètre boîte utilisateur TSI ...................................................11-61 11.13 Réglage CN PBX (Private Branch Exchange) .............................11-65 11.14 Réglage Rapports ..........................................................................11-67 12 Rapports et listes 12.1 Types de rapports et de listes ........................................................12-3 12.1.1 Rapports .......................................................................................12-3 12.1.2 Listes .............................................................................................12-4 12.2 Rapport d'activité ............................................................................12-5 12.2.1 Impression automatique ...............................................................12-5 12.2.2 Impression manuelle .....................................................................12-5 12.3 Rapport Émission ............................................................................12-9 12.3.1 Impression manuelle .....................................................................12-9 12.3.2 Impression automatique ...............................................................12-9 C250 x-9 12.4 Rapport d'émission (en relève) .................................................... 12-11 12.5 Rapport de relève ......................................................................... 12-13 12.6 Rapport de diffusion ..................................................................... 12-15 12.7 Rapport de relève séquentielle (réception) ................................ 12-17 12.8 Rapport de communication réservée ......................................... 12-19 12.9 Rapport d'émission réservée (relève) ......................................... 12-21 12.10 Rapport de diffusion réservée ..................................................... 12-23 12.11 Rapport de réception réservée (relève) ...................................... 12-25 12.12 Rapport de relève séquentielle réservée (réception) ................ 12-27 12.13 Rapport réception confidentielle ................................................ 12-29 12.14 Rapport Émission bulletin ............................................................ 12-31 12.15 Liste Carnet d'adresses ............................................................... 12-33 12.16 Liste d'adresses de groupe ......................................................... 12-36 12.17 Liste Programme .......................................................................... 12-39 12.18 Liste de Titres/Textes ................................................................... 12-42 12.19 Liste des réglages du fax ............................................................. 12-45 12.19.1 Liste confidentielle/bulletin ........................................................ 12-49 12.19.2 Boîte émetteur (TSI) ................................................................... 12-50 13 Annexe 13.1 Nombre de pages mémorisées ..................................................... 13-3 13.2 Saisie de texte ................................................................................. 13-4 13.3 Glossaire .......................................................................................... 13-7 13.4 Index .............................................................................................. 13-12 x-10 C250 1 Introduction Introduction 1 C250 1-3 1 Introduction Nous vous remercions d'avoir porté votre choix sur le photocopieur électronique numérique Konica Minolta. Ce manuel d'utilisation décrit les procédures d'utilisation des fonctions fax de la machine, ainsi que les précautions à prendre. Veuillez lire ce manuel avant de commencer à utiliser la machine. Après avoir lu ce manuel, nous vous recommandons de le conserver à portée de main pour pouvoir le consulter à tout moment, et assurer ainsi le fonctionnement optimum des fonctions fax. Pour garantir le fonctionnement correct de la machine, lisez également le “Manuel d'utilisation – Opérations Copie” avant de commencer. Marques KONICA MINOLTA, le logo KONICA MINOLTA et les unités d'image sont des marques déposées ou commerciales de KONICA MINOLTA HOLDINGS, INC. PageScope et bizhub sont des marques déposées ou commerciales de KONICA MINOLTA BUSINESS TECHNOLOGIES, INC. Adobe, le logo Adobe, Acrobat, le logo Acrobat, PostScript et le logo PostScript sont des marques déposées ou commerciales d'Adobe Systems, Inc. Les autres noms de sociétés ou de produits référencés dans ce manuel sont les marques déposées ou commerciales de leurs détenteurs respectifs. Copyright © 2005 KONICA MINOLTA BUSINESS TECHNOLOGIES, INC. Tous droits réservés. Exemption Avis relatif à la documentation - Aucune partie de ce manuel d'utilisateur ne peut être utilisée ou copiée sans autorisation - Les informations contenues dans ce manuel peuvent être modifiées sans avis préalable. 1 Introduction 1-4 C250 1.1 Avis aux utilisateurs 1.1.1 Canada NOTICE: This product meets the applicable Industry Canada technical specifications. The ringer equivalence number (REN) is an indication of the maximum number of devices allowed to be connected to a telephone interface. The termination on an interface may consist of any combination of devices subject only to the requirement that the sum of the RENs of all the devices does not exceed five. AVIS : Ce produit est conforme aux normes définies par Industrie Canada. L'indice d'équivalence de la sonnerie (IES) sert à indiquer le nombre maximum de terminaux qui peuvent être raccordés à une interface téléphonique. La terminaison d'une interface peut comporter une combinaison quelconque de dispositifs, du moment que la somme des indices d'équivalence de la sonnerie de tous les dispositifs n'excède pas 5. 1.1.2 U.S.A. Réglementation 68 de la FCC Cet équipement est conforme à l'article 68 de la réglementation FCC, et aux exigences adoptées par l'ACTA. La certification est signalée par une étiquette apposée sur l'équipement, indiquant entre autres, l'identification du produit au format US:AAAEQ##TXXXX. Cette identification peut être fournie à l'opérateur téléphonique, sur demande. Cet équipement utilise la certification de la fiche USOC RJ11C. La prise téléphonique utilisée pour brancher cet équipement sur le réseau de câblage téléphonique doit être conforme à l'article 68 de la réglementation FCC applicable, et aux exigences adoptées par l'ACTA. Un cordon de téléphone et une prise enfichable compatibles sont fournis avec ce produit. Ils doivent être connectés au jack modulaire compatible également conforme. Pour plus d'informations, voir les instructions d'installation. L'indice d'équivalence de la sonnerie (IES) détermine le nombre d'appareils pouvant être connectés à la ligne téléphonique. Un nombre excessif d'IES sur une ligne peut provoquer l'absence de sonnerie sur un appareil en réponse à un appel entrant. Dans la plupart des régions, le nombre d'IES ne doit pas être supérieur à 5. Contactez votre opérateur téléphonique local pour connaître le nombre d'appareils pouvant être connectés à la ligne. Sur les produits approuvés Introduction 1 C250 1-5 après le 23 juillet 2001, l'IES est indiqué sur l'étiquette d'identification du produit au format US:AAAEQ##TXXXX où ## représente l'IES, sans point décimal (ex : 03 est l'IES de 0.3). Sur les produits antérieurs, l'IES est indiqué séparément sur l'étiquette. Si cet équipement FK-502 nuit au réseau téléphonique, l'opérateur de téléphone vous préviendra de la possibilité d'interruption provisoire du service. Si l'avis préalable n'est pas possible, l'opérateur avisera le client dans les plus brefs délais. Vous serez également avisé de vos droits d'enregistrement d'une plainte auprès de la FCC, s'il y a lieu. Les modifications apportées par l'opérateur téléphonique à ses installations, son équipement, ses opérations ou ses procédures peut avoir des répercussions sur le fonctionnement de l'équipement. Dans ces circonstances, l'opérateur vous préviendra à l'avance des modifications que vous devez apporter pour garantir le service ininterrompu. En cas de problème avec cet équipement FK-502, et pour connaître les informations de garantie et de réparation, contactez votre revendeur local Konica Minolta. Si l'équipement nuit au réseau téléphonique, l'opérateur de téléphone peut vous demander de le débrancher jusqu'à ce que le problème soit résolu. La connexion à un service de ligne partagée est soumise aux tarifs en vigueur dans l'état. Contactez la commission des services publics pour obtenir plus d'informations. Si votre domicile est équipé d'un câblage d'alarme relié à la ligne de téléphone, assurez-vous que l'installation du FK-502 ne désactive pas l'équipement d'alarme. Pour plus d'informations à ce sujet, contactez votre opérateur téléphonique ou un installateur qualifié. La réglementation pour la protection des consommateurs de téléphone (Telephone Consumer Protection Act) de 1991 stipule qu'il est contraire à la loi d'utiliser un ordinateur ou tout autre appareil électronique, télécopieur compris, pour envoyer des messages, à moins que ces messages n'indiquent clairement en haut ou en bas de la première page transmise, la date et l'heure de l'envoi, l'identification de l'entreprise, entité ou individu expéditeur du message, ainsi que le numéro de téléphone de la machine expéditrice ou de ladite entreprise, entité ou individu. (Le numéro de téléphone fourni ne doit être ni un numéro 900 ni tout autre numéro pour lequel les frais d'expédition dépassent les frais de communication locaux, nationaux ou internationaux.) Pour programmer ces informations sur votre télécopieur, vous devez exécuter la procédure détaillée à la section “Information en-tête” à la page 11-28. 1 Introduction 1-6 C250 Symboles d'avertissement et d'attention 7 AVERTISSEMENT Un point d'exclamation dans un triangle, suivi du terme “Avertissement”, avertit l'utilisateur que le non-respect de cet avertissement peut provoquer des blessures graves, voire mortelles. % Veillez à bien observer les avertissements énumérés dans ce manuel. 7 ATTENTION Un point d'exclamation dans un triangle, suivi du terme “Attention”, avertit l'utilisateur que le non-respect de cette précaution peut provoquer des blessures ou des dommages matériels. % Veillez à bien observer les précautions énumérées dans ce manuel. Introduction 1 C250 1-7 1.1.3 Nouvelle-Zélande Avis - Cet appareil est équipé de la numérotation par impulsions alors que la norme Telecom est la Double Tonalité Multi-Fréquence (DTMF). Il n'y a aucune garantie que les lignes Telecom continueront à prendre en charge la numérotation par impulsions. - L'utilisation de la numérotation par impulsions lorsque cet équipement est relié à la même ligne que d'autres équipements, peut entraîner un son de cloche ou du bruit, ou encore une condition de réponse erronée. Dans ce cas, l'utilisateur ne doit pas contacter le service de dépannage Telecom (Telecom Fault Service). - Il est possible que cet équipement ne puisse pas transférer un appel vers un autre appareil raccordé à la même ligne. - Cet équipement n'est pas entièrement conforme aux exigences d'impédance de Telecom. La performance peut être réduite lorsqu'il est utilisé conjointement avec d'autres parties du réseau. Telecom ne saurait être responsable des problèmes pouvant subvenir dans de telles conditions d'utilisation. - L'octroi d'une autorisation de téléphonie pour tout élément d'un équipement terminal indique uniquement l'acceptation par Telecom de la conformité de l'élément avec les conditions minimales de connexion à son réseau. Cela n'indique pas l'approbation du produit par Telecom, et ne fournit aucune garantie. En particulier, cela n'offre aucune garantie de fonctionnement correct d'un élément quelconque avec un autre élément d'un équipement d'un autre fabricant ou modèle ayant reçu une autorisation de téléphonie, de même que cela n'implique pas qu'un produit est compatible avec tous les services de réseau Telecom. - Les fonctions d'appel automatique de cet équipement ne doivent pas être utilisées de façon à produire des nuisances pour le reste de la clientèle. - L'équipement faisant l'objet d'une autorisation de téléphonie ne peut être raccordé qu'au port de téléphone auxiliaire. Ce port n'est pas spécifiquement conçu pour une connexion à trois fils, et ce type de connexion risque de ne pas répondre à une sonnerie entrante. 1.1.4 Europe Ce télécopieur a reçu l'agrément, conformément à la décision 1999/5/ CE du Conseil, concernant la connexion paneuropéenne de terminal unique aux réseaux téléphoniques publics commutés (RTPC). Toutefois, en raison des différences entre les RTPC d'un pays à un autre, l'agrément en soi ne constitue pas une garantie absolue de fonctionnement optimal à chaque point de terminaison du réseau RTPC. En cas de problème, vous devez contacter en premier lieu le fournisseur de l'appareil. Le label CE doit être apposé sur le produit ou sur son étiquette de données, sur l'emballage du produit, s'il y a lieu, et sur les documents qui l'accompagnent. 1 Introduction 1-8 C250 1.2 Mise en route (fax) Émission Procédez comme suit pour envoyer un fax. 1 Appuyez sur [Fax] sur le tableau de commande pour passer en mode Fax. 2 Au besoin, définissez le réglage des fonctions. Écran Fax Écran Réglage numérisation Écran Application Écran Réglage communication Introduction 1 C250 1-9 3 Tapez le numéro de fax de la destination sur le clavier. – Si vous faites une faute de frappe, appuyez sur [Eff.] pour effacer les chiffres un par un. – Appuyez sur [C] (clear) pour effacer tout le numéro. 4 Placez l'original sur la machine. – Pour plus d'informations, voir “Positionnement de l'original sur la machine” à la page 3-7. 5 Appuyez sur [Départ] sur le tableau de commande. 1 Introduction 1-10 C250 1.3 Caractéristiques du télécopieur Impression du nombre total de pages sur le fax En mode Mémoire rapide, vous pouvez placer le nombre total de pages sur chaque page du fax. Cette possibilité est utile au destinataire, qui peut vérifier s'il a bien reçu toutes les pages. ! Détail Pour plus d'informations, voir “Nombre d'originaux” à la page 3-44. Émission différée d'un fax Vous pouvez préciser l'heure à laquelle le fax devra être envoyé : la nuit ou tôt le matin, par exemple, pour profiter des heures creuses. ! Détail Pour plus d'informations, voir “Émission différée (TX)” à la page 3-47. De : 01234567890123456 2004 /12 /31 23:59 P.005 / 010 Introduction 1 C250 1-11 Émission dès qu'une page est lue. (Mémoire rapide) Avec cette méthode, l'émission du fax commence dès qu'une page de l'original a été numérisée. ! Détail Pour plus d'informations, voir “Émissions en mémoire et en mémoire rapide” à la page 3-41. Envoi de fax à l'étranger Vous pouvez sélectionner une vitesse de transmission moindre lorsque vous envoyez un fax dans un pays où les conditions de communication ne sont pas bonnes. ! Détail Pour plus d'informations, voir “Communications internationales” à la page 3-50. 1 Introduction 1-12 C250 Émission avec effacement des bords Vous pouvez envoyer un fax après effacement des bandes noires reproduites lors de la numérisation d'un document relié. Vous pouvez également définir la largeur de la bordure à effacer. ! Détail Pour plus d'informations, voir “Émission avec effacement des bords” à la page 7-12. Largeur à effacer Émission standard Émission avec effacement des bords Introduction 1 C250 1-13 Émission d'un fax en mode format d'origine Vous pouvez envoyer un fax en précisant le format de papier du document. Cette fonction est utile pour n'envoyer qu'une partie de l'original. ! Détail Pour plus d'informations, voir “Format de numérisation” à la page 7-21. 1 Introduction 1-14 C250 Envoi de pages de différents formats en une seule opération. Vous pouvez envoyer des pages de différents formats parce que le télécopieur reconnaît chacun des formats et les traite en conséquence lorsque la fonction Originaux mixtes est activée. ! Détail Pour plus d'informations, voir “Originaux mixtes” à la page 7-7. Émission et reproduction dans le même format que l'original à la destination. Vous placez les originaux mixtes dans le chargeur RADF. Introduction 1 C250 1-15 Spécification du style de reliure d'un document recto/verso Vous pouvez préciser le style de reliure approprié (Gauche/Droite ou Haut/ Bas) lors l'émission d'un document recto/verso. Ainsi, les pages du document sont lues dans le bon ordre. ! Détail Pour plus d'informations, voir “Position reliure” à la page 7-9. Envoi d'un fax à la réception d'une commande de relève du destinataire Vous pouvez envoyer un fax, qui a été lu et stocké sur le disque dur du télécopieur, lorsque le destinataire envoie une commande de relève. ! Détail Pour plus d'informations, voir “Réception en relève” à la page 9-6. Reliure Gauche/Droite Reliure Haut/Bas Fax de destination Émission 1 Introduction 1-16 C250 Envoi d'un fax avec la fonction ECM OFF Vous pouvez désactiver la fonction de correction d'erreur (ECM) pour réduire le temps d'émission. ! Détail Pour plus d'informations, voir “ECM OFF” à la page 7-35. Document à relever Vous pouvez placer les documents à relever sur le bulletin board (tableau électronique) du disque dur pour l'émission ou la réception en relève. ! Détail Pour plus d'informations, voir “Bulletin” à la page 9-9. Émission d'un fax avec le mode Super G3 désactivé Vous pouvez envoyer un fax après désactivation du mode Super G3 si le protocole V.34 n'est pas disponible en raison de restrictions sur le PBX. ! Détail Pour plus d'informations, voir “V34 OFF” à la page 7-38. Introduction 1 C250 1-17 Fax relayé Vous pouvez envoyer un fax à une destination via une station de relais intermédiaire. ! Détail Pour plus d'informations, voir “Requête d'émission en relais (Émission Fcode)” à la page 7-32. Cette machine ne peut pas fonctionner en tant que relais. Station d'origine Station relais intermédiaire Station distante Appel international Station distante Appel local 1 Introduction 1-18 C250 Utilisation d'une boîte confidentielle Vous pouvez utiliser une boîte confidentielle (similaire à une boîte de réception personnalisée) pour échanger des informations confidentielles avec certaines personnes. ! Détail Pour plus d'informations, voir “Communication confidentielle (Émission F-code)” à la page 7-29. Envoi d'un fax protégé par un mot de passe Vous pouvez envoyer un fax protégé par un mot de passe si le récepteur fonctionne en réseau fermé. ! Détail Pour plus d'informations, voir “Mot de passe émission (TX)” à la page 7-26. Expéditeur Boîte de documents Récepteur confidentiels Introduction 1 C250 1-19 Ajustement de la densité de la couleur de fond Vous pouvez envoyer un fax après ajustement de la couleur de fond de l'original. ! Détail Pour plus d'informations, voir “Ajustement fond” à la page 7-15. Ajustement de la netteté du contour des caractères Vous pouvez envoyer un fax après ajustement de la netteté du contour des caractères pour améliorer la qualité de l'impression. ! Détail Pour plus d'informations, voir “Netteté” à la page 7-18. 1 Introduction 1-20 C250 Envoi d'un e-mail à partir de l'écran Fax Un original numérisé peut être envoyé en tant qu'e-mail de l'écran Fax à un ordinateur. ! Détail Pour plus d'informations, voir “Saisie directe” à la page 3-26. Sauvegarde dans une boîte Un original numérisé peut être sauvegardé dans une boîte créée sur le disque dur interne. Serveur de messagerie E-mail Disque dur Boîte Introduction 1 C250 1-21 ! Détail Pour plus d'informations, voir “Réception fax dans une boîte” à la page 2-18. 1 Introduction 1-22 C250 1.4 Conventions utilisées dans ce manuel Cette section décrit les symboles et polices utilisés dans ce manuel. Conseils de sécurité 6 DANGER Le non-respect des instructions signalées de cette manière peut entraîner des blessures graves, voire mortelles liées à la puissance électrique. % Observez ces instructions à la lettre pour éviter tout risque de blessures. 7 AVERTISSEMENT Le non-respect des instructions signalées de cette manière peut entraîner des blessures graves ou endommager le matériel. % Observez ces instructions à la lettre pour prévenir tout risque de blessures et garantir le fonctionnement sécurisé de la machine. 7 ATTENTION Le non-respect des instructions signalées de cette manière peut entraîner des blessures légère ou endommager l'installation. % Observez ces instructions à la lettre pour prévenir tout risque de blessures et garantir le fonctionnement sécurisé de la machine. Séquence d'une procédure 1 Le numéro 1, tel que formaté ici, indique la première étape d'une procédure. 2 Les numéros suivants, tels que formatés ici, indiquent les étapes suivantes d'une procédure. ? Le texte formaté dans ce style fournit des informations complémentaires. % Le texte formaté dans ce style décrit les actions qui garantiront l'obtention des résultats voulus. Une illustration insérée ici montre les opérations à effectuer. Introduction 1 C250 1-23 Conseils 2 Remarque Les remarques fournissent des informations utiles et des conseils d'utilisation sécurisée de la machine. 2 Rappel Les rappels signalent des informations importantes qu'il convient de ne pas oublier. ! Détail Les Détails réfèrent à des sections ou à des documents fournissant des informations plus détaillées. Conventions typographiques Touche [Arrêt] Le nom des touches du tableau de commande est indiqué dans cette police, entre crochets. REGLAGE MACHINE Signale les termes affichés à l'écran. 1 Introduction 1-24 C250 1.5 Descriptions et symboles des documents et du papier Les termes et symboles utilisés dans ce manuel sont expliqués ci-dessous. 1.5.1 “Largeur” et “Longueur” Chaque fois que des dimensions de papier sont mentionnées dans ce manuel, la première valeur se réfère à la largeur du papier (illustrée ci-contre par un “Y”) et la seconde valeur à la longueur (illustrée cicontre par un “X”). 1.5.2 Orientation du papier Portrait (w) Si la largeur (Y) du papier est plus courte que la longueur (X) du papier, il a une orientation verticale ou portrait, signalée par w. Paysage (v) Si la largeur (Y) du papier est plus longue que la longueur (X) du papier, il a une orientation horizontale ou paysage, signalée par v. Introduction 1 C250 1-25 1.6 Documentation Les manuels d'utilisation suivants ont été préparés pour cette machine. Manuel d'utilisation – Opérations Copie Ce manuel décrit le fonctionnement de base de la machine, ainsi que les procédures des fonctions de copie. - Consultez ce manuel pour connaître les procédures détaillées des fonctions de copie, notamment les précautions d'installation et d'utilisation, la mise sous/hors tension de la machine, le chargement du papier, et les opérations de dépannage, dans le cas d'un bourrage papier par exemple. Manuel d'utilisation – Opérations Scanner réseau Ce manuel décrit en détail les procédures de configuration du réseau (équipement standard) et d'utilisation des fonctions de numérisation. - Consultez ce manuel pour connaître les procédures détaillées des fonctions de réseau, et d'utilisation de la numérisation vers un e-mail, vers FTP et vers un PC (SMB). Manuel d'utilisation – Opérations Boîte Ce manuel décrit en détail les procédures d'utilisation des boîtes. - Consultez ce manuel pour connaître les procédures d'utilisation des boîtes stockées sur le disque dur. User utilities CD Manuel d'utilisation - Opérations Impression Ce manuel décrit en détail les procédures d'utilisation du contrôleur d'impression standard intégré. - Consultez ce manuel pour connaître les procédures d'utilisation des fonctions d'impression. Post Script CD PageScope utility CD Ce manuel décrit en détail les procédures d'impression. - Consultez ce manuel pour connaître les procédures d'utilisation des fonctions d'impression. Manuel d'utilisation – Opérations fax (ce manuel) Ce manuel décrit en détail les procédures d'utilisation du fax. - Consultez ce manuel pour connaître les procédures d'utilisation des fonctions fax si le kit de fax est installé. 1 Introduction 1-26 C250 Manuel d'utilisation – Zoom Écran Ce manuel décrit en détail les procédures d'utilisation des fonctions de copie en mode d'affichage étendu. - Consultez ce manuel pour connaître les procédures d'utilisation du mode d'affichage étendu. 2 Préliminaires Préliminaires 2 C250 2-3 2 Préliminaires 2.1 Restrictions 2 Remarque L'émission et la réception de fax couleur ne sont pas disponibles sur ce télécopieur. Ce télécopieur peut être raccordé aux lignes téléphoniques suivantes. - Lignes locales (réseaux de communication fax compris) - PBX (standard privé avec commutateur à 2 fils) Tenir compte des points suivants en ce qui concerne la ligne téléphonique. - Un poste téléphonique d'affaires ne peut pas être connecté en tant que ligne extérieure. - Si les liaisons privées numériques sont multiplexées sur le réseau d'entreprise, les communications fax peuvent être soumises aux restrictions suivantes. – La vitesse de transmission est réduite. – La communication via Super G3 n'est pas disponible. Les réglages définis en usine peuvent parfois générer des erreurs de communication dues au multiplexage qui limite au maximum la bande disponible pour la ligne, sur l'hypothèse d'une utilisation vocale. Ces restrictions dépendent toutefois du matériel de réseau. Pour plus d'informations sur le réseau utilisé, contactez l'administrateur. 2 Rappel L'appui répété sur l'interrupteur Marche/Arrêt peut entraîner un dysfonctionnement de la machine. Attendez au moins 5 secondes après avoir éteint la machine avant de la rallumer. 2 Préliminaires 2-4 C250 2.2 Tableau de commande 2.2.1 Tableau de commande 1 2 3 5 8 9 11 12 24 10 21 2019 18 17 1514 13 22 23 16 4 6 7 No. Nom Description 1 [Eco énergie] Appuyez sur cette touche pour passer en mode Économie d'énergie. Sous ce mode, le voyant de la touche [Eco énergie] est vert et l'écran tactile s'éteint. Pour annuler ce mode, réappuyez sur la touche [Eco énergie]. 2 Écran tactile Affiche divers écrans et messages. Réglez les fonctions en touchant l'écran. 3 [Code] Si l'authentification utilisateur ou le compte de service a été activé, appuyez sur cette touche après avoir entré le nom utilisateur et le mot de passe (pour l'authentification utilisateur) ou le nom du compte et le mot de passe (pour le compte de service), pour utiliser la machine. 4 [Boîte] Appuyez sur cette touche pour passer en mode Boîte. Sous ce mode, le voyant de la touche [Boîte] est vert. Pour plus d'informations, voir "Manuel d'utilisation – Opérations Boîte". 5 [Fax] Appuyez sur cette touche pour passer en mode Fax. Sous ce mode, le voyant de la touche [Fax] est vert. 6 [Numérisation] Appuyez sur cette touche pour passer en mode Numérisation. Sous ce mode, le voyant de la touche [Numérisation] est vert. Pour plus d'informations, voir "Manuel d'utilisation – Opérations Scanner réseau". 7 [Copie] Appuyez sur cette touche pour passer en mode Copie. Sous ce mode, le voyant de la touche [Copie] est vert. Pour plus d'informations, voir "Manuel d'utilisation – Opérations Copie". Préliminaires 2 C250 2-5 8 [Réinitialiser] Appuyez sur cette touche pour remettre à zéro tous les réglages (à l'exception des réglages programmés) entrés sur le tableau de commande et l'écran tactile. 9 [Interruption] L'écran Copie s'affiche après la numérisation de documents originaux, puis la machine passe en mode Interruption. Sous ce mode, le voyant de la touche [Interruption] est vert et le message “Mode interruption en cours” s'affiche sur l'écran tactile. Pour annuler le mode Interruption, réappuyez sur la touche [Interruption]. 10 [INTERRUPTEUR] Appuyez sur cet interrupteur Marche/Arrêt pour allumer/ éteindre la machine. Lorsque la machine est éteinte, elle passe en veille (conservation d'énergie). 11 [Arrêt] Cette option n'est pas utilisée en mode Fax. 12 [Départ] Appuyez sur cette touche pour démarrer l'opération sélectionnée en mode Boîte, Fax, Numérisation ou Copie. En mode Fax, appuyez sur cette touche pour démarrer la transmission. Lorsque la machine est prête, le voyant de la touche [Départ] est vert. Lorsque le voyant de la touche [Départ] est orange, l'opération ne peut pas commencer. Appuyez sur cette touche pour redémarrer une tâche interrompue. Pour plus d'informations sur une tâche interrompue, voir "Manuel d'utilisation – Opérations Copie". 13 Voyant [Alimentation] Lorsque la machine est mise sous tension avec le bouton [Alimentation], le voyant est vert. 14 Voyant [Données] Clignote en vert pendant la réception d'une tâche d'impression. S'allume en vert pendant l'impression de données. 15 [Epreuve] Cette touche n'est pas utilisée en mode Fax. 16 Clavier Utilisez ce clavier pour taper le numéro ou enregistrer le numéro et les données d'un fax. Utilisez ce clavier pour saisir le nombre de copies, le taux d'agrandissement et d'autres réglages. 17 [C] ( de “clear” - effacer) Appuyez sur cette touche pour effacer une valeur (un numéro de fax, un nombre de copies, un taux d'agrandissement, un format, etc.) saisie au clavier. 18 [Contrôle] Appuyez sur cette touche pour vérifier les réglages. 19 [Utilitaire/Compteur] Appuyez sur cette touche pour afficher l'écran Utilitaire, dans le cas d'une opération utilitaire ou pour confirmer le nombre de copies, la communication fax ou la numérisation, par exemple. 20 [Programmes] Cette touche n'est pas utilisée en mode Fax. 21 Contraste Utilisez cette touche pour ajuster le contraste sur l'écran tactile. 22 [Zoom Ecran] Cette touche n'est pas utilisée en mode Fax. 23 [Accessibilité] Appuyez sur cette touche pour afficher l'écran de réglage des fonctions d'accessibilité utilisateur. No. Nom Description 2 Préliminaires 2-6 C250 2 Rappel Ne pas appuyer trop fort sur l'écran tactile; cela risquerait de l'érafler ou de l'endommager. Ne jamais exercer de forte pression sur l'écran tactile, et ne jamais sélectionner une option de cet écran avec un objet dur ou pointu. Lorsque l'écran d'appel du service après-vente s'affiche et qu'il est impossible de poursuivre les opérations de copie, un dysfonctionnement s'est produit. Prendre note du code d'erreur, débrancher immédiatement la machine, puis contacter le service après-vente. 24 [Aide] Appuyez sur cette touche pour afficher l'écran d'aide principal et accéder aux descriptions des fonctions et du fonctionnement. Pour plus d'informations, voir "Manuel d'utilisation – Opérations Copie". No. Nom Description Préliminaires 2 C250 2-7 2.3 Réglages de base 2.3.1 Réglages indispensables Une fois la machine installée, vous devez procéder aux réglages suivants avant d'utiliser les fonctions de télécopie. La communication fax est bloquée tant que ces réglages ne sont pas définis correctement. - Information en-tête – Enregistre le numéro et le nom du fax. - Réglage Paramètres ligne – Définit la ligne téléphonique et la méthode de réception utilisées. Information en-tête Réglez les options suivantes. ! Détail Pour plus d'informations, voir “Information en-tête” à la page 11-28. Réglage Paramètres ligne Réglez les options suivantes. ! Détail Pour plus d'informations, voir “Réglage Paramètres ligne” à la page 11-34. Option Description Nom expéditeur Définit le nom de cette machine. Ce nom de 30 caractères maximum peut comporter tout caractère alphanumérique et tout signe. Nº de fax expéditeur Définit le numéro de fax de cette machine. Ce numéro de 20 caractères maximum peut comporter tout chiffre de 0 à 9, le signe +, des espaces, le signe * et le signe #. Option Description Méthode de numérotation Sélectionnez le mode de numérotation à fréquences vocales (DTMF) ou à impulsions (décimale). Mode réception Choisissez entre la réception automatique ou manuelle. Sélectionnez “Récept. auto” pour la réception automatique. Sélectionnez “Réception manuelle” si vous recevez fréquemment des appels sur un combiné externe connecté à la machine. 2 Préliminaires 2-8 C250 2.4 Fonctions utiles Si le programme et le carnet d'adresses ont été enregistrés, il suffit d'appuyer sur [Programme] ou [Carnet d'adresses] pour appeler un numéro ou exécuter un programme enregistré. 2.4.1 Carnet d'adresses En enregistrant dans le [Carnet d'adresses] une destination à laquelle vous transmettez régulièrement , il suffit ensuite d'appuyer sur [Carnet d'adresses] pour afficher et appeler cette destination. ! Détail Si le nom et son caractère de recherche sont enregistrés dans le carnet d'adresses, vous pouvez spécifier une adresse par son caractère de recherche. Carnet d'adresses Cette section décrit les procédures de réglage du numéro de fax, du nom de la destination et du caractère de recherche d'une destination abrégée. 1 Appuyez sur [Utilitaire/Compteur] sur le tableau de commande pour ouvrir l'écran Utilitaire, si ce n'est pas déjà fait. – Vous pouvez enregistrer jusqu'à 2 000 (001 à 2000) adresses dans le carnet d'adresses, y compris dans les carnets d'adresses d'autres fonctions de la machine. – Vous pouvez confirmer les informations enregistrées dans la liste de numéros abrégés. 2 Appuyez sur [Enregistrement 1-touche]. – En mode Utilitaire, vous pouvez sélectionner une fonction en tapant son numéro au clavier. Pour [Enregistrement 1-touche], tapez 1 au clavier. Préliminaires 2 C250 2-9 3 Appuyez sur [Fax]. 4 Appuyez sur [Carnet d'adresses]. 5 Appuyez sur la destination à enregistrer. – Les éléments que vous pouvez enregistrer dans le carnet d'adresses sont les suivants. – [No. abrégé] : Pour enregistrer un numéro de fax. – [E-mail] : Pour enregistrer une adresse e-mail. Cette machine peut spécifier une adresse e-mail en tant que destination fax. – Cette fonction est utile pour transmettre une image à une adresse e-mail en même temps qu'une émission fax. – [Boîte utilisateur] : Pour enregistrer un nom de boîte. Cette machine peut spécifier une boîte sur le disque dur interne en tant que destination fax. – Cette fonction est utile pour sauvegarder une image dans une boîte en même temps qu'une émission fax. 2 Préliminaires 2-10 C250 – Si le numéro abrégé est déjà enregistré, vous pouvez appuyer sur [Modif.] sur cet écran pour modifier le contenu de la liste. Pour plus d'informations, voir “Enregistrement d'une adresse e-mail dans le carnet d'adresses” à la page 10-9. 6 Appuyez sur [Nouveau]. 7 Appuyez sur [Nom], saisissez le nom à enregistrer, puis appuyez sur [OK]. – Pour plus d'informations sur la saisie des caractères, voir page 13-4. – Le nom peut comporter 24 caractères maximum. 8 Saisissez la destination. – Si vous avez sélectionné [No. abrégé] à l'étape 5. Tapez sur le clavier le numéro de fax de la destination. – Si vous avez sélectionné [E-mail] à l'étape 5. Appuyez sur [Adresse E-mail] et saisissez l'adresse e-mail. – Si vous avez sélectionné [Boîte utilisateur] à l'étape 5. Appuyez sur [Nom boîte ut.] et sélectionnez la boîte. – Les numéros peuvent comporter 38 caractères maximum. – Un numéro disponible est affiché par défaut dans le champ [No.]. – Pour corriger une faute de frappe, utilisez [Suppri.] ou [C] (clear). – Pour pouvoir sélectionner une boîte, celle-ci doit avoir été préalablement enregistrée. – Pour plus d'informations sur l'enregistrement des boîtes, voir “Manuel d'utilisation – Opérations Boîte”. 9 Appuyez sur [Index] pour saisir les caractères de recherche, puis sur [OK]. – Appuyez sur la touche à enregistrer comme caractère de recherche parmi les touches [ABC] à [etc]. Préliminaires 2 C250 2-11 10 Appuyez sur [Réglage ligne], le cas échéant, pour sélectionner [Communications internationales], [ECM OFF] ou [V34 OFF], puis appuyez sur [OK]. – Si vous avez sélectionné [E-mail] ou [Boîte utilisateur] à l'étape 5, [Réglage ligne] n'apparaît pas. 11 Appuyez sur [OK]. La destination est enregistrée et apparaît dans la liste. Pour enregistrer une autre destination dans le carnet d'adresses, passez à l'étape 6. 12 Appuyez sur [Quitt.]. 2 Préliminaires 2-12 C250 2.4.2 Programme En enregistrant dans un [Programme] la destination et les fonctions de communication, il suffit d'appuyer sur [Programme] pour récupérer ces informations. ! Détail Vous pouvez enregistrer le Réglage numérisation et le Réglage communication. Pour plus d'informations, voir “Enregistrement d'un programme” à la page 10-25. Programme Cette section décrit les procédures d'enregistrement d'un nom et d'une destination dans un [Programme]. 1 Appuyez sur [Utilitaire/Compteur] sur le tableau de commande pour ouvrir l'écran Utilitaire, si ce n'est pas déjà fait. – Vous pouvez enregistrer 400 (001 à 400) programmes maximum. 2 Appuyez sur [Enregistrement 1-touche]. – En mode Utilitaire, vous pouvez également taper sur le clavier le numéro de l'option pour la sélectionner. Pour [Enregistrement 1- touche], tapez “1” sur le clavier. 3 Appuyez sur [Fax]. 4 Appuyez sur [Programme]. Préliminaires 2 C250 2-13 5 Sélectionnez le numéro de programme à enregistrer et appuyez sur [Modif.]. 6 Appuyez sur [Nom], saisissez le nom du programme, puis appuyez sur [OK]. – Le nom peut comporter 24 caractères maximum. – Pour plus d'informations sur la saisie des caractères, voir page 13-4. 2 Préliminaires 2-14 C250 7 Appuyez sur [Dest.] pour sélectionner la destination. – Pour enregistrer une destination déjà enregistrée, sélectionnez [Sélection dans Carnet d'adresses] pour la saisir dans [No. abrégé], [Boîte utilisateur], [Groupe] ou [E-Mail], puis appuyez sur [OK]. – Pour saisir un numéro de fax, appuyez sur [Saisie directe], entrez une destination en sélectionnant No. abrégé, Boîte utilisateur ou EMail, puis appuyez sur [OK]. – Pour corriger une faute de frappe, utilisez [Suppri.] ou [C] (clear). – Pour pouvoir sélectionner une boîte, celle-ci doit avoir été préalablement enregistrée. – Pour plus d'informations sur l'enregistrement des boîtes, voir “Manuel d’utilisation – Opérations Boîte”. 8 Appuyez sur [Fermer], puis sur [OK]. – Pour annuler l'enregistrement du programme, appuyez sur [Annul.]. La liste de programmes s'affiche. Pour enregistrer un autre programme, passez à l'étape 5. 9 Appuyez sur [Quitt.]. Préliminaires 2 C250 2-15 2.5 Écran Fax L'écran Fax s'affiche lorsque vous appuyez sur [Fax] sur le tableau de commande. Cet écran comprend [Programme], [Groupe], [Carnet d'adresses] ou [Saisie directe]. 1 2 3 4 5 678 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 No. Nom Description 1 Liste tâches Affiche la liste des tâches en file d'attente, l'historique des tâches et les erreurs. 2 Programme Affiche l'écran de sélection d'un programme. 3 Groupe Affiche l'écran de sélection d'un groupe. 4 Carnet d'adresses Affiche l'écran de sélection d'un carnet d'adresses. 5 Saisie directe Affiche l'écran de numérotation à l'aide de symboles spéciaux tels que Tonalité et Pause. Appuyez sur [Numérisation vers E-Mail] pour afficher le clavier de saisie de l'adresse e-mail. 6 No. de destinat. Le nombre de destinations de l'émission s'affiche. 7 Mémoire La mémoire disponible s'affiche. 8 Décrocher Appuyez sur cette touche pour émettre/recevoir un fax manuellement. Vous entendez ainsi les signaux sur la ligne. 9 Nom dest. Vous pouvez basculer entre l'affichage du nom ou du numéro de téléphone de la destination. 10 Indicateur de page Affiche le numéro de page de la liste de destinations programmées. 11 Liste pages Permet de préciser le numéro de page de la liste de destinations programmées. 12 Réglage numéris. Affiche un menu dans lequel est réglée la méthode de lecture de l'original, telle que type d'image originale, définition ou application. 2 Préliminaires 2-16 C250 13 Réglage comm. Affiche un menu dans lequel est réglée la méthode de communication, telle que Émission différée ou Réception en relève. 14 Indicateur de destination Affiche la destination. 15 Zone secondaire Affiche la description des opérations réglées dans la partie droite de l'écran. Dans le cas du fax, affiche chaque fonction et les destinations de diffusion. No. Nom Description Préliminaires 2 C250 2-17 2.6 Authentification utilisateur et compte de service L'utilisation de cette machine peut être liée à la saisie d'un nom d'utilisateur, d'un nom de service et d'un mot de passe. Dans ce cas, vous devez entrer ces informations pour accéder à l'écran d'utilisation. Pour connaître les noms d'utilisateur et de service appropriés, contactez l'administrateur. 2.6.1 Si l'authentification utilisateur est paramétrée ! Détail Pour plus d'informations sur l'authentification utilisateur et le compte de service, voir “Manuel d'utilisation - Opérations Copie”. 2.6.2 Si le compte de service est paramétré 2 Préliminaires 2-18 C250 2.7 Réception fax dans une boîte Si vous utilisez la fonction Réception PC-Fax et les fonctions Réception mémoire de cette machine, vous pouvez sauvegarder le document reçu dans une boîte du disque dur, en attendant une impression ultérieure. D'autre part, un document confidentiel reçu est automatiquement sauvegardé dans la boîte utilisateur confidentielle sur le disque dur. Les documents sauvegardés dans une boîte peuvent être imprimés sur cette machine ou exportés sur un ordinateur du réseau. Cette section présente les principes de la réception d'un fax dans une boîte. - Pour connaître la procédure de création d'une boîte et de téléchargement des documents reçus dans cette boîte via la fonction Réception PC-Fax, voir “Manuel d’utilisation – Opérations Boîte". - Si une boîte de cette machine est spécifiée en tant que destination lors de l'émission d'un fax, les documents lus peuvent y être sauvegardés. Expéditeur Original Disque dur Préliminaires 2 C250 2-19 2.7.1 Types de boîtes Une boîte publique et une boîte système sont fournies sur le disque dur de cette machine. - Dans la boîte publique, une boîte spécifiée (no. 1 à 999999999) est fournie. - Quatre types de boîtes sont disponibles dans la boîte système : boîte bulletin board, boîte d'émission en relève, boîte de réception mémoire et boîte d'impression sécurisée. Sur cette machine, ces boîtes permettent d'utiliser les fonctions énumérées dans le tableau suivant. Nom de la boîte Fonction Boîte publique Boîte spécifiée (boîte publique / boîte personnelle : no. 1 à 99999999) La boîte publique spécifiée équivaut à la boîte confidentielle si la Réception confidentielle est active (ON). Si la boîte spécifiée est sélectionnée comme emplacement de stockage des documents reçus dans la fonction Réception PC-fax, et si la boîte utilisateur TSI est sélectionnée, les documents reçus sont sauvegardés dans la boîte correspondante. Avec la fonction Réception PC-fax : Les documents sont sauvegardés dans la boîte précisée dans l'adresse secondaire par l'expéditeur. Avec la fonction Réception TSI : Les documents sont sauvegardés dans la boîte dont le numéro correspond à celui de la boîte utilisateur TSI. ! Détail Pour plus d'informations, voir “Fonctionnement de la Réception PCfax” à la page 2-21. 2 Préliminaires 2-20 C250 Boîte système Boîte bulletin board Boîte d'enregistrement des documents à consulter. Les documents enregistrés dans la boîte bulletin board peuvent être émis en relève conformément aux instructions de relève du correspondant. ! Détail Pour plus d'informations, voir “Bulletin” à la page 9-9. Boîte d'émission en relève Les originaux lus puis émis en relève sont sauvegardés dans cette boîte. ! Détail Pour plus d'informations, voir “Émission en relève” à la page 9-4. Boîte utilisateur Réception mémoire Lorsque la Réception mémoire est active (ON), les documents reçus sont sauvegardés dans cette boîte, sans impression. ! Détail Pour plus d'informations, voir “Réception mémoire” à la page 8-6. Si la boîte fixe est sélectionnée comme emplacement de stockage des documents reçus dans la fonction Réception PC-fax, les documents reçus sont sauvegardés dans cette boîte. ! Détails Pour plus d'informations, voir “Fonctionnement de la Réception PCfax” à la page 2-21. Boîte d'impression sécurisée Cette boîte est utilisée si l'impression confidentielle est sélectionnée dans le contrôleur d'impression. ! Détail Pour plus d'informations sur la boîte d'impression sécurisée, voir “Manuel d’utilisation – Opérations d’impression". Nom de la boîte Fonction Préliminaires 2 C250 2-21 2.7.2 Fonctionnement de la Réception PC-fax ! Détail Pour plus d'informations, voir “Réglage RX fax” à la page 11-56. Si la Réception PC-fax ou le Paramètre boîte utilisateur TSI est sélectionné, les documents reçus sont sauvegardés dans la boîte fixe (0) ou la boîte publique (1 à 999999999) sur le disque dur. La boîte d'enregistrement des documents reçus est spécifiée dans [Réglage RX fax] du mode Utilitaire. Le tableau suivant explique la relation entre le [Réglage RX fax] et la méthode de réception. [Réglage RX fax] du mode Utilitaire Méthode de réception Réglage RX fax : OFF Les documents reçus sont imprimés immédiatement, sans sauvegarde dans la boîte. Dans les circonstances suivantes, les documents reçus sont cependant sauvegardés dans la boîte. • Avec la Réception confidentielle (Si l'adresse secondaire dans la fonction F-code représente un numéro de boîte utilisateur confidentielle) : Les documents confidentiels reçus sont sauvegardés dans la boîte confidentielle, quel que soit le réglage de la fonction Réception PC-fax. • Si le Paramètre boîte utilisateur TSI est sélectionné, les documents reçus sont sauvegardés dans la boîte définie par ce paramètre. • Avec la Réception mémoire active (ON) : S'ils ne correspondent pas au cas 1. ou 2. ci-dessus, les documents reçus sont sauvegardés dans la boîte Réception mémoire. Réglage RX fax : ON Sortie RX : boîte fixe Les documents reçus sont sauvegardés dans la boîte Réception mémoire. Dans les circonstances suivantes, les documents reçus sont cependant sauvegardés dans une autre boîte. • Avec la Réception confidentielle (Si l'adresse secondaire dans la fonction F-code représente un numéro de boîte utilisateur confidentielle) : Les documents reçus sont sauvegardés dans la boîte confidentielle, quel que soit le réglage de la fonction Réception PC-fax. Si l'adresse secondaire ne correspond pas au numéro de la boîte confidentielle, la machine génère une erreur de communication. 2 Préliminaires 2-22 C250 Réglage RX fax : ON Sortie RX : boîte spécifiée Les documents reçus sont sauvegardés dans la boîte spécifiée (1 à 999999999) dont le numéro est indiqué dans l'adresse secondaire. Dans les circonstances suivantes, les documents reçus sont cependant sauvegardés dans une autre boîte. • Si l'adresse secondaire n'est pas précisée, les documents reçus sont sauvegardés dans la boîte Réception mémoire. • S'il n'existe pas de boîte spécifiée, voir le réglage de [Erreur saisie no. boîte] en mode Utilitaire. • Avec la Réception confidentielle (Si l'adresse secondaire dans la fonction F-code représente un numéro de boîte utilisateur confidentielle) : Les documents confidentiels reçus sont sauvegardés dans la boîte confidentielle, quel que soit le réglage de la fonction Réception PC-fax. Si l'adresse secondaire ne correspond pas au numéro de la boîte confidentielle, voir le réglage de [Erreur saisie no. boîte] dans le mode Utilitaire. [Réglage RX fax] du mode Utilitaire Méthode de réception 3 Émission Émission 3 C250 3-3 3 Émission 3.1 Émission simple de télécopie Émission simple de télécopie La procédure d'émission de base d'une télécopie est décrite ci-dessous. L'émission ou la réception d'un fax couleur n'est pas disponible. Pour envoyer un e-mail en couleur, utilisez la fonction de numérisation. pour plus d'informations sur cette fonction, voir “Manuel d’utilisation – Opérations Scanner réseau”. Cette procédure décrit l'émission d'un simple document recto, mais les fonctions disponibles à chaque étape de la procédure sont également présentées pour faciliter l'envoi de tous types de télécopies. Pour plus de détails sur ces fonctions, voir “Applications d'émission” à la page 7-3. 1 Appuyez sur [Fax] sur le tableau de commande pour ouvrir l'écran Fax. 2 Appuyez sur [Réglage numéris.] pour régler la fonction de numérisation, puis appuyez sur [OK]. 3 Émission 3-4 C250 – L'écran Fax est réglé comme suit en usine. – Type d'image original Texte – Densité Standard – Recto/Recto-Verso Recto – Définition Standard – Pour plus d'informations, voir “Réglage des conditions d'émission” à la page 3-11. – Pour plus d'informations, voir “Ouverture des écrans Réglage numérisation et Réglage communication” à la page 7-3. 3 Appuyez sur [Réglage comm.] pour paramétrer la fonction, puis appuyez sur [OK]. – Pour plus d'informations, voir “Applications d'émission” à la page 7-3. Émission 3 C250 3-5 4 Sélectionnez la destination. – Le réglage de la destination s'effectue comme suit. – Clavier – Programme – Groupe – Carnet d'adresses – Saisie directe – L'enregistrement préalable du numéro du fax de destination avec un numéro abrégé ou programmé simplifie la sélection de la destination. – Pour annuler une destination sélectionnée, sélectionnez-la à nouveau. – Appuyez sur [Reset] pour effacer l'ensemble de la saisie. – Pour plus d'informations, voir “Enregistrement du carnet d'adresses” à la page 10-5 et “Enregistrement d'un programme” à la page 10-25. – Lorsque [Saisie manuelle destination] dans [Réglage sécurité] du mode Utilitaire est réglé sur [Interdit], [Saisie directe] n'apparaît pas. Pour connaître le réglage de [Saisie manuelle destination], contactez l'administrateur. Le numéro de fax saisi s'affiche dans Destinations de diffusion. 5 Positionnez l'original sur la machine. – Pour plus d'informations, voir “Positionnement de l'original sur la machine” à la page 3-7. 3 Émission 3-6 C250 6 Appuyez sur [Départ]. – La machine procède à la numérisation de l'original et la transmission commence. – L'écran suivant apparaît si l'écran de vérification du rapport des résultats émission (TX) a été programmé à cet effet. Pour imprimer le rapport d'émission, appuyez sur [Oui]. – Pour interrompre l'émission, appuyez sur [Arrêt]. – Si l'émission ne s'effectue pas, voir page 5-3. – En cas d'échec l'émission, le rapport d'émission est automatiquement imprimé (s'il est paramétré à cet effet). Pour plus d'informations sur le réglage du rapport, voir “Réglage Rapports” à la page 11-67. – Pour plus d'informations sur le rapport d'émission (TX), voir “Rapport Émission” à la page 12-9. Émission 3 C250 3-7 3.2 Positionnement de l'original sur la machine Vous pouvez utiliser le chargeur de document (ADF) ou la vitre d'exposition pour numériser les originaux. Lorsque vous placez un original dans le chargeur, il est automatiquement acheminé et numérisé. 3.2.1 Utilisation du chargeur de document (ADF) Outre la numérisation automatique de plusieurs originaux, le chargeur de document permet d'envoyer des originaux recto/verso. Utilisation du chargeur de document (ADF) 1 Rabattez le chargeur de document. 2 Alignez les originaux en commençant par la première page. 3 Placez les originaux dans le chargeur de document en orientant la face à numériser vers le haut. – Pour imprimer correctement les informations d'en-tête (nom/ numéro de fax de l'expéditeur), insérez le bord de l'original dans le chargeur. 4 Réglez les guides du papier. – En mode d'originaux mixtes, ajustez les guides du papier sur le format de la plus grande feuille, et alignez le reste des originaux dans le coin supérieur gauche du chargeur. 3 Émission 3-8 C250 3.2.2 Positionnement des originaux sur la vitre d'exposition Utilisez la vitre d'exposition pour les originaux qui ne peuvent pas être placés dans le chargeur de document, tel qu'un livre ou des originaux épais/fins. Positionnement des originaux sur la vitre d'exposition 1 Soulevez le chargeur de document. 2 Placez l'original recto vers le bas dans le coin arrière gauche, en alignant son bord sur la réglette gauche. 3 Rabattez soigneusement le chargeur de document. Émission 3 C250 3-9 3.2.3 Envoi de plusieurs originaux à partir de la vitre d'exposition Les originaux qui ne peuvent pas être envoyés par le biais du chargeur ADF peuvent être envoyés par le biais de la vitre d'exposition. Envoi de plusieurs originaux à partir de la vitre d'exposition 1 Au besoin, appuyez sur la touche [Fax] du tableau de commande pour ouvrir l'écran Fax. 2 Sélectionnez la destination. 3 Au besoin, définissez le réglage des fonctions. 4 Placez l'original sur la vitre d'exposition. Appuyez sur [Réglage numér.] - [Numérisation séparée] - [OK], puis appuyez sur la touche [Départ]. 5 Placez l'original suivant sur la vitre d'exposition, puis appuyez sur la touche [Départ]. – Répétez cette procédure pour chacun des originaux à envoyer. Les originaux numérisés sont mémorisés. 6 Appuyez sur la touche [Fin]. Le mode de lecture du document est annulé. 7 Appuyez sur [Départ]. La transmission commence. 3 Émission 3-10 C250 3.2.4 Émission d'originaux avec le chargeur ADF et la vitre d'exposition Vous pouvez numériser les originaux en utilisant le chargeur de document et la vitre d'exposition, de même que vous pouvez numériser les originaux volumineux en les plaçant en plusieurs lots sur le chargeur de document. Émission d'originaux avec le chargeur ADF et la vitre d'exposition 1 Au besoin, appuyez sur la touche [Fax] du tableau de commande pour ouvrir l'écran Fax. 2 Sélectionnez la destination. 3 Au besoin, définissez le réglage des fonctions. 4 Placez l'original sur la vitre d'exposition. Appuyez sur [Réglage numér.] - [Numérisation séparée] - [OK], puis appuyez sur la touche [Départ]. – Un document placé dans le chargeur a la priorité sur celui qui est placé sur la vitre d'exposition. – Pour plus d'informations, voir “Positionnement de l'original sur la machine” à la page 3-7. 5 Placez l'original suivant dans le chargeur ou sur la vitre d'exposition, puis appuyez sur la touche [Départ]. – Répétez cette procédure pour chacun des originaux à numériser avant l'émission. Les originaux numérisés sont mémorisés. 6 Appuyez sur la touche [Fin]. Le mode de lecture du document est annulé. 7 Appuyez sur [Départ]. La transmission commence. Émission 3 C250 3-11 3.3 Réglage des conditions d'émission Le réglage du type d'image original, de la densité, du recto/recto-verso et de la définition s'affichent lorsque vous choisissez [Réglage numér.] dans l'écran Fax. Ces options permettent de définir les conditions de l'émission en fonction du type d'original à envoyer. ! Détail Les conditions de l'émission ne peuvent pas être réglées en unités de page. Réglage des conditions d'émission 1 Appuyez sur [Réglage numér.] dans l'écran Fax. 2 Appuyez sur la touche à régler. 3 Émission 3-12 C250 3.3.1 Type d'image original Réglez la qualité en fonction du contenu de l'original. Vous avez le choix entre 4 réglages de qualité, Texte étant le réglage par défaut. Réglage de qualité Description Texte S'applique si les originaux à numériser contiennent uniquement du texte. Lorsqu'une image est numérisée sous ce mode, les teintes neutres des images ne sont pas reproduites. Texte/Photo S'applique si les originaux à numériser contiennent du texte et des photos (demi-teinte). Sélectionnez ce mode si la page contient à la fois des caractères et des images, ou si le document contient à la fois des pages de texte et d'images. Photo S'applique si les originaux à numériser contiennent uniquement des photos (demi-teinte). Trame S'applique si les originaux à numériser contiennent en majeure partie du texte manuscrit clair. Émission 3 C250 3-13 3.3.2 Densité Réglez la densité en fonction de la clarté ou de l'obscurité de l'original. Normal est le réglage par défaut. Vous réglez la densité en 9 étapes. Option Densité Description Clair Numérise les originaux avec une densité plus claire que la densité normale. Normal Numérise les originaux avec une densité située entre Clair et Foncé. C'est le réglage par défaut. Foncé Numérise les originaux avec une densité plus foncée que la densité normale. 3 Émission 3-14 C250 3.3.3 Recto/Recto-verso Cette option détermine la manière dont les originaux sont numérisés, en fonction du type d'original. Vous avez le choix entre deux réglages, Recto étant le réglage par défaut. Option Recto/Rectoverso Description Recto Sélectionnez pour numériser des originaux recto. Recto-verso Sélectionnez pour numériser des originaux recto-verso. Émission 3 C250 3-15 3.3.4 Définition Cette option définit la résolution de numérisation des originaux. Vous avez le choix entre 4 réglages, Fin étant le réglage par défaut. ! Détail La quantité de données envoyées et la durée de l'émission dépendent du degré de finesse de la définition. Si vous sélectionnez Super fin ou Ultra fin et que la machine réceptrice n'est pas dotée de cette définition, les originaux sont envoyés dans une définition approchante sur la machine réceptrice. Option Définition Description Std. Sélectionnez pour accélérer le temps d'émission. Fin Sélectionnez pour numériser des originaux standard. Super fin Sélectionnez pour numériser des originaux contenant de petits graphiques ou du texte. Ultra fin Sélectionnez pour numériser des originaux contenant des graphiques élaborés ou du texte. 3 Émission 3-16 C250 3.3.5 Confirmation des réglages et des résultats de la communication Vous pouvez confirmer les réglages et les résultats de la communication des écrans Fax et Application par le biais de la touche [Contrôle] du tableau de commande. Confirmation des réglages et des résultats de la communication 1 Appuyez sur [Fax] sur le tableau de commande. 2 Appuyez sur [Contrôle] sur le tableau de commande. 3 Appuyez sur la touche de l'option dont vous voulez vérifier le réglage. 4 Confirmez les réglages. – Les quatre types de réglages suivants peuvent être confirmés. – Destination Confirmation de la destination. – Appuyez sur [Destination] dans l'écran qui s'affiche suite à l'appui sur [Détails] pour changer la destination. Émission 3 C250 3-17 – Réglage numérisation Confirmation des réglages de numérisation. Appuyez sur chaque touche de l'écran pour afficher l'écran de réglage correspondant, et changer le réglage, s'il y a lieu. – Pour plus d'informations sur l'écran Réglage numérisation, voir “Ouverture des écrans Réglage numérisation et Réglage communication” à la page 7-3. – Appuyez sur [Suiv. ] pour afficher l'écran suivant, et sur [ Préc.] pour afficher l'écran précédent. – Réglage communication Confirmation des réglages de communication. Appuyez sur chaque touche de l'écran pour afficher l'écran de réglage correspondant, et changer le réglage, s'il y a lieu. 3 Émission 3-18 C250 – Pour plus d'informations sur l'écran Réglage communication, voir “Ouverture des écrans Réglage numérisation et Réglage communication” à la page 7-3. – Appuyez sur [Suiv. ] pour afficher l'écran suivant, et sur [ Préc.] pour afficher l'écran précédent. – Réglage E-mail Lorsque vous transmettez par e-mail, vous pouvez confirmer ou saisir le nom du fichier, le sujet, l'adresse e-mail de l’expéditeur et le texte du message. – Si la valeur de [De] n'est pas définie, c'est l'adresse e-mail qui a été définie dans [Enregistrement administrateur] dans l'écran Mode utilitaire, qui apparaît. – Pour plus d'informations sur [Enregistrement administrateur], voir “Manuel d'utilisateur - Opérations Copie”. – Pour plus d'informations sur les valeurs par défaut de Sujet et Texte, voir page 10-38, page 10-44. 5 Une fois que vous avez terminé la vérification, appuyez à deux reprises sur [Fermer]. L'écran Fax s'affiche à nouveau. ! Détail En cas de modification des réglages de numérisation ou de communication, l'écran de vérification ne réapparaît pas. Émission 3 C250 3-19 3.3.6 Enregistrement dans le carnet d'adresses à partir de l'écran Vérifier détails de la tâche Une destination affichée sur l'écran Vérifier détails de la tâche peut être enregistrée dans le [carnet d'adresses]. Enregistrement dans le carnet d'adresse à partir de l'écran Vérifier détails de la tâche (Contrôle) 1 Appuyez sur [Fax] sur le tableau de commande. 2 Appuyez sur [Contrôle] sur le tableau de commande. 3 Appuyez sur [Destination]. 4 Sélectionnez la destination à enregistrer dans le [carnet d'adresses], puis appuyez sur [Détails]. 3 Émission 3-20 C250 5 Appuyez sur [Enregistrer dans carnet d'adresses]. – Si la destination est déjà enregistrée, [Enregistrer dans carnet d'adresses] n'apparaît pas. – Si la destination est une boîte, [Régl. Dest.] s'affiche. Si une adresse e-mail est saisie dans [Régl. Dest.], vous pouvez envoyer un e-mail pour prévenir de la fin d'une tâche, une fois celle-ci accomplie. 6 Appuyez sur [Recherche nom] pour définir le caractères à rechercher, puis appuyez sur [OK]. 7 Appuyez sur [Nom] pour saisir le nom à enregistrer, puis appuyez sur [OK]. 8 Si les données à enregistrer sont correctes, appuyez sur [Oui]. – Pour annuler l'enregistrement, appuyez sur [Non]. 9 Appuyez à trois reprises sur [Fermer] pour revenir à l'écran Fax. La destination sélectionnée est enregistrée dans le [carnet d'adresses]. Émission 3 C250 3-21 3.4 Sélection de la destination 3.4.1 Sélection de la destination Vous pouvez sélectionner une destination de quatre manières. - Clavier - Programme - Carnet d'adresses - Saisie directe Clavier 1 Saisissez le numéro du fax auquel la télécopie doit être transmise. – Vous pouvez entrer un numéro de 38 chiffres maximum. – Appuyez sur [Eff.] sur l'écran Fax pour corriger un chiffre. – Appuyez sur [C] (clear) pour effacer tout le numéro. Le numéro de fax saisi s'affiche dans Destinations de diffusion. 2 Appuyez sur [Départ]. La transmission commence. 3 Émission 3-22 C250 Programme Toute destination enregistrée dans un programme peut être appelée en appuyant sur Programme. 1 Appuyez sur [Programme] dans l'écran Fax. 2 Sélectionnez la destination programmée voulue. – Les réglages de la fonction sont activés. – Appuyez sur ou pour afficher l'écran suivant ou précédent. La destination spécifiée s'affiche dans Destinations de diffusion. 3 Appuyez sur [Départ]. La transmission commence. 2 Remarque Si le réglage de la communication est défini dans le programme, il est automatiquement activé. Vous ne pouvez pas spécifier plus d'un programme. Si la destination est une adresse e-mail, le sujet, le texte, le nom de fichier et l'expéditeur peuvent être définis manuellement. Pour plus d'informations, voir “Confirmation des réglages et des résultats de la communication” à la page 3-16 Émission 3 C250 3-23 Carnet d'adresses Vous pouvez appeler une destination en recherchant dans la liste de noms enregistrés dans le carnet d'adresses. 1 Appuyez sur [Carnet d'adresses] dans l'écran Fax. 2 Appuyez sur le caractère à rechercher. – Chaque fois que vous appuyez sur [Nom Dest.], l'affichage bascule entre le numéro de fax et le nom enregistré. – Vous ne pouvez pas spécifier plus d'une destination. – La recherche est lancée lorsque les caractères sélectionnés coïncident. – Recherche dans [Recherche avancée] – Appuyez sur [Recherche avancée]. – Appuyez sur [Nom], [N° Fax] ou [E-Mail], puis saisissez l'élément à rechercher. – Appuyez sur [OK]. Les résultats de la recherche s'affichent. 3 Émission 3-24 C250 – Recherche dans [Recherche LDAP] – Appuyez sur [Recherche LDAP]. Émission 3 C250 3-25 – Authentifiez-la si l'authentification LDAP est requise. – Appuyez sur [Recherche simple] ou [Recherche avancée], puis saisissez les critères de recherche. Appuyez sur [OK]. – Les résultats de la recherche s'affichent. – Pour plus d'informations sur la recherche LDAP, voir "Manuel d'utilisation – Opérations Scanner réseau". 3 Appuyez sur le nom de la destination à laquelle vous voulez envoyer la télécopie. – Une lettre précédent la touche a la signification suivante. A Appel B Boîte E E-mail La destination spécifiée s'affiche dans Destinations de diffusion. 4 Appuyez sur [Départ]. La transmission commence. 3 Émission 3-26 C250 Saisie directe Vous pouvez saisir un préfixe de numérotation tel que [Tonalité], [Pause] et [-]. Vous pouvez également numériser vers un e-mail ou enregistrer dans une boîte utilisateur. Si vous utilisez [Enregistrer ds boîte ut.], la boîte doit avoir été préalablement enregistrée. Pour plus d'informations sur l'enregistrement de la boîte, voir “Manuel d'utilisation – Opérations Boîte”. 0 Lorsque [Saisie manuelle destination] dans [Réglage sécurité] du mode Utilitaire est réglé sur [Interdit], [Saisie directe] n'apparaît pas. Pour connaître le réglage de [Saisie manuelle destination], contactez l'administrateur. 1 Appuyez sur [Saisie directe] dans l'écran Fax. 2 Saisissez le préfixe voulu, tel que tonalité, pause ou “-”, puis saisissez le numéro du fax de destination sur le clavier. – Tonalité Si vous utilisez la numérotation décimale (DC), appuyez sur [TonaÉmission 3 C250 3-27 lité] pour sélectionner le mode FV (fréquences vocales), qui est utilisé avec les services de télécopie. La sélection de [Tonalité] est indiquée par un “T” à l'écran. – Si vous utilisez la numérotation décimale, vous pouvez commuter provisoirement sur la numérotation à fréquences vocales par le biais de la touche astérisque [1]. – Pause Appuyez sur [Pause] pour insérer une pause entre deux chiffres du numéro à composer. L'appui une fois sur [Pause] génère un intervalle d'une seconde entre deux chiffres. Vous pouvez saisir plusieurs intervalles, indiqués par un “P” à l'écran. – Si la connexion PBX est active, lors d'un appel de la ligne intérieure vers une ligne extérieure, appuyez sur [Pause] après le numéro de la ligne extérieure (“0”, par exemple) pour sécuriser l'appel. “P” s'affiche à l'écran. – - Le tiret est un signe de séparation uniquement. Il n'a aucune incidence sur la numérotation. Il est indiqué à l'écran par un “-”. – No. abrégé Saisissez le numéro abrégé (de 0001 à 2000) sur le clavier et précisez la destination enregistrée dans le carnet d'adresses. À l'écran, un numéro abrégé et la destination sont indiqués comme suit : “A0001: KMBT”. – Numérisation vers E-mail Appuyez sur cette touche pour envoyer un e-mail contenant une image. – Si la destination est une adresse e-mail, le sujet, le texte, le nom de fichier de l'image et l'expéditeur peuvent être définis manuellement. Pour plus d'informations, voir “Réglage des conditions d'émission” à la page 3-11 – L'émission ou la réception d'un fax couleur n'est pas disponible. Pour envoyer un e-mail en couleur, utilisez la fonction de numérisation. Pour plus d'informations sur cette fonction, voir “Manuel d'utilisation – Opérations Scanner réseau”. – Appels récents # Appuyez sur cette touche pour envoyer une télécopie à une destination utilisée récemment. – Pour plus d'informations sur Appels récents #, voir “Rappel manuel” à la page 3-30 – Enregistrer ds boîte ut. Appuyez sur cette touche pour enregistrer une image sur le disque dur interne. 3 Appuyez sur [Départ]. La transmission commence. 3 Émission 3-28 C250 3.4.2 Sélection de plusieurs destinations Vous pouvez envoyer une télécopie à plusieurs destinations en une seule procédure. Vous effectuez ainsi une émission en série. Vous pouvez sélectionner l'émission en série de quatre manières. - Clavier - Groupe - Carnet d'adresses - Saisie directe Ces méthodes peuvent également être utilisées conjointement. ! Détail Vous pouvez préciser 605 adresses de destination maximum (500 numéros abrégés, 100 au clavier et 5 destinations e-mail par saisie directe). Sélection de plusieurs destinations 1 Indiquez toutes les destinations auxquelles vous voulez envoyer un message. (Voir “Sélection de la destination” à la page 3-21.) – Méthode au clavier ou par saisie directe – Lors de la saisie directe ou au clavier, vous pouvez préciser la destination suivant en appuyant sur [Dest. suivante], qui s'affiche dès que vous avez précisé la première destination. – Méthode de groupe – Appuyez sur [Groupe] dans l'écran Fax. – Appuyez sur Groupe dans l'écran Groupe. – Appuyez sur la touche de la destination voulue dans le groupe. Pour sélectionner tous les numéros du groupe, appuyez sur [Tout sélectionner]. 2 Appuyez sur [Départ]. ! Détail Le numéro du groupe (01 à 99, 00) peut également être précisé en appuyant sur [Groupe] dans l'écran de saisie directe. Dans ce cas, la télécopie est transmise à toutes les destinations enregistrées dans le groupe. Émission 3 C250 3-29 3.4.3 Confirmation/Suppression d'une destination Confirmation/Suppression d'une destination Vous pouvez confirmer ou supprimer certaines destinations. 1 Appuyez sur [Fax] sur le tableau de commande, puis sur [Contrôle]. 2 Appuyez sur [Destination]. 3 Confirmez les destinations. 4 Pour supprimer une ou plusieurs destinations, sélectionnez-les dans la liste et appuyez sur [Eff.]. – Appuyez sur [Détails] pour afficher l'écran de détails. – Appuyez sur ou sur pour afficher l'écran précédent ou suivant. L'écran de message apparaît. 5 Appuyez sur [Oui]. 6 Appuyez deux fois sur [Fermer]. L'écran Fax s'affiche à nouveau. 3 Émission 3-30 C250 3.4.4 Rappel manuel Le rappel consiste à renuméroter une destination. Pour rappeler manuellement 1 Appuyez sur [Saisie directe], puis sur [Appels récents #]. – Les cinq (maximum) derniers numéros de fax s'affichent. 2 Sélectionnez la destination à rappeler. Émission 3 C250 3-31 3.5 Numérisation 3.5.1 Lorsque la machine ne détecte pas le format d'origine Lorsque la machine ne détecte pas le format d'origine Si la machine ne parvient pas à détecter le format d'origine, l'écran suivant s'affiche pour vous permettre de le sélectionner. 1 Appuyez sur la touche correspondant au format d'origine. 2 Appuyez sur [OK]. 3.5.2 Lorsque la mémoire est saturée Lors de l'émission mémoire, si l'envoi est volumineux ou si les originaux contiennent des images détaillées, sélectionnez Mémoire rapide (désactivez Émission mémoire (TX) dans l'écran Réglage communication). ! Détail Pour plus d'informations, voir “Message d'erreur affiché” à la page 5-6. 3.5.3 Rotation automatique du document original Un document original A4 (v) ou 8 1/2 × 11 (v) est automatiquement pivoté au moment de la transmission et réglé sur A4 (w) ou 8 1/2 × 11(w). ! Détails Si cette rotation automatique n'est pas souhaitée, contactez le service après-vente. 3 Émission 3-32 C250 3.6 Lorsque l'émission ne s'effectue pas Lorsque l'émission ne s'effectue pas Si vous ne parvenez pas à émettre une télécopie en raison de problème de ligne ou autre, l'écran de vérification du rappel s'affiche. 1 Appuyez sur [OK]. – Le rappel s'effectue une fois le délai spécifié écoulé. – Si l'émission ne s'effectue toujours pas après un rappel, un écran indique que la tâche n'a pas abouti. 2 Appuyez sur [OK]. Pour supprimer une tâche d'émission qui a échoué, appuyez sur [Liste des tâches] et supprimez cette tâche. ! Détail Si le rappel s'effectue normalement dans les réglages du mode Utilitaire, aucun écran de rappel ne s'affiche. Rappel Le rappel se réfère à la renumérotation d'une destination. Lorsque l'émission d'un fax n'aboutit pas parce que la machine réceptrice est occupée ou pour une autre raison, la machine rappelle le numéro après un laps de temps prédéterminé. Pendant ce laps de temps, le document à émettre est traité en tant que document en attente. ! Détail La fonction de rappel est réglée en usine pour rappeler le numéro une fois après un intervalle de trois minutes. Vous pouvez modifier ce réglage dans l'écran Utilitaire. Pour plus d'informations, voir “Réglage Paramètres ligne” à la page 11-35. Émission 3 C250 3-33 3.7 Réservation d'émission Réservation d'émission Vous pouvez paramétrer et lancer l'émission suivante pendant que la machine exécute une communication ou une impression. C'est ce qu'on appelle une réservation d'émission. 0 [Décrocher] ne peut pas être utilisé lors d'une réservation d'émission. 0 Si [Affichage émission] est réglé sur OFF, [Réservation tâche suivante] n'apparaît pas. 0 Pour plus d'informations sur [Affichage émission], voir page 11-19. 1 Appuyez sur [Fax] sur le tableau de commande pour afficher l'écran Fax. 2 Appuyez sur [Réservation tâche suivante]. 3 Positionnez l'original. – Pour plus d'informations, voir “Positionnement des originaux sur la vitre d'exposition” à la page 3-8. – Pour supprimer une émission réservée, appuyez sur [Liste tâches] - [Émission fax], sélectionnez la tâche à supprimer dans [Tâches en cours], puis appuyez sur [Eff.]. – La touche Liste réservation de l'écran Fax clignote en cas de bourrage papier ou de manque de papier pendant le traitement d'une tâche, avant la réservation d'une émission. Vous pouvez toutefois réserver une ou des émissions. 4 Définissez le réglage des fonctions. – Pour plus d'informations sur le réglage des fonctions de l'écran Fax, voir “Réglage des conditions d'émission” à la page 3-11. – Pour plus d'informations sur le réglage des fonctions de l'écran Application, voir “Ouverture des écrans Réglage numérisation et Réglage communication” à la page 7-3. 5 Sélectionnez la destination. 6 Appuyez sur [Départ]. 3 Émission 3-34 C250 3.8 Émission manuelle Émission manuelle L'émission manuelle permet d'envoyer des documents tout en confirmant l'état de la machine réceptrice. L'émission mémoire ne peut pas être utilisée avec l'émission manuelle. 1 Appuyez sur [Fax] sur le tableau de commande pour afficher l'écran Fax. 2 Positionnez l'original. – Pour plus d'informations, voir “Positionnement de l'original sur la machine” à la page 3-7. 3 Appuyez sur [Décrocher]. – Si [Réception fax] est sélectionné, appuyez sur [Émission fax] pour passer en mode d'émission. 4 Définissez les réglages de la numérisation, selon les besoins. – Pour plus d'informations sur le réglage des fonctions de l'écran Fax, voir “Réglage des conditions d'émission” à la page 3-11. – Pour plus d'informations sur le réglage des fonctions de l'écran Application, voir “Présentation des fonctions d'application” à la page 7-5. 5 Saisissez la destination au clavier. – Vous pouvez saisir 60 chiffres maximum. – Appuyez sur [Raccrocher] pour revenir à l'écran Fax. – Si un téléphone externe est branché, vous pouvez le décrocher pour transmettre les documents. 6 Dès que vous entendez le signal, appuyez sur [Départ] sur l'écran Décrocher. – Si vous appuyez sur la touche [Départ] du tableau de commande, l'écran de confirmation de la communication s'affiche. Appuyez sur [Oui] pour lancer l'émission. – Si un téléphone externe est branché, raccrochez-le une fois que vous avez appuyé sur [Départ]. La transmission commence. Émission 3 C250 3-35 3.9 Annulation de l'émission La procédure à suivre pour annuler l'émission dépend de l'état de l'émission : la communication est en cours ou le document à émettre a été réservé. Sur la machine FK-502, les instructions d'émission et les images mémorisées constituent des tâches réservées. Les tâches de communication réservées et les tâches en cours de traitement sont affichées sur l'écran Liste des tâches. 3.9.1 Annulation d'une communication en cours La procédure d'annulation d'une émission en cours est décrite ci-dessous. Annulation d'une communication en cours 1 Appuyez sur [Liste tâches] dans l'écran Fax. 2 Appuyez sur [Émission fax]. 3 Vérifiez si les tâches ont été sélectionnées dans [Tâches en cours]. 4 Sélectionnez la tâche à supprimer, puis appuyez sur [Suppri.]. 5 Appuyez sur [Oui]. L'émission est annulée. 6 Appuyez sur [Quitt.]. L'écran Fax s'affiche à nouveau. 3 Émission 3-36 C250 3.9.2 Annulation des tâches réservées La suppression d'une tâche réservée annule son émission. Annulation des tâches réservées 1 Appuyez sur [Liste tâches] dans l'écran Fax. 2 Appuyez sur [Émission fax]. 3 Appuyez sur [Tâches en cours]. 4 Appuyez sur [Tâches différées]. 5 Sélectionnez le document réservé à annuler, puis appuyez sur [Suppri.]. – Appuyez sur ou pour afficher l'écran suivant ou précédent. L'écran de confirmation apparaît. 6 Appuyez sur [Oui]. Le document réservé est supprimé. 7 Appuyez sur [Quitt.]. L'écran Fax s'affiche à nouveau. Émission 3 C250 3-37 3.10 Confirmation de la liste de tâches Confirmation des documents réservés Vous pouvez vérifier les réservations d'émissions stockées en mémoire sur la liste des tâches affichée à l'écran. 1 Appuyez sur [Liste tâches] dans l'écran Fax. 2 Appuyez sur [Émission fax]. 3 Appuyez sur [Tâches en cours]. 4 Appuyez sur [Tâches différées] ou [Tâches actives]. 5 Confirmez la tâche, puis appuyez sur [Quitt.]. – Appuyez sur ou sur pour afficher l'écran précédent ou suivant. – Pour confirmer les détails d'une tâche, sélectionnez la tâche et appuyez sur [Vérifier tâches] ou sur [Détail]. L'écran Fax s'affiche à nouveau. 3 Émission 3-38 C250 3.11 Confirmation des résultats de la communication Confirmation des résultats de la communication Pour vérifier les résultats de l'émission, vous pouvez appuyer sur [Liste tâches] dans l'écran Fax. 1 Appuyez sur [Liste tâches] dans l'écran Fax. 2 Appuyez sur [Impre.], [Émission fax] ou [Réc. fax/Boîte ut.]. 3 Appuyez sur [Historique tâches]. Émission 3 C250 3-39 4 Confirmez les résultats de la communication. – Émission fax – Type : Fax, e-mail ou boîte. – Dest : Numéro du fax, adresse e-mail ou nom de boîte de la destination. – Début enreg. : Date et heure de l'émission. – # de pges : Nombre de documents émis. – Résultat : “Tâche finie”, “Supprimée par utilisateur”, “Supprimée cause erreur”, “Annulée” (agrafe ou perforation) ou “Tâche annulée”. – Réc. fax/Boîte ut. – Nom utilis : Nom de l'utilisateur en mode autorisation utilisateur et nom du compte en mode suivi du compte. Dans les autres cas, le type de la copie, de l'impression ou de la réception fax est affiché. – Nom du document : Nom du document reçu ou enregistré. – Début enreg. : Date et heure de réception du document. – # de pges : Nombre de documents reçus. 3 Émission 3-40 C250 – Résultat : “Tâche finie”, “Supprimée par utilisateur”, “Supprimée cause erreur”, “Annulée” (agrafe ou perforation), “Impr. page séparation”, “Enreg. fini” “Échec de l'enreg.” ou “Tâche annulée”. – Vous pouvez appuyez sur [Réglage comm.] pour vérifier les résultats de la communication dans un rapport d'émission ou dans un rapport de réception. Ces rapports peuvent être imprimés. – Appuyez sur [Détails] pour afficher l'écran de détails. 5 Une fois que vous avez terminé la confirmation, appuyez à deux reprises sur [Quitt.]. L'écran précédent [Liste tâches] s'affiche à nouveau. Émission 3 C250 3-41 3.12 Émissions en mémoire et en mémoire rapide Cette machine offre deux méthodes d'émission des documents. 3.12.1 Émission mémoire Avec cette méthode, toutes les pages sont numérisées, puis mémorisées avant l'émission. Le document est automatiquement paginé et les images de la première page apparaissent dans le rapport de communication. Cependant, si le document à envoyer est volumineux ou si les images de l’original sont envoyées en haute définition, la mémoire peut saturer. La machine est automatiquement configurée sur Émission mémoire quand l'une des procédures suivantes est réalisée. - [Mémoire rapide] est défini sur l'écran Réglage communication. 3.12.2 Émission en mémoire rapide Avec cette méthode, l'émission du fax s'effectue immédiatement après la numérisation de chaque page. C'est la méthode recommandée pour ne pas saturer la mémoire lors de l'émission d'un document volumineux. 3 Émission 3-42 C250 3.12.3 Pour émettre en mémoire rapide, procédez de la manière suivante. Émission en mémoire rapide 1 Au besoin, appuyez sur [Fax] dans le tableau de commande pour afficher l'écran Fax. 2 Appuyez sur [Réglage comm.] dans l'écran Fax. 3 Appuyez sur [Mémoire rapide]. 4 Appuyez sur [OK]. – Pour annuler le réglage, appuyez sur [Annul.]. L'écran Mémoire rapide est configuré de façon à revenir à l'écran Fax. 5 Le cas échéant, définissez les autres fonctions. – Pour plus d'informations sur la définition des fonctions de l'écran Fax, voir “Réglage des conditions d'émission” à la page 3-11. Pour plus d'informations sur la définition des fonctions de l'écran Application, voir “Ouverture des écrans Réglage numérisation et Réglage communication” à la page 7-3. 6 Indiquez la destination. – Pour plus d'informations, voir “Sélection de la destination” à la page 3-21. 7 Positionnez le document original. – Pour plus d'informations, voir “Positionnement de l'original sur la machine” à la page 3-7. 8 Appuyez sur [Départ]. La machine lit le document et l'enregistre en mémoire en tant que document réservé avant de l'émettre. Émission 3 C250 3-43 ! Détail Si la ligne est occupée, les données sont enregistrées en mémoire, puis transmises lorsque la ligne est disponible. Pour annuler la transmission, voir “Annulation de l'émission” à la page 3-35. Si la machine réceptrice n'est pas en état de recevoir, la destination sera rappelée. Pour plus d'informations sur le rappel, voir “Rappel manuel” à la page 3-30. Si la transmission échoue, voir “Impossible d'envoyer des messages” à la page 5-3. 3 Émission 3-44 C250 3.13 Nombre d'originaux Nombre d'originaux En mode Mémoire rapide, le nombre total de pages émises suit le numéro de la page sur la ligne d'informations sur l'expéditeur. En émission mémoire, le nombre total de pages est imprimé automatiquement. Vous n'avez pas besoin de définir cette fonction. 0 Spécifications Le nombre total de pages est imprimé sous le format “P.numéro de la page/nombre total de pages”. La machine imprime le nombre total de pages que vous spécifiez, même si ce nombre ne correspond pas au nombre total de pages lues. 0 Fonctions incompatibles *Émission mémoire (TX), Effacer bord, Format d'origine, Originaux mixtes, Émission en relève TX (normale), Émission en relève TX (bulletin). * : La définition du nombre d'originaux est automatiquement annulée. 1 Au besoin, appuyez sur [Fax] dans le tableau de commande pour afficher l'écran Fax. 2 Appuyez sur [Réglage comm.] dans l'écran Fax. 3 Appuyez sur [Mémoire rapide]. De : 01234567890123456 2005 /20 /31 01:23:00 P.005 / 010 Émission 3 C250 3-45 4 Appuyez sur [OK]. L'écran Fax s'affiche à nouveau. 5 Appuyez sur [Réglage numéris.] - [Application] - [Nombre d'originaux]. 6 Saisissez sur le clavier le nombre de pages du document. – 999 pages maximum. 7 Appuyez à deux reprises sur [OK]. – Pour annuler le réglage du nombre total de pages, appuyez sur [Annul.]. Le nombre total de pages est enregistré, et vous revenez à l'écran Fax. 8 Le cas échéant, définissez les autres fonctions. – Pour plus d'informations sur la définition des fonctions de l'écran Fax, voir “Réglage des conditions d'émission” à la page 3-11. Pour plus d'informations sur la définition des fonctions de l'écran Réglage numérisation ou Réglage communication, voir “Ouverture des écrans Réglage numérisation et Réglage communication” à la page 7-3. 9 Indiquez la destination. – Pour plus d'informations, voir “Sélection de la destination” à la page 3-21. 10 Positionnez le document original. 11 Appuyez sur [Départ]. Le FK-502 lit le document et procède à l'émission de chaque page numérisée. 3 Émission 3-46 C250 ! Détail Pour annuler la transmission, voir “Annulation de l'émission” à la page 3-35. Si la machine réceptrice n'est pas en état de recevoir, la destination sera rappelée. Pour plus d'informations sur le rappel, voir “Rappel manuel” à la page 3-30. Si la transmission échoue, voir “Impossible d'envoyer des messages” à la page 5-3. Émission 3 C250 3-47 3.14 Émission différée (TX) Émission différée (TX) Cette fonction permet de préciser l'heure à laquelle la communication devra commencer. L'envoi de fax la nuit ou tôt le matin permet de tirer parti de tarifs réduits. 0 Spécifications Avec Émission différée (TX), l'émission mémoire est automatiquement sélectionnée. Vous pouvez différer l'émission de 24 heures maximum, en précisant un nombre de minutes et d'heures. Vous ne pouvez pas préciser de date. 0 Vous pouvez préciser un nombre total de 21 transmissions différées TX (20 émissions normales et 1 réception en relève RX). 0 Fonctions incompatibles Nombre d'originaux, Émission en relève TX (normale), Émission en relève TX (bulletin), Réception en relève RX (bulletin), Émission en mémoire rapide. 1 Au besoin, appuyez sur [Fax] dans le tableau de commande pour afficher l'écran Fax. 2 Appuyez sur [Réglage comm.] dans l'écran Fax. 3 Appuyez sur [Émission différée (TX)]. 3 Émission 3-48 C250 4 Indiquez, à l'aide du clavier, l'heure à laquelle doit débuter l'émission. – Saisissez l'heure et les minutes avec deux chiffres au format d'une horloge de 24 heures. – Exemple : pour démarrer la communication à 21:07, tapez “21” et “07”. 5 Appuyez sur [OK]. L'écran Réglage communication s'affiche à nouveau. 6 Appuyez sur [OK]. – Pour annuler le réglage, appuyez sur [OFF] ou sur [Annul.]. Vous revenez à l'écran Fax. 7 Le cas échéant, définissez les autres fonctions. – Pour plus d'informations sur la définition des fonctions de l'écran Fax, voir “Réglage des conditions d'émission” à la page 3-11. Pour plus d'informations sur la définition des fonctions de l'écran Application, voir “Ouverture des écrans Réglage numérisation et Réglage communication” à la page 7-3. 8 Indiquez la ou les destinations. – Pour plus d'informations, voir “Sélection de la destination” à la page 3-21. 9 Positionnez le document original. – Pour plus d'informations, voir “Positionnement des originaux sur la vitre d'exposition” à la page 3-8. 10 Appuyez sur [Départ]. Le FK-502 lit le document et le place en mémoire jusqu'à son heure de transmission. Émission 3 C250 3-49 ! Détail Pour annuler la transmission, voir “Annulation de l'émission” à la page 3-35. Si la machine réceptrice n'est pas en état de recevoir, son numéro fera l'objet d'un rappel. Pour plus d'informations sur le rappel, voir “Rappel manuel” à la page 3-30. Si la transmission échoue, voir “Impossible d'envoyer des messages” à la page 5-3. 3 Émission 3-50 C250 3.15 Communications internationales Communications internationales La vitesse de transmission des communications internationales est réduite. La procédure ci-dessous décrit les émissions à l'étranger. Les numéros de téléphone internationaux, code du pays compris, peuvent être enregistrés à l'aide des fonctions Programme et du Carnet d'adresses. Pour plus d'informations à ce sujet, voir “Enregistrement du carnet d'adresses” à la page 10-5. 0 Fonctions incompatibles Émission en relève TX (normale), Réception en relève RX (normale), Émission en relève TX (Bulletin), Réception en relève RX (bulletin) 1 Au besoin, appuyez sur [Fax] dans le tableau de commande pour afficher l'écran Fax. 2 Appuyez sur [Réglage comm.] dans l'écran Fax. 3 Appuyez sur [Réglage ligne]. Émission 3 C250 3-51 4 Appuyez sur [Communications internationales]. – Pour annuler le réglage, appuyez sur [Annul.] ou réappuyez sur [Communications internationales]. 5 Appuyez sur [OK]. L'écran Réglage communication s'affiche à nouveau. 6 Appuyez sur [OK]. Les communications internationales sont sélectionnées et vous revenez à l'écran Fax. 7 Le cas échéant, définissez les autres fonctions. – Pour plus d'informations sur la définition des fonctions de l'écran Fax, voir “Réglage des conditions d'émission” à la page 3-11. Pour plus d'informations sur la définition des fonctions de l'écran Application, voir “Ouverture des écrans Réglage numérisation et Réglage communication” à la page 7-3. 8 Positionnez le document original. – Pour plus d'informations, voir “Positionnement des originaux sur la vitre d'exposition” à la page 3-8. 3 Émission 3-52 C250 9 Composez “001-010”, le code du pays et le code régional de la destination, puis le numéro de fax de la destination. – Nous supposons ici que le préfixe d'un appel à l'étranger est le 001, mais ce préfixe varie d'un opérateur téléphonique à un autre. Au besoin, contactez votre opérateur pour connaître le préfixe à utiliser pour les appels à l'étranger. – Les numéros de téléphone internationaux peuvent être enregistrés dans le carnet d'adresse. Pour plus d'informations, voir “Enregistrement du carnet d'adresses” à la page 10-5. 10 Appuyez sur [Départ]. Le FK-502 démarre la transmission. ! Détail Pour annuler la transmission, voir “Annulation de l'émission” à la page 3-35. Si la machine réceptrice n'est pas en état de recevoir, son numéro fera l'objet d'un rappel. Pour plus d'informations sur le rappel, voir “Rappel manuel” à la page 3-30. Si la transmission échoue, voir “Impossible d'envoyer des messages” à la page 5-3. Émission 3 C250 3-53 3.16 Informations sur l'expéditeur Les originaux émis sont enregistrés de la manière suivante par la machine réceptrice. 3.16.1 Réglage à l'intérieur du corps du texte ! Détail Le nom de l'expéditeur et l'ID du fax sont définis en mode Utilitaire dans les Informations en-tête. Les réglages par défaut de l'écran de base du fax sont affichés dans le champ DE des informations sur l'expéditeur. 3.16.2 Réglage à l'extérieur du corps du texte ! Détail Pour plus d'informations sur ce réglage, voir “Position en-tête/pied de page” à la page 11-31. De : 01234567890 01/20/2005 01:23#012 p.5/10 De : 01234567890 01/20/2005 01:23#012 p.5/10 3 Émission 3-54 C250 3.16.3 Réglage sur OFF ! Détails OFF ne peut pas être sélectionné dans certains pays. Pour plus d'informations sur ce réglage, voir “Position en-tête/pied de page” à la page 11-31. 4 Réception Réception 4 C250 4-3 4 Réception Ce chapitre explique le principe et les procédures de réception de fax. 4.1 Mode Réception Cette machine gère deux modes de réception. La ligne de téléphone doit être connectée selon le type d'utilisation. Les deux modes de réception sont les suivants. 4.1.1 Réception automatique (mode fax uniquement) Ce mode est utilisé si la ligne de téléphone est dédiée à un fax. ! Détail Pour plus d'informations, voir “Réception automatique (mode fax uniquement)” à la page 4-3. 4.1.2 Réception manuelle (mode téléphone uniquement) Le FK-502 doit être paramétré sur ce mode si un téléphone externe (ou un répondeur) est connecté et si la majorité des appels entrants sont téléphoniques. Appel entrant Document reçu Réception automatique du message Appel entrant Le téléphone externe sonne Soulevez le combiné et parlez Pour recevoir un fax, appuyez sur 4 Réception 4-4 C250 4.2 Réception automatique (mode fax uniquement) Sélectionnez ce mode si la ligne téléphonique est dédiée à la communication de fax. La machine reçoit automatiquement les fax dès que le nombre de sonneries réglé est atteint. Pendant la réception, “Réception” s'affiche dans la zone de message de l'écran. ! Détail Si l'option Affichage réception est réglée sur OFF, le message n'apparaît pas. Ce mode est actif si le mode de réception est réglé sur Réception auto dans Réglage ligne du mode Utilitaire. ! Détail Pour plus d'informations sur le réglage de ce mode, voir “Réglage Paramètres ligne” à la page 11-34. Pour plus d'informations sur le réglage du nombre de sonneries avant réception, voir “Réglage Paramètres ligne” à la page 11-34. Appel entrant Document reçu Réception automatique du message Réception 4 C250 4-5 4.3 Réception manuelle (mode téléphone uniquement) Réception manuelle (mode téléphone uniquement) Si le mode de réception est réglé sur Réception manuelle dans Réglage ligne du mode Utilitaire, vous pouvez recevoir les fax manuellement. Un téléphone externe doit être connecté. Pour plus d'informations sur le réglage de la réception manuelle, voir “Réglage Paramètres ligne” à la page 11-34. La procédure de réception manuelle est décrite ci-dessous. 1 Lorsque le téléphone externe sonne, appuyez sur [Décrocher]. 2 Assurez-vous que [Réception (RX)] est en surbrillance. – Si un document se trouve dans le chargeur ADF ou sur la vitre d'exposition, Réception (RX) n'apparaît pas en surbrillance, même en cas d'appel entrant. Dans ce cas, appuyez sur Réception (RX). 3 Appuyez sur [Départ] dans le menu Décrocher. – Si vous appuyez sur la touche [Départ] du tableau de commande, l'écran Décrocher s'affiche. Appuyez sur [Oui] pour lancer la réception. La réception commence. Appel entrant Le téléphone externe sonne Soulevez le combiné et parlez Pour recevoir un fax, appuyez sur [Départ] 4 Réception 4-6 C250 4.4 Réception impossible En cas de problème de réception, un message d'erreur s'affiche. Référezvous à “Message d'erreur affiché” à la page 5-6 pour connaître la manière d'y remédier. Appuyez sur [Arrêt] pour supprimer le message affiché. ! Détail Si le téléphone externe continue de sonner, le mode de réception (automatique/manuel) est peut-être réglé sur RX manuelle dans Réglages initiaux du mode Utilitaire. Cette option doit être réglée sur Réception auto pour pouvoir les documents automatiquement. Pour plus d'informations, voir “Réglage Paramètres ligne” à la page 11-34. La réception ne s'effectue pas si la mémoire est saturée. Vérifiez également que le magasin de papier est chargé. Pour plus d'informations, voir “Impossible de recevoir des messages” à la page 5-4. Réception 4 C250 4-7 4.5 Réception en mémoire de substitution Lorsque le fax ne peut pas recevoir un document, celui-ci est mémorisé jusqu'à ce qu'il puisse être imprimé. C'est ce qu'on appelle la réception en mémoire de substitution. - Le document mémorisé est imprimé dès que le problème est résolu (bourrage papier, par exemple). - Cette fonction n'est pas disponible si la mémoire est saturée. 4 Réception 4-8 C250 4.6 Enregistrement de la réception À réception d'un document à enregistrer, son format de papier et le format de papier du magasin défini sont comparés. Le document est ensuite réduit au taux de réduction défini ou au meilleur taux de réduction pour convenir au papier avant son enregistrement. Si vous définissez un taux de réduction équimultiple, le document est enregistré à ce taux quel que soit le format de papier du document reçu. 4.6.1 Enregistrement après réduction minimale À réception d'un document formaté, celui-ci est enregistré après réduction au taux défini pour ce format de papier (la valeur par défaut est de 96 %). ! Détail Pour plus d'informations sur le taux de réduction minimum, voir “Réglage Émission/Réception” à la page 11-37. Original Document reçu Réduit au taux de réduction minimum Réception 4 C250 4-9 4.6.2 Enregistrement après réduction pour convenir au papier d'impression Si le document reçu est plus long que le format de papier standard, le format de papier approprié est déterminé en fonction de la longueur et de la largeur de ce document, et celui-ci est imprimé sur du papier correspondant à ce format. Par contre, si ce format conforme n'est pas chargé dans le magasin de papier, le document est imprimé au format le plus proche après réduction. Original Document reçu Réduit pour convenir au format de papier 4 Réception 4-10 C250 La machine applique les règles suivantes pour déterminer le meilleur format de papier : - Étape 1 Sélection du format de papier approprié – La machine détermine le format de papier approprié en prenant en compte la largeur et la longueur du document, tel qu'indiqué dans le tableau suivant. Largeur du document reçu Position d'enregistrement des informations de réception Longueur du document reçu A4 [OFF] ou [Intérieur du corps du texte] 0 - 154 155 - 314 315 - 386 387 ou plus [Extérieur du corps du texte] 0 - 146 147 - 306 307 - 378 379 ou plus Format de papier sélectionné A5 v A4 w B4 w A3 w B4 [OFF] ou [Intérieur du corps du texte] 0 -195 196 - 395 396 ou plus [Extérieur du corps du texte] 0 - 186 187 - 386 387 ou plus Format de papier sélectionné B5 v B4 w A3 w A3 [OFF] ou [Intérieur du corps du texte] 0 - 226 227 ou plus [Extérieur du corps du texte] 0 - 217 218 ou plus Format de papier sélectionné A4 v A3 w Réception 4 C250 4-11 Si “5,5 × 8,5 w” convient, “5,5 × 8,5 v” est sélectionné parce que c'est la seule longueur réglable sur la machine. - Étape 2 Sélection du papier d'impression du document – La machine vérifie si le format de papier approprié déterminé à l'étape 1 est présent dans le magasin. Le format de papier est présent : La machine procède à l'enregistrement. Le format de papier n'est pas présent dans le magasin ou la fonction de sélection automatique du magasin est désactivée : La machine recherche le second choix de format de papier approprié, tel qu'indiqué dans le tableau. Si l'option [Imprimer page de séparation] est réglée sur [ON] en mode Utilitaire, la machine recherche les formats de papier appropriés pour enregistrer le document sur plusieurs formats. Largeur du document reçu Position d'enregistrement des informations de réception Longueur du document reçu A4 [OFF] ou [Intérieur du corps du texte] 0 - 150 151 - 305 306 - 309 391 ou plus [Extérieur du corps du texte] 0 - 141 142 - 296 297 - 381 382 ou plus Format de papier sélectionné 5.5 × 8.5 v *1 8.5 × 11 w 8.5 × 14 w 11 × 17 w B4 [OFF] ou [Intérieur du corps du texte] 0 - 232 233 ou plus [Extérieur du corps du texte] 0 - 223 224 ou plus Format de papier sélectionné 8.5 × 11 v 11 × 17 w A3 [OFF] ou [Intérieur du corps du texte] 0 - 232 233 ou plus [Extérieur du corps du texte] 0 - 223 224 ou plus Format de papier sélectionné 8.5 × 11 v 11 × 17 w 4 Réception 4-12 C250 Si l'option [Imprimer page de séparation] est réglé sur OFF : Le papier est sélectionné en ordre décroissant. ! Détail Même si l'option [Imprimer page de séparation] est réglée sur OFF, la machine imprime sur des pages distinctes les documents volumineux ou en haute définition. Format de papier approprié A5 v A4 w B5 v B4 w A4 v A3 w Ordre de placement du papier (de haut en bas) A5 v A4 w B5 v B4 w A4 v A3 w A5 w A4 v B5 w A3 w A4 w B4 w A4 w F4 w B4 w A4 w F4 w A4 w A4 v B4 w A4 w A4 v B4 w F4 w B5 v A3 w A4 v F4 w A3 w B5 w F4 w F4 w A3 w B4 w A3 w Format de papier approprié 5.5 × 8.5 v 8.5 × 11 w 8.5 × 11 v 8.5 × 14 w 11 × 17 w Ordre de placement du papier (de haut en bas) 5.5 × 8.5 v 8.5 × 11 w 8.5 × 11 v 8.5 × 14 w 11 × 17 w 5.5 × 8.5 w 8.5 × 11 v 8.5 × 11 w 11 × 17 w A3 w A5 v A4 w A4 v B4 w B4 w A5 w A4 v A4 w A3 w 8.5 × 14 w 8.5 × 11 w 8.5 × 14 w 8.5 × 14 w 8.5 × 11 w 8.5 × 11 w 8.5 × 11 v 11 × 17 w 11 × 17 w 8.5 × 11 v A4 w A4 w B4 w B4 w A4 w A4 v A3 w A3 w A4 v B5 v B5 w 8.5 × 14 w 11 × 17 w B4 w A3 w Réception 4 C250 4-13 Si l'option [Imprimer page de séparation] est réglé sur ON : Le papier est sélectionné en ordre décroissant. ! Détail Même si l'option [Imprimer page de séparation] est réglée sur ON, le document est réduit pour tenir dans la largeur du papier sélectionné si celui-ci est inférieur à la largeur de l'image du document reçu. Si le papier d'impression des rapports d’activité de format B5 w, B5 v, A4 w ou A4 v est sélectionné, l'image de cette page peut être imprimée sur plusieurs pages. Format de papier approprié A5 v A4 w B5 v B4 w A4 v A3 w Ordre de placement du papier (de haut en bas) A5 v A4 w B5 v B4 w A4 v A3 w A5 w F4 v B5 w B5 v A4 w A4 v A4 w B4 w B4 w B5 w F4 w A4 w A4 v A3 w A4 w A3 w B4 w B5 w A4 v A4 v A3 w F4 w F4 w A4 w B5 v A3 w F4 w B4 w A3 w 4 Réception 4-14 C250 ! Détail Si le format du papier d'impression du fax est inférieur au format de papier sélectionné à l'étape 1, le document est réduit. Si l'option [Imprimer page de séparation] est réglée sur [OFF] et que l'orientation du papier d'impression est différente de celle du papier sélectionné à l'étape 1, la sortie imprimée est automatiquement pivotée de 90 degrés. Si vous imprimez des originaux mixtes, ce processus est exécuté sur chaque page. Si les formats de papier sélectionnés aux étapes 1 et 2 se trouvent dans plusieurs magasins, le magasin utilisé est sélectionné en fonction du réglage de la fonction automatique du format de papier. Pour plus d'informations, voir “Manuel d'utilisation – Opérations Copie”. Si le format de papier requis se trouve uniquement dans le magasin d'insertion manuelle, le document est imprimé sur le papier chargé dans ce magasin. Toutefois, si la fonction de sélection automatique du format de papier est désactivée ou si la fonction de sélection automatique du Format de papier approprié 5.5 × 8.5 v 8.5 × 11 w 8.5 × 11 v 8.5 × 14 w 11 × 17 w Ordre de placement du papier (de haut en bas) 5.5 × 8.5 v 8.5 × 11 w 8.5 × 11 v 8.5 × 14 w 11 × 17 w 5.5 × 8.5 w A4 w 8.5 × 11 w 11 × 17 w A3 w A5 v 8.5 × 14 w A4 v B4 w 8.5 × 11 v A5 w 11 × 17 w A4 w A3 w 8.5 × 11 w 8.5 × 11 w B4 w 8.5 × 14 w 8.5 × 11 v A4 v 8.5 × 11 v A3 w 11 × 17 w 8.5 × 11 w A4 w A4 w B4 w A4 v A4 v A3 w A4 w B5 v B5 w 8.5 × 14 w 11 × 17 w B4 w A3 w Réception 4 C250 4-15 magasin est désactivée pour ce magasin, ce magasin n'est pas sélectionné. Même si l'option de division de la page est réglée sur ON, la page n'est pas divisée si [Réglage TX/RX] est réglée comme suit. [Sélection magasin impression réception] est réglé [Réduction min. pour impression réception] est réglé sur [x 1.0] Sélection papier d'impression] est réglée sur [Format fixe] ou [Format prioritaire] [Impression R/V pour réception] est réglée sur [ON] Si aucune option de sélection du papier d'impression n'est définie, un message vous demande de le faire. Si [Sélection papier d'impression] est réglé sur [Format prioritaire ]: Le format de papier approprié est sélectionné parmi A4, B4 et A3 (8,5 × 11, 8,5 × 14 et 11 × 17). Si ce format de papier n'est pas disponible, le papier est sélectionné selon la procédure standard, puis le document est enregistré. Si [Sélection papier d'impression] est réglé sur [Format fixe ]: Le format de papier approprié est sélectionné parmi A4, B4 et A3 (8,5 × 11, 8,5 × 14 et 11 × 17). Si ce format de papier n'est pas disponible, le message demeure jusqu'à ce que le papier soit chargé. Si [Sélection magasin impression réception] est réglé sur une valeur autre que [Auto ]: Le document est enregistré de façon à convenir au format de papier chargé dans le magasin (à l'exception du magasin d'insertion manuelle) défini pour [Sélection magasin impression réception]. Si [Sélection papier d'impression] est réglé sur une valeur autre que [Sélection auto] et si [Sélection magasin impression réception] est réglé sur une valeur autre que [Auto ]: Le réglage défini pour [Sélection magasin impression réception] a la priorité. 4 Réception 4-16 C250 4.6.3 Enregistrement à l'échelle de 100 % Un document reçu est enregistré pour tenir sur le même format de papier à l'échelle de 100 % si [Réduction mini impres. réception] est réglé sur [× 1.0] en mode Utilitaire. Si le même format de papier n'est pas disponible, le document est enregistré pour tenir sur le format de papier supérieur suivant. ! Détails L'option Imprimer page de séparation n'est pas disponible. Vous ne pouvez pas enregistrer d'image supérieure à 11 x 17 pouces (280 mm x 431 mm). Si le papier approprié n'est pas disponible, un message s'affiche jusqu'au chargement du papier. Méthode d'enregistrement à la réception Le tableau suivant indique la relation entre le format de papier du document reçu et l'enregistrement de facto du document sur la machine. Original Document reçu Réduit à l'échelle de 100 % Réception 4 C250 4-17 ! Détail Si [Impression R/V pour réception] est réglé sur ON, l'écran peut indiquer le papier. Pour plus d'informations, voir page 11-34. Format de papier du document reçu Réglage de [Réduction min. pour impression réception] Sélection dans [Sélection magasin impression réception] 96 - 87% Format standard (A3 à A5) Enregistré après réduction pour tenir sur le même format de papier Enregistré après réduction pour tenir sur le format de papier spécifié Original long (plus long que le format standard) L'enregistrement avec division de la page est OFF Enregistré après réduction pour tenir sur le format de papier approprié Enregistré après réduction pour tenir sur le format de papier spécifié L'enregistrement avec division de la page est ON Enregistré après division de la page en fonction du papier utilisé Enregistré après réduction pour tenir sur le format de papier spécifié A B C A B C A B C A B C D A B C D A B C D A B CD A B C D 4 Réception 4-18 C250 4.7 Informations de réception Lorsque les informations de réception (date, heure, numéros de réception et de page) sont réglées sur l'intérieur ou l'extérieur du corps du texte avec l'option [Position en-tête/pied de page], elles sont enregistrées dans le document reçu. Réglage à l'intérieur du corps du texte Réglage à l'extérieur du corps du texte Réglage sur OFF ! Détail Pour plus d'informations sur ce réglage, voir “Position en-tête/pied de page” à la page 11-31. Original Date RX : 01/20/2005 R001 P.001/003 Original Date RX : 01/20/2005 R001 P.001/003 Original 5 Dépannage Dépannage 5 C250 5-3 5 Dépannage 5.1 Impossible d'envoyer des messages Si vous ne parvenez pas à envoyer un document, consultez le tableau cidessous pour tenter de remédier au problème. Si vous ne pouvez résoudre le problème en suivant les solutions proposées, contactez le service aprèsvente. ! Détail Pour plus d'informations sur les messages d'erreur, voir “Message d'erreur affiché” à la page 5-6. En cas de problème de bourrage des originaux ou du papier des magasins, de mauvaise qualité de l'image ou de manque de toner, consultez le “Manuel d'utilisation – Opérations Copie” fourni avec le FK-502. Points à vérifier Actions correctives La procédure d'émission a-t-elle été effectuée correctement ? Vérifiez la procédure d'émission et réessayez. Le numéro de fax de la destination est-il correct ? Les numéros d'appel programmés ou abrégés sont-ils enregistrés correctement ? Si vous utilisez un numéro programmé ou abrégé, il est possible qu'il ait été enregistré incorrectement. Essayez d'imprimer la liste des numéros abrégés et vérifiez si le numéro est enregistré correctement. Si ce n'est pas le cas, corrigez l'enregistrement. Le réglage de la ligne est-il correct ? Vérifiez si la [Méthode de numérotation] de [Réglage Paramètres ligne] dans le mode Utilitaire correspond à la ligne téléphonique utilisée. Corrigez ce réglage si ce n'est pas le cas. La ligne téléphonique est-elle connectée correctement ? Vérifiez si la prise de téléphone est bien branchée. Si ce n'est pas le cas, branchez-la. Le problème se situe-t-il au niveau le la machine réceptrice ? Téléphonez à la destination et vérifiez si le fax récepteur est hors tension, s'il manque de papier ou s'il existe un autre problème. 5 Dépannage 5-4 C250 5.2 Impossible de recevoir des messages Si vous ne parvenez pas à recevoir un document, consultez le tableau cidessous pour tenter de remédier au problème. Si vous ne parvenez pas à résoudre le problème en suivant les solutions proposées, contactez le service après-vente. ! Détail Pour plus d'informations sur les messages d'erreur, voir “Message d'erreur affiché” à la page 5-6. En cas de problème de bourrage des originaux ou du papier des magasins, de mauvaise qualité de l'image ou de manque d'encre, consultez le “Manuel d'utilisation – Opérations Copie” fourni avec le FK-502. Dépannage 5 C250 5-5 Description du problème Points à vérifier Actions correctives Impossible de recevoir Y-a-t-il du papier dans la machine ? Si l'icône d'ajout de papier est allumée, la machine manque de papier et les documents reçus sont mémorisés. Ajoutez du papier. Pour connaître la procédure, consultez le “Manuel d'utilisation – Opérations Copie”. Y-a-t-il un bourrage papier dans la machine ? En cas de bourrage papier, les documents reçus sont mémorisés. Dégagez le bourrage papier. Pour connaître la procédure, consultez le “Manuel d'utilisation – Opérations Copie”. Le flacon de toner est-il vide ? La réception de message ne s'effectue pas si le flacon de toner est vide. Remplacez immédiatement le flacon de toner. Pour connaître la procédure, consultez le “Manuel d'utilisation – Opérations Copie”. Le FK-502 est-il en mode de réception manuelle ? Si l'option [Mode réception] de [Réglage Paramètres ligne] dans le mode Utilitaire est réglée sur [Réception manuelle], vous devez réaliser la procédure de réception manuelle. Pour connaître cette procédure, voir “Réception manuelle (mode téléphone uniquement)” à la page 4-5. La ligne téléphonique estelle connectée correctement ? Vérifiez si la prise de téléphone est bien branchée. Si ce n'est pas le cas, branchez-la. Le FK-502 est-il en mode de communication en réseau fermé ? Si la fonction de communication en réseau fermé (pour empêcher la réception de documents non sollicités) est active (ON), vous ne pouvez recevoir que les documents provenant de fax déterminés. L'expéditeur a-t-il envoyé une adresse secondaire erronée en fonction F-code ? Une erreur de communication peut survenir en cas de réception d'une adresse secondaire erronée alors que la boîte utilisateur confidentielle est active. Dans ces circonstances, la réception est impossible. Vérifiez auprès de l'expéditeur si l'adresse secondaire a été définie correctement. Pas de sortie La réception fax a-t-elle été activée ? Identifiez la boîte de sauvegarde du fichier dans les fonctions de réception PC-fax. Le Paramètre boîte utilisateur TSI est-il réglé sur ON ? Vérifiez la boîte définie dans le Paramètre boîte utilisateur TSI. La réception mémoire a-t-elle été activée ? Une fois la réception mémoire activée, imprimez le document reçu comme suit : • Appuyez sur [Boîte] sur le tableau de commande. • Appuyez sur [Boîte utilisateur système]. • Appuyez sur [Boîte utilisateur réception mémoire]. • Saisissez le mot de passe et appuyez sur [OK]. • Sélectionnez le document à imprimer et appuyez sur Imprimer. • Une fois le document imprimé, appuyez sur [Fermer]. 5 Dépannage 5-6 C250 5.3 Message d'erreur affiché Les messages d'erreur énumérés dans le tableau ci-dessous s'affichent en cas de problème. Référez-vous aux explications pour remédier à la situation. Si vous ne pouvez toujours pas émettre correctement après avoir corriger le problème, contactez le service après-vente. Message d'erreur Actions correctives Occupé Bien que le nombre de rappels déterminé ait été tenté, la machine réceptrice est toujours occupée. Confirmez l'état de la machine réceptrice et renvoyez. Pas de réponse La machine n'est pas en état de répondre. Contactez la destination par téléphone, confirmez l'état de la machine et réessayez. Mémoire saturée • Si la mémoire devient saturée pendant la lecture du document : Pour émettre la partie du document lue, appuyez sur [Départ]. Appuyez sur [Arrêt] pour annuler l'émission. Dépannage 5 C250 5-7 5.4 Appeler SAV Ce message apparaît lorsque vous devez appeler le service après-vente. Les numéros de téléphone et de fax du service après-vente sont également indiqués. La procédure de signalisation d'un problème par téléphone au service après-vente est présentée ci-dessous. 7 ATTENTION Risque d'accident grave % Pour prévenir tout risque d'accident grave, procédez de la manière suivante lorsque le message d'appel du SAV s'affiche et que le fax ne fonctionne plus. Procédure à suivre lorsque le message d'appel du SAV s'affiche 1 Notez le numéro du code d'erreur. 2 Mettez hors tension le commutateur Marche/Arrêt principal et secondaire. 3 Débranchez le cordon d'alimentation. 4 Contactez le service après-vente et indiquez à votre correspondant le numéro du code d'erreur. 5 Dépannage 5-8 C250 6 Caractéristiques techniques Caractéristiques techniques 6 C250 6-3 6 Caractéristiques techniques 6.1 Caractéristiques techniques Les caractéristiques techniques des fonctions de télécopie sont énumérées ci-dessous. Ces caractéristiques peuvent être modifiées sans préavis. Fonction Caractéristiques techniques Capacité de mémoire image 27 Go* (27 des 40 Go du disque dur sont utilisés en tant que mémoire.) Nombre max. de pages enregistrées Environ 9 000 pages* (pages enregistrées au format KONICA MINOLTA standard A4 contenant environ 700 caractères en définition “fine”) Lignes téléphoniques Lignes d'abonnés (réseaux de communication fax compris) Réseau privé (PBX) Résolution de numérisation G3 Ultra fine : 600 ppp × 600 ppp Super fine : 16 points/mm × 15,4 lignes/mm, 8 points/mm × 15,4 lignes/mm, 400 ppp × 400 ppp Fine : 8 points/mm × 7,7 lignes/mm, 200 ppp × 200 ppp Normale : 8 points/mm × 3,85 lignes/mm, 200 ppp × 100 ppp Les résolutions de numérisation ci-dessus dépendent des capacités de la machine de destination. Vitesse de transmission 2400, 4800, 7200, 9600, 12000, 14400, 16800, 19200, 21600, 24000, 26400, 28800, 31200, 33600 bps Temps d'émission 2 secondes Temps d'émission de pages au format KONICA MINOLTA standard A4 contenant environ 700 caractères en résolution normale. Il s'agit du temps d'émission de l'image uniquement (non compris le temps d'établissement de la communication). Le temps de communication varie selon le contenu des originaux et le type de ligne téléphonique à la destination. Codage MH, MR, MMR, JBIG * Le disque dur interne est utilisé pour chacune des fonctions des écrans Copie, Numérisation, Fax et Boîte. Format max. de numérisation 280 mm × 431 mm (11 pouces × 17 pouces) ou A3 (420 mm × 297 mm) Largeur : 297 mm Longueur : 432 mm max. Format max. d'enregistrement 280 mm × 431 mm (11 pouces × 17 pouces) ou A3 (420 mm × 297 mm) Les originaux supérieurs à 600 mm ne peuvent pas être reçus. Lors de la réception d'originaux plus longs que le format de papier chargé dans les magasins, ils sont imprimés selon le réglage de l'option [Imprimer page de séparation]. Fonction Caractéristiques techniques 7 Applications d'émission Applications d'émission 7 C250 7-3 7 Applications d'émission 7.1 Ouverture des écrans Réglage numérisation et Réglage communication ! Détail Appuyez sur la touche de la fonction à définir pour ouvrir l'écran de réglage correspondant (les touches [Mémoire rapide], [V34 OFF], [ECM OFF] et [Communications internationales] n'affichent pas d'écran car ce sont des touches à bascule qui activent/désactivent la fonction). Vous pouvez sélectionner plusieurs fonctions, du moment que celles-ci ne sont pas incompatibles entre elles. En cas d'incompatibilité, la fonction est grisée sur le tableau de commande. Ouverture des écrans Réglage numérisation et Réglage communication Pour envoyer un fax par le biais d'une fonction Application, ouvrez l'écran Réglage numérisation ou Réglage communication et paramétrez les fonctions voulues. 1 Appuyez sur [Fax] sur le tableau de commande pour ouvrir l'écran Fax. 2 Appuyez sur [Réglage numéris.] ou sur [Réglage comm.] dans l'écran Fax. 7 Applications d'émission 7-4 C250 3 Appuyez sur la touche de la fonction voulue. Pour afficher l'écran de réglage d'une application, appuyez sur la touche [Application] dans l'écran Réglage numérisation. 4 Effectuez l'une des opérations suivantes. – Sur l'écran voulu affiché : Réglez la fonction dans l'écran affiché, puis appuyez sur [OK]. – Une fois l'option sélectionnée : Appuyez sur [OK]. – Appuyez sur [Annul.] pour annuler le réglage et revenir au réglage de communication d'origine. L'écran Fax s'affiche à nouveau. Applications d'émission 7 C250 7-5 7.2 Présentation des fonctions d'application Les fonctions suivantes apparaissent dans l'écran Réglage numérisation et l'écran Réglage communication. [Annul.] Annule le réglage et revient aux conditions de communication d'origine. [OK] Affiche à nouveau l'écran Fax. [OFF] Désactive l'option et vous ramène à l'écran précédent. [Reset] Réinitialise toutes les options de l'écran. Écran Réglage numérisation Écran Application Écran Réglage communication Fonction Description Originaux mixtes : Vous pouvez envoyer des pages de différents formats en une seule procédure. (page 7-7) Position reliure : Spécifie la position de l'agrafage d'un original recto-verso placé sur le chargeur de document (ADF) et place à la verticale le verso de l'original. (page 7-9) 7 Applications d'émission 7-6 C250 ! Détail La touche associée à la fonction sélectionnée apparaît inversée. Appuyez sur [Annul.] pour revenir à l'écran Fax. Le mode de communication V34 est utilisé par le fax Super G3. Effacement bords : Lors de l'émission des pages d'un livre, cette fonction efface les bandes noires qui apparaîtraient en marge. (page 7-12) Ajustement fond : Règle la densité de la couleur de fond de l'original. (page 7-15) Netteté : Rend plus net le contour des caractères. (page 7-18) Nombre originaux : En mode Mémoire rapide, inclut le nombre total de pages dans les informations sur le nombre de pages. (page 3-44) Format de numérisat. : Permet de préciser la taille du document à émettre. Cette fonction est utile lors de l'émission d'une partie d'une ou de plusieurs pages. (page 7-21) Type de fichier : Précise le format d'un fichier joint à un message e-mail. (page 7-24) Mémoire rapide : Émet un message immédiatement après la lecture d'une page d'un document. (page 3-42) Mot de passe émission (TX)*1 : Joint un mot de passe à l'émission. Cette fonction est requise si le poste récepteur fonctionne en réseau fermé. (page 7-26) Émission en relève (TX) : Permet de numériser un document et de le mémoriser jusqu'à ce que la destination initie la transmission en adressant une requête de relève. (page 9-3) Réception en relève (RX) : Permet d'initier la réception en adressant à la destination une requête de relève de document. (page 9-6) Émission différée (TX) : Permet de préciser l'heure de l'émission. (page 3-47) Émission F-code (TX)*2 : Permet de préciser l'adresse secondaire et le mot de passe requis pour la communication confidentielle et l'émission en relais. (page 7-26, page 7-29, page 7-32, page 9-9) Réglage ligne Communications internationales Spécifie un débit de transmission moins rapide. (page 3-50) ECM OFF Le mode de correction d'erreur (ECM) peut être désactivé. (page 7-35) V34 OFF Si l’équipement du central ne permet pas d'utiliser le protocole V.34, le mode V34 est désactivé. (page 7-38) Fonction Description *1 : Cette fonction permet d'émettre ou de recevoir avec des postes fonctionnant en réseau fermé. Dans ce cas, la fonction F-code doit être active sur les deux machines. *2 : F-code est utilisé. Applications d'émission 7 C250 7-7 7.3 Originaux mixtes Fonction Originaux mixtes Cette fonction permet d'envoyer des pages de différents formats en une seule séquence d'opérations. 0 Spécifications L'Émission mémoire est automatiquement sélectionnée. Si les options Format d'origine et Originaux mixtes sont toutes deux sélectionnées, le Format d'origine a la priorité. 0 Fonctions incompatibles Mémoire rapide, Nombre originaux, Position reliure, Réception en relève RX (normal), Réception en relève RX (bulletin) 1 Au besoin, appuyez sur [Fax] dans le tableau de commande pour afficher l'écran Fax. 2 Appuyez sur [Réglage numéris.], puis sur [Application]. 3 Appuyez sur [Originaux mixtes]. Émission et reproduction dans le même format que l'original à la destination. Vous placez les originaux mixtes dans le chargeur RADF. 7 Applications d'émission 7-8 C250 4 Appuyez sur [OK]. – Pour annuler le réglage, appuyez sur [Annul.]. L'écran Réglage numérisation s'affiche à nouveau. 5 Appuyez sur [OK]. L'écran Fax s'affiche à nouveau. 6 Le cas échéant, définissez les autres fonctions. – Pour plus d'informations sur la définition des fonctions de l'écran Fax, voir “Réglage des conditions d'émission” à la page 3-11. Pour plus d'informations sur la définition des fonctions de l'écran Réglage numérisation ou Réglage communication, voir “Présentation des fonctions d'application” à la page 7-5. 7 Indiquez la destination. – Pour plus d'informations sur la désignation de la destination, voir “Sélection de la destination” à la page 3-21. 8 Positionnez le document original. – Pour plus d'informations sur la mise en place du document, voir “Positionnement des originaux sur la vitre d'exposition” à la page 3-8. 9 Appuyez sur [Départ]. Le FK-502 mémorise le document avant de l'émettre. ! Détail Pour annuler l'émission, voir “Annulation de l'émission” à la page 3-35. Si le poste récepteur n'est pas en état de recevoir, son numéro fera l'objet d'un rappel. Pour plus d'informations sur le rappel, voir “Rappel manuel” à la page 3-30. Si l'émission échoue, voir “Impossible d'envoyer des messages” à la page 5-3. Applications d'émission 7 C250 7-9 7.4 Position reliure Fonction Position reliure La fonction d'inversion Haut/Bas et la fonction Gauche/Droite précisent le type de reliure lors de l'émission d'un document recto-verso. En sélectionnant le type de reliure, vous vous assurez que le document sera relié, et donc lu, correctement. 0 Spécifications Le chargeur de document (ADF) doit être utilisé. La vitre d'exposition ne peut pas être utilisée pour l'émission en mode reliure. 0 Fonctions incompatibles Originaux mixtes, Réception en relève RX (normal), Réception en relève RX (bulletin) 1 Au besoin, appuyez sur [Fax] dans le tableau de commande pour afficher l'écran Fax. 2 Appuyez sur [Réglage numéris.], puis sur [Application]. Reliure Haut/Bas Reliure Gauche/Droite Fax de destination Émission 7 Applications d'émission 7-10 C250 3 Appuyez sur [Position reliure]. 4 Appuyez sur [Reliure G/D] ou [Reliure H/B] pour préciser le type de reliure du document original imprimé recto-verso. 5 Appuyez sur [OK]. – Pour annuler le réglage, appuyez sur [OFF] ou sur [Annul.]. L'écran Application s'affiche à nouveau. 6 Appuyez sur [OK]. L'écran Réglage numérisation s'affiche à nouveau. 7 Appuyez sur [OK]. L'écran Fax s'affiche à nouveau. 8 Le cas échéant, définissez les autres fonctions. – Pour plus d'informations sur la définition des fonctions de l'écran Fax, voir “Réglage des conditions d'émission” à la page 3-11. Pour plus d'informations sur la définition des fonctions de l'écran Application, voir “Présentation des fonctions d'application” à la page 7-5. Applications d'émission 7 C250 7-11 9 Indiquez la destination. – Pour plus d'informations sur la désignation de la destination, voir “Sélection de la destination” à la page 3-21. 10 Placez le document avec la page imprimée vers le haut. – Pour plus d'informations sur la mise en place du document, voir “Positionnement des originaux sur la vitre d'exposition” à la page 3-8. 11 Appuyez sur [Départ]. Le FK-502 mémorise le document avant de l'émettre. ! Détail Pour annuler l'émission, voir “Annulation de l'émission” à la page 3-35. Si le poste récepteur n'est pas en état de recevoir, son numéro fera l'objet d'un rappel. Pour plus d'informations sur le rappel, voir “Rappel manuel” à la page 3-30. Si l'émission échoue, voir “Impossible d'envoyer des messages” à la page 5-3. 7 Applications d'émission 7-12 C250 7.5 Émission avec effacement des bords 2 Remarque Les affichages diffèrent d'un pays à un autre. Fonction d'émission avec effacement des bords Lors de l'émission d'un document relié, cette fonction supprime les bandes noires qui risqueraient d'apparaître en marge des pages transmises. Ces bandes noires apparaissent lorsque la machine lit les données d'un livre ou lorsque le chargeur de document n'est pas rabattu. 0 Spécifications L'Émission mémoire rapide est automatiquement sélectionnée. Vous pouvez utiliser le chargeur ADF ou la vitre d'exposition. La largeur à effacer peut être définie par incréments de 0,1 mm (1/16 pouce) dans une plage de 0,1 à 50 mm (1/16 à 2 pouces). Réglage initial de la largeur à effacer : 50 mm (3/16 pouce). Si vous combinez plusieurs effacements de bords, ils s'appliquent au format de page original non encore effacé. 0 Fonctions incompatibles Mémoire rapide, Nombre originaux, Réception en relève RX (normal), Réception en relève RX (bulletin) Largeur à effacer Émission standard Émission avec effacement des bords Applications d'émission 7 C250 7-13 1 Au besoin, appuyez sur [Fax] dans le tableau de commande pour afficher l'écran Fax. 2 Appuyez sur [Réglage numéris.], puis sur [Application]. 3 Appuyez sur [Effacement bords]. 4 Sélectionnez [Haut], [Gauc], [Droi] ou [Bas] et tapez au clavier la largeur à effacer, [+] ou [-]. 5 Appuyez sur [OK]. – Pour annuler le réglage, appuyez sur [OFF] ou sur [Annul.]. L'écran Application s'affiche à nouveau. 6 Appuyez sur [OK]. L'écran Réglage numérisation s'affiche à nouveau. 7 Appuyez sur [OK]. L'écran Fax s'affiche à nouveau. 7 Applications d'émission 7-14 C250 8 Le cas échéant, définissez les autres fonctions. – Pour plus d'informations sur la définition des fonctions de l'écran Fax, voir “Réglage des conditions d'émission” à la page 3-11. Pour plus d'informations sur la définition des fonctions de l'écran Application, voir “Présentation des fonctions d'application” à la page 7-5. 9 Indiquez la destination. – Pour plus d'informations sur la désignation de la destination, voir “Sélection de la destination” à la page 3-21. 10 Positionnez le document original. – Pour plus d'informations sur la mise en place du document, voir “Positionnement des originaux sur la vitre d'exposition” à la page 3-8. 11 Appuyez sur [Départ]. La machine lit le document et l'enregistre en mémoire en tant que document réservé avant de l'émettre. ! Détail Pour annuler l'émission, voir “Annulation de l'émission” à la page 3-35. Si la machine réceptrice n'est pas en état de recevoir, la destination sera rappelée. Pour plus d'informations sur le rappel, voir “Rappel manuel” à la page 3-30. Si l'émission échoue, voir “Impossible d'envoyer des messages” à la page 5-3. Applications d'émission 7 C250 7-15 7.6 Ajustement fond Fonction Ajustement fond Cette fonction permet d'ajuster la densité de la couleur d'arrière-plan de l'original. Si le fond de l'original est en couleur, il risque d'être reproduit en noir. Dans ce cas, vous pouvez envoyer un message après avoir ajusté la densité de la couleur de fond de l'original. 0 Spécifications Vous pouvez utiliser le chargeur de document (ADF) et la vitre d'exposition. 1 Au besoin, appuyez sur [Fax] dans le tableau de commande pour afficher l'écran Fax. 2 Appuyez sur [Réglage numéris.], puis sur [Application]. 3 Appuyez sur [Ajustement fond]. 7 Applications d'émission 7-16 C250 4 Appuyez sur [+ Foncé] pour assombrir la densité de la couleur de fond de l'original, et sur [+ Clair] pour l'éclaircir. Appuyez sur [Auto] pour activer le réglage automatique. – Si vous sélectionnez [Auto], les étapes permettant de déterminer l'ajustement approprié du fond sont effectuées page par page, ce qui peut ralentir l'opération de numérisation. 5 Appuyez sur [OK]. – Pour annuler le réglage, appuyez sur [Annul.]. L'écran Application s'affiche à nouveau. 6 Appuyez sur [OK]. L'écran Réglage numérisation s'affiche à nouveau. 7 Appuyez sur [OK]. L'écran Fax s'affiche à nouveau. 8 Le cas échéant, définissez les autres fonctions. – Pour plus d'informations sur la définition des fonctions de l'écran Fax, voir “Réglage des conditions d'émission” à la page 3-11. Pour plus d'informations sur la définition des fonctions de l'écran Application, voir “Présentation des fonctions d'application” à la page 7-5. 9 Indiquez la destination. – Pour plus d'informations sur la désignation de la destination, voir “Sélection de la destination” à la page 3-21. 10 Positionnez le document original. Applications d'émission 7 C250 7-17 – Pour plus d'informations sur la mise en place du document, voir “Positionnement des originaux sur la vitre d'exposition” à la page 3-8. 11 Appuyez sur [Départ]. La machine lit le document et l'enregistre en mémoire en tant que document réservé avant de l'émettre. ! Détail Pour annuler la transmission, voir “Annulation de l'émission” à la page 3-35. Si le poste récepteur n'est pas en état de recevoir, son numéro fera l'objet d'un rappel. Pour plus d'informations sur le rappel, voir “Rappel manuel” à la page 3-30. Si l'émission échoue, voir “Impossible d'envoyer des messages” à la page 5-3. 7 Applications d'émission 7-18 C250 7.7 Netteté Fonction Netteté Cette fonction permet d'ajuster la netteté des bords des caractères. Si les caractères d'un document ne sont pas nets, augmentez la netteté ([+]) pour définir plus précisément leurs contours ou diminuez-la ([-]), le cas échéant. 0 Spécifications Vous pouvez utiliser le chargeur de document (ADF) et la vitre d'exposition. 1 Au besoin, appuyez sur [Fax] dans le tableau de commande pour afficher l'écran Fax. 2 Appuyez sur [Réglage numéris.], puis sur [Application]. 3 Appuyez sur [Netteté]. Applications d'émission 7 C250 7-19 4 Selon que vous voulez rendre les contours des caractères plus ou moins nets, appuyez sur [ ] ou [ ] vers la droite [+] ou vers la gauche [-]. 5 Appuyez sur [OK]. – Pour annuler le réglage, appuyez sur [Annul.]. L'écran Application s'affiche à nouveau. 6 Appuyez sur [OK]. L'écran Réglage numérisation s'affiche à nouveau. 7 Appuyez sur [OK]. L'écran Fax s'affiche à nouveau. 8 Le cas échéant, définissez les autres fonctions. – Pour plus d'informations sur la définition des fonctions de l'écran Fax, voir “Réglage des conditions d'émission” à la page 3-11. Pour plus d'informations sur la définition des fonctions de l'écran Application, voir “Présentation des fonctions d'application” à la page 7-5. 9 Indiquez la destination. – Pour plus d'informations sur la désignation de la destination, voir “Sélection de la destination” à la page 3-21. 10 Positionnez le document original. – Pour plus d'informations sur la mise en place du document, voir “Positionnement des originaux sur la vitre d'exposition” à la page 3-8. 11 Appuyez sur [Départ]. La machine lit le document et l'enregistre en mémoire en tant que document réservé avant de l'émettre. 7 Applications d'émission 7-20 C250 ! Détail Pour annuler l'émission, voir “Annulation de l'émission” à la page 3-35. Si le poste récepteur n'est pas en état de recevoir, son numéro fera l'objet d'un rappel. Pour plus d'informations sur le rappel, voir “Rappel manuel” à la page 3-30. Si l'émission échoue, voir “Impossible d'envoyer des messages” à la page 5-3. Applications d'émission 7 C250 7-21 7.8 Format de numérisation Fonction Format de numérisation Cette fonction permet de préciser que le format de papier du document émis doit être identique au format du papier chargé à l'autre extrémité. Cela permet d'imprimer les images sans réduction sur le poste récepteur. En général, si le format du papier chargé à la destination ne peut contenir l'image transmise, cette image est réduite. Cette fonction permet aussi d'imprimer une partie de l'image, sans réduction. 0 Spécifications L'Émission mémoire est automatiquement sélectionnée. L'emplacement de lecture des originaux varie selon que l'original est placé sur le chargeur ADF ou sur la vitre d'exposition. Si Format d'origine et Originaux mixtes sont toutes deux sélectionnées, le Format d'origine a la priorité. 0 Fonctions incompatibles Mémoire rapide, Nombre originaux, Réception en relève RX (normal), Réception en relève RX (bulletin) 1 Au besoin, appuyez sur [Fax] dans le tableau de commande pour afficher l'écran Fax. 2 Appuyez sur [Réglage numéris.], puis sur [Application]. 7 Applications d'émission 7-22 C250 3 Appuyez sur [Format de numérisat.]. 4 Appuyez sur la touche correspondant au format du document à émettre. 5 Appuyez sur [OK]. – Pour annuler le réglage, appuyez sur [Annul.]. L'écran Application s'affiche à nouveau. 6 Appuyez sur [OK]. L'écran Réglage numérisation s'affiche à nouveau. 7 Appuyez sur [OK]. L'écran Fax s'affiche à nouveau. 8 Le cas échéant, définissez les autres fonctions. – Pour plus d'informations sur la définition des fonctions de l'écran Fax, voir “Réglage des conditions d'émission” à la page 3-11. Pour plus d'informations sur la définition des fonctions de l'écran Application, voir “Présentation des fonctions d'application” à la page 7-5. Applications d'émission 7 C250 7-23 9 Indiquez la destination. – Pour plus d'informations sur la désignation de la destination, voir “Sélection de la destination” à la page 3-21. 10 Positionnez le document original. – Pour plus d'informations sur la mise en place du document, voir “Positionnement des originaux sur la vitre d'exposition” à la page 3-8. 11 Appuyez sur [Départ]. La machine lit le document et l'enregistre en mémoire en tant que document réservé avant de l'émettre. ! Détail Pour annuler l'émission, voir “Annulation de l'émission” à la page 3-35. Si le poste récepteur n'est pas en état de recevoir, son numéro fera l'objet d'un rappel. Pour plus d'informations sur le rappel, voir “Rappel manuel” à la page 3-30. Si l'émission échoue, voir “Impossible d'envoyer des messages” à la page 5-3. 7 Applications d'émission 7-24 C250 7.9 Type de fichier Définition du type de fichier Cette fonction permet de préciser le type de fichier image à lire si la destination est une adresse e-mail ou une boîte utilisateur. 1 Au besoin, appuyez sur [Fax] dans le tableau de commande pour afficher l'écran Fax. 2 Appuyez sur [Réglage numéris.]. 3 Appuyez sur [Type de fichier]. 4 Sélectionnez le type de fichier. 5 Appuyez sur [OK]. – Pour annuler le réglage, appuyez sur [Annul.]. L'écran Réglage numérisation s'affiche à nouveau. Applications d'émission 7 C250 7-25 6 Appuyez sur [OK]. L'écran Fax s'affiche à nouveau. 7 Le cas échéant, définissez les autres fonctions. – Pour plus d'informations sur la définition des fonctions de l'écran Fax, voir “Réglage des conditions d'émission” à la page 3-11. Pour plus d'informations sur la définition des fonctions de l'écran Application, voir “Présentation des fonctions d'application” à la page 7-5. 8 Indiquez la destination. – Pour plus d'informations sur la désignation de la destination, voir “Sélection de la destination” à la page 3-21. 9 Positionnez le document original. – Pour plus d'informations sur la mise en place du document, voir “Positionnement des originaux sur la vitre d'exposition” à la page 3-8. 10 Appuyez sur [Départ]. La machine lit le document et l'enregistre en mémoire en tant que document réservé avant de l'émettre. ! Détail Pour annuler l'émission, voir “Annulation de l'émission” à la page 3-35. Si l'émission échoue, voir “Impossible d'envoyer des messages” à la page 5-3. 7 Applications d'émission 7-26 C250 7.10 Mot de passe émission (TX) Mot de passe émission (TX) L'émission avec ID exige un mot de passe. Si le poste récepteur fonctionne en réseau fermé, l'expéditeur doit envoyer le même mot de passe que celui du réseau fermé en réception. 0 Spécification Cette fonction n'est disponible que si la machine du correspondant est dotée de la fonction Réseau fermé en réception (Transmission de mot de passe). 0 Fonctions incompatibles Émission en relève TX (normal), Réception en relève RX (normal), Émission F-code. 1 Au besoin, appuyez sur [Fax] dans le tableau de commande pour afficher l'écran Fax. 2 Appuyez sur [Réglage comm.]. 3 Appuyez sur [Mot de passe émission (TX)]. Applications d'émission 7 C250 7-27 4 Tapez le mot de passe au clavier (20 caractères maximum). – Les caractères et signes autorisés sont les suivants : 0 à 9, # et * – Pour effacer un caractère, appuyez sur [Eff.]. – Appuyez sur [C] (clear) pour effacer tout le mot de passe. 5 Appuyez sur [OK]. – Pour annuler le réglage, appuyez sur [OFF] ou sur [Annul.]. L'écran Réglage communication s'affiche à nouveau. 6 Appuyez sur [OK]. – Pour annuler le réglage, appuyez sur [OFF] ou sur [Annul.]. L'écran Fax s'affiche à nouveau. 7 Le cas échéant, définissez les autres fonctions. – Pour plus d'informations sur la définition des fonctions de l'écran Fax, voir “Réglage des conditions d'émission” à la page 3-11. Pour plus d'informations sur la définition des fonctions de l'écran Application, voir “Présentation des fonctions d'application” à la page 7-5. 8 Indiquez la destination. – Pour plus d'informations sur la désignation de la destination, voir “Sélection de la destination” à la page 3-21. 9 Positionnez le document original. – Pour plus d'informations sur la mise en place du document, voir “Positionnement des originaux sur la vitre d'exposition” à la page 3-8. 7 Applications d'émission 7-28 C250 10 Appuyez sur [Départ]. Le FK-502 mémorise le document avant de l'émettre. ! Détail Pour annuler l'émission, voir “Annulation de l'émission” à la page 3-35. Si le poste récepteur n'est pas en état de recevoir, son numéro fera l'objet d'un rappel. Pour plus d'informations sur le rappel, voir “Rappel manuel” à la page 3-30. Si l'émission échoue, voir “Impossible d'envoyer des messages” à la page 5-3. Applications d'émission 7 C250 7-29 7.11 Communication confidentielle (Émission F-code) Fonction Communication confidentielle Cette fonction permet d'utiliser des boîtes confidentielles (similaires à des comptes de messagerie) pour échanger des informations avec certaines personnes. Outre l'envoi d'un document vers une boîte confidentielle de destination (émission confidentielle), la réception d'un document dans une boîte confidentielle sur votre poste (réception confidentielle) est possible. Les sections suivantes décrivent les procédures d'émission confidentielle. 0 Spécifications L'émission confidentielle suppose que le fax récepteur soit doté d'une boîte confidentielle et d'un mot de passe spécifique (ce dernier n'est pas toujours requis par le fax récepteur). L'émission confidentielle suppose en outre que le fax de destination soit doté de la fonction F-code. 0 Fonctions incompatibles Émission en relève TX (normal), Réception en relève RX (normal), Mot de passe émission (TX)> 1 Au besoin, appuyez sur [Fax] dans le tableau de commande pour afficher l'écran Fax. 2 Appuyez sur [Réglage comm.]. Expéditeur Boîte de documents Récepteur confidentiels 7 Applications d'émission 7-30 C250 3 Appuyez sur [Émission F-code (TX)]. 4 Saisissez le numéro de la boîte sur le poste récepteur dans le champ Adresse secondaire. Appuyez sur [Mot Passe] et tapez le mot de passe au clavier, s'il y a lieu. – L'adresse secondaire et le mot de passe peuvent comporter 20 caractères maximum. – Pour la communication avec le FK-502, saisissez 9 caractères maximum pour le numéro de la boîte et 8 caractères maximum pour le mot de passe. Les caractères autorisés dépendent de la machine. – Les caractères et signes autorisés dans le mot de passe sont les suivants : 0 à 9, # et *. – Pour effacer un caractère, appuyez sur [Eff.]. – Appuyez sur [C] (clear) pour effacer l'intégralité de l'entrée. Si le mot de passe est requis, appuyez sur [Oui] et saisissez-le. 5 Appuyez sur [OK]. – Pour annuler le réglage, appuyez sur [OFF] ou sur [Annul.]. L'écran Réglage communication s'affiche à nouveau. Applications d'émission 7 C250 7-31 6 Appuyez sur [OK]. L'écran Fax s'affiche à nouveau. 7 Le cas échéant, définissez les autres fonctions. – Pour plus d'informations sur la définition des fonctions de l'écran Fax, voir “Réglage des conditions d'émission” à la page 3-11. Pour plus d'informations sur la définition des fonctions de l'écran Application, voir “Présentation des fonctions d'application” à la page 7-5. 8 Indiquez la destination. – Pour plus d'informations sur la désignation de la destination, voir “Sélection de la destination” à la page 3-21. 9 Positionnez le document original. – Pour plus d'informations sur la mise en place du document, voir “Positionnement des originaux sur la vitre d'exposition” à la page 3-8. 10 Appuyez sur [Départ]. Le FK-502 mémorise le document avant de l'émettre. ! Détail Pour interrompre la séquence d'opérations, appuyez sur [Arrêt]. 7 Applications d'émission 7-32 C250 7.12 Requête d'émission en relais (Émission F-code) Requête d'émission en relais La requête d'émission en relais consiste à faire transiter les transmissions vers plusieurs destinations sur une station relais (intermédiaire). Cette fonction permet de réduire les coûts de communication des destinations éloignées. Vous pouvez définir plusieurs stations, chacune d'entre elles étant composée d'une station de relais et de plusieurs destinations. 0 Spécifications La requête d'émission en relais n'est disponible que si cette fonction a été activée en mode Utilitaire. Pour plus d'informations, voir “Réglage fonction” à la page 11-40. La station d'origine émet la demande de relais, la station de relais relaye les transmissions et les stations d'arrivée sont celles qui reçoivent et terminent les communications. Cette fonction suppose le paramétrage sur la station de relais d'un numéro de boîte de relais, d'un mot de passe de relais et d'un numéro de groupe de destination. Elle suppose en outre que la station de relais soit dotée de la fonction F-code. 0 Fonctions incompatibles Émission en relève TX (normal), Réception en relève RX (normal), Mot de passe émission (TX) 1 Au besoin, appuyez sur [Fax] dans le tableau de commande pour afficher l'écran Fax. 2 Appuyez sur [Réglage comm.]. Station d'origine Station relais intermédiaire Station distante Appel international Station distante Appel local Applications d'émission 7 C250 7-33 3 Appuyez sur [Émission F-code (TX)]. 4 Saisissez dans le champ Adresse secondaire le numéro de la boîte de relais sur la station de relais, et le mot de passe dans le champ Mot Passe, à l'aide du clavier. – Les champs [Adresse secondaire] et [Mot Passe] acceptent 20 caractères maximum. – Les caractères et signes autorisés dans le champ [Mot Passe] sont les suivants : 0 à 9, # et * – Pour effacer un caractère, appuyez sur [Eff.]. – Appuyez sur [C] (clear) pour effacer l'intégralité de l'entrée. 5 Appuyez sur [OK]. – Pour annuler le réglage, appuyez sur [OFF] ou sur [Annul.]. L'écran Réglage communication s'affiche à nouveau. 6 Appuyez sur [OK]. L'écran Fax s'affiche à nouveau. 7 Applications d'émission 7-34 C250 7 Le cas échéant, définissez les autres fonctions. – Pour plus d'informations sur la définition des fonctions de l'écran Fax, voir “Réglage des conditions d'émission” à la page 3-11. Pour plus d'informations sur la définition des fonctions de l'écran Application, voir “Présentation des fonctions d'application” à la page 7-5. 8 Désignez la station relais. – Pour plus d'informations sur la désignation de la destination, voir “Sélection de la destination” à la page 3-21. 9 Positionnez le document original. – Pour plus d'informations sur la mise en place du document, voir “Positionnement des originaux sur la vitre d'exposition” à la page 3-8. 10 Appuyez sur [Départ]. Le FK-502 mémorise le document avant de l'émettre. ! Détail Pour interrompre la séquence d'opérations, appuyez sur [Arrêt]. Applications d'émission 7 C250 7-35 7.13 ECM OFF Fonction ECM OFF Les communications peuvent être effectuées avec le mode de correction d'erreur (ECM) désactivé. Ce mode, établi par l'ITU-T (International Telecommunications Union), permet aux télécopieurs qui en sont équipés de communiquer les uns avec les autres et de confirmer que les données émises sont exemptes d'erreur. Les perturbations dues aux bruits sur la ligne ou autres sont ainsi éliminées. Le FK-502 utilise par défaut le mode ECM lors des émissions. 0 Spécifications En cas de perturbation sur la ligne, le temps de communication peut être légèrement plus long lorsque le mode ECM est activé. 0 Fonctions incompatibles Émission en relève TX (normal), Réception en relève RX (normal), V34 OFF, Émission en relève (bulletin) et Réception en relève RX (bulletin). 1 Au besoin, appuyez sur [Fax] dans le tableau de commande pour afficher l'écran Fax. 2 Appuyez sur [Réglage comm.]. 3 Appuyez sur [Réglage ligne]. 7 Applications d'émission 7-36 C250 4 Appuyez sur [ECM OFF]. – Pour annuler le réglage, appuyez sur [Annul.] ou rappuyez sur [ECM OFF]. 5 Appuyez sur [OK]. L'écran Réglage communication s'affiche à nouveau. 6 Appuyez sur [OK]. L'écran Fax s'affiche à nouveau. 7 Le cas échéant, définissez les autres fonctions. – Pour plus d'informations sur la définition des fonctions de l'écran Fax, voir “Réglage des conditions d'émission” à la page 3-11. Pour plus d'informations sur la définition des fonctions de l'écran Application, voir “Présentation des fonctions d'application” à la page 7-5. 8 Indiquez la destination. – Pour plus d'informations sur la désignation de la destination, voir “Sélection de la destination” à la page 3-21. 9 Positionnez le document original. – Pour plus d'informations sur la mise en place du document, voir “Positionnement des originaux sur la vitre d'exposition” à la page 3-8. 10 Appuyez sur [Départ]. Le FK-502 démarre la transmission. Applications d'émission 7 C250 7-37 ! Détail Pour annuler l'émission, voir “Annulation de l'émission” à la page 3-35. Si le poste récepteur n'est pas en état de recevoir, son numéro fera l'objet d'un rappel. Pour plus d'informations sur le rappel, voir “Rappel manuel” à la page 3-30. Si l'émission échoue, voir “Impossible d'envoyer des messages” à la page 5-3. 7 Applications d'émission 7-38 C250 7.14 V34 OFF Mode V34 OFF Le fax Super G3 utilise le protocole V.34. Si la destination ou le FK-502 est connecté à la ligne via un équipement d’extension de central, et selon les conditions de la ligne, la communication avec le Super G3 peut ne pas aboutir. Dans ces circonstances, nous vous recommandons d'émettre en désactivant le mode V34 (OFF). Ce mode sera automatiquement réactivé à la fin de l'émission. 0 Fonctions incompatibles Réception en relève RX (normal), ECM OFF 1 Au besoin, appuyez sur [Fax] dans le tableau de commande pour afficher l'écran Fax. 2 Appuyez sur [Réglage comm.]. 3 Appuyez sur [Réglage ligne]. Applications d'émission 7 C250 7-39 4 Appuyez sur [V34 OFF]. – Pour annuler le réglage, appuyez sur [Annul.] ou rappuyez sur [V34 OFF]. 5 Appuyez sur [OK]. L'écran Réglage communication s'affiche à nouveau. 6 Appuyez sur [OK]. L'écran Fax s'affiche à nouveau. 7 Le cas échéant, définissez les autres fonctions. – Pour plus d'informations sur la définition des fonctions de l'écran Fax, voir “Réglage des conditions d'émission” à la page 3-11. Pour plus d'informations sur la définition des fonctions de l'écran Application, voir “Présentation des fonctions d'application” à la page 7-5. 8 Indiquez la destination. – Pour plus d'informations sur la désignation de la destination, voir “Sélection de la destination” à la page 3-21. 9 Positionnez le document original. – Pour plus d'informations sur la mise en place du document, voir “Positionnement des originaux sur la vitre d'exposition” à la page 3-8. 10 Appuyez sur [Départ]. Le FK-502 mémorise le document avant de l'émettre. 7 Applications d'émission 7-40 C250 ! Détail Pour annuler l'émission, voir “Annulation de l'émission” à la page 3-35. Si le poste récepteur n'est pas en état de recevoir, son numéro fera l'objet d'un rappel. Pour plus d'informations sur le rappel, voir “Rappel manuel” à la page 3-30. Si l'émission échoue, voir “Impossible d'envoyer des messages” à la page 5-3. 8 Fonctions utiles pour la réception Fonctions utiles pour la réception 8 C250 8-3 8 Fonctions utiles pour la réception 8.1 Utilisation d'un document reçu en réception confidentielle 8.1.1 Utilisation d'un document reçu en réception confidentielle La communication confidentielle permet d'utiliser des boîtes confidentielles (similaires à des comptes de messagerie) pour échanger des informations avec certaines personnes. Outre l'envoi d'un document vers une boîte confidentielle de destination (émission confidentielle), la réception d'un document dans une boîte confidentielle sur votre poste (réception confidentielle) est possible. Les sections suivantes décrivent les procédures d'impression d'un document reçu dans une boîte utilisateur confidentielle, et la suppression d'un tel document. Spécifications Si vous comptez utiliser la réception confidentielle, définissez la boîte utilisateur confidentielle (voir “Réglage des boîtes confidentielles” à la page 10-46) et le mot de passe d'accès au FK-502, puis fournissez ces données au poste à l'autre extrémité. L'émission suppose que le fax de destination soit doté de la fonction F-code. Expéditeur Boîte de documents Récepteur confidentiels 8 Fonctions utiles pour la réception 8-4 C250 8.1.2 Impression du document reçu dans une boîte utilisateur confidentielle Impression du document reçu dans une boîte utilisateur confidentielle Lorsque le FK-502 reçoit un document confidentiel, il imprime automatiquement un rapport de réception confidentielle. Procédez comme suit pour imprimer un document reçu dans une boîte utilisateur confidentielle. 1 Appuyez sur [Boîte] dans le tableau de commande. 2 Sélectionnez l'onglet [Boîte utilisateur publique], puis une [Boîte utilisateur confidentielle]. 3 Si un mot de passe d'accès a été défini, saisissez-le dans le champ affiché, puis appuyez sur [OK]. – Le mot de passe peut comporter 8 caractères maximum. 4 Sélectionnez le No. boîte confidentielle à l'aide de ou , puis appuyez sur [Imprimer]. 5 Appuyez sur [Départ]. Le document stocké dans la boîte utilisateur confidentielle désignée est imprimé. ! Détails Pour interrompre l'opération, appuyez sur [Fermer]. Une fois imprimé, le document est automatiquement supprimé. Fonctions utiles pour la réception 8 C250 8-5 8.1.3 Suppression d'un document stocké dans une boîte utilisateur confidentielle Procédez comme suit pour supprimer les documents placés dans une boîte utilisateur confidentielle. Suppression d'un document stocké dans une boîte utilisateur confidentielle Vous pouvez supprimer tous les documents d'une boîte utilisateur confidentielle en mode Utilitaire. 1 Appuyez sur [Boîte] dans le tableau de commande. 2 Sélectionnez l'onglet [Boîte utilisateur publique], puis une [Boîte utilisateur confidentielle]. 3 Si un mot de passe d'accès a été défini, saisissez-le dans le champ affiché, puis appuyez sur [OK]. – Le mot de passe peut comporter 8 caractères maximum. 4 Sélectionnez le No. boîte confidentielle à l'aide de ou , puis appuyez sur [Suppri.]. 5 Appuyez sur [Oui] dans l'écran de confirmation de la suppression. Le ou les documents placés dans cette boîte sont supprimés. ! Détails Pour interrompre l'opération, appuyez sur [Fermer]. 8 Fonctions utiles pour la réception 8-6 C250 8.2 Réception mémoire Dans l'écran Utilitaire, vous pouvez activer le mode de réception mémoire sur FK-502, qui permet de recevoir les documents, de les mémoriser et de les imprimer selon les besoins. Les sections qui suivent décrivent les procédures d'impression et de suppression d'un document reçu mémorisé. Il est supposé que la réception mémoire est active. ! Détail Pour activer et régler la réception mémoire, voir “Réception mémoire obligatoire” à la page 11-43. 8.2.1 Impression d'un document mémorisé Impression d'un document mémorisé La procédure suivante décrit l'impression d'un document reçu, stocké en mémoire. 1 Au besoin, appuyez sur [Boîte] dans le tableau de commande pour afficher l'écran de sélection d'une boîte. 2 Sélectionnez l'onglet [Boîte ut. système] et [Boîte réception mémoire RX]. – Si la fonction d'authentification utilisateur est réglée sur [ON], l'onglet [Boîte ut. personnelle] apparaît. Fonctions utiles pour la réception 8 C250 8-7 3 Saisissez le mot de passe et appuyez sur [OK]. – Pour interrompre l'opération, appuyez sur [Annul.]. – Appuyez sur [C] (clear) si vous voulez supprimer les données saisies. 4 Sélectionnez le document reçu à l'aide de ou et appuyez sur [Imprimer]. 5 Appuyez sur [Départ]. Le document sélectionné est imprimé. ! Détails Appuyez sur ou pour afficher l'écran suivant ou précédent. Pour interrompre l'opération, appuyez sur [Fermer] avant d'appuyer sur [Imprimer]. Pour afficher la première page du ficher sélectionné afin d'en vérifier le contenu, appuyez sur [Epreuve]. 8 Fonctions utiles pour la réception 8-8 C250 8.2.2 Suppression d'un document mémorisé Suppression d'un document mémorisé La procédure suivante décrit la suppression d'un document reçu, stocké en mémoire. 1 Au besoin, appuyez sur [Boîte] dans le tableau de commande pour afficher l'écran de sélection d'une boîte. 2 Sélectionnez l'onglet [Boîte ut. système] et [Boîte réception mémoire RX]. 3 Saisissez le mot de passe et appuyez sur [OK]. – Pour interrompre l'opération, appuyez sur [Annul.]. – Appuyez sur [C] (clear) si vous voulez supprimer les données saisies. 4 Sélectionnez le document reçu à l'aide de ou et appuyez sur [Suppri.]. 5 Appuyez sur [Oui] dans l'écran de confirmation de la suppression. Le document sélectionné est imprimé. ! Détails Pour interrompre l'opération, appuyez sur [Fermer] avant d'appuyer sur [Imprimer]. Pour afficher la première page du ficher sélectionné afin d'en vérifier le contenu, appuyez sur [Epreuve]. Fonctions utiles pour la réception 8 C250 8-9 8.3 Informations de réception 8.3.1 Informations sur la réception et l'impression recto-verso Lorsque [Impression R/V pour réception] est réglée sur [ON] Lorsque [Impression R/V pour réception] est réglée sur [ON] dans le réglage émission/réception du mode Utilitaire, les documents sont imprimés rectoverso. Pour plus d'informations, voir “Réglage Émission/Réception” à la page 11-37. 8 Fonctions utiles pour la réception 8-10 C250 9 Relève Relève 9 C250 9-3 9 Relève 9.1 Émission en relève L'émission en relève permet de numériser un document à l'aide du FK-502 et de l'enregistrer sur le disque dur jusqu'à ce qu'une destination transmette une commande de relève. Le document est sauvegardé dans la boîte relève émission de la boîte utilisateur système, et l'émission commence à réception d'une commande de relève de la destination. L'émission en relève stocke les documents dans la boîte relève émission et les bulletins dans la boîte bulletin board. La description qui suit suppose l'utilisation de l'émission en relève et de la boîte relève émission. ! Détail Si vous utilisez l'option bulletin board, reportez-vous à “Bulletin” à la page 9-9. Pour connaître la procédure d'impression et de suppression des documents émis en relève, voir “Manuel d'utilisation – Opérations Boîte”. 9 Relève 9-4 C250 9.1.1 Émission en relève Émission en relève Cette section décrit la procédure d'émission en relève (normale). 0 Spécifications L'émission en relève porte sur un seul document. L'émission mémoire est automatiquement sélectionnée. 0 Fonctions incompatibles Mémoire rapide, Nombre d'originaux, Réception en relève TX (normal), Émission différée TX, Communications internationales, ECM OFF, Mot de passe émission TX, Émission F-code, V34 OFF 1 Au besoin, appuyez sur [Fax] dans le tableau de commande pour afficher l'écran Fax. 2 Appuyez sur [Réglage comm.]. 3 Appuyez sur [Émission en relève (TX)]. 4 Appuyez sur [Normal]. Relève 9 C250 9-5 5 Appuyez sur [OK]. – Pour annuler le réglage, appuyez sur [OFF] ou sur [Annul.]. L'écran Réglage communication s'affiche à nouveau. 6 Appuyez sur [OK]. L'écran Fax s'affiche à nouveau. 7 Le cas échéant, définissez les autres fonctions. – Pour plus d'informations sur la définition des fonctions de l'écran Fax, voir “Réglage des conditions d'émission” à la page 3-11. Pour plus d'informations sur la définition des fonctions de l'écran Application, voir “Présentation des fonctions d'application” à la page 7-5. 8 Positionnez le document original. – Pour plus d'informations sur la mise en place du document, voir “Positionnement de l'original sur la machine” à la page 3-7. 9 Appuyez sur [Départ]. Le FK-502 numérise le document et le mémorise jusqu'à ce que la destination envoie une commande de relève, qui entraîne l'émission du document. ! Détail Si l'émission échoue, voir “Impossible d'envoyer des messages” à la page 5-3. 9 Relève 9-6 C250 9.2 Réception en relève La réception en relève permet au FK-502 d'envoyer une commande à une destin ation pour recevoir le document qui est soit prêt à l'émission sur la machine distante, soit réservé pour l'émission en relève. Cette fonction est utile si vous préférez assumer les frais de la communication. La réception en relève séquentielle permet de désigner plusieurs destinations de réception en relève. Un rapport de relève réception séquentielle est imprimé en fin de réception, de même qu'un rapport de relève séquentielle réservée si vous utilisez également l'émission différée. ! Détail Cette fonction ne fonctionne pas si la machine distante n'est pas dotée de cette caractéristique. Pour plus d'informations sur le rapport de relève séquentielle réservée, voir “Rapport de relève séquentielle réservée (réception)” à la page 12-27 et sur le rapport de relève réception séquentielle, voir “Rapport de relève séquentielle (réception)” à la page 12-17. Relève 9 C250 9-7 Réception en relève La réception en relève comporte deux options : normale et bulletin board. Avec l'option bulletin board, le document à recevoir est réservé dans le tableau électronique de la destination. Pour plus d'informations sur cette option, voir “Réception en relève d'un document placé sur le bulletin board d'une destination (fax)” à la page 9-13. La description s'applique à la réception en relève normale. 0 Fonctions incompatibles Mémoire rapide, Effacement bords, Format de numérisation, Nombre d'originaux, Originaux mixtes, Position relieure, Émission confidentielle, Émission en relais, ECM OFF, Communications internationales, Émission en relève (normal), Mot de passe émission TX 1 Au besoin, appuyez sur [Fax] dans le tableau de commande pour afficher l'écran Fax. 2 Appuyez sur [Réglage comm.]. 3 Appuyez sur [Réception en relève (RX)]. 4 Appuyez sur [Normal]. 9 Relève 9-8 C250 5 Appuyez sur [OK]. – Pour annuler le réglage, appuyez sur [OFF]. L'écran Réglage communication s'affiche à nouveau. 6 Appuyez sur [OK]. L'écran Fax s'affiche à nouveau. 7 Indiquez la ou les destinations. – Pour plus d'informations sur la désignation de la destination, voir “Sélection de la destination” à la page 3-21. Vous pouvez spécifier plusieurs destinations. 8 Appuyez sur [Départ]. Le FK-502 commence à recevoir le ou les documents prêts à l'émission ou réservés pour émission en relève sur la ou les destinations. ! Détail Pour suspendre la réception en relève, appuyez sur [Arrêt] sur le tableau de commande avant d'appuyer sur [Départ]. Si la réception échoue, voir “Réception impossible” à la page 4-6. Relève 9 C250 9-9 9.3 Bulletin Le FK-502 vous permet de parcourir le bulletin board (tableau électronique) d'une destination pour y rechercher les documents en attente de relève ou pour y placer des documents à relever. Cette section décrit les procédures de gestion des documents affichés sur le bulletin board d'une destination, notamment l'écriture d'un document sur le tableau et la réception en relève d'un document posté sur le tableau. ! Détail Pour plus d'informations sur l'impression et la suppression d'un document affiché sur le tableau électronique, consultez le “Manuel d'utilisation - Opérations Scanner réseau”. Relève Écriture Parcourir Bulletin boards (tableaux électroniques) 9 Relève 9-10 C250 9.3.1 Écriture d'un document sur le bulletin board La procédure d'écriture d'un document sur le bulletin board est décrite cidessous. Écriture d'un document sur le bulletin board 0 Spécifications Les tableaux électroniques (bulletin board) doivent être préalablement définis. Voir “Réglage du bulletin (tableau électronique)” à la page 10-48. Les tableaux électroniques ne peuvent être utilisés que si la destination est dotée de la fonction F-code. Vous ne pouvez placer sur un tableau électronique qu'un document à la fois. 0 Fonctions incompatibles Mémoire rapide, Nombre d'originaux, Réception en relève TX (normal), Émission différée TX, Communications internationales, ECM OFF, Mot de passe émission TX, Émission F-code, V34 OFF 0 Si le bulletin board comporte déjà un document et que vous en placez un nouveau, celui-ci écrase le document existant. 1 Au besoin, appuyez sur [Fax] dans le tableau de commande pour afficher l'écran Fax. 2 Appuyez sur [Réglage comm.]. 3 Appuyez sur [Émission en relève (TX)]. Relève 9 C250 9-11 4 Appuyez sur [Bulletin]. 5 Saisissez le numéro du bulletin dans le champ [No. bulletin]. – Vous pouvez saisir un numéro compris entre 1 et 999999999 (9 chiffres). – Pour effacer un caractère, appuyez sur [Eff.]. – Appuyez sur [C] (clear) pour supprimer tous les numéros de bulletin board. 6 Appuyez sur [OK]. – Pour annuler le réglage, appuyez sur [OFF]. L'écran Réglage communication s'affiche à nouveau. 7 Appuyez sur [OK]. L'écran Fax s'affiche à nouveau. 8 Le cas échéant, définissez les autres fonctions. – Pour plus d'informations sur la définition des fonctions de l'écran Fax, voir “Réglage des conditions d'émission” à la page 3-11. Pour plus d'informations sur la définition des fonctions de l'écran Application, voir “Présentation des fonctions d'application” à la page 7-5. 9 Relève 9-12 C250 9 Positionnez le document original. – Pour plus d'informations sur la mise en place du document, voir “Positionnement des originaux sur la vitre d'exposition” à la page 3-8. 10 Appuyez sur [Départ]. – Si vous voulez interrompre la lecture du document après avoir appuyé sur [Départ], appuyez sur [Arrêt], puis sur [Oui] dans l'écran de confirmation. Le FK-502 lit le document et le place sur le bulletin board. Relève 9 C250 9-13 9.3.2 Réception en relève d'un document placé sur le bulletin board d'une destination (fax) Réception en relève d'un document placé sur le bulletin board d'une destination (fax) Vous pouvez recevoir par relève le document placé sur le bulletin board d'une destination. Procédez de la manière suivante. 1 Au besoin, appuyez sur [Fax] dans le tableau de commande pour afficher l'écran Fax. 2 Appuyez sur [Réglage comm.]. 3 Appuyez sur [Réception en relève (RX)]. 4 Appuyez sur [Bulletin]. 9 Relève 9-14 C250 5 Saisissez le numéro du bulletin dans le champ [No. bulletin]. – Vous pouvez saisir un numéro de bulletin de 20 chiffres maximum. – Pour effacer un caractère, appuyez sur [Eff.]. – Appuyez sur [C] (clear) pour supprimer tous les numéros de bulletin board. 6 Appuyez sur [OK]. – Pour annuler le réglage, appuyez sur [OFF]. L'écran Réglage communication s'affiche à nouveau. 7 Appuyez sur [OK]. L'écran Fax s'affiche à nouveau. 8 Sélectionnez la destination. – Pour plus d'informations, voir “Sélection de la destination” à la page 3-21. 9 Appuyez sur [Départ]. La machine distante lance l'opération de relève sur son bulletin board. 10 Enregistrement/ Réglages Enregistrement/Réglages 10 C250 10-3 10 Enregistrement/Réglages 10.1 Affichage de l'écran d'enregistrement du télécopieur La procédure d'affichage de l'écran d'enregistrement du télécopieur est décrite ci-dessous. Affichage de l'écran d'enregistrement du télécopieur 1 Appuyez sur [Fax] et sur [Utilitaire/Compteur] sur le tableau de commande pour afficher l'écran du mode Utilitaire. 2 Appuyez sur [Enregistrement 1-touche]. – En mode Utilitaire, vous pouvez également taper sur le clavier le numéro de l'option pour la sélectionner. Pour [Enregistrement 1-touche], tapez “1” sur le clavier. – Si [Enregistrement et changement d'adresse] de l'option [Interdire accès Paramètres tâche] dans l'écran Utilitaires est réglé sur [Interdire], vous ne pouvez pas changer ou enregistrer la touche correspondant à [Enregistrement 1-touche]. Pour plus d'informations à ce sujet, contactez l'administrateur. 10 Enregistrement/Réglages 10-4 C250 3 Appuyez sur Fax. L'écran Enregistrement fax s'affiche. Enregistrement/Réglages 10 C250 10-5 10.2 Enregistrement du carnet d'adresses Vous pouvez enregistrer dans le [Carnet d'adresses] le numéro du fax et l'adresse e-mail d'une destination fréquente. Vous pouvez ensuite accéder au [Carnet d'adresses] enregistré par le biais de [Carnet d'adresses] ou [Saisie directe] dans l'écran Fax. - Vous pouvez enregistrer 2 000 adresses maximum (0001 à 2000), y compris le [Carnet d'adresses] d'autres fonctions de la machine, telle que la numérisation. - L'enregistrement du nom de la destination et du caractère de recherche dans le [Carnet d'adresses] permet ensuite de spécifier la destination en sélectionnant le caractère de recherche. - Vous pouvez enregistrer le numéro de fax ([No. abrégé]), l'adresse e-mail ou la boîte. Cette section décrit la procédure d'enregistrement, de modification et de suppression du carnet d'adresses. Tenez compte du point suivant : - L'enregistrement n'est pas disponible tant que le nom, la destination, l'adresse e-mail ou la boîte n'a pas été défini. ! Détail Vous pouvez confirmer les informations enregistrées dans la liste de numéros abrégés. Pour plus d'informations sur la liste de numéros abrégés, voir “Liste Carnet d'adresses” à la page 12-33 10 Enregistrement/Réglages 10-6 C250 Enregistrement d'un numéro de fax dans un carnet d'adresses La procédure d'enregistrement d'un numéro de fax dans un carnet d'adresses est décrite ci-dessous. 1 Pour afficher l'écran Enregistrement fax, voir “Affichage de l'écran d'enregistrement du télécopieur” à la page 10-3. 2 Appuyez sur [Carnet d'adresses]. – En mode Utilitaire, vous pouvez également taper sur le clavier le numéro de l'option pour la sélectionner. Pour [Carnet d'adresses], tapez “1” sur le clavier. 3 Appuyez sur [No. abrégé]. Enregistrement/Réglages 10 C250 10-7 4 Appuyez sur [Nouveau]. 5 Appuyez sur [Nom] et saisissez le nom du carnet d'adresses. – Pour plus d'informations sur la saisie des caractères, voir page 13-4. – Le nom peut comporter 24 caractères maximum. – Un numéro inutilisé apparaît par défaut dans le champ [No.]. 6 Tapez sur le clavier le numéro de fax de la destination. – Les touches suivantes sont disponibles. – [Tonalité] : Si vous utilisez la numérotation décimale (DC), appuyez sur [Tonalité] pour sélectionner le mode FV (fréquences vocales), qui est utilisé avec les services de télécopie. La sélection de cette option est indiquée par un “T” à l'écran. – [Pause] : Appuyez sur [Pause] pour insérer une pause entre deux chiffres du numéro à composer. L'appui une fois sur [Pause] génère un intervalle d'une seconde entre deux chiffres. Vous pouvez saisir plusieurs intervalles, indiqués par un “P” à l'écran. 10 Enregistrement/Réglages 10-8 C250 – [-] : Le tiret est un signe de séparation uniquement. Il n'a aucune incidence sur la numérotation. Il est indiqué à l'écran par un “-”. – : Déplace le curseur vers la gauche. – : Déplace le curseur vers la droite. – [Suppri.] : Les caractères sont supprimés un par un à partir de la position du curseur. Si celui-ci se trouve à l'extrême droite de l'entrée, les caractères précédent le curseur sont supprimés. – [Ligne extérieure]: S'affiche si [Définir CN PBX] est réglé sur [ON]. Est indiqué à l'écran par un [E-]. – Vous pouvez saisir un numéro de 38 chiffres maximum. – Si vous faites une faute de frappe, appuyez sur [Suppri.] pour effacer les caractères un par un, sur [C] (clear) pour tout effacer. – Si la connexion PBX est [ON] lors d'un appel de la ligne intérieure vers une ligne extérieure, appuyez sur [Pause] après le numéro de la ligne extérieure (“0”, par exemple) pour sécuriser l'appel. “P” s'affiche à l'écran. 7 Pour changer le caractère de recherche, appuyez sur [Index], puis réenregistrez ce caractère. – Appuyez sur la touche à enregistrer comme caractère de recherche parmi les touches [ABC] à [etc]. – Si la destination est fréquemment utilisée, précisez le caractère de recherche et sélectionnez en même temps [Comm]. Ce caractère de recherche s'affichera en premier lieu dans le carnet d'adresses. – Le caractère affiché en préfixe du Nom est défini par défaut comme caractère de recherche. 8 Appuyez sur [OK]. – Pour annuler l'enregistrement, appuyez sur [Annul.]. Le numéro de fax est enregistré dans le carnet d'adresses et la destination enregistrée apparaît dans la liste. 9 Appuyez sur [Fermer]. Pour procéder à un autre enregistrement de numéro de fax dans le carnet d'adresses, reprenez à l'étape 4. 10 Appuyez sur [Quitt.] en bas à gauche. Enregistrement/Réglages 10 C250 10-9 Enregistrement d'une adresse e-mail dans le carnet d'adresses L'enregistrement d'une adresse e-mail dans le carnet d'adresses permet d'envoyer un original numérisé en pièce jointe d'un message. Le fichier est au format TIFF ou PDF. La procédure d'enregistrement d'une adresse e-mail dans le carnet d'adresses est décrite ci-dessous. 1 Pour afficher l'écran Enregistrement fax, voir “Affichage de l'écran d'enregistrement du télécopieur” à la page 10-3. 2 Appuyez sur [Carnet d'adresses]. – En mode Utilitaire, vous pouvez également taper sur le clavier un numéro d'option pour la sélectionner. Pour le [Carnet d'adresses], tapez “1” sur le clavier. 3 Appuyez sur [E-Mail]. 10 Enregistrement/Réglages 10-10 C250 4 Appuyez sur [Nouveau]. 5 Appuyez sur [Nom] et saisissez le nom du carnet d'adresses. – Pour plus d'informations sur la saisie des caractères, voir page 13-4. – Le nom peut comporter 24 caractères maximum. – Un numéro inutilisé apparaît par défaut dans le champ [No.]. 6 Appuyez sur [Adresse E-Mail]. 7 Saisissez l'adresse e-mail dans l'écran qui s'affiche, puis appuyez sur [OK]. – : Déplace le curseur vers la gauche. – : Déplace le curseur vers la droite. – [Suppri.] : Les caractères sont supprimés un par un à partir de la position du curseur. Si celui-ci se trouve à l'extrême droite de l'entrée, les caractères précédent le curseur sont supprimés. – L'adresse e-mail peut comporter 320 caractères maximum. Enregistrement/Réglages 10 C250 10-11 – Appuyez sur [C] (clear) pour supprimer toutes les entrées saisies. 8 Pour changer le caractère de recherche, appuyez sur [Index], puis réenregistrez ce caractère. – Appuyez sur la touche à enregistrer comme caractère de recherche parmi les touches [ABC] à [etc]. – Si la destination est fréquemment utilisée, précisez le caractère de recherche et sélectionnez en même temps [Comm]. Ce caractère de recherche s'affichera en premier lieu dans la sélection du carnet d'adresses. – Le caractère affiché en préfixe du Nom est automatiquement défini comme caractère de recherche. 9 Appuyez sur [OK]. – Pour annuler l'enregistrement, appuyez sur [Annul.]. L'adresse e-mail est enregistrée dans le carnet d'adresses et la destination enregistrée apparaît dans la liste. 10 Appuyez sur [Fermer]. Pour procéder à un autre enregistrement dans le carnet d'adresses, reprenez à l'étape 4. 11 Appuyez sur [Quitt.] en bas à gauche. 10 Enregistrement/Réglages 10-12 C250 Enregistrement d'une boîte dans le carnet d'adresses L'enregistrement d'une boîte dans le carnet d'adresses permet de placer dans cette boîte l'original numérisé. Le fichier est enregistré au format TIFF. La procédure d'enregistrement d'une boîte dans le carnet d'adresses est décrite ci-dessous. 1 Pour afficher l'écran Enregistrement fax, voir “Affichage de l'écran d'enregistrement du télécopieur” à la page 10-3. 2 Appuyez sur [Carnet d'adresses]. – En mode Utilitaire, vous pouvez également taper sur le clavier un numéro d'option pour la sélectionner. Pour le [Carnet d'adresses], tapez “1” sur le clavier. 3 Appuyez sur [Boîte utilisateur]. Enregistrement/Réglages 10 C250 10-13 4 Appuyez sur [Nouveau]. 5 Appuyez sur [Nom] et saisissez le nom du carnet d'adresses. – Pour plus d'informations sur la saisie des caractères, voir page 13-4. – Le nom peut comporter 24 caractères maximum. – Un numéro inutilisé apparaît par défaut dans le champ [No.]. 6 Appuyez sur [Nom boîte utilisateur]. 10 Enregistrement/Réglages 10-14 C250 7 Sélectionnez la boîte à enregistrer et appuyez sur [OK]. – Cette opération suppose l'enregistrement préalable de la boîte. – Pour plus d'informations sur l'enregistrement de la boîte, voir “Manuel d'utilisation - Opérations Boîte”. 8 Pour changer le caractère de recherche, appuyez sur [Index], puis réenregistrez ce caractère. – Appuyez sur la touche à enregistrer comme caractère de recherche parmi les touches [ABC] à [etc]. – Si la destination est fréquemment utilisée, précisez le caractère de recherche et sélectionnez en même temps [Comm]. Ce caractère de recherche s'affichera en premier lieu dans la sélection du carnet d'adresses. – Le caractère affiché en préfixe du Nom est défini par défaut comme caractère de recherche. 9 Appuyez sur [OK]. – Pour annuler l'enregistrement, appuyez sur [Annul.]. La boîte est enregistrée dans le carnet d'adresses et la destination enregistrée apparaît dans la liste. 10 Appuyez sur [Fermer]. Pour procéder à un autre enregistrement dans le carnet d'adresses, reprenez à l'étape 4. 11 Appuyez sur [Quitt.] en bas à gauche. Enregistrement/Réglages 10 C250 10-15 Modification du contenu du carnet d'adresses La procédure de modification du contenu du carnet d'adresses est décrite ci-dessous. 1 Pour afficher l'écran Enregistrement fax, voir “Affichage de l'écran d'enregistrement du télécopieur” à la page 10-3. 2 Appuyez sur [Carnet d'adresses]. – En mode Utilitaire, vous pouvez également taper sur le clavier un numéro d'option pour la sélectionner. Pour le [Carnet d'adresses], tapez “1” sur le clavier. 3 Appuyez sur [No. abrégé], [E-Mail] ou [Boîte utilisateur]. 4 Appuyez sur le carnet d'adresses à modifier, puis sur [Modif.]. 5 Appuyez sur l'élément à modifier, apportez-y les modifications voulues, puis appuyez sur [OK]. 10 Enregistrement/Réglages 10-16 C250 6 Confirmez les modifications et appuyez sur [OK]. – Pour annuler la modification, appuyez sur [Annul.]. Pour apporter d'autres modifications, reprenez la procédure à l'étape 5. 7 Appuyez sur [Fermer]. 8 Appuyez sur [Quitt.] en bas à gauche. Enregistrement/Réglages 10 C250 10-17 Suppression du carnet d'adresses La procédure de suppression du carnet d'adresses est décrite ci-dessous. 0 Si vous supprimez une destination du carnet d'adresses, celle-ci est également supprimée du groupe et du programme auxquels elle appartient. 1 Pour afficher l'écran Enregistrement fax, voir “Affichage de l'écran d'enregistrement du télécopieur” à la page 10-3. 2 Appuyez sur [Carnet d'adresses]. – En mode Utilitaire, vous pouvez également taper sur le clavier un numéro d'option pour la sélectionner. Pour le [Carnet d'adresses], tapez “1” sur le clavier. 3 Appuyez sur [No. abrégé], [E-Mail] ou [Boîte utilisateur]. 4 Appuyez sur le carnet d'adresses à supprimer, puis sur [Supprimer]. 5 Appuyez sur [Oui] pour confirmer la suppression. – Pour annuler la suppression, appuyez sur [Non]. Pour procéder à une autre suppression, reprenez à l'étape 4. 10 Enregistrement/Réglages 10-18 C250 6 Appuyez sur [Fermer]. 7 Appuyez sur [Quitt.] en bas à gauche. Enregistrement/Réglages 10 C250 10-19 10.3 Enregistrement d'un groupe Plusieurs carnet d'adresses peuvent être affectés à un groupe. Cette fonction est utile si vous envoyez régulièrement des informations à plusieurs destinations en même temps, ou si vous avez choisi la réception en relève de ces émetteurs. - Vous pouvez enregistrer jusqu'à 100 groupes (01 à 99, 00), y compris les groupes utilisés pour la fonction de numérisation. - Chaque groupe peut comporter jusqu'à 500 carnets d'adresses. - Un carnet d'adresses peut être enregistré pour le groupe. Veillez seulement à enregistrer la destination dans ce carnet d'adresses avant de procéder à l'enregistrement du groupe. – Pour plus d'informations sur l'enregistrement d'un carnet d'adresses, voir “Enregistrement du carnet d'adresses” à la page 10-5. - Chaque groupe peut porter un nom. Les procédures qui suivent décrivent l'enregistrement d'un carnet d'adresses et d'un groupe, ainsi que la modification et la suppression d'un groupe enregistré. Tenez compte du point suivant : - L'enregistrement n'est pas disponible tant que le nom, la destination, l'adresse e-mail ou la boîte n'a pas été défini. ! Détail Vous pouvez confirmer les informations enregistrées dans la liste des groupes. Pour plus d'informations sur la liste des groupes, voir “Liste d'adresses de groupe” à la page 12-36 10 Enregistrement/Réglages 10-20 C250 Enregistrement d'un groupe La procédure d'enregistrement d'un groupe est décrite ci-dessous. 1 Pour afficher l'écran Enregistrement fax, voir “Affichage de l'écran d'enregistrement du télécopieur” à la page 10-3. 2 Appuyez sur [Groupe]. – En mode Utilitaire, vous pouvez également taper sur le clavier un numéro d'option pour la sélectionner. Pour un [Groupe], tapez “2” sur le clavier. 3 Appuyez sur [Nouveau]. – Si le groupe a déjà été enregistré, vous pouvez modifier les entrées à ce stade en appuyant sur [Modifier]. Pour plus d'informations, voir page 10-23. – Seuls les groupes enregistrés dans [Fax] sont affichés. Enregistrement/Réglages 10 C250 10-21 4 Appuyez sur [Nom] et saisissez le nom du groupe. – Pour plus d'informations sur la saisie des caractères, voir page 13-4. – Le nom peut comporter 24 caractères maximum. – Un numéro disponible est affiché par défaut dans le champ [No.]. 5 Appuyez sur [Destination]. – Chaque groupe peut comporter jusqu'à 500 carnets d'adresses. 6 Sélectionnez la catégorie à enregistrer dans le groupe parmi [No. abrégé], [Boîte utilisateur] et [E-Mail]. 10 Enregistrement/Réglages 10-22 C250 7 Sélectionnez la destination à enregistrer dans le groupe. – Recherche par nom : Appuyez sur la touche correspondant au caractère de recherche, puis sélectionnez la destination dans le carnet d'adresses. – Recherche par numéro : Affiche les destinations numérotées dans l'ordre d'enregistrement (écran de 100). Appuyez sur la touche correspondant au numéro du carnet d'adresses à afficher. Appuyez sur ou pour faire défiler les numéros. 8 Appuyez sur [OK]. 9 Appuyez sur [Fermer]. 10 Appuyez sur [OK]. Pour procéder à l'enregistrement d'un autre groupe, reprenez à l'étape 5. 11 Appuyez sur [Quitt.] en bas à gauche. Enregistrement/Réglages 10 C250 10-23 Modification d'un groupe La procédure de modification d'un groupe est décrite ci-dessous. 1 Pour afficher l'écran Enregistrement fax, voir “Affichage de l'écran d'enregistrement du télécopieur” à la page 10-3. 2 Appuyez sur [Groupe]. – En mode Utilitaire, vous pouvez également taper sur le clavier un numéro d'option pour la sélectionner. Pour un [Groupe], tapez “2” sur le clavier. 3 Sélectionnez le groupe à modifier et appuyez sur [Modifier]. – Appuyez sur ou pour faire défiler les pages. 4 Sélectionnez l'élément à modifier, apportez les modifications voulues, puis appuyez sur [OK] ou sur [Fermer]. 5 Confirmez les modifications et appuyez sur [OK]. – Pour annuler les modifications, appuyez sur [Annul.]. 6 Appuyez sur [Quitt.] en bas à gauche. 10 Enregistrement/Réglages 10-24 C250 Suppression d'un groupe La procédure de suppression d'un groupe est décrite ci-dessous. 0 La suppression d'un groupe le supprime également du programme auquel il appartient. 1 Pour afficher l'écran Enregistrement fax, voir “Affichage de l'écran d'enregistrement du télécopieur” à la page 10-3. 2 Appuyez sur [Groupe]. – En mode Utilitaire, vous pouvez également taper sur le clavier un numéro d'option pour la sélectionner. Pour un [Groupe], tapez “2” sur le clavier. 3 Sélectionnez le groupe à supprimer et appuyez sur [Supprimer]. – Appuyez sur ou pour faire défiler les pages. – Vous pouvez confirmer les réglages en sélectionnant le groupe, puis en appuyant sur [Détails]. 4 Appuyez sur [Oui] pour confirmer la suppression. – Pour annuler la suppression, appuyez sur [Non]. Pour procéder à une autre suppression, reprenez à l'étape 3. 5 Appuyez sur [Fermer]. 6 Appuyez sur [Quitt.] en bas à gauche. Enregistrement/Réglages 10 C250 10-25 10.4 Enregistrement d'un programme Avant d'être enregistrée dans un programme, une destination (numéro de fax, boîte utilisateur ou e-mail) appelée fréquemment peut être associée au [Réglage numérisa.] ou au [Réglage communic.] qui sera utilisé. Cela fait, il suffit d'appuyer sur la touche correspondant au [Programme], de définir les fonctions de la destination enregistrée ainsi que le [Réglage numérisa.] ou le [Réglage commnic.], puis d'émettre. - Vous pouvez enregistrer jusqu'à 400 (001 à 400) programmes, y compris ceux d'autres fonctions de la machine. - Chaque programme peut porter un nom. Les procédures ci-dessous décrivent l'enregistrement d'un programme, ainsi que la modification et la suppression d'un programme. Tenez compte du point suivant : - L'enregistrement n'est pas disponible si le [Nom], l'un quelconque des [Réglage numérisa.] ou [Réglage communic.], ou la destination ne sont pas définis. Enregistrement d'un programme La procédure d'enregistrement d'un programme est décrite ci-dessous. 1 Pour afficher l'écran Enregistrement fax, voir “Affichage de l'écran d'enregistrement du télécopieur” à la page 10-3. 2 Appuyez sur [Programme]. – En mode Utilitaire, vous pouvez également taper sur le clavier un numéro d'option pour la sélectionner. Pour un [Programme], tapez “3” sur le clavier. 10 Enregistrement/Réglages 10-26 C250 3 Sélectionnez le programme à enregistrer et appuyez sur [Modifier]. – Affichage de [Réglage numéri.] et [Réglage communic.] Réglage : ON OFF Non enregistré Affichage : * - (Espace) – Appuyez sur ou à gauche de [Liste page] pour afficher une autre page. Chaque page affiche 15 destinations. – Appuyez sur [Liste page] pour paramétrer l'affichage d'une liste de programmes par page. – Appuyez sur [Changer nom page] dans l'écran Liste page pour le nom de la page affichée. – Appuyez sur ou à droite de la liste pour afficher le programme suivant. – Si la destination est un scanner, "Destination scanner" est affiché. 4 Appuyez sur [Nom] et tapez le nom du programme. – Pour plus d'informations sur la saisie des caractères, voir page 13-4. – Le nom peut comporter 24 caractères maximum. Enregistrement/Réglages 10 C250 10-27 5 Appuyez sur [Dest.]. 6 Appuyez sur [Sélection dans carnet d'adresses] ou [Saisie directe] pour préciser la destination. – Si vous choisissez [Sélection dans carnet d'adresses] : Sélectionnez une destination dans les carnets d'adresses et les groupes enregistrés. – Sélectionnez la destination à enregistrer parmi [No. abrégé], [Boîte utilisateur], [Groupe] ou [E-Mail]. – Appuyez sur [Recherche par nom] ou [Recherche par numéro], puis sélectionnez la destination. – [Recherche par nom] : Appuyez sur la touche correspondant au caractère de recherche, puis sélectionnez la destination dans le carnet d'adresses. – [Recherche par numéro] : Affiche les destinations numérotées dans l'ordre d'enregistrement (écran de 100). Appuyez sur la touche correspondant au numéro du carnet d'adresses à afficher. Appuyez sur ou pour faire défiler les numéros. – Appuyez sur [OK]. 10 Enregistrement/Réglages 10-28 C250 – Si vous choisissez la [Saisie directe] : Définissez la destination de la manière suivante. – Appuyez sur [No. abrégé], [Boîte utilisateur] ou [E-Mail]. – Saisissez ou sélectionnez la destination, puis appuyez sur [OK]. – Pour plus d'informations sur la saisie des numéros à composer, voir “Enregistrement d'un numéro de fax dans un carnet d'adresses” à la page 10-6. – Pour plus d'informations sur la saisie des boîtes, voir “Enregistrement d'une adresse e-mail dans le carnet d'adresses” à la page 10-9. – Pour plus d'informations sur la saisie des adresses e-mail, voir “Enregistrement d'une boîte dans le carnet d'adresses” à la page 10-12. 7 Pour paramétrer le [Réglage numérisation] ou le [Réglage communication], appuyez sur [ON], puis appuyez sur [OK]. – Dans l'écran [Réglage communications], vous pouvez paramétrer [Réglage E-Mail] et [Notification E-Mail]. – Si [Notification E-Mail] est réglé sur [ON], la fin d'une tâche peut être confirmée par e-mail à la destination précisée dans le champ [Notification E-Mail]. – Pour plus d'informations sur [Réglage numérisation] et [Réglage communication], voir “Applications d'émission” à la page 7-3. 8 Appuyez sur [Fermer]. – Pour annuler l'enregistrement, appuyez sur [Annul.]. Pour procéder à l'enregistrement d'un autre programme, reprenez à l'étape 3. 9 Appuyez sur [Quitt.] en bas à gauche. Enregistrement/Réglages 10 C250 10-29 Suppression d'un programme La procédure de suppression d'un programme est décrite ci-dessous. 1 Pour afficher l'écran Enregistrement fax, voir “Affichage de l'écran d'enregistrement du télécopieur” à la page 10-3. 2 Appuyez sur [Programme]. – En mode Utilitaire, vous pouvez également taper sur le clavier un numéro d'option pour la sélectionner. Pour un [Programme], tapez “3” sur le clavier. 3 Sélectionnez le programme à supprimer et appuyez sur [Supprimer]. – Appuyez sur ou à gauche de [Liste page] pour afficher une autre page. Chaque page affiche 15 destinations. – Appuyez sur [Liste page] pour paramétrer l'affichage d'une liste de programmes par page. – Appuyez sur une touche dans l'écran Liste page pour modifier le nom de la page affichée. – Appuyez sur ou à droite de la liste pour afficher le programme suivant. 10 Enregistrement/Réglages 10-30 C250 – Si la destination est un scanner, "Destination scanner" est affiché. – Vous pouvez confirmer les réglages en sélectionnant le programme, puis en appuyant sur [Vérifier réglage]. 4 Appuyez sur [Oui] pour confirmer la suppression. – Pour annuler la suppression, appuyez sur [Non]. Pour procéder à une autre suppression, reprenez à l'étape 3. 5 Appuyez sur [Quitt.] en bas à gauche. Enregistrement/Réglages 10 C250 10-31 10.5 Enregistrement du sujet et du texte d'un e-mail Les procédures d'enregistrement du sujet et du texte d'un e-mail, de modification et de suppression de ceux-ci sont décrites ci-dessous, de même que la définition des valeurs par défaut. ! Détail Vous pouvez enregistrer jusqu'à 10 sujets d'e-mail et jusqu'à 10 textes d'e-mail. Enregistrement du sujet d'un e-mail La procédure d'enregistrement du sujet d'un e-mail est décrite ci-dessous. 1 Pour afficher l'écran Enregistrement fax, voir “Affichage de l'écran d'enregistrement du télécopieur” à la page 10-3. 2 Appuyez sur [Sujet / Texte (pour E-mail)]. – En mode Utilitaire, vous pouvez également taper sur le clavier un numéro d'option pour la sélectionner. Pour [Sujet / Texte (pour E-mail)], tapez “4” sur le clavier. 10 Enregistrement/Réglages 10-32 C250 3 Appuyez sur [Sujet]. 4 Appuyez sur [Nouveau]. 5 Appuyez sur [Sujet]. – Vous pouvez saisir 64 caractères maximum dans le champ [Sujet] de l'écran [Sujet / Texte (pour E-mail)]. – Un numéro inutilisé apparaît par défaut dans le champ [No.]. Enregistrement/Réglages 10 C250 10-33 6 Saisissez le sujet dans l'écran qui s'affiche, puis appuyez sur [OK]. – Pour plus d'informations sur la saisie des caractères, voir page 13-4. 7 Appuyez sur [OK]. – Pour annuler l'enregistrement, appuyez sur [Annul.]. Le sujet est enregistré et la destination enregistrée apparaît dans la liste. 8 Appuyez sur [Fermer]. Pour procéder à l'enregistrement d'un autre sujet, reprenez à l'étape 4. 9 Appuyez sur [Quitt.] en bas à gauche. 10 Enregistrement/Réglages 10-34 C250 Modification du sujet d'un e-mail La procédure de modification du sujet d'un e-mail est décrite ci-dessous. 1 Pour afficher l'écran Enregistrement fax, voir “Affichage de l'écran d'enregistrement du télécopieur” à la page 10-3. 2 Appuyez sur [Sujet / Texte (pour E-mail)]. – En mode Utilitaire, vous pouvez également taper sur le clavier un numéro d'option pour la sélectionner. Pour [Sujet / Texte (pour Email)], tapez “4” sur le clavier. 3 Appuyez sur [Sujet]. Enregistrement/Réglages 10 C250 10-35 4 Sélectionnez le sujet à modifier et appuyez sur [Modifier]. – Appuyez sur ou pour faire défiler les pages. – Vous pouvez confirmer les réglages en sélectionnant le sujet, puis en appuyant sur [Détails]. 5 Appuyez sur [Sujet]. 6 Modifiez le sujet dans l'écran qui s'affiche, puis appuyez sur [OK]. – Pour plus d'informations sur la saisie des caractères, voir page 13-4. 7 Appuyez sur [OK]. – Pour annuler l'enregistrement, appuyez sur [Annul.]. Le sujet est modifié. 8 Appuyez sur [Fermer]. Pour procéder à la modification d'un autre sujet, reprenez à l'étape 4. 9 Appuyez sur [Quitt.] en bas à gauche. 10 Enregistrement/Réglages 10-36 C250 Suppression du sujet d'un e-mail La procédure de suppression du sujet d'un e-mail est décrite ci-dessous. 1 Pour afficher l'écran Enregistrement fax, voir “Affichage de l'écran d'enregistrement du télécopieur” à la page 10-3. 2 Appuyez sur [Sujet / Texte (pour E-mail)]. – En mode Utilitaire, vous pouvez également taper sur le clavier un numéro d'option pour la sélectionner. Pour [Sujet / Texte (pour E-mail)], tapez “4” sur le clavier. 3 Appuyez sur [Sujet]. Enregistrement/Réglages 10 C250 10-37 4 Sélectionnez le sujet à supprimer et appuyez sur [Supprimer]. – Appuyez sur ou pour passer à la page précédente ou suivante. – Vous pouvez confirmer les réglages en sélectionnant le sujet, puis en appuyant sur [Détails]. 5 Appuyez sur [Oui] pour confirmer la suppression. – Pour annuler la suppression, appuyez sur [Non]. Le sujet est supprimé. 6 Appuyez sur [Fermer]. Pour procéder à la suppression d'un autre sujet, reprenez à l'étape 4. 7 Appuyez sur [Quitt.] en bas à gauche. 10 Enregistrement/Réglages 10-38 C250 Réglage par défaut du sujet d'un e-mail Lors de la transmission de l'e-mail à partir de l'écran Fax, le sujet paramétré ici en tant que sujet par défaut est adressé à l'ordinateur. La procédure de réglage du sujet par défaut de l'e-mail est décrite ci-dessous. 1 Pour afficher l'écran Enregistrement fax, voir “Affichage de l'écran d'enregistrement du télécopieur” à la page 10-3. 2 Appuyez sur [Sujet / Texte (pour E-mail)]. – En mode Utilitaire, vous pouvez également taper sur le clavier un numéro d'option pour la sélectionner. Pour [Sujet / Texte (pour E-mail)], tapez “4” sur le clavier. 3 Appuyez sur [Sujet]. Enregistrement/Réglages 10 C250 10-39 4 Sélectionnez le sujet voulu et appuyez sur [Régler par défaut]. 5 Appuyez sur [Fermer]. 6 Appuyez sur [Quitt.] en bas à gauche. 10 Enregistrement/Réglages 10-40 C250 Enregistrement du texte d'un e-mail La procédure d'enregistrement du texte d'un e-mail est décrite ci-dessous. 0 Le texte d'un e-mail enregistré ne peut pas être modifié. Vous devez commencer par supprimer le texte à modifier, puis le réenregistrer. 1 Pour afficher l'écran Enregistrement fax, voir “Affichage de l'écran d'enregistrement du télécopieur” à la page 10-3. 2 Appuyez sur [Sujet / Texte (pour E-mail)]. – En mode Utilitaire, vous pouvez également taper sur le clavier un numéro d'option pour la sélectionner. Pour [Sujet / Texte (pour E-mail)], tapez “4” sur le clavier. 3 Appuyez sur [Texte]. Enregistrement/Réglages 10 C250 10-41 4 Appuyez sur [Nouveau]. 5 Appuyez sur [Texte]. – Vous pouvez saisir 256 caractères maximum dans le champ [Texte] de l'écran [Sujet / Texte (pour E-mail)]. – Un numéro inutilisé apparaît par défaut dans le champ [No.]. 6 Saisissez le texte dans l'écran qui s'affiche, puis appuyez sur [OK]. – Pour plus d'informations sur la saisie des caractères, voir page 13-4. 7 Appuyez sur [OK]. – Pour annuler l'enregistrement, appuyez sur [Annul.]. Le texte est enregistré et la destination enregistrée apparaît dans la liste. 8 Appuyez sur [Fermer]. Pour procéder à l'enregistrement d'un autre texte, reprenez à l'étape 4. 9 Appuyez sur [Quitt.] en bas à gauche. 10 Enregistrement/Réglages 10-42 C250 Suppression du texte d'un e-mail La procédure de suppression du texte d'un e-mail est décrite ci-dessous. 1 Pour afficher l'écran Enregistrement fax, voir “Affichage de l'écran d'enregistrement du télécopieur” à la page 10-3. 2 Appuyez sur [Sujet / Texte (pour E-mail)]. – En mode Utilitaire, vous pouvez également taper sur le clavier un numéro d'option pour la sélectionner. Pour [Sujet / Texte (pour Email)], tapez “4” sur le clavier. 3 Appuyez sur [Texte]. Enregistrement/Réglages 10 C250 10-43 4 Sélectionnez le texte à supprimer et appuyez sur [Supprimer]. – Appuyez sur ou pour passer à la page précédente ou suivante. – Vous pouvez confirmer les réglages en sélectionnant le texte, puis en appuyant sur [Détails]. 5 Appuyez sur [Oui] pour confirmer la suppression. – Pour annuler la suppression, appuyez sur [Non]. Le texte est supprimé. 6 Appuyez sur [Fermer]. Pour procéder à la suppression d'un autre texte, reprenez à l'étape 4. 7 Appuyez sur [Quitt.] en bas à gauche. 10 Enregistrement/Réglages 10-44 C250 Réglage par défaut du texte d'un e-mail Lors de la transmission de l'e-mail à partir de l'écran Fax, le texte paramétré ici en tant que texte par défaut est adressé à l'ordinateur. La procédure de réglage du texte par défaut de l'e-mail est décrite ci-dessous. 1 Pour afficher l'écran Enregistrement fax, voir “Affichage de l'écran d'enregistrement du télécopieur” à la page 10-3. 2 Appuyez sur [Sujet / Texte (pour E-mail)]. – En mode Utilitaire, vous pouvez également taper sur le clavier un numéro d'option pour la sélectionner. Pour [Sujet / Texte (pour E-mail)], tapez “4” sur le clavier. 3 Appuyez sur [Texte]. Enregistrement/Réglages 10 C250 10-45 4 Sélectionnez le texte voulu et appuyez sur [Régler par défaut]. 5 Appuyez sur [Fermer]. 6 Appuyez sur [Quitt.] en bas à gauche. 10 Enregistrement/Réglages 10-46 C250 10.6 Réglage des boîtes confidentielles La boîte confidentielle est la boîte publique / personnelle attachée à l'aide de la fonction avancée de boîte. Cette machine gère la communication confidentielle (F-code). Pour paramétrer la réception confidentielle, vous devez définir le numéro de boîte utilisateur, le nom, mot de passe de communication, Mot de passe de boîte, index et type. - Vous pouvez confirmer le mot de passe des boîtes confidentielles. Pour plus d'informations, voir page 11-53. - Pour plus d'informations sur la communication confidentielle, voir page 7-29. ! Détail Pour plus d'informations sur l'enregistrement des boîtes, voir “Manuel d'utilisation - Opérations Boîte”. Vous devez fournir le mot de passe de la boîte utilisateur confidentielle. La communication confidentielle peut être utilisée sans mot de passe. No. boîte utilisateur De 1 à 999999999. - Ce numéro doit être fourni au télécopieur central qui transmettra les informations en mode de communication confidentielle. Nom Le nom peut comporter 20 caractères maximum. Mot de passe de communication Il s'agit du mot de passe au moment de la réception confidentielle. Les caractères autorisés sont les chiffres 0 à 9, * ou un numéro de 8 chiffres maximum. - Ce mot de passe doit être fourni au télécopieur central qui transmettra les informations en mode de communication confidentielle. Enregistrement/Réglages 10 C250 10-47 Mot de passe de boîte Mot de passe permettant de consulter un document stocké dans la boîte confidentielle. ! Détails Pour plus d'informations sur le mot de passe de boîte, voir "Manuel d'utilisation - Opérations Boîte". Principe de la communication confidentielle En mode de communication confidentielle, chaque fax à un rôle spécifique à remplir. Station expéditrice Spécifie une boîte utilisateur confidentielle et émet. Station réceptrice Ouvre la boîte utilisateur confidentielle pour recevoir le document. Un numéro de boîte et un mot de passe de communication initient la transmission d'un document fax. Le document fax reçu contient la boîte utilisateur confidentielle spécifiée. Imprime ou supprime le document contenu dans la boîte utilisateur confidentielle. 10 Enregistrement/Réglages 10-48 C250 10.7 Réglage du bulletin (tableau électronique) Cette machine gère l'émission / réception en relève d'un bulletin (tableau électronique) utilisant la fonction F-code. Ces opérations supposent le réglage de la boîte utilisateur bulletin. ! Détail Pour plus d'informations sur l'enregistrement des boîtes bulletin, voir “Manuel d'utilisation – Opérations Boîte”. No. boîte utilisateur De 1 à 999999999. Nom de la boîte Le nom peut comporter 20 caractères maximum. Mot de passe (d'accès) Mot de passe alphanumérique de 8 caractères maximum. ! Détails Les documents enregistrés dans la boîte peuvent être imprimés à l'aide du mot de passe défini au moment de l'enregistrement des boîtes bulletin. Principe de l'émission/réception en relève d'un bulletin ! Détail Ces informations doivent être fournies au télécopieur central qui recevra les informations par relève du bulletin. Pour plus d'informations sur le bulletin (tableau électronique), voir page 9-9. Station expéditrice Envoie les informations en relevant un bulletin. Station réceptrice Reçoit le document en relevant le bulletin (tableau électronique). Le document à transmettre en relève doit se trouver dans le tableau électronique. Le numéro de la boîte doit être fourni au récepteur en relève. Enregistre un bulletin Enregistrement/Réglages 10 C250 10-49 10.8 Réglage de la boîte utilisateur réception mémoire Si [Réception mémoire] est réglé sur [ON] dans l'écran Utilitaires, tout document reçu est enregistré dans la boîte réception mémoire. ! Détail Pour connaître la méthode d'impression de la boîte utilisateur réception mémoire, voir “Réception mémoire” à la page 8-6 10 Enregistrement/Réglages 10-50 C250 11 Mode Utilitaire Mode Utilitaire 11 C250 11-3 11 Mode Utilitaire 11.1 Écran mode Utilitaire Un responsable du mode Utilitaire doit être désigné. Cette personne, qui doit de préférence être unique, sera responsable de la gestion de la machine. La section suivante décrit les procédures d'accès au mode Utilitaire et de sortie de celui-ci, ainsi que le réglage des fonctions de fax. 11.1.1 Accès à l'écran Réglage Utilisateur Accès à l'écran Réglage Utilisateur 1 Appuyez sur [Fax], puis sur [Utilitaire/Compteur] sur le tableau de commande. 2 Appuyez sur [Réglage Utilisateur]. 11 Mode Utilitaire 11-4 C250 11.1.2 Quitter l'écran Réglage Utilisateur Quitter l'écran Réglage Utilisateur % Appuyez sur [Quitt.] dans la zone secondaire. Mode Utilitaire 11 C250 11-5 11.1.3 Accès à l'écran Réglage Administrateur Accès à l'écran Réglage Administrateur 1 Appuyez sur [Fax], puis sur [Utilitaire/Compteur] sur le tableau de commande. 2 Appuyez sur [Réglage Administrateur]. 3 Saisissez le mot de passe et appuyez sur [OK]. ! Détail Le mot de passe de l'administrateur peut être modifié dans [Réglage Sécurité]. L'administrateur a la responsabilité de la gestion du mot de passe. 11 Mode Utilitaire 11-6 C250 11.1.4 Quitter l'écran Réglage Administrateur Quitter l'écran Réglage Administrateur % Appuyez sur [Quitt.] dans la zone secondaire. Mode Utilitaire 11 C250 11-7 11.2 Liste du mode Utilitaire fax Le mode Utilitaire fax inclut les options présentées ci-dessous. * Indique le réglage par défaut défini en usine. 11.2.1 Écran FAX - réglage par défaut Réglage Utilisateur >> Réglage Affichage >> Écran FAX Réglage par défaut Règle les conditions initiales de l'écran Fax. (page 11-14) 11.2.2 Écran Fax actif Réglage Utilisateur >> Réglage Affichage >> Écran Fax actif Règle l'affichage ou non du message en cours de transmission. (page 11-19) 11.2.3 Réglage Initial Réglage Utilisateur >> Réglage Initial Définit les valeurs par défaut de la fonction Fax. (page 11-17) Option Description Valeur disponible Onglet par défaut Définit la valeur par défaut de la colonne destination dans l'écran Fax. Programme* / Groupe / Carnet d'adresses / Saisie directe Programme par défaut Définit le programme par défaut. Temporaire 1-touche / PAGE1* - PAGE27 Carnet d'adresses Index par défaut Définit le carnet d'adresses par défaut. Comm* / ABC - etc Affichage symbole type d'adresse Règle l'affichage ou non du symbole du type d'adresse. ON* / OFF Nombre caractères par nom d'adresse Définit le nombre de caractères du nom de l'adresse à afficher. 14 caract.* / 24 caract. Option Description Valeur disponible Affichage émission Règle l'affichage ou non du message en [Émission]. ON / OFF* Affichage réception Règle l'affichage ou non du message en [Réception]. ON / OFF* Option Description Valeur disponible Fax [Réglage actuel] : Avant le passage au mode Utilitaire, toutes les options définies sur le tableau de commande sont enregistrées en tant que valeurs par défaut de la fonction fax. [Réglage usine] : Les valeurs définies en usine sont enregistrées en tant que valeurs par défaut de la fonction fax. Réglage actuel* / Réglage usine 11 Mode Utilitaire 11-8 C250 11.2.4 Passage économie énergie (Fax) Réglage Administrateur >> Réglage Système >> Économie d'énergie >> Passage économie énergie (Fax) Règle le mode économie d'énergie (Fax). (page 11-22) 11.2.5 Système prioritaire (Réglages sortie Imprimante/Fax) Réglage Administrateur >> Réglage Système >> Réglage Sortie >> Système prioritaire Définit la méthode d'impression du document reçu. (page 11-25) 11.2.6 Information en-tête Réglage Administrateur >> Réglage Fax >> Information en-tête Enregistre le nom de l'expéditeur et l'ID du fax. (page 11-28) Option Description Valeur disponible Passage économie énergie (Fax) Si [Immédiatement] est sélectionné et que la machine est en mode économie d'énergie au moment de l'arrivée d'un signal entrant, la machine repasse sous ce mode à la fin de la réception. Normal* / Immédiatement Option Description Valeur disponible Fax Définit la méthode d'impression du document reçu. Impression par lots* / Impression par page Option Description Valeur disponible Nom expéditeur Le nom enregistré est imprimé en en-tête sur le document reçu par le correspondant. 30 caractères et signes maximum. No Fax Le numéro (identification) du fax enregistré est imprimé en en-tête sur le document reçu par le correspondant. Le numéro de fax de la machine est entré dans ce champ. 20 caractères maximum (0 à 9, +, espace, *, #). Mode Utilitaire 11 C250 11-9 11.2.7 Position en-tête / pied de page Réglage Administrateur >> Réglage Fax >> Position en-tête/pied de page Définit la méthode de spécification des informations de l'expéditeur et du récepteur. (page 11-31) 11.2.8 Réglage Paramètres ligne Réglage Administrateur >> Réglage Fax >> Réglage Paramètres ligne Définit les options d'émission et de réception. (page 11-34) Option Description Valeur disponible Position en-tête *1 Définit la position d'impression des informations expéditeur. Intérieur corps texte / Hors corps du texte* / OFF Position pied de page Définit la position d'impression de l'heure et du numéro de réception sur le document reçu. Intérieur corps texte / Hors corps du texte / OFF* *1: Les affichages diffèrent d'un pays à un autre. Option Description Valeur disponible Méthode de numérotation *1 Définit la méthode de numérotation. PB* / 10 ips Mode réception [Récept. auto] définit la réception automatique. [Réception manuelle] définit la réception dans le cas d'un lot d'appels réalisés avec un téléphone externe raccordé ou de l'utilisation de la fonction de réception distante. Réception auto* / Réception manuelle Nbre de sonneries sur appel entrant Règle le nombre de sonnerie en réception. Règle le nombre de tonalités de retour d'appel entre l'arrivée d'un message et le début de la réception. 0 à 15 (2 fois*) Nbre de rappels *2 Définit le nombre de rappels lorsque la ligne du correspondant est occupée. 0 à 15 (3 fois*) Délai entre rappels Règle l'intervalle de temps entre deux rappels. 1 à 15 (3 min.*) Suivi audio ligne Définir sur ON pour entendre le son sur la ligne via le haut-parleur pendant l'émission. ON / OFF* Contrôle volume sonore Règle le volume sonore du haut-parleur. 0-31 (16*) *1 : Les affichages diffèrent d'un pays à un autre. *2 : Les options de ligne diffèrent d'un pays à un autre. 11 Mode Utilitaire 11-10 C250 11.2.9 Réglage Émission/Réception Réglage Administrateur >> Réglage Fax >> Réglage Émis/Récep Définit la méthode d'impression en mode émission/réception. (page 11-37) Option Description Valeur disponible Impression R/V pour réception Réglé sur ON (actif), l'original reçu est imprimé recto verso. OFF* / ON Papier prioritaire (pouces) sur A4 *1 Réglé sur ON (actif) la priorité est donnée au papier au format en pouces. OFF* / ON Sélection papier d'impression Si la priorité du format est réglée : L'impression est effectuée sur le format prioritaire. Dans le cas contraire, l'impression est effectuée dans le format de papier le plus proche. Si le format est fixe : L'impression est effectuée uniquement dans ce format. Sélec auto* / Format fixe / Format prioritaire Format papier d'impression *1 *2 Définit le format de papier d'impression du document reçu. La valeur par défaut dépend du réglage de [Papier prioritaire (pouces) sur A4]. A3 / B4 / A4* / 8 1/2 × 11 / 8 1/2 × 14 / 11 × 17 Erreur saisie no. boîte Définit l'action en cas de saisie d'un numéro de boîte non enregistré. La sélection de [Création auto boîte] crée la boîte dont le numéro est saisi. Impre.* / Afficher message d'erreur / Création auto boîte Sélection magasin impression réception *2 Définit le magasin de papier à utiliser pour imprimer le document reçu. Auto* / Mag 1 / Mag 2 / Mag 3 / Mag 4 Réduction mini impres. réception*4 Règle la réduction de l'original reçu. 87-96* / × 1.0 Imprimer page de séparation Définit le mode d'émission par défaut. OFF* / ON Archiver après appel en relève Définit la suppression ou non du document après l'émission en relève. Supprimer* / Sauvegarder *1 Les affichages diffèrent d'un pays à un autre. *2 : Pour activer le réglage de [Format papier d'impression], réglez [Sélection magasin impression réception] sur [Auto]. *3 : Selon l'option installée, le type de magasin peut être différent. *4 : Si [Réduction mini impres. réception] est réglé sur [x1.0], [Sélection papier d'impression] et [Sélection magasin impression réception] sont réglés sur [Auto]. [Imprimer page de séparation] est réglé sur [OFF]. Mode Utilitaire 11 C250 11-11 11.2.10Réglage fonction Réglage Administrateur >> Réglage Fax >> Réglage fonction Active/Désactive (ON/OFF) les fonctions d'émission/réception. (page 11-40) Option Description Valeur disponible Régl. fonct ON/OFF Fonction d’émission F-code Pour plus d'informations, voir “Activer/ Désactiver (ON/OFF) les fonctions d'émission/réception.” à la page 11-40. ON* / OFF Réception mémoire Cette fonction permet de recevoir les documents et de les mémoriser en vue d'une impression ultérieure. ON / OFF* RX réseau fermé La réception en réseau fermé permet de ne recevoir les données entrantes que si le mot de passe de l'expéditeur est valide. ON / OFF* Définir un mot de passe de 4 chiffres. Régl. transfert TX Cette fonction permet de transférer les données reçues vers une station déterminée à l'avance. OFF* / Transfert et Impres. / Transf. + Imp. si erreur Dest. de transfert Vérif. mot de passe RX confidentiel Vous pouvez confirmer les numéros d'accès confidentiels définis. - Réglage RX fax La fonction RX PC-fax permet d'enregistrer les fichiers de fax reçus dans des boîtes sur le disque dur. OFF* / ON Boîte fixe / Boîte spécifiée Paramètre boîte utilisateur TSI Cette fonction permet d'allouer les originaux reçus selon leurs informations TSI. ON / OFF* 11 Mode Utilitaire 11-12 C250 11.2.11Définir CN PBX Réglage Administrateur >> Réglage Fax >> Définir CN PBX Définit la méthode de connexion de la ligne PBX. (page 11-65) Option Description Valeur disponible Définir CN PBX Sélectionner ON si le FK-502 est raccordé à une ligne PBX. Si le mode CN PBX est réglé sur ON, ce paramètre détermine le code d'accès à la ligne extérieure, c'est à dire le préfixe lié au numéro de téléphone et composé avec celui-ci si l'option de ligne extérieure est sélectionnée avec un numéro abrégé ou un programme. ON / OFF* Si réglé sur ON, numéro d'accès à la ligne extérieure. Mode Utilitaire 11 C250 11-13 11.2.12Réglage Rapports Réglage Administrateur >> Réglage Fax >> Réglage Rapports Définit la méthode d'impression d'un rapport. (page 11-67) 11.2.13Liste Paramètres tâche Réglage Administrateur >> Réglage Fax >> Liste Paramètres tâche ! Détail Pour plus d'informations, voir page 12-45. Option Description Valeur disponible Rapport d'activité Détermine l'impression ou non du rapport et l'intervalle/la plage de cette impression. OFF / Quotidien / Toutes les 100 com.* / 100/jour Rapport émission ON / Sur erreur seulement* / OFF Rapport émission séquentiel ON* / OFF Rapport émission programmée ON* / OFF Rapport réception confidentielle ON* / OFF Rapport émission bulletin ON* / OFF Magasin papier pour rapport *1 Spécifie le magasin utilisé pour l'impression d'un rapport. Magasin 1 / Magasin 2* / Magasin 3 / Magasin 4 / Introduct. manuelle Vérif. rapport résultat émission Détermine l'affichage ou non de l'écran de sélection du rapport de résultat de l'émission. Si vous sélectionnez ON, cet écran s'affiche après chaque émission. OFF* / ON *1 : Selon l'option installée, le type de magasin peut être différent. * : Indique le réglage par défaut défini en usine. 11 Mode Utilitaire 11-14 C250 11.3 Écran Fax réglage par défaut Définit les conditions initiales de l'écran Fax. * Indique le réglage par défaut défini en usine. Option Description Valeur disponible Onglet par défaut Définit la valeur par défaut de la colonne destination dans l'écran Fax. Programme* / Groupe / Carnet d'adresses / Saisie directe Programme par défaut Définit le programme par défaut. Temporaire 1-touche / PAGE1* - PAGE27 Carnet d'adresses Index par défaut Définit le carnet d'adresses par défaut. Comm* / ABC - etc Affichage symbole type d'adresse Définit l'affichage ou non du symbole du type d'adresse. ON* / OFF Nombre caractères par nom d'adresse Définit le nombre de caractères du nom de l'adresse à afficher. 14 caract.* / 24 caract. Mode Utilitaire 11 C250 11-15 Écran Fax réglage par défaut 1 Ouvrez l'écran Réglage Utilisateur (voir “Accès à l'écran Réglage Utilisateur” à la page 11-3). 2 Appuyez sur [Réglage Affichage]. – Certaines options de réglages optionnels peuvent ne pas être indiquées. – En mode Utilitaire, vous pouvez également taper sur le clavier le numéro de l'option pour la sélectionner. Pour l'option [Réglage Affichage], tapez “2” sur le clavier. 3 Appuyez sur [Écran fax - Réglage par défaut]. 11 Mode Utilitaire 11-16 C250 4 Sélectionnez l'option à régler. – Si vous voulez annuler le réglage, appuyez sur [Quitt.] dans la zone secondaire. 5 Sélectionnez la valeur voulue de l'option. 6 Appuyez sur [Fermer]. – La valeur de l'option est modifiée. 7 Appuyez sur [Quitt.] dans la zone secondaire. Mode Utilitaire 11 C250 11-17 11.4 Réglage Initial Définit la valeur par défaut de la fonction Fax. Vous pouvez régler la fonction fax sélectionnée lorsque la machine est sous tension ou en appuyant sur [Réinitialiser]. Affichez l'écran Fax et appuyez sur [Utilitaire/Compteur]. * Indique le réglage par défaut défini en usine. Réglage Initial 1 Ouvrez l'écran Réglage Utilisateur (voir “Accès à l'écran Réglage Utilisateur” à la page 11-3). 2 Appuyez sur [Réglage Initial]. – Certaines options de réglages optionnels peuvent ne pas être indiquées. – En mode Utilitaire, vous pouvez également taper sur le clavier le numéro de l'option pour la sélectionner. Pour l'option [Réglage Initial], tapez “3” sur le clavier. Option Description Valeur disponible Fax [Réglage actuel]: Avant le passage au mode Utilitaire, toutes les options définies sur le tableau de commande sont enregistrées en tant que valeurs par défaut de la fonction fax. [Réglage usine]: Les valeurs définies en usine sont enregistrées en tant que valeurs par défaut de la fonction fax. Réglage actuel* / Réglage usine 11 Mode Utilitaire 11-18 C250 3 Appuyez sur [Réglage usine], puis sur [OK]. – Si vous voulez annuler un réglage, appuyez sur [Annul.] 4 Appuyez sur [Fermer]. – La valeur de l'option est modifiée. 5 Appuyez sur [Quitt.] dans la zone secondaire. Mode Utilitaire 11 C250 11-19 11.5 Écran Fax actif Définit l'affichage ou non du message en cours de transmission. * Indique le réglage par défaut défini en usine. Écran Fax actif 1 Ouvrez l'écran Réglage Utilisateur (voir “Accès à l'écran Réglage Utilisateur” à la page 11-3). 2 Appuyez sur [Réglage Affichage]. – Certaines options de réglages optionnels peuvent ne pas être indiquées. – En mode Utilitaire, vous pouvez également taper sur le clavier le numéro de l'option pour la sélectionner. Pour l'option [Réglage Affichage], tapez “2” sur le clavier. Option Description Valeur disponible Affichage émission Définit l'affichage ou non du message en [Émission]. ON / OFF* Affichage réception Définit l'affichage ou non du message en [Réception]. ON / OFF* 11 Mode Utilitaire 11-20 C250 3 Appuyez sur [Écran Fax actif]. 4 Sélectionnez [Affichage émission] ou [Affichage réception]. – Si vous voulez annuler le réglage, appuyez sur [Quitt.] dans la zone secondaire. 5 Sélectionnez la valeur voulue de l'option Mode Utilitaire 11 C250 11-21 6 Appuyez sur [Fermer]. – La valeur de l'option est modifiée. 7 Appuyez sur [Quitt.] dans la zone secondaire. 11 Mode Utilitaire 11-22 C250 11.6 Passage économie énergie (Fax) Passage économie énergie (Fax) * Indique le réglage par défaut défini en usine. Passage économie énergie (Fax) 1 Ouvrez l'écran Réglage Administrateur (voir “Accès à l'écran Réglage Administrateur” à la page 11-5). 2 Appuyez sur [Réglage Système]. – Certaines options de réglages optionnels peuvent ne pas être indiquées. – En mode Utilitaire, vous pouvez également taper sur le clavier le numéro de l'option pour la sélectionner. Pour l'option [Réglage Système], tapez “1” sur le clavier. Option Description Valeur disponible Passage économie énergie (Fax) Si [Immédiatement] est sélectionné et que la machine est en mode économie d'énergie au moment de l'arrivée d'un signal entrant, la machine repasse sous ce mode à la fin de la réception. Normal* / Immédiatement Mode Utilitaire 11 C250 11-23 3 Appuyez sur [Économie d'énergie]. 4 Appuyez sur [Passage économie énergie (Fax)]. 5 Sélectionnez la valeur voulue de l'option. 11 Mode Utilitaire 11-24 C250 6 Appuyez sur [Fermer]. – La valeur de l'option est modifiée. 7 Appuyez sur [Quitt.] dans la zone secondaire. Mode Utilitaire 11 C250 11-25 11.7 Système prioritaire (Réglages sortie Imprimante/Fax) Définit la méthode d'impression du document reçu. * Indique le réglage par défaut défini en usine. Système prioritaire (Réglages sortie Imprimante/Fax) 1 Ouvrez l'écran Réglage Administrateur (voir “Accès à l'écran Réglage Administrateur” à la page 11-5). 2 Appuyez sur [Réglage Système]. – Certaines options de réglages optionnels peuvent ne pas être indiquées. – En mode Utilitaire, vous pouvez également taper sur le clavier le numéro de l'option pour la sélectionner. Pour l'option [Réglage Système], tapez “1” sur le clavier. Option Description Valeur disponible Fax Définit la méthode d'impression du document reçu. Impression par lots* / Impression par page 11 Mode Utilitaire 11-26 C250 3 Appuyez sur [Réglage sortie]. 4 Appuyez sur [Système prioritaire]. Mode Utilitaire 11 C250 11-27 5 Sélectionnez la méthode d'impression. – Impression par lots : L'impression commence une fois que tous les documents ont été reçus. – Impression par page : L'impression est réalisée dès la réception d'une page de document. – Si l'option [Impression R/V pour réception] est réglée sur [ON], l'impression commence dès que les données des deux pages ont été reçues. 6 Appuyez sur [Fermer]. – La valeur de l'option est modifiée. 7 Appuyez sur [Quitt.] dans la zone secondaire. 11 Mode Utilitaire 11-28 C250 11.8 Information en-tête Enregistre le nom de l'expéditeur et l'ID du fax. Information en-tête 1 Ouvrez l'écran Réglage Administrateur (voir “Accès à l'écran Réglage Administrateur” à la page 11-5). 2 Appuyez sur [Réglage Fax]. – Certaines options de réglages optionnels peuvent ne pas être indiquées. – En mode Utilitaire, vous pouvez également taper sur le clavier le numéro de l'option pour la sélectionner. Pour l'option [Réglage Fax], tapez “8” sur le clavier. Option Description Valeur disponible Nom expéditeur Le nom enregistré est imprimé en en-tête sur le document reçu par le correspondant. 30 caractères et signes maximum. No Fax Le numéro (identification) du fax enregistré est imprimé en en-tête sur le document reçu par le correspondant. Le numéro de fax de la machine est entré dans ce champ. 20 caractères maximum (0 à 9, +, espace, *, #). Mode Utilitaire 11 C250 11-29 3 Appuyez sur [Information en-tête]. 4 Appuyez sur [Nom expéditeur]. L'écran de saisie du nom s'affiche. 5 Saisissez le nom de l'expéditeur et appuyez sur [OK]. – Pour plus d'informations, voir “Saisie de texte” à la page 13-4. 6 Tapez le numéro de fax de l'expéditeur à l’aide du clavier et des touches +, espace, ou . – + : Représente le signe “+”. – Espace : Représente un espace. – Déplace le curseur vers la gauche. – Déplace le curseur vers la droite. 11 Mode Utilitaire 11-30 C250 – Suppri. : Les caractères sont supprimés un par un à partir de la position du curseur. Si celui-ci se trouve à l'extrême droite de l'entrée, les caractères précédent le curseur sont supprimés. – Si vous voulez annuler le réglage, appuyez sur [Annul.] – Pour corriger une entrée, appuyez sur [C] (clear) sur le tableau de commande. 7 Appuyez sur [OK], puis sur [Fermer]. Le nom et le numéro de fax de l'expéditeur saisis sont enregistrés. 8 Appuyez sur [Quitt.] dans la zone secondaire. Mode Utilitaire 11 C250 11-31 11.9 Position en-tête/pied de page Vous pouvez activer/désactiver (ON/OFF) cette fonction d'impression, qui identifie la station d'origine et l'heure de la réception. Si vous sélectionnez ON, vous pouvez également choisir d'imprimer ces informations. ! Détail Les informations identifiant la station d'origine, qui peuvent être imprimées sur la station réceptrice, sont l'ID et le nom du fax. Pour plus d'informations, voir “Informations sur l'expéditeur” à la page 3-53. Option Description Valeur disponible Position en-tête *1 Définit la position d'impression des informations expéditeur. Intérieur corps texte : Les informations expéditeurs seront imprimées dans la zone correspondant au document. Hors corps du texte : Les informations expéditeurs seront imprimées en dehors de la zone correspondant au document. OFF : Les informations expéditeur ne seront pas imprimées. Position pied de page Définit la position d'impression de l'heure et du numéro de réception sur le document reçu. Intérieur corps texte : Les informations d'heure/numéro seront imprimées dans la zone correspondant au document. Hors corps du texte : Les informations d'heure/numéro seront imprimées au bas des pages reproduites. OFF* : Les informations d'heure/numéro ne seront pas imprimées. * : Indique le réglage par défaut défini en usine. *1 : Les affichages diffèrent d'un pays à un autre. 11 Mode Utilitaire 11-32 C250 Position en-tête/pied de page 1 Ouvrez l'écran Réglage Administrateur (voir “Accès à l'écran Réglage Administrateur” à la page 11-5). 2 Appuyez sur [Réglage Fax]. – Certaines options de réglages optionnels peuvent ne pas être indiquées. – En mode Utilitaire, vous pouvez également taper sur le clavier le numéro de l'option pour la sélectionner. Pour l'option [Réglage Fax], tapez “8” sur le clavier. 3 Appuyez sur [Position en-tête / pied de page]. Mode Utilitaire 11 C250 11-33 4 Sélectionnez l'option à régler. – Si vous voulez annuler le réglage, appuyez sur [Quitt.] dans la zone secondaire. 5 Sélectionnez la valeur voulue de l'option. 6 Appuyez sur [Fermer]. La valeur de l'option est modifiée. 7 Appuyez sur [Quitt.] dans la zone secondaire. 11 Mode Utilitaire 11-34 C250 11.10 Réglage Paramètres ligne Les options de ligne disponibles sont les suivantes. Option Description Valeur disponible Méthode de numérotation *1 Définit la méthode de numérotation. PB* / 10 ips Mode réception [Récept. auto] définit la réception automatique. [Réception manuelle] définit la réception dans le cas d'un lot d'appels réalisés avec un téléphone externe connecté ou de l'utilisation de la fonction de réception distante. Réception auto* / Réception manuelle Nbre de sonneries sur appel entrant Définit le nombre de sonnerie en réception. Définit le nombre de tonalités de retour d'appel entre l'arrivée d'un message et le début de la réception. 0 à 15 (2 fois*) Nbre de rappels *2 Définit le nombre de rappels lorsque la ligne du correspondant est occupée. 0 à 15 (3 fois*) Délai entre rappels Définit l'intervalle de temps entre deux rappels. 1 à 15 (3 min.*) Suivi audio ligne Définir sur ON pour entendre le son sur la ligne via le haut-parleur pendant l'émission. ON / OFF* Contrôle volume sonore Règle le volume sonore du haut-parleur. 0-31 (16*) *1 : Les affichages diffèrent d'un pays à un autre. *2 : Les options de ligne diffèrent d'un pays à un autre. * : Indique le réglage par défaut défini en usine. Mode Utilitaire 11 C250 11-35 Réglage Paramètres ligne 1 Ouvrez l'écran Réglage Administrateur (voir “Accès à l'écran Réglage Administrateur” à la page 11-5). 2 Appuyez sur [Réglage Fax]. – Certaines options de réglages optionnels peuvent ne pas être indiquées. – En mode Utilitaire, vous pouvez également taper sur le clavier le numéro de l'option pour la sélectionner. Pour l'option [Réglage Fax], tapez “8” sur le clavier. 3 Appuyez sur [Réglage paramètres ligne]. 11 Mode Utilitaire 11-36 C250 4 Sélectionnez l'option à régler. – Appuyez sur ou pour afficher l'écran suivant ou précédent. – Si vous voulez annuler le réglage, appuyez sur [Quitt.] dans la zone secondaire. 5 Sélectionnez la valeur voulue de l'option. – Pour modifier [Contrôle volume sonore], appuyez sur [Contrôle volume sonore], puis sur [Plus faible] ou [Plus fort] pour définir le niveau. Appuyez ensuite sur [OK]. 6 Appuyez sur [Fermer]. La valeur de l'option est modifiée. 7 Appuyez sur [Quitt.] dans la zone secondaire. Mode Utilitaire 11 C250 11-37 11.11 Réglage Émission/Réception Les options d'émission et de réception sont présentées ci-dessous. Option Description Valeur disponible Impression R/V pour réception Réglé sur ON (actif), l'original reçu est imprimé recto verso. Non indiqué si [Imprimer page de séparation] est réglé sur ON. OFF* / ON Papier prioritaire (pouces) sur A4 *1 Réglé sur ON (actif) la priorité est donnée au papier au format en pouces. OFF* / ON Sélection papier d'impression Si la priorité du format est réglée : L'impression est effectuée sur le format prioritaire. Dans le cas contraire, l'impression est effectuée sur le format de papier le plus proche. Si le format est fixe : L'impression est effectuée uniquement dans ce format. Sélec auto* / Format fixe / Format prioritaire Format papier d'impression *1 *2 Définit le format de papier d'impression du document reçu. La valeur par défaut dépend du réglage de [Papier prioritaire (pouces) sur A4]. A3 / B4 / A4* / 8 1/2 × 11 / 8 1/2 × 14 / 11 × 17 Erreur saisie no. boîte Définit l'action en cas de saisie d'un numéro de boîte non enregistré. La sélection de [Création auto boîte] crée la boîte dont le numéro est saisi. Impre.* / Afficher message d'erreur / Création auto boîte Sélection magasin impression réception *3 Définit le magasin de papier à utiliser pour imprimer le document reçu. Auto* / Mag 1 / Mag 2 / Mag 3 / Mag 4 Réduction min. pour impression réception*4 Règle l'agrandissement de l'original reçu. 87-96* / × 1.0 Imprimer page de séparation Définit le mode d'émission par défaut. Non indiqué si Impression R/V pour réception est réglée sur ON. OFF* / ON Archiver après appel en relève Définit la suppression ou non du document après l'émission en relève. Supprimer* / Sauvegarder * : Indique le réglage par défaut défini en usine. *1 Les affichages diffèrent d'un pays à un autre. *2 Pour activer le réglage de [Format papier d'impression], réglez [Sélection magasin impression réception] sur [Auto]. *3 : Selon l'option installée, le type de magasin peut être différent. *4 Si [Réduction mini impres. réception] est réglé sur [x1.0], [Sélection papier d'impression] et [Sélection magasin impression réception] sont réglés sur [Auto]. [Imprimer page de séparation] est réglé sur [OFF]. 11 Mode Utilitaire 11-38 C250 Réglage Émission/Réception 1 Ouvrez l'écran Réglage Administrateur (voir “Accès à l'écran Réglage Administrateur” à la page 11-5). 2 Appuyez sur [Réglage Fax]. – Certaines options de réglages optionnels peuvent ne pas être indiquées. – En mode Utilitaire, vous pouvez également taper sur le clavier le numéro de l'option pour la sélectionner. Pour l'option [Réglage Fax], tapez “8” sur le clavier. 3 Appuyez sur [Réglage Émis/Récep]. Mode Utilitaire 11 C250 11-39 4 Sélectionnez l'option à régler. – Appuyez sur ou pour afficher l'écran suivant ou précédent. – Si vous voulez annuler le réglage, appuyez sur [Quitt.] dans la zone secondaire. 5 Sélectionnez la valeur voulue de l'option. 6 Appuyez sur [Fermer]. La valeur de l'option est modifiée. 7 Appuyez sur [Quitt.] dans la zone secondaire. 11 Mode Utilitaire 11-40 C250 11.12 Réglage fonction Vous pouvez activer/désactiver chacune des fonctions d'émission et de réception individuellement. 11.12.1Réglage fonction ON/OFF Sélectionnez ON ou OFF pour chaque fonction. * Indique le réglage par défaut défini en usine. Activer/Désactiver (ON/OFF) les fonctions d'émission/réception. 1 Ouvrez l'écran Réglage Administrateur (voir “Quitter l'écran Réglage Administrateur” à la page 11-6). 2 Appuyez sur [Réglage Fax]. – Certaines options de réglages optionnels peuvent ne pas être indiquées. – En mode Utilitaire, vous pouvez également taper sur le clavier le numéro de l'option pour la sélectionner. Pour l'option [Réglage Fax], tapez “8” sur le clavier. Option Description Valeur disponible Régl. fonct ON/OFF Fonction d’émission F-code La sélection de “OFF” désactive à la fois la demande d'émission en relais et l'émission via plusieurs stations de relais. Pour plus d'informations sur les communications en relais, voir “Requête d'émission en relais (Émission F-code)” à la page 7-32. ON* / OFF Mode Utilitaire 11 C250 11-41 3 Appuyez sur [Réglage Fonction]. 4 Appuyez sur [Régl. fonct ON/OFF]. – Si [Réception mémoire], [Réglage transfert TX], [Réglage RX fax] ou [Paramètre boîte utilisateur TSI] est réglé sur ON, les autres éléments ne sont pas affichés. 5 Sélectionnez l'option à régler. 11 Mode Utilitaire 11-42 C250 – Si vous voulez annuler le réglage, appuyez sur [Quitt.] dans la zone secondaire. 6 Sélectionnez la valeur voulue de l'option. 7 Appuyez sur [Fermer]. – La valeur de l'option est modifiée. 8 Appuyez sur [Quitt.] dans la zone secondaire. Mode Utilitaire 11 C250 11-43 11.12.2Réception mémoire obligatoire Vous pouvez activer ou désactiver la réception mémoire inconditionnelle, c'est-à-dire la mémorisation des documents reçus en vue de leur impression ultérieure. Si vous sélectionnez ON, définissez le mot de passe d'impression de 8 caractères maximum. * Indique le réglage par défaut défini en usine. ! Détail Si la Réception mémoire est réglée sur ON, le Réglage RX fax, le Paramètre boîte utilisateur TSI et le Réglage transfert TX ne sont pas disponibles. Pour imprimer un document reçu en mode de réception mémoire, voir “Réception mémoire” à la page 8-6. Option Description Valeur disponible Réception mémoire obligatoire Cette fonction permet de recevoir les documents et de les mémoriser en vue d'une impression ultérieure. ON / OFF* Définissez un mot de passe de 8 caractères maximum. 11 Mode Utilitaire 11-44 C250 Réglage de la réception mémoire 1 Ouvrez l'écran Réglage Administrateur (voir “Quitter l'écran Réglage Administrateur” à la page 11-6). 2 Appuyez sur [Réglage Fax]. – Certaines options de réglages optionnels peuvent ne pas être indiquées. – En mode Utilitaire, vous pouvez également taper sur le clavier le numéro de l'option pour la sélectionner. Pour l'option [Réglage Fax], tapez “8” sur le clavier. 3 Appuyez sur [Réglage Fonction]. Mode Utilitaire 11 C250 11-45 4 Appuyez sur [Réception mémoire obligatoire]. 5 Appuyez sur [ON] et saisissez dans le champ [Mot passe] le mot de passe (8 caractères) requis pour imprimer le document reçu. – Le mot de passe peut contenir jusqu'à 8 caractères. – Appuyez sur [C] (clear) si vous voulez supprimer les données saisies. – Si vous voulez annuler le réglage, appuyez sur [Annul.] 6 Appuyez sur [OK], puis sur [Fermer]. La valeur de l'option est modifiée. 7 Appuyez sur [Quitt.] dans la zone secondaire. 11 Mode Utilitaire 11-46 C250 11.12.3RX réseau fermé Vous pouvez activer ou désactiver la fonction de réception en réseau fermé. Si vous activez cette fonction (ON), vous devez préciser le mot de passe de clôture du réseau, composé de 4 caractères. Avec la réception en réseau fermé, le FK-502 ne reçoit les données entrantes que si le mot de passe de l'expéditeur est valide. Le FK-502 vérifie si le mot de passe de l'expéditeur correspond à celui qui est défini sur la machine. Si les deux mots de passe diffèrent ou si l'expéditeur ne fournit pas de mot de passe, la machine génère une erreur de communication. * Indique le réglage par défaut défini en usine. Option Description Valeur disponible RX réseau fermé La réception en réseau fermé permet de ne recevoir les données entrantes que si le mot de passe de l'expéditeur est valide. ON / OFF* Le mot de passe peut contenir jusqu'à 4 caractères. Mode Utilitaire 11 C250 11-47 Réglage de la réception en réseau fermé 0 Conditions requises de la réception en réseau fermé Cette fonction n'est disponible que si la machine du correspondant est dotée de la fonction Transmission de mot de passe. 1 Ouvrez l'écran Réglage Administrateur (voir “Accès à l'écran Réglage Administrateur” à la page 11-5). 2 Appuyez sur [Réglage Fax]. – Certaines options de réglages optionnels peuvent ne pas être indiquées. – En mode Utilitaire, vous pouvez également taper sur le clavier le numéro de l'option pour la sélectionner. Pour l'option [Réglage Fax], tapez “8” sur le clavier. 3 Appuyez sur [Réglage Fonction]. 11 Mode Utilitaire 11-48 C250 4 Appuyez sur [RX Réseau fermé]. 5 Appuyez sur [ON] et saisissez dans le champ [Mot passe] le mot de passe requis pour imprimer le document reçu. – Le mot de passe peut contenir jusqu'à 4 caractères. – Appuyez sur [C] (clear) si vous voulez supprimer les données saisies. – Pour annuler le réglage, appuyez sur [Annul.]. 6 Appuyez sur [OK], puis sur [Fermer]. La valeur de l'option est modifiée. 7 Appuyez sur [Quitt.] dans la zone secondaire. Mode Utilitaire 11 C250 11-49 11.12.4Réglage Transfert TX Vous pouvez activer ou désactiver la fonction de transfert de fax. Si cette fonction est active, les données reçues sont transférées à une station déterminée à l'avance. ! Détail Si Régl. transfert TX est réglé sur [Transfert et Impres.] ou [Transf. + Imp. si erreur], les options Réception mémoire, Réglage RX Fax et Paramètre boîte utilisateur TSI ne sont pas disponibles. Option Description Valeur disponible Régl. transfert TX Cette fonction permet de transférer les données reçues vers une station déterminée à l'avance. OFF* / Transfert et Impres. / Transf. + Imp. si erreur 11 Mode Utilitaire 11-50 C250 Réglage du transfert de fax (Réglage transfert TX) 1 Ouvrez l'écran Réglage Administrateur (voir “Accès à l'écran Réglage Administrateur” à la page 11-5). 2 Appuyez sur [Réglage Fax]. – Certaines options de réglages optionnels peuvent ne pas être indiquées. – En mode Utilitaire, vous pouvez également taper sur le clavier le numéro de l'option pour la sélectionner. Pour l'option [Réglage Fax], tapez “8” sur le clavier. 3 Appuyez sur [Réglage Fonction]. Mode Utilitaire 11 C250 11-51 4 Appuyez sur [Régl. transfert TX]. 5 Sélectionnez [Transfert et Impress.] ou [Transf. + Imp. si Erreur]. – OFF Le document reçu n'est pas transféré. – Transfert et Impression Le document reçu est transféré après impression sur cette machine. – Transfert + Impression si Erreur Le document reçu est transféré. En cas d'échec du transfert, le document est imprimé sur cette machine. 11 Mode Utilitaire 11-52 C250 6 Saisissez dans le champ [Adresse transf.] le numéro de fax du destinataire du transfert. – Vous pouvez saisir jusqu'à 38 caractères dans le champ [Adresse transf.]. – Vous pouvez utiliser les préfixes [Tonalité], [Pause] et [-]. Voir “Sélection de la destination” à la page 3-21. – Vous pouvez appuyer sur [Carnet d'adresses] pour sélectionner l'[Adresse transf.] dans un [carnet d'adresses] enregistré. – Appuyez sur [C] (clear) si vous voulez supprimer les données saisies. – Si vous voulez annuler le réglage, appuyez sur [Annul.] 7 Appuyez sur [OK], puis sur [Fermer]. La valeur de l'option est modifiée et vous revenez à l'écran Utilitaire. 8 Appuyez sur [Quitt.] dans la zone secondaire. Mode Utilitaire 11 C250 11-53 11.12.5Vérification du mot de passe RX confidentiel Vous pouvez confirmer les numéros d'accès confidentiels définis. ! Détail Pour enregistrer les numéros d'accès confidentiels, voir “Réglage des boîtes confidentielles” à la page 10-46. Option Description Valeur disponible Vérif. mot de passe RX confidentiel Vous pouvez confirmer les numéros d'accès confidentiels définis. - 11 Mode Utilitaire 11-54 C250 Confirmation du mot de passe d'une boîte confidentielle 1 Ouvrez l'écran Réglage Administrateur (voir “Accès à l'écran Réglage Administrateur” à la page 11-5). 2 Appuyez sur [Réglage Fax]. – Certaines options de réglages optionnels peuvent ne pas être indiquées. – En mode Utilitaire, vous pouvez également taper sur le clavier le numéro de l'option pour la sélectionner. Pour l'option [Réglage Fax], tapez “8” sur le clavier. 3 Appuyez sur [Réglage Fonction]. Mode Utilitaire 11 C250 11-55 4 Appuyez sur [Vérif. mot de passe RX confidentiel]. 5 Sélectionnez la boîte confidentielle dont vous voulez confirmer le mot de passe. – Appuyez sur ou pour afficher l'écran suivant ou précédent. 6 Appuyez sur [Fermer]. 7 Appuyez sur [Quitt.] dans la zone secondaire. 11 Mode Utilitaire 11-56 C250 11.12.6Réglage RX fax Vous pouvez activer ou désactiver la fonction RX PC-Fax. Si cette fonction est réglée sur ON, indiquez la boîte d'enregistrement de la sortie. La fonction RX PC-fax permet d'enregistrer dans des boîtes sur le disque dur les fichiers contenant les fax reçus. Vous pouvez ensuite lire le contenu des boîtes sur les ordinateurs du réseau. * Indique le réglage par défaut défini en usine. Expéditeur Original Disque dur Option Description Valeur disponible Réglage RX fax La fonction RX PC-fax permet d'enregistrer les fichiers de fax reçus dans des boîtes sur le disque dur. ON / OFF* Sortie RX Le fichier de fax reçu est enregistré dans la Boîte utilisateur réception mémoire si Sortie RX est réglé sur Boîte fixe, et dans la boîte spécifiée par la fonction F-code (adresse secondaire) si Sortie RX est réglé sur Boîte spécifiée. Boîte fixe* / Boîte spécifiée Mode Utilitaire 11 C250 11-57 ! Détail Si Réglage RX fax est réglé sur ON, la Réception mémoire, le Paramètre boîte utilisateur TSI et le Réglage transfert TX ne sont pas disponibles. Les documents fax reçus sont sauvegardés au format TIFF dans la boîte fixe, la boîte spécifiée ou la boîte de réception (TSI). 11 Mode Utilitaire 11-58 C250 Réglage RX fax 1 Ouvrez l'écran Réglage Administrateur (voir “Accès à l'écran Réglage Administrateur” à la page 11-5). 2 Appuyez sur [Réglage Fax]. – Certaines options de réglages optionnels peuvent ne pas être indiquées. – En mode Utilitaire, vous pouvez également taper sur le clavier le numéro de l'option pour la sélectionner. Pour l'option [Réglage Fax], tapez “8” sur le clavier. 3 Appuyez sur [Réglage Fonction]. Mode Utilitaire 11 C250 11-59 4 Appuyez sur [Réglage RX Fax]. 5 Sélectionnez [ON] pour [Réglage RX Fax]. – Les affichages diffèrent d'un pays à un autre. – OFF : La fonction RX PC-fax n'est pas disponible. – ON : La fonction RX PC-fax est exécutée à réception d'un numéro de fax ou de PC-fax, et le document reçu est sauvegardé dans la boîte spécifiée. 6 Pour [Sortie RX], sélectionnez la boîte dans laquelle sera sauvegardé un document reçu via la fonction RX PC-fax. – Boîte fixe : un fichier reçu est stocké dans la boîte réception mémoire. – Boîte spécifiée : un fichier reçu est stocké dans la boîte stipulée par la fonction F-code (adresse secondaire). – Si vous voulez annuler le réglage, appuyez sur [Annul.]. 11 Mode Utilitaire 11-60 C250 – Pour plus d'informations sur le fonctionnement de la réception PC-fax, voir “Fonctionnement de la Réception PC-fax” à la page 2-21. 7 Appuyez sur [OK], puis sur [Fermer]. La valeur de l'option est modifiée et vous revenez à l'écran Utilitaire. Mode Utilitaire 11 C250 11-61 11.12.7Paramètre boîte utilisateur TSI Cette fonction permet d'allouer les documents reçus par le fax. Les fichiers d'originaux reçus sont sauvegardés dans les boîtes correspondant à l'ID fax (TSI) des expéditeurs. ! Détails L'original reçu avec une ID de fax non enregistrée est stocké dans la Réception mémoire. ! Détail Si Paramètre boîte utilisateur TSI est ON, la Réception mémoire, le Réglage transfert TX et le Réglage RX Fax ne sont pas disponibles. Expéditeur Original Disque dur Option Description Valeur disponible Paramètre boîte utilisateur TSI Cette fonction permet d'allouer les originaux reçus selon leurs informations TSI. ON / OFF* 11 Mode Utilitaire 11-62 C250 Allocation des originaux reçus à l'expéditeur du fax 1 Ouvrez l'écran Réglage Administrateur (voir “Accès à l'écran Réglage Administrateur” à la page 11-5). 2 Appuyez sur [Réglage Fax]. – Certaines options de réglages optionnels peuvent ne pas être indiquées. – En mode Utilitaire, vous pouvez également taper sur le clavier le numéro de l'option pour la sélectionner. Pour l'option [Réglage Fax], tapez “8” sur le clavier. 3 Appuyez sur [Réglage Fonction]. Mode Utilitaire 11 C250 11-63 4 Appuyez sur [Paramètre boîte utilisateur TSI]. 5 Appuyez sur [ON]. 6 Sélectionnez le numéro à enregistrer et appuyez sur [Modif.]. – Si vous voulez supprimer une distribution, sélectionnez-la et appuyez sur [Suppri.]. – Vous pouvez enregistrer 128 boîtes maximum. – Appuyez sur ou pour afficher l'écran suivant ou précédent. 11 Mode Utilitaire 11-64 C250 7 Utilisez le clavier numérique, [+], [ESPACE] ou pour saisir l'ID du fax dans le champ [Expéditeur (TSI)]. – + Insère le signe +. – Espace Insère un espace. – Déplace le curseur vers la gauche. – Déplace le curseur vers la droite. – Suppri. Les caractères sont supprimés un par un à partir de la position du curseur. Si celui-ci se trouve à l'extrême droite de l'entrée, les caractères précédent le curseur sont supprimés. – Lors de la transmission, [+] et [ESPACE] sont ignorés. 8 Appuyez sur [No. boîte ut] et tapez le numéro de la boîte d'enregistrement du document reçu. – Plage de numéros disponibles : 1 à 999999999. 9 Appuyez sur [OK], puis sur [Fermer]. Le Paramètre boîte utilisateur TSI est défini. 10 Appuyez sur [Quitt.]. L'écran de distribution des fax reçus s'affiche à nouveau. Mode Utilitaire 11 C250 11-65 11.13 Réglage CN PBX (Private Branch Exchange) Les options PBX disponibles sont décrites ci-dessous. * Indique le réglage par défaut défini en usine. Options du mode de connexion PBX (Private Branch Exchange) 1 Ouvrez l'écran Réglage Administrateur (voir “Accès à l'écran Réglage Administrateur” à la page 11-5). 2 Appuyez sur [Réglage Fax]. – Certaines options de réglages optionnels peuvent ne pas être indiquées. – En mode Utilitaire, vous pouvez également taper sur le clavier le numéro de l'option pour la sélectionner. Pour l'option [Réglage Fax], tapez “8” sur le clavier. Option Description Valeur disponible Définir mode PBX CN Sélectionner ON si le FK-502 est raccordé à une ligne PBX. ON / OFF* Ligne extérieure Si le mode PBX CN est réglé sur ON, ce paramètre détermine le code d'accès à la ligne extérieure, c'est à dire le préfixe lié au numéro de téléphone et composé avec celui-ci si l'option de ligne extérieure est sélectionnée avec un numéro abrégé ou un programme. 0-9999 11 Mode Utilitaire 11-66 C250 3 Appuyez sur [Définir CN PBX]. 4 Sélectionnez [ON] pour Définir mode PBX CN. 5 Saisissez au clavier le code de la ligne extérieure. – Appuyez sur [C] (clear) si vous voulez supprimer les données saisies. – Si vous voulez annuler le réglage, appuyez sur [Annul.] 6 Appuyez sur [OK], puis sur [Fermer]. La valeur de l'option est modifiée. 7 Appuyez sur [Quitt.] dans la zone secondaire. Mode Utilitaire 11 C250 11-67 11.14 Réglage Rapports Vous pouvez activer ou désactiver (ON/OFF) le Réglage rapports. Cette fonction imprime les rapports de communication à la direction, les rapports de résultats et spécifie les magasins d'entrée/sortie des rapports. Si cette fonction est activée (ON), la méthode d'impression peut également être sélectionnée. ! Détail Si “Vérif. rapport résultat émission” est actif (ON), le rapport d'émission est imprimé si OUI est sélectionné. Il n'est pas imprimé dans le cas contraire (NON). Option Description Valeur disponible Rapport d'activité Détermine l'impression ou non du rapport et l'intervalle/la plage de cette impression. OFF / Quotidien / Toutes les 100 com.* / 100/jour Rapport Émission ON / Sur erreur seulement* / OFF Rapport émission séquentiel ON* / OFF Rapport émission programmée ON* / OFF Rapport réception confidentielle ON* / OFF Rapport émission bulletin ON* / OFF Magasin papier pour rapport *1 *2 Spécifie le magasin utilisé pour l'impression d'un rapport. Magasin 1 / Magasin 2* / Magasin 3 / Magasin 4 / Introduct. manuelle Vérif. rapport résultat émission Détermine l'affichage ou non de l'écran de sélection du rapport de résultat de l'émission. Si vous sélectionnez ON, cet écran s'affiche après chaque émission. OFF* / ON * : Indique le réglage par défaut défini en usine. *1 : Selon l'option installée, le type de magasin peut être différent. *2 : Le Magasin 1 est le magasin par défaut, si aucune option de magasins n'est installée. 11 Mode Utilitaire 11-68 C250 Réglage des rapports 1 Ouvrez l'écran Réglage Administrateur (voir “Accès à l'écran Réglage Administrateur” à la page 11-5). 2 Appuyez sur [Réglage Fax]. – Certaines options de réglages optionnels peuvent ne pas être indiquées. – En mode Utilitaire, vous pouvez également taper sur le clavier le numéro de l'option pour la sélectionner. Pour l'option [Réglage Fax], tapez “8” sur le clavier. 3 Appuyez sur [Réglage Rapports]. Mode Utilitaire 11 C250 11-69 4 Sélectionnez le rapport à régler. – Appuyez sur ou pour afficher l'écran suivant ou précédent. – Si vous voulez annuler le réglage, appuyez sur [Quitt.] dans la zone secondaire. 5 Sélectionnez l'option voulue. 6 Appuyez sur [Fermer]. La valeur de l'option est modifiée. 7 Appuyez sur [Quitt.] dans la zone secondaire. 11 Mode Utilitaire 11-70 C250 12 Rapports et listes Rapports et listes 12 C250 12-3 12 Rapports et listes 12.1 Types de rapports et de listes Vous pouvez imprimer sur cette machine les types de rapports et de listes suivants : 12.1.1 Rapports Les rapports sont de trois types : impression automatique, méthode d'impression paramétrable, impression selon les besoins. Nom du rapport Description Rapport d'activité Ce rapport liste les 100 (maximum) dernières émissions et réceptions sur des pages distinctes (une pour les émissions, l'autre pour les réceptions). Selon les besoins, la liste des émissions, celle des réceptions, ou ces deux listes peuvent être imprimées. • L'impression du rapport d'activité est réglée dans le mode Utilitaire sur OFF*, Quotidien, Toutes les 100 com. ou 100/jour*. • Les rapports suivants peuvent être sélectionnés et imprimés via l'écran Fax. ([Liste tâches] - [onglet Émission fax] - [Historique tâches] - [Réglage comm.]) • Rapport d'activité, Rapport Émission, Rapport Réception Rapport Émission Le Rapport Émission est imprimé automatiquement. Le mode Utilitaire définit l'impression des rapports Émission sur Toujours si l'impression est active (ON) / Sur erreur seulement / OFF. Rapport d'émission (relève) Si le Rapport Émission est réglé sur ON ou Sur erreur seulement dans les réglages administrateur du mode Utilitaire, le résultat de l'émission en relève sont automatiquement imprimés. Rapport de relève Si le Rapport Émission est réglé sur ON ou Sur erreur seulement dans les réglages Administrateur du mode Utilitaire, le résultat de la réception en relève est automatiquement imprimé. Rapport de diffusion Si Rapport émission séquentielle est réglé sur ON dans Réglage Administrateur du mode Utilitaire, ce rapport est imprimé automatiquement à la fin de l'émission diffusée séquentielle. Rapport de relève séquentielle (réception) Si Rapport émission séquentielle est réglé sur ON dans Réglage Administrateur du mode Utilitaire, le résultat de la réception en relève de plusieurs destinations est automatiquement imprimé. Rapport de communication réservée Si Rapport Émission programmée est réglé sur ON dans Réglage Administrateur du mode Utilitaire, ce rapport est automatiquement imprimé lorsqu'une émission est réservée. Rapport d'émission réservée (relève) Si Rapport émission programmée est réglée sur ON dans Réglage Administrateur du mode Utilitaire, ce rapport est automatiquement imprimé lorsqu'une émission en relève est réservée. 12 Rapports et listes 12-4 C250 12.1.2 Listes Les listes sont imprimées selon les besoins. Rapport de diffusion réservée Si Rapport émission programmée est réglé sur ON dans Réglage Administrateur du mode Utilitaire, ce rapport est automatiquement imprimé lorsqu'une émission multiposte séquentielle est réservée. Rapport de réception réservée (relève) Si Rapport émission programmée est réglé sur ON dans Réglage Administrateur du mode Utilitaire, ce rapport est automatiquement imprimé lorsqu'une relève programmée vers une destination est réservée. Rapport de relève séquentielle réservée (réception) Si Rapport émission programmée est réglé sur ON dans Réglage Administrateur du mode Utilitaire, ce rapport est automatiquement imprimé lorsqu'une relève programmée vers plusieurs destinations est réservée. Rapport réception confidentielle Si Rapport réception confidentielle est réglé sur ON dans Réglage Administrateur du mode Utilitaire, ce rapport est automatiquement imprimé à la réception d'un document confidentiel. Rapport Émission bulletin Si Rapport émission bulletin est réglé sur ON dans Réglage Administrateur du mode Utilitaire, le résultat de l'émission en relève au bulletin board (tableau électronique) est automatiquement imprimé. Nom du rapport Description Nom de la liste Description Liste Carnet d'adresses Les numéros enregistrés dans le carnet d'adresses peuvent être imprimés. Liste Programme Les numéros enregistrés dans un programme peuvent être imprimés. Liste d'adresses de groupe Les numéros enregistrés dans un groupe peuvent être imprimés. Liste de Titres/Textes La liste de sujets et de textes (e-mail) peut être imprimée. Liste des réglages du fax Les réglages du mode Utilitaire peuvent être imprimés. Rapports et listes 12 C250 12-5 12.2 Rapport d'activité Le rapport d'activité liste les 100 (maximum) dernières émissions et réceptions sur des pages distinctes (une pour les émissions, l'autre pour les réceptions). Ce rapport peut être imprimé automatiquement, ou imprimé selon les besoins, en totalité (rapport d'activité), pour les émissions uniquement (rapport d'émission, ou pour les réceptions uniquement (rapport de réception). 12.2.1 Impression automatique L'intervalle d'impression du rapport d'activité peut être défini dans Réglage Rapports. 12.2.2 Impression manuelle Le rapport d'activité peut être imprimé manuellement comme suit. Impression manuelle 1 Appuyez sur [Liste tâches] dans l'écran Fax. 2 Appuyez sur l'onglet [Émission fax]. 3 Appuyez sur [Historique tâches]. 12 Rapports et listes 12-6 C250 4 Appuyez sur [Réglage comm.]. 5 Appuyez sur [Rapport d'activité], [Rapport émission] ou [Rapport réception]. 6 Appuyez sur [Imprimer]. Le rapport est imprimé. Rapports et listes 12 C250 12-7 ! Détail Un message s'affiche si le papier requis ne se trouve pas dans le magasin destiné aux rapports et aux listes. Chargez le papier requis. * Les rapports que vous imprimez peuvent être différents de ceux qui sont illustrés dans ce manuel. Élément Description No. Un numéro de série est attribué à chaque émission et à chaque réception. Destination Contient les informations suivantes (cet espace est vide en l'absence de ces informations). • Nom si celui-ci a été enregistré dans la liste de numéros abrégés • Le numéro de téléphone de la destination Heure de début Heure à laquelle la communication a commencé. Heure Durée de la communication Impressions Nombre de pages émises ou reçues. En cas d'émission mémoire, le nombre de pages émises et le nombre total de pages sont indiqués. Résultat OK La communication s'est terminée normalement. ARRET La communication a été interrompue. ETEIND L'interrupteur est hors tension. TEL Appel téléphonique entrant. ECHEC Une erreur de communication s'est produite. Erreur Une erreur s'est produite et le FK-502 est passé en rappel de la page d'erreur. Pas ré La destination appelée n'a pas répondu. Occupé La communication n'a pas abouti parce que la ligne est occupée. M-plei La mémoire fax disponible a été dépassée pendant la réception, et celle-ci a échoué. 12 Rapports et listes 12-8 C250 ! Détail Les éléments indiqués dépendent des réglages optionnels. Note Indique la ou les remarques suivantes. DIF: Communication différée D/R: Relève ORG: Format original BOR: Effacement bords ODI: Original de format différent (mixte) MAN: Téléphone CSRC: CS remote care (appel distant) TR: Retransmission PC: PC-fax REL: Position reliure OS: Original spécial CODEF: Fonction F-Code MBX: Confidentiel BLTN: Bulletin board Élément Description Rapports et listes 12 C250 12-9 12.3 Rapport Émission 12.3.1 Impression manuelle Les informations suivantes apparaissent si l'émission est réglée sur [ON] dans [Réglage Rapports]-[Rapport Émission] du mode Utilitaire. Appuyez sur [Oui] pour imprimer le Rapport Émission ; sur [Non] pour ne pas imprimer ce rapport. Pour plus d'informations, voir “Réglage des rapports” à la page 11-68. 12.3.2 Impression automatique L'impression automatique peut être réglée sur [ON], [Sur erreur seulement] ou [OFF] dans [Rapport Émission] de la fonction [Réglage Rapports] dans le mode Utilitaire. Pour plus d'informations, voir “Réglage des rapports” à la page 11-68. * Les rapports que vous imprimez peuvent être différents de ceux qui sont illustrés dans ce manuel. 12 Rapports et listes 12-10 C250 Élément Description No. Un numéro de série est attribué à chaque émission et à chaque réception. Destination Indique : • Nom si celui-ci a été enregistré dans la liste de numéros abrégés ou la liste d'entrée • Le numéro de téléphone de la destination Heure début émission Heure à laquelle la communication a commencé. Heure Durée de la communication Impressions Nombre de pages émises. En cas d'émission mémoire, le nombre de pages émises et le nombre total de pages sont indiqués. Résultat OK La communication s'est terminée normalement. ARRET La communication a été interrompue. ETEIND L'interrupteur est hors tension. TEL Appel téléphonique entrant. ECHEC Une erreur de communication s'est produite. Erreur Une erreur s'est produite et le FK-502 est passé en rappel de la page d'erreur. Pas ré La destination appelée n'a pas répondu. Occupé La communication n'a pas aboutie parce que la ligne est occupée. M-plei La mémoire fax disponible a été dépassée pendant la réception, et celle-ci a échoué. Note Indique la ou les remarques suivantes. DIF: Communication différée D/R: Relève ORG: Format original BOR: Effacement bords ODI: Original de format différent (mixte) MAN: Téléphone CSRC: CS remote care (appel distant) TR: Retransmission PC: PC-fax REL: Position reliure OS: Original spécial CODEF: Fonction F-Code MBX: Confidentiel BLTN: Bulletin board Rapports et listes 12 C250 12-11 12.4 Rapport d'émission (en relève) Ce rapport est imprimé automatiquement à la suite de l'émission en relève d'un document enregistré dans la boîte relève émission. L'impression automatique peut être réglée sur [ON] ou [OFF] dans [Rapport Émission] de la fonction [Réglage Rapports] dans le mode Utilitaire. Pour plus d'informations, voir “Réglage des rapports” à la page 11-68. * Les rapports que vous imprimez peuvent être différents de ceux qui sont illustrés dans ce manuel. Élément Description Destination Indique : • Le nom de la destination s'il est enregistré dans la liste Carnet d'adresses. • Le numéro de téléphone de la destination Heure de création Heure à laquelle la communication a commencé. Heure Durée de la communication Impressions Nombre de pages émises. Résultat OK La communication s'est terminée normalement. ARRET La communication a été interrompue. ETEIND L'interrupteur est hors tension. TEL Appel téléphonique entrant. ECHEC Une erreur de communication s'est produite. Erreur Une erreur s'est produite et le FK-502 est passé en rappel de la page d'erreur. Pas ré La destination appelée n'a pas répondu. Occupé La communication n'a pas abouti parce que la ligne est occupée. M-plei La mémoire fax disponible a été dépassée pendant la réception, et celle-ci a échoué. 12 Rapports et listes 12-12 C250 Note Indique la ou les remarques suivantes. DIF: Communication différée D/R: Relève ORG: Format original BOR: Effacement bords ODI: Original de format différent (mixte) MAN: Téléphone CSRC: CS remote care (appel distant) TR: Retransmission PC: PC-fax REL: Position reliure OS: Original spécial CODEF: Fonction F-Code MBX: Confidentiel BLTN: Bulletin board Élément Description Rapports et listes 12 C250 12-13 12.5 Rapport de relève Ce rapport est imprimé automatiquement à réception de la relève. L'impression automatique peut être réglée sur [ON] ou [OFF] dans [Rapport Émission] de la fonction [Réglage Rapports] dans le mode Utilitaire. Pour plus d'informations, voir “Réglage des rapports” à la page 11-68. * Les rapports que vous imprimez peuvent être différents de ceux qui sont illustrés dans ce manuel. Élément Description Destination Indique : • Un nom de destination s'il est enregistré dans la liste Carnet d'adresses. • Le numéro de téléphone de la destination Heure de début Heure à laquelle la communication a commencé. Heure Durée de la communication Impressions Nombre de pages émises. Résultat OK La communication s'est terminée normalement. ARRET La communication a été interrompue. ETEIND L'interrupteur est hors tension. TEL Appel téléphonique entrant. ECHEC Une erreur de communication s'est produite. Erreur Une erreur s'est produite et le FK-502 est passé en rappel de la page d'erreur. Pas ré La destination appelée n'a pas répondu. Occupé La communication n'a pas abouti parce que la ligne est occupée. M-plei La mémoire fax disponible a été dépassée pendant la réception, et celle-ci a échoué. 12 Rapports et listes 12-14 C250 Note Indique la ou les remarques suivantes. DIF: Communication différée D/R: Relève ORG: Format original BOR: Effacement bords ODI: Original de format différent (mixte) MAN: Téléphone CSRC: CS remote care (appel distant) TR: Retransmission PC: PC-fax REL: Position reliure OS: Original spécial CODEF: Fonction F-Code MBX: Confidentiel BLTN: Bulletin board Élément Description Rapports et listes 12 C250 12-15 12.6 Rapport de diffusion Ce rapport est imprimé automatiquement à la suite d'une émission multiposte séquentielle. L'impression automatique peut être réglée sur [ON] ou [OFF] dans [Rapport émission séquentielle] de la fonction [Réglage Rapports] dans le mode Utilitaire. Pour plus d'informations, voir “Réglage des rapports” à la page 11-68. * Les rapports que vous imprimez peuvent être différents de ceux qui sont illustrés dans ce manuel. Élément Description Destination Indique : • Un nom de destination s'il est enregistré dans la liste Carnet d'adresses. • Le numéro de téléphone de la destination Heure de début Heure à laquelle la communication a commencé. Heure Durée de la communication. Impressions Nombre de pages émises. Le nombre de pages émises et le nombre total de pages sont indiqués. 12 Rapports et listes 12-16 C250 Résultat OK La communication s'est terminée normalement. ARRET La communication a été interrompue. ETEIND L'interrupteur est hors tension. TEL Appel téléphonique entrant. ECHEC Une erreur de communication s'est produite. Erreur Une erreur s'est produite et le FK-502 est passé en rappel de la page d'erreur. Pas ré La destination appelée n'a pas répondu. Occupé La communication n'a pas abouti parce que la ligne est occupée. M-plei La mémoire fax disponible a été dépassée pendant la réception, et celle-ci a échoué. Note Indique la ou les remarques suivantes. DIF: Communication différée D/R: Relève ORG: Format original BOR: Effacement bords ODI: Original de format différent (mixte) MAN: Téléphone CSRC: CS remote care (appel distant) TR: Retransmission PC: PC-fax REL: Position reliure OS: Original spécial CODEF: Fonction F-Code MBX: Confidentiel BLTN: Bulletin board Élément Description Rapports et listes 12 C250 12-17 12.7 Rapport de relève séquentielle (réception) Le rapport de relève séquentielle vers plusieurs destinations est imprimé automatiquement. L'impression automatique peut être réglée sur [ON] ou [OFF] dans [Rapport émission séquentielle] de la fonction [Réglage Rapports] dans le mode Utilitaire. Pour plus d'informations, voir “Réglage des rapports” à la page 11-68. * Les rapports que vous imprimez peuvent être différents de ceux qui sont illustrés dans ce manuel. Élément Description Destination Indique : • Nom de la destination s'il a été enregistré dans la liste de numéros abrégés, et • Numéro de téléphone de la destination Heure de début Heure à laquelle la communication a commencé. Heure Durée de la communication. Impressions Nombre de pages transmises. Résultat OK La communication s'est terminée normalement. ARRET La communication a été interrompue. ETEIND L'interrupteur est hors tension. TEL Appel téléphonique entrant. ECHEC Une erreur de communication s'est produite. Erreur Une erreur s'est produite et le FK-502 est passé en rappel de la page d'erreur. Pas ré La destination appelée n'a pas répondu. Occupé La communication n'a pas abouti parce que la ligne est occupée. M-plei La mémoire fax disponible a été dépassée pendant la réception, et celle-ci a échoué. 12 Rapports et listes 12-18 C250 Note Indique la ou les remarques suivantes. DIF: Communication différée D/R: Relève ORG: Format original BOR: Effacement bords ODI: Original de format différent (mixte) MAN: Téléphone CSRC: CS remote care (appel distant) TR: Retransmission PC: PC-fax REL: Position reliure OS: Original spécial CODEF: Fonction F-Code MBX: Confidentiel BLTN: Bulletin board Élément Description Rapports et listes 12 C250 12-19 12.8 Rapport de communication réservée Ce rapport est imprimé automatiquement en cas d'émission programmée. L'impression automatique peut être réglée sur [ON] ou [OFF] dans [Rapport émission programmée] de la fonction [Réglage Rapports] dans le mode Utilitaire. Pour plus d'informations, voir “Réglage des rapports” à la page 11-68. * Les rapports que vous imprimez peuvent être différents de ceux qui sont illustrés dans ce manuel. Élément Description Destination Indique : • Nom si celui-ci a été enregistré dans la liste de numéros abrégés • Le numéro de téléphone de la destination Heure de création Heure d'émission programmée. Heure de début Heure spécifiée en cas d'émission programmée. Impressions Nombre de pages numérisées. 12 Rapports et listes 12-20 C250 Note Indique la ou les remarques suivantes. DIF: Communication différée D/R: Relève ORG: Format original BOR: Effacement bords ODI: Original de format différent (mixte) MAN: Téléphone CSRC: CS remote care (appel distant) TR: Retransmission PC: PC-fax REL: Position reliure OS: Original spécial CODEF: Fonction F-Code MBX: Confidentiel BLTN: Bulletin board Élément Description Rapports et listes 12 C250 12-21 12.9 Rapport d'émission réservée (relève) Ce rapport est imprimé automatiquement lorsqu'une émission en relève est réservée. L'impression automatique peut être réglée sur [ON] ou [OFF] dans [Rapport émission programmée] de la fonction [Réglage Rapports] dans le mode Utilitaire. Pour plus d'informations, voir “Réglage des rapports” à la page 11-68. * Les rapports que vous imprimez peuvent être différents de ceux qui sont illustrés dans ce manuel. Élément Description Destination Non indiquée. Heure de création Heure d'émission programmée. Heure de début Non indiquée. Impressions Nombre de pages numérisées. 12 Rapports et listes 12-22 C250 Note Indique la ou les remarques suivantes. DIF: Communication différée D/R: Relève ORG: Format original BOR: Effacement bords ODI: Original de format différent (mixte) MAN: Téléphone CSRC: CS remote care (appel distant) TR: Retransmission PC: PC-fax REL: Position reliure OS: Original spécial CODEF: Fonction F-Code MBX: Confidentiel BLTN: Bulletin board Élément Description Rapports et listes 12 C250 12-23 12.10 Rapport de diffusion réservée Ce rapport est imprimé automatiquement à la suite de la réservation d'une émission multiposte séquentielle. L'impression automatique peut être réglée sur [ON] ou [OFF] dans [Rapport émission programmée] de la fonction [Réglage Rapports] dans le mode Utilitaire. Pour plus d'informations, voir “Réglage des rapports” à la page 11-68. * Les rapports que vous imprimez peuvent être différents de ceux qui sont illustrés dans ce manuel. Élément Description Destination Indique : • Nom de la destination s'il a été enregistré dans la liste de numéros abrégés, et • Numéro de téléphone de la destination s'il a été sélectionné au clavier. Heure de création Heure à laquelle l'émission a été réservée. Heure de début Heure spécifiée en cas d'émission programmée. Impressions Nombre de pages numérisées. 12 Rapports et listes 12-24 C250 Note Indique la ou les remarques suivantes. DIF: Communication différée D/R: Relève ORG: Format original BOR: Effacement bords ODI: Original de format différent (mixte) MAN: Téléphone CSRC: CS remote care (appel distant) TR: Retransmission PC: PC-fax REL: Position reliure OS: Original spécial CODEF: Fonction F-Code MBX: Confidentiel BLTN: Bulletin board Élément Description Rapports et listes 12 C250 12-25 12.11 Rapport de réception réservée (relève) Ce rapport est imprimé automatiquement lors de la réservation de la relève d'une destination. L'impression automatique peut être réglée sur [ON] ou [OFF] dans [Rapport émission programmée] de la fonction [Réglage Rapports] dans le mode Utilitaire. Pour plus d'informations, voir “Réglage des rapports” à la page 11-68. * Les rapports que vous imprimez peuvent être différents de ceux qui sont illustrés dans ce manuel. Élément Description Destination Numéro de téléphone de la destination. Heure de création Heure de réception de la relève. Heure de début Heure spécifiée en cas d'émission programmée (réservée). Impressions Nombre de pages transmises. 12 Rapports et listes 12-26 C250 Note Indique la ou les remarques suivantes. DIF: Communication différée D/R: Relève ORG: Format original BOR: Effacement bords ODI: Original de format différent (mixte) MAN: Téléphone CSRC: CS remote care (appel distant) TR: Retransmission PC: PC-fax REL: Position reliure OS: Original spécial CODEF: Fonction F-Code MBX: Confidentiel BLTN: Bulletin board Élément Description Rapports et listes 12 C250 12-27 12.12 Rapport de relève séquentielle réservée (réception) Ce rapport est imprimé automatiquement lors de la réservation de la relève de plusieurs destinations. L'impression automatique peut être réglée sur [ON] ou [OFF] dans [Rapport émission programmée] de la fonction [Réglage Rapports] dans le mode Utilitaire. Pour plus d'informations, voir “Réglage des rapports” à la page 11-68. * Les rapports que vous imprimez peuvent être différents de ceux qui sont illustrés dans ce manuel. Élément Description Destination Numéro de téléphone de la destination. Heure de création Heure de réception de la relève. Heure de début Heure spécifiée en cas d'émission programmée (réservée). Impressions Nombre de pages transmises. 12 Rapports et listes 12-28 C250 Note Indique la ou les remarques suivantes. DIF: Communication différée D/R: Relève ORG: Format original BOR: Effacement bords ODI: Original de format différent (mixte) MAN: Téléphone CSRC: CS remote care (appel distant) TR: Retransmission PC: PC-fax REL: Position reliure OS: Original spécial CODEF: Fonction F-Code MBX: Confidentiel BLTN: Bulletin board Élément Description Rapports et listes 12 C250 12-29 12.13 Rapport réception confidentielle Ce rapport est imprimé automatiquement suite à la réception d'un document confidentiel. L'impression automatique peut être réglée sur [ON] ou [OFF] dans [Rapport réception confidentielle] de la fonction [Réglage Rapports] dans le mode Utilitaire. Pour plus d'informations, voir “Réglage des rapports” à la page 11-68. * Les rapports que vous imprimez peuvent être différents de ceux qui sont illustrés dans ce manuel. Élément Description Destination Indique : • Nom de la destination s'il a été enregistré dans la liste de numéros abrégés • Le numéro de téléphone de la destination Heure de création Heure à laquelle la communication a commencé. Heure Durée de la communication. Impressions Nombre de pages transmises. Résultat OK La communication s'est terminée normalement. ARRET La communication a été interrompue. ETEIND L'interrupteur est hors tension. TEL Appel téléphonique entrant. ECHEC Une erreur de communication s'est produite. Erreur Une erreur s'est produite et le FK-502 est passé en rappel de la page d'erreur. Pas ré La destination appelée n'a pas répondu. Occupé La communication n'a pas abouti parce que la ligne est occupée. M-plei La mémoire fax disponible a été dépassée pendant la réception, et celle-ci a échoué. 12 Rapports et listes 12-30 C250 Note Indique la ou les remarques suivantes. DIF: Communication différée D/R: Relève ORG: Format original BOR: Effacement bords ODI: Original de format différent (mixte) MAN: Téléphone CSRC: CS remote care (appel distant) TR: Retransmission PC: PC-fax REL: Position reliure OS: Original spécial CODEF: Fonction F-Code MBX: Confidentiel BLTN: Bulletin board Élément Description Rapports et listes 12 C250 12-31 12.14 Rapport Émission bulletin Ce rapport est imprimé automatiquement à la suite de l'émission en relève d'un document enregistré dans la boîte utilisateur Bulletin. L'impression automatique peut être réglée sur [ON] ou [OFF] dans [Rapport émission bulletin] de la fonction [Réglage Rapports] dans le mode Utilitaire. Pour plus d'informations, voir “Réglage des rapports” à la page 11-68. * Les rapports que vous imprimez peuvent être différents de ceux qui sont illustrés dans ce manuel. Élément Description Destination Indique : • Nom de la destination s'il a été enregistré dans la liste de numéros abrégés • Le numéro de téléphone de la destination Heure de création Heure à laquelle la communication a commencé. Heure Durée de la communication. Impressions Nombre de pages transmises. Résultat OK La communication s'est terminée normalement. ARRET La communication a été interrompue. ETEIND L'interrupteur est hors tension. TEL Appel téléphonique entrant. ECHEC Une erreur de communication s'est produite. Erreur Une erreur s'est produite et le FK-502 est passé en rappel de la page d'erreur. Pas ré La destination appelée n'a pas répondu. Occupé La communication n'a pas abouti parce que la ligne est occupée. M-plei La mémoire fax disponible a été dépassée pendant la réception, et celle-ci a échoué. 12 Rapports et listes 12-32 C250 Note Indique la ou les remarques suivantes. DIF: Communication différée D/R: Relève ORG: Format original BOR: Effacement bords ODI: Original de format différent (mixte) MAN: Téléphone CSRC: CS remote care (appel distant) TR: Retransmission PC: PC-fax REL: Position reliure OS: Original spécial CODEF: Fonction F-Code MBX: Confidentiel BLTN: Bulletin board Élément Description Rapports et listes 12 C250 12-33 12.15 Liste Carnet d'adresses Liste Carnet d'adresses 1 Appuyez sur [Fax], puis sur [Utilitaire/Compteur] sur le tableau de commande. 2 Appuyez sur [Réglage Administrateur]. 3 Saisissez le mot de passe et appuyez sur [OK]. – Le mot de passe de l'administrateur peut être modifié dans [Paramètre sécurité]. L'administrateur a la responsabilité de la gestion du mot de passe. 4 Appuyez sur [Enregistrement 1-touche]. – En mode Utilitaire, vous pouvez également taper sur le clavier le numéro de l'option pour la sélectionner. Pour l'option [Enregistrement 1-touche], tapez “3” sur le clavier. 5 Appuyez sur [Liste enregistre. 1-touche]. 6 Appuyez sur [Liste Carnet d'adresses]. 12 Rapports et listes 12-34 C250 7 Tapez au clavier la plage de numéros d'enregistrements à imprimer dans le champ [No. enregistrement] et sélectionnez [E-Mail], [Boîte utilisat.] ou [Fax] pour le champ [Type de destination]. – Vous pouvez indiquer 100 numéros d'enregistrements maximum. – Appuyez sur pour déplacer le curseur vers la gauche, sur pour le déplacer vers la droite. – Pour corriger une entrée, appuyez sur [C] (clear) sur le tableau de commande. 8 Appuyez sur [Impr.]. 9 Sélectionnez le magasin de papier. 10 Appuyez sur [Départ]. La liste Carnet d'adresses est imprimée. ! Détail Si le papier requis n'est pas chargé dans le magasin indiqué, la touche [Départ] clignote en rouge. Dans ce cas, vous ne pouvez pas appuyer sur [Départ]. Rapports et listes 12 C250 12-35 Description de la liste Carnet d'adresses * Les rapports que vous imprimez peuvent être différents de ceux qui sont illustrés dans ce manuel. Élément Description No. Numéro abrégé. Nom Nom enregistré Numéro tél. Numéro de fax enregistré dans le carnet d'adresses Réglage ligne * indiqué s'il a été paramétré. 12 Rapports et listes 12-36 C250 12.16 Liste d'adresses de groupe Liste d'adresses de groupe 1 Appuyez sur [Fax], puis sur [Utilitaire/Compteur] sur le tableau de commande. 2 Appuyez sur [Réglage Administrateur]. 3 Saisissez le mot de passe et appuyez sur [OK]. – Le mot de passe de l'administrateur peut être modifié dans [Paramètre sécurité]. L'administrateur a la responsabilité de la gestion du mot de passe. 4 Appuyez sur [Enregistrement 1-touche]. – En mode Utilitaire, vous pouvez également taper sur le clavier le numéro de l'option pour la sélectionner. Pour l'option [Enregistrement 1-touche], tapez “3” sur le clavier. 5 Appuyez sur [Liste enregistre. 1-touche]. 6 Appuyez sur [Liste groupe]. Rapports et listes 12 C250 12-37 7 Tapez au clavier la plage de numéros d'enregistrements à imprimés dans le champ [No. enregistrement]. – Vous pouvez indiquer 20 numéros d'enregistrements maximum. – Appuyez sur pour déplacer le curseur vers la gauche, sur pour le déplacer vers la droite. – Pour corriger une entrée, appuyez sur [C] (clear) sur le tableau de commande. 8 Appuyez sur [Impr.]. 9 Sélectionnez le magasin de papier. 10 Appuyez sur [Départ]. La liste d'adresses de groupe est imprimée. ! Détail Si le papier requis n'est pas chargé dans le magasin indiqué, la touche [Départ] clignote en rouge. Dans ce cas, vous ne pouvez pas appuyer sur [Départ]. 12 Rapports et listes 12-38 C250 Description de la liste d'adresses de groupe * Les rapports que vous imprimez peuvent être différents de ceux qui sont illustrés dans ce manuel. Élément Description No. Numéro du groupe Nom Nom du groupe Adr. No. Numéros abrégés enregistrés dans le groupe Nombre enregist. Nombre de numéros abrégés enregistrés dans le groupe Rapports et listes 12 C250 12-39 12.17 Liste Programme Liste Programme 1 Appuyez sur [Fax], puis sur [Utilitaire/Compteur] sur le tableau de commande. 2 Appuyez sur [Réglage Administrateur]. 3 Saisissez le mot de passe et appuyez sur [OK]. – Le mot de passe de l'administrateur peut être modifié dans [Paramètre sécurité]. L'administrateur a la responsabilité de la gestion du mot de passe. 4 Appuyez sur [Enregistrement 1-touche]. – En mode Utilitaire, vous pouvez également taper sur le clavier le numéro de l'option pour la sélectionner. Pour l'option [Enregistrement 1-touche], tapez “3” sur le clavier. 5 Appuyez sur [Liste enregistre. 1-touche]. 6 Appuyez sur [Liste Programme]. 12 Rapports et listes 12-40 C250 7 Tapez au clavier la plage de numéros d'enregistrements à imprimer dans le champ [No. enregistrement] et sélectionnez [E-Mail], [Boîte utilisat.], [Fax], [Numéro abrégé] ou [No. groupe] pour le champ [Type de destination]. – Vous pouvez indiquer 50 numéros d'enregistrements maximum. – Appuyez sur pour déplacer le curseur vers la gauche, sur pour le déplacer vers la droite. – Pour corriger une entrée, appuyez sur [C] (clear) sur le tableau de commande. 8 Appuyez sur [Impr.]. 9 Sélectionnez le magasin de papier. 10 Appuyez sur [Départ]. La liste Programme est imprimée. ! Détail Si le papier requis n'est pas chargé dans le magasin indiqué, la touche [Départ] clignote en rouge. Dans ce cas, vous ne pouvez pas appuyer sur [Départ]. Rapports et listes 12 C250 12-41 Description de la Liste Programme * Les rapports que vous imprimez peuvent être différents de ceux qui sont illustrés dans ce manuel. Élément Description No. Numéro d'enregistrement du programme Nom Nom de l'enregistrement Numéro abrégé Numéro abrégé de l'enregistrement No. boîte utilisateur Numéro d'enregistrement de la boîte utilisateur Adresse E-Mail Adresse e-mail enregistrée Élément Fonctions du FK-502. Setting Valeur de réglage sélectionnée 12 Rapports et listes 12-42 C250 12.18 Liste de Titres/Textes La liste de sujets et de textes (e-mail) enregistrés peut être imprimée. Liste de Titres/Textes 1 Appuyez sur [Fax], puis sur [Utilitaire/Compteur] sur le tableau de commande. 2 Appuyez sur [Réglage Administrateur]. 3 Saisissez le mot de passe et appuyez sur [OK]. – Le mot de passe de l'administrateur peut être modifié dans [Paramètre sécurité]. L'administrateur a la responsabilité de la gestion du mot de passe. 4 Appuyez sur [Enregistrement 1-touche]. – En mode Utilitaire, vous pouvez également taper sur le clavier le numéro de l'option pour la sélectionner. Pour l'option [Enregistrement 1-touche], tapez “3” sur le clavier. 5 Appuyez sur [Liste enregistre. 1-touche]. Rapports et listes 12 C250 12-43 6 Appuyez sur [Liste Sujet/Texte E-Mail]. 7 Sélectionnez le magasin de papier. 8 Appuyez sur [Départ]. La liste Titres/Textes est imprimée. ! Détail Si le papier requis n'est pas chargé dans le magasin indiqué, la touche [Départ] clignote en rouge. Dans ce cas, vous ne pouvez pas appuyer sur [Départ]. 12 Rapports et listes 12-44 C250 Description de la liste de Titres/Textes Nom de la liste Élément Description Liste Sujet No. Numéro de l'enregistrement. Sujet Sujet enregistré en tant que sujet/texte (pour un e-mail). Liste de textes No. Numéro de l'enregistrement. Texte Texte enregistré en tant que sujet/texte (pour un e-mail). Rapports et listes 12 C250 12-45 12.19 Liste des réglages du fax La liste des réglages du fax peut être imprimée. Liste des réglages du fax 1 Appuyez sur [Fax], puis sur [Utilitaire/Compteur] sur le tableau de commande. 2 Appuyez sur [Réglage Administrateur]. 3 Saisissez le mot de passe et appuyez sur [OK]. – Le mot de passe de l'administrateur peut être modifié dans [Paramètre sécurité]. L'administrateur a la responsabilité de la gestion du mot de passe. 4 Appuyez sur [Réglage Fax]. – Certaines options de réglages optionnels peuvent ne pas être indiquées. – En mode Utilitaire, vous pouvez également taper sur le clavier le numéro de l'option pour la sélectionner. Pour l'option [Réglage Fax], tapez “8” sur le clavier. 12 Rapports et listes 12-46 C250 5 Appuyez sur [Réglage Multi lignes]. 6 Sélectionnez le magasin de papier. 7 Appuyez sur [Départ]. La liste des réglages du fax est imprimée. ! Détail Si le papier requis n'est pas chargé dans le magasin indiqué, la touche [Départ] clignote en rouge. Dans ce cas, vous ne pouvez pas appuyer sur [Départ]. Rapports et listes 12 C250 12-47 Description de la liste des réglages du fax * Les rapports que vous imprimez peuvent être différents de ceux qui sont illustrés dans ce manuel. Élément Description Élément Fonction du mode Utilitaire. Réglages Valeur de réglage sélectionnée 12 Rapports et listes 12-48 C250 * Les rapports que vous imprimez peuvent être différents de ceux qui sont illustrés dans ce manuel. Rapports et listes 12 C250 12-49 12.19.1Liste confidentielle/bulletin * Les rapports que vous imprimez peuvent être différents de ceux qui sont illustrés dans ce manuel. Élément Description No. Numéro de boîte enregistré avec le réglage confidentiel / bulletin board. Nom Nom enregistré. Mot de passe Mot de passe confidentiel. Type Confidentiel ou Bulletin board. 12 Rapports et listes 12-50 C250 12.19.2Boîte émetteur (TSI) * Les rapports que vous imprimez peuvent être différents de ceux qui sont illustrés dans ce manuel. Élément Description No. Numéro d'enregistrement de l'expéditeur (TSI) RX Expédit. (TSI) Informations sur l'expéditeur enregistré. No. boîte Numéro d'enregistrement de la boîte 13 Annexe Annexe 13 C250 13-3 13 Annexe 13.1 Nombre de pages mémorisées Cette machine est équipée en standard d'un disque dur de 40 Go. Les images de fax sont sauvegardées dans la zone 27 Go du disque dur. Ce disque dur a une capacité de stockage et de réception dans chacun des modes (copie, imprimante, numérisation, boîte et fax) d'environ 9 000 originaux Konica Minolta standard au format A4 contenant chacun 700 mots (en définition “fine”). La taille, l'état et la définition des originaux a toutefois une incidence sur le nombre de pages sauvegardées sur le disque dur. ! Détail La mémoire peut saturer pendant la lecture de l'original. Dans ce cas, vous pouvez soit émettre la partie lue de l'original, soit recommencer la procédure. 13 Annexe 13-4 C250 13.2 Saisie de texte La section suivante explique comment utiliser le clavier affiché sur l'écran tactile pour saisir les noms des comptes enregistrés et les formats de papier personnalisés. Vous pouvez également y taper les numéros. Les différents claviers pouvant apparaître sont illustrés ci-dessous. Exemple Écran de saisie du mot de passe Écran de saisie d'une adresse e-mail Écran de saisie d'un e-mail Annexe 13 C250 13-5 La procédure suivante explique comment se servir du clavier tactile affiché sur l'écran de saisie d'une adresse e-mail. 13 Annexe 13-6 C250 Pour taper du texte % Touchez la touche du caractère voulu sur le clavier affiché. – Pour saisir une lettre en majuscule ou un symbole exigeant le clavier en majuscule, touchez [Maj.]. – Vous pouvez également taper des chiffres sur ce clavier. Les caractères saisis s'affichent dans la zone de texte. 2 Remarque Pour annuler le texte saisi, appuyez sur [Annul.]. Pour effacer tout le texte saisi, appuyez sur la touche [C] (clear). ! Détail Pour modifier un caractère dans le texte saisi, touchez et/ou pour placer le curseur devant ce caractère, touchez [Suppri.], puis retapez la lettre ou le chiffre voulu. Liste des caractères disponibles Type Caractères disponibles Caractères alphanumériques / symboles Annexe 13 C250 13-7 13.3 Glossaire Cette section décrit les termes de communication fax employés. Certaines définitions s'appliquent à des fonctions non employées sur cette machine. Termes Description Caractères numériques 2 en 1 TX Fonction de réunion de deux pages en une seule et d'émission de la page au format large ainsi composée. B bps Abréviation de “bit par seconde”, unité de transmission de données représentant la quantité de données envoyée par seconde. Bulletin board (tableau électronique) Fonction permettant de poster les documents à lire ou à émettre en relève. C Carnet d'adresses Carnet permettant d'appeler la destination en recherchant son nom dans la liste de numéros abrégés enregistrés. Communication confidentielle Fonction d'échange d'informations confidentielles avec certaines personnes déterminées. L'original émis avec cette fonction est enregistré dans la boîte confidentielle du destinataire, sans impression. L'impression d'une communication confidentielle exige un mot de passe. Communications internationales Cette fonction permet d'émettre à une vitesse de transmission moins rapide. Elle est particulièrement utile lors de l'émission d'un fax dans une région (nationale comprise) où les conditions de communication sont moins fiables. D Débordement mémoire État de saturation de la mémoire de cette machine pendant la mémorisation d'un document transmis. Définition Plus la définition est fine, plus le temps de transmission est long. Il convient de sélectionner la définition appropriée. Diffusion Émission d'un fax vers plusieurs postes, en une seule opération. 13 Annexe 13-8 C250 E ECM (Error Correction Mode) (code de correction d'erreur) Ce mode est utilisé avec la communication G3. La transmission exacte des données et leur bonne réception sont vérifiées. En cas d'erreur, les données sont émises à nouveau. Si la destination gère ce mode de vérification des erreurs, les données sont transmises sous ce mode, à moins que la fonction ECM OFF n'ait été activée. Effacement bords Fonction permettant d'effacer les bandes noires reproduites lorsque l'original est un livre ou qu'il est lu avec le chargeur de document ouvert. Émission de substitution Fonction de transfert/émission des documents reçus en attente d'impression, par le biais du tableau de commande. Cette fonction peut être réglée sur l'écran Fax lorsque l'opération a été interrompue en raison d'un manque de papier ou d'un bourrage papier dans la machine. Émission différée (TX) Fonction permettant de spécifier l'heure de début de la communication. L'exécution de l'émission la nuit ou tôt le matin permet de tirer parti de tarifs plus intéressants. Émission en relais Fonction d'envoi d'un fax à plusieurs stations via une station de relais. En cas d'émission vers des stations distantes, la configuration de l'une des stations en tant que station relais permet de réduire les coûts de communication. Émission groupée Fonction de transmission simultanée du dernier document réservé avec le document réservé précédent si la destination et les conditions de transmission (émission mémoire, définition, etc.) sont les mêmes. Cette fonction peut émettre jusqu'à cinq documents. Émission livre Fonction qui génère deux pages distinctes à partir de deux pages en vis à vis d'un livre ou d'un catalogue ouvert. Émission manuelle Fonction d'émission de documents tout en confirmant l'état de la machine réceptrice. Émission mémoire Avec cette méthode, toutes les pages sont numérisées, puis mémorisées avant l'émission. Le document est automatiquement paginé et les images de la première page apparaissent dans le rapport de communication. Lors de l'émission d'un grand nombre de pages ou si les images des originaux sont hautement définies, la capacité de la mémoire peut toutefois être dépassée. Émission par lot Fonction d'émission automatique d'un document à une heure donnée si la destination, l'heure d'émission, l'émission mémoire et la définition ne changent pas. Termes Description Annexe 13 C250 13-9 F F-code Stipule l'utilisation de l'adresse secondaire du protocole T.30* normalisé par l'ITU-T. Plusieurs fonctions F-code peuvent être utilisées sur les télécopieurs gérant ce code, quels que soient leurs fabricants. Sur cette machine, la fonction F-code s’utilise dans le bulletin board, pour les requêtes de transmission en relais, les communications confidentielles et les émissions d'ID. (* il s’agit d’une des normes de communication.) Format original Fonction de désignation du format du document à envoyer. En principe, si le format de papier chargé à la destination est trop petit pour recevoir l'image transmise, cette image est réduite pour tenir dans la feuille. Cette fonction permet d'imprimer une partie de l'image sans réduction. G G3 L'un des modes de communication fax normalisés par l'ITUT. C'est le mode le plus utilisé. Groupe Regroupement de plusieurs numéros abrégés. Cette fonction est utile si vous utilisez fréquemment l'émission séquentielle multiposte ou la réception en relève. Un groupe peut contenir jusqu'à 500 numéros abrégés. H Haut/Bas Fonction de précision du type de reliure lors de l'émission d'un document recto-verso. Le type de reliure sélectionné permet de le lire correctement de droite à gauche ou de haut en bas. I ID Fax Code permettant d'identifier le fax émetteur et récepteur. Le numéro de fax est généralement enregistré en tant qu'ID du fax. Informations de l'expéditeur Informations telles que la date d'émission, le nom et le numéro de téléphone de l'expéditeur, ainsi que le nombre de pages, imprimées en haut du document reçu par la destination. L Lecture Numérisation optique d'un original et capture de cet original en tant que données d'image. M Mémoire Emplacement de stockage des données. La mémoire peut contenir les réglages de la communication et le document à émettre/reçu. Mémoire rapide Avec cette méthode, l'émission du fax s'effectue immédiatement après la numérisation de chaque page. C'est la méthode recommandée pour ne pas saturer la mémoire dans le cas de l'émission d'un document volumineux. Méthode de numérotation Il existe deux méthodes de numérotation : à impulsions (décimale) et à fréquences vocales (DTME). Mot de passe émission (TX) Fonction de transmission de fax avec un mot de passe. L'expéditeur doit utiliser le même mot de passe que celui qui est paramétré sur la machine réceptrice fonctionnant en réseau fermé, si cette machine est la destination. Termes Description 13 Annexe 13-10 C250 N Nom expéditeur Nom de la machine, représenté par des caractères alphanumériques et des signes. Ce nom est imprimé en haut du document reçu par le destinataire. Nombre total de pages Fonction plaçant automatiquement le nombre total de pages sur chaque page du fax en mode Mémoire rapide. Cette fonction permet au destinataire de vérifier la bonne réception de toutes les pages du document. Numérisation horizontale L'original est numérisé à l'horizontale. Numérisation verticale L'original est numérisé à la verticale. Numéro abrégé L'une des fonctions d'enregistrement des numéros de fax fréquemment composés. L'enregistrement du nom de la destination et du caractère de recherche avec le numéro abrégé permet ensuite de désigner la destination dans le carnet d'adresses. 500 numéros abrégés (000 à 499) peuvent être enregistrés. O Original long Fonction permettant d'émettre des pages plus longues que le format 11 × 17 (420 mm/16,5 pouces). Cette fonction doit être choisie avant l'émission d'un document long, faute de quoi la machine génère un message d'erreur d'acheminement du papier. Les pages de 800 mm maximum peuvent être émises sous ce mode. Original plié Fonction déterminant le format de l'original avant sa lecture et son émission. Certains télécopieurs ne détectent pas le format d'un document plié. Cette fonction n'est disponible que si le document est placé dans le chargeur de document. Originaux mixtes Fonction permettant de régler et d'envoyer des pages de différents formats en une seule procédure. P Pause Cette fonction inclut une pause dans la numérotation. L'appui une fois sur la touche Pause crée un intervalle d'une seconde. Programme Fonction d'enregistrement des numéros de fax fréquemment utilisés et des modèles de procédures dans un programme. Cela fait, la destination ou la procédure voulue est sélectionnée en appuyant sur la touche Programme (dans la liste de numéros abrégés). Termes Description Annexe 13 C250 13-11 R Rappel Renuméroter la même destination. Le rappel peut s'effectuer automatiquement ou manuellement. Réception en mémoire Fonction de mémorisation automatique du document reçu s'il ne peut être imprimé en raison de manque de papier. Réception mémoire Fonction d'enregistrement, et d'impression le cas échéant, du document reçu. Ré-émission Fonction de sélection des documents dont l'émission a échoué. Les documents sont mémorisés, puis émis à nouveau à la même destination ou à une autre. Réglage usine Valeur par défaut définie en usine. Ces valeurs peuvent être modifiées en mode Utilitaire. La définition d'une valeur utilisée fréquemment en tant que valeur par défaut accélère les procédures. Relève Fonction d'envoi d'un fax, qui a été lu et enregistré sur le disque dur du télécopieur, au moment où le destinataire envoie une commande de relève. Réservation d'émission Fonction de réservation de l'émission suivante pendant une communication ou une impression. S Station d'origine Le télécopieur fournissant les instructions d'émission d'un document vers plusieurs stations. Station relais Le télécopieur émettant le document vers plusieurs stations à la demande de la station d'origine. Super G3 (SG3) Mode de communication G3 conforme au protocole V.34 de l'ITU-T, plus rapide (jusqu'à 33 400 bps) que la communication G3 standard. T Temps de transmission La durée d'émission d'un fax. Plus la définition est fine, plus le temps de transmission est long. V V.34 Protocole de communication en super G3. Ce mode est disponible si le récepteur et l'expéditeur sont connectés à la ligne via une extension de matériel de central. Vitesse de transmission Débit de transmission du modem sur le télécopieur. Il peut être réglé sur le haut débit de 33 600 bps. En mode de communication internationale, ce débit peut être réduit lors de l'émission d'un fax dans une région où les conditions de communication sont moins fiables. Le débit peut alors être réglé sur 7 200 ou 4 800 bps. Termes Description 13 Annexe 13-12 C250 13.4 Index A Accessibilité, tableau de commande .................................................. 2-5 Aide, tableau de commande .... 2-6 Ajustement fond .............7-6, 7-15 Alimentation, tableau de commande .................................................. 2-5 Annul. ....................................... 7-5 Annuler, tableau de commande 2-5 Appels récents # .................... 3-27 Arrêt, tableau de commande ... 2-5 Authentification utilisateur ..... 2-17 B Boîte ....................................... 2-18 Boîte bulletin board ............... 2-20 Boîte d'émission en relève ..... 2-20 Boîte d'impression sécurisée . 2-20 Boîte émetteur (TSI) ............. 12-50 Boîte spécifiée ....................... 2-19 Boîte système ........................ 2-20 Boîte utilisateur ........................ 2-9 Boîte utilisateur réception mémoire .....................2-20, 10-49 Boîte, tableau de commande .. 2-4 Boîtes confidentielles ........... 10-46 Bulletin (tableau électronique) ............................................. 10-48 Bulletin board (tableau électronique) ................................................ 9-10 C C, tableau de commande ........ 2-5 Carnet d'adresses 2-8, 2-15, 3-19, ...................................... 3-23, 10-5 chargeur ADF .................3-7, 3-10 Clavier .................................... 3-21 Clavier, tableau de commande 2-5 Code, tableau de commande ...2-4 Communication confidentielle 7-29 Communications internationales .......................................3-50, 7-6 Compte de service .................2-17 Contraste, tableau de commande .................................................2-5 Contrôle, tableau de commande .................................................2-5 Copie, tableau de commande ..2-4 D Décrocher ...............................2-15 Définir mode PBX CN ...........11-65 Définition ................................3-15 Densité ...................................3-13 Départ, tableau de commande 2-5 Données, tableau de commande .................................................2-5 E ECM OFF ........................7-6, 7-35 Écran Fax actif ...........11-7, 11-19 Écran Fax réglage par défaut ......11-7, 11-15 Écran tactile .............................2-4 Effacement bords ...........7-6, 7-12 E-mail .......................................2-9 Émission différée (TX) .....3-47, 7-6 Émission en relève ...................9-4 Émission en relève (TX) ............7-6 Émission F-code (TX) ...............7-6 Enregistrer ds boîte ut. ...........3-27 Epreuve, tableau de commande .................................................2-5 F Fax, tableau de commande .....2-4 Format de numérisat. ...............7-6 Format de numérisation .........7-21 Annexe 13 C250 13-13 G Groupe .......................2-15, 10-19 I Imprimer page de séparation .4-12 Imprimer page de séparation ...............................................4-13 Indicateur de destination .......2-16 Indicateur de page .................2-15 Information en-tête ...........................2-7, 11-8, 11-28 INTERRUPTEUR, tableau de commande ...............................2-5 Interruption, tableau de commande .................................................2-5 L Ligne extérieure ...................11-65 Liste Carnet d'adresses .......12-33 Liste confidentielle/bulletin ..12-49 Liste d'adresses de groupe .12-36 Liste de Titres/Textes ...........12-42 Liste des caractères disponibles .............................13-6 Liste des réglages du fax .....12-45 Liste pages .............................2-15 Liste Paramètres tâche ........11-13 Liste Programme ..................12-39 Liste tâches ..................2-15, 3-37 M Mémoire .................................2-15 Mémoire rapide ..............3-42, 7-6 Mémoire saturée ......................5-6 Méthode de numérotation .......2-7 Mode réception ........................2-7 Mot de passe émission (TX) ..................7-6, 7-26 N Netteté ........................... 7-6, 7-18 Nº de fax expéditeur ................ 2-7 No. abrégé ..................... 2-9, 3-27 No. de destinat. ..................... 2-15 Nom dest. ............................. 2-15 Nom expéditeur ....................... 2-7 Nombre d'originaux ............... 3-45 Nombre originaux .................... 7-6 Numérisation vers E-mail ...... 3-27 Numérisation, tableau de commande .............................. 2-4 O Occupé .................................... 5-6 OFF .......................................... 7-5 OK ........................................... 7-5 Originaux mixtes .............. 7-5, 7-7 P Paramètre boîte utilisateur TSI ....................... 11-61 Pas de réponse ....................... 5-6 Passage économie énergie (Fax) .............. 11-8, 11-22 Pause ..................................... 3-27 Paysage ................................. 1-24 Portrait ................................... 1-24 Position en-tête/ pied de page ............. 11-9, 11-32 Position reliure ................. 7-5, 7-9 Programme .................. 2-12, 2-15 .................................... 3-22, 10-25 R Rappel ................................... 3-32 Rapport d'activité .................. 12-5 Rapport d’émission (en relève) ............................ 12-11 13 Annexe 13-14 C250 Rapport d’émission réservée (relève) ................... 12-21 Rapport de communication réservée ............................... 12-19 Rapport de diffusion ............ 12-15 Rapport de diffusion réservée ............................... 12-23 Rapport de réception réservée (relève) .................................12-25 Rapport de relève (réception) ............................ 12-13 Rapport de relève séquentielle (réception) ........ 12-17 Rapport de relève séquentielle réservée (réception) ............. 12-27 Rapport Émission .................. 12-9 Rapport émission bulletin .... 12-31 Rapport réception confidentielle ........................ 12-29 Réception en relève ................. 9-7 Réception en relève (RX) .......... 7-6 Réception mémoire obligatoire ............................ 11-43 Réception PC-fax .................. 2-21 Recherche avancée ............... 3-23 Recherche LDAP ................... 3-24 Recto/Recto-verso ................ 3-14 Réglage comm. ...................... 2-16 Réglage communication ........ 3-17 Réglage E-mail ....................... 3-18 Réglage Émission/ Réception .................11-10, 11-38 Réglage fonction .................. 11-11 Réglage Initial ............11-7, 11-17 Réglage ligne ........................... 7-6 Réglage numérisation .. 2-15, 3-17 Réglage Paramètres ligne .................... 11-9 Réglage paramètres ligne .......... 2-7, 11-35 Réglage Rapports ....11-13, 11-68 Réglage RX fax ...........2-21, 11-56 Réglage Transfert TX ............11-49 Réinitialiser, tableau de commande .................................................2-5 Requête d'émission en relais .7-32 Reset ........................................7-5 RX réseau fermé ...................11-46 S Saisie de texte ........................13-6 Saisie directe ................2-15, 3-26 Sortie RX ..............................11-56 Sujet .....................................10-31 Système prioritaire (Réglages sortie Imprimante/Fax) ...................................11-8, 11-25 T Tableau de commande ............2-4 Texte ....................................10-31 Tonalité ...................................3-26 Type d'image original .............3-12 Type de fichier ................7-6, 7-24 U Utilitaire/Compteur, tableau de commande ...............................2-5 V V34 OFF .........................7-6, 7-38 Vérif. mot de passe RX confidentiel .....................11-53 Vérifier détails de la tâche (Contrôle) ................................3-19 Vitre d'exposition .. 3-8, 3-9, 3-10 Z Zone secondaire ....................2-16 Annexe 13 C250 13-15 13 Annexe 13-16 C250 Opérations Fax x Table des matières C351 x-3 Table des matières 1 Introduction 1.1 Avis aux utilisateurs ......................................................................... 1-4 1.1.1 Canada ........................................................................................... 1-4 1.1.2 U.S.A. ............................................................................................. 1-4 1.1.3 Nouvelle-Zélande ........................................................................... 1-7 1.1.4 Europe ............................................................................................ 1-7 1.2 Mise en route (fax) ............................................................................ 1-8 1.3 Caractéristiques du télécopieur .................................................... 1-10 1.4 Conventions utilisées dans ce manuel ......................................... 1-22 1.5 Descriptions et symboles des documents et du papier ............. 1-24 1.5.1 “Largeur” et “Longueur” .............................................................. 1-24 1.5.2 Orientation du papier ................................................................... 1-24 1.6 Documentation ............................................................................... 1-25 2 Préliminaires 2.1 Restrictions ....................................................................................... 2-3 2.2 Tableau de commande ..................................................................... 2-4 2.2.1 Tableau de commande .................................................................. 2-4 2.3 Réglages de base ............................................................................. 2-7 2.3.1 Réglages indispensables ............................................................... 2-7 2.4 Fonctions utiles ................................................................................. 2-8 2.4.1 Carnet d'adresses .......................................................................... 2-8 2.4.2 Programme .................................................................................. 2-12 2.5 Écran Fax ......................................................................................... 2-15 2.6 Authentification utilisateur et compte de service ........................ 2-17 2.6.1 Si l'authentification utilisateur est paramétrée ............................. 2-17 2.6.2 Si le compte de service est paramétré ........................................ 2-17 2.7 Réception fax dans une boîte ........................................................ 2-18 2.7.1 Types de boîtes ............................................................................ 2-19 2.7.2 Fonctionnement de la Réception PC-fax ..................................... 2-21 x-4 C351 3 Émission 3.1 Émission simple de télécopie ...........................................................3-3 3.2 Positionnement de l'original sur la machine ...................................3-7 3.2.1 Utilisation du chargeur de document (ADF) ....................................3-7 3.2.2 Positionnement des originaux sur la vitre d'exposition ..................3-8 3.2.3 Envoi de plusieurs originaux à partir de la vitre d'exposition .........3-9 3.2.4 Émission d'originaux avec le chargeur ADF et la vitre d'exposition ..................................................................................3-10 3.3 Réglage des conditions d'émission ...............................................3-11 3.3.1 Type d'image original ....................................................................3-12 3.3.2 Densité ..........................................................................................3-13 3.3.3 Recto/Recto-verso ........................................................................3-14 3.3.4 Définition .......................................................................................3-15 3.3.5 Confirmation des réglages et des résultats de la communication 3-16 3.3.6 Enregistrement dans le carnet d'adresses à partir de l'écran Vérifier détails de la tâche .................................................3-19 3.4 Sélection de la destination .............................................................3-21 3.4.1 Sélection de la destination ............................................................3-21 3.4.2 Sélection de plusieurs destinations ..............................................3-28 3.4.3 Confirmation/Suppression d'une destination ...............................3-29 3.4.4 Rappel manuel ..............................................................................3-30 3.5 Numérisation ....................................................................................3-31 3.5.1 Lorsque la machine ne détecte pas le format d'origine ...............3-31 3.5.2 Lorsque la mémoire est saturée ...................................................3-31 3.5.3 Rotation automatique du document original ................................3-31 3.6 Lorsque l'émission ne s'effectue pas ............................................3-32 3.7 Réservation d'émission ...................................................................3-33 3.8 Émission manuelle ..........................................................................3-34 3.9 Annulation de l'émission .................................................................3-35 3.9.1 Annulation d'une communication en cours ..................................3-35 3.9.2 Annulation des tâches réservées ..................................................3-36 3.10 Confirmation de la liste de tâches .................................................3-37 3.11 Confirmation des résultats de la communication ........................3-38 C351 x-5 3.12 Émissions en mémoire et en mémoire rapide ............................. 3-41 3.12.1 Émission mémoire ........................................................................ 3-41 3.12.2 Émission en mémoire rapide ........................................................ 3-41 3.12.3 Pour émettre en mémoire rapide, procédez de la manière suivante. ....................................................................................... 3-42 3.13 Nombre d'originaux ........................................................................ 3-44 3.14 Émission différée (TX) .................................................................... 3-47 3.15 Communications internationales .................................................. 3-50 3.16 Informations sur l'expéditeur ........................................................ 3-53 3.16.1 Réglage à l'intérieur du corps du texte ........................................ 3-53 3.16.2 Réglage à l'extérieur du corps du texte ....................................... 3-53 3.16.3 Réglage sur OFF .......................................................................... 3-54 4 Réception 4.1 Mode Réception ................................................................................ 4-3 4.1.1 Réception automatique (mode fax uniquement) ............................ 4-3 4.1.2 Réception manuelle (mode téléphone uniquement) ...................... 4-3 4.2 Réception automatique (mode fax uniquement) ........................... 4-4 4.3 Réception manuelle (mode téléphone uniquement) ..................... 4-5 4.4 Réception impossible ....................................................................... 4-6 4.5 Réception en mémoire de substitution .......................................... 4-7 4.6 Enregistrement de la réception ....................................................... 4-8 4.6.1 Enregistrement après réduction minimale ..................................... 4-8 4.6.2 Enregistrement après réduction pour convenir au papier d'impression ................................................................................... 4-9 4.7 Informations de réception ............................................................. 4-17 5 Dépannage 5.1 Impossible d'envoyer des messages .............................................. 5-3 5.2 Impossible de recevoir des messages ........................................... 5-4 5.3 Message d'erreur affiché ................................................................. 5-6 5.4 Appeler SAV ...................................................................................... 5-7 x-6 C351 6 Caractéristiques techniques 6.1 Caractéristiques techniques ............................................................6-3 7 Applications d'émission 7.1 Ouverture des écrans Réglage numérisation et Réglage communication ..................................................................................7-3 7.2 Présentation des fonctions d'application .......................................7-5 7.3 Originaux mixtes ................................................................................7-7 7.4 Position reliure ...................................................................................7-9 7.5 Émission avec effacement des bords ...........................................7-12 7.6 Ajustement fond ..............................................................................7-15 7.7 Netteté ..............................................................................................7-18 7.8 Format de numérisation ..................................................................7-21 7.9 Type de fichier .................................................................................7-24 7.10 Mot de passe émission (TX) ...........................................................7-26 7.11 Communication confidentielle (Émission F-code) .......................7-29 7.12 Requête d'émission en relais (Émission F-code) .........................7-32 7.13 ECM OFF ..........................................................................................7-35 7.14 V34 OFF ............................................................................................7-38 8 Fonctions utiles pour la réception 8.1 Utilisation d'un document reçu en réception confidentielle .........8-3 8.1.1 Utilisation d'un document reçu en réception confidentielle ...........8-3 8.1.2 Impression du document reçu dans une boîte utilisateur confidentielle ...................................................................................8-4 8.1.3 Suppression d'un document stocké dans une boîte utilisateur confidentielle ..................................................................8-5 8.2 Réception mémoire ...........................................................................8-6 8.2.1 Impression d'un document mémorisé ............................................8-6 8.2.2 Suppression d'un document mémorisé ..........................................8-8 8.3 Informations de réception ................................................................8-9 8.3.1 Informations sur la réception et l'impression recto-verso ..............8-9 C351 x-7 9 Relève 9.1 Émission en relève ............................................................................ 9-3 9.1.1 Émission en relève ......................................................................... 9-4 9.2 Réception en relève .......................................................................... 9-6 9.3 Bulletin ............................................................................................... 9-9 9.3.1 Écriture d'un document sur le bulletin board ............................... 9-10 9.3.2 Réception en relève d'un document placé sur le bulletin board d'une destination (fax) ....................................................... 9-13 10 Enregistrement/Réglages 10.1 Affichage de l'écran d'enregistrement du télécopieur ................ 10-3 10.2 Enregistrement du carnet d'adresses .......................................... 10-5 10.3 Enregistrement d'un groupe ........................................................ 10-19 10.4 Enregistrement d'un programme ................................................ 10-25 10.5 Enregistrement du sujet et du texte d'un e-mail ....................... 10-31 10.6 Réglage des boîtes confidentielles ............................................. 10-46 10.7 Réglage du bulletin (tableau électronique) ................................ 10-48 10.8 Réglage de la boîte utilisateur réception mémoire ................... 10-49 11 Mode Utilitaire 11.1 Écran mode Utilitaire ...................................................................... 11-3 11.1.1 Accès à l'écran Réglage Utilisateur ............................................. 11-3 11.1.2 Quitter l'écran Réglage Utilisateur ............................................... 11-4 11.1.3 Accès à l'écran Réglage Administrateur ...................................... 11-5 11.1.4 Quitter l'écran Réglage Administrateur ........................................ 11-6 11.2 Liste du mode Utilitaire fax ............................................................ 11-7 11.2.1 Écran FAX - réglage par défaut .................................................... 11-7 11.2.2 Écran Fax actif ............................................................................. 11-7 11.2.3 Réglage Initial ............................................................................... 11-7 11.2.4 Passage économie énergie (Fax) ................................................. 11-8 11.2.5 Système prioritaire (Réglages sortie Imprimante/Fax) ................. 11-8 11.2.6 Information en-tête ....................................................................... 11-8 11.2.7 Position en-tête / pied de page ................................................... 11-9 11.2.8 Réglage Paramètres ligne ............................................................ 11-9 11.2.9 Réglage Émission/Réception ..................................................... 11-10 x-8 C351 11.2.10 Réglage fonction .........................................................................11-11 11.2.11 Définir CN PBX ............................................................................11-12 11.2.12 Réglage Rapports .......................................................................11-13 11.2.13 Liste Paramètres tâche ...............................................................11-13 11.3 Écran Fax réglage par défaut .......................................................11-14 11.4 Réglage Initial ................................................................................11-17 11.5 Écran Fax actif ...............................................................................11-19 11.6 Passage économie énergie (Fax) .................................................11-22 11.7 Système prioritaire (Réglages sortie Imprimante/Fax) ..............11-25 11.8 Information en-tête .......................................................................11-28 11.9 Position en-tête/pied de page ......................................................11-31 11.10 Réglage Paramètres ligne ............................................................11-34 11.11 Réglage Émission/Réception .......................................................11-37 11.12 Réglage fonction ...........................................................................11-40 11.12.1 Réglage fonction ON/OFF ..........................................................11-40 11.12.2 Réception mémoire obligatoire ...................................................11-43 11.12.3 RX réseau fermé .........................................................................11-46 11.12.4 Réglage Transfert TX ..................................................................11-49 11.12.5 Vérification du mot de passe RX confidentiel .............................11-53 11.12.6 Réglage RX fax ...........................................................................11-56 11.12.7 Paramètre boîte utilisateur TSI ...................................................11-60 11.13 Réglage CN PBX (Private Branch Exchange) .............................11-64 11.14 Réglage Rapports ..........................................................................11-66 12 Rapports et listes 12.1 Types de rapports et de listes ........................................................12-3 12.1.1 Rapports .......................................................................................12-3 12.1.2 Listes .............................................................................................12-4 12.2 Rapport d'activité ............................................................................12-5 12.2.1 Impression automatique ...............................................................12-5 12.2.2 Impression manuelle .....................................................................12-5 12.3 Rapport Émission ............................................................................12-9 12.3.1 Impression manuelle .....................................................................12-9 12.3.2 Impression automatique ...............................................................12-9 C351 x-9 12.4 Rapport d'émission (en relève) .................................................... 12-11 12.5 Rapport de relève ......................................................................... 12-13 12.6 Rapport de diffusion ..................................................................... 12-15 12.7 Rapport de relève séquentielle (réception) ................................ 12-17 12.8 Rapport de communication réservée ......................................... 12-19 12.9 Rapport d'émission réservée (relève) ......................................... 12-21 12.10 Rapport de diffusion réservée ..................................................... 12-23 12.11 Rapport de réception réservée (relève) ...................................... 12-25 12.12 Rapport de relève séquentielle réservée (réception) ................ 12-27 12.13 Rapport réception confidentielle ................................................ 12-29 12.14 Rapport Émission bulletin ............................................................ 12-31 12.15 Liste Carnet d'adresses ............................................................... 12-33 12.16 Liste d'adresses de groupe ......................................................... 12-36 12.17 Liste Programme .......................................................................... 12-39 12.18 Liste de Titres/Textes ................................................................... 12-42 12.19 Liste des réglages du fax ............................................................. 12-45 12.19.1 Liste confidentielle/bulletin ........................................................ 12-49 12.19.2 Boîte émetteur (TSI) ................................................................... 12-50 13 Annexe 13.1 Nombre de pages mémorisées ..................................................... 13-3 13.2 Saisie de texte ................................................................................. 13-4 13.3 Glossaire .......................................................................................... 13-7 13.4 Index .............................................................................................. 13-12 x-10 C351 1 Introduction Introduction 1 C351 1-3 1 Introduction Nous vous remercions d'avoir porté votre choix sur le photocopieur électronique numérique Konica Minolta. Ce manuel d'utilisation décrit les procédures d'utilisation des fonctions fax de la machine, ainsi que les précautions à prendre. Veuillez lire ce manuel avant de commencer à utiliser la machine. Après avoir lu ce manuel, nous vous recommandons de le conserver à portée de main pour pouvoir le consulter à tout moment, et assurer ainsi le fonctionnement optimum des fonctions fax. Pour garantir le fonctionnement correct de la machine, lisez également le “Manuel d'utilisation – Opérations Copie” avant de commencer. Marques KONICA MINOLTA, le logo KONICA MINOLTA et les unités d'image sont des marques déposées ou commerciales de KONICA MINOLTA HOLDINGS, INC. PageScope et bizhub sont des marques déposées ou commerciales de KONICA MINOLTA BUSINESS TECHNOLOGIES, INC. Adobe, le logo Adobe, Acrobat, le logo Acrobat, PostScript et le logo PostScript sont des marques déposées ou commerciales d'Adobe Systems, Inc. Les autres noms de sociétés ou de produits référencés dans ce manuel sont les marques déposées ou commerciales de leurs détenteurs respectifs. Copyright © 2005 KONICA MINOLTA BUSINESS TECHNOLOGIES, INC. Tous droits réservés. Exemption Avis relatif à la documentation - Tout ou partie de ce manuel d'utilisateur peut être utilisé ou copié sans autorisation. - Les informations contenues dans ce manuel peuvent être modifiées sans avis préalable. 1 Introduction 1-4 C351 1.1 Avis aux utilisateurs 1.1.1 Canada NOTICE: This product meets the applicable Industry Canada technical specifications. The ringer equivalence number (REN) is an indication of the maximum number of devices allowed to be connected to a telephone interface. The termination on an interface may consist of any combination of devices subject only to the requirement that the sum of the RENs of all the devices does not exceed five. AVIS : Ce produit est conforme aux normes définies par Industrie Canada. L'indice d'équivalence de la sonnerie (IES) sert à indiquer le nombre maximum de terminaux qui peuvent être raccordés à une interface téléphonique. La terminaison d'une interface peut comporter une combinaison quelconque de dispositifs, du moment que la somme des indices d'équivalence de la sonnerie de tous les dispositifs n'excède pas 5. 1.1.2 U.S.A. Réglementation 68 de la FCC Cet équipement est conforme à l'article 68 de la réglementation FCC, et aux exigences adoptées par l'ACTA. La certification est signalée par une étiquette apposée sur l'équipement, indiquant entre autres, l'identification du produit au format US:AAAEQ##TXXXX. Cette identification peut être fournie à l'opérateur téléphonique, sur demande. Cet équipement utilise la certification de la fiche USOC RJ11C. La prise téléphonique utilisée pour brancher cet équipement sur le réseau de câblage téléphonique doit être conforme à l'article 68 de la réglementation FCC applicable, et aux exigences adoptées par l'ACTA. Un cordon de téléphone et une prise enfichable compatibles sont fournis avec ce produit. Ils doivent être connectés au jack modulaire compatible également conforme. Pour plus d'informations, voir les instructions d'installation. L'indice d'équivalence de la sonnerie (IES) détermine le nombre d'appareils pouvant être connectés à la ligne téléphonique. Un nombre excessif d'IES sur une ligne peut provoquer l'absence de sonnerie sur un appareil en réponse à un appel entrant. Dans la plupart des régions, le nombre d'IES ne doit pas être supérieur à 5. Contactez votre opérateur téléphonique local pour connaître le nombre d'appareils pouvant être connectés à la ligne. Sur les produits approuvés Introduction 1 C351 1-5 après le 23 juillet 2001, l'IES est indiqué sur l'étiquette d'identification du produit au format US:AAAEQ##TXXXX où ## représente l'IES, sans point décimal (ex : 03 est l'IES de 0.3). Sur les produits antérieurs, l'IES est indiqué séparément sur l'étiquette. Si cet équipement FK-502 nuit au réseau téléphonique, l'opérateur de téléphone vous préviendra de la possibilité d'interruption provisoire du service. Si l'avis préalable n'est pas possible, l'opérateur avisera le client dans les plus brefs délais. Vous serez également avisé de vos droits d'enregistrement d'une plainte auprès de la FCC, s'il y a lieu. Les modifications apportées par l'opérateur téléphonique à ses installations, son équipement, ses opérations ou ses procédures peut avoir des répercussions sur le fonctionnement de l'équipement. Dans ces circonstances, l'opérateur vous préviendra à l'avance des modifications que vous devez apporter pour garantir le service ininterrompu. En cas de problème avec cet équipement FK-502, et pour connaître les informations de garantie et de réparation, contactez votre revendeur local Konica Minolta. Si l'équipement nuit au réseau téléphonique, l'opérateur de téléphone peut vous demander de le débrancher jusqu'à ce que le problème soit résolu. La connexion à un service de ligne partagée est soumise aux tarifs en vigueur dans l'état. Contactez la commission des services publics pour obtenir plus d'informations. Si votre domicile est équipé d'un câblage d'alarme relié à la ligne de téléphone, assurez-vous que l'installation du FK-502 ne désactive pas l'équipement d'alarme. Pour plus d'informations à ce sujet, contactez votre opérateur téléphonique ou un installateur qualifié. La réglementation pour la protection des consommateurs de téléphone (Telephone Consumer Protection Act) de 1991 stipule qu'il est contraire à la loi d'utiliser un ordinateur ou tout autre appareil électronique, télécopieur compris, pour envoyer des messages, à moins que ces messages n'indiquent clairement en haut ou en bas de la première page transmise, la date et l'heure de l'envoi, l'identification de l'entreprise, entité ou individu expéditeur du message, ainsi que le numéro de téléphone de la machine expéditrice ou de ladite entreprise, entité ou individu. (Le numéro de téléphone fourni ne doit être ni un numéro 900 ni tout autre numéro pour lequel les frais d'expédition dépassent les frais de communication locaux, nationaux ou internationaux.) Pour programmer ces informations sur votre télécopieur, vous devez exécuter la procédure détaillée à la section “Information en-tête” à la page 11-28. 1 Introduction 1-6 C351 Symboles d'avertissement et d'attention 7 AVERTISSEMENT Un point d'exclamation dans un triangle, suivi du terme “Avertissement”, avertit l'utilisateur que le non-respect de cet avertissement peut provoquer des blessures graves, voire mortelles. % Veillez à bien observer les avertissements énumérés dans ce manuel. 7 ATTENTION Un point d'exclamation dans un triangle, suivi du terme “Attention”, avertit l'utilisateur que le non-respect de cette précaution peut provoquer des blessures ou des dommages matériels. % Veillez à bien observer les précautions énumérées dans ce manuel. Introduction 1 C351 1-7 1.1.3 Nouvelle-Zélande Avis - Cet appareil est équipé de la numérotation par impulsions alors que la norme Telecom est la Double Tonalité Multi-Fréquence (DTMF). Il n'y a aucune garantie que les lignes Telecom continueront à prendre en charge la numérotation par impulsions. - L'utilisation de la numérotation par impulsions lorsque cet équipement est relié à la même ligne que d'autres équipements, peut entraîner un son de cloche ou du bruit, ou encore une condition de réponse erronée. Dans ce cas, l'utilisateur ne doit pas contacter le service de dépannage Telecom (Telecom Fault Service). - Il est possible que cet équipement ne puisse pas transférer un appel vers un autre appareil raccordé à la même ligne. - Cet équipement n'est pas entièrement conforme aux exigences d'impédance de Telecom. La performance peut être réduite lorsqu'il est utilisé conjointement avec d'autres parties du réseau. Telecom ne saurait être responsable des problèmes pouvant subvenir dans de telles conditions d'utilisation. - L'octroi d'une autorisation de téléphonie pour tout élément d'un équipement terminal indique uniquement l'acceptation par Telecom de la conformité de l'élément avec les conditions minimales de connexion à son réseau. Cela n'indique pas l'approbation du produit par Telecom, et ne fournit aucune garantie. En particulier, cela n'offre aucune garantie de fonctionnement correct d'un élément quelconque avec un autre élément d'un équipement d'un autre fabricant ou modèle ayant reçu une autorisation de téléphonie, de même que cela n'implique pas qu'un produit est compatible avec tous les services de réseau Telecom. - Les fonctions d'appel automatique de cet équipement ne doivent pas être utilisées de façon à produire des nuisances pour le reste de la clientèle. - L'équipement faisant l'objet d'une autorisation de téléphonie ne peut être raccordé qu'au port de téléphone auxiliaire. Ce port n'est pas spécifiquement conçu pour une connexion à trois fils, et ce type de connexion risque de ne pas répondre à une sonnerie entrante. 1.1.4 Europe Ce télécopieur a reçu l'agrément, conformément à la décision 1999/5/ CE du Conseil, concernant la connexion paneuropéenne de terminal unique aux réseaux téléphoniques publics commutés (RTPC). Toutefois, en raison des différences entre les RTPC d'un pays à un autre, l'agrément en soi ne constitue pas une garantie absolue de fonctionnement optimal à chaque point de terminaison du réseau RTPC. En cas de problème, vous devez contacter en premier lieu le fournisseur de l'appareil. Le label CE doit être apposé sur le produit ou sur son étiquette de données, sur l'emballage du produit, s'il y a lieu, et sur les documents qui l'accompagnent. 1 Introduction 1-8 C351 1.2 Mise en route (fax) Émission Procédez comme suit pour envoyer un fax. 1 Appuyez sur [Fax] sur le tableau de commande pour passer en mode Fax. 2 Au besoin, définissez le réglage des fonctions. Écran Fax Écran Réglage numérisation Écran Application Écran Réglage communication Introduction 1 C351 1-9 3 Tapez le numéro de fax de la destination sur le clavier. – Si vous faites une faute de frappe, appuyez sur [Eff.] pour effacer les chiffres un par un. – Appuyez sur [C] (clear) pour effacer tout le numéro. 4 Placez l'original sur la machine. – Pour plus d'informations, voir “Positionnement de l'original sur la machine” à la page 3-7. 5 Appuyez sur [Départ] sur le tableau de commande. 1 Introduction 1-10 C351 1.3 Caractéristiques du télécopieur Impression du nombre total de pages sur le fax En mode Mémoire rapide, vous pouvez placer le nombre total de pages sur chaque page du fax. Cette possibilité est utile au destinataire, qui peut vérifier s'il a bien reçu toutes les pages. ! Détail Pour plus d'informations, voir “Nombre d'originaux” à la page 3-44. Émission différée d'un fax Vous pouvez préciser l'heure à laquelle le fax devra être envoyé : la nuit ou tôt le matin, par exemple, pour profiter des heures creuses. ! Détail Pour plus d'informations, voir “Émission différée (TX)” à la page 3-47. De : 01234567890123456 2004 /12 /31 23:59 P.005 / 010 Introduction 1 C351 1-11 Émission dès qu'une page est lue. (Mémoire rapide) Avec cette méthode, l'émission du fax commence dès qu'une page de l'original a été numérisée. ! Détail Pour plus d'informations, voir “Émissions en mémoire et en mémoire rapide” à la page 3-41. Envoi de fax à l'étranger Vous pouvez sélectionner une vitesse de transmission moindre lorsque vous envoyez un fax dans un pays où les conditions de communication ne sont pas bonnes. ! Détail Pour plus d'informations, voir “Communications internationales” à la page 3-50. 1 Introduction 1-12 C351 Émission avec effacement des bords Vous pouvez envoyer un fax après effacement des bandes noires reproduites lors de la numérisation d'un document relié. Vous pouvez également définir la largeur de la bordure à effacer. ! Détail Pour plus d'informations, voir “Émission avec effacement des bords” à la page 7-12. Largeur à effacer Émission standard Émission avec effacement des bords Introduction 1 C351 1-13 Émission d'un fax en mode format d'origine Vous pouvez envoyer un fax en précisant le format de papier du document. Cette fonction est utile pour n'envoyer qu'une partie de l'original. ! Détail Pour plus d'informations, voir “Format de numérisation” à la page 7-21. 1 Introduction 1-14 C351 Envoi de pages de différents formats en une seule opération. Vous pouvez envoyer des pages de différents formats parce que le télécopieur reconnaît chacun des formats et les traite en conséquence lorsque la fonction Originaux mixtes est activée. ! Détail Pour plus d'informations, voir “Originaux mixtes” à la page 7-7. Émission et reproduction dans le même format que l'original à la destination. Vous placez les originaux mixtes dans le chargeur RADF. Introduction 1 C351 1-15 Spécification du style de reliure d'un document recto/verso Vous pouvez préciser le style de reliure approprié (Gauche/Droite ou Haut/ Bas) lors l'émission d'un document recto/verso. Ainsi, les pages du document sont lues dans le bon ordre. ! Détail Pour plus d'informations, voir “Position reliure” à la page 7-9. Envoi d'un fax à la réception d'une commande de relève du destinataire Vous pouvez envoyer un fax, qui a été lu et stocké sur le disque dur du télécopieur, lorsque le destinataire envoie une commande de relève. ! Détail Pour plus d'informations, voir “Réception en relève” à la page 9-6. Reliure Gauche/Droite Reliure Haut/Bas Fax de destination Émission 1 Introduction 1-16 C351 Envoi d'un fax avec la fonction ECM OFF Vous pouvez désactiver la fonction de correction d'erreur (ECM) pour réduire le temps d'émission. ! Détail Pour plus d'informations, voir “ECM OFF” à la page 7-35. Document à relever Vous pouvez placer les documents à relever sur le bulletin board (tableau électronique) du disque dur pour l'émission ou la réception en relève. ! Détail Pour plus d'informations, voir “Bulletin” à la page 9-9. Émission d'un fax avec le mode Super G3 désactivé Vous pouvez envoyer un fax après désactivation du mode Super G3 si le protocole V.34 n'est pas disponible en raison de restrictions sur le PBX. ! Détail Pour plus d'informations, voir “V34 OFF” à la page 7-38. Introduction 1 C351 1-17 Fax relayé Vous pouvez envoyer un fax à une destination via une station de relais intermédiaire. ! Détail Pour plus d'informations, voir “Requête d'émission en relais (Émission Fcode)” à la page 7-32. Cette machine ne peut pas fonctionner en tant que relais. Station d'origine Station relais intermédiaire Station distante Appel international Station distante Appel local 1 Introduction 1-18 C351 Utilisation d'une boîte confidentielle Vous pouvez utiliser une boîte confidentielle (similaire à une boîte de réception personnalisée) pour échanger des informations confidentielles avec certaines personnes. ! Détail Pour plus d'informations, voir “Communication confidentielle (Émission F-code)” à la page 7-29. Envoi d'un fax protégé par un mot de passe Vous pouvez envoyer un fax protégé par un mot de passe si le récepteur fonctionne en réseau fermé. ! Détail Pour plus d'informations, voir “Mot de passe émission (TX)” à la page 7-26. Expéditeur Boîte de documents Récepteur confidentiels Introduction 1 C351 1-19 Ajustement de la densité de la couleur de fond Vous pouvez envoyer un fax après ajustement de la couleur de fond de l'original. ! Détail Pour plus d'informations, voir “Ajustement fond” à la page 7-15. Ajustement de la netteté du contour des caractères Vous pouvez envoyer un fax après ajustement de la netteté du contour des caractères pour améliorer la qualité de l'impression. ! Détail Pour plus d'informations, voir “Netteté” à la page 7-18. 1 Introduction 1-20 C351 Envoi d'un e-mail à partir de l'écran Fax Un original numérisé peut être envoyé en tant qu'e-mail de l'écran Fax à un ordinateur. ! Détail Pour plus d'informations, voir “Saisie directe” à la page 3-26. Sauvegarde dans une boîte Un original numérisé peut être sauvegardé dans une boîte créée sur le disque dur interne. Serveur de messagerie E-mail Disque dur Boîte Introduction 1 C351 1-21 ! Détail Pour plus d'informations, voir “Réception fax dans une boîte” à la page 2-18. 1 Introduction 1-22 C351 1.4 Conventions utilisées dans ce manuel Cette section décrit les symboles et polices utilisés dans ce manuel. Conseils de sécurité 6 DANGER Le non-respect des instructions signalées de cette manière peut entraîner des blessures graves, voire mortelles liées à la puissance électrique. % Observez ces instructions à la lettre pour éviter tout risque de blessures. 7 AVERTISSEMENT Le non-respect des instructions signalées de cette manière peut entraîner des blessures graves ou endommager le matériel. % Observez ces instructions à la lettre pour prévenir tout risque de blessures et garantir le fonctionnement sécurisé de la machine. 7 ATTENTION Le non-respect des instructions signalées de cette manière peut entraîner des blessures légère ou endommager l'installation. % Observez ces instructions à la lettre pour prévenir tout risque de blessures et garantir le fonctionnement sécurisé de la machine. Séquence d'une procédure 1 Le numéro 1, tel que formaté ici, indique la première étape d'une procédure. 2 Les numéros suivants, tels que formatés ici, indiquent les étapes suivantes d'une procédure. ? Le texte formaté dans ce style fournit des informations complémentaires. % Le texte formaté dans ce style décrit les actions qui garantiront l'obtention des résultats voulus. Une illustration insérée ici montre les opérations à effectuer. Introduction 1 C351 1-23 Conseils 2 Remarque Les remarques fournissent des informations utiles et des conseils d'utilisation sécurisée de la machine. 2 Rappel Les rappels signalent des informations importantes qu'il convient de ne pas oublier. ! Détail Les Détails réfèrent à des sections ou à des documents fournissant des informations plus détaillées. Conventions typographiques Touche [Arrêt] Le nom des touches du tableau de commande est indiqué dans cette police, entre crochets. REGLAGE MACHINE Signale les termes affichés à l'écran. 1 Introduction 1-24 C351 1.5 Descriptions et symboles des documents et du papier Les termes et symboles utilisés dans ce manuel sont expliqués ci-dessous. 1.5.1 “Largeur” et “Longueur” Chaque fois que des dimensions de papier sont mentionnées dans ce manuel, la première valeur se réfère à la largeur du papier (illustrée ci-contre par un “Y”) et la seconde valeur à la longueur (illustrée cicontre par un “X”). 1.5.2 Orientation du papier Portrait (w) Si la largeur (Y) du papier est plus courte que la longueur (X) du papier, il a une orientation verticale ou portrait, signalée par w. Paysage (v) Si la largeur (Y) du papier est plus longue que la longueur (X) du papier, il a une orientation horizontale ou paysage, signalée par v. Introduction 1 C351 1-25 1.6 Documentation Les manuels d'utilisation suivants ont été préparés pour cette machine. Manuel d'utilisation – Opérations Copie Ce manuel décrit le fonctionnement de base de la machine, ainsi que les procédures des fonctions de copie. - Consultez ce manuel pour connaître les procédures détaillées des fonctions de copie, notamment les précautions d'installation et d'utilisation, la mise sous/hors tension de la machine, le chargement du papier, et les opérations de dépannage, dans le cas d'un bourrage papier par exemple. Manuel d'utilisation – Opérations Scanner réseau Ce manuel décrit en détail les procédures de configuration du réseau (équipement standard) et d'utilisation des fonctions de numérisation. - Consultez ce manuel pour connaître les procédures détaillées des fonctions de réseau, et d'utilisation de la numérisation vers un e-mail, vers FTP et vers un PC (SMB). Manuel d'utilisation – Opérations Boîte Ce manuel décrit en détail les procédures d'utilisation des boîtes. - Consultez ce manuel pour connaître les procédures d'utilisation des boîtes stockées sur le disque dur. User utilities CD Manuel d'utilisation - Opérations Impression Ce manuel décrit en détail les procédures d'utilisation du contrôleur d'impression standard intégré. - Consultez ce manuel pour connaître les procédures d'utilisation des fonctions d'impression. Post Script CD PageScope utility CD Ce manuel décrit en détail les procédures d'impression. - Consultez ce manuel pour connaître les procédures d'utilisation des fonctions d'impression. Manuel d'utilisation – Opérations fax (ce manuel) Ce manuel décrit en détail les procédures d'utilisation du fax. - Consultez ce manuel pour connaître les procédures d'utilisation des fonctions fax si le kit de fax est installé. 1 Introduction 1-26 C351 Manuel d'utilisation – Zoom Écran Ce manuel décrit en détail les procédures d'utilisation des fonctions de copie en mode d'affichage étendu. - Consultez ce manuel pour connaître les procédures d'utilisation du mode d'affichage étendu. 2 Préliminaires Préliminaires 2 C351 2-3 2 Préliminaires 2.1 Restrictions 2 Remarque L'émission et la réception de fax couleur ne sont pas disponibles sur ce télécopieur. Ce télécopieur peut être raccordé aux lignes téléphoniques suivantes. - Lignes locales (réseaux de communication fax compris) - PBX (standard privé avec commutateur à 2 fils) Tenir compte des points suivants en ce qui concerne la ligne téléphonique. - Un poste téléphonique d'affaires ne peut pas être connecté en tant que ligne extérieure. - Si les liaisons privées numériques sont multiplexées sur le réseau d'entreprise, les communications fax peuvent être soumises aux restrictions suivantes. – La vitesse de transmission est réduite. – La communication via Super G3 n'est pas disponible. Les réglages définis en usine peuvent parfois générer des erreurs de communication dues au multiplexage qui limite au maximum la bande disponible pour la ligne, sur l'hypothèse d'une utilisation vocale. Ces restrictions dépendent toutefois du matériel de réseau. Pour plus d'informations sur le réseau utilisé, contactez l'administrateur. 2 Rappel L'appui répété sur l'interrupteur Marche/Arrêt peut entraîner un dysfonctionnement de la machine. Attendez au moins 5 secondes après avoir éteint la machine avant de la rallumer. 2 Préliminaires 2-4 C351 2.2 Tableau de commande 2.2.1 Tableau de commande 1 2 3 5 8 9 11 12 24 10 21 2019 18 17 1514 13 22 23 16 4 6 7 No. Nom Description 1 [Eco énergie] Appuyez sur cette touche pour passer en mode Économie d'énergie. Sous ce mode, le voyant de la touche [Eco énergie] est vert et l'écran tactile s'éteint. Pour annuler ce mode, réappuyez sur la touche [Eco énergie]. 2 Écran tactile Affiche divers écrans et messages. Réglez les fonctions en touchant l'écran. 3 [Code] Si l'authentification utilisateur ou le compte de service a été activé, appuyez sur cette touche après avoir entré le nom utilisateur et le mot de passe (pour l'authentification utilisateur) ou le nom du compte et le mot de passe (pour le compte de service), pour utiliser la machine. 4 [Boîte] Appuyez sur cette touche pour passer en mode Boîte. Sous ce mode, le voyant de la touche [Boîte] est vert. Pour plus d'informations, voir "Manuel d'utilisation – Opérations Boîte". 5 [Fax] Appuyez sur cette touche pour passer en mode Fax. Sous ce mode, le voyant de la touche [Fax] est vert. 6 [Numérisation] Appuyez sur cette touche pour passer en mode Numérisation. Sous ce mode, le voyant de la touche [Numérisation] est vert. Pour plus d'informations, voir "Manuel d'utilisation – Opérations Scanner réseau". 7 [Copie] Appuyez sur cette touche pour passer en mode Copie. Sous ce mode, le voyant de la touche [Copie] est vert. Pour plus d'informations, voir "Manuel d'utilisation – Opérations Copie". Préliminaires 2 C351 2-5 8 [Réinitialiser] Appuyez sur cette touche pour remettre à zéro tous les réglages (à l'exception des réglages programmés) entrés sur le tableau de commande et l'écran tactile. 9 [Interruption] L'écran Copie s'affiche après la numérisation de documents originaux, puis la machine passe en mode Interruption. Sous ce mode, le voyant de la touche [Interruption] est vert et le message “Mode interruption en cours” s'affiche sur l'écran tactile. Pour annuler le mode Interruption, réappuyez sur la touche [Interruption]. 10 [INTERRUPTEUR] Appuyez sur cet interrupteur Marche/Arrêt pour allumer/ éteindre la machine. Lorsque la machine est éteinte, elle passe en veille (conservation d'énergie). 11 [Arrêt] Cette option n'est pas utilisée en mode Fax. 12 [Départ] Appuyez sur cette touche pour démarrer l'opération sélectionnée en mode Boîte, Fax, Numérisation ou Copie. En mode Fax, appuyez sur cette touche pour démarrer la transmission. Lorsque la machine est prête, le voyant de la touche [Départ] est vert. Lorsque le voyant de la touche [Départ] est orange, l'opération ne peut pas commencer. Appuyez sur cette touche pour redémarrer une tâche interrompue. Pour plus d'informations sur une tâche interrompue, voir "Manuel d'utilisation – Opérations Copie". 13 Voyant [Alimentation] Lorsque la machine est mise sous tension avec le bouton [Alimentation], le voyant est vert. 14 Voyant [Données] Clignote en vert pendant la réception d'une tâche d'impression. S'allume en vert pendant l'impression de données. 15 [Epreuve] Cette touche n'est pas utilisée en mode Fax. 16 Clavier Utilisez ce clavier pour taper le numéro ou enregistrer le numéro et les données d'un fax. Utilisez ce clavier pour saisir le nombre de copies, le taux d'agrandissement et d'autres réglages. 17 [C] ( de “clear” - effacer) Appuyez sur cette touche pour effacer une valeur (un numéro de fax, un nombre de copies, un taux d'agrandissement, un format, etc.) saisie au clavier. 18 [Contrôle] Appuyez sur cette touche pour vérifier les réglages. 19 [Utilitaire/Compteur] Appuyez sur cette touche pour afficher l'écran Utilitaire, dans le cas d'une opération utilitaire ou pour confirmer le nombre de copies, la communication fax ou la numérisation, par exemple. 20 [Programmes] Cette touche n'est pas utilisée en mode Fax. 21 Contraste Utilisez cette touche pour ajuster le contraste sur l'écran tactile. 22 [Zoom Ecran] Cette touche n'est pas utilisée en mode Fax. 23 [Accessibilité] Appuyez sur cette touche pour afficher l'écran de réglage des fonctions d'accessibilité utilisateur. No. Nom Description 2 Préliminaires 2-6 C351 2 Rappel Ne pas appuyer trop fort sur l'écran tactile; cela risquerait de l'érafler ou de l'endommager. Ne jamais exercer de forte pression sur l'écran tactile, et ne jamais sélectionner une option de cet écran avec un objet dur ou pointu. Lorsque l'écran d'appel du service après-vente s'affiche et qu'il est impossible de poursuivre les opérations de copie, un dysfonctionnement s'est produit. Prendre note du code d'erreur, débrancher immédiatement la machine, puis contacter le service après-vente. 24 [Aide] Appuyez sur cette touche pour afficher l'écran d'aide principal et accéder aux descriptions des fonctions et du fonctionnement. Pour plus d'informations, voir "Manuel d'utilisation – Opérations Copie". No. Nom Description Préliminaires 2 C351 2-7 2.3 Réglages de base 2.3.1 Réglages indispensables Une fois la machine installée, vous devez procéder aux réglages suivants avant d'utiliser les fonctions de télécopie. La communication fax est bloquée tant que ces réglages ne sont pas définis correctement. - Information en-tête – Enregistre le numéro et le nom du fax. - Réglage Paramètres ligne – Définit la ligne téléphonique et la méthode de réception utilisées. Information en-tête Réglez les options suivantes. ! Détail Pour plus d'informations, voir “Information en-tête” à la page 11-28. Réglage Paramètres ligne Réglez les options suivantes. ! Détail Pour plus d'informations, voir “Réglage Paramètres ligne” à la page 11-34. Option Description Nom expéditeur Définit le nom de cette machine. Ce nom de 30 caractères maximum peut comporter tout caractère alphanumérique et tout signe. Nº de fax expéditeur Définit le numéro de fax de cette machine. Ce numéro de 20 caractères maximum peut comporter tout chiffre de 0 à 9, le signe +, des espaces, le signe * et le signe #. Option Description Méthode de numérotation Sélectionnez le mode de numérotation à fréquences vocales (DTMF) ou à impulsions (décimale). Mode réception Choisissez entre la réception automatique ou manuelle. Sélectionnez “Récept. auto” pour la réception automatique. Sélectionnez “Réception manuelle” si vous recevez fréquemment des appels sur un combiné externe connecté à la machine. 2 Préliminaires 2-8 C351 2.4 Fonctions utiles Si le programme et le carnet d'adresses ont été enregistrés, il suffit d'appuyer sur [Programme] ou [Carnet d'adresses] pour appeler un numéro ou exécuter un programme enregistré. 2.4.1 Carnet d'adresses En enregistrant dans le [Carnet d'adresses] une destination à laquelle vous transmettez régulièrement , il suffit ensuite d'appuyer sur [Carnet d'adresses] pour afficher et appeler cette destination. ! Détail Si le nom et son caractère de recherche sont enregistrés dans le carnet d'adresses, vous pouvez spécifier une adresse par son caractère de recherche. Carnet d'adresses Cette section décrit les procédures de réglage du numéro de fax, du nom de la destination et du caractère de recherche d'une destination abrégée. 1 Appuyez sur [Utilitaire/Compteur] sur le tableau de commande pour ouvrir l'écran Utilitaire, si ce n'est pas déjà fait. – Vous pouvez enregistrer jusqu'à 2 000 (001 à 2000) adresses dans le carnet d'adresses, y compris dans les carnets d'adresses d'autres fonctions de la machine. – Vous pouvez confirmer les informations enregistrées dans la liste de numéros abrégés. 2 Appuyez sur [Enregistrement 1-touche]. – En mode Utilitaire, vous pouvez sélectionner une fonction en tapant son numéro au clavier. Pour [Enregistrement 1-touche], tapez 1 au clavier. Préliminaires 2 C351 2-9 3 Appuyez sur [Fax]. 4 Appuyez sur [Carnet d'adresses]. 5 Appuyez sur la destination à enregistrer. – Les éléments que vous pouvez enregistrer dans le carnet d'adresses sont les suivants. – [No. abrégé] : Pour enregistrer un numéro de fax. – [E-mail] : Pour enregistrer une adresse e-mail. Cette machine peut spécifier une adresse e-mail en tant que destination fax. – Cette fonction est utile pour transmettre une image à une adresse e-mail en même temps qu'une émission fax. – [Boîte utilisateur] : Pour enregistrer un nom de boîte. Cette machine peut spécifier une boîte sur le disque dur interne en tant que destination fax. – Cette fonction est utile pour sauvegarder une image dans une boîte en même temps qu'une émission fax. 2 Préliminaires 2-10 C351 – Si le numéro abrégé est déjà enregistré, vous pouvez appuyer sur [Modif.] sur cet écran pour modifier le contenu de la liste. Pour plus d'informations, voir “Enregistrement d'une adresse e-mail dans le carnet d'adresses” à la page 10-9. 6 Appuyez sur [Nouveau]. 7 Appuyez sur [Nom], saisissez le nom à enregistrer, puis appuyez sur [OK]. – Pour plus d'informations sur la saisie des caractères, voir page 13-4. – Le nom peut comporter 24 caractères maximum. 8 Saisissez la destination. – Si vous avez sélectionné [No. abrégé] à l'étape 5. Tapez sur le clavier le numéro de fax de la destination. – Si vous avez sélectionné [E-mail] à l'étape 5. Appuyez sur [Adresse E-mail] et saisissez l'adresse e-mail. – Si vous avez sélectionné [Boîte utilisateur] à l'étape 5. Appuyez sur [Nom boîte ut.] et sélectionnez la boîte. – Les numéros peuvent comporter 38 caractères maximum. – Un numéro disponible est affiché par défaut dans le champ [No.]. – Pour corriger une faute de frappe, utilisez [Suppri.] ou [C] (clear). – Pour pouvoir sélectionner une boîte, celle-ci doit avoir été préalablement enregistrée. – Pour plus d'informations sur l'enregistrement des boîtes, voir “Manuel d'utilisation – Opérations Boîte”. 9 Appuyez sur [Index] pour saisir les caractères de recherche, puis sur [OK]. – Appuyez sur la touche à enregistrer comme caractère de recherche parmi les touches [ABC] à [etc]. Préliminaires 2 C351 2-11 10 Appuyez sur [Réglage ligne], le cas échéant, pour sélectionner [Communications internationales], [ECM OFF] ou [V34 OFF], puis appuyez sur [OK]. – Si vous avez sélectionné [E-mail] ou [Boîte utilisateur] à l'étape 5, [Réglage ligne] n'apparaît pas. 11 Appuyez sur [OK]. La destination est enregistrée et apparaît dans la liste. Pour enregistrer une autre destination dans le carnet d'adresses, passez à l'étape 6. 12 Appuyez sur [Quitt.]. 2 Préliminaires 2-12 C351 2.4.2 Programme En enregistrant dans un [Programme] la destination et les fonctions de communication, il suffit d'appuyer sur [Programme] pour récupérer ces informations. ! Détail Vous pouvez enregistrer le Réglage numérisation et le Réglage communication. Pour plus d'informations, voir “Enregistrement d'un programme” à la page 10-25. Programme Cette section décrit les procédures d'enregistrement d'un nom et d'une destination dans un [Programme]. 1 Appuyez sur [Utilitaire/Compteur] sur le tableau de commande pour ouvrir l'écran Utilitaire, si ce n'est pas déjà fait. – Vous pouvez enregistrer 400 (001 à 400) programmes maximum. 2 Appuyez sur [Enregistrement 1-touche]. – En mode Utilitaire, vous pouvez également taper sur le clavier le numéro de l'option pour la sélectionner. Pour [Enregistrement 1- touche], tapez “1” sur le clavier. 3 Appuyez sur [Fax]. 4 Appuyez sur [Programme]. Préliminaires 2 C351 2-13 5 Sélectionnez le numéro de programme à enregistrer et appuyez sur [Modif.]. 6 Appuyez sur [Nom], saisissez le nom du programme, puis appuyez sur [OK]. – Le nom peut comporter 24 caractères maximum. – Pour plus d'informations sur la saisie des caractères, voir page 13-4. 2 Préliminaires 2-14 C351 7 Appuyez sur [Dest.] pour sélectionner la destination. – Pour enregistrer une destination déjà enregistrée, sélectionnez [Sélection dans Carnet d'adresses] pour la saisir dans [No. abrégé], [Boîte utilisateur], [Groupe] ou [E-Mail], puis appuyez sur [OK]. – Pour saisir un numéro de fax, appuyez sur [Saisie directe], entrez une destination en sélectionnant No. abrégé, Boîte utilisateur ou EMail, puis appuyez sur [OK]. – Pour corriger une faute de frappe, utilisez [Suppri.] ou [C] (clear). – Pour pouvoir sélectionner une boîte, celle-ci doit avoir été préalablement enregistrée. – Pour plus d'informations sur l'enregistrement des boîtes, voir “Manuel d’utilisation – Opérations Boîte”. 8 Appuyez sur [Fermer], puis sur [OK]. – Pour annuler l'enregistrement du programme, appuyez sur [Annul.]. La liste de programmes s'affiche. Pour enregistrer un autre programme, passez à l'étape 5. 9 Appuyez sur [Quitt.]. Préliminaires 2 C351 2-15 2.5 Écran Fax L'écran Fax s'affiche lorsque vous appuyez sur [Fax] sur le tableau de commande. Cet écran comprend [Programme], [Groupe], [Carnet d'adresses] ou [Saisie directe]. 1 2 3 4 5 678 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 No. Nom Description 1 Liste tâches Affiche la liste des tâches en file d'attente, l'historique des tâches et les erreurs. 2 Programme Affiche l'écran de sélection d'un programme. 3 Groupe Affiche l'écran de sélection d'un groupe. 4 Carnet d'adresses Affiche l'écran de sélection d'un carnet d'adresses. 5 Saisie directe Affiche l'écran de numérotation à l'aide de symboles spéciaux tels que Tonalité et Pause. Appuyez sur [Numérisation vers E-Mail] pour afficher le clavier de saisie de l'adresse e-mail. 6 No. de destinat. Le nombre de destinations de l'émission s'affiche. 7 Mémoire La mémoire disponible s'affiche. 8 Décrocher Appuyez sur cette touche pour émettre/recevoir un fax manuellement. Vous entendez ainsi les signaux sur la ligne. 9 Nom dest. Vous pouvez basculer entre l'affichage du nom ou du numéro de téléphone de la destination. 10 Indicateur de page Affiche le numéro de page de la liste de destinations programmées. 11 Liste pages Permet de préciser le numéro de page de la liste de destinations programmées. 12 Réglage numéris. Affiche un menu dans lequel est réglée la méthode de lecture de l'original, telle que type d'image originale, définition ou application. 2 Préliminaires 2-16 C351 13 Réglage comm. Affiche un menu dans lequel est réglée la méthode de communication, telle que Émission différée ou Réception en relève. 14 Indicateur de destination Affiche la destination. 15 Zone secondaire Affiche la description des opérations réglées dans la partie droite de l'écran. Dans le cas du fax, affiche chaque fonction et les destinations de diffusion. No. Nom Description Préliminaires 2 C351 2-17 2.6 Authentification utilisateur et compte de service L'utilisation de cette machine peut être liée à la saisie d'un nom d'utilisateur, d'un nom de service et d'un mot de passe. Dans ce cas, vous devez entrer ces informations pour accéder à l'écran d'utilisation. Pour connaître les noms d'utilisateur et de service appropriés, contactez l'administrateur. 2.6.1 Si l'authentification utilisateur est paramétrée ! Détail Pour plus d'informations sur l'authentification utilisateur et le compte de service, voir “Manuel d'utilisation - Opérations Copie”. 2.6.2 Si le compte de service est paramétré 2 Préliminaires 2-18 C351 2.7 Réception fax dans une boîte Si vous utilisez la fonction Réception PC-Fax et les fonctions Réception mémoire de cette machine, vous pouvez sauvegarder le document reçu dans une boîte du disque dur, en attendant une impression ultérieure. D'autre part, un document confidentiel reçu est automatiquement sauvegardé dans la boîte utilisateur confidentielle sur le disque dur. Les documents sauvegardés dans une boîte peuvent être imprimés sur cette machine ou exportés sur un ordinateur du réseau. Cette section présente les principes de la réception d'un fax dans une boîte. - Pour connaître la procédure de création d'une boîte et de téléchargement des documents reçus dans cette boîte via la fonction Réception PC-Fax, voir “Manuel d’utilisation – Opérations Boîte". - Si une boîte de cette machine est spécifiée en tant que destination lors de l'émission d'un fax, les documents lus peuvent y être sauvegardés. Expéditeur Original Disque dur Préliminaires 2 C351 2-19 2.7.1 Types de boîtes Une boîte publique et une boîte système sont fournies sur le disque dur de cette machine. - Dans la boîte publique, une boîte spécifiée (no. 1 à 999999999) est fournie. - Quatre types de boîtes sont disponibles dans la boîte système : boîte bulletin board, boîte d'émission en relève, boîte de réception mémoire et boîte d'impression sécurisée. Sur cette machine, ces boîtes permettent d'utiliser les fonctions énumérées dans le tableau suivant. Nom de la boîte Fonction Boîte publique Boîte spécifiée (boîte publique / boîte personnelle : no. 1 à 99999999) La boîte publique spécifiée équivaut à la boîte confidentielle si la Réception confidentielle est active (ON). Si la boîte spécifiée est sélectionnée comme emplacement de stockage des documents reçus dans la fonction Réception PC-fax, et si la boîte utilisateur TSI est sélectionnée, les documents reçus sont sauvegardés dans la boîte correspondante. Avec la fonction Réception PC-fax : Les documents sont sauvegardés dans la boîte précisée dans l'adresse secondaire par l'expéditeur. Avec la fonction Réception TSI : Les documents sont sauvegardés dans la boîte dont le numéro correspond à celui de la boîte utilisateur TSI. ! Détail Pour plus d'informations, voir “Fonctionnement de la Réception PCfax” à la page 2-21. 2 Préliminaires 2-20 C351 Boîte système Boîte bulletin board Boîte d'enregistrement des documents à consulter. Les documents enregistrés dans la boîte bulletin board peuvent être émis en relève conformément aux instructions de relève du correspondant. ! Détail Pour plus d'informations, voir “Bulletin” à la page 9-9. Boîte d'émission en relève Les originaux lus puis émis en relève sont sauvegardés dans cette boîte. ! Détail Pour plus d'informations, voir “Émission en relève” à la page 9-4. Boîte utilisateur Réception mémoire Lorsque la Réception mémoire est active (ON), les documents reçus sont sauvegardés dans cette boîte, sans impression. ! Détail Pour plus d'informations, voir “Réception mémoire” à la page 8-6. Si la boîte fixe est sélectionnée comme emplacement de stockage des documents reçus dans la fonction Réception PC-fax, les documents reçus sont sauvegardés dans cette boîte. ! Détails Pour plus d'informations, voir “Fonctionnement de la Réception PCfax” à la page 2-21. Boîte d'impression sécurisée Cette boîte est utilisée si l'impression confidentielle est sélectionnée dans le contrôleur d'impression. ! Détail Pour plus d'informations sur la boîte d'impression sécurisée, voir “Manuel d’utilisation – Opérations d’impression". Nom de la boîte Fonction Préliminaires 2 C351 2-21 2.7.2 Fonctionnement de la Réception PC-fax ! Détail Pour plus d'informations, voir “Réglage RX fax” à la page 11-56. Si la Réception PC-fax ou le Paramètre boîte utilisateur TSI est sélectionné, les documents reçus sont sauvegardés dans la boîte fixe (0) ou la boîte publique (1 à 999999999) sur le disque dur. La boîte d'enregistrement des documents reçus est spécifiée dans [Réglage RX fax] du mode Utilitaire. Le tableau suivant explique la relation entre le [Réglage RX fax] et la méthode de réception. [Réglage RX fax] du mode Utilitaire Méthode de réception Réglage RX fax : OFF Les documents reçus sont imprimés immédiatement, sans sauvegarde dans la boîte. Dans les circonstances suivantes, les documents reçus sont cependant sauvegardés dans la boîte. • Avec la Réception confidentielle (Si l'adresse secondaire dans la fonction F-code représente un numéro de boîte utilisateur confidentielle) : Les documents confidentiels reçus sont sauvegardés dans la boîte confidentielle, quel que soit le réglage de la fonction Réception PC-fax. • Si le Paramètre boîte utilisateur TSI est sélectionné, les documents reçus sont sauvegardés dans la boîte définie par ce paramètre. • Avec la Réception mémoire active (ON) : S'ils ne correspondent pas au cas 1. ou 2. ci-dessus, les documents reçus sont sauvegardés dans la boîte Réception mémoire. Réglage RX fax : ON Sortie RX : boîte fixe Les documents reçus sont sauvegardés dans la boîte Réception mémoire. Dans les circonstances suivantes, les documents reçus sont cependant sauvegardés dans une autre boîte. • Avec la Réception confidentielle (Si l'adresse secondaire dans la fonction F-code représente un numéro de boîte utilisateur confidentielle) : Les documents reçus sont sauvegardés dans la boîte confidentielle, quel que soit le réglage de la fonction Réception PC-fax. Si l'adresse secondaire ne correspond pas au numéro de la boîte confidentielle, la machine génère une erreur de communication. 2 Préliminaires 2-22 C351 Réglage RX fax : ON Sortie RX : boîte spécifiée Les documents reçus sont sauvegardés dans la boîte spécifiée (1 à 999999999) dont le numéro est indiqué dans l'adresse secondaire. Dans les circonstances suivantes, les documents reçus sont cependant sauvegardés dans une autre boîte. • Si l'adresse secondaire n'est pas précisée, les documents reçus sont sauvegardés dans la boîte Réception mémoire. • S'il n'existe pas de boîte spécifiée, voir le réglage de [Erreur saisie no. boîte] en mode Utilitaire. • Avec la Réception confidentielle (Si l'adresse secondaire dans la fonction F-code représente un numéro de boîte utilisateur confidentielle) : Les documents confidentiels reçus sont sauvegardés dans la boîte confidentielle, quel que soit le réglage de la fonction Réception PC-fax. Si l'adresse secondaire ne correspond pas au numéro de la boîte confidentielle, voir le réglage de [Erreur saisie no. boîte] dans le mode Utilitaire. [Réglage RX fax] du mode Utilitaire Méthode de réception 3 Émission Émission 3 C351 3-3 3 Émission 3.1 Émission simple de télécopie Émission simple de télécopie La procédure d'émission de base d'une télécopie est décrite ci-dessous. L'émission ou la réception d'un fax couleur n'est pas disponible. Pour envoyer un e-mail en couleur, utilisez la fonction de numérisation. pour plus d'informations sur cette fonction, voir “Manuel d’utilisation – Opérations Scanner réseau”. Cette procédure décrit l'émission d'un simple document recto, mais les fonctions disponibles à chaque étape de la procédure sont également présentées pour faciliter l'envoi de tous types de télécopies. Pour plus de détails sur ces fonctions, voir “Applications d'émission” à la page 7-3. 1 Appuyez sur [Fax] sur le tableau de commande pour ouvrir l'écran Fax. 2 Appuyez sur [Réglage numéris.] pour régler la fonction de numérisation, puis appuyez sur [OK]. 3 Émission 3-4 C351 – L'écran Fax est réglé comme suit en usine. – Type d'image original Texte – Densité Standard – Recto/Recto-Verso Recto – Définition Standard – Pour plus d'informations, voir “Réglage des conditions d'émission” à la page 3-11. – Pour plus d'informations, voir “Ouverture des écrans Réglage numérisation et Réglage communication” à la page 7-3. 3 Appuyez sur [Réglage comm.] pour paramétrer la fonction, puis appuyez sur [OK]. – Pour plus d'informations, voir “Applications d'émission” à la page 7-3. Émission 3 C351 3-5 4 Sélectionnez la destination. – Le réglage de la destination s'effectue comme suit. – Clavier – Programme – Groupe – Carnet d'adresses – Saisie directe – L'enregistrement préalable du numéro du fax de destination avec un numéro abrégé ou programmé simplifie la sélection de la destination. – Pour annuler une destination sélectionnée, sélectionnez-la à nouveau. – Appuyez sur [Reset] pour effacer l'ensemble de la saisie. – Pour plus d'informations, voir “Enregistrement du carnet d'adresses” à la page 10-5 et “Enregistrement d'un programme” à la page 10-25. – Lorsque [Saisie manuelle destination] dans [Réglage sécurité] du mode Utilitaire est réglé sur [Interdit], [Saisie directe] n'apparaît pas. Pour connaître le réglage de [Saisie manuelle destination], contactez l'administrateur. Le numéro de fax saisi s'affiche dans Destinations de diffusion. 5 Positionnez l'original sur la machine. – Pour plus d'informations, voir “Positionnement de l'original sur la machine” à la page 3-7. 3 Émission 3-6 C351 6 Appuyez sur [Départ]. – La machine procède à la numérisation de l'original et la transmission commence. – L'écran suivant apparaît si l'écran de vérification du rapport des résultats émission (TX) a été programmé à cet effet. Pour imprimer le rapport d'émission, appuyez sur [Oui]. – Pour interrompre l'émission, appuyez sur [Arrêt]. – Si l'émission ne s'effectue pas, voir page 5-3. – En cas d'échec l'émission, le rapport d'émission est automatiquement imprimé (s'il est paramétré à cet effet). Pour plus d'informations sur le réglage du rapport, voir “Réglage Rapports” à la page 11-66. – Pour plus d'informations sur le rapport d'émission (TX), voir “Rapport Émission” à la page 12-9. Émission 3 C351 3-7 3.2 Positionnement de l'original sur la machine Vous pouvez utiliser le chargeur de document (ADF) ou la vitre d'exposition pour numériser les originaux. Lorsque vous placez un original dans le chargeur, il est automatiquement acheminé et numérisé. 3.2.1 Utilisation du chargeur de document (ADF) Outre la numérisation automatique de plusieurs originaux, le chargeur de document permet d'envoyer des originaux recto/verso. Utilisation du chargeur de document (ADF) 1 Rabattez le chargeur de document. 2 Alignez les originaux en commençant par la première page. 3 Placez les originaux dans le chargeur de document en orientant la face à numériser vers le haut. – Pour imprimer correctement les informations d'en-tête (nom/ numéro de fax de l'expéditeur), insérez le bord de l'original dans le chargeur. 4 Réglez les guides du papier. – En mode d'originaux mixtes, ajustez les guides du papier sur le format de la plus grande feuille, et alignez le reste des originaux dans le coin supérieur gauche du chargeur. 3 Émission 3-8 C351 3.2.2 Positionnement des originaux sur la vitre d'exposition Utilisez la vitre d'exposition pour les originaux qui ne peuvent pas être placés dans le chargeur de document, tel qu'un livre ou des originaux épais/fins. Positionnement des originaux sur la vitre d'exposition 1 Soulevez le chargeur de document. 2 Placez l'original recto vers le bas dans le coin arrière gauche, en alignant son bord sur la réglette gauche. 3 Rabattez soigneusement le chargeur de document. Émission 3 C351 3-9 3.2.3 Envoi de plusieurs originaux à partir de la vitre d'exposition Les originaux qui ne peuvent pas être envoyés par le biais du chargeur ADF peuvent être envoyés par le biais de la vitre d'exposition. Envoi de plusieurs originaux à partir de la vitre d'exposition 1 Au besoin, appuyez sur la touche [Fax] du tableau de commande pour ouvrir l'écran Fax. 2 Sélectionnez la destination. 3 Au besoin, définissez le réglage des fonctions. 4 Placez l'original sur la vitre d'exposition. Appuyez sur [Réglage numér.] - [Numérisation séparée] - [OK], puis appuyez sur la touche [Départ]. 5 Placez l'original suivant sur la vitre d'exposition, puis appuyez sur la touche [Départ]. – Répétez cette procédure pour chacun des originaux à envoyer. Les originaux numérisés sont mémorisés. 6 Appuyez sur la touche [Fin]. Le mode de lecture du document est annulé. 7 Appuyez sur [Départ]. La transmission commence. 3 Émission 3-10 C351 3.2.4 Émission d'originaux avec le chargeur ADF et la vitre d'exposition Vous pouvez numériser les originaux en utilisant le chargeur de document et la vitre d'exposition, de même que vous pouvez numériser les originaux volumineux en les plaçant en plusieurs lots sur le chargeur de document. Émission d'originaux avec le chargeur ADF et la vitre d'exposition 1 Au besoin, appuyez sur la touche [Fax] du tableau de commande pour ouvrir l'écran Fax. 2 Sélectionnez la destination. 3 Au besoin, définissez le réglage des fonctions. 4 Placez l'original sur la vitre d'exposition. Appuyez sur [Réglage numér.] - [Numérisation séparée] - [OK], puis appuyez sur la touche [Départ]. – Un document placé dans le chargeur a la priorité sur celui qui est placé sur la vitre d'exposition. – Pour plus d'informations, voir “Positionnement de l'original sur la machine” à la page 3-7. 5 Placez l'original suivant dans le chargeur ou sur la vitre d'exposition, puis appuyez sur la touche [Départ]. – Répétez cette procédure pour chacun des originaux à numériser avant l'émission. Les originaux numérisés sont mémorisés. 6 Appuyez sur la touche [Fin]. Le mode de lecture du document est annulé. 7 Appuyez sur [Départ]. La transmission commence. Émission 3 C351 3-11 3.3 Réglage des conditions d'émission Le réglage du type d'image original, de la densité, du recto/recto-verso et de la définition s'affichent lorsque vous choisissez [Réglage numér.] dans l'écran Fax. Ces options permettent de définir les conditions de l'émission en fonction du type d'original à envoyer. ! Détail Les conditions de l'émission ne peuvent pas être réglées en unités de page. Réglage des conditions d'émission 1 Appuyez sur [Réglage numér.] dans l'écran Fax. 2 Appuyez sur la touche à régler. 3 Émission 3-12 C351 3.3.1 Type d'image original Réglez la qualité en fonction du contenu de l'original. Vous avez le choix entre 4 réglages de qualité, Texte étant le réglage par défaut. Réglage de qualité Description Texte S'applique si les originaux à numériser contiennent uniquement du texte. Lorsqu'une image est numérisée sous ce mode, les teintes neutres des images ne sont pas reproduites. Texte/Photo S'applique si les originaux à numériser contiennent du texte et des photos (demi-teinte). Sélectionnez ce mode si la page contient à la fois des caractères et des images, ou si le document contient à la fois des pages de texte et d'images. Photo S'applique si les originaux à numériser contiennent uniquement des photos (demi-teinte). Trame S'applique si les originaux à numériser contiennent en majeure partie du texte manuscrit clair. Émission 3 C351 3-13 3.3.2 Densité Réglez la densité en fonction de la clarté ou de l'obscurité de l'original. Normal est le réglage par défaut. Vous réglez la densité en 9 étapes. Option Densité Description Clair Numérise les originaux avec une densité plus claire que la densité normale. Normal Numérise les originaux avec une densité située entre Clair et Foncé. C'est le réglage par défaut. Foncé Numérise les originaux avec une densité plus foncée que la densité normale. 3 Émission 3-14 C351 3.3.3 Recto/Recto-verso Cette option détermine la manière dont les originaux sont numérisés, en fonction du type d'original. Vous avez le choix entre deux réglages, Recto étant le réglage par défaut. Option Recto/Rectoverso Description Recto Sélectionnez pour numériser des originaux recto. Recto-verso Sélectionnez pour numériser des originaux recto-verso. Émission 3 C351 3-15 3.3.4 Définition Cette option définit la résolution de numérisation des originaux. Vous avez le choix entre 4 réglages, Fin étant le réglage par défaut. ! Détail La quantité de données envoyées et la durée de l'émission dépendent du degré de finesse de la définition. Si vous sélectionnez Super fin ou Ultra fin et que la machine réceptrice n'est pas dotée de cette définition, les originaux sont envoyés dans une définition approchante sur la machine réceptrice. Option Définition Description Std. Sélectionnez pour accélérer le temps d'émission. Fin Sélectionnez pour numériser des originaux standard. Super fin Sélectionnez pour numériser des originaux contenant de petits graphiques ou du texte. Ultra fin Sélectionnez pour numériser des originaux contenant des graphiques élaborés ou du texte. 3 Émission 3-16 C351 3.3.5 Confirmation des réglages et des résultats de la communication Vous pouvez confirmer les réglages et les résultats de la communication des écrans Fax et Application par le biais de la touche [Contrôle] du tableau de commande. Confirmation des réglages et des résultats de la communication 1 Appuyez sur [Fax] sur le tableau de commande. 2 Appuyez sur [Contrôle] sur le tableau de commande. 3 Appuyez sur la touche de l'option dont vous voulez vérifier le réglage. 4 Confirmez les réglages. – Les quatre types de réglages suivants peuvent être confirmés. – Destination Confirmation de la destination. – Appuyez sur [Destination] dans l'écran qui s'affiche suite à l'appui sur [Détails] pour changer la destination. Émission 3 C351 3-17 – Réglage numérisation Confirmation des réglages de numérisation. Appuyez sur chaque touche de l'écran pour afficher l'écran de réglage correspondant, et changer le réglage, s'il y a lieu. – Pour plus d'informations sur l'écran Réglage numérisation, voir “Ouverture des écrans Réglage numérisation et Réglage communication” à la page 7-3. – Appuyez sur [Suiv. ] pour afficher l'écran suivant, et sur [ Préc.] pour afficher l'écran précédent. – Réglage communication Confirmation des réglages de communication. Appuyez sur chaque touche de l'écran pour afficher l'écran de réglage correspondant, et changer le réglage, s'il y a lieu. 3 Émission 3-18 C351 – Pour plus d'informations sur l'écran Réglage communication, voir “Ouverture des écrans Réglage numérisation et Réglage communication” à la page 7-3. – Appuyez sur [Suiv. ] pour afficher l'écran suivant, et sur [ Préc.] pour afficher l'écran précédent. – Réglage E-mail Lorsque vous transmettez par e-mail, vous pouvez confirmer ou saisir le nom du fichier, le sujet, l'adresse e-mail de l’expéditeur et le texte du message. – Si la valeur de [De] n'est pas définie, c'est l'adresse e-mail qui a été définie dans [Enregistrement administrateur] dans l'écran Mode utilitaire, qui apparaît. – Pour plus d'informations sur [Enregistrement administrateur], voir “Manuel d'utilisateur - Opérations Copie”. – Pour plus d'informations sur les valeurs par défaut de Sujet et Texte, voir page 10-38, page 10-44. 5 Une fois que vous avez terminé la vérification, appuyez à deux reprises sur [Fermer]. L'écran Fax s'affiche à nouveau. ! Détail En cas de modification des réglages de numérisation ou de communication, l'écran de vérification ne réapparaît pas. Émission 3 C351 3-19 3.3.6 Enregistrement dans le carnet d'adresses à partir de l'écran Vérifier détails de la tâche Une destination affichée sur l'écran Vérifier détails de la tâche peut être enregistrée dans le [carnet d'adresses]. Enregistrement dans le carnet d'adresse à partir de l'écran Vérifier détails de la tâche (Contrôle) 1 Appuyez sur [Fax] sur le tableau de commande. 2 Appuyez sur [Contrôle] sur le tableau de commande. 3 Appuyez sur [Destination]. 4 Sélectionnez la destination à enregistrer dans le [carnet d'adresses], puis appuyez sur [Détails]. 3 Émission 3-20 C351 5 Appuyez sur [Enregistrer dans carnet d'adresses]. – Si la destination est déjà enregistrée, [Enregistrer dans carnet d'adresses] n'apparaît pas. – Si la destination est une boîte, [Régl. Dest.] s'affiche. Si une adresse e-mail est saisie dans [Régl. Dest.], vous pouvez envoyer un e-mail pour prévenir de la fin d'une tâche, une fois celle-ci accomplie. 6 Appuyez sur [Recherche nom] pour définir le caractères à rechercher, puis appuyez sur [OK]. 7 Appuyez sur [Nom] pour saisir le nom à enregistrer, puis appuyez sur [OK]. 8 Si les données à enregistrer sont correctes, appuyez sur [Oui]. – Pour annuler l'enregistrement, appuyez sur [Non]. 9 Appuyez à trois reprises sur [Fermer] pour revenir à l'écran Fax. La destination sélectionnée est enregistrée dans le [carnet d'adresses]. Émission 3 C351 3-21 3.4 Sélection de la destination 3.4.1 Sélection de la destination Vous pouvez sélectionner une destination de quatre manières. - Clavier - Programme - Carnet d'adresses - Saisie directe Clavier 1 Saisissez le numéro du fax auquel la télécopie doit être transmise. – Vous pouvez entrer un numéro de 38 chiffres maximum. – Appuyez sur [Eff.] sur l'écran Fax pour corriger un chiffre. – Appuyez sur [C] (clear) pour effacer tout le numéro. Le numéro de fax saisi s'affiche dans Destinations de diffusion. 2 Appuyez sur [Départ]. La transmission commence. 3 Émission 3-22 C351 Programme Toute destination enregistrée dans un programme peut être appelée en appuyant sur Programme. 1 Appuyez sur [Programme] dans l'écran Fax. 2 Sélectionnez la destination programmée voulue. – Les réglages de la fonction sont activés. – Appuyez sur ou pour afficher l'écran suivant ou précédent. La destination spécifiée s'affiche dans Destinations de diffusion. 3 Appuyez sur [Départ]. La transmission commence. 2 Remarque Si le réglage de la communication est défini dans le programme, il est automatiquement activé. Vous ne pouvez pas spécifier plus d'un programme. Si la destination est une adresse e-mail, le sujet, le texte, le nom de fichier et l'expéditeur peuvent être définis manuellement. Pour plus d'informations, voir “Confirmation des réglages et des résultats de la communication” à la page 3-16 Émission 3 C351 3-23 Carnet d'adresses Vous pouvez appeler une destination en recherchant dans la liste de noms enregistrés dans le carnet d'adresses. 1 Appuyez sur [Carnet d'adresses] dans l'écran Fax. 2 Appuyez sur le caractère à rechercher. – Chaque fois que vous appuyez sur [Nom Dest.], l'affichage bascule entre le numéro de fax et le nom enregistré. – Vous ne pouvez pas spécifier plus d'une destination. – La recherche est lancée lorsque les caractères sélectionnés coïncident. – Recherche dans [Recherche avancée] – Appuyez sur [Recherche avancée]. – Appuyez sur [Nom], [N° Fax] ou [E-Mail], puis saisissez l'élément à rechercher. – Appuyez sur [OK]. Les résultats de la recherche s'affichent. 3 Émission 3-24 C351 – Recherche dans [Recherche LDAP] – Appuyez sur [Recherche LDAP]. Émission 3 C351 3-25 – Authentifiez-la si l'authentification LDAP est requise. – Appuyez sur [Recherche simple] ou [Recherche avancée], puis saisissez les critères de recherche. Appuyez sur [OK]. – Les résultats de la recherche s'affichent. – Pour plus d'informations sur la recherche LDAP, voir "Manuel d'utilisation – Opérations Scanner réseau". 3 Appuyez sur le nom de la destination à laquelle vous voulez envoyer la télécopie. – Une lettre précédent la touche a la signification suivante. A Appel B Boîte E E-mail La destination spécifiée s'affiche dans Destinations de diffusion. 4 Appuyez sur [Départ]. La transmission commence. 3 Émission 3-26 C351 Saisie directe Vous pouvez saisir un préfixe de numérotation tel que [Tonalité], [Pause] et [-]. Vous pouvez également numériser vers un e-mail ou enregistrer dans une boîte utilisateur. Si vous utilisez [Enregistrer ds boîte ut.], la boîte doit avoir été préalablement enregistrée. Pour plus d'informations sur l'enregistrement de la boîte, voir “Manuel d'utilisation – Opérations Boîte”. 0 Lorsque [Saisie manuelle destination] dans [Réglage sécurité] du mode Utilitaire est réglé sur [Interdit], [Saisie directe] n'apparaît pas. Pour connaître le réglage de [Saisie manuelle destination], contactez l'administrateur. 1 Appuyez sur [Saisie directe] dans l'écran Fax. 2 Saisissez le préfixe voulu, tel que tonalité, pause ou “-”, puis saisissez le numéro du fax de destination sur le clavier. – Tonalité Si vous utilisez la numérotation décimale (DC), appuyez sur [TonaÉmission 3 C351 3-27 lité] pour sélectionner le mode FV (fréquences vocales), qui est utilisé avec les services de télécopie. La sélection de [Tonalité] est indiquée par un “T” à l'écran. – Si vous utilisez la numérotation décimale, vous pouvez commuter provisoirement sur la numérotation à fréquences vocales par le biais de la touche astérisque [1]. – Pause Appuyez sur [Pause] pour insérer une pause entre deux chiffres du numéro à composer. L'appui une fois sur [Pause] génère un intervalle d'une seconde entre deux chiffres. Vous pouvez saisir plusieurs intervalles, indiqués par un “P” à l'écran. – Si la connexion PBX est active, lors d'un appel de la ligne intérieure vers une ligne extérieure, appuyez sur [Pause] après le numéro de la ligne extérieure (“0”, par exemple) pour sécuriser l'appel. “P” s'affiche à l'écran. – - Le tiret est un signe de séparation uniquement. Il n'a aucune incidence sur la numérotation. Il est indiqué à l'écran par un “-”. – No. abrégé Saisissez le numéro abrégé (de 0001 à 2000) sur le clavier et précisez la destination enregistrée dans le carnet d'adresses. À l'écran, un numéro abrégé et la destination sont indiqués comme suit : “A0001: KMBT”. – Numérisation vers E-mail Appuyez sur cette touche pour envoyer un e-mail contenant une image. – Si la destination est une adresse e-mail, le sujet, le texte, le nom de fichier de l'image et l'expéditeur peuvent être définis manuellement. Pour plus d'informations, voir “Réglage des conditions d'émission” à la page 3-11 – L'émission ou la réception d'un fax couleur n'est pas disponible. Pour envoyer un e-mail en couleur, utilisez la fonction de numérisation. Pour plus d'informations sur cette fonction, voir “Manuel d'utilisation – Opérations Scanner réseau”. – Appels récents # Appuyez sur cette touche pour envoyer une télécopie à une destination utilisée récemment. – Pour plus d'informations sur Appels récents #, voir “Rappel manuel” à la page 3-30 – Enregistrer ds boîte ut. Appuyez sur cette touche pour enregistrer une image sur le disque dur interne. 3 Appuyez sur [Départ]. La transmission commence. 3 Émission 3-28 C351 3.4.2 Sélection de plusieurs destinations Vous pouvez envoyer une télécopie à plusieurs destinations en une seule procédure. Vous effectuez ainsi une émission en série. Vous pouvez sélectionner l'émission en série de quatre manières. - Clavier - Groupe - Carnet d'adresses - Saisie directe Ces méthodes peuvent également être utilisées conjointement. ! Détail Vous pouvez préciser 605 adresses de destination maximum (500 numéros abrégés, 100 au clavier et 5 destinations e-mail par saisie directe). Sélection de plusieurs destinations 1 Indiquez toutes les destinations auxquelles vous voulez envoyer un message. (Voir “Sélection de la destination” à la page 3-21.) – Méthode au clavier ou par saisie directe – Lors de la saisie directe ou au clavier, vous pouvez préciser la destination suivant en appuyant sur [Dest. suivante], qui s'affiche dès que vous avez précisé la première destination. – Méthode de groupe – Appuyez sur [Groupe] dans l'écran Fax. – Appuyez sur Groupe dans l'écran Groupe. – Appuyez sur la touche de la destination voulue dans le groupe. Pour sélectionner tous les numéros du groupe, appuyez sur [Tout sélectionner]. 2 Appuyez sur [Départ]. ! Détail Le numéro du groupe (01 à 99, 00) peut également être précisé en appuyant sur [Groupe] dans l'écran de saisie directe. Dans ce cas, la télécopie est transmise à toutes les destinations enregistrées dans le groupe. Émission 3 C351 3-29 3.4.3 Confirmation/Suppression d'une destination Confirmation/Suppression d'une destination Vous pouvez confirmer ou supprimer certaines destinations. 1 Appuyez sur [Fax] sur le tableau de commande, puis sur [Contrôle]. 2 Appuyez sur [Destination]. 3 Confirmez les destinations. 4 Pour supprimer une ou plusieurs destinations, sélectionnez-les dans la liste et appuyez sur [Eff.]. – Appuyez sur [Détails] pour afficher l'écran de détails. – Appuyez sur ou sur pour afficher l'écran précédent ou suivant. L'écran de message apparaît. 5 Appuyez sur [Oui]. 6 Appuyez deux fois sur [Fermer]. L'écran Fax s'affiche à nouveau. 3 Émission 3-30 C351 3.4.4 Rappel manuel Le rappel consiste à renuméroter une destination. Pour rappeler manuellement 1 Appuyez sur [Saisie directe], puis sur [Appels récents #]. – Les cinq (maximum) derniers numéros de fax s'affichent. 2 Sélectionnez la destination à rappeler. Émission 3 C351 3-31 3.5 Numérisation 3.5.1 Lorsque la machine ne détecte pas le format d'origine Lorsque la machine ne détecte pas le format d'origine Si la machine ne parvient pas à détecter le format d'origine, l'écran suivant s'affiche pour vous permettre de le sélectionner. 1 Appuyez sur la touche correspondant au format d'origine. 2 Appuyez sur [OK]. 3.5.2 Lorsque la mémoire est saturée Lors de l'émission mémoire, si l'envoi est volumineux ou si les originaux contiennent des images détaillées, sélectionnez Mémoire rapide (désactivez Émission mémoire (TX) dans l'écran Réglage communication). ! Détail Pour plus d'informations, voir “Message d'erreur affiché” à la page 5-6. 3.5.3 Rotation automatique du document original Un document original A4(v) ou 8 1/2 × 11 (v) est automatiquement pivoté au moment de la transmission et réglé sur A4(w) ou 8 1/2 × 11(w). ! Détails Si cette rotation automatique n'est pas souhaitée, contactez le service après-vente. 3 Émission 3-32 C351 3.6 Lorsque l'émission ne s'effectue pas Lorsque l'émission ne s'effectue pas Si vous ne parvenez pas à émettre une télécopie en raison de problème de ligne ou autre, l'écran de vérification du rappel s'affiche. 1 Appuyez sur [OK]. – Le rappel s'effectue une fois le délai spécifié écoulé. – Si l'émission ne s'effectue toujours pas après un rappel, un écran indique que la tâche n'a pas abouti. 2 Appuyez sur [OK]. Pour supprimer une tâche d'émission qui a échoué, appuyez sur [Liste des tâches] et supprimez cette tâche. ! Détail Si le rappel s'effectue normalement dans les réglages du mode Utilitaire, aucun écran de rappel ne s'affiche. Rappel Le rappel se réfère à la renumérotation d'une destination. Lorsque l'émission d'un fax n'aboutit pas parce que la machine réceptrice est occupée ou pour une autre raison, la machine rappelle le numéro après un laps de temps prédéterminé. Pendant ce laps de temps, le document à émettre est traité en tant que document en attente. ! Détail La fonction de rappel est réglée en usine pour rappeler le numéro une fois après un intervalle de trois minutes. Vous pouvez modifier ce réglage dans l'écran Utilitaire. Pour plus d'informations, voir “Réglage Paramètres ligne” à la page 11-35. Émission 3 C351 3-33 3.7 Réservation d'émission Réservation d'émission Vous pouvez paramétrer et lancer l'émission suivante pendant que la machine exécute une communication ou une impression. C'est ce qu'on appelle une réservation d'émission. 0 [Décrocher] ne peut pas être utilisé lors d'une réservation d'émission. 0 Si [Affichage émission] est réglé sur OFF, [Réservation tâche suivante] n'apparaît pas. 0 Pour plus d'informations sur [Affichage émission], voir page 11-19. 1 Appuyez sur [Fax] sur le tableau de commande pour afficher l'écran Fax. 2 Appuyez sur [Réservation tâche suivante]. 3 Positionnez l'original. – Pour plus d'informations, voir “Positionnement des originaux sur la vitre d'exposition” à la page 3-8. – Pour supprimer une émission réservée, appuyez sur [Liste tâches] - [Émission fax], sélectionnez la tâche à supprimer dans [Tâches en cours], puis appuyez sur [Eff.]. – La touche Liste réservation de l'écran Fax clignote en cas de bourrage papier ou de manque de papier pendant le traitement d'une tâche, avant la réservation d'une émission. Vous pouvez toutefois réserver une ou des émissions. 4 Définissez le réglage des fonctions. – Pour plus d'informations sur le réglage des fonctions de l'écran Fax, voir “Réglage des conditions d'émission” à la page 3-11. – Pour plus d'informations sur le réglage des fonctions de l'écran Application, voir “Ouverture des écrans Réglage numérisation et Réglage communication” à la page 7-3. 5 Sélectionnez la destination. 6 Appuyez sur [Départ]. 3 Émission 3-34 C351 3.8 Émission manuelle Émission manuelle L'émission manuelle permet d'envoyer des documents tout en confirmant l'état de la machine réceptrice. L'émission mémoire ne peut pas être utilisée avec l'émission manuelle. 1 Appuyez sur [Fax] sur le tableau de commande pour afficher l'écran Fax. 2 Positionnez l'original. – Pour plus d'informations, voir “Positionnement de l'original sur la machine” à la page 3-7. 3 Appuyez sur [Décrocher]. – Si [Réception fax] est sélectionné, appuyez sur [Émission fax] pour passer en mode d'émission. 4 Définissez les réglages de la numérisation, selon les besoins. – Pour plus d'informations sur le réglage des fonctions de l'écran Fax, voir “Réglage des conditions d'émission” à la page 3-11. – Pour plus d'informations sur le réglage des fonctions de l'écran Application, voir “Présentation des fonctions d'application” à la page 7-5. 5 Saisissez la destination au clavier. – Vous pouvez saisir 60 chiffres maximum. – Appuyez sur [Raccrocher] pour revenir à l'écran Fax. – Si un téléphone externe est branché, vous pouvez le décrocher pour transmettre les documents. 6 Dès que vous entendez le signal, appuyez sur [Départ] sur l'écran Décrocher. – Si vous appuyez sur la touche [Départ] du tableau de commande, l'écran de confirmation de la communication s'affiche. Appuyez sur [Oui] pour lancer l'émission. – Si un téléphone externe est branché, raccrochez-le une fois que vous avez appuyé sur [Départ]. La transmission commence. Émission 3 C351 3-35 3.9 Annulation de l'émission La procédure à suivre pour annuler l'émission dépend de l'état de l'émission : la communication est en cours ou le document à émettre a été réservé. Sur la machine FK-502, les instructions d'émission et les images mémorisées constituent des tâches réservées. Les tâches de communication réservées et les tâches en cours de traitement sont affichées sur l'écran Liste des tâches. 3.9.1 Annulation d'une communication en cours La procédure d'annulation d'une émission en cours est décrite ci-dessous. Annulation d'une communication en cours 1 Appuyez sur [Liste tâches] dans l'écran Fax. 2 Appuyez sur [Émission fax]. 3 Vérifiez si les tâches ont été sélectionnées dans [Tâches en cours]. 4 Sélectionnez la tâche à supprimer, puis appuyez sur [Suppri.]. 5 Appuyez sur [Oui]. L'émission est annulée. 6 Appuyez sur [Quitt.]. L'écran Fax s'affiche à nouveau. 3 Émission 3-36 C351 3.9.2 Annulation des tâches réservées La suppression d'une tâche réservée annule son émission. Annulation des tâches réservées 1 Appuyez sur [Liste tâches] dans l'écran Fax. 2 Appuyez sur [Émission fax]. 3 Appuyez sur [Tâches en cours]. 4 Appuyez sur [Tâches différées]. 5 Sélectionnez le document réservé à annuler, puis appuyez sur [Suppri.]. – Appuyez sur ou pour afficher l'écran suivant ou précédent. L'écran de confirmation apparaît. 6 Appuyez sur [Oui]. Le document réservé est supprimé. 7 Appuyez sur [Quitt.]. L'écran Fax s'affiche à nouveau. Émission 3 C351 3-37 3.10 Confirmation de la liste de tâches Confirmation des documents réservés Vous pouvez vérifier les réservations d'émissions stockées en mémoire sur la liste des tâches affichée à l'écran. 1 Appuyez sur [Liste tâches] dans l'écran Fax. 2 Appuyez sur [Émission fax]. 3 Appuyez sur [Tâches en cours]. 4 Appuyez sur [Tâches différées] ou [Tâches actives]. 5 Confirmez la tâche, puis appuyez sur [Quitt.]. – Appuyez sur ou sur pour afficher l'écran précédent ou suivant. – Pour confirmer les détails d'une tâche, sélectionnez la tâche et appuyez sur [Vérifier tâches] ou sur [Détail]. L'écran Fax s'affiche à nouveau. 3 Émission 3-38 C351 3.11 Confirmation des résultats de la communication Confirmation des résultats de la communication Pour vérifier les résultats de l'émission, vous pouvez appuyer sur [Liste tâches] dans l'écran Fax. 1 Appuyez sur [Liste tâches] dans l'écran Fax. 2 Appuyez sur [Impre.], [Émission fax] ou [Réc. fax/Boîte ut.]. 3 Appuyez sur [Historique tâches]. Émission 3 C351 3-39 4 Confirmez les résultats de la communication. – Émission fax – Type : Fax, e-mail ou boîte. – Dest : Numéro du fax, adresse e-mail ou nom de boîte de la destination. – Début enreg. : Date et heure de l'émission. – # de pges : Nombre de documents émis. – Résultat : “Tâche finie”, “Supprimée par utilisateur”, “Supprimée cause erreur”, “Annulée” (agrafe ou perforation) ou “Tâche annulée”. – Réc. fax/Boîte ut. – Nom utilis : Nom de l'utilisateur en mode autorisation utilisateur et nom du compte en mode suivi du compte. Dans les autres cas, le type de la copie, de l'impression ou de la réception fax est affiché. – Nom du document : Nom du document reçu ou enregistré. – Début enreg. : Date et heure de réception du document. – # de pges : Nombre de documents reçus. 3 Émission 3-40 C351 – Résultat : “Tâche finie”, “Supprimée par utilisateur”, “Supprimée cause erreur”, “Annulée” (agrafe ou perforation), “Impr. page séparation”, “Enreg. fini” “Échec de l'enreg.” ou “Tâche annulée”. – Vous pouvez appuyez sur [Réglage comm.] pour vérifier les résultats de la communication dans un rapport d'émission ou dans un rapport de réception. Ces rapports peuvent être imprimés. – Appuyez sur [Détails] pour afficher l'écran de détails. 5 Une fois que vous avez terminé la confirmation, appuyez à deux reprises sur [Quitt.]. L'écran précédent [Liste tâches] s'affiche à nouveau. Émission 3 C351 3-41 3.12 Émissions en mémoire et en mémoire rapide Cette machine offre deux méthodes d'émission des documents. 3.12.1 Émission mémoire Avec cette méthode, toutes les pages sont numérisées, puis mémorisées avant l'émission. Le document est automatiquement paginé et les images de la première page apparaissent dans le rapport de communication. Cependant, si le document à envoyer est volumineux ou si les images de l’original sont envoyées en haute définition, la mémoire peut saturer. La machine est automatiquement configurée sur Émission mémoire quand l'une des procédures suivantes est réalisée. - [Mémoire rapide] est défini sur l'écran Réglage communication. 3.12.2 Émission en mémoire rapide Avec cette méthode, l'émission du fax s'effectue immédiatement après la numérisation de chaque page. C'est la méthode recommandée pour ne pas saturer la mémoire lors de l'émission d'un document volumineux. 3 Émission 3-42 C351 3.12.3 Pour émettre en mémoire rapide, procédez de la manière suivante. Émission en mémoire rapide 1 Au besoin, appuyez sur [Fax] dans le tableau de commande pour afficher l'écran Fax. 2 Appuyez sur [Réglage comm.] dans l'écran Fax. 3 Appuyez sur [Mémoire rapide]. 4 Appuyez sur [OK]. – Pour annuler le réglage, appuyez sur [Annul.]. L'écran Mémoire rapide est configuré de façon à revenir à l'écran Fax. 5 Le cas échéant, définissez les autres fonctions. – Pour plus d'informations sur la définition des fonctions de l'écran Fax, voir “Réglage des conditions d'émission” à la page 3-11. Pour plus d'informations sur la définition des fonctions de l'écran Application, voir “Ouverture des écrans Réglage numérisation et Réglage communication” à la page 7-3. 6 Indiquez la destination. – Pour plus d'informations, voir “Sélection de la destination” à la page 3-21. 7 Positionnez le document original. – Pour plus d'informations, voir “Positionnement de l'original sur la machine” à la page 3-7. 8 Appuyez sur [Départ]. La machine lit le document et l'enregistre en mémoire en tant que document réservé avant de l'émettre. Émission 3 C351 3-43 ! Détail Si la ligne est occupée, les données sont enregistrées en mémoire, puis transmises lorsque la ligne est disponible. Pour annuler la transmission, voir “Annulation de l'émission” à la page 3-35. Si la machine réceptrice n'est pas en état de recevoir, la destination sera rappelée. Pour plus d'informations sur le rappel, voir “Rappel manuel” à la page 3-30. Si la transmission échoue, voir “Impossible d'envoyer des messages” à la page 5-3. 3 Émission 3-44 C351 3.13 Nombre d'originaux Nombre d'originaux En mode Mémoire rapide, le nombre total de pages émises suit le numéro de la page sur la ligne d'informations sur l'expéditeur. En émission mémoire, le nombre total de pages est imprimé automatiquement. Vous n'avez pas besoin de définir cette fonction. 0 Spécifications Le nombre total de pages est imprimé sous le format “P.numéro de la page/nombre total de pages”. La machine imprime le nombre total de pages que vous spécifiez, même si ce nombre ne correspond pas au nombre total de pages lues. 0 Fonctions incompatibles *Émission mémoire (TX), Effacer bord, Format d'origine, Originaux mixtes, Émission en relève TX (normale), Émission en relève TX (bulletin). * : La définition du nombre d'originaux est automatiquement annulée. 1 Au besoin, appuyez sur [Fax] dans le tableau de commande pour afficher l'écran Fax. 2 Appuyez sur [Réglage comm.] dans l'écran Fax. 3 Appuyez sur [Mémoire rapide]. De : 01234567890123456 2005 /20 /31 01:23:00 P.005 / 010 Émission 3 C351 3-45 4 Appuyez sur [OK]. L'écran Fax s'affiche à nouveau. 5 Appuyez sur [Réglage numéris.] - [Application] - [Nombre d'originaux]. 6 Saisissez sur le clavier le nombre de pages du document. – 999 pages maximum. 7 Appuyez à deux reprises sur [OK]. – Pour annuler le réglage du nombre total de pages, appuyez sur [Annul.]. Le nombre total de pages est enregistré, et vous revenez à l'écran Fax. 8 Le cas échéant, définissez les autres fonctions. – Pour plus d'informations sur la définition des fonctions de l'écran Fax, voir “Réglage des conditions d'émission” à la page 3-11. Pour plus d'informations sur la définition des fonctions de l'écran Réglage numérisation ou Réglage communication, voir “Ouverture des écrans Réglage numérisation et Réglage communication” à la page 7-3. 9 Indiquez la destination. – Pour plus d'informations, voir “Sélection de la destination” à la page 3-21. 10 Positionnez le document original. 11 Appuyez sur [Départ]. Le FK-502 lit le document et procède à l'émission de chaque page numérisée. 3 Émission 3-46 C351 ! Détail Pour annuler la transmission, voir “Annulation de l'émission” à la page 3-35. Si la machine réceptrice n'est pas en état de recevoir, la destination sera rappelée. Pour plus d'informations sur le rappel, voir “Rappel manuel” à la page 3-30. Si la transmission échoue, voir “Impossible d'envoyer des messages” à la page 5-3. Émission 3 C351 3-47 3.14 Émission différée (TX) Émission différée (TX) Cette fonction permet de préciser l'heure à laquelle la communication devra commencer. L'envoi de fax la nuit ou tôt le matin permet de tirer parti de tarifs réduits. 0 Spécifications Avec Émission différée (TX), l'émission mémoire est automatiquement sélectionnée. Vous pouvez différer l'émission de 24 heures maximum, en précisant un nombre de minutes et d'heures. Vous ne pouvez pas préciser de date. 0 Vous pouvez préciser un nombre total de 21 transmissions différées TX (20 émissions normales et 1 réception en relève RX). 0 Fonctions incompatibles Nombre d'originaux, Émission en relève TX (normale), Émission en relève TX (bulletin), Réception en relève RX (bulletin), Émission en mémoire rapide. 1 Au besoin, appuyez sur [Fax] dans le tableau de commande pour afficher l'écran Fax. 2 Appuyez sur [Réglage comm.] dans l'écran Fax. 3 Appuyez sur [Émission différée (TX)]. 3 Émission 3-48 C351 4 Indiquez, à l'aide du clavier, l'heure à laquelle doit débuter l'émission. – Saisissez l'heure et les minutes avec deux chiffres au format d'une horloge de 24 heures. – Exemple : pour démarrer la communication à 21:07, tapez “21” et “07”. 5 Appuyez sur [OK]. L'écran Réglage communication s'affiche à nouveau. 6 Appuyez sur [OK]. – Pour annuler le réglage, appuyez sur [OFF] ou sur [Annul.]. Vous revenez à l'écran Fax. 7 Le cas échéant, définissez les autres fonctions. – Pour plus d'informations sur la définition des fonctions de l'écran Fax, voir “Réglage des conditions d'émission” à la page 3-11. Pour plus d'informations sur la définition des fonctions de l'écran Application, voir “Ouverture des écrans Réglage numérisation et Réglage communication” à la page 7-3. 8 Indiquez la ou les destinations. – Pour plus d'informations, voir “Sélection de la destination” à la page 3-21. 9 Positionnez le document original. – Pour plus d'informations, voir “Positionnement des originaux sur la vitre d'exposition” à la page 3-8. 10 Appuyez sur [Départ]. Le FK-502 lit le document et le place en mémoire jusqu'à son heure de transmission. Émission 3 C351 3-49 ! Détail Pour annuler la transmission, voir “Annulation de l'émission” à la page 3-35. Si la machine réceptrice n'est pas en état de recevoir, son numéro fera l'objet d'un rappel. Pour plus d'informations sur le rappel, voir “Rappel manuel” à la page 3-30. Si la transmission échoue, voir “Impossible d'envoyer des messages” à la page 5-3. 3 Émission 3-50 C351 3.15 Communications internationales Communications internationales La vitesse de transmission des communications internationales est réduite. La procédure ci-dessous décrit les émissions à l'étranger. Les numéros de téléphone internationaux, code du pays compris, peuvent être enregistrés à l'aide des fonctions Programme et du Carnet d'adresses. Pour plus d'informations à ce sujet, voir “Enregistrement du carnet d'adresses” à la page 10-5. 0 Fonctions incompatibles Émission en relève TX (normale), Réception en relève RX (normale), Émission en relève TX (Bulletin), Réception en relève RX (bulletin) 1 Au besoin, appuyez sur [Fax] dans le tableau de commande pour afficher l'écran Fax. 2 Appuyez sur [Réglage comm.] dans l'écran Fax. 3 Appuyez sur [Réglage ligne]. Émission 3 C351 3-51 4 Appuyez sur [Communications internationales]. – Pour annuler le réglage, appuyez sur [Annul.] ou réappuyez sur [Communications internationales]. 5 Appuyez sur [OK]. L'écran Réglage communication s'affiche à nouveau. 6 Appuyez sur [OK]. Les communications internationales sont sélectionnées et vous revenez à l'écran Fax. 7 Le cas échéant, définissez les autres fonctions. – Pour plus d'informations sur la définition des fonctions de l'écran Fax, voir “Réglage des conditions d'émission” à la page 3-11. Pour plus d'informations sur la définition des fonctions de l'écran Application, voir “Ouverture des écrans Réglage numérisation et Réglage communication” à la page 7-3. 8 Positionnez le document original. – Pour plus d'informations, voir “Positionnement des originaux sur la vitre d'exposition” à la page 3-8. 3 Émission 3-52 C351 9 Composez “001-010”, le code du pays et le code régional de la destination, puis le numéro de fax de la destination. – Nous supposons ici que le préfixe d'un appel à l'étranger est le 001, mais ce préfixe varie d'un opérateur téléphonique à un autre. Au besoin, contactez votre opérateur pour connaître le préfixe à utiliser pour les appels à l'étranger. – Les numéros de téléphone internationaux peuvent être enregistrés dans le carnet d'adresse. Pour plus d'informations, voir “Enregistrement du carnet d'adresses” à la page 10-5. 10 Appuyez sur [Départ]. Le FK-502 démarre la transmission. ! Détail Pour annuler la transmission, voir “Annulation de l'émission” à la page 3-35. Si la machine réceptrice n'est pas en état de recevoir, son numéro fera l'objet d'un rappel. Pour plus d'informations sur le rappel, voir “Rappel manuel” à la page 3-30. Si la transmission échoue, voir “Impossible d'envoyer des messages” à la page 5-3. Émission 3 C351 3-53 3.16 Informations sur l'expéditeur Les originaux émis sont enregistrés de la manière suivante par la machine réceptrice. 3.16.1 Réglage à l'intérieur du corps du texte ! Détail Le nom de l'expéditeur et l'ID du fax sont définis en mode Utilitaire dans les Informations en-tête. Les réglages par défaut de l'écran de base du fax sont affichés dans le champ DE des informations sur l'expéditeur. 3.16.2 Réglage à l'extérieur du corps du texte ! Détail Pour plus d'informations sur ce réglage, voir “Position en-tête/pied de page” à la page 11-31. De : 01234567890 01/20/2005 01:23#012 p.5/10 De : 01234567890 01/20/2005 01:23#012 p.5/10 3 Émission 3-54 C351 3.16.3 Réglage sur OFF ! Détails OFF ne peut pas être sélectionné dans certains pays. Pour plus d'informations sur ce réglage, voir “Position en-tête/pied de page” à la page 11-31. 4 Réception Réception 4 C351 4-3 4 Réception Ce chapitre explique le principe et les procédures de réception de fax. 4.1 Mode Réception Cette machine gère deux modes de réception. La ligne de téléphone doit être connectée selon le type d'utilisation. Les deux modes de réception sont les suivants. 4.1.1 Réception automatique (mode fax uniquement) Ce mode est utilisé si la ligne de téléphone est dédiée à un fax. ! Détail Pour plus d'informations, voir “Réception automatique (mode fax uniquement)” à la page 4-3. 4.1.2 Réception manuelle (mode téléphone uniquement) Le FK-502 doit être paramétré sur ce mode si un téléphone externe (ou un répondeur) est connecté et si la majorité des appels entrants sont téléphoniques. Appel entrant Document reçu Réception automatique du message Appel entrant Le téléphone externe sonne Soulevez le combiné et parlez Pour recevoir un fax, appuyez sur 4 Réception 4-4 C351 4.2 Réception automatique (mode fax uniquement) Sélectionnez ce mode si la ligne téléphonique est dédiée à la communication de fax. La machine reçoit automatiquement les fax dès que le nombre de sonneries réglé est atteint. Pendant la réception, “Réception” s'affiche dans la zone de message de l'écran. ! Détail Si l'option Affichage réception est réglée sur OFF, le message n'apparaît pas. Ce mode est actif si le mode de réception est réglé sur Réception auto dans Réglage ligne du mode Utilitaire. ! Détail Pour plus d'informations sur le réglage de ce mode, voir “Réglage Paramètres ligne” à la page 11-34. Pour plus d'informations sur le réglage du nombre de sonneries avant réception, voir “Réglage Paramètres ligne” à la page 11-34. Appel entrant Document reçu Réception automatique du message Réception 4 C351 4-5 4.3 Réception manuelle (mode téléphone uniquement) Réception manuelle (mode téléphone uniquement) Si le mode de réception est réglé sur Réception manuelle dans Réglage ligne du mode Utilitaire, vous pouvez recevoir les fax manuellement. Un téléphone externe doit être connecté. Pour plus d'informations sur le réglage de la réception manuelle, voir “Réglage Paramètres ligne” à la page 11-34. La procédure de réception manuelle est décrite ci-dessous. 1 Lorsque le téléphone externe sonne, appuyez sur [Décrocher]. 2 Assurez-vous que [Réception (RX)] est en surbrillance. – Si un document se trouve dans le chargeur ADF ou sur la vitre d'exposition, Réception (RX) n'apparaît pas en surbrillance, même en cas d'appel entrant. Dans ce cas, appuyez sur Réception (RX). 3 Appuyez sur [Départ] dans le menu Décrocher. – Si vous appuyez sur la touche [Départ] du tableau de commande, l'écran Décrocher s'affiche. Appuyez sur [Oui] pour lancer la réception. La réception commence. Appel entrant Le téléphone externe sonne Soulevez le combiné et parlez Pour recevoir un fax, appuyez sur [Départ] 4 Réception 4-6 C351 4.4 Réception impossible En cas de problème de réception, un message d'erreur s'affiche. Référezvous à “Message d'erreur affiché” à la page 5-6 pour connaître la manière d'y remédier. Appuyez sur [Arrêt] pour supprimer le message affiché. ! Détail Si le téléphone externe continue de sonner, le mode de réception (automatique/manuel) est peut-être réglé sur RX manuelle dans Réglages initiaux du mode Utilitaire. Cette option doit être réglée sur Réception auto pour pouvoir les documents automatiquement. Pour plus d'informations, voir “Réglage Paramètres ligne” à la page 11-34. La réception ne s'effectue pas si la mémoire est saturée. Vérifiez également que le magasin de papier est chargé. Pour plus d'informations, voir “Impossible de recevoir des messages” à la page 5-4. Réception 4 C351 4-7 4.5 Réception en mémoire de substitution Lorsque le fax ne peut pas recevoir un document, celui-ci est mémorisé jusqu'à ce qu'il puisse être imprimé. C'est ce qu'on appelle la réception en mémoire de substitution. - Le document mémorisé est imprimé dès que le problème est résolu (bourrage papier, par exemple). - Cette fonction n'est pas disponible si la mémoire est saturée. 4 Réception 4-8 C351 4.6 Enregistrement de la réception À réception d'un document à enregistrer, son format de papier et le format de papier du magasin défini sont comparés. Le document est ensuite réduit au taux de réduction défini ou au meilleur taux de réduction pour convenir au papier avant son enregistrement. Si vous définissez un taux de réduction équimultiple, le document est enregistré à ce taux quel que soit le format de papier du document reçu. 4.6.1 Enregistrement après réduction minimale À réception d'un document formaté, celui-ci est enregistré après réduction au taux défini pour ce format de papier (la valeur par défaut est de 96 %). ! Détail Pour plus d'informations sur le taux de réduction minimum, voir “Réglage Émission/Réception” à la page 11-37. Original Document reçu Réduit au taux de réduction minimum Réception 4 C351 4-9 4.6.2 Enregistrement après réduction pour convenir au papier d'impression Si le document reçu est plus long que le format de papier standard, le format de papier approprié est déterminé en fonction de la longueur et de la largeur de ce document, et celui-ci est imprimé sur du papier correspondant à ce format. Par contre, si ce format conforme n'est pas chargé dans le magasin de papier, le document est imprimé au format le plus proche après réduction. Original Document reçu Réduit pour convenir au format de papier 4 Réception 4-10 C351 La machine applique les règles suivantes pour déterminer le meilleur format de papier : - Étape 1 Sélection du format de papier approprié – La machine détermine le format de papier approprié en prenant en compte la largeur et la longueur du document, tel qu'indiqué dans le tableau suivant. Largeur du document reçu Position d'enregistrement des informations de réception Longueur du document reçu A4 [OFF] ou [Intérieur du corps du texte] 0 - 154 155 - 314 315 - 386 387 ou plus [Extérieur du corps du texte] 0 - 146 147 - 306 307 - 378 379 ou plus Format de papier sélectionné A5 v A4 w B4 w A3 w B4 [OFF] ou [Intérieur du corps du texte] 0 -195 196 - 395 396 ou plus [Extérieur du corps du texte] 0 - 186 187 - 386 387 ou plus Format de papier sélectionné B5 v B4 w A3 w A3 [OFF] ou [Intérieur du corps du texte] 0 - 226 227 ou plus [Extérieur du corps du texte] 0 - 217 218 ou plus Format de papier sélectionné A4 v A3 w Réception 4 C351 4-11 Si “5,5 × 8,5 w” convient, “5,5 × 8,5 v” est sélectionné parce que c'est la seule longueur réglable sur la machine. - Étape 2 Sélection du papier d'impression du document – La machine vérifie si le format de papier approprié déterminé à l'étape 1 est présent dans le magasin. Le format de papier est présent : La machine procède à l'enregistrement. Le format de papier n'est pas présent dans le magasin ou la fonction de sélection automatique du magasin est désactivée : La machine recherche le second choix de format de papier approprié, tel qu'indiqué dans le tableau. Si l'option [Imprimer page de séparation] est réglée sur [ON] en mode Utilitaire, la machine recherche les formats de papier appropriés pour enregistrer le document sur plusieurs formats. Largeur du document reçu Position d'enregistrement des informations de réception Longueur du document reçu A4 [OFF] ou [Intérieur du corps du texte] 0 - 150 151 - 305 306 - 309 391 ou plus [Extérieur du corps du texte] 0 - 141 142 - 296 297 - 381 382 ou plus Format de papier sélectionné 5.5 × 8.5 v *1 8.5 × 11 w 8.5 × 14 w 11 × 17 w B4 [OFF] ou [Intérieur du corps du texte] 0 - 232 233 ou plus [Extérieur du corps du texte] 0 - 223 224 ou plus Format de papier sélectionné 8.5 × 11 v 11 × 17 w A3 [OFF] ou [Intérieur du corps du texte] 0 - 232 233 ou plus [Extérieur du corps du texte] 0 - 223 224 ou plus Format de papier sélectionné 8.5 × 11 v 11 × 17 w 4 Réception 4-12 C351 Si l'option [Imprimer page de séparation] est réglé sur OFF : Le papier est sélectionné en ordre décroissant. ! Détail Même si l'option [Imprimer page de séparation] est réglée sur OFF, la machine imprime sur des pages distinctes les documents volumineux ou en haute définition. Format de papier approprié A5 v A4 w B5 v B4 w A4 v A3 w Ordre de placement du papier (de haut en bas) A5 v A4 w B5 v B4 w A4 v A3 w A5 w A4 v B5 w A3 w A4 w B4 w A4 w F4 w B4 w A4 w F4 w A4 w A4 v B4 w A4 w A4 v B4 w F4 w B5 v A3 w A4 v F4 w A3 w B5 w F4 w F4 w A3 w B4 w A3 w Format de papier approprié 5.5 × 8.5 v 8.5 × 11 w 8.5 × 11 v 8.5 × 14 w 11 × 17 w Ordre de placement du papier (de haut en bas) 5.5 × 8.5 v 8.5 × 11 w 8.5 × 11 v 8.5 × 14 w 11 × 17 w 5.5 × 8.5 w 8.5 × 11 v 8.5 × 11 w 11 × 17 w A3 w A5 v A4 w A4 v B4 w B4 w A5 w A4 v A4 w A3 w 8.5 × 14 w 8.5 × 11 w 8.5 × 14 w 8.5 × 14 w 8.5 × 11 w 8.5 × 11 w 8.5 × 11 v 11 × 17 w 11 × 17 w 8.5 × 11 v A4 w A4 w B4 w B4 w A4 w A4 v A3 w A3 w A4 v B5 v B5 w 8.5 × 14 w 11 × 17 w B4 w A3 w Réception 4 C351 4-13 Si l'option [Imprimer page de séparation] est réglé sur ON : Le papier est sélectionné en ordre décroissant. ! Détail Même si l'option [Imprimer page de séparation] est réglée sur ON, le document est réduit pour tenir dans la largeur du papier sélectionné si celui-ci est inférieur à la largeur de l'image du document reçu. Format de papier approprié A5 v A4 w B5 v B4 w A4 v A3 w Ordre de placement du papier (de haut en bas) A5 v A4 w B5 v B4 w A4 v A3 w A5 w F4 v B5 w B5 v A4 w A4 v A4 w B4 w B4 w B5 w F4 w A4 w A4 v A3 w A4 w A3 w B4 w B5 w A4 v A4 v A3 w F4 w F4 w A4 w B5 v A3 w F4 w B4 w A3 w Format de papier approprié 5.5 × 8.5 v 8.5 × 11 w 8.5 × 11 v 8.5 × 14 w 11 × 17 w Ordre de placement du papier (de haut en bas) 5.5 × 8.5 v 8.5 × 11 w 8.5 × 11 v 8.5 × 14 w 11 × 17 w 5.5 × 8.5 w A4 w 8.5 × 11 w 11 × 17 w A3 w A5 v 8.5 × 14 w A4 v B4 w 8.5 × 11 v A5 w 11 × 17 w A4 w A3 w 8.5 × 11 w 8.5 × 11 w B4 w 8.5 × 14 w 8.5 × 11 v A4 v 8.5 × 11 v A3 w 11 × 17 w 8.5 × 11 w A4 w A4 w B4 w A4 v A4 v A3 w A4 w B5 v B5 w 8.5 × 14 w 11 × 17 w B4 w A3 w 4 Réception 4-14 C351 Si le papier d'impression des rapports d’activité de format B5 w, B5 v, A4 w ou A4 v est sélectionné, l'image de cette page peut être imprimée sur plusieurs pages. ! Détail Si le format du papier d'impression du fax est inférieur au format de papier sélectionné à l'étape 1, le document est réduit. Si l'option [Imprimer page de séparation] est réglée sur [OFF] et que l'orientation du papier d'impression est différente de celle du papier sélectionné à l'étape 1, la sortie imprimée est automatiquement pivotée de 90 degrés. Si vous imprimez des originaux mixtes, ce processus est exécuté sur chaque page. Si les formats de papier sélectionnés aux étapes 1 et 2 se trouvent dans plusieurs magasins, le magasin utilisé est sélectionné en fonction du réglage de la fonction automatique du format de papier. Pour plus d'informations, voir “Manuel d'utilisation – Opérations Copie”. Si le format de papier requis se trouve uniquement dans le magasin d'insertion manuelle, le document est imprimé sur le papier chargé dans ce magasin. Toutefois, si la fonction de sélection automatique du format de papier est désactivée ou si la fonction de sélection automatique du magasin est désactivée pour ce magasin, ce magasin n'est pas sélectionné. Même si l'option de division de la page est réglée sur ON, la page n'est pas divisée si [Réglage TX/RX] est réglée comme suit. [Sélection magasin impression réception] est réglé Sélection papier d'impression] est réglée sur [Format fixe] ou [Format prioritaire] [Impression R/V pour réception] est réglée sur [ON] Si aucune option de sélection du papier d'impression n'est définie, un message vous demande de le faire. Si [Sélection papier d'impression] est réglé sur [Format prioritaire ]: Le format de papier approprié est sélectionné parmi A4, B4 et A3 (8,5 × 11, 8,5 × 14 et 11 × 17). Si ce format de papier n'est pas disponible, le papier est sélectionné selon la procédure standard, puis le document est enregistré. Réception 4 C351 4-15 Si [Sélection papier d'impression] est réglé sur [Format fixe ]: Le format de papier approprié est sélectionné parmi A4, B4 et A3 (8,5 × 11, 8,5 × 14 et 11 × 17). Si ce format de papier n'est pas disponible, le message demeure jusqu'à ce que le papier soit chargé. Si [Sélection magasin impression réception] est réglé sur une valeur autre que [Auto ]: Le document est enregistré de façon à convenir au format de papier chargé dans le magasin (à l'exception du magasin d'insertion manuelle) défini pour [Sélection magasin impression réception]. Si [Sélection papier d'impression] est réglé sur une valeur autre que [Sélection auto] et si [Sélection magasin impression réception] est réglé sur une valeur autre que [Auto ]: Le réglage défini pour [Sélection magasin impression réception] a la priorité. 4 Réception 4-16 C351 Méthode d'enregistrement à la réception Le tableau suivant indique la relation entre le format de papier du document reçu et l'enregistrement de facto du document sur la machine. ! Détail Si [Impression R/V pour réception] est réglé sur ON, l'écran peut indiquer le papier. Pour plus d'informations, voir page 11-34. Format de papier du document reçu Réglage de [Réduction min. pour impression réception] Sélection dans [Sélection magasin impression réception] 96 - 87% Format standard (A3 à A5) Enregistré après réduction pour tenir sur le même format de papier Enregistré après réduction pour tenir sur le format de papier spécifié Original long (plus long que le format standard) L'enregistrement avec division de la page est OFF Enregistré après réduction pour tenir sur le format de papier approprié Enregistré après réduction pour tenir sur le format de papier spécifié L'enregistrement avec division de la page est ON Enregistré après division de la page en fonction du papier utilisé Enregistré après réduction pour tenir sur le format de papier spécifié A B C A B C A B C A B C D A B C D A B C D A B CD A B C D Réception 4 C351 4-17 4.7 Informations de réception Lorsque les informations de réception (date, heure, numéros de réception et de page) sont réglées sur l'intérieur ou l'extérieur du corps du texte avec l'option [Position en-tête/pied de page], elles sont enregistrées dans le document reçu. Réglage à l'intérieur du corps du texte Réglage à l'extérieur du corps du texte Réglage sur OFF ! Détail Pour plus d'informations sur ce réglage, voir “Position en-tête/pied de page” à la page 11-31. Original Date RX : 01/20/2005 R001 P.001/003 Original Date RX : 01/20/2005 R001 P.001/003 Original 4 Réception 4-18 C351 5 Dépannage Dépannage 5 C351 5-3 5 Dépannage 5.1 Impossible d'envoyer des messages Si vous ne parvenez pas à envoyer un document, consultez le tableau cidessous pour tenter de remédier au problème. Si vous ne pouvez résoudre le problème en suivant les solutions proposées, contactez le service aprèsvente. ! Détail Pour plus d'informations sur les messages d'erreur, voir “Message d'erreur affiché” à la page 5-6. En cas de problème de bourrage des originaux ou du papier des magasins, de mauvaise qualité de l'image ou de manque de toner, consultez le “Manuel d'utilisation – Opérations Copie” fourni avec le FK-502. Points à vérifier Actions correctives La procédure d'émission a-t-elle été effectuée correctement ? Vérifiez la procédure d'émission et réessayez. Le numéro de fax de la destination est-il correct ? Les numéros d'appel programmés ou abrégés sont-ils enregistrés correctement ? Si vous utilisez un numéro programmé ou abrégé, il est possible qu'il ait été enregistré incorrectement. Essayez d'imprimer la liste des numéros abrégés et vérifiez si le numéro est enregistré correctement. Si ce n'est pas le cas, corrigez l'enregistrement. Le réglage de la ligne est-il correct ? Vérifiez si la [Méthode de numérotation] de [Réglage Paramètres ligne] dans le mode Utilitaire correspond à la ligne téléphonique utilisée. Corrigez ce réglage si ce n'est pas le cas. La ligne téléphonique est-elle connectée correctement ? Vérifiez si la prise de téléphone est bien branchée. Si ce n'est pas le cas, branchez-la. Le problème se situe-t-il au niveau le la machine réceptrice ? Téléphonez à la destination et vérifiez si le fax récepteur est hors tension, s'il manque de papier ou s'il existe un autre problème. 5 Dépannage 5-4 C351 5.2 Impossible de recevoir des messages Si vous ne parvenez pas à recevoir un document, consultez le tableau cidessous pour tenter de remédier au problème. Si vous ne parvenez pas à résoudre le problème en suivant les solutions proposées, contactez le service après-vente. ! Détail Pour plus d'informations sur les messages d'erreur, voir “Message d'erreur affiché” à la page 5-6. En cas de problème de bourrage des originaux ou du papier des magasins, de mauvaise qualité de l'image ou de manque d'encre, consultez le “Manuel d'utilisation – Opérations Copie” fourni avec le FK-502. Dépannage 5 C351 5-5 Description du problème Points à vérifier Actions correctives Impossible de recevoir Y-a-t-il du papier dans la machine ? Si l'icône d'ajout de papier est allumée, la machine manque de papier et les documents reçus sont mémorisés. Ajoutez du papier. Pour connaître la procédure, consultez le “Manuel d'utilisation – Opérations Copie”. Y-a-t-il un bourrage papier dans la machine ? En cas de bourrage papier, les documents reçus sont mémorisés. Dégagez le bourrage papier. Pour connaître la procédure, consultez le “Manuel d'utilisation – Opérations Copie”. Le flacon de toner est-il vide ? La réception de message ne s'effectue pas si le flacon de toner est vide. Remplacez immédiatement le flacon de toner. Pour connaître la procédure, consultez le “Manuel d'utilisation – Opérations Copie”. Le FK-502 est-il en mode de réception manuelle ? Si l'option [Mode réception] de [Réglage Paramètres ligne] dans le mode Utilitaire est réglée sur [Réception manuelle], vous devez réaliser la procédure de réception manuelle. Pour connaître cette procédure, voir “Réception manuelle (mode téléphone uniquement)” à la page 4-5. La ligne téléphonique estelle connectée correctement ? Vérifiez si la prise de téléphone est bien branchée. Si ce n'est pas le cas, branchez-la. Le FK-502 est-il en mode de communication en réseau fermé ? Si la fonction de communication en réseau fermé (pour empêcher la réception de documents non sollicités) est active (ON), vous ne pouvez recevoir que les documents provenant de fax déterminés. L'expéditeur a-t-il envoyé une adresse secondaire erronée en fonction F-code ? Une erreur de communication peut survenir en cas de réception d'une adresse secondaire erronée alors que la boîte utilisateur confidentielle est active. Dans ces circonstances, la réception est impossible. Vérifiez auprès de l'expéditeur si l'adresse secondaire a été définie correctement. Pas de sortie La réception fax a-t-elle été activée ? Identifiez la boîte de sauvegarde du fichier dans les fonctions de réception PC-fax. Le Paramètre boîte utilisateur TSI est-il réglé sur ON ? Vérifiez la boîte définie dans le Paramètre boîte utilisateur TSI. La réception mémoire a-t-elle été activée ? Une fois la réception mémoire activée, imprimez le document reçu comme suit : • Appuyez sur [Boîte] sur le tableau de commande. • Appuyez sur [Boîte utilisateur système]. • Appuyez sur [Boîte utilisateur réception mémoire]. • Saisissez le mot de passe et appuyez sur [OK]. • Sélectionnez le document à imprimer et appuyez sur Imprimer. • Une fois le document imprimé, appuyez sur [Fermer]. 5 Dépannage 5-6 C351 5.3 Message d'erreur affiché Les messages d'erreur énumérés dans le tableau ci-dessous s'affichent en cas de problème. Référez-vous aux explications pour remédier à la situation. Si vous ne pouvez toujours pas émettre correctement après avoir corriger le problème, contactez le service après-vente. Message d'erreur Actions correctives Occupé Bien que le nombre de rappels déterminé ait été tenté, la machine réceptrice est toujours occupée. Confirmez l'état de la machine réceptrice et renvoyez. Pas de réponse La machine n'est pas en état de répondre. Contactez la destination par téléphone, confirmez l'état de la machine et réessayez. Mémoire saturée • Si la mémoire devient saturée pendant la lecture du document : Pour émettre la partie du document lue, appuyez sur [Départ]. Appuyez sur [Arrêt] pour annuler l'émission. Dépannage 5 C351 5-7 5.4 Appeler SAV Ce message apparaît lorsque vous devez appeler le service après-vente. Les numéros de téléphone et de fax du service après-vente sont également indiqués. La procédure de signalisation d'un problème par téléphone au service après-vente est présentée ci-dessous. 7 ATTENTION Risque d'accident grave % Pour prévenir tout risque d'accident grave, procédez de la manière suivante lorsque le message d'appel du SAV s'affiche et que le fax ne fonctionne plus. Procédure à suivre lorsque le message d'appel du SAV s'affiche 1 Notez le numéro du code d'erreur. 2 Mettez hors tension le commutateur Marche/Arrêt principal et secondaire. 3 Débranchez le cordon d'alimentation. 4 Contactez le service après-vente et indiquez à votre correspondant le numéro du code d'erreur. 6 Caractéristiques techniques Caractéristiques techniques 6 C351 6-3 6 Caractéristiques techniques 6.1 Caractéristiques techniques Les caractéristiques techniques des fonctions de télécopie sont énumérées ci-dessous. Ces caractéristiques peuvent être modifiées sans préavis. Fonction Caractéristiques techniques Capacité de mémoire image 27 Go* (27 des 40 Go du disque dur sont utilisés en tant que mémoire.) Nombre max. de pages enregistrées Environ 9 000 pages* (pages enregistrées au format KONICA MINOLTA standard A4 contenant environ 700 caractères en définition “fine”) Lignes téléphoniques Lignes d'abonnés (réseaux de communication fax compris) Réseau privé (PBX) Résolution de numérisation G3 Ultra fine : 600 ppp × 600 ppp Super fine : 16 points/mm × 15,4 lignes/mm, 8 points/mm × 15,4 lignes/mm, 400 ppp × 400 ppp Fine : 8 points/mm × 7,7 lignes/mm, 200 ppp × 200 ppp Normale : 8 points/mm × 3,85 lignes/mm, 200 ppp × 100 ppp Les résolutions de numérisation ci-dessus dépendent des capacités de la machine de destination. Vitesse de transmission 2400, 4800, 7200, 9600, 12000, 14400, 16800, 19200, 21600, 24000, 26400, 28800, 31200, 33600 bps Temps d'émission 2 secondes Temps d'émission de pages au format KONICA MINOLTA standard A4 contenant environ 700 caractères en résolution normale. Il s'agit du temps d'émission de l'image uniquement (non compris le temps d'établissement de la communication). Le temps de communication varie selon le contenu des originaux et le type de ligne téléphonique à la destination. Codage MH, MR, MMR, JBIG * Le disque dur interne est utilisé pour chacune des fonctions des écrans Copie, Numérisation, Fax et Boîte. Format max. de numérisation 280 mm × 431 mm (11 pouces × 17 pouces) ou A3 (420 mm × 297 mm) Largeur : 297 mm Longueur : 432 mm max. Format max. d'enregistrement 280 mm × 431 mm (11 pouces × 17 pouces) ou A3 (420 mm × 297 mm) Les originaux supérieurs à 600 mm ne peuvent pas être reçus. Lors de la réception d'originaux plus longs que le format de papier chargé dans les magasins, ils sont imprimés selon le réglage de l'option [Imprimer page de séparation]. Fonction Caractéristiques techniques 7 Applications d'émission Applications d'émission 7 C351 7-3 7 Applications d'émission 7.1 Ouverture des écrans Réglage numérisation et Réglage communication ! Détail Appuyez sur la touche de la fonction à définir pour ouvrir l'écran de réglage correspondant (les touches [Mémoire rapide], [V34 OFF], [ECM OFF] et [Communications internationales] n'affichent pas d'écran car ce sont des touches à bascule qui activent/désactivent la fonction). Vous pouvez sélectionner plusieurs fonctions, du moment que celles-ci ne sont pas incompatibles entre elles. En cas d'incompatibilité, la fonction est grisée sur le tableau de commande. Ouverture des écrans Réglage numérisation et Réglage communication Pour envoyer un fax par le biais d'une fonction Application, ouvrez l'écran Réglage numérisation ou Réglage communication et paramétrez les fonctions voulues. 1 Appuyez sur [Fax] sur le tableau de commande pour ouvrir l'écran Fax. 2 Appuyez sur [Réglage numéris.] ou sur [Réglage comm.] dans l'écran Fax. 7 Applications d'émission 7-4 C351 3 Appuyez sur la touche de la fonction voulue. Pour afficher l'écran de réglage d'une application, appuyez sur la touche [Application] dans l'écran Réglage numérisation. 4 Effectuez l'une des opérations suivantes. – Sur l'écran voulu affiché : Réglez la fonction dans l'écran affiché, puis appuyez sur [OK]. – Une fois l'option sélectionnée : Appuyez sur [OK]. – Appuyez sur [Annul.] pour annuler le réglage et revenir au réglage de communication d'origine. L'écran Fax s'affiche à nouveau. Applications d'émission 7 C351 7-5 7.2 Présentation des fonctions d'application Les fonctions suivantes apparaissent dans l'écran Réglage numérisation et l'écran Réglage communication. [Annul.] Annule le réglage et revient aux conditions de communication d'origine. [OK] Affiche à nouveau l'écran Fax. [OFF] Désactive l'option et vous ramène à l'écran précédent. [Reset] Réinitialise toutes les options de l'écran. Écran Réglage numérisation Écran Application Écran Réglage communication Fonction Description Originaux mixtes : Vous pouvez envoyer des pages de différents formats en une seule procédure. (page 7-7) Position reliure : Spécifie la position de l'agrafage d'un original recto-verso placé sur le chargeur de document (ADF) et place à la verticale le verso de l'original. (page 7-9) 7 Applications d'émission 7-6 C351 ! Détail La touche associée à la fonction sélectionnée apparaît inversée. Appuyez sur [Annul.] pour revenir à l'écran Fax. Le mode de communication V34 est utilisé par le fax Super G3. Effacement bords : Lors de l'émission des pages d'un livre, cette fonction efface les bandes noires qui apparaîtraient en marge. (page 7-12) Ajustement fond : Règle la densité de la couleur de fond de l'original. (page 7-15) Netteté : Rend plus net le contour des caractères. (page 7-18) Nombre originaux : En mode Mémoire rapide, inclut le nombre total de pages dans les informations sur le nombre de pages. (page 3-44) Format de numérisat. : Permet de préciser la taille du document à émettre. Cette fonction est utile lors de l'émission d'une partie d'une ou de plusieurs pages. (page 7-21) Type de fichier : Précise le format d'un fichier joint à un message e-mail. (page 7-24) Mémoire rapide : Émet un message immédiatement après la lecture d'une page d'un document. (page 3-42) Mot de passe émission (TX)*1 : Joint un mot de passe à l'émission. Cette fonction est requise si le poste récepteur fonctionne en réseau fermé. (page 7-26) Émission en relève (TX) : Permet de numériser un document et de le mémoriser jusqu'à ce que la destination initie la transmission en adressant une requête de relève. (page 9-3) Réception en relève (RX) : Permet d'initier la réception en adressant à la destination une requête de relève de document. (page 9-6) Émission différée (TX) : Permet de préciser l'heure de l'émission. (page 3-47) Émission F-code (TX)*2 : Permet de préciser l'adresse secondaire et le mot de passe requis pour la communication confidentielle et l'émission en relais. (page 7-26, page 7-29, page 7-32, page 9-9) Réglage ligne Communications internationales Spécifie un débit de transmission moins rapide. (page 3-50) ECM OFF Le mode de correction d'erreur (ECM) peut être désactivé. (page 7-35) V34 OFF Si l’équipement du central ne permet pas d'utiliser le protocole V.34, le mode V34 est désactivé. (page 7-38) Fonction Description *1 : Cette fonction permet d'émettre ou de recevoir avec des postes fonctionnant en réseau fermé. Dans ce cas, la fonction F-code doit être active sur les deux machines. *2 : F-code est utilisé. Applications d'émission 7 C351 7-7 7.3 Originaux mixtes Fonction Originaux mixtes Cette fonction permet d'envoyer des pages de différents formats en une seule séquence d'opérations. 0 Spécifications L'Émission mémoire est automatiquement sélectionnée. Si les options Format d'origine et Originaux mixtes sont toutes deux sélectionnées, le Format d'origine a la priorité. 0 Fonctions incompatibles Mémoire rapide, Nombre originaux, Position reliure, Réception en relève RX (normal), Réception en relève RX (bulletin) 1 Au besoin, appuyez sur [Fax] dans le tableau de commande pour afficher l'écran Fax. 2 Appuyez sur [Réglage numéris.], puis sur [Application]. 3 Appuyez sur [Originaux mixtes]. Émission et reproduction dans le même format que l'original à la destination. Vous placez les originaux mixtes dans le chargeur RADF. 7 Applications d'émission 7-8 C351 4 Appuyez sur [OK]. – Pour annuler le réglage, appuyez sur [Annul.]. L'écran Réglage numérisation s'affiche à nouveau. 5 Appuyez sur [OK]. L'écran Fax s'affiche à nouveau. 6 Le cas échéant, définissez les autres fonctions. – Pour plus d'informations sur la définition des fonctions de l'écran Fax, voir “Réglage des conditions d'émission” à la page 3-11. Pour plus d'informations sur la définition des fonctions de l'écran Réglage numérisation ou Réglage communication, voir “Présentation des fonctions d'application” à la page 7-5. 7 Indiquez la destination. – Pour plus d'informations sur la désignation de la destination, voir “Sélection de la destination” à la page 3-21. 8 Positionnez le document original. – Pour plus d'informations sur la mise en place du document, voir “Positionnement des originaux sur la vitre d'exposition” à la page 3-8. 9 Appuyez sur [Départ]. Le FK-502 mémorise le document avant de l'émettre. ! Détail Pour annuler l'émission, voir “Annulation de l'émission” à la page 3-35. Si le poste récepteur n'est pas en état de recevoir, son numéro fera l'objet d'un rappel. Pour plus d'informations sur le rappel, voir “Rappel manuel” à la page 3-30. Si l'émission échoue, voir “Impossible d'envoyer des messages” à la page 5-3. Applications d'émission 7 C351 7-9 7.4 Position reliure Fonction Position reliure La fonction d'inversion Haut/Bas et la fonction Gauche/Droite précisent le type de reliure lors de l'émission d'un document recto-verso. En sélectionnant le type de reliure, vous vous assurez que le document sera relié, et donc lu, correctement. 0 Spécifications Le chargeur de document (ADF) doit être utilisé. La vitre d'exposition ne peut pas être utilisée pour l'émission en mode reliure. 0 Fonctions incompatibles Originaux mixtes, Réception en relève RX (normal), Réception en relève RX (bulletin) 1 Au besoin, appuyez sur [Fax] dans le tableau de commande pour afficher l'écran Fax. 2 Appuyez sur [Réglage numéris.], puis sur [Application]. Reliure Haut/Bas Reliure Gauche/Droite Fax de destination Émission 7 Applications d'émission 7-10 C351 3 Appuyez sur [Position reliure]. 4 Appuyez sur [Reliure G/D] ou [Reliure H/B] pour préciser le type de reliure du document original imprimé recto-verso. 5 Appuyez sur [OK]. – Pour annuler le réglage, appuyez sur [OFF] ou sur [Annul.]. L'écran Application s'affiche à nouveau. 6 Appuyez sur [OK]. L'écran Réglage numérisation s'affiche à nouveau. 7 Appuyez sur [OK]. L'écran Fax s'affiche à nouveau. 8 Le cas échéant, définissez les autres fonctions. – Pour plus d'informations sur la définition des fonctions de l'écran Fax, voir “Réglage des conditions d'émission” à la page 3-11. Pour plus d'informations sur la définition des fonctions de l'écran Application, voir “Présentation des fonctions d'application” à la page 7-5. Applications d'émission 7 C351 7-11 9 Indiquez la destination. – Pour plus d'informations sur la désignation de la destination, voir “Sélection de la destination” à la page 3-21. 10 Placez le document avec la page imprimée vers le haut. – Pour plus d'informations sur la mise en place du document, voir “Positionnement des originaux sur la vitre d'exposition” à la page 3-8. 11 Appuyez sur [Départ]. Le FK-502 mémorise le document avant de l'émettre. ! Détail Pour annuler l'émission, voir “Annulation de l'émission” à la page 3-35. Si le poste récepteur n'est pas en état de recevoir, son numéro fera l'objet d'un rappel. Pour plus d'informations sur le rappel, voir “Rappel manuel” à la page 3-30. Si l'émission échoue, voir “Impossible d'envoyer des messages” à la page 5-3. 7 Applications d'émission 7-12 C351 7.5 Émission avec effacement des bords 2 Remarque Les affichages diffèrent d'un pays à un autre. Fonction d'émission avec effacement des bords Lors de l'émission d'un document relié, cette fonction supprime les bandes noires qui risqueraient d'apparaître en marge des pages transmises. Ces bandes noires apparaissent lorsque la machine lit les données d'un livre ou lorsque le chargeur de document n'est pas rabattu. 0 Spécifications L'Émission mémoire rapide est automatiquement sélectionnée. Vous pouvez utiliser le chargeur ADF ou la vitre d'exposition. La largeur à effacer peut être définie par incréments de 0,1 mm (1/16 pouce) dans une plage de 0,1 à 50 mm (1/16 à 2 pouces). Réglage initial de la largeur à effacer : 5,0 mm (3/16 pouce). Si vous combinez plusieurs effacements de bords, ils s'appliquent au format de page original non encore effacé. 0 Fonctions incompatibles Mémoire rapide, Nombre originaux, Réception en relève RX (normal), Réception en relève RX (bulletin) Largeur à effacer Émission standard Émission avec effacement des bords Applications d'émission 7 C351 7-13 1 Au besoin, appuyez sur [Fax] dans le tableau de commande pour afficher l'écran Fax. 2 Appuyez sur [Réglage numéris.], puis sur [Application]. 3 Appuyez sur [Effacement bords]. 4 Sélectionnez [Haut], [Gauc], [Droi] ou [Bas] et tapez au clavier la largeur à effacer, [+] ou [-]. 5 Appuyez sur [OK]. – Pour annuler le réglage, appuyez sur [OFF] ou sur [Annul.]. L'écran Application s'affiche à nouveau. 6 Appuyez sur [OK]. L'écran Réglage numérisation s'affiche à nouveau. 7 Appuyez sur [OK]. L'écran Fax s'affiche à nouveau. 7 Applications d'émission 7-14 C351 8 Le cas échéant, définissez les autres fonctions. – Pour plus d'informations sur la définition des fonctions de l'écran Fax, voir “Réglage des conditions d'émission” à la page 3-11. Pour plus d'informations sur la définition des fonctions de l'écran Application, voir “Présentation des fonctions d'application” à la page 7-5. 9 Indiquez la destination. – Pour plus d'informations sur la désignation de la destination, voir “Sélection de la destination” à la page 3-21. 10 Positionnez le document original. – Pour plus d'informations sur la mise en place du document, voir “Positionnement des originaux sur la vitre d'exposition” à la page 3-8. 11 Appuyez sur [Départ]. La machine lit le document et l'enregistre en mémoire en tant que document réservé avant de l'émettre. ! Détail Pour annuler l'émission, voir “Annulation de l'émission” à la page 3-35. Si la machine réceptrice n'est pas en état de recevoir, la destination sera rappelée. Pour plus d'informations sur le rappel, voir “Rappel manuel” à la page 3-30. Si l'émission échoue, voir “Impossible d'envoyer des messages” à la page 5-3. Applications d'émission 7 C351 7-15 7.6 Ajustement fond Fonction Ajustement fond Cette fonction permet d'ajuster la densité de la couleur d'arrière-plan de l'original. Si le fond de l'original est en couleur, il risque d'être reproduit en noir. Dans ce cas, vous pouvez envoyer un message après avoir ajusté la densité de la couleur de fond de l'original. 0 Spécifications Vous pouvez utiliser le chargeur de document (ADF) et la vitre d'exposition. 1 Au besoin, appuyez sur [Fax] dans le tableau de commande pour afficher l'écran Fax. 2 Appuyez sur [Réglage numéris.], puis sur [Application]. 3 Appuyez sur [Ajustement fond]. 7 Applications d'émission 7-16 C351 4 Appuyez sur [+ Foncé] pour assombrir la densité de la couleur de fond de l'original, et sur [+ Clair] pour l'éclaircir. Appuyez sur [Auto] pour activer le réglage automatique. – Si vous sélectionnez [Auto], les étapes permettant de déterminer l'ajustement approprié du fond sont effectuées page par page, ce qui peut ralentir l'opération de numérisation. 5 Appuyez sur [OK]. – Pour annuler le réglage, appuyez sur [Annul.]. L'écran Application s'affiche à nouveau. 6 Appuyez sur [OK]. L'écran Réglage numérisation s'affiche à nouveau. 7 Appuyez sur [OK]. L'écran Fax s'affiche à nouveau. 8 Le cas échéant, définissez les autres fonctions. – Pour plus d'informations sur la définition des fonctions de l'écran Fax, voir “Réglage des conditions d'émission” à la page 3-11. Pour plus d'informations sur la définition des fonctions de l'écran Application, voir “Présentation des fonctions d'application” à la page 7-5. 9 Indiquez la destination. – Pour plus d'informations sur la désignation de la destination, voir “Sélection de la destination” à la page 3-21. 10 Positionnez le document original. Applications d'émission 7 C351 7-17 – Pour plus d'informations sur la mise en place du document, voir “Positionnement des originaux sur la vitre d'exposition” à la page 3-8. 11 Appuyez sur [Départ]. La machine lit le document et l'enregistre en mémoire en tant que document réservé avant de l'émettre. ! Détail Pour annuler la transmission, voir “Annulation de l'émission” à la page 3-35. Si le poste récepteur n'est pas en état de recevoir, son numéro fera l'objet d'un rappel. Pour plus d'informations sur le rappel, voir “Rappel manuel” à la page 3-30. Si l'émission échoue, voir “Impossible d'envoyer des messages” à la page 5-3. 7 Applications d'émission 7-18 C351 7.7 Netteté Fonction Netteté Cette fonction permet d'ajuster la netteté des bords des caractères. Si les caractères d'un document ne sont pas nets, augmentez la netteté ([+]) pour définir plus précisément leurs contours ou diminuez-la ([-]), le cas échéant. 0 Spécifications Vous pouvez utiliser le chargeur de document (ADF) et la vitre d'exposition. 1 Au besoin, appuyez sur [Fax] dans le tableau de commande pour afficher l'écran Fax. 2 Appuyez sur [Réglage numéris.], puis sur [Application]. 3 Appuyez sur [Netteté]. Applications d'émission 7 C351 7-19 4 Selon que vous voulez rendre les contours des caractères plus ou moins nets, appuyez sur [ ] ou [ ] vers la droite [+] ou vers la gauche [-]. 5 Appuyez sur [OK]. – Pour annuler le réglage, appuyez sur [Annul.]. L'écran Application s'affiche à nouveau. 6 Appuyez sur [OK]. L'écran Réglage numérisation s'affiche à nouveau. 7 Appuyez sur [OK]. L'écran Fax s'affiche à nouveau. 8 Le cas échéant, définissez les autres fonctions. – Pour plus d'informations sur la définition des fonctions de l'écran Fax, voir “Réglage des conditions d'émission” à la page 3-11. Pour plus d'informations sur la définition des fonctions de l'écran Application, voir “Présentation des fonctions d'application” à la page 7-5. 9 Indiquez la destination. – Pour plus d'informations sur la désignation de la destination, voir “Sélection de la destination” à la page 3-21. 10 Positionnez le document original. – Pour plus d'informations sur la mise en place du document, voir “Positionnement des originaux sur la vitre d'exposition” à la page 3-8. 11 Appuyez sur [Départ]. La machine lit le document et l'enregistre en mémoire en tant que document réservé avant de l'émettre. 7 Applications d'émission 7-20 C351 ! Détail Pour annuler l'émission, voir “Annulation de l'émission” à la page 3-35. Si le poste récepteur n'est pas en état de recevoir, son numéro fera l'objet d'un rappel. Pour plus d'informations sur le rappel, voir “Rappel manuel” à la page 3-30. Si l'émission échoue, voir “Impossible d'envoyer des messages” à la page 5-3. Applications d'émission 7 C351 7-21 7.8 Format de numérisation Fonction Format de numérisation Cette fonction permet de préciser que le format de papier du document émis doit être identique au format du papier chargé à l'autre extrémité. Cela permet d'imprimer les images sans réduction sur le poste récepteur. En général, si le format du papier chargé à la destination ne peut contenir l'image transmise, cette image est réduite. Cette fonction permet aussi d'imprimer une partie de l'image, sans réduction. 0 Spécifications L'Émission mémoire est automatiquement sélectionnée. L'emplacement de lecture des originaux varie selon que l'original est placé sur le chargeur ADF ou sur la vitre d'exposition. Si Format d'origine et Originaux mixtes sont toutes deux sélectionnées, le Format d'origine a la priorité. 0 Fonctions incompatibles Mémoire rapide, Nombre originaux, Réception en relève RX (normal), Réception en relève RX (bulletin) 1 Au besoin, appuyez sur [Fax] dans le tableau de commande pour afficher l'écran Fax. 2 Appuyez sur [Réglage numéris.], puis sur [Application]. 7 Applications d'émission 7-22 C351 3 Appuyez sur [Format de numérisat.]. 4 Appuyez sur la touche correspondant au format du document à émettre. 5 Appuyez sur [OK]. – Pour annuler le réglage, appuyez sur [Annul.]. L'écran Application s'affiche à nouveau. 6 Appuyez sur [OK]. L'écran Réglage numérisation s'affiche à nouveau. 7 Appuyez sur [OK]. L'écran Fax s'affiche à nouveau. 8 Le cas échéant, définissez les autres fonctions. – Pour plus d'informations sur la définition des fonctions de l'écran Fax, voir “Réglage des conditions d'émission” à la page 3-11. Pour plus d'informations sur la définition des fonctions de l'écran Application, voir “Présentation des fonctions d'application” à la page 7-5. Applications d'émission 7 C351 7-23 9 Indiquez la destination. – Pour plus d'informations sur la désignation de la destination, voir “Sélection de la destination” à la page 3-21. 10 Positionnez le document original. – Pour plus d'informations sur la mise en place du document, voir “Positionnement des originaux sur la vitre d'exposition” à la page 3-8. 11 Appuyez sur [Départ]. La machine lit le document et l'enregistre en mémoire en tant que document réservé avant de l'émettre. ! Détail Pour annuler l'émission, voir “Annulation de l'émission” à la page 3-35. Si le poste récepteur n'est pas en état de recevoir, son numéro fera l'objet d'un rappel. Pour plus d'informations sur le rappel, voir “Rappel manuel” à la page 3-30. Si l'émission échoue, voir “Impossible d'envoyer des messages” à la page 5-3. 7 Applications d'émission 7-24 C351 7.9 Type de fichier Définition du type de fichier Cette fonction permet de préciser le type de fichier image à lire si la destination est une adresse e-mail ou une boîte utilisateur. 1 Au besoin, appuyez sur [Fax] dans le tableau de commande pour afficher l'écran Fax. 2 Appuyez sur [Réglage numéris.]. 3 Appuyez sur [Type de fichier]. 4 Sélectionnez le type de fichier. 5 Appuyez sur [OK]. – Pour annuler le réglage, appuyez sur [Annul.]. L'écran Réglage numérisation s'affiche à nouveau. Applications d'émission 7 C351 7-25 6 Appuyez sur [OK]. L'écran Fax s'affiche à nouveau. 7 Le cas échéant, définissez les autres fonctions. – Pour plus d'informations sur la définition des fonctions de l'écran Fax, voir “Réglage des conditions d'émission” à la page 3-11. Pour plus d'informations sur la définition des fonctions de l'écran Application, voir “Présentation des fonctions d'application” à la page 7-5. 8 Indiquez la destination. – Pour plus d'informations sur la désignation de la destination, voir “Sélection de la destination” à la page 3-21. 9 Positionnez le document original. – Pour plus d'informations sur la mise en place du document, voir “Positionnement des originaux sur la vitre d'exposition” à la page 3-8. 10 Appuyez sur [Départ]. La machine lit le document et l'enregistre en mémoire en tant que document réservé avant de l'émettre. ! Détail Pour annuler l'émission, voir “Annulation de l'émission” à la page 3-35. Si l'émission échoue, voir “Impossible d'envoyer des messages” à la page 5-3. 7 Applications d'émission 7-26 C351 7.10 Mot de passe émission (TX) Mot de passe émission (TX) L'émission avec ID exige un mot de passe. Si le poste récepteur fonctionne en réseau fermé, l'expéditeur doit envoyer le même mot de passe que celui du réseau fermé en réception. 0 Spécification Cette fonction n'est disponible que si la machine du correspondant est dotée de la fonction Réseau fermé en réception (Transmission de mot de passe). 0 Fonctions incompatibles Émission en relève TX (normal), Réception en relève RX (normal), Émission F-code. 1 Au besoin, appuyez sur [Fax] dans le tableau de commande pour afficher l'écran Fax. 2 Appuyez sur [Réglage comm.]. 3 Appuyez sur [Mot de passe émission (TX)]. Applications d'émission 7 C351 7-27 4 Tapez le mot de passe au clavier (20 caractères maximum). – Les caractères et signes autorisés sont les suivants : 0 à 9, # et * – Pour effacer un caractère, appuyez sur [Eff.]. – Appuyez sur [C] (clear) pour effacer tout le mot de passe. 5 Appuyez sur [OK]. – Pour annuler le réglage, appuyez sur [OFF] ou sur [Annul.]. L'écran Réglage communication s'affiche à nouveau. 6 Appuyez sur [OK]. – Pour annuler le réglage, appuyez sur [OFF] ou sur [Annul.]. L'écran Fax s'affiche à nouveau. 7 Le cas échéant, définissez les autres fonctions. – Pour plus d'informations sur la définition des fonctions de l'écran Fax, voir “Réglage des conditions d'émission” à la page 3-11. Pour plus d'informations sur la définition des fonctions de l'écran Application, voir “Présentation des fonctions d'application” à la page 7-5. 8 Indiquez la destination. – Pour plus d'informations sur la désignation de la destination, voir “Sélection de la destination” à la page 3-21. 9 Positionnez le document original. – Pour plus d'informations sur la mise en place du document, voir “Positionnement des originaux sur la vitre d'exposition” à la page 3-8. 7 Applications d'émission 7-28 C351 10 Appuyez sur [Départ]. Le FK-502 mémorise le document avant de l'émettre. ! Détail Pour annuler l'émission, voir “Annulation de l'émission” à la page 3-35. Si le poste récepteur n'est pas en état de recevoir, son numéro fera l'objet d'un rappel. Pour plus d'informations sur le rappel, voir “Rappel manuel” à la page 3-30. Si l'émission échoue, voir “Impossible d'envoyer des messages” à la page 5-3. Applications d'émission 7 C351 7-29 7.11 Communication confidentielle (Émission F-code) Fonction Communication confidentielle Cette fonction permet d'utiliser des boîtes confidentielles (similaires à des comptes de messagerie) pour échanger des informations avec certaines personnes. Outre l'envoi d'un document vers une boîte confidentielle de destination (émission confidentielle), la réception d'un document dans une boîte confidentielle sur votre poste (réception confidentielle) est possible. Les sections suivantes décrivent les procédures d'émission confidentielle. 0 Spécifications L'émission confidentielle suppose que le fax récepteur soit doté d'une boîte confidentielle et d'un mot de passe spécifique (ce dernier n'est pas toujours requis par le fax récepteur). L'émission confidentielle suppose en outre que le fax de destination soit doté de la fonction F-code. 0 Fonctions incompatibles Émission en relève TX (normal), Réception en relève RX (normal), Mot de passe émission (TX)> 1 Au besoin, appuyez sur [Fax] dans le tableau de commande pour afficher l'écran Fax. 2 Appuyez sur [Réglage comm.]. Expéditeur Boîte de documents Récepteur confidentiels 7 Applications d'émission 7-30 C351 3 Appuyez sur [Émission F-code (TX)]. 4 Saisissez le numéro de la boîte sur le poste récepteur dans le champ Adresse secondaire. Appuyez sur [Mot Passe] et tapez le mot de passe au clavier, s'il y a lieu. – L'adresse secondaire et le mot de passe peuvent comporter 20 caractères maximum. – Pour la communication avec le FK-502, saisissez 9 caractères maximum pour le numéro de la boîte et 8 caractères maximum pour le mot de passe. Les caractères autorisés dépendent de la machine. – Les caractères et signes autorisés dans le mot de passe sont les suivants : 0 à 9, # et *. – Pour effacer un caractère, appuyez sur [Eff.]. – Appuyez sur [C] (clear) pour effacer l'intégralité de l'entrée. Si le mot de passe est requis, appuyez sur [Oui] et saisissez-le. 5 Appuyez sur [OK]. – Pour annuler le réglage, appuyez sur [OFF] ou sur [Annul.]. L'écran Réglage communication s'affiche à nouveau. Applications d'émission 7 C351 7-31 6 Appuyez sur [OK]. L'écran Fax s'affiche à nouveau. 7 Le cas échéant, définissez les autres fonctions. – Pour plus d'informations sur la définition des fonctions de l'écran Fax, voir “Réglage des conditions d'émission” à la page 3-11. Pour plus d'informations sur la définition des fonctions de l'écran Application, voir “Présentation des fonctions d'application” à la page 7-5. 8 Indiquez la destination. – Pour plus d'informations sur la désignation de la destination, voir “Sélection de la destination” à la page 3-21. 9 Positionnez le document original. – Pour plus d'informations sur la mise en place du document, voir “Positionnement des originaux sur la vitre d'exposition” à la page 3-8. 10 Appuyez sur [Départ]. Le FK-502 mémorise le document avant de l'émettre. ! Détail Pour interrompre la séquence d'opérations, appuyez sur [Arrêt]. 7 Applications d'émission 7-32 C351 7.12 Requête d'émission en relais (Émission F-code) Requête d'émission en relais La requête d'émission en relais consiste à faire transiter les transmissions vers plusieurs destinations sur une station relais (intermédiaire). Cette fonction permet de réduire les coûts de communication des destinations éloignées. Vous pouvez définir plusieurs stations, chacune d'entre elles étant composée d'une station de relais et de plusieurs destinations. 0 Spécifications La requête d'émission en relais n'est disponible que si cette fonction a été activée en mode Utilitaire. Pour plus d'informations, voir “Réglage fonction” à la page 11-40. La station d'origine émet la demande de relais, la station de relais relaye les transmissions et les stations d'arrivée sont celles qui reçoivent et terminent les communications. Cette fonction suppose le paramétrage sur la station de relais d'un numéro de boîte de relais, d'un mot de passe de relais et d'un numéro de groupe de destination. Elle suppose en outre que la station de relais soit dotée de la fonction F-code. 0 Fonctions incompatibles Émission en relève TX (normal), Réception en relève RX (normal), Mot de passe émission (TX) 1 Au besoin, appuyez sur [Fax] dans le tableau de commande pour afficher l'écran Fax. 2 Appuyez sur [Réglage comm.]. Station d'origine Station relais intermédiaire Station distante Appel international Station distante Appel local Applications d'émission 7 C351 7-33 3 Appuyez sur [Émission F-code (TX)]. 4 Saisissez dans le champ Adresse secondaire le numéro de la boîte de relais sur la station de relais, et le mot de passe dans le champ Mot Passe, à l'aide du clavier. – Les champs [Adresse secondaire] et [Mot Passe] acceptent 20 caractères maximum. – Les caractères et signes autorisés dans le champ [Mot Passe] sont les suivants : 0 à 9, # et * – Pour effacer un caractère, appuyez sur [Eff.]. – Appuyez sur [C] (clear) pour effacer l'intégralité de l'entrée. 5 Appuyez sur [OK]. – Pour annuler le réglage, appuyez sur [OFF] ou sur [Annul.]. L'écran Réglage communication s'affiche à nouveau. 6 Appuyez sur [OK]. L'écran Fax s'affiche à nouveau. 7 Applications d'émission 7-34 C351 7 Le cas échéant, définissez les autres fonctions. – Pour plus d'informations sur la définition des fonctions de l'écran Fax, voir “Réglage des conditions d'émission” à la page 3-11. Pour plus d'informations sur la définition des fonctions de l'écran Application, voir “Présentation des fonctions d'application” à la page 7-5. 8 Désignez la station relais. – Pour plus d'informations sur la désignation de la destination, voir “Sélection de la destination” à la page 3-21. 9 Positionnez le document original. – Pour plus d'informations sur la mise en place du document, voir “Positionnement des originaux sur la vitre d'exposition” à la page 3-8. 10 Appuyez sur [Départ]. Le FK-502 mémorise le document avant de l'émettre. ! Détail Pour interrompre la séquence d'opérations, appuyez sur [Arrêt]. Applications d'émission 7 C351 7-35 7.13 ECM OFF Fonction ECM OFF Les communications peuvent être effectuées avec le mode de correction d'erreur (ECM) désactivé. Ce mode, établi par l'ITU-T (International Telecommunications Union), permet aux télécopieurs qui en sont équipés de communiquer les uns avec les autres et de confirmer que les données émises sont exemptes d'erreur. Les perturbations dues aux bruits sur la ligne ou autres sont ainsi éliminées. Le FK-502 utilise par défaut le mode ECM lors des émissions. 0 Spécifications En cas de perturbation sur la ligne, le temps de communication peut être légèrement plus long lorsque le mode ECM est activé. 0 Fonctions incompatibles Émission en relève TX (normal), Réception en relève RX (normal), V34 OFF, Émission en relève (bulletin) et Réception en relève RX (bulletin). 1 Au besoin, appuyez sur [Fax] dans le tableau de commande pour afficher l'écran Fax. 2 Appuyez sur [Réglage comm.]. 3 Appuyez sur [Réglage ligne]. 7 Applications d'émission 7-36 C351 4 Appuyez sur [ECM OFF]. – Pour annuler le réglage, appuyez sur [Annul.] ou rappuyez sur [ECM OFF]. 5 Appuyez sur [OK]. L'écran Réglage communication s'affiche à nouveau. 6 Appuyez sur [OK]. L'écran Fax s'affiche à nouveau. 7 Le cas échéant, définissez les autres fonctions. – Pour plus d'informations sur la définition des fonctions de l'écran Fax, voir “Réglage des conditions d'émission” à la page 3-11. Pour plus d'informations sur la définition des fonctions de l'écran Application, voir “Présentation des fonctions d'application” à la page 7-5. 8 Indiquez la destination. – Pour plus d'informations sur la désignation de la destination, voir “Sélection de la destination” à la page 3-21. 9 Positionnez le document original. – Pour plus d'informations sur la mise en place du document, voir “Positionnement des originaux sur la vitre d'exposition” à la page 3-8. 10 Appuyez sur [Départ]. Le FK-502 démarre la transmission. Applications d'émission 7 C351 7-37 ! Détail Pour annuler l'émission, voir “Annulation de l'émission” à la page 3-35. Si le poste récepteur n'est pas en état de recevoir, son numéro fera l'objet d'un rappel. Pour plus d'informations sur le rappel, voir “Rappel manuel” à la page 3-30. Si l'émission échoue, voir “Impossible d'envoyer des messages” à la page 5-3. 7 Applications d'émission 7-38 C351 7.14 V34 OFF Mode V34 OFF Le fax Super G3 utilise le protocole V.34. Si la destination ou le FK-502 est connecté à la ligne via un équipement d’extension de central, et selon les conditions de la ligne, la communication avec le Super G3 peut ne pas aboutir. Dans ces circonstances, nous vous recommandons d'émettre en désactivant le mode V34 (OFF). Ce mode sera automatiquement réactivé à la fin de l'émission. 0 Fonctions incompatibles Réception en relève RX (normal) ECM OFF 1 Au besoin, appuyez sur [Fax] dans le tableau de commande pour afficher l'écran Fax. 2 Appuyez sur [Réglage comm.]. 3 Appuyez sur [Réglage ligne]. Applications d'émission 7 C351 7-39 4 Appuyez sur [V34 OFF]. – Pour annuler le réglage, appuyez sur [Annul.] ou rappuyez sur [V34 OFF]. 5 Appuyez sur [OK]. L'écran Réglage communication s'affiche à nouveau. 6 Appuyez sur [OK]. L'écran Fax s'affiche à nouveau. 7 Le cas échéant, définissez les autres fonctions. – Pour plus d'informations sur la définition des fonctions de l'écran Fax, voir “Réglage des conditions d'émission” à la page 3-11. Pour plus d'informations sur la définition des fonctions de l'écran Application, voir “Présentation des fonctions d'application” à la page 7-5. 8 Indiquez la destination. – Pour plus d'informations sur la désignation de la destination, voir “Sélection de la destination” à la page 3-21. 9 Positionnez le document original. – Pour plus d'informations sur la mise en place du document, voir “Positionnement des originaux sur la vitre d'exposition” à la page 3-8. 10 Appuyez sur [Départ]. Le FK-502 mémorise le document avant de l'émettre. 7 Applications d'émission 7-40 C351 ! Détail Pour annuler l'émission, voir “Annulation de l'émission” à la page 3-35. Si le poste récepteur n'est pas en état de recevoir, son numéro fera l'objet d'un rappel. Pour plus d'informations sur le rappel, voir “Rappel manuel” à la page 3-30. Si l'émission échoue, voir “Impossible d'envoyer des messages” à la page 5-3. 8 Fonctions utiles pour la réception Fonctions utiles pour la réception 8 C351 8-3 8 Fonctions utiles pour la réception 8.1 Utilisation d'un document reçu en réception confidentielle 8.1.1 Utilisation d'un document reçu en réception confidentielle La communication confidentielle permet d'utiliser des boîtes confidentielles (similaires à des comptes de messagerie) pour échanger des informations avec certaines personnes. Outre l'envoi d'un document vers une boîte confidentielle de destination (émission confidentielle), la réception d'un document dans une boîte confidentielle sur votre poste (réception confidentielle) est possible. Les sections suivantes décrivent les procédures d'impression d'un document reçu dans une boîte utilisateur confidentielle, et la suppression d'un tel document. Spécifications Si vous comptez utiliser la réception confidentielle, définissez la boîte utilisateur confidentielle (voir “Réglage des boîtes confidentielles” à la page 10-46) et le mot de passe d'accès au FK-502, puis fournissez ces données au poste à l'autre extrémité. L'émission suppose que le fax de destination soit doté de la fonction F-code. Expéditeur Boîte de documents Récepteur confidentiels 8 Fonctions utiles pour la réception 8-4 C351 8.1.2 Impression du document reçu dans une boîte utilisateur confidentielle Impression du document reçu dans une boîte utilisateur confidentielle Lorsque le FK-502 reçoit un document confidentiel, il imprime automatiquement un rapport de réception confidentielle. Procédez comme suit pour imprimer un document reçu dans une boîte utilisateur confidentielle. 1 Appuyez sur [Boîte] dans le tableau de commande. 2 Sélectionnez l'onglet [Boîte utilisateur publique], puis une [Boîte utilisateur confidentielle]. 3 Si un mot de passe d'accès a été défini, saisissez-le dans le champ affiché, puis appuyez sur [OK]. – Le mot de passe peut comporter 8 caractères maximum. 4 Sélectionnez le No. boîte confidentielle à l'aide de ou , puis appuyez sur [Imprimer]. 5 Appuyez sur [Départ]. Le document stocké dans la boîte utilisateur confidentielle désignée est imprimé. ! Détails Pour interrompre l'opération, appuyez sur [Fermer]. Une fois imprimé, le document est automatiquement supprimé. Fonctions utiles pour la réception 8 C351 8-5 8.1.3 Suppression d'un document stocké dans une boîte utilisateur confidentielle Procédez comme suit pour supprimer les documents placés dans une boîte utilisateur confidentielle. Suppression d'un document stocké dans une boîte utilisateur confidentielle Vous pouvez supprimer tous les documents d'une boîte utilisateur confidentielle en mode Utilitaire. 1 Appuyez sur [Boîte] dans le tableau de commande. 2 Sélectionnez l'onglet [Boîte utilisateur publique], puis une [Boîte utilisateur confidentielle]. 3 Si un mot de passe d'accès a été défini, saisissez-le dans le champ affiché, puis appuyez sur [OK]. – Le mot de passe peut comporter 8 caractères maximum. 4 Sélectionnez le No. boîte confidentielle à l'aide de ou , puis appuyez sur [Suppri.]. 5 Appuyez sur [Oui] dans l'écran de confirmation de la suppression. Le ou les documents placés dans cette boîte sont supprimés. ! Détails Pour interrompre l'opération, appuyez sur [Fermer]. 8 Fonctions utiles pour la réception 8-6 C351 8.2 Réception mémoire Dans l'écran Utilitaire, vous pouvez activer le mode de réception mémoire sur FK-502, qui permet de recevoir les documents, de les mémoriser et de les imprimer selon les besoins. Les sections qui suivent décrivent les procédures d'impression et de suppression d'un document reçu mémorisé. Il est supposé que la réception mémoire est active. ! Détail Pour activer et régler la réception mémoire, voir “Réception mémoire obligatoire” à la page 11-43. 8.2.1 Impression d'un document mémorisé Impression d'un document mémorisé La procédure suivante décrit l'impression d'un document reçu, stocké en mémoire. 1 Au besoin, appuyez sur [Boîte] dans le tableau de commande pour afficher l'écran de sélection d'une boîte. 2 Sélectionnez l'onglet [Boîte ut. système] et [Boîte réception mémoire RX]. – Si la fonction d'authentification utilisateur est réglée sur [ON], l'onglet [Boîte ut. personnelle] apparaît. Fonctions utiles pour la réception 8 C351 8-7 3 Saisissez le mot de passe et appuyez sur [OK]. – Pour interrompre l'opération, appuyez sur [Annul.]. – Appuyez sur [C] (clear) si vous voulez supprimer les données saisies. 4 Sélectionnez le document reçu à l'aide de ou et appuyez sur [Imprimer]. 5 Appuyez sur [Départ]. Le document sélectionné est imprimé. ! Détails Appuyez sur ou pour afficher l'écran suivant ou précédent. Pour interrompre l'opération, appuyez sur [Fermer] avant d'appuyer sur [Imprimer]. Pour afficher la première page du ficher sélectionné afin d'en vérifier le contenu, appuyez sur [Epreuve]. 8 Fonctions utiles pour la réception 8-8 C351 8.2.2 Suppression d'un document mémorisé Suppression d'un document mémorisé La procédure suivante décrit la suppression d'un document reçu, stocké en mémoire. 1 Au besoin, appuyez sur [Boîte] dans le tableau de commande pour afficher l'écran de sélection d'une boîte. 2 Sélectionnez l'onglet [Boîte ut. système] et [Boîte réception mémoire RX]. 3 Saisissez le mot de passe et appuyez sur [OK]. – Pour interrompre l'opération, appuyez sur [Annul.]. – Appuyez sur [C] (clear) si vous voulez supprimer les données saisies. 4 Sélectionnez le document reçu à l'aide de ou et appuyez sur [Suppri.]. 5 Appuyez sur [Oui] dans l'écran de confirmation de la suppression. Le document sélectionné est imprimé. ! Détails Pour interrompre l'opération, appuyez sur [Fermer] avant d'appuyer sur [Imprimer]. Pour afficher la première page du ficher sélectionné afin d'en vérifier le contenu, appuyez sur [Epreuve]. Fonctions utiles pour la réception 8 C351 8-9 8.3 Informations de réception 8.3.1 Informations sur la réception et l'impression recto-verso Lorsque [Impression R/V pour réception] est réglée sur [ON] Lorsque [Impression R/V pour réception] est réglée sur [ON] dans le réglage émission/réception du mode Utilitaire, les documents sont imprimés rectoverso. Pour plus d'informations, voir “Réglage Émission/Réception” à la page 11-37. 8 Fonctions utiles pour la réception 8-10 C351 9 Relève Relève 9 C351 9-3 9 Relève 9.1 Émission en relève L'émission en relève permet de numériser un document à l'aide du FK-502 et de l'enregistrer sur le disque dur jusqu'à ce qu'une destination transmette une commande de relève. Le document est sauvegardé dans la boîte relève émission de la boîte utilisateur système, et l'émission commence à réception d'une commande de relève de la destination. L'émission en relève stocke les documents dans la boîte relève émission et les bulletins dans la boîte bulletin board. La description qui suit suppose l'utilisation de l'émission en relève et de la boîte relève émission. ! Détail Si vous utilisez l'option bulletin board, reportez-vous à “Bulletin” à la page 9-9. Pour connaître la procédure d'impression et de suppression des documents émis en relève, voir “Manuel d'utilisation – Opérations Boîte”. 9 Relève 9-4 C351 9.1.1 Émission en relève Émission en relève Cette section décrit la procédure d'émission en relève (normale). 0 Spécifications L'émission en relève porte sur un seul document. L'émission mémoire est automatiquement sélectionnée. 0 Fonctions incompatibles Mémoire rapide, Nombre d'originaux, Réception en relève TX (normal), Émission différée TX, Communications internationales, ECM OFF, Mot de passe émission TX, Émission F-code, V34 OFF 1 Au besoin, appuyez sur [Fax] dans le tableau de commande pour afficher l'écran Fax. 2 Appuyez sur [Réglage comm.]. 3 Appuyez sur [Émission en relève (TX)]. 4 Appuyez sur [Normal]. Relève 9 C351 9-5 5 Appuyez sur [OK]. – Pour annuler le réglage, appuyez sur [OFF] ou sur [Annul.]. L'écran Réglage communication s'affiche à nouveau. 6 Appuyez sur [OK]. L'écran Fax s'affiche à nouveau. 7 Le cas échéant, définissez les autres fonctions. – Pour plus d'informations sur la définition des fonctions de l'écran Fax, voir “Réglage des conditions d'émission” à la page 3-11. Pour plus d'informations sur la définition des fonctions de l'écran Application, voir “Présentation des fonctions d'application” à la page 7-5. 8 Positionnez le document original. – Pour plus d'informations sur la mise en place du document, voir “Positionnement de l'original sur la machine” à la page 3-7. 9 Appuyez sur [Départ]. Le FK-502 numérise le document et le mémorise jusqu'à ce que la destination envoie une commande de relève, qui entraîne l'émission du document. ! Détail Si l'émission échoue, voir “Impossible d'envoyer des messages” à la page 5-3. 9 Relève 9-6 C351 9.2 Réception en relève La réception en relève permet au FK-502 d'envoyer une commande à une destin ation pour recevoir le document qui est soit prêt à l'émission sur la machine distante, soit réservé pour l'émission en relève. Cette fonction est utile si vous préférez assumer les frais de la communication. La réception en relève séquentielle permet de désigner plusieurs destinations de réception en relève. Un rapport de relève réception séquentielle est imprimé en fin de réception, de même qu'un rapport de relève séquentielle réservée si vous utilisez également l'émission différée. ! Détail Cette fonction ne fonctionne pas si la machine distante n'est pas dotée de cette caractéristique. Pour plus d'informations sur le rapport de relève séquentielle réservée, voir “Rapport de relève séquentielle réservée (réception)” à la page 12-27 et sur le rapport de relève réception séquentielle, voir “Rapport de relève séquentielle (réception)” à la page 12-17. Relève 9 C351 9-7 Réception en relève La réception en relève comporte deux options : normale et bulletin board. Avec l'option bulletin board, le document à recevoir est réservé dans le tableau électronique de la destination. Pour plus d'informations sur cette option, voir “Réception en relève d'un document placé sur le bulletin board d'une destination (fax)” à la page 9-13. La description s'applique à la réception en relève normale. 0 Fonctions incompatibles Mémoire rapide, Effacement bords, Format de numérisation, Nombre d'originaux, Originaux mixtes, Position relieure, Émission confidentielle, Émission en relais, ECM OFF, Communications internationales, Émission en relève (normal), Mot de passe émission TX 1 Au besoin, appuyez sur [Fax] dans le tableau de commande pour afficher l'écran Fax. 2 Appuyez sur [Réglage comm.]. 3 Appuyez sur [Réception en relève (RX)]. 4 Appuyez sur [Normal]. 9 Relève 9-8 C351 5 Appuyez sur [OK]. – Pour annuler le réglage, appuyez sur [OFF]. L'écran Réglage communication s'affiche à nouveau. 6 Appuyez sur [OK]. L'écran Fax s'affiche à nouveau. 7 Indiquez la ou les destinations. – Pour plus d'informations sur la désignation de la destination, voir “Sélection de la destination” à la page 3-21. Vous pouvez spécifier plusieurs destinations. 8 Appuyez sur [Départ]. Le FK-502 commence à recevoir le ou les documents prêts à l'émission ou réservés pour émission en relève sur la ou les destinations. ! Détail Pour suspendre la réception en relève, appuyez sur [Arrêt] sur le tableau de commande avant d'appuyer sur [Départ]. Si la réception échoue, voir “Réception impossible” à la page 4-6. Relève 9 C351 9-9 9.3 Bulletin Le FK-502 vous permet de parcourir le bulletin board (tableau électronique) d'une destination pour y rechercher les documents en attente de relève ou pour y placer des documents à relever. Cette section décrit les procédures de gestion des documents affichés sur le bulletin board d'une destination, notamment l'écriture d'un document sur le tableau et la réception en relève d'un document posté sur le tableau. ! Détail Pour plus d'informations sur l'impression et la suppression d'un document affiché sur le tableau électronique, consultez le “Manuel d'utilisation - Opérations Scanner réseau”. Relève Écriture Parcourir Bulletin boards (tableaux électroniques) 9 Relève 9-10 C351 9.3.1 Écriture d'un document sur le bulletin board La procédure d'écriture d'un document sur le bulletin board est décrite cidessous. Écriture d'un document sur le bulletin board 0 Spécifications Les tableaux électroniques (bulletin board) doivent être préalablement définis. Voir “Réglage du bulletin (tableau électronique)” à la page 10-48. Les tableaux électroniques ne peuvent être utilisés que si la destination est dotée de la fonction F-code. Vous ne pouvez placer sur un tableau électronique qu'un document à la fois. 0 Fonctions incompatibles Mémoire rapide, Nombre d'originaux, Réception en relève TX (normal), Émission différée TX, Communications internationales, ECM OFF, Mot de passe émission TX, Émission F-code, V34 OFF 0 Si le bulletin board comporte déjà un document et que vous en placez un nouveau, celui-ci écrase le document existant. 1 Au besoin, appuyez sur [Fax] dans le tableau de commande pour afficher l'écran Fax. 2 Appuyez sur [Réglage comm.]. 3 Appuyez sur [Émission en relève (TX)]. Relève 9 C351 9-11 4 Appuyez sur [Bulletin]. 5 Saisissez le numéro du bulletin dans le champ [No. bulletin]. – Vous pouvez saisir un numéro compris entre 1 et 999999999 (9 chiffres). – Pour effacer un caractère, appuyez sur [Eff.]. – Appuyez sur [C] (clear) pour supprimer tous les numéros de bulletin board. 6 Appuyez sur [OK]. – Pour annuler le réglage, appuyez sur [OFF]. L'écran Réglage communication s'affiche à nouveau. 7 Appuyez sur [OK]. L'écran Fax s'affiche à nouveau. 8 Le cas échéant, définissez les autres fonctions. – Pour plus d'informations sur la définition des fonctions de l'écran Fax, voir “Réglage des conditions d'émission” à la page 3-11. Pour plus d'informations sur la définition des fonctions de l'écran Application, voir “Présentation des fonctions d'application” à la page 7-5. 9 Relève 9-12 C351 9 Positionnez le document original. – Pour plus d'informations sur la mise en place du document, voir “Positionnement des originaux sur la vitre d'exposition” à la page 3-8. 10 Appuyez sur [Départ]. – Si vous voulez interrompre la lecture du document après avoir appuyé sur [Départ], appuyez sur [Arrêt], puis sur [Oui] dans l'écran de confirmation. Le FK-502 lit le document et le place sur le bulletin board. Relève 9 C351 9-13 9.3.2 Réception en relève d'un document placé sur le bulletin board d'une destination (fax) Réception en relève d'un document placé sur le bulletin board d'une destination (fax) Vous pouvez recevoir par relève le document placé sur le bulletin board d'une destination. Procédez de la manière suivante. 1 Au besoin, appuyez sur [Fax] dans le tableau de commande pour afficher l'écran Fax. 2 Appuyez sur [Réglage comm.]. 3 Appuyez sur [Réception en relève (RX)]. 4 Appuyez sur [Bulletin]. 9 Relève 9-14 C351 5 Saisissez le numéro du bulletin dans le champ [No. bulletin]. – Vous pouvez saisir un numéro de bulletin de 20 chiffres maximum. – Pour effacer un caractère, appuyez sur [Eff.]. – Appuyez sur [C] (clear) pour supprimer tous les numéros de bulletin board. 6 Appuyez sur [OK]. – Pour annuler le réglage, appuyez sur [OFF]. L'écran Réglage communication s'affiche à nouveau. 7 Appuyez sur [OK]. L'écran Fax s'affiche à nouveau. 8 Sélectionnez la destination. – Pour plus d'informations, voir “Sélection de la destination” à la page 3-21. 9 Appuyez sur [Départ]. La machine distante lance l'opération de relève sur son bulletin board. 10 Enregistrement/ Réglages Enregistrement/Réglages 10 C351 10-3 10 Enregistrement/Réglages 10.1 Affichage de l'écran d'enregistrement du télécopieur La procédure d'affichage de l'écran d'enregistrement du télécopieur est décrite ci-dessous. Affichage de l'écran d'enregistrement du télécopieur 1 Appuyez sur [Fax] et sur [Utilitaire/Compteur] sur le tableau de commande pour afficher l'écran du mode Utilitaire. 2 Appuyez sur [Enregistrement 1-touche]. – En mode Utilitaire, vous pouvez également taper sur le clavier le numéro de l'option pour la sélectionner. Pour [Enregistrement 1-touche], tapez “1” sur le clavier. – Si [Enregistrement et changement d'adresse] de l'option [Interdire accès Paramètres tâche] dans l'écran Utilitaires est réglé sur [Interdire], vous ne pouvez pas changer ou enregistrer la touche correspondant à [Enregistrement 1-touche]. Pour plus d'informations à ce sujet, contactez l'administrateur. 10 Enregistrement/Réglages 10-4 C351 3 Appuyez sur Fax. L'écran Enregistrement fax s'affiche. Enregistrement/Réglages 10 C351 10-5 10.2 Enregistrement du carnet d'adresses Vous pouvez enregistrer dans le [Carnet d'adresses] le numéro du fax et l'adresse e-mail d'une destination fréquente. Vous pouvez ensuite accéder au [Carnet d'adresses] enregistré par le biais de [Carnet d'adresses] ou [Saisie directe] dans l'écran Fax. - Vous pouvez enregistrer 2 000 adresses maximum (0001 à 2000), y compris le [Carnet d'adresses] d'autres fonctions de la machine, telle que la numérisation. - L'enregistrement du nom de la destination et du caractère de recherche dans le [Carnet d'adresses] permet ensuite de spécifier la destination en sélectionnant le caractère de recherche. - Vous pouvez enregistrer le numéro de fax ([No. abrégé]), l'adresse e-mail ou la boîte. Cette section décrit la procédure d'enregistrement, de modification et de suppression du carnet d'adresses. Tenez compte du point suivant : - L'enregistrement n'est pas disponible tant que le nom, la destination, l'adresse e-mail ou la boîte n'a pas été défini. ! Détail Vous pouvez confirmer les informations enregistrées dans la liste de numéros abrégés. Pour plus d'informations sur la liste de numéros abrégés, voir “Liste Carnet d'adresses” à la page 12-33 10 Enregistrement/Réglages 10-6 C351 Enregistrement d'un numéro de fax dans un carnet d'adresses La procédure d'enregistrement d'un numéro de fax dans un carnet d'adresses est décrite ci-dessous. 1 Pour afficher l'écran Enregistrement fax, voir “Affichage de l'écran d'enregistrement du télécopieur” à la page 10-3. 2 Appuyez sur [Carnet d'adresses]. – En mode Utilitaire, vous pouvez également taper sur le clavier le numéro de l'option pour la sélectionner. Pour [Carnet d'adresses], tapez “1” sur le clavier. 3 Appuyez sur [No. abrégé]. Enregistrement/Réglages 10 C351 10-7 4 Appuyez sur [Nouveau]. 5 Appuyez sur [Nom] et saisissez le nom du carnet d'adresses. – Pour plus d'informations sur la saisie des caractères, voir page 13-4. – Le nom peut comporter 24 caractères maximum. – Un numéro inutilisé apparaît par défaut dans le champ [No.]. 6 Tapez sur le clavier le numéro de fax de la destination. – Les touches suivantes sont disponibles. – [Tonalité] : Si vous utilisez la numérotation décimale (DC), appuyez sur [Tonalité] pour sélectionner le mode FV (fréquences vocales), qui est utilisé avec les services de télécopie. La sélection de cette option est indiquée par un “T” à l'écran. – [Pause] : Appuyez sur [Pause] pour insérer une pause entre deux chiffres du numéro à composer. L'appui une fois sur [Pause] génère un intervalle d'une seconde entre deux chiffres. Vous pouvez saisir plusieurs intervalles, indiqués par un “P” à l'écran. 10 Enregistrement/Réglages 10-8 C351 – [-] : Le tiret est un signe de séparation uniquement. Il n'a aucune incidence sur la numérotation. Il est indiqué à l'écran par un “-”. – : Déplace le curseur vers la gauche. – : Déplace le curseur vers la droite. – [Suppri.] : Les caractères sont supprimés un par un à partir de la position du curseur. Si celui-ci se trouve à l'extrême droite de l'entrée, les caractères précédent le curseur sont supprimés. – [Ligne extérieure]: S'affiche si [Définir CN PBX] est réglé sur [ON]. Est indiqué à l'écran par un [E-]. – Vous pouvez saisir un numéro de 38 chiffres maximum. – Si vous faites une faute de frappe, appuyez sur [Suppri.] pour effacer les caractères un par un, sur [C] (clear) pour tout effacer. – Si la connexion PBX est [ON] lors d'un appel de la ligne intérieure vers une ligne extérieure, appuyez sur [Pause] après le numéro de la ligne extérieure (“0”, par exemple) pour sécuriser l'appel. “P” s'affiche à l'écran. 7 Pour changer le caractère de recherche, appuyez sur [Index], puis réenregistrez ce caractère. – Appuyez sur la touche à enregistrer comme caractère de recherche parmi les touches [ABC] à [etc]. – Si la destination est fréquemment utilisée, précisez le caractère de recherche et sélectionnez en même temps [Comm]. Ce caractère de recherche s'affichera en premier lieu dans le carnet d'adresses. – Le caractère affiché en préfixe du Nom est défini par défaut comme caractère de recherche. 8 Appuyez sur [OK]. – Pour annuler l'enregistrement, appuyez sur [Annul.]. Le numéro de fax est enregistré dans le carnet d'adresses et la destination enregistrée apparaît dans la liste. 9 Appuyez sur [Fermer]. Pour procéder à un autre enregistrement de numéro de fax dans le carnet d'adresses, reprenez à l'étape 4. 10 Appuyez sur [Quitt.] en bas à gauche. Enregistrement/Réglages 10 C351 10-9 Enregistrement d'une adresse e-mail dans le carnet d'adresses L'enregistrement d'une adresse e-mail dans le carnet d'adresses permet d'envoyer un original numérisé en pièce jointe d'un message. Le fichier est au format TIFF ou PDF. La procédure d'enregistrement d'une adresse e-mail dans le carnet d'adresses est décrite ci-dessous. 1 Pour afficher l'écran Enregistrement fax, voir “Affichage de l'écran d'enregistrement du télécopieur” à la page 10-3. 2 Appuyez sur [Carnet d'adresses]. – En mode Utilitaire, vous pouvez également taper sur le clavier un numéro d'option pour la sélectionner. Pour le [Carnet d'adresses], tapez “1” sur le clavier. 3 Appuyez sur [E-Mail]. 10 Enregistrement/Réglages 10-10 C351 4 Appuyez sur [Nouveau]. 5 Appuyez sur [Nom] et saisissez le nom du carnet d'adresses. – Pour plus d'informations sur la saisie des caractères, voir page 13-4. – Le nom peut comporter 24 caractères maximum. – Un numéro inutilisé apparaît par défaut dans le champ [No.]. 6 Appuyez sur [Adresse E-Mail]. 7 Saisissez l'adresse e-mail dans l'écran qui s'affiche, puis appuyez sur [OK]. – : Déplace le curseur vers la gauche. – : Déplace le curseur vers la droite. – [Suppri.] : Les caractères sont supprimés un par un à partir de la position du curseur. Si celui-ci se trouve à l'extrême droite de l'entrée, les caractères précédent le curseur sont supprimés. – L'adresse e-mail peut comporter 320 caractères maximum. Enregistrement/Réglages 10 C351 10-11 – Appuyez sur [C] (clear) pour supprimer toutes les entrées saisies. 8 Pour changer le caractère de recherche, appuyez sur [Index], puis réenregistrez ce caractère. – Appuyez sur la touche à enregistrer comme caractère de recherche parmi les touches [ABC] à [etc]. – Si la destination est fréquemment utilisée, précisez le caractère de recherche et sélectionnez en même temps [Comm]. Ce caractère de recherche s'affichera en premier lieu dans la sélection du carnet d'adresses. – Le caractère affiché en préfixe du Nom est automatiquement défini comme caractère de recherche. 9 Appuyez sur [OK]. – Pour annuler l'enregistrement, appuyez sur [Annul.]. L'adresse e-mail est enregistrée dans le carnet d'adresses et la destination enregistrée apparaît dans la liste. 10 Appuyez sur [Fermer]. Pour procéder à un autre enregistrement dans le carnet d'adresses, reprenez à l'étape 4. 11 Appuyez sur [Quitt.] en bas à gauche. 10 Enregistrement/Réglages 10-12 C351 Enregistrement d'une boîte dans le carnet d'adresses L'enregistrement d'une boîte dans le carnet d'adresses permet de placer dans cette boîte l'original numérisé. Le fichier est enregistré au format TIFF. La procédure d'enregistrement d'une boîte dans le carnet d'adresses est décrite ci-dessous. 1 Pour afficher l'écran Enregistrement fax, voir “Affichage de l'écran d'enregistrement du télécopieur” à la page 10-3. 2 Appuyez sur [Carnet d'adresses]. – En mode Utilitaire, vous pouvez également taper sur le clavier un numéro d'option pour la sélectionner. Pour le [Carnet d'adresses], tapez “1” sur le clavier. 3 Appuyez sur [Boîte utilisateur]. Enregistrement/Réglages 10 C351 10-13 4 Appuyez sur [Nouveau]. 5 Appuyez sur [Nom] et saisissez le nom du carnet d'adresses. – Pour plus d'informations sur la saisie des caractères, voir page 13-4. – Le nom peut comporter 24 caractères maximum. – Un numéro inutilisé apparaît par défaut dans le champ [No.]. 6 Appuyez sur [Nom boîte utilisateur]. 10 Enregistrement/Réglages 10-14 C351 7 Sélectionnez la boîte à enregistrer et appuyez sur [OK]. – Cette opération suppose l'enregistrement préalable de la boîte. – Pour plus d'informations sur l'enregistrement de la boîte, voir “Manuel d'utilisation - Opérations Boîte”. 8 Pour changer le caractère de recherche, appuyez sur [Index], puis réenregistrez ce caractère. – Appuyez sur la touche à enregistrer comme caractère de recherche parmi les touches [ABC] à [etc]. – Si la destination est fréquemment utilisée, précisez le caractère de recherche et sélectionnez en même temps [Comm]. Ce caractère de recherche s'affichera en premier lieu dans la sélection du carnet d'adresses. – Le caractère affiché en préfixe du Nom est défini par défaut comme caractère de recherche. 9 Appuyez sur [OK]. – Pour annuler l'enregistrement, appuyez sur [Annul.]. La boîte est enregistrée dans le carnet d'adresses et la destination enregistrée apparaît dans la liste. 10 Appuyez sur [Fermer]. Pour procéder à un autre enregistrement dans le carnet d'adresses, reprenez à l'étape 4. 11 Appuyez sur [Quitt.] en bas à gauche. Enregistrement/Réglages 10 C351 10-15 Modification du contenu du carnet d'adresses La procédure de modification du contenu du carnet d'adresses est décrite ci-dessous. 1 Pour afficher l'écran Enregistrement fax, voir “Affichage de l'écran d'enregistrement du télécopieur” à la page 10-3. 2 Appuyez sur [Carnet d'adresses]. – En mode Utilitaire, vous pouvez également taper sur le clavier un numéro d'option pour la sélectionner. Pour le [Carnet d'adresses], tapez “1” sur le clavier. 3 Appuyez sur [No. abrégé], [E-Mail] ou [Boîte utilisateur]. 4 Appuyez sur le carnet d'adresses à modifier, puis sur [Modif.]. 5 Appuyez sur l'élément à modifier, apportez-y les modifications voulues, puis appuyez sur [OK]. 10 Enregistrement/Réglages 10-16 C351 6 Confirmez les modifications et appuyez sur [OK]. – Pour annuler la modification, appuyez sur [Annul.]. Pour apporter d'autres modifications, reprenez la procédure à l'étape 5. 7 Appuyez sur [Fermer]. 8 Appuyez sur [Quitt.] en bas à gauche. Enregistrement/Réglages 10 C351 10-17 Suppression du carnet d'adresses La procédure de suppression du carnet d'adresses est décrite ci-dessous. 0 Si vous supprimez une destination du carnet d'adresses, celle-ci est également supprimée du groupe et du programme auxquels elle appartient. 1 Pour afficher l'écran Enregistrement fax, voir “Affichage de l'écran d'enregistrement du télécopieur” à la page 10-3. 2 Appuyez sur [Carnet d'adresses]. – En mode Utilitaire, vous pouvez également taper sur le clavier un numéro d'option pour la sélectionner. Pour le [Carnet d'adresses], tapez “1” sur le clavier. 3 Appuyez sur [No. abrégé], [E-Mail] ou [Boîte utilisateur]. 4 Appuyez sur le carnet d'adresses à supprimer, puis sur [Supprimer]. 5 Appuyez sur [Oui] pour confirmer la suppression. – Pour annuler la suppression, appuyez sur [Non]. Pour procéder à une autre suppression, reprenez à l'étape 4. 10 Enregistrement/Réglages 10-18 C351 6 Appuyez sur [Fermer]. 7 Appuyez sur [Quitt.] en bas à gauche. Enregistrement/Réglages 10 C351 10-19 10.3 Enregistrement d'un groupe Plusieurs carnet d'adresses peuvent être affectés à un groupe. Cette fonction est utile si vous envoyez régulièrement des informations à plusieurs destinations en même temps, ou si vous avez choisi la réception en relève de ces émetteurs. - Vous pouvez enregistrer jusqu'à 100 groupes (01 à 99, 00), y compris les groupes utilisés pour la fonction de numérisation. - Chaque groupe peut comporter jusqu'à 500 carnets d'adresses. - Un carnet d'adresses peut être enregistré pour le groupe. Veillez seulement à enregistrer la destination dans ce carnet d'adresses avant de procéder à l'enregistrement du groupe. – Pour plus d'informations sur l'enregistrement d'un carnet d'adresses, voir “Enregistrement du carnet d'adresses” à la page 10-5. - Chaque groupe peut porter un nom. Les procédures qui suivent décrivent l'enregistrement d'un carnet d'adresses et d'un groupe, ainsi que la modification et la suppression d'un groupe enregistré. Tenez compte du point suivant : - L'enregistrement n'est pas disponible tant que le nom, la destination, l'adresse e-mail ou la boîte n'a pas été défini. ! Détail Vous pouvez confirmer les informations enregistrées dans la liste des groupes. Pour plus d'informations sur la liste des groupes, voir “Liste d'adresses de groupe” à la page 12-36 10 Enregistrement/Réglages 10-20 C351 Enregistrement d'un groupe La procédure d'enregistrement d'un groupe est décrite ci-dessous. 1 Pour afficher l'écran Enregistrement fax, voir “Affichage de l'écran d'enregistrement du télécopieur” à la page 10-3. 2 Appuyez sur [Groupe]. – En mode Utilitaire, vous pouvez également taper sur le clavier un numéro d'option pour la sélectionner. Pour un [Groupe], tapez “2” sur le clavier. 3 Appuyez sur [Nouveau]. – Si le groupe a déjà été enregistré, vous pouvez modifier les entrées à ce stade en appuyant sur [Modifier]. Pour plus d'informations, voir page 10-23. – Seuls les groupes enregistrés dans [Fax] sont affichés. Enregistrement/Réglages 10 C351 10-21 4 Appuyez sur [Nom] et saisissez le nom du groupe. – Pour plus d'informations sur la saisie des caractères, voir page 13-4. – Le nom peut comporter 24 caractères maximum. – Un numéro disponible est affiché par défaut dans le champ [No.]. 5 Appuyez sur [Destination]. – Chaque groupe peut comporter jusqu'à 500 carnets d'adresses. 6 Sélectionnez la catégorie à enregistrer dans le groupe parmi [No. abrégé], [Boîte utilisateur] et [E-Mail]. 10 Enregistrement/Réglages 10-22 C351 7 Sélectionnez la destination à enregistrer dans le groupe. – Recherche par nom : Appuyez sur la touche correspondant au caractère de recherche, puis sélectionnez la destination dans le carnet d'adresses. – Recherche par numéro : Affiche les destinations numérotées dans l'ordre d'enregistrement (écran de 100). Appuyez sur la touche correspondant au numéro du carnet d'adresses à afficher. Appuyez sur ou pour faire défiler les numéros. 8 Appuyez sur [OK]. 9 Appuyez sur [Fermer]. 10 Appuyez sur [OK]. Pour procéder à l'enregistrement d'un autre groupe, reprenez à l'étape 5. 11 Appuyez sur [Quitt.] en bas à gauche. Enregistrement/Réglages 10 C351 10-23 Modification d'un groupe La procédure de modification d'un groupe est décrite ci-dessous. 1 Pour afficher l'écran Enregistrement fax, voir “Affichage de l'écran d'enregistrement du télécopieur” à la page 10-3. 2 Appuyez sur [Groupe]. – En mode Utilitaire, vous pouvez également taper sur le clavier un numéro d'option pour la sélectionner. Pour un [Groupe], tapez “2” sur le clavier. 3 Sélectionnez le groupe à modifier et appuyez sur [Modifier]. – Appuyez sur ou pour faire défiler les pages. 4 Sélectionnez l'élément à modifier, apportez les modifications voulues, puis appuyez sur [OK] ou sur [Fermer]. 5 Confirmez les modifications et appuyez sur [OK]. – Pour annuler les modifications, appuyez sur [Annul.]. 6 Appuyez sur [Quitt.] en bas à gauche. 10 Enregistrement/Réglages 10-24 C351 Suppression d'un groupe La procédure de suppression d'un groupe est décrite ci-dessous. 0 La suppression d'un groupe le supprime également du programme auquel il appartient. 1 Pour afficher l'écran Enregistrement fax, voir “Affichage de l'écran d'enregistrement du télécopieur” à la page 10-3. 2 Appuyez sur [Groupe]. – En mode Utilitaire, vous pouvez également taper sur le clavier un numéro d'option pour la sélectionner. Pour un [Groupe], tapez “2” sur le clavier. 3 Sélectionnez le groupe à supprimer et appuyez sur [Supprimer]. – Appuyez sur ou pour faire défiler les pages. – Vous pouvez confirmer les réglages en sélectionnant le groupe, puis en appuyant sur [Détails]. 4 Appuyez sur [Oui] pour confirmer la suppression. – Pour annuler la suppression, appuyez sur [Non]. Pour procéder à une autre suppression, reprenez à l'étape 3. 5 Appuyez sur [Fermer]. 6 Appuyez sur [Quitt.] en bas à gauche. Enregistrement/Réglages 10 C351 10-25 10.4 Enregistrement d'un programme Avant d'être enregistrée dans un programme, une destination (numéro de fax, boîte utilisateur ou e-mail) appelée fréquemment peut être associée au [Réglage numérisa.] ou au [Réglage communic.] qui sera utilisé. Cela fait, il suffit d'appuyer sur la touche correspondant au [Programme], de définir les fonctions de la destination enregistrée ainsi que le [Réglage numérisa.] ou le [Réglage commnic.], puis d'émettre. - Vous pouvez enregistrer jusqu'à 400 (001 à 400) programmes, y compris ceux d'autres fonctions de la machine. - Chaque programme peut porter un nom. Les procédures ci-dessous décrivent l'enregistrement d'un programme, ainsi que la modification et la suppression d'un programme. Tenez compte du point suivant : - L'enregistrement n'est pas disponible si le [Nom], l'un quelconque des [Réglage numérisa.] ou [Réglage communic.], ou la destination ne sont pas définis. Enregistrement d'un programme La procédure d'enregistrement d'un programme est décrite ci-dessous. 1 Pour afficher l'écran Enregistrement fax, voir “Affichage de l'écran d'enregistrement du télécopieur” à la page 10-3. 2 Appuyez sur [Programme]. – En mode Utilitaire, vous pouvez également taper sur le clavier un numéro d'option pour la sélectionner. Pour un [Programme], tapez “3” sur le clavier. 10 Enregistrement/Réglages 10-26 C351 3 Sélectionnez le programme à enregistrer et appuyez sur [Modifier]. – Affichage de [Réglage numéri.] et [Réglage communic.] Réglage : ON OFF Non enregistré Affichage : * - (Espace) – Appuyez sur ou à gauche de [Liste page] pour afficher une autre page. Chaque page affiche 15 destinations. – Appuyez sur [Liste page] pour paramétrer l'affichage d'une liste de programmes par page. – Appuyez sur [Changer nom page] dans l'écran Liste page pour le nom de la page affichée. – Appuyez sur ou à droite de la liste pour afficher le programme suivant. – Si la destination est un scanner, "Destination scanner" est affiché. 4 Appuyez sur [Nom] et tapez le nom du programme. – Pour plus d'informations sur la saisie des caractères, voir page 13-4. – Le nom peut comporter 24 caractères maximum. Enregistrement/Réglages 10 C351 10-27 5 Appuyez sur [Dest.]. 6 Appuyez sur [Sélection dans carnet d'adresses] ou [Saisie directe] pour préciser la destination. – Si vous choisissez [Sélection dans carnet d'adresses] : Sélectionnez une destination dans les carnets d'adresses et les groupes enregistrés. – Sélectionnez la destination à enregistrer parmi [No. abrégé], [Boîte utilisateur], [Groupe] ou [E-Mail]. – Appuyez sur [Recherche par nom] ou [Recherche par numéro], puis sélectionnez la destination. – [Recherche par nom] : Appuyez sur la touche correspondant au caractère de recherche, puis sélectionnez la destination dans le carnet d'adresses. – [Recherche par numéro] : Affiche les destinations numérotées dans l'ordre d'enregistrement (écran de 100). Appuyez sur la touche correspondant au numéro du carnet d'adresses à afficher. Appuyez sur ou pour faire défiler les numéros. – Appuyez sur [OK]. 10 Enregistrement/Réglages 10-28 C351 – Si vous choisissez la [Saisie directe] : Définissez la destination de la manière suivante. – Appuyez sur [No. abrégé], [Boîte utilisateur] ou [E-Mail]. – Saisissez ou sélectionnez la destination, puis appuyez sur [OK]. – Pour plus d'informations sur la saisie des numéros à composer, voir “Enregistrement d'un numéro de fax dans un carnet d'adresses” à la page 10-6. – Pour plus d'informations sur la saisie des boîtes, voir “Enregistrement d'une adresse e-mail dans le carnet d'adresses” à la page 10-9. – Pour plus d'informations sur la saisie des adresses e-mail, voir “Enregistrement d'une boîte dans le carnet d'adresses” à la page 10-12. 7 Pour paramétrer le [Réglage numérisation] ou le [Réglage communication], appuyez sur [ON], puis appuyez sur [OK]. – Dans l'écran [Réglage communications], vous pouvez paramétrer [Réglage E-Mail] et [Notification E-Mail]. – Si [Notification E-Mail] est réglé sur [ON], la fin d'une tâche peut être confirmée par e-mail à la destination précisée dans le champ [Notification E-Mail]. – Pour plus d'informations sur [Réglage numérisation] et [Réglage communication], voir “Applications d'émission” à la page 7-3. 8 Appuyez sur [Fermer]. – Pour annuler l'enregistrement, appuyez sur [Annul.]. Pour procéder à l'enregistrement d'un autre programme, reprenez à l'étape 3. 9 Appuyez sur [Quitt.] en bas à gauche. Enregistrement/Réglages 10 C351 10-29 Suppression d'un programme La procédure de suppression d'un programme est décrite ci-dessous. 1 Pour afficher l'écran Enregistrement fax, voir “Affichage de l'écran d'enregistrement du télécopieur” à la page 10-3. 2 Appuyez sur [Programme]. – En mode Utilitaire, vous pouvez également taper sur le clavier un numéro d'option pour la sélectionner. Pour un [Programme], tapez “3” sur le clavier. 3 Sélectionnez le programme à supprimer et appuyez sur [Supprimer]. – Appuyez sur ou à gauche de [Liste page] pour afficher une autre page. Chaque page affiche 15 destinations. – Appuyez sur [Liste page] pour paramétrer l'affichage d'une liste de programmes par page. – Appuyez sur une touche dans l'écran Liste page pour modifier le nom de la page affichée. – Appuyez sur ou à droite de la liste pour afficher le programme suivant. 10 Enregistrement/Réglages 10-30 C351 – Si la destination est un scanner, "Destination scanner" est affiché. – Vous pouvez confirmer les réglages en sélectionnant le programme, puis en appuyant sur [Vérifier réglage]. 4 Appuyez sur [Oui] pour confirmer la suppression. – Pour annuler la suppression, appuyez sur [Non]. Pour procéder à une autre suppression, reprenez à l'étape 3. 5 Appuyez sur [Quitt.] en bas à gauche. Enregistrement/Réglages 10 C351 10-31 10.5 Enregistrement du sujet et du texte d'un e-mail Les procédures d'enregistrement du sujet et du texte d'un e-mail, de modification et de suppression de ceux-ci sont décrites ci-dessous, de même que la définition des valeurs par défaut. ! Détail Vous pouvez enregistrer jusqu'à 10 sujets d'e-mail et jusqu'à 10 textes d'e-mail. Enregistrement du sujet d'un e-mail La procédure d'enregistrement du sujet d'un e-mail est décrite ci-dessous. 1 Pour afficher l'écran Enregistrement fax, voir “Affichage de l'écran d'enregistrement du télécopieur” à la page 10-3. 2 Appuyez sur [Sujet / Texte (pour E-mail)]. – En mode Utilitaire, vous pouvez également taper sur le clavier un numéro d'option pour la sélectionner. Pour [Sujet / Texte (pour E-mail)], tapez “4” sur le clavier. 10 Enregistrement/Réglages 10-32 C351 3 Appuyez sur [Sujet]. 4 Appuyez sur [Nouveau]. 5 Appuyez sur [Sujet]. – Vous pouvez saisir 64 caractères maximum dans le champ [Sujet] de l'écran [Sujet / Texte (pour E-mail)]. – Un numéro inutilisé apparaît par défaut dans le champ [No.]. Enregistrement/Réglages 10 C351 10-33 6 Saisissez le sujet dans l'écran qui s'affiche, puis appuyez sur [OK]. – Pour plus d'informations sur la saisie des caractères, voir page 13-4. 7 Appuyez sur [OK]. – Pour annuler l'enregistrement, appuyez sur [Annul.]. Le sujet est enregistré et la destination enregistrée apparaît dans la liste. 8 Appuyez sur [Fermer]. Pour procéder à l'enregistrement d'un autre sujet, reprenez à l'étape 4. 9 Appuyez sur [Quitt.] en bas à gauche. 10 Enregistrement/Réglages 10-34 C351 Modification du sujet d'un e-mail La procédure de modification du sujet d'un e-mail est décrite ci-dessous. 1 Pour afficher l'écran Enregistrement fax, voir “Affichage de l'écran d'enregistrement du télécopieur” à la page 10-3. 2 Appuyez sur [Sujet / Texte (pour E-mail)]. – En mode Utilitaire, vous pouvez également taper sur le clavier un numéro d'option pour la sélectionner. Pour [Sujet / Texte (pour Email)], tapez “4” sur le clavier. 3 Appuyez sur [Sujet]. Enregistrement/Réglages 10 C351 10-35 4 Sélectionnez le sujet à modifier et appuyez sur [Modifier]. – Appuyez sur ou pour faire défiler les pages. – Vous pouvez confirmer les réglages en sélectionnant le sujet, puis en appuyant sur [Détails]. 5 Appuyez sur [Sujet]. 6 Modifiez le sujet dans l'écran qui s'affiche, puis appuyez sur [OK]. – Pour plus d'informations sur la saisie des caractères, voir page 13-4. 7 Appuyez sur [OK]. – Pour annuler l'enregistrement, appuyez sur [Annul.]. Le sujet est modifié. 8 Appuyez sur [Fermer]. Pour procéder à la modification d'un autre sujet, reprenez à l'étape 4. 9 Appuyez sur [Quitt.] en bas à gauche. 10 Enregistrement/Réglages 10-36 C351 Suppression du sujet d'un e-mail La procédure de suppression du sujet d'un e-mail est décrite ci-dessous. 1 Pour afficher l'écran Enregistrement fax, voir “Affichage de l'écran d'enregistrement du télécopieur” à la page 10-3. 2 Appuyez sur [Sujet / Texte (pour E-mail)]. – En mode Utilitaire, vous pouvez également taper sur le clavier un numéro d'option pour la sélectionner. Pour [Sujet / Texte (pour E-mail)], tapez “4” sur le clavier. 3 Appuyez sur [Sujet]. Enregistrement/Réglages 10 C351 10-37 4 Sélectionnez le sujet à supprimer et appuyez sur [Supprimer]. – Appuyez sur ou pour passer à la page précédente ou suivante. – Vous pouvez confirmer les réglages en sélectionnant le sujet, puis en appuyant sur [Détails]. 5 Appuyez sur [Oui] pour confirmer la suppression. – Pour annuler la suppression, appuyez sur [Non]. Le sujet est supprimé. 6 Appuyez sur [Fermer]. Pour procéder à la suppression d'un autre sujet, reprenez à l'étape 4. 7 Appuyez sur [Quitt.] en bas à gauche. 10 Enregistrement/Réglages 10-38 C351 Réglage par défaut du sujet d'un e-mail Lors de la transmission de l'e-mail à partir de l'écran Fax, le sujet paramétré ici en tant que sujet par défaut est adressé à l'ordinateur. La procédure de réglage du sujet par défaut de l'e-mail est décrite ci-dessous. 1 Pour afficher l'écran Enregistrement fax, voir “Affichage de l'écran d'enregistrement du télécopieur” à la page 10-3. 2 Appuyez sur [Sujet / Texte (pour E-mail)]. – En mode Utilitaire, vous pouvez également taper sur le clavier un numéro d'option pour la sélectionner. Pour [Sujet / Texte (pour E-mail)], tapez “4” sur le clavier. 3 Appuyez sur [Sujet]. Enregistrement/Réglages 10 C351 10-39 4 Sélectionnez le sujet voulu et appuyez sur [Régler par défaut]. 5 Appuyez sur [Fermer]. 6 Appuyez sur [Quitt.] en bas à gauche. 10 Enregistrement/Réglages 10-40 C351 Enregistrement du texte d'un e-mail La procédure d'enregistrement du texte d'un e-mail est décrite ci-dessous. 0 Le texte d'un e-mail enregistré ne peut pas être modifié. Vous devez commencer par supprimer le texte à modifier, puis le réenregistrer. 1 Pour afficher l'écran Enregistrement fax, voir “Affichage de l'écran d'enregistrement du télécopieur” à la page 10-3. 2 Appuyez sur [Sujet / Texte (pour E-mail)]. – En mode Utilitaire, vous pouvez également taper sur le clavier un numéro d'option pour la sélectionner. Pour [Sujet / Texte (pour E-mail)], tapez “4” sur le clavier. 3 Appuyez sur [Texte]. Enregistrement/Réglages 10 C351 10-41 4 Appuyez sur [Nouveau]. 5 Appuyez sur [Texte]. – Vous pouvez saisir 256 caractères maximum dans le champ [Texte] de l'écran [Sujet / Texte (pour E-mail)]. – Un numéro inutilisé apparaît par défaut dans le champ [No.]. 6 Saisissez le texte dans l'écran qui s'affiche, puis appuyez sur [OK]. – Pour plus d'informations sur la saisie des caractères, voir page 13-4. 7 Appuyez sur [OK]. – Pour annuler l'enregistrement, appuyez sur [Annul.]. Le texte est enregistré et la destination enregistrée apparaît dans la liste. 8 Appuyez sur [Fermer]. Pour procéder à l'enregistrement d'un autre texte, reprenez à l'étape 4. 9 Appuyez sur [Quitt.] en bas à gauche. 10 Enregistrement/Réglages 10-42 C351 Suppression du texte d'un e-mail La procédure de suppression du texte d'un e-mail est décrite ci-dessous. 1 Pour afficher l'écran Enregistrement fax, voir “Affichage de l'écran d'enregistrement du télécopieur” à la page 10-3. 2 Appuyez sur [Sujet / Texte (pour E-mail)]. – En mode Utilitaire, vous pouvez également taper sur le clavier un numéro d'option pour la sélectionner. Pour [Sujet / Texte (pour Email)], tapez “4” sur le clavier. 3 Appuyez sur [Texte]. Enregistrement/Réglages 10 C351 10-43 4 Sélectionnez le texte à supprimer et appuyez sur [Supprimer]. – Appuyez sur ou pour passer à la page précédente ou suivante. – Vous pouvez confirmer les réglages en sélectionnant le texte, puis en appuyant sur [Détails]. 5 Appuyez sur [Oui] pour confirmer la suppression. – Pour annuler la suppression, appuyez sur [Non]. Le texte est supprimé. 6 Appuyez sur [Fermer]. Pour procéder à la suppression d'un autre texte, reprenez à l'étape 4. 7 Appuyez sur [Quitt.] en bas à gauche. 10 Enregistrement/Réglages 10-44 C351 Réglage par défaut du texte d'un e-mail Lors de la transmission de l'e-mail à partir de l'écran Fax, le texte paramétré ici en tant que texte par défaut est adressé à l'ordinateur. La procédure de réglage du texte par défaut de l'e-mail est décrite ci-dessous. 1 Pour afficher l'écran Enregistrement fax, voir “Affichage de l'écran d'enregistrement du télécopieur” à la page 10-3. 2 Appuyez sur [Sujet / Texte (pour E-mail)]. – En mode Utilitaire, vous pouvez également taper sur le clavier un numéro d'option pour la sélectionner. Pour [Sujet / Texte (pour E-mail)], tapez “4” sur le clavier. 3 Appuyez sur [Texte]. Enregistrement/Réglages 10 C351 10-45 4 Sélectionnez le texte voulu et appuyez sur [Régler par défaut]. 5 Appuyez sur [Fermer]. 6 Appuyez sur [Quitt.] en bas à gauche. 10 Enregistrement/Réglages 10-46 C351 10.6 Réglage des boîtes confidentielles La boîte confidentielle est la boîte publique / personnelle attachée à l'aide de la fonction avancée de boîte. Cette machine gère la communication confidentielle (F-code). Pour paramétrer la réception confidentielle, vous devez définir le numéro de boîte utilisateur, le nom, mot de passe de communication, boîte, index et type. - Vous pouvez confirmer le mot de passe des boîtes confidentielles. Pour plus d'informations, voir page 11-53. - Pour plus d'informations sur la communication confidentielle, voir page 7-29. ! Détail Pour plus d'informations sur l'enregistrement des boîtes, voir “Manuel d'utilisation - Opérations Boîte”. Vous devez fournir le mot de passe de la boîte utilisateur confidentielle. La communication confidentielle peut être utilisée sans mot de passe. No. boîte utilisateur De 1 à 999999999. - Ce numéro doit être fourni au télécopieur central qui transmettra les informations en mode de communication confidentielle. Nom Le nom peut comporter 20 caractères maximum. Mot de passe de communication Il s'agit du mot de passe au moment de la réception confidentielle. Les caractères autorisés sont les chiffres 0 à 9, * ou un numéro de 8 chiffres maximum. - Ce mot de passe doit être fourni au télécopieur central qui transmettra les informations en mode de communication confidentielle. Enregistrement/Réglages 10 C351 10-47 Mot de passe de boîte Mot de passe permettant de consulter un document stocké dans la boîte confidentielle. ! Détails Pour plus d'informations sur le mot de passe de boîte, voir "Manuel d'utilisation - Opérations Boîte". Principe de la communication confidentielle En mode de communication confidentielle, chaque fax à un rôle spécifique à remplir. Station expéditrice Spécifie une boîte utilisateur confidentielle et émet. Station réceptrice Ouvre la boîte utilisateur confidentielle pour recevoir le document. Un numéro de boîte et un mot de passe de communication initient la transmission d'un document fax. Le document fax reçu contient la boîte utilisateur confidentielle spécifiée. Imprime ou supprime le document contenu dans la boîte utilisateur confidentielle. 10 Enregistrement/Réglages 10-48 C351 10.7 Réglage du bulletin (tableau électronique) Cette machine gère l'émission / réception en relève d'un bulletin (tableau électronique) utilisant la fonction F-code. Ces opérations supposent le réglage de la boîte utilisateur bulletin. ! Détail Pour plus d'informations sur l'enregistrement des boîtes bulletin, voir “Manuel d'utilisation – Opérations Boîte”. No. boîte utilisateur De 1 à 999999999. Nom de la boîte Le nom peut comporter 20 caractères maximum. Mot de passe (d'accès) Mot de passe alphanumérique de 8 caractères maximum. ! Détails Les documents enregistrés dans la boîte peuvent être imprimés à l'aide du mot de passe défini au moment de l'enregistrement des boîtes bulletin. Principe de l'émission/réception en relève d'un bulletin ! Détail Ces informations doivent être fournies au télécopieur central qui recevra les informations par relève du bulletin. Pour plus d'informations sur le bulletin (tableau électronique), voir page 9-9. Station expéditrice Envoie les informations en relevant un bulletin. Station réceptrice Reçoit le document en relevant le bulletin (tableau électronique). Le document à transmettre en relève doit se trouver dans le tableau électronique. Le numéro de la boîte doit être fourni au récepteur en relève. Enregistre un bulletin Enregistrement/Réglages 10 C351 10-49 10.8 Réglage de la boîte utilisateur réception mémoire Si [Réception mémoire] est réglé sur [ON] dans l'écran Utilitaires, tout document reçu est enregistré dans la boîte réception mémoire. ! Détail Pour connaître la méthode d'impression de la boîte utilisateur réception mémoire, voir “Réception mémoire” à la page 8-6 10 Enregistrement/Réglages 10-50 C351 11 Mode Utilitaire Mode Utilitaire 11 C351 11-3 11 Mode Utilitaire 11.1 Écran mode Utilitaire Un responsable du mode Utilitaire doit être désigné. Cette personne, qui doit de préférence être unique, sera responsable de la gestion de la machine. La section suivante décrit les procédures d'accès au mode Utilitaire et de sortie de celui-ci, ainsi que le réglage des fonctions de fax. 11.1.1 Accès à l'écran Réglage Utilisateur Accès à l'écran Réglage Utilisateur 1 Appuyez sur [Fax], puis sur [Utilitaire/Compteur] sur le tableau de commande. 2 Appuyez sur [Réglage Utilisateur]. 11 Mode Utilitaire 11-4 C351 11.1.2 Quitter l'écran Réglage Utilisateur Quitter l'écran Réglage Utilisateur % Appuyez sur [Quitt.] dans la zone secondaire. Mode Utilitaire 11 C351 11-5 11.1.3 Accès à l'écran Réglage Administrateur Accès à l'écran Réglage Administrateur 1 Appuyez sur [Fax], puis sur [Utilitaire/Compteur] sur le tableau de commande. 2 Appuyez sur [Réglage Administrateur]. 3 Saisissez le mot de passe et appuyez sur [OK]. ! Détail Le mot de passe de l'administrateur peut être modifié dans [Réglage Sécurité]. L'administrateur a la responsabilité de la gestion du mot de passe. 11 Mode Utilitaire 11-6 C351 11.1.4 Quitter l'écran Réglage Administrateur Quitter l'écran Réglage Administrateur % Appuyez sur [Quitt.] dans la zone secondaire. Mode Utilitaire 11 C351 11-7 11.2 Liste du mode Utilitaire fax Le mode Utilitaire fax inclut les options présentées ci-dessous. * Indique le réglage par défaut défini en usine. 11.2.1 Écran FAX - réglage par défaut Réglage Utilisateur >> Réglage Affichage >> Écran FAX Réglage par défaut Règle les conditions initiales de l'écran Fax. (page 11-14) 11.2.2 Écran Fax actif Réglage Utilisateur >> Réglage Affichage >> Écran Fax actif Règle l'affichage ou non du message en cours de transmission. (page 11-19) 11.2.3 Réglage Initial Réglage Utilisateur >> Réglage Initial Définit les valeurs par défaut de la fonction Fax. (page 11-17) Option Description Valeur disponible Onglet par défaut Définit la valeur par défaut de la colonne destination dans l'écran Fax. Programme* / Groupe / Carnet d'adresses / Saisie directe Programme par défaut Définit le programme par défaut. Temporaire 1-touche / PAGE1* - PAGE27 Carnet d'adresses Index par défaut Définit le carnet d'adresses par défaut. Comm* / ABC - etc Affichage symbole type d'adresse Règle l'affichage ou non du symbole du type d'adresse. ON* / OFF Nombre caractères par nom d'adresse Définit le nombre de caractères du nom de l'adresse à afficher. 14 caract.* / 24 caract. Option Description Valeur disponible Affichage émission Règle l'affichage ou non du message en [Émission]. ON / OFF* Affichage réception Règle l'affichage ou non du message en [Réception]. ON / OFF* Option Description Valeur disponible Fax [Réglage actuel] : Avant le passage au mode Utilitaire, toutes les options définies sur le tableau de commande sont enregistrées en tant que valeurs par défaut de la fonction fax. [Réglage usine] : Les valeurs définies en usine sont enregistrées en tant que valeurs par défaut de la fonction fax. Réglage actuel* / Réglage usine 11 Mode Utilitaire 11-8 C351 11.2.4 Passage économie énergie (Fax) Réglage Administrateur >> Réglage Système >> Économie d'énergie >> Passage économie énergie (Fax) Règle le mode économie d'énergie (Fax). (page 11-22) 11.2.5 Système prioritaire (Réglages sortie Imprimante/Fax) Réglage Administrateur >> Réglage Système >> Réglage Sortie >> Système prioritaire Définit la méthode d'impression du document reçu. (page 11-25) 11.2.6 Information en-tête Réglage Administrateur >> Réglage Fax >> Information en-tête Enregistre le nom de l'expéditeur et l'ID du fax. (page 11-28) Option Description Valeur disponible Passage économie énergie (Fax) Si [Immédiatement] est sélectionné et que la machine est en mode économie d'énergie au moment de l'arrivée d'un signal entrant, la machine repasse sous ce mode à la fin de la réception. Normal* / Immédiatement Option Description Valeur disponible Fax Définit la méthode d'impression du document reçu. Impression par lots* / Impression par page Option Description Valeur disponible Nom expéditeur Le nom enregistré est imprimé en en-tête sur le document reçu par le correspondant. 30 caractères et signes maximum. No Fax Le numéro (identification) du fax enregistré est imprimé en en-tête sur le document reçu par le correspondant. Le numéro de fax de la machine est entré dans ce champ. 20 caractères maximum (0 à 9, +, espace, *, #). Mode Utilitaire 11 C351 11-9 11.2.7 Position en-tête / pied de page Réglage Administrateur >> Réglage Fax >> Position en-tête/pied de page Définit la méthode de spécification des informations de l'expéditeur et du récepteur. (page 11-31) 11.2.8 Réglage Paramètres ligne Réglage Administrateur >> Réglage Fax >> Réglage Paramètres ligne Définit les options d'émission et de réception. (page 11-34) Option Description Valeur disponible Position en-tête *1 Définit la position d'impression des informations expéditeur. Intérieur corps texte / Hors corps du texte* / OFF Position pied de page Définit la position d'impression de l'heure et du numéro de réception sur le document reçu. Intérieur corps texte / Hors corps du texte / OFF* *1: Les affichages diffèrent d'un pays à un autre. Option Description Valeur disponible Méthode de numérotation *1 Définit la méthode de numérotation. PB* / 10 ips Mode réception [Récept. auto] définit la réception automatique. [Réception manuelle] définit la réception dans le cas d'un lot d'appels réalisés avec un téléphone externe raccordé ou de l'utilisation de la fonction de réception distante. Réception auto* / Réception manuelle Nbre de sonneries sur appel entrant Règle le nombre de sonnerie en réception. Règle le nombre de tonalités de retour d'appel entre l'arrivée d'un message et le début de la réception. 0 à 15 (2 fois*) Nbre de rappels *2 Définit le nombre de rappels lorsque la ligne du correspondant est occupée. 0 à 15 (3 fois*) Délai entre rappels Règle l'intervalle de temps entre deux rappels. 1 à 15 (3 min.*) Suivi audio ligne Définir sur ON pour entendre le son sur la ligne via le haut-parleur pendant l'émission. ON / OFF* Contrôle volume sonore Règle le volume sonore du haut-parleur. 0-31 (16*) *1 : Les affichages diffèrent d'un pays à un autre. *2 : Les options de ligne diffèrent d'un pays à un autre. 11 Mode Utilitaire 11-10 C351 11.2.9 Réglage Émission/Réception Réglage Administrateur >> Réglage Fax >> Réglage Émis/Récep Définit la méthode d'impression en mode émission/réception. (page 11-37) Option Description Valeur disponible Impression R/V pour réception Réglé sur ON (actif), l'original reçu est imprimé recto verso. OFF* / ON Sélection papier d'impression Si la priorité du format est réglée : L'impression est effectuée sur le format prioritaire. Dans le cas contraire, l'impression est effectuée dans le format de papier le plus proche. Si le format est fixe : L'impression est effectuée uniquement dans ce format. Sélec auto* / Format fixe / Format prioritaire Format papier d'impression *1 *2 Définit le format de papier d'impression du document reçu. La valeur par défaut dépend du réglage de [Papier prioritaire (pouces) sur A4]. A3 / B4 / A4* Erreur saisie no. boîte Définit l'action en cas de saisie d'un numéro de boîte non enregistré. La sélection de [Création auto boîte] crée la boîte dont le numéro est saisi. Impre.* / Afficher message d'erreur / Création auto boîte Sélection magasin impression réception *2 Définit le magasin de papier à utiliser pour imprimer le document reçu. Auto* / Mag 1 / Mag 2 / Mag 3 / Mag 4 Réduction mini impres. réception Règle la réduction de l'original reçu. 87-96* Imprimer page de séparation Définit le mode d'émission par défaut. OFF* / ON Archiver après appel en relève Définit la suppression ou non du document après l'émission en relève. Supprimer* / Sauvegarder *1 : Pour activer le réglage de [Format papier d'impression], réglez [Sélection magasin impression réception] sur [Auto]. *2 : Selon l'option installée, le type de magasin peut être différent. Mode Utilitaire 11 C351 11-11 11.2.10Réglage fonction Réglage Administrateur >> Réglage Fax >> Réglage fonction Active/Désactive (ON/OFF) les fonctions d'émission/réception. (page 11-40) Option Description Valeur disponible Régl. fonct ON/OFF Fonction d’émission F-code Pour plus d'informations, voir “Activer/ Désactiver (ON/OFF) les fonctions d'émission/réception.” à la page 11-40. ON* / OFF Réception mémoire Cette fonction permet de recevoir les documents et de les mémoriser en vue d'une impression ultérieure. ON / OFF* RX réseau fermé La réception en réseau fermé permet de ne recevoir les données entrantes que si le mot de passe de l'expéditeur est valide. ON / OFF* Définir un mot de passe de 4 chiffres. Régl. transfert TX Cette fonction permet de transférer les données reçues vers une station déterminée à l'avance. OFF* / Transfert et Impres. / Transf. + Imp. si erreur Dest. de transfert Vérif. mot de passe RX confidentiel Vous pouvez confirmer les numéros d'accès confidentiels définis. - Réglage RX fax La fonction RX PC-fax permet d'enregistrer les fichiers de fax reçus dans des boîtes sur le disque dur. OFF* / ON Boîte fixe / Boîte spécifiée Paramètre boîte utilisateur TSI Cette fonction permet d'allouer les originaux reçus selon leurs informations TSI. ON / OFF* 11 Mode Utilitaire 11-12 C351 11.2.11Définir CN PBX Réglage Administrateur >> Réglage Fax >> Définir CN PBX Définit la méthode de connexion de la ligne PBX. (page 11-64) Option Description Valeur disponible Définir CN PBX Sélectionner ON si le FK-502 est raccordé à une ligne PBX. Si le mode CN PBX est réglé sur ON, ce paramètre détermine le code d'accès à la ligne extérieure, c'est à dire le préfixe lié au numéro de téléphone et composé avec celui-ci si l'option de ligne extérieure est sélectionnée avec un numéro abrégé ou un programme. ON / OFF* Si réglé sur ON, numéro d'accès à la ligne extérieure. Mode Utilitaire 11 C351 11-13 11.2.12Réglage Rapports Réglage Administrateur >> Réglage Fax >> Réglage Rapports Définit la méthode d'impression d'un rapport. (page 11-66) 11.2.13Liste Paramètres tâche Réglage Administrateur >> Réglage Fax >> Liste Paramètres tâche ! Détail Pour plus d'informations, voir page 12-45. Option Description Valeur disponible Rapport d'activité Détermine l'impression ou non du rapport et l'intervalle/la plage de cette impression. OFF / Quotidien / Toutes les 100 com.* / 100/jour Rapport émission ON / Sur erreur seulement* / OFF Rapport émission séquentiel ON* / OFF Rapport émission programmée ON* / OFF Rapport réception confidentielle ON* / OFF Rapport émission bulletin ON* / OFF Magasin papier pour rapport *1 Spécifie le magasin utilisé pour l'impression d'un rapport. Magasin 1 / Magasin 2* / Magasin 3 / Magasin 4 / Introduct. manuelle Vérif. rapport résultat émission Détermine l'affichage ou non de l'écran de sélection du rapport de résultat de l'émission. Si vous sélectionnez ON, cet écran s'affiche après chaque émission. OFF* / ON *1 : Selon l'option installée, le type de magasin peut être différent. * : Indique le réglage par défaut défini en usine. 11 Mode Utilitaire 11-14 C351 11.3 Écran Fax réglage par défaut Définit les conditions initiales de l'écran Fax. * Indique le réglage par défaut défini en usine. Option Description Valeur disponible Onglet par défaut Définit la valeur par défaut de la colonne destination dans l'écran Fax. Programme* / Groupe / Carnet d'adresses / Saisie directe Programme par défaut Définit le programme par défaut. Temporaire 1-touche / PAGE1* - PAGE27 Carnet d'adresses Index par défaut Définit le carnet d'adresses par défaut. Comm* / ABC - etc Affichage symbole type d'adresse Définit l'affichage ou non du symbole du type d'adresse. ON* / OFF Nombre caractères par nom d'adresse Définit le nombre de caractères du nom de l'adresse à afficher. 14 caract.* / 24 caract. Mode Utilitaire 11 C351 11-15 Écran Fax réglage par défaut 1 Ouvrez l'écran Réglage Utilisateur (voir “Accès à l'écran Réglage Utilisateur” à la page 11-3). 2 Appuyez sur [Réglage Affichage]. – Certaines options de réglages optionnels peuvent ne pas être indiquées. – En mode Utilitaire, vous pouvez également taper sur le clavier le numéro de l'option pour la sélectionner. Pour l'option [Réglage Affichage], tapez “2” sur le clavier. 3 Appuyez sur [Écran fax - Réglage par défaut]. 11 Mode Utilitaire 11-16 C351 4 Sélectionnez l'option à régler. – Si vous voulez annuler le réglage, appuyez sur [Quitt.] dans la zone secondaire. 5 Sélectionnez la valeur voulue de l'option. 6 Appuyez sur [Fermer]. – La valeur de l'option est modifiée. 7 Appuyez sur [Quitt.] dans la zone secondaire. Mode Utilitaire 11 C351 11-17 11.4 Réglage Initial Définit la valeur par défaut de la fonction Fax. Vous pouvez régler la fonction fax sélectionnée lorsque la machine est sous tension ou en appuyant sur [Réinitialiser]. Affichez l'écran Fax et appuyez sur [Utilitaire/Compteur]. * Indique le réglage par défaut défini en usine. Réglage Initial 1 Ouvrez l'écran Réglage Utilisateur (voir “Accès à l'écran Réglage Utilisateur” à la page 11-3). 2 Appuyez sur [Réglage Initial]. – Certaines options de réglages optionnels peuvent ne pas être indiquées. – En mode Utilitaire, vous pouvez également taper sur le clavier le numéro de l'option pour la sélectionner. Pour l'option [Réglage Initial], tapez “3” sur le clavier. Option Description Valeur disponible Fax [Réglage actuel]: Avant le passage au mode Utilitaire, toutes les options définies sur le tableau de commande sont enregistrées en tant que valeurs par défaut de la fonction fax. [Réglage usine]: Les valeurs définies en usine sont enregistrées en tant que valeurs par défaut de la fonction fax. Réglage actuel* / Réglage usine 11 Mode Utilitaire 11-18 C351 3 Appuyez sur [Réglage usine], puis sur [OK]. – Si vous voulez annuler un réglage, appuyez sur [Annul.] 4 Appuyez sur [Fermer]. – La valeur de l'option est modifiée. 5 Appuyez sur [Quitt.] dans la zone secondaire. Mode Utilitaire 11 C351 11-19 11.5 Écran Fax actif Définit l'affichage ou non du message en cours de transmission. * Indique le réglage par défaut défini en usine. Écran Fax actif 1 Ouvrez l'écran Réglage Utilisateur (voir “Accès à l'écran Réglage Utilisateur” à la page 11-3). 2 Appuyez sur [Réglage Affichage]. – Certaines options de réglages optionnels peuvent ne pas être indiquées. – En mode Utilitaire, vous pouvez également taper sur le clavier le numéro de l'option pour la sélectionner. Pour l'option [Réglage Affichage], tapez “2” sur le clavier. Option Description Valeur disponible Affichage émission Définit l'affichage ou non du message en [Émission]. ON / OFF* Affichage réception Définit l'affichage ou non du message en [Réception]. ON / OFF* 11 Mode Utilitaire 11-20 C351 3 Appuyez sur [Écran Fax actif]. 4 Sélectionnez [Affichage émission] ou [Affichage réception]. – Si vous voulez annuler le réglage, appuyez sur [Quitt.] dans la zone secondaire. 5 Sélectionnez la valeur voulue de l'option Mode Utilitaire 11 C351 11-21 6 Appuyez sur [Fermer]. – La valeur de l'option est modifiée. 7 Appuyez sur [Quitt.] dans la zone secondaire. 11 Mode Utilitaire 11-22 C351 11.6 Passage économie énergie (Fax) Passage économie énergie (Fax) * Indique le réglage par défaut défini en usine. Passage économie énergie (Fax) 1 Ouvrez l'écran Réglage Administrateur (voir “Accès à l'écran Réglage Administrateur” à la page 11-5). 2 Appuyez sur [Réglage Système]. – Certaines options de réglages optionnels peuvent ne pas être indiquées. – En mode Utilitaire, vous pouvez également taper sur le clavier le numéro de l'option pour la sélectionner. Pour l'option [Réglage Système], tapez “1” sur le clavier. Option Description Valeur disponible Passage économie énergie (Fax) Si [Immédiatement] est sélectionné et que la machine est en mode économie d'énergie au moment de l'arrivée d'un signal entrant, la machine repasse sous ce mode à la fin de la réception. Normal* / Immédiatement Mode Utilitaire 11 C351 11-23 3 Appuyez sur [Économie d'énergie]. 4 Appuyez sur [Passage économie énergie (Fax)]. 5 Sélectionnez la valeur voulue de l'option. 11 Mode Utilitaire 11-24 C351 6 Appuyez sur [Fermer]. – La valeur de l'option est modifiée. 7 Appuyez sur [Quitt.] dans la zone secondaire. Mode Utilitaire 11 C351 11-25 11.7 Système prioritaire (Réglages sortie Imprimante/Fax) Définit la méthode d'impression du document reçu. * Indique le réglage par défaut défini en usine. Système prioritaire (Réglages sortie Imprimante/Fax) 1 Ouvrez l'écran Réglage Administrateur (voir “Accès à l'écran Réglage Administrateur” à la page 11-5). 2 Appuyez sur [Réglage Système]. – Certaines options de réglages optionnels peuvent ne pas être indiquées. – En mode Utilitaire, vous pouvez également taper sur le clavier le numéro de l'option pour la sélectionner. Pour l'option [Réglage Système], tapez “1” sur le clavier. Option Description Valeur disponible Fax Définit la méthode d'impression du document reçu. Impression par lots* / Impression par page 11 Mode Utilitaire 11-26 C351 3 Appuyez sur [Réglage sortie]. 4 Appuyez sur [Système prioritaire]. Mode Utilitaire 11 C351 11-27 5 Sélectionnez la méthode d'impression. – Impression par lots : L'impression commence une fois que tous les documents ont été reçus. – Impression par page : L'impression est réalisée dès la réception d'une page de document. – Si l'option [Impression R/V pour réception] est réglée sur [ON], l'impression commence dès que les données des deux pages ont été reçues. 6 Appuyez sur [Fermer]. – La valeur de l'option est modifiée. 7 Appuyez sur [Quitt.] dans la zone secondaire. 11 Mode Utilitaire 11-28 C351 11.8 Information en-tête Enregistre le nom de l'expéditeur et l'ID du fax. Information en-tête 1 Ouvrez l'écran Réglage Administrateur (voir “Accès à l'écran Réglage Administrateur” à la page 11-5). 2 Appuyez sur [Réglage Fax]. – Certaines options de réglages optionnels peuvent ne pas être indiquées. – En mode Utilitaire, vous pouvez également taper sur le clavier le numéro de l'option pour la sélectionner. Pour l'option [Réglage Fax], tapez “8” sur le clavier. Option Description Valeur disponible Nom expéditeur Le nom enregistré est imprimé en en-tête sur le document reçu par le correspondant. 30 caractères et signes maximum. No Fax Le numéro (identification) du fax enregistré est imprimé en en-tête sur le document reçu par le correspondant. Le numéro de fax de la machine est entré dans ce champ. 20 caractères maximum (0 à 9, +, espace, *, #). Mode Utilitaire 11 C351 11-29 3 Appuyez sur [Information en-tête]. 4 Appuyez sur [Nom expéditeur]. L'écran de saisie du nom s'affiche. 5 Saisissez le nom de l'expéditeur et appuyez sur [OK]. – Pour plus d'informations, voir “Saisie de texte” à la page 13-4. 6 Tapez le numéro de fax de l'expéditeur à l’aide du clavier et des touches +, espace, ou . – + : Représente le signe “+”. – Espace : Représente un espace. – Déplace le curseur vers la gauche. – Déplace le curseur vers la droite. 11 Mode Utilitaire 11-30 C351 – Suppri. : Les caractères sont supprimés un par un à partir de la position du curseur. Si celui-ci se trouve à l'extrême droite de l'entrée, les caractères précédent le curseur sont supprimés. – Si vous voulez annuler le réglage, appuyez sur [Annul.] – Pour corriger une entrée, appuyez sur [C] (clear) sur le tableau de commande. 7 Appuyez sur [OK], puis sur [Fermer]. Le nom et le numéro de fax de l'expéditeur saisis sont enregistrés. 8 Appuyez sur [Quitt.] dans la zone secondaire. Mode Utilitaire 11 C351 11-31 11.9 Position en-tête/pied de page Vous pouvez activer/désactiver (ON/OFF) cette fonction d'impression, qui identifie la station d'origine et l'heure de la réception. Si vous sélectionnez ON, vous pouvez également choisir d'imprimer ces informations. ! Détail Les informations identifiant la station d'origine, qui peuvent être imprimées sur la station réceptrice, sont l'ID et le nom du fax. Pour plus d'informations, voir “Informations sur l'expéditeur” à la page 3-53. Option Description Valeur disponible Position en-tête *1 Définit la position d'impression des informations expéditeur. Intérieur corps texte : Les informations expéditeurs seront imprimées dans la zone correspondant au document. Hors corps du texte : Les informations expéditeurs seront imprimées en dehors de la zone correspondant au document. OFF : Les informations expéditeur ne seront pas imprimées. Position pied de page Définit la position d'impression de l'heure et du numéro de réception sur le document reçu. Intérieur corps texte : Les informations d'heure/numéro seront imprimées dans la zone correspondant au document. Hors corps du texte : Les informations d'heure/numéro seront imprimées au bas des pages reproduites. OFF* : Les informations d'heure/numéro ne seront pas imprimées. * : Indique le réglage par défaut défini en usine. *1 : Les affichages diffèrent d'un pays à un autre. 11 Mode Utilitaire 11-32 C351 Position en-tête/pied de page 1 Ouvrez l'écran Réglage Administrateur (voir “Accès à l'écran Réglage Administrateur” à la page 11-5). 2 Appuyez sur [Réglage Fax]. – Certaines options de réglages optionnels peuvent ne pas être indiquées. – En mode Utilitaire, vous pouvez également taper sur le clavier le numéro de l'option pour la sélectionner. Pour l'option [Réglage Fax], tapez “8” sur le clavier. 3 Appuyez sur [Position en-tête / pied de page]. Mode Utilitaire 11 C351 11-33 4 Sélectionnez l'option à régler. – Si vous voulez annuler le réglage, appuyez sur [Quitt.] dans la zone secondaire. 5 Sélectionnez la valeur voulue de l'option. 6 Appuyez sur [Fermer]. La valeur de l'option est modifiée. 7 Appuyez sur [Quitt.] dans la zone secondaire. 11 Mode Utilitaire 11-34 C351 11.10 Réglage Paramètres ligne Les options de ligne disponibles sont les suivantes. Option Description Valeur disponible Méthode de numérotation *1 Définit la méthode de numérotation. PB* / 10 ips Mode réception [Récept. auto] définit la réception automatique. [Réception manuelle] définit la réception dans le cas d'un lot d'appels réalisés avec un téléphone externe connecté ou de l'utilisation de la fonction de réception distante. Réception auto* / Réception manuelle Nbre de sonneries sur appel entrant Définit le nombre de sonnerie en réception. Définit le nombre de tonalités de retour d'appel entre l'arrivée d'un message et le début de la réception. 0 à 15 (2 fois*) Nbre de rappels *2 Définit le nombre de rappels lorsque la ligne du correspondant est occupée. 0 à 15 (3 fois*) Délai entre rappels Définit l'intervalle de temps entre deux rappels. 1 à 15 (3 min.*) Suivi audio ligne Définir sur ON pour entendre le son sur la ligne via le haut-parleur pendant l'émission. ON / OFF* Contrôle volume sonore Règle le volume sonore du haut-parleur. 0-31 (16*) *1 : Les affichages diffèrent d'un pays à un autre. *2 : Les options de ligne diffèrent d'un pays à un autre. * : Indique le réglage par défaut défini en usine. Mode Utilitaire 11 C351 11-35 Réglage Paramètres ligne 1 Ouvrez l'écran Réglage Administrateur (voir “Accès à l'écran Réglage Administrateur” à la page 11-5). 2 Appuyez sur [Réglage Fax]. – Certaines options de réglages optionnels peuvent ne pas être indiquées. – En mode Utilitaire, vous pouvez également taper sur le clavier le numéro de l'option pour la sélectionner. Pour l'option [Réglage Fax], tapez “8” sur le clavier. 3 Appuyez sur [Réglage paramètres ligne]. 11 Mode Utilitaire 11-36 C351 4 Sélectionnez l'option à régler. – Appuyez sur ou pour afficher l'écran suivant ou précédent. – Si vous voulez annuler le réglage, appuyez sur [Quitt.] dans la zone secondaire. 5 Sélectionnez la valeur voulue de l'option. – Pour modifier [Contrôle volume sonore], appuyez sur [Contrôle volume sonore], puis sur [Plus faible] ou [Plus fort] pour définir le niveau. Appuyez ensuite sur [OK]. 6 Appuyez sur [Fermer]. La valeur de l'option est modifiée. 7 Appuyez sur [Quitt.] dans la zone secondaire. Mode Utilitaire 11 C351 11-37 11.11 Réglage Émission/Réception Les options d'émission et de réception sont présentées ci-dessous. Option Description Valeur disponible Impression R/V pour réception Réglé sur ON (actif), l'original reçu est imprimé recto verso. Non indiqué si [Imprimer page de séparation] est réglé sur ON. OFF* / ON Sélection papier d'impression Si la priorité du format est réglée : L'impression est effectuée sur le format prioritaire. Dans le cas contraire, l'impression est effectuée sur le format de papier le plus proche. Si le format est fixe : L'impression est effectuée uniquement dans ce format. Sélec auto* / Format fixe / Format prioritaire Format papier d'impression *1 *2 Définit le format de papier d'impression du document reçu. La valeur par défaut dépend du réglage de [Papier prioritaire (pouces) sur A4]. A3 / B4 / A4* Erreur saisie no. boîte Définit l'action en cas de saisie d'un numéro de boîte non enregistré. La sélection de [Création auto boîte] crée la boîte dont le numéro est saisi. Impre.* / Afficher message d'erreur / Création auto boîte Sélection magasin impression réception *2 Définit le magasin de papier à utiliser pour imprimer le document reçu. Auto* / Mag 1 / Mag 2 / Mag 3 / Mag 4 Réduction min. pour impression réception Règle l'agrandissement de l'original reçu. 87-96* Imprimer page de séparation Définit le mode d'émission par défaut. Non indiqué si Impression R/V pour réception est réglée sur ON. OFF* / ON Archiver après appel en relève Définit la suppression ou non du document après l'émission en relève. Supprimer* / Sauvegarder * : Indique le réglage par défaut défini en usine. *1 : Pour activer le réglage de [Format papier d'impression], réglez [Sélection magasin impression réception] sur [Auto]. *2 : Selon l'option installée, le type de magasin peut être différent. 11 Mode Utilitaire 11-38 C351 Réglage Émission/Réception 1 Ouvrez l'écran Réglage Administrateur (voir “Accès à l'écran Réglage Administrateur” à la page 11-5). 2 Appuyez sur [Réglage Fax]. – Certaines options de réglages optionnels peuvent ne pas être indiquées. – En mode Utilitaire, vous pouvez également taper sur le clavier le numéro de l'option pour la sélectionner. Pour l'option [Réglage Fax], tapez “8” sur le clavier. 3 Appuyez sur [Réglage Émis/Récep]. Mode Utilitaire 11 C351 11-39 4 Sélectionnez l'option à régler. – Appuyez sur ou pour afficher l'écran suivant ou précédent. – Si vous voulez annuler le réglage, appuyez sur [Quitt.] dans la zone secondaire. 5 Sélectionnez la valeur voulue de l'option. 6 Appuyez sur [Fermer]. La valeur de l'option est modifiée. 7 Appuyez sur [Quitt.] dans la zone secondaire. 11 Mode Utilitaire 11-40 C351 11.12 Réglage fonction Vous pouvez activer/désactiver chacune des fonctions d'émission et de réception individuellement. 11.12.1Réglage fonction ON/OFF Sélectionnez ON ou OFF pour chaque fonction. * Indique le réglage par défaut défini en usine. Activer/Désactiver (ON/OFF) les fonctions d'émission/réception. 1 Ouvrez l'écran Réglage Administrateur (voir “Quitter l'écran Réglage Administrateur” à la page 11-6). 2 Appuyez sur [Réglage Fax]. – Certaines options de réglages optionnels peuvent ne pas être indiquées. – En mode Utilitaire, vous pouvez également taper sur le clavier le numéro de l'option pour la sélectionner. Pour l'option [Réglage Fax], tapez “8” sur le clavier. Option Description Valeur disponible Régl. fonct ON/OFF Fonction d’émission F-code La sélection de “OFF” désactive à la fois la demande d'émission en relais et l'émission via plusieurs stations de relais. Pour plus d'informations sur les communications en relais, voir “Requête d'émission en relais (Émission F-code)” à la page 7-32. ON* / OFF Mode Utilitaire 11 C351 11-41 3 Appuyez sur [Réglage Fonction]. 4 Appuyez sur [Régl. fonct ON/OFF]. – Si [Réception mémoire], [Réglage transfert TX], [Réglage RX fax] ou [Paramètre boîte utilisateur TSI] est réglé sur ON, les autres éléments ne sont pas affichés. 5 Sélectionnez l'option à régler. 11 Mode Utilitaire 11-42 C351 – Si vous voulez annuler le réglage, appuyez sur [Quitt.] dans la zone secondaire. 6 Sélectionnez la valeur voulue de l'option. 7 Appuyez sur [Fermer]. – La valeur de l'option est modifiée. 8 Appuyez sur [Quitt.] dans la zone secondaire. Mode Utilitaire 11 C351 11-43 11.12.2Réception mémoire obligatoire Vous pouvez activer ou désactiver la réception mémoire inconditionnelle, c'est-à-dire la mémorisation des documents reçus en vue de leur impression ultérieure. Si vous sélectionnez ON, définissez le mot de passe d'impression de 8 caractères maximum. * Indique le réglage par défaut défini en usine. ! Détail Si la Réception mémoire est réglée sur ON, le Réglage RX fax, le Paramètre boîte utilisateur TSI et le Réglage transfert TX ne sont pas disponibles. Pour imprimer un document reçu en mode de réception mémoire, voir “Réception mémoire” à la page 8-6. Option Description Valeur disponible Réception mémoire obligatoire Cette fonction permet de recevoir les documents et de les mémoriser en vue d'une impression ultérieure. ON / OFF* Définissez un mot de passe de 8 caractères maximum. 11 Mode Utilitaire 11-44 C351 Réglage de la réception mémoire 1 Ouvrez l'écran Réglage Administrateur (voir “Quitter l'écran Réglage Administrateur” à la page 11-6). 2 Appuyez sur [Réglage Fax]. – Certaines options de réglages optionnels peuvent ne pas être indiquées. – En mode Utilitaire, vous pouvez également taper sur le clavier le numéro de l'option pour la sélectionner. Pour l'option [Réglage Fax], tapez “8” sur le clavier. 3 Appuyez sur [Réglage Fonction]. Mode Utilitaire 11 C351 11-45 4 Appuyez sur [Réception mémoire obligatoire]. 5 Appuyez sur [ON] et saisissez dans le champ [Mot passe] le mot de passe (8 caractères) requis pour imprimer le document reçu. – Le mot de passe peut contenir jusqu'à 8 caractères. – Appuyez sur [C] (clear) si vous voulez supprimer les données saisies. – Si vous voulez annuler le réglage, appuyez sur [Annul.] 6 Appuyez sur [OK], puis sur [Fermer]. La valeur de l'option est modifiée. 7 Appuyez sur [Quitt.] dans la zone secondaire. 11 Mode Utilitaire 11-46 C351 11.12.3RX réseau fermé Vous pouvez activer ou désactiver la fonction de réception en réseau fermé. Si vous activez cette fonction (ON), vous devez préciser le mot de passe de clôture du réseau, composé de 4 caractères. Avec la réception en réseau fermé, le FK-502 ne reçoit les données entrantes que si le mot de passe de l'expéditeur est valide. Le FK-502 vérifie si le mot de passe de l'expéditeur correspond à celui qui est défini sur la machine. Si les deux mots de passe diffèrent ou si l'expéditeur ne fournit pas de mot de passe, la machine génère une erreur de communication. * Indique le réglage par défaut défini en usine. Option Description Valeur disponible RX réseau fermé La réception en réseau fermé permet de ne recevoir les données entrantes que si le mot de passe de l'expéditeur est valide. ON / OFF* Le mot de passe peut contenir jusqu'à 4 caractères. Mode Utilitaire 11 C351 11-47 Réglage de la réception en réseau fermé 0 Conditions requises de la réception en réseau fermé Cette fonction n'est disponible que si la machine du correspondant est dotée de la fonction Transmission de mot de passe. 1 Ouvrez l'écran Réglage Administrateur (voir “Accès à l'écran Réglage Administrateur” à la page 11-5). 2 Appuyez sur [Réglage Fax]. – Certaines options de réglages optionnels peuvent ne pas être indiquées. – En mode Utilitaire, vous pouvez également taper sur le clavier le numéro de l'option pour la sélectionner. Pour l'option [Réglage Fax], tapez “8” sur le clavier. 3 Appuyez sur [Réglage Fonction]. 11 Mode Utilitaire 11-48 C351 4 Appuyez sur [RX Réseau fermé]. 5 Appuyez sur [ON] et saisissez dans le champ [Mot passe] le mot de passe requis pour imprimer le document reçu. – Le mot de passe peut contenir jusqu'à 4 caractères. – Appuyez sur [C] (clear) si vous voulez supprimer les données saisies. – Pour annuler le réglage, appuyez sur [Annul.]. 6 Appuyez sur [OK], puis sur [Fermer]. La valeur de l'option est modifiée. 7 Appuyez sur [Quitt.] dans la zone secondaire. Mode Utilitaire 11 C351 11-49 11.12.4Réglage Transfert TX Vous pouvez activer ou désactiver la fonction de transfert de fax. Si cette fonction est active, les données reçues sont transférées à une station déterminée à l'avance. ! Détail Si Régl. transfert TX est réglé sur [Transfert et Impres.] ou [Transf. + Imp. si erreur], les options Réception mémoire, Réglage RX Fax et Paramètre boîte utilisateur TSI ne sont pas disponibles. Option Description Valeur disponible Régl. transfert TX Cette fonction permet de transférer les données reçues vers une station déterminée à l'avance. OFF* / Transfert et Impres. / Transf. + Imp. si erreur 11 Mode Utilitaire 11-50 C351 Réglage du transfert de fax (Réglage transfert TX) 1 Ouvrez l'écran Réglage Administrateur (voir “Accès à l'écran Réglage Administrateur” à la page 11-5). 2 Appuyez sur [Réglage Fax]. – Certaines options de réglages optionnels peuvent ne pas être indiquées. – En mode Utilitaire, vous pouvez également taper sur le clavier le numéro de l'option pour la sélectionner. Pour l'option [Réglage Fax], tapez “8” sur le clavier. 3 Appuyez sur [Réglage Fonction]. Mode Utilitaire 11 C351 11-51 4 Appuyez sur [Régl. transfert TX]. 5 Sélectionnez [Transfert et Impress.] ou [Transf. + Imp. si Erreur]. – OFF Le document reçu n'est pas transféré. – Transfert et Impression Le document reçu est transféré après impression sur cette machine. – Transfert + Impression si Erreur Le document reçu est transféré. En cas d'échec du transfert, le document est imprimé sur cette machine. 11 Mode Utilitaire 11-52 C351 6 Saisissez dans le champ [Adresse transf.] le numéro de fax du destinataire du transfert. – Vous pouvez saisir jusqu'à 38 caractères dans le champ [Adresse transf.]. – Vous pouvez utiliser les préfixes [Tonalité], [Pause] et [-]. Voir “Sélection de la destination” à la page 3-21. – Vous pouvez appuyer sur [Carnet d'adresses] pour sélectionner l'[Adresse transf.] dans un [carnet d'adresses] enregistré. – Appuyez sur [C] (clear) si vous voulez supprimer les données saisies. – Si vous voulez annuler le réglage, appuyez sur [Annul.] 7 Appuyez sur [OK], puis sur [Fermer]. La valeur de l'option est modifiée et vous revenez à l'écran Utilitaire. 8 Appuyez sur [Quitt.] dans la zone secondaire. Mode Utilitaire 11 C351 11-53 11.12.5Vérification du mot de passe RX confidentiel Vous pouvez confirmer les numéros d'accès confidentiels définis. ! Détail Pour enregistrer les numéros d'accès confidentiels, voir “Réglage des boîtes confidentielles” à la page 10-46. Option Description Valeur disponible Vérif. mot de passe RX confidentiel Vous pouvez confirmer les numéros d'accès confidentiels définis. - 11 Mode Utilitaire 11-54 C351 Confirmation du mot de passe d'une boîte confidentielle 1 Ouvrez l'écran Réglage Administrateur (voir “Accès à l'écran Réglage Administrateur” à la page 11-5). 2 Appuyez sur [Réglage Fax]. – Certaines options de réglages optionnels peuvent ne pas être indiquées. – En mode Utilitaire, vous pouvez également taper sur le clavier le numéro de l'option pour la sélectionner. Pour l'option [Réglage Fax], tapez “8” sur le clavier. 3 Appuyez sur [Réglage Fonction]. Mode Utilitaire 11 C351 11-55 4 Appuyez sur [Vérif. mot de passe RX confidentiel]. 5 Sélectionnez la boîte confidentielle dont vous voulez confirmer le mot de passe. – Appuyez sur ou pour afficher l'écran suivant ou précédent. 6 Appuyez sur [Fermer]. 7 Appuyez sur [Quitt.] dans la zone secondaire. 11 Mode Utilitaire 11-56 C351 11.12.6Réglage RX fax Vous pouvez activer ou désactiver la fonction RX PC-Fax. Si cette fonction est réglée sur ON, indiquez la boîte d'enregistrement de la sortie. La fonction RX PC-fax permet d'enregistrer dans des boîtes sur le disque dur les fichiers contenant les fax reçus. Vous pouvez ensuite lire le contenu des boîtes sur les ordinateurs du réseau. * Indique le réglage par défaut défini en usine. ! Détail Si Réglage RX fax est ON, la Réception mémoire, le Paramètre boîte utilisateur TSI et Régl. transfert TX ne sont pas disponibles. Les documents fax reçus sont sauvegardés au format TIFF dans la boîte fixe, la boîte spécifiée ou la boîte de réception (TSI). Expéditeur Original Disque dur Option Description Valeur disponible Réglage RX fax La fonction RX PC-fax permet d'enregistrer les fichiers de fax reçus dans des boîtes sur le disque dur. ON / OFF* Sortie RX Le fichier de fax reçu est enregistré dans la Boîte utilisateur réception mémoire si Sortie RX est réglé sur Boîte fixe, et dans la boîte spécifiée par la fonction F-code (adresse secondaire) si Sortie RX est réglé sur Boîte spécifiée. Boîte fixe* / Boîte spécifiée Mode Utilitaire 11 C351 11-57 Réglage RX fax 1 Ouvrez l'écran Réglage Administrateur (voir “Accès à l'écran Réglage Administrateur” à la page 11-5). 2 Appuyez sur [Réglage Fax]. – Certaines options de réglages optionnels peuvent ne pas être indiquées. – En mode Utilitaire, vous pouvez également taper sur le clavier le numéro de l'option pour la sélectionner. Pour l'option [Réglage Fax], tapez “8” sur le clavier. 3 Appuyez sur [Réglage Fonction]. 11 Mode Utilitaire 11-58 C351 4 Appuyez sur [Réglage RX Fax]. 5 Sélectionnez [ON] pour [Réglage RX Fax]. – Les affichages diffèrent d'un pays à un autre. – OFF : La fonction RX PC-fax n'est pas disponible. – ON : La fonction RX PC-fax est exécutée à réception d'un numéro de fax ou de PC-fax, et le document reçu est sauvegardé dans la boîte spécifiée. 6 Pour [Sortie RX], sélectionnez la boîte dans laquelle sera sauvegardé un document reçu via la fonction RX PC-fax. – Boîte fixe : un fichier reçu est stocké dans la boîte réception mémoire. – Boîte spécifiée : un fichier reçu est stocké dans la boîte stipulée par la fonction F-code (adresse secondaire). – Si vous voulez annuler le réglage, appuyez sur [Annul.]. Mode Utilitaire 11 C351 11-59 – Pour plus d'informations sur le fonctionnement de la réception PC-fax, voir “Fonctionnement de la Réception PC-fax” à la page 2-21. 7 Appuyez sur [OK], puis sur [Fermer]. La valeur de l'option est modifiée et vous revenez à l'écran Utilitaire. 11 Mode Utilitaire 11-60 C351 11.12.7Paramètre boîte utilisateur TSI Cette fonction permet d'allouer les documents reçus par le fax. Les fichiers d'originaux reçus sont sauvegardés dans les boîtes correspondant à l'ID fax (TSI) des expéditeurs. ! Détail Si Paramètre boîte utilisateur TSI est ON, la Réception mémoire, le Réglage transfert TX et le Réglage RX Fax ne sont pas disponibles. Expéditeur Original Disque dur Option Description Valeur disponible Paramètre boîte utilisateur TSI Cette fonction permet d'allouer les originaux reçus selon leurs informations TSI. ON / OFF* Mode Utilitaire 11 C351 11-61 Allocation des originaux reçus à l'expéditeur du fax 1 Ouvrez l'écran Réglage Administrateur (voir “Accès à l'écran Réglage Administrateur” à la page 11-5). 2 Appuyez sur [Réglage Fax]. – Certaines options de réglages optionnels peuvent ne pas être indiquées. – En mode Utilitaire, vous pouvez également taper sur le clavier le numéro de l'option pour la sélectionner. Pour l'option [Réglage Fax], tapez “8” sur le clavier. 3 Appuyez sur [Réglage Fonction]. 11 Mode Utilitaire 11-62 C351 4 Appuyez sur [Paramètre boîte utilisateur TSI]. 5 Appuyez sur [ON]. 6 Sélectionnez le numéro à enregistrer et appuyez sur [Modif.]. – Si vous voulez supprimer une distribution, sélectionnez-la et appuyez sur [Suppri.]. – Vous pouvez enregistrer 128 boîtes maximum. – Appuyez sur ou pour afficher l'écran suivant ou précédent. Mode Utilitaire 11 C351 11-63 7 Utilisez le clavier numérique, [+], [ESPACE] ou pour saisir l'ID du fax dans le champ [Expéditeur (TSI)]. – + Insère le signe +. – Espace Insère un espace. – Déplace le curseur vers la gauche. – Déplace le curseur vers la droite. – Suppri. Les caractères sont supprimés un par un à partir de la position du curseur. Si celui-ci se trouve à l'extrême droite de l'entrée, les caractères précédent le curseur sont supprimés. – Lors de la transmission, [+] et [ESPACE] sont ignorés. 8 Appuyez sur [No. boîte ut] et tapez le numéro de la boîte d'enregistrement du document reçu. – Plage de numéros disponibles : 1 à 999999999. 9 Appuyez sur [OK], puis sur [Fermer]. Le Paramètre boîte utilisateur TSI est défini. 10 Appuyez sur [Quitt.]. L'écran de distribution des fax reçus s'affiche à nouveau. 11 Mode Utilitaire 11-64 C351 11.13 Réglage CN PBX (Private Branch Exchange) Les options PBX disponibles sont décrites ci-dessous. * Indique le réglage par défaut défini en usine. Options du mode de connexion PBX (Private Branch Exchange) 1 Ouvrez l'écran Réglage Administrateur (voir “Accès à l'écran Réglage Administrateur” à la page 11-5). 2 Appuyez sur [Réglage Fax]. – Certaines options de réglages optionnels peuvent ne pas être indiquées. – En mode Utilitaire, vous pouvez également taper sur le clavier le numéro de l'option pour la sélectionner. Pour l'option [Réglage Fax], tapez “8” sur le clavier. Option Description Valeur disponible Définir mode PBX CN Sélectionner ON si le FK-502 est raccordé à une ligne PBX. ON / OFF* Ligne extérieure Si le mode PBX CN est réglé sur ON, ce paramètre détermine le code d'accès à la ligne extérieure, c'est à dire le préfixe lié au numéro de téléphone et composé avec celui-ci si l'option de ligne extérieure est sélectionnée avec un numéro abrégé ou un programme. 0-9999 Mode Utilitaire 11 C351 11-65 3 Appuyez sur [Définir CN PBX]. 4 Sélectionnez [ON] pour Définir mode PBX CN. 5 Saisissez au clavier le code de la ligne extérieure. – Appuyez sur [C] (clear) si vous voulez supprimer les données saisies. – Si vous voulez annuler le réglage, appuyez sur [Annul.] 6 Appuyez sur [OK], puis sur [Fermer]. La valeur de l'option est modifiée. 7 Appuyez sur [Quitt.] dans la zone secondaire. 11 Mode Utilitaire 11-66 C351 11.14 Réglage Rapports Vous pouvez activer ou désactiver (ON/OFF) le Réglage rapports. Cette fonction imprime les rapports de communication à la direction, les rapports de résultats et spécifie les magasins d'entrée/sortie des rapports. Si cette fonction est activée (ON), la méthode d'impression peut également être sélectionnée. ! Détail Si “Vérif. rapport résultat émission” est actif (ON), le rapport d'émission est imprimé si OUI est sélectionné. Il n'est pas imprimé dans le cas contraire (NON). Option Description Valeur disponible Rapport d'activité Détermine l'impression ou non du rapport et l'intervalle/la plage de cette impression. OFF / Quotidien / Toutes les 100 com.* / 100/jour Rapport Émission ON / Sur erreur seulement* / OFF Rapport émission séquentiel ON* / OFF Rapport émission programmée ON* / OFF Rapport réception confidentielle ON* / OFF Rapport émission bulletin ON* / OFF Magasin papier pour rapport *1 *2 Spécifie le magasin utilisé pour l'impression d'un rapport. Magasin 1 / Magasin 2* / Magasin 3 / Magasin 4 / Introduct. manuelle Vérif. rapport résultat émission Détermine l'affichage ou non de l'écran de sélection du rapport de résultat de l'émission. Si vous sélectionnez ON, cet écran s'affiche après chaque émission. OFF* / ON * : Indique le réglage par défaut défini en usine. *1 : Selon l'option installée, le type de magasin peut être différent. *2 : Le Magasin 1 est le magasin par défaut, si aucune option de magasins n'est installée. Mode Utilitaire 11 C351 11-67 Réglage des rapports 1 Ouvrez l'écran Réglage Administrateur (voir “Accès à l'écran Réglage Administrateur” à la page 11-5). 2 Appuyez sur [Réglage Fax]. – Certaines options de réglages optionnels peuvent ne pas être indiquées. – En mode Utilitaire, vous pouvez également taper sur le clavier le numéro de l'option pour la sélectionner. Pour l'option [Réglage Fax], tapez “8” sur le clavier. 3 Appuyez sur [Réglage Rapports]. 11 Mode Utilitaire 11-68 C351 4 Sélectionnez le rapport à régler. – Appuyez sur ou pour afficher l'écran suivant ou précédent. – Si vous voulez annuler le réglage, appuyez sur [Quitt.] dans la zone secondaire. 5 Sélectionnez l'option voulue. 6 Appuyez sur [Fermer]. La valeur de l'option est modifiée. 7 Appuyez sur [Quitt.] dans la zone secondaire. 12 Rapports et listes Rapports et listes 12 C351 12-3 12 Rapports et listes 12.1 Types de rapports et de listes Vous pouvez imprimer sur cette machine les types de rapports et de listes suivants : 12.1.1 Rapports Les rapports sont de trois types : impression automatique, méthode d'impression paramétrable, impression selon les besoins. Nom du rapport Description Rapport d'activité Ce rapport liste les 100 (maximum) dernières émissions et réceptions sur des pages distinctes (une pour les émissions, l'autre pour les réceptions). Selon les besoins, la liste des émissions, celle des réceptions, ou ces deux listes peuvent être imprimées. • L'impression du rapport d'activité est réglée dans le mode Utilitaire sur OFF*, Quotidien, Toutes les 100 com. ou 100/jour*. • Les rapports suivants peuvent être sélectionnés et imprimés via l'écran Fax. ([Liste tâches] - [onglet Émission fax] - [Historique tâches] - [Réglage comm.]) • Rapport d'activité, Rapport Émission, Rapport Réception Rapport Émission Le Rapport Émission est imprimé automatiquement. Le mode Utilitaire définit l'impression des rapports Émission sur Toujours si l'impression est active (ON) / Sur erreur seulement / OFF. Rapport d'émission (relève) Si le Rapport Émission est réglé sur ON ou Sur erreur seulement dans les réglages administrateur du mode Utilitaire, le résultat de l'émission en relève sont automatiquement imprimés. Rapport de relève Si le Rapport Émission est réglé sur ON ou Sur erreur seulement dans les réglages Administrateur du mode Utilitaire, le résultat de la réception en relève est automatiquement imprimé. Rapport de diffusion Si Rapport émission séquentielle est réglé sur ON dans Réglage Administrateur du mode Utilitaire, ce rapport est imprimé automatiquement à la fin de l'émission diffusée séquentielle. Rapport de relève séquentielle (réception) Si Rapport émission séquentielle est réglé sur ON dans Réglage Administrateur du mode Utilitaire, le résultat de la réception en relève de plusieurs destinations est automatiquement imprimé. Rapport de communication réservée Si Rapport Émission programmée est réglé sur ON dans Réglage Administrateur du mode Utilitaire, ce rapport est automatiquement imprimé lorsqu'une émission est réservée. Rapport d'émission réservée (relève) Si Rapport émission programmée est réglée sur ON dans Réglage Administrateur du mode Utilitaire, ce rapport est automatiquement imprimé lorsqu'une émission en relève est réservée. 12 Rapports et listes 12-4 C351 12.1.2 Listes Les listes sont imprimées selon les besoins. Rapport de diffusion réservée Si Rapport émission programmée est réglé sur ON dans Réglage Administrateur du mode Utilitaire, ce rapport est automatiquement imprimé lorsqu'une émission multiposte séquentielle est réservée. Rapport de réception réservée (relève) Si Rapport émission programmée est réglé sur ON dans Réglage Administrateur du mode Utilitaire, ce rapport est automatiquement imprimé lorsqu'une relève programmée vers une destination est réservée. Rapport de relève séquentielle réservée (réception) Si Rapport émission programmée est réglé sur ON dans Réglage Administrateur du mode Utilitaire, ce rapport est automatiquement imprimé lorsqu'une relève programmée vers plusieurs destinations est réservée. Rapport réception confidentielle Si Rapport réception confidentielle est réglé sur ON dans Réglage Administrateur du mode Utilitaire, ce rapport est automatiquement imprimé à la réception d'un document confidentiel. Rapport Émission bulletin Si Rapport émission bulletin est réglé sur ON dans Réglage Administrateur du mode Utilitaire, le résultat de l'émission en relève au bulletin board (tableau électronique) est automatiquement imprimé. Nom du rapport Description Nom de la liste Description Liste Carnet d'adresses Les numéros enregistrés dans le carnet d'adresses peuvent être imprimés. Liste Programme Les numéros enregistrés dans un programme peuvent être imprimés. Liste d'adresses de groupe Les numéros enregistrés dans un groupe peuvent être imprimés. Liste de Titres/Textes La liste de sujets et de textes (e-mail) peut être imprimée. Liste des réglages du fax Les réglages du mode Utilitaire peuvent être imprimés. Rapports et listes 12 C351 12-5 12.2 Rapport d'activité Le rapport d'activité liste les 100 (maximum) dernières émissions et réceptions sur des pages distinctes (une pour les émissions, l'autre pour les réceptions). Ce rapport peut être imprimé automatiquement, ou imprimé selon les besoins, en totalité (rapport d'activité), pour les émissions uniquement (rapport d'émission, ou pour les réceptions uniquement (rapport de réception). 12.2.1 Impression automatique L'intervalle d'impression du rapport d'activité peut être défini dans Réglage Rapports. 12.2.2 Impression manuelle Le rapport d'activité peut être imprimé manuellement comme suit. Impression manuelle 1 Appuyez sur [Liste tâches] dans l'écran Fax. 2 Appuyez sur l'onglet [Émission fax]. 3 Appuyez sur [Historique tâches]. 12 Rapports et listes 12-6 C351 4 Appuyez sur [Réglage comm.]. 5 Appuyez sur [Rapport d'activité], [Rapport émission] ou [Rapport réception]. 6 Appuyez sur [Imprimer]. Le rapport est imprimé. Rapports et listes 12 C351 12-7 ! Détail Un message s'affiche si le papier requis ne se trouve pas dans le magasin destiné aux rapports et aux listes. Chargez le papier requis. * Les rapports que vous imprimez peuvent être différents de ceux qui sont illustrés dans ce manuel. Élément Description No. Un numéro de série est attribué à chaque émission et à chaque réception. Destination Contient les informations suivantes (cet espace est vide en l'absence de ces informations). • Nom si celui-ci a été enregistré dans la liste de numéros abrégés • Le numéro de téléphone de la destination Heure de début Heure à laquelle la communication a commencé. Heure Durée de la communication Impressions Nombre de pages émises ou reçues. En cas d'émission mémoire, le nombre de pages émises et le nombre total de pages sont indiqués. Résultat OK La communication s'est terminée normalement. ARRET La communication a été interrompue. ETEIND L'interrupteur est hors tension. TEL Appel téléphonique entrant. ECHEC Une erreur de communication s'est produite. Erreur Une erreur s'est produite et le FK-502 est passé en rappel de la page d'erreur. Pas ré La destination appelée n'a pas répondu. Occupé La communication n'a pas abouti parce que la ligne est occupée. M-plei La mémoire fax disponible a été dépassée pendant la réception, et celle-ci a échoué. 12 Rapports et listes 12-8 C351 ! Détail Les éléments indiqués dépendent des réglages optionnels. Note Indique la ou les remarques suivantes. DIF: Communication différée D/R: Relève ORG: Format original BOR: Effacement bords ODI: Original de format différent (mixte) MAN: Téléphone CSRC: CS remote care (appel distant) TR: Retransmission PC: PC-fax REL: Position reliure OS: Original spécial CODEF: Fonction F-Code MBX: Confidentiel BLTN: Bulletin board Élément Description Rapports et listes 12 C351 12-9 12.3 Rapport Émission 12.3.1 Impression manuelle Les informations suivantes apparaissent si l'émission est réglée sur [ON] dans [Réglage Rapports]-[Rapport Émission] du mode Utilitaire. Appuyez sur [Oui] pour imprimer le Rapport Émission ; sur [Non] pour ne pas imprimer ce rapport. Pour plus d'informations, voir “Réglage des rapports” à la page 11-67. 12.3.2 Impression automatique L'impression automatique peut être réglée sur [ON], [Sur erreur seulement] ou [OFF] dans [Rapport Émission] de la fonction [Réglage Rapports] dans le mode Utilitaire. Pour plus d'informations, voir “Réglage des rapports” à la page 11-67. * Les rapports que vous imprimez peuvent être différents de ceux qui sont illustrés dans ce manuel. 12 Rapports et listes 12-10 C351 Élément Description No. Un numéro de série est attribué à chaque émission et à chaque réception. Destination Indique : • Nom si celui-ci a été enregistré dans la liste de numéros abrégés ou la liste d'entrée • Le numéro de téléphone de la destination Heure début émission Heure à laquelle la communication a commencé. Heure Durée de la communication Impressions Nombre de pages émises. En cas d'émission mémoire, le nombre de pages émises et le nombre total de pages sont indiqués. Résultat OK La communication s'est terminée normalement. ARRET La communication a été interrompue. ETEIND L'interrupteur est hors tension. TEL Appel téléphonique entrant. ECHEC Une erreur de communication s'est produite. Erreur Une erreur s'est produite et le FK-502 est passé en rappel de la page d'erreur. Pas ré La destination appelée n'a pas répondu. Occupé La communication n'a pas aboutie parce que la ligne est occupée. M-plei La mémoire fax disponible a été dépassée pendant la réception, et celle-ci a échoué. Note Indique la ou les remarques suivantes. DIF: Communication différée D/R: Relève ORG: Format original BOR: Effacement bords ODI: Original de format différent (mixte) MAN: Téléphone CSRC: CS remote care (appel distant) TR: Retransmission PC: PC-fax REL: Position reliure OS: Original spécial CODEF: Fonction F-Code MBX: Confidentiel BLTN: Bulletin board Rapports et listes 12 C351 12-11 12.4 Rapport d'émission (en relève) Ce rapport est imprimé automatiquement à la suite de l'émission en relève d'un document enregistré dans la boîte relève émission. L'impression automatique peut être réglée sur [ON] ou [OFF] dans [Rapport Émission] de la fonction [Réglage Rapports] dans le mode Utilitaire. Pour plus d'informations, voir “Réglage des rapports” à la page 11-67. * Les rapports que vous imprimez peuvent être différents de ceux qui sont illustrés dans ce manuel. Élément Description Destination Indique : • Le nom de la destination s'il est enregistré dans la liste Carnet d'adresses. • Le numéro de téléphone de la destination Heure de création Heure à laquelle la communication a commencé. Heure Durée de la communication Impressions Nombre de pages émises. Résultat OK La communication s'est terminée normalement. ARRET La communication a été interrompue. ETEIND L'interrupteur est hors tension. TEL Appel téléphonique entrant. ECHEC Une erreur de communication s'est produite. Erreur Une erreur s'est produite et le FK-502 est passé en rappel de la page d'erreur. Pas ré La destination appelée n'a pas répondu. Occupé La communication n'a pas abouti parce que la ligne est occupée. M-plei La mémoire fax disponible a été dépassée pendant la réception, et celle-ci a échoué. 12 Rapports et listes 12-12 C351 Note Indique la ou les remarques suivantes. DIF: Communication différée D/R: Relève ORG: Format original BOR: Effacement bords ODI: Original de format différent (mixte) MAN: Téléphone CSRC: CS remote care (appel distant) TR: Retransmission PC: PC-fax REL: Position reliure OS: Original spécial CODEF: Fonction F-Code MBX: Confidentiel BLTN: Bulletin board Élément Description Rapports et listes 12 C351 12-13 12.5 Rapport de relève Ce rapport est imprimé automatiquement à réception de la relève. L'impression automatique peut être réglée sur [ON] ou [OFF] dans [Rapport Émission] de la fonction [Réglage Rapports] dans le mode Utilitaire. Pour plus d'informations, voir “Réglage des rapports” à la page 11-67. * Les rapports que vous imprimez peuvent être différents de ceux qui sont illustrés dans ce manuel. Élément Description Destination Indique : • Un nom de destination s'il est enregistré dans la liste Carnet d'adresses. • Le numéro de téléphone de la destination Heure de début Heure à laquelle la communication a commencé. Heure Durée de la communication Impressions Nombre de pages émises. Résultat OK La communication s'est terminée normalement. ARRET La communication a été interrompue. ETEIND L'interrupteur est hors tension. TEL Appel téléphonique entrant. ECHEC Une erreur de communication s'est produite. Erreur Une erreur s'est produite et le FK-502 est passé en rappel de la page d'erreur. Pas ré La destination appelée n'a pas répondu. Occupé La communication n'a pas abouti parce que la ligne est occupée. M-plei La mémoire fax disponible a été dépassée pendant la réception, et celle-ci a échoué. 12 Rapports et listes 12-14 C351 Note Indique la ou les remarques suivantes. DIF: Communication différée D/R: Relève ORG: Format original BOR: Effacement bords ODI: Original de format différent (mixte) MAN: Téléphone CSRC: CS remote care (appel distant) TR: Retransmission PC: PC-fax REL: Position reliure OS: Original spécial CODEF: Fonction F-Code MBX: Confidentiel BLTN: Bulletin board Élément Description Rapports et listes 12 C351 12-15 12.6 Rapport de diffusion Ce rapport est imprimé automatiquement à la suite d'une émission multiposte séquentielle. L'impression automatique peut être réglée sur [ON] ou [OFF] dans [Rapport émission séquentielle] de la fonction [Réglage Rapports] dans le mode Utilitaire. Pour plus d'informations, voir “Réglage des rapports” à la page 11-67. * Les rapports que vous imprimez peuvent être différents de ceux qui sont illustrés dans ce manuel. Élément Description Destination Indique : • Un nom de destination s'il est enregistré dans la liste Carnet d'adresses. • Le numéro de téléphone de la destination Heure de début Heure à laquelle la communication a commencé. Heure Durée de la communication. Impressions Nombre de pages émises. Le nombre de pages émises et le nombre total de pages sont indiqués. 12 Rapports et listes 12-16 C351 Résultat OK La communication s'est terminée normalement. ARRET La communication a été interrompue. ETEIND L'interrupteur est hors tension. TEL Appel téléphonique entrant. ECHEC Une erreur de communication s'est produite. Erreur Une erreur s'est produite et le FK-502 est passé en rappel de la page d'erreur. Pas ré La destination appelée n'a pas répondu. Occupé La communication n'a pas abouti parce que la ligne est occupée. M-plei La mémoire fax disponible a été dépassée pendant la réception, et celle-ci a échoué. Note Indique la ou les remarques suivantes. DIF: Communication différée D/R: Relève ORG: Format original BOR: Effacement bords ODI: Original de format différent (mixte) MAN: Téléphone CSRC: CS remote care (appel distant) TR: Retransmission PC: PC-fax REL: Position reliure OS: Original spécial CODEF: Fonction F-Code MBX: Confidentiel BLTN: Bulletin board Élément Description Rapports et listes 12 C351 12-17 12.7 Rapport de relève séquentielle (réception) Le rapport de relève séquentielle vers plusieurs destinations est imprimé automatiquement. L'impression automatique peut être réglée sur [ON] ou [OFF] dans [Rapport émission séquentielle] de la fonction [Réglage Rapports] dans le mode Utilitaire. Pour plus d'informations, voir “Réglage des rapports” à la page 11-67. * Les rapports que vous imprimez peuvent être différents de ceux qui sont illustrés dans ce manuel. Élément Description Destination Indique : • Nom de la destination s'il a été enregistré dans la liste de numéros abrégés, et • Numéro de téléphone de la destination Heure de début Heure à laquelle la communication a commencé. Heure Durée de la communication. Impressions Nombre de pages transmises. Résultat OK La communication s'est terminée normalement. ARRET La communication a été interrompue. ETEIND L'interrupteur est hors tension. TEL Appel téléphonique entrant. ECHEC Une erreur de communication s'est produite. Erreur Une erreur s'est produite et le FK-502 est passé en rappel de la page d'erreur. Pas ré La destination appelée n'a pas répondu. Occupé La communication n'a pas abouti parce que la ligne est occupée. M-plei La mémoire fax disponible a été dépassée pendant la réception, et celle-ci a échoué. 12 Rapports et listes 12-18 C351 Note Indique la ou les remarques suivantes. DIF: Communication différée D/R: Relève ORG: Format original BOR: Effacement bords ODI: Original de format différent (mixte) MAN: Téléphone CSRC: CS remote care (appel distant) TR: Retransmission PC: PC-fax REL: Position reliure OS: Original spécial CODEF: Fonction F-Code MBX: Confidentiel BLTN: Bulletin board Élément Description Rapports et listes 12 C351 12-19 12.8 Rapport de communication réservée Ce rapport est imprimé automatiquement en cas d'émission programmée. L'impression automatique peut être réglée sur [ON] ou [OFF] dans [Rapport émission programmée] de la fonction [Réglage Rapports] dans le mode Utilitaire. Pour plus d'informations, voir “Réglage des rapports” à la page 11-67. * Les rapports que vous imprimez peuvent être différents de ceux qui sont illustrés dans ce manuel. Élément Description Destination Indique : • Nom si celui-ci a été enregistré dans la liste de numéros abrégés • Le numéro de téléphone de la destination Heure de création Heure d'émission programmée. Heure de début Heure spécifiée en cas d'émission programmée. Impressions Nombre de pages numérisées. 12 Rapports et listes 12-20 C351 Note Indique la ou les remarques suivantes. DIF: Communication différée D/R: Relève ORG: Format original BOR: Effacement bords ODI: Original de format différent (mixte) MAN: Téléphone CSRC: CS remote care (appel distant) TR: Retransmission PC: PC-fax REL: Position reliure OS: Original spécial CODEF: Fonction F-Code MBX: Confidentiel BLTN: Bulletin board Élément Description Rapports et listes 12 C351 12-21 12.9 Rapport d'émission réservée (relève) Ce rapport est imprimé automatiquement lorsqu'une émission en relève est réservée. L'impression automatique peut être réglée sur [ON] ou [OFF] dans [Rapport émission programmée] de la fonction [Réglage Rapports] dans le mode Utilitaire. Pour plus d'informations, voir “Réglage des rapports” à la page 11-67. * Les rapports que vous imprimez peuvent être différents de ceux qui sont illustrés dans ce manuel. Élément Description Destination Non indiquée. Heure de création Heure d'émission programmée. Heure de début Non indiquée. Impressions Nombre de pages numérisées. 12 Rapports et listes 12-22 C351 Note Indique la ou les remarques suivantes. DIF: Communication différée D/R: Relève ORG: Format original BOR: Effacement bords ODI: Original de format différent (mixte) MAN: Téléphone CSRC: CS remote care (appel distant) TR: Retransmission PC: PC-fax REL: Position reliure OS: Original spécial CODEF: Fonction F-Code MBX: Confidentiel BLTN: Bulletin board Élément Description Rapports et listes 12 C351 12-23 12.10 Rapport de diffusion réservée Ce rapport est imprimé automatiquement à la suite de la réservation d'une émission multiposte séquentielle. L'impression automatique peut être réglée sur [ON] ou [OFF] dans [Rapport émission programmée] de la fonction [Réglage Rapports] dans le mode Utilitaire. Pour plus d'informations, voir “Réglage des rapports” à la page 11-67. * Les rapports que vous imprimez peuvent être différents de ceux qui sont illustrés dans ce manuel. Élément Description Destination Indique : • Nom de la destination s'il a été enregistré dans la liste de numéros abrégés, et • Numéro de téléphone de la destination s'il a été sélectionné au clavier. Heure de création Heure à laquelle l'émission a été réservée. Heure de début Heure spécifiée en cas d'émission programmée. Impressions Nombre de pages numérisées. 12 Rapports et listes 12-24 C351 Note Indique la ou les remarques suivantes. DIF: Communication différée D/R: Relève ORG: Format original BOR: Effacement bords ODI: Original de format différent (mixte) MAN: Téléphone CSRC: CS remote care (appel distant) TR: Retransmission PC: PC-fax REL: Position reliure OS: Original spécial CODEF: Fonction F-Code MBX: Confidentiel BLTN: Bulletin board Élément Description Rapports et listes 12 C351 12-25 12.11 Rapport de réception réservée (relève) Ce rapport est imprimé automatiquement lors de la réservation de la relève d'une destination. L'impression automatique peut être réglée sur [ON] ou [OFF] dans [Rapport émission programmée] de la fonction [Réglage Rapports] dans le mode Utilitaire. Pour plus d'informations, voir “Réglage des rapports” à la page 11-67. * Les rapports que vous imprimez peuvent être différents de ceux qui sont illustrés dans ce manuel. Élément Description Destination Numéro de téléphone de la destination. Heure de création Heure de réception de la relève. Heure de début Heure spécifiée en cas d'émission programmée (réservée). Impressions Nombre de pages transmises. 12 Rapports et listes 12-26 C351 Note Indique la ou les remarques suivantes. DIF: Communication différée D/R: Relève ORG: Format original BOR: Effacement bords ODI: Original de format différent (mixte) MAN: Téléphone CSRC: CS remote care (appel distant) TR: Retransmission PC: PC-fax REL: Position reliure OS: Original spécial CODEF: Fonction F-Code MBX: Confidentiel BLTN: Bulletin board Élément Description Rapports et listes 12 C351 12-27 12.12 Rapport de relève séquentielle réservée (réception) Ce rapport est imprimé automatiquement lors de la réservation de la relève de plusieurs destinations. L'impression automatique peut être réglée sur [ON] ou [OFF] dans [Rapport émission programmée] de la fonction [Réglage Rapports] dans le mode Utilitaire. Pour plus d'informations, voir “Réglage des rapports” à la page 11-67. * Les rapports que vous imprimez peuvent être différents de ceux qui sont illustrés dans ce manuel. Élément Description Destination Numéro de téléphone de la destination. Heure de création Heure de réception de la relève. Heure de début Heure spécifiée en cas d'émission programmée (réservée). Impressions Nombre de pages transmises. 12 Rapports et listes 12-28 C351 Note Indique la ou les remarques suivantes. DIF: Communication différée D/R: Relève ORG: Format original BOR: Effacement bords ODI: Original de format différent (mixte) MAN: Téléphone CSRC: CS remote care (appel distant) TR: Retransmission PC: PC-fax REL: Position reliure OS: Original spécial CODEF: Fonction F-Code MBX: Confidentiel BLTN: Bulletin board Élément Description Rapports et listes 12 C351 12-29 12.13 Rapport réception confidentielle Ce rapport est imprimé automatiquement suite à la réception d'un document confidentiel. L'impression automatique peut être réglée sur [ON] ou [OFF] dans [Rapport réception confidentielle] de la fonction [Réglage Rapports] dans le mode Utilitaire. Pour plus d'informations, voir “Réglage des rapports” à la page 11-67. * Les rapports que vous imprimez peuvent être différents de ceux qui sont illustrés dans ce manuel. Élément Description Destination Indique : • Nom de la destination s'il a été enregistré dans la liste de numéros abrégés • Le numéro de téléphone de la destination Heure de création Heure à laquelle la communication a commencé. Heure Durée de la communication. Impressions Nombre de pages transmises. Résultat OK La communication s'est terminée normalement. ARRET La communication a été interrompue. ETEIND L'interrupteur est hors tension. TEL Appel téléphonique entrant. ECHEC Une erreur de communication s'est produite. Erreur Une erreur s'est produite et le FK-502 est passé en rappel de la page d'erreur. Pas ré La destination appelée n'a pas répondu. Occupé La communication n'a pas abouti parce que la ligne est occupée. M-plei La mémoire fax disponible a été dépassée pendant la réception, et celle-ci a échoué. 12 Rapports et listes 12-30 C351 Note Indique la ou les remarques suivantes. DIF: Communication différée D/R: Relève ORG: Format original BOR: Effacement bords ODI: Original de format différent (mixte) MAN: Téléphone CSRC: CS remote care (appel distant) TR: Retransmission PC: PC-fax REL: Position reliure OS: Original spécial CODEF: Fonction F-Code MBX: Confidentiel BLTN: Bulletin board Élément Description Rapports et listes 12 C351 12-31 12.14 Rapport Émission bulletin Ce rapport est imprimé automatiquement à la suite de l'émission en relève d'un document enregistré dans la boîte utilisateur Bulletin. L'impression automatique peut être réglée sur [ON] ou [OFF] dans [Rapport émission bulletin] de la fonction [Réglage Rapports] dans le mode Utilitaire. Pour plus d'informations, voir “Réglage des rapports” à la page 11-67. * Les rapports que vous imprimez peuvent être différents de ceux qui sont illustrés dans ce manuel. Élément Description Destination Indique : • Nom de la destination s'il a été enregistré dans la liste de numéros abrégés • Le numéro de téléphone de la destination Heure de création Heure à laquelle la communication a commencé. Heure Durée de la communication. Impressions Nombre de pages transmises. Résultat OK La communication s'est terminée normalement. ARRET La communication a été interrompue. ETEIND L'interrupteur est hors tension. TEL Appel téléphonique entrant. ECHEC Une erreur de communication s'est produite. Erreur Une erreur s'est produite et le FK-502 est passé en rappel de la page d'erreur. Pas ré La destination appelée n'a pas répondu. Occupé La communication n'a pas abouti parce que la ligne est occupée. M-plei La mémoire fax disponible a été dépassée pendant la réception, et celle-ci a échoué. 12 Rapports et listes 12-32 C351 Note Indique la ou les remarques suivantes. DIF: Communication différée D/R: Relève ORG: Format original BOR: Effacement bords ODI: Original de format différent (mixte) MAN: Téléphone CSRC: CS remote care (appel distant) TR: Retransmission PC: PC-fax REL: Position reliure OS: Original spécial CODEF: Fonction F-Code MBX: Confidentiel BLTN: Bulletin board Élément Description Rapports et listes 12 C351 12-33 12.15 Liste Carnet d'adresses Liste Carnet d'adresses 1 Appuyez sur [Fax], puis sur [Utilitaire/Compteur] sur le tableau de commande. 2 Appuyez sur [Réglage Administrateur]. 3 Saisissez le mot de passe et appuyez sur [OK]. – Le mot de passe de l'administrateur peut être modifié dans [Paramètre sécurité]. L'administrateur a la responsabilité de la gestion du mot de passe. 4 Appuyez sur [Enregistrement 1-touche]. – En mode Utilitaire, vous pouvez également taper sur le clavier le numéro de l'option pour la sélectionner. Pour l'option [Enregistrement 1-touche], tapez “3” sur le clavier. 5 Appuyez sur [Liste enregistre. 1-touche]. 6 Appuyez sur [Liste Carnet d'adresses]. 12 Rapports et listes 12-34 C351 7 Tapez au clavier la plage de numéros d'enregistrements à imprimer dans le champ [No. enregistrement] et sélectionnez [E-Mail], [Boîte utilisat.] ou [Fax] pour le champ [Type de destination]. – Vous pouvez indiquer 100 numéros d'enregistrements maximum. – Appuyez sur pour déplacer le curseur vers la gauche, sur pour le déplacer vers la droite. – Pour corriger une entrée, appuyez sur [C] (clear) sur le tableau de commande. 8 Appuyez sur [Impr.]. 9 Sélectionnez le magasin de papier. 10 Appuyez sur [Départ]. La liste Carnet d'adresses est imprimée. ! Détail Si le papier requis n'est pas chargé dans le magasin indiqué, la touche [Départ] clignote en rouge. Dans ce cas, vous ne pouvez pas appuyer sur [Départ]. Rapports et listes 12 C351 12-35 Description de la liste Carnet d'adresses * Les rapports que vous imprimez peuvent être différents de ceux qui sont illustrés dans ce manuel. Élément Description No. Numéro abrégé. Nom Nom enregistré Numéro tél. Numéro de fax enregistré dans le carnet d'adresses Réglage ligne * indiqué s'il a été paramétré. 12 Rapports et listes 12-36 C351 12.16 Liste d'adresses de groupe Liste d'adresses de groupe 1 Appuyez sur [Fax], puis sur [Utilitaire/Compteur] sur le tableau de commande. 2 Appuyez sur [Réglage Administrateur]. 3 Saisissez le mot de passe et appuyez sur [OK]. – Le mot de passe de l'administrateur peut être modifié dans [Paramètre sécurité]. L'administrateur a la responsabilité de la gestion du mot de passe. 4 Appuyez sur [Enregistrement 1-touche]. – En mode Utilitaire, vous pouvez également taper sur le clavier le numéro de l'option pour la sélectionner. Pour l'option [Enregistrement 1-touche], tapez “3” sur le clavier. 5 Appuyez sur [Liste enregistre. 1-touche]. 6 Appuyez sur [Liste groupe]. Rapports et listes 12 C351 12-37 7 Tapez au clavier la plage de numéros d'enregistrements à imprimés dans le champ [No. enregistrement]. – Vous pouvez indiquer 20 numéros d'enregistrements maximum. – Appuyez sur pour déplacer le curseur vers la gauche, sur pour le déplacer vers la droite. – Pour corriger une entrée, appuyez sur [C] (clear) sur le tableau de commande. 8 Appuyez sur [Impr.]. 9 Sélectionnez le magasin de papier. 10 Appuyez sur [Départ]. La liste d'adresses de groupe est imprimée. ! Détail Si le papier requis n'est pas chargé dans le magasin indiqué, la touche [Départ] clignote en rouge. Dans ce cas, vous ne pouvez pas appuyer sur [Départ]. 12 Rapports et listes 12-38 C351 Description de la liste d'adresses de groupe * Les rapports que vous imprimez peuvent être différents de ceux qui sont illustrés dans ce manuel. Élément Description No. Numéro du groupe Nom Nom du groupe Adr. No. Numéros abrégés enregistrés dans le groupe Nombre enregist. Nombre de numéros abrégés enregistrés dans le groupe Rapports et listes 12 C351 12-39 12.17 Liste Programme Liste Programme 1 Appuyez sur [Fax], puis sur [Utilitaire/Compteur] sur le tableau de commande. 2 Appuyez sur [Réglage Administrateur]. 3 Saisissez le mot de passe et appuyez sur [OK]. – Le mot de passe de l'administrateur peut être modifié dans [Paramètre sécurité]. L'administrateur a la responsabilité de la gestion du mot de passe. 4 Appuyez sur [Enregistrement 1-touche]. – En mode Utilitaire, vous pouvez également taper sur le clavier le numéro de l'option pour la sélectionner. Pour l'option [Enregistrement 1-touche], tapez “3” sur le clavier. 5 Appuyez sur [Liste enregistre. 1-touche]. 6 Appuyez sur [Liste Programme]. 12 Rapports et listes 12-40 C351 7 Tapez au clavier la plage de numéros d'enregistrements à imprimer dans le champ [No. enregistrement] et sélectionnez [E-Mail], [Boîte utilisat.], [Fax], [Numéro abrégé] ou [No. groupe] pour le champ [Type de destination]. – Vous pouvez indiquer 50 numéros d'enregistrements maximum. – Appuyez sur pour déplacer le curseur vers la gauche, sur pour le déplacer vers la droite. – Pour corriger une entrée, appuyez sur [C] (clear) sur le tableau de commande. 8 Appuyez sur [Impr.]. 9 Sélectionnez le magasin de papier. 10 Appuyez sur [Départ]. La liste Programme est imprimée. ! Détail Si le papier requis n'est pas chargé dans le magasin indiqué, la touche [Départ] clignote en rouge. Dans ce cas, vous ne pouvez pas appuyer sur [Départ]. Rapports et listes 12 C351 12-41 Description de la Liste Programme * Les rapports que vous imprimez peuvent être différents de ceux qui sont illustrés dans ce manuel. Élément Description No. Numéro d'enregistrement du programme Nom Nom de l'enregistrement Numéro abrégé Numéro abrégé de l'enregistrement No. boîte utilisateur Numéro d'enregistrement de la boîte utilisateur Adresse E-Mail Adresse e-mail enregistrée Élément Fonctions du FK-502. Setting Valeur de réglage sélectionnée 12 Rapports et listes 12-42 C351 12.18 Liste de Titres/Textes La liste de sujets et de textes (e-mail) enregistrés peut être imprimée. Liste de Titres/Textes 1 Appuyez sur [Fax], puis sur [Utilitaire/Compteur] sur le tableau de commande. 2 Appuyez sur [Réglage Administrateur]. 3 Saisissez le mot de passe et appuyez sur [OK]. – Le mot de passe de l'administrateur peut être modifié dans [Paramètre sécurité]. L'administrateur a la responsabilité de la gestion du mot de passe. 4 Appuyez sur [Enregistrement 1-touche]. – En mode Utilitaire, vous pouvez également taper sur le clavier le numéro de l'option pour la sélectionner. Pour l'option [Enregistrement 1-touche], tapez “3” sur le clavier. 5 Appuyez sur [Liste enregistre. 1-touche]. Rapports et listes 12 C351 12-43 6 Appuyez sur [Liste Sujet/Texte E-Mail]. 7 Sélectionnez le magasin de papier. 8 Appuyez sur [Départ]. La liste Titres/Textes est imprimée. ! Détail Si le papier requis n'est pas chargé dans le magasin indiqué, la touche [Départ] clignote en rouge. Dans ce cas, vous ne pouvez pas appuyer sur [Départ]. 12 Rapports et listes 12-44 C351 Description de la liste de Titres/Textes Nom de la liste Élément Description Liste Sujet No. Numéro de l'enregistrement. Sujet Sujet enregistré en tant que sujet/texte (pour un e-mail). Liste de textes No. Numéro de l'enregistrement. Texte Texte enregistré en tant que sujet/texte (pour un e-mail). Rapports et listes 12 C351 12-45 12.19 Liste des réglages du fax La liste des réglages du fax peut être imprimée. Liste des réglages du fax 1 Appuyez sur [Fax], puis sur [Utilitaire/Compteur] sur le tableau de commande. 2 Appuyez sur [Réglage Administrateur]. 3 Saisissez le mot de passe et appuyez sur [OK]. – Le mot de passe de l'administrateur peut être modifié dans [Paramètre sécurité]. L'administrateur a la responsabilité de la gestion du mot de passe. 4 Appuyez sur [Réglage Fax]. – Certaines options de réglages optionnels peuvent ne pas être indiquées. – En mode Utilitaire, vous pouvez également taper sur le clavier le numéro de l'option pour la sélectionner. Pour l'option [Réglage Fax], tapez “8” sur le clavier. 12 Rapports et listes 12-46 C351 5 Appuyez sur [Réglage Multi lignes]. 6 Sélectionnez le magasin de papier. 7 Appuyez sur [Départ]. La liste des réglages du fax est imprimée. ! Détail Si le papier requis n'est pas chargé dans le magasin indiqué, la touche [Départ] clignote en rouge. Dans ce cas, vous ne pouvez pas appuyer sur [Départ]. Rapports et listes 12 C351 12-47 Description de la liste des réglages du fax * Les rapports que vous imprimez peuvent être différents de ceux qui sont illustrés dans ce manuel. Élément Description Élément Fonction du mode Utilitaire. Réglages Valeur de réglage sélectionnée 12 Rapports et listes 12-48 C351 * Les rapports que vous imprimez peuvent être différents de ceux qui sont illustrés dans ce manuel. Rapports et listes 12 C351 12-49 12.19.1Liste confidentielle/bulletin * Les rapports que vous imprimez peuvent être différents de ceux qui sont illustrés dans ce manuel. Élément Description No. Numéro de boîte enregistré avec le réglage confidentiel / bulletin board. Nom Nom enregistré. Mot de passe Mot de passe confidentiel. Type Confidentiel ou Bulletin board. 12 Rapports et listes 12-50 C351 12.19.2Boîte émetteur (TSI) * Les rapports que vous imprimez peuvent être différents de ceux qui sont illustrés dans ce manuel. Élément Description No. Numéro d'enregistrement de l'expéditeur (TSI) RX Expédit. (TSI) Informations sur l'expéditeur enregistré. No. boîte Numéro d'enregistrement de la boîte 13 Annexe Annexe 13 C351 13-3 13 Annexe 13.1 Nombre de pages mémorisées Cette machine est équipée en standard d'un disque dur de 40 Go. Les images de fax sont sauvegardées dans la zone 27 Go du disque dur. Ce disque dur a une capacité de stockage et de réception dans chacun des modes (copie, imprimante, numérisation, boîte et fax) d'environ 9 000 originaux Konica standard au format A4 contenant chacun 700 mots (en définition “fine”). La taille, l'état et la définition des originaux a toutefois une incidence sur le nombre de pages sauvegardées sur le disque dur. ! Détail La mémoire peut saturer pendant la lecture de l'original. Dans ce cas, vous pouvez soit émettre la partie lue de l'original, soit recommencer la procédure. 13 Annexe 13-4 C351 13.2 Saisie de texte La section suivante explique comment utiliser le clavier affiché sur l'écran tactile pour saisir les noms des comptes enregistrés et les formats de papier personnalisés. Vous pouvez également y taper les numéros. Les différents claviers pouvant apparaître sont illustrés ci-dessous. Exemple Écran de saisie du mot de passe Écran de saisie d'une adresse e-mail Écran de saisie d'un e-mail Annexe 13 C351 13-5 La procédure suivante explique comment se servir du clavier tactile affiché sur l'écran de saisie d'une adresse e-mail. 13 Annexe 13-6 C351 Pour taper du texte % Touchez la touche du caractère voulu sur le clavier affiché. – Pour saisir une lettre en majuscule ou un symbole exigeant le clavier en majuscule, touchez [Maj.]. – Vous pouvez également taper des chiffres sur ce clavier. Les caractères saisis s'affichent dans la zone de texte. 2 Remarque Pour annuler le texte saisi, appuyez sur [Annul.]. Pour effacer tout le texte saisi, appuyez sur la touche [C] (clear). ! Détail Pour modifier un caractère dans le texte saisi, touchez et/ou pour placer le curseur devant ce caractère, touchez [Suppri.], puis retapez la lettre ou le chiffre voulu. Liste des caractères disponibles Type Caractères disponibles Caractères alphanumériques / symboles Annexe 13 C351 13-7 13.3 Glossaire Cette section décrit les termes de communication fax employés. Certaines définitions s'appliquent à des fonctions non employées sur cette machine. Termes Description Caractères numériques 2 en 1 TX Fonction de réunion de deux pages en une seule et d'émission de la page au format large ainsi composée. B bps Abréviation de “bit par seconde”, unité de transmission de données représentant la quantité de données envoyée par seconde. Bulletin board (tableau électronique) Fonction permettant de poster les documents à lire ou à émettre en relève. C Carnet d'adresses Carnet permettant d'appeler la destination en recherchant son nom dans la liste de numéros abrégés enregistrés. Communication confidentielle Fonction d'échange d'informations confidentielles avec certaines personnes déterminées. L'original émis avec cette fonction est enregistré dans la boîte confidentielle du destinataire, sans impression. L'impression d'une communication confidentielle exige un mot de passe. Communications internationales Cette fonction permet d'émettre à une vitesse de transmission moins rapide. Elle est particulièrement utile lors de l'émission d'un fax dans une région (nationale comprise) où les conditions de communication sont moins fiables. D Débordement mémoire État de saturation de la mémoire de cette machine pendant la mémorisation d'un document transmis. Définition Plus la définition est fine, plus le temps de transmission est long. Il convient de sélectionner la définition appropriée. Diffusion Émission d'un fax vers plusieurs postes, en une seule opération. 13 Annexe 13-8 C351 E ECM (Error Correction Mode) (code de correction d'erreur) Ce mode est utilisé avec la communication G3. La transmission exacte des données et leur bonne réception sont vérifiées. En cas d'erreur, les données sont émises à nouveau. Si la destination gère ce mode de vérification des erreurs, les données sont transmises sous ce mode, à moins que la fonction ECM OFF n'ait été activée. Effacement bords Fonction permettant d'effacer les bandes noires reproduites lorsque l'original est un livre ou qu'il est lu avec le chargeur de document ouvert. Émission de substitution Fonction de transfert/émission des documents reçus en attente d'impression, par le biais du tableau de commande. Cette fonction peut être réglée sur l'écran Fax lorsque l'opération a été interrompue en raison d'un manque de papier ou d'un bourrage papier dans la machine. Émission différée (TX) Fonction permettant de spécifier l'heure de début de la communication. L'exécution de l'émission la nuit ou tôt le matin permet de tirer parti de tarifs plus intéressants. Émission en relais Fonction d'envoi d'un fax à plusieurs stations via une station de relais. En cas d'émission vers des stations distantes, la configuration de l'une des stations en tant que station relais permet de réduire les coûts de communication. Émission groupée Fonction de transmission simultanée du dernier document réservé avec le document réservé précédent si la destination et les conditions de transmission (émission mémoire, définition, etc.) sont les mêmes. Cette fonction peut émettre jusqu'à cinq documents. Émission livre Fonction qui génère deux pages distinctes à partir de deux pages en vis à vis d'un livre ou d'un catalogue ouvert. Émission manuelle Fonction d'émission de documents tout en confirmant l'état de la machine réceptrice. Émission mémoire Avec cette méthode, toutes les pages sont numérisées, puis mémorisées avant l'émission. Le document est automatiquement paginé et les images de la première page apparaissent dans le rapport de communication. Lors de l'émission d'un grand nombre de pages ou si les images des originaux sont hautement définies, la capacité de la mémoire peut toutefois être dépassée. Émission par lot Fonction d'émission automatique d'un document à une heure donnée si la destination, l'heure d'émission, l'émission mémoire et la définition ne changent pas. Termes Description Annexe 13 C351 13-9 F F-code Stipule l'utilisation de l'adresse secondaire du protocole T.30* normalisé par l'ITU-T. Plusieurs fonctions F-code peuvent être utilisées sur les télécopieurs gérant ce code, quels que soient leurs fabricants. Sur cette machine, la fonction F-code s’utilise dans le bulletin board, pour les requêtes de transmission en relais, les communications confidentielles et les émissions d'ID. (* il s’agit d’une des normes de communication.) Format original Fonction de désignation du format du document à envoyer. En principe, si le format de papier chargé à la destination est trop petit pour recevoir l'image transmise, cette image est réduite pour tenir dans la feuille. Cette fonction permet d'imprimer une partie de l'image sans réduction. G G3 L'un des modes de communication fax normalisés par l'ITUT. C'est le mode le plus utilisé. Groupe Regroupement de plusieurs numéros abrégés. Cette fonction est utile si vous utilisez fréquemment l'émission séquentielle multiposte ou la réception en relève. Un groupe peut contenir jusqu'à 500 numéros abrégés. H Haut/Bas Fonction de précision du type de reliure lors de l'émission d'un document recto-verso. Le type de reliure sélectionné permet de le lire correctement de droite à gauche ou de haut en bas. I ID Fax Code permettant d'identifier le fax émetteur et récepteur. Le numéro de fax est généralement enregistré en tant qu'ID du fax. Informations de l'expéditeur Informations telles que la date d'émission, le nom et le numéro de téléphone de l'expéditeur, ainsi que le nombre de pages, imprimées en haut du document reçu par la destination. L Lecture Numérisation optique d'un original et capture de cet original en tant que données d'image. M Mémoire Emplacement de stockage des données. La mémoire peut contenir les réglages de la communication et le document à émettre/reçu. Mémoire rapide Avec cette méthode, l'émission du fax s'effectue immédiatement après la numérisation de chaque page. C'est la méthode recommandée pour ne pas saturer la mémoire dans le cas de l'émission d'un document volumineux. Méthode de numérotation Il existe deux méthodes de numérotation : à impulsions (décimale) et à fréquences vocales (DTME). Mot de passe émission (TX) Fonction de transmission de fax avec un mot de passe. L'expéditeur doit utiliser le même mot de passe que celui qui est paramétré sur la machine réceptrice fonctionnant en réseau fermé, si cette machine est la destination. Termes Description 13 Annexe 13-10 C351 N Nom expéditeur Nom de la machine, représenté par des caractères alphanumériques et des signes. Ce nom est imprimé en haut du document reçu par le destinataire. Nombre total de pages Fonction plaçant automatiquement le nombre total de pages sur chaque page du fax en mode Mémoire rapide. Cette fonction permet au destinataire de vérifier la bonne réception de toutes les pages du document. Numérisation horizontale L'original est numérisé à l'horizontale. Numérisation verticale L'original est numérisé à la verticale. Numéro abrégé L'une des fonctions d'enregistrement des numéros de fax fréquemment composés. L'enregistrement du nom de la destination et du caractère de recherche avec le numéro abrégé permet ensuite de désigner la destination dans le carnet d'adresses. 500 numéros abrégés (000 à 499) peuvent être enregistrés. O Original long Fonction permettant d'émettre des pages plus longues que le format 11 × 17 (420 mm/16,5 pouces). Cette fonction doit être choisie avant l'émission d'un document long, faute de quoi la machine génère un message d'erreur d'acheminement du papier. Les pages de 800 mm maximum peuvent être émises sous ce mode. Original plié Fonction déterminant le format de l'original avant sa lecture et son émission. Certains télécopieurs ne détectent pas le format d'un document plié. Cette fonction n'est disponible que si le document est placé dans le chargeur de document. Originaux mixtes Fonction permettant de régler et d'envoyer des pages de différents formats en une seule procédure. P Pause Cette fonction inclut une pause dans la numérotation. L'appui une fois sur la touche Pause crée un intervalle d'une seconde. Programme Fonction d'enregistrement des numéros de fax fréquemment utilisés et des modèles de procédures dans un programme. Cela fait, la destination ou la procédure voulue est sélectionnée en appuyant sur la touche Programme (dans la liste de numéros abrégés). Termes Description Annexe 13 C351 13-11 R Rappel Renuméroter la même destination. Le rappel peut s'effectuer automatiquement ou manuellement. Réception en mémoire Fonction de mémorisation automatique du document reçu s'il ne peut être imprimé en raison de manque de papier. Réception mémoire Fonction d'enregistrement, et d'impression le cas échéant, du document reçu. Ré-émission Fonction de sélection des documents dont l'émission a échoué. Les documents sont mémorisés, puis émis à nouveau à la même destination ou à une autre. Réglage usine Valeur par défaut définie en usine. Ces valeurs peuvent être modifiées en mode Utilitaire. La définition d'une valeur utilisée fréquemment en tant que valeur par défaut accélère les procédures. Relève Fonction d'envoi d'un fax, qui a été lu et enregistré sur le disque dur du télécopieur, au moment où le destinataire envoie une commande de relève. Réservation d'émission Fonction de réservation de l'émission suivante pendant une communication ou une impression. S Station d'origine Le télécopieur fournissant les instructions d'émission d'un document vers plusieurs stations. Station relais Le télécopieur émettant le document vers plusieurs stations à la demande de la station d'origine. Super G3 (SG3) Mode de communication G3 conforme au protocole V.34 de l'ITU-T, plus rapide (jusqu'à 33 400 bps) que la communication G3 standard. T Temps de transmission La durée d'émission d'un fax. Plus la définition est fine, plus le temps de transmission est long. V V.34 Protocole de communication en super G3. Ce mode est disponible si le récepteur et l'expéditeur sont connectés à la ligne via une extension de matériel de central. Vitesse de transmission Débit de transmission du modem sur le télécopieur. Il peut être réglé sur le haut débit de 33 600 bps. En mode de communication internationale, ce débit peut être réduit lors de l'émission d'un fax dans une région où les conditions de communication sont moins fiables. Le débit peut alors être réglé sur 7 200 ou 4 800 bps. Termes Description 13 Annexe 13-12 C351 13.4 Index A Accessibilité, tableau de commande .................................................. 2-5 Aide, tableau de commande .... 2-6 Ajustement fond .............7-6, 7-15 Alimentation, tableau de commande .................................................. 2-5 Annul. ....................................... 7-5 Annuler, tableau de commande 2-5 Appels récents # .................... 3-27 Arrêt, tableau de commande ... 2-5 Authentification utilisateur ..... 2-17 B Boîte ....................................... 2-18 Boîte bulletin board ............... 2-20 Boîte d'émission en relève ..... 2-20 Boîte d'impression sécurisée . 2-20 Boîte émetteur (TSI) ............. 12-50 Boîte spécifiée ....................... 2-19 Boîte système ........................ 2-20 Boîte utilisateur ........................ 2-9 Boîte utilisateur réception mémoire .....................2-20, 10-49 Boîte, tableau de commande .. 2-4 Boîtes confidentielles ........... 10-46 Bulletin (tableau électronique) ............................................. 10-48 Bulletin board (tableau électronique) ................................................ 9-10 C C, tableau de commande ........ 2-5 Carnet d'adresses .........2-8, 2-15 ............................3-19, 3-23, 10-5 chargeur ADF .................3-7, 3-10 Clavier .................................... 3-21 Clavier, tableau de commande 2-5 Code, tableau de commande ...2-4 Communication confidentielle 7-29 Communications internationales .......................................3-50, 7-6 Compte de service .................2-17 Contraste, tableau de commande ...................................................2-5 Contrôle, tableau de commande.... ...................................................2-5 Copie, tableau de commande ..2-4 D Décrocher ...............................2-15 Définir mode PBX CN ...........11-64 Définition ................................3-15 Densité ...................................3-13 Départ, tableau de commande 2-5 Données, tableau de commande ...................................................2-5 E ECM OFF ........................7-6, 7-35 Écran Fax actif ...........11-7, 11-19 Écran Fax réglage par défaut ......11-7, 11-15 Écran tactile .............................2-4 Effacement bords ...........7-6, 7-12 E-mail .......................................2-9 Émission différée (TX) .....3-47, 7-6 Émission en relève ...................9-4 Émission en relève (TX) ............7-6 Émission F-code (TX) ...............7-6 Enregistrer ds boîte ut. ...........3-27 Epreuve, tableau de commande ...................................................2-5 F Fax, tableau de commande .....2-4 Format de numérisat. ...............7-6 Format de numérisation .........7-21 Annexe 13 C351 13-13 G Groupe .......................2-15, 10-19 I Imprimer page de séparation .4-12 Imprimer page de séparation ...............................................4-13 Indicateur de destination .......2-16 Indicateur de page .................2-15 Information en-tête ...........................2-7, 11-8, 11-28 INTERRUPTEUR, tableau de commande ...............................2-5 Interruption, tableau de commande ..................................................2-5 L Ligne extérieure ...................11-64 Liste Carnet d'adresses .......12-33 Liste confidentielle/bulletin ..12-49 Liste d'adresses de groupe .12-36 Liste de Titres/Textes ...........12-42 Liste des caractères disponibles .............................13-6 Liste des réglages du fax .....12-45 Liste pages .............................2-15 Liste Paramètres tâche ........11-13 Liste Programme ..................12-39 Liste tâches ..................2-15, 3-37 M Mémoire .................................2-15 Mémoire rapide ..............3-42, 7-6 Mémoire saturée ......................5-6 Méthode de numérotation .......2-7 Mode réception ........................2-7 Mot de passe émission (TX) ..................7-6, 7-26 N Netteté ........................... 7-6, 7-18 Nº de fax expéditeur ................ 2-7 No. abrégé ..................... 2-9, 3-27 No. de destinat. ..................... 2-15 Nom dest. ............................. 2-15 Nom expéditeur ....................... 2-7 Nombre d'originaux ............... 3-45 Nombre originaux .................... 7-6 Numérisation vers E-mail ...... 3-27 Numérisation, tableau de commande .............................. 2-4 O Occupé .................................... 5-6 OFF .......................................... 7-5 OK ........................................... 7-5 Originaux mixtes .............. 7-5, 7-7 P Paramètre boîte utilisateur TSI ....................... 11-60 Pas de réponse ....................... 5-6 Passage économie énergie (Fax) .............. 11-8, 11-22 Pause ..................................... 3-27 Paysage ................................. 1-24 Portrait ................................... 1-24 Position en-tête/ pied de page ............. 11-9, 11-32 Position reliure ................. 7-5, 7-9 Programme .................. 2-12, 2-15 .................................... 3-22, 10-25 R Rappel ................................... 3-32 Rapport d'activité .................. 12-5 Rapport d’émission (en relève) ............................ 12-11 Rapport d’émission réservée (relève) .................. 12-21 13 Annexe 13-14 C351 Rapport de communication réservée ............................... 12-19 Rapport de diffusion ............ 12-15 Rapport de diffusion réservée ............................... 12-23 Rapport de réception réservée (relève) .................................12-25 Rapport de relève (réception) ............................ 12-13 Rapport de relève séquentielle (réception) ........ 12-17 Rapport de relève séquentielle réservée (réception) ............. 12-27 Rapport Émission .................. 12-9 Rapport émission bulletin .... 12-31 Rapport réception confidentielle ........................ 12-29 Réception en relève ................. 9-7 Réception en relève (RX) .......... 7-6 Réception mémoire obligatoire ............................ 11-43 Réception PC-fax .................. 2-21 Recherche avancée ............... 3-23 Recherche LDAP ................... 3-24 Recto/Recto-verso ................ 3-14 Réglage comm. ...................... 2-16 Réglage communication ........ 3-17 Réglage E-mail ....................... 3-18 Réglage Émission/ Réception .................11-10, 11-38 Réglage fonction .................. 11-11 Réglage Initial ............11-7, 11-17 Réglage ligne ........................... 7-6 Réglage numérisation .. 2-15, 3-17 Réglage Paramètres ligne .................... 11-9 Réglage paramètres ligne .......... 2-7, 11-35 Réglage Rapports ....11-13, 11-67 Réglage RX fax ..........2-21, 11-56 Réglage Transfert TX ........... 11-49 Réinitialiser, tableau de commande ...................................................2-5 Requête d'émission en relais .7-32 Reset ........................................7-5 RX réseau fermé ...................11-46 S Saisie de texte ........................13-6 Saisie directe ................2-15, 3-26 Sortie RX ..............................11-56 Sujet .....................................10-31 Système prioritaire (Réglages sortie Imprimante/Fax) .....................................11-8, 11-25 T Tableau de commande ............2-4 Texte ....................................10-31 Tonalité ...................................3-26 Type d'image original .............3-12 Type de fichier ................7-6, 7-24 U Utilitaire/Compteur, tableau de commande ...............................2-5 V V34 OFF .........................7-6, 7-38 Vérif. mot de passe RX confidentiel .....................11-53 Vérifier détails de la tâche (Contrôle) ................................3-19 Vitre d'exposition .. 3-8, 3-9, 3-10 Annexe 13 C351 13-15 Z Zone secondaire ....................2-16 Notes d'installation à l'intention des utilisateurs de Windows 7 et de Windows Server 2008 R2 Page 1/15 IMPORTANT: Notes d'installation à l'intention des utilisateurs de Windows 7 et de Windows Server 2008 R2 Les programmes d'installation automatisée contenus sur le CD ou le DVD-ROM fourni avec la machine ont été initialement conçus pour les systèmes d'exploitation Microsoft jusqu'à Windows Vista seulement. Pour procéder à une installation sous le nouveau système d'exploitation Microsoft Windows 7 ou Microsoft Windows Server 2008 R2, veuillez suivre les étapes décrites dans ce document. A - Sommaire : Cette procédure s'applique aux modèles d'imprimante suivants dont la version figure sur le CD ou DVD-ROM Utilitaires et Documentation : - bizhub C20P 1.00EU, 1.01EU, 1.30EU - bizhub C31P 1.00EU, 1.30EU - bizhub 40P 1.00EU, 1.01EU, 1.30EU - magicolor 1650 1.00EU, 1.30EU - magicolor 4650 1.00EU, 1.30EU - magicolor 5650 1.00EU, 1.01EU, 1.30EU - magicolor 5670 1.00EU, 1.01EU, 1.30EU - magicolor 7450II 1.00EU, 1.10EU, 1.20EU - magicolor 8650 1.00EU, 1.10EU - pagepro 4650 1.00EU, 1.30EU - pagepro 5650 1.00EU, 1.30EU Si le CD/DVD-ROM fourni avec votre machine indique une version supérieure, vous n'avez pas besoin d'appliquer cette procédure; vous pouvez simplement utiliser le programme d'installation intégré qui démarrera automatiquement une fois que le CD/DVD-ROM aura été inséré dans le lecteur. Cette procédure s'applique aux systèmes d'exploitation suivants : - Windows 7 (Toutes éditions) - Windows Server 2008 R2 (Toutes éditions) Si vous utilisez un précédent système d'exploitation, comme Microsoft Windows XP ou Microsoft Windows Vista, vous n'avez pas besoin de suivre cette procédure; vous pouvez simplement utiliser le programme d'installation intégré qui démarrera automatiquement une fois que le CD/DVD-ROM aura été inséré dans le lecteur. Fiery X3eTY2 65C-KM Color Server Drucken in Farbe © 2006 Electronics for Imaging, Inc. Die in dieser Veröffentlichung enthaltenen Informationen werden durch den Inhalt des Dokuments Rechtliche Hinweise für dieses Produkt abgedeckt. 45057655 03. November 2006 INHALT 3 I NHALT E INFÜHRUNG 7 Terminologie und Konventionen 7 Aufbau dieses Dokuments 8 Schlüsselfunktionen von ColorWise 8 C OLOR W ISE P RO T OOLS 10 Aufbau dieses Abschnitts 10 Einrichten der ColorWise Pro Tools unter Windows 11 Installieren der ColorWise Pro Tools 11 Installieren von ICC-Profilen 11 Konfigurieren der Verbindung 13 Bearbeiten der Konfiguration 15 Einrichten der ColorWise Pro Tools unter Mac OS 15 Installieren der ColorWise Pro Tools unter Mac OS 15 Installieren von ColorSync Profilen 16 Konfigurieren der Verbindung 18 Bearbeiten der Konfiguration 20 ColorWise Pro Tools 21 Calibrator 21 Color Editor 21 Profile Manager 25 Spot-On 31 Color Setup 32 INHALT 4 K ALIBRIERUNG 34 Aufbau dieses Abschnitts 34 Kalibrieren mit Komponente Calibrator der ColorWise Pro Tools 35 Starten von Calibrator 35 Profi-Modus 36 Anwenden von Messwerten auf mehrere Kalibrierungssets 37 Wiederherstellen der Standardmesswerte für die Kalibrierung 38 Kalibrieren mit ColorCal 39 Kalibrieren mit DTP32 oder DTP32 Series II 42 Kalibrieren mit DTP41 44 Kalibrieren mit ED-100 47 Kalibrieren mit ES-1000 51 Kalibrieren über Kopiererdisplay 54 Kalibrieren mit ColorCal 54 Zweck der Kalibrierung 56 Übersicht 56 Funktionsweise der Kalibrierung 56 Zeitplanung für die Kalibrierung 58 Ermitteln des Kalibrierungsstatus 59 S POT -O N 60 Spot-On 60 Starten von Spot-On 61 Hauptfenster von Spot-On 62 Arbeiten mit vorhandenen Farben 63 Erstellen eigener Farben 64 Herunterladen eigener Farbgruppen 65 Hochladen eigener Farbgruppen 66 Bearbeiten von Farbwerten 67 Anpassen von Zielfarben mittels Messinstrument 71 Zurücksetzen von Standardfarben auf Werkseinstellungen 72 Speichern von Änderungen und Beenden von Spot-On 73 INHALT 5 Spot-On und Ersatzfarben 74 Erstellen von Ersatzfarbgruppen und Ersatzfarben 74 Definieren der Farbwerte für eine Ersatzfarbe 76 Drucken eines Auftrags mit Ersatzfarben 78 Dialogfenster „Ersatzfarbe hinzufügen/umbenennen“ 79 Richtlinien für Ersatzfarben 80 Hoch- und Herunterladen einer Ersatzfarbgruppe 83 C OLOR W ISE D RUCKOPTIONEN 84 Aufbau dieses Abschnitts 84 Farbmanagement des Fiery X3eTY2 85 ColorWise Druckoptionen 86 Autom. Überfüllung 86 Schwarzerkennung 87 Schwarz überdrucken 87 Schwarze Texte/Grafiken 88 CMYK-Simulationsprofil 90 CMYK-Simulationsverfahren 91 Separationen überdrucken 92 Composite-Ausgabe überdrucken 92 Ausgabeprofil 93 Nur Schwarz für Grautöne 93 Farbwiedergabe 94 RGB-Separation 95 RGB-Quellprofil 96 Spot-Farbabstimmung 97 Farbsubstitution 98 Druckertreiber und Druckoptionen 99 Festlegen von Druckoptionen unter Windows 99 Festlegen von Druckoptionen für das Farbmanagement unter Mac OS 101 Aktivieren von Device Link-Profilen im Fenster „Profi-Farbeinstellungen“ 103 INHALT 6 I MPORTIEREN VON D ENSITOMETERMESSWERTEN 105 Simple ASCII Import File Format (SAIFF) 105 Beispiel: 1D Status T-Dichte für EFI 21 106 Beispiel: 1D Status T-Dichte für EFI 34 106 Beispiel: 1D Status T-Dichte für andere Seite 107 I NDEX 109 EINFÜHRUNG 7 E INFÜHRUNG In diesem Dokument wird die Steuerung der Farbausgabe auf dem Fiery X3eTY2 65C-KM Color Server beschrieben. Außerdem werden Informationen über die Kalibrierung und über Farbprofile bereitgestellt. Dieses Dokument ist Teil eines Dokumentationssatzes, der Dokumente für Anwender und Systemadministratoren umfasst. Eine ausführliche Beschreibung des Fiery X3eTY2 65C-KM Color Server finden Sie in den anderen Dokumenten der Anwenderdokumentation. Weitere Informationen über unterstützte Betriebssysteme und die Systemanforderungen finden Sie im Dokument Einführung und erste Schritte . Terminologie und Konventionen In diesem Dokument werden die folgenden Begriffe und Konventionen verwendet: Begriff oder Konventionen Beschreibung Aero Fiery X3eTY2 (in Abbildungen und Beispielen) Anwendung Command WorkStation Anwendung Command WorkStation, Windows Edition und Anwendung Command WorkStation, Macintosh Edition Kopierer Kopierer 65C-KM Fiery X3eTY2 Fiery X3eTY2 65C-KM Color Server Mac OS Apple Mac OS X Titel in Kursivschrift Verweis auf andere Dokumente der Anwenderdokumentation Windows Microsoft Windows 2000, Windows XP, Windows Server 2003 Verweis auf weitere Informationen in der Online-Hilfe der Software Tipps und Anmerkungen Wichtige Informationen Wichtige Informationen über mögliche Gefahrensituationen EINFÜHRUNG 8 Aufbau dieses Dokuments In diesem Dokument finden Sie alle Informationen, die Sie benötigen, um die Farbausgabe auf dem Fiery X3eTY2 in optimaler Weise zu steuern. In diesem Dokument werden die folgenden Themen behandelt: • Installieren und Konfigurieren der ColorWise Pro Tools • Verwenden der Komponenten Color Editor, Profile Manager und Color Setup • Übersicht über die Kalibrierung und Beschreibung der von der Komponente Calibrator der ColorWise Pro Tools unterstützten Verfahren zum Kalibrieren des Fiery X3eTY2 • Verwalten von Spot- und Sonderfarben mithilfe von Spot-On • Einstellen der ColorWise Druckoptionen unter Windows und Mac OS • Beschreibung des Dateiformats „Simple ASCII File Format“ (SAIFF), das den Import von Dichtemesswerten von verschiedenen Messinstrumenten unterstützt H INWEIS : Im Glossar werden Fachbegriffe wie „Farbraum“, „Spot-Farben“, „Gamut“ oder „Quellprofil“ erläutert. Die Fachbegriffe werden in diesem Dokument in Fettdruck dargestellt. Lesen Sie die Beschreibungen dieser Begriffe im Glossar , falls Sie mit der Terminologie der Farbtechnologie nicht vertraut sind. Schlüsselfunktionen von ColorWise ColorWise ist das Farbmanagementsystem ( CMS ), das in den Fiery X3eTY2 integriert ist und Neueinsteiger und Farbexperten gleichermaßen dabei unterstützt, für jeden Zweck die bestmögliche Farbausgabe zu erzielen. Mit den ColorWise Standardeinstellungen lassen sich aus vielen Windows- und Mac OS Anwendungen auf Anhieb perfekte Farbausgaben erzielen. Auch als weniger versierter Anwender erhalten Sie auf diese Weise Farbausgaben in optimaler Qualität, ohne dass Sie sich im Detail mit den Farbeinstellungen auf dem Fiery X3eTY2 befassen müssen. Zur Erhaltung der Farbkonsistenz sollten Sie den Fiery X3eTY2 regelmäßig kalibrieren. Die ColorWise Pro Tools stellen hierfür die Komponente Calibrator zur Verfügung, mit der Sie mit dem in den Kopierer integrierten Scanner oder mithilfe eines optional erhältlichen Spektralfotometers oder Densitometers die Kalibrierung vornehmen können (siehe Kalibrierung auf Seite 34). EINFÜHRUNG 9 Mit den Funktionen von ColorWise können Sie die Druckausgabe beeinflussen. Sie haben folgende Möglichkeiten: • Sie können das Verhalten der CMYK -Druckfunktionalität so beeinflussen, dass die Offsetdruckstandards DIC , Euroscale und SWOP sowie andere Offsetdruckstandards emuliert werden. • Sie können PANTONE- und andere Spot-Farben mit den bestmöglichen CMYKÄquivalenten für Ausgaben im Vierfarboffsetdruck oder für Ausgaben mit zusätzlichen speziellen Druckplatten abstimmen. • Durch die Auswahl eines bestimmten Color Rendering Dictionary (CRD) – einer bestimmten Farbwiedergabe – können Sie die RGB -Farbausgabe steuern. Mit CRDs erzielen Sie die ideale Farbwiedergabe, ganz gleich für welchen Zweck: brillante, gesättigte Farben für Präsentationsgrafiken oder die akkurate Wiedergabe von Fotos oder die Farbwiedergabe mit relativer oder absoluter Farbmetrik für spezielle Druckaufträge oder Anwendungsgebiete. • Sie können den Quellfarbraum von RGB-Farbdaten definieren und die Farbkonvertierung für RGB-Daten optimieren, deren Quellfarbraum nicht bekannt ist. • Sie können festlegen, ob RGB-Daten in den vollen Gamut des Kopierermodells oder zunächst in den Gamut eines anderen Ausgabegeräts (z.B. einer Offsetdruckmaschine) konvertiert werden sollen. Mit dieser Funktion können Sie mit einem Ausgabegerät das Farbverhalten eines anderen Ausgabegeräts in Bezug auf RGB-Daten simulieren. Außerdem können Sie das Aussehen einer RGB-Datei unter verschiedenen Druckbedingungen überprüfen, ohne dass Sie die RGB-Daten dafür nach CMYK konvertieren müssen. Das ColorWise Farbmanagement ( ColorWise ) bietet eine offene Architektur, so dass der Fiery X3eTY2 gezielt für die jeweiligen Erfordernisse angepasst werden kann. Außerdem unterstützt ColorWise ICC-Profile ; hierbei handelt es sich um Farbprofile nach Industriestandard, die das Farbverhalten von Ausgabegeräten exakt beschreiben. Es werden sowohl Profile der ICC-Spezifikation Version 4.0 (Profilversion 4.2.0.0) als auch der ICC-Spezifikation Version 2.0 unterstützt. Indem Sie ICC-Profile auf den Fiery X3eTY2 laden, können Sie mit dem Fiery X3eTY2 das Farbverhalten einer bestimmten Offsetdruckmaschine (oder eines anderen Kopierermodells) simulieren und die Farben eines bestimmten Monitors oder eines bestimmten Scanners akkurat wiedergeben. Schließlich haben Sie noch die Möglichkeit, eigene ICC-Profile für den Kopierer zu erstellen und zu verwenden. ColorWise unterstützt darüber hinaus die Kalibrierung mit einem beliebigen Status T - Densitometer, da Messwerte in einem Standarddateiformat importiert werden können (siehe Importieren von Densitometermesswerten auf Seite 105). Sie sollten in diesem Fall jedoch beachten, dass sich die Präzision des Messinstruments unmittelbar auf die Qualität der Kalibrierung auswirkt. COLORWISE PRO TOOLS 10 C OLOR W ISE P RO T OOLS Mit den ColorWise Standardeinstellungen lassen sich aus vielen Windows- und Mac OS Anwendungen auf Anhieb perfekte Farbausgaben erzielen. Auch als weniger versierter Anwender erhalten Sie auf diese Weise Farbausgaben in optimaler Qualität, ohne dass Sie sich im Detail mit den Farbeinstellungen auf dem Fiery X3eTY2 befassen müssen. Erfahrene Anwender können mit dem ColorWise Farbmanagementsystem (CMS) die Farbausgabe weiter optimieren, da mit den ColorWise Pro Tools eine individuelle Anpassung der Einstellungen möglich ist. Zu den ColorWise Pro Tools gehören die folgenden Anwendungen für das Farbmanagement, mit denen Sie die Farbdruckfunktionalität auf flexible Weise steuern können: • Calibrator (unterschiedliche Verfahren zur Kalibrierung des Fiery X3eTY2) • Color Editor (auch „Farbeditor“; Anpassung von Simulations- und Ausgabeprofilen) • Profile Manager (auch „Profilmanager“; Verwaltung von Profilen) • Spot-On (Definition der CMYK-Äquivalente für Spot-Farben) • Color Setup (Festlegung der Standardwerte für die ColorWise Druckoptionen) Aufbau dieses Abschnitts In diesem Abschnitt werden die Installation, Konfiguration und Verwendung der ColorWise Pro Tools unter Windows und Mac OS beschrieben. Plattform Aufgabe Siehe Windows ColorWise Pro Tools installieren Seite 11 ICC-Profile installieren Seite 11 Verbindung konfigurieren Seite 13 Konfiguration ändern Seite 15 Mac OS ColorWise Pro Tools installieren Seite 15 ColorSync Profile installieren Seite 16 Verbindung konfigurieren Seite 18 Konfiguration ändern Seite 20 COLORWISE PRO TOOLS 11 Einrichten der ColorWise Pro Tools unter Windows Im Folgenden wird die Installation der ColorWise Pro Tools und weiterer Dateien sowie die Konfiguration der Druckverbindung auf einem Windows-Computer beschrieben. Installieren der ColorWise Pro Tools Unter Windows erfolgt die Installation der gesamten Fiery Anwendersoftware durch das Master-Installationsprogramm. Die Anleitungen im Dokument Dienstprogramme beschreiben die Installation von der DVD mit der Anwendersoftware bzw. über das Netzwerk. Damit Sie die ColorWise Pro Tools auf einem Computer unter Windows verwenden können, muss Sun Java 5 auf diesem Computer installiert sein. Falls bei der Installation der ColorWise Pro Tools das Fehlen dieser Datei festgestellt wird, wird ihre Installation automatisch gestartet. Folgen Sie den Anleitungen auf dem Bildschirm. Installieren von ICC-Profilen Sie können zusätzliche ICC-Profile, die Sie verwenden wollen, vom Fiery X3eTY2 auf Ihren Computer kopieren. Verwenden Sie die ICC-Profile in Verbindung mit Anwendungen, die ICC-Standards unterstützen (z. B. Adobe Photoshop). Für die meisten ICC-kompatiblen Anwendungen müssen die Dateien im Ordner „Color“ installiert werden. Für die ColorWise Pro Tools können Sie die Dateien in einen Ordner Ihrer Wahl kopieren. ICC-PROFILE FÜR WINDOWS INSTALLIEREN 1 Navigieren Sie über das Netzwerk zum Fiery X3eTY2; verwenden Sie dazu entweder die IP-Adresse oder den DNS-Namen des Servers. 2 Geben Sie Ihren Anwendernamen und das zugehörige Kennwort ein, wenn Sie dazu aufgefordert werden. Ihr Netzwerkadministrator kann Ihnen sagen, ob diese Angaben erforderlich sind. Windows und Mac OS Calibrator verwenden Seite 21 Farbeditor verwenden Seite 21 Profilmanager verwenden Seite 25 Spot-On verwenden Seite 31 Color Setup verwenden Seite 32 Plattform Aufgabe Siehe COLORWISE PRO TOOLS 12 3 Doppelklicken Sie auf den Ordner „PC_User_SW“. 4 Öffnen Sie den Ordner „ICC“. 5 Klicken Sie mit der rechten Maustaste auf das gewünschte Profil und wählen Sie „Profil installieren“. Die Profile werden auf Ihrem Computer automatisch im Ordner „System32\spool\drivers\ color“ innerhalb des Ordners „Windows“ (Windows XP) bzw. „WINNT“ (Windows 2000) installiert. Farbdateien Sie können zusätzliche Farbdateien, die Sie verwenden wollen, vom Fiery X3eTY2 kopieren. Viele dieser Dateien sind PostScript-Dateien, die Sie mit der Anwendung Command WorkStation auf den Druckserver herunterladen und drucken können. Ordner „Windows Color Files“ CMYK Color Reference.ps: PostScript-Datei mit 11 Seiten im Format „Letter“ („US Brief“), die als Referenz bei der Festlegung von CMYK-Farben in einer Anwendung verwendet werden kann. PANTONE Book.ps: PostScript-Datei mit 20 Seiten im Format „Letter“ („US Brief“), die die Äquivalente für die optimalen PANTONE-Farben für gestrichenes Papier definiert, die mit dem Fiery X3eTY2 und dem jeweiligen Kopierer erzeugt werden können. Die Methode zum Drucken der Datei „PANTONE Book.ps“ hängt von der Einstellung der Option „Spot-Farbabstimmung“ ab. Weitere Informationen finden Sie im Abschnitt ColorWise Druckoptionen auf Seite 84. RGB page 01.doc: Datei für MS Word 97 (oder höher), die die in der Anwendung verfügbaren RGB-Farben darstellt. RGB page 02.ppt: Datei für PowerPoint 6.0 (oder höher), die die in der Anwendung verfügbaren RGB-Farben darstellt. Ordner „Color Bars“ (im Ordner „Windows Color Files“) FieryColorBar.eps: Diese Datei kann als Kontrollstreifen auf Auftragsseiten gedruckt werden. COLORWISE PRO TOOLS 13 Konfigurieren der Verbindung Wenn Sie die ColorWise Pro Tools zum ersten Mal starten, müssen Sie die Verbindung zum Fiery X3eTY2 konfigurieren. VORBEREITUNG • Drucken Sie die Konfigurationsseite des Fiery X3eTY2 über das Kopiererdisplay und notieren Sie sich die IP-Adresse des Fiery X3eTY2. oder Drucken Sie die Konfigurationsseite über die Anwendung Command WorkStation und notieren Sie sich die IP-Adresse des Fiery X3eTY2. Auf dieser Seite finden Sie alle Informationen, die Sie für die Konfiguration benötigen (z. B. die IP-Adresse). Bei TCP/IP-Installationen können Sie den DNS-Namen des Fiery X3eTY2 anstelle der IP-Adresse verwenden. Stellen Sie sicher, dass der Fiery X3eTY2 auf einem von Ihrem Netzwerk verwendeten DNS-Server registriert ist. Weitere Hinweise finden Sie in Ihrer Windows-Dokumentation. VERBINDUNG FÜR COLORWISE PRO TOOLS KONFIGURIEREN 1 Starten Sie die ColorWise Pro Tools. 2 Klicken Sie auf „Hinzufügen“, wenn das Auswahlfenster angezeigt wird. Ordner „PS Files“ (im Ordner „Windows Color Files > Calibration Files“) Custom21.ps, Custom34.ps, Standard21.ps und Standard34.ps: PostScript-Dateien mit Farbfeldern für Messungen. Die Zahl im Dateinamen gibt die Anzahl der Farbfelder pro Seite wieder. Die „Custom“-Dateien ermöglichen das Laden von Messwertefeldern, die das aktuelle Kalibrierungsset des Kopierers berücksichtigen. Die „Standard“-Dateien ermöglichen das Laden von Messwertefeldern, die das aktuelle Kalibrierungsset des Kopierermodells ignorieren. HINWEIS: Die Dateien sind für erfahrene Anwender gedacht und nicht für die routinemäßige Kalibrierung geeignet. Ordner „Halftone Calibration Files“ (im Ordner „Windows Color Files > Calibration Files“) Dies sind für verschiedene Kalibrierinstrumente und Seitengrößen ausgelegte Messwerteseiten zum Kalibrieren des Fiery X3eTY2 im Hinblick auf verschiedene Halftone- Raster. Die Dateien werden für Adobe Photoshop und andere Anwendungen bereitgestellt. HINWEIS: Verwenden Sie für das Densitometer X-Rite DTP32 Series II die Kalibrierungsdatei für das Densitometer X-Rite DTP32. COLORWISE PRO TOOLS 14 3 Geben Sie die Informationen für den Fiery X3eTY2 ein. Kurzname: Geben Sie einen Namen für den Fiery X3eTY2 ein. Der Name muss nicht mit dem tatsächlichen Servernamen des Fiery X3eTY2 übereinstimmen. HINWEIS: Der Kurzname darf die folgenden Zeichen nicht enthalten: [ ] _ " ' Servername oder IP-Adresse des Servers: Geben Sie die IP-Adresse (oder den DNS-Namen) des Fiery X3eTY2 ein. Neues Gerät: Geben Sie den Namen des mit dem Fiery X3eTY2 verbundenen Ausgabegeräts ein: 65C-KM. 4 Klicken Sie auf „Hinzufügen“, nachdem Sie alle Informationen eingegeben haben. 5 Markieren Sie den Gerätenamen (65C-KM) in der Geräteliste und klicken Sie auf „OK“. Der Fiery X3eTY2 wird nun in der Liste der verfügbaren Server angezeigt. In der ersten Zeile des Eintrags sehen Sie den Kurznamen, den Sie dem Fiery X3eTY2 zugeordnet haben, und in Klammern das gewählte Protokoll. In der zweiten Zeile des Eintrags ist der Gerätename zu sehen. 6 Markieren Sie den Gerätenamen in der Liste „Verfügbare Server“ und klicken Sie auf „Auswählen“. Daraufhin erscheint das Hauptfenster der ColorWise Pro Tools. COLORWISE PRO TOOLS 15 Bearbeiten der Konfiguration Sie müssen die Konfiguration bearbeiten, wenn sich die Angaben für den Fiery X3eTY2 oder das Netzwerk ändern (z. B. der Servername oder die IP-Adresse). Ändern Sie zuerst die spezifischen Setup-Informationen des Fiery X3eTY2 und konfigurieren Sie danach die Verbindung neu. KONFIGURATION BEARBEITEN 1 Wenn Sie der Serverliste einen neuen Fiery X3eTY2 hinzufügen wollen, klicken Sie auf „Hinzufügen“ und konfigurieren Sie die neue Verbindung (siehe Schritte 3 bis 5 der Anleitung oben). 2 Wenn Sie einen Fiery X3eTY2 aus der Serverliste entfernen wollen, aktivieren Sie den Kurznamen des Fiery X3eTY2 und klicken Sie auf „Entfernen“. 3 Wenn Sie die Konfigurationsinformationen für einen Fiery X3eTY2 ändern wollen, markieren Sie den zugehörigen Kurznamen und klicken Sie auf „Ändern“. Bearbeiten Sie die Informationen im nachfolgenden Fenster und klicken Sie auf „OK“. Die Serverliste wird entsprechend den vorgenommenen Änderungen aktualisiert. Einrichten der ColorWise Pro Tools unter Mac OS Im Folgenden wird die Installation der ColorWise Pro Tools und weiterer Dateien sowie die Konfiguration der Druckverbindung auf einem Mac OS Computer beschrieben. Installieren der ColorWise Pro Tools unter Mac OS Überlegen Sie sich vor Beginn der Installation, wo Sie die jeweilige Komponente installieren wollen. Standardmäßig wird die Software im Ordner „Fiery“ installiert. COLORWISE PRO TOOLS UNTER MAC OS VON DVD MIT DER ANWENDERSOFTWARE INSTALLIEREN 1 Legen Sie die DVD mit der Anwendersoftware in das DVD-Laufwerk ein. 2 Navigieren Sie zum Ordner mit der Software für das von Ihnen verwendete Betriebssystem. 3 Doppelklicken Sie auf das Symbol für das Installationsprogramm der ColorWise Pro Tools. 4 Folgen Sie den Anleitungen auf dem Bildschirm. 5 Schließen Sie das Installationsprogramm durch Klicken auf „Beenden“. COLORWISE PRO TOOLS 16 COLORWISE PRO TOOLS UNTER MAC OS ÜBER DAS NETZWERK INSTALLIEREN 1 Wählen Sie „Mit Server verbinden“ im Menü „Gehe zu“. 2 Geben Sie „smb://“ gefolgt von der IP-Adresse des Fiery X3eTY2 ein und klicken Sie auf „Verbinden“. Wenden Sie sich an Ihren Netzwerkadministrator, wenn der Fiery X3eTY2 nicht gefunden wird. 3 Geben Sie ggf. Ihren Anwendernamen und das zugehörige Kennwort ein. Ihr Netzwerkadministrator kann Ihnen sagen, ob diese Angaben erforderlich sind. 4 Öffnen Sie das Verzeichnis „Mac_User_SW“. 5 Öffnen Sie den Ordner „OSX“. 6 Doppelklicken Sie auf das Symbol für das Installationsprogramm der ColorWise Pro Tools. 7 Folgen Sie den Anleitungen auf dem Bildschirm. 8 Schließen Sie das Installationsprogramm durch Klicken auf „Beenden“. Installieren von ColorSync Profilen Sie können ggf. zusätzliche ICC-Profile vom Fiery X3eTY2 auf Ihren Computer kopieren. Verwenden Sie die ICC-Profile in Verbindung mit Anwendungen, die ICC-Standards unterstützen (z. B. Adobe Photoshop). Für die meisten ICC-kompatiblen Anwendungen müssen die Dateien im Ordner „Startfestplatte > Library > ColorSync > Profiles“ installiert werden. Für die ColorWise Pro Tools können Sie die Dateien in einen Ordner Ihrer Wahl kopieren. COLORSYNC PROFILE FÜR MAC OS INSTALLIEREN 1 Wählen Sie „Mit Server verbinden“ im Menü „Gehe zu“. 2 Geben Sie „smb://“ gefolgt von der IP-Adresse des Fiery X3eTY2 ein und klicken Sie auf „Verbinden“. Wenden Sie sich an Ihren Netzwerkadministrator, wenn der Fiery X3eTY2 nicht gefunden wird. 3 Geben Sie ggf. Ihren Anwendernamen und das zugehörige Kennwort ein. Ihr Netzwerkadministrator kann Ihnen sagen, ob diese Angaben erforderlich sind. 4 Doppelklicken Sie auf das Verzeichnis „Mac_User_SW“. 5 Öffnen Sie den Ordner „ColorSync“. 6 Installieren Sie die Profile im Ordner „Library > ColorSync > Profiles“. Informationen zum Festlegen von ColorSync Profilen wie EFIRGB finden Sie in der Dokumentation zu ColorSync. COLORWISE PRO TOOLS 17 Farbdateien Sie können zusätzliche Farbdateien, die Sie verwenden wollen, von der DVD mit der Anwendersoftware kopieren. Viele dieser Dateien sind PostScript-Dateien, die Sie mit der Anwendung Command WorkStation auf den Druckserver herunterladen und drucken können. Ordner „Mac Color Files“ CMYK Color Reference.ps: PostScript-Datei mit 11 Seiten im Format „Letter“ („US Brief“), die als Referenz bei der Festlegung von CMYK-Farben in einer Anwendung verwendet werden kann. PANTONE Book.ps: PostScript-Datei mit 19 Seiten im Format „Letter“ („US Brief“), die die Äquivalente für die optimalen PANTONE-Farben für gestrichenes Papier definiert, die mit dem Fiery X3eTY2 und dem jeweiligen Kopierermodell erzeugt werden können. Die Methode zum Drucken der Datei „PANTONE Book.ps“ hängt von der Einstellung der Option „Spot-Farbabstimmung“ ab. Weitere Informationen finden Sie im Abschnitt ColorWise Druckoptionen auf Seite 86. RGB page 01.doc: Datei für MS Word 97 (oder höher), die die in der Anwendung verfügbaren RGB-Farben darstellt. RGB page 02.ppt: Datei für PowerPoint 6.0 (oder höher), die die in der Anwendung verfügbaren RGB-Farben darstellt. Ordner „Color Bars“ (im Ordner „Mac Color Files“) FieryColorBar.eps: Diese Datei kann als Kontrollstreifen auf Auftragsseiten gedruckt werden. Ordner „PS Files“ (im Ordner „Mac Color Files > Calibration Files“) Custom21.ps, Custom34.ps, Standard21.ps und Standard34.ps: PostScript-Dateien mit Farbfeldern für Messungen. Die Zahl im Dateinamen gibt die Anzahl der Farbfelder pro Seite wieder. Die „Custom“-Dateien ermöglichen das Laden von Messwertefeldern, die das aktuell installierte Kalibrierungsset berücksichtigen. Die „Standard“-Dateien ermöglichen das Laden von Messwertefeldern, die das aktuell installierte Kalibrierungsset ignorieren. HINWEIS: Die Dateien sind für erfahrene Anwender gedacht und nicht für die routinemäßige Kalibrierung geeignet. Ordner „Halftone Calibration Files“ (im Ordner „Mac Color Files“ > Calibration Files“) Dies sind für verschiedene Kalibrierinstrumente und Seitengrößen ausgelegte Messwerteseiten zum Kalibrieren des Fiery X3eTY2 im Hinblick auf verschiedene Halftone-Raster. Die Dateien werden für Adobe Photoshop und andere Anwendungen bereitgestellt. HINWEIS: Verwenden Sie für das Densitometer X-Rite DTP32 Series II die Kalibrierungsdatei für das Densitometer X-Rite DTP32. COLORWISE PRO TOOLS 18 Konfigurieren der Verbindung Wenn Sie die ColorWise Pro Tools zum ersten Mal starten, müssen Sie die Verbindung zum Fiery X3eTY2 konfigurieren. HINWEIS: Die ColorWise Pro Tools werden nur in TCP/IP-Netzwerken unterstützt. VORBEREITUNG • Drucken Sie die Konfigurationsseite des Fiery X3eTY2 über das Kopiererdisplay und notieren Sie sich die IP-Adresse des Fiery X3eTY2. oder • Drucken Sie die Konfigurationsseite über die Anwendung Command WorkStation und notieren Sie sich die IP-Adresse des Fiery X3eTY2. Diese Seite enthält Informationen, die Sie für die Verbindungskonfiguration benötigen. Bei TCP/IP-Installationen können Sie den DNS-Namen des Fiery X3eTY2 anstelle der IP-Adresse verwenden. Stellen Sie sicher, dass der Fiery X3eTY2 auf einem von Ihrem Netzwerk verwendeten DNS-Server registriert ist. Weitere Hinweise finden Sie in Ihrer Mac OS Dokumentation. VERBINDUNG FÜR COLORWISE PRO TOOLS KONFIGURIEREN 1 Doppelklicken Sie auf das Symbol für die ColorWise Pro Tools. Daraufhin wird das Auswahlfenster angezeigt. COLORWISE PRO TOOLS 19 2 Klicken Sie auf „OK“, wenn das Fenster „Keine Server konfiguriert“ angezeigt wird. Klicken Sie auf „Hinzufügen“, wenn das Auswahlfenster angezeigt wird. 3 Geben Sie die Informationen für den Fiery X3eTY2 ein. Kurzname: Geben Sie einen Namen für den Fiery X3eTY2 ein. Der Name muss nicht mit dem tatsächlichen Servernamen des Fiery X3eTY2 übereinstimmen. HINWEIS: Der Kurzname darf die folgenden Zeichen nicht enthalten: [ ] _ " ' Servername oder IP-Adresse des Servers: Geben Sie die IP-Adresse (oder den DNS- bzw. Host-Namen) des Fiery X3eTY2 ein. Neues Gerät: Geben Sie den Namen des mit dem Fiery X3eTY2 verbundenen Ausgabegeräts ein: 65C-KM. Den Gerätenamen finden Sie auf der Konfigurationsseite im Bereich mit den Druckereinstellungen. 4 Klicken Sie auf „Hinzufügen“, nachdem Sie alle Informationen eingegeben haben. COLORWISE PRO TOOLS 20 5 Markieren Sie den Gerätenamen in der Geräteliste und klicken Sie auf „OK“. Der Fiery X3eTY2 wird nun in der Liste der verfügbaren Server angezeigt. In der ersten Zeile des Eintrags sehen Sie den Kurznamen, den Sie dem Fiery X3eTY2 zugeordnet haben, und in Klammern das gewählte Protokoll. In der zweiten Zeile des Eintrags ist der Gerätename zu sehen. 6 Markieren Sie den Gerätenamen in der Liste „Verfügbare Server“ und klicken Sie auf „Auswählen“. Daraufhin erscheint das Hauptfenster der ColorWise Pro Tools. Bearbeiten der Konfiguration Sie müssen die Konfiguration ändern, wenn sich die Angaben für den Fiery X3eTY2 oder das Netzwerk ändern (z. B. der Servername oder die IP-Adresse). Ändern Sie zuerst die spezifischen Setup-Informationen des Fiery X3eTY2 und konfigurieren Sie danach die Verbindung neu. KONFIGURATION BEARBEITEN 1 Wenn Sie der Serverliste einen neuen Fiery X3eTY2 hinzufügen wollen, klicken Sie auf „Hinzufügen“ und konfigurieren Sie die neue Verbindung (siehe Schritte 3 bis 5 der Anleitung oben). 2 Wenn Sie einen Fiery X3eTY2 aus der Serverliste entfernen wollen, aktivieren Sie den Kurznamen des Fiery X3eTY2 und klicken Sie auf „Entfernen“. 3 Wenn Sie die Konfigurationsinformationen für einen Fiery X3eTY2 ändern wollen, markieren Sie den zugehörigen Kurznamen und klicken Sie auf „Ändern“. Bearbeiten Sie die Informationen im nachfolgenden Fenster und klicken Sie auf „OK“. Die Serverliste wird entsprechend den vorgenommenen Änderungen aktualisiert. COLORWISE PRO TOOLS 21 ColorWise Pro Tools Die ColorWise Pro Tools ermöglichen Ihnen eine umfassende und flexible Steuerung der Farbausgabe, da Sie den Fiery X3eTY2 kalibrieren, die Simulations- und Ausgabeprofile individuell anpassen, die Profile auf dem Fiery X3eTY2 verwalten, Spot-Farben verwalten und Standardwerte für die ColorWise Druckoptionen festlegen können. Calibrator Mit der Komponente Calibrator der ColorWise Pro Tools stehen für die Kalibrierung des Fiery X3eTY2 mehrere Messverfahren zur Auswahl. Informationen über die Kalibrierung des Fiery X3eTY2 finden Sie auf Seite 34. Color Editor Mit der Komponente Color Editor (Farbeditor) der ColorWise Pro Tools können Sie eigene (anwenderdefinierte) Profile erstellen, indem Sie ein vorhandenes Simulations- oder Ausgabeprofil bearbeiten und die neuen Einstellungen als neues Profil speichern. Mit dem Farbeditor können Sie ein Profil auf dem Fiery X3eTY2 gezielt für Ihre Umgebung anpassen. Sie können den Farbeditor direkt aufrufen, indem Sie im Hauptfenster der ColorWise Pro Tools auf das entsprechende Symbol klicken. Darüber hinaus haben Sie die Möglichkeit, ihn indirekt über den Profilmanager aufzurufen. HINWEIS: Quellprofile können nicht bearbeitet werden. Sie können nur Simulations- und Ausgabeprofile anpassen. FARBEDITOR VERWENDEN 1 Starten Sie die ColorWise Pro Tools und stellen Sie die Verbindung zum Fiery X3eTY2 her. COLORWISE PRO TOOLS 22 2 Klicken Sie auf „Color Editor“. Bei Auswahl von „Simulation” werden die auf dem Fiery X3eTY2 residenten Simulationsprofile aufgeführt. Bei Auswahl von „Ausgabe“ werden die Ausgabeprofile auf dem Fiery X3eTY2 aufgeführt. 3 Wählen Sie das gewünschte Profil und klicken Sie auf „Auswählen“. Weitere Informationen über die Komponente Color Editor finden Sie in der Online-Hilfe der ColorWise Pro Tools. Anpassen der Graubalance Mit der Funktion AutoGray lässt sich der in den Kopierer integrierte Scanner als Messgerät zur Anpassung der Graubalance von Ausgabeprofilen verwenden. Die Graubalance bezieht sich auf die Qualität der neutralen Grautöne eines Profils. Grautöne haben vielfach einen bläulichen oder rötlichen Schimmer. Mit AutoGray werden diese Verfärbungen in neutralere Grautöne umgewandelt. Wenn Sie mit der Graubalance des Kopierers zufrieden sind, ist es nicht notwendig, AutoGray zu verwenden. COLORWISE PRO TOOLS 23 GRAUBALANCE EINES AUSGABEPROFILS KORRIGIEREN 1 Starten Sie die ColorWise Pro Tools und klicken Sie auf „Color Editor“. 2 Wählen Sie „Ausgabe“ im Menü „Anzeigen“ 3 Wählen Sie das zu bearbeitende Profil und klicken Sie auf „Auswählen“. Sie können alternativ auch die Komponente Profile Manager starten, darin das gewünschte Profil auswählen und auf „Bearbeiten“ klicken. Daraufhin wird die Komponente Color Editor gestartet. 4 Wählen Sie „Eigen“ im Menü „Editiermodus“. 5 Klicken Sie auf „AutoGray“. 6 Wenn das Ausgabeprofil keine Editierpunkte enthält, fahren Sie mit Schritt 8 fort. Wenn das Ausgabeprofil bereits Editierpunkte aus einer früheren AutoGray Sitzung enthält, wählen Sie „Optimieren“ oder „Neu“. COLORWISE PRO TOOLS 24 Optimieren: Mit dieser Aktion werden die Editierpunkte früherer Sitzungen wiederverwendet und weiter präzisiert. Diese Aktion ist optional und sollte nur verwendet werden, wenn die Graubalance in Ihrem Testdokument nach der ersten Bearbeitung mit AutoGray weiterer Verbesserungen bedarf. Sollten die Verbesserungen nach zweimaliger Anwendung der Option „Optimieren“ nicht eintreten, liegt dies wahrscheinlich daran, dass Ihr Testdokument das Ausgabeprofil nicht richtig berücksichtigt oder dass das von Ihnen bearbeitete Ausgabeprofil die tatsächlichen Kopierer- und Druckbedingungen nicht angemessen beschreibt. Es wird nicht empfohlen, die Option „Optimieren“ mehr als zweimal durchzuführen. Neu: Mit dieser Option wird eine neue AutoGray Sitzung gestartet; dabei werden sämtliche Editierpunkte früherer Sitzungen gelöscht. Die Aktion „Neu“ wird empfohlen, wenn Sie „Optimieren“ bereits mehr als zweimal angewendet haben. 7 Enthält das Ausgabeprofil anwenderdefinierte Editierpunkte, wählen Sie „Fortsetzen“, um diese zu löschen und mit der Anpassung von AutoGray fortzufahren. Mit der Aktion „Fortsetzen“ wird eine neue AutoGray Sitzung gestartet und sämtliche anwenderdefinierte Editierpunkte werden gelöscht. Dies ist nötig, da AutoGray anwenderdefinierte Editierpunkte nicht ändern kann. 8 Wählen Sie im Dialogfenster „Druckoptionen“ das Zufuhrfach für die Messwerteseite und klicken Sie auf „Drucken“. Für den Seitentyp wird automatisch die Einstellung „AutoGray Messwerteseite“ gewählt. Für die Papiergröße wird automatisch die Einstellung „LTR/A4“ gewählt. COLORWISE PRO TOOLS 25 9 Bestätigen Sie mit „OK“, dass die Messwerteseite gedruckt werden soll. 10 Nehmen Sie die gedruckte Seite aus dem Kopierer. 11 Legen Sie den Kodak Graustufenstreifen und die AutoGray Messwerteseite entsprechend den Anleitungen im Dialogfenster auf dem Vorlagenglas des Kopierers ab und klicken Sie auf „Weiter“. Eingeblendete Meldungen zeigen den Fortschritt der Graubalanceanpassung an. 12 Klicken Sie auf „OK“, wenn die Anpassung abgeschlossen ist. Die angepasste Kurve des Ausgabeprofils wird im Farbeditor angezeigt. Um eine Veränderung der Graubalance zu erreichen, werden durch AutoGray neue Editierpunkte so eingefügt, wie ein Profi-Anwender sie manuell eingeben würde. 13 Klicken Sie erneut auf „AutoGray“, um die Kurve des Ausgabeprofils zu verändern. 14 Wählen Sie „Optimieren“, um die Feinabstimmung für die vorhandene Kurve vorzunehmen, oder „Neu“, um eine neue Kurve zur Bearbeitung zu erstellen. Weitere Informationen zu diesen Schritten finden Sie auf Seite 24. Profile Manager Mit der Komponente Profile Manager (Profilmanager) der ColorWise Pro Tools können Sie ICC-Profile verwalten und bearbeiten. PROFILMANAGER VERWENDEN 1 Starten Sie die ColorWise Pro Tools und stellen Sie die Verbindung zum Fiery X3eTY2 her. 2 Klicken Sie auf „Profile Manager“. COLORWISE PRO TOOLS 26 Das Fenster „Profile Manager“ wird angezeigt. 3 Klicken Sie auf das gewünschte Profil, um es zu markieren. Im unteren Bereich des Fensters werden Informationen über das markierte Profil wie das Erstellungsdatum und die Version der ICC-Spezifikation angezeigt. Es werden sowohl Profile der ICC-Spezifikation Version 4.0 (Profilversion 4.2.0.0) als auch der ICC-Spezifikation Version 2.0 unterstützt. Weitere Informationen über die Komponente Profile Manager finden Sie in der Online-Hilfe der ColorWise Pro Tools. Informationen über die Option „Mediumabhängiges Profil“ finden Sie im folgenden Abschnitt. Weitere Informationen über Device Link-Profile finden Sie auf Seite 27. Festlegen der Standardprofile Mit dem Profilmanager können Sie Standardprofile für die Kategorien RGB-Quelle, Simulation und Ausgabe festlegen. Die standardmäßigen RGB-Quell- und Simulationsprofile werden auf alle Aufträge angewendet, die an den Fiery X3eTY2 gesendet werden, sofern kein spezifisches anderes Profil für einen Auftrag gewählt wird. Analog gilt dies auch für das standardmäßige Ausgabeprofil, es sei denn, die Option „Mediumabhängiges Profil“ wird gewählt. Mit der Option „Mediumabhängiges Profil“ wird veranlasst, dass für jedes in einem Auftrag verwendete Medium automatisch das dem Medium zugeordnete Ausgabeprofil verwendet wird. Weitere Informationen finden Sie im folgenden Abschnitt. 1 Ausgabeprofile 1 COLORWISE PRO TOOLS 27 Verwenden mediumabhängiger Ausgabeprofile Anstatt den Profilmanager anzuweisen, ein Standardausgabeprofil auf alle Ihre Druckaufträge anzuwenden, haben Sie die Möglichkeit, die Option „Mediumabhängiges Profil“ zu aktivieren. Mit dieser Option wird automatisch das Ausgabeprofil des Mediums verwendet, das für einen Auftrag gewählt wird. Wenn ein Auftrag gemischte Medien enthält, werden mithilfe dieser Option verschiedene vordefinierte Ausgabeprofile für die verschiedenen Medien verwendet. Im Fenster des Profilmanagers ist die Option „Mediumabhängiges Profil“ standardmäßig aktiviert. Sie wird auf alle an den Fiery X3eTY2 gesendeten Aufträge angewendet, für die im Druckertreiber keine gegenteilige Festlegung getroffen wird. MEDIUMABHÄNGIGE AUSGABEPROFILE VERWENDEN 1 Starten Sie die ColorWise Pro Tools und klicken Sie auf „Profile Manager“. 2 Aktivieren Sie die Option „Mediumabhängiges Profil“ in der Leiste „Ausgabe“ des Profilmanagers. Wenn Sie die Einstellung der Option „Mediumabhängiges Profil“ im Profilmanager ändern, wird diese Einstellung automatisch auch in der Komponente Color Setup geändert. Weitere Informationen finden Sie im Abschnitt Color Setup auf Seite 32. Device Link-Profile Der Fiery X3eTY2 unterstützt Device Link-Profile. Ein Device Link-Profil beschreibt die Konvertierung von Farbdaten aus einem Farbraum in einen anderen. Device Link-Profile sind restriktiv, da sie die Konvertierung aus dem Quell- in den Zielfarbraum in umfassender Weise definieren. Da ein Device Link-Profil die Spezifikation sowohl des Quell- als auch des Ausgabeprofils umfasst, brauchen beim Drucken eines Auftrags mithilfe eines Device Link- Profils diese beiden Profile nicht festgelegt werden. ColorWise unterstützt zwei Arten von Device Link-Profilen: Profile für die Konvertierung aus einem RGB-Quellfarbraum in einen CMYK-Zielfarbraum und Profile für die Konvertierung aus einem CYMK-Quellfarbraum in einen CMYK-Zielfarbraum. Wenn Sie ein Device Link-Profil verwenden, werden wesentliche Elemente des ColorWise Farbmanagements ignoriert, da alle Informationen, die für die Konvertierung aus dem Quellin den Zielfarbraum benötigt werden, bereits im Device Link-Profil enthalten sind. HINWEIS: Ob ein Device Link-Profil erforderlich ist oder nicht, hängt vom spezifischen Workflow eines Auftrags ab. COLORWISE PRO TOOLS 28 Installieren von Device Link-Profilen Als Administrator können Sie Device Link-Profile mithilfe des Profilmanagers auf den Fiery X3eTY2 herunterladen. Für ein Device Link-Profil müssen Sie die folgenden Einstellungen festlegen: • Ein RGB-Quellprofil oder ein CMYK-Simulationsprofil und • Ein Ausgabeprofil Ein Device Link-Profil wird nur aktiviert, wenn diese beiden Einstellungen vorgenommen wurden. Sie können ein Device Link-Profil an drei Orten aktivieren: • In der Komponente Color Setup der ColorWise Pro Tools: Hier legen Sie die Standardeinstellungen für die Optionen „RGB-Quellprofil“, „CMYK-Simulationsprofil“ und „Ausgabeprofil“ fest. Diese Einstellungen werden standardmäßig auf alle Aufträge angewendet, für die keine abweichenden Einstellungen festgelegt werden. • Im Fenster „Profi-Farbeinstellungen“ des Druckertreibers für den Fiery X3eTY2: Hier legen Sie die Einstellungen für die Optionen „RGB-Quellprofil“, „CMYKSimulationsprofil“ und „Ausgabeprofil“ für einen einzelnen zu druckenden Auftrag fest. • Im Fenster „Auftragseigenschaften“ der Anwendung Command WorkStation: Hier können Sie die vom Anwender gewählten Einstellungen der Optionen „RGBQuellprofil“, „CMYK-Simulationsprofil“ und „Ausgabeprofil“ für einen einzelnen Auftrag überschreiben. Weitere Informationen über das Aktivieren von Device Link-Profilen mit der Komponente Color Setup finden Sie auf Seite 33. Weitere Informationen über das Aktivieren von Device Link-Profilen über die Profi-Farbeinstellungen des Fiery X3eTY2 Druckertreibers finden Sie auf Seite 103. DEVICE LINK-PROFILE MIT PROFILMANAGER HERUNTERLADEN 1 Klicken Sie im Fenster des Profilmanagers auf „Durchsuchen“ links oben, wenn in der Liste „Beschreibung“ links das gewünschte Device Link-Profil nicht angezeigt wird, und navigieren Sie zu dem Ordner mit dem gewünschten Profil. 2 Klicken Sie auf „OK“, um den Ordner in die Liste „Beschreibung“ aufzunehmen. Das Device Link-Profil wird daraufhin in der Liste „Beschreibung“ angezeigt. COLORWISE PRO TOOLS 29 3 Markieren Sie das Device Link-Profil in der Liste „Beschreibung“ links und klicken Sie auf den grünen Rechtspfeil, der auf die Kategorie Device Link im rechten Teil des Fensters zeigt. Daraufhin wird das Dialogfenster „Device Link-Profileinstellungen“ angezeigt. Die Festlegung der Einstellungen wird im nächsten Abschnitt beschrieben. Zuordnen der Device Link-Profileinstellungen In der nachfolgenden Beispielabbildung des Dialogfensters „Device Link-Profileinstellungen“ sind die Angaben für ein RGB-Quellprofil zu sehen. Im Falle eines CMYK-Simulationsprofils werden in diesem Dialogfenster die Angaben für ein CMYK-Simulationsprofil anstelle der Angaben für ein RGB-Quellprofil angezeigt. 1 Kategorie Device Link 1 COLORWISE PRO TOOLS 30 DEVICE LINK-PROFILEINSTELLUNGEN ZUORDNEN 1 Nachdem Sie mit dem Profilmanager das Device Link-Profil für die Kategorie Device Link auf den Server heruntergeladen haben, müssen Sie im Dialogfenster „Device Link-Profileinstellungen“ das Quell- und das Ausgabeprofil für das heruntergeladene Device Link-Profil zuordnen. Wenn ein heruntergeladenes Device Link-Profil bereits Referenzen auf eine Quelle und eine Ausgabe (Ziel) beinhaltet, werden das betreffende Quell- und das betreffende Ausgabeprofil automatisch im jeweiligen Feld angezeigt. Wenn ein Quell- oder ein Ausgabeprofil, das als Referenz in einem heruntergeladenen Device Link-Profil enthalten ist, auf dem Fiery X3eTY2 nicht gefunden wird, wird für das Quellbzw. das Ausgabeprofil der Eintrag „Nicht zugeordnet“ angezeigt; zugleich wird eine Infozeile mit dem Hinweis eingeblendet, dass das Quell- bzw. das Ausgabeprofil nicht gefunden wurde. Durch Klicken auf „Informationen“ können Sie weitere Angaben zum fehlenden Profil einblenden. Wenn Sie ein Quell- bzw. ein Ausgabeprofil auf dem Fiery X3eTY2 installieren, das dem fehlenden, im Device Link-Profil angesprochenen Profil entspricht, wird der Eintrag „Nicht zugeordnet“ automatisch durch den Namen des Quell- bzw. Ausgabeprofils ersetzt. HINWEIS: Solange das Quell- oder das Ausgabeprofil nicht zugeordnet wurde, kann das Device Link-Profil nicht verwendet werden. Die Zuordnung dieser Einstellungen ist unbedingt erforderlich. COLORWISE PRO TOOLS 31 2 Geben Sie für ein Device Link-Profil, dem noch keine Quelle und keine Ausgabe zugeordnet wurde, eine Profilbeschreibung ein. Ordnen Sie anschließend das für das Device Link-Profil gewünschte Quell- und das gewünschte Ausgabeprofil zu. 3 Klicken Sie im Dialogfenster „Device Link-Profileinstellungen“ auf „OK“, nachdem Sie die erforderlichen Zuordnungen vorgenommen haben. Ändern von Device Link-Profilen Sie können die Einstellungen eines Device Link-Profils mit den folgenden Schritten ändern. DEVICE LINK-PROFILEINSTELLUNGEN ÄNDERN 1 Doppelklicken Sie in der Liste der Kategorie Device Link auf das zu ändernde Device Link- Profil. Daraufhin wird das Dialogfenster „Device Link-Profileinstellungen“ angezeigt. 2 Legen Sie ein neues Quell- oder ein neues Ausgabeprofil fest. 3 Klicken Sie auf „Anwenden“ und danach auf „OK“. HINWEIS: Es ist nicht möglich, ein Device Link-Profil mithilfe der ColorWise Pro Tools zu bearbeiten. Zum Bearbeiten müssen Sie die Anwendung verwenden, mit der das Device Link- Profil erstellt wurde. Spot-On Spot-On bietet Ihnen die Möglichkeit, Listen von Spot-Farben und deren CMYK-Äquivalente anzupassen und zu verwalten. Die Abgleichungslisten von Spot-Farben und CMYKWerten werden als „Spot-Farbbibliotheken“ bezeichnet. Mit Spot-On können Sie für jedes Ausgabeprofil auf dem Fiery X3eTY2 mehrere Spot-Farbbibliotheken pflegen und verwalten. Weitere Informationen über Spot-On finden Sie auf Seite 60. COLORWISE PRO TOOLS 32 Color Setup Mit der Komponente Color Setup der ColorWise Pro Tools können Sie die Standardwerte für die ColorWise Druckoptionen des Fiery X3eTY2 festlegen. Diese Einstellungen gelten für alle Druckaufträge, die von Anwendern an den Fiery X3eTY2 gesendet werden und für die im Druckertreiber keine anders lautenden Einstellungen gewählt werden. Die Standardeinstellungen können auch in der Anwendung Command WorkStation überschrieben werden. Darüber hinaus werden die Standardeinstellungen, die Sie mit der Komponente Color Setup festlegen, automatisch auch in andere Fiery X3eTY2 Tools übernommen, in denen Standardwerte angezeigt werden. Die Art und Weise, in der die Optionen in der Komponente Color Setup angeordnet sind, reflektiert den Ablauf der Farbverarbeitung auf dem Fiery X3eTY2. Klicken Sie im Fenster „Color Setup“ links unten auf „Werksstandards“, wenn Sie den Fiery X3eTY2 auf die Standardwerte zurücksetzen wollen, die werkseitig festgelegt wurden. COLOR SETUP VERWENDEN 1 Starten Sie die ColorWise Pro Tools und stellen Sie die Verbindung zum Fiery X3eTY2 her. 2 Klicken Sie auf „Color Setup“. COLORWISE PRO TOOLS 33 Aktivieren von Device Link-Profilen mit Color Setup Sie können mit der Komponente Color Setup auch Device Link-Profile aktivieren. Weitere Informationen über das Installieren und Zuordnen von Device Link-Profilen finden Sie auf Seite 28. DEVICE LINK-PROFILE MIT KOMPONENTE COLOR SETUP AKTIVIEREN 1 Starten Sie die Komponente Color Setup der ColorWise Pro Tools. 2 Wählen Sie ein RGB-Quellprofil bzw. ein CMYK-Simulationsprofil sowie ein Ausgabeprofil. Wenn Sie dabei eine Kombination von Quellprofil und Ausgabeprofil wählen, die der in einem Device Link-Profil festgelegten Kombination entspricht, wird automatisch das betreffende Device Link-Profil aktiviert und verwendet. Wird ein Device Link-Profil aktiviert, wird der Inhalt des Fensters „Profi-Farbeinstellungen“ automatisch aktualisiert; dabei werden u. U. bestimmte Fiery Druckoptionen ausgeblendet. Unter der Option „RGB-Quellprofil“ bzw. „CMYK-Simulationsprofil“ erscheint die Meldung „Benutztes Device Link-Profil“ zusammen mit dem Namen des verwendeten Profils. 3 Klicken Sie auf „OK“, um die Komponente Color Setup zu beenden. 1 Benutztes Device Link-Profil 1 KALIBRIERUNG 34 KALIBRIERUNG Das regelmäßige Kalibrieren des Fiery X3eTY2 ist die Voraussetzung für konsistente und exakt prognostizierbare Farbausgaben. Sie können den Fiery X3eTY2 mit der Komponente Calibrator der ColorWise Pro Tools unter Verwendung des in den Kopierer integrierten Scanners oder mithilfe eines Densitometers oder Spektralfotometers kalibrieren. In diesem Dokument wird für Farbmessinstrumente die folgende Terminologie verwendet: Aufbau dieses Abschnitts In diesem Abschnitt wird die Kalibrierung des Fiery X3eTY2 mit der Komponente Calibrator der ColorWise Pro Tools unter Verwendung verschiedener Farbmessinstrumente sowie über das Kopiererdisplay beschrieben. Die folgende Tabelle erleichtert das Auffinden der einzelnen Kalibrierungsverfahren. Begriff Beschreibung ColorCal plus Calibrator Kalibrierungsverfahren, bei dem die Werte für die Tonerdichte mit dem in den Kopierer integrierten Scanner gemessen werden. Sie können die Komponente Calibrator der ColorWise Pro Tools verwenden, um die ColorCal Kalibrierung durchzuführen. DTP32 oder DTP32 Series II Automatisches Densitometer X-Rite DTP32 II oder DTP32 Series II DTP41 Automatisches Spektralfotometer X-Rite DTP41 ED-100 Densitometer ED-100 ES-1000 Spektralfotometer ES-1000 ColorCal über Kopiererdisplay Kalibrierungsverfahren, bei dem die Werte für die Tonerdichte mit dem in den Kopierer integrierten Scanner gemessen werden. Die ColorCal Kalibrierung kann über das Kopiererdisplay erfolgen. Kalibrierungsverfahren Siehe ColorCal plus Calibrator Seite 39 DTP32 oder DTP32 Series II plus Calibrator Seite 42 DTP41 plus Calibrator Seite 44 ED-100 plus Calibrator Seite 47 ES-1000 plus Calibrator Seite 51 ColorCal über Kopiererdisplay Seite 54 KALIBRIERUNG 35 Dieser Abschnitt enthält auch wichtige Hintergrundinformationen und Empfehlungen für die Kalibrierung. Die folgende Tabelle erleichtert das Auffinden der behandelten Themen. HINWEIS: Die in diesem Kapitel beschriebenen Verfahren sind für Windows und Mac OS im Wesentlichen identisch. Alle Abbildungen in diesem Abschnitt stammen von einem Windows-Computer. Kalibrieren mit Komponente Calibrator der ColorWise Pro Tools Mit der Komponente Calibrator der ColorWise Pro Tools stehen für die Kalibrierung des Fiery X3eTY2 mehrere Messverfahren zur Auswahl. Das Ändern der Kalibrierung hat Auswirkungen auf alle Aufträge aller Anwender; zur Farbkalibrierung sollte daher nur eine begrenzte Anzahl von Personen berechtigt werden. Sie können ein Administratorkennwort festlegen, um den Zugriff auf die Kalibrierungsfunktion zu steuern (siehe Konfiguration und Setup). HINWEIS: Über die ColorWise Pro Tools können mehrere Anwender gleichzeitig mit einem Fiery X3eTY2 verbunden sein. Die Komponente Calibrator kann aber stets nur von einem Anwender ausgeführt werden. Wenn Sie versuchen, eine Kalibrierung vorzunehmen, solange ein anderer Anwender die ColorWise Pro Tools für die Kalibrierung einsetzt, wird eine Fehlermeldung angezeigt. Starten von Calibrator Die Komponente Calibrator wird im Hauptfenster der ColorWise Pro Tools gestartet. FIERY X3ETY2 MIT KOMPONENTE CALIBRATOR KALIBRIEREN 1 Starten Sie die ColorWise Pro Tools und stellen Sie die Verbindung zum Fiery X3eTY2 her. Die Anleitung für die Konfiguration der Verbindung finden Sie auf den Seiten 13 und 18. Thema Siehe Übersicht Seite 56 Funktionsweise der Kalibrierung Seite 56 Zeitplanung für die Kalibrierung Seite 58 Ermitteln des Kalibrierungsstatus Seite 59 KALIBRIERUNG 36 2 Klicken Sie auf „Calibrator“. 3 Wählen Sie im Menü „Messverfahren auswählen“ das gewünschte Messverfahren. Die konkreten Schritte für die jeweiligen Kalibrierungsverfahren werden im weiteren Verlauf dieses Abschnitts beschrieben. Profi-Modus Die Komponente Calibrator unterstützt zwei Modi: den Standardmodus und den Expertoder Profi-Modus. Sie können alle für die Kalibrierung wesentlichen Aufgaben im Standardmodus ausführen. Im Profi- oder Expert-Modus sind zwei weitere Optionen verfügbar: „Seiten drucken“ und „Messwerte anzeigen“. 1 Kalibrierungsverfahren 1 1 Kalibrierungsverfahren 1 KALIBRIERUNG 37 Mit der Option „Seiten drucken“ können Sie eine Vergleichsseite drucken, die das Ergebnis der neuen Messwerte in Verbindung mit einem Profil zeigt, das mit dem aktuellen Kalibrierungsset verknüpft ist. Sie können eine eigene Vergleichsseite erstellen und sie im Format PostScript oder EPS (Encapsulated PostScript) unter dem Namen „CALIB.PS“ speichern. Senden Sie diese Datei aus Ihrer Anwendung an die Warteschlange „Halten“ des Fiery X3eTY2. Sie können die Datei „CALIB.PS” auch erstellen, indem Sie einen beliebigen Auftrag in der Warteschlange „Halten“ in der Anwendung Command WorkStation umbenennen (siehe Dienstprogramme). Mit der Option „Messwerte anzeigen“ können Sie die aktuellen Messwerte in tabellarischer oder grafischer Form anzeigen; in der Grafik werden die Mess- und die Sollwertekurven darstellt. Wenn mehrere Profile dieselben Sollwerte verwenden, wird rechts oben das Menü „Zeichnen relativ zu“ angezeigt. In diesem Menü werden alle Ausgabeprofile aufgelistet, die dasselbe Kalibrierungsset verwenden. Wenn Sie in diesem Menü ein Ausgabeprofil wählen, werden die Sollwertekurven für dieses Profil angezeigt. Wenn jedes Ausgabeprofil eindeutige Kalibrierungssollwerte verwendet, ändern sich bei einem Profilwechsel die angezeigten Kurven. Anwenden von Messwerten auf mehrere Kalibrierungssets Die Komponente Calibrator stellt eine Option bereit („Auf alle Sets anwenden“), die es Ihnen ermöglicht, die bei der aktuellen Kalibrierung ermittelten Messwerte für alle Kalibrierungssets auf dem Server zu übernehmen. Diese Option ist nur verfügbar, wenn der Fiery X3eTY2 über mehr als ein Kalibrierungsset verfügt. Sie ist standardmäßig aktiviert. 1 Name des Ausgabeprofils 1 KALIBRIERUNG 38 Wenn Sie die Option „Auf alle Sets anwenden“ deaktivieren, können Sie festlegen, dass die aktuelle Kalibrierung nur auf bestimmte Kalibrierungssets auf dem Server angewendet wird. Sie können die gewünschten Sets wählen, indem Sie neben der Option „Auf alle Sets anwenden“ auf „Anpassen“ klicken; daraufhin wird das Fenster „Anwenden“ angezeigt. Aktivieren bzw. deaktivieren Sie die Optionen der angezeigten Kalibrierungssets; klicken Sie danach auf „OK“. Wenn eines der gewählten Kalibrierungssets keinem Ausgabeprofil zugeordnet ist, wird eine entsprechende Warnmeldung angezeigt. Sie können die ermittelten Kalibrierungsmesswerte jedoch trotzdem auf dieses Set anwenden. Die Kalibrierungsmesswerte werden am Ende des Kalibrierungsprozesses in das angegebene Kalibrierungsset übernommen, wenn Sie auf „Anwenden“ klicken. Wiederherstellen der Standardmesswerte für die Kalibrierung Mit den folgenden Schritten können Sie die im Werk voreingestellten Standardmesswerte für die Kalibrierung wiederherstellen. STANDARDMESSWERTE FÜR KALIBRIERUNG WIEDERHERSTELLEN 1 Klicken Sie im Fenster „Calibrator“ auf „Standard aktivieren“. 2 Klicken Sie auf „OK“, um die Werksstandards für das Kalibrierungsset wiederherzustellen. HINWEIS: Wenn die Option „Auf alle Sets anwenden“ aktiviert ist, werden alle Kalibrierungssets auf dem Server wiederhergestellt. Ist die Option „Auf alle Sets anwenden“ deaktiviert, gilt die Option „Standard aktivieren“ nur für die über die Option „Anpassen“ gewählten Kalibrierungssets. KALIBRIERUNG 39 Kalibrieren mit ColorCal Mit ColorCal können Sie den Fiery X3eTY2 ohne Spektralfotometer oder Densitometer kalibrieren. Bei der Kalibrierung mit ColorCal werden die Werte für die Tonerdichte statt dessen mit dem in den Kopierer integrierten Scanner gemessen. ColorCal hat die folgenden Funktionen: • Scannerkalibrierung: Bei ColorCal können Sie den Scanner (Einzugsvorrichtung) des Kopierers mit den Kodak Farb- und Graustufenstreifen kalibrieren. • Messwerteseite: Bei ColorCal wird eine ColorCal Messwerteseite verwendet, auf der rechteckige Schwarzweiß- und Farbfelder in zufälliger Reihenfolge angeordnet sind. Dadurch wird ColorCal weniger durch die Umgebungsbedingungen des Kopierers beeinflusst, wodurch eine größere Präzision bei der Farbreproduktion und -kalibrierung erreicht wird. HINWEIS: Für die Kalibrierung mit ColorCal benötigen Sie den Kodak Graustufenstreifen, der im Medienpaket des Fiery X3eTY2 enthalten ist. Um den Scanner des Kopierermodells für ColorCal zu kalibrieren, benötigen Sie außer dem Kodak Graustufenstreifen auch den Kodak Farbkontrollstreifen. Wenn Sie ColorCal über die ColorWise Pro Tools ausführen, können Sie den Scanner im Kopierer vor dem Fiery X3eTY2 selbst kalibrieren. Es empfiehlt sich, den Scanner für ColorCal zu kalibrieren, wenn das Ausgabeverhalten des Kopierers verändert wurde. Dies ist z.B. nach Wartungsarbeiten der Fall. DRUCKSERVER MIT COLORWISE PRO TOOLS UND COLORCAL KALIBRIEREN 1 Starten Sie die Komponente Calibrator. Die Anleitung zum Starten der Komponente Calibrator finden Sie auf Seite 35. 2 Wählen Sie im Bereich „Messverfahren auswählen“ die Einstellung „ColorCal“. 3 Aktivieren Sie im Bereich „Druckeinstellungen prüfen“ ein geeignetes Kalibrierungsset. Wählen Sie, wenn mehrere Sets zur Auswahl stehen, das Kalibrierungsset für das Medium, das Sie am häufigsten verwenden. HINWEIS: Damit diese Kalibrierung wirksam wird, müssen Sie das Kalibrierungsset mit einem oder mehreren Ausgabeprofilen verknüpfen. Das Standardkalibrierungsset ist bereits mit dem Standardausgabeprofil verknüpft, so dass sich eine weitere Zuordnung erübrigt. 4 Klicken Sie im Bereich „Messwerteseite generieren“ auf „Drucken“. KALIBRIERUNG 40 5 Wählen Sie den gewünschten Seitentyp. • Bei der Einstellung „ColorCal Seite“ wird eines von 256 ColorCal Mustern nach dem Zufallsprinzip gewählt und gedruckt. • Bei der Einstellung „Bestimmtes Muster“ wird ein bestimmtes ColorCal Muster gedruckt. Die Nummer des Musters können Sie in das Feld „Farbfeldseite #“ eingeben. Für die Papiergröße wird automatisch die Einstellung „LTR/A4“ gewählt. 6 Wählen Sie das Zufuhrfach für die Messwerteseite und klicken Sie auf „Drucken“. In einer Meldung werden Sie über den Status Ihres Druckauftrags informiert. 7 Klicken Sie auf „OK“, um den Vorgang fortzusetzen. 8 Nehmen Sie die gedruckte Messwerteseite aus dem Ablagefach des Kopierermodells. 9 Klicken Sie im Bereich „Messwerte ermitteln“ auf „Messen“. Sie werden gefragt, ob Sie den in den Kopierer integrierten Scanner kalibrieren wollen. 10 Wählen Sie „Ja“, wenn Sie den Scanner kalibrieren wollen. Wählen Sie „Nein“, wenn Sie die Scannerkalibrierung auslassen wollen; fahren Sie in diesem Fall mit Schritt 18 fort. KALIBRIERUNG 41 11 Wählen Sie das Zufuhrfach für die Messwerteseite und klicken Sie auf „Drucken“. Als Seitentyp wird automatisch die Einstellung „Scanner-Messwerteseite“ angezeigt. Für die Papiergröße wird automatisch die Einstellung „LTR/A4“ gewählt. In einer Meldung werden Sie über den Status Ihres Druckauftrags informiert. 12 Klicken Sie auf „OK“, um den Vorgang fortzusetzen. 13 Nehmen Sie die gedruckte Messwerteseite aus dem Kopierer. 14 Legen Sie die Graustufenskala, die Farbskala und die Messwerteseite für die Scannerkalibrierung auf dem Vorlagenglas des Kopierers ab. Die genauen Anleitungen dafür enthält das Dialogfenster „Setup für Scannerkalibrierung“. 15 Klicken Sie auf „Fortfahren“. 16 Am Ende des Messvorgangs wird das Dialogfenster „Informationen“ angezeigt. 17 Klicken Sie auf „Fortfahren“, um die Scannerkalibrierung fortzusetzen. KALIBRIERUNG 42 18 Legen Sie den Graustufenstreifen und die ColorCal Messwerteseite auf das Vorlagenglase des Kopierers ab; die genauen Anleitungen dafür enthält das Dialogfenster „Farbfeldseite auflegen“. 19 Klicken Sie auf „Fortfahren“. 20 Am Ende des Messvorgangs wird das Dialogfenster „Messung“ angezeigt. 21 Klicken Sie auf „OK“, um die Kalibrierung abzuschließen. 22 Klicken Sie auf „Anwenden“, um die ColorCal Kalibrierungswerte anzuwenden. Kalibrieren mit DTP32 oder DTP32 Series II Mit dem Densitometer DTP32 oder DTP 32 Series II können Sie die Farbfelder der vom Kopierer generierten Messwerteseite messen und die Messwerte automatisch auf den Fiery X3eTY2 laden. HINWEIS: Bevor Sie mit den ColorWise Pro Tools den Fiery X3eTY2 kalibrieren, müssen Sie das Densitometer DTP32 oder DTP 32 Series II einrichten und kalibrieren. Die Anleitung hierzu finden Sie in der im Lieferumfang des Messinstruments enthaltenen Dokumentation. FIERY X3ETY2 MIT DTP32 ODER DTP32 SERIES II KALIBRIEREN 1 Starten Sie die Komponente Calibrator. Die Anleitung dazu finden Sie auf Seite 35. 2 Wählen Sie „X-Rite DTP32“ oder „X-Rite DTP32 Series II“ als Messverfahren. 3 Aktivieren Sie im Bereich „Druckeinstellungen prüfen“ das gewünschte Kalibrierungsset. KALIBRIERUNG 43 Wählen Sie, wenn mehrere Sets zur Auswahl stehen, das Kalibrierungsset für das Medium, das Sie am häufigsten verwenden. HINWEIS: Damit diese Kalibrierung wirksam wird, müssen Sie das Kalibrierungsset mit einem oder mehreren Ausgabeprofilen verknüpfen. Das Standardkalibrierungsset ist bereits dem Standardausgabeprofil zugeordnet. Für das Standardkalibrierungsset brauchen Sie keine erneute Zuordnung vornehmen. 4 Klicken Sie im Bereich „Messwerteseite generieren“ auf „Drucken“. Das Dialogfenster „Druckoptionen“ wird angezeigt. 5 Wählen Sie die gewünschten Optionen und klicken Sie auf „Drucken“. Seitentyp: Sie können zwischen 21 und 34 sortierten Farbfeldern wählen. Papiergröße: Hier wird automatisch die Einstellung „LTR/A4“ für 21 sortierte Farbfelder festgelegt. Wählen Sie die Einstellung „11x17/A3“ oder „12x18/SRA3“, wenn Sie 34 sortierte Farbfelder generieren wollen. Papierzufuhr: Wählen Sie das Fach oder Magazin, aus dem das Medium für die Messwerteseite zugeführt werden soll. Halftone-Raster: Wählen Sie, um optimale Ergebnisse zu erzielen, das Halftone-Raster, das Sie beim Drucken mithilfe dieses Kalibrierungssets verwenden werden. 6 Nehmen Sie die gedruckte Messwerteseite aus dem Kopierer. 7 Klicken Sie im Bereich „Messwerte ermitteln“ auf „Messen“. Daraufhin wird das Dialogfenster mit den Messoptionen geöffnet, in dem der angegebene Seitentyp und die gewählte Papiergröße angezeigt werden. 8 Klicken Sie auf „Messen“. Führen Sie die Messwerteseite entsprechend den Anweisungen auf dem Bildschirm in das DTP32 ein. HINWEIS: Das DTP32 Series II besitzt keine solche Führungsschiene. Legen Sie bei diesem Instrument die Seite so an, dass der zu messende Farbstreifen unter der Justiermarke ausgerichtet ist. KALIBRIERUNG 44 Im Feld „Status“ werden Anweisungen für die Auswahl des Anschlusses und für das Zuführen der Messwerteseite angezeigt; die Messwerteseite muss einmal für jeden Farbstreifen zugeführt werden (insgesamt also viermal). 9 Klicken Sie auf „Übernehmen“, wenn im Feld „Status“ die Meldung erscheint, dass die Messungen erfolgreich waren. 10 Klicken Sie im Dialogfenster „Messen“ auf „OK“. 11 Klicken Sie im Fenster „Calibrator“ auf „Anwenden“, um das neue Kalibrierungsset zu implementieren. 12 Klicken Sie im Fenster „Information“ auf „OK“. Damit ist die Kalibrierung beendet. Kalibrieren mit DTP41 Mit dem Spektralfotometer DTP41 können Sie die Farbfelder der vom Kopierer generierten Messwerteseite messen und die Messwerte automatisch auf den Fiery X3eTY2 laden. HINWEIS: Bevor Sie mit den ColorWise Pro Tools den Fiery X3eTY2 kalibrieren, müssen Sie das Densitometer DTP41 einrichten und kalibrieren. Die Anleitung hierzu finden Sie in der im Lieferumfang des Messinstruments enthaltenen Dokumentation. DTP32 DTP32 Series II KALIBRIERUNG 45 FIERY X3ETY2 MIT DTP41 KALIBRIEREN 1 Starten Sie die Komponente Calibrator. Die Anleitung dazu finden Sie auf Seite 35. 2 Wählen Sie „X-Rite DTP41“ als Messverfahren. 3 Aktivieren Sie im Bereich „Druckeinstellungen prüfen“ das gewünschte Kalibrierungsset. Wählen Sie, wenn mehrere Sets zur Auswahl stehen, das Kalibrierungsset für das Medium, das Sie am häufigsten verwenden. HINWEIS: Damit diese Kalibrierung wirksam wird, müssen Sie das Kalibrierungsset mit einem oder mehreren Ausgabeprofilen verknüpfen. Das Standardkalibrierungsset ist bereits dem Standardausgabeprofil zugeordnet. Für das Standardkalibrierungsset brauchen Sie keine erneute Zuordnung vornehmen. 4 Klicken Sie im Bereich „Messwerteseite generieren“ auf „Drucken“. Das Dialogfenster „Druckoptionen“ wird angezeigt. 5 Wählen Sie die gewünschten Optionen und klicken Sie auf „Drucken“. Seitentyp: Sie können zwischen 21 und 34 sortierten Farbfeldern wählen. Papiergröße: Hier wird automatisch die Einstellung „LTR/A4“ für 21 sortierte Farbfelder festgelegt. Wählen Sie die Einstellung „11x17/A3“ oder „12x18/SRA3“, wenn Sie 34 sortierte Farbfelder generieren wollen. Papierzufuhr: Wählen Sie das Fach oder Magazin, aus dem das Medium für die Messwerteseite zugeführt werden soll. Halftone-Raster: Wählen Sie, um optimale Ergebnisse zu erzielen, das Halftone-Raster, das Sie beim Drucken mithilfe dieses Kalibrierungssets verwenden werden. 6 Nehmen Sie die gedruckte Messwerteseite aus dem Kopierer. KALIBRIERUNG 46 7 Klicken Sie im Bereich „Messwerte ermitteln“ auf „Messen“. Daraufhin wird das Dialogfenster mit den Messoptionen geöffnet, in dem der angegebene Seitentyp und die gewählte Papiergröße angezeigt werden. 8 Klicken Sie auf „Messen“. 9 Wählen Sie in der Liste „Verfügbare Anschlüsse“ ggf. den COM-Anschluss für das DTP41 und klicken Sie anschließend auf „Messung starten“. 10 Führen Sie die Messwerteseite in das DTP41 ein; messen Sie zuerst den Cyan-Farbstreifen. Richten Sie die Messwerteseite so im Führungsschlitz aus, dass der jeweils zu messende Farbstreifen unter der Justiermarke zentriert ist. Führen Sie die Messwerteseite über die vorderen Walzen in das Instrument ein, bis sie an die hinteren Antriebswalzen stößt (etwa 7 cm) und Sie einen Widerstand spüren. 11 Klicken Sie auf „Streifen lesen“. Die Messwerteseite wird nun automatisch durch das DTP41 gezogen. Nachdem die Messwerteseite gelesen wurde, werden Sie von der Komponente Calibrator aufgefordert, die Messwerteseite für den nächsten zu messenden Farbstreifen auszurichten und zuzuführen. KALIBRIERUNG 47 12 Wiederholen Sie die oben beschriebenen Schritte für die Farbstreifen Magenta, Gelb und Schwarz. Das runde Kontrollelement des zuletzt gemessenen Farbstreifens wird mit einem Häkchen versehen; zugleich erscheint im Feld „Status“ eine Bestätigungsmeldung, dass die Messung erfolgreich war. Klicken Sie auf „Zurück“ oder „Weiter“ um den letzten bzw. den nächsten Schritt des Messverfahrens anzusteuern. 13 Klicken Sie auf „Messwerte übernehmen“, wenn im Feld „Status“ angezeigt wird, dass alle vier Farbstreifen erfolgreich eingelesen wurden. 14 Klicken Sie im Dialogfenster „Messen“ auf „OK“. 15 Klicken Sie im Fenster „Calibrator“ auf „Anwenden“, um das neue Kalibrierungsset zu implementieren. 16 Klicken Sie im Fenster „Information“ auf „OK“. Damit ist die Kalibrierung des Fiery X3eTY2 beendet. Kalibrieren mit ED-100 Sie können den Fiery X3eTY2 mit den ColorWise Pro Tools in Verbindung mit dem ED-100 kalibrieren. HINWEIS: Sie müssen den Kopierer stets kalibrieren, wenn Sie das ED-100 verwenden. FIERY X3ETY2 MIT ED-100 KALIBRIEREN 1 Starten Sie die Komponente Calibrator. Die Anleitung zum Starten der Komponente Calibrator finden Sie auf Seite 35. 2 Wählen Sie „EFI Densitometer ED-100“ als Messverfahren. KALIBRIERUNG 48 3 Aktivieren Sie im Bereich „Druckeinstellungen prüfen“ das gewünschte Kalibrierungsset. Wählen Sie, wenn mehrere Sets zur Auswahl stehen, das Kalibrierungsset für das Medium, das Sie am häufigsten verwenden. HINWEIS: Damit diese Kalibrierung wirksam wird, müssen Sie das Kalibrierungsset mit einem oder mehreren Ausgabeprofilen verknüpfen. Das Standardkalibrierungsset ist bereits mit dem Standardausgabeprofil verknüpft, so dass sich eine weitere Zuordnung erübrigt. 4 Klicken Sie im Bereich „Messwerteseite generieren“ auf „Drucken“. Das Dialogfenster „Druckoptionen“ wird angezeigt. 5 Wählen Sie die gewünschten Optionen und klicken Sie auf „Drucken“. Seitentyp: Sie können zwischen der Messwerteseite mit 21 Farbfeldern und der Seite mit 34 Farbfeldern (jeweils sortiert bzw. in Zufallsfolge) wählen. Sortierte Felder werden auf der Seite abgestuft nach Farbton und Sättigung gedruckt. Felder in Zufallsfolge werden auf der Seite ohne eine bestimmte Reihenfolge gedruckt, um unterschiedliche Dichten in unterschiedlichen Seitenbereichen auszugleichen. Papiergröße: Hier wird automatisch die Einstellung „LTR/A4“ für 21 Farbfelder festgelegt. Wählen Sie statt dessen die Einstellung „11x17/A3“ oder „12x18/SRA3“, wenn Sie 34 Farbfelder generieren wollen. Papierzufuhr: Wählen Sie das Fach oder Magazin, aus dem das Medium für die Messwerteseite zugeführt werden soll. Halftone-Raster: Wählen Sie, um optimale Ergebnisse zu erzielen, das Halftone-Raster, das Sie beim Drucken mithilfe dieses Kalibrierungssets verwenden werden. 6 Nehmen Sie die gedruckte Messwerteseite aus dem Kopierer. 7 Klicken Sie im Bereich „Messwerte ermitteln“ auf „Messen“. Daraufhin wird das Dialogfenster mit den Messoptionen angezeigt. KALIBRIERUNG 49 8 Wählen Sie die gewünschten Optionen und klicken Sie auf „Start“. Als Seitentyp wird automatisch der Typ der Messwerteseite angezeigt, für den Sie sich in Schritt 5 entschieden haben. Geben Sie mit den Pfeiltasten neben dem Feld „Klickvorgänge pro Farbfeld“ an, wie oft die einzelnen Farbfelder auf der Seite gemessen werden sollen. Wenn Sie sich für die Mehrfachmessung entscheiden, wird für jedes Feld der Durchschnittswert ermittelt und an den Fiery X3eTY2 gesendet. Mehrfachmessungen bringen exaktere Ergebnisse, dauern aber länger. Aktivieren Sie die Option „Akustische Rückmeldung“, wenn jede Einzelmessung durch einen Signalton bestätigt werden soll. Dabei zeigt ein einzelner Ton eine erfolgreiche Messung an, zwei Töne dagegen einen Messfehler. Bei aktivierter Mehrfachmessung ertönt das Signal nach dem letzten Messvorgang. Wählen Sie im Menü „Anschluss“ ggf. den COM-Anschluss für das ED-100. Wenn Sie auf „Starten“ klicken, wird das Fenster mit den Messwerten angezeigt. Im Bereich „Status“ werden Anleitungen zur Messung der Farbfelder eingeblendet. KALIBRIERUNG 50 9 Positionieren Sie das ED-100 über dem angegebenen Farbfeld auf der Messwerteseite. Dabei muss sich die Messöffnung zentriert über dem Feld befinden. Drücken Sie die Taste Messen, um die Messung auszulösen. HINWEIS: Legen Sie mehrere leere Blätter unter die Messwerteseite, um ein exaktes Ergebnis zu erzielen. Dadurch verhindern Sie, dass unter der Seite befindliche farbige Flächen vom Messinstrument gelesen werden und das Messergebnis verfälschen. Wenn Sie die Mehrfachmessung aktiviert haben, halten Sie die Taste Messen gedrückt, damit die erforderliche Anzahl der Messungen vorgenommen wird. Es empfiehlt sich, das ED-100 nach jeder Messung leicht zu bewegen, allerdings stets innerhalb des jeweiligen Farbfelds. Nach einer erfolgreichen Messung wird das Farbfeld im Fenster mit den Messwerten mit einem Häkchen versehen. Danach wird das nächste zu messende Feld gekennzeichnet. 10 Wiederholen Sie Schritt 9 so oft, bis alle Felder auf der Messwerteseite gemessen wurden. Beginnen Sie bei A1, und gehen Sie in Spalte A nach unten. Fahren Sie nach dem Messen aller Felder in Spalte A in gleicher Weise mit Spalte B fort, bis Sie alle Spalten gemessen haben. Wenn Sie eine bestimmte Messung wiederholen wollen, wählen Sie das gewünschte Farbfeld im Fenster „Messwerte“ aus und messen Sie das Farbfeld auf der Messwerteseite erneut mit dem ED-100. HINWEIS: Sie müssen die Messungen in der Reihenfolge vornehmen, die im Fenster „Messwerte“ und auf der Seite mit den Messwerten vorgegeben ist. 11 Klicken Sie auf „Übernehmen“, wenn alle Farbfelder erfolgreich gemessen wurden. 12 Klicken Sie im Fenster „Calibrator“ auf „Anwenden“. Die neuen Kalibrierungsmesswerte werden implementiert. 13 Klicken Sie im Fenster „Information“ auf „OK“. Damit ist die Kalibrierung des Fiery X3eTY2 beendet. KALIBRIERUNG 51 Kalibrieren mit ES-1000 Sie können den Fiery X3eTY2 mit den ColorWise Pro Tools in Verbindung mit dem Spektralfotometer ES-1000 kalibrieren. HINWEIS: Sie müssen das ES-1000 einrichten und kalibrieren, bevor Sie den Fiery X3eTY2 mithilfe der ColorWise Pro Tools kalibrieren. Die Anleitung finden Sie in der Dokumentation zu Ihrem Messinstrument. FIERY X3ETY2 MIT ES-1000 KALIBRIEREN 1 Starten Sie die Komponente Calibrator. Die Anleitung dazu finden Sie auf Seite 35. 2 Wählen Sie „EFI Spectrometer ES-1000“ als Messverfahren. 3 Aktivieren Sie im Bereich „Druckeinstellungen prüfen“ das gewünschte Kalibrierungsset. Wählen Sie, wenn mehrere Sets zur Auswahl stehen, das Kalibrierungsset für das Medium, das Sie am häufigsten verwenden. HINWEIS: Damit diese Kalibrierung wirksam wird, müssen Sie das Kalibrierungsset mit einem oder mehreren Ausgabeprofilen verknüpfen. Das Standardkalibrierungsset ist bereits dem Standardausgabeprofil zugeordnet. Für das Standardkalibrierungsset brauchen Sie keine erneute Zuordnung vornehmen. 4 Klicken Sie im Bereich „Messwerteseite generieren“ auf „Drucken“. Das Dialogfenster „Druckoptionen“ wird angezeigt. 5 Wählen Sie die gewünschten Optionen und klicken Sie auf „Drucken“. KALIBRIERUNG 52 Seitentyp: Wählen Sie zwischen der Messwerteseite mit 21 oder 34 Farbfeldern (jeweils sortiert oder in Zufallsfolge). Sortierte Felder werden auf der Seite abgestuft nach Farbton und Sättigung gedruckt. Felder in Zufallsfolge werden auf der Seite ohne eine bestimmte Reihenfolge gedruckt, um unterschiedliche Dichten in unterschiedlichen Seitenbereichen auszugleichen. Papiergröße: Hier wird automatisch die Einstellung „LTR/A4“ für 21 Farbfelder festgelegt. Wählen Sie die Einstellung „11x17/A3“ oder „12x18/SRA3“, wenn Sie 34 Farbfelder generieren wollen. Papierzufuhr: Hier wird automatisch die Einstellung „Automatisch auswählen“ eingestellt. Halftone-Raster: Wählen Sie, um optimale Ergebnisse zu erzielen, das Halftone-Raster, das Sie beim Drucken mithilfe dieses Kalibrierungssets verwenden werden. 6 Nehmen Sie die gedruckte Messwerteseite aus dem Kopierer. 7 Klicken Sie im Bereich „Messwerte ermitteln“ auf „Messen“. Daraufhin wird das Dialogfenster mit den Messoptionen angezeigt. Als Seitentyp wird automatisch der Typ angezeigt, für den Sie sich in Schritt 5 entschieden haben. 8 Überprüfen Sie die Einstellungen und klicken Sie auf „Messen“. Das Dialogfenster „Information“ wird angezeigt. 9 Legen Sie das ES-1000 in der Basisstation ab. Wenn Sie das Spektralfotometer ES-1000 in der Basisstation ablegen, wird eine Weißpunktkalibrierung durchgeführt, die graduelle Abweichungen des Messinstruments kompensiert. Stellen Sie sicher, dass die Messöffnung des Instruments exakt auf dem weißen Keramikfeld der Basisstation aufliegt. Wird das Spektralfotometer nicht richtig in die Basisstation eingesetzt, werden keine präzisen Messwerte generiert. KALIBRIERUNG 53 10 Klicken Sie auf „OK“. Daraufhin wird das Dialogfenster „Messwerte“ angezeigt. Im Bereich „Status“ werden Anleitungen zur Messung der Farbstreifen und Farbfelder eingeblendet. 11 Legen Sie mehrere leere weiße Blätter unter die Messwerteseite, um ein exakteres Messergebnis zu erzielen. Die zusätzlichen Blätter verhindern, dass Farbflächen unter der Messwerteseite vom Messinstrument gelesen werden und das Messergebnis verfälschen. 12 Richten Sie die Messwerteseite so aus, dass die Streifen horizontal verlaufen und das Scannen von links nach rechts erfolgt (die Pfeile am Beginn jedes Streifen geben die Scanrichtung an). 13 Halten Sie das ES-1000 so, dass sich seine Längsseite im rechten Winkel zur Scanrichtung befindet und richten Sie die Messöffnung mit dem weißen Bereich am Beginn der jeweiligen Farbe aus. 14 Halten Sie die Messtaste gedrückt, bis Sie einen Signalton hören, oder warten Sie, bis die Hintergrundfarbe des Dialogfensters von Grün nach Weiß wechselt. HINWEIS: Damit auf einem Windows-Computer der Signalton ausgegeben werden kann, muss der Computer mit einer Soundkarte und mit Lautsprechern ausgerüstet sein. Unter Umständen müssen Sie an Ihrem Computer die Lautstärke erhöhen, um den Signalton hören zu können. 15 Ziehen Sie, wenn Sie den Signalton hören bzw. die Hintergrundfarbe des Dialogfensters wechselt, das ES-1000 langsam und gleichmäßig über den Farbstreifen. Es dauert etwa fünf Sekunden, bis der gesamte Streifen gemessen wurde. 16 Lassen Sie die Messtaste erst los, nachdem alle Farbfelder des aktuellen Farbstreifens gemessen wurden und Sie den weißen Bereich am Ende des Farbstreifens erreicht haben. Nachdem ein Farbstreifen erfolgreich gemessen wurde, wechselt die Hintergrundfarbe des Dialogfensters wieder nach Grün und das Fadenkreuz markiert die nächste Farbe. Konnte der Farbstreifen nicht erfolgreich gemessen werden, wechselt die Hintergrundfarbe des Dialogfensters nach Rot und Sie werden in einer Meldung aufgefordert, die Messung zu wiederholen. KALIBRIERUNG 54 17 Wiederholen Sie die Schritte 13 bis 16, bis alle Farbstreifen gemessen wurden. HINWEIS: Sie müssen die Messungen in der Reihenfolge vornehmen, die im Bereich „Status“ vorgegeben wird. 18 Klicken Sie auf „Übernehmen“, wenn alle Farbfelder erfolgreich gemessen wurden. 19 Klicken Sie im Fenster „Calibrator“ auf „Anwenden“. Die neuen Kalibrierungsmesswerte werden angewendet. 20 Klicken Sie im Fenster „Information“ auf „OK“. Damit ist die Kalibrierung des Fiery X3eTY2 beendet. Kalibrieren über Kopiererdisplay Der Fiery X3eTY2 kann mit der Funktion ColorCal über das Kopiererdisplay kalibriert werden. Für diese Art der Kalibrierung ist die Komponente Calibrator der ColorWise Pro Tools nicht erforderlich. Kalibrieren mit ColorCal Falls das Administratorkennwort eingerichtet wurde, müssen Sie sich damit für die Kalibrierung über das Kopiererdisplay autorisieren. Weitere Hinweise zum Kopiererdisplay finden Sie im Dokument Konfiguration und Setup. COLORCAL ÜBER KOPIERERDISPLAY AUSFÜHREN 1 Drücken Sie auf „Controller“, wenn sich der Kopierer im Status „Bereit“ befindet, um auf die Schnittstelle des Fiery X3eTY2 zuzugreifen. 2 Wählen Sie „Kalibrierung“. 3 Wählen Sie das gewünschte Kalibrierungsset als Druckmodus. 4 Wählen Sie das Fach oder Magazin, aus dem das Medium für die Messwerteseite zugeführt werden soll. Vergewissern Sie sich, dass das in das Fach/Magazin eingelegte Papier die Größe aufweist, die auf dem Display angezeigt wird. Die Messwerteseite enthält standardisierte Farbfelder, die mithilfe des in den Kopierer integrierten Scanners gemessen werden; danach werden die gemessenen Werte mit den Sollfarbwerten verglichen. HINWEIS: Wenn Sie das Medium für die Messwerteseite über die Stapelanlage zuführen wollen, müssen Sie das entsprechende Medium zuvor einlegen. 5 Drücken Sie auf „Scanner anpassen“ und danach auf „Drucken“, wenn Sie zunächst den Scanner kalibrieren wollen. Fahren Sie ansonsten mit Schritt 9 fort. Die Messwerteseite für die Scannerkalibrierung wird gedruckt. Nachdem diese Seite gedruckt wurde, wird auf dem Display wieder die Schnittstelle der Druckmaschine angezeigt. KALIBRIERUNG 55 6 Nehmen Sie die gedruckte Messwerteseite für die Scannerkalibrierung aus dem Kopierer; drücken Sie danach auf „Controller“, um die Scannerkalibrierung fortzusetzen. 7 Legen Sie die Messwerteseite für die Scannerkalibrierung entsprechend der Anleitung auf der Glasfläche des Kopierers; drücken Sie danach auf „Scannen“. 8 Drücken Sie auf „OK“, wenn die Meldung erscheint, dass die Scanneranpassung beendet wurde. 9 Drücken Sie auf „Drucken“. Die Messwerteseite für die Farbkalibrierung wird gedruckt. Nachdem diese Seite gedruckt wurde, wird auf dem Display wieder die Schnittstelle der Druckmaschine angezeigt. 10 Nehmen Sie die gedruckte Messwerteseite für die Farbkalibrierung aus dem Kopierer; drücken Sie danach auf „Controller“, um die Kalibrierung fortzusetzen. 11 Legen Sie, wenn Sie dazu aufgefordert werden, den Kodak Graustufenstreifen mit der bedruckten Seite nach unten auf das Vorlagenglas des Kopierers ab. Zentrieren Sie den Streifen am oberen Rand des Vorlagenglases zwischen den entsprechenden Papiergrößenangaben am Kopierer. 12 Legen Sie die Messwerteseite mit dem Druckbild nach unten über den Graustufenstreifen. Achten Sie darauf, dass der Graustufenstreifen keine Farbfelder auf der Messwerteseite verdeckt. Schließen Sie die Klappe am Vorlagenglas; achten Sie darauf, dass der Graustufenstreifen und die Messwerteseite nicht verrutschen. 13 Drücken Sie auf dem Kopiererdisplay auf „Scannen“. 14 Warten Sie, bis auf dem Display die Meldung erscheint, dass die Kalibrierung beendet wurde. 15 Drücken Sie auf „Vergleichen“, um eine Seite mit einem Vergleich der aktuellen Kalibrierung mit der Standardkalibrierung zu drucken. Anhand dieser Vergleichsseite können Sie das Resultat der Kalibrierung prüfen. 16 Drücken Sie auf „Anwenden“, um die Messwerte zu speichern und gegebenenfalls im Kalibrierungsset vorhandene Kalibrierungsdaten zu überschreiben. 1 Legen Sie den Graustufenstreifen mit dem Druckbild nach unten ab 2 Legen Sie die Messwerteseite mit dem Druckbild nach unten über den Graustufenstreifen 1 2 KALIBRIERUNG 56 Zweck der Kalibrierung In den folgenden Abschnitten werden wichtige Grundlagen der Kalibrierung behandelt. Übersicht Bei der Kalibrierung werden Kurven erstellt, die die Unterschiede zwischen den tatsächlichen Tonerdichten (Messwerten) und dem laut Ausgabeprofil erwarteten Ergebnis oder Verhalten ausgleichen. • Die Messwerte reflektieren das tatsächliche Farbverhalten des Kopierermodells. • Kalibrierungssets sind Gruppen oder Sätze von Messwerten, die die Einstellungen für Medium für die Komponente Calibrator kombinieren. • Jedes Ausgabeprofil enthält Kalibrierungssollwerte, die das erwartete Verhalten des Kopierermodells beschreiben. Nachdem Sie den Fiery X3eTY2 kalibriert haben, wird ein Kalibrierungsset gespeichert. Dieses Kalibrierungsset wird verwendet, wenn Sie es mit einem Ausgabeprofil verknüpfen. Jedem Ausgabeprofil ist ein Kalibrierungsset zugeordnet. Wenn Sie kein Ausgabeprofil wählen, wird das Set verwendet, das mit dem Standardausgabeprofil verknüpft ist. Wenn Sie die Kalibrierungseinstellungen nach der Verarbeitung eines Druckauftrags ändern, müssen Sie den Auftrag nicht noch einmal verarbeiten. Die neuen Kalibrierungseinstellungen wirken sich auf den Auftrag aus, ohne dass dieser nochmals verarbeitet werden muss. HINWEIS: Das Ändern der Kalibrierung hat Auswirkungen auf alle Aufträge aller Anwender; zur Farbkalibrierung sollte daher nur eine begrenzte Anzahl von Personen berechtigt werden. Im Setup-Programm des Fiery X3eTY2 können Sie das Administratorkennwort festlegen, um den Zugriff auf die Kalibrierungsfunktion zu steuern (siehe Konfiguration und Setup). Funktionsweise der Kalibrierung Das Standardkalibrierungsset eignet sich für die meisten Anwendungszwecke. Der Fiery X3eTY2 bietet aber die Möglichkeit, ein Set zu wählen, mit dem die Kalibrierung spezifisch angepasst wird. Durch Kalibrieren können Sie: • die Farbreproduktion des Fiery X3eTY2 optimieren • die Farbkonsistenz über längere Zeiträume sichern • konsistente Ausgaben auf verschiedenen Fiery X3eTY2 Servern sicherstellen • die Reproduktion von Spot- oder Sonderfarben (z.B. PANTONE-Farben und benannte Farben anderer Farbsysteme) entscheidend verbessern • den Fiery X3eTY2 für die Verwendung von ColorWise Farbwiedergabearten (CRDs), CMYK-Simulationen und ICC-Profilen optimieren KALIBRIERUNG 57 Das Erzielen zufrieden stellender Druckergebnisse mit dem Fiery X3eTY2 hängt von mehreren Faktoren ab. Zu den wichtigsten zählen das Bestimmen und Einhalten der optimalen Tonerdichten. Die Dichte ist das Maß dafür, wie viel Licht eine Oberfläche absorbiert. Durch das sorgsame Regulieren der Tonerdichten können Sie konsistente Farbausgaben sicherstellen. Doch selbst bei kalibrierten Systemen werden die Tonerdichten durch die Einstellungen des Kopierermodells sowie durch die Luftfeuchtigkeit und die Umgebungstemperatur beeinflusst. Nach einer gewissen Zeit kann es auch zu Schwankungen in der Dichte kommen. Auch ungleichmäßige Tonerdichten auf dem Papier können die Kalibrierungsergebnisse beeinflussen. Außerdem ist zu beobachten, dass die Dichte, die Gradation und die Farbreproduktion mit der Zeit von den Idealwerten abweichen. Diese Veränderungen können Sie durch regelmäßiges Kalibrieren kompensieren. Die Kalibrierung basiert auf Kalibrierungskurven, die auf dem Fiery X3eTY2 erstellt werden und die Unterschiede zwischen den tatsächlichen (gemessenen) Dichten und den gewünschten Solldichten ausgleichen. Kalibrierungskurven sind grafische Pendants zu Transferfunktionen, die ihrerseits die Änderungen, die an den Originaldaten vorgenommen werden, mit mathematischen Mitteln beschreiben. Transferfunktionen werden häufig als Eingangs- oder Ausgangskurven dargestellt. Der Fiery X3eTY2 generiert Kalibrierungskurven, nachdem für jede der vier Tonerfarben die Mess- mit den endgültigen Sollwerten verglichen wurden. Die Sollwerte basieren auf dem gewählten Ausgabeprofil. Messwerte Messwertedateien enthalten numerische Werte, die die mit dem Kopierer erzielte Tonerdichte prozentual für jede der vier Farben Cyan, Magenta, Gelb und Schwarz angeben. Um eine Messwertedatei zu erstellen, müssen Sie eine Messwerteseite mit standardisierten Farbfeldern drucken. Die Farbfelder dieser Messwerteseite werden danach mit einem Farbmessinstrument, das an einen Computer im Netzwerk angeschlossen ist, oder (falls vorhanden) mit der Scannereinheit des Ausgabegeräts gemessen. Die neuen Messwerte werden automatisch auf den Fiery X3eTY2 geladen. Ausgabeprofile und Kalibrierungssets Ausgabeprofile und Kalibrierungssets definieren die Ergebniswerte, die durch die Kalibrierung erzielt werden sollen. Für den Fiery X3eTY2 sind mindestens ein Ausgabeprofil und ein Kalibrierungsset verfügbar. Wenn Sie den Fiery X3eTY2 kalibrieren, können Sie das Set wählen, das einem für Ihre Druckumgebung typischen Auftrag in optimaler Weise entspricht. Dieses Kalibrierungsset kann mit einem oder mehreren Ausgabeprofilen verknüpft werden. Weitere Informationen über Ausgabeprofile finden Sie auf Seite 93. KALIBRIERUNG 58 Zeitplanung für die Kalibrierung Sie sollten den Fiery X3eTY2 abhängig vom Druckvolumen, jedoch mindestens einmal pro Tag kalibrieren. Wenn die Konsistenz der Farben absolut vorrangig ist oder sich der Kopierer in einer Umgebung mit hohen Schwankungen bei der Temperatur und der Luftfeuchtigkeit befindet, sollten Sie die Kalibrierung alle paar Stunden vornehmen. Um dauerhaft eine optimale Leistung sicherzustellen, sollten Sie die Kalibrierung wiederholen, sobald Sie sichtbare Qualitätseinbußen in der Farbausgabe bemerken oder nicht die erwarteten Ergebnisse erzielen. Wenn Sie einen Auftrag auf zwei oder mehr Stapel aufteilen müssen, ist es unerlässlich, die Kalibrierung vor dem Drucken der einzelnen Stapel zu wiederholen. Auch nach Wartungsarbeiten am Kopierer sollten Sie den Fiery X3eTY2 neu kalibrieren. Die Ausgabe des Kopierermodells kann direkt nach der Wartung aber instabil sein. Daher sollten Sie vor der Kalibrierung etwa 50 Seiten drucken. HINWEIS: Da die Farbausgabe des Kopierermodells empfindlich auf Veränderungen der Temperatur oder der Luftfeuchtigkeit reagiert, sollten Sie den Kopierer nicht direkt vor oder neben einem Fenster, einem Heizkörper oder einer Klimaanlage aufstellen und keinem direkten Sonnenlicht aussetzen. Auch Papier reagiert sehr empfindlich auf Änderungen der Umgebungsbedingungen. Sie sollten Papier daher in einem kühlen Raum mit stabiler Luftfeuchtigkeit und Temperatur aufbewahren und die Verpackung erst unmittelbar vor Gebrauch öffnen. Drucken Sie die folgenden Farbseiten zum Überwachen der Druckqualität: • Farbtabellen (über Anwendung Command WorkStation oder Kopiererdisplay) • Farbreferenzseiten auf der DVD mit der Anwendersoftware (siehe Seiten 12 und 17) Alle diese Seiten enthalten Farbkeile für Cyan, Magenta, Gelb und Schwarz, von der gesättigten Farbe bis hin zu einem sehr schwachen Farbton. Fotos mit Hautfarben eignen sich ebenfalls sehr gut als Referenz. Speichern Sie die gedruckten Seiten und vergleichen Sie die Seiten in regelmäßigen Abständen. Kalibrieren Sie den Fiery X3eTY2, sobald Sie Veränderungen in der Druckausgabe bemerken. Beachten Sie beim Prüfen der Testseite, dass alle Farbfelder erkennbar sein müssen, auch wenn sie im Bereich zwischen 2% und 5% u. U. sehr blass erscheinen. Die Felder sollten innerhalb einer Farbe beim Aufhellen von 100% bis 0% einen gleichmäßigen Farbverlauf aufweisen. Wenn bei den stark gesättigten Farbfeldern (100% Cyan, Magenta, Gelb bzw. Schwarz) die Sättigung mit der Zeit nachlässt, zeigen Sie die gedruckten Seiten dem Servicetechniker, der für den Kopierer zuständig ist. Er kann Ihnen sagen, ob sich durch eine Justierung des Kopierermodells die Ausgabequalität verbessern lässt. KALIBRIERUNG 59 Ermitteln des Kalibrierungsstatus Sie können wie nachfolgend beschrieben jederzeit prüfen, ob der Fiery X3eTY2 kalibriert ist, welches Kalibrierungsset und welches Ausgabeprofil dafür verwendet wurden und wann der Kopierer zuletzt kalibriert wurde: • Drucken Sie über das Kopiererdisplay oder die Anwendung Command WorkStation eine Konfigurations- oder Testseite. • Wählen Sie in der Komponente Calibrator ein Kalibrierungsset. Der Zeitpunkt der letzten Kalibrierung und der Name des Anwenders, der sie durchgeführt hat, werden angezeigt. SPOT-ON 60 SPOT-ON Mit der Druckoption „Spot-Farbabstimmung“ wird die Abstimmung von Spot-Farben mit den jeweils besten CMYK-Äquivalenten automatisch vorgenommen; diese Abstimmung ist die Voraussetzung dafür, dass Spot-Farben mit den CMYK-Tonern des Kopierers simuliert werden können. Es kann aber erforderlich werden, die standardmäßigen CMYK-Äquivalente anzupassen, um für bestimmte Druckbedingungen eine noch präzisere Übereinstimmung zu erzielen. Diese Modifikation der Spot-Farben können Sie mit Spot-On vornehmen. Neben der Verwaltung ‚benannter’ Farben bietet Ihnen die Komponente Spot-On die Möglichkeit, eine Liste sogenannter ‚Ersatzfarben’ zu erstellen. Auf dieser Basis können Farben, die in einem Dokument als RGB- oder CMYK-Werte spezifiziert werden, durch andere Farben ersetzt werden, deren CYMK-Farbwerte aus einer Spot-On Farbbibliothek abgerufen werden. Diese Funktion ermöglicht die exakte Farbsteuerung und das individuelle Überschreiben einzelner RBG- und CMYK-Farben. Spot-On Spot-On bietet Ihnen die Möglichkeit, Listen von Spot-Farben und deren CMYK-Äquivalente anzupassen und zu verwalten. Die Abgleichungslisten von Spot-Farben und CMYK-Werten werden als „Spot-Farbbibliotheken“ bezeichnet. Mit Spot-On können Sie für jedes Ausgabeprofil auf dem Fiery X3eTY2 mehrere Spot-Farbbibliotheken pflegen und verwalten. HINWEIS: Wenn Sie die Spot-On Funktionen für benannte Farben nutzen wollen, müssen Sie die Druckoption „Spot-Farbabstimmung“ aktivieren. Weitere Informationen über diese Option finden Sie auf Seite 97. HINWEIS: Spot-Farben, die anhand ihrer Namen oder Benennung identifiziert werden, werden mit den für sie definierten CMYK-Werten gedruckt. Änderungen, die Sie mit der Komponente Color Editor (dem Farbeditor) an einem Ausgabeprofil vornehmen, haben keine Auswirkungen darauf, wie Spot-Farben gedruckt werden. Für bestimmte Funktionen von Spot-On wird vorausgesetzt, dass ein Auftrag mit der richtigen Farbgebung auf dem Monitor angezeigt wird. Damit die Darstellung der richtigen Farben auf dem Monitor sichergestellt ist, müssen Sie den Monitor gemäß den Anleitungen des Monitorherstellers einrichten und das richtige Monitorprofil für Ihren Monitor angeben. Legen Sie für die Monitoranzeige die folgenden Einstellungen fest: • Am Monitor: Helligkeit, Kontrast und Temperatur • Über die Systemsteuerung des Betriebssystems: Auflösung, Frequenz und Anzahl der Farben SPOT-ON 61 Weitere Informationen über das Einrichten des Monitors und des Monitorprofils finden Sie in der Begleitdokumentation zu Ihrem Monitor. Starten von Spot-On Für die Arbeit mit Spot-On müssen Sie das Ausgabeprofil angeben, das mit der Spot- Farbbibliothek verknüpft ist, die Sie bearbeiten wollen. Wenn Sie z.B. das Ausgabeprofil „X“ wählen und in Spot-On den Wert „30%M“ für die Spot-Farbe „PANTONE 123“ in „50%M“ ändern, erfolgt die Ausgabe mit „50%M“, wenn Sie den Auftrag mithilfe des Ausgabeprofils „X“ drucken. Wenn Sie ihn dagegen mit dem Ausgabeprofil „Y“ drucken, erfolgt die Ausgabe mit dem Originalwert „30%M“. Wenn Sie das Ausgabeprofil „X“ wählen und eine eigene Farbe mit der Benennung „Mein Purpur“ erstellen und als „80C 40M“ definieren, berechnet ColorWise die Lab-Werte automatisch mithilfe des Ausgabeprofils „X“ und erstellt neue CMYK-Werte für die Verwendung zusammen mit dem Ausgabeprofil „Y“. HINWEIS: Es kann immer nur ein (1) Anwender über Spot-On mit dem Fiery X3eTY2 verbunden sein. SPOT-ON STARTEN 1 Starten Sie die ColorWise Pro Tools und stellen Sie die Verbindung zum Fiery X3eTY2 her. 2 Klicken Sie auf „Spot-On“. Daraufhin wird das Dialogfenster „Ausgabeprofil wählen“ angezeigt. 3 Wählen Sie ein Ausgabeprofil und klicken Sie auf „OK“. 1 Aktuelles Ausgabeprofil 2 Für Verknüpfung verfügbare Ausgabeprofile 1 2 SPOT-ON 62 Das Hauptfenster der Komponente Spot-On wird angezeigt. Die CMYK-Werte, die in diesem Fenster angezeigt werden, werden bezogen auf das gewählte Profil berechnet. HINWEIS: Wenn Sie einen Auftrag drucken, müssen Sie dasselbe Ausgabeprofil wählen, für das Sie sich im Dialogfenster „Ausgabeprofil wählen“ entschieden haben. Wenn Sie beim Drucken ein anderes Ausgabeprofil wählen, werden die Farbanpassungen, die Sie in Spot-On vorgenommen haben, nicht angewendet. Hauptfenster von Spot-On Das Hauptfenster der Komponente Spot-On enthält eine Liste von Farbgruppen, die die auf dem Fiery X3eTY2 vorhandenen Spot-Farbbibliotheken darstellen. Im oberen Fensterbereich werden Symbole für die Arbeit mit Farben eingeblendet. Standardmäßig befinden sich auf dem Fiery X3eTY2 neben einer Systembibliothek mehrere PANTONE-Bibliotheken. Diese werkseitigen Standardbibliotheken sind mit dem Symbol für Standardgruppen ( ) gekennzeichnet. Sie können im Spot-On Hauptfenster eigene Farbgruppen und Farben hinzufügen (siehe Seite 64). Hinzugefügte Gruppen sind mit dem Symbol für eigene Gruppen ( ) gekennzeichnet. Sie können Standardgruppen ebenso wie eigene Gruppen öffnen und die darin enthaltenen Farben anzeigen. 1 Ausgabeprofil 2 Speichern 3 Hochladen 4 Herunterladen 5 Ausschneiden 6 Kopieren 7 Einfügen 8 Alles schließen 9 Drucken 10 Nach oben 11 Nach unten 12 Eigene Farbgruppe 13 Standardfarbgruppe 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 SPOT-ON 63 FARBGRUPPE ÖFFNEN UND SCHLIESSEN 1 Klicken Sie zum Öffnen einer Farbgruppe auf das Symbol links vom Gruppennamen. Beim Öffnen einer Gruppe werden alle darin enthaltenen Farben angezeigt; gleichzeitig ändert sich die Gestalt des Gruppensymbols. 2 Klicken Sie zum Schließen einer Farbgruppe auf das Symbol links vom Gruppennamen. 3 Wählen Sie „Alles schließen“ im Menü „Bearbeiten“, um alle Farbgruppen in der Liste zu schließen. Arbeiten mit vorhandenen Farben Mit Spot-On können Sie Farbgruppen, die auf dem Fiery X3eTY2 vorhanden sind, anzeigen und verwalten und nach einer bestimmten Farbe in der Spot-On Liste suchen. Die Farbgruppen im Spot-On Hauptfenster sind nach Priorität sortiert. Die Farbgruppen mit der höchsten Priorität stehen am Anfang der Liste. Wenn z.B. zwei Farben in zwei verschiedenen Farbgruppen denselben Namen haben, verwendet der Fiery X3eTY2 die Farbe aus der weiter oben stehenden Gruppe und lässt die andere Farbe unbeachtet. Diese Art, Farbprioritäten zu verwalten, macht es möglich, für eine bestimmte Spot-Farbe mehrere CMYK-Äquivalente zu speichern. PRIORITÄTEN VON FARBEN NEU ORDNEN 1 Aktivieren Sie eine Farbgruppe, wenn Sie die Priorität der ganzen Gruppe neu festlegen wollen. Aktivieren Sie eine einzelne Farbe, wenn Sie nur deren Priorität neu festlegen wollen. Die einzelnen Spot-Farben werden durch farbige Kreise symbolisiert. 2 Klicken Sie auf der Symbolleiste auf das Symbol „Nach oben“ bzw. „Nach unten“, um Ihre Auswahl innerhalb der Liste zu verschieben. SPOT-ON 64 3 Klicken Sie auf der Symbolleiste auf das Symbol „Ausschneiden“ bzw. „Kopieren“, wenn Sie Ihre Auswahl an einer anderen Position innerhalb der Liste einfügen wollen. HINWEIS: Die Option „Ausschneiden“ wird nur für eigene Farben angeboten. 4 Markieren Sie in der Liste die Position, an der Sie die ausgeschnittene bzw. kopierte Auswahl einfügen wollen, und klicken Sie auf der Symbolleiste auf das Symbol „Einfügen“. Wenn Sie eine PANTONE Standardfarbe oder Standardgruppe einfügen, erscheint eine Warnmeldung mit der Aufforderung, wegen der unterschiedlichen Präfixe und Suffixe für PANTONE Farben und Farbgruppen Ihre Auswahl umzubenennen. Wählen Sie mithilfe der Menüs das gewünschte Präfix und Suffix für den neuen Namen und klicken Sie auf „OK“. Die eingefügte Auswahl wird mit dem angegebenen Namen zu einer neuen eigenen Farbe bzw. Farbgruppe. BESTIMMTE FARBE SUCHEN 1 Wählen Sie „Suchen“ im Menü „Bearbeiten“. Das Dialogfenster „Suchen“ wird angezeigt. 2 Geben Sie den Namen der gesuchten Farbe ein und klicken Sie auf „OK“. Spot-On durchsucht die Farbliste von oben nach unten nach der gesuchten Farbe. Wird die Farbe gefunden, wird sie in der Farbliste hervorgehoben. 3 Wenn Sie weitere Farben unter Verwendung derselben Kriterien suchen wollen, können Sie „Weitersuchen“ im Menü „Bearbeiten“ wählen. Erstellen eigener Farben Die Farbliste von Spot-On umfasst eine Reihe von Standardfarbgruppen. Sie können diese Liste durch eigene Spot-Farben und eigene Farbgruppen erweitern. SPOT-ON 65 NEUE FARBE ODER NEUE FARBGRUPPE HINZUFÜGEN 1 Markieren Sie in der Farbliste die Position, an der die neue Farbe bzw. die neue Farbgruppe eingefügt werden soll. 2 Wählen Sie „Neue Gruppe“ bzw. „Neue Farbe“ im Menü „Bearbeiten“, um eine neue Farbgruppe bzw. eine neue Farbe einzufügen. Daraufhin wird ein Eintrag für die neue Farbe bzw. Farbgruppe mit der Bezeichnung „Ohne Titel“ angezeigt. EIGENE FARBE ODER FARBGRUPPE UMBENENNEN 1 Markieren Sie die einzelne Farbe bzw. die Farbgruppe, die Sie umbenennen wollen. 2 Doppelklicken Sie auf den Namen der Farbe bzw. Farbgruppe. 3 Geben Sie den neuen Namen genau in der Schreibweise ein, wie er im Druckauftrag enthalten ist. Beachten Sie Leerzeichen sowie Groß- und Kleinschreibung. Dieser neue Name wird von der Quellanwendung (z.B. Adobe Illustrator oder QuarkXPress) auf Ihren PostScript-Auftrag angewendet. HINWEIS: Standardfarben oder -farbgruppen wie PANTONE können nicht umbenannt werden. Herunterladen eigener Farbgruppen Sie können eigene Farbgruppen von Ihrem Computer auf den Fiery X3eTY2 herunterladen. Heruntergeladene Gruppen werden der Spot-On Farbliste als eigene Gruppen hinzugefügt und auf dem Fiery X3eTY2 sofort für die Verwendung aktiviert. EIGENE FARBGRUPPEN HERUNTERLADEN 1 Markieren Sie in der Farbliste die Position, an der die Gruppe eingefügt werden soll. 2 Wählen Sie „Herunterladen“ im Menü „Datei“. Das Dialogfenster „Datei wählen“ wird angezeigt. SPOT-ON 66 HINWEIS: Für das Herunterladen wird das Dateiformat „icc/icm-Dateien“ unterstützt; bei Dateien dieses Formats handelt es sich um benannte ICC-Farbprofile. 3 Markieren Sie die gewünschte Farbgruppe und klicken Sie auf „Öffnen“. Die heruntergeladene Gruppe wird an der angegebenen Position in die Spot-On Farbliste eingefügt. Wenn Sie keine Position angeben, wird die Gruppe am Anfang der Farbliste eingefügt. Wenn eine heruntergeladene Gruppe denselben Namen hat wie eine bereits in der Farbliste vorhandene Gruppe, werden Sie aufgefordert, die heruntergeladene Gruppe umzubenennen. Hochladen eigener Farbgruppen Sie können eigene Farbgruppen vom Fiery X3eTY2 als ICC-Dateien auf Ihren Computer laden. Diese Funktion ermöglicht Ihnen die gemeinsame Verwendung einer Gruppe durch die Erstellung einer lokalen Kopie, die Sie ihrerseits auf einen anderen Fiery X3eTY2 herunterladen können. Damit Sie eine Farbgruppe auf Ihren Computer hochladen können, müssen Sie sie auf dem Fiery X3eTY2 speichern. Damit Sie eine werkseitige Standardgruppe hochladen können, müssen Sie sie kopieren und als neue eigene Gruppe in die Farbliste einfügen. EIGENE FARBGRUPPEN HOCHLADEN 1 Aktivieren Sie den Namen der Farbgruppe, die Sie hochladen wollen. 2 Wählen Sie „Hochladen“ im Menü „Datei“. Das Dialogfenster „Speichern unter“ angezeigt. 3 Navigieren Sie zu dem Ordner, in dem Sie die Datei speichern wollen, geben Sie einen Dateinamen ein und klicken Sie auf „Speichern“. SPOT-ON 67 Bearbeiten von Farbwerten Wenn eine vorhandene Spot-Farbe nicht in der erwarteten Weise gedruckt wird, können Sie durch Ändern der Farbwerte das gewünschte Ergebnis erzielen. Sie können Farbwerte bearbeiten, indem Sie die gewünschten CMYK-Werte direkt im Hauptfenster von Spot-On oder im Dialogfenster „Farbe für Feld im Zentrum festlegen“ eingeben oder indem Sie die Suchfunktion von Spot-On verwenden. Gehen Sie in der nachfolgend beschriebenen Weise, wenn Sie eine benannte Farbe bearbeiten wollen, indem Sie die gewünschten CMYK-Werte eingeben. Informationen über die sukzessive Annäherung an eine Zielfarbe mithilfe der Suchfunktion von Spot-On finden Sie auf Seite 68. FARBE IM HAUPTFENSTER VON SPOT-ON BEARBEITEN 1 Markieren Sie die Farbe, die Sie bearbeiten wollen. 2 Doppelklicken Sie auf den Wert in der Spalte „C“, „M“, „Y“ und/oder „K“ und geben Sie den gewünschten Wert für den jeweiligen Farbkanal ein. Die bearbeitete Farbe wird in der Farbliste angezeigt. HINWEIS: Die bearbeitete Farbe wird erst gespeichert, wenn Sie „Speichern“ im Menü „Datei“ wählen. FARBE IM FENSTER „FARBE FÜR FELD IM ZENTRUM FESTLEGEN“ BEARBEITEN 1 Markieren Sie die Farbe, die Sie bearbeiten wollen. 2 Doppelklicken Sie auf das Symbol der Farbe. Das Dialogfenster „Spot-On Farbe suchen“ wird angezeigt; die gewählte Farbe erscheint im Farbfeld im Zentrum. 3 Klicken Sie auf das mittlere Farbfeld. SPOT-ON 68 Das Dialogfenster „Farbe für Feld im Zentrum festlegen“ wird angezeigt. 4 Geben Sie an, ob Sie die CMYK-Werte als Prozentwerte oder als Gerätecodes eingeben wollen. Bei der Option „Prozentwerte“ können Sie Farbwerte von 0% bis 100% eingeben (in Abstufungen von 0,5%). Werte mit abweichenden Abstufungen werden auf den nächsten vollen bzw. halben Prozentpunkt gerundet. Bei der Option „Gerätecodes“ können Sie Farbwerte im Bereich von „0“ bis „255“ eingeben. Diese Option berücksichtigt in vollem Umfang die auf dem Fiery X3eTY2 reproduzierbaren Farbwerte und ermöglicht daher eine feinere Farbabstufung als die Prozentwerte. 5 Geben Sie die Werte für „C“, „M“, „Y“ und „K“ Ihrer spezifischen Farbe in die Felder ein. Mit der Tabulatortaste können Sie den Cursor von Feld zu Feld bewegen. Wenn Sie einen neuen Wert eingeben, wird die Vorschau des Farbfelds aktualisiert und der Unterschied zwischen der alten und der neuen Farbe dargestellt. 6 Klicken Sie auf „OK“. Die neue Farbe wird im Fenster „Spot-On Farbe suchen“ im mittleren Feld angezeigt. 7 Klicken Sie auf „OK“. Die bearbeitete Farbe wird nun in der Farbliste des Spot-On Hauptfensters angezeigt. Mit der in der nächsten Anleitung beschriebenen Suchfunktion von Spot-On können Sie eine Farbe sukzessive eingrenzen. Wählen Sie dazu anfangs eine ähnliche Farbe und ändern Sie nach und nach die Werte für Farbton, Sättigung und Helligkeit, bis die Übereinstimmung erzielt ist. FARBE MIT SPOT-ON SUCHFUNKTION SUKZESSIVE EINGRENZEN 1 Markieren Sie die Farbe, die Sie bearbeiten wollen. 2 Doppelklicken Sie auf das Symbol der Farbe. SPOT-ON 69 Das Dialogfenster „Spot-On Farbe suchen“ wird angezeigt; die gewählte (aktuelle) Farbe erscheint im mittleren Farbfeld. 3 Wenn Sie das mittlere Feld mit einer benachbarten Farbe aktualisieren wollen, die Ihrem Ziel näher kommt, klicken Sie auf das entsprechende Nachbarfeld. Nachbarfelder sind Variationen des mittleren Feldes, die Sie wählen können, um Ihrer Zielfarbe näher zu kommen. Wenn Sie auf ein Nachbarfeld klicken, wird dessen Farbe in das mittlere Feld übernommen; danach werden die Nachbarfelder automatisch neu angepasst. Abhängig von der Option, für die Sie sich im nächsten Schritt entscheiden, sind diese Felder Nachbarn im Hinblick auf die Luminanz oder auf die Sättigung. HINWEIS: Wenn Sie bestimmte Farben wählen, kann es geschehen, dass ein Ausrufezeichen rechts oben im Fenster eingeblendet wird. Dieses Symbol zeigt an, dass eine oder mehrere Farben ihre jeweiligen Maximalwerte erreicht haben. 4 Gehen Sie wie folgt vor, um die Generierung der Nachbarfelder zu steuern: Wählen Sie „Luminanz“ oder „Sättigung“ im Bereich „Legende für Farbrichtungen“. Bei der Einstellung „Luminanz“ werden in den Nachbarfeldern hellere bis dunklere Schattierungen der Farbe im mittleren Feld generiert. Diese Variationen werden von links nach rechts angezeigt, wobei die Ausgangsfarbe im mittleren Feld der mittleren Farbfeldgruppe (Feld im Zentrum) verbleibt. Bei der Einstellung „Sättigung“ werden in den Nachbarfeldern weniger bis stärker gesättigte Variationen der Ausgangsfarbe generiert. Diese Variationen werden von links nach rechts angezeigt, wobei die Ausgangsfarbe im mittleren Feld der mittleren Farbfeldgruppe (Feld im Zentrum) verbleibt. Wählen Sie im Menü „Farbraum“ einen Wert für den Farbabstand der Nachbarfelder. Je höher dieser Wert ist, desto stärker weichen die generierten Nachbarfelder von der Farbe im Zentrum ab. Je näher sie Ihrer Zielfarbe kommen, desto kleiner sollte der Wert für den Farbabstand ausfallen. SPOT-ON 70 Aktivieren Sie die Option „Monitorkompensierung“, wenn Sie die Darstellung aller Farbfelder auf dem Monitor in der auf Papier gedruckten Ausgabe simulieren wollen. Diese Simulation hängt von dem Monitorprofil ab, das Sie für Ihren Monitor konfiguriert haben. Wählen Sie „Voreinstellungen“ im Menü „Bearbeiten“ des Spot-On Hauptfensters, um dieses Monitorprofil festzulegen. Vergewissern Sie sich, dass Ihr Monitor entsprechend den Empfehlungen des Monitorherstellers eingerichtet und das richtige Profil für Ihren Monitor gewählt wurde. 5 Setzen Sie die Anpassung mithilfe der Farbsteuerelemente und die Auswahl der Nachbarfelder fort, bis im mittleren Feld die gewünschte Zielfarbe angezeigt wird. 6 Klicken Sie auf „Muster drucken“. HINWEIS: Die präzise Abstimmung mit Spot-Farben auf dem Monitor ist äußerst schwierig. Sie sollten daher stets ein Muster drucken, um sicher zu sein, dass die Farbabstimmung das gewünschte Ergebnis erbringt. 7 Wählen Sie in den Menüs „Ausgabestil“, „Papiergröße“ und „Papierfach“ die gewünschten Einstellungen. Für die Option „Ausgabestil“ werden die Einstellungen „Muster für Farbsuche“ und „Muster für Farbnachbar“ angeboten. Mit der Einstellung „Muster für Farbsuche“ werden die Felder in dem Muster gedruckt, das im Fenster „Farbe suchen“ zu sehen ist. Bei der Auswahl von „Muster für Farbnachbar“ werden die Felder in drei Spalten mit je acht Zeilen gedruckt. Wählen Sie im Menü „Papiergröße“ die Größe des Papiers, auf dem das Muster gedruckt werden soll. Wählen Sie im Menü „Papierfach“ das Fach, aus dem das gewünschte Papier zugeführt werden soll. SPOT-ON 71 8 Klicken Sie auf „OK“, um das Muster zu drucken. Die Seite mit dem Testmuster enthält die folgenden Angaben: • CMYK-Wert des mittleren Farbfelds • Farbabstand zwischen den Nachbarfeldern • Angabe, ob die Generierung der Nachbarfelder in Bezug auf die Luminanz oder die Sättigung erfolgt • Gewähltes Ausgabeprofil Ziel einer Farbsuche in Spot-On ist es, die Farbwerte zu finden, die zur Übereinstimmung zwischen der Zielfarbe und einem gedruckten Farbfeld führen, nicht zur Übereinstimmung mit der Darstellung des betreffenden Farbfelds auf dem Monitor. Das gedruckte Muster der benachbarten Farbfelder gibt Ihnen die Möglichkeit, die gedruckten Farbfelder mit der Zielfarbe zu vergleichen. Wenn Sie in der Druckausgabe das Farbfeld identifiziert haben, das der Zielfarbe am nächsten kommt, können Sie dieses Farbfeld auf dem Monitor wählen. 9 Markieren Sie im Dialogfenster „Spot-On Farbe suchen“ die gewünschte Zielfarbe und klicken Sie auf „OK“. Die bearbeitete Farbe wird nun in der Farbliste des Spot-On Hauptfensters angezeigt. Anpassen von Zielfarben mittels Messinstrument Vom Densitometer ED-100 und vom Spektralfotometer ES-1000 können gemessene Farbwerte direkt in Spot-On importiert werden. Sie können auf diese Weise die Farbanpassung auf der Basis der echten Farben vornehmen, z.B. von einem roten Logo oder einer gelben Verpackung. Um optimale Ergebnisse zu erzielen, sollten Sie alle Messdaten, die Sie mit dem ED-100 offline gesammelt haben, herunterladen und speichern. Spot-On löscht beim Aufbau der Verbindung zum Messinstrument automatisch alle gespeicherten Daten. Anleitungen zum Herunterladen gespeicherter Daten vom ED-100 finden Sie in der zum Messinstrument gehörenden Dokumentation. FARBMESSWERTE IN SPOT-ON IMPORTIEREN 1 Installieren Sie das ED-100 bzw. das ES-1000 und konfigurieren Sie es im Hinblick auf Ihren Computer. Die Installations- und Konfigurationsanleitungen finden Sie in der Begleitdokumentation Ihres Messinstruments. 2 Wählen Sie „Starten“ im Menü „Instrument“. Das Dialogfenster „Instrument wählen“ wird angezeigt. SPOT-ON 72 3 Wählen Sie im Menü „Instrument“ das Instrument aus, mit dem Sie die Messungen vornehmen wollen. Wählen Sie im Menü „Anschluss“ den seriellen Anschluss für das Messinstrument. Klicken Sie auf „OK“. Beim ED-100 blinkt die Betriebsanzeige einige Male, während die Verbindung mit Spot-On hergestellt wird. Wenn das Blinken aufhört, ist das Instrument für die Messung bereit. 4 Positionieren Sie das Messinstrument ED-100 bzw. ES-1000 über der Zielfarbe. Dabei muss sich die Messöffnung mittig über dem Farbfeld befinden. Drücken Sie die Taste Messen, um die Messung auszulösen. Die gemessenen CMYK-Werte werden wie folgt in Spot-On importiert: • Wurde eine einzelne Farbe in der Farbliste markiert, wird diese Farbe mit den Messwerten aktualisiert. • Wurde eine Farbgruppe in der Farbliste markiert, wird eine neue Farbe in der Gruppe erstellt, der die Messwerte zugeordnet werden. • Wenn das Fenster „Spot-On Farbe suchen“ geöffnet ist, wird die Farbe im mittleren Farbfeld mit den Messwerten aktualisiert; anschließend werden die Nachbarfelder automatisch angepasst. • Wenn das Dialogfenster „Farbe für Feld im Zentrum festlegen“ geöffnet ist, werden die Messwerte in die Eingabefelder „C“, „M“, „Y“ und „K“ importiert. 5 Klicken Sie im Menü „Instrument“ auf „Stoppen“, wenn Sie die Farbmessungen abgeschlossen haben. Spot-On trennt die Verbindung zum Messinstrument. Zurücksetzen von Standardfarben auf Werkseinstellungen Sie können die Standardfarben auf die werkseitigen Standardeinstellungen zurücksetzen. Sie können dabei alle Farben innerhalb einer Standardfarbgruppe zurücksetzen lassen oder eine oder mehrere Farben in einer Standardfarbgruppe wählen, die zurückgesetzt werden sollen. ALLE FARBEN EINER STANDARDFARBGRUPPE AUF WERKSEINSTELLUNGEN ZURÜCKSETZEN 1 Klicken Sie auf das Symbol vor dem Namen der Gruppe, die Sie zurücksetzen wollen. 2 Wählen Sie „Gruppe zurücksetzen“ im Menü „Datei“. Daraufhin erscheint ein Warnhinweis. 3 Klicken Sie auf „OK“. SPOT-ON 73 BESTIMMTE FARBEN EINER STANDARDFARBGRUPPE AUF WERKSEINSTELLUNGEN ZURÜCKSETZEN 1 Klicken Sie auf das Symbol vor dem Namen der Gruppe, die die Farben enthält, die Sie zurücksetzen wollen. 2 Markieren Sie durch Klicken die Farben, die Sie auf die Werkseinstellungen zurücksetzen wollen. Halten Sie beim Klicken die Umschalttaste gedrückt, wenn Sie mehrere Farben markieren wollen, die unmittelbar aufeinander folgen. Halten Sie beim Klicken die Taste Strg bzw. Ctrl gedrückt, wenn Sie mehrere Farben markieren wollen, die nicht unmittelbar aufeinander folgen. 3 Wählen Sie „Zurück zu Farbeinstellung ab Werk“ im Menü „Datei“. Daraufhin erscheint ein Warnhinweis. 4 Klicken Sie auf „OK“. Speichern von Änderungen und Beenden von Spot-On Damit Sie die von Ihnen vorgenommenen Spot-Farbabstimmungen und -anpassungen für den Fiery X3eTY2 verwenden können, müssen Sie Ihre Änderungen vor dem Beenden von Spot-On speichern. Damit stellen Sie sicher, dass alle Änderungen, die Sie an den Spot-On Farbdefinitionen vorgenommen haben, auf dem Fiery X3eTY2 gespeichert werden und für die nachfolgende Druckausgabe von Dokumenten mit Spot-Farben verfügbar sind. Die folgenden Bearbeitungsschritte werden wirksam, auch ohne dass Sie Ihre Änderungen explizit speichern: • Neufestlegung der Prioritätsebene einer Farbgruppe • Herunterladen einer Farbgruppe • Leeren oder Löschen einer Farbgruppe SPOT-ON FARBLISTE SPEICHERN 1 Wählen Sie „Speichern“ im Menü „Datei“. 2 Klicken Sie auf das Schließfeld rechts oben im Spot-On Hauptfenster, um das Dienstprogramm zu beenden. SPOT-ON 74 Spot-On und Ersatzfarben Der Workflow für Ersatzfarben besteht im Wesentlichen daraus, in Spot-On die Werte für die Ersatzfarbe zu definieren und danach für ein zu druckendes Dokument im Druckertreiber die Druckoption „Farbsubstitution“ zu aktivieren. Sie können die entsprechende Druckoption auch in der Anwendung Command WorkStation einstellen. HINWEIS: Farbsubstitutionen wirken sich nur auf Text, Vektorgrafiken und Strichzeichnungen aus. Sie haben keine Auswirkung auf Rasterbilder. HINWEIS: Wird eine Farbe als Ersatzfarbe definiert, haben die Einstellungen für eine RGBFarbe („RGB-Quellprofil“, „Farbwiedergabe“ und „RGB-Separation“) bzw. für eine CMYKFarbe („CMYK-Simulationsprofil“ und „CMYK-Simulationsverfahren“) keine Relevanz für die Druckausgabe. Die Farbe wird mit einem Verfahren konvertiert, das dem Konvertierungsverfahren für Spot-Farben ähnelt. Erstellen von Ersatzfarbgruppen und Ersatzfarben Führen Sie die nachfolgend beschriebenen Schritte aus, um einer Ersatzfarbgruppe eine neue Ersatzfarbe hinzuzufügen und die Wert-Name-Kombination für die Farbsubstitution festzulegen. HINWEIS: Sie können eine neue Ersatzfarbe nur einer Ersatzfarbgruppe hinzufügen. NEUE ERSATZFARBE HINZUFÜGEN UND WERT-NAME-KOMBINATION FÜR SUBSTITUTION ANGEBEN 1 Starten Sie die ColorWise Pro Tools und stellen Sie die Verbindung zum Fiery X3eTY2 her. Sie können auf Ihrem Computer oder über die erweiterte Controllerschnittstelle des Fiery X3eTY2 die ColorWise Pro Tools als eigenständige Anwendung oder als Komponente der Anwendung Command WorkStation starten. 2 Klicken Sie auf „Spot-On“. Daraufhin wird das Dialogfenster „Ausgabeprofil wählen“ angezeigt. 3 Wählen Sie ein Ausgabeprofil und klicken Sie auf „OK“. SPOT-ON 75 Daraufhin wird das Hauptfenster der Komponente Spot-On angezeigt. 4 Wählen Sie „Neue Ersatzfarbgruppe“ im Menü „Bearbeiten“. Für die neue Ersatzfarbgruppe wird ein Eintrag mit der Bezeichnung „Ohne Titel“ angezeigt. 5 Doppelklicken Sie auf „Ohne Titel“ und geben Sie den Namen für die neue Ersatzfarbgruppe ein. 6 Markieren Sie die Ersatzfarbgruppe und wählen Sie „Neue Ersatzfarbe“ im Menü „Bearbeiten“. HINWEIS: Wenn eine Ersatzfarbgruppe bereits Ersatzfarbeinträge enthält, müssen Sie die vorhandene Farbe markieren, vor der die neue Ersatzfarbe eingefügt werden soll. Das Dialogfenster „Ersatzfarbe hinzufügen“ wird angezeigt. 7 Wählen Sie den Farbmodus für die Ersatzfarbe. 8 Wählen Sie die Toleranz für die Ersatzfarbe. Weitere Informationen über die Option „Toleranz“ finden Sie auf Seite 80. 9 Geben Sie die Werte der Originalfarbe ein, die ersetzt werden soll. 10 Klicken Sie auf „OK“. Die Ersatzfarbe wird an der zuvor markierten Position angezeigt. 1 Ausgabeprofil 2 Speichern 3 Hochladen 4 Herunterladen 5 Ausschneiden 6 Kopieren 7 Einfügen 8 Alles schließen 9 Drucken 10 Nach oben 11 Nach unten 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 SPOT-ON 76 Definieren der Farbwerte für eine Ersatzfarbe Nachdem Sie die zu ersetzende Originalfarbe angegeben haben, müssen Sie die CMYK-Werte für die Ersatzfarbe definieren. Sie können diese CMYK-Werte direkt im Hauptfenster von Spot-On oder im Fenster „Farbe für Feld im Zentrum festlegen“ eingeben oder dafür die Suchfunktion von Spot-On verwenden. Die Anleitungen dafür, wie Sie eine Ersatzfarbe durch Eingabe der gewünschten CMYKWerte definieren, finden Sie in den nachfolgenden Abschnitten. Wie Sie eine Ersatzfarbe mithilfe der Suchfunktion von Spot-On definieren, wird auf Seite 78 beschrieben. ERSATZFARBE IM HAUPTFENSTER VON SPOT-ON DEFINIEREN 1 Starten Sie die ColorWise Pro Tools und stellen Sie die Verbindung zum Fiery X3eTY2 her. 2 Klicken Sie auf „Spot-On“. Daraufhin wird das Dialogfenster „Ausgabeprofil wählen“ angezeigt. 3 Wählen Sie ein Ausgabeprofil und klicken Sie auf „OK“. Das Hauptfenster der Komponente Spot-On wird angezeigt. 4 Markieren Sie die Farbe, die Sie ersetzen wollen. 5 Doppelklicken Sie auf den Wert in der Spalte „C“, „M“, „Y“ und/oder „K“ und geben Sie den gewünschten Wert für den jeweiligen Farbkanal ein. Die neuen Werte für die Ersatzfarbe werden in der Farbliste angezeigt. HINWEIS: Die bearbeitete Farbe wird erst gespeichert, wenn Sie „Speichern“ im Menü „Datei“ wählen. 1 Ausgabeprofil 1 SPOT-ON 77 ERSATZFARBE IM FENSTER „FARBE FÜR FELD IM ZENTRUM FESTLEGEN“ DEFINIEREN 1 Markieren Sie die Farbe, die Sie ersetzen wollen. 2 Doppelklicken Sie auf das Symbol der Farbe. Das Dialogfenster „Spot-On Farbe suchen“ wird angezeigt; die gewählte Farbe erscheint im Farbfeld im Zentrum. 3 Klicken Sie auf das mittlere Farbfeld. Das Dialogfenster „Farbe für Feld im Zentrum festlegen“ wird angezeigt. 4 Geben Sie die Werte für die Farbkanäle „C“, „M“, „Y“ und „K“ ein. Weitere Informationen über das Dialogfenster „Farbe für Feld im Zentrum festlegen“ finden Sie auf Seite 67. 5 Klicken Sie auf „OK“. Die neue Farbe wird im Fenster „Spot-On Farbe suchen“ im mittleren Feld angezeigt. 6 Klicken Sie auf „OK“. Die neue Farbe wird nun in der Farbliste im Spot-On Hauptfenster angezeigt. HINWEIS: Die bearbeitete Farbe wird erst gespeichert, wenn Sie „Speichern“ im Menü „Datei“ wählen. 1 Farbfeld im Zentrum 1 SPOT-ON 78 Mit der in der nächsten Anleitung beschriebenen Suchfunktion von Spot-On können Sie eine Ersatzfarbe sukzessive eingrenzen. ERSATZFARBE MIT SPOT-ON SUCHFUNKTION DEFINIEREN 1 Markieren Sie die Farbe, die Sie ersetzen wollen. 2 Doppelklicken Sie auf das Symbol der Farbe. Das Dialogfenster „Spot-On Farbe suchen“ wird angezeigt; die gewählte (aktuelle) Farbe erscheint im Farbfeld im Zentrum. 3 Klicken Sie auf benachbarte Farbfelder, bis Sie die Farbe gefunden haben, die Sie für die Substitution verwenden wollen. Informationen über die Suchfunktion von Spot-On finden Sie auf Seite 68. 4 Klicken Sie auf „OK“. Die neue Ersatzfarbe wird nun in der Farbliste im Spot-On Hauptfenster angezeigt. HINWEIS: Die bearbeitete Farbe wird erst gespeichert, wenn Sie „Speichern“ im Menü „Datei“ wählen. Drucken eines Auftrags mit Ersatzfarben Nachdem Sie in Spot-On die CYMK-Werte für die Farbsubstitution definiert haben, können Sie im Druckertreiber veranlassen, dass ein Dokument unter Verwendung einer Ersatzfarbe gedruckt werden soll. Sie können die entsprechende Druckoption auch in der Anwendung Command WorkStation einstellen. HINWEIS: Wenn Sie einen Auftrag drucken, müssen Sie dasselbe Ausgabeprofil wählen, für das Sie sich im Dialogfenster „Ausgabeprofil wählen“ entschieden haben. Anderenfalls haben mit Spot-On definierte Farbsubstitutionen keine Auswirkung. HINWEIS: Die Vorgehensweisen zum Drucken eines Auftrags unter Mac OS und Windows sind ähnlich. 1 Nachbarfeld 1 SPOT-ON 79 AUFTRAG MIT EINER ERSATZFARBE DRUCKEN 1 Öffnen Sie ein Dokument in Ihrer Anwendung. 2 Wählen Sie „Drucken“. 3 Wählen Sie „ColorWise“ im Menü mit der Anfangsauswahl „Kopien & Seiten“. Die Seite „ColorWise“ wird angezeigt. 4 Aktivieren Sie die Option „Farbsubstitution“. 5 Klicken Sie auf „Drucken“. Der Auftrag wird mit der Ersatzfarbe gedruckt, die Sie in Spot-On definiert haben. Dialogfenster „Ersatzfarbe hinzufügen/umbenennen“ Im Dialogfenster „Ersatzfarbe hinzufügen/umbenennen“ können Sie den Farbmodus und den Toleranzbereich für eine Ersatzfarbe festlegen. SPOT-ON 80 HINWEIS: Das Dialogfenster „Ersatzfarbe hinzufügen“ wird angezeigt, wenn Sie eine Ersatzfarbgruppe in der Liste markieren und „Bearbeiten > Neue Ersatzfarbe“ wählen. Das Dialogfenster „Ersatzfarbe umbenennen“ erscheint, wenn Sie auf die zwischen Klammern befindliche Bezeichnung doppelklicken. HINWEIS: Die Dialogfenster „Ersatzfarbe hinzufügen“ und „Ersatzfarbe umbenennen“ beinhalten dieselben Steuerungselemente für die Ersatzfarbdefinition. • Ersatzfarbe: Wählen Sie einen der folgenden Farbmodi für die Ersatzfarbe. – CMYK (0-100%) – RGB (Gerätecode 0-255) – RGB (0-100%) • Toleranz: Wählen Sie einen der folgenden Toleranzbereiche für die Ersatzfarbe. – Klein (dargestellt durch Kleinbuchstaben) – Groß (dargestellt durch Großbuchstaben) Zur Vermeidung von Eingabefehlern werden in den Dialogfenstern „Ersatzfarbe hinzufügen“ und „Ersatzfarbe umbenennen“ die Werte in dem unten beschriebenen vordefinierten Format angezeigt. Abhängig von den Einstellungen, für die Sie sich entschieden haben, werden in den Dialogfenstern außerdem Groß- oder Kleinbuchstaben sowie das Symbol „%“ angezeigt. • CMYK (0-100%) – Klein: <„0“%c, „0“%m, „0“%y, „0“%k> – Groß: <„0“%C, „0“%M, „0“%Y, „0“%K> • RGB (Gerätecode 0-255) – Klein: <„0“r, „0“g, „0“b> – Groß: <„0“R, „0“G, „0“B> • RGB (0-100%) – Klein: <„0“%r, „0“%g, „0“%b> – Groß: <„0“%R, „0“%G, „0“%B> Richtlinien für Ersatzfarben Beachten Sie beim Festlegen der Werte für Ersatzfarben die folgenden Richtlinien. Toleranzbereich Die Genauigkeit der Ersatzfarbe wird durch verschiedene Faktoren beeinflusst, z.B. durch die Anwendung, das Betriebsystem, den Druckertreiber und das Distiller-Verfahren. Die Einstellungen „Klein“ und „Groß“ für den Toleranzbereich der Farbsubstitution werden im Hinblick auf die ‚Fehler’ angeboten, die durch Rundungsverluste zwischen den vom Anwender eingegebenen Werten und den vom Fiery X3eTY2 empfangenen Werte entstehen. SPOT-ON 81 Die folgende Tabelle gibt einen Überblick über die Toleranzbereiche, die mit den Einstellungen „Klein“ und „Groß“ bei den verschiedenen Farbmodi angewendet werden. HINWEIS: Bei den Werten für die Toleranzbereiche handelt es sich um Näherungswerte. • CMYK (0-100%) – Klein: Jede Farbe, die im Bereich von +/-0,25% um den eingegebenen Farbwert liegt, wird durch eine Ersatzfarbe ersetzt. – Groß: Jede Farbe, die im Bereich von +/-0,5% um den eingegebenen Farbwert liegt, wird durch eine Ersatzfarbe ersetzt. • RGB (Gerätecode 0-255) – Klein: Jede Farbe, die im Bereich von +/-0,25 um den eingegebenen Farbwert liegt, wird durch eine Ersatzfarbe ersetzt. – Groß: Jede Farbe, die im Bereich von +/-1 um den eingegebenen Farbwert liegt, wird durch eine Ersatzfarbe ersetzt. • RGB (0-100%) – Klein: Jede Farbe, die nach dem Skalieren im Bereich von +/-0,25% um den Farbwert liegt, wird durch eine Ersatzfarbe ersetzt. – Groß: Jede Farbe, die nach dem Skalieren im Bereich von +/-0,5% um den Farbwert liegt, wird durch eine Ersatzfarbe ersetzt. Farbsubstitution Die Farbsubstitution erfolgt, wenn eine Ersatzfarbe mit einem anderen Set von CMYKWerten für dieselbe Wert-Name-Kombination definiert wird wie die Originalfarbe. Das folgende Beispiel veranschaulicht die Funktionsweise der Farbsubstitution. • Originalfarbe: <100, 0, 0, 0> als CMYK-Werte (Cyan) • Ersatzfarbe 1: <0, 100, 100, 0> (Rot) • Ersatzfarbe 2: <100, 0, 100, 0> (Grün) HINWEIS: In diesem Beispiel werden die Extremwerte und Begriffe „Rot“ und „Grün“ ausschließlich zu Demonstrationszwecken verwendet. In der Praxis wird die Farbsubstitution nicht für extreme Farbverschiebungen verwendet. Farbmodus Toleranz - Klein Toleranz - Groß CMYK (0-100%) +/- 0,25% +/- 0,5% RGB (Gerätecode 0-255) +/- 0,25 +/- 1 RGB (0-100%) +/- 0,25% +/- 0,5% SPOT-ON 82 Die folgende Tabelle zeigt die Farbsubstitution bei unterschiedlichen Sets von CMYKWerten, die derselben Originalfarbe zugewiesen sind. Prioritätsschema Wenn zwei Ersatzfarben mit denselben Wert-Name-Kombinationen mit unterschiedlichen Sets von CMYK-Werten und mit unterschiedlichen Toleranzbereichen definiert werden, bewertet Spot-On die Priorität der Farbsubstitution entsprechend der Reihenfolge der Farben innerhalb der Gruppe. Bei Spot-On basiert die Prozessfarbsubstitution auf der Reihenfolge der Farben innerhalb der Farbgruppe. Die Einträge am Anfang der Liste haben eine höhere Priorität als die Einträge am Ende der Liste. Spot-On analysiert die Liste von oben nach unten und verarbeitet die Farbsubstitution in linearer Folge. Eine Farbe, die bereits ersetzt wurde, wird bei nachfolgenden Substitutionsanforderungen übergangen. Die folgenden Beispiele veranschaulichen die Funktionsweise des Prioritätsschemas. • Originalfarbe: <100, 0, 0, 0> als CMYK-Werte (Cyan) • Ersatzfarbe 3: <0, 100, 100, 0> (Rot) mit „Toleranz = Klein“ • Ersatzfarbe 4: <100, 0, 100, 0> (Grün) mit „Toleranz = Groß“ HINWEIS: In diesem Beispiel werden die Extremwerte und Begriffe „Rot“ und „Grün“ ausschließlich zu Demonstrationszwecken verwendet. Reihenfolge der Farben • Fall 1: Die Ersatzfarbe 3 (Rot) hat eine höhere Priorität als die Ersatzfarbe 4 (Grün). • Fall 2: Die Ersatzfarbe 4 (Grün) hat eine höhere Priorität als die Ersatzfarbe 3 (Rot). Wert-Name-Kombination für Substitution CMYK-Werte Vor Substitution Nach Substitution Originalfarbe — <100, 0, 0, 0> — — Ersatzfarbe 1 <100,0c, 0,0m, 0,0y, 0,0k> <0, 100, 100, 0> Cyan Rot Ersatzfarbe 2 <100,0c, 0,0m, 0,0y, 0,0k> <100, 0, 100, 0> Cyan Grün SPOT-ON 83 Die folgende Tabelle verdeutlicht das Prioritätsschema in dem Fall, dass der Originalfarbe dieselben Wert-Name-Kombinationen, jedoch mit unterschiedlichen Sets von CMYKWerten und unterschiedlichen Toleranzbereichen zugewiesen sind. Die Ersatzfarbe 3 und die Ersatzfarbe 4 haben dieselben Wert-Name-Kombinationen, führen aber abhängig von der Reihenfolge, in der sie in der Spot-On Farbliste enthalten sind, zu unterschiedlichen Ergebnissen. • In Fall 1 hat die Ersatzfarbe 3 (Rot) die höhere Priorität, da sie weiter oben in der Liste steht. Alle Vorkommen der Originalfarbe Cyan innerhalb des Toleranzbereichs „Klein“ werden durch die Farbe Rot ersetzt. Vorkommen der Farbe Cyan, die sich innerhalb des Toleranzbereichs „Groß“, aber außerhalb des Toleranzbereichs „Klein“ befinden, werden durch die Ersatzfarbe 4 (Grün) ersetzt. • In Fall 2 hat die Ersatzfarbe 4 (Grün) die höhere Priorität, da sie weiter oben in der Liste steht. Die Ersatzfarbe 3 (Rot) kann nur Vorkommen der Originalfarbe Cyan ersetzen, die sich innerhalb des Toleranzbereichs „Klein“ befinden. Diese Vorkommen wurden jedoch bereits durch die Farbe Grün ersetzt. Daher erfolgt keine Substitution durch die Farbe Rot. Hoch- und Herunterladen einer Ersatzfarbgruppe Ähnlich wie Gruppen benannter Farben kann auch eine Gruppe mit Ersatzfarben in Form eines ICC-Profils hoch- und heruntergeladen werden. Die Ersatzfarbdefinitionen werden mit persönlichen Kennungen als Teil eines ICC-Profils gespeichert, sodass die Definitionen der Ersatzfarbgruppen exportiert und auf mehrere Druckserver verteilt und gemeinsam genutzt werden können. Reihenfolge der Farben Wert-Name-Kombination für Substitution CMYK-Werte Vor Substitution Nach Substitution Originalfarbe <100, 0, 0, 0> Fall 1 Ersatzfarbe 3 Ersatzfarbe 4 <100,0c, 0,0m, 0,0y, 0,0k> <100,0C, 0,0M, 0,0Y, 0,0K> <0, 100, 100, 0> <100, 0, 100, 0> Cyan Rot (siehe unten) Fall 2 Ersatzfarbe 4 Ersatzfarbe 3 <100,0C, 0,0M, 0,0Y, 0,0K> <100,0c, 0,0m, 0,0y, 0,0k> <100, 0, 100, 0> <0, 100, 100, 0> Cyan Grün (siehe unten) COLORWISE DRUCKOPTIONEN 84 COLORWISE DRUCKOPTIONEN Das ColorWise Farbmanagementsystem verwendet Druckoptionen, mit denen die Druckausgabe von Objekten in den unterschiedlichen Farbräumen beeinflusst werden kann. Durch die Festlegung der geeigneten Einstellung für jede dieser Druckoptionen können beim Drucken Ihrer Aufträge die gewünschten Ergebnisse erzielt werden. Aufbau dieses Abschnitts Dieser Abschnitt enthält eine Übersicht über das ColorWise Farbmanagementsystem, mit dem die Farben auf dem Fiery X3eTY2 gesteuert werden (siehe Seite 85), und ausführliche Beschreibungen der einzelnen Druckoptionen. Die folgende Tabelle erleichtert das Auffinden der einzelnen Druckoptionen. Darüber hinaus enthält dieser Abschnitt Informationen über PostScript-Druckertreiber sowie Anleitungen zum Einstellen der ColorWise Druckoptionen unter Windows und Mac OS. Die Informationen über Druckertreiber finden Sie auf Seite 99. ColorWise Druckoption Siehe Ausgabeprofil Seite 93 Autom. Überfüllung Seite 86 CMYK-Simulationsprofil Seite 90 CMYK-Simulationsverfahren Seite 91 Composite-Ausgabe überdrucken Seite 92 Farbsubstitution Seite 98 Farbwiedergabe Seite 94 Nur Schwarz für Grautöne Seite 93 RGB-Quellprofil Seite 96 RGB-Separation Seite 95 Schwarz überdrucken Seite 87 Schwarze Texte/Grafiken Seite 88 Schwarzerkennung Seite 87 Separationen überdrucken Seite 92 Spot-Farbabstimmung Seite 97 COLORWISE DRUCKOPTIONEN 85 Farbmanagement des Fiery X3eTY2 Sie können das Druckverhalten des Fiery X3eTY2 auf eine der folgenden Weisen ändern: • Sie können die ColorWise Optionen individuell für einen Auftrag einstellen, indem Sie in den Menüs des Druckertreibers die gewünschten Einstellungen wählen. • Sie können die meisten ColorWise Optionen mit der Komponente Color Setup der ColorWise Pro Tools als Serverstandardeinstellungen festlegen (siehe Seite 32). Bestimmte Standardwerte können Sie auch im Setup-Programm des Fiery X3eTY2 festlegen. Eine ausführliche Beschreibung finden Sie im Dokument Konfiguration und Setup. Die Standardeinstellungen gelten für alle nachfolgenden Aufträge, sofern Sie keine abweichenden Einstellungen für einen Auftrag wählen. • Bestimmte ColorWise Optionen, insbesondere das ICC-Standardprofil und die Kalibrierungsoptionen, können Sie mit den ColorWise Pro Tools festlegen. Zu diesen Optionen gehören das CMYK-Simulationsprofil (siehe Seite 90), das Simulationsverfahren (siehe Seite 91), das Standardquellprofil (siehe Seite 96), die RGB-Separation (siehe Seite 95) sowie das zugehörige Kalibrierungsset (siehe Seite 35). Anwendungsprogramme können die Farbdaten für den Fiery X3eTY2 in mehr als einem Farbraum liefern. Office- oder Büroanwendungen verwenden in der Regel den RGBFarbraum, während Prepress-Anwendungen normalerweise CMYK-Daten generieren. Desktop-Anwendungen können zusätzlich auch Spot-Farben (z. B. PANTONE-Farben) generieren. Eine besondere Schwierigkeit stellen dabei Seiten dar, auf denen RGB-, CMYKund Spot-Farben gemischt sind. Sie können aber auch die Druckausgabe dieser komplexen Dokumente mit gemischten Farbräumen präzise steuern, da der Fiery X3eTY2 spezifische Funktionen für jeden Farbraum (RGB, CMYK und Spot-Farben) bereitstellt. In der Abbildung unten sind die Optionen des Fiery X3eTY2 Farbmanagementsystems zusammengefasst, die die Konvertierung von Farbdaten beeinflussen. Diese Optionen stehen Ihnen zur Verfügung, wenn Sie einen Auftrag zum Drucken an den Fiery X3eTY2 senden. Die meisten dieser Optionen und Einstellungen werden in diesem Kapitel ausführlich beschrieben. RGB-Quellprofil Nur Schwarz für Grautöne (RGB) Farbwiedergabe (CRD) Helligkeit Schwarze Texte/Grafiken RGB-Separation Ausgabeprofil An Kopierer gesendete Farbdaten Fiery X3eTY2 Farbprozessor RGB-Daten CMYK-Daten Spot-Farbdaten Spot-Farbabstimmung CMYK-Simulationsprofil CMYK-Simulationsverfahren Nur Schwarz für Grautöne (CMYK) Helligkeit Schwarze Texte/Grafiken Separationen überdrucken Ausgabeprofil COLORWISE DRUCKOPTIONEN 86 „RGB-Quellprofil“ ist die einzige Farboption, die ausschließlich für RGB-Daten gilt. Alle anderen Optionen, die RGB-Farben beeinflussen, wirken sich auch auf seltener verwendete Farbräume wie Lab, XYZ und andere kalibrierte Farbräume aus. HINWEIS: Beim PostScript 3 Farbmanagement beeinflusst das RGB-Quellprofil auch den Farbraum „CIEBasedABC“ (sofern RGB der Quellfarbraum ist). Wenn beispielsweise CMYK-Daten im Format „CIEBasedDEFG“ an den Fiery X3eTY2 gesendet werden (indem Sie in Photoshop das PostScript-Farbmanagement aktivieren), beeinflusst die Einstellung für die Option „Farbwiedergabe“, die sich normalerweise nur auf RGB-Daten auswirkt, auch die CMYK-Daten. ColorWise Druckoptionen Die folgenden Abschnitte enthalten ausführliche Beschreibungen der ColorWise Druckoptionen und deren Auswirkungen auf Druckaufträge. Autom. Überfüllung Das Überfüllen ist eine Technik, bei der Objekte minimal vergrößert werden, damit aneinander stoßende Farben geringfügig überlappen und keine weißen Bereiche zwischen den Farben entstehen. Diese sogenannten „Blitzer“ können auf Ungenauigkeiten in der Farbregistrierung, auf die physischen Eigenschaften der verwendeten Toner oder auf die Steifigkeit des verwendeten Mediums zurückgehen. Die folgende Abbildung zeigt dasselbe Bild mit und ohne Überfüllen. Durch das Aktivieren der Option „Autom. Überfüllung“ wird erreicht, dass die Technik des Überfüllens auf alle Objekte in einem Druckauftrag angewendet wird. COLORWISE DRUCKOPTIONEN 87 Schwarzerkennung Mit der Option „Schwarzerkennung“ kann festgelegt werden, ob vor dem Drucken eines Auftrags Schwarzweißseiten erkannt werden sollen. Wenn Sie diese Option verwenden möchten, müssen Sie für die Option „Farbmodus“ bzw. „Druckmodus“ die Einstellung „Standardfarben“ oder „Profi-Farben“ wählen. • Aus: Wählen Sie „Aus“ für einen Auftrag mit reinschwarzen Seiten und einer beträchtlichen Anzahl von Farbseiten. • Ein: Wählen Sie „Ein“ für einen Auftrag, der vorwiegend aus S/W-Seiten besteht. Für die reinen S/W-Seiten werden bei dieser Einstellung die korrekten Fakturierungsdaten erhoben. Schwarz überdrucken Mit der Option „Schwarz überdrucken“ können Sie festlegen, ob schwarzer Text (definiert als RGB = 0, 0, 0 oder als CMYK = 0%, 0%, 0%, 100%) als zusätzliche Schicht über den Farbhintergrund gedruckt werden soll. • Text: Schwarzer Text wird als zusätzliche Schicht über den Farbhintergrund gedruckt, wodurch weiße Zwischenräume vermieden und Lichthofeffekte sowie die Auswirkungen einer fehlerhaften Farbregistrierung reduziert werden. Mit dieser Einstellung wird für die Option „Schwarze Texte/Grafiken“ automatisch die Einstellung „Reines Schwarz - Ein“ festgelegt. • Text/Grafik: Schwarzer Text und schwarze Grafiken werden als zusätzliche Schicht über den Farbhintergrund gedruckt, wodurch weiße Zwischenräume vermieden und Lichthofeffekte sowie die Auswirkungen einer fehlerhaften Farbregistrierung reduziert werden. Mit dieser Einstellung wird für die Option „Schwarze Texte/Grafiken“ automatisch die Einstellung „Reines Schwarz - Ein“ festgelegt. • Aus: Schwarzer Text bzw. schwarzer Text und schwarze Grafiken werden in einer Schicht mit dem Farbhintergrund gedruckt. HINWEIS: Bestimmte PostScript-Anwendungen führen eigene Konvertierungen für das Überdrucken von Schwarz aus, bevor sie den Auftrag an den Kopierer senden. Die Funktionsweise dieser Option soll am Beispiel einer Seite mit schwarzem Text auf hellblauem Hintergrund verdeutlicht werden. Das Blau des Hintergrunds hat die Werte CMYK=40%, 30%, 0%, 0%. Der schwarze Text hat die Werte CMYK=0%, 0%, 0%, 100%. • Wenn Sie die Option „Schwarz überdrucken“ aktivieren („Text“ bzw. „Text/Grafik“), werden die Textabschnitte bzw. Text- und Grafikabschnitte der Seite überdruckt, d. h. mit den Farben darunter kombiniert. Das in Anwendungen generierte Schwarz (z. B. „RGB=0, 0, 0“ oder „CMYK=0%, 0%, 0%,100%“) wird nur mit schwarzem Toner reproduziert. Dadurch werden unerwünschte Rastereffekte bei schwarzen Text- und Grafikelementen vermieden, vorausgesetzt der Kopierer ist korrekt kalibriert. Es gibt auf diese Weise keinen Übergang bei den Tonerfarben Cyan und Magenta. Die Qualität der Ausgabe wird gesteigert, da an den Kanten von Text, der im RGB-Farbraum definiert wurde (RGB=0, 0, 0), keine Artefakte entstehen. COLORWISE DRUCKOPTIONEN 88 • Wenn Sie die Option „Schwarz überdrucken“ deaktivieren („Aus“), bilden sich Stoßkanten an den Text- und Grafikrändern, an denen die Tonerfarben Cyan und Magenta (außerhalb des Textes) und die Tonerfarbe Schwarz (des Textes) aneinander grenzen. Diese Übergänge können zu Artefakten führen, da die technischen Möglichkeiten des Kopierermodells hier an ihre Grenzen stoßen. HINWEIS: Wenn Sie für die Option „Schwarz überdrucken“ die Einstellung „Text/Grafik“ festlegen, können schwarze Text- und Grafikelemente über einen farbigen Hintergrund gedruckt werden (siehe CMYK-Simulationsverfahren auf Seite 91). HINWEIS: Bei anderen CMYK-Werten als CMYK=0%, 0%, 0%, 0% ist die Reproduktion der CMYK-Komponenten abhängig von der Einstellung für die CMYK-Simulation und von der Kalibrierungskurve. Schwarze Texte/Grafiken Die Option „Schwarze Texte/Grafiken“ wird auf schwarze Textelemente und Vektorgrafiken angewendet. Im Normalfall können Sie die Einstellung „Reines Schwarz - Ein“ für diese Option beibehalten. Wenn Sie für die Option „Schwarze Texte/Grafiken“ die Einstellung „Reines Schwarz – Ein“ wählen, wird das in einer Anwendung generierte Schwarz (z.B. „RGB=0, 0, 0“ oder „CMYK=0%, 0%, 0%, 100%“) nur mit schwarzem Toner reproduziert. Dies verhindert unerwünschte Artefakte bei Halftone-Rastern (sofern der Kopierer richtig kalibriert wurde) sowie Fehler durch eine falsche Registrierung bei schwarzen Text- und Grafikelementen, da nur mit einem Toner gedruckt wird. Außerdem wird dadurch die Übersteuerung vermieden. Für diese Option wird automatisch die Einstellung „Reines Schwarz = Ein“ festgelegt, wenn Sie die Option „Schwarz überdrucken“ durch Auswahl einer entsprechenden Einstellung aktivieren. Für bestimmte Aufträge ist es ratsam, diese Option zu deaktivieren, z. B. für Aufträge mit Farbverläufen/Gradienten, für die Schwarz verwendet wird. In der folgenden Tabelle werden die Auswirkungen der Option „Schwarze Texte/Grafiken“ auf schwarze Daten in verschiedenen Farbräumen beschrieben. HINWEIS: Die Option „Schwarze Texte/Grafiken“ kann nur für unseparierte Farbdrucke (Composite), nicht für Separationen verwendet werden. COLORWISE DRUCKOPTIONEN 89 Farbe Schwarze Texte/Grafiken = Normal Schwarze Texte/Grafiken = Reines Schwarz - Ein oder CMYK-Schwarz - Ein RGB=0,0,0 (für alle anderen RGB-Werte ist die Einstellung der Option „Schwarze Texte/Grafiken“ nicht relevant) RGB=0,0,0 wird unter Berücksichtigung der Definition für RGB=0,0,0 im Ausgabeprofil gedruckt. Dies kann zu einem mit allen Tonern erzeugten satten CMYK-Schwarz führen, wenn im Ausgabeprofil sattes Schwarz für diesen Fall vorgegeben ist. Sieht das Ausgabeprofil dagegen für RGB=0,0,0 die ausschließliche Verwendung von schwarzem Toner vor, so wird ein reines Schwarz (100% K) erzeugt. Die Ausgabe wird durch die Kalibrierungskurve beeinflusst. RGB=0,0,0 wird als 100% K unter Verwendung von schwarzem Toner (Reines Schwarz - EIN) oder als 100% K plus 50% Cyan (CMYKSchwarz - EIN) unter Verwendung von Toner in den Farben Schwarz und Cyan gedruckt. Für alle anderen RGB-Werte ist die Einstellung der Option „Schwarze Texte/Grafiken“ nicht relevant. CMYK=0%,0%,0%,100% (für alle anderen CMYK-Werte ist die Einstellung der Option „Schwarze Texte/Grafiken“ nicht relevant) Die Ausgabe von CMYK=0%,0%,0%,100% erfolgt – abhängig von den Einstellungen der Optionen „CMYK-Simulationsprofil“ und „CMYK-Simulationsverfahren“ – entweder als reines Schwarz (100% K) oder als ein mit allen Tonern erzeugtes sattes Schwarz. Bei den Verfahren „Schnell“ und „Komplett (Quell-GCR)“ wird CMYK=0%,0%,0%,100% als reines Schwarz (100% K) ausgegeben; in diesem Fall wird die Menge an schwarzem Toner durch das Simulationsprofil und die Kalibrierungskurve beschränkt. Beim Verfahren „Komplett (Ausgabe-GCR)“ wird CMYK=0%,0%,0%,100% als reines Schwarz (100% K) ausgegeben; in diesem Fall wird die Menge an schwarzem Toner durch das Simulationsprofil und die Kalibrierungskurve beschränkt. Wird für die Option „CMYK-Simulationsprofil“ die Einstellung „ColorWise Aus“ verwendet, werden das Simulationsprofil und die Kalibrierungskurve deaktiviert. In diesem Fall wird der schwarze Toner nicht durch die Kalibrierungskurve beschränkt. CMYK=0%,0%,0%,100% wird unabhängig von den Einstellungen der Optionen „CMYKSimulationsprofil“ und „CMYK-Simulationsverfahren“ als 100% K unter Verwendung von schwarzem Toner (Reines Schwarz - EIN) oder als 100% K plus 50% Cyan (CMYK-Schwarz - EIN) unter Verwendung von Toner in den Farben Schwarz und Cyan gedruckt. Für alle anderen CMYK-Werte ist die Einstellung der Option „Schwarze Texte/Grafiken“ nicht relevant. Wird für die Option „CMYK-Simulationsprofil“ die Einstellung „ColorWise Aus“ verwendet, werden das Simulationsprofil und die Kalibrierungskurve deaktiviert. In diesem Fall wird der schwarze Toner nicht durch die Kalibrierungskurve beschränkt. Spot-Farben (für Spot-Farben ist die Einstellung der Option „Schwarze Texte/Grafiken“ nicht relevant) Spot-Farben werden in der gewohnten Weise verarbeitet Spot-Farben werden in der gewohnten Weise verarbeitet COLORWISE DRUCKOPTIONEN 90 HINWEIS: Bestimmte PostScript-Anwendungen (z. B. QuarkXPress) konvertieren Elemente, die als RGB = 0, 0, 0 definiert sind, in ein Vierfarbschwarz (CMYK), bevor Sie den Auftrag an den Fiery X3eTY2 senden. Für diese Elemente ist die Option „Schwarze Texte/Grafiken“ nicht relevant. Weitere Informationen finden Sie im Dokument Fiery Farbreferenz. Schwarze Text- und Grafikelemente, die in Büroanwendungen wie Microsoft Word als RGB = 0,0,0 definiert sind, werden vom Microsoft PostScript 3 Druckertreiber für Windows 2000/XP/ Server 2003 in ein Einfarbschwarz (CMYK = 0%,0%,0%,100%) konvertiert. Damit dieses mit nur einer Druckfarbe produzierte Schwarz mit der maximalen Tonerdichte des Kopierermodells gedruckt wird, muss für die Option „Schwarze Texte/Grafiken“ die Einstellung „Reines Schwarz - Ein“ gewählt werden. CMYK-Simulationsprofil Die Option „CMYK-Simulationsprofil“ ermöglicht es Ihnen, Prepress-Proofs (kurz Proofs) oder Simulationen zu drucken. Mit dieser Option legen Sie den Offsetdruckstandard bzw. das Farbausgabegerät fest, den/das Sie simulieren wollen. Diese Option wirkt sich nur auf CMYK-Daten aus. In den Druckertreibern für Windows kann auch eine unbegrenzte Anzahl von eigenen kompletten Simulationen angezeigt werden, die mit den ColorWise Pro Tools erstellt wurden. Unter Mac OS können bis zu zehn eigene komplette Simulationen angezeigt werden. Die Anzahl eigener Simulationen, die Sie auf dem Fiery X3eTY2 speichern können, ist nur durch den verfügbaren Festplattenbereich beschränkt. Wenn Sie mit dem PostScript-Treiber drucken und die bidirektionale Kommunikation aktiviert ist, werden die Namen der geladenen und eigenen Profile im Menü „CMYKSimulationsprofil“ angezeigt. Wenn die bidirektionale Kommunikation nicht aktiviert wurde, werden für die geladenen bzw. die eigenen Profile die generischen Bezeichnungen „Simulation-1“ bis „Simulation-10“ angezeigt. Weitere Informationen über die bidirektionale Kommunikation finden Sie in den Dokumenten Drucken unter Windows und Drucken unter Mac OS. Mit der Einstellung „Nein“ werden Ihre CMYK-Originaldaten an den Kopierer in kalibriertem Zustand gesendet, ohne dass sie zur Simulation eines anderen Ausgabegeräts konvertiert werden. Bei der Einstellung „ColorWise Aus“ werden die CMYK-Originaldaten an den Kopierer in unkalibriertem Zustand gesendet, ohne dass sie zur Simulation eines anderen Ausgabegeräts konvertiert werden. Für welches CMYK-Simulationsprofil Sie sich entscheiden sollten, hängt von dem Offsetdruckstandard ab, für den die CMYK-Daten separiert wurden. • Wählen Sie für Bilder, die mit einer eigenen Separation separiert wurden (z. B. für eine mit einem ICC-Profil erzeugte Separation) das Profil auf dem Fiery X3eTY2, das der Einstellung der Option „CMYK-Simulationsprofil“ entspricht. • Wählen Sie für Bilder, die z. B. für den Offsetdruckstandard SWOP separiert wurden, die Einstellung „SWOP“ für die Option „CMYK-Simulationsprofil“. COLORWISE DRUCKOPTIONEN 91 Damit ein Bild, das mithilfe eines ICC-Profils separiert wurde, korrekt simuliert wird, muss das betreffende Profil auch auf dem Fiery X3eTY2 verfügbar sein. Weitere Hinweise zum Laden von ICC-Profilen auf den Fiery X3eTY2 finden Sie auf Seite 11. CMYK-Simulationsverfahren Mit der Option „CMYK-Simulationsverfahren“ können Sie das gewünschte CMYK>CMYKKonvertierungsverfahren festlegen. • Schnell: Mit dieser Einstellung werden eindimensionale Transferkurven angewendet, die nur die Ausgabedichte der Farbkanäle Cyan, Magenta, Gelb und Schwarz beeinflussen. Mit diesem Verfahren erreichen Sie mit dem Kopierer eine zufriedenstellende Farbausgabe, da die Primärfarben nicht durch weitere Farbstoffe ‚verunreinigt’ werden. Obwohl dieses das schnellste Simulationsverfahren ist und sich besonders für Entwürfe eignet, sollten Sie es nicht für endbearbeitete Dokumente verwenden, die als Prepress-Proofs benutzt werden. Es gibt andere Verfahren, mit denen die für die Erstellung von Proofs erforderliche höhere CMYK-Simulationspräzision erzielt werden kann. • Komplett (Quell-GCR): Mit dieser Einstellung wird durch kolorimetrische Transformationen eine komplette und präzise Simulation erreicht. Die Farbtöne werden beibehalten, auch bei Primärfarben. Die im Originaldokument (Quelle) festgelegte Einstellung für den Unbuntaufbau (GCR) wird auch für reinschwarze Texte und Grafiken beibehalten. Verarbeitetes und als CMY definiertes Schwarz wird mit CMY-Tonern reproduziert. Die Einstellung „Komplett (Quell-GCR)“ wird für Anwendungen empfohlen, mit denen hochqualitative Proofs erstellt werden können. • Komplett (Ausgabe-GCR): Mit dieser Einstellung wird durch kolorimetrische Transformationen eine komplette und präzise Simulation erreicht. Die Farbtöne werden beibehalten, auch bei Primärfarben. Die im Originaldokument festgelegte Einstellung für den Unbuntaufbau (GCR) wird jedoch nicht beibehalten. Stattdessen werden sämtliche CMYK-Daten unter Verwendung der im Ausgabeprofil festgelegten GCR-Einstellung nochmals separiert. Dieses Simulationsverfahren ähnelt den traditionellen ICC-Farbabstimmungsverfahren und ist für den Vollfarbdruck von Dokumenten, die für den Offsetdruck konzipiert sind, aber auf dem Kopierer ausgegeben werden, besser geeignet als die Einstellung „Komplett (Quell-GCR)“. HINWEIS: Wenn Sie die Einstellung „Reines Schwarz - Ein“ für die Option „Schwarze Texte/ Grafiken“ festlegen und „Komplett (Ausgabe-GCR)“ als CYMK-Simulationsverfahren angeben, werden schwarze Textelemente und Grafiken in Ihrem Dokument ausschließlich mit schwarzem Toner (100%K) gedruckt. COLORWISE DRUCKOPTIONEN 92 Separationen überdrucken Mit der Option „Separationen überdrucken“ bestimmen Sie, wie separierte CMYK-Daten ausgegeben werden. • Aus: Mit dieser Einstellung wird jede Separation einzeln gedruckt. • Ein: Mit dieser Einstellung werden die Separationen übereinander gelegt und als nicht separierter Farbdruck (Composite) ausgegeben. Außerdem werden die Einstellungen der folgenden Optionen automatisch wie folgt festgelegt: Farbmodus (CMYK), Schwarze Texte/Grafiken (Normal), Schwarz überdrucken (Aus) und Spot-Farbabstimmung (Aus). Informationen über die Verwendung der Option „Separationen überdrucken“ in Anwendungen wie Adobe Photoshop finden Sie im Dokument Fiery Farbreferenz. Composite-Ausgabe überdrucken Beim Drucken zweier einander überlappender Objekte gibt es die Möglichkeit, die Farbe des überlappten Objekts (im Hintergrund) auszusparen oder aber sie zu drucken und mit der Farbe des überlappenden Objekts (im Vordergrund) zu überdrucken. Im zweiten Fall – beim Überdrucken – scheint die Farbe des Hintergrundobjekts an den Stellen, an denen sich die Objekte überlappen, durch die Farbe des Vordergrundobjekts hindurch. Dies führt dazu, dass die resultierende Farbe an den Überlappungsstellen einer Kombination der Farben der beiden Objekte entspricht. Beim Aussparen deckt das Vordergrundobjekt die Farbe des Hintergrundobjekts vollkommen ab. Mit der Option „Composite-Ausgabe überdrucken“ können Sie veranlassen, dass überdruckte Objekte in der Weise ausgegeben werden, in der sie in der Quelldatei definiert sind. Standardmäßig ist die Option „Composite-Ausgabe überdrucken“ deaktiviert; in diesem Fall werden die Farben überlappter Objekte ausgespart. Die Option „Composite-Ausgabe überdrucken“ wird für PostScript- und PDF-Aufträge unterstützt, die mit einem der folgenden Anwendungsprogramme erstellt wurden: • Adobe Acrobat • Adobe Illustrator • Adobe InDesign • Macromedia FreeHand • QuarkXPress • CorelDRAW Wird die Option „Composite-Ausgabe überdrucken“ für einen Auftrag aktiviert, in dem Spot-Farben verwendet werden, muss die optionale Erweiterung Spot-On auf dem Fiery X3eTY2 aktiviert werden. Zu beachten ist, dass ein Auftrag mit mehr als 32 Spot-Farben u. U. nicht in der erwarteten Weise gedruckt wird. COLORWISE DRUCKOPTIONEN 93 Ausgabeprofil Da das definierte Ausgabeprofil auf alle Daten eines Auftrags angewendet wird, sollten Sie sich vor dem Drucken vergewissern, dass das gewählte Ausgabeprofil für Ihren Auftrag geeignet ist. Das Standardausgabeprofil umfasst ein Profil für Ihren Kopierer, das dessen Farbeigenschaften beschreibt, und Sollwerte für die Kalibrierung, die das erwartete Verhalten des Kopierermodells beschreiben. Mit der Komponente Profile Manager der ColorWise Pro Tools können Sie ein eigenes (anwenderdefiniertes) Ausgabeprofil auf den Fiery X3eTY2 laden (siehe Abschnitt Profile Manager auf Seite 25). Die geladenen Ausgabeprofile werden zunächst mit den Kalibrierungssollwerten verknüpft, die mit dem standardmäßigen Ausgabeprofil verbunden sind. Wie erwähnt, können die D-Max-Werte der Kalibrierungssollwerte separat bearbeitet werden. Wenn Sie mit dem PostScript-Treiber drucken und die bidirektionale Kommunikation aktiviert ist, werden die Namen der geladenen und eigenen Profile im Menü „Ausgabeprofil“ angezeigt. Wenn die bidirektionale Kommunikation nicht aktiviert wurde, werden für die geladenen bzw. die eigenen Profile die generischen Bezeichnungen „Ausgabe-1“ bis „Ausgabe-10“ angezeigt. Weitere Informationen über die bidirektionale Kommunikation finden Sie in den Dokumenten Drucken unter Windows und Drucken unter Mac OS. Aktivieren Sie die Option „Mediumabhängiges Profil“, wenn (anstelle der Einstellungen eines bestimmten einzelnen Ausgabeprofils) für jedes Medium, das in einem Auftrag verwendet wird, automatisch das dem Medium zugeordnete Ausgabeprofil verwendet werden soll. Weitere Informationen finden Sie im Abschnitt Verwenden mediumabhängiger Ausgabeprofile auf Seite 27. Wählen Sie die Einstellung „Serverstandard“, wenn das mit der Komponente Color Setup als Standard festgelegte Ausgabeprofil verwendet werden soll. Weitere Informationen über die Komponente Color Setup finden Sie im Abschnitt Color Setup auf Seite 32. Nur Schwarz für Grautöne Wenn Sie die Option „Nur Schwarz für Grautöne“ aktivieren, wird jeder Grauton (d. h. jede Farbe mit gleich großen Anteilen von Rot, Grün und Blau [R=G=B] bzw. Cyan, Gelb und Magenta [C=Y=M] und jeder nur mit Schwarz definierte Grauton [nur K]) in einem Auftrag ausschließlich mit schwarzen Toner (nicht mit CMYK-Schwarz) gedruckt. Zusätzlich können Sie angeben, ob die Option „Nur Schwarz für Grautöne“ auf Text- und Grafikobjekte beschränkt oder auf Text-, Grafik- und Bildobjekte angewendet werden soll. COLORWISE DRUCKOPTIONEN 94 Im Hinblick auf diese Druckoption sind die folgenden Einschränkungen zu beachten: • Die Option „Nur Schwarz für Grautöne“ wirkt sich auf vorseparierte Aufträge nur insofern aus, als bei ihrer Deaktivierung (Einstellung „Aus“) jede Separation als CMYKGrau gedruckt wird, da die Separationen als Graustufenbilder behandelt werden. • Wird für die Option „CMYK-Simulationsverfahren“ die Einstellung „Komplett (Quell-GCR)“ oder „Schnell“ festgelegt, hat die Einstellung der Option „Nur Schwarz für Grautöne (CMYK)“ keinen Einfluss auf die Ausgabe. • Wird für die Option „RGB-Separation“ die Einstellung „Simulation“ verwendet, wird die Option „Nur Schwarz für Grautöne (RGB)“ deaktiviert. Umgekehrt steht, wenn die Option „Nur Schwarz für Grautöne (RGB)“ aktiviert wird, die Einstellung „Simulation“ der Option „RGB-Separation“ nicht zur Verfügung. • Wird für die Option „Schwarze Texte/Grafiken“ die Einstellung „Reines Schwarz – Ein“ oder „CMYK-Schwarz – Ein“ verwendet, so hat im Falle von reinschwarzen Text- und Grafikobjekten (100%K) diese Festlegung Vorrang vor der Option „Nur Schwarz für Grautöne“. • Ein Grauton, der im Auftrag als Spot-Farbe definiert ist, ist von der Festlegung der Druckoption „Nur Schwarz für Grautöne“ nicht betroffen. Farbwiedergabe Mit der Option „Farbwiedergabe“ aktivieren Sie ein CRD für die Konvertierung der Farbdaten. Sie können mit dieser Option die Farbausgabe von Druckbildern beeinflussen, z. B. von Dokumenten aus Büroanwendungen oder von RGB-Fotos aus Photoshop. Der Fiery X3eTY2 unterstützt vier Farbwiedergabearten, die auf ICC-Profilen nach Industriestandard basieren. Fiery X3eTY2 Farbwiedergabeart Optimal für Äquivalente ICCFarbwiedergabe Foto: Bei der fotorealistischen Wiedergabe erscheinen RGB-Farben außerhalb des Gamuts des Ausgabegeräts weniger gesättigt als bei der Einstellung „Präsentation“. Die Relationen zwischen den Farben werden in der Ausgabe beibehalten. Fotos, Scans und Bilder von Foto-CDs bzw. von digitalen Kameras. Bild, Kontrast und Wahrnehmung Präsentation: Diese Farbwiedergabe eignet sich für leuchtende, gesättigte Farben; die gedruckten Farben werden aber nicht präzise mit den Monitorfarben abgestimmt. Farben im Gamut (z. B. Hautfarben) werden sehr gut wiedergegeben. Diese Wiedergabeart ähnelt der Wiedergabeart „Foto“. Illustrationen und Grafiken für Präsentationen. Diese Art der Wiedergabe eignet sich für Auftragsseiten, die sowohl Präsentationsgrafiken als auch Fotos enthalten. Sättigung, Grafiken COLORWISE DRUCKOPTIONEN 95 RGB-Separation Die Option „RGB-Separation“ bestimmt, wie RGB- (und Lab- und XYZ-) Farben in den CMYK-Farbraum konvertiert werden. Diese Option hat eine beschreibende Bezeichnung. Sie soll zum Ausdruck bringen, dass die Option die Farbräume festlegt, die auf dem Fiery X3eTY2 verwendet werden, um RGB-Daten in CMYK-Werte zu ‚separieren‘. Mit den beiden Einstellungen für diese Option können Sie bestimmen, ob RGB-Daten in den vollen Gamut des Kopierermodells (Ausgabe) oder zuvor in den Gamut eines anderen digitalen Ausgabegeräts oder eines Offsetdruckstandards (Simulation) konvertiert werden. Mithilfe dieser Funktion können Sie für RGB-Daten mit Ihrem Ausgabegerät das Farbverhalten eines anderen Geräts simulieren. Wenn Ihnen z. B. ein qualitativ gutes ICCProfil eines anderen Ausgabegeräts zur Verfügung steht, können Sie mit Ihrem Kopierer das Verhalten dieses anderen Geräts simulieren. Die RGB-Separation ist darüber hinaus für Prepress-Anwendungen von Vorteil. Mit ihr können Sie z. B. das Aussehen eines RGB-Scans unter verschiedenen Offsetdruckbedingungen testen, ohne dass Sie die RGB-Daten für jede dieser Bedingungen erneut in CMYKDaten konvertieren müssen. Wenn die gewünschte Druckbedingung gefunden wurde, können Sie Ihre Datei unter Verwendung des CMYK-Simulationsprofils, das für den Test eingesetzt wurde, in den CMYK-Farbraum konvertieren. Relative Farbmetrik: Diese Farbwiedergabe unterstützt die Weißpunkttransformation zwischen den Weißpunktwerten von Quelle und Ziel. Damit wird z. B. das bläuliche Weiß (Grau) eines Monitors durch Papierweiß ersetzt. Mit dieser Wiedergabeart können sichtbare Ränder zwischen leeren Bereichen und weißen Objekten vermieden werden. Diese Einstellung sollte benutzt werden, wenn die Farbabstimmung wichtig ist, weiße Farben im Dokument aber als Papierweiß gedruckt werden sollen. Zusammen mit dem PostScript- Farbmanagement kann diese Wiedergabeart benutzt werden, um CMYK-Daten zu Simulationszwecken zu manipulieren. Farbmetrisch relativ Absolute Farbmetrik: Diese Farbwiedergabe unterstützt die Weißpunkttransformation zwischen den Weißpunktwerten von Quelle und Ziel nicht. Damit wird z. B. das bläuliche Weiß (Grau) eines Monitors nicht durch Papierweiß ersetzt. Diese Einstellung sollte verwendet werden, wenn akkurate Farben erzielt werden sollen und sichtbare Ränder als weniger störend empfunden werden. Zusammen mit dem PostScript-Farbmanagement kann diese Wiedergabeart benutzt werden, um CMYKDaten zu Simulationszwecken zu manipulieren. Farbmetrisch absolut Fiery X3eTY2 Farbwiedergabeart Optimal für Äquivalente ICCFarbwiedergabe COLORWISE DRUCKOPTIONEN 96 HINWEIS: Verwenden Sie die Druckoption „RGB-Separation“ in Verbindung mit der Option „Ausgabeprofil“ oder der Option „CMYK-Simulationsprofil“. • Ausgabe: Mit dieser Einstellung werden alle RGB-Farben in den CMYK-Farbraum Ihres Kopierermodells konvertiert (wenn Sie für die Option „Ausgabeprofil“ den „Druckerstandard“ wählen) oder in einen spezifischen CMYK-Farbraum für Ihren Kopierer (wenn Sie für die Option „Ausgabeprofil“ eine der Einstellungen „Ausgabe-1“ bis „Ausgabe-10“ wählen). • Simulation: Mit dieser Einstellung werden alle RGB-Farben in den CMYK-Farbraum für die ausgewählte Simulation konvertiert (wählen Sie daher mit der Option „CMYKSimulationsprofil“ die gewünschte Simulation). RGB-Quellprofil Mit der Option „RGB-Quellprofil“ können Sie die Merkmale von RGB-Daten in einem Dokument so definieren, dass auf dem Fiery X3eTY2 die korrekte Farbkonvertierung erfolgt. Häufig verwendete Monitorfarbräume sind über die entsprechenden Einstellungen des Druckertreibers bzw. des Fiery X3eTY2 verfügbar. Für andere Farbräume können Sie mit der Komponente Profile Manager der ColorWise Pro Tools eigene Monitor- und Scannerprofile auf den Druckserver laden. Bei allen Einstellungen außer „Nein“ werden auf dem Fiery X3eTY2 die Angaben und Profile für den Quellfarbraum anderer Farbmanagementsysteme überschrieben. Wenn Sie z. B. auf Ihrem Mac OS Computer ein ColorSync Systemprofil gewählt haben, wird dieses Profil durch die Einstellung der Option „RGB-Quellprofil“ überschrieben. Wenn Sie nicht wollen, dass der zuvor gewählte Quellfarbraum überschrieben wird, müssen Sie die Einstellung „Nein“ für die Option „RGB-Quellprofil“ wählen. Mit allen Einstellungen außer „Nein“ erzielen Sie auch plattformübergreifend konsistente Ausgaben auf dem Fiery X3eTY2, da die Farbraumdefinitionen bei allen Einstellungen außer „Nein“ überschrieben werden. Nachfolgend werden die Einstellungen für die Option „RGB-Quellprofil“ des Fiery X3eTY2 aufgeführt. • EFIRGB: Mit dieser Einstellung wählen Sie einen von EFI definierten Quellfarbraum; diese Einstellung wird empfohlen, wenn keine detaillierten Informationen über die RGB-Daten vorhanden sind. • sRGB (PC): Mit dieser Einstellung wird das Profil eines standardmäßigen Monitors für einen Windows-Computer festgelegt. • Apple Standard: Mit dieser Einstellung wird das Profil eines standardmäßigen Monitors für einen Mac OS Computer festgelegt. • Adobe RGB (1998): Diese Einstellung steht für einen von Adobe definierten Farbraum, der in der Druckvorstufe als Standardarbeitsfarbraum in Photoshop 5 verwendet wird. • ECI-RGB: Dies ist der Farbraum, der von der European Color Initiative (ECI) als RGBArbeitsfarbraum und für den Austausch von Farbdaten zwischen Werbeagenturen, Verlagen, Reprobetrieben und Druckereien empfohlen wird. COLORWISE DRUCKOPTIONEN 97 • Fiery RGB: Dieser von EFI definierte Farbraum wird für Office-Anwendungen empfohlen. Dieser Farbraum ähnelt dem Farbraum „EFIRGB“, ist aber größer und kann Ausgaben mit intensiveren Blautönen erzeugen. • Quelle 1-10: Mit diesen Einstellungen wählen Sie Definitionen, die Sie als RGBQuellprofile geladen haben. Wenn Sie mit dem PostScript-Treiber drucken und die bidirektionale Kommunikation aktiviert ist, werden die tatsächlichen Namen der geladenen Profile im Menü „RGB-Quellprofil“ angezeigt. Wenn die bidirektionale Kommunikation nicht aktiviert wurde, werden für die geladenen bzw. die eigenen Profile die generischen Bezeichnungen „Quelle-1“ bis „Quelle-10“ angezeigt. Weitere Informationen über die bidirektionale Kommunikation finden Sie in den Dokumenten Drucken unter Windows und Drucken unter Mac OS. • Nein: Mit dieser Einstellung weisen Sie den Fiery X3eTY2 an, die RGB-Quelle zu verwenden, die Sie an anderer Stelle (z. B. innerhalb Ihrer Anwendung) definiert haben. Bei der Einstellung „Nein“ ist das Aussehen der Farben nicht unabhängig vom Dateityp. RGB-Dateien im TIFF-Format werden z. B. in anderer Weise ausgegeben als RGBDateien im EPS-Format. Bei der Einstellung „Nein“ werden PostScript-RGB-Daten, für die ein Quellfarbraum definiert ist, mit dem CRD konvertiert, das mit der Option „Farbwiedergabe“ festgelegt wurde (siehe Farbwiedergabe auf Seite 94). RGB-Daten, die nicht im PostScript-Format vorliegen, und RGB-Daten ohne eine Definition des Quellfarbraums, werden mit einem allgemeinen Verfahren für die Unterfarbenbeseitigung konvertiert. Spot-Farbabstimmung Die Option „Spot-Farbabstimmung“ sorgt für die automatische Abstimmung von Spot- Farben mit den bestmöglichen CMYK-Äquivalenten. • Ein: Bei dieser Einstellung verwendet der Fiery X3eTY2 die interne Referenztabelle, um Spot-Farben mit den bestmöglichen CMYK-Äquivalenten zu drucken, die der verwendete Kopierer erzeugen kann. (Beim Hinzufügen neuer Ausgabeprofile werden neue Tabellen generiert.) Der Fiery X3eTY2 verwendet gegebenenfalls die CMYK-Äquivalente, die mit Spot-On definiert wurden (siehe Seite 60). • Aus: Der Fiery X3eTY2 verarbeitet die Spot-Farben als CMYK-Daten und verwendet die CMYK-Werte, die vom Hersteller der Spot-Farben (z. B. PANTONE) vorgegeben werden. Es handelt sich dabei um die CMYK-Werte, die auch von Anwendungen mit Spot-Farbbibliotheken verwendet werden. HINWEIS: Spot-Farben, die nicht in der internen Referenztabelle enthalten sind, werden als CMYK-Farben behandelt. COLORWISE DRUCKOPTIONEN 98 Für Aufträge mit Spot-Farben muss die Option „Spot-Farbabstimmung“ aktiviert werden, es sei denn, Sie drucken Offsetsimulationen. Zum Drucken von Simulationen müssen Sie diese Option deaktivieren („Aus“) und eine geeignete Einstellung für die Option „CMYKSimulationsprofil“ wählen (siehe Seite 90). Bei Aufträgen im PDF-Format, die Spot-Farben beinhalten, die nicht in der internen Referenztabelle enthalten sind, können die ursprünglichen Spot-Farben durch das Aktivieren der Option „Spot-Farbabstimmung“ beibehalten werden. Der Fiery X3eTY2 verwendet die interne Referenztabelle, um bestmögliche CMYK-Äquivalente der ursprünglichen Spot- Farben zu erstellen. HINWEIS: Die Option „Spot-Farbabstimmung“ kann nur für unseparierte Farbdrucke (Composite) verwendet werden; für Separationen ist die Option ohne Belang. Spot-Farbabstimmung und PANTONE-Farbreferenz für gestrichenes Papier Die PANTONE-Farbreferenz für gestrichenes Papier wird abhängig von der Einstellung der Option „Spot-Farbabstimmung“ unterschiedlich gedruckt (siehe Fiery Farbreferenz). • Ein: Bei dieser Einstellung verwendet der Fiery X3eTY2 die interne Referenztabelle bzw. die Spot-On Farbbibliotheken (sofern Spot-on verfügbar ist), um PANTONE-Farben mit den bestmöglichen CMYK-Äquivalenten für den Kopierer zu drucken. Dabei erscheint die PANTONE-Farbnummer unter jedem Farbfeld. Weitere Informationen über Spot-On finden Sie auf Seite 60. • Aus: Bei dieser Einstellung verwendet der Fiery X3eTY2 zum Drucken der Farbfelder die von Pantone, Inc. empfohlenen CMYK-Werte (die in den Anwendungen verwendet werden, die die PANTONE-Bibliotheken bereitstellen). In diesem Fall werden die verwendeten CMYK-Werte und die PANTONE-Farbnummer unter jedes Farbfeld gedruckt. Diese CMYK-Werte werden unter Verwendung der Einstellungen für die Optionen „CMYK-Simulationsprofil“ und „Ausgabeprofil“ gedruckt. Farbsubstitution Mit Spot-On können Sie eine Liste von Ersatzfarben erstellen. Auf dieser Basis können Farben, die in einem Dokument als RGB- oder CMYK-Werte spezifiziert werden, durch andere Farben ersetzt werden, deren CYMK-Farbwerte aus einer Spot-On Farbbibliothek abgerufen werden. Diese Funktion ermöglicht die exakte Farbsteuerung und das individuelle Überschreiben einzelner RBG- und CMYK-Farben. Damit in einem Auftrag spezifizierte Farben durch Ersatzfarben ersetzt werden können, müssen Sie für den betreffenden Auftrag die Option „Farbsubstitution“ aktivieren. Weitere Informationen über das Erstellen und Verwenden von Ersatzfarben finden Sie im Abschnitt Spot-On und Ersatzfarben auf Seite 74. COLORWISE DRUCKOPTIONEN 99 Druckertreiber und Druckoptionen Der Druckertreiber erstellt eine PostScript-Datei, die die von der Anwendung erzeugten Instruktionen und die gewählten Einstellungen der ColorWise Druckoptionen enthält. Diese PostScript-Datei wird vom Druckertreiber an den Fiery X3eTY2 gesendet. Der Fiery X3eTY2 führt die PostScript-Verarbeitung und die Farbkonvertierung aus und leitet die gerasterten Farbdaten an den Kopierer. Festlegen von Druckoptionen unter Windows Im Folgenden wird beschrieben, wie Sie die Druckoptionen für das Farbmanagement mit den Adobe und Microsoft PostScript-Druckertreibern für Windows einstellen können. Diese PostScript 3 Druckertreiber erlauben es Ihnen, die Farbfunktionen des Fiery X3eTY2 in vollem Umfang zu nutzen. Führen Sie die folgenden Schritte aus, bevor Sie fortfahren: • Installieren Sie den Druckertreiber und die PPD-Datei für den Fiery X3eTY2 (siehe Drucken unter Windows). • Konfigurieren Sie den Fiery X3eTY2 zum Drucken (siehe Drucken unter Windows). HINWEIS: Die folgenden Abbildungen und Erläuterungen gelten nicht für alle Anwendungen. Viele Anwendungen (z. B. Adobe PageMaker, Adobe Photoshop, Adobe Illustrator, QuarkXPress und CorelDRAW) haben zusätzlich zu den im Druckertreiber angebotenen Optionen eigene Farbmanagementoptionen. Spezifische Informationen für bestimmte Anwendungen finden Sie im Dokument Fiery Farbreferenz. Anhand der folgenden Schritte können Sie die Farboptionen auf Windows-Computern einstellen. DRUCKOPTIONEN UNTER WINDOWS EINSTELLEN 1 Wählen Sie „Drucken“ in Ihrer Anwendung. 2 Wählen Sie den Fiery X3eTY2 als Drucker und klicken Sie auf „Eigenschaften“. Im Dialogfenster mit den Eigenschaften wird die Registerkarte „Fiery Druckfunktionalität“ angezeigt. COLORWISE DRUCKOPTIONEN 100 3 Klicken Sie auf das Symbol „Farbe“. 4 Legen Sie die Einstellungen für die Druckoptionen fest. Informationen über die einzelnen ColorWise Druckoptionen finden Sie auf Seite 86. 5 Klicken Sie auf „Profi-Einstellungen“. Daraufhin wird das Dialogfenster „Profi-Farbeinstellungen“ angezeigt. In diesem Dialogfenster finden Sie die Mehrzahl der ColorWise Druckoptionen für den Fiery X3eTY2. COLORWISE DRUCKOPTIONEN 101 6 Klicken Sie auf „Aktualisieren“, um die aktuellen Einstellungen des Fiery X3eTY2 anzuzeigen. Wenn die Schaltfläche „Aktualisieren“ nicht angezeigt wird, müssen Sie die bidirektionale Kommunikation aktivieren. Anleitungen für das Aktivieren der bidirektionalen Kommunikation finden Sie im Dokument Drucken unter Windows. 7 Legen Sie die Einstellungen für die angebotenen ColorWise Druckoptionen fest. Für die meisten Anwendungsgebiete bieten die Standardeinstellungen eine ausreichende Farbsteuerung. Informationen über die einzelnen Optionen finden Sie auf Seite 86. 8 Klicken Sie auf „OK“, um das Fenster „Profi-Farbeinstellungen“ zu schließen. 9 Klicken Sie auf „OK“, um das Fenster mit den Eigenschaften zuschließen, und nochmals auf „OK“, um Ihren Auftrag zu senden. Festlegen von Druckoptionen für das Farbmanagement unter Mac OS Im Folgenden wird beschrieben, wie Sie die Druckoptionen für das Farbmanagement mit den Druckertreibern für Mac OS einstellen können. Führen Sie die folgenden Schritte aus, bevor Sie fortfahren: • Installieren Sie die PPD-Datei für den Fiery X3eTY2 (siehe Drucken unter Mac OS). • Konfigurieren Sie den Fiery X3eTY2 für den Druckbetrieb (siehe Drucken unter Mac OS). DRUCKOPTIONEN UNTER MAC OS X EINSTELLEN 1 Wählen Sie „Drucken“ in Ihrer Anwendung. Das Dialogfenster „Drucken“ wird angezeigt. 2 Wählen Sie unter Mac OS X v10.3.x und neueren Versionen „ColorSync“ im Menü mit der aktuellen Einstellung „Kopien & Seiten“. Die Seite „ColorSync“ wird angezeigt. COLORWISE DRUCKOPTIONEN 102 3 Wählen Sie „Druckerspezifisch” im Menü „Farbkonvertierung“. 4 Wählen Sie „ColorWise“ im Menü mit der aktuellen Einstellung „ColorSync“. Die Seite „ColorWise“ wird angezeigt. 5 Aktivieren Sie die Option „Bidirektionale Kommunikation verwenden“. Anleitungen für das Aktivieren der bidirektionalen Kommunikation finden Sie im Dokument Drucken unter Mac OS. 6 Legen Sie die Einstellungen für die Druckoptionen fest. Informationen über die einzelnen ColorWise Druckoptionen finden Sie auf Seite 86. COLORWISE DRUCKOPTIONEN 103 7 Klicken Sie im Bereich „Druckmodus“ auf „Einstellungen“. Daraufhin wird das Dialogfenster mit den ColorWise Profi-Farbeinstellungen angezeigt. 8 Wählen Sie die Einstellungen für die angebotenen ColorWise Druckoptionen. Informationen über die einzelnen ColorWise Druckoptionen finden Sie auf Seite 86. 9 Klicken Sie auf „OK“. Die Seite „ColorWise” wird wieder angezeigt. 10 Klicken Sie auf „Drucken“. Aktivieren von Device Link-Profilen im Fenster „Profi-Farbeinstellungen“ Sie können für einen einzelnen Auftrag die Verwendung eines Device Link-Profils im Fiery X3eTY2 Druckertreiber veranlassen, sofern im Treiber die bidirektionale Kommunikation aktiviert wurde. Wenn Sie ein Device Link-Profil aktivieren, wird im Fenster „Profi- Farbeinstellungen“ dessen Name nach der Meldung „Benutztes Device Link-Profil“ angezeigt. HINWEIS: Wenn die bidirektionale Kommunikation nicht aktiviert wurde und Sie eine Kombination aus RGB-Quellprofil und Ausgabeprofil wählen, die der Festlegung in einem Device Link-Profil entspricht, wird das betreffende Device Link-Profil ebenfalls aktiviert; in diesem Fall wird allerdings der Name des betreffenden Profils nicht im Fenster „Profi- Farbeinstellungen“ angezeigt. Weitere Informationen über das Installieren und Zuordnen von Device Link-Profilen finden Sie auf Seite 27. COLORWISE DRUCKOPTIONEN 104 HINWEIS: Die Vorgehensweise zum Aktivieren eines Device Link-Profils im Fenster „Profi- Farbeinstellungen“ sind unter Windows und Mac OS X sehr ähnlich. Im Folgenden werden die entsprechenden Windows-Abbildungen verwendet. Auf Unterschiede werden Sie ggf. hingewiesen. DEVICE LINK-PROFILE IM FIERY X3ETY2 DRUCKERTREIBER AKTIVIEREN 1 Aktivieren Sie die bidirektionale Kommunikation. Anleitungen für das Aktivieren der bidirektionalen Kommunikation finden Sie im Dokument Drucken unter Windows bzw. Drucken unter Mac OS. 2 Wählen Sie „Drucken“ in Ihrer Anwendung. 3 Wählen Sie den Fiery X3eTY2 als Drucker und klicken Sie auf „Eigenschaften“. 4 Klicken Sie auf das Symbol „Farbe“. 5 Klicken Sie auf „Profi-Einstellungen“. 6 Wählen Sie ein Quellprofil und ein Ausgabeprofil. Wenn Sie dabei eine Kombination von Quellprofil und Ausgabeprofil wählen, die einer in einem Device Link-Profil festgelegten Kombination entspricht, wird automatisch das betreffende Device Link-Profil verwendet. Wird ein Device Link-Profil aktiviert, wird der Inhalt des Fensters „Profi-Farbeinstellungen“ automatisch aktualisiert; dabei werden u. U. bestimmte Optionen ausgeblendet. Im Bereich der Option „RGB-Quellprofil“ bzw. „CMYK-Simulationsprofil“ erscheint die Meldung „Benutztes Device Link-Profil“ zusammen mit dem Namen des verwendeten Profils. 7 Klicken Sie auf „OK“, um das Fenster „Profi-Farbeinstellungen“ zu schließen. 8 Klicken Sie auf „OK“, um das Fenster mit den Eigenschaften zuschließen, und nochmals auf „OK“, um Ihren Auftrag zu senden. 1 Benutztes Device Link-Profil 1 IMPORTIEREN VON DENSITOMETERMESSWERTEN 105 IMPORTIEREN VON DENSITOMETERMESSWERTEN Im Folgenden wird das Dateiformat „Simple ASCII File Format“ (SAIFF) beschrieben, mit dem Sie Dichtemesswerte von unterschiedlichen Messinstrumenten importieren können. Wenn Sie eigene Messwerte verwenden wollen, die Sie mit einem alternativen Messinstrument ermittelt haben, müssen Sie die gemessenen Werte in einer Textdatei erfassen, deren Struktur unten beschrieben wird. Simple ASCII Import File Format (SAIFF) Dieses Format beschreibt Status T-Messwerte; es wird für den Import in die Komponente Calibrator der ColorWise Pro Tools verwendet. Es gibt drei unterstützte Dateiformate: • 1D Status T-Dichte für EFI Messwerteseiten mit 21 Farbfeldern • 1D Status T-Dichte für EFI Messwerteseiten mit 34 Farbfeldern • 1D Status T-Dichte für andere Seiten (mit maximal 256 Farbfeldern pro Druckfarbe) Das Dateiformat ist ASCII, und es werden keine Tabulatoren verwendet. Als Begrenzungszeichen sind ein oder mehrere Leerzeichen zulässig. Leerzeilen sind nicht zulässig. Jede Zeile in der Datei repräsentiert vier Farbfelder (C, M, Y, K) des jeweiligen Druckfarbwerts. Kommentarzeilen können an jeder Stelle in die Datei eingefügt werden. Sie müssen mit dem Zeichen # beginnen, auf das ein Leerzeichen folgt. (Eine Zeile, in der auf das Anfangszeichen # ein anderes Zeichen als das Leerzeichen folgt, ist reserviert.) Jeder Kommentar muss innerhalb einer Zeile abgeschlossen sein. Jede Datenzeile enthält fünf Werte. Die erste Zahl ist die fortlaufende Farbfeldnummer (bei EFI 21 und EFI 34 Seiten) oder der prozentuale Druckfarbwert (bei anderen Seiten). Die nachfolgenden vier Werte sind die Dichten für C, M, Y und K im jeweiligen Farbfeld. Die Zeilen können aufsteigend entweder nach den fortlaufenden Farbfeldnummern oder nach den prozentualen Farbwerten angeordnet werden. Unter Windows muss die Textdatei die Dateinamenerweiterung „.cm1“ erhalten. Für Mac OS muss die Datei den Dateityp „TEXT“ haben. Bei EFI 21 und EFI 34 sind die Messwerte papierabhängig. Korrespondiert bei anderen Seiten die erste Zeile der Textdatei mit dem Druckfarbwert 0 (Null), geht die Komponente Calibrator von absoluten Messwerten aus und passt sie so an, dass auch sie papierabhängig werden; dazu werden die Dichtewerte in der ersten Zeile von den Dichtewerten der nachfolgenden Farbfelder subtrahiert. IMPORTIEREN VON DENSITOMETERMESSWERTEN 106 Beispiel: 1D Status T-Dichte für EFI 21 Mit diesem Dateiformat werden die Status T-Dichtemesswerte für die EFI Messwerteseite mit 21 Farbfeldern (EFI 21) beschrieben. Der Wert in der ersten Spalte ist die Nummer des jeweiligen Farbfelds. Das erste Farbfeld muss die Nummer 1, das letzte Farbfeld die Nummer 21 haben. #!EFI 3 # EFI ColorWise 2.0 Data type: 1DST21 # Cyan Magent Yellow Black 1 0.0300 0.0400 0.0200 0.0400 2 0.0600 0.0700 0.0800 0.0700 3 0.1000 0.1000 0.1000 0.1000 (…weitere Daten…) 20 1.6700 1.3400 0.8900 1.6700 21 1.7200 1.4300 0.9300 1.7500 Beispiel: 1D Status T-Dichte für EFI 34 Mit diesem Dateiformat werden die Status T-Dichtemesswerte für die EFI Messwerteseite mit 34 Farbfeldern (EFI 34) beschrieben. Der Wert in der ersten Spalte ist die Nummer des jeweiligen Farbfelds. Das erste Farbfeld muss die Nummer 1, das letzte Farbfeld die Nummer 34 haben. #!EFI 3 # EFI ColorWise 2.0 Data type: 1DST34 # Cyan Magent Yellow Black 1 0.0300 0.0400 0.0200 0.0400 2 0.0600 0.0700 0.0800 0.0700 3 0.1000 0.1000 0.1000 0.1000 (…weitere Daten…) 33 1.6700 1.3400 0.8900 1.6700 34 1.7200 1.4300 0.9300 1.7500 IMPORTIEREN VON DENSITOMETERMESSWERTEN 107 Beispiel: 1D Status T-Dichte für andere Seite Mit diesem Dateiformat werden die Status T-Dichtemesswerte für eine anwenderdefinierte Farbfeldseite beschrieben. Der Wert in der ersten Spalte ist der prozentuale Tinte/Toner- Anteil am jeweiligen Farbfeld. Der erste Prozentwert muss 0 (Null), der letzte Prozentwert 100 lauten. Die Prozentwerte dazwischen müssen ansteigen. #!EFI 3 # EFI ColorWise 2.0 Data type: 1DST # percnt Cyan Magent Yellow Black 0.0000 0.0300 0.0400 0.0200 0.0400 0.3922 0.0600 0.0700 0.0800 0.0700 1.1765 0.1000 0.1000 0.1000 0.1000 (…weitere Daten…) 98.0000 1.6700 1.3400 0.8900 1.6700 100.0000 1.7200 1.4300 0.9300 1.7500 INDEX 109 A Absolute Farbmetrik, Farbwiedergabe 95 Apple Standard, Einstellung für RGBQuellprofil 96 Ausgabeprofil 93 Spot-On 31, 60, 61, 62, 71, 74, 76, 78 Ausgabeprofile 57 AutoGray 23 Autom. Überfüllung 86 B Bidirektionale Kommunikation 90, 93, 97 Bild, ICC-Farbwiedergabe 94 C Calibration Files, Ordner 13, 17 Calibrator Drucken der Vergleichsseite 37 Ermitteln von Messwerten 37 Profi-Modus 36 Verwenden 21, 35 Wiederherstellen der Standardwerte 38 CMYK Color Reference.ps 12, 17 CMYK-Simulationsprofil 90 CMYK-Simulationsverfahren 91 Color Bars, Ordner 12, 17 Color Editor 21 AutoGray 23 Color Rendering Dictionary (CRD) 9, 94 Color Setup 32 ColorWise Druckoptionen 32 Schlüsselfunktionen 8 Workflow-Diagramm 85 ColorWise Pro Tools Calibrator 21, 35 Kalibrierungsstatus 59 Composite-Ausgabe überdrucken 92 CRD 9, 94 Custom21.ps 13, 17 Custom34.ps 13, 17 D Densitometer DTP32 42 ED-100 47 Device Link-Profile Aktivieren im Fenster „Profi- Farbeinstellungen“ 103 Aktivieren mit Color Setup 33 Info über 27 Installieren 28 Zuordnen der Einstellungen 29 Dichte 57, 58 Importieren 105 DNS-Name 13, 18 Domain Name Server (DNS) 18 Drucken von Farben 88, 92, 98 Druckertreiber Bidirektionale Kommunikation 90, 93, 97 Mac OS 101 Windows 99 Druckoptionen Festlegen der Standardwerte 32 Mac OS 101 Windows 99 DTP32 Kalibrieren mit 42 DTP41 Kalibrieren mit 45 E ED-100 Importieren von Messwerten 71, 72 Kalibrieren mit 47 EFIRGB, Einstellung für RGB-Quellprofil 96 Eigene Simulationen 90 ES-1000 Importieren von Messwerten 71, 72 Kalibrieren mit 51 INDEX INDEX 110 F Farbfelder, Seite 57 Farbmanagementsystem (CMS) 8 Farbprofile 10 Farbraum 85 Farbreferenzdateien für Windows 12 Farbreferenzseiten 58 Farbsubstitution 98 CMYK (0-100%) 80 Definieren 76 Farbe für Feld im Zentrum festlegen 77 Spot-On Hauptfenster 76 Spot-On Suchfunktion 78 Drucken 78 Farbsubstitution 81 Genauigkeit 80 Herunterladen von Ersatzfarbgruppen 83 Hinzufügen 74 Hinzufügen von Ersatzfarben 75, 79 Hochladen von Ersatzfarbgruppen 83 Neue Ersatzfarbgruppe 75 Prioritätsschema 82 RGB (0-100%) 80 RGB (Gerätecode 0-255) 80 Richtlinien 80 Toleranz 80 Toleranzbereich 80 Umbennenen von Ersatzfarben 79 Workflow 74 Farbtabelle 58 Farbwiedergabe 94 Farbwiedergabearten 9, 86 Fiery Dienstprogramme, Konfigurieren der Verbindung 15, 20 Foto, Farbwiedergabeart 94 G Gerätename 14, 20 Grafiken, ICC-Farbwiedergabe 94 I ICC-Profile 10 Bearbeiten 21 Definition 9 Farbwiedergabearten 94 Herunterladen 27 Korrigieren der Graubalance 23 K Kalibrieren ColorCal 54 to 55 Kalibrierung ColorCal 54 to 55 Display des Kopierers 54 DTP32 42 DTP41 45 ED-100 47 Ermitteln des Status 59 Ermitteln von Messwerten 37 ES-1000 51 Farbfelder 57 Importieren von Dichtemesswerten 105 Kurven 37, 57 Messwerte 56 Messwerteseite 57 Sollwerte 56, 57 Übersicht 56 Vergleichsseite 37 Wiederherstellen der Standardwerte 38 Zeitplanung 58 Kennwörter, für Kalibrierung 35, 56 Komplett (Ausgabe-GCR), Einstellung für CMYK-Simulationsverfahren 91 Komplett (Quell-GCR), Einstellung für CMYKSimulationsverfahren 91 Konfigurationsseite 13, 18, 59 Kontrast, ICC-Farbwiedergabe 94 Kopiererdisplay Kalibrierung mit 54 Korrigieren der Graubalance 23 L Luminanz, Spot-On 69 M Mac OS Farbmanagementoptionen 101 Messwerteseite 57 Monitorkompensierung Spot-On 70 N Nein, Einstellung für RGB-Quellprofil 97 HDD TWAIN driver HDD TWAIN driver i Contents 1 Introduction 1.1 What Is an HDD TWAIN Driver? ........................................................1-1 1.2 How You Can Use an HDD TWAIN Driver........................................1-2 1.3 Operating Environment .....................................................................1-3 1.3.1 Software .........................................................................................1-3 1.3.2 System Requirements ....................................................................1-3 2 Installing the HDD TWAIN Driver 2.1 Installation ..........................................................................................2-1 2.2 Uninstallation......................................................................................2-3 2.2.1 Uninstalling the Driver from the Control Panel ...............................2-3 2.2.2 Uninstalling the Driver Using the CD-ROM ....................................2-4 3 Workflow 4 Loading 5 Changing the Settings 5.1 Black And White Inversion ................................................................5-1 5.2 Deleting a Loaded Document ...........................................................5-2 5.3 Adjusting the Image Quality..............................................................5-3 5.4 Changing the Color Mode .................................................................5-5 5.5 Changing the Image Resolution .......................................................5-6 6 Selecting the Device to Load From 6.1 Selecting a Network Device..............................................................6-1 6.2 Selecting from the List of Registered Devices................................6-3 6.3 Editing the List of Registered Devices.............................................6-5 6.3.1 Adding a Device .............................................................................6-6 6.3.2 Changing the Device Information ...................................................6-7 6.3.3 Copying the Device Information .....................................................6-8 6.3.4 Deleting the Device Information .....................................................6-9 HDD TWAIN driver ii 7 Loading with a Device Whose Authentication Settings Have Been Configured 7.1 Devices with User Authentication ....................................................7-1 7.2 Devices with Account Track Authentication ...................................7-3 7.3 Devices That Use a Middle Authentication Server..........................7-4 8 Troubleshooting HDD TWAIN driver iii About This Product This HDD TWAIN driver enables you to load the document data on an MFP (multifunction printer) connected to a LAN into an image processing application on a PC. Trademarks and Registered Trademarks Trademark Acknowledgements Microsoft® and Windows® are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries. RSA® BSAFETM RSA is a registered trademark of RSA Security Inc. BSAFE is a registered trademark of RSA Security Inc. in the United States and other countries. Licensing Information This product contains RSA® BSAFETM of RSA Security Inc. All other company and product names are either trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective companies. Dialog Boxes The dialog boxes shown in this manual are those that appear in Windows 7. ! Detail The dialog boxes that appear in this document may differ from those that appear on your PC, depending on the installed devices and specified settings. Note Unauthorized reproduction, translation or duplication of this document, whether in its entirety or in part, is strictly prohibited. The contents of this document are subject to change without notice. Copyright © 2005 KONICA MINOLTA BUSINESS TECHNOLOGIES, INC. All rights reserved. HDD TWAIN driver iv LICENSE ISSUES The OpenSSL toolkit stays under a dual license, i.e. both the conditions of the OpenSSL License and the original SSLeay license apply to the toolkit. See below for the actual license texts. Actually both licenses are BSD-style Open Source licenses. In case of any license issues related to OpenSSL please contact opensslcore@openssl.org. OpenSSL License Copyright © 1998-2001 The OpenSSL Project. All rights reserved. Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met: 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer. 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution. 3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display the following acknowledgment: "This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit. (http://www.openssl.org/)" 4. The names "OpenSSL Toolkit" and "OpenSSL Project" must not be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without prior written permission. For written permission, please contact opensslcore@openssl.org. 5. Products derived from this software may not be called "OpenSSL" nor may "OpenSSL" appear in their names without prior written permission of the OpenSSL Project. 6. Redistributions of any form whatsoever must retain the following acknowledgment:"This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit (http://www.openssl.org/)" HDD TWAIN driver v THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE OpenSSL PROJECT "AS IS" AND ANY EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE OpenSSL PROJECT OR ITS CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE. This product includes cryptographic software written by Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com). This product includes software written by Tim Hudson (tjh@cryptsoft.com). Original SSLeay License Copyright © 1995-1998 Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com) All rights reserved. This package is an SSL implementation written by Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com). The implementation was written so as to conform with Netscapes SSL. This library is free for commercial and non-commercial use as long as the following conditions are aheared to. The following conditions apply to all code found in this distribution, be it the RC4, RSA, lhash, DES, etc., code; not just the SSL code. The SSL documentation included with this distribution is covered by the same copyright terms except that the holder is Tim Hudson (tjh@cryptsoft.com). Copyright remains Eric Young's, and as such any Copyright notices in the code are not to be removed. If this package is used in a product, Eric Young should be given attribution as the author of the parts of the library used. This can be in the form of a textual message at program startup or in documentation (online or textual) provided with the package. HDD TWAIN driver vi Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met: 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer. 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution. 3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display the following acknowledgement: "This product includes cryptographic software written by Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com)" The word 'cryptographic' can be left out if the routines from the library being used are not cryptographic related. 4. If you include any Windows specific code (or a derivative thereof) from the apps directory (application code) you must include an acknowledgement:"This product includes software written by Tim Hudson (tjh@cryptsoft.com)" THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY ERIC YOUNG "AS IS" AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE. The licence and distribution terms for any publically available version or derivative of this code cannot be changed. i.e. this code cannot simply be copied and put under another distribution licence [including the GNU Public Licence.] Introduction 1 HDD TWAIN driver 1-1 1 Introduction 1.1 What Is an HDD TWAIN Driver? An HDD TWAIN driver loads document data that is stored on an MFP (multifunction printer) connected to a LAN. You can operate an HDD TWAIN driver from an image processing application on your PC. You can edit loaded documents using the image processing application. You can also adjust images using the HDD TWAIN driver. Introduction 1 HDD TWAIN driver 1-2 1.2 How You Can Use an HDD TWAIN Driver You can use an HDD TWAIN driver to do the following. Store documents in the MFP (multifunction printer) and load them later into a PC. Load the contents of received faxes into a PC and send the contents by email. Load the data of unsatisfactory copies into a PC, edit the data, and print it. Introduction 1 HDD TWAIN driver 1-3 1.3 Operating Environment 1.3.1 Software To use this software, you must install the following software on your PC beforehand. - TWAIN compatible image processing application 1.3.2 System Requirements Refer to the Readme file for the latest information about service packs and so on. Operating system Windows XP Home Edition (SP3 or later) Windows XP Professional (SP3 or later) Windows XP Professional x64 Edition (SP2 or later) Windows Vista Home Basic (SP2 or later)* Windows Vista Home Premium (SP2 or later)* Windows Vista Business (SP2 or later)* Windows Vista Enterprise (SP2 or later)* Windows Vista Ultimate (SP2 or later)* Windows 7 Home Basic (SP1 or later)* Windows 7 Home Premium (SP1 or later)* Windows 7 Professional (SP1 or later)* Windows 7 Enterprise (SP1 or later)* Windows 7 Ultimate (SP1 or later)* *Compatible with 32-bit (x86) and 64-bit (x64) environments PC Depends on the specifications of the OS Memory Depends on the specifications of the OS Network A PC whose TCP/IP protocol settings have been configured correctly Hard disk 20 MB or more of free disk space is necessary Installing the HDD TWAIN Driver 2 HDD TWAIN driver 2-1 2 Installing the HDD TWAIN Driver This chapter explains how to install and uninstall the HDD TWAIN driver. The examples in this section will use Windows 7 as the OS. 2.1 Installation To install the HDD TWAIN driver, follow the procedure below. Procedure 1 Insert the User Software CD-ROM into your PC's CD-ROM drive. The CD's menu will appear. 2 Under "Install Scanner", select "HDD TWAIN driver". The "User Account Control" window will appear. 3 Click [Yes]. 4 Afterward, follow the directions that appear on the window. The installation will start, and the necessary files will be copied. After all the files have been copied, the installation completed window opens. 5 Click [Finish]. The HDD TWAIN driver installation window will close. 2 Note To use the HDD TWAIN driver with the 32-bit version of Photoshop CS5, you need to download the TWAIN plugin from the Adobe website and install it. The TWAIN driver is not compatible with the 64-bit version of Photoshop CS5. Installing the HDD TWAIN Driver 2 HDD TWAIN driver 2-2 ! Detail Separate MSI-based installers have been prepared for this software. When an MSI-based installer is used, the software can be automatically distributed, and can be installed automatically in the Active Directory environment. For details, contact your service representative. Installing the HDD TWAIN Driver 2 HDD TWAIN driver 2-3 2.2 Uninstallation You can use one of the following two methods to uninstall the HDD TWAIN driver. 2.2.1 Uninstalling the Driver from the Control Panel Follow the procedure below to uninstall the HDD TWAIN driver from the control panel. Procedure 1 On the taskbar, click Start, "Control Panel", "Programs", and then "Programs and Features". – In Windows XP, click "Control Panel" and then "Add or Remove Programs". 2 Select the application that you want to uninstall from the list, and then click [Uninstall]. – In Windows XP, select the application that you want to uninstall from the list, and then click [Change/Remove]. A confirmation window opens. 3 Click [Yes]. 4 Afterward, follow the directions that appear on the window. – In the "Program Maintenance" window, click [Remove]. The uninstallation of the TWAIN driver will start. When the uninstallation is finished, the InstallShield Wizard Completed window will appear. 5 Click [Finish]. The HDD TWAIN driver uninstallation window will close. Installing the HDD TWAIN Driver 2 HDD TWAIN driver 2-4 2.2.2 Uninstalling the Driver Using the CD-ROM Follow the procedure below to uninstall the HDD TWAIN driver using the CDROM. Procedure 1 Insert the User Software CD-ROM into your PC's CD-ROM drive. The CD's menu will appear. 2 Under "Install Scanner", select "HDD TWAIN driver". The "User Account Control" window will appear. 3 Click [Yes]. 4 Afterward, follow the directions that appear on the window. – In the "Program Maintenance" window, click [Remove]. The uninstallation of the TWAIN driver will start. When the uninstallation is finished, the InstallShield Wizard Completed window will appear. 5 Click [Finish]. The HDD TWAIN driver uninstallation window will close. Workflow 3 HDD TWAIN driver 3-1 3 Workflow The following flowchart illustrates the operations that you can perform. Start the image processing application. Select the HDD TWAIN driver. Select the MFP (multifunction printer) that you want to connect to. Select a box. Changing the Settings Select a document. Click [Acquire]. (p. 5-1) Loading 4 HDD TWAIN driver 4-1 4 Loading This chapter explains how to load a document. 2 Note You cannot load documents that have been saved to a box in copy mode or print mode or documents that are in a system box. 2 Note You cannot load documents when operations on documents accumulated in boxes have been disabled on the MFP (multifunction printer) side. Procedure 1 Start the image processing application. 2 In the image processing application, select the HDD TWAIN driver. – Some applications will display a "Select Devices" command. If this is the case, before you load a document, use Select Devices to select the HDD TWAIN driver that you want to use. The "Select Devices" window appears. Loading 4 HDD TWAIN driver 4-2 3 Select the device you want to connect to, and then click [Connect]. – You can also select the device that you want to connect to from the list of registered devices. For details, see "Selecting from the List of Registered Devices" on page 6-3. – For details about the "Select Devices" dialog box, see "Selecting the Device to Load From" on page 6-1. – When user authentication and account track authentication are configured on the MFP (multifunction printer) side, various authentication windows appear. For details, see "Loading with a Device Whose Authentication Settings Have Been Configured" on page 7-1. – When the MFP (multifunction printer) is configured to disable operations by the logged in user on documents accumulated in boxes, the user will be unable to load documents. – If you select the [Use this device for future session] check box, the selected device will be used again the next time you connect. The next time you select the HDD TWAIN driver, the "Select Devices" dialog box will not open, and the Select Box dialog box will open instead. The Select Box dialog box opens. Loading 4 HDD TWAIN driver 4-3 4 Select a box. – Click [Select from Box List], and then select a box. After you select a box, click [OK]. If you know the box number, enter it in the [Box No.] box. Loading 4 HDD TWAIN driver 4-4 5 If a password is set on the box, enter the password in the [Box Password] box. 6 Click [OK]. The main window opens. 7 Click the document you want to load. Loading 4 HDD TWAIN driver 4-5 – If you select [Thumbnail] from the "Views" list, the thumbnail of the first page of the document will be displayed. You may not be able to select [Thumbnail] depending on the device. – To delete the selected document, click [Delete]. – To refresh the list, click [Refresh]. – When you want to adjust an image or delete a loaded document, click [Settings]. For details, see "Changing the Settings" on page 5-1. – When you want to change the box, click [Select]. – When you want to change the device to load from, click [Select]. For details, see "Selecting the Device to Load From" on page 6-1. Click [Acquire]. The document will be loaded, and an image of it will appear in the image processing application. Changing the Settings 5 HDD TWAIN driver 5-1 5 Changing the Settings In the "Settings" dialog box, you can adjust images and delete loaded documents. Click [OK] after you are finished. 5.1 Black And White Inversion You can invert the black and white parts of a document when you load it. In the "Settings" dialog box, select the "Scan" tab, and then select the [Negative Image] check box. 2 Reminder You can select this check box for black and white monochrome data. Changing the Settings 5 HDD TWAIN driver 5-2 5.2 Deleting a Loaded Document This section will explain how to delete a loaded document. In the "Settings" dialog box, select the "Scan" tab, and then select the [Delete after scanning] check box. Changing the Settings 5 HDD TWAIN driver 5-3 5.3 Adjusting the Image Quality This section will explain how to adjust the image quality of a loaded document. You can set the image quality in the "Image Enhancement" tab of the "Settings" dialog box. Item Description Full Enhancement Select this check box to adjust the contrast, undercolor removal, background removal, and halftone removal all at once. You can select Off, Low, Standard, or High. 2 Reminder This setting is invalid for grayscale data and black and white monochrome data. Adjust Contrast Adjust the contrast. You can select Off, Low, Standard, or High. 2 Reminder This setting is invalid for black and white monochrome data. Changing the Settings 5 HDD TWAIN driver 5-4 Remove Undercolor Removes unnecessary undercolors, such as a light background color or the discoloration of an original document due to aging or exposure to sunlight. You can select Off, Low, Standard, or High. 2 Reminder This setting is invalid for grayscale data and black and white monochrome data. Remove Background When there are characters and figures in the background, you can use this setting to remove them without affecting the characters and figures in the foreground. You can select Off, Low, Standard, or High. 2 Reminder This setting is invalid for grayscale data and black and white monochrome data. Remove Halftone Reduces the formation of moiré patterns (striped patterns that appear on scanned printed materials). You can select Off, Low, Standard, or High. 2 Reminder This setting is invalid for black and white monochrome data. Deskew Automatically corrects the scan of a skewed original document. 2 Note This feature may not work properly with small image sizes. Item Description Changing the Settings 5 HDD TWAIN driver 5-5 5.4 Changing the Color Mode This section will explain how to change a document's color mode. In the "Settings" dialog box, you can select the color mode from the "Color" list in the "Image Adjustment" tab. You can select Off, Full Color, Gray Scale, or Black. 2 Reminder This setting is not valid for some devices. 2 Reminder You cannot change grayscale to full color or change black and white monochrome to grayscale or full color. Changing the Settings 5 HDD TWAIN driver 5-6 5.5 Changing the Image Resolution This section will explain how to change the image resolution of the document. In the "Settings" dialog box, you can select the resolution from the "Resolution" list in the "Image Adjustment" tab. You can select Off, 200 e 100 dpi, 200 e 200 dpi, 300 e 300 dpi, 400 e 400 dpi, or 600 e 600 dpi. 2 Reminder This setting is not valid for some devices. Selecting the Device to Load From 6 HDD TWAIN driver 6-1 6 Selecting the Device to Load From Select a device on the network that you can load from. Select the device in the [Select Devices] dialog box that appears when you first open the HDD TWAIN driver and when you click [Select] in the main window. 6.1 Selecting a Network Device Select one of the devices that have been automatically detected on the network. Procedure 1 Open the HDD TWAIN driver, or in the main window, click [Select]. – The Select Device window opens. – A list appears that shows the devices that have been automatically detected on the network. – If you want to search for devices again, click [from Search Result]. 2 Select the device you want to connect to, and then click [Connect]. – To add a device to the list of registered devices when you connect to it, select the [Add this to the registered device list] check box. For more information about the list of registered devices, see "Editing the List of Registered Devices" on page 6-5. – If you're loading from a device whose authentication settings have been configured, enter the necessary information in the various windows that appear. For details, see "Loading with a Device Whose Authentication Settings Have Been Configured" on page 7-1. Selecting the Device to Load From 6 HDD TWAIN driver 6-2 – If you select the [Use this device for future session] check box, the "Select Devices" dialog box will not appear the next time you select the HDD TWAIN driver, and the main window will be displayed instead. The main window opens. Selecting the Device to Load From 6 HDD TWAIN driver 6-3 6.2 Selecting from the List of Registered Devices This section explains how to select a device from the list of registered devices. Procedure 1 Open the HDD TWAIN driver, or in the main window, click [Select]. The Select Device window opens. 2 Click [from Registered Devices]. Selecting the Device to Load From 6 HDD TWAIN driver 6-4 3 Select the device you want to connect to, and then click [Connect]. – If you're loading from a device whose authentication settings have been configured, enter the necessary information in the various windows that appear. For details, see "Loading with a Device Whose Authentication Settings Have Been Configured" on page 7-1. – For information about how to add, edit, copy, and delete the devices in the list of registered devices see "Editing the List of Registered Devices" on page 6-5. – If you select the [Use this device for future session] check box, the "Select Devices" dialog box will not appear the next time you select the HDD TWAIN driver, and the main window will be displayed instead. The main window opens. Selecting the Device to Load From 6 HDD TWAIN driver 6-5 6.3 Editing the List of Registered Devices This section explains how to add, edit, copy, and delete the devices in the list of registered devices. The list of registered devices appears in the "Select Devices" window when you click [from Registered Devices]. Selecting the Device to Load From 6 HDD TWAIN driver 6-6 6.3.1 Adding a Device This section explains how to add a device to the list of registered devices. Procedure 1 Click [Add]. The "Destination Settings" window appears. 2 Enter the device information, and then click [OK]. – Name: Enter the device's name. – IP Address (Host Name): Enter the device's IP address or host name. – Box No.: Enter the box number that you want to load from. – Box Password: If a password has been set for the box, select the "Save Box Password " check box, and enter the password. Selecting the Device to Load From 6 HDD TWAIN driver 6-7 6.3.2 Changing the Device Information This section explains how to change the information about a device that is registered in the list of registered devices. Procedure 1 From the list, select the item that you want to change, and click [Edit]. The "Destination Settings" window appears. 2 Enter the device information. – Name: Enter the device's name. – IP Address (Host Name): Enter the device's IP address or host name. – Box No.: Enter the box number that you want to load from. – Box Password: If a password has been set for the box, select the "Save Box Password " check box, and enter the password. Selecting the Device to Load From 6 HDD TWAIN driver 6-8 – Login Information: This button is available when authentication information was saved the last time the device was connected to. Click this button to display authentication information. To clear the login information, click [Clear Login Information]. Click [OK] to display the "Destination Settings" dialog box. 6.3.3 Copying the Device Information This section explains how to copy the information about a device that is registered in the list of registered devices. Procedure 1 In the list of registered devices, select the information of the device you want to copy, and click [Copy]. 2 The device's information is copied to the list of registered devices. Selecting the Device to Load From 6 HDD TWAIN driver 6-9 6.3.4 Deleting the Device Information This section explains how to delete the information about a device that is registered in the list of registered devices. Procedure 1 In the list of registered devices, select the information of the device you want to delete, and click [Delete]. A confirmation message appears. 2 Click [Yes]. The information about the device that you selected is deleted. Loading with a Device Whose Authentication Settings Have Been Configured 7 HDD TWAIN driver 7-1 7 Loading with a Device Whose Authentication Settings Have Been Configured 7.1 Devices with User Authentication When you connect to a device with user authentication, the "User Authentication" window appears before the main window. Enter the predetermined user name and password. For details, consult your system administrator. Procedure 1 Click [Login as Public User] or [Login as the Registered User]. – If the device's user authentication settings have been configured to allow public users, click [Login as Public User]. Otherwise, click [Login as the Registered User]. Loading with a Device Whose Authentication Settings Have Been Configured 7 HDD TWAIN driver 7-2 2 Enter the user name and password, and then click [OK]. – If you click [Login as Public User], you do not need to enter a user name or password. – If you select the [Save these settings] check box, the user name and password will already be entered the next time you select the same device. – If external server authentication has been selected in the MFP's (multifunction printer's) user authentication settings and multiple domains have been registered, after the user name, enter "@" followed by the domain name. For example, if the user name is "user@1" and the domain name is "domain" enter "user@1@domain". Loading with a Device Whose Authentication Settings Have Been Configured 7 HDD TWAIN driver 7-3 7.2 Devices with Account Track Authentication When you connect to a device with account track authentication, the "Account Track Authentication" window appears before the main window. Enter the predetermined account name and password. For details, consult your system administrator. Procedure % Enter the account name and password, and then click [OK]. – If you select the [Save these settings] check box, the account name and password will already be entered the next time you select the same device. Loading with a Device Whose Authentication Settings Have Been Configured 7 HDD TWAIN driver 7-4 7.3 Devices That Use a Middle Authentication Server When you connect to a device that uses a middle authentication server, the "Custom Login" window appears before the main window. Enter the predetermined user name and password. For details, consult your system administrator. % The dialog box shown is an example. The actual dialog box for middle authentication may vary depending on the authentication application. Troubleshooting 8 HDD TWAIN driver 8-1 8 Troubleshooting This section explains the error messages, their causes, and how to respond to them. Error Message Cause Corrective Action Can not connect to server (IP addres). The specified IP address is wrong. Check the IP address of the device that you're trying to connect to. Destination device is not supported. The device at the IP address that you specified does not support this HDD TWAIN driver. Specify a destination device that is compatible with this HDD TWAIN driver. Other users have access to the specified User Box. The box that you specified is being used by another user. Please wait a moment, and then try connecting again. Access to specified User Box is denied. A password has been set for the box you specified, or the password that you specified is incorrect. Make sure that the password is correct. The specified User Box does not exist. The box number that you specified is incorrect. Enter the correct box number. HDD not installed. User Box is not available. Because the device that you're connecting to does not have a hard drive, you cannot use boxes. Contact a service technician to install a hard drive. User Box is not accessible. Try again in a few minutes, or check with your administrator. The box is locked. Try connecting again after a few minutes, or contact the administrator. User Authentication failed. Make sure your USER NAME is correct, then enter your password again. The user name or password is incorrect. Make sure that the user name and password are correct. Your authentication account is locked. Try again in a few minutes, or check with your administrator. Your authentication account is locked. Try connecting again after a few minutes, or contact your administrator. Login is failed because of external authentication server error. The external authentication server cannot be connected to. Check to make sure that the external authentication server is operating normally. The server could not accept an authentication request. Please wait a moment, and then login again. The server could not accept an authentication request. Try connecting again after a few minutes. Troubleshooting 8 HDD TWAIN driver 8-2 Account Track Authentication failed. Make sure your Account Name is correct, then enter your password again (if required). Account track authentication failed. Make sure that the account name and password are correct. No response from scanner device. The PC was unable to communicate with the device. Check the network and device conditions. Unable to delete the specified document. The specified document could not be deleted. Check whether the document has already been deleted on the device side. Access to the document is denied. You have been denied access to the specified document. Enter the correct password for the box number. The specified document does not exist. The document that you specified does not exist. Check whether the document has already been deleted on the device side. Can not retrieve User Box information from the device. The box that you specified does not exist. Check whether the box has already been deleted on the device side. Can not retrieve thumbnail images. Thumbnail images cannot be displayed. Check whether the document has already been deleted on the device side. Please check the page range. The page that you specified does not exist. Please check the page range. Device Memory Error occurred. An error occurred in the device's memory. Check with the administrator of the device. Can not scan due to device error that has occurred. A device error has occurred. Check the device conditions. Can not start scanning because you have reached the maximum number of registered jobs. The number of registered jobs has reached the maximum value. Please wait a moment, and then try connecting again. Device busy. Can not begin scan. The device is currently being used or is in a state in which it cannot be used. Please wait a moment, and then try connecting again. If the same message still appears after you wait awhile, check with the administrator of the device. Scanning has been cancelled. The scan has been canceled by the device. Check the device conditions. A scanning error has occurred. A scanning error has occurred. Check the device conditions. An error occurred during communication with the device. An error occurred during communication with the device. Check the network and device conditions. Error Message Cause Corrective Action 2011. 7 Copyright All rights reserved. Opérations Boîte www.develop.eu ineo 223/283/363/423 Table des matières-1 Table des matières 1 Introduction 1.1 Bienvenue ........................................................................................................................................ 1-3 1.1.1 Guides de l'utilisateur ........................................................................................................................ 1-3 1.1.2 Guide de l'utilisateur .......................................................................................................................... 1-4 1.2 Conventions utilisées dans ce manuel ......................................................................................... 1-5 1.2.1 Symboles utilisés dans ce manuel..................................................................................................... 1-5 Pour utiliser cette machine en toute sécurité .................................................................................... 1-5 Instruction de procédure.................................................................................................................... 1-5 Symboles clés.................................................................................................................................... 1-6 1.2.2 Indications concernant l'original et le papier ..................................................................................... 1-6 Formats original et papier .................................................................................................................. 1-6 Indications concernant l'original et le papier ..................................................................................... 1-6 1.3 Vérifier la fonction à utiliser ........................................................................................................... 1-7 Comprendre le Flux d'opérations ...................................................................................................... 1-7 Utilisation de la structure des menus................................................................................................. 1-7 2 Présentation de la fonction boîte 2.1 Fonctions Boîte ............................................................................................................................... 2-3 2.1.1 Fonctions de boîte disponibles.......................................................................................................... 2-4 Enregistrer des documents................................................................................................................ 2-4 Utilisation des documents ................................................................................................................. 2-5 Organisation des documents............................................................................................................. 2-7 2.1.2 Configurer les paramètres d'utilisation des fonctions Boîte .............................................................. 2-8 Enregistrement d'une boîte................................................................................................................ 2-8 Si cette machine est utilisée comme appareil relais .......................................................................... 2-8 Boîte de stockage des données pour réception Mémoire obligatoire............................................... 2-8 2.2 Information ...................................................................................................................................... 2-9 2.2.1 Authentification Utilisateur ................................................................................................................. 2-9 Authentification MFP.......................................................................................................................... 2-9 Authentification par un serveur externe ............................................................................................. 2-9 Authentification Compte Département ............................................................................................ 2-10 2.2.2 Restrictions applicables à l'enregistrement des boîtes ................................................................... 2-10 Boîtes Public, Privé ou Groupe........................................................................................................ 2-10 Boîte Bulletin.................................................................................................................................... 2-10 Boîte Émission en relève.................................................................................................................. 2-10 Boîte Réception mémoire ................................................................................................................ 2-11 Boîte Relais ...................................................................................................................................... 2-11 Boîte Document sécurisé................................................................................................................. 2-11 2.2.3 Restrictions concernant le nom de fichier ....................................................................................... 2-11 2.3 Authentification et boîtes utilisateur accessibles...................................................................... 2-12 2.3.1 Lorsque Authentification utilisateur ou Compte Département est désactivé .................................. 2-12 2.3.2 Lorsque seule l'Authentification utilisateur est activée .................................................................... 2-12 2.3.3 Lorsque seul Compte Département est activé ................................................................................ 2-13 2.3.4 Lorsque Authentification utilisateur et Compte Département sont activés et synchronisés ........... 2-13 2.3.5 Lorsque Authentification utilisateur et Compte Département sont activés mais pas synchronisés 2-14 Table des matières-2 ineo 223/283/363/423 3 Panneau de contrôle/Ecran à cristaux liquides 3.1 Panneau de contrôle....................................................................................................................... 3-3 3.2 Écran tactile..................................................................................................................................... 3-6 3.2.1 Éléments de l'écran ........................................................................................................................... 3-6 Icônes qui apparaissent sur le l'écran tactile..................................................................................... 3-6 3.2.2 Affichage et utilisation du volet de gauche........................................................................................ 3-7 Liste Tâches....................................................................................................................................... 3-8 Liste Tâches - Supprimer................................................................................................................... 3-8 Liste Tâches - Détails Tâche.............................................................................................................. 3-9 Infos Boîte ........................................................................................................................................ 3-16 Utilis/Archiv - Détail ......................................................................................................................... 3-16 Utilis/Archiv - Vérif.Régl. Tâche ....................................................................................................... 3-16 Utilis/Archiv - Vérif.Régl. Tâche - Vérifier Adresse........................................................................... 3-17 Utilis/Archiv - Vérif.Régl. Tâche - Réglages Document ................................................................... 3-17 Utilis/Archiv - Vérif.Régl. Tâche - Réglage communication ............................................................. 3-18 Utilis/Archiv - Vérif.Régl. Tâche - Réglages E-mail.......................................................................... 3-18 Aperçu.............................................................................................................................................. 3-18 Aperçu avant impression ................................................................................................................. 3-19 Aperçu (Impression/Combinaison)................................................................................................... 3-19 Aperçu - (Env./Lier EMI) ................................................................................................................... 3-20 4 Flux d'opérations Boîte 4.1 Enregistrer des documents dans des boîtes................................................................................ 4-3 4.2 Impression de documents depuis une boîte ................................................................................ 4-5 4.3 Envoi de documents depuis une boîte.......................................................................................... 4-8 4.4 Enregistrer un document dans une mémoire externe............................................................... 4-11 4.5 Enregistrer un document de la mémoire externe vers une Boîte............................................. 4-13 4.6 Impression d'un document depuis une mémoire externe ........................................................ 4-15 4.7 Archiver des documents dans une boîte .................................................................................... 4-17 4.8 Impression d'un document enregistré dans un téléphone cellulaire ou un agenda électronique..................................................................................................................... 4-19 4.9 Enregistrement dans une Boîte utilisateur d'un document archivé dans un téléphone cellulaire ou un agenda électronique........................................................................ 4-21 4.10 Structure des menus du mode Boîte .......................................................................................... 4-23 4.10.1 Enregistrer document ...................................................................................................................... 4-23 Boîte Public, Privé ou Groupe.......................................................................................................... 4-23 Système ........................................................................................................................................... 4-24 4.10.2 Utilis/Archiv ...................................................................................................................................... 4-26 Impression (pour les boîtes Public, Privé ou Groupe)...................................................................... 4-26 Envoyer (pour les boîtes Public, Privé ou Groupe) .......................................................................... 4-29 Réglages Archivage (pour les boîtes Public, Privé ou Groupe) ....................................................... 4-33 Application (pour les boîtes Public, Privé ou Groupe) ..................................................................... 4-34 Système ........................................................................................................................................... 4-35 5 Pour accéder au mode Boîte 5.1 Pour accéder au mode Boîte ......................................................................................................... 5-3 5.2 Menu Opération Boîte..................................................................................................................... 5-4 5.2.1 Enregistrer document ........................................................................................................................ 5-4 5.2.2 Utilis/Archiv ........................................................................................................................................ 5-4 6 Enregistrer document 6.1 Enreg. doc. - Présentation ............................................................................................................. 6-3 6.1.1 Fonctions ........................................................................................................................................... 6-3 Boîtes Public, Privé ou Groupe.......................................................................................................... 6-3 Boîte Annotation ................................................................................................................................ 6-3 Mémoire externe ................................................................................................................................ 6-3 6.1.2 Fenêtre initiale de la fonction Enregistrer document ......................................................................... 6-4 ineo 223/283/363/423 Table des matières-3 Boîtes Public, Privé ou Groupe.......................................................................................................... 6-4 Système ............................................................................................................................................. 6-4 6.1.3 Fenêtre Enregistrer document ........................................................................................................... 6-5 6.2 Param. Numéris............................................................................................................................... 6-6 6.2.1 De base - Type original ...................................................................................................................... 6-6 6.2.2 De base - Recto/Recto-Verso............................................................................................................ 6-7 6.2.3 De base - Définition ........................................................................................................................... 6-7 6.2.4 De base - Type Fichier....................................................................................................................... 6-8 Type de fichier ................................................................................................................................... 6-8 Cryptage ............................................................................................................................................ 6-9 Cryptage - Paramètres Détaillés........................................................................................................ 6-9 PDF Contours .................................................................................................................................. 6-11 Réglage Numérisation...................................................................................................................... 6-11 6.2.5 De base - Densité ............................................................................................................................ 6-12 6.2.6 De base - Couleur ............................................................................................................................ 6-12 6.2.7 Format Numérisation ....................................................................................................................... 6-13 Format standard .............................................................................................................................. 6-13 Formats perso.................................................................................................................................. 6-13 Format Photo ................................................................................................................................... 6-13 6.2.8 Réglage image ................................................................................................................................. 6-14 Suppression Fond............................................................................................................................ 6-14 Netteté ............................................................................................................................................. 6-15 6.2.9 Applications - Effacement cadre...................................................................................................... 6-15 6.2.10 Applications - Copie Livre................................................................................................................ 6-16 Méthode Copie Livre........................................................................................................................ 6-16 Effacem. livre - Effacement Bords ................................................................................................... 6-16 Effacem. Livre - Effacem. Centre..................................................................................................... 6-17 Position Reliure ................................................................................................................................ 6-17 6.2.11 Numér. Séparée ............................................................................................................................... 6-18 6.3 Réglages Original.......................................................................................................................... 6-19 6.3.1 Original spécial................................................................................................................................. 6-19 6.3.2 Spécifier direction - Orientation Original.......................................................................................... 6-19 6.3.3 Spécifier direction - Position Reliure................................................................................................ 6-20 6.3.4 Dépoussiérer.................................................................................................................................... 6-20 7 Utilis/Archiv 7.1 Présentation des opérations Utilis/Archiv.................................................................................... 7-3 7.1.1 Fonctions Utilis/Archiv ....................................................................................................................... 7-3 Imprimer un document....................................................................................................................... 7-3 Envoi .................................................................................................................................................. 7-3 Archivage ........................................................................................................................................... 7-3 Réglages Application ......................................................................................................................... 7-3 7.1.2 Détail de l'écran Utiliser document.................................................................................................... 7-4 7.1.3 Si un code d'accès est spécifié pour une boîte................................................................................. 7-5 7.2 Impression ....................................................................................................................................... 7-6 7.2.1 Présentation de l'onglet Impression .................................................................................................. 7-6 Description de l'onglet Impression .................................................................................................... 7-6 Imprimer............................................................................................................................................. 7-7 Combinaison...................................................................................................................................... 7-7 7.2.2 Imprimer............................................................................................................................................. 7-8 7.2.3 Combinaison...................................................................................................................................... 7-8 Ordre Document ................................................................................................................................ 7-8 Éléments configurables pour combiner et imprimer des documents................................................ 7-9 7.3 Impression - De base (Boîte Public, Privé ou Groupe) .............................................................. 7-10 7.3.1 Copies.............................................................................................................................................. 7-10 7.3.2 Recto/Recto-Verso .......................................................................................................................... 7-10 7.3.3 Finition.............................................................................................................................................. 7-11 Tri/Groupe........................................................................................................................................ 7-11 Table des matières-4 ineo 223/283/363/423 Décalé .............................................................................................................................................. 7-11 Agraf................................................................................................................................................. 7-11 Agraf. - Réglage Position ................................................................................................................. 7-12 Perfo................................................................................................................................................. 7-12 Réglage Position - Perforation......................................................................................................... 7-12 Pli/Reliure ......................................................................................................................................... 7-13 7.3.4 Combinaison.................................................................................................................................... 7-14 7.3.5 Zoom................................................................................................................................................ 7-14 7.3.6 Impression continue......................................................................................................................... 7-15 7.4 Impression - Application (Boîte Public, Privé ou Groupe)......................................................... 7-16 7.4.1 Marge page...................................................................................................................................... 7-16 Marge de page................................................................................................................................. 7-16 Décalage Image ............................................................................................................................... 7-16 Décalage Image - Changer Décalage verso .................................................................................... 7-17 7.4.2 Insér. Feuil/Couv/Chapitre ............................................................................................................... 7-17 7.4.3 Insér. Feuil/Couv/Chapitre - Couverture.......................................................................................... 7-18 7.4.4 Insér. Feuil/Couv/Chapitre - Insertion Feuille................................................................................... 7-19 7.4.5 Insér. Feuil/Couv/Chapitre - Chapitres ............................................................................................ 7-20 7.4.6 Tampon/Surimpression.................................................................................................................... 7-21 7.4.7 Tampon/Surimpression - Date/Heure.............................................................................................. 7-21 7.4.8 Tampon/Surimpression - Numéro Page .......................................................................................... 7-22 Réglages .......................................................................................................................................... 7-22 Param. Insert. Feuille ....................................................................................................................... 7-23 7.4.9 Tampon/Surimpression - Tampon................................................................................................... 7-23 7.4.10 Tampon/Composition - Sécurité Copie - Protection Copie............................................................. 7-24 Type Protection Copie ..................................................................................................................... 7-25 Paramètres Détaillés ........................................................................................................................ 7-25 Position ............................................................................................................................................ 7-25 7.4.11 Tampon/Composition - Sécurité Copie - Pare-copie ...................................................................... 7-26 Type Pare-copie............................................................................................................................... 7-26 Paramètres Détaillés ........................................................................................................................ 7-27 7.4.12 Tampon/Composition - Sécurité Copie - Copie Prot. MdP............................................................. 7-27 Type Tampon................................................................................................................................... 7-28 Paramètres Détaillés ........................................................................................................................ 7-28 7.4.13 Tampon/Surimpression - Tampon répétitif...................................................................................... 7-28 Type Tampon répétitif...................................................................................................................... 7-29 Paramètres Détaillés ........................................................................................................................ 7-29 Position ............................................................................................................................................ 7-29 7.4.14 Tampon/Surimpression - En-tête/Pied de page.............................................................................. 7-30 Contrôle/Modif. temp....................................................................................................................... 7-30 7.4.15 Tampon/Surimpression - Surimpression enregistrée ...................................................................... 7-32 Réglages .......................................................................................................................................... 7-32 Réglage Surimpression.................................................................................................................... 7-33 7.5 Envoyer .......................................................................................................................................... 7-34 7.5.1 Présentation des réglages Transmission......................................................................................... 7-34 Description de l'onglet Env. ............................................................................................................. 7-34 Envoyer ............................................................................................................................................ 7-35 Lier EMI ............................................................................................................................................ 7-35 7.5.2 Réglages Transmission.................................................................................................................... 7-36 7.5.3 Combinaison.................................................................................................................................... 7-37 Ordre Document .............................................................................................................................. 7-37 7.6 Envoyer (Boîte Public, Privé ou Groupe)..................................................................................... 7-38 7.6.1 Carnet Adresses - Recherche simple .............................................................................................. 7-38 Type d'adresse ................................................................................................................................ 7-38 Index ................................................................................................................................................ 7-39 Recherche détaillée ......................................................................................................................... 7-39 Recherche détaillée - Options recherche ........................................................................................ 7-40 7.6.2 Saisie dir. ......................................................................................................................................... 7-40 7.6.3 Saisie directe - Fax .......................................................................................................................... 7-41 Prochaine Destination...................................................................................................................... 7-41 ineo 223/283/363/423 Table des matières-5 Quand la fonction Confirm. Adresse (Émiss) est spécifiée : ............................................................ 7-41 7.6.4 Saisie dir. - E-mail ............................................................................................................................ 7-41 Prochaine Destination...................................................................................................................... 7-41 7.6.5 Saisie directe - FAX Internet ............................................................................................................ 7-42 Prochaine Destination...................................................................................................................... 7-42 Capacité Réception Récepteur........................................................................................................ 7-42 7.6.6 Saisie directe - Fax Adresse IP........................................................................................................ 7-42 7.6.7 Saisie Directe - PC (SMB) ................................................................................................................ 7-43 Nom Serveur .................................................................................................................................... 7-43 Chemin Fichier ................................................................................................................................. 7-43 Nom utilisat. ..................................................................................................................................... 7-43 Code d'accès................................................................................................................................... 7-43 Référence......................................................................................................................................... 7-43 Prochaine Dest................................................................................................................................. 7-43 7.6.8 Saisie directe - FTP.......................................................................................................................... 7-44 Nom Serveur .................................................................................................................................... 7-44 Chemin Fichier ................................................................................................................................. 7-44 Nom utilisat. ..................................................................................................................................... 7-44 Code d'accès................................................................................................................................... 7-44 Réglages détaillés ............................................................................................................................ 7-44 Prochaine Dest................................................................................................................................. 7-44 7.6.9 Saisie directe - WebDAV.................................................................................................................. 7-45 Nom Serveur .................................................................................................................................... 7-45 Chemin Fichier ................................................................................................................................. 7-45 Nom utilisat. ..................................................................................................................................... 7-45 Code d'accès................................................................................................................................... 7-45 Réglages détaillés ............................................................................................................................ 7-45 Prochaine Dest................................................................................................................................. 7-45 7.6.10 Vérif. histor. (Historique tâches) ....................................................................................................... 7-46 7.6.11 Rech. Adresse.................................................................................................................................. 7-46 7.6.12 Recherche LDAP - Recherche simple ............................................................................................. 7-47 7.6.13 Recherche LDAP - Recherche Avancée .......................................................................................... 7-47 Nom ................................................................................................................................................. 7-47 Adr. E-Mail ....................................................................................................................................... 7-47 Numéro Fax ..................................................................................................................................... 7-47 Nom ................................................................................................................................................. 7-47 Prénom............................................................................................................................................. 7-47 Ville................................................................................................................................................... 7-47 Nom société..................................................................................................................................... 7-48 Département .................................................................................................................................... 7-48 OU/ET/DÉBUT/FINIT PAR ............................................................................................................... 7-48 7.6.14 Présentation des réglages document .............................................................................................. 7-48 7.6.15 Réglages Document - Définition ...................................................................................................... 7-48 7.6.16 Réglages Document - Type Fichier ................................................................................................. 7-49 Type Fichier...................................................................................................................................... 7-49 Cryptage .......................................................................................................................................... 7-50 Cryptage - Paramètres détaillés ...................................................................................................... 7-50 Tampon/Surimpression.................................................................................................................... 7-52 PDF Contours .................................................................................................................................. 7-52 Réglage Numérisation...................................................................................................................... 7-53 7.6.17 Réglages Document - Couleur......................................................................................................... 7-53 7.6.18 Présentation des Réglages de Communication............................................................................... 7-54 7.6.19 Réglages de Communication - Réglages Ligne .............................................................................. 7-54 Description des réglages Ligne ....................................................................................................... 7-54 EMI Outremer................................................................................................................................... 7-54 ECM OFF ......................................................................................................................................... 7-55 V.34 OFF .......................................................................................................................................... 7-55 Vérif. Dest. & envoyer....................................................................................................................... 7-55 Sélect. ligne...................................................................................................................................... 7-55 7.6.20 Réglages de Communication - Réglages E-Mail ............................................................................. 7-56 Paramètres E-Mail ........................................................................................................................... 7-56 Nom Document................................................................................................................................ 7-56 Table des matières-6 ineo 223/283/363/423 Sujet ................................................................................................................................................. 7-56 De..................................................................................................................................................... 7-57 Corps txte ........................................................................................................................................ 7-57 7.6.21 Réglages de Communication - Vérif. régl URL Dest........................................................................ 7-58 URL Destination ............................................................................................................................... 7-58 Recherche détaillée ......................................................................................................................... 7-58 Saisie dir. ......................................................................................................................................... 7-58 7.6.22 Réglages de Communication - Réglage Méthod Comm................................................................. 7-59 Émission différée.............................................................................................................................. 7-59 Transmission par code d'accès (EMI Mode de passe).................................................................... 7-60 Émission Code F (Fonction TX code F)............................................................................................ 7-60 7.6.23 Réglages de Communication - Cryptage E-Mail ............................................................................. 7-61 7.6.24 Réglages de Communication - Signature numérique...................................................................... 7-61 7.6.25 Réglages de Communication - Réglages En-tête Fax..................................................................... 7-61 7.6.26 Présentation des réglages Applications .......................................................................................... 7-62 7.6.27 Applications - Tampon/Surimpression - Date/Heure....................................................................... 7-62 7.6.28 Applications - Tampon/Surimpression - Numéro Page................................................................... 7-62 7.6.29 Applications - Tampon/Surimpression - Tampon............................................................................ 7-62 7.6.30 Applications - Tampon/Surimpression - En-tête/Pied de page....................................................... 7-63 7.6.31 Applications - Impress. par page..................................................................................................... 7-63 7.7 Réglages Archivage (boîtes Public, Privé ou Groupe)............................................................... 7-64 7.7.1 Présentation des réglages Archivage .............................................................................................. 7-64 Description de l'onglet Réglages Archivage .................................................................................... 7-64 7.7.2 Suppression de documents............................................................................................................. 7-65 7.7.3 Modif. nom....................................................................................................................................... 7-65 7.7.4 Déplacer les documents .................................................................................................................. 7-65 7.7.5 Copie................................................................................................................................................ 7-66 7.7.6 Enregistrer dans mémoire externe................................................................................................... 7-66 Réglages Document......................................................................................................................... 7-67 Réglages Document - Définition ...................................................................................................... 7-67 Réglages Document - Type Fichier ................................................................................................. 7-68 Réglages Document - Couleur......................................................................................................... 7-68 7.7.7 Détails Document............................................................................................................................. 7-69 Affichage des Informations détaillées.............................................................................................. 7-69 Aperçu.............................................................................................................................................. 7-69 7.8 Applications................................................................................................................................... 7-70 7.8.1 Présentation des réglages Applications .......................................................................................... 7-70 Description de l'onglet Applications ................................................................................................ 7-70 7.8.2 Modifier document........................................................................................................................... 7-71 Modifier document - Suppr. page.................................................................................................... 7-71 Modifier document - Pivoter Page................................................................................................... 7-72 Modifier document - Déplacer Page................................................................................................ 7-74 Aperçu/Déf. Plage............................................................................................................................ 7-76 Aperçu/Spécification par saisie ....................................................................................................... 7-77 7.8.3 Enregistrer la surimpression ............................................................................................................ 7-78 Enregistrer la surimpression - Nouveau........................................................................................... 7-79 Enregistrer la surimpression - Écraser............................................................................................. 7-80 Paramètres Détaillés ........................................................................................................................ 7-81 7.9 Boîte Utilisateur Bulletin Bord (Système) ................................................................................... 7-82 7.9.1 Présentation des Boîtes Utilisateur Bulletin Bord............................................................................ 7-82 7.9.2 Écran Bte Util. Bulletin Bord ............................................................................................................ 7-82 7.9.3 Impression d'un document dans une boîte Bulletin ........................................................................ 7-82 7.9.4 Suppression d'un document d'une boîte Bulletin............................................................................ 7-82 7.10 Boîte Émis. en relève (Système) .................................................................................................. 7-83 7.10.1 Présentation boîtes Émission en relève ........................................................................................... 7-83 7.10.2 Impression d'un document dans la boîte Émission en relève ......................................................... 7-83 7.10.3 Suppression d'un document dans la boîte Émission en relève....................................................... 7-83 7.11 Boîte Utilisateur Document Sécurisé (Système) ........................................................................ 7-84 7.11.1 Présentation de la boîte Document sécurisé ................................................................................... 7-84 ineo 223/283/363/423 Table des matières-7 7.11.2 Procédure d'authentification 1......................................................................................................... 7-84 7.11.3 Procédure d'authentification 2......................................................................................................... 7-84 7.11.4 Impression - Impression .................................................................................................................. 7-85 Copies.............................................................................................................................................. 7-85 Impression ....................................................................................................................................... 7-85 Finition.............................................................................................................................................. 7-85 Combinaison.................................................................................................................................... 7-85 Zoom................................................................................................................................................ 7-85 Marge de page................................................................................................................................. 7-85 Insertion Feuille/Couverture/Chapitre .............................................................................................. 7-85 Tampon/Surimpression.................................................................................................................... 7-85 7.11.5 Réglages Archivage ......................................................................................................................... 7-86 7.12 Boîte Réception Mémoire Oblig. (Système)................................................................................ 7-87 7.12.1 Présentation de la Boîte Réception Mémoire Oblig......................................................................... 7-87 7.12.2 Impression ....................................................................................................................................... 7-87 7.12.3 Réglages Archivage ......................................................................................................................... 7-88 7.13 Boîte Annotation (Système) ......................................................................................................... 7-89 7.13.1 Présentation des fonctions Boîte Annotation .................................................................................. 7-89 7.13.2 Impression - Fonction de base ........................................................................................................ 7-89 7.13.3 Impression - Marge page................................................................................................................. 7-89 7.13.4 Impression - Insér. Feuil/Couv/Chapitre - Couverture..................................................................... 7-90 7.13.5 Impression - Insér. Feuil/Couv/Chapitre - Insertion Feuille ............................................................. 7-90 7.13.6 Impression - Insér. Feuil/Couv/Chapitre - Chapitres ....................................................................... 7-90 7.13.7 Impression - Tampon/Surimpression - Date/Heure......................................................................... 7-90 7.13.8 Impression - Tampon/Surimpression - Numéro Page..................................................................... 7-90 7.13.9 Impression - Tampon/Surimpression - Tampon.............................................................................. 7-90 7.13.10 Préférences d'impression - Tampon/Composition - Sécurité Copie - Protection Copie ................ 7-90 7.13.11 Préférences d'impression - Tampon/Composition - Sécurité Copie - Pare-copie.......................... 7-90 7.13.12 Impression - Tampon/Composition - Sécurité Copie - Copie Prot. MdP........................................ 7-90 7.13.13 Impression - Tampon/Surimpression - Tampon répétitif................................................................. 7-90 7.13.14 Impression - Tampon/Surimpression - Surimpression enregistrée ................................................. 7-90 7.13.15 Description de l'onglet Env. ............................................................................................................. 7-90 7.13.16 Env. - Saisie dir. - E-mail ................................................................................................................. 7-90 7.13.17 Env. - Saisie dir. - PC (SMB) ............................................................................................................ 7-90 7.13.18 Env. - Saisie dir. - FTP ..................................................................................................................... 7-91 7.13.19 Env. - Saisie dir. - WebDAV ............................................................................................................. 7-91 7.13.20 Env. - Vérif. histor............................................................................................................................. 7-91 7.13.21 Env. - Recherche LDAP - Recher simple......................................................................................... 7-91 7.13.22 Env. - Recherche LDAP - Recherche Avancée................................................................................ 7-91 7.13.23 Env. - Réglages Document - Définition............................................................................................ 7-91 7.13.24 Env. - Réglages Document - Type Fichier ....................................................................................... 7-91 7.13.25 Env. - Réglages Document - Couleur .............................................................................................. 7-91 7.13.26 Env. - Réglages de communication - Réglages E-Mail ................................................................... 7-91 7.13.27 Env. - Réglages de communication - Paramètres URL Dest........................................................... 7-91 7.13.28 Env. - Réglages de communication - Cryptage E-Mail ................................................................... 7-91 7.13.29 Env. - Réglages de communication - Signature numérique ............................................................ 7-91 7.13.30 Env. - Applications - Tampon/Surimpression - Date/Heure ............................................................ 7-91 7.13.31 Env. - Applications - Tampon/Surimpression - Numéro Page ........................................................ 7-91 7.13.32 Env. - Applications - Tampon/Surimpression - Tampon ................................................................. 7-92 7.13.33 Env. - Applications - Impress. par page .......................................................................................... 7-92 7.13.34 Env. - Applications - Changer Texte................................................................................................ 7-92 Texte numérotat............................................................................................................................... 7-92 Date/Heure....................................................................................................................................... 7-92 Densité ............................................................................................................................................. 7-93 Type Numéro ................................................................................................................................... 7-93 Position Impression ......................................................................................................................... 7-93 7.13.35 Réglages Archivage ......................................................................................................................... 7-94 Table des matières-8 ineo 223/283/363/423 7.13.36 Applications - Enregistrer la surimpression ..................................................................................... 7-94 7.14 Boîte Ré-émission Fax (Système)................................................................................................ 7-95 7.14.1 Présentation de la Boîte Ré-émission Fax....................................................................................... 7-95 7.14.2 Impression - Épreuve....................................................................................................................... 7-95 7.14.3 Env. - Fax......................................................................................................................................... 7-96 7.14.4 Réglages Archivage - Supprimer ..................................................................................................... 7-96 7.15 Boîte PDF Cryptés Mot de Passe (Système) .............................................................................. 7-97 7.15.1 Présentation de la Boîte PDF Crypté Mot de Passe........................................................................ 7-97 7.15.2 Impr/Enreg - Impr/Enreg .................................................................................................................. 7-97 7.15.3 Réglages Archivage - Supprimer ..................................................................................................... 7-97 7.16 Boîte Utilis. ID & Imprimer (Système).......................................................................................... 7-98 7.16.1 Présentation de la Boîte ID & Imprimer............................................................................................ 7-98 Voir documents................................................................................................................................ 7-98 7.16.2 Impression - Impression .................................................................................................................. 7-99 7.16.3 Réglages Archivage - Supprimer ..................................................................................................... 7-99 7.17 Mémoire externe (Système) ....................................................................................................... 7-100 7.17.1 Dispositif de mémoire externe ....................................................................................................... 7-100 Dispositifs de mémoire externe pris en charge ............................................................................. 7-100 Connexion du dispositif de mémoire externe ................................................................................ 7-100 7.17.2 Écran Mémoire externe.................................................................................................................. 7-101 Entrer un chemin de fichier ............................................................................................................ 7-101 Sélectionner un fichier ................................................................................................................... 7-101 Imprimer des données PDF cryptées ............................................................................................ 7-101 Déplacement vers le dossier parent .............................................................................................. 7-101 Ouvrir un dossier............................................................................................................................ 7-102 Imprimer......................................................................................................................................... 7-102 Détails Document........................................................................................................................... 7-102 7.17.3 Impression - Fonction de base ...................................................................................................... 7-102 Copies............................................................................................................................................ 7-102 Impression ..................................................................................................................................... 7-102 Position Reliure .............................................................................................................................. 7-102 Finition............................................................................................................................................ 7-103 Papier............................................................................................................................................. 7-103 7.17.4 Impression - Applications .............................................................................................................. 7-103 Tampon/Surimpression - Date/Heure............................................................................................ 7-103 Tampon/Surimpression - Numéro Page ........................................................................................ 7-103 Tampon/Surimpression - Tampon................................................................................................. 7-103 Tampon/Composition - Sécurité Copie - Protection Copie........................................................... 7-103 Tampon/Composition - Sécurité Copie - Pare-copie .................................................................... 7-103 Tampon/Composition - Sécurité Copie - Copie Prot. MdP........................................................... 7-103 Tampon/Surimpression - Tampon répétitif.................................................................................... 7-103 7.17.5 Réglages Fichier - Enreg. dans Boîte utilisateur ............................................................................ 7-104 7.18 Mobile/PDA (Système)................................................................................................................ 7-105 7.18.1 Environnement d'exploitation ........................................................................................................ 7-105 7.18.2 Mobile/PDA - Imprimer .................................................................................................................. 7-106 Saisie du code PIN......................................................................................................................... 7-106 Vérifier les préférences d'impression............................................................................................. 7-106 7.18.3 Mobile/PDA - Enregistrer ............................................................................................................... 7-107 Saisie du code PIN......................................................................................................................... 7-107 7.19 Boîte Document sécurisé (Système)......................................................................................... 7-108 7.19.1 Présentation de la boîte Document sécurisé ................................................................................. 7-108 7.19.2 Impression ..................................................................................................................................... 7-108 7.19.3 Réglages Archivage ....................................................................................................................... 7-109 8 Réglages Boîte 8.1 Structure des menus Réglages Boîte ........................................................................................... 8-3 8.1.1 Mode Utilisateur................................................................................................................................. 8-3 8.1.2 Réglage Administrateur...................................................................................................................... 8-4 ineo 223/283/363/423 Table des matières-9 8.2 Réglage Mode Utilisateur............................................................................................................... 8-6 8.2.1 Création d'une boîte .......................................................................................................................... 8-6 Boîte Public, Privé ou Groupe............................................................................................................ 8-6 Supprimer Boîte Vide (Réglages Administrateur)............................................................................... 8-7 Boîte Bulletin...................................................................................................................................... 8-8 Boîte Relais ........................................................................................................................................ 8-9 Boîte Document sécurisé................................................................................................................. 8-10 8.2.2 Paramètres Affichage Perso - Configurer la boîte ........................................................................... 8-11 Onglet par Défaut............................................................................................................................. 8-11 Touche de Raccourci ....................................................................................................................... 8-12 8.2.3 Réglage Mobile/PDA - Notif. Erreur Lien Fichier ............................................................................. 8-12 8.2.4 Réglage Mobile/PDA - Utilisation Serveur Proxy............................................................................. 8-13 8.2.5 Réglage Mobile/PDA - Réglages Impression................................................................................... 8-13 De base - Impression....................................................................................................................... 8-13 De base - Papier .............................................................................................................................. 8-14 De base - Finition............................................................................................................................. 8-14 Applications - Marge........................................................................................................................ 8-14 Applications - Tampon/Surimpression - Date/Heure....................................................................... 8-15 Applications - Tampon/Surimpression - Numéro Page................................................................... 8-15 Applications - Tampon/Surimpression - Tampon............................................................................ 8-15 Applications - Tampon/Composition - Sécurité Copie - Protection Copie ..................................... 8-15 Applications - Tampon/Composition - Sécurité Copie - Pare-copie............................................... 8-15 Applications - Tampon/Composition - Sécurité Copie - Copie Prot. MdP...................................... 8-15 Applications - Tampon/Surimpression - Tampon répétitif............................................................... 8-15 8.3 Réglage Administrateur................................................................................................................ 8-16 8.3.1 Autorisations de boîte ...................................................................................................................... 8-16 Types d'utilisateurs .......................................................................................................................... 8-16 Boîte Public et boîte Privé ou Groupe ............................................................................................. 8-16 8.3.2 Création d'une boîte ........................................................................................................................ 8-17 8.3.3 Créer une boîte Public, Privé ou Groupe ......................................................................................... 8-17 8.3.4 Créer une boîte Bulletin ................................................................................................................... 8-17 8.3.5 Créer un boîte Relais........................................................................................................................ 8-18 8.3.6 Créer une boîte Annotation.............................................................................................................. 8-18 8.3.7 Créer une boîte Document sécurisé ................................................................................................ 8-20 8.3.8 Réglage Maxi. Boîtes ....................................................................................................................... 8-20 Boîte Public, Privé ou Groupe.......................................................................................................... 8-20 Gestion Boîte maximum................................................................................................................... 8-20 Réglage Maxi. Boîtes ....................................................................................................................... 8-20 8.3.9 Configurer la boîte ........................................................................................................................... 8-21 Supprimer Bte Util. inutilisée............................................................................................................ 8-21 Suppr. Docs Impr. Sécurisée........................................................................................................... 8-21 Délai suppress Impress. sécuris. ..................................................................................................... 8-22 Délai suppress PDF cryptés............................................................................................................. 8-22 Délai Suppress. ID & Impr................................................................................................................ 8-23 Réglage attente doc......................................................................................................................... 8-23 Réglages Fonction Mémoire Externe............................................................................................... 8-24 Boîte Util. Autor./Interd. ................................................................................................................... 8-24 Réglage ID & Imprimer Supprimer après impression....................................................................... 8-25 Réglage Délai suppression Document............................................................................................. 8-25 Paramètres ID & Imprimer................................................................................................................ 8-26 8.3.10 Réglage Mobile/PDA........................................................................................................................ 8-26 8.3.11 Réglage administrateur Boîte Utilisateur ......................................................................................... 8-27 Réglage Administrateur de boîtes.................................................................................................... 8-27 Connexion à cette machine comme Administrateur de boîtes........................................................ 8-27 Fonctions Administrateur disponibles ............................................................................................. 8-27 8.3.12 Détails Sécurité ................................................................................................................................ 8-28 Impression sécurisée seulement...................................................................................................... 8-28 8.3.13 Paramétrage DD/Réglages SSD...................................................................................................... 8-28 Vérifier Capac. Disque Dur............................................................................................................... 8-28 Vérifier capacité SSD ....................................................................................................................... 8-29 Écraser données Disque Dur ........................................................................................................... 8-29 Écraser données .............................................................................................................................. 8-30 Table des matières-10 ineo 223/283/363/423 Mot de passe Accès DD .................................................................................................................. 8-31 Formater disque dur ........................................................................................................................ 8-32 Formater SSD .................................................................................................................................. 8-33 Réglage cryptage DD....................................................................................................................... 8-33 8.3.14 Réglages Tampon............................................................................................................................ 8-34 Régl. Horodatage............................................................................................................................. 8-34 9 Web Connexion 9.1 Utiliser Web Connection................................................................................................................. 9-3 9.1.1 Environnement d'exploitation ............................................................................................................ 9-3 9.1.2 Accéder à Web Connection ............................................................................................................... 9-3 9.1.3 Cache du navigateur Internet............................................................................................................. 9-4 Pour Internet Explorer ........................................................................................................................ 9-4 Pour Netscape Navigator................................................................................................................... 9-4 Pour Mozilla Firefox ........................................................................................................................... 9-4 9.1.4 Fonction Aide en ligne ....................................................................................................................... 9-4 9.2 Connexion et déconnexion ............................................................................................................ 9-5 9.2.1 Opérations de connexion et de déconnexion.................................................................................... 9-5 Lorsque Authentification utilisateur ou Compte Département est désactivé .................................... 9-5 Quand Authentification utilisateur ou Compte Département est activé............................................. 9-7 9.2.2 Déconnexion ...................................................................................................................................... 9-8 9.2.3 Connexion.......................................................................................................................................... 9-9 Options de Connexion ....................................................................................................................... 9-9 Connexion en tant qu'utilisateur public ........................................................................................... 9-10 Connexion en tant qu'utilisateur enregistré ..................................................................................... 9-11 Se connecter en mode Administrateur ............................................................................................ 9-12 Mode d'affichage en mode Administrateur ..................................................................................... 9-13 Connexion en tant qu'Administrateur de boîte ................................................................................ 9-14 9.3 Configuration de la page.............................................................................................................. 9-15 9.4 Présentation du mode Utilisateur................................................................................................ 9-17 9.4.1 Information ....................................................................................................................................... 9-17 9.4.2 Tâche ............................................................................................................................................... 9-18 9.4.3 Boîtes ............................................................................................................................................... 9-18 9.4.4 Impression directe ........................................................................................................................... 9-19 9.4.5 Enregistrement Destination.............................................................................................................. 9-20 9.4.6 Personnaliser ................................................................................................................................... 9-21 9.5 Gérer un document dans une boîte............................................................................................. 9-22 9.5.1 Afficher sous forme de liste des documents enregistrés dans une boîte........................................ 9-22 Connexion de boîte.......................................................................................................................... 9-22 Liste de fichiers ................................................................................................................................ 9-23 9.5.2 Imprimer un document..................................................................................................................... 9-24 9.5.3 Envoyer un document à une autre machine .................................................................................... 9-27 9.5.4 Téléchargement des données d'un document sur votre ordinateur................................................ 9-29 9.5.5 Déplacer ou copier un document vers une autre boîte utilisateur ................................................... 9-32 9.5.6 Supprimer un document .................................................................................................................. 9-33 9.6 Présentation du mode Administrateur........................................................................................ 9-35 9.6.1 Entretien........................................................................................................................................... 9-35 9.6.2 Réglage Système ............................................................................................................................. 9-36 9.6.3 Sécurité ............................................................................................................................................ 9-37 9.6.4 Authentification utilisateur/Compte département............................................................................ 9-38 9.6.5 Réseau ............................................................................................................................................. 9-39 9.6.6 Boîtes ............................................................................................................................................... 9-40 9.6.7 Réglages imprimante ....................................................................................................................... 9-41 9.6.8 Enregistrement Destination.............................................................................................................. 9-42 9.6.9 Réglage fax ...................................................................................................................................... 9-43 9.6.10 Multiréglage ..................................................................................................................................... 9-44 ineo 223/283/363/423 Table des matières-11 10 Annexe 10.1 Liste des messages d'erreur........................................................................................................ 10-3 10.2 Glossaire ........................................................................................................................................ 10-4 11 Index 11.1 Index des éléments....................................................................................................................... 11-3 11.2 Index des touches......................................................................................................................... 11-6 Table des matières-12 ineo 223/283/363/423 1 Introduction ineo 223/283/363/423 1-3 1.1 Bienvenue 1 1 Introduction 1.1 Bienvenue Nous vous remercions d'avoir acheté cet appareil. Ce guide de l'utilisateur décrit les fonctions, les instructions, les précautions d'utilisation et les procédures de dépannage élémentaires relatives à cette machine. Pour tirer le maximum de ce produit et l'utiliser efficacement, veuillez lire ce guide de l'utilisateur selon les besoins. 1.1.1 Guides de l'utilisateur Guide de l'utilisateur Présentation [Guide rapide Opérations Copie/Impression/ Fax/Numérisation/Boîte] Ce guide décrit les procédures et les fonctions d'utilisation les plus fréquemment utilisées afin de vous permettre d'utiliser immédiatement cette machine. Ce guide contient également des notes et des précautions à prendre pour garantir l'utilisation en toute sécurité de cette machine et apporte des détails sur les marques de fabrique et les copyrights. Assurez-vous de lire ce manuel avant d'utiliser la machine. [Guide de l'utilisateur Opérations Copie] Ce guide décrit en détails les opérations en mode Copie et les réglages de cette machine. • Caractéristiques des originaux et du papier copie • Fonction Copie • Entretien de la machine • Incidents [Guide de l'utilisateur Opérations Zoom Écran] Ce manuel détaille les procédures d'exploitation du mode Zoom Écran. • Fonction Copie • Fonction Numérisation • Fonction Fax G3 • Fonction Fax réseau [Guide de l'utilisateur Opérations Impression] Ce manuel décrit en détail les fonctions d'imprimante. • Fonctions Imprimante • Configuration du pilote d'imprimante [Guide de l'utilisateur Opérations Boîte] Ce manuel décrit en détail les fonctions Boîte. • Enregistrer des données dans des boîtes • Extraire les données des boîtes • Transfert et impression des données des boîtes utilisateur [Guide de l'utilisateur Opérations Scanner Réseau/Fax/Fax Réseau] Ce manuel décrit en détail le transfert de données numérisées. • Émission E-mail, Envoi FTP, Émission SMB, Enregistrement dans Boîte utilisateur, Émission Web- DAV, Services Web • Fax G3 • Adresse IP Fax, Fax Internet [Guide de l'utilisateur Opérations Pilote Fax] Ce manuel détaille la fonction du pilote Fax qui permet d'envoyer les fax directement d'un ordinateur. • FAX PC [Guide de l'utilisateur Administrateur Réseau] Ce manuel décrit en détail méthodes de réglage pour chaque fonction avec la connexion réseau. • Paramètres Réseau • Paramètres avec Web Connection 1 Bienvenue 1-4 ineo 223/283/363/423 1.1 1.1.2 Guide de l'utilisateur Ce guide de l'utilisateur s'adresse à des utilisateurs depuis ceux qui utilisent cette machine pour la première fois jusqu'aux administrateurs. Il décrit les opérations de base, les fonctions destinées à une utilisation plus pratique, les opérations de dépannage élémentaires et plusieurs méthodes de réglage de cette machine. Noter toutefois que des connaissances techniques de base sur le produit sont nécessaires pour des travaux d'entretien ou des opérations de dépannage. Limitez vos interventions de dépannage aux seules sections expliquées dans ce manuel. Si vous rencontrez des problèmes, veuillez contacter notre technicien S.A.V. [Guide de l'utilisateur Opérations de Fonction Avancée] Ce guide détaille les fonctions disponibles à l'enregistrement du kit de licence et en se connectant à une application. • Fonction Navigateur Web • Image Panel • Fonctions de traitement PDF • PDF adressable • Fonctions My Panel et My Address Guide de l'utilisateur Présentation ineo 223/283/363/423 1-5 1.2 Conventions utilisées dans ce manuel 1 1.2 Conventions utilisées dans ce manuel 1.2.1 Symboles utilisés dans ce manuel Les symboles utilisés dans le manuel expriment divers types d'informations. La présentation qui suit décrit chaque symbole associé à l'utilisation correcte et sûre de la machine. Pour utiliser cette machine en toute sécurité 7 AVERTISSEMENT - Ce symbole indique que le non respect des instructions peut entraîner des blessures mortelles ou graves. 7 ATTENTION - Ce symbole indique que la négligence des instructions peut entraîner des fausses manoeuvres susceptibles de provoquer des blessures ou des dommages matériels. REMARQUE Ce symbole indique un risque de dommages matériels pour la machine ou les documents. Suivez les instructions pour éviter les dommages matériels. Instruction de procédure 0 Cette coche indique une option nécessaire à l'utilisation des conditions ou fonctions prérequises d'une procédure. 1 Ce numéro de format "1" correspond à la première étape. 2 Ce numéro de format représente l'ordre des différentes étapes. % Ce symbole indique une explication supplémentaire d'instruction de procédure. % Ce symbole indique une transition du panneau de contrôle permettant d'accéder à un élément de menu désiré. Ce symbole indique la page désirée. Les procédures d'opération sont décrites par des illustrations. 1 Conventions utilisées dans ce manuel 1-6 ineo 223/283/363/423 1.2 dPour info Ce symbole indique une référence. Consulter la référence en cas de besoin. Symboles clés [ ] Le nom des touches de l'écran tactile ou de l'écran d'ordinateur ainsi que le nom des guides d'utilisateur sont indiqués entre crochets. Texte en gras Renvoie à un nom de touche, de pièce, de modèle ou d'option du panneau de contrôle. 1.2.2 Indications concernant l'original et le papier Formats original et papier Les représentations et symboles utilisés dans le manuel pour décrire les originaux et le papier sont expliqués ci-dessous. Le côté Y représente la largeur et le côté X la longueur dans la détermination de l'original et du format papier. Indications concernant l'original et le papier w indique un format papier où le côté X (longueur) est plus grand que le côté Y (largeur). v indique un format papier où le côté X (longueur) est plus petit que le côté Y (largeur). ineo 223/283/363/423 1-7 1.3 Vérifier la fonction à utiliser 1 1.3 Vérifier la fonction à utiliser Ce guide décrit en détail les réglages des fonctions. Comprendre le Flux d'opérations Ce manuel comporte un chapitre "Flux d'opérations Boîte" qui indique comment utiliser les principales fonctions de cette machine. Les tableaux de ce chapitre vous aideront à vous familiariser avec la séquence générale des opérations, comme par exemple, l'enregistrement et l'impression de données. Le lien intégré au tableau permet d'accéder aux pages des réglages de la fonction qui donnent plus de détails. Utilisation de la structure des menus Plusieurs fonctions peuvent être configurées sur cette machine. Pour plus d'informations sur la touche à sélectionner pour accéder à des éléments de réglage spécifiques et voir la liste des éléments configurables, voir les pages Structure des menus pages. Dans les pages de la Structure des menus, chaque touche fait apparaître des fonctions hiérarchisées. Le lien intégré à la Structure des menus permet d'accéder aux pages des réglages de la fonction qui donnent plus de détails. 1 Vérifier la fonction à utiliser 1-8 ineo 223/283/363/423 1.3 2 Présentation de la fonction boîte ineo 223/283/363/423 2-3 2.1 Fonctions Boîte 2 2 Présentation de la fonction boîte 2.1 Fonctions Boîte Les fonctions de boîte permettent de sauvegarder des données de document sur le disque dur interne de la machine pour les imprimer ultérieurement. Les documents que vous pouvez sauvegarder sont les données numérisées pour la copie et les données numérisées enregistrées. Pour enregistrer des données dans une boîte, créez la boîte et enregistrez les données dans la boîte indiquée. Les données enregistrées peuvent selon les besoins être imprimées, envoyées par E-mail, transférées via FTP, ou émises à destination d'un ordinateur. Les fonctions Boîte vous évitent aussi d'avoir à numériser des originaux de manière répétée ou d'enregistrer les données sur chacun des ordinateurs. Référence - Un Disque dur doit être installé afin de pouvoir utiliser les fonctions décrites dans ce manuel. - Certaines boîtes sont disponibles même quand aucun Disque dur n'est installé. - Si aucun Disque dur n'est installé, les données sont enregistrées dans la mémoire interne (SSD : Solid State Drive) installée sur cette machine. - Un Disque dur est installé de série sur ineo 423. Un disque dur est installé de série ou proposé en option sur ineo 363 en fonction du pays dans lequel a lieu l'achat. Un disque dur peut être installé comme option sur ineo 223/283. - Le tableau suivant indique quelles sont les fonctions disponibles lorsqu'aucun Disque dur n'est installé. Pour plus de détails, voir la description de chaque fonction. Fonctions Disponible o / Indisponible e sans Disque dur Remarque Boîte Utilisateur - Boîtes Public, Privé ou Groupe e Boîte Bulletin o Boîte Émission en relève o Boîte Document Sécurisé e Boîte Réception mémoire o Boîte Annotation e Boîte Retransmission Fax o Boîte PDF Crypté Mot de Passe e Bte Ut. ID & Impr. e Mémoire externe o Indisponible pour certaines opérations Téléphone cellulaire/PDA o Indisponible pour certaines opérations Boîte Document sécurisé o 2 Fonctions Boîte 2-4 ineo 223/283/363/423 2.1 2.1.1 Fonctions de boîte disponibles Enregistrer des documents Vous pouvez enregistrer des données dans les boîtes suivantes : *1 Pour plus de détails sur l'envoi depuis un ordinateur de documents à imprimer et leur enregistrement dans la boîte, voir le [Guide de l'utilisateur Opérations Impression]. 1 Mobile/PDA 2 Fax 3 Ordinateur 4 Serveur FTP, etc. 5 Original 6 Mémoire externe Boîte Utilisateur Description Référence Boîtes Public, Privé ou Groupe (*1) Permet d'enregistrer un document copié ou numérisé à l'aide de cette machine. Vous pouvez aussi enregistrer un document dont l'instruction d'impression a été émise par un ordinateur connecté au réseau. Certains réglages Authentification utilisateur ou Compte Département permettent d'interdire l'accès de certains utilisateurs à certaines boîtes Privé ou Groupe. p. 6-3 Boîte Annotation Permet d'enregistrer les données de document à imprimer et de les transmettre avec ajout de la date et de l'heure ou d'un numéro d'annotation sur les documents enregistrées en mode Numérisation. p. 6-3 Mémoire externe Cet élément apparaît lorsqu'une mémoire externe est installée. • Vous pouvez enregistrer tous les documents numérisés directement sur une mémoire externe connectée à cette machine. • Vous pouvez enregistrer un document archivé dans une Boîte utilisateur dans une mémoire externe. • Vous pouvez enregistrer un fichier archivé dans une mémoire externe dans une Boîte utilisateur. p. 6-3 Mobile/PDA Enregistrer un document enregistré dans un téléphone cellulaire ou un agenda électronique dans la boîte Public, Privée ou Groupe. p. 7-107 Boîte Document sécurisé Permet d'enregistrer un document qu'une machine a envoyé par réception confidentielle. p. 7-108 2 4 5 6 1 3 ineo 223/283/363/423 2-5 2.1 Fonctions Boîte 2 Utilisation des documents Utilisation des données de document enregistrées dans les boîtes. En fonction de la boîte, les données sont utilisables comme suit : *1 Pour plus de détails sur l'envoi depuis un ordinateur de documents à imprimer et leur enregistrement dans la boîte, voir le [Guide de l'utilisateur Opérations Impression]. *2 Pour plus de détails sur l'émission Dépôt, la réception Relève, la réception Mémoire obligatoire et la retransmission de fichiers, voir le [Guide de l'utilisateur Opérations Scanner réseau/Fax/Fax Réseau]. *3 Pour plus de détails sur l'enregistrement de documents dans la boîte Utilisateur Document sécurisé, voir le [Guide de l'utilisateur Opérations Impression]. *4 Pour les instructions d'impression d'un PDF crypté, voir le manuel Impression Directe ou la rubrique Impression directe dans l'aide en ligne de Web Connection. Boîte Utilisateur Description Référence Boîtes Public, Privé ou Groupe (*1) Pour imprimer et envoyer des documents enregistrés. Plusieurs documents peuvent être sélectionnés pour être imprimés ou envoyés. Certains réglages Authentification utilisateur ou Compte Département permettent d'interdire l'accès de certains utilisateurs à certaines boîtes Privé ou Groupe. p. 7-10 Boîte Bulletin Cet élément apparaît si le Kit Fax en option est installé. Il permet d'imprimer un document enregistré dans la Boîte Bulletin. p. 7-82 Boîte Émission Dépôt (*2) Cet élément apparaît si le Kit Fax en option est installé. Il permet d'imprimer des documents envoyés par via Dépôt/ Relève. p. 7-83 Boîte Utilisateur Document Sécurisé (*3) Permet d'imprimer les documents enregistrés. L'impression est subordonnée à l'introduction d'un ID et d'un code d'accès. p. 7-84 Boîte Réception Mémoire Oblig. (*2) Cet élément apparaît si le Kit Fax en option est installé. Grâce au paramètre de réception mémoire obligatoire, il est possible de confirmer et d'imprimer le document fax reçu. p. 7-87 Boîte Annotation Permet d'imprimer ou d'envoyer les données de document enregistrées en y ajoutant la date et l'heure ou un numéro d'annotation. p. 7-89 Boîte Retransmission Fax (*2) Cet élément apparaît si le Kit Fax en option est installé. Cette boîte utilisateur vous permet de transférer un document enregistré ou de l'imprimer pour confirmation. p. 7-95 Boîte PDF Crypté Mot de Passe (*4) Permet d'imprimer un document PDF enregistré et crypté par mot de passe. Les fichiers PDF cryptés enregistrés dans une mémoire externe et envoyés pour des travaux d'impression sont également enregistrés dans cette boîte. L'impression est subordonnée à l'introduction d'un code d'accès prédéfini. p. 7-97 Boîte Utilisateur ID & Imprimer Cet élément apparaît quand les réglages Authentification utilisateur sont configurés. Une fois connecté comme utilisateur, vous pouvez imprimer un document envoyé comme tâche d'impression depuis le pilote d'imprimante. p. 7-98 Mémoire externe Cet élément apparaît lorsqu'une mémoire externe est installée. Vous pouvez imprimer des documents enregistrés dans une mémoire externe connectée à cette machine. p. 7-100 Téléphone cellulaire ou PDA Imprimez un document enregistré dans un téléphone cellulaire ou un agenda électronique. Vous pouvez enregistrer un document enregistré dans un téléphone cellulaire ou un agenda électronique dans la boîte Public, Privée ou Groupe. p. 7-106 Boîte Document sécurisé Permet d'imprimer un document qui a été reçu par réception confidentielle. p. 7-108 2 Fonctions Boîte 2-6 ineo 223/283/363/423 2.1 Référence - Les boîtes Public/Privé/Groupe, Doc. Sécurisé, Annotation, PDF crypté par code, et Boîte Utilisat ID & Imprimer ne sont disponibles que si un Disque dur est installé. - La boîte Document sécurisé n'est pas disponible si un Disque dur est installé. - Si un Disque dur est installé, la réception confidentielle peut être activée lorsque la fonction Réception confidentielle est assignée à une boîte Public/Privé/Groupe. Pour plus de détails, voir page 8-6. - La fonction "Enregistrer un document de la mémoire externe vers une Boîte" concernant la mémoire externe n'est disponible que si un Disque dur est installé. - La fonction [Enreg. dans Boîte utilisateur] concernant le téléphone mobile/PDA n'est disponible que si un Disque dur est installé. 1 Fax 2 Ordinateur 3 E-mail, etc. 4 Serveur FTP, etc. 5 Cellulaire ou PDA 6 Mémoire externe 7 Impression 4 6 7 1 2 3 5 ineo 223/283/363/423 2-7 2.1 Fonctions Boîte 2 Organisation des documents Permet d'organiser des documents en renommant les documents enregistrés, en changeant les boîtes dans lesquelles ils sont enregistrés et en dupliquant ou en supprimant les documents. * La fonction permettant d'enregistrer un document dans une boîte n'est disponible que si un Disque dur est installé. 1 Mobile/PDA 2 Mémoire externe Boîte Utilisateur Supprimer Modif. Nom Déplacer Copie Enreg. dans Boîte utilisateur Permet d'enregistrer dans une mémoire USB (si une mémoire externe est connectée) Détails Document Boîtes Public, Privé ou Groupe o o o o − o o Boîte Bulletin o − − − − − − Boîte Émission en relève o − − − − − − Boîte Document Sécurisé o o − − − − o Boîte Réception mémoire o o − − − − o Boîte Annotation o o − − − − o Boîte Retransmission Fax o − − − − − o Boîte PDF Crypté Mot de Passe o − − − − − o Boîte Utilisat. ID & Imprimer o − − − − − o Mémoire externe, Mobile/PDA − − − − o* − o Boîte Document sécurisé o o − − − − o 2 1 2 Fonctions Boîte 2-8 ineo 223/283/363/423 2.1 2.1.2 Configurer les paramètres d'utilisation des fonctions Boîte Avant d'utiliser les fonctions de boîte, il faut définir les paramètres suivants. Enregistrement d'une boîte Permet d'enregistrer la boîte dans laquelle les documents seront conservés. Permet de configurer des boîtes à partir de l'écran tactile de la machine ou en utilisant Web Connection à partir d'un navigateur Web sur un ordinateur du réseau. Référence - Les boîtes utilisateurs suivantes peuvent être configurées. – Boîtes Public, Privé ou Groupe (p. 8-6) – Boîte Bulletin (si la fonction Bulletin est utilisée) (p. 8-8) – Boîte Annotation (p. 8-18) – Boîte Document sécurisé (p. 8-20) Si cette machine est utilisée comme appareil relais Si le Kit Fax en option est installé et que vous désirer utiliser cette machine pour l'émission Fax relais, créez une Boîte relais pour stocker temporairement les documents avant d'être réacheminés. (p. 8-9) Pour créer une Boîte relais, spécifiez préalablement le groupe contenant les numéros de fax des destinations relais. Boîte de stockage des données pour réception Mémoire obligatoire Si le Kit Fax en option est installé et que nous ne désirez pas imprimer pendant la réception des données, configurez les réglages de réception Mémoire obligatoire. dPour info Pour plus de détails sur la configuration des réglages de réception Mémoire obligatoire, voir le [Guide de l'utilisateur Opérations Scanner réseau/Fax/Fax Réseau]. ineo 223/283/363/423 2-9 2.2 Information 2 2.2 Information Cette section contient des informations dont il est nécessaire de prendre connaissance avant d'utiliser les fonctions boîte. 2.2.1 Authentification Utilisateur Pour l'utilisation de cette machine, certains périphériques ont été pré-configurés et nécessitent la saisie d'un nom de compte ou d'utilisateur, ainsi que la saisie d'un mot de passe. Contactez l'administrateur pour obtenir les informations de compte ou de nom d'utilisateur permettant d'utiliser les périphériques. Authentification MFP Entrez le nom d'utilisateur et le code d'accès et appuyez sur [Connexion] sur l'écran tactile ou sur la touche Code sur le panneau de contrôle. Authentification par un serveur externe Entrez le nom d'utilisateur et le code d'accès et appuyez sur [Connexion] sur l'écran tactile ou sur la touche Code sur le panneau de contrôle. 2 Information 2-10 ineo 223/283/363/423 2.2 Authentification Compte Département Entrez le nom de compte et le code d'accès et appuyez sur [Connexion] sur l'écran tactile ou sur la touche Code sur le panneau de contrôle. Référence - Lorsque l'Authentification utilisateur est activée, seules les boîtes accessibles aux utilisateurs connectés sont affichées. Pour plus de détails, voir page 2-12. - Si un utilisateur tape un mot de passe incorrect le nombre de fois spécifié lorsque Mode 2 est sélectionné dans Fonctions interdites si échec d'authentification dans Réglages Administrateur, cet utilisateur est bloqué et ne peut plus utiliser le panneau de contrôle. Pour plus de détails sur la désactivation des Fonctions interdites si échec d'authentification, contactez votre administrateur. - Si l'authentification est effectuée par Authentication Manager, demandez la procédure de connexion à l'administrateur serveur. - Si vous utilisez l'Unité authentification en option pour l'authentification, voir le [Guide de l'utilisateur Opérations Copie] pour la procédure de connexion. 2.2.2 Restrictions applicables à l'enregistrement des boîtes Boîtes Public, Privé ou Groupe Les fonctions Boîte se décomposent en boîtes utilisateur de type Public, utilisables par plusieurs personnes, Privé, utilisables par une seule personne et enfin de type Groupe, accessibles par les utilisateurs connectés en tant que membres du compte propriétaire de la boîte. Voici la liste des limitations qui s'appliquent à ces boîtes utilisateur : - Avant d'enregistrer des documents, il convient de créer d'abord la boîte destinée à les conserver. - Il est possible de créer jusqu'à 1 000 boîtes. - Vous pouvez enregistrer jusqu'à 200 documents dans une seule boîte. - Il est possible enregistrer jusqu'à 10 000 pages dans toutes les boîtes utilisateur. - Vous pouvez enregistrer jusqu'à 3 000 documents dans toutes les boîtes. - Cette fonction n'est disponible que si un Disque dur est installé. Boîte Bulletin Référence - Vous pouvez créer jusqu'à 10 boîtes utilisateur Bulletin Bord. - Chaque boîte de bulletin de bord ne peut contenir qu'un seul document. Boîte Émission en relève Chaque boîte utilisateur ne peut contenir qu'un seul document. ineo 223/283/363/423 2-11 2.2 Information 2 Boîte Réception mémoire Vous pouvez enregistrer jusqu'à 500 documents dans la Boîte Réception Mémoire. - Si aucun Disque dur n'est installé, en fonction du volume des données actuellement en mémoire il ne sera peut-être pas possible d'enregistrer le nombre maximum de documents. Boîte Relais Référence - Il est possible de créer jusqu'à 5 boîtes Relais. - Chaque boîte Relais ne peut contenir qu'un seul document. Boîte Document sécurisé Voici la liste des restrictions qui s'appliquent à cette boîte utilisateur : - Il est possible de créer jusqu'à 20 boîtes. - Vous pouvez enregistrer jusqu'à 180 documents dans une seule boîte. - Il est possible enregistrer jusqu'à 180 pages dans toutes les boîtes utilisateur. - Vous pouvez enregistrer jusqu'à 180 documents dans toutes les boîtes. - En fonction du volume des données actuellement en mémoire, il ne sera peut-être pas possible d'enregistrer le nombre maximum de documents. - Cette fonction n'est pas disponible si un Disque dur est installé. 2.2.3 Restrictions concernant le nom de fichier Permet de nommer le document à enregistrer. Référence - Le nom peut contenir 30 caractères maximum. - Une fois les documents enregistrés, il est possible d'éditer le noms de fichiers. - Appuyez sur cette touche pour spécifier le nom lors de l'enregistrement des données. Dans le cas contraire, un prédéfini est attribué. En cas d'enregistrement des données sans spécification d'un nom, un nom est créé par combinaison des éléments suivants. Le tableau suivant décrit à titre d'exemple les composants du nom du document "SMFP11102315230". Référence - Les fonctions boîte Public/Privé/Groupe ne sont disponibles que si un Disque dur est installé. Élément Description S Ce caractère indique le mode au moment où le document est enregistré. "S" apparaît pour les documents enregistrés sur l'écran du mode Fax/ Numérisation ou l'écran de la boîte Utilisateur. C : Copie S : Fax/Scanner, Boîte Utilisateur P : Impression R : Fax reçu MFP Cet élément représente le nom de la machine qui a numérisé les données. Il affiche le nom qui a été entré dans [Nom machine] sous [Entrer Adresse Machine] dans [Réglage Admin.Machine] dans Réglages Administrateur. Si le nom affiché doit être changé, spécifiez le nouveau nom en utilisant 10 caractères. 11102315230 Ceci indique l'année (2 derniers chiffres), le mois, le jour, l'heure et la minute de numérisation des données. Si une série de documents sont numérisés sont numérisées en même temps (même minute), les deux derniers chiffres sont alors suivis des numéros de série. _0001 Cet élément indique la page lorsque la numérisation porte sur plusieurs pages. Ce numéro n'apparaît pas dans la colonne Nom document ; cependant, il figure automatiquement comme partie intégrante du nom lors de la transmission du fichier. Cet élément de l'émission FTP ou autres est à prendre en compte lorsqu'un serveur présente une restriction sur les noms de fichiers. .TIF Ceci est l'extension du format du fichier spécifié pour les données. Ces caractères n'apparaissent pas dans la colonne Nom document ; cependant, ils figurent automatiquement comme partie intégrante du nom lors de la transmission du fichier. 2 Authentification et boîtes utilisateur accessibles 2-12 ineo 223/283/363/423 2.3 2.3 Authentification et boîtes utilisateur accessibles Les boîtes utilisateur accessibles et les permissions correspondantes lorsque l'Authentification utilisateur et Compte Département est activée, sont décrites ci-après. Configurez les paramètres d'authentification utilisateur et de compte département selon les fonctions désirées. 2.3.1 Lorsque Authentification utilisateur ou Compte Département est désactivé Référence - Les utilisateurs peuvent accéder à toutes les boîtes Utilisateur Public. - Les boîtes créées par des utilisateurs et les administrateurs sont des boîtes Public. - Les utilisateurs ne peuvent pas créer de boîtes utilisateur si Boîte Util. Autor./Interd. est réglé sur Interdit dans les Réglages Administrateur. 2.3.2 Lorsque seule l'Authentification utilisateur est activée Référence - Les utilisateurs ont accès à toutes les boîtes utilisateur Public et seulement aux boîtes utilisateur Privé qu'ils ont créées. - Les boîtes Privé ne sont pas accessibles aux autres utilisateurs. - Appuyez sur cette touche pour désigner un Administrateur de boîtes. - Un administrateur de boîtes a accès à toutes les boîtes Utilisateur Public et Utilisateur Privé. - Si vous supprimez les données d'authentification en annulant les paramètres d'authentification de l'utilisateur ou à cause d'un changement de méthode d'authentification, toutes les boîtes Privé deviennent des boîtes Public. Création et accès Boîte Utilisateur Public Utilisateur 1 Utilisateur 2 Accès autorisé Boîte Utilisateur Privé de l'utilisateur 2 Boîte Utilisateur Privé de l'utilisateur 1 Boîte Utilisateur Public Administrateur de boîtes Public ineo 223/283/363/423 2-13 2.3 Authentification et boîtes utilisateur accessibles 2 2.3.3 Lorsque seul Compte Département est activé Référence - Les utilisateurs ont accès à toutes les boîtes Utilisateur Publics et seulement aux boîtes Groupe du compte auxquels ils appartiennent. - Si vous supprimez les données d'authentification en annulant les paramètres Compte Département ou à cause d'un changement de méthode d'authentification, toutes les boîtes Groupe deviennent des boîtes Public. 2.3.4 Lorsque Authentification utilisateur et Compte Département sont activés et synchronisés Du fait que le compte destiné aux utilisateurs a été préalablement enregistré, les utilisateurs ne peuvent pas accéder aux boîtes Groupe des comptes auxquels ils n'appartiennent pas. Compte B Boîte Utilisateur Public Compte A Accès autorisé Boîte Utilisateur Groupe du compte A Boîte Utilisateur Groupe du compte B Compte A Compte B Utilisateur 1 Utilisateur 2 2 Authentification et boîtes utilisateur accessibles 2-14 ineo 223/283/363/423 2.3 Référence - Les utilisateurs ont accès à toutes les boîtes Public, aux seules boîtes Groupe du compte auquel ils appartiennent et aux seules boîtes Privé qu'ils ont créées. - Les boîtes Privé ne sont pas accessibles aux autres utilisateurs. - Appuyez sur cette touche pour désigner un Administrateur de boîtes. - Un administrateur de boîtes a accès à toutes les boîtes Utilisateur Public, à toutes les boîtes Utilisateur Privé ainsi qu'à toutes les boîtes Groupe. - Si vous supprimez les données d'authentification en annulant les paramètres d'authentification de l'utilisateur ou à cause d'un changement de méthode d'authentification, toutes les boîtes Groupe deviennent des boîtes Public. 2.3.5 Lorsque Authentification utilisateur et Compte Département sont activés mais pas synchronisés Si le compte de référence d'un utilisateur n'a pas été préalablement enregistré, l'utilisateur doit entrer un nom de compte et le code d'accès pour se connecter. À chaque connexion, l'utilisateur peut accéder aux boîtes Groupe d'un autre compte s'il fait partie de ce dernier. Utilisateur Utilisateur Compte A Compte B Boîte Utilisateur Public Boîte Utilisateur Privé de l'utilisateur 1 Boîte Utilisateur Groupe du compte A Boîte Utilisateur Privé de l'utilisateur 2 Boîte Utilisateur Groupe du compte B Accès autorisé Administrateur de boîtes Public Compte A Compte B Utilisateur 1 ineo 223/283/363/423 2-15 2.3 Authentification et boîtes utilisateur accessibles 2 Référence - Les utilisateurs ont accès à toutes les boîtes utilisateur Public et seulement aux boîtes utilisateur Privé qu'ils ont créées. - Les boîtes Privé ne sont pas accessibles aux autres utilisateurs. - Un utilisateur peut accéder aux boîtes Groupe d'un compte simplement en entrant lors de la connexion, le nom de compte et le code d'accès correspondant. - Appuyez sur cette touche pour désigner un Administrateur de boîtes. - Un administrateur de boîtes a accès à toutes les boîtes Utilisateur Public, à toutes les boîtes Utilisateur Privé ainsi qu'à toutes les boîtes Groupe. - Si vous supprimez les données d'authentification en annulant les paramètres d'authentification de l'utilisateur ou à cause d'un changement de méthode d'authentification, toutes les boîtes Groupe deviennent des boîtes Public. Utilisateur 1 Accès autorisé Accès autorisé par la saisie d'un nom de compte et d'un code d'accès Administrateur de boîtes Public Boîte Utilisateur Public Boîte Utilisateur Privé de l'utilisateur 1 Administrateur de boîtes Public Boîte Utilisateur Groupe du compte B 2 Authentification et boîtes utilisateur accessibles 2-16 ineo 223/283/363/423 2.3 3 Panneau de contrôle/Ecran à cristaux liquides ineo 223/283/363/423 3-3 3.1 Panneau de contrôle 3 3 Panneau de contrôle/Ecran à cristaux liquides 3.1 Panneau de contrôle Le panneau de contrôle permet d'effectuer des opérations du mode Boîte Utilisateur. Voici les touches et interrupteurs du panneau de contrôle. N° : Nom Description 1 Écran tactile Plusieurs écrans de réglage et messages s'affichent à l'écran. Configurez les divers réglages par une pression directe sur l'écran tactile. 2 Voyant d'alimentation S'allume en bleu quand la machine est mise sous tension au moyen de l'interrupteur principal. 3 Interrupteur d'alimentation auxiliaire Actionnez cet interrupteur pour activer/désactiver les opérations machine, y compris Copie, Impression, et Numérisation. En position Arrêt, la machine passe en mode Économie d'énergie. 4 Éco. Énergie Appuyez sur cette touche pour passer en mode Éco. Énergie. Quand la machine est en mode Économie d'énergie, le voyant de la touche Éco. Énergie s'éclaire en vert et l'écran tactile s'éteint. Pour quitter le mode Économie d'énergie, appuyez une nouvelle fois sur la touche Éco. Énergie. 5 Programmes Appuyez sur cette touche pour conserver les paramètres de copie/ numérisation souhaités en tant que programme ou pour rappeler un programme de copie/numérisation enregistré. 6 Utilitaire/Compteur Appuyez sur cette touche pour afficher l'écran Utilitaires et l'écran Compteurs. 3 Panneau de contrôle 3-4 ineo 223/283/363/423 3.1 7 Réinitialiser Appuyez sur cette touche pour effacer tous les réglages (à l'exception des réglages programmés) sélectionnés sur le panneau de contrôle et l'écran tactile. 8 Interruption Appuyez sur cette touche pour passer en mode Interruption. Quand la machine est en mode Interruption, le voyant de la touche Interruption s'éclaire en vert et le message "Mode interruption en cours." s'affiche à l'écran. Pour annuler le mode Interruption, appuyez une nouvelle fois sur la touche Interruption. 9 Arrêt L'appui sur la touche Arrêt pendant la numérisation a pour effet de suspendre momentanément l'opération. 10 Epreuve Appuyez sur cette touche pour imprimer un exemplaire d'essai avant l'impression d'un grand nombre de copies. Vous pouvez vérifiez la finition au niveau de l'écran tactile en appuyant sur cette touche avant de lancer la numérisation ou la copie. • Cette touche n'est pas disponible lors de l'enregistrement de documents avec la touche Boîte. • Pour contrôler l'aperçu de l'image en cas d'enregistrement dans une boîte utilisateur, appuyez sur la touche Fax/Numérisation. Pour la procédure de vérification de l'aperçu, voir le [Guide de l'utilisateur Opérations Scanner réseau/Fax/Fax Réseau]. 11 Départ Appuyez sur cette touche pour lancer la numérisation. Dès que la machine est prête à commencer l'opération de numérisation, le voyant de la touche Départ s'éclaire en bleu. Si le voyant de la touche Départ s'éclaire en orange, l'opération de numérisation ne peut pas commencer. Appuyez sur cette touche pour reprendre une tâche arrêtée 12 Voyant de données Clignote en bleu pendant la réception d'une tâche d'impression. S'éclaire en bleu pendant l'impression des données. 13 C Appuyez sur cette touche pour effacer une valeur (par exemple, le nombre de copies, un taux zoom, un format) introduite au moyen du clavier numérique. 14 Clavier Utilisez cette touche pour saisir le nombre de copies, le taux de zoom et plusieurs autres réglages. 15 Aide Appuyez sur cette touche pour afficher l'écran Guidage. À partir de cet écran, il est possible d'afficher des descriptions des différentes fonctions et détails des opérations. 16 Zoom Ecran Appuyez sur cette touche pour passer en mode Zoom Écran. En cas d'utilisation de Authentication Manager pour l'authentification, l'écran Zoom Écran n'est pas disponible. 17 Accessibilité Appuyez sur cette touche pour afficher l'écran permettant de configurer les paramètres des fonctions d'accessibilité utilisateur. 18 Code Si les réglages Authentification Utilisateur ou Compte Département ont été appliqués, il faut appuyer sur cette touche après avoir introduit le nom d'utilisateur et le code d'accès (pour l'Authentification Utilisateur), ou bien le nom de compte et le code d'accès (pour le Compte Département), pour pouvoir utiliser cette machine. Cette touche permet également de se déconnecter de la machine. 19 Molette de réglage de la Contraste Permet de régler la luminosité de l'écran tactile. 20 Boîte Appuyez sur cette touche pour passer en mode Boîte. Lorsque la machine est en mode Boîte Utilisateur, le voyant de la touche Boîte s'éclaire en vert. 21 Fax/Numérisation Appuyez sur cette touche pour passer en mode Fax/Numérisation. Lorsque la machine est en mode Fax/Numérisation, le voyant de la touche Fax/Numérisation s'éclaire en vert. Pour plus de détails sur les fonctions Fax/Numérisation, voir le [Guide de l'utilisateur Opérations Scanner réseau/Fax/Fax Réseau]. 22 Copie Appuyez sur cette touche pour passer en mode Copie. (Par défaut, la machine est en mode Copie.) Lorsque la machine est en mode Copie, le voyant de la touche Copie s'éclaire en vert. Pour plus d'informations, reportez- vous au [Guide de l'utilisateur Opérations Copie]. N° : Nom Description ineo 223/283/363/423 3-5 3.1 Panneau de contrôle 3 7 ATTENTION - N'appuyez pas trop fort sur l'écran tactile, sinon vous pourriez le rayer ou l'endommager. Ne jamais appuyer trop fort sur l'écran tactile et ne jamais utiliser un objet dur ou pointu pour effectuer une sélection sur l'écran tactile. 3 Écran tactile 3-6 ineo 223/283/363/423 3.2 3.2 Écran tactile 3.2.1 Éléments de l'écran Icônes qui apparaissent sur le l'écran tactile Certaines icônes indiquant l'état de la machine peuvent apparaître dans la zone d'affichage des icônes. Cidessous figurent les icônes disponibles. N° : Nom Description 1 Zone des messages C'est là que s'affichent l'état de la machine et le détail des procédures opératoires. 2 Zone d'affichage des fonctions/réglages L'écran affiche les onglets et les touches permettant d'accéder aux écrans des diverses fonctions. Utilisez cette zone pour la configuration des fonctions. Appuyez sur un onglet ou une touche pour afficher l'écran permettant de spécifier les réglages. 3 Zone d'affichage des icônes Affiche des icônes indiquant l'état des tâches et de la machine ainsi que des touches de raccourci. 4 Volet de gauche Affiche plusieurs touches telles que [Liste Tâches] qui permet d'afficher les tâches en cours ou en souffrance et [Vérifier Tâche] qui permet d'afficher le résultat de réglages spécifiés. Pour plus d'information sur l'affichage et la description du volet de gauche, voir page 3-7. 5 Voyants d'alimentation en toner Affiche le niveau de toner restant. 4 5 1 2 3 Icône Description Indique que des données sont en cours d'émission à partir de la machine, indépendamment du mode dans lequel elle se trouve. Indique que la machine est en train de recevoir des données, indépendamment du mode en cours. Indique qu'un incident affecte la fonction impression ou numérisation. Appuyez sur cette icône pour faire apparaître l'écran affichant un code d'avertissement. Si l'écran d'avertissement a été fermé pendant que l'avertissement s'affichait, appuyez sur cette touche pour ouvrir à nouveau l'écran d'avertissement. ineo 223/283/363/423 3-7 3.2 Écran tactile 3 3.2.2 Affichage et utilisation du volet de gauche Le volet de gauche de l'écran tactile propose des touches permettant de vérifier l'état des tâches et la configuration de la machine. Les touches suivantes sont disponibles sur le volet de gauche du mode Boîte. Apparaît en présence d'un message indiquant qu'il faut remplacer les consommables ou que la machine nécessite un entretien. Appuyez sur cette icône pour afficher le message, puis procédez au remplacement ou à la procédure d'entretien. S'affiche si une erreur survient lors de la connexion avec le serveur POP. Indique qu'il n'y a plus de papier dans le magasin. Indique qu'il reste très peu de papier dans le magasin papier. Indique que le Mode Sécurité Avancée est actif. Indique qu'un périphérique de mémoire externe est connecté à la machine. Indique qu'une mémoire externe non-normalisée est connectée à la machine et que, par conséquent, la connexion USB n'est pas établie. Indique que la tâche est en attente de recomposition, par exemple, parce que la ligne du destinataire est occupée, dans le cadre d'une émission Fax G3 ou Fax Adresse IP. Icône Description N° : Nom Description 1 [Liste Tâches] Appuyez sur cette touche pour contrôler la tâche en cours d'exécution et consulter le journal des tâches. 2 [Vérifier Tâche] Appuyez sur cette touche pour vérifier les informations de la boîte utilisateur sélectionnée, ainsi que divers réglages des fonctions Numérisation, Impression et Émission. 3 [Aperçu] Appuyez sur cette touche pour contrôler l'image d'aperçu d'un document enregistré. 1 2 3 3 Écran tactile 3-8 ineo 223/283/363/423 3.2 Liste Tâches Toute commande visant à effectuer une opération comme enregistrer des données dans une boîte, ou à imprimer ou à envoyer des documents enregistrés, s'appelle une tâche. Sélectionnez [Liste Tâches] pour afficher la tâche en cours d'exécution. Référence - Les boîtes Public/Privé/Groupe ne sont disponibles que si un Disque dur est installé. Liste Tâches - Supprimer Appuyez sur cette touche pour supprimer la tâche en cours et annuler l'opération. Sélectionnez la tâche dans la liste des tâches et appuyez sur [Supprimer]. Vérifiez le message qui apparaît, puis supprimez la tâche. Aucun document contenu dans une boîte utilisateur ne sera supprimé même si la tâche en cours est supprimée. ineo 223/283/363/423 3-9 3.2 Écran tactile 3 Liste Tâches - Détails Tâche Appuyez sur cette touche pour voir la liste des tâches en cours d'exécution et le journal des tâches pour confirmation. On distingue les tâches selon les quatre types suivants : Référence - La fonction permettant d'enregistrer un document dans la boîte Public/Privé/Groupe n'est disponible que si un Disque dur est installé. - La boîte Document sécurisé n'est pas disponible si un Disque dur est installé. - Si un Disque dur est installé, la réception confidentielle peut être activée lorsque la fonction Réception confidentielle est assignée à une boîte Public/Privé/Groupe. Pour plus de détails, voir page 8-6. Élément Description [Impression] Répertorie toutes les tâches d'impression : copie, impression ordinateur, fax reçus ou rapports. [Env.] Affiche la liste des tâches d'émission fax et scanner. [Recevoir] Affiche la liste des tâches de réception Fax. [Enregistr.] Énumère les tâches enregistrées dans la boîte. Élément Description Eléments de la liste N° : Numéro d'identification de la tâche qui est assigné lorsque cette dernière est mise dans la file. Nom utili. : Affiche ou le nom d'utilisateur/nom de compte ou le nom d'utilisateur/ nom de compte de l'utilisateur qui a enregistré le document. État : L'état de la tâche (Réception en cours/En file d'attente/Impression en cours/Impress Stoppée/Erreur d'impression/Enregistr mémoire en cours) est affiché à l'écran. Nom Document : Nom Fichier imprimé. Heure Enreg. : Affiche l'heure à laquelle la tâche à été mise en file d'attente. Doc. : Affiche le nombre de pages de l'original. Copies : nombre de copies à imprimer. [ ][ ] Lorsque plus de sept tâches doivent être affichées, appuyez sur ces touches pour faire apparaître les autres tâches. [Supprimer] Appuyez sur cette touche pour supprimer la tâche sélectionnée. [Augment Priorité] Appuyez sur cette touche pour changer la priorité de la tâche. • Si vous réglez Modifier tâches prioritaires, dans Réglages Administrateur, sur "Interdit", il n'est pas possible de spécifier la priorité des tâches. • S'il est spécifié par réglage que la tâche d'impression en cours peut être suspendue, l'impression s'arrête et l'impression de la tâche devenue prioritaire commence. L'impression de la tâche interrompue redémarre automatiquement une fois que l'impression de la tâche prioritaire est terminée. 3 Écran tactile 3-10 ineo 223/283/363/423 3.2 Référence - Si les réglages Authentification utilisateur sont appliqués, il n'est pas possible de voir les noms des documents qui n'ont pas été enregistrés par les utilisateurs connectés. - Les noms des documents confidentiels ne sont pas visibles. - La fonction permettant d'enregistrer un document dans la boîte Public/Privé/Groupe n'est disponible que si un Disque dur est installé. - La boîte Document sécurisé n'est pas disponible si un Disque dur est installé. - Si un Disque dur est installé, la réception confidentielle peut être activée lorsque la fonction Réception confidentielle est assignée à une boîte Public/Privé/Groupe. Pour plus de détails, voir page 8-6. Référence - Si les réglages Authentification utilisateur sont appliqués, il n'est pas possible de voir les noms des documents qui n'ont pas été enregistrés par les utilisateurs connectés. - Les noms des documents confidentiels ne sont pas visibles. - Pour voir les images numérisées, il faut préalablement régler "Affichage Miniature Historique Tâches" sur "Oui" dans Réglages Administrateur. Pour plus d'informations, reportez-vous au [Guide de l'utilisateur Opérations Copie]. - La fonction permettant d'enregistrer un document dans la boîte Public/Privé/Groupe n'est disponible que si un Disque dur est installé. [Libérer Tâch Att] Appuyez sur cette touche pour modifier les réglages d'une tâche enregistrée, ou pour imprimer ou supprimer la tâche. [Vér. Par. Tâches.] Appuyez sur cette touche pour vérifier les paramètres de la tâche sélectionnée. Appuyez sur [ Retour] ou sur [Suiv ] pour vérifier les réglages. [Info.] Appuyez sur cette touche pour vérifier l'état, la source d'enregistrement/ nom d'utilisateur, nom du document, bac de sortie, heure d'enregistrement, nombre de pages d'original, nombre de copies, ou informations sur le serveur externe de la tâche sélectionnée. Pour supprimer une tâche, appuyez sur [Supprimer]. • Les informations sur le serveur externe disponibles en appuyant sur la touche [Info.] s'affichent uniquement en cas d'utilisation de l'Authentification Serveur Externe. Élément Description Eléments de la liste N° : Numéro d'identification de la tâche qui est assigné lorsque cette dernière est mise dans la file. Nom utili. : Affiche ou le nom d'utilisateur/nom de compte ou le nom d'utilisateur/ nom de compte de l'utilisateur qui a enregistré le document. Nom Document : Nom Fichier imprimé. Heure Enreg. : Affiche l'heure à laquelle la tâche à été mise en file d'attente. Doc. : Affiche le nombre de pages de l'original. Copies : nombre de copies à imprimer. Résultat : Affiche le résultat de l'opération (Terminé avec succès/Supprimé à cause d'une erreur/Supprim. par Utilisateur/mode en partie annulé). [ ][ ] Lorsque plus de sept tâches doivent être affichées, appuyez sur ces touches pour faire apparaître les autres tâches. [Tâches supprimées]/ [Tâches terminées]/ [Ttes tâches] Appuyez successivement pour afficher le type de tâche. [Détail] Permet de vérifier le résultat, détail de l'erreur, source d'enregistrement/ nom d'utilisateur, nom du document, bac de sortie, heure d'enregistrement, heure d'achèvement, nombre de pages d'original, nombre de copies, nombre de pages à imprimer, ou informations sur le serveur externe de la tâche sélectionnée. • Les informations sur le serveur externe disponibles en appuyant sur la touche [Info.] s'affichent uniquement en cas d'utilisation de l'Authentification Serveur Externe. [Image Numérisée] Sélectionnez la tâche pour afficher l'image numérisée. Élément Description ineo 223/283/363/423 3-11 3.2 Écran tactile 3 - La boîte Document sécurisé n'est pas disponible si un Disque dur est installé. - Si un Disque dur est installé, la réception confidentielle peut être activée lorsque la fonction Réception confidentielle est assignée à une boîte Public/Privé/Groupe. Pour plus de détails, voir page 8-6. Référence - Si les réglages Authentification utilisateur sont appliqués, il n'est pas possible de voir les noms des documents qui n'ont pas été enregistrés par les utilisateurs connectés. - Les noms des documents confidentiels ne sont pas visibles. - La fonction permettant d'enregistrer un document dans la boîte Public/Privé/Groupe, la fonction fax Internet, et la fonction fax adresse IP ne sont disponibles que si un Disque dur est installé. Élément Description Eléments de la liste N° : Numéro d'identification de la tâche qui est assigné lorsque cette dernière est mise dans la file. Type d'adresse : Affiche le type de destination (notamment fax, E-Mail, FTP, PC (SMB), WebDAV, TWAIN, ou Désactivé*). "TWAIN" pour les tâches envoyées via le Service Web. État : Affiche l'état de la tâche (Envoi en cours/En file d'attente/Composition en cours/en attente de recomposition/suppression en cours). Adresse : Affiche le numéro de fax, l'adresse Email, le nom de la boîte, etc. de la machine du destinataire. Heure Enreg. : Affiche l'heure à laquelle la tâche à été mise en file d'attente. Doc. : Affiche le nombre de pages de l'original. * S'affiche lors de l'envoi de données alors que l'adresse est supprimée. [ ][ ] Lorsque plus de sept tâches doivent être affichées, appuyez sur ces touches pour faire apparaître les autres tâches. [Tempo Tâche Émis.] Affiche l'état de l'émission réservée en mémoire. Pour supprimer une tâche, appuyez sur [Supprimer]. [L1][L2] Ces touches apparaissent si deux Kits Fax sont installés. Appuyez sur l'une de ces touches. La liste des tâches de la ligne sélectionnée apparaît. [Supprimer] Appuyez sur cette touche pour supprimer la tâche sélectionnée. [Recomposer] Sélectionnez une tâche dont l'état est réglé sur "Attente de recomposition" pour procéder à la recomposition du numéro. [Vér. Par. Tâches] Appuyez sur cette touche pour vérifier les paramètres de la tâche sélectionnée. Appuyez sur [ Retour] ou sur [Suiv ] pour vérifier les réglages. [Info.] Appuyez sur cette touche pour vérifier la source d'enregistrement/le nom d'utilisateur, le nom de fichier, le type de destination, la destination, l'heure d'enregistrement, l'émission, le nombre de pages de l'original et les informations sur serveur externe, concernant la tâche sélectionnée. Pour supprimer une tâche, appuyez sur [Supprimer]. • Les informations sur le serveur externe disponibles en appuyant sur la touche [Info.] s'affichent uniquement en cas d'utilisation de l'Authentification Serveur Externe. • [Type] apparaît seulement quand la destination est un fax, un fax Internet ou un fax Adresse IP. 3 Écran tactile 3-12 ineo 223/283/363/423 3.2 Référence - Si les réglages Authentification utilisateur sont appliqués, il n'est pas possible de voir les noms des documents qui n'ont pas été enregistrés par les utilisateurs connectés. - Les noms des documents confidentiels ne sont pas visibles. - Pour voir les images numérisées, il faut préalablement régler "Affichage Miniature Historique Tâches" sur "Oui" dans Réglages Administrateur. Pour plus d'informations, reportez-vous au [Guide de l'utilisateur Opérations Copie]. - La fonction permettant d'enregistrer un document dans la boîte Public/Privé/Groupe, la fonction fax Internet, et la fonction fax adresse IP ne sont disponibles que si un Disque dur est installé. Élément Description Eléments de la liste N° : Numéro d'identification de la tâche qui est assigné lorsque cette dernière est mise dans la file. Type d'adresse : Affiche le type de destination (notamment fax, E-Mail, FTP, PC (SMB), WebDAV, TWAIN, ou Désactivé*). "TWAIN" pour les tâches envoyées via le Service Web. Adresse : Affiche le numéro de fax, l'adresse Email, le nom de la boîte, etc. de la machine du destinataire. Heure Enreg. : Affiche l'heure à laquelle la tâche à été mise en file d'attente. Doc. : Affiche le nombre de pages de l'original. Résultat : Affiche le résultat de l'opération (Terminé avec succès/Supprimé à cause d'une erreur/Supprim. par Utilisateur). "Erreur détectée" s'affiche aussi pour la diffusion. * S'affiche lors de l'envoi de données alors que l'adresse est supprimée. [ ][ ] Lorsque plus de sept tâches doivent être affichées, appuyez sur ces touches pour faire apparaître les autres tâches. [Tâches supprimées]/ [Tâches terminées]/ [Ttes tâches] Appuyez successivement pour afficher le type de tâche. [Liste Comm.] Affiche la liste des tâches d'émission numérisation et fax (envoyées/reçues). Vous pouvez imprimer le Rapport d'activité, le Rapport d'émission et le Rapport de réception dans les écrans Liste respectifs. [Info.] Appuyez sur cette touche pour vérifier le résultat, les détails d'erreur, la source d'enregistrement/le nom utilisateur, le nom de fichier, le type de destination, la destination, l'heure d'enregistrement, la communication, le nombre de pages d'original et les infos sur serveur externe, concernant la tâche sélectionnée. • Les informations sur le serveur externe disponibles en appuyant sur la touche [Info.] s'affichent uniquement en cas d'utilisation de l'Authentification Serveur Externe. • [Type] apparaît seulement quand la destination est un fax, un fax Internet ou un fax Adresse IP. [Image Numérisée] Sélectionnez la tâche pour afficher l'image numérisée. Élément Description Eléments de la liste N° : Numéro d'identification de la tâche qui est assigné lorsque cette dernière est mise dans la file. Nom utili. : Affiche ou le nom d'utilisateur/nom de compte ou le nom d'utilisateur/ nom de compte de l'utilisateur qui a enregistré le document. État : Affiche l'état de la tâche (Réception en cours/Composition en cours (Réception en relève)/En file/Impression en cours/Impress Stoppée/Erreur d'impression/Enregistr. mémoire en cours/Suppression en cours). Nom Document : Affiche le nom le nom du document enregistré ou reçu. Heure Enreg. : Affiche l'heure à laquelle la tâche à été mise en file d'attente. Doc. : Affiche le nombre de pages de l'original reçues. [ ][ ] Lorsque plus de sept tâches doivent être affichées, appuyez sur ces touches pour faire apparaître les autres tâches. ineo 223/283/363/423 3-13 3.2 Écran tactile 3 Référence - Si les réglages Authentification utilisateur sont appliqués, il n'est pas possible de voir les noms des documents qui n'ont pas été enregistrés par les utilisateurs connectés. - Les noms des documents confidentiels ne sont pas visibles. Référence - Si les réglages Authentification utilisateur sont appliqués, il n'est pas possible de voir les noms des documents qui n'ont pas été enregistrés par les utilisateurs connectés. - Les noms des documents confidentiels ne sont pas visibles. - Pour voir les images reçues, il faut préalablement régler "Affichage Miniature Historique Tâches" sur "Oui" dans Réglages Administrateur. Pour plus d'informations, reportez-vous au [Guide de l'utilisateur Opérations Copie]. [L1][L2] Ces touches apparaissent si deux Kits Fax sont installés. Appuyez sur l'une de ces touches. La liste des tâches de la ligne sélectionnée apparaît. [Supprimer] Appuyez sur cette touche pour supprimer la tâche sélectionnée. [Recomposer] Sélectionnez une tâche dont l'état est réglé sur "Attente de recomposition" pour procéder à la recomposition du numéro. [Faire suivre] Fait suivre le fax reçu et enregistré dans la mémoire (Réception Mémoire Proxy). Indiquez les destinataires en sélectionnant les destinations enregistrées dans le Carnet d'Adresses ou en saisissant l'adresse directement. [Info.] Appuyez sur cette touche pour vérifier l'état, la source d'enregistrement/ nom d'utilisateur, nom du document, bac de sortie, heure d'enregistrement, heure d'envoi, nombre de pages d'original, ou informations sur le serveur externe de la tâche sélectionnée. Pour supprimer une tâche, appuyez sur [Supprimer]. Élément Description Eléments de la liste N° : Numéro d'identification de la tâche qui est assigné lorsque cette dernière est mise dans la file. Nom utili. : Affiche ou le nom d'utilisateur/nom de compte ou le nom d'utilisateur/ nom de compte de l'utilisateur qui a enregistré le document. Nom Document : Affiche le nom le nom du document enregistré ou reçu. Heure Enreg. : Affiche l'heure à laquelle la tâche à été mise en file d'attente. Doc. : Affiche le nombre de pages de l'original. Résultat : Affiche le résultat de l'opération (Terminé avec succès/Supprimé à cause d'une erreur/Supprim. par Utilisateur/mode en partie annulé). [ ][ ] Lorsque plus de sept tâches doivent être affichées, appuyez sur ces touches pour faire apparaître les autres tâches. [Tâches supprimées]/ [Tâches terminées]/ [Ttes tâches] Appuyez successivement pour afficher le type de tâche. [Liste Comm.] Affiche la liste des tâches d'émission numérisation et fax (envoyées/reçues). Vous pouvez imprimer le Rapport d'activité, le Rapport d'émission et le Rapport de réception dans les écrans Liste respectifs. [Info.] Appuyez sur cette touche pour vérifier le résultat de la tâche, le détaillé des erreurs, la source d'enregistrement/le nom utilisateur, le nom de fichier, le bac de sortie, l'heure d'enregistrement et le nombre de pages d'original pour la tâche sélectionnée. [Image reçue] Sélectionnez la tâche pour afficher l'image reçue. Élément Description 3 Écran tactile 3-14 ineo 223/283/363/423 3.2 Référence - Si les réglages Authentification utilisateur sont appliqués, il n'est pas possible de voir les noms des documents qui n'ont pas été enregistrés par les utilisateurs connectés. - Les noms des documents confidentiels ne sont pas visibles. - La fonction permettant d'enregistrer un document dans la boîte Public/Privé/Groupe n'est disponible que si un Disque dur est installé. - La boîte Document sécurisé n'est pas disponible si un Disque dur est installé. - Si un Disque dur est installé, la réception confidentielle peut être activée lorsque la fonction Réception confidentielle est assignée à une boîte Public/Privé/Groupe. Pour plus de détails, voir page 8-6. Élément Description Eléments de la liste N° : Numéro d'identification de la tâche qui est assigné lorsque cette dernière est mise dans la file. Nom utili. : Affiche ou le nom d'utilisateur/nom de compte ou le nom d'utilisateur/ nom de compte de l'utilisateur qui a enregistré le document. État : Affiche l'état de la tâche (Réception, Enreg. Mémoire, Envoi). Nom Document : Affiche le nom le nom du document enregistré. Heure Enreg. : Affiche l'heure à laquelle la tâche à été mise en file d'attente. Doc. : Affiche le nombre de pages de l'original. [ ][ ] Lorsque plus de sept tâches doivent être affichées, appuyez sur ces touches pour faire apparaître les autres tâches. [Supprimer] Appuyez sur cette touche pour supprimer la tâche sélectionnée. [Info.] Appuyez sur cette touche pour vérifier l'état, la source d'enregistrement/ nom d'utilisateur, nom du document, boîte utilisateur, heure d'enregistrement, nombre de pages d'original, ou informations sur le serveur externe de la tâche sélectionnée. Pour supprimer une tâche, appuyez sur [Supprimer]. • Les informations sur le serveur externe disponibles en appuyant sur la touche [Info.] s'affichent uniquement en cas d'utilisation de l'Authentification Serveur Externe. Élément Description Eléments de la liste N° : Numéro d'identification de la tâche qui est assigné lorsque cette dernière est mise dans la file. Nom utili. : Affiche ou le nom d'utilisateur/nom de compte ou le nom d'utilisateur/ nom de compte de l'utilisateur qui a enregistré le document. Nom Document : Affiche le nom le nom du document enregistré. Heure Enreg. : Affiche l'heure à laquelle la tâche à été mise en file d'attente. Doc. : Affiche le nombre de pages de l'original. Résultat : Affiche le résultat de l'opération (Terminé avec succès/Supprimé à cause d'une erreur/Supprim. par Utilisateur/mode en partie annulé). [ ][ ] Lorsque plus de sept tâches doivent être affichées, appuyez sur ces touches pour faire apparaître les autres tâches. [Tâches supprimées]/ [Tâches terminées]/ [Ttes tâches] Appuyez successivement pour afficher le type de tâche. [Liste Comm.] Affiche la liste des tâches d'émission numérisation et fax (envoyées/reçues). Vous pouvez imprimer le Rapport d'activité, le Rapport d'émission et le Rapport de réception dans les écrans Liste respectifs. [Info.] Appuyez sur cette touche pour vérifier le résultat, détail de l'erreur, source d'enregistrement/nom d'utilisateur, nom du document, boîte utilisateur, heure d'enregistrement, nombre de pages d'original, ou informations sur le serveur externe de la tâche sélectionnée. • Les informations sur le serveur externe disponibles en appuyant sur la touche [Info.] s'affichent uniquement en cas d'utilisation de l'Authentification Serveur Externe. [Image enregistrée] Sélectionnez la tâche pour afficher l'image enregistrée. ineo 223/283/363/423 3-15 3.2 Écran tactile 3 Référence - Si les réglages Authentification utilisateur sont appliqués, il n'est pas possible de voir les noms des documents qui n'ont pas été enregistrés par les utilisateurs connectés. - Les noms des documents confidentiels ne sont pas visibles. - Pour voir les images enregistrées, il faut préalablement régler "Affichage Miniature Historique Tâches" sur "Oui" dans Réglages Administrateur. Pour plus d'informations, reportez-vous au [Guide de l'utilisateur Opérations Copie]. - La fonction permettant d'enregistrer un document dans la boîte Public/Privé/Groupe n'est disponible que si un Disque dur est installé. - La boîte Document sécurisé n'est pas disponible si un Disque dur est installé. - Si un Disque dur est installé, la réception confidentielle peut être activée lorsque la fonction Réception confidentielle est assignée à une boîte Public/Privé/Groupe. Pour plus de détails, voir page 8-6. 3 Écran tactile 3-16 ineo 223/283/363/423 3.2 Infos Boîte Affiche les infos boîte correspondant à la boîte sélectionnée. Utilis/Archiv - Détail Appuyez sur [Détail] en bas à gauche de l'écran Utiliser Document pour vérifier l'heure d'enregistrement, le nom utilisateur, le nom du document, le nombre de pages et le numéro de tâche du document sélectionné. Référence - Si vous sélectionnez plusieurs documents, utilisez [ ][ ] pour changer de page. dPour info Pour contrôler l'image d'aperçu, voir page 3-18. Utilis/Archiv - Vérif.Régl. Tâche Sélectionnez [Env.] ou [Lier ÉMI] sur l'onglet Env. pour afficher l'écran de saisie des adresses. [Vérif.Régl. Tâche] s'affiche en bas à gauche de l'écran. Référence - Appuyez sur [Vérif.Régl. Tâche] pour vérifier les paramètres suivants : – Vérifier Adresse – Contenu Réglage Document – Paramètres de communication (ne s'affiche pas si Combinaison est activé.) – Réglages E-Mail ineo 223/283/363/423 3-17 3.2 Écran tactile 3 Utilis/Archiv - Vérif.Régl. Tâche - Vérifier Adresse Affiche la liste de destinations enregistrées dans la machine. Référence - Pour ajouter une destination au carnet d'adresses après l'avoir saisie directement, sélectionnez la destination et appuyez sur [Enregistrement Dest.]. - Pour vérifier les informations détaillées, sélectionnez une destination, et appuyez sur [Détails]. - Pour supprimer une destination, sélectionnez celle que vous voulez supprimer et appuyez sur [Supprimer]. dPour info Pour plus de détails sur l'enregistrement d'une destination dans le carnet d'adresses, voir le [Guide de l'utilisateur Opérations Scanner réseau/Fax/Fax Réseau]. Utilis/Archiv - Vérif.Régl. Tâche - Réglages Document Permet de consulter la liste des réglages de résolution, de type de fichier et de couleur. 3 Écran tactile 3-18 ineo 223/283/363/423 3.2 Utilis/Archiv - Vérif.Régl. Tâche - Réglage communication Permet de contrôler la configuration de la ligne et les paramètres de la méthode de transmission. Appuyez sur [ Retour] ou sur [Suiv ] pour vérifier les réglages. Utilis/Archiv - Vérif.Régl. Tâche - Réglages E-mail Vérifiez le nom du document, le sujet, l'adresse d'origine et le corps du message pour envoyer des messages E-mail. Aperçu Vérifiez l'image d'aperçu du document sélectionné avant d'utiliser ou d'archiver les documents. Appuyez sur [Aperçu] pour sélectionner un document. L'image de la première page s'affiche sur le panneau de gauche. Référence - S'il s'agit d'un document de plusieurs pages, seule l'image de la première page peut être affichée. ineo 223/283/363/423 3-19 3.2 Écran tactile 3 Aperçu avant impression Appuyez sur [Détail] Pour agrandir l'aperçu de l'image. Agrandissez l'image du document pour vérifier les détails. L'image peut être agrandie 2 fois, 4 fois ou 8 fois. Pour voir la partie voulue de l'image agrandie, utilisez les barres de défilement à droite et en bas de l'image. Aperçu (Impression/Combinaison) Permet d'obtenir un aperçu de la page du résultat d'impression en appuyant sur [Aperçu] - [Détail] sur le volet de gauche si vous avez sélectionné [Imprimer] ou [Combinaison]. Référence - S'il s'agit d'un document de plusieurs pages, il est possible d'obtenir un aperçu de toutes les pages. Élément Description [ Aperçu Page]/[Page suiv. ] Si le document enregistré contient plusieurs pages, utilisez ces touches pour faire défiler les pages. [Zoom] Agrandissez l'image du document pour vérifier les détails. L'image peut être agrandie 2 fois, 4 fois ou 8 fois. Pour voir la partie voulue de l'image agrandie, utilisez les barres de défilement à droite et en bas de l'image. [Pivoter Image] : Pivote la page actuellement affichée de 180 degrés pour afficher l'image. [Pivoter pages] : À sélectionner si le document enregistré contient plusieurs pages. • Vous pouvez sélectionner plusieurs images à pivoter sur la page. • [Page impaire] : Permet de sélectionner des images dans les pages de numéro impair. • [Page paire] : Permet de sélectionner des images dans les pages de numéro pair. • [Tout sélectionner] : Permet de sélectionner des images dans toutes les pages. • [Angle de rotation] : Cliquez sur [180°] pour pivoter une page. [Voir Finition] Affiche les réglages spécifiés sous forme d'icônes et de descriptions sur l'image d'aperçu. Annuler [Voir Finition] pour effacer les icônes et texte de sorte que seule l'image apparaisse à l'écran. 3 Écran tactile 3-20 ineo 223/283/363/423 3.2 Aperçu - (Env./Lier EMI) Permet d'obtenir un aperçu de la page du résultat d'émission en appuyant sur [Aperçu] - [Détail] sur le volet de gauche si vous avez sélectionné [Env.] ou [Lier EMI]. Élément Description [Numéris.] Affiche un aperçu des opérations Émission E-mail/PC (FTP)/Émission fichier (SMB)/Émission fichier (WebDAV). [Fax] Appuyez sur cette touche pour afficher l'aperçu pour les opérations Fax G3, Fax Adresse IP ou Fax Internet opérations. [ Aperçu Page]/[Page suiv. ] Si le document enregistré contient plusieurs pages, utilisez ces touches pour faire défiler les pages. [Zoom] Agrandissez l'image du document pour vérifier les détails. L'image peut être agrandie 2 fois, 4 fois ou 8 fois. Pour voir la partie voulue de l'image agrandie, utilisez les barres de défilement à droite et en bas de l'image. [Pivoter Image] Si [Numérisation] est sélectionné dans [Aperçu] : Pivote la page actuellement affichée de 90 degrés en sens anti-horaire pour afficher l'image. : Pivote la page actuellement affichée de 90 degrés en sens horaire pour afficher l'image. [Pivoter Pages] : À sélectionner si le document enregistré contient plusieurs pages. • Vous pouvez sélectionner plusieurs images à pivoter sur la page. • [Page impaire] : Permet de sélectionner des images dans les pages de numéro impair. • [Page paire] : Permet de sélectionner des images dans les pages de numéro pair. • [Tout sélectionner] : Permet de sélectionner des images dans toutes les pages. • [Angle de rotation] : Sélectionnez [90° à gauche], [90° à droite], ou [180°] comme angle d'inclinaison. Quand la destination est un fax, l'image est envoyée à 180 degrés si [90° àgauche] est sélectionné dans [Angle de rotation] et envoyée à 0° si [90° à droite] est sélectionné. Si TIFF ou JPEG est sélectionné comme comme format de fichier afin de lire un original de grande longueur, il n'est pas possible de spécifier le mode de rotation. Si [Fax] est sélectionné dans [Aperçu] L'image d'une page finalisée s'affiche en noir et blanc. : Pivote la page actuellement affichée de 180 degrés pour afficher l'image. [Pivoter Pages] : À sélectionner si le document enregistré contient plusieurs pages. • Vous pouvez sélectionner plusieurs images à pivoter sur la page. • [Page impaire] : Permet de sélectionner des images dans les pages de numéro impair. • [Page paire] : Permet de sélectionner des images dans les pages de numéro pair. • [Tout sélectionner] : Permet de sélectionner des images dans toutes les pages. • [Angle de rotation] : Cliquez sur [180°] pour pivoter une page. ineo 223/283/363/423 3-21 3.2 Écran tactile 3 Référence - Si vous sélectionnez [Lier EMI], la fonction de suppression de page devient indisponible. - Si vous sélectionnez [Envoyer] pour plusieurs documents, les fonctions de pivotement de page et de suppression de page deviennent indisponibles. [Suppr. page] S'affiche lorsque le document enregistré contient plusieurs pages et que [Envoyer] est sélectionné. Vous pouvez sélectionner plusieurs images à supprimer sur la page. [Pages impaires] : Sélectionnez des images dans les pages de numéro impair pour les supprimer. [Pages paires] : Sélectionnez des images dans les pages de numéro pair pour les supprimer. Il n'est pas possible de supprimer toutes les pages [Voir Finition] Permet de voir l'image de finition telle qu'elle est déterminée par l'application des réglages spécifiés. Si vous annulez [Voir Finition], seule l'image apparaît à l'écran. Élément Description 3 Écran tactile 3-22 ineo 223/283/363/423 3.2 4 Flux d'opérations Boîte ineo 223/283/363/423 4-3 4.1 Enregistrer des documents dans des boîtes 4 4 Flux d'opérations Boîte 4.1 Enregistrer des documents dans des boîtes Cette section décrit les étapes pour enregistrer des documents dans les boîtes Public. Cette fonction n'est disponible que si un Disque dur est installé. Appuyez sur la touche Boite sur le panneau de contrôle Sélectionnez la boîte désirée et appuyez sur [Enreg. doc.] Configurez le nom du document (p. 6-5), les réglages de numérisation (p. 6-6) et les réglages de l'original (p. 6-19) 4 Enregistrer des documents dans des boîtes 4-4 ineo 223/283/363/423 4.1 Référence - Lors de l'enregistrement d'un original avec un mot de passe intégré, l'écran de saisie du mot de passe s'affiche. Saisissez le mot de passe et appuyez sur [Valider] pour lancer l'enregistrement. - Vous ne pouvez pas enregistrer un original avec pare-copie intégré. Chargez l'original Appuyez sur [Départ] ou sur la touche Départ du panneau de contrôle ineo 223/283/363/423 4-5 4.2 Impression de documents depuis une boîte 4 4.2 Impression de documents depuis une boîte Cette section décrit les étapes pour imprimer des documents enregistrés dans les boîtes Public. Cette fonction n'est disponible que si un Disque dur est installé. Appuyez sur la touche Boite sur le panneau de contrôle Sélectionnez la boîte désirée et appuyez sur [Utilis/Archiv] Sélectionnez l'onglet [Impression] Sélectionnez les documents 4 Impression de documents depuis une boîte 4-6 ineo 223/283/363/423 4.2 Si vous avez sélectionné un seul document, appuyez sur [Imprimer] (p. 7-6) En cas de sélection de plusieurs documents et de leur impression avec des fonctions supplémentaires, appuyez sur [Combinaison] (p. 7-7) Configurez l'ordre d'impression (ordre de reliure) (p. 7-8) Configurez les réglages élémentaires et les réglages d'application (p. 7-10, p. 7-16) Configurez les réglages élémentaires et les réglages d'application (p. 7-10, p. 7-16) Pour confirmer le contenu, affichez l'aperçu (p. 3-19) ineo 223/283/363/423 4-7 4.2 Impression de documents depuis une boîte 4 Appuyez sur [Départ] ou sur la touche Départ du panneau de contrôle 4 Envoi de documents depuis une boîte 4-8 ineo 223/283/363/423 4.3 4.3 Envoi de documents depuis une boîte Cette section décrit les étapes pour envoyer des documents enregistrés dans les boîtes Public. Cette fonction n'est disponible que si un Disque dur est installé. Appuyez sur la touche Boite sur le panneau de contrôle Sélectionnez la boîte désirée et appuyez sur [Utilis/Archiv] Sélectionnez l'onglet [Env.] Sélectionnez les documents ineo 223/283/363/423 4-9 4.3 Envoi de documents depuis une boîte 4 Si vous avez sélectionné un seul document, appuyez sur [Envoyer]. (p. 7-34) En cas de sélection de plusieurs documents et de spécification du type de fichier ou d'un tampon, appuyez sur [Lier EMI] (p. 7-34) Configurez l'ordre d'émission (ordre de reliure) (p. 7-8) Spécifiez la destination. My Address Book Saisie directe Vérif. histor (l'historique des tâches fax, fax Internet, ou fax adresse IP ne s'affiche pas si Lier EMI est sélectionné.) Rech. Adresse Spécifiez aussi un programme Numérisation/Fax. Pour plus de détails sur les programmes Numérisation/ Fax, voir le [Guide de l'utilisateur Opérations Scanner réseau/Fax/Fax Réseau]. 4 Envoi de documents depuis une boîte 4-10 ineo 223/283/363/423 4.3 Configurez les réglages document, communication et application (p. 7-48) Configurez les réglages document, communication et application (p. 7-48) Pour confirmer le contenu, affichez l'aperçu (p. 3-20) Appuyez sur [Départ] ou sur la touche Départ du panneau de contrôle ineo 223/283/363/423 4-11 4.4 Enregistrer un document dans une mémoire externe 4 4.4 Enregistrer un document dans une mémoire externe Cette section décrit les étapes pour enregistrer les images numérisées dans la mémoire externe. Appuyez sur Boite sur le panneau de contrôle pendant que la mémoire externe est connectée à la machine Connectez la mémoire externe à la machine et appuyez sur [Enregistrer un document dans la mémoire externe.] Appuyer sur [Enreg. doc.] Appuyez sur [Boîte Utilis.] Sélectionnez l'onglet [Système]. Appuyez sur [Mémoire externe] puis sur [Valider] 4 Enregistrer un document dans une mémoire externe 4-12 ineo 223/283/363/423 4.4 Référence - Lors de l'enregistrement d'un original avec un mot de passe intégré, l'écran de saisie du mot de passe s'affiche. Saisissez le mot de passe et appuyez sur [Valider] pour lancer l'enregistrement. - Vous ne pouvez pas enregistrer un original avec pare-copie intégré. - En sortie d'usine de la machine, la fonction permettant d'enregistrer un document dans une mémoire externe est réglé sur Arrêt (pas d'enregistrement). De plus, elle est réglée sur Arrêt (pas d'enregistrement) par les réglages des fonctions utilisateur lorsque l'authentification utilisateur est activée. Pour enregistrer un document dans une mémoire externe, changez le réglage pour vous permettre d'enregistrer des documents dans Réglages Administrateur. Pour plus de détails, voir page 8-24. Configurez le nom du document (p. 6-5), les réglages de numérisation (p. 6-6) et les réglages de l'original (p. 6-19) Chargez l'original Appuyez sur [Départ] ou sur la touche Départ du panneau de contrôle ineo 223/283/363/423 4-13 4.5 Enregistrer un document de la mémoire externe vers une Boîte 4 4.5 Enregistrer un document de la mémoire externe vers une Boîte Cette section décrit les étapes d'enregistrement dans une boîte utilisateur d'un document archivé en mémoire externe. Cette fonction n'est disponible que si un Disque dur est installé. Appuyez sur Boite sur le panneau de contrôle pendant que la mémoire externe est connectée à la machine Connectez la mémoire externe à la machine et appuyez sur [Enregistrer un document contenu dans la mémoire externe vers une Boîte.] Sélectionnez l'onglet [Système]. Appuyez sur [Mémoire externe] puis sur [Utilis/Archiv] Appuyez sur l'onglet [Réglages Archivage] Sélectionnez un document et appuyez ensuite sur [Enreg. ds Bte Util] 4 Enregistrer un document de la mémoire externe vers une Boîte 4-14 ineo 223/283/363/423 4.5 Référence - La fonction permettant d'enregistrer des documents dans une mémoire externe a été réglée en usine sur Arrêt (pas d'enregistrement). De plus, elle est réglée sur Arrêt (pas d'enregistrement) par les réglages des fonctions utilisateur lorsque l'authentification utilisateur est activée. Pour enregistrer un document de la mémoire externe vers une Boîte utilisateur, changez le réglage pour vous permettre d'enregistrer des documents dans Réglages Administrateur. Pour plus de détails, voir page 8-24. Spécifiez la Boîte utilisateur et le nom du document (p. 7-104) Appuyez sur [Départ] ou sur la touche Départ du panneau de contrôle ineo 223/283/363/423 4-15 4.6 Impression d'un document depuis une mémoire externe 4 4.6 Impression d'un document depuis une mémoire externe Cette section décrit les étapes pour imprimer des documents enregistrés dans la mémoire externe. Appuyez sur Boite sur le panneau de contrôle pendant que la mémoire externe est connectée à la machine Connectez la mémoire externe à la machine et appuyez sur [Imprimer document à partir de la mémoire externe.] Sélectionnez l'onglet [Système] et appuyez ensuite sur [Mémoire externe] Appuyez sur [Utilis/Archiv] Sélectionnez un fichier et appuyez sur [Imprimer] (p. 7-101) 4 Impression d'un document depuis une mémoire externe 4-16 ineo 223/283/363/423 4.6 Référence - La fonction permettant d'enregistrer des documents dans une mémoire externe a été réglée en usine sur Arrêt (pas d'enregistrement). De plus, elle est réglée sur Arrêt (pas d'enregistrement) par les réglages des fonctions utilisateur lorsque l'authentification utilisateur est activée. Pour enregistrer un document de la mémoire externe vers une Boîte utilisateur, changez le réglage pour vous permettre d'enregistrer des documents dans Réglages Administrateur. Pour plus de détails, voir page 8-24. Configurez les réglages d'impression (p. 7-102) Appuyez sur [Départ] ou sur la touche Départ du panneau de contrôle ineo 223/283/363/423 4-17 4.7 Archiver des documents dans une boîte 4 4.7 Archiver des documents dans une boîte Cette section décrit les étapes pour archiver des documents enregistrés dans les boîtes Public. Cette fonction n'est disponible que si un Disque dur est installé. Appuyez sur la touche Boite sur le panneau de contrôle Sélectionnez la boîte désirée et appuyez sur [Utilis/Archiv] Sélectionnez l'onglet [Réglages Archivage] Sélectionnez les documents, puis une fonction (p. 7-64) 4 Archiver des documents dans une boîte 4-18 ineo 223/283/363/423 4.7 dPour info Pour supprimer les documents, voir page 7-65. Pour renommer les documents, voir page 7-65. Pour déplacer les documents dans d'autre boîtes, voir page 7-65. Pour copier les documents dans d'autre boîtes, voir page 7-66. Pour enregistrer un document dans la mémoire externe, voir page 7-66. Pour vérifier les informations relatives aux documents ou afficher un aperçu des documents, voir page 7-69. ineo 223/283/363/423 4-19 4.8 Impression d'un document enregistré dans un téléphone cellulaire ou un agenda électronique 4 4.8 Impression d'un document enregistré dans un téléphone cellulaire ou un agenda électronique Cette section décrit les étapes permettant d'imprimer un document enregistré dans un téléphone mobile ou PDA. Appuyez sur la touche Boite sur le panneau de contrôle Sélectionnez l'onglet [Système]. Appuyez sur [Mobile/PDA] puis sur [Utilis/Archiv] Appuyez sur [Impression] Pour vérifier les préférences d'impression, appuyez sur [Vérif. Régl. Impress.] 4 Impression d'un document enregistré dans un téléphone cellulaire ou un agenda 4-20 ineo 223/283/363/423 4.8 dPour info Pour configurer les réglages d'impression depuis un téléphone cellulaire ou un agenda électronique, voir page 8-13. Entrez le code PIN affiché sur le panneau de contrôle sur le cellulaire ou l'agenda électronique (p. 7-105) ineo 223/283/363/423 4-21 4.9 Enregistrement dans une Boîte utilisateur d'un document archivé dans un téléphone cellulaire ou 4 4.9 Enregistrement dans une Boîte utilisateur d'un document archivé dans un téléphone cellulaire ou un agenda électronique Cette section décrit les étapes permettant d'enregistrer dans une boîte utilisateur un document archivé dans un téléphone mobile ou PDA. Cette fonction n'est disponible que si un Disque dur est installé. Appuyez sur la touche Boite sur le panneau de contrôle Sélectionnez l'onglet [Système]. Appuyez sur [Mobile/PDA] puis sur [Utilis/Archiv] Appuyez sur [Enr. ds Bte Util] Sélectionnez la boîte utilisateur voulue et appuyez ensuite sur [Valider] 4 Enregistrement dans une Boîte utilisateur d'un document archivé dans un téléphone 4-22 ineo 223/283/363/423 4.9 Entrez le code PIN affiché sur le panneau de contrôle sur le cellulaire ou l'agenda électronique (p. 7-106) ineo 223/283/363/423 4-23 4.10 Structure des menus du mode Boîte 4 4.10 Structure des menus du mode Boîte Cette section décrit la configuration et les réglages des fonctions disponibles en mode Boîte. 4.10.1 Enregistrer document Boîte Public, Privé ou Groupe Voici l'architecture des menus permettant d'enregistrer des documents dans des boîtes Public, Privé ou Groupe. Cette fonction n'est disponible que si un Disque dur est installé. Premier niveau Deuxième niveau Troisième niveau Quatrième niveau [Boîte Utilis.] (p. 6-5) [Nom Document] (p. 6-5) [Param. Numéris.] [Type original] (p. 6-6) [Recto/Recto-Vers] (p. 6-7) [Définition] (p. 6-7) [Type Fichier] [Type Fichier] (p. 6-8) [Cryptage] (p. 6-9) [PDF Contours] (p. 6-11) [Réglage Numérisation] (p. 6-11) [Contraste] (p. 6-12) [Couleur] (p. 6-12) [Format Numérisa.] (p. 6-13) [Réglage image] [Suppression Fond] (p. 6-14) [Netteté] (p. 6-15) [Applications] [Effacem cadre] (p. 6-15) [Copie Livre] (p. 6-16) [Numér. Séparée] (p. 6-18) [Réglages Original] [Original spécial] (p. 6-19) [Orig. Mixtes] [Original Plié en Z] [Original long] 4 Structure des menus du mode Boîte 4-24 ineo 223/283/363/423 4.10 Système Voici l'architecture des menus permettant d'enregistrer des documents dans des boîtes Système. [Spécifier direction] [Orientation Original] (p. 6-19) [Position Reliure] (p. 6-20) [Auto] [Haut] [A gauche] [Dépoussiérer] (p. 6-20) Premier niveau Deuxième niveau Troisième niveau Quatrième niveau Premier niveau Deuxième niveau Troisième niveau Quatrième niveau [Annotation Boîte Utilis.] [Boîte Utilis.] (p. 6-5) [Nom Document] (p. 6-5) [Param. Numéris.] [Type original] (p. 6-6) [Recto/Recto-Vers] (p. 6-7) [Définition] (p. 6-7) [Type Fichier] [Type Fichier] (p. 6-8) [Cryptage] (p. 6-9) [PDF Contours] (p. 6-11) [Réglage Numérisa.] (p. 6-11) [Contraste] (p. 6-12) [Couleur] (p. 6-12) [Format Numérisation] (p. 6-13) [Réglage image] [Suppression Fond] (p. 6-14) [Netteté] (p. 6-15) [Applications] [Effacem cadre] (p. 6-15) [Copie Livre] (p. 6-16) [Numér. Séparée] (p. 6-18) ineo 223/283/363/423 4-25 4.10 Structure des menus du mode Boîte 4 Référence - La [Boîte Annotation] n'est disponible que si un Disque dur est installé. - La fonction [Enreg. dans Boîte utilisateur] pour [Mobile/PDA] n'est disponible que si un Disque dur est installé. [Réglages original] [Original spécial] (p. 6-19) [Orig. Mixtes] [Original Plié en Z] [Original long] [Spécifier direction] [Orientation Original] (p. 6-19) [Position Reliure] (p. 6-20) [Dépoussiérer] (p. 6-20) [Mémoire externe] [Boîte Utilis.] (p. 6-5) [Nom Document] (p. 6-5) [Param. Numéris.] [Type original] (p. 6-6) [Recto/Recto-Vers] (p. 6-7) [Définition] (p. 6-7) [Type Fichier] [Type Fichier] (p. 6-8) [Cryptage] (p. 6-9) [PDF Contours] (p. 6-11) [Réglage Numérisa.] (p. 6-11) [Contraste] (p. 6-12) [Couleur] (p. 6-12) [Format Numérisation] (p. 6-13) [Réglage image] [Suppression Fond] (p. 6-14) [Netteté] (p. 6-15) [Applications] [Effacem cadre] (p. 6-15) [Copie Livre] (p. 6-16) [Numér. séparée] (p. 6-18) [Réglages original] [Original spécial] (p. 6-19) [Orig. Mixtes] [Original Plié en Z] [Original long] [Spécifier direction] [Orientation Original] (p. 6-19) [Position Reliure] (p. 6-20) [Dépoussiérer] (p. 6-20) [Mobile/PDA] [Enreg. ds Bte Util] (p. 7-105) Premier niveau Deuxième niveau Troisième niveau Quatrième niveau 4 Structure des menus du mode Boîte 4-26 ineo 223/283/363/423 4.10 4.10.2 Utilis/Archiv Impression (pour les boîtes Public, Privé ou Groupe) Voici l'architecture des menus pour utiliser ou archiver des documents dans des boîtes Public, Privé ou Groupe et pour configurer les réglages d'impression. Voici la description des éléments accessibles grâce aux touches encadrées. Cette fonction n'est disponible que si un Disque dur est installé. Premier niveau Deuxième niveau Troisième niveau Quatrième niveau [Impression] [Copies] (p. 7-10) [Impression] (p. 7-10) [Recto] [Recto-Verso] [Finition] (p. 7-11) [Tri] (p. 7-11) [Groupe] (p. 7-11) [Décalé] (p. 7-11) [Agraf.] (p. 7-11) [Perfo.] (p. 7-12) [Pli/Reliure] (p. 7-13) [Pliage en 2] [Agraf. Centre/ Pliage] [Combinaison] (p. 7-14) [Combinais. pages] [Ordre de combinais.] [Zoom] (p. 7-14) [Réglage existant] [Manuel] [Tous formats] [Minimal] [Zoom fixe] [Définir Taux Zoom] [Marge page] (p. 7-16) [Position Marge] [Ajuster valeur] [Décalage Image] (p. 7-16) [Décalage vertical] [Décalage horizontal] [Changer Décalage verso] ineo 223/283/363/423 4-27 4.10 Structure des menus du mode Boîte 4 [Insér. Feuil/ Couv/Chapitre] [Couverture] (p. 7-18) [Couvert. Face] [Couverture Dos] [Insertion Feuille] (p. 7-19) [Insérer Papier] [Type Encart] [Chapitres] (p. 7-20) [Papier Chapitre] [Tampon/ Surimpression] (p. 7-21) [Date/Heure] (p. 7-21) [Type date] [Type heure] [Pages] [Position Impress.] [Détails Texte] [Numéro Page] (p. 7-22) [Numéro Première Page] [Type Numéro Page] [N° 1er chapitre] [Param. Insert Feuille] (p. 7-23) [Position Impress.] [Détails Texte] [Tampon] (p. 7-23) [Type Tampon/ Tampons prédéfinis] [Pages] [Taille Texte] [Position Impress.] [Sécurité Copie] [Protection Copie] (p. 7-25) [Pare-copie] (p. 7-26) [Copie Prot. MdP] (p. 7-27) [Tampon répétitif] (p. 7-28) [Type Tampon répétitif] (p. 7-29) [Paramètres Détaillés] (p. 7-29) [Position] (p. 7-29) [En-tête/Pied de page] (p. 7-30) [Rappeler En-tête/ Pied de page] [Contrôle] [Surimpression enregistrée] (p. 7-32) [Rappel image surimpression] [Pages] Premier niveau Deuxième niveau Troisième niveau Quatrième niveau 4 Structure des menus du mode Boîte 4-28 ineo 223/283/363/423 4.10 [Combinaison] [Copies] (p. 7-10) [Impression] (p. 7-10) [Recto] [Recto-Verso] [Finition] (p. 7-11) [Décalé] (p. 7-11) [Agraf.] (p. 7-11) [Perfo.] (p. 7-12) [Pli/Reliure] (p. 7-13) [Pliage en 2] [Agraf. Centre/ Pliage] [Impression continue] (p. 7-15) [Marge page] (p. 7-16) [Position Marge] [Ajuster valeur] [Décalage Image] (p. 7-16) [Décalage vertical] [Décalage horizontal] [Changer Décalage verso] [Tampon/ Surimpression] [Date/Heure] (p. 7-21) [Type date] [Type heure] [Pages] [Position Impress.] [Détails Texte] [Numéro Page] (p. 7-22) [Numéro Première Page] [Type Numéro Page] [N° 1er chapitre] [Position impress.] [Détails Texte] [Tampon] (p. 7-23) [Type Tampon/ Tampons prédéfinis] [Pages] [Taille Texte] [Position Impress.] [Sécurité Copie] (p. 7-24) [Protection Copie] (p. 7-25) [Pare-copie] (p. 7-26) [Copie Prot. MdP] (p. 7-27) Premier niveau Deuxième niveau Troisième niveau Quatrième niveau ineo 223/283/363/423 4-29 4.10 Structure des menus du mode Boîte 4 Envoyer (pour les boîtes Public, Privé ou Groupe) Voici l'architecture du menu Utilis/Archiv - Envoyer pour les boîtes Public, Privé ou Groupe. Voici la description des éléments accessibles grâce aux touches encadrées. Cette fonction n'est disponible que si un Disque dur est installé. [Tampon répétitif] (p. 7-28) [Type Tampon répétitif] (p. 7-29) [Paramètres Détaillés] (p. 7-29) [Position] (p. 7-29) [En-tête/Pied de page] (p. 7-30) [Rappeler En-tête/ Pied de page] [Contrôle] [Surimpression enregistrée] (p. 7-32) [Rappel image surimpression] [Pages] [Détails Document] [Aperçu] (p. 7-69) Premier niveau Deuxième niveau Troisième niveau Quatrième niveau Premier niveau Deuxième niveau Troisième niveau Quatrième niveau [Env.] [Carnet Adresses] [Recher simple] (p. 7-38) [Saisie dir.] [Fax] (p. 7-41) [Numéro Fax] [E-Mail] (p. 7-41) [Fax Internet] (p. 7-42) [Capacités RÉC (Destinataire)] (p. 7-42) [Fax Adresse IP] (p. 7-42) [Adresse] [No. de Port] [Type destination machine] [PC (SMB)] (p. 7-43) [Nom Serveur] [Chemin Fichier] [Nom utilisat.] [Code d'accès] [Référence] 4 Structure des menus du mode Boîte 4-30 ineo 223/283/363/423 4.10 [FTP] (p. 7-44) [Nom Serveur] [Chemin Fichier] [Nom utilisat.] [Code d'accès] [Réglages détaillés] [WebDAV] (p. 7-45) [Nom Serveur] [Chemin fichier] [Nom utilisat.] [Code d'accès] [Réglages détaillés] [Vérif. histor] (p. 7-46) [Rech. Adresse] (p. 7-46) [Recher simple] (p. 7-47) [Recherch Avancée] (p. 7-47) [Réglages Document] [Définition] (p. 7-48) [Type Fichier] (p. 7-49) [Type Fichier] (p. 7-49) [Cryptage] (p. 7-50) [Tampon/Surimpression] (p. 7-52) [PDF Contours] (p. 7-52) [Réglage Numérisa.] (p. 7-53) [Couleur] (p. 7-53) [Utiliser réglage couleur existant] [Couleurs] [Niv.Gris] [Noir] [Réglages de Communication] [Réglages Ligne] (p. 7-54) [EMI Outremer] (p. 7-54) [ECM OFF] (p. 7-55) [V.34 OFF] (p. 7-55) [Vérif.Dest. & envoyer] (p. 7-55) [Sélection ligne] (p. 7-55) [Réglages E-Mail] (p. 7-56) [Nom Document] (p. 7-56) [Sujet] (p. 7-56) [De] (p. 7-57) [Corps txte] (p. 7-57) Premier niveau Deuxième niveau Troisième niveau Quatrième niveau ineo 223/283/363/423 4-31 4.10 Structure des menus du mode Boîte 4 [Vérif. régl URL Dest] (p. 7-58) [Carnet Adresses] [Recherche détaillée] [Saisie dir.] [Réglage Méthod Comm.] (p. 7-59) [Émission différée] (p. 7-59) [Mot passe Émission] (p. 7-60) [Fonction TX Code F] (p. 7-60) [Cryptage E-Mail] (p. 7-61) [Signature numérique] (p. 7-61) [Réglages En-tête Fax] (p. 7-61) [Applications] [Tampon/ Surimpression] [Date/Heure] (p. 7-21) [Numéro Page] (p. 7-22) [Tampon] (p. 7-62) [En-tête/Pied de page] (p. 7-30) [Impress. par page] (p. 7-63) [Copies] [Recto/Recto- Vers] [Agraf.] [Lier EMI] [Carnet Adresses] [Recher simple] (p. 7-38) [Saisie dir.] [E-Mail] (p. 7-41) [PC (SMB)] (p. 7-43) [Nom Serveur] [Chemin Fichier] [Nom utilisat.] [Code d'accès] [Référence] [FTP] (p. 7-44) [Nom Serveur] [Chemin Fichier] [Nom utilisat.] [Code d'accès] [Réglages détaillés] [WebDAV] (p. 7-45) [Nom Serveur] [Chemin Fichier] [Nom utilisat.] [Code d'accès] [Réglages détaillés] [Vérif. histor] (p. 7-46) [Rech. Adresse] (p. 7-46) [Recher simple] (p. 7-47) [Recherch Avancée] (p. 7-47) Premier niveau Deuxième niveau Troisième niveau Quatrième niveau 4 Structure des menus du mode Boîte 4-32 ineo 223/283/363/423 4.10 [Réglages Document] [Type Fichier] (p. 7-49) [Type Fichier] (p. 7-49) [Cryptage] (p. 7-50) [Tampon/Surimpression] (p. 7-52) [PDF Contours] (p. 7-52) [Réglage Numérisa.] (p. 7-53) [Réglages de Communication] [Réglages E-Mail] (p. 7-56) [Nom Document] (p. 7-56) [Sujet] (p. 7-56) [De] (p. 7-57) [Corps txte] (p. 7-57) [Vérif. régl URL Dest] (p. 7-58) [Address Book] [Recherche détaillée] [Saisie dir.] [Cryptage E-Mail] (p. 7-61) [Signature numérique] (p. 7-61) [Applications] [Tampon/ Surimpression] [Date/Heure] (p. 7-21) [Numéro Page] (p. 7-22) [Tampon] (p. 7-62) [En-tête/Pied de page] (p. 7-30) [Impress. par page] [Copies] [Recto/Recto- Vers] [Agraf.] [Détails Document] [Aperçu] (p. 7-69) Premier niveau Deuxième niveau Troisième niveau Quatrième niveau ineo 223/283/363/423 4-33 4.10 Structure des menus du mode Boîte 4 Réglages Archivage (pour les boîtes Public, Privé ou Groupe) Voici l'architecture du menu Utilis/Archiv - Réglages Archivage pour les boîtes Public, Privé ou Groupe. Voici la description des éléments accessibles grâce aux touches encadrées. Cette fonction n'est disponible que si un Disque dur est installé. Premier niveau Deuxième niveau Troisième niveau Quatrième niveau [Supprimer] (p. 7-65) [Modif. nom] (p. 7-65) [Déplacer] (p. 7-65) [Copie] (p. 7-66) [Enregistrer dans Mémoire externe.] (p. 7-66) [Détails Document] [Aperçu] (p. 7-69) 4 Structure des menus du mode Boîte 4-34 ineo 223/283/363/423 4.10 Application (pour les boîtes Public, Privé ou Groupe) Voici l'architecture du menu Utilis/Archiv - Application pour les boîtes Public, Privé ou Groupe. Voici la description des éléments accessibles grâce aux touches encadrées. Cette fonction n'est disponible que si un Disque dur est installé. Premier niveau Deuxième niveau Troisième niveau Quatrième niveau [Modifier document] [Suppr. page] (p. 7-71) [Pivoter Page] (p. 7-72) [Déplacer Page] (p. 7-74) [Aperçu] (p. 7-77) [Aperçu/Déf. Plage] (p. 7-76) [Enregistrer la surimpression] (p. 7-78) [Image Surimpression] [Editer] [Nouveau] (p. 7-79) [Écraser] (p. 7-80) [Paramètres Détaillés] (p. 7-81) [Contraste] [Détails Document] [Aperçu détaillé] ineo 223/283/363/423 4-35 4.10 Structure des menus du mode Boîte 4 Système Voici l'architecture du menu Utilis/Archiv pour les boîtes Système. Premier niveau Deuxième niveau Troisième niveau Quatrième niveau [Boîte Utilis. Bulletin Bord] (p. 7-82) [Émis. en relève Boîte Utilis.] (p. 7-83) [Doc. Sécurisé Boîte Utilis.] [Imprimer] − [Imprimer] [Copies] (p. 7-85) [Impression] (p. 7-85) [Recto] [Recto-Verso] [Finition] (p. 7-11) [Tri] [Groupe] [Décalé] [Agraf.] [Perfo.] [Pli/Reliure] (p. 7-13) [Combinaison] (p. 7-14) [Combinais. pages] [Ordre de combinais.] [Zoom] (p. 7-14) [Réglage existant] [Manuel] [Tous formats] [Minimal] [Zoom fixe] [Définir Taux Zoom] [Marge page] (p. 7-16) [Position Marge] [Ajuster valeur] [Décalage Image] [Insér.Feuil/ Couv./Chapitre] (p. 7-17) [Couverture] [Insertion Feuille] [Chapitres] 4 Structure des menus du mode Boîte 4-36 ineo 223/283/363/423 4.10 [Tampon/ Surimpression] (p. 7-21) [Date/Heure] [Numéro Page] [Tampon] [Sécurité Copie] [Tampon répétitif] [En-tête/Pied de page] [Surimpression enregistrée] [Réglages Archivage] (p. 7-86) [Supprimer] [Modif. nom] [Détails Document] [Aperçu] (p. 7-69) [Réception Mémoire Obligat. Boîte Utilis.] [Impression] (p. 7-87) [Réglages Archivage] (p. 7-88) [Supprimer] [Modif. nom] [Détails Document] [Aperçu] (p. 7-69) [Annotation Boîte Utilis.] [Impression] − [Impression] [Copies] (p. 7-10) [Impression] (p. 7-10) [Recto] [Recto-Verso] [Finition] (p. 7-11) [Tri] [Groupe] [Décalé] [Agraf.] [Perfo.] [Pli/Reliure] (p. 7-13) [Combinaison] (p. 7-14) [Combinais. pages] [Ordre de combinais.] [Zoom] (p. 7-14) [Réglage existant] [Manuel] [Tous formats] [Minimal] [Zoom fixe] [Définir Taux Zoom] [Marge page] (p. 7-16) [Position Marge] [Ajuster valeur] [Décalage Image] Premier niveau Deuxième niveau Troisième niveau Quatrième niveau ineo 223/283/363/423 4-37 4.10 Structure des menus du mode Boîte 4 [Insér. Feuil/ Couv/Chapitre] [Couverture] (p. 7-18) [Insertion Feuille] (p. 7-19) [Chapitres] (p. 7-20) [Tampon/ Surimpression] (p. 7-21) [Date/Heure] (p. 7-21) [Numéro Page] (p. 7-22) [Tampon] (p. 7-23) [Sécurité Copie] (p. 7-24) [Tampon répétitif] (p. 7-28) [Surimpression enregistrée] (p. 7-32) [Envoyer] − [Envoyer] [Carnet Adresses] (p. 7-38) [Saisie dir.] [E-Mail] (p. 7-41) [PC (SMB)] (p. 7-43) [FTP] (p. 7-44) [WebDAV] (p. 7-45) [Vérif. histor] (p. 7-46) [Rech. Adresse] (p. 7-46) [Recher simple] (p. 7-47) [Recherch Avancée] (p. 7-47) [Réglages Document] [Définition] (p. 7-48) [Type Fichier] (p. 7-49) [Couleur] (p. 7-53) [Réglages de Communication] [Réglages E-Mail] (p. 7-56) [Réglage URL Dest.] (p. 7-58) [Cryptage E-Mail] (p. 7-61) [Signature numérique] (p. 7-61) [Applications] [Tampon/ Surimpression] (p. 7-62) [Impress. par page] (p. 7-63) [Changer Texte] (p. 7-92) Premier niveau Deuxième niveau Troisième niveau Quatrième niveau 4 Structure des menus du mode Boîte 4-38 ineo 223/283/363/423 4.10 [Réglages Archivage] (p. 7-94) [Supprimer] [Modif. nom] [Applications] [Enregistrer la surimpression] (p. 7-78) [Détails Document] [Aperçu] (p. 7-69) [Ré-émission Boîte Utilis.] [Impression] [Epreuve] (p. 7-95) [Env.] [Fax] (p. 7-96) [Réglages Archivage] [Supprimer] (p. 7-96) [Détails Document] [Aperçu détaillé] [PDF Cryptés Mot de Passe Boîte Utilis.] [Impr/Enreg] [Impr/Enreg] (p. 7-97) [Réglages Archivage] [Supprimer] (p. 7-97) [Détails Document] [ID & Imprimer Boîte Utilis.] [Impression] [Impression] (p. 7-99) [Réglages Archivage] [Supprimer] (p. 7-99) [Détails Document] [Aperçu] (p. 7-69) [Mémoire externe] [Impression] − [Impression] [Copies] (p. 7-102) [Impression] (p. 7-102) [Recto] [Recto-Verso] [Position Reliure] (p. 7-102) [Haut] [A gauche] [A droite] [Finition] (p. 7-11) [Tri] [Groupe] [Décalé] [Agraf.] [Perfo.] [Pli/Reliure] [Papier] (p. 7-103) [Tampon/ Surimpression] [Date/Heure] (p. 7-21) [Numéro Page] (p. 7-22) [Tampon] (p. 7-23) [Sécurité Copie] (p. 7-24) [Tampon répétitif] (p. 7-28) [Réglages Archivage] [Enreg. ds Bte Util.] [Boîte Utilis.] [Nom Document] [Détails Document] Premier niveau Deuxième niveau Troisième niveau Quatrième niveau ineo 223/283/363/423 4-39 4.10 Structure des menus du mode Boîte 4 Référence - La boîte Document sécurisé n'est pas disponible si un Disque dur est installé. - Si un Disque dur est installé, la réception confidentielle peut être activée lorsque la fonction Réception confidentielle est assignée à une boîte Public/Privé/Groupe. Pour plus de détails, voir page 8-6. - Les boîtes Doc. Sécurisé, Annotation, PDF crypté par code, et Boîte Utilisat ID & Imprimer ne sont disponibles que si un Disque dur est installé. - La fonction "Enregistrer un document de la mémoire externe vers une Boîte" concernant la mémoire externe n'est disponible que si un Disque dur est installé. - La fonction [Enreg. ds Boîte Util.] pour Mobile/PDA n'est disponible que si un Disque dur est installé. [Mobile/PDA] [Impression] [Vérif. Régl. Impress.] (p. 7-106) [Enreg. ds Bte Util] (p. 7-107) [Boîte Document sécurisé] [Impression] (p. 7-108) [Réglages Archivage] (p. 7-109) Premier niveau Deuxième niveau Troisième niveau Quatrième niveau 4 Structure des menus du mode Boîte 4-40 ineo 223/283/363/423 4.10 5 Pour accéder au mode Boîte ineo 223/283/363/423 5-3 5.1 Pour accéder au mode Boîte 5 5 Pour accéder au mode Boîte 5.1 Pour accéder au mode Boîte Avant de lancer cette procédure, il convient d'allumer cette machine. Une fois que cette machine est disponible pour copier des données, l'écran Fonctions de base apparaît. Pour accéder au mode Boîte, appuyez sur la touche Boite sur le panneau de contrôle. La fenêtre du mode Boîte apparaît. Appuyez légèrement sur la touche désirée dans la fenêtre pour afficher les menus ou les fonctions. Puis sélectionnez le menu ou la fonction voulue. 5 Menu Opération Boîte 5-4 ineo 223/283/363/423 5.2 5.2 Menu Opération Boîte L'accès au mode Boîte vous permet de sélectionner les menus suivants. 5.2.1 Enregistrer document Numérisez l'original chargé dans cette machine et enregistrez-le dans une boîte. Vous pouvez spécifier le nom ou la qualité image d'un original lors de sont enregistrement. dPour info Pour plus de détails sur la fonction Enregistrer document, voir page 6-4. Pour plus de détails sur la structure du menu Enregistrer document, voir page 4-23. 5.2.2 Utilis/Archiv Imprimez ou envoyez un document enregistré dans une boîte. Lors de l'impression d'un document, vous pouvez spécifier le nombre de jeux ou les marges de page. Lors de l'envoi d'un document, vous pouvez spécifier le type de fichier. Au besoin, vous pouvez renommer ou déplacer un document enregistré dans une boîte ou copier un document dans une autre boîte. dPour info Pour plus de détails sur la fonction Utilis/Archiv, voir page 7-3. Pour plus de détails sur structure de menu Utilis/Archiv, voir page 4-26. 6 Enregistrer document ineo 223/283/363/423 6-3 6.1 Enreg. doc. - Présentation 6 6 Enregistrer document 6.1 Enreg. doc. - Présentation 6.1.1 Fonctions La fonction Enregistrer document vous permet de spécifier directement une destination Boîte lors de l'enregistrement d'un document en mode Boîte. Avec la fonction Enregistrer document, les documents sont enregistrés de la même manière que pour les données numérisées. Boîtes Public, Privé ou Groupe Vous pouvez enregistrer un document copié ou numérisé à l'aide de cette machine. Vous pouvez aussi enregistrer un document dont l'instruction d'impression a été émise par un ordinateur connecté au réseau. Certains réglages Authentification utilisateur ou Compte Département permettent de limiter l'accès de certains utilisateurs à certaines boîtes Privé ou Groupe. Cette fonction n'est disponible que si un Disque dur est installé. Boîte Annotation Si vous désirez imprimer ou envoyer un document en y faisant figurer la date et l'heure ou l'image du numéro d'archivage, enregistrez le document dans la boîte Annotation. Pour utiliser cette boîte, sélectionnez l'onglet [Système] et appuyez sur [Boîte Annotation]. Cette fonction n'est disponible que si un Disque dur est installé. Mémoire externe Vous pouvez enregistrer directement tous les documents numérisés dans une mémoire externe connectée à cette machine. Pour utiliser cette fonction, vérifiez que la mémoire externe est raccordée au connecteur USB de cette machine, sélectionnez l'onglet [Système] et appuyez sur [Mémoire externe]. Autrement, sur l'écran qui s'affiche quand la mémoire externe est insérée dans le connecteur USB, appuyez sur [Enregistrer un document dans la mémoire externe.]. Référence - Dans les réglages usine, la fonction permettant d'enregistrer un document dans une mémoire externe ou d'enregistrer dans une Boîte un document archivé dans la mémoire externe est réglée sur Arrêt (pas d'enregistrement). De plus, elle est réglée sur Arrêt (pas d'enregistrement) par les réglages des fonctions utilisateur lorsque l'authentification utilisateur est activée. Pour enregistrer un document dans une mémoire externe, changez le réglage pour vous permettre d'enregistrer des documents dans Réglages Administrateur. Pour plus de détails, voir page 8-24. La fonction permettant d'enregistrer un document en mémoire externe n'est disponible que si un Disque dur est installé. dPour info Pour plus d'informations sur la mémoire externe disponible, voir page 7-100. 6 Enreg. doc. - Présentation 6-4 ineo 223/283/363/423 6.1 6.1.2 Fenêtre initiale de la fonction Enregistrer document Boîtes Public, Privé ou Groupe Sélectionnez l'onglet [Public], [Privé] ou [Groupe] pour afficher la liste des boîtes dans lesquelles vous pouvez enregistrer un document. Spécifiez ensuite la boîte désirée. Système Sélectionnez l'onglet [Système] pour afficher la liste des boîtes dans lesquelles vous pouvez enregistrer un document. Spécifiez ensuite la boîte désirée. Référence - Si vous sélectionnez [Annotation Boîte Utilis.], spécifiez encore la boîte désirée. ineo 223/283/363/423 6-5 6.1 Enreg. doc. - Présentation 6 6.1.3 Fenêtre Enregistrer document Les éléments de réglage disponibles dans l'écran Enregistrer document sont les suivants. Référence - S'il s'agit d'une mémoire externe, il n'est pas possible de changer la boîte de destination. - Pour enregistrer un document dans une mémoire externe, changez le réglage pour vous permettre d'enregistrer des documents dans Réglages Administrateur. Pour plus de détails, voir page 8-24. Élément Description [Boîte Utilis.] Pour les boîtes Public, Privé, Groupe et Annotation, vous pouvez changer de boîte de destination pour enregistrer des documents. Pour changer la boîte, appuyez sur [Boîte] et sélectionnez une boîte. • Si aucune boîte ne porte le numéro spécifié, une nouvelle boîte Public est automatiquement créée. [Nom Document] Appuyez sur cette touche pour afficher un clavier permettant d'entrer le nom du document. Entrez le nom du document à l'aide du panneau de contrôle. [Param. Numéris.] Configurez les réglages détaillés pour numériser le document. Pour plus de détails, voir page 6-6. [Réglages Original] Configurez les réglages détaillés pour le type d'original et l'orientation de l'original. Pour plus de détails, voir page 6-19. 6 Param. Numéris. 6-6 ineo 223/283/363/423 6.2 6.2 Param. Numéris. Appuyez sur [Param. Numéris.] dans l'onglet Enregistrer document pour configurer les réglages de numérisation détaillés. 6.2.1 De base - Type original Sélectionnez le type d'original en fonction du contenu de l'original. Les types d'original disponibles sont les suivants. Si vous sélectionnez [Texte/Photo] ou [Photo], vous pouvez spécifier également le type de photo. Élément Description [Texte] Original constitué de texte seulement. [Texte/Phot] Original constitué à la fois de texte et photos (demi-teinte). [Photo] Original constitué de photos seulement (demi-teinte). [Original Tramé] Original dont l'impression est globalement pâle. [Papier Copié] Original de densité homogène, imprimé par un copieur ou une imprimante. Élément Description [Papier Photo] Sélectionnez ce réglage pour une photo imprimée sur du papier photo. [Photo imprimée] Sélectionnez ce réglage pour des photos imprimées, comme dans les livres ou les magazines. ineo 223/283/363/423 6-7 6.2 Param. Numéris. 6 6.2.2 De base - Recto/Recto-Verso Sélectionnez s'il faut numériser une face ou les deux faces de l'original. 6.2.3 De base - Définition Sélectionnez la résolution de la numérisation. Référence - La quantité de données augmente en fonction de la résolution sélectionnée et il se peut que vous ne puissiez pas enregistrer de données dans une mémoire externe. Si vous ne pouvez pas enregistrer de données, diminuez la résolution et réessayez de les enregistrer. Élément Description [Recto] Numérise une face de l'original. [Recto-Verso] Numérise les deux faces de l'original. [Couv + Recto- Verso] Numérise la première page de l'original comme couverture en mode recto seul, puis numérise les pages restantes en mode recto-verso. 6 Param. Numéris. 6-8 ineo 223/283/363/423 6.2 6.2.4 De base - Type Fichier Sélectionnez le type de fichier pour enregistrer les données numérisées. Type de fichier Les types de fichier disponibles sont les suivants. dPour info Vous pouvez spécifier le format de compression lors de l'enregistrement d'un fichier TIFF en couleurs. Pour plus d'informations, reportez-vous au [Guide de l'utilisateur Opérations Scanner réseau/Fax/Fax Réseau]. En fonction des réglages Couleur certains formats de fichier ne peuvent pas être sélectionnés. Ci-après figurent les combinaisons de réglages Type de fichier et Couleur disponibles. Référence - Même si vous avez sélectionné le type de fichier lors de l'enregistrement dans une boîte, vous devez spécifier le type de fichier lors du téléchargement des données du document. - Si vous sélectionnez [JPEG], [Séparation Page] est automatiquement sélectionné et réglé sur [1 Chaq. X page(s)] dans Réglage Numérisation. Élément Description [PDF] Enregistre les données au format PDF. [PDF compact] Fichier PDF davantage compressé. Ce format est utilise pour enregistrer des données numérisées en couleurs. [TIFF] Enregistre les données au format TIFF. [JPEG] Enregistre les données au format JPEG. [XPS] Enregistre les données au format XPS. [XPS compact] Enregistre les données dans un fichier XPS, davantage compressé. Couleur Auto Couleurs Niv.Gris Noir PDF o o o o PDF compacto o o − TIFF o o o o JPEG o o o − XPS o o o o XPS compacto o o − ineo 223/283/363/423 6-9 6.2 Param. Numéris. 6 Cryptage Si le format de fichier [PDF] ou [PDF compact] est sélectionné, vous pouvez spécifier le niveau de cryptage. Référence - L'écran d'aperçu ne permet pas de vérifier le contenu d'un document crypté. Cryptage - Paramètres Détaillés Configurez les réglages de permission détaillés lorsque la permission document est spécifiée sur l'écran Cryptage. Élément Description Niveau de cryptage Sélectionnez le niveau de cryptage. [Code d'accès] Entrez le code d'accès nécessaire à l'ouverture des données cryptées (32 caractères max.). Pour confirmation, saisissez deux fois le mot de passe. [Permissions Document] Entrez le mot de passe nécessaire au changement des permissions document (32 caractères max.). Pour confirmation, saisissez deux fois le mot de passe. 6 Param. Numéris. 6-10 ineo 223/283/363/423 6.2 Appuyez sur [Suivt. ] pour configurer en détail les réglages Modifier Permissions. Élément Description [Impression Autorisée] Indiquez si vous souhaitez autoriser ou interdire l'impression des données. [Permettre seulement Basse résolution] apparaît quand le Niveau de cryptage est réglé sur [Niveau élevé]. [Extraire Documents/ Images] Sélectionnez s'il faut permettre ou interdire l'extraction d'images texte. ineo 223/283/363/423 6-11 6.2 Param. Numéris. 6 PDF Contours Configurez cet élément lorsque [PDF compact] est sélectionné comme type de fichier. Cette fonction améliore le contour des caractères afin de produire une image nette. Elle est également disponible lors de la modification de données à l'aide d'une application telle que Adobe Illustrator. dPour info Cette fonction vous permet de spécifier la précision du traitement des contours lors de la création de données PDF Contours. Pour plus d'informations, reportez-vous au [Guide de l'utilisateur Opérations Scanner réseau/Fax/Fax Réseau]. Réglage Numérisation Spécifiez s'il faut enregistrer toutes les pages d'un document dans un fichier ou enregistrer chaque page dans un fichier. Référence - Si vous sélectionnez [Séparation Page] lors de l'enregistrement du document dans une boîte, la sélection Séparation Page est mémorisée et le document est enregistré comme fichier [Multi Page]. - La sélection de Séparation Page est activée lorsque les données sont envoyées vers une destination E-Mail, PC (SMB) ou FTP. Élément Description [Modifier Permissions] Sélectionnez le niveau d'autorisation concernant les modifications du document, y compris la signature, l'introduction ou le commentaire de données. Élément Description [Multi Page] Enregistre toutes les données numérisées dans un seul fichier. Cet élément ne peut pas être spécifié en même temps que [JPEG]. [Séparation Page] Scinde les données numérisées pour enregistrer dans un seul fichier chaque nombre de pages spécifié. Entrez au clavier le nombre de pages à enregistrer dans un fichier. [Méthode Fichier Joint E-mail] Spécifier la méthode à utiliser pour joindre un fichier à un E-mail si Séparation Page est sélectionné. • [Tous fich. envoyés en un (1) e-mail] : Joint tous les fichiers à un E-mail. • [Un (1) fichier par e-mail] : Ajoute une pièce jointe à un E-mail. 6 Param. Numéris. 6-12 ineo 223/283/363/423 6.2 6.2.5 De base - Densité Ajuster la densité du document numérisé. 6.2.6 De base - Couleur Spécifiez s'il faut numériser l'original en couleur ou en noir et blanc. Certains réglages Couleur peuvent ne pas être disponibles avec le Type Fichier sélectionné. Ci-après figurent les combinaisons de réglages Type de fichier et Couleur disponibles. Élément Description [Couleur Auto] Détecte automatiquement la couleur de l'original et effectue la numérisation en respectant le réglage de l'original. [Couleurs] Numérise l'original en couleurs. [Échelle gris] Sélectionnez ce réglage pour des originaux comportant d'importantes demi-teintes, comme des photos noir et blanc. [Noir] Sélectionnez ce réglage pour des originaux comportant des zones noir et blanc bien distinctes comme des dessins au trait. Couleur Auto Couleurs Échelle gris Noir PDF o o o o PDF compacto o o − TIFF o o o o JPEG o o o − XPS o o o o XPS compacto o o − ineo 223/283/363/423 6-13 6.2 Param. Numéris. 6 6.2.7 Format Numérisation Sélectionnez le format du papier de l'original à numériser. Format standard Appuyez sur [Auto] pour détecter automatiquement le format de la première feuille de l'original au moment de la numérisation. Pour numériser l'original avec un format papier prédéfini, sélectionnez ce format. Formats perso Entrez les dimensions d'un format personnalisé lorsque celui-ci est différent des formats standard. Référence - Sens X : entrez une valeur de 2 à 7 pouces (30,0 à 432,0mm). - Sens Y : entrez une valeur de 2 à 11-11/16 pouces (30,0 à 297,0mm). Format Photo Sélectionnez le format 3 e 5 ou 2-1/4 e 3-1/4 pour les photographies. 6 Param. Numéris. 6-14 ineo 223/283/363/423 6.2 6.2.8 Réglage image Permet de régler la densité du fond ou la netteté du document numérisé. Suppression Fond Permet de régler la densité de l'original numérisé. Si vous numérisez un original imprimé sur papier couleur, la couleur du fond peut après numérisation donner une image trop sombre. Pour éviter cela, réglez la densité du fond. Sélectionnez la méthode de suppression du fond et spécifiez le niveau. Pour un réglage automatique de la densité, appuyez sur [Auto]. Référence - Pour éviter que les parties foncées du verso ne soient numérisées par transparence comme ombre sur le recto, sélectionnez [Marge perdue]. - Pour numériser un original qui comporte un fond de couleur comme une carte routière, sélectionnez [Réglage Décolor papier]. ineo 223/283/363/423 6-15 6.2 Param. Numéris. 6 Netteté Ce réglage vous permet d'accentuer le contour des caractères ou autres bords du document numérisé. 6.2.9 Applications - Effacement cadre Configurez le réglage permettant d'effacer les bords d'une double-page d'un livre ouvert. Référence - Si vous avez spécifié la largeur du cadre à effacer dans le réglage Effacement cadre de la fonction Copie Livre, la même valeur est automatiquement définie pour cette fonction [Effacement cadre]. - Pour effacer tous les bords sur une largeur identique, spécifiez une valeur numérique entre 1/16 et 2 pouces (0,1 et 50,0 mm) sous [Bords]. - Pour spécifier individuellement une largeur différente pour le haut, le bas, la droite et la gauche, appuyez sur la touche correspondante, et spécifiez une valeur pour le côté choisi. - Pour ne pas effacer les bords, appuyez sur [Aucune]. 6 Param. Numéris. 6-16 ineo 223/283/363/423 6.2 6.2.10 Applications - Copie Livre Configurez les réglages pour numériser une double page d'un livre ouvert. Les réglages comprennent la méthode de numérisation, les positions de reliure et l'effacement des zones indésirables. Comme format papier de l'original, sélectionnez le format du livre ouvert. Méthode Copie Livre Sélectionnez la méthode de numérisation. Effacem. livre - Effacement Bords Configurez le réglage permettant d'effacer les bords d'une double-page d'un livre ouvert. Référence - Si vous avez spécifié la largeur du cadre à effacer dans la fonction Effacem Bords, la même valeur est automatiquement configurée pour ce réglage [Effacem Bords] de la fonction Copie Livre. - Pour effacer tous les bords sur une largeur identique, spécifiez une valeur numérique entre 1/16 et 2 pouces (0,1 et 50,0mm) sous [Bords]. - Pour spécifier individuellement une largeur différente pour le haut, le bas, la droite et la gauche, appuyez sur la touche correspondante, et spécifiez une valeur pour le côté choisi. - Pour ne pas effacer les bords, appuyez sur [Aucune]. Élément Description [Double page] Numérise comme page seule une double page d'un livre ouvert. [Séparation] Numérise sur deux pages séparées la double page d'un livre ouvert (gauche et droite). [Couvert. Face] Numérise la première page en couverture. [Pages Couv + Dos] Numérise la première page comme couverture, la deuxième comme dos de couverture, et la troisième et les suivantes comme corps de texte. ineo 223/283/363/423 6-17 6.2 Param. Numéris. 6 Effacem. Livre - Effacem. Centre Configurez les réglages pour effacer les ombres autour de la reliure intérieure au centre de l'original. Référence - Utilisez le clavier ou appuyez sur [-] ou [+] pour entrer une valeur numérique pour entrer une valeur numérique entre 1/16 et 1-3/16 pouces (0,1 et 30,0 mm). Position Reliure Si vous avez sélectionné Séparation, Couvert. Face ou Pages Couv + Dos, appuyez sur [Position Reliure], puis sélectionnez la position de reliure. 6 Param. Numéris. 6-18 ineo 223/283/363/423 6.2 6.2.11 Numér. Séparée Il est possible de diviser l'opération de numérisation en plusieurs sessions par types de documents, par exemple lorsque toutes les pages d'un document ne peuvent être chargées dans l'ADF, lorsqu'on place les documents sur la vitre d'exposition ou lorsque des documents recto sont mélangés à des documents rectoverso. Appuyez sur [Numér. Séparée] pour mettre la touche en surbrillance. ineo 223/283/363/423 6-19 6.3 Réglages Original 6 6.3 Réglages Original Spécifiez le type d'original chargé, par exemple s'il contient des pages de formats différents ou s'il est plié en Z. Sous Réglages Original, il est possible de sélectionner deux éléments ou davantage en même temps. 6.3.1 Original spécial Les éléments de réglage disponibles sont les suivants. 6.3.2 Spécifier direction - Orientation Original Sélectionnez l'orientation de l'original. Après la numérisation du document, les données sont traitées pour une orientation correcte. Élément Table des matières [Orig. Mixtes] Sélectionnez ce paramètre lorsque des originaux de formats différents sont chargés ensemble dans l'ADF. La vitesse de numérisation est diminuée en raison de la détection de chaque page avant d'être numérisée. [Original Plié en Z] Sélectionnez ce réglage pour détecter le format d'un original plié en Z chargé dans l'ADF. [Original long] Sélectionner ce réglage pour les originaux plus longs que le format standard. 6 Réglages Original 6-20 ineo 223/283/363/423 6.3 6.3.3 Spécifier direction - Position Reliure Sélectionnez la position de reliure de l'original lorsque celui-ci est perforé ou agrafé. Si vous numérisez un original recto-verso, la position de reliure est corrigée sur le verso. 6.3.4 Dépoussiérer Permet de réduire l'effet que la salissure de la vitre d'exposition peut avoir sur l'image de numérisation lorsque un original est chargé dans l'ADF. Référence - Si la fonction Dépoussiérer est spécifiée, cela réduit la vitesse de numérisation. - Si la vitre d'exposition est trop sale, nettoyez-la. Pour plus d'informations, reportez-vous au [Guide de l'utilisateur Opérations Copie]. Élément Description [Auto] Définit la position de reliure sur le bord long si le format est 11-11/16 pouces (297 mm) ou inférieur, ou sur le bord court dans les autres cas. [Haut] Sélectionnez ce réglage si l'original est chargé avec la reliure vers le haut. [A gauche] Sélectionnez ce réglage si l'original est chargé avec la reliure vers le haut. 7 Utilis/Archiv ineo 223/283/363/423 7-3 7.1 Présentation des opérations Utilis/Archiv 7 7 Utilis/Archiv 7.1 Présentation des opérations Utilis/Archiv 7.1.1 Fonctions Utilis/Archiv Imprimer un document Vous pouvez imprimer un document enregistré dans une boîte, depuis les modes Copie, Numérisation/Fax, commande d'impression ou réception Fax. Pendant l'impression du document, vous pouvez aussi spécifier des réglages de finition, comme le nombre de copies ou l'impression recto-verso. De plus, vous pouvez spécifier Combinaison pour imprimer en même temps deux documents ou plus. Envoi Vous pouvez distribuer un document enregistré dans une boîte en mode Copie, Fax/Numérisation, commande d'impression ou en mode Réception, par exemple par E-mail ou fax. Vous pouvez ajouter des réglages de finition ou d'émission lors de la distribution du document. Vous pouvez aussi spécifier Lier ÉMI pour sélectionner deux documents ou plus et les distribuer en même temps. Archivage Cette fonction vous permet d'effectuer diverses opérations de classement comme le déplacement ou la copie de documents entre les boîtes. Vous pouvez aussi enregistrer dans la mémoire externe un document archivé dans une Boîte utilisateur. Réglages Application Il est possible de déplacer ou de faire pivoter les pages au sein des documents enregistrés ou d'enregistrer des images de surimpression. 7 Présentation des opérations Utilis/Archiv 7-4 ineo 223/283/363/423 7.1 7.1.2 Détail de l'écran Utiliser document Sélectionnez la boîte dont vous voulez imprimer et distribuer les documents. Les écrans suivants s'affichent. Cette section décrit les éléments de réglage et prend la boîte Public comme exemple. N° : Nom Description 1 [Impression] Configurez les réglages pour imprimer les documents sélectionnés. (p. 7-6) 2 [Env.] Configurez la destination et autres réglages pour envoyer les documents sélectionnés. (p. 7-34) 3 [Réglages Archivage] Permet de renommer, déplacer ou copier les documents sélectionnés. (p. 7-64) 4 [Applications] Modifier par page le document sélectionné ou enregistrer une image de surimpression. (p. 7-70) 5 [Enreg. doc.] Sélectionnez cet onglet pour afficher l'écran Enregistrer des documents. Les réglages Utilis/Archiv que vous avez configurés sont annulés. 6 − Affiche le numéro et le nom de la boîte spécifiée. 7 − Affiche la liste des documents enregistrés dans la boîte. 8 [ ][ ] Si la boîte spécifiée contient sept documents ou plus, utilisez [ ] ou [ ] pour faire défiler la liste vers le haut ou vers le bas. 9 [Sélect. Tout] Appuyez sur cette touche pour sélectionner tous les documents dans la boîte spécifiée. 10 [Initial.] Appuyez sur cette touche pour initialiser tous les documents dans la boîte spécifiée. 11 [Afficher Liste]/ [Vue Vignettes] Appuyez sur cette touche pour changer le format d'affichage des documents enregistrés. [Vue Vignettes] : Affiche une image réduite de la première page, le nombre de pages et le nom du document pour chaque document. [Afficher Liste] : Affiche l'heure d'enregistrement, le nom d'utilisateur et le nom du document pour chaque document. Chaque fois que vous appuyez sur le titre de la colonne [Heure Enreg.], les documents apparaissent alternativement triés dans l'ordre croissant et dans l'ordre décroissant de l'heure d'enregistrement. 12 Réglages Impr./Réglages Transmission/ Réglages Archivage/ Réglages Application Affiche les éléments configurables pour l'onglet sélectionné. 13 [Détails Document] Appuyez sur cette touche pour vérifier les informations détaillées ou l'image d'aperçu du document. 4 6 7 1 2 3 11 12 9 10 13 5 8 ineo 223/283/363/423 7-5 7.1 Présentation des opérations Utilis/Archiv 7 7.1.3 Si un code d'accès est spécifié pour une boîte Si un code d'accès est spécifié pour une boîte, l'écran de saisie du code d'accès apparaît. Saisissez le mot de passe et appuyez sur [Valider]. 7 Impression 7-6 ineo 223/283/363/423 7.2 7.2 Impression Cette fonction n'est disponible que si un Disque dur est installé. 7.2.1 Présentation de l'onglet Impression Description de l'onglet Impression Sélectionnez l'onglet [Impression] pour afficher l'écran suivant. Les éléments de réglage disponibles pour [Impression] sont les suivants. dPour info Pour plus de détails sur les autres éléments, voir page 7-4. N° : Nom Description 1 [Imprimer] Configurez les réglages pour imprimer les documents sélectionnés. Si vous avez sélectionné plusieurs documents, la fonction de réglage de l'impression de document n'est pas disponible. (p. 7-8) 2 [Combinaison] Configurez l'ordre d'impression ou un autre réglage pour imprimer deux documents sélectionnés ou plus. (p. 7-8) 2 1 ineo 223/283/363/423 7-7 7.2 Impression 7 Imprimer Appuyez sur [Imprimir] pour afficher l'écran suivant. L'écran Détails Impression offre deux catégories d'éléments configurables : [de base] et [Applications]. Combinaison Appuyez sur [Combinaison], puis configurez les réglages Combinaison pour afficher l'écran suivant. L'écran Combinaison offre deux catégories d'éléments configurables : [de base] et [Applications]. N° : Nom Description 1 [de base] Configurez les réglages de base comme le nombre de copies et l'impression recto ou recto-verso. 2 [Applications] Configurez les réglages plus complexes comme la marge de page et le tampon. 1 2 N° : Nom Description 1 [de base] Configurez les réglages de base comme le nombre de copies et l'impression recto ou recto-verso. 2 [Applications] Configurez les réglages plus complexes comme la marge de page et le tampon. 1 2 7 Impression 7-8 ineo 223/283/363/423 7.2 7.2.2 Imprimer Dans l'écran Impression - Détails Impression, configurez ou changez les fonctions suivantes. Référence - La fonction Agrafage est disponible lorsque l'Unité de finition FS-527 ou l'Unité de finition FS-529, en option, est installée. - Les réglages Perforation sont disponibles lorsque le Kit Perforation est installé sur l'Unité de finition FS-527 en option. - La fonction Pli/Reliure est disponible lorsque la Piqueuse à cheval est installée sur l'Unité de finition FS-527 en option. 7.2.3 Combinaison Ordre Document Après avoir sélectionné les documents, appuyez sur [Combinaison] pour afficher l'écran de sélection de l'ordre des documents. Les documents seront imprimés dans l'ordre où ils sont affichés sur cet écran. Lorsque cet écran apparaît, les documents sont affichés dans l'ordre où ils ont été sélectionnés. Référence - Pour changer l'ordre, sélectionnez d'abord le document source, puis le document de destination. Si un document présente un filigrane en tête, celui-ci sera également imprimé sur les documents suivants. S'il n'y a pas de filigrane en tête du document, aucun filigrane ne sera imprimé même si cela a été spécifié pour les documents suivants. Élément Description [Copies] Spécifier le nombre de copies. [Impression] Sélectionnez Impression recto ou lmpression recto-verso. [Finition] Configurez les réglages de finition voulus comme tri ou groupe, agrafage, perforation ou pliage ou agrafage centre. [Combinaison] Configurez les réglages pour imprimer plusieurs pages (2, 4 ou 8) sur une seule page lors de l'impression d'un document de plusieurs pages. Spécifiez le nombre de feuilles par page et l'ordre de combinaison. [Zoom] Configurez les réglages pour agrandir ou réduire une image lors de l'impression de documents. Sélectionnez le taux d'agrandissement. [Marge page] La marge de page peut se régler sur la gauche, la droite ou le bas du papier. Il est possible de décaler l'image par rapport à la marge de la page. [Inser.Feuil/ Couv/Chapitre] Configurez les réglages pour insérer une couverture, feuilles intercalaires entre les pages sélectionnées ou des feuilles intercalaires pour séparer les chapitres. [Tampon/ Surimpression] Configurez les réglages pour imprimer des éléments déterminés, comme la date et l'heure ou un tampon. ineo 223/283/363/423 7-9 7.2 Impression 7 Éléments configurables pour combiner et imprimer des documents Sur l'écran Combinaison - Détails Impression, configurez ou changez les réglages des fonctions suivantes. Référence - La fonction Agrafage est disponible lorsque l'Unité de finition FS-527 ou l'Unité de finition FS-529, en option, est installée. - Les réglages Perforation sont disponibles lorsque le Kit Perforation est installé sur l'Unité de finition FS-527 en option. - La fonction Pli/Reliure est disponible lorsque la Piqueuse à cheval est installée sur l'Unité de finition FS-527 en option. - En mode Combinaison et Impression d'un document, il n'est pas possible de sélectionner la fonction Tri ou Groupe. Élément Description [Copies] Spécifier le nombre de copies. [Impression] Sélectionnez Impression recto ou lmpression recto-verso. [Finition] Configurez les réglages de finition voulus comme décalage, agrafage, perforation ou pliage ou agrafage centre. [Impression continue] Configurez cet élément lorsque [Recto-Verso] est sélectionné dans [Impression]. Spécifiez s'il faut, une fois qu'une page impaire d'un document a été imprimée, imprimer la première page du document suivant sur le verso de la dernière page du premier document. [Marge page] La marge de page peut se régler sur la gauche, la droite ou le bas du papier. Il est possible de décaler l'image par rapport à la marge de la page. [Tampon/ Surimpression] Configurez les réglages pour imprimer des éléments déterminés, comme la date et l'heure ou un tampon. 7 Impression - De base (Boîte Public, Privé ou Groupe) 7-10 ineo 223/283/363/423 7.3 7.3 Impression - De base (Boîte Public, Privé ou Groupe) Cette fonction n'est disponible que si un Disque dur est installé. 7.3.1 Copies Utilisez le pavé numérique pour saisir le nombre de copies. La valeur admissible est de 1 à 9999. Référence - Pour ramener le réglage à 1, appuyez sur la touche [C] du panneau de contrôle. 7.3.2 Recto/Recto-Verso Sélectionnez s'il faut imprimer une face ou les deux faces des feuilles de papier. ineo 223/283/363/423 7-11 7.3 Impression - De base (Boîte Public, Privé ou Groupe) 7 7.3.3 Finition Configurez les réglages Tri, Groupe, Finition ainsi que d'autres réglages. Le nombre de trous perforés dépend du pays dans lequel la machine a été achetée. dPour info Lorsque l'unité de finition est installée, vous pouvez changer la méthode d'éjection dans Réglages Administrateur. Pour la fonction Décalage, voir le [Guide de l'utilisateur Opérations Copie]. Tri/Groupe Le réglage Tri éjecte les copies par jeux. Le réglage Groupe éjecte les copies par pages. Décalé Sélectionnez Oui pour trier les feuilles par jeux ou par pages de manière à ce que l'utilisateur sache à quel endroit le document est séparé. Lorsque l'unité de finition est installée, les feuilles imprimées sont éjectées et décalées à chaque séparation de document. Lorsque l'unité de finition n'est pas installée, les feuilles imprimées sont éjectées par tri alterné à chaque séparation de document. Agraf. Les feuilles imprimées sont agrafées en coin ou en deux points. 7 Impression - De base (Boîte Public, Privé ou Groupe) 7-12 ineo 223/283/363/423 7.3 Agraf. - Réglage Position Si vous sélectionnez le type d'agrafage, spécifiez la position. L'écran suivant montre un exemple de [2 points]. Perfo. Les feuilles imprimées sont perforées pour archivage. Réglage Position - Perforation Spécifiez les positions des trous. ineo 223/283/363/423 7-13 7.3 Impression - De base (Boîte Public, Privé ou Groupe) 7 Pli/Reliure Les réglages suivants sont disponibles lorsque la Piqûre à cheval est installée sur l'Unité de finition FS-527. Sélectionnez la fonction désirée. Élément Description [Pliage en 2] Plie les feuilles imprimées avant de les éjecter. [Agraf. centre + Pliage] Agrafe les feuilles imprimées en deux points centraux et les plie en deux avant de les éjecter. 7 Impression - De base (Boîte Public, Privé ou Groupe) 7-14 ineo 223/283/363/423 7.3 7.3.4 Combinaison Permet de combiner et d'imprimer sur une seule page un original multi-page. 7.3.5 Zoom Les images peuvent être agrandies ou réduites lors de l'impression. Spécifiez le taux d'agrandissement. Élément Description [2 en 1] Combine 2 pages d'un original sur une seule page. [4 en 1] Combine 4 pages d'un original sur une seule page. Vous pouvez sélectionner l'ordre de combinaison des pages de l'original. [8 en 1] Combine 8 pages d'un original sur une seule page. Vous pouvez sélectionner l'ordre de combinaison des pages de l'original. Élément Description [Réglage existant] Imprime un document selon taux d'agrandissement qui était spécifié lors de l'enregistrement. [Manuel] Spécifiez le taux d'agrandissement entre 25,0% et 400,0% par incréments de 0,1%. Entrez directement au clavier le taux d'agrandissement. [Tous formats] Imprime un document au format spécifié lors de l'enregistrement, sans agrandissement ou réduction. [Minimal] Réduit légèrement un document pour ménager une marge autour de l'image. [+][-] Appuyez sur cette touche pour régler le taux zoom de l'image par incréments de 0,1%. [Zoom fixe] Spécifiez le taux fixe d'agrandissement prédéfini sur cette machine. Ce réglage est utile pour agrandir ou réduire des documents à un format standard. ineo 223/283/363/423 7-15 7.3 Impression - De base (Boîte Public, Privé ou Groupe) 7 Référence - Indépendamment des réglages Utiliser réglage couleur existant ou Type original, les documents enregistrés au format A4 v peuvent être agrandis pour être imprimés au format A3 w. Pour pivoter et agrandir l'image comme indiqué dans l'exemple, vous devez préalablement régler [Rotation Agrandissement] sur [Permis] dans le menu Utilitaires. Pour plus de détails sur la Rotation Agrandissement, voir le [Guide de l'utilisateur Opérations Copie]. 7.3.6 Impression continue Vous pouvez sélectionner ce réglage si vous avez sélectionné Impression recto verso lors de la combinaison et l'impression de documents. Plusieurs documents peuvent être imprimés en continu lorsqu'ils sont combinés et imprimés. Lors de l'impression en mode recto-verso, sélectionnez si la fin d'un document doit être imprimée sur le recto d'une feuille et le début du document suivant sur le recto de la même feuille ou sur le recto de la feuille suivante. Référence - [Oui] : le document suivant est imprimé en continu à partir du verso de la dernière page du document précédent. - [No] : le document suivant est imprimé à partir du recto d'une nouvelle feuille. [Définir Taux Zoom] En plus d'agrandissements fixes, vous pouvez prédéfinir des taux d'agrandissement fréquemment utilisés afin de les utiliser par la suite. • Vous pouvez spécifier au maximum trois taux d'agrandissement. dPour info Pour plus de détails sur l'enregistrement d'agrandissements prédéfinis, voir le [Guide de l'utilisateur Opérations Copie]. Élément Description Impression 7 - Application (Boîte Public, Privé ou Groupe) 7-16 ineo 223/283/363/423 7.4 7.4 Impression - Application (Boîte Public, Privé ou Groupe) Cette fonction n'est disponible que si un Disque dur est installé. 7.4.1 Marge page La marge de page peut se régler sur la gauche, la droite ou le bas du papier. Elle peut assurer un espace de perforation ou d'agrafage. Marge de page Décalage Image Si vous créez une marge de page, l'image peut être décalée en fonction de la position de la marge. Vous pouvez spécifier la distance de décalage pour déplacer l'image vers la gauche, la droite, le haut ou le bas, entre 1/16 et 10 pouces (0,1 à 250,0mm) et l'adapter à la position de la marge de page. Référence - Spécifiez la largeur de la marge de page par pas de 1/16 pouce (0,1mm) en appuyant sur [-] ou [+]. - Pour régler la largeur de la marge sur 0 pouce (0 mm), appuyez sur [Sans décalage]. Élément Description [Position Marge] Sélectionnez la position de la marge. [Auto] : une marge de page placée sur le bord long du papier est sélectionnée si la longueur de l'original est de 11-11/16 pouces (297 mm) ou moins. Une marge de page placée sur le bord court du papier est sélectionnée si la longueur de l'original dépasse 11-11/16 pouces (297mm). [Haut] : sélectionnez ce réglage pour placer une marge en haut. [A gauche] : sélectionnez ce réglage pour placer une marge à gauche. [A droite] : sélectionnez ce réglage pour placer une marge à droite. [Ajuster valeur] Spécifiez la largeur de la marge de page entre 1/16 et 3/4 pouces (0,1 et 20,0 mm). Pour régler la largeur de la marge sur 0 pouce (0mm), appuyez sur [Aucune]. ineo 223/283/363/423 7-17 7.4 Impression - Application (Boîte Public, Privé ou Groupe) 7 Décalage Image - Changer Décalage verso Pour créer une marge de page en mode Impression recto verso, appuyez sur [Changer Décalage verso] pour spécifier la distance de décalage sur le verso. Vous pouvez spécifier la distance de décalage pour déplacer l'image vers la gauche, la droite, le haut ou le bas, entre 1/16 et 10 pouces (0,1 à 250,0 mm) et l'adapter à la position de la marge de page. Référence - Spécifiez la largeur de la marge de page par pas de 1/16 pouce (0,1 mm) en appuyant sur [-] ou [+]. - Pour régler la largeur de la marge sur 0 pouce (0mm), appuyez sur [Sans décalage]. 7.4.2 Insér. Feuil/Couv/Chapitre Permet de configurer la fonction Couverture, Insertion Feuille ou Chapitres. Élément Description [Couverture] Imprime les documents avec insertion de faces et dos de couverture. [Insertion Feuille] Lors de l'impression des documents, insère des feuille de papier couleur ou autre type de papier avant les pages spécifiées. [Chapitres] Configurez ce réglage pour imprimer des documents en mode Impression recto verso. Les documents sont imprimés et les pages sont éjectées de manière à ce que les pages spécifiées, la première page de chaque chapitre par exemple, soient obligatoirement sur le recto. Impression 7 - Application (Boîte Public, Privé ou Groupe) 7-18 ineo 223/283/363/423 7.4 7.4.3 Insér. Feuil/Couv/Chapitre - Couverture Les documents sont imprimés avec face et dos de couverture. Les éléments de réglage disponibles sont les suivants. Voici les réglages Face et Dos de couverture. Élément Description [Couvert. Face]/ [Couverture Dos] Configurez les réglages pour face et dos de couverture. Pour plus de détails, voir le tableau ci-dessous. [Papier] Sélectionnez un magasin dans les cas suivants. • Si [Face (copiée)] ou [Face (vierge)] est sélectionné pour [Couvert. Face] • Si [Dos (copiée)] ou [Dos (vierge)] est sélectionné pour [Couverture Dos] Élément Description Couvert. Face Aucune Aucune couverture n'est jointe au document. Face (copiée) La première page d'un document est imprimée sur la face de couverture. La seconde page du document est imprimée au verso de la page de couverture si l'impression [Recto verso] est sélectionnée. Face (vierge) Une feuille vierge est insérée avant la première page d'un document. Couverture Dos Aucune Aucun dos de couverture n'est joint au document. Dos (copiée) La dernière page d'un document est imprimée sur la face de couverture. Les deux dernières pages sont imprimées sur le recto et le verso du dos de couverture si l'impression [Recto verso] est sélectionnée. Dos (vierge) Une feuille vierge est insérée après la dernière page d'un document. ABC COVERABC ineo 223/283/363/423 7-19 7.4 Impression - Application (Boîte Public, Privé ou Groupe) 7 Référence - Chargez préalablement dans le magasin les feuilles pour les faces et dos de couverture. - Pour pouvoir ajouter une couverture lors de l'impression du document copié et enregistré dans une boîte, l'une des conditions suivantes doit avoir été satisfaite lors de l'enregistrement du document. – Un magasin papier a été spécifié – Les réglages Couverture ont été configurés 7.4.4 Insér. Feuil/Couv/Chapitre - Insertion Feuille Lors de l'impression des documents, des feuille de papier couleur ou autre type de papier sont insérées avant les pages spécifiées. Il est possible de spécifier jusqu'à 30 positions d'insertion de feuilles dans un original 999 pages maximum. Les éléments de réglage disponibles sont les suivants. Sélectionnez [Copié] ou [Vierge] dans Type Encart. Configurez le réglage de la manière suivante, en fonction de la sélection effectuée : Impression recto ou Impression recto verso. Exemple : Spécification de la page "6". Élément Description Spécification page/[Tri] Spécifiez une page à laquelle vous voulez insérer une feuille. Appuyez sur une touche de page et entrez au clavier le numéro de page souhaité. Pour trier dans l'ordre croissant les pages entrées, appuyez sur [Tri]. [Insérer Papier] Sélectionnez un magasin dans lequel seront chargées les feuilles à insérer. Vérifiez que les feuilles chargées sont de même format et dans le même sens que le papier destiné à l'impression. [Type Encart] Spécifiez s'il faut imprimer un document sur les feuilles insérées (Copie) ou les laisser en blanc (Vierge). Pour plus de détails, voir le tableau ci-dessous. Élément Description [Copie] (quand Recto est sélectionné) Une feuille est insérée en tant que sixième feuille et la sixième page du document est imprimée sur cette feuille. Impression 7 - Application (Boîte Public, Privé ou Groupe) 7-20 ineo 223/283/363/423 7.4 7.4.5 Insér. Feuil/Couv/Chapitre - Chapitres Vous pouvez configurer ce réglage pour imprimer des documents en mode Impression recto verso. Les documents sont imprimés et les pages sont éjectées de manière à ce que les pages spécifiées, la première page de chaque chapitre par exemple, soient obligatoirement sur le recto. Il est possible de spécifier jusqu'à 30 positions d'insertion de feuilles dans un original 999 pages maximum. Les éléments de réglage disponibles sont les suivants. [Copie] (quand Recto-verso est sélectionné) Le verso de la troisième feuille est laissé vierge. Une feuille spécifiée est insérée comme quatrième feuille la sixième et septième pages du document sont imprimées sur cette feuille. [Vierge] (quand Recto est sélectionné) Une feuille spécifiée est insérée après la sixième page. [Vierge] (quand Recto-verso est sélectionné) Une feuille spécifiée est insérée comme quatrième feuille. Lorsque vous spécifiez une page impaire, le verso de la feuille insérée est laissé vierge. Élément Description Élément Description Spécification page/[Tri] Spécifiez les pages recto. Appuyez sur une touche de page et entrez au clavier le numéro de page souhaité. Pour trier dans l'ordre croissant les pages entrées, appuyez sur [Tri]. [Papier Chapitre] Pour copier les données du document sur des feuilles de chapitre, sélectionnez [Insertion copie] et sélectionnez un magasin contenant le papier destiné aux feuilles de chapitre. Vérifiez que les feuilles chargées sont de même format et dans le même sens que le papier destiné à l'impression. ineo 223/283/363/423 7-21 7.4 Impression - Application (Boîte Public, Privé ou Groupe) 7 7.4.6 Tampon/Surimpression Sur l'écran Tampon/Surimpression, les fonctions suivantes peuvent être configurées. 7.4.7 Tampon/Surimpression - Date/Heure Imprime la date et l'heure d'impression sur les pages. Élément Description [Date/Heure] Imprime la date et l'heure d'impression sur les pages. [Numéro Page] Le numéro de page est imprimé sur chaque page d'un document. [Tampon] Permet d'imprimer sur les pages une chaîne de caractères prédéfinie, comme "URGENT" par exemple. [Protection Copie] Un texte masqué est imprimé sur toutes les pages afin d'éviter la copie non autorisée. [Pare-copie] Un tampon est imprimé sur toutes les pages en guise de pare-copie. [Copie Prot. MdP] Un document est imprimé avec un mot de passe intégré sur toutes les pages pour empêcher la copie non autorisée. [Tampon répétitif] Du texte ou une image, est imprimé plusieurs fois sur toutes les pages. [En-tête/Pied de page] Les pages sont imprimées avec une tête ou un pied de page. • Cet élément ne s'affiche pas si une tête ou un pied de page ne sont pas enregistrés. dPour info Pour plus de détails sur l'enregistrement d'une en-tête ou d'un pied de page, voir le [Guide de l'utilisateur Opérations Copie] ou le [Guide de l'utilisateur Opérations Scanner réseau/Fax/Fax Réseau]. [Surimpression enregistrée] Une image enregistrée est incrustée sur les pages imprimées. • Cet élément ne s'affiche pas si aucune image de surimpression n'est enregistrée. dPour info Pour plus de détails sur l'enregistrement d'une image de surimpression, voir page 7-78. Élément Description [Type date] Sélectionnez le format de la date. [Type heure] Spécifiez si vous souhaitez ajouter l'heure et sélectionnez le format d'affichage de celle-ci. [Pages] Sélectionnez si la date et l'heure doivent être imprimés sur toutes les pages ou uniquement sur la première page. Impression 7 - Application (Boîte Public, Privé ou Groupe) 7-22 ineo 223/283/363/423 7.4 Référence - [Détails Texte] - [Couleur texte] ne peuvent pas être sélectionnés pendant l'impression. 7.4.8 Tampon/Surimpression - Numéro Page Le numéro de page est imprimé sur chaque page du document. Réglages Référence - [Détails Texte] - [Couleur texte] ne peuvent pas être sélectionnés pendant l'impression. [Position Impress.] Spécifier la position d'impression. Pour procéder à un réglage plus fin de la position d'impression, appuyez sur [Ajuster Position]. Spécifiez la longueur du décalage de la position d'impression vers la gauche, la droite, le haut et le bas en indiquant une valeur comprise entre 1 et 50mm (1/16 et 1-15/16 pouces). [Détails Texte] Spécifiez le détails du texte à imprimer. • [Couleur texte] : sélectionnez la couleur d'impression parmi Noir, Rouge, Bleu, Vert, Jaune, Cyan ou Magenta. • [Taille Texte] : sélectionnez la taille du texte à imprimer entre 8 pt, 10 pt, 12 pt ou 14 pt. • [Type texte] : sélectionnez le type de police entre Times Roman ou Helvetica. Élément Description Élément Description [Numéro Première Page] Spécifiez la première page de la numérotation. [N° 1er chapitre] Spécifiez le numéro du premier chapitre. [Type Numéro Page] Sélectionnez le type d'affichage des numéros de page. [Param. Insert Feuille] Spécifiez s'il faut imprimer un numéro de page sur une feuille insérée. Pour les réglages disponibles, voir page 7-23. [Position Impress.] Spécifier la position d'impression. Pour procéder à un réglage plus fin de la position d'impression, appuyez sur [Ajuster Position]. Spécifiez la longueur du décalage de la position d'impression vers la gauche, la droite, le haut et le bas en indiquant une valeur comprise entre 1 et 50mm (1/16 et 1-15/16 pouces). [Détails Texte] Spécifiez le détails du texte à imprimer. • [Couleur texte] : sélectionnez la couleur d'impression parmi Noir, Rouge, Bleu, Vert, Jaune, Cyan ou Magenta. • [Taille Texte] : sélectionnez la taille du texte à imprimer entre 8 pt, 10 pt, 12 pt ou 14 pt. • [Type texte] : sélectionnez le type de police entre Times Roman ou Helvetica. ineo 223/283/363/423 7-23 7.4 Impression - Application (Boîte Public, Privé ou Groupe) 7 Param. Insert. Feuille Spécifiez s'il faut imprimer un numéro de page sur les feuilles insérées. 7.4.9 Tampon/Surimpression - Tampon Permet d'imprimer sur les pages une chaîne de caractères prédéfinie, comme "URGENT" par exemple. Élément Description [Couverture] [Imprimer sur la face et le dos] Le numéro de page est imprimé sur la face et le dos de couverture. [Imprimer sur le dos seulement] Aucun numéro de page n'est imprimé sur la face de couverture. [Ne pas imprimer le numéro de page] Aucun numéro de page n'est imprimé sur la face ou le dos de couverture. [Copie Feuille Insert] [Imprimer Page #] Le numéro de page est imprimé sur les feuilles copiées insérées. [Ne pas imprimer #] Le numéro de page n'est pas imprimé sur les feuilles copiées insérées. [Ignorer Page(s)] Les feuilles insérées copiées ne sont pas comptées. Les numéros de page ne sont pas imprimés. [Encart (vierge)] [Ne pas imprimer #] Le numéro de page n'est pas imprimé sur les feuilles vierges insérées. [Ignorer Page(s)] Les feuilles insérées vierges ne sont pas comptées. Les numéros de page ne sont pas imprimés. Impression 7 - Application (Boîte Public, Privé ou Groupe) 7-24 ineo 223/283/363/423 7.4 7.4.10 Tampon/Composition - Sécurité Copie - Protection Copie Un texte masqué est imprimé sur toutes les pages afin d'éviter la copie non autorisée. Lorsqu'un document imprimé avec du texte protégé est copié, le texte masqué apparaît clairement sur toutes les pages des copies de façon à ce que le lecteur sache qu'il s'agit d'une copie. Configurez le réglage de la protection copie à appliquer. Vous pouvez appliquer un maximum de huit chaînes ou tampons. En revanche, si vous spécifiez une inclinaison de chaînes ou tampons de 45 degrés (ou de -45 degrés), le nombre de chaînes ou tampons est alors limité à 4. Sur l'écran Protection Copie, vous pouvez configurer les réglages suivants. Élément Description [Type Tampon/ Tampons prédéfinis] Sélectionnez un type de tampon, comme par exemple URGENT, REPONSE SOUHAITEE ou COPIE INTERDITE. [Pages] Sélectionnez si la date et l'heure doivent être imprimés sur toutes les pages ou uniquement sur la première page. [Taille Texte] Sélectionnez la taille du texte à imprimer, entre Minimal ou Standard. [Position Impress.] Spécifier la position d'impression. Pour procéder à un réglage plus fin de la position d'impression, appuyez sur [Ajuster Position]. Spécifiez la longueur du décalage de la position d'impression vers la gauche, la droite, le haut et le bas en indiquant une valeur comprise entre 1/16 et 1-15/16 pouces (0,1 et 50,0 mm). Élément Description [Type Protection Copie] Sélectionnez un type de Protection Copie à imprimer. [Paramètres Détaillés] Appuyez sur cette touche pour spécifier la densité et la taille du texte de protection copie à imprimer. [Position] Appuyez sur cette touche pour spécifier l'inclinaison et l'ordre d'impression des Protections Copie à imprimer. ineo 223/283/363/423 7-25 7.4 Impression - Application (Boîte Public, Privé ou Groupe) 7 Type Protection Copie Paramètres Détaillés Appuyez sur [Réglages Détaillés] pour spécifier la densité, trame du fond, et autres réglages. Position Dans l'écran de réglage Protection Copie, appuyez sur [Position] pour spécifier la position d'impression angulaire du tampon sélectionné ou en laissant un espace. Configurez les réglages suivants. - Inclinaison de la Protection Copie dans la zone (+45 degrés/0 degré/-45 degrés). - Insertion d'un espace entre Protections Copie - Réorganisation de l'ordre d'impression des Protections Copie - Suppression de la Protection Copie ou de l'espace Élément Description [Tampon enregistré] Appuyez sur cette touche pour appliquer les images Tampon qui ont été préalablement enregistrées avec le logiciel utilitaire. • Utiliser Utilitaire Protection Copie pour enregistrer des tampons. Pour plus de détails, voir le manuel de l'utilitaire correspondant. • Les tampons enregistrés peuvent nécessiter plusieurs zones en fonction de leur contenu. [Tampon Prédéfini] Appuyez sur cette touche pour appliquer une chaîne standard comme par exemple, Copie non valide, Copie ou Privé, en tant que tampon prédéfini. Un tampon nécessite une zone. [Date/Heure] Appuyez sur cette touche pour appliquer la date et l'heure auxquelles le document a été enregistré. • [Type date] nécessite une zone. • [Type heure] nécessite une zone. [Autres] Appuyez sur cette touche pour spécifier le numéro de la tâche, le numéro de série et le numéro de contrôle de distribution avec lesquels le document a été enregistré. • [Numéro Tâche] : Le numéro de tâche du travail d'impression est imprimé. Un numéro de tâche nécessite une zone. • [Numéro de série] : Le numéro de série de cette machine est imprimé. Le numéro de série nécessite une zone. Le numéro de série est attribué au moment de l'expédition de cette machine. Pour plus de détails sur les réglages, contacter le S.A.V. • [N° Commande Distribution] : Le nombre de copies spécifié est imprimé. Le numéro de contrôle de distribution nécessite une zone. Entrez le numéro de contrôle de distribution et sélectionnez "Numéro seul" ou "Mettre zéros devant (8 chiffres au total)" comme format de sortie. Élément Description [Contraste] Sélectionnez la densité entre Clair, Standard ou Foncé. [Trame Protection Copie] Sélectionnez la trame motif et le contraste à appliquer lorsque la copie est reproduite. Sélectionnez la trame entre Texte en relief ou Fond en relief. [Taille Texte] Sélectionnez la taille du texte à imprimer entre Minimal, Standard ou Grand. [Écraser Trame] Sélectionnez l'impression de la trame entre Face (Écraser) ou Dos. [Trame fond] Sélectionnez la trame du fond parmi huit types. Élément Description [Changer Position/ Supprimer] Sélectionnez le tampon de protection copie à changer et appuyez sur [Changer Position]/[Insérer Espace]/[Supprimer]. Impression 7 - Application (Boîte Public, Privé ou Groupe) 7-26 ineo 223/283/363/423 7.4 7.4.11 Tampon/Composition - Sécurité Copie - Pare-copie Pour empêcher la copie non autorisée, cette fonction imprime un texte tel que "Copie invalide" ou "Privé" ou des informations telles que la date/l'heure sur toutes les pages en guise de pare-copie (informations d'interdiction de copie) lors de l'impression. Une page comportant un élément pare-copie ne peut pas être copié ni enregistré dans une boîte utilisateur. Configurez le réglage de l'élément pare-copie à appliquer. Vous pouvez appliquer jusqu'à 6 éléments parecopie. Pour Pare-copie, vous pouvez configurer les réglages suivants. Type Pare-copie Élément Description [Type Pare- Copie] Sélectionnez un type de pare-copie. [Paramètres Détaillés] Spécifiez la trame et la taille du texte du pare-copie sélectionné. Élément Description [Tampon Prédéfini] Appuyez sur cette touche pour appliquer une chaîne standard comme par exemple, Copie non valide, Copie ou Privé, en tant que tampon prédéfini. Un tampon nécessite une zone. [Date/Heure] Appuyez sur cette touche pour appliquer la date et l'heure auxquelles le document a été enregistré. • [Type date] nécessite une zone. • [Type heure] nécessite une zone. [Autres] Appuyez sur cette touche pour spécifier le numéro de la tâche, le numéro de série et le numéro de contrôle de distribution avec lesquels le document a été enregistré. • [Numéro Tâche] : Le numéro de tâche du travail d'impression est imprimé. Un numéro de tâche nécessite une zone. • [Numéro de série] : Le numéro de série de cette machine est imprimé. Le numéro de série nécessite une zone. Le numéro de série est attribué au moment de l'expédition de cette machine. Pour plus de détails sur les réglages, contacter le S.A.V. • [N° Commande Distribution] : Le nombre de copies spécifié est imprimé. Le numéro de contrôle de distribution nécessite une zone. Entrez le numéro de contrôle de distribution et sélectionnez "Numéro seul" ou "Mettre zéros devant (8 chiffres au total)" comme format de sortie. ineo 223/283/363/423 7-27 7.4 Impression - Application (Boîte Public, Privé ou Groupe) 7 Paramètres Détaillés Appuyez sur [Paramètres Détaillés] pour spécifier le contraste, trame du fond, et autres réglages. 7.4.12 Tampon/Composition - Sécurité Copie - Copie Prot. MdP Pour empêcher la copie non autorisée, cette fonction configure les paramètres de tampon pour un texte tel que "Copie Invalide" ou "Privé" ou des informations telles que la date/l'heure sur toutes les pages du document et imprime avec un mot de passe intégré. Quand une feuille de papier comportant un mot de passe intégré est copiée, numérisée ou enregistrée dans une Boîte Utilisateur, la tâche actuellement en cours est suspendue et l'écran de saisie du mot de passe s'affiche. Dans ce cas, entrez le mot de passe pour exécuter l'opération souhaitée. Pour activer Copie Prot. MdP, sélectionnez [Oui] et appuyez sur [Code d'accès] pour spécifier le mot de passe. Référence - Pour confirmer, entrez le mot de passe deux fois sur le panneau de contrôle. Si un mot de passe est spécifié, vous pouvez configurer un tampon. Vous pouvez appliquer jusqu'à 6 tampons Élément Description [Trame Parecopie] Spécifiez le contraste d'un élément pare-copie. [Relief Fond] est sélectionné comme trame. [Taille Texte] Sélectionnez la taille du texte à imprimer entre Minimal, Standard ou Grand. [Trame fond] Sélectionnez la trame du fond parmi huit types. Élément Description [Type Tampon] Sélectionnez le type de tampon. [Paramètres Détaillés] Spécifiez la trame et la taille du texte de la Copie sur MdPasse sélectionnée. Impression 7 - Application (Boîte Public, Privé ou Groupe) 7-28 ineo 223/283/363/423 7.4 Type Tampon Paramètres Détaillés Appuyez sur [Paramètres Détaillés] pour spécifier le contraste, trame du fond, et autres réglages. 7.4.13 Tampon/Surimpression - Tampon répétitif Du texte ou une image, est imprimé plusieurs fois sur toutes les pages. Les tampons de Protection Copie permettent d'éviter la recopie. En revanche, les tampons répétitifs peuvent être recopiés. Vous pouvez appliquer un maximum de huit chaînes ou tampons. En revanche, si vous spécifiez une inclinaison de chaînes ou tampons de 45 degrés (ou de -45 degrés), le nombre de chaînes ou tampons est alors limité à 4. Sur l'écran Tampon répétitif, vous pouvez configurer les réglages suivants. Élément Description [Tampon Prédéfini] Appuyez sur cette touche pour appliquer une chaîne standard comme par exemple, Copie non valide, Copie ou Privé, en tant que tampon prédéfini. Un tampon nécessite une zone. [Date/Heure] Appuyez sur cette touche pour appliquer la date et l'heure auxquelles le document a été enregistré. • [Type date] nécessite une zone. • [Type heure] nécessite une zone. [Autres] Appuyez sur cette touche pour spécifier le numéro de la tâche, le numéro de série et le numéro de contrôle de distribution avec lesquels le document a été enregistré. • [Numéro Tâche] : Le numéro de tâche du travail d'impression est imprimé. Un numéro de tâche nécessite une zone. • [Numéro de série] : Le numéro de série de cette machine est imprimé. Le numéro de série nécessite une zone. Le numéro de série est attribué au moment de l'expédition de cette machine. Pour plus de détails sur les réglages, contacter le S.A.V. • [N° Commande Distribution] : Le nombre de copies spécifié est imprimé. Le numéro de contrôle de distribution nécessite une zone. Entrez le numéro de contrôle de distribution et sélectionnez "Numéro seul" ou "Mettre zéros devant (8 chiffres au total)" comme format de sortie. Élément Description [Trame Copie Prot. MdP] Spécifiez le contraste d'un motif. [Relief Fond] est sélectionné comme trame. [Taille Texte] Sélectionnez la taille du texte à imprimer entre Minimal, Standard ou Grand. [Trame fond] Sélectionnez la trame du fond parmi huit types. Élément Description [Type Tampon répétitif] Sélectionnez un type de Tampon répétitif à imprimer. ineo 223/283/363/423 7-29 7.4 Impression - Application (Boîte Public, Privé ou Groupe) 7 Type Tampon répétitif Paramètres Détaillés Appuyez sur [Paramètres Détaillés] pour spécifier la densité, la taille des caractères, et autres réglages. Position Dans l'écran Tampon répétitif, appuyez sur [Position] pour déterminer la position d'impression du tampon, par exemple, en inclinant le tampon ou en laissant un espace. Configurez les réglages suivants. - Inclinaison du Tampon répétitif dans la zone (+45 degrés/0 degré/-45 degrés). - Insertion d'un espace entre tampons répétitifs - Modification de l'ordre d'impression du tampon répétitif - Suppression du tampon répétitif ou de l'espace [Paramètres Détaillés] Spécifiez la couleur, la densité et taille du texte du tampon répétitif à imprimer. [Position] Sélectionnez l'inclinaison ou l'ordre d'impression du tampon répétitif à imprimer. Élément Description Élément Description [Tampon enregistré] Appuyez sur cette touche pour appliquer les images Tampon qui ont été préalablement enregistrées avec le logiciel utilitaire. • Utiliser Utilitaire Protection Copie pour enregistrer des tampons. Pour plus de détails, voir le manuel de l'utilitaire correspondant. • Les tampons enregistrés peuvent nécessiter plusieurs zones en fonction de leur contenu. [Tampon Prédéfini] Appuyez sur cette touche pour appliquer une chaîne standard comme par exemple, Copie non valide, Copie ou Privé, en tant que tampon prédéfini. Un tampon nécessite une zone. [Date/Heure] Appuyez sur cette touche pour appliquer la date et l'heure auxquelles le document a été enregistré. • [Type date] nécessite une zone. • [Type heure] nécessite une zone. [Autres] Appuyez sur cette touche pour spécifier le numéro de la tâche, le numéro de série et le numéro de contrôle de distribution avec lesquels le document a été enregistré. • [Numéro Tâche] : Le numéro de tâche du travail d'impression est imprimé. Un numéro de tâche nécessite une zone. • [Numéro de série] : Le numéro de série de cette machine est imprimé. Le numéro de série nécessite une zone. Le numéro de série est attribué au moment de l'expédition de cette machine. Pour plus de détails sur les réglages, contacter le S.A.V. • [N° Commande Distribution] : Le nombre de copies spécifié est imprimé. Le numéro de contrôle de distribution nécessite une zone. Entrez le numéro de contrôle de distribution et sélectionnez "Numéro seul" ou "Mettre zéros devant (8 chiffres au total)" comme format de sortie. Élément Description [Contraste] Sélectionnez la densité entre Clair, Standard ou Foncé. [Taille Texte] Sélectionnez la taille du texte à imprimer entre Minimal, Standard ou Grand. [Superposition Trame] Sélectionnez l'impression de la trame entre [Devant (Écraser)], [Transparent] ou [Derrière]. Élément Description [Changer Position/ Supprimer] Sélectionnez le tampon répétitif à changer et appuyez sur [Changer Position]/[Insérer Espace]/[Supprimer] pour spécifier. Impression 7 - Application (Boîte Public, Privé ou Groupe) 7-30 ineo 223/283/363/423 7.4 7.4.14 Tampon/Surimpression - En-tête/Pied de page Configurez les réglages pour insérer la tête ou le pied de page. Pour insérer la tête ou le pied de page, le contenu doit avoir été préalablement enregistré dans Réglages Administrateur. Appuyez sur Contrôle/Modif. temp. pour changer temporairement et imprimer le contenu de la tête et du pied de page enregistrés. dPour info Pour plus de détails sur l'enregistrement de la tête et du pied de page, voir le [Guide de l'utilisateur Opérations Scanner réseau/Fax/Fax Réseau]. Contrôle/Modif. temp. Dans l'écran Régl. En-tête/Pied de page, appuyez sur [Contrôle/Modif. temp.] pour changer la tête ou le pied de page enregistrés. Élément Description [Rappeler En-tête/ Pied de page] Sélectionnez la tête ou le pied de page parmi ceux qui sont enregistrés. [Contrôle/Modif. temp.] Appuyez sur cette touche pour contrôler ou changer la tête ou le pied de page sélectionné. Pour plus de détails, voir page 7-30. [Initial.] Appuyez sur cette touche annuler l'utilisation de la tête et du pied de page temporairement modifiés. ineo 223/283/363/423 7-31 7.4 Impression - Application (Boîte Public, Privé ou Groupe) 7 Référence - [Détails Texte] - [Couleur texte] ne peuvent pas être sélectionnés pendant l'impression. Élément Description [Réglages En-Tête], [Réglages Pied de page] Spécifiez s'il faut ou non imprimer un en-tête/un pied de page. Appuyez sur [Impression] pour configurer le réglage suivant. • [Texte] : Spécifiez sur l'écran tactile le texte pour la tête ou pied de page. • [Date/Heure] : Configurez la date et l'heure pour la tête ou pied de page. • [Autres] : Configurez le réglage permettant d'ajouter le numéro de contrôle de distribution, le numéro de tâche ou le numéro de série à la tête ou au pied de page. Le numéro de série est attribué au moment de l'expédition de cette machine. Pour plus de détails sur les réglages, contacter le S.A.V. [Pages] Indiquez si vous voulez imprimer la tête et le pied de page sur toutes les pages ou seulement sur la première page. [Détails Texte] Spécifiez le détails du texte à imprimer. • [Couleur texte] : sélectionnez la couleur d'impression parmi Noir, Rouge, Bleu, Vert, Jaune, Cyan ou Magenta. • [Taille Texte] : sélectionnez la taille du texte à imprimer entre 8 pt, 10 pt, 12 pt ou 14 pt. • [Type texte] : sélectionnez le type de police entre Times Roman ou Helvetica. Impression 7 - Application (Boîte Public, Privé ou Groupe) 7-32 ineo 223/283/363/423 7.4 7.4.15 Tampon/Surimpression - Surimpression enregistrée Réglages Une image enregistrée est incrustée lors de l'impression des pages spécifiées. Sélectionnez [Oui] pour utiliser une image de surimpression. Référence - Les images de surimpression peuvent être enregistrées en mode Copie ainsi qu'en mode Boîte. Une image de surimpression enregistrée en mode Copie peut être utilisée pour imprimer un document conservé dans la Boîte. Une image de surimpression enregistrée depuis une image conservée dans la Boîte peut être utilisée en mode Copie. dPour info Pour plus de détails sur l'enregistrement d'une image de surimpression, voir page 7-78. Élément Description [Rappel image surimpression] Spécifiez s'il faut imprimer une image de surimpression enregistrée sur le recto ou le verso. Appuyez sur un élément pour sélectionner une image de surimpression et configurer ses réglages. Pour plus de détails, voir page 7-33. [Pages] Sélectionnez si l'image de surimpression sélectionnée doit être imprimée sur toutes sur toutes les pages ou seulement sur la première page. ineo 223/283/363/423 7-33 7.4 Impression - Application (Boîte Public, Privé ou Groupe) 7 Réglage Surimpression Sélectionnez une image de surimpression et configurez ses réglages. L'image peut aussi être affichée sous forme d'aperçu. Référence - Voici les trois méthodes permettant de composer une surimpression. – [Transparent] : augmente la luminosité de l'image de surimpression à superposer. Ce réglage permet d'éviter que l'original ne soit masqué par l'image de surimpression composée. – [Composition Fond (Original)] : compose l'original comme fond. L'image de surimpression est superposée à l'original lors de l'impression. – [Derrière] : compose l'image de surimpression comme fond. L'original est superposé à l'image de surimpression lors de l'impression. Élément Description [Afficher Image]/ [Affichage Nom] La vue Vignette permet de contrôler les images de surimpression. En mode Nom d'affichage, les images de surimpression peuvent être contrôlées au moyen de leurs noms de fichier. Sélectionnez l'image de surimpression désirée. [Paramètres Détaillés] Appuyez sur cette touche pour spécifier comment composer une image de surimpression. • [Contraste] : entrez au clavier le contraste d'une image de surimpression (au moyen d'une valeur comprise entre 20 et 100%). • [Composition] : sélectionnez Transparent, Composition Fond (Original) ou Derrière pour spécifier comment composer une image de surimpression. [Détails Image] Appuyez sur cette touche pour vérifier les détails de l'image de surimpression y compris l'aperçu image, la taille et la couleur. 7 Envoyer 7-34 ineo 223/283/363/423 7.5 7.5 Envoyer Cette fonction n'est disponible que si un Disque dur est installé. 7.5.1 Présentation des réglages Transmission Les fonctions suivantes vous permettent d'envoyer un document enregistré dans une boîte. Grâce à elles, vous pourrez envoyer aisément des données simplement en enregistrant des destinations dans cette machine sans avoir les transférer via des ordinateurs. Description de l'onglet Env. Appuyez sur [Env.] pour afficher l'écran suivant. Les éléments de réglage disponibles pour [Réglages Transmission] sont les suivants. dPour info Pour plus de détails sur les autres éléments, voir page 7-4. Élément Description Fax Permet d'envoyer par fax les données du document. E-mail Envoie les données du document comme fichier joint à un E-mail. Fax Internet Envoie via un intranet ou Internet les données du document comme fichier joint à un E-mail. Fax Adresse IP Envoie des données de document à la destination spécifiée par l'adresse IP (nom serveur) ou l'adresse E-mail de la destination. PC (SMB) Envoie les données du document dans le dossier partagé de l'ordinateur spécifié. FTP Envoie les données de document au serveur FTP spécifié. WebDAV Envoie au serveur spécifié les données de document, via le réseau. N° : Élément Description 1 [Envoyer] Configurez la destination et autres réglages pour envoyer les documents sélectionnés. Si vous avez sélectionné plusieurs documents, [Réglages Document] et [Applications] ne sont pas disponibles. (p. 7-36) 2 [Lier EMI] Configurez l'ordre d'impression ou un autre réglage pour imprimer deux documents sélectionnés ou plus. (p. 7-37) 1 2 ineo 223/283/363/423 7-35 7.5 Envoyer 7 Envoyer Appuyez sur [Envoyer] pour afficher l'écran suivant. Vous pouvez configurer la destination de l'émission ainsi que d'autres fonctions. Lier EMI Appuyez sur [Lier EMI] pour afficher l'écran suivant après avoir spécifié l'ordre de reliure. Certains types de destination ou de fonction ne s'affichent pas puisque l'émission concerne plusieurs documents. N° : Élément Description 1 Configurez les destinations Configurez les destinations. (p. 7-38) 2 Configurez les fonctions Configurez les fonctions qui peuvent être ajoutés lors de l'émission de documents. (p. 7-48) 1 2 N° : Élément Description 1 Configurez les destinations Configurez les destinations. (p. 7-38) 2 Configurez les fonctions Configurez les fonctions qui peuvent être ajoutés lors de l'émission de documents. (p. 7-48) 1 2 7 Envoyer 7-36 ineo 223/283/363/423 7.5 7.5.2 Réglages Transmission Appuyez sur [Envoyer] pour spécifier les destinations et les fonctions qui peuvent être ajoutées lors de l'envoi de documents. Référence - [Saisie dir.] ne s'affiche pas lorsque Saisie Manuelle Destination est réglé sur Interdit dans [Paramètres Sécurité] dans Réglages Administrateur. N° : Élément Description 1 [Carnet Adresses] Appuyez sur cette touche pour sélectionner le destinataire parmi les destinations pré-enregistrées. 2 [Saisie dir.] Appuyez sur cette touche pour entrer directement des destinations non enregistrées. 3 [Vérif. histor] Sélectionnez les destinataires dans le journal d'émission. 4 [Rech. Adresse] Appuyez sur cette touche pour rechercher l'adresse enregistrée lorsque le serveur LDAP est utilisé. 5 [Groupe] Appuyez sur cette touche pour afficher la liste des adresses Groupe enregistrées. 6 [Recher simple] Appuyez sur cette touche pour rechercher la destination dans le carnet d'adresses. 7 [Réglages Document] Appuyez sur cette touche pour spécifier la résolution, le type de fichier ou la couleur lors de l'envoi d'un document. 8 [Réglages de Communication] Appuyez sur cette touche pour configurer les réglages de communication. 9 [Applications] Appuyez sur cette touche pour spécifier des fonctions supplémentaires comme Tampon ou Impression par page. 1 2 3 4 9 5 6 7 8 ineo 223/283/363/423 7-37 7.5 Envoyer 7 7.5.3 Combinaison Ordre Document Après avoir sélectionné les documents, appuyez sur [Lier EMI] pour afficher l'écran de sélection de l'ordre de liaison. Les documents seront envoyés dans l'ordre où ils sont affichés sur cet écran. Lorsque cet écran apparaît, les documents sont affichés dans l'ordre où ils ont été sélectionnés. Référence - Pour changer l'ordre, sélectionnez d'abord le document source, puis le document de destination. 7 Envoyer (Boîte Public, Privé ou Groupe) 7-38 ineo 223/283/363/423 7.6 7.6 Envoyer (Boîte Public, Privé ou Groupe) Cette fonction n'est disponible que si un Disque dur est installé. 7.6.1 Carnet Adresses - Recherche simple Permet de rechercher des destinations d'émission. Les méthodes suivantes sont disponibles pour rechercher les destinations enregistrées. Type d'adresse Appuyez sur cette touche pour rechercher la destination par le type d'adresse qui a été spécifié lors de l'enregistrement de la destination. dPour info Pour plus de détails sur le réglage [Carnet adresses par défaut], voir le [Guide de l'utilisateur Opérations Scanner réseau/Fax/Fax Réseau]. L'écran [Recher simple] s'affiche après une pression sur [Recher simple] si [Carnet adresses par défaut] est réglé sur [Index] dans [Régl.Utilisateur] - [Param. Affichage Perso] - [Paramètres Numérisation/Fax] dans le menu Utilitaires. N° : Élément Description 1 [Type d'adresse] Enregistre les adresses par type enregistré. 1 ineo 223/283/363/423 7-39 7.6 Envoyer (Boîte Public, Privé ou Groupe) 7 Index L'écran Index apparaît à la lettre qui a été spécifiée lors de l'enregistrement. L'écran [Index] s'affiche après une pression sur [Recher simple] si [Carnet adresses par défaut] est réglé sur [Type d'adresse] dans [Régl.Utilisateur] - [Param. Affichage Perso] - [Paramètres Numérisation/Fax] dans le menu Utilitaires. Recherche détaillée Entrez le nom de la destination ou une partie de l'adresse pour rechercher l'adresse correspondante. Sélectionnez [Nom] ou [Destinataire] et entrez une lettre d'index. N° : Élément Description 1 [Index] Affiche les destinations pour chaque index enregistré. 1 7 Envoyer (Boîte Public, Privé ou Groupe) 7-40 ineo 223/283/363/423 7.6 Recherche détaillée - Options recherche A l'écran Option Recherche, sélectionnez une condition pour l'affichage des options de recherche. Sélectionnez les conditions de recherche supplémentaires et appuyez sur [Valider]. Référence - Pour configurer l'affichage de l'écran option recherche et des options correspondantes, utilisez [Paramètres Option Recherche] dans le menu réglage. Pour plus de détails, voir le [Guide de l'utilisateur Opérations Scanner réseau/Fax/Fax Réseau]. 7.6.2 Saisie dir. Permet d'entrer comme destinataire une destination non enregistrée. Référence - Lorsque Saisie Manuelle Destination est réglé sur Gestion individuelle dans [Paramètres Sécurité] dans Réglages Administrateur, Saisie directe n'est pas disponible sauf pour Fax. ineo 223/283/363/423 7-41 7.6 Envoyer (Boîte Public, Privé ou Groupe) 7 7.6.3 Saisie directe - Fax Entrez le numéro de Fax sur l'écran tactile. Prochaine Destination Appuyez sur cette touche pour continuer à spécifier d'autres destinataires. Quand la fonction Confirm. Adresse (Émiss) est spécifiée : vous êtes invité à ressaisir le numéro de fax après avoir appuyé sur [Valider]. Réintroduisez le numéro de fax et appuyez sur [Départ]. Référence - [Prochaine Dest.] peut être sélectionné sur le deuxième écran de saisie. dPour info Pour plus de détails sur la fonction Confirm. Adresse (Émiss), voir le [Guide de l'utilisateur Opérations Scanner réseau/Fax/Fax Réseau]. 7.6.4 Saisie dir. - E-mail Entrez l'adresse E-mail sur l'écran tactile. Référence - Vous pouvez enregistrer les noms d'utilisateur ou les noms de domaine fréquemment utilisés pour les rappeler afin d'envoyer des messages E-mail. Avant d'utiliser cette fonction, il faut enregistrer le préfixe et le suffixe dans Réglages Administrateur. Pour plus de détails sur le préfixe et le suffixe, voir le [Guide de l'utilisateur Administrateur Réseau]. Prochaine Destination Appuyez sur cette touche pour continuer à spécifier d'autres destinataires. 7 Envoyer (Boîte Public, Privé ou Groupe) 7-42 ineo 223/283/363/423 7.6 7.6.5 Saisie directe - FAX Internet Entrez l'adresse E-mail sur l'écran tactile. Référence - Vous pouvez enregistrer les noms d'utilisateur ou les noms de domaine fréquemment utilisés pour les rappeler afin d'envoyer des messages E-mail. Avant d'utiliser cette fonction, il faut enregistrer le préfixe et le suffixe dans Réglages Administrateur. Pour plus de détails sur le préfixe et le suffixe, voir le [Guide de l'utilisateur Administrateur Réseau]. Prochaine Destination Appuyez sur cette touche pour continuer à spécifier d'autres destinataires. Capacité Réception Récepteur Sélectionnez les réglages recevables au niveau de la destination du Fax Internet. Vous pouvez sélectionner plusieurs paramètres appropriés. 7.6.6 Saisie directe - Fax Adresse IP Entrez la destination du Fax Adresse IP. Élément Description [Type Compression] Sélectionnez JPEG (couleur), JPEG (niv. de gris),mmR, MR ou MH. [Format papier] Sélectionnez A3, B4 ou A4. [Définition] 600e600 dpi (Ultra Fin), 400e400 dpi (Super Fin), 200e200 dpi (Fin) ou 200e100 dpi (Standard). ineo 223/283/363/423 7-43 7.6 Envoyer (Boîte Public, Privé ou Groupe) 7 7.6.7 Saisie Directe - PC (SMB) Entrez directement l'adresse du PC (SMB). Nom Serveur Spécifiez le nom d'hôte ou l'adresse IP du destinataire sur l'écran tactile. Chemin Fichier Entrez le chemin du dossier de destination sur l'écran tactile. Nom utilisat. Entrez le nom de l'utilisateur connecté sur l'écran tactile. Code d'accès Entrez le code d'accès de l'utilisateur connecté sur l'écran tactile. Référence Vérifiez les informations du dossier sur l'ordinateur de destination. Prochaine Dest. Appuyez sur cette touche pour continuer à spécifier d'autres destinataires. Élément Description [Adresse] Entrez l'adresse IP (nom serveur) ou l'adresse E-mail de la destination. [No. de Port] Entrez au clavier le numéro de port d'envoi (entrez une valeur de 1 à 65535). [Type destination machine] Sélectionnez [Couleur] si la machine de destination accepte l'impression couleur. [Prochaine Dest.] Appuyez sur cette touche pour continuer à spécifier d'autres destinataires. 7 Envoyer (Boîte Public, Privé ou Groupe) 7-44 ineo 223/283/363/423 7.6 7.6.8 Saisie directe - FTP Permet d'entrer directement l'adresse FTP. Nom Serveur Spécifiez le nom d'hôte ou l'adresse IP du destinataire sur l'écran tactile. Chemin Fichier Entrez le chemin du dossier de destination sur l'écran tactile. Nom utilisat. Entrez le nom de l'utilisateur connecté sur l'écran tactile. Appuyez sur [Anonyme] puis entrez "Anonyme". Code d'accès Entrez le code d'accès de l'utilisateur connecté sur l'écran tactile. Réglages détaillés Appuyez sur cette touche pour configurer des réglages plus détaillés. Prochaine Dest. Appuyez sur cette touche pour continuer à spécifier d'autres destinataires. Élément Description [No. de Port] Entrez un numéro de port. [PASV] Spécifiez s'il faut utiliser le mode PASV (Passif). [Proxy] Spécifiez s'il faut utiliser ou non un serveur proxy. ineo 223/283/363/423 7-45 7.6 Envoyer (Boîte Public, Privé ou Groupe) 7 7.6.9 Saisie directe - WebDAV Entrez directement la destination WebDAV. Nom Serveur Spécifiez le nom d'hôte ou l'adresse IP du destinataire sur l'écran tactile. Chemin Fichier Entrez le chemin du dossier de destination sur l'écran tactile. Nom utilisat. Entrez le nom de l'utilisateur connecté sur l'écran tactile. Code d'accès Entrez le code d'accès de l'utilisateur connecté sur l'écran tactile. Réglages détaillés Appuyez sur cette touche pour configurer des réglages plus détaillés. Prochaine Dest. Appuyez sur cette touche pour continuer à spécifier d'autres destinataires. Élément Description [No. de Port] Entrez un numéro de port. [Proxy] Spécifiez s'il faut utiliser ou non un serveur proxy. [Paramètre SSL] Spécifiez s'il faut ou non utiliser le protocole SSL pour l'envoi. 7 Envoyer (Boîte Public, Privé ou Groupe) 7-46 ineo 223/283/363/423 7.6 7.6.10 Vérif. histor. (Historique tâches) L'Historique des tâches affiche les cinq dernières destinations de fax envoyés par cette machine. Vous pouvez sélectionner les destinations dans cet historique. 7.6.11 Rech. Adresse L'onglet [Rech. Adresse] s'affiche lorsque le serveur LDAP est configuré dans Réglages Administrateur. Référence - Pour plus d'informations sur les paramètres du serveur LDAP, voir [Guide de l'utilisateur Administrateur Réseau] - Activation LDAP. - La position d'affichage de l'onglet [Rech. Adresse] varie en fonction des réglages utilisateur. Pour plus de détails, voir le [Guide de l'utilisateur Opérations Scanner réseau/Fax/Fax Réseau]. ineo 223/283/363/423 7-47 7.6 Envoyer (Boîte Public, Privé ou Groupe) 7 7.6.12 Recherche LDAP - Recherche simple Entrez un mot-clé de recherche et appuyez sur [Lancer recherche] pour rechercher l'adresse de destination sur le serveur LDAP spécifié. 7.6.13 Recherche LDAP - Recherche Avancée Spécifiez plusieurs conditions de recherche pour chercher l'adresse cible. Nom Entrez le nom sur l'écran tactile. Adr. E-Mail Entrez l'adresse E-mail sur l'écran tactile. Numéro Fax Entrez le numéro de Fax sur l'écran tactile. Nom Entrez le nom de famille sur l'écran tactile. Prénom Entrez le prénom sur l'écran tactile. Ville Entrez le nom de la ville sur l'écran tactile. 7 Envoyer (Boîte Public, Privé ou Groupe) 7-48 ineo 223/283/363/423 7.6 Nom société Entrez le nom de l'entreprise sur l'écran tactile. Département Entrez le département sur l'écran tactile. OU/ET/DÉBUT/FINIT PAR Sélectionnez les conditions de recherche parmi OU, ET, DÉBUT et FINIT PAR. Si aucune condition n'est spécifiée, appuyez sur [Non]. 7.6.14 Présentation des réglages document Configurez les réglages document comme la résolution ou le type de fichier. 7.6.15 Réglages Document - Définition Sélectionnez la résolution pour l'émission de fax. Référence - Cette fonction n'est pas disponible en cas d'exécution de Lier ÉMI. ineo 223/283/363/423 7-49 7.6 Envoyer (Boîte Public, Privé ou Groupe) 7 7.6.16 Réglages Document - Type Fichier Spécifiez le type de fichier des données à transmettre. Type Fichier Les types de fichier disponibles sont les suivants. Référence - JPEG ne peut être sélectionné lorsque plusieurs documents sont liés pour être envoyés. - Si vous sélectionnez JPEG, [Séparation Page] est automatiquement sélectionné et réglé sur [1 Chaq. X page(s)] dans Réglage Numérisation. - Vous pouvez spécifier le format de compression lors de l'enregistrement d'un fichier TIFF en couleurs. Pour plus de détails, voir le [Guide de l'utilisateur Opérations Scanner réseau/Fax/Fax Réseau]. Élément Description [PDF] Enregistre les données au format PDF. [PDF compact] Fichier PDF davantage compressé. [TIFF] Enregistre les données au format TIFF. [JPEG] Enregistre les données au format JPEG. [XPS] Enregistre les données au format XPS. [XPS compact] Enregistre les données dans un fichier XPS, davantage compressé. 7 Envoyer (Boîte Public, Privé ou Groupe) 7-50 ineo 223/283/363/423 7.6 Cryptage Si le format de fichier [PDF] ou [PDF compact] est sélectionné, vous pouvez spécifier le niveau de cryptage. Cryptage - Paramètres détaillés Configurez les réglages de permission détaillés lorsque les autorisations relatives au document permission sont spécifiées dans [Cryptage]. Élément Description [Niveau de cryptage] Sélectionnez le niveau de cryptage. [Code d'accès] Configurez cet élément si vous sélectionnez le code d'accès pour le type de cryptage. Entrez le code d'accès nécessaire à l'ouverture des données cryptées (32 caractères max.). Pour confirmation, saisissez deux fois le mot de passe. [Permissions Document] Configurez cet élément si vous sélectionnez le code d'accès pour le type de cryptage. Entrez le mot de passe nécessaire au changement des permissions document (32 caractères max.). Pour confirmation, saisissez deux fois le mot de passe. ineo 223/283/363/423 7-51 7.6 Envoyer (Boîte Public, Privé ou Groupe) 7 Appuyez sur [Suivt. ] pour configurer en détail les réglages Modifier Permissions. Élément Description [Impression Autorisée] Indiquez si vous souhaitez autoriser ou interdire l'impression des données. [Permettre seulement Basse résolution] apparaît quand le Niveau de cryptage est réglé sur [Niveau élevé]. [Extraire Documents/ Images] Sélectionnez s'il faut permettre ou interdire l'extraction d'images texte. 7 Envoyer (Boîte Public, Privé ou Groupe) 7-52 ineo 223/283/363/423 7.6 Tampon/Surimpression Appuyez sur cette touche pour sélectionner la manière de composer le contenu à intégrer au Tampon/Surimpression. PDF Contours PDF Contours peut être sélectionné quand PDF compact est sélectionné comme type de fichier. Cette fonction effectue le contourage des caractères assurant ainsi une image lisse. Elle est également disponible lors de la modification de données à l'aide d'une application telle que Adobe Illustrator. dPour info Cette fonction vous permet de spécifier la précision du traitement des contours lors de la création de données PDF Contours. Pour plus d'informations, reportez-vous au [Guide de l'utilisateur Opérations Scanner réseau/Fax/Fax Réseau]. Élément Description [Modifier Permissions] Sélectionnez le niveau d'autorisation concernant les modifications du document, y compris la signature, l'introduction ou le commentaire de données. Élément Description [Image] Sélectionnez ce réglage pour insérer le texte sous forme d'image. [Texte] Sélectionnez ce réglage pour insérer le texte en tant que texte. • La date, l'heure, le numéro de page, la tête ou le pied de page est intégré comme texte. • Le tampon est composé comme une image. ineo 223/283/363/423 7-53 7.6 Envoyer (Boîte Public, Privé ou Groupe) 7 Réglage Numérisation Spécifiez un ensemble de données. 7.6.17 Réglages Document - Couleur Configurez les réglages couleur pour les documents à envoyer. Les données qui ont été enregistrés avec cette machine contiennent les données couleur même si elles sont enregistrées en niveaux de gris ou en noir et blanc ; elles peuvent donc être changées en couleur lors de l'envoi. Référence - Cette fonction n'est pas disponible en cas d'exécution de Lier ÉMI. - Un document qui a été enregistré en niveaux de gris ou en noir et blanc avec une autre machine ne contient pas les données couleur ; il ne peut donc pas être changé en couleur lors de l'envoi. Élément Description [Multi Page] Enregistre toutes les données numérisées dans un seul fichier. Cet élément ne peut pas être spécifié en même temps que le type de fichier JPEG. [Séparation Page] Scinde les données numérisées pour enregistrer dans un seul fichier chaque nombre de pages spécifié. Entrez au clavier le nombre de pages à enregistrer dans un fichier. • [Séparation Page] ne peut être sélectionné lorsque plusieurs documents sont liés pour être envoyés. [Méthode Fichier Joint E-mail] Spécifier la méthode à utiliser pour joindre un fichier à un E-mail si Séparation Page est sélectionné. • [Tous fich. envoyés en un (1) e-mail] : Joint tous les fichiers à un E-mail. • [Un (1) fichier par e-mail] : Ajoute une pièce jointe à un E-mail. Élément Description [Utiliser réglage couleur existant] Envoie les documents avec le réglage couleur utilisé lors de l'enregistrement. [Couleurs] Envoie les documents en couleurs. [Niv.Gris] Envoie les documents en niveaux de gris. [Noir] Envoie les documents en noir et blanc. 7 Envoyer (Boîte Public, Privé ou Groupe) 7-54 ineo 223/283/363/423 7.6 7.6.18 Présentation des Réglages de Communication Configurez les lignes de communication, la signature numérique et autres réglages de communication. 7.6.19 Réglages de Communication - Réglages Ligne Description des réglages Ligne Configurez les réglages Ligne pour la transmission fax. EMI Outremer Permet d'envoyer des fax à des destinations où les conditions de communication sont médiocres et où la vitesse de transmission est faible. Référence - Cette fonction ne peut pas être utilisée en même temps que les fonctions suivantes. – Émission en relève (TX) – Réception en relève – Bulletin d'affichage ineo 223/283/363/423 7-55 7.6 Envoyer (Boîte Public, Privé ou Groupe) 7 ECM OFF Le Mode de Correction d'erreurs (ECM) est désactivé pour l'envoi des données. L'ECM est mode de correction d'erreur défini par l'ITU-T (International Telecommunication Union - Telecommunication Standardization Sector). Les télécopieurs équipés d'un dispositif ECM communiquent entre-eux en confirmant que les données envoyées sont sans erreurs. Ainsi, la communication peut être facilitée par l'absence de perturbations dues aux bruits sur la ligne, etc. Si la présence de bruits est fréquente, la communication peut prendre un tout petit peu plus de temps que lorsque l'ECM est désactivé. A la fin de l'opération d'envoi, la machine active automatiquement ECM ON. Référence - Cette machine envoie des fax avec la fonction ECM activée (ECM ON) par défaut sauf si ECM OFF est spécifié. - Cette fonction ne peut pas être utilisée en même temps que les fonctions suivantes. – Réception en relève – Émission en relève (TX) – V.34 Désactivé – Enregistrement Bulletin – Réception Relève Bulletin V.34 OFF Le mode de communication V34 est utilisée pour les communications Super G3 par télécopie. Toutefois lorsque la machine distante ou cette machine est connectée à une ligne via un standard (autocommutateur PBX), les conditions de la ligne téléphonique peuvent faire obstacle à l'établissement d'une communication en mode Super G3 mode. Dans ce cas, il est recommandé de désactiver le mode V34 pour envoyer les données. Une fois l'émission terminée, cette machine repasse automatiquement en mode V34. Référence - Cette fonction ne peut pas être utilisée en même temps que les fonctions suivantes. – Réception en relève – Émission en relève (TX) – Enregistrement Bulletin – Réception Relève Bulletin – ECM OFF Vérif. Dest. & envoyer Le numéro de fax spécifié est comparé au numéro de fax distant (CSI) et les données ne sont envoyées que lorsque ces numéros de fax correspondent. S'ils ne correspondent pas, la communication échoue, évitant ainsi une erreur d'émission. Référence - Pour utiliser la fonction Vérif.Dest.& envoyer, il faut préalablement enregistrer le numéro de fax local dans la machine distante. Sélect. ligne Vous pouvez spécifier [Ligne 1] ou [Ligne 2] pour envoyer des données quand deux Kits Fax en option sont installés. Spécifiez la ligne utilisée pour la transmission. Si vous sélectionnez [Non réglé], c'est la Ligne 1 ou la Ligne 2 qui sera utilisée pour la transmission, selon celle qui est disponible. Si les deux lignes sont libres, la ligne 1 est utilisée en premier. Référence - Vous ne pouvez pas spécifier de ligne lorsque [Configuration ligne 2] dans [Réglages multi lignes] est réglé sur [Récept. seulement]. Pour plus de détails sur la fonction Réglage multi lignes, voir le [Guide de l'utilisateur Opérations Scanner réseau/Fax/Fax Réseau]. - Dans le cas de l'utilisation de deux lignes extérieures ou d'extension, veillez à spécifier la ligne que vous utiliserez. Si vous sélectionnez [Non réglé], une erreur d'envoi peut survenir. 7 Envoyer (Boîte Public, Privé ou Groupe) 7-56 ineo 223/283/363/423 7.6 7.6.20 Réglages de Communication - Réglages E-Mail Paramètres E-Mail Spécifiez le nom du document, le sujet, l'adresse d'origine et le corps du message pour l'envoi de messages E-mail. Nom Document Le nom du fichier à enregistrer est affiché. Ce nom du document peut aussi être spécifié sur l'écran [Classer document]. Le nom du document y compris celui spécifié par la suite sera appliqué à cette colonne. Le nombre maximum de caractères autorisé est de 30. Sujet Le texte spécifié au menu Utilitaires s'affiche automatiquement. Appuyez sur [Saisie dir.] pour modifier le contenu. Le nombre maximum de caractères est de 64. ineo 223/283/363/423 7-57 7.6 Envoyer (Boîte Public, Privé ou Groupe) 7 De Affiche l'adresse E-mail de l'Administrateur spécifié dans le menu Utilitaires. Référence - L'adresse E-mail de cette machine est utilisée pour le fax Internet. - Il n'est pas possible d'entrer directement l'adresse lorsque [Changer l'adresse expéditeur] est réglé sur Interdit dans Réglages Administrateur - [Réglage Système] - [Accès Restreint Utilisateur] - [Accès Restreint à Param. Tâches]. Pour plus de détails sur le réglage [Changer l'adresse expéditeur], voir le [Guide de l'utilisateur Opérations Scanner réseau/Fax/Fax Réseau]. Corps txte Le corps du texte de l'E-mail tel que spécifié au menu Utilitaires s'affiche. Appuyez sur [Saisie dir.] pour modifier le contenu. Le nombre maximum de caractères est de 256. 7 Envoyer (Boîte Public, Privé ou Groupe) 7-58 ineo 223/283/363/423 7.6 7.6.21 Réglages de Communication - Vérif. régl URL Dest URL Destination La fonction URL Destination permet de spécifier l'adresse E-mail à laquelle l'achèvement d'une tâche et l'emplacement des données peuvent être notifiées. L'URL contient des informations pointant vers une boîte. Cliquez sur le lien inclus dans le texte pour accéder directement à l'écran de la boîte. Référence - Une destination de Boîte Utilisateur dans l'unité principale, FTP, PC (SMB) et WebDAV peuvent être spécifiées comme destination dans Réglages URL Dest. - Paramètres URL Dest. n'est pas actif lors de l'envoi de messages E-mail ou de fax. - Si le mode d'authentification ou le code d'accès Boîte est activé, l'écran de saisie du code d'accès correspondant au mode d'authentification en vigueur apparaît. À l'issue de tous les processus d'authentification, l'écran Boîte apparaît. Recherche détaillée Vous pouvez faire une recherche d'adresses E-mail a partir des destinations enregistrées. Entrez le nom de la destination ou une partie de l'adresse pour rechercher l'adresse correspondante. Sélectionnez [Nom] ou [Destinat.] et entrez une lettre d'index. Saisie dir. Entrez l'adresse E-mail sur l'écran tactile. Référence - Vous pouvez enregistrer les noms d'utilisateur ou les noms de domaine fréquemment utilisés pour les rappeler afin d'envoyer des messages E-mail. Avant d'utiliser cette fonction, il faut enregistrer le préfixe et le suffixe dans Réglages Administrateur. Pour plus de détails sur le préfixe et le suffixe, voir le [Guide de l'utilisateur Administrateur Réseau]. ineo 223/283/363/423 7-59 7.6 Envoyer (Boîte Public, Privé ou Groupe) 7 7.6.22 Réglages de Communication - Réglage Méthod Comm. Spécifiez la méthode d'émission ou de réception des données. Émission différée Spécifiez l'heure d'envoi. L'envoi des fax aux heures de tarif réduit tel que la nuit ou le matin tôt peut réduire les coûts de communication. Utilisez le clavier pour spécifier l'heure de début de la communication. Référence - Elle est spécifiée en heures et minutes. - Il n'est pas possible de spécifier la date. 7 Envoyer (Boîte Public, Privé ou Groupe) 7-60 ineo 223/283/363/423 7.6 Transmission par code d'accès (EMI Mode de passe) Cette fonction permet d'envoyer un document en y joignant le code d'accès. Si le télécopieur du destinataire est paramétré pour les réceptions en réseau fermé, le télécopieur de l'expéditeur devrait envoyer un fax avec le même mot de passe que le mot de passe de réception en réseau fermé. Référence - Cette fonction ne peut être utilisée que si la machine distante est un de nos modèles et si elle est compatible avec la réception en réseau fermé. - Entrez le code d'accès au clavier. Émission Code F (Fonction TX code F) Cette fonction permet d'envoyer des documents à une Boîte utilisateur spécifique de la machine distante, en entrant l'Adresse Secondaire et le Mot de passe. La transmission F-Code peut être utilisée pour les transmissions sécurisées et les transmissions relais. Référence - Pour pouvoir utiliser F-Code pour l'émission, la machine distante doit être compatible avec cette fonction. Élément Description Émiss. sécurisée Les documents sont envoyés à la Boîte Utilisateur Récept. Confid. de la machine distante. Entrez le numéro de la Boîte de destination dans la boîte d'adresse secondaire et entrez le mot de passe dans la boîte Mot de passe. Émission relais Les documents sont envoyés sur la Boîte utilisateur de distribution relais de la machine distante, lorsque la machine distante est compatible avec la fonction de distribution relais. Entrez le numéro de la boîte Relais dans le champ Adresse SUB et le code d'accès dans la case Code d'accès. ineo 223/283/363/423 7-61 7.6 Envoyer (Boîte Public, Privé ou Groupe) 7 7.6.23 Réglages de Communication - Cryptage E-Mail Cet élément s'affiche lorsque [Réglages Communication S/MIME] est réglé sur [Activé] dans Réglages Administrateur - [Paramètres réseau] - [Réglages E-Mail]. Spécifiez s'il faut crypter les e-mails envoyés depuis cette machine. dPour info Pour plus d'informations sur les réglages de communication S/MIME, reportez-vous au [Guide de l'utilisateur Administrateur Réseau]. 7.6.24 Réglages de Communication - Signature numérique Cet élément s'affiche lorsque [Réglages Communication S/MIME] est réglé sur [Activé] dans Réglages Administrateur - [Paramètres réseau] - [Réglages E-Mail]. Sélectionnez s'il faut ajouter une signature numérique aux e-mails envoyés depuis cette machine. Référence - En fonction des Réglages Communication S/MIME, il se peut que vous ne puissiez pas ajouter de signature numérique ou que vous soyez obligé d'en ajouter une. dPour info Pour plus d'informations sur les réglages de communication S/MIME, reportez-vous au [Guide de l'utilisateur Administrateur Réseau]. 7.6.25 Réglages de Communication - Réglages En-tête Fax Spécifiez s'il faut joindre l'identifiant de l'expéditeur (TTI) lors de l'envoi des documents. Sélectionnez le nom de l'expéditeur dans la liste des noms d'expéditeur. Référence - Pour enregistrer le contenu des Informations d'en-tête à ajouter à l'original, utilisez [Informations Entête] dans le menu Utilitaires. Pour plus de détails, voir le [Guide de l'utilisateur Opérations Scanner réseau/Fax/Fax Réseau]. - Pour enregistrer les modalités d'intégration des Informations d'en-tête, utilisez [Position En-tête/Pied pag] dans le menu Utilitaires. Pour plus de détails, voir le [Guide de l'utilisateur Opérations Scanner réseau/Fax/Fax Réseau]. 7 Envoyer (Boîte Public, Privé ou Groupe) 7-62 ineo 223/283/363/423 7.6 7.6.26 Présentation des réglages Applications Configurez les autres réglages (Tampon/Surimpression et Impress. par page) disponibles pour envoyer les documents. 7.6.27 Applications - Tampon/Surimpression - Date/Heure Pour la procédure de configuration, voir page 7-21. 7.6.28 Applications - Tampon/Surimpression - Numéro Page Pour la procédure de configuration, voir page 7-22. 7.6.29 Applications - Tampon/Surimpression - Tampon Permet d'imprimer sur les pages une chaîne de caractères prédéfinie, comme "URGENT" par exemple. Élément Description [Type Tampon/ Tampons prédéfinis] Sélectionnez un type de tampon, comme par exemple URGENT, REPONSE SOUHAITEE ou COPIE INTERDITE. Pages Sélectionnez si la date et l'heure doivent être imprimés sur toutes les pages ou uniquement sur la première page. [Taille Texte] Sélectionnez la taille du texte à imprimer, entre Minimal ou Standard. [Couleur texte] Sélectionnez la couleur d'impression parmi Noir, Rouge, Bleu, Vert, Jaune, Cyan et Magenta. [Position Impress.] Spécifier la position d'impression. Pour procéder à un réglage plus fin de la position d'impression, appuyez sur [Ajuster Position]. Spécifiez la longueur du décalage de la position d'impression vers la gauche, la droite, le haut et le bas en indiquant une valeur comprise entre 1 et 50mm (1/16 et 1-15/16 pouces). ineo 223/283/363/423 7-63 7.6 Envoyer (Boîte Public, Privé ou Groupe) 7 7.6.30 Applications - Tampon/Surimpression - En-tête/Pied de page Pour la procédure de configuration, voir page 7-30. 7.6.31 Applications - Impress. par page Spécifiez s'il faut imprimer les documents lors de l'émission. Configurez aussi les réglages d'impression. Élément Description [Copies] Utilisez le pavé numérique pour saisir le nombre de copies. Vous pouvez spécifier un nombre compris entre 1 et 9999. [Recto/Recto- Vers] Sélectionnez Recto ou Recto-Verso. [Agraf.] Sélectionnez s'il faut agrafer les feuilles imprimées. [Agrafage] - [Réglage Position] Si vous sélectionnez le type d'agrafage, spécifiez la position. 7 Réglages Archivage (boîtes Public, Privé ou Groupe) 7-64 ineo 223/283/363/423 7.7 7.7 Réglages Archivage (boîtes Public, Privé ou Groupe) Cette fonction n'est disponible que si un Disque dur est installé. 7.7.1 Présentation des réglages Archivage Vous pouvez renommer ou supprimer les documents enregistrés dans une Boîte Public, Privé ou Groupe afin de pouvoir organiser les documents dans la boîte. Les fonctions disponibles sont les suivantes. Description de l'onglet Réglages Archivage Appuyez sur [Réglages Archivage] pour afficher l'écran suivant. Les éléments de réglage disponibles pour [Réglages Archivage] sont les suivants. dPour info Pour plus de détails sur les autres éléments, voir page 7-4. Élément Description Supprimer Supprime un document devenu inutile, comme un document déjà envoyé ou imprimé. Modif. nom Permet de renommer un document enregistré. Déplacer Déplace dans une autre boîte Public, Privé ou Groupe les données d'un document enregistré. Copie Copie dans une autre boîte Public, Privé ou Groupe les données d'un document enregistré. Enregistrer dans Mémoire externe. Enregistre un document d'une boîte utilisateur vers une mémoire externe connectée à cette machine. Détails Document Permet de vérifier la date et l'heure où un document a été enregistré ainsi que de contrôler l'image d'aperçu. N° : Élément Description 1 [Supprimer] Supprime le document sélectionné. 2 [Modif. nom] Permet de renommer le document sélectionné. 3 [Déplacer] Configurez les réglages permettant de déplacer le document sélectionné. 4 [Copie] Configurez les réglages permettant de copier le document sélectionné. 5 [Enregistrer dans Mémoire externe.] Enregistre le document sélectionné dans la mémoire externe. 2 3 4 5 1 ineo 223/283/363/423 7-65 7.7 Réglages Archivage (boîtes Public, Privé ou Groupe) 7 7.7.2 Suppression de documents Vous pouvez supprimer des fichiers devenus inutiles, comme les fichiers déjà imprimés. Vous pouvez sélectionner plusieurs fichiers et les supprimer en une seule fois. Après avoir vérifié les détails du document, appuyez sur [Supprimer]. 7.7.3 Modif. nom Permet de renommer un document enregistré. Entrez un nouveau nom sur l'écran tactile. Référence - Une fois défini, le nouveau nom du document sera utilisé comme nom de fichier. Notez que si vous renommez le document que vous envisagez d'envoyer, il faut tenir compte des critères de nom et autres conditions incontournables établies par le serveur de destination. - Au besoin, il est possible de renommer le document juste avant de l'envoyer. 7.7.4 Déplacer les documents Permet de déplacer dans une autre boîte un document enregistré. Une boîte Public, Privé ou Groupe peut être sélectionnée comme boîte de destination. Sélectionnez la boîte de destination, vérifiez les données du document et appuyez sur Départ sur le panneau de contrôle ou [Départ] sur l'écran tactile. Référence - Le contenu de l'affichage d'une boîte Privé ou Groupe varie en fonction de l'utilisateur connecté. - Il n'est pas nécessaire d'entrer le code d'accès même s'il est spécifié dans la boîte de destination. 7 Réglages Archivage (boîtes Public, Privé ou Groupe) 7-66 ineo 223/283/363/423 7.7 7.7.5 Copie Copie dans une autre boîte les données d'un document enregistré. Une boîte Public, Privé ou Groupe peut être sélectionnée comme boîte de destination. Sélectionnez la boîte de destination, vérifiez les données du document et appuyez sur Départ sur le panneau de contrôle ou [Départ] sur l'écran tactile. Référence - Le contenu de l'affichage d'une boîte Privé ou Groupe varie en fonction de l'utilisateur connecté. - Il n'est pas nécessaire d'entrer le code d'accès même s'il est spécifié dans la boîte de destination. 7.7.6 Enregistrer dans mémoire externe Vous pouvez enregistrer un document archivé dans une Boîte utilisateur vers une mémoire externe. Appuyez sur [Réglages Document] pour configurer les réglages d'un document à enregistrer. Référence - Pour plus d'informations sur la mémoire externe, voir page 7-100. - Vous pouvez enregistrer plusieurs documents ensemble. - Il est impossible de renommer un document pendant qu'il est en cours d'enregistrement. Avant d'enregistrer un document, changez le nom du fichier comme vous le souhaitez. ineo 223/283/363/423 7-67 7.7 Réglages Archivage (boîtes Public, Privé ou Groupe) 7 Réglages Document Vous pouvez spécifier la résolution, le type de fichier et la couleur du document à enregistrer. Si vous sélectionnez plusieurs documents, les réglages s'appliquent à tous les documents. Réglages Document - Définition Sélectionnez la définition du document à enregistrer. 7 Réglages Archivage (boîtes Public, Privé ou Groupe) 7-68 ineo 223/283/363/423 7.7 Réglages Document - Type Fichier Lors de la spécification du type de fichier, sélectionnez [Oui]. Les éléments de réglage disponibles sont les suivants. Réglages Document - Couleur Pour la procédure de configuration, voir page 7-53. Élément Description [Type Fichier] Sélectionnez le type du fichier à enregistrer. [Cryptage] Si le format de fichier PDF ou PDF compact est sélectionné, vous pouvez spécifier le niveau de cryptage. Pour plus de détails, voir page 7-50. [PDF Contours] Configurez cet élément quand vous sélectionnez PDF compact comme type de fichier. Pour plus de détails, voir page 7-52. ineo 223/283/363/423 7-69 7.7 Réglages Archivage (boîtes Public, Privé ou Groupe) 7 7.7.7 Détails Document Vérifiez les détails d'un document enregistré sur l'écran tactile. Affichage des Informations détaillées Sélectionnez un document et appuyez sur [Détails Document] pour en vérifier les informations. Les informations suivantes sont affichées. Aperçu Sur l'écran Détails du Document, appuyez sur [Aperçu] pour afficher un aperçu du document enregistré. Il est possible de visualiser l'image en taille réelle ou agrandie 2, 4 ou 8 fois. Après avoir changé de format d'affichage, utilisez les barres de défilement à droite et au bas de l'image pour visualiser la section voulue de l'image. Référence - S'il s'agit d'un document de plusieurs pages, seule l'image de la première page peut être affichée. Élément Description [Heure Enreg.] Affiche la date et l'heure d'enregistrement du document. [Nom utilisat.] Affiche le nom d'utilisateur ou le mode (NUMÉRIS., COPIE ou IMPRESSION) dans lequel le document a été enregistré. [Nom Document] Affiche le nom du document. [No. de pages] Affiche le nombre de pages du document. [N° Tâche] Affiche le numéro de tâche d'enregistrement du document. [ ][ ] Si plusieurs documents sont sélectionnés, utilisez [ ] ou [ ] pour passer d'un document à l'autre. [Aperçu] Appuyez sur cette touche pour passer à l'écran Aperçu. Pour plus de détails, voir page 7-69. 7 Applications 7-70 ineo 223/283/363/423 7.8 7.8 Applications Cette fonction n'est disponible que si un Disque dur est installé. 7.8.1 Présentation des réglages Applications Vous pouvez modifier un document enregistré dans une boîte Public, Privé ou Groupe en changeant l'ordre des pages ou supprimer des pages du document. Vous pouvez aussi enregistrer l'image d'un document enregistré à superposer aux données imprimées. Les fonctions disponibles sont les suivantes. Description de l'onglet Applications Appuyez sur [Applications] pour afficher l'écran suivant. Les éléments de réglage disponibles pour [Réglages Application] sont les suivants. dPour info Pour plus de détails sur les autres éléments, voir page 7-4. Élément Description Modifier document Supprime, pivote ou déplace la page sélectionnée. Enregistrer la surimpression Enregistre l'image d'un document stocké afin de la superposer aux données imprimées. Détails Document Permet de vérifier la date et l'heure où un document a été enregistré ainsi que de contrôler l'image d'aperçu. N° : Élément Description 1 [Modifier document] Supprime, pivote ou déplace la page sélectionnée. 2 [Enregistrer la surimpression] Enregistre l'image d'un document stocké afin de la superposer aux données imprimées. 1 2 ineo 223/283/363/423 7-71 7.8 Applications 7 7.8.2 Modifier document Sélectionnez un document et appuyez sur [Modifier document]. L'écran Modifier document s'affiche. Pour voir l'image d'un document avant de le modifier, appuyez sur [Aperçu/Déf. Plage]. Pour plus de détails, voir page 7-76. Modifier document - Suppr. page Vous pouvez supprimer une page spécifique d'un document enregistré. Vous pouvez par exemple supprimer les pages vierges afin de réduire le volume des données. 0 Si vous supprimez la page unique d'un document, c'est le document en entier qui sera supprimé. 0 Il vous sera impossible d'annuler la suppression ou de restaurer les pages supprimées car elles seront écrasées lors de la suppression. Si vous pensez avoir besoin de la version non modifiée du document, faites-en préalablement une copie de sauvegarde. Pour plus de détails sur la copie d'un document, voir page 7-66. 1 Sélectionnez une page à supprimer et appuyez sur [Suppr. page]. % Pour ne sélectionner que les pages impaires, appuyez sur [Pg Impaire]. % Pour ne sélectionner que les pages paires, appuyez sur [Page paire]. % Après avoir sélectionné [Pg Impaire] ou [Page paire], vous pouvez sélectionner la page désirée grâce à la touche de page ou annuler la sélection. 2 Vérifiez que la page spécifiée a été supprimée de l'écran. % Pour l'instant, la page spécifiée page n'est pas supprimée du document. % Dans cet exemple, les pages spécifiées (pages 1, 3 et 4) ont été supprimées. 3 Pour supprimer définitivement les pages, appuyez sur [Départ] ou sur la touche Départ du panneau de contrôle. % Pour annuler la suppression, appuyez sur [Annuler] pour revenir à l'écran Application. 7 Applications 7-72 ineo 223/283/363/423 7.8 4 Vérifiez les informations affichées à l'écran. Pour supprimer les pages, sélectionnez [Enregistrer]. % Pour annuler la suppression, appuyez sur [Ne pas enregistrer] pour revenir à l'écran Modifier Document. Les pages sélectionnées sont supprimées et le document est enregistré. Modifier document - Pivoter Page Vous pouvez faire pivoter les pages spécifiées dans un document enregistré. Si vous avez numérisé un original recto-verso, le haut et le bas peuvent être inversés d'une page à l'autre ou l'orientation peut être différente en fonction de l'orientation de l'original. Dans ce cas, vous pouvez faire pivoter les pages sélectionnées de manière à visualiser l'intégralité du document plus facilement. 0 Il sera impossible de restaurer les pages car elles sont écrasées par l'opération de rotation. Si vous pensez avoir besoin de la version non modifiée du document, faites-en préalablement une copie de sauvegarde. Pour plus de détails sur la copie d'un document, voir page 7-66. 1 Sélectionnez une page à faire pivoter et appuyez sur [Pivoter Page]. % Pour ne sélectionner que les pages impaires, appuyez sur [Pg Impaire]. % Pour ne sélectionner que les pages paires, appuyez sur [Page paire]. % Après avoir sélectionné [Pg Impaire] ou [Page paire], vous pouvez sélectionner la page désirée grâce à la touche de page ou annuler la sélection. Les images d'aperçu des pages sélectionnées s'affichent en même temps que l'écran de réglage de rotation. ineo 223/283/363/423 7-73 7.8 Applications 7 2 En contrôlant l'image d'aperçu, sélectionnez l'angle de rotation. % Vous pouvez sélectionner un angle de rotation de 90 degrés à gauche, 90 degrés à droite ou 180 degrés. % Dans cet exemple, c'est [90° à gauche] qui est sélectionné. 3 Appuyez sur [Valider]. 4 Si vous êtes sûr de vouloir faire pivoter les pages sélectionnées, appuyez sur [Départ] ou sur la touche Départ du panneau de contrôle. % Dans cet exemple, les pages spécifiées (pages 1 et 2) ont fait l'objet d'une rotation. % Pour l'instant les données du document ne sont pas modifiées. 5 Vérifiez les informations affichées à l'écran. Pour pivoter les pages, sélectionnez [Enregistrer]. % Pour annuler le pivotement, appuyez sur [Ne pas enregistrer] pour revenir à l'écran Modifier Document. Les pages sélectionnées sont pivotées et le document est enregistré. 7 Applications 7-74 ineo 223/283/363/423 7.8 Modifier document - Déplacer Page Vous pouvez changer l'ordre des pages d'un document enregistré en déplaçant les pages spécifiées. 0 Il n'est pas possible de faire pivoter la page unique d'un document. 0 Il sera impossible de restaurer les pages car elles sont écrasées par l'opération de déplacement. Si vous pensez avoir besoin de la version non modifiée du document, faites-en préalablement une copie de sauvegarde. Pour plus de détails sur la copie d'un document, voir page 7-66. 0 Vous pouvez entrer directement le numéro de page correspondant à l'endroit où vous voulez déplacer la page sélectionnée. Ceci est utile lorsqu'un document se compose de plusieurs pages. Pour plus de détails, voir page 7-77. 1 Sélectionnez une page à déplacer et appuyez sur [Déplacer Page]. % Le déplacement ne peut s'appliquer qu'à une seule page à la fois. Pour déplacer deux pages ou plus, répétez les étapes ci-dessus pour chacune des pages que vous voulez déplacer. % L'exemple montre comment déplacer la page 6 et l'insérer entre les pages 2 et 3. L'écran de réglage de la destination s'affiche. 2 Sélectionnez la position de déplacement en vérifiant sur l'écran. % Pour déplacer la page sélectionnée au début du document, appuyez sur [Haut]. % Pour déplacer la page sélectionnée à la fin du document, appuyez sur [Dern Page]. % Pour déplacer la page sélectionnée et l'insérer entre deux pages, appuyez sur . 3 Appuyez sur [Valider]. ineo 223/283/363/423 7-75 7.8 Applications 7 4 Si vous êtes sûr de vouloir faire déplacer la page sélectionnée, appuyez sur [Départ] ou sur la touche Départ du panneau de contrôle. % Pour l'instant les données du document ne sont pas modifiées. 5 Vérifiez les informations affichées à l'écran. Pour déplacer la page, sélectionnez [Enregistrer]. % Pour annuler le déplacement, appuyez sur [Ne pas enregistrer] pour revenir à l'écran Modifier Document. La page sélectionnée est déplacée et le document est enregistré. 7 Applications 7-76 ineo 223/283/363/423 7.8 Aperçu/Déf. Plage Vous pouvez spécifier une étendue de pages et contrôler les images d'aperçu lorsque le document sélectionné comporte plusieurs pages. Vous pouvez aussi changer le format d'affichage. Élément Description [ Aperçu page] Permet un déplacement à la page précédente. [Page suiv. ] Appuyez sur cette touche un déplacement à la page suivante. [Zoom] Il est possible de visualiser l'image en taille réelle ou agrandie 2, 4 ou 8 fois. Après avoir changé de format d'affichage, utilisez les barres de défilement à droite et au bas de l'image pour visualiser la section voulue de l'image. [Régler Plage Pages] Spécifiez l'étendue des pages à vérifier. Entrez au clavier un numéro dans les champs respectifs [De:] et [A:]. Puis, appuyez sur [Afficher Page] pour afficher un aperçu de la page de début ou de fin spécifiée. Pour définir les champs [De:] ou [A:] concernant la page en cours d'aperçu, sélectionnez la touche et appuyez sur [Adapter Affichage]. ineo 223/283/363/423 7-77 7.8 Applications 7 Aperçu/Spécification par saisie Cet élément s'affiche lorsque [Déplacer Page] est sélectionné. Lorsque trop de pages sont enregistrées, spécifiez la page de destination en entrant le numéro de page. Voici la procédure permettant de spécifier la destination de l'opération de déplacement. 1 Dans l'écran Déplacer Page, appuyez sur [Aperçu]. L'écran Aperçu/Spécifier par saisie s'affiche. 2 Affiche la page précédente ou la page suivante de la destination. % Appuyez sur [ Aperçu Page] ou [Page suiv. ] ou entrez le numéro de page au clavier et appuyez sur [Voir]. % Vous pouvez utiliser [Zoom] pour afficher les pages sélectionnées à la taille réelle ou agrandies 2, 4 ou 8 fois. Après avoir changé de format d'affichage, utilisez les barres de défilement à droite et au bas de l'image pour visualiser la section voulue de l'image. 7 Applications 7-78 ineo 223/283/363/423 7.8 3 Spécifiez la position d'insertion. % Pour déplacer la page avant la page affichée, appuyez sur [Avant]. % Pour déplacer la page après la page affichée, appuyez sur [Après]. 4 Appuyez sur [Valider]. 7.8.3 Enregistrer la surimpression Permet d'enregistrer comme image de surimpression un document conservé dans une boîte. Vous pouvez superposer à un document l'image sélectionnée au moyen de [Tampon/Surimpression] dans l'onglet Impression. Cette fonction est utile lorsque vous désirez imprimer les images (comme les logos d'une société ou d'un produit) qui ne sont pas proposées par cette machine (les éléments proposés par cette machine sont les tampons et numéros de page). Référence - Vous pouvez enregistrer jusqu'à 100 images de surimpression. - Si vous sélectionnez un document de plusieurs pages, c'est la première page qui est enregistrée comme image de surimpression. ineo 223/283/363/423 7-79 7.8 Applications 7 Enregistrer la surimpression - Nouveau Permet d'enregistrer une nouvelle image de surimpression. 1 Sélectionnez un document et appuyez sur [Enregistrer la surimpression]. 2 Appuyez sur une touche image non enregistrée et appuyez sur [Nouveau]. 3 Entrez le nom de l'image de surimpression à enregistrer et appuyez sur [Valider]. % Le nombre maximum de caractères est de 16. 4 Appuyez sur [Départ]. 7 Applications 7-80 ineo 223/283/363/423 7.8 Enregistrer la surimpression - Écraser Vous pouvez écraser l'image de surimpression enregistrée par une nouvelle. 1 Sélectionnez un document et appuyez sur [Enregistrer la surimpression]. 2 Appuyez sur la touche de l'image à écraser et appuyez sur [Ecraser]. 3 Vérifiez le message qui s'affiche, sélectionnez [Ecraser]. 4 Appuyez sur [Départ]. L'image de surimpression est écrasée. ineo 223/283/363/423 7-81 7.8 Applications 7 Paramètres Détaillés Permet de configurer la densité de l'image de surimpression, nouvellement créée ou de remplacement. % Sélectionnez la touche de l'image de surimpression cible et appuyez sur [Paramètres Détaillés]. Après avoir configuré les réglages, appuyez sur [Valider]. Élément Description [Contraste] Spécifiez la densité de l'image. Entrez au clavier une valeur de densité entre 20 et 100%. 7 Boîte Utilisateur Bulletin Bord (Système) 7-82 ineo 223/283/363/423 7.9 7.9 Boîte Utilisateur Bulletin Bord (Système) 7.9.1 Présentation des Boîtes Utilisateur Bulletin Bord La boîte Bulletin permet d'enregistrer un document à parcourir. Un document enregistré dans la boîte Bulletin est envoyé par la fonction Émission en relève lorsqu'une invitation à émettre est envoyée par la machine distante. 7.9.2 Écran Bte Util. Bulletin Bord Sélectionnez la [Bte Util. Bulletin Bord] dans l'onglet [Système] pour afficher les boîtes Bulletin enregistrées. Sélectionnez la boîte Bulletin qui contient le document enregistré dans cette machine. 7.9.3 Impression d'un document dans une boîte Bulletin Il permet d'imprimer un document enregistré dans la Boîte Bulletin. Vérifiez l'aperçu ou les informations du document, appuyez sur [Départ] ou sur Départ sur le panneau de contrôle. 7.9.4 Suppression d'un document d'une boîte Bulletin Un seul document peut être enregistré dans une boîte Bulletin. Pour enregistrer un nouveau document dans la boîte Bulletin, supprimez le document qu'elle contient et envoyez un nouveau document dans la boîte Bulletin. Pour supprimer le document enregistré dans la boîte Bulletin, vérifiez sa source ou son heure d'enregistrement et appuyez sur [Supprimer]. ineo 223/283/363/423 7-83 7.10 Boîte Émis. en relève (Système) 7 7.10 Boîte Émis. en relève (Système) 7.10.1 Présentation boîtes Émission en relève La boîte Émission en relève sert à enregistrer un document à envoyer en réponse à une demande de la part d'un destinataire. Le processus d'envoi et d'enregistrement d'un document spécifique dans la boîte Émission Dépôt s'appelle Émission en relève. 7.10.2 Impression d'un document dans la boîte Émission en relève Vous pouvez imprimer un document enregistré dans la boîte Émission en relève. Vérifiez l'aperçu ou les informations du document, appuyez sur [Départ] ou sur Départ sur le panneau de contrôle. Référence - Vous pouvez enregistrer un document dans la boîte Émission en relève en tant qu'image de surimpression. Pour plus de détails sur l'enregistrement d'une image de surimpression, voir page 7-79. 7.10.3 Suppression d'un document dans la boîte Émission en relève Un seul document peut être enregistré dans la boîte Émission en relève. Pour enregistrer un nouveau document dans la boîte Émission en relève, supprimez le document existant et procédez à l'émission en relève, du nouveau document. Pour supprimer le document enregistré dans la boîte Émission en relève, vérifiez sa source ou son heure d'enregistrement et appuyez sur [Supprimer]. dPour info Pour plus de détails sur la procédure d'émission en relève, voir le [Guide de l'utilisateur Opérations Scanner réseau/Fax/Fax Réseau]. 7 Boîte Utilisateur Document Sécurisé (Système) 7-84 ineo 223/283/363/423 7.11 7.11 Boîte Utilisateur Document Sécurisé (Système) 7.11.1 Présentation de la boîte Document sécurisé La boîte Document Sécurisé permet d'enregistrer un document qui a été imprimé avec spécification de l'ID et du code d'accès. Pour imprimer un document, il faut enter l'ID et le code d'accès. La procédure d'authentification varie selon le réglage Fonctions interdites si échec d'authentification dans Réglages Administrateur - [Paramètres Sécurité] - [Détails Sécurité]. Pour plus de détails, contactez l'Administrateur de cette machine. Référence - Cette fonction n'est disponible que si un Disque dur est installé. dPour info Pour plus de détails sur l'enregistrement d'un document sécurisé, voir le [Guide de l'utilisateur Opérations Impression]. 7.11.2 Procédure d'authentification 1 La procédure ci-dessous est à appliquer lorsque Fonctions interdites si échec d'authentification est réglé sur [Mode 1] dans [Paramètres Sécurité] - [Détails Sécurité] de Réglages Administrateur. 7.11.3 Procédure d'authentification 2 La procédure ci-dessous est à appliquer lorsque Fonctions interdites si échec d'authentification est réglé sur [Mode 2] dans [Paramètres Sécurité] - [Détails Sécurité] de Réglages Administrateur. Référence - En cas de sélection de [Mode 2], entrez le code d'accès pour chaque document même si l'ID est identique. C'est parce que vous devez d'abord sélectionner le document avant de saisir le code d'accès. C'est pour cette raison que le niveau de sécurité dans ce mode est plus élevé qu'en mode 1. Appuyez sur [Doc. Sécurisé Boîte Utilis.] Entrez l'ID du document sécurisé Entrez le code d'accès du document sécurisé Une liste de documents apparaît Sélectionnez le document à imprimer et procédez aux réglages d'impression Appuyez sur [Doc. Sécurisé Boîte Utilis.] Entrez l'ID du document sécurisé Une liste de documents apparaît Sélectionnez le document à imprimer et entrez le code d'accès du document sécurisé ineo 223/283/363/423 7-85 7.11 Boîte Utilisateur Document Sécurisé (Système) 7 7.11.4 Impression - Impression Vous pouvez ajouter certaines fonctions à un document enregistré dans la boîte Document sécurisé lors de l'impression du document. Copies Utilisez le pavé numérique pour saisir le nombre de copies. Vous pouvez spécifier un nombre compris entre 1 et 9999. Impression Sélectionnez Recto ou Recto-Verso. Finition Pour la procédure de configuration, voir page 7-11. Combinaison Pour la procédure de configuration, voir page 7-14. Zoom Pour la procédure de configuration, voir page 7-14. Marge de page Pour la procédure de configuration, voir page 7-16. Insertion Feuille/Couverture/Chapitre Pour la procédure de configuration, voir page 7-17. Tampon/Surimpression Pour la procédure de configuration, voir page 7-21. 7 Boîte Utilisateur Document Sécurisé (Système) 7-86 ineo 223/283/363/423 7.11 7.11.5 Réglages Archivage Permet de gérer un document enregistré dans la Boîte Utilisateur Document Sécurisé. Référence - Pour supprimer en une seule fois tous les documents dans la boîte Document sécurisé, sélectionnez [Réglages Boîte] - [Suppr. Docs Impr. Sécurisée] dans Réglages Administrateur. Pour plus de détails, voir page 8-21. Les éléments de réglage disponibles sont les suivants. Élément Description [Supprimer] Supprime un document devenu inutile, comme un document déjà imprimé. [Modif. nom] Permet de renommer un document enregistré. [Détails Document] Permet de vérifier la date et l'heure où un document a été enregistré ainsi que de contrôler l'image d'aperçu. ineo 223/283/363/423 7-87 7.12 Boîte Réception Mémoire Oblig. (Système) 7 7.12 Boîte Réception Mémoire Oblig. (Système) 7.12.1 Présentation de la Boîte Réception Mémoire Oblig. La boîte Réception Mémoire Oblig. permet d'enregistrer dans la mémoire un document reçu et de l'imprimer selon les besoins. Lorsque la Réception Mémoire obligatoire est activée, un document reçu est automatiquement enregistré dans la boîte Réception Mémoire Oblig. Pour vérifier un document enregistré dans la boîte Réception Mémoire Oblig., sélectionnez [Réception Mémoire Obligat. Boîte Utilis.] dans l'onglet [Système], puis entrez le code d'accès qui a été spécifié lorsque la réception Mémoire obligatoire a été activée. dPour info Pour plus de détails sur la spécification du code d'accès pour la Réception Mémoire obligatoire, voir le [Guide de l'utilisateur Opérations Scanner réseau/Fax/Fax Réseau]. 7.12.2 Impression Sélectionnez un document à imprimer et appuyez sur [Impression]. Une fois que le document spécifié a été imprimé, les données sont automatiquement supprimées. 7 Boîte Réception Mémoire Oblig. (Système) 7-88 ineo 223/283/363/423 7.12 7.12.3 Réglages Archivage Il est possible de gérer un document enregistré dans la boîte Réception Mémoire Oblig. Les éléments de réglage disponibles sont les suivants. Élément Description [Supprimer] Permet de supprimer un document qui n'a pas besoin d'être imprimé. [Modif. nom] Permet de renommer un document enregistré. [Détails Document] Permet de vérifier la date et l'heure où un document a été enregistré ainsi que de contrôler l'image d'aperçu. ineo 223/283/363/423 7-89 7.13 Boîte Annotation (Système) 7 7.13 Boîte Annotation (Système) 7.13.1 Présentation des fonctions Boîte Annotation Les boîtes Annotation servent à attribuer automatiquement un numéro aux documents enregistrés et à ajouter ce numéro lors de l'impression ou de l'envoi d'un document. Vous pouvez pré-enregistrer le numéro à attribuer lors de la création de la boîte et le changer lors de l'impression ou de l'envoi d'un document. Pour les fonctions que vous pouvez configurer lors de l'impression ou de l'envoi de documents, voir page 7-10 et les sections qui suivent. Sélectionnez [Boîte Annotation] dans l'onglet [Système] et appuyez sur [Utilis/Archiv]. Les boîtes Annotation enregistrées s'affichent. Référence - Cette fonction n'est disponible que si un Disque dur est installé. - Pour enregistrer la boîte Annotation, procédez depuis Réglages Administrateur. Pour plus de détails, voir page 8-18. - En ce qui concerne les types de numéros qui peuvent être imprimés dans les boîtes Annotation, voir page 7-92. - Pour imprimer les numéros spécifiés dans la boîte Annotation sans enregistrer un document dans la boîte, réglez le Délai suppression auto document sur [Rejeter]. Cette fonction est utile pour gérer les numéros qui sont ajoutés aux documents copiés. Spécifiez le Délai suppression auto document lorsque vous créez une boîte Annotation. Pour plus de détails, voir page 8-18. Si vous ouvrez une boîte, vous pouvez configurer les réglages d'impression et d'émission. 7.13.2 Impression - Fonction de base Pour la procédure de configuration, voir page 7-10. 7.13.3 Impression - Marge page Pour la procédure de configuration, voir page 7-16. 7 Boîte Annotation (Système) 7-90 ineo 223/283/363/423 7.13 7.13.4 Impression - Insér. Feuil/Couv/Chapitre - Couverture Pour la procédure de configuration, voir page 7-18. 7.13.5 Impression - Insér. Feuil/Couv/Chapitre - Insertion Feuille Pour la procédure de configuration, voir page 7-19. 7.13.6 Impression - Insér. Feuil/Couv/Chapitre - Chapitres Pour la procédure de configuration, voir page 7-20. 7.13.7 Impression - Tampon/Surimpression - Date/Heure Pour la procédure de configuration, voir page 7-21. 7.13.8 Impression - Tampon/Surimpression - Numéro Page Pour la procédure de configuration, voir page 7-22. 7.13.9 Impression - Tampon/Surimpression - Tampon Pour la procédure de configuration, voir page 7-23. 7.13.10 Préférences d'impression - Tampon/Composition - Sécurité Copie - Protection Copie Pour la procédure de configuration, voir page 7-24. 7.13.11 Préférences d'impression - Tampon/Composition - Sécurité Copie - Parecopie Pour la procédure de configuration, voir page 7-26. 7.13.12 Impression - Tampon/Composition - Sécurité Copie - Copie Prot. MdP Pour la procédure de configuration, voir page 7-27. 7.13.13 Impression - Tampon/Surimpression - Tampon répétitif Pour la procédure de configuration, voir page 7-28. 7.13.14 Impression - Tampon/Surimpression - Surimpression enregistrée Pour la procédure de configuration, voir page 7-32. 7.13.15 Description de l'onglet Env. Pour la procédure de configuration, voir page 7-34. 7.13.16 Env. - Saisie dir. - E-mail Pour la procédure de configuration, voir page 7-41. 7.13.17 Env. - Saisie dir. - PC (SMB) Pour la procédure de configuration, voir page 7-43. ineo 223/283/363/423 7-91 7.13 Boîte Annotation (Système) 7 7.13.18 Env. - Saisie dir. - FTP Pour la procédure de configuration, voir page 7-44. 7.13.19 Env. - Saisie dir. - WebDAV Pour la procédure de configuration, voir page 7-45. 7.13.20 Env. - Vérif. histor Pour la procédure de configuration, voir page 7-46. 7.13.21 Env. - Recherche LDAP - Recher simple Pour la procédure de configuration, voir page 7-47. 7.13.22 Env. - Recherche LDAP - Recherche Avancée Pour la procédure de configuration, voir page 7-47. 7.13.23 Env. - Réglages Document - Définition Pour la procédure de configuration, voir page 7-48. 7.13.24 Env. - Réglages Document - Type Fichier Pour la procédure de configuration, voir page 7-49. 7.13.25 Env. - Réglages Document - Couleur Pour la procédure de configuration, voir page 7-53. 7.13.26 Env. - Réglages de communication - Réglages E-Mail Pour la procédure de configuration, voir page 7-56. 7.13.27 Env. - Réglages de communication - Paramètres URL Dest. Pour la procédure de configuration, voir page 7-58. 7.13.28 Env. - Réglages de communication - Cryptage E-Mail Pour la procédure de configuration, voir page 7-61. 7.13.29 Env. - Réglages de communication - Signature numérique Pour la procédure de configuration, voir page 7-61. 7.13.30 Env. - Applications - Tampon/Surimpression - Date/Heure Pour la procédure de configuration, voir page 7-62. 7.13.31 Env. - Applications - Tampon/Surimpression - Numéro Page Pour la procédure de configuration, voir page 7-62. 7 Boîte Annotation (Système) 7-92 ineo 223/283/363/423 7.13 7.13.32 Env. - Applications - Tampon/Surimpression - Tampon Pour la procédure de configuration, voir page 7-62. 7.13.33 Env. - Applications - Impress. par page Pour la procédure de configuration, voir page 7-63. 7.13.34 Env. - Applications - Changer Texte Texte numérotat. Permet d'ajouter du texte au numéro à imprimer. Vous pouvez entrer jusqu'à 20 caractères. Date/Heure Sélectionnez le format de l'heure et de la date à imprimer. ineo 223/283/363/423 7-93 7.13 Boîte Annotation (Système) 7 Densité Sélectionnez le contraste des numéros d'annotation à imprimer. Type Numéro Sélectionnez le format de sortie (nombre de chiffres) des numéros d'annotation à imprimer. Position Impression Sélectionnez la position d'impression. 7 Boîte Annotation (Système) 7-94 ineo 223/283/363/423 7.13 7.13.35 Réglages Archivage Il est possible de gérer un document enregistré dans une boîte Annotation. Les éléments de réglage disponibles sont les suivants. 7.13.36 Applications - Enregistrer la surimpression Pour la procédure de configuration, voir page 7-78. Élément Description [Supprimer] Supprime un document devenu inutile, comme un document déjà imprimé. [Modif. nom] Permet de renommer un document enregistré. [Détails Document] Permet de vérifier la date et l'heure où un document a été enregistré ainsi que de contrôler l'image d'aperçu. ineo 223/283/363/423 7-95 7.14 Boîte Ré-émission Fax (Système) 7 7.14 Boîte Ré-émission Fax (Système) 7.14.1 Présentation de la Boîte Ré-émission Fax La boîte Retransmission Fax sert à enregistrer pour une durée prédéterminée, un document, qui n'a pu être envoyé, à l'issue du nombre de rappels spécifié dans Réglage Paramètre Ligne, parce que la machine distante était occupée. Cette boîte utilisateur vous permet de transférer ultérieurement un document enregistré ou de l'imprimer pour confirmation. Sélectionnez [Boîte Retransmission Fax] dans l'onglet [Système] et appuyez sur [Utilis/Archiv]. La liste des documents enregistrés s'affichent. Référence - Avant qu'un document ne puisse être enregistré dans la boîte Retransmission Fax, il faut activer la boîte Retransmission Fax dans [Réglage fax] dans Réglages Administrateur. Pour plus de détails sur ces réglages, voir le [Guide de l'utilisateur Opérations Scanner réseau/Fax/Fax Réseau]. 7.14.2 Impression - Épreuve Avant de retransmettre un document enregistré, vous pouvez l'imprimer pour confirmation. Les données ne sont pas supprimées après avoir été imprimées. Sélectionnez un document à imprimer et appuyez sur [Épreuve]. Vérifiez les informations du document et appuyez sur [Départ]. 7 Boîte Ré-émission Fax (Système) 7-96 ineo 223/283/363/423 7.14 7.14.3 Env. - Fax Permet de retransmettre un document enregistré. Sélectionnez un document, sélectionnez l'onglet [Env.] et appuyez sur [Fax]. Référence - Vous pouvez spécifier une nouvelle destination lors de la retransmission d'un document. Vous pouvez spécifier la nouvelle destination dans Carnet d'adresses, Saisie dir. ou Historique tâches. - Vous pouvez configurer les Réglages Transmission lorsque vous retransmettez un document enregistré. Vous pouvez aussi configurer les réglages Ligne et les réglages En-tête Fax. Pour plus de détails, voir page 7-54 et page 7-61. - Une fois que le document spécifié a été entièrement envoyé, les données sont automatiquement supprimées. 7.14.4 Réglages Archivage - Supprimer Arrête la retransmission et supprime le document voulu. Sélectionnez un document, sélectionnez l'onglet [Réglages Archivage] et appuyez sur [Supprimer]. ineo 223/283/363/423 7-97 7.15 Boîte PDF Cryptés Mot de Passe (Système) 7 7.15 Boîte PDF Cryptés Mot de Passe (Système) 7.15.1 Présentation de la Boîte PDF Crypté Mot de Passe Si vous utilisez Web Connection ou Impression Directe pour imprimer un fichier PDF enregistré avec un mot de passe spécifié ou si vous imprimez des données PDF cryptées enregistrées dans la mémoire externe, les données sont automatiquement conservées dans la boîte PDF Crypté Mot de Passe. Sélectionnez [PDF Cryptés Mot de Passe Boîte Utilis.] dans l'onglet [Système] et appuyez sur [Utilis/Archiv]. La liste des documents enregistrés s'affichent. Référence - Cette fonction n'est disponible que si un Disque dur est installé. - Lorsque l'Authentification utilisateur est activée sur cette machine, seules s'affichent les données PDF cryptées avec mot de passe qui ont été enregistrées par l'utilisateur connecté. 7.15.2 Impr/Enreg - Impr/Enreg Sélectionnez un document à imprimer ou enregistrer et appuyez sur [Impr/Enreg]. Lors de l'impression ou de l'enregistrement d'un document, entrez le mot de passe attribué au fichier PDF. Une fois l'impression ou l'enregistrement terminé, les documents de la Boîte PDF Crypté Mot de Passe sont automatiquement supprimés. Référence - La commande d'impression émise par votre ordinateur spécifie s'il faut imprimer ou enregistrer. Vous ne pouvez pas modifier une commande d'impression en commande d'enregistrement ou inversement. 7.15.3 Réglages Archivage - Supprimer Vous pouvez supprimer un document enregistré si vous n'avez plus besoin de l'imprimer. Sélectionnez un document à supprimer et appuyez sur [Supprimer]. 7 Boîte Utilis. ID & Imprimer (Système) 7-98 ineo 223/283/363/423 7.16 7.16 Boîte Utilis. ID & Imprimer (Système) 7.16.1 Présentation de la Boîte ID & Imprimer Voir documents Cet élément apparaît quand les réglages Authentification utilisateur sont configurés. Un document enregistré dans cette boîte peut être imprimé par l'utilisateur du document lorsque l'utilisateur est connecté à cette machine. Lorsque vous imprimez sur cette machine un document depuis un ordinateur via le réseau en entrant le nom d'utilisateur et le mot de passe, le document est temporairement enregistré dans la boîte ID & Imprimer. % Sélectionnez [ID & Imprimer Boîte Utilis.] dans l'onglet [Système] et appuyez sur [Utilis/Archiv]. La liste des documents enregistrés s'affichent. Référence - Cette fonction n'est disponible que si un Disque dur est installé. - Lorsque des documents enregistrés sont présents dans la boîte ID & Imprimer, les touches suivantes s'affichent dans l'écran de connexion. Entrez le nom d'utilisateur et le mot de passe et appuyez sur la touche désirée. – [Lancer Impression] : appuyez sur cette touche pour imprimer les documents enregistrés dans la boîte ID & Imprimer sans se connecter à cette machine. – [Impress. & Connexion] : appuyez sur cette touche pour vous connecter à cette machine et imprimer les documents enregistrés dans la boîte ID & Imprimer. – [Connexion] : appuyez sur cette touche pour vous connecter à cette machine mais sans imprimer les documents. Une fois connecté, vous pouvez imprimer ou supprimer des documents enregistrés dans la boîte ID & Imprimer. - Les documents peuvent être enregistrés dans la boîte ID & Imprimer même lorsque l'Authentification utilisateur n'est pas activée. De plus, les travaux enregistrés par des utilisateur Publics peuvent être enregistrés dans la boîte ID & Imprimer. Pour plus de détails, voir page 8-26. - Une fois l'impression des documents terminée, les données de la boîte ID & Imprimer sont automatiquement supprimées. Un écran permettant de confirmer si vous voulez vraiment supprimer les données apparaît en fonction de la configuration des Réglages Administrateur. dPour info Pour plus de détails sur l'impression d'un document depuis un ordinateur dans la boîte ID & Imprimer, voir le [Guide de l'utilisateur Opérations Impression]. ineo 223/283/363/423 7-99 7.16 Boîte Utilis. ID & Imprimer (Système) 7 7.16.2 Impression - Impression 1 Sélectionnez un document à imprimer et appuyez sur [Impression]. 2 Sélectionnez si le document doit être supprimé après impression. 7.16.3 Réglages Archivage - Supprimer Sélectionnez un document à supprimer et appuyez sur [Supprimer]. 7 Mémoire externe (Système) 7-100 ineo 223/283/363/423 7.17 7.17 Mémoire externe (Système) 7.17.1 Dispositif de mémoire externe Référence - La fonction "Enregistrer un document de la mémoire externe vers une Boîte" et la fonction d'impression de document PDF crypté ne sont disponibles que si un Disque dur est installé. Dispositifs de mémoire externe pris en charge Les critères relatifs aux dispositifs de mémoire externe pour cette machine sont les suivants. - Dispositif Mémoire Flash USB compatible avec l'interface USB (1.1/2.0) - Dispositif Mémoire formatée FAT32 Connexion du dispositif de mémoire externe 0 Utilisez le connecteur USB situé du côté le plus proche du panneau de contrôle. N'utilisez pas le connecteur USB situé près du côté arrière car il sert pour les périphériques en option. 0 Ne pas déconnecter le dispositif de mémoire externe pendant l'enregistrement d'un document dans la mémoire externe ou pendant l'impression d'un document enregistré dans la mémoire externe. 0 N'utilisez pas de dispositif USB autre que la mémoire Flash USB (comme un disque dur ou hub USB). 0 Ne pas connecter ni déconnecter la mémoire USB tant que le sablier est visible sur le panneau de contrôle pendant que la machine est active. 0 Ne pas déconnecter la mémoire USB juste après l'avoir connectée. % Raccordez le dispositif de mémoire externe au connecteur USB sur le côté latéral de la machine. Lorsque le dispositif de mémoire externe est raccordé, une icône apparaît en bas de l'écran et l'écran suivant s'affiche. Si vous voulez immédiatement utiliser la mémoire externe, sélectionnez le but prévu. Si vous n'utilisez pas la mémoire externe, sélectionnez [Fermer]. Référence - L'objet prévu de la mémoire externe à afficher varie en fonction des réglages de l'administrateur. ineo 223/283/363/423 7-101 7.17 Mémoire externe (Système) 7 7.17.2 Écran Mémoire externe Lorsque le dispositif de mémoire externe est connecté, sélectionnez [Mémoire externe] pour afficher la structure des dossiers. Entrer un chemin de fichier Sur l'écran tactile, vous pouvez spécifier le chemin de fichier pointant vers le dossier contenant le document à imprimer. Appuyez sur [Chemin Fichier] et entrez le chemin de fichier. Référence - Assurez-vous que la longueur totale du chemin de fichier et du nom de fichier n'excède pas 250 caractères. Si le nombre de caractères dépasse cette limite, le fichier ne s'affiche pas. Sélectionner un fichier Vous pouvez imprimer les types de fichier suivants : PDF, JPEG, TIFF et XPS. Sélectionnez la liste un document de l'un de ces types. Référence - L'impression recto-verso, la perforation ou l'agrafage ne sont pas compatibles avec les fichiers JPEG et XPS. - L'impression n'est pas possible quand l'impression est interdite par les paramètres de sécurité d'un fichier PDF. - Cette machine prend en charge l'impression de fichiers PDF de Version 1.6 ou antérieure. - Seuls les fichiers d'un type autorisant l'impression s'affichent dans la liste. - L'accès au fichier échoue lorsque la longueur totale du chemin de fichier et du nom de fichier dépasse 250 caractères. - Au maximum, 200 fichiers imprimables peuvent être affichés dans le dossier du chemin de fichier spécifié. Si le dossier contient 200 fichiers ou plus, l'affichage de l'écran de la liste des fichiers risque de prendre plus de temps. - Si aucun Disque dur n'est installé, l'impression d'un fichier volumineux risque d'être impossible. Dans ce cas, il est recommandé d'installer un Disque dur. Imprimer des données PDF cryptées Pour imprimer les données PDF cryptées enregistrées dans le dispositif de mémoire externe, sélectionnez les données sur l'écran Mémoire externe et imprimez les données. Lorsque la commande d'impression est émise, les données PDF cryptées de la mémoire externe sont enregistrées dans la boîte PDF Crypté Mot de Passe de cette machine. Accédez à la boîte PDF Crypté Mot de passe de cette machine et imprimez le document. dPour info Pour la boîte PDF Crypté Mot de Passe, voir page 7-97. Déplacement vers le dossier parent Pour déplacer un fichier vers le dossier parent, appuyez sur [Haut]. 7 Mémoire externe (Système) 7-102 ineo 223/283/363/423 7.17 Ouvrir un dossier Pour vérifier le contenu d'un dossier spécifique, appuyez sur [Ouvrir]. Imprimer Sélectionnez un document à imprimer et appuyez sur [Impression]. L'écran Détails Impression s'affiche. Détails Document Vous pouvez vérifier la date de modification, le nom de fichier et autres propriétés du document sélectionné. 7.17.3 Impression - Fonction de base Appuyez sur [Impression] pour afficher l'écran suivant. Copies Utilisez le pavé numérique pour saisir le nombre de copies. Vous pouvez spécifier un nombre compris entre 1 et 9999. Impression Sélectionnez Recto ou Recto-Verso. Position Reliure Si vous sélectionner Recto-Verso dans [Impression], sélectionnez la position de reliure. ineo 223/283/363/423 7-103 7.17 Mémoire externe (Système) 7 Finition Pour la procédure de configuration, voir page 7-11. Référence - L'impression recto-verso, la perforation ou l'agrafage ne sont pas compatibles avec les fichiers JPEG et XPS. Papier Sélectionnez un magasin destiné au papier d'impression. 7.17.4 Impression - Applications Tampon/Surimpression - Date/Heure Pour la procédure de configuration, voir page 7-21. Tampon/Surimpression - Numéro Page Pour la procédure de configuration, voir page 7-22. Tampon/Surimpression - Tampon Pour la procédure de configuration, voir page 7-23. Tampon/Composition - Sécurité Copie - Protection Copie Pour la procédure de configuration, voir page 7-24. Tampon/Composition - Sécurité Copie - Pare-copie Pour la procédure de configuration, voir page 7-26. Tampon/Composition - Sécurité Copie - Copie Prot. MdP Pour la procédure de configuration, voir page 7-27. Tampon/Surimpression - Tampon répétitif Pour la procédure de configuration, voir page 7-28. 7 Mémoire externe (Système) 7-104 ineo 223/283/363/423 7.17 7.17.5 Réglages Fichier - Enreg. dans Boîte utilisateur Cette fonction permet d'enregistrer dans une Boîte utilisateur un document archivé dans la mémoire externe. Spécifiez la Boîte Utilisateur et le nom du document et appuyez sur [Départ] ou sur Départ sur le panneau de contrôle. Élément Description [Boîte Utilis.] Sélectionnez la boîte Public, Privé ou Groupe pour y enregistrer des données. [Nom Document] Spécifiez le nom du document à enregistrer. • Si vous sélectionnez plusieurs fichiers, il n'est pas possible de spécifier le nom du document. ineo 223/283/363/423 7-105 7.18 Mobile/PDA (Système) 7 7.18 Mobile/PDA (Système) Cette fonction vous permet d'imprimer un document archivé dans un téléphone cellulaire ou un agenda électronique via une communication Bluetooth ou d'enregistrer ce même document dans une Boîte utilisateur. Référence - La fonction [Enreg. dans Boîte utilisateur] n'est disponible que si un Disque dur est installé. 7.18.1 Environnement d'exploitation Les téléphones cellulaires et les agendas électroniques connectables sur cette machine et le fichier imprimable doivent remplir les conditions suivantes. Référence - Pour imprimer des documents à partir d'un téléphone cellulaire ou d'un agenda électronique, il vous fait le Kit d'interface local EK-605. De même qu'il faut activer les réglages pour une communication Bluetooth. Contactez votre S.A.V au préalable. - Si vous ne pouvez pas accéder au fichier de lien en cas de tentative d'impression d'un fichier XHTML, soit le document ne sera pas imprimé soit il sera imprimé dans un cadre noir en fonction du réglage dans [Régl.Utilisateur] − [Réglage Mobile/PDA] − [Notif. Erreur Lien Fichier]. - Pour accéder au fichier de lien pour imprimer un fichier XHTML, les [Réglages WebDAV] de cette machine sont requis. - Pour utiliser un proxy pour la connexion, enregistrez un serveur proxy dans [Réglages Administrateur] - [Paramètres réseau] - [Réglages WebDAV] - [Réglages Client WebDAV] - [Adresse d'hôte] et réglez [Régl.Utilisateur] - [Réglage Mobile/PDA] - [Utilisation Serveur Proxy] sur [Activé]. - La vitesse de communication risque de chuter ou la communication risque d'être coupée en raison d'obstacles, d'un champ magnétique ou de l'électricité statique. - Les documents protégés et les données d'image risquent de ne pas être envoyés en fonction du réglage de sécurité du téléphone cellulaire ou de l'agenda électronique. Protocole de communication Bluetooth Ver. 2.0 + EDR Profil de support OPP/BPP/SPP/BIP/HCRP Type de fichier de support PDF/CPDF/XPS/CXPS/TIFF/JPEG/XHTML/RepliGo • Pour les types XHTML de fichier, la machine prend en charge le code de caractère d'UTF-8/Shift-JIS/ISO-8859 ainsi que les extensions de fichier de JPEG/ JPG/PNG. • Cette machine est compatible avec RepliGo version 2.1.0.8. 7 Mobile/PDA (Système) 7-106 ineo 223/283/363/423 7.18 7.18.2 Mobile/PDA - Imprimer Référence - Pour enregistrer dans une Boîte un fichier archivé dans un téléphone cellulaire ou un agenda électronique ou pour imprimer ce fichier, configurez à l'avance le réglage approprié dans Réglages Administrateur. Pour plus de détails, voir page 8-26. Pour utiliser une communication Bluetooth, le paramètre Bluetooth doit être activé sur cette machine. Pour plus de détails, voir le [Guide de l'utilisateur Administrateur Réseau]. - Si l'authentification utilisateur est spécifiée sur cette machine, même un utilisateur enregistré ne peut imprimer de document à moins que l'impression depuis un téléphone cellulaire ou un agenda électronique ne soit autorisée dans le réglage de la machine. Pour les questions relatives à l'authentification utilisateur, contactez l'administrateur de cette machine. Saisie du code PIN Si vous entrez un code PIN à 4 chiffres depuis un téléphone cellulaire ou un agenda électronique, une connexion est établie et les données sont envoyées à cette machine pour l'impression. Référence - Recherchez le code PIN dans le manuel d'instructions ou les instructions de réglage du téléphone cellulaire ou de l'agenda électronique. Vérifier les préférences d'impression Vous pouvez vérifier un aperçu des réglages pour imprimer les données reçues. dPour info Pour configurer les paramètres d'impression, sélectionnez [Réglage Mobile/PDA] dans le menu Utilitaires. Pour plus de détails, voir page 8-13. ineo 223/283/363/423 7-107 7.18 Mobile/PDA (Système) 7 7.18.3 Mobile/PDA - Enregistrer Saisie du code PIN Si vous entrez un code PIN à 4 chiffres depuis un téléphone cellulaire ou un agenda électronique, une connexion est établie et les données sont envoyées à cette machine pour l'enregistrement dans une Boîte utilisateur. Référence - Recherchez le code PIN dans le manuel d'instructions ou les instructions de réglage du téléphone cellulaire ou de l'agenda électronique. 7 Boîte Document sécurisé (Système) 7-108 ineo 223/283/363/423 7.19 7.19 Boîte Document sécurisé (Système) 7.19.1 Présentation de la boîte Document sécurisé La boîte Document sécurisé permet d'enregistrer un document qui a été reçu d'une machine par réception confidentielle et de l'imprimer selon les besoins. Sélectionnez [Boîte Document sécurisé] dans l'onglet [Système], et appuyez sur [Utilis/Archiv]. Les boîtes Document sécurisé enregistrées s'affichent. Référence - Cette fonction n'est pas disponible si un Disque dur est installé. - Si un Disque dur est installé, la réception confidentielle peut être activée lorsque la fonction Réception confidentielle est assignée à une boîte Public/Privé/Groupe. Pour plus de détails, voir page 8-6. - Pour enregistrer la boîte Document sécurisé, procédez depuis les Réglages Administrateur. Pour plus de détails, voir page 8-20. 7.19.2 Impression Sélectionnez un document à imprimer et appuyez sur Impression. ineo 223/283/363/423 7-109 7.19 Boîte Document sécurisé (Système) 7 7.19.3 Réglages Archivage Il est possible de gérer un document enregistré dans une boîte Document sécurisé. Les éléments de réglage disponibles sont les suivants. Élément Description [Supprimer] Permet de supprimer un document qui n'a pas besoin d'être imprimé. [Modif. nom] Permet de renommer un document enregistré. [Détails Document] Permet de vérifier la date et l'heure où un document a été enregistré ainsi que de contrôler l'image d'aperçu. 7 Boîte Document sécurisé (Système) 7-110 ineo 223/283/363/423 7.19 8 Réglages Boîte ineo 223/283/363/423 8-3 8.1 Structure des menus Réglages Boîte 8 8 Réglages Boîte 8.1 Structure des menus Réglages Boîte Voici les menus et éléments permettant de configurer les réglages Boîte dans le menu Utilitaires. 8.1.1 Mode Utilisateur Premier niveau Deuxième niveau Troisième niveau Quatrième niveau 1 [Enregistrement 1-Touche/Boîte] 2 [Créer Boîte utilisateur] (p. 8-6) 1 [Bte Util. Public/Privé]*1 (p. 8-6) [Nouveau] [Editer] [Supprimer] 2 [Bte Util. Bulletin Bord] (p. 8-8) [Nouveau] [Editer] [Supprimer] 3 [Boîte Relais] (p. 8-9) [Nouveau] [Editer] [Supprimer] 2 [Régl.Utilisateur] 2 [Param. Affichage Perso] 3 [Réglages Boîte] (p. 8-11) [Onglet par défaut]*2 [Touche Raccourci 1] [Touche Raccourci 2] [Réglage Mobile/PDA] [Notif. Erreur Lien Fichier] (p. 8-12) [Utilisation Serveur Proxy] (p. 8-13) [Impression] (p. 8-13) [Impression] [Papier] [Finition] [Marge page] [Tampon/ Surimpression] 8 Structure des menus Réglages Boîte 8-4 ineo 223/283/363/423 8.1 Référence - *1 La boîte Document sécurisé s'affiche lorsqu'un Kit Fax est installé et qu'aucun Disque dur n'est installé. - *2 Cet élément s'affiche seulement si un Disque dur est installé. 8.1.2 Réglage Administrateur Premier niveau Deuxième niveau Troisième niveau Quatrième niveau 1 [Réglage Système] 0 [Configurer la boîte] (p. 8-21) 1 [Supprimer bte util. inutilisée]*2 (p. 8-21) 2 [Suppr. documents d'impression sécurisée]*2 (p. 8-21) 3 [Délai suppress Impress. sécuris.]*2 (p. 8-22) 4 [Délai suppress PDF cryptés]*2 (p. 8-22) 5 [Délai Suppress. ID & Impr.]*2 (p. 8-23) 6 [Réglage attente doc.] (p. 8-23) 7 [Réglages Fonction Mémoire Externe] (p. 8-24) [Enregistrer document] [Imprimer Document] [Numérisation document Mémoire externe]*2 8 [Boîte Util. Autor./Interd.] (p. 8-24) 9 [Réglage supprimer ID & Imprimer après impression]*2 (p. 8-25) 0 [Réglage Délai suppression Document]* 2 (p. 8-25) ineo 223/283/363/423 8-5 8.1 Structure des menus Réglages Boîte 8 Référence - *1 La boîte Document sécurisé s'affiche lorsqu'un Kit Fax est installé et qu'aucun Disque dur n'est installé. - *2 Cet élément s'affiche seulement si un Disque dur est installé. - *3 Cet élément ne s'affiche pas si un Disque dur est installé. 3 [Enregistrement 1-Touche/Boîte] 2 [Créer Boîte utilisateur] (p. 8-17) 1 [Bte Util. Public/Privé]*1 (p. 8-6) [Nouveau] [Editer] [Supprimer] [Supprimer Boîte Vide] (p. 8-7) 2 [Bte Util. Bulletin Bord] (p. 8-8) [Nouveau] [Editer] [Supprimer] 3 [Boîte Relais] (p. 8-9) [Nouveau] [Editer] [Supprimer] 4 [Boîte Annotation]* 2 (p. 8-18) [Nouveau] [Editer] [Supprimer] 4 [Nombre Maximum Boîtes]*2 (p. 8-20) [Nombre Boîtes Max.] [Nombre Maximum Boîtes] 4 [Identification Utilisateur/ Suivi Compte] 2 [Système d'Authentification] 1 [Paramètres admin.] [Paramètres ID & Imprimer]*2 (p. 8-26) 9 [Connexion système] 5 [Réglage Mobile/PDA] (p. 8-26) 0 [Paramètres Sécurité] 2 [Réglage Boîte administrateur]*2 (p. 8-27) 4 [Détails Sécurité] [Impression sécurisée seulement]*2 (p. 8-28) 6 [Paramétrage DD]*2 1 [Vérification Capacité DD]*2 (p. 8-28) 2 [Écraser données Disque dur]*2 (p. 8-29) [Méthode écrasement] [Priorité cryptage] [Priorité écrasement] 3 [Écraser données] (p. 8-30) 4 [Mot de passe Accès DD]*2 (p. 8-31) 5 [Formater disque dur.]*2 (p. 8-32) 6 [Paramétrage cryptage DD]*2 (p. 8-33) 6 [Paramétrage SSD]*3 1 [Vérification Capacité SSD]*3 (p. 8-29) 2 [Écraser données] (p. 8-30) 3 [Formater SSD]*3 (p. 8-33) 8 [Réglages Tampon] 1 [Régl. Horodatage] (p. 8-34) [Impress.] [Envoi] Premier niveau Deuxième niveau Troisième niveau Quatrième niveau 8 Réglage Mode Utilisateur 8-6 ineo 223/283/363/423 8.2 8.2 Réglage Mode Utilisateur 8.2.1 Création d'une boîte Boîte Public, Privé ou Groupe Permet de créer une boîte Public, Privé ou Groupe. Vous pouvez configurer les éléments suivants lors de la création d'une boîte. Cette fonction n'est disponible que si un Disque dur est installé. Vous pouvez enregistrer une boîte Document sécurisé lorsqu'un Kit Fax est installé et qu'aucun Disque dur n'est installé. Pour plus de détails, voir page 8-10. Référence - Pour changer la configuration d'une boîte créée, sélectionnez la boîte concernée et appuyez sur [Modifier]. - Si [Modifier] est sélectionné, il n'est pas possible de changer le numéro de la boîte. - Pour supprimer une boîte créée, sélectionnez la boîte concernée et appuyez sur [Supprimer]. Page (1/2) Élément Description [N° Boîte] Affiche automatiquement un numéro qui n'a pas encore été attribué. Pour spécifier un numéro de boîte, appuyez sur [N° Boîte], puis entrez au clavier le numéro de boîte (entre 1 et 999999999). [Nom Boîte] Appuyez sur [Nom Boîte] et entrez le nom de la boîte sur le panneau de contrôle (maximum 20 caractères). Spécifier des numéros différents pour les boîtes utilisateur permet de créer des boîtes de même nom. [Code d'accès] Spécifiez un code d'accès pour limiter l'accès à la boîte. Appuyez sur [Code d'accès] et entrez le mot de passe sur le panneau de contrôle (8 caractères max.). [Index] Sélectionnez le type d'index. [Type] Sélectionnez [Public], [Privé] ou [Groupe] en fonction des réglages Authentification utilisateur ou Compte Département. Si vous avez sélectionné [Privé], spécifiez-en l'utilisateur titulaire. Pour sélectionner le titulaire, utilisez la page Changer titulaire. Si vous avez sélectionné [Groupe] indiquez le compte propriétaire. Pour sélectionner le compte propriétaire, utilisez la page Changer propriétaire. ineo 223/283/363/423 8-7 8.2 Réglage Mode Utilisateur 8 Page (2/2) Supprimer Boîte Vide (Réglages Administrateur) Recherche et supprime automatiquement une boîte vide si la boîte Public, Privé ou Groupe a été créée dans Réglages Administrateur. Appuyez sur [Supprimer Boîte Vide] dans l'écran Créer boîte. Cette fonction n'est disponible que si un Disque dur est installé. Élément Description [Délai suppression auto document] Spécifiez la période entre la date/l'heure d'enregistrement ou de prélèvement d'un document dans une Boîte utilisateur et la date/l'heure de suppression automatique. • Le Délai de suppression peut être spécifié non seulement en nombre de jours mais aussi en heures. Pour spécifier l'heure, entrez la valeur numérique, par pas de 1 minute et dans une plage de 5 minutes à 12 heures. • Pour ne pas supprimer les documents, sélectionnez [Enregistr.]. • La possibilité de cette opération est subordonnée aux Réglages Administrateur. [Récept confid.] Cet élément apparaît si le Kit Fax en option est installé. Sélectionnez s'il faut ajouter la fonction Réception confidentielle à une boîte utilisateur. Lors de l'attribution de la fonction Réception confidentielle, entrez le code d'accès de Réception confidentielle. • Pour confirmation, entrez une nouvelle fois le code d'accès de Réception confidentielle. 8 Réglage Mode Utilisateur 8-8 ineo 223/283/363/423 8.2 Boîte Bulletin Créer Boîte Bulletin. Vous pouvez créer jusqu'à 10 boîtes Bulletin. Les éléments de réglage disponibles sont les suivants. Référence - Pour changer la configuration d'une boîte créée, sélectionnez la boîte concernée et appuyez sur [Modifier]. - Si [Modifier] est sélectionné, il n'est pas possible de changer le numéro de la boîte. - Pour supprimer une boîte créée, sélectionnez la boîte concernée et appuyez sur [Supprimer]. Page (1/2) Page (2/2) Élément Description [N° Boîte] Affiche automatiquement un numéro qui n'a pas encore été attribué. Pour spécifier un numéro de boîte, appuyez sur [N° Boîte], puis entrez au clavier le numéro de boîte (entre 1 et 999999999). [Nom Boîte] Appuyez sur [Nom Boîte] et entrez le nom de la boîte sur le panneau de contrôle (maximum 20 caractères). Spécifier des numéros différents pour les boîtes utilisateur permet de créer des boîtes de même nom. [Code d'accès] Spécifiez un code d'accès pour limiter l'accès à la boîte. Appuyez sur [Code d'accès] et entrez le mot de passe sur le panneau de contrôle (8 caractères max.). [Type] Sélectionnez [Public], [Privé] ou [Groupe] en fonction des réglages Authentification utilisateur ou Compte Département. Si vous avez sélectionné [Privé], spécifiez-en l'utilisateur titulaire. Pour sélectionner le titulaire, utilisez la page Changer titulaire. Si vous avez sélectionné [Groupe] indiquez le compte propriétaire. Pour sélectionner le compte propriétaire, utilisez la page Changer propriétaire. ineo 223/283/363/423 8-9 8.2 Réglage Mode Utilisateur 8 Boîte Relais Vous pouvez créer jusqu'à cinq boîtes relais. Les éléments de réglage de création et de modification sont les suivants. Référence - Pour changer la configuration d'une boîte créée, sélectionnez la boîte concernée et appuyez sur [Modifier]. - Si [Modifier] est sélectionné, il n'est pas possible de changer le numéro de la boîte. - Pour supprimer une boîte créée, sélectionnez la boîte concernée et appuyez sur [Supprimer]. dPour info Pour plus de détails sur l'enregistrement de la tête et du pied de page, voir le [Guide de l'utilisateur Opérations Scanner réseau/Fax/Fax Réseau]. Élément Description [Délai suppression auto document] Spécifiez la période entre la date/l'heure d'enregistrement ou de prélèvement d'un document dans une Boîte utilisateur et la date/l'heure de suppression automatique. • Le Délai de suppression peut être spécifié non seulement en nombre de jours mais aussi en heures. Pour spécifier l'heure, entrez la valeur numérique, par pas de 1 minute et dans une plage de 5 minutes à 12 heures. • Pour ne pas supprimer les documents, sélectionnez [Enregistr.]. Élément Description [N° Boîte] Affiche automatiquement un numéro qui n'a pas encore été attribué. Pour spécifier un numéro de boîte, appuyez sur [N° Boîte], puis entrez au clavier le numéro de boîte (entre 1 et 999999999). [Nom Boîte] Appuyez sur [Nom Boîte] et entrez le nom de la boîte sur le panneau de contrôle (maximum 20 caractères). Spécifier des numéros différents pour les boîtes utilisateur permet de créer des boîtes de même nom. [Destination Relais] Sélectionnez une destination relais pour envoyer les données depuis la boîte relais. Enregistrez à l'avance la destination relais en tant que destination groupe. • Lors de l'enregistrement d'une destination groupe comme destination relais, veillez à appliquer préalablement la numérotation abrégée à la destination groupe. [Mot de passe EMI Relais] Spécifiez un code d'accès pour limiter l'accès à la boîte. Appuyez sur [Mot de passe EMI Relais] et entrez le mot de passe sur le panneau de contrôle (8 caractères max.). 8 Réglage Mode Utilisateur 8-10 ineo 223/283/363/423 8.2 Boîte Document sécurisé Il est possible d'enregistrer jusqu'à 20 boîtes Document sécurisé. Les éléments de réglage disponibles sont les suivants. Référence - La boîte Document sécurisé est disponible lorsqu'un Kit Fax est installé et qu'aucun Disque dur n'est installé. - Si un Disque dur est installé, la réception confidentielle peut être activée lorsque la fonction Réception confidentielle est assignée à une boîte Public/Privé/Groupe. Pour plus de détails, voir page 8-6. - Pour changer la configuration d'une boîte créée, sélectionnez la boîte concernée et appuyez sur [Modifier]. - Si [Modifier] est sélectionné, il n'est pas possible de changer le numéro de la boîte. - Pour supprimer une boîte créée, sélectionnez la boîte concernée et appuyez sur [Supprimer]. Page (1/2) Élément Description [N° Boîte] Affiche automatiquement un numéro qui n'a pas encore été attribué. Pour spécifier un numéro de boîte, appuyez sur [N° Boîte], puis entrez au clavier le numéro de boîte (entre 1 et 999999999). [Nom Boîte] Appuyez sur [Nom Boîte] et entrez le nom de la boîte sur le panneau de contrôle (maximum 20 caractères). Spécifier des numéros différents pour les boîtes utilisateur permet de créer des boîtes de même nom. [Code d'accès] Spécifiez un code d'accès pour limiter l'accès à la boîte. Appuyez sur [Code d'accès] et entrez le mot de passe sur le panneau de contrôle (8 caractères max.). [Type] Sélectionnez [Public], [Privé] ou [Groupe] en fonction des réglages Authentification utilisateur ou Compte Département. Si vous avez sélectionné [Privé], spécifiez-en l'utilisateur titulaire. Pour sélectionner le titulaire, utilisez la page Changer titulaire. Si vous avez sélectionné [Groupe] indiquez le compte propriétaire. Pour sélectionner le compte propriétaire, utilisez la page Changer propriétaire. ineo 223/283/363/423 8-11 8.2 Réglage Mode Utilisateur 8 Page (2/2) 8.2.2 Paramètres Affichage Perso - Configurer la boîte Vous pouvez personnaliser l'écran Boîte afin de l'adapter à votre environnement de travail. Onglet par Défaut Spécifiez la page Boîte qui doit s'afficher lorsque la touche [Boite] a été actionnée sur le panneau de contrôle. Référence - [Public] : affiche la page Boîte Public. - [Privé] : affiche la page Boîte Privé lorsque l'Authentification utilisateur est activée. - [Système] : affiche la page Boîte Système. - [Groupe] : affiche la page Boîte Groupe lorsque Compte Département est activé. - Cette fonction n'est disponible que si un Disque dur est installé. Élément Description [Délai suppression auto document] Spécifiez la période entre la date/l'heure d'enregistrement ou de prélèvement d'un document dans une Boîte utilisateur et la date/l'heure de suppression automatique. • Le Délai de suppression peut être spécifié non seulement en nombre de jours mais aussi en heures. Pour spécifier l'heure, entrez la valeur numérique, par pas de 1 minute et dans une plage de 5 minutes à 12 heures. • Pour ne pas supprimer les documents, sélectionnez [Enregistr.]. [Mot Passe Comm.] Spécifiez un mot de passe pour la réception confidentielle. Appuyez sur [Mot Passe Comm.], et entrez le mot de passe sur le panneau de contrôle (8 caractères max.). • Pour confirmation, introduisez deux fois le mot de passe de communication. 8 Réglage Mode Utilisateur 8-12 ineo 223/283/363/423 8.2 Touche de Raccourci Cette fonction vous permet d'ajouter 2 touches raccourci au maximum dans la zone en bas à droite de la page. Elle est disponible lors de l'enregistrement de la boîte Système fréquemment utilisée comme touche de raccourci. Référence - Un touche de raccourci s'affiche seulement en mode Boîte une fois que la touche [Boite] a été actionnée. En cas de passage au mode Numérisation/Fax ou Copie, la touche de raccourci de la boîte concernée n'apparaît pas. - Si la Touche de Raccourci 1 est configurée, [Sélection Langue] ne s'affiche pas. 8.2.3 Réglage Mobile/PDA - Notif. Erreur Lien Fichier Cette fonction vous permet de spécifier le traitement à effectuer s'il vous est impossible d'accéder à un fichier de lien en cas de tentative d'impression d'un fichier XHTML depuis un téléphone cellulaire ou un agenda électronique. (par défaut : [MARCHE]) - [MARCHE] : imprime un fichier de lien dans un cadre noir. - [ARRET] : n'imprime pas un fichier de lien. ineo 223/283/363/423 8-13 8.2 Réglage Mode Utilisateur 8 8.2.4 Réglage Mobile/PDA - Utilisation Serveur Proxy Cette fonction vous permet de spécifier s'il faut utiliser un serveur proxy pour accéder à un fichier de lien lors de l'impression d'un fichier XHTML depuis un téléphone cellulaire ou un agenda électronique. (par défaut : [ARRET]) - [MARCHE] : utilise un serveur proxy. - [ARRET] : n'utilise pas de serveur proxy. Référence - Si un serveur proxy est utilisé pour la connexion, sélectionnez [Réglages Administrateur] - [Paramètres réseau] - [Param. WebDAV] - [Paramètres Client WebDAV] - [Adresse du serveur proxy] afin d'enregistrer le serveur proxy désiré. Pour plus de détails, voir le [Guide de l'utilisateur Administrateur Réseau]. 8.2.5 Réglage Mobile/PDA - Réglages Impression En cas d'utilisation d'un téléphone cellulaire ou d'un agenda électronique pour imprimer un document via cette machine, configurez les réglages d'impression. De base - Impression Sélectionnez Recto ou Recto-Verso. 8 Réglage Mode Utilisateur 8-14 ineo 223/283/363/423 8.2 De base - Papier Sélectionnez le format du papier d'impression si les données envoyées ne contiennent pas d'informations sur le format du papier. De base - Finition Spécifiez Pli/Reliure, Agraf. ou Perfo. Référence - Le nombre de trous perforés dépend du pays dans lequel la machine a été achetée. Applications - Marge Sélectionnez la position de la marge. ineo 223/283/363/423 8-15 8.2 Réglage Mode Utilisateur 8 Applications - Tampon/Surimpression - Date/Heure Pour la procédure de configuration, voir page 7-21. Applications - Tampon/Surimpression - Numéro Page Pour la procédure de configuration, voir page 7-22. Applications - Tampon/Surimpression - Tampon Pour la procédure de configuration, voir page 7-23. Applications - Tampon/Composition - Sécurité Copie - Protection Copie Pour la procédure de configuration, voir page 7-24. Applications - Tampon/Composition - Sécurité Copie - Pare-copie Pour la procédure de configuration, voir page 7-26. Applications - Tampon/Composition - Sécurité Copie - Copie Prot. MdP Pour la procédure de configuration, voir page 7-27. Applications - Tampon/Surimpression - Tampon répétitif Pour la procédure de configuration, voir page 7-28. 8 Réglage Administrateur 8-16 ineo 223/283/363/423 8.3 8.3 Réglage Administrateur 8.3.1 Autorisations de boîte Types d'utilisateurs Cette machine est destinée aux utilisateurs de plusieurs niveaux. "C'est pourquoi la fonction Boîte propose l'élément Administrateur de boîtes en plus de l'administrateur de cette machine." Voici les types de boîtes accessibles en fonction des types d'utilisateur. Référence - Pour se connecter à cette machine en tant qu'Administrateur de boîtes, effectuez les étapes suivantes lors du réglage Authentification utilisateur. – Entrez "boxadmin" dans la case Nom utilisateur. – Entrez le code d'accès spécifié à la page 8-27 dans la case Code d'accès. Boîte Public et boîte Privé ou Groupe Voici les fonctions disponibles de la (1) boîte Public accessibles à tous les utilisateurs et de la (2) boîte Privé ou Groupe accessibles à certains utilisateurs seulement. *1 Les utilisateurs enregistrés ne peuvent gérer que les boîtes qu'ils ont créées. *2 L'Administrateur de boîtes et l'administrateur peuvent gérer les boîtes sans avoir à entrer le code d'accès même si son introduction a été spécifiée pour les boîtes. Élément Description Utilisateur public Si l'Authentification utilisateur est désactivée, chaque utilisateur est connecté en tant qu'utilisateur Public. Utilisateur enregistré Il s'agit de l'utilisateur enregistré par l'Administrateur lorsque l'Authentification utilisateur est activée. Administrateur de boîtes Public Il s'agit de l'utilisateur qui se connecte comme Administrateur de boîtes lorsque l'Authentification utilisateur est activée. Cet utilisateur peut accéder à toutes les boîtes, qu'un code d'accès ait été spécifié ou non. Administrateur C'est l'utilisateur responsable de cette machine. Cet utilisateur peut créer, modifier ou supprimer toutes les boîtes utilisateur, qu'elles soient protégées par un code d'accès ou non. Fonction Créer Boîte utilisateur Vérifier, télécharger ou supprimer un document Réglage Changer Boîte Supprimer boîte utilisateur Type Boîte Public Privé ou Groupe Public Privé ou Groupe Public Privé ou Groupe Public Privé ou Groupe Utilisateur public o − o − o − o − Utilisateur enregistré o o o o*1 o o*1 o o*1 Administrateur de boîtes Public o*2 o*2 o*2 o*2 o*2 o*2 o*2 o*2 Administrateur o o − − o*2 o*2 o*2 o*2 ineo 223/283/363/423 8-17 8.3 Réglage Administrateur 8 8.3.2 Création d'une boîte Vous pouvez enregistrer une nouvelle boîte. Voici les types de boîtes qui peuvent être enregistrées. Référence - Si l'Authentification utilisateur ou Compte Département sont désactivées, la boîte enregistrée comme boîte Privé ou Groupe est sauvegardée comme boîte Public. Cependant le nom de la boîte reste inchangé. - Quand Authentification utilisateur ou Compte Département est activé, entrez l'ID et le code d'accès pour vous connecter à cette machine. Après cela, veillez à appuyer sur [Connexion] ou sur Code sur le panneau de contrôle pour achever le processus d'authentification. Si l'authentification n'est pas complète, il n'est pas possible de créer une boîte Privé ou Groupe. - Si un Disque dur est installé et que le Kit Fax en option est également installé, vous pouvez configurer les paramètres de réception confidentielle (émission F-code) comme fonction d'extension d'une boîte Public, Privé, ou Groupe. La boîte Document sécurisé n'est pas disponible si un Disque dur est installé. Pour plus de détails sur la fonction Réception confidentielle, voir le [Guide de l'utilisateur Opérations Scanner réseau/Fax/Fax Réseau]. - Si le réglage Authentification utilisateur est configuré, vous pouvez spécifier un Administrateur de boîtes. Un administrateur de boîtes a accès à toutes les boîtes Public, Privé et Groupe. Référence - Si [Règles Mot Pass] est activé, il n'est pas possible de créer un mot de passe qui comporte moins de 8 caractères. - Lorsque le mot de passe enregistré pour la boîte comporte moins de 8 caractères, modifiez-le pour qu'il en compte au moins 8 avant d'activer les règles de mot de passe. Pour plus de détails sur les règles de mot de passe, voir le [Guide de l'utilisateur Opérations Copie]. - Les boîtes Public/Privé/Groupe et Annotation ne sont disponibles que si un Disque dur est installé. 8.3.3 Créer une boîte Public, Privé ou Groupe Pour plus de détails, voir page 8-6. 8.3.4 Créer une boîte Bulletin Pour plus de détails, voir page 8-8. Élément Description Boîte Utilisateur Public Une boîte Public est accessible à tous. Boîte Privé Il s'agit d'une boîte Privé accessible seulement par l'utilisateur connecté lorsque l'Authentification utilisateur est activée. Boîte Groupe Il s'agit d'une boîte accessible seulement par l'utilisateur appartenant au compte connecté lorsque Compte Département est activée. Boîte Bulletin Il s'agit d'une boîte utilisée pour l'émission Dépôt/Réception Relève Bulletin avec F-codes. Cet élément est disponible si le Kit Fax en option est installé. Boîte Relais Il s'agit d'une boîte servant à enregistrer les données relais lorsque cette machine est utilisée comme station relais pour les transmissions relais avec F codes. Cet élément est disponible si le Kit Fax en option est installé. Boîte Annotation Il s'agit d'une boîte qui sert à imprimer ou envoyer un document enregistré avec la date/heure ou image du numéro d'archivage. Spécifiez le type de texte à ajouter lorsque cette boîte est utilisée. Lors de l'enregistrement de cette boîte, spécifiez le mode Administrateur. Boîte Document sécurisé Cette boîte sert à enregistrer et imprimer un document qu'une machine a envoyé par réception confidentielle. Cet élément est disponible si un Kit Fax est installé et qu'aucun Disque dur n'est installé. La boîte Document sécurisé n'est pas disponible si un Disque dur est installé. 8 Réglage Administrateur 8-18 ineo 223/283/363/423 8.3 8.3.5 Créer un boîte Relais Pour plus de détails, voir page 8-9. 8.3.6 Créer une boîte Annotation Permet de créer une boîte Annotation. Vous pouvez configurer les éléments suivants lors de la création d'une boîte. Cette fonction n'est disponible que si un Disque dur est installé. Référence - Pour changer la configuration d'une boîte créée, sélectionnez la boîte concernée et appuyez sur [Modifier]. - Si [Modifier] est sélectionné, il n'est pas possible de changer le numéro de la boîte. - Pour supprimer une boîte créée, sélectionnez la boîte concernée et appuyez sur [Supprimer]. Page (1/3) Référence - Si [Règles Mot Pass] est activé, il n'est pas possible de créer un mot de passe qui comporte moins de 8 caractères. - Lorsque le mot de passe enregistré pour la boîte comporte moins de 8 caractères, modifiez-le pour qu'il en compte au moins 8 avant d'activer les règles de mot de passe. Pour plus de détails sur les règles de mot de passe, voir le [Guide de l'utilisateur Opérations Copie]. Élément Description [N° Boîte] Affiche automatiquement un numéro qui n'a pas encore été attribué. Pour spécifier un numéro de boîte, appuyez sur [N° Boîte], puis entrez au clavier le numéro de boîte (entre 1 et 999999999). [Nom Boîte] Appuyez sur [Nom Boîte] et entrez le nom de la boîte sur le panneau de contrôle (maximum 20 caractères). Spécifier des numéros différents pour les boîtes utilisateur permet de créer des boîtes de même nom. [Code d'accès] Spécifiez un code d'accès pour limiter l'accès à la boîte. Appuyez sur [Code d'accès] et entrez le mot de passe sur le panneau de contrôle (8 caractères max.). ineo 223/283/363/423 8-19 8.3 Réglage Administrateur 8 Page (2/3) Page (3/3) Élément Description [Compt Haut] Sélectionnez si le numéro d'annotation doit être appliqué par tâche ou par page. [Texte numérotat.] Permet d'ajouter du texte au numéro à imprimer (20 caractères max.). [Date/Heure] Sélectionnez le format d'affichage de l'heure et de la date à imprimer. [Contraste] Sélectionnez la densité des numéros d'annotation à imprimer. [Type Numéro] Sélectionnez le format de sortie (nombre de chiffres) des numéros d'annotation à imprimer. [Position Impress.] Sélectionnez la position d'impression. [Texte] Permet d'entrer un texte libre (maximum 40 caractères). Élément Description [Délai suppression auto document] Spécifiez la période entre la date/l'heure d'enregistrement ou de prélèvement d'un document dans une Boîte utilisateur et la date/l'heure de suppression automatique. • Le Délai de suppression peut être spécifié non seulement en nombre de jours mais aussi en heures. Pour spécifier l'heure, entrez la valeur numérique, par pas de 1 minute et dans une plage de 5 minutes à 12 heures. • Pour ne pas supprimer les documents, sélectionnez [Enregistr.]. • Si vous désirez attribuer une annotation à un document mais sans enregistrer ou copier le document, sélectionnez [Rejeter]. 8 Réglage Administrateur 8-20 ineo 223/283/363/423 8.3 8.3.7 Créer une boîte Document sécurisé Pour plus de détails, voir page 8-10. 8.3.8 Réglage Maxi. Boîtes Spécifiez le nombre maximum de boîtes qui peuvent être créées pour chaque utilisateur. Cette fonction n'est disponible que si un Disque dur est installé. Boîte Public, Privé ou Groupe Sélectionnez [Public], [Privé] ou [Groupe] en fonction des réglages Authentification utilisateur ou Compte Département. Gestion Boîte maximum Pour spécifier le nombre maximum de boîtes, sélectionnez [MARCHE]. Pour ne pas spécifier de limite et autoriser les utilisateurs à créer un nombre indéfini de boîtes, sélectionnez [ARRET]. Réglage Maxi. Boîtes La plage admise pour le nombre maximum de boîtes est 0 à 1000. Entrez au clavier le nombre maximum de boîtes et appuyez sur [Appliquer] pour le valider. Référence - Si le nombre maximum de boîtes est réglé sur "0", aucune nouvelle boîte ne peut être créée. - Si l'utilisateur sélectionné fixe déjà le nombre de boîtes à 3, la plage admise pour le nombre maximum de boîtes passe de 3 à 1 000. ineo 223/283/363/423 8-21 8.3 Réglage Administrateur 8 8.3.9 Configurer la boîte Supprimer Bte Util. inutilisée Supprime une boîte qui ne contient aucun document, laquelle devient inutile. Pour supprimer une boîte, confirmez le message qui apparaît et sélectionnez [Oui]. Référence - Cette fonction n'est disponible que si un Disque dur est installé. Suppr. Docs Impr. Sécurisée Cette fonction supprime tous les documents enregistrés dans la Boîte Document sécurisé. Pour supprimer la boîte, confirmez le message et sélectionnez [Oui]. Référence - Cette fonction n'est disponible que si un Disque dur est installé. 8 Réglage Administrateur 8-22 ineo 223/283/363/423 8.3 Délai suppress Impress. sécuris. Spécifiez la période entre la date/l'heure d'enregistrement ou de prélèvement d'un document sécurisé dans une Boîte utilisateur et la date/l'heure de suppression automatique. Référence - Dans Délai de suppression, spécifiez de 5 minutes à 12 heures (par pas de 1 minute), 1 jour, 2 jours, 3 jours, 7 jours ou 30 jours. - Pour ne pas supprimer les documents, sélectionnez [Enregistr.]. - Cette fonction n'est disponible que si un Disque dur est installé. Délai suppress PDF cryptés Spécifiez la période entre la date/l'heure d'enregistrement ou de prélèvement d'un document PDF crypté dans une Boîte utilisateur et la date/l'heure de suppression automatique. Référence - Dans Délai de suppression, spécifiez de 5 minutes à 12 heures (par pas de 1 minute), 1 jour, 2 jours, 3 jours, 7 jours ou 30 jours. - Pour ne pas supprimer les documents, sélectionnez [Enregistr.]. - Cette fonction n'est disponible que si un Disque dur est installé. ineo 223/283/363/423 8-23 8.3 Réglage Administrateur 8 Délai Suppress. ID & Impr. Spécifiez la période entre la date/l'heure d'enregistrement ou de prélèvement d'un document dans la Boîte ID & Imprimer et la date/l'heure de suppression automatique. Référence - Dans Délai de suppression, spécifiez de 5 minutes à 12 heures (par pas de 1 minute), 1 jour, 2 jours, 3 jours, 7 jours ou 30 jours. - Pour ne pas supprimer les documents, sélectionnez [Enregistr.]. - Cette fonction n'est disponible que si un Disque dur est installé. Réglage attente doc. Spécifiez s'il faut enregistrer un document dans une Boîte en cas d'envoi ou d'impression. Référence - Lors de la suppression d'un document après envoi ou impression, sélectionnez [Oui]. Pour afficher un écran de confirmation de suppression lors de l'envoi ou de l'impression, sélectionnez [ON] sur l'écran de sélection de suppression. - Pour supprimer un document après envoi ou impression, sélectionnez [Non]. 8 Réglage Administrateur 8-24 ineo 223/283/363/423 8.3 Réglages Fonction Mémoire Externe Réglez la fonction Mémoire externe connectée à cette machine sur MARCHE ou ARRET. Référence - En sortie d'usine de la machine, la fonction permettant d'enregistrer un document dans une mémoire externe est réglé sur ARRET (pas d'enregistrement). Elle est aussi réglée sur ARRET (pas d'enregistrement) dans le réglage des fonctions utilisateur lorsque l'Authentification utilisateur est activée. Pour enregistrer un document dans une mémoire externe, changez le réglage pour vous permettre d'enregistrer des documents dans Réglages Administrateur. Boîte Util. Autor./Interd. Spécifiez s'il faut autoriser les fonctions permettant à l'utilisateur de créer, modifier ou supprimer une boîte. Référence - Pour permettre à l'utilisateur d'accéder à ces fonctions, sélectionnez [Permis]. - Pour interdire à l'utilisateur d'accéder à ces fonctions, sélectionnez [Interdire]. Seul l'administrateur peut alors de créer, modifier ou supprimer une boîte. Élément Description [Enregistrer document] Sélectionnez s'il faut enregistrer (MARCHE) ou ne pas enregistrer (ARRET) en mémoire externe des documents numérisés ou des documents archivés dans une Boîte. [Imprimer Document] Sélectionnez s'il faut imprimer (MARCHE) ou ne pas imprimer (ARRET) des documents archivés en mémoire externe en utilisant la fonction [Utilis/Archiv]. [Numérisation Document Mémoire Externe] Numérisez un document en mémoire externe et sélectionnez s'il faut l'enregistrer (MARCHE) ou ne pas l'enregistrer (ARRET) dans une Boîte. • Cet élément ne s'affiche que si un Disque dur est installé. ineo 223/283/363/423 8-25 8.3 Réglage Administrateur 8 Réglage ID & Imprimer Supprimer après impression Sélectionnez s'il faut vérifier si le document conservé dans la boîte ID & Imprimer a bien été supprimé après impression. Référence - Pour vérifier auprès de l'utilisateur si le document concerné doit être supprimé, sélectionnez [Confirm.avec Util.]. - Pour supprimer le document concerné après impression sans vérifier auprès de l'utilisateur, sélectionnez [Toujours supprimer]. - Cette fonction n'est disponible que si un Disque dur est installé. Réglage Délai suppression Document Cette fonction permet à l'administrateur de spécifier la période entre la date/l'heure d'enregistrement ou de prélèvement d'un document dans une Boîte utilisateur et la date/l'heure de suppression automatique de ce dernier si l'utilisateur ne peut pas spécifier l'heure/la date de suppression du document. Pour spécifier automatiquement l'heure/la date de suppression d'un document, sélectionnez [Oui] et entrez l'heure de suppression. Référence - Dans Délai de suppression, spécifiez de 5 minutes à 12 heures (par pas de 1 minute), 1 jour, 2 jours, 3 jours, 7 jours ou 30 jours. - Pour ne pas supprimer les documents, sélectionnez [Enregistr.]. - Cette fonction n'est disponible que si un Disque dur est installé. 8 Réglage Administrateur 8-26 ineo 223/283/363/423 8.3 Paramètres ID & Imprimer Configurez les réglages pour la Boîte ID & Imprimer. Référence - Un tâche d'un utilisateur Public est imprimée ou enregistrée. - Une tâche non autorisée d'un utilisateur est imprimée ou enregistrée lorsque Imprimer sans Authentification est activé. - Pour plus de détails sur l'impression par des utilisateurs publics et la fonction Imprimer sans Authentification, voir le [Guide de l'utilisateur Opérations Impression]. - Cette fonction n'est disponible que si un Disque dur est installé. 8.3.10 Réglage Mobile/PDA Sélectionnez s'il faut autoriser/interdire la fonction d'utilisation d'un téléphone cellulaire ou d'un agenda électronique. Élément Description [ID & Imprimer] [MARCHE] : enregistre dans la boîte ID & Imprimer toutes les tâches d'impression normale et d'Authentification & Impression qui ont été demandées par un utilisateur enregistré. [ARRET] : enregistre dans la boîte ID & Imprimer les tâches et d'Authentification & Impression qui ont été demandées par un utilisateur enregistré. La tâche d'impression normale est réalisée sans être enregistrée dans la boîte. [Utilisat. Public] [Imprimer immédiatem.] : Imprime une tâche d'utilisateur Public ou une tâche non autorisée d'un utilisateur sans l'enregistrer dans la boîte. [Enregistr.] : Enregistre une tâche d'utilisateur Public ou une tâche non autorisée d'un utilisateur dans la boîte ID & Imprimer. ineo 223/283/363/423 8-27 8.3 Réglage Administrateur 8 8.3.11 Réglage administrateur Boîte Utilisateur L'Administrateur de boîtes est disponible lorsque l'Authentification utilisateur est activée. Si vous vous connectez à cette machine en tant qu'Administrateur de boîtes, vous pouvez référencer le contenu de toutes les boîtes utilisateur crées, que le code d'accès ait été spécifié ou non. Cette fonction n'est disponible que si un Disque dur est installé. Réglage Administrateur de boîtes Pour Définir un administrateur de boîtes, sélectionnez [Permis] et appuyez sur [Réglage Mot de passe] pour enregistrer le mot de passe de l'administrateur des boîtes. Référence - Pour confirmation, saisissez deux fois le mot de passe. - Si [Règles Mot Pass] est activé, il n'est pas possible de créer un mot de passe qui comporte moins de 8 caractères. - Lorsque le mot de passe enregistré pour la boîte comporte moins de 8 caractères, modifiez-le pour qu'il en compte au moins 8 avant d'activer "Règles Mot Pass". Pour plus de détails sur les règles de mot de passe, voir le [Guide de l'utilisateur Opérations Copie]. Connexion à cette machine comme Administrateur de boîtes Entrez les éléments suivants sur l'écran de connexion. Nom Utilisateur : boxadmin Mot de passe : code d'accès déterminé dans l'écran Réglage Administrateur de boîtes Fonctions Administrateur disponibles Les fonctions suivantes sont disponibles lorsque vous vous connectez comme Administrateur de boîtes. - Créer une boîte Public, Privé ou Groupe - Vérifier, télécharger ou supprimer des documents enregistrés dans toutes les boîtes - Changer tous les réglages Boîte - Supprimer toutes les boîtes 8 Réglage Administrateur 8-28 ineo 223/283/363/423 8.3 8.3.12 Détails Sécurité Impression sécurisée seulement Utilisez ce réglage pour spécifier l'activation d'Impression Sécurisée seulement, lorsque la commande d'impression est émise depuis le pilote d'imprimante. Pour imprimer un document, il faut enter l'ID et le code d'accès. Référence - Cette fonction n'est disponible que si un Disque dur est installé. 8.3.13 Paramétrage DD/Réglages SSD Vérifier Capac. Disque Dur Vous pouvez vérifier l'espace occupé et l'espace disponible sur le disque dur. Référence - Cette fonction n'est disponible que si un Disque dur est installé. ineo 223/283/363/423 8-29 8.3 Réglage Administrateur 8 Vérifier capacité SSD Vous pouvez vérifier l'espace occupé et l'espace disponible sur le SSD. Référence - Cette fonction n'est pas disponible si un Disque dur est installé. Écraser données Disque Dur Vous pouvez spécifier les modalités d'écrasement et de suppression des données du disque dur. Lorsque les données image enregistrées sur le disque dur ne sont plus utiles, cette fonction permet d'écraser ces données dans toutes les zones où elles se trouvent afin de supprimer les données de l'original. Cette fonction supprime aussi la structure des données non-image afin qu'elles ne puissent pas être divulguées même si par exemple le disque dur installé est volé. Les éléments de réglage disponibles sont les suivants. (Par défaut : Mode 1) Élément Description [Mode 1] Écrasement avec 0x00 [Mode 2] Écrasement par 0x00 Écrasement par 0xff Écrasement par la lettre "A" (0x61) Vérifié [Priorité cryptage] Permet d'effectuer un cryptage à un niveau de sécurité plus élevé. Toutefois, dans Réglage cryptage DD, l'écrasement des données s'effectue différemment des réglages [Mode 1] ou [Mode 2]. Spécifiez toujours [Priorité cryptage]. [Priorité écrasement] Toutefois, dans Réglage cryptage DD, l'écrasement des données s'effectue conformément aux réglages [Mode 1] ou [Mode 2]. 8 Réglage Administrateur 8-30 ineo 223/283/363/423 8.3 Référence - Cette fonction n'est disponible que si un Disque dur est installé. - Si vous changez le réglage Priorité cryptage ou le réglage Priorité Écrasement, formatez le disque dur après avoir redémarré cette machine. Dans ce cas, les données seront supprimées par le formatage du disque dur. - En ce qui concerne les données supprimées par le formatage du disque dur, voir page 8-32. Écraser données Cette fonction écrase et supprime toutes les données contenues dans le disque dur. 0 Cette fonction est disponible lorsque cette machine doit être mise au rebut. Avant de procéder à cette opération, veuillez consulter votre S.A.V. 0 Ne jamais manoeuvrer l'interrupteur de la machine pendant l'écrasement et la suppression des données. % Pour écraser et supprimer les données, sélectionnez la Méthode écrasement données disque dur et appuyez sur [Supprimer]. Le processus d'écrasement et de suppression des données intervient une fois que cette machine a été redémarrée. Les éléments de réglage disponibles sont les suivants. Élément Description [Mode 1] Écrasement avec 0x00 [Mode 2] Écrasement par des nombres aléatoires de 1 octet Écrasement par des nombres aléatoires de 1 octet Écrasement par 0x00 [Mode 3] Écrasement par 0x00 Écrasement par 0xff Écrasement par des nombres aléatoires de 1 octet Vérifié [Mode 4] Écrasement par des nombres aléatoires de 1 octet Écrasement par 0x00 Écrasement par 0xff [Mode 5] Écrasement par 0x00 Écrasement par 0xff Écrasement par 0x00 Écrasement par 0xff [Mode 6] Écrasement par 0x00 Écrasement par 0xff Écrasement par 0x00 Écrasement par 0xff Écrasement par 0x00 Écrasement par 0xff Écrasement par données spécifiées de 512 octets [Mode 7] Écrasement par 0x00 Écrasement par 0xff Écrasement par 0x00 Écrasement par 0xff Écrasement par 0x00 Écrasement par 0xff Écrasement par 0xaa [Mode 8] Écrasement par 0x00 Écrasement par 0xff Écrasement par 0x00 Écrasement par 0xff Écrasement par 0x00 Écrasement par 0xff Écrasement par 0xaa Vérifié ineo 223/283/363/423 8-31 8.3 Réglage Administrateur 8 Référence - L'exécution du Mode 1 prend 40 minutes environ. Cette fonction écrase et supprime toutes les données contenues dans le SSD. 0 Cette fonction est disponible lorsque cette machine doit être mise au rebut. Avant de procéder à cette opération, veuillez consulter votre S.A.V. 0 Ne jamais manoeuvrer l'interrupteur de la machine pendant l'écrasement et la suppression des données. % Pour lancer la fonction d'écrasement et de suppression, appuyez sur [Oui] Le processus d'écrasement et de suppression des données intervient une fois que cette machine a été redémarrée. Mot de passe Accès DD Vous pouvez spécifier le code d'accès permettant de verrouiller le disque dur. 0 Assurez-vous de spécifier un code d'accès tel qu'il ne puisse pas être oublié. En effet, la perte du code d'accès entraînerait un travail de récupération très important. % Spécifiez le code d'accès et redémarrez cette machine. Le code d'accès du disque dur est spécifié. Référence - Entrez un code d'accès disque dur de 20 caractères. Notez que les caractères ne doivent pas être identiques. - Si vous avez déjà spécifié code d'accès du disque dur, [Changer] et [Désactiver] apparaissent. Vous pouvez changer ou désactiver le code d'accès du disque dur. Cette fonction n'est disponible que si un Disque dur est installé. 8 Réglage Administrateur 8-32 ineo 223/283/363/423 8.3 Formater disque dur Cette fonction permet de formater le disque dur. 0 Pour éteindre puis rallumer l'interrupteur principal, placez d'abord l'interrupteur principal sur Arrêt, puis sur Marche en attendant au moins 10 secondes entre les deux manoeuvres. Négliger cette précaution peut entraîner une anomalie de fonctionnement. % Pour formater le disque dur, sélectionnez [Oui] pour confirmer le message affiché. Une fois le formatage du disque dur terminé, redémarrez cette machine. Référence - L'utilisation de la fonction Exporter de Web Connection permet de sauvegarder les informations d'enregistrement de l'utilisateur ou les données d'adresse. Pour plus de détails, voir l'aide en ligne de Web Connection. - Voici les données qui sont supprimées par le formatage du disque dur. – Programme – My Address Book – Réglage Méthode d'authentification – Réglage Auth. Utilis. – Réglage Compte Département – Boîte Utilisateur – Réglage Boîte Utilisateur – Documents dans les boîtes utilisateur – Réglage Boîte Confidentielle – Réglage Boîte Utilisateur Bulletin Bord - Cette fonction n'est disponible que si un Disque dur est installé. ineo 223/283/363/423 8-33 8.3 Réglage Administrateur 8 Formater SSD Cette fonction permet de formater le SSD. 0 Pour éteindre puis rallumer l'interrupteur principal, placez d'abord l'interrupteur principal sur Arrêt, puis sur Marche en attendant au moins 10 secondes entre les deux manoeuvres. Négliger cette précaution peut entraîner une anomalie de fonctionnement. % Pour formater le disque dur, sélectionnez [Oui] pour confirmer le message affiché. Une fois le formatage du disque dur terminé, redémarrez cette machine. Référence - L'utilisation de la fonction Exporter de Web Connection permet de sauvegarder les informations d'enregistrement de l'utilisateur ou les données d'adresse. Pour plus de détails, voir l'aide en ligne de Web Connection. - Voici les données qui sont supprimées par le formatage du disque dur. – Programme – My Address Book – Réglage Méthode d'authentification – Réglage Auth. Utilis. – Réglage Compte Département – Boîte Utilisateur – Réglage Boîte Utilisateur – Documents dans les boîtes utilisateur – Réglage Boîte Document sécurisé – Réglage Boîte Utilisateur Bulletin Bord - Cette fonction n'est pas disponible si un Disque dur est installé. Réglage cryptage DD Vous pouvez configurer le réglage du cryptage du disque dur. L'utilisation d'une chaîne de 20 caractères comme mot de passe du disque dur évite qu'un utilisateur prenne facilement connaissance des données conservées dans le disque dur. 0 Assurez-vous de spécifier un mot de passe tel qu'il ne puisse pas être oublié. 0 Le réglage Mot de passe de cryptage doit être configuré par l'administrateur de cette machine. 0 Pour éteindre puis rallumer l'interrupteur principal, placez d'abord l'interrupteur principal sur Arrêt, puis sur Marche en attendant au moins 10 secondes entre les deux manoeuvres. Négliger cette précaution peut entraîner une anomalie de fonctionnement. % Spécifiez le mot de passe de cryptage et redémarrez cette machine. Le réglage Mot de passe de cryptage devient alors disponible. Référence - Entrez les 20 caractères du mot de passe de cryptage. Notez que les caractères ne doivent pas être identiques. - Le réglage Mot de passe de cryptage devient disponible une fois que cette machine a été redémarrée. Cette fonction n'est disponible que si un Disque dur est installé. 8 Réglage Administrateur 8-34 ineo 223/283/363/423 8.3 8.3.14 Réglages Tampon Régl. Horodatage Cette fonction permet d'appliquer par mesure de sécurité un tampon prédéfini à tous les documents à produire à partir de cette machine. Spécifiez si un tampon doit être appliqué lors de l'impression ou de l'émission. Pour appliquer les tampons, sélectionnez [Appliquer], puis configurez les réglages du tampon à ajouter en continu. Référence - Voici les types de tampons qui peuvent être appliqués aux données imprimées. – Date/Heure – Numéro Page – Tampon – Sécurité Copie (Protection Copie, Pare-copie, Copie Prot. MdP) – Tampon répétitif – Tête/Pied de page – Surimpr. enreg. - Voici les types de tampons qui peuvent être appliqués aux données envoyées. – Date/Heure – Numéro Page – Tampon – Tête/Pied de page dPour info Pour plus de détails sur le réglage Tampon, voir page 7-21. 9 Web Connexion ineo 223/283/363/423 9-3 9.1 Utiliser Web Connection 9 9 Web Connexion 9.1 Utiliser Web Connection Web Connection est un utilitaire de gestion de périphérique supporté par le serveur HTTP intégré au contrôleur de l'imprimante. Vous pouvez par l'intermédiaire d'un navigateur Web sur un ordinateur connecté au réseau, configurer les paramètres de la machine et contrôler l'état de la machine. Cet utilitaire permet de configurer depuis votre ordinateur, certains réglages gérés sur le panneau de contrôle de la machine, et facilite la saisie des données. 9.1.1 Environnement d'exploitation 9.1.2 Accéder à Web Connection 0 Lancez le navigateur Internet pour accéder à Web Connection. 0 Si l'Authentification utilisateur est activée, entrez le nom utilisateur et le code. Pour plus de détails, voir page 9-11. 0 Pour plus d'information sur le réglage de l'adresse IP de cette machine, reportez-vous au [Guide de l'utilisateur Administrateur Réseau]. 0 Web Connection dispose de deux modes d'affichage : formats Flash et HTML. Pour plus de détails, voir page 9-9. 1 Démarrez le navigateur Internet. 2 Au champ URL, entrez l'adresse IP de la machine, puis appuyez sur la touche [Entrée]. http:/// Exemple : Si l'adresse IP de cette machine est 192.168.1.20 : - http://192.168.1.20/ Lorsque IPv6 est réglé sur "ON" et qu'un navigateur autre que Internet Explorer 6 est utilisé : - Entrez l'adresse IPv6 dans les crochets ([ ]). – http://[IPv6 adresse de la machine]/ Exemple : lorsque l'adresse IPv6 de cette machine est fe80::220:6bff:fe10:2f16 : - http://[fe80::220:6bff:fe10:2f16]/ - ISi IPv6 est réglé sur "ON" et que vous utilisez Internet Explorer, ajoutez préalablement "fe80::220:6bff:fe10:2f IPv6_MFP_1" au fichier serveurs et spécifiez l'adresse avec le nom de domaine. La page de connexion ou du menu principal apparaît. Réseau Ethernet (TCP/IP) Applications informatiques Navigateur Web : • Microsoft Internet Explorer, version 6/7/8 (JavaScript et Cookies activés) • Netscape Navigator 7.02 ou supérieur (JavaScript et Cookies activés) • Mozilla Firefox, version 1.0 ou supérieure (JavaScript et cookies activés) • Netscape Navigator 7.02 ou supérieur (JavaScript et Cookies activés) • Mozilla Firefox, version 1.0 ou supérieure (JavaScript et cookies activés) • Netscape Navigator 7.02 ou supérieur (JavaScript et Cookies activés) • Mozilla Firefox, version 1.0 ou supérieure (JavaScript et cookies activés) Adobe® Flash® Player : • Plug-in Ver. 7.0 ou supérieure requis pour sélectionner Flash en tant que format d'affichage. • Plug-in Ver. 9.0 ou supérieure requis pour utiliser Data Management Utility (gestion de données Polices/Macros). 9 Utiliser Web Connection 9-4 ineo 223/283/363/423 9.1 9.1.3 Cache du navigateur Internet Le navigateur Web dispose de la fonction cache ; par conséquent, il se peut que les dernières informations ne s'affichent pas sur la page lors de l'utilisation de Web Connection. L'utilisation du cache peut entraîner un échec de l'opération. Quand vous utilisez Web Connection, désactivez la fonction cache du navigateur Internet. Référence - En fonction des versions, les navigateur Web peuvent proposer des menus et noms de rubriques différents. Pour plus d'informations, voir l'aide du navigateur Internet. - Lorsque la fonction cache est activée, une déconnexion pour dépassement se produit en mode administrateur et cette déconnexion se répète à chaque tentative de connexion. Cela aboutit au blocage du panneau de contrôle de la machine auquel vous n'avez plus accès. Dans ce cas, éteignez puis rallumez la machine. Pour éviter ce problème, désactiver la fonction de cache. Pour Internet Explorer 1 Sélectionnez [Options Internet] dans le menu [Outils]. 2 Sous l'onglet [Général], sélectionnez [Fichiers Internet temporaires] - [Paramètres]. 3 Sélectionnez [À chaque visite de la page] et clique sur [Valider]. Pour Netscape Navigator 1 Sélectionnez [Préférences] dans le menu [Edition]. 2 Sous [Catégorie] à gauche, sélectionnez [Avancé] - [Cache]. 3 Sous [Comparer le document en mémoire cache au document du réseau], sélectionnez [Chaque fois]. Pour Mozilla Firefox 1 Sélectionnez [Options] dans le menu [Outils]. 2 Sélectionnez [Vie privée] et clique sur [Paramètres] dans la section Vie privée. 3 Cochez la case [Cache] sous [Vie privée], cochez la case [Toujours effacer mes traces personnelles à la fermeture de Firefox] sous [Paramètres] et clique sur [OK]. 9.1.4 Fonction Aide en ligne Vous pouvez afficher l'aide en ligne relative à la fonction en cours de configuration en vous connectant à Web Connection et en cliquant sur . Référence - Pour afficher l'aide en ligne, votre ordinateur doit être connecté à Internet. ineo 223/283/363/423 9-5 9.2 Connexion et déconnexion 9 9.2 Connexion et déconnexion 9.2.1 Opérations de connexion et de déconnexion À l'ouverture de Web Connection, une page de connexion s'affiche lorsque Authentification utilisateur ou Compte Département sont activés et la page de connexion s'affiche en mode Utilisateur public si Authentification utilisateur ou Compte Département ne sont pas activés. En cas de nouvelle connexion sur cette machine en tant qu'utilisateur différent ou en tant qu'administrateur, déconnectez-vous une fois puis connectez-vous à nouveau. Lorsque Authentification utilisateur ou Compte Département est désactivé L'utilisateur se connecte automatiquement comme utilisateur public. Pour se connecter comme Administrateur, il faut d'abord se déconnecter. 9 Connexion et déconnexion 9-6 ineo 223/283/363/423 9.2 Il est alors possible de se reconnecter en tant qu'Administrateur. ineo 223/283/363/423 9-7 9.2 Connexion et déconnexion 9 Quand Authentification utilisateur ou Compte Département est activé Si l'authentification est effectuée par Authentication Manager, demandez la procédure de connexion à l'administrateur serveur. La page Authentification Utilisateur ou Compte Département s'affiche. Entrer les informations demandées pour vous connecter. Pour se connecter comme utilisateur différent ou comme Administrateur, il faut d'abord se déconnecter. 9 Connexion et déconnexion 9-8 ineo 223/283/363/423 9.2 9.2.2 Déconnexion Cliquez sur [Déconnexion] ou [Vers Écran de connexion] en haut à droite dans la fenêtre. Une page de confirmation de déconnexion apparaît. Cliquez sur [OK] pour revenir à l'écran de connexion. Référence - La page de connexion qui s'affiche peut être différente selon si l'Authentification est activée ou non sur cette machine. - Si vous êtes connecté en tant qu'utilisateur Public, [Vers Écran de connexion] apparaît. Si vous êtes connecté en tant qu'utilisateur enregistré ou administrateur, [Déconnexion] apparaît. - En cas de dépassement du délai d'attente dû à l'absence d'opérations pendant la période spécifiée de connexion ou dû à un changement de l'authentification au niveau du panneau de contrôle lors de la connexion en mode utilisateur, vous êtes automatiquement déconnecté du mode en cours. - Pour plus d'information sur la manière de définir le délai d'attente des modes utilisateur ou administrateur, voir page 9-37. Reconnectez-vous. ineo 223/283/363/423 9-9 9.2 Connexion et déconnexion 9 9.2.3 Connexion Web Connection permet de se connecter en mode utilisateur ou en mode administrateur. Si nécessaire, vous avez la possibilité de vous connecter en mode utilisateur en tant qu'administrateur ou Administrateur boîte utilisateur, selon le réglage de l'authentification utilisateur ou de l'Administrateur Boîte Utilisateur. Référence - Une boîte administrateur ne peut être enregistrée que si un Disque dur est installé. - Vous pouvez vous connecter en tant qu'Administrateur boîte utilisateur lorsque Administrateur boîte utilisateur est activé au niveau du panneau de contrôle. Pour plus de détails sur la fonction Administrateur de boîtes, les permissions et le mot de passe, voir page 8-27. - La connexion au mode utilisateur comme Administrateur vous permet des opérations de suppression de travaux, option non disponible en mode administrateur. - A la page de connexion, sélectionnez l'utilitaire de Data Management Utility que vous souhaitez. Pour plus d'informations sur l'utilitaire Gestion des données, reportez-vous au [Guide de l'utilisateur Administrateur Réseau]. Options de Connexion Vous pouvez sélectionner diverses options de connexion. Référence - Si la case Flash est cochée au Mode vue, les éléments suivants sont affichés avec la fonction Flash. – Icônes et messages d'état – État du [Magasin Papier] dans [Information] - [Info sur le périphérique] – État de la [Tâche] Élément Description Langue Sélectionnez la langue d'affichage des informations. Mode vue Sélectionnez Flash ou HTML. • Pour utiliser le logiciel d'affichage, sélectionnez HTML. • Dans un environnement IPv6, sélectionner HTML. • Pour sélectionnez Flash, préparez Flash Player. Aide utilisateur Cochez la case [Afficher une boîte de dialogue lors de l'avertissement.] pour afficher la boîte de dialogue en cas d'avertissement ou pendant une opération après connexion. 9 Connexion et déconnexion 9-10 ineo 223/283/363/423 9.2 Connexion en tant qu'utilisateur public Si Authentification utilisateur n'a pas été activé sur la machine, l'utilisateur sera connecté en tant qu'utilisateur public. Dans la page de connexion, sélectionnez [Utilisateur public] et cliquez sur [Connexion]. ineo 223/283/363/423 9-11 9.2 Connexion et déconnexion 9 Connexion en tant qu'utilisateur enregistré Spécifier le nom d'utilisateur enregistré et le mot de passe pour se connecter lorsque Authentification utilisateur est activé sur cette machine. % Dans la page d'accueil, entrez le nom de l'utilisateur et le mot de passe, puis cliquez sur [Connexion]. Référence - Si Compte Département est activé, entrez également le nom et le code d'accès du compte. - Pour sélectionner un nom d'utilisateur dans une liste, cliquez sur la touche [Liste tous Utilis.]. - Si l'authentification par serveur externe est activée, choisissez un serveur. - Pour vous connecter en tant qu'administrateur dans le mode Utilisateur, sélectionnez [Administrateur] - [Administrateur (Mode Utilisateur)] et entrez le mot de passe administrateur. - Si [Fonctions interdites si échec d'authentification] des Réglages Administrateur est réglé sur Mode 2 et qu'un utilisateur saisit un mot de passe incorrect le nombre de fois spécifié, cet utilisateur est bloqué et ne peut plus utiliser la machine. Pour plus de détails sur la désactivation des Fonctions interdites si échec d'authentification, contactez votre administrateur. - [Liste Utilisateurs] n'est disponible que lorsque Liste noms utilis. est réglé sur [ON]. Pour plus d'informations, reportez-vous au [Guide de l'utilisateur Opérations Copie]. 9 Connexion et déconnexion 9-12 ineo 223/283/363/423 9.2 Se connecter en mode Administrateur Pour configurer le système ou les paramètres réseau, connectez-vous en mode Administrateur. 1 Sélectionnez [Administrateur], et cliquez sur [Connexion]. 2 Saisissez le mot de passe Administrateur, puis cliquez sur [Valider]. % Pour vous connecter en tant qu'administrateur dans le mode Utilisateur, sélectionnez [Administrateur (Mode utilisateur)], et entrez le mot de passe administrateur. % La connexion en mode administrateur provoque le blocage du panneau de contrôle et ne vous permet pas de l'utiliser. % En fonction de l'état de la machine, il se peut que vous ne puissiez pas vous connecter en mode administrateur. % Si [Fonctions interdites si échec d'authentification] dans réglage Administrateur est réglé sur Mode 2 et qu'un code d'accès incorrect est entré le nombre de fois spécifié, la connexion au mode administrateur devient impossible. Pour plus d'informations sur le paramètre Fonctions interdites si échec d'authentification, reportez-vous au [Guide de l'utilisateur Opérations Copie]. % La page de saisie du mot de passe varie en fonction des réglages de la machine. % Vous pouvez afficher l'explication des fonctions (Aide) si nécessaire. Pour afficher l'Aide, sélectionnez [ON] dans Réglage Affichage. [Par souris] : pointez le curseur pour afficher l'Aide. [Par focus] : sélectionnez un élément pour afficher l'Aide. ineo 223/283/363/423 9-13 9.2 Connexion et déconnexion 9 Mode d'affichage en mode Administrateur Dans [Réglage Système] - [Réglage de l'affichage], vous pouvez sélectionner le mode d'affichage en mode Administrateur et choisir entre [Affichage fonctions Onglet] ou [Affichage fonctions Liste]. Ce manuel donne à titre d'exemple le mode d'[Affichage fonctions Liste]. Quel que soit le mode d'affichage, les éléments disponibles sont identiques. Par défaut le mode d'affichage est le mode [Affichage fonctions Onglet]. Cliquez sur l'icône voulue de l'[Affichage fonctions Onglet], pour changer le menu. Dans [Affichage fonctions Liste], changez le menu dans la liste déroulante. Sélectionnez le menu désiré dans la liste déroulante, et cliquez sur [Affichage]. 9 Connexion et déconnexion 9-14 ineo 223/283/363/423 9.2 Connexion en tant qu'Administrateur de boîte Vous pouvez vous connecter en mode utilisateur en tant qu'administrateur afin de supprimer une tâche, si Authentification utilisateur est activée sur cette machine. Si nécessaire, vous pouvez vous connecter en mode utilisateur en tant qu'Administrateur de boîte, lorsque Administrateur de boîte est activé à l'aide du panneau de contrôle. % Sur la page de connexion, sélectionnez [Administrateur] et cliquez sur [Connexion]. % Pour vous connecter en mode Utilisateur en tant qu'administrateur, sélectionnez [Administrateur de boîte] et entrez le code d'accès de l'administrateur des boîtes utilisateur. Référence - Une boîte administrateur ne peut être enregistrée que si un Disque dur est installé. - Pour vous connecter en tant qu'administrateur dans le mode Utilisateur, sélectionnez [Administrateur] - [Administrateur (Mode Utilisateur)] et entrez le mot de passe administrateur. - Si [Fonctions interdites si échec d'authentification] dans réglage Administrateur est réglé sur Mode 2 et qu'un code d'accès incorrect est entré le nombre de fois spécifié, la connexion au mode administrateur devient impossible. Pour plus d'informations sur le paramètre Fonctions interdites si échec d'authentification, reportez-vous au [Guide de l'utilisateur Opérations Copie]. - La page de saisie du mot de passe varie en fonction des réglages de la machine. - Vous pouvez afficher l'explication des fonctions (Aide) si nécessaire. Pour afficher l'Aide, sélectionnez [ON] dans Réglage Affichage. – [Par souris] : pointez le curseur pour afficher l'Aide. – [Par focus] : sélectionnez un élément pour afficher l'Aide. ineo 223/283/363/423 9-15 9.3 Configuration de la page 9 9.3 Configuration de la page La connexion à Web Connection affiche la page qui est configurée, comme représenté ci-dessous. L'exemple ci-après illustre les rubriques de Information - Info sur le périphérique. Référence - Le contenu des pages de Web Connection dépend des options installées sur la machine ou des réglages. N° : Élément Description 1 Nom utilisateur de connexion Affiche l'icône et le nom utilisateur du mode de connexion actuel (utilisateur public, utilisateur enregistré, nom de compte, administrateur, administrateur de boîtes). Cliquez sur le nom d'utilisateur pour afficher le nom de l'utilisateur connecté. 2 Affichage des états Affiche les symboles et les messages indiquant l'état des sections imprimante et scanner de la machine. En cliquant sur l'icône désirée lors de l'apparition d'une erreur, vous affichez les informations (Page Info Consommables, Magasin, ou Enregistrement utilisateur page) associées à l'icône vous permettant de vérifier l'état. 3 Afficheur des messages Affiche l'état de fonctionnement de la machine. 4 [Vers Écran de connexion]/ [Déconnexion] Cliquez sur cette touche pour se déconnecter du mode en cours et se reconnecter. Si vous êtes connecté en tant qu'utilisateur Public, [Vers Écran de connexion] apparaît. Si vous êtes connecté en tant qu'utilisateur enregistré ou administrateur, [Déconnexion] apparaît. 1 2 3 4 10 5 6 7 8 9 9 Configuration de la page 9-16 ineo 223/283/363/423 9.3 5 [Modif. Mot Passe] Cliquez sur cette touche pour accéder à la page de changement du mot de passe utilisateur. Ce bouton apparaît seulement dans la page du mode utilisateur à laquelle vous êtes connecté comme utilisateur enregistré. 6 Aide Vous pouvez afficher l'aide en ligne relative à la fonction en cours de configuration. Pour les pages spécifiées, voir "Assistance en ligne" dans page 9-17. 7 Rafraîchir Cliquez sur cette icône pour actualiser les informations affichées sur la page. 8 Icône Sélectionner la catégorie de la rubrique à afficher. Les icônes suivantes s'affichent en mode Utilisateur. • Information • Tâche • Boîte Utilisateur • Impression directe • Enregistrement Destination • Personnaliser 9 Menu Affiche des informations et réglages pour l'icône sélectionnée. Le menu qui apparaît dans cette zone dépend de l'icône sélectionnée. 10 Informations et paramètres Affiche les détails de l'élément sélectionné dans le menu. N° : Élément Description ineo 223/283/363/423 9-17 9.4 Présentation du mode Utilisateur 9 9.4 Présentation du mode Utilisateur La connexion en mode utilisateur vous permet de configurer les fonctions suivantes. 9.4.1 Information dPour info Vous pouvez aussi consulter les explications concernant le mode utilisateur dans l'aide en ligne de Web Connection ou dans le manuel Web Connection qui se trouve dans le DVD-ROM de l'application. Pour plus de détails sur l'aide en ligne, voir page 9-4. Élément Description [Info sur le périphérique] Permet de vérifier les composants, les options, les consommables, et les compteurs de cette machine. [Assistance en ligne] Permet de vérifier l'assistance en ligne concernant ce produit. [Changer mot de passe utilisateur] Change le mot de passe de l'utilisateur. [Information sur l'autorisation des fonctions] Permet de vérifier les information sur les fonction autorisées à l'utilisateur ou au compte. [Informations Configuration Réseau] Permet de vérifier les paramètres réseau de cette machine. [Informations Configuration Impression] Permet de vérifier les réglages du contrôleur d'imprimante de cette machine. [Informations d'impression] Imprime les informations sur les polices ou la configuration. 9 Présentation du mode Utilisateur 9-18 ineo 223/283/363/423 9.4 9.4.2 Tâche 9.4.3 Boîtes dPour info Pour plus de détails sur les opérations sur les boîtes utilisateur, voir page 9-22. Élément Description [Tâches en cours] Permet de vérifier la tâche en cours d'exécution ou les tâches en file d'attente. [(Historique tâches)] Permet de vérifier les tâches exécutées. [Liste communications] Permet de vérifier les tâches d'émission et de réception achevées. Élément Description [Connexion de boîte] Ouvre la boîte qui vient d'être créée (boîte Publique, Personnel, ou Groupe) pour vous permettre d'imprimer, envoyer, ou télécharger un document enregistré dans la boîte ou de changer le réglage de la boîte. [Créer Boîte utilisateur] Permet de créer une nouvelle boîte. ineo 223/283/363/423 9-19 9.4 Présentation du mode Utilisateur 9 Référence - [Ouvrir Boîte Utilis.] et [Boîte Utilisat.] ne s'affichent que si un Disque dur est installé. 9.4.4 Impression directe Référence - [Impression directe] peut ne pas s'afficher, en fonction des réglages dans le mode Administrateur. - Un original en couleur sera imprimé en noir et blanc même si Impression directe est spécifié. - [Enreg. dans Boîte utilisateur] et [Impression sécurisée] dans [Réglage application] ne s'affichent que si un Disque dur est installé. - Si l'original suivant est téléchargé alors qu'aucun Disque dur n'est installé, une saturation mémoire risque de se produire et entraîner un incident d'impression. – Original de grand volume – Original qui contient des figures complexes et dont le traitement nécessite beaucoup de mémoire. [Ouvrir Boîte utilisateur Système] Cette fonction ouvre la boîte utilisateur Système (Bulletin, Émis. en relève, Réception Mémoire Obligatoire, Réception confidentielle, ou Boîte Relais) pour vous permettre d'effectuer une opération sur un document enregistré dans la boîte utilisateur ou de changer la configuration de la boîte. • Les boîtes Bulletin, Émis. en relève, Réception Mémoire Obligatoire, et Relais sont disponibles si le Kit Fax en option est installé. • La boîte Document sécurisé est disponible lorsque le Kit Fax en option est installé et qu'aucun Disque dur n'est installé. [Créer Boîte utilisateur Système] Cette fonction permet de créer une nouvelle boîte Bulletin, Réception confidentielle, ou Relais. • Les boîtes Bulletin et Relais sont disponibles si le Kit Fax en option est installé. • La boîte Document sécurisé est disponible lorsque le Kit Fax en option est installé et qu'aucun Disque dur n'est installé. Élément Description Élément Description [Impression directe] Spécifiez un fichier enregistré dans l'ordinateur pour imprimer sur cette machine. Si nécessaire, vous pouvez sélectionner Application pour enregistrer un document dans la boîte Utilisateur spécifié. 9 Présentation du mode Utilisateur 9-20 ineo 223/283/363/423 9.4 9.4.5 Enregistrement Destination [Enregistrement Destination] peut ne pas s'afficher, en fonction des réglages dans le mode Administrateur. Élément Description [Carnet d'adresses] Permet de consulter le carnet d'adresses enregistré dans cette machine ou d'enregistrer ou changer une adresse. [Groupe] Permet de consulter le carnet d'adresses Groupe enregistré dans cette machine ou d'enregistrer ou changer une adresse. [Programme] Permet de consulter le carnet d'adresses Programme enregistré dans cette machine ou d'enregistrer ou changer une adresse. [Temporaire Une-Touche] Permet de consulter le carnet d'adresses Programme temporaire enregistré dans cette machine ou d'enregistrer ou changer une adresse. [Titre] Permet d'enregistrer ou de modifier jusqu'à 10 sujets pour l'envoi d'e-mails. [Texte] Permet d'enregistrer ou de modifier jusqu'à 10 corps de texte pour l'envoi d'e-mails. ineo 223/283/363/423 9-21 9.4 Présentation du mode Utilisateur 9 9.4.6 Personnaliser Cette fonction vous permet de spécifier l'écran initial à l'ouverture de session. Élément Description [Option] Permet de configurer les réglages affichés sur la page initiale qui apparaît après connexion à cette machine. 9 Gérer un document dans une boîte 9-22 ineo 223/283/363/423 9.5 9.5 Gérer un document dans une boîte Cette fonction n'est disponible que si un Disque dur est installé. Le menu [Connexion de boîte] offre les fonctions suivantes. - Afficher sous forme de liste des documents enregistrés dans une boîte - Imprimer un document - Envoyer un document à une autre machine - Télécharger et enregistrer les données du document dans votre ordinateur - Déplacer ou copier un document vers une autre boîte utilisateur - Supprimer un document 9.5.1 Afficher sous forme de liste des documents enregistrés dans une boîte À la connexion, la liste des boîtes utilisateur (boîtes Publique, Personnelle et Groupe) créées dans la MFP connectée. Connexion de boîte Sélectionnez le nom de la boîte désirée dans la liste des boîtes. Vous pouvez aussi entrer le numéro de boîte et le mot de passe, puis cliquez sur [OK]. Référence - Sélectionner un nom de la boîte avec mot de passe affiche la page de saisie du mot de passe. "Connexion de boîte" s'affiche comme illustré ci-dessous en fonction des réglages Authentification utilisateur ou Compte Département. - [Connexion de boîte (Publique)] : s'affiche lorsque Authentification utilisateur n'est pas activé. - [Connexion de boîte (Publique/Personnel)] : s'affiche lorsque Authentification utilisateur est activé. - [Connexion de boîte (Publique/Groupe)] : s'affiche lorsque Compte Département est activé. - [Connexion de boîte (Publique/Groupe/Personnel)] : s'affiche lorsque Authentification utilisateur et Compte Département sont activés. Élément Description [N° Bte Ut.] Entrez le numéro de la boîte utilisateur à ouvrir. [Mot de passe de boîte] Si un mot de passe est assigné à la boîte concernée, entrez le mot de passe. ineo 223/283/363/423 9-23 9.5 Gérer un document dans une boîte 9 < Liste des boîtes> Liste de fichiers Sélectionner une boîte affiche ses informations de base ainsi qu'une liste des documents enregistrés dans la boîte. Élément Description [Rechercher dans l'index] Affiche la liste des boîtes utilisateur pour chaque index, qui a été sélectionné lors de la création d'une boîte. [Page (affichage par 50 boîtes)] Quand cette machine contient 50 boîtes utilisateur ou davantage, spécifiez la page désirée pour changer l'affichage. [Liste des boîtes] Affiche le numéro de boîte, le nom de la boîte, le type de boîte et la date et l'heure de création. Une boîte avec mot de passe est indiquée par une icône en forme de clé. Élément Description [Configurer la boîte] Cliquez sur cette touche pour changer le nom de la boîte, son index, son extension ou le mot de passe. [Supprimer boîte utilisat] Cliquez sur cette touche pour supprimer la boîte utilisateur affichée. • La suppression d'une boîte efface tous les documents enregistrés dans la boîte. Vue Vignettes Pour afficher chaque document sous forme de vignette, cliquez sur [ON]. Pour ne pas afficher les vignettes, cliquez sur [OFF]. Spécifier l'opération Sélectionnez l'opération voulue, par exemple, imprimer, déplacer, copier ou supprimer un document, l'envoyer à une autre machine ou le télécharger sur votre ordinateur. Pour plus de détails, voir page 9-24. [Modifier l'affichage] Sélectionnez l'opération voulue et cliquez sur cette touche pour afficher la case à cocher "Sélectionner" pour le document qui peut être traité par la fonction cible. 9 Gérer un document dans une boîte 9-24 ineo 223/283/363/423 9.5 Référence - Si 11 documents ou plus sont enregistrés, [Page (Afficher par 10)] s'affiche. 9.5.2 Imprimer un document 1 Sélectionnez [Spécifier l'opération] - [Impression] et cliquez sur [Modifier l'affichage]. La case à cocher Sélectionner s'affiche pour les documents imprimables. Sélectionner Affiche une case à cocher pour le document qui peut être traité par la fonction sélectionnée. Vignette Affiche l'image de la première page lorsque la fonction Vue Vignettes est activée. Nom Document Affiche un nom de document. Nombre d'originaux Affiche le nombre d'originaux d'un document. [Modif. nom] Cliquez sur cette touche pour renommer un document. Élément Description ineo 223/283/363/423 9-25 9.5 Gérer un document dans une boîte 9 2 Cochez la case du document concerné et cliquez sur [Réglage impression]. 9 Gérer un document dans une boîte 9-26 ineo 223/283/363/423 9.5 3 Configurez les réglages d'impression. % Si plusieurs documents sont sélectionnés alors que Combinaison est réglé sur [OFF], les paramètres De base et Configuration d'application deviennent indisponibles. % [Enregistrer Réglages Impression] ne s'affiche pas lorsque plusieurs documents sont sélectionnés. 4 Cliquer sur [OK]. L'impression démarre. 5 Cliquer sur [OK]. Ceci vous renvoie à la page Liste Fichiers. Élément Description [Changer l'ordre] S'affiche lorsque plusieurs documents sont sélectionnés. Cette fonction vous permet de changer l'ordre d'impression. Cliquez sur le document concerné et sélectionnez [Début], [Vers le haut], [Vers le bas], [Fin] ou [Rétablir]. Pour obtenir l'affichage de chaque document par une vignette, cliquez sur [Vue Vignettes]. [Combiner] S'affiche lorsque plusieurs documents sont sélectionnés. Cette fonction imprime les documents sélectionnés comme un seul travail d'impression. [Paramètre fonctions de base] Spécifiez les réglages Nombre de copies, Impression recto verso, Impression continue, et Finition. • Impression continue s'affiche lorsque plusieurs documents sont sélectionnés. [Configuration d'application] Configurez les réglages détaillés comme Marge de page ou Tampon. Si vous utilisez cette fonction, cliquez sur [Affichage]. [Enregistrer Réglages Impression] Sélectionnez si les réglages doivent être enregistrés. ineo 223/283/363/423 9-27 9.5 Gérer un document dans une boîte 9 9.5.3 Envoyer un document à une autre machine 1 Sélectionnez [Spécifier l'opération] - [Envoyer à un autre périphérique] et cliquez sur [Modifier l'affichage]. La case à cocher Sélectionner s'affiche pour les documents qui peuvent être envoyés. 2 Cochez la case du document concerné et cliquez sur [Réglages Emiss.]. 9 Gérer un document dans une boîte 9-28 ineo 223/283/363/423 9.5 3 Configurez les réglages d'émission. Élément Description [Spécifier destination] Cliquez sur [Chercher dans la liste] pour sélectionner la destination dans le carnet d'adresses. Pour consulter la liste des destinations, cliquez sur [Vérifier Adresse]. ineo 223/283/363/423 9-29 9.5 Gérer un document dans une boîte 9 % Si plusieurs documents sont sélectionnés alors que Lier EMI est réglé sur [OFF], le réglage Type Fichier ou le réglage application seront indisponibles. 4 Cliquer sur [OK]. L'émission commence. 5 Cliquer sur [OK]. Ceci vous renvoie à la page Liste Fichiers. 9.5.4 Téléchargement des données d'un document sur votre ordinateur 1 Sélectionnez [Spécifier l'opération] - [Télécharger vers PC] et cliquez sur [Modifier l'affichage]. La case à cocher permettant de sélectionner un document disponible s'affiche. [Changer l'ordre] S'affiche lorsque plusieurs documents sont sélectionnés. Cette fonction vous permet de changer l'ordre d'émission. Cliquez sur le document concerné et sélectionnez [Début], [Vers le haut], [Vers le bas], [Fin] ou [Rétablir]. Pour obtenir l'affichage de chaque document par une vignette, cliquez sur [Vue Vignettes]. [Lier EMI] S'affiche lorsque plusieurs documents sont sélectionnés. Cette fonction envoie les documents sélectionnés comme une seule tâche d'émission. [Type Fichier] Spécifiez le type de fichier et le niveau de cryptage d'un fichier à envoyer. [Réglage communication] Configurez les réglages E-Mail ou spécifiez l'Adresse URL de Notification. Si vous utilisez cette fonction, cliquez sur [Affichage]. [Configuration d'application] Configurez les réglages détaillés comme Tampon ou Impress. par page. Si vous utilisez cette fonction, cliquez sur [Affichage]. Élément Description 9 Gérer un document dans une boîte 9-30 ineo 223/283/363/423 9.5 2 Cochez la case du document concerné et cliquez sur [Configuration téléchargement]. 3 Configurez les réglages. ineo 223/283/363/423 9-31 9.5 Gérer un document dans une boîte 9 4 Cliquer sur [OK]. 5 Quand le message [La préparation au téléchargement s'est bien terminée] apparaît, cliquez sur la touche [Télécharger]. La page Téléchargement de fichier apparaît. 6 Cliquez sur [Save]. 7 Spécifiez l'emplacement de destination et le nom de fichier et cliquez sur [Save]. 8 Cliquez sur [Retour]. Ceci vous renvoie à la page Liste Fichiers. Élément Description [Changer l'ordre] S'affiche lorsque plusieurs documents sont sélectionnés. Cette fonction recueille les pages dans l'ordre où elles sont affichées et les imprime comme un seul document. Au besoin, vous pouvez changer cet ordre. Cliquez sur le document concerné et sélectionnez [Début], [Vers le haut], [Vers le bas], [Fin] ou [Rétablir]. Pour obtenir l'affichage de chaque document par une vignette, cliquez sur [Vue Vignettes]. [Format du fichier] Sélectionnez le type du fichier à enregistrer. [Plage de pages] Téléchargez toutes les pages ou spécifiez l'étendue des pages successives. 9 Gérer un document dans une boîte 9-32 ineo 223/283/363/423 9.5 9.5.5 Déplacer ou copier un document vers une autre boîte utilisateur 1 Sélectionnez [Spécifier l'opération] - [Déplacer/Copier] et cliquez [Modifier l'affichage]. La case à cocher de sélection d'un document disponible s'affiche. 2 Cochez la case du document concerné et cliquez sur [Paramètre Copier/Déplacer]. % Il n'est pas possible de sélectionner plusieurs documents. ineo 223/283/363/423 9-33 9.5 Gérer un document dans une boîte 9 3 Configurez les réglages. 4 Cliquer sur [OK]. Déplace ou copie le document. 5 Cliquer sur [OK]. Ceci vous renvoie à la page Liste Fichiers. 9.5.6 Supprimer un document 1 Sélectionnez [Spécifier l'opération] - [Supprimer] et cliquez sur [Modifier l'affichage]. La case à cocher de sélection d'un document disponible s'affiche. Élément Description [N° Bte Ut.] Sélectionnez dans la Liste des boîtes la boîte d'où déplacer ou copier un document. [Copié] Cochez cette case pour copier le document dans la boîte utilisateur désirée. 9 Gérer un document dans une boîte 9-34 ineo 223/283/363/423 9.5 2 Cochez la case du document concerné et cliquez sur [Supprimer]. % Pour sélectionner ou désélectionner tous les documents, cochez la case [Cocher/Décocher]. 3 Cochez le nom du document à supprimer et cliquez sur [OK]. % Pour obtenir l'affichage de chaque document par une vignette, cliquez sur [Vue Vignettes]. 4 Cliquer sur [OK]. Ceci supprime le ou les documents et vous ramène à la page Liste de fichiers. ineo 223/283/363/423 9-35 9.6 Présentation du mode Administrateur 9 9.6 Présentation du mode Administrateur La connexion en mode administrateur vous permet d'utiliser les fonctions suivantes. Référence - Pour plus d'informations sur le mode Administrateur, reportez-vous au [Guide de l'utilisateur Administrateur Réseau]. - Les modes Administrateur sont classés en deux modes d'affichage : [Affichage fonctions Onglet] et [Affichage fonctions Liste]. Ce manuel donne à titre d'exemple le mode d'[Affichage fonctions Liste]. Pour plus de détails, voir page 9-13. 9.6.1 Entretien Élément Description [Compteur] Permet de vérifier le compteur de cette machine. [Version ROM] Permet de vérifier la version ROM. [Importer / Exporter] Permet d'enregistrer (exportation) les informations de réglage de cette machine dans un fichier, ou de les enregistrer (importer) dans cette machine depuis un fichier. [Paramètres notification statut] Configurez la fonction devant faire l'objet d'un rapport à un utilisateur enregistré, en cas d'erreur sur cette machine. Spécifiez la destination et éléments à notifier à un utilisateur enregistré en cas d'erreur. [Compteur total Réglages de notification] Configurez les réglages pour la notification à l'utilisateur cible du Compteur total par E-mail et enregistrez l'adresse E-mail de la destination. [Réglage date/heure] Spécifiez la date et l'heure affichées sur cette machine. [Configuration Programmateur] Configurez le mode Économie d'énergie ou le Réglage Programmateur hebdomadaire sur cette machine. 9 Présentation du mode Administrateur 9-36 ineo 223/283/363/423 9.6 Référence - Les fonctions suivantes sont disponibles seulement lorsqu'un Disque dur est installé. – [Paramètres de Licence] – [Modifier Police/Macro] (Cet élément s'affiche mais ne peut pas être spécifié.) – [Journal des tâches] 9.6.2 Réglage Système Référence - Pour utiliser cette machine en tant que scanner avec le logiciel d'application sous TWAIN, installez le pilote approprié TWAIN. Pour plus de détails, voir le manuel du pilote TWAIN sur le DVD livré avec cette machine. [Réglage Affichage Code Erreur Réseau] Indiquer s'il faut afficher le code d'erreur réseau. [Initialiser] Efface tous les réglages relatifs au réseau, au contrôleur et aux destinations. [Paramètres de Licence] Permet de délivrer une licence et d'activer des fonctions. Vous pouvez aussi émettre un code de requête. [Modifier Police/Macro] Permet d'ajouter une police ou une macro. [Journal des tâches] Vous permet de créer et de télécharger des données de journal des tâches exécutées sur cette machine. Élément Description Élément Description [Paramètres Machine] Change les informations d'enregistrement de la machine. [Enregistrer Information Assistance] Spécifiez les informations d'assistance (telles que le nom de contact, l'adresse URL d'entreprise ou l'adresse URL manuelle en ligne) de cette machine. Pour afficher ces informations, sélectionnez [Information] - [Assistance en ligne]. [Réseau TWAIN] Spécifiez l'heure à laquelle désactiver le verrouillage des opérations lors de la numérisation (excepté pour la numérisation PUSH (effectuée depuis un PC). S'il y a lieu, configurez les réglages d'enregistrement ou de lecture d'un document dans ou à partir de la mémoire externe. [Configurer la boîte] Permet de définir les fonctions Boîte, comme supprimer des boîtes inutiles, ou spécifier le délai de suppression de document. S'il y a lieu, configurez les réglages d'enregistrement ou de lecture d'un document dans ou à partir de la mémoire externe. ineo 223/283/363/423 9-37 9.6 Présentation du mode Administrateur 9 Référence - Les fonctions suivantes sont disponibles seulement lorsqu'un Disque dur est installé. – [Supprimer Bte Util. inutilisée], [Suppr. Docs Impr. Sécurisée], [Réglage Délai Suppression], [Réglage Délai suppression Doc], et [Délai Suppress. ID & Impr.] dans [Configurer la boîte] – [Configurer la boîte] - [Réglages Fonction Mémoire Externe] - [USB vers boîte] – [Réglage Coopération système] - [Réglage Connection Application] 9.6.3 Sécurité [Réglages Tampon] Permet d'enregistrer un en-tête ou un pied de page. En outre, les [Réglages ÉMI Fax] permettent d'activer ou de désactiver la fonction Tampon pour l'émission fax. [Réglages Impression Page vierge] Spécifiez s'il faut imprimer le contenu de [Tampon/Surimpression] sur les pages vierges. [Régl. Opération Ignorer Tâche] Permet de spécifier s'il faut ignorer une tâche. [Réglage Affichage Flash] Spécifiez la permission ou l'interdiction de l'affichage Flash. [Réglage Coopération Système] Configurez le réglage automatique du préfixe/suffixe ou le réglage d'impression des données sur un téléphone cellulaire. Dans [Réglage Connection Application], spécifiez si la connexion entre cette machine et le gestionnaire My Panel Manager doit être annulée. [Réglage Affichage] Sélectionnez le mode d'affichage du mode Administrateur entre [Affichage fonctions Onglet] ou [Affichage fonctions Liste]. [Réglage PDF Contours] Spécifiez s'il faut procéder au contourage du texte. Élément Description Élément Description [Réglages PKI] Enregistrez les certificats de périphérique et configurez les réglages SSL, protocole, ou certificat externe. • [Réglage Protocole] ne s'affiche que si un Disque dur est installé. [Réglages Vérification Certificat] Permet de spécifier les éléments pour la validation d'un certificat. [Définition adresse de référence] Pour autoriser l'accès à une destination, précisez un nom de groupe admis de référence ou un niveau admis de référence. [Accès Restreint Utilisateur] Permet de spécifie la fonction de restriction des opérations utilisateur. [Sécurité Copie] Précisez s'il faut utiliser la fonction Pare-Copie ou Copie Prot. MdP. 9 Présentation du mode Administrateur 9-38 ineo 223/283/363/423 9.6 [Réglage du mot de passe administrateur] ne s'affiche pas dans les cas suivants : - Le certificat SSL n'est pas installé - Le mode Sécurité Avancée est réglé sur "ON" - [Mode avec SSL/TLS] est réglé sur [Aucun(e)] dans [Sécurité] - [Réglages PKI] - [Paramètre SSL] même si le certificat du périphérique est déjà enregistré 9.6.4 Authentification utilisateur/Compte département [Déconnexion auto] Permet d'indiquer l'heure de déconnexion automatique du mode administrateur ou utilisateur. [Réglage du mot de passe administrateur] Permet de spécifier le mot de passe de connexion au mode administrateur. Élément Description Élément Description [Système d'authentification] Permet de configurer les réglages d'Authentification utilisateur ou de Compte Département sur cette machine. Pour activer l'authentification, configurez le réglage pour le nombre de comptes assignés ou Opération après crédit maximum. [Système Authentific.] Lors de l'activation de l'Authentification utilisateur, permet d'enregistrer l'utilisateur concerné ou de configurer le réglage utilisateur. [Réglage Compte Département] Lors de l'activation de Compte Département, permet d'enregistrer et de modifier le compte concerné. [Paramètres Serveur Externe] Lors de l'activation de l'authentification serveur externe, enregistrez le serveur externe. [Réglage Boîte Utilisateur Publique] Permet de spécifier la limite maximum du nombre de Boîte. • Cet élément ne s'affiche que si un Disque dur est installé. [Régl. Scan to Home] Configurez le réglage pour envoyer un fichier dans Dossier Accueil. [Réglages Numériser vers Dossier Autorisé] Configurez les réglages pour interdire les fonctions d'émission manuelles. ineo 223/283/363/423 9-39 9.6 Présentation du mode Administrateur 9 9.6.5 Réseau Élément Description [Paramètre TCP/IP] Configurez le paramètre TCP/IP lorsque vous connectez cette machine via réseau. [Réglage E-Mail] Configurez les réglages pour envoyer ou recevoir des E-mails (y compris Fax Internet) et spécifiez la fonction d'extension comme l'authentification E-mail. [Paramètre LDAP] Configurez les réglages pour enregistrer le serveur LDAP. [Paramètre IPP] Permet de configurer le paramètre d'impression IPP. [Paramètre FTP] Configurez les paramètres permettant d'utiliser cette machine comme client ou serveur FTP. [Activation SNMP] Configurez le paramètre SNMP. [Paramètre SMB] Permet de configurer les réglages Client SMB, WINS, Impression SMB, ou Hébergement direct. [Paramètres Services Web] Configurez les réglages pour la numérisation ou l'impression par services Web. [Paramètre Bonjour] Configurez le paramètre Bonjour. [Paramètre NetWare] Configurez le paramètre NetWare. [Paramètre AppleTalk] Configurez les paramètres AppleTalk. 9 Présentation du mode Administrateur 9-40 ineo 223/283/363/423 9.6 Référence - Les fonctions suivantes sont disponibles seulement lorsqu'un Disque dur est installé. – [S/MIME] dans [Configuration e-mail] – [Paramètre Network Fax] 9.6.6 Boîtes La connexion en mode Administrateur vous permet d'effectuer une opération sur une boîte sans entrer le mot de passe pour l'ouvrir. [Paramètre Network Fax] Configurez les réglages Émission directe SMTP ou Réception directe SMTP. [Paramètres WebDAV] Configurez les réglages WebDAV. [Réglage OpenAPI] Configurez les réglages OpenAPI. [Paramètre TCP Socket] Configurez les réglages Socket TCP pour activer la communication de données entre cette machine et l'application installée sur votre ordinateur. [Paramètres d'authentificat. IEEE802.1X] Permet de configurer les paramètres d'authentificat. IEEE802.1X. [Réglage LLTD] Sélectionnez si LLTD doit ou non être activé. [Réglages SSDP] Configurez les réglages SSDP. [Réglage Bluetooth] Sélectionnez si Bluetooth doit ou non être activé. • Pour activer une communication Bluetooth, contactez le SAV au préalable. Élément Description Élément Description [Connexion de boîte] Ouvre la boîte qui vient d'être créée (boîte Publique, Groupe ou Personnelle) pour vous permettre de changer le réglage de la boîte. • Les opérations sur les documents ne sont pas disponibles en mode Administrateur. • Les opérations sur les boîtes sont disponibles même si un mot de passe a été spécifié pour la boîte concernée. [Créer Boîte utilisateur] Permet de créer une nouvelle boîte. ineo 223/283/363/423 9-41 9.6 Présentation du mode Administrateur 9 Référence - [Ouvrir Boîte Utilis.] et [Boîte Utilisat.] ne s'affichent que si un Disque dur est installé. 9.6.7 Réglages imprimante [Ouvrir Boîte utilisateur Système] Permet d'ouvrir la boîte utilisateur Système (Bulletin, Réception confidentielle, Relais, ou Annotation) pour permettre une opération sur un document enregistré dans la boîte ou de changer le réglage de la boîte. • Les boîtes Bulletin et Relais sont disponibles si le Kit Fax en option est installé. • La boîte Document sécurisé est disponible lorsque le Kit Fax en option est installé et qu'aucun Disque dur n'est installé. • La Boîte Annotation n'est disponible que si un Disque dur est installé. [Créer Boîte utilisateur Système] Cette fonction permet de créer une nouvelle boîte Bulletin, Réception confidentielle, Relais ou Annotation. • Les boîtes Bulletin et Relais sont disponibles si le Kit Fax en option est installé. • La boîte Document sécurisé est disponible lorsque le Kit Fax en option est installé et qu'aucun Disque dur n'est installé. • La Boîte Annotation n'est disponible que si un Disque dur est installé. Élément Description Élément Description [Paramètre fonctions de base] Spécifiez les valeurs par défaut de l'imprimante. [Configuration PCL] Spécifiez les valeurs par défaut en mode PCL. [Configuration PS] Spécifiez les valeurs par défaut en mode PS. [Configuration TIFF] Spécifiez le papier pour imprimer les images TIFF. [Paramètre XPS] Configurez les réglages d'impression XPS. [Réglage d'interface] Spécifiez le délai avant déconnexion de l'interface. [Réglages Impression directe] Configurez les réglages pour activer l'impression directe à l'aide de Web Connection. 9 Présentation du mode Administrateur 9-42 ineo 223/283/363/423 9.6 9.6.8 Enregistrement Destination [Assigner Compte pour Acquérir Infos Périphérique] Sélectionnez si un mot de passe doit être spécifié pour autoriser l'acquisition des informations sur le périphérique via le pilote d'imprimante. []Si vous choisissez ON, spécifiez le mot de passe. Élément Description Élément Description [Carnet d'adresses] Permet de consulter le carnet d'adresses enregistré dans cette machine ou d'enregistrer ou changer une adresse. [Groupe] Permet de consulter le carnet d'adresses Groupe enregistré dans cette machine ou d'enregistrer ou changer une adresse. [Programme] Permet de consulter le carnet d'adresses Programme enregistré dans cette machine ou d'enregistrer ou changer une adresse. [Temporaire Une-Touche] Permet de consulter le carnet d'adresses Programme temporaire enregistré dans cette machine ou d'enregistrer ou changer une adresse. [Titre] Permet d'enregistrer un maximum de 10 titres pour l'envoi d'E-mails. [Texte] Permet d'enregistrer un maximum 10 corps de messages à utiliser lors de l'envoi d'E-mails. [Enregistrement de l'application] Permet d'enregistrer les réglages de l'application et les adresses serveur en cas d'utilisation d'applications telles que RightFax Server enregistrées sur le serveur externe. L'enregistrement des applications et des serveurs permet de se connecter automatiquement au serveur de l'application sélectionnée. • [Enregistrement de l'application] ne s'affiche pas si le Kit Fax en option est installé. [Préfixe/Suffixe] Enregistre le préfixe ou le suffixe à ajouter comme informations de destination lors de l'envoi d'E-mails. ineo 223/283/363/423 9-43 9.6 Présentation du mode Administrateur 9 9.6.9 Réglage fax Élément Description [Position En-tête/Pied pag] Configurez le réglage permettant d'imprimer les informations relatives à l'expéditeur ou au destinataire. [Réglage Paramètre Ligne] Permet de spécifier la ligne fax tel que pour la Méthode de numérotation. [Paramètres Émission/Réception] Permet de configurer les réglages Papier, Boîte ou autres, pour l'envoi ou la réception de données. [Réglage Fonction] Permet de configurer les réglages fax pour Récept Mémoire ou Fax Réseau. [Réglage Connexion PBX] Permet de spécifier la ligne extérieure pour la connexion PBX. [Réglage Rapport] Permet de configurer les réglages d'un rapport, comme par exemple le Rapport activité, à produire lors de l'envoi ou de la réception de données. [Réglage multi-lignes] Permet de spécifier les paramètres et fonction de la ligne étendue. • L'élément s'affiche en présence d'une ligne étendue. [Paramètre Network Fax] Permet de configurer le réglage pour l'utilisation du fax réseau. • Cet élément ne s'affiche que si un Disque dur est installé. [Informations En-tête] Permet d'enregistrer les informations de l'expéditeur et son numéro de fax, lors de l'envoi de données. [Réglages Qualité Impression Fax] Spécifiez s'il faut corriger un fax reçu en G3 en fonction de la résolution. • Par faible résolution, il faut entendre 200 dpi e 100 dpi, 200 dpi e 200 dpi, ou 300 dpi e 300 dpi, et par haute résolution, il faut entendre 400 dpi e 400 dpi. 9 Présentation du mode Administrateur 9-44 ineo 223/283/363/423 9.6 9.6.10 Multiréglage Configurez les éléments qui nécessitent plusieurs réglages en suivant les instructions qui s'affichent dans la fenêtre. Les éléments de réglage disponibles sont les suivants. - Configuration des réglages d'envoi d'un document numérisé - Configuration des réglages d'impression réseau - Restriction d'utilisation de la machine Référence - Pendant la procédure de réglage, sa progression est affichée à gauche. - Si le réglage est annulé, vous revenez à l'écran Multiréglage après application des éléments configurés avant l'annulation. 10 Annexe ineo 223/283/363/423 10-3 10.1 Liste des messages d'erreur 10 10 Annexe 10.1 Liste des messages d'erreur Si un message d'erreur apparaît, exécutez l'opération correspondante décrite ci-dessous. dPour info Pour plus d'informations sur les paramètres réseau, voir le [Guide de l'utilisateur Administrateur Réseau]. Message Cause et dépannage Impossible de se connecter au réseau. Vérifiez que le câble du réseau est correctement branché. Assurezvous par ailleurs de la configuration correcte des paramètres réseau dans Réglage Administrateur. Sélection impossible de l'adresse pour la méthode de communication, pour cause de dépassement du maximum admis d'adresses pour la diffusion. Le nombre de destinations spécifié dépasse le nombre possible de diffusion générale. Réduisez le nombre de destinations de diffusion ou envoyez la transmission en lots multiples. Le document n'a pu être enregistré dans la boîte utilisateur par manque d'espace sur DD. Vérifiez le journal. Le disque dur est plein. Supprimez les données inutiles et réessayez d'enregistrer les données. Le nombre de boîtes utilis. enregistrées a atteint le maximum admissible. Le nombre de boîtes utilis. enregistrées a atteint le maximum admissible. Le nombre de boîtes utilisateur qu'il est possible d'enregistrer a atteint son maximum. Le nombre de documents enregistrés dans la boîte a atteint le nombre maximal autorisé. Le nombre de documents enregistrés dans la boîte a atteint le nombre maximal autorisé. Le nombre de documents qu'il est possible d'enregistrer dans une boîte utilisateur a atteint son maximum. Le nombre de tâches programmées a atteint le maximum admissible. Patienter jusqu'à l'achèvement d'une tâche programmée. Le nombre de tâches qu'il est possible de programmer a atteint son maximum. Veuillez attendre qu'une tâche soit terminée ou supprimez une tâche en cours. 10 Glossaire 10-4 ineo 223/283/363/423 10.2 10.2 Glossaire Terme Description 10Base-T/100Base-TX/ 1000Base-T Ensemble de caractéristiques appartenant aux normes Ethernet. On utilise des câbles à deux fils torsadés en cuivre. La vitesse de transmission est de 10 Mbps avec 10Base-T, de 100 Mbps avec 100Base-TX et de 1000 Mbps avec 1000Base-T. Adobe® Flash® Logiciel ou format de fichier développé par Adobe Systems Inc. (anciennement Macromedia, Inc.), utilisé pour la création d'animations vectorielles. Le logiciel permet de gérer le contenu interactif à partir du clavier ou de la souris. Les fichiers restent relativement compacts et on peut y accéder à partir d'un navigateur Web équipé du logiciel plug-in dédié. Adresse IP Adresse ou code utilisé pour identifier les périphériques individuels du réseau sur Internet. IPv4 (Protocole Internet version 4), protocole largement utilisé aujourd'hui, adopte un nombre de 32 bits divisé en quatre sections pour une adresse IP. 192.168.1.10 est un exemple d'adresse IP IPv4. En revanche, dans la génération suivante IPv6 (Protocole Internet version 6), les adresses IP sont de 128 bits. Une adresse IP est affectée à chaque ordinateur ou autre périphérique connecté à Internet. Aperçu Fonction vous permettant d'afficher une image avant de passer à l'impression ou la numérisation proprement dite. Authentification & Impression Fonction vous permettant d'imprimer le travail envoyé par le pilote de l'imprimante au cours de l'authentification utilisateur. Bit Acronyme de binary digit (chiffre binaire). La plus petite unité d'information (quantité de données) gérée sur un ordinateur ou une imprimante. Un bit ne peut prendre que de valeurs 0 ou 1 pour indiquer les données. BMP Abréviation de bitmap. Format de fichier utilisé pour l'enregistrement de données images. (L'extension du fichier est ".bmp".) Généralement utilisé sur les plates-formes Windows. BMP couvre l'intensité de la couleur monochrome (2 valeurs) ou couleur (16 777 216 couleurs). Les images BMP ne conviennent pas au stockage en format comprimé. Compensation de densité C'est une fonction de correction de teinte de couleur utilisée pour les périphériques de sortie, comme les imprimantes et les écrans. Contraste Différence d'intensité entre les parties claires et foncées de l'image (variation Clair/Foncé). "Faible contraste" indique une image à faible variation clair/foncé, alors que "Contraste élevé" indique une image à grande variation clair/foncé. Définition La valeur de la résolution exprime la précision de reproduction des détails d'un objet sur une image ou un objet d'impression. Dégradé Les niveaux de dégradés d'une image. Plus les niveaux sont nombreux, plus ils sont à même de reproduire une variation nuancée. Demi-teinte Méthode d'expression des ombres d'une image en utilisant différentes tailles de points noirs et blancs. Densité La quantité de densité d'une image. Désinstaller Permet de désinstaller des logiciels installés sur un ordinateur DHCP Acronyme de Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol : utilisé pour un ordinateur client sur le réseau TCP/IP afin de télécharger automatiquement la configuration réseau à partir d'un serveur. La simple utilisation d'un serveur DHCP pour centraliser la gestion des adresses IP des clients DHCP, permet de construire un réseau sans conflits d'adresses IP ou autres problèmes. Disque dur Un périphérique de stockage de masse pour enregistrer les données. Les données sont conservées même après coupure de l'alimentation. ineo 223/283/363/423 10-5 10.2 Glossaire 10 DNS Acronyme de Domain Name System. Le système DNS permet d'obtenir l'adresse IP correspondante à un nom d'hôte dans un environnement réseau. Il permet à l'utilisateur d'accéder à d'autres ordinateur du réseau en spécifiant des noms d'hôtes au lieu d'utiliser des adresses IP évasives et non-intuitives. DPI (dpi) Acronyme de Dots Per Inch (Points par pouce). Unité de définition utilisée par les imprimantes et les scanners. Indique le nombre de points par pouce. Plus la valeur est élevée, plus la définition est importante. Ethernet Norme pour les lignes de transmission LAN. Extension de fichier Caractères ajoutés au nom du fichier pour reconnaître le format de fichier. L'extension de fichier est ajoutée au nom après un point, par exemple, ".bmp" ou ".jpg". Fréquence d'écran Indique la densité des points utilisée pour créer l'image. FTP Abréviation de File Transfer Protocol. Protocole utilisé pour le transfert de fichiers sur un réseau Internet, intranet ou autre réseau TCP/IP. FTP anonyme Alors que des sites FTP normaux sont protégés par un nom de compte et un mot de passe, ce type de site FTP est accessible à tout le monde sans mot de passe en saisissant Anonyme comme nom de compte. HTTP Abréviation de File Transfer Protocol. C'est un protocole utilisé pour envoyer et recevoir des données entre un serveur Internet et un client (comme navigateur Web). Le protocole HTTP permet d'échanger des fichiers image, son et vidéo associés à des documents y compris leurs formats de présentation et autres informations. Installer C'est l'implantation de matériel, des systèmes d'exploitation, des applications, des pilotes d'imprimante ou d'autres logiciels sur un ordinateur. IP Auto Fonction permettant d'obtenir automatiquement une adresse IP. Si l'acquisition d'une adresse IP a échoué auprès du DHCP, IP auto permet d'obtenir une adresse IP depuis l'adresse "169.254.0.0". JPEG Acronyme de Joint Photographic Experts Groupe, un des formats de fichier permettant d'enregistrer des données image. (L'extension de fichier est ".jpg".) Le taux de compression est généralement 1/10 à 1/100. JPEG est une méthode efficace de compression des photographies et d'autres images naturelles. Kerberos Système d'authentification réseau utilisé par les systèmes d'exploitation MS à partir de Windows 2000, utilisé comme authentification du répertoire actif. Kerberos met en place un site authentique au sein du réseau proposant des processus d'authentification en deux phases d'ID utilisateurs et l'utilisation de ressources réseau, permettant aux utilisateurs d'être authentifiés en toute sécurité et de manière efficace. LAN Acronyme de Local Area Network. Ce réseau connecte des ordinateurs sur le même étage, dans le même bâtiment ou dans les bâtiments avoisinants. LDAP Acronyme de Lightweight Directory Access Protocol : protocole utilisé pour l'accès à une base de données capable de gérer des adresses électroniques et des informations d'environnement réseau des utilisateurs sur le réseau Internet, intranet ou autre réseau TCP/IP. Masque sous-réseau Une valeur utilisée pour diviser un réseau TCP/IP en plusieurs petits réseaux (sous-réseaux). Ceci permet d'identifier le nombre de bits supérieurs de l'adresse IP utilisés pour l'adresse réseau. Mémoire Mémoire destinée au stockage temporaire des données. Certains types de mémoire conservent les données même après la mise hors tension, d'autres pas. Mode PASV Abréviation de PASsiVe, mode servant à connecter un serveur FTP derrière un pare-feu. Si ce mode de connexion n'est pas sélectionné, le pare-feu considère l'accès comme non autorisé et bloque la connexion, empêchant toute transmission de fichiers. Terme Description 10 Glossaire 10-6 ineo 223/283/363/423 10.2 Navigateur Web Logiciel utilisé pour afficher les pages Web. Les navigateurs Web typiques comprennent Internet Explorer et Netscape Navigator. Niv.Gris Forme expressive d'une image monochrome utilisant les informations de dégradé du blanc et du noir. No. de Port Numéro utilisé pour identifier un port de communication assigné pour chaque processus basé sur un ordinateur du réseau. Le même port ne peut pas être utilisé par plusieurs processus. Numérisation Lecture d'une image lors d'une numérisation par le scanner, par le déplacement progressif d'une rangée de capteurs d'image. Le sens des capteurs d'image mobiles est appelé Direction de numérisation principale et la direction de l'alignement des capteurs d'image est appelée Sens secondaire de lecture. Octet Un octet indique une unité d'information (quantité de données) traitée par un ordinateur ou une imprimante. Un octet comporte huit bits. OS Abréviation de système d'exploitation. Logiciel de base utilisé pour contrôler le système d'un ordinateur. Windows, MacOS et Unix sont des systèmes d'exploitation. Par défaut Un réglage initial. Il s'agit des réglages sélectionnés à l'avance et activés lors de la mise en marche de la machine, ou des réglages sélectionnés à l'avance et activés lors de l'activation de la fonction. Passerelle par défaut Périphérique (ordinateur ou routeur) utilisé comme "passerelle" pour accéder à des ordinateurs se trouvant sur divers réseaux LAN. PDF Abréviation de Portable Document Format. Il s'agit d'un document formaté électroniquement avec comme extension de fichier ".pdf". PDF s'appuie sur le format PostScript. Pour prendre connaissance des documents PDF, vous pouvez utiliser le programme gratuit Adobe Reader. PDF compact Méthode de compression pour réduire le volume des données grâce au format PDF et servant à numériser les documents en couleurs. Le PDF compact présente des performances élevées en termes de compression et pour cela, il identifie les zones de texte et d'images, et applique la résolution et la méthode de compression optimisée pour chaque zone. La méthode Compact PDF peut être sélectionnée pour convertir des documents en données à l'aide des fonctions de numérisation de la machine. Pilote Logiciel fonctionnant comme passerelle entre un ordinateur et un périphérique. Pilote d'imprimante Logiciel fonctionnant comme passerelle entre un ordinateur et une imprimante. Pixel La plus petite unité constitutive d'une image. Plug and Play Mécanisme de détection immédiate d'un périphérique raccordé à un ordinateur et de recherche automatique d'un pilote approprié pour rendre le périphérique opérationnel. Police Bitmap Police utilisant une juxtaposition de points pour présenter les caractères. Les caractères Bitmap de grande taille aggravent de manière non négligeable les irrégularités de contour des caractères. PPI Acronyme de Pixels Per Inch, unité de mesure de la résolution, particulièrement pour les écrans et les scanners. Il indique combien il y a de pixels par pouce. Propriétés Informations d'attribut. Quand vous utilisez un pilote d'imprimante, plusieurs fonctions peuvent être spécifiées dans les propriétés du fichier. Les propriétés d'un fichier vous permettent de vérifier les informations d'attribut du fichier. Protocole Règle qui permet à un ordinateur de communiquer avec d'autres ordinateurs ou périphériques. Serveur Proxy Serveur installé pour servir de connexion intermédiaire entre chaque client et différents serveurs pour assurer la sécurité de manière efficace sur tout le réseau pour les connexions Internet. Terme Description ineo 223/283/363/423 10-7 10.2 Glossaire 10 SMB Abréviation de Serveur Message Block. Il s'agit de protocole de partage des fichiers et des imprimantes principalement sur un réseau Windows. SSD Acronyme de Solid State Drive. Il s'agit d'une mémoire de masse intégrée à cette machine. Ce lecteur permet d'archiver un document enregistré ou reçu par fax lorsqu'un Disque dur n'est pas installé. SSL/TLS Acronyme de Secure Socket Layer/Transport Layer Security : méthode de codage utilisée pour transférer en toute sécurité les données entre le serveur Internet et le navigateur. TCP/IP Acronyme de Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol. Le protocole standard de facto utilisé par Internet. Chaque périphérique du réseau est identifié par une adresse IP. TIFF Acronyme de Tagged Image File Format : un des formats de fichier utilisé pour enregistrer des données image. (L'extension de fichier est .tif.) En fonction du "tag" indiquant le type de données, les informations de différents formats d'image peuvent être enregistrés dans une seule donnée d'image. TIFF plusieurs pages Fichier TIFF comportant plusieurs pages. TIFF Simple page Fichier TIFF qui ne contient qu'une seule page. Tramage Une méthode de présentation du quasi-ombrage de gris en utilisant les couleurs noir et blanc. Cette méthode est plus facile à appliquer que la diffusion d'erreur mais peut conférer une certaines irrégularité à l'image. Travail d'impression Demande d'impression transmise par un ordinateur à un périphérique d'impression. TWAIN Une norme d'interface définie entre périphériques de mise en image englobant les scanners et les appareils photo numériques et les applications comportant un logiciel graphique. Pour utiliser un périphérique compatible TWAIN, il faut installer le pilote TWAIN approprié USB Abréviation de Universal Serial Bus. Il s'agit d'une interface générale définie pour connecter une souris, une imprimante et autres périphériques à un ordinateur. Vignette Fonction permettant d'afficher le contenu d'un fichier image ou document sous forme d'image réduite (l'image affichée lorsque le fichier est ouvert). Terme Description 10 Glossaire 10-8 ineo 223/283/363/423 10.2 11 Index ineo 223/283/363/423 11-3 11.1 Index des éléments 11 11 Index 11.1 Index des éléments A Accès 9-3 Adr. E-Mail 7-47 Affichage des Informations détaillées 7-69 Agraf. - Réglage Position 7-12 Agrafage 7-11 Aide en ligne 9-4 Aperçu 3-18, 3-19, 7-69 Aperçu/Définir Plage 7-76 Aperçu/Spécification par saisie 7-77 Applications 7-62, 7-70 Applications - Copie Livre 6-16 Applications - Effacement cadre 6-15 Archivage 4-17 Authentification Utilisateur 2-9 B Boîte 9-18, 9-40 Boîte Annotation 6-3, 7-89, 8-18 Boîte Bulletin 7-82, 8-8 Boîte Document Sécurisé 7-84 Boîte Document sécurisé 8-10 Boîte Document sécurisé (Système) 7-108 Boîte Émission relève 7-83 Boîte PDF Cryptés Mot de Passe 7-97 Boîte Relais 8-9 Boîte Ré-émission Fax 7-95 Boîte Util. Autor./Interd. 8-24 Boîte Utilis. ID & Impr. 7-98 Boîte utilisateur réception mémoire obligatoire 7-87 C Cache du navigateur Internet 9-4 Capacité Réception Récepteur 7-42 Carnet Adresse - Recherche simple 7-38 Changer Texte 7-92 Chapitres 7-20 Chemin Fichier 7-43, 7-44, 7-45, 7-101 Code d'accès 7-43, 7-44, 7-45 Combinaison 7-7, 7-14 Configuration de la page 9-15 Contrôle/Modif. temp. 7-30 Copie 7-66 Copies 7-10 Corps de texte 7-57 Couleur 7-68 Créer une boîte utilisateur 8-6, 8-17 Cryptage 6-9, 7-50 Cryptage - Paramètres Détaillés 6-9, 7-50 Cryptage E-Mail 7-61 D Date/Heure 7-21 De 7-57 De base - Couleur 6-12 De base - Type original 6-6 Densité 7-93 Décalage 7-11 Décalage Image - Changer Décalage verso 7-17 Définition 7-48, 7-67 Délai de suppression des PDF cryptés 8-22 Délai Suppr. Doc. Impr. Sécurisée 8-22 Délai Suppress. ID & Impr. 8-23 Département 7-48 Déplacer les documents 7-65 Déplacer Page 7-74 Déplacer/Copier 9-32 Dépoussiérer 6-20 Détail 3-13 Détails Document 7-69, 7-102 Détails Sécurité 8-28 Données PDF cryptées 7-101 E ECM OFF 7-55 Effacem. Livre - Effacement Bords 6-16 Effacement Livre - Effacement Centre 6-17 E-mail 7-41 EMI Outremer 7-54 Enregistrement 4-3, 4-11 Enregistrement Destination 9-20, 9-42 Enregistrer dans mémoire externe 7-66 Enregistrer des documents 2-4, 6-3 Enregistrer la surimpression 7-78 Entretien 9-35 Environnement d'exploitation 9-3 Envoi 4-8 Envoyer 7-34, 7-35, 9-27 É Écran tactile 3-6 Écraser 7-80 Écraser données Disque Dur 8-29 Écraser toutes les données 8-30 Émission différée 7-59 Émission sur mot de passe 7-60 F Fax 7-41 11-4 ineo 223/283/363/423 11 Index des éléments 11.1 Fax Adresse IP 7-42 Fax Internet 7-42 Finition 7-11 Format de Numérisat. 6-13 Format Photo 6-13 Format standard 6-13 Formatage DD 8-32 Formater SSD 8-33 Formats perso 6-13 FTP 7-44 G Glossaire 10-4 Groupe 7-11 H Historique tâches 7-46 I Icônes 3-6 Identification Utilisateur/Suivi Compte 9-38 Impr/Enreg 7-97 Impress. par page 7-63 Impression 4-5, 4-15, 7-7, 7-8, 9-24 Impression - Application 7-16 Impression - Fonction de base 7-10, 7-102 Impression continue 7-15 Impression directe 9-19 Impression sécurisée seulement 8-28 Index 7-39 Information 9-17 Insertion Feuille 7-19 Insertion Feuille/Couverture/Chapitre 7-17 L Lier EMI 7-35 Liste de fichiers 9-23 Liste des messages d'erreur 10-3 Liste Tâches 3-8 Liste Tâches - Détails tâche 3-9 Liste Tâches - Supprimer 3-8 M Marge 6-17 Marge page 7-16 Mémoire externe 4-11, 4-15, 6-3, 7-100 Méthode Copie Livre 6-16 Mobile/PDA 7-105 Modif. document 7-71 Modif. Nom 7-65 Mot de passe Accès DD 8-31 Multiréglage 9-44 N Netteté 6-15 Niveau Suppression Fond 6-14 Nom 7-47 Nom d'hôte 7-44, 7-45 Nom d'utilisateur 7-43, 7-44, 7-45 Nom de fichier 2-11 Nom du Document 7-56 Nom Entreprise 7-48 Nom Serveur 7-43 Nombre maximum de boîtes 8-20 Notif. Erreur Lien Fichier 8-12 Nouveau 7-79 Numérisation Séparée 6-18 Numéro Fax 7-47 Numéro Page 7-22 O Onglet par Défaut 8-11 Options de recherche 7-40 Organisation des documents 2-7 Original spécial 6-19 OU/ET/DÉBUT/FINIT PAR 7-48 P Panneau de contrôle 3-3 Papier 7-103 Param. Insert Feuille 7-23 Paramétrage cryptage DD 8-33 Paramètres 7-18 Paramètres Administrateur 8-4, 8-16 Paramètres Affichage Perso 8-11 Paramètres Détaillés 7-25, 7-27, 7-28, 7-29, 7-81 Paramètres du disque dur 8-28 Paramètres ID & Imprimer 8-26 Paramètres Numérisation 6-6 PC (SMB) 7-43 PDF Contours 6-11, 7-52 Perforation - Réglage Position 7-12 Perforer 7-12 Personnaliser 9-21 Pivoter Page 7-72 Pli/Reliure 7-13 Position 7-25, 7-29 Position d'impression 7-93 Prénom 7-47 Prochaine Destination 7-43, 7-44, 7-45 Protection copie 7-24 R Rech. Adresse 7-46 Recherche détaillée 7-39, 7-58 Recherche LDAP - Recher simple 7-47 Recherche LDAP - Recherche Avancée 7-47 Recto/Recto-Verso 7-10 Référence 7-43 Réglage administrateur Boîte Utilisateur 8-27 Réglage attente doc. 8-23 Réglage Boîte Utilisateur 8-11, 8-21 Réglage de base - Densité 6-12 Réglage de base - Définition 6-7 Réglage de base - Recto/Recto-Verso 6-7 ineo 223/283/363/423 11-5 11.1 Index des éléments 11 Réglage de base - Type Fichier 6-8 Réglage Délai suppression Document 8-25 Réglage Fax 9-43 Réglage ID & Imprimer Supprimer après impression 8-25 Réglage image 6-14 Réglage Ligne 7-54 Réglage Méthode Communication 7-59 Réglage Mobile/PDA 8-13, 8-26 Réglage Numérisation 6-11, 7-53 Réglage Surimpression 7-33 Réglage Système 9-36 Réglages Archivage 7-64 Réglages de communication 7-54 Réglages détaillés 7-44, 7-45 Réglages E-Mail 7-56 Réglages En-tête Fax 7-61 Réglages Fonction Mémoire Externe 8-24 Réglages Horodatage 8-34 Réglages imprimante 9-41 Réglages Original 6-19 Réglages SSD 8-28 Réglages Tampon 8-34 Réseau 9-39 S Saisie directe 7-40, 7-58 Saisie du code PIN 7-106 Save in user box 7-104 Sécurité 9-37 Sélection ligne 7-55 Signature numérique 7-61 Spécifier Direction - Orientation Original 6-19 Spécifier direction - Position Reliure 6-20 Structure des menus 1-7, 4-23, 8-3 Suppr. Docs Impr. Sécurisée 8-21 Suppr. page 7-71 Suppression de documents 7-65 Supprimer Boîte utilisateur inutilisée 8-21 Supprimer Boîte Vide (Réglages Administrateur) 8-7 Surimpr. enreg. 7-32 Surimpression Tampon 7-52 Système 6-4 T Tampon 7-23 Tampon répétitif 7-28 Tampon/Surimpression 7-21 Tâche 9-18 Texte Numérotation 7-92 Téléchargement 9-29 Tête/Pied de page 7-30 Titre 7-56 Touche de raccourci 8-12 Transmission F-Code 7-60 Tri 7-11 Type d'adresse 7-38 Type Fichier 6-8, 7-49, 7-68 Type Numéro 7-93 Type Pare-copie 7-26 Type Tampon 7-28 U Utilis/Archiv 7-3 Utilis/Archiv - Détails 3-16 Utilis/Archiv - Vérif.Régl. Tâche 3-16 Utilis/Archiv - Vérif.Régl. Tâche - Contenu Réglage Document 3-17 Utilis/Archiv - Vérif.Régl. Tâche - Réglage communication 3-18 Utilis/Archiv - Vérif.Régl. Tâche - Réglages E-mail 3-18 Utilis/Archiv - Vérif.Régl. Tâche - Vérifier Adresse 3-17 Utilisation des documents 2-5 Utilisation serveur proxy 8-13 V V.34 Désactivé 7-55 Vérif. Dest. & envoyer 7-55 Vérif. régl URL Dest 7-58 Vérification Capacité DD 8-28 Vérifier capacité SSD 8-29 Vérifier les préférences d'impression 7-106 Ville 7-47 Volet de gauche 3-7 W Web Connection 9-3 WebDAV 7-45 Z Zoom 7-14 11-6 ineo 223/283/363/423 11 Index des touches 11.2 11.2 Index des touches 2 en 1 7-14 4 en 1 7-14 8 en 1 7-14 A Adr. E-Mail 7-47 Afficher Liste 7-4 Afficher Nom 7-33 Agraf. Centre/Pliage 7-13 Aperçu 3-7, 3-18, 7-69 Aperçu/Définir Plage 7-76 Aperçu/Spécification par saisie 7-77 Applications 7-36 Augmenter Priorité 3-9 Auto 6-20 Autre 7-25, 7-26, 7-28, 7-29 B Boîte Annotation 7-89, 8-18 Boîte Bulletin 7-82, 8-8 Boîte Document Sécurisé 7-84 Boîte Document sécurisé 4-39 Boîte Émission en relève 7-83 Boîte PDF Cryptés Mot de Passe 7-97 Boîte Public, Privé ou Groupe 8-6 Boîte Relais 8-9 Boîte Réception mémoire 7-87 Boîte Util. Autor./Interd. 8-24 Boîte Utilis. ID & Impr. 7-98 Boîte Utilisateur 6-5 C Capacité Réception Récepteur 7-42 Changer Position/Supprimer 7-25, 7-29 Changer Texte 7-92 Chapitres 7-17 Chemin Fichier 7-43, 7-44, 7-45 Code d'accès 6-9, 7-43, 7-44, 7-45, 7-50, 8-6, 8-8, 8-18 Combinaison 7-6, 7-8, 7-14 Compact PDF 7-49 Configurer la boîte 8-21 Contrôle/Modif. temp. 7-30 Copie 7-19, 7-64, 7-66 Copie Livre 6-16 Corps de texte 7-57 Couleur 6-12, 7-53 Couleur Auto 6-12 Couleur Texte 7-62 Couleurs 6-12, 7-53 Couv + Recto/Verso 6-7 Couvert. Face 6-16 Cryptage 6-9, 7-50 Cryptage E-Mail 7-61 D Date/Heure 7-21, 7-25, 7-26, 7-28, 7-29, 7-92, 8-19 De 7-57 Densité 6-12, 7-25, 7-29, 7-81, 7-93, 8-19 Destination Relais 8-9 Décalage vertical 7-16 Définition 6-7, 7-48 Délai suppress Impress. sécuris. 8-22 Délai suppress PDF cryptés 8-22 Délai Suppress. ID & Impr. 8-23 Département 7-48 Déplacer 7-64 Déplacer les documents 7-65 Dépoussiérer 6-20 Détail 3-10, 3-11, 3-12, 3-13, 3-14, 3-16 Détails Document 7-4, 7-64, 7-69, 7-70, 7-86, 7-88, 7-94, 7-102, 7-109 Détails Image 7-33 Détails tâche 3-9 Détails Texte 7-22, 7-31 Dos (copié) 7-18 Dos (vierge) 7-18 Double page 6-16 E ECM OFF 7-55 Effacement bords 6-16 Effacement cadre 6-15 Effacement centre 6-17 E-mail 7-41 EMI Outremer 7-54 Enregistrer document 7-4, 8-24 Enregistrer la surimpression 7-70, 7-78, 7-94 É Écraser 7-80 Écraser données 8-30 Écraser Trame 7-25, 7-29 Émission différée 7-59 Émission sur mot de passe 7-60 F Face (copiée) 7-18 Face (vierge) 7-18 Faire suivre 3-13 Fax 3-20, 7-41, 7-96 Fax Adresse IP 7-42 Fax Internet 7-42 Finition 7-8, 7-9 Format de Numérisat. 6-13 Format Photo 6-13 Formatage DD 8-32 Formater SSD 8-33 Formats perso 6-13 FTP 7-44 ineo 223/283/363/423 11-7 11.2 Index des touches 11 G Gauche 6-20 Groupe 7-36 H Haut 6-20 I Ignorer Page(s) 7-23 Image 7-52 Impress. par page 7-63 Impression 7-6, 7-99, 7-102 Impression continue 7-9, 7-15 Impression épreuve 7-95 Impression sécurisée seulement 8-28 Imprimer Document 8-24 Imprimer Page # 7-23 Imprimer sur la face et le dos 7-23 Imprimer sur le dos seulement 7-23 Index 7-39, 8-6 Initialiser 7-4 Insertion Feuille 7-17 Insertion Feuille/Couverture/Chapitre 7-8 Insérer Papier 7-19 J JPEG 6-8, 7-49 L L1 3-11, 3-13 L2 3-11, 3-13 Lecture 3-20 Libérer Tâch Att 3-10 Lier ÉMI 7-34 Liste Comm. 3-12, 3-13, 3-14 Liste Tâches 3-7, 3-8 M Manuel 7-14 Marge de page 7-8, 7-9, 7-16 Mémoire externe 7-100 Minimal 7-14 Mode 1 8-29 Mode 2 8-29 Modif. document 7-70 Modif. Nom 7-64, 7-65, 7-86, 7-88, 7-94, 7-109 Mot de passe accès disque dur 8-31 Mot de passe ÉMI Relais 8-9, 8-10 Multi Page 6-11, 7-53 N N° Bte Ut. 8-6, 8-8, 8-9, 8-10, 8-18 Ne pas imprimer # 7-23 Netteté 6-15 Niv.Gris 6-12, 7-53 Niveau Suppression Fond 6-14 Noir 6-12, 7-53 Nom 7-47 Nom Boîte 8-6, 8-8, 8-9, 8-10, 8-18 Nom d'utilisateur 7-43, 7-44, 7-45 Nom du Document 6-5, 7-56 Nom Entreprise 7-48 Nom Serveur 7-43, 7-44, 7-45 Nouveau 7-79 Numéris. Document Mémoire Externe 8-24 Numérisation Séparée 6-18 Numéro de Fax 7-47 Numéro Page 7-21, 7-22 O Onglet par Défaut 8-11 Orientation original 6-19 Orig. Mixtes 6-19 Original long 6-19 Original plié en Z 6-19 Original Tramé 6-6 OU/ET/DÉBUT/FINIT PAR 7-48 P Page précédente 3-19, 3-20, 7-76 Page suivante 3-19, 3-20, 7-76 Pages Couv. + Dos 6-16 Papier 7-103 Papier Chapitre 7-20 Papier Copié 6-6 Param. Insert Feuille 7-22 Param. Numéris. 6-5 Paramétrage DD 8-28 Paramètres 7-17 Paramètres Affichage Perso - Configurer la boîte 8-11 Paramètres Détaillés 6-9, 7-24, 7-25, 7-27, 7-28, 7-29, 7-33, 7-81 Paramètres ID & Imprimer 8-26 PC (SMB) 7-43 PDF 6-8, 7-49 PDF compact 6-8 Permissions Document 6-9, 7-50 Photo 6-6 Pleine grandeur 7-14 Pli/Reliure 7-13 Pliage en 2 7-13 Position 7-24, 7-25, 7-29 Position d'impression 7-22, 7-24, 7-62, 7-93, 8-19 Position Reliure 6-17, 6-20 Prénom 7-47 Priorité cryptage 8-29 Priorité écrasement 8-29 Prochaine Destination 7-43, 7-44, 7-45 Protection copie 7-21, 7-24 R Recherche 7-36, 7-38, 7-47 Recherche Avancée 7-47 Recherche détaillée 7-39 11-8 ineo 223/283/363/423 11 Index des touches 11.2 Recomposer 3-11, 3-13 Recto 6-7 Recto/Recto-Vers 6-7 Recto-Verso 6-7 Référence 7-43 Régl. Horodatage 8-34 Réglage administrateur Boîte Utilisateur 8-27 Réglage attente doc. 8-23 Réglage communication 7-36 Réglage cryptage DD 8-33 Réglage Délai suppression Document 8-25 Réglage existant 7-14 Réglage ID & Imprimer Supprimer après impression 8-25 Réglage image 6-14 Réglage Maxi. Boîtes 8-20 Réglage Méthode Communication 7-59 Réglage Position 7-12 Réglages détaillés 7-44, 7-45 Réglages Document 7-36 Réglages E-Mail 7-56 Réglages En-tête Fax 7-61 Réglages Fonction Mémoire Externe 8-24 Réglages Ligne 7-54 Réglages Original 6-5, 6-19 Réglages SSD 8-28 S Sélect. Tout 7-4 Séparation 6-16 Séparation Page 6-11, 7-53 Signature numérique 7-61 Suppr. Docs Impr. Sécurisée 8-21 Suppr. page 3-21 Suppression 7-65 Supprimer 3-8, 3-9, 3-11, 3-13, 3-14, 7-64, 7-86, 7-88, 7-94, 7-96, 7-97, 7-99, 7-109 Supprimer Boîte utilisateur inutilisée 8-21 Surimpr. enreg. 7-21, 7-32 Surimpression Tampon 7-52 T Taille Texte 7-24, 7-25, 7-27, 7-28, 7-29, 7-62 Tampon 7-21, 7-23 Tampon enregistré 7-25, 7-29 Tampon prédéfini 7-25, 7-26, 7-28, 7-29 Tampon répétitif 7-21, 7-28 Tampon/Surimpression 7-8, 7-9, 7-62 Tâches effacées 3-10, 3-12, 3-13, 3-14 Tâches terminées 3-10, 3-12, 3-13, 3-14 Temporisation Tâche Émission 3-11 Texte 6-6, 7-52, 8-19 Texte Numérotation 7-92, 8-19 Texte/Photo 6-6 Tête/Pied de page 7-21, 7-30 TIFF 6-8, 7-49 Titre 7-56 Touche de raccourci 8-12 Toutes tâches 3-10, 3-12, 3-13, 3-14 Trame Copie Prot. MdP 7-28 Trame du fond 7-25, 7-27, 7-28 Trame Pare-copie 7-27 Trame Protect Copie 7-25 Transmission F-Code 7-60 Tri 7-19, 7-20 Type d'adresse 7-38 Type Encart 7-19 Type Fichier 6-8, 7-49 Type Numéro 7-93, 8-19 Type original 6-6 U Utiliser réglage couleur existant 7-53 V V.34 Désactivé 7-55 Vérif. régl URL Dest 7-58 Vérifier Capacité DD 8-28 Vérifier capacité SSD 8-29 Vérifier les réglages Tâche 3-16 Vérifier Paramètres Tâches 3-10, 3-11 Vérifier Tâche 3-7 Vierge 7-20 Ville 7-47 Voir Finition 3-19, 3-21 Vue Vignettes 7-4, 7-33 W WebDAV 7-45 X XPS 6-8, 7-49 XPS compact 6-8, 7-49 Z Zoom 7-8, 7-14 Guide de l’utilisateur . bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) Table des matières-1 Table des matières 1 Introduction Termes et conditions......................................................................................................................... 1-3 1.1 À propos de ce guide...................................................................................................................... 1-3 1.1.1 Structure de ce guide de l'utilisateur ................................................................................................ 1-3 1.1.2 Explication des conventions ............................................................................................................. 1-4 Recommandations de sécurité ......................................................................................................... 1-4 Séquence d'actions........................................................................................................................... 1-4 Astuces.............................................................................................................................................. 1-4 Texte avec format spécial ................................................................................................................. 1-5 2 Présentation 2.1 Présentation des fonctions ............................................................................................................ 2-3 2.1.1 Affectation des touches d'application............................................................................................... 2-3 2.1.2 Fonctions i-Option LK-101 ............................................................................................................... 2-3 2.1.3 Fonctions i-Option LK-102 ............................................................................................................... 2-3 2.1.4 Fonctions connectées au moyen de PageScope My Panel Manager .............................................. 2-4 3 Affectation des touches d'application 3.1 Personnaliser les touches d'application ....................................................................................... 3-3 3.1.1 Touche d'application et menu Application........................................................................................ 3-3 Touche d'application......................................................................................................................... 3-3 Menu Application ............................................................................................................................. 3-4 3.1.2 Param. Touche Application ............................................................................................................... 3-4 4 Fonction Navigateur Web 4.1 Présentation..................................................................................................................................... 4-3 4.1.1 Opérations disponibles avec la fonction Navigateur Web ................................................................ 4-3 4.1.2 Caractéristiques ................................................................................................................................ 4-3 4.2 Affichage du Navigateur Web......................................................................................................... 4-4 4.3 Onglet par défaut du Navigateur Web........................................................................................... 4-5 4.3.1 Organisation de l'écran ..................................................................................................................... 4-5 4.3.2 Instructions d'utilisation .................................................................................................................... 4-6 Opération par l'écran tactile .............................................................................................................. 4-6 Opération par le panneau de contrôle .............................................................................................. 4-6 4.3.3 Saisie des lettres/chiffres .................................................................................................................. 4-6 4.3.4 Mode d'affichage .............................................................................................................................. 4-7 Normal............................................................................................................................................... 4-7 Rendu Parfait..................................................................................................................................... 4-7 Rendu intelligent................................................................................................................................ 4-7 4.4 Barre d'outils ................................................................................................................................... 4-8 4.4.1 Description de la barre d'outils ......................................................................................................... 4-8 4.4.2 Favoris (Écrans) ................................................................................................................................. 4-9 4.4.3 Favoris (Ajouter)................................................................................................................................. 4-9 4.4.4 Adresse ............................................................................................................................................. 4-9 4.4.5 Histor. ................................................................................................................................................ 4-9 4.4.6 Impr. ................................................................................................................................................ 4-10 4.4.7 Menu ............................................................................................................................................... 4-10 Table des matières-2 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 4.5 Configurer le Navigateur Web ...................................................................................................... 4-11 4.5.1 Opération Page ............................................................................................................................... 4-11 4.5.2 Vue................................................................................................................................................... 4-11 4.5.3 Activer Onglet .................................................................................................................................. 4-11 4.5.4 Réglages.......................................................................................................................................... 4-12 4.6 Imprimer/Afficher un fichier PDF ................................................................................................. 4-13 4.6.1 Imprimer un fichier PDF................................................................................................................... 4-13 4.6.2 Afficher un fichier PDF..................................................................................................................... 4-14 5 PageScope Web Connection (fonction Navigateur Web) 5.1 Présentation..................................................................................................................................... 5-3 5.1.1 Que peut-on faire avec PageScope Web Connection ...................................................................... 5-3 5.1.2 Accéder à PageScope Web Connection ........................................................................................... 5-3 5.1.3 Cache du navigateur Internet ............................................................................................................ 5-4 5.2 Organisation de l'écran................................................................................................................... 5-5 5.3 Connexion et déconnexion ............................................................................................................. 5-6 5.3.1 Connexion.......................................................................................................................................... 5-6 5.3.2 Déconnexion...................................................................................................................................... 5-7 5.4 Utiliser la fonction Boîte.................................................................................................................. 5-8 5.4.1 Connexion à une boîte....................................................................................................................... 5-8 Liste de fichiers.................................................................................................................................. 5-9 5.4.2 Opérations sur le document ............................................................................................................ 5-10 Impression ....................................................................................................................................... 5-10 Suppression..................................................................................................................................... 5-12 6 Image Panel 6.1 Présentation..................................................................................................................................... 6-3 6.2 Afficher Image Panel ....................................................................................................................... 6-4 6.3 Opérations sur Image Panel ........................................................................................................... 6-5 6.3.1 Organisation de l'écran...................................................................................................................... 6-5 6.3.2 Séquence opératoire ......................................................................................................................... 6-6 6.3.3 Numériser des documents ................................................................................................................ 6-9 Numéris. ............................................................................................................................................ 6-9 Charger depuis un boîte utilisateur.................................................................................................. 6-10 Charger depuis la mémoire externe ................................................................................................ 6-11 6.3.4 Modifier............................................................................................................................................ 6-12 Aperçu ............................................................................................................................................. 6-12 Combiner Documents...................................................................................................................... 6-12 Retour à Dest. Numér. ..................................................................................................................... 6-13 6.3.5 Spécifier destination ........................................................................................................................ 6-13 Impression ....................................................................................................................................... 6-13 Spécifiez un destinataire ................................................................................................................. 6-14 Enregistrer dans mémoire externe .................................................................................................. 6-15 6.3.6 Envoyer vers .................................................................................................................................... 6-15 6.4 Personnaliser Image Panel ........................................................................................................... 6-16 6.4.1 Personnaliser la zone Source Données........................................................................................... 6-16 6.4.2 Personnaliser la zone Destin. Données ........................................................................................... 6-18 6.4.3 Supprimer une icône de raccourci enregistrée ............................................................................... 6-20 7 Enregistrement Photo 7.1 Enregistrer une photo dans le carnet d'adresses ........................................................................ 7-3 7.1.1 Spécifications relatives aux données photo...................................................................................... 7-3 7.1.2 Enregistrer une photo ........................................................................................................................ 7-4 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) Table des matières-3 8 Fonctions Traitement PDF 8.1 Présentation..................................................................................................................................... 8-3 8.1.1 Que peut-on faire avec les fonctions de traitement PDF .................................................................. 8-3 8.1.2 Propriétés des documents PDF ........................................................................................................ 8-4 8.1.3 Cryptage et Signature numérique du fichier PDF ............................................................................. 8-5 Cryptage par mot de passe .............................................................................................................. 8-5 Cryptage par ID numérique ............................................................................................................... 8-6 8.1.4 Impres. dir. ........................................................................................................................................ 8-7 9 Fonctions Mon Panneau 9.1 Présentation..................................................................................................................................... 9-3 9.1.1 Paramètres personnalisables ............................................................................................................ 9-3 9.1.2 Organigramme des fonctions Mon Panneau .................................................................................... 9-4 9.1.3 Restrictions concernant les fonctions Mon Panneau........................................................................ 9-4 9.2 Afficher Mon Panneau .................................................................................................................... 9-5 9.2.1 Écran Menu Comm de Mon Panneau............................................................................................... 9-5 9.2.2 Afficher l'écran Menu Comm............................................................................................................. 9-5 9.3 Personnaliser Mon Panneau .......................................................................................................... 9-6 9.3.1 Réglages Mon Panneau .................................................................................................................... 9-6 9.3.2 Afficher l'écran Réglages Mon Panneau ........................................................................................... 9-6 9.3.3 Réglage Langue ................................................................................................................................ 9-7 9.3.4 Réglage Unité de mesure.................................................................................................................. 9-7 9.3.5 Réglages Copieur.............................................................................................................................. 9-8 Onglet par Défaut .............................................................................................................................. 9-8 Touches de raccourci........................................................................................................................ 9-8 9.3.6 Paramètres Numérisation/Fax........................................................................................................... 9-9 Onglet par Défaut .............................................................................................................................. 9-9 Carnet d'adresses par Défaut ........................................................................................................... 9-9 Touches de raccourci...................................................................................................................... 9-10 Carnet adresses par défaut............................................................................................................. 9-10 9.3.7 Param. Sélection Couleur................................................................................................................ 9-11 9.3.8 Réglages Menu Principal................................................................................................................. 9-11 Écran Réglages Menu Principal ...................................................................................................... 9-11 Enregistrer les touches de menu principal ...................................................................................... 9-12 9.3.9 Réglage Écran par défaut................................................................................................................ 9-12 10 Fonction Mon Carnet d'adresses 10.1 Présentation................................................................................................................................... 10-3 10.1.1 Classement du carnet d'adresses................................................................................................... 10-3 Carnet d'adresses public ................................................................................................................ 10-3 Mon Carnet d'adresses................................................................................................................... 10-3 10.1.2 Organigramme des fonctions Mon Carnet d'adresses ................................................................... 10-4 10.1.3 Restrictions relatives aux fonctions Mon Carnet d'adresses.......................................................... 10-4 10.2 Enregistrement ou édition d'une adresse................................................................................... 10-5 10.2.1 Carnet Adresses.............................................................................................................................. 10-5 10.2.2 Groupe ............................................................................................................................................ 10-7 10.3 Copier des adresses enregistrées d'un carnet à l'autre ........................................................... 10-9 10.3.1 Copier les adresses du carnet public sur Mon Carnet d'adresses ................................................. 10-9 10.3.2 Copier les adresses de Mon Carnet d'adresses sur le carnet d'adresses public......................... 10-10 10.4 Utiliser Mon Carnet d'adresses lors de l'envoi......................................................................... 10-11 10.4.1 Spécifier une adresse.................................................................................................................... 10-11 10.4.2 Rechercher une adresse ............................................................................................................... 10-11 11 Index Table des matières-4 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 1 Introduction bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 1-3 Introduction 1 1 Introduction Nous vous remercions d'avoir porté votre choix sur nos produits. Ce guide de l'utilisateur présente les fonctions qui prennent effet dès l'enregistrement d'un kit licence en option ; il décrit aussi celles qui sont disponibles dès que des applications se connectent à l'imprimante multifonctions (MFP). La lecture de ce guide de l'utilisateur vous permettra d'exploiter au mieux ces fonctions. Ces fonctions avancées sont prises en charge par les modèles suivants. bizhub 751/601 Afin de garantir une utilisation sûre et correcte de cette machine, lisez attentivement le Guide rapide [Opérations Copie/Impression/Fax/Numérisation/Boîte]. Pour les mentions légales concernant les marques commerciales et les copyrights, voir le Guide rapide [Opérations Copie/Impression/Fax/Numérisation/Boîte]. Les illustrations figurant dans ce guide de l'utilisateur peuvent présenter de légères différences avec la machine réelle. Termes et conditions L'activation de l'i-Option LK-101 vous permet d'accéder à Internet depuis le panneau de contrôle de la machine. Les activités et le contenu auquel vous accédez, que vous téléchargez ou que vous communiquez grâce aux indications du présent manuel restent de votre responsabilité exclusive. Ces activités sont également soumises aux règles de votre entreprises ainsi qu'à toute réglementation nationale applicable. KONICA MINOLTA BUSINESS TECHNOLOGIES, INC. et toutes les sociétés KONICA MINOLTA rejettent toute responsabilité quant à l'utilisation faite de l'Internet. 1.1 À propos de ce guide Ce guide de l'utilisateur présente les fonctions qui prennent effet dès l'enregistrement d'un kit licence en option et celles qui sont disponibles dès que des applications se connectent à l'imprimante multifonctions MFP. Ce guide de l'utilisateur s'adresse aux personnes qui ont une connaissance élémentaire du fonctionnement des ordinateurs et de cette machine. Pour plus de détails sur l'utilisation des systèmes d'exploitation ou des applications Windows ou Macintosh, voir leurs manuels respectifs. 1.1.1 Structure de ce guide de l'utilisateur Ce manuel comprend les chapitre suivants : Chapitre 1 Introduction Chapitre 2 Présentation Chapitre 3 Affectation des touches d'application Chapitre 4 Fonction Navigateur Web Chapitre 5 PageScope Web Connection (fonction Navigateur Web) Chapitre 6 Image Panel Chapitre 7 Enregistrement Photo Chapitre 8 Fonctions Traitement PDF Chapitre 9 Fonctions Mon Panneau Chapitre 10 Fonction Mon Carnet d'adresses Chapitre 11 Index 1 Introduction 1-4 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 1.1.2 Explication des conventions Les repères et mises en forme utilisés dans le présent manuel sont décrits ci-dessous. Recommandations de sécurité 6 DANGER Le manquement aux instructions ainsi indiquées peut entraîner des blessures graves ou mortelles, en ce qui concerne l'alimentation électrique. % Respectez toutes les indications de danger afin d'éviter les blessures. 7 AVERTISSEMENT Tout manquement au respect des instructions mises en valeur de cette manière peut entraîner des blessures graves ou des dommages matériels. % Respectez tous les avertissements pour éviter les blessures et utiliser la machine en toute sécurité. 7 ATTENTION Tout manquement aux instructions signalées de cette manière peut entraîner des blessures légères ou des dommages matériels. % Respectez toutes les indications sous le titre Attention pour éviter les blessures et utiliser la machine en toute sécurité. Séquence d'actions 1 Le chiffre 1 ainsi formaté indique la première étape d'une séquence d'actions. 2 Les chiffres suivants, ainsi présentés, indiquent les étapes suivantes de la procédure. ? Le texte signalé ainsi offre une assistance supplémentaire. % Le texte ainsi formaté décrit l'action permettant d'obtenir le résultat escompté. Astuces 2 Remarque Le texte mis en évidence de cette manière contient des informations utiles et des astuces pour garantir l'utilisation en toute sécurité de la machine. 2 Rappel Le texte mis en évidence de cette manière contient des informations importantes (Rappel). ! Détails Le texte présenté de cette manière contient des références à des informations plus détaillées. Toute illustration placée ici indique les opérations qui doivent être effectuées. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 1-5 Introduction 1 Texte avec format spécial Touche [Arrêt] Les noms des touches du panneau de contrôle sont illustrées comme ci-dessus. REGLAGE MACHINE Les textes affichés se présentent sous la forme ci-dessus. 1 Introduction 1-6 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 2 Présentation bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 2-3 Présentation 2 2 Présentation 2.1 Présentation des fonctions Ce chapitre donne un aperçu des fonctions concernées. Pour plus de détails sur chaque fonction, voir la section correspondante. ! Détails Pour utiliser les fonctions avancées, un kit de mise à jour UK-202 en option et un disque dur HD-510 sont requis. 2.1.1 Affectation des touches d'application L'utilisation des touches d'application permet de basculer l'affichage entre le navigateur Web, Image Panel ou Mon Panneau. En outre, les touches d'application peuvent être personnalisées. Pour plus de détails, voir "Affectation des touches d'application" à la page 3-3. 2.1.2 Fonctions i-Option LK-101 L'enregistrement de l'i-Option LK-101 sur la MFP rend disponibles les fonctions suivantes. 2 Remarque Pour de plus amples détails sur l'enregistrement de l'i-Option LK-101 sur le MFP, veuillez consulter le Guide rapide [Opérations Copie/Impression/Fax/Numérisation/Boîte]. Si la MFP est équipée d'un système de chargement, Image Panel et les fonctions d'enregistrement de photos ne sont pas disponibles. 2.1.3 Fonctions i-Option LK-102 L'enregistrement de l'i-Option LK-102 sur la MFP rend disponibles les fonctions suivantes. 2 Remarque Pour de plus amples détails sur l'enregistrement de l'i-Option LK-102 sur le MFP, veuillez consulter le Guide rapide [Opérations Copie/Impression/Fax/Numérisation/Boîte]. Fonction Présentation Page de référence Navigateur Web Le panneau de contrôle de la MFP connectée au réseau vous permet d'accéder à Internet ou un intranet et d'en afficher et imprimer le contenu. Avec un navigateur Web, vous pouvez aussi accéder via PageScope Web Connection, à la MFP connectée au réseau et aux documents enregistrés dans ses boîtes utilisateurs. p. 4-3 p. 5-3 Image Panel Image Panel est une nouvelle interface utilisateur du panneau de contrôle ; elle offre une opérabilité renouvelée orientée vers une utilisation intuitive et conviviale. p. 6-3 Enregistrement Photo Via PageScope Web Connection, il est possible d'ajouter des données photo à une adresse déjà enregistrée dans le carnet d'adresses. Les photos enregistrées s'affichent dans la Liste des destinations d'Image Panel. p. 7-3 Fonction Présentation Page de référence Traitement PDF Lors de l'envoi de documents au format PDF au moyen des fonctions de numérisation ou les fonctions Boîte utilisateur, il est possible de crypter un fichier PDF par un mot de passe ou un identifiant numérique, d'ajouter une signature numérique et de spécifier les propriétés. p. 8-3 2 Présentation 2-4 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 2.1.4 Fonctions connectées au moyen de PageScope My Panel Manager Les fonctions suivantes sont disponibles après association aux applications. Pour utiliser la fonction souhaitée, définissez l'environnement, puis activez-la depuis l'application. 2 Remarque Pour plus de détails sur la définition de l'environnement, voir le manuel relatif à l'application. Les fonctions à associer aux applications devraient être activées depuis l'application utilisée. Pour plus de détails sur l'activation de la fonction, voir le manuel relatif à l'application. Fonction Présentation Page de référence Mon Panneau La fonction Mon Panneau, l'environnement du panneau de contrôle (Mon Panneau), personnalisé par un utilisateur en fonction de l'application, est géré de manière centralisée sur le serveur et l'utilisateur peut obtenir le tableau Mon Panneau auprès de la MFP sélectionnée. p. 9-3 Mon Carnet d'adresses Grâce à la fonction Mon Carnet d'adresses, le carnet d'adresses personnel (Mon Carnet d'adresses) est géré centralement sur le serveur, et l'utilisateur peut accéder au carnet d'adresses personnel Mon Carnet d'adresses de la MFP sélectionnée. p. 10-3 3 Affectation des touches d'application bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 3-3 Affectation des touches d'application 3 3 Affectation des touches d'application 3.1 Personnaliser les touches d'application Les touches d'application peuvent être personnalisées afin d'utiliser les fonctions avancées de la MFP. 3.1.1 Touche d'application et menu Application Touche d'application Les fonctions ajoutées en tant que fonctions avancées peuvent être assignées à des touches d'application. 2 Remarque Si l'assignation des touches d'application est changé, collez les étiquettes autocollantes appropriées fournies avec le kit de mise à niveau UK-202 sur le panneau de contrôle afin de remplacer les indications d'origine selon les besoins. 1 2 3 No. Nom du composant Description 1 Touche du menu Application Appuyez sur cette touche pour afficher le menu Application. Il n'est pas possible d'affecter une autre fonction à cette touche. Pour plus de détails sur le menu Application, voir "Menu Application" à la page 3-4. 2 Touche d'application 1 Par défaut, elle est assignée au mode Numérisation/Fax. L'administrateur peut assigner une autre fonction à cette touche. Pour plus de détails sur l'affectation des fonctions, voir "Param. Touche Application" à la page 3-4. 3 Touche d'application 2 Par défaut, elle est affectée au mode Copie. L'administrateur peut assigner une autre fonction à cette touche. Pour plus de détails sur l'affectation des fonctions, voir "Param. Touche Application" à la page 3-4. 3 Affectation des touches d'application 3-4 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) Menu Application % Pour utiliser les fonctions avancées de la MFP, appuyez sur la touche [Menu Application] ([Boîte]) pour afficher le menu Application. – Si vous désirez utiliser des fonctions non affectées à la touche d'application 1 ou 2, vous pouvez basculer l'affichage de l'écran de chaque fonction depuis le menu Application. 3.1.2 Param. Touche Application Les "Param. Touche Application" vous permettent d'assigner les fonctions avancées aux touches d'application. 1 Appuyez sur la touche [Utilitaires/Compteur] pour afficher l'écran Utilitaires. 2 Appuyez sur [Réglages Administrateur]. 3 Tapez le mot de passe administrateur et appuyez sur [Valider]. 4 Appuyez sur [Réglage Système]. 5 Sur l'écran Réglage Système (2/2), appuyez sur [Param. Touche Application]. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 3-5 Affectation des touches d'application 3 6 Sélectionnez la touche d'application à affecter à la fonction. 7 Sélectionnez la fonction concernée. 8 Appuyez sur [Valider]. 3 Affectation des touches d'application 3-6 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 4 Fonction Navigateur Web bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 4-3 Fonction Navigateur Web 4 4 Fonction Navigateur Web 4.1 Présentation La fonction Navigateur Web permet d'accéder aux divers contenus Internet ou intranet depuis le panneau de contrôle de la MFP connectée au réseau, et de les afficher ou les imprimer. ! Détails Cette fonction est disponible sur la MFP pour laquelle le i-Option LK-101 est enregistré. 4.1.1 Opérations disponibles avec la fonction Navigateur Web La fonction Navigateur Web permet les opérations suivantes : - Afficher et imprimer les contenus disponibles sur Internet ou intranet. - Afficher et imprimer les fichiers PDF sur Internet ou intranet. - Utiliser PageScope Web Connection d'une autre MFP en cours d'utilisation ou connectée au réseau afin de gérer des documents contenus dans les boîtes utilisateur. 2 Remarque Pour plus de détails sur l'utilisation de PageScope Web Connection, voir "PageScope Web Connection (fonction Navigateur Web)" à la page 5-3. 4.1.2 Caractéristiques Les caractéristiques principales du navigateur Web installé sur la MFP sont les suivantes. Le module Flash Player installé sur la MFP ne prend pas en charge les éléments suivants: - La fonction permettant de déclencher un événement par une pression sur une touche. - La fonction permettant de coller ou d'acquérir depuis le presse-papier des données comme des chaînes de caractères - Le menu contextuel. - La fonction d'impression Flash. - La fonction permettant d'exécuter JavaScript depuis Flash ou de d'utiliser Flash par JavaScript. - Les écrans ne comportant pas des fenêtres-éclair. - La fonction Flash Signet. - La fonction permettant d'envoyer/recevoir des données en temps réel au moyen du Flash Media Server. - La fonction permettant de communiquer via XMLSocket. Rubrique Caractéristiques techniques Moteur du navigateur NetFront Protocoles pris en charge HTTP, HTTPS, TCP/IP Langages de balisage/ script pris en charge HTML, CSS, JavaScript Formats pris en charge JPEG, BMP, PNG, GIF, Animation GIF, PDF Versions SSL/TLS prises en charge SSL 2.0, SSL 3.0, TLS 1.0 Codes de caractères pris en charge Japonais (Shift-JIS), Japonais (ISO-2022-JP), Japonais (EUC-JP), Chinois simplifié (GB2312), Chinois traditionnel (Big5), Occidental (ISO-8859-1), Unicode (UTF-8) Modes d'affichage Normal, Rendu Parfait, Rendu intelligent PDF Viewer Adobe® Reader® LE Flash Player Adobe® Flash® Player 7 4 Fonction Navigateur Web 4-4 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 4.2 Affichage du Navigateur Web Affichez le Navigateur Web par le menu Application. % Appuyez sur [Navigateur Web] sur le menu Application pour afficher une page spécifiée comme page d'accueil. 2 Remarque Pour plus de détails sur le menu Application, voir "Affectation des touches d'application" à la page 3-3. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 4-5 Fonction Navigateur Web 4 4.3 Onglet par défaut du Navigateur Web 4.3.1 Organisation de l'écran L'écran Navigateur Web se compose des éléments suivants : 2 Remarque Le stylet fourni avec le kit de mise à niveau UK-202 en option facilite l'utilisation de l'écran tactile. 2 1 4 3 No. Nom du composant Description 1 Barre d'outils Sert à l'utilisation et à la configuration du Navigateur Web. La barre d'outils est située sur l'écran du Navigateur Web. Pour plus de détails sur la barre d'outils, voir "Barre d'outils" à la page 4-8. 2 Barre de défilement Si l'écran ne peut pas afficher un contenu sur toute sa longueur, la barre de défilement apparaît sur le côté droit. Si l'écran ne peut pas afficher un contenu sur toute sa largeur, la barre de défilement apparaît en bas de l'écran. 3 Onglets Les onglets sont affichés. Chaque onglet gère plusieurs contenus et permet de les afficher alternativement. Appuyez sur [x] dans le coin de l'onglet actif pour fermer ce dernier. 4 Icône Une icône s'affiche pendant le chargement d'un contenu. 4 Fonction Navigateur Web 4-6 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 4.3.2 Instructions d'utilisation Opération par l'écran tactile Utilisez l'écran tactile principalement pour le Navigateur Web installé sur la MFP. - Un contact direct sur l'écran tactile permet d'accéder à une page via un lien ou de sélectionner un élément. - Une pression dans un champ de saisie figurant dans un contenu fait apparaître un écran comportant un clavier pour permettre la saisie de caractères. - Pour faire défiler l'écran, appuyez sur , l'écran défile alors jusqu'à un certain point. - Diverses opérations et configurations sont possibles à partir des touches de la barre d'outils située en haut de l'écran. Opération par le panneau de contrôle Vous pouvez utiliser le clavier du panneau de contrôle et presser la touche voulue pour introduire des chiffres ou sélectionner des éléments dans une liste. 4.3.3 Saisie des lettres/chiffres Une pression dans un champ de saisie figurant dans un dialogue ou un contenu fait apparaître un écran comportant un clavier pour permettre la saisie de caractères. % Appuyez sur la touche du caractère voulu sur le clavier affiché à l'écran. – Pour entrer des caractères en majuscules ou des symboles, appuyez sur [Maj.]. – Le clavier permet aussi d'introduire des chiffres. ! Détails Pour changer un caractère individuel dans le texte saisi, appuyez sur et pour déplacer le curseur sur le caractère à modifier, appuyez sur [Eff.] et tapez ensuite la lettre ou le chiffre désiré. Pour effacer tous les caractères introduits jusque-là, appuyez sur [C]. Pour reprendre le réglage quand le clavier est affiché, appuyez sur [Rétablir]. Certains boutons peuvent ne pas s'afficher en fonction des caractères saisis. Lorsque la saisie est possible sur plusieurs lignes, la touche Retour chariot (nouvelle ligne) apparaît. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 4-7 Fonction Navigateur Web 4 4.3.4 Mode d'affichage L'écran Navigateur Web offre les trois types d'affichage suivants. Normal L'affichage est le même qu'un Navigateur Web classique, c'est-à-dire sans tenir compte de la taille de l'écran. Les barres de défilement, haut/bas et droite/gauche permettent de voir toutes les parties du contenu. Par défaut, l'affichage est en mode Normal. Rendu Parfait La disposition est conservée et la page est affichée après réduction pour que toute sa largeur soit visible. Pour visualiser le haut ou le bas de la page, utilisez la barre de défilement haut/bas. Rendu intelligent Un tableau vertical permet d'afficher la page sur toute la largeur de l'écran. Pour visualiser le haut ou le bas de la page, utilisez la barre de défilement haut/bas. L'organisation de la page peut s'en trouver modifiée selon la page à afficher. 2 Remarque Pour plus de détails sur le changement du mode d'affichage, voir "Vue" à la page 4-11. 4 Fonction Navigateur Web 4-8 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 4.4 Barre d'outils La barre d'outils en haut de l'écran Navigateur Web permet d'effectuer diverses opérations et configurations. 4.4.1 Description de la barre d'outils Voici la description de chaque touche de la barre d'outils : Icône Nom du composant Description Retour Revient à la page précédente. Suiv. Affiche la page suivante. Actualiser/Annuler Recharge la page affichée pour en mettre à jour le contenu. Annule l'opération pendant le rechargement de la page. Page d'accueil Affiche la page enregistrée comme page d'accueil. Par défaut, c'est la page "http://konicaminolta.com/" qui est enregistrée comme page d'accueil. Pour plus de détails sur la page d'accueil, voir "Opération Page" à la page 4-11. Favoris (Écrans) Affiche la liste des favoris enregistrés. Favoris (Ajouter) Ajoute l'URL de la page actuelle à la liste des favoris. Adresse Entrez l'URL de la page désirée pour l'afficher. Pour plus de détails, voir "Adresse" à la page 4-9. Histor. Affiche la liste des pages affichées jusque là. Pour plus de détails, voir "Histor." à la page 4-9. Impr. Imprime le contenu de la page affichée. Pour plus de détails, voir "Impr." à la page 4-10. Menu Permet de modifier la configuration du navigateur Web. Pour plus de détails, voir "Menu" à la page 4-10. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 4-9 Fonction Navigateur Web 4 4.4.2 Favoris (Écrans) % Appuyez sur [Affichage] pour afficher la liste des favoris enregistrés. Sélectionnez le favori permettant d'accéder à l'URL désirée. – Appuyez sur pour consulter la liste des opérations disponibles pour l'élément puis sélectionnez l'opération voulue. Les opérations suivantes sont disponibles. 4.4.3 Favoris (Ajouter) % Appuyez sur [Ajout] pour ajouter l'URL de la page actuelle à la liste des favoris. Le titre enregistré est celui que porte le contenu lors de l'accès à la page. Pour changer l'intitulé, éditez le titre depuis la liste des favoris après l'avoir ajouté à la liste. 4.4.4 Adresse 1 Appuyez sur [Adresse] pour afficher l'écran de saisie d'adresse. 2 Appuyez sur le champ de saisie pour afficher un clavier à l'écran. 3 Tapez l'URL désirée, et appuyez sur [Valider] ou [Ouv. av. Nouv.Onglet]. 4 Appuyez sur [Historique Saisie] pour afficher la liste historique et voir vos saisies précédentes. ! Détails Vous pouvez constater que l'URL de la page actuelle a été entrée dans l'écran de saisie d'adresse. Il est possible de supprimer l'URL en appuyant sur [Supprimer] après avoir affiché un clavier à l'écran. Toutes les URL introduites peuvent être supprimées d'un coup en appuyant sur la touche [C] (Effacer) du panneau de contrôle. 4.4.5 Histor. 1 Appuyez sur [Histor.] pour afficher l'écran qui liste l'historique d'affichage. – Vous pouvez sélectionner dans la liste la page à laquelle vous désirer accéder une nouvelle fois. 2 Appuyez sur pour consulter la liste des opérations disponibles pour l'élément puis sélectionnez l'opération voulue. Les opérations suivantes sont disponibles. Rubrique Description Ouv. av. Nouv.Onglet Charge le favori sélectionné dans un nouvel onglet. Modifier Permet d'éditer l'intitulé et l'adresse du favori sélectionné. Affichage Adresse Affiche la liste des favoris par adresse Affichage Titre Affiche la liste des favoris par titre. Déplacer vers le haut Déplace vers le haut le favori sélectionné. Déplacer vers le bas Déplace vers le bas le favori sélectionné. Supprimer Supprime le favori sélectionné. Supprimer tout Supprime tous les favoris enregistrés. Rubrique Description Ouv. av. Nouv.Onglet Charge l'historique sélectionné dans un nouvel onglet. Affichage Adresse Affiche la liste historique par adresse. Affichage Titre Affiche la liste historique par titre. Supprimer Supprime l'historique sélectionné. Supprimer tout Supprime tous les historiques. 4 Fonction Navigateur Web 4-10 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 4.4.6 Impr. 1 Appuyez sur [Impr.] pour afficher un écran permettant d'imprimer une page Web. 2 Appuyez sur [Départ] ou appuyez sur la touche [Départ] après avoir spécifié les paramètres d'impression afin d'imprimer le contenu actuel. ! Détails Les éléments proposés à la sélection diffèrent selon les options installées. 4.4.7 Menu % Appuyez sur [Menu] pour changer la configuration du Navigateur Web. ! Détails Pour plus de détails sur le menu, voir "Configurer le Navigateur Web" à la page 4-11. Rubrique Description Impression recto verso Spécifiez si l'impression doit être recto-verso ou non. Papier Spécifiez le format du papier. Impression Sélectionnez s'il faut ou non imprimer le titre, la date ou l'URL. Le titre et la date sont imprimés en tête de page tandis que l'URL est imprimée en pied de page. Finition Il est possible de spécifier la configuration des fonctions Tri, Groupe, Décalage, Agrafage, Perforation et Face vers le haut. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 4-11 Fonction Navigateur Web 4 4.5 Configurer le Navigateur Web % Appuyez sur [Menu] sur la barre d'outils afin de changer la configuration du Navigateur Web. 4.5.1 Opération Page L'onglet Opération Page vous permet d'enregistrer la page d'accueil et d'utiliser le Mémo Page. 4.5.2 Vue L'onglet Vue permet de configurer l'affichage des contenus. 4.5.3 Activer Onglet L’onglet Activer Onglet permet de gérer les onglets. ! Détails Il est possible d'ouvrir un maximum de cinq onglets. Rubrique Description Utiliser pour Page d'accueil Enregistre la page actuelle comme page d'accueil. Mémo Page Affiche la liste des pages enregistrées comme Mémo Page. Il suffit de sélectionner le Mémo Page dans la liste pour afficher la page désirée. Appuyez sur pour consulter la liste des opérations disponibles pour l'élément puis sélectionnez l'opération voulue. Enreg. comme Mémo Page Enregistre la page actuelle telle qu'elle apparaît à l'écran. Rubrique Description Mode Affichage Sélectionnez le mode d'affichage de l'écran du Navigateur Web en choisissant entre "Normal", "Rendu Parfait" et "Rendu intelligent". Pour plus de détails sur le mode d'affichage, voir "Mode d'affichage" à la page 4-7. Codage Spécifiez le code de caractères pour l'affichage des contenus. Réglages avancés Permet de configurer en détail l'affichage des contenus. Image : Cochez cette case pour afficher les images. Animation : Cochez cette case pour afficher les animations GIF. Table : Cochez cette case pour identifier une liste et ajuster la mise en page en conséquence. JavaScript : Cochez cette case pour activer le JavaScript intégré au contenu. CSS : Cochez cette case pour activer le CSS intégré au contenu. Retour ligne auto : Cochez cette case pour activer le retour ligne auto dans un contenu. Vérification césures Japonais : Cochez cette case pour activer le contrôle des césures en Japonais dans un contenu. Rendu Rapide : Cochez cette case pour activer la fonction Rendu Rapide. Fenêtre Instantanée : Cochez cette case pour afficher les fenêtres instantanées. Sélect. couleur de copie imprim. Sélectionnez la couleur pour l'élément sélectionné en choisissant entre Vert, Bleu, Jaune ou Orange. Rubrique Description Créer Nouvel Onglet Affiche le contenu de l'URL enregistrée comme page d'accueil dans un nouvel onglet. Ouv. av. Nouv.Onglet Affiche dans un nouvel onglet la page liée. Fermer cet onglet Ferme l'onglet actif. Fermer autres Onglets Fermer tous les onglets. Cet élément ne peut pas être sélectionné s'il n'y a qu'un seul onglet d'ouvert. 4 Fonction Navigateur Web 4-12 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 4.5.4 Réglages L'onglet Réglages permet de spécifier les paramètres relatifs à la sécurité, cookies, cache et proxy, et d'afficher les informations concernant le navigateur. Rubrique Description Réglage Démarrage Permet de spécifier la page à afficher au prochain démarrage du Navigateur Web en choisissant entre la page enregistrée comme page d'accueil ou la dernière page affichée en fin de session. Sécurité Permet d'activer le SSL/TLS, d'afficher le Certificat racine ou le Certificat CA, ou d'importer le certificat client. Cookies Spécifie l'autorisation ou le rejet des cookies, et permet la suppression des cookies. Cache Active et configure le cache, ou supprime le cache. Proxy Active et configure le serveur proxy. Lorsque le proxy est activé, enregistrez l'adresse et le port du serveur proxy. Historique Formulaire Permet de sélectionner s'il faut ou non enregistrer l'historique des formulaires. L'historique des formulaires peut aussi être supprimé. Infos Navigateur Web Affiche les informations concernant le Navigateur Web. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 4-13 Fonction Navigateur Web 4 4.6 Imprimer/Afficher un fichier PDF Si le contenu affiché à l'écran comporte un lien pointant vers un fichier PDF, il est possible d'imprimer ou d'afficher ce fichier PDF. % Dans le contenu affiché à l'écran, appuyez sur le lien pointant vers un fichier PDF afin de faire apparaître l'écran suivant. 4.6.1 Imprimer un fichier PDF 1 Appuyez sur [Impression] pour afficher l'écran permettant d'imprimer un fichier PDF. 2 Une fois les réglages de l'impression effectués selon les besoins, appuyez sur [Départ] ou appuyez sur la touche [Départ] pour télécharger puis imprimer le fichier PDF. ! Détails Si le fichier PDF est crypté, le fichier PDF est enregistré dans la boîte utilisateur PDF au lieu d'être imprimé. Les éléments proposés à la sélection diffèrent selon les options installées. Rubrique Description Impression recto verso Spécifiez si l'impression doit être recto-verso ou non. Papier Spécifiez le format du papier. Finition Permet de spécifier les modes Tri, Groupe, Décalé, Agrafage, et Perforation. 4 Fonction Navigateur Web 4-14 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 4.6.2 Afficher un fichier PDF % Appuyez sur [Voir] pour afficher fichier PDF lié. – La barre d'outils en haut de l'écran permet d'agrandir, de réduire ou d'imprimer le fichier PDF. 5 PageScope Web Connection (fonction Navigateur Web) bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 5-3 PageScope Web Connection (fonction Navigateur Web) 5 5 PageScope Web Connection (fonction Navigateur Web) 5.1 Présentation Grâce au navigateur Web installé sur la MFP, vous pouvez utiliser l'instance PageScope Web Connection de la MFP connectée au réseau et accéder aux documents enregistrés dans ses boîtes utilisateurs. ! Détails Cette fonction est disponible sur la MFP pour laquelle l’i-Option LK-101 est enregistré. 5.1.1 Que peut-on faire avec PageScope Web Connection PageScope Web Connection est un utilitaire de gestion de périphérique supporté par le serveur HTTP intégré à cette machine. A l'aide du navigateur Internet et en accédant directement au MFP connecté au réseau, vous pouvez utiliser PageScope Web Connection. On peut généralement accéder à PageScope Web Connection depuis le navigateur Web d'un ordinateur, bien que l'on puisse aussi y accéder depuis le navigateur Web éventuellement installé sur la MFP. Si vous accédez à PageScope Web Connection depuis le navigateur Web d'un ordinateur, diverses opérations (vérifier l'état de la MFP, modifier les réglages, ou configurer le réseau), sont disponibles. En revanche si vous accédez à PageScope Web Connection depuis le navigateur Web installé sur la MFP, seule la fonction Boîte Utilisateur est accessible depuis la MFP. Ce chapitre décrit la manière d'utiliser PageScope Web Connection via le navigateur Web installé sur la MFP. 5.1.2 Accéder à PageScope Web Connection 1 Lancez le navigateur Web sur la MFP. 2 Dans la barre d'outils, appuyez sur [Adresse]. 3 Appuyez sur le champ de saisie pour afficher un clavier à l'écran. 4 Tapez l'adresse IP de la MFP à atteindre, et appuyez ensuite sur [Valider]. 5 Appuyez sur [Valider] ou [Ouv. av. Nouv.Onglet]. L'écran PageScope Web Connection apparaît. 2 Remarque Pour plus de détails sur la fonction Navigateur Web, voir "Fonction Navigateur Web" à la page 4-3. ! Détails Vous pouvez constater que l'URL de la page actuelle a été entrée dans l'écran de saisie d'adresse. Il est possible de supprimer l'URL en appuyant sur [Supprimer] après avoir affiché un clavier à l'écran. Toutes les URL introduites peuvent être supprimées d'un coup en appuyant sur la touche [C] (Effacer) du panneau de contrôle. Si le navigateur Web est configuré de manière à ne pas accepter les Cookies, la page de PageScope Web Connection ne peut pas s'afficher. Pour plus de détails sur la configuration du navigateur en termes de Cookies, voir "Réglages" à la page 4-12. 5 PageScope Web Connection (fonction Navigateur Web) 5-4 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 5.1.3 Cache du navigateur Internet Les informations les plus récentes peuvent ne pas apparaître sur l'écran PageScope Web Connection parce que ce sont d'anciennes versions des pages qui sont enregistrées dans la mémoire cache du navigateur Internet. De plus, des problèmes peuvent survenir quand vous utilisez le cache. Quand vous utilisez PageScope Web Connection, désactivez le cache du navigateur Internet. 1 Appuyez sur [Menu] dans la barre d'outils du navigateur Web. 2 Appuyez sur l'onglet Réglages, puis sélectionnez "Cache". 3 Décochez la case "Utiliser cache", et appuyez ensuite sur [Valider]. 2 Remarque Pour plus de détails sur les réglages du navigateur Web, voir "Configurer le Navigateur Web" à la page 4-11. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 5-5 PageScope Web Connection (fonction Navigateur Web) 5 5.2 Organisation de l'écran Les pages de PageScope Web Connection sont conçues comme décrit ci-dessous. 6 3 4 5 1 2 No. Nom Description 1 Logo KONICA MINOLTA Appuyez sur le logo pour accéder au site Web KONICA MINOLTA (http://konicaminolta.com/). 2 Logo PageScope Web Connection Appuyez sur le logo pour afficher les informations relatives à la de version de PageScope Web Connection. 3 Nom utilisateur de connexion Affiche l'icône du mode actuel et le nom de l'utilisateur connecté (public, nom d'utilisateur et nom de compte enregistrés). 4 [Déconnexion] Appuyez sur cette touche pour vous déconnecter du mode actuel. 5 Aide Vous permet de consulter le manuel d'aide en ligne. 6 Table des matières Affiche le contenu de PageScope Web Connection. 5 PageScope Web Connection (fonction Navigateur Web) 5-6 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 5.3 Connexion et déconnexion Si l'identification utilisateur ou compte département est effectué sur la MFP, l'écran de connexion apparaît pour permettre l'utilisation de PageScope Web Connection. ! Détails Si l'identification utilisateur ou compte département n'est pas effectué sur la MFP, l'écran qui apparaît indique que vous êtes connecté en tant qu'utilisateur public. PageScope Web Connection ne peut pas être utilisé en mode Administrateur si on y accède depuis le navigateur Web de la MFP. 5.3.1 Connexion Précisez si la connexion doit se faire comme utilisateur public ou utilisateur enregistré. % Entrez les informations nécessaires, et appuyez ensuite sur [Connexion]. – Vous pouvez sélectionner la langue d'affichage s'il y a lieu. 2 Remarque Les boîtes accessibles dépendent de l'utilisateur ou du compte connecté. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 5-7 PageScope Web Connection (fonction Navigateur Web) 5 5.3.2 Déconnexion % Appuyez sur [Déconnexion] en haut et à droite de l'écran. Un écran de confirmation de connexion apparaît. – Appuyez sur [OK] pour revenir à l'écran de connexion. 5 PageScope Web Connection (fonction Navigateur Web) 5-8 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 5.4 Utiliser la fonction Boîte Si vous accédez à PageScope Web Connection par le navigateur Web de la MFP, les opérations suivantes sont disponibles dans le cadre de la fonction Boîte. - Gérer les documents contenus dans le boîtes utilisateur de la MFP en cours d'utilisation ou d'une autre MFP connectée au réseau. - Disposer de trois types de boîtes : Boîte utilisateur publique, Boîte utilisateur privée et Boîte Groupe. - Afficher, imprimer et supprimer les documents de la boîte. 5.4.1 Connexion à une boîte Lorsque vous vous connectez via PageScope Web Connection, cela fait apparaître la liste des boîtes (publiques, privées et groupe) créées dans la MFP visitée. % Dans la liste des boîtes utilisateur, sélectionnez le nom de la boîte voulue ou tapez le numéro et le mot de passe de la boîte, et appuyez ensuite sur [OK]. ! Détails Si vous appuyez sur le nom d'une boîte utilisateur alors qu'un mot de passe a été spécifié pour protéger la boîte, une page s'affiche pour permettre l'introduction du mot de passe. Connexion de boîte Liste des boîtes Rubrique Description N° Bte Ut. Entrez le numéro de la boîte utilisateur à ouvrir. Mot de passe de boîte Entrez le mot de passe si la boîte utilisateur en a reçu un. Rubrique Description Rechercher dans l'index Affiche la liste des boîtes utilisateur à l'index sous lequel la boîte a été enregistrée lors de sa création. Page (affichage par 50 boîtes) Spécifie la page à afficher s'il y a plus de 50 boîtes utilisateur. Liste des boîtes Affiche le numéro de boîte, le nom de boîte, le type de boîte et la date/heure de création. Une touche avec icône apparaît à côté chaque boîte utilisateur pour laquelle un mot de passe a été spécifié. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 5-9 PageScope Web Connection (fonction Navigateur Web) 5 Liste de fichiers % Sélectionnez une boîte dans "Connexion de boîte" pour afficher l'écran comportant les informations élémentaires de la boîte utilisateur ainsi que la liste des documents enregistrés dans la boîte utilisateur. Rubrique Description Vue Vignettes Indiquez si les documents doivent être ou non affichés sous forme de miniatures. Spécifiez l'opération Sélectionnez l'opération à effectuer sur le document. Pour plus de détails, voir "Opérations sur le document" à la page 5-10. [Modifier l'affichage] Affiche la case "Sélectionner" à côté des documents compatibles avec l'opération sélectionnée. Sélectionner Une case à cocher apparaît à côté des documents sur lesquels l'opération sélectionnée peut être effectuée. Vignette Affiche les documents sous forme de miniatures. Nom Document Affiche le nom du document. Nombre d'originaux Affiche le nombre d'originaux. [Modif. nom] Il est possible de changer le nom du document. 5 PageScope Web Connection (fonction Navigateur Web) 5-10 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 5.4.2 Opérations sur le document Les documents sélectionnés peuvent être imprimés ou supprimés. Impression 1 Sélectionnez "Impression" dans "Spécifiez l'opération", et appuyez ensuite sur [Modifier l'affichage]. Une case à cocher apparaît à côté des documents qui peuvent être imprimés. 2 Cochez la case à côté du document voulu, et appuyez ensuite sur [Réglage impression]. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 5-11 PageScope Web Connection (fonction Navigateur Web) 5 3 Spécifiez les réglages voulus, et appuyez sur [OK]. – Sous "Plage de pages", sélectionnez s'il faut imprimer la totalité des pages du document sélectionné, ou bien spécifiez les pages à imprimer. – "Changer l'ordre" vous permet de modifier l'ordre d'impression lorsqu'il s'agit d'imprimer plusieurs documents. 4 Appuyez sur [Ouvrir Fichier]. Une fois le téléchargement terminé, le fichier PDF du document s'affiche à l'écran. 5 Appuyez sur [Impression]. 5 PageScope Web Connection (fonction Navigateur Web) 5-12 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) Suppression 1 Sélectionnez "Supprimer" dans "Spécifiez l'opération", et appuyez ensuite sur [Modifier l'affichage]. Une case à cocher apparaît à côté des documents qui peuvent être supprimés. 2 Cochez la case à côté du document voulu, et appuyez ensuite sur [Supprimer]. – Cocher la case "Cocher/Décocher (s'applique à tous les documents)" permet de sélectionner tous les documents. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 5-13 PageScope Web Connection (fonction Navigateur Web) 5 3 Confirmez le nom du document à supprimer, et appuyez ensuite sur [OK]. 5 PageScope Web Connection (fonction Navigateur Web) 5-14 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 6 Image Panel bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 6-3 Image Panel 6 6 Image Panel 6.1 Présentation Image Panel est une nouvelle interface utilisateur du panneau de contrôle ; qui offre une nouvelle opérabilité associée à une utilisation intuitive et conviviale. ! Détails Cette fonction est disponible sur la MFP pour laquelle le i-Option LK-101 est enregistré. Dans Image Panel, la séquence des opérations comprend trois étapes : "numérisation des documents", "édition", et "spécification de la destination", toutes ces opérations pouvant être effectuées sur le même écran. Cela permet de garder une vue globale des opérations qui s'enchaînent et de savoir précisément quelle est la fonctions en cours. En outre, l'amélioration de l'interface a conduit à ne pas inclure dans Image Panel certaines des fonctions présentes sur les anciens modèles. Si les fonctions Mon Panneau et les fonctions Mon Carnet d'adresses sont disponibles sur la MFP, vous pouvez personnaliser l'écran Image Panel. 6 Image Panel 6-4 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 6.2 Afficher Image Panel Affichez Image Panel par le menu Application. % Appuyez sur [Image Panel] dans le menu Application pour afficher Image Panel. 2 Remarque Pour plus de détails sur le menu Application, voir "Affectation des touches d'application" à la page 3-3. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 6-5 Image Panel 6 6.3 Opérations sur Image Panel 6.3.1 Organisation de l'écran L'écran Image Panel se compose des éléments suivants : 1 3 4 5 6 2 8 7 9 No. Nom Description 1 Zone Informations de connexion Affiche le nom et l'icône de l'utilisateur actuellement connecté. 2 Zone Source Données Sélectionnez "Numéris.", "Liste Bte Util." ou "Média" pour numériser les documents. 3 Zone Desktop Affiche sous forme de vignettes ou de liste, les documents numérisés issus de la zone Numérisation des données. 4 Sélecteur Liste/Vignette Cette touche permet de modifier l'affichage de la zone Desktop en basculant entre Liste et Vignettes. 5 Zone des messages Affiche des messages supplémentaires pour préciser une procédure par exemple. 6 Zone d'état Affiche la date et l'heure actuelle. Affiche aussi des icônes d'alerte confirmant un avertissement. 7 Zone Envoyer vers/ Outil d'édition Dans la zone Envoyer vers, la destination sélectionnée dans la zone Destin. Données s'affiche sous forme d'icône. L'outil d'édition permet de modifier les documents numérisés. 8 Sélecteur Envoyer vers/ Outil d'édition Cette touche permet de basculer l'affichage entre la zone Envoyer vers et la zone Outil d'édition. 9 Zone Destin. Données Spécifiez la destination des documents numérisés. 6 Image Panel 6-6 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 6.3.2 Séquence opératoire Cette section décrit la séquence d'opérations sur Image Panel, à partir de la capture des documents jusqu'à leur envoi, à savoir dans l'ordre, "numériser", "éditer les documents" et "en spécifier la destination". 2 Remarque Il est possible également de spécifier d'abord la destination, et de numériser ensuite les documents. 1 Numérisez le document dans la zone Source Données. – Pour numériser un original, mettez-le en place et appuyez ensuite sur [Numéris.]. – Spécifiez les paramètres de numérisation selon les besoins puis lancez la numérisation. Pour plus de détails, voir "Numéris." à la page 6-9. – Pour accéder à un document enregistré dans une boîte utilisateur, sélectionnez la boîte utilisateur dans [Liste Bte Util.], et sélectionnez le document à charger. Pour plus de détails, voir "Charger depuis un boîte utilisateur" à la page 6-10. – Pour accéder à un document enregistré en mémoire externe, sélectionnez l'onglet Média dans l'écran Liste Bte Util., puis sélectionnez le document à charger. Pour plus de détails, voir "Charger depuis la mémoire externe" à la page 6-11. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 6-7 Image Panel 6 2 Dans la zone Outil d'édition, modifiez le document numérisé selon vos besoins. – Pour plus de détails, voir "Modifier" à la page 6-12. 3 Spécifiez la destination des documents numérisés dans la zone Destin. Données. – Pour imprimer le document, appuyez sur [Impression]. Pour plus de détails, voir "Impression" à la page 6-13. – Pour envoyer le document, sélectionnez la destination dans la [Liste Destinat.]. Pour plus de détails, voir "Spécifiez un destinataire" à la page 6-14. 6 Image Panel 6-8 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) – Pour l'enregistrer dans la mémoire externe, appuyez sur [Média] dans l'écran Liste Destinat. Pour plus de détails, voir "Enregistrer dans mémoire externe" à la page 6-15. Une fois qu'une destination a été spécifiée, la zone Envoyer vers apparaît. Pour plus de détails, voir "Envoyer vers" à la page 6-15. 4 Appuyez sur la touche [Départ] pour lancer l'émission des données. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 6-9 Image Panel 6 6.3.3 Numériser des documents Sélectionnez "Numéris." ou "Liste Bte Util." pour numériser les documents. Numéris. 1 Appuyez sur [Numéris.] pour afficher l'écran Param. Numéris. 2 Spécifiez les paramètres de numérisation selon les besoins. 3 Appuyez sur [Numéris.]. ! Détails Le mode numérisation permet de ne numériser qu'un seul document à la fois. Rubrique Description Type original Sélectionnez la qualité image en fonction du contenu de l'original. Recto/Recto-Vers Sélectionnez un mode de numérisation pour numériser une seule face ou les deux faces de l'original. Définition Sélectionnez la résolution de la numérisation. Type Fichier Sélectionnez le format de fichier pour enregistrer les données numérisées. Contraste Réglez la densité de la numérisation. [Numér. Séparée] Il est possible de diviser l'opération de numérisation en plusieurs sessions pour divers types de documents, par exemple lorsque toutes les pages d'un document ne peuvent être chargées dans l'ADF, lorsqu'on utilise la vitre d'exposition ou lorsque des documents recto sont combinés à des documents recto-verso. 6 Image Panel 6-10 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) Charger depuis un boîte utilisateur La sélection d'une boîte utilisateur dans "Liste Bte Util." fait apparaître l'écran Utiliser document. % Sélectionnez le document à numériser et appuyez ensuite sur [OK]. ! Détails Si la boîte utilisateur sélectionnée est protégée par mot de passe, l'écran permettant d'introduire le mot de passe apparaît. Entrez le mot de passe. Il n'est possible de sélectionner qu'une seule boîte. Il est possible de sélectionner un maximum de 10 documents dans la boîte. Lors du chargement d'un document enregistré dans la boîte utilisateur depuis l'écran Copie, il est possible de sélectionner "Impression", "Boîte Utilis.", "E-Mail", "SMB", "FTP" et "WebDAV" comme destinations. Si vous avez spécifié "Boîte Utilis." comme destination, il n'est pas possible de sélectionner ensemble plusieurs documents. Si vous avez spécifié "Impression" comme destination, il n'est pas possible de sélectionner ensemble plusieurs documents. Rubrique Description [Modif. nom] Renomme le document sélectionné. [Détails Document] Permet de vérifier les informations détaillées et d'afficher un aperçu du document sélectionné. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 6-11 Image Panel 6 Charger depuis la mémoire externe 1 Sélectionnez l'onglet Média dans l'écran Liste Bte Util. pour afficher la liste des documents qui se trouvent en mémoire externe. 2 Pour ouvrir un dossier, sélectionnez le dossier voulu, et appuyez ensuite sur [Ouvrir]. – Les types de fichiers téléchargeables depuis une mémoire externe sont PDF, TIFF et XPS. 3 Sélectionnez le document à charger. 4 Appuyez sur [OK]. ! Détails Pour charger un document depuis une mémoire externe, réglez "Imprimer Document" dans "Réglages Fonction Mémoire Externe" sur "Oui". En outre, pour que l'Identification utilisateur puisse intervenir, "Impression" dans "Autoriser fonction" doit être réglé sur "Permis". Il n'est possible de charger qu'un seul document. Si un document a déjà été chargé par numérisation ou depuis une boîte, il n'est pas possible de charger un document contenu dans une mémoire externe. Si vous chargez un document depuis une mémoire externe, seule l'opération "Impression" peut être spécifiée comme destination. 6 Image Panel 6-12 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 6.3.4 Modifier Modifiez le document numérisé selon les besoins. Aperçu Permet de vérifier les informations détaillées et d'afficher un aperçu du document sélectionné. ! Détails Il n'est pas possible d'afficher l'aperçu d'un document chargé depuis une mémoire externe. Si vous avez sélectionné plusieurs documents, seule l'image d'aperçu du premier document pourra être visualisée. Combiner Documents Plusieurs documents peuvent être combinés en un seul document. % Appuyez sur [Déplacer] pour changer l'ordre des documents à combiner. ! Détails S'il s'agit d'un document combiné, il est possible de sélectionner "Impr." ou "Liste Destinat." comme destination des données. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 6-13 Image Panel 6 Retour à Dest. Numér. % Appuyez sur "Retour à Dest. Numér." pour ramener le document sélectionné à l'emplacement source. Une fois la numérisation effectuée, les documents sont supprimés. Les documents chargés depuis une boîte utilisateur sont réintégrés dans la boîte utilisateur. 6.3.5 Spécifier destination Spécifiez la destination des documents numérisés. Impression 1 Appuyez sur [Impression] pour changer l'ordre des documents à combiner. 2 Spécifiez les réglages d'impression. 3 Appuyez ensuite sur [OK]. ! Détails Si plusieurs documents ont été numérisés, il n'est pas possible de spécifier les réglages d'impression. Les éléments proposés à la sélection diffèrent selon les options installées. Rubrique Description Copies Sur le clavier, spécifiez l'étendue des pages et le nombre d'exemplaires à imprimer. Impression Indiquez si le mode d'impression doit être recto-verso ou non. Finition Permet de spécifier la configuration Tri, Groupe, Décalé, Agrafage, Perforation, Réglage Position Agrafage et Réglage Position Perforation. Impression continue Spécifiez s'il faut imprimer en continu lorsque plusieurs documents sont combinés en un seul pour impression en recto-verso. Oui : Le document suivant sera imprimé en continu à partir du verso de la dernière page du document précédent. Non : Le document suivant sera imprimé à partir du recto d'une nouvelle feuille. 6 Image Panel 6-14 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) Spécifiez un destinataire 1 Dans la [Liste Destinat.], sélectionnez la destination du document à envoyer. 2 Appuyez sur [Recher simple] pour afficher les destinations enregistrées dans les carnets d'adresses de la machine. ! Détails Si les fonctions Mon Carnet d'adresses sont disponibles, appuyez sur l'onglet Mon Adresse pour afficher Mon Carnet d'adresses. Pour plus de détails sur Mon Carnet d'adresses, voir "Fonction Mon Carnet d'adresses" à la page 10-3. Si vous avez chargé ensemble plusieurs documents, il n'est pas possible de sélectionner "Boîte Utilis." comme destination. Si un document est chargé depuis une mémoire externe, il n'est pas possible de sélectionner "Liste Destinat.". Lors du chargement d'un document enregistré dans la boîte utilisateur depuis l'écran Copie, il est possible de sélectionner "Boîte Utilis.", "E-Mail", "SMB", "FTP" et "WebDAV" comme destinations. Lors du chargement d'un document enregistré dans la boîte utilisateur depuis l'écran Copie en spécifiant Surimpression ou Surimpression enregistrée, il est possible de sélectionner "Boîte Utilis." comme destination. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 6-15 Image Panel 6 Enregistrer dans mémoire externe 1 Sélectionnez [Média] sur l'écran Liste Destinat. 2 Appuyez sur [OK]. ! Détails Pour enregistrer en mémoire externe, réglez "Enregistrer document" dans "Réglages Fonction Mémoire Externe" sur "ON". En outre, pour que l'identification utilisateur soit effectuée, "Réglages Fonction Mémoire Externe" dans "Autoriser fonction" doit être réglé sur "Permis". Si vous spécifiez "Impr." comme destination, ou sélectionnez une destination dans "Liste Destinat.", il n'est pas possible de sélectionner [Média]. Seuls les documents numérisés peuvent être enregistrés dans la mémoire externe. 6.3.6 Envoyer vers Une fois qu'une destination a été spécifiée, la zone Envoyer vers apparaît. Les documents numérisés et les destinations sont affichés en tant qu'icônes en bas de l'écran. % Appuyez sur les icônes voulues pour afficher le détail des données et les destinations spécifiées. 6 Image Panel 6-16 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 6.4 Personnaliser Image Panel Si les fonctions Mon Panneau et les fonctions Mon Carnet d'adresses sont disponibles sur la MFP, l'écran Image Panel peut être personnalisé. ! Détails Pour personnaliser l'écran Image Panel, l'environnement requis est le suivant. Les fonctions Mon Panneau et les fonctions Mon Carnet d'adresses sont disponibles sur la MFP. L'identification utilisateur a été effectuée et l'utilisateur est connecté en tant que utilisateur enregistré. 2 Remarque Pour plus de détails sur les fonctions Mon Panneau, voir "Fonctions Mon Panneau" à la page 9-3. Pour plus de détails sur les fonctions Mon Carnet d'adresses, voir "Fonction Mon Carnet d'adresses" à la page 10-3. 6.4.1 Personnaliser la zone Source Données Dans la zone Source Données, vous pouvez enregistrer une icône de raccourci pointant vers une boîte utilisateur souvent utilisée. 1 Dans "Source Données", appuyez sur [Liste Bte Util.]. 2 Appuyez sur [Enreg. Bureau/Modifier]. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 6-17 Image Panel 6 3 Sélectionnez la boîte utilisateur à enregistrer dans la zone Desktop, et sélectionnez dans la zone Numérisation des données l'emplacement où vous voulez enregistrer l'icône. – La boîte utilisateur qui est enregistrée dans la zone Desktop ne peut pas être déplacée vers un autre emplacement du bureau. – Si vous sélectionnez un emplacement du bureau dans lequel une autre icône est enregistrée, l'icône sera alors écrasée. 4 Appuyez sur [OK]. Ceci enregistre l'icône de raccourci de la boîte utilisateur. 6 Image Panel 6-18 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 6.4.2 Personnaliser la zone Destin. Données Dans la zone Destin. Données, vous pouvez enregistrer une icône de raccourci pointant vers une destination souvent utilisée. 1 Dans la zone Destin. Données, appuyez sur [Liste Destinat.]. 2 Appuyez sur [Enreg. Bureau/Modifier]. 3 Sélectionnez la destination à enregistrer dans la zone Desktop, et sélectionnez dans la zone de destination des données l'emplacement où vous voulez enregistrer l'icône. – La destination qui est enregistrée dans la zone Desktop ne peut pas être déplacée vers un autre emplacement du bureau. – Si vous sélectionnez un emplacement du bureau dans lequel une autre icône est enregistrée, l'icône sera alors écrasée. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 6-19 Image Panel 6 4 Appuyez sur [OK]. Ceci enregistre l'icône de raccourci de la destination. 6 Image Panel 6-20 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 6.4.3 Supprimer une icône de raccourci enregistrée 1 Appuyez sur [Enreg. Bureau/Modifier]. 2 Sélectionnez l'icône à supprimer. 3 Appuyez sur [Supprimer]. 4 Appuyez sur [OK]. Ceci supprime l'icône de raccourci. 7 Enregistrement Photo bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 7-3 Enregistrement Photo 7 7 Enregistrement Photo 7.1 Enregistrer une photo dans le carnet d'adresses Via PageScope Web Connection, il est possible d'ajouter des données photo à une adresse déjà enregistrée dans le carnet d'adresses. Pour enregistrer des données photo dans une entrée du carnet d'adresses, l'adresse doit avoir été préalablement enregistrée dans le carnet d'adresses. ! Détails Cette fonction est disponible sur la MFP pour laquelle l’i-Option LK-101 est enregistré. Les photos enregistrées s'affichent dans la Liste des destinations d'Image Panel. 7.1.1 Spécifications relatives aux données photo L'enregistrement des données photo est subordonné aux spécifications suivantes : ! Détails Il se peut que les données photo ne soient pas mises à l'échelle pour l'enregistrement. Rubrique Caractéristiques techniques Type fichier Format BMP, couleur 24-bit, non compressé Format image 48 e 48 pixels Taille des données 6 966 octets 7 Enregistrement Photo 7-4 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 7.1.2 Enregistrer une photo Pour enregistrer des données photo, utilisez PageScope Web Connection. 2 Remarque Pour plus de détails sur PageScope Web Connection, voir le guide de l'utilisateur correspondant. ! Détails Pour enregistrer des données photo dans une entrée du carnet d'adresses, l'adresse doit avoir été préalablement enregistrée dans le carnet d'adresses. Si la fonction Mon Carnet d'adresses est disponible, elle vous permet d'enregistrer des données photo dans une entrée du carnet d'adresses Mon Carnet d'adresses. Pour enregistrer des données photo dans une entrée du carnet d'adresses, vous devez vous connecter en tant qu'utilisateur enregistré. 1 Connectez-vous comme utilisateur enregistré ou comme Administrateur. 2 Sélectionnez l'onglet Enr. Dest. 3 Sélectionnez le menu "Photo/Icône". bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 7-5 Enregistrement Photo 7 4 Sélectionnez l'entrée voulue dans le carnet d'adresses, puis cliquez sur la touche [Modifier]. – Si une photo est enregistrée, "Photo" apparaît dans la colonne "Photo/Icône". 5 Sélectionnez "Enregistrer photo". 6 Cliquez sur la touche [Browse], puis spécifiez l'emplacement source de la photo à enregistrer. 7 Cliquez sur la touche [OK]. 7 Enregistrement Photo 7-6 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 8 Fonctions Traitement PDF bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 8-3 Fonctions Traitement PDF 8 8 Fonctions Traitement PDF 8.1 Présentation 8.1.1 Que peut-on faire avec les fonctions de traitement PDF Les fonctions Traitement PDF permettent les opérations suivantes : - Lors de l'émission de documents à l'aide des fonctions de numérisation ou de boîte et en sélectionnant PDF comme format de fichier, vous pouvez spécifier les propriétés PDF. - Lors de l'émission de documents à l'aide des fonctions de numérisation ou de boîte et en sélectionnant PDF comme format de fichier, vous pouvez crypter le fichier PDF en utilisant un mot de passe ou un ID numérique. - Pour transmettre un fichier PDF crypté, vous pouvez créer une signature numérique en utilisant le certificat de la MFP. - La fonction d'impression directe vous permet d'imprimer des documents contenus dans un fichier PDF crypté par AES. ! Détails Cette fonction est disponible sur la MFP pour laquelle l’i-Option LK-102 est enregistré. 2 Remarque Pour plus de détails sur la fonction numérisation/boîte utilisateur, voir le guide de l'utilisateur pour chaque fonction. 8 Fonctions Traitement PDF 8-4 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 8.1.2 Propriétés des documents PDF Lors de l'émission de documents à l'aide des fonctions de numérisation ou de boîte et en sélectionnant "PDF" comme format de fichier, vous pouvez spécifier les propriétés PDF. ! Détails Vous pouvez aussi spécifier les propriétés PDF lorsque vous envoyez un document au format PDF dans une boîte utilisateur d'un autre périphérique au moyen de PageScope Web Connection. Lors de l'enregistrement d'un document dans la boîte utilisateur par la commande "Enregistrer document" de la fonction Boîte Utilis., il n'est pas possible de spécifier les propriétés PDF. Rubrique Description Titre Spécifiez un intitulé pour le fichier PDF si [Non] est sélectionné pour "Appliq. Nom fichier". Appliq. Nom fichier Spécifiez si le nom de fichier doit ou non être utilisé comme titre du fichier PDF. Auteur Spécifiez le nom de l'auteur. Pour procéder à l'identification, c'est l'ID utilisateur est spécifié pour le nom d'auteur. Sujet Spécifiez le sujet du fichier PDF. Mots-clés Spécifiez les mots-clés du fichier PDF. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 8-5 Fonctions Traitement PDF 8 8.1.3 Cryptage et Signature numérique du fichier PDF En sélectionnant "PDF" comme format de fichier lors de l'émission de documents numérisés ou enregistrés dans la boîte utilisateur, vous pouvez crypter les fichiers PDF à l'aide d'un mot de passe ou d'un ID numérique de l'utilisateur. Si un certificat est enregistré dans le MFP, vous pouvez signer numériquement un fichier PDF lors de l'émission des données. 2 Remarque Pour plus de détails sur l'enregistrement d'un certificat sur la MFP, voir le Guide de l'Utilisateur – Administrateur Réseau. ! Détails Vous pouvez aussi spécifier le cryptage et la signature numérique du fichier PDF lorsque vous envoyez un document au format PDF dans une boîte utilisateur d'un autre périphérique au moyen de PageScope Web Connection. Cryptage par mot de passe % Pour crypter un fichier par un mot de passe, spécifiez les réglages suivants. Rubrique Description Cible de cryptage Sélectionnez la cible de cryptage. Si vous sélectionnez [Sauf métadonnées], vous pouvez exclure de la cible de cryptage les réglages effectués dans "Propriétés des documents PDF". Si vous sélectionnez [Sauf métadonnées], vous ne pouvez pas sélectionner [Niveau faible] pour "Niveau de cryptage". Type de cryptage Sélectionnez [Code d'accès]. Signature Si une certificat est enregistré sur la MFP, spécifiez s'il faut ou non appliquer une signature numérique. Niveau de cryptage Spécifiez le niveau de cryptage. Niveau faible : méthode de cryptage RC4 (la longueur de clé est de 40 bits) Niveau élevé 1 : méthode de cryptage RC4 (la longueur de clé est de 128 bits) Niveau élevé 2 : méthode de cryptage AES (la longueur de clé est de 128 bits) Code d'accès Entrez le code permettant d'ouvrir le fichier PDF crypté. Entrez une nouvelle fois le code pour confirmation. Permissions Document Entrez le mot de passe permettant de changer les permissions document. Entrez une nouvelle fois le code pour confirmation. Lorsque vous spécifiez les permissions document, appuyez sur [Paramètres Détaillés] pour spécifier les permissions en détail. La plage de réglage varie selon le niveau de cryptage. 8 Fonctions Traitement PDF 8-6 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) Paramètres Détaillés Cryptage par ID numérique % Pour crypter un fichier par l'ID numérique de l'utilisateur, spécifiez les réglages suivants. 2 Remarque Pour plus de détails sur l'enregistrement de l'ID numérique de l'utilisateur (expéditeur) sur la MFP, voir le Guide de l'utilisateur – Administrateur Réseau. Rubrique Description Impression Autorisée Spécifiez si l'impression des fichiers PDF est autorisée ou non. Si vous spécifiez un niveau de cryptage "Niveau élevé 1"/"Niveau élevé 2", vous pouvez préciser aussi [Permettre seulement Basse résolution]. Extraire Documents/Images Indiquez si vous souhaitez autoriser ou non la copie de texte, d'images et d'autres contenus. Modifier Permissions Sélectionnez le niveau de permission approprié de modification du document, y compris la signature des données, la saisie et les remarques. Rubrique Description Cible de cryptage Sélectionnez la cible de cryptage. Si vous sélectionnez [Sauf métadonnées], vous pouvez exclure de la cible de cryptage les réglages effectués dans "Propriétés des documents PDF". Type de cryptage Appuyez sur [ID numérique]. Sélectionnez [ID numérique] pour afficher l'écran permettant de sélectionner une destination. Sélectionnez la destination enregistrée, ou lancez une recherche LDAP pour sélectionner la destination pour laquelle un ID numérique est enregistré. Sélectionnez [Même que destination] pour associer l'ID numérique à la destination. Il est possible de spécifier 100 ID numériques maximum. ! Détails Sélectionnez [ID numérique] pour afficher l'écran permettant de sélectionner une destination. Les carnets d'adresses e-mail en transmission S/MIME et associés à un ID numérique apparaissent à l'écran. Après avoir sélectionné le carnet d'adresses désiré, vous pouvez spécifier l'application de l'ID numérique pour le cryptage. Même si vous spécifiez un ID numérique, la destination n'en sera pas spécifiée pour autant. Il faut d'abord spécifier la destination des données. L'ID numérique dépend du niveau d'autorisation d'accès affecté à l'utilisateur. Lorsque vous enregistrez un document dans la boîte utilisateur, il n'est pas possible de crypter les fichiers PDF par un ID numérique. Signature Si une certificat est enregistré sur la MFP, spécifiez s'il faut ou non appliquer une signature numérique. Niveau de cryptage Spécifiez le niveau de cryptage. Si vous avez opté pour un cryptage par ID numérique, vous ne pouvez pas sélectionner [Niveau faible] dans "Niveau de cryptage". Niveau élevé 1 : méthode de cryptage RC4 (la longueur de clé est de 128 bits) Niveau élevé 2 : méthode de cryptage AES (la longueur de clé est de 128 bits) bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 8-7 Fonctions Traitement PDF 8 Paramètres Détaillés 8.1.4 Impres. dir. La fonction d'impression directe vous permet d'imprimer des documents contenus dans un fichier PDF crypté par AES. Pour effectuer une impression directe, utilisez PageScope Web Connection. 1 Connectez-vous comme utilisateur public ou comme utilisateur enregistré, et sélectionnez l'onglet Impres. dir. 2 Cliquez sur la touche [Browse] pour sélectionner le fichier, puis cliquez sur la touche [Imprimer]. 2 Remarque Pour plus de détails sur PageScope Web Connection, voir le guide de l'utilisateur correspondant. Rubrique Description Impression Autorisée Spécifiez s'il faut autoriser l'impression des fichiers PDF. Vous pouvez aussi spécifier [Basse Résolution]. Extraire Documents/Images Indiquez si vous souhaitez autoriser ou non la copie de texte, d'images et d'autres contenus. Modifier Permissions Sélectionnez le niveau de permission approprié de modification du document, y compris la signature des données, la saisie et les remarques. 8 Fonctions Traitement PDF 8-8 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 9 Fonctions Mon Panneau bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 9-3 Fonctions Mon Panneau 9 9 Fonctions Mon Panneau 9.1 Présentation Les fonctions Mon Panneau gèrent de manière centralisée l'environnement du panneau de contrôle (Mon Panneau) et permettent de le personnaliser en fonction de l'application utilisée pour obtenir Mon Panneau sur la MFP sélectionnée par l'utilisateur. Les fonctions Mon Panneau garantissent le même niveau d'opérabilité sur multiple MFP dans un environnement réseau. ! Détails Cette fonction est utilisée avec PageScope My Panel Manager. Pour plus de détails sur l'activation de cette fonction, voir le manuel de PageScope My Panel Manager. D'autre part, PageScope My Panel Manager permet de spécifier les réglages concernant Mon Panneau. Pour plus de détails, voir PageScope My Panel Manager. 9.1.1 Paramètres personnalisables Mon Panneau permet de personnaliser les éléments suivants. - Réglage de langue d'affichage du panneau de contrôle. - Réglage du système d'unité affiché à l'écran lors de la saisie de valeurs numériques. - Organisation des touches de raccourci sur l'écran de base en mode Copie et des paramètres de l'écran de base. - Organisation des touches de raccourci sur l'écran de base en mode Numérisation/Fax et des paramètres de l'écran de base. - Sélection couleur du panneau de contrôle. - Affichage du menu principal de Mon Panneau. - Affichage de l'écran d'accueil du panneau de contrôle. ! Détails Si les fonctions Mon Panneau et les fonctions Mon Carnet d'adresses sont disponibles sur la MFP, l'écran Image Panel peut être personnalisé. Pour plus de détails, voir "Personnaliser Image Panel" à la page 6-16. 9 Fonctions Mon Panneau 9-4 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 9.1.2 Organigramme des fonctions Mon Panneau Cette section décrit la séquence opératoire des fonctions Mon Panneau. L'utilisateur procède à l'identification utilisateur pour la MFP sélectionnée. Si l'Identification utilisateur est validée, la MFP se connecte automatiquement au serveur pour obtenir Mon Panneau à l'intention de l'utilisateur connecté. Mon Panneau est disponible pendant la connexion de l'utilisateur. Dès que l'utilisateur se déconnecte, Mon Panneau est désactivé. ! Détails En cas d'échec de la connexion au serveur, vérifiez la connexion réseau. 9.1.3 Restrictions concernant les fonctions Mon Panneau Mon Panneau s'accompagne des restrictions suivantes. - L'utilisateur ou l'administrateur de PageScope My Panel Manager peut enregistrer, modifier ou supprimer My Panel. L'administrateur du MFP ne peut pas utiliser My Panel. - Si Mon Panneau n'est pas personnalisé, la langue, le système d'unité, et sélection couleur du panneau de contrôle sont conformes aux réglages de la MFP. - Si Mon Panneau n'est pas personnalisé, l'écran initial du panneau de contrôle affiche le menu principal de Mon Panneau. - Seuls les réglages copieurs et les réglages numérisation/fax enregistrés dans la mémoire de la MFP sont disponibles. - Selon les fonctions de la MFP ou des options installées sur la MFP sur laquelle Mon Panneau est utilisé, il se peut que l'environnement opératoire spécifié en tant que Mon Panneau ne soit pas disponible. - L'enregistrement, l'édition, ou la suppression de Mon Panneau peut causer une erreur si la connexion au serveur n'est pas de qualité satisfaisante. En cas d'erreur, vérifiez la connexion réseau. (1) Identification utilisateur Serveur (Gestion de Mon Panneau) Mon Panneau activé Mon Panneau activé (3) Envoi de Mon Panneau (2) Accès au serveur Mon Panneau désactivé bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 9-5 Fonctions Mon Panneau 9 9.2 Afficher Mon Panneau 9.2.1 Écran Menu Comm de Mon Panneau C'est l'écran Menu Comm qui apparaît en premier lorsque Mon Panneau s'ouvre. L'utilisateur peut organiser librement les fonctions et raccourcis fréquemment utilisés et en mémoriser les réglages sur l'écran Menu Comm. Le menu principal permet d'enregistrer douze types de touches de raccourcis. Pour plus de détails sur la spécification des réglages de l'écran Menu Comm, voir "Réglages Menu Principal" à la page 9-11. 9.2.2 Afficher l'écran Menu Comm Une fois que l'utilisateur a accédé aux fonctions Mon Panneau, il peut alors modifier l'écran initial qui doit s'afficher après que l'identification utilisateur a été reconnue valide. C'est dans le menu Application que l'on peut modifier l'écran initial permettant d'accéder au Menu Comm de Mon Panneau. % Appuyez sur [Mon Panneau] sur l'écran Menu Application pour accéder à l'écran Menu Comm de Mon Panneau. 2 Remarque L'écran initial qui s'affiche après une identification valide peut être modifié dans [Réglages Mon Panneau]. Pour plus de détails, voir "Réglage Écran par défaut" à la page 9-12. Pour plus de détails sur le menu Application, voir "Affectation des touches d'application" à la page 3-3. 9 Fonctions Mon Panneau 9-6 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 9.3 Personnaliser Mon Panneau % Pour personnaliser Mon Panneau, utilisez les [Réglages Mon Panneau] du menu "Utilitaires". 9.3.1 Réglages Mon Panneau Vous pouvez spécifier les éléments suivants. 9.3.2 Afficher l'écran Réglages Mon Panneau Lorsque les fonctions Mon Panneau sont activées, le menu Utilitaires affiche [Réglages Mon Panneau]. 1 Connectez-vous comme utilisateur enregistré. 2 Appuyez sur [Utilitaires/Compteur]. 3 Appuyez sur [Réglages Mon Panneau]. Rubrique Description Réglage Langue Spécifiez la langue à utiliser pour le panneau de contrôle. Pour plus de détails, voir "Réglage Langue" à la page 9-7. Réglage Unité de mesure Spécifiez l'unité pour l'affichage des valeurs numériques sur le panneau de contrôle. Pour plus de détails, voir "Réglage Unité de mesure" à la page 9-7. Réglages Copieur Spécifiez les réglages pour l'écran de base en mode Copie et pour les touches de raccourcis. Pour plus de détails, voir "Réglages Copieur" à la page 9-8. Paramètres Numérisation/ Fax Spécifiez les réglages pour l'écran de base en mode Numérisation/Fax et pour les touches de raccourcis. Pour plus de détails, voir "Paramètres Numérisation/Fax" à la page 9-9. Param. Sélection Couleur Spécifiez la sélection couleur du panneau de contrôle. Pour plus de détails, voir "Param. Sélection Couleur" à la page 9-11. Réglages Menu Principal Spécifiez les réglages de l'écran Menu Comm de Mon Panneau. Pour plus de détails, voir "Réglages Menu Principal" à la page 9-11. Réglage Écran par défaut Spécifiez les réglages de l'écran initial qui s'affiche après validation de l'identification utilisateur. Pour plus de détails, voir "Réglage Écran par défaut" à la page 9-12. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 9-7 Fonctions Mon Panneau 9 L'écran Réglages Mon Panneau apparaît. 9.3.3 Réglage Langue % Spécifiez parmi les langues disponibles sur la MFP la langue à utiliser pour le panneau de contrôle. 9.3.4 Réglage Unité de mesure % Sélectionnez "mm (val.numérique)", "pouce (val.numér.)", ou "pouce (fraction)" comme unité de longueur à utiliser dans le panneau de contrôle. 9 Fonctions Mon Panneau 9-8 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 9.3.5 Réglages Copieur Spécifiez les réglages pour l'écran de base en mode Copie et pour les touches de raccourcis. Onglet par Défaut Spécifiez les réglages de l'écran de base en mode Copie depuis l'écran de base ou depuis l'écran Copie rapide. L'écran de base est l'affichage normal de base. En ce qui concerne l'écran Copie rapide, les paramètres de l'écran de base s'affichent sur un seul écran afin de faciliter les réglages multiples. Touches de raccourci Les touches de raccourci pointant vers des fonctions d'application fréquemment utilisées peuvent être ajoutées à l'écran de base en mode Copie. Seulement deux touches de raccourci peuvent être programmées. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 9-9 Fonctions Mon Panneau 9 9.3.6 Paramètres Numérisation/Fax Spécifiez les réglages pour l'écran de base en mode Numérisation/Fax et pour les touches de raccourcis. Onglet par Défaut % Spécifiez l'onglet par défaut du mode Numérisation/Fax, en sélectionnant "Recherche LDAP", "Vérif. histor", "Carnet Adresses" ou "Saisie dir". Carnet d'adresses par Défaut % Si vous utilisez le carnet d'adresses public, spécifiez le type d'index à afficher dans "Carnet Adresses". Par défaut, c'est [Mon Carnet Adresses] qui est sélectionné. 2 Remarque Pour plus de détails sur Mon Carnet d'adresses, voir "Fonction Mon Carnet d'adresses" à la page 10-3. 9 Fonctions Mon Panneau 9-10 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) Touches de raccourci Les touches de raccourci pointant vers des fonctions d'application fréquemment utilisées peuvent être ajoutées à l'écran de base en mode Numérisation/Fax. Seulement deux touches de raccourci peuvent être programmées. Carnet adresses par défaut % Sélectionnez comme méthode d'affichage "Carnet adresses par défaut", "Index" ou "Type d'adresse". bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 9-11 Fonctions Mon Panneau 9 9.3.7 Param. Sélection Couleur % Pour la couleur indiquant que les touches du panneau de contrôle sont sélectionnées, choisissez "Vert", "Bleu", "Jaune", ou "Vermillon". 9.3.8 Réglages Menu Principal Spécifiez les réglages de l'écran Menu Comm de Mon Panneau. L'utilisateur peut organiser librement les fonctions et raccourcis fréquemment utilisés et en mémoriser les réglages sur l'écran Menu Comm. Écran Réglages Menu Principal Les raccourcis à afficher sur l'écran Menu Principal sont appelés les touches de menu principal ; un maximum de 12 touches peuvent être enregistrées. Pour enregistrer l'icône de raccourci pour configurer la mémoire (programme) comme une touche de menu principal, appuyez sur [Icône]. 9 Fonctions Mon Panneau 9-12 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) Enregistrer les touches de menu principal Diverses fonctions, la configuration de la fonction copie, la configuration de la fonction numérisation/fax, les réglages copieurs mémorisés et les réglages numérisation/fax mémorisés sont respectivement affectées à des touches de menu principal. 2 Remarque Pour plus de détails sur l'enregistrement du réglage Programme Copie et du réglage Programme Numérisation/Fax, voir le guide de l'utilisateur correspondant. ! Détails Si la fonction Navigateur Web ou la fonction Image Panel est activée, les touches peuvent être définies sur l'écran Menu Comm. 9.3.9 Réglage Écran par défaut % Spécifiez l'écran initial qui doit apparaître une fois que l'identification utilisateur a été effectuée depuis le Menu Comm, ou les modes Copie, Numérisation/Fax, Boîte utilisateur, Image Panel, ou Navigateur Web. Par défaut, c'est l'écran Menu Comm de Mon Panneau qui apparaît. ! Détails Si la fonction Navigateur Web ou la fonction Image Panel est activée, cet écran peut être spécifié comme écran initial. Rubrique Description Fonction Permet d'enregistrer une touche de raccourci pour chacune des fonctions Copie, Numérisation/Fax, Boîte Utilisateur, Image Panel, ou Navigateur Web. Réglage Fonction Copie Enregistre une touche de raccourci pour chaque fonction de réglage papier, réglage zoom, recto-verso/combinaison et finition. Réglage Fonction Numérisation/Fax Permet d'enregistrer une touche de raccourci pour chacune des fonctions Numérisation/ Fax, notamment le réglage de numérisation, le réglage de l'original, et le réglage communication. Réglage Programme Copie (Programme Copie) Permet d'enregistrer une touche de raccourci pointant vers la mémoire de réglage Copie enregistrée sur la MFP. Sur l'écran Menu Comm, appuyez sur [Icône] pour enregistrer l'icône de raccourci pointant vers la mémoire de réglage. La touche de raccourci pour la mémoire de réglage Copie ne peut être utilisée que sur la MFP enregistrée. Réglage Progr. Numéris./ Fax (Programme Fax/Numérisation) Permet d'enregistrer une touche de raccourci pointant vers la mémoire de réglage Numérisation/Fax enregistrée sur la MFP. Sur l'écran Menu Comm, appuyez sur [Icône] pour enregistrer l'icône de raccourci pointant vers la mémoire de réglage. La touche de raccourci pointant vers la mémoire de réglage Numérisation/Fax ne peut être utilisée que sur la MFP enregistrée. 10 Fonction Mon Carnet d'adresses bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 10-3 Fonction Mon Carnet d'adresses 10 10 Fonction Mon Carnet d'adresses 10.1 Présentation Grâce à la fonction Mon Carnet d'adresses, le carnet d'adresses personnel (Mon Carnet d'adresses) est géré centralement sur le serveur, et l'utilisateur peut accéder au carnet d'adresses personnel Mon Carnet d'adresses de la MFP sélectionnée. ! Détails Cette fonction est utilisée avec PageScope My Panel Manager. Pour plus de détails sur l'activation de cette fonction, voir le manuel de PageScope My Panel Manager. D'autre part, PageScope My Panel Manager permet de spécifier les réglages concernant Mon Carnet d'adresses. Pour plus de détails, voir le manuel PageScope My Panel Manager. 10.1.1 Classement du carnet d'adresses Lorsque les fonctions Mon Carnet d'adresses sont activées, les carnets d'adresses sont classés dans l'un des deux types suivants. L'utilisateur connecté à la MFP peut accéder aux deux types de carnet d'adresses. Carnet d'adresses public Le carnet d'adresses public est un carnet d'adresses accessible à tout utilisateur enregistré sur la machine de la MFP qu'il a sélectionnée. Le carnet d'adresses public permet d'enregistrer les adresses, les destinations de groupe et les destinations programmées. Du fait que le carnet d'adresses public est enregistré sur la machine de la MFP, les adresses disponibles sont celles qui sont enregistrées sur la MFP. Le carnet d'adresses public peut être enregistré, modifié ou supprimé par l'utilisateur ou l'Administrateur. ! Détails Si l'enregistrement ou l'édition d'adresses sont interdits par les réglages Administrateur, ces opérations ne sont pas possibles. 2 Remarque Pour plus de détails sur l'enregistrement d'une adresse, voir le Guide de l'utilisateur – Opérations Scanner réseau/Fax/Fax réseau. Mon Carnet d'adresses Mon Carnet d'adresses est un carnet d'adresses accessible seulement à l'utilisateur géré par le serveur. Dans Mon Carnet d'adresses, l'utilisateur peut enregistrer des adresses et des destinations de groupe fréquemment appelées. Du fait que Mon Carnet d'adresses est retourné par le serveur et exploité sur la MFP sélectionnée par l'utilisateur, ce carnet peut être utilisé sur n'importe quelle MFP pour peu qu'elle dispose des fonctions Mon Carnet d'adresses. L'utilisateur ou l'administrateur de PageScope My Panel Manager peut enregistrer, modifier ou supprimer My Address Book. 10 Fonction Mon Carnet d'adresses 10-4 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 10.1.2 Organigramme des fonctions Mon Carnet d'adresses Cette section décrit la séquence opératoire des fonctions Mon Carnet d'adresses. L'utilisateur procède à l'identification utilisateur pour la MFP sélectionnée. Si l'Identification utilisateur est validée, la MFP se connecte automatiquement au serveur pour obtenir Mon Carnet d'adresses à l'intention de l'utilisateur connecté. Mon Carnet d'adresses est disponible pendant la connexion de l'utilisateur. Dès que l'utilisateur se déconnecte, Mon Carnet d'adresses est désactivé. ! Détails En cas d'échec de la connexion au serveur, vérifiez la connexion réseau. 10.1.3 Restrictions relatives aux fonctions Mon Carnet d'adresses Mon Carnet d'adresses présente les restrictions suivantes. - Seul l'utilisateur peut enregistrer, modifier, ou supprimer Mon Carnet d'adresses. L'administrateur de la MFP ne peut pas effectuer d'opérations sur Mon Carnet d'adresses. - Mon Carnet d'adresses permet d'enregistrer jusqu'à 100 adresses et 10 destinations de groupe (enregistrement maximum de 100 adresses par groupe). - Dès que le nombre d'adresses enregistrées dans Mon Carnet d'adresses atteint le maximum, il n'est plus possible d'enregistrer de nouvelles adresses. - Les destinations programmées ne peuvent pas être enregistrées dans Mon Carnet d'adresses. - Mon Carnet d'adresses ne permet pas la recherche dans une base ou par index. - Les adresses de la boîte utilisateur ne peuvent être utilisées que sur la MFP sur laquelle les destinations sont enregistrées. - En fonction de ses réglages ou des options installées sur la MFP sur laquelle Mon Carnet d'adresses est utilisés, il se peut que l'émission spécifiée pour [Carnet Adresses] ne soit pas possible. - L'enregistrement, l'édition ou la suppression de Mon Carnet d'adresses peut causer une erreur si la connexion au serveur n'est pas de qualité satisfaisante. En cas d'erreur, vérifiez la connexion réseau. Mon Carnet d'adresses activé Mon Carnet d'adresses activé Serveur (Gestion de Mon Carnet d'adresses) (2) Accès au serveur (3) Obtention de Mon Carnet d'adresses Mon Carnet d'adresses activé (1) Identification utilisateur bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 10-5 Fonction Mon Carnet d'adresses 10 10.2 Enregistrement ou édition d'une adresse Mon Carnet d'adresses permet d'enregistrer les destinations privées fréquemment utilisées. Plusieurs méthodes d'enregistrement sont disponibles : - Par le panneau de contrôle de la MFP - Depuis PageScope Web Connection sur un ordinateur du réseau - Par PageScope My Panel Manager Les adresses et destinations de groupe peuvent être enregistrées dans Mon Carnet d'adresses. Cette section décrit la méthode d'enregistrement au moyen du panneau de contrôle de la MFP. 10.2.1 Carnet Adresses Les numéros de fax, les adresses e-mail ou les boîtes utilisateur enregistrées peuvent être sauvegardés dans le carnet d'adresses. Mon Carnet d'adresses permet d'enregistrer 100 adresses maximum. 1 Connectez-vous comme utilisateur enregistré. 2 Appuyez sur [Utilitaires/Compteur]. 3 Appuyez sur [Enregistrement 1-Touche/Boîte]. 4 Appuyez sur [Créer Destination 1-Touche]. 5 Appuyez sur [Carnet Adresses (Privé)]. – Appuyez sur [Carnet Adresses (Public)] pour enregistrer les adresses dans le carnet d'adresses privé. – Si l'enregistrement ou l'édition d'adresses sont interdits par les réglages Administrateur, ces opérations ne sont pas possibles. Pour plus de détails, consultez votre Administrateur. La liste des adresses enregistrées dans le carnet d'adresses (privé) apparaît. 10 Fonction Mon Carnet d'adresses 10-6 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 6 Appuyez sur [Nouveau]. – Pour modifier une adresse enregistrée, sélectionnez l'adresse voulue, et appuyez ensuite sur [Modifier]. – Pour supprimer une adresse enregistrée, sélectionnez l'adresse voulue, et appuyez ensuite sur [Eff.]. – Pour vérifier une adresse enregistrée, sélectionnez l'adresse souhaitée et appuyez ensuite sur [Vér.Par. Tâches.]. 7 Sélectionnez le type de destination à enregistrer, puis spécifiez les réglages des éléments requis. 2 Remarque Pour plus de détails sur l'enregistrement d'une adresse, voir le Guide de l'utilisateur – Opérations Scanner réseau/Fax/Fax réseau. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 10-7 Fonction Mon Carnet d'adresses 10 10.2.2 Groupe On peut, en les regroupant, enregistrer plusieurs adresses dans Mon Carnet d'adresses et constituer ainsi une destination de groupe. Mon Carnet d'adresses permet d'enregistrer jusqu'à 10 destinations de groupe (enregistrement maximum de 100 destinations par groupe). 1 Connectez-vous comme utilisateur enregistré. 2 Appuyez sur [Utilitaires/Compteur]. 3 Appuyez sur [Enregistrement 1-Touche/Boîte]. 4 Appuyez sur [Créer Destination 1-Touche]. 5 Appuyez sur [Groupe]. La liste des destinations de groupe enregistrées apparaît. 6 Appuyez sur [Privé], puis sur [Nouveau]. – Pour éditer une destination de groupe enregistrée, sélectionnez la destination de groupe voulue, et appuyez ensuite sur [Modifier]. – Pour supprimer une destination de groupe enregistrée, sélectionnez la destination de groupe voulue, et appuyez ensuite sur [Eff.]. – Pour vérifier une destination de groupe enregistrée, sélectionnez la destination de groupe souhaitée et appuyez ensuite sur [Vér.Par. Tâches.]. – Appuyez sur [Public] pour afficher les destinations de groupe publiques. 10 Fonction Mon Carnet d'adresses 10-8 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 7 Assurez-vous de sélectionner [Groupe Privé] comme destination, puis spécifiez les réglages des éléments requis. – Lorsque l'on sélectionne [Destinataire], les adresses enregistrées dans Mon Carnet d'adresses s'affichent. Sélectionnez les adresses à grouper. 2 Remarque Pour plus de détails sur l'enregistrement des destinations de groupe, voir le Guide de l'utilisateur – Opérations Scanner réseau/Fax/Fax réseau. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 10-9 Fonction Mon Carnet d'adresses 10 10.3 Copier des adresses enregistrées d'un carnet à l'autre Les adresses enregistrées peuvent être copiées de Mon Carnet d'adresses vers le carnet d'adresses public et réciproquement. ! Détails En revanche, les destinations de groupe ne peuvent pas être échangées entre ces deux types de carnets d'adresses. 10.3.1 Copier les adresses du carnet public sur Mon Carnet d'adresses Les adresses enregistrées du carnet d'adresses public peuvent être copiées sur Mon Carnet d'adresses. 1 Affichez l'écran Créer Destination 1-Touche. 2 Appuyez sur [Carnet Adresses (Public)]. 3 Sélectionnez le type de destination voulu. La liste des adresses du type de destination sélectionné s'affiche. 4 Sélectionnez l'adresse à copier, et appuyez ensuite sur [Copier vers Adr pers]. 5 Dans la boîte de dialogue de confirmation, sélectionnez [Oui], et appuyez ensuite sur [Valider]. L'adresse sélectionnée est copiée. 10 Fonction Mon Carnet d'adresses 10-10 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 10.3.2 Copier les adresses de Mon Carnet d'adresses sur le carnet d'adresses public Les adresses enregistrées de Mon Carnet d'adresses peuvent être copiées sur le carnet d'adresses public. 1 Affichez l'écran Créer Destination 1-Touche. 2 Appuyez sur [Carnet Adresses (Privé)]. La liste des adresses enregistrées dans le carnet d'adresses (privé) apparaît. 3 Sélectionnez l'adresse à copier, et appuyez ensuite sur [Copier vers Adr Part]. 4 Dans la boîte de dialogue de confirmation, sélectionnez [Oui], et appuyez ensuite sur [Valider]. L'adresse sélectionnée est copiée. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 10-11 Fonction Mon Carnet d'adresses 10 10.4 Utiliser Mon Carnet d'adresses lors de l'envoi Lorsque l'on envoie un document en mode Numérisation/Fax ou un document enregistré dans la boîte utilisateur, il est possible de spécifier l'adresse voulue figurant dans Mon Carnet d'adresses. 10.4.1 Spécifier une adresse Si vous utilisez les fonctions Mon Carnet d'adresses, l'écran suivant apparaît lorsque une adresse doit être spécifiée. Les adresses enregistrées dans Mon Carnet d'adresses s'affichent en fonction du type de destination. Sélectionnez une touche correspondant à la destination désirée. % Pour spécifier une adresse enregistrée dans le carnet d'adresses public, appuyez sur [Public]. 10.4.2 Rechercher une adresse Si l'adresse voulue n'est pas localisée, elle peut faire l'objet d'une recherche. % Appuyez sur [Recher simple] sur l'écran de recherche d'adresse. – [Type d'adresse] sert à chercher l'adresse selon le type. – [Recherche détaillée] sert à chercher l'adresse d'après le nom de l'adresse ou une partie des données qu'elle contient. 10 Fonction Mon Carnet d'adresses 10-12 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 11 Index bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 11-3 Index 11 11 Index A Activer Onglet 4-11 Adresse 4-9 Animation 4-11 B Barre d'outils 4-8 Boîte 5-8 C Cache 4-12, 5-4 Caractéristiques techniques 4-3 Carnet Adresses 10-5 Carnet d'adresses 10-3, 10-9 Carnet d'adresses public 10-3 Codage 4-11 Code d'accès 8-5 Connexion 5-6 Connexion à une boîte 5-8 Conventions du manuel 1-4 Cookies 4-12 Cryptage 8-5 CSS 4-11 D Déconnexion 5-7 E Enregistrement Photo 2-3, 7-3 Envoyer vers 6-15 É Écran Réglages Menu Principal 9-11 F Favoris 4-9 Fenêtre Instantanée 4-11 G Groupe 10-7 H Histor. 4-9 Historique Formulaire 4-12 I ID numérique 8-6 Image 4-11 Image Panel 2-3, 6-3 Impres. dir. 8-7 Impression 4-10, 5-10 Infos Navigateur Web 4-12 i-Option LK-101 2-3 i-Option LK-102 2-3 J JavaScript 4-11 L Liste 4-11 Liste de fichiers 5-9 M Menu 4-10 Menu Application 3-4 Menu Principal 9-5 Mémoire externe 6-11, 6-15 Mémos Page 4-11 Mode Affichage 4-11 Mon Carnet d'adresses 2-4, 10-3 Mon Panneau 2-4, 9-3 N Navigateur Web 2-3, 4-3, 4-11 O Opération Page 4-11 P Page d'accueil 4-11 PageScope My Panel Manager 2-4 PageScope Web Connection 5-3, 7-3 Paramètres Numérisation/Fax 9-9 Paramètres Sélect. Couleur 9-11 Paramètres Touche Application 3-4 PDF 4-13, 8-5 Personnaliser 3-3, 6-16, 9-3 Propriétés des documents PDF 8-4 Proxy 4-12 R Rendu intelligent 4-7 Rendu Parfait 4-7 Rendu Rapide 4-11 Retour ligne auto 4-11 Réglage Écran d'accueil 9-12 Réglage Langue 9-7 Réglage Progr. Numéris./Fax 9-12 Réglage Programme Copie 9-12 Réglage Unité de Mesure 9-7 Réglages Copieur 9-8 Réglages Mon Panneau 9-6 S Sécurité 4-12 Sélect. couleur de copie imprim. 4-11 Signature numérique 8-5 Spécifications 7-3 Supprimer 5-12 11-4 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 11 Index T Touche d'application 2-3, 3-3 Touche du menu Application 3-3 Traitement PDF 2-3, 8-3 V Vérification césures Japonais 4-11 Vue 4-11 Guide de l’expert ineo 1052/1250 Table des matières-1 Table des matières 1 Introduction 1.1 Bienvenue ........................................................................................................................................ 1-3 1.1.1 Composition du guide de l'utilisateur ................................................................................................ 1-3 1.2 Energy Star® ................................................................................................................................... 1-5 1.3 Restrictions légales relatives à la copie ....................................................................................... 1-6 2 Marques commerciales et droits de reproduction 2.1 Marques commerciales et droits de reproduction ...................................................................... 2-3 2.2 Remarque ........................................................................................................................................ 2-4 3 Précautions pour l'installation et l'utilisation 3.1 Informations de sécurité ................................................................................................................ 3-3 3.1.1 Démontage et modification................................................................................................................ 3-3 3.1.2 Cordon d'alimentation ....................................................................................................................... 3-4 3.1.3 Alimentation ....................................................................................................................................... 3-4 3.1.4 Fiche d'alimentation........................................................................................................................... 3-4 3.1.5 Mise à la terre .................................................................................................................................... 3-5 3.1.6 Installation.......................................................................................................................................... 3-5 3.1.7 Ventilation .......................................................................................................................................... 3-5 3.1.8 Actions de dépannage en cas de problèmes .................................................................................... 3-6 3.1.9 Consommables.................................................................................................................................. 3-6 3.1.10 Déplacement de la machine .............................................................................................................. 3-6 3.1.11 Pendant l'utilisation de la machine .................................................................................................... 3-6 3.1.12 Avant de partir en vacances .............................................................................................................. 3-7 3.1.13 Papier................................................................................................................................................. 3-7 3.1.14 Pastille de colle .................................................................................................................................. 3-7 3.1.15 Thermorelieur ..................................................................................................................................... 3-7 3.1.16 Unité d'authentification(type Carte IC) AU-201 ................................................................................. 3-8 3.2 Notices de réglementation............................................................................................................. 3-9 3.2.1 Émission d'ozone............................................................................................................................... 3-9 3.2.2 Interférence électromagnétique et agréments de sécurité ................................................................ 3-9 3.3 Signalétique et sécurité................................................................................................................ 3-11 3.3.1 Étiquettes d'avertissement sur la zone de fusion de l'unité de transport de fixation ...................... 3-11 3.3.2 Étiquettes d'avertissement sur l'unité de transport de fixation ....................................................... 3-12 3.3.3 Étiquette de précaution au dos du chargeur Auto........................................................................... 3-13 3.3.4 Étiquette d'avertissement sur le réservoir de toner usagé .............................................................. 3-13 3.3.5 Étiquette d'avertissement sur le Thermorelieur PB-503 .................................................................. 3-14 3.3.6 Étiquettes de mise en garde sur l'Unité de finition FS-532 ............................................................. 3-15 3.3.7 Étiquettes de mise en garde sur la Perforeuse multiple GP-501..................................................... 3-17 3.3.8 Étiquette de mise en garde sur le Relieur automatique à anneaux GP-502.................................... 3-18 3.4 Encombrement.............................................................................................................................. 3-20 3.5 Précautions d'utilisation............................................................................................................... 3-33 3.5.1 Alimentation ..................................................................................................................................... 3-33 3.5.2 Environnement ................................................................................................................................. 3-33 3.5.3 Manipulation des cartouches de toner ............................................................................................ 3-33 3.5.4 Stockage des documents imprimés ................................................................................................ 3-33 3.5.5 Émission d'ozone............................................................................................................................. 3-33 3.5.6 Exposition directe au soleil .............................................................................................................. 3-33 3.5.7 Précaution d'emploi pour l'Unité de pliage et l'Unité de finition ..................................................... 3-34 Table des matières-2 ineo 1052/1250 4 Préparation à l'utilisation 4.1 Composition de la machine ........................................................................................................... 4-3 4.1.1 Composants externes de la machine ................................................................................................ 4-3 4.1.2 Composants internes de la machine ................................................................................................. 4-5 4.1.3 Présentation du panneau de contrôle................................................................................................ 4-7 4.1.4 ADF (chargeur automatique de documents)...................................................................................... 4-9 4.1.5 Équipement standard/en option des ineo 1250/1052 ..................................................................... 4-11 4.1.6 Unité d'alimentation papier PF-703 ................................................................................................. 4-18 4.1.7 Unité d'alimentation papier PF-706 ................................................................................................. 4-20 4.1.8 Module d'insertion grande capacité MI-PFU (PF-703 + MI-PFU Kit FA-501) ................................. 4-22 4.1.9 Unité relais RU-509 (Humidificateur HM-102) ................................................................................. 4-24 4.1.10 Unité relais RU-510.......................................................................................................................... 4-26 4.1.11 Unité de pliage FD-503 .................................................................................................................... 4-27 4.1.12 Piqueuse à cheval SD-506............................................................................................................... 4-30 4.1.13 Thermorelieur PB-503...................................................................................................................... 4-32 4.1.14 Empileur grande capacité LS-505 ................................................................................................... 4-36 4.1.15 Unité de finition FS-532 (Unité de perforation PK-522 + Piqueuse à cheval SD-510 + Module d'insertion PI-502) ............................................................................................................................4-38 4.1.16 Kit DD extractible RH-101................................................................................................................ 4-43 4.1.17 Unité d'authentification (type Carte IC) AU-201 .............................................................................. 4-44 4.1.18 Perforeuse multiple GP-501 (jeux d'emporte-pièces DS-508 à DS-518) ........................................ 4-45 4.1.19 Relieur automatique à anneaux GP-502.......................................................................................... 4-47 4.2 Mise sous tension/hors tension .................................................................................................. 4-51 4.2.1 Mise sous tension ............................................................................................................................ 4-51 4.2.2 Mise hors tension............................................................................................................................. 4-53 4.2.3 Mise automatique de l'interrupteur principal sur OFF (Arrêt)........................................................... 4-54 4.2.4 Reprise d'une tâche le lendemain.................................................................................................... 4-55 4.3 Retour automatique aux conditions initiales de la machine : Réinitialisation auto................ 4-59 4.4 Réinitialisation manuelle de la machine : Réinitialisation ......................................................... 4-60 4.5 Utilisation de la machine quand le voyant Éco énergie est allumé.......................................... 4-61 4.5.1 Activation de la machine.................................................................................................................. 4-61 4.5.2 Économie automatique d'énergie : Veille......................................................................................... 4-62 4.5.3 Économie automatique de l'énergie : Éco énergie (Extinction Auto) .............................................. 4-62 4.5.4 Économie manuelle d'énergie.......................................................................................................... 4-63 4.5.5 Limiter l'utilisation de la machine : Programmateur hebdomadaire ................................................ 4-63 4.6 Effectuer l'Authentification utilisateur/Configuration compte ................................................. 4-65 4.6.1 Authentification par code utilisateur/compte................................................................................... 4-65 4.6.2 Authentification utilisateur par carte IC............................................................................................ 4-68 4.6.3 Authentification utilisateur sur un serveur externe........................................................................... 4-70 4.7 Affichage du Guide d'utilisation : Message d'aide..................................................................... 4-72 4.8 Régler le temps de réponse des touches de l'écran tactile : Accessibilité............................. 4-75 5 Informations relatives au papier et aux originaux 5.1 Informations sur le papier .............................................................................................................. 5-3 5.1.1 Grammage du papier ......................................................................................................................... 5-3 5.1.2 Magasin papier/bac sortie ................................................................................................................. 5-5 5.1.3 Format papier................................................................................................................................... 5-10 5.1.4 Fonction de Basculement ATS ........................................................................................................ 5-14 5.1.5 Pour stocker le papier...................................................................................................................... 5-15 5.2 Informations relatives aux originaux........................................................................................... 5-16 5.2.1 Originaux sur chargeur Auto ............................................................................................................ 5-16 5.2.2 Utilisation de la vitre d'exposition.................................................................................................... 5-17 6 Opérations d'impression ineo 1052/1250 Table des matières-3 6.1 Réglages sur l'écran machine ....................................................................................................... 6-3 6.1.1 [Réglage magasin].............................................................................................................................. 6-3 6.1.2 [Calage recto-verso]........................................................................................................................... 6-4 6.1.3 [Réglage] ............................................................................................................................................ 6-4 6.1.4 [Contrôleur] ........................................................................................................................................ 6-5 6.1.5 [Enr/Sup. régl.Papier] ......................................................................................................................... 6-5 6.1.6 [Enr/Suppr.form.perso] ...................................................................................................................... 6-6 6.2 Description de la configuration papier ......................................................................................... 6-7 6.3 Présentation du réglage des magasins ........................................................................................ 6-8 6.4 Opérations [Réglage magasin] .................................................................................................... 6-12 6.4.1 Présentation des opérations de réglage magasin ........................................................................... 6-12 6.4.2 Définition du format papier .............................................................................................................. 6-14 6.4.3 Définition des conditions papier : Rappeler..................................................................................... 6-19 6.4.4 Définition des conditions papier : Modifier ...................................................................................... 6-20 6.4.5 Enregistrement des conditions papier ............................................................................................. 6-29 6.4.6 Définition de Ventilation ................................................................................................................... 6-30 6.4.7 Réglage de la ventilation de l'Unité d'alimentation papier PF-703.................................................. 6-33 6.4.8 Réglage du mode de déshumidification de l'Unité d'alimentation papier PF-703 .......................... 6-35 6.4.9 Réglage Papier du magasin MI-PFU ............................................................................................... 6-36 6.4.10 Configuration du magasin TR .......................................................................................................... 6-44 6.4.11 Réglage des bacs insertion : module d'insertion de l'Unité de pliage FD-503................................ 6-48 6.4.12 Réglage des bacs insertion : Module d'insertion PI-502 ................................................................. 6-52 6.5 Opération [Enr/Sup. régl.Papier] ................................................................................................. 6-54 6.5.1 Enregistrement des conditions papier ............................................................................................. 6-54 6.5.2 Supprimer les Conditions Papier ..................................................................................................... 6-64 6.5.3 Affichage des détails des conditions papier .................................................................................... 6-66 6.6 Opérations [Enr/Suppr.form.perso] ............................................................................................ 6-68 6.6.1 Enregistrement des formatalisés ..................................................................................................... 6-68 6.6.2 Suppression de formats personnalisés ........................................................................................... 6-70 6.7 Utilisation de [Calage recto-verso] ............................................................................................. 6-72 6.8 Arrêter la numérisation/l'impression .......................................................................................... 6-76 6.9 Contrôler et surveiller la machine depuis un navigateur .......................................................... 6-79 6.9.1 Contrôler la machine depuis un navigateur Internet : Remote Panel .............................................. 6-80 6.9.2 Surveiller la machine depuis un navigateur Internet : Remote Monitor ........................................... 6-82 6.9.3 Surveiller plusieurs machines depuis un navigateur : Multi Monitor................................................ 6-83 6.10 Utilisation de l'Unité de pliage FD-503........................................................................................ 6-84 6.10.1 Pliage des copies : Pliage en Z/Roulé/En accordéon/Économique/ Portefeuille/Pliage en 2 ......... 6-85 6.10.2 Perforation des copies Perforation .................................................................................................. 6-87 6.10.3 Chargement de couvertures dans le module d'insertion de l'Unité de pliage FD-503.................... 6-88 6.10.4 Prévention d'insertion multiple dans le module d'insertion de l'Unité de pliage FD-503................ 6-89 6.11 Utilisation de l'Unité de finition FS-532....................................................................................... 6-90 6.11.1 Tri de copies : Tri/Groupe/Tri décalé/GroupeDécalé....................................................................... 6-91 6.11.2 Tri des copies dans le bac auxiliaire : Tri/Groupe............................................................................ 6-93 6.11.3 Agrafage des copies (Agrafage en coin/2 points) : agrafage........................................................... 6-94 6.11.4 Réalisation de livrets pliés : Pliage & Agrafage/Pliage en 2 multiple ............................................... 6-96 6.11.5 Pliage des copies en trois : Multi pli en 3 ........................................................................................ 6-98 6.11.6 Perforation des copies : Perforation .............................................................................................. 6-100 6.11.7 Utilisation manuelle de l 'Unité de finition FS-532 ......................................................................... 6-102 6.11.8 Récupération des feuilles du bac de pliage................................................................................... 6-104 6.12 Récupération des feuilles imprimées du magasin de l'Unité de finition FS-532................... 6-105 6.12.1 Récupération des feuilles imprimées du bac principal après suspension automatique................ 6-105 6.12.2 Pour suspendre la sortie manuellement ........................................................................................ 6-106 6.12.3 Récupération des feuilles imprimées du bac auxiliaire après suspension automatique ............... 6-107 6.12.4 Récupération des feuilles imprimées du bac de pliage après suspension automatique............... 6-108 6.12.5 Annulation d'une tâche en suspens............................................................................................... 6-109 6.13 Utilisation de la Piqueuse à cheval SD-506 .............................................................................. 6-110 Table des matières-4 ineo 1052/1250 6.13.1 Réalisation de livrets pliés : Pliage & Agrafage/Pliage en 2 multiple ............................................. 6-110 6.13.2 Pliage des copies en trois : Multi pli en 3 ...................................................................................... 6-112 6.14 Utilisation manuelle de l'Unité de pliage FD-503/l'Unité de finition FS-532/la Piqueuse à cheval SD-506 ........................................................................................ 6-114 6.15 Utilisation du Thermorelieur PB-503 ......................................................................................... 6-118 6.15.1 Activation/Désactivation du chauffage du Thermorelieur .............................................................. 6-122 6.15.2 Manipuler le Thermorelieur PB-503 et les pastilles de colle.......................................................... 6-124 6.15.3 Confection de livrets thermoreliés ................................................................................................. 6-125 6.15.4 Récupération des livres thermoreliés du magasin thermorelieur................................................... 6-132 6.16 Utilisation de l'empileur grande capacité LS-505 .................................................................... 6-134 6.16.1 Sortie dans l'empileur .................................................................................................................... 6-134 6.16.2 Récupération des jeux terminés sur l'empileur.............................................................................. 6-135 6.16.3 Pour bloquer le papier sur le bac de transport .............................................................................. 6-136 6.16.4 Sortie dans le magasin secondaire................................................................................................ 6-138 6.17 Utilisation de deux machines en tandem : Mode Tandem...................................................... 6-140 6.17.1 Présentation du mode Tandem ..................................................................................................... 6-140 6.17.2 Opérations en mode Tandem........................................................................................................ 6-141 6.17.3 Annulation du mode tandem/de l'impression en tandem.............................................................. 6-145 6.17.4 Annulation de l'impression en mode tandem sur le MFP partenaire uniquement......................... 6-146 6.17.5 Dépannage en mode Tandem/impression..................................................................................... 6-147 6.18 Utilisation de la Perforeuse multiple GP-501............................................................................ 6-148 6.18.1 Perforation des copies : Perforation .............................................................................................. 6-149 6.18.2 Remplacement de l'emporte-pièce ............................................................................................... 6-151 6.19 Utilisation du Relieur automatique à anneaux GP-502............................................................ 6-153 6.19.1 Confection de livrets reliés par des pièces de reliure dans les trous : relieur à anneaux .............. 6-153 6.19.2 Récupération des livrets du magasin Livret................................................................................... 6-157 7 Gestion des travaux 7.1 Présentation de l'écran Liste des tâches ..................................................................................... 7-3 7.2 Écran Liste des tâches actives/en suspens ................................................................................. 7-5 7.2.1 Présentation de l'écran Liste des tâches actives/en suspens........................................................... 7-5 7.2.2 Affichage des détails d'une tâche...................................................................................................... 7-7 7.2.3 Utilisation de la fonction Impression prioritaire.................................................................................. 7-8 7.2.4 Changement de l'ordre de sortie ..................................................................................................... 7-10 7.2.5 Déplacement d'une tâche de la liste Active dans la liste Suspens.................................................. 7-11 7.2.6 Suppression d'une tâche individuelle de la liste Active................................................................... 7-12 7.2.7 Suppression de toutes les tâches de la liste Active ........................................................................ 7-13 7.2.8 Utilisation de la fonction Édition ticket sur une tâche en suspens .................................................. 7-14 7.2.9 Levée d'une tâche en suspens ........................................................................................................ 7-16 7.3 Planificateur................................................................................................................................... 7-17 7.3.1 Présentation de l'écran Planificateur ............................................................................................... 7-17 7.3.2 Utilisation de [Changer unité], [-], et [+] ........................................................................................... 7-20 7.3.3 Utilisation du dialogue Papier via le dialogue d'opération............................................................... 7-21 7.3.4 Changer l'ordre de sortie des travaux en réserve............................................................................ 7-22 7.3.5 Modification du réglage magasin..................................................................................................... 7-24 7.3.6 Sortie d'une tâche indiquant [Aucun papier adéquat] Job .............................................................. 7-26 7.3.7 Sortie d'une tâche avec un format papier non conforme ................................................................ 7-28 7.3.8 Transformer une tâche en réserve en tâche en suspens................................................................. 7-29 7.3.9 Suppression d'une tâche en réserve ............................................................................................... 7-30 7.4 Contrôle de l'historique/historique d'envoi/historique incomplet ........................................... 7-31 7.4.1 Affichage de l'historique des sorties................................................................................................ 7-31 7.4.2 Affichage de l'Hist. envoi ................................................................................................................. 7-34 7.4.3 Contrôle de l'historique incomplet................................................................................................... 7-37 7.5 Opération sur des tâches spoolées ............................................................................................ 7-40 7.5.1 Utilisation des tâches spoolées ....................................................................................................... 7-40 ineo 1052/1250 Table des matières-5 8 Consommables et mise au rebut 8.1 Comment afficher un message d'aide .......................................................................................... 8-4 8.2 Rechargement toner....................................................................................................................... 8-7 8.3 Chargement du papier.................................................................................................................... 8-9 8.3.1 Vérifier le papier à charger ............................................................................................................... 8-10 8.3.2 Charger du papier dans les magasins de la machine (Magasins 1 et 2) ......................................... 8-12 8.3.3 Chargement du papier dans l'Unité d'alimentation papier PF-703 (Magasin 3 à 8)........................ 8-14 8.3.4 Réglage de l'espace entre les guides latéraux de l'Unité d'alimentation papier PF-703 (Magasins 3 à 8) ................................................................................................................................8-17 8.3.5 Chargement du papier dans l'Unité d'alimentation papier PF-706 (magasins 3 à 8) ...................... 8-20 8.3.6 Chargement du papier petit format dans l'Unité d'alimentation papier PF-703/PF-706 (Magasins 3 à 8) ................................................................................................................................8-22 8.3.7 Chargement du papier dans le Module d'insertion grande capacité MI-PFU ................................. 8-26 8.3.8 Chargement du papier dans l'Unité d'insertion de l'Unité de pliage FD-503 .................................. 8-28 8.3.9 Chargement du papier dans l'Unité d'insertion PI-502 ................................................................... 8-28 8.4 Chargement du papier à couverture pour thermorelieur.......................................................... 8-29 8.4.1 Chargement du Papier couverture dans le Bac couvertures du Thermorelieur PB-503 ................. 8-29 8.5 Chargement de papier à onglet ................................................................................................... 8-32 8.5.1 Chargement du papier à onglet dans les magasins de la machine (Magasins 1 et 2) .................... 8-32 8.5.2 Chargement de papier à onglet dans l'Unité d'alimentation papier PF-703/PF-706 ...................... 8-33 8.6 Rechargement agrafes ................................................................................................................. 8-35 8.6.1 Rechargement d'agrafes dans l'Unité de finition FS-532 pour la piqûre à plat............................... 8-35 8.6.2 Rechargement d'agrafes dans l'Unité de finition FS-532 pour la piqûre à cheval .......................... 8-36 8.6.3 Rechargement d'agrafes dans la Piqueuse à cheval SD-506 ......................................................... 8-38 8.7 Chargement de pastilles de colle dans le Thermorelieur PB-503 ............................................ 8-40 8.8 Rechargement en eau du réservoir de l'humidificateur de l'Unité relais RU-509................... 8-42 8.9 Rechargement des pièces de reliure dans le Relieur automatique à anneaux GP-502 ......... 8-44 8.10 Remplacement de la boîte à déchets toner ............................................................................... 8-46 8.11 Élimination des débris d'agrafes ................................................................................................. 8-48 8.12 Élimination des déchets de perforation...................................................................................... 8-50 8.12.1 Vidage de la corbeille de perforation de l'Unité de finition FS-532 ................................................. 8-50 8.12.2 Vidage de la corbeille de perforation de l'Unité de pliage FD-503 .................................................. 8-51 8.12.3 Vidage de la corbeille de perforation de la Perforeuse multiple GP-501......................................... 8-53 8.12.4 Vidage de la corbeille à déchets du Relieur automatique à anneaux GP-502................................. 8-54 8.13 Élimination des chutes de massicotage ..................................................................................... 8-56 8.13.1 Vidage de la corbeille de chutes de massicotage de la Piqueuse à cheval SD-506 ....................... 8-56 8.13.2 Vidage de la corbeille à déchets du Thermorelieur PB-503 ............................................................ 8-57 8.14 Remplacement de la Butée de lame de la Piqueuse à cheval SD-506..................................... 8-59 9 Entretien 9.1 Nettoyage......................................................................................................................................... 9-3 9.1.1 Nettoyage de la vitre de numérisation du chargeur Auto .................................................................. 9-3 9.1.2 Nettoyage de la vitre d'exposition ..................................................................................................... 9-3 9.1.3 Nettoyage du cache document du chargeur Auto............................................................................. 9-3 9.1.4 Nettoyage de l'extérieure de la machine ........................................................................................... 9-4 9.1.5 Nettoyage du panneau de contrôle ................................................................................................... 9-4 9.1.6 Nettoyage de la courroie de transport du bac pliage de la Piqueuse à cheval SD-506.................... 9-4 9.1.7 Nettoyage de la corbeille de perforation de la Perforeuse multiple GP-501 ..................................... 9-6 9.2 Vérification du compteur copie ..................................................................................................... 9-7 9.3 En cas d'affichage du message [Appel SAV] ............................................................................... 9-9 9.4 Intervention d'entretien ................................................................................................................ 9-10 10 Incidents 10.1 En cas d'affichage du message [Contacter le SAV] : Contactez le SAV ................................. 10-3 Table des matières-6 ineo 1052/1250 10.1.1 Opérations avec affichage de l'écran Appel le SAV ........................................................................ 10-3 10.1.2 Utilisation limitée de la machine ...................................................................................................... 10-4 10.2 Si le message [Bourrage papier] s'affiche.................................................................................. 10-5 10.2.1 Précautions d'élimination de bourrage papier de la machine ......................................................... 10-7 10.2.2 Précautions d'élimination de bourrage papier de l'Unité d'alimentation papier PF-703................. 10-9 10.2.3 Précautions d'élimination de bourrage papier du Thermorelieur PB-503 ....................................... 10-9 10.2.4 Précautions d'élimination de bourrage papier de la Piqueuse à cheval SD-506............................. 10-9 10.2.5 Précautions d'élimination de bourrage papier de l'Unité de finition FS-532 ................................... 10-9 10.2.6 Précautions d'élimination de bourrage papier du Relieur automatique à anneaux GP-502 ......... 10-10 10.2.7 Opérations sur l'écran Position du bourrage et de l'écran Instructions de dépannage ................ 10-12 10.2.8 Numéro du bourrage sur l'écran Position du bourrage ................................................................. 10-13 10.3 Si le voyant Bourrage s'allume sur le Thermorelieur PB-503 ................................................. 10-16 10.4 Affichage clignotant de position des bourrages sur l'Unité de finition FS-532..................... 10-18 10.5 Si l'onglet [MACHINE] clignote en orange................................................................................ 10-20 10.5.1 Bourrage papier ............................................................................................................................. 10-20 10.5.2 Papier épuisé dans un magasin pendant la réalisation d'un travail de copie................................ 10-21 10.5.3 Papier épuisé dans un magasin pendant la réalisation d'un travail d'impression......................... 10-23 10.5.4 Incompatibilité de format papier pendant un travail d'impression ................................................ 10-25 10.5.5 Incompatibilité de type de papier pendant un travail d'impression............................................... 10-27 10.6 Si le message [Mémoire pleine] s'affiche................................................................................. 10-29 10.6.1 Dépassement mémoire dans le travail en cours............................................................................ 10-29 10.6.2 Dépassement mémoire dans le travail en réserve ......................................................................... 10-29 10.7 En cas d'affichage du message [Mettre hors tension puis sous tension]............................. 10-30 10.8 En cas d'affichage du message [Pas de réponse de la platine imprimante] ........................ 10-31 10.9 Si les trous ne sont pas nettement perforés sur la Perforeuse multiple GP-501.................. 10-32 10.10 Indication et résolution de bourrage papier dans le Relieur automatique à anneaux GP-502 ................................................................................................ 10-33 10.11 Conseils de dépannage.............................................................................................................. 10-34 11 Réglage 11.1 Présentation fonctionnelle ........................................................................................................... 11-3 11.1.1 Liste des éléments du Menu de réglage.......................................................................................... 11-3 11.2 [01 Réglage machine] ................................................................................................................. 11-12 11.2.1 [01 Réglage restitution] - [01 Restit. verti. écriture-RECTO] .......................................................... 11-12 11.2.2 [01 Réglage restitution] - [02 Restit. verti. écriture-VERSO] .......................................................... 11-13 11.2.3 [01 Réglage restitution] - [03 Restit. horiz. écriture-RECTO] ......................................................... 11-14 11.2.4 [01 Réglage restitution] - [04 Restit. horiz. écriture-VERSO] ......................................................... 11-15 11.2.5 [02 Réglage temporisation] - [01 Tempo. synchro.écriture-RECTO] ............................................. 11-16 11.2.6 [02 Réglage temporisation] - [02 Tempo. synchro.écriture-VERSO] ............................................. 11-17 11.2.7 [02 Réglage temporisation] - [03 Tempo. synchro. lecture vitre] ................................................... 11-18 11.2.8 [02 Réglage temporisation] - [04 Tempo. synchro. lecture ADF] ................................................... 11-19 11.2.9 [03 Centrage écriture] - [01 Réglage centrage écriture]................................................................. 11-20 11.2.10 [04 Réglage LED (LPH)] - [01 Réglage décalage éléments LED] ................................................... 11-21 11.3 [02 Réglages finition] .................................................................................................................. 11-23 11.3.1 [01 Réglage Agrafeuse (Principal)] - [01 Réglage Position Agrafe] ................................................ 11-23 11.3.2 [01 Réglage Agrafeuse (Principal)] - [02 Réglage Largeur Papier Agrafé] ..................................... 11-25 11.3.3 [01 Réglage Agrafeuse (Principal)] - [03 Réglage Plaque Alignement FD]..................................... 11-26 11.3.4 [01 Réglage Agrafeuse (Principal)] - [04 Larg. papier unit guid sortie]........................................... 11-27 11.3.5 [01 Réglage Agrafeuse (Principal)] - [05 Régl.Descente Palette Enroul.] ....................................... 11-29 11.3.6 [01 Réglage Agrafeuse (Principal)] - [06 Opération pr fonct. Enrouler] .......................................... 11-30 11.3.7 [01 Réglage Agrafeuse (Principal)] - [07 Opération pince supérieure] ........................................... 11-31 11.3.8 [01 Réglage Agrafeuse (Principal)] - [08 Opération Alignement sortie] .......................................... 11-31 11.3.9 [02 Réglage Agrafeuse (Pliage)] - [01 Réglage Espace Pliage&Agraf.] .......................................... 11-32 11.3.10 [02 Réglage Agrafeuse (Pliage)] - [02 Régl. Larg. Pap. Pliage&Agraf] ........................................... 11-33 11.3.11 [02 Réglage Agrafeuse (Pliage)] - [03 Régl. Pos. Agraf. Pliage&Agraf] .......................................... 11-34 ineo 1052/1250 Table des matières-7 11.3.12 [02 Réglage Agrafeuse (Pliage)] - [04 Régl. Pos. Pli Pliage&Agraf.]............................................... 11-35 11.3.13 [02 Réglage Agrafeuse (Pliage)] - [05 Régl. Pos. Pli Pliage en deux]............................................. 11-37 11.3.14 [02 Réglage Agrafeuse (Pliage)] - [06 Réglage pliage en 3] - [01 Réglage Position Pliage en 3] ... 11-38 11.3.15 [02 Réglage Agrafeuse (Pliage)] - [06 Réglage pliage en 3] - [02 Réglage Plaque Pliage Double].................................................................................................11-40 11.3.16 [02 Réglage Agrafeuse (Pliage)] - [07 Réglage Force Pliage en 2]................................................. 11-41 11.3.17 [03 Réglage Agrafeuse (Perfo)] - [01 Régl. Position Vert. (CD)] ..................................................... 11-42 11.3.18 [03 Réglages Agrafeuse (Perfo)] - [02 Régl. Position Horiz. (FD)] .................................................. 11-43 11.3.19 [03 Réglages Agrafeuse (Perfo)] - [03 Réglage synchronisation]................................................... 11-44 11.3.20 [04 Régl. Agrafeuse (Bac insert.)] - [01 Réglage synchronisation PI]............................................. 11-45 11.4 [02 Réglages finition] (Unité de pliage FD-503)........................................................................ 11-46 11.4.1 [05 Unité perforation (Plieuse)] - [01 Alignement perforation] ........................................................ 11-46 11.4.2 [05 Unité perforation (Plieuse)] - [02 Position verticale perforat].................................................... 11-47 11.4.3 [06 Unité pliage (Plieuse)] - [01 Réglage Pliage en 2] .................................................................... 11-48 11.4.4 [06 Unité pliage (Plieuse)] - [02 Réglage pliage roulé].................................................................... 11-49 11.4.5 [06 Unité pliage (Plieuse)] - [03 Réglage pliage en accordéon]...................................................... 11-51 11.4.6 [06 Unité pliage (Plieuse)] - [04 Réglage pliage économique]........................................................ 11-53 11.4.7 [06 Unité pliage (Plieuse)] - [05 Réglage pliage en Z] .................................................................... 11-54 11.4.8 [06 Unité pliage (Plieuse)] - [06 Réglage pliage portefeuille] .......................................................... 11-56 11.5 [02 Réglages finition] (Empileur grande capacité LS-505) ...................................................... 11-58 11.5.1 [07 Empileur] - [01 Alignement perforation] ................................................................................... 11-58 11.5.2 [07 Empileur] - [02 Taquage longueur papier]................................................................................ 11-59 11.6 [02 Réglages finition] (Piqueuse à cheval SD-506) .................................................................. 11-61 11.6.1 [08 Réglage Piqueuse à cheval] - [01 Réglage centrage des agrafes]........................................... 11-61 11.6.2 [08 Réglage Piqueuse à cheval] - [02 Taquage jeu agrafé]............................................................ 11-62 11.6.3 [08 Réglage Piqueuse à cheval] - [03 Espacement entre agrafes] ................................................ 11-63 11.6.4 [08 Réglage Piqueuse à cheval] - [04 Réglage Pliage en 2]........................................................... 11-65 11.6.5 [08 Réglage Piqueuse à cheval] - [05 Pliage en 3 multiple] ........................................................... 11-66 11.6.6 [08 Réglage Piqueuse à cheval] - [06 Largeur feuille pour pliage]................................................. 11-68 11.6.7 [08 Réglage Piqueuse à cheval] - [07 Massicotage] ...................................................................... 11-69 11.6.8 [08 Réglage Piqueuse à cheval] - [08 Réglage butée lame massicot] - [01 Sélect. compteur déplacement] ................................................................................................11-70 11.6.9 [08 Réglage Piqueuse à cheval] - [08 Réglage butée lame massicot] - [02 Sélect. du pas de déplacement] ...............................................................................................11-71 11.7 [02 Réglages Finition] (Thermorelieur PB-503) ........................................................................ 11-72 11.7.1 [09 Thermorelieur] - [01 Massicotage couverture] ......................................................................... 11-72 11.7.2 [09 Thermorelieur] - [02 Position bord avant couvert.] .................................................................. 11-73 11.7.3 [09 Thermorelieur] - [03 Position angle façonnage dos] ................................................................ 11-74 11.7.4 [09 Thermorelieur] - [04 Position de départ encollage] .................................................................. 11-75 11.7.5 [09 Thermorelieur] - [05 Position arrêt de encollage] ..................................................................... 11-77 11.7.6 [09 Thermorelieur] - [06 Réglage de la température] ..................................................................... 11-78 11.7.7 [09 Thermorelieur] - [07 Taquage papier sens passage]................................................................ 11-80 11.7.8 [09 Thermorelieur] - [08 Taquage feuilles Unité Press.] ................................................................. 11-81 11.7.9 [09 Thermorelieur] - [09 Alig couverture sens latéral] .................................................................... 11-82 11.7.10 [09 Thermorelieur] - [10 Alig couverture sens passage]................................................................. 11-83 11.8 [02 Réglages finition] (Unité relais RU-510).............................................................................. 11-85 11.8.1 [10 Unité relais perfo multiple] - [01 Alignement perforation] ........................................................ 11-85 11.8.2 [10 Unité relais perfo multiple] - [02 Taquage longueur papier]..................................................... 11-86 11.9 [03 Mode recouvrement mémoire] ............................................................................................ 11-88 11.10 [04 Nettoyage Manuel Unité Charge]........................................................................................ 11-89 11.11 [05 La récupération sensibilité] ................................................................................................. 11-90 11.12 [06 Mode Rafraîchissement Tambour]...................................................................................... 11-91 12 Menu Utilitaire 12.1 Structure de l'écran Utilitaire....................................................................................................... 12-3 12.1.1 Comment accéder sur l'écran Menu Utilitaire ................................................................................. 12-3 Table des matières-8 ineo 1052/1250 12.1.2 Liste des éléments du Menu Utilitaire.............................................................................................. 12-5 12.2 [01 Configuration système] ........................................................................................................ 12-19 12.2.1 [01 Choix de la langue] .................................................................................................................. 12-19 12.2.2 [02 Choix de l'unité] ....................................................................................................................... 12-20 12.2.3 [03 Réglage volume & information] - [01 Réglage volume] ............................................................ 12-20 12.2.4 [03 Réglage volume & information] - [02 Sélection information sonore]........................................ 12-21 12.2.5 [04 Affichage message temporaire] ............................................................................................... 12-22 12.2.6 [05 Écran par défaut]...................................................................................................................... 12-23 12.2.7 [06 Conditions de départ] .............................................................................................................. 12-24 12.2.8 [07 Temps de réponse touche] ...................................................................................................... 12-24 12.2.9 [08 Modifier code utilisateur].......................................................................................................... 12-25 12.2.10 [09 Config. touches raccourci] - [01 Enregist. appli. pour copie] .................................................. 12-26 12.2.11 [09 Config. touches raccourci] - [02 Enregistrer appli. Finition]..................................................... 12-26 12.2.12 [09 Config. touches raccourci] - [03 Enregistrer touche fonction] ................................................. 12-27 12.2.13 [09 Config. touches raccourci] - [04 Enregis. appli. numérisation] ................................................ 12-28 12.3 [02 Configuration fonctions] ...................................................................................................... 12-29 12.3.1 [01 Configuration magasins] - [01 Sélection auto magasins]......................................................... 12-29 12.3.2 [01 Configuration magasins] - [02 Basculement auto magasins] .................................................. 12-30 12.3.3 [01 Configuration magasins] - [03 Réglage ATS] ........................................................................... 12-30 12.3.4 [01 Configuration magasins] - [04 Réglage séch.initial magasins] ................................................ 12-31 12.3.5 [01 Configuration magasins] - [05 Sélection auto type de papier]................................................. 12-31 12.3.6 [02 Autres paramètres]................................................................................................................... 12-32 12.3.7 [03 Effacement Bord Avant] ........................................................................................................... 12-34 12.3.8 [04 Réglage densité] - [01 Décal. densité selon l'image] ............................................................... 12-34 12.3.9 [04 Réglage densité] - [02 Contraste personnalisé] ....................................................................... 12-35 12.3.10 [04 Réglage densité] - [03 Densité en mode photo] ...................................................................... 12-35 12.3.11 [04 Réglage densité] - [04 Densité de l'image] .............................................................................. 12-36 12.3.12 [05 Taux de restitution] .................................................................................................................. 12-36 12.3.13 [06 Réglage Tandem] - [01 Dép.Machine 2 si doc complet].......................................................... 12-37 12.3.14 [06 Réglage Tandem] - [02 Attente/Épreuve machine auxi] .......................................................... 12-38 12.3.15 [06 Réglage Tandem] - [03 Valeurs marges machine auxil.].......................................................... 12-39 12.3.16 [06 Réglage Tandem] - [04 Redistrib. tâche si problème].............................................................. 12-40 12.3.17 [06 Réglage Tandem] - [05 Configura tandem après tâche] .......................................................... 12-41 12.4 [03 Configuration copieur] ......................................................................................................... 12-42 12.4.1 [01 Fonction réinitialisation] - [01 Configuration initiale] ................................................................ 12-42 12.4.2 [01 Fonction réinitialisation] - [02 Retour conditions de départ] .................................................... 12-43 12.4.3 [01 Fonction réinitialisation] - [03 Initialis. avec compteur clé] ...................................................... 12-43 12.4.4 [02 Autres paramètres]................................................................................................................... 12-44 12.5 [04 Configuration scanner]......................................................................................................... 12-46 12.5.1 [01 Destination par défaut]............................................................................................................. 12-46 12.5.2 [02 Mode scanner] ......................................................................................................................... 12-46 12.5.3 [03 Autres paramètres]................................................................................................................... 12-47 12.6 [05 Réglage écran tactile] .......................................................................................................... 12-48 12.7 [06 Réglage administrateur] - [01 Configuration système]..................................................... 12-50 12.7.1 [01 Économie d'énergie] - [01 Économie d'énergie] ...................................................................... 12-50 12.7.2 [01 Économie d'énergie] - [02 Réglage ERP]................................................................................. 12-51 12.7.3 [02 Réglage date/heure]................................................................................................................. 12-52 12.7.4 [03 Programmateur hebdomadaire] - [01 Activ./Désa. programmateur] ....................................... 12-53 12.7.5 [03 Programmateur hebdomadaire] - [02 Heures de marche/arrêt]............................................... 12-54 12.7.6 [03 Programmateur hebdomadaire] - [02 Réglage date] ............................................................... 12-55 12.7.7 [03 Programmateur hebdomadaire] - [04 Plage horaire éco d'énergie]......................................... 12-56 12.7.8 [03 Programmateur hebdomadaire] - [05 Code hors horaires bureau].......................................... 12-57 12.7.9 [04 Liste des compteurs]................................................................................................................ 12-57 12.7.10 [05 Autorisation/Interdiction].......................................................................................................... 12-58 12.7.11 [06 Réglages expert] - [01 Régl. densité impression] .................................................................... 12-60 12.7.12 [06 Réglages expert] - [02 Angle agraf. en coin (Dos)]................................................................... 12-61 ineo 1052/1250 Table des matières-9 12.7.13 [06 Réglages expert] - [03 Régl. Bourr. Dét. Err. Centr.]................................................................ 12-61 12.7.14 [06 Réglages expert] - [04 Réglage extinction auto] ...................................................................... 12-62 12.7.15 [06 Réglages expert] - [05 Effacer zone hors original] ................................................................... 12-62 12.7.16 [06 Réglages expert] - [06 Effacement bords chargeur] ................................................................ 12-63 12.7.17 [06 Réglages expert] - [07 Régl. effac. zone hors image] .............................................................. 12-64 12.7.18 [06 Réglages expert] - [08 Réglage densité scanner] .................................................................... 12-64 12.7.19 [07 Paramétrage formats] .............................................................................................................. 12-65 12.7.20 [08 Paramétrage des Annotations]................................................................................................. 12-66 12.7.21 [09 Configuration thermoreliure] - [01 Grammage papier utilisable] .............................................. 12-72 12.7.22 [09 Configuration thermoreliure] - [02 Nombre de feuilles utilisées] .............................................. 12-72 12.7.23 [09 Configuration thermoreliure] - [03 Arrêt Couverture incorrecte] .............................................. 12-73 12.7.24 [10 Config. type de clavier] ............................................................................................................ 12-73 12.7.25 [11 Personnalisation écran] - [01 Choix graisse police écran] ....................................................... 12-74 12.7.26 [11 Personnalisation écran] - [02 Personnalisation écran copie] ................................................... 12-74 12.7.27 [11 Personnalisation écran] - [03 Personnalisation écran numér].................................................. 12-75 12.7.28 [11 Personnalisation écran] - [04 Personn.page écr. ENREGISTRER] .......................................... 12-75 12.8 [06 Réglage administrateur] - [02 Enregist. administrateur] .................................................. 12-77 12.8.1 [01 Enregist. administrateur] .......................................................................................................... 12-77 12.9 [06 Réglage administrateur] - [03 Ident. utilisateur/Compte] ................................................. 12-78 12.9.1 [01 Méthode d'authentification] ..................................................................................................... 12-80 12.9.2 [02 Régl. authentif. utilisateur] - [01 Réglage administratif] ........................................................... 12-82 12.9.3 [02 Régl. authentif. utilisateur] - [02 Enregistrement utilisateur] .................................................... 12-83 12.9.4 [02 Régl. authentif. utilisateur] - [03 Compteur utilisateur]............................................................. 12-90 12.9.5 [03 Gestion de compte] - [01 Enregistrem. Gestion compte] ........................................................ 12-92 12.9.6 [03 Gestion de compte] - [02 Compteur gestion de compte] ........................................................ 12-97 12.9.7 [04 Imprimer sans authentificat]..................................................................................................... 12-98 12.9.8 [05 Config. périph. authent.] - [01 Méthode d'authentification] ..................................................... 12-99 12.9.9 [06 Réglage du serveur externe] .................................................................................................. 12-100 12.9.10 [07 Réglage commun utilis/compte] ............................................................................................ 12-103 12.10 [06 Réglage administrateur] - [04 Configuration réseau]...................................................... 12-104 12.10.1 [01 Carte réseau machine] - [01 Configuration TCP/IP]............................................................... 12-104 12.10.2 [01 Carte réseau machine] - [02 Paramétrage http]..................................................................... 12-105 12.10.3 [01 Carte réseau machine] - [03 Paramétrage E-mail] ................................................................. 12-105 12.10.4 [02 Carte réseau contrôleur] ........................................................................................................ 12-107 12.10.5 Liste de Carte réseau contrôleur.................................................................................................. 12-107 12.11 [06 Réglage administrateur] - [05 Config. Copie/Impression].............................................. 12-120 12.11.1 [01 Réglage Décalage] - [01 Décalage des tâches] ..................................................................... 12-122 12.11.2 [01 Réglage Décalage] - [02 Réglage mode tri décalé]................................................................ 12-123 12.11.3 [02 Impression en continu]........................................................................................................... 12-124 12.11.4 [03 Numéro de page du livret]...................................................................................................... 12-124 12.11.5 [04 Prérotation rouleaux four] ...................................................................................................... 12-125 12.11.6 [05 Réglage échantillon]............................................................................................................... 12-125 12.11.7 [06 Valid. épreuve(1ère feuille)] .................................................................................................... 12-127 12.11.8 [07 Affich. Identificat. Bourrage] .................................................................................................. 12-128 12.11.9 [08 Rotation]................................................................................................................................. 12-128 12.11.10 [09 Interruption de cycle] ............................................................................................................. 12-129 12.11.11 [10 Sélection fonction réserve]..................................................................................................... 12-130 12.11.12 [11 Arrêt numér. magasin ouvert]................................................................................................. 12-130 12.11.13 [12 Copie en continu] ................................................................................................................... 12-131 12.11.14 [13 Sortie original semi-auto] ....................................................................................................... 12-132 12.11.15 [14 Mode semi-auto chargeur]..................................................................................................... 12-133 12.12 [06 Réglage administrateur] - [06 Appel Archange] .............................................................. 12-134 12.12.1 [01 Administrateur] ....................................................................................................................... 12-134 12.13 [06 Réglage administrateur] - [07 Configuration sécurité] ................................................... 12-135 12.13.1 [01 Code authentification admin.] ................................................................................................ 12-135 12.13.2 [02 Gestion disque dur] - [01 Gestion dossiers et boîtes]............................................................ 12-135 Table des matières-10 ineo 1052/1250 12.13.3 [02 Gestion disque dur] - [02 Fréquence supp. données D.D.] ................................................... 12-137 12.13.4 [02 Gestion disque dur] - [03 Code verrouillage DD] ................................................................... 12-138 12.13.5 [02 Gestion disque dur] - [04 Suppr. données temporaires]........................................................ 12-138 12.13.6 [02 Gestion disque dur] - [05 Suppression toutes données] ....................................................... 12-139 12.13.7 [02 Gestion disque dur] - [06 Config. cryptogramme D.D.] ......................................................... 12-140 12.13.8 [03 Sécurité renforcée]................................................................................................................. 12-141 12.14 [06 Réglage administrateur] - [08 Enregistrement adresse]................................................. 12-142 12.14.1 [01 Modif/Suppr adresse exp.] .................................................................................................... 12-142 12.15 [06 Réglage administrateur] - [09 Gestion Authent. OpenAPI] ............................................. 12-146 12.15.1 [01 Réglage Code d'interdiction] ................................................................................................. 12-146 13 Caractéristiques 13.1 Caractéristiques de la machine................................................................................................... 13-3 13.1.1 Machine ........................................................................................................................................... 13-3 13.1.2 Chargeur Auto DF-615..................................................................................................................... 13-5 13.2 Caractéristiques des options....................................................................................................... 13-6 13.2.1 Unité d'alimentation papier PF-703 (Magasin 3 à Magasin 8) ......................................................... 13-6 13.2.2 Humidificateur HT-505 (installé dans l'Unité d'alimentation papier PF-703) ................................... 13-7 13.2.3 Unité d'alimentation papier PF-706 (Magasin 3 à Magasin 8) ......................................................... 13-7 13.2.4 Module d'insertion grande capacité MI-PFU (PF-703 + MI-PFU Kit FA-501) ................................. 13-8 13.2.5 Unité relais RU-509.......................................................................................................................... 13-9 13.2.6 Humidificateur HM-102 (installé dans l'Unité relais RU-509)........................................................... 13-9 13.2.7 Unité relais RU-510........................................................................................................................ 13-10 13.2.8 Unité de pliage FD-503 .................................................................................................................. 13-10 13.2.9 Empileur grande capacité LS-505 ................................................................................................. 13-12 13.2.10 Piqueuse à cheval SD-506............................................................................................................. 13-12 13.2.11 Thermorelieur PB-503.................................................................................................................... 13-14 13.2.12 Unité de finition FS-532 ................................................................................................................. 13-15 13.2.13 Piqueuse à cheval SD-510 (montée sur l'Unité de finition FS-532)............................................... 13-16 13.2.14 Unité de perforation PK-522 (installée sur l'Unité de finition FS-532) ........................................... 13-17 13.2.15 Bac d'insertion PI-502 (kit de montage MK-732) (installé sur l'Unité de finition FS-532).............. 13-18 13.2.16 Perforeuse multiple GP-501 (la Set DS-508 à DS-518) ................................................................. 13-18 13.2.17 Relieur automatique à anneaux GP-502........................................................................................ 13-19 13.2.18 Disque dur extractible RH-101 (Kit de boîtier DD interne HD-511)................................................ 13-19 13.2.19 Autres options................................................................................................................................ 13-19 13.3 Conditions copie incompatibles ................................................................................................ 13-20 13.3.1 Conditions de copie incompatibles avec la Configuration de base, les réglages Qualité et les Réglages de l'original ...........................................................................13-20 13.3.2 Conditions Copie incompatibles avec Finition .............................................................................. 13-25 13.3.3 Conditions de copie incompatibles avec Applications.................................................................. 13-30 14 Licence d'utilisation du logiciel 15 Index 15.1 Index par élément ......................................................................................................................... 15-3 15.2 Index par touche ........................................................................................................................... 15-5 1 Introduction ineo 1052/1250 1-3 1.1 Bienvenue 1 1 Introduction 1.1 Bienvenue Nous vous remercions d'avoir porté votre choix sur cette machine. Le présent Guide de l'expert dispense des précautions et instructions à suivre pour garantir une utilisation sûre de la machine. Veuillez lire ce guide avant d'utiliser la machine. 1.1.1 Composition du guide de l'utilisateur Manuel imprimé [Guide de l'expert] Guides de l'utilisateur sur DVD Présentation [Guide de l'utilisateur – Sécurité] Ce guide décrit les fonctions de sécurité. Veuillez-vous référer à ce guide pour savoir comment utiliser le mode de sécurité renforcée et pour le fonctionnement détaillé de la machine en mode de sécurité renforcée. [Guide rapide] Ce guide décrit principalement le mode d'emploi des fonctions fréquemment utilisées. Veuillez lire ce guide pour une rapide compréhension des diverses fonctions disponibles sur la machine. [Informations de sécurité] Ce guide dispense des précautions et instructions à suivre pour garantir une utilisation sûre de la machine. Veuillez lire ce guide avant d'utiliser la machine. [Guide de l'utilisateur – Copieur] Ce guide décrit la machine et les opérations de copie. • Configuration et caractéristiques de la machine et des options • Mise sous tension/hors tension de la machine • Informations sur le papier • Réalisation d'une copie élémentaire et procédures de réglage • Consommables et mise au rebut • Applications, configuration de la sortie et liste tâches • Incidents [Guide de l'utilisateur- Administrateur POD] Ce guide fournit des informations détaillées sur la gestion de la machine et sur la personnalisation de la machine en fonction de votre utilisation quotidienne. • Réglage magasin • Calage recto-verso • Configuration du contrôleur • Réglage, menu des utilitaires • Configuration réseau • Web Connection • Web Utilities [Guide de l'utilisateur – Imprimante] Ce guide décrit les paramètres des pilotes d'imprimantes et des utilitaires. • Pilote PCL • Plug-in Pilote PS • Pilote PS PPD • Web Connection 1 Bienvenue 1-4 ineo 1052/1250 1.1 [Guide de l'utilisateur – Scanner réseau] Ce guide décrit les opérations des fonctions de numérisation réseau. • Enregistrement sur le disque dur pour impression • Envoi par e-mail • Enregistrement sur le disque dur pour les contrôleurs • Envoi sur le serveur FTP • Envoi sur le serveur SMB • Envoi groupé [Marques/droits d'auteur] Ce guide décrit les marques commerciales, les licences et les droits de reproduction relatives à cette machine. Veuillez consulter ce guide avant d'utiliser la machine. Guides de l'utilisateur sur DVD Présentation ineo 1052/1250 1-5 1.2 Energy Star® 1 1.2 Energy Star® Le programme ENERGY STAR® a été établi pour encourager la généralisation et l'utilisation volontaire de technologies d'économie d'énergie permettant de réduire la consommation d'énergie et la pollution. En tant que partenaire ENERGY STAR, notre machine satisfait aux directives ENERGY STAR en matière de rendement énergétique sur la base des éléments suivants. Veille La fonction Veille économise l'énergie en réduisant la consommation de courant. Par défaut, la fonction d'économie d'énergie s'active automatiquement au bout d'une minute d'inactivité de la machine pour réduire la consommation d'énergie. Le délai d'activation de cette fonction est réglable sur 1 minute, 3 minutes, 5 minutes, 10 minutes, 15 minutes, 30 minutes, 60 minutes, 90 minutes, 120 minutes, ou 240 minutes. Éco énergie Éco énergie permet d'économiser encore davantage l'énergie en réduisant la consommation de courant. Généralement, la machine active automatiquement Éco énergie au bout d'un certain temps en mode Veille. Par défaut, la fonction Éco énergie s'active automatiquement au bout de 15 minutes d'inactivité de la machine pour réduire la consommation d'énergie. Le délai d'activation de cette fonction est réglable sur --- minute, 1 minute, 3 minutes, 5 minutes, 10 minutes, 15 minutes, 30 minutes, 60 minutes, 90 minutes, 120 minutes, ou 240 minutes. Copie recto-verso automatique Pour réduire la consommation de papier, utilisez cette fonction permettant d'effectuer automatiquement des impressions recto-verso. Combiner Pour réduire la consommation de papier, utilisez cette fonction pour copier un nombre défini (2, 4 ou 8) de pages d'original sur une feuille de papier. Nous vous recommandons d'utiliser les fonctions Veille, Éco énergie, Copie recto-verso automatique et Combiner. 1 Restrictions légales relatives à la copie 1-6 ineo 1052/1250 1.3 1.3 Restrictions légales relatives à la copie Certains types d'originaux ne doivent jamais être copiés dans l'intention de faire passer les copies de ces documents pour des originaux. La liste suivante n'est pas complète mais doit servir de référence pour la copie responsable. Instruments financiers - Chèques personnels - Chèques de voyage - Mandats - Certificats de dépôt - Obligations ou autres titres de dettes - Titres Documents officiels - Bons de nourriture - Timbres postaux (oblitérés ou non oblitérés) - Chèques ou traites tirés par des organismes gouvernementaux - Timbres fiscaux (oblitérés ou non oblitérés) - Passeports - Titres d'immigration - Permis de conduire et cartes grises de véhicules. - Actes et titres de propriété Réglage général - Cartes d'identification, badges et insignes - Les oeuvres protégées sans l'autorisation du propriétaire des droits En outre, il est rigoureusement interdit de copier des monnaies nationales ou étrangères ou des oeuvres d'art sans l'autorisation du détenteur des droits. En cas de doute sur la nature d'un document, demandez un avis légal. Cette machine dispose de la fonction de configuration compte interdisant à l'utilisateur de se servir de la machine sans entrer un code pré-établi afin d'empêcher toute utilisation frauduleuse de la machine. De même, cette fonction peut limiter l'utilisation de la machine à certaines sections en paramétrant l'autorisation/l'interdiction de la copie, de l'impression ou de la numérisation. Cette machine dispose aussi de la fonction de prévention des contrefaçons afin d'empêcher la copie illicite d'instruments financiers. Dans certaines circonstances, et en raison même de cette fonction de prévention des contrefaçons, il peut arriver exceptionnellement que certaines images présentent quelques parasites ou que les données image ne soient pas enregistrées. 2 Marques commerciales et droits de reproduction ineo 1052/1250 2-3 2.1 Marques commerciales et droits de reproduction 2 2 Marques commerciales et droits de reproduction 2.1 Marques commerciales et droits de reproduction Mozilla et Firefox sont les marques déposées ou les marques commerciales de Mozilla Foundation aux USA et dans d'autres pays. Novell et Novell NetWare sont des marques déposées ou des marques déposées de Novell, Inc. aux USA et dans d'autres pays. Microsoft, Windows, Windows NT, Windows Vista et Windows 7 sont des marques déposées ou des marques commerciales de Microsoft Corporation aux USA et/ou dans d'autres pays. PowerPC est une marque déposée ou une marque commerciale de International Business Machines Corporation aux États-Unis, d'autres pays, ou les deux. Apple, AppleTalk, Bonjour, TrueType, Macintosh, Mac OS et Safari sont les marques déposées ou les marques commerciales de Apple, Inc. Les logos CUPS et CUPS sont les marques commerciales de Apple Inc. Adobe, le logo d'Adobe, Acrobat et PostScript, Flash, et Flash Player sont des marques déposées ou commerciales d'Adobe Systems Incorporated aux USA et/ou dans d'autres pays. Adobe PostScript est protégé par des brevets aux USA et dans d'autres pays. InDesign et PageMaker sont des marques déposées de Adobe Systems Incorporated aux USA et/ou dans d'autres pays. Copyright © 2012 Adobe Systems Incorporated. Tous droits réservés. Brevets en instance. Ce produit contient Adobe® Flash ® Player sous licence d'Adobe Systems Incorporated. Copyright © 1995-2007 Adobe Macromedia Software LLC. Tous droits réservés. Ethernet est une marque déposée de Xerox Corporation. RC4, RSA, RSA et BSAFE sont des marques déposées ou commerciales de RSA Security Inc. aux USA et/ou dans d'autres pays. Informations de licence Ce produit comprend un logiciel cryptographique RSA® BSAFE™ de RSA Security Inc. 2 Remarque 2-4 ineo 1052/1250 2.2 2.2 Remarque Toute reproduction partielle ou totale du guide de l'utilisateur est interdite sans autorisation. Les informations figurant dans le guide de l'utilisateur sont susceptibles d'être modifiées sans préavis. 3 Précautions pour l'installation et l'utilisation ineo 1052/1250 3-3 3.1 Informations de sécurité 3 3 Précautions pour l'installation et l'utilisation 3.1 Informations de sécurité Ce chapitre contient des instructions détaillées relatives à l'exploitation et à l'entretien de cette machine. Pour utiliser au mieux cette machine, tous les opérateurs doivent lire avec attention ce manuel et respecter à la lettre les instructions qui y figurent. Veuillez lire la section suivante avant de brancher la machine au secteur. Elle contient en effet des informations importantes quant à la sécurité de l'utilisateur et la prévention des problèmes liés à l'équipement. Veuillez conserver ce manuel à portée de la main et à proximité de la machine. Veuillez impérativement observer toutes les précautions figurant dans chaque chapitre de ce manuel. dPour info Certaines parties du contenu de ce chapitre peuvent ne pas correspondre au produit acheté. Symboles d'avertissement et de précaution Les indicateurs suivants sont utilisés sur les étiquettes d'avertissement ou dans les manuels pour classifier le niveau des avertissements de sécurité. Signification des symboles 3.1.1 Démontage et modification AVERTISSEMENT La négligence de cet avertissement peut provoquer des blessures graves, voire mortelles. ATTENTION Le non-respect de cette précaution peut provoquer des blessures graves, ou des dommages matériels. Un triangle indique un danger contre lequel il y a lieu de se protéger. Ce symbole avertit d'un risque de brûlure. Une ligne diagonale indique une action interdite. Ce symbole met en garde contre un démontage de l'imprimante. Un cercle plein indique une action impérative. Ce symbole signale le débranchement impératif de l'imprimante. AVERTISSEMENT Ne pas modifier cette machine, elle pourrait prendre feu, causer une électrocution ou tomber en panne. Si la machine utilise un laser, la source de son faisceau risque d'aveugler l'opérateur. Ne pas essayer d'enlever les couvercles et les panneaux fixés sur la machine. Certaines machines contiennent à l'intérieur des pièces haute-tension ou une source de faisceau laser susceptibles d'électrocuter ou d'aveugler l'opérateur. 3 Informations de sécurité 3-4 ineo 1052/1250 3.1 3.1.2 Cordon d'alimentation 3.1.3 Alimentation 3.1.4 Fiche d'alimentation AVERTISSEMENT N'utiliser que le cordon d'alimentation fourni dans l'emballage. Si le cordon d'alimentation n'est pas fourni, n'utiliser que le cordon d'alimentation et la prise spécifiés dans les INSTRUCTIONS RELATIVES AU CORDON D'ALIMENTATION. Tout manquement à cette règle peut entraîner un incendie ou une électrocution. Utiliser le cordon d'alimentation fourni dans l'emballage uniquement pour cette machine et ne JAMAIS l'utiliser pour un autre produit. Tout manquement à cette précaution peut entraîner un incendie ou une électrocution. Ne jamais gratter ni éroder le cordon d'alimentation, ne pas placer d'objet lourd dessus, ne pas le chauffer, le tordre, le plier, ne pas tirer dessus, ni l'endommager. L'utilisation d'un cordon d'alimentation endommagé (âme à nu, fil cassé, etc.) peut déclencher un feu ou une panne. Si l'une de ces conditions devait survenir, coupez immédiatement l'interrupteur d'alimentation, débranchez le cordon d'alimentation et appelez votre technicien SAV agréé. AVERTISSEMENT N'utiliser que la tension d'alimentation spécifiée sur la machine. Un incendie ou une électrocution peuvent résulter d'un manquement à cette instruction. Ne pas utiliser d'adaptateur multiprises ni de rallonge pour brancher d'autres appareils ou machines. Toute surcharge électrique de la prise murale présente un risque d'incendie ou d'électrocution. En règle générale, ne pas utiliser de rallonge. L'utilisation d'une rallonge peut déclencher un feu ou causer une électrocution. Contacter votre SAV si une rallonge s'avère nécessaire. ATTENTION La prise doit se trouver à proximité de l'équipement et être facilement accessible. Sinon, vous ne pouvez pas tirer le cordon d'alimentation en cas d'urgence. AVERTISSEMENT Ne pas débrancher ni brancher le cordon d'alimentation avec les mains humides car cela peut provoquer une électrocution. Insérer la fiche d'alimentation à fond dans la prise murale. Un incendie ou une électrocution peut résulter d'un manquement à cette instruction. ATTENTION Ne pas tirer sur le cordon d'alimentation pour le débrancher. Le fait de tirer directement sur le cordon d'alimentation peut l'endommager et déclencher un feu ou provoquer une électrocution. Débrancher le cordon d'alimentation plus d'une fois par an et nettoyer la zone entre les bornes de la prise. La poussière qui s'accumule entre les bornes peut provoquer un incendie. Ne pas entraver l'accès à la fiche d'alimentation pour pouvoir la débrancher facilement en cas d'urgence. ineo 1052/1250 3-5 3.1 Informations de sécurité 3 3.1.5 Mise à la terre 3.1.6 Installation 3.1.7 Ventilation AVERTISSEMENT S'assurer de mettre à la terre ce produit. (Brancher le cordon d'alimentation à une prise électrique équipée d'une borne de mise à la terre.) Le non respect de cette instruction ou l'éventualité fort peu probable de fuite peut être la cause d'incendie ou d'électrocution. AVERTISSEMENT Ne pas poser de vase ni aucun autre récipient contenant de l'eau ni d'agrafes ou de petits objets métalliques sur la machine. De l'eau renversée ou des petits objets métalliques tombés à l'intérieur de la machine sont de nature à provoquer un incendie, une électrocution ou une panne. Si une pièce en métal, de l'eau ou tout autre corps étranger venait à tomber à l'intérieur du produit, coupez immédiatement l'interrupteur principal, débranchez le cordon d'alimentation et appelez votre technicien SAV agréé. N'utilisez pas d'aérosols, de liquides, ou de gaz à l'intérieur ou à proximité de cette machine. N'utilisez pas à l'intérieur de cette machine une bombe de dépoussiérage contenant un gaz inflammable. Cela pourrait provoquer une explosion ou un incendie. ATTENTION Une fois cette machine installée, montez-la sur un support stable. Si la machine bouge ou tombe, elle peut blesser quelqu'un. Ne pas installer cette machine dans un endroit poussiéreux ou exposé à la suie ou à la vapeur, à proximité d'une table de cuisine, d'une baignoire ou d'un humidificateur d'air. Un feu, une électrocution ou une panne peut se produire. Ne pas placer cette machine sur un banc instable ou renversé ou dans un endroit soumis à des vibrations et des chocs importants. Elle pourrait tomber et blesser quelqu'un ou provoquer une panne mécanique. Ne pas laisser le moindre objet obstruer les orifices de ventilation de cette machine. La chaleur pourrait s'accumuler à l'intérieur de la machine et provoquer un incendie ou un quelconque dysfonctionnement. ATTENTION En cas d'utilisation prolongée de cet appareil dans un endroit mal ventilé ou après la production d'un gros volume de copies ou d'impressions, l'air expulsé de la machine peut dégager une odeur. Bien ventiler la pièce. 3 Informations de sécurité 3-6 ineo 1052/1250 3.1 3.1.8 Actions de dépannage en cas de problèmes 3.1.9 Consommables 3.1.10 Déplacement de la machine 3.1.11 Pendant l'utilisation de la machine AVERTISSEMENT Si cette machine devient exceptionnellement chaude, ou si elle émet une bruit ou une odeur inhabituel, ne continuez pas à l'utiliser. Mettez immédiatement l'interrupteur en position OFF (Arrêt), débranchez le câble d'alimentation de la prise murale, et contactez votre Service Après-vente. Si vous continuez à l'utiliser dans cet état, elle peut prendre feu, ou être source d'électrocution. Ne continuez pas à utiliser cette machine si elle est tombée ou si son capot a été endommagé. Mettez immédiatement l'interrupteur en position OFF (Arrêt), débranchez le câble d'alimentation de la prise murale, et contactez votre Service Après-vente. Si vous continuez à l'utiliser dans cet état, elle peut prendre feu, ou être source d'électrocution. ATTENTION Il existe dans cet machine des zones soumises à des températures élevées et susceptibles de provoquer des brûlures. Lors de la vérification de l'intérieur de la machine, à la recherche d'une anomalie comme un bourrage papier par exemple, ne touchez pas les zones (autour de l'unité de fixation, etc.) qui sont indiquées par l'étiquette d'avertissement "Caution HOT". AVERTISSEMENT Ne pas jeter la cartouche de toner ni du toner dans les flammes. Le toner chaud risque de se diffuser et de provoquer des brûlures ou d'autres dommages. ATTENTION Ne pas laisser les pièces en contact avec le toner (cartouches de toner, tambours) à la portée des enfants. Lécher ces pièces est nocif pour la santé. Ne pas stocker les pièces en contact avec le toner (unités de développement) à proximité des dispositifs sensibles au magnétisme comme l'équipement de précision et les dispositifs de stockage de données. Ces consommables pourraient ne plus fonctionner correctement. ATTENTION À chaque fois que vous déplacez cette machine, assurez-vous de débrancher le cordon d'alimentation et tous les autres câbles. Tout manquement à cette règle peut endommager le cordon ou les câbles et déclencher un feu ou provoquer une électrocution ou une panne. Ne pas bouger ce produit. S'il bouge ou tombe, il peut causer de graves blessures corporelles. ATTENTION Pendant l'utilisation de la machine, ne pas fixer trop longtemps la lumière émise par la lampe. Elle peut causer une fatigue visuelle. ineo 1052/1250 3-7 3.1 Informations de sécurité 3 3.1.12 Avant de partir en vacances 3.1.13 Papier 3.1.14 Pastille de colle 3.1.15 Thermorelieur ATTENTION Débrancher l'appareil quand vous ne voulez pas l'utiliser pendant de longues périodes. ATTENTION Ne pas utiliser de papier muni d'agrafes, de papier conducteur (comme le papier d'argent ou carbone), de papier traité thermosensible/à jet d'encre à cause du risque d'incendie. ATTENTION Ne pas approcher les pastilles de colle du feu. Les pastilles de colle sont inflammables et prennent facilement feu. Ne pas avaler les pastilles de colle. Si vous deviez en avaler, buvez beaucoup d'eau ou de lait pour vomir et consultez immédiatement un médecin. Les tenir hors de portée des enfants pour éviter tout accident imprévu. ATTENTION Ne pas utiliser le Thermorelieur pendant une longue période sans assurer une bonne ventilation. Veiller à bien aérer la pièce à intervalles réguliers. Nous vous recommandons d'installer le thermorelieur dans un endroit équipé d'un système d'évacuation local. Utiliser le Thermorelieur dans une pièce sans ventilation appropriée pourrait mettre votre santé en danger. Manipulez la colle fondue avec précaution. Si elle pénètre dans l'oeil, n'essayez pas de le frotter ni d'ouvrir l'oeil mais rafraîchissez-le immédiatement à l'eau froide et consultez un médecin. Ne pas toucher la colle fondue chaude car cela pourrait provoquer une blessure par brûlure. Si elle se colle sur votre peau, rafraîchissez immédiatement cette partie de la peau à l'eau froide et consultez un médecin. Ne pas toucher le réservoir de colle immédiatement après avoir éteint la machine pour éviter toute brûlure. Attendez jusqu'à ce que le réservoir ne soit plus chaud si vous le manipulez directement avec les mains. Ne pas approcher la trémie de colle ni le réservoir de colle du feu. La colle est inflammable et prend facilement feu. Ne pas s'approcher des vapeurs émises par la colle fondue chaude. Si vous souffrez d'une irritation dans ou à proximité de vos yeux, votre nez ou votre gorge, déplacez-vous vers un endroit où vous pouvez respirer de l'air frais. Ne pas obturer la bouche d'air du ventilateur à l'arrière du Thermorelieur. Cela empêcherait la décharge de chaleur et pourrait provoquer un incident ou une panne. Ne pas modifier le réglage de température de l'unité de réservoir de colle. Cela pourrait provoquer un incendie ou une panne. 3 Informations de sécurité 3-8 ineo 1052/1250 3.1 3.1.16 Unité d'authentification(type Carte IC) AU-201 ATTENTION Ne pas utiliser ce produit à proximité d'eau sous risque de l'endommager. Ne pas couper, endommager, modifier ou plier en le forçant le câble USB. Un mauvais fonctionnement peut résulter d'un câble USB endommagé ou coupé. Ne pas démonter la machine sous risque de l'endommager. Ne pas stocker la carte IC à moins de 40 mm de la zone de numérisation des cartes. ineo 1052/1250 3-9 3.2 Notices de réglementation 3 3.2 Notices de réglementation 3.2.1 Émission d'ozone Une opération d'impression dégage une petite quantité d'ozone. Cette quantité n'est pas suffisamment importante pour nuire à quiconque. Cependant, veuillez vous assurer que la pièce dans laquelle la machine est utilisée est suffisamment ventilée, surtout si vous imprimez une grande quantité de documents ou si la machine est utilisée en continu pendant de longues périodes. 3.2.2 Interférence électromagnétique et agréments de sécurité Cette machine doit être utilisée avec un câble réseau blindé et un câble d'interface USB blindé. L'utilisation de câbles non-blindés est susceptible de causer des interférences avec les radiocommunications. En outre, elle est interdite en vertu des directives CISPR 22 et des réglementations locales. 7 AVERTISSEMENT - Ceci est un produit de classe A. Dans un environnement domestique, ce appareil peut causer des interférences radio, auquel cas l'utilisateur pourra être amené à prendre les mesures appropriées. Pour les utilisateurs européens Cette machine est conforme aux directives européennes suivantes : 2004/108/EC et 2006/95/EC Cette déclaration ne s'applique qu'aux pays de l'Union Européenne (UE) ou membres de l'AELE. Cette machine doit être utilisée avec un câble réseau blindé et un câble d'interface USB blindé. L'utilisation de câbles non blindés risque de causer des interférences avec les radiocommunications et elle est interdite aux termes de la réglementation 2004/108/CE. Ce produit est conforme à la norme IEC61000-3-12. Ce produit détient la certification GS pour le modèle 1250/1052 de marque Konica Minolta. Pour les utilisateurs allemands Maschinenlärminformations-Verordnung 3. GPSGV, 06.01.2004: Der höchste Schalldruckpegel beträgt 85 dB(A) oder weniger nach ISO 7779. For U.S.A. and Canada Users This product is cTUVus-certified for the Konica Minolta branded model 1250/1052. Notification for US only Contains Mercury in the LCD control panel backlighting lamp, and/or in the scanning unit lamp. Dispose According to Local, State ou Federal Laws. Notification for California Customers This product uses a CR Lithium Battery which contains perchlorate material. This perchlorate warning applies to perchlorate-containing lithium batteries sold or distributed in California, USA. "Perchlorate Material - Special handling may apply, See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate." 3 Notices de réglementation 3-10 ineo 1052/1250 3.2 Marquage CE (Déclaration de Conformité) pour les utilisateurs de l'Union Européenne (UE) Cette machine est conforme aux directives européennes suivantes : Directives 2004/108/EC et 2006/95/EC. Cette déclaration s'applique au territoire de l'Union Européenne. USER INSTRUCTIONS FCC PART 15 - RADIO FREQUENCY DEVICES (For U.S.A. Users) This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. NOTE: This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense. 7 WARNING The design and production of this unit conform to FCC regulations, and any changes or modifications must be registered with the FCC and are subject to FCC control. Any changes made by the purchaser or user without first contacting the manufacturer will be subject to penalty under FCC regulations. - This device must be used with a shielded network (10 Base-T/100 Base-TX) cable and a shielded parallel cable. The use of non-shielded cables is likely to result in interference with radio communications and is prohibited under FCC rules. INTERFERENCE-CAUSING EQUIPMENT STANDARD (ICES-003 ISSUE 5) (For Canada Users) This Class A digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003. Cet appareil numérique de la classe A est conforme à la norme NMB-003 du Canada. This device complies with Canadian RSS-Gen. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of this device. Cet appareil est conforme à la norme CNR-Gen du Canada. L'utilisation de ce dispositif est autorisée seulement aux deux conditions suivantes : (1) il ne doit pas produire de brouillage, et (2) l'utilisateur du dispositif doit être prêt à accepter tout brouillage radioélectrique reçu, même si ce brouillage est susceptible de compromettre le fonctionnement du dispositif. Sécurité en matière de rayonnement LED Ce produit fonctionne avec un système d'exposition LED (diodes électro-luminescentes). Le rayonnement optique LED de la machine ne présente aucun risque car son niveau n'excède pas les seuils de la classe 1 dans toutes les conditions de fonctionnement, de maintenance, de service et de panne. ineo 1052/1250 3-11 3.3 Signalétique et sécurité 3 3.3 Signalétique et sécurité Cette machine comporte des étiquettes d'avertissement, de précaution et de sécurité aux endroits suivants. Ces étiquettes et indicateurs vous engagent à faire particulièrement attention afin d'éviter toute situation dangereuse lors du remplacement des unités. 7 ATTENTION NE PAS enlever les étiquettes ni les indicateurs d'avertissement ! - Si les étiquettes ou les indicateurs d'avertissement étaient enlevés, cela vous prive de tout ou partie d'informations destinées à rappeler à votre vigilance le risque d'incident ou de blessure imprévu. Si vous constatez qu'une ou plusieurs étiquettes ou indicateurs d'avertissement sont absents ou sales et illisibles, veuillez contacter votre ingénieur SAV. 3.3.1 Étiquettes d'avertissement sur la zone de fusion de l'unité de transport de fixation 7 ATTENTION NE PAS toucher la zone de fusion de l'unité de transport de fixation. Vous risquez de vous brûler. - Veuillez être particulièrement vigilant lorsque vous retirez l'unité de transport de fixation ou que vous ouvrez la zone de fusion. 3 Signalétique et sécurité 3-12 ineo 1052/1250 3.3 3.3.2 Étiquettes d'avertissement sur l'unité de transport de fixation 7 ATTENTION NE PAS mettre les mains ou le bras entre la machine et l'unité de transport de fixation. - Toucher des bornes de connexion des composants électriques peut entraîner des dommages sur la machine ou un incident inattendu. N'intervenez pas vous-même sur la machine, contactez plutôt votre SAV. ineo 1052/1250 3-13 3.3 Signalétique et sécurité 3 3.3.3 Étiquette de précaution au dos du chargeur Auto 7 ATTENTION NE PAS mettre les doigts dans la zone des charnières du chargeur Auto. Il y a risque de blessure. - Soyez vigilant lors de l'ouverture ou de la fermeture du chargeur Auto. 3.3.4 Étiquette d'avertissement sur le réservoir de toner usagé 7 AVERTISSEMENT NE JAMAIS jeter le réservoir de toner usagé au feu. - Sinon, le toner pourrait s'enflammer et créer une situation dangereuse. 3 Signalétique et sécurité 3-14 ineo 1052/1250 3.3 3.3.5 Étiquette d'avertissement sur le Thermorelieur PB-503 7 ATTENTION NE PAS toucher le réservoir de colle. Vous risquez de vous brûler. - Faites particulièrement attention lors de la réinstallation du réservoir de colle. ineo 1052/1250 3-15 3.3 Signalétique et sécurité 3 3.3.6 Étiquettes de mise en garde sur l'Unité de finition FS-532 7 ATTENTION NE PAS mettre la main sur les feuilles imprimées lorsque vous les retirez du bac principal. - Procéder autrement peut causer des blessures imprévues, comme l'écrasement des doigts entre la machine et le bac principal dans sa phase ascendante. Veillez à tenir la pile de papier par le bord avant et le bord arrière pour le retirer du magasin. 7 ATTENTION NE PAS insérer les doigts entre la machine et le magasin principal. - Procéder autrement peut causer des blessures imprévues, comme l'écrasement des doigts par le magasin principal mobile. Attention en retirant le papier du magasin. 3 Signalétique et sécurité 3-16 ineo 1052/1250 3.3 7 ATTENTION NE PAS mettre la main dans la partie creuse à l'intérieur de l'unité de finition. - L'unité de finition dotée du Module de perforation PK-522 comprend une portion creuse au dos où est logé un moteur. Vous risquez de vous brûler au contact du moteur. N'enfoncez pas votre main dans la partie creuse pour retirer un bourrage papier. ineo 1052/1250 3-17 3.3 Signalétique et sécurité 3 3.3.7 Étiquettes de mise en garde sur la Perforeuse multiple GP-501 7 AVERTISSEMENT - Ce message de sécurité indique un risque d'électrocution, car couper le courant sur cette section de la machine ne coupe pas pour autant l'alimentation des autres sections. 7 AVERTISSEMENT - Ce message de sécurité indique que vous risquez de graves blessures, voire des blessures mortelles si vous ouvrez cette machine car vous vous exposeriez à des tensions élevées et dangereuses. NE JAMAIS enlever les vis de fixation des couvercles. Pour les besoins d'entretien, TOUJOURS en référer au personnel qualifié. 3 Signalétique et sécurité 3-18 ineo 1052/1250 3.3 3.3.8 Étiquette de mise en garde sur le Relieur automatique à anneaux GP-502 7 ATTENTION NE JAMAIS placer la main sur le panneau d'affichage en rabattant la partie supérieure du relieur automatique à anneaux ! - Il y a risque de blessure. Soyez vigilant lorsque vous rabattez la partie supérieure du relieur automatique à anneaux. 7 ATTENTION Attention à votre tête lorsque le capot supérieur ou le passe-copie du relieur à anneaux est ouvert. - Vous risquez de vous blesser en vous cognant la tête. Soyez particulièrement prudent lors du dégagement d'un bourrage papier. ineo 1052/1250 3-19 3.3 Signalétique et sécurité 3 7 AVERTISSEMENT - Ce message de sécurité indique un risque d'électrocution, car couper le courant sur cette section de la machine ne coupe pas pour autant l'alimentation des autres sections. 7 AVERTISSEMENT - Ce message de sécurité indique que vous risquez de graves blessures, voire des blessures mortelles si vous ouvrez cette machine car vous vous exposeriez à des tensions élevées et dangereuses. NE JAMAIS enlever les vis de fixation des couvercles. Pour les besoins d'entretien, TOUJOURS en référer au personnel qualifié. 3 Encombrement 3-20 ineo 1052/1250 3.4 3.4 Encombrement Prévoyez suffisamment de place pour faciliter les opérations d'impression, le remplacement des pièces et l'inspection périodique. Laissez un espace approprié derrière la machine pour laisser l'air chaud s'échapper du ventilateur arrière. La machine entière pèse environ 1830 kg (4,034.39 lb) au plus, en fonction des combinaisons des options. Veuillez choisir un sol plan et suffisamment solide pour installer la machine. ineo 1052/1250 3-21 3.4 Encombrement 3 Unité : mm 3 Encombrement 3-22 ineo 1052/1250 3.4 Unité : mm ineo 1052/1250 3-23 3.4 Encombrement 3 Unité : mm 3 Encombrement 3-24 ineo 1052/1250 3.4 Unité : mm ineo 1052/1250 3-25 3.4 Encombrement 3 Unité : mm 3 Encombrement 3-26 ineo 1052/1250 3.4 L'installation des options suivantes nécessite un espace supplémentaire. Option Espace requis RU-509 + 410 mm MI-PFU + 871,5 mm RU-509 et MI-PFU + 1281,5 mm GP-501 + 305 mm GP-501+RU-509 + 715 mm GP-501+RU-509+MI-PFU + 1586,5 mm GP-501+MI-PFU + 1176,5 mm GP-502 + 867 mm GP-502+RU-509 + 1277 mm GP-502+RU-509+MI-PFU + 2148,5 mm GP-502+MI-PFU + 1738,5 mm Unité : mm ineo 1052/1250 3-27 3.4 Encombrement 3 Unité : mm Largeur totale Largeur totale 3 Encombrement 3-28 ineo 1052/1250 3.4 Unité : mm Largeur totale Largeur totale Largeur totale ineo 1052/1250 3-29 3.4 Encombrement 3 Unité : mm Largeur totale Largeur totale Largeur totale 3 Encombrement 3-30 ineo 1052/1250 3.4 Unité : mm Largeur totale Largeur totale Largeur totale ineo 1052/1250 3-31 3.4 Encombrement 3 Unité : mm Largeur totale Largeur totale Largeur totale 3 Encombrement 3-32 ineo 1052/1250 3.4 Unité : mm Largeur totale ineo 1052/1250 3-33 3.5 Précautions d'utilisation 3 3.5 Précautions d'utilisation Pour assurer les performances optimales de la machine, observez les précautions ci-dessous. 3.5.1 Alimentation Les exigences d'alimentation électrique sont les suivantes. Utilisez une source d'alimentation présentant des fluctuations de tension et de fréquence aussi faibles que possible. 3.5.2 Environnement L'environnement requis pour l'appareil est le suivant. - Température de service : de 10°C (50°F) à 30°C (86°F) - Humidité : 10% à 80% 3.5.3 Manipulation des cartouches de toner Veuillez lire attentivement les précautions suivantes avant de manipuler une cartouche de toner avec le plus grand soin. - N'ouvrez pas la cartouche de toner de force. Si du toner s'échappe de la cartouche, faites très attention de ne pas l'inhaler et évitez tout contact avec la peau. - En cas de contact avec la peau ou les vêtements, lavez à fond à l'eau et au savon la surface exposée. - Si vous avez inhalé du toner, faites des gargarismes d'eau répétés à l'air frais. En cas de symptômes de toux, consultez un médecin. - Si du toner pénètre dans vos yeux, rincez-les immédiatement à l'eau claire pendant plus de quinze minutes. Si l'irritation persiste, consultez un médecin. - Si vous avez avalé du toner, rincez-vous bien la bouche et buvez plusieurs verres d'eau. Consultez un médecin si nécessaire. - Conservez les cartouches de toner hors de portée des enfants et bébés. 3.5.4 Stockage des documents imprimés Pour stocker les documents imprimés, suivez les recommandations énumérées ci-après. - Les documents imprimés censés être conservés pendant longtemps devraient être stockés dans un endroit non exposé à la lumière ou aux températures élevées afin de les empêcher de pâlir ou de coller ensemble. - Les colles contenant des solvants (p. ex., colle en bombe) risquent de dissoudre le toner sur les documents imprimés. 3.5.5 Émission d'ozone Une opération d'impression dégage une petite quantité d'ozone. Cette quantité n'est pas suffisamment importante pour nuire à quiconque. Cependant, veuillez vous assurer que la pièce dans laquelle la machine est utilisée est suffisamment ventilée, surtout si vous imprimez une grande quantité de documents ou si la machine est utilisée en continu pendant de longues périodes. 3.5.6 Exposition directe au soleil N'installez pas la machine et les options dans un endroit exposé directement aux rayons du soleil qui pourraient affecter la performance de la machine ou être la cause d'incidents. Destination Amérique du nord Europe, Asie du sud-est, Australie Tension 208 V à 240 V AC 220 V à 240 V AC Fréquence 60 Hz 50-60 Hz 3 Précautions d'utilisation 3-34 ineo 1052/1250 3.5 3.5.7 Précaution d'emploi pour l'Unité de pliage et l'Unité de finition Le magasin principal de l'unité de pliage FD-503 ou de l'unité de finition FS-532 s'abaisse progressivement pendant l'éjection des pages imprimées. NE laissez AUCUN objet entraver le fonctionnement du magasin du côté gauche de l'unité de finition, car la moindre interférence risque d'endommager l'unité de finition ou de provoquer des blessures. 4 Préparation à l'utilisation ineo 1052/1250 4-3 4.1 Composition de la machine 4 4 Préparation à l'utilisation 4.1 Composition de la machine 4.1.1 Composants externes de la machine 4 Composition de la machine 4-4 ineo 1052/1250 4.1 N° Nom Description 1 ADF (chargeur automatique de documents) DF-615 Reçoit plusieurs originaux et les introduit automatiquement une feuille à la fois sur la vitre d'exposition pour les copier. 2 Interrupteur secondaire Permet d'allumer ou d'éteindre la machine. 3 Écran tactile Affiche les écrans comme l'écran Machine pour permettre divers réglages et opérations machine. Propose en outre des procédures de dépannage ou opératoires. 4 Panneau de contrôle Permet de sélectionner divers réglages et opérations sur la machine. 5 Porte droite À ouvrir vers la droite pour dégager les feuilles coincées. Si l'Unité d'alimentation papier PF-703/PF-706 est installée, ouvrez d'abord la porte gauche du magasin pour dégager le papier. 6 Magasin 1 Contient 1500 feuilles (80 g/m2) de papier de format standard, personnalisé, de grand format ou à onglet. Chargez du papier d'un grammage de 40 g/m2 à 300 g/m2. Pour le type de papier Gaufré2, chargez du papier d'un grammage de 75 g/m2 à 216 g/m2. Cette machine peut recevoir tous les types de papier à l'exception du papier pré-imprimé. 7 Magasin 2 Contient 1500 feuilles (80 g/m2) de papier de format standard, personnalisé, de grand format ou à onglet. Chargez du papier d'un grammage de 40 g/m2 à 300 g/m2. Pour le type de papier Gaufré2, chargez du papier d'un grammage de 75 g/m2 à 216 g/m2. Cette machine peut recevoir tous les types de papier à l'exception du papier pré-imprimé. 8 Porte avant de la machine À ouvrir pour dégager les feuilles coincées. 9 Porte d'accès au toner À ouvrir pour permettre l'ajout de toner ou le remplacement de la réservoir de toner usagé. 10 Porte gauche À ouvrir avec la porte avant pour permettre le dégagement d'un bourrage papier ou d'allumer ou d'éteindre l'interrupteur principal. 11 Port (type A) (compatible USB 2.0/1.1) Permet de connecter des périphériques comme un disque dur de sauvegarde, un clavier et une souris. Ce port est réservé aux appareils à faible consommation de courant. Il convient d'alimenter les appareils à forte consommation de courant par un bloc d'alimentation externe. 12 Port réseau (10 Base-T, 100 Base-TX, 1000 Base-T) Reçoit un câble Ethernet pour utiliser la machine, ou se servir de la machine comme imprimante/scanner réseau. 13 Interrupteur de déshumidificateur Permet d'allumer ou d'éteindre le déshumidificateur de la machine. 14 Cordon d'alimentation Transmet l'énergie électrique à la machine. ineo 1052/1250 4-5 4.1 Composition de la machine 4 4.1.2 Composants internes de la machine N° Nom Description 1 Interrupteur principal Exclusivement réservé au technicien SAV pour mettre la machine sous et hors tension. Veillez à ne pas l'actionner lors des opérations habituelles. 2 Compteur Total Indique le nombre total de copies et d'impressions réalisées. 3 Molette [M2] À ouvrir vers la gauche pour permettre le dégagement des feuilles coincées. 4 Unité de transport et de fixation Est retirée pour dégager les feuilles coincées. Pour manipuler les leviers et les boutons de commande de l'unité de transport et de fixation, suivez les instructions affichées à l'écran lorsqu'un bourrage papier se produit. 4 Composition de la machine 4-6 ineo 1052/1250 4.1 7 AVERTISSEMENT NE PAS JETER au feu la réservoir de toner usagé ! - Si la réservoir de toner usagé est jetée au feu, le toner peut s'enflammer et créer une situation dangereuse. 7 ATTENTION NE PAS mettre la main sur l'unité de fixation. - Vous risquez de vous brûler. Soyez particulièrement vigilant en retira l'unité de transport et de fixation. 7 ATTENTION NE PAS mettre les mains ou le bras entre la machine et l'unité de transport et de fixation. - Connecter ou toucher les bornes des composants électriques situés au dos de l'unité de transport et de fixation peut endommager la machine. De même, mettre les mains ou le bras entre la machine et l'unité de transport et de fixation peut provoquer des accidents imprévus. N'intervenez pas vousmême sur la machine, contactez plutôt votre SAV. 5 Levier [M4] À ouvrir vers la droite pour permettre le retrait de l'unité de transport et de fixation en vue de remédier à un bourrage papier. 6 Unité tambour Forme l'image. 7 Unité de fixation Fixe le toner sur le papier. 8 Guides latéraux Permettent d'aligner les bords du papier chargé. 9 Rouleau d'entraînement Introduit le papier feuille à feuille dans l'unité d'impression. 10 Levier de déverrouillage À tirer vers l'arrière pour déverrouiller et déplacer les guides latéraux. 11 Buse d'air Envoie de l'air pour soulever légèrement le papier afin d'éviter une double introduction. 12 Guide arrière Permet d'aligner le bord arrière du papier chargé. 13 Cartouche de toner Approvisionne la machine en toner. 14 Levier de l'unité toner À tirer pour enlever l'unité toner pour le remplacement de la cartouche. 15 Réservoir de toner usagé Recueille le toner usagé. 16 Levier de verrouillage À ouvrir vers la gauche en poussant la réservoir de toner usagé pour la déverrouiller et permettre le remplacement de la réservoir de toner usagé. N° Nom Description ineo 1052/1250 4-7 4.1 Composition de la machine 4 4.1.3 Présentation du panneau de contrôle N° Nom Description 1 Pavé numérique Permet la saisie de valeurs numériques. 2 Auto Permet de restaurer la configuration initiale de la machine. 3 Voyant d'alimentation S'allume en rouge quand l'interrupteur principal est sur ON (Marche), et en vert quand l'interrupteur secondaire est sur marche. 4 Voyant Data (Données) Clignote lorsque la machine est en train de recevoir des données d'impression. 5 Interruption Suspend l'opération de copie/d'impression/de numérisation en cours pour permettre la réalisation d'un autre travail de copie. 6 Arrêt Suspend le travail de sortie en cours ou arrête l'opération sur la machine. 7 Épreuve Permet d'imprimer un seul jeu ou la première page pour vérifier la configuration copieur. 8 Départ Active diverses fonctions de la machine. 9 Voyant Départ S'allume en bleu lorsque la machine est prête à l'emploi. Il s'allume en orange lorsqu'aucune opération ne peut être initiée. 10 C (Annul) Permet de modifier une valeur numérique qui a été introduite. 4 Composition de la machine 4-8 ineo 1052/1250 4.1 7 ATTENTION N'exercez pas de pression excessive et n'utilisez pas d'objets pointus sur écran tactile du panneau de contrôle. - Sinon, cela pourrait rayer la surface du panneau ou casser le verre, avec les risques de blessures que cela comporte. Appuyez sur l'écran tactile seulement avec les doigts. 7 ATTENTION Arrêtez l'opération immédiatement lorsque l'écran Appel services techniques s'affiche ; la copie ne peut pas être poursuivie. - Sinon, cela peut causer incident inattendu. Notez le code de rapport tel qu'il apparaît sur la seconde ligne du message, éteignez l'interrupteur secondaire et ensuite l'interrupteur principal (dans cet ordre impérativement), puis débranchez le cordon d'alimentation de la prise murale. Contactez votre technicien SAV et indiquez-lui le code d'erreur. REMARQUE L'interrupteur principal doit normalement rester en position ON (Marche). Dans les conditions habituelles d'utilisation, veillez à ne pas utiliser l'interrupteur principal pour éteindre/allumer la machine. Veillez à ne pas éteindre l'interrupteur principal avant d'éteindre l'interrupteur secondaire. Veillez à ne pas éteindre l'interrupteur principal pendant que les messages suivants sont affichés après l'extinction de l'interrupteur secondaire. [Refroidissement en cours/Après refroidissement mettre hors tension] [Extinction en cours en cours/Veuillez ne pas couper l'alim principale] Si l'interrupteur principal est mis sur Arrêt alors que ces messages sont affichés, cela peut causer de graves problèmes sur la machine, notamment en termes de fixation toner. dPour info Voir page 4-53 pour savoir comment couper l'alimentation. 11 Code Permet la saisie d'un mot de passe utilisateur/compte d'identification. Permet aussi de poursuivre l'utilisation de la machine uniquement sur identification de l'utilisateur, si la fonction Authentification utilisateur ou Configuration compte est activée et qu'un utilisateur authentifié vient d'utiliser la machine. 12 Contrôle Utilisé dans l'écran Contrôle pour vérifier la configuration copieur actuelle. 13 Utilitaire/Compteur Affiche l'écran Menu Utilitaire et divers compteurs. 14 Programmes Enregistre/Rappelle la configuration copieur désirée. Permet de rappeler aussi la configuration copieur précédente. 15 Accessibilité Permet de régler le temps de réponse des touches de l'écran tactile et du panneau de contrôle. 16 Aide Affiche l'écran Aide qui fournit des informations sur l'utilisation de l'écran actuellement affiché sur l'écran tactile. Lorsque l'écran Machine est affiché, une pression supplémentaire permet d'obtenir aussi des informations sur les divers consommables et les modalités de mise au rebut. 17 Molette de réglage de luminosité À tourner pour régler la luminosité de l'écran tactile. 18 Éco énergie Permet l'utilisation temporaire de la machine lorsque le voyant Éco énergie est allumé. Une pression supplémentaire lorsque la machine est inactive permet d'activer également le mode Éco énergie. 19 Voyant Éco énergie S'allume lorsqu'un mode Éco énergie est activé, ou que l'alimentation de la machine est coupée par la fonction Programmateur hebdomadaire. 20 Écran tactile Affiche différents écrans permettant la configuration fonctions. N° Nom Description ineo 1052/1250 4-9 4.1 Composition de la machine 4 4.1.4 ADF (chargeur automatique de documents) 11 13 14 15 4 Composition de la machine 4-10 ineo 1052/1250 4.1 7 ATTENTION NE PAS mettre les doigts dans la zone des charnières du chargeur Auto. - Il y a risque de blessure. Soyez vigilant lors de l'ouverture ou de la fermeture du chargeur Auto. N° Nom Description 1 Poignée de déverrouillage du cache de l'unité de transport d'originaux À lever pour ouvrir le cache de l'unité de transport d'originaux. 2 Cache d'unité de transport d'originaux À ouvrir vers la gauche pour permettre le dégagement d'un original coincé. 3 Réglette d'original du chargeur Auto Indique les formats d'original disponibles, la face à exposer et les originaux incompatibles. 4 Guides d'original Permettent d'aligner les bords des originaux chargés. 5 Magasin d'introduction des originaux À charger avec le ou les originaux à numériser. Il peut recevoir jusqu'à 100 feuilles. À ouvrir vers le haut pour permettre le dégagement d'une feuille coincée. 6 Bac de sortie temporaire des originaux Recueille temporairement les originaux retournés pour numériser le verso. À ouvrir vers le haut pour permettre le dégagement d'une feuille coincée. 7 Plateau de réception d'original Réceptionne l'original numérisé. 8 Levier du cache d'unité de transport d'originaux retournés À relever pour ouvrir le cache de l'unité de transport d'originaux retournés. 9 Molette de transport d'originaux À tourner pour faire avancer un original coincé. 10 Cache d'unité de transport d'originaux retournés À ouvrir vers la droite pour permettre le dégagement d'un original coincé. 11 Poignée du cache document du chargeur Auto À tirer pour ouvrir le cache document du chargeur Auto. 12 Cache document du chargeur Auto À refermer pour recouvrir l'original placé sur la vitre d'exposition. À ouvrir également vers le bas pour permettre le dégagement d'une feuille coincée. 13 Guide horizontal de format Permet de mesurer le format de l'original dans le sens horizontal. 14 Vitre d'exposition Numérise les originaux qui ne peuvent pas être introduits dans le chargeur Auto et enregistre en mémoire les images d'originaux. 15 Guide vertical de format Permet de mesurer le format de l'original dans le sens vertical. ineo 1052/1250 4-11 4.1 Composition de la machine 4 4.1.5 Équipement standard/en option des ineo 1250/1052 *1 : Le ineo 1250 doit comporter l'Unité RU-510. La pose de l'Unité RU-510 est optionnelle sur ineo 1052 ; toutefois si la machine est équipée de l'Unité d'insertion MI-PFU, l'Unité RU-510 est nécessaire. Unité principale 4 Composition de la machine 4-12 ineo 1052/1250 4.1 *1 : Le ineo 1250 doit comporter l'Unité RU-510. La pose de l'Unité RU-510 est optionnelle sur ineo 1052 ; toutefois si la machine est équipée de l'Unité d'insertion MI-PFU, l'Unité RU-510 est nécessaire. Unité principale ineo 1052/1250 4-13 4.1 Composition de la machine 4 *1 : Le ineo 1250 doit comporter l'Unité RU-510. La pose de l'Unité RU-510 est optionnelle sur ineo 1052 ; toutefois si la machine est équipée de l'Unité d'insertion MI-PFU, l'Unité RU-510 est nécessaire. Unité principale 4 Composition de la machine 4-14 ineo 1052/1250 4.1 *1 : Le ineo 1250 doit comporter l'Unité RU-510. La pose de l'Unité RU-510 est optionnelle sur ineo 1052 ; toutefois si la machine est équipée de l'Unité d'insertion MI-PFU, l'Unité RU-510 est nécessaire. Unité principale ineo 1052/1250 4-15 4.1 Composition de la machine 4 *1 : Le ineo 1250 doit comporter l'Unité RU-510. La pose de l'Unité RU-510 est optionnelle sur ineo 1052 ; toutefois si la machine est équipée de l'Unité d'insertion MI-PFU, l'Unité RU-510 est nécessaire. Unité principale 4 Composition de la machine 4-16 ineo 1052/1250 4.1 *2 : Si le ineo 1052/1250 est équipé de la Perforeuse multiple GP-501, elle doit aussi inclure l'Unité relais RU-510. Unité principale ineo 1052/1250 4-17 4.1 Composition de la machine 4 *1 : Le ineo 1250 doit comporter l'Unité RU-510. La pose de l'Unité RU-510 est optionnelle sur ineo 1052 ; toutefois si la machine est équipée de l'Unité d'insertion MI-PFU, l'Unité RU-510 est nécessaire. Unité principale 4 Composition de la machine 4-18 ineo 1052/1250 4.1 4.1.6 Unité d'alimentation papier PF-703 ineo 1052/1250 4-19 4.1 Composition de la machine 4 N° Nom Description 1 Magasin supérieur (Mag 3)) (ou Mag 6 dans la seconde unité) Contient 1300 feuilles (80 g/m2) de papier de format standard, personnalisé, de grand format ou à onglet. Chargez du papier d'un grammage de 40 g/m2 à 300 g/m2. Peut recevoir tout type de papier y compris le papier pré-imprimé. 2 Magasin supérieur (Mag 4) (ou Mag 7 dans la seconde unité) Contient 1850 feuilles (80 g/m2) de papier de format standard, personnalisé, de grand format ou à onglet. Chargez du papier d'un grammage de 40 g/m2 à 350 g/m2. Peut recevoir tout type de papier y compris le papier pré-imprimé. 3 Magasin supérieur (Mag 5) (ou Mag 8 dans la seconde unité) Contient 1850 feuilles (80 g/m2) de papier de format standard, personnalisé, de grand format ou à onglet. Chargez du papier d'un grammage de 40 g/m2 à 300 g/m2. Peut recevoir tout type de papier y compris le papier pré-imprimé. 4 Trappe de visite de la soufflerie Ouvrir pour vérifier l'efficience de la soufflerie pour l'introduction du papier. 5 Poignée de porte gauche du magasin À actionner pour ouvrir la porte gauche du magasin. 6 Porte gauche du magasin À ouvrir pour dégager un bourrage papier depuis la porte de gauche de la machine ou depuis les magasins papier de l'unité d'alimentation. 7 Poignée du magasin Permet de tirer le magasin. 8 Indicateur Format papier Indique la position des guides latéraux pour le format papier standard. 9 Molettes de fixation des guides (2 pièces) À tourner pour déplacer ou bloquer les guides latéraux. 10 Buse d'air supérieure Envoie de l'air pour séparer chaque feuille. 11 Réglettes pour petits formats (2 pièces) À ouvrir vers l'intérieur pour recevoir du papier de largeur inférieure à 150 mm. 12 Leviers de fixation de la plaque presse-papier (2 positions) Pour une utilisation des réglettes petit format, à pousser vers la gauche pour verrouiller les plaques pressepapier. 13 Molettes de fixation des guides À tourner pour déplacer ou bloquer les guides latéraux. 14 Buse d'air latérale Envoie de l'air pour soulever légèrement le papier afin d'éviter une double introduction. 15 Levier de déverrouillage du guide arrière À pousser vers la gauche pour déverrouiller et déplacer les guides arrière. 16 Levier de déverrouillage du guide latéral À tirer vers l'arrière pour déverrouiller et déplacer les guides latéraux. 17 Guides latéraux (2 pièces) Permettent d'aligner les bords du papier chargé. 18 Guide arrière Permet d'aligner le bord arrière du papier chargé. 19 Levier du capot du convoyeur horizontal À ouvrir vers le bas pour l'enlèvement des bourrages papier. 20 Molette du convoyeur horizontal À tourner pour faire avancer le papier coincé dans le sens du convoyeur horizontal. 21 Porte de transport vertical du magasin infér. À ouvrir vers la gauche pour dégager les feuilles coincées. 22 Levier [PF1] À ouvrir vers le bas pour l'enlèvement des bourrages papier. 23 Levier [PF2] À ouvrir vers le bas pour l'enlèvement des bourrages papier. 24 Porte de transport vertical du magasin supérieur À ouvrir vers la gauche pour dégager les feuilles coincées. 4 Composition de la machine 4-20 ineo 1052/1250 4.1 4.1.7 Unité d'alimentation papier PF-706 ineo 1052/1250 4-21 4.1 Composition de la machine 4 N° Nom Description 1 Magasin supérieur (Mag 3) Mag 6 dans la seconde unité Contient 2000 feuilles (80 g/m2) de papier de format standard, personnalisé, de grand format ou à onglet. Chargez du papier d'un grammage de 40 g/m2 à 300 g/m2. Peut recevoir tout type de papier sauf le papier pré-imprimé. 2 Magasin intermédiaire (Mag 4) Mag 7 dans la seconde unité Contient 2000 feuilles (80 g/m2) de papier de format standard, personnalisé, de grand format ou à onglet. Chargez du papier d'un grammage de 40 g/m2 à 350 g/m2. Peut recevoir tout type de papier sauf le papier pré-imprimé. 3 Magasin inférieur (Mag 5) Mag 8 dans la seconde unité Contient 2000 feuilles (80 g/m2) de papier de format standard, personnalisé, de grand format ou à onglet. Chargez du papier d'un grammage de 40 g/m2 à 300 g/m2. Peut recevoir tout type de papier sauf le papier pré-imprimé. 4 Poignée de porte gauche du magasin À actionner pour ouvrir la porte gauche du magasin. 5 Porte gauche du magasin À ouvrir pour dégager un bourrage papier par la porte de droite de la machine ou dans les magasins papier de l'unité d'alimentation. 6 Poignée du magasin Permet de tirer le magasin. 7 Réglettes pour petits formats (2 pièces) À ouvrir vers l'intérieur pour recevoir du papier de largeur inférieure à 182 mm. 8 Molettes de fixation des guides (4 pièces) À tourner pour déplacer ou bloquer les guides latéraux. 9 Guide arrière Permet d'aligner le bord arrière du papier chargé. 10 Buse d'air Envoie de l'air pour soulever légèrement le papier afin d'éviter une double introduction. 11 Levier de déverrouillage du guide latéral À tirer vers l'arrière pour déverrouiller et déplacer les guides latéraux. 12 Guides latéraux (2 pièces) Permettent d'aligner les bords du papier chargé. 13 Indicateur Format papier Indique la position appropriée des guides latéraux pour le format de papier à charger. 14 Rouleau d'entraînement Introduit le papier dans la machine feuille par feuille. 15 Porte de transport vertical du magasin infér. À ouvrir vers la gauche pour dégager les feuilles coincées. 16 Levier [PF1] À ouvrir vers le bas pour l'enlèvement des bourrages papier. 17 Levier [PF2] À ouvrir vers le bas pour l'enlèvement des bourrages papier. 18 Porte de transport vertical du magasin supérieur À ouvrir vers la gauche pour dégager les feuilles coincées. 4 Composition de la machine 4-22 ineo 1052/1250 4.1 4.1.8 Module d'insertion grande capacité MI-PFU (PF-703 + MI-PFU Kit FA-501) ineo 1052/1250 4-23 4.1 Composition de la machine 4 N° Nom Description 1 Magasin supérieur (MI-PFU1) Contient 1300 feuilles (80 g/m2) de papier de format standard, personnalisé, de grand format ou à onglet. Chargez du papier d'un grammage de 40 g/m2 à 300 g/m2. Peut recevoir tout type de papier y compris le papier pré-imprimé. 2 Magasin intermédiaire (MI-PFU2) Contient 1850 feuilles (80 g/m2) de papier de format standard, personnalisé, de grand format ou à onglet. Chargez du papier d'un grammage de 40 g/m2 à 350 g/m2. Peut recevoir tout type de papier y compris le papier pré-imprimé. 3 Magasin inférieur (MI-PFU3) Contient 1850 feuilles (80 g/m2) de papier de format standard, personnalisé, de grand format ou à onglet. Chargez du papier d'un grammage de 40 g/m2 à 300 g/m2. Peut recevoir tout type de papier y compris le papier pré-imprimé. 4 Trappe de visite de la soufflerie Ouvrir pour vérifier l'efficience de la soufflerie pour l'introduction du papier. 5 Poignée de porte gauche du magasin À actionner pour ouvrir la porte gauche du magasin. 6 Porte gauche du magasin À ouvrir pour dégager un bourrage papier depuis la porte de gauche de la machine ou depuis le module d'insertion grande capacité. 7 Poignée du magasin Permet de tirer le magasin. 8 Indicateur Format papier Indique la position des guides latéraux pour le format papier standard. 9 Molettes de fixation des guides (2 pièces) À tourner pour déplacer ou bloquer les guides latéraux. 10 Buse d'air supérieure Envoie de l'air pour séparer chaque feuille. 11 Réglettes pour petits formats (2 pièces) À ouvrir vers l'intérieur pour recevoir du papier de largeur inférieure à 150 mm. 12 Leviers presse-papier (2 positions) Pour une utilisation des réglettes petit format, à pousser vers la gauche pour verrouiller le presse-papier. 13 Molettes de fixation des guides À tourner pour déplacer ou bloquer les guides latéraux. 14 Buse d'air latérale Envoie de l'air pour soulever légèrement le papier afin d'éviter une double introduction. 15 Levier de déverrouillage du guide arrière À pousser vers la gauche pour déverrouiller et déplacer les guides arrière. 16 Levier de déverrouillage du guide latéral À tirer vers l'arrière pour déverrouiller et déplacer les guides latéraux. 17 Molette d'avancement À tourner pour faire avancer le papier coincé dans le sens du convoyeur horizontal. 18 Guides latéraux (2 pièces) Permettent d'aligner les bords du papier chargé. 19 Guide arrière Permet d'aligner le bord arrière du papier chargé. 20 Levier du capot du convoyeur horizontal À ouvrir vers le bas pour l'enlèvement des bourrages papier. 21 Molette du convoyeur horizontal À tourner pour faire avancer le papier coincé dans le sens du convoyeur horizontal. 22 Porte de transport vertical du magasin infér. À ouvrir vers la gauche pour dégager les feuilles coincées. 23 Levier [PF1] À ouvrir vers le bas pour l'enlèvement des bourrages papier. 24 Levier [PF2] À ouvrir vers le bas pour l'enlèvement des bourrages papier. 25 Porte de transport vertical du magasin supérieur À ouvrir vers la gauche pour dégager les feuilles coincées. 4 Composition de la machine 4-24 ineo 1052/1250 4.1 4.1.9 Unité relais RU-509 (Humidificateur HM-102) ineo 1052/1250 4-25 4.1 Composition de la machine 4 N° Nom Description 1 Porte avant de l'unité de relais À ouvrir pour dégager un bourrage papier ou remplir d'eau le réservoir de l'humidificateur de l'Humidificateur HM-102. 2 Levier [RU1] À ouvrir vers la droite pour dégager les feuilles coincées. 3 Levier [RU2] À ouvrir vers le bas pour l'enlèvement des bourrages papier. 4 Levier [RU3] À ouvrir vers la gauche pour dégager les feuilles coincées. 5 Molette [RU4] À tourner en sens horaire pour dégager les feuilles coincées. 6 Levier [RU5] À ouvrir vers le haut pour dégager les feuilles coincées. 7 Molette [RU6] À tourner pour permettre le dégagement des feuilles coincées. 8 Levier [RU7] À appuyer vers le bas et à ouvrir vers le haut à droite pour dégager un bourrage papier. 9 Levier [RU8] À ouvrir vers la droite pour dégager les feuilles coincées. 10 Levier [RU11] À ouvrir vers la droite pour dégager les feuilles coincées. 11 Afficheur de position du bourrage Indique la position d'un bourrage papier à l'aide de diodes DEL. 12 Humidificateur HM-102 (option) Humidifie les deux faces des feuilles de papier pour restaurer leur planéité. 13 Poignée [HM1] À maintenir pour retirer l'unité et remédier à un bourrage papier à l'intérieur de l'Humidificateur HM-102. 14 Levier [HM2] À ouvrir vers la droite pour dégager les feuilles coincées. 15 Levier [HM3] À ouvrir vers le bas pour l'enlèvement des bourrages papier. 16 Molette [HM4] À tourner dans le sens antihoraire pour dégager les feuilles coincées. 17 Poignée [HM5] À ouvrir vers le haut pour dégager les feuilles coincées. 18 Réservoir de l'humidificateur À remplir d'eau pour humidificateur le papier. 19 Bouchon du réservoir de l' humidificateur À ouvrir pour remplir d'eau le réservoir de l'humidificateur. 4 Composition de la machine 4-26 ineo 1052/1250 4.1 4.1.10 Unité relais RU-510 N° Nom Description 1 Porte avant de l'unité de relais À ouvrir pour dégager les feuilles coincées. 2 Levier [RU1] À ouvrir vers le haut pour dégager les feuilles coincées. 3 Molette [RU2] À tourner pour permettre le dégagement des feuilles coincées. 4 Afficheur de position du bourrage Indique la position d'un bourrage papier à l'aide de diodes DEL. 5 Molette [RU3] À tourner en sens horaire pour permettre le dégagement des feuilles coincées. 6 Levier [RU4] À ouvrir vers la droite pour dégager les feuilles coincées. ineo 1052/1250 4-27 4.1 Composition de la machine 4 4.1.11 Unité de pliage FD-503 4 Composition de la machine 4-28 ineo 1052/1250 4.1 Vue externe de l'Unité de pliage FD-503 Vue interne de l'Unité de pliage FD-503 N° Nom Description 1 Bac principal Réceptionne les jeux de feuilles pliées ou perforées. 2 Bac Plieuse Contient les jeux en sortie en mode Pliage roulé, En accordéon, Pliage économique ou Pliage portefeuille. 3 Butée de coordination Retient les jeux réalisés en Pliage économique ou en Pliage portefeuille pour les empêcher de tomber. 4 Magasin infér. Reçoit les feuilles destinées aux couvertures. 5 Guides du magasin inférieur Permettent de maintenir en place les feuilles de couverture. 6 Magasin supérieur Reçoit les feuilles destinées aux couvertures. 7 Guides du magasin supérieur Permettent de maintenir en place les feuilles de couverture. 8 Poignée du couvercle supérieur À ouvrir pour dégager les feuilles coincées ou pour régler le levier en vue d'éviter l'introduction de plusieurs feuilles du module d'insertion. 9 Panneau de commande de l'unité de pliage Permet d'utiliser manuellement l'Unité de pliage FD-503, l'Unité de finition FS-532 et la Piqueuse à cheval SD-506. 10 Porte avant de l'unité de pliage À ouvrir pour permettre d'enlever le papier à l'origine du bourrage ou les chutes de perforation. 11 Leviers de verrouillage des rouleaux d'entraînement extérieurs du magasin supérieur (2 pièces) À pousser vers l'intérieur pour verrouiller les deux rouleaux d'entraînement situés à l'extérieur du magasin supérieur. 12 Leviers de verrouillage des rouleaux d'entraînement extérieurs du magasin inférieur (2 pièces) À pousser vers l'intérieur pour verrouiller les deux rouleaux d'entraînement situés à l'extérieur du magasin inférieur. N° Nom Description 13 Levier [FD1] À ouvrir vers le haut pour dégager les feuilles coincées. 14 Levier [FD2] Après le levier [FD1]. À ouvrir vers la gauche pour dégager les feuilles coincées. 15 Afficheur de position du bourrage Indique la position d'un bourrage papier à l'aide de diodes DEL. 16 Corbeille de chutes de perforation À tirer pour enlever les chutes de perforation. 17 Levier [FD6] À ouvrir vers la droite pour dégager les feuilles coincées. 18 Levier [FD7] À ouvrir vers la droite pour dégager les feuilles coincées. 19 Poignée [FD11] À maintenir pour retirer l'unité et remédier à un bourrage papier à l'intérieur de l'unité de pliage. 20 Molette [FD3] À tourner en sens antihoraire pour faciliter le dégagement des feuilles coincées à l'intérieur de l'unité de pliage. 21 Levier [FD4] À ouvrir vers le haut pour dégager les feuilles coincées. 22 Levier [FD13] À ouvrir vers le haut pour permettre le dégagement des feuilles coincées à l'intérieur de l'unité de pliage. 23 Levier [FD14] À ouvrir vers le haut pour permettre le dégagement des feuilles coincées à l'intérieur de l'unité de pliage. 24 Molette [FD8] À tourner pour faciliter le dégagement des feuilles coincées à l'intérieur de l'unité de pliage. ineo 1052/1250 4-29 4.1 Composition de la machine 4 25 Molette [FD9] À tourner pour faciliter le dégagement des feuilles coincées à l'intérieur de l'unité de pliage. 26 Molette [FD10] À tourner pour faciliter le dégagement des feuilles coincées à l'intérieur de l'unité de pliage. 27 Levier [FD12] À ouvrir vers le haut pour permettre le dégagement des feuilles coincées à l'intérieur de l'unité de pliage. 28 Levier [FD15] Après le levier [FD16]. À ouvrir vers la gauche pour permettre le dégagement des feuilles coincées à l'intérieur de l'unité de pliage. 29 Levier [FD16] À ouvrir vers la gauche pour permettre le dégagement des feuilles coincées à l'intérieur de l'unité de pliage. 30 Molette [FD5] À tourner en sens antihoraire pour faciliter le dégagement des feuilles de couverture coincées. N° Nom Description 4 Composition de la machine 4-30 ineo 1052/1250 4.1 4.1.12 Piqueuse à cheval SD-506 ineo 1052/1250 4-31 4.1 Composition de la machine 4 Vue externe de la Piqueuse à cheval SD-506 Vue interne de la Piqueuse à cheval SD-506 N° Nom Description 1 Magasin auxiliaire de la piqueuse à cheval Reçoit les jeux non traités par la Piqueuse à cheval SD-506. 2 Poignée du capot de sortie du mode Pliage en 3 multiple À ouvrir vers le haut pour dégager les feuilles coincées. 3 Magasin pliage en 3 Reçoit les jeux en sortie en mode Pliage en 3 multiple. 4 Bac auxiliaire Reçoit les jeux en provenance de la machine du côté droit de la Piqueuse à cheval SD-506. 5 Porte latérale droite de la piqueuse à cheval À ouvrir pour dégager les feuilles coincées. 6 Bac pliage En position déployée, reçoit les jeux délivrés en mode Pliage & piqûre ou Pliage en 2 multiple. 7 Corbeille massicot À enlever pour vider les chutes de massicotage. 8 Porte latérale gauche de la piqueuse à cheval À ouvrir pour permettre le chargement d'agrafes ou le dégagement du papier coincé. N° Nom Description 9 Levier [SD11] À ouvrir pour permettre le dégagement des feuilles coincées à l'intérieur de l'unité de pliage. 10 Levier [SD3] À ouvrir vers le bas pour l'enlèvement des bourrages papier. 11 Poignée [SD10] À maintenir pour tirer le tiroir et remédier à un bourrage papier à l'intérieur de l'unité de pliage. 12 Levier [SD2] À ouvrir vers le haut pour dégager les feuilles coincées. 13 Levier [SD1] À ouvrir vers la gauche pour dégager les feuilles coincées. 14 Molette [SD6] À tourner en sens horaire pour faire avancer le papier coincé vers l'unité de pliage. 15 Afficheur de position du bourrage Indique la position d'un bourrage papier à l'aide de diodes DEL. 16 Levier [SD7] À ouvrir vers la droite pour dégager les feuilles coincées. 17 Poignée [SD8] À tirer pour ouvrir le capot en vue de dégager les feuilles coincées. 18 Levier [SD9] À ouvrir vers le haut pour dégager les feuilles coincées. 19 Unité d'agrafage Agrafe les jeux pliés. 20 Molette [SD15] À tourner en sens horaire pour faire avancer le papier coincé. 21 Levier [SD5] À ouvrir vers la gauche pour dégager les feuilles coincées. 22 Levier [SD4] À ouvrir vers le bas pour l'enlèvement des bourrages papier. 4 Composition de la machine 4-32 ineo 1052/1250 4.1 4.1.13 Thermorelieur PB-503 ineo 1052/1250 4-33 4.1 Composition de la machine 4 Vue externe du Thermorelieur PB-503 Vue interne de la porte avant du bac du thermorelieur N° Nom Description 1 Capot du réservoir à colle S'ouvre pour le chargement des pastilles de colle. 2 Extracteur Aspire l'air de l'intérieur du Thermorelieur PB-503. 3 Bac auxiliaire Reçoit les jeux non traités par le Thermorelieur PB-503. 4 Porte avant du thermorelieur À ouvrir pour permettre le dégagement des feuilles coincées et chutes de massicotage. 5 Bac couvertures Reçoit le papier à couverture destiné à la thermoreliure. 6 Fenêtre du bac Thermorelieur Permet de vérifier les jeux délivrés dans le bac du thermorelieur. Si les jeux sont empilés du côté droit du bac du thermorelieur, appuyez sur le bouton d'avancement pour les acheminer vers le bac de transport. 7 Porte avant du bac du thermorelieur S'ouvre pour sortir les jeux reliés du bac. 8 Molette d'alimentation Transporte les jeux reliés vers bac de transport. 9 Voyant Bourrage S'allume lorsqu'un bourrage se produit lors du transport des feuilles en sortie de la section de finition du Thermorelieur PB-503. N° Nom Description 10 Plaque de maintien de livres S'aligne contre les livres produits afin d'éviter qu'ils ne basculent durant le transport. 11 Magasin de transport Évacue les livres thermoreliés hors du Thermorelieur PB-503. 12 Butée de livres À insérer dans un trou de positionnement approprié pour éviter que les livres produits ne basculent durant le transport. 13 Levier de la plaque de maintien de livres À déplacer pour aligner la plaque de maintien de livres contre les livres produits. 4 Composition de la machine 4-34 ineo 1052/1250 4.1 Section de transport N° Nom Description 14 Capot de la section de transport À ouvrir pour dégager un bourrage papier lorsque le voyant Bourrage s'allume. 15 Molette [PB14] À tourner en sens antihoraire pour faire avancer le papier coincé. ineo 1052/1250 4-35 4.1 Composition de la machine 4 Vue interne de la porte avant du thermorelieur Vue interne du Bac couvertures N° Nom Description 16 Molette de libération du corps de document dans l'unité de pressage À tourner en sens horaire pour retirer le jeu de document fixé dans l'unité de pressage. 17 Molette [PB2] À tourner pour faire avancer un corps de document vers l'unité de pressage en vue de dégager le papier coincé. 18 Levier [PB7] À pousser vers le bas pour retirer l'unité de pressage pour dégager un jeu de document coincé dans l'unité de pressage. 19 Molette [PB6] À tourner pour faire avancer le papier coincé dans le magasin auxiliaire. 20 Levier [PB3] À ouvrir vers le bas pour dégager un jeu de document coincé. 21 Levier [PB1] À ouvrir vers le haut pour dégager un jeu de document coincé. 22 Levier [PB12] À ouvrir vers le haut pour dégager un jeu de document coincé. 23 Levier [PB4] À ouvrir vers la gauche pour permettre le dégagement d'une feuille de couverture coincée. 24 Levier [PB5] À ouvrir vers la gauche lorsque la corbeille massicot est tirée pour dégager une feuille de couverture coincée. 25 Molette [PB13] À tourner en sens horaire pour faciliter le dégagement des feuilles de couverture coincées. 26 Corbeille massicot À enlever pour vider les chutes de massicotage. 27 Molette [PB11] À tourner vers le haut pour faire descendre l'unité de reliure et dégager les feuilles coincées. 28 Afficheur de position du bourrage Indique la position d'un bourrage papier à l'aide de diodes DEL. 29 Molette [PB8] À tourner en sens horaire permettre de dégager les feuilles coincées de l'unité de reliure. 30 Molette de libération de l'unité de reliure À tourner vers le bas pour dégager la feuille de couverture de l'unité de reliure en position supérieure. 31 Molette [PB9] À tourner en sens horaire pour libérer la plaque de fixation des couvertures et permettre de dégager les feuilles coincées. 32 Molette [PB10] À tourner en sens antihoraire pour libérer la plaque de fixation du capot et permettre de dégager les feuilles coincées. N° Nom Description 33 Buse d'air Souffle de l'air pour éviter l'introduction simultanée de plusieurs couvertures. 34 Rouleau d'entraînement Introduit le papier à couverture feuille à feuille dans le Thermorelieur PB-503. 35 Levier de déverrouillage À tirer vers l'arrière pour déverrouiller et déplacer les guides latéraux. 36 Guide arrière Permet d'aligner le bord arrière du papier chargé. 37 Guides latéraux Permettent d'aligner les bords du papier chargé. 4 Composition de la machine 4-36 ineo 1052/1250 4.1 7 ATTENTION NE PAS toucher le réservoir de colle. - L'unité de la réserve de colle interne présente des températures très élevées. En cas de contact, vous risquez de vous brûler. Faites particulièrement attention lors de la réinstallation du réservoir de colle. 4.1.14 Empileur grande capacité LS-505 ineo 1052/1250 4-37 4.1 Composition de la machine 4 N° Nom Description 1 Bac auxiliaire Reçoit les jeux délivrés en mode Sans décalage. 2 Poignée du capot supérieur (gauche) À ouvrir pour dégager les feuilles coincées. 3 Poignée du capot supérieur (droite) À ouvrir pour dégager les feuilles coincées. 4 Indicateur de récupération papier S'allume lorsque l'empileur descend après que le bouton de récupération papier a été actionné. 5 Touche récupération papier Permet de sortir les feuilles imprimées de l'empileur. 6 Porte avant de l'empileur grande capacité À ouvrir pour permettre d'enlever les feuilles imprimées de l'empileur. 7 Poignée [LS7] À ouvrir pour dégager les feuilles coincées. 8 Poignée [LS6] À ouvrir pour dégager les feuilles coincées. 9 Molette [LS3] À tourner en sens antihoraire pour faire avancer le papier coincé vers l'empileur. 10 Molette [LS2] À tourner dans le sens antihoraire pour faire avancer le papier coincé vers le magasin auxiliaire. 11 Molette [LS4] À tourner dans le sens antihoraire pour acheminer vers la sortie le papier coincé. 12 Levier [LS1] À ouvrir vers le bas pour l'enlèvement des bourrages papier. 13 Afficheur de position du bourrage Indique la position d'un bourrage papier à l'aide de diodes DEL. 14 Empileur Reçoit les jeux produits tant en mode Décalage qu'en mode Sans décalage. 15 Levier [LS5] À ouvrir vers le bas pour l'enlèvement des bourrages papier. 16 Magasin de transport Transporte collectivement les feuilles vers l'empileur. 17 Support butée papier Monté avec butée papier pour maintenir les feuilles en sortie. 18 Butée papier Maintient les feuilles en sortie pour éviter de tomber. 4 Composition de la machine 4-38 ineo 1052/1250 4.1 4.1.15 Unité de finition FS-532 (Unité de perforation PK-522 + Piqueuse à cheval SD-510 + Module d'insertion PI-502) ineo 1052/1250 4-39 4.1 Composition de la machine 4 Vue externe de l'Unité de finition FS-532 N° Nom Description 1 Porte avant de l'unité de finition À ouvrir pour permettre le chargement d'agrafes pour une piqûre à plat ou le dégagement de papier coincé. À ouvrir pour retirer les chutes de papier lorsque la machine est équipée de l'Unité de perforation PK-522. Si la machine est équipée de la Piqueuse à cheval SD-510, à ouvrir pour permettre le retrait de papier coincé dans la piqueuse à cheval. 2 Extension du bac principal À tirer pour recevoir des grands formats de papier dans le bac principal. 3 Bac principal Reçoit les jeux décalés, non décalés, ou agrafés. 4 Support butée papier Reçoit le papier fin ou gondolé éjecté dans le bac principal. 5 Extension du bac auxiliaire À tirer pour recevoir des grands formats de papier dans le magasin secondaire. 6 Guides de sortie Règle la position transversale des feuilles éjectées dans le bac principal. 7 Pince Règle la position d'introduction des feuilles éjectées dans le bac principal. 8 Bac auxiliaire Reçoit les feuilles délivrées sans décalage. 9 Bouton Suspendre/Reprendre L'enfoncer pendant plus d'une seconde, pour suspendre la sortie de la tâche en cours dans le magasin. Puis l'enfoncer à nouveau pendant une seconde pour reprendre l'impression. Une pression de la touche Départ sur le panneau de contrôle permet aussi de reprendre l'exécution de la tâche. 10 Voyant de suspension Clignote lorsque le bouton Suspendre/Reprendre est enfoncé pour suspendre la sortie dans le magasin. Il s'éteint lorsque la tâche suspendue est reprise ou supprimée. 11 Poignée de livraison papier À ouvrir vers la gauche pour sortir les jeux en mode Pliage & piqûre, Pliage en 2 multiple ou Multi pli en 3. Puis à tirer vers le haut pour délivrer les jeux en sortie chargés dans le bac pliage. 12 Bac pliage Reçoit les jeux délivrés en mode Pliage & piqûre, Pliage en 2 multiple, ou Multi pli en 3. 13 Courroie de sortie papier Délivre les feuilles en sortie chargées dans le bac Pliage. 14 Module d'insertion PI-502 (option) Insère des couvertures dans les jeux imprimés ou permet la commande manuelle de l'Unité de finition FS-532. 15 Panneau de contrôle du module d'insertion Permet la commande manuelle de l'Unité de finition FS-532. 16 Levier de déverrouillage de l'unité supérieure À relever pour dégager les feuilles coincées. Coulisser à gauche le module supérieur du Module d'insertion PI-502 ouverte et dégager le papier coincé. 17 Guides du magasin supérieur À aligner contre les feuilles de couverture pour fixer la position. 18 Magasin supérieur Reçoit les feuilles destinées aux couvertures. 19 Magasin infér. Reçoit les feuilles destinées aux couvertures. 20 Guides du magasin inférieur À aligner contre les feuilles de couverture pour fixer la position. 4 Composition de la machine 4-40 ineo 1052/1250 4.1 ineo 1052/1250 4-41 4.1 Composition de la machine 4 REMARQUE Vous risquez de ne pas pouvoir ouvrir l'empileur en raison de son blocage automatique. Il peut aussi arriver que vous ne puissiez pas remboîter l'empileur parce qu'il est bloqué automatiquement. Si vous forcez le remboîtage de l'empileur pendant qu'il est bloqué, la plaque de régulation vertical risque de se casser. En cas de résistance, tournez la molette [FS8]. L'empileur est alors débloqué et peut être manipulé. 4 Composition de la machine 4-42 ineo 1052/1250 4.1 Vue interne de l'Unité de finition FS-532 N° Nom Description 1 Levier [FS1] À ouvrir vers le bas pour l'enlèvement des bourrages papier. Si la machine est équipée de l'Unité de perforation PK-522, tirez la corbeille de chutes de perforation pour l'ouvrir. 2 Levier [FS2] À ouvrir vers le haut pour dégager les feuilles coincées. 3 Molette [FS3] À tourner pour permettre le dégagement des feuilles coincées. 4 Levier [FS4] À ouvrir vers la droite pour dégager les feuilles coincées. 5 Levier [FS5] À ouvrir en bas vers la gauche pour dégager les feuilles coincées. 6 Levier [FS6] À ouvrir vers la droite pour dégager les feuilles coincées. Si la machine est équipée de l'Unité de perforation PK-522, tirez la corbeille de chutes de perforation pour l'ouvrir. 7 Molette [FS7] À tourner pour permettre le dégagement des feuilles coincées. 8 Molette [FS8] À tourner après ouverture de l'empileur pour décoincer le papier en cas de bourrage dans l'empileur. Vous devez tourner la molette avant d'ouvrir l'empileur s'il est bloqué et résiste. Si l'empileur est bloqué quand il est ouvert et qu'il ne s'emboîte plus, tournez la molette et remboîtez-le. 9 Poignée [FS9] Permet d'ouvrir l'empileur en cas de bourrage papier à l'intérieur. 10 Empileur Contient et aligne une pile de feuilles imprimées à agrafer. 11 Afficheur de position du bourrage Indique la position d'un bourrage papier à l'aide de diodes DEL. 12 Plaque de régulation horizontal Ajuste la position transversale des feuilles imprimées à agrafer. 13 Plaque de régulation vertical Ajuste la position d'introduction des feuilles imprimées à agrafer. Quand vous essayez d'ouvrir ou de remboîter l'empileur, il peut ou non être bloqué selon l'endroit où la plaque de régulation vertical s'est arrêtée. 14 Agrafeuse À retirer de l'unité d'agrafage pour remplacer la cartouche par une neuve. 15 Unité d'agrafage Sert à agrafer le papier imprimé. 16 Corbeille de l'agrafeuse Recueille les débris d'agrafes. 17 Levier [PI1] S'ouvre à gauche pour retirer un bourrage papier présent dans le Module d'insertion PI-502. 18 Unité de perforation PK-522 (option) Permet de perforer les feuilles imprimées. 19 Corbeille de chutes de perforation À tirer pour enlever les chutes de perforation. 20 Poignée [SD1] Tirer dessus pour remettre des agrafes ou enlever un bourrage papier dans la Piqueuse à cheval SD-510. 21 Molette [SD3] À tourner pour enlever un bourrage papier après avoir retiré l'unité de piqûre. 22 Unité de piqûre (Piqueuse à cheval SD-510) (option) Piqûre à cheval, pliage en 2 multiple ou pliage en 3 multiple des jeux imprimés. 23 Molette [SD5] À tourner pour enlever un bourrage papier après avoir retiré l'unité de piqûre. 24 Levier [SD8] S'ouvre en bas pour enlever un bourrage papier après avoir retiré l'unité de piqûre. ineo 1052/1250 4-43 4.1 Composition de la machine 4 4.1.16 Kit DD extractible RH-101 25 Levier [SD7] S'ouvre en haut pour enlever un bourrage papier après avoir retiré l'unité de piqûre. 26 Levier [SD2] S'ouvre à droite pour enlever un bourrage papier après avoir retiré l'unité de piqûre. 27 Levier [SD4] S'ouvre en haut pour enlever un bourrage papier après avoir retiré l'unité de piqûre. 28 Levier [SD6] S'ouvre à droite pour enlever un bourrage papier après avoir retiré l'unité de piqûre. 29 Agrafeuse À retirer de l'unité de piqûre pour remplacer la cartouche par une neuve. 30 Entrée agrafeuse Permet d'entrer et sortir l'agrafeuse pour remettre des agrafes. N° Nom Description N° Nom Description 1 Kit DD extractible RH-101 Permet l'installation de deux kits DD extractibles à boîtier interne, équipés chacun d'un disque dur pour assurer la transférabilité. 2 Kit DD à boîtier interne (inclus dans HD-511) Permet l'installation externe d'un disque dur machine et contrôleur. 3 DD contrôleur Disque dur contrôleur destiné à une installation externe. 4 DD pour la machine Disque dur machine destiné à une installation externe. 4 Composition de la machine 4-44 ineo 1052/1250 4.1 4.1.17 Unité d'authentification (type Carte IC) AU-201 REMARQUE L'Unité d'authentification (type Carte IC) AU-201 est un dispositif proposé en option. La commercialisation et l'autorisation d'utilisation de ce produit sont réalisées sur une base "en l'état". Nous déclinons toute responsabilité en cas de dommages (y compris un manque à gagner ou tout autre dommage associé) causés par ce produit et dus à des opérations non décrites dans le présent Guide de l'utilisateur. Ce produit est conçu et fabriqué pour un usage professionnel général. Ne l'utilisez pas pour des applications nécessitant une haute fiabilité et pouvant avoir une incidence extrême sur la vie des personnes et les biens. Applications nécessitant une haute fiabilité : gestion d'usine de produits chimiques, gestion d'équipement médical, gestion de communication d'urgence, etc. L'utilisation avec d'autres dispositifs d'authentification n'est pas garantie. Afin d'intégrer les derniers perfectionnements du produit, les spécifications techniques concernant ce produit peuvent être modifiées sans préavis. La carte IC ne doit pas être stockée à moins de 40 mm de la zone de numérisation des cartes. N° Nom Description 1 Zone de lecture de la carte Lit la carte IC passée au-dessus à des fins d'enregistrement ou d'authentification. 2 Câble USB Relié au port USB de la machine. ineo 1052/1250 4-45 4.1 Composition de la machine 4 4.1.18 Perforeuse multiple GP-501 (jeux d'emporte-pièces DS-508 à DS-518) REMARQUE Dans certains pays, la Perforeuse multiple GP-501 n'est pas disponible. N° Nom Description 1 Porte avant de la Perforeuse multiple GP-501 À ouvrir pour permettre le remplacement d'un emporte- pièce ou l'enlèvement des déchets de perforation ou le dégagement des feuilles coincées. 2 Levier [GP1] À ouvrir vers le haut pour dégager les feuilles coincées. 3 Molette [GP3] À tourner pour permettre le dégagement des feuilles coincées. 4 Levier [GP2] À ouvrir vers le haut pour dégager les feuilles coincées. 5 Molette [GP4] À tourner en sens horaire pour le remplacement d'un emporte-pièce ou le dégagement des feuilles coincées. 6 Jeu de matrices Perfore différents types de trous de classement. 7 Corbeille de chutes de perforation À tirer pour enlever les chutes de perforation. 8 Interrupteur d'alimentation Allume/éteint la perforeuse multiple. 4 Composition de la machine 4-46 ineo 1052/1250 4.1 9 Levier [GP5] À ouvrir vers le bas pour l'enlèvement des bourrages papier. 10 Molette [GP7] À tourner pour permettre le dégagement des feuilles coincées. 11 Indicateur de position de la lame de l'emporte-pièce Permet de vérifier la position de la lame de l'emportepièce déplacée en manoeuvrant la molette [GP4] pour le remplacement de l'emporte-pièce ou le dégagement des feuilles coincées. 12 Levier [GP6] À ouvrir vers le haut et vers la gauche pour dégager les feuilles coincées. 13 Molette [GP8] À tourner pour permettre le dégagement des feuilles coincées. 14 Rangement des emporte-pièces Permet d'entreposer les emporte-pièces. N° Nom Description ineo 1052/1250 4-47 4.1 Composition de la machine 4 4.1.19 Relieur automatique à anneaux GP-502 REMARQUE Dans certains pays, le Relieur automatique à anneaux GP-502 n'est pas disponible. 4 Composition de la machine 4-48 ineo 1052/1250 4.1 Vue externe du Relieur automatique à anneaux GP-502 REMARQUE Laissez l'interrupteur allumé pour le relieur à anneaux. L'arrêt à l'interrupteur non seulement désactive la machine mais aussi la fonction passe-copie qui achemine le papier vers l'unité de finition en aval. N° Nom Description 1 Capot supérieur du relieur à anneaux À ouvrir vers le haut pour dégager les feuilles coincées. 2 Panneau d'affichage Affiche l'état du relieur à anneaux, la position du bourrage papier, un message d'alarme relatif aux consommables et modalités de mise au rebut ainsi que les compteurs/versions. 3 Poignée de déverrouillage À tirer pour déverrouiller et ouvrir l'unité supérieure du relieur à anneaux. 4 Bac Livret Reçoit les livrets reliés. Retirer le magasin pour sortir les livrets produits. 5 Porte avant du relieur à anneaux À ouvrir pour permettre d'enlever le papier à l'origine du bourrage ou les chutes de perforation. 6 Poignée de porte avant du relieur à anneaux Permet d'ouvrir la porte avant du relieur à anneaux. 7 Interrupteur d'alimentation Allume/éteint le relieur à anneaux. 8 Fiche d'alimentation Alimente le relieur à anneaux. ineo 1052/1250 4-49 4.1 Composition de la machine 4 4 Composition de la machine 4-50 ineo 1052/1250 4.1 Vue interne du Relieur automatique à anneaux GP-502 N° Nom Description 1 Entrée papier Éjecte le papier introduit dans le relieur à anneaux. 2 Section de distribution papier Sort le papier acheminé vers le relieur à anneaux dans la section de reliure ou le fait dériver dans l'unité de finition en aval. 3 Poignée [GP1] Permet d'ouvrir le passe-copie vers le haut. 4 Passe-copie Détourne le papier introduit dans le relieur à anneaux directement vers l'unité de finition en aval. 5 Chemin vertical du papier Introduit le papier dans le dispositif de perforation. 6 Tiroir pièces reliure Reçoit les pièces de reliure. 7 Molette [GP3] À tourner dans le sens antihoraire pour dégager les feuilles coincées. 8 Levier [GP2] À ouvrir vers la gauche pour dégager les feuilles coincées. 9 Corbeille de chutes de perforation À tirer pour enlever les chutes de perforation. 10 Molette [GP4] À tourner en sens horaire pour faire avancer le papier coincé. 11 Empileur papier Aligne les feuilles à relier et délivre les livrets reliés dans le magasin livret. 12 Section de reliure Relie un ensemble de feuilles avec une pièce de reliure. Y jeter un coup d'oeil en cas de problème sur les pièces de reliure. ineo 1052/1250 4-51 4.2 Mise sous tension/hors tension 4 4.2 Mise sous tension/hors tension Cette machine est équipée de deux interrupteurs, l'interrupteur principal et l'interrupteur secondaire. 4.2.1 Mise sous tension 1 Mettez l'interrupteur principal en position ON (Marche). L'interrupteur principal se trouve à l'intérieur de la machine. Il est accessible en ouvrant d'abord la porte avant, puis la porte gauche de la machine. Lorsque l'interrupteur principal est placé en position ON (Marche), le voyant d'alimentation situé sur le panneau de contrôle s'allume en rouge. REMARQUE L'interrupteur principal doit normalement rester en position ON (Marche). Dans les conditions habituelles d'utilisation, veillez à ne pas utiliser l'interrupteur principal pour éteindre/allumer la machine. Toutefois, si vous définissez le temps de transition dans [Réglage ERP] ou si vous réglez le [Réglage extinction auto] sur Activé, l'interrupteur principal passe automatiquement en position d'arrêt. Dans ces cas, mettez manuellement l'interrupteur principal en position ON (Marche). À propos du [Réglage ErP] et du [Réglage extinction auto], voir page 12-51. 2 Mettez l'interrupteur secondaire en position ON (Marche) L'interrupteur secondaire se trouve sur la partie avant de la machine. Lorsque l'interrupteur auxiliaire est placé en position ON (Marche), le voyant d'alimentation situé sur le panneau de contrôle s'allume alors en vert. 3 L'écran de sortie de veille et l'écran de préchauffage s'affichent. L'écran de sortie de veille est affiché pendant quelques secondes, suivi de l'écran Machine avec des indications de préchauffage. Le préchauffage dure environ 7 minutes. % Pendant le préchauffage de la machine, la barre de progression affichée indique l'état du préchauffage. % Si le Thermorelieur PB-503 est installé sur la machine et lorsque le chauffage du thermorelieur est allumé, une barre de progression est affichée et indique l'état du préchauffage. Pour plus de détails, voir page 6-122. Activé Désactivé Activé Désactivé 4 Mise sous tension/hors tension 4-52 ineo 1052/1250 4.2 % La pression de l'onglet [COPIER] à l'écran pendant le préchauffage affiche l'écran Copie. Lorsque le message [Disponible pour tâche suivante] apparaît sur l'écran Copie, vous pouvez positionner et numériser les originaux pendant que la machine chauffe, ainsi la machine devrait commencer à imprimer immédiatement après la fin du préchauffage. 4 Le message [Disponible] apparaît sur l'écran Machine pour indiquer que l'impression d'un travail est désormais possible. % Si un compteur clé ou une carte de copie doit être inséré, suivez les instructions qui s'affichent à l'écran. ineo 1052/1250 4-53 4.2 Mise sous tension/hors tension 4 4.2.2 Mise hors tension REMARQUE L'interrupteur principal doit normalement rester en position ON (Marche). Dans les conditions habituelles d'utilisation, veillez à ne pas utiliser l'interrupteur principal pour éteindre/allumer la machine. Veillez à ne pas éteindre l'interrupteur principal avant d'éteindre l'interrupteur secondaire. Veillez à ne pas éteindre l'interrupteur principal pendant que les messages suivants sont affichés après l'extinction de l'interrupteur secondaire. [Refroidissement en cours/Après refroidissement mettre hors tension] [Extinction en cours en cours/Veuillez ne pas couper l'alim principale] Si l'interrupteur principal est mis sur Arrêt alors que ces messages sont affichés, cela peut causer de graves problèmes sur la machine, notamment en termes de fixation toner. Lorsque vous mettez l'interrupteur principal sur OFF (Arrêt), assurez-vous d'attendre au moins 10 secondes avant de remettre l'interrupteur principal en position ON (Marche). Si l'interrupteur principal est remis sur la position ON (Marche) dans les 10 secondes ou moins, la machine pourrait ne pas fonctionner correctement. 1 Mettez l'interrupteur secondaire en position OFF (Arrêt) L'interrupteur secondaire se trouve sur la partie avant de la machine. L'écran tactile et tous les voyants du panneau de contrôle s'éteindront, sauf le voyant d'alimentation qui passera du vert au rouge. % Quand la machine est contrôlée par la fonction Programmateur hebdomadaire, ne mettez pas l'interrupteur secondaire en position OFF (Arrêt). Mettre l'interrupteur secondaire en position OFF (Arrêt) désactivera la fonction Programmateur hebdomadaire. 2 Éteignez l'interrupteur principal L'interrupteur principal se trouve à l'intérieur de la machine. Il est accessible en ouvrant d'abord la porte avant, puis la porte gauche de la machine. Activé Désactivé Activé Désactivé 4 Mise sous tension/hors tension 4-54 ineo 1052/1250 4.2 4.2.3 Mise automatique de l'interrupteur principal sur OFF (Arrêt) L'interrupteur principal peut passer automatiquement en position OFF (Arrêt) sur la machine. Les deux réglages suivants sont disponibles. Ces réglages sont disponibles dans le menu Utilitaire et doivent être effectués par l'administrateur. Demandez à votre administrateur l'heure à laquelle l'interrupteur principal est éteint. dPour info Pour plus de détails sur le réglage, voir page 12-50. Vous pouvez mettre l'interrupteur principal sur marche, même après arrêt automatique de la machine. dPour info Voir page 4-51 les modalités de mise en position de marche de l'interrupteur principal. Options de réglage Description Réglage extinction auto Met l'interrupteur principal automatiquement sur OFF (Arrêt) après la mise sur arrêt de l'interrupteur secondaire et le refroidissement complet de la machine. Réglage ERP Met automatiquement l'interrupteur principal sur OFF (Arrêt) après maintien pendant un temps donné des conditions suivantes de la machine avec l'interrupteur principal conservé sur ON (Marche) : • l'interrupteur secondaire est éteint. • La fonction Éco énergie est activée. • La fonction Veille est activée. Une des options suivantes est sélectionnée comme heure de mise sur arrêt de l'interrupteur principal : Ne pas activer, 12 heures, 24 heures, 36 heures, 48 heures, 60 heures, 72 heures. ineo 1052/1250 4-55 4.2 Mise sous tension/hors tension 4 4.2.4 Reprise d'une tâche le lendemain Si l'interrupteur secondaire est mis sur arrêt pendant l'exécution d'une tâche d'impression ou en présence de tâches mises en réserve/en suspens, un des deux messages suivants s'affiche. - En cas de reprise possible des tâches le lendemain : [Des tâches ont été suspendues ou mise en réserve./Si mise hors tension, ces tâches seront supprimées.] - En cas de reprise impossible des tâches le lendemain : [Cette situation empêche de reprendre la tâche le lendemain/Pour continuer la tâche, restaurer l'alimentation secondaire] Agissez en fonction du message affiché. Pour reprendre le lendemain une tâche dont la reprise est possible : 1 Pour enregistrer la tâche en réserve/suspendue sur le disque dur de la machine, appuyez sur [OFF après sauveg. données]. 2 L'interrupteur secondaire est mis sur arrêt automatiquement, une fois l'enregistrement des données terminé. Lorsque l'interrupteur secondaire est remis sur marche, les données à imprimer sont disponibles sur le disque dur. % Pour mettre hors tension sans enregistrer les données, appuyez sur [Arrêt tâche] à l'écran. Il s'ensuit l'annulation du processus d'enregistrement des données et la mise hors tension. La tâche ne peut plus être imprimée. 4 Mise sous tension/hors tension 4-56 ineo 1052/1250 4.2 Pour abandonner une tâche dont la reprise le lendemain est possible : 1 Appuyez sur [Hors tension]. 2 Les données ne sont pas enregistrées et la mise hors tension est automatique. ineo 1052/1250 4-57 4.2 Mise sous tension/hors tension 4 Pour poursuivre l'impression d'une tâche dont la reprise ultérieure est impossible : 1 Mettez l'interrupteur secondaire sur marche pour continuer l'impression. 2 Lorsque la tâche est terminée, remettez l'interrupteur secondaire sur arrêt. Pour reprendre le lendemain une tâche dont la reprise ultérieure est impossible : Si le message affiché indique que la tâche ne peut être reprise le lendemain mais que la sortie doit se poursuivre, vous pouvez enregistrer les données de sortie et poursuivre la tâche le lendemain. 1 Pour ce faire, appuyez sur la touche [Imprime 1 jeu] dans le dialogue affiché en appuyant sur Arrêt du panneau de contrôle, le cas échéant. 4 Mise sous tension/hors tension 4-58 ineo 1052/1250 4.2 Lorsque l'impression du jeu est terminé et que la machine s'arrête, la touche [Imprime 1 jeu] disparaît du dialogue. 2 Mettez l'interrupteur secondaire sur arrêt. 3 Voir page 4-55 pour la procédure à suivre. ineo 1052/1250 4-59 4.3 Retour automatique aux conditions initiales de la machine : Réinitialisation auto 4 4.3 Retour automatique aux conditions initiales de la machine : Réinitialisation auto À l'issue d'une certaine période d'inactivité, la machine restaure automatiquement l'écran spécifié comme écran par défaut. Cette fonction s'appelle Réinitialisation auto. Lorsque la Réinitialisation auto est activée, la machine rétablit non seulement l'écran par défaut mais aussi les conditions de copie initiales. Définir un délai En sortie d'usine, la fonction Réinitialisation auto est programmée pour intervenir au bout d'une minute d'inactivité de la machine. Le délai d'activation de la Réinitialisation auto peut être sélectionné sur l'écran Menu Utilitaire. Vous pouvez aussi choisir de désactiver cette fonction. Sélectionner l'écran par défaut L'écran Machine est sélectionné par défaut en usine. L'écran par défaut peut être l'écran Machine, l'écran Liste des tâches actives/en suspens et l'écran Planificateur de l'écran Liste tâches ainsi que l'écran Copie. dPour info Les conditions de copie initiales peuvent être spécifiées sur l'écran Mode copie accessible depuis l'écran Menu Utilitaire. Pour plus de détails, voir page 12-24. Pour la sélection du délai avant activation de la réinitialisation auto ou pour la sélection de l'écran par défaut, voir page 12-24. Réinitialisation 4 manuelle de la machine : Réinitialisation 4-60 ineo 1052/1250 4.4 4.4 Réinitialisation manuelle de la machine : Réinitialisation Si vous appuyez sur Auto sur le panneau de contrôle, la machine efface toutes les conditions de copie spécifiées jusqu'ici et rétablit des réglages arbitraires. Cette fonction s'appelle Réinitialisation. Vous avez la possibilité de choisir entre Tout auto, Initial ou conditions de copie programmées dans Mode mémoire [30]. Initial est sélectionné par défaut en usine. Conditions de copie spécifiées comme Tout auto Les paramètres Tout Auto ne sont pas modifiables à l'exception du paramètre Finition. - Caracterist.orig : Standard - Réglage qualité : Standard - Agrand./Réduction : 1,000 - Recto-verso : 1->1 - Applications : Aucune - Finition : sélection disponible dans le mode Utilitaire - PapierAuto : Activé - Rotation : Activé Conditions de copie spécifiées sous Initial Il s'agit des conditions de copie initiales spécifiées sur l'écran Mode copie accessible depuis l'écran Menu Utilitaire. Conditions de copie programmées dans Programmes [30] Il s'agit des conditions de copie programmées en appuyant sur Programmes sur le panneau de contrôle. dPour info À propos des conditions de copie spécifiées sous Initial, voir "12 Menu Utilitaire". À propos des conditions de copie spécifiées sous les réglages Tout auto ou Configuration commune des trois réglages en option, voir "12 Menu Utilitaire". ineo 1052/1250 4-61 4.5 Utilisation de la machine quand le voyant Éco énergie est allumé 4 4.5 Utilisation de la machine quand le voyant Éco énergie est allumé Si le voyant Éco énergie est allumé, c'est que la machine est inactive en raison de la fonction Éco énergie ou Programmateur hebdomadaire. Lorsque l'une ou l'autre de ces fonctions est activée, il n'est pas possible d'utiliser la machine. 4.5.1 Activation de la machine % Appuyez sur n'importe quelle touche du panneau de contrôle. % Si la machine ne réagit pas après une pression sur n'importe quelle touche du panneau de contrôle, appuyez sur Éco énergie. Si la fonction Éco énergie a été activée, la machine deviendra disponible pour les opérations d'impression. Si Programmateur hebdomadaire a été activé, l'écran Machine s'affiche avec le message [Mode Interruption Programmateur/Veuillez entrer le code] dans la zone des messages. L'introduction d'accès vous permet d'utiliser la machine temporairement. dPour info La fonction Éco énergie a deux modes : Veille et Éco énergie (Extinction Auto). Pour plus de détails, voir la description suivante. La fonction Éco énergie peut aussi être activée manuellement. Pour plus de détails, voir page 4-63. 4 Utilisation de la machine quand le voyant Éco énergie est allumé 4-62 ineo 1052/1250 4.5 4.5.2 Économie automatique d'énergie : Veille La fonction Veille économise l'énergie en réduisant la consommation de courant. Cette fonction est automatiquement activée à l'issue d'une période d'inactivité machine spécifiée (1 minute comme réglage d'usine), avec le voyant Éco énergie allumé, l'écran tactile éteint, et tous les autres voyants à l'exception du voyant Départ du panneau de contrôle éteints. Le voyant Départ allumera en rouge tandis que le voyant d'alimentation reste allumé en vert. Si le même délai d'inactivité est spécifié pour la fonction Veille et pour la fonction Éco énergie (Extinction Auto), l'alimentation de la machine sera coupée. L'écran tactile ne s'éteindra pas lorsque l'écran d'un travail d'impression recto-verso ou l'écran Position du bourrage est affiché. dPour info L'écran Menu Utilitaire permet de modifier le délai d'activation défini de la fonction Veille (1 minute, 3 minutes, 5 minutes, 10 minutes, 15 minutes, 30 minutes, 60 minutes, 90 minutes, 120 minutes ou 240 minutes). Pour plus de détails, voir "12 Menu Utilitaire". Pour quitter le mode Veille % Appuyez sur une touche quelconque de l'écran tactile ou du panneau de contrôle. La machine redevient disponible pour l'impression. 4.5.3 Économie automatique de l'énergie : Éco énergie (Extinction Auto) L'Éco énergie (Extinction Auto) permet d'économiser encore davantage l'énergie en réduisant la consommation de courant. Cette fonction est activée automatiquement à l'issue d'une période spécifiée (défaut usine de 15 minutes) d'inactivité de la machine : le voyant Éco énergie est allumé et tous les autres voyants de l'écran tactile et du panneau de contrôle sont éteints. Le voyant d'alimentation reste allumé en vert. dPour info L'écran Menu Utilitaire permet de désactiver la fonction Éco énergie (Extinction Auto) ou de modifier le délai spécifié (Arrêt, 1 minute, 3 minutes, 5 minutes, 15 minutes, 30 minutes, 60 minutes, 90 minutes, 120 minutes ou 240 minutes). Pour plus de détails, voir "12 Menu Utilitaire". Pour quitter le mode Éco énergie (Extinction Auto) % Appuyez sur Éco énergie sur le panneau de contrôle. La machine redevient disponible pour l'impression. ineo 1052/1250 4-63 4.5 Utilisation de la machine quand le voyant Éco énergie est allumé 4 4.5.4 Économie manuelle d'énergie Suivez la procédure ci-dessous pour activer manuellement la fonction Conso. d'énergie (Veille ou Éco énergie). 1 Tenez la touche Éco énergie du panneau de contrôle enfoncée pour plus d'une seconde. Le message suivant s'affiche. Utilisation du mode Éco énergie : [Passage en mode Éco dans 10 s/Actionner tche matériel. pr annuler] Utilisation du mode Veille : [Passage en veille dans 10 secondes/Actionner tche matériel. pr annuler] 2 La fonction Éco énergie est activée. Le voyant Éco énergie s'allume et l'écran tactile s'éteint. Veillez à tenir la touche Éco énergie du panneau de contrôle enfoncée pendant plus d'une seconde, sinon la fonction Éco énergie ne sera pas activée et le message suivant ne sera pas affiché. [Appuyer sur [Éco énergie] 1 seconde et relâcher pour passer en éco d'énergie] [Appuyer sur [Éco énergie] pendant plus de 1 seconde pour passer en veille] dPour info Initialement la machine est réglée pour l'activation manuelle du mode Eco. énergie. À la place, l'écran Menu Utilitaire permet d'activer manuellement le mode Veille. Pour plus de détails, voir "12 Menu Utilitaire". 4.5.5 Limiter l'utilisation de la machine : Programmateur hebdomadaire La fonction Programmateur hebdomadaire éteint et rallume la machine aux horaires spécifiés par l'administrateur. Quand la machine est dans la condition Arrêt sous contrôle du Programmateur hebdomadaire, le voyant Éco énergie est allumé et aucune opération n'est possible sur la machine. dPour info Les réglages du Programmateur hebdomadaire figurent sur l'écran Menu Utilitaire. Pour plus de détails, voir "12 Menu Utilitaire". Pour utiliser temporairement la machine La procédure suivante permet d'effectuer temporairement une opération sur la machine. (Interruption Programmateur) 1 Appuyez sur Éco énergie sur le panneau de contrôle. L'écran Machine s'affiche avec le message ci-dessous. [Programmateur : Entrer le code **** pour mettre sous tension] % Si le message [Entrer la durée de la mise sous tension/0 heure(s) 05 minute(s)] s'affiche, passez à l'étape 3. % L'alimentation de la machine sera automatiquement coupée 5 minutes après ce moment précis si aucune opération n'est effectuée. 2 Entrez le code d'interruption programmateur, et appuyez sur Départ sur le panneau de contrôle. Saisir un code d'Interruption programmateur de 4 chiffres sur le pavé numérique du panneau de contrôle, puis appuyez sur Départ. [Programmateur : Entrer le code **** pour mettre sous tension] % Le code Interruption Programmateur (code hors horaires bureau) est spécifié dans le réglage Administrateur du menu Utilitaire. Demandez le code Interruption programmateur spécifié à votre administrateur. % Si vous entrez un code erroné, continuez en introduisant les 4 chiffres corrects du code. 4 Utilisation de la machine quand le voyant Éco énergie est allumé 4-64 ineo 1052/1250 4.5 3 Définissez l'heure d'activation de l'interruption et appuyez sur Départ sur le panneau de contrôle. Entrez une heure sur un chiffre (de 0 à 9) sur le pavé numérique du panneau de contrôle, et appuyez sur Départ. [Entrer la durée de la mise sous tension/3 heure(s) 05 minute(s)] 4 Définissez la minute d'activation de l'interruption et appuyez sur Départ sur le panneau de contrôle. Entrez une minute sur deux chiffres (de 0 à 59) sur le pavé numérique du panneau de contrôle, et appuyez sur Départ. [Entrer la durée de la mise sous tension/3 heure(s) 30 minute(s)] L'utilisation de la machine est désormais possible, le message [Disponible] étant affiché à l'écran, jusqu'à ce que le temps imparti soit écoulé. % Pour spécifier une minute d'un seul chiffre, entrez d'abord [0] pour compléter le champ de deux chiffres. Il n'est cependant pas possible de spécifier un délai inférieur à 5 minutes. Entrer 0 pour l'heure et un nombre inférieur à 5 pour les minutes reviendra à entrer 5. De même, un nombre de minutes supérieur à 60 n'est pas possible. 5 Lorsque l'utilisation de la machine est terminée dans le délai imparti, tenez la touche Éco énergie du panneau de contrôle enfoncée pendant plus d'une seconde. La machine revient à l'état Arrêt. ineo 1052/1250 4-65 4.6 Effectuer l'Authentification utilisateur/Configuration compte 4 4.6 Effectuer l'Authentification utilisateur/Configuration compte La configuration de la machine peut inclure l'authentification utilisateur par la saisie d'un ou plusieurs éléments d'authentification utilisateur (nom utilisateur et code utilisateur) et d'éléments d'authentification compte (nom de compte et code de compte) spécifiés par l'administrateur, pour avoir accès aux fonctions suivantes. La configuration de la machine permet aussi l'authentification de l'utilisateur par simple passage de la carte IC au-dessus de l'Unité d'authentification (type de carte IC) AU-201. Cette section décrit les modalités d'authentification utilisateur/compte par la saisie d'un code utilisateur/compte ainsi que d'authentification utilisateur à l'aide d'une carte IC. dPour info Pour plus de détails sur les réglages Authentification utilisateur/Paramétrage des accès, voir "12 Menu Utilitaire". dPour info Voir page 4-68 pour plus de détails sur l'authentification utilisateur à l'aide d'une carte IC. De même contactez votre technicien SAV pour l'utilisation de l'Unité d'authentification (type de carte IC) AU-201. 4.6.1 Authentification par code utilisateur/compte Cette section décrit les modalités d'authentification utilisateur par la saisie d'un nom d'utilisateur et d'un code ainsi que d'authentification de compte par la saisie d'un nom et code de compte. 0 Les utilisateurs qui disposent d'un nom d'utilisateur et d'un code peuvent utiliser la machine, y compris les fonctions configurées par l'administrateur et l'impression à hauteur des limites spécifiées par l'administrateur. 0 Les utilisateurs qui disposent d'un nom de compte et d'un code peuvent utiliser la machine, y compris les fonctions configurées par l'administrateur et l'impression à hauteur des limites spécifiées par l'administrateur. 0 L'authentification utilisateur ou l'authentification de compte ou bien les deux peuvent être demandées à l'utilisateur en fonction de la configuration établie par l'administrateur. 0 Si les utilisateurs publics sont autorisés sur la machine, l'accès utilisateur public s'effectue en appuyant sur [Utilisateur public] dans la partie supérieure droite de l'écran d'authentification. L'administrateur spécifie les fonctions disponibles aux utilisateurs publics ainsi que la limite haute de sortie. 0 La liste des noms d'utilisateurs enregistrés est disponible si la touche [Liste des utilisateurs] est affichée à l'écran. 0 Les noms des comptes enregistrés peuvent être répertoriés si la [Liste des comptes] est affichée à l'écran. 0 Si la fonction Réinitialisation est activée, ou si l'on appuie sur Code sur le panneau de contrôle, l'écran d'authentification réapparaît même si vous êtes en train de travailler sur les écrans qui nécessitent les coordonnées correctes. 0 Lorsque le mode Sécurité renforcée est activé sur la machine, l'écran d'authentification s'affiche chaque fois qu'un utilisateur tente d'utiliser les fonctions qui nécessitent une authentification. Dans ce cas, les mots de passe de moins de 8 caractères alphanumériques/symboles deviennent non valides et ne peuvent pas être authentifiés. Si vous saisissez un nom d'utilisateur ou un code incorrect, vous devez attendre 5 secondes avant de réessayer. La [Liste des utilisateurs] ou la [Liste des comptes] disparaît. 0 Les noms d'utilisateur peuvent comporter un maximum de 64 caractères alphanumériques et symboles, les mots de passe utilisateur un maximum de 64 caractères alphanumériques. Les noms de compte et les mots de passe de compte peuvent quant à eux comporter 8 caractères alphanumériques maximum. Nom Description Copier Fonctions disponibles en appuyant sur l'onglet [COPIER] Numéris. Fonctions disponibles en appuyant sur l'onglet [NUMÉRISER] Imprimer Fonctions d'impression Rappeler Fonctions disponibles en appuyant sur l'onglet [RAPPELER] ou [ENREGISTRER] 4 Effectuer l'Authentification utilisateur/Configuration compte 4-66 ineo 1052/1250 4.6 1 Entrez le nom d'utilisateur, le code utilisateur, le nom de compte et/ou le code compte, s'il y a lieu. Un des écrans suivants s'affiche. Veuillez suivre les instructions consignées sur chaque écran. % L'écran affiché ci-dessous nécessite la saisie d'un nom d'utilisateur et d'un code utilisateur. % Si la touche [Liste des utilisateurs] est affichée à l'écran, appuyez dessus pour afficher la liste des utilisateurs. Sélectionnez la touche souhaitée dans la liste et appuyez sur [OK] ; le nom d'utilisateur sélectionné est affiché à droite de [Nom de l'utilisateur] sur l'écran d'authentification utilisateur. % L'authentification est effectuée en entrant seulement un nom d'utilisateur si un code utilisateur n'est pas défini pour cet utilisateur. % Si l'administrateur a activé la fonction [Connexion auth. compte/util.], vous ne pouvez pas être authentifié en entrant seulement un nom d'utilisateur et un code à moins d'avoir au préalable avoir enregistré votre compte conjointement. % L'écran affiché ci-dessous nécessite la saisie d'un code de compte associé à un nom de compte. ineo 1052/1250 4-67 4.6 Effectuer l'Authentification utilisateur/Configuration compte 4 % L'écran affiché ci-dessous nécessite la saisie d'un nom de compte et d'un code associé à ce nom de compte. % Si la touche [Liste des comptes] est affichée à l'écran, appuyez dessus pour afficher la liste des comptes. Sélectionnez la touche souhaitée dans la liste et appuyez sur [OK] ; le nom de compte sélectionné est affiché à droite de [Nom de compte] sur l'écran d'authentification de compte. % L'écran affiché ci-dessous nécessite la saisie d'un nom d'utilisateur, d'un code utilisateur, d'un nom de compte et d'un code de compte. % Appuyez sur [Utilisateur public], si la touche est affichée dans la partie supérieure droite de l'écran comme illustré ci-dessous. Vous êtes autorisé(e) à utiliser la machine sans aucune saisie ou utilisation de carte IC d'authentification. 4 Effectuer l'Authentification utilisateur/Configuration compte 4-68 ineo 1052/1250 4.6 2 Appuyez sur [OK] ou sur Code sur le panneau de contrôle. L'écran auquel vous voulez accéder s'affiche. % Le message [Crédit copies dépassé] peut s'afficher et la machine peut devenir indisponible. Veuillez contacter votre administrateur. % Même si l'authentification a réussi, certaines des fonctions [Copier], [Numéris.], [Imprim.], [Rappeler] peuvent ne pas être autorisées par l'administrateur. Veuillez contacter votre administrateur. 3 Lancez l'opération. Vous pouvez utiliser la machine normalement. % Lorsque la fonction Réinitialisation est activée, l'écran Machine s'affiche. Vous devez vous identifier à nouveau pour accéder à des écrans qui nécessitent une identification. 4 Lorsque l'opération sur la machine est terminée, appuyez sur Code sur le panneau de contrôle. L'écran d'authentification s'affiche et aucune autre opération n'est acceptée. 4.6.2 Authentification utilisateur par carte IC Cette section décrit les modalités d'authentification à l'aide d'une carte IC. 0 La configuration de la machine permet l'authentification d'un utilisateur en passant une carte IC sur l'Unité d'authentification (type de carte IC) AU-201. Dans ce cas, la configuration peut aussi exiger la saisie d'un mot de passe utilisateur d'authentification. 0 Si les utilisateurs publics sont autorisés sur la machine, l'accès utilisateur public s'effectue en appuyant sur [Utilisateur public] dans la partie supérieure droite de l'écran d'authentification. L'administrateur spécifie les fonctions disponibles aux utilisateurs publics ainsi que la limite haute de sortie. 0 Lorsque la configuration de la machine prévoit l'authentification utilisateur à l'aide d'une carte IC, la fonction Authentification compte est désactivée. 0 Si vous débranchez le câble USB de l'Unité d'authentification (type de carte IC) AU-201 de la machine pendant l'enregistrement des données d'authentification, la touche [Périphériques Auth.] est estompée sur l'écran d'authentification pour indiquer l'indisponibilité. Lorsque le câble USB de l'Unité d'authentification (type de carte IC) AU-201 est connecté au port USB de la machine, il est automatiquement reconnu. 0 Il est possible d'enregistrer une carte IC par utilisateur. Un utilisateur ne peut pas enregistrer plusieurs cartes IC. Pour enregistrer une nouvelle carte IC pour un utilisateur précédemment enregistré, vous devez écraser les informations de carte IC existantes. 0 Cinq types de carte IC sont disponibles, à savoir FeliCa, Type A, SSFC, FCF et FCF (campus) ; toutefois la configuration de la machine reconnaît uniquement un type. Si l'administrateur change le type de carte à reconnaître, la machine n'accepte plus les cartes IC utilisées précédemment. 0 Plusieurs utilisateurs ne peuvent pas être enregistrés sous la même carte IC. 0 Les informations enregistrées sur la carte IC peuvent être supprimées. 1 Sélectionnez [Périphérique Auth]. ineo 1052/1250 4-69 4.6 Effectuer l'Authentification utilisateur/Configuration compte 4 % Si la touche [Code] apparaît en clair, appuyez sur [Code]. % Appuyez sur [Utilisateur public], si la touche est affichée dans la partie supérieure droite de l'écran comme illustré ci-dessous. Vous êtes autorisé(e) à utiliser la machine sans aucune saisie ou utilisation de carte IC d'authentification. 4 Effectuer l'Authentification utilisateur/Configuration compte 4-70 ineo 1052/1250 4.6 2 Appuyez sur [OK] ou sur Code sur le panneau de contrôle. L'écran auquel vous voulez accéder s'affiche. % Le message [Crédit copies dépassé] peut s'afficher et la machine peut devenir indisponible. Veuillez contacter votre administrateur. % Même si l'authentification a réussi, certaines des fonctions [Copier], [Numéris.], [Imprim.] et [Rappeler] peuvent ne pas être autorisées par l'administrateur. Veuillez contacter votre administrateur. 3 Lancez l'opération. Vous pouvez utiliser la machine normalement. % Lorsque la fonction Réinitialisation est activée, l'écran Machine s'affiche. Vous devez vous identifier à nouveau pour accéder à des écrans qui nécessitent une identification. 4 Lorsque l'opération sur la machine est terminée, appuyez sur Code sur le panneau de contrôle. L'écran d'authentification s'affiche et aucune autre opération n'est acceptée. 4.6.3 Authentification utilisateur sur un serveur externe Cette section décrit les modalités d'authentification sur un serveur externe. 0 Si les utilisateurs publics sont autorisés sur la machine, l'accès utilisateur public s'effectue en appuyant sur [Utilisateur public] dans la partie supérieure droite de l'écran d'authentification. L'administrateur spécifie les fonctions disponibles aux utilisateurs publics ainsi que la limite haute de sortie. 0 L'administrateur configure le serveur externe d'authentification. Contactez l'administrateur pour plus de détails. 0 Vous ne pouvez pas utiliser une carte IC d'authentification sur un serveur externe. 1 Vérifiez le nom du serveur affiché à droite de [Nom du serveur] et appuyez sur [Nom du serveur] si ce nom n'est pas celui qui donne accès l'écran d'authentification. ineo 1052/1250 4-71 4.6 Effectuer l'Authentification utilisateur/Configuration compte 4 2 Sélectionnez la touche du serveur externe souhaité, et appuyez sur [OK]. 3 Entrez un nom d'utilisateur et un code. % Appuyez sur [Utilisateur public], si la touche est affichée dans la partie supérieure droite de l'écran comme illustré ci-dessous. Le serveur externe est accessible sans autre entrée requise d'authentification. 4 Appuyez sur [OK] ou sur Code sur le panneau de contrôle. L'écran auquel vous voulez accéder s'affiche. % Le message [Crédit copies dépassé] peut s'afficher et la machine peut devenir indisponible. Veuillez contacter votre administrateur. % Même si l'authentification a réussi, certaines des fonctions [Copier], [Numéris.], [Imprim.] et [Rappeler] peuvent ne pas être autorisées par l'administrateur. Veuillez contacter votre administrateur. 5 Lancez l'opération. Vous pouvez utiliser la machine normalement. % Lorsque la fonction Réinitialisation est activée, l'écran Machine s'affiche. Vous devez vous identifier à nouveau pour accéder à des écrans qui nécessitent une identification. 6 Lorsque l'opération sur la machine est terminée, appuyez sur Code sur le panneau de contrôle. L'écran d'authentification s'affiche et aucune autre opération n'est acceptée. 4 Affichage du Guide d'utilisation : Message d'aide 4-72 ineo 1052/1250 4.7 4.7 Affichage du Guide d'utilisation : Message d'aide Cette fonction présente dans la zone des messages des informations sur l'écran actuellement affiché, par exemple des instructions d'utilisation ou des remarques. Lorsque l'écran Machine est sélectionné, il affiche les procédures d'entretien suivantes : rajout de toner, de papier, d'agrafes et de pastilles de colle ; remplacement d'un réservoir de toner usagé ; remplacement d'un réservoir d'eau ; et élimination des déchets d'agrafage, de perforation et de massicotage. Message d'aide concernant les instructions d'utilisation 1 Sélectionnez l'écran voulu. 2 Appuyez sur [ ] dans le coin supérieur droit de l'écran, ou appuyez sur Aide sur le panneau de contrôle. Le message d'aide apparaît dans la partie supérieure de l'écran. 3 Prenez connaissance du message pour vérifier la procédure opératoire ou les remarques relatives à l'écran actuellement affiché. % Si l'écran actuel ne comporte aucune remarque, la touche [ ] dans le coin supérieur droit de l'écran apparaît estompée. Dans ce cas, une pression sur [ ] à l'écran ou sur Aide sur le panneau de contrôle n'affichera pas de message d'aide. 4 Passez à l'opération suivante. % Cela n'a aucune conséquence de passer à l'opération suivante pendant que le message d'aide est affiché à l'écran. % Pour effacer le message d'aide, appuyez sur [ ] à l'écran ou sur Aide sur le panneau de contrôle. ineo 1052/1250 4-73 4.7 Affichage du Guide d'utilisation : Message d'aide 4 Message d'aide pour chargement/rebut 1 Appuyez sur l'onglet [MACHINE] pour afficher l'écran Machine. 2 Appuyez sur [ ] sur l'écran Machine, ou appuyez sur Aide sur le panneau de contrôle. 3 Appuyez sur [Consomm./Déchets] dans le coin inférieur droit de la zone du message d'aide. 4 Appuyez sur l'onglet désiré pour vérifier la procédure de chargement/rebut. % La procédure de chargement/rebut est décrite dans une autre section de ce manuel. 4 Affichage du Guide d'utilisation : Message d'aide 4-74 ineo 1052/1250 4.7 5 Passez à l'opération suivante. % Cela n'a aucune conséquence de passer à l'opération suivante pendant que le message d'aide est affiché à l'écran. % Pour effacer le message d'aide, appuyez sur [ ] à l'écran ou sur Aide sur le panneau de contrôle. ineo 1052/1250 4-75 4.8 Régler le temps de réponse des touches de l'écran tactile : Accessibilité 4 4.8 Régler le temps de réponse des touches de l'écran tactile : Accessibilité Cette machine permet de définir à l'avance un délai spécifique entre une pression sur une touche de l'écran tactile et la réponse de la machine. Appuyez sur Accessibilité sur le panneau de contrôle pour sélectionner cet intervalle, de manière à ce que la machine ne réagisse à la pression sur une touche de l'écran tactile que lorsque cette touche a été maintenue enfoncée pendant la durée spécifiée. Cette fonction est utile aux handicapés moteurs qui peuvent avoir des difficultés à appuyer sur les touches avec la précision voulue. dPour info C'est dans l'écran Menu Utilitaire que se trouvent les réglages du temps de réponse. Pour plus de détails, voir "12 Menu Utilitaire". 0 Le temps de réponse peut être réglé sur l'une des options suivantes : Normal, 0,5 seconde, 1 seconde, 2 secondes, et 3 secondes. 1 Appuyez sur Accessibilité sur le panneau de contrôle. Le voyant Accessibilité s'allume en vert pour indiquer que le temps de réponse voulu est réglé sur la machine. % Si le réglage du temps de réponse qui a été sélectionné est [Normal], une pression sur la touche Accessibilité n'aura aucun effet sur le temps de réponse. 2 Pour désactiver cette fonction, maintenez la pression sur Accessibilité sur le panneau de contrôle pendant plus d'une seconde. Le voyant Accessibilité s'éteint, et le temps de réponse normal sera restauré pour les touches de l'écran tactile. 4 Régler le temps de réponse des touches de l'écran tactile : Accessibilité 4-76 ineo 1052/1250 4.8 5 Informations relatives au papier et aux originaux ineo 1052/1250 5-3 5.1 Informations sur le papier 5 5 Informations relatives au papier et aux originaux 5.1 Informations sur le papier Cette machine est équipée des magasins suivants destinés à recevoir le papier. - Bacs principaux (Magasins 1 et 2) - Unité d'alimentation papier PF-703* (Magasins 3 à 8) - Unité d'alimentation papier PF-706 (Magasins 3 à 8) - Module d'insertion grande capacité MI-PFU (MI-PFU1 à MI-PFU3) - Thermorelieur PB-503 (bac couverture) - Module d'insertion (fourni de série dans l'Unité de pliage FD-503) - Module d'insertion PI-502 (Kit de montage MK-732) (intégré dans l'Unité de finition FS-532 en option) *: Vous pouvez spécifier Enveloppe comme type de papier de l'Unité d'alimentation papier PF-703. Contactez votre technicien SAV si nécessaire. En outre, les matériels suivants sont fournis afin d'assurer le transport, le traitement et la sortie du papier. - Chargeur auto (Unité recto-verso) (intégrée de série dans la machine) - Unité de finition FS-532 - Unité de perforation PK-522 (intégré dans l'Unité de finition FS-532 en option) - Piqueuse à cheval SD-510 (intégrée dans l'Unité de finition FS-532 en option) - Unité de pliage FD-503 - Empileur grande capacité LS-505 - Piqueuse à cheval SD-506 - Thermorelieur PB-503 - Unité relais RU-509 - Unité relais RU-510 - Perforeuse multiple GP-501 - Relieur automatique à anneaux GP-502 5.1.1 Grammage du papier REMARQUE Respectez le grammage spécifié pour chaque magasin. Sinon, la qualité d'impression peut s'en ressentir ou un incident machine peut se produire. Magasins papier Poids Bacs principaux (Magasin 1 et Magasin 2) 40 à 300 g/m2 (245 à 300 g/m2 limités à certains types de papier) Certains types de papier ne présentent pas la capacité à être introduits ou les performances d'impression que leurs spécifications annoncent, même si leur grammage est dans la plage cidessus. Unité d'alimentation papier PF-703 (Magasins 3 à 8) Magasins 3, 5, 6, 8 : 40 à 300 g/m2 Magasins 4, 7 : 40 à 350 g/m2 Unité d'alimentation papier PF-706 (Magasins 3 à 8) Magasins 3, 5, 6, 8 : 40 à 300 g/m2 Magasins 4, 7 : 40 à 350 g/m2 Module d'insertion grande capacité MI-PFU (MI-PFU1 à 3) MI-PFU1, MI-PFU3 : 40 à 300 g/m2 MI-PFU2 : 40 à 350 g/m2 Bac couvertures du Thermorelieur PB-503 82 à 216 g/m2 Module d'insertion (installé dans l'Unité de pliage FD-503) 75 à 216 g/m2 Module d'insertion PI-502 (Kit de montage MK-732) (intégré dans l'Unité de finition FS-532 en option) 50 à 200 g/m2 5 Informations sur le papier 5-4 ineo 1052/1250 5.1 dPour info Le réglage ou l'enregistrement ou la suppression du papier à spécifier pour chaque magasin papier est disponible dans le réglage Papier de l'écran Machine. Pour plus de détails, voir page 6-3. Pour utiliser temporairement un réglage papier différent du réglage par défaut pour le magasin à utiliser, modifiez le réglage du magasin dans Papier sur l'écran Copie. Le réglage de grammage papier de couverture thermoreliure est disponible sous Finition. Pour plus de détails, voir page 6-125. *1 : Avec toute option suivante raccordée à l'Unité de pliage FD-503, les jeux finis en mode de pliage Roulé, En accordéon, Économique, ou Portefeuille sont exclusivement délivrés dans le magasin Plieuse de l'Unité de pliage FD-503. Aucun autre magasin n'est disponible. Équipement Poids Unité recto-verso 40 à 300 g/m2 Unité de finition FS-532 Bac auxiliaire 40 à 350 g/m2 Bac principal 40 à 350 g/m2 Tri décalé/Groupe décalé : 50 à 350 g/m2 Agrafage : 50 à 300 g/m2 Unité de perforation PK-522 60 à 300 g/m2 Piqueuse à cheval SD-510 Magasin Pliage & Piqûre • Pliage & Piqûre Corps du document : 50 à 216 g/m2 Couverture : 50 à 300 g/m2 • Pliage en 2 multiple Corps du document : 50 à 216 g/m2 Couverture : 50 à 300 g/m2 • Multi pli en 3 Corps du document : 50 à 105 g/m2 (sans couverture) Unité de pliage FD-503 Bac plieuse*1 Roulé, En accordéon : 50 à 130 g/m2 Pliage économique, Pliage portefeuille : 50 à 91 g/m2 Bac principal 40 à 350 g/m2 Perforation : 50 à 216 g/m2, doubles feuilles perforées 50 à 91 g/m2 Pliage en deux, Pliage roulé, Pliage en accordéon, Pliage en Z : 50 à 130 g/m2 Pliage économique, Pliage portefeuille : 50 à 91 g/m2d Empileur grande capacité LS-505 Bac auxiliaire 50 à 350 g/m2 Empileur 50 à 244 g/m2 Piqueuse à cheval SD-506 Bac auxiliaire 50 à 350 g/m2 Magasin Pliage & Piqûre Pliage & piqûre, Massicot : 50 à 244 g/m2 5 feuilles en Pliage en 2 multiple : 50 à 81 g/m2 3 feuilles en Pliage en 2 multiple : 82 à 130 g/m2 2 feuilles en Pliage en 2 multiple : 131 à 244 g/m2 Magasin pliage en 3 5 feuilles en Pliage en 3 multiple : 50 à 81 g/m2 3 feuilles en Pliage en 3 multiple : 82 à 91 g/m2 Thermorelieur PB-503 Bac auxiliaire 40 à 350 g/m2 Bac Thermorelieur Corps du document : 64 à 91 g/m2 Couverture : 82 à 216 g/m2 Section de transport 40 à 350 g/m2 Unité relais RU-509 40 à 350 g/m2 Unité relais RU-510 Sortie directe : 40 à 350 g/m2 Sortie retournement 1 pli : 40 à 300 g/m2 Sortie retournement 2 plis : 40 à 256 g/m2 (40 à 216 g/m2 pour ineo 1250) Perforeuse multiple GP-501 75 à 216 g/m2 Relieur automatique à anneaux GP-502 Bac Livret Corps du document : 75 à 120 g/m2 Couverture : 163 à 216 g/m2 Papier à onglet : 163 g/m2 max. ineo 1052/1250 5-5 5.1 Informations sur le papier 5 5.1.2 Magasin papier/bac sortie Magasins papier Capacité Bacs principaux (Magasin 1 et Magasin 2) 1500 feuilles (80 g/m2) chacun Unité d'alimentation papier PF-703 Magasins 3 à 8) Magasins 3, 6 : 1300 feuilles (80 g/m2, hauteur 150 mm) chacun Magasins 4, 5, 7, 8 : 1850 feuilles (80 g/m2, hauteur 203,5 mm) chacun Unité d'alimentation papier PF-706 (Magasins 3 à 8) 2000 feuilles (80 g/m2, hauteur 217 mm) chacun Module d'insertion grande capacité MIPFU (MI-PFU1 à 3) MI-PFU1 : 1300 feuilles (80 g/m2, hauteur 150 mm) MI-PFU2, MI-PFU3 : 1850 feuilles (80 g/m2, hauteur 203,5 mm) chacune Bac couvertures du Thermorelieur PB-503 1000 pages (82 g/m2) 500 feuilles (216 g/m2) Module d'insertion (installé dans l'Unité de pliage FD-503) Magasin supérieur/inférieur : 500 feuilles (80 g/m2) chacun Module d'insertion PI-502 (Kit de montage MK-732) (intégré dans l'Unité de finition FS-532 en option) Magasin supérieur/Magasin inférieur : 200 feuilles (80 g/m2, hauteur 30 ou moins) chacun Équipement Capacité Unité recto-verso Illimité Unité de finition FS-532 Bac auxiliaire (Tri/Groupe) Hauteur (avec détection pleine charge activée) : 43 mm ou environ 300 feuilles (80 g/m2) Pliage en Z : 20 feuilles (80 g/m2) Pliage en 2 : 40 feuilles (80 g/m2) Bac principal (Tri/Groupe) Voir le tableau page 5-7 à propos de la capacité magasin par rapport au grammage et au format du papier. • Avec ou sans SD-510 Pliage en Z : 20 feuilles (130 g/m2) Pliage en 2 : 50 feuilles (130 g/m2) Bac principal (Tri décalé/Groupe décalé) Voir le tableau page 5-7 à propos de la capacité magasin par rapport au grammage et au format du papier. • Avec ou sans SD-510 Pliage en Z : 20 feuilles (130 g/m2) Pliage en 2 : 50 feuilles (130 g/m2) Bac principal (Agrafage) 2-9 feuilles agrafées : 75 jeux (150 jeux pour du papier de largeur 182-364 mm) 10 à 20 pages agrafées : 50 jeux 21 à 30 pages agrafées : 30 jeux 31 à 40 pages agrafées : 25 jeux 41 à 50 pages agrafées : 20 jeux 51 à 60 pages agrafées : 15 jeux 61 à 100 pages agrafées : 10 jeux Voir le tableau enpage 5-7 pour le nombre maximum de feuilles agrafées par jeu. 5 Informations sur le papier 5-6 ineo 1052/1250 5.1 Piqueuse à cheval SD-510 (magasin Pliage & piqûre) • Pliage en 2 multiple 1-5 feuilles pliées : 35 jeux (ou 20 jeux pour corps de 92 g/m2 ou plus avec une couverture de 92 g/m2 ou avec insertion d'une couverture du bac d'insertion) • Pliage & Piqûre 2-5 feuilles pliées : 35 jeux (ou 20 jeux pour corps de 92 g/m2ou plus avec une couverture de 92 g/m2 ou avec insertion d'une couverture du bac d'insertion) 6-10 feuilles agrafées : 23 jeux (ou 15 jeux pour corps avec une couverture de 92 g/m2 ou avec insertion d'une couverture du bac d'insertion) 11-25 feuilles agrafées : 15 jeux (ou 10 jeux pour corps avec une couverture de 92 g/m2 ou avec insertion d'une couverture du bac d'insertion) • Multi pli en 3 1 feuille pliée : 50 jeux 2 feuilles pliées : 40 jeux 3 feuilles pliées : 30 jeux Voir le tableau page 5-8 pour le nombre maximum de feuilles par jeu par rapport au grammage et au format du papier. Unité de pliage FD-503 Bac Plieuse 30 jeux (tous types de pliage, grammage 80 g/m2 ou moins) Le magasin peut recevoir plus de 30 jeux produits en fonction du type de papier ou du grammage. Bac principal 2500 feuilles : A4 w/v, B5 w/v, 8,5 e 11 w/v, 9 e 11 v 1500 feuilles : A3 w, B4 w, SRA3 w, SRA4 w/v, Foolscap, 12 e 18 w, 11 e 17 w, 8,5 e 14 w, 13 e 19 w 500 feuilles : A5 v, 5,5 e 8,5 v Empileur grande capacité LS-505 Bac auxiliaire 200 feuilles (80 g/m2) Pliage en Z : 20 feuilles (80 g/m2) Pliage en 2 : 40 feuilles (80 g/m2) Empileur 5000 feuilles (80 g/m2) : A3 w, B4 w, A4 w/v, SRA3 w, SRA4 w/v, Foolscap, 13 e 19 w, 12 e 18 w, 11 e 17 w, 8,5 e 14 w, 8,5 e 11 w/v, 9 e 11 v 2000 feuilles (80 g/m2) : B5 v, A5 v 3000 feuilles (80 g/m2) : papier couché de 380 mm de long ou plus Piqueuse à cheval SD-506 Bac auxiliaire 200 feuilles (80 g/m2) Pliage en Z : 20 feuilles (80 g/m2) Pliage en 2 multiple : 40 feuilles (80 g/m2) Magasin Pliage & piqûre, (Pliage & piqûre) 2-10 feuilles agrafées : 50 jeux ou plus 11-20 feuilles agrafées : 30 jeux ou plus 21-40 feuilles agrafées : 20 jeux ou plus 41-50 feuilles agrafées : 15 jeux ou plus (avec détection pleine charge activée) Voir le tableau en page 5-9 pour le nombre maximum de feuilles pliées et agrafées par jeu. À propos de la hauteur standard des livrets pliés et agrafés, voir page 5-9. Magasin Pliage & piqûre (Pliage en 2 multiple) 30 jeux (avec détection pleine charge activée) Bac pliage en 3 (Multi pli en 3) 20 jeux (avec détection pleine charge activée) Thermorelieur PB-503 Bac auxiliaire 200 feuilles (80 g/m2) (avec détection pleine charge activée) Bac Thermorelieur 1 jeu d'épaisseur maximale (30 mm env.) e 11 e 2 colonnes* (6600 feuilles env., 80 g/m2) *Passe automatiquement à la deuxième colonne quand la première est détectée comme étant entièrement pleine. Il est cependant préférable de ne pas dépasser les limites suivantes pour éviter que les livrets ne tombent : Livrets reliés 10 à 30 feuilles : 50 jeux Livrets reliés 31 à 150 feuilles : 35 jeux ou pleine charge Livrets reliés 151 à 300 feuilles : pleine charge Section de transport Illimité Équipement Capacité ineo 1052/1250 5-7 5.1 Informations sur le papier 5 Capacité du bac principal de l'Unité de finition FS-532 pour papier 72 g/m2 à 81 g/m2 (sans agrafes) - Modes Tri/Groupe - Modes Tri Décalé/Groupe décalé Grands formats : A3 w, B4 w*1, SRA3 w, SRA4 w/v, Foolscap*2, 12 e 18 w, 11 e 17 w, 8,5 e 14 w, 13 e 19 w, Format+*3 (324 mm e 460 mm max.) Petits formats : A4 w/v, B5 w/v*1, 8,5 e 11 w/v, 9 e 11 v Très petits formats : A5 v, 5,5 e 8,5 v *1 : Les formats standard ISO sont utilisés par défaut pour les formats B. Pour la permutation ISO/JIS, veuillez contacter votre technicien SAV. *2 : Foolscap renvoie à 8 e 13 w, 8,12 e 13,2 w, 8,25 e 13 w et 8,5 e 13 w. *3 : Format+ varie en dimensions même s'il porte le même nom de format. Veillez à vérifier et à introduire les dimensions réelles du papier Format+ à utiliser. Capacité d'agrafage de l'Unité de finition FS-532 Même si un jeu agrafé est inférieur à la capacité indiquée ci-dessus, veillez à ne pas dépasser 23 mm d'épaisseur. Relieur automatique à anneaux GP-502 Bac Livret Livrets corps 5 feuilles : 50 jeux ou pleine charge Livrets corps 100 feuilles : 9 jeux ou pleine charge Équipement Capacité Grands formats Petits formats Très petits formats SD-510 non monté 2000 4200 750 SD-510 monté 2000 3000 750 Grands formats Petits formats Très petits formats SD-510 monté/non monté 1500 1500 750 Poids Nombre de feuilles par jeu comprenant une couverture épaisse (200 g/m2) Normal Fin Sauf Normal/ Fin 139 à 399 mm Longueur 400 mm ou plus 139 à 320 mm 321 à 399 mm Longueur 400 mm ou plus Longueur 139 mm ou plus 40 à 49 g/m2 - - - - - - 50 à 61 g/m2 100 50 50 20 - 35 62 à 74 g/m2 100 50 50 20 - 35 75 à 80 g/m2 100 50 30 30 30 35 81 à 91 g/m2 60 50 30 30 30 35 92 à 135 g/m2 50 50 30 30 30 30 136 à 162 g/m2 40 40 30 30 30 25 163 à 216 g/m2 25 25 25 25 25 20 217 à 244 g/m2 25 25 25 25 25 15 245 à 300 g/m2 10 10 10 10 10 10 301 à 350 g/m2 - - - - - - 5 Informations sur le papier 5-8 ineo 1052/1250 5.1 Capacité d'agrafage de la Piqueuse à cheval SD-510 - Mode Pliage & Agrafage Mode Pliage en 2 multiple - Mode Multi pli en 3 Grammage du papier Largeur papier 279,4 mm min. Largeur papier inférieure à 279,4 mm Fin Autres types de papier Fin Autres types de papier 40 à 49 g/m2 - - - - 50 à 61 g/m2 25 25 - - 62 à 74 g/m2 20 20 - - 75 à 91 g/m2 20 20 10 10 92 à 135 g/m2 5 5 5 5 136 à 162 g/m2 5 5 5 5 163 à 216 g/m2 5 5 5 5 217 à 244 g/m2 Couv. seulement Couv. seulement - - 245 à 300 g/m2 Couv. seulement Couv. seulement - - 301 à 350 g/m2 - - - - Grammage du papier Largeur papier 279,4 mm ou plus Largeur papier inférieure à 279,4 mm Fin Autres types de papier Fin Autres types de papier 40 à 49 g/m2 - - - - 50 à 61 g/m2 5 5 - - 62 à 74 g/m2 5 5 - - 75 à 91 g/m2 5 5 5 5 92 à 135 g/m2 5 5 5 5 136 à 162 g/m2 5 5 5 5 163 à 216 g/m2 5 5 5 5 217 à 244 g/m2 1 1 1 1 245 à 300 g/m2 1 1 1 1 301 à 350 g/m2 - - - - Grammage du papier Fin Autres types de papier 40 à 49 g/m2 - - 50 à 61 g/m2 3 3 62 à 74 g/m2 3 3 75 à 91 g/m2 3 3 92 à 135 g/m2 1 1 136 à 162 g/m2 - - 163 à 216 g/m2 - - 217 à 244 g/m2 - - 245 à 300 g/m2 - - 301 à 350 g/m2 - - ineo 1052/1250 5-9 5.1 Informations sur le papier 5 Capacité d'agrafage maximale de la Piqueuse à cheval SD-506 Piqueuse à cheval SD-506 - Hauteur standard des livrets pliés et agrafés Poids Nombre de feuilles par jeu Fin Papier couché/couleur Papier sens machine Sans couverture Insertion couverture (200 g/m2) Sans couverture Insertion couverture (200 g/m2) Sans couverture Insertion couverture (200 g/m2) 50 à 81 g/m2 50 49 + 1 30 29 + 1 30 29 + 1 82 à 91 g/m2 30 29 + 1 15 15 + 1 30 29 + 1 92 à 130 g/m2 20 19 + 1 10 9 + 1 10 9 + 1 131 à 161 g/m2 15 14 + 1 5 4 + 1 5 4 + 1 162 à 209 g/m2 10 - - - - - 210 à 244 g/m2 5 - - - - - Nombre de feuilles (1 jeu) Formats papier A3 w, 12 e 18 w, 11 e 17 w (401 mm ou plus) B4 w, 8,5 e 14 w (301 à 400 mm) A4 w, 8,5 e 11 w (261 à 300 mm) B5 w (260 mm ou moins) 2 à 5 feuilles 35 mm 40 mm 45 mm Non spécifié 6 à 15 feuilles 45 mm 50 mm Non spécifié Non spécifié 16 à 30 feuilles 50 mm 55 mm Non spécifié Non spécifié 31 à 50 feuilles 60 mm 65 mm Non spécifié Non spécifié 5 Informations sur le papier 5-10 ineo 1052/1250 5.1 5.1.3 Format papier Magasins papier Formats disponibles Bacs principaux (Magasin 1 et Magasin 2) Standard : SRA3 w, A3 w, B4 w*1, SRA4 w, A4 w/v, B5 w/v*1, A5 v, Foolscap*2, 12 e 18 w, 11 e 17 w, 8,5 e 14 w, 8,5 e 11 w/v, 9 e 11 v, 5,5 e 8,5 v Personnalisé : 182 mm e 139 mm min. à 324 mm e 463 mm max. Format+*3 : A3W w, B4W w*1, A4W w/v, B5W w/v*1, A5W v, 12 e 18W w, 11 e 17W w, 8,5 e 11W w/v, 5,5 e 8,5W v Papier onglet : A3T w, B4T w*1, A4T w/v, B5T w/v*1, 11 e 17T w, 8,5 e 11T w/v, 5,5 e 8,5T v À utiliser pour spécifier les formats standard de chaque magasin dans le réglage magasin qui propose les options suivantes : • A5v ou 5,5 e 8,5 v (A5 v sélectionné par défaut) • SRA3w ou 12 e 18 w (SRA3 w sélectionné par défaut) • 8e 13 w, 8,12 e 13,2 w, 8,25 e 13 w, 8,5 e 13 w ou 8,5 e 14 w (8,5 e 14 w sélectionné par défaut) Unité d'alimentation papier PF-703 (Magasins 3 à 8) Standard : SRA3 w, A3 w, B4 w*1, A4 w/v, SRA4 w, B5 w/v*1, A5 v, 12 e 18 w, 11 e 17 w, 8,5 e 14 w, 8,5 e 11 w/v, 9 e 11 v, Foolscap*2 Personnalisé : 150 mm e 133 mm min. à 324 mm e 483 mm max. Utilisation des guides petits formats : 95 mm e 133 mm min. Format+*3 : A3W w, B4W w*1, A4W w/v, B5W w/v*1, A5W v, 12 e 18W w, 11 e 17W w, 8,5 e 11W w/v, 5,5 e 8,5W v Papier onglet : A3T w, B4T w*1, A4T w/v, B5T w/v*1, 11 e 17T w, 8,5 e 11T w/v, 5,5 e 8,5T v À utiliser pour spécifier les formats standard de chaque magasin dans le réglage magasin qui propose les options suivantes : • A5v ou 5,5 e 8,5 v (A5 v sélectionné par défaut) • SRA3w ou 12 e 18 w (SRA3 w sélectionné par défaut) • 8e 13 w, 8,12 e 13,2 w, 8,25 e 13 w, 8,5 e 13 w ou 8,5 e 14 w (8,5 e 13 w sélectionné par défaut) Unité d'alimentation papier PF-706 (Magasins 3 à 8) Standard : SRA3 w, A3 w, B4 w*1, A4 w/v, SRA4 w, B5 w/v*1, A5 v, 12 e 18 w, 11 e 17 w, 8,5 e 14 w, 8,5 e 11 w/v, 9 e 11 v, Foolscap*2 Personnalisé : 182 mm e 139 mm min. à 324 mm e 463 mm max. Utilisation des guides petits formats : 95 mm e 139 mm min. Format+*3 : A3W w, B4W w*1, A4W w/v, B5W w/v*1, A5W v, 12 e 18W w, 11 e 17W w, 8,5 e 11W w/v, 5,5 e 8,5W v Papier à onglet : A3T w, B4T w*1, A4T w/v, B5T w/v*1, 11 e 17T w, 8,5 e 11T w/v, 5,5 e 8,5T v À utiliser pour spécifier les formats standard de chaque magasin dans le réglage magasin qui propose les options suivantes : • A5v ou 5,5 e 8,5 v (A5 v sélectionné par défaut) • SRA3w ou 12 e 18 w (SRA3 w sélectionné par défaut) • 8e 13 w, 8,12 e 13,2 w, 8,25 e 13 w, 8,5 e 13 w ou 8,5 e 14 w (8,5 e 13 w sélectionné par défaut) ineo 1052/1250 5-11 5.1 Informations sur le papier 5 *1 : Les formats standard ISO sont utilisés par défaut pour les formats B. Pour la permutation ISO/JIS, veuillez contacter votre technicien SAV. *2 : Foolscap renvoie à 8 e 13 w, 8,12 e 13,2 w, 8,25 e 13 w et 8,5 e 13 w. *3 : spécifiez un format personnalisé pour le chargement de couvertures de thermoreliure. Les formats standard, grand format et papier à onglet ne sont pas disponibles. Module d'insertion grande capacité MI-PFU (MI-PFU1 à 3) Standard (formats détectables) : SRA3 w, A3 w, B4 w*1, A4 w/v, SRA4 w, B5 w/v*1, A5 v, 12 e 18 w, 11 e 17 w, 8,5 e 14 w, 8,5 e 11 w/v, 9 e 11 v, Foolscap*2 À utiliser pour spécifier les formats standard de chaque magasin dans le réglage magasin qui propose les options suivantes : • A5v ou 5,5 e 8,5 v (A5 v sélectionné par défaut) • SRA3w ou 12 e 18 w (SRA3 w sélectionné par défaut) • 8e 13 w, 8,12 e 13,2 w, 8,25 e 13 w, 8,5 e 13 w ou 8,5 e 14 w (8,5 e 13 w sélectionné par défaut) Couvertures thermoreliure (personnalisées)*3: 150mm e 133 mm min. à 324 mm e 483 mm max. Utilisation des guides petits formats : 95 mm e 133 mm min. Bac couvertures du Thermorelieur PB-503 Longueur (du haut au bas) : identique à celle du corps de document Largeur : deux fois la largeur du livre + épaisseur du corps de document + 5 mm (largeur de massicotage) ou plus 307 mm e 472 mm max. à 139 mm e 279 mm min. Module d'insertion (installé dans l'Unité de pliage FD-503) Standard (formats détectables) : SRA3 w, A3 w, B4 w*1, A4 w/v, SRA4 w/v, B5 w/v*1, A5 v, 13 e 19 w, 12 e 18 w, 11 e 17 w, 8,5 e 14 w, 8,5 e 11 w/v, 5,5 e 8,5 v, Foolscap* 2 Les formats standard détectables peuvent être permutés de la manière suivante : • A5v ou 5,5 e 8,5 v • SRA4w, A4 w et un de 8,5 e 14 w, 8 e 13 w, 8,12 e 13,2 w, 8,25 e 13 w, 8,5 e 13 w, ou 8,5 e 11 w et un de 8,5 e 14 w, 8 e 13 w, 8,12 e 13,2 w, 8,25 e 13 w, 8,5 e 13 w • 8,5e 11 v ou 9 e 11 v Couvertures thermoreliure (personnalisées)*3: 182 mm e 139 mm min. à 331 mm e 483 mm max. Module d'insertion PI-502 (Kit de montage MK-732) (intégré dans l'Unité de finition FS-532 en option) Magasin supérieur Standard : A4 w/v, B5 w/v*1, A5 v, 8,5 e 11 w/v, 5,5 e 8,5 v Magasin infér. Standard : A3 w, B4 w*1, SRA4 w, A4 w/v, B5 w/v*1, A5 v, 12 e 18 w, 11 e 17 w, 8,5 e 14 w, 8,5 e 11 w/v, 5,5 e 8,5 v, Foolscap*2 Magasins papier Formats disponibles 5 Informations sur le papier 5-12 ineo 1052/1250 5.1 Équipement Formats disponibles Unité recto-verso Illimité Unité de finition FS-532 Bac auxiliaire (Tri/Groupe) Standard : A3 w, B4 w, A4 w/v, B5 w/v, A5 v, SRA3 w, SRA4 w/v, 12 e 18 w, 11 e 17 w, 8,5 e 14 w, 8,5 e 11 w/v, 5,5 e 8,5 v, 9 e 11 v, Foolscap Personnalisé : 95 mm e 133 mm min. à 331 mm e 488 mm max. Format+ Papier onglet (uniquement avec l'onglet orienté dans le sens de la sortie) Magasin principal (Tri/Groupe/Tri décalé/ Groupe décalé) Papier grand format : 324 mm e 460 mm max. A3 w, B4 w, SRA3 w, SRA4 w/v, 12 e 18 w, 11 e 17 w, 13 e 19 w, 8,5 e 14 w, Foolscap Papier petit format : A4 w/v, B5 w/v, 8,5 e 11 w/v, 9 e 11 v Papier de très petit format : A5 v, 5,5 e 8,5 v Personnalisé : 95 mm e 133 mm min. à 331 mm e 488 mm max. Format+ Papier onglet (uniquement avec l'onglet orienté dans le sens de la sortie) Sortie directe uniquement : 13 e 19 w Bac principal (Agrafage) Standard : SRA3 w, A3 w, B4 w, SRA4 w/v, A4 w/v, B5 v, A5 v, 12 e 18 w, 11 e 17 w, 8,5 e 14 w, 8,5 e 11 w/v, 5,5 e 8,5 v, 13 e 19 w, 9 e 11 v, Foolscap Personnalisé : 203 mm e 139 mm min. à 324 mm e 463 mm max. * : max. 320 mm de longueur pour l'agrafage parallèle (à l'arrière). Format+ Papier onglet (uniquement avec l'onglet orienté dans le sens de la sortie) Unité de perforation PK-522 Perforation (2 trous) Standard : A3 w, B4 w, SRA4 w, A4 w/v, B5 w/v, A5 v, 11 e 17 w, 8,5 e 14 w, 8,5 e 11 w/v, 5,5 e 8,5 v, 9 e 11 v, Foolscap Perforation (4 trous) Standard : A3 w, B4 w, A4 v, B5 v, 11 e 17 w, 8,5 e 11 v, 9 e 11 v Piqueuse à cheval SD-510 Pliage & Piqûre Standard : A3 w, B4 w, A4 w, 12 e 18 w, 11 e 17 w, 8,5 e 14 w, 8,5 e 11 w Format+ Personnalisé : 120 mm e 240 mm min. à 324 mm e 463 mm max. Pliage en 2 multiple Standard : A3 w, B4 w, A4 w, 12 e 18 w, 11 e 17 w, 8,5 e 14 w, 8,5 e 11 w Format+ Personnalisé : 120 mm e 240 mm min. à 324 mm e 463 mm max. Multi pli en 3 A4 w, 8,5 e 11 w ineo 1052/1250 5-13 5.1 Informations sur le papier 5 Unité de pliage FD-503 Bac Plieuse/Pliage Standard : A3 w, B4 w, A4 w, SRA4 w, 12 e 18 w, 11 e 17 w, 8,5 e 14 w, 8,5 e 11 w Personnalisé : 305 mm e 458 mm max. à 210 mm e 279 mm min. Bac principal (sortie normale) Standard : SRA3 w, A3 w, B4 w, SRA4 w/v, A4 w/v, B5 w/v, A5 v, 13 e 19 w, 12 e 18 w, 11 e 17 w, 8,5 e 14 w, 8,5 e 11 w/v, 5,5 e 8,5 v, 9 e 11 v, Foolscap Personnalisé : 331 mm e 483 mm max. à 95 mm e 139 mm min. Format+ Papier onglet (uniquement avec l'onglet orienté dans le sens de la sortie) Perforation (2 trous) Standard : A3 w, B4 w, SRA4 w, A4 w/v, B5 w/v, A5 v, 12 e 18 w, 11 e 17 w, 8,5 e 14 w, 8,5 e 11 w/v, 5,5 e 8,5 v, 9 e 11 v, Foolscap Papier à onglet Perforation (4 trous) Standard : A3 w, B4 w, A4 v, B5 v, 12 e 18 w, 11 e 17 w, 8,5 e 11 v, 9 e 11 v Papier à onglet Empileur grande capacité LS-505 Empileur Standard : A3 w, B4 w, SRA4 w/v, A4 w/v, B5 v, A5 v, SRA3 w, 13 e 19 w, 12 e 18 w, 11 e 17 w, 8,5 e 14 w, 8,5 e 11 w/v, 9 e 11 v, Foolscap Personnalisé : 331 mm e 483 mm max. à 210 mm e 148 mm min. Format+ Papier à onglet (1 à 15 onglets*) (Cependant les jeux en sortie ne peuvent pas être décalés s'ils contiennent des feuilles de papier à onglet.) * Sauf 4 onglets et 10 onglets Bac auxiliaire Standard : A3 w, B4 w, SRA4 w/v, A4 w/v, B5 w/v, A5 v, SRA3 w, 13 e 19 w, 12 e 18 w, 11 e 17 w, 8,5 e 14 w, 8,5 e 11 w/v, 5,5 e 8,5 v, 9 e 11 v, Foolscap Personnalisé : 331 mm e 488 mm max. à 95 mm e 139 mm min. Format+ Papier onglet (uniquement avec l'onglet orienté dans le sens de la sortie) Piqueuse à cheval SD-506 Bac auxiliaire Standard : SRA3 w, A3 w, B4 w, SRA4 w/v, A4 w/v, B5 w/v, A5 v, 13 e 19 w, 12 e 18 w, 11 e 17 w, 8,5 e 14 w, 8,5 e 11 w/v, 5,5 e 8,5 v, 9 e 11 v, Foolscap Personnalisé : 331 mm e 488 mm max. à 95 mm e 139 mm min. Format+ Papier onglet (uniquement avec l'onglet orienté dans le sens de la sortie) Fonction Pliage & Piqûre/Massicotage Standard : SRA3 w, A3 w, B4 w, SRA4 w, A4 w, B5 w, 12 e 18 w, 11 e 17 w, 8,5 e 14 w, 8,5 e 11 w, Foolscap Personnalisé : 324 mm e 463 mm max. à 182 mm e 257 mm min. Format+ Fonction Pliage multiple • Pliage en 2 multiple Standard : SRA3 w, A3 w, B4 w, SRA4 w, A4 w, B5 w, 12 e 18 w, 11 e 17 w, 8,5 e 14 w, 8,5 e 11 w, Foolscap Personnalisé : 324 mm e 463 mm max. à 182 mm e 257 mm min. Format+ • Multi pli en 3 Standard : A4 w, 8,5 e 11 w Équipement Formats disponibles 5 Informations sur le papier 5-14 ineo 1052/1250 5.1 5.1.4 Fonction de Basculement ATS Quand le magasin sélectionné devient vide pendant que l'impression est en cours, la machine change automatiquement de magasin papier source afin de ne pas arrêter l'impression, pour autant qu'un autre magasin remplisse les conditions suivantes : - Le format et l'orientation doivent être identiques - Le type de papier doit être le même Pour utiliser la fonction ATS, effectuez auparavant les réglages suivants dans [02 Configuration fonctions] - [01 Configuration magasins] dans le menu Utilitaire. Pour plus de détails, voir "12 Menu Utilitaire". - Dans [01 Configuration magasins], spécifiez les magasins qui seront sélectionnés automatiquement lorsque la fonction PapierAuto est active. L'ordre de priorité peut aussi être spécifié pour les magasins sélectionnés. - Dans [02 Basculement auto magasins], Réglez la fonction ATS sur Oui. - Dans [03 Réglage ATS], sélectionnez de conserver l'introduction dans le magasin actuel sélectionné par ATS ou de revenir au magasin utilisé avant d'être vide s'il a été réapprovisionné en papier. Thermorelieur PB-503 Bac auxiliaire Standard : SRA3 w, A3 w, B4 w, SRA4 w/v, A4 w/v, B5 w/v, A5 v, 13 e 19 w, 12 e 18 w, 11 e 17 w, 8,5 e 14 w, 8,5 e 11 w/v, 5,5 e 8,5 v, 9 e 11 v, Foolscap Personnalisé : 331 mm e 488 mm max. à 95 mm e 139 mm min. Format+ Papier onglet (uniquement avec l'onglet orienté dans le sens de la sortie) Bac Thermorelieur • Corps Standard : A4 v, B5 v, A5 v, 8,5 e 11 w, 5,5 e 8,5 w/v Personnalisé : 307 mm e 221 mm max. à 139 mm e 210 mm min. • Couverture Personnalisé : 307 mm e 472 mm max. à 139 mm e 279 mm min. Pour plus de détails sur les formats de papier utilisé en thermoreliure, voir page 6-118. Unité relais RU-509 Standard : SRA3 w, A3 w, B4 w, A4 w/v, SRA4 w/v, B5 w/v, A5 v, 13 e 19 w, 12 e 18 w, 11 e 17 w, 8,5 e 14 w, 8,5 e 11 w/v, 9 e 11 v, 5,5 e 8,5 v, Foolscap Personnalisé : 330 mm e 487 mm max. à 100 mm e 140 mm min. Format+ Papier à onglet Unité relais RU-510 Standard : SRA3 w, A3 w, B4 w, SRA4 w/v, A4 w/v, B5 w/v, A5 v, 13 e 19 w, 12 e 18 w, 11 e 17 w, 8,5 e 14 w, 8,5 e 11 w/v, 9 e 11 v, 5,5 e 8,5 v, Foolscap Personnalisé : 331 mm e 488 mm max. à 95 mm e 133 mm min. Format+ Papier à onglet Perforeuse multiple GP-501 Perforation : A4 v, 8,5 e 11 v PasseCopie : 330 mm e 488 mm max. à 95 mm e 139 mm min. Relieur automatique à anneaux GP-502 Standard : A4 v, 8,5 e 11 v Papier à onglet : A4T v, 8,5 e 11T v (extension onglet : 13 mm ou moins) PasseCopie : 331 mm e 488 mm max. à 95 mm e 133 mm min. Équipement Formats disponibles ineo 1052/1250 5-15 5.1 Informations sur le papier 5 5.1.5 Pour stocker le papier Observez les précautions suivantes pour stocker le papier. - Conservez le papier dans un endroit frais et sec. - L'utilisation d'un papier humide peut provoquer un bourrage papier. Les paquets de feuilles entamés devrait être correctement refermés. - Ne stockez pas les ramettes de papier verticalement. Le papier gondolé par un stockage vertical peut provoquer un bourrage papier. - Ne laissez pas le papier à portée des enfants. 5 Informations relatives aux originaux 5-16 ineo 1052/1250 5.2 5.2 Informations relatives aux originaux 5.2.1 Originaux sur chargeur Auto Le chargeur Auto ADF propose les quatre modes suivants de numérisation des originaux : - Mode normal - Mode Originaux de formats différents - Mode Original plié en Z - Mode Semi-auto Les caractéristiques de chaque mode sont décrites ci-après. Mode normal Il est possible de sélectionner un format d'original détectable à partir des formats AB, des formats pouces, des formats A uniquement et des formats AB et pouces combinés. - Formats d'originaux acceptés : 297 mm e 431,8 mm max. à 128 mm e 139,7 mm min. - Formats d'originaux détectables : A3 w, B4 w, A4 w/v, B5 w/v, A5 w, 11 e 17 w, 8,5 e 14 w, 8,5 e 11 w - Grammage des originaux : 50 g/m2 à 130 g/m2 - Tolérance au tuilage : 10 mm max. - Capacité de l'introducteur : 100 feuilles (papier 80 g/m2) - Tolérance d'introduction de mêmes originaux : 5 fois max. (recto), 3 fois max. (recto-verso) Mode Originaux de formats différents Le Mode de formats différents permet de copier des originaux de formats différents. - Formats d'originaux détectables : les types de combinaisons de formats sont déterminés par la largeur du guide ADF. – Largeur pour A3 w et A4 v : A3 w, B4 w, A4 w/v, B5 v, A5 v – Largeur pour B4 w et B5 v : B4 w, A4 w, B5 w/v, A5 v – Largeur pour A4 w et A5 v : A4 w, B5 w, A5 v - Grammage des originaux : 50 g/m2 à 130 g/m2 - Tolérance au tuilage : 10 mm max. - Capacité de l'introducteur : 100 feuilles (papier 80 g/m2) - Tolérance d'introduction de mêmes originaux : 5 fois max. (recto), 3 fois max. (recto-verso) Voir ci-dessous la largeur du guide ADF correspondant à chaque combinaison. Mode Original plié en Z Utilisez le mode Pliage en Z si vous voulez numériser des originaux pliés sans utiliser le détecteur de format du chargeur Auto. - Formats d'originaux détectables : A3 w, B4 w, A4 w/v, B5 w/v, A5 w, 11 e 17 w, 8,5 e 14 w, 8,5 e 11 w/v - Grammage des originaux : 50 g/m2 à 130 g/m2 - Tolérance au tuilage : 10 mm max. - Capacité de l'introducteur : 100 feuilles (papier 80 g/m2) - Tolérance d'introduction de mêmes originaux : 5 fois max. (recto), 3 fois max. (recto-verso) Largeur du guide pour A3 w et A4 v : Largeur du guide pour B4 w et B5 v : Largeur du guide pour A4 w et A5 v : ineo 1052/1250 5-17 5.2 Informations relatives aux originaux 5 Mode Semi-auto Utilisez le mode Semi-auto si vous voulez copier des originaux épais en les chargeant feuille par feuille dans le chargeur Auto. - Formats d'originaux acceptés : 297 mm e 431,8 mm max. à 128 mm e 139,7 mm min. - Formats d'originaux détectables : A3 w, B4 w, A4 w/v, B5 w/v, A5 w, 11 e 17 w, 8,5 e 14 w, 8,5 e 11 w/v - Grammage des originaux : 50 à 200 g/m2 pour originaux recto, 50 à 130 g/m2 pour originaux rectoverso - Tolérance au tuilage : 10 mm max. - Capacité de l'introducteur : 1 feuille à la fois - Tolérance d'introduction de mêmes originaux : 5 fois max. (recto), 3 fois max. (recto-verso) 5.2.2 Utilisation de la vitre d'exposition Utilisez la vitre d'exposition pour les originaux qui ne peuvent pas être chargés dans le chargeur Auto ADF ou lorsque les conditions de copie ne sont pas adaptées au chargeur Auto ADF. Originaux incompatibles avec le chargeur Auto Spécifications des originaux placés sur la vitre d'exposition Formats d'originaux détectables : A3 w, B4 w, A4 w/v, B5 w/v, A5 w/v* * : 1B6 w ou 5,5 e 8,5 w détectables au lieu de A5 w et 5,5 e 8,5 v détectables au lieu de A5 v. Grammage des originaux : 6,8 kg max. Épaisseur des originaux : 30 mm max. 7 ATTENTION - Ne pas placer d'originaux trop lourds. Ne pas trop appuyer en cas d'originaux épais. La vitre d'exposition pourrait se briser et vous blesser. Papier tuilé, plissé ou plié Collages ou découpages Livre Transparents, papier dessin ou cellophane Papier plié en deux, perforé ou agrafé Papier épais rigide ou papier fin comme le papier par avion 5 Informations relatives aux originaux 5-18 ineo 1052/1250 5.2 6 Opérations d'impression ineo 1052/1250 6-3 6.1 Réglages sur l'écran machine 6 6 Opérations d'impression 6.1 Réglages sur l'écran machine Les touches suivantes figurent au bas de l'écran machine : [Réglage magasin], [Calage recto-verso], [Réglage], [Contrôleur], [Enr/Sup. régl. Papier] et [Enr/Suppr. form. perso]. 6.1.1 [Réglage magasin] 1 Appuyez sur [Réglage magasin] pour afficher l'écran Réglage magasin. Dans cet écran, procédez aux réglages papier par défaut souhaités pour chaque magasin. Réglage magasin permet le rappel de conditions papier prédéfinies ainsi que la définition nouvelle de formats papier, conditions papier ou de la fonction ventilation. 2 Appuyez sur [Fermer] pour restaurer l'écran Machine. L'écran Copie affiche la touche [Papier]. Utilisez cette touche pour modifier temporairement les réglages papier d'un magasin spécifiés par défaut. L'écran Machine affiche la touche [Enr/Sup. régl.Papier]. Utilisez cette touche pour un enregistrement préalable des conditions papier parmi d'autres réglages papier. Vous pouvez rappeler les conditions papier enregistrées dans Réglage magasin ou Papier. dPour info Voir page 6-7 pour plus de détails sur la spécification du papier dans les magasins. Voir page 6-54 pour plus de détails sur Enregistrer/Supprimer réglage papier. 6 Réglages sur l'écran machine 6-4 ineo 1052/1250 6.1 6.1.2 [Calage recto-verso] 1 Appuyez sur [Calage recto-verso] pour afficher l'écran de Calage recto-verso. Dans cet écran, réglez le ratio d'agrandissement ou la position des images à imprimer sur le recto et le verso du papier en impression recto-verso. Vous pouvez aussi régler la position des images à l'aide de la mire réglage. Ces réglages peuvent être effectués pour chaque magasin. 2 Appuyez sur [OK] ou [Annuler] pour restaurer l'écran machine. La touche [Calage recto-verso] est aussi accessible à l'écran en appuyant sur la touche [Réglage magasin] de l'écran Machine ou sur la touche [Papier] de l'écran Copie, puis en appuyant sur [Modifier] qui concerne les conditions papier. Cette touche propose exactement les mêmes paramètres que ceux disponibles dans [Calage recto-verso] sur l'écran Machine. La touche [Calage recto-verso] est aussi accessible à l'écran en appuyant sur la touche [Enr/Sup. régl. Papier] de l'écran Machine, puis en appuyant sur [Ajouter/Modifier]. Les données de ce calage rectoverso sont enregistrées comme condition papier, non pour un magasin mais pour un nom papier. Les données enregistrées du calage recto-verso peuvent être spécifiées pour un magasin en rappelant les conditions papier y compris ces données. 6.1.3 [Réglage] 1 Appuyez sur [Réglage] pour afficher l'écran Réglage. Cet écran propose divers réglages concernant les opérations de numérisation et de finition. Si la machine est équipée des options de finition, des réglages spécifiques aux fonctions sont également proposés. 2 Appuyez sur [Quitter] pour restaurer l'écran Machine. ineo 1052/1250 6-5 6.1 Réglages sur l'écran machine 6 6.1.4 [Contrôleur] 1 Appuyez sur [Contrôleur] pour afficher l'écran Menu de réglage du Contrôleur. C'est sur cet écran que s'effectue la configuration contrôleur. 2 Appuyez sur [Fermer] pour restaurer l'écran Machine. 6.1.5 [Enr/Sup. régl.Papier] 1 Appuyez sur [Enr/Sup. régl.Papier] pour afficher l'écran Enr/Sup. régl.Papier. % Enregistrez les conditions papier dans l'écran Enr/Sup. régl.Papier de façon à pouvoir les rappeler quand nécessaire dans Réglage magasin ou Papier. Le nombre maximum d'enregistrements est de 256. L'écran Enr/Sup. régl.Papier permet non seulement d'enregistrer les conditions papier mais aussi de supprimer les entrées enregistrées. Réglage magasin permet d'effectuer des réglages papier pour un magasin spécifique et aussi d'enregistrer les conditions papier au cours de la procédure. Les entrées enregistrées ne peuvent pas être supprimées sur cet écran. Le réglage Papier permet de modifier temporairement les réglages spécifiés pour un magasin ; il ne permet pas toutefois d'enregistrer ou de supprimer des conditions papier spécifiées. 2 Appuyez sur [OK] ou [Annuler] pour restaurer l'écran machine. 6 Réglages sur l'écran machine 6-6 ineo 1052/1250 6.1 6.1.6 [Enr/Suppr.form.perso] 1 Appuyez sur [Enr/Suppr. form. perso] pour afficher l'écran Enr/Suppr. form. perso. % Enregistrez des formats personnalisés dans l'écran Enr/Suppr. form. personnalisé de façon à pouvoir les rappeler pour spécifier le format papier dans Réglage magasin ou Papier. Le nombre maximum de formats personnalisés enregistrables s'élève à 20. Seul l'écran Enr/Suppr. form. perso vous permet d'enregistrer ou de supprimer les formats personnalisés. 2 Appuyez sur [Fermer] pour restaurer l'écran Machine. ineo 1052/1250 6-7 6.2 Description de la configuration papier 6 6.2 Description de la configuration papier Le réglage Papier propose les cinq éléments de réglage suivants : - Magasin papier - Format Papier - Conditions papier - Ventilation - Mode déshum. REMARQUE La fonction Ventilation n'est pas disponible pour le module d'insertion de l'Unité de pliage FD-503 et pour le Module d'insertion PI-502. REMARQUE Le mode de déshumidification n'est disponible que pour les magasins de l'Unité d'alimentation papier PF-703 équipée du Déshumidificateur HT-505 en option. L'unité d'alimentation papier comporte trois magasins et peut être équipée de deux déshumidificateurs. dPour info Pour le module d'insertion de l'Unité de pliage FD-503, les seuls éléments de réglage magasin disponibles sont Magasin papier et Format papier. Lorsque le Thermorelieur PB-503 est installé, les réglages papier des couvertures de thermoreliure sont disponibles. Pour le Module d'insertion PI-502 fixé à l'Unité de finition FS-532, les seuls éléments de réglage magasin disponibles sont Magasin papier et Format papier. La configuration papier offre trois possibilités en fonction de l'objet du réglage. Le réglage papier est accessible dans l'écran Machine par la touche [Réglage magasin] ou dans l'écran Copie par la touche [Papier]. Vous pouvez rappeler les conditions papier enregistrés précédemment pour établir un réglage papier. L'enregistrement des conditions papier peut se faire dans [Enr/Sup. régl.Papier] disponible sur l'écran Machine. Le réglage papier défini sous [Réglage magasin] sur l'écran Machine sert de réglage d'impression par défaut. Le réglage papier spécifié sous [Papier] sur l'écran Copie est le réglage temporaire permettant d'utiliser un papier différent de celui spécifié par défaut dans Réglage magasin. En conséquence, les réglages effectués dans [Papier] sont réinitialisés et retrouvent les valeurs définies dans [Réglage magasin] lorsque la fonction Réinitialisation est activée. En outre, les réglages spécifiés dans [Papier] ne peuvent pas être enregistrés. Opération Paramètre de réglage Description Réglage magasin Magasin papier Format Papier Conditions papier Ventilation Mode déshum. Spécifiez les réglages format papier, conditions papier, ventilation et mode déshumidification pour chaque magasin. Les conditions papier spécifiés peuvent être enregistrées. Papier Magasin papier Format Papier Conditions papier Changez le règlement temporairement pour réserver une tâche de copie à l'aide d'un papier qui n'est spécifié dans aucun magasin. La machine ne peut pas lancer la numérisation si le format papier requis n'est spécifié dans aucun magasin, mais cette fonction permet toutefois de scanner l'original et de réserver la tâche. Enregistrer/Supprimer réglage papier Conditions papier Enregistrez au préalable uniquement les conditions papier. Vous pouvez rappeler la condition souhaitée pour faciliter l'opération de réglage sous Réglage magasin ou Papier. De même, vous pouvez supprimer les conditions papier enregistrées. 6 Présentation du réglage des magasins 6-8 ineo 1052/1250 6.3 6.3 Présentation du réglage des magasins Cette section décrit le réglage magasin utilisé comme réglage par défaut. dPour info La touche Papier de l'écran Copie permet la modification temporaire des réglages. Réglage magasin propose les réglages suivants de format papier, conditions papier et ventilation qui peuvent être spécifiés pour chaque magasin. Élément de réglage Description Options de réglage Magasin papier Sélectionnez le magasin pour lequel effectuer le réglage papier. Magasin 1, Magasin 2 (bacs principaux) Mag 3 à 8 (Unité d'alimentation papier PF-703/PF-706) MI1, MI2*1 (Module d'insertion de l' Unité de pliage FD-503/Module d'insertion PI-502) MI-PFU1, MI-PFU2, MI-PFU3 (Unité d'alimentation papier PF-703 + kit Unité d'insertion FA-501) TR (Source couverture Thermorelieur PB-503) Format Papier Sélectionner Standard détecte automatiquement le format standard du papier chargé dans le magasin sélectionné. Sélectionner Personnalisé vous permet d'entrer les dimensions désirées depuis l'écran. Le nombre maximum de formats personnalisés enregistrables et rappelables s'élève à 20. Pour spécifier Format+, sélectionnez un des douze grands formats disponibles dans [Paramétrage formats] et sélectionnez aussi [Bord avant], [Bord arrière] ou [Centre] pour la position image. Entrez le grand format réel dans [Dimensions]. Pour spécifier Papier à onglet, sélectionnez un des 10 formats standard ou entrez le format personnalisé souhaité. Spécifiez aussi le nombre d'onglets (1 à 15). Standard : Les formats standard détectables diffèrent selon le magasin papier. Format perso pour Magasin 1 et Magasin 2 (bacs principaux): 182 mm e 139 mm min. à 324 mm e 463 mm max. Format personnalisé pour Magasins 3 à 8 (Unité d'alimentation papier PF-703/PF-706): PF-703 150 mm e 133 mm min. à 324 mm e 483 mm max. PF-706 182 mm e 139 mm min. à 324 mm e 463 mm max. Utilisation de guides pour petits formats (PF-703) : 95 mm e 133 mm min. Utilisation de guides pour petits formats (PF-706) : 95 mm e 139 mm min. * Les formats personnalisés recommandés permettent un rapport hauteur/largeur 1:2 ou inférieur. Format+ : A3W w, A4W v, A4W w, A5W v, B4W w, B5W v, B5W w, 12 e 18W w, 11 e 17W w, 8,5 e 11W v, 8,5 e 11W w, 5,5 e 8,5W v Papier onglet (standard) : A3T w, A4T v, A4T w, B4T w, B5T v, B5T w, 11 e 17T w, 8,5 e 11T v, 8,5 e 11T w, 5,5 e 8,5T v Conditions papier Type de papier Les huit types de papier suivants sont disponibles en fonction de la qualité du papier ou de son utilisation. Voir le tableau "Description des types de papier" ci-après pour plus de détails. Pap. couché, Pré-imprimé, Qual. supér., Normal, Livre/Journ., Gaufré, Interc vierg, Gaufré2 ineo 1052/1250 6-9 6.3 Présentation du réglage des magasins 6 Poids Sélectionnez l'un des 10 types proposés à l'écran. *2 Le papier 301-350 g/m2 n'est disponible que pour le Magasin 4 et le Magasin 7 de l'Unité d'alimentation papier PF-703/PF-706. Lorsque vous sélectionnez Livre/Journ. ou Gaufré comme type de papier, vous pouvez spécifier un grammage compris entre 40 g/m2 et 216 g/m2. Lorsque vous sélectionnez Gaufré2 comme type de papier, vous pouvez spécifier un grammage compris entre 75 g/m2 et 216 g/m2. 40-49 g/m2 50-61 g/m2 62-74 g/m2 75-91 g/m2 92-135 g/m2 136-162 g/m2 163-216 g/m2 217-244 g/m2 245-300 g/m2 301-350 g/m2 Couleur papier Spécifiez la couleur du papier. Ce réglage permet à la machine d'utiliser du papier de couleur dans les magasins dans le cas où vous sélectionnez [Blanc] dans Sélection auto type de papier. Blanc, Transparent, Jaune, Rose, Bleu, Vert Perforation Spécifiez s'il faut ou non perforer le papier. Utilisez ce réglage pour éviter de mélanger le papier perforé avec du papier sans perforations. Avec perforation, Sans perforation Calage rectoverso Spécifiez les taux d'agrandissement (vertical, horizontal) et les valeurs de décalage d'image (haut/bas, droite/gauche) tant pour la face que le dos des pages, afin d'aligner le verso sur le recto en impression recto-verso. Vertical : Recto -10 à +10 (1 pas = 0,05%), Verso -5 à +5 (1 pas = 0,05%) Horizontal : -10 à +10 (1 pas = 0,05%) Décalage image Haut/Bas : -100 à +100 (1 pas = 0,1 mm) Décalage image Drte/Gche -100 à +100 (1 pas = 0,1 mm) Réglages procédé Spécifiez le Réglage décalage de transfert et Niveau de pression. Spécifiez le Régl. Vitesse Traitement du papier autocopiant de grammage compris entre 40 g/m2 et 74 g/m2. Spécifiez Niveau densité Gaufré2 pour un papier Gaufré2 dont le grammage est compris entre 75 g/m2 et 216 g/m2. Rég.Décalage Transf. : Décal. bord avant 1 (Recto) Décal. bord avant 1 (Verso) Décal. bord avant 2 (Recto) Décal. bord avant 2 (Verso) Décal. bord avant 3 (Recto) Décal. bord avant 3 (Verso) Transfert arrière1 (recto) Transfert arrière1 (verso) Transfert arrière2 (recto) Transfert arrière2 (verso) (Plage de réglage : -128 à +127 pour tous.) Réglage du niveau de pression : Par défaut Très faible Niveau de pression faible Niveau de pression moyen Niveau de pression fort Régl. Vitesse Traitement Par défaut, Grande vitesse, Vitesse moyenne, Basse vitesse Réglage Niveau Densité Gaufré2 : Niveau 1 Niveau 2 Niveau 3 Détection d'erreur de centrage Spécifiez ou non la détection de décentrage du papier et le réglage automatique de la position image. Activé, Désactivé Élément de réglage Description Options de réglage 6 Présentation du réglage des magasins 6-10 ineo 1052/1250 6.3 *1 : Sur le module d'insertion de l'Unité de pliage FD-503 et sur le Module d'insertion PI-502, le seul réglage papier disponible est Formats détectés dans Format papier. Lorsque le Thermorelieur PB-503 est installé, les réglages format papier et papier des couvertures de thermoreliure sont disponibles sur le module d'insertion de l'Unité de pliage FD-503. *2 : la capacité d'agrafage de l'Unité de finition FS-532 varie suivant le grammage du papier utilisé ; toutefois, les plages de grammage peuvent différer de celles prédéfinies pour le réglage magasin. Pour plus de détails, voir page 5-3. Régl. détuilage Spécifiez s'il faut détuiler le papier sur la machine. Sélectionnez dans quel sens effectuer le réglage. Le réglage est possible sur un papier dont le grammage est compris entre 40 g/m2 et 244 g/m2. Vers haut correct, Vers le bas correct, Désact. Détect. DblAlim Spécifiez s'il faut pauser la machine pour bourrage en cas de détection d'introduction de plusieurs feuilles à la fois. Activé, Désactivé Réglage Détection biais Spécifiez si le papier introduit de travers doit être détecté. Sélectionnez la valeur seuil d'activation de la détection biais. 1,0%, 0,5%, Désactivé Réglage détuilage sur unité relais Spécifiez ou non le réglage détuilage du papier sur l'Unité relais RU-509. Pour activer le réglage mécanique, sélectionnez le niveau souhaité. Réglage détuilage sur l'unité relais : +2, +1, 0, -1, -2 Réglage Humidificateur : Marche, Arrêt Ventilation Spécifiez la fonction Ventilation qui empêche les départs multiples et les bourrages en envoyant de l'air sur les feuilles introduites. Cette fonction Ventilation n'est pas disponible dans le module d'insertion de l'Unité de pliage FD-503 et pour le module d'insertion PI-502. Mag 1, Mag 2, Mag 3 à 8 (PF-706) : Auto, Activé, Désactivé Mag 3 à Mag 8 (PF-703), MI-PFU1 à MI-PFU3 : Auto, Manuel (1 à 9 pour Bord, 1 à 9 ou Désactivé pour Face) Magasin TR : Activé, Désactivé Mode déshum. Lorsque l'Unité d'alimentation papier PF-703 est équipée du Déshumidificateur HT-505, spécifiez le mode de déshumidification. Auto, Marche forcée, Arrêt immédiat Élément de réglage Description Options de réglage ineo 1052/1250 6-11 6.3 Présentation du réglage des magasins 6 Description des types de papier Type de papier Description Pap. couché Le réglage Papier couché est adapté au papier de qualité supérieure qui présente sur les deux faces un revêtement d'environ 20 à 40 g/m2, y compris le papier dessin et le papier couché. Les principales applications sont les beaux livres d'art, les posters, les calendriers, les catalogues automobiles, les libres, les magazines et les prospectus. Il faut sélectionner "Papier couché" pour tous les magasins prévus à cet effet. Pré-imprimé Spécifiez "Pré-imprimé" pour un magasin prévu pour l'impression sur papier couché déjà imprimé en offset. De même, si un magasin réglé sur "Papier couché" rencontre des problèmes pour introduire du papier couché, modifiez le réglage et sélectionnez "Pré-imprimé." Important : • Le papier pré-imprimé ne peut être chargé que dans l'Unité d'alimentation papier PF-703 (Mag 3 à 8), MI-PFU (MI-PFU1 à MI-PFU3) ou dans l'Unité d'alimentation papier PF-706 équipée du kit d'introduction de papier préimprimé PP-701. • Le papier pré-imprimé ne peut pas être chargé dans les bacs principaux (Mag 1, Mag 2). Qual. supér. Le papier fin est un papier non couché utilisé généralement pour l'impression offset. Ce type de papier présente une grande blancheur et il convient à diverses utilisations. Sélectionnez [Qual. supér.] pour le magasin chargé de papier aux caractéristiques mentionnées ci-dessus. Normal Le papier normal est utilisé pour les opérations générales de copie et d'impression et est appelé "Papier PPC". Il n'est habituellement pas recyclé. Sélectionnez [Normal] pour le magasin chargé de papier ordinaire ou recyclé. Livre/Journal Le papier Livre/Journal sert généralement de support au corps d'un livre. Il se caractérise par une grande opacité pour empêcher le verso de transparaître au recto et vice versa et est souvent de couleur crème pour faciliter la lecture. Sélectionnez [Livre/Journ.] pour le magasin contenant ce type de papier. Gaufré Gaufré renvoie à un type de papier rugueux et peu flexible. Sélectionnez [Gaufré] si les caractéristiques du papier chargé dans le magasin sont celles mentionnées plus haut. Les types de papier fin comme le papier coton sont compris dans cette catégorie. Intercalaire vierge L'intercalaire vierge n'est pas une qualité de papier mais permet l'insertion de feuilles sans qu'elles soient imprimées. Pour utiliser le mode Insertion couverture vierge ou le mode vierge d'insertion, sélectionnez [Interc vierg] pour le magasin contenant du papier déjà imprimé et devant uniquement être introduit ou encore du papier utilisé au titre de pages vierges. Gaufré2 Gaufré2 renvoie à un type de papier dessin gaufré ou papier couché à surface inégale pour effet nacré, tissu, mat ou autres types d'imitation. Les applications majeures sont les couvertures de livres, les pochettes, les bulletins, les conditionnements et les papiers peints. Il faut sélectionner [Gaufré2] pour tous les magasins destinés à recevoir du papier gaufré. 6 Opérations [Réglage magasin] 6-12 ineo 1052/1250 6.4 6.4 Opérations [Réglage magasin] Cette section décrit la procédure opératoire élémentaire de Réglage magasin effectuée en appuyant sur la touche [Réglage magasin] de l'écran Machine. Pour plus de détails sur les réglages disponibles pour les magasins suivants, reportez-vous à la section appropriée de chacun d'eux. REMARQUE Les conditions papier spécifiées dans le réglage magasin peuvent être enregistrées, comme dans l'enregistrement de conditions papier, en appuyant sur [Enr/Sup. régl.Papier] dans l'écran Machine. 6.4.1 Présentation des opérations de réglage magasin 1 Appuyez sur [Réglage magasin] dans l'écran Machine. L'écran de réglage magasin s'affiche. 2 Sélectionnez le magasin auquel attribuer les réglages. % Sélectionnez la touche du magasin souhaité sous "Mag. papier". Les réglages spécifiés pour le magasin sélectionné dans Réglage magasin sont affichés dans la partie droite de l'écran. % Réglage magasin est disponible même lorsque l'impression d'une autre tâche est en cours. 3 Modifiez temporairement le format de papier. % Appuyez sur [Modifier] à droite de "Format papier" pour afficher l'écran Paramétrage formats. Voir page 6-14 pour les détails sur la procédure de réglage. ineo 1052/1250 6-13 6.4 Opérations [Réglage magasin] 6 4 Modifiez temporairement les conditions papier. % Pour rappeler les conditions papier, appuyez sur [Rappeler] dans la partie inférieure droite de l'écran Réglage magasin afin d'afficher l'écran Rappeler. Voir page 6-19 pour les détails sur la procédure de réglage. % Pour modifier les conditions papier, appuyez sur [Modifier] dans la partie inférieure droite de l'écran Réglage magasin afin d'afficher l'écran Modif. paramètres. Voir page 6-20 pour les détails sur la procédure de réglage. % Pour enregistrer les conditions papier, appuyez sur [Enregistrer] dans la partie inférieure centrale de l'écran Réglage magasin afin d'afficher l'écran Enregistrer. Voir page 6-29 pour les détails sur la procédure de réglage. 6 Opérations [Réglage magasin] 6-14 ineo 1052/1250 6.4 5 Spécifiez la fonction Ventilation. % Appuyez sur [Modifier] à droite de "Ventilation" pour afficher l'écran Ventilation. Voir page 6-30 pour les détails sur la procédure de réglage. 6 Vérifiez les réglages actuels affichés dans la liste Réglage magasin. 7 Appuyez sur [Fermer] dans l'écran Réglage magasin pour revenir à l'écran Machine. 6.4.2 Définition du format papier Sélection de [Standard] 1 Sélectionnez [Standard] sur l'écran Paramétrage formats. % Lorsque le magasin est spécifié avec le format [Standard], la machine détecte automatiquement le format standard chargé dans ce magasin. % Les formats standard détectables diffèrent selon le magasin papier. 2 Pour modifier les formats détectables, appuyez sur [Formats détectés]. % Certains groupes de formats présentent quelques nuances, et l'opération de détection automatique du format ne permet pas de les identifier distinctement. Laissez la machine détecter un format spécifique en identifiant ces formats comme un seul et unique format. L'écran Formats détectés s'affiche. ineo 1052/1250 6-15 6.4 Opérations [Réglage magasin] 6 3 Appuyez sur le format désiré dans chaque colonne pour le sélectionner. % Les groupes de formats indétectables individuellement sont classés en colonnes. 4 Appuyez sur [OK]. L'écran Réglage magasin réapparaît. Sélection de [Personnel] 1 Sélectionnez [Personnel] sur l'écran Paramétrage formats. L'écran Format personnalisé s'affiche. 2 Entrez la longueur/largeur du papier. % Appuyez sur [(1)], puis utilisez le pavé numérique de l'écran tactile, [,], [+], ou le clavier du panneau de contrôle pour entrer la longueur souhaitée. Appuyez sur [(2)] pour entrer la largeur désirée de la même manière. % La plage disponible dépend du magasin de papier à charger. 3 Sélectionnez une Pos. image % Sélectionnez [Bord avant], [Bord arrière] ou [Centre] sous "Pos. image" pour spécifier la position image standard. 6 Opérations [Réglage magasin] 6-16 ineo 1052/1250 6.4 4 Pour rappeler un format personnalisé enregistré auparavant, appuyez sur [Rappel format]. L'écran Rappel format s'affiche. % Accédez au format personnalisé désiré avec les touches [Précédent] ou [Suivant]. Les lignes [01] à [20] s'affichent à l'écran. % Appuyez sur la touche numérique du format personnalisé à utiliser, et appuyez sur [OK]. 5 Appuyez sur [OK]. L'écran Réglage magasin réapparaît. dPour info L'enregistrement de format personnalisé peut être effectué avec la touche [Enr/Suppr. form. perso] disponible sur l'écran Machine. Pour plus de détails, voir page 6-68. Sélection de [Format+] 1 Sélectionnez [Format+] sur l'écran Paramétrage formats. L'écran Grand format s'affiche. 2 Appuyez sur la touche de format désirée. 3 Sélectionnez une Pos. image % Sélectionnez [Bord avant], [Bord arrière] ou [Centre] sous "Pos. image" pour spécifier la position image standard. ineo 1052/1250 6-17 6.4 Opérations [Réglage magasin] 6 4 Appuyez sur [Dimensions] pour afficher l'écran Saisir format. % Format+ varie en dimensions même s'il porte le même nom de format. Veillez à vérifier et à introduire les dimensions réelles du papier Format+ à utiliser. 5 Entrez la longueur/largeur du papier. % Appuyez sur [(1)], puis utilisez le pavé numérique de l'écran tactile, [,], [+] ou le clavier du panneau de contrôle pour entrer la longueur souhaitée. La valeur saisie devrait être comprise dans une plage allant de la longueur du format standard correspondant au Format+ sélectionné à l'étape 2, à un maximum de 324 mm. % Appuyez sur [(2)] pour entrer la largeur désirée de la même manière. La valeur saisie doit être comprise dans une plage allant de la largeur du format standard correspondant au Format+ sélectionné à l'étape 2, à un maximum de 483 mm. % La plage disponible dépend du magasin de papier à charger. 6 Appuyez sur [Choisir format] pour revenir à l'écran Choisir format. 7 Appuyez sur [OK]. L'écran Réglage magasin réapparaît. 6 Opérations [Réglage magasin] 6-18 ineo 1052/1250 6.4 Sélection de [Papier onglet] 1 Sélectionnez [Papier onglet] sur l'écran Paramétrage formats. L'écran Papier à onglet s'affiche. 2 Appuyez sur [Papier onglet]. % Le réglage format du papier à onglet est disponible à l'écran pour spécifier un format standard et dans un autre écran pour la spécification d'un format personnalisé. Appuyez sur [Standard] ou [Personnel] pour basculer entre les deux écrans d'affichage. 3 Appuyez sur la touche de format standard désiré. 4 Spécifiez le nombre d'onglets. % Utilisez le pavé de l'écran tactile, [,], ou [+] sous "Nombre d'onglets" pour entrer le nombre d'onglets souhaité. Le nombre admissible va de 1 à 15. 5 Pour personnaliser un format de papier à onglet, appuyez sur [Personnel]. 6 Entrez la longueur/largeur du papier ainsi que la largeur de l'extension onglet du papier. % Appuyez sur [(1)], puis utilisez le pavé numérique de l'écran tactile, [,], [+] ou le clavier du panneau de contrôle pour entrer la longueur souhaitée. Appuyez sur [(2)] pour entrer la largeur désirée de la même manière et sur [(3)] pour la largeur de l'extension onglet. % Si vous souhaitez spécifier le nombre d'onglets, appuyez sur [Nombre d'onglets] pour entrer le nombre d'onglets voulu. 7 Appuyez sur [OK]. L'écran Réglage magasin réapparaît. ineo 1052/1250 6-19 6.4 Opérations [Réglage magasin] 6 6.4.3 Définition des conditions papier : Rappeler 1 Appuyez sur [Rappeler] dans la partie inférieure droite de l'écran Réglage magasin. L'écran Rappeler s'affiche. 2 Sélectionnez les conditions papier enregistrées. % Appuyez sur [+] ou sur [,] pour accéder à l'entrée voulue de la liste des conditions papier et la sélectionner. 3 Pour vérifier les détails, appuyez sur [Infos]. Les détails de la ligne sélectionnée s'affichent. Une fois le contrôle terminé, appuyez sur [Fermer]. 4 Appuyez sur [OK]. L'écran Réglage magasin réapparaît. dPour info L'enregistrement des conditions papier peut se faire dans [Enregistrer] sur l'écran Réglage magasin ou dans [Enr/Sup. régl.Papier] sur l'écran Machine. Pour plus de détails, voir page 6-29 : et page 6-54. 6 Opérations [Réglage magasin] 6-20 ineo 1052/1250 6.4 6.4.4 Définition des conditions papier : Modifier 0 Pour modifier les conditions papier, il est recommandé de commencer par rappeler le réglage voulu en effectuant la procédure "Rappeler", puis d'apporter les modifications nécessaires aux conditions. 1 Appuyez sur [Modifier] à droite de [Rappeler] sous l'écran Réglage magasin. L'écran Modif. paramètres s'affiche. 2 Appuyez sur [Type de papier]. L'écran Type de papier s'affiche. % Sélectionnez la touche du type de papier souhaité sous "Type de papier". 3 Appuyez sur [Grammage]. L'écran Grammage s'affiche. % Spécifiez le grammage papier. % Le papier 301-350 g/m2 n'est disponible que pour Mag 4 et Mag 7. % Lorsque vous sélectionnez Livre/Journ. ou Gaufré comme type de papier, vous pouvez spécifier un grammage compris entre 40 g/m2 et 216 g/m2. % Lorsque vous sélectionnez Gaufré2 comme type de papier, vous pouvez spécifier un grammage compris entre 75 g/m2 et 216 g/m2. ineo 1052/1250 6-21 6.4 Opérations [Réglage magasin] 6 4 Appuyez sur [Couleur papier]. L'écran Papier de couleur s'affiche. % Spécifiez la couleur du papier. 5 Appuyez sur [Perforation]. L'écran Perforation s'affiche. % Sélectionnez [Avec perforation] ou [Sans perforation] dans la fenêtre "Perforation". 6 Opérations [Réglage magasin] 6-22 ineo 1052/1250 6.4 6 Appuyez sur [Calage R°V°]. L'écran Calage recto-verso s'affiche. % Appuyez sur [Recto] ou [Verso] pour sélectionner la face imprimée, puis appuyez sur [Vertical], [Horizontal], [Haut/Bas] ou [Drte/Gche] pour sélectionner un élément de réglage. Utilisez le pavé numérique, [,] ou [+] à l'écran pour entrer la valeur de réglage souhaitée. Appuyez sur [+<->-] pour spécifier une valeur de réglage positive ou négative. Lorsqu'un réglage est modifié, l'indication à droite de [Calage R°V°] devient [Valeur modifiée]. % La mire de réglage est disponible pour le calage recto-verso du réglage magasin. % Voir page 6-72 pour plus de détails sur Calage recto-verso et Mire réglage. 7 Appuyez sur [Réglages procédé]. L'écran Réglages procédé s'affiche. ineo 1052/1250 6-23 6.4 Opérations [Réglage magasin] 6 8 Appuyez sur [Réglage décalage transf.] dans l'écran Réglages procédé. L'écran Rég.Décalage Transf. s'affiche. Les cinq options de décalage "Bord avant 1", "Bord avant 2", "Bord avant 3", "Centre" et "Bord arrière" peuvent être spécifiées pour les faces recto et verso. Contactez votre technicien SAV pour plus d'informations sur les effets ou les combinaisons de réglage. % Sélectionnez la touche du magasin voulu dans la partie gauche de l'écran Rég.Décalage Transf. % Sur le pavé numérique de l'écran tactile ou sur le pavé numérique du panneau de contrôle, entrez la valeur de réglage souhaitée. % Appuyez sur [+<->-] pour spécifier une valeur de réglage positive ou négative. % Lorsque vous appuyez sur [Valider] pour modifier le réglage, les données de décalage (actuelles) sont remplacées par la valeur de réglage entrée. % Choix possible entre -128 et +127. % Appuyez sur [OK] pour valider le réglage. L'indication à droite de [Réglages procédé] devient [Transfert modifié]. 9 Appuyez sur [Niveau de pression] dans l'écran Réglages procédé. L'écran Niveau de pression s'affiche. % Sélectionnez [Niv. pression par défaut], [Très faible], [Niveau de pression faible], [Niveau de pression moyen] ou [Niveau de pression fort] sous "Niveau de pression". Le réglage [Niv. pression par défaut] correspond aux circonstances normales. Si la fixation est inadéquate, augmentez le niveau de pression. Le tuilage papier s'en voit augmenté. Si le tuilage est trop grand, diminuez le niveau de pression. Il peut en résulter une fixation inadéquate. % Appuyez sur [OK] pour valider le réglage. L'indication à droite de [Réglages procédé] devient [Pression modifiée]. 6 Opérations [Réglage magasin] 6-24 ineo 1052/1250 6.4 10 Appuyez sur [Régl. Vitesse Traitement] dans l'écran Réglages procédé. Lorsque le type de papier sélectionné est différent de Gaufré2 ou Intercalaire vierge et que le grammage spécifié est compris entre 40 g/m2 et 74 g/m2, [Régl. Vitesse Traitement] est accessible. L'écran Régl. VitesTraitem s'affiche. % Sélectionnez [Défaut], [Grande vitesse], [Vitesse moyenne] (ineo 1250 uniquement) ou [Basse vitesse] sous "Régl. Vitesse Traitement". Réduisez la vitesse si le papier autocollant produit de la couleur. Contactez le technicien SAV pour plus de détails sur le Régl. Vitesse Traitement. La correspondance entre les vitesses de traitement et les touches à l'écran est indiquée ci-dessous. ineo 1250 % Appuyez sur [OK] pour valider le réglage. ineo 1052 Touche Vitesse Traitement Défaut Varie en fonction du type de papier (grammage) Grande vitesse 570 mm/s Vitesse moyenne 490 mm/s Basse vitesse 330 mm/s Touche Vitesse Traitement Défaut Varie en fonction du type de papier (grammage). Grande vitesse 490 mm/s Basse vitesse 330 mm/s ineo 1052/1250 6-25 6.4 Opérations [Réglage magasin] 6 % Appuyez sur [OK] pour valider le réglage. L'indication à droite de [Réglages procédé] devient [Vitesse modifiée]. 11 Appuyez sur [Niveau densité Gaufré2] sur l'écran Réglages procédé. [Niveau densité Gaufré2] est accessible lorsque le type de papier sélectionné est Gaufré2. L'écran Réglage Niveau Densité Gaufré2 s'affiche. % Sélectionnez [Niveau 1], [Niveau 2] ou [Niveau 3 (par défaut)] sous "Réglage Niveau Densité Gaufré2". Élevez le niveau en cas de défaut d'encrage sur les surfaces inégales de Gaufré2. La consommation de toner augmente en même temps. (Exemple : passage du niveau 2 au niveau 3) Si la densité est plus élevée que prévue, sélectionnez le niveau inférieur. Le défaut d'encrage des surfaces inégales de Gaufré2 est plus probable de se produire. (Exemple : passage du niveau 3 au niveau 2) % Appuyez sur [OK] pour valider le réglage. L'indication à droite de [Réglages procédé] devient [Modifié]. 6 Opérations [Réglage magasin] 6-26 ineo 1052/1250 6.4 12 Appuyez sur [Détect. Err. Centr]. L'écran Détect. Err. Centr s'affiche. % Sélectionnez [Activé] ou [Désact.] dans la fenêtre "Détect. Err. Centr". Pour activer la fonction de détection d'erreur de centrage du papier provenant du magasin sélectionné dans "Magasin papier", sélectionnez [Activé]. La position image est réglée automatiquement en cas de détection d'une erreur de centrage. Pour désactiver la fonction de détection, sélectionnez [Désactivé]. La position image n'est pas réglée automatiquement en cas de détection d'une erreur de centrage. 13 Appuyez sur [Régl. détuilage]. Le [Régl. détuilage] est accessible lorsque le grammage défini est compris entre 40 g/m2 et 244 g/m2. L'écran Régl. détuilage va s'afficher. Sélectionnez s'il faut activer ou non la fonction de réglage du détuilage sur la machine pour le papier provenant du magasin sélectionné dans "Magasin papier". Sélectionnez dans quel sens effectuer le réglage. % Sélectionnez [Vers haut correct], [Vers le bas correct] ou [Désact.] dans la fenêtre Réglage détuilage. ineo 1052/1250 6-27 6.4 Opérations [Réglage magasin] 6 14 Appuyez sur [Détect. DblAlim]. L'écran Détect. DblAlim s'affiche. Spécifiez s'il faut pauser la machine pour bourrage lorsque le système détecte que plus d'une feuille a été envoyée du magasin sélectionné dans "Magasin papier". % Sélectionnez [Activé] ou [Désact.] dans la fenêtre "Détect. DblAlim". 15 Appuyez sur [Régl Dét. Biais]. L'écran Réglage de détection du biais s'affiche. Spécifiez s'il faut pauser la machine pour bourrage lorsque le système détecte qu'une feuille provenant du magasin sélectionné dans "Magasin papier" a été alimentée de travers. Sélectionnez la valeur seuil d'activation de la détection biais. % Sélectionnez [1,0%], [0,5%] ou [Désact.] dans la fenêtre "Régl Dét. Biais". 6 Opérations [Réglage magasin] 6-28 ineo 1052/1250 6.4 16 Appuyez sur [Régl. Détuil. UR] Régl. Détuil. UR est accessible lorsque l'[Unité relais RU-509] est installée. L'écran Réglage détuilage UR s'affiche. L'Unité relais RU-509 propose deux méthodes de détuilage : méthode d'humidification et méthode mécanique. Le réglage du détuilage avec l'humidificateur est disponible lorsque l'Unité relais RU-509 est équipée de l'Humidificateur HM-102. L'unité de réglage du détuilage humidifie le papier pour régler le niveau d'hygrométrie après l'impression, réduisant ainsi le tuilage du papier. REMARQUE Le détuilage mécanique s'applique au papier Couché, Pré-imprimé, Intercalaire vierge, Gaufré et Gaufré2. Les méthodes d'humidification et mécanique de détuilage s'appliquent toutes les deux au papier Qual. supér., Normal et Livre/Journ. En plus de l'unité de détuilage de l'Unité relais RU-509, d'autres éléments de la chaîne de traitement contribuent aussi à détuiler le papier en le refroidissant après impression. % Pour effectuer un réglage détuilage mécanique, sélectionnez [+2], [+1], [0], [-1] ou [-2] pour spécifier le sens et la force du réglage. % La valeur de réglage devient positive ou négative en fonction du réglage du Recto dans Finition de l'impression Recto/Recto-Verso. Reportez-vous au tableau ci-dessous pour la déterminer. Si aucun réglage n'est requis, sélectionnez [0]. % Pour effectuer le réglage de détuilage par humidification, sélectionnez [Oui] à droite de "RéglHumidificateur", ou sélectionnez [Non] dans le cas contraire. Pour les types de papier et les grammages auxquels le réglage détuilage n'est pas applicable, "Incap" s'affiche à droite de "Humidificateur". % Lorsque l'humidificateur est activé, la touche [Initialiser] permet de réinitialiser les réglages suivants. 17 Appuyez sur [OK]. L'écran Réglage magasin réapparaît. Sens de réglage Détuilage Niveau d'intensité [+1][+2] [-1][-2] Type de papier Poids Réglage de détuilage par humidification M/A Normal 62 g/m2 à 74 g/m2 Désactivé ineo 1052/1250 6-29 6.4 Opérations [Réglage magasin] 6 6.4.5 Enregistrement des conditions papier Cette section décrit comment enregistrer les conditions papier spécifiées dans Réglage magasin. dPour info L'enregistrement des conditions papier peut aussi se faire en appuyant sur [Enr/Sup. régl.Papier] dans l'écran Machine. Cette procédure n'inclut pas la spécification d'un magasin et vous pouvez donc définir des conditions papier sans aucune restriction à propos du type de magasin. De même, vous pouvez supprimer les conditions papier enregistrées. Pour plus de détails, voir page 6-64. 1 Appuyez sur [Modifier] à droite de [Rappeler] sous l'écran Réglage magasin. L'écran Modif. paramètres s'affiche. % Suivez la procédure dans "Réglage des conditions papier : Modifier" pour spécifier les conditions papier souhaitées. % Appuyez sur [OK] sur l'écran Modif. paramètres pour revenir à l'écran Réglage magasin. 2 Appuyez sur [Enregistrer] dans l'écran Réglage magasin. L'écran Enregistrer s'affiche. 3 Sélectionnez la destination pour enregistrer les conditions papier. Utilisez les touches de défilement [+] et [,] pour afficher la destination souhaitée, puis appuyez sur la ligne correspondante. L'écran Nommer s'affiche. % Si vous sélectionnez ici un nom affiché dans la colonne Nom, les conditions papier enregistrées pour cette ligne sont remplacées par de nouveaux réglages. 6 Opérations [Réglage magasin] 6-30 ineo 1052/1250 6.4 4 Entrez le nom du papier. % Le nom peut comporter jusqu'à 50 caractères alphanumériques et symboles. % Si vous sélectionnez une ligne qui n'affiche aucun nom dans la colonne Nom, le type de papier que vous avez spécifié apparaît dans le champ de saisie de l'écran Nommer. Pour utiliser ce type de papier comme nom, laissez-le tel quel et appuyez sur [OK]. 5 Appuyez sur [OK]. L'écran Enregistrer réapparaît. 6 Appuyez sur [OK]. L'écran Réglage magasin réapparaît. 7 Appuyez sur [Fermer]. L'écran Machine réapparaît. 6.4.6 Définition de Ventilation Cette section décrit comment définir le réglage Ventilation dans Réglage magasin. REMARQUE Le réglage Ventilation n'est pas disponible pour le module d'insertion de l'Unité de pliage FD-503 et pour le Module d'insertion PI-502. 1 Sélectionnez la touche du magasin souhaité sous "Mag. papier" dans l'écran Réglage magasin. 2 Appuyez sur [Modifier] à droite de "Ventilation". L'écran Ventilation s'affiche. ineo 1052/1250 6-31 6.4 Opérations [Réglage magasin] 6 3 Lorsque vous sélectionnez [Mag 1], [Mag 2] ou [Mag 3] à [Mag 8] de l'Unité d'alimentation papier PF-706 pour Magasin papier et appuyez sur [Modifier] à droite de "Ventilation", l'écran Ventilation s'affiche comme ci-dessous. Sélectionnez [Auto], [Activé], ou [Désact], selon les besoins. Appuyez sur [OK]. 4 Lorsque vous sélectionnez [Mag 3] à [Mag 8] de l'Unité d'alimentation papier PF-703 pour Magasin papier et appuyez sur [Modifier] à droite de "Ventilation", l'écran Ventilation qui s'affiche est le suivant. Sélectionnez [Auto] ou [Manuel]. La sélection de [Manuel] active les réglages suivants : % Avec les touches [Faible] et [Fort] sous "Bord" pour sélectionner le niveau d'air voulu, sur une plage de [1] à [9]. % Avec les touches [Faible] et [Fort] sous "Face" pour sélectionner le niveau d'air voulu, sur une plage de [1] à [9]. Appuyez sur [Désactivé] pour arrêter le débit d'air Face. % Appuyez sur [Impression]. Le magasin spécifié est automatiquement sélectionné. Appuyez sur Départ sur le panneau de contrôle. % Appuyez sur [Fermer]. Répétez les procédures de réglage ci-dessus jusqu'à confirmation de l'introduction appropriée. % Pour l'Unité d'alimentation papier PF-703, vous pouvez ouvrir la trappe de confirmation de la buse d'air et modifier les réglages de ventilation tout en vérifiant visuellement l'introduction du papier. Pour plus de détails, voir page 6-33. Appuyez sur [OK]. 6 Opérations [Réglage magasin] 6-32 ineo 1052/1250 6.4 5 Lorsque vous sélectionnez [MI-PFU1] à [MI-PFU3] sous "Magasin MI" et appuyez sur [Modifier] à droite de "Ventilation", l'écran Ventilation s'affiche comme ci-dessous. Sélectionnez [Auto] ou [Manuel]. La sélection de [Manuel] active les réglages suivants : % Avec les touches [Faible] et [Fort] sous "Bord" pour sélectionner le niveau d'air voulu, sur une plage de [1] à [9]. % Avec les touches [Faible] et [Fort] sous "Face" pour sélectionner le niveau d'air voulu, sur une plage de [1] à [9]. Appuyez sur [Désactivé] pour arrêter le débit d'air Face. Appuyez sur [OK]. 6 Lorsque vous sélectionnez [TR] sous "Magasin TR" et appuyez sur [Modifier] à droite de "Ventilation", l'écran Ventilation s'affiche comme ci-dessous. Sélectionnez [Activé] ou [Désact]. Appuyez sur [OK]. L'écran Réglage magasin réapparaît. ineo 1052/1250 6-33 6.4 Opérations [Réglage magasin] 6 6.4.7 Réglage de la ventilation de l'Unité d'alimentation papier PF-703 Des buses d'air sont implantées au sommet de l'introducteur et des guides latéraux de l'Unité d'alimentation papier PF-703 (Mag 3 à Mag 8). L'air soufflé par les buses facilite la prise et l'introduction du papier. Les conditions de la ventilation sont spécifiées en sélectionnant Auto ou Manuel. Selon le type de papier utilisé, l'introduction peut être plus délicate et entraîner même un bourrage. Dans ce cas, modifiez manuellement les réglages de ventilation. Pour configurer manuellement les réglages en ouvrant la trappe de confirmation du débit d'air et en vérifiant l'état du papier pendant l'introduction. Contactez le technicien SAV pour plus d'informations sur la trappe de confirmation du débit d'air. REMARQUE N'ouvrez pas la trappe de confirmation du débit d'air du Mag 3 et du Mag 6. Pour régler la ventilation pour le Mag 3 ou Mag 6, configurez manuellement les réglages pour un autre magasin que Mag 3 ou Mag 6, puis appliquez la même valeur de réglage. 7 ATTENTION - Ne pas mettre la main dans l'ouverture de la trappe de confirmation du débit d'air lorsque la machine est en service. Sinon, cela présente un risque d'accident. 1 Ouvrez la trappe de confirmation du débit d'air du magasin pour lequel vous voulez configurer manuellement les conditions de la ventilation. % Tirez le magasin, enlevez les deux vis, et puis ouvrez la trappe de confirmation du débit d'air. % Ramenez le magasin à sa position d'origine. REMARQUE Une trappe de confirmation transparente de débit d'air est également disponible. Contactez votre technicien SAV si nécessaire. 2 Avec les touches de magasin, sélectionnez le magasin pour lequel vous désirez changer les conditions de la ventilation. % Sélectionnez un magasin parmi les magasins 4, 5, 7 ou 8. 3 Appuyez sur [Modifier] à droite de "Ventilation". L'écran Ventilation s'affiche. 6 Opérations [Réglage magasin] 6-34 ineo 1052/1250 6.4 4 Appuyez sur [Manuel] et configurez la condition avec les touches qui se trouvent sous Ventilation. % Appuyez sur [Faible] ou [Fort] sous "Bord" pour ajuster le débit d'air. En appuyant sur [Faible], le débit d'air du bord avant diminue et cela peut améliorer l'introduction du papier fin. En appuyant sur [Fort], le débit d'air du bord avant augmente et cela peut améliorer l'introduction de papier épais. % Appuyez sur [Faible] ou [Fort] sous "Face" pour ajuster le débit d'air. En appuyant sur [Faible], le débit d'air du côté diminue et cela peut améliorer l'introduction du papier fin. En appuyant sur [Fort], le débit d'air du côté augmente et cela peut améliorer l'introduction de papier épais. Appuyez sur [Désactivé] pour arrêter le débit d'air Face. 5 Appuyez sur [Impression]. Le magasin spécifié est automatiquement sélectionné. 6 Appuyez sur Départ sur le panneau de contrôle. Vérifiez l'état de l'introduction du papier par la trappe de confirmation du débit d'air. 7 Appuyez sur [Fermer] pour restaurer l'écran Ventilation. 8 Répétez l'étape 4 à 7 jusqu'à ce que le réglage soit terminé. 9 Appuyez sur [OK]. ineo 1052/1250 6-35 6.4 Opérations [Réglage magasin] 6 10 Appuyez sur [Fermer]. L'écran Machine réapparaît. 11 Replacez la trappe de confirmation du débit d'air retirée à l'étape 1. % Tirez le magasin et remettez la trappe de confirmation du débit d'air soufflerie en place avec les deux vis. % Ramenez le magasin à sa position d'origine. 6.4.8 Réglage du mode de déshumidification de l'Unité d'alimentation papier PF-703 Cette section décrit les modalités de réglage du mode de déshumidification dans Réglage magasin. REMARQUE Lorsque l'Unité d'alimentation papier PF-703 est équipée du Déshumidificateur HT-505 en option, le mode de déshumidification peut être activé pour l'unité d'alimentation papier. REMARQUE Ce réglage est disponible dans Réglage magasin. Papier et Enregistrer/Supprimer réglage papier ne proposent pas ce réglage. 1 Sélectionnez la touche du magasin souhaité sous "Mag. papier" dans l'écran Réglage magasin. 2 Appuyez sur [Modifier] à droite de la touche "Mode déshum." L'écran de réglage du mode de déshumidification s'affiche. 3 Sélectionnez [Auto], [Marche forcée] ou [Arrêt immédiat], selon les besoins. 6 Opérations [Réglage magasin] 6-36 ineo 1052/1250 6.4 4 Appuyez sur [OK]. L'écran Réglage magasin réapparaît. 5 Appuyez sur [Fermer]. L'écran Machine réapparaît. 6.4.9 Réglage Papier du magasin MI-PFU Les magasins MI-PFU sont les magasins papier d'un module d'insertion installé avec un kit d'insertion FA-501 dans l'Unité d'alimentation PF-703. Le papier suivant peut être chargé dans les magasins MI-PFU : le papier chargé dans les magasins MI-PFU ne peut pas être pour la copie/l'impression. - Couverture/Dos/Intercalaire pour Insertion intercalaires - Couverture de thermoreliure Définissez les magasins pour Insertions intercalaires en spécifiant le réglage Formats détectés, la configuration commune entre les réglages Couverture thermoreliure et Ventilation. Le réglage Formats détectés permet l'identification par la machine d'un format particulier parmi divers formats similaires qui sont autrement impossibles à différencier. La configuration commune comprend les éléments Nom, Type de papier, Grammage et Détect. DblAlim. Le réglage Ventilation permet de spécifier la commande automatique ou manuelle de la ventilation. Réglage magasin pour l'insertion d'intercalaires Les magasins MI détectent automatiquement les formats papier standard. 1 Sélectionnez [MI-PFU1], [MI-PFU2] ou [MI-PFU3] dans la fenêtre "Magasin MI" de l'écran Réglage magasin. Le réglage spécifié pour le magasin sélectionné dans Réglage magasin est affiché dans la partie droite de l'écran. 2 Appuyez sur [Format détecté] sous "Régl. Fonction standard(Couv., interc., etc.)" L'écran Formats détectés s'affiche. ineo 1052/1250 6-37 6.4 Opérations [Réglage magasin] 6 3 Appuyez sur le format désiré dans chaque colonne pour le sélectionner. % Pour changer de format détecté, sélectionnez le format souhaité. 4 Appuyez sur [OK]. Pour annuler la modification, appuyez sur [Annuler]. 5 Appuyez sur [Rappeler] sous "Configuration commune". % Si vous souhaitez modifier le réglage papier, passez à l'étape 7. L'écran Rappeler s'affiche. 6 Opérations [Réglage magasin] 6-38 ineo 1052/1250 6.4 6 Sélectionnez les conditions papier pour l'insertion d'intercalaires. Appuyez sur [+] ou [,] pour accéder à la condition papier voulue de la liste et sélectionner le numéro. Appuyez sur [OK]. 7 Appuyez sur [Modifier] sous "Configuration commune". 8 Sélectionnez les conditions papier souhaitées (type de papier, grammage, détection double alimentation) pour l'insertion d'intercalaires. ineo 1052/1250 6-39 6.4 Opérations [Réglage magasin] 6 Appuyez sur [Type de papier] et sélectionnez le type souhaité dans la partie droite de l'écran. Appuyez sur [Grammage] et sélectionnez le grammage souhaité dans la partie droite de l'écran. Appuyez sur [Détect. DblAlim] et sélectionnez [Activé] ou [Désactivé]. Appuyez sur [OK]. 9 Appuyez sur [Modifier] à droite de "Ventilation". L'écran Ventilation s'affiche. 10 Sélectionnez [Auto] ou [Manuel] sous "Ventilation". La sélection de [Manuel] active les réglages suivants : % Avec les touches [Faible] et [Fort] sous "Bord" pour sélectionner le niveau d'air voulu, sur une plage de [1] à [9]. % Avec les touches [Faible] et [Fort] sous "Face" pour sélectionner le niveau d'air voulu, sur une plage de [1] à [9]. Appuyez sur [Désactivé] pour arrêter le débit d'air Face. Appuyez sur [OK]. L'écran Réglage magasin réapparaît. 11 Appuyez sur [Enregistrer] pour enregistrer les conditions papier spécifiées ici. Appuyez sur [+] ou [,] pour accéder au numéro d'enregistrement souhaité et appuyez sur la touche numérique pour entrer le nom souhaité. 12 Appuyez sur [OK]. L'écran Réglage magasin réapparaît. 6 Opérations [Réglage magasin] 6-40 ineo 1052/1250 6.4 Réglage magasin pour les couvertures de thermoreliure 1 Sélectionnez [MI-PFU1], [MI-PFU2] ou [MI-PFU3] dans la fenêtre "Magasin MI" de l'écran Réglage magasin. Le réglages spécifié pour le magasin sélectionné dans Réglage magasin est affiché dans la partie droite de l'écran. 2 Appuyez sur [Modifier] pour [Format papier] sous "Réglage couverture thermoreliure". L'écran Configuration format original s'affiche. 3 Spécifiez le format personnalisé pour les couvertures de thermoreliure. Appuyez sur les touches correspondantes aux valeurs verticales et horizontales du papier, puis utilisez le clavier, [,] ou [+] pour entrer le format désiré. Pour rappeler un format personnalisé enregistré auparavant, appuyez sur [Rappel format]. ineo 1052/1250 6-41 6.4 Opérations [Réglage magasin] 6 Appuyez sur [Suivant] ou [Précédent] pour rechercher et sélectionner la touche souhaitée pour un format personnalisé enregistré et appuyez sur [OK]. Appuyez sur [OK] sur l'écran Réglage format. 4 Appuyez sur [Rappeler] sous "Configuration commune". % Si vous souhaitez modifier le réglage papier, passez à l'étape 6. L'écran Rappeler s'affiche. 6 Opérations [Réglage magasin] 6-42 ineo 1052/1250 6.4 5 Sélectionnez les conditions papier pour les couvertures de thermoreliure. Appuyez sur [+] ou [,] pour accéder à la condition papier voulue de la liste et sélectionner le numéro. Appuyez sur [OK]. 6 Appuyez sur [Modifier] sous "Configuration commune". 7 Spécifiez les conditions papier souhaitées (type de papier, grammage, Détect. DblAlim) pour les couvertures de thermoreliure. ineo 1052/1250 6-43 6.4 Opérations [Réglage magasin] 6 Appuyez sur [Type de papier] et sélectionnez le type souhaité dans la partie droite de l'écran. Appuyez sur [Grammage] et sélectionnez le grammage souhaité dans la partie droite de l'écran. Appuyez sur [Détect. DblAlim] et sélectionnez [Activé] ou [Désactivé]. Appuyez sur [OK]. 8 Appuyez sur [Modifier] à droite de "Ventilation". L'écran Ventilation s'affiche. 9 Sélectionnez [Auto] ou [Manuel] sous "Ventilation". La sélection de [Manuel] active les réglages suivants : % Avec les touches [Faible] et [Fort] sous "Bord" pour sélectionner le niveau d'air voulu, sur une plage de [1] à [9]. % Avec les touches [Faible] et [Fort] sous "Face" pour sélectionner le niveau d'air voulu, sur une plage de [1] à [9]. Appuyez sur [Désactivé] pour arrêter le débit d'air Face. Appuyez sur [OK]. L'écran Réglage magasin réapparaît. 10 Appuyez sur [Enregistrer] pour enregistrer les conditions papier spécifiées ici. Appuyez sur [+] ou [,] pour accéder au numéro d'enregistrement souhaité et appuyez sur la touche numérique pour entrer le nom souhaité. 11 Appuyez sur [OK]. L'écran Réglage magasin réapparaît. 6 Opérations [Réglage magasin] 6-44 ineo 1052/1250 6.4 6.4.10 Configuration du magasin TR Le magasin TR est le magasin couverture du Thermorelieur PB-503. Le magasin TR reçoit uniquement des couvertures de thermoreliure, d'où la nécessité de spécifier un format papier personnalisé. Les conditions papier doivent également spécifier le type de papier et le grammage et la ventilation doit être activée ou désactivée. Réglage magasin pour les couvertures de thermoreliure 1 Appuyez sur [TR] sous "Magasin TR" dans l'écran Réglage magasin. Le réglage du magasin est affiché dans la partie droite de l'écran Réglage magasin. 2 Appuyez sur [Modifier] à droite de "Format papier". L'écran Configuration format original s'affiche. 3 Spécifiez le format personnalisé pour les couvertures de thermoreliure. Appuyez sur les touches correspondantes aux valeurs verticales et horizontales du papier, puis utilisez le clavier, [,] ou [+] pour entrer le format désiré. Pour rappeler un format personnalisé enregistré auparavant, appuyez sur [Rappel format]. ineo 1052/1250 6-45 6.4 Opérations [Réglage magasin] 6 Appuyez sur [Suivant] ou [Précédent] pour rechercher et sélectionner la touche souhaitée pour un format personnalisé enregistré et appuyez sur [OK]. Appuyez sur [OK] sur l'écran Réglage format. 4 Appuyez sur [Rappeler] sous "Nom", "Type de papier" et "Grammage". % Si vous souhaitez modifier le réglage papier, passez à l'étape 6. 6 Opérations [Réglage magasin] 6-46 ineo 1052/1250 6.4 5 Sélectionnez les couvertures de thermoreliure. Appuyez sur [+] ou [,] pour accéder à la condition papier voulue de la liste et sélectionner le numéro. Appuyez sur [OK]. 6 Appuyez sur [Modifier] sous "Nom", "Type de papier" et "Grammage". 7 Spécifiez les conditions papier souhaitées (type de papier, grammage) pour les couvertures de thermoreliure. ineo 1052/1250 6-47 6.4 Opérations [Réglage magasin] 6 Appuyez sur [Type de papier] et sélectionnez le type souhaité dans la partie droite de l'écran. Appuyez sur [Grammage] et sélectionnez le grammage souhaité dans la partie droite de l'écran. Appuyez sur [OK]. 8 Appuyez sur [Modifier] à droite de "Ventilation". L'écran Ventilation s'affiche. 9 Sélectionnez [Activé] ou [Désact] sous "Ventilation". Appuyez sur [OK]. L'écran Réglage magasin réapparaît. 10 Appuyez sur [Enregistrer] pour enregistrer les conditions papier spécifiées ici. Appuyez sur [+] ou [,] pour accéder au numéro d'enregistrement souhaité et appuyez sur la touche numérique pour entrer le nom souhaité. 11 Appuyez sur [OK]. L'écran Réglage magasin réapparaît. 6 Opérations [Réglage magasin] 6-48 ineo 1052/1250 6.4 6.4.11 Réglage des bacs insertion : module d'insertion de l'Unité de pliage FD-503 Les bacs insertion sont les magasins du module d'insertion de l'Unité de pliage FD-503 ou du Module d'insertion PI-502 installé dans l'Unité de finition FS-532. Le module d'insertion de l'Unité de pliage FD-503 peut recevoir le papier suivant. - Couverture/Dos/Intercalaire pour Insertion intercalaires - Couverture de thermoreliure - Feuilles de papier à perforer/plier/plier et agrafer/agrafer manuellement Les formats détectables peuvent être modifiés dans Réglage magasin de façon à charger les feuilles de couverture/dos/insertion de l'option Insertion intercalaires dans le bac d'insertion. Aucun autre paramétrage de magasin n'est nécessaire. Pour charger des couvertures de thermoreliure, spécifiez un format papier personnalisé pour le réglage magasin, ainsi qu'un type de papier et un grammage pour les conditions papier. Aucun paramétrage de magasin n'est nécessaire pour le papier à perforer/plier/plier et agrafer/agrafer manuellement. Modification des formats standard détectables pour l'insertion d'intercalaires Configurez les magasins d'insertion d'intercalaires en spécifiant les formats détectés. Le réglage Formats détectés permet l'identification par la machine d'un format particulier parmi divers formats similaires qui sont autrement impossibles à différencier. 1 Sélectionnez [BI 1] ou [BI 2] sous [Bac insert.] dans l'écran Réglage magasin. Les réglages du magasin sélectionné sur l'écran Réglage magasin sont affichés. 2 Appuyez sur [Format détecté] sous "Régl. Fonction standard(Couv., interc., etc.)" L'écran Formats détectés s'affiche. ineo 1052/1250 6-49 6.4 Opérations [Réglage magasin] 6 3 Appuyez sur le format désiré dans chaque colonne pour le sélectionner. % Pour changer de format détecté, sélectionnez le format souhaité. 4 Appuyez sur [OK]. L'écran Réglage magasin réapparaît. Réglage papier pour les couvertures de thermoreliure Configurez les magasins pour les couvertures de thermoreliure en spécifiant le format papier, le type de papier et le grammage. Le réglage Ventilation n'est pas disponible. 1 Sélectionnez [BI 1] ou [BI 2] sous [Bac insert.] dans l'écran Réglage magasin. Le réglages spécifié pour le magasin sélectionné dans Réglage magasin est affiché dans la partie droite de l'écran. 2 Appuyez sur [Modifier] pour [Format papier] sous "Réglage couverture thermoreliure". L'écran Configuration format original s'affiche. 6 Opérations [Réglage magasin] 6-50 ineo 1052/1250 6.4 3 Spécifiez le format personnalisé pour les couvertures de thermoreliure. Appuyez sur les touches correspondantes aux valeurs verticales et horizontales du papier, puis utilisez le clavier, [,] ou [+] pour entrer le format désiré. Pour rappeler un format personnalisé enregistré auparavant, appuyez sur [Rappel format]. Appuyez sur [Suivant] ou [Précédent] pour rechercher et sélectionner la touche souhaitée pour un format personnalisé enregistré et appuyez sur [OK]. Appuyez sur [OK] sur l'écran Réglage format. ineo 1052/1250 6-51 6.4 Opérations [Réglage magasin] 6 4 Appuyez sur [Rappeler] sous "Nom", "Type de papier" et "Grammage". % Si vous souhaitez modifier le réglage papier, passez à l'étape 6. 5 Sélectionnez les conditions papier pour les couvertures de thermoreliure. Appuyez sur [+] ou [,] pour accéder à la condition papier voulue de la liste et sélectionner le numéro. Appuyez sur [OK]. 6 Appuyez sur [Modifier] sous "Nom", "Type de papier" et "Grammage". 6 Opérations [Réglage magasin] 6-52 ineo 1052/1250 6.4 7 Spécifiez les conditions papier souhaitées (type de papier, grammage) pour les couvertures de thermoreliure. Appuyez sur [Type de papier] et sélectionnez le type souhaité dans la partie droite de l'écran. Appuyez sur [Grammage] et sélectionnez le grammage souhaité dans la partie droite de l'écran. Appuyez sur [OK]. 8 Appuyez sur [Enregistrer] pour enregistrer les conditions papier spécifiées ici. Appuyez sur [+] ou [,] pour accéder au numéro d'enregistrement souhaité et appuyez sur la touche numérique pour entrer le nom souhaité. 9 Appuyez sur [OK]. L'écran Réglage magasin réapparaît. 6.4.12 Réglage des bacs insertion : Module d'insertion PI-502 Les bacs insertion sont les magasins du module d'insertion de l'Unité de pliage FD-503 ou du Module d'insertion PI-502 installé dans l'Unité de finition FS-532. Le Module d'insertion PI-502 peut recevoir le papier suivant. - Couverture/Dos/Intercalaire pour Insertion intercalaires - Feuilles de papier à perforer/plier/plier et agrafer/agrafer manuellement Les formats détectables peuvent être modifiés dans Réglage magasin de façon à charger les feuilles de couverture/dos/insertion de l'option Insertion intercalaires dans le bac d'insertion. Aucun autre paramétrage de magasin n'est nécessaire. Aucun paramétrage de magasin n'est nécessaire pour le papier à perforer/plier/plier et agrafer/agrafer manuellement. ineo 1052/1250 6-53 6.4 Opérations [Réglage magasin] 6 Modification des formats standard détectables pour Insertion intercalaires Configurez les magasins d'insertion d'intercalaires en spécifiant les formats détectés. Le réglage Formats détectés permet l'identification par la machine d'un format particulier parmi divers formats similaires qui sont autrement impossibles à différencier. 1 Sélectionnez [BI 1] ou [BI 2] sous [Bac insert.] dans l'écran Réglage magasin. Les réglages du magasin sélectionné sur l'écran Réglage magasin sont affichés. 2 Appuyez sur [Format détecté] sous "Réglage magasin". L'écran Formats détectés s'affiche. 3 Appuyez sur le format désiré dans chaque colonne pour le sélectionner. % Pour changer de format détecté, sélectionnez le format souhaité. 4 Appuyez sur [OK]. L'écran Réglage magasin réapparaît. 6 Opération [Enr/Sup. régl.Papier] 6-54 ineo 1052/1250 6.5 6.5 Opération [Enr/Sup. régl.Papier] Cette section décrit la procédure opératoire élémentaire d'enregistrement ou de suppression des conditions papier effectuée en appuyant sur [Enr/Sup. régl.Papier] dans l'écran Machine. 6.5.1 Enregistrement des conditions papier 1 Appuyez sur l'onglet [MACHINE] pour afficher l'écran Machine. 2 Appuyez sur [Enr/Sup. régl.Papier]. L'écran Enregistrer/Supprimer réglage papier s'affiche. 3 Sélectionnez la destination pour enregistrer les conditions papier. Utilisez les touches de défilement [+] et [,] pour afficher la destination souhaitée, puis appuyez sur la ligne correspondante. % Pour modifier des conditions papier préalablement enregistrées, sélectionnez la ligne correspondante. 4 Appuyez sur [Ajouter/Modifier]. L'écran Ajouter/Modifier s'affiche. ineo 1052/1250 6-55 6.5 Opération [Enr/Sup. régl.Papier] 6 5 Appuyez sur [Type de papier]. L'écran Type de papier s'affiche. % Sélectionnez la touche du type de papier souhaité sous [Type de papier]. 6 Appuyez sur [Nom]. L'écran Nommer s'affiche. 7 Entrez le nom du papier. % Le nom peut comporter jusqu'à 50 caractères alphanumériques et symboles. % Si vous sélectionnez une ligne qui n'affiche aucun nom dans la colonne Nom, le type de papier que vous avez spécifié apparaît dans le champ de saisie de l'écran Nommer. Pour utiliser ce type de papier comme nom, laissez-le tel quel et appuyez sur [OK]. 8 Appuyez sur [OK]. L'écran Ajouter/Modifier réapparaît. 6 Opération [Enr/Sup. régl.Papier] 6-56 ineo 1052/1250 6.5 9 Appuyez sur [Grammage]. L'écran Grammage s'affiche. % Spécifiez le grammage papier. 10 Appuyez sur [Couleur papier]. L'écran Papier de couleur s'affiche. % Spécifiez la couleur du papier. ineo 1052/1250 6-57 6.5 Opération [Enr/Sup. régl.Papier] 6 11 Appuyez sur [Perforation]. L'écran Perforation s'affiche. % Sélectionnez [Avec perforation] ou [Sans perforation] dans la fenêtre [Perforation]. 12 Appuyez sur [Calage R°V°]. L'écran Calage recto-verso s'affiche. % Appuyez sur [Recto] ou [Verso] pour sélectionner la face imprimée, puis appuyez sur [Vertical], [Horizontal], [Haut/Bas] ou [Drte/Gche] pour sélectionner un élément de réglage. Utilisez le pavé numérique, [,] ou [+] à l'écran pour entrer la valeur de réglage souhaitée. Appuyez sur [+<->-] pour spécifier une valeur de réglage positive ou négative. Lorsqu'un réglage est modifié, l'indication à droite de [Calage R°V°] devient [Valeur modifiée]. % Voir page 6-72 pour plus de détails sur Calage recto-verso. 6 Opération [Enr/Sup. régl.Papier] 6-58 ineo 1052/1250 6.5 13 Appuyez sur [Réglages procédé]. L'écran Réglages procédé s'affiche. 14 Appuyez sur [Réglage décalage transf.] dans l'écran Réglages procédé. L'écran Rég.Décalage Transf. s'affiche. Les cinq options de décalage "Bord avant 1", "Bord avant 2", "Bord avant 3", "Centre" et "Bord arrière" peuvent être spécifiées pour les faces recto et verso. Contactez votre technicien SAV pour plus d'informations sur les effets ou les combinaisons de réglage. % Sélectionnez la touche du magasin voulu dans la partie gauche de l'écran Rég.Décalage Transf. % Sur le pavé numérique de l'écran tactile ou sur le pavé numérique du panneau de contrôle, entrez la valeur de réglage souhaitée. % Appuyez sur [+<->-] pour spécifier une valeur de réglage positive ou négative. % Lorsque vous appuyez sur [Valider] pour modifier le réglage, les données de décalage (actuelles) sont remplacées par la valeur de réglage entrée. % Choix possible entre -128 et +127. % Appuyez sur [OK] pour valider le réglage. L'indication à droite de [Réglages procédé] devient [Transfert modifié]. ineo 1052/1250 6-59 6.5 Opération [Enr/Sup. régl.Papier] 6 15 Appuyez sur [Niveau de pression] dans l'écran Réglages procédé. L'écran Niveau de pression s'affiche. % Sélectionnez [Niv. pression par défaut], [Très faible], [Niveau de pression faible], [Niveau de pression moyen] ou [Niveau de pression fort] sous "Niveau de pression". Le réglage [Niv. pression par défaut] correspond aux circonstances normales. Si la fixation est inadéquate, augmentez le niveau de pression. Le tuilage papier s'en voit augmenté. En cas de tuilage excessif, diminuez le niveau de pression. Il peut en résulter une fixation inadéquate. % Appuyez sur [OK] pour valider le réglage. L'indication à droite de [Réglages procédé] devient [Pression modifiée]. 16 Appuyez sur [Régl. Vitesse Traitement] dans l'écran Réglages procédé. Lorsque le type de papier sélectionné est différent de Gaufré2 ou Intercalaire vierge et que le grammage spécifié est compris entre 40 g/m2 et 74 g/m2, [Régl. Vitesse Traitement] est accessible. L'écran Régl. VitesTraitem s'affiche. % Sélectionnez [Défaut], [Grande vitesse], [Vitesse moyenne] (ineo 1250 uniquement) ou [Basse vitesse] sous "Régl. Vitesse Traitement". Réduisez la vitesse si le papier autocollant produit de la couleur. Contactez le technicien SAV pour plus de détails sur le réglage de vitesse de traitement. La correspondance entre les vitesses de traitement et les touches à l'écran est indiquée ci-dessous. ineo 1250 Touche Vitesse Traitement Défaut Varie en fonction du type de papier (grammage) Grande vitesse 570 mm/s Vitesse moyenne 490 mm/s Basse vitesse 330 mm/s 6 Opération [Enr/Sup. régl.Papier] 6-60 ineo 1052/1250 6.5 % Appuyez sur [OK] pour valider le réglage. ineo 1052 % Appuyez sur [OK] pour valider le réglage. L'indication à droite de [Réglages procédé] devient [Vitesse modifiée]. Touche Vitesse Traitement Défaut Varie en fonction du type de papier (grammage) Grande vitesse 490 mm/s Basse vitesse 330 mm/s ineo 1052/1250 6-61 6.5 Opération [Enr/Sup. régl.Papier] 6 17 Appuyez sur [Niveau densité Gaufré2] sur l'écran Réglages procédé. [Niveau densité Gaufré2] est accessible lorsque le type de papier sélectionné est Gaufré2. L'écran Réglage Niveau Densité Gaufré2 s'affiche. % Sélectionnez [Niveau 1], [Niveau 2] ou [Niveau 3 (par défaut)] sous "Réglage Niveau Densité Gaufré2". Élevez le niveau en cas de défaut d'encrage sur les surfaces inégales de Gaufré2. La consommation de toner augmente en même temps. (Exemple : passage du niveau 2 au niveau 3) Si la densité est plus élevée que prévue, sélectionnez le niveau inférieur. Le défaut d'encrage des surfaces inégales de Gaufré2 est plus probable de se produire. (Exemple : passage du niveau 3 au niveau 2) % Appuyez sur [OK] pour valider le réglage. L'indication à droite de [Réglages procédé] devient [Modifié]. 18 Appuyez sur [Détect. Err. Centr]. L'écran Détect. Err. Centr s'affiche. % Sélectionnez [Activé] ou [Désact] dans la fenêtre "Détect. Err. Centr". Pour activer la fonction de détection d'erreur de centrage du papier provenant du magasin sélectionné dans "Magasin papier", sélectionnez [Activé]. La position image est réglée automatiquement en cas de détection d'une erreur de centrage. Pour désactiver la fonction de détection, sélectionnez [Désact]. La position image n'est pas réglée automatiquement en cas de détection d'une erreur de centrage. 6 Opération [Enr/Sup. régl.Papier] 6-62 ineo 1052/1250 6.5 19 Appuyez sur [Régl. détuilage]. Le [Régl. détuilage] est accessible lorsque le grammage défini est compris entre 40 g/m2 et 244 g/m2. L'écran Régl. détuilage va s'afficher. Sélectionnez s'il faut activer ou non la fonction de réglage du détuilage sur la machine pour le papier provenant du magasin sélectionné dans "Magasin papier". Sélectionnez dans quel sens effectuer le réglage. % Sélectionnez [Vers haut correct], [Vers le bas correct] ou [Désact] dans la fenêtre Réglage détuilage. 20 Appuyez sur [Détect. DblAlim]. L'écran Détect. DblAlim s'affiche. Spécifiez s'il faut pauser la machine pour bourrage lorsque le système détecte que plus d'une feuille a été envoyée du magasin sélectionné dans "Magasin papier". % Sélectionnez [Activé] ou [Désact] dans la fenêtre "Détect. DblAlim". ineo 1052/1250 6-63 6.5 Opération [Enr/Sup. régl.Papier] 6 21 Appuyez sur [Régl Dét. Biais.] L'écran Réglage de détection du biais s'affiche. Spécifiez s'il faut pauser la machine pour bourrage lorsque le système détecte qu'une feuille provenant du magasin sélectionné dans "Magasin papier" a été alimentée de travers. Sélectionnez la valeur seuil d'activation de la détection biais. % Sélectionnez [1,0%], [0,5%] ou [Désact] dans la fenêtre "Régl Dét. Biais". 22 Appuyez sur [Régl. Détuil. UR] Régl. Détuil. UR est accessible lorsque l'[Unité relais RU-509] est installée. L'écran Réglage détuilage RU s'affiche. L'Unité relais RU-509 propose deux méthodes de détuilage : méthode d'humidification et méthode mécanique. Le réglage du détuilage avec l'humidificateur est disponible lorsque l'Unité relais RU-509 est équipée de l'Humidificateur HM-102. L'unité de réglage du détuilage humidifie le papier pour régler le niveau d'hygrométrie après l'impression, réduisant ainsi le tuilage du papier. REMARQUE Le détuilage mécanique s'applique au papier Couché, Pré-imprimé, Intercalaire vierge, Gaufré et Gaufré2. Les méthodes d'humidification et mécanique de détuilage s'appliquent toutes les deux au papier Qual. supér., Normal et Livre/Journ. En plus de l'unité de détuilage de l'Unité relais RU-509, d'autres éléments de la chaîne de traitement contribuent aussi à détuiler le papier en le refroidissant après impression. % Pour effectuer un réglage détuilage mécanique, sélectionnez [+2], [+1], [0], [-1] ou [-2] pour spécifier le sens et la force du réglage. % La valeur de réglage devient positive ou négative en fonction du réglage du Recto dans Finition de l'impression Recto/Recto-Verso. Reportez-vous au tableau ci-dessous pour la déterminer. Si aucun réglage n'est requis, sélectionnez [0]. 6 Opération [Enr/Sup. régl.Papier] 6-64 ineo 1052/1250 6.5 % Pour effectuer le réglage de détuilage par humidification, sélectionnez [Oui] à droite de "Humidificateur", ou sélectionnez [Non] dans le cas contraire. Pour les types de papier et les grammages auxquels le réglage détuilage n'est pas applicable, "Incap" s'affiche à droite de "Humidificateur". % Lorsque l'humidificateur est activé, la touche [Initialiser] permet de réinitialiser les réglages suivants. 23 Appuyez sur [OK]. L'écran Réglage magasin réapparaît. 6.5.2 Supprimer les Conditions Papier 1 Appuyez sur l'onglet [MACHINE] pour afficher l'écran Machine. 2 Appuyez sur [Enr/Sup. régl.Papier]. L'écran Enregistrer/Supprimer réglage papier s'affiche. Sens de réglage Détuilage Niveau d'intensité [+1][+2] [-1][-2] Type de papier Poids Réglage de détuilage par humidification M/A Normal 62 g/m2 à 74 g/m2 Désactivé ineo 1052/1250 6-65 6.5 Opération [Enr/Sup. régl.Papier] 6 3 Sélectionnez la ligne de l'enregistrement à supprimer. Utilisez les touches de défilement [+] et [,] pour afficher la destination à supprimer, puis appuyez sur la ligne correspondante. 4 Appuyez sur [Supprimer]. Un dialogue de confirmation apparaît. 5 Appuyez sur [Oui]. La ligne sélectionnée à l'étape 3 est supprimée. 6 Appuyez sur [OK] dans l'écran Enregistrer/Supprimer réglage papier. L'écran Machine réapparaît. 6 Opération [Enr/Sup. régl.Papier] 6-66 ineo 1052/1250 6.5 6.5.3 Affichage des détails des conditions papier 1 Appuyez sur l'onglet [MACHINE] pour afficher l'écran Machine. 2 Appuyez sur [Enr/Sup. régl.Papier]. L'écran Enregistrer/Supprimer réglage papier s'affiche. 3 Sélectionnez une rangée pour afficher les détails d'enregistrement. Utilisez les touches de défilement [+] et [,] pour afficher la destination, puis appuyez sur la ligne correspondante. ineo 1052/1250 6-67 6.5 Opération [Enr/Sup. régl.Papier] 6 4 Appuyez sur [Infos]. L'écran Infos s'affiche. 5 Appuyez sur [Fermer] dans l'écran Infos. L'écran Enregistrer/Supprimer réglage papier réapparaît. 6 Appuyez sur [OK] dans l'écran Enregistrer/Supprimer réglage papier. L'écran Machine réapparaît. 6 Opérations [Enr/Suppr.form.perso] 6-68 ineo 1052/1250 6.6 6.6 Opérations [Enr/Suppr.form.perso] Cette section décrit la procédure opératoire élémentaire d'enregistrement ou de suppression des formats personnalisés effectuée en appuyant sur [Enr/Suppr. form.perso] dans l'écran Machine. 6.6.1 Enregistrement des formatalisés 1 Appuyez sur l'onglet [MACHINE] pour afficher l'écran Machine. 2 Appuyez sur [Enr/Suppr.form.perso]. L'écran Enr/Suppr. form perso s'affiche. 3 Sélectionnez la destination d'enregistrement d'un format personnalisé. % Accédez à la destination voulue avec les touches [Précédent] ou [Suivant]. Les lignes [01] à [20] s'affichent à l'écran. % Sélectionnez la touche numérique d'enregistrement souhaitée. 4 Appuyez sur [Ajouter/Modifier]. L'écran Ajouter/Modifier s'affiche. 5 Entrez la longueur/largeur du papier. % Appuyez sur [(1)], puis utilisez le pavé numérique de l'écran tactile, [,], [+] ou le clavier du panneau de contrôle pour entrer la longueur souhaitée. La plage de longueur disponible est comprise entre 95 et 324 mm. % Appuyez sur [(2)] pour entrer la largeur désirée de la même manière. La plage de largeur disponible est comprise entre 133 et 483 mm. ineo 1052/1250 6-69 6.6 Opérations [Enr/Suppr.form.perso] 6 6 Sélectionnez une [Pos. image] % Sélectionnez [Bord avant], [Bord arrière] ou [Centre] sous [Pos. image] pour spécifier la position image standard. 7 Appuyez sur [OK]. L'écran Nom du format personnalisé s'affiche. 8 Entrez le nom de format personnalisé souhaité. % Le nom d'un format personnalisé peut comporter jusqu'à 9 caractères alphanumériques et symboles. 9 Appuyez sur [OK]. L'écran Enr/Suppr. form perso réapparaît. 10 Appuyez sur [Fermer]. L'écran Machine réapparaît. 6 Opérations [Enr/Suppr.form.perso] 6-70 ineo 1052/1250 6.6 6.6.2 Suppression de formats personnalisés 1 Appuyez sur l'onglet [MACHINE] pour afficher l'écran Machine. 2 Appuyez sur [Enr/Suppr.form.perso]. L'écran Enr/Suppr. form perso s'affiche. 3 Sélectionnez la touche numérique à supprimer. Accédez à la touche numérique à sélectionner avec les touches [Précédent] ou [Suivant]. ineo 1052/1250 6-71 6.6 Opérations [Enr/Suppr.form.perso] 6 4 Appuyez sur [Supprimer]. Un dialogue de confirmation apparaît. 5 Appuyez sur [Oui]. Le format personnalisé de la touche numérique sélectionnée à l'étape 3 est supprimée. 6 Appuyez sur [Fermer] dans l'écran Enr/Suppr. form perso. L'écran Machine réapparaît. 6 Utilisation de [Calage recto-verso] 6-72 ineo 1052/1250 6.7 6.7 Utilisation de [Calage recto-verso] Réglez le ratio d'agrandissement ou la position des images à imprimer sur le recto et le verso du papier chargé dans le magasin suivant. Vous pouvez aussi régler la position des images à l'aide de la mire réglage. Ces réglages peuvent être effectués pour chaque magasin. - Bacs principaux (Magasins 1 et 2) - Unité d'alimentation papier PF-703/PF-706 (Mag 3 à 8) REMARQUE Vous pouvez définir un calage recto-verso pour un magasin et l'enregistrer avec un nom papier comme l'une des conditions papier. De la sorte, vous pouvez effectuer le calage recto-verso du magasin en rappelant les conditions papier associés à ce nom de papier. La mire de réglage ne peut pas être enregistrée avec un nom de papier comme une des conditions papier. dPour info Voir les modalités d'enregistrement des conditions papier avec un nom de papier page 6-29. Cette section explique les procédures de réglage disponibles en appuyant sur la touche [Calage recto-verso] de l'écran Machine. 1 Appuyez sur l'onglet [MACHINE] pour afficher l'écran Machine. 2 Appuyez sur [Calage recto-verso]. L'écran Calage recto-verso s'affiche. 3 Appuyez sur la touche d'un magasin papier sous [Mag. papier] pour sélectionner le magasin dont vous voulez caler le recto et le verso. 4 Appuyez sur l'onglet [Recto] sous [Calage recto-verso] pour régler le recto. % Passez à l'étape 10 pour régler le verso. ineo 1052/1250 6-73 6.7 Utilisation de [Calage recto-verso] 6 L'écran de réglage du recto s'affiche. 5 Sélectionnez [Vertical] ou [Horizontal] sous [Taux restitution], puis entrez une valeur sur le pavé numérique de l'écran tactile, [,], [+] ou sur le pavé numérique du panneau de contrôle. % Utilisez [+<->-] pour indiquer si la valeur est positive ou négative. % Appuyez sur [Annul] pour ramener la valeur à [0]. % Plage de réglage : -10 à +10 (1 pas = 0,05%) pour le zoom vertical et -10 à +10 (1 pas = 0,05%) pour le zoom horizontal. 6 Sélectionnez [Haut/Bas] ou [Droite/Gauche] sous [Décalage image], puis entrez une valeur de décalage sur le pavé numérique de l'écran tactile, [,], [+] ou sur le pavé numérique du panneau de contrôle. % Utilisez [+<->-] pour indiquer si la valeur est positive ou négative. % Appuyez sur [Annul] pour ramener la valeur à [0]. % Plage de réglage : -100 à +100 (1 pas = 0,1 mm) pour haut/bas et -100 à +100 (1 pas = 0,1 mm) pour droite/gauche. 7 Appuyez sur [Mire réglage] pour afficher l'écran Mire réglage/Recto. 8 Imprimez la mire et mesurez chaque point puis entrez la distance mesurée. % Appuyez sur [Impression] et appuyez sur Départ sur le panneau de contrôle. % Mesurez tous les points de la mire imprimée et entrez la distance entre les points avec le pavé numérique de l'écran tactile, [,] ou [+]. % Appuyez sur la touche Annul du panneau de contrôle pour ramener la valeur entrée à [0]. 9 Pour lancer le réglage, appuyez sur [Départ]. % Si vous ne voulez pas effectuer le réglage, appuyez sur [Fermer]. % La valeur entrée pour la mire de réglage sera effacée dès que vous aurez appuyé sur [Départ] ou sur [Fermer]. Une fois que vous en avez terminé avec la mire de réglage, revenez à l'écran de Calage recto-verso. 6 Utilisation de [Calage recto-verso] 6-74 ineo 1052/1250 6.7 10 Appuyez sur l'onglet [Verso] sous [Calage recto-verso] pour régler le verso. L'écran de réglage du verso s'affiche. 11 Sélectionnez [Vertical] ou [Horizontal] sous [Taux restitution], puis entrez une valeur sur le pavé numérique de l'écran tactile, [,], [+] ou sur le pavé numérique du panneau de contrôle. % Utilisez [+<->-] pour indiquer si la valeur est positive ou négative. % Appuyez sur [Annul] pour ramener la valeur à [0]. % Plage de réglage : -5 à +5 (1 pas = 0,05%) pour le zoom vertical et -10 à +10 (1 pas = 0,05%) pour le zoom horizontal. 12 Sélectionnez [Haut/Bas] ou [Drte/Gche] sous [Décalage image], puis entrez une valeur de décalage sur le pavé numérique de l'écran tactile, [,], [+] ou sur le pavé numérique du panneau de contrôle. % Utilisez [+<->-] pour indiquer si la valeur est positive ou négative. % Appuyez sur [Annul] pour ramener la valeur à [0]. % Plage de réglage : -100 à +100 (1 pas = 0,1 mm) pour haut/bas et -100 à +100 (1 pas = 0,1 mm) pour droite/gauche. 13 Appuyez sur [Mire Réglage] pour afficher l'écran Mire réglage/Verso. 14 Imprimez la mire et mesurez chaque point puis entrez la valeur du décalage. % Appuyez sur [Impression] et appuyez sur Départ sur le panneau de contrôle. % Mesurez tous les points de la mire imprimée et entrez la valeur du décalage entre les points avec le pavé numérique de l'écran tactile, [,] ou [+]. % Utilisez [+<->-] pour indiquer si la valeur est positive ou négative. % Pour ramener la valeur à [0], appuyez sur la touche Annul du panneau de contrôle. ineo 1052/1250 6-75 6.7 Utilisation de [Calage recto-verso] 6 15 Pour lancer le réglage, appuyez sur [Départ]. % Si vous ne voulez pas effectuer le réglage, appuyez sur [Fermer]. % La valeur entrée pour la mire de réglage sera effacée dès que vous aurez appuyé sur [Départ] ou sur [Fermer]. Une fois que vous en avez terminé avec la mire de réglage, revenez à l'écran de Calage recto-verso. 16 Si vous désirez remettre à zéro tous les réglages de Calage R°/V° effectués à l'étape 4 à 15, appuyez sur [Reset]. 17 Appuyez sur [OK]. L'écran Machine réapparaît. 6 Arrêter la numérisation/l'impression 6-76 ineo 1052/1250 6.8 6.8 Arrêter la numérisation/l'impression Suivez la procédure ci-dessous pour arrêter la numérisation et/ou l'impression en cours. - Cette procédure ne s'applique qu'au travail en cours. Pour supprimer, suspendre ou modifier l'ordre d'exécution des tâches en suspens, accédez à l'écran Liste des tâches. - Le dialogue affichée dépend du type de tâche en cours. Suivez la procédure concernée dans celles décrites ci-après. - En appuyant sur [Arrêt tempor.], vous pouvez suspendre une tâche et modifier en partie le réglage magasin pour améliorer la qualité d'impression ou faciliter l'introduction du papier. Vous pouvez aussi sortir une autre tâche inscrite à l'écran Liste des tâches avant de reprendre la tâche interrompue. Toutefois, vous devez savoir qu'une tâche interrompue temporairement ne peut pas être reprise le jour suivant. Numériser la tâche suivante pendant l'impression de la tâche en cours : 1 Appuyez sur Arrêt sur le panneau de contrôle. L'opération en cours est suspendue et un dialogue s'affiche sur l'écran Machine. 2 Sélectionnez l'opération voulue. Les cinq touches suivantes s'affichent. % Appuyez sur [Numérisation] pour arrêter l'impression et continuer la numérisation. % Appuyez sur [Imprimée] pour arrêter l'impression et continuer la numérisation. % Appuyez sur [Numéris./Impr.] pour arrêter les tâches de numérisation et d'impression. % Appuyez sur [Reprendre] pour reprendre les tâches de numérisation et d'impression. % Appuyez sur [Arrêt tempor.] pour suspendre temporairement l'impression. Appuyez sur la touche Départ du panneau de contrôle pour reprendre les deux tâches. ineo 1052/1250 6-77 6.8 Arrêter la numérisation/l'impression 6 Numérisation d'une tâche en mode Mémoire : 1 Appuyez sur Arrêt sur le panneau de contrôle. L'opération en cours est suspendue et un dialogue s'affiche sur l'écran Copie. 2 Sélectionnez l'opération voulue. Les deux touches suivantes s'affichent. % Appuyez sur [Arrêt tâche] pour annuler la tâche. La pression de cette touche supprime toutes les données numérisées. % Appuyez sur [Reprendre] pour terminer la tâche. Numérisation des originaux ou impression des données numérisées en cours : 1 Appuyez sur Arrêt sur le panneau de contrôle. L'opération en cours est suspendue et un dialogue s'affiche sur l'écran Machine. 2 Sélectionnez l'opération voulue. Les trois touches suivantes s'affichent. % Appuyez sur [Arrêt tâche] pour annuler la tâche. La pression de cette touche supprime toutes les données numérisées. % Appuyez sur [Reprendre] pour terminer la tâche. % Appuyez sur [Arrêt tempor.] pour suspendre la tâche. Appuyez sur Départ sur le panneau de commande pour reprendre la tâche. 6 Arrêter la numérisation/l'impression 6-78 ineo 1052/1250 6.8 Impression de toutes les tâches à l'aide de Fusion des tâches : 1 Appuyez sur Arrêt sur le panneau de contrôle. L'opération en cours est suspendue et un dialogue s'affiche sur l'écran Machine. 2 Sélectionnez l'opération voulue. Les quatre touches suivantes s'affichent. % Appuyez sur [Arrêt tâche] pour annuler la tâche. La pression de cette touche supprime toutes les données numérisées. % Appuyez sur [Imprimée] pour reprendre la tâche. % Appuyez sur [Imprime 1 jeu] pour annuler la tâche en fin d'impression du jeu. % Appuyez sur [Arrêt temporaire] pour suspendre la tâche. Appuyez sur Départ sur le panneau de commande pour reprendre la tâche. ineo 1052/1250 6-79 6.9 Contrôler et surveiller la machine depuis un navigateur 6 6.9 Contrôler et surveiller la machine depuis un navigateur Quand la machine est reliée à un ordinateur par le biais d'un réseau, le navigateur Internet activé sur l'ordinateur vous permet de contrôler la machine. Le navigateur Internet permet aussi de vérifier l'état de la machine. Cette fonction augmente l'efficacité d'opération à partir d'un clavier et d'une souris PC. Fonctions du panneau distant : - Les fenêtres de l'écran tactile peuvent être affichées sur le navigateur Internet et manipulées à la souris. - De même, les touches du panneau de contrôle peuvent être affichées sur le navigateur Internet et manipulées à la souris. - Les codes d'accès peuvent être saisis sur un clavier de PC. - Les actions effectuées à l'aide du panneau distant peuvent être enregistrées et rappelées. Fonctions Remote Monitor : - Les affichages de l'écran tactile peuvent figurer sur le navigateur Internet sous forme de vignettes. - Le contenu affiché sur l'écran tactile, l'état de la tâche et l'état de la machine peuvent être surveillés à l'aide de la fonction de rafraîchissement automatique du navigateur Internet. L'état de la machine est immédiatement identifiable par les changements de couleur de fond de l'écran de contrôle. - Le panneau distant peut s'afficher dans une fenêtre spéciale. Fonctions Multi Monitor : - Jusqu'à 10 écrans de contrôle peuvent être affichés dans un navigateur pour surveiller 10 machines à la fois. - Le panneau distant et le moniteur distant peuvent s'afficher dans le même navigateur. Les fonctions suivantes sont indisponibles : - Lecture de l'écran effectuée par un système auxiliaire - Manoeuvre de l'interrupteur (interrupteur principal/interrupteur secondaire, Éco énergie, Programmateur hebdomadaire) - Rapport de bourrage papier ou affichage du compteur papier en temps réel Conditions préalables : - Sur la machine, réglez le mode Sécurité Renforcée sur Arrêt. - La machine doit être connectée à un PC sur un réseau et le protocole TCP/IP doit être activé. - Spécifiez l'adresse IP de la machine. - Spécifiez l'adresse IP de l'ordinateur à utiliser pour le panneau distant à l'aide du paramètre Web Utilities d'un ordinateur. - JavaScript doit être activé. Les indications de bourrage papier ne sont pas actualisées automatiquement si vous utilisez le panneau distant. Après une longue période d'inactivité, cliquez sur [Reload] dans le coin supérieur de l'écran pour afficher l'état actuel. dPour info Pour la procédure de réglage de l'adresse IP, voir "12 Menu Utilitaire". L'adresse IP du PC à utiliser pour le panneau distant doit être spécifiée sur la machine. Le paramètre du panneau distant est disponible dans les Web Utilities. Pour utiliser le multimoniteur, indiquez l'adresse IP de toutes les machines à contrôler. Ce paramètre est disponible dans les Web Utilities. 6 Contrôler et surveiller la machine depuis un navigateur 6-80 ineo 1052/1250 6.9 6.9.1 Contrôler la machine depuis un navigateur Internet : Remote Panel 1 Démarrez le navigateur Internet et entrez l'adresse IP de la machine sur la barre d'adresse. La page d'accueil Web Utilities s'affiche. 2 Cliquez sur [Remote Panel] dans la page d'accueil Web Utilities. Le navigateur affiche l'écran tactile et le panneau de contrôle actuellement affichés sur la machine. 3 Effectuez les opérations à l'aide d'une souris et d'un clavier. ineo 1052/1250 6-81 6.9 Contrôler et surveiller la machine depuis un navigateur 6 Fonction Panel Script La fonction Panel Script permet d'enregistrer et réitérer les opérations effectuées à l'aide du panneau distant. Utilisez cette fonction pour afficher la procédure de réglage d'une fonction spécifique ou pour appliquer un réglage à une autre machine. Touche Description Execute Exécute le script de la procédure opératoire actuellement affichée dans la zone de texte. [Stop] apparaît à la place pendant que le script est en cours. Clear Efface le contenu de la zone de texte. Operation Log On Bouton enfoncé pour lancer l'enregistrement de l'opération. Toutes les opérations effectuées sur le panneau distant sont enregistrées. Operation Log Off Bouton enfoncé pour arrêter l'enregistrement de l'opération. Save to MFP Appuyez sur la touche numérique voulue pour enregistrer dans la machine le script actuellement affiché dans la zone de texte. Tout script préalablement enregistré est écrasé. Load from MFP Appuyez sur la touche numérique voulue pour rappeler le script enregistré et le charger dans la zone de texte. Tout script actuellement affiché dans la zone de texte est écrasé. Show Script Affiche un script. Show Result Affiche le résultat d'exécution du script. Un cercle affiché en début de ligne indique un succès d'exécution, tandis qu'une croix indique un échec. 6 Contrôler et surveiller la machine depuis un navigateur 6-82 ineo 1052/1250 6.9 6.9.2 Surveiller la machine depuis un navigateur Internet : Remote Monitor 1 Démarrez le navigateur Internet et entrez l'adresse IP de la machine sur la barre d'adresse. La page d'accueil Web Utilities s'affiche. 2 Cliquez sur [Remote Monitor] sur la page d'accueil des Web Utilities. L'état de la machine, le contenu de l'écran tactile et la condition du travail s'affichent. 3 Pour afficher le Remote Panel dans une autre fenêtre de façon à utiliser la machine depuis votre ordinateur, cliquez sur l'écran vignettes affiché sur le Remote Monitor. % La couleur de fond du moniteur distant varie en fonction de l'état de la machine comme décrit le tableau ci-dessous. Couleur de fond État Vert IDLING, ADJUSTMENT Bleu OPERATING Jaune JAM Rouge SC ineo 1052/1250 6-83 6.9 Contrôler et surveiller la machine depuis un navigateur 6 6.9.3 Surveiller plusieurs machines depuis un navigateur : Multi Monitor 1 Démarrez le navigateur Internet et entrez l'adresse IP de la machine sur la barre d'adresse. La page d'accueil Web Utilities s'affiche. 2 Cliquez sur [Multi Monitor] sur la page d'accueil des Web Utilities. L'état de la machine, le contenu de l'écran tactile et l'état du travail de 10 machines maxi. sont affichés en mosaïque. Remote Panel s'affiche également dans la même fenêtre de navigateur. 3 Pour afficher le panneau distant de la machine désirée pour l'utiliser depuis votre ordinateur, cliquez sur l'écran vignettes affiché sur le moniteur distant de cette machine. 6 Utilisation de l'Unité de pliage FD-503 6-84 ineo 1052/1250 6.10 6.10 Utilisation de l'Unité de pliage FD-503 Si la machine est équipée de l'Unité de pliage FD-503, elle propose les fonctions suivantes. Pliage : Vous avez le choix entre six types de pliage : Pliage en Z, Pliage roulé, Pliage en accordéon, Pliage Économique, Pliage portefeuille et Pliage en 2. Spécifiez la face imprimée (extérieur ou intérieur) pour chaque mode de pliage sauf Pliage en Z. Perforation : Perforation des feuilles imprimées à des fins de classement. Spécifiez le nombre de trous et leur position. Original Sortie Pliage en Z Roulé En accordéon Recto vers ext. Recto vers intér. Recto vers ext. Recto vers intér. Économique Portefeuille Pliage en 2 Recto vers ext. Recto vers intér. Recto vers ext. Recto vers intér. Recto vers ext. Recto vers intér. Original Sortie Perfo 2trous Gauche Droite Haut Perfo 4trous Gauche Droite Haut ineo 1052/1250 6-85 6.10 Utilisation de l'Unité de pliage FD-503 6 Lorsque l'Unité de pliage FD-503 est la seule option de finition utilisée, le magasin principal et le bac Plieuse proposent les types de finition répertoriés ci-dessous. dPour info Le magasin auxiliaire peut remplacer le bac Plieuse. Contactez votre technicien SAV si nécessaire. 6.10.1 Pliage des copies : Pliage en Z/Roulé/En accordéon/Économique/ Portefeuille/Pliage en 2 Appliquez la procédure suivante pour sélectionner le type de pliage voulu parmi les six proposés. 1 Positionnez l'original. 2 Appuyez sur l'onglet [COPIER] pour afficher l'écran Copie. 3 Appuyez sur [Finition]. L'écran Finition s'affiche. 4 Appuyez sur [Pliage]. L'écran Pliage s'affiche. Élément Description Nombre de trous 2 trous, 4 trous Diamètre des trous 6,5 mm ± 0,5 mm Espacement des trous 80 mm ± 0,5 mm Format papier Pour plus de détails, voir page 5-10. Grammage du papier 50 g/m2 à 216 g/m2, double feuilles perforées 50 à 91 g/m2 Magas. Type de finition Bac principal Pliage en 2, Pliage en Z, Perforation, sans traitement (sortie directe) Bac Plieuse Roulé, En accordéon, Pliage économique, Portefeuille 6 Utilisation de l'Unité de pliage FD-503 6-86 ineo 1052/1250 6.10 5 Sélectionnez le type de pliage souhaité. % Sélectionnez la touche souhaitée sous [Type de pliage]. % Appuyez sur [Recto verso ext.] ou [Rect vers intér] disponible sous [Présentation] pour sélectionner la présentation. % Cette sélection n'est pas disponible pour le mode Pliage en Z. 6 Appuyez sur [OK]. % Pour rétablir le réglage précédent, appuyez sur [Annuler]. % Pour désactiver la fonction tout en conservant le réglage actuel, appuyez sur [Désactiver]. L'écran Finition est rétabli. 7 Appuyez sur [OK] dans l'écran Finition pour retourner à l'écran Copie. Une icône du mode de finition spécifié s'affiche sous [Finition] dans l'écran Copie. ineo 1052/1250 6-87 6.10 Utilisation de l'Unité de pliage FD-503 6 6.10.2 Perforation des copies Perforation Appliquez la procédure suivante pour sélectionner le nombre de trous et leur position. 0 Veillez à ce que les guides latéraux du magasin soient bien alignés contre le papier chargé dans ce magasin. Sinon, les copies pourraient ne pas être perforées au bon endroit. 0 Si l'ATS (changement automatique de magasin) fonctionne pendant l'opération de perforation est en cours, les trous de perforation risquent d'être décalés. 0 Le mode de perforation est indisponible pour les formats de papier autres que standard (Formats détectés, Personnalisé, Format+, Papier onglet). 1 Positionnez l'original. 2 Appuyez sur l'onglet [COPIER] pour afficher l'écran Copie. 3 Appuyez sur [Finition]. L'écran Finition s'affiche. 4 Appuyez sur [Perforation]. L'écran Perforation s'affiche. 5 Sélectionnez le nombre de trous et leur position. 6 Appuyez sur [OK]. % Pour rétablir le réglage précédent, appuyez sur [Annuler]. % Pour désactiver la fonction tout en conservant le réglage actuel, appuyez sur [Désactiver]. L'écran Finition est rétabli. 6 Utilisation de l'Unité de pliage FD-503 6-88 ineo 1052/1250 6.10 7 Appuyez sur [OK] dans l'écran Finition pour retourner à l'écran Copie. Une icône du mode de finition spécifié s'affiche sous [Finition] dans l'écran Copie. 6.10.3 Chargement de couvertures dans le module d'insertion de l'Unité de pliage FD-503 La fonction Insertion d'intercalaires permet de joindre des feuilles de couverture chargées dans le plateau supérieur/inférieur du module d'insertion comme page de couverture, page de dos ou intercalaires (chapitres) aux copies éjectées. Cette fonction vous permet de créer un livre relié par agrafage et comportant des couvertures et des pages de titres. L'utilisation combinée du Thermorelieur PB-503 permet de réaliser des livrets thermoreliés. dPour info Réglage Papier nécessaire pour les couvertures à charger dans le bac de l'unité d'insertion. Pour plus de détails, voir "12 Menu Utilitaire". Pour plus de détails sur la thermoreliure, voir page 6-118. 1 Chargez les couvertures dans le magasin supérieur/inférieur du module d'insertion. REMARQUE Ne chargez pas plus de 500 feuilles (80 g/m2) dans le magasin supérieur et dans le magasin inférieur. Ne chargez pas au delà du niveau limite indiqué sur la plaque-guide latérale. 2 Utilisez les fonctions Insertion intercalaires, Livret et Thermoreliure pour joindre une couverture. Couvertures de thermoreliure Thermoreliure ineo 1052/1250 6-89 6.10 Utilisation de l'Unité de pliage FD-503 6 6.10.4 Prévention d'insertion multiple dans le module d'insertion de l'Unité de pliage FD-503 Plusieurs feuilles du magasin supérieur/inférieur risquent d'être happées en même temps dans le module d'insertion. Le magasin supérieur et le magasin inférieur comporte chacun trois rouleaux d'entraînement qui acheminent les feuilles. Le verrouillage des rouleaux latéraux pour utiliser uniquement le rouleau médian peut éviter aux petites couvertures de s'engager de travers. % Comme sur l'illustration ci-dessous, poussez les deux leviers de verrouillage des rouleaux à l'intérieur pour verrouiller. REMARQUE Prenez soin de verrouiller les rouleaux des deux côté si nécessaire. Ne verrouillez pas les rouleaux dans les conditions habituelles d'utilisation. 6 Utilisation de l'Unité de finition FS-532 6-90 ineo 1052/1250 6.11 6.11 Utilisation de l'Unité de finition FS-532 L'Unité de finition FS-532 dispose d'un bac principal et d'un bac auxiliaire, chacun proposant les modes de finition suivants. Sortie dans le bac principal Conjointement aux modes de sortie ci-dessus à l'exception de l'agrafage, vous pouvez aussi sélectionner la sortie recto souhaitée ([Vers haut] ou [Vers bas]) ainsi que l'ordre ([1 vers N] ou [N vers 1]), selon vos besoins. Sortie dans le bac auxiliaire Conjointement aux modes de sortie ci-dessus, vous pouvez aussi sélectionner la sortie recto souhaitée ([Vers haut] ou [Vers bas]) ainsi que l'ordre ([1 vers N] ou [N vers 1]), selon vos besoins. Type de finition Détails [Tri décalé] Sortie des jeux triés avec un décalage de 15 ± 3 mm entre chaque jeu. Vous pouvez aussi décaler les copies par nombre spécifié de jeux triés (1à 9999). [Tri] Délivre plusieurs copies du jeu original. Les copies sont empilées à la sortie sans être décalées. [GroupeDécalé] Regroupe plusieurs copies de chaque original et décale les jeux à la sortie. Vous pouvez aussi décaler les copies par nombre spécifié de jeux groupés (1à 9999). [Groupe] Regroupe plusieurs copies de chaque original. Les copies sont empilées à la sortie sans être décalées. [Agrafage] (+ [Tri]) Délivre chaque jeu trié et l'agrafe automatiquement à la sortie. [Agrafage] (+ [Tri décalé]) Délivre chaque jeu trié et le décale automatiquement à la sortie. [Agrafage] (+ [Groupe]) Regroupe plusieurs copies de chaque original. et agrafe chaque jeu à la sortie. [Agrafage] (+ [GroupeDécalé]) Regroupe plusieurs copies de chaque original. et décale chaque jeu à la sortie. Original Sortie Exemple Réaliser 3 jeux imprimés à partir de 4 feuilles originales. Tri décalé Tri GroupeDécalé Groupe Agraf. en coin Agrafage en 2 points Coin gauche Coin droit Gauche Haut Droite Type de finition Détails [Tri] Délivre plusieurs copies du jeu original. Les copies sont empilées à la sortie sans être décalées. [Groupe] Regroupe plusieurs copies de chaque original. Les copies sont empilées à la sortie sans être décalées. ineo 1052/1250 6-91 6.11 Utilisation de l'Unité de finition FS-532 6 Cette section décrit les modes de finition suivants : - Tri/Groupe/Tri décalé/GroupeDécalé dans le bac principal - Tri/Groupe/Tri décalé/GroupeDécalé dans le bac auxiliaire - Agrafage dans le bac principal 6.11.1 Tri de copies : Tri/Groupe/Tri décalé/GroupeDécalé Le réglage initial d'une machine équipée de l'Unité de finition FS-532 prévoit la sortie des jeux triés dans le magasin principal et ce que la machine soit équipée ou non d'autres options. Veuillez sélectionner un type de finition en suivant la procédure ci-dessous. dPour info Vous pouvez changer le mode initial de finition dans le menu Utilitaire. Pour plus de détails, voir "12 Menu Utilitaire". 1 Positionnez l'original. 2 Appuyez sur l'onglet [COPIER] pour afficher l'écran Copie. 3 Appuyez sur [Finition]. L'écran Finition s'affiche. % Le magasin actuellement sélectionné est mis en évidence sur l'image frontale de la machine. Si le bac principal n'est pas sélectionné, appuyez sur la touche de position du bac principal pour le mettre en évidence. 4 Sélectionnez le mode de sortie désiré. % Sélectionnez une des touches [Tri décalé], [Tri], [GroupeDécalé] et [Groupe]. Original Sortie Exemple Pour réaliser 3 jeux imprimés Tri Groupe Vers haut et 1vers N Vers haut et N vers 1 Vers bas et 1 vers N Vers haut et 1vers N Vers haut et N vers 1 Vers bas et 1 vers N 6 Utilisation de l'Unité de finition FS-532 6-92 ineo 1052/1250 6.11 % Sélectionnez [Vers haut] ou [Vers bas], ainsi que [1 vers N] ou [N vers 1] situés en dessous de [Ordre/Face], selon vos besoins. % La sélection de [N vers 1] définit automatiquement la sortie recto et la limite à [Vers haut]. 5 Appuyez sur [OK] dans l'écran Finition pour retourner à l'écran Copie. Une icône du mode de finition spécifié s'affiche sous [Finition] dans l'écran Copie. REMARQUE Le bac principal s'abaisse progressivement pendant l'éjection des pages imprimées. NE LAISSEZ aucun objet interférer avec le fonctionnement du bac principal du côté gauche de l'unité d'agrafage, car le moindre obstacle peut endommager l'unité d'agrafage. REMARQUE Le bac principal de l'Unité de finition FS-532 a une capacité limitée. Attention à ne pas dépasser la limite, sinon des problèmes inattendus risquent de se produire. 6 Montez la butée papier sur le bac principal. % Il est recommandé de monter la butée papier sur le bac principal avant d'utiliser un papier mince ou qui risque de gondoler à la sortie. Vous pouvez conserver la butée pour l'impression normale. dPour info Le bouton Suspendre/Reprendre situé à la surface de l'Unité de finition FS-532 permet d'arrêter temporairement l'impression pour pouvoir retirer les feuilles imprimées du bac principal, du bac auxiliaire ou du bac pliage. Pour plus de détails, voir page 6-106. ineo 1052/1250 6-93 6.11 Utilisation de l'Unité de finition FS-532 6 6.11.2 Tri des copies dans le bac auxiliaire : Tri/Groupe Le réglage initial d'une machine équipée de l'Unité de finition FS-532 prévoit la sortie des jeux triés dans le magasin principal et ce que la machine soit équipée ou non d'autres options. Pour utiliser le bac auxiliaire, suivez la procédure ci-dessous qui permet de changer de bac de sortie et de sélectionner un type de finition. 1 Positionnez l'original. 2 Appuyez sur l'onglet [COPIER] pour afficher l'écran Copie. 3 Appuyez sur [Finition]. L'écran Finition s'affiche. 4 Sélectionnez le bac auxiliaire comme bac de sortie. % Appuyez sur la touche de position " " du magasin auxiliaire pour la mettre en évidence. 5 Sélectionnez le mode de sortie désiré. % Sélectionnez [Tri] ou [Groupe] dans la fenêtre [Sortie]. % Sélectionnez [Vers haut] ou [Vers bas], ainsi que [1 vers N] ou [N vers 1] situés en dessous de [Ordre/Face], selon vos besoins. % La sélection de [N vers 1] définit automatiquement la sortie recto et la limite à [Vers haut]. 6 Appuyez sur [OK] dans l'écran Finition pour retourner à l'écran Copie. Une icône du mode de finition spécifié s'affiche sous [Finition] dans l'écran Copie. REMARQUE Le bac auxiliaire de l'Unité de finition FS-532 a une capacité limitée. Attention à ne pas dépasser la limite, sinon des problèmes inattendus risquent de se produire. 6 Utilisation de l'Unité de finition FS-532 6-94 ineo 1052/1250 6.11 6.11.3 Agrafage des copies (Agrafage en coin/2 points) : agrafage Dans ce mode les copies sont agrafées. Sélectionnez un des cinq types de position d'agrafage suivants. Lorsque vous sélectionnez [Gauche], [Haut] ou [Droite] pour l'agrafage en 2 points, sélectionnez aussi [Large], [Étroit] ou [Étroit+] pour l'espacement des agrafes. Les formats ont les valeurs suivantes : [Agraf. en coin - Coin gauche] permet l'agrafage du bord du papier diagonalement ou parallèlement au côté vertical. Pour plus de détails, voir "12 Menu Utilitaire". Position d'agrafage Type d'agrafage Agrafage en coin - Coin gauche Agrafage en coin - Coin droit Agrafage en 2 points - Gauche Agrafage en 2 points - Haut Agrafage en 2 points - Droite Réglage Format [Large] 165 mm [Étroit] 140 mm [Étroit+] 120 mm ineo 1052/1250 6-95 6.11 Utilisation de l'Unité de finition FS-532 6 1 Positionnez l'original. 2 Appuyez sur l'onglet [COPIER] pour afficher l'écran Copie. 3 Appuyez sur [Finition]. L'écran Finition s'affiche. 4 Appuyez sur [Agrafage]. L'écran Agrafage s'affiche. 5 Sélectionnez la position d'agrafage souhaitée. % Lorsque vous sélectionnez un agrafage en 2 points, sélectionnez aussi [Large], [Étroit] ou [Étroit+] pour spécifier l'espacement des agrafes. 6 Appuyez sur [OK]. % Pour rétablir le réglage précédent, appuyez sur [Annuler]. % Pour désactiver la fonction tout en conservant le réglage actuel, appuyez sur [Désactiver]. L'écran Finition est rétabli. 7 Appuyez sur [OK] dans l'écran Finition pour retourner à l'écran Copie. Une icône du mode de finition spécifié s'affiche sous [Finition] dans l'écran Copie. REMARQUE Le bac principal s'abaisse progressivement pendant l'éjection des pages imprimées. NE LAISSEZ aucun objet interférer avec le fonctionnement du bac principal du côté gauche de l'unité d'agrafage, car le moindre obstacle peut endommager l'unité d'agrafage. 6 Utilisation de l'Unité de finition FS-532 6-96 ineo 1052/1250 6.11 REMARQUE Le bac principal de l'Unité de finition FS-532 a une capacité limitée. Attention à ne pas dépasser la limite, sinon des problèmes inattendus risquent de se produire. 6.11.4 Réalisation de livrets pliés : Pliage & Agrafage/Pliage en 2 multiple L'Unité de finition FS-532 dotée de la Piqueuse à cheval SD-510 permet de créer un livret de signature multipages plié et agrafé en deux points (piqûre à cheval) au centre, en utilisant la fonction Livret conjointement. 0 Livret dans Applications est automatiquement spécifié. 0 Restitution auto est automatiquement spécifiée. L'utilisation conjointe de PapierAuto n'est pas possible. 0 Sélectionnez le mode de copie [1->2] ou [2->2]. 0 Ouvrez la poignée de livraison papier du bac de pliage avant d'effectuer une sortie en mode Pliage & Agrafage ou Pliage en 2 multiple. Utilisez la poignée de livraison papier pour sortir les feuilles imprimées. Original Sortie Pliage & Piqûre Pliage en 2 multiple Composant Description Format papier A3 w, B4 w, A4 w, 12 e 18 w, 11 e 17 w, 8,5 e 14 w, 8,5 e 11 w, Format+, Personnalisé (120 mm e 240 mm à 331 mm e 488 mm) Grammage du papier Corps du document : 50 à 216 g/m2, Couverture : 50 à 300 g/m2 Nombre max. de feuilles pliées Pliage en 2 multiple : 5 feuilles (50 à 216 g/m2), 1 feuille (217 à 300 g/m2) Pliage & Agrafage : 25 feuilles (50 à 61 g/m2), 20 feuilles (62 à 80 g/m2), 16 feuilles (81 à 91 g/m2), 5 feuilles (92 à 216 g/m2) Bac de sortie Bac pliage Capacité des magasins 35 jeux (5 feuilles pliées en mode Pliage en 2 multiple) 35 jeux (2 à 5 feuilles pliées et agrafées en mode Pliage & Agrafage) 25 jeux (6 à 10 feuilles pliées et agrafées en mode Pliage & Agrafage) 15 jeux (11 à 25 feuilles pliées et agrafées en mode Pliage & Agrafage) ineo 1052/1250 6-97 6.11 Utilisation de l'Unité de finition FS-532 6 1 Positionnez l'original. 2 Appuyez sur l'onglet [COPIER] pour afficher l'écran Copie. 3 Appuyez sur [Finition]. L'écran Finition s'affiche. 4 Sélectionnez [Pli & Piqûre] ou [MultiPli en2]. L'image frontale de la machine affichée à l'écran Finition indique que le bac de pliage est actuellement sélectionné comme bac de sortie. 5 Appuyez sur [OK] dans l'écran Finition pour retourner à l'écran Copie. Une icône du mode de finition spécifié s'affiche sous [Finition] dans l'écran Copie. 6 Ouvrez la poignée de livraison papier du bac de pliage. dPour info Voir l'utilisation de la poignée de livraison papier page 6-104. 6 Utilisation de l'Unité de finition FS-532 6-98 ineo 1052/1250 6.11 6.11.5 Pliage des copies en trois : Multi pli en 3 L'Unité de finition FS-532 dotée de la Piqueuse à cheval SD-510 permet à la machine de copier sur du papier A4 w ou 8,5 e 11 w et de plier les copies en trois vers l'intérieur. Lorsque vous sélectionnez Multi pli en 3, sélectionnez aussi intérieur ou extérieur pour voir l'image imprimée. 0 La sélection d'impression à l'intérieur définit automatiquement l'ordre d'impression sur N vers 1, tandis que la sélection d'impression à l'extérieur sur 1 vers N. 0 Si le mode Sortie recto est associé à Impression à l'intérieur, il est automatiquement réglé sur Vers haut. Si le mode Sortie recto est associé à Impression à l'extérieur, il est automatiquement réglé sur Vers bas. 0 Ouvrez la poignée de livraison papier du bac pliage avant d'effectuer une sortie en mode Multi pli en 3. Utilisez la poignée de livraison papier pour sortir les feuilles imprimées. Original Sortie Multi pli en 3 + Recto vers extérieur Multi pli en 3 + Recto vers intérieur Élément Description Capacité de pliage (grammage) 1 feuille (92 à 105 g/m2), 3 feuilles (50 à 91 g/m2) Format papier A4 w, 8,5 e 11 w Face imprimée À l'intérieur, à l'extérieur Bac de sortie Bac pliage Capacité des magasins 50 jeux (jeu plié à 1 feuille) 40 jeux (jeu plié à 2 feuilles) 30 jeux (jeu plié à 3 feuilles) ineo 1052/1250 6-99 6.11 Utilisation de l'Unité de finition FS-532 6 1 Positionnez l'original. 2 Appuyez sur l'onglet [COPIER] pour afficher l'écran Copie. 3 Appuyez sur [Finition]. L'écran Finition s'affiche. 4 Appuyez sur [MultiPli en3]. L'écran Multi pli en 3 s'affiche. 5 Sélectionnez [Recto vers ext.] ou [Recto vers intér.]. 6 Appuyez sur [OK]. % Pour rétablir le réglage précédent, appuyez sur [Annuler]. % Pour désactiver la fonction tout en conservant le réglage actuel, appuyez sur [Désactiver]. L'écran Finition est rétabli. L'image frontale de la machine affichée à l'écran Finition indique que le bac de pliage est actuellement sélectionné comme bac de sortie. 7 Appuyez sur [OK] pour achever le réglage et revenir à l'écran précédent. Une icône du mode de finition spécifié s'affiche sous [Finition] dans l'écran Copie. 6 Utilisation de l'Unité de finition FS-532 6-100 ineo 1052/1250 6.11 8 Ouvrez la poignée de livraison papier du bac de pliage. dPour info Voir l'utilisation de la poignée de livraison papier page 6-104. 6.11.6 Perforation des copies : Perforation L'Unité de finition FS-532 dotée de l'Unité de perforation PK-522 propose le mode de perforation des copies pour leur classement. Les modes de perforation et d'agrafage sont compatibles. REMARQUE Ne perforez pas du papier spécial comme les transparents, les étiquettes ou le papier calque. La perforation d'un papier spécial peut causer un incident inattendu sur la machine. 0 Veillez à ce que les guides latéraux du magasin soient bien alignés contre le papier chargé dans ce magasin. Sinon, les copies pourraient ne pas être perforées au bon endroit. 0 Si l'ATS (changement automatique de magasin) fonctionne pendant l'opération de perforation est en cours, les trous de perforation risquent d'être décalés. 0 Le mode de perforation est indisponible pour les formats de papier autres que standard (Formats détectés, Personnalisé, Format+, Papier onglet). Original Sortie 2 trous Gauche Droite Haut 4 trous Gauche Droite Haut Élément Description Nombre de trous 2 trous, 4 trous Diamètre des trous 6,5 mm Espacement des trous 80 mm ± 1,0 mm Format papier Pour plus de détails, voir page 5-10. Grammage du papier 60 g/m2-300 g/m2 ineo 1052/1250 6-101 6.11 Utilisation de l'Unité de finition FS-532 6 1 Positionnez l'original. 2 Appuyez sur l'onglet [COPIER] pour afficher l'écran Copie. 3 Appuyez sur [Finition]. L'écran Finition s'affiche. 4 Appuyez sur [Perforation]. L'écran Perforation s'affiche. 5 Sélectionnez la position de perforation souhaitée. 6 Appuyez sur [OK]. % Pour rétablir le réglage précédent, appuyez sur [Annuler]. % Pour désactiver la fonction tout en conservant le réglage actuel, appuyez sur [Désactiver]. L'écran Finition est rétabli. 7 Appuyez sur [OK] dans l'écran Finition pour retourner à l'écran Copie. Une icône du mode de finition spécifié s'affiche sous [Finition] dans l'écran Copie. REMARQUE Le bac principal s'abaisse progressivement pendant l'éjection des pages imprimées. NE LAISSEZ aucun objet interférer avec le fonctionnement du bac principal du côté gauche de l'unité d'agrafage, car le moindre obstacle peut endommager l'unité d'agrafage. 6 Utilisation de l'Unité de finition FS-532 6-102 ineo 1052/1250 6.11 6.11.7 Utilisation manuelle de l 'Unité de finition FS-532 L'Unité de finition FS-532 dotée de l'Unité d'insertion PI-502 peut être utilisée manuellement à l'aide du panneau de contrôle de l'unité d'insertion. L'Unité de finition FS-532 offre les modes de finition suivants en fonction de la configuration des options. 0 Le papier doit être placé uniquement dans le magasin inférieur. Le magasin supérieur ne peut pas être utilisé. Configuration d'options Type de finition Unité de finition FS-532 + Unité d'insertion PI-502 Agrafage en coin/Agrafage en 2 points Unité de finition FS-532 + Unité d'insertion PI-502 + Unité de perforation PK-522 Agrafage en coin/Agrafage en 2 points, Perforation Unité de finition FS-532 + Unité d'insertion PI-502 + Piqueuse à cheval SD-510 Agrafage en coin/Agrafage en 2 points, Pliage & Agrafage, Multi pli en 3 Touche Sortie Bouton de sélection du mode Agrafage Pliage & Piqûre Agraf. en coin Agrafage en 2 points Multi pli en 3 Bouton Perforation Fonction Papier (format/grammage) Nombre de feuilles chargées Bac de sortie Agrafage en coin/ Agrafage en 2 points A3 w, B4 w, A4 w/v, B5 v, A5 v, 12 e 18 w, 11 e 17 w, 8,5 e 14 w, 8,5 e 11 w/v, 5,5 e 8,5 v (50 g/m2 à 200 g/m2) 50 feuilles min. Bac principal Perforation A3 w à A5 v (60 g/m2 à 200 g/m2) 200 feuilles (80 g/m2), ou dans 30 mm Bac principal Pliage & Piqûre A3 w, B4 w, A4 w, 12 e 18 w, 11 e 17 w, 8,5 e 14 w, 8,5 e 11 w (50 g/m2 à 200 g/m2) Une couverture max. (200 g/m2) peut être jointe au pliage et à l'agrafage. 25 feuilles max. (50 à 61 g/m2) 20 feuilles max. (62 à 80 g/m2) 16 feuilles max. (81 à 91 g/m2) 5 feuilles max. (92 à 200 g/m2) Bac pliage Multi pli en 3 A4 w, 8,5 e 11 w 1 feuille (92 à 105 g/m2) 3 pages (50 à 91 g/m2) Bac pliage ineo 1052/1250 6-103 6.11 Utilisation de l'Unité de finition FS-532 6 1 Placez le papier dans le magasin inférieur de l'unité d'insertion. % Alignez la plaque-guide avec le papier. REMARQUE Ne perforez pas les types de papier spécial comme les étiquettes ou le papier calque. L'utilisation de papier spécial peut causer un incident inattendu à l'unité de perforation. 2 Appuyez sur le bouton de sélection du mode Agrafage et sur le bouton de perforation pour sélectionner le mode désiré. % Pour sélectionner Agrafage en coin/Agrafage en 2 points, Pliage & Agrafage ou Multi pli en 3, appuyez sur le bouton de sélection du mode d'agrafage afin d'allumer le voyant du mode désiré. Pour sélectionner Perforation, appuyez sur le bouton de perforation pour allumer le voyant. % Perforation et Agrafage en coin/Agrafage en 2 points sont compatibles. Pour les user conjointement, appuyez sur le bouton de sélection du mode d'agrafage afin d'allumer le voyant Agrafage en coin ou Agrafage en 2 points. Si aucune combinaison n'est souhaitée, éteignez tous les voyants sauf le voyant Perforation. 3 Ouvrez la poignée de livraison papier du bac de pliage lorsque Pliage & piqûre, Pliage en 2 multiple ou Multi pli en 3 est sélectionné. 4 Appuyez sur le bouton Départ/Arrêt du panneau de contrôle de l'unité d'insertion. % Pour interrompre l'opération, appuyez une nouvelle fois sur le bouton Départ/Arrêt. Fonction Positionnement du papier Agrafage en coin/Agrafage en 2 points Placez le recto vers le haut. Perforation Placez le recto vers le haut. Pliage & Piqûre Placez l'extérieur du livret vers le haut. Multi pli en 3 Placez l'extérieur du pli vers le haut. [1] : bouton de sélection du mode Agrafage [2] : bouton de perforation [3] : bouton Départ/Arrêt 6 Utilisation de l'Unité de finition FS-532 6-104 ineo 1052/1250 6.11 6.11.8 Récupération des feuilles du bac de pliage Les feuilles imprimées sont éjectées dans le bac de pliage si vous utilisez le mode Pliage & Agrafage, Pliage en 2 multiple ou Multi pli en 3. Pour récupérer les feuilles imprimées du bac de pliage, suivez la procédure cidessous. 1 Relevez la poignée de livraison papier. Les feuilles imprimées chargées dans le bac de pliage sont éjectées. 2 Repoussez la poignée de livraison papier pour arrêter la courroie de sortie papier. % La courroie de sortie papier s'arrête même si la poignée de livraison papier est légèrement relevée. 3 Récupérez les feuilles imprimées du bac de pliage. ineo 1052/1250 6-105 6.12 Récupération des feuilles imprimées du magasin de l'Unité de finition FS-532 6 6.12 Récupération des feuilles imprimées du magasin de l'Unité de finition FS-532 Le bac principal, le bac auxiliaire et le bac de pliage de l'Unité de finition FS-532 ont une capacité limitée. Lorsque la limite de ces magasins est dépassée, la machine détecte le trop-plein et arrête automatiquement l'impression. Cette section décrit comment récupérer les feuilles imprimées du magasin dont la sortie a été automatiquement suspendue et comment annuler la sortie suspendue. De même, la description explique comment suspendre manuellement la sortie et récupérer les feuilles imprimées du magasin. 6.12.1 Récupération des feuilles imprimées du bac principal après suspension automatique Si la capacité du bac principal est dépassée, la machine arrête automatiquement l'impression. À ce moment, le message [Retirer le papier du bac principal de l'unité de finition] apparaît dans la zone de message de l'écran et le voyant Départ devient orange. La machine ne peut pas reprendre l'impression même si vous appuyez sur Départ. dPour info Vous pouvez configurer sur la machine la reprise automatique de l'impression après récupération des feuilles imprimées et remontée du bac principal. Ou, vous pouvez définir la reprise automatique de l'impression en appuyant sur Départ sur le panneau de contrôle pendant la remontée du bac principal. Contactez votre technicien SAV si nécessaire. 1 Sortez les feuilles imprimées envoyées dans le bac principal. Le bac principal remonte automatiquement et le message [Attendre l'arrêt de l'unité de finition] apparaît à l'écran. Le voyant de suspension clignote sur le haut de l'unité de finition. Récupération des feuilles imprimées 6 du magasin de l'Unité de finition FS-532 6-106 ineo 1052/1250 6.12 2 Confirmez que le bac principal est remonté en position supérieure. Lorsque le bac principal remonte complètement, le message [Appuyer sur DEPART pour reprendre] s'affiche. 3 Appuyez sur Départ sur le panneau de contrôle. La machine va reprendre l'impression. % Le voyant de suspension sur le haut de l'unité de finition continue de clignoter jusqu'à ce que la machine reprenne l'impression. La machine ne reprend pas l'impression si vous appuyez sur le bouton Suspendre/Reprendre situé sur l'unité de finition pendant que le voyant clignote. % Pour annuler la tâche sans la reprendre, appuyez sur Arrêt sur le panneau de contrôle. Pour plus de détails, voir page 6-109. 6.12.2 Pour suspendre la sortie manuellement 1 Enfoncez le bouton Suspendre/Reprendre pendant plus d'une seconde pour suspendre la sortie. La machine arrête l'impression et le voyant de suspension commence à clignoter. Les guides de livraison s'ouvrent vers le haut. % Lorsque vous relâchez le bouton, le voyant de suspension commence à clignoter. ineo 1052/1250 6-107 6.12 Récupération des feuilles imprimées du magasin de l'Unité de finition FS-532 6 2 Sortez les feuilles imprimées envoyées dans magasin. Le voyant de suspension continue de clignoter même après le retrait de toutes les feuilles du magasin. % La sortie peut reprendre en laissant les feuilles imprimées dans le magasin ; mais veuillez ne pas les déplacer dans tous les sens. 3 Appuyez sur le bouton Suspendre/Reprendre de l'unité de finition. Le voyant de suspension s'éteint et la machine reprend l'impression. dPour info Pour annuler la tâche sans la reprendre, appuyez sur Arrêt sur le panneau de contrôle. Pour plus de détails, voir page 6-109. 6.12.3 Récupération des feuilles imprimées du bac auxiliaire après suspension automatique Si la capacité du bac auxiliaire est dépassée, la machine arrête automatiquement l'impression. À ce moment, le message [Vider le bac auxiliaire de l'Agrafeuse] apparaît dans la zone de message de l'écran et le voyant Départ devient orange. La machine ne peut pas reprendre l'impression même si vous appuyez sur Départ. Récupération des feuilles imprimées 6 du magasin de l'Unité de finition FS-532 6-108 ineo 1052/1250 6.12 1 Sortez les feuilles imprimées envoyées dans bac auxiliaire. 2 Appuyez sur Départ sur le panneau de contrôle. La machine va reprendre l'impression. % La machine ne reprend pas l'impression si vous appuyez sur le bouton Suspendre/Reprendre situé sur l'unité de finition. 6.12.4 Récupération des feuilles imprimées du bac de pliage après suspension automatique Si la capacité du bac de pliage est dépassée, la machine arrête automatiquement l'impression. À ce moment, le message [Magasin pliage plein/Retirer le papier] apparaît dans la zone de message de l'écran et le voyant Départ devient orange. La machine ne peut pas reprendre l'impression même si vous appuyez sur Départ. 1 Soulevez la poignée de livraison papier pour délivrer les feuilles imprimées et les retirer toutes du bac de pliage. ineo 1052/1250 6-109 6.12 Récupération des feuilles imprimées du magasin de l'Unité de finition FS-532 6 2 Appuyez sur Départ sur le panneau de contrôle. La machine va reprendre l'impression. % La machine ne reprend pas l'impression si vous appuyez sur le bouton Suspendre/Reprendre situé sur l'unité de finition. 6.12.5 Annulation d'une tâche en suspens 1 Appuyez sur Arrêt sur le panneau de contrôle. Une boîte de dialogue s'affiche pour permettre de sélectionner si le travail suspendu doit être annulé ou non. 2 Appuyez sur [Arrêt tâche]. 6 Utilisation de la Piqueuse à cheval SD-506 6-110 ineo 1052/1250 6.13 6.13 Utilisation de la Piqueuse à cheval SD-506 6.13.1 Réalisation de livrets pliés : Pliage & Agrafage/Pliage en 2 multiple Si la machine est équipée de la Piqueuse à cheval FD-503, elle propose les fonctions suivantes. dPour info Veuillez vérifier les informations papier avant utilisation. Pour plus de détails, voir page 5-3. 1 Positionnez l'original. 2 Appuyez sur l'onglet [COPIER] pour afficher l'écran Copie. 3 Appuyez sur [Finition]. L'écran Finition s'affiche. 4 Appuyez sur [Pli & Piqûre] ou [Multi pli en 2]. L'écran permettant de spécifier le mode Massicotage s'affiche. Type de finition Détails [Pliage & piqûre] + [Sans massicotage] L'utilisation combinée de la fonction Livret permet de créer un livret de signature multipage plié et agrafé en deux points (piqûre à cheval) au centre. [Pliage & piqûre à cheval] + [Massicotage] Massicotage de la gouttière des livrets créés avec [Pliage & piqûre]. [Multi pli en 2] + [Sans massicotage] L'utilisation combinée de la fonction Livret permet la confection de jeux imprimés de 5 feuilles max. [Multi pli en 2] + [Avec Massicotage] Massicotage de la gouttière des doubles feuilles créées avec [Multi pli en 2]. Original Sortie Pliage & Piqûre Pliage & piqûre à cheval + Massicotage Pliage en 2 multiple Multi pli en 2 + Avec Massicotage ineo 1052/1250 6-111 6.13 Utilisation de la Piqueuse à cheval SD-506 6 5 Appuyez sur [Avec massicotage] ou [Sans massicotage]. 6 Appuyez sur [OK]. % Pour rétablir le réglage précédent, appuyez sur [Annuler]. % Pour désactiver la fonction tout en conservant le réglage actuel, appuyez sur [Désactiver]. L'écran Finition est rétabli. 7 Appuyez sur [OK] dans l'écran Finition pour retourner à l'écran Copie. Une icône du mode de finition spécifié s'affiche sous [Finition] dans l'écran Copie. Vous constatez également la sélection automatique de Livret dans Applications. 8 Tirez le bac pliage entièrement. % Dépliez le support du magasin situé sous le magasin lorsque vous le sortez au maximum. REMARQUE Lorsque vous utilisez le bac pliage, assurez-vous de le sortir complètement et de déplier le support en dessous. % Les jeux pliés et agrafés (et massicotés) seront délivrés dans le bac de la piqueuse à cheval. Si le magasin n'est pas entièrement sorti, la machine va détecter que le magasin est plein, même avec un nombre de jeux finis inférieur à celui spécifié dans les caractéristiques. REMARQUE Ne remettez jamais en place le bac pliage sans replier le support. 9 Entrez sur le clavier du panneau de contrôle le nombre de copies désiré. % Indiquez 5 ou moins comme valeur pour Multi pli en 2. 6 Utilisation de la Piqueuse à cheval SD-506 6-112 ineo 1052/1250 6.13 6.13.2 Pliage des copies en trois : Multi pli en 3 Si la machine est équipée de la Piqueuse à cheval SD-506, elle peut plier les feuilles imprimées en trois vers l'intérieur. Lorsque vous sélectionnez Multi pli en 3, vous pouvez sélectionner intérieur ou extérieur pour voir l'image imprimée. Les feuilles pliées en trois sortent dans le bac de pliage en 3. 1 Positionnez l'original. 2 Appuyez sur l'onglet [COPIER] pour afficher l'écran Copie. 3 Appuyez sur [Finition]. L'écran Finition s'affiche. 4 Appuyez sur [MultiPli en3]. L'écran permettant de spécifier la face imprimée s'affiche. Original Sortie Multi Pli en 3 + Recto vers extérieur Multi pli en 3 + Recto vers intérieur ineo 1052/1250 6-113 6.13 Utilisation de la Piqueuse à cheval SD-506 6 5 Sélectionnez [Recto vers ext.] ou [Recto vers intér.]. 6 Appuyez sur [OK]. % Pour rétablir le réglage précédent, appuyez sur [Annuler]. % Pour désactiver la fonction tout en conservant le réglage actuel, appuyez sur [Désactiver]. L'écran Finition est rétabli. 7 Appuyez sur [OK] dans l'écran Finition pour retourner à l'écran Copie. Une icône du mode de finition spécifié s'affiche sous [Finition] dans l'écran Copie. 6 Utilisation manuelle de l'Unité de pliage FD-503/l'Unité de finition FS-532/la Piqueuse à 6-114 ineo 1052/1250 6.14 6.14 Utilisation manuelle de l'Unité de pliage FD-503/l'Unité de finition FS-532/la Piqueuse à cheval SD-506 Les fonctions de finition suivantes sont disponibles manuellement si le magasin supérieur du module d'insertion de l'Unité de pliage FD-503 contient du papier. Équipement de série/en option Type de finition Unité de pliage FD-503 uniquement Pliage en Z, Pliage roulé, Pliage en accordéon, Pliage Économique, Pliage portefeuille, Pliage en 2, Perfo 2trous, Perfo 4trous Unité de pliage FD-503 + Unité de finition FS-532 Fonctions disponibles sur l'Unité de pliage FD-503 uniquement, Agraf. en coin, Agrafage en 2 points Unité de pliage FD-503 + Piqueuse à cheval SD-506 Fonctions disponibles sur l'Unité de pliage FD-503 uniquement, Pliage & piqûre Unité de pliage FD-503 + Unité de finition FS-532 + Piqueuse à cheval SD-506 Toutes les opérations manuelles avec le module d'insertion Touche Sortie Bouton Détection départ multiple Détection départs multiples - Activée Détection départs multiples - Désactivée Bouton Sélection Pliage Agraf. en coin Agrafage en 2 points Pliage & Piqûre Bouton Sélection Perfo 2trous Perfo 4trous Bouton Sélection Pliage Pliage en Z Roulé Pliage en 2 En accordéon Économique Portefeuille ineo 1052/1250 6-115 6.14 Utilisation manuelle de l'Unité de pliage FD-503/l'Unité de finition FS-532/la Piqueuse à cheval 6 0 Pour une utilisation manuelle des fonctions disponibles sur l'Unité de pliage FD-503/l'Unité de finition FS-532/la Piqueuse à cheval SD-506, vous devez charger le papier uniquement dans le magasin supérieur du module d'insertion. 0 La détection de départs multiples est une fonction qui arrête automatiquement la machine si plus d'une feuille est introduite à la fois. Le module d'insertion est doté de cette fonction. Certains types de papier comme le papier lisse peuvent activer cette fonction même si une seule feuille a été introduite et peuvent arrêter la machine. Si cela se reproduit fréquemment, appuyez sur la touche détection Départs Multiples jusqu'à ce que le voyant du bas soit allumé, afin de désactiver cette fonction. 1 Placez le papier dans le magasin supérieur du module d'insertion, puis alignez les guides sur le papier. % Pour plier ou effectuer manuellement des impressions de livrets en mode pli&piqûre, disposez les feuilles imprimées comme illustré ci-dessous pour les placer dans l'Unité d'insertion. 2 Sélectionnez la fonction désirée. % Appuyez sur le Bouton de sélection Agrafage, bouton de sélection Perforation ou bouton de sélection Pliage et allumez la lampe du mode souhaité. % Perforation et Agrafage en coin/Agrafage en 2 points sont compatibles. Pour les utiliser ensemble, allumez les lampes des deux fonctions. Fonction Positionnement du papier Agrafage en coin/Agrafage en 2 points Placez le recto vers le haut. Perforation Placez le recto vers le haut. Pliage Placez l'intérieur du pli vers le haut. Pliage & Piqûre Placez l'intérieur du livret vers le haut. Impression reliure magazine Disposez les feuilles dans l'ordre inverse [1] : bouton de sélection Agrafage [2] : bouton de sélection Perforation [3] : bouton de sélection Pliage 6 Utilisation manuelle de l'Unité de pliage FD-503/l'Unité de finition FS-532/la Piqueuse à 6-116 ineo 1052/1250 6.14 REMARQUE En mode Pliage & piqûre, les jeux terminés sont délivrés dans le bac pliage de la piqueuse à cheval. Pour préparer une sortie, veillez à sortir le bac pliage et à déplier le support. 3 Appuyez sur le bouton Départ/Arrêt. % Pour interrompre l'opération, appuyez une nouvelle fois sur le bouton Départ/Arrêt. % Le bouton de suspension proposé sur l'Unité de finition FS-532 n'est pas disponible pour les tâches qui utilisent une fonction manuelle. [1] : bouton Départ/Arrêt ineo 1052/1250 6-117 6.14 Utilisation manuelle de l'Unité de pliage FD-503/l'Unité de finition FS-532/la Piqueuse à cheval 6 % Si un départ en double est détecté et que la machine s'arrête alors qu'une seule feuille a été correctement introduite, appuyez sur le bouton Détection double alimentation pour allumer le voyant inférieur. REMARQUE Les magasins de l'Unité de finition FS-532 ont une capacité limitée. Attention à ne pas dépasser la limite, sinon des problèmes inattendus risquent de se produire. [1] : bouton Détection départs multiples Activé Désactivé 6 Utilisation du Thermorelieur PB-503 6-118 ineo 1052/1250 6.15 6.15 Utilisation du Thermorelieur PB-503 La machine équipée du Thermorelieur PB-503 confectionne un livre thermorelié en réunissant automatiquement un jeu de copies et une couverture avec un peu de colle au dos. Original : recto, nombre pair Corps de document : copie recto-verso Couverture imprimée : non A : Corps de document B : Couverture C : Tête D : Pied [1] Verso de la face couverture [2] Verso du dos couverture [3] Recto de la face couverture [4] Recto du dos couverture [5] Largeur dos [6] Massicot Couverture [7] Réglage bord avant couverture [8] Reliure à gauche (haut en bas pour reliure à droite) Face couverture original Corps de document original Dos couverture original Corps de document en sortie Couver. imprimée ineo 1052/1250 6-119 6.15 Utilisation du Thermorelieur PB-503 6 Original : recto, nombre pair Corps de document : copie recto-verso Couverture : Oui, recto Original : recto, nombre pair Corps de document : copie recto-verso Couverture imprimée : Oui, recto-verso Face couverture original Corps de document original Dos couverture original Corps de document en sortie Couver. imprimée Face couverture original Corps de document original Dos couverture original Corps de document en sortie Couver. imprimée 6 Utilisation du Thermorelieur PB-503 6-120 ineo 1052/1250 6.15 Original : recto, nombre impair Corps de document : copie recto-verso Couverture imprimée : non Original : recto, nombre impair Corps de document : copie recto-verso Couverture : Oui, recto Original : recto, nombre impair Corps de document : copie recto-verso Couverture imprimée : Oui, recto-verso Face couverture original Corps de document original Dos couverture original Corps de document en sortie Couver. imprimée Face couverture original Corps de document original Dos couverture original Corps de document en sortie Couver. imprimée Face couverture original Corps de document original Dos couverture original Corps de document en sortie Couver. imprimée ineo 1052/1250 6-121 6.15 Utilisation du Thermorelieur PB-503 6 - Les deux modes de copie recto et recto-verso sont disponibles pour les corps de documents. - Spécifiez si les couvertures doivent rester vierges ou être imprimées sur le recto, ou imprimées sur recto-verso. Il est possible également de trancher les couvertures au massicot pour les adapter à l'épaisseur du corps de document. - Le sens de reliure peut être vers la droite ou vers la gauche. - Le mode Veille/Éco énergie s'enclenche simultanément sur la machine et sur le Thermorelieur PB-503. - Magasin papier – Corps : bac principal (Mag 1, Mag 2), Unité d'alimentation papier PF-703/PF-706 (magasins 3 à 8) – Couverture : bac principal (Mag 1, Mag 2), Unité d'alimentation papier PF-703/PF-706 (magasins 3 à 8), magasin couverture Thermorelieur PB-503 (sans impression couverture), magasin supérieur/ inférieur du module d'insertion de l'Unité de pliage FD-503 (sans impression couverture), Module d'insertion grande capacité MI-PFU (sans impression couverture), Module d'insertion PI-502 (sans impression couverture) - Voir "5 Informations relatives au papier et aux originaux" pour plus de détails sur les formats disponibles pour la machine. - Format papier des couvertures – Définissez le papier pour la longueur (de la tête au pied) et la largeur du document e 2 + épaisseur du document (1 mm min.) + 5 mm min. de largeur de coupe si le massicotage est spécifié. – Voir "5 Informations relatives au papier et aux originaux" pour le format maximal disponible dans chaque magasin. - Grammage du papier – Corps : 64 g/m2 à 91 g/m2 – Couverture : 82 g/m2 à 216 g/m2 - Type de papier – Corps : Qual. supér., Normal – Couverture : Qual. supér., Couché - Nombre de feuilles à relier : – 10 feuilles min. à 300 feuilles max. ou pas plus de 30 mm d'épaisseur – Insertions pliées en Z : 4 feuilles max. pour le mode Recto-verso ou 2 feuilles max. en impression recto Nombre maximum d'intercalaires et de feuilles de document pliés en Z : - Couver. imprimée – L'impression recto et l'impression recto-verso sont toutes deux activées pour les couvertures chargées dans un magasin de la machine (Mag 1, Mag 2) ou dans l'Unité d'alimentation papier PF-703/PF-706 (magasins 3 à 8). Les couvertures chargées dans le bac couverture du Thermorelieur PB-503, le magasin supérieur/inférieur du module d'insertion de l'Unité de pliage FD-503, le Module d'insertion grande capacité MI-PFU ou le Module d'insertion PI-502 ne peuvent pas être imprimées. - Massicot couverture – Si la fonction Massicot Couverture est spécifiée, la machine tranche la couverture sur une largeur automatiquement estimée selon la formule suivante (dans une plage comprise entre 5 mm et 40 mm et par pas de 0,1 mm). – (Largeur de la couverture) – (Largeur du corps de document e 2) - (Largeur dos) – Si la largeur estimée dépasse 10 mm, la machine va automatiquement massicoter la couverture, que la fonction soit activée ou non. - Réglage fin – Réglage Position du bord avant de la couverture : Règle la position latérale de la couverture et du corps de document de -20,0 mm à + 5,0 mm, par pas de 0,1 mm. – Réglage Massicot Couverture : Règle la largeur de massicotage dans une plage -5,0 mm à +5,0 mm, par pas de 0,1 mm. – Réglage Décalage Image Couverture : Règle la position de l'image à imprimer sur la face et le dos de couverture lors de l'utilisation du mode Impression Couverture. Insertions pliées en Z Page de corps de document Total max. 1 page 200 pages 201 pages 2 pages 150 pages 152 pages 3 pages 100 pages 103 pages 4 pages 50 pages 54 pages 6 Utilisation du Thermorelieur PB-503 6-122 ineo 1052/1250 6.15 Si la reliure d'un corps de document v utilise une couverture chargée dans le magasin principal (Mag 1, Mag 2) ou l'Unité d'alimentation papier PF-703/PF-706 (Mag 3 à 8), l'épaisseur du livre est inférieure à 30 mm. - Massicot couverture Non : 460 - (216 e 2) = 28 mm - Massicot couverture Oui : 460 - (216 e 2) - (5 mm de largeur de massicotage) = 23 mm Si le corps de document A4 v est plus épais, utilisez le bac couverture du Thermorelieur PB-503, le magasin supérieur/inférieur du module d'insertion de l'Unité de pliage FD-503, le Module d'insertion grande capacité MI-PFU ou le Module d'insertion PI-502 comme source couverture. dPour info Vous pouvez spécifier le grammage papier des corps de documents et couvertures disponibles pour le Thermorelieur PB-503. Le nombre minimum/maximum de pages à relier en Thermoreliure peut être modifié en fonction du grammage papier du corps du document. En outre, vous pouvez régler la machine pour qu'elle détecte l'épaisseur du corps de document et pour qu'elle suspende temporairement l'opération de reliure si la largeur de la couverture à utiliser ne concorde pas avec le corps du document. Pour plus de détails, voir "12 Menu Utilitaire". 6.15.1 Activation/Désactivation du chauffage du Thermorelieur Le Thermorelieur PB-503 est équipé d'un chauffage interne destiné à chauffer les pastilles de colle et réaliser des livres thermoreliés. Il faut environ 20 minutes de préchauffage pour faire fondre les pastilles et que la machine soit prête pour l'opération. Néanmoins, un chauffage permanent des pastilles de colle peut les détériorer si le Thermorelieur PB-503 est laissé inactif. Pour empêcher la détérioration des pastilles de colle, le chauffage du thermorelieur est conçu pour être éteint automatiquement dans les conditions suivantes. - Une minute après qu'une opération de thermoreliure est achevée - Une minute après achèvement du préchauffage si aucune opération n'a été effectuée sur le thermorelieur Pour allumer le chauffage du thermorelieur L'allumage de la machine par l'interrupteur secondaire de la machine n'allume pas du même coup le chauffage du thermorelieur pour qu'il commence son cycle de chauffage automatique. Le chauffage du thermorelieur démarre automatiquement lorsque [Thermorel.] est sélectionné sur l'écran Finition, ou lorsque une tâche d'impression nécessitant le thermorelieur est reçue. Si vous savez à l'avance que vous aurez à utiliser le Thermorelieur PB-503, anticipez le temps de préchauffage, et allumez le chauffage manuellement en plaçant l'interrupteur du chauffage interne du thermorelieur sur [ON] sur l'écran Machine. ineo 1052/1250 6-123 6.15 Utilisation du Thermorelieur PB-503 6 % Appuyez sur [ON] pour l'interrupteur du chauffage interne du thermorelieur affiché sur l'écran Machine afin de démarrer le préchauffage du thermorelieur. Le message à droite de l'interrupteur du chauffage interne du thermorelieur [Coupure TR] est remplacé par [Préchauff TR]. % Lorsque le Thermorelieur PB-503 devient disponible, ce message est remplacé par [Chauffage TR]. dPour info Le chauffage du thermorelieur peut être réglé pour démarrer automatiquement dès que l'interrupteur secondaire est mis sur Marche. Contactez votre technicien SAV si nécessaire. REMARQUE Une fois qu'il est lancé, le préchauffage du chauffage ne sera pas interrompu même en cas d'activation des fonctions Veille/Économie d'énergie (Extinction Auto) sur la machine. Une fois que le [Thermorelieur] est sélectionné sur l'écran Finition, le chauffage du thermorelieur continuera à chauffer même si l'opération est annulée par une pression sur [Désactiver] sur l'écran Thermoreliure ou par une pression sur Auto sur le panneau de commande. Si vous n'utilisez pas le Thermorelieur PB-503, veillez à [éteindre] le chauffage par une pression sur le l'interrupteur du chauffage du thermorelieur sur l'écran Machine. 6 Utilisation du Thermorelieur PB-503 6-124 ineo 1052/1250 6.15 Pour éteindre le chauffage du thermorelieur Une fois le travail de thermoreliure terminé, le chauffage du thermorelieur va automatiquement s'éteindre au bout d'une minute. Le chauffage va aussi s'éteindre automatiquement au bout d'une minute si aucune opération n'est effectuée sur le Thermorelieur PB-503 à l'issue du préchauffage. Le chauffage peut être éteint manuellement en mettant l'interrupteur du chauffage du thermorelieur sur [Désa] sur l'écran Machine, pendant le préchauffage ou lorsque la machine est disponible. Placer l'interrupteur du chauffage du thermorelieur sur [Désa] restera sans effet si aucun travail nécessitant une thermoreliure n'est entré. dPour info Le S.A.V. peut régler le chauffage pour qu'il ne s'éteigne pas automatiquement au bout d'une minute. Contactez votre technicien SAV si nécessaire. Dans ce cas, le chauffage ne va pas s'éteindre avant que les fonctions Veille/Économie d'énergie (Extinction Auto) de la machine soient activées. Veillez à éviter que les pastilles de colle ne se détériorent. 6.15.2 Manipuler le Thermorelieur PB-503 et les pastilles de colle Pour garantir la sécurité et la fiabilité du produit, veuillez observer les précautions d'utilisation des pastilles de colle et du Thermorelieur PB-503. 7 ATTENTION NE JAMAIS toucher la colle brûlante et fondue. - La colle à température d'utilisation est brûlante. En cas de contact, vous risquez de vous brûler. Ne manipuler la colle fondue chaude qu'en redoublant de précautions. Si vous devez nettoyer ou remplacer de la colle chaude fondue, veuillez contacter votre technicien SAV. Précautions relatives au thermorelieur - N'utiliser que de la colle GC-501 avec ce relieur. - Si vous n'utilisez pas le thermorelieur, veillez à éteindre le chauffage par l'interrupteur pour éviter la détérioration de la colle. Si le chauffage n'est pas réglé pour s'arrêter automatiquement au bout d'une minute à la fin d'une tâche de thermoreliure, il est recommandé de régler les paramètres horaires pour le mode Veille et Éco. énergie de la machine pour les adapter à l'utilisation du Thermorelieur PB-503, parce qu'ils s'appliquent aussi au thermorelieur. - Ne pas trop remplir la trémie de colle de pastilles de colle. - Ne pas toucher à la main le levier qui se trouve dans la trémie de colle. Cela pourrait causer un incident sur la machine. Précautions relatives aux pastilles de colle - Les pastilles de colle ne doivent pas être ingérées. Ne pas les mettre dans la bouche ou les avaler. - Conservez les pastilles hors de portée des enfants. - Conservez les pastilles de colle dans un endroit sombre, frais, à l'intérieur et à l'abri de l'eau et du rayonnement direct du soleil. La température de stockage se situe entre 5 et 35°C. ineo 1052/1250 6-125 6.15 Utilisation du Thermorelieur PB-503 6 - Les pastilles de colle peuvent être dégradées par des produits comme les huiles communes, les solvants organiques, les solvants utilisés dans les formulations des encres ou les fragrances volatiles. Une telle dégradation peut altérer l'adhérence, ce qui entraîne une mauvaise qualité de reliure. 6.15.3 Confection de livrets thermoreliés 1 Vérifiez l'état actuel du chauffage du thermorelieur. L'écran Machine permet de vérifier l'état actuel du chauffage du thermorelieur. Normalement, [Coupure TR] s'affiche à l'écran. % Lorsque [Thermorel.] est sélectionné sur l'écran Finition à l'étape 8, l'interrupteur Température TR est automatiquement [allumé]. % Si vous connaissez à l'avance l'heure d'utilisation du thermorelieur, calculez le délai pour allumer le chauffage en tenant compte du temps de préchauffage requis, puis mettez l'interrupteur Température TR sur [Act.]. % Lorsque l'interrupteur de chauffage du thermorelieur est sur [Act.], [Coupure TR] devient [Préchauffe TR]. À la fin du préchauffage, [Température TR] s'affiche à nouveau. 6 Utilisation du Thermorelieur PB-503 6-126 ineo 1052/1250 6.15 2 Positionnez l'original. % Pour les originaux disponibles en thermoreliure, voir page 6-118. 3 Chargez le papier destiné aux jeux de corps dans un magasin. % Chargez le papier pour les jeux de corps dans un magasin de la machine (Mag 1 ou Mag 2) ou de l'Unité d'alimentation papier PF-703/PF-706 (magasins 3 à 8). 4 Chargez le papier couvertures dans un magasin. % Chargez le papier couvertures dans un des magasins suivants. En cas d'impression couvertures : magasins machine (Mag 1, Mag 2), Unité d'alimentation papier PF-703/PF-706 (magasins 3 à 8) Sans impression couvertures : bac couverture du Thermorelieur PB-503, magasin supérieur/inférieur du module d'insertion de l'Unité de pliage FD-503, Module d'insertion grande capacité MI-PFU en plus des magasins ci-dessus REMARQUE Utilisez un format papier couverture personnalisé. La saisie de la longueur/largeur est requise. Vérifiez que les dimensions de couverture à utiliser sont précises. Si vous souhaitez le massicotage des couvertures, veillez à utiliser le format papier qui permet une largeur de coupe comprise entre 5 et 40 mm. 5 Appuyez sur l'onglet [COPIER] pour afficher l'écran Copie. 6 Sélectionnez le magasin chargé avec le papier destiné aux corps de document. Le format du papier sera automatiquement détecté. ineo 1052/1250 6-127 6.15 Utilisation du Thermorelieur PB-503 6 7 Modifiez la sélection papier s'il y a lieu. % Le format du papier sera automatiquement détecté. % Si le grammage papier spécifié pour le magasin sélectionné n'est pas adapté aux corps de document, l'opération de thermoreliure est impossible. Sélectionnez [62-74 g/m2] ou [75-91 g/m2]. % L'opération de reliure est impossible même si l'un des grammages mentionnés ci-dessus est spécifié. Le nombre de pages des jeux de corps de document peut être limité en fonction du grammage papier sélectionné. Pour plus de détails, voir "12 Menu Utilitaire". 8 Appuyez successivement sur [Finition] et [Thermorel.]. L'écran Thermoreliure s'affiche. Le chauffage du thermorelieur lance automatiquement la phase de préchauffage. Le préchauffage dure environ 20 minutes. REMARQUE Le Thermorelieur PB-503 n'arrête pas le préchauffage même si vous appuyez sur la touche [Par défaut] de l'écran Finition ou sur la touche Reset du panneau de contrôle. Pour arrêter d'utiliser le Thermorelieur PB-503, revenez à l'écran Machine et appuyez sur la touche [Arrêt] de l'interrupteur Température TR. Lorsque vous arrêtez d'utiliser le thermorelieur, pensez à éteindre le chauffage pour éviter la détérioration des pastilles de colle. 9 Sélectionnez le magasin chargé de couvertures. 6 Utilisation du Thermorelieur PB-503 6-128 ineo 1052/1250 6.15 % À droite de [Source couverture], appuyez sur [Modifier] pour sélectionner le magasin dans lequel le papier couverture doit être chargé à l'étape 4. % La sélection d'un magasin entre [Mag 1] et [Mag 8] permet l'impression des couvertures. La fonction Couver. imprimée n'est pas disponible si tout autre magasin est sélectionné. 10 Modifiez la sélection papier du magasin chargé de couvertures. % Appuyez sur [Modif. config papier] et modifiez les paramètres comme il convient. % Cette étape de configuration n'est pas nécessaire si le magasin sélectionné à l'étape 9 est déjà configuré pour les couvertures. % En cas de papier personnalisé, vous devez préciser les dimensions verticales et horizontales. % Lorsque le réglage est terminé, appuyez sur [Fermer]. 11 Appuyez sur [OK] dans l'écran Magasin couverture. L'écran Thermoreliure est rétabli. ineo 1052/1250 6-129 6.15 Utilisation du Thermorelieur PB-503 6 12 Définissez les réglages Couver. imprimée, Face couv. impr, Massicot couverture et Type de reliure. % Vous pouvez régler Couver. imprimée sur [Activé] lorsqu'un des magasins entre [Mag 1] et [Mag 8] est la source couverture. En sélectionnant [Activé], Face couv. impr devient aussi accessible. % Les opérations Couver. imprimée diffèrent selon que le nombre de feuilles de l'original est pair ou impair. Pour plus de détails sur le résultat fini avec chaque paramètre spécifié, voir page 6-118. % Lorsque la fonction Massicot couverture est [activée], si la largeur de coupe estimée par la machine n'est pas comprise dans une plage de 5 à 40 mm, un message vous informe que le mode de massicotage n'est pas disponible. Si la largeur de coupe dépasse 10 mm, la machine va automatiquement massicoter la couverture, que la fonction soit activée ou non. 13 Spécifiez la largeur du dos. % Appuyez sur [Modifier] à droite de [Largeur dos (1-30 mm)] pour afficher l'écran Largeur dos. Entrez la valeur souhaitée au clavier de l'écran tactile, [,], [+] ou au clavier du panneau de contrôle. % Ce réglage est possible si Couver. imprimée est réglé sur [Activé]. % Appuyez sur [OK] pour rétablir l'écran Thermoreliure. 6 Utilisation du Thermorelieur PB-503 6-130 ineo 1052/1250 6.15 14 Procédez à des réglages fins pour le bord avant, la largeur de coupe et la position de l'image de la couverture. % Appuyez sur [Modifier] à droite de [Réglage fin] pour afficher l'écran Réglage fin. % Pour régler le bord avant de la couverture, appuyez sur [Pos. bord avant couvert]. Utilisez le clavier de l'écran tactile, [,], [+] ou le clavier du panneau de contrôle pour entrer la valeur souhaitée, puis appuyez sur [+<->-] pour sélectionner une valeur positive ou négative. % Pour régler la largeur de coupe, appuyez sur [Massicotage couverture]. Utilisez le clavier de l'écran tactile, [,], [+] ou le clavier du panneau de contrôle pour entrer la valeur souhaitée, puis appuyez sur [+<->-] pour sélectionner une valeur positive ou négative. % Pour régler la position de l'image de la couverture, appuyez sur [Décalage image couverture]. Appuyez sur [Recto] ou [Verso] pour sélectionner la face imprimée, puis sur [Haut/Bas] ou [Drte/Gche] pour sélectionner le sens du réglage. Utilisez le clavier de l'écran tactile, [,], [+] ou le clavier du panneau de contrôle pour entrer la valeur souhaitée, puis appuyez sur [+<->-] pour sélectionner une valeur positive ou négative. 15 Appuyez sur [OK]. L'écran Thermoreliure est rétabli. L'écran affiche les détails de la configuration thermoreliure en cours. Vérifiez les réglages. 16 Appuyez sur [OK] pour confirmer les réglages. % Pour rétablir le réglage précédent, appuyez sur [Annuler]. % Pour désactiver la fonction tout en conservant le réglage actuel, appuyez sur [Désactiver]. L'écran Finition est rétabli. ineo 1052/1250 6-131 6.15 Utilisation du Thermorelieur PB-503 6 17 Appuyez sur [OK] dans l'écran Finition pour retourner à l'écran Copie. L'icône thermoreliure s'affiche sous [Finition] dans l'écran Copie. 18 Sélectionnez le cas échéant des conditions de copie supplémentaires. % Si vous effectuez des copies recto-verso, sélectionnez [1->2] ou [2->2]. % Si le nombre d'originaux dépasse 100, utilisez le mode Mémoire. 19 Entrez sur le clavier du panneau de contrôle le nombre de copies désiré. % L'impression d'une épreuve est recommandée avant d'imprimer des jeux multiples. % Après l'impression de l'épreuve, l'épaisseur réelle du corps de document s'affiche sur l'écran Thermoreliure. Utilisez ces informations pour régler la largeur dos si elle diffère de la valeur spécifiée auparavant. 20 Appuyez sur Départ sur le panneau de contrôle. Le Thermorelieur PB-503 ne fonctionne pas pendant la phase de préchauffage. Une fois le préchauffage terminé, la machine commence automatiquement à travailler. REMARQUE N'ouvrez jamais la porte avant du Thermorelieur PB-503 pendant qu'une opération est en cours sur la machine. Sinon la machine arrête immédiatement l'opération et un bourrage papier est possible. 6 Utilisation du Thermorelieur PB-503 6-132 ineo 1052/1250 6.15 6.15.4 Récupération des livres thermoreliés du magasin thermorelieur Le magasin a une capacité d'environ 6600 feuilles empilées en 11 jeux de 30 mm d'épaiss sur 2 colonnes. La machine empile la première colonne à droite du magasin thermorelieur, puis la transfère dans le bac de transport pour pouvoir empiler la deuxième colonne. 1 Vérifiez les piles par la fenêtre du bac du thermorelieur. Si les piles de livres ne se trouvent que du côté droit du bac, passez à l'étape 2. Si au contraire les piles de livres se trouvent des deux côtés du bac, passez à l'étape 3. 2 Appuyez sur la touche d'avancement pour déplacer les livres vers le bac de transport. % Le transfert vers le bac du thermorelieur est disponible même si le bac de transport n'est pas installé à l'intérieur de bac du thermorelieur. Dans ce cas, la capacité du bac sera moitié moindre qu'avec le bac de transport installé. (1 jeu de 30 mm d'épaisseur e 11 e 1 colonne = env. 3300 feuilles) % La touche d'avancement ne fonctionne pas pendant que la machine est en train de transférer les livres terminés vers le bac du thermorelieur. % La touche d'avancement ne fonctionne pas si le bac de transport n'est pas installé. 3 Ouvrez la porte avant du bac du thermorelieur. % La porte avant du bac du thermorelieur ne s'ouvre pas pendant que la machine est en train de transférer les livres terminés vers le bac du thermorelieur, ou en train de les avancer parce que la touche d'avancement est actionnée. 4 Tirez lentement le bac de transport. % Veillez à tirer lentement le bac de transport. Sinon, les piles de livres pourraient s'écrouler. 5 Lors du déplacement du bac de transport contenant des piles de livres, utilisez la plaque de maintien de livres et butée livres pour maintenir les livres sur le bac de transport, afin d'éviter qu'ils ne tombent. % Déplacez le levier de la plaque de maintien de livres pour aligner la plaque contre les livres. ineo 1052/1250 6-133 6.15 Utilisation du Thermorelieur PB-503 6 % Insérez la butée livres dans le trou de positionnement désiré sur le bac de transport pour l'aligner contre les livres. 6 Sortez les livres du bac de transport. % Avant de sortir les livres, veillez à enlever la plaque de maintien de livres et la butée livres, si elles ont été utilisées. 7 Ramenez le bac de transport en position initiale, puis refermez la porte avant du bac du thermorelieur. 8 S'il reste une colonne de livres du côté droit du magasin, répétez les étapes 2 à 7. 6 Utilisation de l'empileur grande capacité LS-505 6-134 ineo 1052/1250 6.16 6.16 Utilisation de l'empileur grande capacité LS-505 L'empileur grande capacité LS-505 comprend un empileur (sur le bac de transport) et un magasin auxiliaire. 6.16.1 Sortie dans l'empileur Conjointement aux modes de sortie ci-dessus, vous pouvez aussi sélectionner la sortie recto souhaitée ([Vers haut] ou [Vers bas]) ainsi que l'ordre ([1 vers N] ou [N vers 1]), selon vos besoins. dPour info Vous pouvez changer le mode initial de finition dans le menu Utilitaire. Pour plus de détails, voir "12 Menu Utilitaire". 1 Positionnez l'original. 2 Appuyez sur l'onglet [COPIER] pour afficher l'écran Copie. 3 Appuyez sur [Finition]. L'écran Finition s'affiche. % Le magasin actuellement sélectionné est mis en évidence sur l'image frontale de la machine. Si le magasin principal (empileur) n'est pas sélectionné, appuyez sur la touche de position du magasin principal pour le mettre en évidence. 4 Sélectionnez le mode de sortie désiré. % Sélectionnez une des touches [Tri décalé], [Tri], [GroupeDécalé] et [Groupe]. % Sélectionnez [Vers haut] ou [Vers bas], ainsi que [1 vers N] ou [N vers 1] situés en dessous de [Ordre/Face], selon vos besoins. % La sélection de [N vers 1] définit automatiquement la sortie recto et la limite à [Vers haut]. Type de finition Détails [Tri décalé] Éjecte plusieurs copies du jeu original en décalant chaque jeu de 20 mm à la sortie vers l'empileur. [Tri] Délivre plusieurs copies du jeu original. Les copies sont empilées à la sortie sans être décalées. [GroupeDécalé] Regroupe plusieurs copies de chaque original et décale les jeux à la sortie. [Groupe] Éjecte plusieurs copies de chaque original. Les copies sont empilées à la sortie sans être décalées. ineo 1052/1250 6-135 6.16 Utilisation de l'empileur grande capacité LS-505 6 5 Appuyez sur [OK] dans l'écran Finition pour retourner à l'écran Copie. Une icône du mode de finition spécifié s'affiche sous [Finition] dans l'écran Copie. REMARQUE L'empileur de l'empileur grande capacité LS-505 a une capacité limitée. Attention à ne pas dépasser la limite, sinon des problèmes inattendus risquent de se produire. 6.16.2 Récupération des jeux terminés sur l'empileur 1 Appuyez sur la touche Récupération papier. L'empileur abaissera le bac de transport. % La butée papier sert à bloquer le papier en position lors du déplacement du bac de transport. Pour plus de détails, voir page 6-136. 2 Ouvrez la porte de l'empileur grande capacité. % Une fois que l'empileur a reçu une feuille de papier en sortie de la machine, sa porte sera verrouillée et ne pourra être ouverte tant que le bac de transport n'aura pas été abaissé. 3 Tirez le bac de transport en le tenant par la poignée. REMARQUE Veillez à tirer le bac de transport dans l'axe. Ne pas tirer de travers et ne pas forcer sur le bac. Ce bac de transport est exclusivement destiné au transport du papier. Ne l'utilisez pas pour autre chose. Ne vous mettez jamais à l'intérieur de l'empileur grande capacité. 4 Enlevez le papier du bac de transport. L'empileur peut être enlevée du bac de transport. REMARQUE Une fois que l'empileur s'est abaissée pour permettre de dégager une feuille coincée ou de vérifier les feuilles produites, il n'est pas possible de lancer la copie tant que toutes les feuilles traitées n'ont pas été enlevées. Si vous remettez le bac de transport en place et qu'il reste des feuilles sur l'empileur, la machine risque de tomber en panne. Assurez-vous d'enlever toutes les feuilles. 6 Utilisation de l'empileur grande capacité LS-505 6-136 ineo 1052/1250 6.16 5 Replacez le bac de transport dans sa position initiale, puis refermez soigneusement la porte de l'empileur grande capacité. REMARQUE Lorsque vous ramenez l'empileur en position initiale, alignez les détrompeurs du bac de transport avec les orifices correspondants sur l'empileur. Si l'empileur n'est pas correctement replacée, le bac de transport ne peut pas retrouver sa position initiale. 6.16.3 Pour bloquer le papier sur le bac de transport 1 Déposez la butée papier du bac de transport. 2 Montez la butée papier sur le support papier. % Placez les détrompeurs de la butée papier contre le support et relevez l'autre côté comme sur l'illustration. 3 Retenez le papier à l'aide de la butée papier. % Tournez le support papier vers le papier. REMARQUE Ne pas pousser trop fort. Sinon, cela pourrait froisser ou déchirer les feuilles. ineo 1052/1250 6-137 6.16 Utilisation de l'empileur grande capacité LS-505 6 % Pressez la butée papier vers le bas. 4 Démontez la butée papier du support papier. % Tirez puis tournez la butée papier, puis enlevez-la du support papier. 5 Replacez la butée papier dans sa position d'origine. REMARQUE Ramenez la butée papier en position correcte. Sinon, la porte de l'empileur pourrait ne pas se fermer. 6 Utilisation de l'empileur grande capacité LS-505 6-138 ineo 1052/1250 6.16 6.16.4 Sortie dans le magasin secondaire Conjointement aux modes de sortie ci-dessus, vous pouvez aussi sélectionner la sortie recto souhaitée ([Vers haut] ou [Vers bas]) ainsi que l'ordre ([1 vers N] ou [N vers 1]), selon vos besoins. 1 Positionnez l'original. 2 Appuyez sur l'onglet [COPIER] pour afficher l'écran Copie. 3 Appuyez sur [Finition]. L'écran Finition s'affiche. 4 Sélectionnez le bac auxiliaire comme bac de sortie. % Appuyez sur la touche de position du magasin auxiliaire pour la mettre en évidence. 5 Sélectionnez le mode de sortie désiré. % Sélectionnez [Tri] ou [Groupe] dans la fenêtre [Sortie]. % Sélectionnez [Vers haut] ou [Vers bas], ainsi que [1 vers N] ou [N vers 1] situés en dessous de [Ordre/Face], selon vos besoins. % La sélection de [N vers 1] définit automatiquement la sortie recto et la limite à [Vers haut]. Type de finition Détails [Tri] Délivre plusieurs copies du jeu original. Les copies sont empilées à la sortie sans être décalées. [Groupe] Regroupe plusieurs copies de chaque original. Les copies sont empilées à la sortie sans être décalées. ineo 1052/1250 6-139 6.16 Utilisation de l'empileur grande capacité LS-505 6 6 Appuyez sur [OK] dans l'écran Finition pour retourner à l'écran Copie. Une icône du mode de finition spécifié s'affiche sous [Finition] dans l'écran Copie. REMARQUE Le magasin auxiliaire de l'empileur grande capacité LS-505 a une capacité limitée. Attention à ne pas dépasser la limite, sinon des problèmes inattendus risquent de se produire. 6 Utilisation de deux machines en tandem : Mode Tandem 6-140 ineo 1052/1250 6.17 6.17 Utilisation de deux machines en tandem : Mode Tandem 6.17.1 Présentation du mode Tandem Le mode Tandem permet à deux machines (ce MFP et un MFP partenaire) de travailler en tandem dans le but de répartir un gros volume de tâches de copie reçues par ce MFP). Deux unités travaillant en tandem terminent plus rapidement de gros volumes de sortie. Les deux machines devraient être raccordés comme décrit ci-dessous. - Raccordez les deux machines directement via un câble réseau croisé. – Dans ce cas, les autres fonctions réseau de la machine seront indisponibles. - Branchez chacun des deux machines à un concentrateur de réseau à l'aide de câbles droits. – Utilisez des câbles droits ou les câbles croisés de catégorie 5 ou compatible avec des normes en vigueur plus récentes pour raccorder les machines. dPour info Le mode Tandem nécessite un réglage technique. Contactez votre technicien SAV si nécessaire. Notes sur la connexion des machines : Points Commentaires Configuration d'options pour ce MFP et le MFP partenaire Les deux machines doivent présenter la même configuration d'options pour activer le mode Tandem. État de connexion en tandem Appuyez sur [Tandem] dans l'écran Configuration de la sortie pour afficher l'écran Réglage Tandem, puis sélectionnez [Activé] pour activer ce MFP de sorte que les deux machines passent en mode tandem. Informations Papier des magasins de ce MFP et du MFP partenaire Avec la mise en tandem des deux machines, les touches de [Ce MFP] et du [MFP Parten.] sont mentionnées sous [Magasin papier] dans l'écran Machine. La pression de [Ce MFP] sur l'une ou l'autre machine affiche les informations du papier spécifié pour les magasins de ce MFP. De même, la pression de [MFP Parten.] sur l'une ou l'autre machine affiche les informations du papier spécifié pour les magasins du MFP parten. Réglage des conditions de copie, numérisation des originaux et lancement d'une tâche de sortie Sélection des conditions de copie, numérisation des originaux et lancement de l'impression sur ce MFP pendant l'activation du mode tandem. Réinitialisation Auto Réinitialisation Auto fonctionne généralement sur la machine en mode Tandem. Le réglage initial du mode tandem prévoit son annulation en cas d'activation de Réinitialisation Auto sur ce MFP. Sortie des données enregistrées Les donnés enregistrées peuvent être imprimées en mode Tandem. Sécurité renforcée Le mode Tandem est indisponible si la sécurité renforcée est activée. ineo 1052/1250 6-141 6.17 Utilisation de deux machines en tandem : Mode Tandem 6 6.17.2 Opérations en mode Tandem Cette section décrit comment utiliser les machines en mode Tandem. Notes sur l'opération en mode tandem : Points Commentaires Traitement de tâches multiples en mode Tandem Si la tâche suivante spécifie l'utilisation de la fonction tâche en réserve pendant que des opérations en mode tandem sont en cours, ces dernières se poursuivent. Vous pouvez réserver jusqu'à 100 tâches y compris le travail en cours. Interruption de la copie en mode Tandem L'interruption de la copie sur la machine n'est possible qu'en appuyant sur la touche Interruption du panneau de contrôle. L'opération d'impression en mode Tandem est suspendue sur cette machine jusqu'à ce que la copie d'interruption soit terminée. Fonction du mode Tandem et Éco énergie • Si le mode Tandem est activé pendant que le MFP partenaire est en mode Éco énergie auto, le mode Économie d'énergie est automatiquement désactivé. • Le mode tandem est indisponible si le MFP partenaire est en mode Éco énergie. Appuyez sur la touche Eco énergie du panneau de contrôle pour quitter le mode Eco énergie. • Si le mode Veille est activé pendant que le MFP partenaire est en mode tandem, le mode Veille est automatiquement désactivé lorsque l'impression en mode tandem démarre. • Si Éco énergie est activé sur le MFP partenaire, le mode tandem est automatiquement annulé. • Si Veille/Eco énergie est activé sur ce MFP, le mode tandem est automatiquement annulé. Appuyez sur n'importe quelle touche de ce MFP pour quitter le mode Éco énergie, puis redéfinissez le mode tandem pour relancer l'opération. Incidents en mode Tandem Le mode tandem est indisponible lorsque le MFP partenaire présente l'une des conditions décrites ci-dessous et un message du type "Attendre _ Pas de fonction réserve avec la machine auxiliaire" ou "Erreur machine auxiliaire/Vérifier la machine auxiliaire" s'affiche. • Le mode Tandem est indisponible pendant que le MFP partenaire est hors tension, en raison de la fonction mode Éco énergie. Appuyez sur la touche Eco énergie du panneau de contrôle du MFP partenaire pour quitter le mode Eco énergie. • Si Éco énergie est activé sur le MFP partenaire, le mode tandem est automatiquement annulé. Appuyez sur la touche Eco énergie du panneau de contrôle du MFP partenaire pour quitter le mode Eco énergie, puis redéfinissez le mode Tandem pour relancer l'opération. • Si le moindre problème de bourrage ou manque de papier survient sur le MFP partenaire, l'impression en mode tandem devient indisponible ; mais le problème n'annule pas le mode tandem. Prenez les mesures de dépannage appropriées sur le MFP partenaire pour être prêt à imprimer. • Le travail d'impression en tandem ne peut pas démarrer si 100 travaux en réserve (pas en mode tandem) sont entrés sur le MFP partenaire. Attendez jusqu'à ce que les travaux en réserve soient terminés sur le MFP partenaire. 6 Utilisation de deux machines en tandem : Mode Tandem 6-142 ineo 1052/1250 6.17 1 Mettez l'interrupteur principal et l'interrupteur secondaire en position de marche pour les deux machines connectées pour l'utilisation du mode Tandem, puis affichez l'écran Copie de chacune d'entre elles. % Confirmez que les deux machines sont disponibles pour la copie avec l'écran Copie affiché. 2 Appuyez sur la touche [Finition] de l'écran Copie de ce MFP. L'écran Finition s'affiche. 3 Appuyez sur [Tandem]. L'écran Tandem s'affiche. ineo 1052/1250 6-143 6.17 Utilisation de deux machines en tandem : Mode Tandem 6 4 Sélectionnez [Activé] sur l'écran Tandem, puis appuyez sur [OK] deux fois. [Tandem P] s'affiche dans le coin inférieur droit de l'écran Copie de ce MFP. REMARQUE Assurez-vous de sélectionner [Activé] sur l'écran Tandem non pas du MFP partenaire mais de ce MFP. Sinon, le mode Tandem ne peut pas être activé. % Pour spécifier les conditions de copie utilisant plusieurs magasins d'une machine, les formats des magasins correspondants doivent être les mêmes sur ce MFP et sur le MFP partenaire. % Les opérations de copie courantes sont toujours disponibles sur le MFP partenaire pendant la configuration du mode tandem. 5 Sélectionnez les conditions copie désirées sur ce MFP. 6 Entrez le nombre de copies voulues sur ce MFP. Si le nombre de copies entré est 100, ce MFP et le MFP partenaire chacun 50 jeux. % Le nombre de copies à imprimer doit être réglé pour deux copies ou plus afin d'effectuer l'impression en mode Tandem. % Si le nombre de jeux à sortir est impair, un jeu supplémentaire est délivré sur Ce MFP. 7 Placez l'original sur ce MFP. 6 Utilisation de deux machines en tandem : Mode Tandem 6-144 ineo 1052/1250 6.17 8 Appuyez sur Départ sur le panneau de contrôle de ce MFP. [Tandem A] s'affiche dans le coin inférieur droit de l'écran Copie du MFP partenaire. Le mode tandem est annulé automatiquement à la fin de l'impression en mode tandem et [Tandem P] pour ce MFP ainsi que [Tandem A] pour le MFP partenaire disparaissent. REMARQUE Chaque magasin de sortie a une capacité limitée. Attention à ne pas dépasser la limite, sinon des problèmes inattendus risquent de se produire. ineo 1052/1250 6-145 6.17 Utilisation de deux machines en tandem : Mode Tandem 6 6.17.3 Annulation du mode tandem/de l'impression en tandem Cette section décrit comment annuler l'impression en mode Tandem. dPour info La procédure suivante permet d'annuler toutes les opérations de l'impression en mode tandem. Pour annuler l'opération sur le MFP partenaire uniquement et continuer sur ce MFP, voir page 6-146. 1 Appuyez sur Arrêt sur le panneau de contrôle de ce MFP. La tâche de numérisation/d'impression s'arrête immédiatement et un dialogue de confirmation apparaît sur l'écran de ce MFP. A ce moment, le mode Tandem n'est pas encore annulé. 2 Appuyez sur [Arrêt tâche]. Toutes les données numérisées sont effacées complètement pour annuler le mode/l'impression en tandem. % Appuyez sur [Reprendre] pour reprendre la tâche de numérisation/d'impression. 6 Utilisation de deux machines en tandem : Mode Tandem 6-146 ineo 1052/1250 6.17 6.17.4 Annulation de l'impression en mode tandem sur le MFP partenaire uniquement Suivez la procédure ci-dessous pour annuler l'impression sur le MFP partenaire et continuer sur ce MFP. 1 Appuyez sur Arrêt sur le panneau de contrôle du MFP partenaire. Le MFP partenaire arrête l'impression immédiatement et un dialogue de confirmation apparaît sur l'écran du MFP partenaire. A ce moment, le mode Tandem n'est pas encore annulé. % Si une suspension temporaire dans le MFP partenaire prend longtemps, le mode Redistrib. tâche si problème est activé pour permettre à ce MFP pour prendre en charge le nombre de copies restantes. 2 Appuyez sur [Arrêt tâche]. Ceci annule le mode tandem et l'impression sur le MFP partenaire. % Appuyez sur [Reprendre] pour reprendre l'impression en mode tandem arrêtée temporairement sur le MFP partenaire. ineo 1052/1250 6-147 6.17 Utilisation de deux machines en tandem : Mode Tandem 6 6.17.5 Dépannage en mode Tandem/impression Symptôme Solution Redistrib. tâche si problème La machine ayant terminé l'impression détecte l'état de l'autre machine et redistribue le nombre d'exemplaires restants pour continuer cette tâche. Ou, lorsqu'un incident se produit sur une des deux machines pendant l'impression en mode Tandem, la machine qui fonctionne normalement détecte l'état de la machine défaillante et termine la tâche en prenant en charge la quantité restante à imprimer, une fois qu'elle a terminé son propre quota. Lorsqu'une machine a terminé son quota d'impression Elle détecte l'état de l'autre machine et prend automatiquement en charge la moitié de la quantité restante à imprimer par l'activation du mode de redistribution des tâches. En cas de bourrage papier, manque de papier ou de code SC (E-code, F-code) sur une des machines Elle prend automatiquement en charge la quantité qui reste à imprimer par l'activation du mode Redistrib. tâche si problème. En cas de code d'erreur SC (E-code, F-code), prenez les mesures de dépannage appropriées pour corriger le problème à la fin de la tâche d'impression en tandem. En cas de dépassement de mémoire sur ce MFP Le travail de numérisation s'arrête immédiatement et la tâche d'impression en tandem est suspendue sur les deux machines. A ce moment, le mode Tandem n'est pas encore annulé. Prenez les mêmes mesures que dans le cas de dépassement de mémoire sur une machine individuelle. En cas de dépassement de mémoire sur le MFP partenaire Le MFP partenaire reprend la tâche d'impression en tandem lorsque la mémoire est à nouveau disponible après l'exécution de certaines tâches en réserve. Dans ce cas, le mode de redistribution des tâches en cas de problème fonctionne pour continuer la tâche d'impression en tandem sur ce MFP jusqu'à ce que le MFP partenaire soit à nouveau disponible pour la tâche. Si la mémoire du MFP partenaire ne peut pas retrouver de disponibilité malgré le temps écoulé, le mode tandem est désactivé sur le MFP partenaire. Le mode de redistribution des tâches en cas de problème fonctionne pour terminer la tâche sur ce MFP. Lors d'une mise hors tension d'une des machines Dans les deux cas, le mode Tandem/l'impression en tandem est automatiquement annulé. Relancez la procédure depuis le début. 6 Utilisation de la Perforeuse multiple GP-501 6-148 ineo 1052/1250 6.18 6.18 Utilisation de la Perforeuse multiple GP-501 La Perforeuse multiple GP-501 permet de réaliser les neuf types de perforation suivants sur les feuilles imprimées. Modèle d'emporte-pièce Type de perforation DS-508 DS-509 DS-510 DS-511 DS-512 DS-513 DS-514 DS-515 DS-516 DS-517 DS-518 Classeur à anneaux 4 trous, Diamètre 5/16" Reliure plastique Cerlox Normal 21 trous Reliure fil métal - 3 :1 Ronde 34 trous Reliure fil métal - 2 :1 Rectangulaire 23 trous Spirale couleur - 4 :1 Ronde 47 trous VeloBind - 1 :1 Ronde 12 trous Emporte-pièce ProClick A4 34-trous Emporte-pièce Classeur à anneaux 2-trous A4 Reliure plastique Cerlox 20 trous Emporte-pièce Reliure fil métal W2 A4 trous carrés à dépouille latérale pour Australie Emporte-pièce Reliure fil métal W3 A4 trous carrés à dépouille latérale pour Australie ineo 1052/1250 6-149 6.18 Utilisation de la Perforeuse multiple GP-501 6 6.18.1 Perforation des copies : Perforation Définissez le mode de perforation pour réaliser la perforation des feuilles imprimées pour classement. Appliquez la procédure ci-dessous pour sélectionner le format papier A4 et la position de perforation. Pour sélectionner le type de trous à réaliser, changez l'emporte-pièce pour celui qui convient. dPour info Pour les caractéristiques détaillées de la Perforeuse multiple GP-501, voir page 13-18. 0 Le seul format papier disponible est A4 v. A4 w ne peut pas être utilisé pour cette fonction. 0 La perforeuse multiple est équipée d'un interrupteur électrique. Veillez à le placer en position ON (Marche) avant l'interrupteur principal et les interrupteurs secondaires de la machine. 0 Le modèle d'emporte-pièce actuellement installé sur la perforeuse multiple ne peut pas être contrôlé depuis le panneau de contrôle. En cas de besoin, ouvrez la porte avant de la perforeuse multiple pour procéder à un contrôle avant de commencer l'opération. 1 Positionnez l'original. 2 Appuyez sur l'onglet [COPIER] pour afficher l'écran Copie. 3 Appuyez sur [Finition]. L'écran Finition s'affiche. 4 Appuyez sur [Perforation]. L'écran Perforation s'affiche. 5 Sélectionnez la touche de position voulue sous [Perfo. multi]. 6 Utilisation de la Perforeuse multiple GP-501 6-150 ineo 1052/1250 6.18 6 Appuyez sur [OK]. % Pour rétablir le réglage précédent, appuyez sur [Annuler]. % Pour désactiver la fonction tout en conservant le réglage actuel, appuyez sur [Désactiver]. L'écran Finition est rétabli. 7 Appuyez sur [OK] dans l'écran Finition pour retourner à l'écran Copie. Une icône du mode de finition spécifié s'affiche sous [Finition] dans l'écran Copie. ineo 1052/1250 6-151 6.18 Utilisation de la Perforeuse multiple GP-501 6 6.18.2 Remplacement de l'emporte-pièce 1 Ouvrez la porte avant de la perforeuse multiple. 2 Tournez le bouton [GP4] en sens horaire pour amener l'indicateur de position de la lame de l'emporte- pièce en position horizontale, comme indiqué sur l'illustration. % Placez l'indicateur de position de la lame de l'emportepièce en position horizontale, sinon il est impossible de retirer l'emporte-pièce. Veillez à l'aligner avec la ligne horizontale. 3 Retirez lentement l'emporte-pièce. 4 Sortez du ratelier l'emporte-pièce voulu et mettez-le à la place de celui qui est installé sur la perforeuse. % Bloquez fermement l'emporte-pièce en position. 6 Utilisation de la Perforeuse multiple GP-501 6-152 ineo 1052/1250 6.18 5 Rangez l'emporte-pièce remplacé dans le ratelier. % L'emporte-pièce remplacé est censé être rangé dans le ratelier. 6 Fermez la porte avant de la perforeuse multiple. ineo 1052/1250 6-153 6.19 Utilisation du Relieur automatique à anneaux GP-502 6 6.19 Utilisation du Relieur automatique à anneaux GP-502 La machine équipée du Relieur automatique à anneaux GP-502 perforent les feuilles imprimées pour confectionner un livret avec une pièce de reliure dans les trous. dPour info Veuillez vous reporter au [MANUEL D'UTILISATION] fourni avec le Relieur automatique à anneaux GP-502 pour obtenir des informations sur le fonctionnement du relieur à anneaux ou sur les écrans affichés sur le panneau de contrôle. 6.19.1 Confection de livrets reliés par des pièces de reliure dans les trous : relieur à anneaux Lorsque la fonction Insertion intercalaires n'est pas utilisée, le même papier sert pour toutes les pages d'un livret relié. Si vous combinez la fonction Insertion intercalaires, vous pouvez confectionner un livret relié en utilisant différents types de papier pour les feuilles du corps, les couvertures et les intercalaires. 0 Si vous utilisez le même papier pour toutes les pages pour confectionner un livret relié, vous n'avez qu'à sélectionner un seul magasin. Le réglage Intercalaire n'est pas nécessaire. 0 Lorsque vous reliez un jeu imprimé en mode recto sans la fonction Insertion intercalaires, sélectionnez la face imprimée ([Recto vers intér] ou [Recto vers ext.]) pour la première et la dernière feuille du livret. 0 Si vous utilisez la fonction Insertion intercalaires, sélectionnez un magasin pour les couvertures et un magasin pour les feuilles intercalaires. 0 Lorsque vous imprimez les couvertures à l'aide de la fonction Insertion intercalaires, spécifiez la face imprimée des couvertures dans le réglage Intercalaire. Dans ce cas, il est inutile de sélectionner la face imprimée de la première et de la dernière feuille du livret. Si vous utilisez du papier à onglet dans les mêmes conditions, la première feuille est placée avec le [Recto vers ext.] et la dernière feuille avec le [Recto vers intér.] 0 Sélectionnez le type de reliure ([Reliure gauche] ou [Reliure droite]) du livret. Cette sélection ne s'applique qu'à un original Portrait. Dans le cas d'un original Paysage, la reliure en haut est sélectionnée. 0 Les grammages acceptés sont compris entre 75 et 216 g/m2. 0 Le nombre maximum de feuilles à relier s'élève à 102 (feuilles de corps/intercalaires de 75 g/m2 et couvertures de 216 g/m2) et le nombre minimum à 7 (feuilles de corps/intercalaires de 75 à 120 g/m2 et couvertures de 163 à 216 g/m2). 0 Les formats papier acceptés sont A4 v et le format papier à onglet correspondant A4T v. La largeur de l'extension onglet ne doit pas dépasser 13 mm. Aucun autre format n'est accepté pour toutes les feuilles de corps, couvertures et intercalaires. L'impression recto-verso n'est pas disponible sur du papier à onglet. 0 Chargez le papier pour le corps du document dans un magasin principal ou dans un magasin de l'unité d'alimentation papier. Si vous utilisez la fonction insertion intercalaires, chargez le papier couvertures ou intercalaires dans un magasin principal, dans un magasin de l'unité d'alimentation papier ou dans un magasin MI différent de celui utilisé pour les feuilles du corps. Le papier chargé dans un magasin MI n'est pas imprimable. 0 Tirez une épreuve pour vérifier la pagination d'un livret relié. L'épreuve est délivrée sans être reliée dans le magasin auxiliaire d'un dispositif en aval à côté du relieur à anneaux. 1 Positionnez l'original. % Préparez l'original selon l'ordre couverture, corps, puis dos. 2 Chargez le papier dans le magasin. % Chargez le papier du corps dans un magasin de la machine (Mag 1 ou Mag 2) ou de l'Unité d'alimentation papier PF-703/PF-706 (magasins 3 à 8). Si vous n'utilisez pas la fonction Insertion intercalaires, le magasin couverture est inutile. % Lorsque vous utilisez la fonction Insertion intercalaires, chargez le papier des couvertures ou des intercalaires dans un magasin principal (Mag 1 ou Mag 2), dans l'Unité d'alimentation papier PF-703/PF-706 (magasins 3 à 8) ou dans le Module d'insertion grande capacité MI-PFU (MIPFU1 à MI-PFU3). Le papier chargé dans un magasin MI n'est pas imprimable. 6 Utilisation du Relieur automatique à anneaux GP-502 6-154 ineo 1052/1250 6.19 3 Modifiez le réglage papier du magasin utilisé s'il y a lieu. % Pour modifiez temporairement le réglage papier, effectuez le réglage dans l'écran Papier. % Si le grammage papier spécifié pour le magasin n'est pas adapté, l'opération de reliure est impossible. Pour connaître les grammages adaptés aux feuilles de corps, couvertures et intercalaires, voir page 5-3. 4 Appuyez sur l'onglet [COPIER] pour afficher l'écran Copie. 5 Appuyez sur [Finition]. L'écran Finition s'affiche. ineo 1052/1250 6-155 6.19 Utilisation du Relieur automatique à anneaux GP-502 6 6 Appuyez sur [Reliure Ann.]. L'écran Reliure à anneaux s'affiche. 7 Spécifiez la face imprimée de la première et dernière feuille. % Lorsque vous reliez un jeu imprimé en mode recto sans la fonction Insertion intercalaires, sélectionnez [Recto vers ext.] ou [Recto vers intér.] pour la première et la dernière feuille. 8 Sélectionnez le type de reliure du livret. % Sélectionnez [Reliure gauche] ou [Reliure droite]. 9 Appuyez sur [Insertion intercal]. % Si vous n'utilisez pas la fonction Insertions intercalaires, passez à l'étape 11. L'écran Insertion s'affiche. 6 Utilisation du Relieur automatique à anneaux GP-502 6-156 ineo 1052/1250 6.19 10 Procédez au réglage Intercalaire. % Effectuez ce réglage pour joindre des couvertures vierges ou imprimées avec du papier différent de celui du corps. % Appuyez sur [OK] pour revenir à l'écran Reliure à anneaux. 11 Appuyez sur [OK]. % Pour rétablir le réglage précédent, appuyez sur [Annuler]. % Pour désactiver la fonction tout en conservant le réglage actuel, appuyez sur [Désactiver]. L'écran Finition est rétabli. 12 Appuyez sur [OK] dans l'écran Finition pour retourner à l'écran Copie. Une icône du mode de finition spécifié s'affiche sous [Finition] dans l'écran Copie. Vérifiez que l'écran Prêt est affiché sur le panneau d'affichage du relieur à anneaux. Si l'écran ALERTE ou ERREUR est affiché, veuillez consulter le [MANUEL D'UTILISATION] fourni avec le Relieur automatique à anneaux GP-502. 13 Sélectionnez le cas échéant des conditions de copie supplémentaires. % Si vous effectuez des copies recto-verso, sélectionnez [1->2] ou [2->2]. % Utilisez [Mémoire] si l'original contient plus de 100 pages. ineo 1052/1250 6-157 6.19 Utilisation du Relieur automatique à anneaux GP-502 6 14 Entrez sur le clavier du panneau de contrôle le nombre de copies désiré. % Le magasin livret du relieur à anneaux a une capacité limitée. Pour plus de détails, voir page 5-5. % L'impression d'une épreuve est recommandée avant de relier des jeux multiples. % L'épreuve est délivrée sans être reliée dans le magasin auxiliaire d'un dispositif en aval à côté du relieur à anneaux. 15 Appuyez sur Départ sur le panneau de contrôle. N'ouvrez jamais le capot supérieur ou la porte avant du thermorelieur pendant qu'une opération est en cours sur la machine. De même, ne retirez jamais le magasin livret. Sinon la machine arrête immédiatement l'opération et un bourrage papier est possible. 6.19.2 Récupération des livrets du magasin Livret Lorsque le magasin livret est rempli, le message suivant apparaît dans la zone de messages de l'écran. [Magasin livret relieur à anneaux plein Sortir le livret] Le panneau d'affichage du relieur à anneaux affiche l'écran ALERT - Supplies/Trays et le message [Empty Booklet Drawer]. Pour récupérer les livrets du magasin livret, suivez la procédure ci-dessous. 1 Tirez le magasin livret. REMARQUE Ne tirez jamais le magasin livret pendant qu'une opération est en cours sur la machine. Sinon, cela pourrait causer un bourrage. 2 Récupérer les livrets du magasin Livret 6 Utilisation du Relieur automatique à anneaux GP-502 6-158 ineo 1052/1250 6.19 3 Ramenez le magasin livret dans sa position d'origine. REMARQUE Si le magasin livret n'est pas remis correctement, le message [Fermer la porte avant du magasin livret du relieur à anneaux] s'affiche dans la zone de messages de l'écran. Le panneau d'affichage du relieur à anneaux affiche l'écran ALERT - Supplies/Trays et le message [Close Booklet Drawer]. 4 Tournez la page dos pour la faire en passer au dos du livret. L'ordre de sortie d'un livret relié est dos, couverture et feuilles de corps comme sur l'illustration de droite. (1 : couverture, 2 : dos) % Pour que le livret relié soit dans le bon ordre, faites passer la page dos au dos du livret de manière à cacher le dos de la pièce de reliure entre la page dos et la dernière feuille du corps. (1 : couverture, 2 : dos) 7 Gestion des travaux ineo 1052/1250 7-3 7.1 Présentation de l'écran Liste des tâches 7 7 Gestion des travaux 7.1 Présentation de l'écran Liste des tâches L'écran Liste des tâches se ramifie de la manière suivante. Il permet également de vérifier ou de manipuler les tâches d'impression ou de numérisation en plus des tâches de copie. 1 Appuyez sur l'onglet [LISTE TÂCHES] à l'écran. L'écran Liste des tâches s'affiche. Écran Description Écran Liste des tâches actives/ en suspens S'affiche en premier lorsque vous appuyez sur l'onglet [LISTE TÂCHES]. Cet écran permet de vérifier ou d'utiliser les tâches actives ou en suspens de la liste. Écran Planificateur S'affiche lorsque vous appuyez sur [Planificateur] dans l'écran Liste des tâches. Cet écran affiche les tâches actives de l'écran Liste des tâches actives/ en suspens au moyen de barres. Il permet aussi de changer l'ordre des tâches en réserve depuis l'affichage par barres de tâche, ou de changer le magasin papier spécifié pour un travail en réserve. Écran Historique S'affiche lorsque vous appuyez sur [Historique] dans l'écran Liste des tâches. Cet écran répertorie l'historique. Il permet de vérifier les détails des tâches en sortie. Écran Hist. envoi S'affiche lorsque vous appuyez sur [Hist. envoi] dans l'écran Liste des tâches. Cet écran répertorie l'historique d'envoi. Écran Historique incomplet S'affiche lorsque vous appuyez sur [Incomplet] dans l'écran Liste des tâches. Cet écran fournit la liste des tâches incomplètes. Écran Spool Cet écran répertorie les tâches spoolées (Attendre RIP ou Réception). 7 Présentation de l'écran Liste des tâches 7-4 ineo 1052/1250 7.1 2 Utilisez les touches situées dans la partie supérieure de l'écran Liste des tâches pour naviguer d'un écran à l'autre. % Appuyez sur [Tâche] pour afficher l'écran Liste des tâches actives/en suspens. Pour plus de détails, voir page 7-5. % Appuyez sur [Planificateur] pour afficher l'écran Planificateur. Pour plus de détails, voir page 7-17. % Appuyez sur [Historique] pour afficher l'écran Historique. Pour plus de détails, voir page 7-31. % Appuyez sur [Hist. envoi] pour afficher l'écran Hist. envoi. Pour plus de détails, voir page 7-34. % Appuyez sur [Incomplet] pour afficher l'écran Historique incomplet. Pour plus de détails, voir page 7-37. % Appuyez sur [Spool] pour afficher l'écran Spool. Pour plus de détails, voir page 7-40. 3 Appuyez sur un onglet autre que [LISTE TÂCHES] dans la partie supérieure de l'écran pour quitter l'écran Liste des tâches. ineo 1052/1250 7-5 7.2 Écran Liste des tâches actives/en suspens 7 7.2 Écran Liste des tâches actives/en suspens Cette section décrit comment vérifier et manipuler les tâches sur l'écran Liste des tâches actives/en suspens. 7.2.1 Présentation de l'écran Liste des tâches actives/en suspens L'écran Liste des tâches actives/en suspens affiche l'état actuel des tâches d'impression, en réserve ou en suspens sous forme de liste. En sélectionnant une tâche dans la liste, vous pouvez en vérifier les détails, modifier son rang de sortie ou la supprimer de la liste. N° Nom Description 1 [Tâche] Utilisé pour afficher l'écran Liste des tâches actives/ en suspens. 2 Numéro de tâche Affiche les numéros assignés à toutes les tâches. 3 [Nom du fichier] Affiche le nom de fichier s'il y a lieu. 4 [Nom utilisateur] Affiche le nom d'utilisateur s'il est enregistré. 5 [État] Affiche l'état actuel des tâches En cours d'impression, Arrêt ou En réserve. 6 [Pages] Affiche le nombre de pages de l'original. 7 [Jeux] Affiche la totalisation d'impression. 8 [Rest. Feuil.] Affiche le nombre (4 chiffres max.) des pages restant à imprimer (= pages e jeux) 9 [Minute(s)] Affiche le temps nécessaire à l'achèvement de chaque tâche (minute). 10 [Mode] Affiche le type de finition comme Copie ou Imprimante. 11 Numéro tâche active/Nombre total Le nombre du haut indique le numéro de page actuellement affichée de la liste Suspendre et celui du bas le nombre total de pages. 12 [Détails] Utilisé pour confirmer les détails d'une tâche spécifiée. 13 [ImprPrior] Utilisé pour suspendre la tâche en cours d'impression en vue de sortir une tâche spécifiée avant la tâche actuelle. 7 Écran Liste des tâches actives/en suspens 7-6 ineo 1052/1250 7.2 14 [Vers haut] Utilisé pour sortir une tâche spécifiée immédiatement après la tâche en cours d'impression. 15 [Haute] Utilisé pour avancer d'un cran une tâche spécifiée dans l'ordre de sortie. 16 [Suspendre] Utilisé pour suspendre une tâche spécifiée. 17 [Supprimer] Utilisé pour supprimer une tâche spécifiée. 18 [Suppr. tout] Appuyez sur cette touche pour supprimer toutes les tâches de la liste. 19 Numéro tâche en suspens/Nombre total Le nombre du haut indique le numéro de page actuellement affichée de la liste Suspendre et celui du bas le nombre total de pages. 20 [ModifTicket] Utilisé pour confirmer les détails d'une tâche en suspens. 21 [Annuler] Utilisé pour lever l'état de suspension d'une tâche spécifiée. 22 [ToutLibérer] Utilisé pour lever l'état de suspension de toutes les tâches de la liste Suspens. 23 Touches de défilement Permet le défilement de la liste active ou de la liste Suspendre s'il y a plusieurs pages. 24 Liste Suspens Affiche la liste des tâches en suspens. Pour manipuler une tâche en suspens, appuyez sur la ligne de cette tâche pour la sélectionner. 25 Liste Active Affiche la liste des tâches actives. Pour manipuler une tâche active, appuyez sur la ligne de cette tâche pour la sélectionner. N° Nom Description ineo 1052/1250 7-7 7.2 Écran Liste des tâches actives/en suspens 7 7.2.2 Affichage des détails d'une tâche Contrôle des réglages d'une tâche active ou d'une tâche en suspens. 1 Appuyez sur l'onglet [LISTE TÂCHES] à l'écran. % Appuyez sur [Tâche] dans l'écran Liste des tâches si l'onglet [Tâche] n'est pas mis en évidence. 2 Sélectionnez une tâche à vérifier en détail. % Lorsque les listes comportent plusieurs pages, vous pouvez utiliser les flèches haut et bas correspondantes pour défiler dans la liste. % Appuyez sur la ligne de la tâche souhaitée. % Vous pouvez sélectionner une tâche dans la liste Active ou dans la liste Suspens. 3 Appuyez sur [Détails]. L'écran Contrôle s'affiche. 4 Passez en revue les réglages de la tâche dans l'écran Contrôle. % Si les touches [*] et [)] sont actives sous les listes [Finition] et [Applications], il y a plus de détails à découvrir. Appuyez sur les touches pour les révéler. 5 Appuyez sur [Fermer]. L'écran Liste des tâches réapparaît. 7 Écran Liste des tâches actives/en suspens 7-8 ineo 1052/1250 7.2 7.2.3 Utilisation de la fonction Impression prioritaire Utilisez cette fonction pour suspendre la tâche en cours d'impression pour sortir d'abord une tâche disponible active de la liste Active. Conditions d'activation de l'impression prioritaire : - La tâche prioritaire absolue figure sur la liste Active. - Une numérisation ou une tâche de sortie est en cours ou a été suspendue. Conditions de désactivation de l'impression prioritaire : - La machine est en mode Interruption. - La machine exécute une impression prioritaire. - La machine est en train de produite un jeu d'échantillons spécifié depuis l'écran Édition ticket. Conditions de suspension de la numérisation si la fonction Impression prioritaire est spécifiée : - Lorsque les données de la tâche sont imprimées pendant leur numérisation dans le chargeur Auto, la machine s'arrête lorsque la sortie est terminée à la fin de l'opération de numérisation. - Si la sortie des données en cours de numérisation dans le chargeur Auto n'a pas commencé, la machine suspend cette tâche sans basculer en mode sortie lorsque la numérisation est terminée. - Lorsque l'original numérisé est placé sur la vitre d'exposition, la machine suspend cette tâche sans basculer en mode sortie lorsque la numérisation est terminée. Conditions de suspension de l'impression si l'impression prioritaire est spécifié : - Si la tâche d'impression en cours utilise l'empileur grande capacité LS-505 ou le Thermorelieur PB-503, ou si des feuilles imprimées sont laissées dans la Piqueuse à cheval SD-506,l'Unité de pliage FD-503 ou l'Unité de finition FS-532 utilisée pour cette tâche, la machine suspend l'impression lorsque le jeu en cours d'impression est terminé. - La machine suspend immédiatement l'impression pour la tâche dans une condition autre que celles ci-dessus. Ordre d'impression entre la tâche de priorité absolue et la tâche suspendue ou une tâche réservée pendant le préchauffage : - Si la tâche suspendue n'utilise pas l'empileur grande capacité LS-505 ni le Thermorelieur PB-503, ou si aucune feuille imprimée n'est laissée dans la Piqueuse à cheval SD-506, l'Unité de pliage FD-503 ou l'Unité de finition FS-532 utilisé pour cette tâche, la machine lance la sortie de la tâche de priorité absolue au lieu de la tâche suspendue à la reprise de l'opération. - Une tâche réservée pendant le préchauffage se substitue à la tâche de priorité absolue. Fonctionnement de la machine après l'impression prioritaire : - La machine reprend automatiquement la sortie de la tâche suspendue après avoir réalisé la tâche de priorité absolue. 1 Appuyez sur l'onglet [LISTE TÂCHES] à l'écran. % Appuyez sur [Tâche] dans l'écran Liste des tâches si l'onglet [Tâche] n'est pas mis en évidence. 2 Sélectionnez la tâche de priorité absolue dans la liste Active. % Lorsque la liste comporte plusieurs pages, vous pouvez utiliser les flèches haut et bas correspondantes pour défiler dans la liste. % Appuyez sur la ligne de la tâche active souhaitée. Vous ne pouvez pas sélectionner plus d'une ligne. % Vous ne pouvez pas sélectionner que les tâches de la liste active. Si vous voulez sélectionner une tâche de priorité absolue dans la liste Suspens, déplacez d'abord cette tâche dans la liste Active, puis sélectionnez-la. ineo 1052/1250 7-9 7.2 Écran Liste des tâches actives/en suspens 7 3 Appuyez sur [ImprPrior]. Un dialogue de confirmation apparaît. 4 Appuyez sur [Oui]. % Lorsque vous avez spécifié l'opération ImprPrior, si vous appuyez sur la touche Arrêt du panneau de contrôle pendant que vous attendez que la sortie du jeu en cours soit terminée, la machine s'arrête. Une pression sur [Arrêt tâche] annule la tâche suspendue. Une pression sur [Reprendre] réactive la tâche suspendue. Une pression sur [Arrêt temporaire] suspend l'exécution et une pression sur Départ sur le panneau de contrôle relance l'exécution. % Lorsque vous avez spécifié l'opération ImprPrior, si vous appuyez sur [Supprimer] pendant que vous attendez la suspension de la tâche en cours, la tâche de priorité absolue est supprimée et la sortie de la tâche en cours reprend. % l'interruption ne fonctionne pas si la tâche de priorité absolue se trouve dans la liste active ou pendant qu'elle est en cours d'exécution. % La tâche de priorité absolue en cours peut aussi être suspendue et reprise le jour suivant au même titre que les tâches ordinaires. 7 Écran Liste des tâches actives/en suspens 7-10 ineo 1052/1250 7.2 7.2.4 Changement de l'ordre de sortie Suivez la procédure ci-dessous pour modifier l'ordre d'impression des tâches de la liste Active. REMARQUE Cette opération ne permet pas l'impression d'une tâche avant la tâche de sortie actuelle. Utilisez la fonction Impression prioritaire pour suspendre la tâche en cours d'impression pour sortir en priorité une tâche active de la liste Active. Voir page 7-8 pour plus de détails. 1 Appuyez sur l'onglet [LISTE TÂCHES] à l'écran. % Appuyez sur [Tâche] dans l'écran Liste des tâches si l'onglet [Tâche] n'est pas mis en évidence. 2 Sélectionnez la tâche dont vous souhaitez modifier le rang d'impression dans la liste Active. % Lorsque la liste comporte plusieurs pages, vous pouvez utiliser les flèches haut et bas correspondantes pour défiler dans la liste. % Sélectionnez la ligne de la tâche active souhaitée. Vous ne pouvez pas sélectionner plus d'une ligne. 3 Appuyez sur [Vers haut] ou [Haute]. % En appuyant sur [Vers haut], vous remontez la tâche sélectionnée à l'étape 2 derrière la tâche en sortie actuelle. % En appuyant sur [Haute], vous remontez la tâche sélectionnée à l'étape 2 d'un cran dans l'ordre d'impression. Chaque fois que vous appuyez sur [Haute], la tâche remonte d'un cran dans la liste. % Les tâches ne peuvent pas être rétrogradées. ineo 1052/1250 7-11 7.2 Écran Liste des tâches actives/en suspens 7 7.2.5 Déplacement d'une tâche de la liste Active dans la liste Suspens Suivez la procédure ci-dessous pour déplacer une tâche de la liste Active dans la liste Suspens afin de suspendre l'opération de sortie pour cette tâche. Vous pouvez modifier les réglages d'une tâche en suspens à l'aide de la fonction Édition ticket. dPour info Voir l'utilisation de la fonction Édition ticket page 7-14. Voir comment retourner une tâche en suspens dans la liste Active page 7-16. 1 Appuyez sur l'onglet [LISTE TÂCHES] à l'écran. % Appuyez sur [Tâche] dans l'écran Liste des tâches si l'onglet [Tâche] n'est pas mis en évidence. 2 Sélectionnez la tâche à suspendre dans la liste Active. % Lorsque la liste comporte plusieurs pages, vous pouvez utiliser les flèches haut et bas correspondantes pour défiler dans la liste. % Sélectionnez la ligne de la tâche désirée. Vous ne pouvez pas sélectionner plus d'une ligne. 3 Appuyez sur [Suspendre]. La tâche sélectionnée à l'étape 2 est déplacée dans la liste Suspens. % Répétez les étapes 2 et 3 pour suspendre d'autres tâches. 7 Écran Liste des tâches actives/en suspens 7-12 ineo 1052/1250 7.2 7.2.6 Suppression d'une tâche individuelle de la liste Active Suivez la procédure ci-dessous pour supprimer les tâches individuellement de la liste Active en vue d'annuler leur sortie. REMARQUE L'utilisation du bouton [Supprimer] ne supprime pas la tâche en cours d'impression. Attention lorsque vous supprimez des tâches qui ne sont pas enregistrées sur le disque dur, sur FTP ou SMB car ces tâches ne peuvent plus être restaurées après leur suppression. 1 Appuyez sur l'onglet [LISTE TÂCHES] à l'écran. % Appuyez sur [Tâche] dans l'écran Liste des tâches si l'onglet [Tâche] n'est pas mis en évidence. 2 Sélectionnez la tâche à supprimer de la liste Active. % Lorsque la liste comporte plusieurs pages, vous pouvez utiliser les flèches haut et bas correspondantes pour défiler dans la liste. % Sélectionnez la ligne de la tâche désirée. Vous ne pouvez pas sélectionner plus d'une ligne. 3 Appuyez sur [Supprimer]. Un dialogue de confirmation apparaît. 4 Appuyez sur [Arrêt tâche] pour supprimer la tâche. Appuyez sur [Reprendre] pour reprendre la tâche. REMARQUE La troisième tâche (0003) et les tâches suivantes de la liste active sont supprimées sans afficher comme plus haut le dialogue de confirmation dès que vous appuyez sur la touche [Supprimer]. ineo 1052/1250 7-13 7.2 Écran Liste des tâches actives/en suspens 7 7.2.7 Suppression de toutes les tâches de la liste Active Suivez la procédure ci-dessous pour supprimer toutes les tâches de la liste Active en vue d'annuler leur sortie. REMARQUE La pression du bouton [Suppr. tout] arrête la tâche en cours d'impression et la supprime ainsi que toutes les tâches restantes. Attention lorsque vous supprimez des tâches qui ne sont pas enregistrées sur le disque dur, sur FTP ou SMB car ces tâches ne peuvent plus être restaurées après leur suppression. 1 Appuyez sur l'onglet [LISTE TÂCHES] à l'écran. % Appuyez sur [Tâche] dans l'écran Liste des tâches si l'onglet [Tâche] n'est pas mis en évidence. 2 Appuyez sur [Suppr. tout]. Un dialogue de confirmation apparaît. 3 Appuyez sur [Oui]. Toutes les tâches sont effacées de la liste Active. 7 Écran Liste des tâches actives/en suspens 7-14 ineo 1052/1250 7.2 7.2.8 Utilisation de la fonction Édition ticket sur une tâche en suspens Suivez la procédure ci-dessous pour afficher l'écran Édition ticket pour une tâche déplacée dans la liste Suspens afin de vérifier les détails ou modifier les conditions de sortie de cette tâche. Cette fonction permet aussi d'afficher les images en sortie d'une tâche modifiée et d'imprimer une épreuve. Une fois modifiée, la tâche peut être spécifiée tâche en attente, épreuve ou tâche de sortie automatique. La fonction Édition ticket est utilisable dans les cas suivants : - Tâches en suspens transférées de la liste Active de l'écran Liste des tâches - Tâches enregistrées sur le disque dur et rappelées dans la liste Suspens de l'écran Liste des tâches 1 Appuyez sur l'onglet [LISTE TÂCHES] à l'écran. % Appuyez sur [Tâche] dans l'écran Liste des tâches si l'onglet [Tâche] n'est pas mis en évidence. 2 Sélectionnez une tâche dans la liste, et appuyez sur [ModifTicket]. % Voir comment déplacer une tâche de la liste Active dans la liste Suspens page 7-11. % Reportez-vous au [Guide de l'utilisateur - Numérisation réseau] pour savoir comment rappeler une tâche enregistrée sur le disque dur dans la liste Suspens. 3 Modifiez la tâche sur l'écran Édition ticket. % Vous pouvez modifier la sélection des magasins papier. % En appuyant sur [Type de finition], [Finition] ou [Applications], vous affichez l'écran de réglage respectif qui vous permet de modifier les réglages à votre convenance. % En appuyant sur une touche située sous [Nombre/Face], [Finition] ou [Applications] dotée d'un triangle dans le coin inférieur droit, vous affichez l'écran correspondant où vous pouvez modifier le réglage en question à votre convenance. 4 Appuyez sur [Impression] pour afficher les images en sortie de la tâche que vous êtes en train de modifier. ineo 1052/1250 7-15 7.2 Écran Liste des tâches actives/en suspens 7 5 Passez en revue les images en sortie de la tâche sur l'écran Impression. % Les données affichées sous [Information page] récapitulent les informations papier de la tâche sélectionnée. % Si la tâche est une impression recto-verso, appuyez sur [Recto] ou [Verso] pour contrôler l'image en sortie de chaque face. % Appuyez sur [Première], [Précédente], [Suivante] ou [Dernière] pour accéder à la page voulue. Le compteur encadré indique le numéro de feuille actuellement affichée et le nombre total de feuilles. % Appuyez sur [Spécifier feuil] pour afficher l'écran Spécifier feuilles. Entrez un numéro de page au clavier, puis appuyez sur [OK] pour afficher la page spécifiée. 6 Appuyez sur [Fermer]. L'écran Édition ticket réapparaît. 7 Écran Liste des tâches actives/en suspens 7-16 ineo 1052/1250 7.2 7 Appuyez sur [Impression test] si vous souhaitez une impression test. % Si une tâche est en cours sur la machine ou si le chargeur Auto est utilisé pour une numérisation, un dialogue apparaît pour annuler l'impression test. Appuyez sur [Annuler] et veuillez patienter jusqu'à ce que l'impression test soit à nouveau disponible. % L'écran Machine est affiché pendant l'impression test. Aucun autre écran n'est affiché. % L'impression test peut être indisponible en raison d'un réglage papier non conforme. Pour plus de détails, voir page 10-25. % Pour forcer la fin de l'impression test, appuyez sur Arrêt sur le panneau de contrôle. Les tâches d'impression test ne sont pas supprimées même en cas d'arrêt forcé. 7.2.9 Levée d'une tâche en suspens Suivez la procédure ci-dessous pour retourner une tâche de la liste en Suspens dans la liste Active pour impression. 1 Appuyez sur l'onglet [LISTE TÂCHES] à l'écran. % Appuyez sur [Tâche] dans l'écran Liste des tâches si l'onglet [Tâche] n'est pas mis en évidence. 2 Sélectionnez la tâche à retourner de la liste Suspens dans la liste Active. % Lorsque la liste comporte plusieurs pages, vous pouvez utiliser les flèches haut et bas correspondantes pour défiler dans la liste. % Sélectionnez la ligne de la tâche désirée. Vous ne pouvez pas sélectionner plus d'une ligne. 3 Appuyez sur [Annuler]. % Pour retourner toutes les tâches de la liste Suspendre dans la liste Active, appuyez sur [ToutLibérer]. ineo 1052/1250 7-17 7.3 Planificateur 7 7.3 Planificateur 7.3.1 Présentation de l'écran Planificateur L'écran Planificateur affiche les tâches actives y compris les tâches en réserve au moyen de barres. Il visualise la plage horaire, les magasins à utiliser, la quantité restante de papier et l'interruption de chaque tâche. Vous pouvez ainsi planifier à l'avance le chargement de papier ou le basculement de magasins. Il permet aussi de changer l'ordre des travaux en réserve depuis l'affichage par barres de tâche, ou de changer le magasin papier spécifié pour un travail en réserve. L'affichage par barres de tâche indique la relation entre les magasins papier d'une tâche à l'autre : - Estimation de l'heure de début et de fin de la tâche - Durée de la tâche (minute) L'écran Planificateur sera réactualisé lorsque la machine rencontre les conditions suivantes. - Lorsque un magasin est chargé, tiré, ou dont le niveau papier a été changé - Lorsque le réglage magasin a été modifié - Lorsqu'une opération sur une tâche a démarré ou redémarré - Lorsque un travail en réserve est ajouté, supprimé, ou dont l'ordre de sortie a été changé - Lorsque une tâche en sortie est terminée - Lorsque l'écran n'a pas été actualisé depuis plus de 30 secondes pendant la sortie 7 Planificateur 7-18 ineo 1052/1250 7.3 N° Nom Description 1 [Planificateur] Appuyez sur cette touche pour afficher l'écran Planificateur de l'écran Liste des tâches. 2 [Resél. tâche] Alterne le dialogue de configuration papier des tâches lorsque plusieurs barres de tâche s'affichent. 3 [Sélect. mag.] Alterne l'affichage du réglage papier d'un magasin à un autre, si la tâche sélectionnée requiert plusieurs magasins. 4 [ImprPrior] Utilisé pour sortir la tâche sélectionnée avant toutes les autres tâches. 5 [Res.Chang.Ordre] Changes l'ordre de sortie des travaux en réserve. 6 Dialogue d'opération Apparaît lorsqu'on appuie sur une barre dans l'affichage par barres de tâche. Le dialogue permet de spécifier chaque opération [Resél. tâche], [Sélect. mag.], [ImprPrior] et [Ordre Impr.] pour la tâche. 7 [Affichage par barres de tâche] Sépare par un fond grisé les lignes en zones pour travail en réserve, et différencie chaque travail par les couleurs bleu, jaune, ou orange bar selon les règles suivantes : Bleu : disponible pour impression, niveau papier OK Jaune : manque de papier probable pendant la sortie Rouge : forte probabilité d'arrêt par manque de papier pendant la sortie, indisponible pour impression en raison d'une spécification papier différente ou magasin vide Orange : papier actuellement chargé dans le magasin à remplacer et la tâche va s'interrompre en raison d'une incompatibilité format/type de papier. La tâche signalée par un triangle [,] inscrit en haut de la barre est une tâche en attente ou une épreuve. L'utilisation de la machine va être interrompue temporairement. Le triangle [,] ne disparaît pas tant que les procédures de sortie de cette tâche ne sont pas terminées et avant que la machine ne reprenne l'impression, même si une tâche obtient la priorité absolue dans l'ordre de sortie. En appuyant sur la barre vous affichez le dialogue de réglage papier pour la tâche en question. ineo 1052/1250 7-19 7.3 Planificateur 7 Comment accéder à l'écran Planificateur 0 La barre de la tâche en cours de sortie indique la quantité restante pour cette tâche, et se réduit à mesure de la progression du travail. 0 Une barre de tâche apparaîtra dans l'affichage par barres de tâche une fois que la machine a terminé la numérisation des originaux ou le transfert des images depuis le contrôleur image. 0 Si le temps nécessaire est inférieur à une minute, ce temps restera indiqué comme une minute. 1 Procédez aux réglages pour imprimer un travail. % Utilisez la fonction Réserve ou Rappeler pour imprimer plusieurs tâches. 2 Appuyez sur l'onglet [LISTE TÂCHES] pour afficher l'écran Liste des tâches. 8 [Supprim tâche] Appuyez sur cette touche pour supprimer la tâche sélectionnée. 9 [Suspendre] Appuyez sur cette touche pour suspendre la tâche sélectionnée. 10 Dialogue Configuration papier Apparaît lorsqu'on appuie sur une barre dans l'affichage par barres de tâche. Il présente le réglage et les informations papier détaillés de la tâche sélectionnée. 11 [Régl tout] Affiche toutes les données de réglage de la tâche sélectionnée. 12 [-] [+] Appuyez sur cette touche pour changer l'échelle de l'affichage par barres de tâche. 13 [Changer unité] Utilisé pour basculer entre plage horaire et horaires. 14 [Réglage magasin] Utilisé pour modifier le réglage magasin des tâches en réserve. 15 Incompatibilité papier Affiche la barre d'une tâche pour laquelle le format papier et les conditions papier à utiliser ne sont pas déterminés. 16 Éléments magasin papier Affiche le format papier, la quantité restante, ainsi que le grammage et le type de papier spécifiés pour le magasin dans Réglage magasin. 17 Horaires/Plage horaire Affiche le temps requis pour la sortie des tâches actives ou des tâches en réserve à l'aide de la plage horaire ou des horaires. N° Nom Description 7 Planificateur 7-20 ineo 1052/1250 7.3 3 Appuyez sur [Planificateur] sur l'écran Liste des tâches. L'écran Planificateur s'affiche. 7.3.2 Utilisation de [Changer unité], [-], et [+] Cette section décrit comment utiliser les touches [Changer unité], [-], et [+] de l'écran Planificateur. 1 Suivez la procédure indiquée en page 7-19 pour afficher l'écran Planificateur. 2 Appuyez sur [Changer unité] pour passer à une autre unité pour la ligne de planning. % L'unité devient [Horaires] or [PlageHorair(h)] chaque fois que vous appuyez sur [Changer unité]. ineo 1052/1250 7-21 7.3 Planificateur 7 3 Appuyez sur [-] ou [+] pour changer l'échelle d'affichage. L'échelle d'affichage peut être changée dans la plage suivante. 7.3.3 Utilisation du dialogue Papier via le dialogue d'opération Cette section décrit comment afficher le dialogue d'opération sur l'écran Planificateur pour utiliser le dialogue de réglage papier. 0 Il n'est pas possible de quitter l'écran Planificateur tant que le dialogue d'opération et le dialogue de configuration papier sont affichés. Pour quitter l'écran Planificateur, appuyez sur [x] dans le coin supérieur droit du dialogue pour le faire disparaître de l'écran. 1 Suivez la procédure indiquée en page 7-19 pour afficher l'écran Planificateur. 2 Sélectionnez la barre de la tâche voulue dans l'affichage par barres de tâche. Le dialogue d'opération et le dialogue de réglage papier de la tâche indiquée par la barre sélectionnée s'affiche. 3 Avec les touches fléchées droite et gauche dans [Resél. tâche] affichez le dialogue de configuration papier du travail voulu. % Une pression sur [->] change le dialogue de configuration papier et le remplace par celui du travail suivant. Lorsqu'arrive le dernier travail, [->] apparaît en grisé pour indiquer l'inactivité. % Une pression sur [<-] change le dialogue de configuration papier et le remplace par celui du travail précédent. Lorsqu'arrive le premier travail, [<-] apparaît en grisé pour indiquer l'inactivité. Unité de planning Plage disponible avec [-]/[+] Horaires 30 minutes après à 24 heures après PlageHorair(h) 10 minutes à 24 heures 7 Planificateur 7-22 ineo 1052/1250 7.3 4 Si la tâche sélectionnée utilise plus d'un magasin, utilisez les touches fléchées verticales dans [Sélect. mag.] pour remplacer le dialogue de réglage papier de la tâche d'un magasin par celui d'un autre. % Une pression sur [->] change le dialogue de configuration papier et le remplace par celui du magasin suivant à utiliser. Lorsqu'arrive le dernier magasin, [->] apparaît en grisé pour indiquer l'inactivité. % Une pression sur [<-] change le dialogue de configuration papier et le remplace par celui du magasin précédent à utiliser. Lorsqu'arrive le premier magasin, [<-] apparaît en grisé pour indiquer l'inactivité. 7.3.4 Changer l'ordre de sortie des travaux en réserve Cette section décrit comment changer l'ordre de sortie des travaux en réserve. 0 Il n'est pas possible de quitter l'écran Planificateur tant que le dialogue d'opération et le dialogue de configuration papier sont affichés. Pour quitter l'écran Planificateur, appuyez sur [x] dans le coin supérieur droit du dialogue pour le faire disparaître de l'écran. 1 Suivez la procédure indiquée en page 7-19 pour afficher l'écran Planificateur. 2 Sélectionnez la barre d'une tâche dans l'affichage par barres de tâche pour changer l'ordre de sortie. % Si la tâche dont l'ordre de sortie a été changé nécessite plus d'un magasin, sélectionnez n'importe quelle option. Le dialogue d'opération et le dialogue de réglage papier de la tâche indiquée par la barre sélectionnée s'affiche. ineo 1052/1250 7-23 7.3 Planificateur 7 3 Avec les touches des deux côtés de [Res. Chang.Ordre], changez l'ordre de sortie de la tâche sélectionnée. % Appuyez sur [<-] pour avancer la tâche d'une position dans l'ordre de sortie, ou sur [<<] pour l'imprimer juste après le travail d'impression en cours. % Appuyez sur [->] pour reculer la tâche d'une position dans l'ordre de sortie, ou sur [>>] pour l'imprimer en dernier. % Les touches permettant de changer l'ordre de sortie sont indisponibles lorsqu'elles s'affichent en grisé. 4 Pour suspendre la tâche d'impression en cours afin de faire passer la tâche sélectionnée avant la tâche en cours, appuyez sur [ImprPrior]. % Une pression sur [ImprPrior] affiche le dialogue de confirmation. Appuyez sur [Oui] pour suspendre la tâche d'impression en cours et lancer l'impression de la tâche sélectionnée. dPour info Le changement de l'ordre de sortie des tâches en réserve ainsi que l'utilisation de la fonction d'impression prioritaire sont également disponibles sur l'écran Liste des tâches actives/en suspens. Pour plus de détails, voir page 7-5. 7 Planificateur 7-24 ineo 1052/1250 7.3 7.3.5 Modification du réglage magasin L'écran Réglage magasin est accessible sur l'écran Planificateur et permet de modifier les réglages des magasins. Dans le cas d'une tâche active ou de la tâche en cours d'impression, certaines conditions doivent être remplies pour pouvoir modifier les réglages magasin. Ces conditions sont les suivantes : - Le magasin auquel s'applique les changements ne doit pas être en cours d'utilisation par des tâches actives. - L'utilisation du magasin auquel doivent s'appliquer les changements n'est pas prévue pour des tâches dont la sortie est prévue avant la tâche sélectionnée. - La machine ne peut pas lancer l'impression parce que le format papier spécifié pour la tâche en réserve ne correspond pas au papier chargé dans le magasin. L'impression commandée par le contrôleur d'imprimante est suspendue quand le format du papier chargé dans le magasin sélectionné ne correspond pas à celui spécifié pour la tâche d'impression. Vous pouvez modifier le réglage magasin à ce stade. 1 Suivez la procédure indiquée en page 7-19 pour afficher l'écran Planificateur. 2 Sélectionnez la barre de la tâche pour laquelle modifier le réglage magasin. Le dialogue d'opération et de réglage papier s'affiche. % Vous pouvez afficher l'écran Réglage magasin sans sélectionner la barre. Dans ce cas, sélectionnez le magasin à modifier sur l'écran Réglage magasin. 3 Sélectionnez le magasin à modifier dans le réglage magasin du dialogue d'opération, puis appuyez sur [Réglage magasin] dans l'écran Planificateur. L'écran Réglage magasin apparaît pour le magasin sélectionné. ineo 1052/1250 7-25 7.3 Planificateur 7 4 Appuyez sur [Modifier] or [Rappeler]. 5 Modifiez le réglage à votre convenance, puis appuyez sur [OK]. L'écran Réglage magasin réapparaît. 6 Appuyez sur [Fermer] dans l'écran Réglage magasin. L'écran Planificateur réapparaît. % En fonction des réglages modifiés, la tâche sélectionnée à l'étape 2 peut mentionner [Aucun papier adéquat] auquel cas la machine cesse de fonctionner. Si tel est le cas, suivez la procédure décrite dans la sous-section ci-après pour relancer la tâche de sortie. 7 Planificateur 7-26 ineo 1052/1250 7.3 7.3.6 Sortie d'une tâche indiquant [Aucun papier adéquat] Job La barre de la zone [Aucun papier adéquat] est affichée quand le format papier ou les conditions papier spécifiés pour une tâche de copie ne correspondent aux spécifications d'aucun magasin. Puis, lorsque la tâche [Aucun papier adéquat] est en tête de liste de sortie, la machine cesse de fonctionner. Suivez la procédure ci-dessous pour reprendre le travail de sortie. 1 Suivez la procédure indiquée en page 7-19 pour afficher l'écran Planificateur. 2 Sélectionnez la barre de la tâche [Aucun papier adéquat] pour laquelle la machine a cessé de fonctionner. Le dialogue du réglage papier de la tâche [Aucun papier adéquat] s'affiche. 3 Confirmez le format papier et les conditions papier. Pour modifier le réglage magasin conformément au papier chargé dans le magasin, passez à l'étape 4. Pour charger le papier qui correspond aux réglages sans modifier le réglage magasin, passez à l'étape 8. % Si vous modifiez le réglage magasin et remplacer le produit chargé dans le magasin, modifiez les réglages en premier. Le remplacement premier du papier ne permet pas de modifier le réglage magasin. 4 Appuyez sur [Réglage magasin] dans l'écran Planificateur. L'écran Réglage magasin du [Magasin 1] s'affiche. ineo 1052/1250 7-27 7.3 Planificateur 7 5 Sélectionnez la touche du magasin, puis appuyez sur [Modifier] ou sur [Rappeler]. 6 Modifiez le réglage à votre convenance, puis appuyez sur [OK]. L'écran Réglage magasin réapparaît. 7 Appuyez sur [Fermer] dans l'écran Réglage magasin. L'écran Planificateur réapparaît. 8 Appuyez sur l'onglet [MACHINE] pour afficher l'écran Machine. 9 Chargez du papier au format indiqué dans le message, dans le magasin désiré. 7 Planificateur 7-28 ineo 1052/1250 7.3 Quand le magasin est rechargé en papier, le message est remplacé par [Appuyer sur DEPART pour reprendre]. 10 Appuyez sur Départ sur le panneau de contrôle. La machine lance l'impression de la tâche [Aucun papier adéquat]. 7.3.7 Sortie d'une tâche avec un format papier non conforme Si le format du papier chargé dans le magasin spécifié pour une tâche d'impression n'est pas celui spécifié pour cette tâche, une barre orange apparaît dans la colonne du magasin approprié dans l'affichage de la barre de tâche. Lorsque cette tâche arrive en tête de liste d'impression, la machine cesse de fonctionner. ineo 1052/1250 7-29 7.3 Planificateur 7 Voir la procédure de reprise de la tâche de sortie page 10-25. 7.3.8 Transformer une tâche en réserve en tâche en suspens Vous pouvez transformer une tâche en réserve en tâche en suspens sur l'écran Liste des tâches actives/en suspens ou sur l'écran Planificateur. Transformez une tâche en réserve en tâche en suspens conformément à la procédure suivante. 1 Suivez la procédure indiquée en page 7-19 pour afficher l'écran Planificateur. 2 Sélectionnez la barre de la tâche à suspendre. 3 Appuyez sur [Suspendre] dans la partie inférieure droite de l'écran. La tâche sélectionnée devient une tâche en suspens et disparaît de l'écran Planificateur. % En appuyant sur [Tâche] à l'écran, vous affichez l'écran Liste des tâches actives/en suspens pour contrôler la mention de la tâche dans la liste Suspens. 7 Planificateur 7-30 ineo 1052/1250 7.3 7.3.9 Suppression d'une tâche en réserve Vous pouvez supprimer une tâche en réserve dans l'écran Liste des tâches actives/en suspens ou dans l'écran Planificateur. Supprimez une tâche en réserve en appliquant la procédure suivante. 1 Suivez la procédure indiquée en page 7-19 pour afficher l'écran Planificateur. 2 Sélectionnez la barre de la tâche à supprimer. 3 Appuyez sur [Supprim tâche] dans la partie inférieure droite de l'écran. Un dialogue de confirmation apparaît. 4 Appuyez sur [Oui]. La tâche sélectionnée est supprimée et disparaît de l'écran Planificateur. ineo 1052/1250 7-31 7.4 Contrôle de l'historique/historique d'envoi/historique incomplet 7 7.4 Contrôle de l'historique/historique d'envoi/historique incomplet 7.4.1 Affichage de l'historique des sorties L'écran Historique de l'écran Liste des tâches répertorie l'historique de sortie. Vous pouvez contrôler les détails des tâches en accédant à l'écran Contrôle. N° Nom Description 1 [Historique] Appuyez sur cette touche pour afficher l'écran Historique. 2 [Nom du fichier] Affiche le nom de fichier s'il y a lieu. 3 [Nom utilisateur] Affiche le nom d'utilisateur s'il est enregistré. 4 [Résultat] Affiche le résultat de sortie tel que Terminé ou Annulé. 5 [Pages] Affiche le nombre de pages de l'original. 6 [Jeux] Affiche la totalisation d'impression. 7 [Heure] Affiche le temps de sortie au format 24 heures. 8 [Mode] Affiche le type de finition comme Copie ou Imprimante. 9 Afficher numéro/nombre total Le nombre du haut indique le numéro de la page actuellement affichée de la liste Historique et celui du bas le nombre total de pages. 10 [Détails] Utilisé pour confirmer les détails d'une tâche spécifiée. L'écran Contrôle s'affiche. 11 Touches de défilement Utilisées pour accéder à la page souhaitée de la liste Historique si la liste contient plusieurs pages. Contrôle de l'historique/7 historique d'envoi/historique incomplet 7-32 ineo 1052/1250 7.4 Suivez la procédure ci-dessous pour vérifier les détails des travaux. 1 Appuyez sur l'onglet [LISTE TÂCHES] à l'écran, et appuyez sur [Historique]. L'écran Historique s'affiche. 2 Vérifiez dans la liste à l'écran l'état des tâches effectuées. % Utilisez les touches de défilement si 17 tâches de sortie ou plus sont répertoriées. 3 Sélectionnez une tâche dont vous souhaitez vérifier les détails, puis appuyez sur [Détails]. L'écran Contrôle s'affiche. ineo 1052/1250 7-33 7.4 Contrôle de l'historique/historique d'envoi/historique incomplet 7 4 Passez en revue les réglages de l'écran Contrôle. % Si les touches [*] et [)] sont actives sous les listes [Finition] et [Applications], il y a plus de détails à découvrir. Appuyez sur les touches pour les révéler. 5 Une fois le contrôle terminé, appuyez sur [Fermer]. L'écran Historique réapparaît. Contrôle de l'historique/7 historique d'envoi/historique incomplet 7-34 ineo 1052/1250 7.4 7.4.2 Affichage de l'Hist. envoi L'écran Hist. envoi de l'écran Liste des tâches répertorie l'historique d'envoi. Vous pouvez contrôler les détails des tâches en accédant à l'écran Contrôle. N° Nom Description 1 [Hist. envoi] Appuyez sur cette touche pour afficher l'écran Hist. envoi. 2 [Nom du fichier] Affiche le nom de fichier s'il y a lieu. 3 [Nom utilisateur] Affiche le nom d'utilisateur s'il est enregistré. 4 [Adresse] Affiche l'adresse de destination. 5 [Résultat] Affiche le résultat de transmission tel que Terminé ou Annulé. 6 [Heure] Affiche le temps de transmission au format 24 heures. 7 [Mode] Affiche le mode de transmission comme E-mail ou FTP. 8 Afficher numéro/nombre total Le nombre du haut indique le numéro de la page actuellement affichée de la liste Historique envoi et celui du bas le nombre total de pages. 9 [Détails] Utilisé pour confirmer les détails d'une tâche spécifiée. L'écran Contrôle s'affiche. 10 Touches de défilement Utilisées pour accéder à la page souhaitée de la liste Historique envoi si la liste contient plusieurs pages. ineo 1052/1250 7-35 7.4 Contrôle de l'historique/historique d'envoi/historique incomplet 7 Suivez la procédure ci-dessous pour vérifier les détails des travaux. 1 Appuyez sur l'onglet [LISTE TÂCHES] à l'écran, et appuyez sur [Hist. envoi]. L'écran Hist. envoi s'affiche. 2 Vérifiez dans la liste à l'écran l'état des tâches transmises. % Utilisez les touches de défilement si 17 tâches transmises ou plus sont répertoriées. 3 Sélectionnez une tâche dont vous souhaitez vérifier les détails, puis appuyez sur [Détails]. L'écran Contrôle s'affiche. Contrôle de l'historique/7 historique d'envoi/historique incomplet 7-36 ineo 1052/1250 7.4 4 Passez en revue les réglages de l'écran Contrôle. 5 Une fois le contrôle terminé, appuyez sur [Fermer]. L'écran Hist. envoi réapparaît. ineo 1052/1250 7-37 7.4 Contrôle de l'historique/historique d'envoi/historique incomplet 7 7.4.3 Contrôle de l'historique incomplet L'écran Historique incomplet de l'écran Liste des tâches répertorie l'historique incomplet. Vous pouvez contrôler les détails des tâches en accédant à l'écran Contrôle. N° Nom Description 1 [Incomplet] Appuyez sur cette touche pour afficher l'écran Historique incomplet. 2 [Nom du fichier] Affiche le nom de fichier s'il y a lieu. 3 [Nom utilisateur] Affiche le nom d'utilisateur s'il est enregistré. 4 [Cause incom.] Affiche la cause d'incomplétude de la tâche comme Annulé ou Mémoire pleine. 5 Afficher numéro/nombre total Le nombre du haut indique le numéro de la page actuellement affichée de la liste Historique incomplet et celui du bas le nombre total de pages. 6 [Détails] Utilisé pour confirmer les détails d'une tâche spécifiée. L'écran Contrôle s'affiche. 7 Touches de défilement Utilisées pour accéder à la page souhaitée de la liste Historique incomplet si la liste contient plusieurs pages. Contrôle de l'historique/7 historique d'envoi/historique incomplet 7-38 ineo 1052/1250 7.4 Suivez la procédure ci-dessous pour vérifier les détails des travaux. 1 Appuyez sur l'onglet [LISTE TÂCHES] à l'écran, et appuyez sur [Incomplet]. L'écran Historique Incomplet s'affiche. 2 Vérifiez dans la liste à l'écran l'état des tâches incomplètes. % Utilisez les touches de défilement si 17 tâches incomplètes ou plus sont répertoriées. 3 Sélectionnez une tâche dont vous souhaitez vérifier les détails, puis appuyez sur [Détails]. L'écran Contrôle s'affiche. ineo 1052/1250 7-39 7.4 Contrôle de l'historique/historique d'envoi/historique incomplet 7 4 Passez en revue les réglages de l'écran Contrôle. 5 Une fois le contrôle terminé, appuyez sur [Fermer]. L'écran Historique Incomplet réapparaît. 7 Opération sur des tâches spoolées 7-40 ineo 1052/1250 7.5 7.5 Opération sur des tâches spoolées 7.5.1 Utilisation des tâches spoolées L'écran Spool de l'écran Liste des tâches répertorie les tâches spoolées. N° Nom Description 1 [Spool] Appuyez sur cette touche pour afficher l'écran Spool. 2 [Nom du fichier] Affiche le nom de fichier s'il y a lieu. 3 [Nom utilisateur] Affiche le nom d'utilisateur s'il est enregistré. 4 [État] Affiche l'état des tâches spoolées comme Réception ou Attendre RIP. 5 Afficher numéro/nombre total Le nombre du haut indique le numéro de page actuellement affichée de la liste Spool et celui du bas le nombre total de pages. 6 [Vers haut] Utilisé pour déplacer une tâche spécifiée en tête de liste. 7 [Haute] Utilisé pour avancer d'un cran une tâche spécifiée dans l'ordre de priorité. 8 [Supprimer] Utilisé pour supprimer une tâche spécifiée. 9 Touches de défilement Utilisées pour accéder à la page souhaitée de la liste Spool si la liste contient plusieurs pages. ineo 1052/1250 7-41 7.5 Opération sur des tâches spoolées 7 Suivez la procédure ci-dessous pour manipuler les tâches spoolées. 1 Appuyez sur l'onglet [LISTE TÂCHES] à l'écran, et appuyez sur [Spool]. 2 Vérifiez dans la liste à l'écran l'état des tâches spoolées. Utilisez les touches de défilement si 17 tâches spoolées ou plus sont répertoriées. 3 Sélectionnez la tâche spoolée désirée, puis effectuez l'opération en utilisant les touches correspondantes. % Appuyez sur [Vers haut] pour remonter la tâche sélectionnée en tête de liste. Appuyez sur [Haute] pour déplacer la tâche sélectionnée d'un cran dans l'ordre de priorité. % Appuyez sur [Supprimer] pour supprimer la tâche sélectionnée. 7 Opération sur des tâches spoolées 7-42 ineo 1052/1250 7.5 8 Consommables et mise au rebut ineo 1052/1250 8-3 8 8 Consommables et mise au rebut Cette section décrit les indicateurs qui s'affichent lorsqu'un processus spécifique est nécessaire, et fournit les instructions correspondantes. Catégorie Objet Détails Reference Processus concernant les consommables Machine Rechargement toner Voir l'écran d'aide et page 8-7 pour plus de détails. Machine (Magasins 1 et 2) Chargement du papier Voir l'écran d'aide et page 8-12 pour plus de détails. Chargement de papier à onglet Pour plus de détails, voir page 8-32. Unité d'alimentation papier PF-703 (Magasins 3 à 8) Chargement du papier Voir l'écran d'aide et page 8-14 pour plus de détails. Chargement papier petit format Pour plus de détails, voir page 8-22. Chargement de papier à onglet Pour plus de détails, voir page 8-33. Unité d'alimentation papier PF-706 (Magasins 3 à 8) Chargement du papier Voir l'écran d'aide et page 8-20 pour plus de détails. Chargement papier petit format Pour plus de détails, voir page 8-22. Chargement de papier à onglet Pour plus de détails, voir page 8-33. Module d'insertion grande capacité MIPFU Chargement du papier Pour plus de détails, voir page 8-26. Unité d'insertion de l'Unité de pliage FD-503 Chargement du papier Pour plus de détails, voir page 8-28. Unité d'insertion PI-502 Chargement des couvertures Pour plus de détails, voir page 8-28. Bac couvertures du Thermorelieur PB-503 Chargement du papier Voir l'écran d'aide et page 8-29 pour plus de détails. Unité de finition FS-532 Rechargement agrafes pour piqûre à plat Voir l'écran d'aide et page 8-35 pour plus de détails. Rechargement d'agrafes pour la piqûre à cheval (si Piqueuse à cheval SD-510 installée) Voir l'écran d'aide et page 8-36 pour plus de détails. Piqueuse à cheval SD-506 Rechargement agrafes pour piqûre à cheval Voir l'écran d'aide et page 8-38 pour plus de détails. Thermorelieur PB-503 Ajout de pastilles de colle Voir l'écran d'aide et page 8-40 pour plus de détails. Unité relais RU-509 Chargement du réservoir d'eau de l'humidificateur Voir l'écran d'aide et page 8-42 pour plus de détails. Relieur automatique à anneaux GP502 Rechargement de pièces de reliure Voir l'écran d'aide et page 8-44 pour plus de détails. Processus concernant le rebut Machine Remplacement de la boîte à déchets toner Voir l'écran d'aide et page 8-46 pour plus de détails. 8 Comment afficher un message d'aide 8-4 ineo 1052/1250 8.1 8.1 Comment afficher un message d'aide 1 Appuyez sur l'onglet [MACHINE] pour afficher l'écran Machine. 2 Appuyez sur [ ] dans le coin supérieur droit de l'écran, ou appuyez sur Aide sur le panneau de contrôle. Un message d'aide relatif à l'écran Machine s'affiche en haut de l'écran. 3 Appuyez sur [Consomm./Déchets] dans le coin inférieur droit de la zone du message d'aide. Unité de finition FS-532 Élimination des débris d'agrafes Voir l'écran d'aide et page 8-48 pour plus de détails. Élimination des déchets de perforation (si Unité de perforation PK-522 installée) Voir l'écran d'aide et page 8-50 pour plus de détails. Unité de pliage FD-503 Élimination des déchets de perforation Voir l'écran d'aide et page 8-51 pour plus de détails. Perforeuse multiple GP-501 Élimination des déchets de perforation Voir l'écran d'aide et page 8-53 pour plus de détails. Relieur automatique à anneaux GP502 Élimination des déchets de perforation Voir l'écran d'aide et page 8-54 pour plus de détails. Piqueuse à cheval SD-506 Élimination des chutes de massicotage Voir l'écran d'aide et page 8-56 pour plus de détails. Thermorelieur PB-503 Élimination des chutes de massicotage Voir l'écran d'aide et page 8-57 pour plus de détails. Piqueuse à cheval SD-506 Remplacement de la butée de lame Pour plus de détails, voir page 8-59. Catégorie Objet Détails Reference ineo 1052/1250 8-5 8.1 Comment afficher un message d'aide 8 8 Comment afficher un message d'aide 8-6 ineo 1052/1250 8.1 4 Appuyez sur l'onglet du processus désiré. Si [)] est affiché dans le coin supérieur droit de l'écran, appuyez dessus pour afficher tous les onglets. 5 Effectuez le processus, en appuyant sur [+] ou [,] pour suivre les étapes. 6 Quand le processus est terminé, appuyez sur [ ] dans le coin supérieur droit de l'écran, ou appuyez sur Aide sur le panneau de contrôle. Le message d'aide disparaît de l'écran. ineo 1052/1250 8-7 8.2 Rechargement toner 8 8.2 Rechargement toner Cette machine est équipée d'une trémie à toner de réserve pour permettre à la machine de continuer à imprimer pendant un certain temps même si le toner est épuisé dans la cartouche de toner. Lorsque le toner est épuisé dans la cartouche et que la réserve diminue, le message [Ajouter du toner] s'affiche dans la zone de message et l'icône d'ajout toner s'affiche dans la zone d'indicateur d'état de machine dans le coin inférieur droit de l'écran. Lorsque le toner de réserve s'épuise, le message devient [Réserve toner vide/Changer la cartouche]. Dans la zone Éléments Apport/Corbeille de l'écran Machine, les messages [La cartouche toner peut être remplacée], [Cartouche toner presque vide : prévoir le remplacement] et [Réserve toner vide/. Changer la cartouche] s'affichent successivement en fonction de la quantité de toner restant dans la réserve. 0 Avant de changer une cartouche de toner, prenez soin de vérifier le numéro de type de toner type indiqué sur l'avant du couvercle de la cartouche et utilisez une cartouche de toner qui porte le même numéro. L'utilisation de cartouches incorrectes sont susceptibles de créer un incident sur la machine. 0 Rebouchez l'ancienne cartouche en utilisant le bouchon de la neuve, puis replacez la vieille cartouche dans l'emballage. Pour le traitement qui s'ensuit, veuillez contacter le SAV. 7 AVERTISSEMENT NE PAS JETER au feu de cartouche de toner (même vide) ! Dans le feu, le toner peut s'enflammer et provoquer une situation dangereuse. - Pour la manipulation d'une cartouche de toner vide, veuillez contacter le SAV. 8 Rechargement toner 8-8 ineo 1052/1250 8.2 7 ATTENTION Précautions de stockage et de manipulation des cartouches de toner Si vous inhalez trop de toner ou si du toner pénètre dans vos yeux, votre santé risque d'en être affectée. - Ne laissez pas les cartouches de toner à portée des enfants. - Attention à ne pas renverser de toner à l'intérieur de la machine ou sur vos vêtements ou vos mains. - Si vous salissez vos mains avec du toner, lavez-les immédiatement à l'eau savonneuse. - Si du toner pénètre dans vos yeux, rincez-les immédiatement à grande eau et consultez un médecin. 1 Affichez le message d'aide sur l'écran Machine, et appuyez sur [Consomm./Déchets]. 2 Appuyez sur l'onglet [Ajout toner] en haut de la zone de message d'aide. 3 Effectuez le processus, en appuyant sur [+] ou [,] pour suivre les étapes. dPour info Voir comment afficher le message d'aide page 8-4. ineo 1052/1250 8-9 8.3 Chargement du papier 8 8.3 Chargement du papier L'écran Machine et l'écran Copie affichent la quantité de papier restant dans chaque magasin. Les 5 icônes suivantes indiquent le niveau de papier. Lorsqu'un magasin vient à manquer de papier, l'icône " " apparaît à l'écran. Si vous sélectionnez le magasin alors que est affiché sur l'écran Copie, se met à clignoter. REMARQUE Le réglage pour chaque magasin peut être effectué dans l'écran Machine en appuyant sur [Réglage magasin]. Si vous voulez utiliser un papier différent de tous les papiers chargés dans les magasins, appuyez sur [Papier] dans l'écran Copie pour modifier temporairement le réglage. Dans les deux cas, veillez à charger le papier spécifié pour le magasin. Sinon, cela pourrait causer un bourrage. dPour info Un message d'aide affiché sur l'écran Machine fournit les instructions de chargement du papier. Pour plus de détails, voir page 8-4. 8 Chargement du papier 8-10 ineo 1052/1250 8.3 8.3.1 Vérifier le papier à charger Cette machine est conçue pour traiter à grande vitesse d'importantes quantités de papier. Par conséquent, si un problème d'introduction se produit, c'est une quantité considérable de papier qui risque d'être perdue. Il est donc recommandé d'observer les précautions suivantes pour la gestion usuelle du papier à utiliser avant de le charger. 1 Placer le papier en rame sur une surface plane afin d'éviter qu'il ne gondole. REMARQUE Veillez à ne pas plier ou endommager le papier lors de la vérification. 2 Vérifiez que la pile de papier ne présente pas de plis ou dommages, et enlever comme sur l'illustration ci-après toute feuille qui serait détériorée. Froissé Corné ineo 1052/1250 8-11 8.3 Chargement du papier 8 Collé Plié près du bord 3 Vérifiez également l'autre face de la rame de papier. % Il est recommandé de vérifier la rame en la tenant comme sur l'illustration. 4 Vérifiez que les feuilles ne sont pas collées par l'électricité statique. % Ventilez une partie de la ramette de papier sur 1 cm environ et vérifiez si cela produit un crépitement. % Si c'est le cas, cela signifie que la rame de papier présente une charge électrostatique. Il n'est donc pas conseillé d'utiliser ce papier. 8 Chargement du papier 8-12 ineo 1052/1250 8.3 5 Ventilez complètement la rame de papier avant de la placer dans un magasin. Procédez sur le bord avant et sur le bord arrière de la rame dans le sens d'introduction, en tenant le papier de la manière illustrée ci-dessous. % Veillez à placer la rame de papier sur une surface plane avant de la ventiler. Si l'on tente de ventiler le papier en tenant la rame vers le haut, le risque de faire tomber le papier n'est pas négligeable et rendrait ce dernier inutilisable. % Ne tentez pas de ventiler une trop grande quantité de papier à la fois. 8.3.2 Charger du papier dans les magasins de la machine (Magasins 1 et 2) 0 Pour utiliser du papier qui n'est chargé dans aucun magasin, modifiez le réglage de ce magasin dans [Réglage magasin] sur l'écran Machine ou modifiez temporairement le réglage dans [Papier] sur l'écran Copie. 1 Tirez le magasin à recharger. REMARQUE Il n'est pas possible de tirer les magasins lorsque la machine n'est pas alimentée. Veillez à placer l'interrupteur secondaire sur ON (Marche). On ne peut tirer qu'un seul magasin à la fois. 2 Soulever les rouleaux départ papier. ineo 1052/1250 8-13 8.3 Chargement du papier 8 3 Placez le papier avec la face imprimée vers le bas. REMARQUE Ne chargez pas de papier au-delà du repère figurant sur le guide latéral du magasin. Chargez soigneusement le papier en l'installant sous le levier de contrôle papier au niveau de la buse d'air. 4 Alignez les guides latéraux et le guide arrière contre le bord du papier. % Alignez la rame de papier vers le côté rouleau d'entraînement du magasin. En poussant le levier de déverrouillage du guide latéral avant, déplacez les guides latéraux pour les aligner contre le papier. REMARQUE Veillez à ce que les guides latéraux et le guide arrière soient correctement alignés contre le papier. Sinon, la machine ne peut pas détecter le format de papier correct, et un incident machine peut en résulter. 5 Repoussez le magasin jusqu'au verrouillage. L'indicateur de niveau papier du magasin change de à sur l'écran Machine et l'écran Copie. REMARQUE Ne pas faire cogner le magasin contre la machine. Sinon, un choc pourrait causer un problème inattendu. 8 Chargement du papier 8-14 ineo 1052/1250 8.3 8.3.3 Chargement du papier dans l'Unité d'alimentation papier PF-703 (Magasin 3 à 8) 0 Pour utiliser du papier qui n'est chargé dans aucun magasin, modifiez le réglage de ce magasin dans [Réglage magasin] sur l'écran Machine ou modifiez temporairement le réglage dans [Papier] sur l'écran Copie. 0 En cas de problème d'introduction après chargement du papier selon la procédure ci-dessous, effectuez la procédure consignée page 8-17. 1 Tirez le magasin à recharger. % Les grammages acceptés dans le magasin 3, 5, 6 ou 8 sont compris entre 40 g/m2 et 300 g/m2. Le magasin 4 et le magasin 7 peuvent recevoir du papier de 40 g/m2 à 350 g/m2. REMARQUE Il n'est pas possible de tirer les magasins lorsque la machine n'est pas alimentée. Veillez à placer l'interrupteur secondaire sur ON (Marche). REMARQUE On ne peut tirer qu'un seul magasin à la fois. Pour charger un format de papier différent, passez à l'étape 2. Pour charger le même format que celui chargé précédemment, passez à l'étape 3. 2 Écartez à fond les guides latéraux et le guide arrière. % Tournez les deux boutons de fixation des guides latéraux en sens antihoraire pour les desserrer. % Écartez à fond les guides latéraux et le guide arrière tout en appuyant sur le levier de déverrouillage des guides latéraux et du guide arrière. REMARQUE Quand vous déplacez les guides latéraux, veillez à saisir le levier de déverrouillage du guide latéral avant et la poignée du guide arrière. Si l'on ne déplace que le guide latéral avant, les guides latéraux risquent de ne pas être fixés en position. ineo 1052/1250 8-15 8.3 Chargement du papier 8 3 Fixez les guides latéraux en position. % Placez une centaine de feuilles avec la face imprimée vers le haut. Tout en poussant le levier de déblocage du guide avant, alignez les deux guides latéraux contre le papier et positionnez-les en fonction du repère de format figurant sur la plaque de maintien du guide. 4 Fixez les guides latéraux. % Tournez les deux boutons de fixation des guides latéraux en sens horaire pour bloquer les guides. 5 Placez le papier avec la face de présentation vers le haut. % Alignez la rame de papier vers le côté gauche du magasin. REMARQUE Ne chargez pas de papier au-delà du repère figurant sur le guide latéral du magasin. Chargez soigneusement le papier en l'installant sous le levier de contrôle papier au niveau de la buse d'air. REMARQUE Les deux guides latéraux sont équipés de réglettes pour petits formats. N'oubliez pas de ne les ouvrir que pour charger du papier d'une largeur de moins de 150 mm. Pour plus de détails sur l'utilisation des guides petits formats, voir page 8-22. a : Indicateur Format papier b : Levier de déverrouillage 8 Chargement du papier 8-16 ineo 1052/1250 8.3 6 Alignez le guide arrière contre le papier. % Poussez le levier de déverrouillage du guide arrière afin d'amener celui-ci contre le bord du papier. REMARQUE Assurez-vous que le guide arrière est bien aligné contre le papier. Sinon, la machine ne peut pas détecter le format de papier correct, et un incident machine peut en résulter. 7 Repoussez le magasin jusqu'au verrouillage. L'indicateur de niveau papier du magasin change de à sur l'écran Machine et l'écran Copie. REMARQUE Ne pas faire cogner le magasin contre la machine. Sinon, un choc pourrait causer un problème inattendu. ineo 1052/1250 8-17 8.3 Chargement du papier 8 8.3.4 Réglage de l'espace entre les guides latéraux de l'Unité d'alimentation papier PF-703 (Magasins 3 à 8) Si les guides latéraux avant et arrière ne sont pas fixés à la verticale, en d'autres termes, s'il y a un espace entre le bord haut et le bord droit des guides latéraux, cela peut entraîner un problème d'introduction. Dans ce cas, suivez la procédure de réglage ci-après pour positionner correctement le bord haut et le bord bas des guides latéraux. 1 Retirez le magasin qui demande un réglage fin. % Il n'est pas possible de tirer les magasins lorsque la machine n'est pas alimentée. Veillez à placer l'interrupteur secondaire sur ON (Marche). 2 Écartez à fond les guides latéraux et le guide arrière. % Tournez les deux boutons de fixation des guides latéraux en sens antihoraire pour les desserrer. % Écartez à fond les guides latéraux et le guide arrière tout en appuyant sur le levier de déverrouillage des guides latéraux et du guide arrière. REMARQUE Quand vous déplacez les guides latéraux, veillez à saisir le levier de déverrouillage du guide latéral avant et la poignée du guide arrière. Si l'on ne déplace que le guide latéral avant, les guides latéraux risquent de ne pas être fixés en position. 3 Chargez du papier au format concerné par le réglage. % Chargez une centaine de feuille de papier. 4 Fixez la position des bords arrière des guides latéraux. % En poussant le levier de déverrouillage du guide latéral avant, déplacez les guides latéraux pour les aligner contre le papier. REMARQUE Évitez de laisser un espace insuffisant ou excessif entre les guides latéraux afin que le papier soit positionné bien droit. a : levier de déverrouillage 8 Chargement du papier 8-18 ineo 1052/1250 8.3 5 Tournez le bouton de fixation de la plaque du fond dans le sens antihoraire pour débloquer celle-ci, faites-la glisser vers l'avant, puis tourner le bouton dans le sens horaire pour bloquer la plaque. 6 Repoussez le magasin en position d'origine et sortez-le encore une fois après que la plaque du fond du magasin est complètement remontée. Lorsque le magasin est replacé en position d'origine, le bruit du moteur remontant la plaque du fond est perceptible. Une fois que cette opération automatisée est terminée, retirez une fois encore le magasin pour vérifier que la plaque du fond est bien remontée en position haute. REMARQUE Veillez à ne pas tirer le magasin tant que le bruit du moteur est perceptible. Sinon, l'opération suivante peut être compromise car la plaque du fond n'est pas montée jusqu'en haut. 7 Fixez la position des bords supérieurs des guides latéraux. % Déplacez les bords supérieurs des guides latéraux pour les aligner contre le papier, puis tournez les deux boutons de fixation des guides en sens horaire pour bloquer les guides en position. REMARQUE Évitez de laisser un espace insuffisant ou excessif entre les guides latéraux afin que le papier soit positionné bien droit. 8 Abaissez la plaque du fond du magasin. % Tournez le bouton de fixation de la plaque du fond dans le sens antihoraire pour débloquer celle-ci, faites-la glisser vers l'arrière, puis tourner le bouton dans le sens horaire pour bloquer la plaque. La plaque inférieure du magasin s'abaisse automatiquement. ineo 1052/1250 8-19 8.3 Chargement du papier 8 9 Chargez le papier dans le magasin. % Alignez la rame de papier vers le côté gauche du magasin. REMARQUE Ne chargez pas de papier au-delà du repère figurant sur le guide latéral du magasin. Chargez soigneusement le papier en l'installant sous le levier de contrôle papier au niveau de la buse d'air. 10 Alignez le guide arrière contre le papier. % Tout en appuyant sur le levier de déverrouillage, alignez le guide arrière contre le bord du papier. REMARQUE Assurez-vous que le guide arrière est bien aligné contre le papier. S'il reste un espace entre le guide arrière et le papier, la machine ne peut pas détecter le format de papier correct, et un incident machine peut en résulter. 11 Repoussez le magasin jusqu'au verrouillage. L'indicateur de niveau papier du magasin change de à sur l'écran Machine et l'écran Copie. 8 Chargement du papier 8-20 ineo 1052/1250 8.3 8.3.5 Chargement du papier dans l'Unité d'alimentation papier PF-706 (magasins 3 à 8) 0 Pour utiliser du papier qui n'est chargé dans aucun magasin, modifiez le réglage de ce magasin dans [Réglage magasin] sur l'écran Machine ou modifiez temporairement le réglage dans [Papier] sur l'écran Copie. 1 Tirez le magasin à recharger. % Les grammages acceptés dans les magasins 3, 5, 6 et 8 sont compris entre 40 g/m2 et 300 g/m2. Le magasin 4 et le magasin 7 peuvent recevoir du papier de 40 g/m2 à 350 g/m2. REMARQUE Il n'est pas possible de tirer les magasins lorsque la machine n'est pas alimentée. Veillez à placer l'interrupteur secondaire sur ON (Marche). REMARQUE On ne peut tirer qu'un seul magasin à la fois. 2 Soulever les rouleaux départ papier. Pour charger un format de papier différent, passez à l'étape 3. Pour charger le même format que celui chargé précédemment, passez à l'étape 6. 3 Écartez à fond les guides latéraux et le guide arrière. % Tournez les quatre molettes des guides latéraux dans le sens antihoraire pour les desserrer. % Écartez à fond les guides latéraux et le guide arrière tout en appuyant sur le levier de déverrouillage des guides latéraux et du guide arrière. REMARQUE Quand vous déplacez les guides latéraux, veillez à saisir le levier de déverrouillage du guide latéral avant et la poignée du guide arrière. Si l'on ne déplace que le guide latéral avant, les guides latéraux risquent de ne pas être fixés en position. 4 Fixez les guides latéraux en position. % Placez une centaine de feuilles avec la face imprimée vers le haut. Tout en poussant le levier de déblocage du guide avant, alignez les deux guides latéraux contre le papier et positionnez-les en fonction du repère de format figurant sur la plaque de maintien du guide. ineo 1052/1250 8-21 8.3 Chargement du papier 8 5 Tournez les boutons de fixation du guide (4 pièces) des guides latéraux en sens horaire pour les bloquer. 6 Placez le papier avec la face de présentation vers le haut. % Alignez la rame de papier vers le côté rouleau d'entraînement du magasin. REMARQUE Ne chargez pas de papier au-delà du repère figurant sur le guide latéral du magasin. Chargez soigneusement le papier en l'installant sous le levier de contrôle papier au niveau de la buse d'air. REMARQUE Les deux guides latéraux sont équipés de réglettes pour petits formats. N'oubliez pas de ne les ouvrir que pour charger du papier d'une largeur de moins de 182 mm. Pour plus de détails sur l'utilisation des guides petits formats, voir page 8-22. a : Indicateur Format papier b : Levier de déverrouillage 8 Chargement du papier 8-22 ineo 1052/1250 8.3 7 Alignez le guide arrière contre le papier. % Poussez le levier de déverrouillage du guide arrière afin d'amener celui-ci contre le bord du papier. REMARQUE Assurez-vous que le guide arrière est bien aligné contre le papier. Sinon, la machine ne peut pas détecter le format de papier correct, et un incident machine peut en résulter. 8 Repoussez le magasin jusqu'au verrouillage. L'indicateur de niveau papier du magasin change de à sur l'écran Machine et l'écran Copie. REMARQUE Ne pas faire cogner le magasin contre la machine. Sinon, un choc pourrait causer un problème inattendu. 8.3.6 Chargement du papier petit format dans l'Unité d'alimentation papier PF-703/PF-706 (Magasins 3 à 8) La largeur minimale des guides latéraux de l'Unité d'alimentation papier PF-703 est de 150 mm et celle de l'Unité PF-706 est de 182 mm. Ouvrez les guides petit format pour charger du papier petit format de 95 mm de large au minimum. 0 Lors du chargement de papier d'un format supérieur à la largeur minimum des guides latéraux, n'ouvrez pas les guides petits formats. 0 N'oubliez pas d'ouvrir les guides petits formats par paire si vous utilisez les guides petits formats. Ne les utiliser que par paire pour charger le papier. 1 Tirez le magasin à recharger en papier petit format. REMARQUE Il n'est pas possible de tirer les magasins lorsque la machine n'est pas alimentée. Veillez à placer l'interrupteur secondaire sur ON (Marche). REMARQUE On ne peut tirer qu'un seul magasin à la fois. PF-703 PF-706 ineo 1052/1250 8-23 8.3 Chargement du papier 8 % Pour l'Unité d'alimentation papier PF-706, soulevez les rouleaux départ papier. 2 Ouvrez les guides petits formats équipant chacun des guides latéraux avant et arrière. 3 Pour l'Unité d'alimentation papier PF-703, faites glisser les deux leviers de fixation des panneaux de contrôle papier vers la gauche pour bloquer les panneaux. REMARQUE Veillez à bien faire glisser les leviers de fixation des panneaux de contrôle papier vers la gauche pour les deux guides latéraux. Uniquement PF-706 PF-703 PF-706 Uniquement PF-703 8 Chargement du papier 8-24 ineo 1052/1250 8.3 4 Placez le papier avec la face de présentation vers le haut. % Alignez la rame de papier vers le côté gauche du magasin. REMARQUE Ne chargez pas au delà du repère de limite figurant sur les guides petits formats. 5 Déplacez les guides latéraux pour aligner les réglettes pour petits formats contre le papier. % Tournez les molettes des guides latéraux dans le sens antihoraire pour les desserrer. PF-703 PF-706 PF-703 PF-706 ineo 1052/1250 8-25 8.3 Chargement du papier 8 % En poussant le levier de déverrouillage du guide latéral avant, déplacez les guides petit format pour les aligner contre le papier. % Tournez les molettes des guides latéraux dans le sens horaire pour fixer les guides. 6 Alignez le guide arrière contre le papier. Pour l'Unité d'alimentation papier PF-703, appuyez sur le levier de déverrouillage du guide arrière pour le déplacer contre le bord du papier. REMARQUE Assurez-vous que le guide arrière est bien aligné contre le papier. Sinon, la machine ne peut pas détecter le format de papier correct, et un incident machine peut en résulter. 7 Repoussez le magasin jusqu'au verrouillage. L'indicateur de niveau papier du magasin change de à sur l'écran Machine et l'écran Copie. REMARQUE Ne pas faire cogner le magasin contre la machine. Sinon, cela peut modifier la position du papier de petit format qui est chargé et vous risquez de ne pas obtenir le résultat d'impression voulu. En outre, un choc pourrait causer un problème inattendu. PF-703 PF-706 PF-703 PF-706 8 Chargement du papier 8-26 ineo 1052/1250 8.3 8.3.7 Chargement du papier dans le Module d'insertion grande capacité MI-PFU 0 Lorsque vous chargez du papier dans MI-PFU, effectuez le réglage papier à utiliser dans [Réglage magasin] sur l'écran Machine. Le réglage ne peut pas être effectué dans [Papier] sur l'écran Copie. 0 En cas de problème d'introduction après chargement du papier selon la procédure ci-dessous, effectuez la procédure consignée page 8-17. 1 Tirez le magasin à recharger. % Les grammages acceptés dans MI-PFU1 et MI-PFU3 sont compris entre 40 g/m2 et 300 g/m2. MI-PFU2 peut recevoir un papier de grammage compris entre 40 g/m2 et 350 g/m2. REMARQUE Il n'est pas possible de tirer les magasins lorsque la machine n'est pas alimentée. Veillez à placer l'interrupteur secondaire sur ON (Marche). REMARQUE On ne peut tirer qu'un seul magasin à la fois. Pour charger un papier de format différent, passez à l'étape 2. Pour charger le même format que celui chargé précédemment, passez à l'étape 3. 2 Écartez à fond les guides latéraux et le guide arrière. % Tournez les deux boutons de fixation des guides latéraux en sens antihoraire pour les desserrer. % Écartez à fond les guides latéraux et le guide arrière tout en appuyant sur le levier de déverrouillage des guides latéraux et du guide arrière. REMARQUE Quand vous déplacez les guides latéraux, veillez à saisir le levier de déverrouillage du guide latéral avant et la poignée du guide arrière. Si l'on ne déplace que le guide latéral avant, les guides latéraux risquent de ne pas être fixés en position. 3 Fixez les guides latéraux en position. % Placez une centaine de feuilles avec la face imprimée vers le haut. Tout en poussant le levier de déblocage du guide avant, alignez les deux guides latéraux contre le papier et positionnez-les en fonction du repère de format figurant sur la plaque de maintien du guide. a : Indicateur Format papier b : Levier de déverrouillage ineo 1052/1250 8-27 8.3 Chargement du papier 8 4 Fixez les guides latéraux. % Tournez les deux boutons de fixation des guides latéraux en sens horaire pour bloquer les guides. 5 Placez le papier avec la face de présentation vers le haut. % Alignez la rame de papier vers le côté gauche du magasin. REMARQUE Ne chargez pas de papier au-delà du repère figurant sur le guide latéral du magasin. Chargez soigneusement le papier en l'installant sous le levier de contrôle papier au niveau de la buse d'air. REMARQUE Les deux guides latéraux sont équipés de réglettes pour petits formats. N'oubliez pas de ne les ouvrir que pour charger du papier d'une largeur de moins de 150 mm. Pour plus de détails sur l'utilisation des guides petits formats, voir page 8-22. 6 Alignez le guide arrière contre le papier. % Poussez le levier de déverrouillage du guide arrière afin d'amener celui-ci contre le bord du papier. REMARQUE Assurez-vous que le guide arrière est bien aligné contre le papier. Sinon, la machine ne peut pas détecter le format de papier correct, et un incident machine peut en résulter. 7 Repoussez le magasin jusqu'au verrouillage. L'indicateur de niveau papier du magasin change de à sur l'écran Machine et l'écran Copie. REMARQUE Ne pas faire cogner le magasin contre la machine. Sinon, un choc pourrait causer un problème inattendu. 8 Chargement du papier 8-28 ineo 1052/1250 8.3 8.3.8 Chargement du papier dans l'Unité d'insertion de l'Unité de pliage FD-503 0 Lorsque vous chargez du papier dans le magasin supérieur ou inférieur du module d'insertion, effectuez le réglage papier à utiliser dans [Réglage magasin] sur l'écran Machine. Le réglage ne peut pas être effectué dans [Papier] sur l'écran Copie. 1 Chargez le papier dans le bac supérieur/inférieur du bac d'insertion. 2 Alignez les guides latéraux contre le papier. REMARQUE Ne chargez pas plus de 500 feuilles (80 g/m2) dans le magasin supérieur et dans le magasin inférieur. En outre, ne chargez pas de papier au-delà du repère porté sur les guides latéraux. 8.3.9 Chargement du papier dans l'Unité d'insertion PI-502 Si vous souhaitez modifier les formats papier à détecter dans le magasin supérieur ou le magasin inférieur de l'unité d'insertion, effectuez le réglage des formats dans [Réglage magasin] sur l'écran Machine. 1 Chargez le papier dans le magasin supérieur/magasin inférieur de l'unité d'insertion. 2 Alignez les guides latéraux contre le papier. REMARQUE Ne chargez pas plus de 200 feuilles (80 g/m2) ou 30 mm en hauteur dans le magasin supérieur et dans le magasin inférieur. ineo 1052/1250 8-29 8.4 Chargement du papier à couverture pour thermorelieur 8 8.4 Chargement du papier à couverture pour thermorelieur Le papier de couverture à utiliser pour la thermoreliure peut être chargé dans les magasins suivants. - Bac couvertures du Thermorelieur PB-503 - Bacs principaux (Magasins 1 et 2) - Unité d'alimentation papier PF-703 (Magasins 3 à 8) - Unité d'alimentation papier PF-706 (Magasins 3 à 8) - Module d'insertion grande capacité MI-PFU - Unité d'insertion de l'Unité de pliage FD-503 Cette section décrit comment charger le papier à couverture dans le Bac couvertures du Thermorelieur PB-503. 8.4.1 Chargement du Papier couverture dans le Bac couvertures du Thermorelieur PB-503 0 La configuration papier du magasin couverture est accessible dans l'écran Machine sous [Réglage magasin] ou dans l'écran Copie sous [Finition]. Le réglage ne peut pas être effectué dans [Papier] sur l'écran Copie. 1 Retirez le Bac couvertures. 2 Soulever les rouleaux départ papier. 3 Chargez le papier à couverture, face de présentation orientée vers le haut. % Alignez-le du côté du rouleau d'entraînement du magasin. REMARQUE Ne chargez pas de papier au-delà du repère figurant sur le guide latéral du magasin. Chargez soigneusement le papier couverture en l'installant sous le levier de contrôle papier au niveau de la buse d'air. 8 Chargement du papier à couverture pour thermorelieur 8-30 ineo 1052/1250 8.4 % Si vous réalisez des livres avec reliure à gauche, chargez le papier à couverture face de présentation orientée vers le haut, et tête de page vers l'arrière du magasin. Les couvertures chargées seront massicotées sur le côté gauche lors de la réalisation des livres. % Si vous réalisez des livres avec reliure à droite, chargez le papier à couverture face de présentation orientée vers le haut, et tête de page vers l'avant du magasin. Les couvertures chargées seront massicotées sur le côté gauche lors de la réalisation des livres. 4 Alignez les guides latéraux et le guide arrière contre le bord du papier couverture. % En poussant le levier de déverrouillage du guide latéral avant, déplacez les guides latéraux pour les aligner contre le papier à couverture. % Puis, déplacez le guide arrière contre le bord du papier à couverture. REMARQUE Assurez-vous que les guides latéraux et le guide arrière sont bien alignés contre le papier à couverture. Sinon, cela pourrait causer un bourrage. 5 Quand le papier est correctement chargé, rabattre le rouleau d'entraînement papier. 6 Repoussez le Bac couvertures jusqu'au verrouillage en position d'origine. ineo 1052/1250 8-31 8.4 Chargement du papier à couverture pour thermorelieur 8 REMARQUE Ne pas faire cogner le magasin contre la machine. Sinon, un choc pourrait causer un problème inattendu. 8 Chargement de papier à onglet 8-32 ineo 1052/1250 8.5 8.5 Chargement de papier à onglet Le papier à onglets est disponible pour la copie quand il est chargé dans les magasins suivants : - Bacs principaux (Magasins 1 et 2) - Unité d'alimentation papier PF-703/PF-706 (Mag 3 à 8) dPour info Lorsque du papier à onglets dans un magasin, effectuez le réglage format du magasin dans [Réglage magasin] sur l'écran Machine ou dans [Papier] sur l'écran Copie afin de spécifier le format de papier à onglets à utiliser. Pour plus de détails, voir page 8-34. La configuration de la machine peut prévoir le rejet automatique du surplus d'un jeu de feuilles à onglets chargé dans un magasin. Pour plus de détails, voir page 8-34. 8.5.1 Chargement du papier à onglet dans les magasins de la machine (Magasins 1 et 2) Exemple : 3 feuilles de papier à onglet chargées et positionnées pour obtenir un jeu fini Exemple : 9 feuilles de papier à onglet chargées et positionnées pour produire 3 jeux finis 1 Tirez le bac principal de la machine. % Retirer le magasin spécifié pour une format de papier à onglets. 2 Soulever les rouleaux départ papier. 3 Chargez le papier à onglet dans le magasin. % Chargez le papier à onglet en vous référant à l'illustration ci-dessus. REMARQUE Ne chargez pas de papier au-delà du repère figurant sur le guide latéral du magasin. Chargez soigneusement le papier en l'installant sous le levier de contrôle papier au niveau de la buse d'air. Sens de chargement Ordre d'empilage Jeu terminé Sens de chargement Ordre d'empilage Jeu terminé Arrière Recto 1er onglet 2ème 3ème onglet Face imprimée / copiée onglet 1er onglet 2ème onglet 3ème onglet 1 jeu terminé Arrière Recto 1er onglet 2ème 3ème onglet Face copiée imprimée/ onglet 1er onglet 2ème onglet 3ème onglet 3 jeux finis ineo 1052/1250 8-33 8.5 Chargement de papier à onglet 8 4 Déplacez les guides latéraux contre les feuilles de papier à onglet. % Alignez le papier à onglet contre le côté rouleau départ papier du magasin. % Appuyez sur le levier de déverrouillage du guide latéral avant pour déplacer les guides latéraux et déplacez en même temps le guide arrière contre le bord du papier à onglet. REMARQUE Veillez à ce que les guides latéraux et le guide arrière soient correctement alignés contre le papier. Sinon, la machine ne peut pas détecter le format de papier correct, et un incident machine peut en résulter. 5 Repoussez le magasin jusqu'au verrouillage. 8.5.2 Chargement de papier à onglet dans l'Unité d'alimentation papier PF-703/PF-706 Exemple : 9 feuilles de papier à onglet chargées et positionnées pour produire 3 jeux finis 1 Retirez un magasin de l'unité d'alimentation papier, puis soulevez les rouleaux départ papier. % Retirer le magasin spécifié pour une format de papier à onglets. % Le rouleau d'entraînement n'est pas monté sur l'Unité d'entraînement papier PF-703. 2 Desserrez les molettes des guides latéraux. 3 Chargez le papier à onglet dans le magasin. % Chargez le papier à onglet en vous référant à l'illustration ci-dessus. REMARQUE Ne chargez pas de papier au-delà du repère figurant sur le guide latéral du magasin. Chargez soigneusement le papier en l'installant sous le levier de contrôle papier au niveau de la buse d'air. Sens de chargement Ordre d'empilage Jeu terminé PF-703 PF-706 1er onglet 2ème 3ème onglet Face imprimée/ copiée onglet 1er onglet 2ème onglet 3ème onglet 3 jeux finis 8 Chargement de papier à onglet 8-34 ineo 1052/1250 8.5 4 Alignez les guides latéraux contre le bord du papier à onglet, puis tournez les deux boutons de fixation des guides latéraux pour les serrer. REMARQUE Veillez à ce que les guides latéraux et le guide arrière soient correctement alignés contre le papier à onglet. S'il y a un espace d'1 mm ou plus, ou si le papier à onglet est placé en biais dans le magasin, un problème d'introduction peut en résulter. 5 Alignez le guide arrière contre le papier à onglet. 6 Repoussez le magasin jusqu'au verrouillage. Sortie papier onglet inutile La configuration de la machine peut prévoir le rejet automatique du surplus d'un jeu de feuilles à onglets chargé dans un magasin. Par exemple, lorsque le magasin contient un jeu de 5 feuilles (à 5 onglets) et que 3 feuilles uniquement sont utilisées, la machine fonctionne comme sur l'illustration ci-dessous. Le menu Utilitaire propose un réglage qui permet de spécifier s'il faut utiliser ou non la fonction Sortie papier onglet inutilisé. Si la machine avec la fonction Sortie papier onglet inutile [activée] activée interrompt la tâche en cours suite à un problème de type bourrage papier, un message vous demande de vérifier si le bon papier à onglets est chargé dans le magasin pour la tâche suivante à commencer par la 1re feuille. Original Papier Sortie Impression sur les 3 premières feuilles. Rejet automatique des 4e et 5e feuilles. ineo 1052/1250 8-35 8.6 Rechargement agrafes 8 8.6 Rechargement agrafes Les options suivantes comportent une agrafeuse. - Unité de finition FS-532 - Piqueuse à cheval SD-510 (intégrée dans l'Unité de finition FS-532 en option) - Piqueuse à cheval SD-506 Cette section décrit les indications à l'écran qui vous informent qu'il est temps de procéder au rechargement d'agrafes, ainsi que les instructions permettant d'y parvenir. 8.6.1 Rechargement d'agrafes dans l'Unité de finition FS-532 pour la piqûre à plat Quand l'agrafeuse de l'empileur de l'Unité de finition FS-532 est vide, le message suivant apparaît dans la zone des messages de l'écran. [Sortir empileur de l'unité d'agrafage puis, placer des agrafes ds l'agrafeuse] De même, le message [Remettre agrafes] apparaît et le voyant s'allume en rouge dans la zone Éléments Apport/Corbeille de l'écran Machine. Suivez la procédure ci-dessous pour ajouter des agrafes dans l'agrafeuse de l'empileur. 1 Affichez le message d'aide sur l'écran Machine, et appuyez sur [Consomm./Déchets]. 2 Appuyez sur l'onglet [Ajt agrafes] en haut de la zone de message d'aide. 8 Rechargement agrafes 8-36 ineo 1052/1250 8.6 3 Effectuez le processus, en appuyant sur [+] ou [,] pour suivre les étapes. dPour info Voir comment afficher le message d'aide page 8-4. 8.6.2 Rechargement d'agrafes dans l'Unité de finition FS-532 pour la piqûre à cheval Lorsque l'unité de finition est doté de la Piqueuse à cheval SD-510 et que l'agrafeuse de la piqueuse est vide, le message suivant apparaît dans la zone de message de l'écran. [Sortir module à cheval de l'agrafeuse et mettre agrafes dans agrafeuse] De même, le message [Remettre agrafes] apparaît et le voyant s'allume en rouge dans la zone Éléments Apport/Corbeille de l'écran Machine. Suivez la procédure ci-dessous pour ajouter des agrafes dans l'agrafeuse de l'unité de piqûre. ineo 1052/1250 8-37 8.6 Rechargement agrafes 8 1 Affichez le message d'aide sur l'écran Machine, et appuyez sur [Consomm./Déchets]. 2 Appuyez sur l'onglet [Ajt agrafes] en haut de la zone de message d'aide. 3 Effectuez le processus, en appuyant sur [+] ou [,] pour suivre les étapes. dPour info Voir comment afficher le message d'aide page 8-4. 8 Rechargement agrafes 8-38 ineo 1052/1250 8.6 8.6.3 Rechargement d'agrafes dans la Piqueuse à cheval SD-506 Quand la cartouche d'agrafes de la Piqueuse à cheval SD-506 est vide, le message suivant apparaît dans la zone des messages de l'écran. [Remettre des agrafes dans l'agrafeuse de gauche de la Piqueuse à cheval] [Remettre des agrafes dans l'agrafeuse de droite de la Piqueuse à cheval] De même, le message [Remettre agrafes] apparaît et le voyant s'allume en rouge dans la zone Éléments Apport/Corbeille de l'écran Machine. Suivez la procédure ci-dessous pour ajouter des agrafes dans l'agrafeuse spécifiée. REMARQUE Tenez la cartouche d'agrafes par les deux côtés et tirez-la vers l'avant. La machine est équipée de deux cartouches d'agrafes. Assurez-vous de bien sortir la vide. Vérifiez que le dessus de la cartouche d'agrafes soit orienté vers le haut. S'il est orienté vers le bas,il ne sera pas possible d'insérer la cartouche d'agrafes. ineo 1052/1250 8-39 8.6 Rechargement agrafes 8 1 Affichez le message d'aide sur l'écran Machine, et appuyez sur [Consomm./Déchets]. 2 Appuyez sur l'onglet [Ajt agrafes] en haut de la zone de message d'aide. 3 Effectuez le processus, en appuyant sur [+] ou [,] pour suivre les étapes. dPour info Voir comment afficher le message d'aide page 8-4. Chargement 8 de pastilles de colle dans le Thermorelieur PB-503 8-40 ineo 1052/1250 8.7 8.7 Chargement de pastilles de colle dans le Thermorelieur PB-503 Quand le thermorelieur n'a plus de pastilles de colle, le message suivant apparaît sur l'écran Machine, et l'opération de thermoreliure n'est plus disponible en raison d'une anomalie de chauffage du thermorelieur. [Ouvrir réserve à colle du Thermorelieur et ajouter des pastilles de colle.] Si des pastilles de colle viennent à manquer pendant l'opération de reliure effectuée par le thermorelieur, la machine arrête le travail immédiatement et l'opération de reliure n'est plus disponible. Suivez la procédure ci-dessous pour ajouter des pastilles de colle au thermorelieur. 0 Veillez à n'utiliser que la colle GC-501 exclusivement réservée au Thermorelieur PB-503. Toute autre colle pourrait entraîner un incident sur la machine. 0 Ne pas toucher le levier de la trémie de colle avec les mains pour éviter toute panne. 0 N'oubliez pas de secouer le sachet de pastilles de colle avant de les ajouter. Les pastilles de colle agglomérées sont susceptibles du rester à l'intérieur de la trémie. Si des pastilles de colle sont agglomérées à l'intérieur de la trémie, veuillez contacter le SAV. 0 Ne pas ajouter des pastilles de colle au-delà du repère indiqué à l'intérieur de la trémie. 0 Veillez à bien refermer le couvercle de la trémie de colle. Sinon, un message d'erreur s'affiche. 1 Affichez le message d'aide sur l'écran Machine, et appuyez sur [Consomm./Déchets]. 2 Appuyez sur l'onglet [Past. colle] en haut de la zone de message d'aide. ineo 1052/1250 8-41 8.7 Chargement de pastilles de colle dans le Thermorelieur PB-503 8 3 Effectuez le processus, en appuyant sur [+] ou [,] pour suivre les étapes. dPour info Voir comment afficher le message d'aide page 8-4. 8 Rechargement en eau du réservoir de l'humidificateur de l'Unité relais RU-509 8-42 ineo 1052/1250 8.8 8.8 Rechargement en eau du réservoir de l'humidificateur de l'Unité relais RU-509 Quand le niveau d'eau du réservoir de l'Humidificateur HM-102 monté (en option) sur l'Unité relais RU-509 est bas, le message suivant apparaît dans la zone des messages de l'écran, et le réglage de détuilage n'est plus disponible en raison d'une humidification insuffisante. [Plus d'eau dans réservoir Humidificateur Unité relais/Remplir le réservoir] 7 ATTENTION Ne pas mettre d'eau sale, d'eau de puits, ou d'eau filtrée dans le réservoir de l'humidificateur. - Le réservoir pourrait être facilement contaminée. Utilisez de l'eau de robinet décontaminée, de l'eau minérale, ou de l'eau alcaline ionisée. Suivez la procédure ci-dessous pour ajouter de l'eau dans le réservoir. 1 Affichez le message d'aide sur l'écran Machine, et appuyez sur [Consomm./Déchets]. 2 Appuyez sur l'onglet [Réserv. eau] en haut de la zone de message d'aide. ineo 1052/1250 8-43 8.8 Rechargement en eau du réservoir de l'humidificateur de l'Unité relais RU-509 8 3 Effectuez le processus, en appuyant sur [+] ou [,] pour suivre les étapes. dPour info Voir comment afficher le message d'aide page 8-4. 8 Rechargement des pièces de reliure dans le Relieur automatique à anneaux GP-502 8-44 ineo 1052/1250 8.9 8.9 Rechargement des pièces de reliure dans le Relieur automatique à anneaux GP-502 Si le Relieur automatique à anneaux GP-502 n'a plus de pièces de reliure, le message suivant apparaît à l'écran. [Aucune pce reliure de relieur à anneaux Ajouter pièces de reliure] Le panneau d'affichage du relieur à anneaux affiche l'écran ALERT - Supplies/Trays et le message [Load Binding Elements]. Suivez la procédure ci-dessous pour ajouter des pièces de reliure. Veuillez consulter le [MANUEL D'UTILISATION] fourni avec le Relieur automatique à anneaux GP-502 sur les modalités d'ajout des pièces de reliure. 1 Affichez le message d'aide sur l'écran Machine, et appuyez sur [Consomm./Déchets]. 2 Appuyez sur l'onglet [Pces reliure] en haut de la zone de message d'aide. ineo 1052/1250 8-45 8.9 Rechargement des pièces de reliure dans le Relieur automatique à anneaux GP-502 8 3 Effectuez le processus, en appuyant sur [+] ou [,] pour suivre les étapes. dPour info Voir comment afficher le message d'aide page 8-4. 8 Remplacement de la boîte à déchets toner 8-46 ineo 1052/1250 8.10 8.10 Remplacement de la boîte à déchets toner Quand la boîte à déchets toner est plein de toner usagé, le message ou l'indicateur suivant s'affiche à l'écran. Suivez la procédure ci-dessous pour remplacer la boîte à déchets toner. REMARQUE Ne retirez pas la boîte à déchets toner pendant qu'une impression est en cours. Sinon, cela pourrait provoquer une anomalie sur la machine. Zone des messages Zone Éléments Apport/Corbeille État de la machine Écran Machine : Prêt pour l'impression Remplacer le réservoir de toner usagé Écran Copie : Prêt pour la copie Remplacer le réservoir de toner usagé [Toner usagé quasi-plein] apparaît et le voyant s'allume en rouge. La boîte à déchets toner a recueilli une quantité considérable de toner usagé et doit être remplacée. Écran Machine : Prêt pour l'impression Réservoir de toner usagé plein Écran Copie : Prêt pour la copie Réservoir de toner usagé plein [Toner usagé quasi plein] apparaît et le voyant s'allume en rouge. La boîte à déchets toner est pleine de toner usagé. Réservoir de toner usagé plein Remplacer réservoir de toner usagé SVP [Réserv. de toner usagé] apparaît et le voyant s'allume en rouge. La machine devient indisponible pour l'impression en raison du trop-plein de la boîte à déchets toner. ineo 1052/1250 8-47 8.10 Remplacement de la boîte à déchets toner 8 7 AVERTISSEMENT NE PAS JETER la boîte à déchets toner au feu. Si la boîte à déchets toner est jetée au feu, le toner peut s'enflammer et créer une situation dangereuse. - Pour le traitement de la boîte à déchets plein de toner, veuillez contacter le SAV. 1 Affichez le message d'aide sur l'écran Machine, et appuyez sur [Consomm./Déchets]. 2 Appuyez sur l'onglet [Bte récupér.] en haut de la zone de message. 3 Effectuez le processus, en appuyant sur [+] ou [,] pour suivre les étapes. dPour info Voir comment afficher le message d'aide page 8-4. 8 Élimination des débris d'agrafes 8-48 ineo 1052/1250 8.11 8.11 Élimination des débris d'agrafes Quand la corbeille d'agrafes de l'unité de finition est pleine, le message suivant apparaît dans la zone des messages de l'écran. [La corbeille de l'agrafeuse est pleine/Veuillez vider la corbeille] Suivez la procédure suivante pour vider la corbeille de chutes. 1 Affichez le message d'aide sur l'écran Machine, et appuyez sur [Consomm./Déchets]. 2 Appuyez sur l'onglet [DéchetsAgraf] en haut de la zone de message d'aide. ineo 1052/1250 8-49 8.11 Élimination des débris d'agrafes 8 3 Effectuez le processus, en appuyant sur [+] ou [,] pour suivre les étapes. dPour info Voir comment afficher le message d'aide page 8-4. 8 Élimination des déchets de perforation 8-50 ineo 1052/1250 8.12 8.12 Élimination des déchets de perforation Les options suivantes comportent un kit de perforation. - Unité de finition FS-532 (Unité de perforation PK-522 à installer en option sur l'Unité de finition FS-532) - Unité de pliage FD-503 - Perforeuse multiple GP-501 - Relieur automatique à anneaux GP-502 Cette section décrit les indications à l'écran qui vous informent qu'il est temps de procéder au vidage de la corbeille de perforation, ainsi que les instructions permettant d'y parvenir. 8.12.1 Vidage de la corbeille de perforation de l'Unité de finition FS-532 Si l'Unité de finition FS-532 est dotée de l'Unité de perforation PK-522, le message suivant apparaît dans la zone des messages de l'écran lorsque la corbeille de l'Unité de perforation PK-522 est pleine. [Bac déchets perfo plein/Vider bac déchets SVP] De même, le message [Corbeille perfo pleine] apparaît et le voyant s'allume en rouge dans la zone Éléments Apport/Corbeille de l'écran Machine. Suivez la procédure suivante pour vider la corbeille de chutes. 1 Affichez le message d'aide sur l'écran Machine, et appuyez sur [Consomm./Déchets]. 2 Appuyez sur l'onglet [Déchets (PK)] en haut de la zone de message d'aide. ineo 1052/1250 8-51 8.12 Élimination des déchets de perforation 8 3 Effectuez le processus, en appuyant sur [+] ou [,] pour suivre les étapes. dPour info Voir comment afficher le message d'aide page 8-4. 8.12.2 Vidage de la corbeille de perforation de l'Unité de pliage FD-503 Quand la corbeille de l'Unité de pliage FD-503 est pleine, le message suivant apparaît dans la zone des messages de l'écran. [Vider la corbeille de l’unité de perforation] De même, le message [Corbeille perfo pleine] apparaît et le voyant s'allume en rouge dans la zone Éléments Apport/Corbeille de l'écran Machine. Suivez la procédure suivante pour vider la corbeille de chutes. 8 Élimination des déchets de perforation 8-52 ineo 1052/1250 8.12 1 Affichez le message d'aide sur l'écran Machine, et appuyez sur [Consomm./Déchets]. 2 Appuyez sur l'onglet [Déchets (FD)] en haut de la zone de message d'aide. 3 Effectuez le processus, en appuyant sur [+] ou [,] pour suivre les étapes. dPour info Voir comment afficher le message d'aide page 8-4. ineo 1052/1250 8-53 8.12 Élimination des déchets de perforation 8 8.12.3 Vidage de la corbeille de perforation de la Perforeuse multiple GP-501 Quand la corbeille de la Perforeuse multiple GP-501 est pleine, le message suivant apparaît dans la zone des messages de l'écran. [La corbeille de la Perforeuse multiple est pleine. Vider la corbeille.] De même, le message [Corbeille perfo pleine] apparaît et le voyant s'allume en rouge dans la zone Éléments Apport/Corbeille de l'écran Machine. Suivez la procédure suivante pour vider la corbeille de chutes. REMARQUE Une fois que vous avez retiré la corbeille de la perforeuse multiple, veillez à la vider. En effet, la machine remet le compteur à zéro à chaque fois que la corbeille est tirée, qu'elle ait été vidée ou non. 1 Affichez le message d'aide sur l'écran Machine, et appuyez sur [Consomm./Déchets]. 2 Appuyez sur l'onglet [Déchets (GP)] en haut de la zone de message d'aide. 8 Élimination des déchets de perforation 8-54 ineo 1052/1250 8.12 3 Effectuez le processus, en appuyant sur [+] ou [,] pour suivre les étapes. dPour info Voir comment afficher le message d'aide page 8-4. 8.12.4 Vidage de la corbeille à déchets du Relieur automatique à anneaux GP-502 Quand la corbeille du Relieur automatique à anneaux GP-502 est pleine, le message suivant apparaît dans la zone des messages de l'écran. [Bac déchets perfo relieur anneaux plein Vider bac déchets SVP] De même, le message [Corbeille perfo pleine] apparaît et le voyant s'allume en rouge dans la zone Éléments Apport/Corbeille de l'écran Machine. Le panneau d'affichage du relieur à anneaux affiche l'écran ALERT - Supplies/Trays et le message [Empty Chip Tray]. Suivez la procédure suivante pour vider la corbeille de déchets du relieur à anneaux. Veuillez consulter le [MANUEL D'UTILISATION] fourni avec le Relieur automatique à anneaux GP-502 sur les modalités de vidage de la corbeille de déchets. REMARQUE Une fois que vous avez retiré la corbeille du relieur à anneaux, veillez à la vider. ineo 1052/1250 8-55 8.12 Élimination des déchets de perforation 8 1 Affichez le message d'aide sur l'écran Machine, et appuyez sur [Consomm./Déchets]. 2 Appuyez sur l'onglet [Déchets (GP)] en haut de la zone de message d'aide. 3 Effectuez le processus, en appuyant sur [+] ou [,] pour suivre les étapes. dPour info Voir comment afficher le message d'aide page 8-4. 8 Élimination des chutes de massicotage 8-56 ineo 1052/1250 8.13 8.13 Élimination des chutes de massicotage Les options suivantes comportent un massicot. - Piqueuse à cheval SD-506 - Thermorelieur PB-503 Cette section décrit les indications à l'écran qui vous informent qu'il est temps de procéder au vidage de la corbeille des chutes de massicotage, ainsi que les instructions permettant d'y parvenir. 8.13.1 Vidage de la corbeille de chutes de massicotage de la Piqueuse à cheval SD-506 Quand la corbeille de massicotage de la Piqueuse à cheval SD-506 est pleine, le message suivant apparaît dans la zone des messages de l'écran. [Vider la corbeille du massicot] De même, le message [Corbeille M] apparaît et le voyant s'allume en rouge dans la zone Éléments Apport/Corbeille de l'écran Machine. Suivez la procédure suivante pour vider la corbeille de chutes. REMARQUE Il n'est pas possible de sortir la corbeille de massicotage lorsque des travaux sont en cours sur la machine. Veillez à ce que la machine se soit arrêtée avant de sortir la corbeille. Assurez-vous de bien remettre la corbeille de massicotage en position initiale. Sinon, la fonction de massicotage ne pourra pas possible. 1 Affichez le message d'aide sur l'écran Machine, et appuyez sur [Consomm./Déchets]. 2 Appuyez sur l'onglet [Déch Massic] en haut de la zone de message d'aide. ineo 1052/1250 8-57 8.13 Élimination des chutes de massicotage 8 3 Effectuez le processus, en appuyant sur [+] ou [,] pour suivre les étapes. dPour info Voir comment afficher le message d'aide page 8-4. 8.13.2 Vidage de la corbeille à déchets du Thermorelieur PB-503 Quand la corbeille de massicotage du Thermorelieur PB-503 est plein, le message suivant apparaît dans la zone des messages de l'écran. [Vider la corbeille du massicot du Thermorelieur] De même, le message [Corbeille M] apparaît et le voyant s'allume en rouge dans la zone Éléments Apport/Corbeille de l'écran Machine. Suivez la procédure suivante pour vider la corbeille de chutes. REMARQUE Ne jamais ouvrir la porte avant du thermorelieur pendant qu'une opération est en cours sur la machine. Sinon, cela pourrait causer un bourrage. 8 Élimination des chutes de massicotage 8-58 ineo 1052/1250 8.13 Assurez-vous que la machine s'est arrêtée avant d'ouvrir la porte avant. 1 Affichez le message d'aide sur l'écran Machine, et appuyez sur [Consomm./Déchets]. 2 Appuyez sur l'onglet [Déchets (ThR)] en haut de la zone de message d'aide. 3 Effectuez le processus, en appuyant sur [+] ou [,] pour suivre les étapes. dPour info Voir comment afficher le message d'aide page 8-4. ineo 1052/1250 8-59 8.14 Remplacement de la Butée de lame de la Piqueuse à cheval SD-506 8 8.14 Remplacement de la Butée de lame de la Piqueuse à cheval SD-506 Cette machine massicote les jeux imprimés par un dispositif comprenant une lame et sa butée. En raison de sa fréquente utilisation, il peut être nécessaire de remplacer la butée. Dans ce cas, le message suivant apparaît dans la zone des messages de l'écran Machine. [Remplacer butée de lame] [Remplacer la butée de lame du massicot de la Piqueuse à cheval] Si le message ci-dessus s'affiche, contactez le SAV. % L'administrateur peut effectuer un appel SAV depuis le Réglage administrateur dans le mode Utilitaire. Dans ce cas, vous n'avez pas besoin d'appeler pour demander un entretien préventif parce que votre machine a été contrôlée automatiquement par votre technicien SAV. 8 Remplacement de la Butée de lame de la Piqueuse à cheval SD-506 8-60 ineo 1052/1250 8.14 9 Entretien ineo 1052/1250 9-3 9.1 Nettoyage 9 9 Entretien 9.1 Nettoyage Afin de préserver une qualité de copie optimale, il faut toujours veiller à la propreté des zones suivantes. 9.1.1 Nettoyage de la vitre de numérisation du chargeur Auto Gardez propre la vitre de numérisation du chargeur Auto à gauche de la vitre d'exposition ; sinon les marques de salissure sont imprimées sous forme de lignes noires sur les images numérisées dans le chargeur Auto. Soulevez l'introducteur de documents, puis nettoyez la vitre avec un chiffon doux et propre. REMARQUE N'utilisez jamais de solvants comme le benzène ou les diluants pour nettoyer la vitre de numérisation du chargeur Auto 9.1.2 Nettoyage de la vitre d'exposition Soulevez l'introducteur de documents, puis nettoyez la vitre d'exposition avec un chiffon doux et propre. Si la vitre est difficile à nettoyer, vous pouvez aussi utiliser un chiffon doux légèrement imbibé d'eau. REMARQUE N'utilisez jamais de solvants comme le benzène ou les diluants pour nettoyer la vitre d'exposition. 9.1.3 Nettoyage du cache document du chargeur Auto Le cache document du chargeur Auto doit toujours rester propre, sinon des salissures risquent d'être imprimées ou la détection du format de l'original sur la vitre d'exposition ne se fait pas correctement. Soulevez l'introducteur de documents, puis nettoyez le cache avec un chiffon doux et propre. REMARQUE N'utilisez jamais de solvants comme le benzène ou les diluants pour nettoyer la vitre d'exposition et cache document du chargeur Auto. 9 Nettoyage 9-4 ineo 1052/1250 9.1 9.1.4 Nettoyage de l'extérieure de la machine Nettoyez les surfaces externes avec un chiffon doux humidifié avec un détergent neutre. REMARQUE Veillez à couper l'interrupteur principal de la machine avant le nettoyage. N'utilisez jamais de solvants à peinture, comme la benzine ou autres diluants, pour nettoyer l'extérieur de la machine. 9.1.5 Nettoyage du panneau de contrôle Nettoyez la surface du panneau de contrôle avec un chiffon sec et doux. REMARQUE Veillez à ne pas appuyer trop fort sur les touches ou sur l'écran tactile lors du nettoyage du panneau de contrôle. N'utilisez jamais de détergent neutre, de solvants à peinture, comme la benzine ou autres diluants, pour nettoyer le panneau de contrôle. 9.1.6 Nettoyage de la courroie de transport du bac pliage de la Piqueuse à cheval SD-506 La courroie de transport du bac pliage doit rester propre, sinon les salissures risquent d'être imprimées. Appliquez la procédure ci-dessous pour nettoyer la courroie de transport du bac pliage. Afin de conserver une qualité d'impression optimale, nous recommandons de la nettoyer à chaque utilisation du bac de la piqueuse à cheval. Si après impression vous remarquez des marques de salissure, effectuez immédiatement cette opération de nettoyage. 1 Tirez le magasin entièrement. ineo 1052/1250 9-5 9.1 Nettoyage 9 2 Ouvrez le support du bac. REMARQUE N'oubliez jamais de déployer le support du bac, sinon cela pourrait endommager la machine. 3 Nettoyez la surface des deux courroies de transport au moyen d'un chiffon doux légèrement imbibé d'alcool. 4 À mesure que le nettoyage progresse, faites avancer la courroie afin de la nettoyer sur toute la longueur. % Soulevez légèrement les deux courroies, puis tirez-les ensemble vers l'avant afin d'en exposer les zones cachées. % Nettoyez les courroies au moyen d'un chiffon doux légèrement humidifié à l'alcool (nettoyant). % Répétez les étapes 2 et 3 (environ trois fois) afin de nettoyer la courroie sur toute sa longueur. REMARQUE Ne soulevez pas la courroie plus haut que nécessaire. Ou n'oubliez jamais de les tirer en même temps. Sinon, cela pourrait provoquer une anomalie sur la machine. 5 Nettoyez la plaque de fond du magasin. % Essuyez toute la surface de la plaque de fond au moyen d'un chiffon doux légèrement imbibé d'alcool. 6 Repliez le support du bac, puis repoussez le bac pliage. REMARQUE Ne remettez jamais en place le bac de la piqueuse à cheval sans que le support du bac ne soit replié. 9 Nettoyage 9-6 ineo 1052/1250 9.1 9.1.7 Nettoyage de la corbeille de perforation de la Perforeuse multiple GP-501 Les chutes de perforation peuvent tomber dans la perforeuse multiple, et cela peut avoir des effets néfastes sur le fonctionnement de la machine. Veuillez nettoyer la perforeuse multiple de manière régulière selon la procédure ci-dessous. 1 Ouvrez la porte avant de la perforeuse multiple, puis ouvrez le levier [GP5]. 2 Nettoyez l'intérieur de l'unité de perforation avec un aspirateur. 3 Retirer la corbeille. REMARQUE Une fois que vous avez retiré la corbeille de la perforeuse multiple, veillez à la vider. En effet, la machine remet le compteur à zéro à chaque fois que la corbeille est tirée, qu'elle ait été vidée ou non. 4 Nettoyez l'intérieur de l'unité avec un aspirateur. 5 Fermez la porte avant de la perforeuse multiple une fois que le nettoyage est terminé. ineo 1052/1250 9-7 9.2 Vérification du compteur copie 9 9.2 Vérification du compteur copie L'écran du Menu Utilitaire vous permet de consulter sous forme de liste l'indication des éléments suivants : - Compt. Total Facturation - Compteur départ papier - Compteur sortie copie - Compteur total Impression - Compteur total copie - Compteur total numérisation - Compteur entretien - Compteur développeur - Compteur tambour Ces informations peuvent être imprimées en cas de besoin. Si le Thermorelieur PB-503 est installé, la machine affiche aussi le [Compteur thermorel.] sur l'écran Menu Utilitaires pour fournir les informations suivantes sur les livres thermoreliés : - Volumes Livre Total (classé par largeur de massicotage) - Total Corps - Épaisseur Totale dPour info Vous pouvez configurer la machine pour afficher la touche [Liste compteur pièces CMS] sur l'écran Menu Utilitaire qui vous permet d'afficher ou de modifier le compteur de pièces CMS (nom de pièce, réf., limite) et de remettre les compteurs à zéro. Contactez votre technicien SAV si nécessaire. % Une pression sur [Information système] permet d'afficher les informations système de la machine. Appuyez sur [Fermer] pour restaurer l'écran précédent. % Le cycle et la durée de fonctionnement peuvent être définis pour le compteur du développeur et le compteur du tambour OPC. Contactez votre technicien SAV si nécessaire. 1 Appuyez sur Utilitaire/Compteur sur le panneau de contrôle. L'écran Menu Utilitaire s'affiche. 2 Vérifiez les informations compteur. Les informations du compteur s'affichent sur le côté gauche de l'écran. 9 Vérification du compteur copie 9-8 ineo 1052/1250 9.2 3 Appuyez sur [Détails]. Le compteur détaillé s'affiche sous forme de liste. Pour imprimer la liste compteur détaillé, passez à l'étape 4. Si l'impression de la liste n'est pas souhaitée, appuyez sur [Fermer]. Passez à l'étape 6. 4 Appuyez sur [Impression] pour afficher l'écran Impression. % Configurez le papier en sélectionnant le mode recto-verso désiré, le mode de sortie, et le magasin, puis appuyez sur Départ sur le panneau de contrôle. 5 Appuyez sur [Fermer]. L'écran Menu Utilitaire réapparaît. 6 Appuyez sur [Quitter]. L'écran Machine réapparaît. ineo 1052/1250 9-9 9.3 En cas d'affichage du message [Appel SAV] 9 9.3 En cas d'affichage du message [Appel SAV] Une fois un nombre défini de copies (1 000 000 copies) effectué sur votre machine, une Maintenance préventive (PM) sera nécessaire pour préserver des performances optimales. Quand la maintenance préventive doit être effectuée, un message et l'icône Appel SAV s'affichent pour vous inviter à contacter votre technicien SAV pour entretien. Le cycle de remplacement est différent selon les pièces. Et ce cycle peut être modifié. Contactez votre technicien SAV si nécessaire. dPour info L'administrateur peut effectuer un appel SAV depuis le Réglage administrateur dans le mode Utilitaire. Dans ce cas, vous n'avez pas besoin d'appeler pour demander un entretien préventif parce que votre machine a été contrôlée automatiquement par votre technicien SAV. 9 Intervention d'entretien 9-10 ineo 1052/1250 9.4 9.4 Intervention d'entretien Période de disponibilité des pièces de performance destinées à la réparation La période minimum pendant laquelle nous disposerons des pièces de performance nécessaires à la réparation et au maintien des fonctions de la machine est de sept ans après l'interruption de la fabrication de ce produit. 10 Incidents ineo 1052/1250 10-3 10.1 En cas d'affichage du message [Contacter le SAV] : Contactez le SAV 10 10 Incidents 10.1 En cas d'affichage du message [Contacter le SAV] : Contactez le SAV Le message [Contacter le SAV] indique un état de la machine exigeant l'attention de votre technicien SAV. L'écran Appeler le SAV affiche normalement le numéro de téléphone et de fax de votre technicien SAV. Veillez à contacter immédiatement votre technicien SAV en suivant la procédure ci-dessous. 10.1.1 Opérations avec affichage de l'écran Appel le SAV 1 Veuillez noter le code de rapport [C-####], figurant sur la deuxième ligne de la zone de message. % L'administrateur peut appeler le SAV depuis l'écran Menu Utilitaire. Dans ce cas, vous n'avez pas besoin d'appeler pour signaler le code de rapport ; votre machine a été contrôlée par votre technicien SAV. % If CS Remote Care est déjà activé sur la machine, vous n'avez pas besoin d'appeler pour signaler le code de rapport ; votre machine a été contrôlée par votre technicien SAV. % Pour obtenir plus de détails sur CS Remote Care, contactez votre technicien SAV. 2 Coupez l'alimentation de la machine. Mettez l'interrupteur secondaire sur Arrêt, puis l'interrupteur principal sur Arrêt. REMARQUE Veillez à ne pas éteindre l'interrupteur principal avant d'éteindre l'interrupteur secondaire. Veillez à ne pas éteindre l'interrupteur principal pendant que les messages suivants sont affichés après l'extinction de l'interrupteur secondaire. [Extinction en cours en cours/Veuillez ne pas couper l'alim principale] Si l'interrupteur principal est mis sur Arrêt alors que ce message est affichés, cela peut causer des problèmes sur la machine, notamment en termes de fixation toner. 3 Débranchez la machine. 4 Contactez votre technicien SAV et signalez-lui l'état et le code de rapport. dPour info Voir page 4-53 pour savoir comment couper l'alimentation. 10 En cas d'affichage du message [Contacter le SAV] : Contactez le SAV 10-4 ineo 1052/1250 10.1 10.1.2 Utilisation limitée de la machine 7 ATTENTION En aucun cas, vous ne devez utiliser la machine en mode Service limité pendant une période prolongée. - Sinon, cela peut causer incident inattendu. Contactez le SAV immédiatement après l'apparition de l'écran Contacter le SAV. Si le message ci-dessous s'affiche sur l'écran Contacter le SAV, vous pouvez continuer à vous servir de la machine temporairement de manière restreinte et utiliser les fonctions non affectées par la panne. Si l'utilisation limitée de la machine est activée, le message suivant s'affiche dans la zone de message à la place du code de rapport. Par exemple : [Magasin 2 hors service - Appuyer sur AIDE pour le désélectionner] REMARQUE Pour bénéficier de cette limitation de fonctionnalité de la machine, veuillez consulter votre technicien SAV. REMARQUE Attention, n'utilisez la fonction limitée que temporairement et faites réparer la machine sans délai. 1 Appuyez sur Aide sur le panneau de contrôle. Le message suivant s'affiche : [Mettre hors tension, puis sous tension C-0202] 2 Éteignez, puis rallumez l'interrupteur secondaire. Le travail de copie/impression peut se poursuivre sans utiliser le magasin défaillant (ici Magasin 2) de la machine. Activé Désactivé ineo 1052/1250 10-5 10.2 Si le message [Bourrage papier] s'affiche 10 10.2 Si le message [Bourrage papier] s'affiche Quand un bourrage papier se produit lors d'une tâche de copie, la machine affiche le message [Bourrage papier] ainsi que l'emplacement du bourrage à l'écran. Le voyant Départ devient orange sur le panneau de contrôle et la machine ne peut pas continuer à fonctionner jusqu'à ce que toutes les zones de bourrage soient dégagées. dPour info Un code de bourrage peut s'afficher dans la zone de message de l'écran des positions de bourrage. Contactez votre technicien SAV si nécessaire. Écran Position bourrage N° Nom Description 1 Zone des messages Des instructions détaillées concernant l'enlèvement du papier s'affiche. 2 Numéro du bourrage Indique la position du bourrage papier. 3 [Illustration] Appuyez sur cette touche pour afficher un écran d'instruction de dépannage qui explique la méthode à privilégier pour résoudre un problème et l'accompagne d'illustrations. 10 Si le message [Bourrage papier] s'affiche 10-6 ineo 1052/1250 10.2 Écran d'instruction de dépannage Tous les emplacements affectés par un bourrage seront signalés par des numéros clignotants et des flèches sur cet écran. Le numéro clignotant et la flèche indiquent la position de bourrage la plus prioritaire. L'opération permettant d'enlever du papier coincé s'affiche dans la zone des messages. Une pression sur [Illustration] a pour effet d'afficher les écrans suivants de la procédure de mise au rebut. N° Nom Description 1 Zone des messages Explique avec du texte le procédé pour enlever du papier coincé, conformément aux illustrations jointes. 2 Illustration Affiche dans l'ordre à privilégier le procédé et des illustrations pour enlever du papier coincé. 3 [Suivant]/[Précédent] Ces touches sont affichées lorsque il y a deux écrans ou plus pour expliquer la procédure permettant d'enlever le papier coincé. Appuyez sur la touche pour afficher l'écran suivant ou l'écran précédent. 4 [Pos. du bourrage] Appuyez sur cette touche pour revenir à l'écran Position du bourrage. ineo 1052/1250 10-7 10.2 Si le message [Bourrage papier] s'affiche 10 10.2.1 Précautions d'élimination de bourrage papier de la machine Lors de la suppression d'un bourrage de papier, tenez compte des précautions suivantes. Interrupteur principal Ne mettez pas l'interrupteur principal sur Arrêt lorsque vous enlevez du papier coincé. Sinon, il ne sera pas possible de tirer les magasins ou l'unité de transport et de fixation. De même, ne mettez pas l'interrupteur principal sur Arrêt lorsqu'un message comme [Extinction en cours/Veuillez ne pas couper l'alim principale] s'affiche vous informant que l'interrupteur principal ne doit pas être mis sur Arrêt. Cela pourrait entraîner des problèmes sur la machine comme la fixation du toner. Fonctionnement du levier [M4] S'il reste du papier coincé dans la rainure d'entrée ou de sortie de la machine, le levier [M4] fourni pour l'unité de transport et de fixation ne peut pas être tourné vers le bas et la droite pour tirer l'unité de transport et de fixation. Ne forcez jamais sur le levier [M4] et ne le tournez pas vers le bas. Élimination des bourrages papier Quand vous retirez la feuille bloquée, vérifiez qu'il ne reste pas de papier déchiré à l'intérieur de la machine. Tambour Lorsque l'unité de transport et de fixation est tirée, votre main risque de toucher la surface du tambour si vous placez votre main comme sur l'illustration à droite. Ne touchez pas la surface du tambour au risque de l'endommager. Chargeur Auto 7 ATTENTION NE PAS mettre les doigts dans la zone des charnières du chargeur Auto. - Il y a risque de blessure. Soyez vigilant lors de l'ouverture ou de la fermeture du chargeur Auto. 10 Si le message [Bourrage papier] s'affiche 10-8 ineo 1052/1250 10.2 Élimination de bourrages papier dans l'unité de fixation 7 ATTENTION NE PAS mettre la main sur l'unité de fixation. - Vous risquez de vous brûler. Soyez particulièrement vigilant en retirant l'unité de transport et de fixation. 7 ATTENTION NE PAS mettre les mains ou le bras entre la machine et l'unité de transport et de fixation. - Connecter les bornes des composants électriques situés au dos de l'unité de transport de fixation, ou les toucher peut entraîner des dommages sur la machine. De même, mettre les mains ou le bras entre la machine et l'unité de transport et de fixation peut provoquer des accidents imprévus. N'intervenez pas vous-même sur la machine, contactez plutôt votre SAV. En cas de bourrage papier du côté droit de l'unité de fixation, tournez la molette [M6] dans le sens horaire pour faire avancer le papier vers la droite, puis retirez-le. Si vous ne pouvez pas dégager le papier du côté droit de l'unité de fixation, retirez-le du côté gauche. À ce moment, ouvrez le levier [M8] et le levier [M9], puis enlevez le papier vers la gauche sans tourner la molette [M6]. Attention de ne pas toucher la zone à haute température lorsque le levier [M9] est ouvert. N'essayez pas de dégager du papier coincé du côté gauche sans ouvrir d'abord le levier [M9]. Cela pourrait causer un incident sur la machine. ineo 1052/1250 10-9 10.2 Si le message [Bourrage papier] s'affiche 10 10.2.2 Précautions d'élimination de bourrage papier de l'Unité d'alimentation papier PF-703 Retrait des magasins de l'Unité d'alimentation papier PF-703 Les magasins de l'Unité d'alimentation papier PF-703 ne peuvent pas être retirés immédiatement en cas de bourrage papier, en raison du système d'aspiration du papier. Patientez quelques instants avant de tirer le magasin. L'étape à effectuer est la même avec le Module d'insertion grande capacité MI-PFU puisque les mécanismes sont similaires. 10.2.3 Précautions d'élimination de bourrage papier du Thermorelieur PB-503 7 ATTENTION NE PAS toucher le réservoir de colle. - L'unité de la réserve de colle interne présente des températures très élevées. En cas de contact, vous risquez de vous brûler. Faites particulièrement attention lors de la réinstallation du réservoir de colle. 10.2.4 Précautions d'élimination de bourrage papier de la Piqueuse à cheval SD-506 7 ATTENTION Dégagement des agrafes coincées Attention, les agrafes sont très pointues ! - N'oubliez pas de retirer les agrafes coincées à l'intérieur de la machine pour ne pas vous blesser. 10.2.5 Précautions d'élimination de bourrage papier de l'Unité de finition FS-532 7 ATTENTION Dégagement des agrafes coincées Attention, les agrafes sont très pointues ! - N'oubliez pas de retirer les agrafes coincées à l'intérieur de la machine pour ne pas vous blesser. Sortie et remboîtement de l'empileur de l'Unité de finition FS-532 Vous risquez de ne pas pouvoir ouvrir l'empileur en raison de son blocage automatique. VERROU 10 Si le message [Bourrage papier] s'affiche 10-10 ineo 1052/1250 10.2 Il peut aussi arriver que vous ne puissiez pas remboîter l'empileur parce qu'il est bloqué automatiquement. En cas de résistance, tournez la molette [FS8]. L'empileur est alors débloqué et peut être manipulé. 10.2.6 Précautions d'élimination de bourrage papier du Relieur automatique à anneaux GP-502 7 ATTENTION Ne placez JAMAIS la main sur le panneau d'affichage en rabattant le capot supérieur du relieur à anneaux. - Sinon vous pourriez vous coincer la main et vous blesser. Soyez vigilant lorsque vous rabattez le capot supérieur du relieur à anneaux. Lorsque vous ouvrez le capot supérieur du relieur à anneaux, assurezvous de l'ouvrir jusqu'au bout pour qu'il ne retombe pas. 7 ATTENTION Attention à votre tête lorsque le capot supérieur ou le passe-copie du relieur à anneaux est ouvert. - Vous risquez de vous blesser en vous cognant la tête. Soyez particulièrement prudent lors du dégagement d'un bourrage papier. ineo 1052/1250 10-11 10.2 Si le message [Bourrage papier] s'affiche 10 REMARQUE Avant d'ouvrir le capot supérieur du relieur à anneaux, enlevez tous les objets placés dessus. Si jamais un objet tombe derrière la machine, retirez-le. REMARQUE Le capot supérieur du relieur à anneaux se verrouille quand il est entièrement ouvert. Avant d'éliminer un bourrage papier, pensez à verrouiller le capot en position ouverte pour qu'il ne vous gêne pas. REMARQUE Le capot supérieur du relieur à anneaux se verrouille quand il est entièrement ouvert pour atteindre le capot supérieur verrouillé du relieur à anneaux. Avant d'éliminer un bourrage papier, pensez à verrouiller le passecopie en position ouverte pour qu'il ne vous gêne pas. 10 Si le message [Bourrage papier] s'affiche 10-12 ineo 1052/1250 10.2 REMARQUE Lorsque vous rabattez le capot supérieur ou le passe-copie du relieur à anneaux, assurez-vous de bien refermer. Sinon, la machine ne peut pas fonctionner. 10.2.7 Opérations sur l'écran Position du bourrage et de l'écran Instructions de dépannage 1 Appuyez sur [Illustration] à l'écran. L'écran montrant la procédure de dépannage s'affiche. % Appuyez sur [Suivant] pour passer à la page suivante qui, le cas échéant, présentera une série d'illustrations concernant les mesures à prendre. % Appuyez sur [Pos. du bourrage] pour revenir à l'écran Position du bourrage. 2 Suivez les instructions à l'écran pour éliminer le bourrage papier. REMARQUE Avant de procéder au dépannage, vérifiez les emplacements des étiquettes d'avertissement situées à l'intérieur de la machine. Veuillez lire les informations de sécurité pour plus de détails. 3 À la fin de la procédure, l'écran Machine réapparaît. % S'il reste un emplacement de bourrage, l'écran de bourrage papier sera restauré pour afficher la procédure de correction suivante dans la zone de message et le numéro d'emplacement dans la zone de position de bourrage. Répétez les étapes 1 et 2 jusqu'à ce que tous les emplacements soient corrigés. Quand toutes les procédures permettant d'enlever le papier ont été effectuées, la machine affiche à nouveau l'écran Machine. 4 À la fin du préchauffage, appuyez sur Départ sur le panneau de contrôle pour reprendre l'impression. dPour info En vue de configurer la machine à reprendre l'impression immédiatement à la fin du préchauffage, appuyez sur Départ sur le panneau de contrôle pendant le préchauffage. Contactez votre technicien SAV si nécessaire. ineo 1052/1250 10-13 10.2 Si le message [Bourrage papier] s'affiche 10 10.2.8 Numéro du bourrage sur l'écran Position du bourrage 10 Si le message [Bourrage papier] s'affiche 10-14 ineo 1052/1250 10.2 N° Emplacement 1 Magasin 1 (Bac principal) 2 Magasin 2 (Bac principal) 3 Mag3 (Unité d'alimentation papier PF-703/PF-706) 4 Mag4 (Unité d'alimentation papier PF-703/PF-706) 5 Mag5 (Unité d'alimentation papier PF-703/PF-706) 6 Section de transport vertical sur le côté droit de la machine 7 Section de transport horizontal du Magasin 3 (Unité d'alimentation papier PF-703/PF-706) 8 Section de transport horizontal du Magasin 5 (Unité d'alimentation papier PF-703/PF-706) 9 Section de transport horizontal du Magasin 4 (Unité d'alimentation papier PF-703/PF-706) 10 Admission de la machine 11 Unité tambour 12 Unité de fixation 13 Unité de fixation/Unité recto-verso 14 Unité recto-verso 15 Unité recto-verso 16 Chargeur Auto (section alimentation/sortie) 17 Chargeur Auto (section retournement) 18 Unité de pliage FD-503 19 Empileur grande capacité LS-505 (1re unité) 20 Empileur grande capacité LS-505 (2e unité) 21 Piqueuse à cheval SD-506 22 Unité de finition FS-532 23 Thermorelieur PB-503 24 Mag 6 (Unité d'alimentation papier PF-703/PF-706) 25 Mag 7 (Unité d'alimentation papier PF-703/PF-706) 26 Mag 8 (Unité d'alimentation papier PF-703/PF-706) 27 Section de transport horizontal du Magasin 6 (Unité d'alimentation papier PF-703/PF-706) 28 Section de transport horizontal du Magasin 8 (Unité d'alimentation papier PF-703/PF-706) 29 Section de transport horizontal du Magasin 7 (unité d'alimentation papier PF-703/PF-706) 30 Section convoyeur relais du Magasin 3 (unité d'alimentation papier PF-703) 31 Unité relais RU-510 ineo 1052/1250 10-15 10.2 Si le message [Bourrage papier] s'affiche 10 32 Magasin 1 du Module d'insertion grande capacité MI-PFU 33 Magasin 2 du Module d'insertion grande capacité MI-PFU 34 Magasin 3 du Module d'insertion grande capacité MI-PFU 35 Section convoyeur relais du magasin 1 du Module d'insertion grande capacité MI-PFU 36 Section de transport horizontal du magasin 1 du Module d'insertion grande capacité MI-PFU 37 Section de transport horizontal du magasin 3 du Module d'insertion grande capacité MI-PFU 38 Section de transport horizontal du magasin 2 du Module d'insertion grande capacité MI-PFU 39 Perforeuse multiple GP-501 40 Relieur automatique à anneaux GP-502 41 Unité relais RU-509 45 Empileur grande capacité LS-505 (3e unité) N° Emplacement 10 Si le voyant Bourrage s'allume sur le Thermorelieur PB-503 10-16 ineo 1052/1250 10.3 10.3 Si le voyant Bourrage s'allume sur le Thermorelieur PB-503 Sur une machine dont l'Unité de finition FS-532 est installée sur le côté gauche du Thermorelieur PB-503, le voyant Bourrage s'allume en cas de bourrage papier situé dans la section de transport du thermorelieur lors de l'acheminement du papier vers l'unité de finition. REMARQUE Quand un bourrage papier se produit, veillez à vérifier si le voyant Bourrage du thermorelieur est allumé. Enlevez le papier coincé selon la procédure ci-dessous. 1 Ouvrez le capot de transport du thermorelieur. 2 Tournez la molette [PB14] vers la gauche, et enlevez le papier coincé à l'entrée de la section de transport. 3 Si du papier est coincé à l'entrée de la section de transport, enlevez-le. 4 Vérifiez s'il y a du papier coincé dans l'Unité de finition FS-532. ineo 1052/1250 10-17 10.3 Si le voyant Bourrage s'allume sur le Thermorelieur PB-503 10 5 Vérifiez que le voyant Bourrage est éteint. 10 Affichage clignotant de position des bourrages sur l'Unité de finition FS-532 10-18 ineo 1052/1250 10.4 10.4 Affichage clignotant de position des bourrages sur l'Unité de finition FS-532 L'empileur de l'Unité de finition FS-532 possède une plaque de régulation verticale pour coordonner la position du papier dans le sens alimentation. Suivant la position d'arrêt de la plaque de régulation verticale, l'affichage de position des bourrages peut clignoter pour indiquer que l'opération copie n'est pas disponible. Suivez la procédure ci-dessous pour que l'affichage de position des bourrages ne clignote plus. REMARQUE Si le témoin reste allumé en permanence dans l'affichage de position des bourrages, éliminez le bourrage papier dans l'unité de finition. 1 Ouvrez la porte avant de l'unité de finition pour vérifier que l'affichage de position des bourrages clignote. 2 Tenez la poignée [FS9] pour extraire l'empileur. 3 Tournez la molette [FS8] pour retirer la plaque de régulation verticale de l'empileur. % Placez la plaque de régulation verticale dans l'amplitude matérialisée par la flèche sur l'illustration. Le témoin qui clignote dans l'affichage de position des bourrages s'éteint. ineo 1052/1250 10-19 10.4 Affichage clignotant de position des bourrages sur l'Unité de finition FS-532 10 4 Tenez la poignée [FS9] pour remettre l'empileur dans sa position initiale, puis fermez la porte avant de l'unité de finition. % Si la position de la plaque de régulation verticale interfère avec la machine, l'empileur est bloqué et ne peut pas être remboîté. Tournez la molette [FS8] pour déverrouiller l'empileur et le remettre à sa position d'origine. 10 Si l'onglet [MACHINE] clignote en orange 10-20 ineo 1052/1250 10.5 10.5 Si l'onglet [MACHINE] clignote en orange En cas de dérangement de la machine, un des messages suivants s'affiche dans la zone de message et l'onglet [MACHINE] clignote en orange : - Bourrage papier : [Bourrage papier] - Magasin vide : [Mettre du papier dans le magasin #] - Incompatibilité dans réglage papier : [Charger papier format **** dans le magasin #][Choisir un magasin, y placer le papier correspondant à ce magasin] [Infos] s'affiche en même temps que le message ci-dessus sur l'écran Machine. % Appuyez sur [Infos] et suivez les instructions à l'écran. 10.5.1 Bourrage papier Si un bourrage papier s'est produit pendant qu'une opération d'impression ou de numérisation est en cours et que vous êtes en train de programmer un travail en réserve, la machine cesse de fonctionner et l'onglet [MACHINE] peut clignoter en orange. Si une pression sur [Infos] affiche l'écran Position du bourrage, voir page 10-12. N° Nom Description 1 Onglet [MACHINE] Clignote en orange en cas d'anomalie. 2 [Infos] Apparaît en cas d'anomalie. ineo 1052/1250 10-21 10.5 Si l'onglet [MACHINE] clignote en orange 10 10.5.2 Papier épuisé dans un magasin pendant la réalisation d'un travail de copie Quand le magasin utilisé dans la tâche en cours est vide, la machine arrête immédiatement l'opération de sortie et le message [Charger papier dans magasin #] s'affiche à l'écran. Pour relancer la sortie, deux méthodes sont possibles : - Recharger le magasin en papier - Modifier la sélection de magasin Suivez chaque procédure pour reprendre la tâche de sortie. Recharger le magasin en papier 1 Chargez le papier dans le magasin vide. % Pour plus de détails sur le chargement du papier, voir page 8-9. REMARQUE Veillez à charger du papier identique à celui qui était chargé précédemment. La machine ne peut pas reprendre l'opération d'impression si c'est un format de papier qui est chargé. L'utilisation d'un type de papier ou d'un grammage différent peut causer un bourrage papier ou un incident machine. Quand le magasin est rechargé en papier, le message est remplacé par [Appuyer sur DEPART pour reprendre]. 2 Appuyez sur Départ sur le panneau de contrôle. L'opération de sortie va reprendre en utilisant le magasin réalimenté en papier. 10 Si l'onglet [MACHINE] clignote en orange 10-22 ineo 1052/1250 10.5 Modifier la sélection de magasin 1 Appuyez sur [Infos]. Une boîte de dialogue apparaît. 2 Sélectionnez un magasin disponible, différent ce celui qui est vide. % Le magasin disponible est celui chargé du papier de même format. 3 Appuyez sur [OK]. ineo 1052/1250 10-23 10.5 Si l'onglet [MACHINE] clignote en orange 10 L'écran Machine réapparaît en affichant le message [Appuyer sur [DEPART] pour reprendre]. 4 Appuyez sur Départ sur le panneau de contrôle. Le papier sera introduit à partir du magasin nouvellement sélectionné pour reprendre la tâche de sortie. 10.5.3 Papier épuisé dans un magasin pendant la réalisation d'un travail d'impression Quand le magasin utilisé dans la tâche en cours pilotée depuis un PC est vide, la machine arrête immédiatement l'opération de sortie et affiche le message [Charger papier indiqué dans magasin # Pour plus de détails : [Infos]] s'affiche à l'écran. Pour relancer la sortie, deux méthodes sont possibles : - Recharger le magasin en papier - Modifier la sélection de magasin Suivez chaque procédure pour reprendre la tâche de sortie. Recharger le magasin en papier 1 Chargez le papier dans le magasin vide. % Pour plus de détails sur le chargement du papier, voir page 8-9. REMARQUE Veillez à charger du papier identique à celui qui était chargé précédemment. La machine ne peut pas reprendre l'opération d'impression si c'est un format de papier qui est chargé. L'utilisation d'un type de papier ou d'un grammage différent peut causer un bourrage papier ou un incident machine. Quand le magasin est rechargé en papier, le message est remplacé par [Appuyer sur [DEPART] pour reprendre]. 10 Si l'onglet [MACHINE] clignote en orange 10-24 ineo 1052/1250 10.5 2 Appuyez sur Départ sur le panneau de contrôle. L'opération de sortie va reprendre en utilisant le magasin réalimenté en papier. Modifier la sélection de magasin 1 Appuyez sur [Infos]. Une boîte de dialogue apparaît. 2 Sélectionnez le magasin voulu. L'écran Papier concernant le magasin sélectionné apparaît. ineo 1052/1250 10-25 10.5 Si l'onglet [MACHINE] clignote en orange 10 3 Appuyez sur [OK]. L'écran Machine affiche le message [Appuyer sur DEPART pour reprendre]. 4 Appuyez sur Départ sur le panneau de contrôle. Le papier sera introduit à partir du magasin nouvellement sélectionné pour reprendre la tâche de sortie. 10.5.4 Incompatibilité de format papier pendant un travail d'impression Si le papier chargé dans le magasin à utiliser pour les données d'impression transmises est de format différent de celui spécifié, la machine s'arrête momentanément et affiche le message [Charger papier **** dans magasin # Pour plus de détails : [Infos]]. Pour relancer l'impression, deux méthodes sont possibles : - Chargement du format de papier spécifié dans le magasin - Modification de la sélection de magasin ou du réglage papier du magasin sélectionné Suivez chaque procédure pour reprendre la tâche de sortie. 10 Si l'onglet [MACHINE] clignote en orange 10-26 ineo 1052/1250 10.5 Chargement du format de papier spécifié dans le magasin 1 Chargez du papier au format spécifié dans le magasin. Si un magasin papier est sélectionné, chargez le papier au format spécifié dans le magasin. % Pour plus de détails sur le chargement du papier, voir page 8-9. REMARQUE Chargez le papier au format spécifié. La machine ne peut pas lancer l'opération d'impression si le papier chargé est de format différent. L'utilisation d'un type de papier ou d'un grammage différent peut causer un bourrage papier ou un incident machine. Une fois le papier chargé dans le magasin, appuyez sur [Infos] pour sélectionner ce magasin, puis appuyez sur [OK] ; le message indique maintenant [Appuyer sur DEPART pour reprendre]. 2 Appuyez sur Départ sur le panneau de contrôle. L'opération de sortie va reprendre en utilisant le magasin réalimenté en papier. Modifier la sélection de magasin 1 Appuyez sur [Infos]. Une boîte de dialogue apparaît. 2 Sélectionnez le magasin voulu. REMARQUE Si vous sélectionnez un magasin chargé d'un papier de format plus petit que le format spécifié, une perte d'image est possible. ineo 1052/1250 10-27 10.5 Si l'onglet [MACHINE] clignote en orange 10 3 Appuyez sur [OK]. L'écran Machine affiche le message [Appuyer sur DEPART pour reprendre]. 4 Appuyez sur Départ sur le panneau de contrôle. Le papier sera introduit à partir du magasin nouvellement sélectionné pour reprendre la tâche de sortie. 10.5.5 Incompatibilité de type de papier pendant un travail d'impression Si le papier chargé dans le magasin à utiliser pour les données d'impression transmises est de format différent de celui spécifié, la machine s'arrête momentanément et affiche le message [Mettre papier indiqué dans le magasin #] (si un magasin papier est spécifié) ou [Mettre papier indiqué dans magasin Pour les détails, appuyer sur [Infos]] (si aucun magasin papier n'est spécifié). 10 Si l'onglet [MACHINE] clignote en orange 10-28 ineo 1052/1250 10.5 Pour relancer l'impression, modifiez le réglage papier du magasin. Suivez la procédure ci-dessous pour reprendre le travail de sortie. 1 Appuyez sur [Infos]. Un dialogue indique la sélection actuelle du magasin et les réglages spécifiés pour les données d'impression. 2 Chargez du papier aux réglages spécifiés dans le magasin. Si un magasin papier est spécifié, chargez le papier dans ce magasin. REMARQUE Assurez-vous de charger le type de papier spécifié. La machine ne peut pas lancer l'opération d'impression si le papier chargé est de type différent. L'utilisation d'un type de papier ou d'un grammage différent peut aussi causer un bourrage papier ou un incident machine. 3 Appuyez sur [Paramètres]. L'écran Machine réapparaît. Le message [Appuyer sur DEPART pour reprendre] s'affiche. 4 Appuyez sur Départ sur le panneau de contrôle. La machine va reprendre l'impression. ineo 1052/1250 10-29 10.6 Si le message [Mémoire pleine] s'affiche 10 10.6 Si le message [Mémoire pleine] s'affiche Dans certains modes, cette machine recourt à la mémoire pour assurer une exécution conviviale et fluide des opérations de copie. Si la mémoire installée est inadéquate pour les conditions de travail sélectionnées, la machine s'arrête et affiche l'écran illustré ci-dessous. 10.6.1 Dépassement mémoire dans le travail en cours Quand un dépassement mémoire se produit lors de la numérisation du premier travail, la machine s'arrête immédiatement et affiche l'écran suivant. % Appuyez sur [Arrêt tâche]. Toutes les données numérisées seront effacées. 10.6.2 Dépassement mémoire dans le travail en réserve Quand un dépassement mémoire se produit lors de la numérisation d'une tâche en réserve alors qu'une opération d'impression et en cours, la machine s'arrête immédiatement et affiche l'écran suivant. % Appuyez sur [Arrêt tâche]. Toutes les données numérisées seront effacées. 10 En cas d'affichage du message [Mettre hors tension puis sous tension] 10-30 ineo 1052/1250 10.7 10.7 En cas d'affichage du message [Mettre hors tension puis sous tension] Si le signal électrique du copieur est perturbé pour une raison ou une autre, le message [Mettre hors tension puis sous tension] s'affiche dans la zone de message. Suivez la procédure ci-après. 1 Mettez l'interrupteur secondaire en position OFF (Arrêt) 2 Éteignez l'interrupteur principal REMARQUE Attendez que le message [Extinction en cours/Veuillez ne pas couper l'alim principale] disparaisse, puis mettez l'interrupteur principal sur Arrêt 3 Veuillez patienter plus de 10 secondes. 4 Mettez l'interrupteur principal et l'interrupteur secondaire sur ON (Marche). Activé Désactivé Activé Désactivé ineo 1052/1250 10-31 10.8 En cas d'affichage du message [Pas de réponse de la platine imprimante] 10 10.8 En cas d'affichage du message [Pas de réponse de la platine imprimante] Si un incident se produit sur la carte imprimante, le message [Pas de réponse de la platine imprimante] s'affiche. Suivez la procédure ci-après. 1 Mettez l'interrupteur secondaire en position OFF (Arrêt) 2 Éteignez l'interrupteur principal REMARQUE Attendez que le message [Extinction en cours/Veuillez ne pas couper l'alim principale] disparaisse, puis mettez l'interrupteur principal sur Arrêt 3 Veuillez patienter plus de 10 secondes. 4 Mettez l'interrupteur principal et l'interrupteur secondaire sur ON (Marche). Activé Désactivé Activé Désactivé Si les trous ne sont 10 pas nettement perforés sur la Perforeuse multiple GP-501 10-32 ineo 1052/1250 10.9 10.9 Si les trous ne sont pas nettement perforés sur la Perforeuse multiple GP-501 Si les trous ne sont pas perforés avec la netteté voulue ou ne le sont que partiellement, il est nécessaire de lubrifier l'emporte-pièce équipant la Perforeuse multiple GP-501. Lubrifiez-le à l'endroit illustré ci-dessous. REMARQUE N'utilisez jamais une huile du commerce. Votre technicien SAV vous indiquera l'huile à utiliser dans cette procédure. Si après lubrification, les trous ne sont pas correctement perforés, appliquer de la graisse aux endroits indiqués ci-dessous REMARQUE N'utilisez jamais une graisse du commerce. Votre technicien SAV vous indiquera la graisse à utiliser dans cette procédure. ineo 1052/1250 10-33 10.10 Indication et résolution de bourrage papier dans le Relieur automatique à anneaux GP-502 10 10.10 Indication et résolution de bourrage papier dans le Relieur automatique à anneaux GP-502 En cas de bourrage papier dans le Relieur automatique à anneaux GP-502 pendant une tâche en sortie, le message suivant apparaît sur l'écran de la machine. [*Voir la position de BOURRAGE sur le panneau du relieur à anneaux et retirer le papier coincé.] Le voyant Départ devient orange sur le panneau de contrôle et la machine ne peut pas continuer à fonctionner jusqu'à ce que toutes les zones de bourrage soient dégagées. Veuillez consulter le [MANUEL D'UTILISATION] fourni avec le Relieur automatique à anneaux GP-502 sur les instructions détaillées d'élimination des bourrages papier. 10 Conseils de dépannage 10-34 ineo 1052/1250 10.11 10.11 Conseils de dépannage Symptôme Vérification Remède Machine La machine ne fonctionnera pas même si l'interrupteur secondaire est placé sur ON (Marche). La fiche de la machine est-elle solidement branchée sur la prise murale ? Enfoncez complètement la fiche dans la prise murale. L'interrupteur principal est-il placé sur ON (Marche) ? Normalement, l'interrupteur principal doit être placé sur ON (Marche). Le voyant Éco énergie est-il allumé ? La machine ne peut être allumée à cause de la fonction Programmateur hebdomadaire. Actionnez Interruption programmateur ou consultez votre administrateur. L'écran Identification utilisateur/ compte est-il affiché ? Entrez les informations nécessaires pour l'identification utilisateur/ compte. La copie ne démarre pas. Est-ce que la porte avant/gauche de la machine est ouverte ? Fermez soigneusement la porte avant/gauche de la machine. Le papier de format approprié est-il chargé dans un magasin ? Chargez le papier du format sélectionné en fonction de l'original. Le nombre d'exemplaires à imprimer est-il réglé sur [0] ? Entrez soigneusement le nombre d'exemplaires voulu. Est-ce que la porte avant de l'unité de finition/l'unité de pliage/l'empileur grande capacité est ouverte ? Fermez soigneusement la porte avant de l'unité de finition/l'unité de pliage/l'empileur grande capacité. Le message vous informant que la boîte à déchets toner est pleine est il affiché dans la zone de message ? Ou, le voyant de la boîte à déchets toner sur l'écran Machine s'allumet- il en rouge ? Ouvrez la porte avant/gauche de la machine pour remplacer la boîte à déchets toner. L'image copiée n'est pas nette ou présente des tâches. La vitre d'exposition est-elle propre ? Nettoyez la vitre d'exposition si nécessaire. Le document original est-il propre ? Éliminez les tâches de l'original, le cas échéant. Le réglage de la densité est-il correct ? Spécifiez manuellement la densité de copie pour sélectionner un niveau d'exposition approprié. L'image copiée est trop claire. Le réglage de la densité est-il correct ? Spécifiez manuellement la densité de copie pour sélectionner un niveau d'exposition approprié. Le message [Ajouter du toner] est-il affiché sur l'écran Machine ? Ajouter toner. La qualité de la copie est médiocre. Le papier est-il humide ? Changez le papier s'il y a lieu. Impossible de modifier le taux d'agrandissement. La fonction Décaler & Réduction est-elle sélectionnée ? Annulez le mode Décaler & Réduction. L'opération de copie ne reprend pas après avoir retiré le papier bloqué. Reste-t-il du papier bloqué dans la machine ? Consultez le schéma de la machine sur l'écran pour vérifier s'il y a d'autres indications sur le bourrage papier. Le mode 2->1 ou 2->2 ne peut pas être sélectionné. Le chargeur Auto est-il ouvert ? Fermez complètement le chargeur Auto. ineo 1052/1250 10-35 10.11 Conseils de dépannage 10 Chargeur Auto Lorsque l'identification utilisateur/ compte est active, et que le code d'accès a été entré, il n'est pas possible de réaliser des copies. Le message [Crédit épuisé] est-il affiché ? Contactez l'administrateur. Le chargeur Auto ne peut pas être utilisé une fois que l'on a appuyé sur la touche Auto. Le chargeur Auto est-il légèrement ouvert ? Fermez complètement le chargeur Auto. Le chargeur Auto a-t-il été sélectionné dans le paramétrage initial ? Changez les spécifications papier de l'original pour qu'elles soient conformes au format et au grammage recommandés. Positionnez correctement les originaux dans le chargeur Auto. Impossible d'introduire le document original. Le chargeur Auto est-il légèrement ouvert ? Fermez complètement le chargeur Auto. Le type d'original correspond-il au type spécifié ? Changez les spécifications papier de l'original pour qu'elles soient conformes au format et au grammage recommandés. Les originaux sont-ils correctement chargés ? Positionnez correctement les originaux dans le chargeur Auto. Unité de finition FS-532 L'Unité de finition FS-532 ne fonctionne pas. Reste-t-il du papier coincé à l'intérieur de l'Unité de finition FS-532 ? Recherchez un bourrage papier et corrigez-le si nécessaire. La porte avant de l'unité de finition est-elle entrouverte ? Fermez soigneusement la porte avant de l'unité de finition. Les copies ne sont pas agrafées dans la bonne position (agrafes posées à 90 degrés). La rotation d'image est-elle activée ? Rechargez le papier dans le sens approprié. Les jeux comportent des feuilles de travers qui ne peuvent pas être agrafées à l'emplacement voulu. Le papier n'est-il pas trop gondolé ? Rechargez le papier en retournant la ramette dans le magasin. Fréquent bourrage papier à l'intérieur de l'Unité de finition FS-532. Les guides latéraux du magasin sélectionné sont-ils alignés contre le papier ? Veillez à ce que les guides latéraux soient bien alignés contre le papier dans le magasin à utiliser. Les feuilles imprimées ne peuvent pas être agrafées à la position voulue. Le papier n'est-il pas trop gondolé ? Rechargez le papier en retournant la ramette dans le magasin. Les feuilles imprimées ne peuvent pas être transférées correctement vers le bac auxiliaire. Les feuilles touchent-elles le bord du bac auxiliaire ? Libérez temporairement le verrou du bac auxiliaire pour le relever légèrement. En mode d'agrafage, les copies ne sont pas agrafées. Le message [Sortir empileur de l'unité d'agrafage puis, placer des agrafes ds l'agrafeuse] est-il affiché dans la zone de message ? Ou, le voyant Remettre agrafes sur l'écran Machine s'allume-t-il en rouge ? Sortez l'empileur de l'unité d'agrafage et remettez des agrafes. Le message [La corbeille de l'agrafeuse est pleine/Veuillez vider la corbeille] est-il affiché ? Sortez l'empileur de l'unité d'agrafage et éliminez les débris d'agrafes. Symptôme Vérification Remède 10 Conseils de dépannage 10-36 ineo 1052/1250 10.11 Si le problème persiste malgré la mise en oeuvre des solutions proposées ci-dessus, contactez votre technicien SAV. Unité de finition FS-532 L'unité de finition équipée de la Piqueuse à cheval SD-510 n'agrafe pas les copies avec la fonction Pliage & Agrafage. Le message [Sortir module à cheval de l'agrafeuse et mettre agrafes dans agrafeuse] est-il affiché dans la zone de message ? Ou, le voyant Remettre agrafes sur l'écran Machine s'allume-t-il en rouge ? Retirez l'unité de piqûre de la piqueuse à cheval et remettez des agrafes. L'unité de finition équipée de l'Unité de perforation PK-522 ne perfore pas les copies même en mode perforation. Le message [Bac déchets perfo plein/Vider bac déchets SVP] est-il affiché ? Ou, le voyant de la corbeille de perforation sur l'écran Machine s'allume-t-il en rouge ? Ouvrez la porte avant de l'unité de finition et sortez la corbeille de perforation pour la vider. Piqueuse à cheval SD-506 En mode massicotage, il n'est pas possible de trancher les feuilles imprimées. Le voyant Corb. massicot pleine s'allume-t-il sur l'écran Machine ? Videz la corbeille de déchets de la Piqueuse à cheval SD-506. Thermorelieur PB-503 En mode Thermoreliure, les feuilles imprimées ne peuvent pas être reliées. La porte avant, le capot du bac du thermorelieur, ou le couvercle de la trémie de colle du Thermorelieur PB-503 est-il ouvert ? Fermez soigneusement la porte avant, le capot du bac du thermorelieur, ou le couvercle de la trémie de colle du Thermorelieur PB-503. Perforeuse multiple GP-501 La perforeuse multiple réglée en mode perforation ne perfore pas les copies. Le message [La corbeille de la Perforeuse multiple est pleine. Vider la corbeille] est-il affiché ? Ou, le voyant de la corbeille de perforation sur l'écran Machine s'allume-t-il en rouge ? Ouvrez la porte avant de la perforeuse multiple et sortez la corbeille de perforation pour la vider. Relieur automatique à anneaux GP-502 Les feuilles imprimées ne peuvent pas être reliées à l'aide de la fonction reliure anneaux. Le message [Bac déchets perfo relieur anneaux plein Vider bac déchets SVP] s'affiche-t-il ? Ou, le voyant de la corbeille de perforation sur l'écran Machine s'allume-t-il en rouge ? Ouvrez la porte avant du relieur à anneaux et sortez la corbeille de perforation pour la vider. Unité d'authentification (Type Carte IC) AU-201 Le voyant LED d'état ne s'allume pas en vert même après connexion du câble USB de l'unité d'authentification (type de carte IC) AU-201 au port USB de la machine. Un mauvais fonctionnement du port USB de la machine est une cause possible. Mettez l'interrupteur principal de la machine sur arrêt, puis débranchez le câble USB de l'unité d'authentification (type de carte IC) AU-201 du port USB de la machine. Rebranchez-le, puis attendez au moins 10 secondes avant de remettre l'interrupteur principal sur Marche. Carte IC Les cartes IC ne peuvent pas être authentifiées. L'unité d'authentification (type de carte IC) AU-201 est-elle connectée au port USB de la machine ? Branchez soigneusement le câble USB de l'unité d'authentification (type de carte IC) AU-201 au port USB de la machine. L'utilisation du port USB est-elle activée sur la machine ? Contactez l'administrateur. Symptôme Vérification Remède 11 Réglage ineo 1052/1250 11-3 11.1 Présentation fonctionnelle 11 11 Réglage 11.1 Présentation fonctionnelle Appuyez sur [Réglage] sur l'écran Machine pour afficher l'écran Menu de réglage. Cet écran propose divers réglages concernant les opérations de numérisation et de finition. Si la machine est équipée d'une unité de finition, des réglages spécifiques à la fonction sont également proposés. Procédez à des réglages, y compris le réglage de la densité irrégulière de l'image causée par le tambour ou le nettoyage des coronas de charge. 11.1.1 Liste des éléments du Menu de réglage Élément de menu/Description Options de réglage 01 Réglage machine 01 Réglage restitution 01 Restit. verti. écriture-RECTO Règle l'agrandissement dans le sens du défilement du papier dans le moteur de l'imprimante. Plage de réglage : -10 (court) à 10 (long) (1 pas = 0,05%) 02 Restit. verti. écriture-VERSO Règle le niveau de décalage d'agrandissement dans le sens de défilement du papier du moteur imprimante. Condition préalable : Réglage Restitution Horizontale (recto) terminé. Objets de réglage : Magasin 1, Magasin 2 (bacs principaux) Mag 3 à 8 (Unité d'alimentation papier PF-703/PF-706) Plage de réglage : -10 (court) à 0 (long) (1 pas = 0,05%) 03 Restit. horiz. écriture-RECTO Régle l'agrandissement dans le sens transversal dans le moteur de l'imprimante. Plage de réglage : -10 (court) à 10 (long) (1 pas = 0,05%) 04 Restit. horiz. écriture-VERSO Règle le niveau de décalage d''agrandissement dans le sens transversal du papier du moteur imprimante. Condition préalable : Réglage Restitution Verticale Imprimante (recto 1) terminé Objets de réglage : Magasin 1, Magasin 2 (bacs principaux) Mag 3 à 8 (Unité d'alimentation papier PF-703/PF-706) Plage de réglage : -10 (court) à 0 (long) (1 pas = 0,05%) 11 Présentation fonctionnelle 11-4 ineo 1052/1250 11.1 02 Réglage temporisation 01 Tempo. synchro. écriture-RECTO Règle la position de l'image du bord avant dans le sens de passage du papier dans le moteur de l'imprimante. Condition préalable : réglage restitution terminé. Objets de réglage : Tous les magasins, Magasin 1, Magasin 2 (bac principal) Décalage Mag 3 à Décalage Mag 8 (Unité d'alimentation papier PF-703/PF-706) Plage de réglage : -30 (court) à 30 (long) (1 pas = 0,1 mm) 02 Tempo. synchro.écriture-VERSO Règle le bord avant du verso dans le sens de défilement du papier du moteur imprimante. Condition préalable : réglage restitution terminé. Objets de réglage : Magasin 1, Magasin 2 (bac principal) Décalage Mag 3 à Décalage Mag 8 (Unité d'alimentation papier PF-703/PF-706) Plage de réglage : -30 (court) à 30 (long) (1 pas = 0,1 mm) 03 Tempo. synchro. lecture vitre Réglez la position de début de numérisation si vous utilisez la vitre d'exposition pour numériser l'original. Condition préalable : réglage restitution terminé. Plage de réglage : -40 (en avant) à 40 (en arrière) (1 pas = 0,1 mm) 04 Tempo. synchro. lecture ADF Règle la position de départ de l'image de l'original numérisé sur le chargeur Auto. Condition préalable : réglage restitution terminé. Objets de réglage : Recto, verso Plage de réglage : -50 (en avant) à 50 (en arrière) (1 pas = 0,1 mm) 03 Centrage écriture 01 Réglage centrage écriture Réglez la position de l'image dans le sens transversal dans le moteur de l'imprimante. Condition préalable : Réglage Restitution Verticale Imprimante (recto/verso) terminé. Plage de réglage : -64 (recto) à 63 (verso) (1 pas = 0,1 mm) 04 Réglage LED (LPH) 01 Réglage décalage éléments LED Règle l'espacement (39 points) entre les éléments de la tête d'impression à LED. Plage de réglage : -8 (plus clair) à 8 (plus foncé) (1 pas = 1,0%) Sélection des mires test internes : Gris foncé, Gris clair Traçage de lignes : Activé, Désactivé Décaler tout 02 Réglages finition 01 Réglage Agrafeuse (Principal) 01 Réglage Position Agrafe Permet de régler le pas d'agrafage en 2 points et les positions des agrafes dans l'agrafeuse. Objets de réglage : Pas 2 Positions (120 mm), Pas 2 Positions (140 mm), Pas 2 Positions (165 mm), Arrière en diagonale, En arrière parallèle, À l'avant parallèle Plage de réglage : -5 (large) à 5 (étroit) (1 pas = 1,0 mm) 02 Réglage Largeur Papier Agrafé Règle la largeur de la plaque de régulation du jeu à agrafer dans l'Unité de finition FS-532. Procéder au réglage si la pile de papier de sortie sur le bac principal est irrégulière en sortie directe. Objets de réglage : Pleine page, 11 e 17 w, A3 w, B4 w, 8,5 e 14 w, A4 w, 8,5 e 11 w, 8,5 e 11 v, A4 v, B5 v, A5 v, 5,5 e 8,5 v, 8 e 13 w, 8,125 e 13,25 w, 8,5 e 13 w, 8,25 e 13 w, 8K w, 16K v, 16K w, 12 x 18 w, A3W w, B4W w, A4W v, A4W w, B5W v, A5W v, 12 e 18W w, 11 e 17W w, 8,5 e 11W v, 8,5 e 11W w, 5,5 e 8,5W v, Personnel, SRA3 w, SRA4 w, 9 e 11 w Plage de réglage : -20 (large) à 20 (étroit) (1 pas = 0,1 mm) Élément de menu/Description Options de réglage ineo 1052/1250 11-5 11.1 Présentation fonctionnelle 11 03 Réglage Plaque Alignement FD Règle l'unité d'alignement vertical du lot à agrafer dans l'Unité de finition FS-532. Objets de réglage : Pleine page, A4 v, B5 v, A5 v, 8,5 e 11 v, 16K w, 5,5 e 8,5 v, A4W v, B5W v, A5W v, 8,5 e 11W v, 5,5 e 8,5W v, Personnel, 9 e 11 w Plage de réglage : -50 (large) à 50 (étroit) (1 pas = 0,1 mm) 04 Larg. papier unit. guid sortie Règle le pas d'alignement de l'unité de guide sortie (avant et arrière) dans l'Unité de finition FS-532. Procéder au réglage si la pile de papier de sortie dans le bac de sortie est irrégulière en sortir non agrafée. Objets de réglage : Pleine page, 11 e 17 w, A3 w, B4 w, 8,5 e 14 w, A4 w, 8,5 e 11 w, 8,5 e 11 v, A4 v, B5 v, A5 v, 5,5 e 8,5 v, 8 e 13 w, 8,125 e 13,25 w, 8,5 e 13 w, 8,25 e 13 w, 8K w, 16K v, 16K w, 12 e 18 w, A3W w, B4W w, A4W v, A4W w, B5W v, A5W v, 12 e 18W w, 11 e 17W w, 8,5 e 11W v, 8,5 e 11W w, 5,5 e 8,5W v, Personnel, SRA3 w, SRA4 w, 9 e 11 w Plage de réglage : -50 (large) à 50 (étroit) (1 pas = 0,1 mm) 05 Régl. Descente Palette Enroul. Permet de régler la descente de la palette enrouleuse. Objets de réglage : Pleine page, 11 e 17 w, A3 w, B4 w, 8,5 e 14 w, A4 w, 8,5 e 11 w, 8,5 e 11 v, A4 v, B5 v, A5 v, 5,5 e 8,5 v, 8 e 13 w, 8,125 e 13,25 w, 8,5 e 13 w, 8,25 e 13 w, 8K w, 16K v, 16K w, 12 e 18 w, A3W w, B4W w, A4W v, A4W w, B5W v, A5W v, 12 e 18W w, 11 e 17W w, 8,5 e 11W v, 8,5 e 11W w, 5,5 e 8,5W v, Personnel, SRA3 w, SRA4 w, 9 e 11 w Plage de réglage : -10 (moins) à 10 (plus) (1 pas = 0,2 mm) 06 Opération pr fonct. Enrouler Sélectionner l'opération pour fonction Enrouler. Auto, Activé ; Désactivé 07 Opération pince supérieure Sélectionner l'opération pour fonction Enrouler. Auto, Activé ; Désactivé 08 Opération Alignement sortie Sélectionner l'opération pour l'alignement sortie. Auto, Activé ; Désactivé 02 Réglage Agrafeuse (Pliage) Ce point de menu doit être affiché et devenir configurable sur l'Unité de finition FS-532 équipée de la Piqueuse à cheval SD-510. 01 Réglage Espace Pliage&Agraf. Permet de régler l'espacement entre agrafes sur la Piqueuse à cheval SD-510. Procéder à ce réglage si l'espacement entre agrafes se trouve en dehors de la plage autorisée. Objets de réglage : Pleine page, SRA3 w, A3 w, B4 w, SRA4 w, A4 w, B5 w, 12 e 18 w, 11 e 17 w, 8,5 e 14 w, 8,5 e 11 w, 8,125 e 13,25 w, 8,5 e 13 w, 8,25 e 13 w, 8 e 13 w, 8K w, 16K w, A3W w, B4W w, A4W w, B5W w, 12 e 18W w, 11 e 17W w, 8,5 e 11W w, Personn. (Moyen), Personn. (Grand) Plage réglable : -300 (étroit) à 300 (large) (1 pas = 0,1 mm) 02 Régl. Larg. Pap. Pliage&Agraf Réglez l'espacement de la plaque de régulation de la Piqueuse à cheval SD-510 si les feuilles pliées en deux ou trois ne sont pas correctement alignées. Objets de réglage : Pleine page, SRA3 w, A3 w, B4 w, SRA4 w, A4 w, B5 w, 12 e 18 w, 11 e 17 w, 8,5 e 14 w, 8,5 e 11 w, 8,125 e 13,25 w, 8,5 e 13 w, 8,25 e 13 w, 8 e 13 w, 8K w, 16K w, A3W w, B4W w, A4W w, B5W w, 12 e 18W w, 11 e 17W w, 8,5 e 11W w, Personn. (Moyen), Personn. (Grand) Plage de réglage : -50 (étroit) à 50 (large) (1 pas = 0,1 mm) Élément de menu/Description Options de réglage 11 Présentation fonctionnelle 11-6 ineo 1052/1250 11.1 03 Régl. Pos. Agraf. Pliag&Agraf. Réglez la position d'agrafage de la Piqueuse à cheval SD-510. Objets de réglage : Pleine page, SRA3 w, A3 w, B4 w, SRA4 w, A4 w, B5 w, 12 e 18 w, 11 e 17 w, 8,5 e 14 w, 8,5 e 11 w, 8,125 e 13,25 w, 8,5 e 13 w, 8,25 e 13 w, 8 e 13 w, 8K w, 16K w, A3W w, B4W w, A4W w, B5W w, 12 e 18W w, 11 e 17W w, 8,5 e 11W w, Personn. (Moyen), Personn. (Grand) Plage de réglage : Plié avec (haut de la feuille de sortie) -50 (court) à 50 (long) (1 pas = 0,1 mm) 04 Régl. Pos. Pli Pliage&Agraf. Réglez la position de pliage en deux de la fonction Pliage & Piqûre de la Piqueuse à cheval SD-510. Procédez à ce réglage si la position de pliage en deux ne se trouve pas dans la plage de tolérance. Objets de réglage : Pleine page, SRA3 w, A3 w, B4 w, SRA4 w, A4 w, B5 w, 12 e 18 w, 11 e 17 w, 8,5 e 14 w, 8,5 e 11 w, 8,125 e 13,25 w, 8,5 e 13 w, 8,25 e 13 w, 8 e 13 w, 8K w, 16K w, A3W w, B4W w, A4W w, B5W w, 12 e 18W w, 11 e 17W w, 8,5 e 11W w, Personn. (Moyen), Personn. (Grand) Plage de réglage : Plié avec (haut de la feuille de sortie) -50 (court) à 50 (long) (1 pas = 0,1 mm) 05 Régl. Pos. Pli Pliage en deux Réglez la position de pliage en deux de la Piqueuse à cheval SD-510. Objets de réglage : Pleine page, SRA3 w, A3 w, B4 w, SRA4 w, A4 w, B5 w, 12 e 18 w, 11 e 17 w, 8,5 e 14 w, 8,5 e 11 w, 8,125 e 13,25 w, 8,5 e 13 w, 8,25 e 13 w, 8 e 13 w, 8K w, 16K w, A3W w, B4W w, A4W w, B5W w, 12 e 18W w, 11 e 17W w, 8,5 e 11W w, Personn. (Moyen), Personn. (Grand) Plage réglable : Plié avec (haut de la feuille de sortie) -50 (court) à 50 (long) (1 pas = 0,1 mm) 06 Réglage pliage en 3 01 Réglage Position Pliage en 3 Réglez les positions du 1er et du 2e pli pour le pliage en 3 dans la Piqueuse à cheval SD-510. Procédez à ce réglage si chaque position de pliage pour le pliage en 3 ne se trouve pas dans la plage de tolérance. Objets de réglage : A4 w, 8,5 x 11 w Plage réglable : Premier pli : -50 (court) à 50 (long) (1 pas = 0,1 mm) Deuxième pli : -50 (court) à 50 (long) (1 pas = 0,1 mm) 02 Réglage Plaque Pliage Double Réglez la plage de pliage double dans la piqueuse à cheval. Plus profondément en cas de grand décalage du jeu plié en double. Objets de réglage : A4 w, 8,5 x 11 w Plage réglable : -50 (peu profond) à 50 (profond) (1 pas = 0,1 mm) 07 Réglage Force Pliage en 2 Réglez la durée de pression du rouleau sur le point de pliage du livret. La valeur entrée représente le nombre de secondes. Une pression longue ralentit la productivité. Plage réglable : 0 à 10 (1 pas = 1 seconde) 03 Réglage Agrafeuse (Perfo) Ce point de menu doit être affiché et devenir configurable sur l'Unité de finition FS-532 équipée de l'Unité de perforation PK-522. 01 Régl. Position Vert. (CD) Corrigez l'alignement au centre du papier et au niveau des perforations, pour chaque format de papier. Objets de réglage : Pleine page, A3 w, B4 w, SRA4 w, A4 w, A4 v, B5 v, A5 v, 12 e 18 w, 11 e 17 w, 8,5 e 14 w, 8,5 e 11 w, 8,5 e 11 v, 8,125 e 13,25 w, 8,5 e 13 w, 8,25 e 13 w, 8 e 13 w, 8K w, 16K v, 5,5 e 8,5 v, 16K w, 9 e 11 w Plage réglable : -50 (vers l'avant) à 50 (vers l'arrière) (1 pas = 0,1 mm) Élément de menu/Description Options de réglage ineo 1052/1250 11-7 11.1 Présentation fonctionnelle 11 02 Régl. Position Horiz. (FD) Réglez la distance depuis le bord de la feuille imprimée jusqu'au centre des perforations. Objets de réglage : Pleine page, A3 w, B4 w, SRA4 w, A4 w, A4 v, B5 v, A5 v, 12 e 18 w, 11 e 17 w, 8,5 e 14 w, 8,5 e 11 w, 8,5 e 11 v, 8,125 e 13,25 w, 8,5 e 13 w, 8,25 e 13 w, 8 e 13 w, 8K w, 16K v, 5,5 e 8,5 v, 16K w, 9 e 11 w Plage réglable : -50 (proche) à 50 (loin) (1 pas = 0,1 mm) 03 Réglage synchronisation Si la position der perforation n'est pas parallèle au bord du papier, contrôler le détuilage et le froissage du papier en réglant la boucle de papier du rouleau de synchronisation. Objets de réglage : Sortie inversée, Alimentation unité R/V Plage réglable : -50 (court) à 50 (long) (1 pas = 0,1 mm) 04 Réglage Agrafeuse (Bac insert.) Ce point de menu doit être affiché et pouvoir être configuré sur l'Unité de finition FS-532 équipée du Bac d'insertion PI-502. 01 Réglage synchronisation PI Si le papier du magasin supérieur ou inférieur du Module d'insertion PI-502 est tuilé, plissé ou coincé, gondolé, réglez la boucle de papier du rouleau de synchronisation. Objets de réglage : Bac d'insertion supérieur, Bac d'insertion inférieur Plage réglable : -5 (court) à 5 (long) (1 pas = 1,0 mm) 05 Unité perforation (Plieuse) 01 Alignement perforation Réglez la largeur de chaque format papier pour l'unité de pliage. Objets de réglage : Pleine page, 11 e 17 w, A3 w, B4 w, 8,5 e 14 w, A4 w, 8,5 e 11 w, B5 w, 8,5 e 11 v, A4 v, A5 w, B5 v, A5 v, 5,5 e 8,5 v, 8 e 13 w, 8,125 e 13,25 w, 8,5 e 13 w, 8,25 e 13 w, 8K w, 16K v, 16K w, 12 e 18 w, SRA4 w, 9 e 11 v Plage réglable : -20 (Étroit) à 20 (Large) (1 pas = 0,1 mm) 02 Réglage position latérale perforation Réglez la position verticale des perforations réalisées par l'unité de pliage. Réglez la distance entre les perforations et le bord du papier. Objets de réglage : 2 trous : Pleine page, 11 e 17 w, A3 w, B4 w, 8,5 e 14 w, A4 w, 8,5 e 11 w, B5 w, 8,5 e 11 v, A4 v, A5 w, B5 v, A5 v, 5,5 e 8,5 v, 8 e 13 w, 8,125 e 13,25 w, 8,5 e 13 w, 8,25 e 13 w, 8K w, 16K v, 16K w, 12 e 18 w, SRA4 w, 9 e 11 v 3 trous : Pleine page, 11 e 17 w, A3 w, B4 w, 8,5 e 11 w, A4 v, B5 v, 8K w, 16K v, 12 e 18 w, 9 e 11 v Plage réglable : -40 (Large) à 40 (Étroit) (1 pas = 0,1 mm) 06 Unité pliage (Plieuse) 01 Position verticale perforat Réglez la position de pliage en 2 déterminée par la plieuse multiple. Objets de réglage : Pleine page, 11 e 17 w, A3 w, B4 w, 8,5 e 14 w, A4 w, 8,5 e 11 w, 8K w, 12 e 18 w, Personn., SRA4 w Plage réglable : -50 (court) à 50 (long) (1 pas = 0,1 mm) 02 Réglage pliage roulé Réglez la position de pliage en roulé déterminée par la plieuse multiple. Lors du réglage du 1er et du 2e pli, commencez impérativement par le réglage du 2e pli. Objets de réglage : Pleine page, 11 e 17 w, A3 w, B4 w, 8,5 e 14 w, A4 w, 8,5 e 11 w, 8K w, 12 e 18 w, Personnel, SRA4 w Plage réglable : -50 (court) à 50 (long) (1 pas = 0,1 mm) Élément de menu/Description Options de réglage 11 Présentation fonctionnelle 11-8 ineo 1052/1250 11.1 03 Réglage pliage en accordéon Réglez la position de pliage en accordéon déterminée par la plieuse multiple. Lors du réglage du 1er et du 2e pli, commencez impérativement par le réglage du 2e pli. Objets de réglage : Pleine page, 11 e 17 w, A3 w, B4 w, 8,5 e 14 w, A4 w, 8,5 e 11 w, 8K w, 12 e 18 w, Personn., SRA4 w Plage réglable : -50 (court) à 50 (long) (1 pas = 0,1 mm) 04 Réglage pliage économique Réglez les positions de pli pour le mode Pliage économique déterminées par la plieuse multiple. Lors du réglage du 1er et du 2ème pli, commencez impérativement par le réglage du 1er pli. Objets de réglage : Pleine page, 11 e 17 w, A3 w, B4 w, 8,5 e 14 w, A4 w, 8,5 e 11 w, 8K w, 12 e 18 w, Personn., SRA4 w Plage réglable : -50 (court) à 50 (long) (1 pas = 0,1 mm) 05 Réglage pliage en Z Réglez la position de pliage en z déterminée par la plieuse multiple. Lors du réglage du 1er et du 2ème pli, commencez impérativement par le réglage du 1er pli. Objets de réglage : Pleine page, 11 e 17 w, A3 w, B4 w, 8,5 e 14 w, A4 w, 8,5 e 11 w, 8K w, 12 e 18 w, Personn., SRA4 w Plage réglable : -50 (court) à 50 (long) (1 pas = 0,1 mm) 06 Réglage pliage portefeuille Réglez la position de pliage en portefeuille déterminée par la plieuse multiple. Veillez à commencer par le réglage du premier pli. Objets de réglage : Pleine page, 11 e 17 w, A3 w, B4 w, 8,5 e 14 w, A4 w, 8,5 e 11 w, 8K w, 12 e 18 w, Personn., SRA4 w Plage réglable : Premier pli/3e pli : -50 (court) à 50 (long) (1 pas = 0,1 mm) Deuxième pli : -50 (court) à 50 (long) (1 pas = 0,1 mm) 07 Empileur 01 Alignement perforation Réglez la position des plaques de réglage si les feuilles produites présentent un alignement incorrect dans le sens transversal sur le bac de l'empileur. Objets de réglage : Empileur N° 1, Empileur N° 2, Empileur N° 3 Plage réglable : -20 (étroit) à 20 (large) (1 as = 0,1 mm) 02 Taquage longueur papier Réglez la position de la butée avant si les feuilles produites présentent un alignement incorrect dans le sens de passage du papier sur le bac de l'empileur. Objets de réglage : Empileur N° 1, Empileur N° 2, Empileur N° 3 Plage réglable : -20 (étroit) à 20 (large) (1 pas = 0,1 mm) 08 Réglage Piqueuse à cheval 01 Réglage centrage de l'agrafage Réglez la position centrale des agrafes déterminée par la piqueuse à cheval. Plage réglable : -20 (droit) à 20 (gauche) (1 pas = 0,1 mm) 02 Taquage jeu agrafé Réglez l'espace entre les plaques de régulation de la piqueuse à cheval. Objets de réglage : Pleine page, 11 e 17 w, A3 w, B4 w, 8,5 e 14 w, A4 w, 8,5 e 11 w, B5 w, 8 e 13 w, 8,125 e 13,25 w, 8,5 e 13 w, 8,25 e 13 w, 8K w, 16K w, 12 e 18 w, A3W w, B4W w, A4W w, B5W w, 12 e 18W w, 11 e 17W w, 8,5 e 11W w, Personn., SRA3 w, SRA4 w Plage réglable : -20 (étroit) à 20 (large) (1 pas = 0,1 mm) 03 Espacement entre agrafes Réglez l'espacement entre les agrafes déterminé par la piqueuse à cheval. Objets de réglage : Pleine page, 11 e 17 w, A3 w, B4 w, 8,5 e 14 w, A4 w, 8,5 e 11 w, B5 w, 8 e 13 w, 8,125 e 13,25 w, 8,5 e 13 w, 8,25 e 13 w, 8K w, 16K w, 12 e 18 w, A3W w, B4W w, A4W w, B5W w, 12 e 18W w, 11 e 17W w, 8,5 e 11W w, Personn., SRA3 w, SRA4 w Plage réglable : -20 (étroit) à 20 (large) (1 pas = 0,1 mm) Élément de menu/Description Options de réglage ineo 1052/1250 11-9 11.1 Présentation fonctionnelle 11 04 Réglage pliage en 2 Réglez la position de pliage en 2 déterminée par la piqueuse à cheval. Objets de réglage : Pleine page, 11 e 17 w, A3 w, B4 w, 8,5 e 14 w, A4 w, 8,5 e 11 w, B5 w, 8 e 13 w, 8,125 e 13,25 w, 8,5 e 13 w, 8,25 e 13 w, 8K w, 16K w, 12 e 18 w, A3W w, B4W w, A4W w, B5W w, 12 e 18W w, 11 e 17W w, 8,5 e 11W w, Personn., SRA3 w, SRA4 w, Papier MI Plage réglable : -50 (court) à 50 (long) (1 pas = 0,1 mm) 05 Pliage en 3 multiple Réglez la position de pliage en 3 déterminée par la piqueuse à cheval. Lors du réglage du 1er et du 2ème pli, commencez impérativement par le réglage du 1er pli. Objets de réglage : Pleine page, A4 w, 8,5 e 11 w Plage réglable : Premier pli : -100 (court) à 50 (long) (1 pas = 0,1 mm) Deuxième pli : -100 (court) à 100 (long) (1 pas = 0,1 mm) 06 Largeur feuille pour pliage Modifiez la largeur de réglage si les feuilles pliées en 2 ou en 3 présentent un alignement incorrect. Objets de réglage : Pleine page, 11 e 17 w, A3 w, B4 w, 8,5 e 14 w, A4 w, 8,5 e 11 w, B5 w, 8 e 13 w, 8,125 e 13,25 w, 8,5 e 13 w, 8,25 e 13 w, 8K w, 16K w, 12 e 18 w, A3W w, B4W w, A4W w, B5W w, 12 e 18W w, 11 e 17W w, 8,5 e 11W w, Personn., SRA3 w, SRA4 w, Papier MI Plage réglable : -50 (étroit) à 50 (large) (1 pas = 0,1 mm) 07 Massicotage Réglez la largeur de massicotage. La largeur de massicotage devrait être supérieure à 2,0 mm, sinon l'opération de massicotage risque de ne pas aboutir correctement. Objets de réglage : Pleine page, 11 e 17 w, A3 w, B4 w, 8,5 e 14 w, A4 w, 8,5 e 11 w, B5 w, 8 e 13 w, 8,125 e 13,25 w, 8,5 e 13 w, 8,25 e 13 w, 8K w, 16K w, 12 e 18 w, A3W w, B4W w, A4W w, B5W w, 12 e 18W w, 11 e 17W w, 8,5 e 11W w, Personn., SRA3 w, SRA4 w Plage réglable : -400 (étroit) à 400 (large) (1 pas = 0,1 mm) 08 Réglage butée lame massicot La fréquence des opérations de massicotage peut entraîner la détérioration de la butée et provoquer des imperfections de massicotage. Réglez la butée de lame de la piqueuse à cheval SD-506 régulièrement. 01 Sélect. compteur déplacement Indique le nombre de coupe entre chaque avance de la butée de lame de la piqueuse à cheval. 700, 500, 300 02 Sélect. du pas de déplacement Indique le pas pour l'avance de la butée de lame de la piqueuse à cheval. 1,0, 1,5, 2,0 09 Thermorelieur 01 Massicotage couverture Réglez la largeur de massicotage sur le bord avant de la page de couverture de droite. Pour aligner les bords avant droit et gauche de la couverture, commencez par le réglage de la position du bord avant de la couverture. Objets de réglage : Magasin thermorelieur, Bac principal (y compris magasin d'insertion) Plage réglable : -128 (court) à 127 (long) (1 pas = 0,1 mm) 02 Position bord avant couvert. Réglez la position du bord avant position de la page de couverture gauche déterminée par rapport au corps du document. Les formats auxquels cette section fait référence sont ceux des corps de document correspondant à des formats de couverture. Objets de réglage : Bac principal : Pleine page, 8,5 e 11 v, A4 v, A5 w, B5 v, A5 v, 5,5 e 8,5 v, Personnel, 16K v, 8,5 e 11W v, 5,5 e 8,5W v, A4W v, A5W v, B5W v Mag. thermorelieur : Pleine page, 8,5 e 11 v, A4 v, A5 w, B5 v, A5 v, 5,5 e 8,5 v, Personn., 16K v, 8,5 e 11W v, 5,5 e 8,5W v, A4W v, A5W v, B5W v Plage réglable : -128 (court) à 127 (long) (1 pas = 0,1 mm) Élément de menu/Description Options de réglage 11 Présentation fonctionnelle 11-10 ineo 1052/1250 11.1 03 Position angle façonnage dos. Réglez le traitement du dos de la reliure formée par les feuilles de couverture. Objets de réglage : Haut/Bas (Avant), Haut/Bas (Arrière) Plage réglable : -128 (bas : arrondi) à 127 (haut : carré), 1 pas = 0,1 mm 04 Positionde de départ encollage Réglez la position à laquelle l'encollage doit commencer sur le corps de document. Les formats auxquels cette section fait référence sont ceux des corps de document correspondant à des formats de couverture. Objets de réglage : En avant : Pleine page, 8,5 e 11 v, A4 v, B5 v, A5 v, 5,5 e 8,5 v, 16K v, A4W v, B5W v, A5W v, 8,5 e 11W v, 5,5 e 8,5W v, Personn. Verso : Pleine page, 8,5 e 11 v, A4 v, B5 v, A5 v, 5,5 e 8,5 v, 16K v, A4W v, B5W v, A5W v, 8,5 e 11W v, 5,5 e 8,5W v, Personn. Plage réglable : -128 (plus tôt) à 127 (plus tard) (1 pas = 0,1 mm) 05 Position arrêt de encollage Réglez la position à laquelle l'encollage doit finir sur le corps de document. Les formats auxquels cette section fait référence sont ceux des corps de document correspondant à des formats de couverture. Objets de réglage : En avant : Pleine page, 8,5 e 11 v, A4 v, B5 v, A5 v, 5,5 e 8,5 v, 16K v, A4W v, B5W v, A5W v, 8,5 e 11W v, 5,5 e 8,5W v, Personn. Verso : Pleine page, 8,5 e 11 v, A4 v, B5 v, A5 v, 5,5 e 8,5 v, 16K v, A4W v, B5W v, A5W v, 8,5 e 11Wv, 5,5 x 8,5Wv, Personn. Plage réglable : -128 (plus tôt) à 127 (plus tard) (1 pas = 0,1 mm) 06 Réglage de la température Réserve colle - Haut : La machine fournit les pastilles de colle dès qu'elle détecte que la température de la surface de la solution surface est inférieure au point de consigne. Il est recommandé que ce point soit réglé à une température supérieure, en cas d'utilisation dans les environnements thermiques susceptibles de fausser la détection sur la machine. Réserve colle - Moyen Réglez la température à atteindre après le préchauffage, et initier la rotation de l'applicateur. Un réglage élevé de température permettra stabiliser plus rapidement la température de la colle. Réserve colle - Bas : Réglez la température de régulation de la résistance thermique. Température faible : Augmente la viscosité de la colle Température élevée : Diminue la viscosité de la colle Applicateur colle : Réglez la température de régulation de la résistance du rouleau applicateur. Cet élément contribue également au chauffage de la colle. Température faible : Augmente la viscosité de la colle Température élevée : Diminue la viscosité de la colle Réserve colle - Haut : Initiale : 132°C Recommandée : 128 à 136°C Réserve colle - Moyen Initiale : 145°C Recommandée : 140 à 145°C Réserve colle - Bas : Initiale : 185°C Recommandée : 180 à 190°C Applicateur colle : Initiale : 165°C Recommandée : 160 à 170°C (1 pas = 1 °C) 07 Taquage feuilles sens passage Changez la largeur de réglage s'il n'est pas possible d'aligner les feuilles dans la section Bac temporaire. Les formats auxquels cette section fait référence sont ceux des corps de document correspondant à des formats de couverture. Objets de réglage : Pleine page, 8,5 e 11 v, A4 v, B5 v, A5 v, 5,5 e 8,5 v, 16K v, A4W v, B5W v, A5W v, 8,5 e 11W v, 5,5 e 8,5W v, Personn. Plage réglable : -20 (large) à 20 (étroit) (1 pas = 0,1 mm) 08 Taquage feuilles Unité Press. Modifiez la largeur de réglage dans le sens transversal si les feuilles produites présentent un alignement incorrect dans un corps de document. Les formats auxquels cette section fait référence sont ceux des corps de document correspondant à des formats de couverture. Objets de réglage : Pleine page, 8,5 e 11 v, A4 v, B5 v, A5 v, 5,5 e 8,5 v, 16K v, A4W v, B5W v, A5W v, 8,5 e 11W v, 5,5 e 8,5W v, Personn. Plage réglable : -20 (large) à 20 (étroit) (1 pas = 0,1 mm) Élément de menu/Description Options de réglage ineo 1052/1250 11-11 11.1 Présentation fonctionnelle 11 09 Alig couverture sens lateral Modifiez la largeur de réglage en alignant les corps de document et les couvertures, afin de régler leurs positions dans le sens transversal. Objets de réglage : Magasin thermorelieur, Bac principal (y compris bac insertion) Plage réglable : -20 (large) à 20 (étroit) (1 pas = 0,1 mm) 10 Alig couverture sens passage Modifiez la largeur de réglage dans le sens de passage du papier si les feuilles produites présentent un alignement incorrect dans un corps de document. Les formats auxquels cette section fait référence sont ceux des corps de document correspondant à des formats de couverture. Objets de réglage : Pleine page, 8,5 e 11 v, A4 v, B5 v, A5 v, 5,5 e 8,5 v, 16K v, A4W v, B5W v, A5W v, 8,5 e 11W v, 5,5 e 8,5W v, Personn. Plage réglable : -20 (large) à 20 (étroit) (1 pas = 0,1 mm) 10 Unité relais perfo multiple 01 Alignement perforation Réglez la position de la plaque de régulation de l'empileur relais (unité convoyeur relais, RU) dans le sens transversal. Procédez au réglage si les perforations sont décalées parce que le format papier est différent du format défini. Objets de réglage : Pleine page, 11 e 17 w, A3 w, B4 w, 8,5 e 14 w, A4 w, 8,5 e 11 w, 8,5 e 11 v, A4 v, B5 v, A5 v, 5,5 e 8,5 v, 8 e 13 w, 8,125 e 13,25 w, 8,5 e 13 w, 8,25 e 13 w, 8K w, 16K v, 16K w, 12 e 18 w, A3W w, B4W w, A4W v, A4W w, B5W v, A5W v, 12 e 18W w, 11 e 17W w, 8,5 e 11W v, 8,5 e 11W w, 5,5 e 8,5W v, Personnel, SRA3 w, SRA4 w, 9 e 11 w Plage réglable : -20 (étroit) à 20 (large) (1 pas = 0,1 mm) 02 Taquage longueur papier Réglez la position de la plaque de régulation de l'empileur relais (unité convoyeur relais, RU) dans le sens de passage du papier. Procédez au réglage si les perforations sont décalées parce que le format papier est différent du format défini. Objets de réglage : Pleine page, 11 e 17 w, A3 w, B4 w, 8,5 e 14 w, A4 w, 8,5 e 11 w, 8,5 e 11 v, A4 v, B5 v, A5 v, 5,5 e 8,5 v, 8 e 13 w, 8,125 e 13,25 w, 8,5 e 13 w, 8,25 e 13 w, 8K w, 16K v, 16K w, 12 e 18 w, A3W w, B4W w, A4W v, A4W w, B5W v, A5W v, 12 e 18W w, 11 e 17W w, 8,5 e 11W v, 8,5 e 11W w, 5,5 e 8,5W v, Personnel, SRA3 w, SRA4 w, 9 e 11 w Plage réglable : -50 (étroit) à 50 (large) (1 pas = 0,1 mm) 03 Mode recouvrement mémoire Procédez à une pré-rotation du tambour pendant une minute. Départ 04 Nettoyage Manuel Unité Charge Procédez au nettoyage du corona de charge. Départ 05 La récupération sensibilité Procédez à une pré-rotation du tambour pendant 3 minutes. Départ 06 Mode Rafraîchissement Tambour Rafraîchissez la surface en faisant tourner le tambour. Départ Élément de menu/Description Options de réglage 11 [01 Réglage machine] 11-12 ineo 1052/1250 11.2 11.2 [01 Réglage machine] 11.2.1 [01 Réglage restitution] - [01 Restit. verti. écriture-RECTO] Permet de régler la restitution pour le recto dans le sens de passage du papier du moteur imprimante. Si le transfert est mal aligné en des positions situées à env. 300 mm du bord avant de la feuille recto, à env. 150 mm du bord avant de la deuxième feuille suivante ou de manière aléatoire, réglez la restitution dans le sens de passage avec une valeur positive pour corriger le problème. 1 Appuyez sur [Réglage] sur l'écran Machine pour afficher l'écran Menu de réglage. 2 Appuyez successivement sur [01 Réglage machine], [01 Réglage restitution] et sur [01 Restit. verti. écriture-RECTO]. L'écran Restitution verticale écriture-RECTO va s'afficher. 3 Appuyez sur [Impression]. 4 Chargez du papier A3 (11 e 17) w dans un magasin, puis sélectionnez la touche de ce magasin. 5 Appuyez sur Départ sur le panneau de contrôle. La machine éjecte un jeu. 6 Mesurez la restitution qui en résulte dans le sens de passage du papier. Tolérance : +/- 0,5% (tous formats) Jusqu'à 205,7 +/- 1 mm 7 Appuyez sur [Fermer] pour restaurer l'écran Restit. verti. écriture-RECTO. 8 Si un réglage s'avère nécessaire, utilisez le clavier de l'écran tactile ou le clavier du panneau de contrôle pour saisir les données de réglage. % Plage de réglage : -10 (court) à 10 (long) (1 pas = 0,05%) % Utilisez [+<->-] pour indiquer si la valeur est positive ou négative. 9 Appuyez sur [OK] pour remplacer le réglage par la valeur actuelle. 10 Répétez les étapes 3 à 9 jusqu'à ce que le résultat désiré soit obtenu. 11 Appuyez sur [Retour] pour restaurer l'écran du menu Réglage restitution. ineo 1052/1250 11-13 11.2 [01 Réglage machine] 11 11.2.2 [01 Réglage restitution] - [02 Restit. verti. écriture-VERSO] Permet de régler la restitution pour le verso dans le sens de passage du papier du moteur imprimante. Si le transfert est mal aligné, réglez la restitution dans le sens de passage du papier pour corriger le problème. Objets de réglage : les magasins 1 à 8 devraient être réglés de manière individuelle. Le réglage des magasins 1 et 2 s'applique aux bacs principaux. Ce réglage des magasins 3 à 8 ne s'applique que si l'Unité d'alimentation papier PF-703/PF-706 est installée. REMARQUE Procédez à ce réglage après avoir exécuté [01 Restit. verti. écriture-RECTO]. 1 Appuyez sur [Réglage] sur l'écran Machine pour afficher l'écran Menu de réglage. 2 Appuyez successivement sur [01 Réglage machine], [01 Réglage restitution] et [02 Restit. verti. écriture- VERSO]. L'écran Restitution verticale écriture-VERSO va s'afficher. 3 Sélectionnez la touche du magasin (entre 1 et 8) à régler. 4 Appuyez sur [Impression]. 5 Chargez du papier A3 (11 e 17) w dans le magasin sélectionné à l'étape 3, puis sélectionnez la touche de ce magasin. 6 Appuyez sur Départ sur le panneau de contrôle. La machine éjecte un jeu. 7 Mesurez la restitution qui en résulte dans le sens de passage du papier. Tolérance : +/- 0,5% (tous formats) Jusqu'à 205,7 +/- 1 mm 8 Appuyez sur [Fermer] pour restaurer l'écran Restit. verti. écriture-VERSO. 9 Si un réglage s'avère nécessaire, utilisez le clavier de l'écran tactile ou le clavier du panneau de contrôle pour saisir les données de réglage. % Plage de réglage : -10 (court) à 0 (long) (1 pas = 0,05 mm) % Utilisez [+<->-] pour indiquer si la valeur est positive ou négative. 11 [01 Réglage machine] 11-14 ineo 1052/1250 11.2 10 Appuyez sur [OK] pour remplacer le réglage par la valeur actuelle. 11 Répétez les étapes 3 à 10 jusqu'à ce que le résultat désiré soit obtenu. 12 Appuyez sur [Retour] pour restaurer l'écran du menu Réglage restitution. 11.2.3 [01 Réglage restitution] - [03 Restit. horiz. écriture-RECTO] Permet de régler la restitution pour le recto dans le sens transversal du moteur imprimante. Modifiez la restitution dans le contrôle d'image avant l'exposition. 1 Appuyez sur [Réglage] sur l'écran Machine pour afficher l'écran Menu de réglage. 2 Appuyez successivement sur [01 Réglage machine], [01 Réglage restitution] et sur [03 Restit. horiz. écriture-RECTO]. L'écran Restitution horizontale écriture-RECTO va s'afficher. 3 Appuyez sur [Impression]. 4 Chargez du papier A3 (11 e 17) w dans un magasin, puis sélectionnez la touche de ce magasin. 5 Appuyez sur Départ sur le panneau de contrôle. La machine éjecte un jeu. 6 Mesurez la restitution qui en résulte dans le sens perpendiculaire au sens de passage du papier. Tolérance : +/- 0,5% (tous formats) Jusqu'à 190 +/- 1 mm 7 Appuyez sur [Fermer] pour restaurer l'écran Restitution horizontale écriture-RECTO. 8 Si un réglage s'avère nécessaire, utilisez le clavier de l'écran tactile ou le clavier du panneau de contrôle pour saisir les données de réglage. % Plage de réglage : -10 (court) à 10 (long) (1 pas = 0,05%) % Utilisez [+<->-] pour indiquer si la valeur est positive ou négative. 9 Appuyez sur [OK] pour remplacer le réglage par la valeur actuelle. 10 Répétez les étapes 3 à 9 jusqu'à ce que le résultat désiré soit obtenu. 11 Appuyez sur [Retour] pour restaurer l'écran du menu Réglage restitution. ineo 1052/1250 11-15 11.2 [01 Réglage machine] 11 11.2.4 [01 Réglage restitution] - [04 Restit. horiz. écriture-VERSO] Réglez la restitution pour le verso dans le sens transversal dans le moteur de l'imprimante. Modifiez la restitution dans le contrôle d'image avant l'exposition. Objets de réglage : Magasins 1 à 8 Le réglage des magasins 1 et 2 s'applique aux bacs principaux. Ce réglage des magasins 3 à 8 ne s'applique que si l'Unité d'alimentation papier PF-703/PF-706 est installée. REMARQUE Procédez à ce réglage après avoir exécuté [03 Restit. horiz. écriture-RECTO]. 1 Appuyez sur [Réglage] sur l'écran Machine pour afficher l'écran Menu de réglage. 2 Appuyez successivement sur [01 Réglage machine], [01 Réglage restitution] puis sur [04 Restit. horiz. écriture-VERSO]. L'écran Restitution horizontale écriture-VERSO va s'afficher. 3 Sélectionnez la touche du magasin (entre 1 et 8) à régler. 4 Appuyez sur [Impression]. 5 Chargez du papier A3 (11 e 17) w dans le magasin sélectionné à l'étape 3, puis sélectionnez la touche de ce magasin. 6 Appuyez sur Départ sur le panneau de contrôle. La machine éjecte un jeu. 7 Mesurez la restitution qui en résulte dans le sens perpendiculaire au sens de passage du papier. Tolérance : +/- 0,5% (tous formats) Jusqu'à 190 +/- 1 mm 8 Appuyez sur [Fermer] pour restaurer l'écran Restitution horizontale écriture-VERSO. 9 Si un réglage s'avère nécessaire, utilisez le clavier de l'écran tactile ou le clavier du panneau de contrôle pour saisir les données de réglage. % Plage de réglage : -10 (court) à 0 (long) (1 pas = 0,05 mm) % Utilisez [+<->-] pour indiquer si la valeur est positive ou négative. 10 Appuyez sur [OK] pour remplacer le réglage par la valeur actuelle. 11 Répétez les étapes 3 à 10 jusqu'à ce que le résultat désiré soit obtenu. 11 [01 Réglage machine] 11-16 ineo 1052/1250 11.2 12 Appuyez sur [Retour] pour restaurer l'écran du menu Réglage restitution. 11.2.5 [02 Réglage temporisation] - [01 Tempo. synchro.écriture-RECTO] Changez la durée d'exposition de la tête d'impression à LED pour régler le bord avant dans le sens de passage du papier du moteur de l'imprimante. Procédez à ce réglage si la sortie présente une perte d'image ou un espace vierge sur le bord avant du recto. Objets de réglage : Tous les magasins, Magasin 1 à décalage Magasin 8 Sélectionnez Tous les magasins pour régler tous les magasins disponibles simultanément. Sélectionnez les touches de magasin pour procéder à un réglage séparé pour chaque magasin. La sélection de Décalage magasin 1 ou Décalage magasin 2 règle le magasin principal. Ce réglage du décalage magasin 3 à 8 ne s'applique que si l'Unité d'alimentation papier PF-703/PF-706 est installée. REMARQUE Procédez à ce réglage après avoir exécuté [01 Réglage restitution] - [01 Restit. verti. écriture-RECTO]. 1 Appuyez sur [Réglage] sur l'écran Machine pour afficher l'écran Menu de réglage. 2 Appuyez successivement sur [01 Réglage machine], [02 Réglage temporisation] et sur [01 Tempo. synchro.écriture-RECTO]. L'écran Temporisation synchronisation écriture va s'afficher. 3 Sélectionnez [Tous les magasins] pour appliquer un réglage universel pour tous les magasins papier disponibles. Sélectionnez les touches de magasins pour procéder à un réglage distinct. 4 Appuyez sur [Impression]. 5 Chargez du papier A3 (11 e 17) w dans un magasin quelconque si [Tous les magasins] est sélectionné ou le magasin sélectionné à l'étape 3, puis sélectionnez la touche de ce magasin. 6 Appuyez sur Départ sur le panneau de contrôle. La machine éjecte un jeu. 7 Mesurez la temporisation de synchronisation écriture ainsi obtenue. Tolérance : 20 +/- 0,5 mm (métrique A/B) Tolérance : 25,4 (1 inch) +/- 0,5 mm (en pouces) ineo 1052/1250 11-17 11.2 [01 Réglage machine] 11 8 Appuyez sur [Fermer] pour restaurer l'écran Temporisation synchronisation écriture. 9 Si un réglage s'avère nécessaire, utilisez le clavier de l'écran tactile ou le clavier du panneau de contrôle pour saisir les données de réglage. % Plage de réglage : -30 (court) à 30 (long) (1 pas = 0,1 mm) % Utilisez [+<->-] pour indiquer si la valeur est positive ou négative. 10 Appuyez sur [OK] pour remplacer le réglage par la valeur actuelle. 11 Répétez les étapes 3 à 10 jusqu'à ce que le résultat désiré soit obtenu. 12 Appuyez sur [Retour] pour restaurer l'écran du menu Réglage temporisation. 11.2.6 [02 Réglage temporisation] - [02 Tempo. synchro.écriture-VERSO] Changez la durée d'exposition de la tête d'impression à LED pour régler l'ampleur du décalage du bord avant pour le verso dans le sens de passage du papier du moteur de l'imprimante. Procédez à ce réglage si la sortie présente une perte d'image ou un espace vierge sur le bord avant du verso. Objets de réglage : décalage magasin 1 à décalage magasin 8 La sélection de Décalage magasin 1 ou Décalage magasin 2 règle le magasin principal. Ce réglage du décalage magasin 3 à 8 ne s'applique que si l'Unité d'alimentation papier PF-703/PF-706 est installée. REMARQUE Procédez à ce réglage après avoir exécuté [01 Réglage restitution] - [02 Restit. verti. écriture-VERSO] et [02 Réglage temporisation] - [01 Tempo. synchro.écriture-RECTO]. 1 Appuyez sur [Réglage] sur l'écran Machine pour afficher l'écran Menu de réglage. 2 Appuyez successivement sur [01 Réglage machine], [02 Réglage temporisation] et sur [02 Tempo. synchro.écriture-VERSO]. L'écran Temporisation synchronisation écriture va s'afficher. 3 Sélectionnez la touche du magasin (entre 1 et 8) à régler. 4 Appuyez sur [Impression]. 5 Chargez du papier A3 (11 e 17) w dans le magasin sélectionné à l'étape 3, puis sélectionnez la touche de ce magasin. 6 Appuyez sur Départ sur le panneau de contrôle. La machine éjecte un jeu. 11 [01 Réglage machine] 11-18 ineo 1052/1250 11.2 7 Mesurez la temporisation de synchronisation écriture ainsi obtenue. Tolérance : 20 +/- 0,5 mm (métrique A/B) Tolérance : 25,4 (1 inch) +/- 0,5 mm (en pouces) 8 Appuyez sur [Fermer] pour restaurer l'écran Temporisation synchronisation écriture. 9 Si un réglage s'avère nécessaire, utilisez le clavier de l'écran tactile ou le clavier du panneau de contrôle pour saisir les données de réglage. % Plage de réglage : -30 (court) à 30 (long) (1 pas = 0,1 mm) % Utilisez [+<->-] pour indiquer si la valeur est positive ou négative. 10 Appuyez sur [OK] pour remplacer le réglage par la valeur actuelle. 11 Répétez les étapes 3 à 10 jusqu'à ce que le résultat désiré soit obtenu. 12 Appuyez sur [Retour] pour restaurer l'écran du menu Réglage temporisation. 11.2.7 [02 Réglage temporisation] - [03 Tempo. synchro. lecture vitre] Réglez la temporisation de synchronisation (position de départ pour la numérisation dans l'unité d'exposition) de l'image originale numérisée depuis la vitre d'exposition. Procédez au réglage pour qu'il n'y ait ni perte d'image ni espace vierge sur le bord avant lors de la numérisation d'un original avec la vitre d'exposition. REMARQUE Procédez à ce réglage après avoir exécuté [02 Réglage temporisation] - [01 Tempo. synchro.écriture-RECTO] et [02 Réglage temporisation] - [02 Tempo. synchro.écriture-VERSO]. 1 Appuyez sur [Réglage] sur l'écran Machine pour afficher l'écran Menu de réglage. 2 Appuyez successivement sur [01 Réglage machine], [02 Réglage temporisation] et sur [03 Tempo. synchro. lecture vitre]. L'écran Temporisation synchro. lecture vitre va s'afficher. 3 Appuyez sur [Impression]. 4 Chargez du papier A3 (11 e 17) w dans un magasin, puis sélectionnez la touche de ce magasin. ineo 1052/1250 11-19 11.2 [01 Réglage machine] 11 5 Placez la mire de test sur la vitre d'exposition, et appuyez sur Départ sur le panneau de contrôle. La machine éjecte un jeu. 6 Vérifiez l'erreur d'alignement en comparant l'original et la copie. Tolérance : 0 +/- 1,5 mm 7 Appuyez sur [Fermer] pour restaurer l'écran Temporisation synchro. lecture vitre. 8 Si un réglage s'avère nécessaire, utilisez le clavier de l'écran tactile ou le clavier du panneau de contrôle pour saisir les données de réglage. % Plage de réglage : -40 (en avant) à 40 (en arrière) (1 pas = 0,1 mm) % Utilisez [+<->-] pour indiquer si la valeur est positive ou négative. 9 Appuyez sur [OK] pour remplacer le réglage par la valeur actuelle. 10 Répétez les étapes 3 à 9 jusqu'à ce que le résultat désiré soit obtenu. 11 Appuyez sur [Retour] pour restaurer l'écran du menu Réglage temporisation. 11.2.8 [02 Réglage temporisation] - [04 Tempo. synchro. lecture ADF] Réglez la temporisation de synchronisation (position de départ pour la numérisation dans l'unité d'exposition) de l'image originale numérisée depuis le chargeur Auto. Procédez au réglage pour qu'il n'ait ni perte d'image ni espace vierge sur le bord avant lors de la numérisation d'un original avec le chargeur Auto. Objets de réglage : Recto, Verso REMARQUE Procédez à ce réglage après avoir exécuté [02 Réglage temporisation] - [01 Tempo. synchro.écriture-RECTO] et [02 Réglage temporisation] - [02 Tempo. synchro.écriture-VERSO]. 1 Appuyez sur [Réglage] sur l'écran Machine pour afficher l'écran Menu de réglage. 2 Appuyez successivement sur [01 Réglage machine], [02 Réglage temporisation] et sur [04 Tempo. synchro. lecture ADF]. L'écran Temporisation synchro. lecture ADF s'affiche. 3 Sélectionnez [Recto] ou [Verso]. 4 Appuyez sur [Impression]. 5 Chargez du papier A3 (11 e 17) w dans un magasin, puis sélectionnez la touche de ce magasin. 6 Placez la mire de test sur le chargeur Auto, puis appuyez sur Départ sur le panneau de contrôle. La machine éjecte un jeu. 7 Vérifiez l'erreur d'alignement en comparant l'original et la copie. Tolérance : 0 +/- 2 mm 8 Appuyez sur [Fermer] pour restaurer l'écran Temporisation synchro. lecture ADF. 11 [01 Réglage machine] 11-20 ineo 1052/1250 11.2 9 Si un réglage s'avère nécessaire, utilisez le clavier de l'écran tactile ou le clavier du panneau de contrôle pour saisir les données de réglage. % Plage de réglage : -50 (en avant) à 50 (en arrière) (1 pas = 0,1 mm) % Utilisez [+<->-] pour indiquer si la valeur est positive ou négative. 10 Appuyez sur [OK] pour remplacer le réglage par la valeur actuelle. 11 Répétez les étapes 3 à 10 jusqu'à ce que le résultat désiré soit obtenu. 12 Appuyez sur [Retour] pour restaurer l'écran du menu Réglage temporisation. 11.2.9 [03 Centrage écriture] - [01 Réglage centrage écriture] Changez la position d'écriture de la tête d'impression à LED pour régler la position de l'image dans le sens transversal du moteur de l'imprimante. Réglez la position de l'image dans le sens transversal en sortie. REMARQUE Procédez à ce réglage après avoir exécuté [01 Réglage restitution] - [03 Restit. horiz. écriture-RECTO] et [01 Réglage restitution] - [04 Restit. horiz. écriture-VERSO]. 1 Appuyez sur [Réglage] sur l'écran Machine pour afficher l'écran Menu de réglage. 2 Appuyez successivement sur [01 Réglage machine], [03 Centrage écriture] et sur [01 Réglage centrage écriture]. L'écran Réglage du centrage écriture s'affiche. 3 Appuyez sur [Impression]. 4 Chargez du papier A3 (11 e 17) w dans un magasin, puis sélectionnez la touche de ce magasin. 5 Appuyez sur Départ sur le panneau de contrôle. La machine éjecte un jeu. 6 Pliez la feuille imprimée en son milieu dans le sens transversal et vérifiez le décalage de la ligne médiane et de la ligne d'impression. Tolérance : 0 +/- 1,5 mm 7 Appuyez sur [Fermer] pour restaurer l'écran Réglage du centrage écriture. 8 Si un réglage s'avère nécessaire, utilisez le clavier de l'écran tactile ou le clavier du panneau de contrôle pour saisir les données de réglage. % Plage de réglage : -64 (recto) à 63 (verso) (1 pas = 0,1 mm) % Utilisez [+<->-] pour indiquer si la valeur est positive ou négative. 9 Appuyez sur [OK] pour remplacer le réglage par la valeur actuelle. 10 Répétez les étapes 3 à 9 jusqu'à ce que le résultat désiré soit obtenu. 11 Appuyez sur [Retour] pour restaurer l'écran du menu Centrage écriture. ineo 1052/1250 11-21 11.2 [01 Réglage machine] 11 11.2.10 [04 Réglage LED (LPH)] - [01 Réglage décalage éléments LED] Règle l'espacement (39 points) entre les éléments de la tête d'impression à LED. Plage de réglage : -8 (court) à 8 (long) (1 pas = 1,0%) 1 Appuyez sur [Réglage] sur l'écran Machine pour afficher l'écran Menu de réglage. 2 Appuyez successivement sur [01 Réglage machine], [04 Réglage LED (LPH)] et sur [01 Réglage décalage éléments LED]. L'écran Réglage décalage entre éléments LED va s'afficher. 3 Dans "Sélection des mires test internes", sélectionnez [Gris foncé] ou [Gris clair]. % Sélectionnez [Gris foncé] si la sortie comporte des lignes blanches ou [Gris clair] si la sortie comporte des lignes noires pour faciliter l'identification. 4 Sélectionnez [Désactivé] dans "Traçage de lignes" et appuyez sur [Impression]. 5 Chargez du papier A4 (8,5 e 11) w dans un magasin, puis sélectionnez la touche de ce magasin. 6 Appuyez sur Départ sur le panneau de contrôle. La machine éjecte un jeu. 7 Appuyez sur [Fermer]. 8 Sélectionnez [Activé] dans [Traçage de lignes] et appuyez sur [Impression]. 9 Comme à l'étape 5, sélectionnez le magasin contenant le papier A4 (8,5 e 11) w. 10 Appuyez sur Départ sur le panneau de contrôle. La machine éjecte un jeu. 11 Appuyez sur [Fermer]. 12 Comparez les échantillons imprimés à l'étape 6 et à l'étape 10 pour identifier l'espacement à corriger. % Les motifs sont tracés avec des lignes blanches et noires et une ligne noire représente un décuple de points. % Observez les lignes blanches et les lignes noires. Les lignes produites par la tête d'impression à LED devraient être plus nettes. Grossissez ces lignes nettes pour identifier l'espacement. % Les lignes produites devraient être larges et floues. Ne pas utiliser de telles lignes pour identifier l'espacement. 11 [01 Réglage machine] 11-22 ineo 1052/1250 11.2 13 Sur l'écran Réglage de l'espacement entre les éléments LED, sélectionnez touches de point entre [1] et [39] correspondant à l'espacement identifié, puis appuyez sur [+] ou [-] pour saisir les données de réglage. Pour procéder à un réglage universel, sélectionnez [Tout décaler] et saisir les données de réglage. % Entrez une valeur [+] en cas de lignes blanches. % Entrez une valeur [-] en cas de lignes noires. % Plage de réglage : -8 à 8 (1 pas = 1,0%) % Une valeur de réglage trop importante produit des lignes noires tandis qu'une valeur trop faible produit des lignes blanches. 14 Répétez les étapes 3 à 13 jusqu'à ce que le résultat désiré soit obtenu. 15 Appuyez sur [OK] pour restaurer l'écran du menu Réglage LED (LPH). ineo 1052/1250 11-23 11.3 [02 Réglages finition] 11 11.3 [02 Réglages finition] 11.3.1 [01 Réglage Agrafeuse (Principal)] - [01 Réglage Position Agrafe] Permet de régler le pasd'agrafage en 2 points et les positions des agrafes dans l'agrafeuse. Objets de réglage : Pas 2 points (120 mm), Pas 2 points (140 mm), Pas de 2 points (165 mm), Arrière en diagonale, En arrière parallèle, À l'avant parallèle 1 Appuyez sur [Réglage] sur l'écran Machine pour afficher l'écran Menu de réglage. 2 Appuyez successivement sur [02 Réglages finition], [01 Réglage Agrafeuse (Principal)] et sur [01 Réglage Position Agrafe]. L'écran Réglage Position Agrafe va s'afficher. 3 Sélectionnez [Pas 2 Positions (120 mm)], [Pas 2 Positions (140 mm)], [Pas 2 Positions (165 mm)], [Arrière en diagonale], [En arrière parallèle], ou [À l'avant parallèle] pour régler la position des agrafes. 4 Appuyez sur [Impression]. 5 Chargez du papier A3 (11 e 17) w dans un magasin, puis sélectionnez la touche de ce magasin. % Pour la Finition, [Agrafage] est automatiquement sélectionné et la position d'agrafage sélectionnée à l'étape 3 est activée. Les exemplaires sont automatiquement réglés sur 2 copies. 6 Appuyez sur Départ sur le panneau de contrôle. La machine éjecte un jeu. 7 Vérifiez les positions d'agrafage (a) sur les feuilles imprimées. % Quand [Pas 2 Positions (120 mm)], [Pas 2 Positions (140 mm)] ou [Pas 2 Positions (165 mm)] est sélectionné : tolérance pour [Pas 2 Positions (120 mm)]: a = 120 +/- 3 mm tolérance pour [Pas 2 Positions (140 mm)] : a = 140 +/- 3 mm tolérance pour [Pas 2 Positions (165 mm)] : a = 165 +/- 3 mm 11 [02 Réglages finition] 11-24 ineo 1052/1250 11.3 % Quand [Arrière en diagonale] est sélectionné : tolérance : a = 15,2 +/- 3 mm % Quand [En arrière parallèle] est sélectionné : tolérance : a = 19,6 +/- 2 mm % Quand [À l'avant parallèle] est sélectionné : tolérance : a = 6,4 +/- 3 mm 8 Si un réglage s'avère nécessaire, utilisez le clavier de l'écran tactile ou le clavier du panneau de contrôle pour saisir les données de réglage. % Plage de réglage de [Pas 2 Positions (120 mm)], [Pas 2 Positions (140 mm)], [Pas 2 Positions (165 mm)] : -5 (large) à +5 (étroit) (1 pas = 0,1 mm) % Plage de réglage pour [Arrière en diagonale], [En arrière parallèle] ou [À l'avant parallèle] : -+5 (large) à -5 (étroit) (1 pas = 0,1 mm) % Utilisez [+<->-] pour indiquer si la valeur est positive ou négative. 9 Appuyez sur [OK] pour remplacer le réglage par la valeur actuelle. 10 Répétez les étapes 3 à 9 jusqu'à ce que le résultat désiré soit obtenu. 11 Appuyez sur [Retour] pour restaurer l'écran du menu Réglage Agrafeuse (Principal). ineo 1052/1250 11-25 11.3 [02 Réglages finition] 11 11.3.2 [01 Réglage Agrafeuse (Principal)] - [02 Réglage Largeur Papier Agrafé] Réglez la largeur de la plaque de régulation de l'agrafeuse destinée à aligner les feuilles dans le sens transversal dans l'unité d'agrafage. Procédez à ce réglage en cas de découverte sur les feuilles agrafées d'une erreur d'alignement dans le sens transversal. Objets de réglage : Pleine page, 11 e 17 w, A3 w, B4 w, 8,5 e 14 w, A4 w, 8,5 e 11 w, 8,5 e 11 v, A4 v, B5 v, A5 v, 5,5 e 8,5 v, 8 e 13 w, 8,125 e 13,25 w, 8,5 e 13 w, 8,25 e 13 w, 8K w, 16K v, 16K w, 12 e 18 w, A3W w, B4W w, A4W v, A4W w, B5W v, A5W v, 12 e 18W w, 11 e 17W w, 8,5 e 11W v, 8,5 e 11W w, 5,5 e 8,5W v, Personnel, SRA3 w, SRA4 w, 9 e 11 v REMARQUE Si [Pleine page] est sélectionné, la valeur introduite s'appliquera à tous les formats. Si c'est un format papier spécifique qui est sélectionné, la valeur de réglage sera égale à la valeur introduite augmentée de la valeur précédemment spécifiée pour [Pleine page]. 1 Appuyez sur [Réglage] sur l'écran Machine pour afficher l'écran Menu de réglage. 2 Appuyez successivement sur [02 Réglages finition], [01 Réglage Agrafeuse (Principal)] et sur [02 Réglage Largeur Papier Agrafé]. L'écran Réglage Largeur Papier Agrafé s'affiche. 3 Sélectionnez le format à régler avec [+] ou [,] pour faire défiler les formats. 4 Appuyez sur [Impression]. 5 Chargez le format de papier sélectionné à l'étape 3, puis sélectionnez la touche de ce magasin. Pour la Finition, [Agrafage] est automatiquement sélectionné. Les exemplaires sont automatiquement réglés sur 2 copies. 6 Appuyez sur Départ sur le panneau de contrôle. La machine éjecte un jeu. 7 Vérifiez l'erreur d'alignement (a) dans le sens transversal des feuilles imprimées. Tolérance d'erreur d'alignement (a) : 1,0 mm ou moins en cas de reliure de 2 à 15 feuilles, 1,5 mm ou moins en cas de reliure de 16 à 100 feuilles 8 Appuyez sur [Fermer] pour restaurer l'écran Réglage Largeur Papier Agrafé. a 11 [02 Réglages finition] 11-26 ineo 1052/1250 11.3 9 Si un réglage s'avère nécessaire, utilisez le clavier de l'écran tactile ou le clavier du panneau de contrôle pour saisir les données de réglage. % Plage de réglage : -20 (large) à 20 (étroit) (1 pas = 0,1 mm) % Utilisez [+<->-] pour indiquer si la valeur est positive ou négative. 10 Appuyez sur [OK] pour remplacer le réglage par la valeur actuelle. 11 Répétez les étapes 4 à 13 jusqu'à ce que le résultat désiré soit obtenu. 12 Appuyez sur [Retour] pour restaurer l'écran du menu Réglage Agrafeuse (Principal). 11.3.3 [01 Réglage Agrafeuse (Principal)] - [03 Réglage Plaque Alignement FD] Réglez la largeur de la plaque de régulation de l'agrafeuse destinée à aligner les feuilles dans le sens transversal dans l'unité d'agrafage. Objets de réglage : Pleine page, A4 v, B5 v, A5 v, 8,5 e 11 v, 16K w, 5,5 e 8,5 v, A4W v, B5W v, A5W v, 8,5 e 11W v, 5,5 e 8,5W v, Personnel, 9 e 11 w REMARQUE Si [Pleine page] est sélectionné, la valeur introduite s'appliquera à tous les formats. Si c'est un format papier spécifique qui est sélectionné, la valeur de réglage sera égale à la valeur introduite augmentée de la valeur précédemment spécifiée pour [Pleine page]. 1 Appuyez sur [Réglage] sur l'écran Machine pour afficher l'écran Menu de réglage. 2 Appuyez successivement sur [02 Réglages finition], [01 Réglage Agrafeuse (Principal)] et sur [03 Réglage Plaque Alignement FD]. L'écran Réglage Plaque Alignement FD va s'afficher. 3 Sélectionnez le format à régler avec [+] ou [,] pour faire défiler les formats. 4 Appuyez sur [Impression]. 5 Chargez le format de papier sélectionné à l'étape 3, puis sélectionnez la touche de ce magasin. Les exemplaires sont automatiquement réglés sur 2 copies. 6 Appuyez sur Départ sur le panneau de contrôle. La machine éjecte un jeu. ineo 1052/1250 11-27 11.3 [02 Réglages finition] 11 7 Vérifiez l'erreur d'alignement (a) dans le sens de passage du papier des feuilles imprimées. Tolérance d'erreur d'alignement (a) : 1,0 mm ou moins en cas de reliure de 2 à 15 feuilles, 1,5 mm ou moins en cas de reliure de 16 à 100 feuilles % Vérifiez les feuilles à la recherche d'une quelconque position en biais du papier. Un biais survient si l'insertion est trop profonde. 8 Appuyez sur [Fermer] pour restaurer l'écran Réglage Plaque Alignement FD. 9 Si un réglage s'avère nécessaire, utilisez le clavier de l'écran tactile ou le clavier du panneau de contrôle pour saisir les données de réglage. % Plage de réglage : -50 (large) à 50 (étroit) (1 pas = 0,1 mm) % Utilisez [+<->-] pour indiquer si la valeur est positive ou négative. 10 Appuyez sur [OK] pour remplacer le réglage par la valeur actuelle. 11 Répétez les étapes 4 à 13 jusqu'à ce que le résultat désiré soit obtenu. 12 Appuyez sur [Retour] pour restaurer l'écran du menu Réglage Agrafeuse (Principal). 11.3.4 [01 Réglage Agrafeuse (Principal)] - [04 Larg. papier unit guid sortie] Procédez au réglage si une feuille sortie non agrafée dans le bac principal est mal alignée. Réglez les positions avant et arrière de l'unité de guidage de sortie pour l'alignement en sortie. Objets de réglage : Pleine page, 11 e 17 w, A3 w, B4 w, 8,5 e 14 w, A4 w, 8,5 e 11 w, 8,5 e 11 v, A4 v, B5 v, A5 v, 5,5 e 8,5 v, 8 e 13 w, 8,125 e 13,25 w, 8,5 e 13 w, 8,25 e 13 w, 8K w, 16K v, 16K w, 12 e 18 w, A3W w, B4W w, A4W v, A4W w, B5W v, A5W v, 12 e 18W w, 11 e 17W w, 8,5 e 11W v, 8,5 e 11W w, 5,5 e 8,5W v, Personnel, SRA3 w, SRA4 w, 9 e 11 v REMARQUE Ce réglage n'entre en vigueur que pour le papier dont la largeur dans le sens du passage est de 182 mm ou plus (B5 w) pour une sortie directe ou de 210 mm ou plus (A4 v) pour une sortie décalée. Le réglage du papier sur des formats inférieurs n'impliquant aucune opération d'alignement en sortie (A5 w, B6 w, 5,5 e 8,5 w) n'entre pas en vigueur. REMARQUE Assurez-vous d'exécuter [01 Réglage Agrafeuse (Principal)] - [02 Réglage Largeur Papier Agrafé] avant de procéder à ce réglage. REMARQUE Si [Pleine page] est sélectionné, la valeur introduite s'appliquera à tous les formats. Si c'est un format papier spécifique qui est sélectionné, la valeur de réglage sera égale à la valeur introduite augmentée de la valeur précédemment spécifiée pour [Pleine page]. 11 [02 Réglages finition] 11-28 ineo 1052/1250 11.3 1 Appuyez sur [Réglage] sur l'écran Machine pour afficher l'écran Menu de réglage. 2 Appuyez successivement sur [02 Réglages finition], [01 Réglage Agrafeuse (Principal)] et sur [04 Larg. papier unit guid sortie]. L'écran Régl. Largeur Pap. Unité Guidage Sortie s'affiche. 3 Sélectionnez le format à régler avec [+] ou [,] pour faire défiler les formats. 4 Appuyez sur [Impression]. 5 Chargez le format de papier sélectionné à l'étape 3, puis sélectionnez la touche de ce magasin. Si [Tri décalé] est sélectionné à l'étape 6, sélectionnez un format de papier de 210 mm ou plus (A4 vertical). Les exemplaires sont automatiquement réglés sur 2 copies. 6 Pour la configuration de la sortie, sélectionnez [Tri] ou [Tri décalé]. 7 Appuyez sur Départ sur le panneau de contrôle. La machine éjecte un jeu. 8 Vérifiez l'erreur d'alignement (a) des feuilles éjectées dans le bac principal. Vérifiez l'espace entre feuilles produites et les guides de sortie en mouvement puis à partir de là, estimez les données de réglage. Tolérance pour les erreurs d'alignement (a) : + 1 mm ou moins que la largeur du papier 9 Appuyez sur [Fermer] pour restaurer l'écran Régl. Largeur Pap. Unité Guidage Sortie. 10 Si un réglage s'avère nécessaire, utilisez le clavier de l'écran tactile ou le clavier du panneau de contrôle pour saisir les données de réglage. % Plage de réglage : -50 (large) à 50 (étroit) (1 pas = 0,1 mm) % Utilisez [+<->-] pour indiquer si la valeur est positive ou négative. % Si la largeur réglée est trop étroite, les feuilles imprimées risquent de ne pas être bien alignées dans le sens de passage du papier. 11 Appuyez sur [OK] pour remplacer le réglage par la valeur actuelle. 12 Répétez les étapes de réglage de 4 à 11 jusqu'à ce que le résultat désiré soit obtenu. 13 Appuyez sur [Retour] pour restaurer l'écran du menu Réglage Agrafeuse (Principal). ineo 1052/1250 11-29 11.3 [02 Réglages finition] 11 11.3.5 [01 Réglage Agrafeuse (Principal)] - [05 Régl.Descente Palette Enroul.] Réglez la descente de la palette de la fonction Enrouler pour éjection dans le bac principal. Objets de réglage : Pleine page, 11 e 17 w, A3 w, B4 w, 8,5 e 14 w, A4 w, 8,5 e 11 w, 8,5 e 11 v, A4 v, B5 v, A5 v, 5,5 e 8,5 v, 8 e 13 w, 8,125 e 13,25 w, 8,5 e 13 w, 8,25 e 13 w, 8K w, 16K v, 16K w, 12 e 18 w, A3W w, B4W w, A4W v, A4W w, B5W v, A5W v, 12 e 18W w, 11 e 17W w, 8,5 e 11W v, 8,5 e 11W w, 5,5 e 8,5W v, Personnel, SRA3 w, SRA4 w, 9 e 11 v REMARQUE Si [Pleine page] est sélectionné, la valeur introduite s'appliquera à tous les formats. Si c'est un format papier spécifique qui est sélectionné, la valeur de réglage sera égale à la valeur introduite augmentée de la valeur précédemment spécifiée pour [Pleine page]. 1 Appuyez sur [Réglage] sur l'écran Machine pour afficher l'écran Menu de réglage. 2 Appuyez successivement sur [02 Réglages finition], [01 Réglage Agrafeuse (Principal)] et sur [05 Régl.Descente Palette Enroul.]. L'écran Réglage Descente Palette Enroul. va s'afficher. 3 Sélectionnez le format à régler avec [+] ou [,] pour faire défiler les formats. 4 Appuyez sur [Impression]. 5 Chargez le format de papier sélectionné à l'étape 3, puis sélectionnez la touche de ce magasin. Pour la Finition, [Agrafage] est automatiquement sélectionné. Les exemplaires sont automatiquement réglés sur 2 copies. 6 Appuyez sur Départ sur le panneau de contrôle. La machine éjecte un jeu. 7 Vérifiez l'erreur d'alignement (a) des feuilles éjectées dans le bac principal. Inspectez les feuilles éjectées à la recherche d'erreurs d'enroulement dues aux palettes et basez-vous là-dessus pour procéder au réglage. Tolérance : a = +/- 1 mm 8 Appuyez sur [Fermer] pour restaurer l'écran Réglage Descente Palette Enroul. 11 [02 Réglages finition] 11-30 ineo 1052/1250 11.3 9 Si un réglage s'avère nécessaire, utilisez le clavier de l'écran tactile ou le clavier du panneau de contrôle pour saisir les données de réglage. % Plage de réglage : -10 (moins) à 10 (plus) (1 pas = 0,2 mm) % Utilisez [+<->-] pour indiquer si la valeur est positive ou négative. 10 Répétez les étapes 4 à 9 jusqu'à ce que le résultat désiré soit obtenu. 11 Appuyez sur [Retour] pour restaurer l'écran du menu Réglage Agrafeuse (Principal). 11.3.6 [01 Réglage Agrafeuse (Principal)] - [06 Opération pr fonct. Enrouler] Sélectionner la fonction de palette d'enroulement pour l'éjection dans le bac principal. Objets de réglage : Auto, Activé, Désactivé 1 Appuyez sur [Réglage] sur l'écran Machine pour afficher l'écran Menu de réglage. 2 Appuyez successivement sur [02 Réglages finition], [01 Réglage Agrafeuse (Principal)] et sur [06 Opération pr fonct. Enrouler]. L'écran Opération pour fonction Enrouler va s'afficher. 3 Pour l'opération de la palette d'enroulement, sélectionnez [Auto], [Activée] ou [Désactivé]. 4 Appuyez sur [OK] pour restaurer l'écran du menu Réglage Agrafeuse (Principal). ineo 1052/1250 11-31 11.3 [02 Réglages finition] 11 11.3.7 [01 Réglage Agrafeuse (Principal)] - [07 Opération pince supérieure] Sélectionnez l'opération de la pince supérieure pour l'éjection dans le bac principal. 1 Appuyez sur [Réglage] sur l'écran Machine pour afficher l'écran Menu de réglage. 2 Appuyez successivement sur [02 Réglages finition], [01 Réglage Agrafeuse (Principal)] et sur [07 Fonctionnement Pince supérieure]. L'écran Fonctionnement Pince supérieure va s'afficher. 3 Pour l'opération de la pince supérieure, sélectionnez [Auto], [Activé] ou [Désactivé]. 4 Appuyez sur [OK] pour restaurer l'écran du menu Réglage Agrafeuse (Principal). 11.3.8 [01 Réglage Agrafeuse (Principal)] - [08 Opération Alignement sortie] Sélectionnez l'opération alignement sortie pour les guides de sortie. 1 Appuyez sur [Réglage] sur l'écran Machine pour afficher l'écran Menu de réglage. 2 Appuyez successivement sur [02 Réglages finition], [01 Réglage Agrafeuse (Principal)] et sur [08 Opération Alignement sortie]. L'écran Opération Alignement sortie va s'afficher. 3 Pour l'opération d'alignement en sortie, sélectionnez [Auto], [Activé] ou [Désactivé]. 4 Appuyez sur [OK] pour restaurer l'écran du menu Réglage Agrafeuse (Principal). 11 [02 Réglages finition] 11-32 ineo 1052/1250 11.3 11.3.9 [02 Réglage Agrafeuse (Pliage)] - [01 Réglage Espace Pliage&Agraf.] Réglez l'espacement des agrafes dans la Piqueuse à cheval SD-510 installée sur l'Unité de finition FS-532. Procéder à ce réglage si l'espacement entre agrafes se trouve en dehors de la plage autorisée. Objets de réglage : Pleine page, SRA3 w, A3 w, B4 w, SRA4 w, A4 w, B5 w, 12 e 18 w, 11 e 17 w, 8,5 e 14 w, 8,5 e 11 w, 8,125 e 13,25 w, 8,5 e 13 w, 8,25 e 13 w, 8 e 13 w, 8K w, 16K w, A3W w, B4W w, A4W w, B5W w, 12 e 18W w, 11 e 17W w, 8,5 e 11W w, Personnel (moyen), Personnel (grand) REMARQUE Si [Pleine page] est sélectionné, la valeur introduite s'appliquera à tous les formats. Si c'est un format papier spécifique qui est sélectionné, la valeur de réglage sera égale à la valeur introduite augmentée de la valeur précédemment spécifiée pour [Pleine page]. 1 Appuyez sur [Réglage] sur l'écran Machine pour afficher l'écran Menu de réglage. 2 Appuyez successivement sur [02 Réglages finition], [02 Réglage Agrafeuse (Pliage)], [01 Réglage Espace Pliage&Agraf.]. L'écran Réglage Espace Pliage&Agrafage s'affiche. 3 Sélectionnez le format à régler avec [+] ou [,] pour faire défiler les formats. 4 Appuyez sur [Impression]. 5 Chargez le format de papier sélectionné à l'étape 3 dans le magasin, puis sélectionnez la touche de ce magasin. Pour la Finition, [Pli & Piqûre] est automatiquement sélectionné. Les exemplaires sont automatiquement réglés sur 2 copies. 6 Appuyez sur Départ sur le panneau de contrôle. La machine éjecte un jeu. REMARQUE Ouvrez la butée avant du bac pliage avant d'imprimer. 7 Cherchez un espacement d'agrafes (a) par rapport au format du papier (b). Tolérance : a = b/2 +/- 2 mm 8 Appuyez sur [Fermer] pour restaurer l'écran Réglage Espace Pliage&Agrafage ineo 1052/1250 11-33 11.3 [02 Réglages finition] 11 9 Si un réglage s'avère nécessaire, utilisez le clavier de l'écran tactile ou le clavier du panneau de contrôle pour saisir les données de réglage. % Plage de réglage : -300 (étroit) à 300 (large) (1 pas = 0,1 mm) % Utilisez [+<->-] pour indiquer si la valeur est positive ou négative. 10 Appuyez sur [OK] pour remplacer le réglage par la valeur actuelle. 11 Répétez les étapes de réglage de 4 à 10 jusqu'à ce que le résultat désiré soit obtenu. La plage disponible pour le réglage varie en fonction des formats de papier. La valeur minimum est subordonnée à la distance de déplacement de l'agrafeuse, alors que la valeur maximum nécessite que les guides de sortie et l'agrafeuse n'interfèrent pas à l'intérieur de la piqueuse à cheval. Format de papier : plage de réglage minimale (plage de réglage maximale) B5 w : réglage non disponible (91 mm fixés) B4 w : -20 à +20 mm (108,5 à 148,5 mm) A4 w : -14 à +14 mm (91 à 119 mm) A3 w : -20 à +16,5 mm (128,5 à 165 mm) 12 Appuyez sur [Retour] pour restaurer l'écran du menu Réglage Agrafeuse (Pliage). 11.3.10 [02 Réglage Agrafeuse (Pliage)] - [02 Régl. Larg. Pap. Pliage&Agraf] Réglez l'espacement de la plaque de régulation en cas d'erreur d'alignement sur les feuilles pliées en 2 ou en 3 sur la Piqueuse à cheval SD-510 installée sur l'Unité de finition FS-532. Objets de réglage : Pleine page, SRA3 w, A3 w, B4 w, SRA4 w, A4 w, B5 w, 12 e 18 w, 11 e 17 w, 8,5 e 14 w, 8,5 e 11 w, 8,125 e 13,25 w, 8,5 e 13 w, 8,25 e 13 w, 8 e 13 w, 8K w, 16K w, A3W w, B4W w, A4W w, B5W w, 12 e 18W w, 11 e 17W w, 8,5 e 11W w, Personnel (moyen), Personnel (grand) REMARQUE Si [Pleine page] est sélectionné, la valeur introduite s'appliquera à tous les formats. Si c'est un format papier spécifique qui est sélectionné, la valeur de réglage sera égale à la valeur introduite augmentée de la valeur précédemment spécifiée pour [Pleine page]. 1 Appuyez sur [Réglage] sur l'écran Machine pour afficher l'écran Menu de réglage. 2 Appuyez successivement sur [02 Réglages finition], [02 Réglage Agrafeuse (Pliage)], [02 Régl. Larg. Pap. Pliage&Agraf]. L'écran Réglage Largeur Papier Pliage&Agrafage va s'afficher. 3 Sélectionnez le format à régler avec [+] ou [,] pour faire défiler les formats. 4 Appuyez sur [Impression]. 5 Chargez le format de papier sélectionné à l'étape 3, puis sélectionnez la touche de ce magasin. Pour la Finition, [Pli & Piqûre] est automatiquement sélectionné. Les exemplaires sont automatiquement réglés sur 2 copies. 6 Appuyez sur Départ sur le panneau de contrôle. La machine éjecte un jeu. 11 [02 Réglages finition] 11-34 ineo 1052/1250 11.3 7 Recherchez tout alignement incorrect sur le jeu éjecté. a : le pliage devient aléatoire si la largeur de papier spécifiée est supérieure à la largeur réelle. b : le pliage se désaxe dans un sens si la largeur de papier spécifiée est plus étroite que la largeur réelle. 8 Appuyez sur [Fermer] pour restaurer l'écran Réglage Largeur Papier Pliage&Agrafage. 9 Si un réglage s'avère nécessaire, utilisez le clavier de l'écran tactile ou le clavier du panneau de contrôle pour saisir les données de réglage. % Plage de réglage : -50 (étroit) à 50 (largeur) (1 pas = 0,1 mm) % Utilisez [+<->-] pour indiquer si la valeur est positive ou négative. Si le réglage est trop large, le désaxement peut empirer. 10 Appuyez sur [OK] pour remplacer le réglage par la valeur actuelle. 11 Répétez les étapes de réglage de 4 à 10 jusqu'à ce que le résultat désiré soit obtenu. 12 Appuyez sur [Retour] pour restaurer l'écran du menu Réglage Agrafeuse (Pliage). 11.3.11 [02 Réglage Agrafeuse (Pliage)] - [03 Régl. Pos. Agraf. Pliage&Agraf] Réglez la position de pliage en 2 et la position d'agrafage sur la Piqueuse à cheval SD-510 installée sur l'Unité de finition FS-532. Objets de réglage : Pleine page, SRA3 w, A3 w, B4 w, SRA4 w, A4 w, B5 w, 12 e 18 w, 11 e 17 w, 8,5 e 14 w, 8,5 e 11 w, 8,125 e 13,25 w, 8,5 e 13 w, 8,25 e 13 w, 8 e 13 w, 8K w, 16K w, A3W w, B4W w, A4W w, B5W w, 12 e 18W w, 11 e 17W w, 8,5 e 11W w, Personnel (moyen), Personnel (grand) REMARQUE Si [Pleine page] est sélectionné, la valeur introduite s'appliquera à tous les formats. Si c'est un format papier spécifique qui est sélectionné, la valeur de réglage sera égale à la valeur introduite augmentée de la valeur précédemment spécifiée pour [Pleine page]. 1 Appuyez sur [Réglage] sur l'écran Machine pour afficher l'écran Menu de réglage. 2 Appuyez successivement sur [02 Réglages finition], [02 Réglage Agrafeuse (Pliage)] et sur [03 Régl. Pos. Agraf. Pliage&Agraf]. L'écran Réglage Position Agrafe Pliage&Agrafage va s'afficher. 3 Sélectionnez le format à régler avec [+] ou [,] pour faire défiler les formats. 4 Appuyez sur [Impression]. 5 Chargez le format de papier sélectionné à l'étape 3, puis sélectionnez la touche de ce magasin. Pour la Finition, [Pli & Piqûre] est automatiquement sélectionné. Les exemplaires sont automatiquement réglés sur 2 copies. 6 Appuyez sur Départ sur le panneau de contrôle. Une mire de test d'agrafage est alors imprimée. ineo 1052/1250 11-35 11.3 [02 Réglages finition] 11 7 Mesurez la différence (a) entre la position Pliage en 2 et les agrafes. Tolérance : a = +/- 1 mm 8 Appuyez sur [Fermer] pour restaurer l'écran Réglage Position Agrafe Pliage&Agrafage. 9 Si un réglage s'avère nécessaire, utilisez le clavier de l'écran tactile ou le clavier du panneau de contrôle pour saisir les données de réglage. % Plage de réglage : -50 (court) à 50 (long) (1 pas = 0,1 mm) % Utilisez [+<->-] pour indiquer si la valeur est positive ou négative. 10 Appuyez sur [OK] pour remplacer le réglage par la valeur actuelle. 11 Répétez les étapes de réglage de 4 à 10 jusqu'à ce que le résultat désiré soit obtenu. 12 Appuyez sur [Retour] pour restaurer l'écran du menu Réglage Agrafeuse (Pliage). 11.3.12 [02 Réglage Agrafeuse (Pliage)] - [04 Régl. Pos. Pli Pliage&Agraf.] Réglez la position de pliage en 2 de la fonction Pliage & Piqûre sur la Piqueuse à cheval SD-510 installée sur l'Unité de finition FS-532. Procédez à ce réglage si la position de pliage en deux ne se trouve pas dans la plage de tolérance. Objets de réglage : Pleine page, SRA3 w, A3 w, B4 w, SRA4 w, A4 w, B5 w, 12 e 18 w, 11 e 17 w, 8,5 e 14 w, 8,5 e 11 w, 8,125 e 13,25 w, 8,5 e 13 w, 8,25 e 13 w, 8 e 13 w, 8K w, 16K w, A3W w, B4W w, A4W w, B5W w, 12 e 18W w, 11 e 17W w, 8,5 e 11W w, Personnel (moyen), Personnel (grand) REMARQUE Si [Pleine page] est sélectionné, la valeur introduite s'appliquera à tous les formats. Si c'est un format papier spécifique qui est sélectionné, la valeur de réglage sera égale à la valeur introduite augmentée de la valeur précédemment spécifiée pour [Pleine page]. 11 [02 Réglages finition] 11-36 ineo 1052/1250 11.3 1 Appuyez sur [Réglage] sur l'écran Machine pour afficher l'écran Menu de réglage. 2 Appuyez successivement sur [02 Réglages finition], [02 Réglage Agrafeuse (Pliage)], [04 Régl. Pos. Pli Plage & Piqûre]. L'écran Réglage Position Pli Pliage&Agrafage va s'afficher. 3 Sélectionnez le format à régler avec [+] ou [,] pour faire défiler les formats. 4 Appuyez sur [Impression]. 5 Chargez le format de papier sélectionné à l'étape 3, puis sélectionnez la touche de ce magasin. Pour la Finition, [Pli & Piqûre] est automatiquement sélectionné. Les exemplaires sont automatiquement réglés sur 2 copies. 6 Appuyez sur Départ sur le panneau de contrôle. La machine éjecte un jeu. REMARQUE Ouvrez la butée avant du bac pliage avant d'imprimer. 7 Vérifiez le désaxement (a) des bords de la feuille imprimée. Tolérance : a = 1 mm ou moins 8 Appuyez sur [Fermer] pour restaurer l'écran Réglage Position Pli Pliage&Agrafage. 9 Si un réglage s'avère nécessaire, utilisez le clavier de l'écran tactile ou le clavier du panneau de contrôle pour saisir les données de réglage. % Plage de réglage : -50 (court) à 50 (long) (1 pas = 0,1 mm) % Utilisez [+<->-] pour indiquer si la valeur est positive ou négative. La mesure (a) réalisée à l'étape 7 augmente si la valeur entrée est positive, et diminue si la valeur introduite est négative. 10 Appuyez sur [OK] pour remplacer le réglage par la valeur actuelle. 11 Répétez les étapes de réglage de 4 à 10 jusqu'à ce que le résultat désiré soit obtenu. 12 Appuyez sur [Retour] pour restaurer l'écran du menu Réglage Agrafeuse (Pliage). ineo 1052/1250 11-37 11.3 [02 Réglages finition] 11 11.3.13 [02 Réglage Agrafeuse (Pliage)] - [05 Régl. Pos. Pli Pliage en deux] Réglez la position de pliage en 2 de la fonction Pliage en 2 multiple sur la Piqueuse à cheval SD-510 installée sur l'Unité de finition FS-532. Procédez à ce réglage si la position de pliage en 2 multiple n'est pas dans la plage de tolérance. Objets de réglage : Pleine page, SRA3 w, A3 w, B4 w, SRA4 w, A4 w, B5 w, 12 e 18 w, 11 e 17 w, 8,5 e 14 w, 8,5 e 11 w, 8,125 e 13,25 w, 8,5 e 13 w, 8,25 e 13 w, 8 e 13 w, 8K w, 16K w, A3W w, B4W w, A4W w, B5W w, 12 e 18W w, 11 e 17W w, 8,5 e 11W w, Personnel (moyen), Personnel (grand) REMARQUE Si [Pleine page] est sélectionné, la valeur introduite s'appliquera à tous les formats. Si c'est un format papier spécifique qui est sélectionné, la valeur de réglage sera égale à la valeur introduite augmentée de la valeur précédemment spécifiée pour [Pleine page]. 1 Appuyez sur [Réglage] sur l'écran Machine pour afficher l'écran Menu de réglage. 2 Appuyez successivement sur [02 Réglages finition], [02 Réglage Agrafeuse (Pliage)], [05 Régl. Pos. Pli Pliage en deux]. L'écran Réglage Position Pli Pliage en deux va s'afficher. 3 Sélectionnez le format à régler avec [+] ou [,] pour faire défiler les formats. 4 Appuyez sur [Impression]. 5 Chargez le format de papier sélectionné à l'étape 3, puis sélectionnez la touche de ce magasin. Pour la Finition, [MultiPli en2] est automatiquement sélectionné. Les exemplaires sont automatiquement réglés sur 2 copies. 6 Appuyez sur Départ sur le panneau de contrôle. La machine éjecte un jeu. REMARQUE Ouvrez la butée avant du bac pliage avant d'imprimer. 7 Vérifiez le désaxement (a) des bords de la feuille imprimée. Tolérance : a = 1 mm ou moins 8 Appuyez sur [Fermer] pour restaurer l'écran Réglage Position Pli Pliage en deux. 11 [02 Réglages finition] 11-38 ineo 1052/1250 11.3 9 Si un réglage s'avère nécessaire, utilisez le clavier de l'écran tactile ou le clavier du panneau de contrôle pour saisir les données de réglage. % Plage de réglage : -50 (court) à 50 (long) (1 pas = 0,1 mm) % Utilisez [+<->-] pour indiquer si la valeur est positive ou négative. 10 Appuyez sur [OK] pour remplacer le réglage par la valeur actuelle. 11 Répétez les étapes de réglage de 4 à 10 jusqu'à ce que le résultat désiré soit obtenu. 12 Appuyez sur [Retour] pour restaurer l'écran du menu Réglage Agrafeuse (Pliage). 11.3.14 [02 Réglage Agrafeuse (Pliage)] - [06 Réglage pliage en 3] - [01 Réglage Position Pliage en 3] Réglez les positions du 1er et du 2ème pli pour le pliage en 3 sur la Piqueuse à cheval SD-510 installée sur l'Unité de finition FS-532. Procédez à ce réglage si la position de pliage en 2 multiple n'est pas dans la plage de tolérance. Objets de réglage : A4 w, 8,5 e 11 w REMARQUE Si vous procédez aux réglages Premier pli et Deuxième pli, veillez à commencer par le réglage Premier pli. La position du premier pli est calculée depuis le bord de la feuille, alors que le deuxième pli est calculé à partir de la position du premier pli. Par conséquent, la mesure (b) à l'étape 7 est sujette au changement de dans chaque position du pli. 1 Appuyez sur [Réglage] sur l'écran Machine pour afficher l'écran Menu de réglage. 2 Appuyez successivement sur [02 Réglages finition], [02 Réglage Agrafeuse (Pliage)], [06 Réglage pliage en 3] et sur [01 Réglage Position Pliage en 3]. L'écran Réglage Position Pliage en 3 s'affiche. 3 Sélectionnez le format à régler. 4 Appuyez sur [Impression]. 5 Chargez le format de papier sélectionné à l'étape 3, puis sélectionnez la touche de ce magasin. Pour la Finition, [MultiPli en3] est automatiquement sélectionné. 6 Appuyez sur Départ sur le panneau de contrôle. La machine éjecte un jeu. ineo 1052/1250 11-39 11.3 [02 Réglages finition] 11 7 Mesurez les dimensions (a) et (b) de la feuille imprimée. 8 Appuyez sur [Fermer] pour restaurer l'écran Réglage Position Pliage en 3. 9 Sélectionnez [Premier pli]. 10 Entrez les données de réglage sur le pavé numérique du panneau de contrôle ou de l'écran tactile. % Plage de réglage pour le 1er pli : -50 (court) à 50 (long) (1 pas = 0,1 mm), 2ème pli : -50 (court) à 50 (long) (1 pas = 0,1 mm) % Utilisez [+<->-] pour indiquer si la valeur est positive ou négative. % La mesure (a) réalisée à l'étape 7 augmente si la valeur entrée est positive, et diminue si la valeur introduite est négative. 11 Appuyez sur [OK] pour remplacer le réglage par la valeur actuelle. 12 Sélectionnez [Deuxième pli]. 13 Répétez l'étape 10. % La mesure (b) réalisée à l'étape 7 augmente si la valeur entrée est positive, et diminue si la valeur introduite est négative. 14 Répétez les étapes 4 à 13 jusqu'à ce que le résultat désiré soit obtenu. 15 Appuyez sur [Retour] pour restaurer l'écran du menu Réglage pliage en 3. 16 Appuyez sur [Fermer] pour restaurer l'écran du menu Réglage Agrafeuse (Pliage). Format papier Tolérance a b A4 w 95,0 +/- 2,0 mm 101,0 +/- 2,0 mm 8,5 e 11 w 89,4 +/- 2,0 mm 95,0 +/- 2,0 mm 11 [02 Réglages finition] 11-40 ineo 1052/1250 11.3 11.3.15 [02 Réglage Agrafeuse (Pliage)] - [06 Réglage pliage en 3] - [02 Réglage Plaque Pliage Double] Réglez l'insertion de la plaque de pliage double pour le pliage en 3 sur la Piqueuse à cheval SD-510 installée sur l'Unité de finition FS-532. Plus profondément en cas de grand décalage du jeu plié en double. Objets de réglage : A4 w, 8,5 e 11 w 1 Appuyez sur [Réglage] sur l'écran Machine pour afficher l'écran Menu de réglage. 2 Appuyez successivement sur [02 Réglages finition], [02 Réglage Agrafeuse (Pliage)], [06 Réglage pliage en 3] et sur [02 Réglage Plaque Pliage Double]. L'écran Réglage Plaque Pliage Double va s'afficher. 3 Sélectionnez le format à régler. 4 Appuyez sur [Impression]. 5 Chargez le format de papier sélectionné à l'étape 3, puis sélectionnez la touche de ce magasin. Pour la Finition, [MultiPli en3] est automatiquement sélectionné. 6 Appuyez sur Départ sur le panneau de contrôle. La machine éjecte un jeu. 7 Vérifiez l'erreur d'alignement (a) du 2ème pli de la feuille imprimée. 8 Appuyez sur [Fermer] pour restaurer l'écran Réglage Plaque Pliage Double. 9 Si un réglage s'avère nécessaire, utilisez le clavier de l'écran tactile ou le clavier du panneau de contrôle pour saisir les données de réglage. % Utilisez [+<->-] pour indiquer si la valeur est positive ou négative. % Plage de réglage : -50 (peu profond) à 50 (profond) (1 pas = 0,1 mm) % Procédez à une insertion plus profonde si l'erreur d'alignement est importante. % Dans une configuration de pliage multiple, procédez à une insertion plus profonde en cas de mauvais alignement de la position deuxième pli de la couverture et de celle des pages suivantes. % Procédez à une insertion plus profonde en cas de présence d'un pli en forme de boîte avec du papier fin. 10 Appuyez sur [OK] pour remplacer le réglage par la valeur actuelle. 11 Répétez les étapes de réglage de 4 à 10 jusqu'à ce que le résultat désiré soit obtenu. 12 Appuyez sur [Retour] pour restaurer l'écran du menu Réglage pliage en 3. 13 Appuyez sur [Fermer] pour restaurer l'écran du menu Réglage Agrafeuse (Pliage). ineo 1052/1250 11-41 11.3 [02 Réglages finition] 11 11.3.16 [02 Réglage Agrafeuse (Pliage)] - [07 Réglage Force Pliage en 2] Réglez une durée de pression du rouleau sur le point de pliage d'un livret avec les fonctions Pliage & Piqûre, Pliage en 2 multiple ou Multi pli en 3 sur la Piqueuse à cheval SD-510 installée sur l'Unité de finition FS-532. La valeur entrée représente le nombre de secondes. Rallonger la durée du pression du rouleau augmente la force pour plier les livret mais réduit la productivité. 1 Appuyez sur [Réglage] sur l'écran Machine pour afficher l'écran Menu de réglage. 2 Appuyez successivement sur [02 Réglages finition], [02 Réglage Agrafeuse (Pliage)], [07 Réglage Force Pliage en 2]. L'écran Réglage Force Pliage en 2 va s'afficher. 3 Appuyez sur [Impression]. 4 Chargez du papier A3 (11 e 17) w dans un magasin, puis sélectionnez la touche de ce magasin. Pour la Finition, [Pli & Piqûre] est automatiquement sélectionné. Les exemplaires sont automatiquement réglés sur 2 copies. 5 Appuyez sur Départ sur le panneau de contrôle. La machine éjecte un jeu. 6 Vérifiez si la force du pli des feuilles imprimées est trop faible. 7 Appuyez sur [Fermer] pour restaurer l'écran Réglage Force Pliage en 2. 8 Si un réglage s'avère nécessaire, utilisez le clavier de l'écran tactile ou le clavier du panneau de contrôle pour saisir les données de réglage. % Plage de réglage : 0 à 10 (1 pas = 1 s) 9 Appuyez sur [OK] pour remplacer le réglage par la valeur actuelle. 10 Répétez les étapes 4 à 9 jusqu'à ce que le résultat désiré soit obtenu. 11 Appuyez sur [Retour] pour restaurer l'écran du menu Réglage Agrafeuse (Pliage). 11 [02 Réglages finition] 11-42 ineo 1052/1250 11.3 11.3.17 [03 Réglage Agrafeuse (Perfo)] - [01 Régl. Position Vert. (CD)] Réglez l'erreur d'alignement de la position de perforation par rapport au centre de la feuille perforée sur l'Unité de perforation PK-522 installée sur l'Unité de finition FS-532. Objets de réglage : Pleine page, A3 w, B4 w, SRA4 w, A4 w, A4 v, B5 v, A5 v, 12 e 18 w, 11 e 17 w, 8,5 e 14 w, 8,5 e 11 w, 8,5 e 11 v, 8,125 e 13,25 w, 8,5 e 13 w, 8,25 e 13 w, 8 e 13 w, 8K w, 16K v, 5,5 e 8,5 v, 16K w, 9 e 11 w REMARQUE Si [Pleine page] est sélectionné, la valeur introduite s'appliquera à tous les formats. Si c'est un format papier spécifique qui est sélectionné, la valeur de réglage sera égale à la valeur introduite augmentée de la valeur précédemment spécifiée pour [Pleine page]. 1 Appuyez sur [Réglage] sur l'écran Machine pour afficher l'écran Menu de réglage. 2 Appuyez successivement sur [02 Réglages finition], [03 Réglages Agrafeuse (Perfo)], [01 Régl. Position Vert. (CD)]. L'écran Régl. Position Perfo Verticale (CD) va s'afficher. 3 Sélectionnez le format à régler avec [+] ou [,] pour faire défiler les formats. 4 Appuyez sur [Impression]. 5 Chargez le format de papier sélectionné à l'étape 3, puis sélectionnez la touche de ce magasin. Pour la Finition, [Perforation] est automatiquement sélectionné. 6 Appuyez sur Départ sur le panneau de contrôle. La machine éjecte un jeu. 7 Mesurez la différence (a) entre la ligne médiane de la feuille imprimée et la position centrale des perforations. Tolérance : a = 0 +/- 1 mm [1] Centre du papier, [2] Centre entre trous de perforation 8 Appuyez sur [Fermer] pour restaurer l'écran Régl. Position Perfo Verticale (CD). 9 Si un réglage s'avère nécessaire, utilisez le clavier de l'écran tactile ou le clavier du panneau de contrôle pour saisir les données de réglage. % Plage de réglage : -50 (vers l'avant) à 50 (vers l'arrière) (1 pas = 0,1 mm) % Utilisez [+<->-] pour indiquer si la valeur est positive ou négative. ineo 1052/1250 11-43 11.3 [02 Réglages finition] 11 10 Appuyez sur [OK] pour remplacer le réglage par la valeur actuelle. 11 Répétez les étapes de réglage de 4 à 10 jusqu'à ce que le résultat désiré soit obtenu. 12 Appuyez sur [Retour] pour restaurer l'écran du menu Réglages Agrafeuse (Perfo). 11.3.18 [03 Réglages Agrafeuse (Perfo)] - [02 Régl. Position Horiz. (FD)] Réglez la distance entre le bord de la feuille imprimée et le centre des trous de perforation sur l'Unité de perforation PK-522 installée sur l'Unité de finition FS-532. Objets de réglage : Pleine page, A3 w, B4 w, SRA4 w, A4 w, A4 v, B5 v, A5 v, 12 e 18 w, 11 e 17 w, 8,5 e 14 w, 8,5 e 11 w, 8,5 e 11 v, 8,125 e 13,25 w, 8,5 e 13 w, 8,25 e 13 w, 8 e 13 w, 8K w, 16K v, 5,5 e 8,5 v, 16K w, 9 e 11 w REMARQUE Si [Pleine page] est sélectionné, la valeur introduite s'appliquera à tous les formats. Si c'est un format papier spécifique qui est sélectionné, la valeur de réglage sera égale à la valeur introduite augmentée de la valeur précédemment spécifiée pour [Pleine page]. 1 Appuyez sur [Réglage] sur l'écran Machine pour afficher l'écran Menu de réglage. 2 Appuyez successivement sur [02 Réglages finition], [03 Réglages Agrafeuse (Perfo)], [02 Régl. Position Horiz. (FD)]. L'écran Régl. Position Perfo Horizontale (FD) va s'afficher. 3 Sélectionnez le format à régler avec [+] ou [,] pour faire défiler les formats. 4 Appuyez sur [Impression]. 5 Chargez le format de papier sélectionné à l'étape 3, puis sélectionnez la touche de ce magasin. Pour la Finition, [Perforation] est automatiquement sélectionné. 6 Appuyez sur Départ sur le panneau de contrôle. La machine éjecte un jeu. 7 Mesurez la distance (a) entre le bord de la feuille éjectée et le centre des trous. Tolérance pour perforation 2 trous/4 trous : a = 11,0 +/- 5 mm 11 [02 Réglages finition] 11-44 ineo 1052/1250 11.3 8 Appuyez sur [Fermer] pour restaurer l'écran Régl. Position Perfo Horizontale (FD). 9 Si un réglage s'avère nécessaire, utilisez le clavier de l'écran tactile ou le clavier du panneau de contrôle pour saisir les données de réglage. % Plage de réglage pour la position de perforation par rapport au bord de la page : -50 (proche) à 50 (loin) (1 pas = 0,1 mm) % Utilisez [+<->-] pour indiquer si la valeur est positive ou négative. 10 Appuyez sur [OK] pour remplacer le réglage par la valeur actuelle. 11 Répétez les étapes de réglage de 4 à 10 jusqu'à ce que le résultat désiré soit obtenu. 12 Appuyez sur [Retour] pour restaurer l'écran du menu Réglages Agrafeuse (Perfo). 11.3.19 [03 Réglages Agrafeuse (Perfo)] - [03 Réglage synchronisation] Si la position de perforation n'est pas parallèle au bord du papier en utilisant l'Unité de perforation PK-522 installée sur l'Unité de finition FS-532, contrôlez le tuilage et le froissage du papier en réglant la boucle de papier du rouleau de synchronisation. Objets de réglage : Sortie inversée, Alimentation unité R/V 1 Appuyez sur [Réglage] sur l'écran Machine pour afficher l'écran Menu de réglage. 2 Appuyez successivement sur [02 Réglages finition], [03 Réglages Agrafeuse (Perfo)] et sur [03 Réglage synchronisation]. L'écran Réglage Synchro Perforation va s'afficher. 3 Sélectionnez [Sortie inversée] ou [Alimentation unité R/V]. 4 Appuyez sur [Impression]. 5 Chargez du papier A3 (11 e 17) w dans un magasin, puis sélectionnez la touche de ce magasin. Pour la Finition, [Perforation] est automatiquement sélectionné. 6 Appuyez sur Départ sur le panneau de contrôle. La machine éjecte un jeu. 7 Vérifier si les perforations sont droites ou en biais sur la feuille imprimée. 8 Appuyez sur [Fermer] pour restaurer l'écran Réglage Synchro Perforation. 9 Si un réglage s'avère nécessaire, utilisez le clavier de l'écran tactile ou le clavier du panneau de contrôle pour saisir les données de réglage. % Plage de réglage : -50 (court) à 50 (long) (1 pas = 0,1 mm) % Utilisez [+<->-] pour indiquer si la valeur est positive ou négative. 10 Appuyez sur [OK] pour remplacer le réglage par la valeur actuelle. 11 Répétez les étapes de réglage de 4 à 10 jusqu'à ce que le résultat désiré soit obtenu. ineo 1052/1250 11-45 11.3 [02 Réglages finition] 11 12 Appuyez sur [Retour] pour restaurer l'écran du menu Réglages Agrafeuse (Perfo). 11.3.20 [04 Régl. Agrafeuse (Bac insert.)] - [01 Réglage synchronisation PI] Si le papier du magasin supérieur ou inférieur du Module d'insertion PI-502 est tuilé, plissé ou coincé, gondolé, réglez la boucle de papier du rouleau de synchronisation. Objets de réglage : Bac d'insertion supérieur, Bac d'insertion inférieur 1 Appuyez sur [Réglage] sur l'écran Machine pour afficher l'écran Menu de réglage. 2 Appuyez successivement sur [02 Réglages finition], [04 Régl. Agrafeuse (Bac insert.)] et sur [01 Réglage synchronisation PI]. L'écran Réglage synchronisation PI va s'afficher. 3 Sélectionnez [Bac d'insertion supérieur] ou [Bac d'insertion inférieur]. 4 Chargez du papier dans le bac sélectionné à l'étape 3. 5 Sélectionnez un mode et appuyez sur ON (Marche)/OFF (Arrêt) sur le panneau de contrôle pour le bac d'insertion. La sortie est éjectée dans le bac principal. 6 Contrôlez le détuilage ou le froissage et assurez-vous que le papier n'est pas coincé. 7 Si un réglage s'avère nécessaire, utilisez le clavier de l'écran tactile ou le clavier du panneau de contrôle pour saisir les données de réglage. % Plage de réglage : -5 (court) à 5 (long) (1 pas = 1,0 mm) % Utilisez [+<->-] pour indiquer si la valeur est positive ou négative. 8 Appuyez sur [OK] pour remplacer le réglage par la valeur actuelle. 9 Répétez les étapes de réglage de 3 à 8 jusqu'à ce que le résultat désiré soit obtenu. 10 Appuyez sur [Retour] pour restaurer l'écran du menu Régl. Agrafeuse (Bac insert.). 11 [02 Réglages finition] (Unité de pliage FD-503) 11-46 ineo 1052/1250 11.4 11.4 [02 Réglages finition] (Unité de pliage FD-503) 11.4.1 [05 Unité perforation (Plieuse)] - [01 Alignement perforation] Réglez la largeur de chaque format papier si la position des perforations réalisées par l'Unité de pliage FD-503 est très décalée. Objets de réglage : Pleine page, 11 e 17 w, A3 w, B4 w, 8,5 e 14 w, A4 w, 8,5 e 11 w, B5 w, 8,5 e 11 v, A4 v, A5 w, B5 v, A5 v, 5,5 e 8,5 v, 8 e 13 w, 8,125 e 13,25 w, 8,5 e 13 w, 8,25 e 13 w, 8K w, 16K v, 16K w, 12 e 18 w, SRA4 w, 9 e 11 v REMARQUE Si [Pleine page] est sélectionné, la valeur introduite s'appliquera à tous les formats. Si c'est un format papier spécifique qui est sélectionné, la valeur de réglage sera égale à la valeur introduite augmentée de la valeur précédemment spécifiée pour [Pleine page]. 1 Appuyez sur [Réglage] sur l'écran Machine pour afficher l'écran Menu de réglage. 2 Appuyez sur [02 Réglages finition], [05 Unité perforation (Plieuse)], et [01 Alignement perforation] dans cet ordre. L'écran Alignement perforation s'affiche. 3 Sélectionnez le format à régler avec [+] ou [,] pour faire défiler les formats. 4 Appuyez sur [Impression]. 5 Chargez du papier au format à régler dans le magasin que vous avez sélectionné à l'étape 3 et sélectionnez la touche de ce magasin. 6 Entrez 10 comme nombre d'exemplaires à imprimer et appuyez sur Départ sur le panneau de commande.. La machine éjecte un jeu. 7 Vérifiez le diamètre des trous qui traversent les jeux produits. % Vérifier si les perforations présentent un alignement incorrect (a) (dû au fait que la largeur des plaques de réglage est supérieur à la largeur du papier, ou sont courbes (b) (dû au fait que la largeur des plaques de réglage est inférieure à la largeur du papier). Nombre de trous Tolérance 2 trous/4 trous 5,0 mm de diamètre ou plus ineo 1052/1250 11-47 11.4 [02 Réglages finition] (Unité de pliage FD-503) 11 8 Appuyez sur [Fermer] pour restaurer l'écran Alignement perforation. 9 Si un réglage s'avère nécessaire, utilisez le clavier de l'écran tactile ou le clavier du panneau de contrôle pour saisir les données de réglage. % Plage de réglage : -20 (étroit) à +20 (large) (1 pas = 0,1 mm) % Utilisez [+<->-] pour indiquer si la valeur est positive ou négative. % Un réglage trop large peut déplacer la position centrale des perforations, ou un réglage trop étroit peut affecter diversement la position des perforations. 10 Appuyez sur [Valider] pour changer les données actuelles. 11 Répétez les étapes de réglage de 4 à 10 jusqu'à ce que le résultat désiré soit obtenu. 12 Appuyez sur [Retour] pour restaurer l'écran Menu de réglage Unité perforation (Plieuse). 11.4.2 [05 Unité perforation (Plieuse)] - [02 Position verticale perforat] Réglez la position verticale des perforations réalisées par l'Unité de pliage FD-503. Réglez la distance entre les deux ou trois perforations et le bord du papier. Objets de réglage : 2 trous, Pleine page, 11 e 17 w, A3 w, B4 w, 8,5 e 14 w, A4 w, 8,5 e 11 w, B5 w, 8,5 e 11 v, A4 v, A5 w, B5 v, A5 v, 5,5 e 8,5 v, 8 e 13 w, 8,125 e 13,25 w, 8,5 e 13 w, 8,25 e 13 w, 8K w, 16K v, 16K w, 12 e 18 w, SRA4 w, 9 e 11 v 4 trous : Pleine page, 11 e 17 w, A3 w, B4 w, 8,5 e 11 v, A4 v, B5 v, 8K w, 16K v, 12 e 18 w, 9 e 11 v REMARQUE Si [Pleine page] est sélectionné, la valeur introduite s'appliquera à tous les formats. Si c'est un format papier spécifique qui est sélectionné, la valeur de réglage sera égale à la valeur introduite augmentée de la valeur précédemment spécifiée pour [Pleine page]. 1 Appuyez sur [Réglage] sur l'écran Machine pour afficher l'écran Menu de réglage. 2 Appuyez sur [02 Réglages finition], [05 Unité perforation (Plieuse)] et [02 Position verticale perforat] dans cet ordre. 3 Sélectionnez [2 trous] ou [4 trous]. 4 Sélectionnez le format à régler avec [+] ou [,] pour faire défiler les formats. 5 Appuyez sur [Impression]. 6 Chargez du papier au format à régler dans le magasin que vous avez sélectionné à l'étape 4 et sélectionnez la touche de ce magasin. 7 Appuyez sur Départ sur le panneau de contrôle. La machine éjecte un jeu. 11 [02 Réglages finition] (Unité de pliage FD-503) 11-48 ineo 1052/1250 11.4 8 Mesurez la distance (a) entre le bord de la feuille éjectée et le centre des trous. 9 Appuyez sur [Fermer] pour restaurer l'écran Position verticale perforat. 10 Si un réglage s'avère nécessaire, utilisez le clavier de l'écran tactile ou le clavier du panneau de contrôle pour saisir les données de réglage. % Plage de réglage : -40 (étroit) à 40 (largeur) (1 pas = 0,1 mm) % Utilisez [+<->-] pour indiquer si la valeur est positive ou négative. 11 Appuyez sur [Valider] pour changer les données actuelles. 12 Répétez les étapes 5 à 11 jusqu'à ce que le résultat désiré soit obtenu. 13 Appuyez sur [Retour] pour restaurer l'écran Menu de réglage Unité perforation (Plieuse). 11.4.3 [06 Unité pliage (Plieuse)] - [01 Réglage Pliage en 2] Réglez la position de pliage en 2 déterminée par l'Unité de pliage FD-503. Objets de réglage : Pleine page, 11 e 17 w, A3 w, B4 w, 8,5 e 14 w, A4 w, 8,5 e 11 w, 8K w, 12 e 18 w, Personn., SRA4 w REMARQUE Si [Pleine page] est sélectionné, la valeur introduite s'appliquera à tous les formats. Si c'est un format papier spécifique qui est sélectionné, la valeur de réglage sera égale à la valeur introduite augmentée de la valeur précédemment spécifiée pour [Pleine page]. 1 Appuyez sur [Réglage] sur l'écran Machine pour afficher l'écran Menu de réglage. 2 Appuyez sur [02 Réglages finition], [06 Unité pliage (Plieuse).], et [01 Réglage Pliage en 2] dans cet ordre. L'écran Réglage Pliage en 2 s'affiche. 3 Sélectionnez le format à régler avec [+] ou [,] pour faire défiler les formats. Nombre de trous Tolérance 2 trous/4 trous 10,5 +/- 4,0 mm ineo 1052/1250 11-49 11.4 [02 Réglages finition] (Unité de pliage FD-503) 11 4 Appuyez sur [Impression]. 5 Chargez du papier au format à régler dans le magasin que vous avez sélectionné à l'étape 3 et sélectionnez la touche de ce magasin. 6 Appuyez sur Départ sur le panneau de contrôle. La machine éjecte un jeu. 7 Mesurez le désaxement entre les bords de la feuille imprimée. 8 Appuyez sur [Fermer] pour restaurer l'écran Réglage Pliage en 2. 9 Si un réglage s'avère nécessaire, utilisez le clavier de l'écran tactile ou le clavier du panneau de contrôle pour saisir les données de réglage. % Plage de réglage : -50 (court) à +50 (long) (1 pas = 0,1 mm) % Utilisez [+<->-] pour indiquer si la valeur est positive ou négative. % La mesure L1 réalisée à l'étape L1 1 diminue si la valeur entrée est positive et augmente si la valeur introduite est négative. 10 Appuyez sur [Valider] pour changer les données actuelles. 11 Répétez les étapes de réglage de 4 à 10 jusqu'à ce que le résultat désiré soit obtenu. 12 Appuyez sur [Retour] pour restaurer l'écran Menu de réglage Unité pliage (Plieuse). 11.4.4 [06 Unité pliage (Plieuse)] - [02 Réglage pliage roulé] Réglez les positions de pli pour le mode Pliage roulé déterminées par l'Unité de pliage FD-503. Objets de réglage : Pleine page, 11 e 17 w, A3 w, B4 w, 8,5 e 14 w, A4 w, 8,5 e 11 w, 8K w, 12 e 18 w, Personn., SRA4 w REMARQUE Si vous procédez aux réglages Premier pli et Deuxième pli, veillez à commencer par le réglage Deuxième pli. La position du premier pli est calculée depuis le bord de la feuille, alors que le deuxième pli est calculé à partir de la position du premier pli. Par conséquent, la mesure (b) à l'étape 7 est sujette au changement de dans chaque position du pli. REMARQUE Si [Pleine page] est sélectionné, la valeur introduite s'appliquera à tous les formats. Si c'est un format papier spécifique qui est sélectionné, la valeur de réglage sera égale à la valeur introduite augmentée de la valeur précédemment spécifiée pour [Pleine page]. L : longueur du papier, L/2 : demi-longueur du papier L1 = L/2 +/- 1.0 mm L1 est la mesure effective du papier plié par la machine. L1 11 [02 Réglages finition] (Unité de pliage FD-503) 11-50 ineo 1052/1250 11.4 1 Appuyez sur [Réglage] sur l'écran Machine pour afficher l'écran Menu de réglage. 2 Appuyez sur [02 Réglages finition], [06 Unité pliage (Plieuse)] et [02 Réglage pliage roulé] dans cet ordre. L'écran Réglage du pliage roulé s'affiche. 3 Sélectionnez le format à régler avec [+] ou [,] pour faire défiler les formats. 4 Appuyez sur [Impression]. 5 Chargez du papier au format à régler dans le magasin que vous avez sélectionné à l'étape 3 et sélectionnez la touche de ce magasin. 6 Appuyez sur Départ sur le panneau de contrôle. La machine éjecte un jeu. 7 Mesurez les dimensions (a) et (b) de la feuille imprimée. Tolérance : a = +/- 1,0 mm, b = +/- 1,0 mm 8 Appuyez sur [Fermer] pour restaurer l'écran Réglage du pliage roulé. 9 Sélectionnez [Deuxième pli]. 10 Si un réglage s'avère nécessaire, utilisez le clavier de l'écran tactile ou le clavier du panneau de contrôle pour saisir les données de réglage. Format papier a b 11 e 17 w 142,9 mm 145,9 mm A3 w 139,0 mm 142,0 mm B4 w 120,3 mm 123,3 mm 8,5 e 14 w 117,5 mm 120,5 mm A4 w 98,0 mm 101,0 mm 8,5 e 11 w 92,1 mm 95,1 mm 8K w 129,0 mm 132,0 mm 12 e 18 w 151,4 mm 154,4 mm SRA4 w 105,6 mm 108,6 mm [1] Premier pli [2] Deuxième pli ineo 1052/1250 11-51 11.4 [02 Réglages finition] (Unité de pliage FD-503) 11 % Plage de réglage : -50 (bas) à +50 (haut) (1 pas = 0,1 mm) % Utilisez [+<->-] pour indiquer si la valeur est positive ou négative. % La mesure (a) réalisée à l'étape 7 augmente si la valeur entrée est positive, et diminue si la valeur introduite est négative. 11 Appuyez sur [Valider] pour changer les données actuelles. 12 Sélectionnez [Premier pli]. 13 Répétez l'étape 10. % La mesure (b) réalisée à l'étape 7 augmente si la valeur entrée est positive, et diminue si la valeur introduite est négative. 14 Appuyez sur [Valider] pour changer les données actuelles. 15 Répétez les étapes 4 à 14 jusqu'à ce que le résultat désiré soit obtenu. 16 Appuyez sur [Retour] pour restaurer l'écran Menu de réglage Unité pliage (Plieuse). 11.4.5 [06 Unité pliage (Plieuse)] - [03 Réglage pliage en accordéon] Réglez les positions de pli pour le mode Pliage en accordéon déterminées par l'Unité de pliage FD-503. Objets de réglage : Pleine page, 11 e 17 w, A3 w, B4 w, 8,5 e 14 w, A4 w, 8,5 e 11 w, 8K w, 12 e 18 w, Personn., SRA4 w REMARQUE Si vous procédez aux réglages Premier pli et Deuxième pli, veillez à commencer par le réglage Deuxième pli. La position du premier pli est calculée depuis le bord de la feuille, alors que le deuxième pli est calculé à partir de la position du premier pli. Par conséquent, la mesure (b) à l'étape 7 est sujette au changement de dans chaque position du pli. REMARQUE Si [Pleine page] est sélectionné, la valeur introduite s'appliquera à tous les formats. Si c'est un format papier spécifique qui est sélectionné, la valeur de réglage sera égale à la valeur introduite augmentée de la valeur précédemment spécifiée pour [Pleine page]. 1 Appuyez sur [Réglage] sur l'écran Machine pour afficher l'écran Menu de réglage. 2 Appuyez sur [02 Réglages finition], [06 Unité pliage (Plieuse)] et [03 Réglage pliage en accordéon] dans cet ordre. L'écran Réglage du pliage en accordéon s'affiche. 3 Sélectionnez le format à régler avec [+] ou [,] pour faire défiler les formats. 4 Appuyez sur [Impression]. 5 Chargez du papier au format à régler dans le magasin que vous avez sélectionné à l'étape 3 et sélectionnez la touche de ce magasin. 11 [02 Réglages finition] (Unité de pliage FD-503) 11-52 ineo 1052/1250 11.4 6 Appuyez sur Départ sur le panneau de contrôle. La machine éjecte un jeu. 7 Mesurez les dimensions (a) et (b) de la feuille imprimée. Tolérance : a +/- 1,0 mm, b +/- 1,0 mm 8 Appuyez sur [Fermer] pour restaurer l'écran Réglage du pliage en accordéon. 9 Sélectionnez [Deuxième pli]. 10 Si un réglage s'avère nécessaire, utilisez le clavier de l'écran tactile ou le clavier du panneau de contrôle pour saisir les données de réglage. % Plage de réglage : -50 (bas) à +50 (haut) (1 pas = 0,1 mm) % Utilisez [+<->-] pour indiquer si la valeur est positive ou négative. % La mesure (a) réalisée à l'étape 7 augmente si la valeur entrée est positive, et diminue si la valeur introduite est négative. 11 Appuyez sur [Valider] pour changer les données actuelles. 12 Sélectionnez [Premier pli]. 13 Répétez l'étape 10. % La mesure (b) réalisée à l'étape 7 augmente si la valeur entrée est positive, et diminue si la valeur introduite est négative. 14 Appuyez sur [Valider] pour changer les données actuelles. 15 Répétez les étapes 4 à 14 jusqu'à ce que le résultat désiré soit obtenu. 16 Appuyez sur [Retour] pour restaurer l'écran Menu de réglage Unité pliage (Plieuse). Format papier a b 11 e 17 w 289,9 mm 147,9 mm A3 w 282,0 mm 144,0 mm B4 w 243,7 mm 123,3 mm 8,5 e 14 w 238,1 mm 120,5 mm A4 w 199,0 mm 101,0 mm 8,5 e 11 w 187,3 mm 95,1 mm 8K w 262,0 mm 134,0 mm 12 e 18 w 306,8 mm 156,4 mm SRA4 w 214,3 mm 108,6 mm [1] Premier pli [2] Deuxième pli ineo 1052/1250 11-53 11.4 [02 Réglages finition] (Unité de pliage FD-503) 11 11.4.6 [06 Unité pliage (Plieuse)] - [04 Réglage pliage économique] Réglez les positions de pli pour le mode Pliage économique déterminées par l'Unité de pliage FD-503. Objets de réglage : Pleine page, 11 e 17 w, A3 w, B4 w, 8,5 e 14 w,A4 w, 8,5 e 11 w, 8K w, 12 e 18 w, SRA4 w, Personn. (380-458 mm), Personn. (279-379 mm) REMARQUE Si vous procédez aux réglages Premier pli et Deuxième pli, veillez à commencer par le réglage Premier pli. La position du premier pli est calculée depuis le bord de la feuille, alors que le deuxième pli est calculé à partir de la position du premier pli. Par conséquent, la mesure (b) à l'étape 7 est sujette au changement de dans chaque position du pli. REMARQUE Si [Pleine page] est sélectionné, la valeur introduite s'appliquera à tous les formats. Si c'est un format papier spécifique qui est sélectionné, la valeur de réglage sera égale à la valeur introduite augmentée de la valeur précédemment spécifiée pour [Pleine page]. 1 Appuyez sur [Réglage] sur l'écran Machine pour afficher l'écran Menu de réglage. 2 Appuyez sur [02 Réglages finition], [06 Unité pliage (Plieuse)], et [04 Réglage pliage économique] dans cet ordre. L'écran Réglage du pliage économique s'affiche. 3 Sélectionnez le format à régler avec [+] ou [,] pour faire défiler les formats. 4 Appuyez sur [Impression]. 5 Chargez du papier au format à régler dans le magasin que vous avez sélectionné à l'étape 3 et sélectionnez la touche de ce magasin. 6 Appuyez sur Départ sur le panneau de contrôle. La machine éjecte un jeu. 7 Mesurez les dimensions (a) et (b) de la feuille imprimée. Tolérance : a +/- 1,0 mm, b +/- 1,0 mm Format papier a b 11 e 17 w 214,4 mm 106,7 mm A3 w 208,5 mm 103,8 mm B4 w 180,5 mm 89,8 mm 8,5 e 14 w 176,3 mm 87,7 mm A4 w 147,0 mm 73,0 mm 8,5 e 11 w 138,2 mm 68,6 mm 8K w 193,5 mm 96,3 mm 12 e 18 w 227,1 mm 113,1 mm SRA4 w 158,5 mm 78,7 mm 11 [02 Réglages finition] (Unité de pliage FD-503) 11-54 ineo 1052/1250 11.4 8 Appuyez sur [Fermer] pour Réglage pliage économique. 9 Sélectionnez [Premier pli]. 10 Si un réglage s'avère nécessaire, utilisez le clavier de l'écran tactile ou le clavier du panneau de contrôle pour saisir les données de réglage. % Plage de réglage : -50 (bas) à +50 (haut) (1 pas = 0,1 mm) % Utilisez [+<->-] pour indiquer si la valeur est positive ou négative. % La mesure (a) réalisée à l'étape 7 augmente si la valeur entrée est positive, et diminue si la valeur introduite est négative. 11 Appuyez sur [Valider] pour changer les données actuelles. 12 Sélectionnez [Deuxième pli]. 13 Répétez l'étape 10. % La mesure (b) réalisée à l'étape 7 augmente si la valeur entrée est positive, et diminue si la valeur introduite est négative. 14 Appuyez sur [Valider] pour changer les données actuelles. 15 Répétez les étapes 4 à 14 jusqu'à ce que le résultat désiré soit obtenu. 16 Appuyez sur [Retour] pour restaurer l'écran Menu de Unité pliage (Plieuse). 11.4.7 [06 Unité pliage (Plieuse)] - [05 Réglage pliage en Z] Réglez les positions de pli pour le mode Pliage en Z déterminées par l'Unité de pliage FD-503. Objets de réglage : Pleine page, 11 e 17 w, A3 w, B4 w, 8,5 e 14 w, A4 w, 8,5 e 11 w, 8K w, 12 e 18 w, Personn., SRA4 w REMARQUE Si vous procédez aux réglages Premier pli et Deuxième pli, veillez à commencer par le réglage Premier pli. La position du premier pli est calculée depuis le bord de la feuille, alors que le deuxième pli est calculé à partir de la position du premier pli. Par conséquent, la mesure (b) à l'étape 7 est sujette au changement de dans chaque position du pli. REMARQUE Si [Pleine page] est sélectionné, la valeur introduite s'appliquera à tous les formats. Si c'est un format papier spécifique qui est sélectionné, la valeur de réglage sera égale à la valeur introduite augmentée de la valeur précédemment spécifiée pour [Pleine page]. [1] Premier pli [2] Deuxième pli ineo 1052/1250 11-55 11.4 [02 Réglages finition] (Unité de pliage FD-503) 11 1 Appuyez sur [Réglage] sur l'écran Machine pour afficher l'écran Menu de réglage. 2 Appuyez sur [02 Réglages finition], [06 Unité pliage (Plieuse).] et [05 Réglage pliage en Z] dans cet ordre. L'écran de Réglage de pliage en Z s'affiche. 3 Sélectionnez le format à régler avec [+] ou [,] pour faire défiler les formats. 4 Appuyez sur [Impression]. 5 Chargez du papier au format à régler dans le magasin que vous avez sélectionné à l'étape 3 et sélectionnez la touche de ce magasin. 6 Appuyez sur Départ sur le panneau de contrôle. La machine éjecte un jeu. 7 Mesurez les dimensions (a) et (b) de la feuille imprimée. Tolérance : a +/- 1,0 mm, b +/- 1,0 mm 8 Appuyez sur [Fermer] pour restaurer l'écran Réglage de pliage en Z. 9 Sélectionnez [Premier pli]. 10 Si un réglage s'avère nécessaire, utilisez le clavier de l'écran tactile ou le clavier du panneau de contrôle pour saisir les données de réglage. Format papier a b 11 e 17 w 108,5 mm 111,5 mm A3 w 105,5 mm 108,5 mm B4 w 91,5 mm 94,5 mm 8,5 e 14 w 94,0 mm - A4 w 74,8 mm 77,8 mm 8,5 e 11 w 70,4 mm 73,4 mm 8K w 98,0 mm 101,0 mm 12 e 18 w 114,8 mm 117,8 mm SRA4 w 80,5 mm 83,5 mm [1] Premier pli [2] Deuxième pli 11 [02 Réglages finition] (Unité de pliage FD-503) 11-56 ineo 1052/1250 11.4 % Plage de réglage : -50 (bas) à +50 (haut) (1 pas = 0,1 mm) % Utilisez [+<->-] pour indiquer si la valeur est positive ou négative. % La mesure (a) réalisée à l'étape 7 augmente si la valeur entrée est positive, et diminue si la valeur introduite est négative. 11 Appuyez sur [Valider] pour changer les données actuelles. 12 Sélectionnez [Deuxième pli]. 13 Répétez l'étape 10. % La mesure (b) réalisée à l'étape 7 augmente si la valeur entrée est positive, et diminue si la valeur introduite est négative. 14 Appuyez sur [Valider] pour changer les données actuelles. 15 Répétez les étapes 4 à 14 jusqu'à ce que le résultat désiré soit obtenu. 16 Appuyez sur [Retour] pour restaurer l'écran Menu de Unité pliage (Plieuse). 11.4.8 [06 Unité pliage (Plieuse)] - [06 Réglage pliage portefeuille] Réglez les positions de pli pour le mode Pliage portefeuille déterminées par l'Unité de pliage FD-503. Objets de réglage : Pleine page, 11 e 17 w, A3 w, B4 w, 8,5 e 14 w, A4 w, 8,5 e 11 w, 8K w, 12 e 18 w, Personn., SRA4 w REMARQUE Si vous réglez Premier pli, Deuxième pli et Troisième pli en une seule fois, veillez à commencer par le réglage Premier pli et respecter cet ordre. La position du premier pli est calculée depuis le bord de la feuille, alors que le deuxième pli est calculé à partir de la position du premier, et que la position du troisième est calculée à partir de celle du deuxième pli. Par conséquent, les mesures (a), (b) et (c) réalisées à l'étape 7 sont sujettes au changement dans chaque position du pli. REMARQUE Si [Pleine page] est sélectionné, la valeur introduite s'appliquera à tous les formats. Si c'est un format papier spécifique qui est sélectionné, la valeur de réglage sera égale à la valeur introduite augmentée de la valeur précédemment spécifiée pour [Pleine page]. 1 Appuyez sur [Réglage] sur l'écran Machine pour afficher l'écran Menu de réglage. 2 Appuyez sur [02 Réglages finition], [06 Unité pliage (Plieuse).] et [06 Réglage pliage portefeuille] dans cet ordre. L'écran Réglage du pliage en portefeuille s'affiche. 3 Sélectionnez le format à régler avec [+] ou [,] pour faire défiler les formats. 4 Appuyez sur [Impression]. ineo 1052/1250 11-57 11.4 [02 Réglages finition] (Unité de pliage FD-503) 11 5 Chargez du papier au format à régler dans le magasin que vous avez sélectionné à l'étape 3 et sélectionnez la touche de ce magasin. 6 Appuyez sur Départ sur le panneau de contrôle. La machine éjecte un jeu. 7 Mesurez les dimensions (a), (b), et (c) de la feuille imprimée. Tolérance : a +/- 1,0 mm, b +/- 1,0 mm, c +/- 1,0 mm 8 Appuyez sur [Fermer] pour restaurer l'écran Réglage du pliage en portefeuille. 9 Sélectionnez [Premier pli]. 10 Si un réglage s'avère nécessaire, utilisez le clavier de l'écran tactile ou le clavier du panneau de contrôle pour saisir les données de réglage. % Plage de réglage : Premier pli/Troisième pli : -50 (long) à +50 (court) (1 pas = 0,1 mm) Deuxième pli : -50 (haut) à +50 (bas) (1 pas = 0,1 mm) % Utilisez [+<->-] pour indiquer si la valeur est positive ou négative. % La mesure (a) réalisée à l'étape 7 augmente si la valeur entrée est positive, et diminue si la valeur introduite est négative. 11 Appuyez sur [Valider] pour changer les données actuelles. 12 Appuyez sur [Deuxième pli] ou [Troisième pli] et procédez de même pour effectuer un réglage selon les besoins. % Dans Deuxième pli, la mesure (b) réalisée à l'étape 7 diminue si la valeur entrée est positive, et augmente si la valeur introduite est négative. % Dans Troisième pli, la mesure (c) réalisée à l'étape 7 augmente si la valeur entrée est positive, et diminue si la valeur introduite est négative. 13 Appuyez sur [Valider] pour changer les données actuelles. 14 Répétez les étapes 4 à 13 jusqu'à ce que le résultat désiré soit obtenu. 15 Appuyez sur [Retour] pour restaurer l'écran Menu de Unité pliage (Plieuse). Format papier a b C 11 e 17 w 106,5 mm 218,9 mm 109,5 mm A3 w 103,5 mm 213,0 mm 106,5 mm B4 w 89,5 mm 185,0 mm 92,5 mm 8,5 e 14 w 87,4 mm 180,8 mm 90,4 mm A4 w 72,8 mm 151,5 mm 75,8 mm 8,5 e 11 w 68,4 mm 142,7 mm 71,4 mm 8K w 96,0 mm 198,0 mm 99,0 mm 12 e 18 w 112,8 mm 231,6 mm 115,8 mm SRA4 w 78,5 mm 163,0 mm 81,5 mm [1] Premier pli [2] Deuxième pli [3] Troisième pli 11 [02 Réglages finition] (Empileur grande capacité LS-505) 11-58 ineo 1052/1250 11.5 11.5 [02 Réglages finition] (Empileur grande capacité LS-505) 11.5.1 [07 Empileur] - [01 Alignement perforation] Réglez la position des plaques de réglage si les feuilles produites présentent un alignement incorrect dans le sens transversal sur le bac de l'Empileur grande capacité LS-505. Objets de réglage : Empileur N° 1, Empileur N° 2, Empileur Nombre3 1 Appuyez sur [Réglage] sur l'écran Machine pour afficher l'écran Menu de réglage. 2 Appuyez sur [02 Réglages finition], [07 Empileur] et [01 Alignement perforation] dans cet ordre. L'écran Alignement perforation s'affiche. 3 Si l'empileur grande capacité LS-505 est utilisé en double, sélectionnez [Empileur N° 1], [Empileur N° 2] ou [Empileur Nombre3]. 4 Appuyez sur [Impression]. 5 Chargez du papier A3 (11 e 17) w dans un magasin, puis sélectionnez la touche de ce magasin. 6 Appuyez sur Départ sur le panneau de contrôle. La machine éjecte un jeu. 7 Vérifiez le désaxement (a) sur les feuilles délivrées dans l'empileur. Tolérance : a = 5 mm max. (alignement incorrect dans le jeu éjecté), 10 mm max. (alignement incorrect parmi les jeux éjectés) 8 Appuyez sur [Fermer] pour restaurer l'écran Alignement perforation. 9 Si un réglage s'avère nécessaire, utilisez le clavier de l'écran tactile ou le clavier du panneau de contrôle pour saisir les données de réglage. % Plage de réglage : -20 (étroit) à +20 (large) (1 pas = 0,1 mm) % Utilisez [+<->-] pour indiquer si la valeur est positive ou négative. 10 Appuyez sur [Valider] pour changer les données actuelles. 11 Répétez les étapes de réglage de 4 à 10 jusqu'à ce que le résultat désiré soit obtenu. ineo 1052/1250 11-59 11.5 [02 Réglages finition] (Empileur grande capacité LS-505) 11 12 Appuyez sur [Retour] pour restaurer l'écran Empileur. 11.5.2 [07 Empileur] - [02 Taquage longueur papier] Réglez la position de la butée avant si les feuilles produites présentent un alignement incorrect dans le sens de passage du papier sur le bac de l'Empileur grande capacité LS-505. Objets de réglage : Empileur N° 1, Empileur N° 2, Empileur Nombre3 1 Appuyez sur [Réglage] sur l'écran Machine pour afficher l'écran Menu de réglage. 2 Appuyez sur [02 Réglages finition], [07 Empileur], et [02 Taquage longueur papier] dans cet ordre. L'écran Taquage longueur papier s'affiche. 3 Si l'empileur grande capacité LS-505 est utilisé en double, sélectionnez [Empileur N° 1], [Empileur N° 2] ou [Empileur Nombre3]. 4 Appuyez sur [Impression]. 5 Chargez du papier A3 (11 e 17) w dans un magasin, puis sélectionnez la touche de ce magasin. 6 Appuyez sur Départ sur le panneau de contrôle. La machine éjecte un jeu. 7 Vérifiez le désaxement (a) sur les feuilles délivrées dans l'empileur. Tolérance : a = 5 mm max. (alignement incorrect dans le jeu éjecté), 20 +/- 10 mm max. (alignement incorrect parmi les jeux éjectés) 8 Appuyez sur [Fermer] pour restaurer l'écran Taquage longueur papier. 9 Si un réglage s'avère nécessaire, utilisez le clavier de l'écran tactile ou le clavier du panneau de contrôle pour saisir les données de réglage. % Plage de réglage : -20 (sens opposé) à +20 (sens introduction papier) (1 pas = 0,1 mm) % Utilisez [+<->-] pour indiquer si la valeur est positive ou négative. 10 Appuyez sur [Valider] pour changer les données actuelles. 11 [02 Réglages finition] (Empileur grande capacité LS-505) 11-60 ineo 1052/1250 11.5 11 Répétez les étapes de réglage de 4 à 10 jusqu'à ce que le résultat désiré soit obtenu. 12 Appuyez sur [Retour] pour restaurer l'écran Empileur. ineo 1052/1250 11-61 11.6 [02 Réglages finition] (Piqueuse à cheval SD-506) 11 11.6 [02 Réglages finition] (Piqueuse à cheval SD-506) 11.6.1 [08 Réglage Piqueuse à cheval] - [01 Réglage centrage des agrafes] Réglez la position centrale des agrafes déterminée par la Piqueuse à cheval SD-506. REMARQUE Procédez à ce réglage à la fin du [08 Réglage Piqueuse à cheval] - [04 Réglage Pliage en 2]. 1 Appuyez sur [Réglage] sur l'écran Machine pour afficher l'écran Menu de réglage. 2 Appuyez sur [02 Réglages finition], [08 Réglage Piqueuse à cheval], et [01 Réglage centrage des agrafes] dans cet ordre. L'écran Réglage centrage de l'agrafage 2 points s'affiche. 3 Appuyez sur [Impression]. 4 Chargez du papier A3 (11 e 17) w dans un magasin, puis sélectionnez la touche de ce magasin. 5 Appuyez sur Départ sur le panneau de contrôle. La machine éjecte un jeu. REMARQUE Si le magasin de la piqueuse à cheval n'est pas tiré, la machine ne lancera pas l'impression, même si l'on appuie sur la touche Départ. Assurez-vous de tirer le magasin de la piqueuse à cheval. 6 Mesurez la différence (a) entre la ligne médiane et la position centrale des agrafes. Tolérance : a = 0 +/- 2 mm 7 Appuyez sur [Fermer] pour restaurer l'écran Réglage centrage de l'agrafe 2 points. 8 Si un réglage s'avère nécessaire, utilisez le clavier de l'écran tactile ou le clavier du panneau de contrôle pour saisir les données de réglage. % Plage de réglage : -20 (Vers la gauche) à +20 (Vers la droite) (1 pas = 0,1 mm) % Utilisez [+<->-] pour indiquer si la valeur est positive ou négative. [1] Position centrale des agrafes [2] Pliure papier 11 [02 Réglages finition] (Piqueuse à cheval SD-506) 11-62 ineo 1052/1250 11.6 9 Appuyez sur [Valider] pour changer les données actuelles. 10 Répétez les étapes 3 à 9 jusqu'à ce que le résultat désiré soit obtenu. 11 Appuyez sur [Retour] pour restaurer l'écran Piqueuse à cheval. 11.6.2 [08 Réglage Piqueuse à cheval] - [02 Taquage jeu agrafé] Réglez la largeur des plaques de réglage de la Piqueuse à cheval SD-506 à utiliser en mode Agrafage. Objets de réglage : Pleine page, 11 e 17 w, A3 w, B4 w, 8,5 e 14 w, A4 w, 8,5 e 11 w, B5 w, 8 e 13 w, 8,125 e 13,25 w, 8,5 e 13 w, 8,25 e 13 w, 8K w, 16K w, 12 e 18 w, A3W w, B4W w, A4W w, B5W w, 12 e 18W w, 11 e 17W w, 8,5 e 11W w, Personn., SRA3 w, SRA4 w REMARQUE Si [Pleine page] est sélectionné, la valeur introduite s'appliquera à tous les formats. Si c'est un format papier spécifique qui est sélectionné, la valeur de réglage sera égale à la valeur introduite augmentée de la valeur précédemment spécifiée pour [Pleine page]. 1 Appuyez sur [Réglage] sur l'écran Machine pour afficher l'écran Menu de réglage. 2 Appuyez sur [02 Réglages finition], [08 Réglage Piqueuse à cheval] et [02 Taquage jeu agrafé] dans cet ordre. L'écran Réglage Largeur Papier Agrafé s'affiche. 3 Sélectionnez le format à régler avec [+] ou [,] pour faire défiler les formats. 4 Appuyez sur [Impression]. 5 Chargez du papier au format à régler dans le magasin que vous avez sélectionné à l'étape 3 et sélectionnez la touche de ce magasin. 6 Appuyez sur Départ sur le panneau de contrôle. La machine éjecte un jeu. REMARQUE Si le magasin de la piqueuse à cheval n'est pas tiré, la machine ne lancera pas l'impression, même si l'on appuie sur la touche Départ. Assurez-vous de tirer le magasin de la piqueuse à cheval. ineo 1052/1250 11-63 11.6 [02 Réglages finition] (Piqueuse à cheval SD-506) 11 7 Vérifier si le jeu agrafé présente un alignement incorrect (a) (dû au fait que la largeur du papier spécifié est supérieure à la largeur actuelle), ou est gondolé (b) (dû au fait que la largeur du papier spécifié est inférieure à la largeur actuelle). Tolérance : a = 1 mm ou moins 8 Appuyez sur [Fermer] pour restaurer l'écran Réglage Largeur Papier Agrafé. 9 Si un réglage s'avère nécessaire, utilisez le clavier de l'écran tactile ou le clavier du panneau de contrôle pour saisir les données de réglage. % Plage de réglage : -20 (étroit) à +20 (large) (1 as = 0,1 mm) % Utilisez [+<->-] pour indiquer si la valeur est positive ou négative. % L'alignement perforation jeu agrafé est soumis aux conditions suivantes selon la largeur réelle du papier. Pour les formats de papier dont la largeur réelle est inférieure à 222 mm, comme A4 , l'espace entre agrafes sera automatiquement réglé sur 90 mm, même si l'on introduit une valeur ayant pour résultat de réduire à moins de 90 mm. 10 Appuyez sur [Valider] pour changer les données actuelles. 11 Répétez les étapes de réglage de 4 à 10 jusqu'à ce que le résultat désiré soit obtenu. 12 Appuyez sur [Retour] pour restaurer l'écran Réglage Piqueuse à cheval. 11.6.3 [08 Réglage Piqueuse à cheval] - [03 Espacement entre agrafes] Réglez l'espacement entre agrafes déterminé par la Piqueuse à cheval SD-506. Objets de réglage : Pleine page, 11 e 17 w, A3 w, B4 w, 8,5 e 14 w, A4 w, 8,5 e 11 w, B5 w, 8 e 13 w, 8,125 e 13,25 w, 8,5 e 13 w, 8,25 e 13 w, 8K w, 16K w, 12 e 18 w, A3W w, B4W w, A4W w, B5W w, 12 e 18W w, 11 e 17W w, 8,5 e 11W w, Personn., SRA3 w, SRA4 w REMARQUE Si [Pleine page] est sélectionné, la valeur introduite s'appliquera à tous les formats. Si c'est un format papier spécifique qui est sélectionné, la valeur de réglage sera égale à la valeur introduite augmentée de la valeur précédemment spécifiée pour [Pleine page]. Largeur réelle du papier Valeur minimum Valeur maximum Moins de 222 mm 90 mm Largeur réelle moins 90 mm 222 mm à 290 mm Non limité Non limité Plus de 290 mm Non limité 165 mm 11 [02 Réglages finition] (Piqueuse à cheval SD-506) 11-64 ineo 1052/1250 11.6 1 Appuyez sur [Réglage] sur l'écran Machine pour afficher l'écran Menu de réglage. 2 Appuyez sur [02 Réglages finition], [08 Réglage Piqueuse à cheval] et [03 Espacement entre agrafes] dans cet ordre. L'écran Espacement entre agrafes s'affiche. 3 Sélectionnez le format à régler avec [+] ou [,] pour faire défiler les formats. 4 Appuyez sur [Impression]. 5 Chargez du papier au format à régler dans le magasin que vous avez sélectionné à l'étape 3 et sélectionnez la touche de ce magasin. 6 Appuyez sur Départ sur le panneau de contrôle. La machine éjecte un jeu. REMARQUE Si le magasin de la piqueuse à cheval n'est pas tiré, la machine ne lancera pas l'impression, même si l'on appuie sur la touche Départ. Assurez-vous de tirer le magasin de la piqueuse à cheval. 7 Vérifiez l'espacement entre agrafes (a) du spécimen. Tolérance : a = b/2 +/- 2 mm 8 Appuyez sur [Fermer] pour restaurer l'écran Espacement entre agrafes. 9 Si un réglage s'avère nécessaire, utilisez le clavier de l'écran tactile ou le clavier du panneau de contrôle pour saisir les données de réglage. % Plage de réglage : -20 (étroit) à +20 (large) (1 pas = 0,1 mm) % Utilisez [+<->-] pour indiquer si la valeur est positive ou négative. % La plage disponible pour le réglage varie en fonction des formats de papier. La valeur minimum est subordonnée à la distance de déplacement de l'agrafeuse, alors que la valeur maximum nécessite que les guides de sortie et l'agrafeuse n'interfèrent pas à l'intérieur de la piqueuse à cheval. B5 w : réglage non disponible (90 mm fixés) B4 w : -20 à +20 mm (108,5 à 148,5 mm) A4 w : -14 à +14 mm (91 à 119 mm) A3 w : -20 à +16,5 mm (128,5 à 165 mm) 10 Appuyez sur [Valider] pour changer les données actuelles. 11 Répétez les étapes de réglage de 4 à 10 jusqu'à ce que le résultat désiré soit obtenu. 12 Appuyez sur [Retour] pour restaurer l'écran Réglage Piqueuse à cheval. ineo 1052/1250 11-65 11.6 [02 Réglages finition] (Piqueuse à cheval SD-506) 11 11.6.4 [08 Réglage Piqueuse à cheval] - [04 Réglage Pliage en 2] Réglez la position de pliage en 2 déterminée par la Piqueuse à cheval SD-506. Objets de réglage : Pleine page, 11 e 17 w, A3 w, B4 w, 8,5 e 14 w, A4 w, 8,5 e 11 w, B5 w, 8 e 13 w, 8,125 e 13,25 w, 8,5 e 13 w, 8,25 e 13 w, 8K w, 16K w, 12 e 18 w, A3W w, B4W w, A4W w, B5W w, 12 e 18W w, 11 e 17W w, 8,5 e 11W w, Personn., SRA3 w, SRA4 w, Bac insertion REMARQUE Si [Pleine page] est sélectionné, la valeur introduite s'appliquera à tous les formats. Si c'est un format papier spécifique qui est sélectionné, la valeur de réglage sera égale à la valeur introduite augmentée de la valeur précédemment spécifiée pour [Pleine page]. 1 Appuyez sur [Réglage] sur l'écran Machine pour afficher l'écran Menu de réglage. 2 Appuyez sur [02 Réglages finition], [08 Réglage Piqueuse à cheval] et [04 Réglage Pliage en 2] dans cet ordre. L'écran Pliage en 2 s'affiche. 3 Sélectionnez le format à régler avec [+] ou [,] pour faire défiler les formats. 4 Appuyez sur [Impression]. 5 Chargez du papier au format à régler dans le magasin que vous avez sélectionné à l'étape 3 et sélectionnez la touche de ce magasin. 6 Appuyez sur Départ sur le panneau de contrôle. La machine éjecte un jeu. REMARQUE Si le magasin de la piqueuse à cheval n'est pas tiré, la machine ne lancera pas l'impression, même si l'on appuie sur la touche Départ. Assurez-vous de tirer le magasin de la piqueuse à cheval. 7 Mesurez le désaxement entre les bords de la feuille imprimée. 8 Appuyez sur [Fermer] pour restaurer l'écran Réglage Pliage en 2. L : longueur du papier, L/2 : demi-longueur du papier L1 = L/2 +/- 1,5 mm L1 est la mesure effective du papier plié par la machine. L1 11 [02 Réglages finition] (Piqueuse à cheval SD-506) 11-66 ineo 1052/1250 11.6 9 Si un réglage s'avère nécessaire, utilisez le clavier de l'écran tactile ou le clavier du panneau de contrôle pour saisir les données de réglage. % Plage de réglage : -50 (court) à +50 (long) (1 pas = 0,1 mm) % Utilisez [+<->-] pour indiquer si la valeur est positive ou négative. % La mesure L1 réalisée à l'étape L1 1 augmente si la valeur entrée est positive et diminue si la valeur introduite est négative. 10 Appuyez sur [Valider] pour changer les données actuelles. 11 Répétez les étapes de réglage de 4 à 10 jusqu'à ce que le résultat désiré soit obtenu. 12 Appuyez sur [Retour] pour restaurer l'écran Réglage Piqueuse à cheval. 11.6.5 [08 Réglage Piqueuse à cheval] - [05 Pliage en 3 multiple] Réglez les positions de pli pour le mode Pliage roulé déterminées par la Piqueuse à cheval SD-506. Objets de réglage : Pleine page, A4 w, 8,5 e 11 w REMARQUE Si vous procédez aux réglages Premier pli et Deuxième pli, veillez à commencer par le réglage Premier pli. La position du premier pli est calculée depuis le bord de la feuille, alors que le deuxième pli est calculé à partir de la position du premier pli. Par conséquent, la mesure (b) à l'étape 7 est sujette au changement de dans chaque position du pli. REMARQUE Si [Pleine page] est sélectionné, la valeur introduite s'appliquera à tous les formats. Si c'est un format papier spécifique qui est sélectionné, la valeur de réglage sera égale à la valeur introduite augmentée de la valeur précédemment spécifiée pour [Pleine page]. 1 Appuyez sur [Réglage] sur l'écran Machine pour afficher l'écran Menu de réglage. 2 Appuyez sur [02 Réglages finition], [08 Réglage Piqueuse à cheval] et [05 Pliage en 3 multiple] dans cet ordre. L'écran Réglage Position Pliage en 3 s'affiche. 3 Sélectionnez le format à régler. 4 Appuyez sur [Impression]. 5 Chargez du papier au format à régler dans le magasin que vous avez sélectionné à l'étape 3 et sélectionnez la touche de ce magasin. 6 Appuyez sur Départ sur le panneau de contrôle. La machine éjecte un jeu. ineo 1052/1250 11-67 11.6 [02 Réglages finition] (Piqueuse à cheval SD-506) 11 7 Mesurez les dimensions (a) et (b) de la feuille imprimée. Tolérance : a +/- 1,5 mm, b +/- 1,5 mm 8 Appuyez sur [Fermer] pour restaurer l'écran Réglage Position Pliage en 3. 9 Sélectionnez [Premier pli]. 10 Si un réglage s'avère nécessaire, utilisez le clavier de l'écran tactile ou le clavier du panneau de contrôle pour saisir les données de réglage. % Plage de réglage : Premier pli : -100 (court) à +100 (long) (1 pas = 0,1 mm) Deuxième pli : -100 (long) à +100 (court) (1 pas = 0,1 mm) % Utilisez [+<->-] pour indiquer si la valeur est positive ou négative. % La mesure (b) réalisée à l'étape 7 diminue si la valeur entrée est positive, et augmente si la valeur introduite est négative. 11 Appuyez sur [Valider] pour changer les données actuelles. 12 Sélectionnez [Deuxième pli]. 13 Répétez l'étape 10. % La mesure (a) réalisée à l'étape 7 augmente si la valeur entrée est positive, et diminue si la valeur introduite est négative. 14 Appuyez sur [Valider] pour changer les données actuelles. 15 Répétez les étapes 4 à 14 jusqu'à ce que le résultat désiré soit obtenu. 16 Appuyez sur [Retour] pour restaurer l'écran Réglage Piqueuse à cheval. Format papier a b A4 w 97,5 +/- 1,5 mm 102,0 +/- 3,0 mm 8,5 e 11 w 91,6 +/- 1,5 mm 96,1 +/- 3,0 mm [1] Premier pli [2] Deuxième pli 11 [02 Réglages finition] (Piqueuse à cheval SD-506) 11-68 ineo 1052/1250 11.6 11.6.6 [08 Réglage Piqueuse à cheval] - [06 Largeur feuille pour pliage] Réglez la largeur des plaques de réglage de la Piqueuse à cheval SD-506 si les feuilles pliées en 2 ou en 3 présentent un alignement incorrect. Objets de réglage : Pleine page, 11 e 17 w, A3 w, B4 w, 8,5 e 14 w, A4 w, 8,5 e 11 w, B5 w, 8 e 13 w, 8,125 e 13,25 w, 8,5 e 13 w, 8,25 e 13 w, 8K w, 16K w, 12 e 18 w, A3W w, B4W w, A4W w, B5W w, 12 e 18W w, 11 e 17W w, 8,5 e 11W w, Personn., SRA3 w, SRA4 w, Bac insertion REMARQUE Si [Pleine page] est sélectionné, la valeur introduite s'appliquera à tous les formats. Si c'est un format papier spécifique qui est sélectionné, la valeur de réglage sera égale à la valeur introduite augmentée de la valeur précédemment spécifiée pour [Pleine page]. 1 Appuyez sur [Réglage] sur l'écran Machine pour afficher l'écran Menu de réglage. 2 Appuyez sur [02 Réglages finition], [08 Réglage Piqueuse à cheval] et [06 Largeur feuille pour pliage] dans cet ordre. L'écran Largeur de la feuille pour le pliage s'affiche. 3 Sélectionnez le format à régler avec [+] ou [,] pour faire défiler les formats. 4 Appuyez sur [Impression]. 5 Chargez du papier au format à régler dans le magasin que vous avez sélectionné à l'étape 3 et sélectionnez la touche de ce magasin. 6 Appuyez sur Départ sur le panneau de contrôle. La machine éjecte un jeu. 7 Recherchez tout alignement incorrect sur le jeu éjecté. a : Le désaxement se produit aléatoirement si la largeur du papier spécifié est supérieure à la largeur réelle. b : Le désaxement se produit dans un sens si la largeur du papier spécifié est inférieure à la largeur réelle. 8 Appuyez sur [Fermer] pour restaurer l'écran Largeur feuille pour pliage. 9 Si un réglage s'avère nécessaire, utilisez le clavier de l'écran tactile ou le clavier du panneau de contrôle pour saisir les données de réglage. % Plage de réglage : -50 (étroit) à 50 (largeur) (1 pas = 0,1 mm) % Utilisez [+<->-] pour indiquer si la valeur est positive ou négative. % Si le réglage est trop large, le désaxement peut empirer. ineo 1052/1250 11-69 11.6 [02 Réglages finition] (Piqueuse à cheval SD-506) 11 10 Appuyez sur [Valider] pour changer les données actuelles. 11 Répétez les étapes de réglage de 4 à 10 jusqu'à ce que le résultat désiré soit obtenu. 12 Appuyez sur [Retour] pour restaurer l'écran Réglage Piqueuse à cheval. 11.6.7 [08 Réglage Piqueuse à cheval] - [07 Massicotage] Réglez la largeur de massicotage déterminée par Piqueuse à cheval SD-506. La largeur de massicotage devrait être supérieure à 2,0 mm, sinon l'opération de massicotage risque de ne pas aboutir correctement. Objets de réglage : Pleine page, 11 e 17 w, A3 w, B4 w, 8,5 e 14 w, A4 w, 8,5 e 11 w, B5 w, 8 e 13 w, 8,125 e 13,25 w, 8,5 e 13 w, 8,25 e 13 w, 8K w, 16K w, 12 e 18 w, A3W w, B4W w, A4W w, B5W w, 12 e 18W w, 11 e 17W w, 8,5 e 11W w, Personn., SRA3 w, SRA4 w REMARQUE Si [Pleine page] est sélectionné, la valeur introduite s'appliquera à tous les formats. Si c'est un format papier spécifique qui est sélectionné, la valeur de réglage sera égale à la valeur introduite augmentée de la valeur précédemment spécifiée pour [Pleine page]. 1 Appuyez sur [Réglage] sur l'écran Machine pour afficher l'écran Menu de réglage. 2 Appuyez sur [02 Réglages finition], [08 Réglage Piqueuse à cheval] et [07 Massicotage] dans cet ordre. L'écran Massicotage s'affiche. 3 Sélectionnez le format à régler avec [+] ou [,] pour faire défiler les formats. 4 Appuyez sur [Impression]. 5 Chargez du papier au format à régler dans le magasin que vous avez sélectionné à l'étape 3 et sélectionnez la touche de ce magasin. 6 Appuyez sur Départ sur le panneau de contrôle. La machine éjecte un jeu. REMARQUE Si le magasin de la piqueuse à cheval n'est pas tiré, la machine ne lancera pas l'impression, même si l'on appuie sur la touche Départ. Assurez-vous de tirer le magasin de la piqueuse à cheval. 7 Vérifiez la largeur de massicotage (a) des feuilles produites. Tolérance : a = 2 mm ou plus 8 Appuyez sur [Fermer] pour restaurer l'écran Massicotage. 11 [02 Réglages finition] (Piqueuse à cheval SD-506) 11-70 ineo 1052/1250 11.6 9 Si un réglage s'avère nécessaire, utilisez le clavier de l'écran tactile ou le clavier du panneau de contrôle pour saisir les données de réglage. % Plage de réglage : -400 (bas) à +400 (haut) (1 pas = 0,1 mm) % Utilisez [+<->-] pour indiquer si la valeur est positive ou négative. % Entrez la valeur appropriée pour massicoter la couverture de 2,0 mm ou plus. Si la largeur de massicotage est inférieure à 2,0 mm, l'opération de massicotage risque de ne pas aboutir correctement. 10 Appuyez sur [Valider] pour changer les données actuelles. 11 Répétez les étapes 4 à 9 jusqu'à ce que le résultat désiré soit obtenu. 12 Appuyez sur [Retour] pour restaurer l'écran Réglage Piqueuse à cheval. 11.6.8 [08 Réglage Piqueuse à cheval] - [08 Réglage butée lame massicot] - [01 Sélect. compteur déplacement] La fréquence des opérations de massicotage peut entraîner la détérioration de la butée et provoquer des imperfections de massicotage. Indique le nombre de coupe entre chaque avance de la butée de lame de la piqueuse à cheval SD-506. REMARQUE La touche [08 Réglage butée lame massicot] est affichée uniquement en mode réglage ingénieur client. Contactez votre technicien SAV si nécessaire. 1 Appuyez sur [Réglage] sur l'écran Machine pour afficher l'écran Menu de réglage. 2 Appuyez sur [02 Réglages finition], [08 Réglage Piqueuse à cheval], [08 Réglage butée lame massicot] et [01 Sélect. compteur déplacement] dans cet ordre. L'écran Compteur pour le déplacement de la butée de lame du massicot s'affiche. 3 Sélectionnez [700], [500] ou [300]. 4 Appuyez sur [OK] pour restaurer l'écran Réglage de la butée de lame du massicot. ineo 1052/1250 11-71 11.6 [02 Réglages finition] (Piqueuse à cheval SD-506) 11 11.6.9 [08 Réglage Piqueuse à cheval] - [08 Réglage butée lame massicot] - [02 Sélect. du pas de déplacement] Indiquez la distance de déplacement de la butée de lame de la piqueuse à cheval SD-506. REMARQUE La touche [08 Réglage butée lame massicot] est affichée uniquement en mode réglage ingénieur client. Contactez votre technicien SAV si nécessaire. 1 Appuyez sur [Réglage] sur l'écran Machine pour afficher l'écran Menu de réglage. 2 Appuyez sur [02 Réglages finition], [08 Réglage Piqueuse à cheval], [08 Réglage butée lame massicot] et [02 Sélect. du pas de déplacement] dans cet ordre. L'écran Sélection du pas de déplacement s'affiche. 3 Sélectionnez [1,0], [1,5] ou [2,0] (unité : mm). 4 Appuyez sur [OK] pour restaurer l'écran Réglage butée lame massicot. 11 [02 Réglages Finition] (Thermorelieur PB-503) 11-72 ineo 1052/1250 11.7 11.7 [02 Réglages Finition] (Thermorelieur PB-503) 11.7.1 [09 Thermorelieur] - [01 Massicotage couverture] Réglez la largeur de massicotage sur le bord avant de la page de couverture de droite déterminée par le Thermorelieur PB-503. Objets du réglage : Magasin thermorelieur, Bac principal REMARQUE Effectuez ce réglage après avoir procédé au réglage [09 Thermorelieur] - [02 Position bord avant couvert.]. 1 Appuyez sur [Réglage] sur l'écran Machine pour afficher l'écran Menu de réglage. 2 Appuyez sur [02 Réglages finition], [09 Thermorelieur] et [01 Massicotage couverture] dans cet ordre. L'écran Largeur massicotage couvert. s'affiche. 3 Chargez les feuilles de couverture soit dans le Bac couvertures du thermorelieur soit dans tout autre magasin. 4 Chargez le papier destiné aux corps de document dans le magasin désiré. 5 Sélectionnez [Magasin thermorelieur] ou [Bac principal]. 6 Appuyez sur [Impression]. 7 Sélectionnez la touche du magasin chargé avec le papier destiné aux corps de document. 8 Appuyez sur Départ sur le panneau de contrôle. Un spécimen de livre thermorelié sera imprimé et éjecté. 9 Vérifiez que le bord de la page de couverture droite est parfaitement aligné sur celui de la page de couverture gauche. 10 Appuyez sur [Fermer] pour restaurer l'écran Largeur massicotage couvert. [1] Page de couverture gauche [2] Page de couverture droite [3] Largeur massicotée ineo 1052/1250 11-73 11.7 [02 Réglages Finition] (Thermorelieur PB-503) 11 11 Si un réglage s'avère nécessaire, utilisez le clavier de l'écran tactile ou le clavier du panneau de contrôle pour saisir les données de réglage. % Plage de réglage : -128 (court) à +127 (long) (1 pas = 0,1 mm) % Utilisez [+<->-] pour indiquer si la valeur est positive ou négative. 12 Appuyez sur [Valider] pour changer les données actuelles. 13 Répétez les étapes 6 à 12 jusqu'à ce que le résultat désiré soit obtenu. 14 Appuyez sur [Retour] pour restaurer l'écran Thermorelieur. 11.7.2 [09 Thermorelieur] - [02 Position bord avant couvert.] Réglez la position du bord avant de la page de couverture gauche déterminée par rapport au corps de document chargé Thermorelieur PB-503. Les formats auxquels cette section fait référence sont ceux des corps de document correspondant à des formats de couverture. Objets de réglage : Pleine page, 8,5 e 11 v, A4 v, A5 w, B5 v, A5 v, 5,5 e 8,5 v, Personnel, 16K v, 8,5 e 11W v, 5,5 e 8,5W v, A4W v, A5W v, B5W v REMARQUE Si [Pleine page] est sélectionné, la valeur introduite s'appliquera à tous les formats. Si c'est un format papier spécifique qui est sélectionné, la valeur de réglage sera égale à la valeur introduite augmentée de la valeur précédemment spécifiée pour [Pleine page]. 1 Appuyez sur [Réglage] sur l'écran Machine pour afficher l'écran Menu de réglage. 2 Appuyez sur [02 Réglages finition], [09 Thermorelieur], et [02 Position bord avant couvert.] dans cet ordre. L'écran Position du bord avant de la couverture s'affiche. 3 Chargez les feuilles de couverture soit dans le Bac couvertures du thermorelieur soit dans tout autre magasin. 4 Chargez le papier destiné aux corps de document dans le magasin désiré. 5 Sélectionnez [Bac principal] ou [Magasin TR]. 6 Sélectionnez le format à régler avec [+] ou [,] pour faire défiler les formats. % Le format auquel il est fait référence est celui des livres thermoreliés. 7 Appuyez sur [Impression]. 8 Sélectionnez la touche du magasin chargé avec le papier destiné aux corps de document. 9 Appuyez sur Départ sur le panneau de contrôle. Un spécimen de livre thermorelié sera imprimé et éjecté. 11 [02 Réglages Finition] (Thermorelieur PB-503) 11-74 ineo 1052/1250 11.7 10 Assurez-vous que le bord de la page de couverture gauche dépasse le corps de document de l'ampleur souhaitée. 11 Appuyez sur [Fermer] pour restaurer l'écran Position du bord avant de la couverture. 12 Si un réglage s'avère nécessaire, utilisez le clavier de l'écran tactile ou le clavier du panneau de contrôle pour saisir les données de réglage. % Plage de réglage : -128 (court) à +127 (long) (1 pas = 0,1 mm) % Utilisez [+<->-] pour indiquer si la valeur est positive ou négative. 13 Appuyez sur [Valider] pour changer les données actuelles. 14 Répétez les étapes 7 à 13 jusqu'à ce que le résultat désiré soit obtenu. 15 Appuyez sur [Retour] pour restaurer l'écran du menu Thermorelieur. 11.7.3 [09 Thermorelieur] - [03 Position angle façonnage dos] Réglez l'état des coins du dos de reliure des feuilles de couverture chargées dans le Thermorelieur PB-503. Objets de réglage : Haut/Bas (Avant), Haut/Bas (Arrière) 1 Appuyez sur [Réglage] sur l'écran Machine pour afficher l'écran Menu de réglage. 2 Appuyez sur [02 Réglages finition], [09 Thermorelieur], et [03 Position angle façonnage dos] dans cet ordre. L'écran Position de l’angle de façonnage du dos s'affiche. 3 Chargez les feuilles de couverture soit dans le Bac couvertures du thermorelieur soit dans tout autre magasin. 4 Chargez le papier destiné aux corps de document dans le magasin désiré. 5 Appuyez sur [Impression]. 6 Sélectionnez la touche du magasin chargé avec le papier destiné aux corps de document. 7 Appuyez sur Départ sur le panneau de contrôle. Un spécimen de livre thermorelié sera imprimé et éjecté. [1] Page de couverture gauche [2] Page de couverture droite [3] Longueur différentielle [4] Bord de la page de couverture gauche [5] Pages de texte ineo 1052/1250 11-75 11.7 [02 Réglages Finition] (Thermorelieur PB-503) 11 8 Vérifiez que le coin du dos de la couverture est façonné uniformément par rapport au sens transversal. 9 Appuyez sur [Fermer] pour restaurer l'écran Position de l’angle de façonnage du dos. 10 Sélectionnez [Haut/Bas (Avant),] or [Haut/Bas (Arrière)]. 11 Si un réglage s'avère nécessaire, utilisez le clavier de l'écran tactile ou le clavier du panneau de contrôle pour saisir les données de réglage. % Plage de réglage : -128 (bas) à +127 (haut), (1 pas = 0,1 mm) % Utilisez [+<->-] pour indiquer si la valeur est positive ou négative. 12 Appuyez sur [Valider] pour changer les données actuelles. 13 Répétez les étapes 7 à 12 jusqu'à ce que le résultat désiré soit obtenu. 14 Appuyez sur [Retour] pour restaurer l'écran du menu Thermorelieur. 11.7.4 [09 Thermorelieur] - [04 Position de départ encollage] Réglez la position de début d'encollage sur le corps de document sur le Thermorelieur PB-503. Les formats auxquels cette section fait référence sont ceux des corps de document correspondant à des formats de couverture. Objets de réglage : En avant : Pleine page, 8,5 e 11 v, A4 v, B5 v, A5 v, 5,5 e 8,5 v, 16K v, A4W v, B5W v, A5W v, 8,5 e 11W v, 5,5 e 8,5W v, Personn. Verso : Pleine page, 8,5 e 11 v, A4 v, B5 v, A5 v, 5,5 e 8,5 v, 16K v, A4W v, B5W v, A5W v, 8,5 e 11W v, 5,5 e 8,5W v, Personn. REMARQUE Si [Pleine page] est sélectionné, la valeur introduite s'appliquera à tous les formats. Si c'est un format papier spécifique qui est sélectionné, la valeur de réglage sera égale à la valeur introduite augmentée de la valeur précédemment spécifiée pour [Pleine page]. [1] Page de couverture gauche [2] Dos de reliure [3] Page de couverture droite [4] Sens transversal 11 [02 Réglages Finition] (Thermorelieur PB-503) 11-76 ineo 1052/1250 11.7 1 Appuyez sur [Réglage] sur l'écran Machine pour afficher l'écran Menu de réglage. 2 Appuyez sur [02 Réglages finition], [09 Thermorelieur] et [04 Position de départ encollage] dans cet ordre. L'écran Position de départ de l’encollage s'affiche. 3 Chargez les feuilles de couverture soit dans le Bac couvertures du thermorelieur soit dans tout autre magasin. 4 Chargez le papier destiné aux corps de document dans le magasin désiré. 5 Sélectionnez le format à régler avec [+] ou [,] pour faire défiler les formats. % Le format auquel il est fait référence est celui des livres thermoreliés. 6 Appuyez sur [Impression]. 7 Sélectionnez la touche du magasin chargé avec le papier destiné aux corps de document. 8 Appuyez sur Départ sur le panneau de contrôle. Un spécimen de livre thermorelié sera imprimé et éjecté. 9 Vérifiez que l'encollage commence au bon endroit sur les deux extrémités (encollage vers l'avant et encollage vers l'arrière) du dos de reliure du corps de document. 10 Appuyez sur [Fermer] pour restaurer l'écran Position de départ de l’encollage. 11 Sélectionnez [En avant] ou [Verso]. 12 Si un réglage s'avère nécessaire, utilisez le clavier de l'écran tactile ou le clavier du panneau de contrôle pour saisir les données de réglage. % Plage de réglage : -128 (plus tôt) à +127 (plus tard) (1 pas = 0,1 mm) % Utilisez [+<->-] pour indiquer si la valeur est positive ou négative. 13 Appuyez sur [Valider] pour changer les données actuelles. 14 Répétez les étapes 6 à 13 jusqu'à ce que le résultat désiré soit obtenu. 15 Appuyez sur [Retour] pour restaurer l'écran du menu Thermorelieur. [1] Pages de texte [2] Position de départ encollage vers l'arrière [3] Position de départ encollage vers l'avant ineo 1052/1250 11-77 11.7 [02 Réglages Finition] (Thermorelieur PB-503) 11 11.7.5 [09 Thermorelieur] - [05 Position arrêt de encollage] Réglez la position de fin d'encollage sur le corps de document sur le Thermorelieur PB-503. Les formats auxquels cette section fait référence sont ceux des corps de document correspondant à des formats de couverture. Objets de réglage : En avant : Pleine page, 8,5 e 11 v, A4 v, B5 v, A5 v, 5,5 e 8,5 v, 16K v, A4W v, B5W v, A5W v, 8,5 e 11W v, 5,5 e 8,5W v, Personn. Verso : Pleine page, 8,5 e 11 v, A4 v, B5 v, A5 v, 5,5 e 8,5 v, 16K v, A4W v, B5W v, A5W v, 8,5 e 11W v, 5,5 e 8,5W v, Personn. REMARQUE Si [Pleine page] est sélectionné, la valeur introduite s'appliquera à tous les formats. Si c'est un format papier spécifique qui est sélectionné, la valeur de réglage sera égale à la valeur introduite augmentée de la valeur précédemment spécifiée pour [Pleine page]. 1 Appuyez sur [Réglage] sur l'écran Machine pour afficher l'écran Menu de réglage. 2 Appuyez sur [02 Réglages finition], [09 Thermorelieur], et [05 Position arrêt de encollage] dans cet ordre. L'écran Position de l’ arrêt del’encollage s'affiche. 3 Chargez les feuilles de couverture soit dans le Bac couvertures du thermorelieur soit dans tout autre magasin. 4 Chargez le papier destiné aux corps de document dans le magasin désiré. 5 Sélectionnez le format à régler avec [+] ou [,] pour faire défiler les formats. % Le format auquel il est fait référence est celui des livres thermoreliés. 6 Appuyez sur [Impression]. 7 Sélectionnez la touche du magasin chargé avec le papier destiné aux corps de document. 8 Appuyez sur Départ sur le panneau de contrôle. Un spécimen de livre thermorelié sera imprimé et éjecté. 11 [02 Réglages Finition] (Thermorelieur PB-503) 11-78 ineo 1052/1250 11.7 9 Vérifiez que l'encollage finit au bon endroit sur les deux extrémités (encollage vers l'avant et encollage vers l'arrière) du dos de reliure du corps de document. 10 Appuyez sur [Fermer] pour restaurer l'écran Position de l’arrêt de l’encollage. 11 Sélectionnez [En avant] ou [Verso]. 12 Si un réglage s'avère nécessaire, utilisez le clavier de l'écran tactile ou le clavier du panneau de contrôle pour saisir les données de réglage. % Plage de réglage : -128 (plus tôt) à +127 (plus tard) (1 pas = 0,1 mm) % Utilisez [+<->-] pour indiquer si la valeur est positive ou négative. 13 Appuyez sur [Valider] pour changer les données actuelles. 14 Répétez les étapes 6 à 13 jusqu'à ce que le résultat désiré soit obtenu. 15 Appuyez sur [Retour] pour restaurer l'écran du menu Thermorelieur. 11.7.6 [09 Thermorelieur] - [06 Réglage de la température] Ce réglage permet de contrôler l'état de la colle à sécher en agissant sur la température des capteurs situés à l'intérieur de la réserve chauffante et sur celle de l'applicateur de colle du Thermorelieur PB-503. Il y a quatre types de capteurs. Réserve colle - Haut : La machine fournit les pastilles de colle dès qu'elle détecte que la température de la surface de la solution surface est inférieure au point de consigne. Il est recommandé que ce point soit réglé à une température supérieure, en cas d'utilisation dans les environnements thermiques susceptibles de fausser la détection sur la machine. Initiale : 132°C, Recommandée : 128 à 136°C Réserve colle - Moyen Réglez la température à atteindre après le préchauffage, et initier la rotation de l'applicateur. Un réglage élevé de température permettra stabiliser plus rapidement la température de la colle. Initiale : 145°C, Recommandée : 140 à 145°C Contactez votre SAV si vous désirez faire modifier un réglage concernant la Réserve de colle - Haut et Réserve de colle - Moyen. Réserve colle - Bas : Réglez la température de régulation de la résistance thermique. Température faible : Augmente la viscosité de la colle Température élevée : Diminue la viscosité de la colle Initiale : 185°C Recommandée : 180 à 190°C Applicateur colle : Réglez la température de régulation de la résistance du rouleau applicateur. Cet élément contribue également au chauffage de la colle. [1] Pages de texte [2] Position de fin d'encollage vers l'arrière [3] Position de fin d'encollage vers l'avant ineo 1052/1250 11-79 11.7 [02 Réglages Finition] (Thermorelieur PB-503) 11 Température faible : Augmente la viscosité de la colle Température élevée : Diminue la viscosité de la colle Initiale : 165°C Recommandée : 160 à 170°C REMARQUE Ne pas modifier inutilement le réglage de température des capteurs thermiques à l'intérieur du réservoir de colle. 1 Appuyez sur [Réglage] sur l'écran Machine pour afficher l'écran Menu de réglage. 2 Appuyez sur [02 Réglage unités fonction], [09 Thermorelieur] et [06 Réglage de la température] dans cet ordre. L'écran de Réglage de la température s'affiche. 3 Chargez les feuilles de couverture soit dans le Bac couvertures du thermorelieur soit dans tout autre magasin. 4 Chargez le papier destiné aux corps de document dans le magasin désiré. 5 Sélectionnez la touche de la réserve de colle ou de l'applicateur de colle dont la température doit être régulée. 6 Appuyez sur [Impression]. 7 Sélectionnez la touche du magasin chargé avec le papier destiné aux corps de document. 8 Appuyez sur Départ sur le panneau de contrôle. Un spécimen de livre thermorelié sera imprimé et éjecté. 9 Vérifiez que la colle appliquée sur le corps de document est en état satisfaisant. 10 Appuyez sur [Fermer] pour restaurer l'écran Réglage de la température. 11 Si un réglage s'avère nécessaire, utilisez le clavier de l'écran tactile ou le clavier du panneau de contrôle pour saisir les données de réglage. 12 Appuyez sur [Valider] pour changer les données actuelles. 13 Répétez les étapes 6 à 12 jusqu'à ce que le résultat désiré soit obtenu. 14 Appuyez sur [Retour] pour restaurer l'écran du menu Thermorelieur. 11 [02 Réglages Finition] (Thermorelieur PB-503) 11-80 ineo 1052/1250 11.7 11.7.7 [09 Thermorelieur] - [07 Taquage papier sens passage] Modifiez la largeur de réglage si les feuilles produites ne s'alignent pas dans la section du bac temporaire du Thermorelieur PB-503. Les formats auxquels cette section fait référence sont ceux des corps de document correspondant à des formats de couverture. Objets de réglage : Pleine page, 8,5 e 11 v, A4 v, B5 v, A5 v, 5,5 e 8,5 v, 16K v, A4W v, B5W v, A5W v, 8,5 e 11W v, 5,5 e 8,5W v, Personn. REMARQUE Procédez à ce réglage si la première moitié des pages du corps de document est désaxée lors de la réalisation de plusieurs livres thermoreliés. Si la dernière moitié des pages du corps de document sont mal alignées, procédez au réglage dans [09 Thermorelieur] - [08 Taquage feuilles Unité Press]. REMARQUE Si [Pleine page] est sélectionné, la valeur introduite s'appliquera à tous les formats. Si c'est un format papier spécifique qui est sélectionné, la valeur de réglage sera égale à la valeur introduite augmentée de la valeur précédemment spécifiée pour [Pleine page]. 1 Appuyez sur [Réglage] sur l'écran Machine pour afficher l'écran Menu de réglage. 2 Appuyez sur [02 Réglages finition], [09 Thermorelieur] et [07 Taquage papier sens passage] dans cet ordre. L'écran Position taquage feuilles Bac Temporaire s'affiche. 3 Chargez les feuilles de couverture soit dans le Bac couvertures du thermorelieur soit dans tout autre magasin. 4 Chargez le papier destiné aux corps de document dans le magasin désiré. 5 Sélectionnez le format à régler avec [+] ou [,] pour faire défiler les formats. % Le format auquel il est fait référence est celui des livres thermoreliés. 6 Appuyez sur [Impression]. 7 Sélectionnez la touche du magasin chargé avec le papier destiné aux corps de document. 8 Appuyez sur Départ sur le panneau de contrôle. Un spécimen de livre thermorelié sera imprimé et éjecté. 9 Vérifiez que le sens transversal est égal sur toutes les pages du corps de document. 10 S'il n'est pas égal sur toutes les pages, passez à l'étape suivante. Si une inégalité apparaît sur la dernière moitié des pages du corps de document alors que la première moitié semble être égale, procédez au réglage dans [09 Thermorelieur] - [08 Taquage feuilles Unité Press]. Appuyez sur [Fermer] pour restaurer l'écran Position taquage feuilles Bac Temporaire. ineo 1052/1250 11-81 11.7 [02 Réglages Finition] (Thermorelieur PB-503) 11 11 Si un réglage s'avère nécessaire, utilisez le clavier de l'écran tactile ou le clavier du panneau de contrôle pour saisir les données de réglage. % Plage de réglage : -20 (large) à +20 (étroit) (1 pas = 0,1 mm) % Utilisez [+<->-] pour indiquer si la valeur est positive ou négative. 12 Appuyez sur [Valider] pour changer les données actuelles. 13 Répétez les étapes 6 à 12 jusqu'à ce que le résultat désiré soit obtenu. 14 Appuyez sur [Retour] pour restaurer l'écran du menu Thermorelieur. 11.7.8 [09 Thermorelieur] - [08 Taquage feuilles Unité Press.] Modifiez la largeur de réglage dans le sens transversal si les feuilles produites présentent un alignement incorrect dans un corps de document sur le Thermorelieur PB-503. Les formats auxquels cette section fait référence sont ceux des corps de document correspondant à des formats de couverture. Objets de réglage : Pleine page, 8,5 e 11 v, A4 v, B5 v, A5 v, 5,5 e 8,5 v, 16K v, A4W v, B5W v, A5W v, 8,5 e 11W v, 5,5 e 8,5W v, Personn. REMARQUE Procédez à ce réglage si les pages du corps de document ne sont pas correctement alignées dans le sens transversal ou sur la dernière moitié des pages du corps de document, lors de la réalisation de plusieurs livres thermoreliés. Si la première moitié des pages du corps de document sont mal alignées, procédez au réglage dans [09 Thermorelieur] - 07 [Taquage papier sens passage]. REMARQUE Si [Pleine page] est sélectionné, la valeur introduite s'appliquera à tous les formats. Si c'est un format papier spécifique qui est sélectionné, la valeur de réglage sera égale à la valeur introduite augmentée de la valeur précédemment spécifiée pour [Pleine page]. 1 Appuyez sur [Réglage] sur l'écran Machine pour afficher l'écran Menu de réglage. 2 Appuyez sur [02 Réglages finition], [09 Thermorelieur] et [08 Taquage feuilles Unité Press.] dans cet ordre. L'écran Taquage papier sens latéral s'affiche. 3 Chargez les feuilles de couverture soit dans le Bac couvertures du thermorelieur soit dans tout autre magasin. 4 Chargez le papier destiné aux corps de document dans le magasin désiré. 5 Sélectionnez le format à régler avec [+] ou [,] pour faire défiler les formats. % Le format auquel il est fait référence est celui des livres thermoreliés. 6 Appuyez sur [Impression]. 7 Sélectionnez la touche du magasin chargé avec le papier destiné aux corps de document. 8 Appuyez sur Départ sur le panneau de contrôle. Un spécimen de livre thermorelié sera imprimé et éjecté. 11 [02 Réglages Finition] (Thermorelieur PB-503) 11-82 ineo 1052/1250 11.7 9 Vérifiez que le sens transversal est égal sur toutes les pages du corps de document. Si une inégalité apparaît sur la dernière moitié des pages du corps de document alors que la première moitié semble égale, passez à l'étape suivante. Si l'inégalité est présente sur toutes les pages, procédez au réglage [09 Thermorelieur] - [07 Taquage papier sens passage]. 10 Appuyez sur [Fermer] pour restaurer l'écran Taquage papier sens latéral. 11 Si un réglage s'avère nécessaire, utilisez le clavier de l'écran tactile ou le clavier du panneau de contrôle pour saisir les données de réglage. % Plage de réglage : -20 (large) à +20 (étroit) (1 pas = 0,1 mm) % Utilisez [+<->-] pour indiquer si la valeur est positive ou négative. 12 Appuyez sur [Valider] pour changer les données actuelles. 13 Répétez les étapes 6 à 12 jusqu'à ce que le résultat désiré soit obtenu. 14 Appuyez sur [Retour] pour restaurer l'écran du menu Thermorelieur. 11.7.9 [09 Thermorelieur] - [09 Alig couverture sens latéral] Modifiez la largeur de réglage en faisant correspondre les corps de document et les couvertures afin de régler leurs positions dans le sens transversal sur le Thermorelieur PB-503. Objets du réglage : Magasin thermorelieur, Bac principal 1 Appuyez sur [Réglage] sur l'écran Machine pour afficher l'écran Menu de réglage. 2 Appuyez sur [02 Réglages finition], [09 Thermorelieur] et [09 Alig couverture sens latéral] dans cet ordre. L'écran Posit. taquage couv sur plateau haut/bas s'affiche. 3 Chargez les feuilles de couverture soit dans le Bac couvertures du thermorelieur soit dans tout autre magasin. 4 Chargez le papier destiné aux corps de document dans le magasin désiré. 5 Sélectionnez [Magasin thermorelieur] ou [Bac principal]. 6 Appuyez sur [Impression]. 7 Sélectionnez la touche du magasin chargé avec le papier destiné aux corps de document. 8 Appuyez sur Départ sur le panneau de contrôle. Un spécimen de livre thermorelié sera imprimé et éjecté. 9 Vérifiez que le sens transversal du corps de document coïncide avec celle de la couverture. 10 Appuyez sur [Fermer] pour restaurer l'écran Posit. taquage couv sur plateau haut/bas. ineo 1052/1250 11-83 11.7 [02 Réglages Finition] (Thermorelieur PB-503) 11 11 Si un réglage s'avère nécessaire, utilisez le clavier de l'écran tactile ou le clavier du panneau de contrôle pour saisir les données de réglage. % Plage de réglage : -20 (large) à +20 (étroit) (1 pas = 0,1 mm) % Utilisez [+<->-] pour indiquer si la valeur est positive ou négative. 12 Appuyez sur [Valider] pour changer les données actuelles. 13 Répétez les étapes 6 à 12 jusqu'à ce que le résultat désiré soit obtenu. 14 Appuyez sur [Retour] pour restaurer l'écran du menu Thermorelieur. 11.7.10 [09 Thermorelieur] - [10 Alig couverture sens passage] Modifiez la largeur de réglage dans le sens de défilement du papier si les pages du corps de document présentent un alignement incorrect sur le Thermorelieur PB-503. Les formats auxquels cette section fait référence sont ceux des corps de document correspondant à des formats de couverture. Objets de réglage : Pleine page, 8,5 e 11 v, A4 v, B5 v, A5 v, 5,5 e 8,5 v, 16K v, A4W v, B5W v, A5W v, 8,5 e 11W v, 5,5 e 8,5W v, Personn. REMARQUE Si [Pleine page] est sélectionné, la valeur introduite s'appliquera à tous les formats. Si c'est un format papier spécifique qui est sélectionné, la valeur de réglage sera égale à la valeur introduite augmentée de la valeur précédemment spécifiée pour [Pleine page]. 1 Appuyez sur [Réglage] sur l'écran Machine pour afficher l'écran Menu de réglage. 2 Appuyez sur [02 Réglages finition], [09 Thermorelieur] et [10 Alig couverture sens passage] dans cet ordre. L'écran Posit. sens défilement Unité de Pression s'affiche. 3 Chargez les feuilles de couverture soit dans le Bac couvertures du thermorelieur soit dans tout autre magasin. 4 Chargez le papier destiné aux corps de document dans le magasin désiré. 5 Sélectionnez le format à régler avec [+] ou [,] pour faire défiler les formats. % Le format auquel il est fait référence est celui des livres thermoreliés. 6 Appuyez sur [Impression]. 7 Sélectionnez la touche du magasin chargé avec le papier destiné aux corps de document. 8 Appuyez sur Départ sur le panneau de contrôle. Un spécimen de livre thermorelié sera imprimé et éjecté. 9 Vérifiez que le sens de passage du papier est égal sur toutes les pages du corps de document. 10 Appuyez sur [Fermer] pour restaurer l'écran Posit. sens défilement Unité de Pression. 11 [02 Réglages Finition] (Thermorelieur PB-503) 11-84 ineo 1052/1250 11.7 11 Si un réglage s'avère nécessaire, utilisez le clavier de l'écran tactile ou le clavier du panneau de contrôle pour saisir les données de réglage. % Plage de réglage : -20 (large) à +20 (étroit) (1 pas = 0,1 mm) % Utilisez [+<->-] pour indiquer si la valeur est positive ou négative. 12 Appuyez sur [Valider] pour changer les données actuelles. 13 Répétez les étapes 6 à 12 jusqu'à ce que le résultat désiré soit obtenu. % Si la valeur entrée est trop grande, un mauvais alignement dans le sens de passage du papier peut se produire. D'un autre côte, si la valeur n'est pas assez grande, la plaque de régulation FD peut laisser des marques sur le papier. 14 Appuyez sur [Retour] pour restaurer l'écran du menu Thermorelieur. ineo 1052/1250 11-85 11.8 [02 Réglages finition] (Unité relais RU-510) 11 11.8 [02 Réglages finition] (Unité relais RU-510) REMARQUE Les réglages suivants sont possibles si l'Unité de pliage FD-503 dotée de la fonction perforation ou l'Unité de finition FS-532 dotée de l'Unité de perforation PK-522 est installée. 11.8.1 [10 Unité relais perfo multiple] - [01 Alignement perforation] Réglez la position de la plaque de régulation dans le sens transversal de l'Unité relais RU-510. Effectuez ce réglage si les perforations sont décalées transversalement. Objets de réglage : Pleine page, 11 e 17 w, A3 w, B4 w, 8,5 e 14 w, A4 w, 8,5 e 11 w, 8,5 e 11 v, A4 v, B5 v, A5 v, 5,5 e 8,5 v, 8 e 13 w, 8,125 e 13,25 w, 8,5 e 13 w, 8,25 e 13 w, 8K w, 16K v, 16K w, 12 e 18 w, A3W w, B4W w, A4W v, A4W w, B5W v, A5W v, 12 e 18W w, 11 e 17W w, 8,5 e 11W v, 8,5 e 11W w, 5,5 e 8,5W v, Personnel, SRA3 w, SRA4 w, 9 e 11 v REMARQUE Si [Pleine page] est sélectionné, la valeur introduite s'appliquera à tous les formats. Si c'est un format papier spécifique qui est sélectionné, la valeur de réglage sera égale à la valeur introduite augmentée de la valeur précédemment spécifiée pour [Pleine page]. 1 Appuyez sur [Réglage] sur l'écran Machine pour afficher l'écran Menu de réglage. 2 Appuyez sur [02 Réglages finition], [10 Unité relais perfo multiple] et [01 Alignement perforation] dans cet ordre. L'écran Alignement perforation s'affiche. 3 Sélectionnez le format à régler avec [+] ou [,] pour faire défiler les formats. 4 Appuyez sur [Impression]. 5 Chargez le papier spécifié à l'étape 3 et sélectionnez la touche du magasin correspondant. 6 Entrez 10 comme nombre d'exemplaires à imprimer et appuyez sur Départ sur le panneau de commande. Un spécimen perforé est produit. 7 Contrôlez la position des perforations. % Si les trous ne sont pas alignés, la largeur des plaques de régulation est supérieure à la largeur du papier. % Si les perforations sont gondolées, la largeur des plaques de régulation est inférieure à la largeur du papier. 8 Appuyez sur [Fermer] pour restaurer l'écran Alignement perforation. 11 [02 Réglages finition] (Unité relais RU-510) 11-86 ineo 1052/1250 11.8 9 Si un réglage s'avère nécessaire, utilisez le clavier de l'écran tactile ou le clavier du panneau de contrôle pour saisir les données de réglage. % Plage de réglage : -20 (étroit) à +20 (largeur) (1 pas = 0,1 mm) % Utilisez [+<->-] pour indiquer si la valeur est positive ou négative. % Réglez la valeur d'alignement de perforation au maximum (largeur maximale), puis réduisez-la pour déterminer le point d'alignement des perforations. 10 Appuyez sur [Valider] pour changer les données actuelles. 11 Répétez les étapes de réglage de 4 à 10 jusqu'à ce que le résultat désiré soit obtenu. 12 Appuyez sur [Retour] pour restaurer l'écran Unité relais perfo multiple. 11.8.2 [10 Unité relais perfo multiple] - [02 Taquage longueur papier] Réglez la position de la plaque de régulation dans le sens de passage du papier de l'Unité relais RU-510. Effectuez ce réglage si les perforations sont décalées dans le sens de passage du papier. Objets de réglage : Pleine page, 11 e 17 w, A3 w, B4 w, 8,5 e 14 w, A4 w, 8,5 e 11 w, 8,5 e 11 v, A4 v, B5 v, A5 v, 5,5 e 8,5 v, 8 e 13 w, 8,125 e 13,25 w, 8,5 e 13 w, 8,25 e 13 w, 8K w, 16K v, 16K w, 12 e 18 w, A3W w, B4W w, A4W v, A4W w, B5W v, A5W v, 12 e 18W w, 11 e 17W w, 8,5 e 11W v, 8,5 e 11W w, 5,5 e 8,5W v, Personnel, SRA3 w, SRA4 w, 9 e 11 v REMARQUE Si [Pleine page] est sélectionné, la valeur introduite s'appliquera à tous les formats. Si c'est un format papier spécifique qui est sélectionné, la valeur de réglage sera égale à la valeur introduite augmentée de la valeur précédemment spécifiée pour [Pleine page]. 1 Appuyez sur [Réglage] sur l'écran Machine pour afficher l'écran Menu de réglage. 2 Appuyez sur [02 Réglages finition], [10 Unité relais perfo multiple] et [02 Taquage longueur papier] dans cet ordre. L'écran Taquage longueur papier s'affiche. 3 Sélectionnez le format à régler avec [+] ou [,] pour faire défiler les formats. 4 Appuyez sur [Impression]. 5 Chargez le papier spécifié à l'étape 3 et sélectionnez la touche du magasin correspondant. 6 Entrez 10 comme nombre d'exemplaires à imprimer et appuyez sur Départ sur le panneau de commande.. Un spécimen perforé est produit. ineo 1052/1250 11-87 11.8 [02 Réglages finition] (Unité relais RU-510) 11 7 Contrôlez la position des perforations. % Si les trous sont décalés dans le sens de passage du papier, vous devez régler la position de la plaque de régulation FD. 8 Appuyez sur [Fermer] pour restaurer l'écran Taquage longueur papier. 9 Si un réglage s'avère nécessaire, utilisez le clavier de l'écran tactile ou le clavier du panneau de contrôle pour saisir les données de réglage. % Plage de réglage : -50 (étroit) à 50 (largeur) (1 pas = 0,1 mm) % Utilisez [+<->-] pour indiquer si la valeur est positive ou négative. % Réglez la valeur d'alignement de perforation au maximum (largeur maximale), puis réduisez-la pour déterminer le point d'alignement des perforations. 10 Appuyez sur [Valider] pour changer les données actuelles. 11 Répétez les étapes de réglage de 4 à 10 jusqu'à ce que le résultat désiré soit obtenu. 12 Appuyez sur [Retour] pour restaurer l'écran Unité relais perfo multiple. 11 [03 Mode recouvrement mémoire] 11-88 ineo 1052/1250 11.9 11.9 [03 Mode recouvrement mémoire] Procédez à une pré-rotation du tambour pendant une minute. Procédez à cette opération si une différence de densité est constatée à l'extrémité du papier, avec du papier plus large que le travail précédent. Exemple de défaut d'image 1 Appuyez sur [Réglage] sur l'écran Machine pour afficher l'écran Menu de réglage. 2 Appuyez sur [03 Mode recouvrement mémoire]. L'écran Mode recouvrement mémoire s'affiche. 3 Appuyez sur [Départ]. 4 Appuyez sur [Retour] pour restaurer l'écran du menu Réglage. ineo 1052/1250 11-89 11.10 [04 Nettoyage Manuel Unité Charge] 11 11.10 [04 Nettoyage Manuel Unité Charge] Procédez au nettoyage du corona de charge. Procédez à cette opération en présence d'une ligne ou d'une densité inégale sur l'image d'impression en demi-teinte. 1 Appuyez sur [Réglage] sur l'écran Machine pour afficher l'écran Menu de réglage. 2 Appuyez sur [04 Nettoyage Manuel Unité Charge]. L'écran Nettoyage Manuel Unité de Charge s'affiche. 3 Appuyez sur [Départ]. 4 Appuyez sur [Retour] pour restaurer l'écran du menu Réglage. 11 [05 La récupération sensibilité] 11-90 ineo 1052/1250 11.11 11.11 [05 La récupération sensibilité] Procédez à une pré-rotation du tambour pendant 3 minutes. Procédez à cette opération si une densité inégale entraîne l'apparition de lignes sur l'image d'impression en demi-teinte. Exemple de défaut d'image 1 Appuyez sur [Réglage] sur l'écran Machine pour afficher l'écran Menu de réglage. 2 Appuyez sur [05 La récupération sensibilité]. L'écran Mode de récupération mémoire tambour apparaît. 3 Appuyez sur [Départ]. 4 Appuyez sur [Retour] pour restaurer l'écran du menu Réglage. ineo 1052/1250 11-91 11.12 [06 Mode Rafraîchissement Tambour] 11 11.12 [06 Mode Rafraîchissement Tambour] Rafraîchissez la surface en faisant tourner le tambour pendant 3 minutes. Procédez à cette opération si les images en demi-teintes sont floues dans des conditions de forte humidité. Exemple de défaut d'image 1 Appuyez sur [Réglage] sur l'écran Machine pour afficher l'écran Menu de réglage. 2 Appuyez sur [06 Mode Rafraîchissement Tambour]. L'écran Mode Rafraîchissement Tambour va s'afficher. 3 Appuyez sur [Départ]. 4 Appuyez sur [Retour] pour restaurer l'écran du menu Réglage. 11 [06 Mode Rafraîchissement Tambour] 11-92 ineo 1052/1250 11.12 12 Menu Utilitaire ineo 1052/1250 12-3 12.1 Structure de l'écran Utilitaire 12 12 Menu Utilitaire 12.1 Structure de l'écran Utilitaire Appuyez sur Utilitaire/Compteur sur le panneau de contrôle pour afficher l'écran du menu Utilitaire. L'écran du menu Utilitaire permet aux utilisateurs de paramétrer [01 Configuration système] via [05 Réglage écran tactile], alors que [06 Réglage administrateur] peut être configuré pour que l'accès nécessite un code de l'administrateur. Les éléments de menu de [06 Réglage administrateur] engobent des fonctions telles que la surveillance des performances de la machine et la gestion des paramètres d'authentification et de sécurité. Il est recommandé de désigner un administrateur qui sera la seule personne à contrôler la configuration administrateur. REMARQUE Demandez à votre technicien SAV agréé de définir un code d'authentification administrateur. 12.1.1 Comment accéder sur l'écran Menu Utilitaire 1 Appuyez sur Utilitaire/Compteur. L'écran Menu Utilitaire s'affiche. Sélectionnez l'élément de menu pour lequel vous souhaitez modifier les réglages de [01 Configuration système] à [05 Réglage écran tactile]. Si vous sélectionnez [06 Réglage administrateur], passez à l'étape 2. 12 Structure de l'écran Utilitaire 12-4 ineo 1052/1250 12.1 2 Appuyez sur [06 Réglage administrateur]. L'écran du menu Réglage administrateur s'affiche. 3 Si l'écran Saisie du code s'affiche, entrez le code administrateur composé de 8 chiffres et appuyez sur [OK]. % Le code de l'administrateur comporte 8 caractères alphanumériques. L'écran du menu Réglage administrateur s'affiche. 4 Procédez aux réglages administrateur désirés sur cet écran. 5 Appuyez sur [Quitter]. L'écran qui était actif avant que la touche Utilitaire/Compteur ne soit actionnée sur le panneau de contrôle réapparaît. ineo 1052/1250 12-5 12.1 Structure de l'écran Utilitaire 12 12.1.2 Liste des éléments du Menu Utilitaire Config. utilisateur Élément de menu/Description Options de réglage (avec la valeur par défaut en gras) 01 Configuration système 01 Choix de la langue Sélectionnez la langue des textes affichés sur l'écran tactile et des messages vocaux. Langue utilisée à l'écran : Anglais, Allemand, Français, Italien, Espagnol Langue messages vocaux : Anglais, Désactivés (Arrêt) 02 Choix de l'unité Sélectionnez l'unité de mesure valeurs numériques à afficher sur l'écran tactile. Unité du format papier (longueur) : mm, pouce (décimal), pouce (fraction) Unité Poids Papier : g/m2, kg (A-Book), kg (B-Book), kg (Duodecimo), kg (Octavo), lb (Bond), lb (Livre), lb (Bristol), lb (Couverture), lb (Index), lb (Tag) 03 Réglage volume & information 01 Réglage Volume Spécifiez s'il faut ou non activer le son de confirmation de touche ou le son d'information et les messages vocaux ; et réglez le volume des éléments activés. Son Opération (Ronfleur) : Activé, Désactivé 1 (Faible) à 8 (Élevé) Volume sonore (Haut-parleur) : Activé, Désactivé ; 1 (faible) à 5 à 10 (fort) 02 Sélection information sonore Spécifiez chaque élément proposé pour le son d'information et le message vocal. Nombre de répétitions 􀉹Nombre de répétitions son : 1 fois, 2 fois, 3 fois 􀉹Nombre de répétitions voix : 1 fois, 2 fois, 3 fois Avertissement arrêt machine 􀉹Bourrage papier : Voix, Son, 􀉹Désactivé 􀉹Manque papier : Voix, I Son, 􀉹Désactivé 􀉹Autre papier : Voix, Son, Désactivé 􀉹Rajouter du toner : Voix, Info. Son, 􀉹Désactivé 􀉹Appel SAV : Son, Désactivé 􀉹Sortie pleine : Audio, 􀉹Désactivé Autre avertissement vocal 􀉹Préavis tâche terminée : Voix, Désactivé 􀉹Durée de la tâche : Après 3 minutes, Après 5 minutes, Après 10 minutes 􀉹Acceptation touche arrêt : Voix, 􀉹Désactivé 􀉹Exécution impression test : Voix, 􀉹Désactivé 􀉹Alerte porte avant finition : Voix, 􀉹Désactivé Autre avertissement sonore 􀉹Pour le démarrage du système : 􀉹Son, Désactivé 􀉹Réception tâche imprimée : Son, Désactivé 04 1 Affichage messages Sélectionnez la durée d'affichage des messages éclair dans la zone des messages de l'écran tactile. 3 secondes, 5 secondes 05 Écran par défaut Sélectionnez l'écran à afficher lorsque l'interrupteur secondaire est mis sur ON (Marche) ou lorsque la Réinitialisation auto est activée. MACHINE, LISTE TÂCHE (Rés/Suspend), LISTE TÂCHE (Programmes), COPIER 12 Structure de l'écran Utilitaire 12-6 ineo 1052/1250 12.1 06 Conditions de départ À l'issue d'une certaine période d'inactivité, la machine restaure automatiquement l'écran spécifié comme écran par défaut. Sélectionnez le délai avant activation de cette fonction. Désactivé, 60 secondes, 120 secondes, 180 secondes, 240 secondes, 300 secondes, 360 secondes, 420 secondes, 480 secondes, 540 secondes􀉹 07 Temps de réponse touche Sélectionnez le délai avant que la machine ne réponde à une pression sur l'écran tactile. Normal, 0,5 seconde, 1 seconde, 2 secondes, 3 secondes 08 Modifier code utilisateur Changez le code d'utilisateur préalablement enregistré avec l'authentification utilisateur. Entrez un nouveau code d'accès 09 Config. touches raccourci 01 Enregist. appli. pour copie Sélectionnez des touches de raccourci à afficher sous [Applications] sur l'écran Copie. On peut au maximum sélectionner 4 touches. Document : Insertion intercalaires, Chapitre, Combinaison, Livret, Insertion original, Page par page, Fusion de tâches Image : Cadrage original, Inversion, Répétition image, Effac. Bord/Pliure, Centrage image, Pleine page, Décalage image, Tampon/ Superpo 02 Enregistrer appli. Finition Sélectionnez les touches de raccourci à afficher sous [Finition] sur l'écran Copie. On peut au maximum sélectionner 4 touches. Pliage en Z, Pliage en 2 multiple, Multi pli en 3, Pliage & piqûre, Agrafage 2 points, Perforation, Tri décalé, Tri, Groupe décalé, Groupe, Reliure à anneaux 03 Enregistrer touche fonction Configurez les touches de fonction accessibles en bas de l'écran Copie. Vous pouvez sélectionner jusqu'à 5 touches. Cinq 04 Enregis. appli. numérisation Sélectionnez les fonctions des touches de raccourci proposées sous [Applications] sur l'écran scanner. On peut au maximum sélectionner 4 touches. Page par page, Cadrage original, Inversion, Effac BordPilure, Pleine page, Tampon/ Superpo 02 Configuration fonctions 01 Configuration magasins 01 Sélection auto magasins Spécifiez les magasins à fournir en papier quand PapierAuto (APS) est activé. Spécifiez aussi le magasin qui doit être alimenté en papier quand le magasin actuel est vide. Cette fonction s'appelle Changement Magasin Auto (ATS). Si vous sélectionnez plusieurs magasins pour l'ATS, déterminez la priorité des magasins. Basculement ATS/APS : magasins 1 à 8 Ordre de priorité : ordre de priorité pour les magasins sélectionnés 02 Basculement auto magasins Activez ou désactivez ATS. Activé, Désactivé 03 Réglage ATS Sélectionnez [Conserver] pour continuer à alimenter depuis le magasin sélectionné par ATS même après que le magasin en cours d'utilisation a été réapprovisionné en papier. Sélectionnez [Ne pas conserver] pour retourner au magasin en cours d'utilisation après qu'il a été réapprovisionné. Conserver, Ne pas conserver 04 Réglage séch.initial magasins Spécifiez s'il faut activer la fonction Départ papier en attente pendant le séchage du magasin papier grande capacité. Activé, Désactivé Élément de menu/Description Options de réglage (avec la valeur par défaut en gras) ineo 1052/1250 12-7 12.1 Structure de l'écran Utilitaire 12 05 Sélection auto type de papier Spécifiez les conditions papier qui rendront un magasin éligible dans le cadre de PapierAuto (APS). Les conditions papier à spécifier ici sont Type de papier, Grammage, Couleur papier et Perforation. Type de papier : Pap. couché, Pré-imprimé, Qual. supér., Normal, Livre/Journ., Gaufré, Interc vierge, Gaufré Grammage : 40-49 g/m2, 50-61 g/m2, 62-74 g/m2, 75-91 g/m2, 92-135 g/m2, 136-162 g/m2, 163-216 g/m2, 217-244 g/m2, 245-300 g/m2, 301-350 g/m2 Couleur papier : Blanc, Transparent, Jaune, Rose, Bleu, Vert Perforation : Avec perforation, Sans perforation 02 Autres paramètres Point décimal marge page Sélectionnez l'utilisation ou la non utilisation des décimales lors de l'entrée d'une valeur de décalage d'image. Décimal OUI, Non Conserver Valeur Marge Sélectionnez s'il faut garder la valeur spécifiée la dernière fois. Garder, Ne pas garder Tempo interdict. imprimante Réglez le laps de temps pour suspendre la tâche d'impression via PC après le dernier actionnement des touches tactiles. Désactivé, 15 secondes, 30 secondes, 60 secondes, 90 secondes Sortie papier onglet inutile Spécifiez s'il faut ou non automatiquement évacuer les feuilles à onglet inutiles chargées dans un magasin en tant que jeu. Activé, Désactivé Décalage auto image (onglet) Sélectionnez s'il faut ou non automatiquement décaler la zone de numérisation de 12,5 mm vers la droite afin de numériser le texte imprimé sur le bord droit (zone à onglets) de l'original de format standard et d'imprimer l'image sur la zone à onglets. Activé, Désactivé Longueur du tiret (tampon) Sélectionnez la longueur du tiret à utiliser pour le style de Numéroter page dans Tampon. Long, Court Gestion des tons sombres Sélectionnez l'activation ou la désactivation ainsi que le mode de gestion des tons sombres. Désactivé, Qualité, Performance Icône bouton tons sombres Sélectionnez s'il faut ou non afficher l'icône Ton sombre pendant que la fonction Gestion des tons sombres est activée. Activé, Désactivé Sortie Individuelle Combi.DD Sélectionnez s'il faut ou non produire des fichiers combinés en conservant les modes Agrafage et le mode Pliage en Z. Activé, Désactivé Attente après transfert num. Sélectionnez Conserver ou Ne pas conserver le mode en cours après le chargement des données numérisées. Garder, Ne pas garder Reprise réserve copie Sélectionnez s'il faut ou non autoriser une opération en continu à reprendre des travaux copie en réserve. Activé, Désactivé Reprise réserve numérisation Sélectionnez s'il faut ou non autoriser une opération en continu à reprendre des travaux de numérisation en réserve. Activé, Désactivé Élément de menu/Description Options de réglage (avec la valeur par défaut en gras) 12 Structure de l'écran Utilitaire 12-8 ineo 1052/1250 12.1 Reprise réserve boîte Sélectionnez s'il faut ou non autoriser l'opération continue pour les travaux d'enregistrement dans les boîtes. Activé, Désactivé 03 Effacement Bord Avant Sélectionnez la largeur d'effacement de l'image à partir du bord avant de la feuille lors de l'impression. Papier Format Standard : Non Effacement, Effacer 3 mm du bord avant Papier Format Plus/Perso : Non effacement, Effacer 3 mm du bord avant 04 Réglage densité 01 Décal. densité selon l'image Indiquez la configuration de finition par défaut pour chaque numéro. 0 (plus clair) à 6 (plus foncé) (Texte/Photo : 3, Contraste + : 3, Photo : 3, Texte : 3) 02 Contraste personnalisé Prédéfinissez le niveau de contraste le plus fréquemment utilisé. Sélection contraste personnalisé : Personnalisé 1, Personnalisé 2 Type original : Texte/Photo, Contraste +, Photo, Texte Contraste/Fond : • Réglage densité : -4 (Clair) à 0 (Standard) à +4 (Foncé) • Réglage du fond : -4 (Clair) à 0 (Standard) à +4 (Foncé) 03 Densité en mode photo Sélectionnez le niveau de densité déterminé par la contraste auto (AES) lorsque le mode Photo est sélectionné. Clair, Standard, Foncé 04 Densité de l'image Réglez la densité de l'image plus claire ou réglez le niveau foncé maximal sans dégrader la qualité de l'image. Standard : +1 (Foncé) à -5 (Clair) 05 Taux de restitution Modifiez les taux de restitution prédéfinis. De même, prédéfinissez les taux de restitution fréquemment utilisés. Fixe (Agrandir/Réduire) : 8 (A5>A3 : 2,000, A4>A3 : 1,414, A4>B4 : 1,189, B4>A3 : 1,189, A4>B5 : 0,840, B4>A4 : 0,840, A3>A4 : 0,707, A3>A5 : 0,500 Taux personnalisé : 3 (Régl. taux zoom 1 : 4,000, Régl. taux zoom 2 : 2,000, Régl. taux zoom 3 : 0,500) 06 Réglage Tandem 01 Dép. machine si doc complet Activez le MFP partenaire censé recevoir toutes les données transmises depuis ce MFP avant de commencer à imprimer. Activé, Désactivé 02 Attente/Épreuve machine auxi Activez ce MFP pour transmettre les données au MFP partenaire au moment où ce MFP commence à imprimer les données pour une épreuve. Autorisation, Interdiction 03 Valeurs marges machine auxiliaire Réglez le MFP partenaire censé utiliser la même valeur de décalage image utilisée sur ce MFP. Valeurs MachinePrincipale, Valeurs MachineAuxiliaire 04 Redistrib.tâche si problème Paramétrez les machines auxiliaires reliées pour qu'elles prennent le relais de distribution du travail pour la quantité à imprimer restante sur une machine alors que l'autre machine a terminé sa tâche. Activé, Désactivé 05 Configura tandem après tâche Choisissez de conserver ou d'annuler le mode Tandem une fois le travail en tandem terminé. Activé, Désactivé Élément de menu/Description Options de réglage (avec la valeur par défaut en gras) ineo 1052/1250 12-9 12.1 Structure de l'écran Utilitaire 12 03 Configuration copieur 01 Fonction réinitialisation 01 Configuration initiale Spécifiez la configuration initiale à restaurer en cas de pression sur [Initialiser]. Caractéristiques orig., Réglage qualité, Taux restitution, Recto-verso, Finition, Papier, Sélect. mag., PapierAuto, Sans rotat image, Chargeur Auto 02 Retour conditions de départ Fonction touche Auto Sélectionnez le type d'écran à afficher en cas de pression sur la touche Auto. [Tout auto] désigne le réglage usine par défaut [Conditions init] est le réglage spécifié dans [01 Configuration initiale]. Tout auto, Conditions init Mise sous tension et réinit. Ce réglage s'applique lorsque [Conditions init.] est sélectionné pour l'élément audessus. Sélectionnez la condition de copie archivée dans le Mode mémoire (30) ou les réglages de Mode copie comme configuration initiale. Conditions init, Programme (30) Finition avec "Tout auto" Spécifiez le type de finition quand Tout auto est repris par pression sur la touche Auto. Tri décalé, Groupe décalé, Tri, Groupe, Agrafage, Pliage & piqûre, Recto vers haut, Recto vers bas, En deux 03 Initialis. avec compteur clé Sélectionnez s'il faut ou non restaurer la configuration initiale des conditions de copie lors de l'insertion du compteur clé ou de la carte magnétique. Activé, Désactivé 02 Autres paramètres Sélection Auto Mode Livret Réglez la machine pour la sélection automatique du mode Livret quand Pli & Piqûre ou Pliage en 2 multiple est sélectionné. Sélection auto, NON AMS (restitution auto) Vitre Spécifiez s'il faut ou non automatiquement fixer un taux de restitution approprié pour correspondre au format papier sélectionné en cas de détection du format de l'original sur la vitre d'exposition. Activé, Désactivé AMS (restitut auto) chargeur Spécifiez s'il faut ou non automatiquement fixer un taux de restitution approprié pour correspondre au format papier spécifié en cas de détection du format de l'original placé sur le chargeur Auto. Activé, Désactivé APS (format auto) vitre Spécifiez s'il faut ou non automatiquement sélectionner le même format de papier de copie que l'original placé sur la vitre d'exposition. Activé, Désactivé APS (format auto) chargeur Spécifiez s'il faut automatiquement sélectionner le même format de papier de copie que l'original placé sur le chargeur Auto. Activé, Désactivé Magasin par défaut sans APS Spécifiez le magasin à être automatiquement sélectionné quand PapierAuto (APS) est annulé. Magasin APS, Mag 1, Mag 2, Mag 3, Mag 4, Mag 5, Mag 6, Mag 7, Mag 8 Orientation reliure original Spécifiez s'il faut ou non faire coïncider le type de reliure dans Finition avec celui spécifié dans Caractéristiques orig. Activé, Désactivé Élément de menu/Description Options de réglage (avec la valeur par défaut en gras) 12 Structure de l'écran Utilitaire 12-10 ineo 1052/1250 12.1 Réglage administrateur Annul. auto du Tri Agrafé Réglez la machine sur la sélection/désélection automatique du mode Agrafage en appuyant sur la touche Auto. Activé, Désactivé Reliure original fin tâche Sélectionnez la réinitialisation ou non réinitialisation du paramètre d'orientation de l'original défini sur l'écran Original et du paramètre de position de reliure défini sur l'écran Finition après la fin de chaque travail de copie. Conserver, Annul. chaq trav Conserver état retour auto Sélectionnez s'il faut réinitialiser ou non réinitialiser le réglage Recto-verso en cas de pression sur la touche Auto. Garder, Ne pas garder 04 Configuration scanner 01 Destination par défaut Sélectionnez la destination par défaut à afficher sur l'écran scanner. E-mail, Disque dur, FTP, SMB 02 Mode scanner Spécifiez la configuration initiale en mode numérisation. Caractéristiques orig., Réglage qualité, Taux restitution, Applications, Format numéris., Résolution (dpi), Recto-verso, Chargeur Auto 03 Autres paramètres Format fichier (E-mail) Sélectionnez le format fichier par défaut lors de l'envoi de données par E-mail. Paquet PDF, Division PDF, Paquet TIFF, Division TIFF, Paquet XPS, Division XPS Format fichier (DD) Sélectionnez le format de fichier par défaut lors de l'enregistrement de données sur disque dur. Paquet PDF, Division PDF, Paquet TIFF, Division TIFF, Paquet XPS, Division XPS Format fichier (FTP) Sélectionnez le format fichier par défaut lors de l'émission de données en FTP. Paquet PDF, Division PDF, Paquet TIFF, Division TIFF, Paquet XPS, Division XPS Format fichier (SMB) Sélectionnez le format fichier par défaut lors de l'émission de données en SMB. Paquet PDF, Division PDF, Paquet TIFF, Division TIFF, Paquet XPS, Division XPS 05 Réglage écran tactile Si une touche de l'écran tactile ne répond pas, vérifiez si le capteur tactile a été déplacé. Élément de menu/Description Options de réglage (avec la valeur par défaut en gras) Élément de menu/Description Options de réglage (avec la valeur par défaut en gras) 06 Réglage administrateur 01 Configuration système 01 Économie d'énergie 01 Économie d'énergie Sélectionnez le délai avant que Veille ou Éco énergie ne s'active. De même, sélectionner d'activer soit Veille soit Éco énergie en cas de pression sur Éco énergie sur le panneau de contrôle. Veille : 1 min., 3 min., 5 min., 10 min., 15 min., 30 min., 60 min., 90 min., 120 min., 240 min. Éco énergie : --- min., 1 min., 3 min., 5 min., 10 min., 15 min., 30 min., 60 min., 90 min., 120 min., 240 min. 02 Réglage ERP Spécifiez le délai après expiration duquel il faut activer le mode ERP. Ne pas activer, 12 heure, 24 heures, 36 heures, 48 heures, 60 heures, 72 heures 02 Réglage date/heure Réglez la date et l'heure actuelles, l'heure d'été et le décalage horaire. Programmation, Heure d'été, Décalage horaire ineo 1052/1250 12-11 12.1 Structure de l'écran Utilitaire 12 03 Programmateur hebdomadaire 01 Activ./Désa. programmateur Spécifiez s'il faut ou non utiliser la fonction Programmateur hebdomadaire. Programmateur activé, Programmateur désactivé 02 Heures de marche/arrêt Réglez les heures de marche/arrêt en heures et en minutes. - 03 Réglage date Définissez les conditions M/A de la machine pour un jour donné d'un mois donné. - 04 Plage horaire éco d'énergie Réglez la machine pour qu'elle s'éteigne durant la pause déjeuner et se rallume après. Fonction activée, Fonction désactivée 05 Code hors horaires bureau Définissez un code afin que la machine soit utilisable par mise temporaire sous tension quand la machine est à l'arrêt en raison de la fonction Programmateur hebdomadaire. 0000 (4 chiffres) 04 Liste des compteurs Imprime la liste des programmes utilisateur ou le journal des évènements. Liste des Programmes utilisateur, Configuration utilisateur, Compteurs par code, Liste des polices, Journal des évènements 05 Autorisation/Interdiction Programme utilisateur Verrouillez/déverrouillez ou supprimez un programme de copie/numérisation ayant été enregistré avec le Mode mémoire. - Modification adresse scanner Autoriser/Interdire la saisie manuelle d'une adresse d'expédition sur l'écran scanner. Autorisation, Interdiction Modificat. taux restitution Autoriser/Interdire le changement du taux de restitution défini. Autorisation, Interdiction Modification fond de page Autoriser/Interdire la suppression ou l'écrasement d'un titre d'image superposée programmé. Autorisation, Interdiction Scanner vers e-mail Autoriser/Interdire l'émission de données numérisées par E-Mail. Autorisation, Interdiction Scanner vers disque dur Autoriser/Interdire l'enregistrement de données numérisées sur le disque dur. Autorisation, Interdiction Scanner vers FTP Autoriser/Interdire le transfert de données numérisées vers FTP. Autorisation, Interdiction Scanner vers SMB Autoriser/Interdire le transfert de données numérisées vers SMB. Autorisation, Interdiction 06 Réglages expert 01 Régl. densité impression Sélectionnez si la priorité sera donnée aux dégradés ou à la résolution pour la réalisation des images imprimées. Priorité aux dégradés, Priorité à la résolution Élément de menu/Description Options de réglage (avec la valeur par défaut en gras) 12 Structure de l'écran Utilitaire 12-12 ineo 1052/1250 12.1 02 Angle agraf. en coin (Dos) Sélectionnez l'angle des agrafes quand les jeux de copies sont agrafés en coin. Vous pouvez sélectionner soit diagonal ou parallèle quand le coin à agrafer se trouve à l'arrière, alors que parallèle est la seule option où le coin à agrafer se trouve à l'avant. Diagonal, Parallèle 03 Régl. Bourr. Dét. Err. Centr. Spécifiez l'opération de la machine en cas de détection d'une erreur de centrage du papier. Si [Détecter] est sélectionné, la machine s'arrête d'imprimer suite à un possible bourrage papier quand une erreur d'alignement de 5 mm ou plus est détectée. Si [Ne pas détecter] est sélectionné, la machine continue à produire même en cas de détection d'une erreur d'alignement de 5 mm ou plus. Détecter, Ne pas détecter 04 Réglage extinction auto Spécifiez si l'alimentation principale sera automatiquement coupée après coupure de l'alimentation auxiliaire et refroidissement complet de la machine. Activé, Désactivé 05 Effacer zone hors original Réglez pour supprimer la zone en dehors de l'original. Eff. zones en dhr. d'orig, Oui - APS/AMS seulement, Sauf vitre expos. (1:1) 06 Effacement bords chargeur Permet d'effacer les bords lors de la copie en mode Chargeur Auto. Aucune, 1 mm, 2 mm, 3 mm, 4 mm, 5 mm 07 Régl. effac. zone hors image Spécifiez la condition de la fonction Effacement zone hors image. Mode Effac./Densité Orig. : Auto Mode d'effacement : Oblique, Rectangulaire Densité Original : Foncé +, Foncé, Standard, Clair, Clair + 08 Réglage densité scanner Spécifiez la qualité de numérisation. Suppression texture : Activé, Désactivé Sélect. dégradé diff. erreur : Haute, Faible 1200 dpi Scan Photo Screen : Priorité dégradés, Priorité qualité Réglage gamma AES sélectionné : -5 à +5 (0) 07 Paramétrage formats Configurez les réglages Format Original. Formats originaux reconnus Spécifiez la série du format original. Métrique A/B, Pouce, Seulem. série A, Tous formats Le plus petit format vitre Spécifiez le format le plus petit à détecter sur la vitre d'exposition. Carte postale, A5 v, 5,5 e 8,5 v, B5 v, A4 v, 8,5 e 11 v 08 Paramétrage des Annotations Enregistrez, modifiez ou supprimez le Paramétrage des Annotations. 09 Configuration thermoreliure Cet élément de menu s'affiche et est accessible sur la machine équipé du Thermorelieur PB-503. 01 Grammage papier utilisable Spécifiez le grammage papier disponible pour chaque corps et couverture avec le Thermorelieur. Grammage Corps : 62-74 g/m2, 75-91 g/m2 Couverture : 75-91 g/m2, 92-135 g/m2, 136-162 g/m2 Élément de menu/Description Options de réglage (avec la valeur par défaut en gras) ineo 1052/1250 12-13 12.1 Structure de l'écran Utilitaire 12 02 Nombre de feuilles utilisées Spécifiez le nombre de feuilles minimum et maximum à relier comme corps de document, individuellement pour chaque grammage. Ce réglage peut être effectué individuellement pour deux types de papier : Normal et Fin/Laser couleur/Couché. 62-74 g/m2 Quantité minimale : 10, 15, 20, 25 Quantité maximale : 200, 250, 270, 300 75-91 g/m2 Quantité minimale : 10, 15, 20, 25 Quantité maximale : 200, 250, 270, 300 03 Arrêt Couverture incorrecte Spécifiez s'il faut ou non arrêter le travail en cours quand la largeur de la couverture n'est pas compatible avec le format et l'épaisseur du corps de document. Arrêt temporaire, Pas d'arrêt temporaire 10 Config. type de clavier Sélectionnez le type de clavier. EN65, EN104, JP101, JP106, JP109 11 Personnalisation écran 01 Choix graisse police écran Sélectionnez l'épaisseur de la police d'écran. Standard, Gras 02 Personnalisation écran copie Changez la disposition des éléments de réglage dans la moitié supérieure de l'écran Copie. 03 Personnalisation écran numér Changez la disposition des éléments de réglage affichés sur l'écran scanner. 04 Person. page écr. ENREGISTRER Changez selon vos besoins l'organisation des éléments de réglages sur l'écran Enregistrer. 02 Enregist. administrateur 01 Enregist. administrateur Enregistrez le nom, le numéro de poste, et l'adresse E-mail de l'administrateur. Le nom et le numéro de poste de l'administrateur s'affichent toujours dans le coin supérieur droit de l'écran Menu Utilitaire. Saisie nom administrateur (20 caractères max.), Saisie numéro de poste (8 chiffres max.), Saisie adresse E-mail 03 Ident. utilisateur/Compte Spécifiez s'il faut ou non utiliser les fonctions Authentification utilisateur et Configuration compte. Vous pouvez également spécifier ou modifier les conditions d'authentification. 01 Méthode d'authentification Spécifiez la méthode d'authentification et le nombre de comptes à gérer. Spécifiez aussi s'il faut ou non utiliser la fonction de gestion de compte pour chaque mode, et sélectionnez l'action à effectuer par la machine lorsque le nombre limite est atteint. Authentificat. utilisateur : Activé(Serv.ext), Activé (Copieur), Désactivé Utilisateur public : Autoriser, Interdic Configuration compte : Activé, Désactivé Méthode saisie suivi compte : Compte + Code, Code Connexion auth. compte/util. : Synchroniser, Ne pas synchron Nbre d'utilisat. autorisés : Action si limite sup dépassée : Immédiat, Finir tâche, Avertir seulement Réglage durée ticket : 1 à 60 minutes Élément de menu/Description Options de réglage (avec la valeur par défaut en gras) 12 Structure de l'écran Utilitaire 12-14 ineo 1052/1250 12.1 02 Régl. authentif. utilisateur 01 Réglage administratif Spécifiez s'il faut ou non afficher la liste des noms d'utilisateur. De même, activez des restrictions sur les fonctions par défaut pour les utilisateurs qui sont authentifiés via un serveur externe. Liste des noms d'utilisateur : Activé, Désactivé Fonction autoris. par défaut Copier : Autoriser, Interdire Numéris. : Autoriser, Interdire Impression : Autoriser, Interdire Rappeler : Autoriser, Interdire 02 Enregistrement utilisateur Ajoutez, changez, ou supprimez des enregistrements concernant les utilisateurs à autorisée via l'authentification utilisateur. Numéro d'utilisateur, Numéro d'utilisateur, Code, Nom de compte, Définir limite max., Accès à (Copier, Numérisation, Impression, Rappeler), Enregistrement carte IC 03 Compteur utilisateur Permet d'afficher ou de remettre à zéro le compteur d'impression des utilisateurs authentifiés. - 03 Configuration compte 01 Enregistrem. Gestion compte Permet de changer, d'ajouter, ou de supprimer les comptes à gérer. Numéro de compte, Nom de compte, Code, Définir limite max., Accès à (Copier, Numéris., Imprim., Rappeler) 02 Compteur gestion de compte Permet d'afficher ou de remettre à zéro le compteur d'impression des comptes à gérer. - 04 Imprimer sans authentificat Spécifiez si les fonctions doivent être accessibles aux utilisateurs sans authentification. Autoriser, Interdire 05 Config. périph. authent. 01 Méthode d'authentification Spécifiez le type de la carte IC utilisée pour l'entrée des coordonnées. De même, spécifiez la méthode d'authentification. Type de carte IC : FeliCa, Type A, SSFC, FCF, FCF (Campus) Réglage opération : Authentification par carte IC, Authent. par carte IC + code 06 Réglage du serveur externe Enregistrez un serveur externe ou modifiez ou supprimez un serveur enregistré quand Activé( Serv.ext) est sélectionné comme Méthode d'authentification. - 07 Réglage commun utilis/compte Écran confirm. déconnexion Spécifiez s'il faut ou non afficher un écran de confirmation de déconnexion. Activé, Désactivé 04 Configuration réseau 01 Carte réseau machine 01 Configuration TCP/IP Configurez les différents paramètres TCP/IP pour la machine. Si la machine est configurée pour l'impression tandem, l'[Adresse IP Tandem] est affichée pour vous permettre de définir l'adresse IP pour le MFP partenaire. Adresse IP, Masque de sou-réseau, Adresse passerelle, Adr. IP Serv. DNS primaire, Adr. IP Serv. DNS second, Adresse IP (Tandem) Vitesse réseau : Détection autom, 10M Semi duplex, 100M Semi duplex, 10M Full duplex, 100M Full duplex 02 Paramétrage http Configurez le Paramétrage http. Activer serveur proxy : Activé, Désactivé Adresse du serveur proxy, Port serveur proxy Activer SSL : Activé, Désactivé Activer identification : Activé, Désactivé Nom utili identification, Code d'authentification Élément de menu/Description Options de réglage (avec la valeur par défaut en gras) ineo 1052/1250 12-15 12.1 Structure de l'écran Utilitaire 12 03 Paramétrage E-mail Configurez les réglages initiaux pour les emails ou procédez à un essai d'émission/de réception. Utiliser système e-mail : Activé, Désactivé Décalage horaire, Adresse du serveur (SMTP), Numéro du port SMTP, Délai attente connexion, Délai interrogation serveur, Adresse serveur réception Serveur réception mail : POP3, IMAP Numéro du port POP3/IMAP, Compte réception mail, Mot passe réception mail, Adresse E-mail de la machine Identif. POP (IMAP) avant SMTP : Activé, Désactivé Cryptage SSL SMTP : Activé, Désactivé Cryptage SSL POP (IMAP) : Activé, Désactivé Authentification SMTP : Activé, Désactivé ID utilisat. authentif. SMTP, Code d'authentification SMTP 02 Carte réseau contrôleur Voir page 12-107 pour configurer les données dans Carte réseau contrôleur. 01 Configuration TCP/IP Configurez les différents paramètres TCP/IP pour la machine. 02 Configuration NetWare Configurez les différents paramètres NetWare. 03 Configuration serveur HTTP Configurez les différents paramètres HTTP. 04 Configuration FTP Configurez les différents paramètres FTP. 05 Configuration SNMP Configurez les différents paramètres SNMP. 06 Configuration SMB Configurez les différents paramètres SMB. 07 Configuration Apple Talk Configurez les différents paramètres Apple- Talk. 08 Configuration Bonjour Configurez les différents paramètres Bonjour. 09 Configuration E-mail Configurez les différents paramètres d'e-mail. 10 Configuration socket TCP Configurez les différents paramètres de socket TCP. 11 Configuration Archange Configurez les différents paramètres CSRC. 12 Configuration OpenAPI Configurez les différents paramètres OpenAPI. 13 Configuration service Web Configurez les différents paramètres OpenAPI. 14 Configuration JSP Configurez les différents paramètres JSP. 15 Réglage LDAP Configurez les différents paramètres LDAP. Élément de menu/Description Options de réglage (avec la valeur par défaut en gras) 12 Structure de l'écran Utilitaire 12-16 ineo 1052/1250 12.1 16 Réglage IEEE802.1x Configurez les différents paramètres IEEE802.1x. 17 Réglage détaillé Configurez d'autres paramètres détaillés. 05 Config. Copie/Impression 01 Réglage Décalage 01 Décalage des tâches Spécifiez s'il faut stopper le décalage par numéro de jeu et unité de tâche. Spécifiez le nombre de jeux pour décalage lorsque [Décaler par unité tâche] est activé. Décaler par numéro de jeu : Activé, Désactivé Décaler par unité tâche : Activé, Désactivé Nombre jeux pour décalage : 0 à 9 999 02 Réglage mode tri décalé Sélectionnez le mode tri décalé. Mode décalage en sortie : Basculer Position de Sortie, Partition Insertion Papier, Interr. pos. + Insertion Pap, Arrêter impress Magasin Insertion : Mag 1, Mag 2, Mag 3, Mag 4, Mag 5, Mag 6, Mag 7, Mag 8, MI1, MI2, MI-PFU1, MI-PFU2, MI-PFU3 02 Impression en continu Spécifiez s'il faut ou non produire plusieurs tâches en réserve les unes à la suite des autres sans arrêter la machine pour une pause. Activé, Désactivé 03 Numéro de page du livret Spécifiez la position du numéro de page en cas d'utilisation de Livret avec Numéro pages dans Tampon. Oui (en dehors de page), Désactivé 04 Prérotation rouleaux four Le réglage de la chaleur du four risque d'être nécessaire car il modifie le type et le grammage du papier. La machine fait tourner le rouleau four avant que l'impression ne commence afin d'imprimer à la bonne température pour le type et le grammage du papier spécifiés. Avec prérotation, Sans prérotation 05 Réglage échantillon Sélectionnez le mode d'impression et la magasin d'alimentation et spécifiez le timing de l'impression test. Sélectionnez aussi s'il faut ou non inclure le nombre d'exemplaires à imprimer pour l'impression test dans le comptage de la gestion de compte. Impression : Impression mire, Impr. image tâche Sélection magasin papier : Mag 1, Mag 2, Mag 3, Mag 4, Mag 5, Mag 6, Mag 7, Mag 8 Cycle Impression : Activé, Désactivé (il faut spécifier les réglages de cycle si Activé est spécifié) Param. comptes département : Activé, Désactivé 06 Valid. épreuve(1ère feuille) Spécifiez s'il faut imprimer la première feuille ou un jeu entier lors de l'impression d'une épreuve. Épreuve (1ère feuille) : Activé, Désactivé 1 jeu/1ère feuil Appui sur touche [Épreuve] : Activé, Désactivé 07 Affich. Identificat. Bourrage Spécifiez s'il faut ou non afficher un message pour avertir l'utilisateur en cas de bourrage si [Détecter] est sélectionné sous [Réglage administrateur] - [Configuration système] - [Réglages expert] - [Régl. Bourr. Dét. Err. Centr]. Activé, Désactivé 08 Rotation Quand les magasins ne contiennent que du papier dont l'orientation ou le format définis diffèrent de l'original, tournez l'image de l'original et réglez-la pour en fonction du format du papier chargé pour la copie Toujours activé, Oui - APS/AMS seulement, Oui - APS/AMS/Réduction Élément de menu/Description Options de réglage (avec la valeur par défaut en gras) ineo 1052/1250 12-17 12.1 Structure de l'écran Utilitaire 12 09 Interruption de cycle Réglez la temporisation pour qu'elle suspende le travail actuel en appuyant sur la touche Interruption pendant la copie. À la fin du jeu en cours, Immédiat 10 Sélection fonction réserve Réglez la temporisation du travail en réserve soit sur l'écran de confirmation de Copie en réserve soit en plaçant l'original sur la vitre d'exposition. Programmation, Insertion de l'original 11 Arrêt numér. magasin ouvert Stoppe l'arrêt de la numérisation en cas de retrait du magasin. Activé, Désactivé 12 Copie en continu Spécifiez s'il faut ou non produire plusieurs tâches en réserve les unes à la suite des autres sans arrêter la machine pour une pause. Activé, Désactivé 13 Sortie original semi-auto Spécifiez le sens de sortie lors de la copie d'un jeu de l'original placé sur la vitre d'exposition. Recto vers haut, Recto vers bas 14 Mode semi-auto chargeur Réglez la machine pour qu'elle commence automatiquement à copier dès qu'une feuille d'original est placée dans le chargeur Auto. Activé, Désactivé 06 Appel Archange 01 Administrateur Appuyez sur [Départ] pour appeler votre technicien SAV via CS Remote Care. Départ 07 Configuration sécurité 01 Code authentification admin. Modifie le code de l'administrateur enregistré au menu du mode Service. 00000000 02 Gestion disque dur 01 Gestion dossiers et boîtes Affiche une liste des détails du dossier ou de la boîte archivé(e) sur le DD de la machine et supprimez-la. Affichez et supprimez les détails. 02 Fréquence supp. données D.D. Spécifiez la durée de conservation des données pour les supprimer automatiquement après expiration du délai spécifié. Pas de suppression auto, Toutes les 12 heures, Tous les jours, Tous les 2 jours, Tous les 3 jours, Tous les 7 jours, Tous les 30 jours 03 Code verrouillage DD Modifiez le code de protection du disque dur. Code actuel, Nouveau code, Confirmation 04 Suppr données temporaires Spécifiez s'il faut ou non écraser les données image temporaires. Spécifiez aussi le mode d'effacement. Commutateur réglage : Activé, Désactivé Mode d'effacement : Mode 1, Mode 2 05 Suppression toutes données Sélectionnez le type d'effacement désiré pour supprimer toutes les données. Mode d'effacement : Mode 1 à 8 06 Config. cryptogramme D.D. Spécifiez s'il faut ou non crypter les données du disque dur. Activé, Désactivé 03 Sécurité renforcée Spécifiez s'il faut ou non utiliser le mode Sécurité renforcée. Activé, Désactivé 08 Enregistrement adresse Élément de menu/Description Options de réglage (avec la valeur par défaut en gras) 12 Structure de l'écran Utilitaire 12-18 ineo 1052/1250 12.1 01 Modif/Suppr adresse exp. Modifiez ou supprimez les adresses de scanner enregistrées. 09 Gestion Authent. OpenAPI 01 Réglage Code d'interdiction Enregistrez le code d'interdiction depuis un index, un fournisseur ou une application ou visionnez le code d'interdiction enregistré. - Élément de menu/Description Options de réglage (avec la valeur par défaut en gras) ineo 1052/1250 12-19 12.2 [01 Configuration système] 12 12.2 [01 Configuration système] 12.2.1 [01 Choix de la langue] Sélectionnez la langue affichée à l'écran tactile, et celle des messages voix s'ils sont activés. L'anglais est sélectionné par défaut comme langue utilisée à l'écran LCD, et la fonction de message vocal est désactivée. 1 Suivez la procédure à la page 12-3 pour afficher l'écran du menu Utilitaire. 2 Appuyez sur [01 Configuration système] sur l'écran du menu Utilitaire, puis appuyez sur [01 Choix de la langue]. 3 Sélectionnez la langue désirée au moyen des touches disponibles sous "Langue utilisée à l'écran". 4 Pour activer la fonction message vocal, sélectionnez la langue désirée au moyen des touches disponibles sous "Langue messages vocaux". Pour désactiver la fonction message vocal, appuyez sur [Désactivé]. 5 Appuyez sur [OK] pour valider le réglage. % Pour annuler la modification, appuyez sur [Annuler]. Dans l'un ou l'autre cas, le menu Configuration système réapparaît. 12 [01 Configuration système] 12-20 ineo 1052/1250 12.2 12.2.2 [02 Choix de l'unité] Sélectionnez l'unité de mesure valeurs numériques à introduire ou qui s'affichent à l'écran tactile. Les réglages d'unité par défaut sont [mm] pour le format papier (longueur) et [g/m2] pour le grammage. 1 Suivez la procédure à la page 12-3 pour afficher l'écran du menu Utilitaire. 2 Appuyez sur [01 Configuration système] sur l'écran du menu Utilitaire, puis appuyez sur [02 Choix de l'unité]. 3 Sélectionnez l'unité de mesure désirée. 4 Appuyez sur [OK] pour valider le réglage. % Pour annuler la modification, appuyez sur [Annuler]. Dans l'un ou l'autre cas, le menu Configuration système réapparaît. 12.2.3 [03 Réglage volume & information] - [01 Réglage volume] Spécifiez s'il faut ou non activer le son de confirmation de touche (ronfleur) ou le son d'information et les messages vocaux (haut-parleur) ; et réglez le volume des éléments activés. 1 Suivez la procédure à la page 12-3 pour afficher l'écran du menu Utilitaire. 2 Appuyez sur [01 Configuration système] sur l'écran du menu Utilitaire, puis appuyez sur [03 Réglage volume & information] et sur [01 Réglage volume]. 3 Réglez le ronfleur avec les touches disponibles sous "Volume sonore (Bruiteur)". % Appuyez sur [Activé] pour activer le son de confirmation de touche (ronfleur), et sélectionnez le volume désiré. % Appuyez sur [Désactivé] pour désactiver le son de confirmation de touche (ronfleur). ineo 1052/1250 12-21 12.2 [01 Configuration système] 12 4 Réglez le haut-parleur avec les touches disponibles sous "Volume sonore (Haut Parleur)". % Appuyez sur [Activé] pour activer le son d'information et le message vocal (haut-parleur), puis sélectionnez le volume désiré. % Appuyez sur [Désactivé] pour désactiver le son d'information et message vocal (haut-parleur). 5 Appuyez sur [OK] pour valider le réglage. % Pour annuler la modification, appuyez sur [Annuler]. Dans chaque cas, l'écran du menu Réglage volume & information va être restauré. 12.2.4 [03 Réglage volume & information] - [02 Sélection information sonore] Spécifiez le nombre de fois que le son d'information ou message vocal doit se faire entendre en cas d'arrêt de travail dû à un bourrage papier ou un manque de papier, et spécifiez aussi s'il faut ou non activer le son individuellement pour des éléments donnés éléments. 1 Suivez la procédure à la page 12-3 pour afficher l'écran du menu Utilitaire. 2 Appuyez sur [01 Configuration Système] sur l'écran du menu Utilitaire, puis appuyez sur [03 Réglage volume & information] et [02 Sélection information sonore]. 3 Sélectionnez le nombre de fois voulu pour le son d'information et le message vocal, avec les touches disponibles sous "Nombre de répétitions". 4 Réglez le son d'information en cas d'arrêt machine, élément par élément, avec les touches disponibles sous "Avertissement arrêt machine". % Pour activer le son d'information, sélectionnez le type de sont désiré. Appuyez sur [Cocher] pour contrôler le son sélectionné. % Appuyez sur [Désactivé] pour désactiver le son d'information. 12 [01 Configuration système] 12-22 ineo 1052/1250 12.2 5 Appuyez sur [Suivant] dans le coin inférieur gauche de l'écran pour continuer le réglage. % Le "Préavis tâche terminée" disponible sous "Autre avertissement vocal" vous permet de spécifier s'il faut ou non activer le son d'information en fonction du temps censé s'écouler avant que la tâche ne soit achevée. Appuyez sur [Réglage détaillé], et sélectionnez le délai désiré. Appuyez sur [OK] pour achever le réglage et revenir à l'écran précédent. 6 Appuyez sur [OK] pour valider le réglage. % Pour annuler la modification, appuyez sur [Annuler]. Dans chaque cas, l'écran du menu Réglage volume & information va être restauré. 12.2.5 [04 Affichage message temporaire] Sélectionnez la durée d'affichage d'un message éclair dans la zone de message de l'écran tactile . 1 Suivez la procédure à la page 12-3 pour afficher l'écran du menu Utilitaire. 2 Appuyez sur [01 Configuration système] sur l'écran du menu Utilitaire, puis sur [04 Affichage message temporaire]. 3 Appuyez sur [3 secondes] ou sur [5 secondes]. 4 Appuyez sur [OK] pour valider le réglage. % Pour annuler la modification, appuyez sur [Annuler]. Dans l'un ou l'autre cas, le menu Configuration système réapparaît. ineo 1052/1250 12-23 12.2 [01 Configuration système] 12 12.2.6 [05 Écran par défaut] Sélectionnez l'écran à afficher en priorité (par défaut) lorsque l'interrupteur secondaire est mis sur ON (Marche). 1 Suivez la procédure à la page 12-3 pour afficher l'écran du menu Utilitaire. 2 Appuyez sur [01 Configuration système] sur l'écran du menu Utilitaire, puis sur [05 Écran par défaut]. 3 Sélectionnez l'écran initial désiré. 4 Appuyez sur [OK] pour valider le réglage. % Pour annuler la modification, appuyez sur [Annuler]. Dans l'un ou l'autre cas, le menu Configuration système réapparaît. Paramètre de réglage Écran par défaut MACHINE L'écran Machine s'affiche. LISTE TÂCHE (Rés/Suspend) L'écran LISTE TÂCHE (Rés/Suspend) va s'afficher. LISTE TÂCHE (Programmes) L'écran LISTE TÂCHE (Programmes). COPIER L'écran Copie s'affiche. 12 [01 Configuration système] 12-24 ineo 1052/1250 12.2 12.2.7 [06 Conditions de départ] Réinitialisation auto est une fonction qui restaure automatiquement l'écran spécifié comme écran par défaut, à l'issue d'un certain temps d'absence de sollicitation de l'écran tactile ou panneau de contrôle. Vous pouvez spécifiez le laps de temps à attendre avant que la fonction Réinitialisation auto ne soit activée. 1 Suivez la procédure à la page 12-3 pour afficher l'écran du menu Utilitaire. 2 Appuyez sur [01 Configuration système] sur l'écran du menu Utilitaire, puis sur [06 Conditions de départ]. 3 Appuyez sur la touche de durée désirée. % Sélectionner [Désactivé] désactive la fonction auto Réinitialisation. 4 Appuyez sur [OK] pour valider le réglage. % Pour annuler la modification, appuyez sur [Annuler]. Dans l'un ou l'autre cas, le menu Configuration système réapparaît. 12.2.8 [07 Temps de réponse touche] Sélectionnez le délai avant que la machine ne réponde à une pression sur l'écran tactile. 1 Suivez la procédure à la page 12-3 pour afficher l'écran du menu Utilitaire. 2 Appuyez sur [01 Configuration système] sur l'écran du menu Utilitaire, puis sur [07 Temps de réponse touche]. 3 Sélectionnez la durée désirée. 4 Appuyez sur [OK] pour valider le réglage. % Pour annuler la modification, appuyez sur [Annuler]. Dans l'un ou l'autre cas, le menu Configuration système réapparaît. ineo 1052/1250 12-25 12.2 [01 Configuration système] 12 12.2.9 [08 Modifier code utilisateur] Les utilisateurs peuvent changer le code qu'un administrateur a fixé en même temps qu'un nom d'utilisateur (code d'utilisateur). Le code modifié ici servira à l'authentification utilisateur. REMARQUE Le changement de code est indisponible sur la machine si elle n'a pas été configurée pour l'authentification utilisateur. REMARQUE Pour changer le code, il est nécessaires d'introduire à la fois le nom d'utilisateur et le code. Vous pouvez changer le code seulement ; le nom d'utilisateur ne peut pas être changé ici. Le code adossé à un nom de compte (code compte) ne peut pas être changé. 1 Suivez la procédure à la page 12-3 pour afficher l'écran du menu Utilitaire. 2 Appuyez sur [01 Configuration système] sur l'écran du menu Utilitaire, puis sur [08 Modifier code utilisateur]. 3 Appuyez sur [Nom de l'utilisateur], et entrez le nom d'utilisateur enregistré. Appuyez sur [OK]. 4 Appuyez sur [Code en vigueur], et entrez code en vigueur. Appuyez sur [OK]. % Le code de l'utilisateur peut comporter jusqu'à 64 caractères alphanumériques. 5 Appuyez sur [Nouveau code], et entrez un nouveau code. Appuyez sur [OK]. 6 Appuyez sur [Confirmation de saisie] pour réintroduire le nouveau code. Appuyez sur [OK]. 7 Appuyez sur [OK] pour valider le réglage. % Pour annuler la modification, appuyez sur [Annuler]. Dans l'un ou l'autre cas, le menu Configuration système réapparaît. 12 [01 Configuration système] 12-26 ineo 1052/1250 12.2 12.2.10 [09 Config. touches raccourci] - [01 Enregist. appli. pour copie] Sélectionnez les fonctions associées aux touches de raccourci à faire figurer sous [Applications] sur l'écran Copie. On peut au maximum sélectionner 4 touches. 1 Suivez la procédure à la page 12-3 pour afficher l'écran du menu Utilitaire. 2 Appuyez sur [01 Configuration système] sur l'écran du menu Utilitaire, puis sur [09 Config. touches raccourci] et [01 Enregist. appli. pour copie]. 3 Appuyez sur la/les touche(s) à afficher. On peut au maximum sélectionner 4 touches. 4 Appuyez sur [OK] pour valider le réglage. % Pour annuler la modification, appuyez sur [Annuler]. L'écran du menu Config. touches raccourci réapparaît. 12.2.11 [09 Config. touches raccourci] - [02 Enregistrer appli. Finition] Sélectionnez les fonctions de finition associées aux touches de raccourci à faire figurer sous [Finition] sur l'écran Copie. On peut au maximum sélectionner 4 touches. 1 Suivez la procédure à la page 12-3 pour afficher l'écran du menu Utilitaire. 2 Appuyez sur [01 Configuration système] sur l'écran du menu Utilitaire, puis sur [09 Config. touches raccourci] et [02 Enregistrer appli. Finition]. 3 Appuyez sur la/les touche(s) à afficher. On peut au maximum sélectionner 4 touches. 4 Appuyez sur [OK] pour valider le réglage. % Pour annuler la modification, appuyez sur [Annuler]. L'écran du menu Config. touches raccourci réapparaît. ineo 1052/1250 12-27 12.2 [01 Configuration système] 12 12.2.12 [09 Config. touches raccourci] - [03 Enregistrer touche fonction] Assignez jusqu'à cinq configurations de travail précédemment archivées avec le Mode mémoire à des touches de fonction. Vous pouvez rappeler la configuration enregistrée par simple pression sur la touche de fonction correspondante. REMARQUE La configuration de travail à enregistrer sur une touche de fonction doit d'abord être archivée avec le Mode mémoire. 1 Suivez la procédure à la page 12-3 pour afficher l'écran du menu Utilitaire. 2 Appuyez sur [01 Configuration système] sur l'écran du menu Utilitaire, puis sur [09 Config. touches raccourci] et [03 Enregistrer touche fonction]. 3 Sur le côté gauche de l'écran Paramétrage des touches de fonction, appuyez sur la touche de fonction (F1 à F5) à enregistrer ou à supprimer. 4 Pour enregistrer une configuration de travail : % Appuyez sur [,][+] pour afficher l'entrée Mode mémoire souhaitée. % Appuyez sur la touche d'entrée Mode mémoire à enregistrer sur la touche de fonction sélectionnée. % Appuyez sur [< Entrer]. % Si la touche sélectionnée à l'étape 3 a déjà été utilisée pour une autre configuration de travail en Mode mémoire, un écran instantané s'affiche pour confirmer que la touche sera écrasée. Si elle peut être écrasée, appuyez sur [Oui]. 5 Pour supprimer une configuration de travail : % Appuyez sur [Supprimer]. Un menu instantané s'affiche pour confirmer que la configuration de travail en Mode mémoire sera supprimée de la touche de fonctions sélectionnée. % Appuyez sur [Oui] pour supprimer. % Appuyez sur [Non] pour annuler la suppression. REMARQUE Même si elle a été supprimée sur la touche de fonction, la configuration de travail proprement dite reste dans Mode mémoire. 12 [01 Configuration système] 12-28 ineo 1052/1250 12.2 6 Appuyez sur [OK] pour valider le réglage. % Pour annuler la modification, appuyez sur [Annuler]. L'écran du menu Config. touches raccourci réapparaît. 12.2.13 [09 Config. touches raccourci] - [04 Enregis. appli. numérisation] Sélectionnez les touches de raccourci à afficher sous [Applications] de l'écran scanner. On peut au maximum sélectionner 4 touches. 1 Suivez la procédure à la page 12-3 pour afficher l'écran du menu Utilitaire. 2 Appuyez sur [01 Configuration système] sur l'écran du menu Utilitaire, puis sur [09 Config. touches raccourci] et [04 Enregis. appli. numérisation]. 3 Appuyez sur la/les touche(s) à afficher. On peut au maximum sélectionner 4 touches. 4 Appuyez sur [OK] pour valider le réglage. % Pour annuler la modification, appuyez sur [Annuler]. L'écran du menu Config. touches raccourci réapparaît. ineo 1052/1250 12-29 12.3 [02 Configuration fonctions] 12 12.3 [02 Configuration fonctions] 12.3.1 [01 Configuration magasins] - [01 Sélection auto magasins] Spécifiez les magasins à fournir en papier quand PapierAuto (APS) est activé et à alterner quand ATS (Basculement Auto magasin) est activé. Ces magasins ne peuvent pas être sélectionnés séparément. Spécifiez aussi la priorité du/des magasins sélectionné(s). REMARQUE Le réglage priorité du/des magasin(s) sélectionné(s) s'applique au magasin qui est sélectionné automatiquement lorsque [Magasin APS] est sélectionné pour "Magasin par défaut sans APS" dans [03 Configuration copieur] - [02 Autres paramètres]. Voir page 12-44 pour plus de détails. 1 Suivez la procédure à la page 12-3 pour afficher l'écran du menu Utilitaire. 2 Appuyez successivement sur [02 Configuration fonctions] sur l'écran du menu Utilitaire, puis sur [01 Configuration magasins] et [01 Sélection auto magasins]. 3 Spécifiez le(s) magasin(s) à fournir en papier lorsque PapierAuto est activé et à alterner lorsque Basculement Auto magasins est activé, à l'aide des touches situées sous "Basculement ATS/APS" dans la partie gauche de l'écran. % Un des magasins est sélectionné automatiquement lorsque la fonction PapierAuto ou Basculement Auto magasin est activée. 4 Spécifiez la priorité des magasins sélectionnés avec les touches disponibles sous "Ordre de priorité" du côté droit de l'écran. % Sélectionnez le magasin dont l'ordre de priorité doit être changé, et avec les touches "Haute [+]" ou "Basse [,]" sélectionnez l'ordre de priorité voulu. 5 Appuyez sur [OK] pour valider le réglage. % Pour annuler la modification, appuyez sur [Annuler]. Dans l'un ou l'autre cas, l'écran Configuration magasins réapparaît. 12 [02 Configuration fonctions] 12-30 ineo 1052/1250 12.3 12.3.2 [01 Configuration magasins] - [02 Basculement auto magasins] Activez/Désactivez la fonction Magasin Auto pour le/les magasin(s) sélectionnés. 1 Suivez la procédure à la page 12-3 pour afficher l'écran du menu Utilitaire. 2 Appuyez successivement sur [02 Configuration fonctions] sur l'écran du menu Utilitaire, puis sur [01 Configuration magasins] et sur [02 Basculement auto magasins]. 3 Appuyez sur [Activé] pour utiliser la fonction de Basculement auto magasins ou appuyez sur [Désactivé] pour ne pas utiliser la fonction. 4 Appuyez sur [OK] pour valider le réglage. % Pour annuler la modification, appuyez sur [Annuler]. Dans l'un ou l'autre cas, l'écran Configuration magasins réapparaît. 12.3.3 [01 Configuration magasins] - [03 Réglage ATS] Sélectionnez si le papier doit continuer à être prélevé dans le magasin actuellement sélectionné par la fonction ATS, ou être prélevé dans le magasin utilisé jusqu'à épuisement du papier. 1 Suivez la procédure à la page 12-3 pour afficher l'écran du menu Utilitaire. 2 Appuyez successivement sur [02 Configuration fonctions] sur l'écran du menu Utilitaire, puis sur [01 Configuration magasins] et sur [03 Réglage ATS]. 3 Appuyez sur [Conserver] ou sur [Ne pas conserver]. 4 Appuyez sur [OK] pour valider le réglage. % Pour annuler la modification, appuyez sur [Annuler]. Dans l'un ou l'autre cas, l'écran Configuration magasins réapparaît. ineo 1052/1250 12-31 12.3 [02 Configuration fonctions] 12 12.3.4 [01 Configuration magasins] - [04 Réglage séch.initial magasins] Spécifiez s'il faut activer la fonction Départ papier en attente pendant le séchage du magasin papier grande capacité avec le déshumidificateur. 1 Suivez la procédure à la page 12-3 pour afficher l'écran du menu Utilitaire. 2 Appuyez sur [02 Configuration fonctions] sur l'écran du menu Utilitaire, puis sur [01 Configuration magasins] et sur [04 Réglage séch.initial magasins]. 3 Spécifiez s'il faut activer la fonction Départ papier en attente durant séchage. [Désactivé] : n'attend pas le séchage pour imprimer. En attente d'impression, lance le papier. [Activé] : attend le séchage (6 à 10 minutes) avant de lancer le papier lorsque l'interrupteur secondaire est mis sous tension ou pour le chargement d'un magasin. 4 Appuyez sur [OK] pour valider le réglage. % Pour annuler la modification, appuyez sur [Annuler]. Dans l'un ou l'autre cas, l'écran Configuration magasins réapparaît. 12.3.5 [01 Configuration magasins] - [05 Sélection auto type de papier] Sélectionnez les conditions papier du magasin censé être automatiquement sélectionné en mode PapierAuto (APS). Quand le magasin automatiquement sélectionné en mode PapierAuto (APS) contient un autre type de papier que celui spécifié dans ce paramètre, la machine indique que le type de papier ne correspond pas. 1 Suivez la procédure à la page 12-3 pour afficher l'écran du menu Utilitaire. 2 Appuyez sur [02 Configuration fonctions] sur l'écran du menu Utilitaire, puis sur [01 Configuration magasins] et [05 Sélection auto type de papier]. 12 [02 Configuration fonctions] 12-32 ineo 1052/1250 12.3 3 Sélectionnez les conditions papier du magasin censé être automatiquement sélectionné en mode PapierAuto (APS). % Sélectionnez la condition désirée pour chaque élément. Plusieurs réglages peuvent être spécifiés pour "Type de papier", "Grammage" et "Couleur papier". 4 Appuyez sur [OK] pour valider le réglage. % Pour annuler la modification, appuyez sur [Annuler]. Dans l'un ou l'autre cas, l'écran Configuration magasins réapparaît. 12.3.6 [02 Autres paramètres] Vous pouvez spécifier les options suivantes. Paramètre de réglage Description Options de réglage (avec la valeur par défaut en gras) Point décimal marge page Sélectionnez l'utilisation ou la non utilisation des décimales lors de l'entrée d'une valeur de décalage d'image. Décimal OUI, Non Conserver Valeur Marge Sélectionnez s'il faut garder la valeur de décalage spécifiée la dernière fois. Garder, Ne pas garder Tempo interdict. imprimante Sélectionnez le laps de temps durant lequel l'impression via PC est interdite après le dernier actionnement des touches tactiles. Désactivé, 15 secondes, 30 secondes, 60 secondes, 90 secondes Sortie papier onglet inutile Spécifiez s'il faut ou non automatiquement évacuer les feuilles à onglet inutiles chargées dans un magasin en tant que jeu. Activé, Désactivé Décalage auto image (onglet) Sélectionnez s'il faut ou non imprimer l'original de format standard dont l'image sur l'onglet est correctement imprimée sur le bord droit sur du papier à onglets en décalant l'image numérisée de 12,5 mm vers la droite. Activé, Désactivé Longueur du tiret (tampon) Sélectionnez la longueur du tiret à utiliser dans un style de la fonction Numéro pages de Tampon prédéfini. Long, Court Gestion des tons sombres Si vous réalisez plusieurs copies d'un original dont la densité est sombre, l'image copiée risque de devenir instable. Afin d'ajuster la qualité de l'image copiée, sélectionnez s'il faut automatiquement réduire la vitesse de copie (Qualité) ou privilégier la vitesse de copie (Performance) ou encore désactiver la gestion des tons. Désactivé, Qualité, Performance Icône bouton tons sombres Sélectionnez s'il faut ou non afficher l'icône Ton sombre pendant que la fonction Gestion des tons sombres est activée. Cette fonction est uniquement disponible quand [Qualité] ou [Performance] est sélectionné sous [Gestion des tons sombres]. Activé, Désactivé Sortie Individuelle Combi.DD Sélectionnez s'il faut ou non produire des fichiers combinés en conservant les modes Agrafage et le mode Pliage en Z. Activé, Désactivé Attente après transfert num. Sélectionnez Conserver ou Ne pas conserver le mode en cours après le chargement des données numérisées. Garder, Ne pas garder ineo 1052/1250 12-33 12.3 [02 Configuration fonctions] 12 1 Suivez la procédure à la page 12-3 pour afficher l'écran du menu Utilitaire. 2 Appuyez sur [02 Configuration fonctions] sur l'écran du menu Utilitaire, puis sur [02 Autres paramètres]. 3 Appuyez sur la touche souhaitée à la droite de chaque élément de menu. 4 Appuyez sur [OK] pour valider le réglage. % Pour annuler la modification, appuyez sur [Annuler]. L'écran du menu Configuration fonctions s'affiche à nouveau. Reprise réserve copie Sélectionnez s'il faut ou non autoriser une opération en continu à reprendre des travaux copie en réserve. Activé, Désactivé Reprise réserve numérisation Sélectionnez s'il faut ou non autoriser une opération en continu à reprendre des travaux de numérisation en réserve. Activé, Désactivé Reprise réserve boîte Sélectionnez s'il faut ou non autoriser l'opération continue pour les travaux d'enregistrement dans les boîtes. Activé, Désactivé Paramètre de réglage Description Options de réglage (avec la valeur par défaut en gras) 12 [02 Configuration fonctions] 12-34 ineo 1052/1250 12.3 12.3.7 [03 Effacement Bord Avant] Sélectionnez la largeur d'effacement de l'image à partir du bord avant de la feuille lors de l'impression. 1 Suivez la procédure à la page 12-3 pour afficher l'écran du menu Utilitaire. 2 Appuyez sur [02 Configuration fonctions] sur l'écran du menu Utilitaire, puis sur [03 Effacement Bord Avant]. 3 Appuyez sur la touche souhaitée pour sélectionner l'ampleur d'effacement d'image pour du papier de format standard et du papier grand format/personnalisé. 4 Appuyez sur [OK] pour valider le réglage. % Pour annuler la modification, appuyez sur [Annuler]. L'écran du menu Configuration fonctions s'affiche à nouveau. 12.3.8 [04 Réglage densité] - [01 Décal. densité selon l'image] Sélectionnez manuellement le type de densité de copie voulu parmi neuf niveaux sur l'écran Copie et ajustez chacun des neuf niveaux à trois niveaux plus clair ou trois niveaux plus foncé. Ce réglage peut être appliqué pour chacun des modes Type original : Texte/Photo, Contraste +, Photo et Texte. 1 Suivez la procédure à la page 12-3 pour afficher l'écran du menu Utilitaire. 2 Appuyez successivement sur [02 Configuration fonctions] sur l'écran du menu Utilitaire, puis sur [04 Réglage densité] et sur [01 Décal. densité selon l'image]. 3 Appuyez sur la touche de fonction numérique souhaitée de 0 (clair) à 6 (foncé) pour chaque mode afin de spécifier l'ampleur de décalage souhaité. 4 Appuyez sur [OK] pour valider le réglage. % Pour annuler la modification, appuyez sur [Annuler]. L'écran du menu Réglage densité s'affiche à nouveau. ineo 1052/1250 12-35 12.3 [02 Configuration fonctions] 12 12.3.9 [04 Réglage densité] - [02 Contraste personnalisé] Définissez le niveau de densité copie désiré ainsi que le niveau de suppression du fond pour chaque type d'original (Texte/Photo, Contraste +, Photo, et Texte). Les niveaux de contraste personnalisés peuvent être rappelés depuis l'écran Réglage qualité accessible depuis l'écran Copie. 1 Suivez la procédure à la page 12-3 pour afficher l'écran du menu Utilitaire. 2 Appuyez successivement sur [02 Configuration fonctions] sur l'écran du menu Utilitaire, puis sur [04 Réglage densité], [02 Contraste personnalisé]. 3 Appuyez sur [Personnalisé 1] ou sur [Personnalisé 2]. 4 Sélectionnez la touche souhaitée du Type original, puis spécifiez le niveau souhaité pour Réglage densité et Réglage du fond pour chaque type d'original. 5 Pour produire l'épreuve au niveau de contraste spécifié, appuyez sur [Impression] et mettez l'original sur la vitre d'exposition. Puis, appuyez sur Départ sur le panneau de contrôle. Appuyez sur [Fermer]. 6 Appuyez sur [OK] pour valider le réglage. % Pour annuler la modification, appuyez sur [Annuler]. L'écran du menu Réglage densité s'affiche à nouveau. 12.3.10 [04 Réglage densité] - [03 Densité en mode photo] Sélectionnez le niveau de densité déterminé par la contraste auto (AES) lorsque le mode Photo est sélectionné. 1 Suivez la procédure à la page 12-3 pour afficher l'écran du menu Utilitaire. 2 Appuyez successivement sur [02 Configuration fonctions] sur l'écran du menu Utilitaire, puis sur [04 Réglage densité], [03 Densité en mode photo]. 3 Sélectionnez la touche de densité souhaitée parmi [Clair], [Standard] et [Foncé]. 12 [02 Configuration fonctions] 12-36 ineo 1052/1250 12.3 4 Appuyez sur [OK] pour valider le réglage. % Pour annuler la modification, appuyez sur [Annuler]. L'écran du menu Réglage densité s'affiche à nouveau. 12.3.11 [04 Réglage densité] - [04 Densité de l'image] Modifiez la plage de densité figurant à l'écran Copie. Utilisez cette fonction pour ajuster la densité d'image de la partie la plus sombre (foncé maximal) de l'original vers Foncé ou Clair, comme pour l'impression offset. Comme pour l'impression de documents tels que des livres, cette fonction est utile pour éclaircir les textes et réduire la fatigue oculaire. 1 Suivez la procédure à la page 12-3 pour afficher l'écran du menu Utilitaire. 2 Appuyez successivement sur [02 Configuration fonctions] sur l'écran du menu Utilitaire, puis sur [04 Réglage densité], [04 Densité de l'image]. 3 Appuyez sur la touche de densité souhaitée. 4 Appuyez sur [OK] pour valider le réglage. % Pour annuler la modification, appuyez sur [Annuler]. L'écran du menu Réglage densité s'affiche à nouveau. 12.3.12 [05 Taux de restitution] Spécifiez les 8 taux Agrandir/Réduire prédéfinis et 3 Taux programmés disponibles sur l'écran Zoom. 1 Suivez la procédure à la page 12-3 pour afficher l'écran du menu Utilitaire. 2 Appuyez sur [02 Configuration fonctions] sur l'écran du menu Utilitaire, puis sur [05 Taux de restitution]. ineo 1052/1250 12-37 12.3 [02 Configuration fonctions] 12 3 Sélectionnez un touche de zoom à modifier. % Utilisez le clavier de l'écran tactile pour afficher le taux de restitution souhaité sur la droite de la touche. 4 Appuyez sur [OK] pour valider le réglage. % Pour annuler la modification, appuyez sur [Annuler]. L'écran du menu Configuration fonctions s'affiche à nouveau. 12.3.13 [06 Réglage Tandem] - [01 Dép.Machine 2 si doc complet] Sélectionnez si ce MFP et le MFP Partenaire doivent produire simultanément l'image qui avait été numérisée sur ce MFP ou si le MFP Partenaire doit recevoir et imprimer l'image numérisée. Ce réglage nécessite un paramètre de service. Contactez votre technicien SAV si nécessaire. 1 Suivez la procédure à la page 12-3 pour afficher l'écran du menu Utilitaire. 2 Appuyez successivement sur [02 Configuration fonctions] sur l'écran du menu Utilitaire, puis sur [06 Réglage Tandem], [01 Dép.Machine 2 si doc complet]. 3 Sélectionnez [Activé] ou [Désactivé]. % Si [Activé] est sélectionné, le MFP Partenaire attend jusqu'à ce qu'il reçoive toutes les données d'image transmises par ce MFP, alors que ce MFP commence à imprimer en numérisant les données. % Si [Désactivé] est sélectionné, les deux machines commencent à imprimer simultanément pendant que ce MFP continue de numériser les données d'image. 4 Appuyez sur [OK] pour valider le réglage. % Pour annuler la modification, appuyez sur [Annuler]. L'écran du menu Réglage Tandem réapparaît. 12 [02 Configuration fonctions] 12-38 ineo 1052/1250 12.3 12.3.14 [06 Réglage Tandem] - [02 Attente/Épreuve machine auxi] Spécifiez comment diviser les épreuves à imprimer entre ce MFP et le MFP Partenaire. Ce réglage nécessite un paramètre de service. Contactez votre technicien SAV si nécessaire. 1 Suivez la procédure à la page 12-3 pour afficher l'écran du menu Utilitaire. 2 Appuyez successivement sur [02 Configuration fonctions] sur l'écran du menu Utilitaire, puis sur [06 Réglage Tandem], [02 Attente/Épreuve machine auxi]. 3 Sélectionnez ou [Autorisation] ou [Interdiction]. % Si [Autorisation] est sélectionné, les données d'image pour l'épreuve sont transmises simultanément à ce MFP et au MFP Partenaire. L'impression de l'épreuve commence sur les deux machines. % Quand [Interdiction] est sélectionné, seul ce MFP imprime l'épreuve. Quand ce MFP commence l'impression normale, le MFP Partenaire reçoit les données d'image et commence à imprimer. % Quand [Oui] est sélectionné sous [06 Réglage Tandem] - [04 Redistrib. tâche si problème] et que [Autorisation] est actionné, le message [Veuillez désactiver redistribution tâche si problème] va s'afficher la touche [Autorisation] ne sera pas disponible. 4 Appuyez sur [OK] pour valider le réglage. % Pour annuler la modification, appuyez sur [Annuler]. L'écran du menu Réglage Tandem réapparaît. ineo 1052/1250 12-39 12.3 [02 Configuration fonctions] 12 12.3.15 [06 Réglage Tandem] - [03 Valeurs marges machine auxil.] Réglez le MFP partenaire censé utiliser la même valeur de décalage image utilisée sur ce MFP. Ce réglage nécessite un paramètre de service. Contactez votre technicien SAV si nécessaire. 1 Suivez la procédure à la page 12-3 pour afficher l'écran du menu Utilitaire. 2 Appuyez successivement sur [02 Configuration fonctions] sur l'écran du menu Utilitaire, puis sur [06 Réglage Tandem], [03 Valeurs MachineAuxiliaire]. 3 Sélectionnez [Valeurs MachinePrincipale] ou [Valeurs marges machine auxil.]. % Quand [Valeurs MachinePrincipale] est sélectionné, le MFP Partenaire peut également utiliser la même valeur de décalage que celle utilisée sur ce MFP. % Quand [Valeurs marges machine auxi.] est sélectionné, le MFP Partenaire utilise de manière indépendante la valeur de décalage spécifiée sur ce dernier. Quand [Attente/Épreuve machine auxi] est réglé sur [Interdiction], la valeur de décalage spécifiée sur le MFP Partenaire ne peut pas être utilisée parce que ce MFP transmet les données d'image numérisées reflétant déjà sa valeur de décalage. 4 Appuyez sur [OK] pour valider le réglage. % Pour annuler la modification, appuyez sur [Annuler]. L'écran du menu Réglage Tandem réapparaît. 12 [02 Configuration fonctions] 12-40 ineo 1052/1250 12.3 12.3.16 [06 Réglage Tandem] - [04 Redistrib. tâche si problème] Spécifiez s'il faut redistribuer les tâches ou continuer à imprimer avec le réglage initial quand l'une ou l'autre des machines a terminé sa tâche ou qu'un problème est survenu. Ce réglage nécessite un paramètre de service. Contactez votre technicien SAV si nécessaire. 1 Suivez la procédure à la page 12-3 pour afficher l'écran du menu Utilitaire. 2 Appuyez successivement sur [02 Configuration fonctions] sur l'écran du menu Utilitaire, puis sur [06 Réglage Tandem], [04 Redistrib. tâche si problème]. 3 Sélectionnez [Activé] ou [Désactivé]. % Quand [Activé] est sélectionné, le volume d'impression restant sera redistribué si l'une des machines a terminé sa tâche ou que la machine restante en ordre de marche va prendre en charge le volume d'impression restant pour achever le travail si un problème survient sur l'autre machine. % Quand [Désactivé] est sélectionné, chaque machine termine la tâche qui lui est dévolue. % Quand [Autorisation] est sélectionné sous [06 Réglage Tandem] - [02 Attente/Épreuve machine auxi] et que [Activé] est actionné, le message [Veuillez régler Attente/Épreuve machine Tandem sur Interdiction] va s'afficher et la touche [Activé] ne sera pas disponible. 4 Appuyez sur [OK] pour valider le réglage. % Pour annuler la modification, appuyez sur [Annuler]. L'écran du menu Réglage Tandem réapparaît. ineo 1052/1250 12-41 12.3 [02 Configuration fonctions] 12 12.3.17 [06 Réglage Tandem] - [05 Configura tandem après tâche] Spécifiez s'il faut continuer à utiliser le réglage tandem ou s'il faut l'annuler une fois que la tâche d'impression tandem est achevée. Ce réglage nécessite un paramètre de service. Contactez votre technicien SAV si nécessaire. 1 Suivez la procédure à la page 12-3 pour afficher l'écran du menu Utilitaire. 2 Appuyez successivement sur [02 Configuration fonctions] sur l'écran du menu Utilitaire, puis sur [06 Réglage Tandem], [05 Configura tandem après tâche]. 3 Sélectionnez [Activé] ou [Désactivé]. % Appuyez sur [Activé] pour continuer à utiliser le réglage tandem après que la tâche d'impression tandem est achevée. % Appuyez sur [Désactivé] pour annuler le réglage tandem après que la tâche d'impression tandem est achevée. 4 Appuyez sur [OK] pour valider le réglage. % Pour annuler la modification, appuyez sur [Annuler]. L'écran du menu Réglage Tandem réapparaît. 12 [03 Configuration copieur] 12-42 ineo 1052/1250 12.4 12.4 [03 Configuration copieur] 12.4.1 [01 Fonction réinitialisation] - [01 Configuration initiale] Vous pouvez modifier les conditions de copie à restaurer lors de la réinitialisation de la machine. La machine sera réinitialisée : - quand elle est mise sous tension - quand la fonction Réinitialisation Auto est activée - quand la fonction Conso. d'énergie est activée - quand la copie est accessible après la saisie du code d'accès quand la fonction Authentification utilisateur/Configuration compte est activée - quand un compteur à clé ou une carte de copie est insérée - Appuyez sur Auto sur le panneau de contrôle. En plus du réglage d'usine par défaut (Tout auto), vous pouvez spécifier les conditions de copier à utiliser comme réglage par défaut. Conditions de copie spécifiées comme Tout auto - Caractéristiques orig. : Standard - Réglage qualité : Standard - AES : Activé - Agrand./Réduction : 1,000 - Finition : [01 Fonction réinitialisation] - [02 Retour conditions de départ] - Recto-verso : 1->1 - PapierAuto : Activé - Rotation : Activé - Chargeur Auto : Activé 1 Suivez la procédure à la page 12-3 pour afficher l'écran du menu Utilitaire. 2 Appuyez successivement sur [03 Configuration copieur] sur l'écran du menu Utilitaire, puis sur [01 Fonction réinitialisation] et [01 Configuration initiale]. 3 Spécifiez les éléments de réglage suivants dans les conditions initiales : Caractéristiques orig., Réglage qualité, Taux restitution, Recto-verso, Finition, Sélect. mag., PapierAuto et Rotation Image Activé/Désactivé. La procédure de configuration de ces éléments est la même que sur l'écran Copie. % Appuyez sur [Chargeur Auto] pour spécifier le mode Chargeur Auto comme configuration initiale. % Impossible de spécifier Applications et Réglage Papier. 4 Appuyez sur [OK] pour valider le réglage. % Pour annuler la modification, appuyez sur [Annuler]. Dans l'un ou l'autre cas, l'écran du menu Fonction réinitialisation réapparaît. ineo 1052/1250 12-43 12.4 [03 Configuration copieur] 12 12.4.2 [01 Fonction réinitialisation] - [02 Retour conditions de départ] Sélectionnez le réglage d'usine par défaut (Tout auto) ou la configuration initiale spécifiée dans [03 Configuration copieur] - [01 Fonction réinitialisation] - [01 Configuration initiale]. De même, modifiez la configuration de la sortie (mode unité de finition) de Tout auto selon vos besoins. 1 Suivez la procédure à la page 12-3 pour afficher l'écran du menu Utilitaire. 2 Appuyez successivement sur [03 Configuration copieur] sur l'écran du menu Utilitaire, puis sur [01 Fonction réinitialisation] et [02 Retour conditions de départ]. 3 Sélectionnez les conditions de copie à rétablir lors de la réinitialisation de la machine. % Appuyez sur [Tout auto] pour restaurer le réglage d'usine par défaut des conditions de copie. % Appuyez sur [Conditions init] pour sélectionner la configuration initiale spécifiée dans [01 Configuration initiale]. % Quand [Conditions init] est sélectionné, appuyez sur [Programme (30)] pour régler la configuration initiale sur les conditions de copie archivées avec Programme (30) ou sur [Conditions init] pour la régler sur la configuration de copie initiale. 4 Sélectionnez la touche souhaitée sur la droite de "Finition avec "Tout auto"" pour spécifier les réglages de sortie pour le mode Tout auto. 5 Appuyez sur [OK] pour valider le réglage. % Pour annuler la modification, appuyez sur [Annuler]. Dans l'un ou l'autre cas, l'écran du menu Fonction réinitialisation réapparaît. 12.4.3 [01 Fonction réinitialisation] - [03 Initialis. avec compteur clé] Choisissez de réinitialiser ou non la machine lors de l'insertion du compteur clé ou de la carte magnétique. 1 Suivez la procédure à la page 12-3 pour afficher l'écran du menu Utilitaire. 12 [03 Configuration copieur] 12-44 ineo 1052/1250 12.4 2 Appuyez successivement sur [03 Configuration copieur] sur l'écran du menu Utilitaire, puis sur [01 Fonction réinitialisation] et sur [03 Initialis. avec compteur clé]. 3 Appuyez sur [Activé] pour réinitialiser la machine ou appuyez sur [Désactivé] pour garder le réglage actuel quand le compteur à clé ou la carte magnétique est insérée. 4 Appuyez sur [OK] pour valider le réglage. % Pour annuler la modification, appuyez sur [Annuler]. Dans l'un ou l'autre cas, l'écran du menu Fonction réinitialisation réapparaît. 12.4.4 [02 Autres paramètres] Les fonctions suivantes peuvent être assurées en permutant la sélection. Paramètre de réglage Description Options de réglage (avec la valeur par défaut en gras) Sélection Auto Mode Livret Réglez la machine pour qu'elle sélectionne automatiquement le mode Livret dans Applications quand le mode Pliage & Piqûre ou Pliage en 2 multiple est sélectionné. Sélection auto, NON AMS (restitution auto) Vitre Spécifiez s'il faut ou non activer Restitution auto (AMS) quand un original est posé sur la vitre d'exposition. Activé, Désactivé AMS (restitut auto) chargeur Spécifiez s'il faut activer ou non Restitution auto quand un original est placé dans le chargeur Auto. Activé, Désactivé APS (format auto) vitre Spécifiez s'il faut activer ou non PapierAuto quand un original est posé sur la vitre d'exposition. Activé, Désactivé APS (format auto) chargeur Spécifiez s'il faut activer ou non PapierAuto quand un original est placé dans le chargeur Auto. Activé, Désactivé Magasin par défaut sans APS Spécifiez le magasin à être automatiquement sélectionné quand PapierAuto (APS) est annulé. Magasin APS, Mag 1, Mag 2, Mag 3, Mag 4, Mag 5, Mag 6, Mag 7, Mag 8 Orientation reliure original Spécifiez s'il faut ou non faire coïncider le type de reliure dans Finition avec celui spécifié dans Caractéristiques orig. Activé, Désactivé Annul. auto du Tri Agrafé Sélectionnez s'il faut ou non désactiver automatiquement le mode Agrafage et activer le mode Tri après une utilisation combinée des fonctions d'agrafage et de tri. Activé, Désactivé Reliure original fin tâche Sélectionnez la réinitialisation ou non réinitialisation du paramètre d'orientation de l'original défini sur l'écran Original et du paramètre de position de reliure défini sur l'écran Finition après la fin de chaque travail de copie. Conserver, Annul. chaq trav Conserver état retour auto Spécifiez s'il faut ou non reprendre la configuration initiale pour le mode Vitre d'exposition/Chargeur Auto après réinitialisation de la machine. Garder, Ne pas garder ineo 1052/1250 12-45 12.4 [03 Configuration copieur] 12 1 Suivez la procédure à la page 12-3 pour afficher l'écran du menu Utilitaire. 2 Appuyez sur [03 Configuration copieur] sur l'écran du menu Utilitaire, puis sur [02 Autres paramètres]. 3 Sélectionnez [Activé] ou [Désactivé] ou appuyez sur la touche souhaitée pour chaque élément situé à gauche de l'écran. Il y a deux écrans de réglage. Appuyez sur [Suivant] ou sur [Précédent] pour faire défiler les éléments. 4 Appuyez sur [OK] pour valider le réglage. % Pour annuler la modification, appuyez sur [Annuler]. L'écran Configuration copieur s'affiche à nouveau. 12 [04 Configuration scanner] 12-46 ineo 1052/1250 12.5 12.5 [04 Configuration scanner] 12.5.1 [01 Destination par défaut] Sélectionnez la destination par défaut de l'image numérisée à afficher sur l'écran scanner. Sélectionnez l'une des quatre destinations suivantes : - E-Mail (adresse E-mail) - DD (N° de boîte.) - FTP (adresse du serveur FTP) - SMB 1 Suivez la procédure à la page 12-3 pour afficher l'écran du menu Utilitaire. 2 Appuyez sur [04 Configuration scanner] sur l'écran du menu Utilitaire, puis sur [01 Destination par défaut]. 3 Appuyez sur la touche correspondant à la destination souhaitée. 4 Appuyez sur [OK] pour valider le réglage. % Pour annuler la modification, appuyez sur [Annuler]. L'écran du menu Configuration scanner s'affiche à nouveau. 12.5.2 [02 Mode scanner] Spécifiez la configuration initiale en mode numérisation. 1 Suivez la procédure à la page 12-3 pour afficher l'écran du menu Utilitaire. 2 Appuyez sur [04 Configuration scanner] sur l'écran du menu Utilitaire, puis sur [02 Mode scanner]. ineo 1052/1250 12-47 12.5 [04 Configuration scanner] 12 3 Spécifiez les éléments suivants pour la configuration initiale : Caractéristiques orig., Réglage qualité, Taux restitution, Applications, Format numéris., Résolution (dpi) et Recto-verso. La procédure de configuration de ces éléments est la même que sur l'écran scanner. Appuyez sur [Chargeur Auto] pour sélectionner le mode Chargeur auto comme configuration initiale. 4 Appuyez sur [OK] pour valider le réglage. % Pour annuler la modification, appuyez sur [Annuler]. L'écran du menu Configuration scanner s'affiche à nouveau. 12.5.3 [03 Autres paramètres] Sélectionnez les paramètres par défaut pour le format de fichier en cas de numérisation. 1 Suivez la procédure à la page 12-3 pour afficher l'écran du menu Utilitaire. 2 Appuyez sur [04 Configuration scanner] sur l'écran du menu Utilitaire, puis sur [03 Autres paramètres]. 3 Effectuez la sélection désirée pour chaque élément sur le côté gauche de l'écran. 4 Appuyez sur [OK] pour valider le réglage. % Pour annuler la modification, appuyez sur [Annuler]. L'écran du menu Configuration scanner s'affiche à nouveau. REMARQUE En cas de transfert simultané vers plusieurs destinations, il n'est pas possible de spécifier le paramètre de format de fichier de manière distincte. En cas de transmission simultanée, le réglage du format de fichier sera sélectionné avec la priorité suivante : 1. E-mail 2. DD 3. FTP 4. SMB Réglage Description Format fichier (E-mail) Sélectionnez le format de données pour la transmission des données numérisées jointes à un e-mail parmi Paquet PDF, Division PDF, Paquet TIFF, Division TIFF, Paquet XPS et Division XPS. Format fichier (DD) Sélectionnez le format des données pour enregistrer les données numérisées sur le disque dur parmi Paquet PDF, Division PDF, Paquet TIFF, Division TIFF, Paquet XPS et Division XPS. Format fichier (FTP) Sélectionnez le format de transmission des données numérisées vers un serveur FTP parmi Paquet PDF, Division PDF, Paquet TIFF, Division TIFF, Paquet XPS et Division XPS. Format fichier (SMB) Sélectionnez le format de transmission des données numérisées vers un dossier partagé parmi Paquet PDF, Division PDF, Paquet TIFF, Division TIFF, Paquet XPS et Division XPS. 12 [05 Réglage écran tactile] 12-48 ineo 1052/1250 12.6 12.6 [05 Réglage écran tactile] Cette fonction permet de vérifier que les touches affichées à l'écran sont bien alignées avec le capteur tactile, dans le cas où la machine ne répond pas correctement aux pressions sur l'écran tactile. REMARQUE L'écran Réglage écran tactile est également accessible en appuyant successivement sur Utilitaire/Compteur sur le panneau de contrôle et [5] sur le clavier du panneau de contrôle. La machine peut être programmée pour que ce réglage ne figure pas dans le menu Utilitaire, mais pour afficher à la place l'écran Réglage écran tactile seulement lorsque la touche [5] est actionnée sur le pavé numérique du panneau de contrôle. Contactez votre technicien SAV si nécessaire. 1 Appuyez sur Utilitaire/Compteur sur le panneau de contrôle. L'écran Menu Utilitaire s'affiche. 2 Appuyez sur [05 Réglage écran tactile]. L'écran Réglage écran tactile s'affiche. 3 Appuyez sur l'icône "+" dans le coin supérieur droit, puis dans le coin inférieur gauche de l'écran. Les coordonnées actuelles seront affichées dans la zone de message de l'écran. ineo 1052/1250 12-49 12.6 [05 Réglage écran tactile] 12 4 Vérifiez les coordonnées. % Vérifiez que la coordonnée X et que la coordonnée Y affichées sur la première ligne sous "Réglage écran tactile" tombent dans la plage des valeurs standard affichées sur la deuxième ligne. % Si les coordonnées sont hors de la plage, répétez la procédure de réglage ou contactez le SAV. 5 Appuyez sur chaque touche Contrôle dans les coins supérieur gauche et inférieur droit de l'écran pour vérifier si le signa sonore fonctionne correctement. % Si le signal sonore ne se fait pas entendre, répétez la procédure de réglage ou contactez le SAV. 6 Appuyez [0] sur le pavé numérique du panneau de contrôle pour achever le réglage. % Pour annuler le réglage, appuyez sur [1] sur le pavé numérique du panneau de contrôle pour revenir à l'écran Menu Utilitaire. 12 [06 Réglage administrateur] - [01 Configuration système] 12-50 ineo 1052/1250 12.7 12.7 [06 Réglage administrateur] - [01 Configuration système] 12.7.1 [01 Économie d'énergie] - [01 Économie d'énergie] Sélectionnez Veille ou Éco énergie (Extinction Auto) comme mode d'économie énergie à activer lorsqu'on appuie sur Éco énergie sur le panneau de contrôle. Sélectionnez aussi le délai avant que Veille ou Éco énergie ne devienne actif. Veille : [1 min.], [3 min.], [5 min.], [10 min.], [15 min.], [30 min.], [60 min.], [90 min.], [120 min.], [240 min.] Éco énergie : [--- min.], [1 min.], [3 min.], [5 min.], [10 min.], [15 min.], [30 min.], [60 min.], [90 min.], [120 min.], [240 min.] REMARQUE Sélectionnez [---min.] pour désactiver la fonction Éco énergie. La fonction Éco énergie ne peut pas être désactivée. Le fait de régler Éco énergie sur [--- min.] change le réglage de Veille en [1 min.] et vous permet ensuite de choisir une autre durée. 1 Suivez la procédure à la page 12-3 pour afficher l'écran du menu Réglage administrateur. 2 Appuyez successivement sur [01 Configuration système] sur l'écran du menu Réglage administrateur, puis sur [01 Économie d'énergie] et [01 Économie d'énergie]. 3 Sélectionnez le mode d'économie d'énergie à activer manuellement en appuyant sur Éco énergie sur le panneau de contrôle, en appuyant sur [Veille] ou sur [Éco énergie] sous "Conso. d'énergie". 4 Sélectionnez le délai devant s'écouler avant que Veille ne soit activé. % Utilisez les touches [+] et [,] disponibles sous "Veille" sur la droite de l'écran pour sélectionner le laps de temps souhaité. Le réglage par défaut est [1 min.]. REMARQUE Le laps de temps sélectionné pour Veille ne peut pas dépasser celui de la fonction Éco énergie (Extinction Auto). L'indication du délai sélectionné et mis en évidence passera en noir s'il est identique au délai spécifié dans Éco énergie (Extinction Auto). Dans ce cas, Éco énergie (Extinction Auto) sera prioritaire sur la fonction Veille. 5 Sélectionnez le délai avant que Éco énergie (Extinction Auto) ne devienne actif. % Utilisez les touches [+] et [,] disponibles sous "Eco énergie" sur la droite de l'écran pour sélectionner le laps de temps souhaité. Le réglage par défaut est [15 min.]. % Sélectionnez [---mini.] pour désactiver la fonction Éco énergie. REMARQUE L'indication de durée mise en évidence dans Veille passera au noir si le même laps de temps est sélectionné pour Économie d'énergie (extinction auto). Dans ce cas, Éco énergie (Extinction Auto) sera prioritaire sur la fonction Veille. ineo 1052/1250 12-51 12.7 [06 Réglage administrateur] - [01 Configuration système] 12 6 Appuyez sur [OK] pour valider le réglage. % Pour annuler la modification, appuyez sur [Annuler]. L'écran du menu Économie d'énergie réapparaîtra. 12.7.2 [01 Économie d'énergie] - [02 Réglage ERP] La fonction ErP désactive l'interrupteur principal quand l'interrupteur principal est allumé et que la machine reste dans les conditions suivantes pendant un certain temps : - l'interrupteur secondaire est éteint. - La fonction Éco énergie est activée. - La fonction Veille est activée. Sélectionnez le laps de temps après expiration duquel la fonction ERP sera activée. Sélectionnez [Ne pas activer] pour désactiver la fonction ERP. Options : [Ne pas activer], [12 heures], [24 heures], [36 heures], [48 heures], [60 heures], [72 heures] REMARQUE La touche [02 Réglage ERP] sera estompée pour indiquer la désactivation sur une machine avec le paramètre Activ./Désa. programmateur réglé sur [Programmateur activé] ou le paramétrage Archange configuré. dPour info Contactez votre technicien SAV pour le paramétrage Archange, si nécessaire. dPour info Si [Activé] est sélectionné dans [06 Réglages expert] - [04 Réglage extinction auto], l'interrupteur principal sera automatiquement coupé, sans tenir compte de ce réglage, après que l'interrupteur secondaire est coupé et que la machine a entièrement refroidi. Pour plus de détails, voir page 12-62. 1 Suivez la procédure à la page 12-3 pour afficher l'écran du menu Réglage administrateur. 2 Appuyez successivement sur [01 Configuration système] sur l'écran du menu Réglage administrateur, puis sur [01 Économie d'énergie] et [02 Réglage ERP]. 3 Sélectionnez la touche du délai souhaité affiché à l'écran. % Sélectionnez [Ne pas activer] pour désactiver cette fonction. 4 Appuyez sur [OK] pour valider le réglage. % Pour annuler la modification, appuyez sur [Annuler]. L'écran du menu Économie d'énergie réapparaîtra. 12 [06 Réglage administrateur] - [01 Configuration système] 12-52 ineo 1052/1250 12.7 12.7.3 [02 Réglage date/heure] Réglez la date et heure actuelle de l'horloge intégrée de la machine, et spécifiez s'il faut ou non activer la fonction Heure d'été. Lorsque l'heure d'été est activée, son écart avec l'heure normale peut être spécifié selon les besoins. De même, utilisez Décalage horaire pour indiquer le décalage horaire par rapport au temps universel. Par défaut, l'heure d'été est désactivée. 1 Suivez la procédure à la page 12-3 pour afficher l'écran du menu Réglage administrateur. 2 Appuyez sur [01 Configuration système] sur l'écran du menu Réglage administrateur, puis sur [02 Réglage date/heure]. 3 Réglez la date et heure actuelle de l'horloge intégrée de la machine. L'écran affiche le réglage actuel pour la date et l'heure, dans l'ordre jour, mois, année et heure (au format 24 heures). % Tapez les deux chiffres du jour sur le clavier de l'écran tactile. % Appuyez sur [OK] dans le coin inférieur droit du pavé numérique de l'écran tactile pour valider la saisie. La section en évidence se décale vers la droite. Réglez le mois, l'année ainsi que l'heure. 4 Réglez l'heure d'été. % Appuyez sur [Heure d'été] pour régler l'heure d'été. [Heure d'été] est mis en évidence à l'écran. % Entrez le décalage horaire sur le pavé numérique de l'écran tactile. % Appuyez sur [OK] dans le coin inférieur droit du pavé numérique de l'écran tactile pour valider la saisie. 5 Indiquez le décalage horaire par rapport au temps universel. Cela fournit les informations sur le décalage horaire lors de la réception d'un e-mail. Le décalage horaire est prédéfini pour chaque pays ou chaque région. % Appuyez sur [Décalage horaire] et entrez la différence d'heure sur le pavé numérique de l'écran tactile. (par exemple, entrez -0600 pour six heures après le temps universel.) % Appuyez sur [+<->-] pour afficher "+" pour l'heure locale antérieure au temps universel ou - pour l'heure postérieure. % Appuyez sur [OK] dans le coin inférieur droit du pavé numérique de l'écran tactile pour valider la saisie. 6 Appuyez sur [OK] pour valider le réglage. % Pour annuler la modification, appuyez sur [Annuler]. Dans l'un ou l'autre cas, l'écran Réglage administrateur réapparaît. ineo 1052/1250 12-53 12.7 [06 Réglage administrateur] - [01 Configuration système] 12 12.7.4 [03 Programmateur hebdomadaire] - [01 Activ./Désa. programmateur] Le Programmateur hebdomadaire est une fonction de gestion accessible dans Réglage administrateur, et qui permet d'éteindre la machine quotidiennement ou à certaines heures. Dans cette section, spécifiez s'il faut ou non utiliser le Programmateur hebdomadaire. Par défaut, le Programmateur hebdomadaire n'est pas activé. Conditions requises pour utiliser le Programmateur hebdomadaire : - Le cordon d'alimentation est branché à la prise murale. Le Programmateur hebdomadaire ne fonctionnera pas si le cordon d'alimentation est débranché, les données relatives heures M/A programmées étant conservées en mémoire. - L'interrupteur secondaire est allumé. - La date et l'heure actuelles sont bien réglées. REMARQUE Quand Activ./Désa. programmateur est réglé sur [Programmateur activé], [01 Économie d'énergie] - [02 Réglage ERP] ne peut pas être sélectionné. dPour info Pour plus de détails sur le réglage ERP, voir page 12-51. 1 Suivez la procédure à la page 12-3 pour afficher l'écran du menu Réglage administrateur. 2 Appuyez successivement sur [01 Configuration système], [03 Programmateur hebdomadaire] et [01 Activ./Désa. programmateur]. 3 Sélectionnez [Programmateur activé] ou [Programmateur désactivé]. REMARQUE Le paramètre par défaut est [Programmateur désactivé]. Sélectionner [Programmateur activé] activera le Programmateur hebdomadaire. Si le Programmateur hebdomadaire est activé, l'interrupteur secondaire la machine doit rester sous tension. Sélectionner [Programmateur désactivé] désactivera le Programmateur hebdomadaire. Pour allumer ou éteindre la machine, il conviendra alors d'utiliser l'interrupteur secondaire. 4 Appuyez sur [OK] pour valider le réglage. % Pour annuler la modification, appuyez sur [Annuler]. Dans l'un ou l'autre cas, l'écran du menu Programmateur hebdomadaire réapparaît. 12 [06 Réglage administrateur] - [01 Configuration système] 12-54 ineo 1052/1250 12.7 12.7.5 [03 Programmateur hebdomadaire] - [02 Heures de marche/arrêt] Précisez les heures de marche/arrêt en spécifiant les heures et les minutes pour chaque jour de la semaine, ou définir en bloc les périodes d'utilisation pour la semaine entière. REMARQUE Même si l'heure est spécifiée ici, [03 Réglage date] (voir page 12-55) doit être configuré pour activer le programmateur. Si les Réglage date sont définis, la machine ne sera pas alimentée les jours spécifiés. Si l'Heure Marche et l'Heure Arrêt spécifiées sont identiques, la machine ne sera pas alimentée même s'il s'agit d'un jour ouvré. 1 Suivez la procédure à la page 12-3 pour afficher l'écran du menu Réglage administrateur. 2 Appuyez successivement sur [01 Configuration système], [03 Programmateur hebdomadaire] et [02 Heures de marche/arrêt]. 3 Spécifiez les heures de marche/arrêt en bloc pour toute la semaine. % Appuyez sur [Application par bloc] pour afficher l'écran Application par bloc. % Sélectionnez le ou les jour(s) de la semaine à spécifier collectivement. % Sur le pavé numérique de l'écran tactile ou sur le pavé numérique du panneau de contrôle entrez l'heure de marche/arrêt désirée. Appuyez sur [OK] pour déplacer la zone en surbrillance. % Appuyez sur [OK] pour revenir à l'écran Heures de marche/arrêt. 4 Entez l'heure de marche/arrêt pour chaque jour. % Appuyez sur [OK] pour sélectionner l'heure de marche pour le jour de la semaine désiré. % Sur le pavé numérique de l'écran tactile, ou le pavé numérique du panneau de contrôle entrez l'heure désirée. Appuyez sur [OK] pour déplacer la zone en surbrillance. % Répétez la procédure ci-dessus pour entrer toutes les heures de M/A voulues. 5 Appuyez sur [OK] pour valider le réglage. % Pour annuler la modification, appuyez sur [Annuler]. Dans l'un ou l'autre cas, l'écran du menu Programmateur hebdomadaire réapparaît. ineo 1052/1250 12-55 12.7 [06 Réglage administrateur] - [01 Configuration système] 12 12.7.6 [03 Programmateur hebdomadaire] - [02 Réglage date] Permet de configurer l'heure M/A pour un jour donné d'un mois spécifique, en fonction des heures M/A spécifiées. Définissez les conditions M/A pour des jours spécifiques, individuellement ou collectivement, des Lundis aux Dimanches, d'un mois donné. REMARQUE Le paramètre par défaut est collectif : Marche du lundi au samedi et Arrêt pour les dimanches. 1 Suivez la procédure à la page 12-3 pour afficher l'écran du menu Réglage administrateur. 2 Appuyez successivement sur [01 Configuration système], [03 Programmateur hebdomadaire] et [03 Réglage date]. 3 Pour étendre au mois entier le réglage des heures M/A effectué sur un jour de la semaine, appuyez sur Application par bloc au bas de l'écran. % Une pression sur [Activé] ou [Désact.] affiche le dialogue de confirmation. Appuyez sur [Activé] pour valider le changement effectué par Application par bloc. Ou bien, appuyez sur [Désact.] pour annuler la modification. % Les réglages effectués par Application par bloc sont prioritaires sur ceux effectués pour les jours individuels. 4 Pour définir individuellement la condition M/A pour un mois entier, utilisez le calendrier affiché au centre de l'écran. % Appuyez sur la touche du jour désiré pour modifier le réglage. % Appuyez sur [,] ou [+] pour faire défiler l'année/le mois souhaité(e). 5 Appuyez sur [OK] pour valider le réglage. % Pour annuler la modification, appuyez sur [Annuler]. Dans l'un ou l'autre cas, l'écran du menu Programmateur hebdomadaire réapparaît. 12 [06 Réglage administrateur] - [01 Configuration système] 12-56 ineo 1052/1250 12.7 12.7.7 [03 Programmateur hebdomadaire] - [04 Plage horaire éco d'énergie] Le Programmateur hebdomadaire, lorsqu'il est activé, allume et éteint la machine une fois par jour selon les heures de marche/arrêt spécifiées. Cette fonction définit une heure d'arrêt pour les cas où la machine est alimentée dans le cadre du Programmateur hebdomadière, et par conséquent, la machine s'allumera et s'éteindra plusieurs fois par jour. Il est possible de spécifier seulement une heure d'arrêt pour tous les jours de la semaine. REMARQUE Cette fonction sera inopérante si l'heure d'arrêt spécifiée n'est pas dans la plage des heures de marche de la machine. En réglage d'usine, cette fonction est désactivée. 1 Suivez la procédure à la page 12-3 pour afficher l'écran du menu Réglage administrateur. 2 Appuyez successivement sur [01 Configuration système], [03 Programmateur hebdomadaire] et [04 Plage horaire éco d'énergie]. 3 Sélectionnez [Fonction activée], et réglez l'Heure d'arrêt et l'Heure de Marche. % Sur le pavé numérique de l'écran tactile ou le pavé numérique du panneau de commande entrez l'heure d'arrêt désirée (format 24 h). Appuyez sur [OK], et entrez l'heure de marche de la même manière. % Sélectionner [Fonction désactivée] désactivera cette fonction. 4 Appuyez sur [OK] pour valider le réglage. % Pour annuler la modification, appuyez sur [Annuler]. Dans l'un ou l'autre cas, l'écran du menu Programmateur hebdomadaire réapparaît. ineo 1052/1250 12-57 12.7 [06 Réglage administrateur] - [01 Configuration système] 12 12.7.8 [03 Programmateur hebdomadaire] - [05 Code hors horaires bureau] Cette machine peut être allumée lorsqu'un code spécifique est introduit une fois que la touche Éco énergie a été actionnée sur le panneau de contrôle, même si la machine est éteinte dans le cadre du Programmateur hebdomadaire. Cette section décrit comment définir un code à 4 chiffres indispensable pour pouvoir utiliser la machine en dehors des horaires de bureau. Lorsque ce code est spécifié et qu'il est introduit une fois que la touche Éco énergie a été actionnée sur le panneau de contrôle, la machine permet de spécifier la durée d'utilisation autorisée. 1 Suivez la procédure à la page 12-3 pour afficher l'écran du menu Réglage administrateur. 2 Appuyez successivement sur [01 Configuration système], [03 Programmateur hebdomadaire] et sur [05 Code hors horaires bureau]. 3 Sur le pavé numérique de l'écran tactile, ou le pavé numérique du panneau de contrôle entrez le code à 4 chiffres désiré. REMARQUE Si le code est réglé sur 0000, la machine est utilisable simplement par une pression sur Eco énergie sur le panneau de contrôle pendant les heures d'arrêt. Dans ce cas, vous serez invité à entrer la durée d'utilisation (délai avant que la machine ne soit mise de nouveau à l'arrêt. La valeur par défaut est 0000. 4 Appuyez sur [OK] pour valider le réglage. % Pour annuler la modification, appuyez sur [Annuler]. Dans l'un ou l'autre cas, l'écran du menu Programmateur hebdomadaire réapparaît. 12.7.9 [04 Liste des compteurs] Utilisez cette fonction pour imprimer la liste sélectionnée parmi les rubriques suivantes. Liste Description Programmes utilisateur Contenu programmé de Mode mémoire Configuration utilisateur Réglages effectués par les utilisateurs Compteurs par code Informations à gérer via Authentification utilisateur/Configuration compte Liste des polices Polices utilisées dans la machine Journal des évènements Journaux 12 [06 Réglage administrateur] - [01 Configuration système] 12-58 ineo 1052/1250 12.7 Permet aussi d'enregistrer en même temps la liste et le journal mentionnés ci-dessus dans la mémoire flash USB connectée au port USB. 1 Suivez la procédure à la page 12-3 pour afficher l'écran du menu Réglage administrateur. 2 Appuyez sur [01 Configuration système] sur l'écran du menu Réglage administrateur, puis sur [04 Liste des compteurs]. 3 Sélectionnez la liste ou le journal des évènements à imprimer. 4 Appuyez sur [Impression]. L'écran Impression s'affiche. 5 Appuyez sur Départ sur le panneau de contrôle pour lancer l'impression. % Pour suspendre l'impression, appuyez sur Arrêt sur le panneau de contrôle. % Une fois l'impression terminée, appuyez sur [Fermer] pour retourner à l'écran Liste des compteurs. 6 Appuyez sur [Retour]. L'écran du menu Configuration système est restauré. 12.7.10 [05 Autorisation/Interdiction] Utilisez cette fonction pour interdire aux utilisateurs généraux d'utiliser les opérations suivantes. Paramètre de réglage Description Options (valeur par défaut en gras) Programmes utilisateur Verrouiller les conditions de copie archivées en Mode mémoire pour éviter qu'elles ne soient écrasées pendant une autre opération d'enregistrement. Annuler le Mode mémoire verrouillé. Supprimer le Mode mémoire archivé. - Modification adresse scanner Autoriser/Interdire la saisie manuelle d'une adresse d'expéditeur sur l'écran scanner. Autorisation, Interdiction Modificat. taux restitution Autoriser/Interdire la modification du taux de restitution prédéfini. Autorisation, Interdiction Modification fond de page Autoriser/Interdire l'écrasement ou la suppression du titre d'une image de superposition programmée. Autorisation, Interdiction Scanner vers e-mail Autoriser/Interdire la transmission de données numérisées par e-mail. Autorisation, Interdiction Scanner vers disque dur Autoriser/Interdire l'enregistrement de données numérisées sur le DD. Autorisation, Interdiction Scanner vers FTP Autoriser/Interdire la transmission de données numérisées vers un serveur FTP. Autorisation, Interdiction ineo 1052/1250 12-59 12.7 [06 Réglage administrateur] - [01 Configuration système] 12 Permet aussi d'enregistrer en même temps la liste et le journal mentionnés ci-dessus dans la mémoire flash USB connectée au port USB. 1 Suivez la procédure à la page 12-3 pour afficher l'écran du menu Réglage administrateur. 2 Appuyez sur [01 Configuration système] sur l'écran du menu Réglage administrateur, puis sur [05 Autorisation/Interdiction]. 3 Appuyez sur [Programmes utilisateur]. L'écran Autorisation/Interdiction opérations va s'afficher. % Si vous voulez configurer des paramètres autres que Programmes utilisateur, passez à l'étape 7. 4 Verrouiller/déverrouiller un programme. Vous pouvez enregistrer jusqu'à 30 programmes en mémoire. Utilisez [Suivant] ou [Précédent] pour aller jusqu'à l'entrée souhaitée. % Un nom spécifié apparaît à la droite du numéro d'entrée si cette entrée a déjà été faite. % Appuyez sur la touche à gauche du numéro souhaité pour verrouiller l'entrée, une marque de verrouillage apparaît alors sur cette touche. % Une pression sur la touche verrouillée va annuler la marque de suppression et le verrouillage. % Une pression sur la touche non libellée ne va ni verrouiller l'entrée ni afficher une marque de verrouillage. Scanner vers SMB Autoriser/Interdire l'enregistrement de données numérisées dans un dossier partagé. Autorisation, Interdiction Paramètre de réglage Description Options (valeur par défaut en gras) 12 [06 Réglage administrateur] - [01 Configuration système] 12-60 ineo 1052/1250 12.7 5 Supprimer un Mode mémoire. % Sélectionnez le numéro de l'entrée que vous voulez supprimer. L'entrée verrouillée du Mode mémoire peut être supprimée. % Une pression sur la touche [Supprimer] en bas de l'écran ouvre une fenêtre de confirmation. Appuyez sur [Oui] dans la boîte de dialogue. % Le Mode mémoire sélectionné sera supprimé et son titre ne sera plus visible. La touche mise en évidence s'affiche de nouveau normalement. REMARQUE Le Mode mémoire supprimé à l'étape 5 ne peut plus être rappelé en appuyant sur [Annuler] à l'étape 6. Veuillez noter que l'entrée supprimée une fois ne peut pas être rappelée. 6 Appuyez sur [OK] pour terminer les réglages Programmes utilisateur. % Pour annuler la modification, appuyez sur [Annuler]. L'écran Autorisation/Interdiction opérations s'affiche à nouveau. 7 Sélectionnez [Autorisation] ou [Interdiction] pour les éléments de l'écran Autorisation/Interdiction opérations. 8 Appuyez sur [OK] pour valider le réglage. % Pour annuler la modification, appuyez sur [Annuler]. Dans l'un ou l'autre cas, le menu Configuration système réapparaît. 12.7.11 [06 Réglages expert] - [01 Régl. densité impression] Sélectionnez si la priorité sera donnée aux dégradés ou à la résolution pour la réalisation des images imprimées. Si les dégradés sont privilégiés, les données aux dégradés importants, comme les photographies, seront mieux reproduites. Si la résolution est privilégiée, les données à fort contraste, comme le texte, seront mieux reproduites. 1 Suivez la procédure à la page 12-3 pour afficher l'écran du menu Réglage administrateur. 2 Appuyez successivement sur [01 Configuration système] sur l'écran du menu Réglage administrateur, puis sur [06 Réglages expert] et [01 Régl. densité impression]. 3 Sélectionnez [Priorité aux dégradés] ou [Priorité à la resolution]. 4 Appuyez sur [OK] pour valider le réglage. % Pour annuler la modification, appuyez sur [Annuler]. Dans l'un ou l'autre cas, l'écran du menu Réglages expert réapparaît. ineo 1052/1250 12-61 12.7 [06 Réglage administrateur] - [01 Configuration système] 12 12.7.12 [06 Réglages expert] - [02 Angle agraf. en coin (Dos)] Pour l'angle d'agrafage dans le coin gauche, vous pouvez choisir entre diagonal et parallèle. 1 Suivez la procédure à la page 12-3 pour afficher l'écran du menu Réglage administrateur. 2 Appuyez successivement sur [01 Configuration système] sur l'écran du menu Réglage administrateur, puis sur [06 Réglages expert] et [02 Angle agraf. en coin (Dos)]. 3 Sélectionnez [Diagonal] ou [Parallèle]. 4 Appuyez sur [OK] pour valider le réglage. % Pour annuler la modification, appuyez sur [Annuler]. Dans l'un ou l'autre cas, l'écran du menu Réglages expert réapparaît. 12.7.13 [06 Réglages expert] - [03 Régl. Bourr. Dét. Err. Centr.] Spécifiez s'il faut ou non arrêter la machine suite à un bourrage possible en cas de détection d'une erreur d'alignement de 5 mm ou plus. 1 Suivez la procédure à la page 12-3 pour afficher l'écran du menu Réglage administrateur. 2 Appuyez successivement sur [01 Configuration système] sur l'écran du menu Réglage administrateur, puis sur [06 Réglages expert] et [03 Régl. Bourr. Dét. Err. Centr]. 3 Appuyez sur [Détecter] ou [Ne pas détecter]. 4 Appuyez sur [OK] pour valider le réglage. % Pour annuler la modification, appuyez sur [Annuler]. Dans l'un ou l'autre cas, l'écran du menu Réglages expert réapparaît. 12 [06 Réglage administrateur] - [01 Configuration système] 12-62 ineo 1052/1250 12.7 12.7.14 [06 Réglages expert] - [04 Réglage extinction auto] Sélectionnez s'il faut automatiquement éteindre l'interrupteur principal après que l'interrupteur secondaire a été éteint et que la machine a entièrement refroidi. REMARQUE Même si Activ./Désa. programmateur est réglé sur [Programmateur activé], la connexion CS Remote Care est configurée, ou si le Réglage ERP est sélectionné, cette fonction passe avant les autres paramètres. 1 Suivez la procédure à la page 12-3 pour afficher l'écran du menu Réglage administrateur. 2 Appuyez successivement sur [01 Configuration système] sur l'écran du menu Réglage administrateur, puis sur [06 Réglages expert] et [04 Réglage extinction auto]. 3 Sélectionnez [Activé] ou [Désactivé]. % Le choix de [Activé] active cette fonction. 4 Appuyez sur [OK] pour valider le réglage. % Pour annuler la modification, appuyez sur [Annuler]. Dans l'un ou l'autre cas, l'écran du menu Réglages expert réapparaît. 12.7.15 [06 Réglages expert] - [05 Effacer zone hors original] Sélectionnez s'il faut effacer la zone à l'extérieur de l'original sans conditions ou sous conditions lors de la numérisation de l'original. Sélectionnez l'une des trois options suivantes : Options de réglage Description Eff. zones en dhr. d'orig Toujours effacer la zone hors original. Oui - APS/AMS seulement N'effacer la zone hors original que si PapierAuto (APS) ou Restitution auto (AMS) est activé. Sauf vitre expos. (1:1) Effacer la zone hors original sauf en cas de réalisation d'une copie de format identique à l'original numérisé depuis la vitre d'exposition. ineo 1052/1250 12-63 12.7 [06 Réglage administrateur] - [01 Configuration système] 12 1 Suivez la procédure à la page 12-3 pour afficher l'écran du menu Réglage administrateur. 2 Appuyez successivement sur [01 Configuration système] sur l'écran du menu Réglage administrateur, puis sur [06 Réglages expert] et [05 Effacer zone hors original]. 3 Sélectionnez la touche de réglage souhaitée. 4 Appuyez sur [OK] pour valider le réglage. % Pour annuler la modification, appuyez sur [Annuler]. Dans l'un ou l'autre cas, l'écran du menu Réglages expert réapparaît. 12.7.16 [06 Réglages expert] - [06 Effacement bords chargeur] Sélectionnez s'il faut ou non activer la fonction Effacement bords à chaque utilisation du mode Chargeur Auto. Réglez aussi l'ampleur de zone hors image à effacer quand cette fonction est activée. Options : [Aucune], [1 mm], [2 mm], [3 mm], [4 mm], [5 mm] 1 Suivez la procédure à la page 12-3 pour afficher l'écran du menu Réglage administrateur. 2 Appuyez successivement sur [01 Configuration système] sur l'écran du menu Réglage administrateur, puis sur [06 Réglages expert] et [06 Effacement bords chargeur]. 3 Sélectionnez la touche de réglage souhaitée. % Sélectionnez [Aucune] pour désactiver la fonction Effacement bords chargeur. Sélectionnez l'ampleur de l'effacement à l'aide de l'une des touches, [1 mm] à [5 mm] pour utiliser la fonction Effacement bords chargeur. 4 Appuyez sur [OK] pour valider le réglage. % Pour annuler la modification, appuyez sur [Annuler]. Dans l'un ou l'autre cas, l'écran du menu Réglages expert réapparaît. 12 [06 Réglage administrateur] - [01 Configuration système] 12-64 ineo 1052/1250 12.7 12.7.17 [06 Réglages expert] - [07 Régl. effac. zone hors image] Utilisez cette fonction pour sélectionner le mode d'effacement et la densité de l'original qui sont activés en cas de sélection de Cadrage original est sélectionné sur l'écran Applications. Les deux fonctions Mode d'effacement et Densité original peuvent être réglées pour s'activer automatiquement. Elles sont toutes deux réglées par défaut sur Auto. REMARQUE En mode Auto, l'effacement risque de ne pas bien fonctionnement en fonction de l'original. Si c'est le cas, sélectionnez manuellement le mode d'effacement et la densité de l'original. 1 Suivez la procédure à la page 12-3 pour afficher l'écran du menu Réglage administrateur. 2 Appuyez successivement sur [01 Configuration système] sur l'écran du menu Réglage administrateur, puis sur [06 Réglages expert] et [07 Régl. effac. zone hors image]. 3 Pour configurer les options manuellement, appuyez sur [Oblique] ou [Rectangulaire], puis appuyez sur la touche de densité original souhaitée. Appuyez sur [Auto] pour que les fonctions soient automatiques. 4 Appuyez sur [OK] pour valider le réglage. % Pour annuler la modification, appuyez sur [Annuler]. Dans l'un ou l'autre cas, l'écran du menu Réglages expert réapparaît. 12.7.18 [06 Réglages expert] - [08 Réglage densité scanner] Spécifiez les éléments suivants en matière de qualité d'image pour la numérisation d'originaux : Éléments Description Options (valeur par défaut en gras) Suppression texture Si des traits en diagonale apparaissent sur l'image d'impression en demi-teinte, sélectionnez [Oui]. Activé, Désactivé Sélect. dégradé diff. erreur Sélectionnez le dégradé de diffusion d'erreur. Élevée, Faible 1200 dpi Scan Photo Screen Spécifiez l'écran Scan Photo de 1200 dpi. Priorité dégradés, Priorité qualité Réglage gamma AES sélectionné Sélectionnez la valeur de gamme AES souhaitée. -5 à 5 (0) ineo 1052/1250 12-65 12.7 [06 Réglage administrateur] - [01 Configuration système] 12 1 Suivez la procédure à la page 12-3 pour afficher l'écran du menu Réglage administrateur. 2 Appuyez successivement sur [01 Configuration système] sur l'écran du menu Réglage administrateur, puis sur [06 Réglages expert] et [08 Réglage densité scanner]. 3 Sélectionnez la touche désirée pour chaque élément. Pour Réglage gamma AES sélectionné, sélectionnez l'une des onze touches ([-5] à [5]). 4 Appuyez sur [OK] pour valider le réglage. % Pour annuler la modification, appuyez sur [Annuler]. Dans l'un ou l'autre cas, l'écran du menu Réglages expert réapparaît. 12.7.19 [07 Paramétrage formats] Formats originaux reconnus : Spécifiez le système de format (Métrique A, Métrique B ou Pouce) de l'original à détecter sur le chargeur Auto ou la vitre d'exposition. Le plus petit format vitre : Spécifiez le format le plus petit à détecter sur la vitre d'exposition. Sélectionnez l'une des options suivantes comme format minimum : [A5 v], Carte postale, [5,5 e 8,5 v], [B5 v], [A4 v], [8,5 e 11 v] Système de format Description Métrique A/B Détecter formats Métrique A/B. Seulem. série A Détecter formats Métrique A seulement. Pouce Détecteur Pouce seulement. Tous formats Détectez tous les systèmes de format, Métrique A, Métrique B et Pouce. Les formats détectables pour chacun seront inférieurs aux séries individuelles spécifiées. 12 [06 Réglage administrateur] - [01 Configuration système] 12-66 ineo 1052/1250 12.7 1 Suivez la procédure à la page 12-3 pour afficher l'écran du menu Réglage administrateur. 2 Appuyez sur [01 Configuration système] sur l'écran du menu Réglage administrateur, puis sur [07 Paramétrage formats]. 3 Sélectionnez un des groupes de touches affichés à la droite de "Formats originaux reconnus" et "Plus petit format vitre". 4 Appuyez sur [OK] pour valider le réglage. % Pour annuler la modification, appuyez sur [Annuler]. Dans l'un ou l'autre cas, le menu Configuration système réapparaît. 12.7.20 [08 Paramétrage des Annotations] Configurez et enregistrez au préalable les réglages nécessaires pour utiliser la fonction Annotation de Tampon/Superposition sur l'écran Applications. Vous pouvez enregistrer jusqu'à 40 jeux des paramètres d'annotation. Vous pouvez aussi modifier ou supprimer des annotations enregistrées. Configurez et enregistrez les éléments suivants pour utiliser les annotations : Paramètre de réglage Description [Titre] Entrez le titre de l'annotation. Le titre peut comporter jusqu'à 12 caractères alphanumériques ou symboles. [Élément 1], [Élément 2], [Élément 3] Présentation Pour chacun des points [Élément 1], [Élément 2] et [Élément 3], sélectionnez [Texte], [Date/heure] ou [No. Annotation] et configurez le contenu à imprimer. Chaque élément ne peut comporter qu'un seul jeu d'annotation. Appuyez sur [Non Imprimé] si vous ne voulez pas que l'annotation soit imprimée. Appuyez sur [Paramétrage texte] pou spécifier la taille et la police du texte imprimé. [Texte] En cas de sélection de Type comme élément de l'annotation, spécifiez la chaîne de texte à imprimer. Elle peut comporter jusqu'à 40 caractères alphanumériques ou symboles. [Date/heure] En cas de sélection de Date/heure comme élément de l'annotation, spécifiez le style à imprimer. Date : vous avez le choix entre cinq styles. (['11/11/23], [11/23/'11], [23/11/'11], [Nov 23, 2011], [23 nov, 2011]) Heure : sélectionnez un des deux styles ou Ne pas imprimer. ([Ne pas imprimer], [1:23 PM], [13:23]) ineo 1052/1250 12-67 12.7 [06 Réglage administrateur] - [01 Configuration système] 12 1 Suivez la procédure à la page 12-3 pour afficher l'écran du menu Réglage administrateur. 2 Appuyez sur [01 Configuration système] sur l'écran du menu Réglage administrateur, puis appuyez sur [08 Paramétrage des Annotations]. L'écran Paramétrage des Annotations va s'afficher. 3 Appuyez sur une touche vierge de l'écran Paramétrage des Annotations, puis appuyez sur [Nouveau dossier] pour enregistrer un nouveau réglage d'annotation. [No. Annotation] En cas de sélection de No ; Annotation comme élément de l'annotation, spécifiez s'il faut imprimer ou non l'entrée de [Texte] et le [Numéro Annotation]. Les deux peuvent être imprimés. [Texte] peut comporter jusqu'à 20 caractères alphanumériques ou symboles. [Numéro Annotation] peut comporter jusqu'à 9 caractères alphanumériques ou symboles. Sélectionnez soit [Tous chiffres] ou [ChiffresUtiles] pour la forme d'impression de Numéro Annotation. [Non Imprimé] Sélectionnez cette touche si vous ne voulez pas imprimer l'annotation pour l'élément sélectionné. [Paramétrage texte] Spécifiez la taille du texte et la police de l'élément sélectionné, [Texte], [Date/heure] ou [No. Annotation] à imprimer en tant qu'annotation. Combinaison des 3 éléments Présentation Lorsque plus d'un élément est configuré pour les annotations, sélectionnez s'il faut imprimer tous les éléments sur une ligne ou imprimer chaque élément sur une ligne en insérant des sauts de ligne. [Sur 3 lignes] L'espace pour trois ligne sera assuré et chaque élément sera imprimé sur une ligne en insérant des sauts de ligne. [Sur 1 ligne] Tous les éléments configurés seront imprimés sur une seule ligne. Paramètre de réglage Description 12 [06 Réglage administrateur] - [01 Configuration système] 12-68 ineo 1052/1250 12.7 L'écran Enregistrement nouvelle annotation s'affiche. % Si vous devez modifier des réglages d'annotation, passez à l'étape 10. % Si vous devez modifier des réglages d'annotation, passez à l'étape 13. 4 Appuyez sur [Titre] pour afficher l'écran Titre et entrer le titre souhaité. % L'opération d'enregistrement ne sera pas achevée si le titre reste vierge. Assurez-vous de bien entrer le titre. % Appuyez sur [OK], une fois terminé. 5 Appuyez sur [Élément 1]. Les réglages de l'élément 1 seront affichés. 6 Sélectionnez [Texte], [Date/heure] ou [No. Annotation] et configurez le contenu à imprimer. ineo 1052/1250 12-69 12.7 [06 Réglage administrateur] - [01 Configuration système] 12 % Appuyez sur [Texte] pour afficher l'écran Texte. Entrez le texte à imprimer en tant qu'annotation et appuyez sur [OK]. % Appuyez sur [Date/heure] pour afficher l'écran Réglage date/heure. Sélectionnez l'une des options de [Date] et l'une des options de [Heure], puis appuyez sur [OK]. % Si [No. Annotation] est sélectionné, l'écran Programmation numéro Annotation va s'afficher. % Pour ajouter du texte et des numéros au numéro d'annotation, appuyez sur [Valider] à la droite de [Texte], puis appuyez sur [OK]. Entrez le texte et/ou les numéros sur l'écran Texte et appuyez sur [OK]. 12 [06 Réglage administrateur] - [01 Configuration système] 12-70 ineo 1052/1250 12.7 % Pour imprimer un numéro d'annotation, appuyez sur [Valider] à la droite de [Numéro Annotation], puis appuyez sur [OK]. Entrez un numéro de [0] à [9], puis appuyez sur [OK]. % Appuyez sur [Tous chiffres] pour imprimer les neuf chiffres du numéro d'annotation saisi ou sur [ChiffresUtiles] pour n'imprimer que les chiffres utiles sous "Impression numéro Annotation". % Appuyez sur [Non Imprimé] si vous e voulez pas imprimer Élément 1. Toutes les données saisies dans [Texte], [Date/heure] ou [No. Annotation] seront supprimées en cas de pression sur [Non Imprimé]. % Appuyez sur [Paramétrage texte] pour afficher l'écran Sélection police de caractères. Sélectionnez une des options de [Taille caractère] et une des options de [Police], puis appuyez sur [OK]. 7 Appuyez sur [OK] pour valider le réglage. % Pour annuler la modification, appuyez sur [Annuler]. L'écran Paramétrage des Annotations est restauré. ineo 1052/1250 12-71 12.7 [06 Réglage administrateur] - [01 Configuration système] 12 8 Appuyez sur [Élément 2] et sur [Élément 3] pour configurer les réglages si nécessaire. % Répétez les étapes 5 à 7 ci-dessus. 9 Appuyez sur [OK] pour valider le réglage. % Pour annuler la modification, appuyez sur [Annuler]. L'écran Paramétrage des Annotations est restauré. 10 Appuyez sur une touche enregistrée et sur [Modifier] pour modifier un réglage d'annotation enregistré. L'écran Modification Annotation s'affiche. 11 Répétez les étapes 5 à 8 ci-dessus pour modifier un réglage existant. 12 Appuyez sur [OK] pour valider le réglage. % Pour annuler la modification, appuyez sur [Annuler]. L'écran Paramétrage des Annotations est restauré. 13 Appuyez sur une touche enregistrée et sur [Supprimer] pour supprimer un réglage d'annotation enregistré. Un dialogue de confirmation apparaît. 14 Appuyez sur [Oui]. % Appuyez sur [Non] pour annuler la suppression. L'écran Paramétrage des Annotations est restauré. 15 Appuyez sur [Retour]. L'écran du menu Configuration système est restauré. 12 [06 Réglage administrateur] - [01 Configuration système] 12-72 ineo 1052/1250 12.7 12.7.21 [09 Configuration thermoreliure] - [01 Grammage papier utilisable] Spécifiez le grammage papier disponible pour chaque corps et couverture avec le Thermorelieur. 1 Suivez la procédure à la page 12-3 pour afficher l'écran du menu Réglage administrateur. 2 Appuyez sur [01 Configuration système] sur l'écran du menu Réglage administrateur, puis sur [09 Configuration thermoreliure] et [01 Grammage papier utilisable]. 3 Sélectionnez le grammage désiré pour le corps de document et pour la couverture. REMARQUE Si l'un des grammages papier sélectionné ici n'est pas spécifié pour le magasin à utiliser en mode thermoreliure, l'opération de thermoreliure sera indisponible et le message "inapproprié" s'affiche. 4 Appuyez sur [OK] pour valider le réglage. % Pour annuler la modification, appuyez sur [Annuler]. Dans l'un ou l'autre cas, l'écran du menu Configuration thermoreliure réapparaît. 12.7.22 [09 Configuration thermoreliure] - [02 Nombre de feuilles utilisées] Spécifiez le nombre de feuilles minimum et maximum à relier comme corps de document, individuellement pour chaque grammage. 1 Suivez la procédure à la page 12-3 pour afficher l'écran du menu Réglage administrateur. 2 Appuyez sur [01 Configuration système] sur l'écran du menu Réglage administrateur, puis sur [09 Configuration thermoreliure] et [02 Nombre de feuilles utilisées]. 3 Spécifiez le nombre de feuilles minimum et maximum pour chaque grammage, selon les besoins. ineo 1052/1250 12-73 12.7 [06 Réglage administrateur] - [01 Configuration système] 12 4 Appuyez sur [OK] pour valider le réglage. % Pour annuler la modification, appuyez sur [Annuler]. Dans l'un ou l'autre cas, l'écran du menu Configuration thermoreliure réapparaît. 12.7.23 [09 Configuration thermoreliure] - [03 Arrêt Couverture incorrecte] Spécifiez s'il faut ou non arrêter le travail en cours quand la largeur de la couverture n'est pas compatible avec le format et l'épaisseur du corps de document. 1 Suivez la procédure à la page 12-3 pour afficher l'écran du menu Réglage administrateur. 2 Appuyez sur [01 Configuration système] sur l'écran du menu Réglage administrateur, puis sur [09 Configuration thermoreliure] et [03 Arrêt couverture incorrecte]. 3 Sélectionnez ou [Arrêt temporaire] ou [Pas d'arrêt temporaire]. 4 Appuyez sur [OK] pour valider le réglage. % Pour annuler la modification, appuyez sur [Annuler]. Dans l'un ou l'autre cas, l'écran du menu Configuration thermoreliure réapparaît. 12.7.24 [10 Config. type de clavier] Sélectionnez le type de clavier à connecter au port de service. Options : [EN65], [EN104], [JP101], [JP106], [JP109] 1 Suivez la procédure à la page 12-3 pour afficher l'écran du menu Réglage administrateur. 2 Appuyez sur [01 Configuration système] sur l'écran du menu Réglage administrateur, puis sur [10 Config. type de clavier]. 12 [06 Réglage administrateur] - [01 Configuration système] 12-74 ineo 1052/1250 12.7 3 Appuyez sur la touche souhaitée pour sélectionner un type de clavier. 4 Appuyez sur [OK] pour valider le réglage. % Pour annuler la modification, appuyez sur [Annuler]. Dans l'un ou l'autre cas, le menu Configuration système réapparaît. 12.7.25 [11 Personnalisation écran] - [01 Choix graisse police écran] Sélectionnez l'épaisseur de la police d'écran. 1 Suivez la procédure à la page 12-3 pour afficher l'écran du menu Réglage administrateur. 2 Appuyez sur [01 Configuration système] sur l'écran du menu Réglage administrateur, puis sur [11 Personnalisation écran] et [01 Choix graisse police écran]. 3 Sélectionnez ou [Standard] ou [Gras]. 4 Appuyez sur [OK] pour valider le réglage. % Pour annuler la modification, appuyez sur [Annuler]. Dans l'un ou l'autre cas, l'écran Personnalisation écran réapparaît. 12.7.26 [11 Personnalisation écran] - [02 Personnalisation écran copie] Changez la disposition des éléments de réglage dans la moitié supérieure de l'écran Copie. 1 Suivez la procédure à la page 12-3 pour afficher l'écran du menu Réglage administrateur. 2 Appuyez sur [01 Configuration système] sur l'écran du menu Réglage administrateur, puis sur [11 Personnalisation écran] et [02 Personnalisation écran copie]. 3 Sélectionnez un élément, puis déplacez-le vers la position souhaitée avec [*] ou [)]. ineo 1052/1250 12-75 12.7 [06 Réglage administrateur] - [01 Configuration système] 12 4 Appuyez sur [OK] pour valider le réglage. % Pour annuler la modification, appuyez sur [Annuler]. Dans l'un ou l'autre cas, l'écran Personnalisation écran réapparaît. 12.7.27 [11 Personnalisation écran] - [03 Personnalisation écran numér] Modifiez la disposition des éléments de réglage dans la moitié supérieure de l'écran scanner. 1 Suivez la procédure à la page 12-3 pour afficher l'écran du menu Réglage administrateur. 2 Appuyez sur [01 Configuration système] sur l'écran du menu Réglage administrateur, puis sur [11 Personnalisation écran] et [03 Personnalisation écran numér]. 3 Sélectionnez un élément, puis déplacez-le vers la position souhaitée avec [*] ou [)]. 4 Appuyez sur [OK] pour valider le réglage. % Pour annuler la modification, appuyez sur [Annuler]. Dans l'un ou l'autre cas, l'écran Personnalisation écran réapparaît. 12.7.28 [11 Personnalisation écran] - [04 Personn.page écr. ENREGISTRER] Changez selon vos besoins l'organisation des éléments de réglages sur l'écran Enregistrer. 1 Suivez la procédure à la page 12-3 pour afficher l'écran du menu Réglage administrateur. 2 Appuyez sur [01 Configuration système] sur l'écran du menu Réglage administrateur, puis sur [11 Personnalisation écran] et [04 Person.page écr. ENREGISTRER]. 3 Sélectionnez un élément, puis déplacez-le vers la position souhaitée avec [*] ou [)]. 12 [06 Réglage administrateur] - [01 Configuration système] 12-76 ineo 1052/1250 12.7 4 Appuyez sur [OK] pour valider le réglage. % Pour annuler la modification, appuyez sur [Annuler]. Dans l'un ou l'autre cas, l'écran Personnalisation écran réapparaît. ineo 1052/1250 12-77 12.8 [06 Réglage administrateur] - [02 Enregist. administrateur] 12 12.8 [06 Réglage administrateur] - [02 Enregist. administrateur] 12.8.1 [01 Enregist. administrateur] Enregistrez le nom et le numéro de poste de l'administrateur à afficher toujours dans le coin supérieur droit de l'écran Menu Utilitaire. Enregistrez également l'adresse e-mail de l'administrateur. 1 Suivez la procédure à la page 12-3 pour afficher l'écran du menu Réglage administrateur. 2 Appuyez sur [02 Enregist. administrateur] sur l'écran du menu Réglage administrateur, puis sur [01 Enregist. administrateur]. L'écran Enregist. administrateur s'affiche. 3 Appuyez sur [Saisie nom administrateur] et entrez le nom de l'administrateur. % Vous pouvez entrer jusqu'à 20 caractères alphanumériques et symboles, tirets compris. % Appuyez sur [OK] pour achever la saisie et revenir à l'écran Enregist. administrateur. 4 Appuyez sur [Saisie numéro de poste], puis entrez le numéro de poste sur le pavé numérique à l'écran. % Vous pouvez entrer jusqu'à 8 caractères alphanumériques et symboles, tirets compris. 5 Appuyez sur [Saisie adresse E-mail], et entrez l'adresse e-mail de l'administrateur. % Vous pouvez entrer jusqu'à 250 caractères alphanumériques ou symboles. % Appuyez sur [OK] pour achever la saisie et revenir à l'écran Enregist. administrateur. 6 Appuyez sur [OK] pour valider le réglage. % Pour annuler la modification, appuyez sur [Annuler]. Dans l'un ou l'autre cas, l'écran Réglage administrateur réapparaît. 12 [06 Réglage administrateur] - [03 Ident. utilisateur/Compte] 12-78 ineo 1052/1250 12.9 12.9 [06 Réglage administrateur] - [03 Ident. utilisateur/Compte] Cette section fournit divers réglages relatifs aux fonctions Authentification utilisateur et Configuration compte permettant de contrôler l'utilisation de cette machine. L'Authentification utilisateur est destinée à gérer des personnes individuelles alors que la gestion de compte est destinée aux groupes et aux utilisateurs multiples. La combinaison des fonctions Authentification utilisateur et Configuration compte vous permet de gérer les compteurs de chaque compte avec des compteurs individuels. Il existe deux méthodes d'authentification : serveur externe et MFP. La configuration d'une méthode d'authentification va activer l'écran d'authentification au moment opportun. Pour s'authentifier sur l'écran d'authentification, l'utilisateur doit entrer un nom d'utilisateur, un code, un nom de serveur et la carte IC. Sélectionnez [Activé(Serv.ext)] ou [Activé (Copieur)] pour utiliser une fonction d'authentification. Appuyez sur [Désactivé] pour désactiver la fonction d'authentification. REMARQUE Quand vous basculez le réglage Authentification Utilisateur de Activé à Désactivé, toutes les données administratives liées à l'authentification seront supprimées pour des besoins de sécurité. Agissez avec prudence en cas de changement du réglage. Les données des utilisateurs enregistrés et de gestion de compte peuvent être exportées avec Web Connection. Les données exportées peuvent aussi être importées. Authentification utilisateur et Configuration compte Chacune des fonctions Authentification Utilisateur et Configuration compte présente les paramètres suivants. Système d'authentification - Limitez les fonctions disponibles (Copier, Numériser, Imprimer, Rappeler). - Effectuer le comptage des tâches de numérisation ou d'impression pour chaque utilisateur. Configuration compte - Effectuer le comptage des tâches de numérisation ou d'impression pour chaque compte. REMARQUE Cette machine autorise un total de 1000 utilisateurs et comptes enregistrables. Par défaut, 500 utilisateurs et 500 comptes peuvent être enregistrés. REMARQUE Les fonctions Authentification utilisateur et Configuration compte peuvent être configurées pour fonctionner de manière asynchrone. ineo 1052/1250 12-79 12.9 [06 Réglage administrateur] - [03 Ident. utilisateur/Compte] 12 Synchronisation Authentification utilisateur et Configuration compte Cette configuration système convient pour suivre les utilisateurs individuels gérés par chaque département lorsque l'utilisation de la machine est partagée entre plusieurs départements. Quand cette configuration est active, la machine permet de consigner les statistiques concernant à la fois chaque employé (ou chaque utilisateur) et chaque département (chaque compte). Pour gérer l'utilisation de la machine comme indiqué ci-dessus, les réglages suivants de la Méthode d'authentification sont nécessaires. Utilisez Authentification Utilisateur et Configuration compte séparément Cette configuration système convient pour suivre plusieurs utilisations de la machine réparties entre chaque groupe de projet lorsque la machine est partagée entre plusieurs employés. Quand cette configuration est active, la machine permet de consigner les statistiques concernant chaque groupe de projet (chaque compte). Cela suggère aussi que les statistiques peuvent être entretenues pour chaque groupe de projet (chaque compte) même lorsque deux employés différents (Utilisateur 1 et Utilisateur 2) sont impliqués dans le même projet. Pour gérer l'utilisation de la machine comme indiqué ci-dessus, les réglages suivants de la Méthode d'authentification sont nécessaires. Élément de menu de Méthode d'authentification Paramétrage requis Authentification utilisateur Sélectionnez [Activé (Copieur)]. Configuration compte Sélectionnez [Activé] et définissez un nom de compte et un code Connexion auth. compte/util. Sélectionnez [Synchroniser]. Enregistrement utilisateur/Nom compte Spécifiez un nom de compte pour l'utilisateur sur l'écran Enregistrement utilisateur. Utilisateur 1 Utilisateur 2 Compte Groupe A Groupe B Élément de menu de Méthode d'authentification Paramétrage requis Authentification utilisateur Sélectionnez [Activé (Copieur)]. Configuration compte Sélectionnez [Activé] et définissez un nom de compte et un code Connexion auth. compte/util. Sélectionnez [Ne pas synchron.]. Utilisateur 1 Utilisateur 2 Compte Groupe A Groupe C Groupe B 12 [06 Réglage administrateur] - [03 Ident. utilisateur/Compte] 12-80 ineo 1052/1250 12.9 12.9.1 [01 Méthode d'authentification] Configurez les paramètres d'authentification utilisateur/compte en combinant les éléments suivants. REMARQUE Sélectionnez [Activé(Serv.ext)] ou [Activé (Copieur)] de "Authentificat. utilisateur" pour appliquer une fonction d'authentification. Appuyez sur [Désactivé] pour désactiver la fonction d'authentification. Quand vous basculez le réglage Authentification Utilisateur de Activé à Désactivé, toutes les données administratives liées à l'authentification seront supprimées pour des besoins de sécurité. Agissez avec prudence en cas de changement du réglage. Les donnes NE SERONT PAS supprimées si vous basculez entre [Activé(Serv.ext)] et [Activé (Copieur)]. Paramètre de réglage Description Authentificat. utilisateur [Activé (Serv.ext)] Permet aux utilisateurs d'être authentifiés via un serveur externe. [Activé (Copieur)] Permet aux utilisateurs d'être authentifiés directement sur la machine. [Désactivé] Permet aux utilisateurs d'utiliser la machine sans recourir à l'authentification utilisateur. Utilisateur public [Autoriser] Permet aux utilisateurs d'utiliser la machine sans opération d'authentification, comme la saisie de mots de passe ou l'utilisation de cartes IC. [Interdire] Interdit l'utilisation de la machine aux utilisateurs publics. Configuration compte [Activé] Active l'authentification de compte. Après la sélection de [Activé (Copieur)] ou [Activé(Serv.ext)] dans "Authentification utilisateur", les touches [Synchroniser] et [Ne pas synchron.] pour "Connexion auth. compte/util." sont disponibles. La sélection de [Ne pas synchron.] vous permet aussi de sélectionner [Compte + Code] ou [Code] pour Méthode saisie suivi compte. Lorsque [Activé (Copieur)] est sélectionné pour "Authentification utilisateur" et [Activé] pour Carte IC, [Synchroniser] est sélectionné automatiquement pour "Connexion auth. compte/util". [Désactivé] Désactive l'authentification de compte. Méthode saisie suivi compte [Compte + Code] Cette touche est disponible quand [Désactivé] est sélectionné pour "Authentification utilisateur" et [Activé] pour "Gestion de compte". Un nom de compte et un code de compte sont requis pour authentifier le compte. [Code] Cette touche est disponible quand [Désactivé] est sélectionné pour "Authentification utilisateur" et [Activé] pour "Gestion de compte". Seul un code de compte est requis pour authentifier un compte. Connexion auth. compte/ util. [Synchroniser] Cette touche est disponible quand [Activé (Copieur)] ou [Activé (Serveur externe)] est sélectionné pour "Authentification utilisateur" et [Activé] pour "Gestion de compte". Les utilisateurs enregistrés dans un compte peuvent s'authentifier en entrant seulement un nom d'utilisateur et un code utilisateur. [Ne pas synchron.] Cette touche est disponible quand [Activé (Copieur)] ou [Activé (Serveur externe)] est sélectionné pour "Authentification utilisateur" et [Activé] pour "Gestion de compte". [Compte + Code] ou [Code] peut être sélectionné pour "Méthode saisie suivi compte". Quand l'authentification utilisateur est requise, vous devez entrer le nom d'utilisateur, le code utilisateur, le code compte et nom de compte suivant la sélection opérée sous "Méthode saisie suivi compte". [Nbre d'utilisat. autorisés] Entrez le nombre d'Authentifications utilisateur pour distribuer un total de 1000 entrées d'authentification. Le nombre d'entrées pour Gestion de Compte sera le résultat obtenu après avoir soustrait le nombre défini de 1000. Plage disponible : 1 à 999. Action si limite sup dépassée [Arrêt immédiat] La machine suspend son travail immédiatement dès que la limite supérieure* est atteinte. Dans ce cas, les données sorties et numérisées ne seront pas conservées. ineo 1052/1250 12-81 12.9 [06 Réglage administrateur] - [03 Ident. utilisateur/Compte] 12 *La limite supérieure peut être spécifiée de manière individuelle dans Enregistrement utilisateur ou dans Enregistrem. Gestion compte. Si vous le souhaitez, la limite supérieure peut aussi être spécifiée de manière collective pour tous les utilisateurs. Pour plus de détails, voir page 12-83 : et page 12-92. 1 Suivez la procédure à la page 12-3 pour afficher l'écran du menu Réglage administrateur. 2 Appuyez successivement sur [03 Ident. utilisateur/Compte] et [01 Méthode d'authentification]. L'écran Méthode d'authentification s'affiche. 3 Sélectionnez la touche de réglage voulue à droite de "Authentification Utilisateur", "Utilisateur public", "Configuration comptes", "Méthode saisie suivi compte", et "Connexion auth. compte/util.". 4 Appuyez sur [Nbre d'utilisat. autorisés] pour entrer le quota. % Utilisez le clavier, [,] ou [+] sur l'écran pour entrer la valeur souhaitée, puis appuyez sur [OK]. 5 Appuyez sur [Suivant] pour procéder à un réglage pour "Action si limite sup. dépassée". 6 Appuyez sur [Réglage durée ticket], puis entrez la durée. % Utilisez le clavier, [,] ou [+] sur l'écran pour entrer la valeur souhaitée, puis appuyez sur [OK]. 7 Appuyez sur [OK] pour valider le réglage. [Finir tâche] La machine ne suspend pas l'exécution de la tâche même si la limite supérieure* est atteinte. Après achèvement du travail en cours, la machine n'est plus disponible. [Avertir] La machine affiche le message pour vous informer que la limite supérieure* est atteinte, mais elle permet de produire la tâche suivante. Toutefois, si la machine effectue une tâche d'impression, le message ne s'affiche pas. [Réglage durée ticket] Ce réglage sera appliqué quand Dossier actif est sélectionné pour le type de serveur d'authentification. Spécifiez la durée en minutes (1 à 60). Paramètre de réglage Description 12 [06 Réglage administrateur] - [03 Ident. utilisateur/Compte] 12-82 ineo 1052/1250 12.9 REMARQUE Si vous sélectionnez [Désactivé] après avoir sélectionné [Activé(Serv.ext)] ou [Activé (Copieur)] pour "Authentificat. utilisateur" ou inversement, à l'étape 3, une fenêtre de confirmation va s'ouvrir pour vous informer que toutes les données de gestion d'utilisation seront effacées. Vous devez appuyer sur [Activé] pour changer le réglage de [Authentificat. utilisateur]. Toutefois, veuillez noter que, pour des besoins de sécurité, la pression sur [Activé] va supprimer toutes les données administratives liées à l'authentification. % Pour annuler la modification, appuyez sur [Annuler]. Dans l'un ou l'autre cas, l'écran du menu Ident. utilisateur/Compte réapparaît. 12.9.2 [02 Régl. authentif. utilisateur] - [01 Réglage administratif] Liste des noms d'utilisateur : Quand vous sélectionnez [Activé] pour "Liste des noms d'utilisateur" et qu'ensuite vous appuyez sur [Activé (Copieur)] pour "Authent. utilisateur" dans [01 Méthode d'authentification], la touche [Liste des utilisateurs] est affichée sur l'écran d'authentification. Une pression sur la touche [Liste des utilisateurs] affiche une liste des noms d'utilisateur enregistrés et vous permet, pour l'authentification d'un utilisateur, d'entrer un nom d'utilisateur par simple pression sur une touche. En cas de pression sur [Activé] pour "Liste des noms d'utilisateur", puis de pression sur [Désactivé] pour "Authentification utilisateur" dans [01 Méthode d'authentification], de [Activé] pour "Configuration compte" et [Compte + code] pour "Méthode saisie suivi compte", la touche [Liste des comptes] va s'afficher sur l'écran Authentification Compte à la place de la touche [Liste des utilisateurs]. Une pression sur la touche [Liste des comptes] affiche une liste des comptes enregistrés et vous permet, pour l'authentification d'un compte, d'entrer un nom de compte par simple pression sur une touche. Fonction autorisée par défaut : Utilisez cette fonction pour la configuration initiale des fonctions accessibles à l'utilisateur quand [Activé(Serv.ext)] est sélectionné pour "Authent. utilisateur" dans [01 Méthode d'authentification]. ineo 1052/1250 12-83 12.9 [06 Réglage administrateur] - [03 Ident. utilisateur/Compte] 12 1 Suivez la procédure à la page 12-3 pour afficher l'écran du menu Réglage administrateur. 2 Appuyez successivement sur [03 Ident. utilisateur/Compte], [02 Régl. authentif. utilisateur] et sur [01 Réglage administratif]. L'écran Régl. de l’authentification utilisateur s'affiche. 3 Sélectionnez [Affiché] ou [Pas affichée] à droite de "Liste des noms d’utilisateur". 4 Appuyez sur [Fonction autoris. par défaut]. L'écran Fonction autorisée par défaut va s'afficher. % Procédez au réglage pour activer des restrictions sur les fonctions par défaut pour les utilisateurs qui sont authentifiés via un serveur externe. % Appuyez sur [Valider] pour achever le réglage et revenir à l'écran Paramétrage gestion. 5 Appuyez sur [OK] pour valider le réglage. % Pour annuler la modification, appuyez sur [Annuler]. Dans l'un ou l'autre cas, l'écran du menu Régl. authentif. utilisateur réapparaît. 12.9.3 [02 Régl. authentif. utilisateur] - [02 Enregistrement utilisateur] Utilisez cette fonction pour affecter un numéro à chaque utilisateur et définir un Nom de l'utilisateur, un Code, un Nom de compte, Définir limite max. et un Enregistrement carte IC pour chaque numéro. L'utilisateur enregistré apparaît dans la liste à l'écran. Cette liste vous permet de sélectionner un utilisateur à supprimer ou un utilisateur dont les données sont à changer selon les besoins. Parmi ces paramètres pour utilisateurs enregistrés, Accès Fonction (Impression) et Crédit max. peuvent être modifiés de manière collective. REMARQUE La fonction Enregistrement utilisateur elle-même ou certains éléments de réglage d'enregistrement de l'utilisateur risquent d'être indisponibles en fonction des réglages effectués sous Méthode d'authentification. Voir le tableau suivant pour de plus amples détails. *1: [Nom de compte] ne peut être défini que si [Synchroniser] est sélectionné pour "Connexion auth. compte/util." dans [01 Méthode d'authentification]. Toutefois, si vous n'êtes pas enregistré dans un compte dans [03 Configuration compte] - [01 Enregistrem. Gestion compte], vous ne pouvez pas sélectionner de nom de compte. *2 : pour utiliser une carte IC, l'Unité d'authentification (type de carte IC) AU-201 doit être branchée sur le port USB de la machine et nécessite un paramètre de service. Contactez votre technicien SAV si nécessaire. Vous devez aussi enregistrer votre carte IC et spécifier le [Type de carte IC] pour les cartes à utiliser ainsi que le [Réglage opération]. Pour plus de détails, voir page 12-99. Ajout de données utilisateur Modification/ Suppression de données utilisateur Configuration d'éléments dans l'enregistrement de l'utilisateur Système d'authentification Configuration compte Nom de compte*1 Définir limite max. Accès Fonction Enregistrement carte IC*2 Activé (Copieur) Désactivé 0 0 0 0 0 Activé 0 0 0 0 0 0 Activé (Serv.ext) Désactivé 0 0 0 Activé 0 0 0 0 Désactivé Désactivé Activé 12 [06 Réglage administrateur] - [03 Ident. utilisateur/Compte] 12-84 ineo 1052/1250 12.9 1 Suivez la procédure à la page 12-3 pour afficher l'écran du menu Réglage administrateur. 2 Appuyez successivement sur [03 Ident. utilisateur/Compte], [02 Régl. authentif. utilisateur] et sur [02 Enregistrement utilisateur]. L'écran Enregistrement utilisateur s'affiche. % Suivez les instructions ci-dessous pour ajouter, modifier ou supprimer des données utilisateur. 3 Appuyez sur [Ajouter] pour afficher l'écran Enregistrement util. Ajouter/Changer. % Si vous devez modifier des données utilisateur, passez à l'étape 10. % Si vous devez supprimer des données utilisateur, passez à l'étape 11. % Si vous devez modifier toutes les données utilisateur, passez à l'étape 12. 4 Appuyez sur [Numéro d'utilisateur] pour indiquer le numéro de l'utilisateur. % Entrez le numéro d'utilisateur souhaité sur le clavier. La plage de saisie des numéros d'utilisateur est comprise entre 1 et la limite supérieure entrée pour Nombre d'utilisateurs autorisés ineo 1052/1250 12-85 12.9 [06 Réglage administrateur] - [03 Ident. utilisateur/Compte] 12 % Appuyez sur [OK] pour valider le réglage. 5 Appuyez sur [Nom de l'utilisateur] et sur [Code] pour entrer un nom d'utilisateur ainsi qu'un code. % Appuyez sur [Nom de l'utilisateur] pour afficher l'écran saisir le nom de l'utilisateur. Entrez le nom d'utilisateur souhaité. Le nom d'utilisateur peut comporter jusqu'à 64 caractères alphanumériques, symboles compris. % Appuyez sur [Code] pour afficher l'écran Saisir le code d'accès. Appuyez sur [Nouveau code] pour afficher l'écran Nouveau code. Entrez un code et appuyez sur [OK]. Appuyez sur [Confirmation de saisie] pour afficher l'écran Confirmation de saisie. Entrez le même code et appuyez sur [OK]. Le code de l'utilisateur peut comporter jusqu'à 64 caractères alphanumériques. % Appuyez sur [OK] pour finaliser chaque réglage. 6 Appuyez sur [Nom de compte] pour sélectionner un nom de compte. Appuyez sur [Nom de compte] pour afficher l'écran Nom de compte. Sélectionnez la touche du nom de compte souhaité. 12 [06 Réglage administrateur] - [03 Ident. utilisateur/Compte] 12-86 ineo 1052/1250 12.9 % Appuyez sur [OK] pour valider le réglage. 7 Appuyez sur [Définir limite max.] pour régler la valeur. % Appuyez sur [Définir limite max.] pour afficher l'écran Définir limite max. Sélectionnez [Activer], puis appuyez sur [Maximum] pour saisir le nombre limite souhaité. % Appuyez sur [OK] pour valider le réglage. 8 Sélectionnez les fonctions accessibles. % Appuyez sur [Copier], [Numéris.], [Imprim.] ou [Rappeler] à la droite de "Accès à" pour sélectionner une fonction que l'utilisateur est autoriser à utiliser. ineo 1052/1250 12-87 12.9 [06 Réglage administrateur] - [03 Ident. utilisateur/Compte] 12 9 Appuyez sur [Enregistrement carte IC] pour enregistrer une carte IC. % Appuyez sur [Enregistrement carte IC] pour afficher l'écran Enregistrement carte IC. Appuyez sur [Enreg./MàJour] pour afficher l'écran Enregistrement Infos Carte IC. Passez une carte IC sur l'Unité d'authentification (type de carte IC) AU-201 connectée à la machine. L'écran Enregistrement de l'utilisateur est restauré et le message affiché à droite de "Infos carte IC" passe de [Non enregistrée] à [Enregistrée]. % Pour enregistrer une nouvelle carte, appuyez aussi sur [Enreg./MàJour] et passez la carte au-dessus de l'unité d'authentification. % Pour supprimer des informations enregistrées de la carte IC, appuyez sur [Supprimer]. Un dialogue de confirmation apparaît. Appuyez sur [OK] pour supprimer les informations enregistrées. "Infos carte IC" devient [Non enregistrée]. % Appuyez sur [Retour]. 10 Modifier des données utilisateur. Appuyez sur [Précédent] ou sur [Suivant] pour sélectionner la touche du numéro d'utilisateur et du nom d'utilisateur à modifier. Appuyez sur [Changer] pour afficher l'écran Enregistrement util. Ajouter/Changer. 12 [06 Réglage administrateur] - [03 Ident. utilisateur/Compte] 12-88 ineo 1052/1250 12.9 % Les options de réglage proposées à l'écran dans la zone méthode de réglage sont les mêmes que celles concernant l'ajout de données utilisateur décrites à l'étape 3. % Une fois que les modifications voulues ont été apportées, appuyez sur [OK]. 11 Supprimer les données utilisateur. Appuyez sur [Précédent] ou [Suivant] pour sélectionner la touche du numéro d'utilisateur et du nom d'utilisateur à supprimer. Appuyez sur [Supprimer]. % Appuyez sur [Oui] dans le dialogue de confirmation pour le supprimer. Ou bien, appuyez sur [Non] pour annuler. 12 Modifiez les réglages Accès à et Définir limite max. de manière collective pour tous les utilisateurs. Appuyez sur [Tous les utilis.] pour afficher l'écran Changer tous les utilisateurs. % Vous pouvez changer de manière collective ce qui est sélectionné pour "Accès à" ainsi que la limite supérieure pour [Définir limite max.]. Veuillez consulter l'étape 8 pour de plus amples détails sur les sélections à faire dans Accès Fonction et l'étape 7 pour les détails sur le réglage de la limite supérieure pour [Définir limite max.]. ineo 1052/1250 12-89 12.9 [06 Réglage administrateur] - [03 Ident. utilisateur/Compte] 12 % Appuyez sur [OK]. Un dialogue s'affiche pour confirmer la modification du réglage. % Appuyez sur [Oui] pour déterminer la modification et revenir à l'écran Enregistrement utilisateur. Une pression sur [Non] restaurera l'écran Changer tous les utilisateurs. Pour revenir à l'écran Enregistrement utilisateur, appuyez sur [Annuler]. 13 Appuyez sur [Retour]. L'écran du menu Régl. authentif. utilisateur réapparaît. 12 [06 Réglage administrateur] - [03 Ident. utilisateur/Compte] 12-90 ineo 1052/1250 12.9 12.9.4 [02 Régl. authentif. utilisateur] - [03 Compteur utilisateur] Permet de remettre à zéro les compteurs d'impression pour les utilisateurs authentifiés et utilisateurs publics, individuellement ou collectivement. 1 Suivez la procédure à la page 12-3 pour afficher l'écran du menu Réglage administrateur. 2 Appuyez successivement sur [03 Ident. utilisateur/Compte], [02 Régl. authentif. utilisateur] et sur [03 Compteur utilisateur]. L'écran Compteur utilisateur s'affiche. ineo 1052/1250 12-91 12.9 [06 Réglage administrateur] - [03 Ident. utilisateur/Compte] 12 3 Initialisez individuellement les compteurs pour les utilisateurs authentifiés et les utilisateurs publics. % Appuyez sur [Précédent] ou [Suivant] pour sélectionner la touche du numéro d'utilisateur et du nom d'utilisateur dont il faut remettre le compteur à zéro. Appuyez sur [Public] pour remettre à zéro le compteur des utilisateurs publics. L'écran Liste des compteurs s'affiche. % Pour mettre un compteur individuel à zéro, appuyez sur [Annul] à droite de "Compteur copie", "Compteur impressions" ou "Compt. numér.". % Pour remettre tous les compteurs à zéro, appuyez sur [Tout effacer] en bas de l'écran. % Appuyez sur [Oui] ou [Non] dans le dialogue de confirmation. % Appuyez sur [Retour] pour restaurer l'écran Compteur utilisateur. 4 Initialiser les compteurs utilisateur collectivement. % Appuyez sur [Tout réinit.]. % Appuyez sur [Oui] ou [Non] dans le dialogue de confirmation. 5 Appuyez sur [Retour] pour restaurer l'écran Compteur utilisateur. 12 [06 Réglage administrateur] - [03 Ident. utilisateur/Compte] 12-92 ineo 1052/1250 12.9 12.9.5 [03 Gestion de compte] - [01 Enregistrem. Gestion compte] Utilisez cette fonction pour affecter un numéro à chaque compte et définir les paramètres Nom de compte, Code, Définir limite max. et Accès Fonction pour chaque numéro de compte. Le compte enregistré apparaît dans la liste à l'écran. Cette liste vous permet de sélectionner un compte à supprimer ou un compte dont les données sont à changer selon les besoins. 1 Suivez la procédure à la page 12-3 pour afficher l'écran du menu Réglage administrateur. 2 Appuyez successivement sur [03 Ident. utilisateur/Compte], [03 Gestion de compte] et sur [01 Enregistrem. Gestion compte]. L'écran Enregistrem. Gestion compte s'affiche. % Suivez les instructions ci-dessous pour ajouter, modifier ou supprimer des données de compte. 3 Appuyez sur [Ajouter] pour afficher l'écran Enreg. gestion compte-Ajout/Changement. % Si vous devez modifier un enregistrement de compte, passez à l'étape 8. % Si vous devez supprimer un enregistrement de compte, passez à l'étape 9. % Si vous devez modifier des enregistrements de compte de manière collective, passez à l'étape 10. ineo 1052/1250 12-93 12.9 [06 Réglage administrateur] - [03 Ident. utilisateur/Compte] 12 4 Appuyez sur [Numéro de compte] pour indiquer le numéro de compte. % Entrez le numéro de compte souhaité sur le clavier. Un numéro de compte peut être configuré jusqu'à la limite supérieure, cette dernière étant la valeur saisie pour Nombre d'utilisateurs autorisés moins 1 000. % Appuyez sur [OK] pour valider le réglage. 5 Appuyez sur [Nom de compte] et sur [Code] pour entrer le nom de compte et le code. % Appuyez sur [Nom de compte] pour afficher l'écran Réglage Nom de compte. Entrez le nom de compte souhaité. Le nom de compte peut comporter jusqu'à 8 caractères alphanumériques. % Appuyez sur [Code] pour afficher l'écran Saisir le code d'accès. Appuyez sur [Nouveau code] pour afficher l'écran Nouveau code. Entrez un code et appuyez sur [OK]. Appuyez sur [Confirmation de saisie] pour afficher l'écran Confirmation de saisie. Entrez le même code et appuyez sur [OK]. Le code peut comporter jusqu'à 8 caractères alphanumériques. % Appuyez sur [OK] pour finaliser chaque réglage. 12 [06 Réglage administrateur] - [03 Ident. utilisateur/Compte] 12-94 ineo 1052/1250 12.9 6 Appuyez sur [Définir limite max.] pour régler la valeur. % Appuyez sur [Définir limite max.] pour afficher l'écran Définir limite max. Sélectionnez [Activer], puis appuyez sur [Maximum] pour saisir le nombre limite souhaité. % Appuyez sur [OK] pour valider le réglage. 7 Sélectionnez les fonctions accessibles. % Appuyez sur [Copier], [Numéris.], [Imprim.] ou [Rappeler] à la droite de "Accès à" pour sélectionner une fonction que l'utilisateur est autoriser à utiliser. 8 Modifier des données de compte. Appuyez sur [Précédent] ou [Suivant] pour sélectionner la touche dont il faut modifier le numéro de compte et le nom de compte. Appuyez sur [Changer] pour afficher l'écran Enreg. gestion compte- Ajout/Changement. ineo 1052/1250 12-95 12.9 [06 Réglage administrateur] - [03 Ident. utilisateur/Compte] 12 % Les options de réglage proposées à l'écran dans la zone méthode de réglage sont les mêmes que celles concernant l'ajout de données de compte décrites à l'étape 3. % Une fois que les modifications voulues ont été apportées, appuyez sur [OK]. 9 Supprimer des données de compte. Appuyez sur [Précédent] ou [Suivant] pour sélectionner la touche dont il faut supprimer le numéro de compte et le nom de compte. Appuyez sur [Supprimer]. % Appuyez sur [Oui] dans le dialogue de confirmation pour le supprimer. Ou bien, appuyez sur [Non] pour annuler. 10 Modifiez les réglages Accès Fonction et Définir limite max. de manière collective pour tous les comptes. Appuyez sur [Tous les comptes] pour afficher l'écran Changer tous les comptes. % Vous pouvez changer de manière collective ce qui est sélectionné pour "Accès à" ainsi que la limite supérieure pour [Définir limite max.]. Veuillez consulter l'étape 8 pour de plus amples détails sur les sélections à faire dans Accès Fonction et l'étape 7 pour les détails sur le réglage de la limite supérieure pour [Définir limite max.]. 12 [06 Réglage administrateur] - [03 Ident. utilisateur/Compte] 12-96 ineo 1052/1250 12.9 % Appuyez sur [OK]. Un dialogue s'affiche pour confirmer la modification du réglage. % Appuyez sur [Oui] pour déterminer la modification et revenir à l'écran Enregistrem. Gestion compte. Une pression sur [Non] restaurera l'écran Changer tous les comptes. Pour revenir à l'écran Gestion compte, appuyez sur [Annuler]. 11 Appuyez sur [Retour]. L'écran du menu Configuration compte va réapparaître. ineo 1052/1250 12-97 12.9 [06 Réglage administrateur] - [03 Ident. utilisateur/Compte] 12 12.9.6 [03 Gestion de compte] - [02 Compteur gestion de compte] Réinitialiser les compteurs d'impression de manière individuelle et collective pour les comptes authentifiés. 1 Suivez la procédure à la page 12-3 pour afficher l'écran du menu Réglage administrateur. 2 Appuyez successivement sur [03 Ident. utilisateur/Compte], [03 Gestion de compte] et [02 Compteur gestion de compte]. L'écran Compteur gestion de compte s'affiche. 3 Réinitialisez les compteurs de manière individuelle pour les comptes authentifiés. % Appuyez sur [Précédent] ou [Suivant] pour sélectionner la touche du numéro de compte et du nom de compte qu'il faut réinitialiser. L'écran Liste des compteurs s'affiche. % Pour mettre un compteur individuel à zéro, appuyez sur [Annul] à droite de "Compteur copie", "Compteur impressions" ou "Compt. numér.". % Pour remettre tous les compteurs à zéro, appuyez sur [Tout effacer] en bas de l'écran. % Appuyez sur [Oui] ou [Non] dans le dialogue de confirmation. 12 [06 Réglage administrateur] - [03 Ident. utilisateur/Compte] 12-98 ineo 1052/1250 12.9 % Appuyez sur [Retour] pour restaurer l'écran Compteur gestion de compte. 4 Initialisez les compteurs de comptes collectivement. % Appuyez sur [Tout réinit.]. % Appuyez sur [Oui] ou [Non] dans le dialogue de confirmation. 5 Appuyez sur [Retour] pour restaurer l'écran du menu Authentification utilisateur/Configuration compte. 12.9.7 [04 Imprimer sans authentificat] Spécifiez s'il faut autoriser ou non l'impression d'une tâche d'impression sans authentification spécifiée. 1 Suivez la procédure à la page 12-3 pour afficher l'écran du menu Réglage administrateur. 2 Appuyez successivement sur [03 Ident. utilisateur/Compte] et [04 Imprimer sans authentificat]. L'écran Imprimer sans authentification s'affiche. 3 Sélectionnez ou [Autoriser] ou [Interdire]. 4 Appuyez sur [OK] pour valider le réglage. % Pour annuler la modification, appuyez sur [Annuler]. Dans l'un ou l'autre cas, l'écran du menu Ident. utilisateur/Compte réapparaît. ineo 1052/1250 12-99 12.9 [06 Réglage administrateur] - [03 Ident. utilisateur/Compte] 12 12.9.8 [05 Config. périph. authent.] - [01 Méthode d'authentification] REMARQUE Les cartes IC peuvent être utilisées pour l'authentification utilisateur mais ne sont pas valables pour l'authentification compte. 1 Suivez la procédure à la page 12-3 pour afficher l'écran du menu Réglage administrateur. 2 Appuyez successivement sur [03 Ident. utilisateur/Compte], [05 Config. périph. authent.] et [01 Méthode d'authentification]. L'écran Méthode d'authentification s'affiche. 3 Sélectionnez la touche souhaitée à droite de "Type de carte IC" pour spécifier le type de carte IC à utiliser. 4 Sélectionnez [Authentification par carte IC] ou [Authent. par carte IC + code] à droite de "Réglage opération". % Si vous avez sélectionné [Authentification par carte IC], l'authentification utilisateur est effectuée avec la seule carte IC lorsque [Activé (Copieur)] est sélectionné sur l'écran Authentification utilisateur. Si vous avez sélectionné [Authent. par carte IC + code], les utilisateurs doivent aussi fournir leur code utilisateur pour utiliser leur carte IC. 5 Appuyez sur [OK] pour valider le réglage. % Pour annuler la modification, appuyez sur [Annuler]. L'écran du menu Config. périph. authent. est restauré. Élément Description Type de carte IC Spécifiez le type de carte IC à utiliser. Réglage opération Spécifiez si les utilisateurs doivent entrer ou non leur code utilisateur pour l'authentification par carte IC. 12 [06 Réglage administrateur] - [03 Ident. utilisateur/Compte] 12-100 ineo 1052/1250 12.9 12.9.9 [06 Réglage du serveur externe] Spécifiez le serveur à utiliser lors de l'authentification via un serveur externe. Commencez par enregistrer plusieurs serveurs externes, puis sélectionnez-en un comme serveur par défaut. Configurez les options suivantes si nécessaire. 1 Suivez la procédure à la page 12-3 pour afficher l'écran du menu Réglage administrateur. 2 Appuyez successivement sur [03 Ident. utilisateur/Compte] et [06 Réglage du serveur externe]. L'écran Réglage du serveur externe va s'afficher. Symptôme Description de l'élément de réglage Nom du serveur Vous pouvez entrer jusqu'à 32 caractères alphanumériques ou symboles. Type de serveur Dossier actif Nom de domaine par défaut Vous pouvez entrer jusqu'à 64 caractères alphanumériques ou symboles. NTLM v1 Nom de domaine par défaut Vous pouvez entrer jusqu'à 64 caractères alphanumériques ou symboles. NTLM v2 Nom de domaine par défaut Vous pouvez entrer jusqu'à 64 caractères alphanumériques ou symboles. NDS sur IPX Nom de structure NDS par défaut Vous pouvez entrer jusqu'à 64 caractères alphanumériques ou symboles. Nom de contexte NDS par défaut Vous pouvez entrer jusqu'à 192 caractères alphanumériques ou symboles. NDS sur TCP/IP Nom de structure NDS par défaut Vous pouvez entrer jusqu'à 64 caractères alphanumériques ou symboles. Nom de contexte NDS par défaut Vous pouvez entrer jusqu'à 192 caractères alphanumériques ou symboles. LDAP Adresse du serveur : Nom d'hôte, Adresse IPv4, Adresse IPv6 Base de recherche Vous pouvez entrer jusqu'à 256 caractères alphanumériques ou symboles. Configuration SSL : Activé, Désactivé Numéro de port : 1 à 65535 Dépassement du délai : 5-300 Type d'authentification : [Simple], [Digest-MD5] Attributs de recherche ineo 1052/1250 12-101 12.9 [06 Réglage administrateur] - [03 Ident. utilisateur/Compte] 12 3 Sélectionnez une ligne vierge sur l'écran Réglage du serveur externe et appuyez sur [Nouveau] pour enregistrer un nouveau serveur externe. L'écran Nouveau/Modifier va s'afficher. % Si vous devez modifier des données enregistrées, passez à l'étape 7. % Si vous devez supprimer des données enregistrées, passez à l'étape 9. 4 Appuyez sur [Nom du serveur] pour afficher l'écran Nom du serveur, puis entrez un nom pour le serveur. % L'opération d'enregistrement ne sera pas terminée si le nom du serveur reste vierge. Assurez-vous de bien entrer le nom. % Appuyez sur [OK], une fois terminé. 5 Appuyez sur [Type de serveur]. L'écran Type de serveur va s'afficher. 12 [06 Réglage administrateur] - [03 Ident. utilisateur/Compte] 12-102 ineo 1052/1250 12.9 6 Appuyez sur l'une des options suivantes pour configurer les détails : [Dossier actif], [NTLM v1], [NTLM v2], [NDS sur IPX], [NDS sur TCP/IP] et [LDAP]. Appuyez sur [OK] dans chaque écran, une fois terminé. 7 Sélectionnez une ligne sur l'écran Réglage du serveur externe et appuyez sur [Modifier] pour modifier les données pour le serveur externe enregistré. L'écran Nouveau/Modifier va s'afficher. 8 Répétez les étapes 4 à 6 ci-dessus pour modifier le réglage existant et appuyez sur [OK]. 9 Sélectionnez une ligne sur l'écran Réglage du serveur externe et appuyez sur [Supprimer] pour supprimer les données pour le serveur externe enregistré. Un dialogue de confirmation apparaît. ineo 1052/1250 12-103 12.9 [06 Réglage administrateur] - [03 Ident. utilisateur/Compte] 12 10 Appuyez sur [Oui]. % Appuyez sur [Non] pour annuler la suppression. 11 Appuyez sur [Fermer]. L'écran du menu Ident. utilisateur/Compte va réapparaître. 12.9.10 [07 Réglage commun utilis/compte] Spécifiez s'il faut ou non afficher une fenêtre de confirmation avant de déconnecter un utilisateur authentifié. 1 Suivez la procédure à la page 12-3 pour afficher l'écran du menu Réglage administrateur. 2 Appuyez successivement sur [03 Ident. utilisateur/Compte] et [07 Réglage commun utilis/compte]. L'écran 07 Réglage commun utilisateur/compte va s'afficher. 3 Sélectionnez [Activé] ou [Désactivé]. 4 Appuyez sur [OK] pour valider le réglage. L'écran du menu Ident. utilisateur/Compte va réapparaître. 12 [06 Réglage administrateur] - [04 Configuration réseau] 12-104 ineo 1052/1250 12.10 12.10 [06 Réglage administrateur] - [04 Configuration réseau] Configurez les paramètres de communication pour la machine et le contrôleur. 12.10.1 [01 Carte réseau machine] - [01 Configuration TCP/IP] Configurez les paramètres de carte réseau (NIC) comme l'adresse IP ou la vitesse réseau de la machine. 1 Suivez la procédure à la page 12-3 pour afficher l'écran du menu Réglage administrateur. 2 Appuyez successivement sur [04 Configuration réseau], [01 Carte réseau machine] et sur [01 Configuration TCP/IP]. L'écran Configuration TCP/IP va s'afficher. 3 Effectuez le réglage de chaque élément. % Entrez les chiffres sur le pavé numérique du panneau de contrôle ou de l'écran tactile. Appuyez sur [OK] pour mettre en surbrillance la zone de saisie suivante. % Pour spécifier le serveur de messagerie par le nom d'hôte, entrez l'adresse IP en choisissant entre [Adr. IP Serv. DNS primaire] ou [Adr. IP Serv. DNS second.]. En cas d'utilisateur de deux serveurs DNS, entrez l'adresse IP des deux. REMARQUE Pour activer ce changement de paramètre du serveur DNS, il faut redémarrer la machine. Appuyez sur [OK], et éteignez la machine par l'interrupteur secondaire. REMARQUE Si la machine est configurée pour l'impression en tandem, l'[Adresse IP Tandem] s'affiche pour que vous puissiez configurer l'adresse IP du MFP Partenaire. Ce réglage nécessite un paramètre de service. Contactez votre technicien SAV si nécessaire. % Spécifiez la vitesse de ligne du réseau dans Vitesse réseau. Choisissez parmi les options proposées. 4 Appuyez sur [OK] pour valider le réglage. % Pour annuler la modification, appuyez sur [Annuler]. L'écran du menu Carte réseau machine s'affiche à nouveau. ineo 1052/1250 12-105 12.10 [06 Réglage administrateur] - [04 Configuration réseau] 12 12.10.2 [01 Carte réseau machine] - [02 Paramétrage http] Configurez les paramètres de communication http de la machine. 1 Suivez la procédure à la page 12-3 pour afficher l'écran du menu Réglage administrateur. 2 Appuyez successivement sur [04 Configuration réseau], [01 Carte réseau machine] et sur [02 Paramétrage http]. L'écran Paramétrage http s'affiche. 3 Effectuez le réglage de chaque élément. % Appuyez sur la touche d'un élément pour afficher l'écran de réglage correspondant. Quand un écran de saisie ou un écran tactile comportant un pavé numérique s'affiche, renseignez le champ selon les besoins, et appuyez sur [OK] pour l'appliquer. 4 Appuyez sur [OK] pour valider le réglage. % Pour annuler la modification, appuyez sur [Annuler]. L'écran du menu Carte réseau machine s'affiche à nouveau. 12.10.3 [01 Carte réseau machine] - [03 Paramétrage E-mail] Configurez les réglages e-mail par défaut sur la machine. 12 [06 Réglage administrateur] - [04 Configuration réseau] 12-106 ineo 1052/1250 12.10 1 Suivez la procédure à la page 12-3 pour afficher l'écran du menu Réglage administrateur. 2 Appuyez successivement sur [04 Configuration réseau], [01 Carte réseau machine] et sur [03 Paramétrage E-mail]. L'écran Paramétrage e-mail s'affiche. 3 Effectuez le réglage de chaque élément. % Entrez les chiffres sur le pavé numérique du panneau de contrôle ou de l'écran tactile. % Quand le serveur DNS est utilisé, le nom d'hôte peut être entré dans le champ du serveur de messagerie. (chemin complet, 128 caractères max.) REMARQUE Si vous utilisez le mode Sécurité Renforcée, l'adresse IP peut suffire. 4 Quand la saisie est terminée, effectuez un test de transmission. % Une pression sur [Test] affiche le dialogue de confirmation. Appuyez sur [Oui] pour vérifier que le réglage a été correctement effectué. 5 Appuyez sur [OK] pour valider le réglage. % Pour annuler la modification, appuyez sur [Annuler]. L'écran du menu Carte réseau machine s'affiche à nouveau. ineo 1052/1250 12-107 12.10 [06 Réglage administrateur] - [04 Configuration réseau] 12 12.10.4 [02 Carte réseau contrôleur] Configurez les paramètres de communication pour le contrôleur. 1 Suivez la procédure à la page 12-3 pour afficher l'écran du menu Réglage administrateur. 2 Appuyez successivement sur [04 Configuration réseau] et [02 Carte réseau contrôleur]. L'écran du menu Carte réseau contrôleur va s'afficher. 3 Effectuez le réglage de chaque élément. REMARQUE Si le message [Mettre hors puis sous tension] s'affiche après modification d'un paramètre dans [02 Carte réseau contrôleur], assurez-vous de bien couper l'interrupteur principal puis de le rallumer. Veuillez patienter 10 à 30 secondes après avoir coupé l'interrupteur principal, puis rallumez-le. 4 Appuyez sur [OK] pour valider le réglage. % Pour annuler la modification, appuyez sur [Annuler]. Dans l'un ou l'autre cas, l'écran du menu Carte réseau contrôleur réapparaît. 12.10.5 Liste de Carte réseau contrôleur Le tableau ci-dessous décrit les éléments et paramètres de Carte réseau contrôleur. Élément de menu/Description Options de réglage (avec la valeur par défaut en gras) 01 Configuration TCP/IP Configuration TCP/IP Activer, Désactiver Attribution adresse IP *1 Attribution IP auto, Attribution IP manuelle Attribution IP auto DHCP Activer, Désactiver BOOTP Activer, Désactiver ARP/PING Activer, Désactiver AUTO IP Activer, Désactiver Attribution IP manuelle Adresse IP 0.0.0.0 (0-255) Masque de sous réseau 0.0.0.0 (0-255) Passerelle par défaut 0.0.0.0 (0-255) Paramétrage IPv6 Paramétrage IPv6 Activer, Désactiver*2 Paramétrage auto IPv6 Activer, Désactiver*3 DHCP v6 Activer, Désactiver 12 [06 Réglage administrateur] - [04 Configuration réseau] 12-108 ineo 1052/1250 12.10 Adresse globale 0000:0000:0000:0000:0000: 0000:0000:0000 (1 à 39 octets)*4 Longueur du préfixe 1-128 (0) Adresse lien local fe80: XXXX*5 Adresse passerelle 0000:0000:0000:0000:0000: 0000:0000:0000 (1 à 39 octets)*6 Nom Serveur DNS Nom Serveur DNS (IPv4) Config. serveur DNS auto Activer, Désactiver Serveur DNS primaire 0.0.0.0 (0-255) Serveur DNS secondaire 1 0.0.0.0 (0-255) Serveur DNS secondaire 2 0.0.0.0 (0-255) Nom Serveur DNS (IPv6) Config. serveur DNS auto Activer, Désactiver Serveur DNS primaire 0000:0000:0000:0000:0000:0000: 0000:0000 (1 à 39 octets)* Serveur DNS secondaire 1 0000:0000:0000:0000:0000:0000: 0000:0000 (1 à 39 octets)* Serveur DNS secondaire 2 0000:0000:0000:0000:0000:0000: 0000:0000 (1 à 39 octets)* Paramètres DNS dynamique Activer, Désactiver Nom d'hôte KMBT + 6 derniers chiffres de l'adresse MAC 63 caractères max. combinant symboles et caractères alphanumériques. Réglage LLMNR Activer, Désactiver Nom du domaine DNS Obtenir domaine DNS auto Activer, Désactiver Nom Auto Domaine Rech. DNS Activer, Désactiver Domaine DNS par défaut 251 caractères max. combinant symboles et caractères alphanumériques. *7 RechercheDNS NomDomaine1 251 caractères max. combinant symboles et caractères alphanumériques. *7 RechercheDNS NomDomaine2 251 caractères max. combinant symboles et caractères alphanumériques. *7 RechercheDNS NomDomaine3 251 caractères max. combinant symboles et caractères alphanumériques. *7 N° de port RAW N° de port RAW 1 1-65535 (9100) Activer, Désactiver*8 N° de port RAW 2 1-65535 (9100) Activer, Désactiver*8 N° de port RAW 3 1-65535 (9100) Activer, Désactiver*8 N° de port RAW 4 1-65535 (9100) Activer, Désactiver*8 N° de port RAW 5 1-65535 (9100) Activer, Désactiver*8 N° de port RAW 6 1-65535 (9100) Activer, Désactiver*8 Filtrage IP Permettre Accès Activer, Désactiver Plage 1 : début 0.0.0.0 - fin 0.0.0.0 (0-255)*9 Plage 2 : début 0.0.0.0 - fin 0.0.0.0 (0-255) Plage 3 : début 0.0.0.0 - fin 0.0.0.0 (0-255) Plage 4 : début 0.0.0.0 - fin 0.0.0.0 (0-255) Plage 5 : début 0.0.0.0 - fin 0.0.0.0 (0-255) Élément de menu/Description Options de réglage (avec la valeur par défaut en gras) ineo 1052/1250 12-109 12.10 [06 Réglage administrateur] - [04 Configuration réseau] 12 Adresses interdites Activer, Désactiver Plage 1 : début 0.0.0.0 - fin 0.0.0.0 (0-255)*9 Plage 2 : début 0.0.0.0 - fin 0.0.0.0 (0-255) Plage 3 : début 0.0.0.0 - fin 0.0.0.0 (0-255) Plage 4 : début 0.0.0.0 - fin 0.0.0.0 (0-255) Plage 5 : début 0.0.0.0 - fin 0.0.0.0 (0-255) Paramétrage Ipsec Autorisation, Interdiction Paramétrage IPsec/Réglages IKE Groupe 1–Groupe 4 Algorithme encryptage DES CBC, 3DES CBC, Désactiver Groupe 1–Groupe 4 Algorith. identification MD5, SHA-1, Désactiver Durée validité clé 80-604 800 (28 800) (s) Groupe Diffie-Hellman Groupe 1, Groupe 2 Paramétrage IPsec/IPsec SA Protocole de sécurité AH, ESP, ESP AH Algorithme encryptageESP DES CBC, 3DES CBC, AES CBC, NULL Algorith. identification MD5, SHA-1 Temps pour destruction 120-604800 (3600) (s) Paramétrage IPsec/EnregistrerPeer Groupe 1–Groupe 10 Mode Encapsulation Mode Tunnel, Transport, Désactiver*11 Groupe 1–Groupe 10 Adresse IP Modifier IPv4, Modifier IPv6 0.0.0.0 (0-255) 0: 0: 0: 0: 0: 0: 0: 0 (1 à 39 octets) Groupe 1–Groupe 10 Clé partagée (PSK) 64 caractères max. combinant symboles et caractères alphanumériques. Groupe 1–Groupe 10 PFS (Perfect Forward Secrecy) Activer, Désactiver 02 Configuration NetWare Configuration impression NetWare Configuration IPX Activer, Désactiver Type de trame Ethernet Détection auto, 802.2, 802.3, Ethernet II, 802.3SNAP Mode Impression NetWare Désactiver, PServeur, NImprimante, RImprimante Config Nprinter/Rprinter Nom du serveur d'impression KMBT + 6 derniers chiffres de l'adresse MAC 63 caractères max. combinant symboles et caractères alphanumériques. Numéro imprimante 0-255 (255) Configuration Pserver Nom du serveur d'impression KMBT + 6 derniers chiffres de l'adresse MAC 63 caractères max. combinant symboles et caractères alphanumériques. Code d'accès serveur impr. 63 caractères max. combinant symboles et caractères alphanumériques. Intervalle d'interrogation 1-65535 (1) (s) Config. Bindery/NDS Bindery/NDS Élément de menu/Description Options de réglage (avec la valeur par défaut en gras) 12 [06 Réglage administrateur] - [04 Configuration réseau] 12-110 ineo 1052/1250 12.10 Nom serveur de fichiers 47 caractères max. combinant symboles et caractères alphanumériques. Nom du contexte NDS 191 caractères max. combinant symboles et caractères alphanumériques. Nom de l'arbre NDS 63 caractères max. combinant symboles et caractères alphanumériques. État Nom serveur, Nom file d'attente 03 Configuration serveur HTTP Configuration serveur HTTP Configuration serveur HTTP Activer, Désactiver Configuration Web Connection Activer, Désactiver Configuration IPP Configuration IPP Activer, Désactiver Accepter tâche IPP Activer, Désactiver Configuration serveur HTTP/Configuration IPP Operation Support Number Tâche impression Activer, Désactiver*8 Activer tâche Activer, Désactiver*8 Arrêt tâche Activer, Désactiver*8 Récup. attributs tâche Activer, Désactiver*8 Récupération tâche Activer, Désactiver*8 Récup attributs impress. Activer, Désactiver*8 Informations imprimante Nom de l'imprimante 127 caractères max. combinant symboles et caractères alphanumériques. Emplacement de l'imprimante 127 caractères max. combinant symboles et caractères alphanumériques. Informations imprimante 127 caractères max. combinant symboles et caractères alphanumériques. URI imprimante Non modifiable Config. identif. IPP Config. identif. IPP Activer, Désactiver Méthode d'authentification demande-nom-utili., de base, digest Nom de l'utilisateur Personnalisé 20 caractères max. combinant symboles et caractères alphanumériques. Code pass 20 caractères max. combinant symboles et caractères alphanumériques. domaine-realm IPP 127 caractères max. combinant symboles et caractères alphanumériques. 04 Configuration FTP Configuration FTP Config. serveur FTP Activer, Désactiver Configuration envoi FTP Configuration envoi FTP Activer, Désactiver Élément de menu/Description Options de réglage (avec la valeur par défaut en gras) ineo 1052/1250 12-111 12.10 [06 Réglage administrateur] - [04 Configuration réseau] 12 Adresse du serveur proxy Modifier IPv4, Modifier IPv6, Modifier nom d'hôte IPv4 0.0.0.0 (0-255) IPv6 0: 0: 0: 0: 0: 0: 0: 0 (1 à 39 octets) No. port serveur proxy 1-65535 (21) Mode PASV Activer, Désactiver Délai d'attente connexion 5-300 (60) (sec.) Numéro de port 1-65535 (21) 05 Configuration SNMP Configuration SNMP Configuration SNMP Configuration SNMP Activer, Désactiver SNMPv1/v2c (IP) Activer, Désactiver*8 SNMPv3 (IP) Activer, Désactiver*8 SNMPv1 (IPX) Activer, Désactiver*8 Numéro port UDP Numéro port UDP 1-65535 (161) Configuration SNMP/Configuration SNMPv1/v2c Nom de la communauté pour la lecture Nom communauté lecture public 15 caractères max. combinant symboles et caractères alphanumériques. Nom de la communauté pour l'écriture Config. permission écrit. Autorisation/Interdiction*8 Nom communauté écriture privé 15 caractères max. combinant symboles et caractères alphanumériques. Configuration SNMP/Configuration SNMPv3 Nom du contexte Nom du contexte 63 caractères max. combinant symboles et caractères alphanumériques. Recherche nom utilisateur Recherche util. autorisé Autorisation/Interdiction*8 Recherche nom utilisateur public 32 caractères max. combinant symboles et caractères alphanumériques. *10 Nom utilisateur lecture Nom utilisateur lecture 32 caractères max. combinant symboles et caractères alphanumériques. *10 Niveau de sécurité No Admission, code-identif., code-identif./ code-privé SNMP/SNMPv3/Nom utilisateur lecture Réglage Code Util. lect. code-identif CodeAuth 8 à 32 caractères max. combinant symboles et caractères alphanumériques. Util. lect. code-privé CodePriv 8 à 32 caractères max. combinant symboles et caractères alphanumériques. Élément de menu/Description Options de réglage (avec la valeur par défaut en gras) 12 [06 Réglage administrateur] - [04 Configuration réseau] 12-112 ineo 1052/1250 12.10 SNMP/SNMPv3/Nom utilisateur écriture Util. écrit code-identif Nom utilisateur écriture Interdiction 32 caractères max. combinant symboles et caractères alphanumériques. *10 Niveau de sécurité No Admission, code-identif., code-identif./ code-privé Réglage Code Util. écrit code-identif 8 à 32 caractères max. combinant symboles et caractères alphanumériques. Adresse MAC (deux points ":" exclus) Util. écrit. code-privé 8 à 32 caractères max. combinant symboles et caractères alphanumériques. Adresse MAC (deux points ":" exclus) Algorithme encryptage DES, AES-128 Méthode d'authentification MD5, SHA-1 Configuration SNMP Config. permission Trap Autorisation, Interdiction ConfTrap(échec auth.) Activer, Désactiver 06 Configuration SMB Configuration SMB Configuration SMB Configuration envoi SMB Activer, Désactiver Configuration NTLM NTLMv1, NTLMv2, NTLMv1/NTLMv2 Réglage DFS Activer, Désactiver Services de publication Activer, Désactiver Régl. impress. Régl. impress. Activer, Désactiver Nom NetBios KMBT + 6 derniers chiffres de l'adresse MAC 15 caractères max. combinant symboles et caractères alphanumériques. Nom du service d'impression PRESS_1250/PRESS_1052 12 caractères max. combinant symboles et caractères alphanumériques. Groupe de travail 15 caractères max. combinant symboles et caractères alphanumériques. Configuration SMB/Configuration WINS Configuration WINS Configuration WINS Autorisation, Interdiction Configuration WINS auto Autorisation, Interdiction Adresse serveur WINS Adresse Serveur WINS 1 0.0.0.0 (0-255) Adresse Serveur WINS 2 0.0.0.0 (0-255) Configuration type Noeud Noeud B, Noeud P, Noeud M, Noeud H Réglage Héberg. Direct Activer, Désactiver 07 Configuration Apple Talk Configuration Apple Talk Configuration Apple Talk Autorisation, Interdiction Élément de menu/Description Options de réglage (avec la valeur par défaut en gras) ineo 1052/1250 12-113 12.10 [06 Réglage administrateur] - [04 Configuration réseau] 12 Nom de l'imprimante KMBT + 6 derniers chiffres de l'adresse MAC 31 caractères max. combinant symboles et caractères alphanumériques. Nom de zone Astérisques (*) 31 caractères max. combinant symboles et caractères alphanumériques. Zone actuelle Non modifiable 08 Configuration Bonjour Configuration Bonjour Configuration Bonjour Autorisation, Interdiction Nom Bonjour 63 caractères max. combinant symboles et caractères alphanumériques. 09 Configuration E-mail Configuration SMTP Configuration SMTP Activer, Désactiver Adresse du serveur SMTP Modifier IPv4 0.0.0.0 (0-255) Modifier IPv6 0: 0: 0: 0: 0: 0: 0: 0 (1 à 39 octets) Changer nom d'hôte 253 caractères max. combinant symboles et caractères alphanumériques. *7 Paramètres SSL SMTP sur SSL, Démarrer TLS, Désactiver Numéro de port 1-65535 (25) Numéro de port (SSL) 1-65535 (465) Délai d'attente connexion 30, 60, 90, 120, 150, 180, 210, 240, 270, 300 (s) Division binaire Activer, Désactiver Taille division E-mail 100-15000 (500) (pas : 100) (K octet) Quantité serveur 0-100 (0) (M octet) Spécifiez "0" pour les rendre illimités. Paramétrage identifications POP avant SMTP Activer, Désactiver Authentification SMTP Activer, Désactiver Tempo POP avant SMTP 0-60 (0) Config. identif. SMTP ID utilisateur 255 caractères max. combinant symboles et caractères alphanumériques. Code 128 caractères max. combinant symboles et caractères alphanumériques. domaine-realm 255 caractères max. combinant symboles et caractères alphanumériques. Configuration POP Adresse serveur POP Modifier IPv4 0.0.0.0 (0-255) Modifier IPv6 0: 0: 0: 0: 0: 0: 0: 0 (1 à 39 octets) Changer nom d'hôte 253 caractères max. combinant symboles et caractères alphanumériques. *7 ID utilisateur 63 caractères max. combinant symboles et caractères alphanumériques. Élément de menu/Description Options de réglage (avec la valeur par défaut en gras) 12 [06 Réglage administrateur] - [04 Configuration réseau] 12-114 ineo 1052/1250 12.10 Code 15 caractères max. combinant symboles et caractères alphanumériques. Identification APOP Activer, Désactiver Paramètres SSL Activer, Désactiver Numéro de port 1-65535 (110) Numéro de port (SSL) 1-65535 (995) Délai d'attente connexion dépassé 30, 60, 90, 120, 150, 180, 210, 240, 270, 300 (s) Enregistrement titre e-mail Enregistrer N° 1 à N° 5 (N° 1) 64 caractères max. combinant symboles et caractères alphanumériques. Enregistrement texte e-mail Enregistrer N° 1 à N° 5 (N° 1) 256 caractères max. combinant symboles et caractères alphanumériques. 10 Configuration socket TCP Configuration socket TCP Configuration socket TCP Activer, Désactiver Numéro de port 1-65535 (59158) Paramètres SSL Activer, Désactiver Numéro de port (SSL) 1-65535 (59159) Socket TCP (Mode ASCII) Socket TCP (Mode ASCII) Activer, Désactiver Numéro port (mode ASCII) 1024-65535 (59160) 11 Configuration Archange Configuration communication Archange Configuration communication Archange Activer, Désactiver Adresse du serveur SMTP Modifier IPv4 0.0.0.0 (0-255) Modifier IPv6 0: 0: 0: 0: 0: 0: 0: 0 (1 à 39 octets) Nom d'hôte 253 caractères max. combinant symboles et caractères alphanumériques. *7 Numéro de port 1-65535 (25) Adresse exp. (responsable) 127 caractères max. combinant symboles et caractères alphanumériques. Délai connexion dépassé 30, 60, 90, 120, 150, 180, 210, 240, 270, 300 (s) Paramétrage identifications POP avant SMTP POP avant SMTP Activer, Désactiver Paramétrage identifications Activer, Désactiver Tempo POP avant SMTP 0-60 (0) (s) Configuration communication Archange Config. identification SMTP ID utilisateur 255 caractères max. combinant symboles et caractères alphanumériques. Code 128 caractères max. combinant symboles et caractères alphanumériques. domaine-realm 255 caractères max. combinant symboles et caractères alphanumériques. Élément de menu/Description Options de réglage (avec la valeur par défaut en gras) ineo 1052/1250 12-115 12.10 [06 Réglage administrateur] - [04 Configuration réseau] 12 Configuration réception Archange Configuration réception Archange Configuration réception Archange Activer, Désactiver Adresse serveur POP Modifier IPv4 0.0.0.0 (0-255) Modifier IPv6 0: 0: 0: 0: 0: 0: 0: 0 (1 à 39 octets) Changer nom d'hôte 253 caractères max. combinant symboles et caractères alphanumériques. *7 ID utilisateur 63 caractères max. combinant symboles et caractères alphanumériques. Code 15 caractères max. combinant symboles et caractères alphanumériques. Identification APOP Activer, Désactiver Numéro de port 1-65535 (110) Délai d'attente connexion 30, 60, 90, 120, 150, 180, 210, 240, 270, 300 (s) Vérif. réception auto. Activer, Désactiver Intervalle d'interrogation 1-60 (15) (min.) Test de communication Archange Départ Paramétrage http Activer serveur proxy Activer, Désactiver Adresse du serveur proxy Modifier IPv4 0.0.0.0 (0-255) Modifier IPv6 0: 0: 0: 0: 0: 0: 0: 0 (1 à 39 octets) Nom d'hôte : 253 caractères max. combinant symboles et caractères alphanumériques. *7 No. port serveur proxy 1-65535 (8080) Paramètres SSL Activer, Désactiver Activer authentification Activer, Désactiver Nom utilis authentificat 63 caractères max. combinant symboles et caractères alphanumériques. Code d'authentification 63 caractères max. combinant symboles et caractères alphanumériques. 12 Configuration OpenAPI Configuration de l'accès Activer, Désactiver Paramètres SSL SSL/Non SSL, SSL seulement, Non SSL seulement Réglage port Numéro de port 1-65535 (50001) Numéro de port (SSL) 1-65535 (50003) Authentification Authentification Activer, Désactiver ID utilisateur 8 caractères max. combinant symboles et caractères alphanumériques. Code 8 caractères max. combinant symboles et caractères alphanumériques. Certificat client Activer, Désactiver Élément de menu/Description Options de réglage (avec la valeur par défaut en gras) 12 [06 Réglage administrateur] - [04 Configuration réseau] 12-116 ineo 1052/1250 12.10 Réglages Niveau Vérification Certificat Période de validité : Confirmer, Ne pas confirmer Utilisation Touche : Confirmer, Ne pas confirmer Chaîne : Confirmer, Ne pas confirmer Confirmation Date Exp : Confirmer, Ne pas confirmer CN : Confirmer, Ne pas confirmer 13 Configuration service Web Paramètres services Web Friendly Name KMBT + 6 derniers chiffres de l'adresse MAC 62 caractères max. combinant symboles et caractères alphanumériques. Paramètres SSL Activer, Désactiver Régl. impress. Régl. impress. Activer, Désactiver Nom de l'imprimante KMBT + 6 derniers chiffres de l'adresse MAC 63 caractères max. combinant symboles et caractères alphanumériques. Emplacement de l'imprimante 63 caractères max. combinant symboles et caractères alphanumériques. Informations imprimante 63 caractères max. combinant symboles et caractères alphanumériques. Configuration scanner Configuration scanner Activer, Désactiver Nom du scanner KMBT + 6 derniers chiffres de l'adresse MAC 63 caractères max. combinant symboles et caractères alphanumériques. Emplacement Scanner 63 caractères max. combinant symboles et caractères alphanumériques. Information scanner 63 caractères max. combinant symboles et caractères alphanumériques. 14 Configuration JSP Configuration JSP Activer, Désactiver Paramètres SSL Activer, Désactiver Paramétrage identifications Paramétrage identifications Activer, Désactiver ID utilisateur Inconnu 8 caractères max. combinant symboles et caractères alphanumériques. Code modifier 8 caractères max. combinant symboles et caractères alphanumériques. Numéro de port 30081-30090 (30081) Numéro de port (SSL) 30081-30090 (30082) 15 Réglage LDAP Réglage LDAP Réglage LDAP Activer, Désactiver Résult.Max.Recher. 5-100 (100) Dépassement du délai 5-300 (60) (sec.) Élément de menu/Description Options de réglage (avec la valeur par défaut en gras) ineo 1052/1250 12-117 12.10 [06 Réglage administrateur] - [04 Configuration réseau] 12 Réglage Rech. détaillée Nom ET, OU, DÉBUT, FINIT PAR E-mail ET, OU, DÉBUT, FINIT PAR Nom ET, OU, DÉBUT, FINIT PAR Prénom ET, OU, DÉBUT, FINIT PAR Paramétrage Serveur LDAP Adresse du serveur Modifier IPv4 0.0.0.0 (0-255) Modifier IPv6 0: 0: 0: 0: 0: 0: 0: 0 (1 à 39 octets) Changer nom d'hôte 253 caractères max. combinant symboles et caractères alphanumériques. *7 Base de recherche 255 caractères max. combinant symboles et caractères alphanumériques. Paramètres SSL Activer, Désactiver Numéro de port 1-65535 (389) Numéro de port (SSL) 1-65535 (636) Méthode d'authentification Anonyme, Simple, Digest-MD5, GSS-SPNEGO, NTML v1, NTML v2 Méthode Auth. Serveur Valeur de réglage, Authentification dynamique ID utilisateur 255 caractères max. combinant symboles et caractères alphanumériques. Code 128 caractères max. combinant symboles et caractères alphanumériques. Nom de domaine 64 caractères max. combinant symboles et caractères alphanumériques. Réglage recommandé Utilisé, Non utilisé Vérifier la connexion Vérifier la connexion 16 Réglage IEEE802.1x État de l'authentificat. Réglage IEEE802.1x Activer, Désactiver Réglage Supplicant Réglages Niveau Vérification Certificat Période de validité Activer, Désactiver CN Activer, Désactiver Chaîne Confirmer, Ne pas confirmer 17 Réglage détaillé Réglage détaillé Paramètres unité Adresse MAC Vitesse réseau Paramètres auto, 10 Mbps RHalf Duplex, 10 Mbps Full Duplex, 100 Mbps Half Duplex, 100 Mbps Full Duplex Paramètres détaillés/Réglage de l'heure Paramètres NTP Activer, Désactiver Paramètres serveur NTP Adresse serveur NTP Auto Activer, Désactiver Élément de menu/Description Options de réglage (avec la valeur par défaut en gras) 12 [06 Réglage administrateur] - [04 Configuration réseau] 12-118 ineo 1052/1250 12.10 Paramètres serveur NTP Modifier IPv4 0.0.0.0 (0-255) Modifier IPv6 0: 0: 0: 0: 0: 0: 0: 0 (1 à 39 octets) Changer nom d'hôte 253 caractères max. combinant symboles et caractères alphanumériques. *7 Numéro de port 1-65535 (123) Détail/État notification/Alerte E-mail Paramètres alerte e-mail Activer, Désactiver Adresse e-mail destinat. 250 caractères max. combinant symboles et caractères alphanumériques. Éléments Trans Appel SAV, Bourrage, Remettre papier, Ajout toner, Appel SAV, Remettre agrafes, Bac unité finition plein, Corbeilles à vider, Vider corbeille massicot, Ajout pastilles de colle, Remplacer la butée de lame, Fournit. Élément Reliure, Retirer bac déch. agraf., Alimentation en eau Détail/État notification/SNMP Trap Paramètres Trans 1-5 (1) Paramètres Trans Activer, Désactiver Adresse Trans Modifier IPv4 0.0.0.0 (0-255) Modifier IPv6 0: 0: 0: 0: 0: 0: 0: 0 Nom d'hôte 253 caractères max. combinant symboles et caractères alphanumériques. Numéro de port Trans 1-65535 (162) Nom communauté Trans public 15 caractères max. combinant symboles et caractères alphanumériques. Éléments Trans Appel SAV, Bourrage, Remettre papier, Ajout toner, Appel SAV, Remettre agrafes, Bac unité finition plein, Corbeilles à vider, Vider corbeille massicot, Ajout pastilles de colle, Remplacer la butée de lame, Fournit. Élément Reliure, Retirer bac déch. agraf., Alimentation en eau Paramètres Trans Activer, Désactiver Adresse réseau Trans IPX 00: 00: 00: 00 Adresse noeud Trans IPX 00: 00: 00: 00: 00: 00 Nom communauté Trans IPX public 15 caractères max. combinant symboles et caractères alphanumériques. Éléments Trans Appel SAV, Bourrage, Remettre papier, Ajout toner, Appel SAV, Remettre agrafes, Bac unité finition plein, Corbeilles à vider, Vider corbeille massicot, Ajout pastilles de colle, Remplacer la butée de lame, Fournit. Élément Reliure, Retirer bac déch. agraf., Alimentation en eau Élément de menu/Description Options de réglage (avec la valeur par défaut en gras) ineo 1052/1250 12-119 12.10 [06 Réglage administrateur] - [04 Configuration réseau] 12 Confirmation PING Adresse pour envoi PING Modifier IPv4 0.0.0.0 (0-255) Modifier IPv6 0: 0: 0: 0: 0: 0: 0: 0 (1 à 39 octets) Changer nom d'hôte 253 caractères max. combinant symboles et caractères alphanumériques. *7 Vérifier la connexion Départ Paramètres LDP Activer, Désactiver Paramètres SLP Activer, Désactiver Réglage LLTD Activer, Désactiver Réglage SSDP Activer, Désactiver Défin. Vérification Cert Utilisé, Non utilisé Efface paramètres réseau Départ *1 : Sélectionnez [Paramètres auto] pour rendre "DHCP", "BOOTP", "ARP/PING" et "AUTO IP" disponible. Toutefois, le passage de la sélection de [Paramètres auto] à [Saisie manuelle] invalide les réglages effectués pour "DHCP" et "BOOTP". De même, le passage de [Saisie manuelle] à [Paramètres auto] valide les réglages effectués pour "DHCP", "BOOTP", "ARP/PING" et "AUTO IP". *2 : La sélection de [Désactiver] pour "Paramétrage IPv6" désactive cette fonction, même si [Activer] est sélectionné pour "Paramétrage auto IPv6". Dans Web Connection, la zone de liste déroulante de "Paramétrage auto IPv6" s'affiche en grisé pour signaler l'inactivité. *3 : La sélection de [Désactiver] pour "Paramétrage auto IPv6" activer la modification de réglage de "Adresse globale", "Longueur du préfixe" et "Adresse passerelle". *4 : Non disponible pour les plages de fe80: : à febf: ffff: ffff: ffff: ffff: ffff: ffff: ffff, et de ff00: : à ffff: ffff: ffff: ffff: ffff: ffff: ffff: ffff. *5 : XXXX sera calculé à partir de l'adresse MAC. *6 : Non disponible uniquement pour la plage entre fe80: 0: 0: 0: : et fe80: 0: 0: 0: ffff: ffff: ffff: ffff. *7 : Les caractères entre les points devraient comporter 63 caractères max. Utiliser des points pour relier la chaîne de caractères et bâtir l'entrée de 251 (253 Nom d'hôte inclus) caractères. *8 : Dans Web Connection, entrez/supprimez "0" pour activer/désactiver le réglage. *9 : Seule une adresse IP, pas une plage, peut être autorisée/rejetée de trois manières. Par exemple, pour autoriser/rejeter 192.168.11.22 seulement, entrez : 192.168.11.22 - 0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0 - 192.168.11.22 192.168.11.22 - 192.168.11.22 *10 : "Recherche nom Utilisateur" en peut pas être spécifié avec la même entrée que celle pour "Nom utilisateur lecture" ou "Nom utilisateur écriture". *11 : Le mode tunnel n'est pas pris en charge dans le paramètre ESP AH. Élément de menu/Description Options de réglage (avec la valeur par défaut en gras) 12 [06 Réglage administrateur] - [05 Config. Copie/Impression] 12-120 ineo 1052/1250 12.11 12.11 [06 Réglage administrateur] - [05 Config. Copie/Impression] Le tableau ci-dessous décrit les réglages personnalisés pour les tâches de copie et d'impression. Paramètre de réglage Description Options (valeur par défaut en gras) 01 Réglage Décalage 01 Décalage des tâches Configurez la machine pour qu'elle éjecte les feuilles imprimées par numéro de jeu ou par travail individuel. En cas de sélection de Décaler par unité tâche, spécifiez le nombre de jeux pour le décalage. Décaler par numéro de jeu : Activé, Désactivé Décaler par unité tâche : Activé, Désactivé 02 Réglage mode tri décalé Sélectionnez le mode tri décalé. Basculer Position de Sortie : Décale les feuilles imprimées pour chaque tâche. Partition Insertion Papier : insère une feuille de papier après chaque tâche. Sélectionnez un magasin pour insérer des feuilles de partition à ce niveau. Interr. pos. + Insertion Pap : décale les feuilles imprimées pour chaque tâche et insère une feuille de papier après chaque tâche. Sélectionnez un magasin pour insérer des feuilles de partition à ce niveau. Arrêter impress : suspend temporairement l'impression pour chaque tâche. Mode décalage en sortie : Basculer Position de Sortie, Partition Insertion Papier, Interr pos. + Insertion Pap, Arrêter impress Magasin Insertion : Mag 1, Mag 2, Mag 3, Mag 4, Mag 5, Mag 6, Mag 7, Mag 8, MI1, MI2, MI-PFU1, MI-PFU2, MI-PFU3 02 Impression en continu Sélectionnez s'il faut suspendre l'impression pour chaque tâche ou imprimer plusieurs tâches d'impression en réserve à la suite. Activé, Désactivé 03 Numéro de page du livret Sélectionnez s'il faut ou non s'assurer que les numéros de page sont imprimés sur les bords extérieurs de la copie en cas d'utilisation combinée de Livret et de Numérot. pages sous Tampon. Oui (en dehors de page), Désactivé 04 Prérotation rouleaux four Il peut s'avérer nécessaire de régler la chaleur de fixation en fonction du type de papier et du grammage. Dans un tel cas, sélectionnez s'il faut faire tourner les rouleaux du four avant le début de l'impression afin d'imprimer à la température appropriée. Ce qui peut nuire à la performance, mais cela stabilise la qualité de l'image. Avec prérotation, Sans prérotation 05 Réglage échantillon Configurez les réglages du test d'impression. Sélectionnez s'il faut imprimer la mire test prédéfinie dans la machine comme spécimen d'image d'impression ou s'il faut imprimer l'image en cours d'impression. Sélectionnez un magasin papier si vous avez choisi d'imprimer la mire prédéfinie. Spécifiez le cycle d'impression de l'impression test qui sera automatiquement produite. Sélectionnez s'il faut ou non inclure le nombre d'exemplaires d'impression test dans le comptage de la gestion de compte. Impression : Impression mire, Impr. image tâche Sélection magasin papier : Mag 1, Mag 2, Mag 3, Mag 4, Mag 5, Mag 6, Mag 7, Mag 8 Cycle Impression : Activé, Désactivé Réglages Cycle : Cycle impr. feuille, Cycle impr. jeu Param. comptes département : Activé, Désactivé ineo 1052/1250 12-121 12.11 [06 Réglage administrateur] - [05 Config. Copie/Impression] 12 06 Valid. épreuve(1ère feuille) Utilisez cette fonction pour autoriser la machine à n'imprimer que la première feuille de l'impression test au lieu du jeu complet. Réglez la machine pour afficher la touche [Épreuve (1ère page] en plus de la touche [Épreuve] sur l'écran de contrôle. Vous pouvez aussi régler la machine pour qu'elle n'imprime que la première feuille quand Épreuve est actionné sur le panneau de contrôle. Épreuve (1ère feuille) : Activé, Désactivé Sélection 1 jeu/1ère feuil. Appui sur touche [Épreuve] : Activé, Désactivé 07 Affich. Identificat. Bourrage Spécifiez s'il faut ou non afficher un message pour avertir l'utilisateur en cas de bourrage si [Détecter] est sélectionné sous [Réglage administrateur] - [Configuration système] - [Réglages expert] - [Régl. Bourr. Dét. Err. Centr]. Activé, Désactivé 08 Rotation Spécifiez quand il faut activer la fonction Rotation auto image. Toujours activé, Oui - APS/AMS seulement, Oui - APS/AMS/Réduction 09 Interruption de cycle Spécifiez quand arrêter la tâche d'impression en cours en cas de pression sur Interruption sur le panneau de contrôle. À la fin du jeu en cours, Immédiate 10 Sélection fonction réserve Sélectionnez s'il faut afficher ou non l'écran Copie quand l'original a été mis en place et que la machine affiche l'écran Machine et qu'elle est prête pour réserver des tâches. Programmation, Insertion de l'original 11 Arrêt numér. magasin ouvert Sélectionnez s'il faut ou non stopper la numérisation de l'original placé dans le chargeur Auto quand le magasin est retiré. Activé, Désactivé 12 Copie en continu Sélectionnez s'il faut ou non suspendre l'opération d'impression lors d'une pause et que l'impression successive de plusieurs tâches réservées est en cours. Activé, Désactivé 13 Sortie original semi-auto Sélectionnez s'il faut imprimer les feuilles copiées face imprimée vers le haut ou vers le bas lors de la numérisation d'une seule feuille d'original placée sur la vitre d'exposition. Recto vers haut, Recto vers bas 14 Mode semi-auto chargeur Sélectionnez s'il faut lancer la numérisation quand l'original est placé dans le chargeur Auto et que Départ est actionné sur le panneau de contrôle ou s'il faut commencer à numériser lorsque le mode Numérisation séparée est sélectionné et que l'original est en position, quand le mode semi-auto est sélectionné. Activé, Désactivé Paramètre de réglage Description Options (valeur par défaut en gras) 12 [06 Réglage administrateur] - [05 Config. Copie/Impression] 12-122 ineo 1052/1250 12.11 12.11.1 [01 Réglage Décalage] - [01 Décalage des tâches] REMARQUE Les deux Décaler par numéro de jeu et Décaler par unité tâche peuvent être activés. 1 Suivez la procédure à la page 12-3 pour afficher l'écran du menu Réglage administrateur. 2 Appuyez successivement sur [05 Config. Copie/Impression], [01 Réglage Décalage] et sur [01 Décalage des tâches]. L'écran Décalage des tâches va s'afficher. 3 Sélectionnez [Activé] ou [Désactivé] sous "Décaler par numéro de jeu". 4 Sélectionnez [Activé] ou [Désactivé] sous "Décaler par unité tâche". Quand [Activé] est sélectionné, un clavier s'affiche pour entrer le nom de jeux de décalage. 5 Spécifiez le nombre de jeux de décalage sur le clavier de l'écran ou sur le clavier du panneau de contrôle. Plage disponible entre 0 et 9 999. 6 Appuyez sur [OK] pour valider le réglage. % Pour annuler la modification, appuyez sur [Annuler]. L'écran du menu Réglage Décalage va réapparaître. Élément Description Décaler par numéro de jeu Réglez la machine pour qu'elle décale les feux imprimés par numéro de jeu. Décaler par unité tâche Réglez la machine pour qu'elle décale les jeux imprimés par unité de tâche. En cas de sélection de Décaler par unité tâche, spécifiez le nombre de jeux pour le décalage. ineo 1052/1250 12-123 12.11 [06 Réglage administrateur] - [05 Config. Copie/Impression] 12 12.11.2 [01 Réglage Décalage] - [02 Réglage mode tri décalé] Il existe trois modes de décalage de l'impression et d'arrêt temporaire de l'opération d'impression pour chaque tâche. Sélectionnez l'un de ces modes. Vous ne pouvez pas sélectionner plus d'un mode. 1 Suivez la procédure à la page 12-3 pour afficher l'écran du menu Réglage administrateur. 2 Appuyez successivement sur [05 Config. Copie/Impression], [01 Réglage Décalage] et sur [02 Réglage mode tri décalé]. L'écran Réglage mode tri décalé va s'afficher. 3 Sélectionnez l'une des touches de "Réglage mode tri décalé". % Si vous avez sélectionné [Partition Insertion Papier] ou [Interr pos. + Insertion Pap], vous devez sélectionner une des touches de magasin sous "Magasin Insertion". 4 Appuyez sur [OK] pour valider le réglage. % Pour annuler la modification, appuyez sur [Annuler]. L'écran du menu Réglage Décalage va réapparaître. Élément Description Basculer Position de Sortie Décale les feuilles imprimées pour chaque tâche. Partition Insertion Papier insère une feuille de papier après chaque tâche. Sélectionnez un magasin pour insérer des feuilles de partition à ce niveau. Interr pos. + Insertion Pap décale les feuilles imprimées pour chaque tâche et insère une feuille de papier après chaque tâche. Sélectionnez un magasin pour insérer des feuilles de partition à ce niveau. Arrêter impress suspend temporairement l'impression pour chaque tâche. 12 [06 Réglage administrateur] - [05 Config. Copie/Impression] 12-124 ineo 1052/1250 12.11 12.11.3 [02 Impression en continu] Sélectionnez s'il faut suspendre l'impression pour chaque tâche ou imprimer plusieurs tâches d'impression en réserve à la suite. 1 Suivez la procédure à la page 12-3 pour afficher l'écran du menu Réglage administrateur. 2 Appuyez successivement sur [05 Config. Copie/Impression] et [02 Impression en continu]. L'écran Impression en continu va s'afficher. 3 Sélectionnez [Activé] ou [Désactivé]. 4 Appuyez sur [OK] pour valider le réglage. % Pour annuler la modification, appuyez sur [Annuler]. L'écran du menu Configuration Copie/Impression s'affiche à nouveau. 12.11.4 [03 Numéro de page du livret] Sélectionnez s'il faut ou non s'assurer que les numéros de page sont imprimés sur les bords extérieurs de la copie en cas d'utilisation combinée de Livret et de Numérot. pages sous Tampon. 1 Suivez la procédure à la page 12-3 pour afficher l'écran du menu Réglage administrateur. 2 Appuyez successivement sur [05 Config. Copie/Impression] et [03 Numéro de page du livret]. L'écran N° de page du livret à l'extérieur va s'afficher. 3 Sélectionnez [OUI (en dehors de page)] ou [Désactivé]. 4 Appuyez sur [OK] pour valider le réglage. % Pour annuler la modification, appuyez sur [Annuler]. L'écran du menu Configuration Copie/Impression s'affiche à nouveau. ineo 1052/1250 12-125 12.11 [06 Réglage administrateur] - [05 Config. Copie/Impression] 12 12.11.5 [04 Prérotation rouleaux four] Il peut s'avérer nécessaire de régler la chaleur de fixation en fonction du type de papier et du grammage. Dans un tel cas, sélectionnez s'il faut faire tourner les rouleaux du four avant le début de l'impression afin d'imprimer à la température appropriée. En cas de sélection de Avec prérotation, la performance risque d'en pâtir, mais la qualité de l'image sera stabilisée. 1 Suivez la procédure à la page 12-3 pour afficher l'écran du menu Réglage administrateur. 2 Appuyez successivement sur [05 Config. Copie/Impression] et [04 Prérotation rouleaux four]. L'écran Prérotation rouleaux four va s'afficher. 3 Appuyez sur [Avec prérotation] ou [Sans prérotation]. 4 Appuyez sur [OK] pour valider le réglage. % Pour annuler la modification, appuyez sur [Annuler]. L'écran du menu Configuration Copie/Impression s'affiche à nouveau. 12.11.6 [05 Réglage échantillon] Élément Description Impression Sélectionnez l'image d'impression test. En cas de sélection de [Impression mire], l'image pré-enregistrée dans la machine sera imprimée comme échantillon. En cas de sélection de [Impr. image tâche], c'est l'image de la tâche actuelle qui sera imprimée comme échantillon. Sélection magasin papier Sélectionnez un magasin d'alimentation pour le papier sur lequel l'impression test sera imprimée quand [Impression mire] est sélectionné comme mode d'impression. Cycle Impression Quand [Cycle Impression] est activé, les échantillons seront automatiquement imprimés. Sélectionnez s'il faut régler [Cycle Impression] sur [Activé] ou [Désactivé]. Réglages Cycle Avec "Cycle Impression" est réglé sur [Activé], sélectionnez [Cycle impr. feuille] pour imprimer un échantillon après qu'un nombre défini de feuilles est imprimé ou [Cycle impr. jeu] pour imprimer un échantillon après l'impression d'un nombre de jeux défini. La sélection de [Cycle a : feuille] de [Cycle impr. feuille] vous permet de spécifier le nombre de feuilles dans un cycle entre 1 et 9999. Le nombre spécifié sera annulé si l'interrupteur secondaire est coupé, Réinit Auto est activé ou si la machine est réinitialisée manuellement. Quand [Cycle impr. jeu] est sélectionné, appuyez sur [b : Intervalle de jeu] pour spécifier le nombre de jeux. Une page d'échantillon sera imprimée en tant que première page du nombre de jeux défini. Plage disponible entre 1 et 9999. Quand [Cycle impr. jeu] est sélectionné, appuyez sur [c : Nombre feuilles] pour spécifier le numéro de page. Une page d'échantillon sera imprimée pour la page spécifiée de chaque jeu. Plage disponible entre 1 et 9999. Param. comptes département Sélectionnez s'il faut ou non inclure le nombre d'impressions test imprimées. Si vous choisissez de compter les impressions test, elles seront incluses dans le décompte du compte. 12 [06 Réglage administrateur] - [05 Config. Copie/Impression] 12-126 ineo 1052/1250 12.11 REMARQUE Il faut configurer un magasin secondaire sur l'Unité de finition FS-532 pour imprimer un échantillon. Contactez votre technicien SAV si nécessaire. 1 Suivez la procédure à la page 12-3 pour afficher l'écran du menu Réglage administrateur. 2 Appuyez successivement sur [05 Config. Copie/Impression] et [05 Réglage échantillon]. L'écran Configuration test impression va s'afficher. 3 Sélectionnez [Impression mire] ou [Impr. image tâche] à la droite de "Impression". 4 En cas de sélection de [Impression mire], sélectionnez une des touches sous "Sélection magasin papier". REMARQUE Si vous sélectionnez un magasin non installé, aucun échantillon ne sera imprimé. Même si le format du papier utilisé pour l'impression diffère de celui chargé dans le magasin papier spécifié, un échantillon sera imprimé sans problèmes. 5 Sélectionnez [Activé] ou [Désactivé] à la droite de "Cycle Impression". 6 Si vous avez sélectionné [Activé], appuyez sur [Réglages Cycle]. L'écran Réglage cycle Impression va s'afficher. 7 Sélectionnez soit [Cycle impr. feuille] ou [Cycle impr. jeu]. % En cas de sélection de [Cycle impr. feuille], entrez le cycle des feuilles sur le clavier de l'écran. Plage disponible entre 1 et 9999. % En cas de sélection de [Cycle impr. jeu], choisissez soit [b : Intervalle de jeu] ou [c : Nombre feuilles]. Avec [b : Intervalle de jeu], spécifiez le nombre de jeux. Une page d'échantillon sera imprimée en tant que première page du nombre de jeux défini. Plage disponible entre 1 et 9999. Avec [c : Nombre feuilles], spécifiez le numéro de page. Une page d'échantillon sera imprimée pour la page spécifiée de chaque jeu. Plage disponible entre 1 et 9999. % Appuyez sur [OK] pour valider le réglage. Pour annuler la modification, appuyez sur [Annuler]. L'écran Configuration test impression va réapparaître. ineo 1052/1250 12-127 12.11 [06 Réglage administrateur] - [05 Config. Copie/Impression] 12 8 Sélectionnez [Activé] ou [Désactivé] à la droite de "Param. comptes département". 9 Appuyez sur [OK] pour valider le réglage. % Pour annuler la modification, appuyez sur [Annuler]. L'écran du menu Configuration Copie/Impression s'affiche à nouveau. 12.11.7 [06 Valid. épreuve(1ère feuille)] Utilisez cette fonction pour autoriser la machine à n'imprimer que la première feuille de l'impression test au lieu du jeu complet. Réglez la machine pour afficher la touche [Épreuve (1ère page] en plus de la touche [Épreuve] sur l'écran de contrôle. Vous pouvez aussi régler la machine pour qu'elle n'imprime que la première feuille quand Épreuve est actionné sur le panneau de contrôle. 1 Suivez la procédure à la page 12-3 pour afficher l'écran du menu Réglage administrateur. 2 Appuyez successivement sur [05 Config. Copie/Impression] et [06 Valid. épreuve(1ère feuille)]. L'écran Réglage Épreuve (1ère feuille) va s'afficher. 3 Sélectionnez [Activé] ou [Désactivé] sous "Épreuve (1re feuille)". % En cas de sélection de [Activé], la touche [Épreuve (1ère feuille)] apparaîtra sur l'écran de contrôle. 4 Sélectionnez [Activé] ou [Désactivé] sous "1er jeu/1re feuil. Appui sur touche [Epreuve]." % Sélectionnez [Activé] pour n'imprimer que la première feuille quand Épreuve est actionné sur le panneau de contrôle. 5 Appuyez sur [OK] pour valider le réglage. % Pour annuler la modification, appuyez sur [Annuler]. L'écran du menu Configuration Copie/Impression s'affiche à nouveau. 12 [06 Réglage administrateur] - [05 Config. Copie/Impression] 12-128 ineo 1052/1250 12.11 12.11.8 [07 Affich. Identificat. Bourrage] Spécifiez s'il faut ou non afficher un message pour avertir l'utilisateur en cas de bourrage si [Détecter] est sélectionné sous [06 Réglage administrateur] - [01 Configuration système] - [06 Réglages expert] - [03 Régl. Bourr. Dét. Err. Centr]. 1 Suivez la procédure à la page 12-3 pour afficher l'écran du menu Réglage administrateur. 2 Appuyez successivement sur [05 Config. Copie/Impression] et [07 Affich. Identificat. Bourrage]. L'écran Régl. Affich. Identificat. Bourrage va s'afficher. 3 Sélectionnez [Activé] ou [Désactivé]. 4 Appuyez sur [OK] pour valider le réglage. % Pour annuler la modification, appuyez sur [Annuler]. L'écran du menu Configuration Copie/Impression s'affiche à nouveau. 12.11.9 [08 Rotation] Spécifiez quand il faut activer la fonction Rotation auto image. Élément Description Toujours activé La fonction sera activée sans conditions. Oui - APS/AMS seulement La fonction ne sera activée que si PapierAuto (APS) ou Restitution Auto (AMS) est activé. Oui - APS/AMS/Réduction La fonction ne sera activée que si PapierAuto (APS), Restitution Auto (AMS) ou Taux de réduction est activé. ineo 1052/1250 12-129 12.11 [06 Réglage administrateur] - [05 Config. Copie/Impression] 12 1 Suivez la procédure à la page 12-3 pour afficher l'écran du menu Réglage administrateur. 2 Appuyez successivement sur [05 Config. Copie/Impression] et [08 Rotation]. L'écran Rotation automatique image va s'afficher. 3 Sélectionnez une des options suivantes : [Toujours activé], [Oui - APS/AMS seulement] ou [Oui - APS/AMS/Réduction]. 4 Appuyez sur [OK] pour valider le réglage. % Pour annuler la modification, appuyez sur [Annuler]. L'écran du menu Configuration Copie/Impression s'affiche à nouveau. 12.11.10 [09 Interruption de cycle] Spécifiez quand arrêter la tâche d'impression en cours en cas de pression sur Interruption sur le panneau de contrôle. 1 Suivez la procédure à la page 12-3 pour afficher l'écran du menu Réglage administrateur. 2 Appuyez successivement sur [05 Config. Copie/Impression] et [09 Interruption de cycle]. L'écran Interruption de cycle va s'afficher. 3 Appuyez sur [À la fin du jeu en cours] ou [Immédiate]. 4 Appuyez sur [OK] pour valider le réglage. % Pour annuler la modification, appuyez sur [Annuler]. L'écran du menu Configuration Copie/Impression s'affiche à nouveau. Élément Description À la fin du jeu en cours La machine attend jusqu'à ce que la quantité d'impression spécifiée pour la tâche actuelle soit imprimée et s'arrête. Immédiate La machine s'arrête d'imprimer sans attendre que la quantité d'impression spécifiée pour la tâche actuelle ne soit imprimée. 12 [06 Réglage administrateur] - [05 Config. Copie/Impression] 12-130 ineo 1052/1250 12.11 12.11.11 [10 Sélection fonction réserve] Sélectionnez s'il faut afficher ou non l'écran Copie quand l'original a été mis en place et que la machine affiche l'écran Machine et qu'elle est prête pour réserver des tâches. 1 Suivez la procédure à la page 12-3 pour afficher l'écran du menu Réglage administrateur. 2 Appuyez successivement sur [05 Config. Copie/Impression] et [10 Sélection fonction réserve]. L'écran Sélection fonction réserve va s'afficher. 3 Appuyez sur [Programmation] ou [Insertion de l'original]. 4 Appuyez sur [OK] pour valider le réglage. % Pour annuler la modification, appuyez sur [Annuler]. L'écran du menu Configuration Copie/Impression s'affiche à nouveau. 12.11.12 [11 Arrêt numér. magasin ouvert] Sélectionnez s'il faut ou non arrêter la numérisation de l'original placé dans le chargeur Auto quand un magasin non utilisé est sorti. En cas de sélection de [Activé], la machine s'arrête de numériser l'original placé dans le chargeur Auto quand un magasin non utilisé est sorti. Élément Description Programmation Affiche l'écran Copie en cas de pression sur l'onglet [COPIER] alors que la machine affiche l'écran Machine et qu'elle est prête pour réserver des tâches. Insertion de l'original Affiche l'écran Copie quand un original est placé sur la vitre d'exposition ou dans le chargeur Auto alors que la machine affiche l'écran Machine et qu'elle est prête pour réserver des tâches. ineo 1052/1250 12-131 12.11 [06 Réglage administrateur] - [05 Config. Copie/Impression] 12 1 Suivez la procédure à la page 12-3 pour afficher l'écran du menu Réglage administrateur. 2 Appuyez successivement sur [05 Config. Copie/Impression] et [11 Arrêt numér. magasin ouvert]. L'écran Arrêt numérisation si magasin ouvert va s'afficher. 3 Appuyez sur [Activé] ou [Désactivé]. 4 Appuyez sur [OK] pour valider le réglage. % Pour annuler la modification, appuyez sur [Annuler]. L'écran du menu Configuration Copie/Impression s'affiche à nouveau. 12.11.13 [12 Copie en continu] Sélectionnez s'il faut ou non suspendre l'opération d'impression lors d'une pause et que l'impression successive de plusieurs tâches réservées est en cours. En cas de sélection de [Activé], la machine suspend l'opération d'impression lors d'une pause en cas d'impression successive de plusieurs tâches réservées. 1 Suivez la procédure à la page 12-3 pour afficher l'écran du menu Réglage administrateur. 2 Appuyez successivement sur [05 Config. Copie/Impression] et [12 Copie en continu]. L'écran Copie en continu va s'afficher. 3 Appuyez sur [Activé] ou [Désactivé]. 4 Appuyez sur [OK] pour valider le réglage. % Pour annuler la modification, appuyez sur [Annuler]. L'écran du menu Configuration Copie/Impression s'affiche à nouveau. 12 [06 Réglage administrateur] - [05 Config. Copie/Impression] 12-132 ineo 1052/1250 12.11 12.11.14 [13 Sortie original semi-auto] Sélectionnez s'il faut imprimer les feuilles copiées face imprimée vers le haut ou vers le bas lors de la numérisation d'une seule feuille d'original placée sur la vitre d'exposition. 1 Suivez la procédure à la page 12-3 pour afficher l'écran du menu Réglage administrateur. 2 Appuyez successivement sur [05 Config. Copie/Impression] et [13 Sortie original semi-auto]. L'écran Sortie original semi-auto va s'afficher. 3 Appuyez sur [Recto vers haut] ou [Recto vers bas]. 4 Appuyez sur [OK] pour valider le réglage. % Pour annuler la modification, appuyez sur [Annuler]. L'écran du menu Configuration Copie/Impression s'affiche à nouveau. Élément Description Recto vers haut Éjecte les feuilles copiées face imprimée vers le haut. Recto vers bas Éjecte les feuilles copiées face imprimée vers le bas. ineo 1052/1250 12-133 12.11 [06 Réglage administrateur] - [05 Config. Copie/Impression] 12 12.11.15 [14 Mode semi-auto chargeur] Sélectionnez s'il faut lancer la numérisation quand l'original est placé dans le chargeur Auto et que Départ est actionné sur le panneau de contrôle ou s'il faut commencer à numériser lorsque le mode Numérisation séparée est sélectionné et que l'original est en position, quand le mode semi-auto est sélectionné. En cas de sélection de [Activé], la machine commence à numériser quand le mode Numérisation séparée est sélectionné et que l'original est en position. 1 Suivez la procédure à la page 12-3 pour afficher l'écran du menu Réglage administrateur. 2 Appuyez successivement sur [05 Config. Copie/Impression] et [14 Mode semi-auto chargeur]. L'écran Mode semi-auto chargeur va s'afficher. 3 Appuyez sur [Activé] ou [Désactivé]. 4 Appuyez sur [OK] pour valider le réglage. % Pour annuler la modification, appuyez sur [Annuler]. L'écran du menu Configuration Copie/Impression s'affiche à nouveau. 12 [06 Réglage administrateur] - [06 Appel Archange] 12-134 ineo 1052/1250 12.12 12.12 [06 Réglage administrateur] - [06 Appel Archange] 12.12.1 [01 Administrateur] Utilisez cette fonction pour appeler votre technicien SAV en cas d'entretien. Votre technicien SAV surveille l'état de la machine en fonction de vos besoins. Les informations surveillées seront utiles pour l'entretien. REMARQUE Ce service chargé de surveiller l'état de la machine s'appelle CS Remote Care. CS Remote Care nécessite un paramètre de service. Le recours à ce service active [Départ] sur l'écran Administrateur. Contactez votre technicien SAV si nécessaire. REMARQUE Si CS Remote Care est activé sur la machine, le réglage ERP sera indisponible. Voir page 12-51 pour plus de détails. 1 Suivez la procédure à la page 12-3 pour afficher l'écran du menu Réglage administrateur. 2 Appuyez successivement sur [06 Appel Archange] et [01 Administrateur]. L'écran Administrateur s'affiche. 3 Appuyez sur [Départ]. 4 Appuyez sur [Retour]. L'écran Appel Archange réapparaît. ineo 1052/1250 12-135 12.13 [06 Réglage administrateur] - [07 Configuration sécurité] 12 12.13 [06 Réglage administrateur] - [07 Configuration sécurité] 12.13.1 [01 Code authentification admin.] Modifiez le code d'authentification de l'administrateur. 1 Suivez la procédure à la page 12-3 pour afficher l'écran du menu Réglage administrateur. 2 Appuyez successivement sur [07 Configuration sécurité] et [01 Code authentification admin.]. L'écran Code authentification admin. va s'afficher. 3 Appuyez sur [Code actuel] pour entrer le code en vigueur, et appuyez sur [OK]. 4 Appuyez sur [Nouveau code] pour entrer votre nouveau code, et appuyez sur [OK]. % Le code de l'administrateur comporte 8 caractères alphanumériques. 5 Appuyez sur [Confirmation] pour entrer une fois encore votre nouveau code, et appuyez sur [OK]. 6 Appuyez sur [OK] pour valider le réglage. % Pour annuler la modification, appuyez sur [Annuler]. Dans l'un ou l'autre cas, le menu Configuration sécurité réapparaît. REMARQUE La touche [01 Code authentification admin.] sera disponible si un code d'authentification de l'administrateur est spécifié par le technicien SAV. 12.13.2 [02 Gestion disque dur] - [01 Gestion dossiers et boîtes] L'utilisateur peut créer un dossier ou une boîte pour l'enregistrement des images dans un dossier personnel, public ou sécurisé. L'administrateur peut consulter le nom, le code d'authentification, le numéro ou la date de création du dossier ou de la boîte créé(e) par l'utilisateur. Par railleurs, l'administrateur peut, si nécessaire, supprimer le dossier ou la boîte. 12 [06 Réglage administrateur] - [07 Configuration sécurité] 12-136 ineo 1052/1250 12.13 1 Suivez la procédure à la page 12-3 pour afficher l'écran du menu Réglage administrateur. 2 Appuyez successivement sur [07 Configuration sécurité] sur l'écran du menu Réglage administrateur, puis sur [02 Gestion disque dur] et sur [01 Gestion dossiers et boîtes]. L'écran Gestion dossiers et boîtes va s'afficher. 3 Sélectionnez un dossier pour en voir les détails ou pour le supprimer. % Appuyez sur [Dossier privé], [Dossier public] ou sur [Dossier sécurisé] pour sélectionner le type de dossier contenant le dossier/la boîte à sélectionner. % Sélectionnez la touche de dossier souhaitée. % Si vous devez sélectionner les informations d'une boîte, appuyez sur la touche du dossier contenant la boîte à consulter, puis appuyez sur [Vers boîte util.]. Appuyez sur la touche de boîte souhaitée. % Quand le dossier ou la boîte à afficher ne s'affiche pas, appuyez sur [+] ou [,] à droite pour faire défiler les sélections. Le nom du dossier ou de la boîte ne s'affiche que sur l'écran de sélection des boîtes. ineo 1052/1250 12-137 12.13 [06 Réglage administrateur] - [07 Configuration sécurité] 12 4 Appuyez sur [Détails] pour afficher les informations détaillées. Les détails vont être affichés. 5 Appuyez sur [Supprimer] pour supprimer un dossier ou une boîte. Un dialogue de confirmation apparaît. % Appuyez sur [Oui]. Appuyez sur [Non] pour annuler la suppression. 6 Appuyez sur [Retour]. L'écran Gestion du disque dur s'affiche à nouveau. 12.13.3 [02 Gestion disque dur] - [02 Fréquence supp. données D.D.] Spécifiez le délai après expiration duquel les données archivées sur le disque dur seront automatiquement supprimées. Le réglage par défaut est [Pas de suppression auto]. Options : [Pas de suppression auto], [Toutes les 12 heures], [Tous les jours], [Tous les 2 jours], [Tous les 3 jours], [Tous les 7 jours], [Tous les 30 jours] 1 Suivez la procédure à la page 12-3 pour afficher l'écran du menu Réglage administrateur. 2 Appuyez successivement sur [07 Configuration sécurité] sur l'écran du menu Réglage administrateur, puis sur [02 Gestion disque dur] et [02 Fréquence supp. données D.D.]. L'écran Fréquence suppr. auto des données disque dur va s'afficher. 3 Sélectionnez la touche désirée. % Si [Pas de suppression auto] est sélectionné, les données du disque dur ne seront pas supprimées. 4 Appuyez sur [OK] pour valider le réglage. % Pour annuler la modification, appuyez sur [Annuler]. Dans l'un ou l'autre cas, l'écran Gestion disque dur réapparaît. 12 [06 Réglage administrateur] - [07 Configuration sécurité] 12-138 ineo 1052/1250 12.13 12.13.4 [02 Gestion disque dur] - [03 Code verrouillage DD] Modifiez le code de protection du disque dur. REMARQUE Il est impossible de modifier le code de protection du disque dur si la fonction Sécurité renforcée n'est pas activée. Entrez 8 caractères alphanumériques pour le code de verrouillage du disque dur. 1 Suivez la procédure à la page 12-3 pour afficher l'écran du menu Réglage administrateur. 2 Appuyez successivement sur [07 Configuration sécurité] sur l'écran du menu Réglage administrateur, puis sur [02 Gestion disque dur] et [03 Code verrouillage DD]. L'écran Code verrouillage DD s'affiche. 3 Appuyez sur [Code actuel] pour entrer le code en vigueur, et appuyez sur [OK]. 4 Appuyez sur [Nouveau code] pour entrer votre nouveau code, et appuyez sur [OK]. % Entrez 8 caractères alphanumériques pour le code de verrouillage du disque dur. 5 Appuyez sur [Confirmation] pour entrer une fois encore votre nouveau code, et appuyez sur [OK]. 6 Appuyez sur [OK] pour valider le réglage. % Pour annuler la modification, appuyez sur [Annuler]. Dans l'un ou l'autre cas, l'écran Gestion disque dur réapparaît. 12.13.5 [02 Gestion disque dur] - [04 Suppr. données temporaires] Spécifiez s'il faut ou non supprimer les données d'image en les écrasant de manière temporaire. Sélectionnez aussi le mode d'effacement à utiliser pour écraser les données. ineo 1052/1250 12-139 12.13 [06 Réglage administrateur] - [07 Configuration sécurité] 12 1 Suivez la procédure à la page 12-3 pour afficher l'écran du menu Réglage administrateur. 2 Appuyez successivement sur [07 Configuration sécurité] sur l'écran du menu Réglage administrateur, puis sur [02 Gestion disque dur] et [04 Suppr. données temporaires]. L'écran Paramétrage suppression données tempo. s'affiche. 3 Sélectionnez [Activé] ou [Désactivé] à la droite de "Commutateur réglage". % Si [Activé] est sélectionné, sélectionnez [Mode 1] ou [Mode 2] à droite de "Mode d'effacement". 4 Appuyez sur [OK] pour valider le réglage. % Pour annuler la modification, appuyez sur [Annuler]. Dans l'un ou l'autre cas, l'écran Gestion disque dur réapparaît. 12.13.6 [02 Gestion disque dur] - [05 Suppression toutes données] Utilisez cette fonction pour supprimer toutes les données sur le DD, et sélectionner le mode d'effacement voulu. Symptôme Description Mode 1 Écrase avec 0x00 Mode 2 Écrase avec 0x00 -> Écrase avec 0xff -> Écrase avec un seul chiffre aléatoire -> Vérification Symptôme Description Mode 1 Écrase avec 0x00 Mode 2 Écrase avec un seul chiffre aléatoire -> Écrase avec un seul chiffre aléatoire -> Écrase avec 0x00 Mode 3 Écrase avec 0x00 -> Écrase avec 0xff -> Écrase avec un seul chiffre aléatoire -> Vérification Mode 4 Écrase avec un seul chiffre aléatoire -> Écrase avec 0x00 -> Écrase avec 0xff Mode 5 Écrase avec 0x00 -> Écrase avec 0xff -> Écrase avec 0x00 -> Écrase avec 0xff Mode 6 Écrase avec 0x00 -> Écrase avec 0xff -> Écrase avec 0x00 -> Écrase avec 0xff -> Écrase avec 0x00 -> Écrase avec 0xff -> Écrase avec des chiffres aléatoires Mode 7 Écrase avec 0x00 -> Écrase avec 0xff -> Écrase avec 0x00 -> Écrase avec 0xff -> Écrase avec 0x00 -> Écrase avec 0xff -> Écrase avec 0xaa Mode 8 Écrase avec 0x00 -> Écrase avec 0xff -> Écrase avec 0x00 -> Écrase avec 0xff -> Écrase avec 0x00 -> Écrase avec 0xff -> Écrase avec 0xaa -> Vérification 12 [06 Réglage administrateur] - [07 Configuration sécurité] 12-140 ineo 1052/1250 12.13 1 Suivez la procédure à la page 12-3 pour afficher l'écran du menu Réglage administrateur. 2 Appuyez successivement sur [07 Configuration sécurité] sur l'écran du menu Réglage administrateur, puis sur [02 Gestion disque dur] et [05 Suppression toutes données]. L'écran Suppression toutes données s'affiche. 3 Sélectionnez le mode d'effacement souhaité de [Mode 1] à [Mode 8]. 4 Appuyez sur [Exécuter Suppression]. 5 Appuyez sur [Retour]. L'écran Gestion du disque dur s'affiche à nouveau. 12.13.7 [02 Gestion disque dur] - [06 Config. cryptogramme D.D.] Spécifiez s'il faut ou non crypter les données du disque dur. 1 Suivez la procédure à la page 12-3 pour afficher l'écran du menu Réglage administrateur. 2 Appuyez successivement sur [07 Configuration sécurité] sur l'écran du menu Réglage administrateur, puis sur [02 Gestion disque dur] et [06 Config. cryptogramme D.D]. L'écran Configuration cryptogramme disque dur va s'afficher. 3 Sélectionnez [Activé] ou [Désactivé]. 4 Appuyez sur [OK] pour valider le réglage. % Pour annuler la modification, appuyez sur [Annuler]. Dans l'un ou l'autre cas, l'écran Gestion disque dur réapparaît. ineo 1052/1250 12-141 12.13 [06 Réglage administrateur] - [07 Configuration sécurité] 12 12.13.8 [03 Sécurité renforcée] Spécifiez s'il faut ou non utiliser le mode Sécurité renforcée. REMARQUE Pour activer le mode Sécurité renforcée, il faut qu'un ingénieur SAV configure un code d'authentification CE et un code d'authentification administrateur sur la machine. 1 Suivez la procédure à la page 12-3 pour afficher l'écran du menu Réglage administrateur. 2 Appuyez successivement sur [07 Configuration sécurité] et [03 Sécurité renforcée]. L'écran Sécurité renforcée s'affiche. 3 Sélectionnez [Activé] pour activer le mode Sécurité renforcée, ou sélectionnez [Désactivé] pour le désactiver, et appuyez sur [OK]. Un dialogue de confirmation apparaît. 4 Appuyez sur [Activé] pour valider le réglage. La machine sera automatiquement mise hors tension puis remise sous tension. % Pour annuler le réglage, appuyez sur [Non], puis appuyez sur [Annuler] en bas à droite de l'écran pour retourner à l'écran du menu Réglage administrateur. 12 [06 Réglage administrateur] - [08 Enregistrement adresse] 12-142 ineo 1052/1250 12.14 12.14 [06 Réglage administrateur] - [08 Enregistrement adresse] 12.14.1 [01 Modif/Suppr adresse exp.] Modifiez ou supprimez l'adresse de numérisation enregistrée. Voici les types d'adresse de numérisation disponibles : - E-mail - DD - FTP - SMB - Groupe ineo 1052/1250 12-143 12.14 [06 Réglage administrateur] - [08 Enregistrement adresse] 12 1 Suivez la procédure à la page 12-3 pour afficher l'écran du menu Réglage administrateur. 2 Appuyez successivement sur [08 Enregistrement adresse] et [01 Modif/Suppr adresse exp.]. L'écran Modifier/Supprimer destination numérisation va s'afficher. 3 Sélectionnez le type d'adresse à modifier ou à supprimer. 4 Modifier ou supprimer une adresse e-mail. % Appuyez sur [E-mail]. % Utilisez la touche de recherche, [+], ou [,] pour afficher la touche du nom de l'adresse. % Sélectionnez la touche de nom souhaitée. % Pour changer l'adresse, appuyez sur [Modification] pour afficher l'écran des détails de l'e-mail. % Sélectionnez l'élément à changer parmi les touches [Adresse], [Nom] et [Nom recherche], puis procédez au changement sur l'écran de saisie. De même, sélectionnez [Activé] ou [Désactivé] sous Favori. Appuyez sur [OK]. % Appuyez sur [Supprimer] pour supprimer l'adresse. Appuyez sur [Oui] sur l'écran instantané de confirmation. Pour annuler la suppression, appuyez sur [Non]. 5 Modifier ou supprimer une adresse de disque dur. % Appuyez sur [DD]. % Utilisez la touche de recherche, [+], ou [,] pour afficher la touche du nom de l'adresse. % Sélectionnez la touche de nom souhaitée. % Pour changer l'adresse, appuyez sur [Modification] pour afficher l'écran des détails du disque dur. % Sélectionnez l'élément à changer parmi les touches [Nom], [Nom recherche] et [Code], puis procédez au changement sur l'écran de saisie. De même, sélectionnez [Activé] ou [Désactivé] sous Favori. Appuyez sur [OK]. % Appuyez sur [Supprimer] pour supprimer l'adresse. Appuyez sur [Oui] sur l'écran instantané de confirmation. Pour annuler la suppression, appuyez sur [Non]. % Pour supprimer une boîte non enregistrée, appuyez sur [Boîte non créée]. Répétez la procédure pour [Supprimer] ci-dessus pour la supprimer. 12 [06 Réglage administrateur] - [08 Enregistrement adresse] 12-144 ineo 1052/1250 12.14 6 Modifier ou supprimer une adresse FTP. % Appuyez sur [FTP]. % Utilisez la touche de recherche, [+], ou [,] pour afficher la touche du nom de l'adresse. % Sélectionnez la touche de nom souhaitée. % Pour changer l'adresse, appuyez sur [Modification] pour afficher l'écran des détails FTP. % Sélectionnez l'élément à changer parmi les touches [Nom profil], [Nom recherche], [Adresse serveur], [Chemin fichier], [ID utilisateur] et [Code], puis procédez au changement sur l'écran de saisie. De même, sélectionnez [Activé] ou [Désactivé] sous Favori. Appuyez sur [OK]. % Appuyez sur [Supprimer] pour supprimer l'adresse. Appuyez sur [Oui] sur l'écran instantané de confirmation. Pour annuler la suppression, appuyez sur [Non]. 7 Modifier ou supprimer une adresse SMB. % Appuyez sur [SMB]. % Utilisez la touche de recherche, [+], ou [,] pour afficher la touche du nom de l'adresse. % Sélectionnez la touche de nom souhaitée. % Pour changer l'adresse, appuyez sur [Modification] pour afficher l'écran des détails SMB. % Sélectionnez l'élément à changer parmi les touches [Nom profil], [Nom recherche], [Adresse serveur], [Chemin fichier], [ID utilisateur] et [Code], puis procédez au changement sur l'écran de saisie. De même, sélectionnez [Activé] ou [Désactivé] sous Favori. Appuyez sur [OK]. % Appuyez sur [Supprimer] pour supprimer l'adresse. Appuyez sur [Oui] sur l'écran instantané de confirmation. Pour annuler la suppression, appuyez sur [Non]. ineo 1052/1250 12-145 12.14 [06 Réglage administrateur] - [08 Enregistrement adresse] 12 8 Supprimer un groupe. % Appuyez sur [Groupe]. % Utilisez [+] ou [,] pour afficher la touche du nom de l'adresse. % Sélectionnez la touche de nom souhaitée. % Appuyez sur [Supprimer]. Appuyez sur [Oui] sur l'écran instantané de confirmation. Pour annuler la suppression, appuyez sur [Non]. 9 Appuyez sur [Retour]. L'écran Enregistrement adresse va réapparaître. 12 [06 Réglage administrateur] - [09 Gestion Authent. OpenAPI] 12-146 ineo 1052/1250 12.15 12.15 [06 Réglage administrateur] - [09 Gestion Authent. OpenAPI] 12.15.1 [01 Réglage Code d'interdiction] Enregistrez ou contrôlez les codes d'interdiction sur cet écran. REMARQUE Assurez-vous de n'exécuter cette opération que si vous recevez un contact de votre technicien SAV. 1 Suivez la procédure à la page 12-3 pour afficher l'écran du menu Réglage administrateur. 2 Appuyez sur [09 Gestion Authent. OpenAPI], puis appuyez sur [01 Réglage Code d'interdiction]. L'écran Réglage Code d'interdiction va s'afficher. 3 Appuyez sur [Index], [Fournisseur] ou [Applications]. Un écran va s'ouvrir pour saisir le code d'interdiction. 4 Entrez un code d'interdiction. % Vous pouvez entrer jusqu'à 8 caractères alphanumériques ou symboles. % Appuyez sur [OK] pour retourner à l'écran Réglage Code d'interdiction. 5 Appuyez sur [Fermer]. L'écran Gestion Authentification OpenAPI va réapparaître. 13 Caractéristiques ineo 1052/1250 13-3 13.1 Caractéristiques de la machine 13 13 Caractéristiques 13.1 Caractéristiques de la machine Les caractéristiques de la machine/des options sont susceptibles d'être modifiées sans préavis suite aux améliorations continues. 13.1.1 Machine Caractéristiques Nom ineo 1052/1250 Type Console Procédé d'impression Procédé électrostatographique par LED Vitre d'exposition Fixe Photoconducteur Photoconducteur organique (OPC) Source lumineuse Lampe fluorescente au gaz rare Système de développement Développement bi-composant à sec et inversion magnétique Méthode de transfert Courroie Méthode de fixation Rouleau quatre Réglage densité Fixe : 9 niveaux (manuel), 2 niveaux prédéfinis Contraste auto : Détecte automatiquement l'image de l'original/ niveau d'exposition du fond pour régler le contraste de la copie.4 Retrait du fond : 9 niveaux (manuel) Réglage qualité Mode avancé : 4 types (Texte/Photo, Contraste +, Photo, Texte) Netteté : 9 niveaux (manuel) Texte/Photo : 9 niveaux (Photo+ <-> Caractère+) Taux de restitution 1:1 (100%) Agrandissement : 1:1,189 (118,9%), 1:1,414 (141,4%), 1:2,000 (200%) Réduction : 1:0,840 (84,0%), 1:0,707 (70,7%), 1:0,500 (50%) Taux restitution spécial : 25% à 400% par incréments de 0,1% Taux programmables : 3 Résolution de numérisation 600 dpi e 600 dpi Résolution d'impression 1200 dpi e 1200 dpi Dégradés 256 Papier copie Qual. supér., Normal, Couché, Intercal. vierge : 40 à 350 g/m2 Livre/Journ., Gaufré : 40 à 216 g/m2 Gaufré2 : 75 à 216 g/m2 En plus des formats standard, les formats Perso, Format + et Format papier onglet sont disponibles. • Le papier 301 à 350 g/m2 est accepté dans les magasins intermédiaires (Magasins 4 et 7) de l'Unité d'alimentation papier PF-703/PF-706. • Le papier pré-imprimé est accepté dans l'Unité d'alimentation papier PF-703 ou dans l'Unité d'alimentation papier PF-706 dotée de l'Unité d'alimentation papier préimprimé Kit PP-701. • Les étiquettes et les transparents sont indisponibles. 13 Caractéristiques de la machine 13-4 ineo 1052/1250 13.1 Vitesse de copie (recto) ineo 1250 : 125 feuilles/min (A4 v, 8,5 e 11 v), 70 feuilles min (A3 w), 68 feuilles/min. (11 e 17 w) ineo 1052 : 105 feuilles/min (A4 v, 8,5 e 11 v), 60 feuilles min (A3 w), 59 feuilles/min (11 e 17 w) Copie en continu 1 à 9999 copies Mémoire Mémoire système : 512 Mo (DDR2) Mémoire programmes : 64 Mo (mémoire flash) Mémoire d'affichage principale (tampon de compression et d'expansion) : 768 Mo (SDR-SDRAM) Mémoire non volatile : 1 Mo (SRAM + sauvegarde par pile) DD : 250 Go Type original Feuilles, livres (livres ouverts), autres objets en trois dimensions Épaisseur : 30 mm ou moins Format original Standard : max. A3 w (11 e 17 w) Personn. : 297 mm e 431,8 mm Grammage de l'original Environ 6,8 kg max. Format papier Standard : SRA3 w, A3 w, B4 w, SRA4 w, A4 w/v, B5 w/v, A5 v, 12 e 18 w, 11 e 17 w, 8,5 e 14 w, 8,5 e 11 w/v, 9 e 11 v, 5,5 e 8,5 v, Foolscap À utiliser pour spécifier les formats standard de chaque magasin dans le réglage magasin qui propose les options suivantes : • A5v ou 5,5 e 8,5 v (A5 v sélectionné par défaut) • SRA3w ou 12 e 18 w (SRA3 w sélectionné par défaut) • 8e 13 w, 8,12 e 13,2 w, 8,25 e 13 w, 8,5 e 13 w ou 8,5 e 14 w (8,5 e 14 w sélectionné par défaut) Personnalisé : 182 mm e 139 mm min. à 324 mm e 463 mm max. Format+ : A3W w, B4W w, A4W w/v, B5W w/v, A5W v, 12 e 18W w, 11 e 17W w, 8,5 e 11W w/v, 5,5 e 8,5W w Papier onglet : A3T w, B4T w, A4T w/v, B5T w/v, 11 e 17T w, 8,5 e 11T w/v, 5,5 e 8,5T v Pour plus de détails, voir page 5-10. Perte d'image Bord avant : 3 mm ou moins Bord arrière, bords droit et gauche : 2 mm ou moins Méthode d'alimentation en papier Magasins 1, 2 : 1500 feuilles (80 g/m2) Temps de préchauffage Env. 7,0 minutes ou moins (20 °C, 50% HR, 230 V) Durée de copie de la première page ineo 1250 : 2,8 secondes max. (A4 v, 8,5 e 11 v) ineo 1052 : 3,0 secondes max. (A4 v, 8,5 e 11 v) Niveau sonore 8,0 B ou moins (avec méthode de mesure conforme à la norme ISO7779/9266) Alimentation requise AC 220–240 V/25 A ; 50-60 Hz Consommation électrique 6,0 kW ou moins (Unité d'alimentation papier PF-703 e 2 + machine + Module d'insertion grande capacité MI-PFU + Unité relais RU-509 (+ Humidificateur HM-102) + Unité relais RU-510 + Unité de pliage FD-503 + Piqueuse à cheval SD-506 + Thermorelieur PB-503 + Unité de finition FS-532) Poids 375 kg Dimensions • Machine : 990 (l) e 910 (P) e 1,454 (H) mm • Machine + Unité d'alimentation papier PF-703 + Unité relais RU-510 + Unité de pliage FD-503 + Unité de finition FS-532: 3,635 (l) e 910 (P) e 1,454 (H) mm Dégagement (espace nécessaire pour fonctionnement optimal) 200 mm ou plus à l'arrière (partie arrière du conduit) ; 100 mm ou plus du côté droit et du coté gauche Température de service 10°C à 30°C* Caractéristiques ineo 1052/1250 13-5 13.1 Caractéristiques de la machine 13 * : il se peut que la machine ne puisse pas s'adapter à une certaine plage autour de 20°C et en dessous de 20% d'humidité. 13.1.2 Chargeur Auto DF-615 Humidité 10 à 80%* Caractéristiques Caractéristiques Nom DF-615 Grammage de l'original 50 à 130 g/m2 50 à 200 g/m2 (original recto en mode semi-auto) Format original A3 w, B4 w, A4 w/v, B5 w/v, A5 v, 11 e 17 w, 8,5 e 14 w, 8,5 e 11 v Capacité 100 feuilles max. (papier 80 g/m2) Insertion des originaux Automatique Poids Environ 30 kg Dimensions 650 (l) e 570 (P) e 170 (H) mm Alimentation Par la machine 13 Caractéristiques des options 13-6 ineo 1052/1250 13.2 13.2 Caractéristiques des options 13.2.1 Unité d'alimentation papier PF-703 (Magasin 3 à Magasin 8) Caractéristiques Nom PF-703 Fonction Introduit le papier dans la machine Configuration 3 magasins papier Capacité magasin papier Magasins 3, 6 : 1300 feuilles (80 g/m2, hauteur 150 mm) chacun Magasins 4, 5, 7, 8 : 1850 feuilles (80 g/m2, hauteur 203,5 mm) chacun Format papier Standard : SRA3 w, A3 w, B4 w, A4 w/v, SRA4 w, B5 w/v, A5 v, 12 e 18 w, 11 e 17 w, 8,5 e 14 w, 8,5 e 11 w/v, 9 e 11 v, Foolscap Personnalisé : 150 mm e 133 mm min. à 324 mm e 483 mm max. Utilisation des guides petits formats : 95 mm e 133 mm min. Format+ : A3W w, B4W w, A4W w/v, B5W w/v, A5W v, 12 e 18W w, 11 e 17W w, 8,5 e 11W w/v, 5,5 e 8,5W w Papier onglet : A3T w, B4T w, A4T w/v, B5T w/v, 11 e 17T w, 8,5 e 11T w/v, 5,5 e 8,5T v À utiliser pour spécifier les formats standard de chaque magasin dans le réglage magasin qui propose les options suivantes : • A5v ou 5,5 e 8,5 v (A5 v sélectionné par défaut) • SRA3w ou 12 e 18 w (SRA3 w sélectionné par défaut) • 8e 13 w, 8,12 e 13,2 w, 8,25 e 13 w, 8,5 e 13 w ou 8,5 e 14 w (8,5 e 13 w sélectionné par défaut) Type de papier Papier couché, Pré-imprimé, Qual. supér., Normal, Livre/Journ., Gaufré, Intercalaire vierge, Gaufré2 Grammage du papier 40 à 350 g/m2 (301 à 350 g/m2 est uniquement disponible depuis le magasin central) Dimensions 871,5 (l) e 780 (P) e 1,038 (H) mm Poids Environ 186 kg Alimentation/source requise DC : 5 V, 12 V, 24 V, 36 V (fournis par la machine) AC : 200 à 240 V (50/60 Hz) Consommation électrique DC : 90 W ou moins AC : 100 W ou moins ineo 1052/1250 13-7 13.2 Caractéristiques des options 13 13.2.2 Humidificateur HT-505 (installé dans l'Unité d'alimentation papier PF-703) 13.2.3 Unité d'alimentation papier PF-706 (Magasin 3 à Magasin 8) Caractéristiques Nom HT-505 Fonction Déshumidificateur de type thermo-ventilateur (deux unités) Dimensions Ventilateur du déshumidificateur : 197 (l) e 293 (P) e 82 (H) mm Bloc d'alimentation électrique : 121 (l) e 160 (P) e 80 (H) mm Poids Ventilateur du déshumidificateur : 1,5 kg (par unité) Bloc d'alimentation électrique AC : 0,9 kg Alimentation CC : 24/5 V (fournis par la machine) Consommation électrique maximum DC : 6 W ou moins AC : 580 W ou moins Caractéristiques Nom PF-706 Fonction Introduit le papier dans la machine Configuration 3 magasins papier Capacité magasin papier 2000 feuilles (80 g/m2, hauteur 217 mm) chacun Format papier Standard : SRA3 w, A3 w, B4 w, A4 w/v, SRA4 w, B5 w/v, A5 v, 12 e 18 w, 11 e 17 w, 8,5 e 14 w, 8,5 e 11 w/v, 9 e 11 v, Foolscap Personnalisé : 182 mm e 139 mm min. à 324 mm e 463 mm max. Utilisation des guides petits formats : 95 mm e 139 mm min. Format+ : A3W w, B4W w, A4W w/v, B5W w/v, A5W v, 12 e 18W w, 11 e 17W w, 8,5 e 11W w/v, 5,5 e 8,5W w Papier onglet : A3T w, B4T w, A4T w/v, B5T w/v, 11 e 17T w, 8,5 e 11T w/v, 5,5 e 8,5T v À utiliser pour spécifier les formats standard de chaque magasin dans le réglage magasin qui propose les options suivantes : • A5v ou 5,5 e 8,5 v (A5 v sélectionné par défaut) • SRA3w ou 12 e 18 w (SRA3 w sélectionné par défaut) • 8e 13 w, 8,12 e 13,2 w, 8,25 e 13 w, 8,5 e 13 w ou 8,5 e 14 w (8,5 e 13 w sélectionné par défaut) Type de papier Normal, Qual. supér., Papier couché, Pré-imprimé, Livre/Journ., Gaufré, Intercalaire vierge, Gaufré2 • Le papier pré-imprimé n'est disponible que si l'Unité d'alimentation papier pré-imprimé PP-701 est installée. Grammage du papier 40 à 350 g/m2 (301 à 350 g/m2 est uniquement disponible depuis le magasin central) Dimensions 809 (L) e 780 (P) e 1038 (H) mm Poids Environ 150 kg Alimentation/source requise DC : 5 V, 12 V, 24 V, 36 V (fournis par la machine) AC : 200 à 240 V (50/60 Hz) Consommation électrique DC : 100 W ou moins AC : 40 W ou moins 13 Caractéristiques des options 13-8 ineo 1052/1250 13.2 13.2.4 Module d'insertion grande capacité MI-PFU (PF-703 + MI-PFU Kit FA-501) Caractéristiques Nom MI-PFU Fonction Alimentation papier pour couvertures/insertions sans impression Configuration 3 magasins papier (MI-PFU1 à MI-PFU3) Capacité magasin papier Magasin supér. : 1300 feuilles (80 g/m2, hauteur 150 mm) Magasin intermédiaire/inférieur : 1850 feuilles (80 g/m2, hauteur 203,5 max.) chacun Format papier Standard (formats détectables) : SRA3 w, A3 w, B4 w, A4 w/v, SRA4 w, B5 w/v, A5 v, 12 e 18 w, 11 e 17 w, 8,5 e 14 w, 8,5 e 11 w/v, 9 e 11 v, Foolscap À utiliser pour spécifier les formats standard de chaque magasin dans le réglage magasin qui propose les options suivantes : • A5v ou 5,5 e 8,5 v (A5 v sélectionné par défaut) • SRA3w ou 12 e 18 w (SRA3 w sélectionné par défaut) • 8e 13 w, 8,12 e 13,2 w, 8,25 e 13 w, 8,5 e 13 w ou 8,5 e 14 w (8,5 e 13 w sélectionné par défaut) Couvertures thermoreliure (personnalisées) : 150mm e 133 mm min. à 324 mm e 483 mm max. Utilisation des guides petits formats : 95 mm e 133 mm min. Type de papier Papier couché, Pré-imprimé, Qualité supérieure, Normal, Livre/Journ., Gaufré, Intercalaire vierge, Gaufré2 Grammage du papier 40 à 350 g/m2 (301 à 350 g/m2 est uniquement disponible depuis le magasin central) Dimensions 871,5 (l) e 780 (P) e 1038 (H) mm Poids Env. 195 kg (y compris FA-501 : 9 kg) Alimentation/source requise DC : 5 V, 12 V, 24 V, 36 V (fournis par la machine) AC : 200 à 240 V (50/60 Hz) Consommation électrique 36 W de plus que PF-703 max. ineo 1052/1250 13-9 13.2 Caractéristiques des options 13 13.2.5 Unité relais RU-509 13.2.6 Humidificateur HM-102 (installé dans l'Unité relais RU-509) Caractéristiques Nom RU-509 Type Unité relais avec fonctions de refroidissement papier et réglage de détuilage Réglage de détuilage mécanique Règle le gondolage du papier en le conduisant dans un cheminement en zigzag, puis en délivrant le papier avec une accélération en fonction de la vitesse de base de la chaîne déterminée pour l'opération de finition. Réglage de détuilage par humidification Humidifie le papier avec l'Humidificateur HM-102 et délivre le papier avec une accélération en fonction de la vitesse de base de la chaîne déterminée pour l'opération de finition. Sortie directe Délivre le papier avec une accélération en fonction de la vitesse de base de la chaîne déterminée pour l'opération de finition, sans effectuer de réglage de détuilage mécanique ou par humidification. Vitesse de transport ineo 1250 : 125 feuilles/min (A4 v, B5 v, 8,5 e 11 v) ineo 1052 : 105 feuilles/min (A4 v, B5 v, 8,5 e 11 v) Format papier Standard : SRA3 w, A3 w, B4 w, A4 w/v, SRA4 w/v, B5 w/v, A5 v, 13 e 19 w, 12 e 18 w, 11 e 17 w, 8,5 e 14 w, 8,5 e 11 w/v, 9 e 11 v, 5,5 e 8,5 v, Foolscap Personnalisé : 330 mm e 487 mm max. à 100 mm e 140 mm min. Format+ Papier à onglet Type de papier Recommandé pour la machine Grammage du papier 40 à 350 g/m2 Dimensions 410 (l) e 735 (P) e 1020 (H) mm Poids Environ 60 kg Alimentation 220-240 V, 50-60 Hz; 2,0 A Consommation électrique maximum 430 W (options suivantes comprises) Caractéristiques Nom HM-102 Type Kit Humidification Papier Fonction Humidifie uniformément le papier à la fois sur les deux faces dans le cadre du réglage de détuilage. Vitesse de traitement ineo 1250 : 125 feuilles/min (A4 v, B5 v, 8,5 e 11 v) ineo 1052 : 105 feuilles/min (A4 v, B5 v, 8,5 e 11 v) Capacité du réservoir de l'humidificateur 20 litres (équivalent à environ 100 000 impressions) Format papier Identique à celui de l'Unité relais RU-509 Type de papier Recommandé pour la machine Grammage du papier Humidificateur désactivé : 40 à 250 g/m2 Humidificateur activé : 50 à 350 g/m2 (sauf 135 g/m2 max. pour papier couché) Dimensions 339 (l) e 638 (P) e 458 (H) mm Poids Environ 30 kg Alimentation 24/5 V DC (fournie par l'Unité relais RU-509) 13 Caractéristiques des options 13-10 ineo 1052/1250 13.2 13.2.7 Unité relais RU-510 13.2.8 Unité de pliage FD-503 Caractéristiques Nom RU-510 Type Unité relais avec fonction retournement 2 plis Sortie retournement 2 plis Achemine deux feuilles en couches en les retournant vers le dispositif de finition pour impression recto. Sortie retournement 1 pli Achemine chaque feuille en la retournant vers le dispositif de finition pour impression recto. Sortie directe Achemine chaque feuille sans la retourner, pour impression recto haut ou impression recto-verso. Vitesse de transport ineo 1250 : 125 feuilles/min (A4 v, B5 v, 8,5 e 11 v) ineo 1052 : 105 feuilles/min (A4 v, B5 v, 8,5 e 11 v) Format papier Standard : SRA3 w, A3 w, B4 w, A4 w/v, SRA4 w/v, B5 w/v, A5 v, 13 e 19 w, 12 e 18 w, 11 e 17 w, 8,5 e 14 w, 8,5 e 11 w/v, 9 e 11 v, 5,5 e 8,5 v, Foolscap Personnalisé : 331 mm e 488 mm max. à 95 mm e 133 mm min. Format+ Papier à onglet Type de papier Recommandé pour la machine Grammage du papier Sortie directe : 40 à 350 g/m2 Sortie retournement 1 pli : 40 à 300 g/m2 Sortie retournement 2 plis : 40 à 256 g/m2 (40 à 216 g/m2 pour ineo 1250) Dimensions 410 (l) e 723 (P) e 1020 (H) mm Poids Environ 35 kg Alimentation 24/5 VCC (fournis par l'option précédente) Consommation électrique maximum 68 W Caractéristiques Nom FD-503 Fonction Perforation, pliage multiple, insertion de feuille intercalaire Perforation Nombre de trous 2 ou 4 Diamètre des trous 6,5 mm ± 0,5 mm Espacement des trous 80 mm ± 0,5 mm Position verticale des perforations 10,5 mm ± 4 mm Grammage du papier 50 à 216 g/m2 Formats disponibles 2 trous : A3 w, B4 w, SRA4 w, A4 w/v, B5 w/v, A5 v, 12 e 18 w, 11 e 17 w, 8,5 e 14 w, 8,5 e 11 w/v, 5,5 e 8,5 v, 9 e 11 v, Foolscap, papier à onglets 4 trous : A3 w, B4 w, A4 v, B5 v, 12 e 18 w, 11 e 17 w, 8,5 e 11 v, 9 e 11 v, papier à onglets ineo 1052/1250 13-11 13.2 Caractéristiques des options 13 Pliage Types de pliage Pliage en Z, Pliage roulé, Pliage en accordéon, Pliage en deux, Économique, Pliage portefeuille Grammage du papier Pliage en Z, Pliage roulé, Pliage en accordéon, Pliage en 2 : 50 à 130 g/m2 Pliage économique, Pliage portefeuille : 50 à 91 g/m2 Formats disponibles Standard : A3 w, B4 w, A4 w, SRA4 w, 12 e 18 w, 11 e 17 w, 8,5 e 14 w, 8,5 e 11 w Personnalisé : 305 mm e 458 mm max. à 210 mm e 279 mm min. Sortie directe Fonction Délivre les feuilles produite par la machine dans le magasin principal ou le bac Plieuse. Grammage du papier 40 à 350 g/m2 Formats disponibles Standard : SRA3 w, A3 w, B4 w, SRA4 w/v, A4 w/v, B5 w/v, A5 v, 13 e 19 w, 12 e 18 w, 11 e 17 w, 8,5 e 14 w, 8,5 e 11 w/v, 5,5 e 8,5 v, 9 e 11 v, Foolscap Personnalisé : 331 mm e 483 mm max. à 95 mm e 139 mm min. Format+ Papier onglet (uniquement avec l'onglet orienté dans le sens de la sortie) Bac d'insertion Types de papier Normal, recyclé, fin, spécial Grammage du papier 75 à 216 g/m2 Formats disponibles Standard (formats détectables) : SRA3 w, A3 w, B4 w, A4 w/v, SRA4 w/v, B5 w/v, A5 v, 13 e 19 w, 12 e 18 w, 11 e 17 w, 8,5 e 14 w, 8,5 e 11 w/v, 5,5 e 8,5 v, Foolscap Les formats standard détectables peuvent être permutés de la manière suivante : • A5v ou 5,5 e 8,5 v • SRA4w, A4 w et un de 8,5 e 14 w, 8 e 13 w, 8,12 e 13,2 w, 8,25 e 13 w, 8,5 e 13 w, ou 8,5 e 11 w et un de 8,5 e 14 w, 8 e 13 w, 8,12 e 13,2 w, 8,25 e 13 w, 8,5 e 13 w • 8,5e 11 v ou 9 e 11 v Couvertures thermoreliure (personnalisées) : 182 mm e 139 mm min. à 331 mm e 483 mm max. Capacité d'empilement du magasin supérieur/inférieur 500 feuilles (80 g/m2) pour chaque magasin Dimensions 400 (l)* e723 (P) e1231 (H) mm * Largeur comprenant le bac principal : 667 mm/784 mm (avec le bord déployé) Poids Environ 130 kg Alimentation 100 à 240 VCA, 5 VCC Caractéristiques 13 Caractéristiques des options 13-12 ineo 1052/1250 13.2 13.2.9 Empileur grande capacité LS-505 13.2.10 Piqueuse à cheval SD-506 Caractéristiques Nom LS-505 Type Empileur horizontal de type transporteur par adhérence Fonction Empileur Tri Délivre des jeux non décalés dans le magasin de l'empileur. Bac auxiliaire Délivre des jeux non décalés dans le bac auxiliaire. Empileur Tri décalé Décale les jeux triés de 20 mm à leur sortie vers le magasin de l'empileur. Formats disponibles dans l'empileur Standard : A3 w, B4 w, SRA4 w/v, A4 w/v, B5 v, A5 v, 13 e 19 w, 12 e 18 w, 11 e 17 w, 8,5 e 14 w, 8,5 e 11 w/v, 9 e 11 v, SRA3 w, Foolscap Personnalisé : 331 mm e 483 mm max. à 210 mm e 148 mm min. Format+ Papier à onglet (1 à 15 onglets*) (Cependant les jeux en sortie ne peuvent pas être décalés s'ils contiennent des feuilles de papier à onglet.) * Sauf 4 onglets et 10 onglets Grammages disponibles dans l'empileur 50 à 244 g/m2 Formats disponibles dans le magasin auxiliaire Standard : SRA3 w, A3 w, B4 w, SRA4 w/v, A4 w/v, B5 w/v, A5 v, 13 e 19 w, 12 e 18 w, 11 e 17 w, 8,5 e 14 w, 8,5 e 11 w/v, 5,5 e 8,5 v, 9 e 11 v, Foolscap Personnalisé : 331 mm e 488 mm max. à 95 mm e 139 mm min. Format+ Papier onglet (uniquement avec l'onglet orienté dans le sens de la sortie) Grammage disponible dans le magasin auxiliaire 50 à 350 g/m2 Dimensions 785 (l) e 723 (P) e 1020 (H) mm Poids Environ 110 kg Alimentation 100 à 240 VCA, 5 VCC Consommation électrique maximum 143 W ou moins Caractéristiques Nom SD-506 Type Équipement de pliage et d'agrafage doté des fonctions de pliage multiple et de massicotage Modes de sortie Sortie Bac auxiliaire Délivre des feuilles non-traitées dans le bac auxiliaire. Sortie de liaison Délivre des feuilles non-traitées vers l'équipement de finition. Pliage & Piqûre Achemine des jeux agrafés par la piqueuse à cheval dans le magasin Pliage & piqûre. Pliage & piqûre à cheval avec massicotage Achemine des jeux agrafés par la piqueuse à cheval et massicotés dans le magasin Pliage & piqûre. Pliage en 2 multiple Délivre une feuille ou un jeu plié en deux dans le magasin Pliage & piqûre. Pliage en 2 multiple avec massicotage Délivre une feuille ou un jeu plié en deux et massicoté dans le magasin Pliage & piqûre. Multi pli en 3 Délivre une feuille ou un jeu plié en trois dans le magasin Pliage en 3. ineo 1052/1250 13-13 13.2 Caractéristiques des options 13 Pliage en deux Types de pliage Pliage 2 multiple, Multi pli en 3 Formats papier • Pliage en 2 multiple Standard : SRA3 w, A3 w, B4 w, SRA4 w, A4 w, B5 w, 12 e 18 w, 11 e 17 w, 8,5 e 14 w, 8,5 e 11 w, Foolscap Personnalisé : 324 mm e 463 mm max. à 182 mm e 257 mm min. • Multi pli en 3 Standard : A4 w, 8,5 e 11 w Grammage du papier MultiPli en2 : 50 à 244 g/m2 MultiPli en 3 : 50 à 91 g/m2 Nombre de feuilles par jeu plié Pliage en 2 multiple : 5 pages (50 à 81 g/m2) 3 pages (82 à 130 g/m2) 2 pages (131 à 244 g/m2) Multi pli en 3 : 5 pages (50 à 81 g/m2) 3 pages (82 à 91 g/m2) Capacité d'empilage Pliage en 2 multiple : 30 jeux (magasin Pliage & piqûre) Multi pli en 3 : 20 jeux (magasin Pliage en 3) Fourni avec détection pleine charge Pliage et agrafage/ massicotage Formats papier Standard : SRA3 w, A3 w, B4 w, SRA4 w, A4 w, B5 w, 12 e 18 w, 11 e 17 w, 8,5 e 14 w, 8,5 e 11 w, Foolscap Personnalisé : 324 mm e 463 mm max. à 182 mm e 257 mm min. Format+ Grammage du papier 50 à 244 g/m2 Espace de reliure Variable (90 à 165 mm) Capacité Massicot 100 pages (50 feuilles (80 g/m2) e 2 ou {49 feuilles (80 g/m2) + 1 (200 g/m2)} e 2) Sortie directe Formats papier Standard : SRA3 w, A3 w, B4 w, SRA4 w/v, A4 w/v, B5 w/v, A5 v, 13 e 19 w, 12 e 18 w, 11 e 17 w, 8,5 e 14 w, 8,5 e 11 w/v, 5,5 e 8,5 v, 9 e 11 v, Foolscap Personnalisé : 331 mm e 488 mm max. à 95 mm e 139 mm min. Format+ Papier onglet (uniquement avec l'onglet orienté dans le sens de la sortie) Grammage du papier 50 à 350 g/m2 Dimensions 1170 (l) e 775 (P) e 1020 (H) mm Poids Environ 280 kg Alimentation 100 à 240 VCA, 5 VCC Consommation électrique maximum 270 W Caractéristiques 13 Caractéristiques des options 13-14 ineo 1052/1250 13.2 13.2.11 Thermorelieur PB-503 Caractéristiques Nom TR-503 Type Thermorelieur de type console et fusion à chaud Fonction Thermoreliure Produit des livres thermoreliés dans le bac du thermorelieur. Bac auxiliaire Délivre des feuilles non-traitées dans le bac auxiliaire. Sortie de liaison Délivre des feuilles non-traitées vers un autre équipement de finition (Unité de finition FS-532). Nombre de feuilles par jeu 10 à 300 pages ou pas plus de 30 mm d'épaisseur 10 à 150 feuilles, ou pas plus de 15 mm d'épaisseur pour papier couleur/mat Jusqu'à 4 feuilles intercalaires pliées en Z peuvent être comprises dans un jeu pour impression Recto-Verso, et jusqu'à 2 feuilles pour impression Recto. Thermoreliure Formats papier • Corps Standard : A4 v, B5 v, A5 v, 8,5 e 11 w, 5,5 e 8,5 w/v Personnalisé : 307 mm e 221 mm max. à 139 mm e 210 mm min. • Couverture Personnalisé : 307 mm e 472 mm max. à 139 mm e 279 mm min. Grammage du papier 64 à 91 g/m2 pour le corps de document 82 à 216 g/m2 pour les couvertures Types de papier Normal, Fin pour corps de document Qual. supér., Couché pour les couvertures Capacité d'empilage • Mag. thermorelieur 1 jeu d'épaisseur maximale (30 mm environ) e 2 piles (6600 feuilles environ) La fonction détection pleine charge activée sur le thermorelieur limite la capacité de la manière ci-après afin d'éviter que les piles de jeux ne tombent. Jeu relié de 10 à 30 pages : 50 jeux Jeu relié de 31 à 150 pages : 35 jeux ou jusqu'à détection de pleine charge Jeu relié de 151 à 300 pages : jusqu'à détection de pleine charge • Source couverture 1.000 pages (82 g/m2) 500 feuilles (216 g/m2) Sortie dans le magasin secondaire Formats papier Standard : SRA3 w, A3 w, B4 w, SRA4 w/v, A4 w/v, B5 w/v, A5 v, 13 e 19 w, 12 e 18 w, 11 e 17 w, 8,5 e 14 w, 8,5 e 11 w/v, 5,5 e 8,5 v, 9 e 11 v, Foolscap Personnalisé : 331 mm e 488 mm max. à 95 mm e 139 mm min. Format+ Papier onglet (uniquement avec l'onglet orienté dans le sens de la sortie) Grammage du papier 40 à 350 g/m2 Capacité d'empilage 200 feuilles (80 g/m2) (avec fonction détection pleine charge activée) Temps de préchauffage Environ 20 minutes Dimensions 1360 (l) e 775 (P) e 1223 (H) mm Poids Environ 270 kg Alimentation 230 VCA, 50 V, 5 VCC Consommation électrique maximum 1000 W ou moins ineo 1052/1250 13-15 13.2 Caractéristiques des options 13 13.2.12 Unité de finition FS-532 Caractéristiques Nom FS-532 Type Agrafeuse de type agrafes coupées Modes de sortie Sortie directe, agrafée, décalée Type de finition Tri, Groupe, Tri décalé, GroupeDécalé, Agrafage + Tri décalé, Agrafage + Groupe décalé, Agrafage Position d'agrafage Agrafage parallèle (devant), agrafage 2 points (pas : 120 mm, 140 mm, 165 mm), agrafage à 45° et parallèle (à l'arrière) Tri/Groupe Bacs de sortie Magasin 1 (magasin primaire (principal)), Magasin 2 (magasin secondaire (auxiliaire)) Formats papier • Magasin 1 (magasin primaire (principal)) Papier grand format : A3 w, B4 w, SRA3 w, SRA4 w/v, 12 e 18 w, 11 e 17 w, 13 e 19 w, 8,5 e 14 w, Foolscap Papier petit format : A4 w/v, B5 w/v, 8,5 e 11 w/v, 9 e 11 v Papier de très petit format : A5 v, 5,5 e 8,5 v Personnalisé : 95 mm e 133 mm min. à 331 mm e 488 mm max. Format+ : 324 mm e 460 mm max. Papier onglet (uniquement avec l'onglet orienté dans le sens de la sortie) Sortie directe uniquement : 13 e 19 w • Magasin 2 (magasin secondaire (auxiliaire)) Standard : A3 w, B4 w, SRA3 w, SRA4 w/v, A4 w/v, B5 w/v, A5 v, 12 e 18 w, 11 e 17 w, 8,5 e 14 w, 8,5 e 11 w/v, 5,5 e 8,5 v, 9 e 11 v, Foolscap Personnalisé : 95 mm e 133 mm min. à 331 mm e 488 mm max. Format+ Papier onglet (uniquement avec l'onglet orienté dans le sens de la sortie) Grammage du papier 40 à 350 g/m2 Tri Décalé/GroupeDécalé Bacs de sortie Magasin 1 (magasin primaire (principal)) Formats papier Papier grand format : A3 w, B4 w, SRA3 w, SRA4 w/v, 12 e 18 w, 11 e 17 w, 13 e 19 w, 8,5 e 14 w, Foolscap Papier petit format : A4 w/v, B5 w/v, 8,5 e 11 w/v, 9 e 11 v Papier de très petit format : A5 v, 5,5 e 8,5 v Personnalisé : 95 mm e 133 mm min. à 331 mm e 488 mm max. Format+ : 324 mm e 460 mm max. Papier onglet (uniquement avec l'onglet orienté dans le sens de la sortie) Sortie directe uniquement : 13 e 19 w Grammage du papier 50 à 350 g/m2 Agrafage Bacs de sortie Magasin 1 (magasin primaire (principal)) Magasin 2 (magasin secondaire (auxiliaire)) non utilisable. Formats papier Standard : SRA3 w, A3 w, B4 w, SRA4 w/v, A4 w/v, B5 v, A5 v, 12 e 18 w, 11 e 17 w, 8,5 e 14 w, 8,5 e 11 w/v, 5,5 e 8,5 v, 13 e 19 w, 9 e 11 v, Foolscap Personnalisé : 203 mm e 139 mm min. à 324 mm e 463 mm max. * : max. 320 mm de longueur pour l'agrafage parallèle (à l'arrière). Format+ Papier onglet (uniquement avec l'onglet orienté dans le sens de la sortie) Combiné avec pliage en Z (format fini) : 210 mm e 210 mm min. à 305 mm e 229 mm max. Grammage du papier 50 à 300 g/m2 13 Caractéristiques des options 13-16 ineo 1052/1250 13.2 13.2.13 Piqueuse à cheval SD-510 (montée sur l'Unité de finition FS-532) Dimensions 544 (l)* e723 (P) e1070 (H) mm * 798 mm : magasins compris Avec Module d'insertion PI-502 installé : 544 (l) e 723 (P) e 1185 (H) mm Poids Environ 74 kg Alimentation 24 V DC ± 10% Consommation électrique 144 W ou moins Caractéristiques Caractéristiques Nom SD-510 Type Équipement de finition dédié à la fonction de piqûre à cheval Modes de sortie Pliage & Piqûre Délivre des jeux agrafés par la piqueuse à cheval. Pliage en 2 multiple Délivre une feuille ou un jeu plié en deux. Multi pli en 3 Délivre une feuille ou un jeu plié en trois. Pliage & Piqûre Format papier Standard : A3 w, B4 w, A4 w, 12 e 18 w, 11 e 17 w, 8,5 e 14 w, 8,5 e 11 w Format + Personnalisé : 120 mm e 240 mm min. à 331 mm e 488 mm max. Grammage du papier Corps du document : 50 à 216 g/m2 Couverture : 50 à 300 g/m2 Nombre de feuilles par jeu plié et agrafé 25 feuilles : 50 à 61 g/m2 20 feuilles : 62 à 80 g/m2 16 feuilles : 81 à 91 g/m2 5 feuilles : 92 à 216 g/m2 Normalement, une feuille de papier est comptée comme une pour le papier de 50 à 216 g/m2 alors qu'une feuille devrait être comptée comme 5 pour 217 g/m2 ou plus. Pour plus de détails, voir page 5-8. Position d'agrafage 60 mm à 148,5 mm (espace entre 2 agrafes) Pliage Type de pliage Pliage 2 multiple, Multi pli en 3 Format papier • Pliage en 2 multiple Standard : A3 w, B4 w, A4 w, 12 e 18 w, 11 e 17 w, 8,5 e 14 w, 8,5 e 11 w Format + Personnalisé : 120 mm e 240 mm min. à 331 mm e 488 mm max. • Multi pli en 3 A4 w, 8,5 e 11 w Type de papier Normal, Qual. supér., Laser Couleur Les types de papier disponibles pour le pliage en 3 de plusieurs feuilles sont uniquement ceux recommandés pour l'Unité de finition FS-532. Pour plus de détails, voir page 13-15. Grammage du papier • Pliage en 2 multiple Corps du document : 50 à 216 g/m2 Couverture : 50 à 300 g/m2 • Multi pli en 3 Corps du document : 50 à 105 g/m2 Pour les types de papier de couverture pliés en 2, voir page 5-8. Aucune couverture ne peut être ajoutée à des jeux pliés en 3. Nombre de feuilles par jeu plié • Pliage en 2 multiple 1 à 5 feuilles : 50 à 216 g/m2 1 feuille : 217 à 300 g/m2 • Multi pli en 3 1 à 3 feuilles : 50 à 91 g/m2 1 feuille : 92 à 105 g/m2 Pour plus de détails, voir page 5-8. ineo 1052/1250 13-17 13.2 Caractéristiques des options 13 13.2.14 Unité de perforation PK-522 (installée sur l'Unité de finition FS-532) Capacité du bac pliage Papier grand format (longueur du papier 330 mm ou plus) • Pliage en 2 multiple 1 à 5 feuilles : 35 jeux • Pliage & Piqûre 2 à 5 feuilles : 35 jeux 6 à 10 jeux : 25 jeux 11 à 25 feuilles : 15 jeux Papier petit format (longueur du papier 330 mm ou moins)* • Pliage en 2 multiple 1 à 5 feuilles : 35 jeux • Pliage & Piqûre 2 à 5 feuilles : 35 jeux 6 à 10 jeux : 25 jeux 11 à 25 feuilles : 15 jeux • Multi pli en 3 1 feuille : 50 jeux 2 feuilles : 40 jeux 3 feuilles : 30 jeux * Aucune limite de capacité quand la butée extérieure du bac de sortie est désactivée Dimensions 281,3 (L) e 596,4 (P) e 529,8 (H) mm Poids Env. 22,6 kg, magasin de sortie : env. 3,8 kg Alimentation 24 V DC, 5 V DC (fournis par la machine) Consommation électrique 40 W ou moins Caractéristiques Caractéristiques Nom PK-522 Fonction Perforer des trous Types de papier Non couché, couché Nombre de trous 2 ou 4 Espacement des trous 80 mm ± 1,0 mm Diamètre des trous 6,5 mm Précision de position des trous 4,0 mm ou plus Consommation électrique maximum 30 W ou moins Dimensions Unité de perforation seulement : 156,1 (L) e 592,3 (P) e 180,7 (H) mm Alimentation 24/5 V DC (fournis par la machine) Poids Unité de perforation seulement : 4,5 kg 13 Caractéristiques des options 13-18 ineo 1052/1250 13.2 13.2.15 Bac d'insertion PI-502 (kit de montage MK-732) (installé sur l'Unité de finition FS-532) 13.2.16 Perforeuse multiple GP-501 (la Set DS-508 à DS-518) Caractéristiques Nom PI-502 Type Équipement d'alimentation en papier pour couvertures Fonction Automatique Introduit le papier dans l'unité de finition dès réception d'une commande de la machine. Manuel Introduit le papier dans l'unité de finition dès réception d'une commande manuelle émise depuis le panneau de contrôle de l'unité d'insertion. Formats papier Magasin supérieur Standard : A4 w/v, B5 w/v, A5 v, 8,5 e 11 w/v, 5,5 e 8,5 v Magasin infér. Standard : A3 w, B4 w, SRA4 w, A4 w/v, B5 w/v, A5 v, 12 e 18 w, 11 e 17 w, 8,5 e 14 w, 8,5 e 11 w/v, 5,5 e 8,5 v, Foolscap Type de papier Normal, Recyclé, Qual. supér. Grammage du papier 50 à 200 g/m2 Capacité d'empilage 200 feuilles (80 g/m2) ou pas plus de 30 mm d'épaisseur pour chacun des magasins, supérieur/inférieur Dimensions Bac d'insertion PI-502 seulement : 511 (L) e 620 (P) e 220 (H) mm Poids Environ 10,5 kg (sans compter les 3,0 kg du kit de montage MK-732) Alimentation 24/5 V DC fournis par la machine Consommation électrique maximum 30 W ou moins Caractéristiques Nom GP-501 Vitesse ineo 1250 : 120 feuilles/min ineo 1052 : 105 feuilles/min Format papier A4 w Bord perforation 297 mm Grammage du papier 75 à 216 g/m2 Format/grammage papier du PasseCopie Idem machine Capacité de perforation Une feuille Alimentation 230 V, 50 Hz Système électrique BTU/Heure 1160 BTU/HR Watts 240 W Amps 1,8A/1,7A Sécurité TUV/GS, CE Dimensions 305 (L) e 775 (P) e 1020 (H) mm Poids Environ 80 kg ineo 1052/1250 13-19 13.2 Caractéristiques des options 13 13.2.17 Relieur automatique à anneaux GP-502 13.2.18 Disque dur extractible RH-101 (Kit de boîtier DD interne HD-511) 13.2.19 Autres options La liste ci-dessous présente d'autres options prévues pour cette machine. - Unité d'authentification(type Carte IC) AU-201 - Kit de mise à niveau UK-205 - Kit d'agrafage SK-602 (pour SD-510) - Kit d'agrafage SK-703 (pour FS-532) - Cartouche agrafes RK953 (pour SD-506) - Chariot Empileur grande capacité LC-501 - Granulés de colle GC-501 - Emporte-pièce DS-508 à DS-518 - Élément Relieur anneaux RB-101 (Noir, Transparent, Blanc et Bleu marine) - Unité de fixation EF-102 (Enveloppe) Caractéristiques Nom GP-502 Vitesse ineo 1250 : 125 feuilles/min ineo 1052 : 105 feuilles/min Format papier A4 w Bord reliure 297 mm Format livre (feuilles) Format minimum : 5 feuilles de corps (75 g/m2) + 2 couvertures (216 g/m2) Format maximum : 100 feuilles de corps (75 g/m2) + 2 couvertures (216 g/m2) Grammage du papier Corps du document : 75 à 120 g/m2 Couverture : 163 à 216 g/m2 Papier onglet : 163 g/m2 max. Format/grammage papier du PasseCopie Idem machine Capacité de perforation Une feuille Système électrique 230 VCA, 50 Hz, 0,98 A Sécurité TUV/GS, CE Dimensions 655 (l) e 944 (P) e 1050 (H) mm Poids Environ 191 kg Caractéristiques Nom RH-101 Fonction Gestion du DD extractible : Installez le DD pour la machine et le contrôleur dans le Kit de boîtier DD interne HD-511, puis insérez-le dans le Disque dur extractible RH-101. L'utilisation du DD machine peut être autorisée/interdite pour chaque utilisateur, et pour plus de sécurité, le DD peut aussi être rangé séparément en dehors de la machine. Dimensions Disque dur extractible RH-101: 260 (L) e 150 (P) e 110 (H) mm Kit de boîtier DD interne HD-511: 192 (L) e 125 (P) e 42 (H) mm Poids Disque dur extractible RH-101 : 2,4 kg Kit de boîtier DD interne HD-511 : 0,85 kg Alimentation 12/5 V DC (fournis par la machine) 13 Conditions copie incompatibles 13-20 ineo 1052/1250 13.3 13.3 Conditions copie incompatibles 13.3.1 Conditions de copie incompatibles avec la Configuration de base, les réglages Qualité et les Réglages de l'original Tableau de compatibilité fonctionnelle De base Réglage qualité Caractéristiques orig 1>1 1>2 2>1 2>2 Avec la vitre d'exposition Utilisation du chargeur Auto PapierAuto Restitution auto e1,0 Taux de restitution Mode manuel Agrandissement prédéfini Sans rotation image *34 Réglage densité AES Contraste personnalisé Type original (Texte/Photo) Type original (Contraste +) Type original (Photo) Type original (Texte) Réglage du fond (+ côté) Réglage du fond (- côté) Texte/Photo Formats diff. Plié en Z Semi-auto Personnel (sauf Pleine page) Personnel (Pleine page/Entrer format) Format papier onglet De base 1>1 . . . 1>2 . . . * 11 2>1 . . . . + 2>2 . . . . + Avec la vitre d'exposition *11 . . + Utilisation du chargeur Auto PapierAuto - .. Restitution auto - - - - . . e1,0 - - - Taux de restitution Mode manuel - - - *29 Agrandissement prédéfini - - - Sans rotation image *34 Réglage qualité Réglage densité e e AES e e Contraste personnalisé e Type original (Texte/Photo) Type original (Contraste +) *28 Type original (Photo) Type original (Texte) Réglage du fond (+ côté) Réglage du fond (- côté) *12 Texte/Photo Caractéristiques orig Formats diff. - - e e e Plié en Z . -- e e e Semi-auto - - Personnel (sauf Pleine page) e e - - Personnel (Pleine page/Entrer format) e e e e - - Format papier onglet + + e e e e - - ineo 1052/1250 13-21 13.3 Conditions copie incompatibles 13 Tableau de compatibilité fonctionnelle Finition Tri Tri décalé : Basculer Position de Sortie *19 Tri décalé : Partition Insertion Papier, Arrêt Impression *19 Groupe GroupeDécalé : Basculer Position de Sortie *19 GroupeDécalé : Partition Insertion Papier, Arrêt Impression *19 Agraf. en coin (Coin gauche) Agraf. en coin (Coin droit) Agrafage en 2 points (en haut) Agrafage en 2 points (à gauche) Agrafage en 2 points (à droite) Pliage & Piqûre Pliage en 2 multiple MultiPli en3 (Recto vers intér.) MultiPli en3 (Recto vers extér.) Massicotage *7 Pliage en Z Pliage en deux 1 feuille (recto vers intérieur) Pliage en deux 1 feuille (recto vers extérieur) Pliage roulé (recto vers int.) Pliage roulé (recto vers ext.) Pliage en accordéon (recto vers int.) Pliage en accordéon (recto vers ext.) Économique (Recto vers intérieur) Économique (Recto vers extérieur) En portefeuille (Recto vers intérieur) En portefeuille (Recto vers extérieur) De base 1>1 1>2 2>1 2>2 Avec la vitre d'exposition Utilisation du chargeur Auto PapierAuto Restitution auto e1,0 Taux de restitution Mode manuel Agrandissement prédéfini Sans rotation image *34 Réglage qualité Réglage densité AES Contraste personnalisé Type original (Texte/Photo) Type original (Contraste +) Type original (Photo) Type original (Texte) Réglage du fond (+ côté) Réglage du fond (- côté) Texte/Photo Caractéristiques orig Formats diff. e e e e e Plié en Z Semi-auto Personnel (sauf Pleine page) Personnel (Pleine page/Entrer format) Format papier onglet 13 Conditions copie incompatibles 13-22 ineo 1052/1250 13.3 Tableau de compatibilité fonctionnelle Finition Applications Perforation (à droite) Perforation (à gauche) Perforation (en haut) Perfo multi. (à droite) Perfo multi. (à gauche) Perfo multi. (en haut) Vers haut Vers bas 1 vers N N vers 1 Sur le côté Haut Enreg. DD Thermoreliure Reliure à anneaux Tandem Fusion de tâches (Après Sélection) Insert. intercal. (Magasin) Insertion depuis bac d'insertion Couverture (Magasin) Dos couverture (Magasin) Magasin MI avant (supérieur/inférieur/MI-PFU) Magasin MI arrière (supérieur/inférieur/MI-PFU) Chapitre Chapitres (Insertion imprimée) Combiner Livret Reliure adhésive Insert. original De base 1>1 . . . . 1>2 e 2>1 . . . . 2>2 e Avec la vitre d'exposition *30 *30 + Utilisation du chargeur Auto PapierAuto . . . . . . . Restitution auto e1,0 Taux de restitution Mode manuel Agrandissement prédéfini Sans rotation image *34 Réglage qualité Réglage densité AES Contraste personnalisé Type original (Texte/Photo) Type original (Contraste +) Type original (Photo) Type original (Texte) Réglage du fond (+ côté) Réglage du fond (- côté) Texte/Photo Caractéristiques orig Formats diff. *18 e e e e e e e e e e e Plié en Z Semi-auto e e e e e e Personnel (sauf Pleine page) Personnel (Pleine page/Entrer format) + ee e Format papier onglet e e e e e e e e e e ineo 1052/1250 13-23 13.3 Conditions copie incompatibles 13 Tableau de compatibilité fonctionnelle Applications Page par page Inversion Répétition image Détection auto *8 Répétition image Bords Effacement pliure Centrage image Décaler Décaler+Réduire Cadrage original Pleine page Tampon (Tampon prédéfini) Tampon (N° Page.) Tampon (Numérot. jeux) Tampon (Date/Heure) Filigrane Filigrane (Numérot. jeu) ProtContreCop Annotation Fond de page Fond de page *4 De base 1>1 1>2 2>1 . . . . 2>2 . . . . Avec la vitre d'exposition Utilisation du chargeur Auto . . - + PapierAuto . . . . . . . . Restitution auto . . . . . e1,0 . . Taux de restitution Mode manuel . Agrandissement prédéfini . . Sans rotation image *34 Réglage qualité Réglage densité AES Contraste personnalisé Type original (Texte/Photo) Type original (Contraste +) Type original (Photo) Type original (Texte) Réglage du fond (+ côté) Réglage du fond (- côté) Texte/Photo Caractéristiques orig Formats diff. e e e e e e e e Plié en Z e e e e e Semi-auto e e Personnel (sauf Pleine page) . . Personnel (Pleine page/Entrer format) e . e e e Format papier onglet e . . Aucune : Compatible (disponible) e : estompé (avec annulation automatique) . : incompatible à l'origine mais sélectionnable (la fonction dernièrement sélectionnée ou sur la dernière rangée est prioritaire.) + : Affiche un message d'avertissement. - : annulé automatiquement - : Non spécifié *4 Superposition indisponible avec tâche programme. *7 Le massicotage est annulé automatiquement si vous sélectionnez le magasin secondaire comme bac de sortie. *8 En cas de sélection de Auto sous Répétition image, Cadrage original sera automatiquement sélectionné. (Cadrage original ne peut pas être annulé séparément.) *11 Le mode Numérisation séparée est sélectionné automatiquement. 13 Conditions copie incompatibles 13-24 ineo 1052/1250 13.3 *12 Si Contraste + est sélectionné après que Réglage du fond est réglé sur un niveau inférieur, Réglage du fond sera automatiquement remis à zéro. *18 Non disponible sans la sélection de PapierAuto et Pliage en Z. *19 Disponible avec l'empileur de l'empileur grande capacité ou le magasin primaire (principal) de l'unité de finition sélectionné comme bac de sortie (estompé si un autre magasin est sélectionné). *28 Réglage du fond ne peut pas être réglé sur un niveau inférieur. *29 Sélectionne agrandissement e1,0 si les deux [AMS (restitution auto) Vitre] et [AMS (restitut. auto) chargeur] sont désactivés sous [03 Configuration copieur] - [02 Autres paramètres] du menu Utilitaire. *30 Sans le mode Numérisation séparée sélectionné, le message [Fermer le chargeur] va s'afficher. *34 Avec l'icône Rotation image affichée à l'écran, cette fonction s'active même si [Sans rotation image] est sélectionné. ineo 1052/1250 13-25 13.3 Conditions copie incompatibles 13 13.3.2 Conditions Copie incompatibles avec Finition Tableau de compatibilité fonctionnelle De base Réglage qualité Caractéristiques orig 1>1 1>2 2>1 2>2 Avec la vitre d'exposition Utilisation du chargeur Auto PapierAuto Restitution auto e1,0 Taux de restitution Mode manuel Agrandissement prédéfini Sans rotation image *34 Réglage densité AES Contraste personnalisé Type original (Texte/Photo) Type original (Contraste +) Type original (Photo) Type original (Texte) Réglage du fond (+ côté) Réglage du fond (- côté) Texte/Photo Formats diff. Plié en Z Semi-auto Personnel (sauf Pleine page) Personnel (Pleine page/Entrer format) Format papier onglet Finition Tri Tri décalé : Basculer Position de Sortie *19 Tri décalé : Partition Insertion Papier, Arrêt Impression *19 Groupe GroupeDécalé : Basculer Position de Sortie *19 GroupeDécalé : Partition Insertion Papier, Arrêt Impression *19 Agraf. en coin (Coin gauche) Agraf. en coin (Coin droit) Agrafage en 2 points (en haut) Agrafage en 2 points (à gauche) Agrafage en 2 points (à droite) Pliage & Piqûre . Pliage en 2 multiple . MultiPli en3 (Recto vers intér.) . MultiPli en3 (Recto vers extér.) . Massicotage *7 . Pliage en Z Pliage en deux 1 feuille (Recto vers intér.) Pliage en deux 1 feuille (Recto vers ext.) Pliage roulé (recto vers int.) Pliage roulé (recto vers ext.) Pliage en accordéon (recto vers int.) Pliage en accordéon (recto vers ext.) Économique (Recto vers intérieur) Économique (Recto vers extérieur) En portefeuille (Recto vers intérieur) En portefeuille (Recto vers extérieur) Perforation (à droite) Perforation (à gauche) Perforation (en haut) Perfo multi. (à droite) Perfo multi. (à gauche) Perfo multi. (en haut) Vers haut Vers bas 1 vers N N vers 1 Sur le côté Haut Enreg. DD Thermoreliure *18 Reliure à anneaux e Tandem 13 Conditions copie incompatibles 13-26 ineo 1052/1250 13.3 Tableau de compatibilité fonctionnelle Finition Tri Tri décalé : Basculer Position de Sortie *19 Tri décalé : Partition Insertion Papier, Arrêt Impression *19 Groupe GroupeDécalé : Basculer Position de Sortie *19 GroupeDécalé : Partition Insertion Papier, Arrêt Impression *19 Agraf. en coin (Coin gauche) Agraf. en coin (Coin droit) Agrafage en 2 points (en haut) Agrafage en 2 points (à gauche) Agrafage en 2 points (à droite) Pliage & Piqûre Pliage en 2 multiple MultiPli en3 (Recto vers intér.) MultiPli en3 (Recto vers extér.) Massicotage *7 Pliage en Z Pliage en deux 1 feuille (Recto vers intér.) Pliage en deux 1 feuille (Recto vers ext.) Pliage roulé (recto vers int.) Pliage roulé (recto vers ext.) Pliage en accordéon (recto vers int.) Pliage en accordéon (recto vers ext.) Économique (Recto vers intérieur) Économique (Recto vers extérieur) En portefeuille (Recto vers intérieur) En portefeuille (Recto vers extérieur) Finition Tri - - - - - Tri décalé : Basculer Position de Sortie *19 - - - - *20 *20 *20 *20 *20 *21 *21 *21 *21 *21 *21 *21 *21 Tri décalé : Partition Insertion Papier, Arrêt Impression *19 - - - - *20 *20 *20 *20 *20 *21 *21 *21 *21 *21 *21 *21 *21 Groupe - - - - - *20 *20 *20 *20 *20 GroupeDécalé : Basculer Position de Sortie *19 - - - - *20 *20 *20 *20 *20 *22 *22 *22 *22 *22 *22 *22 *22 GroupeDécalé : Partition Insertion Papier, Arrêt Impression *19 - - - - *20 *20 *20 *20 *20 *22 *22 *22 *22 *22 *22 *22 *22 Agraf. en coin (Coin gauche) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Agraf. en coin (Coin droit) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Agrafage en 2 points (en haut) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Agrafage en 2 points (à gauche) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Agrafage en 2 points (à droite) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Pliage & Piqûre e e e e e - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Pliage en 2 multiple e e e e e - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - MultiPli en3 (Recto vers intér.) e e e e e - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - MultiPli en3 (Recto vers extér.) e e e e e - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Massicotage *7 e e e e e - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Pliage en Z - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Pliage en deux 1 feuille (Recto vers intér.) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Pliage en deux 1 feuille (Recto vers ext.) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Pliage roulé (recto vers int.) e e e e - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Pliage roulé (recto vers ext.) e e e e - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Pliage en accordéon (recto vers int.) e e e e - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Pliage en accordéon (recto vers ext.) e e e e - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Économique (Recto vers intérieur) e e e e - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Économique (Recto vers extérieur) e e e e - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - En portefeuille (Recto vers intérieur) e e e e - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - En portefeuille (Recto vers extérieur) e e e e - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Perforation (à droite) + + + - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Perforation (à gauche) + + + - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Perforation (en haut) + + - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Perfo multi. (à droite) *36 *36 - - - - - - - -*37 - - - - - - - - - - Perfo multi. (à gauche) *36 *36 - - - - - - - -*37 - - - - - - - - - - Perfo multi. (en haut) *36 *36 - - - - - - - -*37 - - - - - - - - - - Vers haut e e e e e *13 *13 e e Vers bas *13 *13 1 vers N *13 *13 N vers 1 e e e e e e e*13 *13 e e e e e e e e e e e e Sur le côté + Haut + + Enreg. DD Thermoreliure e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e Reliure à anneaux e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e Tandem e e e e e ineo 1052/1250 13-27 13.3 Conditions copie incompatibles 13 Tableau de compatibilité fonctionnelle Finition Applications Perforation (à droite) Perforation (à gauche) Perforation (en haut) Perfo multi. (à droite) Perfo multi. (à gauche) Perfo multi. (en haut) Vers haut Vers bas 1 vers N N vers 1 Sur le côté Haut Enreg. DD Thermoreliure Reliure à anneaux Tandem Fusion de tâches (Après Sélection) Insert. intercal. (Magasin) Insertion depuis bac d'insertion Couverture (Magasin) Dos couverture (Magasin) Magasin MI avant (supérieur/inférieur/MI-PFU) Magasin MI arrière (supérieur/inférieur/MI-PFU) Chapitre Chapitres (Insertion imprimée) Combiner Livret Reliure adhésive Insert. original Finition Tri Tri décalé : Basculer Position de Sortie *19 e e Tri décalé : Partition Insertion Papier, Arrêt Impression *19 e e Groupe e e*20*23 .*23 *23*23 *23 GroupeDécalé : Basculer Position de Sortie *19 e e*20*23 .*24 *24*23 *23 GroupeDécalé : Partition Insertion Papier, Arrêt Impression *19 e e*20*23 .*24 *24*23 *23 Agraf. en coin (Coin gauche) + *36*36*36 e e e e e e Agraf. en coin (Coin droit) + *36*36*36 e e e e e e Agrafage en 2 points (en haut) + + - - - e e + e e e e Agrafage en 2 points (à gauche) + + - - - e e + e e e e Agrafage en 2 points (à droite) + + - - - e e + e e e e Pliage & Piqûre - - - - - - e e e e . e e e Pliage en 2 multiple - - - - - - e e e e . e e e MultiPli en3 (Recto vers intér.) - - - - - -*13 *13*13*13 e e . e e . . . MultiPli en3 (Recto vers extér.) - - - - - -*13 *13*13*13 e e . e e . . . Massicotage *7 - - - - - - e e e e e Pliage en Z *37*37*37 e e e Pliage en deux 1 feuille (Recto vers intér.) - - - - - - e e e Pliage en deux 1 feuille (Recto vers ext.) - - - - - - e e e Pliage roulé (recto vers int.) - - - - - - e e e Pliage roulé (recto vers ext.) - - - - - - e e e Pliage en accordéon (recto vers int.) - - - - - - e e e Pliage en accordéon (recto vers ext.) - - - - - - e e e Économique (Recto vers intérieur) - - - - - - e e e Économique (Recto vers extérieur) - - - - - - e e e En portefeuille (Recto vers intérieur) - - - - - - e e e En portefeuille (Recto vers extérieur) - - - - - - e e e Perforation (à droite) - - - - - e e + e e e e Perforation (à gauche) - - - - - e e + e e e e Perforation (en haut) - - - - - e e + e e e e Perfo multi. (à droite) - - - - - e e + e e e e Perfo multi. (à gauche) - - - - - e e + e e e e Perfo multi. (en haut) - - - - - e e + e e e e Vers haut e e e e e e - e e Vers bas - . 1 vers N N vers 1 e e e e e e e e e e e e Sur le côté + + - Haut + + + + - Enreg. DD Thermoreliure e e e e e e e e e *16 *17*17*17*17 e e e*16 Reliure à anneaux e e e e e e e e e e e e *38*38 e e Tandem 13 Conditions copie incompatibles 13-28 ineo 1052/1250 13.3 Tableau de compatibilité fonctionnelle Applications Page par page Inversion Répétition image Détection auto *8 Répétition image Bords Effacement pliure Centrage image Décaler Décaler+Réduire Cadrage original Pleine page Tampon (Tampon prédéfini) Tampon (N° Page.) Tampon (Numérot. jeux) Tampon (Date/Heure) Filigrane Filigrane (Numérot. jeu) ProtContreCop Annotation Fond de page Fond de page *4 Finition Tri Tri décalé : Basculer Position de Sortie *19 Tri décalé : Partition Insertion Papier, Arrêt Impression *19 Groupe GroupeDécalé : Basculer Position de Sortie *19 GroupeDécalé : Partition Insertion Papier, Arrêt Impression *19 Agraf. en coin (Coin gauche) *35 Agraf. en coin (Coin droit) *35 Agrafage en 2 points (en haut) *35 Agrafage en 2 points (à gauche) *35 Agrafage en 2 points (à droite) *35 Pliage & Piqûre *6 . Pliage en 2 multiple *6 . MultiPli en3 (Recto vers intér.) . e . . . MultiPli en3 (Recto vers extér.) . e . . . Massicotage *7 *6 . Pliage en Z Pliage en deux 1 feuille (Recto vers intér.) Pliage en deux 1 feuille (Recto vers ext.) Pliage roulé (recto vers int.) Pliage roulé (recto vers ext.) Pliage en accordéon (recto vers int.) Pliage en accordéon (recto vers ext.) Économique (Recto vers intérieur) Économique (Recto vers extérieur) En portefeuille (Recto vers intérieur) En portefeuille (Recto vers extérieur) Perforation (à droite) *14 Perforation (à gauche) *14 Perforation (en haut) *14 Perfo multi. (à droite) *14 Perfo multi. (à gauche) *14 Perfo multi. (en haut) *14 Vers haut Vers bas 1 vers N N vers 1 Sur le côté Haut Enreg. DD Thermoreliure e e e Reliure à anneaux Tandem ineo 1052/1250 13-29 13.3 Conditions copie incompatibles 13 Aucune : Compatible (disponible) e : estompé (avec annulation automatique) . : incompatible à l'origine mais sélectionnable (la fonction dernièrement sélectionnée ou sur la dernière rangée est prioritaire.) + : Affiche un message d'avertissement. - : annulé automatiquement - : Non spécifié *4 Superposition indisponible avec tâche programme. *6 Disponible seulement lorsque Livret est sélectionné. Sans Livret sélectionné (désactivé), Page par page ou la fonction dernièrement sélectionnée est prioritaire pour la combinaison de Page par page et de Pliage & Piqûre (ou Pliage en 2 multiple) et la touche Pliage & Piqûre (Pliage en 2 multiple) sera estompée. *7 Le massicotage est annulé automatiquement si vous sélectionnez le magasin secondaire comme bac de sortie. *8 En cas de sélection de Auto sous Répétition image, Cadrage original sera automatiquement sélectionné. (Cadrage original ne peut pas être annulé séparément.) *13 La sélection de la fonction Multi pli en 3 est possible indépendamment des sélections Ordre/Face (Multi pli en 3 a la priorité si sélectionné en dernier). Avec sélection de Recto vers intér. : 1 à N et Recto vers haut (ou Recto vers bas pour l'impression recto-verso) est sélectionné automatiquement. Avec sélection de Recto vers ext. : N à 1 et Recto vers bas est sélectionné automatiquement. *14 Seul 2 fois (dans l'ordre indiqué compris) est indisponible. *16 Non disponible si un bac principal est sélectionné comme source couverture. *17 Disponible seulement lorsque le bac couvertures du thermorelieur est utilisé. *18 Non disponible sans la sélection de PapierAuto et Pliage en Z. *19 Disponible avec l'empileur de l'empileur grande capacité ou le magasin primaire (principal) de l'unité de finition sélectionné comme bac de sortie (estompé si un autre magasin est sélectionné). *20 Sélectionne Tri ; Tri décalé, Groupe et GroupeDécalé sont estompés. *21 Sélectionne Tri, Tri décalé et GroupeDécalé sont estompés. *22 Sélectionne Groupe ; Tri décalé et GroupeDécalé sont estompés. *34 Avec l'icône Rotation image affichée à l'écran, cette fonction s'active même si [Sans rotation image] est sélectionné. *35 Seul 2 fois dans l'ordre indiqué est indisponible. *36 Annulé automatiquement. Toutefois un réglage peut permettre l'utilisation des deux fonctions. Veuillez contacter votre technicien SAV. pour plus de détails. *37 Annulé automatiquement. Toutefois un réglage peut permettre l'utilisation des deux fonctions. Veuillez contacter votre technicien SAV. pour plus de détails. *38 MI-PFU est disponible mais les magasins supérieur et inférieur ne le sont pas. 13 Conditions copie incompatibles 13-30 ineo 1052/1250 13.3 13.3.3 Conditions de copie incompatibles avec Applications Tableau de compatibilité fonctionnelle De base Réglage qualité Caractéristiques orig 1>1 1>2 2>1 2>2 Avec la vitre d'exposition Utilisation du chargeur Auto PapierAuto Restitution auto e1,0 Taux de restitution Mode manuel Agrandissement prédéfini Sans rotation image *34 Réglage densité AES Contraste personnalisé Type original (Texte/Photo) Type original (Contraste +) Type original (Photo) Type original (Texte) Réglage du fond (+ côté) Réglage du fond (- côté) Texte/Photo Formats diff. Plié en Z Semi-auto Personnel (sauf Pleine page) Personnel (Pleine page/Entrer format) Format papier onglet Applications Fusion de tâches (Après Sélection) e . + Insert. intercal. (Magasin) e e e Insertion depuis bac d'insertion e Couverture (Magasin) e e Dos couverture (Magasin) e e Magasin MI avant (supérieur/inférieur/ MI-PFU) Magasin MI arrière (supérieur/inférieur/ MI-PFU) Chapitre e e e . e Chapitres (Insertion imprimée) e e e e . e Combiner e e. e e Livret e e e e . e e Reliure adhésive e e e e . e e Insert. original + e. e Page par page e e e e e Inversion Répétition image e e e e e e e Détection auto *8 e e e e e e e e Répétition image e ee Bords Effacement pliure Centrage image e e e e e e . Décaler e Décaler+Réduire e e e e e e Cadrage original e e - e e e e . e Pleine page Tampon (Tampon prédéfini) Tampon (N° Page.) Tampon (Numérot. jeux) Tampon (Date/Heure) Filigrane Filigrane (Numérot. jeu) ProtContreCop Annotation Fond de page Fond de page *4 ineo 1052/1250 13-31 13.3 Conditions copie incompatibles 13 Tableau de compatibilité fonctionnelle Finition Tri Tri décalé : Basculer Position de Sortie *19 Tri décalé : Partition Insertion Papier, Arrêt Impression *19 Groupe GroupeDécalé : Basculer Position de Sortie *19 GroupeDécalé : Partition Insertion Papier, Arrêt Impression *19 Agraf. en coin (Coin gauche) Agraf. en coin (Coin droit) Agrafage en 2 points (en haut) Agrafage en 2 points (à gauche) Agrafage en 2 points (à droite) Pliage & Piqûre Pliage en 2 multiple MultiPli en3 (Recto vers intér.) MultiPli en3 (Recto vers extér.) Massicotage *7 Pliage en Z Pliage en deux 1 feuille (Recto vers intér.) Pliage en deux 1 feuille (Recto vers ext.) Pliage roulé (recto vers int.) Pliage roulé (recto vers ext.) Pliage en accordéon (recto vers int.) Pliage en accordéon (recto vers ext.) Économique (Recto vers intérieur) Économique (Recto vers extérieur) En portefeuille (Recto vers intérieur) En portefeuille (Recto vers extérieur) Applications Fusion de tâches (Après Sélection) e e e e e e e e Insert. intercal. (Magasin) e e e Insertion depuis bac d'insertion e e e Couverture (Magasin) Dos couverture (Magasin) Magasin MI avant (supérieur/inférieur/ MI-PFU) * 1 * 1 * 1 * 1 Magasin MI arrière (supérieur/inférieur/ MI-PFU) * 1 * 1 * 1 * 1 Chapitre Chapitres (Insertion imprimée) e e e Combiner e e e e e Livret e e e e e e e Reliure adhésive e e e e e e e e e e Insert. original e e e Page par page *6 *6 e e*6 Inversion e e e e e Répétition image *35 *35 *35 *35 *35 e e Détection auto *8 e e Répétition image e e Bords Effacement pliure Centrage image Décaler Décaler+Réduire Cadrage original Pleine page Tampon (Tampon prédéfini) Tampon (N° Page.) Tampon (Numérot. jeux) Tampon (Date/Heure) Filigrane Filigrane (Numérot. jeu) ProtContreCop Annotation Fond de page Fond de page *4 13 Conditions copie incompatibles 13-32 ineo 1052/1250 13.3 Tableau de compatibilité fonctionnelle Finition Applications Perforation (à droite) Perforation (à gauche) Perforation (en haut) Perfo multi. (à droite) Perfo multi. (à gauche) Perforation multi (en haut) Vers haut Vers bas 1 vers N N vers 1 Sur le côté Haut Enreg. DD Thermoreliure Reliure à anneaux Tandem Fusion de tâches (Après Sélection) Insert. intercal. (Magasin) Insertion depuis bac d'insertion Couverture (Magasin) Dos couverture (Magasin) Magasin MI avant (supérieur/inférieur/MI-PFU) Magasin MI arrière (supérieur/inférieur/MI-PFU) Chapitre Chapitres (Insertion imprimée) Combiner Livret Reliure adhésive Insert. original Applications Fusion de tâches (Après Sélection) *16 e e e e e e e e e e e Insert. intercal. (Magasin) e e e e e Insertion depuis bac d'insertion e e e e e e Couverture (Magasin) *17 e e e e e Dos couverture (Magasin) *17 e e e e e Magasin MI avant (supérieur/inférieur/ MI-PFU) e *17 *38 Magasin MI arrière (supérieur/inférieur/ MI-PFU) e *17 *38 Chapitre e -e e Chapitres (Insertion imprimée) e - e e e e Combiner e e e e e e e e e e e Livret e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e - Reliure adhésive e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e - Insert. original *16 e e e e e e e e Page par page e e e e e e e Inversion Répétition image *14*14*14*14*14*14 e e e e e e e e e e e Détection auto *8 e e e e e e e e e e e Répétition image e *15 e e e e e e Bords Effacement pliure Centrage image e e e e e Décaler Décaler+Réduire Cadrage original e e e e e e e e e e Pleine page Tampon (Tampon prédéfini) *2 Tampon (N° Page.) *2 Tampon (Numérot. jeux) *2 Tampon (Date/Heure) *2 Filigrane *2 Filigrane (Numérot. jeu) *2 ProtContreCop *2 Annotation e Fond de page *32 Fond de page *4 e e e e e e e ineo 1052/1250 13-33 13.3 Conditions copie incompatibles 13 Tableau de compatibilité fonctionnelle Applications Page par page Inversion Répétition image Détection auto *8 Répétition image Bords Effacement pliure Centrage image Décaler Décaler+Réduire Cadrage original Pleine page Tampon (Tampon prédéfini) Tampon (N° Page.) Tampon (Numérot. jeux) Tampon (Date/Heure) Filigrane Filigrane (Numérot. jeu) ProtContreCop Annotation Fond de page Fond de page *4 Applications Fusion de tâches (Après Sélection) e *15 e Insert. intercal. (Magasin) e e e e e e Insertion depuis bac d'insertion e e e e e e Couverture (Magasin) e e e e e Dos couverture (Magasin) e e e e e Magasin MI avant (supérieur/inférieur/ MI-PFU) Magasin MI arrière (supérieur/inférieur/ MI-PFU) Chapitre e e e e Chapitres (Insertion imprimée) e e e e Combiner e e e e e *2 *2 *2 *2 *2 *2 *2 *2 e Livret e e e e Reliure adhésive e e e e Insert. original e e e e e e e e Page par page e e e e * 31 e Inversion e e e e e e e e e e e e e Répétition image e e - - e e e e e e e e e e e e e e Détection auto *8 e e - - e e e e *8 e e e e e e e e e e Répétition image e e - - e e e e e *2 *2 *2 *2 *2 *2 *2 *33 e Bords e e e e Effacement pliure e e e e Centrage image e e e e e e Décaler e - Décaler+Réduire e e e e e - e e Cadrage original e e e e e Pleine page e e e e e Tampon (Tampon prédéfini) e e e *2 - - - Tampon (N° Page.) e e e *2 Tampon (Numérot. jeux) e e e *2 - - - - Tampon (Date/Heure) e e e *2 Filigrane e e e *2 - -- - - Filigrane (Numérot. jeu) e e e *2 - - - - - ProtContreCop e e e *2 - - - - - Annotation *31 Fond de page e e e*33 - - - - - - Fond de page *4 e e e e e e - - - - - - Aucune : Compatible (disponible) e : estompé (avec annulation automatique) . : incompatible à l'origine mais sélectionnable (la fonction dernièrement sélectionnée ou sur la dernière rangée est prioritaire.) + : Affiche un message d'avertissement. - : annulé automatiquement - : Non spécifié 13 Conditions copie incompatibles 13-34 ineo 1052/1250 13.3 *1 Dos Couverture est indisponible. (un message s'affiche si indisponible.) *2 2 en 1 ou 2 fois (Multi-images) seulement est disponible. 4 en 1 est disponible seulement pour N° Page dans Tampon. (Apparaissent en gris en cas d'indisponibilité.) *4 Superposition indisponible avec tâche programme. *6 Disponible seulement lorsque Livret est sélectionné. Sans Livret sélectionné (désactivé), Page par page ou la fonction dernièrement sélectionnée est prioritaire pour la combinaison de Page par page et de Pliage & Piqûre (ou Pliage en 2 multiple) et la touche Pliage & Piqûre (Pliage en 2 multiple) sera estompée. *7 Le massicotage est annulé automatiquement si vous sélectionnez le magasin secondaire comme bac de sortie. *8 En cas de sélection de Auto sous Répétition image, Cadrage original sera automatiquement sélectionné. (Cadrage original ne peut pas être annulé séparément.) *14 Seul 2 fois (dans l'ordre indiqué compris) est indisponible. *15 Seul 2 fois (dans l'ordre indiqué compris) est disponible. *16 Non disponible si un magasin principal est sélectionné comme source couverture. *17 Disponible seulement lorsque le bac couvertures du thermorelieur est utilisé. *19 Disponible avec l'empileur de l'empileur grande capacité ou le magasin primaire (principal) de l'unité de finition sélectionné comme bac de sortie (estompé si un autre magasin est sélectionné). *31 Avec [R°/V° avec couverture] de Page par page sélectionné, Annotation sera estompé. De même, avec Annotation sélectionné, [R°/V° avec couverture] de Page par page sera estompé. *32 2 en 1 ou 2 fois (Multi-images) seulement est disponible. 4 en 1 est disponible seulement pour N° Page dans Tampon. (Apparaissent en gris en cas d'indisponibilité.) *33 Avec tout autre mode que 2 fois sélectionné, Fond de page sera estompé. De même, avec Fond de page sélectionné, 2 fois sera estompé. *34 Avec l'icône Rotation image affichée à l'écran, cette fonction s'active même si [Sans rotation image] est sélectionné. *35 Seul 2 fois dans l'ordre indiqué est indisponible. 14 Licence d'utilisation du logiciel ineo 1052/1250 14-3 14 14 Licence d'utilisation du logiciel A propos de la police IPA Ce produit utilise la police IPA. Consultez le site Internet suivant pour lire le contrat de licence de la police IPA. http://ipafont.ipa.go.jp/ipa_font_license_v1.html#LicenceEng Logiciel d'impression, Programmes de polices et Logiciel hôte Ce package contient les éléments suivants fournis par Konica Minolta Business Technologies, Inc. (KMBT) : logiciel inclus comme partie intégrante du système d'impression ("Logiciel d'impression"), les données vectorisées numériquement encodées et lisibles par la machine codées au format spécial et sous forme cryptée ("Programmes de polices"), un autre logiciel fonctionnant sur un système informatique à utiliser en association avec le logiciel d'impression ("Logiciel Hôte") ainsi que la documentation écrite explicative ("Documentation"). L'utilisation du terme "Logiciel" renvoie aux logiciel d'impression, aux programmes de polices et/ou au logiciel hôte et regroupe également l'ensemble des mises à jour, des versions modifiées, des ajouts et des copies du logiciel. Ceci est un contrat de licence et non un contrat de vente. Le logiciel qui vous est attribué sous licence (soit en tant que personne privée ou en tant qu'entité d'entreprise) : selon les termes du présent Contrat. KMBT vous accorde une sous-licence non-exclusive pour utiliser le Logiciel et la Documentation sous réserve que vous respectiez les points suivants : 1. Vous ne pouvez utiliser le Logiciel et les Programmes de polices que pour vos propres besoins professionnels internes. 2. En plus de la licence pour les Programmes de polices mentionnés à la section 1 ci-dessus, vous pouvez utiliser les programmes de polices romaines pour reproduire les poids, les styles et les versions des lettres, chiffres, caractères et symboles ("Types de caractères") sur l'afficheur ou l'écran pour vos propres besoins professionnels internes. 3. Vous pouvez faire une copie de sauvegarde du Logiciel Hôte, à condition que votre copie de sauvegarde ne soit pas installée ni utilisée sur un autre ordinateur. Par dérogation aux restrictions ci-dessus, vous pouvez installer le Logiciel Hôte sur plusieurs ordinateurs uniquement pour utilisation avec un ou plusieurs systèmes d'impression fonctionnant avec le Logiciel d'impression. 4. Vous pouvez céder ses droits dans le cadre de ce contrat à un cessionnaire de tous les droits et intérêts que le titulaire de la licence possède sur ledit Logiciel ou ladite Documentation ("Cessionnaire") sous réserve de remettre au cessionnaire toutes les copies dudit Logiciel ou de ladite Documentation. et le cessionnaire accepte d'être lié par toutes les clauses et conditions du présent Contrat. 5. Vous vous engagez à ne pas modifier, adapter ni traduire le Logiciel et la Documentation. 6. Vous acceptez de ne pas essayer de modifier, désassembler, décoder, de décompiler le Logiciel ni de faire de l'ingénierie inverse. 7. Le titre et la propriété du Logiciel et de la Documentation restent ceux de KMBT et de ses concédants de licence. 8. Vous n'avez pas le droit de louer, donner à bail, sous-licencier, prêter ni transférer des versions ou des copies du Logiciel que le Concessionnaire n'utilise pas, ou un Logiciel enregistré sur un support non utilisé, sauf en tant que partie du transfert permanent de tout le Logiciel et de toute la Documentation tel que décrit ci-dessus. 9. EN AUCUN CAS, KMBT OU SON CONCÉDANT DE LICENCE NE SAURAIT ÊTRE TENU POUR RESPONSABLE A VOTRE PLACE EN CAS DU MOINDRE DOMMAGE IMMATÉRIEL, ACCESSOIRE INDIRECT, DOMMAGES-INTÉRÊTS PUNITIF OU SPÉCIAL, Y COMPRIS LES PERTES DE BÉNÉFICES OU LES PERTES D'ÉCONOMIES, MÊME SI LA POSSIBILITÉ DE TELS DOMMAGES A ÉTÉ SIGNALÉ A KMBT OU EN CAS DE PLAINTE D'UN TIERS. KMBT OU SON CONCÉDANT DE LICENCE DÉMENT TOUTES GARANTIES QUANT AU LOGICIEL, EXPLICITE OU IMPLICITE, Y COMPRIS, SANS RESTRICTION, TOUTE GARANTIE IMPLICITE DE VALEUR COMMERCIALE, D'APTITUDE À UN EMPLOI PARTICULIER, TOUTE PROPRIÉTÉ ET NON-VIOLATION DE DROITS DE TIERS. CERTAINS ÉTATS OU JURIDICTIONS N'AUTORISANT PAS L'EXCLUSION OU LA LIMITATION DES DOMMAGES ACCIDENTELS, CONSÉCUTIFS OU SPÉCIAUX, LES LIMITATIONS SUSMENTIONNÉES PEUVENT NE PAS S'APPLIQUER À VOUS. 14 14-4 ineo 1052/1250 10. Avis aux utilisateurs finaux appartenant à l'administration US : le Logiciel est un "article commercial" tel que défini dans la disposition 48 C.F.R. 2.101 et comprend le "logiciel commercial" et la "documentation du logiciel commercial" tels que définis dans la disposition 48 C.F.R. 12.212. En accord avec les termes du 48 C.F.R. 12.212 et 48 C.F.R. 227.7202-1 à 227.7202-4, tous les utilisateurs finals du gouvernement américain achètent le Logiciel uniquement avec les droits énoncés au présent. 11. Vous acceptez de ne pas exporter le Logiciel sous quelque forme que ce soit en infraction de toute législation et réglementation en vigueur en matière de contrôle des exportations de n'importe quel pays. 12. TIERS BÉNÉFICIAIRE : il vous est notifié par le présent qu'Adobe Systems Incorporated, une entreprise du Delaware, domiciliée 345 Park Avenue, San Jose, CA 95110-2704 est un tiers bénéficiaire du présent Contrat de licence dans la mesure où ce contrat contient des dispositions relatives à votre utilisation du Logiciel, des Programmes de polices et des Types de caractères. Lesdites dispositions sont conçues explicitement à l'avantage d'Adobe et sont applicables par Adobe en plus de KMBT. À propos de ce Logiciel VEUILLEZ LIRE ATTENTIVEMENT LE CONTRAT DE LICENCE AVANT D'OUVRIR L'EMBALLAGE DE CE LOGICIEL ("LOGICIEL"), DE TÉLÉCHARGER, D'INSTALLER OU D'UTILISER LE LOGICIEL. L'OUVERTURE DE L'EMBALLAGE OU LE TÉLÉCHARGEMENT, L'INSTALLATION OU L'UTILISATION DU LOGICIEL SERA CONSIDÉRÉE COMME UN ACCORD LICITE DES TERMES ET DISPOSITIONS CI-DESSOUS. SI VOUS N'ÊTES PAS D'ACCORD AVEC CES DERNIÈRES, NE PAS TÉLÉCHARGER, INSTALLER, UTILISER LE LOGICIEL ET NE PAS OUVRIR L'EMBALLAGE. 1. COPYRIGHT ET DROITS DE PROPRIÉTÉ INTELLECTUELLE Ceci est un contrat de licence et non un contrat de vente. Konica Minolta Business Technologies, Inc.("Konica Minolta") détient ou a obtenu la licence d'autres propriétaires ("Concédant de licence Konica Minolta"), les copyrights et autres droits de propriété intellectuelle sur le Logiciel et tout autre droit de propriété relatif au Logiciel et à la moindre copie de ce dernier est détenu par Konica Minolta ou le concédant de licence Konica Minolta. En aucun cas, ce contrat ne saurait être considéré comme vous octroyant un copyright et/ou des droits de propriété intellectuelle sur le Logiciel de Konica Minolta ou d'un concédant de licence Konica Minolta. Le Logiciel est protégé par la législation en matière de copyright et les dispositions relatives aux traités internationaux. 2. LICENCE Konica Minolta vous accorde par le présent une licence limitée non-exclusive et vous pouvez : (1) installer et utiliser le Logiciel uniquement sur votre/vos ordinateur(s) connecté(s) au produit Konica Minolta pour lequel ce Logiciel est conçu ; (2) autoriser les utilisateurs des ordinateurs décrits ci-dessus à utiliser le Logiciel, sous réserve que vous veilliez à faire en sorte que lesdits utilisateurs se conforment aux dispositions du présent Contrat ; (3) utiliser le Logiciel uniquement pour votre propre besoin privé ou professionnel habituel ; (4) ne faire une seule copie du Logiciel que pour les besoins de la sauvegarde relative à l'utilisation normale et prévue du Logiciel. (5) céder le Logiciel à d'autres parties en transférant une copie du présent Contrat et de toute la Documentation en même temps que le Logiciel, sous réserve que (a) vous cédiez aussi obligatoirement aux dites parties toutes vos autres copies du Logiciel ou les détruisiez, (b) qu'un tel transfert de possession résilie votre licence auprès de Konica Minolta et (c) que vous vous assuriez que telle autre partie a convenu d'accepter les dispositions et conditions du présent Contrat. Si ladite autre partie n'accepte pas lesdites dispositions et conditions, vous ne devez pas céder la moindre copie du Logiciel. 3. RESTRICTIONS (1) Sans l'accord écrit de KONICA MINOLTA, vous n'êtes pas autorisé à : (i) utiliser, copier, modifier, fusionner ou céder des copies du Logiciel sauf comme stipulé au présent ; (ii) faire de l'ingénierie, de l'assemblage ou de la compilation inverse ni à analyser le Logiciel de quelque manière que ce soit ; (iii) céder le Logiciel ou toute copie de ce dernier sous licence, le louer ou le céder à bail ou encore le distribuer ; ou (iv) supprimer, utiliser ou modifier la moindre marque commerciale ou le moindre logo, copyright ou autre avis, légende, symbole ou étiquette propriétaire figurant dans le Logiciel. (2) Vous acceptez de ne pas exporter le Logiciel sous quelque forme que ce soit en infraction de toute législation et réglementation en vigueur en matière de contrôle des exportations de n'importe quel pays. ineo 1052/1250 14-5 14 4. DÉCHARGE DE RESPONSABILITÉ (1) Si le Logiciel est fourni sur un ou plusieurs CD-ROM ou tour autre objet tangible utilisé pour le stockage de données numériques (collectivement dénommé au présent "Support de stockage"), Konica Minolta garantit que le Support de Stockage est exempt du moindre défaut matériel ou de façon dans le cadre d'une utilisation normale pendant une période de quatre-vingt-dix jours (90) à compter de la date de livraison. À L'EXCEPTION DES GARANTIES EXPRESSES PRÉCÉDENTES UNIQUEMENT APPLICABLES AU SUPPORT DE STOCKAGE, LE LOGICIEL VOUS EST FOURNI "TEL QUEL" SANS LA MOINDRE GARANTIE QUELLE QU'ELLE SOIT. KONICA MINOLTA, SES SOCIÉTÉS AFFILIÉES ET LE CONCÉDANT DE LICENCE DE KONICA MINOLTA DÉMENTENT TOUTE GARANTIE QUANT AU LOGICIEL, EXPLICITE OU IMPLICITE, Y COMPRIS, SANS RESTRICTION, TOUTE GARANTIE IMPLICITE DE VALEUR COMMERCIALE, D'APTITUDE À UN EMPLOI PARTICULIER ET NONVIOLATION DE DROITS DE TIERS. (2) EN AUCUN CAS KONICA MINOLTA, SES SOCIÉTÉS AFFILIÉES NI LE CONCÉDANT DE LICENCE DE KONICA MINOLTA NE SAURAIENT ÊTRE TENUS POUR RESPONSABLE DES MOINDRES PERTES DE BÉNÉFICES, DONNÉES PERDUES NI DE TOUT AUTRE DOMMAGE INDIRECT, SPÉCIAL, PUNITIF, ACCIDENTEL OU CONSÉCUTIF RÉSULTANT DE L'UTILISATION OU DE L'IMPOSSIBILITÉ D'UTILISATION DU LOGICIEL SANS LIMITATION, LES DOMMAGES DUS À LA PERTE DE BONNEFOI, UNE PANNE D'ORDINATEUR OU UN DYSFONCTIONNEMENT OU À D'AUTRES DOMMAGES COMMERCIAUX OU AUTRES PERTES, MÊME SI KONICA MINOLTA, SES SOCIÉTÉS AFFILIÉES OU LE CONCÉDANT DE LICENCE DE KONICA MINOLTA A ÉTÉ AVERTI DE L'ÉVENTUALITÉ DE TELS DOMMAGES OU POUR TOUTE RÉCLAMATION DÉPOSÉE PAR VOS SOINS SUR LA BASE D'UNE RÉCLAMATION DÉPOSÉE PAR UN TIERS. (3) La décharge de responsabilité dans le cadre du présent n'affecte pas vos droits statutaires. Dans le cas où la décharge n'est pas autorisée par la loi en vigueur, la décharge ne s'appliquera qu'à vous dans la limite maximale autorisée par la loi. 5. RÉSILIATION Vous êtes habilité à résilier cette licence à tout moment en détruisant le Logiciel et toutes les copies de ce dernier. Ce Contrat prendra également fin si vous n'arrivez pas à vous conformer à la moindre disposition de ce dernier. Dans le cas d'une telle résiliation, vous devez immédiatement détruire toutes les copies du Logiciel en votre possession. 6. LÉGISLATION COMPÉTENTE Ce Contrat sera régi par les lois du Japon. 7. AUTONOMIE DES DISPOSITIONS CONTRACTUELLES Dans l'éventualité où une ou plusieurs parties de ce contrat devai(en)t être déclarée(s) comme illicite(s) ou nulle(s) et non avenue(s) par une cour ou un organe administratif quelconque de la juridiction compétente, ladite détermination n'aura aucun effet sur les parties restantes de ce contrat et elles resteront en vigueur comme si ladite ou lesdites partie(s) considérée(s) comme illicite(s) ou nulle(s) n'avai(en)t pas été incluse(s). 8. AVIS AUX UTILISATEURS FINALS APPARTENANT À L'ADMINISTRATION US Le logiciel est un "article commercial," comme défini dans la disposition 48 C.F.R. 2.101 (octobre 1995) et comprend le "logiciel commercial" et la "documentation du logiciel commercial," tels que ces termes sont utilisés dans la disposition 48 C.F.R. 12.212 (septembre 1995). En accord avec les termes des dispositions 48 C.F.R. 12.212 et 48 C.F.R. 227.7202-1 à 227.7202-4 (juin 1995), tous les utilisateurs finals du gouvernement américain vont acheter le Logiciel uniquement avec les droits énoncés au présent. VOUS RECONNAISSEZ AVOIR LU CE CONTRAT, L'AVOIR COMPRIS ET ACCEPTEZ D'ÊTRE LIÉ PAR SES DISPOSITIONS ET CONDITIONS. AUCUNE DES DEUX PARTIES NE SERA LIÉE PAR TOUTE AUTRE DÉCLARATION OU AFFIRMATION NON CONFORME AUX DISPOSITIONS ET CONDITIONS DU PRÉSENT CONTRAT. AUCUN AMENDEMENT À CE CONTRANT N'EST APPLICABLE SAUF SI DÛMENT RÉDIGÉ ET SIGNÉ PAR DES REPRÉSENTANTS AGRÉES DE CHAQUE PARTIE. L'OUVERTURE DE L'EMBALLAGE, LE TÉLÉCHARGEMENT, L'INSTALLATION OU L'UTILISATION DU LOGICIEL SOUS-ENTEND QUE VOUS ÊTES D'ACCORD POUR ACCEPTER LES DISPOSITIONS DU PRÉSENT CONTRAT. 14 14-6 ineo 1052/1250 15 Index ineo 1052/1250 15-3 15.1 Index par élément 15 15 Index 15.1 Index par élément A Accessibilité 4-75 Agrafage 6-94 Authentification utilisateur 4-65 B Bourrage papier 10-5 Butée de lame 8-59 C Changer unité 7-20 Chargement de papier à onglet 8-32 Chargement du papier 8-9 Chargeur Auto 5-16 Chutes de massicotage 8-56 Chutes de perforation 8-50 Composants externes de la machine 4-3 Composants internes de la machine 4-5 Configuration compte 4-65 Contacter le SAV 10-3 E Empileur grande capacité LS-505 4-36, 6-134 En accordéon 6-85 En mode Tandem 6-140 É Éco énergie 4-61, 4-62 Économique 6-85 Écran Liste des tâches 7-3 Écran Machine 6-3 F Fonction de Basculement ATS 5-14 Format papier 5-10 G Grammage du papier 5-3 Groupe 6-91, 6-93 GroupeDécalé 6-91 I Incidents 10-34 K Kit DD extractible RH-101 4-43 M Message d'aide 4-72, 8-4 Mise hors tension 4-53 Mise sous tension 4-51 Multi pli en 3 6-98, 6-112 N Nettoyage 9-3 P Papier à couverture 8-29 Papier onglet 8-32 Past. colle 8-40 Perforation 6-87, 6-100 Perforeuse multiple GP-501 4-45 Piqueuse à cheval SD-506 4-30, 6-110, 6-114 Planificateur 7-17 Pliage & Piqûre 6-96, 6-110 Pliage en 2 6-85 Pliage en 2 multiple 6-96, 6-110 Pliage en Z 6-85 Portefeuille 6-85 Pour stocker le papier 5-15 Programmateur hebdomadaire 4-63 R Rechargement toner 8-7 Relieur automatique à anneaux GP-502 4-47 Remplacement de la boîte à déchets toner 8-46 Remplissage de l'alimentation d'agrafes 8-35 Restrictions légales relatives à la copie 1-6 Réglage de la ventilation 6-33 Réinitialisation 4-60 Réinitialisation Auto 4-59 Réservoir humidif. 8-42 Roulé 6-85 S Supprimer des travaux en cours 6-76 T Thermorelieur PB-503 4-32, 6-118 Tri 6-91, 6-93 Tri décalé 6-91 U Unité d'alimentation papier PF-703 4-18, 8-14, 8-17 Unité d'alimentation papier PF-706 4-20, 8-20 Unité d'authentification(type Carte IC) AU-201 4-44 Unité d'insertion grande capacité PI-PFU 4-22 Unité de finition FS-532 4-38, 6-90, 6-102, 6-114 Unité de pliage FD-503 4-27, 6-84, 6-88, 6-114 Unité relais RU-509 4-24 Unité relais RU-510 4-26 15-4 ineo 1052/1250 15 Index par élément 15.1 V Veille 4-62 Vitre d'exposition 5-17 Volume sonore (Bruiteur) 12-20 Volume sonore (Haut Parleur) 12-21 Voyant Bourrage 10-16 ineo 1052/1250 15-5 15.2 Index par touche 15 15.2 Index par touche A Affichage message temporaire 12-22 Alignement perforation 11-46, 11-58 Annuler 7-6 Arrêt couverture incorrecte 12-73 Attente/Épreuve machine auxi 12-38 Aucun papier adéquat 7-26 Autres paramètres 12-32, 12-44, 12-47 B Basculement auto magasins 12-30 C Cause incom. 7-37 Changer unité 7-19 Choix de l'unité 12-20 Choix de la langue 12-19 Conditions de départ 12-24 Config. touches raccourci 12-26 Configura tandem après tâche 12-41 Configuration copieur 12-42 Configuration fonctions 12-29 Configuration initiale 12-42 Configuration magasins 12-29 Configuration scanner 12-46 Configuration Système 12-19 Configuration thermoreliure 12-72 Contraste personnalisé 12-35 COPIER 12-23 Copier 4-68 D Densité de l'image 12-36 Densité en mode photo 12-35 Destination par défaut 12-46 Décal. densité selon image 12-34 Départ machine auxiliaire si document complet 12-37 E Effacement Bord Avant 12-34 Empileur 11-58 Enregis. appli. numérisation 12-28 Enregist. appli. pour copie 12-26 Enregistrer appli. Finition 12-26 Enregistrer touche fonction 12-27 Espacement entre agrafes 11-63 É Éco énergie 4-63 Écran par défaut 12-23 F Fonction réinitialisation 12-42 G Grammage papier utilisable 12-72 H Historique incomplet 7-37 I Imprimer 4-68 ImprPrior 7-5 Initialis. avec compteur clé 12-43 L Largeur de la feuille pour le pliage 11-68 Largeur du massicotage de la couverture 11-72 LISTE TÂCHES (Planificateur) 12-23 LISTE TÂCHES (Réserve/Suspend) 12-23 M MACHINE 12-23 Massicotage 11-69 Mémoire pleine 10-29 Mode scanner 12-46 Modifier code utilisateur 12-25 ModifTicket 7-6 N Nom de l'utilisateur 7-5, 7-31, 7-34, 7-37, 7-40 Nom du fichier 7-5, 7-31, 7-34, 7-37, 7-40 Nombre de feuilles utilisées 12-72 Numéris. 4-68 O Onglet MACHINE 10-20 P Perfo multi. 6-149 Perforation 6-149 Pliage en 3 multiple 11-66 Pliage en Z 11-54 Pliage économique 11-53 Posit. sens défilement Unité de Pression 11-83 Posit. taquage couv sur plateau haut/bas 11-82 Position angle façonnage dos 11-74 Position arrêt de encollage 11-77 Position de départ encollage 11-75 Position du bord avant de la couverture 11-73 Position taquage feuilles Bac Temporaire 11-80 Position taquage feuilles Unité Pression 11-81 R RAPPELER 4-65 Rappeler 4-68 Redistrib. tâche si problème 12-40 Retour conditions de départ 12-43 Réglage ATS 12-30 Réglage butée lame massicot 11-70, 11-71 Réglage centrage des agrafes 11-61 15-6 ineo 1052/1250 15 Index par touche 15.2 Réglage de la température 11-78 Réglage densité 12-34 Réglage du pliage en portefeuille 11-56 Réglage du pliage roulé 11-49 Réglage écran tactile 12-48 Réglage Largeur Papier Agrafé 11-62 Réglage perfo (Plieuse) 11-46 Réglage Piqueuse à cheval 11-61 Réglage pliage (Plieuse) 11-48 Réglage Pliage en 2 11-48, 11-65 Réglage Pliage en accordéon 11-51 Réglage position latérale perforation 11-47 Réglage séch.initial magasins 12-31 Réglage Tandem 12-37 Réglage unité de finition 11-46, 11-58, 11-61, 11-72 Réglage volume 12-20 Réglage volume & information 12-20 S Sélection auto magasins 12-29 Sélection auto type de papier 12-31 Sélection information sonore 12-21 Spool 7-40 Suppr. tout 7-6 Synchroniser Utilisateur/Gestion compte 4-66 T Taquage longueur papier 11-59 Taux de restitution 12-36 Tâche 7-5 Temps de réponse touches 12-24 Thermorelieur 11-72 Toner usagé 8-47 ToutLibérer 7-6 V Valeurs MachineAuxiliaire 12-39 Instructions de remplacement ORU-M (Operator Replaceable Unit Management) Unité de développement (YMCK) . Unité de développement (JMCN) Table des matières-1 Table des matières 1 Introduction 2 Préalables au remplacement des unités dans le cadre de l'ORU-M 2.1 Préalables au remplacement des unités dans le cadre de l'ORU-M ......................................... 2-3 3 Remplacement des unités ORU-M 3.1 Unité de développement (JMCN)................................................................................................... 3-3 4 Réglage après remplacement des unités ORU-M 4.1 Réglage des unités de développement et des développeurs..................................................... 4-3 Table des matières-2 Unité de développement (JMCN) 1 Introduction Unité de développement (JMCN) 1-3 1 1 Introduction Objectifs de l'ORU-M (Operator Replaceable Unit Management) Le système ORU-M permet aux utilisateurs de remplacer eux-mêmes certains composants de la machine. Il contribue aussi à réduire la durée d'immobilisation de la machine. Note à l'intention des utilisateurs d'ORU-M Assurez-vous de suivre des formations pour obtenir un certificat d'agrément avant d'utiliser l'ORU-M. Lors du remplacement des composants (ou unités) de la machine, veuillez suivre les instructions figurant dans les INSTRUCTIONS pour REMPLACEMENT de l'ORU-M (Operator Replaceable Unit Management). Pour effectuer les opérations de remplacement en toute sécurité et fiabilité, conservez soigneusement INSTRUCTIONS pour REMPLACEMENT de l'ORU-M (Operator Replaceable Unit Management), afin de ne pas les égarer. Si cela arrivait malgré tout, veuillez contacter votre SAV. 1 1-4 Unité de développement (JMCN) 2 Préalables au remplacement des unités dans le cadre de l'ORU-M Unité de développement (JMCN) 2-3 2.1 Préalables au remplacement des unités dans le cadre de l'ORU-M 2 2 Préalables au remplacement des unités dans le cadre de l'ORU-M Lors du remplacement des unités ORU-M, accédez au mode ORU-M, puis remplacez les unités ORU-M conformément aux procédures indiquées à l'écran. Ce guide explique les différentes rubriques dans l'ordre où elles apparaissent à l'écran. Veuillez vous reporter à "2 Préalables au remplacement des unités dans le cadre de l'ORU-M" en ce qui concerne les préparatifs à effectuer une fois que vous avez accédé au mode ORU-M, mais avant de remplacer les unités, "3 Remplacement des unités ORU-M" pour ce qui est des procédures de remplacement de chaque unité, et "4 Réglage après remplacement des unités ORU-M" pour ce qui traite des procédures de réglages après remplacement des unités. Imprimez ce guide et conservez-le pour le consulter avant de commencer l'opération de remplacement. 2.1 Préalables au remplacement des unités dans le cadre de l'ORU-M Avant de remplacer les unités ORU-M, suivez la procédure ci-dessous pour passer en mode ORU-M. 1 Appuyez sur Utilitaire/Compteur. L'écran Utilitaire s'affiche. 2 Appuyez sur [M-RUO (Rpl.Unité)]. L'écran Unité Remplacement M-RUO s'affiche. Cet écran affiche la liste des noms d'unité, des cycles de vie, et des dates de remplacement des unités ORU-M. 2 Préalables au remplacement des unités dans le cadre de l'ORU-M 2-4 Unité de développement (JMCN) 2.1 3 Imprimez un exemplaire concernant la machine. % Appuyez sur [Type de sortie Test]. L'écran Sélection de Type de sortie Test s'affiche. 4 Sélectionnez [Type1] ou [Type2]. Type1 : Sortie Demi-teintes. Type2 : Sortie Couleur (CMJN). REMARQUE Veillez à imprimer les deux types de sorties test, Type1 et Type2. % Appuyez sur [Retour]. L'écran Unité Remplacement M-RUO réapparaît. Unité de développement (JMCN) 2-5 2.1 Préalables au remplacement des unités dans le cadre de l'ORU-M 2 5 Appuyez sur [MODE IMPR.]. L'écran Mode d'impression s'affiche. 6 Sélectionnez un magasin configuré pour du papier A3 ou 11 e 17, et appuyez sur Départ sur le panneau de commande. REMARQUE Il ne vous sera pas possible d'imprimer la totalité de la sortie-test si vous spécifiez un autre format que A3 ou 11 e 17. 7 Appuyez sur [Quitter MImpr]. L'écran Unité Remplacement M-RUO réapparaît. 8 Répétez les étapes 3 à 7 pour imprimer les deux sorties, de [Type1] et [Type2]. 2 Préalables au remplacement des unités dans le cadre de l'ORU-M 2-6 Unité de développement (JMCN) 2.1 9 Appuyez sur [Lancer Remplacement]. 10 Appuyez sur [Oui]. La machine s'éteint automatiquement. Unité de développement (JMCN) 2-7 2.1 Préalables au remplacement des unités dans le cadre de l'ORU-M 2 11 Si vous voulez procéder aux travaux de remplacement, appuyez sur [Oui]. La machine passe automatiquement en mode Remplacement ORU-M, et affiche à nouveau l'écran Unité Remplacement M-RUO. 12 Veuillez vous reporter à "3 Remplacement des unités ORU-M" pour remplacer les unités. REMARQUE Lors du remplacement, vous pouvez vérifier à l'écran les procédures relatives au remplacement des unités. 2 Préalables au remplacement des unités dans le cadre de l'ORU-M 2-8 Unité de développement (JMCN) 2.1 3 Remplacement des unités ORU-M Unité de développement (JMCN) 3-3 3.1 Unité de développement (JMCN) 3 3 Remplacement des unités ORU-M 3.1 Unité de développement (JMCN) REMARQUE Lors du remplacement de l'unité, vous pouvez vérifier à l'écran les procédures relatives au remplacement des unités. 1 Ouvrez la porte avant [1] de la machine and et desserrez les vis [2] (2 pièces). 2 Ouvrez la porte de la trémie toner [1]. 3 Desserez la vis [1] (1 pièce) et ouvrez le capot avant du ventilateur [2]. 3 Unité de développement (JMCN) 3-4 Unité de développement (JMCN) 3.1 4 Tirez la poignée de droite [1] et la poignée de gauche [2] vers le haut et vers l'avant, puis tirez l'unité de traitement [3]. REMARQUE Tenez la poignée en son milieu lors de la manipulation. 5 Débranchez le connecteur [1] à côté de l'étiquette bleu lavande après avoir libéré le loquet. REMARQUE L'illustration donne un exemple de la manière de remplacer l'unité de développement Jaune. 6 Enlevez les vis [1] (6 pièces). Poussez et faites glisser la pièce de pression [2] vers l'intérieur puis déposez-la. 7 Enlevez l'unité de développement [1] à remplacer de l'unité de traitement [2]. Enlevez la face arrière de l'unité de développement [1] de la machine, puis enlevez l'unité de développement complète de l'unité de traitement [2]. REMARQUE Lorsque vous enlevez l'unité de développement, veillez à ne pas toucher le rouleau de développement ou à ne pas l'endommager. Veillez aussi à maintenir l'unité de développement à l'horizontale. (Sinon du toner pourrait se répandre par le capot supérieur de l'unité de développement.) 8 Déballez l'unité de développement neuve puis enlevez la bande extérieure. Unité de développement (JMCN) 3-5 3.1 Unité de développement (JMCN) 3 9 Insérez l'unité de développement par son côté entrée toner [1] et installez l'unité de développement complète [1] dans l'unité de traitement [2]. 10 Insérez l'extrémité inférieure [1] de la pièce de pression dans l'orifice [2] de l'unité de traitement, placez l'extrémité supérieure [3] de la pièce de pression dans la rainure [4] de l'unité de traitement, puis fixez-la à l'unité en la positionnant en face du logement de la vis. REMARQUE Vérifiez que le ressort de la pièce de maintien de l'unité de développement n'est pas courbé lors de la repose. Si le ressort est tordu lors l'installation de la pièce de maintien de l'unité de développement, cela peut réduire la pression d'appui de la pièce de maintien de l'unité de développement. 11 Serrez les vis [1] (6 pièces). 3 Unité de développement (JMCN) 3-6 Unité de développement (JMCN) 3.1 12 Branchez le connecteur [1] autour de l'étiquette de couleur lavande. 13 Replacez l'unité de traitement à sa position d'origine en tenant la poignée de droite [1] et la poignée de gauche [2] et en poussant l'unité de traitement [3]. Replacez ensuite la poignée de droite et la poignée de gauche dans leur position d'origine. REMARQUE Tenez la poignée en son milieu lors de la manipulation. 14 Refermez le capot supérieur droit [1] et fixez-le avec la vis [2] (1 pièce). 15 Fermez la porte de la trémie toner [1] et fixez-la avec les vis [2] et [3] (1 pièce de chaque). 16 Fermez la porte avant [1] de la machine. 4 Réglage après remplacement des unités ORU-M Unité de développement (JMCN) 4-3 4.1 Réglage des unités de développement et des développeurs 4 4 Réglage après remplacement des unités ORU-M 4.1 Réglage des unités de développement et des développeurs Après avoir remplacé les unités de développement, chargez le développeur selon les procédures suivantes et réglez les unités de développement. 1 Après avoir remplacé les unités de développement, appuyez sur [Effectuer Remplacem.] sur l'écran Unité Remplacement M-RUO. La machine s'allume automatiquement et l'écran Enregistrer Unité Remplacement M-RUO s'affiche. REMARQUE Assurez-vous de fixer la trémie de toner avec les vis et de fermer la porte avant. Sinon, la machine ne s'éteindra pas automatiquement. Réglage des 4 unités de développement et des développeurs 4-4 Unité de développement (JMCN) 4.1 2 Sélectionnez la ligne de l'unité de développement que vous avez remplacée. % Si l'unité de développement que vous avez remplacée n'est pas affichée à l'écran, appuyez sur [+] [,] pour la faire apparaître. % Lorsque vous remplacez plusieurs unités de développement, vous pouvez configurer les unités en une seule fois en les sélectionnant et en définissant un motif de remplacement pour ces unités. 3 Appuyez sur [Raison Remplac] afin d'afficher une boîte de dialogue demandant la raison du remplacement. Sélectionnez une raison, et appuyez sur [Valider]. REMARQUE N'oubliez pas de spécifier une raison pour les unités de développement remplacées. Sinon, cela ne réinitialisera pas le compteur Cycle Vie des unités de développement. En outre, il ne sera pas possible de charger les développeurs ou de procéder à un réglage correct lors des étapes suivantes. Une fois que le motif a été défini, la case de gauche apparaît cochée. Unité de développement (JMCN) 4-5 4.1 Réglage des unités de développement et des développeurs 4 4 Appuyez sur [Terminé]. Une boite de dialogue permettant de spécifier les unités de développement que vous avez remplacées s'affiche. 5 Sélectionnez l'unité de développement que vous avez remplacée. REMARQUE Définissez l'unité de développement usagée et l'unité de développement neuve comme A et B. Veillez à bien identifier les unités A et B, et appuyez sur [Unité Développement A] ou [Unité Développement B] pour sélectionner l'unité de développement neuve. Lors de l'installation d'une unité de développement neuve, assignez la lettre (A ou B) qui était associée à l'ancienne unité de développement (celle que vous n'utiliserez plus) à l'unité de développement neuve. Appuyez sur [Enreg. Nouv. Unité Dével.] pour sélectionner [Unité Dév. A] ou [Unité Dév. B]. 6 Appuyez sur [Terminé]. Une boite de dialogue demandant de remettre le compteur de l'unité de développement sélectionnée à zéro s'affiche. Réglage des 4 unités de développement et des développeurs 4-6 Unité de développement (JMCN) 4.1 7 Appuyez sur [Oui]. L'écran Réglage après Remplacement Unité s'affiche. 8 Appuyez sur [Départ]. L'écran Exécuter Chargement Automatique Développeur s'affiche. Éléments de réglage • Charge Développeur Automatique • Réglage Initial Capteur Densité Toner • Ajustement Gamma • Ajustement Décalage Gamma Imprimante Unité de développement (JMCN) 4-7 4.1 Réglage des unités de développement et des développeurs 4 9 Ouvrez la porte avant [1] de la machine and et desserrez les vis [2] (2 pièces). 10 Ouvrez la porte de la trémie toner [1]. 11 Enlevez les vis [1] (2 pièces), puis déposez le capot supérieur [2]. REMARQUE Le remplissage du développeur se fait en mode réglage une fois que le remplacement des unités de développement est achevé. La dépose du capot avant n'est nécessaire que pour le chargement du développeur dans l'unité de développement Jaune. 12 Desserrez les vis [1] (2 pièces), puis enlevez la plaque de chargement du développeur [2]. Desserez les vis [3] (2 pièces), puis enlevez l'entonnoir de chargement du développeur (noir) [4]. 13 Insérez la plaque de chargement du développeur [2] sur les vis à épaulement [1] sur le dessus de l'unité de développement de la couleur dont vous chargez le développeur et fixez la plaque en la faisant coulisser vers la droite. Réglage des 4 unités de développement et des développeurs 4-8 Unité de développement (JMCN) 4.1 REMARQUE Pour fixer la plaque de chargement du développeur [2] sur l'unité de développement Jaune, veillez à utiliser les vis à épaulement (2 pièces). Lors de la fixation de la plaque de chargement du développeur [2] sur une autre unité de développement que la Jaune, utilisez la vis à épaulement (1 pièce) et la vis (1 pièce) située en haut à gauche de la vis à épaulement. Lorsque vous fixez la plaque de chargement du développeur [2], faites attention à ne pas pincer les câbles. 14 Fixez l'entonnoir de chargement du développeur (noir) [2] en insérant les broches (gauche et droite) de l'entonnoir dans les orifices situés sur la plaque de chargement du développeur [1]. Lorsque vous fixez l'entonnoir de chargement du développeur (noir), placez-le sur le fond de la plaque de chargement du développeur. REMARQUE Assurez-vous de fixer fermement l'embout de l'entonnoir de chargement du développeur (noir) sur l'entrée toner de l'unité de développement. Pour la durée du chargement, placez du papier A4 ou 8,5 e 11 sur la plaque qui se trouve sous l'unité de traitement. 15 Placez l'entonnoir de chargement du développeur (blanc) [1] fourni dans le kit développeur, à l'intérieur de l'entonnoir de chargement du développeur (noir) [2]. REMARQUE L'entonnoir de chargement du développeur (blanc) est fourni avec chaque kit développeur. Ne réutilisez pas l'entonnoir de chargement du développeur (blanc). Utilisez l'entonnoir de chargement du développeur (blanc). Assurez-vous de nettoyer l'entonnoir de chargement du développeur (noir) après l'avoir utilisé pour chaque couleur. Faute de nettoyage, les couleurs pourraient se mélanger. Vérifiez que l'obturateur de sortie du développeur est bien fermé avant de charger le développeur. Le développeur peut s'écouler par le fond. Unité de développement (JMCN) 4-9 4.1 Réglage des unités de développement et des développeurs 4 16 Appuyez sur la touche de la couleur dont vous êtes prêt à charger le développeur et appuyez sur [Départ]. Le moteur de l'unité de développement se met à tourner. 17 Versez le développeur neuf [1] dans l'entonnoir de chargement du développeur (blanc) [2]. Le développeur s'écoule dans l'unité de développement. % Le moteur qui s'est mis à tourner lorsque vous avez appuyé sur la touche [Départ] s'arrêtera automatiquement après un certain temps. S'il reste du développeur dans l'entonnoir lorsque le moteur s'arrête, appuyez sur [Départ] une nouvelle fois. Si le moteur continue à tourner alors que le développeur s'est complètement écoulé et qu'il n'en reste plus dans l'entonnoir, appuyez sur [Annuler]. Le moteur s'arrête. 18 Chargez les développeurs pour toutes les unités de développement que vous avez remplacées, en effectuant les étapes 9 à 18. 19 Enlevez l'entonnoir de chargement du développeur (blanc) [1] et l'entonnoir de chargement du développeur (noir) [2]. REMARQUE Assurez-vous de nettoyer l'entonnoir de chargement du développeur (noir). Réglage des 4 unités de développement et des développeurs 4-10 Unité de développement (JMCN) 4.1 20 Faites glisser la plaque de chargement du développeur [1] vers la gauche tout en tirant vers l'extérieur la lame-ressort de la plaque de chargement du développeur [1], puis enlevez la plaque. 21 Serrez la vis [1] (2 pièces), puis ramenez l'entonnoir de chargement du développeur (noir) à sa position d'origine. Serrez les vis [3] (2 pièces), puis ramenez la plaque de chargement du développeur [4] à sa position d'origine. 22 Tirez la vitre antipoussière [1]. 23 Nettoyez la vitre antipoussière avec un chiffon nonpelucheux et un aérosol d'air sec, puis ramenez la vitre antipoussière à sa position d'origine. 24 Installez le capot supérieur [1] et fixez-le avec la vis [2] (2 pièces). REMARQUE La dépose du capot avant n'est nécessaire que pour le chargement du développeur dans l'unité de développement Jaune. Unité de développement (JMCN) 4-11 4.1 Réglage des unités de développement et des développeurs 4 25 Fermez la porte de la trémie toner [1] et fixez-la avec les vis [2] et [3] (1 pièce de chaque). 26 Fermez la porte avant [1] de la machine. 27 Appuyez sur [Retour]. Réglage des 4 unités de développement et des développeurs 4-12 Unité de développement (JMCN) 4.1 L'écran Réglage après Remplacement Unité réapparaît. Une fois que l'[Ajustement Gamma] s'est achevé automatiquement, l'écran Correction décalage Gamma de l'imprimante s'affiche. 28 Écran Correction décalage Gamma de l'imprimante. (1) Appuyez sur [Suivant] ou [Précédent] pour sélectionner l'écran de l'élément que vous voulez régler sur l'écran Ajustement Décalage Gamma Imprimante. (2) [Appuyez sur Rajuster.] Si vous voulez refaire un ajustement, appuyez sur [Oui]. Sinon, appuyez sur [Non]. d Pour info Si le dégradé de la zone sélectionnée dans l'image est largement divergent, appuyez sur Réinit. DonnRégl pour remettre le décalage gamma de l'imprimante à 0 (zéro), et appuyez ensuite sur [Rajuster]. (3) Appuyez sur [MODE IMPR.]. Sur l'écran Mode d'impression, sélectionnez un magasin pour du papier A4 (8,5 e 11), appuyez ensuite sur Départ sur le panneau de commande. Les mires tests sont imprimées. Une fois que la mire test est imprimée, l'écran Correction décalage Gamma de l'imprimante réapparaît automatiquement. (4) Place la mire test imprimée [1] sur la vitre d'exposition en plaçant la mire avec précision sur le plateau de positionnement des originaux /Lt [3] et le plateau de positionnement des originaux /Rr [4]. d Pour info Placez la mire de manière à ce que le repère triangulaire vert [2] soit orienté vers la gauche (face imprimée dessous). Unité de développement (JMCN) 4-13 4.1 Réglage des unités de développement et des développeurs 4 29 Appuyez sur [ Fermer ]sur l'écran L'ajustement après remplacement unité est terminé. L'écran Réglage après Remplacement Unité réapparaît. 30 Appuyez sur [Type de sortie Test]. Procédez à une sortie test à l'issue du réglage. L'écran Sélection de Type de sortie Test s'affiche. 31 Sélectionnez [Type1] ou [Type2]. Type1 : Sortie Demi-teintes. Type2 : Sortie Couleur (CMJN). REMARQUE Veillez à imprimer les deux types de sorties test, Type1 et Type2. % Appuyez sur [Retour]. L'écran Réglage après Remplacement Unité réapparaît. (5) Placez 10 feuilles de papier (blanc) sur la mire test, et fermez l'ADF ou le couvre-original. d Pour info N'utilisez que du papier copie blanc, car il n'est pas possible de régler correctement le gamma de l'imprimante avec du papier qui n'est pas blanc. (6) Appuyez sur [Départ] sur l'écran. La mire test est numérisée et les données actuelles JMCN sont mises à jour. d Pour info L'évaluation Accepté/Rejeté des données de réglage n'a pas lieu lors du premier balayage, par conséquent le message "Terminé normalement" ne s'affiche pas. Du fait que évaluation Accepté/Rejeté n'a lieu qu'après la deuxième lecture, effectuez plusieurs fois cette opération d'ajustement jusqu'à ce que le message "Terminé normalement" s'affiche. (7) Appuyez sur [MODE IMPR.] sur l'écran Réglage décalage gamma imprimante auto. (8) Répétez les étapes 3 - 6. (9) Vérifiez que le message "Terminé normalement" s'est affiché. Si un autre message que "Terminé normalement" s'affiche, répétez les étapes 7 à 8. (10) Appuyez sur [Retour]. L'écran Réglage après Remplacement Unité réapparaît. Réglage des 4 unités de développement et des développeurs 4-14 Unité de développement (JMCN) 4.1 32 Appuyez sur [MODE IMPR.]. L'écran Mode d'impression s'affiche. 33 Sélectionnez un magasin configuré pour du papier A3 ou 11 e 17, et appuyez sur Départ sur le panneau de commande. 34 Appuyez sur [Quitter MImpr]. L'écran Réglage après Remplacement Unité réapparaît. 35 Répétez les étapes 31 à 35 pour imprimer les deux sorties test, [Type1] et [Type2]. 36 Confirmez le résultat du réglage en comparant les exemplaires test d'avant et d'après réglage. 37 Appuyez sur [Fermer] sur l'écran Réglage après Remplacement Unité. L'écran Machine réapparaît. Guide de l‘utilisateur D 131F/191F Table des matières-1 Table des matières 1 Introduction 2 Conseils de sécurité 2.1 Informations de sécurité pour utilisation correcte....................2-3 2.1.1 Symboles d'avertissement et de précaution .............................2-3 2.1.2 Signification des symboles ........................................................2-4 2.1.3 AVERTISSEMENT ......................................................................2-4 2.1.4 ATTENTION................................................................................2-5 2.1.5 Précautions à prendre................................................................2-7 2.1.6 Divers .........................................................................................2-7 2.2 Termes et symboles .....................................................................2-8 2.3 Précautions ...................................................................................2-9 2.3.1 Précautions d'installation...........................................................2-9 2.3.2 Alimentation ...............................................................................2-9 2.3.3 Espace requis ..........................................................................2-10 2.3.4 Précautions d'utilisation...........................................................2-11 2.3.5 Réglementation en matière de copie .......................................2-13 3 Implantation et installation 3.1 Identification des éléments contenus dans l'emballage ..........3-3 3.2 Nomenclature................................................................................3-4 3.3 Présentation du panneau de contrôle ........................................3-5 3.4 Préparation de votre machine.....................................................3-8 3.4.1 Déblocage du miroir mobile .......................................................3-8 3.4.2 Installation du plateau originaux ................................................3-9 3.4.3 Raccordements........................................................................3-10 3.4.4 Installation du tambour et des cartouches de toner ................3-11 3.4.5 Mise sous tension ....................................................................3-14 3.4.6 Désactivation du mode transport.............................................3-15 3.4.7 Chargement du papier et définition du format de papier.........3-15 3.4.8 Réglage du volume du haut-parleur ........................................3-16 Table des matières-2 D 131F/191F 3.5 Réglages initiaux ........................................................................3-17 3.5.1 Effacement des réglages enregistrés ...................................... 3-17 3.5.2 Premières opérations............................................................... 3-18 3.5.3 Paramétrage initial ................................................................... 3-18 3.5.4 Mode Economie d'énergie....................................................... 3-23 3.6 Installation du pilote d'imprimante et du scanner...................3-24 3.6.1 Système d'exploitation pris en charge (Local)......................... 3-24 3.6.2 Installation locale : Port USB Windows ................................... 3-25 3.6.3 Installation locale : Port parallèle Windows (option) ................ 3-36 3.6.4 Désinstallation du pilote........................................................... 3-37 4 Premières opérations 4.1 Conseils d'utilisation....................................................................4-3 4.1.1 Modifier le mode de la machine................................................. 4-3 4.1.2 Saisie de caractères .................................................................. 4-4 4.1.3 Secours Mémoire [CD]............................................................... 4-6 4.1.4 Sélection d'une fonction [CD] .................................................... 4-6 4.1.5 Tableau des fonctions [CD]........................................................ 4-6 4.2 Traitement du papier et des documents .................................... 4-7 4.2.1 Traitement des documents........................................................ 4-7 4.2.2 Traitement du papier................................................................ 4-10 5 Copie 5.1 Avant de réaliser de copies .........................................................5-3 5.1.1 Traitement du papier et des documents.................................... 5-3 5.1.2 Commutation de la machine en mode Copie ............................ 5-3 5.1.3 Affichage du mode attente copie............................................... 5-3 5.1.4 Message de dépassement mémoire.......................................... 5-4 5.2 Opérations de copie..................................................................... 5-5 5.2.1 Réaliser des copies avec l'ADF ................................................. 5-5 5.2.2 Réaliser des copies sur la vitre d'exposition .............................5-5 5.3 Paramètres copie élémentaires .................................................. 5-6 5.3.1 Sélection du type de document................................................. 5-6 5.3.2 Contraste de numérisation ........................................................ 5-6 5.3.3 Taux zoom ................................................................................. 5-7 D 131F/191F Table des matières-3 5.3.4 Nombre de copies......................................................................5-7 5.3.5 Tri de copies ..............................................................................5-8 5.3.6 Sélection du format de papier....................................................5-8 5.3.7 Sélection du format du document .............................................5-9 5.4 Fonctions avancées de copie....................................................5-10 5.4.1 Combiné...................................................................................5-11 5.4.2 Copie recto-verso ....................................................................5-13 5.4.3 Définition de copie ...................................................................5-15 6 Impression PC 6.1 Impression d'un document..........................................................6-3 6.2 Paramètres du pilote d'imprimante ............................................6-4 6.2.1 Ouvrez les propriétés de l'imprimante .......................................6-4 6.2.2 Description des propriétés de l'imprimante...............................6-6 6.3 Annulation d'une tâche d'impression .......................................6-12 6.3.1 Pour annuler une tâche d'impression à partir de la machine ..6-12 7 Numérisation 7.1 Préparation à l'utilisation du pilote TWAIN ................................7-3 7.1.1 Commutation de la machine en mode Scanner ........................7-3 7.1.2 Affichage du mode attente Scanner ..........................................7-3 7.1.3 Numériser une image .................................................................7-4 7.1.4 Accéder au pilote TWAIN...........................................................7-4 7.2 Utilisation du mode RS [CD]........................................................7-4 7.3 Utilisation du mode SB [CD]........................................................7-4 8 Numéroteur automatique 8.1 Fonctions de base du numéroteur automatique .......................8-3 8.1.1 Numéroteurs automatiques .......................................................8-3 8.1.2 Groupes d'appel ........................................................................8-3 8.1.3 Noms de destination et numérotation par répertoire téléphonique ..............................................................................8-3 8.1.4 Caractères spéciaux de numérotation.......................................8-4 Table des matières-4 D 131F/191F 8.2 Touches 1-Touche........................................................................ 8-5 8.2.1 Saisie ou modification d'un numéro 1-Touche.......................... 8-5 8.2.2 Accès rapide à l'enregistrement 1-Touche................................ 8-7 8.2.3 Effacement d'un numéro 1-Touche ........................................... 8-9 8.2.4 Composition avec des touches 1-Touche............................... 8-10 8.3 Numéros abrégés .......................................................................8-12 8.3.1 Introduction ou changement d'un numéro abrégé .................. 8-12 8.3.2 Effacement d'un numéro abrégé ............................................. 8-14 8.3.3 Composition par numéro abrégé............................................. 8-14 8.4 Numérotation pour groupe d'appel [CD]..................................8-16 8.5 Numérotation par répertoire [CD].............................................8-16 9 Emission de fax 9.1 Préalables à l'émission ................................................................ 9-3 9.1.1 Traitement des documents........................................................ 9-3 9.1.2 Définition de la numérisation ..................................................... 9-3 9.1.3 Contraste de numérisation ........................................................ 9-4 9.1.4 Combinaison de définition document et contraste différents sur plusieurs pages....................................................................9-4 9.1.5 Méthode d'émission .................................................................. 9-5 9.1.6 Message de dépassement mémoire.......................................... 9-6 9.2 Emission de fax............................................................................. 9-7 9.2.1 Émission mémoire ..................................................................... 9-7 9.2.2 Emission en temps réel (Emission sans mémoire)................... 9-11 9.3 Rappel [CD].................................................................................9-13 9.4 Confirmation ou annulation de commandes [CD]...................9-13 9.5 Fonctions avancées fax [CD] ....................................................9-13 10 Réception de télécopies 10.1 Réception fax ..............................................................................10-3 10.1.1 Sélection du mode de réception.............................................. 10-3 10.1.2 Mode de réception manuelle ................................................... 10-4 10.1.3 Mode de réception automatique ............................................. 10-4 10.1.4 Prendre les appels manuellement ........................................... 10-6 D 131F/191F Table des matières-5 10.1.5 Basculer en mode de réception automatique ou en mode de réception manuelle ..............................................10-6 10.1.6 En cas de panne de papier pendant la réception fax ..............10-7 10.2 Paramétrage de la réception fax [CD] ......................................10-8 10.3 Fonctions avancées de réception [CD] ....................................10-8 11 Fonctions Boîtes F-code [CD] 12 Fonctions spéciales [CD] 13 Fonctions de sécurité [CD] 14 Paramètres utilisateur [CD] 15 Rapports & Listes 15.1 Tableau des listes et journaux...................................................15-3 15.2 Journal d'activité ........................................................................15-5 15.2.1 Configurer le journal d'activité .................................................15-5 15.2.2 Impression manuelle du journal d'activité................................15-6 15.2.3 Définir l'ordre d'impression du journal d'activité .....................15-6 15.3 Rapport de confirmation d'émission ........................................15-7 15.3.1 Configurer le rapport de confirmation d'émission ...................15-7 15.4 Liste documents en mémoire....................................................15-8 15.5 Notification de perte de document ...........................................15-9 16 Entretien et dépannage 16.1 Entretien ......................................................................................16-3 16.1.1 Conseils de nettoyage .............................................................16-3 16.1.2 Nettoyage de la zone de numérisation ....................................16-3 16.1.3 Nettoyage des rouleaux de l'ADF ............................................16-4 16.1.4 Nettoyage du fil de charge du tambour et de la tête d'impression LED.....................................................................16-5 16.1.5 Remplacement de la cartouche de toner.................................16-6 16.1.6 Remplacement de la cartouche tambour ................................16-8 Table des matières-6 D 131F/191F 16.2 Incidents....................................................................................16-10 16.2.1 Serrage document ................................................................. 16-10 16.2.2 Serrage papier ....................................................................... 16-15 16.2.3 Message d'erreur à l'écran .................................................... 16-20 16.2.4 "Message d'erreur" imprimés ................................................ 16-25 16.2.5 Code d'erreur......................................................................... 16-26 16.2.6 Problèmes machine ............................................................... 16-28 16.2.7 Problèmes de télécopie ......................................................... 16-28 16.2.8 Problèmes de copie............................................................... 16-29 16.2.9 Problèmes d'impression à partir d'un ordinateur .................. 16-29 16.2.10 Problèmes de Scanner .......................................................... 16-30 16.2.11 Problèmes de qualité d'impression ....................................... 16-31 16.2.12 Si les informations contenues dans ce chapitre ne vous permettent pas de résoudre le problème................. 16-34 17 Annexe 17.1 Caractéristiques .........................................................................17-3 17.1.1 Autres....................................................................................... 17-3 17.1.2 Fax ........................................................................................... 17-5 17.1.3 Copie........................................................................................17-5 17.1.4 Imprimante............................................................................... 17-6 17.1.5 Scanner.................................................................................... 17-6 17.1.6 Consommables........................................................................ 17-6 18 Index 1 Introduction Introduction 1 D 131F/191F 1-3 1 Introduction Bienvenue Merci d'avoir choisi le Develop 131F/191F. Ce guide de l'utilisateur décrit les fonctions, les procédures de fonctionnement, les précautions à prendre et les résolutions de problèmes du Develop 131F/191F. Avant d'utiliser l'appareil, il y a lieu de lire entièrement le manuel utilisateur pour assurer un fonctionnement correct et efficace de l'appareil. Une fois que vous avez lu le manuel, conservez-le à portée de main pour le consulter en cas de besoin. Veuillez noter que certaines illustrations de la machine figurant sur le manuel utilisateur peuvent différer de ce que vous voyez en réalité sur votre machine. Label CE (déclaration de conformité) Ce produit est conforme aux directives européennes suivantes : 89/336/EEC, 73/23/EEC et 93/68/EEC. Cette déclaration est valide pour les pays de l'Union Européenne. Cet appareil doit être utilisé avec des câbles d'interface blindés. L'utilisation de câbles non blindés est susceptible d'entraîner des perturbations de radiocommunication et elle est interdite en vertu des directives de l'UE. Cet appareil a été autorisé conformément à la Décision du Conseil 1999/5/ EC pour connexion individuelle d'un terminal au réseau téléphonique public commuté pan-Européen. Toutefois, en raison des différences entre les PSTN (réseaux téléphoniques publics commutés) de chaque pays, cette autorisation ne constitue pas en elle-même l'assurance inconditionnelle que cette machine fonctionnera d'égale manière sur chaque point desservi par les divers réseaux téléphoniques publics. 1 Introduction 1-4 D 131F/191F Si vous rencontrez des problèmes, vous devriez contacter en premier lieu le fournisseur de votre appareil. 2 Note Le fabricant devrait s'assurer que le vendeur et l'utilisateur de l'appareil sont clairement avisés des informations ci-dessus, par le biais de l'emballage et/ou des manuels d'utilisation ou autres formes d'instructions à l'intention de l'utilisateur. Vous pourrez obtenir une déclaration de conformité complète auprès de Develop aux numéros suivants Fax. : +49-511-7404-346, Tél. : +49-511-7404-367 en nous indiquant le numéro de série de votre produit. Ce produit n'est agréé que pour la numérotation par Double Tonalité Multi- Fréquence (DTMF). Lorsqu'il est raccordé directement au réseau téléphonique commuté public (mode PSTN), la numérotation par impulsions ne peut pas être utilisée. Émission d'ozone 7ATTENTION Placer l'appareil dans une pièce largement ventilée % Une quantité d'ozone négligeable se dégage de l'appareil quand celui-ci est utilisé normalement. Cependant, une odeur désagréable peut se faire sentir dans les pièces dont l'aération est insuffisante et lorsque l'appareil est utilisé pendant de longues périodes. Pour avoir la certitude de travailler dans un environnement réunissant des conditions de confort, de santé et de sécurité, il est préférable de bien aérer la pièce où se trouve l'appareil. Niveau sonore Utilisateurs européens Réglementation sur le bruit des machines 3 GSGV, 18.01.1991 : le niveau de pression acoustique pour l'utilisateur est égal ou inférieur à 70dB(A) conformément à la norme européenne EN ISO 7779. Ergonomische Grundlagen für die GS-Prüfung von IT-Geräten in Verbindung mit Bildschirmgeräten Cet appareil n'est pas destiné une utilisation sur une régie vidéo conformément à BildscharbV. Das Gerät ist nicht für die Benutzung am Bildschirmarbeitsplatz gemäß BildscharbV vorgesehen. Introduction 1 D 131F/191F 1-5 Energy Star En tant que Partenaires ENERGY STAR®, nous avons pu déterminer que cet appareil satisfait les directives ENERGY STAR® en matière d'efficience énergétique. Définition d'un produit ENERGY STAR® Un produit ENERGY STAR® intègre une fonction spéciale qui lui permet de basculer automatiquement en "mode d'économie d'énergie" à l'issue d'une certaine période d'inactivité. Un produit ENERGY STAR® utilise l'énergie avec plus d'efficacité, vous permet d'économiser de l'argent sur vos factures d'électricité et contribue à protéger l'environnement. Super G3 Super G3 est une extension des normes de la technologie fax de Groupe 3, permettant d'utiliser des modems haut débit ITU-T V.34 pour la transmission à 33,6 Kbps et à protocoles accélérés pour négociation rapide. JBIG Joint Bi-level Image experts Group, la dernière méthode de l'ITU-T pour la compression des données images. Etant donné que le JBIG compresse les données plus efficacement que le MMR, il se révèle particulièrement efficace pour l'émission de documents comportant des images en demi-teintes (niveaux de gris). 1 Introduction 1-6 D 131F/191F 2 Conseils de sécurité Conseils de sécurité 2 D 131F/191F 2-3 2 Conseils de sécurité 2.1 Informations de sécurité pour utilisation correcte Ce chapitre contient des instructions détaillées relatives à l'exploitation et à la maintenance de cette machine. Pour utiliser au mieux cet appareil, tous les opérateurs doivent lire avec attention ce guide et respecter à la lettre les instructions y figurant. Veuillez conserver ce guide à portée de la main et à proximité de la machine. Veuillez lire ce chapitre avant d'utiliser la machine. Il contient en effet des informations importantes quant à la sécurité de l'utilisateur et la prévention des problèmes liés à l'équipement. Assurez-vous de bien observer l'ensemble des précautions énumérées dans ce guide. Certains points du présent chapitre peuvent ne pas correspondre au produit acheté. 2.1.1 Symboles d'avertissement et de précaution 7AVERTISSEMENT Négliger cet avertissement peut provoquer des blessures graves, voire mortelles. % Tenez compte de cette recommandation concernant la sécurité. 7ATTENTION Le non-respect de cette précaution peut provoquer des blessures graves, ou des dommages matériels. % Tenez compte de cette recommandation concernant la sécurité. 2 Conseils de sécurité 2-4 D 131F/191F 2.1.2 Signification des symboles 2.1.3 AVERTISSEMENT Symbole Signification Un triangle indique un danger contre lequel il y a lieu de se protéger. Ce symbole indique un risque de brûlure. Une ligne diagonale indique une action interdite. Ce symbole met en garde contre un démontage de l'appareil. Un cercle noir indique une action impérative. Ce symbole signale le débranchement impératif de l'appareil. Symbole Signification • Ne pas modifier ce produit, il pourrait prendre feu, subir un choc électrique ou tomber en panne. Si le produit utilise un laser, la source de son faisceau risque d'aveugler l'opérateur. • Ne pas essayer d'enlever les volets et les panneaux fixés sur le produit. Certains produits contiennent à l'intérieur des pièces haute-tension ou une source de faisceau laser susceptibles d'électrocuter ou d'aveugler l'opérateur. • N'utiliser que le cordon d'alimentation fourni. Si le cordon d'alimentation n'est pas livré, n'utilisez que le cordon et la fiche qui sont spécifiés dans les INSTRUCTIONS relatives au CORDON D'ALIMENTATION. L'utilisation d'un autre cordon peut déclencher un feu ou causer une électrocution. • Le cordon d'alimentation fourni avec le produit ne doit être utilisé qu'avec cet appareil et jamais avec un autre appareil. Négliger cette précaution peut déclencher un feu ou causer une électrocution. • N'utiliser que la tension d'alimentation spécifiée. Tout manquement à cela peut déclencher un feu ou causer une électrocution. • Ne pas utiliser d'adapteur multiprises pour brancher tout autre périphérique ou toute autre machine. Le dépassement de la puissance nominale d'une prise murale peut provoquer un incendie ou une électrocution. Ne pas brancher ou débrancher le cordon d'alimentation avec les mains humides : il y a risque d'électrocution. Insérer la prise de courant à fond dans la prise murale. Tout manquement à cela peut déclencher un feu ou causer une électrocution. • Ne jamais gratter ni éroder le cordon d'alimentation, ne pas placer d'objet lourd dessus, ne pas le chauffer, le tordre, le plier, ne pas tirer dessus, ni l'endommager. L'utilisation d'un cordon d'alimentation endommagé (conducteur exposé, fil cassé ou dénudé, etc.) peut provoquer un incendie ou une panne. Si l'une de ces conditions devait apparaître, éteignez immédiatement la machine, débranchez le cordon d'alimentation de la prise murale, puis prenez contact avec votre Service Après-Vente. • Evitez d'utiliser une rallonge électrique. L'utilisation d'une rallonge peut déclencher un feu ou causer une électrocution. Contacter votre S.A.V. si une rallonge s'avère nécessaire. Conseils de sécurité 2 D 131F/191F 2-5 2.1.4 ATTENTION • Ne pas poser de vase ni aucun autre récipient contenant de l'eau ni d'agrafes ou de petits objets métalliques sur le produit. L'eau renversée ou les objets métalliques tombés à l'intérieur du produit peuvent déclencher un incendie ou provoquer une électrocution ou une panne. • Si un morceau de métal, de l'eau ou un corps étranger tombait à l'intérieur de l'appareil, éteignez immédiatement la machine, débranchez le cordon d'alimentation de la prise murale, puis prenez contact avec votre Service Après- Vente. • Si cet appareil devient exceptionnellement chaud, ou s'il dégage de la fumée ou fait entendre un bruit insolite, ne continuez pas à l'utiliser. Mettez immédiatement l'interrupteur en position OFF (Arrêt), débranchez le câble d'alimentation de la prise murale, et contactez votre Service Après-vente. Si vous continuez à l'utiliser dans cet état, il peut prendre feu, ou être source d'électrocution. • Ne continuez pas à utiliser cet appareil s'il est tombé ou si son capot a été endommagé. Mettez immédiatement l'interrupteur en position OFF (Arrêt), débranchez le câble d'alimentation de la prise murale, et contactez votre Service Après-vente. Si vous continuez à l'utiliser dans cet état, il peut prendre feu, ou être source d'électrocution. Ne pas jeter la cartouche de toner ni du toner dans les flammes. Le toner chaud risque de se diffuser et de provoquer des brûlures ou d'autres dommages. Brancher le cordon d'alimentation à une prise électrique équipée d'une borne de mise à la terre. Symbole Signification Symbole Signification • Ne pas utiliser d'aérosols, de liquides ou de gaz inflammables à proximité de ce produit, il pourrait prendre feu. • Ne laissez pas les unités toner ou les unités tambour de fixation à portée des enfants. Le fait de lécher ou d'ingérer ces produits pourrait porter atteinte à votre santé. • Ne pas laisser le moindre objet obstruer les orifices de ventilation de ce produit. La chaleur pourrait s'accumuler à l'intérieur du produit et provoquer un incendie ou un quelconque dysfonctionnement. • Ne pas installer ce produit dans un endroit directement exposé aux rayons du soleil ou près d'un climatiseur ou d'un appareil de chauffage. Les variations de température occasionnées à l'intérieur du produit peuvent provoquer un dysfonctionnement, déclencher un feu ou provoquer une électrocution. • Ne pas installer ce produit dans un endroit poussiéreux ou exposé à la suie ou à la vapeur, à proximité d'une table de cuisine, d'une baignoire ou d'un humidificateur d'air. Un feu, une électrocution ou une panne peut se produire. • Ne pas placer ce produit sur un banc instable ou renversé ou dans un endroit soumis à des vibrations et des chocs importants. Il pourrait tomber et blesser quelqu'un ou provoquer une panne mécanique. • Une fois ce produit installé, montez-le sur un support stable. Si l'appareil bouge ou tombe, il peut blesser quelqu'un. • Ne pas stocker les unités de toner et les tambours PC à proximité d'un lecteur de disquettes ou d'une horloge sensibles au magnétisme. Ces appareils pourraient ne plus fonctionner correctement. 2 Conseils de sécurité 2-6 D 131F/191F Le compartiment de ce produit contient des zones soumises à de hautes températures, susceptibles d'entraîner des brûlures. Lors de la vérification de l'intérieur de la machine, à la recherche d'une anomalie comme un serrage papier par exemple, ne touchez pas les zones (autour de l'unité de fixation, etc.) qui sont indiquées par l'étiquette d'avertissement "ATTENTION – TRÈS CHAUD". Ne placer aucun objet autour de la prise d'alimentation, celle-ci serait difficile à débrancher en cas d'urgence. La prise électrique murale devra être implantée près de l'appareil et facilement accessible, surtout en cas d'urgence car la fiche du cordon peut être dure à extraire de la prise. • Toujours utiliser ce produit dans un local bien ventilé. L'exploitation du produit dans un local mal ventilé pendant une longue période peut mettre votre santé en danger. Aérer la pièce à intervalles réguliers. • A chaque fois que vous déplacez ce produit, assurez-vous de débrancher le cordon d'alimentation et tous les autres câbles. Tout manquement à cette règle peut endommager le cordon ou les câbles et déclencher un feu ou provoquer une électrocution ou une panne. • Pour déplacer cet appareil, tenez-le toujours par les zones spécifiées dans le Manuel d'Utilisation et dans d'autres documents. Si l'appareil tombe, il peut causer de graves blessures corporelles. Le produit risque également d'être endommagé ou de ne plus fonctionner correctement. • Débrancher le cordon d'alimentation plusieurs fois par an et nettoyer la zone entre les bornes de la prise. La poussière qui s'accumule entre les bornes peut provoquer un incendie. • Toujours tenir et tirer la prise lorsque vous débranchez le cordon. Le fait de tirer directement sur le cordon d'alimentation peut l'endommager et déclencher le feu ou provoquer une électrocution. Symbole Signification Conseils de sécurité 2 D 131F/191F 2-7 2.1.5 Précautions à prendre 2.1.6 Divers Symbole Signification • Ne pas stocker les unités de toner, les photoconducteurs et autres fournitures et consommables dans un endroit exposé aux rayons du soleil, à des températures élevées ou à l'humidité, au risque d'un dysfonctionnement et d'une mauvaise qualité d'image. • Ne pas essayer de remplacer l'unité de toner et le tambour photoconducteur dans un endroit exposé aux rayons du soleil. Si le photoconducteur est exposé à la lumière intense, l'image risque d'être de mauvaise qualité. • Ne pas déballer une unité de toner ou un tambour photoconducteur avant que leur utilisation ne soit devenue nécessaire. Ne pas laisser traîner une unité déballée. Installez la immédiatement ou l'image risque d'être de mauvaise qualité. • Ne pas conserver les unités de toner et les photoconducteurs en position verticale ou à l'envers, sinon l'image risque d'être de mauvaise qualité. • Ne pas jeter ou laisser tomber une unité de toner ou un photoconducteur, sinon l'image risque d'être de mauvaise qualité. • Ne pas utiliser ce produit dans un endroit qui génère de l'ammoniac ou d'autres gaz et produits chimiques. Tout manquement à cette règle peut réduire la durée d'utilisation du produit, provoquer des dommages ou diminuer les performances. • Ne pas utiliser ce produit dans un environnement dont la température est en dehors de la plage spécifiée dans le manuel utilisateur, sinon une panne ou un dysfonctionnement peut se produire. • NE PAS essayer d'alimenter cet appareil avec du papier agrafé, du papier carbone ou des feuilles d'aluminium, ce qui pourrait entraîner un dysfonctionnement ou un feu. Ne pas toucher ni égratigner la surface de l'unité de toner, du rouleau de développement ni du photoconducteur, sinon l'image risque d'être de mauvaise qualité. Utiliser les fournitures et les consommables recommandés par le vendeur. L'utilisation de fournitures ou de consommables non recommandés risque d'entraîner une mauvaise qualité de l'image et des pannes. Symbole Signification • Ne pas s'appuyer contre le tableau de commande, cela pourrait entraîner un dysfonctionnement. • Selon l'état des lignes du réseau téléphonique, il se peut que les communications internationales normales ne soient parfois pas possibles. • Si l'on utilise de l'eau du robinet ou d'un puits dans un humidificateur, il se peut que les impuretés contenues dans l'eau se disséminent dans l'air et se redéposent ensuite à l'intérieur de l'imprimante, avec pour effet une détérioration de la qualité d'image. Il est donc recommandé de n'employer que de l'eau pure dans l'humidificateur. • Le ventilateur de refroidissement peut se déclencher automatiquement, mais ce n'est en rien un symptôme de problème. • Des batteries Ni-MH (Nickel Métal Hybride) sont installées à l'intérieur de l'appareil afin de servir de batteries de secours pour sauvegarder la mémoire. Veuillez les mettre au rebut conformément à la législation locale, nationale ou fédérale. 2 Conseils de sécurité 2-8 D 131F/191F 2.2 Termes et symboles Terme, symbole Signification 7 Ce symbole attire votre attention pour éviter tout risque de blessure. IMPORTANT Cette instruction décrit les conditions ou les opérations incorrectes susceptibles d'endommager votre machine. Note Les notes contiennent des conseils, précisent les restrictions et la manière d'éviter les dysfonctionnements. [Valider] Le texte entre [ ] identifie des touches spécifiques sur le panneau de contrôle (par exemple, la touche Valider). LCD Il s'agit de l'afficheur (ou écran) à cristaux liquides. Il affiche les messages, sélections et suggestions lors d'une opération. "XXXXX" Ce sont les éléments qui s'affichent sur l'écran LCD. Document Il s'agit de l'original (ou des originaux papier) que vous envoyez, copiez ou numérisez sur la machine. Papier Papier destiné à l'impression. Tx Indique l'émission. Rx Indique la réception. š, › Montre le sens du papier et du document. Repère de direction Document placé dans l'ADF ou sur la vitre d'exposition Papier chargé dans le magasin papier › ou Néant Ex. A4 š Ex. A5 š Conseils de sécurité 2 D 131F/191F 2-9 2.3 Précautions Veuillez prendre les précautions suivantes afin de conserver l'appareil dans les meilleures conditions possibles. 2.3.1 Précautions d'installation Site d'installation Afin d'assurer une sécurité optimale ainsi que les meilleures performances de votre appareil, il est recommandé de l'installer dans un endroit qui répond aux conditions suivantes : - loin de rideaux ou de matières facilement inflammables - dans un endroit à l'abri de l'eau et d'autres liquides - dans un endroit à l'abri du soleil - dans un endroit à l'abri de la ventilation d'une climatisation ou de la bouche d'un chauffage, et non exposé à des températures très basses ou très élevées - dans un endroit bien ventilé - dans un endroit ne présentant pas un taux d'humidité élevé. - dans un endroit qui ne soit pas trop poussiéreux - sur un support qui ne soit pas sujet à des vibrations - sur un support stable et horizontal - dans un endroit où il n'y a pas génération d'ammoniac ou d'un autre gaz organique - dans un endroit qui n'expose pas directement l'opérateur aux effluents émanant de l'appareil. - dans un endroit qui ne se trouve pas à proximité d'un appareil de chauffage 2.3.2 Alimentation L'alimentation requise est la suivante : - Fluctuation de tension : AC 220-240 V ± 10 Hz - Fluctuation maximale en fréquence : ± 3 Hz - Utilisez une source d'alimentation présentant un minimum de fluctuation en tension ou en fréquence. 2 Conseils de sécurité 2-10 D 131F/191F 2.3.3 Espace requis Afin de faciliter le réapprovisionnement des consommables et l'intervention du Service Après-Vente, il est souhaitable d'assurer les distances minimales indiquées ci-dessous. 2 Note Afin de faciliter l'entretien de la machine et le remplacement des consommables, ménagez un espace suffisant tout autour de la machine. Pour soulever la machine, veillez à saisir celle-ci par l'arrière à l'aide des poignées situées sur le côté droit et sur le côté gauche. Si l'on soulève la machine par l'avant, celle-ci peut être déséquilibrée et tomber. 40 cm 10 cm 30 cm 40 cm 10 cm Conseils de sécurité 2 D 131F/191F 2-11 2.3.4 Précautions d'utilisation Environnement L'environnement requis pour l'appareil est le suivant : - Température : 10°C à 32°C (50°F à 89,6°F) avec des variations qui ne dépasseront pas 10°C (18°F) en une heure. - Humidité : 20% à 80% avec une fluctuation de 10% au maximum par heure Utilisation correcte Pour assurer les performances optimales de l'appareil, suivre les précautions ci-dessous. - NE posez JAMAIS d'objets lourds sur la vitre d'exposition et préservezla des chocs. - N'ouvrez jamais les volets de la machine pendant qu'elle copie ou imprime, un serrage papier pourrait en résulter. - Ne jamais approcher d'objets magnétiques, ni utiliser d'aérosols ou de liquides inflammables près de l'appareil. - S'assurer que la fiche secteur est correctement branchée à la prise de courant en permanence. - S'assurer que la fiche secteur de l'appareil est toujours visible. - Toujours maintenir une bonne ventilation lorsque vous effectuez un grand nombre de copies. 7IMPORTANT Une quantité d'ozone négligeable se dégage de l'appareil quand celuici est utilisé normalement. Cependant, une odeur désagréable peut se faire sentir dans les pièces dont l'aération est insuffisante et lorsque l'appareil est utilisé pendant de longues périodes. % Pour avoir la certitude de travailler dans un environnement réunissant des conditions de confort, il est préférable de bien aérer la pièce où se trouve l'appareil. 7IMPORTANT Le pourtour de l'unité de fixation est extrêmement chaud. % Afin de réduire le risque de brûlure, ne touchez jamais d'autres zones que celles indiquées dans ce manuel. En particulier, bien faire attention à ne pas toucher les pièces signalées par une étiquette d'avertissement, ainsi que les zones à proximité. 2 Conseils de sécurité 2-12 D 131F/191F Transport de l'appareil Si vous devez déplacer l'appareil sur une longue distance, consultez votre Service Après-Vente. Conservation des consommables Prendre les précautions suivantes lors de la manipulation des consommables (toner, papier, etc.). - Stocker les consommables dans un endroit qui répond aux conditions suivantes : à l'abri du soleil loin d'un appareil de chauffage non exposé à un taux élevé d'humidité pas trop poussiéreux - Le papier qui a été déballé mais pas chargé dans le magasin sera conservé dans un sac en plastique, dans un endroit frais et à l'abri de la lumière. - Utilisez exclusivement du toner spécialement fabriqué pour cet appareil. Ne jamais utiliser d'autres types de toner. - Garder tous les consommables hors de la portée des enfants. 7IMPORTANT Veiller à ne pas renverser de toner dans l'appareil, sur les vêtements ou sur les mains. % Si vos mains entrent en contact avec le toner, lavez-les immédiatement à l'eau et au savon. Conseils de sécurité 2 D 131F/191F 2-13 2.3.5 Réglementation en matière de copie Certains types de documents ne doivent jamais être copiés avec l'intention de faire passer les copies pour l'original. La liste suivante n'est pas exhaustive mais elle doit servir de guide pour un comportement responsable en matière de copie. Instruments financiers - Chèques personnels - Chèques de voyage - Mandats - Certificats de dépôt - Obligations ou autres titres de dettes - Titres de valeur Documents officiels - Coupons alimentaires - Timbres poste (oblitérés ou non) - Chèques ou traites tirés par des agences gouvernementales - Timbres fiscaux (oblitérés ou non) - Passeports - Papiers d'immigration - Permis de conduire et carte grise - Actes et titres de propriété Autres - Cartes d'identification, badges ou insignes - Les oeuvres protégées sans l'autorisation du propriétaire des droits Par ailleurs, il est rigoureusement interdit de copier des billets de monnaie nationale ou étrangère ou des oeuvres d'art sans la permission du propriétaire des droits. Si vous avez des doutes sur la nature des documents, consultez un conseiller juridique. 2 Conseils de sécurité 2-14 D 131F/191F 3 Implantation et installation Implantation et installation 3 D 131F/191F 3-3 3 Implantation et installation 3.1 Identification des éléments contenus dans l'emballage 2 Note L'aspect du cordon d'alimentation AC et du cordon téléphonique peut différer selon les pays. La cartouche toner livrée avec votre machine est une cartouche toner qui vous permet de d'utiliser immédiatement votre appareil mais qui est prévue pour 3000 tirages ou impressions. Par la suite, vous trouverez chez votre revendeur les cartouches normales et complètement chargées. Câble téléphonique Documentation & étiquettes - Guide de l'utilisateur (le présent manuel) - Etiquette de format papier - Etiquette Numéro 1-Touche - Etiquette Touche de fonction Noyau de ferrite Cartouche tambour Unité principale avec magasin de 500 feuilles Plateau document Imprimante & Scanner CD ROM pilote Câble d'alimentation AC Cartouche toner programmable 3 Implantation et installation 3-4 D 131F/191F 3.2 Nomenclature LINE PHONE1 PHONE2 LINE PHONE1 PHONE2 2ème volet latéral 1er volet latéral Introducteur automatique Guides de document Plateau de docuement Plateau de sortie de docuement Plateau d'introduction Panneau de contrôle Témoin de niveau papier Volet frontal 2ème magasin papier (en option) Magasin papier Couvre-original Vitre d'exposition Magasin de sortie Connecteurs téléphone Connecteur parallèle (en option) Connecteur USB Connecteur réseau (en option) Prise d'alimentation AC Interrupteur general de document du papier manuelle Implantation et installation 3 D 131F/191F 3-5 3.3 Présentation du panneau de contrôle 1. Bouton de changement de Mode Une pression sur ce bouton permet de changer le mode de la machine. 2. Voyant Source papier Indique la source de papier sélectionnée. 3. Voyant Alarme S'allume en cas de problème. 4. Comm./Récep. Mémoire - Clignote quand la machine est en communication avec un autre appareil. - S'allume en continu quand la machine a reçu un document en mémoire. 5. Voyant Mode machine Indique dans quel mode se trouve la machine. 6. Format papier/Doc. suivant - En mode copie : Permet de sélectionner le papier que vous voulez utiliser. - Pendant la numérisation d'un document : Permet de commander à la machine de numériser un ou plusieurs documents une fois que la numérisation en cours sera terminée. 7. LCD (Afficheur à cristaux liquides) Affiche les messages et sélections et suggestions pendant une opération. 8. Format Doc. Indique à la machine qu'elle doit numériser un document de format A4, A5 š ou F4. 9. Définition Doc. Sélectionner la définition fax et la définition de la copie. 10.Contraste Règle le niveau de contraste de la numérisation. 1 2345 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 3 Implantation et installation 3-6 D 131F/191F 11.Menu/Retour Permet d'accéder aux paramètres permettant de personnaliser l'utilisation de votre machine. Permet aussi de revenir au précédent niveau du menu. 12.Touches Curseur Permet de naviguer dans les sous-menus, de déplacer le curseur à l'écran et de sélectionner divers éléments et paramètres. - En mode fax : + (Renum.) : Rappelle les numéros que vous avez composés. (Voir page 9-13.) , (Index Tél) : Affiche par ordre alphanumérique les numéros 1-Touche et les numéros abrégés, comme dans un répertoire téléphonique. (Voir page 8-16.) - En mode copie et numérisation : ,+ : Permet de choisir le taux zoom. 13.Valider Permet de sélectionner ou de confirmer les réglages. 14.Annuler Efface les caractères sur l'afficheur LCD et annule les commandes données à la machine. 15.Touches programmables Les fonctions que vous utilisez fréquemment peuvent être assignées à ces trois touches. (Voir "Fonctions spéciales [CD]" à la page 12-3 pour plus d'informations.) Dans leur paramétrage par défaut, ces touches permettent d'activer ou de désactiver les fonctions suivantes : - Touche de fonction programmable 1 : Tri– Active ou désactive la fonction Tri. - Touche de fonction programmable 2 : Intro.Manuelle – Définit le format de papier pour l'introducteur manuel. - Touche de fonction programmable 3 : 2en1– Active ou désactive la fonction 2en1. 16.Fonctions Avancées Vous pouvez choisir parmi toutes les fonctions qui n'ont pas été assignées aux touches de fonction programmables. Les éléments de fonction qui s'affichent peuvent varier en fonction du mode dans lequel se trouve la machine. 17.Num.Abrégée/Groupes Appuyez une fois sur cette touche et tapez un numéro à trois chiffres pour composer un numéro de fax ou de téléphone préalablement enregistré. Si vous appuyez deux fois sur cette touche, vous pouvez taper un numéro Groupe pour effectuer une numérotation groupée. 18.Confirm Job./Abandon Fax Annule ou permet de revoir les tâches de télécopies et les résultats de la communication fax. Implantation et installation 3 D 131F/191F 3-7 19.Touches numériques Permettent d'entrer des valeurs numériques, des numéros de fax ou de téléphone, et des caractères. 20.Réinit. Restaure les paramètres par défaut, ou permet aussi de revenir au mode attente. 21.Début Lance l'opération. 22.Stop Arrête la machine. Cependant, pour arrêter la télécopie, appuyez sur la touche [Confirm.Job/Abandon Fax]. 23.Touches Macro Permet d'effectuer une suite d'opérations enregistrées sous une seule touche. (Voir "Fonctions spéciales [CD]" à la page 12-3 pour plus d'informations.) 24.Touches 1-Touche Permettent de composer un numéro de téléphone ou de fax préalablement enregistré. 23 24 3 Implantation et installation 3-8 D 131F/191F 3.4 Préparation de votre machine 3.4.1 Déblocage du miroir mobile 7IMPORTANT % Ne mettez pas l'appareil sous tension avant d'avoir débloqué l'unité scanner. Cela pourrait endommager la machine. 1 Faites coulisser le curseur de verrouillage en position déblocage comme illustré ci-dessous. 2 Après avoir débloqué l'unité scanner, désactivez le mode transport. (Voir page 3-15.) Implantation et installation 3 D 131F/191F 3-9 3.4.2 Installation du plateau originaux Fixez le plateau pour originaux en insérant ses ergots dans les orifices correspondants, comme indiqué sur l'illustration ci-dessous. 3 Implantation et installation 3-10 D 131F/191F 3.4.3 Raccordements Raccordement de la ligne téléphonique Fixez le connecteur téléphonique sur le câble de la ligne téléphonique, comme illustré ci-dessous. Enfichez une extrémité du fil téléphonique dans la prise marquée LINE et l'autre dans la prise téléphonique murale. Raccordement d'un téléphone externe Si vous désirez que votre machine permette à la fois la réception de fax et de communications vocales, connectez un combiné téléphonique externe (ou un répondeur) sur votre machine. LINE PHONE1 PHONE2 LINE PHONE1 PHONE2 Connecteur téléphonique Prise téléphonique Téléphone externe ou Répondeur (Exemple donné pour l'Allemagne) Noyau de ferrite murale Implantation et installation 3 D 131F/191F 3-11 3.4.4 Installation du tambour et des cartouches de toner 1 Tirez le levier de déverrouillage pour ouvrir le volet latéral. 2 Ouvrez le volet frontal. 3 Tournez vers la gauche le levier de déblocage de la cartouche toner (position déverrouillée) 4 Sortez la cartouche tambour de son emballage et engagez-la fermement dans la machine jusqu'à ce qu'elle s'enclenche complètement en place. 3 Implantation et installation 3-12 D 131F/191F 2 Note Protégez la cartouche tambour de la lumière et spécialement de la lumière vive. 5 Déballez la cartouche de toner de départ. Puis, en la tenant à deux mains, secouez-la doucement pour répartir uniformément le toner à l'intérieur de la cartouche. 2 Note Ne touchez pas le rouleau de la cartouche toner. 6 Insérez fermement la cartouche toner dans la machine jusqu'à ce qu'elle se verrouille en place. 7 Tournez vers la droite le levier de verrouillage de la cartouche jusqu'à ce qu'il s'enclenche en place complètement. Implantation et installation 3 D 131F/191F 3-13 8 Refermez le volet frontal et le volet latéral. 2 Note La machine ne fonctionnera pas tant que toutes les volets ne sont pas correctement fermés. 3 Implantation et installation 3-14 D 131F/191F 3.4.5 Mise sous tension 1 Branchez la fiche femelle du cordon d'alimentation dans la prise AC de la machine et la fiche mâle dans une prise murale reliée à la terre. 7IMPORTANT % Assurez-vous de ne pas mettre la machine sous tension avant d'avoir débloqué l'unité scanner. (Voir page 3-8.) 2 Actionnez l'interrupteur. Il porte des symboles internationaux : [I] pour Marche, [O] pour Arrêt. Le préchauffage de la machine ne dure que quelques secondes. La machine indique : Puis : Pour utiliser la machine, désactivez le mode transport. 2 Note Tant que la machine est sous tension, la lampe du scanner reste allumée ; ce n'est pas une anomalie, mais une nécessité pour la longévité de la lampe du scanner de votre machine. Implantation et installation 3 D 131F/191F 3-15 3.4.6 Désactivation du mode transport Quand la machine est en mode transport, celle-ci indique : Pour désactiver le mode transport : 1 Appuyez sur [Menu], [1], [1], [4]. 2 Appuyez sur [,] ou [+] pour sélectionner "Non" et appuyez sur [Valider]. L'unité scanner se déplace alors dans sa position de repos et la machine est prête à fonctionner. 7IMPORTANT % Si vous devez réexpédier la machine, il faudra réactiver ce mode transport, mettre la machine hors tension et verrouiller l'unité scanner en repoussant le système de blocage. 3.4.7 Chargement du papier et définition du format de papier Veuillez vous reporter à la section "Traitement du papier" à la page 4-10. 3 Implantation et installation 3-16 D 131F/191F 3.4.8 Réglage du volume du haut-parleur 1 Appuyez sur le bouton "Copie/Fax/ Scan" pour faire passer la machine en mode Fax. 2 Appuyez plusieurs fois sur [Fonctions Avancées] jusqu'à ce que "Moniteur" s'affiche. 3 Appuyez sur [Valider]. Une tonalité de numérotation se fera entendre. 4 Appuyez sur [)] ou [*] pour régler le volume. 5 Appuyez plusieurs fois sur [Fonctions Avancées] pour sélectionner "Moniteur" et appuyez sur [Valider] pour raccrocher. Implantation et installation 3 D 131F/191F 3-17 3.5 Réglages initiaux 3.5.1 Effacement des réglages enregistrés Avant d'utiliser votre machine, effacez de la mémoire intégrée les réglages utilisateur. Ainsi la mémoire ne contiendra que vos propres paramètres. 7IMPORTANT % Après avoir défini les réglages initiaux, ne videz plus la mémoire sauf si un technicien autorisé vous demande de le faire. Pour effacer la mémoire : 1 Appuyez sur [Menu], [1], [0], [2]. 2 Si vous voulez effacer le contenu de la mémoire, appuyez sur [Valider]. Si vous ne voulez pas effacer le contenu de la mémoire, appuyez sur [Annuler]. 3 Implantation et installation 3-18 D 131F/191F 3.5.2 Premières opérations Dans certains pays, il est obligatoire que votre nom et numéro de fax figurent sur tous les fax que vous envoyez. Il faut par conséquent enregistrer dans la machine votre nom (ou celui de votre entreprise) et numéro de fax avant toute utilisation. Chacune des pages que vous envoyez comporte à l'arrivée sur la machine réceptrice, une ligne unique en haut de page. Elle indique un nom (désigné aussi Identifiant Terminal Emetteur ou TTI) et un numéro de fax. L'étape suivante "Paramétrage initial" montre comment enregistrer les éléments suivants, dont votre nom et votre numéro de fax. - Langue du LCD et listes - Date et heure - Mode de réception fax - Détection de tonalité - Votre numéro de fax - TTI 1/TTI 2/TTI 3 - TTI usuel - Délai avant passage en mode Economie d'énergie Vous pourrez toujours changer plus tard les réglages que vous définissez ici. 3.5.3 Paramétrage initial Si vous appuyez sur [Réinit.] pendant le réglage préalable, la machine passe en mode attente. Mais elle conservera les paramètres que vous aurez validés par la touche [Valider] comme indiqué ci-après. 1 Appuyez sur le bouton "Copie/Fax/Scan" pour faire passer la machine en mode Fax. Langue 2 Appuyez sur [Menu], [9], [Valider]. La machine indique la langue d'affichage actuellement en vigueur. 3 Appuyez sur [,] ou [+] jusqu'à afficher la langue voulue. Appuyez ensuite sur [Valider] pour enregistrer le réglage et poursuivre. Implantation et installation 3 D 131F/191F 3-19 Date & Heure 4 La machine affiche le réglage actuel des heures et de la date. 5 Sur le clavier numérique tapez la date et l'heure correctes, au format JJMMAA pour la date et au format 24 heures pour l'heure. Par exemple, pour le 16 Juillet 2007, 1:30 de l'après-midi, appuyez sur [1] [6] [0] [7] [0] [7] [1] [3] [3] [0]. 6 Pour modifier un chiffre, appuyez sur [*] pour déplacer le curseur vers la gauche, ou sur [)] pour le déplacer vers la droite. Tapez ensuite le chiffre voulu. 7 Appuyez sur [Valider] pour enregistrer le paramètre date et heure, et poursuivre. Heure d'été Permet de régler l'heure d'été. Si ce réglage est sur "Oui", la machine tient automatiquement compte de l'heure d'été. 1 Appuyez sur [Menu], [9], [Valider]. 2 Sélectionnez "Heure d'été" avec les touches de déplacement et appuyez sur [Valider]. 3 Sélectionnez "Oui" ou "Non" avec les touches de déplacement et appuyez sur [Valider]. Mode de réception fax 4 La machine indique à présent le mode de réception fax en vigueur. 5 Pour l'instant, sélectionnez Mode Fax : prêt. (Pour la description du mode de réception, voir "Sélection du mode de réception" à la page 10-3.) 6 Appuyez sur [Valider] pour enregistrer le réglage et poursuivre. Jour Mois Année Heure 3 Implantation et installation 3-20 D 131F/191F Détection de tonalité 7 La machine vous demande si une tonalité doit être détectée avant la numérotation. 8 Normalement, ce paramètre reste sur "Non". Si vous avez besoin de détecter une tonalité lors de la numérotation, sélectionnez "Oui", il sera cependant impossible d'envoyer un fax en l'absence de tonalité. 9 Appuyez sur [Valider] pour enregistrer le réglage et poursuivre. Votre numéro de fax 10 La machine vous demande ensuite de saisir votre numéro de fax tel que vous voulez qu'il apparaisse sur l'afficheur ou les télécopies reçues par les autres machines. 11 Entrez votre numéro de fax à l'aide du clavier numérique. Ce nombre peut comporter jusqu'à 20 caractères. Pour insérer le signe "+" devant le code de votre pays, appuyez plusieurs fois sur [Fonctions Avancées] jusqu'à afficher "Pause/Numérot. Opt." sur l'écran, puis appuyez sur [Valider]. Pour insérer un trait d'union "–", en vue de faciliter la lecture des noms longs, appuyez plusieurs fois sur [Fonctions Avancées] jusqu'à afficher "Pause/Numérot. Opt.", puis appuyez sur [Valider]. Répétez cette procédure pour insérer à l'écran un caractère "–". En cas d'erreur, appuyez sur [Annuler] pour effacer la saisie vers la gauche. Pour modifier un seul chiffre, appuyez sur [*] ou [)] pour déplacer le curseur, et appuyez sur [Annuler] pour effacer le chiffre voulu. Retapez ensuite le numéro de fax correct. 12 Appuyez sur [Valider] pour enregistrer le numéro. Implantation et installation 3 D 131F/191F 3-21 TTI (Votre Nom) 13 La machine vous demande à présent d'entrer votre nom (ou celui de votre entreprise) tel que vous voulez le voir apparaître en tête des télécopies que vous envoyez. Vous pouvez introduire trois noms différents. Chaque nom peut comporter jusqu'à 22 caractères. Introduisez les caractères à l'aide des touches du clavier numérique. (Veuillez vous reporter à "Saisie de caractères" à la page 4-4.) En cas d'erreur, appuyez sur [Annuler] pour effacer la saisie vers la gauche. Pour modifier un seul caractère, appuyez sur [*] ou [)] pour déplacer le curseur, et appuyez sur [Annuler] pour effacer le caractère voulu. Retapez ensuite le caractère correct. 14 Appuyez sur [Valider]. Si vous ne désirez pas introduire le TTI 2, passez à l'étape 19. 15 Introduisez le nom du TTI 2 à l'aide des touches du clavier numérique. 16 Appuyez sur [Valider]. Si vous ne désirez pas introduire le TTI 3, passez à l'étape 21. 17 Introduisez le nom du TTI 3 à l'aide des touches du clavier numérique. 18 Appuyez sur [Valider] pour enregistrer le réglage et poursuivre. Sélection du TTI usuel 19 La machine vous demande à présent de définir le TTI usuel qui apparaîtra en tête des télécopies que vous envoyez. 20 Appuyez sur [,] ou [+] pour sélectionner TTI 1, TTI 2 ou TTI 3. 21 Appuyez sur [Valider] pour enregistrer le réglage et poursuivre. 3 Implantation et installation 3-22 D 131F/191F Définition du délai avant passage en mode Economie d'énergie 22 La machine vous demande de spécifier le délai avant passage en mode Economie d'énergie. Votre machine passera automatiquement en mode Economie d'énergie une fois que le délai que vous avez spécifié sera écoulé. 23 Introduisez la durée (en minutes) à l'aide des touches du clavier numérique. 24 Appuyez sur [Valider] pour enregistrer le réglage. 25 Appuyez sur [Réinit.] pour revenir au mode attente. Implantation et installation 3 D 131F/191F 3-23 3.5.4 Mode Economie d'énergie Pour économiser l'énergie, votre machine est réglée au départ de manière à passer automatiquement en mode Economie d'énergie après un délai d'inactivité d'environ 5minutes. En mode Economie d'énergie, la machine arrête le préchauffage pour l'impression et affiche à l'écran "Mode Economie d'énergie". Cependant, les voyants LED du panneau de contrôle et la lampe scanner ne s'éteindront pas lorsque la machine est en mode Economie d'énergie. Pour quitter le mode Economie d'énergie, appuyez sur n'importe quelle touche du panneau de contrôle. Lorsque votre machine reçoit un fax alors qu'elle est en mode Economie d'énergie, la machine repasse automatiquement en mode d'activité. Pour changer le paramètre mode Economie d'énergie : 1 Appuyez sur [Menu], [2], [1], [0], [5], [Valider]. 2 Appuyez sur [,] ou [+] pour sélectionner Oui ou Non. 3 Appuyez sur [Valider] pour enregistrer le réglage. 4 Appuyez sur [Réinit.] pour quitter et revenir au mode attente. 2 Note Il reste possible de modifier le réglage spécifiant le délai d'inactivité avant passage en mode Economie d'énergie. Voir "Définition du délai avant passage en mode Economie d'énergie" à la page 3-22 dans "Paramétrage initial" à la page 3-18. Si vous assignez la fonction "Economie d'énergie" à une touche de fonction programmable, vous pouvez basculer immédiatement la machine en mode Economie d'énergie en appuyant sur cette touche de fonction programmable, indépendamment du réglage Oui/Non et du réglage du délai d'inactivité. Pour plus de détails sur les touches de fonction programmables, voir page 12-3. 3 Implantation et installation 3-24 D 131F/191F 3.6 Installation du pilote d'imprimante et du scanner Pour pouvoir utiliser cette machine comme imprimante ou scanner, installez sur votre ordinateur les pilotes contenus dans le CD livré avec la machine. 3.6.1 Système d'exploitation pris en charge (Local) Systèmes d'exploitation - Windows Vista Ultimate - Windows Vista Ultimate Edition 64-bit - Windows Vista Entreprise - Windows Vista Entreprise Edition 64-bit - Windows Vista Business - Windows Vista Business Edition 64-bit - Windows Vista Home Premium - Windows Vista Home Premium Edition 64-bit - Windows Vista Home Basic - Windows Vista Home Basic Edition 64-bit - Windows Serveur 2003 - Windows XP Professionnel - Windows XP Edition familiale - Windows 2000 Professionnel - Windows NT 4.0 Workstation (SP6a ou ultérieur) - Windows Me - Windows 98 Deuxième Edition(SE) - Windows 98 Espace disque L'installation nécessite au moins 10 Mo d'espace disque disponible. 2 Note Windows 98 et Windows NT 4.0 ne sont pris en charge qu'au moyen d'une interface parallèle. Pour l'interface réseau, voir le manuel de la "Carte Interface Réseau". Implantation et installation 3 D 131F/191F 3-25 3.6.2 Installation locale : Port USB Windows 2 Note Une interface USB ne fonctionnera qu'avec Windows 98SE, Windows Me, Windows 2000 et Windows XP, Windows Serveur 2003 et Windows Vista. Windows 98 et Windows NT 4.0 ne prennent pas en charge l'USB. Sous Windows 2000/XP/Serveur 2003/Vista, vous devez vous connecter en tant qu'Administrateur. Si vous aviez déjà installé le pilote Develop 131F/191F vous devez d'abord le désinstaller (voir page 3-37.) 1 Allumez votre ordinateur, mais pour le moment, ne connectez pas encore la machine sur le port USB de l'ordinateur. 2 Insérez le CD fourni dans votre lecteur de CD-ROM. 2 Note Utilisateurs de Windows Vista : Si la boîte de dialogue "Exécution auto" apparaît, cliquez sur [Lancer Setup. ses]. Lorsque la boîte de dialogue "Contrôle de compte d’utilisateur" apparaît, cliquez sur [Autoriser] pour permettre l'installation du pilote. Si cette fenêtre ne s'affiche pas, lancez le fichier setup.exe qui se trouve sur le répertoire racine du CD ROM. 3 Choisissez votre langue, puis cliquez sur [OK]. 4 Dans la fenêtre suivante, cliquez sur [Suivant]. 5 Lorsque la fenêtre comportant le contrat de licence de logiciel apparaît, cliquez sur [Oui] après en avoir lu et acceptés les termes. 3 Implantation et installation 3-26 D 131F/191F 6 Sélectionnez votre machine et cliquez sur [Suivant]. 7 Sélectionnez "USB". 8 Cliquez sur [Suivant]. 9 Cliquez sur [Suivant]. 10 Cliquez sur [Suivant] pour lancer l'installation sur votre ordinateur. 2 Note Utilisateurs de Windows Vista: Pendant l'installation du pilote, la boîte de dialogue "Sécurité Windows" apparaît deux fois. Cliquez sur [Installer ce pilote quand même]. 11 Quand la fenêtre ci-dessous apparaît, cliquez sur [Terminer] pour achever l'installation. Si un message d'erreur apparaît au cours du processus d'installation, ou si vous avez précédemment installé le pilote Develop 131F/191F il faudra d'abord le désinstaller. (Voir page 3-37.) - Utilisateurs Windows 98SE et Windows Me % Passez à la page suivante. - Utilisateurs Windows 2000 Professionnel % Passez à la page page 3-30. - Utilisateurs Windows XP/Serveur 2003 % Passez à la page page 3-32 - Utilisateurs Windows Vista % Passez à la page page 3-34. Implantation et installation 3 D 131F/191F 3-27 Utilisateurs Windows 98SE et Windows Me 2 Note Assurez-vous d'avoir bien suivi les étapes d'installation 1 à 11 décrites dans "Installation locale : Port USB Windows" à la page 3-25. 1 Raccordez le câble USB à votre machine puis à votre ordinateur. 2 Note Veillez à utiliser un câble USB blindé. Un câble non blindé est susceptible de provoquer des interférences sur les radiofréquences. 2 Allumez l'appareil et l'ordinateur. 2 Note Les images suivantes sont tirées de l'Assistant Windows Me. 3 Implantation et installation 3-28 D 131F/191F 3 L' "Assistant Ajout de nouveau matériel" apparaît. Sous Windows Me, sélectionnez "Spécifier l'emplacement du pilote (avancé)" et cliquez sur [Suivant]. Sous Windows 98SE, cliquez sur [Suivant]. Sélectionnez ensuite "Rechercher le meilleur pilote pour votre matériel.(Recommandé)" et cliquez sur [Suivant]. 4 Sous Windows ME, sélectionnez "Rechercher le meilleur pilote pour votre matériel" et "Définir un emplacement". Sous Windows 98SE, sélectionnez "Spécifier un emplacement" et effacez tout autre choix. 5 Cliquez sur [Parcourir] pour naviguer dans l'arborescence de votre disque dur jusqu'à : C:\Develop_131F-191F_GDI, puis cliquez sur [OK]. 6 Suivez les instructions qui s'affichent dans la fenêtre jusqu'à ce que vous puissiez cliquer sur [Terminer]. 7 L' "Assistant Ajout de nouveau matériel" réapparaît. Répétez trois fois encore la même procédure, de l'étape 3 à 6 jusqu'à ce que l'installation soit complètement terminée. Une fois le pilote installé, vous devez configurer le réglage "Option périphérique" pour activer soit le 2ème magasin papier, soit l'unité Recto-verso, soit les deux ensemble. (L'unité Recto-verso n'est disponible que pour D 191F.) Voir à cet effet "Activer les options du périphérique)" sur la page suivante. Implantation et installation 3 D 131F/191F 3-29 Activer les options du périphérique Si votre machine dispose d'options, vous devez ouvrir les propriétés de l'imprimante pour les activer. Pour activer les options du périphérique : 1 Cliquez sur [Démarrer] % [Paramètres] % [Imprimantes]. 2 Cliquez le bouton droit de la souris sur l'icône de l'imprimante Develop GDI, puis cliquez sur [Propriétés]. 3 Cliquez sur l'onglet [Option périph.]. 4 Sélectionnez le ou les périphériques installés sur votre machine. 5 Cliquez sur [OK] puis fermez les propriétés de l'imprimante. 2 Note L'unité Recto-verso n'est disponible que pour D 191F. 3 Implantation et installation 3-30 D 131F/191F Utilisateurs de Windows 2000 Professionnel 2 Note Assurez-vous d'avoir bien suivi les étapes d'installation 1 à 11 décrites dans "Installation locale : Port USB Windows" à la page 3-25. 1 Raccordez le câble USB à votre machine puis à votre ordinateur. 2 Note Veillez à utiliser un câble USB blindé. Un câble non blindé est susceptible de provoquer des interférences sur les radiofréquences. 2 Allumez votre machine. 3 L' "Assistant Nouveau matériel détecté" apparaît. Cliquez sur [Suivant]. 4 Sélectionnez "Rechercher un pilote approprié pour mon périphérique" et cliquez sur [Suivant]. 5 Sélectionnez "Emplacement spécifique" et désactivez toutes les autres options,E enfin cliquez sur [Suivant]. 6 Cliquez sur [Parcourir] pour naviguer dans l'arborescence de votre disque dur jusqu'à : C:\Develop_131F-191F_GDI, puis cliquez sur [OK]. 7 Cliquez sur [Suivant]. Si la boite de dialogue "Signature numérique non trouvée" s'affiche, cliquez sur [Oui] pour installer le pilote. Implantation et installation 3 D 131F/191F 3-31 8 L' "Assistant Nouveau matériel détecté" réapparaît. Répétez la même procédure, de l'étape 12 à 16. 9 Cliquez sur [Terminer]. L'installation du pilote est terminée. Activer les options du périphérique Si votre machine dispose d'options, vous devez ouvrir les préférences d'impression pour les activer. Pour activer les options du périphérique : 1 Cliquez sur [Démarrer] % [Paramètres] % [Imprimantes]. 2 Cliquez le bouton droit de la souris sur l'icône de l'imprimante Develop GDI, puis cliquez sur [Préférences d'impression]. 3 Cliquez sur l'onglet [Option périph.]. 4 Sélectionnez le ou les périphériques installés sur votre machine. 5 Cliquez sur [OK] puis fermez les préférences d'impression. 2 Note L'unité Recto-verso n'est disponible que pour D 191F. 3 Implantation et installation 3-32 D 131F/191F Utilisateurs Windows XP/Serveur 2003 2 Note Assurez-vous d'avoir bien suivi les étapes d'installation 1 à 11 décrites dans "Installation locale : Port USB Windows" à la page 3-25. 1 Raccordez le câble USB à votre machine puis à votre ordinateur. 2 Note Veillez à utiliser un câble USB blindé. Un câble non blindé est susceptible de provoquer des interférences sur les radiofréquences. 2 Allumez votre machine. 3 L' "Assistant Matériel Détecté" apparaît. Cliquez sur [Suivant]. 4 Sélectionnez "Installer à partir d'une liste ou d'un emplacement spécifié" et cliquez sur [Suivant]. 5 Sélectionnez "Inclure cet emplacement dans la recherche" et désactivez toutes les autres options. Cliquez sur [Parcourir] pour naviguer dans l'arborescence de votre disque dur jusqu'à : C:\Develop_131F-191F_GDI, puis cliquez sur [OK]. 6 Cliquez sur [Suivant]. 7 Si la boite de dialogue "test Logo Windows" apparaît, cliquez sur [Continuer] pour installer le pilote. 8 Cliquez sur [Terminer]. Implantation et installation 3 D 131F/191F 3-33 9 L'"Assistant Matériel détecté" pour un autre matériel Develop 131F/ 191F apparaît, répétez alors la même procédure, de l'étape 4 à 8. 10 Cliquez sur [Terminer]. L'installation du pilote est terminée. 3 Implantation et installation 3-34 D 131F/191F Activer les options du périphérique Si votre machine dispose d'options, vous devez ouvrir les préférences d'impression pour les activer. Pour activer le composant en option : 1 Cliquez sur [Démarrer] % [Paramètres] % [Imprimantes]. 2 Cliquez le bouton droit de la souris sur l'icône de l'imprimante Develop 131F/191F puis cliquez sur [Préférences d'impression]. 3 Cliquez sur l'onglet [Option périph.]. 4 Sélectionnez le ou les périphériques installés sur votre machine. 5 Cliquez sur [OK] puis fermez les propriétés de l'imprimante. 2 Note L'unité Recto-verso n'est disponible que pour D 191F. Utilisateurs de Windows Vista 2 Note Assurez-vous d'avoir bien suivi les étapes d'installation 1 à 11 décrites dans "Installation locale : Port USB Windows" à la page 3-25. 1 Branchez le câble USB sur votre appareil et branchez-le ensuite à votre ordinateur. Implantation et installation 3 D 131F/191F 3-35 2 Note Veillez à utiliser un câble USB blindé. Un câble non blindé est susceptible de provoquer des interférences sur les radiofréquences. 2 Allumez votre machine. 3 Le logiciel du pilote va s'installer automatiquement. 4 Une fois que les pilotes ont été correctement installés, le message "Vos matériels sont prêts à être utilisés" apparaît. 2 Note Après l'installation du pilote, vous devez configurer le réglage "Option Périphérique" pour activer soit le 2ème magasin papier, soit l'unité Recto-verso, ou les deux ensemble (L'unité Recto-verso n'est disponible que pour D 191F.) Voir "Activer les options du périphérique" sur la page suivante. Activer les options du périphérique Si votre machine dispose d'options, vous devez ouvrir les préférences d'impression pour les activer. Pour activer les options du périphérique : 1 Cliquez sur [Démarrer] % [Panneau de configuration]. 2 Cliquez sur [Matériel et audio]. 3 Cliquez sur [Imprimantes]. 4 Cliquez le bouton droit de la souris sur l'icône de l'imprimante Develop GDI, puis cliquez sur [Options d'impression...]. 5 Cliquez sur l'onglet [Option périph.]. 6 Sélectionnez le ou les périphériques installés sur votre machine. 7 Cliquez sur [OK] et fermez les préférences d'impression. 2 Note L'unité Recto-verso n'est disponible que pour D 191F. 3 Implantation et installation 3-36 D 131F/191F 3.6.3 Installation locale : Port parallèle Windows (option) 2 Note Cette procédure nécessite une interface parallèle, en option. Une interface parallèle n'est disponible que pour une utilisation avec Windows 98/98SE, Windows Me et Windows NT 4.0 workstation. Sous Windows NT 4.0, vous devez vous connecter en tant qu'Administrateur. Si vous avez précédemment installé le "Pilote Imprimante/Scanner GDI 131F/191F Develop", vous pouvez le mettre à jour simplement en cliquant sur le bouton [Mettre à jour] de la fenêtre de maintenance. 1 Allumez votre machine. 2 Insérez le CD fourni dans votre lecteur de CD-ROM. 2 Note Si cette fenêtre ne s'affiche pas, lancez le fichier setup.exe qui se trouve sur le répertoire racine du CD ROM. 3 Choisissez votre langue puis cliquez sur [Suivant]. 4 Dans la fenêtre suivante, cliquez sur [Suivant]. 5 La fenêtre "Contrat de licence du logiciel" s'affiche. Après avoir lu et accepté le contenu, cliquez sur [Oui]. 6 Sélectionnez votre machine et cliquez sur [Suivant]. 7 Sélectionnez "Parallèle" et cliquez sur [Suivant]. Confirmez le récapitulatif qui s'affiche. Cliquez sur [Suivant] pour lancer l'installation sur votre ordinateur. 8 Quand la fenêtre suivante apparaît, cliquez sur [Terminer] pour achever l'installation. Si un message d'erreur apparaît au cours du processus d'installation, vous devrez procéder à une désinstallation. (Voir page 3-37.) Implantation et installation 3 D 131F/191F 3-37 Activer les options du périphérique Si votre machine dispose d'options, vous devez ouvrir les propriétés de l'imprimante pour les activer. Voir page 3-29 pour les instructions à ce sujet. 3.6.4 Désinstallation du pilote Il est nécessaire de procéder à la désinstallation si vous mettez le logiciel à jour ou si la procédure d'installation échoue. 2 Note Sous Windows NT4.0/2000/XP/Serveur 2003/Vista, vous devez vous connecter en tant qu'Administrateur. Utilisateurs de Windows 98/98SE et Windows Me 1 Sélectionnez "Démarrer, Paramètres", "Panneau de configuration", "Ajout/Suppression de programmes", puis sur l'onglet "Installation/Désinstallation". 2 Sélectionnez "Pilote Imprimante/Scanner GDI 131F/191F Develop" et cliquez sur le bouton [Ajouter/Supprimer]. 3 Suivez les instructions qui s'affichent dans la fenêtre. Sous Windows 2000 Professionnel 1 Sélectionnez "Démarrer", "Paramètres", "Panneau de configuration", "Ajouter/Supprimer des Programmes" et cliquez sur l'icône "Modifier ou supprimer des Programmes". 2 Sélectionnez "Pilote Imprimante/Scanner GDI 131F/191F Develop" et cliquez sur le bouton [Modifier/Supprimer]. 3 Suivez les instructions qui s'affichent dans la fenêtre. 3 Implantation et installation 3-38 D 131F/191F Sous Windows XP et Windows Serveur 2003 1 Sélectionnez "Démarrer", "Panneau de configuration", "Ajout/Suppression de programmes" et cliquez sur l'icône "Modifier ou supprimer des programmes". 2 Sélectionnez "Pilote Imprimante/Scanner GDI 131F/191F Develop" et cliquez sur le bouton [Modifier/Supprimer]. 3 Suivez les instructions qui s'affichent dans la fenêtre. Sous Windows Vista 1 Sélectionnez [Démarrer], [Panneau de configuration], [Programmes], [Programmes et fonctionnalités]. 2 Sélectionnez le pilote Imprimante/Scanner GDI 131F/191F Develop et cliquez sur le bouton [Désinstaller]. 3 Suivez les instructions qui s'affichent dans la fenêtre. 4 Premières opérations Premières opérations 4 D 131F/191F 4-3 4 Premières opérations 4.1 Conseils d'utilisation 4.1.1 Modifier le mode de la machine Pour modifier le mode de la machine, appuyez sur le bouton"Copie/Fax/ Scan". Le voyant Mode machine indique dans quel mode se trouve la machine. 2 Note Il n'est pas possible de changer de mode dans les cas suivants : Pendant la numérisation d'un document. Pendant la transmission en temps réel. Pendant la programmation de tout réglage de fonction. 4 Premières opérations 4-4 D 131F/191F 4.1.2 Saisie de caractères Certains réglages nécessitent la saisie de caractères, par exemple votre TTI (votre nom), le nom d'un fax distant ou autres. Pour introduire des lettres ou autres caractères, voici quelques conseils : En appuyant plusieurs fois sur une touche numérique, vous pouvez accéder aux caractères suivants, comme représenté dans le tableau ci-dessous. Tableau des caractères Pour introduire l'un des caractères réunis sous la même touche numérique, appuyez sur [)] pour déplacer le curseur vers la droite. Clavier numérique Caractères 1 . @ - _ , / : & ‘ o ! ? Note : o représente une espace A B C 2 D E F 3 G H I 4 J K L 5 M N O 6 P Q R S 7 T U V 8 W X Y Z 9 0 Caractères spéciaux Verrouillage majuscules Premières opérations 4 D 131F/191F 4-5 Pour introduire des majuscules ou des minuscules Appuyez sur la touche [#] pour basculer entre majuscule et minuscule. L'indication "Majusc." signifie que la machine n'enregistrera que des lettres en majuscules. L'indication "Minusc." signifie que la machine n'enregistrera que des lettres en minuscules. Introduction de caractères spéciaux Vous pouvez introduire également des caractères spéciaux ou des symboles. 1 Lorsque la machine vous invite à entrer un nom, appuyez sur la touche [1]. L'écran affiche alors : 2 Sélectionnez le caractère que vous désirez à l'aide des touches [*], [)], [+] ou [,]. 3 Pour entrer le caractère, appuyez sur [Valider]. 4 Si vous désirez entrer un autre caractère, répétez les étapes 1 à 3, sinon passez à l'étape suivante. 5 Appuyez sur [Valider] pour l'enregistrer. Correction de caractères Si vous avez saisi une lettre ou un chiffre incorrects, appuyez sur la touche [Annuler] pour effacer vers la gauche. Pour ne modifier qu'un seul caractère ou chiffre, appuyez sur [*] ou [)] pour déplacer le curseur sur ce caractère ou chiffre. Appuyez ensuite sur [Annuler] pour l'effacer. Enfin, retaper correctement le caractère ou le chiffre. 4 Premières opérations 4-6 D 131F/191F 4.1.3 Secours Mémoire [CD] Pour des informations plus détaillées, voir "4 Premières opérations" du mode d'emploi étendu sur le CD-R. 4.1.4 Sélection d'une fonction [CD] Pour des informations plus détaillées, voir "4 Premières opérations" du mode d'emploi étendu sur le CD-R. 4.1.5 Tableau des fonctions [CD] Pour des informations plus détaillées, voir "4 Premières opérations" du mode d'emploi étendu sur le CD-R. Premières opérations 4 D 131F/191F 4-7 4.2 Traitement du papier et des documents 4.2.1 Traitement des documents Avant de commencer à télécopier, copier ou numériser, veuillez lire les instructions suivantes. Document acceptables ADF * En émission en temps réel en mode Super fin, 216 x 356mm. Vitre d'exposition Mono-feuille Multi-feuilles Format (l × L) Max. 216 × 900 mm* Min. 120 × 100 mm Max. 216 × 356 mm Min. 216 × 139,5 mm Quantité 1 feuille Max. 80 feuilles A4, A5, ou F4 (papier de 75 g/m2 ou 20lb) Poids 35,0 à 128,0 g/m2 52,0 à 105,0 g/m2 Epaisseur 0,05 à 0,15 mm 0,07 à 0,12 mm Type de document Papier ordinaire Papier ordinaire Sous-menu Format (l × L) Max. 216 × 356 mm Quantité 1 feuille Poids – Epaisseur Max. 28 mm Type de document Documents qui ne peuvent pas être introduits par l'ADF. 4 Premières opérations 4-8 D 131F/191F Objets à ne pas mettre dans votre machine Pour éviter tout serrage dans l'ADF ou détérioration de l'ADF, n'insérez pas les objets suivants : - Feuilles gondolées, pliées, froissées ou très fines - Documents comportant agrafes, colle, bande adhésive, trombones ou liquide de correction humide - "Notes adhésives" (ou documents sur lesquels sont collées des "notes adhésives") - Carton, papier journal ou tissu - Feuilles comportant du carbone-copie sur l'une ou l'autre face - Cartes de crédit ou objets petits et fins - Transparents de rétroprojection Zone de numérisation La zone de numérisation est représentée ci-dessous. Fax : 208 mm (8,2 in.) Copie : 210 mm (8,3 in.) Fax : 2,5 mm (0,1 in.) Copie : 0 mm (0 in.) Fax : 2,0 mm (0,08 in.) Copie : 0 mm (0 in.) Zone de numérisation A4 Letter Legal F4 Premières opérations 4 D 131F/191F 4-9 Chargement des documents dans l'ADF 1 Introduisez les documents, face orientée vers le haut, bord supérieur en premier. 2 Puis, faites coulisser les guides pour qu'ils correspondent au format du document. Chargement du document sur la vitre d'exposition 1 Assurez-vous qu'il n'y a pas de document dans l'ADF. 2 Relevez le couvre-original. 3 Placez le document, face imprimée vers le bas, sur la vitre d'exposition. Veillez à aligner le document dans le coin supérieur gauche. 4 Refermez doucement le couvre-original. 7IMPORTANT % Lors de la copie d'un document relié, un livre par exemple, l'image copiée peut présenter quelques zones sombres. Pour réduire cet effet, maintenez le document à plat pour empêcher sa partie reliée de se relever. Cependant, il convient de ne pas appuyer trop fort. Cela pourrait briser la vitre d'exposition et causer des blessures. 4 Premières opérations 4-10 D 131F/191F 4.2.2 Traitement du papier Formats papier acceptable Magasin papier Plateau d'introduction manuelle Impression Recto-verso - Le papier de format personnalisé ne peut être utilisé que pour l'impression à partir d'un PC. - Le papier de format A5 ne peut pas être utilisé pour l'impression commandée par PC, mais A5 š est disponible. - N'utilisez pas d'enveloppes à double rabat ou des fermetures à pression car leur introduction est problématique. - Pour les transparents, assurez-vous que leur verso ne comporte pas de papier de protection ou de bande amorce. Si c'est le cas, enlevez le papier de protection ou la bande amorce. Seul le transparent nu doit être introduit. Type de papier Format du papier Quantité Papier ordinaire (poids : 60-90 g/m2) A4, A5 š, F4 500 feuilles (poids : 80 g/m2) Type de papier Format du papier Quantité Papier ordinaire (poids : 60-120 g/m2) A4, A5, A5 š, A6, F4, Letter, Legal, Half-letter š, Executive 50 feuilles (poids : 80 g/m2) Format personnalisé • Largeur : 97 à 216 mm • Longueur : 140 à 356 mm 1 feuille Enveloppes DL (110 × 220) Com#10 (4,125 in. × 9,5 in.) Monarch (3,875 in. × 7,5 in.) 1 enveloppe Carte postale 100 × 148 mm 20 feuilles Transparent A4 20 feuilles Type de papier Format du papier Papier ordinaire (grammage : 60-90 g/m2) A4, F4, Letter, Legal Premières opérations 4 D 131F/191F 4-11 Papier à ne pas utiliser Pour éviter tout serrage ou détérioration de votre machine, n'utilisez pas le papier suivant : - Papier avec marque de pliage - Papier froissé - Papier plié - Papier gondolé - Papier déchiré - Papier carbone - Papier humide - Papier très fin - Papier très épais - Papier déjà imprimé sur imprimante - Papier perforé - Enveloppes avec fermeture à pression - Papier très glacé ou très texturé 4 Premières opérations 4-12 D 131F/191F Zone imprimable La zone imprimable est représentée ci-dessous. Chargement du papier dans le magasin papier 2 Note Après avoir chargé le papier dans le magasin, vous devez spécifier le format du papier que vous avez chargé. (Voir "Programmation du format papier" à la page 4-17.) 1 Tirez pour ouvrir le magasin. 2 Appuyez sur la plaque élévatrice jusqu'à ce qu'elle se verrouille en place. 3 mm (0,12") 3 mm (0,12") 3 mm (0,12") 3 mm (0,12") Zone imprimable Premières opérations 4 D 131F/191F 4-13 3 Ajustez le guide papier arrière pour l'adapter à la longueur du papier. 4 Chargez le papier dans le magasin. - Avant le chargement, égalisez les bords de la ramette de papier. - Ne chargez pas au-delà du repère situé à l'intérieur du magasin. 2 Note Pour éviter les serrages papier, ne rechargez jamais du papier sans avoir préalablement enlevé du magasin tout le papier qui pourrait s'y trouver. En d'autres termes, n'ajoutez pas de feuilles de papier à celles qui se trouvent déjà dans le magasin. 5 Pincez le guide papier latéral puis ajustez-le à la largeur du papier. 4 Premières opérations 4-14 D 131F/191F 6 Fermez le magasin papier. 7 Après avoir chargé le papier dans le magasin, vous devez spécifier le format du papier. (Voir "Programmation du format papier" à la page 4-17.) 8 Apposez sur le devant du magasin l'étiquette indiquant le format papier (fournie avec la machine). Premières opérations 4 D 131F/191F 4-15 Chargement de papier dans l'introducteur manuel Si vous devez utiliser un format de papier qui n'est pas chargé dans le magasin, ou si vous désirez imprimer une enveloppe, un transparent, ou un papier de format personnalisé, vous pouvez charger le papier dans l'introducteur manuel. 2 Note Utilisez toujours les supports d'impression préconisés dans la section "Formats papier acceptable" à la page 4-10 pour éviter les serrages papier et des problèmes de qualité d'impression. 1 Ouvrez l'introducteur manuel situé sur le côté droit de la machine. Déployez le plateau d'extension. 2 Pour installer le papier, levez le levier de déverrouillage du rabat (1) et chargez le papier (2) jusqu'à ce qu'il soit en butée. 4 Premières opérations 4-16 D 131F/191F 3 Ajustez les guides papier (1) au format du papier, puis abaissez le levier de déverrouillage du rabat (2). 4 Une fois le papier chargé dans l'introducteur manuel, vous devez spécifier le format correct en appuyant sur [Intro-Manuelle]. 5 Appuyez sur [,] ou [+] pour sélectionner le format papier que vous voulez utiliser. 6 Appuyez sur [Valider]. 2 Note Il est possible de programmer le format par défaut pour l'introducteur manuel. Voir l'étape 6 de la section "Programmation du format papier" à la page 4-17. Premières opérations 4 D 131F/191F 4-17 Programmation du format papier Sélection par défaut : Magasin 1 : A4, Magasin 2 (en option) : A4, Introducteur manuel : A4 Après avoir chargé le papier dans le magasin, vous devez spécifier le format du papier en suivant la procédure ci-dessous. 1 Appuyez sur [Menu], [2], [1], [0], [1], [Valider]. 2 Appuyez sur [,] ou [+] pour sélectionner le format du papier que vous utilisez dans le magasin 1. 3 Appuyez sur [Valider]. Si vous disposez du deuxième magasin en option, poursuivez à l'étape 4 ; sinon, passez à l'étape 6. 4 Appuyez sur [,] ou [+] pour sélectionner le format du papier que vous utilisez dans le magasin 2. 5 Appuyez sur [Valider]. 6 Vous pouvez aussi programmer le format par défaut pour l'introducteur manuel. Appuyez sur [,] ou [+] pour sélectionner le format papier que vous voulez utiliser dans l'introducteur manuel. Après avoir chargé du papier de format différent dans l'introducteur manuel, vous devez spécifier le format correct du papier à utiliser en appuyant sur [Intro-Manuelle]. 7 Appuyez sur [Valider]. 8 Appuyez sur [Réinit.] pour quitter et revenir au mode attente. 4 Premières opérations 4-18 D 131F/191F 5 Copie Copie 5 D 131F/191F 5-3 5 Copie 5.1 Avant de réaliser de copies 5.1.1 Traitement du papier et des documents Avant de commencer à réaliser des copies, veuillez lire les informations relatives au traitement des documents et du papier, figurant en page 4-7. 5.1.2 Commutation de la machine en mode Copie % Appuyez sur le bouton "Copie/Fax/Scan" jusqu'à ce que le voyant Copie s'allume. 5.1.3 Affichage du mode attente copie % Appuyez sur le bouton "Copie/Fax/Scan" pour faire passer la machine en mode Copie. Quand la machine est en mode Copie, celle-ci indique : - Pour modifier les paramètres, voir "Paramètres copie élémentaires" à la page 5-6. Nombre de copies Taux zoom Format du document Enregistrement du format papier 5 Copie 5-4 D 131F/191F 5.1.4 Message de dépassement mémoire Si vous avez enregistré trop d'informations dans la mémoire de votre machine, le message "Dépassement mémoire" s'affichera à l'écran. La cause peut être : - trop de pages ont été stockées en mémoire, ou - les pages qui sont enregistrées contiennent une quantité excessive d'informations dépassant la capacité de la mémoire. Si ce message apparaît, appuyez sur [Début] pour indiquer à la machine de copier en mémoire un maximum de pages, ou appuyez sur [Annuler] pour supprimer de la mémoire toutes les pages conservées en mémoire pendant l'opération en cours (mais pas celles des opérations précédentes). 2 Note Si vous laissez la machine inactive pendant 3minutes, celle-ci imprimera automatiquement le document enregistré en mémoire pendant l'opération en cours. Copie 5 D 131F/191F 5-5 5.2 Opérations de copie 5.2.1 Réaliser des copies avec l'ADF 1 Appuyez sur le bouton "Copie/Fax/ Scan" pour faire passer la machine en mode Copie. 2 Placez votre document dans l'ADF, face imprimée vers le haut, et ajustez les guides document au format de votre document. 3 Si nécessaire, spécifiez les paramètres de copie, notamment le type de document et le contraste de numérisation, le nombre de copies, le taux zoom et le paramètre Tri. (Voir "Paramètres copie élémentaires" à la page 5-6.) 4 Pour effacer le paramétrage, appuyez sur [Réinit.]. 5 Appuyez sur [Début] pour lancer la copie. Pour arrêter la copie, appuyez sur [Stop]. 5.2.2 Réaliser des copies sur la vitre d'exposition 1 Appuyez sur le bouton "Copie/Fax/ Scan" pour faire passer la machine en mode Copie. 2 Vérifiez qu'aucun document ne se trouve dans l'ADF. Si l'ADF contient un document, celui-ci est prioritaire sur celui qui se trouve sur la vitre d'exposition. 3 Placez le document, face imprimée contre la vitre d'exposition et alignez- le sur le coin supérieur gauche. Puis refermez le couvre-original. 4 Appuyez sur [Format Doc.] pour sélectionner le format du document, A4, A5 š ou F4. 5 Si nécessaire, spécifiez les paramètres de copie, notamment le type de document et le contraste de numérisation, le nombre de copies, le taux zoom et le paramètre Tri. (Voir "Paramètres copie élémentaires" à la page 5-6.) Pour effacer le paramétrage, appuyez sur [Réinit.]. 6 Appuyez sur [Début] pour lancer la copie. Pour arrêter la copie, appuyez sur [Stop]. 5 Copie 5-6 D 131F/191F 5.3 Paramètres copie élémentaires 5.3.1 Sélection du type de document - Texte Sélectionnez ce réglage pour copier des lettres. - Photo/Texte Sélectionnez ce réglage pour copier des documents contenant des photos ou des dessins comportant des lettres. - Photo Sélectionnez ce réglage pour copier des photos ou des dessins. Pour sélectionner le type de document : 1 Appuyez sur [Définition Doc.]. 2 Appuyez sur [)] ou [*] pour sélectionner le type de document. 5.3.2 Contraste de numérisation Le réglage du contraste de numérisation vous permet de compenser toute luminosité ou obscurité excessive des pages du document que vous voulez copier. Pour ajuster le contraste : 1 Appuyez sur [Contraste]. 2 Appuyez sur [*] pour éclaircir, appuyez sur [)] pour assombrir, ou appuyez sur [Contraste] plusieurs fois pour sélectionner le contraste. Pour ne pas confondre les réglages Clair et Foncé, il suffit de se rappeler – "Clair éclaircit" et "Sombre assombrit" – pour faire simple. Copie 5 D 131F/191F 5-7 5.3.3 Taux zoom Vous pouvez entrer le taux zoom avec l'une des 3 méthodes ci-dessous. 2 Note Pour une copie agrandie, utilisez la vitre d'exposition. Utilisation de taux prédéfinis 1 Appuyez sur [+] ou [,] pour sélectionner l'un des taux zoom prédéfinis suivants. - 50% : Min. - 70% : A4 % A5 - 81% : B5 JIS % A5 - 86% : A4 % B5 JIS - 100% - 115% : B5 JIS % A4 - 122% : A5 % B5 JIS - 141% : A5 % A4 - 200% : Max. Réglage du taux par pas de 1% 1 Appuyez sur [Fonctions Avancées] plusieurs fois jusqu'à ce que "Zoom" s'affiche, puis appuyez sur [Valider]. ou Appuyez sur la touche programmable (page 12-3) assignée à la fonction "Zoom". 2 Réglez le taux avec [+] ou [,]. (de 25 à 400% avec la vitre d'exposition, de 25 à 100% avec l'ADF.) Saisie directe du taux zoom 1 Appuyez sur [#]. 2 Entrez le taux zoom avec les touches numériques. (de 25 à 400% avec la vitre d'exposition, de 25 à 100% avec l'ADF.) 3 Appuyez sur [#] une nouvelle fois. 5.3.4 Nombre de copies Vous pouvez réaliser 99 copies maximum. % Avec les touches numériques tapez le nombre de copies désiré (01–99). 5 Copie 5-8 D 131F/191F 5.3.5 Tri de copies 2 Note Le tri de copies n'est possible qu'avec l'ADF. Les copies peuvent être regroupées en jeux consécutifs. % Pour activer le tri de copies, appuyez sur [Tri]. Le voyant de la touche tri s'allume pour confirmer que le tri de copies est activé. % Pour désactiver le tri de copies, appuyez sur [Tri] une nouvelle fois ; le voyant s'éteint. 5.3.6 Sélection du format de papier Par défaut, la machine sélectionne automatiquement le format du papier. La machine indique le format "Auto" lorsque vous chargez du papier à la fois dans le magasin et l'introducteur manuel ou dans le second magasin, en option. D'autre part, le voyant de la source papier disponible s'allume. Toutefois, s'il n'y a pas de papier dans l'introducteur manuel ou que le second magasin en option n'est pas installé la machine affiche le "(Format papier)" à la place de "Auto". Vous pouvez également sélectionner manuellement la source papier en appuyant sur [FormatPapier/DocSuiv]. L'écran affiche le format de papier contenu dans le premier magasin, dans le second magasin (si installé) et dans l'introducteur manuel. Si l'introducteur manuel ne contient pas de papier, la machine indique "Sans" pour l'introducteur manuel. Copie 5 D 131F/191F 5-9 5.3.7 Sélection du format du document Si vous utilisez la vitre d'exposition, sélectionnez le format du document en appuyant sur [Format Doc.] plusieurs fois jusqu'à afficher le format voulu. Vous pouvez choisir entre A4, A5 š ou F4 : 2 Note Lorsque la sélection du format document est réglée sur "Auto" (voir "Paramètres utilisateur [CD]" à la page 14-3), vous ne pouvez pas sélectionner le format du document en appuyant sur [Format Doc.]. Dans ce mode, la machine choisira automatiquement le format du document selon le format papier et le taux zoom qui ont été sélectionnés. [Format Document] indique que la machine sélectionne automatiquement le format du document. En fonction du taux zoom choisi, il se peut que la machine ne puisse pas afficher le véritable format du document et dans ce cas l'écran indique : 5 Copie 5-10 D 131F/191F 5.4 Fonctions avancées de copie Lorsque les fonctions copie suivantes ne sont pas assignées à des touches programmables, il est possible de les sélectionner avec la touche Fonctions Avancées. (Voir "Fonctions spéciales [CD]" à la page 12-3.) Pour sélectionner une fonction copie à l'aide de la touche Fonctions Avancées : 1 Appuyez sur le bouton "Copie/Fax/Scan" pour faire passer la machine en mode Copie.. 2 Appuyez sur [Fonctions Avancées]. 3 Appuyez sur [,] ou [+], ou [Fonctions Avancées] plusieurs fois pour sélectionner la fonction voulue. Appuyez ensuite sur [Valider]. Le tableau ci-dessous énumère les fonctions avancées disponibles en mode copie et la séquence d'affichage. Reportez-vous aux pages indiquées pour les détails des fonctions. Fonction Avancée Description Page de référence Zoom Ajuste le taux zoom par pas de 1%. page 5-7 Copie Recto-Verso Active ou désactive la copie recto-verso. (Cette fonction n'est disponible que pour D 191F.) page 5-13 Compteur pages Affiche le nombre total de pages imprimées et numérisées. page 12-3 Economie d’énergie Sélection Oui/Non pour le mode économie d'énergie. page 3-23 En ligne Annule l'impression à partir du PC. page 6-12 Switch Mode Permet de changer le mode de la machine. page 4-3 Tri copies Sélection Oui/Non pour la copie avec tri. (Par défaut, cette fonction est pré-assignée à la "Touche progr. 1".) page 5-8 Intro-Manuelle Définit le format papier de l'introducteur manuel. (Par défaut, cette fonction est pré-assignée à la "Touche progr. 2".) page 4-15 Combiné Sélection Oui/Non pour la copie combinée. (Par défaut, cette fonction est pré-assignée à la "Touche progr. 3".) page 5-11 Copie 5 D 131F/191F 5-11 5.4.1 Combiné Cette fonction vous permet de copier deux documents recto sur une seule feuille de papier A4. 1 Vérifiez que la machine se trouve en mode copie. 2 Placez votre document dans l'ADF face imprimée vers le haut ou sur la vitre d'exposition, face imprimée vers le bas. 3 Pour effectuer une copie combinée : Appuyez sur [Combiné]. La touche COMBINER s'allume pour indiquer que la fonction est activée. Orientation du document sur l'ADF ou sur la vitre d'exposition Image obtenue en copie combinée 5 Copie 5-12 D 131F/191F 4 Procédez éventuellement aux réglages suivants. (Voir "Paramètres copie élémentaires" à la page 5-6.) - Type de document et contraste de numérisation - Nombre de copies - Taux Zoom (25 à 400% pour la vitre d'exposition, 25 à 100% pour l'ADF) - Pour restaurer les paramètres copie par défaut, appuyez sur [Réinit.]. 5 Appuyez sur [Début]. Pour arrêter la copie, appuyez sur [Stop]. Copie 5 D 131F/191F 5-13 5.4.2 Copie recto-verso Cette fonction vous permet de copier 2 documents recto sur les 2 faces d'une feuille. 2 Note Avec l'ADF, l'agrandissement de la copie n'est pas disponible. Cette machine ne dispose pas de la fonction rotation d'image. L'unité Copie recto-verso n'est disponible que pour D 191F. Orientation du document sur l'ADF ou sur la vitre d'exposition Position de reliure Image obtenue en copie recto-verso G&D Haut G&D Haut G&D Haut 5 Copie 5-14 D 131F/191F Copie recto-verso d'un document recto 1 Vérifiez que la machine se trouve en mode copie. 2 Placez votre document dans l'ADF face imprimée vers le haut ou sur la vitre d'exposition, face imprimée vers le bas. 3 Appuyez sur [Fonctions Avancées] jusqu'à afficher "Copie Rectoverso" et appuyez sur [Valider]. Choisissez l'un des éléments suivants et appuyez sur [Valider]. ou Appuyez sur la touche de fonction programmable "Copie Rectoverso " et choisissez l'un des éléments suivants. - Non : Annule la copie recto-verso. - G&D : Pour relier la copie recto-verso à gauche ou à droite. - Haut : Pour relier la copie recto-verso en haut. 4 Appuyez sur [Début]. Pour arrêter l'opération de copie, appuyez sur [Stop]. 2 Note L'unité Recto-verso n'est disponible que pour D 191F. G&D Haut Orientation du document sur l'ADF ou sur la vitre d'exposition Position de reliure Image obtenue en copie recto-verso Copie 5 D 131F/191F 5-15 5.4.3 Définition de copie Cette fonction offre la meilleure qualité copie disponible. Elle demande cependant plus de mémoire que la définition copie ordinaire. Donc si vous tentez de copier de nombreuses pages à la fois avec ce réglage, une saturation de la mémoire peut se produire. 1 Vérifiez que la machine se trouve en mode copie. 2 Placez votre document dans l'ADF face imprimée vers le haut, ou sur la vitre d'exposition, face imprimée vers le bas. 3 Appuyez sur [Définition Doc.]. 4 Appuyez sur [,] ou [+] ou [Définition Doc.] pour sélectionner "600dpi". 5 Procédez éventuellement aux réglages suivants. (Voir "Paramètres copie élémentaires" à la page 5-6.) - Type de document et contraste de numérisation - Nombre de copies Pour restaurer les paramètres copie par défaut, appuyez sur [Réinit.]. 6 Appuyez sur [Début] pour lancer la copie. Pour arrêter la copie, appuyez sur [Stop]. 5 Copie 5-16 D 131F/191F 6 Impression PC Impression PC 6 D 131F/191F 6-3 6 Impression PC 6.1 Impression d'un document 1 Vérifiez que vous avez préalablement installé le pilote d'imprimante sur votre ordinateur. Pour plus de détails, voir "Installation du pilote d'imprimante et du scanner" à la page 3-24. 2 A partir de votre application logicielle, sélectionnez la commande d'impression. Assurez-vous de sélectionner le pilote d'imprimante "Develop 131F/ 191F GDI". 3 Si vous désirez procéder à des réglages relatifs à l'impression du document, cliquez sur [Propriétés] ou [Configurer]. Pour plus de détails, voir "Paramètres du pilote d'imprimante," ci-dessous. 4 Après avoir éventuellement modifié les paramètres d'impression, cliquez sur [OK] pour lancer la tâche d'impression. 5 Votre ordinateur envoie à votre machine une commande d'impression ainsi que les données à imprimer. 6 Impression PC 6-4 D 131F/191F 6.2 Paramètres du pilote d'imprimante 6.2.1 Ouvrez les propriétés de l'imprimante Pour ouvrir les propriétés de l'imprimante, il y a deux méthodes : - A partir de votre application logicielle - Depuis le dossier de l'imprimante 2 Note Lorsque vous changez les propriétés de l'imprimante depuis une application logicielle, les nouveaux paramètres ne seront pris en compte que pour la tâche d'impression en cours. Pour changer les réglages par défaut de l'imprimante, procédez depuis le dossier "Imprimantes". Ce changement peut affecter tout utilisateur qui partage la même imprimante. A partir de l'application logicielle L'ouverture des propriétés de l'imprimante à partir de l'application logicielle dépend du type d'application que vous utilisez. Voir le manuel de votre logiciel pour plus de détails. L'exemple suivant utilise Microsoft Word 2000. 1 Sélectionnez "Imprimer" dans le menu Fichier. 2 La boîte de dialogue Imprimer s'affiche. Dans le champ Nom, sélectionnez votre imprimante GDI Develop, puis cliquez sur [Propriétés]. 3 La fenêtre des propriétés de l'imprimante s'ouvre. Pour plus de détails, voir "Description des propriétés de l'imprimante" à la page 6-6. Impression PC 6 D 131F/191F 6-5 Depuis le dossier de l'imprimante 2 Note Sous Windows NT4.0/2000/XP/Serveur 2003/Vista, vous devez vous connecter en tant qu'Administrateur. 1 Cliquez sur [Démarrer], [Paramètres], puis cliquez sur [Imprimantes]. - Windows Vista, cliquez sur [Démarrer] % [Panneau de configuration] % [Matériel et audio] % [Imprimantes]. - Sous Windows XP Professionnel, cliquez sur [Démarrer] puis sur [Imprimantes et télécopieurs]. - Sous Windows XP Home edition, cliquez sur [Démarrer], [Panneau de configuration], [Imprimantes et autres périphériques], puis cliquez sur [Imprimantes et télécopieurs]. 2 Faites un clic droit sur l'icône Develop GDI, et cliquez sur [Propriétés] (Windows 98/98SE/Me), [Document, options par défaut...] (Windows NT4.0), ou [Préférences d'impression] (Windows 2000/XP/Server2003/ Vista). 3 La fenêtre des propriétés de l'imprimante s'ouvre. Pour plus de détails, voir "Description des propriétés de l'imprimante" à la page 6-6. 6 Impression PC 6-6 D 131F/191F 6.2.2 Description des propriétés de l'imprimante 2 Note La fenêtre représentée dans cette section se rapporte à Windows XP. La fenêtre affichée sur votre ordinateur peut être différente en fonction de votre système d'exploitation Windows. Onglet Papier Remplir page Choisissez cette option pour mettre votre tâche d'impression à l'échelle du format de papier sélectionné indépendamment du format logique du document. Si vous voulez que votre document soit ajusté au format de papier sélectionné, cochez la case "Adapter". 2 Note Quand l'option "Combiner" de l'onglet "Mise en page" est activée, il n'est pas possible de spécifier l'option "Remplir page". Echelle(%) Vous pouvez agrandir ou réduire le document par pas de 1%, de 25% à 400%. 2 Note Lorsque l'option "Adapter" ou "Combiner" est activée, l'option "Echelle(%)" ne peut pas être spécifiée. Impression PC 6 D 131F/191F 6-7 Copies Tapez le nombre de copies (1 à 99) à imprimer. Tri Si vous sélectionnez "Oui" pour activer la fonction tri, une tâche de plusieurs pages sera imprimée en jeux assemblés. Si vous sélectionnez "Non", elle sera imprimée page par page. Format papier Sélectionne le format papier dans la liste déroulante qui indique les formats pris en charge par le paramétrage en vigueur du pilote d'imprimante. Les formats papier indiqués sur la liste déroulante découlent des contraintes provenant des paramètres "Source papier" et "Combiner". Si vous ne trouvez pas le format voulu dans cette liste, modifiez les paramètres de la source papier. 2 Note Pour plus de détails sur les formats papier pris en charge par votre machine, voir "Formats papier acceptable" à la page 4-10. Orientation L'option Portrait permet d'obtenir une impression verticale sur le papier. L'option Paysage permet d'obtenir une impression horizontale sur le papier. Personnaliser % Cliquez sur ce bouton si vous voulez ajouter, modifier ou supprimer votre format de papier personnalisé. Il est possible d'ajouter jusqu'à 50 formats papier personnalisés. 2 Note Ce bouton n'est disponible que si "Intro. Manuelle" a été sélectionné comme source papier et que l'option "Combiner" n'est pas activée. 6 Impression PC 6-8 D 131F/191F Pour ajouter un format papier personnalisé : 1 Cliquez sur [Personnaliser]. 2 Cliquez sur [Ajouter]. 3 Tapez le nom utilisé pour identifier votre papier personnalisé. Ce nom peut comporter 20 caractères maximum. 4 Spécifiez la largeur et la longueur de votre format papier personnalisé. 5 Cliquez sur [OK]. Pour supprimer un format papier personnalisé : 1 Sélectionnez le nom de papier que vous voulez supprimer. 2 Cliquez sur [Supprimer]. Résolution Permet de sélectionner la définition d'impression. Source papier Ce paramètre spécifie le magasin ou l'introducteur manuel dans lequel le papier enregistré est chargé. Type papier Cette option vous permet de choisir le type papier. Economie Toner Sélectionnez cette option pour économiser le toner, sachant que cela diminue la qualité de l'impression. Paramètre Densité % Cliquez pour ouvrir la fenêtre de réglage de la densité et ajuster le niveau de la densité d'impression. Impression PC 6 D 131F/191F 6-9 Onglet Mise en page Recto-verso 2 Note La fonction de copie recto-verso n'est disponible que pour D 191F. Imprimer les 2 faces Vous pouvez imprimer sur les deux faces de la feuille. La position de reliure doit être spécifiée pour l'impression recto-verso afin d'harmoniser l'orientation des deux faces (livre), sélectionnez "Reliure gauche" ou "Reliure droite". Pour inverser l'orientation (dépliant), sélectionnez "Reliure Haut". Régalage de Duplex Sélectionnez ce bouton pour ajuster la marge. Combiner Sélectionnez le nombre de pages par feuille que vous voulez imprimer (2, 4 ou 8). 2 Note Avant de régler cette fonction, assurez-vous que l'échelle est réglée sur 100%. Une fois que le paramètre "Combiner" est réglé, la mise à l'échelle sera automatiquement déterminée et ne peut pas être modifiée manuellement. Si l'impression d'un document de plusieurs pages avec cette option donne un résultat qui ne répond pas à votre attente, désactivez l'option "Tri" et réessayez. 6 Impression PC 6-10 D 131F/191F Ligne séparatrice Vous pouvez imprimer une ligne de séparation autour de chaque page imprimée sur la feuille. Détail de Combiner Cliquez sur ce bouton pour ouvrir la boîte Détail de Combiner vous permettant de spécifier l'ordre des pages combinées sur le papier. Livret La fonction "Livret" n'est disponible que pour D 191F équipé de l'unité rectoverso. Vous pouvez imprimer plusieurs pages pour former un livre en pliant ensemble les feuilles de papier en deux par leur milieu. Pour sélectionner cette fonction, cochez la case "Imprimer les 2 faces" et sélectionnez "N-2" pour "Combiner". Impression de livret Permet de définir la position de reliure d'un livret. La position de reliure que vous spécifier dépend de l'orientation d'impression définie dans "Orientation" sous l'onglet "Papier". Si vous sélectionnez "Portrait", vous pouvez spécifier la position de reliure "Gauche" ou "Droite" et si vous avez sélectionné "Paysage", vous pouvez spécifier la position de reliure "Supérieur" ou "Inférieur". Impression PC 6 D 131F/191F 6-11 Onglet Option périph. Utiliser le ou les périphérique(s) Pour activer le 2ème magasin papier et/ou l'unité Recto-verso, cochez la case correspondante dans la fenêtre "Option Périphérique". 2 Note L'unité Recto-verso n'est disponible que pour D 191F. 6 Impression PC 6-12 D 131F/191F 6.3 Annulation d'une tâche d'impression 6.3.1 Pour annuler une tâche d'impression à partir de la machine Pendant l'impression PC, l'écran se présente comme ci-contre. Si vous voulez annuler la tâche d'impression en cours, suivez la procédure ci-dessous : 1 Appuyez sur [Fonctions Avancées] et appuyez sur [+] jusqu'à afficher "En ligne" sur l'écran, puis appuyez sur [Valider]. Appuyez sur [,] ou [+] pour sélectionner "Non". ou Appuyez sur la touche programmable assignée à la fonction "En ligne". (Veuillez vous reporter à page 12-3.) 2 La machine affichera l'écran suivant : 3 Pour annuler l'impression PC en cours, appuyez sur [Valider]. Si vous ne souhaitez pas annuler l'impression PC en cours, appuyez sur [Annuler]. 7 Numérisation Numérisation 7 D 131F/191F 7-3 7 Numérisation 7.1 Préparation à l'utilisation du pilote TWAIN 7.1.1 Commutation de la machine en mode Scanner % Appuyez sur le bouton "Copie/Fax/Scan" jusqu'à ce que le voyant Scan s'allume. 7.1.2 Affichage du mode attente Scanner % Appuyez sur le bouton "Copie/Fax/Scan" pour faire passer la machine en mode Scanner. Quand la machine est en mode Scanner, celle-ci indique : - Pour changer le réglage initial, voir "Numérisation" à la page 7-3. Résolution Largeur de numérisation Taux zoom 7 Numérisation 7-4 D 131F/191F 7.1.3 Numériser une image Il y a deux manières de numériser une image : Mode de numérisation en temps réel (mode RS) Si vous choisissez le mode Numérisation en temps réel, votre machine numérise un document et le transfère immédiatement sur votre ordinateur. Le mode RS est le mode utilisé par la plupart des scanners de documents. Mode Boîte Analyse (mode SB) Si vous choisissez le mode Boîte Analyse, les données numérisées seront enregistrées dans la boîte d'analyse de votre machine. Vous pouvez la télécharger à partir de votre application logicielle pour peu qu'elle soit compatible TWAIN. 7.1.4 Accéder au pilote TWAIN Suivez les étapes ci-dessous pour accéder au pilote TWAIN depuis votre application logicielle. 1 Allumez votre machine. 2 Lancez l'application logicielle qui prend en charge la numérisation TWAIN. 3 Sélectionnez le Scanner Develop 131F/191F comme périphérique de numérisation. 2 Note La procédure de sélection d'un périphérique scanner peut varier selon le logiciel employé. En cas de doute, consultez le manuel du logiciel. 7.2 Utilisation du mode RS [CD] Pour des informations plus détaillées, voir "7 Numérisation" du mode d'emploi étendu sur le CD-R. 7.3 Utilisation du mode SB [CD] Pour des informations plus détaillées, voir "7 Numérisation" du mode d'emploi étendu sur le CD-R. 8 Numéroteur automatique Numéroteur automatique 8 D 131F/191F 8-3 8 Numéroteur automatique 8.1 Fonctions de base du numéroteur automatique Le numéroteur automatique de votre machine conserve en mémoire les numéros de fax et de téléphone le plus fréquemment appelés et vous permet de les composer immédiatement. 8.1.1 Numéroteurs automatiques Il y a deux sortes de numérotations automatiques. Leur différence réside dans la manière de composer les numéros : 8.1.2 Groupes d'appel Les groupes d'appel sont des groupes de numéros de fax et permettent de faciliter l'envoi d'un même message vers un grand nombre de destinations. Votre machine peut enregistrer 200 numéros dans 32 groupes d'appel max. Voir également "Numérotation pour groupe d'appel [CD]" à la page 8-16. 8.1.3 Noms de destination et numérotation par répertoire téléphonique Au moment d'enregistrer les numéros dans le numéroteur automatique, vous pouvez leur donner des noms évocateurs ou descriptifs, par exemple "Chicago office" ou "Bureau de facturation". Le répertoire téléphonique trie ces noms par ordre alphabétique. Grâce à la numérotation par répertoire téléphonique, vous pouvez rechercher ces numéros par leurs noms comme vous le feriez avec un simple répertoire téléphonique. Voir également "Numérotation par répertoire [CD]" à la page 8-16. Type Procédure de numérotation Quantité mémorisée Touche 1-Touche Appuyez sur des touches marquées de 1 à 40 situées sur le côté gauche du panneau de contrôle 40 Numéro abrégé Appuyez sur Num. Abrégée/Groupes, suivi d'un identifiant à trois chiffres, de 001 à 160 160 8 Numéroteur automatique 8-4 D 131F/191F 8.1.4 Caractères spéciaux de numérotation Lors de l'enregistrement dans le numéroteur, la machine vous permet d'introduire des caractères spéciaux. Le tableau ci-dessous décrit brièvement chacun de ces caractères. Il indique aussi les touches à manipuler pour enregistrer ces caractères dans le numéroteur automatique. 2 Note Pour assigner "Pause/Numérot.Opt." à une Touche de fonction programmable, voir page 12-3. Caractères Effet Procédure /P Chaque pause dure 2 secondes. Si vous devez attendre une autre tonalité ou signal à n'importe quel stade de la séquence de numérotation, introduisez une pause dans le numéro. (Vous pouvez modifier la durée de la pause. Voir page 14-3.) Appuyez sur [Fonctions Avancées] plusieurs fois jusqu'à ce que "Pause/ Numérot. Opt." apparaisse, puis appuyez sur [Valider]. ou Appuyez 1 fois sur une touche de fonction programmable à laquelle "Pause/Numérot.Opt." a été assigné – Facilite la lecture des numéros longs. Appuyez sur [Fonctions Avancées] plusieurs fois jusqu'à ce que "Pause/ Numérot.Opt." apparaisse, puis appuyez sur [Valider]. Répétez cette procédure jusqu'à ce que le caractère "-" s'affiche à l'écran à cristaux liquides. ou Appuyez 2 fois sur la Touche de fonction programmable à laquelle "Pause/ Numérot.Opt." a été assigné. /N Introduit un "Préfixe" pour accéder à un autre réseau téléphonique. "/N" doit être tapé avant le premier chiffre du numéro à appeler. Appuyez sur [Fonctions Avancées] plusieurs fois jusqu'à ce que "Préfixe (/N)" apparaisse, puis appuyez sur [Valider]. Répétez cette procédure jusqu'à ce que le caractère "/N" s'affiche à l'écran à cristaux liquides. ou Appuyez 4 fois sur la Touche de fonction programmable à laquelle "Pause/ Numérot.Opt." a été assigné. Numéroteur automatique 8 D 131F/191F 8-5 8.2 Touches 1-Touche 8.2.1 Saisie ou modification d'un numéro 1-Touche A l'aide des touches étiquetées 1 à 40, vous pouvez enregistrer dans la machine 40 numéros 1-Touche. 1 Appuyez sur [Menu], [1], [1], [1], [Valider]. Un numéro 1-Touche vide s'affiche. 2 Appuyez sur [,] ou [+] pour sélectionner un numéro 1-Touche. La sélection peut aussi se faire en appuyant directement sur la touche correspondante. 3 Appuyez sur [Valider]. 4 A l'aide des touches numériques introduisez le numéro exact tel que votre machine devrait le composer. Chaque numéro peut comporter jusqu'à 40 caractères. Pour changer un numéro, appuyez sur [*] ou [)] pour déplacer le curseur, et appuyez sur [Annuler] pour effacer le numéro. Retapez ensuite le numéro correct. 5 Appuyez sur [Valider]. 6 A l'aide des touches numériques tapez le nom de la touche 1-Touche. Chaque nom peut comporter jusqu'à 24 caractères. Pour la méthode d'introduction des caractères, voir "Saisie de caractères" à la page 4-4. Pour changer un nom, appuyez sur [*] ou [)] pour déplacer le curseur, et appuyez sur [Annuler] pour effacer le nom. Retapez ensuite le nom correct. 7 Appuyez sur [Valider] pour enregistrer la programmation. Le numéro 1-Touche vide suivant s'affiche. 8 Numéroteur automatique 8-6 D 131F/191F 8 Pour introduire un autre numéro 1-Touche, répétez cette procédure à partir de l'étape 2. Pour quitter et revenir au mode attente, appuyez sur [Réinit.]. 9 Pour une identification rapide, apposez sur les touches les étiquettes de numéros 1-Touche livrées avec la machine. 2 Note Pour imprimer la liste des numéros 1-Touche, appuyez sur [Menu], [5], [1], [0], [7], [Valider]. Numéroteur automatique 8 D 131F/191F 8-7 8.2.2 Accès rapide à l'enregistrement 1-Touche 1 Vérifiez que la machine se trouve en mode attente fax. 2 Appuyez sur la touches 1-Touche vide que vous désirez enregistrer. L'écran affiche : Pour annuler cette opération, appuyez sur [Annuler]. 3 Pour enregistrer le numéro 1-Touche, appuyez sur [Valider]. 4 A l'aide des touches numériques, introduisez le numéro exact tel que votre machine devrait le composer. Chaque numéro peut comporter jusqu'à 40 caractères. Pour changer un numéro, appuyez sur [*] ou [)] pour déplacer le curseur, et appuyez sur [Annuler] pour effacer le numéro. Retapez ensuite le numéro correct. 5 Appuyez sur [Valider]. 6 A l'aide des touches numériques tapez le nom de la touche 1-Touche. Chaque nom peut comporter jusqu'à 24 caractères. Pour la méthode d'introduction des caractères, voir "Saisie de caractères" à la page 4-4. Pour changer un nom, appuyez sur [*] ou [)] pour déplacer le curseur, et appuyez sur [Annuler] pour effacer le nom. Retapez ensuite le nom correct. 7 Appuyez sur [Valider] pour enregistrer la programmation. La machine revient en mode attente. 8 Numéroteur automatique 8-8 D 131F/191F 8 Pour une identification rapide, apposez sur les touches les étiquettes de numéros 1-Touche livrées avec la machine. Numéroteur automatique 8 D 131F/191F 8-9 8.2.3 Effacement d'un numéro 1-Touche 1 Appuyez sur [Menu], [1], [1], [2], [Valider]. 2 Appuyez sur [,] ou [+] pour sélectionner un numéro 1-Touche. La sélection peut aussi se faire en appuyant directement sur la touche correspondante. 3 Appuyez 2 fois sur [Valider]. Si vous voulez quitter sans effacer, appuyez sur [Annuler]. 4 Pour effacer un autre numéro 1-Touche, répétez la procédure à partir de l'étape 2. Sinon, appuyez sur [Réinit.] pour quitter et revenir au mode attente. 8 Numéroteur automatique 8-10 D 131F/191F 8.2.4 Composition avec des touches 1-Touche Numérotation fax par 1-Touche 1 Appuyez sur le bouton "Copie/Fax/Scan" pour faire passer la machine en mode Fax. 2 Placez le document dans l'ADF ou sur la vitre d'exposition. 3 Si vous utilisez la vitre d'exposition, sélectionnez le format du document en appuyant sur [Format Doc.]. 4 Si besoin, réglez la définition et le contraste. 5 Ouvrez le panneau 1-Touche et appuyez sur la touche correspondant au numéro enregistré. Touches 1-Touche Numéroteur automatique 8 D 131F/191F 8-11 Numérotation téléphonique par 1-Touche 2 Note Pour passer un appel vocal à partir de la machine, vous devez y raccorder un combiné téléphonique. (Voir "Raccordement d'un téléphone externe" à la page 3-10.) 1 Décrochez. 2 Appuyez sur la touche 1-Touche correspondant au numéro programmé voulu. 3 C'est à vous, parlez à votre interlocuteur. 8 Numéroteur automatique 8-12 D 131F/191F 8.3 Numéros abrégés 8.3.1 Introduction ou changement d'un numéro abrégé Vous pouvez enregistrer dans la machine 160 numéros abrégés, désignés par un identifiant à trois chiffres, de 001 à 160. 1 Appuyez sur [Menu], [1], [2], [1], [Valider]. Un numéro abrégé vide s'affiche. 2 Appuyez sur [,] ou [+] pour sélectionner un numéro abrégé. Vous pouvez aussi sélectionner à l'aide des touches numériques un numéro abrégé en tapant directement l'identifiant à 3 chiffres correspondant (001-160). 3 Appuyez sur [Valider]. 4 A l'aide des touches numériques introduisez le numéro exact tel que votre machine devrait le composer. Chaque numéro peut comporter jusqu'à 40 caractères. Pour changer un numéro, appuyez sur [*] ou [)] pour déplacer le curseur, et appuyez sur [Annuler] pour effacer le numéro. Retapez ensuite le numéro correct. 5 Appuyez sur [Valider]. 6 A l'aide des touches numériques tapez le nom du numéro abrégé. Chaque nom peut comporter jusqu'à 24 caractères. Pour la méthode d'introduction des caractères, voir "Saisie de caractères" à la page 4-4. Pour changer un nom, appuyez sur [*] ou [)] pour déplacer le curseur, et appuyez sur [Annuler] pour effacer le nom. Retapez ensuite le nom correct. 7 Appuyez sur [Valider] pour enregistrer la programmation. Le numéro abrégé vide suivant s'affiche. Numéroteur automatique 8 D 131F/191F 8-13 8 Pour introduire un autre numéro abrégé, répétez la procédure à partir de l'étape 2. Appuyez sur [Réinit.] pour quitter et revenir au mode attente. 2 Note Pour imprimer la liste des numéros abrégés, appuyez sur [Menu], [5], [1], [0], [8], [Valider]. 8 Numéroteur automatique 8-14 D 131F/191F 8.3.2 Effacement d'un numéro abrégé 1 Appuyez sur [Menu], [1], [2], [2], [Valider]. 2 Appuyez sur [,] ou [+] pour sélectionner un numéro abrégé. Vous pouvez aussi sélectionner un numéro abrégé en tapant directement son identifiant à 3 chiffres. 3 Appuyez 2 fois sur [Valider]. Si vous voulez quitter sans effacer, appuyez sur [Annuler]. 4 Pour entrer un autre numéro abrégé, répétez la procédure à partir de l'étape 2. Sinon, appuyez sur [Réinit.] pour quitter et revenir au mode attente. 8.3.3 Composition par numéro abrégé 1. Appuyez 1 fois sur cette touche 2. Introduire l'identifiant à 3 chiffres 3. Appuyez sur [Début] Numéroteur automatique 8 D 131F/191F 8-15 Numérotation fax par numéro abrégé 1 Appuyez sur le bouton "Copie/Fax/Scan" pour faire passer la machine en mode Fax. 2 Placez le document dans l'ADF ou sur la vitre d'exposition. Si vous utilisez la vitre d'exposition, sélectionnez le format du document en appuyant sur [Format Doc.]. 3 Si besoin, réglez la définition et le contraste. 4 Appuyez 1 fois sur [Num. Abrégée/ Groupes]. 5 A l'aide des touches numériques, tapez l'identifiant à 3 chiffres correspondant au numéro abrégé que vous voulez ; la machine indique le nom (ou le numéro fax) que vous avez enregistré : 6 Appuyez sur [Début]. Téléphoner par numéro abrégé 2 Note Pour passer un appel vocal à partir de la machine, vous devez y raccorder un combiné téléphonique. (Voir "Raccordement d'un téléphone externe" à la page 3-10.) 1 Décrochez. 2 Appuyez 1 fois sur [Num. Abrégée/ Groupes]. 3 A l'aide des touches numériques, tapez l'identifiant à 3 chiffres correspondant au numéro abrégé voulu ; le numéro s'affiche à l'écran pendant que la machine le compose. 4 C'est à vous, parlez à votre interlocuteur. 8 Numéroteur automatique 8-16 D 131F/191F 8.4 Numérotation pour groupe d'appel [CD] Pour des informations plus détaillées, voir "8 Numéroteur automatique" du mode d'emploi étendu sur le CD-R. 8.5 Numérotation par répertoire [CD] Pour des informations plus détaillées, voir "8 Numéroteur automatique" du mode d'emploi étendu sur le CD-R. 9 Emission de fax Emission de fax 9 D 131F/191F 9-3 9 Emission de fax 9.1 Préalables à l'émission 9.1.1 Traitement des documents Avant de commencer, veuillez lire les informations concernant les documents que vous pouvez envoyer et sur la manière de les charger, figurant en page 4-7. 9.1.2 Définition de la numérisation - Normal convient à la plupart des types de documents et aux dessins simples. - Fin est idéal pour les cartes routières, les dessins moyennement complexes, les plans de sol et les documents manuscrits. - Super fin ("S-Fin" à l'écran) reproduit les détails de dessins au trait ou de plans extrêmement compliqués. - Echelle de gris ("Gris" à l'écran) reproduit les nuances des photos et des dessins. Pour changer la définition de numérisation : 1 Appuyez sur [Définition Doc.]. 2 Appuyez sur [*], [)] ou [Définition Doc.] plusieurs fois pour sélectionner la définition. 9 Emission de fax 9-4 D 131F/191F 9.1.3 Contraste de numérisation Le réglage du contraste vous permet, le cas échéant, de compenser tout excès de luminosité ou d'obscurité des pages de document que vous envoyez. Pour ajuster le contraste : 1 Appuyez sur [Contraste]. 2 Appuyez sur [*] pour éclaircir, appuyez sur [)] pour assombrir, ou appuyez sur [Contraste] plusieurs fois pour sélectionner le contraste. Pour ne pas confondre les réglages Clair et Foncé, il suffit de se rappeler – "Clair éclaircit" et "Sombre assombrit" – pour faire simple. 9.1.4 Combinaison de définition document et contraste différents sur plusieurs pages Vous pouvez changer la définition document et le contraste pour chacune des pages de vos documents. 1 Sélectionnez la définition document et le contraste pour la première page. 2 Lancez l'émission. 3 Avant de commencer à numériser la page suivante, sélectionnez la définition document et le contraste pour la page suivante. Emission de fax 9 D 131F/191F 9-5 9.1.5 Méthode d'émission La machine permet trois méthode d'émission. Émission mémoire En émission mémoire normale, la machine : 1. fait l'acquisition en mémoire de la totalité de votre document, 2. compose le numéro du fax de destination, puis 3. envoie le document. Emission mémoire rapide L'émission mémoire rapide se caractérise par le fait que la machine n'attend pas d'avoir numérisé tout le document pour composer le numéro. Une fois la première page numérisée, la machine compose le numéro du fax de destination. Après la négociation, votre machine transmet le document enregistré tout en continuant à numériser en mémoire les pages suivantes du document. Par défaut, l'émission mémoire rapide est active. Vous pouvez néanmoins la désactiver par défaut. (Voir "Paramètres utilisateur [CD]" à la page 14-3.) Émission en temps réel La machine n'utilise pas sa mémoire pour envoyer un fax dans les cas suivants : - Quand l'émission mémoire a été désactivée. - Quand vous envoyez un fax par numérotation avec prise de ligne (en appuyant sur [Fonctions Avancées] plusieurs fois jusqu'à ce que "Moniteur" s'affiche, puis sur [Valider]) ou en utilisant un combiné externe. - Quand la mémoire de la machine est saturée. En émission en temps réel, la page suivante n'est pas numérisée avant que la page en cours ne soit entièrement transmise. Notez qu'en émission en temps réel : - Un seul numéro de destination peut être composé - La vitre d'exposition ne peut pas être utilisée dans le mode d'émission en temps réel. 9 Emission de fax 9-6 D 131F/191F 9.1.6 Message de dépassement mémoire En émission mémoire normale, l'enregistrement d'une trop grande quantité d'informations dans la mémoire de la machine conduit à l'affichage à l'écran du message "Dépassement mémoire". La cause peut être : - trop de pages ont été stockées en mémoire, ou - les pages qui sont enregistrées contiennent une quantité excessive d'informations dépassant la capacité de la mémoire. Si ce message apparaît, appuyez sur [Début] pour spécifier à la machine de conserver un maximum de pages en mémoire, ou appuyez sur [Annuler] pour effacer de la mémoire toutes les pages enregistrées pendant l'opération en cours (mais pas celles des opérations précédentes). Diviser un document volumineux en plusieurs liasses moins importantes vous permettra d'éviter ce problème. Une autre solution consiste à envoyer les documents sans mémoire. (Voir "Émission en temps réel" à la page 9-5 et "Emission en temps réel (Emission sans mémoire)" à la page 9-11.) 2 Note Si vous laissez la machine inactive pendant 3minutes, celle-ci effacera automatiquement le document enregistré en mémoire pendant l'opération en cours. Emission de fax 9 D 131F/191F 9-7 9.2 Emission de fax 9.2.1 Émission mémoire Emission de fax avec l'ADF 1 Appuyez sur le bouton "Copie/Fax/ Scan" pour faire passer la machine en mode Fax. 2 Chargez votre document dans l'ADF. (Voir page 4-9 pour plus de détails.) 3 Si besoin, réglez la définition de numérisation et le contraste. (Voir page 9-3.) 4 Composez le numéro de fax. - Utilisez les touches numériques pour composer le numéro. ou - Appuyez sur une touche 1-Touche. (Voir page 8-5.) ou - Appuyez sur [Num. Abrégée/Groupe] puis l'identifiant à 3 chiffres. (Voir page 8-15.) ou - Utilisez la numérotation par groupe d'appel. (Voir page 8-16.) ou - Utilisez la numérotation par répertoire téléphonique. (Voir page 8-16.) 5 Appuyez sur [Début]. (Si vous avez appuyé sur une touche 1-Touche, il est inutile d'appuyer sur [Début].) Une pression sur la touche [Début], suffit à donner une instruction à la machine. Ce numéro d'instruction s'affiche pendant quelques secondes sur la première ligne de l'écran. Vous aurez besoin de ce numéro d'instruction si ultérieurement vous désirez annuler l'émission ou imprimer un document conservé en mémoire. (Voir "Confirmation ou annulation de commandes [CD]" à la page 9-13.) 9 Emission de fax 9-8 D 131F/191F 6 A la fin de l'opération, la machine émet un signal sonore et l'écran affiche : A chaque émission de document, ce qui va effectivement s'afficher sur la première ligne de l'écran dépend d'informations propres au télécopieur de destination. Cette ligne peut même rester vierge. 2 Note Si vous désirez annuler une émission pendant la numérisation du document, appuyez sur [Stop]. Si vous désirez annuler une émission en cours, utilisez la fonction Confirmation Commande. (Voir "Confirmation ou annulation de commandes [CD]" à la page 9-13.) 2 Note Si l'appel n'aboutit pas, voir "Rappel [CD]" à la page 9-13. Emission de fax 9 D 131F/191F 9-9 Emission d'un fax avec la vitre d'exposition 1 Appuyez sur le bouton "Copie/Fax/ Scan" pour faire passer la machine en mode Fax. 2 Placez votre document sur la vitre d'exposition. (Voir page 4-9 pour plus de détails.) 3 Appuyez sur [Format Doc.] pour sélectionner le format du document, A4, A5 š ou F4. 4 Si besoin, réglez la définition de numérisation et le contraste. (Voir page 9-3.) 5 Composez le numéro de fax. - Utilisez les touches numériques pour composer le numéro. ou - Appuyez sur une touche 1-Touche. (Voir page 8-5.) ou - Appuyez sur [Num. Abrégée/Groupe] puis l'identifiant à 3 chiffres. (Voir page 8-15.) ou - Utilisez la numérotation par groupe d'appel. (Voir page 8-16.) ou - Utilisez la numérotation par répertoire téléphonique. (Voir page 8-16.) 6 Appuyez sur [Début]. (Si vous avez appuyé sur une touche 1-Touche, il est inutile d'appuyer sur [Début].) Une pression sur la touche [Début], suffit à donner une instruction à la machine. Ce numéro d'instruction s'affiche pendant quelques secondes sur la première ligne de l'écran. Vous aurez besoin de ce numéro d'instruction si ultérieurement vous désirez annuler l'émission ou imprimer un document conservé en mémoire. (Voir "Confirmation ou annulation de commandes [CD]" à la page 9-13.) 7 Une fois la numérisation terminée, l'écran de la machine indique : 9 Emission de fax 9-10 D 131F/191F 8 Placez la page suivante, et appuyez sur [Format papier/Doc. suivant]. Ou bien, appuyez sur [Début] pour lancer l'émission. 9 A la fin de l'opération, la machine émet un signal sonore et l'écran affiche : A chaque émission de document, ce qui va effectivement s'afficher sur la première ligne de l'écran dépend d'informations propres au télécopieur de destination. Cette ligne peut même rester vierge. 2 Note Si vous désirez annuler une émission pendant la numérisation du document, appuyez sur [Stop]. Si vous désirez annuler une émission en cours, utilisez la fonction Confirmation Commande. (Voir "Confirmation ou annulation de commandes [CD]" à la page 9-13.) 2 Note Si l'appel n'aboutit pas, voir "Rappel [CD]" à la page 9-13. Emission de fax 9 D 131F/191F 9-11 9.2.2 Emission en temps réel (Emission sans mémoire) Votre machine compose simplement le numéro du fax de destination, et après négociation, votre machine introduit le document et effectue la numérisation et l'émission au fur et à mesure. En émission en temps réel, vous pouvez voir chaque page être numérisée puis envoyée. Pour effectuer une émission en temps réel : 1 Appuyez sur le bouton "Copie/Fax/Scan" pour faire passer la machine en mode Fax. 2 Chargez votre document dans l'ADF. 2 Note La vitre d'exposition ne peut pas être utilisée dans ce mode d'émission. 3 Recherchez l'obtention d'une tonalité, soit : - Appuyez sur [Fonctions Avancées] plusieurs fois jusqu'à ce que "Moniteur" s'affiche, puis appuyez sur [Valider]. ou - Décrochez le combiné, sous réserve qu'un téléphone externe soit connecté à votre machine. Dans tous les cas, la machine indique : ou - Appuyez sur [Fonctions Avancées] plusieurs fois jusqu'à ce que "Emission mémoire" s'affiche, puis appuyez sur [Valider]. Puis sélectionnez "Non " et appuyez sur [Valider] pour désactiver l'émission mémoire. ou - Si vous avez assigné "Emission Mémoire" à une Touche de fonction programmable (page 12-3), vous pouvez désactiver l'émission mémoire par une simple pression sur cette touche. 9 Emission de fax 9-12 D 131F/191F 4 Composez le numéro de fax. - Utilisez les touches numériques pour composer le numéro. ou - Appuyez sur une touche 1-Touche. (Voir page 8-5.) ou - Appuyez sur [Num. Abrégée/Groupe] puis l'identifiant à 3 chiffres. (Voir page 8-15.) ou - Utilisez la numérotation par répertoire téléphonique. (Voir page 8-16.) 2 Note En émission en temps réel, un seul numéro de destination peut être composé. 5 Lorsque vous percevez les tonalités émises par le télécopieur de destination, appuyez sur [Début]. Si quelqu'un répond, décrochez le combiné pour indiquer à cette personne que vous êtes en train de lui envoyer un fax. Lorsque vous entendez les tonalités du fax, appuyez sur [Début]. Si l'appel échoue, et que vous avez numéroté avec la fonction "Moniteur", appuyez sur [Fonctions Avancées] plusieurs fois jusqu'à ce que "Moniteur" s'affiche, puis appuyez sur [Valider] pour raccrocher. Si vous utilisez le combiné, raccrochez après avoir appuyé sur [Début]. 2 Note Si vous désirez annuler une émission, utilisez la fonction Confirmation Commande. (Voir "Confirmation ou annulation de commandes [CD]" à la page 9-13.) Emission de fax 9 D 131F/191F 9-13 9.3 Rappel [CD] Pour des informations plus détaillées, voir "9 Emission de fax" du mode d'emploi étendu sur le CD-R. 9.4 Confirmation ou annulation de commandes [CD] Pour des informations plus détaillées, voir "9 Emission de fax" du mode d'emploi étendu sur le CD-R. 9.5 Fonctions avancées fax [CD] Pour des informations plus détaillées, voir "9 Emission de fax" du mode d'emploi étendu sur le CD-R. 9 Emission de fax 9-14 D 131F/191F 10 Réception de télécopies Réception de télécopies 10 D 131F/191F 10-3 10 Réception de télécopies 10.1 Réception fax 10.1.1 Sélection du mode de réception 1 Appuyez sur [Menu], [9], et appuyez 4 fois sur [Valider]. La machine indique le mode de réception fax dans lequel elle se trouve actuellement. 2 Appuyez sur [,] ou [+] pour sélectionner le mode de réception fax désiré. Votre machine offre cinq différents modes de réception : - Tél Prêt (voir "Mode de réception manuelle" ci-après) - Mode Fax : prêt (voir "Mode de réception automatique" ci-après) - Fax/Tél Prêt (voir page 10-4) - Tél/Fax Prêt (voir page 10-5) - Répond./Fax Prêt (voir page 10-5) 3 Appuyez sur [Valider] pour enregistrer le réglage. 4 Appuyez sur [Réinit.] pour quitter. 2 Note Si vous assignez la fonction "Réception auto" à une Touche de fonction programmable (page 12-3), il suffit d'appuyer sur cette touche pour passer alternativement de la réception manuelle (Tél Prêt) à la réception automatique (que vous avez paramétrée). 10 Réception de télécopies 10-4 D 131F/191F 10.1.2 Mode de réception manuelle Mode Tél Prêt Vous l'utiliserez si : - Vous voulez utiliser la même ligne tant pour les communications téléphoniques que les communications fax. - Vous recevez principalement des appels vocaux et moins fréquemment des télécopies. Dans ce mode : Votre machine ne décroche jamais automatiquement. Vous devez prendre chaque appel, comme décrit dans la section "Prendre les appels manuellement" à la page 10-6. Il faudra aussi : Connecter un téléphone externe. (Voir page 3-10.) 10.1.3 Mode de réception automatique Mode Fax : prêt Vous l'utiliserez si : Votre machine dispose d'une ligne indépendante sans la partager avec un téléphone ou un répondeur. Dans ce mode: Votre machine décroche à chaque appel et envoi de fax. Mode Fax/Tél Prêt Vous l'utiliserez si : - Vous voulez utiliser la même ligne tant pour les communications téléphoniques que les communications fax. - Vous utilisez la machine à la fois comme télécopieur et comme téléphone et que vous voulez principalement recevoir des fax. Dans ce mode : Votre machine reçoit les télécopies de manière silencieuse mais vous alerte aussi si un appel vocal se présente. (La machine émet un signal sonore à la fin de chaque réception.) Lorsqu'un appel vocal arrive, la machine fait entendre une sonnerie spéciale (en revanche le téléphone connecté à votre machine ne sonnera pas). Si vous entendez cette sonnerie, répondez en décrochant le combiné. Il faudra aussi : Connecter un téléphone externe. (Voir page 3-10.) Réception de télécopies 10 D 131F/191F 10-5 Mode Tél/Fax Prêt Vous l'utiliserez si : - Vous voulez utiliser la même ligne tant pour les communications téléphoniques que les communications fax. - Vous utilisez la machine à la fois comme télécopieur et comme téléphone et que vous voulez principalement recevoir des appels vocaux. Dans ce mode Votre machine fait entendre le nombre de sonneries que vous avez défini (le nombre de sonneries par défaut est 2 fois). Si vous ne décrochez pas pendant que la machine sonne, celle-ci décrochera et prendra automatiquement l'appel. S'il s'agit d'un fax entrant, la machine effectue la réception du fax. S'il s'agit d'un appel vocal entrant, la machine fait entendre une sonnerie spéciale pour vous indiquer de décrocher le combiné. (Mais le téléphone raccordé à la machine ne sonnera pas.) Il faudra aussi : Connecter un téléphone externe. (Voir page 3-10.) Mode Répond./Fax Prêt Vous l'utiliserez si : Vous utilisez un répondeur qui est connecté à votre machine. Dans ce mode : Le répondeur connecté à votre machine prend chaque appel. S'il s'agit d'un appel vocal entrant, le répondeur enregistre le message. Si la machine détecte une tonalité fax, elle effectue la réception de la télécopie. Il faudra aussi : Connecter un répondeur téléphone. (Voir page 3-10.) Utilisation d'un répondeur avec votre machine : 1 Réglez la machine sur Répond./Fax Prêt. (Voir page 10-3.) 2 Configurez votre répondeur pour qu'il ne décroche après 2 sonneries max. 3 Enregistrez un nouveau message sortant sur votre répondeur. Le message sortant de votre répondeur ne devrait pas durer plus de 10 secondes. Voici une suggestion de message : "Bonjour ! Vous êtes bien au [votre nom ou numéro de téléphone]. Pour laisser un message de vive voix, attendez le signal sonore. Pour envoyer un fax, appuyez sur la touche [Début] de votre télécopieur. Merci de votre appel !" 10 Réception de télécopies 10-6 D 131F/191F 10.1.4 Prendre les appels manuellement 2 Note Pour prendre un appel manuellement, vous devez raccorder un téléphone externe à votre machine. Vérifiez que le document n'est pas chargé dans l'ADF. Réception manuelle d'un appel par téléphone externe En mode "Tél Prêt" ou "Tél/Fax Prêt", décrochez le combiné dès que le téléphone externe sonne : - Si vous entendez votre interlocuteur, vous pouvez lui répondre. - Si ce sont des tonalité fax que vous entendez, ("beep – beep – beep"), posez le combiné mais ne raccrochez pas. Appuyez sur la touche [Début] de votre machine. Après avoir appuyé sur [Début], raccrochez le combiné. Du fait que les télécopieurs distants attendront plusieurs secondes la réception des tonalités de négociation de la part de votre machine, vous disposez de 30 secondes environ pour appuyer sur la touche [Début]. 10.1.5 Basculer en mode de réception automatique ou en mode de réception manuelle 1 Vérifiez que la machine se trouve en mode Fax. Sinon, appuyez sur le bouton "Copie/Fax/Scan" pour faire passer la machine en mode Fax. 2 Appuyez sur [Fonctions Avancées] jusqu'à ce que "Réception auto" s'affiche à l'écran et appuyez sur [Valider]. 3 Appuyez sur [,] ou [+] pour sélectionner Oui ou Non. - Pour passer en mode de réception manuelle, sélectionnez "Non" - Pour passer en mode de réception automatique, sélectionnez "Oui" 4 Appuyez sur [Valider] pour enregistrer le réglage. 2 Note Si vous assignez la fonction "Réception auto" à une Touche de fonction programmable (page 12-3), il suffit d'appuyer sur cette touche pour passer alternativement de la réception manuelle (Tél Prêt) à la réception automatique (que vous avez paramétrée). Réception de télécopies 10 D 131F/191F 10-7 10.1.6 En cas de panne de papier pendant la réception fax Lorsque la machine manque de papier, elle émet un signal sonore, le voyant [Alarme] s'allume et l'écran indique quelle est le magasin qui n'a plus de papier – Magasin 1, Magasin 2 (en option) ou l'introducteur manuel. Dans cet exemple, c'est le Magasin 1 qui est vide. Réception sans papier Au cas où votre machine venait à manquer de papier, elle peut néanmoins enregistrer en mémoire jusqu'à 250 réceptions fax. C'est la "réception sans papier". Dès que vous l'avez rechargée en papier, la machine lance automatiquement l'impression des messages conservés en mémoire. 2 Note Le nombre de pages (et non de réceptions) que votre machine peut enregistrer en mode réception sans papier est variable. Cela dépend de Ia capacité mémoire de votre machine, des types de documents qu'elle a reçus ainsi que de leur définition fax. 10 Réception de télécopies 10-8 D 131F/191F 10.2 Paramétrage de la réception fax [CD] Pour des informations plus détaillées, voir "10 Réception de télécopies" du mode d'emploi étendu sur le CD-R. 10.3 Fonctions avancées de réception [CD] Pour des informations plus détaillées, voir "10 Réception de télécopies" du mode d'emploi étendu sur le CD-R. 11 Fonctions Boîtes F-code [CD] Fonctions Boîtes F-code [CD] 11 D 131F/191F 11-3 11 Fonctions Boîtes F-code [CD] Pour des informations plus détaillées, voir "11 Fonctions Boîtes F-code [CD]" du mode d'emploi étendu sur le CD-R. 11 Fonctions Boîtes F-code [CD] 11-4 D 131F/191F 12 Fonctions spéciales [CD] Fonctions spéciales [CD] 12 D 131F/191F 12-3 12 Fonctions spéciales [CD] Pour des informations plus détaillées, voir "12 Fonctions spéciales [CD]" du mode d'emploi étendu sur le CD-R. 12 Fonctions spéciales [CD] 12-4 D 131F/191F 13 Fonctions de sécurité [CD] Fonctions de sécurité [CD] 13 D 131F/191F 13-3 13 Fonctions de sécurité [CD] Pour des informations plus détaillées, voir "13 Fonctions de sécurité [CD]" du mode d'emploi étendu sur le CD-R. 13 Fonctions de sécurité [CD] 13-4 D 131F/191F 14 Paramètres utilisateur [CD] Paramètres utilisateur [CD] 14 D 131F/191F 14-3 14 Paramètres utilisateur [CD] Pour des informations plus détaillées, voir "14 Paramètres utilisateur [CD]" du mode d'emploi étendu sur le CD-R. 14 Paramètres utilisateur [CD] 14-4 D 131F/191F 15 Rapports & Listes Rapports & Listes 15 D 131F/191F 15-3 15 Rapports & Listes 15.1 Tableau des listes et journaux Le tableau suivant décrit les rapports et les listes que votre machine peut imprimer. Nom Description Référence Liste Fonctions Enumère les fonctions disponibles sur votre machine ainsi que la séquence des touches nécessaire pour les exécuter. Pour imprimer cette liste, appuyez sur [Menu], [5], [1], [0], 1, [Valider]. page 4-6 Liste Param. Machine Enumère les paramètres machine en vigueur. Pour imprimer cette liste, appuyez sur [Menu], [5], [1], [0], 2, [Valider]. page 14-3 Liste Param. Fax Enumère les paramètres fax en vigueur. Pour imprimer cette liste, appuyez sur [Menu], [5], [1], [0], 3, [Valider]. page 14-3 Liste Param. Copie Enumère les paramètres copie en vigueur. Pour imprimer cette liste, appuyez sur [Menu], [5], [1], [0], 4, [Valider]. page 14-3 Journal Imprime la liste des transactions fax effectuées par votre machine. Pour imprimer le jourrnal d'activité, appuyez sur [Menu], [5], [1], [0], 5, [Valider]. Si vous le souhaitez, un réglage permet à la machine d'imprimer automatiquement le journal d'activité toutes les 100 transactions fax. page 15-5 Liste commandes Enumère les éléments suivants : • Le numéro de commande • Le numéro ou le nom de la destination • L'heure de début (format jj,hh:mm) • Une note précisant si la commande concerne une opération relève ou F-code. Pour imprimer cette liste, appuyez sur [Menu], [5], [1], [0], 6, [Valider]. page 9-13 Liste Une-Touche Enumère pour chaque numéro 1-Touche, le nom et le numéro de téléphone ou fax que vous avez programmés. Pour imprimer cette liste, appuyez sur [Menu], [5], [1], [0], 7, [Valider]. page 8-5 Liste Num. Abrég. Enumère pour chaque numéro, l'identifiant à 3 chiffres, le nom et le numéro de téléphone ou fax que vous avez programmés. Pour imprimer cette liste, appuyez sur [Menu], [5], [1], [0], 8, [Valider]. page 8-12 Liste Groupe Enumère les numéros 1-Touche et les numéros abrégés que vous avez enregistrés sous un numéro groupe. Pour imprimer cette liste, appuyez [Menu], [5], [1], [0], [9], Valider, puis sélectionnez le numéro de groupe et appuyez sur [Valider]. page 8-16 List N° bloqués Enumère les numéros de téléphone bloqués. Pour imprimer cette liste, appuyez sur [Menu], [5], [1], [1], 0, [Valider]. page 10-8 Page de garde Imprime un spécimen de la page de garde. Pour imprimer cette liste, appuyez sur [Menu], [5], [1], [1], 1, [Valider]. page 9-13 15 Rapports & Listes 15-4 D 131F/191F Liste des codes comptes Indique pour chaque code compte, la durée totale de communication, le nombre d'impressions des fax reçus, la charge d'impression des fax reçus, le nombre total de pages copiées, la charge copie et la somme de la charge copie et de la charge d'impression des fax reçus. Pour imprimer cette liste, appuyez sur [Menu], [5], [1], [1], 2, [Valider]. page 13-3 Liste Authentification Utilisateur Fait apparaître le nom de l'utilisateur enregistré, le code compte, la durée totale de communication, le nombre total de pages imprimées et le prix des fax reçus, le nombre total de pages imprimées et le prix des copies, le nombre total pages numérisées, et la somme du prix des copies et du prix d'impression des fax reçus pour chaque code compte. Pour imprimer la liste, appuyez sur [Menu], [5], [1], [2], [5]. page 13-3 ListBoîteF-Code Indique l'identifiant, le nom de la boîte (s'il y a lieu) l'adresse secondaire, le mot de passe, le type de boîte et le paramétrage de chaque boîte. Pour imprimer cette liste, appuyez sur [Menu], [5], [1], [1], 3, [Valider]. page 11-3 Liste doc. F-CODE Indique l'identifiant, le nom de la boîte (s'il y a lieu), le type de boîte et chaque numéro de fichier (ou de document) enregistré. Pour imprimer cette liste, appuyez sur [Menu], [5], [1], [1], 4, [Valider]. page 11-3 Liste Boîte ENV. GR. Indique l'identifiant, le nom de destination, le numéro de fax et la date et l'heure programmée pour l'émission. Pour imprimer cette liste, appuyez sur [Menu], [5], [1], [1], 5, [Valider]. page 9-13 Liste Doc. ENV. GR. Indique les numéros de fichiers des documents. Pour imprimer les numéros de fichiers des documents, appuyez sur [Menu], [5], [1], [1], 6, [Valider]. page 9-13 Liste trnsfrt fax Indique pour chaque règle de transfert, l'identifiant, le numéro du fax distant vers lequel vous désirez que vos documents soient transférés, le réglage activé/désactivé, la programmation horaire et le réglage d'impression automatique. Pour imprimer cette liste, appuyez sur [Menu], [5], [1], [1], 7, [Valider]. page 10-8 Liste Macros Enumère pour chaque macro, le numéro de touche et le nom de la tâche programmée dans la touche macro. Pour imprimer cette liste, appuyez sur [Menu], [5], [1], [1], 8, [Valider]. page 12-3 Liste Param. scanner Enumère les paramètres scanner en vigueur. Pour imprimer cette liste, appuyez sur [Menu], [5], [1], [1], 9, [Valider]. page 7-4 Liste Mém. doc. Imprime la quantité de mémoire utilisée par chaque document. Pour imprimer cette liste, appuyez sur [Menu], [5], [1], [2], 0, [Valider]. page 15-8 Rapport de confirmation d'émission S'imprime après l'émission de documents. page 15-7 Nom Description Référence Rapports & Listes 15 D 131F/191F 15-5 15.2 Journal d'activité Tout comme un relevé de compte qui enregistre vos transactions financières au jour le jour, votre machine tient un journal d'activité qui enregistre les 100 dernières transactions fax. Le journal d'activité fournit les informations suivantes pour chaque transaction : - Numéro assigné, commençant chaque jour à 001 - Destination appelée - Mode de définition - Date et heure de début - Durée, en minutes et secondes - Longueur, en nombre de pages - Code compte (voir page 13-3) - Résultat de l'appel Si cette mention est précédée d'un astérisque (*), cela indique une communication ECM. Si elle précédée par le signe (#), cela indique une communication via un modem haut débit V.34. - Toute opération spéciale Par exemple, un fax passé via un téléphone externe apparaîtra comme appel "Manuel". 15.2.1 Configurer le journal d'activité Votre machine fax imprime automatiquement le journal d'activité toutes les 100 transactions. Pour activer ou désactiver l'impression automatique du journal : 1 Appuyez sur [Menu], [3], [1], [1], [Valider]. 2 Appuyez sur [,] ou [+] pour sélectionner "Oui" ou "Non" et appuyez sur [Valider]. 15 Rapports & Listes 15-6 D 131F/191F 15.2.2 Impression manuelle du journal d'activité Pour imprimer immédiatement un journal d'activité sans attendre les 100 transactions : 1 Appuyez sur [Menu], [5], [1], [0], [5], [Valider]. 2 Appuyez sur [,] ou [+] pour sélectionner le type de journal que vous voulez imprimer. - L'option "Em. Rapport" n'imprime que le rapport d'émission. - L'option "Réc. Rapport" n'imprime que le rapport de réception. - L'option "Em./Réc. Rapport" imprime le rapport d'émission et le rapport de réception. 3 Appuyez sur [Valider]. 15.2.3 Définir l'ordre d'impression du journal d'activité Votre machine imprime sur le journal d'activité l'historique de chaque transaction fax. Par exemple, si votre machine doit rappeler un numéro, ces rappels figureront sur le journal. Si vous voulez énumérer ces activités dans l'ordre des numéros qui leur ont été assignés, vous pouvez changer l'ordre d'impression du journal d'activité. Pour changer l'ordre d'impression : 1 Appuyez sur [Menu], [3], [1], [2], [Valider]. 2 Appuyez sur [,] ou [+] pour sélectionner Oui ou Non. Si vous voulez imprimer le journal dans l'ordre des numéros assignés, choisissez "Oui". Sinon, la machine énumérera chaque transaction fax par commande et par destination. 3 Appuyez sur [Valider] pour enregistrer le réglage. Rapports & Listes 15 D 131F/191F 15-7 15.3 Rapport de confirmation d'émission 15.3.1 Configurer le rapport de confirmation d'émission Votre machine peut imprimer un rapport de confirmation d'émission (TCR) après chaque envoi de fax à un télécopieur de Groupe 3. Le TCR fournit les informations suivantes pour chaque communication : - Date et heure d'impression du TCR - Destination appelée - Mode de définition - Date et heure de début - Durée, en minutes et secondes - Longueur, en nombre de pages - Résultat de l'appel - Toute opération spéciale Par exemple, un fax passé via un téléphone externe apparaîtra comme appel "Manuel". - Aperçu du document Image de la première page du document En cas d'erreur, le TCR indique le numéro de la destination concernée, le code d'erreur (page 16-26) et le message d'erreur (page 16-20). Pour définir l'impression du TCR : 1 Appuyez sur [Menu], [3], [1], [3], [Valider]. 2 Appuyez sur [,] ou +] jusqu'à afficher le paramètre désiré et appuyez sur [Valider]. 2 Note Si vous activez ou désactivez fréquemment cette fonction, vous pouvez l'assigner à une Touche de fonction programmable (voir page 12-3) pour accélérer la commande. 15 Rapports & Listes 15-8 D 131F/191F 15.4 Liste documents en mémoire Votre machine peut imprimer la liste des documents conservés en mémoire. Elle indique aussi la quantité de mémoire occupée par chaque document. Cette liste indique : - Type Affiche le type de document, "Boîte envoi groupé" par exemple. - Données (en Ko) Affiche la quantité de mémoire utilisée par le document. - Page Affiche le nombre de pages. - Note Autres informations, comme le numéro de boîte par exemple. Pour imprimer la liste des documents enregistrés en mémoire : % Appuyez sur [Menu], [5], [1], [2], [0], [Valider]. Rapports & Listes 15 D 131F/191F 15-9 15.5 Notification de perte de document - Quand les données image conservées en mémoire sont effacées par accident, la machine imprime dès la restauration du courant électrique, une notification de perte de document avec des informations relatives aux données image effacées. - Voici un exemple d'un fichier reçu qui a été effacé. La machine peut également imprimer une notification pour "Commande effacée", "Doc. relève supprimés" et "Doc. Boîte F-code effacé". 1. No. Numéro de la communication 2. Nom Enregistré dans l'ordre suivant - Numéro TTI enregistré pour le nom de destination - Espace 3. Mode Définition pendant la communication 4. Départ Heure à laquelle la communication a commencé 5. Durée Heure programmée pour la communication 6. Page Nombre de pages reçues 7. Dep. Quand la fonction "Code département" a été définie, le numéro de compte figure dans cette rubrique. 15 Rapports & Listes 15-10 D 131F/191F 8. Résult. Résultats des communications. - OK : Achevé avec succès - * : Communication en mode ECM - # : Communication via Super G3 - Code d'erreur : Terminé anormalement Pour plus d'informations sur les codes d'erreur, voir page 16-26. 9. Note - Relève : Réception par relève - Manuel : Réception manuelle - F-Relève : Indique une relève F-code - Sécurité : Réception dans une boîte F-code sécurisée - Relais : Réception en relais F-code - Bulletin : Réception dans une boîte bulletin F-code 16 Entretien et dépannage Entretien et dépannage 16 D 131F/191F 16-3 16 Entretien et dépannage 16.1 Entretien 16.1.1 Conseils de nettoyage Quelques recommandations pour le nettoyage de votre machine : - Il est important de nettoyer la machine. La poussière, en s'accumulant notamment autour des orifices de ventilation, est susceptible de réduire la longévité de votre machine. - Débranchez toujours la machine avant de la nettoyer. - Ne jamais pulvériser un détergent en direction de la machine. Le liquide déposé peut en s'écoulant à l'intérieur de la machine en détériorer des composants internes. - Ne tentez jamais de nettoyer à l'intérieur de la machine des composants scellés. C'est pour protéger l'utilisateur et la machine qu'ils sont obturés. - Pour nettoyer l'extérieur de la machine, utilisez un chiffon non pelucheux humidifié avec une solution détergente douce. - Dans les zones inaccessibles même avec des coton-tiges, utilisez de l'air comprimé sec et propre pour chasser la poussière et autres particules. 16.1.2 Nettoyage de la zone de numérisation 1 Essuyez la vitre d'exposition, la vitre de l'ADF et le couvre-document avec un chiffon doux, non pelucheux humidifié à l'eau. 2 Puis essuyez avec un chiffon doux, non pelucheux et sec jusqu'à séchage complet des surfaces. Couvre-document Vitre d'exposition Vitre de l'ADF 16 Entretien et dépannage 16-4 D 131F/191F 16.1.3 Nettoyage des rouleaux de l'ADF Si vous rencontrez des problèmes d'introduction avec vos documents, essayez la procédure suivante : 1 Mettez la machine hors tension et débranchez la prise. 2 Ouvrez la porte de l'ADF. 3 Nettoyez la surface des rouleaux à l'aide d'une lame pour rouleau caoutchouc humidifiée sur un chiffon. Faites tournez les rouleaux à la main pour nettoyer la totalité de leur surface. Entretien et dépannage 16 D 131F/191F 16-5 16.1.4 Nettoyage du fil de charge du tambour et de la tête d'impression LED Si le message suivant apparaît à l'écran LCD ou que l'impression donne un résultat de qualité médiocre, c'est le signe qu'il faut nettoyer le fil de charge de la cartouche tambour. 2 Note La machine peut encore imprimer une centaine de feuilles après l'apparition de ce message, mais lorsque le message "Imprimante hors service" s'affiche, il n'est plus possible d'imprimer tant que le fil de charge n'aura pas été nettoyé. 1 Ouvrez la porte avant. 2 Tirez vers vous puis repoussez dans la machine la tige bleue, doucement et à plusieurs reprises. Cette opération permet aussi de nettoyer en même temps la tête d'impression LED. 3 Refermez le volet frontal. Ouvir porte avant Suivre les instructions A 16 Entretien et dépannage 16-6 D 131F/191F 16.1.5 Remplacement de la cartouche de toner Lorsque le toner est épuisé, la machine indique "Toner Vide" et plus aucune page ne peut être imprimée avant l'installation d'une nouvelle cartouche de toner. Pour remplacer la cartouche toner : 1 Ouvrez le volet frontal. 2 Tournez vers la gauche le levier de déblocage de la cartouche toner (position déverrouillée). 3 Tirez la cartouche usagée pour la sortir. 4 Déballez la cartouche de toner. Puis, en la tenant à deux mains, secouez- la doucement pour répartir uniformément le toner à l'intérieur de la cartouche. Entretien et dépannage 16 D 131F/191F 16-7 7ATTENTION % Ne touchez pas le rouleau de la cartouche toner. 5 Insérez fermement la cartouche toner dans la machine jusqu'à ce qu'elle se verrouille en place. 6 Tournez vers la droite le levier de verrouillage de la cartouche jusqu'à ce qu'il s'enclenche en place complètement. 7 Nettoyez le fil de charge et de la tête d'impression LED. (Voir "Nettoyage du fil de charge du tambour et de la tête d'impression LED" à la page 16-5.) 8 Refermez le volet frontal. 16 Entretien et dépannage 16-8 D 131F/191F 16.1.6 Remplacement de la cartouche tambour La cartouche tambour se remplace environ toutes les 30 000 pages. Lorsque le tambour approche de sa date limite, la machine indique "Prévoir Photocond.". A ce moment-là, il faudra vous procurer une nouvelle cartouche tambour. Lorsque la machine indique "Remplacer Photocond.", elle ne peut plus imprimer tant que la cartouche n'est pas remplacée. Pour remplacer la cartouche tambour : 1 Ouvrez le volet frontal et le volet latéral. 2 Tournez le levier de déverrouillage de la cartouche toner vers la gauche (position ouverture) puis sortez la cartouche. Il est nécessaire de déposer la cartouche de toner pour remplacer la cartouche tambour. 3 Tirez la cartouche tambour usagée pour la sortir. 4 Sortez la nouvelle cartouche tambour de son emballage et engagez-la fermement dans la machine jusqu'à ce qu'elle s'enclenche complètement en place. Entretien et dépannage 16 D 131F/191F 16-9 5 Réinstallez la cartouche toner puis tournez le levier de verrouillage vers la droite jusqu'à enclenchement complet. 6 Refermez le volet frontal et le volet latéral. 16 Entretien et dépannage 16-10 D 131F/191F 16.2 Incidents 16.2.1 Serrage document Situation 1 Si un serrage document se produit dans l'ADF, le message suivant s'affiche : Par ailleurs, si le serrage document se produit pendant une émission mémoire rapide ou pendant une émission en temps réel, le message d'erreur suivant s'imprimera pour indiquer quelle page le serrage a affecté. Situation 2 Si le serrage d'un document se produit pendant la numérisation en mémoire pour un tri de copies ou pour une émission mémoire normale, la machine indique : 1 Si vous voulez continuer l'opération, appuyez sur [Valider] et passez à l'étape 2. Pour abandonner l'opération, appuyez sur [Annuler]. 2 Note Si vous n'appuyez pas sur une touche dans les 3minutes, la machine abandonnera automatiquement l'opération. 2 La machine indique quelle page (plus précisément, son numéro) a été serrée dans la machine. Dégagez le document serré et réinstallez toutes les pages restantes du document dans l'ADF en commençant par la page qui a été serrée, et appuyez sur Début. Retransmettre. Entretien et dépannage 16 D 131F/191F 16-11 2 Note Si vous n'appuyez pas sur une touche dans les 3minutes, la machine lancera l'émission ou la copie du ou des documents chargés. Si vous voulez abandonner l'opération, appuyez sur [Stop]. La machine efface toutes les pages de sa mémoire et revient en mode attente. 16 Entretien et dépannage 16-12 D 131F/191F Serrage dans la zone d'entrée 1 Ouvrez la porte de l'ADF. 2 Tirez doucement sur le document pour l'extraire de l'ADF. Si l'opération est infructueuse, tournez le bouton de dégagement pour libérer le document serré. 3 Refermez le volet de l'ADF, en veillant à ce que les 2 côtés soient bien fermés. 2 Note Pour éviter le serrage de documents, il vaut mieux placer les documents gondolés ou déchirés sur la vitre d'exposition. Entretien et dépannage 16 D 131F/191F 16-13 Serrage dans la zone d'introduction 1 Ouvrez le couvre-original. Ouvrez le volet de l'ADF et tournez le bouton de dégagement pour libérer le document serré. 2 Refermez le couvre-original et le volet de l'ADF. 2 Note Pour éviter le serrage de documents, il vaut mieux placer les documents gondolés ou déchirés sur la vitre d'exposition. 16 Entretien et dépannage 16-14 D 131F/191F Serrage dans la zone de sortie 1 Ouvrez le couvre-original. Tirez doucement le document serré. Si cela n'est pas possible, ouvrez le volet de l'ADF et tournez le bouton de dégagement pour libérer le document serré. 2 Refermez le couvre-original et le volet de l'ADF. 2 Note Pour éviter le serrage de documents, il vaut mieux placer les documents gondolés ou déchirés sur la vitre d'exposition. Entretien et dépannage 16 D 131F/191F 16-15 16.2.2 Serrage papier En cas de serrage papier, le message suivant s'affiche : Pour dégager un serrage papier, appliquez la procédure suivante. En cas de serrage papier pendant une réception fax, la machine enregistre en mémoire le document reçu et l'imprimera une fois que le papier serré aura été dégagé. 7ATTENTION % Attention à NE PAS toucher le rouleau de fixation en ouvrant le volet latéral pour dégager le papier. L'unité de fixation est très chaude. % Ne touchez pas la surface de la cartouche du tambour. Cela pourrait provoquer des rayures ou des traces qui détérioreront la qualité d'impression. Dégagement d'un serrage papier 1 Tirez le levier de déverrouillage pour ouvrir le volet latéral. Si le deuxième magasin, en option, est installé, ouvrez aussi le volet latéral de celui-ci. 2 Avec précaution, tirez le papier serré dans la direction indiquée. 2 Note Attention à ne pas tâcher vos mains ou vos vêtements en dégageant le papier serré. 16 Entretien et dépannage 16-16 D 131F/191F Serrage dans la zone d'introduction Serrage dans la zone de fixation Serrage dans la zone de sortie papier Entretien et dépannage 16 D 131F/191F 16-17 Si le serrage s'est produit alors que le papier a été introduit partiellement mais qu'il est difficile à saisir : 1 Ouvrez le magasin papier. Après l'avoir tiré à fond, levez légèrement l'avant du magasin pour l'extraire de la machine. 2 Avec précaution, enlevez le papier serré. 16 Entretien et dépannage 16-18 D 131F/191F 3 Refermez le volet latéral et réinsérez le magasin papier. Abaissez l'arrière du magasin pour l'aligner avec les rainures de la machine, puis repoussez- le à fond. Entretien et dépannage 16 D 131F/191F 16-19 Dégagement d'un serrage papier dans l'introducteur manuel Si l'introduction du papier dans l'introducteur manuel pose problème, la machine affiche le message suivant : 1 Tirez le levier de libération du rabat, et tirez le papier pour l'extraire de la machine. 2 Ouvrez puis refermez le volet frontal pour effacer le message de l'écran. 16 Entretien et dépannage 16-20 D 131F/191F 16.2.3 Message d'erreur à l'écran De temps à autre, il se peut que votre machine rencontre des problèmes pour envoyer ou recevoir des documents. Dans de tels cas, elle vous en informe par une alarme. Pour vous aider à identifier le problème, la machine affiche des messages à l'écran et imprime des messages d'erreur. Message à l'écran Cause probable/Solution Commande indisponib. La totalité des 99 commandes différées (le rappel automatique compte pour une) est enregistrée en mémoire et la machine ne peut plus en accepter d'autre. Attendez qu'une des commandes différées ait été exécutée par la machine, ou supprimez une des commandes enregistrées (voir "Consultation ou annulation de commandes" en page 9-13). Déjà mémorisé Vous avez tenté d'introduire un numéro de fax ou de téléphone qui est déjà introduit dans la machine. Tapez un numéro de téléphone ou de fax différent. Boîte utilisée Vous avez tenté d'effacer une boîte F-Code qui contient au moins un document. Effacer le ou les documents, puis réessayez. Appel SAV La lampe scanner est faible ou ne fonctionne pas. Réalisez plusieurs copies pour favoriser l'évaporation de l'humidité interne. Si le problème persiste, contactez votre SAV. Passer en mode Fax Vous avez tenté d'enregistrer un document pour relève (ou pour boîte F-code) alors que la machine est en mode copie. L'enregistrement du document fax n'est possible que lorsque la machine est en mode fax. Vérif. émission mém. Vous avez tenté d'activer la fonction Fax&Copie mais le paramètre d'émission mémoire est réglé sur Non. Pour utiliser la fonction Fax&Copie, l'émission mémoire doit être réglée sur Oui. Activez l'émission mémoire (voir page 14-3), puis réessayez. Vérif.format pap.Rec Ouvr&FermerCarterAv. La machine est chargée avec du papier différent du format que vous avez spécifié. Chargez du papier du format approprié ou modifiez le paramètre format papier (voir page 4-17). Ouvrez puis refermez le volet frontal pour réinitialiser l'imprimante. Fermer volet XXX Le volet indiqué à l'écran est ouvert ou n'a pas été bien fermé. Refermez- le correctement. Fermer magasin XXX Le magasin indiqué à l'écran est ouvert ou n'a pas été bien fermé. Refermez- le correctement. Err. communication Une erreur de communication a perturbé l'émission ou la réception. S'il s'agit d'une émission, appuyez sur [STOP] pour effacer le message d'erreur puis réessayez l'émission. S'il s'agit d'un fax en cours de réception, essayez se contacter l'autre personne et demandez-lui de recommencer l'émission du fax. (Il se peut que le problème vienne de sa machine, de sa ligne téléphonique, etc.) Copie impossible La protection copie est activée. Désactivez la protection de la copie (voir page 13-3). Comptes complets Vous avez tenté de créer un code compte de trop car votre machine ne peut enregistrer que 100 codes comptes. Boîte pleine Vous avez tenté d'enregistrer un document dans une boîte F-Code, mais la machine a atteint sa capacité maximale (30 documents). Supprimez un document inutile qui pourrait se trouver dans la boîte F-Code ou utilisez une autre boîte F-code. Entretien et dépannage 16 D 131F/191F 16-21 Serrage original Cont. Enreg. Val/Ann Un document a serré dans l'ADF. Voir page 16-10 pour dégager le document serré. Document en mémoire Vous avez tenté d'effacer une boîte d'envoi groupé qui contient au moins un document. Pour effacer une boîte d'envoi groupé, il faut effacer tous les documents enregistrés dans la boîte. Prog. Nº (0-32) Vous avez essayé d'enter un numéro de groupe supérieur à 32. Votre machine peut conserver 32 groupes d'appel, de 1 à 32 (le groupe d'appel 0 rassemblant tous les groupes). Tapez le numéro identifiant le groupe d'appel. Entrer Réd./Agrand. Vous avez tenté de copier votre document sur papier d'un format autre que A4, A5 ou F4 avec l'introducteur manuel, ou le taux zoom calculé est en dehors de la plage admissible (25 – 400%). Tapez manuellement le taux zoom bien qu'il puisse manquer une partie de l'image, ou changez le papier copie. Prog.format Analyse Lorsque vous utilisez la vitre d'exposition, vous devez entrer manuellement le format de numérisation de votre document. Appuyez sur [Format Doc.] pour sélectionner le format. Entrer le nom Vous n'avez rien introduit en mode Saisie du nom utilisateur. Entrez le nom utilisateur. Chargeur utilisé La commande que vous tentez d'introduire requiert l'utilisation de l'ADF lequel est déjà en cours d'utilisation. Attendez que la machine ait fini d'utiliser l'ADF, puis recommencez. Raccrocher téléphone Le combiné externe n'est pas correctement raccroché. Boîte relais ou boîte sécurisée Vous avez tenté d'enregistrer un document dans une boîte F-code qui est configurée pour être une boîte relais ou une boîte de réception sécurisée. Sélectionnez la boîte F-code qui est configurée comme boîte bulletin. Code I.D incorrect Le code I.D. de la boîte F-code que vous avez tapé n'est pas valide. Essayez de retaper le code I.D. de votre boîte F-code. Numéro incorrect Vous avez appuyé sur une touche qui n'a aucune fonction pendant l'opération en cours. Code accès incorrect Le code de protection (voir page 13-3) que vous avez entré, n'est pas valide. Réintroduisez le code de protection correct. MotPass invalide Le code d'accès que vous avez introduit n'est pas valide. (Voir page 13-3.) Entez le code correct. Ligne occupée Vous avez tenté d'effacer un document que quelqu'un est en train de relever sur votre machine. Attendez la fin de l'opération de relève. Utilisée par macro Vous avez tenté de changer la fonction d'une Touche de fonction programmable, mais cette touche contient déjà une macro-commande. La fonction de la Touche de fonction programmable ne peut être changée que si la macro est d'abord effacée de la touche. Effacez la macro, puis réessayez. Mémoire pleine Depart ou Annuler Vous avez tenté d'introduire plus de pages que la mémoire ne peut en contenir. Appuyez sur [Début] pour indiquer à la machine de conserver en mémoire le nombre maximal de pages, ou appuyez sur [Annuler] pour effacer de la mémoire toutes les pages enregistrées pendant l'opération (mais pas celles des opérations précédentes). Message à l'écran Cause probable/Solution 16 Entretien et dépannage 16-22 D 131F/191F Dépassement mémoire Appuyer sur Stop En Impression PC, la machine a reçu plus de données que sa mémoire ne peut contenir. Appuyez sur [STOP] pour annuler la tache d'impression. Effacez les documents inutiles, et réessayez une fois qu'un peu plus de mémoire devient disponible, ou bien divisez l'impression en deux opérations. Erreur scanner Le chariot du miroir de votre machine ne fonctionne plus. Contactez votre SAV. Miroir bloqué Le mode transport n'est pas déverrouillé. Déverrouillez le mode de transport (voir page 3-15). Pas de commande stockée Vous avez appuyé sur [Confirm. Job/Abandon Fax] pour revoir les commandes à venir, mais votre machine n'en a enregistré aucune. – ou – Vous avez appuyé sur touche macro à laquelle aucune commande n'a été assignée. Aucun compte de créé Vous avez tenté d'activer le paramètre code compte mais aucun code compte n'est enregistré dans la machine. Enregistrez au moins un code compte. – ou – Vous avez entré un code compte incorrect lors de l'émission d'un fax alors que la fonction compte est active. Tapez le code compte correct. Pas de doc. en mém. Vous avez tenté d'imprimer un document à partir de la mémoire, mais votre machine n'a rien enregistré. Absence photocond. La cartouche tambour est absente ou n'a pas été correctement installée dans la machine. Vérifiez la présence ou l'installation de la cartouche tambour. Vide Vous avez sélectionné un numéro du numéroteur auto, d'une boîte d'envoi groupé, ou d'une boîte F-code pour lequel aucun numéro de téléphone ou de fax n'a été programmé. Choisissez un autre numéro ou composez-le directement sur les touches numériques. Pas de code d'accès Vous avez tenté de programmer une fonction de sécurité (voir page 13-3), mais aucun code de protection n'est enregistré dans votre machine. Enregistrez un code de protection (voir page 13-3). Pas de code PIN Vous avez sélectionné "Mode1" pour le masque PIN et tenté d'appeler un numéro du numéroteur auto dans lequel aucun PIN n'a été enregistré, ou d'appeler en composant le numéro sur les touches numériques sans entrer le PIN. Tapez le PIN correspondant. Pas de rapport Vous avez demandé une journal d'activité ou un rapport de confirmation, mais aucune transaction fax n'a été effectuée. Abs. cartouche toner La cartouche de toner est absente ou n'a pas été correctement installée dans la machine. Vérifiez la présence ou l'installation de la cartouche de toner. Aucune donée util. Vous avez tenter d'exécuter les programmes N° 384 "Activation de l'Authentification Utilisateur", 385 "Remise à zéro du compteur utilisateur", ou 5125 "Impression de la liste Authentification Utilisateur" sans que des informations utilisateur soient enregistrées. Enregistrez d'abord les informations utilisateur. (Voir page 13-3.) Impossible en macro Pendant l'enregistrement de la macro, vous avez appuyé sur une touche qui ne peut pas être enregistrée comme macro. Message à l'écran Cause probable/Solution Entretien et dépannage 16 D 131F/191F 16-23 Ouvir porte avant Suivre les instructions A Le fil de charge de la cartouche tambour est encrassé. Nettoyez le fil de charge. (Voir page 16-5.) Votre machine peut encore imprimer une centaine de feuilles après l'apparition de ce message, mais une fois que le message "Imprimante hors service" est apparu, aucune page ne pourra plus être imprimée tant que le fil de charge n'aura pas été nettoyé. Ouvrir volet lat. 1 Retirer le Papier Un serrage papier s'est produit dans la machine. Ouvrez le volet latéral et dégagez le serrage papier avec précaution et en douceur. (Voir page 16-15) Ouv&Ferm volet charg Replacer Original Votre document n'a pas été introduit correctement, ou bien le télécopieur appelé ne peut pas gérer la longueur de page de votre document. Réintroduisez la page et réessayez. Erreur papier Charger papier XXX Appuyer sur Stop En impression PC, le format du papier chargé dans le magasin ne correspond pas au format de papier spécifié par le pilote d'imprimante. Appuyez sur [STOP] pour annuler une tâche d'impression. Chargez le papier de format approprié et relancez l'impression. Erreur papier Rotation papier Appuyer sur Stop En Impression PC, l'orientation du papier A5 chargé dans l'introducteur manuel n'est pas correcte. Le format A5 n'est pas disponible pour l'impression PC. Réinstallez le papier A5 dans l'introducteur manuel. Appeler le SAV XXX La section imprimante de votre machine ne fonctionne plus. Contactez votre SAV. Ajouter du papier La magasin ou l'introducteur manuel n'a plus de papier. Rechargez le magasin et/ou l'introducteur manuel. Attendre SVP L'imprimante intégrée à votre machine est en cours de préchauffage ou occupée. Attendez que la machine ait terminé l'impression puis renouvelez votre commande ou votre opération. Relève en cours Vous avez tenté d'enregistrer dans votre machine, un document pour relève ordinaire, mais un document a déjà été enregistré. Attendez que la machine ait terminé l'opération de relève ordinaire ou supprimez le document enregistré. Imprimante utilisée La commande que vous tentez d'introduire requiert l'utilisation de l'imprimante, laquelle est déjà en cours d'utilisation. Attendez que la machine ait fini d'imprimer. Doc. protégé en mém. Un document reçu se trouvait dans la mémoire de la machine quand vous avez tenté de désactiver le code de réception sécurisée. Imprimez le document reçu pour vider la mémoire, puis recommencez l'opération voulue. Protection active Lorsque l'Authentification Utilisateur est active, la machine rejette l'opération concernée par l'enregistrement d'une restriction d'accès. Pour annuler cette limitation, réglez l'Authentification Utilisateur sur "Non". (Voir page 13-3.) Prévoir Photocond. Le tambour devra être bientôt remplacé. Contactez votre revendeur pour obtenir une nouvelle cartouche tambour, si vous n'en avez pas déjà une en votre possession. Remplacer Photocond. Imprim. Inutilis. Votre cartouche tambour ne fonctionne pas. La machine ne peut pas imprimer tant que la cartouche n'a pas été remplacée. Vider Intro Manuelle Ouvr& FermerCarterAv. Une feuille n'a pas été correctement introduite dans l'introducteur manuel. Tirez le levier de libération du rabat, et tirez le papier pour l'extraire de la machine. Puis, ouvrez puis refermez le volet frontal pour réinitialiser l'imprimante. Message à l'écran Cause probable/Solution 16 Entretien et dépannage 16-24 D 131F/191F Lecture en cours La commande que vous tentez d'introduire requiert l'utilisation du scanner, laquelle est déjà en cours d'utilisation. Attendez que la machine ait achevé la numérisation puis réessayez la commande désirée. Réc non sécurisée Vous avez tenté de commander la réception sécurisée en appuyant sur une touche programmée avec la fonction "Sécurité", mais le paramètre réception sécurisé n'est pas activé. Pour activer le paramètre réception sécurisée, voir page 13-3. Chois. format papier Vous avez tenté d'effectuer une copie dans les conditions suivantes : • La sélection du format papier est réglée sur "Auto". • L'introducteur manuel contient du papier autre que A4, A5 ou F4. • Le magasin papier est vide. Appuyez sur [Format papier/Doc.suivant] pour sélectionner le papier voulu. Adresse Utilisée Vous avez tenté d'entrer une adresse secondaire qui est la même que celle qui est utilisée par une autre boîte F-code. Entrez une adresse secondaire différente. Toner Presque Vide La machine va bientôt manquer de toner. Contactez prochainement votre revendeur pour obtenir une nouvelle cartouche toner, si vous n'en avez pas déjà une en votre possession. Toner Vide Imprim. Inutilis. La cartouche toner est vide. Remplacez la cartouche de toner. La machine ne peut pas imprimer tant que la cartouche n'a pas été remplacée. Trop de caractères Vous avez tenté d'entrer trop de numéros ou de caractères pour l'opération en cours. Appuyez sur [Annuler] pour supprimer les caractères surnuméraires, puis réessayez. Trop de destinations Vous avez tenté d'entrer trop de numéros pour une diffusion. Vous pouvez entrer jusqu'à 200 numéros du numéroteur auto et jusqu'à 30 numéros composés avec les touches numériques. Appuyez sur [Annuler] pour supprimer les numéros en trop. Trop d'étapes Vous avez tenté d'entrer trop d'étapes pour une macro. Une touche macro peut enregistrer jusqu'à 60 étapes. Réduction impossible En copie réduite avec l'ADF, si le ratio calculé est inférieur au ratio minimum de réduction, ce message apparaît et la copie réduite n'est pas possible. Utilisez la vitre d'exposition, il se peut cependant que des portions de l'image ne soit pas copiée. Tri impossible Début/ Stop En Impression PC, les données sont trop volumineuses pour permettre le tri. Appuyez sur [Début], et la machine effectue l'impression sans assemblage. Appuyez sur [Stop], et le travail d'impression PC en cours sera annulé. Util. Analyse à plat Vous avez tenté une copie agrandie avec l'ADF. La machine n'est pas prévue pour réaliser un agrandissement avec l'ADF. Placez votre document sur la vitre d'exposition pour réaliser la copie agrandie. Message à l'écran Cause probable/Solution Entretien et dépannage 16 D 131F/191F 16-25 16.2.4 "Message d'erreur" imprimés En cas de problème avec un fax et que la machine détecte une erreur, elle imprime un message intitulé "Message d'erreur". Ce tirage papier fournit les informations suivantes sur la transaction fax : - Code d'erreur spécifique (Voir "Code d'erreur" à la page 16-26.) - Message d'erreur de communication (Voir "Signification des messages d'erreur" ci-dessous.) - Le TTI (ou le numéro de téléphone) du télécopieur distant avec lequel votre machine a tenté de communiquer. Signification des messages d'erreur Les messages d'erreur imprimés notifient diverses anomalies. En voici un bref résumé. Message d'erreur Causes possibles Vérifier appareil distant. • Anomalie appareil distant • Pas de signal de négociation de l'appareil distant • Mauvais numéro appelé Retransmettre. • Ligne téléphonique médiocre Pas de signal de négociation de l'appareil distant Mauvaise introduction ou comptage du document Impossibilité de contacter l'appareil distant à l'issue du nombre de rappels spécifié. Ligne occupée. • La ligne de l'appareil distant était occupée • L'appareil distant n'a pas décroché Conf. réception documents. • Le signal de confirmation n'a pas été reçu de l'appareil distant. • Une ligne de qualité médiocre a causé une image de basse qualité. Mémoire Pleine. • La mémoire de l'appareil distant est saturée N° de téléphone non défini. • Echec de la composition d'un numéro enregistré Arrêté. • Quelqu'un a appuyé sur [Stop] sur l'appareil distant au milieu de la négociation 16 Entretien et dépannage 16-26 D 131F/191F 16.2.5 Code d'erreur Erreurs de numérotation D.0.3, L'appareil distant n'a pas répondu, l'appel n'a pu aboutir ou la touche Stop a été activée D.0.8 pendant la numérotation. Renouvelez l'appel. Si vous obtenez le même message de la machine, appelez le destinataire pour vérifier que son appareil fonctionne correctement. D.0.2 L'appareil distant est occupé. Renouvelez l'appel. D.0.6, L'appareil distant n'a pas répondu, ou l'appel n'a pu aboutir ou D.0.7 La touche [Stop] a été activée pendant la numérotation. Renouvelez l'appel. Erreurs de réception R.1.1 L'appareil distant initiateur de l'appel n'a pas répondu à votre machine. Ceci peut se produire si l'appareil distant a composé un mauvais numéro ou s'il est paramétré pour filtrer les appels par un code d'accès. R.1.2 Les deux télécopieurs sont incompatibles. Votre machine est prévue pour l'émission et la réception de communication fax ITU-T Groupe 3, norme industrielle depuis le début des années 1980. R.1.4 La touche [Stop] a été activée sur la machine réceptrice. R.2.3 La mauvaise qualité de la ligne téléphonique a rendu la communication fax impossible. Contactez le destinataire. R.3.1 La machine émettrice a détecté de trop nombreuses erreurs de la part de la machine réceptrice. R.3.3 La machine émettrice est incompatible avec la machine réceptrice ou a rencontré un problème d'introduction du document pendant l'émission. R.3.4 Une mauvaise qualité de la ligne téléphonique a empêché votre machine d'imprimer correctement toutes ou partie des pages reçues. R.4.1 La machine a reçu des données de longueur trop importante excédant la limite de la machine. R.4.2 La ligne a été coupée avant l'émission ou le télécopieur émetteur a besoin d'une révision. R.4.4 La machine a atteint la limite de sa capacité mémoire. R.5.1, R.5.2 La réception ECM a échoué (peut-être en raison de parasites sur la ligne). R.8.1 Une erreur de compatibilité s'est produite. R.8.10 Des parasites sur la ligne ou d'autres problèmes ont empêché la détection de la ligne. R.8.11 Le fax a dépassé le délai imparti alors qu'il attendait le signal d'apprentissage. Entretien et dépannage 16 D 131F/191F 16-27 Erreurs d'émission T.1.1 L'appareil distant n'a pas répondu à votre machine. Contactez le destinataire. T.1.4 La touche [Stop] a été activée pendant l'émission. T.2.1 La ligne téléphonique a été coupée pendant l'émission ou la communication fax est devenue impossible en raison de la mauvaise qualité de la ligne. Renouvelez l'appel. T.2.2 Les deux télécopieurs sont incompatibles. Votre machine est prévue pour l'émission et la réception de communication fax ITU-T Groupe 3, norme industrielle depuis le début des années 1980. T.2.3 La mauvaise qualité de la ligne téléphonique a rendu la communication fax impossible. Les conditions peut changer rapidement, rappelez un peu plus tard. T.3.1 Le compteur pages de votre machine a détecté une erreur d'introduction pendant l'émission. Réintroduisez soigneusement le document dans l'introducteur et renouvelez l'appel. T.4.1 La ligne téléphonique a été coupée pendant l'émission à cause de nombreuses erreurs du modem ou parce que le fax distant n'avait plus de papier. Renouvelez l'appel. T.4.2 La qualité de la ligne s'est détériorée au cours de l'émission. Renouvelez l'appel. T.4.4 La mauvaise qualité de la ligne ont empêché l'émission. Renouvelez l'appel. T.5.1, L'émission ECM a échoué (peut-être en raison de parasites sur la ligne). Les conditions peuvent changer T.5.2, T.5.3 rapidement, renouvelez l'appel. T.8.1 Une erreur de compatibilité s'est produite. T.8.10 Des parasites sur la ligne ou d'autres problèmes ont empêché la détection de la ligne. T.8.11 Le fax distant n'a pas achevé la phase apprentissage d'égalisation. 16 Entretien et dépannage 16-28 D 131F/191F 16.2.6 Problèmes machine 16.2.7 Problèmes de télécopie Symptôme Suggestions L'écran n'affiche rien et les touches sont inopérantes. Vérifiez que la machine est sous tension. La machine ne s'allume quand on manoeuvre l'interrupteur. Vérifiez que le câble d'alimentation est bien branché. La machine affiche un message d'erreur et émet un signal sonore. Voir page "Message d'erreur à l'écran" à la page 16-20. Serrage fréquent de documents • Vérifiez que le capot de l'ADF est correctement fermé. • S'il y a un corps étranger dans l'ADF, enlevez-le. • Vérifiez que le papier du document présente le grammage adéquat. (Voir "Traitement des documents" à la page 4-7.) • Nettoyez les rouleaux de l'ADF (voir page 16-4.) Serrages fréquents de papier • Vérifiez que le papier présente le grammage adéquat. (Voir "Traitement du papier" à la page 4-10.) Symptôme Suggestions Emission impossible • Vérifiez que la ligne téléphonique est bien branchée. • Vérifiez que le numéro enregistré dans votre numéroteur auto est correct. • Vérifiez que la machine se trouve en mode fax. Dans le cas contraire, commutez la machine en mode fax en appuyant sur [CopieFaxScan]. Impossible d'arrêter l'émission • La touche [Stop] ne permet pas d'arrêter une émission. Pour annuler une émission, appuyez sur [Abandon Fax] et sélectionnez la tâche que vous voulez annuler, et appuyez sur [Valider]. (Voir "Confirmation ou annulation de commandes [CD]" à la page 9-13 pour plus de détails.) Réception automatique impossible • Vérifiez que la ligne téléphonique est bien branchée. • Vérifiez que la machine est en mode réception automatique (page 10-3). • La mémoire peut être saturée. Si le magasin est vide, chargez du papier afin d'imprimer le document reçu et conservé en mémoire. Réception manuelle impossible • Pour recevoir des fax manuellement, vérifiez que le téléphone externe est bien raccordé à votre machine. • En mode réception manuelle, vous devez appuyez sur [Début] avant de raccrocher le téléphone. • La mémoire peut être saturée. Si le magasin est vide, chargez du papier afin d'imprimer le document reçu et conservé en mémoire. Impossible d'enregistrer un document en mémoire • Vérifiez que la machine se trouve en mode fax. Dans le cas contraire, commutez la machine en mode fax en appuyant sur [CopieFaxScan]. • La mémoire peut être saturée. Si le magasin est vide, chargez du papier afin d'imprimer le document reçu et conservé en mémoire. • Le nombre limite de documents qui peuvent être conservés est atteint. Supprimez un document inutile. Entretien et dépannage 16 D 131F/191F 16-29 16.2.8 Problèmes de copie 16.2.9 Problèmes d'impression à partir d'un ordinateur Symptôme Suggestions Copie impossible • Vérifiez que la machine se trouve en mode copie. Dans le cas contraire, commutez la machine en mode copie en appuyant sur [CopieFaxScan]. • Vérifiez que le document est correctement chargé. Si vous utilisez la vitre d'exposition, la face à copier devrait être orientée vers le bas. Si vous utilisez l'ADF, la face à copier devrait être orientée vers le haut. Qualité copie médiocre Voir "Problèmes de qualité d'impression" à la page 16-31 Symptôme Suggestions Impression impossible d'un ordinateur • Le câble USB ou le câble parallèle IEEE-1284 n'est pas correctement connecté. Vérifiez le branchement des câbles. • Le paramétrage du port est incorrect. Vérifiez le paramétrage du port d'imprimante dans le Panneau de configuration Windows. • Il se peut que le pilote de l'imprimante ne soit pas installé correctement. Réinstallez le pilote d'imprimante. • Vérifiez le paramétrage du mode du port parallèle dans le BIOS (Basic Input/Output System) de votre ordinateur. Si le mode du port parallèle est réglé sur ECP (Extended Compatibilities Port), modifiez les paramètres sur mode Standard et Bidirectionnel. (Il se peut que le BIOS de votre ordinateur présente l'option Standard en tant que "Normal".) L'impression est trop lente • L'ordinateur n'a peut-être pas assez de mémoire. Installez plus de mémoire vive sur votre ordinateur. • La tâche d'impression est trop volumineuse ou complexe. Les tâches d'impression "lourdes" demandent beaucoup de temps pour être traitées par la machine. Attendez que la tâche en cours soit terminée. Qualité d'impression médiocre Voir "Problèmes de qualité d'impression" à la page 16-31 L'option d'impression n'affecte pas les tirages imprimés. Certaines applications logicielles écrasent l'option définie dans la page des propriétés de l'imprimante. Sélectionnez les options d'impression à partir de l'application. 16 Entretien et dépannage 16-30 D 131F/191F 16.2.10 Problèmes de Scanner Symptôme Suggestions Impossible de numériser un document Il se peut que le pilote TWAIN ne soit pas installé correctement. Réinstallez le pilote d'imprimante. Le Scanner Develop 131F/ 191F n'apparaît pas dans la liste des périphériques disponibles de votre application. Il se peut que le pilote TWAIN ne soit pas installé correctement. Réinstallez le pilote d'imprimante. Impossible de récupérer le document dans la boîte d'analyse. • Vérifiez qu'une application de numérisation est installée sur votre ordinateur. • Le câble USB ou le câble parallèle IEEE-1284 n'est pas correctement connecté. Vérifiez le branchement des câbles. • Il se peut que le pilote TWAIN ne soit pas installé correctement. Réinstallez le pilote d'imprimante. L'image numérisée présente un aspect sale • Il se peut que la vitre d'exposition ou de l'ADF soit sale. Nettoyez la vitre (voir page 16-3). • Modifiez le contraste de numérisation en appuyant sur [Contraste]. • Modifiez la définition de numérisation en appuyant sur [Définition Doc.]. Entretien et dépannage 16 D 131F/191F 16-31 16.2.11 Problèmes de qualité d'impression Problème Cause possible Les pages restent blanches • Le document n'est pas correctement chargé. Placez votre document dans l'ADF face imprimée vers le haut ou sur la vitre d'exposition, face imprimée vers le bas. • Il se peut que la cartouche toner soit défectueuse. Déposez la cartouche toner et vérifiez qu'elle n'est pas abîmée. Si le problème persiste, remplacez la cartouche toner. Les pages sont noires • Il se peut que la cartouche toner soit défectueuse. Déposez la cartouche toner et vérifiez qu'elle n'est pas abîmée. Si le problème persiste, contactez votre SAV. • Il se peut que le fil de charge du tambour soit sale. Ouvrez la porte avant. Pour nettoyer le fil de charge du tambour, tirez à fond vers vous la tige bleue, puis repoussez-la à sa position d'origine. Voir page page 16-5. L'impression sur papier est trop claire • Le contraste de numérisation est sur un réglage trop clair. Sélectionnez un réglage plus foncé. • La cartouche toner est peut-être vide, ou le niveau de toner est peut-être très bas. Déposez la cartouche de toner et secouezla plusieurs fois pour répartir le toner à l'intérieur. Si le problème persiste, remplacez la cartouche toner. • Le papier est humide. Remplacez le papier. L'impression sur papier est trop foncée Le contraste de numérisation est sur un réglage trop foncé. Sélectionnez un réglage plus clair. ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE 16 Entretien et dépannage 16-32 D 131F/191F Les tirages imprimés présentent un arrière-plan flou. • Il se peut que la vitre d'exposition ou de l'ADF soit sale. Nettoyez la surface de la vitre d'exposition avec un chiffon doux et sec. • Il se peut que la cartouche toner soit défectueuse. Déposez la cartouche toner et vérifiez qu'elle n'est pas abîmée. Si le problème persiste, remplacez la cartouche toner. • Il se peut que le fil de charge du tambour soit sale. Ouvrez la porte avant. Pour nettoyer le fil de charge du tambour, tirez à fond vers vous la tige bleue, puis repoussez-la à sa position d'origine. Voir page page 16-5. Les tirages imprimés présentent une densité irrégulière • Le toner est peut-être mal réparti dans la cartouche. Déposez la cartouche de toner et secouez-la plusieurs fois pour répartir le toner à l'intérieur. • Il se peut que la cartouche tambour soit défectueuse. Déposez la cartouche tambour et vérifiez qu'elle n'est pas abîmée. Si le problème persiste, remplacez la cartouche tambour. Les tirages imprimés présentent des irrégularités Le papier que vous utilisez peut avoir absorbé de l'humidité, peutêtre en raison d'une condensation ou parce que de l'eau a tout simplement été renversée sur le papier. Le toner n'adhère pas bien sur le papier humide. Remplacez le papier par du papier sec. Les tirages imprimés présentent des lignes blanches et/ou des lignes noires • La vitre ou les rouleaux de l'ADF sont peut-être sales. • Nettoyez la vitre de l'ADF et/ou les rouleaux de l'ADF. (Voir page 16-3.) • Il se peut que le fil de charge du tambour soit sale. Ouvrez le volet frontal, puis tirez et repoussez la tige bleue pour nettoyer le fil de charge. (Voir page 16-5.) • La cartouche toner ou la cartouche tambour est peut-être défectueuse. Déposez les cartouches et vérifiez leur état. Si le problème persiste, remplacez la ou les cartouches conformément aux instructions. • Il se peut que le fil de charge du tambour soit sale. Ouvrez la porte avant. Pour nettoyer le fil de charge du tambour, tirez à fond vers vous la tige bleue, puis repoussez-la à sa position d'origine. Voir page page 16-5. Problème Cause possible ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE BBBBB AAAAA CDE CDE CDE CDE CDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE Entretien et dépannage 16 D 131F/191F 16-33 Les tirages imprimés sont maculés de toner • La vitre d'exposition est sale. Nettoyez la surface de la vitre d'exposition avec un chiffon doux et sec. • Le tapis du presse-document est sale. Essuyez le tapis du couvre-document avec un chiffon doux imbibé d'un détergent neutre. • La cartouche toner ou la cartouche tambour est peut-être défectueuse. Déposez les cartouches et vérifiez leur état. Si le problème persiste, remplacez la ou les cartouches conformément aux instructions. • Si le verso des tirages imprimés est maculé de toner, il se peut que le rouleau de transport soit sale. Normalement le rouleau de transport est autonettoyant. Si d'autres remèdes ne règlent pas le problème, contactez votre SAV. • Il se peut que le fil de charge du tambour soit sale. Ouvrez la porte avant. Pour nettoyer le fil de charge du tambour, tirez à fond vers vous la tige bleue, puis repoussez-la à sa position d'origine. Voir page page 16-5. L'image n'est pas correctement alignée sur le papier • Le document n'est pas correctement positionné. Placez correctement l'original contre les réglettes document. Si vous utilisez l'ADF, ajustez soigneusement les guides document au format du document. • La vitre de l'ADF est sale (si utilisation de l'ADF). Nettoyez la vitre de l'ADF avec un chiffon doux et sec. (Voir page 16-3.) • Les réglettes document ne sont pas complètement poussées contre l'original. Faites coulisser les réglettes contre les bords du document. • Le magasin a été chargé avec du papier gondolé. Restaurez la planéité du papier avant de le recharger. Problème Cause possible ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE 16 Entretien et dépannage 16-34 D 131F/191F 16.2.12 Si les informations contenues dans ce chapitre ne vous permettent pas de résoudre le problème Si vous rencontrez un problème machine que les informations contenues dans ce chapitre ne vous permettent pas de résoudre, contactez votre SAV. 7ATTENTION % Si la machine fait un bruit inhabituel, dégage de la fumée ou une odeur bizarre, débranchez-la immédiatement et contactez votre SAV. N'essayez pas de démonter ou de réparer vous-même la machine. % Toute intervention non autorisée sur la machine peut frapper votre garantie de nullité. 17 Annexe Annexe 17 D 131F/191F 17-3 17 Annexe 17.1 Caractéristiques 17.1.1 Autres Caractéristiques Multitâches Accès Quad Méthode d'analyse CCD à plat Méthode d'impression Analyse LED, impression électrophotographique Formats originaux acceptables (Voir page 4-7) Poids du document (Voir page 4-7) Format papier d'impression (Voir page 4-7) Caractéristiques électriques 220 à 240V AC, 50 à 60Hz Consommation de courant • Mode Economie d'énergie : 12 W • Veille : 41 Wh (D 131F), 48 Wh (D 191F) • Maximum : 940 W Température ambiante 10°C à 32°C Humidité relative 20 à 80% RH LCD 20 caractères × 2 lignes Capacité mémoire image* 8 Mo (650 pages environ) plus 32 Mo, en option, (environ 2720* pages de plus) (* Avec le document test 1 ITU-T à définition normale) Autonomie de l'alimentation de secours de la mémoire image * • 8 Mo : 72 heures* • 40 Mo : 24 heures* (* Doit être chargée pendant au moins 24 heures pour obtenir une charge complète) Poids Environ 22,9 Kg (avec les consommables) Capacité de l'ADF 80 feuilles max. (A4, 75 g/m2) Capacité du magasin papier • Magasin : 500 feuilles (80 g/m2) • Introducteur manuel : 50 feuilles (80 g/m2) Capacité du plateau de sortie papier 250 feuilles (60 à 90 g/m2) 17 Annexe 17-4 D 131F/191F Dimensions (lxPxH) 520 × 450 × 446 (mm) Caractéristiques 350 mm 450 mm 446 mm 520 mm Annexe 17 D 131F/191F 17-5 17.1.2 Fax 17.1.3 Copie Caractéristiques Compatibilité ITU-T Groupe 3 et Super Groupe 3 Réseau applicable Réseau téléphonique public commuté (PSTN) ou équivalent Méthode de codage MMR, MR, MH et JBIG de la norme ITU-T Vitesse modem 33 600, 31 200, 28 800, 26 400, 24 000, 21 600, 19 200, 16 800, 14 400, 12 000, 9 600, 7 200, 4 800, 2 400 bps Débit de repli automatique Numéro 1-Touche 40 destinations Numéros abrégés 160 destinations Groupes d'appel 32 groupes Diffusion 230 destinations Vitesse d'émission Environ 2 secondes/page.* (* Sur la base d'une émission mémoire à mémoire du document test 1 ITU-T à destination d'un télécopieur Develop. Les durées d'émission sont variables, mais votre machine assurera toujours la plus haute vitesse de transmission possible dans le cadre des directives ITU-T et en fonction des conditions de la ligne téléphonique.) Largeur de numérisation 208 mm Niveaux de gris 256 niveaux Définition de numérisation • Normal (8 points/mm × 3,85 lignes/mm) • Fin (8 points/mm × 7,7 lignes/mm) • Super fin (16 points/mm × 15,4 lignes/mm) • Gris (8 points/mm × 7,7 lignes/mm) (* Au cas où l'appareil distant est capable d'une définition de 16 points/mm × 15,4 lignes/mm. Sinon, la définition Super fin est de 8 points/mm × 15,4 lignes/mm.) Réduction sur réception Auto (50% à 100%) ou Fixe (100%) Caractéristiques Définition de numérisation 600 dpi. × 300 lpi. Largeur de numérisation 210 mm Délai avant 1ère copie Environ 12 secondes (avec du papier A4 dans le magasin 1) Vitesse d'impression 13 cpm pour D 131F, 19 cpm pour D 191F (sur papier A4 dans le magasin 1) Taux zoom • ADF : 25% à 100% • Vitre d'exposition : 25% à 400% Taux prédéfinis • ADF : 100%, 86%, 81%, 70%, 50% • Vitre d'exposition : 200%, 141%, 122%, 115%, 100%, 86%, 81%, 70%, 50% 17 Annexe 17-6 D 131F/191F 17.1.4 Imprimante 17.1.5 Scanner 17.1.6 Consommables * Avec une couverture du document de 6% document et l'impression de 2 pages A4 à intervalles. 2 Note Les caractéristiques peuvent être modifiées sans préavis. Caractéristiques Définition d'impression 600 dpi Vitesse d'impression 13 cpm pour D 131F, 19 cpm pour D 191F (sur papier A4 dans le magasin 1) Couleur/Mono Monochrome Système d'exploitation Voir page 3-24. Pilote d'imprimante GDI, PCL (option) Interface Port USB Port parallèle IEEE-1284 (en option) Port Ethernet (en option) Caractéristiques Compatibilité TWAIN (Version 1.9) Couleur/Mono Couleur ou monochrome Définition de numérisation 600 dpi, 300 dpi, 200 dpi Largeur de numérisation 208 mm Niveaux de gris 256 niveaux Boîtes d'analyse 20 boîtes Système d'exploitation Voir page 3-24. Caractéristiques Longévité de la cartouche tambour Environ 30 000 pages* Longévité de la cartouche toner Environ 16 000 pages* Longévité de la cartouche toner de départ Environ 3 000 pages* 18 Index Index 18 D 131F/191F 18-3 18 Index A Alimentation .............................2-9 B Basculer en mode de réception automatique ou en mode de réception manuelle ............10-6 C Caractères Correction ...........................4-5 Saisie ..................................4-4 Caractères spéciaux de numérotation ............................8-4 Chargement des documents ....4-9 Chargement du papier Dans l'introducteur manuel ...........................................4-15 Dans le magasin ...............4-12 Code .....................................16-26 Code d'erreur .......................16-26 Combinaison de définition document et contraste différents .....9-4 Combiné .................................5-11 Commandes ...........................9-13 Contraste de numérisation .......................................... 5-6, 9-4 Copie recto-verso ..................5-13 D Date & Heure ..........................3-19 Définition de la langue ............3-18 Définition de numérisation ........9-4 Détection de tonalité ..............3-20 E Emission mémoire rapide ........ 9-5 Emission sans mémoire ......... 9-11 Environnement ....................... 2-11 Espace requis ........................ 2-10 É Émission en temps réel ...9-5, 9-11 Émission mémoire ................... 9-7 Émission avec l'ADF .......... 9-7 Émission par la vitre d’exposition ........................ 9-9 F Fonctions Avancées Copie ................................ 5-10 Émission fax ..................... 9-13 Réception fax ................... 10-8 I Incidents .............................. 16-10 Installation du pilote ............... 3-24 J Journal ................................... 15-5 Journal d'activité ................... 15-5 L Listes Liste .................................. 15-3 Liste de réacheminement fax .......................................... 15-3 Liste des boîtes d'envoi groupé .......................................... 15-3 Liste des boîtes F-code ... 15-3 Liste des codes comptes . 15-3 Liste des commandes ...... 15-3 Liste des documents enregistrés .................................15-3, 15-8 18 Index 18-4 D 131F/191F Liste des documents envoi groupé ...................................... 15-3 Liste des documents F-code ........................................... 15-3 Liste des fonctions ........... 15-3 Liste des groupes ............. 15-3 Liste des macro-commandes ........................................... 15-3 Liste des numéros 1-Touche ........................................... 15-3 Liste des numéros 1-Touches ........................................... 15-3 Liste des numéros abrégés ........................................... 15-3 Liste des numéros bloqués ........................................... 15-3 Liste des paramètres copie ........................................... 15-3 Liste des paramètres fax .. 15-3 Liste des paramètres machine ........................................... 15-3 Liste des paramètres scan ........................................... 15-3 Liste des paramètres scanner ........................................... 15-3 M Message de dépassement mémoire ...........................................5-4, 9-6 Messages d'erreur ............... 16-20 Mode de numérisation Mode Boîte Analyse ........... 7-4 Mode de numérisation en temps réel ........................... 7-4 Mode de réception fax ........... 10-3 Mode Economie d'énergie ..... 3-22 Mode transport ...................... 3-15 N Nettoyage Fil de charge ..................... 16-5 Rouleaux de l'ADF ............ 16-4 Zone de numérisation ....... 16-3 Numérisation ............................7-3 Numéros abrégés ...................8-12 Numérotation par répertoire ...8-16 Numérotation pour groupe d’appel ....................................8-16 O Onglet Mise en page ................6-9 Onglet Option périph. .............6-11 Onglet Qualité ...........................6-9 Onglet Sortie ...........................6-11 P Propriétés de l'imprimante .......6-4 R Rappel ....................................9-13 Rapport ...................................15-7 Rapport de confirmation .........15-7 Remplacement de la cartouche de toner ..................................16-6 Remplacement de la cartouche tambour ..................................16-8 Réception sans papier ............10-7 Réglage délai d'inactivité ........3-22 Réglages initiaux Date & Heure .....................3-19 Détection de tonalité .........3-20 Langue ..............................3-18 Mode de réception fax ......3-19 Réglage délai d'inactivité ..3-22 Sélection du TTI usuel ......3-21 TTI (Votre Nom) .................3-21 Votre numéro de fax .........3-20 Réglementation en matière de copie ..................................2-13 Index 18 D 131F/191F 18-5 S Saisie de caractères spéciaux ..4-5 Sélection du TTI usuel ............3-21 Site d'installation ......................2-9 T Tableau des fonctions ..............4-6 Taux zoom ................................5-7 Téléphone externe ..................3-10 Touches 1-Touche ...................8-5 Traitement des documents ......4-7 Document acceptables .......4-7 Traitement du papier Papier acceptable ...............4-7 Spécification du format papier ................................4-17 Tri ...........................................5-15 TTI (Votre Nom) ......................3-21 Type de document ...................5-6 V Volume haut-parleur ...............3-16 Votre numéro de fax ...............3-20 18 Index 18-6 D 131F/191F User’s Guide [Enlarge Display Operations] 751/601 x-1 Introduction Thank you for choosing this machine. The bizhub 751/601 User’s Guide [Enlarge Display Operations] contains details on the operation of the various functions available in the Enlarge Display mode of the bizhub 751/601 and on the various operating precautions. In order to ensure that this machine is used correctly and efficiently, carefully read the Enlarge Display Mode Operations volume of the User’s Guide before using the machine. For descriptions on trademarks and copyrights, refer to [Trademarks/Copyrights]. Views of the actual equipment may be slightly different from the illustrations used in this Enlarge Display Mode Operations volume of the User’s Guide. Explanation of manual conventions 7 CAUTION CAUTION % Failure to observe instructions highlighted in this manner may result in serious injuries or property damage. Observe all cautions in order to ensure safe use of this machine. 2 Reminder Text highlighted in this manner indicates operation precautions. Carefully read and observe this type of information. ! Detail Text highlighted in this manner provides more detailed information concerning operating procedures and other descriptions. 2 Note Text highlighted in this manner indicates sections containing additional information. If necessary, refer to the indicated sections. [ ] Names highlighted as shown above indicate keys on the control panel and buttons in the touch panel. x-2 751/601 Contents 1 Before use 1.1 Names of control panel parts and their functions...............................................................................1-3 1.2 Adjusting the angle of the control panel ..............................................................................................1-5 1.2.1 To adjust the angle of the control panel...................................................................................................1-5 1.3 Screens in Enlarge Display mode .........................................................................................................1-7 1.3.1 Displaying screens in Enlarge Display mode ...........................................................................................1-7 1.4 Touch panel ............................................................................................................................................1-8 1.4.1 Touch panel operation .............................................................................................................................1-8 1.4.2 Icons that appear in the screen................................................................................................................1-8 1.4.3 Paper type icons ......................................................................................................................................1-8 1.4.4 Paper supply icons...................................................................................................................................1-9 1.5 Feeding the original..............................................................................................................................1-10 1.5.1 Loading the original into the ADF...........................................................................................................1-10 1.5.2 Placing the original on the original glass................................................................................................1-11 1.6 Specifying original settings .................................................................................................................1-12 1.6.1 Copying originals of mixed sizes ("Mixed Original" setting)...................................................................1-12 1.6.2 Loading folded originals ("Z-Folded Original" setting) ...........................................................................1-13 1.6.3 Selecting the original orientation (Original Direction settings)................................................................1-15 1.6.4 Selecting the position of the binding margin (Original Binding Position/Binding Position settings) ....................................................................................................................................1-17 2 Using copy functions 2.1 General copy operation .........................................................................................................................2-3 2.2 Selecting the Paper settings .................................................................................................................2-5 2.2.1 Automatically selecting the paper size ("Auto" Paper setting) .................................................................2-5 2.2.2 Manually selecting the desired paper size ...............................................................................................2-6 2.3 Specifying a Zoom setting.....................................................................................................................2-7 2.3.1 Selecting a zoom ratio..............................................................................................................................2-8 2.4 Selecting original and copy settings ....................................................................................................2-9 2.4.1 Selecting single-sided or double-sided copies......................................................................................2-10 2.5 Selecting a combined copy setting ....................................................................................................2-12 2.6 Selecting Finishing settings ................................................................................................................2-14 2.6.1 Selecting the finishing method...............................................................................................................2-15 2.6.2 Selecting Staple/Punch settings ............................................................................................................2-16 2.6.3 Selecting a folding or binding setting.....................................................................................................2-18 2.7 Selecting not to rotate the image .......................................................................................................2-20 2.8 Selecting the quality of the original ....................................................................................................2-21 2.9 Selecting the density settings.............................................................................................................2-23 2.9.1 Adjusting the print density (Density settings) .........................................................................................2-23 2.9.2 Adjusting the background density (Background Removal settings) ......................................................2-24 2.10 Selecting the Paper settings ...............................................................................................................2-26 2.10.1 Selecting a Paper Type setting for the bypass tray ...............................................................................2-26 2.10.2 Selecting a Paper Size setting for the bypass tray ................................................................................2-28 2.11 Scanning the next original to be copied while a copy job is being printed (next job reservation)....................................................................................................2-31 2.12 Pausing scanning/printing...................................................................................................................2-32 2.13 Printing a proof to check the settings (Proof Copy) .........................................................................2-33 3 Using fax/scan functions 3.1 General fax/scan operation...................................................................................................................3-3 3.2 Specifying a destination ........................................................................................................................3-5 3.2.1 Selecting a destination from the address book .......................................................................................3-6 751/601 x-3 3.2.2 Selecting a destination from the job log .................................................................................................. 3-7 3.2.3 Selecting a destination with an LDAP search .......................................................................................... 3-8 3.2.4 Directly typing in the number ................................................................................................................. 3-11 3.3 Specifying scanning settings (Scan Settings) ................................................................................... 3-13 3.3.1 Simplex/Duplex...................................................................................................................................... 3-13 3.3.2 Original Type.......................................................................................................................................... 3-14 3.3.3 Resolution .............................................................................................................................................. 3-15 3.3.4 Density ................................................................................................................................................... 3-17 3.3.5 File Type................................................................................................................................................. 3-18 3.3.6 Background Removal ............................................................................................................................ 3-20 3.3.7 Scan Size ............................................................................................................................................... 3-21 3.3.8 Original Settings..................................................................................................................................... 3-23 3.4 Using a program................................................................................................................................... 3-26 3.5 Checking the destinations .................................................................................................................. 3-27 4 Logging on and logging off 4.1 When a logon screen appears .............................................................................................................. 4-3 4.1.1 When the screen to enter the user name appears................................................................................... 4-3 4.1.2 When the screen to enter the account name and password appears..................................................... 4-5 x-4 751/601 1 Before use 751/601 1-3 Before use 1 1 Before use 1.1 Names of control panel parts and their functions 2 Note For details, refer to the User’s Guide [Copy Operations], the User’s Guide [Network Scan/Fax/Network Fax Operations]. 1 2 4 5 3 6 7 12 11 8 13 14 15 16 10 9 17 18 19 No. Part name Description 1 Touch panel Displays various screens and messages. Specify the various settings by directly touching the panel. 2 Main Power indicator Lights up in green when the machine is turned on with the main power switch. 3 [Power] (auxiliary power) key Press to turn on/off machine operations. When turned off, the machine enters a state where it conserves energy. 4 [Mode Memory] key Programmed fax/scan settings can be recalled to be used again. (p. 3-26) 5 [Utility/Counter] key Press to display the Meter Count screen and the Utility screen. 6 [Reset] key Press to clear all settings (except programmed settings) entered in the control panel and touch panel. 7 [Stop] key Pressing the [Stop] key during an operation temporarily stops the operation. 8 [Proof Copy] key Press to print a single proof copy to be checked before printing a large number of copies. (p. 2-33) 1 Before use 1-4 751/601 9 [Start] key Press to start the operation. When this machine is ready to begin the operation, the indicator on the [Start] key lights up in blue. If the indicator on the [Start] key lights up in orange, the operation cannot begin. Press to restart a stopped job. 10 Data indicator Flashes in blue while a print job or fax is being received. Lights up in blue while a print job or fax is queued to be printed or is being printed. 11 [C] (clear) key Press to clear a value (such as the number of copies, a zoom ratio, or a size) entered using the keypad. 12 Keypad Use to type in the number of copies to be produced. Use to type in the zoom ratio. Use to type in the various settings. 13 [Enlarge Display] key Press to enter or exit Enlarge Display mode. 14 [Accessibility] key Press to display the screen for specifying settings for user accessibility functions. 15 [Power Save] key Press to enter Low Power mode. While the machine is in Low Power mode, the indicator on the [Power Save] key lights up in green and the touch panel goes off. To cancel Low Power mode, press the [Power Save] key again. 16 [Access] key If user authentication or account track settings have been applied, press this key after entering the user name and password (for user authentication) or the account name and password (for account track) in order to use this machine. 17 Brightness dial Use to adjust the brightness of the touch panel. 18 [Fax/Scan] key Press to enter Fax/Scan mode. While the machine is in Fax/Scan mode, the indicator on the [Fax/Scan] key lights up in green. 19 [Copy] key Press to enter Copy mode. (As a default, the standard-sized Copy mode screen is displayed.) While the machine is in Copy mode, the indicator on the [Copy] key lights up in green. No. Part name Description 751/601 1-5 Before use 1 1.2 Adjusting the angle of the control panel The control panel can be adjusted to either of three angles. In addition, the control panel can be tilted to the left. Adjust the control panel to the angle that allows for easy operation. 1.2.1 To adjust the angle of the control panel 1 Pull the control panel release lever toward you to raise or lower the control panel. ➀ Upper position (base position) ➁ Middle position ➂ Lower position ➃ Left tilt position 1 Before use 1-6 751/601 2 To tilt the control panel to the left, hold the bottom of the control panel, and then tilt the panel to the left. – Do not grab the touch panel when turning the control panel to the left or right. 751/601 1-7 Before use 1 1.3 Screens in Enlarge Display mode 1.3.1 Displaying screens in Enlarge Display mode 1 Press the [Copy] or [Fax/Scan] key in the control panel to display the desired screen. 2 Press the [Enlarge Display] key in the control panel. – Depending on the settings specified in Accessibility mode, a message appears, requesting confirmation to cancel the settings that cannot be specified in Enlarge Display mode. For details on specifying settings in the Accessibility screen, refer to the User’s Guide [Copy Operations]. The screen is displayed in Enlarge Display mode. While screens are displayed in Enlarge Display mode, pressing the [Copy] or [Fax/Scan] key displays the normal screen. 3 To return to the standard-sized screens from the screens in Enlarge Display mode, press the [Enlarge Display] key in the control panel. ! Detail The default settings for Enlarge Display mode can be changed. To change the default settings, specify desired settings in Enlarge Display mode, and then press the [Accessibility] key. On the Accessibility Setting screen 2/2, touch [Default Enlarge Display Settings], press the [Copy] key or the [Fax/Scan] key, and then specify "Current Setting". The default settings can be also changed in Utility mode. For details, refer to the User's Guide [Copy Operations]. 1 Before use 1-8 751/601 1.4 Touch panel 1.4.1 Touch panel operation To activate a function or to select a setting, lightly touch the button in the touch panel for the desired function or setting. 2 Reminder Do not apply extreme pressure to the touch panel, otherwise it may be scratched or damaged. Never push down on the touch panel with force, and never use a hard or pointed object to make a selection in the touch panel. 1.4.2 Icons that appear in the screen 1.4.3 Paper type icons 2 Note For details, refer to the User’s Guide [Copy Operations]. If paper other than plain paper is specified for the selected paper tray when using a copy function, the icon indicating the paper type appears under "Paper" in the Basic screen. Paper type icons that appear Icon Description This button appears when there is a message indicating that a print error occurred. Touch this button to display the message, and then perform the necessary steps. Touch this button to display the message at an enlarged size. This button appears when there is a message indicating that consumables must be replaced or the machine requires maintenance. Touch this button to display the message, and then perform the replacement or maintenance procedure. Transparency Special Paper Thick Paper 751/601 1-9 Before use 1 1.4.4 Paper supply icons The amount of paper remaining is indicated in the Copy mode screen where the paper size is selected. For details about the screen for selecting the paper size, refer to "Selecting the Paper settings" on page 2-5. Paper supply icons that appear Letterhead Colored Paper Trace User Paper1 User Paper2 User Paper3 Thin Paper Tab paper Fine Recycled Labels Icon Description This icon indicates that very little paper remains in the paper tray. This icon indicates that paper is not loaded in the paper tray. 1 Before use 1-10 751/601 1.5 Feeding the original 2 Note For details, refer to the User’s Guide [Copy Operations] and the User’s Guide [Network Scan/Fax/Network Fax Operations]. The original can be fed in either of the following ways. Be sure to position the original correctly according to the type of original being scanned. - Using the ADF - Using the original glass 1.5.1 Loading the original into the ADF 1 Place the original in the original feed tray in the order to be scanned with the side to be scanned faces up. – Load the original pages so that the top of the original is toward the back or the right side of the machine. 2 Slide the guides against the edges of the original. A A 751/601 1-11 Before use 1 1.5.2 Placing the original on the original glass 1 Lift open the ADF. – When placing the original on the original glass, be sure to lift open the ADF at least 20°. If the original is placed on the original glass without the ADF being lifted at least 20°, the correct original size will not be detected. 2 Place the original on the original glass with the side to be scanned faces down. – Load the original pages so that the top of the original is toward the back or the left side of the machine. 3 Align the original with the mark in the back-left corner of the original scales. 4 Close the ADF. Original scales 1 Before use 1-12 751/601 1.6 Specifying original settings 2 Note For details, refer to the User’s Guide [Copy Operations]. The following describes necessary settings depending on the status and placement of the originals to copy them as desired. For details on selecting the original type when using fax/scanning functions, refer to "Original Settings" on page 3-23. 1.6.1 Copying originals of mixed sizes ("Mixed Original" setting) Originals of different sizes can be loaded together into the ADF to be fed and scanned one by one automatically. 1 Slide the lateral guides of the ADF to fit the size of the largest page. 2 Align the originals as the references so that the side to be scanned faces up. 3 Place the original in the original feed tray in the order to be scanned with the side to be scanned faces up. – Slide the guides against the edges of the original. – Load the original pages into the ADF so that the top of the pages is toward the left side of the machine. 751/601 1-13 Before use 1 4 In the main screen, touch the Original Settings tab. The Original Settings screen appears. 5 Touch [Mixed Original]. – To cancel the "Mixed Original" setting, touch [Mixed Original] again to deselect it. 1.6.2 Loading folded originals ("Z-Folded Original" setting) If folded originals are loaded into the ADF to be copied, the original size is correctly detected. 2 Note Load the original into the ADF. The length of the first page of the original is detected, and all pages of the original are scanned at that size. 2 Reminder Unfold folded originals before loading them into the ADF. If the original is copied without being unfolded, a paper misfeed may occur. 1 Before use 1-14 751/601 1 Position the original to be copied. 2 In the main screen, touch the Original Settings tab. The Original Settings screen appears. 3 Touch [Z-Folded Original]. – To cancel the "Z-Folded Original" setting, touch [Z-Folded Original] again to deselect it. 751/601 1-15 Before use 1 1.6.3 Selecting the original orientation (Original Direction settings) When copying double-sided originals or making double-sided copies or combined copies, specify the original orientation, otherwise the copies may not be printed in the correct page order or correct front and back page arrangement. 1 Position the original to be copied. – For details on positioning the original, refer to "Feeding the original" on page 1-10. 2 In the Basic screen, touch [Duplex/Combine]. Otherwise, touch the Original Settings tab. Setting Description Select this setting for an original loaded with the top toward the back of this machine. Select this setting for an original loaded with the top toward the front of this machine. Select this setting for an original loaded into the ADF with the top of the original toward the left side of this machine. Select this setting for an original placed on the original glass with the top of the original toward the right side of this machine. Select this setting for an original loaded into the ADF with the top of the original toward the right side of this machine. Select this setting for an original placed on the original glass with the top of the original toward the left side of this machine. 1 Before use 1-16 751/601 3 Touch [Original Direction]. From the Duplex/Combine screen From the Original Settings screen The Original Direction screen appears. 4 Touch the button for the orientation of the loaded original, and then touch [OK]. – To return to the main screen, touch [Main Screen]. 751/601 1-17 Before use 1 1.6.4 Selecting the position of the binding margin (Original Binding Position/Binding Position settings) If a double-sided original is loaded into the ADF, specify the position of the top of the back side of the original by specifying the binding margin position for the original. 1 Position the original to be copied. – For details on positioning the original, refer to "Feeding the original" on page 1-10. 2 In the Basic screen, touch [Duplex/Combine]. Otherwise touch the Original Settings tab. Setting Description Left Bind Left Select this setting if the original is loaded with the binding margin at the left. Top Select this setting if the original that is loaded has a binding margin at the top. Right Bind Right Select this setting if the original is loaded with the binding margin at the right. Auto With this setting, the binding margin is set at the top or at the left. Select this setting to automatically select the position of the binding margin. If the original length is 297 mm or less, a binding position along the long side of the original is selected. If the original length is more than 297 mm, a binding position along the short side of the original is selected. 1 Before use 1-18 751/601 3 In the Duplex/Combine screen, touch [Original Binding Pos.]. Otherwise, touch [Binding Position] in the Original Settings screen. From the Duplex/Combine screen From the Original Settings screen 751/601 1-19 Before use 1 4 Touch the button for the desired binding margin position, and then touch [OK]. From the Original Binding Position screen From the Binding Position screen – To return to the main screen, touch [Main Screen]. 1 Before use 1-20 751/601 2 Using copy functions 751/601 2-3 Using copy functions 2 2 Using copy functions 2.1 General copy operation 2 Note For details on the copy operation, refer to the User’s Guide [Copy Operations]. This section contains information on the general operation for making copies. 1 Press the [Copy] key in the control panel, and then press the [Enlarge Display] key. The Copy mode screen appears in Enlarge Display mode. 2 Position the original to be copied. – For details on positioning the original, refer to "Feeding the original" on page 1-10. 3 Specify the desired copy settings. – For details on specifying original settings, refer to page 1-12. – For details on selecting the Paper settings, refer to page 2-5. – For details on selecting the Zoom setting, refer to page 2-7. – For details on selecting the original and copy settings, refer to page 2-9. – For details on selecting a Combine setting, refer to page 2-12. – For details on selecting Finishing settings, refer to page 2-14. – For details on specifying settings to not rotate the image, refer to page 2-20. – For details on selecting the original image quality, refer to page 2-21. – For details on selecting a copy density setting, refer to page 2-23. – To cancel the setting and select the default, press the [Reset] key. 4 Using the keypad, type in the desired number of copies. – If the number of copies was incorrectly entered, press the [C] (clear) key in the keypad, and then specify the correct number of copies. 2 Using copy functions 2-4 751/601 5 Press the [Start] key. 751/601 2-5 Using copy functions 2 2.2 Selecting the Paper settings The paper size can be selected automatically according to the original size or it can be specified manually. Specify the paper size according to the corresponding procedure, depending on the desired copy settings. 2.2.1 Automatically selecting the paper size ("Auto" Paper setting) The size of the loaded original is detected, and copies are produced using paper of the same size. If the "Full Size" Zoom setting was specified, paper of the same size as the original is selected. If the zoom ratio was increased or decreased, a paper size that corresponds to the specified zoom ratio is automatically selected. 2 Note The "Auto Zoom" setting and the "Auto" Paper setting cannot both be selected at the same time. If the "Auto Paper Select" was selected at the "Auto Zoom" setting, the Zoom screen appears. Touch the button for the desired zoom ratio. 1 In the Basic screen, touch [Paper]. The Paper screen appears. 2 Touch [Auto]. – To return to the main screen, touch [Main Screen]. 3 Touch [OK]. The Basic screen appears again. 2 Using copy functions 2-6 751/601 2.2.2 Manually selecting the desired paper size The paper tray loaded with paper of the desired size can be selected manually. By also selecting the Auto Zoom setting, the most appropriate zoom ratio is selected based on the size of the loaded original and the specified paper size. 2 Note Load the papers of the appropriate size into the paper tray in advance. For details on loading paper, refer to the User’s Guide [Copy Operations]. 1 In the Basic screen, touch [Paper]. The Paper screen appears. 2 Select the paper tray loaded with paper of the desired size. – To return to the main screen, touch [Main Screen]. 3 Touch [OK]. The Basic screen appears again. 751/601 2-7 Using copy functions 2 2.3 Specifying a Zoom setting The zoom ratio can be set in order to make a copy on paper with a size different than the original or to enlarge or reduce the size of the copy image. The zoom ratio can be specified in any of the following ways. *1 The "Auto Zoom" setting and the "Auto" Paper setting cannot both be selected at the same time. If the "Auto Zoom" was selected at the "Auto Paper Select" setting, the Paper screen appears. Touch the button for the desired paper. *2 When selecting a Reduce setting or a programmed zoom ratio, "Minimal" can be selected. Touch [Minimal] to produce a copy with the original image slightly reduced (93.0%) and centered in the paper. The zoom ratio of the "Minimal" setting can be changed (between 90.0% and 99.9%). For details, refer to the User’s Guide [Copy Operations]. *3 The programmed zoom ratios can be changed. For details, refer to the User’s Guide [Copy Operations]. Follow the procedure described below to specify the Zoom setting. Setting Description Auto Zoom*1 The most appropriate zoom ratio is automatically selected based on the size of the loaded original and the specified paper size. Full Size A copy that is the same size as the original (100.0%) is produced. Enlarge The most suitable enlargement zoom ratios for copying from common standard original sizes to standard paper sizes are preset. Reduce*2 The most suitable reduction zoom ratios for copying from common standard original sizes to standard paper sizes are preset. Zoom By using the keypad, a zoom ratio between 25.0% and 400.0% can be typed in directly without changing the height-to-width ratio. Set Zoom Ratio*2*3 Programmed zoom ratios can be recalled to be used again for copying. 2 Using copy functions 2-8 751/601 2.3.1 Selecting a zoom ratio 1 In the Basic screen, touch [Zoom]. The Zoom screen appears. 2 Touch the button for the desired zoom ratio. – To return to the main screen, touch [Main Screen]. – If "Enlarge", "Reduce" or "Set Zoom Ratio" was selected, select the desired zoom ratio, and then touch [OK]. – If "Zoom" was selected, use the keypad to type in the desired zoom ratio, and then touch [OK]. – Touch [+] to enlarge the zoom ratio, and touch [-] to reduce the zoom ratio in 0.1% increments. 3 Touch [OK]. The Basic screen appears again. 751/601 2-9 Using copy functions 2 2.4 Selecting original and copy settings The type of original and copy can be specified. The following original and copy settings are available. *1 If "1 > 2" or "2 > 2" is selected, specify the binding margin position for the copy and the orientation of the loaded original, otherwise the copies will not be printed as desired. For details on specifying the original orientation, refer to "Selecting the original orientation (Original Direction settings)" on page 1-15. *2 If "2 > 1" or "2 > 2" is selected, select the position of the binding margin and the orientation of the loaded original, otherwise the copies will not be printed as desired. For details on specifying the original orientation, refer to "Selecting the original orientation (Original Direction settings)" on page 1-15. For details on specifying the binding margin position of the original, refer to "Selecting the position of the binding margin (Original Binding Position/Binding Position settings)" on page 1-17. ! Detail When the original is scanned from the original glass using the "1 > 2", "2 > 1" or "2 > 2" settings, the scanned pages are stored and printed together. Follow the procedures described below to select original and copy settings. Setting Description 1 > 1 Select this setting to produce single-sided copies from single-sided originals. 1 > 2*1 Select this setting to produce one double-sided copy from two single-sided originals. 2 > 1*2 Select this setting to produce two single-sided copies from one double-sided original. 2 > 2*1*2 Select this setting to produce double-sided copies from double-sided originals. 2 Using copy functions 2-10 751/601 2.4.1 Selecting single-sided or double-sided copies 1 In the Basic screen, touch [Duplex/Combine]. The Duplex/Combine screen appears. 2 Touch [Original > Copy]. – To return to the main screen, touch [Main Screen]. The Duplex Settings screen appears. 751/601 2-11 Using copy functions 2 3 Touch the button for the desired settings, and then touch [OK]. – If "1 > 2" or "2 > 2" is selected, touch [Output Bind Direction], select the binding position for the copy, and then touch [OK]. – If "Auto" is selected, the binding margin is set at the top or at the left. The binding position is automatically determined according to the orientation of the loaded original. If the original length is 297 mm or less, a binding position along the long side of the paper is selected. If the original length is more than 297 mm, a binding position along the short side of the paper is selected. 4 Touch [Close]. The Basic screen appears again. 2 Using copy functions 2-12 751/601 2.5 Selecting a combined copy setting Two original images can be combined and printed on a single page, reducing paper use. 1 In the Basic screen, touch [Duplex/Combine]. The Duplex/Combine screen appears. 2 Touch [Combine]. – To return to the main screen, touch [Main Screen]. The Combine screen appears. 751/601 2-13 Using copy functions 2 3 Touch [2in1], and then touch [OK]. 4 Touch [Close]. The Basic screen appears again. 2 Using copy functions 2-14 751/601 2.6 Selecting Finishing settings Various settings can be selected for sorting and finishing copies fed into the output tray. The following Finishing settings are available. *1 If no finisher is installed and all of the following conditions are met, printed copies can be fed out and sorted in an alternating crisscross pattern. A4- or B5-size paper is used. Paper of the same size and type is loaded with the w orientation in one paper tray and with the v orientation in another tray. The "Auto" Paper setting is selected. The "Auto" Paper setting is not selected when the "Mixed Original" setting is selected. *2 The Staple settings are available only if the optional finisher is installed. *3 The Punch settings are available only if the punch kit or Z folding unit is installed with the optional finisher. *4 The number of punched holes differs depending on the country (region) where the unit is installed. For details, consult your service representative. *5 The Half-Fold, Center Staple & Fold and Tri-Folding settings are available only if the optional Finisher FS- 610 is installed. *6The Z-Fold setting is available only if the Z folding unit is installed with the optional finisher. 2 Note Certain finishing settings cannot be used together. Follow the procedures described below to select Finishing settings. Setting Description Collate (By Set) Select this setting to separate each set of a multi-page original. Group Select this setting to separate the copies of each page in a multi-page original. Offset*1 Select this setting to feed out and sort printed copies in an alternating crisscross pattern if the sorting conditions are met when no finisher is installed. Select this setting to feed out and stack the printed copies on top of each other with each set shifted to separate it when a finisher is installed. Face Up The copies are output with their front sides facing up. Staple*2 Select one of these settings to bind the printed copies with staples. "Corner" or "2 Position" can be selected. Punch*3*4 Select one of these settings to punch holes in the copies for filing them. Half-Fold*5 Select this setting to fold copies in half before feeding them out. Center Staple & Fold*5 Select this setting to staple copies at two places along the center before feeding them out. Tri-Fold*5 Select this setting to fold copies in three before feeding them out. Z-Fold*6 Select this setting to fold copies in half along the center, and additionally mountainfold one of the halves before feeding them out. 751/601 2-15 Using copy functions 2 2.6.1 Selecting the finishing method 1 In the Basic screen, touch [Finishing]. The Finishing screen appears. 2 Select the desired Finishing settings. – To return to the main screen, touch [Main Screen]. 3 Touch [OK]. The Basic screen appears again. 2 Using copy functions 2-16 751/601 2.6.2 Selecting Staple/Punch settings 1 In the Basic screen, touch [Finishing]. 2 Touch [Staple/Punch]. – To return to the main screen, touch [Main Screen]. The Staple/Punch screen appears. 751/601 2-17 Using copy functions 2 3 Touch the button for the desired settings, and then touch [Position Setting]. 4 Select the desired position. – Touch [Auto] to automatically determine the stapling or hole-punching position according to the orientation of the loaded original. The paper is stapled or holes are punched along the long side of the paper if the original length is 297 mm or less or along the short side of the paper if the original length is more than 297 mm. When the "2 Position" Staple setting is selected 5 Touch [OK], and then touch [OK] in the next two screens that appear. Otherwise, touch [Main Screen]. The Basic screen appears again. 2 Note The number of punched holes differs depending on the country (region) where the unit is installed. For details, consult your service representative. 2 Using copy functions 2-18 751/601 2.6.3 Selecting a folding or binding setting 1 In the Basic screen, touch [Finishing]. 2 Touch [Fold/Bind]. – To return to the main screen, touch [Main Screen]. The Fold/Bind screen appears. 3 Select the desired settings. – To cancel the setting, touch [No]. 751/601 2-19 Using copy functions 2 4 Touch [OK], and then touch [OK] in the next screen that appears. Otherwise, touch [Main Screen]. The Basic screen appears again. 2 Using copy functions 2-20 751/601 2.7 Selecting not to rotate the image Copies can be printed with the image not rotated to fit the orientation of the loaded paper. 2 Note Depending on the paper size and zoom ratio, some parts of the image may be lost. Follow the procedure described below to select the setting to not rotate the image. 1 Touch [Auto Rotate OFF]. – To cancel the setting for not rotating the image, touch [Auto Rotate OFF] again. 751/601 2-21 Using copy functions 2 2.8 Selecting the quality of the original Select an original quality setting. Select the setting for the original type to better adjust the copy quality. The following Original Type settings are available. Follow the procedure described below to select an Original Type setting. 1 Position the original to be copied. – For details on positioning the original, refer to "Feeding the original" on page 1-10. 2 Touch the Original Settings tab. The Original Settings screen appears. 3 Touch [Original Type]. The Original Type screen appears. Setting Description Text Select this setting when copying originals containing only text. Dot Matrix Original Select this setting when copying originals containing only text that appears faint (such as that written with a pencil). Text/Photo Select this setting when copying originals containing both text and photos. Photo Select this setting when copying originals containing only photos (halftones). 2 Using copy functions 2-22 751/601 4 Touch the button for the quality setting most appropriate for the loaded original. – To return to the main screen, touch [Main Screen]. 5 Touch [OK]. The Original Settings screen appears again. 751/601 2-23 Using copy functions 2 2.9 Selecting the density settings Specify the copy density and background density. Adjust to the best density according to the status of the originals. The following density adjustments are available. Follow the procedures described below to select the density settings. 2.9.1 Adjusting the print density (Density settings) 1 Touch [Density/Background] on the Basic screen. The Density/Background screen appears. 2 Touch [Density]. The Density screen appears. Parameter Description Density The print image density can be adjusted to one of nine levels. Background Removal The density of the background color of the original can be adjusted to one of nine levels. 2 Using copy functions 2-24 751/601 3 Select the desired Density setting. – Each time [Light] or [Dark] is touched, the density is lightened or darkened by one level. – To select the center setting (default setting), touch [Standard]. – Touch [Auto] to have the machine detect the density of the original image and automatically select the appropriate exposure for the copy. – To return to the main screen, touch [Main Screen]. 4 Touch [OK], and then touch [OK] in the next screen that appears. The Basic screen appears again. 2.9.2 Adjusting the background density (Background Removal settings) 1 Touch [Density/Background] on the Basic screen. The Density/Background screen appears. 751/601 2-25 Using copy functions 2 2 Touch [Background Removal]. The Background Removal screen appears. 3 Select the desired Background Removal setting. – Each time [Light] or [Dark] is touched, the density is lightened or darkened by one level. – To select the center setting (default setting), touch [Standard]. – To return to the main screen, touch [Main Screen]. 4 Touch [OK], and then touch [OK] in the next screen that appears. The Basic screen appears again. 2 Using copy functions 2-26 751/601 2.10 Selecting the Paper settings 2.10.1 Selecting a Paper Type setting for the bypass tray If paper other than plain paper, such as OHP transparencies or label sheets, is loaded in the bypass tray, be sure to change the paper type setting as described below. 2 Note A paper type for the other trays than the bypass tray can be selected in the User setting. For details, refer to the User’s Guide [Copy Operations]. 2 Reminder If special paper is loaded into the bypass tray, be sure to select the corresponding paper type, otherwise a paper misfeed may occur. 1 In the Basic screen, touch [Paper]. The Paper screen appears. 2 Touch the button for the bypass tray, and then touch [Change Settings]. – To return to the main screen, touch [Main Screen]. – To specify a special paper for any paper tray other than the bypass tray, touch the button for the corresponding paper tray. – If a setting for special paper is selected for the bypass tray, that tray is not selected automatically with the "Auto" Paper setting. 751/601 2-27 Using copy functions 2 3 Touch [Paper Type]. 4 Select the appropriate setting for the type of special paper that is loaded. Touch the button for the desired paper type. – To print on thin paper, tab paper, fine paper, recycled paper and label sheets, touch [ ] or [ ]. – [Tab Paper] cannot be selected if "Paper Size" is set to "Standard Size", "Custom Size" or "Wide Paper". 5 Touch [OK], and then touch [OK] in the next two screens that appear. Otherwise, touch [Main Screen]. The Basic screen appears again. 2 Using copy functions 2-28 751/601 2.10.2 Selecting a Paper Size setting for the bypass tray The paper size can be set for the bypass tray so that it can be used with the specified paper size. 2 Note For details on loading paper, refer to the User’s Guide [Copy Operations]. The paper size can be selected for the bypass tray in any of the following ways. *1In order to specify a custom paper size in Enlarge Display mode, the custom paper size must first be stored before entering Enlarge Display mode. For details, refer to the User’s Guide [Copy Operations]. 2 Note For details on specifying a paper size for the other trays than the bypass tray, refer to the User's Guide [Copy Operations]. 1 In the Basic screen, touch [Paper]. The Paper screen appears. Setting Description Auto Detect Select this setting to automatically detect the size of the paper loaded into the bypass tray. Standard Size A standard paper size can be set so that the paper tray is used specifically with the selected paper size. Custom Size*1 A custom paper size can be set so that the paper tray is used specifically with the selected paper size. Wide Paper A wide paper size can be set so that the paper tray is used specifically with the selected paper size. 751/601 2-29 Using copy functions 2 2 Touch the button for the bypass tray, and then touch [Change Settings]. – To return to the main screen, touch [Main Screen]. 3 Touch [Paper Size]. 4 Touch either [Auto Detect] or select the desired paper size. 2 Using copy functions 2-30 751/601 – If a button other than [Auto Detect] was touched, select the desired paper size, and then touch [OK]. 5 Touch [OK], and then touch [OK] in the next two screens that appear. Otherwise, touch [Main Screen]. The Basic screen appears again. ! Detail In order to specify a custom paper size in Enlarge Display mode, the custom paper size must first be stored before entering Enlarge Display mode. [Standard Size], [Custom Size] or [Wide Paper] cannot be selected if "Paper Type" is set to "Tab Paper". 751/601 2-31 Using copy functions 2 2.11 Scanning the next original to be copied while a copy job is being printed (next job reservation) The settings for the next copy job can be specified and the original can be scanned while a job is being printed so that it can be printed once the current copy job is finished. ! Detail Up to 51 copy jobs, including the current copy job, can be queued. A copy job can be reserved after scanning of the loaded original is finished. The next job cannot be reserved while an original is being scanned. 1 If the message "Ready to accept another job." appears while printing the current job, an original can be loaded, and copy settings can be specified for the next copy job. – If the "Copy Operating Screen" parameter was set to "Yes", touch [Next Copy Job] in the screen that appears during printing to display the Basic screen. – For details on positioning the original, refer to "Feeding the original" on page 1-10. 2 Press the [Start] key. 3 After the current job is finished, the next copy job begins. 2 Using copy functions 2-32 751/601 2.12 Pausing scanning/printing Follow the procedure described below to temporarily stop scanning the original and stop the printing operation. 1 Press the [Stop] key while an original is being scanned or a job is being printed. – Scanning/printing temporarily stops. – If an original is being scanned for a job, pressing the [Stop] key temporarily stops scanning. The message "Job has stopped." appears. 2 To continue all temporarily stopped jobs, press the [Start] key. – To delete a temporarily stopped job, select the job that you wish to delete, and then touch [Delete]. – Select only one job at a time to be deleted. 751/601 2-33 Using copy functions 2 2.13 Printing a proof to check the settings (Proof Copy) Before printing a large number of copies, a single proof copy can first be printed so that it can be checked. This prevents copy errors from occurring. 2 Note When printing a proof copy, specify multiple copies. This feature cannot be used if the "Group" setting is selected. 1 Position the original to be copied. – For details on positioning the original, refer to "Feeding the original" on page 1-10. 2 Select the desired copy settings. 3 Press the [Proof Copy] key. – If the original was loaded on the original glass, touch [Finish], and then press the [Start] key. A single proof copy is printed. 4 Check the proof copy. – To change the copy settings, press the [C] (clear) key or the [Reset] key, and then change the settings. 5 Touch [Print]. The remaining copies are queued as a copy job. 2 Using copy functions 2-34 751/601 3 Using fax/scan functions 751/601 3-3 Using fax/scan functions 3 3 Using fax/scan functions 3.1 General fax/scan operation 2 Note For details on performing fax and scan operations, refer to the User’s Guide [Network Scan/Fax/Network Fax Operations]. ! Detail Specify the fax settings and network settings and register destinations before entering Enlarge Display mode. For details, refer to the User’s Guide [Network Scan/Fax/Network Fax Operations] and the User’s Guide [Network Administrator]. This section contains information on the general operation for sending faxes and scans. 1 Press the [Fax/Scan] key in the control panel, and then press the [Enlarge Display] key. The Fax/Scan mode screen appears in Enlarge Display mode. 2 Position the original to be copied. – For details on positioning the original, refer to page 1-10. 3 Specify the destination. – For details on specifying destinations, refer to page 3-5. – To erase the entered destination, press the [C] (clear) key. 4 Specify the necessary scanning settings. – For details on specifying scanning settings, refer to page 3-13. – To cancel the setting and select the default, press the [Reset] key. 3 Using fax/scan functions 3-4 751/601 5 Press the [Start] key. – If the machine is set to display the transmission result report screen, a screen appears, requesting confirmation to print the transmission result report. To print the transmission result report, touch [Yes], and then touch [OK]. – To stop the transmission, press the [Stop] key. Scanning of the original begins, and then the fax is sent. ! Detail If the "Destination Check Display Function" parameter was set to "ON", the Destination Settings screen appears. Check the destinations, and then touch [Send]. If the machine is set to print the transmission result report, the transmission result report is printed if the transmission could not be completed. Pressing the [Stop] key during scanning temporarily stops the scan operation. 751/601 3-5 Using fax/scan functions 3 3.2 Specifying a destination ! Detail Destinations must first be registered in Utility mode. Fax transmission destinations can also be registered. For details on registering destinations, refer to the User’s Guide [Network Scan/Fax/Network Fax Operations]. The scan data can be sent in any of the following ways. Network Scan operations Fax operations Network Fax operations ! Detail Multiple destinations can be specified at the same time. To send or receive faxes manually, touch [Off-Hook]. When this button is touched, the dial tone can be heard from the speaker. For more details, refer to the User’s Guide [Network Scan/Fax/Network Fax Operations]. This feature is not available with Internet faxing or IP address faxing. Also, if "Confirm Address (TX)" is specified in the administrator settings, [Off-Hook] cannot be used. The procedure for specifying the destination where scan data is to be sent is described below. Method Description Scan to E-mail The Scan to E-Mail operation is used to send scan data to a specified E-mail address as a file attachment. Scan to FTP In a network environment with an FTP server, scan data can be sent to a specified folder in the FTP server on the network. This function is suitable for transmitting large-sized data, such as high-resolution data. Scan to SMB Scan data can be sent directly to a specific computer on the network. In order to perform a Scan to SMB operation, first specify shared file settings in Windows on the computer receiving the data. Scan to File (WebDAV) In a network environment with a WebDAV server, scan data can be sent to a specified folder in the WebDAV server on the network. WebDAV is based on extended specifications of HTTP, and therefore the security technology of HTTP can be used. These settings ensure safer file transmission by encrypting communication with the WebDAV server using SSL. Method Description Fax transmission The scan data can be sent to the fax number specified for the destination. Method Description Internet fax transmission The scan data can be sent as an E-mail attachment (TIFF format) through an intranet (company network) or the Internet. IP address fax transmission Faxes can be sent on an IP network. Scan data can be sent to the IP address or host name specified for the destination. This operation can only be used through an intranet. 3 Using fax/scan functions 3-6 751/601 3.2.1 Selecting a destination from the address book Follow the procedure described below to select an already registered destination. Touch the button for the desired destination in the Address Book screen to select a destination. A destination can be searched for by the destination type or the destination name. 1 In the Address Book screen, touch [Other Dest.]. The Other Destinations screen appears. 2 Touch the button for the desired destination type. 751/601 3-7 Using fax/scan functions 3 – To select the index characters, touch [Next ]. – To select a destination from registered group, touch [Group] in Address Type. To select all destinations registered with the selected group, touch [Select All] in the Group Details screen. To cancel all of the selected destinations, touch [Reset]. – To return to the Address Book screen, touch [Main Screen]. 3 Touch the button for the desired destination, and then touch [OK]. – To cancel a selection, touch the button for a selected destination again. 4 Touch [Close]. 3.2.2 Selecting a destination from the job log Follow the procedure described below to select a destination from the job log. 2 Note This feature is not available with Internet faxing or IP address faxing. If "Confirm Address (TX)" is specified in the administrator settings, Job History tab cannot be used. For details on the settings of "Confirm Address (TX)", refer to the User's Guide [Network Scan/Fax/Network Fax Operations]. 3 Using fax/scan functions 3-8 751/601 1 Touch the Job History tab. The Job History list appears. 2 Select the desired destination. – The last five destinations where a transmission was sent are displayed. – To cancel a selection, touch the button for a selected destination again. 3.2.3 Selecting a destination with an LDAP search Follow the procedure described below to search in the LDAP server and select the destination. ! Detail In order to perform an LDAP search, LDAP must be enabled and an LDAP server must be registered. For details on specifying LDAP settings, refer to the User’s Guide [Network Administrator]. If "Manual Destination Input" in Administrator mode is set to "Restrict", the LDAP search function cannot be used. For details on specifying the setting for the "Manual Destination Input" parameter, refer to the User's Guide [Network Administrator]. If user authentication is applied, whether or not to accept "Manual Destination Input" is specified for each registered user. For details on the user registration, refer to the User's Guide [Copy Operations]. 751/601 3-9 Using fax/scan functions 3 1 Touch the Address Search tab. – If multiple LDAP servers are specified, select the server to be searched, and then touch [OK]. 2 Select the search method. – To specify a search word, touch [Search]. To specify multiple search conditions, touch [Advanced Search]. – When there is only one LDAP server 3 Using fax/scan functions 3-10 751/601 – When there are multiple LDAP servers – Authentication may be necessary, depending on the LDAP server that is specified. 3 Specify the search conditions, and then touch [Start Search]. For a simple search For an advanced search The search results are displayed. 751/601 3-11 Using fax/scan functions 3 4 Touch the button for the desired destination, and then touch [OK]. – To cancel a selection, touch the button for a selected destination again. 3.2.4 Directly typing in the number Follow the procedure described below to directly type in the fax number or the registration number for an address book destination during a fax transmission. 2 Note If "Manual Destination Input" in Administrator mode is set to "Restrict", a fax number cannot be entered. For details on specifying the setting for the "Manual Destination Input" parameter, refer to the User’s Guide [Network Administrator]. If user authentication is applied, whether or not to accept "Manual Destination Input" is specified for each registered user. For details on the user registration, refer to the User's Guide [Copy Operations]. In Enlarge Display mode, SIP faxes cannot be transmitted by directly typing in the number. 1 Touch [Fax Number]. The Fax Number screen appears. 2 Using the control panel keypad or the keypad that appears in the touch panel, type in the fax number. 3 Using fax/scan functions 3-12 751/601 – Otherwise, touch [Enter Registered No.], use the keypad to type in destination registration number, and then touch [Apply]. – To specify an additional recipient, touch [Next Destination], and then enter the number. – To return to the Address Book screen, touch [Main Screen]. – When typing in a fax number: [Tone]: If pulse dialing is being used, touch this button to send a push-button tone. This is used when a fax information service is being used. "T" appears in the screen. If pulse dialing is being used, use [ ] to switch to a push-button tone. [Pause]: Touch this button to insert a pause when dialing. Touch [Pause] once to insert a 1-second pause. In addition, multiple pauses can be entered. "P" appears in the screen. If the PBX (private branch exchange) connection is enabled, touch [Pause] after the outside line access code (for example, "0") for reliable dialing when transmitting from an inside line to an outside line. "P" appears in the screen. [–]: Touch this button to insert the dash as separator symbol while dialing. This has no effect on the dialing. "–" appears in the screen. – To change a character in the entered text, touch [ ] and [ ] to move the cursor to the character to be changed, and then touch [Delete]. 3 Touch [OK]. – If a destination registration number is entered, touch [OK], and then touch [OK] in the next screen that appears. 2 Note If "Confirm Address (TX)" is specified to enter fax number directly, a screen appears prompting you to enter the fax number again. 751/601 3-13 Using fax/scan functions 3 3.3 Specifying scanning settings (Scan Settings) Touch [Scan Settings] in the Fax/Scan mode screen, and then specify the original scanning settings. 3.3.1 Simplex/Duplex Select the appropriate ADF scanning method according to your original. The following scanning methods are available. 1 Touch [Scan Settings] in the Fax/Scan mode screen. The Scan Settings screen appears. 2 Touch [Simplex/Duplex]. – To return to the Address Book screen, touch [Main Screen]. The Simplex/Duplex screen appears. Setting Description 1-Sided Select this setting to scan a single-sided original. 2-Sided Select this setting to scan a double-sided original. Cover + 2-Sided Select this setting to scan an original where the first page is single-sided and the remaining pages are double-sided. 3 Using fax/scan functions 3-14 751/601 3 Select the scanning method. 4 Touch [OK], and then touch [OK] in the next screen that appears. Otherwise, touch [Main Screen]. 3.3.2 Original Type Select the appropriate Original Type setting according to your original. The following Original Type settings are available. 1 Touch [Scan Settings] in the Fax/Scan mode screen. The Scan Settings screen appears. Setting Description Text Select this setting when scanning originals consisting only of text. If an original containing photos is scanned using this setting, the halftones of the photo will not be reproduced and the entire photo will appear black. Text/Photo Select this setting when scanning originals consisting of both text and photos (halftones). This setting should be selected for originals containing text and photos combined in a single page or over multiple pages. Photo Select this setting when scanning originals consisting of only photos (halftones). Dot Matrix Original Select this setting when scanning originals with faint text (such as that written in pencil). 751/601 3-15 Using fax/scan functions 3 2 Touch [Original Type]. – To return to the Address Book screen, touch [Main Screen]. The Original Type screen appears. 3 Touch the button for the quality setting most appropriate for the loaded original. 4 Touch [OK], and then touch [OK] in the next screen that appears. Otherwise, touch [Main Screen]. 3.3.3 Resolution Select the detailedness for scanning originals. The following Resolution settings are available. Setting Description 200 × 100 (Standard) Select this setting to reduce the transmission time. 200 × 200 (Fine) Select this setting when scanning regular originals. 300 × 300 dpi Select this setting to scan originals at a higher resolution than that of regular originals. 400 × 400 (Super Fine) Select this setting when scanning originals with small print or with illustrations. 600 × 600 (Ultra Fine) Select this setting when scanning originals with particularly fine print or with detailed illustrations. 3 Using fax/scan functions 3-16 751/601 1 Touch [Scan Settings] in the Fax/Scan mode screen. The Scan Settings screen appears. 2 Touch [Resolution]. – To return to the Address Book screen, touch [Main Screen]. The Resolution screen appears. 751/601 3-17 Using fax/scan functions 3 3 Select the resolution. – A more finely scanned original has more information to be sent, therefore, the transmission time increases. – If "600 × 600 (Ultra Fine)" or "400 × 400 (Super Fine)" is selected, the fax is sent with a resolution appropriate for the recipient’s machine if it cannot receive a fax with the specified resolution. – "300 × 300 dpi" is not available with fax functions. "300 × 300 dpi" can be selected; however, the setting will change to 200 × 200 dpi when the fax is sent. 4 Touch [OK], and then touch [OK] in the next screen that appears. Otherwise, touch [Main Screen]. 3.3.4 Density Select the appropriate Density setting according to your original. The density can be adjusted to one of nine levels. 1 Touch [Scan Settings] in the Fax/Scan mode screen. The Scan Settings screen appears. 3 Using fax/scan functions 3-18 751/601 2 Touch [Density]. – To return to the Address Book screen, touch [Main Screen]. The Density screen appears. 3 Select the desired Density setting. – Each time [Light] or [Dark] is touched, the density is lightened or darkened by one level. – To select the center setting (default setting), touch [Std.]. – Touch [Auto] to have the machine detect the density of the original image and automatically select the appropriate exposure for the copy. 4 Touch [OK], and then touch [OK] in the next screen that appears. Otherwise, touch [Main Screen]. 3.3.5 File Type Select the file format for saving the scan data. The following file formats are available. 2 Note For fax transmissions and Internet fax transmissions, the file type is fixed to the TIFF format. In order to save the data in the XPS format, the optional hard disk is required. Setting Description PDF Select this setting to save the data in the PDF format. TIFF Select this setting to save data in the TIFF format. XPS Select this setting to save the data in the XPS format. 751/601 3-19 Using fax/scan functions 3 1 Touch [Scan Settings] in the Fax/Scan mode screen. The Scan Settings screen appears. 2 Touch [File Type]. – To return to the Address Book screen, touch [Main Screen]. The File Type screen appears. 3 Using fax/scan functions 3-20 751/601 3 Select the file format and the page setting. – If "Single Page" under "Scan Setting" is selected, a file is created for each page of the original. – If "Multi Page" is selected under "Scan Setting", a single file is created from the entire scanned original. 4 Touch [OK], and then touch [OK] in the next screen that appears. Otherwise, touch [Main Screen]. 3.3.6 Background Removal The scanning density of the original background can be adjusted. When originals printed on colored paper are scanned in color, the background may become black. In that case, the density of the background can be adjusted. 1 Touch [Scan Settings] in the Fax/Scan mode screen. The Scan Settings screen appears. 751/601 3-21 Using fax/scan functions 3 2 Touch [Background Removal]. – To return to the Address Book screen, touch [Main Screen]. The Background Removal screen appears. 3 Adjust the density as desired. – Each time [Light] or [Dark] is touched, the density is lightened or darkened by one level. – To select the center setting (default setting), touch [Standard]. – Touch [Auto] to automatically adjust the level of the background density according to the original being copied. 4 Touch [OK], and then touch [OK] in the next screen that appears. Otherwise, touch [Main Screen]. 3.3.7 Scan Size Specify the size of paper to be scanned. The scan size can be specified with any of the following methods. Settings Description Auto Select this setting to detect the size of the first page in the loaded original. Full Scan Select this setting to scan the entire page of the original. Even if text is printed to the edges of the original, it can be scanned without being cut off. Metric Sizes Select a preset paper size (such as A4 or B5) and orientation. Inch Sizes Select a preset paper size and orientation in inch sizes. Other Select a preset paper size and orientation in a size other than metric or inch sizes. 3 Using fax/scan functions 3-22 751/601 1 Touch [Scan Settings] in the Fax/Scan mode screen. The Scan Settings screen appears. 2 Touch [Scan Size]. – To return to the Address Book screen, touch [Main Screen]. The Scan Size screen appears. 3 Select the desired size and orientation. 751/601 3-23 Using fax/scan functions 3 – If [Metric Sizes], [Inch Sizes] or [Other] was touched, select the desired paper size, and then touch [OK]. – To scan the entire page of the original, touch [Full Bleed Scan]. 4 Touch [OK], and then touch [OK] in the next screen that appears. Otherwise, touch [Main Screen]. 3.3.8 Original Settings Select the binding position and orientation of the original. These functions can be used together. 2 Note [Original Direction] is not available with fax function. 1 Touch [Scan Settings] in the Fax/Scan mode screen. The Scan Settings screen appears. Parameter Description Original Direction Select the orientation of the original. After the original is scanned, the data is processed so that it is correctly oriented. For details on selecting the original orientation, refer to "Selecting the original orientation (Original Direction settings)" on page 1-15. Binding Position Select the binding position, for example, when holes are punched in the original or the original is stapled. In addition, specify the binding position when a double-sided original is loaded. This adjusts the scan of double-sided originals so that the binding position is not reversed. Left: Select this setting for an original with a binding margin on the left side. Top: Select this setting for an original with a binding margin at the top. Auto: The binding margin is on the long side if the page is 297 mm or less, or it is on the short side if the page is more than 297 mm. 3 Using fax/scan functions 3-24 751/601 2 Touch [Original Settings]. – To return to the Address Book screen, touch [Main Screen]. The Original Settings screen appears. 3 Select the original settings. – Touching [Original Direction] displays the Original Direction screen. Touch the button for the desired orientation, and then touch [OK]. 751/601 3-25 Using fax/scan functions 3 – Touching [Binding Position] displays the Binding Position screen. Touch the button for the desired original binding position, and then touch [OK]. 4 Touch [Close], and then touch [OK] in the next screen that appears. Otherwise, touch [Main Screen]. 3 Using fax/scan functions 3-26 751/601 3.4 Using a program "Program" refers to the set of destinations and scan settings that are registered together. These are convenient for frequently sending transmissions with the same settings. The following procedure describes how to send data by selecting a program that has been registered in advance. 2 Note If no destinations are registered with programs, destinations cannot be selected. For details on registering programs, refer to the User’s Guide [Network Scan/Fax/Network Fax Operations]. 1 With the Fax/Scan mode screen displayed, press the [Mode Memory] key. The Recall Scan/Fax Program screen appears. 2 Touch the button for the desired program. – Touch [Page List] to select the page of programs to be displayed. – Touch [ Previous Page] or [Next Page ] to display the previous or next page of programs. – To scroll through the page, touch [ ] or [ ]. – To cancel the setting, touch the button again to deselect it. – Only one program can be selected. 3 Touch [OK] or [Main Screen]. – To specify multiple destinations, add a destination. For details, refer to "Specifying a destination" on page 3-5. 751/601 3-27 Using fax/scan functions 3 3.5 Checking the destinations The specified destinations can be checked. In addition, destinations can be removed or their information can be checked. 1 In the Fax/Scan mode screen, touch [Dest. Settings]. The Destination Settings screen appears, and the specified destinations can be checked. 2 Select the desired destination from the list of destinations. – To return to the Address Book screen, touch [Main Screen]. 3 Using fax/scan functions 3-28 751/601 3 Touch [Details], and then check the destination details. – To delete a destination, select a destination, and then touch [Delete] to display a message requesting confirmation to delete the destination. 4 Touch [Close]. 4 Logging on and logging off 751/601 4-3 Logging on and logging off 4 4 Logging on and logging off 4.1 When a logon screen appears 2 Note For details, refer to the User’s Guide [Copy Operations]. 4.1.1 When the screen to enter the user name appears If the message "Enter User Name and password, and then touch [Login] or press the [Access] key." appears, user authentication settings have been specified on this machine. If user authentication settings have been applied, this machine can only be used by users who enter their user name and password. When the following screen appears, type in the user name and password. For a user name and password, contact the machine’s administrator. 1 Touch [User Name]. – The screen that appears differs depending on the Authentication method settings in the Administrator Settings. – If an authentication unit (biometric type) has been installed, place your finger on the authentication unit (biometric type) to display the Basic screen. For details on performing authentication using the authentication unit (biometric type) and registering information, refer to the User’s Guide [Copy Operations]. – If the authentication unit (IC card type) has been installed, place the IC card on the authentication unit (IC card type) to complete authentication and display the Basic screen. For details on performing authentication using the authentication unit (IC card type) and registering information, refer to the User’s Guide [Copy Operations]. – If [ User Name List] appears, the desired user name can be selected from the list. Touch [User Name List], touch the button for the desired user name to select it, and then touch [OK]. Continue with step 3. – If "Public User Access" on the General Settings screen is set to "Allow", users with no access to a user name and password can touch [Public User Access] to use this machine. – If external server authentication was selected as the user authentication method, [Server Name] appears. Touch [Server Name], and then select the desired server. 4 Logging on and logging off 4-4 751/601 2 Using the control panel keypad or the keyboard that appears in the touch panel, type in the user name, and then touch [OK]. – Touch [Shift] to change the characters that are displayed. – To change a character in the entered text, touch [ ] and [ ] to move the cursor to the character to be changed, touch [Delete], and then type in the desired letter or number. – To clear all entered text, press the [C] (clear) key. – To revert to the previously entered text, touch [Undo]. 3 Touch [Password]. 4 Using the control panel keypad or the keyboard that appears in the touch panel, type in the password, and then touch [OK]. – To return to the main screen without changing the settings, touch [Cancel]. 751/601 4-5 Logging on and logging off 4 5 Touch [Login] or press the [Access] key. – If account track settings have been applied in Administrator mode, the account track screen appears. However, if "Synchronize User Authentication & Account Track" in Administrator mode has been set to "Synchronize", the account track screen does not appear if the users and accounts are synchronized. The Basic screen appears. 6 When you are finished performing the desired operations, press the [Access] key. A message appears, requesting confirmation to log off. 7 Touch [Yes], and then touch [OK]. The main screen appears again. ! Detail It is possible to specify so that the logging-off confirmation screen does not appear. For details, refer to the User's Guide [Copy Operations]. 4.1.2 When the screen to enter the account name and password appears If the message "Enter Account Name and password, and then touch [Login] or press the [Access] key." appears, account track settings have been specified on this machine. If account track settings have been applied, this machine can only be used by users who enter their account name and password. When the following screen appears, type in the account name and password. For an account name and password, contact the machine’s administrator. ! Detail The "Account Track Input Method" in the Administrator Settings is set to "Password Only", only "Password" is displayed in the authentication screen. The password can be directly entered in the authentication screen using the keypad. If the password consists of numerals only, touching [Login] or pressing the [Access] key allows logging on without displaying a keyboard screen. For details, refer to the User's Guide [Copy Operations]. 4 Logging on and logging off 4-6 751/601 1 Touch [Account Name]. – The screen that appears differs depending on the Authentication method settings in the Administrator Settings. 2 Using the control panel keypad or the keyboard that appears in the touch panel, type in the account name, and then touch [OK]. – Touch [Shift] to change the characters that are displayed. – To change a character in the entered text, touch [ ]and [ ] to move the cursor to the character to be changed, touch [Delete], and then type in the desired letter or number. – To clear all entered text, press the [C] (clear) key. – To revert to the previously entered text, touch [Undo]. 751/601 4-7 Logging on and logging off 4 3 Touch [Password]. 4 Using the control panel keypad or the keyboard that appears in the touch panel, type in the password, and then touch [OK]. – To return to the main screen without changing the settings, touch [Cancel]. 5 Touch [Login] or press the [Access] key. The Basic screen appears. 6 When you are finished performing the desired operations, press the [Access] key. A message appears, requesting confirmation to log off. 4 Logging on and logging off 4-8 751/601 7 Touch [Yes], and then touch [OK]. – The original screen appears again. The screen that appears differs depending on the Administrator mode settings that have been specified. ! Detail It is possible to specify so that the logging-off confirmation screen does not appear. For details, refer to the User's Guide [Copy Operations]. User’s Guide Copy Operations . bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) Contents-1 Contents 1 Introduction 1.1 Available features............................................................................................................................ 1-3 1.2 Explanation of manual conventions .............................................................................................. 1-9 1.3 Descriptions of originals and paper ............................................................................................ 1-10 1.4 User manuals................................................................................................................................. 1-11 1.4.1 Printed manual ................................................................................................................................ 1-11 1.4.2 Introduction to the user manual DVD.............................................................................................. 1-11 2 Before making copies 2.1 Machine configuration.................................................................................................................... 2-3 2.1.1 Options.............................................................................................................................................. 2-3 2.1.2 External ............................................................................................................................................. 2-5 2.1.3 Internal............................................................................................................................................... 2-8 2.1.4 Large Capacity Unit LU-405............................................................................................................ 2-10 2.1.5 Large Capacity Unit LU-406............................................................................................................ 2-11 2.1.6 Finisher FS-524/Punch Kit PK-504/PK-505.................................................................................... 2-12 2.1.7 Finisher FS-525/Punch Kit PK-504/PK-505.................................................................................... 2-14 2.1.8 Finisher FS-610/Punch Kit PK-504/PK-505.................................................................................... 2-16 2.1.9 Z Folding Unit ZU-604/ZU-605 ....................................................................................................... 2-19 2.1.10 Post Inserter PI-504 ........................................................................................................................ 2-21 2.1.11 Shift Tray SF-602 ............................................................................................................................ 2-22 2.1.12 Output Tray OT-505 ........................................................................................................................ 2-22 2.1.13 Authentication Unit (Biometric Type) AU-101 ................................................................................. 2-23 2.1.14 Authentication Unit (IC Card Type) AU-201 .................................................................................... 2-23 2.1.15 Control panel................................................................................................................................... 2-24 2.1.16 Basic settings screens .................................................................................................................... 2-26 2.1.17 Icons that appear in the screen....................................................................................................... 2-28 2.2 Adjusting the angle of the control panel ..................................................................................... 2-29 2.2.1 To adjust the angle of the control panel.......................................................................................... 2-29 2.3 Turning on the main power and the auxiliary power.................................................................. 2-31 2.3.1 Turning on the machine................................................................................................................... 2-31 2.3.2 Scanning during warm-up............................................................................................................... 2-32 2.3.3 Turning off the machine .................................................................................................................. 2-33 2.3.4 Automatically clearing settings (Automatic panel reset) ................................................................. 2-34 2.3.5 Automatically canceling the mode screen (System Auto Reset)..................................................... 2-34 2.3.6 Automatically conserving energy (Low Power mode) ..................................................................... 2-34 2.3.7 Automatically conserving energy (Sleep mode) .............................................................................. 2-35 2.3.8 Manually conserving energy............................................................................................................ 2-36 2.3.9 Automatically turning the machine on/off (Weekly Timer)............................................................... 2-36 2.3.10 Controlling each user’s use of this machine (User Authentication)................................................. 2-38 2.3.11 Controlling each account’s use of this machine (Account Track) ................................................... 2-42 2.3.12 Controlling use of this machine with Authentication Unit (Biometric Type) .................................... 2-45 2.3.13 Controlling use of this machine with the Authentication Unit (IC Card Type) ................................. 2-47 2.4 Loading paper into the tray 1 or 2................................................................................................ 2-50 2.5 Loading paper into the tray 3 or 4 ............................................................................................... 2-51 2.6 Loading paper into the LCT (LU-405/LU-406)............................................................................. 2-52 2.7 Loading paper into the bypass tray ............................................................................................. 2-55 2.8 Loading paper of a different size into paper trays ..................................................................... 2-59 2.8.1 Changing the size of paper that is loaded ...................................................................................... 2-59 2.8.2 When 5-1/2 × 8-1/2 or A5-size thick paper is loaded into a paper tray.......................................... 2-60 Contents-2 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 3 Basic copy operations 3.1 General copy operation................................................................................................................... 3-3 3.2 Operations that cannot be combined............................................................................................ 3-6 3.2.1 Operations where the setting specified last is given priority ............................................................. 3-6 3.2.2 Operations where the setting specified first is given priority............................................................. 3-8 3.3 Feeding the original ......................................................................................................................... 3-9 3.3.1 Loading the original into the ADF ...................................................................................................... 3-9 3.3.2 Placing the original on the original glass ......................................................................................... 3-10 3.3.3 Scanning the original in separate batches ("Separate Scan" setting) ............................................. 3-11 3.3.4 Scanning a multi-page original from the original glass ................................................................... 3-15 3.4 Specifying original settings .......................................................................................................... 3-19 3.4.1 Specifying the original size ("Original Size" settings) ...................................................................... 3-19 3.4.2 Copying originals of mixed sizes ("Mixed Original" setting) ............................................................ 3-21 3.4.3 Loading folded (Z-folded) originals.................................................................................................. 3-23 3.4.4 Loading tab paper (Tab original settings) ........................................................................................ 3-24 3.4.5 Selecting the original orientation ("Original Direction" settings)...................................................... 3-26 3.4.6 To select an original direction setting.............................................................................................. 3-27 3.4.7 Selecting the position of the binding margin ("Binding Position" settings) ..................................... 3-29 3.4.8 To select a binding position setting................................................................................................. 3-30 3.4.9 Changing scan settings for each original ........................................................................................ 3-32 3.5 Selecting a paper setting .............................................................................................................. 3-36 3.5.1 Automatically selecting the paper size ("Auto" paper setting) ........................................................ 3-36 3.5.2 Manually selecting the desired paper size ...................................................................................... 3-38 3.6 Specifying a zoom setting............................................................................................................. 3-39 3.6.1 Automatically selecting the zoom ratio ("Auto" zoom Setting)........................................................ 3-39 3.6.2 Specifying the zoom ratio of the original ("Full Size" setting).......................................................... 3-40 3.6.3 Typing in the zoom ratio (XY zoom setting) ..................................................................................... 3-41 3.6.4 Slightly reducing the copy ("Minimal" setting)................................................................................. 3-43 3.6.5 Selecting a preset zoom ratio (Enlarge and reduce settings) .......................................................... 3-44 3.6.6 Typing in separate X and Y zoom ratios (Individual zoom settings) ................................................ 3-45 3.6.7 Selecting a stored zoom ratio.......................................................................................................... 3-47 3.6.8 Storing the desired zoom ratio ........................................................................................................ 3-48 3.7 Selecting an original > copy setting............................................................................................. 3-50 3.7.1 Selecting single-sided copies.......................................................................................................... 3-51 3.7.2 Selecting double-sided copies ........................................................................................................ 3-52 3.8 Selecting a combined copy setting.............................................................................................. 3-55 3.8.1 Copying multiple original pages onto a single page (Combined copy settings) ............................. 3-57 3.9 Selecting the quality of the original ............................................................................................. 3-59 3.9.1 Loading originals with small print or photos ("Original Type" settings)........................................... 3-59 3.9.2 To select an original type setting..................................................................................................... 3-60 3.10 Selecting the density settings ...................................................................................................... 3-61 3.10.1 Adjusting the print density (Density settings) .................................................................................. 3-62 3.10.2 Adjusting the background density (Background removal settings) ................................................. 3-63 3.11 Selecting finishing settings........................................................................................................... 3-64 3.11.1 Separating copies by sets ("Sort" setting)....................................................................................... 3-66 3.11.2 Separating copies by pages ("Group" Setting)................................................................................ 3-67 3.11.3 Selecting the Output Tray................................................................................................................ 3-68 3.11.4 Outputting copies with their front sides facing up (Face up settings) ............................................. 3-69 3.11.5 Stapling copies (Staple settings) ..................................................................................................... 3-71 3.11.6 Punching holes in copies (Punch settings) ...................................................................................... 3-74 3.12 Selecting a folding setting ............................................................................................................ 3-77 3.12.1 Folding copies in half ("Half-Fold" setting) ...................................................................................... 3-78 3.12.2 Binding copies at the center ("Center Staple & Fold" setting)......................................................... 3-79 3.12.3 To fold copies in three ("Tri-Fold" setting)....................................................................................... 3-81 3.12.4 Z-Folding and outputting papers ("Z-Fold" setting) ........................................................................ 3-83 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) Contents-3 3.13 Manually using the finisher........................................................................................................... 3-86 3.14 Selecting not to rotate the image ................................................................................................ 3-89 3.15 Scanning the next original to be copied while a copy job is being printed (next job reservation) .................................................................................................................... 3-90 3.16 Temporarily stopping scanning/printing..................................................................................... 3-91 3.17 Deleting a paused job ................................................................................................................... 3-92 4 Additional copy operations 4.1 Checking the copy settings (Check Job) ...................................................................................... 4-3 4.1.1 To check the settings ........................................................................................................................ 4-3 4.1.2 To change the settings...................................................................................................................... 4-5 4.2 Printing a proof to check the settings (Proof Copy) .................................................................... 4-6 4.3 Checking the print image as a preview image (Advanced Preview) .......................................... 4-9 4.3.1 Preview screen.................................................................................................................................. 4-9 4.3.2 Checking the advanced preview..................................................................................................... 4-13 4.4 Interrupting a copy job (Interrupt mode)..................................................................................... 4-15 4.5 Registering copy programs (Mode Memory).............................................................................. 4-16 4.5.1 Deleting a copy program................................................................................................................. 4-19 4.6 Copying with programmed copy settings (Mode Memory)....................................................... 4-20 4.7 Displaying function descriptions (Help) ...................................................................................... 4-22 4.7.1 Overview of help screens ................................................................................................................ 4-22 4.7.2 Displaying main help screens.......................................................................................................... 4-25 4.8 Specifying control panel settings (Accessibility mode)............................................................. 4-27 4.8.1 Displaying the accessibility setting screen...................................................................................... 4-27 4.8.2 Setting the "Touch Panel Adjustment" function.............................................................................. 4-27 4.8.3 Setting the "Key Repeat Start/Interval Time" functions .................................................................. 4-29 4.8.4 Setting the "System Auto Reset Confirmation" function ................................................................ 4-31 4.8.5 Setting the "Auto Reset Confirmation" function ............................................................................. 4-33 4.8.6 Setting the "Enlarge Display Mode Confirmation" function ............................................................ 4-35 4.8.7 Setting the "Message Display Time" function................................................................................. 4-37 4.8.8 Setting the "Sound Setting" functions ............................................................................................ 4-38 5 Troubleshooting 5.1 When an error code appears.......................................................................................................... 5-3 5.2 When the message "misfeed detected." appears........................................................................ 5-5 5.2.1 Location of paper misfeed and illustration........................................................................................ 5-6 5.2.2 Paper misfeed indications................................................................................................................. 5-7 5.2.3 Clearing a paper misfeed in tray 1 "1" .............................................................................................. 5-8 5.2.4 Clearing a paper misfeed in tray 2 "2" ............................................................................................ 5-11 5.2.5 Clearing a paper misfeed in tray 3 and tray 4 "3""4" ...................................................................... 5-12 5.2.6 Clearing a paper misfeed in the LCT (Large Capacity Unit)"5"....................................................... 5-14 5.2.7 Clearing a paper misfeed in the bypass tray "6"............................................................................. 5-15 5.2.8 Clearing a paper misfeed in the vertical transport section "7" ....................................................... 5-15 5.2.9 Clearing a paper misfeed in the ADU unit "8"................................................................................. 5-16 5.2.10 Clearing a paper misfeed in the ADU unit "9"................................................................................. 5-18 5.2.11 Clearing a paper misfeed in the ADU unit "10"............................................................................... 5-20 5.2.12 Clearing a paper misfeed in the ADU unit "11"............................................................................... 5-21 5.2.13 Clearing a paper misfeed in the ADU unit "12"............................................................................... 5-23 5.2.14 Clearing a paper misfeed in the ADU unit "13"............................................................................... 5-25 5.2.15 Clearing a paper misfeed in the ADF "14" ...................................................................................... 5-27 5.2.16 Clearing a paper misfeed in the ADF "15" ...................................................................................... 5-28 5.2.17 Clearing a paper misfeed in Finisher FS-524/FS-525 "16" "18"..................................................... 5-29 5.2.18 Clearing a paper misfeed in Finisher FS-610 "16" "18".................................................................. 5-34 5.2.19 Clearing a paper misfeed in the Shift Tray "16".............................................................................. 5-38 5.2.20 Clearing a paper misfeed in the Post Inserter "17"......................................................................... 5-39 Contents-4 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 5.2.21 Clearing a paper misfeed in the Z Folding Unit "20" ....................................................................... 5-39 5.3 Simple troubleshooting................................................................................................................. 5-43 5.4 Main messages and their remedies............................................................................................. 5-47 6 Specifications 6.1 Specifications................................................................................................................................... 6-3 6.1.1 Main unit ............................................................................................................................................ 6-3 6.1.2 Automatic Document Feeder DF-614................................................................................................ 6-4 6.2 Option specifications ...................................................................................................................... 6-5 6.2.1 Large Capacity Unit LU-405 .............................................................................................................. 6-5 6.2.2 Large Capacity Unit LU-406 .............................................................................................................. 6-5 6.2.3 Finisher FS-524 ................................................................................................................................. 6-6 6.2.4 Finisher FS-525 ................................................................................................................................. 6-7 6.2.5 Finisher FS-610 ................................................................................................................................. 6-8 6.2.6 Punch Kit PK-504/PK-505................................................................................................................. 6-9 6.2.7 Z Folding Unit ZU-604/ZU-605.......................................................................................................... 6-9 6.2.8 Post Inserter PI-504......................................................................................................................... 6-10 6.2.9 Shift Tray SF-602............................................................................................................................. 6-10 6.2.10 Output Tray OT-505......................................................................................................................... 6-11 6.2.11 Authentication Unit (Biometric Type) AU-101.................................................................................. 6-11 6.2.12 Authentication Unit (IC Card Type) AU-201..................................................................................... 6-12 6.2.13 Other options................................................................................................................................... 6-12 7 Copy paper/originals 7.1 Copy paper ....................................................................................................................................... 7-3 7.1.1 Paper tray and equipment ................................................................................................................. 7-3 7.1.2 Paper weight...................................................................................................................................... 7-3 7.1.3 Paper Tray/Output Tray capacity ...................................................................................................... 7-4 7.1.4 Paper size .......................................................................................................................................... 7-4 7.1.5 Special paper..................................................................................................................................... 7-6 7.1.6 Precautions for paper ........................................................................................................................ 7-8 7.1.7 Paper storage .................................................................................................................................... 7-8 7.1.8 Auto Tray Switch Function ................................................................................................................ 7-8 7.2 Selecting the paper settings for bypass tray ................................................................................ 7-9 7.2.1 Automatically detecting the paper size ("Auto Detect" setting)......................................................... 7-9 7.2.2 Selecting a paper size setting (Size setting) .................................................................................... 7-10 7.2.3 Specifying a non-standard paper size (Custom size settings) ........................................................ 7-12 7.2.4 Storing a non-standard paper size (Custom size settings).............................................................. 7-14 7.2.5 Selecting a setting for oversized paper (Wide paper settings) ........................................................ 7-17 7.2.6 Specifying a paper type for bypass tray.......................................................................................... 7-19 7.3 Paper type setting for a tray ......................................................................................................... 7-21 7.3.1 To display the paper tray setting screen ......................................................................................... 7-21 7.3.2 To specify a standard size paper ("Standard Size 1" settings) ....................................................... 7-23 7.3.3 To specify a setting for standard special-sized paper (Special size settings)................................. 7-24 7.3.4 To specify a non-standard paper size (Custom size settings)......................................................... 7-25 7.3.5 To select a setting for oversized paper ........................................................................................... 7-27 7.3.6 Specifying a paper type................................................................................................................... 7-29 7.4 Originals.......................................................................................................................................... 7-31 7.4.1 Originals that can be loaded into the ADF....................................................................................... 7-31 7.4.2 Precautions for loading originals into the ADF ................................................................................ 7-32 7.4.3 Originals that can be loaded on the original glass .......................................................................... 7-33 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) Contents-5 8 Application functions 8.1 Inserting paper between OHP transparencies ("OHP Interleave" function) .............................. 8-3 8.2 Adding cover pages ("Cover Sheet" function).............................................................................. 8-6 8.3 Inserting different paper into copies ("Insert Sheet" function)................................................. 8-10 8.4 Inserting copies of a different original for a specified page ("Insert Image" function) .............................................................................................................. 8-14 8.5 Specifying pages to be printed on the front side ("Chapters" function).................................. 8-17 8.6 Scanning originals with different settings and printing copies all together ("Program Jobs" function)............................................................................................................ 8-21 8.7 Reversing black-and-white gradation of the original ("Neg./Pos. Reverse" function) ........... 8-26 8.8 Producing separate copies of each page in a page spread ("Book Copy" function) ............. 8-27 8.9 Tiling copy images ("Image Repeat" function) ........................................................................... 8-33 8.10 Dividing spread image into right and left pages using ADF ("Page Separation" function)........................................................................................................ 8-38 8.11 Adding a binding margin to copies ("Page Margin" function)................................................... 8-41 8.12 Adjusting the image to fit the paper ("Image Adjust" settings) ................................................ 8-44 8.13 Copying with the page layout of a booklet ("Booklet" function) .............................................. 8-47 8.14 Erasing specified area of copies (Erase)..................................................................................... 8-50 8.14.1 Erasing black marks along borders ("Erase" function).................................................................... 8-51 8.14.2 Erasing black marks along center fold ("Center Erase" function) ................................................... 8-53 8.14.3 Erasing outside areas of the original ("Non-Image Area Erase" function)....................................... 8-55 8.15 Printing the date/time or page number on copies (Stamp/Composition functions)............... 8-56 8.15.1 Printing the date/time ("Date/Time" function) ................................................................................. 8-57 8.15.2 Printing the page number ("Page Number" function)...................................................................... 8-60 8.15.3 Printing previously registered stamps ("Stamp" function) .............................................................. 8-63 8.15.4 Printing copy protection text ("Copy Protect" function).................................................................. 8-66 8.15.5 Printing repeating stamps ("Stamp Repeat" function) .................................................................... 8-73 8.15.6 Printing the image scanned first overlapped by the remaining original pages ("Overlay" function) 8-78 8.15.7 Saving a scanned image as a registered overlay ("Registered Overlay" function) ......................... 8-81 8.15.8 Using a registered overlay ("Registered Overlay" function) ............................................................ 8-85 8.15.9 Printing a header/footer ("Header/Footer" function) ....................................................................... 8-87 8.15.10 Printing the distribution control number ("Distribution Control Number" function)......................... 8-89 8.15.11 Printing the watermark onto copies ("Watermark" function)........................................................... 8-91 8.16 Saving the scanned original in a user box ("Save in User Box" function)................................ 8-93 9 Replacing toner cartridges and staple cartridges and emptying hole-punch scrap box 9.1 Replacing the toner cartridge ........................................................................................................ 9-3 9.1.1 To replace the toner cartridge........................................................................................................... 9-5 9.2 Replacing the staple cartridge....................................................................................................... 9-7 9.2.1 To replace the staple cartridge in Finisher FS-524 ........................................................................... 9-8 9.2.2 To replace the staple cartridge in Finisher FS-525 ......................................................................... 9-11 9.2.3 To replace the staple cartridge in Finisher FS-610 ......................................................................... 9-15 9.3 Emptying hole-punch scrap boxes.............................................................................................. 9-18 9.3.1 To empty the hole-punch scrap box of the finisher ........................................................................ 9-20 9.3.2 To empty the hole-punch scrap box of the Z Folding Unit ............................................................. 9-21 10 Care of the machine 10.1 Cleaning ......................................................................................................................................... 10-3 10.1.1 Cleaning the left partition glass....................................................................................................... 10-3 10.1.2 Cleaning the original glass .............................................................................................................. 10-3 10.1.3 Cleaning the document pad............................................................................................................ 10-4 10.1.4 Cleaning the paper take-up roller.................................................................................................... 10-4 10.1.5 Cleaning the main unit..................................................................................................................... 10-4 Contents-6 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 10.1.6 Cleaning the control panel............................................................................................................... 10-5 10.1.7 Care of Authentication Unit (Biometric Type) AU-101..................................................................... 10-6 10.1.8 Care of Authentication Unit (IC Card Type) AU-201........................................................................ 10-7 10.2 Viewing counters (Meter Count)................................................................................................... 10-8 10.2.1 Viewing counters ............................................................................................................................. 10-8 10.3 When the message "It is time for the scheduled inspection of the device." appears ............ 10-9 11 Managing jobs 11.1 Overview of Job List screen ......................................................................................................... 11-3 11.1.1 Jobs................................................................................................................................................. 11-3 11.1.2 Multi-job feature .............................................................................................................................. 11-3 11.1.3 Job List screens .............................................................................................................................. 11-4 11.1.4 Left panel Job List ........................................................................................................................... 11-7 11.2 Performing operations on jobs..................................................................................................... 11-8 11.2.1 Deleting a job................................................................................................................................... 11-8 11.2.2 Checking job settings .................................................................................................................... 11-10 11.2.3 Checking job details ...................................................................................................................... 11-10 11.2.4 Displaying the Current Jobs list (stored jobs and active jobs) ...................................................... 11-12 11.2.5 Displaying the Job History list ....................................................................................................... 11-13 11.2.6 Printing a proof copy of a stored job............................................................................................. 11-14 11.2.7 Printing a stored job ...................................................................................................................... 11-15 11.2.8 Increasing printing priority ............................................................................................................. 11-17 12 Utility mode 12.1 Overview of Utility mode parameters .......................................................................................... 12-3 12.1.1 List of registration information and parameters .............................................................................. 12-3 12.2 Registering a destination.............................................................................................................. 12-8 12.2.1 Create One-Touch Destination ........................................................................................................ 12-8 12.2.2 Create User Box .............................................................................................................................. 12-8 12.2.3 Limiting Access to Destinations ...................................................................................................... 12-8 12.2.4 Displaying the destination registration screen............................................................................... 12-16 12.3 Specifying user settings.............................................................................................................. 12-17 12.3.1 System Settings............................................................................................................................. 12-17 12.3.2 Custom Display Settings ............................................................................................................... 12-19 12.3.3 Copier Settings .............................................................................................................................. 12-21 12.3.4 Scan/Fax Settings ......................................................................................................................... 12-23 12.3.5 Printer Settings .............................................................................................................................. 12-23 12.3.6 Change Password ......................................................................................................................... 12-23 12.3.7 Change E-Mail Address................................................................................................................. 12-23 12.3.8 Toner Supply ................................................................................................................................. 12-24 12.3.9 Change Icon .................................................................................................................................. 12-24 12.3.10 Displaying the User Settings screen.............................................................................................. 12-24 12.4 Specifying administrator settings .............................................................................................. 12-26 12.4.1 System Settings............................................................................................................................. 12-26 12.4.2 Administrator/Machine Settings .................................................................................................... 12-32 12.4.3 One-Touch/User Box Registration ................................................................................................ 12-32 12.4.4 User Authentication/Account Track............................................................................................... 12-33 12.4.5 Network Settings ........................................................................................................................... 12-36 12.4.6 Copier Setting................................................................................................................................ 12-37 12.4.7 Printer Settings .............................................................................................................................. 12-37 12.4.8 Fax Settings................................................................................................................................... 12-38 12.4.9 System Connection ....................................................................................................................... 12-38 12.4.10 Security Settings............................................................................................................................ 12-38 12.4.11 License Settings ............................................................................................................................ 12-41 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) Contents-7 12.4.12 OpenAPI Authentication Management Setting ............................................................................. 12-41 12.4.13 Displaying the Administrator Settings screen ............................................................................... 12-42 12.5 Overview of weekly timer settings............................................................................................. 12-44 12.6 Finisher Adjustment .................................................................................................................... 12-45 12.6.1 Center Staple Position Adjustment ............................................................................................... 12-45 12.6.2 Half-Fold Position.......................................................................................................................... 12-47 12.6.3 Punch Vertical Position Adjustment .............................................................................................. 12-49 12.6.4 Punch Unit Vertical Position Adjustment ...................................................................................... 12-51 12.6.5 Punch Horizontal Position Adjustment.......................................................................................... 12-53 12.6.6 Punch Unit Horizontal Position Adjustment .................................................................................. 12-55 12.6.7 Punch Resist Loop Size Adjustment ............................................................................................. 12-56 12.6.8 1st Z-Fold Position Adjustment/2nd Z-Fold Position Adjustment ................................................ 12-58 12.6.9 Tri-Fold Position Adjustment......................................................................................................... 12-60 12.6.10 2-Position Staple Pitch Adjustment .............................................................................................. 12-62 12.6.11 Post Inserter Tray Size Adjustment ............................................................................................... 12-63 12.7 Header/Footer Settings .............................................................................................................. 12-64 12.7.1 Specifying headers/footers ........................................................................................................... 12-64 12.7.2 Editing headers/footers ................................................................................................................. 12-66 12.8 Authentication Method ............................................................................................................... 12-67 12.8.1 User authentication and account track ......................................................................................... 12-67 12.8.2 When user authentication and account track are synchronized................................................... 12-67 12.8.3 When user authentication and account track are used separately ............................................... 12-68 12.8.4 Selecting an authentication method.............................................................................................. 12-69 12.9 User Authentication Setting ....................................................................................................... 12-72 12.9.1 Administrative Settings—List ........................................................................................................ 12-72 12.9.2 Default Function Permission ......................................................................................................... 12-73 12.9.3 Public User Access ....................................................................................................................... 12-74 12.9.4 User Registration........................................................................................................................... 12-74 12.9.5 User Counter ................................................................................................................................. 12-78 12.9.6 Viewing user counters ................................................................................................................... 12-79 12.10 Account Track Setting ................................................................................................................ 12-80 12.10.1 Account Track Registration........................................................................................................... 12-80 12.10.2 Account Track Counter ................................................................................................................. 12-83 12.10.3 Viewing account counters ............................................................................................................. 12-84 12.11 Password Rules........................................................................................................................... 12-85 12.11.1 Conditions of the password rules ................................................................................................. 12-85 12.12 Enhanced Security Mode............................................................................................................ 12-87 13 Authentication Unit (Biometric Type AU-101) 13.1 Safety information......................................................................................................................... 13-3 13.2 Using Authentication Unit (Biometric Type) AU-101.................................................................. 13-5 13.2.1 Settings of this machine.................................................................................................................. 13-6 13.2.2 Registering users............................................................................................................................. 13-8 13.2.3 Logging on to this machine........................................................................................................... 13-20 13.2.4 ID & Print function ......................................................................................................................... 13-22 14 Authentication Unit (IC Card Type AU-201) 14.1 Safety information......................................................................................................................... 14-3 14.2 Using Authentication Unit (IC Card Type) AU-201 ..................................................................... 14-5 14.2.1 Settings of this machine.................................................................................................................. 14-5 14.2.2 Registering users............................................................................................................................. 14-8 14.2.3 Logging on to this machine........................................................................................................... 14-22 14.2.4 ID & Print function ......................................................................................................................... 14-24 Contents-8 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 15 Appendix 15.1 Entering text................................................................................................................................... 15-3 15.1.1 Enlarging the keyboard.................................................................................................................... 15-5 15.1.2 To type text...................................................................................................................................... 15-6 15.1.3 List of available characters .............................................................................................................. 15-6 15.2 Glossary.......................................................................................................................................... 15-7 16 Index 1 Introduction bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 1-3 Introduction 1 1 Introduction Thank you for choosing this machine. This manual contains details on the operation of the various functions of the machine, precautions on its use, and basic troubleshooting procedures. In order to ensure that this machine is used correctly and efficiently, carefully read this manual as needed. For descriptions on trademarks and copyrights, refer to [Trademarks/Copyrights]. The illustrations used in this manual may appear slightly different from views of the actual equipment. 1.1 Available features Automatically selecting the paper The most appropriate paper size can automatically be selected based on the size of the loaded original and the specified zoom ratio. For details, refer to "Automatically selecting the paper size ("Auto" paper setting)" on page 3-36. Adjusting copies to the size of the paper The most appropriate zoom ratio can automatically be selected based on the size of the loaded original and the specified paper size. For details, refer to "Automatically selecting the zoom ratio ("Auto" zoom Setting)" on page 3-39. Specifying separate horizontal and vertical zoom ratios By specifying separate horizontal and vertical zoom ratios, copies of the original can be resized as desired. For details, refer to "Typing in separate X and Y zoom ratios (Individual zoom settings)" on page 3-45. Scanning the original in separate batches An original with a large number of pages can be divided and scanned in separate batches. Double-sided copies can be produced by using the original glass or the original pages can be alternately loaded onto the original glass or into the ADF, and then all pages can be copied together as a single job. For details, refer to "Scanning the original in separate batches ("Separate Scan" setting)" on page 3-11 and "Scanning a multi-page original from the original glass" on page 3-15. Carrying out half-fold/center staple & fold/tri-fold/Z-fold finishing process Copies can be folded at their center ("Half-Fold" setting) or bound with staples after being folded in half ("Center Staple & Fold" setting). In addition, the copies can be folded in three ("Tri-fold" setting) or Z-folded ("Z-fold" setting). For details, refer to "Selecting a folding setting" on page 3-77. ABC ABC ABC Half-Fold Center Staple & Fold Tri-Fold Z-Fold 1 Introduction 1-4 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) Sorting copies The finishing method for copies can be selected. For details, refer to "Separating copies by sets ("Sort" setting)" on page 3-66, "Separating copies by pages ("Group" Setting)" on page 3-67. Stapling copies Multi-page originals can be copied and stapled together. For details, refer to "Stapling copies (Staple settings)" on page 3-71. Punching holes in copies Holes for filing can be punched in the copies. For details, refer to "Punching holes in copies (Punch settings)" on page 3-74. Copying multiple original pages onto a single page Multiple pages of the original can be printed together on a single page. For details, refer to "Copying multiple original pages onto a single page (Combined copy settings)" on page 3-57. Copying an original containing various page sizes An original with various page sizes can be scanned and copied together. For details, refer to "Copying originals of mixed sizes ("Mixed Original" setting)" on page 3-21. ABC ABC ABC ABC ABC ABC ABC DEF ABC DEF ABC ABC bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 1-5 Introduction 1 Adjusting copies according to the image quality of the original The copies can be adjusted according to the image quality of the original. For details, refer to "Loading originals with small print or photos ("Original Type" settings)" on page 3-59. Inserting paper between copies of OHP In order to prevent OHP from becoming stuck to each other, a page (interleaf) can be inserted between the transparency copies. For details, refer to "Inserting paper between OHP transparencies ("OHP Interleave" function)" on page 8-3. Adding a cover page Cover pages can be added to copies, or copies can be made using different paper (for example, colored paper) for only the cover pages. For details, refer to "Adding cover pages ("Cover Sheet" function)" on page 8-6. Inserting different paper into copies Different paper (such as colored paper) can be inserted for specified pages in the copies. For details, refer to "Inserting different paper into copies ("Insert Sheet" function)" on page 8-10. Inserting pages from a different original at specified locations in a copy An original scanned later can be inserted for specified pages in an original scanned earlier for copying. For details, refer to "Inserting copies of a different original for a specified page ("Insert Image" function)" on page 8-14. ABDCEF DEF ABC ABC COVERABC ABC ABC DEF ABC DEF ABC 1 Introduction 1-6 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) Printing double-sided copies with the specified page on the front side Double-sided copies can be printed with the specified pages on the front side. For details, refer to "Specifying pages to be printed on the front side ("Chapters" function)" on page 8-17. Copying with reversed colors An original can be copied with the light- and dark-colored areas of the original image inversed. For details, refer to "Reversing black-and-white gradation of the original ("Neg./Pos. Reverse" function)" on page 8-26. Separately copying a page spread A page spread, such as in an open book or catalog, can be copied onto separate pages. For details, refer to "Producing separate copies of each page in a page spread ("Book Copy" function)" on page 8-27. Repeating copy images An original image can be repeatedly printed on a single sheet of paper. For details, refer to "Tiling copy images ("Image Repeat" function)" on page 8-33. 2 4 4 25 3 1 3 1 1 12 5 2 5 4 4 3 3 2 1 2 1 1 ABC ABC ABC DEF bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 1-7 Introduction 1 Splitting an original page into two copies A single original page can be divided in two and each half can be printed on separate copies. For details, refer to "Dividing spread image into right and left pages using ADF ("Page Separation" function)" on page 8-38. Making copies for filing Copies can be printed with a filing margin so they can easily be stored in filing binders. For details, refer to "Adding a binding margin to copies ("Page Margin" function)" on page 8-41. Adjusting the image to fit the paper size When the copy paper is larger than the original, copies can be printed so that the original image fills the paper. For details, refer to "Adjusting the image to fit the paper ("Image Adjust" settings)" on page 8-44. Copying with the page layout of a magazine Copies can be made with the pages arranged in a layout for center binding, such as for a magazine. For details, refer to "Copying with the page layout of a booklet ("Booklet" function)" on page 8-47. Erasing sections of copies Areas, such as the shadows of punched holes, bindings/edges of books, and transmission information in received faxes, can be erased in copies. For details, refer to "Erasing black marks along borders ("Erase" function)" on page 8-51. ABC DEF ABC DEF DEGFHI GHI ABC ABCDEF ABC ABC 11 12 2 11 12 1 2 1 ABC ABC 1 Introduction 1-8 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) Printing a sample copy Before printing a large number of copies, a single sample copy can be printed so that it can be checked. For details, refer to "Printing a proof to check the settings (Proof Copy)" on page 4-6. Printing date/time or page number on copies The date/time, page number, copy protect (hidden text for preventing unauthorized copying) or account track number per set can be printed on copies. For details, refer to "Printing the date/time or page number on copies (Stamp/Composition functions)" on page 8-56. Managing jobs The print status of copy jobs can be checked and the jobs can be managed. For details, refer to "Managing jobs" on page 11-3. Programming copy settings Frequently used copy settings can be programmed and recalled to be used with other copy jobs. For details, refer to "Registering copy programs (Mode Memory)" on page 4-16. Checking the copy settings Screens showing the current copy settings can be displayed. From these screens, the copy settings can also be changed. For details, refer to "Checking the copy settings (Check Job)" on page 4-3. Enlarging the size of text in touch panel screens The text and buttons in the touch panel can be displayed in a larger size that is easier to read, allowing basic operations to be easily performed. For details, refer to the User manual – Enlarge Display Operations. Displaying explanations of functions and settings The name and function of parts and details of functions and settings appears in the Help screens. For details, refer to "Displaying function descriptions (Help)" on page 4-22. Interrupting a copy job The copy job being printed can be interrupted in order for a different copy job to be printed. For details, refer to "Interrupting a copy job (Interrupt mode)" on page 4-15. DEGFHI ABC DEGFHI ABC DEGFHI ABC bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 1-9 Introduction 1 1.2 Explanation of manual conventions The marks and text formats used in this manual are described below. Safety advices 6 DANGER Failure to observe instructions highlighted in this manner may result in fatal or critical injuries in fact of electrical power. % Observe all dangers in order to prevent injuries. 7 WARNING Failure to observe instructions highlighted in this manner may result in serious injuries or property damage. % Observe all warnings in order to prevent injuries and to ensure safe use of the machine. 7 CAUTION Failure to observe instructions highlighted in this manner may result in slight injuries or property damage. % Observe all cautions in order to prevent injuries and to ensure safe use of the machine. Sequence of action 1 The number 1 as formatted here indicates the first step of a sequence of actions. 2 Subsequent numbers as formatted here indicate subsequent steps of a sequence of actions. ? Text formatted in this style provides additional assistance. % Text formatted in this style describes the action that will ensure the desired results are achieved. Tips 2 Note Text highlighted in this manner contains useful information and tips to ensure safe use of the machine. 2 Reminder Text highlighted in this manner contains information that should be reminded. ! Detail Text highlighted in this manner contains references for more detailed information. Special text markings [Stop] key The names of keys on the control panel are written as shown above. MACHINE SETTING Display texts are written as shown above. An illustration inserted here shows what operations must be performed. 1 Introduction 1-10 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 2 Note The machine illustrations shown in this manual can vary and depend on the machine configuration. 1.3 Descriptions of originals and paper The descriptions used in this manual for originals and paper are explained below. Whenever original and paper dimensions are mentioned in this manual, the value shown as Y in the illustration refers to the width, and the value shown as X refers to the length. Lengthwise (w) If the width (Y) of the paper is shorter than the length (X), the paper has a vertical or portrait orientation, indicated by w. Crosswise (v) If the width (Y) of the paper is longer than the length (X), the paper has a horizontal or landscape orientation, indicated by v. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 1-11 Introduction 1 1.4 User manuals This machine is provided with printed manuals and PDF manuals on the User manual DVD. 1.4.1 Printed manual Quick Guide – Copy/Print/Fax/Scan/Box Operations This manual contains operating procedures and descriptions of the most frequently used functions, allowing the machine to immediately be used. In addition, this manual contains notes and precautions that should be followed for safe use of the machine. Be sure to read this manual before using the machine. 1.4.2 Introduction to the user manual DVD The user manual DVD is included with this machine. In the initial screen, select the user manual to be viewed, and then check the details for the various functions. User manual – Copy Operations (this manual) This user manual contains descriptions of Copy mode operations and machine maintenance. Refer to this user manual for details on paper and originals, copy procedures using convenient Application functions, replacing consumables and troubleshooting operations such as clearing paper misfeeds. User manual – Enlarge Display Operations This user manual contains details on operating procedures in Enlarge Display mode. Refer to this manual for details on using copy, scanner, G3 fax and network fax operations in Enlarge Display mode. User manual – Print Operations (IC-208) This user manual contains details on the printing functions that can be specified with the optional image controller. Refer to this user manual for details on operating procedures for using the printer functions. User manual – Box Operations This user manual contains operating procedures for using the user boxes on the optional hard disk. Refer to this user manual for details on saving data in user boxes, retrieving data from user boxes and transferring data. User manual – Network Scan/Fax/Network Fax Operations This user manual contains details on the network scan, G3 fax, and network fax operations. Refer to this manual for details on using network scan function by E-Mail or FTP, G3 fax, Internet fax and IP address fax operations. In order to use the fax functions, the optional fax kit must be purchased separately. User manual – Fax Driver Operations This user manual contains details of the fax driver functions that can be used to send a fax directly from a computer. Refer to this user manual for operating procedures on using the PC-FAX functions. In order to use the fax functions, the optional fax kit must be purchased separately. User manual – Network Administrator This user manual contains descriptions on setting methods for each function utilizing network connection, mainly using the PageScope Web Connection. Refer to this user manual for details on using network functions. 1 Introduction 1-12 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) User manual – Advanced Function Operations This manual describes overview and usage of functions that become available by registering the optional license kit and enabling its function, and functions that become available by connecting the MFP with applications. In order to use the functions effectively, please read this manual. 2 Before making copies bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 2-3 Before making copies 2 2 Before making copies 2.1 Machine configuration 2.1.1 Options 18 19 1 2 3 6 5 4 7 8 9 10 11 12 12 12 13 10 10 9 14 9 15 16 17 20 21 22 2 Before making copies 2-4 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) * Parts marked with an asterisk are not shown in the illustration. No. Part name Description 1 Main unit Consists of a scanner, a printer, an ADF, and paper trays (4 trays and 1 bypass tray). 2 Large capacity unit LU-405 Can be loaded with up to 4,000 sheets of paper (80 g/m2). 3 Large capacity unit LU-406 Can be loaded with up to 4,000 sheets of paper (80 g/m2). 4 Local Interface Kit EK-703 Installed when using the machine as a printer connected directly with a PC. 5 Security Kit SC-506 Installed to encode the data saved on the hard disk so that the hard disk can be used more safely. 6 Hard Disk HD-510 Installed to increase the scanning capacity or enabling scanning of multiple jobs. 7 Output Tray OT-505 Collects printed sheets. 8 Shift Tray SF-602 Separates copies fed out at an offset. 9 Z Folding Unit ZU-605/ ZU-604 Installed with the finisher to enable Z-folding and hole punching. 10 Post Inserter PI-504 Installed with the finisher to enable insertion of the cover sheet into the printed sheets. In addition, you can operate the finisher manually. 11 Finisher FS-610 Collects printed sheets. Provides selectable finishing functions: sort, group, offset-sort, offset-group, staple, face up, center staple & fold, half-fold, and trifold. 12 Punch Kit PK-504/PK-505 Installed with the finisher to enable hole punching. 13 Finisher FS-525 Collects printed sheets. Provides selectable finishing functions: sort, group, offset-sort, offset-group, face up, and staple. 14 Finisher FS-524 Collects printed sheets. Provides selectable finishing functions: sort, group, offset-sort, offset-group, face up, and staple. 15 Image Controller IC-208 Installed when this machine is used for network printing and network scanning. 16 Fax Kit FK-502 Allows this machine to be used as a fax machine. 17 Mount Kit MK-716 Used to install the Fax kit. 18 Authentication unit (biometric type) AU-101 Scans vein patterns in the finger to verify user authentication. 19 Authentication unit (IC card type) AU-201 Reads the information stored on an IC card to verify user authentication. 20 Working Table WT-504 Provides an area to temporarily place originals and other materials. This is also used when the authentication unit is installed. 21 Key Counter Socket Required for installing the key counter. 22 Key Counter Installed onto this machine to make the counter function available for printed sheets. 23 i-Option LK-101* Allows the Web Browser and Image Panel functions to be used from the control panel. For details, refer to the User manual – Advanced Function Operations. 24 i-Option LK-102* Allows PDF encryption, digital signatures and properties to be specified when transmitting PDF documents with Scan mode or User Box mode operations. For details, refer to the User manual – Advanced Function Operations. 25 Upgrade Kit UK-202* Required in order to use i-Option LK-101 or i-Option LK-102. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 2-5 Before making copies 2 2.1.2 External 2 Reminder Do not grab the control panel to move the machine. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 19 18 20 21 2 Before making copies 2-6 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) No. Part name Description 1 Left partition glass Scans the original loaded into the ADF. 2 Document scales Use as a guide when placing the original on the original glass. 3 Document pad Presses down on the original positioned on the original glass. 4 Original glass Scans the original placed face down. 5 Adjustable paper guides Used to align the loaded original. 6 Paper tray Load with the originals to be scanned facing up. 7 Original output tray Feeds out scanned originals. 8 Control panel Used to specify the various settings and perform operations such as starting. 9 [Power] (auxiliary power) key Turns on/off the copying and scanning functions. Turning it off will terminate all the functions other than printing, and receiving and outputting facsimile data, and then enter the sleep mode. 10 Adjustable document guides Used to align the loaded paper. 11 Bypass tray Opened and used when printing onto paper that is not or cannot (such as thick paper, overhead projector transparencies, envelopes or label sheets) be loaded into a paper tray. 12 Release lever for the vertical transport door of the main unit Used to open the vertical transport door when clearing paper misfeeds. 13 Tray 4 A maximum of 550 sheets of A3 to A5 plain paper (64 g/m2) can be loaded. 14 Tray 3 A maximum of 550 sheets of A3 to A5 plain paper (64 g/m2) can be loaded. 15 Tray 2 A maximum of 1,100 sheets of A4 to A5 plain paper (64 g/m2) can be loaded. 16 Tray 1 A maximum of 1,650 sheets of A4 to A5 plain paper (64 g/m2) can be loaded. 17 Right front door Opened when clearing paper misfeeds. 18 Left front door Opened when turning the main power switch on and off and when clearing paper misfeeds. 19 Toner cartridge door Opened when replacing a toner cartridge. 20 Machine status indicator Indicates machine status by combining the color (blue or red) and the state (steady on or blinking). 21 USB port (type A) USB 2.0/1.1 Used for connecting external memory (USB memory device). bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 2-7 Before making copies 2 22 23 24 25 27 26 28 29 No. Part name Description 22 Network connector (10Base-T/100Base- TX/1000Base-T) Used for connecting the network cable when this machine is used for network printing and network scanning. 23 USB port (type A) USB 2.0/1.1 Used for connecting the USB cable for the authentication unit (biometric type) or the authentication unit (IC card type). 24 RS-232C port Used for connecting the modem for CS Remote Care. 25 Telephone jack 1 (LINE PORT1) Used for connecting a general subscriber line. 26 Telephone jack 2 (LINE PORT2) Used for connecting a general subscriber line. This jack is used when the optional fax multi line kit has been installed. 27 Jack for connecting a telephone (TEL PORT1) Used for connecting the cord from a telephone. 28 Jack for connecting a telephone (TEL PORT2) Used for connecting the cord from a telephone. 29 Power cord Supplies power to the machine. 2 Before making copies 2-8 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 2.1.3 Internal 1 2 3 4 9 8 7 6 5 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 2-9 Before making copies 2 No. Part name Description 1 Drum section Forms the copy image. 2 Vertical transport door Opened when clearing paper misfeeds in the vertical transport section. 3 Dial M1 Turned when clearing paper misfeeds within the ADU unit. 4 ADU unit Pulled out when clearing paper misfeeds. 5 Cover M12 Opened when clearing paper misfeeds within the ADU unit. 6 Dial m2 Turned when clearing paper misfeeds within the ADU unit. 7 Cover M3 Opened when clearing paper misfeeds within the ADU unit. 8 Cover M11 Opened when clearing paper misfeeds within the ADU unit. 9 Lever M4 Lowered to the left in order to pull out the ADU unit when clearing paper misfeeds. 10 Transport lever Switched when printing on A5-size or 5-1/2 e 8-1/2 thick paper. 11 Dial M9 Turned when clearing paper misfeeds within the ADU unit. 12 Dial M7 Turned when clearing paper misfeeds within the ADU unit. 13 Lever M5 Lowered to the left when clearing paper misfeeds. 14 Cover M8 Opened when clearing paper misfeeds within the ADU unit. 15 Cover M6 Opened when clearing paper misfeeds within the ADU unit. 16 Fusing unit Fuses the image that was formed onto the paper. 17 Dial M10 Turned when clearing paper misfeeds within the ADU unit. 18 Main power switch Used to turn the machine on and off. 19 Toner-cartridge-securing lever Pull toward you to remove the toner unit when replacing a toner cartridge. 20 Toner cartridge Replaced when the toner is empty. 2 Before making copies 2-10 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 2.1.4 Large Capacity Unit LU-405 2 Reminder Do not climb on, or place objects on this unit to prevent any damage. Large Capacity Unit LU-405 1 2 3 4 5 6 No. Part name Description 1 Upper cover Opened when loading paper or clearing paper misfeeds. 2 Lateral guides Secures the sides of the paper to be loaded. 3 Tray bottom plate Raised as the paper is used. Lower by pressing the bottom-plate-lowering button. 4 Trailing edge stopper Secures the trailing edges of the paper to be loaded. 5 Large capacity tray front door Opened when clearing paper misfeeds. 6 Tray bottom plate lower button Pressed to lower the bottom plate in the paper tray when loading paper. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 2-11 Before making copies 2 2.1.5 Large Capacity Unit LU-406 2 Reminder Do not climb on, or place objects on this unit to prevent any damage. Large Capacity Unit LU-406 1 3 2 5 4 6 No. Part name Description 1 Upper cover Opened when loading paper or clearing paper misfeeds. 2 Lateral guides Secures the sides of the paper to be loaded. 3 Tray bottom plate Raised as the paper is used. Lower by pressing the bottom-plate-lowering button. 4 Trailing edge stopper Secures the trailing edges of the paper to be loaded. 5 Large capacity tray front door Opened when clearing paper misfeeds. 6 Tray bottom plate lower button Pressed to lower the bottom plate in the paper tray when loading paper. 2 Before making copies 2-12 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 2.1.6 Finisher FS-524/Punch Kit PK-504/PK-505 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 10 9 11 12 13 14 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 2-13 Before making copies 2 Finisher FS-524 Punch Kit PK-504/PK-505 No. Part name Description 1 Front door Opened when clearing paper misfeeds or jammed staples or when replacing the staple cartridge. 2 Main finishing tray (Tray 2) Collects printed pages. 3 Sub finishing tray (Tray 1) Collects printed pages. 4 Guide lever FN4 Opened when clearing paper misfeeds. 5 Guide lever FN1 Opened when clearing paper misfeeds. 6 Misfeed-clearing dial FN3 Turned when clearing paper misfeeds within the finisher. 7 Guide lever FN2 Opened when clearing paper misfeeds. 8 Stacker unit Removed when clearing paper misfeeds or jammed staples or when replacing the staple cartridge. 9 Staple cartridge holder Removed from the stacker unit when clearing jammed staples or when replacing the staple cartridge. 10 Handle FN7 Grabbed when removing and inserting the stacker unit. 11 Misfeed-clearing dial FN6 Turned when clearing paper misfeeds within the finisher. 12 Guide lever FN5 Opened when clearing paper misfeeds. No. Part name Description 13 Punch kit Punches holes for filing printed pages when the punch kit is installed with Finisher FS-524. 14 Hole-punch scrap box Removed when emptying punch scraps that have accumulated from using the Punch settings. 2 Before making copies 2-14 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 2.1.7 Finisher FS-525/Punch Kit PK-504/PK-505 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 10 9 11 12 13 14 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 2-15 Before making copies 2 Finisher FS-525 Punch Kit PK-504/PK-505 No. Part name Description 1 Front door Opened when clearing paper misfeeds or jammed staples or when replacing the staple cartridge. 2 Main finishing tray (Tray 2) Collects printed pages. 3 Sub finishing tray (Tray 1) Collects printed pages. 4 Guide lever FN4 Opened when clearing paper misfeeds. 5 Guide lever FN1 Opened when clearing paper misfeeds. 6 Misfeed-clearing dial FN3 Turned when clearing paper misfeeds within the finisher. 7 Guide lever FN2 Opened when clearing paper misfeeds. 8 Stacker unit Removed when clearing paper misfeeds or jammed staples or when replacing the staple cartridge. 9 Staple cartridge holder Removed from the stacker unit when clearing jammed staples or when replacing the staple cartridge. 10 Handle FN7 Grabbed when removing and inserting the stacker unit. 11 Misfeed-clearing dial FN6 Turned when clearing paper misfeeds within the finisher. 12 Guide lever FN5 Opened when clearing paper misfeeds. No. Part name Description 13 Punch kit Punches holes for filing printed pages when the punch kit is installed with Finisher FS-525. 14 Hole-punch scrap box Removed when emptying punch scraps that have accumulated from using the Punch settings. 2 Before making copies 2-16 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 2.1.8 Finisher FS-610/Punch Kit PK-504/PK-505 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 17 14 18 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 2-17 Before making copies 2 15 16 2 Before making copies 2-18 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) Finisher FS-610 Punch Kit PK-504/PK-505 No. Part name Description 1 Main finishing tray (Tray 2) Collects printed pages. 2 Sub finishing tray (Tray 1) Collects printed pages. 3 Front door Opened when clearing paper misfeeds or jammed staples or when replacing the staple cartridge. 4 Guide lever FN4 Opened when clearing paper misfeeds. 5 Guide lever FN1 Opened when clearing paper misfeeds. 6 Misfeed-clearing dial FN3 Turned when clearing paper misfeeds within the finisher. 7 Guide lever FN2 Opened when clearing paper misfeeds. 8 Guide lever FN5 Opened when clearing paper misfeeds. 9 Guide lever FN9 Opened when clearing paper misfeeds. 10 Stacker unit Pulled out when clearing paper misfeeds or jammed staples or when replacing the staple cartridge. 11 Guide lever FN8 Opened when clearing paper misfeeds. 12 Misfeed-clearing dial FN7 Turned when clearing paper misfeeds within the finisher. 13 Handle FN6 Grabbed when removing and inserting the stacker unit. 14 Booklet tray Collects copies printed using a Fold/Bind setting. 15 Guide lever FN10 Opened when clearing paper misfeeds. 16 Staple cartridge holder Removed from the stacker unit when clearing jammed staples or when replacing the staple cartridge. No. Part name Description 17 Punch kit Punches holes for filing printed pages when the punch kit is installed with Finisher FS-610. 18 Hole-punch scrap box Removed when emptying punch scraps that have accumulated from using the Punch settings. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 2-19 Before making copies 2 2.1.9 Z Folding Unit ZU-604/ZU-605 1 2 4 3 5 6 7 8 9 11 10 2 Before making copies 2-20 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) No. Part name Description 1 Z folding/transport unit Pulled out when removing jammed paper. 2 Guide lever FN1 Opened when clearing paper misfeeds. 3 Hole-punch scrap box Removed when emptying punch scraps that have accumulated from using the Punch settings. 4 Front door Opened when clearing paper misfeeds or punch scraps. 5 Guide lever FN6 Opened when clearing paper misfeeds. 6 Guide lever FN7 Opened when clearing paper misfeeds. 7 Guide lever FN8 Opened when clearing paper misfeeds. 8 Handle FN2 Grabbed when removing and inserting the unit. 9 Misfeed-clearing dial FN5 Turned when removing paper jammed in the Z folding unit. 10 Guide lever FN3 Opened when clearing paper misfeeds. 11 Misfeed-clearing dial FN4 Turned when removing paper jammed in the Z folding unit. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 2-21 Before making copies 2 2.1.10 Post Inserter PI-504 2 1 3 5 4 6 No. Part name Description 1 Post inserter control panel Operate when manually using the finisher. (See p. 3-86.) 2 Lower tray paper guide Slide to fit the size of paper being loaded when loading with cover sheets. 3 Lower tray Load with cover sheets. 4 Upper tray Load with cover sheets. 5 Upper tray paper guide Slide to fit the size of paper being loaded when loading with cover sheets. 6 Upper unit release lever Raised to slide the upper unit to the left when clearing paper misfeeds. 2 Before making copies 2-22 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 2.1.11 Shift Tray SF-602 2.1.12 Output Tray OT-505 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 2-23 Before making copies 2 2.1.13 Authentication Unit (Biometric Type) AU-101 2.1.14 Authentication Unit (IC Card Type) AU-201 Precautions for using the finisher: - Do not place objects on top of the finisher and below the paper output trays, otherwise the machine may be damaged. 1 Top view Rear view 2 3 No. Part name Description 1 Status indicator Indicates the status of the authentication unit. 2 Security slot Used for connecting the security cable to prevent thefts. (complies with the security cable standards of the Kensington Computer Products Group) 3 USB port (type mini-B) Used to connect a USB cable (mini-B plug). 1 2 No. Part name Description 1 Card scanning area Position the IC card on this area. 2 USB cable Used for connecting this device to the machine. 2 Before making copies 2-24 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 2.1.15 Control panel 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 14 13 12 11 10 9 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 No. Part name Description 1 Touch panel Displays various screens and messages. Specify the various settings by directly touching the panel. 2 Main Power indicator Lights up in green when the machine is turned on with the main power switch. 3 [Power] (auxiliary power) key Press to turn on/off machine operations. When turned off, the machine enters a state where it conserves energy. 4 [Mode Memory] key Press to register (store) the desired copy/fax/scan settings as a program or to recall a registered program. (See p. 4-16.) 5 [Utility/Counter] key Press to display the Meter Count screen and the Utility screen. 6 [Reset] key Press to clear all settings (except programmed settings) entered in the control panel and touch panel. 7 [Interrupt] key Press to enter Interrupt mode. While the machine is in Interrupt mode, the indicator on the [Interrupt] key lights up in green and the message "Now in Interrupt mode." appears on the touch panel. To cancel Interrupt mode, press the [Interrupt] key again. 8 [Stop] key Pressing the [Stop] key while copying, scanning or printing temporarily stops the operation. 9 [Proof Copy] key Press to print a single proof copy to be checked before printing a large number of copies. You can also display a finishing image using the current settings in the touch panel. (Only when a hard disk is installed.) (See p. 4-6.) 10 [Start] key Press to start the copy, scan or fax operation. When this machine is ready to begin the operation, the indicator on the [Start] key lights up in blue. If the indicator on the [Start] key lights up in orange, the operation cannot begin. Press to restart a stopped job. For details on jobs, refer to "Overview of Job List screen" on page 11-3. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 2-25 Before making copies 2 2 Reminder Do not apply extreme pressure to the touch panel, otherwise it may be scratched or damaged. Never push down on the touch panel with force, and never use a hard or pointed object to make a selection in the touch panel. 11 Data indicator Flashes in blue while a print job is being received. Lights up in blue when a print job is queued to be printed or while it is being printed. The indicator lights up in blue when there is saved fax data or unprinted fax data. 12 [C] (clear) key Press to clear a value (such as the number of copies, a zoom ratio, or a size) entered using the keypad. 13 Keypad Use to type in the number of copies to be produced. Use to type in the zoom ratio. Use to type in the various settings. 14 [Help] key Press to display the Help Menu screen. From this screen, descriptions of the various functions and details of operations can be displayed. (See p. 4-22.) 15 [Enlarge Display] key Press to enter Enlarge Display mode. 16 [Accessibility] key Press to display the screen for specifying settings for user accessibility functions. If authentication is performed with PageScope Authentication Manager, it does not enter Enlarge Display mode. 17 [Power Save] key Press to enter Power Save mode. While the machine is in Power Save mode, the indicator on the [Power Save] key lights up in green and the touch panel goes off. To cancel Power Save mode, press the [Power Save] key again. 18 [Access] key If user authentication or account track settings have been applied, press this key after entering the user name and password (for user authentication) or the account name and password (for account track) in order to use this machine. 19 [Brightness] dial Use to adjust the Brightness of the touch panel. 20 [User Box] key Press to enter User Box mode. While the machine is in User Box mode, the indicator on the [User Box] key lights up in green. For details, refer to the User manual – Box Operations. 21 [Fax/Scan] key Press to enter Fax/Scan mode. While the machine is in Fax/Scan mode, the indicator on the [Fax/Scan] key lights up in green. For more details, refer to the User manual – Network Scan/Fax/Network Fax Operations. 22 [Copy] key Press to enter Copy mode. (As a default, the machine is in Copy mode.) While the machine is in Copy mode, the indicator on the [Copy] key lights up in green. No. Part name Description 2 Before making copies 2-26 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 2.1.16 Basic settings screens When the machine is ready to begin making copies after being turned on, the Basic screen appears. To activate a function or to select a setting, lightly touch the desired button in the touch panel. Basic screen Quick Copy screen 6 5 8 9 1 7 3 2 4 5 9 1 7 3 2 4 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 2-27 Before making copies 2 Touching displays Density settings, Background Removal settings, and [Finishing] in the left panel. ! Detail The basic settings screen (Basic screen or Quick Copy screen) that appears can be set with the "Copier Settings" parameter in the Custom Display Settings screen (displayed from the User Setting screen in Utility/Counter mode). The arrangement of the buttons and screens differ with the Basic screen and Quick Copy screen; however, the functions that can be set are the same. As a default, "Basic" is selected. This manual contains descriptions of procedures using the Basic screen that appears when "Basic" is selected. The Quick Copy screen displays all of the settings from the Basic screen so that many settings can easily be specified. ! Detail For details on switching the basic settings screen, refer to "Custom Display Settings" on page 12-19. No. Item Name Description 1 Message display area The status of the machine and details on operations are displayed. 2 Functions/settings display area Tabs and buttons for displaying screens containing various functions are displayed. Touch a tab or button to display the corresponding screen for specifying the settings. 3 Icon display area Icons indicating the status of jobs and the machine are displayed. 4 [Auto Rotate OFF] button Touch to copy with the image not rotated to fit the orientation of the loaded paper. 5 [Separate Scan] button Touch to scan the original in separate batches. An original scanned in different batches can be treated as a single copy job. 6 [Finishing] button Touch to specify settings for collating, grouping, stapling, or hole punching. 7 Left panel When the [Job List] button is pressed, a screen showing the jobs currently being performed or waiting to be performed is displayed. When the [Check Job] button is pressed, a screen showing the result of the specified settings is displayed. 8 [Check Job] button The result of the specified settings is displayed. 9 [Job List] button Jobs currently being performed or waiting to be performed are displayed. Various commands for checking and managing jobs are available. 2 Before making copies 2-28 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 2 Note If settings have been changed from the factory defaults, the tab for the screen containing the changed settings appears framed with a green line. The green line can be changed to another color with the "Color Selection Settings" parameter in the Custom Display Settings screen (displayed from the User Setting screen in Utility/Counter mode). 2.1.17 Icons that appear in the screen Icon Description Indicates that data is being sent from the machine, regardless of the current mode. Indicates that data is being received from the machine, regardless of the current mode. If the warning screen was closed when a warning occurred, touch this button to display the warning screen again. Appears when there is a message indicating that consumables must be replaced or the machine requires maintenance. Touch this icon to display the message, and then perform the replacement or maintenance procedure. Appears when an error occurs with the connection to the POP server. Indicates that paper is not loaded in the paper tray. Indicates that very little paper remains in the paper tray. Indicates that "Enhanced Security Mode" is set to "ON". Appears when a USB drive is connected. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 2-29 Before making copies 2 2.2 Adjusting the angle of the control panel The control panel can be adjusted to any of three angles. In addition, the control panel can be tilted to the left. Adjust the control panel to the angle that allows for easy operation. 2.2.1 To adjust the angle of the control panel 1 Pull the control panel release lever toward you, to release the positioning lock. 2 Move the control panel to the desired position, then release the lever. 2 Before making copies 2-30 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 3 To tilt the control panel to the left, hold the bottom of the control panel, and then tilt the panel to the left. 2 Reminder When tilting the control panel, do not grab the touch panel or the control panel. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 2-31 Before making copies 2 2.3 Turning on the main power and the auxiliary power This machine has two power controls: the main power switch and the [Power] (auxiliary power) key. 2.3.1 Turning on the machine The main power switch turns on/off all functions of the machine. Normally, the main power switch is turned on. The [Power] (auxiliary power) key turns on/off machine operations, for example, for copying, printing or scanning. When the [Power] (auxiliary power) key is turned off, the machine enters a state where it conserves energy. 1 Open the left front door, and then set the main power switch to "n". 2 Close the left front door. 3 Press the [Power] (auxiliary power) key. Check that the touch panel is turned on. ! Detail When the [Power] (auxiliary power) key is turned on, the indicator on the [Start] key lights up in orange, and a screen indicating that the machine is starting up appears. After a few seconds, the message "Warming up. Ready to scan." appears on the touch panel, and the indicator on the [Start] key lights up in blue, indicating that a job can now be queued. The default settings are the settings that are selected immediately after the machine is turned on (the power switch is set to "n") and before any setting is specified from the control panel or touch panel, and those that are selected when the [Reset] key is pressed to cancel all settings specified from the control panel or touch panel. The default settings can be changed. For more details, refer to "Custom Display Settings" on page 12-19. The factory default settings are the settings that were selected when this machine was sent from the factory. 2 Note A job can also be queued while the machine is warming up after the [Power] (auxiliary power) key is turned on. For details, refer to "Scanning during warm-up" on page 2-32. After the machine has finished warming up, the scanned image will be printed. Refer to "Main unit" on page 6-3 for warm up time. 2 Before making copies 2-32 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 2.3.2 Scanning during warm-up 1 Press the [Power] (auxiliary power) key. – For details on turning on the machine, refer to "Turning off the machine" on page 2-33. The indicator on the [Start] key lights up in orange. After the warm-up message is displayed, the Basic screen appears. The indicator on the [Start] key lights up in blue. 2 Check that the message "Warming up. Ready to scan." appears on the touch panel. 3 Position the original to be copied. – For details on positioning the original, refer to "Feeding the original" on page 3-9. 4 Specify any other desired copy settings. 5 Using the keypad, specify the desired number of copies. – For details on specifying the number of copies, refer to "General copy operation" on page 3-3. 6 Press the [Start] key. The original is scanned, and the job is added to the list of queued jobs. – If the "Copy Operating Screen" parameter in Utility mode was set to "Yes", touch [Next Copy Job] to display the Basic screen. – After the machine has finished warming up, the jobs will automatically be printed. ? How can the job being printed be stopped? % Press the [Stop] key. For details, refer to "Temporarily stopping scanning/printing" on page 3-91. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 2-33 Before making copies 2 ! Detail While the machine is warming up to begin printing after it is turned on using the [Power] (auxiliary power) key, copy settings can be specified and an original can be scanned to reserve a copy job. After the machine has finished warming up, the copies are automatically printed. The print order can be changed or jobs can be deleted from the Detail screen of a job from the Current Jobs list in the Job List screen. For details, refer to "Managing jobs" on page 11-3. 2.3.3 Turning off the machine 1 Press the [Power] (auxiliary power) key. Check that the touch panel is turned off. 2 Open the front door, and then set the main power switch to "o". 3 Close the front door. 2 Reminder When the machine is turned off, then on again with the main power switch, wait at least 10 seconds to turn the machine on after turning it off. The machine may not operate correctly if it is turned on immediately after being turned off. Do not turn off the machine with the main power switch or the [Power] (auxiliary power) key while it is making copies or printing, otherwise a paper misfeed may occur. Do not turn off the machine with the main power switch or the [Power] (auxiliary power) key while it is scanning or sending or receiving data, otherwise all scan data or transmission data will be deleted. Do not turn off the machine with the main power switch while a queued job or stored data is waiting to be printed, otherwise the jobs will be deleted. ! Detail The following are cleared when the main power switch and [Power] (auxiliary power) key are turned off. Settings that have not been programmed Jobs queued to be printed 2 Before making copies 2-34 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 2.3.4 Automatically clearing settings (Automatic panel reset) If no operation is performed for a specified length of time (even if the [Reset] key is not pressed), settings that have not been programmed, such as the number of copies, are cleared and return to their default settings. This is the automatic panel reset operation. As the factory default, the automatic panel reset operation is performed after 1 minute. ! Detail The length of time until the automatic panel reset operation is performed and whether or not it is performed can be set from Utility mode. For details, refer to "System Settings" on page 12-26. Whether or not the automatic panel reset operation is performed when there is a change of user can be set from the Utility mode. For details, refer to "System Settings" on page 12-26. 2.3.5 Automatically canceling the mode screen (System Auto Reset) If no operation is performed for a specified length of time, the screen is automatically changed to that for the mode given priority. This is the System Auto Reset operation. As the factory default, the Copy mode screen is displayed after 1 minute. ! Detail The mode screen that is displayed when the System Auto Reset operation is performed can be changed from the Utility mode. For details, refer to "System Settings" on page 12-26. 2.3.6 Automatically conserving energy (Low Power mode) If no operation is performed for a specified length of time, the touch panel goes off and the machine automatically enters a mode where it conserves energy. This is the Low Power mode. The machine can receive jobs even while it is in Low Power mode. As the factory default, the machine enters Low Power mode after 15 minutes. To recover from Low Power mode 1 Press the [Power Save] key. 2 The machine can receive jobs while it is warming up. – The touch panel comes on again and, after the machine has finished warming up, it is ready to begin printing. 2 Note As the factory default, pressing the [Power Save] key causes the machine to enter Low Power mode. Settings in the Administrator Settings mode can be changed to put the machine in Sleep mode instead. For details, refer to "System Settings" on page 12-26. The Low Power mode can also be canceled by pressing any key in the control panel or by touching the touch panel. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 2-35 Before making copies 2 ! Detail The length of time until the machine enters Low Power mode can be changed. For details, refer to "System Settings" on page 12-17 and page 12-26. 2.3.7 Automatically conserving energy (Sleep mode) If no operation is performed for a specified length of time, the machine automatically enters a mode where it conserves energy. Although the machine conserves more energy in Sleep mode than in Low Power mode, the machine must warm up when Sleep mode is canceled to begin printing again, therefore taking more preparation time than Low Power mode. As the factory default, the machine enters Sleep mode after 60 minutes. To recover from Sleep mode 1 Press the [Power Save] key. 2 The machine can receive jobs while it is warming up. – The touch panel comes on again and, after the machine has finished warming up, it is ready to begin printing. 2 Note The Sleep mode can also be canceled by pressing any key in the control panel or by touching the touch panel. ! Detail As a default, the machine enters Low Power mode if no operation is performed for 15 minutes, and then the machine enters Sleep mode after 60 minutes have elapsed. The length of time until the machine enters Sleep mode can be changed. For details, refer to "System Settings" on page 12-17 and "System Settings" on page 12-26. Specify whether to bring the machine to the same condition as mains power off when the machine enters Sleep mode or when the sub power switch is turned off. For details, refer to "System Settings" on page 12-26. 2 Before making copies 2-36 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 2.3.8 Manually conserving energy The machine can be manually set to an energy conservation mode (Low Power mode or Sleep mode). % Press the [Power Save] key (or press the [Power] (auxiliary power) key). – As the factory default, the machine enters Low Power mode. ! Detail Whether the machine enters Low Power mode or Sleep mode when the [Power Save] key is pressed can be set from the Administrator Settings mode. For details, refer to "System Settings" on page 12-26. 2.3.9 Automatically turning the machine on/off (Weekly Timer) The machine can be set to automatically enter Sleep mode according to a usage schedule determined by the administrator so the machine’s use can be limited. This is the Weekly Timer. Follow the procedure described below to use the machine while the Weekly Timer is being used. ! Detail As the factory default, the Weekly Timer is not set. For details on setting the Weekly Timer, refer to "System Settings" on page 12-26. 1 Press the [Power Save] key. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 2-37 Before making copies 2 2 Type in the password (up to 8 digits) for non-business hours. – For details on setting the password for non-business hours, refer to "System Settings" on page 12-26. 3 Touch [OK]. The message "It is now non-business hour. Set the Sleep Mode time." appears. 4 Using the keypad, again type in the length of time until the machine enters Sleep mode. – Specify a length of time between 5 minutes and 9 hours and 59 minutes. ? How can a single digit be entered? % First, type in "0". If a minutes setting of less than 5 is entered, the setting changes to 5 minutes. In addition, a minutes setting of 60 or more cannot be specified. 5 Touch [OK]. The message "Ready to copy." appears on the touch panel. 2 Note If the message "It is now non-business hour. Set the Sleep Mode time." or "It is now non-business hour. To use the device, enter password using the keyboard or keypad and then touch [OK]." appears after the [Power] (auxiliary power) key is pressed, the Weekly Timer is set. 2 Before making copies 2-38 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) ! Detail During the set time, the copy operations can be performed as usual. From the Password for Non-Business Hours screen (displayed from Administrator Settings mode), the machine can be set so that the screen for entering the password for non-business hours is not displayed. The default setting for the "Password for Non-Business Hours" parameter is "No" (the screen is not displayed). 2.3.10 Controlling each user’s use of this machine (User Authentication) If user authentication settings have been specified by the administrator, only users that have been registered can use this machine. In addition, the number of printed pages can be managed for each user. 0 When user authentication settings have been specified, only users who enter passwords for specified users can use this machine. 0 Contact the administrator for a user name and password and for the server name. 0 If machine authentication or external server authentication has been set, a total of 1,000 users and accounts can be registered. 1 Touch [User Name]. – If a list of user names can be displayed, the desired user name can be selected from the list. Touch [User Name List], touch the button for the desired user name to select it, and then touch [OK]. – Users who have no access to a user name and password can touch [Public User Access] to use this machine. For details on specifying public user settings, refer to "Selecting an authentication method" on page 12-69 and "Public User Access" on page 12-74. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 2-39 Before making copies 2 – If "Enhanced Security Mode" is set to "ON", [Public User Access] and [User Name List] do not appear. – If external server authentication was selected as the user authentication method, [Server Name] appears with the name of the default server. Touch [Server Name] to display the names of the registered servers, and then select the desired server. For details on specifying settings for an external server authentication, refer to "Selecting an authentication method" on page 12-69. 2 Type in the user name, and then touch [OK]. 2 Before making copies 2-40 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 3 Touch [Password]. 4 Type in the password, and then touch [OK]. 5 Touch [Login] or press the [Access] key. The Basic screen appears. If account track settings have been applied, the account track screen appears. However, if "Synchronize User Authentication & Account Track" has been set to "Synchronize", the account track screen does not appear if the users and accounts are synchronized. 6 Make copies using the desired copy settings. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 2-41 Before making copies 2 7 When you are finished printing, press the [Access] key. A message appears, requesting confirmation to log off. 8 Touch [Yes], and then touch [OK]. The user authentication screen appears. ! Detail For details on specifying user authentication settings, refer to "User Authentication/Account Track" on page 12-33. It is possible to specify so that the logging-off confirmation screen does not appear. For details, refer to "User Authentication/Account Track" on page 12-33. 2 Note The user authentication settings can be used together with the account track settings. If the "Synchronize User Authentication & Account Track" parameter is set to "Synchronize", complete user authentication, and then log on by using the account track screen. User authentication settings can be specified using the User Authentication parameters in Administrator Settings mode, available from the Utility mode. Settings should be specified by the administrator. 2 Before making copies 2-42 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 2.3.11 Controlling each account’s use of this machine (Account Track) If the account track settings have been specified by the administrator, only users of registered accounts can use this machine. In addition, the number of prints produced with each account can be controlled. This is account track. 0 When account track settings have been specified, only users who enter passwords for specified accounts can use this machine. 0 If you do not know the account name or password, contact your administrator. 0 A total of 1,000 users and accounts can be registered. 1 Touch [Account Name]. – If [Password Only] is specified in the Administrator Settings, the following screen appears. Touch [Password] and continue with step 4. – If the "Account Track Input Method" in the Administrator Settings is set to "Password Only", only [Password] is displayed in the authentication screen. The password can be directly entered in the authentication screen using the keypad. If the password consists of numerals only, touching [Login] or pressing the [Access] key allows logging on without displaying a keyboard screen. – If the password consists of alphabet characters, numerals and symbols, touch [Password] and continue with step 4. – After entering numerals using the keypad, touching [Password] allows alphabet characters or symbols to be entered in succession. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 2-43 Before making copies 2 2 Type in the account name, and then touch [OK]. 3 Touch [Password]. 4 Type in the password, and then touch [OK]. 2 Before making copies 2-44 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 5 Touch [Login] or press the [Access] key. The Basic screen appears. 6 Make copies using the desired copy settings. 7 When you are finished printing, press the [Access] key. A message appears, requesting confirmation to log off. 8 Touch [Yes], and then touch [OK]. The account track screen appears. ! Detail The accounts can be managed in Administrator Settings mode, available from the Utility mode. Settings should be specified by the administrator. If "Account Track Input Method" on the General Settings screen of Administrator Settings mode was set to "Password Only", log on is possible by only entering the password. For details, refer to "User Authentication/Account Track" on page 12-33. For details on specifying account track settings, refer to "Selecting an authentication method" on page 12-69. It is possible to specify so that the logging-off confirmation screen does not appear. For details, refer to "User Authentication/Account Track" on page 12-33. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 2-45 Before making copies 2 2.3.12 Controlling use of this machine with Authentication Unit (Biometric Type) An authentication unit (biometric type) can be used with this machine to perform authentication. The authentication unit (biometric type) authenticates the user by scanning the vein patterns in the finger. 2 Note 1-to-many authentication: Authentication is performed simply by positioning the finger. 1-to-1 authentication: Authentication is performed by typing in the user name and positioning the finger. ! Detail To use biometric authentication, register the vein patterns in the finger in advance. For details on specifying authentication settings for the authentication unit (biometric type) and on registering finger vein patterns, refer to chapter 12, "Authentication unit (Biometric Type AU-101)" of this manual. When "1-to-many authentication" has been specified % Place your finger on the authentication unit (biometric type). 2 Before making copies 2-46 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) The basic screen appears. When "1-to-1 authentication" has been specified 1 Type in the user name. 2 Place your finger on the authentication unit (biometric type). bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 2-47 Before making copies 2 The basic screen appears. 2 Note If the authentication unit (biometric type) cannot be used, it is possible to use this machine by entering a [User name] and [Password]. 2.3.13 Controlling use of this machine with the Authentication Unit (IC Card Type) An authentication unit (IC card type) can be used with this machine to perform authentication. The authentication unit (IC card type) authenticates users by reading the information registered on their IC card. 2 Note Card Authentication: Authentication is performed simply by positioning the IC card. Card Authentication + Password: Authentication is performed by positioning the IC card and entering the password. ! Detail To use card authentication, register the card information in advance. For details on specifying authentication settings for the authentication unit (IC card type) and on registering IC card information, refer to chapter 13, "Authentication unit (IC Card Type AU-201)" of this manual. When "Card Authentication" has been specified 2 Before making copies 2-48 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) % Place the IC card horizontally on the card scanning area of the authentication unit (IC card type). The Basic screen appears. When "Card Authentication + Password" has been specified bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 2-49 Before making copies 2 1 Place the IC card horizontally on the card scanning area of the authentication unit (IC card type). 2 Type in the password and then touch [Login] or press the [Access] key. The Basic screen appears. 2 Note If the authentication unit (IC card type) cannot be used, it is possible to use this machine by entering a user name and password. 2 Before making copies 2-50 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 2.4 Loading paper into the tray 1 or 2 To load paper (tray 1 or 2) 1 Pull out the tray 1 or 2. 2 Raise the paper take-up roller. 3 Load the paper into the tray. – Load the paper so that it is flush against the right side of the tray. 4 Fully push in the paper tray. 2 Reminder Do not load so much paper that the top of the stack is higher than the , mark. Make sure that the trailing-edge guide is adjusted to fit the size of the loaded paper. If there is space between the trailing-edge guide and the paper, the paper will not be fed correctly. Do not close the paper tray with too much force, otherwise the weight of the tray and paper will apply an impact to the machine that may cause damage. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 2-51 Before making copies 2 2.5 Loading paper into the tray 3 or 4 To load paper (tray 3 or 4) 1 Pull out the tray 3 or 4. 2 Raise the paper take-up roller. 3 Load the paper into the tray. – Load the paper so that it is flush against the right side of the tray. 4 Slide the lateral guide to fit the size of paper being loaded. – Move the lateral guide while holding the release button pressed. When the button is released, the guide is locked in place. 5 Fully push in the paper tray. 2 Reminder Do not load so much paper that the top of the stack is higher than the , mark. 2 Reminder Make sure that the trailing-edge guide is adjusted to fit the size of the loaded paper. If there is space between the trailing-edge guide and the paper or if the trailing-edge guide is not correctly positioned, the paper will not be fed correctly. Make sure that the lateral guide is correctly positioned against the edge of the loaded paper. If the lateral guide is not positioned correctly, the paper size will not be correctly detected or the punched holes will not be correctly positioned. If custom-sized paper is loaded, there may be some space between the paper and the trailing-edge guide. When loading the paper, make sure that it fits well against the right side of the paper tray, not the trailing-edge guide. 2 Before making copies 2-52 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 2 Reminder Do not close the paper tray with too much force, otherwise the weight of the tray and paper will apply an impact to the machine that may cause damage. 2.6 Loading paper into the LCT (LU-405/LU-406) 2 Note LCT is the optional Large capacity unit LU-405/LU-406. 2 Reminder If the machine is turned off, the bottom plate cannot be raised. In addition, the bottom plate cannot be lowered, even after the tray bottom plate lower button is pressed. When loading paper into the LCT, be sure that the machine is turned on with both the main power switch and the auxiliary power key. To load paper (LCT) 1 Open the upper cover. 2 Press the tray bottom plate lower button. – The tray bottom plate is lowered. (LU-405) (LU-406) bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 2-53 Before making copies 2 3 Load the paper into the tray. 4 Repeat steps 2 and 3 until the tray bottom plate cannot be lowered any further. 5 Close the upper cover. (LU-405) (LU-406) ) (LU-405) (LU-406) 2 Before making copies 2-54 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 2 Reminder Do not load the LCT with paper of other sizes than previously specified. Do not load so much paper that the top of the stack does not exceed the , mark. Make sure that the trailing edge stopper is adjusted to fit the size of the loaded paper. If there is space between the trailing edge stopper and the paper, the paper will not be fed correctly. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 2-55 Before making copies 2 2.7 Loading paper into the bypass tray Paper can be fed manually through the bypass tray if you wish to copy onto paper that is not loaded into a paper tray, or if you wish to copy onto thick paper, thin paper, tracing paper, tab paper, OHP transparencies, label sheets, etc. 1 Open the bypass tray. 2 With the side to be printed on facing down, insert the paper as much as possible into the feed slot. 3 Slide the lateral guides to fit the size of paper being loaded. – Push the paper guides firmly up against the edges of the paper. ? How is curled paper loaded? % Flatten the paper before loading it. 2 Before making copies 2-56 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 4 Select the paper type. – To display a different list of paper types, touch . 5 Touch [OK], and then touch [OK] in the next screen that appears. The Basic screen appears again. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 2-57 Before making copies 2 2 Reminder When loading OHP transparencies, load them in the v orientation, as shown in the illustration. Do not load OHP transparencies in the w orientation. Load OHP transparencies one sheet at a time. When loading tab papers, load them in the v orientation, as shown in the illustration. Do not load tab papers in the w orientation. Load label sheets one sheet at a time. 2 Before making copies 2-58 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) Be sure to load letterhead paper so that the side to be printed on faces up, and select [Letterhead] for the paper type of the bypass tray. 2 Note The image will be printed on the surface of the paper facing down when the paper is loaded into the bypass tray. ! Detail For details on the paper sizes, refer to "Copy paper" on page 7-3. For details on selecting a setting for standard size paper, refer to "Selecting a paper size setting (Size setting)" on page 7-10. For details on selecting a setting for non-standard-size paper, refer to "Specifying a non-standard paper size (Custom size settings)" on page 7-12. For details on selecting a setting for wide paper, refer to "Selecting a setting for oversized paper (Wide paper settings)" on page 7-17. ABC ABC bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 2-59 Before making copies 2 2.8 Loading paper of a different size into paper trays The paper loaded into the tray 3 and 4 can be changed to that of a different size. 2 Note To load paper of a different size into the tray 1 and 2 and the LCT, contact your service representative. 2.8.1 Changing the size of paper that is loaded 1 Pull out the tray 3 or 4. 2 Raise the paper take-up roller. 3 Remove the trailing-edge guide, and then insert it at the position for the desired paper size. – Press the button to remove the trailing-edge guide. – Insert the trailing-edge guide into the hole corresponding to the size indicated on the bottom plate. 4 Load paper of the new size, and then slide the lateral guide to fit the size of the paper. – Move the lateral guide while holding the release button pressed. When the button is released, the guide is locked in place. 5 Fully push in the paper tray. – If paper other than standard-size paper or thick paper was loaded, specify the settings for the loaded paper in the Paper Type screen. Refer to "Paper type setting for a tray" on page 7-21. 2 Before making copies 2-60 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 2 Reminder Be sure to insert the trailing-edge guide at the position for the specified size. If there is space between the trailing-edge guide and the paper, the paper will not be fed correctly. Make sure that the lateral guide is correctly positioned against the edge of the loaded paper. If the lateral guide is not positioned correctly, the paper size will not be correctly detected. Do not close the paper tray with too much force, otherwise the weight of the tray and paper will apply an impact to the machine that may cause damage. 2.8.2 When 5-1/2 × 8-1/2 or A5-size thick paper is loaded into a paper tray If 5-1/2 e 8-1/2 or A5-size thick paper is loaded into a paper tray, the bypass tray or the LCT, the transport lever must be correctly set in order to prevent paper misfeeds. To set the transport lever 1 Open the front doors (left and right). 2 Turn lever M4 to the left, and then pull out the ADU unit. 3 Set the transport lever to "5-1/2 e 8-1/2, A5 Thick paper". 4 Return the ADU unit to its original position. 5 Close the front doors (left and right). 2 Note After using 5-1/2 e 8-1/2 or A5-size thick paper, be sure to reset the transport lever to "NORMAL". M4 Transport lever 3 Basic copy operations bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 3-3 Basic copy operations 3 3 Basic copy operations 3.1 General copy operation This section contains information on the general operation for making copies. The following procedure describes how to copy a single-sided original using basic copy operations. 2 Note The maximum loading capacity of the output trays for the optional finisher may be limited depending on the paper size and selected Finishing settings. With continuous printing (multiple jobs), the warning "The output tray has reached its capacity. Remove paper from the tray indicated by %." may appear, even if the paper was removed from the output trays. For details on multiple jobs, refer to "Multi-job feature" on page 11-3. Interrupting a print job resets the loading capacity of the output tray. For details on the limitations of the loading capacity for the output trays, refer to "Specifications" on page 6-3. Some settings cannot be used together. For details on the settings that cannot be combined, refer to "Operations that cannot be combined" on page 3-6. 1 Press the [Copy] key to display the Basic screen in Copy mode. 2 Position the original to be copied. – For details on positioning the original, refer to page 3-9. 3 Basic copy operations 3-4 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 3 Specify the desired copy settings. – The factory default settings for this machine are listed below. [Density]: Auto [Background Removal]: Standard [Paper]: Auto (Auto Paper Select) [Zoom]: Full Size (100.0%) [Duplex/Combine]: 1 > 1 [Original Type]: Text/Photo – For details on selecting settings in the Original Setting screen, refer to page 3-19. – For details on selecting a Paper setting, refer to page 3-36. – For details on specifying a Zoom setting, refer to page 3-39. – For details on selecting the original and copy settings, refer to page 3-50. – For details on selecting the original image quality, refer to page 3-59. – For details on selecting a copy density setting, refer to page 3-61. – For details on specifying combined copy settings, refer to page 3-55. – For details on selecting Finishing settings, refer to page 3-64. – For details on selecting the Fold/Bind settings, refer to page 3-77. – For details on specifying settings to not rotate the image, refer to page 3-89. – For details on specifying settings for the Application functions, refer to page 8-3. 4 Using the keypad, type in the desired number of copies. – If the number of copies was incorrectly entered, press the [C] (clear) key in the keypad, and then specify the correct number of copies. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 3-5 Basic copy operations 3 5 Press the [Start] key. – To stop the copy operation being performed, press the [Stop] key. For details, refer to page 3-91. – The next copy operation can be queued while a copy operation is being performed. For details, refer to page 3-90. 3 Basic copy operations 3-6 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 3.2 Operations that cannot be combined Certain copy settings cannot be used together. Specifying settings that cannot be combined will result in one of the following occurring. - The setting specified last is given priority. (The setting specified first is canceled.) - The setting specified first is given priority. (A warning message appears.) 3.2.1 Operations where the setting specified last is given priority The procedure for setting the "Booklet" function after selecting the "2 Position" Staple setting is described below. 1 Select the "2 Position" Staple setting. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 3-7 Basic copy operations 3 2 Set the "Booklet" function. The "2 Position" Staple setting is automatically canceled, and the "Booklet" function is set. To select the "2 Position" Staple setting, cancel the "Booklet" function, and then select the "2 Position" setting. 3 Basic copy operations 3-8 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 3.2.2 Operations where the setting specified first is given priority If a warning message appears, indicating that settings cannot be combined, those settings cannot be specified together. The procedure for selecting the "2 Position" Staple setting after setting the "Booklet" function is described below. 1 Set the "Booklet" function. 2 Select the "2 Position" Staple setting. The message "Cannot be set with Booklet." appears and the "2 Position" Staple setting cannot be selected. The "Booklet" function remains selected and the "2 Position" Staple setting is canceled. To select the "2 Position" Staple setting, cancel the "Booklet" function, and then select the "2 Position" Staple setting. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 3-9 Basic copy operations 3 3.3 Feeding the original The original can be fed in either of the following two ways. Be sure to position the original correctly according to the type of original being copied. 3.3.1 Loading the original into the ADF 0 Do not load originals that are bound together, for example, with paper clips or staples. 0 For details on the types of originals that can be loaded into the ADF, refer to "Originals" on page 7-31. 0 Do not load more than 100 sheets or so many sheets that the top of the stack is higher than the , mark, otherwise an original misfeed or damage to the original or machine may occur. However, a original that exceeds 100 sheets can be scanned in separate batches. For details, refer to "Scanning the original in separate batches ("Separate Scan" setting)" on page 3-11. 0 If the original is not loaded correctly, it may not be fed in straight or an original misfeed or damage to the original may occur. 0 If the original is loaded in any orientation other than with the top of the original toward the back of the machine, be sure to select the original orientation. For details on selecting the original orientation, refer to "Selecting the original orientation ("Original Direction" settings)" on page 3-26. 1 Place the original in the original feed tray in the order to be scanned with the side to be scanned faces up. – Load the original pages so that the top of the original is toward the back or the right side of the machine. 2 Adjust the lateral guides to the size of the original. – For details on loading originals of mixed sizes, refer to "Copying originals of mixed sizes ("Mixed Original" setting)" on page 3-21. – For details on specifying the original orientation, refer to "Selecting the original orientation ("Original Direction" settings)" on page 3-26. – For details on specifying the binding margin position, refer to "Selecting the position of the binding margin ("Binding Position" settings)" on page 3-29. Document Feed Method Features Using the ADF By using the ADF, a multi-page original can be fed automatically, one page at a time. This feed method can also be used to automatically scan double-sided originals. Using the original glass Place the original directly on the original glass so that it can be scanned. This method is best with books and other originals that cannot be fed through the ADF. A A 3 Basic copy operations 3-10 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 3.3.2 Placing the original on the original glass 0 For details on the types of originals that can be placed on the original glass, refer to "Originals" on page 7-31. 0 When placing the original on the original glass, be sure to lift open the ADF at least 20°. If the original is placed on the original glass without the ADF being lifted at least 20°, the correct original size may not be detected. 0 Do not place objects weighing more than 6.8 kg on the original glass. In addition, do not press down extremely hard on a book spread on the original glass, otherwise the original glass may be damaged. 0 For thick books or large objects, make the copy without closing the ADF. When an original is being scanned with the ADF open, do not look directly at the light that may shine through the original glass. Although the light that shines through the original glass is bright, it is not a laser beam and, therefore, is not as dangerous. 1 Lift open the ADF or the original cover. 2 Place the original face down on the original glass. – Load the original pages so that the top of the original is toward the back or the left side of the machine. 3 Align the original with the mark in the back-left corner of the original scales. – For details on selecting the original orientation, refer to "Selecting the original orientation ("Original Direction" settings)" on page 3-26. – For details on specifying the binding margin position, refer to "Selecting the position of the binding margin ("Binding Position" settings)" on page 3-29. – For transparent or translucent originals, place a blank sheet of paper of the same size as the original over the original. Original scales bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 3-11 Basic copy operations 3 – For bound originals spread over two facing pages, such as a book or magazine, position the top of the original toward the back of this machine and align the original with the mark in the back-left corner of the original scales, as shown. 4 Close the ADF. 3.3.3 Scanning the original in separate batches ("Separate Scan" setting) A large original can be divided and scanned in a number of batches. A maximum of 100 original pages can be loaded into the ADF at one time. However, by specifying the "Separate Scan" setting, an original that exceeds 100 pages can be scanned and treated as a single copy job. In addition, the scanning location can be switched between the original glass and the ADF during the scanning operation. 0 The loading capacity of the ADF is 100 sheets of plain paper (80 g/m2). Do not allow the original to be loaded over the limit mark (,), even though the original count is less than 100. 0 The output method used with the "Separate Scan" setting can be set to "Page Print" or "Batch Print". As a default, "Page Print" is selected. 0 For details on the output method used with the "Separate Scan" setting, refer to the description for "Separate Scan Output Method" in "Copier Settings" on page 12-21. 1 Position the original to be copied. – For details on positioning the original, refer to "Feeding the original" on page 3-9. 2 In the Basic screen, touch [Separate Scan]. – To cancel the "Separate Scan" setting, touch [Separate Scan] again to deselect it. 3 Basic copy operations 3-12 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 3 Press the [Start] key. After the original has been scanned, the following message appears. – Load the next batch of the original, and then press the [Start] key. – If the "Separate Scan Output Method" parameter is set to "Batch Print", touch [Finish] in the following screen, which appears while the original is scanned with the ADF, to continue to step 5 – If the original cannot be loaded into the ADF, place it on the original glass. For details on the types of originals that can be loaded into the ADF, refer to "Originals" on page 7-31. – To change the scanning settings, touch [Change Setting]. For details on changing the scanning settings, refer to "Changing scan settings for each original" on page 3-32. – The buttons that appear in the screen for changing the settings differ depending on the specified settings. Settings for the following can be changed. 1-Sided/2-Sided, Density/Background, Original Type, Binding Position, Zoom, Original Size, Frame Erase, Center Erase bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 3-13 Basic copy operations 3 – To cancel changes to the settings, touch [Cancel]. – The amount of memory available can be checked beside "Memory" in the lower-left corner of the screen. To delete the image data, press the [Stop] key, and then delete the job. For details, refer to "Temporarily stopping scanning/printing" on page 3-91. 4 After all original pages have been scanned, touch [Finish]. 3 Basic copy operations 3-14 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 5 Press the [Start] key. – If the "Separate Scan Output Method" parameter is set to "Batch Print", touch [Print] or press the [Start] key. – If the "Separate Scan Output Method" parameter is set to "Batch Print", the copy settings can be changed. To change the copy settings, touch [Change Setting], and then touch [OK] after changing the settings as desired. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 3-15 Basic copy operations 3 3.3.4 Scanning a multi-page original from the original glass When making double-sided or combined copies using the original glass, place each page of a multi-page original on the original glass to scan it. The following procedure describes how to place single-sided original pages on the original glass to make double-sided copies. 0 The output method used with the "Separate Scan" setting can be set to "Page Print" or "Batch Print". As a default, "Page Print" is selected. 0 For details on the output method used with the "Separate Scan" setting, refer to "Copier Settings" on page 12-21. 1 Lift open the ADF. 2 Position the first page or the first side of the original face down onto the original glass. – For details on positioning the original, refer to "Placing the original on the original glass" on page 3-10. 3 Close the ADF. 4 In the Basic screen, touch [Duplex/Combine]. The Duplex/Combine screen appears. 3 Basic copy operations 3-16 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 5 Touch [1-Sided > 2-Sided]. 6 Touch [Binding Position], select the binding position for the copy, and then touch [OK]. – For details on specifying the binding position, refer to "Selecting double-sided copies" on page 3-52. 7 Touch [Original Direction], select the orientation of the loaded original, and then touch [OK]. – For details on specifying the original orientation, refer to "Selecting the original orientation ("Original Direction" settings)" on page 3-26. 8 Touch [OK]. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 3-17 Basic copy operations 3 9 Press the [Start] key. Scanning begins. 10 Position the second page or second side of the original onto the original glass, and then press the [Start] key. – To scan the remaining pages in the original, repeat step 10. – To change the scanning settings, touch [Change Setting]. For details on changing the scanning settings, refer to "Changing scan settings for each original" on page 3-32. – The buttons that appear in the screen for changing the settings differ depending on the specified settings. Settings for the following can be changed. 1-Sided/2-Sided, Density/Background, Original Type, Binding Position, Zoom, Original Size, Frame Erase, Center Erase – To cancel changes to the settings, touch [Cancel]. 3 Basic copy operations 3-18 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 11 After all original pages have been scanned, touch [Finish]. 12 Press the [Start] key. – If the "Separate Scan Output Method" parameter is set to "Batch Print", touch [Print] or press the [Start] key. – If the "Separate Scan Output Method" parameter is set to "Batch Print", the copy settings can be changed. To change the copy settings, touch [Change Setting], and then touch [OK] after changing the settings as desired. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 3-19 Basic copy operations 3 3.4 Specifying original settings The following describes necessary settings depending on the status and placement of the originals to copy them as desired. 3.4.1 Specifying the original size ("Original Size" settings) Copies can be produced after specifying the original scanning size if the original size cannot be detected automatically or if you wish to specify a certain original size. 1 Position the original to be copied. – For details on positioning the original, refer to "Feeding the original" on page 3-9. 2 In the Basic screen, touch [Original Setting]. The Original Setting screen appears. 3 Touch [Original Size]. The Original Size screen appears. 3 Basic copy operations 3-20 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 4 Select the original size, and then touch [OK]. – Touch or to display a different list of standard sizes. – To specify a standard size, touch the button for the desired original size. – To specify a custom size, touch [Custom Size] to display the Custom Size screen. Specify the X and Y sides of the paper, and then touch [OK]. – Touch [X] or [Y], touch [<->] to switch between the integer and the fraction, and then touch [-] and [+] to specify the size of the paper. – If a decimal value is displayed in the Custom Size screen, use the keypad to type in the setting. For details on switching between decimal and fraction values, refer to "System Settings" on page 12-17. – To cancel changes to the settings, touch [Cancel]. – If a decimal value is displayed in the screen and the specified value is outside the allowable range, the message "Input Error" appears. Type a value within the allowable range. If the value was incorrectly entered, press the [C] (clear) key to erase the value, and then specify the correct value. Custom Size screen bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 3-21 Basic copy operations 3 3.4.2 Copying originals of mixed sizes ("Mixed Original" setting) Originals of different sizes can be loaded together into the ADF to be fed and scanned one by one automatically. 0 Do not load more than 100 sheets or so many sheets that the top of the stack is higher than the , mark, otherwise an original misfeed or damage to the original or machine may occur. However, an original that exceeds 100 sheets can be scanned in separate batches. For details, refer to "Scanning the original in separate batches ("Separate Scan" setting)" on page 3-11. 0 If the original is not loaded correctly, it may not be fed in straight or an original misfeed or damage to the original may occur. 1 Slide the adjustable lateral guides of the ADF to fit the size of the largest page. – The possible combinations of original sizes differ depending on the widest original loaded (position of the adjustable lateral guides). – For details on the mixed original sizes that can be loaded in the ADF, refer to "Originals that can be loaded into the ADF" on page 7-31. 2 Align the originals as the references so that the side to be scanned faces up. 3 Place the original in the original feed tray in the order to be scanned with the side to be scanned faces up. Slide the adjustable lateral guides against the edges of the original. – Load the original pages into the ADF so that the top of the pages is toward the back or the left side of the machine. 3 Basic copy operations 3-22 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 4 In the Basic screen, touch [Original Setting]. The Original Setting screen appears. 5 Touch [Mixed Original]. – To cancel the "Mixed Original" setting, touch [Mixed Original] again to deselect it. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 3-23 Basic copy operations 3 3.4.3 Loading folded (Z-folded) originals If folded originals are loaded into the ADF to be copied, the original size is correctly detected. 0 Load the original into the ADF. 0 The length of the first page of the original is detected, and all pages of the original are scanned at that size. 1 Position the original to be copied. – Unfold folded originals before loading them into the ADF. If the original is copied without being unfolded, a paper misfeed may occur. – For details on loading the original, refer to "Loading the original into the ADF" on page 3-9. 2 In the Basic screen, touch [Original Setting]. The Original Setting screen appears. 3 Basic copy operations 3-24 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 3 Touch [Z-Folded Original]. – To cancel the "Z-Folded Original" setting, touch [Z-Folded Original] again to deselect it. 3.4.4 Loading tab paper (Tab original settings) Using tab papers enables copying of an original including its index part. 1 Position the original to be copied. – For details on loading the original, refer to "Loading the original into the ADF" on page 3-9. 2 Load tab papers into the bypass tray. – Tab papers can be loaded into the bypass tray. For details, refer to "Loading paper into the bypass tray" on page 2-55. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 3-25 Basic copy operations 3 3 In the Basic screen, touch [Original Setting]. The Original Setting screen appears. 4 Touch [Tab Original]. The Tab Original screen appears. 5 Select an original size, and then touch [OK]. 3 Basic copy operations 3-26 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 3.4.5 Selecting the original orientation ("Original Direction" settings) When copying double-sided originals or making double-sided copies or combined copies, specify the original orientation, otherwise the copies may not be printed in the correct page order or correct front and back page arrangement. 2 Note As the factory default, the first setting (with the top of the original at the top (toward the back of the machine)) is selected. Original loading orientation Using the ADF Using the original glass Icon Description Select this setting for an original loaded with the top toward the back of this machine. Select this setting for an original loaded with the top toward the front of this machine. • Select this setting for an original loaded into the ADF with the top of the original toward the left side of this machine. • Select this setting for an original placed on the original glass with the top of the original toward the right side of this machine. • Select this setting for an original loaded into the ADF with the top of the original toward the right side of this machine. • Select this setting for an original placed on the original glass with the top of the original toward the left side of this machine. 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 3-27 Basic copy operations 3 3.4.6 To select an original direction setting 1 Position the original to be copied. – For details on positioning the original, refer to "Feeding the original" on page 3-9. 2 In the Basic screen, touch [Original Setting]. The Original Setting screen appears. 3 Touch [Original Direction]. The Original Direction screen appears. 3 Basic copy operations 3-28 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 4 Touch the button for the orientation of the loaded original, and then touch [OK]. – To cancel the setting and select the default, press the [Reset] key. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 3-29 Basic copy operations 3 3.4.7 Selecting the position of the binding margin ("Binding Position" settings) If a double-sided original is loaded into the ADF, specify the position of the top of the back side of the original by specifying the binding margin position for the original. 2 Note As the factory default, "Auto" is selected as the position of the binding margin. Original binding margin position Original binding margin Icon Description Left Select this setting if the original is loaded with the binding margin at the left. Right Select this setting if the original is loaded with the binding margin at the right. Top Select this setting if the original that is loaded has a binding margin at the top. When the original length is 297 mm or less: When the original length is more than 297 mm: Auto Select this setting to automatically select the position of the binding margin. If the original length is 297 mm or less, a binding position along the long side of the paper is selected. If the original length is more than 297 mm: a binding position along the short side of the paper is selected. 2 Note If "Auto" is selected, the binding margin is set at the top or at the left. ABC AB ABCBC ABC ABC ABC AB ABC ABC ABC ABC ABC AB 3 Basic copy operations 3-30 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 3.4.8 To select a binding position setting 1 Position the original to be copied. – For details on positioning the original, refer to "Feeding the original" on page 3-9. – When loading an original with a binding margin, position the top of the original toward the back of the machine. 2 In the Basic screen, touch [Original Setting]. The Original Setting screen appears. 3 Touch [Binding Position]. The Binding Position screen appears. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 3-31 Basic copy operations 3 4 Touch the button for the desired binding margin position, and then touch [OK]. – To cancel the setting and select the default, press the [Reset] key. 3 Basic copy operations 3-32 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 3.4.9 Changing scan settings for each original When scanning an original while using the "Separate Scan" setting or when multi-page originals are scanned from the original glass, the scan settings can be changed for each original. The following procedure describes how to change the settings when the "Separate Scan" setting is used. 1 Position the original to be copied. 2 In the Basic screen, touch [Separate Scan]. 3 Press the [Start] key. Scanning begins. 4 Touch [Change Setting]. A screen appears, allowing you to change the settings. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 3-33 Basic copy operations 3 5 Touch the button of the setting to be changed, select the desired setting, and then touch [OK]. – The buttons that appear in the screen for changing the settings differ depending on the specified settings. Settings for the following can be changed. 1-Sided/2-Sided, Density/Background, Original Type, Binding Position, Zoom, Original Size, Frame Erase, Center Erase – To cancel changes to the settings, touch [Cancel]. Binding Position screen Density/Background screen 3 Basic copy operations 3-34 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) Original Type screen Frame Erase screen Zoom screen bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 3-35 Basic copy operations 3 – For details on specifying the Zoom setting, refer to "Specifying a zoom setting" on page 3-39. For details on specifying "Frame Erase" and "Center Erase" settings, refer to "Erasing black marks along borders ("Erase" function)" on page 8-51. – The Original Size screen appears only when the "Mixed Original" setting is selected. 6 Touch [OK]. Original Size screen Center Erase screen 3 Basic copy operations 3-36 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 3.5 Selecting a paper setting The paper size can be selected automatically according to the original size or it can be specified manually. Specify the paper size according to the corresponding procedure, depending on the desired copy settings. As the factory default, "Auto" is selected. 2 Note If a setting for special paper is selected for a paper tray, that tray is not selected automatically with the "Auto" Paper setting. (However, a paper tray set to "Single Side Only" is given priority to be selected with single-sided printing.) Be sure to specify a paper setting when special paper is loaded into a paper tray. For details, refer to "Specifying a paper type for bypass tray" on page 7-19. If the "Auto Paper Select" was selected at the "Auto Zoom" setting, the Zoom screen appears. Touch the button for the desired zoom ratio. The "Auto" Paper setting cannot be combined with the "Auto" Zoom setting. For details on specifying the priority of paper trays, refer to "Specifying user settings" on page 12-17. 3.5.1 Automatically selecting the paper size ("Auto" paper setting) The size of the loaded original is detected, and copies are produced using paper of the same size. If the "Full Size" Zoom setting was specified, paper of the same size as the original is selected. If the zoom ratio was increased or decreased, a paper size that corresponds to the specified zoom ratio is automatically selected. 1 In the Basic screen, touch [Paper]. The Paper screen appears. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 3-37 Basic copy operations 3 2 Touch [Auto]. 3 Touch [OK]. The Basic screen appears again. 3 Basic copy operations 3-38 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 3.5.2 Manually selecting the desired paper size 0 By also selecting the "Auto" Zoom setting, the most appropriate zoom ratio is selected based on the size of the loaded original and the specified paper size. For details on the "Auto" Zoom setting, refer to "Automatically selecting the zoom ratio ("Auto" zoom Setting)" on page 3-39. 0 Load the appropriate papers into the paper tray in advance. 1 In the Basic screen, touch [Paper]. The Paper screen appears. 2 Select the paper tray loaded with the desired paper. 3 Touch [OK]. The Basic screen appears again. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 3-39 Basic copy operations 3 3.6 Specifying a zoom setting The zoom ratio can be set in order to make a copy on paper with a size different than the original or to enlarge or reduce the size of the copy image. As the factory default, "Full Size" is selected. The following procedures describe how to specify the Zoom setting. 2 Note The "Auto" Zoom setting cannot be combined with the "Auto" Paper setting. 3.6.1 Automatically selecting the zoom ratio ("Auto" zoom Setting) The most appropriate zoom ratio is automatically selected based on the size of the loaded original and the specified paper size. 0 If the "Auto" Zoom setting is selected and an enlargement is to be copied on paper larger than the original, load the original with the same orientation as the paper. 0 If the "Auto Zoom" was selected at the "Auto Paper Select" setting, the Paper screen appears. 1 In the Basic screen, touch [Zoom]. The Zoom screen appears. 2 Touch [Auto]. 3 Touch [OK]. The Basic screen appears again. 3 Basic copy operations 3-40 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 3.6.2 Specifying the zoom ratio of the original ("Full Size" setting) A copy that is the same size as the original (100%) is produced. 0 Touch [+] to enlarge the zoom ratio, and touch [-] to reduce the zoom ratio in 0.1% increments. 1 In the Basic screen, touch [Zoom]. The Zoom screen appears. 2 Touch [Full Size]. 3 Touch [OK]. The Basic screen appears again. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 3-41 Basic copy operations 3 3.6.3 Typing in the zoom ratio (XY zoom setting) By using the keypad, a zoom ratio between 25.0% and 400.0% can be typed in directly without changing the height-to-width ratio. 0 If a value outside the allowable range is specified, the message "Input error" appears. Type a value within the allowable range. If the value was incorrectly entered, press the [C] (clear) key to erase the value, and then specify the correct value. 0 The entered zoom ratio can be stored. For details on storing zoom ratios, refer to "Storing the desired zoom ratio" on page 3-48. 1 In the Basic screen, touch [Zoom]. The Zoom screen appears. 2 Touch [XY Zoom]. 3 Basic copy operations 3-42 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 3 Using the keypad, type in the desired zoom ratio (between 25.0% and 400.0%). 4 Touch [OK], and then touch [OK] in the next screen that appears. The Basic screen appears again. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 3-43 Basic copy operations 3 3.6.4 Slightly reducing the copy ("Minimal" setting) An original image can be printed slightly smaller (93.0%) than the original size and centered in the copy. 0 The zoom ratio of the "Minimal" setting can be changed (between 90.0% and 99.9%). For details on changing the zoom ratio for the "Minimal" setting or programming custom zoom ratios, refer to "Storing the desired zoom ratio" on page 3-48. 1 In the Basic screen, touch [Zoom]. The Zoom screen appears. 2 Touch [Minimal]. 3 Touch [OK]. The Basic screen appears again. 3 Basic copy operations 3-44 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 3.6.5 Selecting a preset zoom ratio (Enlarge and reduce settings) The most suitable zoom ratios for copying from common standard original sizes to standard paper sizes are preset. 1 In the Basic screen, touch [Zoom]. The Zoom screen appears. 2 Touch the button for the appropriate zoom ratio beside "Enlarge" and "Reduce", depending on the original and paper sizes. 3 Touch [OK]. The Basic screen appears again. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 3-45 Basic copy operations 3 3.6.6 Typing in separate X and Y zoom ratios (Individual zoom settings) By using the keypad, separate zoom ratios can be typed in directly for the horizontal direction (between 25.0% and 400.0%) and for the vertical direction (between 25.0% and 400.0%). By combining different horizontal and vertical zoom ratios, the copy image can be adjusted as shown below. 0 If a value outside the allowable range is specified, the message "Input error" appears. Type a value within the allowable range. If the value was incorrectly entered, press the [C] (clear) key to erase the value, and then specify the correct value. 1 In the Basic screen, touch [Zoom]. The Zoom screen appears. 2 Touch [XY Zoom]. 3 Basic copy operations 3-46 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 3 Touch [X] under "Set Individual Zoom", and then use the keypad to type in the desired zoom ratio (between 25.0% and 400.0%) for the X direction. 4 Touch [Y] under "Set Individual Zoom", and then use the keypad to type in the desired zoom ratio (between 25.0% and 400.0%) for the Y direction. – To cancel changes to the settings, touch [Cancel]. 5 Touch [OK], and then touch [OK] in the next screen that appears. The Basic screen appears again. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 3-47 Basic copy operations 3 3.6.7 Selecting a stored zoom ratio Copy zoom ratios that have been stored can be recalled to be used when desired. In addition, stored copy zoom ratios can be changed. 0 As the factory default, "Full Size" is selected. 0 Touch [+] to enlarge the zoom ratio, and touch [-] to reduce the zoom ratio in 0.1% increments. 0 Stored zoom ratios can be changed to desired zoom ratios. For details on storing zoom ratios, refer to "Storing the desired zoom ratio" on page 3-48. 1 In the Basic screen, touch [Zoom]. The Zoom screen appears. 2 Touch the button for the desired zoom ratio under "Set Zoom Ratio". 3 Touch [OK]. The Basic screen appears again. 3 Basic copy operations 3-48 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 3.6.8 Storing the desired zoom ratio Three frequently used zoom ratios and the zoom ratio for the "Minimal" setting can be stored. 0 If a value outside the allowable range is specified, the message "Input error" appears. Type a value within the allowable range. If the value was incorrectly entered, press the [C] (clear) key to erase the value, and then specify the correct value. 0 To store a "Minimal" zoom ratio, type in the desired zoom ratio between 90.0% and 99.9%. 0 The default zoom ratios (400.0%, 200.0% and 50.0%) are stored. When a new zoom ratio is stored, it overwrites the zoom ratio stored with the selected button. If a button stored with a zoom ratio is not touched before [OK] is touched, no setting is changed. 1 In the Basic screen, touch [Zoom]. The Zoom screen appears. 2 Touch [XY Zoom]. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 3-49 Basic copy operations 3 3 Using the keypad, type in the desired zoom ratio (between 25.0% and 400.0%). – To cancel changes to the settings, touch [Cancel]. 4 Touch [Set Zoom]. 5 Touch the button or [Minimal] where the new zoom ratio is to be stored. – To cancel the setting and select the default, press the [Reset] key. The specified zoom ratio is stored. 6 Touch [OK], and then touch [OK] in the next two screens that appear. The Basic screen appears again. 3 Basic copy operations 3-50 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 3.7 Selecting an original > copy setting The following four Original > Copy setting combinations are possible. The following procedures describe how to select Original and Copy setting. Original > Copy setting Description 1-Sided > 1-Sided Select this setting to produce single-sided copies from single-sided originals. 1-Sided > 2-Sided Select this setting to produce one double-sided copy from two singlesided originals. 2-Sided > 1-Sided Select this setting to produce two single-sided copies from one doublesided original. 2-Sided > 2-Sided Select this setting to produce double-sided copies from double-sided originals. 1 1 1 2 2 1 1 2 2 1 2 1 2 1 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 3-51 Basic copy operations 3 3.7.1 Selecting single-sided copies 0 As the factory default, "1-Sided > 1-Sided" is selected. 0 For details on using the original glass to scan multi-page originals, refer to "Scanning a multi-page original from the original glass" on page 3-15. 1 In the Basic screen, touch [Duplex/Combine]. The Duplex/Combine screen appears. 2 Touch [1-Sided > 1-Sided] or [2-Sided > 1-Sided]. – If "2-Sided > 1-Sided" is selected, specify the position of the binding margin and the orientation of the loaded original, otherwise the copies will not be printed as desired. – If the binding position for the original is set to "Auto", the position of the binding margin is automatically selected. A binding margin along the long side of the paper is selected if the original length is 297 mm or less. If the original length is more than 297 mm, a binding margin along the short side of the paper is selected. – If "Auto" is selected under "Original Bind Direction", the binding margin is set at the top or at the left. 3 Basic copy operations 3-52 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) – For a double-sided original, touch [Binding Position], select the binding position of the original, and then touch [OK]. 3 Touch [Original Direction], select the orientation of the loaded original, and then touch [OK]. – For details on specifying the original orientation, refer to "Selecting the original orientation ("Original Direction" settings)" on page 3-26. 4 Touch [OK]. The Basic screen appears again. 3.7.2 Selecting double-sided copies 0 As the factory default, "1-Sided > 1-Sided" is selected. 0 For details on using the original glass to scan multi-page originals, refer to "Scanning a multi-page original from the original glass" on page 3-15. 1 In the Basic screen, touch [Duplex/Combine]. The Duplex/Combine screen appears. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 3-53 Basic copy operations 3 2 Touch [1-Sided > 2-Sided] or [2-Sided > 2-Sided]. – Specify the position of the binding margin and the orientation of the loaded original, otherwise the copies will not be printed as desired. – If the binding position for the original is set to "Auto", the position of the binding margin is automatically selected. A binding margin along the long side of the paper is selected if the original length is 297 mm or less. If the original length is more than 297 mm, a binding margin along the short side of the paper is selected. – If "Auto" is selected under "Original Binding Position", the binding margin is set at the top or at the left. – If the binding position for the copy is set to "Auto", the binding position is automatically determined according to the orientation of the loaded original. If the original length is 297 mm or less, a binding position along the long side of the paper is selected. If the original length is more than 297 mm, a binding position along the short side of the paper is selected. – If the binding position for the copy is set to "Auto", the binding position is set at the top or at the left. 3 Touch [Binding Position]. – For a single-sided original, select the binding position for the copy, and then touch [OK]. 3 Basic copy operations 3-54 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) – For a double-sided original, select the binding positions for the original and the copy, and then touch [OK]. 4 Touch [Original Direction], select the orientation of the loaded original, and then touch [OK]. – For details on specifying the original orientation, refer to "Selecting the original orientation ("Original Direction" settings)" on page 3-26. 5 Touch [OK]. The Basic screen appears again. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 3-55 Basic copy operations 3 3.8 Selecting a combined copy setting Original images of multiple pages (2, 4 or 8 pages) can be combined and printed on a single page, reducing paper use. The following three combined copy settings are available. ! Detail When select the combined copy setting, copies are produced with the most appropriate zoom ratio (recommended zoom ratio) selected for the original and paper size. The zoom ratio that is selected can be changed manually. 2 Note As the factory default, "Auto Display Zoom Ratio" is selected. The "Auto Zoom for Combine/Booklet" parameter in Utility mode can be set so that the recommended zoom ratios are not used. In that case, specify the zoom ratio manually. For details, refer to "Custom Display Settings" on page 12-19. Setting Description 2in1 Select this setting to print two original pages on one page. 4in1 Select this setting to print four original pages on one page. The page arrangement (Numbering Direction setting) can be specified. Horizontal Vertical 1 1 2 2 1 1 2 2 Horizontal Vertical 1 1 2 2 3 3 4 4 1 1 2 2 3 3 4 4 1 1 3 3 2 2 4 4 1 1 3 3 2 2 4 4 3 Basic copy operations 3-56 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) The following procedure describes how to select a combined copy setting. 8in1 Select this setting to print eight original pages on one page. The page arrangement (Numbering Direction setting) can be specified. Horizontal Vertical Setting Description 1 1 2 2 3 3 4 4 5 5 6 6 7 7 8 8 1 1 2 2 3 3 4 4 5 5 6 6 7 7 8 8 1 1 3 3 5 5 7 7 2 2 4 4 6 6 8 8 1 1 5 5 2 2 6 6 3 3 7 7 4 4 8 8 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 3-57 Basic copy operations 3 3.8.1 Copying multiple original pages onto a single page (Combined copy settings) If a combined copy setting is selected, specify the position of the binding margin and the loading orientation for the original, otherwise the copies may not be printed in the desired arrangement. For details on specifying the position of the binding margin, refer to "Selecting the position of the binding margin ("Binding Position" settings)" on page 3-29. For details on specifying the original orientation, refer to "Selecting the original orientation ("Original Direction" settings)" on page 3-26. 1 In the Basic screen, touch [Duplex/Combine]. The Duplex/Combine screen appears. 2 Select the desired combined copy setting. 3 Basic copy operations 3-58 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) – Select the setting and page arrangement according to the orientation and number of the combined pages. If "4in1 / 8in1" is selected, whether the "Horizontal" or "Vertical" paper arrangement is selected can be viewed in the touch panel. However, this appears only if the "Left Pane Display Default" parameter in Utility mode is set to "Check Job Settings". If "2in1" was selected, the pages will be arranged as shown below. – If "4in1 / 8in1" the 4in1/8in1 screen appears. Touch [Vertical] or [Horizontal] to select the combination order of the original, and press [OK]. – To cancel the setting, touch [No]. 3 Touch [OK]. The Basic screen appears again. Vertical Horizontal bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 3-59 Basic copy operations 3 3.9 Selecting the quality of the original 3.9.1 Loading originals with small print or photos ("Original Type" settings) Select the setting for the text and image type of the original to better adjust the copy quality. The following Original Type settings are available. 2 Note As the factory default, "Text/Photo" is selected. The following procedure describes how to select an Original Type setting. Icon Description Text Select this setting when copying originals containing only text. The edges of copied text are reproduced with sharpness, providing an image that is easy to read. Text/Photo Select this setting when copying originals containing both text and images. Photo Select this setting to produce better reproductions of halftone original images (photographs, etc.) that cannot be reproduced with the usual settings. Dot Matrix Original Select this setting when copying originals containing only text that appears faint (such as that written with a pencil). The copied text is reproduced so that it is darker, making it easier to read. 3 Basic copy operations 3-60 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 3.9.2 To select an original type setting 1 Position the original to be copied. – For details on positioning the original, refer to "Feeding the original" on page 3-9. 2 In the Basic screen, touch [Original Type]. The Original Type screen appears. 3 Touch the button for the quality setting most appropriate for the loaded original. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 3-61 Basic copy operations 3 3.10 Selecting the density settings Specify the copy density and background density. Adjust to the best density according to the status of the originals. The following two density adjustments are available. The following procedures describe how to specify the density settings. Function Description Density The print image density can be adjusted to one of nine levels. Each time [Lighter] or [Darker] is touched, the density is lightened or darkened by one level. Touch [Standard] to select the middle setting of the nine levels. Touch [Auto] to automatically adjust the density level according to the original being copied. Background Removal The density of the background color of the original can be adjusted to one of nine levels. Each time [Light] or [Dark] is touched, the background density is lightened or darkened by one level. Touch [Standard] to select the middle setting of the nine levels. 3 Basic copy operations 3-62 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 3.10.1 Adjusting the print density (Density settings) 1 In the Basic screen, touch [Density/Background]. The Density/Background Removal screen appears. 2 Select the desired Density setting. – Each time [Light] or [Dark] is touched, the density is lightened or darkened by one level. – To select the center setting (default setting), touch [Standard]. – Touch [Auto] to automatically adjust the density level according to the original being copied. – To cancel the setting and select the default, press the [Reset] key. 3 Touch [OK]. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 3-63 Basic copy operations 3 3.10.2 Adjusting the background density (Background removal settings) 1 In the Basic screen, touch [Density/Background]. The Density/Background Removal screen appears. 2 Select the desired Background Removal setting. – Each time [Light] or [Dark] is touched, the density is lightened or darkened by one level. – To select the middle setting of the nine levels (default setting), touch [Standard]. – To cancel the setting and select the default, press the [Reset] key. 3 Touch [OK]. 3 Basic copy operations 3-64 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 3.11 Selecting finishing settings Various settings can be selected for sorting and finishing copies fed into the copy output tray. 2 Note As the factory default, "Group" is selected. ! Detail If no finisher is installed and all of the following conditions are met, printed copies are fed out and sorted in an alternating crisscross pattern. A4 - or B5-size paper is used. Paper of the same size and type is loaded with the w orientation in one paper tray and with the v orientation in another tray. The "Auto" Paper setting is selected. The "Auto" Paper setting is not selected when the "Mixed Original" setting is selected. 2 Note From Administrator Settings mode, the machine can be set so that copies are fed out without being shifted when the finisher is installed. As a factory default, the machine is set to shift the copies that are fed out. For details on specifying settings for shifting copies that are fed out when the finisher is installed, refer to "System Settings" on page 12-17. For details on "Fold/Bind", refer to "Selecting a folding setting" on page 3-77. When the post inserter is installed with the finisher, the finisher can be operated manually. For details, refer to "Manually using the finisher" on page 3-86. Available Finishing Settings Setting Description Sort Select this setting to separate each set of a multi-page original. Group Select this setting to separate the copies of each page in a multi-page original. 1 1 1 4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1 1 1 1 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 3-65 Basic copy operations 3 The following procedures describe how to select Finishing settings. 2 Reminder The Staple settings are available only if the optional finisher is installed. The Punch settings are available only if the punch kit or Z folding unit is installed with the optional finisher. Offset If no finisher is installed If the sorting conditions are met, printed copies are fed out and sorted in an alternating crisscross pattern. If a finisher is installed The copies are fed out and stacked on top of each other with each set shifted to separate it. Face Up The copies are output with their front sides facing up. Fold/Bind Select this setting to fold copies. The copies can also be bound with staples at the same time. The "Fold/Bind" setting can be used if the optional Finisher FS-610 is installed. Output Tray The copies are output to the specified paper tray. Staple Select one of these settings to bind the copies with a staple in the corner or with two staples. Punch Holes are punched (2 or 4 holes) in the copies for filing them. Setting Description 1 1 1 4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1 1 1 1 1 3 Basic copy operations 3-66 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 3.11.1 Separating copies by sets ("Sort" setting) 0 As the factory default, "Group" is selected. 0 If offset sorting is selected while no finisher is installed, printed copies will be fed out and sorted in an alternating w and v pattern if the following conditions are met. A4 - or B5-size paper is used. Paper of the same size and type is loaded with the w orientation in one paper tray and with the v orientation in another tray. The "Auto" Paper setting is selected. The "Auto" Paper setting is not selected when the "Mixed Original" setting is selected. 0 If offset sorting is selected while a finisher is installed, printed copies are fed out and stacked on top of each other with each set shifted to separate it. 1 In the Basic screen, touch [Finishing]. The Finishing screen appears. 2 Touch [Sort]. – To separate each set of copies, touch [Yes] under "Offset". 3 Touch [OK]. The Basic screen appears again. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 3-67 Basic copy operations 3 3.11.2 Separating copies by pages ("Group" Setting) 0 As the factory default, "Group" is selected. 0 If offset sorting is selected while no finisher is installed, printed copies will be fed out and sorted in an alternating w and v pattern if the following conditions are met. A4- or B5-size paper is used. Paper of the same size and type is loaded with the w orientation in one paper tray and with the v orientation in another tray. The "Auto" Paper setting is selected. The "Auto" Paper setting is not selected when the "Mixed Original" setting is selected. 0 If offset sorting is selected while a finisher is installed, printed copies are fed out and stacked on top of each other with each set shifted to separate it. 1 In the Basic screen, touch [Finishing]. The Finishing screen appears. 2 Touch [Group]. – To separate each set of pages, touch [Yes] under "Offset". – When "Offset" is selected, the following Finishing settings are not available. Face Up Staple 3 Touch [OK]. The Basic screen appears again. 3 Basic copy operations 3-68 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 3.11.3 Selecting the Output Tray 0 The output tray can be selected only if the optional finisher is installed. 1 In the Basic screen, touch [Finishing]. – When "Offset" is selected, the following Finishing settings are not available. Face Up Staple The Finishing screen appears. 2 Touch [Output tray]. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 3-69 Basic copy operations 3 3 Select the output tray where copies are to be fed, and then touch [OK]. The Basic screen appears again. 3.11.4 Outputting copies with their front sides facing up (Face up settings) The copies are output with their front sides facing up. ! Detail This can be specified for both sort output and group output. 1 In the Basic screen, touch [Finishing]. The Finishing screen appears. 3 Basic copy operations 3-70 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 2 Touch [Face Up]. – To cancel the settings, touch [Face Up] again. – As the factory default, "OFF" is selected. The copies are output with their back sides facing up. – The following settings cannot be used together with the "Face Up" setting. Booklet Double-sided copying Center Staple & Fold Half-Fold – When "Face Up" is selected, the following Finishing settings are not available. Offset Staple Punch Tri-Fold Z-Fold 3 Touch [OK]. The Basic screen appears again. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 3-71 Basic copy operations 3 3.11.5 Stapling copies (Staple settings) Copies can be fed out stapled either in the corner or at two places. ! Detail In order for the copies to be stapled, all of the following conditions must be met. The paper width must be between 182 mm and 314 mm. The paper length must be between 139 mm and 458 mm. If the "Mixed Original" setting is selected, all copies must have the same paper width. 2 Reminder Copies can be fed out stapled either in the corner or at two places only when the finisher is installed. Copies can be fed out stapled either in the corner or at two places. Finisher FS-524/FS-525 *1 Foolscap includes the following 4 types: 8-1/8 e 13-1/4 w, 8-1/4 e 13 w, 8-1/2 e 13 w, 8 e 13 w, one of which can be selected. For details, contact the service representative. *2 The value is for when using paper of which the length is between 150 mm and 417 mm. The value will be 50 sets if the paper length is not within this range. *3 This is the loading capacity when Finisher FS-525 has been installed Maximum number of bound pages: Finisher FS-524:50 sheets (60 g/m2 to 90 g/m2) Finisher FS-525:100 sheets (60 g/m2 to 80 g/m2) Finisher FS-610 *1 Foolscap includes the following 4 types: 8-1/8 e 13-1/4 w, 8-1/4 e 13 w, 8-1/2 e 13 w, 8 e 13 w, one of which can be selected. For details, contact the service representative. *2 The value is for when using paper of which the length is 417 mm or less. The value will be 50 sets if the length exceeds 418 mm. Maximum number of bound pages: 50 sheets (60 g/m2 to 80 g/m2) Tray Paper weight Paper size Loading capacity Main finishing tray (Tray 2) FS-524: 60 g/m2 to 90 g/m2 FS-525: 60 g/m2 to 80 g/m2 A3 w to A5 v, 11 e 17 w to 5-1/2 e 8-1/2 v, Foolscap*1, 8K w, 16K w/v, wide paper (A3W w to A5W v, 11 e 17W w to 5-1/2 e 8-1/2W v) 2 sheets to 9 sheets binding: 100 sets*2 10 sheets to 20 sheets binding: 50 sets 21 sheets to 30 sheets binding: 30 sets 31 sheets to 40 sheets binding: 25 sets 41 sheets to 50 sheets binding: 20 sets 51 sheets to 60 sheets binding: 15 sets*3 61 sheets to 100 sheets binding: 10 sets*3 Tray Paper Weight Paper Size Loading Capacity Main finishing tray (Tray 2) 60 g/m2 to 80 g/m2 A3 w to A5 v, 11 e 17 w to 5-1/2 e 8-1/2 v, Foolscap*1, 8K w, 16K w/v, wide paper (A3W w to A5W v, 11 e 17W w to 5-1/2 e 8-1/2W v) 2 sheets to 9 sheets binding: 100 sets*2 10 sheets to 20 sheets binding: 50 sets 21 sheets to 30 sheets binding: 30 sets 31 sheets to 40 sheets binding: 25 sets 41 sheets to 50 sheets binding: 20 sets 3 Basic copy operations 3-72 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 1 In the Basic screen, touch [Finishing]. The Finishing screen appears. 2 Under "Staple", touch either [Corner] or [2 Position]. – To cancel the Staple setting, touch [None]. – When a Staple setting is selected, the "Sort" setting is automatically selected. – The following settings cannot be used together with a Staple setting. Offset Face Up bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 3-73 Basic copy operations 3 3 Touch [Position Setting]. – Select the stapling position, and then touch [OK]. – When the "2 Position" Staple setting is selected. – When the "Corner" Staple setting is selected. 3 Basic copy operations 3-74 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) – Touch [Auto] to automatically determine the stapling position according to the orientation of the loaded original. If the original length is 314 mm or less, the long side of the paper is stapled. If the original length is more than 314 mm, the short side of the paper is stapled. – If "Auto" is selected for the stapling position, load the original with the top toward the back of the machine. If the original is loaded in any other orientation, the stapling will not be correctly positioned. – If "Auto" is selected, the stapling position is set at the top or at the left. – To cancel the setting and select the default, press the [Reset] key. 4 If desired, touch [Original Direction], and then select the setting appropriate for the original. – For details on specifying the original orientation, refer to "Selecting the original orientation ("Original Direction" settings)" on page 3-26. 5 Touch [OK]. The Basic screen appears again. 3.11.6 Punching holes in copies (Punch settings) ! Detail In order to be punch holes in the copies, all of the following conditions must be met. The paper width must be between 182 mm and 297 mm. The paper length must be between 182 mm and 432 mm. If a Punch setting is to be selected, select the orientation in which the original is positioned. If an Original Direction setting is not selected, holes may not be punched in the copies as desired. For details on specifying the original orientation, refer to "Selecting the original orientation ("Original Direction" settings)" on page 3-26. 2 Note The Punch settings are available only if the punch kit or Z folding unit is installed with the optional finisher. * Foolscap includes the following 4 types: 8-1/8 e 13-1/4 w, 8-1/4 e 13 w, 8-1/2 e 13 w, 8 e 13 w, one of which can be selected. For details, contact the service representative. Tray Paper Weight Paper Size Main finishing tray (Tray 2) Plain paper (60 g/m2 to 90 g/m2), thick paper (91 g/m2 to 128 g/m2) 2-Hole: A3 w to A5 w/v, 11 e 17 w to 5-1/2 e 8-1/2 w/v, Foolscap*, 8K w, 16K w/v 4-Hole: A3 w, B4 w, A4 v, B5 v, 11 e 17 w, 8-1/2 e 11 w, 8K w, 16K v bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 3-75 Basic copy operations 3 1 In the Basic screen, touch [Finishing]. The Finishing screen appears. 2 Under "Punch", touch [2-Hole] or [4-Hole]. – To cancel the Punch setting, touch [None]. – A Punch setting cannot be used together with the "Face Up" setting. 3 Touch [Position Setting]. 3 Basic copy operations 3-76 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) – Select the punched hole position, and then touch [OK]. – Touch [Auto] to automatically determine the position of the punched holes according to the orientation of the loaded original. If the original length is 297 mm or less, the holes are punched along the long side of the paper. If the original length is more than 297 mm, the holes are punched along the short side of the paper. – If "Auto" is selected for the stapling position, load the original with the top toward the back of the machine. If the original is loaded in any other orientation, the stapling will not be correctly positioned. – If "Auto" is selected, the punched hole position is set at the top or at the left. – To cancel the setting and select the default, press the [Reset] key. 4 If desired, touch [Original Direction], and then select the setting appropriate for the original. – For details on specifying the original orientation, refer to "Selecting the original orientation ("Original Direction" settings)" on page 3-26. 5 Touch [OK]. The Basic screen appears again. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 3-77 Basic copy operations 3 3.12 Selecting a folding setting By installing optional equipments, copies can be folded, or folded and bound with staples at the same time, and then fed out. Available settings differ depending on the optional equipments installed. 2 Note Copies can be folded in half or in three or bound at the center only if Finisher FS-610 is installed. Z-folding is available when the Z folding unit is installed with the finisher. For details, refer to "Z-Folding and outputting papers ("Z-Fold" setting)" on page 3-83. Setting Description Compatible models Half-Fold Select this setting to fold copies in half before feeding them out. (Refer to page 3-78.) FS-610 Center Staple & Fold Select this setting to staple copies at two places along the center, then fold the copies in half before feeding them out. (Refer to page 3-79.) FS-610 Tri-Fold Select this setting to fold copies in three before feeding them out. (Refer to page 3-81.) FS-610 Z-Fold Select this setting to fold copies in half along the center, and additionally mountain-fold one of the halves before feeding them out. FS-524 FS-525 FS-610 3 Basic copy operations 3-78 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 3.12.1 Folding copies in half ("Half-Fold" setting) Finisher FS-610 1 In the Basic screen, touch [Finishing]. The Finishing screen appears. 2 Touch [Fold/Bind]. The Fold/Bind screen appears. Paper weight Paper size Plain paper (60 g/m2 to 90 g/m2) Standard sizes: A3 w, B4 w, A4 w, 11 e 17 w, 8-1/2 e 14 w, 8-1/2 e 11 w, 8K w, wide paper (A3W w, B4W w, A4Ww, 11 e 17W w,8-1/2 e 11W w) Custom sizes: 210 mm e 279 mm to 314 mm e 458 mm Maximum number of folded sheets Paper capacity 3 sheets When folding 3 sheets (80 g/m2): 25 sets or less (with a paper length of 299 mm or less) 33 sets or less (others) bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 3-79 Basic copy operations 3 3 Touch [Half-Fold]. – As the factory default, the "Booklet" function is automatically specified when "Half-Fold" is selected. – To cancel the "Half-Fold" setting, touch [No] or the button for a different setting. 4 Touch [OK], and then touch [OK] again. The Basic Screen appears again. 3.12.2 Binding copies at the center ("Center Staple & Fold" setting) Finisher FS-610 Maximum number of sheets that can be bound in the center - 20 or more sheets (60 - 80 g/m2) or 19 + 1 sheets (200 g/m2) Capacity - 20 copies or less - 15 copies or less (paper length: 299 mm or less) 1 In the Basic screen, touch [Finishing]. Paper weight Paper size Maximum number of bound sheets 60 g/m2 to 80 g/m2 Standard sizes: A3 w, B4 w, A4 w, 11 e 17 w, 8-1/2 e 14 w, 8-1/2 e 11 w, 8K w, wide paper (A3W w, B4W w, A4W w, 11 e 17W w, 8-1/2 e 11W w) Custom sizes: 210 mm e 279 mm to 314 mm e 458 mm 20 sheets 81 g/m2 to 90 g/m2 16 sheets 3 Basic copy operations 3-80 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) The Finishing screen appears. 2 Touch [Fold/Bind]. The Fold/Bind screen appears. 3 Touch [Center Staple & Fold]. – If a cover sheet is added with the "Cover Sheet" function, the cover sheet (200 g/m2) can be stapled. – When the "Center Staple & Fold" setting is selected, the following factory default settings are automatically selected. 1-Sided > 2-Sided Booklet Recommended zoom ratio (64.7%) when the "Booklet" function is selected – When the "Center Staple & Fold" setting is selected, the following Finishing settings are not available. Group Offset Staple Punch Face Up – To cancel the "Center Staple & Fold" setting, touch [No] or the button for a different setting. 4 Touch [OK], and then touch [OK] again. The Basic screen appears again. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 3-81 Basic copy operations 3 3.12.3 To fold copies in three ("Tri-Fold" setting) Finisher FS-610 ! Detail When copies are to be folded in three, settings can be specified to select whether the printed side is on the inside or the outside. For details on selecting the setting, refer to "Copier Settings" on page 12-21. 1 In the Basic screen, touch [Finishing]. The Finishing screen appears. 2 Touch [Fold/Bind]. The Fold/Bind screen appears. Paper weight Paper size Maximum number of tri-folded sheets 60 g/m2 to 80 g/m2 A4 w, 8-1/2 e 11 w, 16K w 3 sheets 81 g/m2 to 90 g/m2 1 sheet Number of folded sheets Maximum number of sets 1 sheet 50 sets or less 3 Basic copy operations 3-82 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 3 Touch [Tri-Fold]. – When the "Tri-Fold" setting is selected, the following Finishing settings are not available. Group Offset Staple Punch Face Up – To cancel the "Tri-Fold" setting, touch [No] or the button for a different setting. 4 Touch [OK], and then touch [OK] again. The Basic screen appears again. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 3-83 Basic copy operations 3 3.12.4 Z-Folding and outputting papers ("Z-Fold" setting) Copies can be Z-folded and output. In addition, originals of mixed sizes can be Z-folded and output in the same specified paper size. ! Detail The Z-folding function is not available in the following cases. When the original size and output paper size are the same. When a paper size on which a part of the original image will be lost is selected. 2 Note Punching or stapling can be carried out with Z-folding before feeding the copies out. ! Detail For details on setting the mixed (size) originals, refer to "Copying originals of mixed sizes ("Mixed Original" setting)" on page 3-21. Finisher FS-524/FS-525/FS-610 and Z folding unit * Can be specified when the output paper size is A3 w, 11 e 17, 8-1/2 e 14 w, 8K w. 2 Note Z-folding multiple overlapped papers as one unit is not possible. When the finished size is A4 Item Description Paper weight 50 g/m2 to 90 g/m2 Paper size A3 w, B4 w, 11 e 17 w, 8-1/2 e 14 w, 8K w Z-folded & stapled copies* 5 sheets Paper capacity 30 sheets or less 3 Basic copy operations 3-84 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) ! Detail When loading the originals into ADF, load them in the orientation where the side to be folded is on the right. When placing the original on the original glass, place it in the orientation where the side to be folded is on the left. 1 In the Basic screen, touch [Finishing]. The Finishing screen appears. 2 Touch [Fold/Bind]. The Fold/Bind screen appears. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 3-85 Basic copy operations 3 3 Touch [Z-Fold]. – To cancel the "Z-Fold" setting, touch [Z-Fold] or the button for a different setting. 4 Touch [OK], and then touch [OK] again. 3 Basic copy operations 3-86 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 3.13 Manually using the finisher If the post inserter is installed onto the finisher, the finisher can be operated manually by using the control panel of the post inserter. The following Finishing settings are available with each of the option configurations. Finisher FS-524/FS-525 and post inserter "Corner" Staple, "2 Position" Staple Finisher FS-610 and post inserter - "Corner" Staple, "2 Position" Staple - Center Staple & Fold - Tri-Fold Finisher FS-524/FS-525, post inserter and punch kit - "Corner" Staple, "2 Position" Staple - Punch settings Finisher FS-610, post inserter and punch kit - "Corner" Staple, "2 Position" Staple - Center Staple & Fold - Tri-Fold - Punch settings 2 Reminder Only load paper into the lower tray. Do not use the upper tray. Corner Staple 2 Position Staple Center Staple & Fold Tri-Fold Punch Paper weight Paper size Number of sheets Output tray "Corner" Staple, "2 Position" Staple Plain paper (60 g/m2 to 90 g/m2) Standard sizes: A3 w to A5 v, 11 e 17 w to 5-1/2 e 8-1/2 v, Foolscap*1, 8K w, 16K w/v, wide paper (A3W w to A5W v, 11 e 17W w to 5-1/2 e 8-1/2W v) Custom sizes: 182 mm e 139 mm to 314 mm e 458 mm Finisher FS-524 50 sheets (60 g/m2 to 90 g/m2) Main finishing tray (Tray 2) Finisher FS-525 100 sheets (60 g/m2 to 80 g/m2) Finisher FS-610 50 sheets (60 g/m2 to 80 g/m2) 16 sheets (81 g/m2 to 90 g/m2) Punch settings Plain paper (60 g/m2 to 90 g/m2) Thick paper (91 g/m2 to 128 g/m2) 2 holes: A3 w to A5 w/v, 11 e 17 w to 5-1/2 e 8-1/2 w/v, Foolscap*1, 8K w, 16K w/v 4 holes: A3 w, B4 w, A4 v, B5 v, 11 e 17 w to 8-1/2 e 11 w, 8K w, 16K v 200 sheets Main finishing tray (Tray 2) bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 3-87 Basic copy operations 3 *1 Foolscap includes the following 4 types: 8-1/8 e 13-1/4 w, 8-1/4 e 13 w, 8-1/2 e 13 w, 8 e 13 w, one of which can be selected. For details, contact the service representative. *2 Can be used only with Finisher FS-610. ! Detail When manually performing the hole-punching operation from the post inserter control panel, only two holes can be punched. Names of control panel parts Center Staple & Fold*2 Plain paper (60 g/m2 to 80 g/m2) Standard sizes: A3 w, B4 w, A4 w, 11 e 17 w, 8-1/2 e 14 w, 8-1/2 e 11 w, 8K w, wide paper (A3W w, B4W w, A4W w, 11 e 17W w, 8-1/2 e 11W w) Custom sizes: 210 mm e 279 mm to 314 mm e 458 mm 20 sheets (60 g/m2 to 80 g/m2) 16 sheets (81 g/m2 to 90 g/m2) Booklet tray Tri-Fold*2 Plain paper (60 g/m2 to 90 g/m2) A4 w, 8-1/2 e 11 w, 16K w 3 sheets (60 g/m2 to 80 g/m2) 1 sheet (81 g/m2 to 90 g/m2) Booklet tray Paper weight Paper size Number of sheets Output tray [Punch] key [Start/stop] key Tri-Fold 2 Position Staple Corner Staple Center Staple & Fold [Finishing] key 3 Basic copy operations 3-88 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) Finishing 1 Load the paper into the lower tray of the post inserter. – If the "Corner" or "2 Position" Staple settings are to be used, load the paper face up – If a Punch setting is to be used, load the paper face up. – If the paper is to be stapled and folded at the center, load the paper so that the side that is to be the front when bound is face up. – If the paper is to be folded in three, load the paper so that the side that is to be the outside when folded in three is face up. – The loaded paper will be finished into one set. 2 Slide the paper guides to fit the size of the paper. 3 Press the [Finishing] key or [Punch] key, and then select the desired Finishing settings. – When the "Corner" or "2 Position" Staple settings, or the "Center Staple & Fold" or "Tri-Fold" setting is selected, press the [Finishing] key, and the indicator lights up. When a Punch setting is selected, press the [Punch] key, and the indicator lights up. – A Punch can be selected at the same time as the "Corner" or "2 Position" Staple setting. If the settings are selected at the same time, the indicator lights up when the [Finishing] key is pressed. When only a Punch setting is selected, all indicators except the one on the [Punch] key go off. 4 Press the [Start/Stop] key. – Press the [Start/Stop] key during an operation to stop the operation. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 3-89 Basic copy operations 3 3.14 Selecting not to rotate the image Copies can be printed with the image not rotated to fit the orientation of the loaded paper. 2 Note Depending on the paper size and zoom ratio, some parts of the image may be lost. % In the Basic screen, touch [Auto Rotate OFF]. Original Auto Rotate OFF Auto Rotate 3 Basic copy operations 3-90 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 3.15 Scanning the next original to be copied while a copy job is being printed (next job reservation) The settings for the next copy job can be specified and the original can be scanned while a copy job is being printed so that it can be printed once the current copy job is finished. 0 Up to 51 copy jobs, including the current copy job, can be reserved. 0 A copy job can be reserved after scanning of the loaded original is finished. The next job cannot be reserved while an original is being scanned. 0 To delete a reserved copy job, touch [Job List] in the left panel, and then touch [Job Details]. For details, refer to "Deleting a job" on page 11-8. 1 When the message "Ready to accept another job." appears while the current job is being printed, an original can be loaded, and copy settings can be specified for the next copy job. – For details on positioning the original, refer to "Feeding the original" on page 3-9. – If the "Copy Operating Screen" parameter in Utility mode is set to "Yes", touch [Next Copy Job] while printing to display the Basic screen. – For details on specifying the screen that appears while printing, refer to "Custom Display Settings" on page 12-19. 2 Press the [Start] key. 3 After the current copy job is finished, the next copy job begins. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 3-91 Basic copy operations 3 3.16 Temporarily stopping scanning/printing Follow the procedure described below to temporarily stop scanning the original and stop the printing operation. 0 If an original is being scanned for a job, pressing the [Stop] key stops scanning. 0 For details on deleting a temporarily stopped job, refer to "Deleting a paused job" on page 3-92. 1 Press the [Stop] key while an original is being scanned or a job is being printed. Scanning/printing stops. The Stopped Jobs screen appears. 2 To continue all stopped jobs, press the [Start] key. 3 Basic copy operations 3-92 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 3.17 Deleting a paused job Follow the procedure described below to delete a temporarily stopped job. 0 For details on temporarily stopping a job being scanned or printed, refer to "Temporarily stopping scanning/printing" on page 3-91. 0 Select only one job at a time to be deleted. 0 To continue a temporarily stopped job, press the [Start] key. 1 Press the [Stop] key while an original is being scanned or a job is being printed. Scanning/printing stops. The Stopped Jobs screen appears. 2 Select the job to be deleted, and then touch [Delete]. The selected job is deleted. 4 Additional copy operations bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 4-3 Additional copy operations 4 4 Additional copy operations 4.1 Checking the copy settings (Check Job) From the Check Job Details screens, the current copy settings can be checked and changed if desired. 4.1.1 To check the settings 1 Touch [Check Job] in the left panel, and then touch [Check Details]. The Check Job Settings screen appears. 4 Additional copy operations 4-4 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 4-5 Additional copy operations 4 2 After checking the settings, touch [Close]. The Basic screen appears again. ! Detail There are seven Check Job Settings screens. The number of the currently displayed screen appears to the right of the screen title. To display the previous screen, touch [ Back]. To display the next screen, touch [Forward ]. If the setting for a function has been changed from the default, the button for that function appears with a colored box around it. 4.1.2 To change the settings 1 Touch [Check Job] in the left panel, and then touch [Check Details]. 2 Touch [ Back] or [Forward ] until the button for the function to be changed is displayed. 3 Touch the button for the function whose setting is to be changed. The screen for specifying the setting appears. 4 Follow the appropriate procedure to change the setting. 4 Additional copy operations 4-6 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 4.2 Printing a proof to check the settings (Proof Copy) Before printing a large number of copies, a single proof copy can first be printed so that it can be checked. This prevents copy errors from occurring. 1 Position the original to be copied. – For details on positioning the original, refer to "Feeding the original" on page 3-9. 2 Select the desired copy settings. – When printing a proof copy, specify multiple copies. 3 Press the [Proof Copy] key. – If an optional hard disk is not installed, go to step 6. – If an optional hard disk is not installed, the Select Proof Copy Method screen does not appear. The Select Proof Copy Method screen appears. 4 Touch [Print] for Mode, and then select the original direction. – When the original is placed on the original glass: – When the original is loaded into the ADF: bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 4-7 Additional copy operations 4 5 Press the [Start] key. 6 If the original was placed on the original glass, touch [Finish], and then press the [Start] key. – If the original was loaded into the ADF, printing of the proof copy begins without the screen appearing confirming that scanning of the original is finished. A single proof copy is printed. 7 Check the proof copy. – If the proof copy was printed as desired, continue with step 8. – To change the copy settings, continue with step 6. 8 Touch [Change Setting] in the screen that appeared when the proof copy was printed. – To stop copying while the proof copy screen is displayed, press the [Reset] key or the [C] (clear) key. Otherwise, select the proof copy job to be stopped from the list of jobs in the left panel, and then touch [Delete]. In the screen that appears, requesting confirmation to delete the job, touch [Yes], and then touch [OK]. – If no operation is performed within the specified length of time while this screen is displayed, the copy job being proofed is registered as a stored job and the Basic screen appears again. Jobs are registered as stored jobs under the following conditions. When the automatic system reset operation is performed After one minute (when "System Auto Reset" is set to "OFF") For details on stored jobs, refer to page 11-14. If "System Auto Reset" is set to "OFF", the job is stored if no operation is performed for 1 minute. – For details on the automatic system reset operation, refer to "Automatically conserving energy (Sleep mode)" on page 2-35. – The number under "Number of Sets" in the screen that appeared when a proof copy is printed indicates the number of sets printed as proof copies/total Number of Sets specified. – The number under "Total # of Pages Printed" in the screen that appeared when a proof copy is printed indicates the number of copies printed as proof copies/the number of pages printed in the proof copy. 4 Additional copy operations 4-8 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 9 In the screen allowing you to change the settings, change the copy settings as desired, and then touch [OK]. To cancel changes to the settings, touch [Cancel]. – If the copy settings cannot be changed, stop printing the proof copy. Next, press the [Reset] key to cancel the copy settings, and then specify the desired settings. – To stop copying while the screen for changing the settings is displayed, select the proof copy job to be stopped from the list of jobs in the left panel, and then touch [Delete]. In the screen that appears, requesting confirmation to delete the copy program, touch [Yes], and then touch [OK]. – To cancel changes to the settings in the screen for changing the settings, press the [Reset] key while the screen for changing the settings is displayed to reset the settings to those specified in step 2. – The number beside "Copies" in the screen for changing the settings is the number of copies that will be printed when [Finish] is touched. 10 Press the [Proof Copy] key to print another proof copy. – To stop the proof copy while scanning or printing, perform the operation described in "Temporarily stopping scanning/printing" on page 3-91. 11 Touch [Print]. The remaining copies are queued as a copy job. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 4-9 Additional copy operations 4 4.3 Checking the print image as a preview image (Advanced Preview) Print image can be checked as a preview image before printing. This prevents print errors from occurring. If an optional hard disk is not installed, print image cannot be checked with the Preview screen displayed. 4.3.1 Preview screen In the Preview screen, originals that have been scanned in a wrong direction can be rotated and settings specified before scanning can be changed. Screen Layout 3 6 1 2 4 7 5 8 No. Item Name Description 1 [Prev. Page]/[Next Page] Moves to the previous or next page from the current page. 2 - The preview image appears. Press [View Finishing] to apply the finishing status to the preview image. 3 Scroll bar If the preview image is enlarged, use the scroll bar to scroll up or down, or to the left or right of the image. 4 Zoom Enlarges or reduces the preview image. For details, refer to "Zoom" on page 4-10. 5 Page Rotation Rotates the preview image by 180 degrees. For details, refer to "Page Rotation" on page 4-10. 6 [View Finishing] Applies the finishing state to the preview image. Touching [View Finishing] again cancels the finishing preview. For details, refer to "View Finishing" on page 4-11. 7 [Change Setting] Settings for the scanned originals can be changed. For details, refer to "Change Setting" on page 4-12. 8 [View Status]/[View Pages] Switches the Preview screen between the status view and the page view. Images can be rotated and settings can be changed in [View Pages]. Loading of the image is finished in [View Status]. 4 Additional copy operations 4-10 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) Zoom In Zoom, the preview image can be enlarged to check the original in detail. By touching [+] or [-], the zoom ratio can be changed between the full size or at a size of 2, 4 or 8 times the normal size. Use the scroll bars in the right end and bottom end of the image to view the desired section of the image. ! Detail If the display size is changed, the finishing status cannot be viewed. Page Rotation In Page Rotation, a preview image can be rotated by 180 degrees to correct wrong original direction. % Touch [Rotate current page] to rotate the currently displayed page by 180 degrees. % Touch [Select page(s) to rotate] to display the list of scanned pages. Up to 8 scanned pages can be displayed, and touching the arrows switches between the pages. % Touch [Select Odd] to rotate the odd pages among the scanned pages. % Touch [Select Even] to rotate the even pages among the scanned pages. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 4-11 Additional copy operations 4 % Touch [Select All ]to rotate all the scanned pages. Directly selecting a scanned page rotates the selected page. View Finishing % Touch [View Finishing] to display the finishing settings in the preview image with icons and texts, and finishing status can be checked. – Press [View Finishing] again to cancel the finishing view of the preview image. 4 Additional copy operations 4-12 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) Change Setting In Change Setting, settings for the original to be scanned next can be changed. 2 Note For details on the setting method, refer to the appropriate description section. Touching [Preview] in the left pane displays the preview image. The settings displayed in the preview image are limited to those apply to all original pages. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 4-13 Additional copy operations 4 4.3.2 Checking the advanced preview In Preview, finishing image of copies can be checked before printing. 1 Place the original on the original glass, or load the original into the ADF. 2 Select the desired copy settings. 3 Press the [Proof Copy] key. The Select Proof Copy Method screen appears. 4 Touch [Preview on Screen] for Mode, and then select the original direction. – When the original is placed on the original glass: – When the original is loaded into the ADF: 5 Press the [Start] key. Scanning of the original starts, and the Preview screen (View Status) appears. 4 Additional copy operations 4-14 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 6 Check the preview image. – To change the settings, touch [View Pages]. Go to step 7. – To start printing, press the [Start] key. – To scan more originals, touch [Finish], place (or load) the originals, and then press the [Start] key. – Press the [Stop] key to cancel the preview. 7 Change the settings, and then touch [View Status]. – For details on the View Pages screen, refer to "Preview screen" on page 4-9. 8 Press the [Start] key. – Start printing. ! Detail When originals are scanned using the Program Jobs function, the finishing image can be previewed after all the originals are scanned and [Finish] is touched. For details on the Program Jobs function, refer to "Scanning originals with different settings and printing copies all together ("Program Jobs" function)" on page 8-21. When originals are scanned with the insert pages specified, the finishing image can be previewed both after the originals are scanned first and after the insert pages are scanned. For details on the insert pages, refer to "Inserting copies of a different original for a specified page ("Insert Image" function)" on page 8-14. When the Book Copy function or Booklet function is specified, the finishing status cannot be checked. Print and check the finishing. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 4-15 Additional copy operations 4 4.4 Interrupting a copy job (Interrupt mode) The current jobs can be temporarily interrupted so an original can be copied with different copy settings. This is convenient for quickly making a copy. ! Detail For details on making a copy after printing of the current job is finished, refer to "Increasing printing priority" on page 11-17. 1 Position the original to be copied. – For details on loading the original, refer to "Loading the original into the ADF" on page 3-9. 2 Press the [Interrupt] key. – If a job is being printed, the message "The job is stopping." appears. The indicator on the [Interrupt] key lights up in green and printing of the current job stops. ? What settings are selected when the [Interrupt] key is pressed? % When the [Interrupt] key is pressed, all functions and settings are reset to their defaults. ? Why is the [Interrupt] key not available? % The [Interrupt] key cannot be pressed while an original is being scanned. 3 Select the desired copy settings. 4 Press the [Start] key. Printing for the interrupting job begins. 5 After the interrupting job has finished printing, press the [Interrupt] key. The indicator on the [Interrupt] key goes off. The copy settings return to those specified before printing was interrupted. 2 Note If the interrupting job is cancelled, printing for the interrupted job automatically restarts. 4 Additional copy operations 4-16 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 4.5 Registering copy programs (Mode Memory) Frequently used copy settings can be stored together as a program to easily be recalled. A maximum of 30 programs can be registered. A name of up to 16 characters can be specified for the registered copy programs. 2 Note If the optional hard disk is installed, a maximum of 100 copy programs can be registered. 1 Using the touch panel and control panel keys, specify the copy settings to be registered in the copy program. ? Can the current settings be checked? % To check the currently specified copy settings, touch [Check Job] in the left panel, and then touch [Job Details]. For details, refer to "Checking the copy settings (Check Job)" on page 4-3. 2 Press the [Mode Memory] key. The Recall Copy Program screen appears. 3 From the copy program buttons that appear in the screen, touch the button where you wish to store the copy settings, and then touch [Register Program]. – There are three Recall Copy Program screens. Touch and to display a different screen. – If 30 copy programs have been registered, delete an unnecessary copy program. For details on deleting copy programs, refer to "Deleting a copy program" on page 4-19. The Register Copy Program screen appears. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 4-17 Additional copy operations 4 4 Use the control panel keypad and the keyboard that appears in the touch panel to type in the name of the copy program. – The program name can contain a maximum of 16 characters. – For details on typing in text, refer to "Entering text" on page 15-3. 5 After typing in the name, touch [OK]. – The copy program can be given the same name as a copy program that has already been registered. – To stop specifying the name of the copy program, touch [Cancel]. 4 Additional copy operations 4-18 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) The Recall Copy Program screen appears again. The copy program is registered and a button with the entered copy program name appears. ? Can the copy program name be corrected? % To change the entered copy program name, touch the button whose name is to be changed, and then touch [Edit Name]. The Edit Name screen appears. Return to step 4 and repeat the procedure to change the copy program name. ? Can the specified settings for a copy program be checked? % To check the programmed copy settings, touch the button for the desired copy program, and then touch [Check Program Settings]. For details, refer to "Copying with programmed copy settings (Mode Memory)" on page 4-20. 6 Touch [OK] or [Cancel]. – To return to the Basic screen, press the [Mode Memory] key. ! Detail To stop registering the program, press the [Reset] key or the [Mode Memory] key. No matter which screen is displayed, the registration is cancelled. Otherwise, continue to touch [Cancel] until the Basic screen is displayed. The settings of a copy program cannot be changed. If the copy program that was selected has been locked, [Edit Name] and [Delete] do not appear. For details, refer to "System Settings" on page 12-17. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 4-19 Additional copy operations 4 4.5.1 Deleting a copy program 1 In the Recall Copy Program screen, touch the button for the copy program to be deleted. – If the copy program to be recalled is not displayed, touch and until the desired copy program is displayed. 2 Touch [Delete]. A message appears, requesting confirmation to delete the copy program. 3 Touch [Yes], and then touch [OK]. The Recall Copy Program screen appears again. The copy settings registered in the copy program are erased. 4 Additional copy operations 4-20 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 4.6 Copying with programmed copy settings (Mode Memory) Programmed copy settings can be recalled to be used again for copying. 1 Position the original to be copied. – For details on positioning the original, refer to "Feeding the original" on page 3-9. 2 Press the [Mode Memory] key. The Recall Copy Program screen appears. 3 Touch the button for the copy program registered with the copy settings to be recalled. – If the copy settings in the selected copy program are not to be checked, continue with step 8. – If the copy program to be recalled is not displayed, touch and until the desired copy program is displayed. 4 Press the [Check Program Settings] key. – The copy settings cannot be changed from the Check Job Settings screens. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 4-21 Additional copy operations 4 The Check Job Settings screen appears. There are four Check Job Settings screens. The number to the right of the screen title indicates the number of the currently displayed screen. To display the previous screen, touch [ Back]. To display the next screen, touch [Forward ]. 5 Check the copy settings registered with the selected copy program. 6 Touch [Close]. The Recall Copy Program screen appears again. 7 Again touch the button for the copy program registered with the copy settings to be recalled. – If [OK] is touched with no copy program selected, the Basic screen appears again without a copy program being recalled. 8 Touch [OK]. The programmed copy settings are recalled and the Basic screen appears again. 9 Press the [Start] key. Copying begins with the recalled copy settings. 2 Note To stop recalling a copy program, press the [Reset] key or the [Mode Memory] key or touch [Cancel]. 4 Additional copy operations 4-22 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 4.7 Displaying function descriptions (Help) Descriptions of the various functions and details of operations can be viewed. There are two methods for displaying the Help screens. - Main Help screens (from the Basic screen) - Help screens for settings (from screens other than the Basic screen) 4.7.1 Overview of help screens The following items are provided in the Help Menu screen. Help Menu screen (1st level) ! Detail The Help screens cannot be displayed when the following operations are being performed. While scanning, while printing a proof copy, during Enlarge Display mode, during Accessibility mode While the Help screens are displayed, the following keys are not available. [Start], [Stop], [C] (clear), [Interrupt], [Proof Copy], [Access], [Mode Memory], [Enlarge Display] Items in the Help Menu screen and other Help screens can be selected by touching the button or by pressing the key in the keypad for the number of the desired item. To display the next screen higher in the menu structure, touch [Close]. Touch [Exit] to exit the Help mode and return to the screen that was displayed before the [Help] key was pressed. Item Description [Function] Use to search for descriptions from a Help menu divided by the function types and names. [Search by Operation] Use to search for descriptions from a Help menu divided by the operations. [Function Map] Displays the Function Map screen, which contains a chart of the available functions and settings. [Other Functions] Check descriptions by selecting a Guidance menu grouped by useful function. [Name and Function of Parts] Displays the Help menu for the name and function of each part. Use to check the description of the main unit and its options. [Service/Admin. Information] Displays the name, extension number and e-mail address of the administrator. [Replace Consumables] Use to view the maintenance procedures for the machine. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 4-23 Additional copy operations 4 Help screen (2nd level) (Example: Function) ! Detail The items displayed in the Help menu for the name and function of each part differ depending on the options that are installed. Help screen (bottom level) (Example: Function % Copy % Density/Background % Density) Item Description [Copy], [Scan/Fax], [User Box], [Job List], [Print], [Customize], [Image Panel], [Web Browser] Displays the first Help screen for each description. 4 Additional copy operations 4-24 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) Help screen (bottom level) (Example: Search by Operation % Copying % Copying Special Documents) % Touch [Shortcut to Function] to set the selected function. ! Detail If you are viewing the Help screen of a different function from the one that is currently selected, [Shortcut to Function] cannot be selected. For example, if you are in the Fax/Scan mode, [Shortcut to Function] on the Help screen for the Copy mode, which is a different function from the Fax/Scan mode, cannot be selected. Function Map screen (Example: Copy) A chart of the available functions and settings are displayed in the function maps. % Select an item from the chart for the Help screen that you wish to view. ! Detail There are 12 Function Map screens for Copy mode. The top number indicates the number of the 12 screens that is currently displayed. To display the previous screen, touch . To display the next screen, touch . Press the key in the keypad for the number of the desired item in the Function Map screen. To display the Help screen for "Function" that contains the selected item, touch [Close] in the Help screen displayed by selecting an item in a Function Map screen. To quit the Help mode, press the [Help] key or touch [Exit]. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 4-25 Additional copy operations 4 4.7.2 Displaying main help screens As an example, the following procedures describe the Help screens that are displayed for copy operations by using "Function". 1 With the Basic screen displayed, press the [Help] key. The Help Menu screen appears. 2 Touch [Function] or press the [1] key in the keypad. The Help screen for "Function" appears. ? Is there more information about the buttons of the Help screens? % Refer to "Overview of help screens" on page 4-22. 4 Additional copy operations 4-26 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 3 Touch [Copy] or [Open], or press the [1] key in the keypad. The Copy Help screen appears. 4 Touch [Open] or the right of the desired information, or press the key in the keypad for the number to the left of the desired information to display the corresponding Help screen. 5 After checking the Help information, touch [Exit] or press the [Help] key again. The Basic screen appears again. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 4-27 Additional copy operations 4 4.8 Specifying control panel settings (Accessibility mode) This section contains details on the procedures for specifying control panel settings and adjusting the touch panel. 4.8.1 Displaying the accessibility setting screen % Press the [Accessibility] key. The Accessibility Setting screen appears. ! Detail To exit the Accessibility Setting screen and return to the Basic screen, press the [Accessibility] key or the [Reset] key, or touch [Close]. When the Enlarge Display mode is selected, the [Default Enlarge Display Setting] button appears to allow specifying the default settings of the copy and fax/scan operations in the Enlarge Display mode. 4.8.2 Setting the "Touch Panel Adjustment" function If the touch panel buttons do not respond correctly, the position of buttons in the touch panel may not be correctly aligned with the position of the actual touch sensor and may need to be adjusted. 1 Display the Accessibility Setting screen. – For details on displaying the Accessibility Setting screen, refer to "Displaying the accessibility setting screen" on page 4-27. 2 Touch [Touch Panel Adjustment] or press the [1] key in the keypad. 4 Additional copy operations 4-28 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) The Touch Panel Adjustment screen appears. ? Why does the machine not respond when [Touch Panel Adjustment.] is touched? The touch sensors are not aligned on the touch panel. % Press the [1] key in the keypad. 3 Touch the four check points [+], making sure that a sound is produced with each. – The check points [+] can be touched in any order. – To reset the adjustment, press the [C] (clear) key, and then touch the four check points [+]. If the check points have been touched correctly, the indicator on the [Start] key lights up in blue. 4 Press the [Start] key. The touch panel is adjusted, and the Accessibility Setting screen appears again. 5 Touch [Close] or press the [Accessibility] key. The Basic screen appears again. 2 Note If the touch panel cannot be adjusted, contact the service representative. ! Detail To cancel the touch panel adjustment, press the [Stop] key or the [Reset] key. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 4-29 Additional copy operations 4 4.8.3 Setting the "Key Repeat Start/Interval Time" functions The length of time until the value begins to change after a touch panel button is held down and the length of time for the value to change to the next number can be specified. 0 The settings specified for the Key Repeat Start/Interval Time functions are only applied in the Enlarge Display mode. 1 Display the Accessibility Setting screen. – For details on displaying the Accessibility Setting screen, refer to "Displaying the accessibility setting screen" on page 4-27. 2 Touch [Key Repeat Start/Interval Time] or press the [2] key in the keypad. The Key Repeat Start/Interval Time screen appears. 4 Additional copy operations 4-30 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 3 Touch [+] and [-] to specify the starting time and the interval for the key repeat feature. – To extend the time, touch [+]. – To reduce the time, touch [-]. – Both settings can be set between 0.1 and 3.0 seconds in 0.1-second increments. – To cancel changes to the settings, press the [Reset] key. 4 Touch [OK]. The Accessibility Setting screen appears again. 5 Touch [Close] or press the [Accessibility] key. The Basic screen appears again. 2 Note The Enlarge Display mode is compatible with basic copy, scanning and fax functions. With the Enlarge Display mode, text and illustrations are displayed at a larger size so that they can be seen more easily. For details, refer to the User manual – Enlarge Display Operations. As the factory default, "Time To Start" is set to 0.8 second and "Interval" is set to 0.3 second. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 4-31 Additional copy operations 4 4.8.4 Setting the "System Auto Reset Confirmation" function When the system auto reset operation is performed in Enlarge Display mode, a message can be displayed, allowing you to choose either to continue operating without exiting Enlarge Display mode or to exit Enlarge Display mode and return to the Basic screen. In addition, it is possible to specify the display time for the message requesting confirmation to exit Enlarge Display mode. Yes: Enlarge Display mode is not exited. No: Enlarge Display mode is exited, and the Basic screen is displayed. 1 Display the Accessibility Setting screen. – For details on displaying the Accessibility Setting screen, refer to "Displaying the accessibility setting screen" on page 4-27. For details on the automatic system reset operation, refer to "Automatically conserving energy (Sleep mode)" on page 2-35. 2 Touch [System Auto Reset Confirmation] or press the [3] key in the keypad. 4 Additional copy operations 4-32 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) The System Auto Reset Confirmation screen appears. 3 Touch the button for the desired display time. – To not display the message requesting confirmation to exit Enlarge Display mode, touch [No]. – To display the message requesting confirmation to exit Enlarge Display mode, touch the button ([30 second], [60 second], [90 second] or [120 second]) for the length of time that the message is to be displayed. – To cancel changes to the settings, press the [Reset] key. All changes to the settings are canceled. 4 Touch [OK]. The Accessibility Setting screen appears again. 5 Touch [Close] or press the [Accessibility] key. The Basic screen appears again. 2 Note The Enlarge Display mode is compatible with basic copy, scanning and fax functions. With the Enlarge Display mode, text and illustrations are displayed at a larger size so that they can be seen more easily. For details, refer to the User manual – Enlarge Display Operations. As the factory default, "No" is selected. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 4-33 Additional copy operations 4 4.8.5 Setting the "Auto Reset Confirmation" function When the automatic panel reset operation is performed in Enlarge Display mode, a message can be displayed, allowing you to choose either to continue operating without resetting the current settings or to reset the settings. In addition, it is possible to specify when the message is displayed, requesting confirmation to reset the settings in Enlarge Display mode. As the factory default, "No" is selected. Yes: The current settings are not reset. No: The current settings are reset to the default settings. 2 Note For details on the automatic panel reset operation, refer to "Automatically clearing settings (Automatic panel reset)" on page 2-34. 1 Display the Accessibility Setting screen. – For details on displaying the Accessibility Setting screen, refer to "Displaying the accessibility setting screen" on page 4-27. 2 Touch [Auto Reset Confirmation] or press the [4] key in the keypad. 4 Additional copy operations 4-34 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) The Auto Reset Confirmation screen appears. 3 Touch the button for the desired display time. – To not display the message requesting confirmation to reset the settings, touch [No]. – To display the message requesting confirmation to reset the settings, touch the button ([30 second], [60 second], [90 second] or [120 second]) for the length of time that the message is to be displayed. – To cancel changes to the settings, press the [Reset] key. All changes to the settings are canceled. 4 Touch [OK]. The Accessibility Setting screen appears again. 5 Touch [Close] or press the [Accessibility] key. The Basic screen appears again. 2 Note The Enlarge Display mode is compatible with basic copy, scanning and fax functions. With the Enlarge Display mode, text and illustrations are displayed at a larger size so that they can be seen more easily. For details on the Enlarge Display mode, refer to the User manual – Enlarge Display Operations. If the time setting is the same for the automatic panel reset operation and the automatic system reset operation, the display of the message requesting confirmation to exit Enlarge Display mode is given priority and the message requesting confirmation to reset the settings in Enlarge Display mode is not displayed. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 4-35 Additional copy operations 4 4.8.6 Setting the "Enlarge Display Mode Confirmation" function When the [Enlarge Display] key is pressed to change the display of the screen, a message can be displayed, requesting confirmation to cancel the settings that cannot be specified in Enlarge Display mode. As the factory default, "OFF" is selected. Yes: The settings that cannot be displayed are cancelled, and the Enlarge Display mode is entered. No: The Enlarge Display mode is not entered. 1 Display the Accessibility Setting screen. – For details on displaying the Accessibility Setting screen, refer to "Displaying the accessibility setting screen" on page 4-27. 2 Touch [Enlarge Display Mode Confirmation] or press the [5] key in the keypad. The Enlarge Display Mode Confirmation screen appears 4 Additional copy operations 4-36 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 3 Select whether or not the message is displayed. – To cancel changes to the settings, press the [Reset] key. All changes to the settings are canceled. 4 Touch [OK]. The Accessibility Setting screen appears again. 5 Touch [Close] or press the [Accessibility] key. The Basic screen appears again. 2 Note The Enlarge Display mode is compatible with basic copy, scanning and fax functions. With the Enlarge Display mode, text and illustrations are displayed at a larger size so that they can be seen more easily. For details on the Enlarge Display mode, refer to the User manual – Enlarge Display Operations. If "OFF" is selected in the Enlarge Display Mode Confirmation screen, the screen is not displayed. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 4-37 Additional copy operations 4 4.8.7 Setting the "Message Display Time" function It is possible to specify the length of time for displaying warning messages, which appear, for example, when an incorrect operation is performed. As the factory default, "3 seconds" is selected. 1 Display the Accessibility Setting screen, and then touch to display the next screen. – For details on displaying the Accessibility Setting screen, refer to "Displaying the accessibility setting screen" on page 4-27. 2 Touch [Message Display Time] or press the [1] key in the keypad. The Message Display Time screen appears. 3 Select setting for the desired amount of time that messages are displayed. – Touch [3 seconds] or [5 seconds] to select how long messages are displayed. – To cancel changes to the settings, press the [Reset] key. All changes to the settings are canceled. 4 Additional copy operations 4-38 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 4 Touch [OK]. The Accessibility Setting screen appears again. 5 Touch [Close] or press the [Accessibility] key. The Basic screen appears again. 4.8.8 Setting the "Sound Setting" functions With the Sound Setting functions, The sound level can be adjusted by selecting on from 16 levels provided for the sounds that are produced, for example, when a key is pressed. Specified sound can also be muted in this setting. For details, see the table below. As the factory default, "8" is selected for all operation sounds. Operation Confirmation Sound Sound ON/OFF Settings All Sounds Select to turn on/off all sounds in Sound Setting. Operation Confirmation Sound Select to turn on/off all sounds in Operation Confirmation Sound setting. Successful Completion Sound Select to turn on/off all sounds in Successful Completion Sound setting. Completed Preparation Sound Select to turn on/off the Completed Preparation Sound setting. Caution Sound Select to turn on/off all sounds in Caution Sound setting. Operation Confirmation Sound Input Confirmation Sound When pressing a key in the control panel or a button on the touch panel Invalid Input Sound When incorrectly pressing a key in the control panel or a button on the touch panel Basic Sound When switching settings and the default setting is selected Successful Completion Sound Completed Operation Sound When an operation is completed successfully Completed Transmission Sound When a communication operation is completed successfully Completed Preparation Sound When a device has finished setting up Caution Sound Simple Caution Sound (Level 1) When it is almost time to replace supplies or a replaceable part and a message appears in the touch panel Simple Caution Sound (Level 2) When a user has performed an operation incorrectly Simple Caution Sound (Level 3) When an error occurs that can be corrected by the user by referring to the message that appeared or the user manual Severe Caution Sound When an error occurs that cannot be corrected by the user or requires a service representative bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 4-39 Additional copy operations 4 1 Display the Accessibility Setting screen, and then touch to display the next screen. – For details on displaying the Accessibility Setting screen, refer to "Displaying the accessibility setting screen" on page 4-27. 2 Touch [Sound Setting] or press the [2] key in the keypad. The Sound Setting screen appears. 3 Touch the button or press the key in the keypad for the desired sound setting (2-5). – Sound settings 2 through 5 are available only if the corresponding sound setting on the Sound ON/OFF Settings screen is set to "ON". The screen for selected sound setting appears. 4 Additional copy operations 4-40 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 4 Touch the button or press the key in the keypad for the desired sound setting. The screen for adjusting sound level appears. 5 Adjust the sound level. – To produce the sound, touch [Yes]. The sound level can be selected from 16 levels. Every touching [Lower]/[Higher] increases/decreases a single level. To mute the sound, touch [No]. – To cancel changes to the settings, press the [Reset] key. All changes to the settings are canceled. 6 Touch [OK], then touch [Close]. The Sound Setting screen appears again. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 4-41 Additional copy operations 4 7 To enable/disable the sound setting collectively from 2 to 5, touch [Sound ON/OFF Settings] or press the [1] key in the keypad. The Sound ON/OFF Settings screen appears. 8 Select [On] or [No] for the desired setting item. 9 Touch [OK]. The sound Setting screen appears again. 10 Touch [Close]. The Accessibility Setting screen appears again. 11 Touch [Close] or press the [Accessibility] key. The Basic screen appears again. 4 Additional copy operations 4-42 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 5 Troubleshooting bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 5-3 Troubleshooting 5 5 Troubleshooting 5.1 When an error code appears There are three types of errors; errors that can be cleared by opening and closing the front door, errors that can be cleared by turning the power off/on, and errors that cannot be cleared. Clear the error by following the on-screen instructions. If the error cannot be cleared or released, contact your service representative with the error code. The phone number and fax number for the usual service representative appear in the center of the screen. Example: Error that can be cleared by turning the power off/on (C-E0002) Display in Enlarge Display mode If the internal error occurs, the screen shown below appears. 2 Reminder Since the machine may be damaged, contact the service representative according to the procedure described below as soon as the call service representative screen appears. 5 Troubleshooting 5-4 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 1 Write down the trouble code (for example, C-E0002) in the call service representative screen. 2 Turn the machine off by using the [Power] (auxiliary power) key and the main power switch. 3 Unplug the machine. 4 Contact the service representative, and inform them of the trouble code. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 5-5 Troubleshooting 5 5.2 When the message "misfeed detected." appears If a misfeed occurs during printing, the message "A paper misfeed has been detected. Remove the paper according to the guide or illustration." appears, and the location of the misfeed is indicated by a number accompanied with the procedure for clearing misfed paper on the screen. At this time, printing cannot continue until the misfeed is adequately cleared. Misfeed Location screen 5 Troubleshooting 5-6 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 5.2.1 Location of paper misfeed and illustration If paper misfeeds have occurred at multiple locations, multiple numbers appear or flash. The flashing number indicates the location where the paper misfeed should be cleared first. Touching the [Illustration] key on the Misfeed Location screen displays another screen with the message "Remove the misfed paper according to the guide or illustration.", and also with a description and illustration for clearing misfed paper. If the description extends over multiple pages, the [Next%] key is displayed. Touch [Next] to proceed to the next screen. Touching [JAM Location Display] returns to the Misfeed Location screen. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 5-7 Troubleshooting 5 5.2.2 Paper misfeed indications * The illustration above shows the main unit with the optional Finisher FS-610, Z folding unit, post inserter and Large Capacity Unit LU-405 installed. * The illustration above shows the main unit with the optional shift tray installed. * The illustration above shows the main unit with the optional output tray installed. 5 Troubleshooting 5-8 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 5.2.3 Clearing a paper misfeed in tray 1 "1" 2 Note For details of the locations of paper misfeeds, refer to "Paper misfeed indications" on page 5-7. 1 Pull out tray 1. – If the misfed paper extends over tray 1 and tray 2, also pull out tray 2. 2 Remove any misfed paper. No. Description 1 Paper misfeed in tray 1 2 Paper misfeed in tray 2 3 Paper misfeed in tray 3 4 Paper misfeed in tray 4 5 Paper misfeed in the LCT (Large Capacity Unit LU-405/LU-406) 6 Paper misfeed in the bypass tray 7 Paper misfeed in the vertical transport section 8 Paper misfeed in the ADU unit 9 Paper misfeed in the ADU unit 10 Paper misfeed in the ADU unit 11 Paper misfeed in the ADU unit 12 Paper misfeed in the ADU unit 13 Paper misfeed in the ADU unit 14 Paper misfeed in the ADF 15 Paper misfeed in the ADF 16 Paper misfeed in Finisher FS-524/FS-525/FS-610 or shift tray 17 Paper misfeed in the post inserter 18 Paper misfeed in Finisher FS-524/FS-525/FS-610 20 Paper misfeed in the Z folding unit bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 5-9 Troubleshooting 5 3 Lift up the paper take-up roller, and then remove any paper remaining in the tray. 4 Load the paper into the tray again, lower the paper take-up roller, and then close the tray. 5 Pull out tray 2, and then pull out the horizontal transport unit. 6 Open the horizontal transport unit cover. 7 Remove any misfed paper in the horizontal transport unit. 8 Return the horizontal transport unit and tray 2 to their original positions. 5 Troubleshooting 5-10 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 9 Open the vertical transport door. – If a large capacity unit is installed, open its large capacity tray front door, and then open the vertical transport door. 10 Remove any misfed paper in the vertical transport section. 11 Close the vertical transport door. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 5-11 Troubleshooting 5 5.2.4 Clearing a paper misfeed in tray 2 "2" 2 Note For details of the locations of paper misfeeds, refer to "Paper misfeed indications" on page 5-7. 1 Pull out tray 2. 2 Remove any misfed paper. 3 Lift up the paper take-up roller, and then remove any paper remaining in the tray. 4 Load the paper into the tray again, lower the paper take-up roller, and then close the tray. 5 Open the vertical transport door. – If a large capacity unit is installed, open its large capacity tray front door, and then open the vertical transport door. 5 Troubleshooting 5-12 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 6 Remove any misfed paper in the vertical transport section. 7 Close the vertical transport door. 5.2.5 Clearing a paper misfeed in tray 3 and tray 4 "3""4" 2 Note For details of the locations of paper misfeeds, refer to "Paper misfeed indications" on page 5-7. 1 Pull out tray 3 or tray 4. 2 Remove any misfed paper. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 5-13 Troubleshooting 5 3 Lift up the paper take-up roller, and then remove any paper remaining in the tray. 4 Load the paper into the tray again, lower the paper take-up roller, and then close the tray. 5 Open the vertical transport door. – If a large capacity unit is installed, open its large capacity tray front door, and then open the vertical transport door. 6 Remove any misfed paper in the vertical transport section. 7 Close the vertical transport door. 5 Troubleshooting 5-14 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 5.2.6 Clearing a paper misfeed in the LCT (Large Capacity Unit)"5" 2 Note For details of the locations of paper misfeeds, refer to "Paper misfeed indications" on page 5-7. 1 Open the large capacity tray front door. 2 Remove any misfed paper. 3 Open the upper cover. 4 Lift up the paper take-up roller, and then remove any paper remaining in the tray. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 5-15 Troubleshooting 5 5 Load the paper into the tray again, lower the paper take-up roller, and then close the upper cover. 5.2.7 Clearing a paper misfeed in the bypass tray "6" 2 Note For details of the locations of paper misfeeds, refer to "Paper misfeed indications" on page 5-7. 1 Remove all paper from the bypass tray. 2 Load the paper into the tray again. 5.2.8 Clearing a paper misfeed in the vertical transport section "7" 2 Note For details of the locations of paper misfeeds, refer to "Paper misfeed indications" on page 5-7. 1 Open the vertical transport door. – If a large capacity unit is installed, open its large capacity tray front door, and then open the vertical transport door. 2 Remove any misfed paper in the vertical transport section. 5 Troubleshooting 5-16 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 3 Close the vertical transport door. 5.2.9 Clearing a paper misfeed in the ADU unit "8" 2 Note For details of the locations of paper misfeeds, refer to "Paper misfeed indications" on page 5-7. 1 Open the right front door and the left front door. 2 Turn dial M2 to feed out the paper. 3 Lower lever M4, and then pull out the ADU unit. M2 M2 M4 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 5-17 Troubleshooting 5 4 Raise lever M3, and then remove any paper. 5 Return the ADU unit to its original position. 6 Return lever M4 to its original position, and then close the right front door and the left front door. 7 WARNING Precaution for electrical shock High voltage is generated around the drum unit inside the machine. % In order to reduce the risk of electric shock, do not touch any part in this unit when clearing paper misfeeds. 7 CAUTION Precaution for high temperature The fusing unit inside the machine is extremely hot. % In order to reduce the risk of burns, do not touch any part in this unit when clearing paper misfeeds. M3 5 Troubleshooting 5-18 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 5.2.10 Clearing a paper misfeed in the ADU unit "9" 2 Note For details of the locations of paper misfeeds, refer to "Paper misfeed indications" on page 5-7. 1 Open the right front door and the left front door. 2 Turn dial M1 and M2 to feed out the paper. 3 Lower lever M4, and then pull out the ADU unit. 4 Raise cover M12, and then remove any paper. M2 M1 M2 M1 M4 M12 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 5-19 Troubleshooting 5 5 Raise cover M3, and then remove any paper. 6 Return the ADU unit to its original position. 7 Return lever M4 to its original position, and then close the right front door and the left front door. 7 WARNING Precaution for electrical shock High voltage is generated around the drum unit inside the machine. % In order to reduce the risk of electric shock, do not touch any part in this unit when clearing paper misfeeds. 7 CAUTION Precaution for high temperature The fusing unit inside the machine is extremely hot. % In order to reduce the risk of burns, do not touch any part in this unit when clearing paper misfeeds. M3 5 Troubleshooting 5-20 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 5.2.11 Clearing a paper misfeed in the ADU unit "10" 2 Note For details of the locations of paper misfeeds, refer to "Paper misfeed indications" on page 5-7. 1 Open the right front door and the left front door. 2 Lower lever M4, and then pull out the ADU unit. 3 Remove all paper from the ADU unit. 4 Return the ADU unit to its original position. 5 Return lever M4 to its original position, and then close the right front door and the left front door. 7 WARNING Precaution for electrical shock High voltage is generated around the drum unit inside the machine. % In order to reduce the risk of electric shock, do not touch any part in this unit when clearing paper misfeeds. M4 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 5-21 Troubleshooting 5 7 CAUTION Precaution for high temperature The fusing unit inside the machine is extremely hot. % In order to reduce the risk of burns, do not touch any part in this unit when clearing paper misfeeds. 5.2.12 Clearing a paper misfeed in the ADU unit "11" 2 Note For details of the locations of paper misfeeds, refer to "Paper misfeed indications" on page 5-7. 1 Open the right front door and the left front door. 2 Turn dial M9 and M10 to feed out the paper. 3 Remove all paper from the outlet. – If the finisher, shift tray or Z folding unit is installed, clear paper misfeeds from each unit. M9 M10 M9 M10 5 Troubleshooting 5-22 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 4 Lower lever M4, and then pull out the ADU unit. 5 Lower lever M5. 6 Open covers M6 and M8. 7 Turn dial M7, and then remove any paper. 8 Raise the lever for cover M6, and then close cover M6. 9 Return the ADU unit to its original position. 10 Return lever M4 to its original position, and then close the right front door and the left front door. M4 M5 M8 M6 M7 M7 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 5-23 Troubleshooting 5 7 WARNING Precaution for electrical shock High voltage is generated around the drum unit inside the machine. % In order to reduce the risk of electric shock, do not touch any part in this unit when clearing paper misfeeds. 7 CAUTION Precaution for high temperature The fusing unit inside the machine is extremely hot. % In order to reduce the risk of burns, do not touch any part in this unit when clearing paper misfeeds. 5.2.13 Clearing a paper misfeed in the ADU unit "12" 2 Note For details of the locations of paper misfeeds, refer to "Paper misfeed indications" on page 5-7. 1 Open the right front door and the left front door. 2 Lower lever M4, and then pull out the ADU unit. M4 5 Troubleshooting 5-24 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 3 Open cover M11. 4 Turn dial M9, and then remove any paper. 5 Return cover M11 to its original position. 6 Return the ADU unit to its original position. 7 Return lever M4 to its original position, and then close the right front door and the left front door. 7 WARNING Precaution for electrical shock High voltage is generated around the drum unit inside the machine. % In order to reduce the risk of electric shock, do not touch any part in this unit when clearing paper misfeeds. 7 CAUTION Precaution for high temperature The fusing unit inside the machine is extremely hot. % In order to reduce the risk of burns, do not touch any part in this unit when clearing paper misfeeds. M11 M9 M9 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 5-25 Troubleshooting 5 5.2.14 Clearing a paper misfeed in the ADU unit "13" 2 Note For details of the locations of paper misfeeds, refer to "Paper misfeed indications" on page 5-7. 1 Open the right front door and the left front door. 2 Lower lever M4, and then pull out the ADU unit. 3 Open cover M11. 4 Remove any paper. M4 M11 5 Troubleshooting 5-26 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 5 Return cover M11 to its original position. 6 Return the ADU unit to its original position. 7 Return lever M4 to its original position, and then close the right front door and the left front door. 7 WARNING Precaution for electrical shock High voltage is generated around the drum unit inside the machine. % In order to reduce the risk of electric shock, do not touch any part in this unit when clearing paper misfeeds. 7 CAUTION Precaution for high temperature The fusing unit inside the machine is extremely hot. % In order to reduce the risk of burns, do not touch any part in this unit when clearing paper misfeeds. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 5-27 Troubleshooting 5 5.2.15 Clearing a paper misfeed in the ADF "14" 2 Note For details of the locations of paper misfeeds, refer to "Paper misfeed indications" on page 5-7. 1 Remove all original pages remaining in the paper tray. 2 Open the left-side cover, and then remove any original pages. 3 Open the paper feed unit, and then remove any original pages. 4 Close the paper feed unit and the left-side door. 5 Troubleshooting 5-28 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 5 Lift up the paper tray, and then remove any original pages. 6 Return the paper tray to its original position. 5.2.16 Clearing a paper misfeed in the ADF "15" 2 Note For details of the locations of paper misfeeds, refer to "Paper misfeed indications" on page 5-7. 1 Remove all original pages remaining in the paper tray. 2 Lift open the ADF. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 5-29 Troubleshooting 5 3 Open the document pad. 4 Open the original exit guides, and then remove any original pages. 5 Close the document pad. 5.2.17 Clearing a paper misfeed in Finisher FS-524/FS-525 "16" "18" This procedure describes the operations to be performed along the paper path where paper misfeeds may occur. Depending on the selected Finishing settings, the paper path changes, resulting in different locations in the finisher where paper misfeeds may occur. The method for clearing paper misfeeds in Finisher FS-524 is the same as that for FS-525. Here, the method for FS-524 is described as an example. 1 Open the machine’s front door. 5 Troubleshooting 5-30 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 2 Lower guide lever FN2, and then remove any paper. 3 Return guide lever FN2 to its original position. 4 Lower guide lever FN4, and then remove any paper. – If the paper cannot be removed, turn misfeed-clearing dial FN3 to feed out the paper. 5 Return guide lever FN4 to its original position. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 5-31 Troubleshooting 5 6 Lower guide lever FN5, and then remove any paper. – If the paper cannot be removed, turn misfeed-clearing dial FN3 to feed out the paper. 7 Return guide lever FN5 to its original position. 8 Grab handle FN7, and then pull out the stacker unit. – Slowly pull out the stacker unit as far as possible. 5 Troubleshooting 5-32 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 9 Remove any misfed paper from the stacker unit. – If the paper cannot be removed, turn misfeed-clearing dial FN6 to feed out the paper. 10 Return the stacker unit to its original position. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 5-33 Troubleshooting 5 – When returning the stacker unit to its original position, do not grab any part other than handle FN7, otherwise your hand or fingers may be pinched. 11 Close the front door. 5 Troubleshooting 5-34 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 5.2.18 Clearing a paper misfeed in Finisher FS-610 "16" "18" This procedure describes the operations to be performed along the paper path where paper misfeeds may occur. Depending on the selected Finishing settings, the paper path changes, resulting in different locations in the finisher where paper misfeeds may occur. 1 Open the machine’s front door. 2 Lower guide lever FN2, and then remove any paper. 3 Return guide lever FN2 to its original position. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 5-35 Troubleshooting 5 4 Lower guide lever FN4, and then remove any paper. – If the paper cannot be removed, turn misfeed-clearing dial FN3 to feed out the paper. 5 Return guide lever FN4 to its original position. 6 Lower guide lever FN5, and then remove any paper. – If the paper cannot be removed, turn misfeed-clearing dial FN3 to feed out the paper. 7 Return guide lever FN5 to its original position. 5 Troubleshooting 5-36 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 8 Grab handle FN6, and then pull out the stacker unit. – Slowly pull out the stacker unit as far as possible. 9 Lower guide lever FN9, and then remove any paper. 10 Open guide lever FN8, and then remove any paper. – If the paper cannot be removed, turn misfeed-clearing dial FN7 to feed out the paper. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 5-37 Troubleshooting 5 11 Lower guide lever FN10, and then remove any paper. – If the paper cannot be removed, turn misfeed-clearing dial FN7 to feed out the paper. 12 Return the stacker unit to its original position. 5 Troubleshooting 5-38 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) – When returning the stacker unit to its original position, do not grab any part other than handle FN6, otherwise your hand or fingers may be pinched.Return the stacker unit to its original position. 13 Close the front door. 5.2.19 Clearing a paper misfeed in the Shift Tray "16" 1 Open the shift tray cover, and then slowly remove any misfed paper. 2 Close the shift tray cover. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 5-39 Troubleshooting 5 5.2.20 Clearing a paper misfeed in the Post Inserter "17" ! Detail For details on the positions of paper misfeeds, refer to "Paper misfeed indications" on page 5-7 1 Raise the upper unit release lever, and then slide the upper unit to the left. 2 Slowly remove any misfed paper. 3 Return the upper unit to its original position. 5.2.21 Clearing a paper misfeed in the Z Folding Unit "20" This procedure describes the operations to be performed along the paper path where paper misfeeds may occur. Depending on the selected Finishing settings, the paper path changes, resulting in different locations in the Z folding unit where paper misfeeds may occur. 1 Open the machine’s front door. 5 Troubleshooting 5-40 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 2 Raise guide lever FN1, and then remove any paper. 3 Return guide lever FN1 to its original position. 4 Lower guide lever FN8 and guide lever FN2 of the finisher, and then remove any paper. 5 Grab handle FN2, and then pull out the Z folding/transport unit. – Slowly pull out the Z folding/transport unit as far as possible. 6 Lower guide lever FN3, and then remove any paper. FN1 FN8 FN2 FN2 FN3 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 5-41 Troubleshooting 5 – If the paper cannot be removed, turn misfeed-clearing dial FN4 to feed out the paper. 7 Lower guide lever FN6, and then remove any paper. 8 Raise guide lever FN7, and then remove any paper. – If the paper cannot be removed, turn misfeed-clearing dial FN5 to feed out the paper. 9 Return guide lever FN6 to its original position FN4 FN4 FN6 FN7 FN5FN5 FN5 5 Troubleshooting 5-42 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 10 Return the Z folding/transport unit to its original position. – When returning the Z folding/transport unit to its original position, do not grab any part other than handle FN2, otherwise your hand or fingers may be pinched. 11 Close the front door. FN2 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 5-43 Troubleshooting 5 5.3 Simple troubleshooting Symptom Possible cause Remedy Main unit The machine does not start up when the main power switch is turned on. Is no power supplied from the electrical outlet? Correctly insert the power supply plug into the electrical outlet. Has the [Power] (auxiliary power) key been turned on? Turn on the [Power] (auxiliary power) key. Copying does not start. Is the right front door of the machine open? Securely close the upper right-side door of the machine. Is there no paper that matches the original? Load paper of the appropriate size into the paper tray. The printed output is too light. Is the copy density set too light? Touch [Dark] in the Density screen to copy at the desired copy density. (See p. 3-61.) Is the paper damp? Replace the paper with new paper. (See p. 2-50, p. 2-51 and p. 2-55.) The printed output is too dark. Is the copy density set too dark? Touch [Light] in the Density screen to copy at the desired copy density. (See p. 3-63.) Was the original not pressed close enough against the original glass? Position the original so that it is pressed closely against the original glass. (See p. 3-10.) The printed output is blurry. Is the paper damp? Replace the paper with new paper. (See p. 2-50, p. 2-51 and p. 2-55.) Was the original not pressed close enough against the original glass? Position the original so that it is pressed closely against the original glass. (See p. 3-10.) There are dark specks or spots throughout the printed output. There are streaks in the printed output. Is the original glass dirty? Wipe the glass with a soft, dry cloth. (See p. 10-3.) Is the left partition glass dirty? Clean the left partition glass with a soft, dry cloth. (See p. 10-3.) Is the document pad dirty? Clean the document pad with a soft cloth dampened with a mild detergent. (See p. 10-4.) Was the original printed on highly translucent material, such as diazo photosensitive paper or OHP transparencies? Place a blank sheet of paper on top of the original. (See p. 3-10.) Is a double-sided original being copied? If a thin double-sided original is being copied, the print on the back side may be reproduced in the copy. Touch [Light] on the Background Removal screen to select a lighter background density. (See p. 3-52.) 5 Troubleshooting 5-44 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) The image is not aligned properly on the paper. Is the original incorrectly positioned? Correctly position the original against the original scales. (See p. 3-10.) Load the original into the ADF, and slide the adjustable paper guides to fit the size of the original. (See p. 3-9.) Is the original incorrectly positioned in the ADF? If the original cannot be fed correctly through the ADF, make copies by positioning the original on the original glass. (See p. 3-10.) Is the left partition glass dirty (while using the ADF)? Clean the left partition glass with a soft, dry cloth. (See p. 10-3.) Are the adjustable lateral guides incorrectly positioned against the edges of the original? Slide the adjustable lateral guides against the edges of the original. Was curled paper loaded into the paper tray? Flatten the paper before loading it. The printed page is curled. Was paper that curls easily (as with recycled paper) used? Remove the paper from the paper tray, turn it over, and then load it again. Replace the paper with paper that is not damp. (See p. 2-50, p. 2-51 and p. 2-55.) The edge of the printed output is dirty. Is the document pad dirty? Clean the document pad with a soft cloth dampened with a mild detergent. (See p. 10-4.) Was the selected paper size larger than the original (with a Zoom setting of "Full Size" (100.0%)? Select a paper size that is the same size as the original. Otherwise, select the "Auto" Zoom setting to enlarge the copy to the selected paper size. (See p. 3-36.) Is the orientation of the original different from the orientation of the paper (with a Zoom setting of "Full Size" (100.0%)? Select a paper size that is the same size as the original. Otherwise, select a paper orientation that is the same as that of the original. Was the copy reduced to a size smaller than the paper (with a reduced zoom ratio specified)? Select a zoom ratio that adjusts the original size to the selected paper size. (See p. 3-36.) Otherwise, select the "Auto" Zoom setting to reduce the copy to the selected paper size. (See p. 3-39.) Even though the paper misfeed was cleared, copies cannot be produced. Are there paper misfeeds at other locations? Check the touch panel for other paper misfeed indications, and then remove any misfed paper at all other locations. (See p. 5-7.) Printing with the "2-Sided > 1-Sided" or "2-Sided > 2-Sided" settings are not possible. Have settings been selected that cannot be combined? Check the combinations of the selected settings. Copying is not possible even though the password is entered on a machine with user authentication/ account track settings specified. Did the message "Your account has reached its maximum allowance." appear? Contact your administrator. ADF The original is not fed. Is the ADF slightly open? Securely close the ADF. Is the original one that does not meet the specifications? Check that the original is one that can be loaded into the ADF. (See p. 7-31 and p. 7-32.) Is the original correctly loaded? Position the original correctly. (See p. 3-9.) Symptom Possible cause Remedy bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 5-45 Troubleshooting 5 Finisher The finisher cannot be used. Is no power supplied to the connector? Check that the cord is correctly inserted into the connector. The pages cannot be stapled. Have the staples run out? Replace the staple cartridge. (See p. 9-7.) The staple is incorrectly positioned by 90 degrees. Is the staple position correctly specified? Specify the desired position for stapling. (See p. 3-71.) The pages that were fed out were not uniformly loaded and the punched holes or staples are incorrectly positioned. Is the paper curled? Remove the paper from the paper tray, turn it over, and then load it again. Is there a gap between the lateral guides in the paper tray and the sides of the paper? Slide the lateral guides in the paper tray against the sides of the paper so that there is no gap. Even though a Punch setting was selected, holes are not punched. (when the punch unit is installed on the finisher) Did the message "Empty the holepunch scrap box." appear? Empty the hole-punch scrap box. (See p. 9-18) Symptom Possible cause Remedy Trouble Possible cause Remedy Authentication Unit (Biometric Type) The USB cable is connected between the authentication unit and the machine, but the status indicator is not lit in green. The USB port of the machine may be malfunctioning. Turn the machine off with the main power switch and temporarily disconnect the USB cable from the authentication unit or the machine before connecting it again and waiting 10 seconds before turning on the machine with the main power switch. The USB cable is connected between the authentication unit and the computer, but the status indicator is not lit in green. The USB port of the computer may be malfunctioning. Restart the computer. Is the authentication unit correctly installed? Refer to "Registering from Data Administrator", and check if the driver is correctly installed on the computer. (p. 13-9) A tone does not sound from the machine when scanning begins and when authentication is completed. Has the tone setting on the machine been set to "OFF"? Refer to "Registering users", and set the tone setting to "ON". (p. 13-15) The message "Failed to register". appears on a machine where registration failed. With the authentication unit, the scanning time is limited for each scan. This message appears if scanning is not possible within the limited period of time. For details on the scanning time, consult with the technical representative. Refer to the Quick Guide Authentication Unit (Biometric Type AU- 101) and check how to position the finger for authentication and scanning in order to complete scanning within the limited period of time. Correctly position the finger to be scanned on the scanner, and do not move the finger until the scanning results are received. If the area of the finger to be scanned is dirty or chapped, a correct image cannot be created and scanning may not be completed. Wash your hands and try scanning again, or try to correct chapped fingers. If the area of the finger to be scanned is too wide or too thin (outside of the finger width range of 10 mm to 25 mm), a correct image cannot be created and scanning may not be completed. Try widening your finger or inserting it deeper or less deep into the scanner. Logon failed. The message "Failed to Authenticate." appears on the machine. The message "Failed to read data. Place your finger once again and click the [Start reading] button." appears on a computer where registration failed. With the authentication unit, the scanning time is limited to five seconds for each scan. This message appears if scanning is not possible within the five-second time period. 5 Troubleshooting 5-46 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) If any message other than those listed above appears, perform the operation described in the message. If the problem is not corrected after the described operation is performed, contact your service representative. Scanning does not begin. Is the finger correctly positioned? Refer to the Quick Guide Authentication Unit (Biometric Type AU- 101) and check how to position the finger for authentication and scanning. Correctly position the finger to be scanned on the scanner, and do not move the finger until the scanning results are received. If the area of the finger to be scanned is dirty or chapped, a correct image cannot be created and scanning may not be completed. Wash your hands and try scanning again, or try to correct chapped fingers. If the area of the finger to be scanned is too wide or too thin (outside of the finger width range of 10 mm to 25 mm), a correct image cannot be created and scanning may not be completed. Try widening your finger or inserting it deeper or less deep into the scanner. Was the machine restarted after the authentication unit was connected to it? Turn the machine off with the main power switch and temporarily disconnect the USB cable from the authentication unit or the machine before connecting it again and waiting 10 seconds before turning on the machine with the main power switch. The Add New Hardware Wizard starts when the authentication unit is connected to the computer. Is the authentication unit connected to the same USB port used when the driver was installed? If the authentication unit is connected to a USB port different from the one used when the driver was installed, the Add New Hardware Wizard may start. Use the same USB port used when the driver was installed. Authentication Unit (IC Card Type) The USB cable is connected between the authentication unit and the machine, but the status indicator is not lit in green. With the authentication unit, the scanning time is limited to 10 seconds. This message appears if scanning was not possible within the limited period of time. Refer to the Quick Guide Authentication Unit (IC Card Type AU-201) and check how to position the IC card in order to complete scanning within the limited period of time. The message appears on a computer where registration failed Logon failed. The message "Failed to Authenticate." appears on the machine. If "Card Authentication + Password" was selected: Is the password typed in correctly? Check the password, and type it in correctly. Scanning does not begin. Was the machine restarted after the authentication unit was connected to it? Turn the machine off with the main power switch and temporarily disconnect the USB cable from the authentication unit or the machine before connecting it again and waiting 10 seconds before turning on the machine with the main power switch. The Add New Hardware Wizard starts when the authentication unit is connected to the computer. Is the authentication unit connected to the same USB port used when the driver was installed? If the authentication unit is connected to a USB port different from the one used when the driver was installed, the Add New Hardware Wizard may start. Use the same USB port used when the driver was installed. Trouble Possible cause Remedy bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 5-47 Troubleshooting 5 5.4 Main messages and their remedies Message Cause Remedy Originals left on original glass. The original was left on the original glass. Remove the original from the original glass. Paper of matching size is not available. Select the paper size. Paper of a suitable size is not loaded in a paper tray. Either select paper of a different size or load paper of a suitable size. Load paper into the bypass tray. Paper of a suitable size is not loaded in the bypass tray. Load paper of the appropriate size into the bypass tray. The original size cannot be detected. Select the paper size. 1: The original is not positioned correctly. 2: An original with a non-standard size or with a size too small to be detected is loaded. 1: Position the original correctly. 2: Select the correct paper size. The image will not fit on selected paper. Change the direction of the original. The image does not fit in the paper. Load the original turned 90 degrees. Cannot be set with XXX. Functions that cannot be used together are selected. Make copies using only one of the functions. The output tray has reached its capacity. Remove all paper from the tray indicated by %. Since the maximum amount of copies for the indicated finisher output tray has been exceeded, the machine is unable to make copies. Remove all paper from the indicated tray. Enter User Name and password, and then touch [Login] or press the [Access] key. User authentication settings have been specified. Copies cannot be made unless a user name and its correct password are entered. Type in your user name and password. (See p. 2-38.) Enter Account Name and password, and then touch [Login] or press the [Access] key. Account track settings have been specified. Copies cannot be made unless an account name and its correct password are entered. Type in your user name and password. (See p. 2-42.) Your account has reached its maximum allowance. The limit on the number of pages that can be printed has been reached. Contact the administrator of the machine. The part indicated by % is open. Ensure that it is properly closed. Since a machine door or cover is open or an option is not installed correctly, the machine is unable to make copies. Make sure that all doors and covers are closed and that all options are installed correctly. Install toner cartridge, and close all doors. The toner cartridge is not installed correctly. Reinstall the supplies or parts, or contact your service representative. Replenish paper. The indicated tray has run out of paper. Load paper into the indicated tray. (See p. 2-50, p. 2-51, and p. 2-55.) No more staples. Replace the staple cartridge, or cancel stapling. The staples have run out. Replace the staple cartridge. (See p. 9-7.) Misfeed detected. Since a paper misfeed occurred, the machine is unable to make copies. Clear the paper misfeed. (See p. 5-5.) Reinsert the following # of originals. After clearing a paper misfeed, it is necessary to reload certain pages of the original that have already been fed through the ADF. Load the indicated original pages into the ADF. An internal error occurred. Open and then close the front door. If the trouble code appears again contact your Service Rep. The machine malfunctioned and is unable to make copies. Clear the error by following the onscreen instructions. If the error cannot be cleared or released, contact your service representative with the error code displayed on the screen. Malfunction detected. Please call your Service Rep. The machine malfunctioned and is unable to make copies. Inform your service representative of the code displayed on the touch panel. Now Downloading Program Data from Firmware server. 1: CS Remote Care was activated by the service representative. 2: Internet ISW is being downloaded. Do not turn off the machine with the [Power] (auxiliary power) key while this message is displayed. After turning off the machine with the [Power] (auxiliary power) key, turn off the main power switch, and then contact the service representative. 5 Troubleshooting 5-48 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) If any message other than those listed above appears, perform the operation described in the message. Cannot be accessed due to unauthorized access. Please contact your administrator. The authentication information has become invalid since the authentication attempts have failed the specified number of times. Contact the administrator of the machine. The Administrator Password is not valid due to unauthorized access. The administrator password has become invalid since the authentication attempts have failed the specified number of times. Turn the machine off, then on again. Turn off the main power switch, and then wait about 10 seconds before turning it on again. Message Cause Remedy 6 Specifications bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 6-3 Specifications 6 6 Specifications 6.1 Specifications 6.1.1 Main unit Item Description Name bizhub 751/601 Type Console Document holder Stationary (mirror scanning) Photoconductor OPC Luminous source White inert gas fluorescent lamp Copying system Laser electrostatic copy method Developing system Dry-type dual-component reverse magnetic brush developing Fusing system Heat roller fixing Resolution Scanning: 600 dpi e 600 dpi, Printing: 2400 dpi e 600 dpi Document Types: sheets, books (spread), three-dimensional objects Size: Max. A3, 11 e 17 Thickness: Max. 30 mm, Weight: 6.8 kg Detectable sizes for original glass: A3 w to A5 w/v, B6 w, A6 w, 11 e 17 w to 5-1/2 e 8-1/2 w/v, Foolscap*2, 8K w, 16K w/v Detectable sizes for ADF: A3 w to A5 w/v, 11 e 17 w, 8-1/2 e 11 v, Foolscap*2 Paper types Normal paper: 60 g/m2 to 90 g/m2, thin paper*1: 50 g/m2 to 59 g/m2, thick paper: 91 g/m2 to 200 g/m2, overhead projector transparencies*1, labels*1, tab paper*1, trace paper*1, special paper*1, high-quality paper, user paper, recycled paper, colored paper, letterhead Paper sizes Tray 1 and tray 2: A4 v, B5 v, A5 v, 8-1/2 e 11 v, 5-1/2 e 8-1/2 v, 16K v Tray 3 and tray 4: Standard sizes: A3 w, B4 w, A4 w/v, B5 w/v, A5 v, 11 e 17 w, 8-1/2 e 14 w, 8-1/2 e 11 w/v, 5-1/2 e 8-1/2 v, Foolscap*2, wide paper (A3W w, B4W w, A4W w/v, B5W w/v, A5W v, 11 e 17W w, 8-1/2 e 11W w/v, 5-1/2 e 8-1/2W v) Custom sizes: 182 mm e 140 mm to 314 mm e 458 mm Bypass tray: Standard sizes: A3 w to A5 w/v, B6 w, 11 e 17 w, 8/1/2 e 11 v, Foolscap*2, wide paper (A3W w, B4W w, A4W w/v, B5W w/v, A5W w/v,11 e 17W w, 8-1/2 e 11W w/v, 5-1/2 e 8-1/2W w/v) Custom sizes: 100 mm e 140 mm to 314 mm e 458 mm Image blank Single-sided copying: Leading edge and trailing edge: less than 3 mm, front and rear: less than 2 mm Double-sided copying: Front side: Leading edge and trailing edge: less than 4 mm, front and rear: less than 2 mm Back side: Leading edge and trailing edge: less than 3 mm, front and rear: less than 2 mm Paper tray capacity Tray 1: 1650 sheets (64 g/m2 plain paper) Tray 2: 1100 sheets (64 g/m2 plain paper) Tray 3 and tray 4: 550 sheets (64 g/m2 plain paper) Bypass tray: 100 sheets (64 g/m2 plain paper) Warm-up time bizhub 751: within 300 seconds, bizhub 601: within 270 seconds First copy bizhub 751: within 2.9 seconds, bizhub 601: within 3.3 seconds Copy speed bizhub 751: 75 sheets/min. (A4 v), 35 sheets/min. (A3 w) bizhub 601: 60 sheets/min. (A4 v), 30 sheets/min. (A3 w) 6 Specifications 6-4 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) *1 Can only be fed through the bypass tray. *2 Foolscap includes the following 4 types: 8-1/8 e 13-1/4 w, 8-1/4 e 13 w, 8-1/2 e 13 w, and 8 e 13 w, one of which can be selected. For details, contact the service representative. *3 The indicated spaced requirements represent the space required to fully extend the bypass tray. In order to incorporate improvements, these product specifications are subject to change without notice. 6.1.2 Automatic Document Feeder DF-614 * Foolscap includes the following 4 types: 8-1/8 e 13-1/4 w, 8-1/4 e 13 w, 8-1/2 e 13 w, and 8 e 13 w, one of which can be selected. For details, contact the service representative. Magnification ratios Full size: e 1.000 ± 1.0% or less Enlargement (Fixed Zoom): e 1.154, e 1.224, e 1.414, e 2.000 Reduction (Fixed Zoom): e 0.500, e 0.707, e 0.816, e 0.866 Minimal Copy: 0.930 Zoom with Constant × and Y Ratio: e 0.250 to 4.000 (in 0.001 increments) Independent Zoom: vertical e 0.250 to 4.000 (in 0.001 increments), horizontal e 0.250 to 4.000 (in 0.001 increments) User-set zoom ratio: 3 Multiple copies/sets 1 to 9999 copies/1 to 9999 sets Density adjustment Copy Density: Automatic and manual (9 levels) Background adjustment: Manual (9 levels) Power requirements AC 220 - 240 V, 10 A, 50 - 60Hz Noise 75 dB or less (bizhub 751/601) Power consumption Max. 2,000 W (including options) Dimensions 886 (W) e 859 (D) e 1140 (H) mm (main unit, ADF and control panel) Space requirements *3 1275 (W) e 791 (D) mm (main unit and ADF) Memory 1 GB Weight Approx. 224 kg (Main unit and ADF) Item Description Item Description Name DF-614 Document feed methods Standard original: Single-sided, double-sided Mixed original: Single-sided, double-sided Original paper types 50 g/m2 to 200 g/m2 Original sizes 100 mm e 139.7 mm to 297 mm e 431.8 mm Detectable sizes: A3 w to A5 w/v, 11 e 17 w, 8-1/2 e 11 v, Foolscap* Capacity of document feeder Max. 100 sheets (80 g/m2) Power requirements Supplied from main unit Maximum power consumption 53 W or less Dimensions 625 (W) e 576 (D) e 154 (H) mm Weight Approx. 12.9 kg bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 6-5 Specifications 6 6.2 Option specifications 6.2.1 Large Capacity Unit LU-405 6.2.2 Large Capacity Unit LU-406 * Foolscap includes the following 4 types: 8-1/8 e 13-1/4 w, 8-1/4 e 13 w, 8-1/2 e 13 w, 8 e 13 w, one of which can be selected. For details, contact the service representative. Item Description Name LU-405 Paper types Normal paper (60 g/m2 to 90 g/m2), thick paper (91 g/m2 to 200 g/m2) Paper sizes Standard sizes: A4 v, B5 v, 8-1/2 e11 v, 16K v, wide paper (A4W v, B5W v, 8-1/2 e 11W v) Custom sizes: 182 mm e 257 mm to 223 mm e 314 mm Paper tray capacity 4,000 sheets (80 g/m2) Power requirements Supplied from main unit Maximum power consumption 82 W or less Dimensions 430 (W) e 639 (D) e 690 (H) mm Weight Approx. 30 kg Configuration 1 paper tray Item Description Name LU-406 Paper types Normal paper (60 g/m2 to 90 g/m2), thick paper (91 g/m2 to 200 g/m2) Paper sizes Standard sizes: A3 w, B4 w, A4 w/v, 11 e 17 w, 8-1/2 e 14 w, 8-1/2 e 11 w/v, Foolscap*, 8K w, 16K v, wide paper (A3W w, B4W w, A4W w/v, 11 e 17W w, 8-1/2 e 11W w/v) Custom sizes: 195 mm e 210 mm to 314 mm e 458 mm Paper tray capacity 4,000 sheets (80 g/m2) Power requirements Supplied from main unit Maximum power consumption 100 W or less Dimensions 670 (W) e 639 (D) e 695 (H) mm Weight Approx. 42 kg Configuration 1 paper tray 6 Specifications 6-6 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 6.2.3 Finisher FS-524 *1 Cannot be used with Finishing settings. *2 Foolscap includes the following 4 types: 8-1/8 e 13-1/4 w, 8-1/4 e 13 w, 8-1/2 e 13 w, 8 e 13 w, one of which can be selected. For details, contact the service representative. Item Description Name FS-524 Function Straight delivery (sorted, grouped) Offset delivery (sort and offset, group and offset) Staple delivery Output trays Main finishing tray (Tray 1), sub finishing tray (Tray 2) Offset width 30 mm Paper types Main finishing tray (Tray 2): Sort, group, sort and offset, group and offset: Plain paper (60 g/m2 to 90 g/m2), thick paper (91 g/m2 to 200 g/m2), thin paper (50 g/m2 to 59 g/m2), label sheets, OHP transparencies, trace paper, tab paper, special paper, high-quality paper, user paper, recycled paper, colored paper, letterhead Staple: Plain paper (60 g/m2 to 90 g/m2), recycled paper, high-quality paper, user paper, letterhead, special paper, thin paper, thick paper, colored paper Sub finishing tray (Tray 1): Sort, group: Plain paper (60 g/m2 to 90 g/m2), thick paper (91 g/m2 to 200 g/m2), thin paper (50 g/m2 to 59 g/m2), label sheets, OHP transparencies, trace paper, tab paper Paper sizes Main finishing tray (Tray 2): Standard sizes: A3 w to A5 w*1/v, 11 e 17 w to 5-1/2 e 8-1/2 w*1/v, Foolscap*2, 8K w, 16K w/v, wide paper (A3W w to A5W v, 11 e 17W w to 5-1/2 e 8-1/2W v) Custom sizes: 182 mm e 148 mm to 314 mm e 458 mm, 128 mm e 139 mm*1 Sub finishing tray (Tray 1): Standard sizes: A3 w to A5 w/v, B6 w, A6 w, 11 e 17 w to 5-1/2 e 8-1/2 w/v,13 e 19 w, Foolscap*2, 8K w, 16K w/v, wide paper (A3W w to A5W w/v, 11 e 17W w to 5-1/2 e 8-1/2W w/v) Custom sizes: 100 mm e 139 mm to 331 mm e 488 mm Staple: Standard sizes: A3 w to A5 v, 11 e 17 w to 5-1/2 e 8-1/2 v, Foolscap*2, 8K w, 16K w/v, wide paper (A3W w to A5W v, 11 e 17W w to 5-1/2 e 8-1/2W v) Custom sizes: 182 mm e 139 mm to 314 mm e 458 mm Output tray capacity Main finishing tray (Tray 2): B4 or larger: 1500 sheets A4 to B5: 3000 sheets A5 or smaller: 500 sheets Sub finishing tray (Tray 1): 200 sheets Staple settings Maximum number of bound sheets: 50 sheets (60 g/m2 to 90 g/m2) Punch settings Uses the optional punch settings. Power requirements Supplied from main unit Maximum power consumption 80 W or less Dimensions 680 (800 when trays are pulled out) (W) e 656 (D) e 990 (H) mm Weight 60 kg Consumables Staple cartridge bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 6-7 Specifications 6 6.2.4 Finisher FS-525 *1 Cannot be used with Finishing settings. *2 Foolscap includes the following 4 types: 8-1/8 e 13-1/4 w, 8-1/4 e 13 w, 8-1/2 e 13 w, 8 e 13 w, one of which can be selected. For details, contact the service representative. Item Description Name FS-525 Function Straight delivery (sorted, grouped) Offset delivery (sort and offset, group and offset) Staple delivery Output trays Main finishing tray (Tray 2), sub finishing tray (Tray 1) Offset width 30 mm Paper types Main finishing tray (Tray 2): Sort, group, sort and offset, group and offset: Plain paper (60 g/m2 to 90 g/m2), thick paper (91 g/m2 to 200 g/m2), thin paper (50 g/m2 to 59 g/m2), label sheets, OHP transparencies, trace paper, tab paper, special paper, high-quality paper, user paper, recycled paper, colored paper, letterhead Staple: Plain paper (60 g/m2 to 90 g/m2), recycled paper, high-quality paper, user paper, letterhead, special paper, thin paper, thick paper, colored paper Sub finishing tray (Tray 1): Sort, group: Plain paper (60 g/m2 to 90 g/m2), thick paper (91 g/m2 to 200 g/m2), thin paper (50 g/m2 to 59 g/m2), label sheets, OHP transparencies, trace paper, tab paper Paper sizes Main finishing tray (Tray 2): Standard sizes: A3 w to A5 w*1/v, 11 e 17 w to 5-1/2 e 8-1/2 w*1/v, Foolscap*2, 8K w, 16K w/v, wide paper (A3W w to A5W v, 11 e 17W w to 5-1/2 e 8-1/2W v) Custom sizes: 182 mm e 148 mm to 314 mm e 458 mm, 128 mm e 139 mm*1 Sub finishing tray (Tray 1): Standard sizes: A3 w to A5 w/ v, B6 w, A6 w, 11 e 17 w to 5-1/2 e 8-1/2 w/ v, 13 × 19 w, Foolscap*2, 8K w, 16K w/ v, wide paper (A3W w to A5W w/v, 11 e 17W w to 5-1/2 e 8-1/2W w/v) Custom sizes: 100 mm e 139 mm to 331 mm e 488 mm Staple: Standard sizes: A3 w to A5 v, 11 e 17 w to 5-1/2 e 8-1/2 v, Foolscap*2, 8K w, 16K w/v, wide paper (A3W w to A5W v, 11 e 17W w to 5-1/2 e 8-1/2W v) Custom sizes: 182 mm e 139 mm to 314 mm e 458 mm Output tray capacity Main finishing tray (Tray 2): B4 or larger: 1500 sheets A4 to B5: 3000 sheets A5 or smaller: 500 sheets Sub finishing tray (Tray 1): 200 sheets Staple settings Maximum number of bound sheets: 100 sheets (60 g/m2 to 80 g/m2) Punch settings Uses the optional punch settings. Power requirements Supplied from main unit Maximum power consumption 80 W or less Dimensions 680 (800) (W) e 656 (D) e 990 (H) mm The value in parentheses is the dimension when the tray is pulled out. Weight 60 kg Consumables Staple cartridge 6 Specifications 6-8 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 6.2.5 Finisher FS-610 Item Description Name FS-610 Function Straight delivery (sorted, grouped) Offset delivery (sort and offset, group and offset) Staple, half-fold, center staple & fold, tri-fold Output trays Main finishing tray (Tray 2), sub finishing tray (Tray 1), Booklet tray Offset width 30 mm Paper types Main finishing tray (Tray 2): Sort, group, sort and offset, group and offset: Plain paper (60 g/m2 to 90 g/m2), thick paper (91 g/m2 to 200 g/m2), thin paper (50 g/m2 to 59 g/m2), label sheets, OHP transparencies, trace paper, tab paper, special paper, high-quality paper, user paper, recycled paper, colored paper, letterhead Staple: Plain paper (60 g/m2 to 80 g/m2), recycled paper, high-quality paper, user paper, letterhead, special paper, thin paper, thick paper, colored paper Sub finishing tray (Tray 1): Sort, group: Plain paper (60 g/m2 to 90 g/m2), thick paper (91 g/m2 to 200 g/m2), thin paper (50 g/m2 to 59 g/m2), tab paper Booklet tray: Half-fold, tri-fold: Plain paper (60 g/m2 to 90 g/m2) Center staple & fold: Plain paper (60 g/m2 to 80 g/m2) Paper sizes Main finishing tray (Tray 2): Standard sizes: A3 w to A5 w*1/v, 11 e 17 w to 5-1/2 e 8-1/2 w*1/v, Foolscap*2, 8K w, 16K w/v, wide paper (A3W w to A5W v, 11 e 17W w to 5-1/2 e 8-1/2W v) Custom sizes: 182 mm e 148 mm to 314 mm e 458 mm, 128 mm e 139 mm*1 Sub finishing tray (Tray 1): Standard sizes: A3w to A5 w/v, B6 w, A6 w, 13 e 19 w, 12 e 18 w to 5-1/2 e 8-1/2 w/v, Foolscap*2, 8K w, 16K w/v, wide paper (A3W w to A5W w/v, 11 e 17W w to 5-1/2 e 8-1/2W w/v) Custom sizes: 100 mm e 139 mm to 331 mm e 488 mm Staple: Standard sizes: A3 w to A5 v, 11 e 17 w to 5-1/2 e 8-1/2 v, Foolscap*2, 8K w, 16K w/v, wide paper (A3W w to A5W v, 11 e 17W w to 5-1/2 e 8-1/2W v) Custom sizes: 182 mm e 139 mm to 314 mm e 458 mm Booklet tray: Standard sizes (Half-fold, center staple & fold): A3 w, B4 w, A4 w, 11 e 17 w, 8-1/2 e 14 w, 8-1/2 e 11 w, 8K w, wide paper (A3W w, B4W w, A4W w, 11 e 17W w, 8-1/2 e 11W w) Standard sizes (Tri-fold): A4 w, 8-1/2 e 11 w, 16K w Custom sizes (Half-fold, center staple & fold): 210 mm e 279 mm to 314 mm e 458 mm Output tray capacity Main output tray (Tray 2): B4 or larger: 1500 sheets A4 to B5: 2500 sheets A5 or smaller: 500 sheets Sub output tray (Tray 1): 200 sheets Booklet tray: Half-fold (3 sheets): 25 to 33 sets Center staple & fold (5 sheets): 15 to 20 sets Tri-fold (1 sheet): 50 sets Staple settings Maximum number of bound sheets: 50 sheets (60 g/m2 to 80 g/m2) Maximum number of sheets bound with center staple & fold: 20 sheets (60 g/m2 to 80 g/m2) Punch settings Uses the optional punch settings. Power requirements Supplied from main unit Maximum power consumption 80 W or less Dimensions 680 (800) (W) e 656 (D) e 990 (H) mm The value in parentheses is the dimension when the tray is pulled out. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 6-9 Specifications 6 *1 Cannot be used with Finishing settings. *2 Foolscap includes the following 4 types: 8-1/8 e 13-1/4 w, 8-1/4 e 13 w, 8-1/2 e 13 w, 8 e 13 w, one of which can be selected. For details, contact the service representative. 6.2.6 Punch Kit PK-504/PK-505 * Foolscap includes the following 4 types: 8-1/8 e 13-1/4 w, 8-1/4 e 13 w, 8-1/2 e 13 w, 8 e 13 w, one of which can be selected. For details, contact the service representative. 6.2.7 Z Folding Unit ZU-604/ZU-605 * Foolscap includes the following 4 types: 8-1/8 e 13-1/4 w, 8-1/4 e 13 w, 8-1/2 e 13 w, 8 e 13 w, one of which can be selected. For details, contact the service representative. Weight Approx. 65 kg Consumables Staple cartridge Item Description Item Description Name PK-505/PK-504 Function Hole-punches for filing. Number of holes 2 holes or 4 holes Hole diameter 6.5 +/- 0.5 mm Hole pitch 2-Hole/4-Hole: 80.0 +/- 0.5 mm 4-Hole Swedish punch: 21 mm +/- 1 mm / 70 mm +/- 1 mm / 21 mm +/- 1 mm Paper types Plain paper (60 g/m2 to 90 g/m2), thick paper (91 g/m2 to 128 g/m2) Paper sizes 2 holes: A3 w to A5 w/v, 11 e 17 w to 5-1/2 e 8-1/2 w/v, Foolscap*, 8K w, 16K w/v 4 holes: A3 w, B4 w, A4 v, B5 v, 11 e 17 w, 8-1/2 e 11 w, 8K w, 16K v Power requirements Supplied from finisher Dimensions 148 (W) e 509 (D) e 122 (H) mm Weight Approx. 3 kg Item Description Name ZU-604/ZU-605 Function Hole-punches for filing. Z-fold Number of holes 2 holes or 4 holes Hole diameter 6.5 +/- 0.5 mm Hole pitch 2-Hole/4-Hole: 80.0 +/- 0.5 mm 4-Hole Swedish punch: 21 mm +/- 1 mm / 70 mm +/- 1 mm / 21 mm +/- 1 mm Paper type for outputting hole-punched paper Plain paper (60 g/m2 to 90 g/m2), thin paper (50 g/m2 to 59 g/m2) Paper size for outputting hole-punched paper 2 holes: A3 w to A5 w/v, 11 e 17 w, 8-1/2 e 14 w to 5-1/2 e 8-1/2 w/v, Foolscap*, 8K w, 16K w/v 4 holes: A3 w to A4 w, B5 v, 11 e 17 w, 8-1/2 e 11 w, 8K w, 16K v Fold type Z-fold Paper type for outputting zfolded paper Plain paper (60 g/m2 to 90 g/m2), thin paper (50 g/m2 to 59 g/m2) Paper size for outputting zfolded paper A3 w, B4 w Power requirements Supplied from main unit Dimensions 169 (W) e 660 (D) e 930 (H) mm Weight Approx. 38 kg 6 Specifications 6-10 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 6.2.8 Post Inserter PI-504 * Foolscap includes the following 4 types: 8-1/8 e 13-1/4 w, 8-1/4 e 13 w, 8-1/2 e 13 w, 8 e 13 w, one of which can be selected. For details, contact the service representative. 6.2.9 Shift Tray SF-602 *1 Cannot be used with Finishing settings. *2 Foolscap includes the following 4 types: 8-1/8 × 13-1/4 w, 8-1/4 × 13 w, 8-1/2 × 13 w, 8 × 13 w, one of which can be selected. For details, contact the service representative. Item Description Name PI-504 Configuration 2 (upper and lower) paper trays Cover sheet type Plain paper (60 g/m2 to 90 g/m2), thick paper (91 g/m2 to 200 g/m2), thin paper (50 g/m2 to 59 g/m2) Cover sheet size Upper tray: Standard sizes: A4 w/v to A5 v, 8-1/2 e 11w/v to 5-1/2 e 8-1/2v, 16Kw/v, wide paper (A4W w/v to A5W v, 8-1/2 e 11W w/v to 5-1/2 e 8-1/2W v) Lower tray: Standard sizes: A3 w to A5 v, 11 e 17 w to 5-1/2 e 8-1/2 v, Foolscap*, 8K w, 16K w/v, wide paper (11 e 17W w to 5-1/2 e 8-1/2W v, A3W w to A5W v) Custom sizes: 182 mm e 139 mm to 314 mm e 458 mm Paper capacity 200 sheets for each of the upper and lower trays Power requirements Supplied from finisher Maximum power consumption 30 W or less Dimensions 511 (W) e 620 (D) e 220 (H) mm Weight Approx. 10.5 kg Item Description Name SF-602 Function Straight delivery (sorted, grouped) Offset stack (sort and offset, group and offset) Amount of shift 30 mm Paper types Plain paper (60 g/m2 to 90 g/m2), thick paper (91 g/m2 to 216 g/m2), thin paper (52 g/m2 to 59 g/m2), OHP transparencies*1, trace paper*1, tab paper*1 Paper sizes Standard sizes: A3 w to A5 w/v, B6 w*1, A6 w, 11 × 17 w to 5-1/2 × 8-1/2 w/v, 7-1/4 × 10-1/2 w*1/v*1, Foolscap*2, 8K w, 16K w/v Custom sizes: 105 mm × 139 mm to 305 mm × 458 mm*1, 139 mm × 139 mm to 314 mm × 458 mm Output tray capacity A4 to B5: 1250 sheets B4 or larger, A5 v: 500 sheets A5 w or smaller: 100 sheets Power requirements Supplied from main unit Dimensions 400 (490) (W) × 600 (D) × 480 (H) mm The value in parentheses is the dimension when the tray is pulled out. Weight Approx. 14 kg bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 6-11 Specifications 6 6.2.10 Output Tray OT-505 6.2.11 Authentication Unit (Biometric Type) AU-101 Item Description Name OT-505 Function Paper output tray for main unit Paper types Plain paper (60 g/m2 to 90 g/m2), thick paper (91 g/m2 to 200 g/m2), thin paper (50 g/m2 to 59 g/m2), OHP transparencies, trace paper, tab paper Output tray capacity Max. 150 sheets Dimensions 215 (335) (W) × 365 (D) × 70 (H) mm The value in parentheses is the dimension when the tray is pulled out. Weight Approx. 0.56 kg Item Description Name AU-101 Compatible finger width 10 mm to less than 25 mm Interface USB 2.0 Dimensions Approx. 78 mm (W) × 95 mm (D) × 55 mm (H) Weight Approx. 150 g (not including the USB cable) Power consumption DC 5 V, 500 mA Environment conditions (when operating) Temperature 10 to 35 °C Humidity 10 to 80% (Must be no condensation) Environment conditions (when not operating) Temperature -10 to 60 °C Humidity 10 to 80% (Must be no condensation) Computer Processor PC/AT compatible, 1 GHz or more Memory 128 MB or more Hard disk drive Available hard disk space: 100 MB or more Monitor 800 × 600 pixels, 16-bit color or more Network TCP/IP protocol Application Microsoft Internet Explorer 6.0 (SP1 or later) Microsoft .NET Framework 2.0 (Windows 2000) Microsoft .NET Framework 2.0 SP2 (Windows XP) Microsoft .NET Framework 3.5 SP1 (Windows Vista) Interface USB 1.1 or later Supported operating systems Windows 2000 Professional (SP4) Windows XP Professional (SP3 or later) Windows XP Professional x64 Edition (SP2 or later) Windows Vista Enterprise (SP2 or later)* Windows Vista Ultimate (SP2 or later)* *Supports 32-bit (x86)/64-bit (x64) environment. 6 Specifications 6-12 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 6.2.12 Authentication Unit (IC Card Type) AU-201 6.2.13 Other options Image Controller IC-208 Mount Kit MK-716 Fax Kit FK-502 Hard Disk HD-510 Staple Kit SK-602 Staple MS-10A Staple MS-5C Key Counter Kit Key Counter Socket Security Kit SC-506 Working Table WT-504 Local Interface Kit EK-703 i-Option LK-101 i-Option LK-102 Upgrade Kit UK-202 Item Description Name AU-201 Dimensions Approx. 92 mm (W) × 64 mm (D) × 16 mm (H) Weight Approx. 120 g Power consumption Through USB port Environment conditions (when operating) Temperature 0 to 40 °C Humidity 20 to 85% (Must be no condensation) Environment conditions (when not operating) Temperature -20 to 50 °C Humidity 20 to 85% (Must be no condensation) Radio waves classification Induced reading/writing communication equipment Compatible card Processor Contactless IC card compliant with ISO 14443 Type A and FeliCa Computer Processor PC/AT compatible, 1 GHz or more Memory 128 MB or more Hard disk drive Available hard disk space: 100 MB or more Monitor 800 × 600 pixels, 16-bit color or more Network TCP/IP protocol Application Microsoft Internet Explorer 6.0 (SP1 or later) Microsoft .NET Framework 2.0 (Windows 2000) Microsoft .NET Framework 2.0 SP2 (Windows XP) Microsoft .NET Framework 3.5 SP1 (Windows Vista) Interface USB 1.1 or later Supported operating systems Windows 2000 Professional (SP4) Windows XP Professional (SP3 or later) Windows XP Professional x64 Edition (SP2 or later) Windows Vista Enterprise (SP2 or later)* Windows Vista Ultimate (SP2 or later)* *Supports 32-bit (x86)/64-bit (x64) environment. 7 Copy paper/originals bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 7-3 Copy paper/originals 7 7 Copy paper/originals 7.1 Copy paper Available paper size/type is restricted in each equipment. 7.1.1 Paper tray and equipment This machine is equipped with the following trays for loading copy paper. - Main unit trays: Tray 1, 2, 3 and 4 - Bypass tray - Large capacity unit LU-405/406 Also, the following equipment is provided for conveying/delivering copies. - ADU (Automatic Duplex Unit) (built in to the main unit) - Finisher FS-524 (built-in staple unit) - Finisher FS-525 (built-in staple unit) - Finisher FS-610 (built-in stable unit and folding unit) - Punch Kit PK-504/PK-505 (for Finisher FS-524/525/610) - Z Folding Unit ZU-604/ZU-605 (built-in punch kit) - Post Inserter PI-504 (for Finisher FS-524/525/610) - Shift Tray SF-602 (for the machine without finisher) - Output Tray OT-505 (for the machine without finisher) 7.1.2 Paper weight Paper trays Paper Weight Main unit trays (Tray 1, 2, 3 and 4) 60 g/m2 to 90 g/m2 Select "thick paper" when loading 91 g/m2 to 200 g/m2 paper. Select "thin paper" when loading 50 g/m2 to 59 g/m2 paper. Large capacity unit LU-405 Large capacity unit LU-406 Bypass tray Post Inserter PI-504 Equipment Paper Weight Automatic Duplex Unit 60 g/m2 to 200 g/m2 Finisher FS-524 + Punch Kit PK-505/ PK-504 Sort, group: 50 g/m2 to 200 g/m2 Sort and offset, group and offset: 50 g/m2 to 200 g/m2 Staple: 60 g/m2 to 90 g/m2 Punch: 60 g/m2 to 128 g/m2 Finisher FS-525 + Punch Kit PK-505/ PK-504 Sort, group: 50 g/m2 to 200 g/m2 Sort and offset, group and offset: 50 g/m2 to 200 g/m2 Staple: 60 g/m2 to 80 g/m2 Punch: 60 g/m2 to 128 g/m2 Finisher FS-610 + Punch Kit PK-505/ PK-504 Sort, group: 50 g/m2 to 200 g/m2 Sort and offset, group and offset: 50 g/m2 to 200 g/m2 Staple: 60 g/m2 to 80 g/m2 Half-fold, Tri-fold: 60 g/m2 to 90 g/m2 Center staple & fold: 60 g/m2 to 80 g/m2 Punch: 60 g/m2 to 128 g/m2 Z Folding Unit ZU-604/ZU-605 Z-fold: 50 g/m2 to 90 g/m2 Shift Tray SF-602 52 g/m2 to 216 g/m2 Output Tray OT-505 52 g/m2 to 216 g/m2 7 Copy paper/originals 7-4 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 7.1.3 Paper Tray/Output Tray capacity 7.1.4 Paper size Paper trays Capacity Main unit paper tray (Tray 1) 1650 sheets (64 g/m2) Main unit paper tray (Tray 2) 1100 sheets (64 g/m2) Main unit paper tray (Tray 3/4) 550 sheets (64 g/m2) Large capacity unit LU-405 4000 sheets (80 g/m2) Large capacity unit LU-406 4000 sheets (80 g/m2) Bypass tray Plain paper: 100 sheets (80 g/m2) Special paper: 1 sheet Post Inserter PI-504 200 sheets (80 g/m2) Equipment Capacity Automatic Duplex Unit Unlimited Finisher FS-524 Main finishing tray (Tray 2): B4 or larger: 1500 sheets (80 g/m2) A4 to B5: 3000 sheets (80 g/m2) A5 or smaller: 500 sheets (80 g/m2) Staple: 100 to 20 sets (60 g/m2 to 90 g/m2) Sub finishing tray (Tray 1): 200 sheets (80 g/m2) Finisher FS-525 Main finishing tray (Tray 2): B4 or larger: 1500 sheets (80 g/m2) A4 to B5: 3000 sheets (80 g/m2) A5 or smaller: 500 sheets (80 g/m2) Staple: 100 to 20 sets (60 g/m2 to 80 g/m2) Sub finishing tray (Tray 1): 200 sheets (80 g/m2) Finisher FS-610 Main finishing tray (Tray 2): B4 or larger: 1500 sheets (80 g/m2) A4 to B5: 2500 sheets (80 g/m2) A5 or smaller: 500 sheets (80 g/m2) Staple: 100 to 20 sets (60 g/m2 to 80 g/m2) Sub finishing tray (Tray 1): 200 sheets (80 g/m2) Booklet tray: Half-fold (tri-fold): 25 to 33 sets (80 g/m2) Center staple & fold (5 sheets): 15 to 20 sets (80 g/m2) Tri-fold (1 sheet): 50 sets (80 g/m2) Shift Tray SF-602 A4 to B5: 1250 sheets (80 g/m2) B4 or larger, A5 v: 500 sheets (80 g/m2) A5 w or smaller: 100 sheets (80 g/m2) Output Tray OT-505 150 sheets (80 g/m2) Paper Trays Available Size Main unit paper tray (Tray 1/2) A4 v, B5 v, A5 v, 8-1/2 e 11 v, 5-1/2 e 8-1/2 v, 16K v Main unit paper tray (Tray 3/4) Standard sizes: A3 w to A5 v, 11 e 17 w, 8-1/2 e 14 w, 8-1/2 e 11 w/v, 5-1/2 e 8-1/2 v, Foolscap*, wide paper (A3W w to A5W v, 11 e 17W w, 8-1/2 e 11W w/v, 5-1/2 e 8-1/2W v) Custom sizes: 182 mm e 140 mm to 314 mm e 458 mm Large capacity unit LU-405 Standard sizes: A4 v, B5 v, 8-1/2 e 11 v, 16K v, wide paper (A4W v, B5W v, 8-1/2 e 11W v) Custom sizes: 182 mm e 257 mm to 223 mm e 314 mm bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 7-5 Copy paper/originals 7 * Foolscap includes the following 4 types: 8-1/8 e 13-1/4 w, 8-1/4 e 13 w, 8-1/2 e 13 w, 8 e 13 w, one of which can be selected. For details, contact the service representative. Large capacity unit LU-406 Standard sizes: A3 w, B4 w, A4 w/v, 11 e 17 w, 8-1/2 e 14 w, 8-1/2 e 11w/v, Foolscap*, 8K w, 16K w, wide paper (A3W w, B4W w, A4W w/v, 11 e 17W w, 8-1/2 e 11W w/v) Custom sizes: 195 mm e 210 mm to 314 mm e 458 mm Bypass tray Standard sizes: A3 v to B6 w, 11 e 17 w, 8-1/2 e 14 w, 8-1/2 e 11 w/v, 5-1/2 e 8-1/2 w/v, wide paper (A3W w to A5W w/v, 11 e 17W w, 8-1/2 e 11W w/v, 5-1/2 e 8-1/2W w/v) Custom sizes: 100 mm e 140 mm to 314 mm e 458 mm Post Inserter PI-504 Upper tray: Standard sizes: A4 w/v to A5 v, 8-1/2 e 11 w/v to 5-1/2 e 8-1/2 v, 16K w/v, wide paper (A4W w/v to A5W v, 8-1/2 e 11W w/v to 5-1/2 e 8-1/2W v) Custom sizes: 182 mm e 139 mm to 216 mm e 297 mm Lower tray: Standard sizes: A3 w to A5 v, 11 e 17 w to 5-1/2 e 8-1/2 v, Foolscap*, 8K w, 16K w/v, wide paper (A3W w to A5W v, 11 e 17W w to 5-1/2 e 8-1/2W v) Custom sizes: 182 mm e 139 mm to 314 mm e 458 mm Equipment Available Size Automatic Duplex Unit Standard sizes: A3 w to A5 w/v, B6 w, A6 w, 11 e 17 w to 5-1/2 e 8-1/2 w/v, Foolscap*2, 8K w, 16K w/v, wide paper (A3W w to A5W w/v, 11 e 17W w to 5-1/2 e 8-1/2W w/v) Custom sizes: 105 mm e 140 mm to 314 mm e 458 mm Finisher FS-524 Main finishing tray (Tray 2): Standard sizes: A3 w to A5 w*1/v, 11 e 17 w to 5-1/2 e 8-1/2 w*1/v, Foolscap*2, 8K w, 16K w/v, wide paper (A3W w to A5W v, 11 e 17W w to 5-1/2 e 8-1/2W v) Custom sizes: 182 mm e 148 mm to 314 mm e 458 mm, 128 mm e 139 mm*1 Sub finishing tray (Tray 1): Standard sizes: A3 w to A5 w/v, B6 w, A6 w, 11 e 17 w to 5-1/2 e 8-1/2 w/v, Foolscap*2, 8K w, 16K w/v, wide paper (A3W w to A5W w/v, 11 e 17W w to 5-1/2 e 8-1/2W w/v) Custom sizes: 100 mm e 139 mm to 331 mm e 488 mm Staple: Standard sizes: A3 w to A5 v, 11 e 17 w to 5-1/2 e 8-1/2 v, Foolscap*2, 8K w, 16K w/v, wide paper (A3W w to A5W v, 11 e 17W w to 5-1/2 e 8-1/2W v) Custom sizes: 182 mm e 139 mm to 314 mm e 458 mm Finisher FS-525 Main finishing tray (Tray 2): Standard sizes: A3 w to A5 w*1/v, 11 e 17 w to 5-1/2 e 8-1/2 w*1/v, Foolscap*2, 8K w, 16K w/v, wide paper (A3W w to A5W v, 11 e 17W w to 5-1/2 e 8-1/2W v) Custom sizes: 182 mm e 148 mm to 314 mm e 458 mm, 128 mm e 139 mm*1 Sub finishing tray (Tray 1): Standard sizes: A3 w to A5 w/v, B6 w, A6 w, 11 e 17 w to 5-1/2 e 8-1/2 w/v, Foolscap*2, 8K w, 16K w/v, wide paper (A3W w to A5W w/v, 11 e 17W w to 5-1/2 e 8-1/2W w/v) Custom sizes: 100 mm e 139 mm to 331 mm e 488 mm Staple: Standard sizes: A3 w to A5 v, 11 e 17 w to 5-1/2 e 8-1/2 v, Foolscap*2, 8K w, 16K w/v, wide paper (A3W w to A5W v, 11 e 17W w to 5-1/2 e 8-1/2W v) Custom sizes: 182 mm e 139 mm to 314 mm e 458 mm Paper Trays Available Size 7 Copy paper/originals 7-6 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) *1 Cannot be used with Finishing settings. *2 Foolscap includes the following 4 types: 8-1/8 e 13-1/4 w, 8-1/4 e 13 w, 8-1/2 e 13 w, 8 e 13 w, one of which can be selected. For details, contact the service representative. 7.1.5 Special paper When loading the paper except normal (overhead projection transparent film, thick paper, colored paper etc.), select the appropriate name from 10. A paper tray with this setting is not automatically selected when the Auto Paper Select setting is specified or when the paper trays are switched automatically. Available paper types depend on the paper tray. For details on the paper setting for bypass tray, see "Specifying a paper type for bypass tray" on page 7-19. For details on paper type setting for "Paper type setting for a tray" on page 7-21. Finisher FS-610 Main finishing tray (Tray 2): Standard sizes: A3 w to A5 w*1/v, 11 e 17 w to 5-1/2 e 8-1/2 w*1/v, Foolscap*2, 8K w, 16K w/v, wide paper (A3W w to A5W v, 11 e 17W w to 5-1/2 e 8-1/2W v) Custom sizes: 182 mm e 148 mm to 314 mm e 458 mm, 128 mm e 139 mm*1 Sub finishing tray (Tray 1): Standard sizes: A3 w to A5 w/v, B6 w, A6 w, 13 e 19 w, 12 e 18 w to 5-1/2 e 8-1/2 w/v, Foolscap*2, 8K w, 16K w/v, wide paper (A3W w to A5W w/v, 11 e 17W w to 5-1/2 e 8-1/2W w/v) Custom sizes: 100 mm e 139 mm to 331 mm e 488 mm Staple: Standard sizes: A3 w to A5 v, 11 e 17 w to 5-1/2 e 8-1/2 v, Foolscap*2, 8K w, 16K w/v, wide paper (A3W w to A5W v, 11 e 17W w to 5-1/2 e 8-1/2W v) Custom sizes: 182 mm e 139 mm to 314 mm e 458 mm Booklet tray: Standard sizes (Half-fold, center staple & fold): A3 w, B4 w, A4 w, 11 e 17 w, 8-1/2 e 14 w, 8-1/2 e 11 w, 8K w, wide paper (A3W w, B4W w, A4W w, 11 e 17W w, 8-1/2 e 11W w) Standard sizes (Tri-fold): A4 w, 8-1/2 e 11 w, 16K w Custom sizes (Half-fold, center staple & fold): 210 mm e 279 mm to 314 mm e 458 mm Shift Tray SF-602 Standard sizes: A3 w to A5 w/v, B6 w*1, A6 w, 11 e 17 w to 5-1/2 e 8-1/2 w/v, 7-1/4 e 10-1/2 w*1/v*1, Foolscap*2, 8K w, 16K w/v Custom sizes: 105 mm e 139 mm to 305 mm e 458 mm*1, 139 mm e 139 mm to 314 mm e 458 mm Output Tray OT-505 Standard sizes: A3 w, B4 w, A4v, B5 w/v, 11 e 17 w, 8-1/2 e 14 w, 8-1/2 e 11 w/v, 5-1/2 e 8-1/2 w/v, wide paper (A3W w, B4W w, A4W v, B5W w/v, 11 e 17W w, 8-1/2 e 11W w/v, 5-1/2 e 8-1/2W w/v) Custom sizes: 100 mm e 140 mm to 314 mm e 458 mm Equipment Available Size No. Paper type/Icon Description 1 OHP Select this setting when overhead projection transparent films are loaded. 2 Special Paper Select this setting when special paper, for example, high-quality paper, is loaded as plain paper with a weight of 60 g/m2 to 90 g/m2. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 7-7 Copy paper/originals 7 3 Thick Paper Select this setting when the thick paper that is loaded has a weight to 91 g/m2 to 200 g/m2. 4 Thin Paper Select this setting when the Thin paper that is loaded has a weight of 50 g/m2 to 59 g/m2. 5 Letterhead Select this setting when plain paper that is loaded has a weight of 60 g/m2 to 90 g/m2 and is already printed with a company name or preset text. 6 Colored Paper Select this setting when plain colored paper weighing from 60 g/m2 to 90 g/m2 is loaded. 7 Tab Paper 1 Select this setting when tab paper is loaded. 8 Trace Paper Select this setting when trace paper is loaded. 9 User Paper 1 Select this setting when paper that is loaded has a weight of 60 g/m2 to 90 g/m2 and does not match with any other paper type. For details, contact your service representative. 10 User Paper 2 Select this setting when paper that is loaded has a weight of 60 g/m2 to 90 g/m2 and does not match with any other paper type. For details, contact your service representative. 11 User Paper 3 Select this setting when paper that is loaded has a weight of 60 g/m2 to 90 g/m2 and does not match with any other paper type. For details, contact your service representative. 12 Recycled Select this setting when using recycled paper. 13 Fine Select this setting when high-quality paper is loaded. 14 Labels Select this setting when label sheets are loaded. No. Paper type/Icon Description 7 Copy paper/originals 7-8 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 7.1.6 Precautions for paper Do not use the following types of paper. Otherwise, decreased print quality, paper misfeeds or damage may result. - OHP transparencies that have already been fed through the machine (even if the transparency is still blank) - Paper that has been printed on with a heat-transfer printer or an inkjet printer - Paper that is either extremely thick or extremely thin - Folded, curled, wrinkled, or torn paper - Paper that has been left unwrapped for a long period of time - Damp paper, perforated paper, or paper with punched holes - Extremely smooth or extremely rough paper, or paper with an uneven surface - Paper that has been treated, such as carbon-backed, heat-sensitive or pressure-sensitive paper - Paper that has been decorated with foil or embossing - Paper of a non-standard shape (not rectangular) - Paper that is bound with glue, staples or paper clips - Paper with labels attached - Paper with ribbons, hooks, buttons, etc., attached 7.1.7 Paper storage Store paper in a cool, dark location with little humidity. If the paper becomes damp, paper misfeeds may occur. Paper that has not been loaded should be kept wrapped or placed in a plastic bag and stored in a cool, dark location with little humidity. Store the paper laying flat, not standing on its edge. Curled paper may cause paper misfeeds. Keep paper out of the reach of children. 7.1.8 Auto Tray Switch Function If the selected paper tray runs out of paper while a job is being printed and a different paper tray is loaded with paper meeting the following conditions, the other paper tray is automatically selected so printing can continue. If the optional large capacity unit LU-203 is installed, a maximum of 5,650 copies can be made continuously. (The paper tray is automatically switched only if the "ATS Permission parameter" in the Utility mode is set to "Permit".) Operating Conditions (Set the following condition at "1 System Setting>3 Paper Tray Setting" of User Setting.) - Select the paper trays to be selected automatically by "Auto Tray Select Setting", if Auto paper select is functioned. Tray Priority is available. - Select "Allow" at "Auto Tray Switch ON/OFF" - Select the same paper type at "Paper Type". Load the following paper into the paper trays. - The same size in the same orientation. - The same paper type. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 7-9 Copy paper/originals 7 7.2 Selecting the paper settings for bypass tray This section describes the procedures for specifying the size and type of paper loaded in bypass tray. ! Detail For details on loading the paper into the bypass tray, refer to "Loading paper into the bypass tray" on page 2-55. 7.2.1 Automatically detecting the paper size ("Auto Detect" setting) The size of the paper loaded into bypass tray can be detected automatically. 1 In the Basic screen, touch [Paper]. The Paper screen appears. 2 Touch the button for bypass tray. 3 Touch [Change Tray Settings]. 7 Copy paper/originals 7-10 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 4 Touch [Auto Detect]. As the factory default, "Auto Detect" is selected. 5 Touch [OK], and then touch [OK] in the next screen that appears. The Basic screen appears again. 7.2.2 Selecting a paper size setting (Size setting) The paper size can be set for the bypass tray so that it can be used with the specified paper size. This is useful, for example, when the size of the paper that is loaded cannot be automatically detected (such as with paper in inch sizes). The following procedure describes how to specify the setting for 8-1/2 e 11 w loaded into the bypass tray. 1 In the Basic screen, touch [Paper]. The Paper screen appears. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 7-11 Copy paper/originals 7 2 Select the button for the bypass tray. 3 Touch [Change Tray Settings]. 4 Touch [Standard Size]. The Standard Size screen appears. 5 Touch [8-1/2 e 11 w]. 7 Copy paper/originals 7-12 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 6 Touch [OK], and then touch [OK] in the next two screens that appear. The Basic screen appears again. The paper size for the bypass tray is set. 2 Reminder If paper other than the specified paper size is loaded, a paper misfeed may occur since the paper size is not automatically detected. 7.2.3 Specifying a non-standard paper size (Custom size settings) If paper other than standard-size paper is loaded into the bypass tray, it will be necessary to enter the paper size. 1 In the Basic screen, touch [Paper]. The Paper screen appears. 2 Select the button for the bypass tray. 3 Touch [Change Tray Settings]. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 7-13 Copy paper/originals 7 4 Touch [Custom Size]. The Custom Size screen appears. 5 Type in the length (X) and width (Y) of the paper. – Make sure that [X] is selected, touch [<->] to switch between the integer and the fraction, and then touch [–] and [+] to type in the length of side X. (139.7 mm to 458.0 mm) – Make sure that [Y] is selected, touch [<->] to switch between the integer and the fraction, and then touch [–] and [+] to type in the length of side Y. (100.0 mm to 314.0 mm) – If a decimal value is displayed in the Custom Size screen, use the keypad to type in the setting. For details on switching between decimal and fraction values, refer to "System Settings" on page 12-17. – If a decimal value is displayed in the screen and the specified value is outside the allowable range, the message "Input Error" appears. Type a value within the allowable range. If the value was incorrectly entered, press the [C] (clear) key to erase the value, and then specify the correct value. To cancel changes to the settings, touch [Cancel]. ? Can paper sizes be stored? % Five non-standard paper sizes can be stored. % To recall a stored paper size, touch the corresponding memory key. % The names "memory1" through "memory5" can be changed. For details on changing the names, refer to "Storing a non-standard paper size (Custom size settings)" on page 7-14. % For details on storing paper sizes, refer to "Storing a non-standard paper size (Custom size settings)" on page 7-14. 6 Touch [OK], and then touch [OK] in the next two screens that appear. The Basic screen appears again. 7 Copy paper/originals 7-14 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 7.2.4 Storing a non-standard paper size (Custom size settings) Five non-standard paper sizes can be stored. Storing paper sizes that are used often allows the paper size to be quickly selected, without having to reenter the setting. 1 In the Basic screen, touch [Paper]. The Paper screen appears. 2 Select the button for the bypass tray. 3 Touch [Change Tray Settings]. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 7-15 Copy paper/originals 7 4 Touch [Custom Size]. The Custom Size screen appears. 5 Specify the × and Y sides of the paper, and then touch [Store]. – Make sure that [X] is selected, touch [<->] to switch between the integer and the fraction, and then touch [–] and [+] to type in the length of side X. (139.7 mm to 458.0 mm) – Make sure that [Y] is selected, touch [<->] to switch between the integer and the fraction, and then touch [–] and [+] to type in the length of side Y. (100.0 mm to 314.0 mm) – If a decimal value is displayed in the Custom Size screen, use the keypad to type in the setting. For details on switching between decimal and fraction values, refer to "System Settings" on page 12-17. – If a decimal value is displayed in the screen and the specified value is outside the allowable range, the message "Input Error" appears. Type a value within the allowable range. If the value was incorrectly entered, press the [C] (clear) key to erase the value, and then specify the correct value. To cancel changes to the settings, touch [Cancel]. 7 Copy paper/originals 7-16 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 6 Touch the memory button where the paper size is to be stored. – To change the name of a memory key, touch [Change Custom Size Name], and then touch the key to be renamed. Using the keyboard that appears, type in the name of the key, touch [OK], and then touch [Close]. For details on typing in text, refer to "Entering text" on page 15-3. 7 Touch [OK], and then touch [OK] in the next three screens that appear. The Basic screen appears again. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 7-17 Copy paper/originals 7 7.2.5 Selecting a setting for oversized paper (Wide paper settings) If paper one size larger than a standard size is being used in the bypass tray, specify a setting for wide paper. ! Detail By specifying paper one size larger than the document as wide paper, the document can be copied at the center so that there is no loss of the document image. When specifying wide paper for the bypass tray, non-standard-sized paper can be specified. When using non-standard-sized paper, enter the paper size. For details on the setting for tray 3 and tray 4, refer to "To select a setting for oversized paper" on page 7-27 For details on loading the paper into the bypass tray, refer to "Loading paper into the bypass tray" on page 2-55. The following procedure describes how to specify the setting for wide paper loaded into the bypass tray. 1 In the Basic screen, touch [Paper]. The Paper screen appears. 2 Touch the button for the bypass tray. 3 Touch [Change Tray Settings]. 7 Copy paper/originals 7-18 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 4 Touch [Wide Paper]. The Wide Paper screen appears. 5 Select the size of the paper to be loaded. – Touch and until the button for the desired paper size is displayed. 6 To change the size, touch [Change Size]. The Change Size screen for oversized paper appears. 7 Specify the X and Y sides of the paper, and then touch [OK]. – Touch either [X] or [Y], press the [C] (clear) key to clear the current setting, and then use the keypad to type in the size. – If a decimal value is displayed in the Custom Size screen, use the keypad to type in the setting. For details on switching between decimal and fraction values, refer to "System Settings" on page 12-17. – If the orientation of the loaded paper does not match the sizes specified for "X" and "Y", "Input error" appears, even if the values are within the allowable range. In addition, do not enter the same size for "X" and "Y". – If a decimal value is displayed in the screen and the specified value is outside the allowable range, the message "Input Error" appears. Type a value within the allowable range. If the value was incorrectly entered, press the [C] (clear) key to erase the value, and then specify the correct value. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 7-19 Copy paper/originals 7 To cancel changes to the settings, touch [Cancel]. 8 Touch [OK], and then touch [OK] in the next two screens that appear. The Basic screen appears again. 2 Note The selected size button is programmed with the entered paper size, so that the paper size is available to be selected again without being typed in. In addition, the size can be changed. 7.2.6 Specifying a paper type for bypass tray If paper other than plain paper, such as OHP transparencies or special paper, is loaded in bypass tray, be sure to change the paper type setting. 1 In the Basic screen, touch [Paper]. The Paper screen appears. 7 Copy paper/originals 7-20 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 2 Touch the button for the bypass tray. – If a setting for special paper is selected, the bypass is not selected automatically with the "Auto" Paper setting. – The auto tray switch feature applies only to paper trays specified with the same paper type setting. 3 Touch [Change Tray Settings]. 4 Select the appropriate setting for the type of special paper that is loaded. – Touch the button for the desired paper type. 5 Touch [OK], and then touch [OK] in the next screen that appears. The Basic screen appears again. 2 Reminder If special paper is loaded into the bypass tray, be sure to select the corresponding paper type, otherwise a paper misfeed may occur. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 7-21 Copy paper/originals 7 7.3 Paper type setting for a tray This section describes the procedures for specifying the size of paper loaded in the tray 3 and 4 and the type of paper loaded in each paper tray. 7.3.1 To display the paper tray setting screen The following procedure describes how to display the Paper Tray Setting screen. 1 Press the [Utility/Counter] key. 2 Touch [2 User Setting]. – An item can also be selected by pressing the key in the keypad for the number beside the desired button. – For "2 User Setting", press the [2] key in the keypad. 3 Touch [1 System Setting]. The System Setting screen appears. 7 Copy paper/originals 7-22 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 4 Touch [3 Paper Tray Setting]. The Paper Tray Setting screen appears. 2 Note To change the paper size for paper loaded into the tray 3 and 4 and the LCT, contact your service representative. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 7-23 Copy paper/originals 7 7.3.2 To specify a standard size paper ("Standard Size 1" settings) A standard paper size can be set for the tray 3 and 4. The following procedure describes how to specify the setting for standard-sized paper loaded into the tray 3. 1 In the Paper Tray Setting screen, touch [5 Paper Type/Size Settings]. – For details on displaying the Paper Tray Setting screen, refer to "To display the paper tray setting screen" on page 7-21. – For details on loading the paper into tray 3 and 4, refer to "Loading paper into the bypass tray" on page 2-55. The Paper Type/Size settings screen appears. 2 Touch the button for the tray 3, and then touch [Standard Size 1] under "Paper Size". 3 Touch [OK]. If standard-sized paper is loaded into a paper tray, the paper size is automatically detected. 7 Copy paper/originals 7-24 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 7.3.3 To specify a setting for standard special-sized paper (Special size settings) If standard centimeter-sized paper is being used in the tray 3 and 4, specify a setting for standard specialsized paper. The following procedure describes how to specify the setting for standard special-sized paper loaded into the tray 3. 1 In the Paper Tray Setting screen, touch [5 Paper Type/Size Settings]. – For details on displaying the Paper Tray Setting screen, refer to "To display the paper tray setting screen" on page 7-21. – For details on loading the paper into tray 3 and 4, refer to "Loading paper into the bypass tray" on page 2-55. The Paper Type/Size Settings screen appears. 2 Touch the button for the tray 3, and then touch [Special Size] under "Paper Size". bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 7-25 Copy paper/originals 7 3 Select the size of the paper to be loaded. 4 Touch [OK]. 7.3.4 To specify a non-standard paper size (Custom size settings) If custom-sized paper is being used in the tray 3 and 4, specify a setting for custom-sized paper. The following procedure describes how to specify the setting for custom-sized paper loaded into the tray 3. 1 In the Paper Tray Setting screen, touch [5 Paper Type/Size Settings]. – For details on displaying the Paper Tray Setting screen, refer to "To display the paper tray setting screen" on page 7-21. – For details on changing the paper size for the tray 3 and 4, refer to "Loading paper into the bypass tray" on page 2-55. The Paper Type/Size Settings screen appears. 7 Copy paper/originals 7-26 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 2 Touch the button for the tray 3, and then touch [Custom Size] under "Paper Size". The Paper Size screen appears. 3 Type in the length (X) and width (Y) of the paper. – Touch [<->] to switch between the integer and the fraction, and then touch [–] and [+] to type in the length of side X. (139.7 mm to 458.0 mm) – Touch [<->] to switch between the integer and the fraction, and then touch [–] and [+] to type in the length of side Y. (182.0 mm to 314.0 mm) – If a decimal value is displayed in the screen, use the keypad to type in the length. For details on switching between decimal and fraction values, refer to "System Settings" on page 12-17. – If a decimal value is displayed in the screen and the specified value is outside the allowable range, the message "Input Error" appears. Type a value within the allowable range. If the value was incorrectly entered, press the [C] (clear) key to erase the value, and then specify the correct value. 4 Touch [OK]. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 7-27 Copy paper/originals 7 7.3.5 To select a setting for oversized paper If paper one size larger than a standard size is being used in the tray 3 and 4, specify a setting for wide paper. The following procedure describes how to specify the setting for wide paper loaded into the tray 3. 1 In the Paper Tray Setting screen, touch [5 Paper Type/Size Settings]. – For details on displaying the Paper Tray Setting screen, refer to "To display the paper tray setting screen" on page 7-21. – For details on loading the paper into tray 3 and 4, refer to "Loading paper into the bypass tray" on page 2-55. The Paper Type/Size Settings screen appears. 2 Touch the button for the tray 3, and then touch [Wide Paper] under "Paper Size". The Paper Size screen appears. 7 Copy paper/originals 7-28 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 3 Select the size of the paper to be loaded. – Touch [X] or [Y] in "Change size", touch [<->] to switch between the integer and the fraction, and then touch [–] and [+] to specify the size of the paper. – If a decimal value is displayed in the screen, use the keypad to type in the setting. For details on switching between decimal and fraction values, refer to "System Settings" on page 12-17. – If a decimal value is displayed in the screen and the specified value is outside the allowable range, the message "Input Error" appears. Type a value within the allowable range. If the value was incorrectly entered, press the [C] (clear) key to erase the value, and then specify the correct value. 4 Select the desired image position. 5 Touch [OK]. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 7-29 Copy paper/originals 7 7.3.6 Specifying a paper type This section describes the procedure for specifying a type of paper loaded in each tray. 2 Note Selecting "Letterhead" will change the print side to the reverse side. If a special paper type is selected, that tray is not selected automatically with the "Auto" Paper setting. The auto tray switch feature applies only to the trays specified with the same paper type setting. 1 Press the [Utility/Counter]. 2 Touch [2 User Settings], [1 System Settings], [3 Paper Tray Settings], and [5 Paper Type/Size Settings] in sequence. The Paper Type Settings screen appears. 7 Copy paper/originals 7-30 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 3 Touch to highlight the desired tray key under "Paper Tray" in the left side area of the screen, then touch [Paper Type] on the right side. The Paper Type screen appears. 4 Touch the desired paper type key to highlight it. 5 Touch [OK] to complete the setting. – To cancel the change, touch [Cancel]. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 7-31 Copy paper/originals 7 7.4 Originals When making copies, load the original into the ADF or position it on the original glass. To copy originals that cannot be loaded into the ADF, position them on the original glass. 7.4.1 Originals that can be loaded into the ADF There are two methods for using the ADF. The machine will detect the original size automatically when the original is positioned in the ADF, then select an appropriate paper size automatically by Auto Paper Select function. There are limits on the types of original that can be positioned with each method. - Normal method - For originals of mixed sizes - For Z-folded original Normal method Mixed Original Setting The following chart shows the possible combinations of standard- size paper that can be used with the "Mixed Original" setting. Z-Folded Original Setting Item Description Original paper weight 50 g/m2 to 200 g/m2 Original size 100 mm e 139.7 mm to 297 mm e 431.8 mm Auto original size detect A3 w to A5 w/v, 11 e 17 w, 8-1/2 e 11 v Curling tolerance 10 mm or less Paper capacity 100 sheets (80 g/m2) Item Description Original paper weight 50 g/m2 to 200 g/m2 Auto original size detect Two types of size combination are determined by the ADF guide width. Width of A3 w/A4 v: A3 w, B4 w, A4 w/v, B5 v, A5 v Width of B4 w/B5 v: B4 w, A4 w, B5 w/v, A5 v Width of A4 w/A5 v: A4 w, B5 w, A5 v Width of A5 w: A5 w, B6 w Curling tolerance 10 mm or less Paper capacity 100 sheets (80 g/m2) Item Description Original paper weight 50 g/m2 to 200 g/m2 Original size 100 mm e 139.7 mm to 297 mm e 431.8 mm Auto original size detect A3 w to A5 w/v, 11 e 17 w, 8-1/2 e 11 v Curling tolerance 10 mm or less Paper capacity 100 sheets (80 g/m2) 7 Copy paper/originals 7-32 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) Tab Original Setting 7.4.2 Precautions for loading originals into the ADF The following types of original should not be positioned into the ADF, otherwise paper misfeeds, damage to the original or the machine trouble may occur. - Wrinkled, folded, curled, or torn original - Highly translucent or transparent original, such as overhead transparencies or trace paper - Coated original such as carbon-backed paper - Original printed on paper thicker than 201 g/m2 - Original printed on paper thinner than 50 g/m2 - Original printed on paper thicker than 50 g/m2 during double-sided copying - Original that are bound, for example, with staples or paper clips - Original that are bound in a book or booklet - Original that are bound together with glue - Original pages that have been cut or contain cutouts - Label sheets - Offset printing masters - Original with binder holes - Original that have just been printed with this machine Item Description Original paper weight 50 g/m2 to 200 g/m2 Original size A3 w, B4 w, A4 w/v, B5 w, 8-1/2 e 14 w, 8-1/2 e 11 w/v Curling tolerance 10 mm or less Paper capacity 100 sheets (80 g/m2) bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 7-33 Copy paper/originals 7 7.4.3 Originals that can be loaded on the original glass Use the original glass when originals are not suitable for use with the ADF, or when setting copying conditions incompatible with the ADF. The machine will detect the original size automatically when the original is positioned on the original glass with ADF closed, then select an appropriate paper size automatically by Auto Paper Select function. * Foolscap includes the following 4 types: 8-1/8 e 13-1/4 w, 8-1/4 e 13 w, 8-1/2 e 13 w, 8 e 13 w, one of which can be selected. For details, contact the service representative. Observe the following precautions when placing the original on the original glass. - The size of original printed on paper in inch sizes (such as 11 e 17, 8-1/2 e 14, 8-1/2 e 11) cannot be automatically detected. The setting must be specified by the service representative. For details, contact the service representative. - If a custom-sized original is positioned, the "Auto Paper Select" and "Auto Zoom" settings cannot be used since the original size cannot be detected automatically. If a custom-sized original is positioned, select the size of the paper to be copied. - If highly translucent or transparent original, such as overhead transparencies or trace paper, are positioned, the original size cannot be detected automatically. Place a blank sheet of paper of the same size over the original. - Do not place objects exceeding 6.8 kg on the original glass, otherwise the original glass may be damaged. - If a book is placed on the original glass, do not press it down extremely hard, otherwise the original glass may be damaged. Item Description Original type Sheets, books (spreads), three-dimensional objects Original Size 128 mm e 139.7 mm to 297 mm e 431.8 mm Auto Original Size Detect A3 w to A5 w/v, B6 w, A6 w, 11 e 17 w to 5-1/2 e 8-1/2 w/v, Foolscap*, 8K w, 16K w/v Maximum original weight 6.8 kg Maximum original thickness 30 mm 7 Copy paper/originals 7-34 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 8 Application functions bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 8-3 Application functions 8 8 Application functions 8.1 Inserting paper between OHP transparencies ("OHP Interleave" function) In order to prevent copies printed onto OHP transparencies from sticking together as a result of the heat that is produced during copying, paper (interleaves) can be inserted between the transparencies. The interleaf can be kept blank, or copied from the same original as the transparency. 0 No Finishing setting can be used. 1 Position the original to be copied. – For details on positioning the original, refer to "Feeding the original" on page 3-9. – For details on loading OHP transparencies, refer to "Paper weight" on page 7-3 and "Loading paper into the bypass tray" on page 2-55. 2 Load the OHP transparencies into the bypass tray, and load the interleaf paper into the desired paper tray. – Use interleaf paper with the same size as the OHP transparencies. 3 Select [Transparency] as the paper type for the bypass tray, and then touch [OK]. – For details on specifying the paper type settings, refer to "Specifying a paper type for bypass tray" on page 7-19. 8 Application functions 8-4 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 4 Touch [Application], and then touch [Sheet/Cover/Chapter Insert]. – To cancel changes to the settings for all Application functions, press the [Reset] key. All changes to the settings are canceled. The Sheet/Cover/Chapter Insert screen appears. 5 Touch [OHP Interleave]. The OHP Interleave screen appears. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 8-5 Application functions 8 6 Select the paper tray loaded with the interleaf paper. – To cancel the setting and select the default, press the [Reset] key. – To cancel the "OHP Interleave" function, touch [No]. 7 Select [Copy] or [Blank]. – Selecting [Copy] will copy the original image also onto interleaves. To leave the interleaves blank, touch [Blank]. 8 Touch [OK]. 9 Specify any other desired copy settings. – The number of copies is set to "1" and cannot be changed. 10 Press the [Start] key. 8 Application functions 8-6 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 8.2 Adding cover pages ("Cover Sheet" function) Copies can be made using paper different from the main body of the original (excluding the cover pages), and cover pages can be added using paper different from the copy. The following types of cover pages and front and back cover page settings are available. 2 Note If the optional post inserter is installed, outer front and back cover pages can be inserted from the post inserter. Cover page settings can be specified for paper loaded in the post inserter and in the paper trays. Paper loaded in the post inserter is added at the front when it is specified as the outer front cover or it is added at the back when it is specified as the outer back cover. 1 Position the original to be copied. – For details on positioning the original, refer to "Feeding the original" on page 3-9. – For an original that exceeds 100 pages, refer to "Scanning the original in separate batches ("Separate Scan" setting)" on page 3-11. 2 Load the paper for the cover pages and the paper for the main body of the original into separate paper trays. – Use paper with the same size for the cover pages and for the main body of the original, and load them in the same orientation. Setting Description Front Cover Front (Copy) The first page of the original is copied onto paper for the front cover sheet. With double-sided copying, the second page of the original is copied onto the back of the front cover sheet. Front (Blank) Paper for the front cover sheet is added as the first page of the copy. The same operation is performed with double-sided copying. Back Cover Back (Copy) The last page of the original is copied onto the back cover page. With double-sided copying, a double-sided copy of the last two pages of the original is printed on paper for the back cover sheet if the original contains an even number of pages. Back (Blank) Paper for the back cover sheet is added after the last page of the copy. The same operation is performed with double-sided copying. 4 4 3 3 2 2 1 1 REPORT 4 4 3 3 2 2 1 1 REPORT 4 4 3 3 2 2 2 2 1 1 REPORT bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 8-7 Application functions 8 3 Touch [Application], and then touch [Sheet/Cover/Chapter Insert]. – For details on using thick paper for the cover sheets and on loading the paper, refer to "Paper weight" on page 7-3 and "Loading paper into the bypass tray" on page 2-55. – To cancel changes to the settings for all Application functions, press the [Reset] key. All changes to the settings are canceled. The Sheet/Cover/Chapter Insert screen appears. 4 Touch [Cover Sheet]. The Cover Sheet screen appears. 8 Application functions 8-8 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 5 Select the desired cover page settings. – To cancel the setting and select the default, press the [Reset] key. – To cancel the "Cover Sheet" function, touch [No]. – The default setting for the paper tray loaded with cover pages can be specified from the Utility mode. For details, refer to "Copier Settings" on page 12-21. – If the optional post inserter has been installed, [Outer Cover Sheet] appears. – If paper for cover pages has been loaded in the main unit, continue with step 6. – If paper for cover pages has been loaded in a tray of the post inserter, continue with step 9. 6 If desired, touch [Paper] under "Front Cover" or "Back Cover". The corresponding Cover Paper screen appears. 7 Select the paper tray loaded with the paper for the cover pages, and then touch [OK]. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 8-9 Application functions 8 8 Touch [Outer Cover Sheet], and then specify the tray loaded with paper for the outer front cover or the outer back cover. 9 Touch [OK], and then touch [OK] in the next screen that appears. 10 Specify any other desired copy settings. 11 Using the keypad, type in the desired number of copies. 12 Press the [Start] key. 8 Application functions 8-10 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 8.3 Inserting different paper into copies ("Insert Sheet" function) Different paper (such as colored paper) can be inserted for specified pages in the copies. There are settings ("Copy" and "Blank") for selecting whether or not the inserted pages are printed. When the settings are combined with single-sided copying or double-sided copying, the copies are printed as shown below. If "Copy" is selected, the original is copied with the specified paper inserted for the specified pages. When page 2 is specified Copy If "Blank" is selected, the specified paper is inserted after the specified page. When page 3 is specified Blank Finishing Description Single-sided copies The specified paper is inserted for the 2nd sheet of the copy, and the 2nd sheet of the original is copied onto it. Double-sided copies The back side of the 1st sheet of the copy is left blank, the specified paper is inserted for the 2nd sheet of the copy, and a double-sided copy of the 2nd and 3rd sheets of the original are printed onto it. 6 6 4 4 5 2 2 3 6 6 5 5 4 4 3 3 2 2 1 1 REPORT 6 6 5 5 4 4 3 3 2 2 1 1 REPORT 1 1 REPORT Finishing Description Single-sided copies The specified paper is inserted as the 4th sheet of the copy. Double-sided copies The back side of the 2nd sheet of the copy is left blank, and the specified paper is inserted for the 3rd sheet of the copy. 6 6 4 4 5 6 6 5 5 4 4 3 3 6 6 5 5 4 4 3 3 2 2 1 1 REPORT 3 3 2 2 1 1 REPORT 1 1 2 REPORT bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 8-11 Application functions 8 ! Detail The specified paper can be inserted at a maximum of 60 locations within an original of up to 999 pages. In double-sided originals, one double-sided page is considered to be two pages (one for the front and one for the back). 2 Note If the optional post inserter is installed, paper can be inserted from the post inserter. 1 Position the original to be copied. – For details on positioning the original, refer to "Feeding the original" on page 3-9. – For an original that exceeds 100 pages, refer to "Scanning the original in separate batches ("Separate Scan" setting)" on page 3-11. 2 Load the paper to be used for the insertions sheets and the main body of the original into the desired paper trays. – Use paper with the same size for the insertion sheets and for the main body of the original, and load them in the same orientation. – To cancel changes to the settings for all Application functions, press the [Reset] key. All changes to the settings are canceled. 3 Touch [Application], and then touch [Sheet/Cover/Chapter Insert]. – For details on using thick paper for the insertion sheets and on loading the paper, refer to "Paper weight" on page 7-3 and "Loading paper into the bypass tray" on page 2-55. – To cancel the setting and select the default, press the [Reset] key. The Sheet/Cover/Chapter Insert screen appears. 8 Application functions 8-12 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 4 Touch [Insert Sheet]. – To cancel the "Insert Sheet" function, touch [No]. The Insert Sheet screen appears. 5 Touch a button for a page number, and then use the keypad to type in the number of the page where the paper is to be inserted. – There are four Insert Sheet screens. Touch or to display a different screen. – To arrange the page numbers in order, starting with the lowest number, touch [Sort]. – To remove a page number that has been specified, touch the button for the page to be removed, and then press the [C] (clear) key. – If the same page number is entered multiple times, copying is not possible. Delete repeated page numbers. – If the entered page number is greater than the number of pages in the original, paper is not inserted. – [Post Inserter] appears if the optional post inserter has been installed. – If the insertion sheets are loaded into a paper tray of the main unit, continue with step 6. – If the insertion sheets are loaded into a tray of the post inserter, continue with step 10. 6 Under "Insert Type", touch either [Copy] or [Blank]. – If "Copy" is selected, the original is copied with the specified paper inserted for the specified page. If "Blank" is selected, the specified paper is inserted after the specified page. 7 Touch [Insert Paper]. The Insert Paper Settings screen appears. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 8-13 Application functions 8 8 Select the paper tray loaded with the paper for the insertion sheets, and then touch [OK]. 9 Touch [OK], and then touch [OK] in the next screen that appears. 10 Touch [Post Inserter]. – Touch a button for a page number, and then use the keypad to type in the number of the page where the paper is to be inserted. – There are four Post Inserter screens. Touch or to display a different screen. – To arrange the page numbers in order, starting with the lowest number, touch [Sort]. – To remove a page number that has been specified, touch the button for the page to be removed, and then press the [C] (clear) key. – If the same page number is entered multiple times, copying is not possible. Delete repeated page numbers. – If the entered page number is greater than the number of pages in the original, paper is not inserted. 11 Select the paper tray loaded with the paper for the insertion sheets, and then touch [OK]. 12 Touch [OK], and then touch [OK] in the next screen that appears. 13 Specify any other desired copy settings. 14 Using the keypad, type in the desired number of copies. 15 Press the [Start] key. 8 Application functions 8-14 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 8.4 Inserting copies of a different original for a specified page ("Insert Image" function) A multi-page original later scanned from the original glass can be inserted at the specified location in an original first scanned with the ADF. The inserted original is added after the specified pages. ! Detail A separate original can be inserted at a maximum of 30 locations within an original of up to 999 pages. In double-sided originals, one double-sided page is considered to be two pages (one for the front and one for the back). 1 Load the original into the ADF. – For details on positioning the original, refer to "Feeding the original" on page 3-9. – For an original that exceeds 100 pages, refer to "Scanning the original in separate batches ("Separate Scan" setting)" on page 3-11. 2 Touch [Application], and then touch [Sheet/Cover/Chapter Insert]. – To cancel changes to the settings for all Application functions, press the [Reset] key. All changes to the settings are canceled. The Sheet/Cover/Chapter Insert screen appears. 4 4 3 3 2 2 1 1 REPORT A B 3 4 B 2 1 A 1 REPORT bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 8-15 Application functions 8 3 Touch [Insert Image]. – To cancel the setting and select the default, press the [Reset] key. – To cancel the "Insert Image" function, touch [No]. The Insert Image screen appears. 4 Using the keypad, specify the pages where the image is to be inserted. – There are two Insert Image screens. Touch and to display a different screen. – The inserted original is added after the specified page. – To arrange the page numbers in order, starting with the lowest number, touch [Sort]. – To remove a page number that has been specified, touch the button for the page to be removed, and then press the [C] (clear) key. – If the original scanned from the original glass has more pages than the number of pages specified in the Insert Image screen, the extra pages of the insertion original are printed at the end of the original. – If the original scanned from the original glass has fewer pages than the number of pages specified in the Insert Image screen, the missing insertion pages are not printed. – If the same page number is specified twice, two insertion original pages are added at the specified location. – If the specified page number is greater than the total number of pages in the main original, the corresponding insertion original page is added at the end of the original copy. 5 Touch [OK], and then touch [OK] in the next screen that appears. 6 Specify any other desired copy settings. 7 Using the keypad, type in the desired number of copies. 8 Application functions 8-16 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 8 Press the [Start] key. Scanning begins. 9 Place the original to be inserted on the original glass. – For details on positioning the original, refer to "Feeding the original" on page 3-9. 10 Press the [Start] key. Scanning begins. 11 Touch [Finish]. – To insert a multi-page original, repeat steps 9 and 10 until all pages of the insertion original are scanned in the order that they are to be inserted. 12 Press the [Start] key. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 8-17 Application functions 8 8.5 Specifying pages to be printed on the front side ("Chapters" function) When making double-sided copies, the pages specified as the first page of a chapter can be printed on the front side of the paper. If the original was arranged so that the specified page would be printed on the back side of a page, the page is left blank and the specified page is printed on the front side of the next page. In addition, the specified page can be printed on different paper. ! Detail A maximum of 30 pages can be specified to be printed on the front side of the paper within an original of up to 999 pages. In double-sided originals, one double-sided page is considered to be two pages (one for the front and one for the back). 2 Note Make sure that the paper loaded for the first page of the chapter and for the copy have the same size and orientation. 3 7 7 38 6 2 6 4 4 25 3 3 3 7 7 38 5 5 6 3 3 4 8 3 8 7 7 6 6 5 5 1 1 1 12 1 1 1 12 2 4 4 3 3 2 1 2 1 1 8 Application functions 8-18 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 1 Position the original to be copied. – For details on positioning the original, refer to "Feeding the original" on page 3-9. – For an original that exceeds 100 pages, refer to "Scanning the original in separate batches ("Separate Scan" setting)" on page 3-11. 2 Touch [Application], and then touch [Sheet/Cover/Chapter Insert]. – To cancel changes to the settings for all Application functions, press the [Reset] key. All changes to the settings are canceled. The Sheet/Cover/Chapter Insert screen appears. 3 Touch [Chapters]. The Chapter screen (for editing) appears. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 8-19 Application functions 8 4 Using the keypad, specify the first page of the chapters. – There are two Chapter screens. Touch and to display a different screen. – To arrange the page numbers in order, starting with the lowest number, touch [Sort]. – To remove a page number that has been specified, touch the button for the page to be removed, and then press the [C] (clear) key. – Under "Original > Copy", select "1-Sided > 2-Sided". – If the same page number is entered multiple times, copying is not possible. Delete repeated page numbers. – If the specified page number is greater than the number of pages in the original, that page number is ignored. 5 Under "Chapter Paper", touch [Copy Insert] or [None]. – If "None" is selected, all pages of the copy are printed on the same paper. – To cancel the setting and select the default, press the [Reset] key. – To cancel the "Chapters" function, touch [No]. 8 Application functions 8-20 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) – If "Copy Insert" is selected, [Chapter Paper] appears. Touch [Chapter Paper], select the paper to be used for the first page of the chapter, and then touch [OK]. 6 Touch [OK], and then touch [OK] in the next screen that appears. 7 Specify any other desired copy settings. 8 Using the keypad, type in the desired number of copies. 9 Press the [Start] key. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 8-21 Application functions 8 8.6 Scanning originals with different settings and printing copies all together ("Program Jobs" function) Loaded original pages can be scanned with different settings and their copies can be printed together. Different Zoom or Paper settings can be specified for a part of the original or Finishing settings or a numbering function can be set after the entire original is scanned, and then all copies can be printed together. 2 Note 100 original batches can be set. The "Group" Finishing setting is not available when programming jobs. Instead, select "Sort". 1 Position the original to be copied. – For details on positioning the original, refer to "Feeding the original" on page 3-9. – When saving scanned data in a user box, some scanned data may be lost if more than 10,000 pages are saved in the box. 2 Touch [Application], and then touch [Sheet/Cover/Chapter Insert]. – To cancel changes to the settings for all Application functions, press the [Reset] key. All changes to the settings are canceled. The Sheet/Cover/Chapter Insert screen appears. 4 4 3 3 2 2 1 1 REPORT 4 2 3 3 2 4 4 3 3 2 2 1 1 REPORT 1 1 0001REPORT Original 2 Original 1 Original 3 8 Application functions 8-22 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 3 Touch [Program Jobs], and then touch [OK]. 4 Select the desired copy settings, and then press the [Start] key. – To print a single copy to be checked, press the [Proof Copy] key. Scanning begins. 5 Touch [Fix], and then touch [OK]. – If the original was loaded on the original glass, touch [Finish] in the screen that appears, requesting confirmation that scanning is finished. – If "Retry" was selected, touch [Change Setting] to change the copy settings. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 8-23 Application functions 8 6 Position the next original, and then touch [Change Setting]. 7 Select the desired copy settings, and then press the [Start] key. – To print a single copy to be checked, press the [Proof Copy] key. – Repeat steps 5 to 7 until all originals have been scanned. The amount of memory available can be checked beside "Memory" in the lower-left corner of the screen. In addition, the number of original batches can be checked beside "Scanned Batches". – When the memory is full, a message appears. Select whether to delete the last part of the data and scan it again, delete the last part of the data and print, or delete all of the original data. – To cancel changes to the settings, touch [Cancel]. Scanning begins. After scanning is finished, touch [Fix], and then touch [OK]. ? Is there more information about the settings? % Refer to the appropriate section. 8 After all original pages have been scanned, touch [Finish]. A message appears, requesting confirmation that scanning is finished. 8 Application functions 8-24 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 9 Touch [Yes], and then touch [OK]. – If "No" was selected, touch [Change Setting] to change the copy settings. 10 Specify any other desired copy settings. – Touch [Print List], and then specify the printing method for the entire scanned original. ? Is there more information about the settings? % Refer to the appropriate section. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 8-25 Application functions 8 11 Using the keypad, type in the desired number of copies. 12 Touch [Start] or press the [Start] key. – If [Cancel] is touched, a message appears, requesting confirmation to delete the data. To stop printing, touch [Yes], and then touch [OK]. 8 Application functions 8-26 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 8.7 Reversing black-and-white gradation of the original ("Neg./Pos. Reverse" function) 1 Position the original to be copied. – For details on positioning the original, refer to "Feeding the original" on page 3-9. 2 Touch [Application]. – To cancel changes to the settings for all Application functions, press the [Reset] key. All changes to the settings are canceled. 3 Touch [Neg./Pos. Reverse]. ? To cancel the "Neg./Pos. Reverse" function % Touch [Neg./Pos. Reverse] again. 4 Specify any other desired copy settings. 5 Using the keypad, type in the desired number of copies. 6 Press the [Start] key. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 8-27 Application functions 8 8.8 Producing separate copies of each page in a page spread ("Book Copy" function) An open book or catalog can be copied with the left and right pages on separate sheets of paper. The following copy methods are available, and there are settings for adding front and back covers. 0 Place the original on the original glass. Be sure to keep the ADF open throughout the scanning job. 1 Place the pages on the original glass, starting with the first page. – For details on positioning the original, refer to "Feeding the original" on page 3-9. – If "Front and Back Cover" was selected, the front cover is scanned before the back cover, and then all page spreads are scanned in order. ? How are the front and back covers copied? % Scan the front cover, then the back cover, and then scan the remainder of the original. 2 Load the paper to be used into the desired paper tray. Setting Description Book Spread Both pages of the page spread are printed on the same page. Separation Separate copies of each page in the page spread are printed in the original page order. The original is scanned to fit the size of paper that will be used. Front Cover The front cover and separate copies of each page in the page spreads are printed in the original page order. Front and Back Cover The front cover, separate copies of each page in the page spreads and the back cover are printed in the original page order. SURVEYOR’S REPORT SURVEYOR’S REPORT 8 Application functions 8-28 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 3 Touch [Application], and then touch [Book Copy/Repeat]. – To cancel changes to the settings for all Application functions, press the [Reset] key. All changes to the settings are canceled. The Book Copy/Repeat screen appears. 4 Touch [Book Copy]. The Book Copy screen appears. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 8-29 Application functions 8 5 Touch the button for the desired setting. – If "Separation", "Front Cover" or "Front and Back Cover" is selected, [Binding Position] appears. Select the binding position of the original. – If desired, specify a Book Erase function. Touch the button for the erasing method, touch [-] and [+] to specify the width of the area to be erased, and then touch "OK". – Touch [<-->] on the Frame Erase screen/Center Erase screen to switch between the integer and the fraction, specify the width to be erased, and then touch [OK]. – If a decimal value is displayed in the Frame Erase screen/Center Erase screen, use the keypad to type in the setting. For details on switching between decimal and fraction values, refer to "System Settings" on page 12-17. – If a decimal value is displayed in the screen and the specified value is outside the allowable range, the message "Input Error" appears. Type a value within the allowable range. If the value was incorrectly entered, press the [C] (clear) key to erase the value, and then specify the correct value. 8 Application functions 8-30 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) – To cancel the "Book Copy" function, touch [No]. ? What do the Book Erase functions do? % The shadow of the book binding and the shadow of the book edges can be erased from the copies. The "Frame Erase" and "Center Erase" functions can be used together. ? How are settings specified for the "Frame Erase" and "Center Erase" functions. % Refer to "Erasing black marks along borders ("Erase" function)" on page 8-51. In addition, if the "Frame Erase" or "Center Erase" function in the Application screen is previously specified, [Frame Erase] or [Center Erase] under "Book Erase" appears highlighted. 6 Touch [OK], and then touch [Close]. Frame Erase screen Center Erase screen bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 8-31 Application functions 8 7 In the Basic screen, touch [Paper], and then select the paper tray loaded with the paper. 8 Specify any other desired copy settings. – To cancel the setting and select the default, press the [Reset] key. 9 Using the keypad, type in the desired number of copies. 10 Press the [Start] key. – For details on positioning the original, refer to "Scanning a multi-page original from the original glass" on page 3-15. – Position the next page and repeat step 10 until all pages of the original are scanned. Scanning begins. If "Book Spread" or "Separation" is selected, printing begins. If "Front Cover" or "Front and Back Cover" is selected, continue with step 11. 11 After all original pages have been scanned, touch [Finish]. – If "Front and Back Cover" was selected, the back cover is scanned after the front cover, and then all page spreads are scanned in order. SURVEYOR’S REPORT SURVEYOR’S REPORT 8 Application functions 8-32 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) – If "Front Cover" was selected, all page spreads are scanned in order after the front cover. 12 Press the [Start] key. SURVEYOR’S REPORT bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 8-33 Application functions 8 8.9 Tiling copy images ("Image Repeat" function) An original image can be repeatedly printed on a single sheet of paper. The possible number of repeating images is automatically selected based on the size of the loaded original, the specified paper size and the zoom ratio. The following repeating formats and settings are available. 1 Position the original to be copied. – For details on positioning the original, refer to "Feeding the original" on page 3-9. 2 Load the paper to be used into the desired paper tray. 3 Touch [Application], and then touch [Book Copy/Repeat]. – To cancel changes to the settings for all Application functions, press the [Reset] key. All changes to the settings are canceled. The Book Copy/Repeat screen appears. Setting Description With Margin Multiple copies are printed of the entire image within the specified area. The area around the image appears as a margin. Without Margin Multiple copies of the selected area of the image are printed to fill the paper; however, a part of the image may be cut off. 2/4/8 Repeat A fixed number of copies of the selected image area are printed in the paper. The number of repeating copies can be set to 2, 4 or 8 times. However, any part of the image that does not fit within its specific section of the paper is cut off. Original With Margin Without Margin 8 Application functions 8-34 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 4 Touch [Image Repeat]. The Image Repeat screen appears. 5 Under "Layout", touch [With Margin] or [Without Margin], or touch [2/4/8 Repeat]. – To cancel the "Image Repeat" function, touch [No]. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 8-35 Application functions 8 – Touching [2/4/8 Repeat] displays the 2/4/8 Repeat screen, where the number of repeats and the interval can be selected. – When selecting [2 Repeat], touch [2 Repeat Detail Settings] to specify Image Direction and Repeat Interval Settings. 8 Application functions 8-36 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 6 Check the scanning size under "Scan Range", touch [OK], and then touch [Close] in the next screen that appears. – If the original size does not appear under "Scan Range" or to specify the scanning area, touch [Set Range], and then specify the scanning area from any of the screens. – To cancel changes to the settings, touch [Cancel]. ? Can sizes in metrics be displayed? % Touch or to display a different list of sizes. ? Can any size be specified? % Any size can be specified from the Custom Size screen. Touch [X] or [Y], touch [<-->] to switch between the integer and the fraction, and then touch [–] and [+] to specify the size of the document. If a decimal value is displayed in the screen, press the [C] (clear) key, and then use the keypad to type in the setting. For details on switching between decimal and fraction values, refer to "System Settings" on page 12-17. If a decimal value is displayed in the screen and the specified value is outside the allowable range, the message "Input Error" appears. Type a value within the allowable range. If the value was incorrectly entered, press the [C] (clear) key to erase the value, and then specify the correct value. Set Range screen Custom Size screen bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 8-37 Application functions 8 7 In the Basic screen, touch [Paper], and then select the paper tray loaded with the paper. – If settings were specified in the 2/4/8 Repeat screen, touch [Zoom] in the Basic screen, and then specify the zoom ratio setting. 8 Specify any other desired copy settings. – To cancel the setting and select the default, press the [Reset] key. 9 Using the keypad, type in the desired number of copies. 10 Press the [Start] key. 8 Application functions 8-38 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 8.10 Dividing spread image into right and left pages using ADF ("Page Separation" function) A page spread image scanned from the ADF can be divided into two separate images of right and left pages. A page spread image can be divided with the left and right halves copied onto separate pages. With singlesided copying, the two halves are printed on two separate pages. With double-sided copying, the two halves are printed on the front and back sides of a single page. 1 Load the original in the ADF. – For details on positioning the original, refer to "Feeding the original" on page 3-9. – For an original that exceeds 80 pages, refer to "Scanning the original in separate batches ("Separate Scan" setting)" on page 3-11. 2 Load paper of size A4 v, B5 v, and 8-1/2 e 11 v into the desired paper tray. – Available paper sizes are A4 v, B5 v, and 8-1/2 e 11 v. Auto Paper Select will not function. 3 Touch [Paper]. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 8-39 Application functions 8 4 Touch the desired tray key to select the tray loaded with A4 v, B5 v, and 8-1/2 e 11 v paper. 5 Touch [Application], and then touch [Book Copy/Repeat]. – To cancel changes to the settings for all Application functions, press the Reset key, All changes to the settings are canceled. The Book Copy/Repeat screen appears. 6 Touch [Page Separation]. The Page Separation screen appears. 8 Application functions 8-40 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 7 Select the binding position of the spread original. – For the spread original to read from the left page to the right page, touch [Left Bind] to highlight it. On the contrary, if the spread original reads from the right page to the left page, touch [Right Bind]. 8 Touch [OK], and then touch [Close]. 9 In the Basic screen, touch Paper, and then select the paper tray loaded with the paper. 10 Specify any other desired copy settings. – Auto Zoom will not function. The magnification can be changed as desired. – To cancel the setting and select the default press the [Reset] key. 11 Using the keypad, type in the desired number of copies. 12 Press the [Start] key. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 8-41 Application functions 8 8.11 Adding a binding margin to copies ("Page Margin" function) Copies can be printed with a binding margin so that the pages can easily be filed. When making double-sided copies, the image orientation can be adjusted by specifying the position of the binding margin. In addition, the image orientation can be adjusted without creating a binding margin. ! Detail If the positions of the staples or punched holes are different from the binding position, the positions of the staples or punched holes are given priority. 1 Position the original to be copied. – For details on positioning the original, refer to "Feeding the original" on page 3-9. 2 Touch [Application], and then touch [Page Margin]. – To cancel changes to the settings for all Application functions, press the [Reset] key. All changes to the settings are canceled. The Page Margin screen appears. 4 4 ABC DEF GHI 4 4 ABC DEF GHI 3 3 ABC DEF GHI 2 2 ABC DEF GHI 4 4 ABC DEF GHI 2 2 ABC DEF GHI 2 2 ABC DEF GHI 1 1 ABC DEF GHI 4 4 ABC DEF GHI 3 3 ABC DEF GHI 2 2 ABC DEF GHI 1 1 ABC DEF GHI 3 3 ABC DEF GHI 1 2 AB DE GH ABC DEF GHI 2 2 ABC DEF GHI 1 1 ABC DEF GHI 3 3 ABC DEF GHI 1 2 BC EF HI 1 1 ABC DEF GHI 3 3 ABC DEF GHI ABC DEF 2 1 ABC DEF "Right" setting "Left" setting "Top" setting 8 Application functions 8-42 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 3 Select the position of the binding margin. – To cancel the setting and select the default, press the [Reset] key. – To cancel the "Page Margin" function, touch [No]. – If "Auto" is selected, the binding margin is set at the top or at the left. – If "Auto" is selected for the binding position, load the original with the top toward the back of the machine. If the original is loaded in any other orientation, the correct position will not be selected. ? What happens when "Auto" is selected? % The factory default setting is "Auto". Touch [Auto] to automatically determine the binding position according to the orientation of the loaded original. If the original length is 297 mm or less, a binding position along the long side of the paper is selected. If the original length is more than 297 mm, a binding position along the short side of the paper is selected. 4 Touch [-] or [+] to specify the binding margin width. – If "None" is selected, the binding margin width is set to 0 mm. When making double-sided copies, the image orientation can adjusted without creating a binding margin. – If a decimal value is displayed in the screen, use the keypad to type in the setting. For details on switching between decimal and fraction values, refer to "System Settings" on page 12-17. – If a decimal value is displayed in the screen and the specified value is outside the allowable range, the message "Input Error" appears. Type a value within the allowable range. If the value was incorrectly entered, press the [C] (clear) key to erase the value, and then specify the correct value. ? How can the entered margin position be corrected? % Without changing the margin width, change the margin position. 5 If necessary, touch [Image Shift]. The Image Shift screen appears. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 8-43 Application functions 8 6 Adjust the position of the image, and then touch [OK]. – Touch [Left], [Right], [Top] or [Bottom] to select the direction to be adjusted, and then use the keypad or touch [-] and [+] to specify the adjustment amount. – To cancel the shift, touch [No Shift]. – To adjust the position of the image on the back side of the paper when printing double-sided copies, touch [Change Back Shift]. 7 If desired, touch [Original Direction], and then select the setting appropriate for the original. – For details on specifying the original orientation, refer to "Selecting the original orientation ("Original Direction" settings)" on page 3-26. 8 Touch [OK]. 9 Specify any other desired copy settings. 10 Using the keypad, type in the desired number of copies. 11 Press the [Start] key. 8 Application functions 8-44 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 8.12 Adjusting the image to fit the paper ("Image Adjust" settings) Use this function to make a copy adjusting the position of printed image. The Centering function centers the original image on copy paper. ! Detail Normally, images are trimmed by 3 mm at the top, 4 mm at the bottom, and 2 mm on each side (left/right) from the paper size. If [Full Scan] is selected, images are not trimmed but copied to the edge of the sheet. 1 Position the original to be copied. – For details on positioning the original, refer to "Feeding the original" on page 3-9. 2 Touch [Application], and then touch [Image Adjust]. – To cancel changes to the settings for all Application functions, press the [Reset] key. All changes to the settings are canceled. The Image Adjust screen appears. Setting Description Centering The image is centered in the paper without being enlarged. Full Scan The full image is scanned without triming to create margins. Even if text is printed to the edges of the original, it can be copied without being cut off. Centering Full Scan bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 8-45 Application functions 8 3 Select the image adjusting method. – To cancel the "Setting", touch [No]. 4 Check the original size, and then touch [OK]. – If the original size cannot be detected automatically or to specify the original size, touch [Original Size], and then specify the original size from any of the screens. – Touch or to display a different list of standard sizes. – To specify a custom size, touch [Custom Size] to display the Custom Size screen. Touch [X] or [Y] to select the dimension, and use the keypad to specify the desired value. (To enter a value, press the [C] (clear) key, and then use the keypad to type in the new value.) 8 Application functions 8-46 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) – If a value outside the allowable range is specified, the message "Input Error" appears. If "Input Error" appeared or if the value was incorrectly entered, press the [C] (clear) key, and then specify the correct value. 5 Specify any other desired copy settings. – To cancel the setting and select the default, press the [Reset] key. 6 Using the keypad, type in the desired number of copies. 7 Press the [Start] key. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 8-47 Application functions 8 8.13 Copying with the page layout of a booklet ("Booklet" function) The page order of the scanned original is automatically arranged to produce double-sided copies in a page layout for center binding, such as for a magazine. Stapling is possible only when optional saddle stitcher on the finisher is installed. ! Detail Generally, a multiple of 4 original pages is required with a single-sided original, and a multiple of 2 original pages is required with a double-sided original. If there are not enough pages, blank pages are automatically added at the end. For details on stapling, refer to "Binding copies at the center ("Center Staple & Fold" setting)" on page 3-79. For an original that exceeds 100 pages, refer to "Scanning the original in separate batches ("Separate Scan" setting)" on page 3-11. The width of the binding margin is automatically specified. 1 Position the original to be copied. – For details on positioning the original, refer to "Feeding the original" on page 3-9. 2 Touch [Application], and then touch [Booklet]. – To cancel changes to the settings for all Application functions, press the [Reset] key. All changes to the settings are canceled. 8 8 7 7 3 3 2 2 1 1 REPORT 6 3 6 3 5 4 8 1 8 1 7 REPORT 2 3 6 6 6 4 5 1 8 1 8 2REPORT 7 “Left Bind” setting “Right Bind” setting 8 Application functions 8-48 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 3 Touch [Left Bind] or [Right Bind]. – If the original contains only pages in the landscape orientation, they will be bound at the top, regardless of which setting is selected. – To cancel the setting and select the default, press the [Reset] key. – To cancel the "Booklet" function, touch [No]. – To adjust the image position widthwise and lengthwise as desired, touch [Image Shift], specify the shift amount, then touch [OK]. – For details of shift amount setting, refer to "Adding a binding margin to copies ("Page Margin" function)" on page 8-41. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 8-49 Application functions 8 – To make the specified amount of blank space in the center between the two images on a page, touch [Page Spacing]. Select [Front/Back] to make the same amount of blank space, or [Front Side]/[Back Side] to specify the different amount for each, then use [-], [+], or control panel keypad to enter the desired amount. Touch [OK] to complete the setting. 4 Touch [OK]. 5 Specify any other desired copy settings. 6 Using the keypad, type in the desired number of copies. 7 Press the [Start] key. 8 Application functions 8-50 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 8.14 Erasing specified area of copies (Erase) When the original is scanned from the original glass, black copy marks may be produced along borders and center line, and also around punch holes. Use this function to eliminate them from the copies and lower the toner consumption at the same time. The following three settings are provided for the Erase function. These are compatible with each other. Setting Description Frame Erase This function erases black marks along the borders of printed sheets which tend to be created when using the original glass to scan thick original such as a book. Use this function also for the original already having black marks along borders. Refer to "Erasing black marks along borders ("Erase" function)" on page 8-51 Center Erase This function erases black marks along the center fold of printed sheets which tend to be created when using the original glass to scan thick original such as a book. Use this function also for the original already having black marks along the center fold. Refer to "Erasing black marks along center fold ("Center Erase" function)" on page 8-53 Non-Image Area Erase This function detects the original size placed on the original glass and erases outside area of the original. Refer to "Erasing outside areas of the original ("Non-Image Area Erase" function)" on page 8-55 Frame Erase Center Erase Non-Image Area Erase bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 8-51 Application functions 8 8.14.1 Erasing black marks along borders ("Erase" function) Copies can be produced by erasing unwanted areas around the original, such as the transmission information on received faxes and the shadows of punched holes. With frame erasing, the same width can be erased along all four sides of the original or a different width can be erased along each side of the original. 1 Position the original to be copied. – For details on positioning the original, refer to "Feeding the original" on page 3-9. 2 Touch [Application], and then touch [Erase]. – To cancel changes to the settings for all Application functions, press the [Reset] key. All changes to the settings are canceled. The Erase screen appears. 3 Touch [Frame Erase]. The Frame Erase screen appears. 8 Application functions 8-52 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 4 Touch the button for the desired position to be erased. – To cancel the setting and select the default, press the [Reset] key. – To cancel the "Frame Erase" function, touch [No]. ? What happens when [Frame] is selected? % The same width is erased on all four sides of the original. The factory default setting is "Frame". ? Can the settings be combined? % "Frame" cannot be combined with the other settings ("Top", "Left", "Right" or "Bottom"). 5 Touch [<->] to switch between the integer and the fraction, and then touch [–] and [+] to specify the width to be erased. – To specify a different width to be erased depending on the position, specify different settings for "Top", "Left", "Right", and "Bottom". – When using the keypad to specify the settings, press the [C] (clear) key, and then specify the setting. – If a decimal value is displayed in the screen, press the [C] (clear) key, and then use the keypad to type in the setting. For details on switching between decimal and fraction values, refer to "System Settings" on page 12-17. – If a decimal value is displayed in the screen and the specified value is outside the allowable range, the message "Input Error" appears. Type a value within the allowable range. If the value was incorrectly entered, press the [C] (clear) key to erase the value, and then specify the correct value. 6 Touch [OK]. 7 Specify any other desired copy settings. 8 Using the keypad, type in the desired number of copies. 9 Press the [Start] key. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 8-53 Application functions 8 8.14.2 Erasing black marks along center fold ("Center Erase" function) This function erases black marks along the center fold of printed sheets which tend to be created when using the original glass to scan thick original such as a book. Use this function also for the original already having black marks along the center fold. With frame erasing, the same width can be erased along all four sides of the original or a different width can be erased along each side of the original. 1 Position the original to be copied. – For details on positioning the original, refer to "Feeding the original" on page 3-9. 2 Touch [Application], and then touch [Erase]. – To cancel changes to the settings for all Application functions, press the [Reset] key. All changes to the settings are canceled. The Erase screen appears. 3 Touch [Center Erase]. The Center Erase screen appears. 8 Application functions 8-54 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 4 Touch [<->] to switch between the integer and the fraction, and then touch [–] and [+] to specify the width to be erased. – When using the keypad to specify the settings, press the [C] (clear) key, and then specify the setting. – To cancel the setting and select the default, press the [Reset] key. – To cancel the "Center Erase" function, touch [No]. ? What happens when a value outside of the allowable range is specified? % The massage "Input error" appears. If "Input error" appears or if the erased width was incorrectly entered, press the [C] (clear) key in the keypad, and then specify the correct value. 5 Touch [OK]. 6 Specify any other desired copy settings. 7 Using the keypad, type in the desired number of copies. 8 Press the [Start] key. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 8-55 Application functions 8 8.14.3 Erasing outside areas of the original ("Non-Image Area Erase" function) This function detects the original size placed on the original glass and erases outside areas of the original. 1 Position the original to be copied. – For details on positioning the original, refer to "Feeding the original" on page 3-9. 2 Touch [Application], and then touch [Erase]. – To cancel changes to the settings for all Application functions, press the [Reset] key. All changes to the settings are canceled. The Erase screen appears. 3 Touch [Non-Image Area Erase], then touch [OK]. – To cancel the setting and select the default, press the [Reset] key. – To cancel the "Non-Image Area Erase" function, touch the key again. 4 Specify any other desired copy settings. 5 Using the keypad, type in the desired number of copies. 6 Press the [Start] key. 8 Application functions 8-56 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 8.15 Printing the date/time or page number on copies (Stamp/Composition functions) The date/time or page number can be added to copies at the specified location, or a distribution number can be added when multiple copies are made. The following Stamp/Composition functions are available and can be combined. ! Detail The [Registered Overlay] key appears only when the machine is equipped with in HDD. To use Header/Footer function, a header/footer should be registered in advance from Administrator mode. For details on registering headers/footers, refer to "Specifying headers/footers" on page 12-64. ! Detail For details on printing a date/time stamp, refer to page 8-57. For details on printing a page number stamp, refer to page 8-60. For details on printing a stamp, refer to page 8-63. For details on printing a copy protection stamp, refer to page 8-66. For details on printing a repeating stamp, refer to page 8-73. For details on printing an overlay, refer to page 8-78. For details on printing a registered overlay, refer to page 8-81. Function Description Date/Time Select a format and print the date or time on the specified pages. Page Number Select a format and print page numbers starting with the specified page number. Stamp • Preset Stamp Print copies with previously stored preset stamps overlapping pages. • Registered Stamp Print copies with a stamp registered with the Copy Protection Utility overlapping pages. Copy Protect Print copies with copy protection text (hidden text that prevents unauthorized copying), such as a preset stamp or the date. Stamp Repeat Print copies with text (such as registered stamps, preset stamps or the date) repeating throughout the page. Overlay Copies can be printed with the contents of the first original page overlapped by (as an overlay image) the remaining original pages. Registered Overlay A previously scanned image can be stored on the HDD (Register Overlay Image) and recalled when needed to printed overlapping a document (Recall Overlay Image). Header/Footer The date and time or a distribution number can be printed on each page. This function is available only when specified by the administrator. Distribution Control Number Print four-digit distribution number to fill the background of each copied set. Watermark Print the desired letter type selected from preset watermarks in the center of printed page background. 3 3 2 2 1 1 REPORT 3 3 2 2 1 1 0001REPORT bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 8-57 Application functions 8 For details on printing a header/footer, refer to page 8-87. For details on printing a distribution control number, refer to page 8-89. For details on printing a watermark, refer to page 8-91. 8.15.1 Printing the date/time ("Date/Time" function) 1 Position the original to be copied. – For details on positioning the original, refer to "Feeding the original" on page 3-9. 2 Touch [Application], and then touch [Stamp/Composition]. – To cancel changes to the settings for all Application functions, press the [Reset] key. All changes to the settings are canceled. The Stamp/Composition screen appears. 3 Touch [Date/Time]. The Date/Time screen appears. 8 Application functions 8-58 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 4 Touch buttons under "Date Format", "Time Format" and "Pages" to specify the various settings. – To cancel the "Date/Time" function, touch [No]. – To print the date/time only on the first page, touch [1st Page Only]. – The stamp will not be printed on blank pages inserted using the "Cover Sheet", "Insert Sheet" and "Chapters" functions. ? Can the time be omitted? % If "None" is selected, the time is not printed. 5 Touch [Print Position], and then select the printing position. – To make fine adjustments to the printing position, touch [Adjust Position]. Select the desired direction under "Left & Right Adjustment" or "Top & Bottom Adjustment", touch [<->] to switch between the integer and the fraction, touch [–] and [+] to specify the adjustment amount, and then touch [OK]. – If a decimal value is displayed in the screen, press the [C] (clear) key, and then use the keypad to type in the adjustment amount. For details on switching between decimal and fraction values, refer to "System Settings" on page 12-17. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 8-59 Application functions 8 – If a decimal value is displayed in the screen and the specified value is outside the allowable range, the message "Input Error" appears. Type a value within the allowable range. If the value was incorrectly entered, press the [C] (clear) key to erase the value, and then specify the correct value. ? What are the limits on the adjustment amount? % The print position can be finely adjusted in 0.1 mm increments. ? Can no adjustments be made? % To make no left/right or up/down adjustments, touch [No Adjustment]. 6 If necessary, specify the other settings. – To specify the text size, touch [Text Size], and then select the size The factory default is 10 pt. 7 Touch [OK], and then touch [Close] in the next screen that appears. 8 Specify any other desired copy settings. – To cancel the setting and select the default, press the [Reset] key. 9 Using the keypad, type in the desired number of copies. 10 Press the [Start] key. 8 Application functions 8-60 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 8.15.2 Printing the page number ("Page Number" function) 1 Position the original to be copied. – For details on positioning the original, refer to "Feeding the original" on page 3-9. 2 Touch [Application], and then touch [Stamp/Composition]. – To cancel changes to the settings for all Application functions, press the [Reset] key. All changes to the settings are canceled. The Stamp/Composition screen appears. 3 Touch [Page Number]. The Page Number screen appears. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 8-61 Application functions 8 4 Using the keypad, type in the starting page number for printing. – If desired, touch [Chapter], and then use the keypad to type in the chapter number. The entered chapter number is printed if "1-1, 1-2...." is selected under "Page Number Type". – The setting for "Page Number" can be set to a number between –99999 and 99999, and the setting for "Chapter" can be set to a number between –100 and 100. – When specifying a setting for "Starting Page Number", switch the number between positive and negative by pressing the key. – If a negative value is specified, the numbers are not printed until the numbering reaches 1. For example, if "–1" was specified, the numbers are printed starting with "1" on the third copied page. – To print multiple chapters, specify the first page of each chapter using the "Chapters" function. For details, refer to "Specifying pages to be printed on the front side ("Chapters" function)" on page 8-17. – To cancel the "Page Number" function, touch [No]. 5 Select a setting under "Page Number Type". 6 Touch [Print Position], and then select the printing position. – To make fine adjustments to the printing position, touch [Adjust Position]. Select the desired direction under "Left & Right Adjustment" or "Top & Bottom Adjustment", touch [<->] to switch between the integer and the fraction, touch [–] and [+] to specify the adjustment amount, and then touch [OK]. – If a decimal value is displayed in the screen, press the [C] (clear) key, and then use the keypad to type in the adjustment amount. For details on switching between decimal and fraction values, refer to "System Settings" on page 12-17. 8 Application functions 8-62 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) – If a decimal value is displayed in the screen and the specified value is outside the allowable range, the message "Input Error" appears. Type a value within the allowable range. If the value was incorrectly entered, press the [C] (clear) key to erase the value, and then specify the correct value. ? What are the limits on the adjustment amount? % The print position can be finely adjusted in 0.1 mm increments. ? Can no adjustment be made? % To make no left/right or up/down adjustments, touch [No Adjustment]. 7 If necessary, specify the other settings. – To also specify settings for the "Cover Sheet", "Insert Sheet" and "Chapters" Application functions, touch [Insert Sheet Setting], and then select the settings for the pages to be printed. – Blank pages inserted using the "Cover Sheet", "Insert Sheet" and "Chapters" functions are only counted, but page numbers are not printed on them. – If "Print on Back Cover Only" or "Do Not Print Page Number" is selected under "Cover Sheet", page numbers are printed starting with "2" in single-sided copies and starting with "3" in double-sided copies. – If "Do Not Print #" is selected, inserted pages are only counted, but page numbers are not printed on them. If "Skip the Page(s)" is selected, inserted pages are not counted and page numbers are not printed on them. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 8-63 Application functions 8 – To specify the text size, touch [Text Size], and then select the size. The factory default is 10 pt. 8 Touch [OK], and then touch [Close] in the next screen that appears. 9 Specify any other desired copy settings. – To cancel the setting and select the default, press the [Reset] key. 10 Using the keypad, type in the desired number of copies. 11 Press the [Start] key. 8.15.3 Printing previously registered stamps ("Stamp" function) 1 Position the original to be copied. – Use the Copy Protection Utility to register a registered stamp. For details on registering stamps, refer to the manual of the Copy Protection Utility. – For details on positioning the original, refer to "Feeding the original" on page 3-9. 2 Touch [Application], and then touch [Stamp/Composition]. – To cancel changes to the settings for all Application functions, press the [Reset] key. All changes to the settings are canceled. The Stamp/Composition screen appears. 8 Application functions 8-64 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 3 Touch [Stamp]. – To cancel the "Stamp" function, touch [No]. The Stamp screen appears. 4 Select the desired stamp under "Stamp Type/Preset Stamps" or "Stamp Type/Registered Stamps". – Touch or to display a different list of preset or registered stamps. – Only one stamp can be selected. 5 Select the desired setting under "Pages". – To print the stamp only on the front cover, touch [1st Page Only]. – The stamp will not be printed on blank pages inserted using the "Cover Sheet", "Insert Sheet" and "Chapters" functions. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 8-65 Application functions 8 6 Touch [Print Position], and then select the printing position. – To make fine adjustments to the printing position, touch [Adjust Position]. Select the desired direction under "Left & Right Adjustment" or "Top & Bottom Adjustment", touch [<->] to switch between the integer and the fraction, touch [–] and [+] to specify the adjustment amount, and then touch [OK]. – If a decimal value is displayed in the screen, press the [C] (clear) key, and then use the keypad to type in the adjustment amount. For details on switching between decimal and fraction values, refer to "System Settings" on page 12-17. – If a decimal value is displayed in the screen and the specified value is outside the allowable range, the message "Input Error" appears. Type a value within the allowable range. If the value was incorrectly entered, press the [C] (clear) key to erase the value, and then specify the correct value. ? What are the limits on the adjustment amount? % The print position can be finely adjusted in 0.1 mm increments. ? Can no adjustments be made? % To make no left/right or up/down adjustments, touch [No Adjustment]. 8 Application functions 8-66 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 7 Select the desired settings for "Text Size". – As the factory default, the following setting is selected. Text Size: Std. 8 Touch [OK], and then touch [Close] in the next screen that appears. 9 Specify any other desired copy settings. 10 Using the keypad, type in the desired number of copies. 11 Press the [Start] key. 8.15.4 Printing copy protection text ("Copy Protect" function) ! Detail If the "Copy Protect" function is set, hidden text is printed in order to prevent unauthorized copying. When an original printed with copy protection text is copied, the hidden text appears clearly repeated in the copies so that the reader knows that it is a copy. The copy protection text is printed on all pages. The pages cannot be specified. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 8-67 Application functions 8 1 Position the original to be copied. – For details on positioning the original, refer to "Feeding the original" on page 3-9. 2 Touch [Application], and then touch [Stamp/Composition]. – To cancel changes to the settings for all Application functions, press the [Reset] key. All changes to the settings are canceled. The Stamp/Composition screen appears. 3 Touch [Copy Protect]. 8 Application functions 8-68 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 4 Select the desired type of copy protection text. – To cancel the Copy Protect function, touch [No]. – Touching [Registered Stamp] or [Preset Stamp] displays a screen containing buttons for the available stamps. Touch the button for the desired stamp, and then touch [OK]. – Use the Copy Protection Utility to register a registered stamp. For details on registering stamps, refer to the manual of the Copy Protection Utility. – The selected copy protection text formats appear in a column at the center of the screen. Up to eight text lines can be combined. – Multiple registered stamps or preset stamps cannot be selected. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 8-69 Application functions 8 – Touching [Date/Time] displays the Copy Protect > Date/Time screen. Select the desired settings under "Date Format" and "Time Format", and then touch [OK]. – The copy protection date and time that is printed is the date and time when the original is scanned. – Touching [Other] displays a screen for specifying settings for other stamps. Touch the button for the desired stamp, and then touch [OK]. – To cancel the changes to the settings in each copy protection settings screen, touch [No]. – To print the copy job number, touch [Yes] under "Job Number". – To print the serial number of this machine, touch [Yes] under "Serial Number". For details on specifying settings for the serial number, contact your service representative. – To print the copy distribution number, touch [Yes] under "Distribution Control Number". A distribution number between 1 and 99,999,999 can be specified. 5 Touch [Detailed Settings]. The Detailed Settings screen appears. 8 Application functions 8-70 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 6 Touch the desired button to change the setting values in each setting screen, and then touch [Close]. – As the factory default, the following settings are selected. Density: Std.; Copy Protect Pattern: Emboss Text; Text Size: Std.; Background Pattern: Pattern 1 – The setting under "Pattern Contrast" in the Copy Protect Pattern screen can only be specified in single increments between –2 and +2. Density screen Copy Protect Pattern screen bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 8-71 Application functions 8 7 If desired, touch [Change Pos./Delete], and then change the arrangement of the text. – To change the arrangement order, touch [Change Position], select the copy protection text to be moved, and then touch either [Up] or [Down]. – To add a space to the copy protection text, touch [Insert Space]. Touch either [Up] or [Down] to move the round mark that appeared beside the specified copy protection text type, and then touch [Insert]. Text Size screen Background Pattern screen 8 Application functions 8-72 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) – To delete the copy protection text, touch [Delete], and then touch the button for the copy protection text to be deleted. 8 Touch [OK] and then touch [Close] in the next screen that appears. 9 Specify any other desired copy settings. – To cancel the setting and select the default, press the [Reset] key. 10 Using the keypad, type in the desired number of copies. 11 Press the [Start] key. Insert Space scrren Delete scrren bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 8-73 Application functions 8 8.15.5 Printing repeating stamps ("Stamp Repeat" function) 1 Position the original to be copied. – For details on positioning the original, refer to "Feeding the original" on page 3-9. 2 Touch [Application], and then touch [Stamp/Composition]. – To cancel all settings for the Application functions, press the [Reset] key. The Stamp/Composition screen appears. 3 Touch [Stamp Repeat]. The Stamp Repeat screen appears. 8 Application functions 8-74 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 4 Select the desired type of repeating stamp. – To cancel the "Stamp Repeat" function, touch [No]. – Touch [Registered Stamp] or [Preset Stamp] to display a screen containing buttons for the available stamps. Touch the button for the desired stamp, and then touch [OK]. – Use the Copy Protection Utility to register a registered stamp. For details on registering stamps, refer to the manual of the Copy Protection Utility. – The selected repeating stamp formats appear in a column at the center of the screen. Up to eight text lines can be combined. – Multiple registered stamps or preset stamps cannot be selected. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 8-75 Application functions 8 – Touching [Date/Time] displays the Stamp Repeat > Date/Time screen. Select the desired settings under "Date Type" and "Time Type", and then touch [OK]. – The repeating stamp date and time that is printed is the date and time when the original is scanned. – Touching [Other] displays a screen for specifying settings for other stamps. Touch the button for the desired stamp, and then touch [OK]. – To cancel the changes to the settings in each repeating stamp settings screen, touch [No]. – To print the copy job number, touch [Yes] under "Job Number". – To print the serial number of this machine, touch [Yes] under "Serial Number". For details on specifying settings for the serial number, contact your service representative. – To print the copy distribution number, touch [Yes] under "Distribution Control Number". A distribution number between 1 and 99,999,999 can be specified. 5 Touch [Detailed Settings]. The Detailed Settings screen appears. 8 Application functions 8-76 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 6 Touch the desired button to change the setting values in each setting screen, and then touch [Close]. – As the factory default, the following settings are selected. Density: Std.; Text Size: Std. Density screen Text Size screen bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 8-77 Application functions 8 7 If desired, touch [Change Pos./Delete], and then change the arrangement of the text. – To change the arrangement order, touch [Change Position], select the repeating stamp text to be moved, and then touch either [Up] or [Down]. – To add a space to the repeating stamp, touch [Insert Space]. Touch either [Up] or [Down] to move the round mark that appeared beside the specified repeating stamp type, and then touch [Insert]. Change Position screen Insert Space screen 8 Application functions 8-78 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) – To delete the repeating stamp text, touch [Delete], and then touch the button for the repeating stamp text to be deleted. 8 Touch [OK], and then touch [Close]. 9 Specify any other desired copy settings. 10 Using the keypad, type in the desired number of copies. 11 Press the [Start] key. 8.15.6 Printing the image scanned first overlapped by the remaining original pages ("Overlay" function) Copies can be printed with the contents of the first scanned original page overlapped by the remaining original pages. In addition, a scanned original can be stored as a registered overlay and recalled and used later. Delete screen bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 8-79 Application functions 8 1 Position the original for the overlay. 2 Touch [Application], and then touch [Stamp/Composition]. The Stamp/Composition screen appears. 3 Touch [Overlay]. – To cancel the "Overlay" function, touch [No]. The Overlay screen appears. 8 Application functions 8-80 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 4 Select the desired settings for "Pages". – To print the overlay image only on the first copied page, touch [1st Page Only] under "Pages". 5 Touch [Close]. 6 Specify any other desired copy settings. 7 Using the keypad, type in the desired number of copies. 8 Press the [Start] key. ! Detail If you cannot save a job with an overlay specified in a user box, select [Utility/Counter] - [User Settings] - [Copier Settings] - [Separate Scan Output Method], and set to [Page Print]. For details, refer to "Custom Display Settings" on page 12-19. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 8-81 Application functions 8 8.15.7 Saving a scanned image as a registered overlay ("Registered Overlay" function) 1 Position the original to be stored as overlaying image. 2 Touch [Application], and then touch [Stamp/Composition]. The Stamp/Composition screen appears. 3 Touch [Registered Overlay]. The Registered Overlay screen appears. 8 Application functions 8-82 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 4 Touch [Register Overlay Image]. – To cancel the Registered Overlay function, touch [No]. The Register Overlay Image screen appears. 5 Touch [New]. – To overwrite the registered overlay with the new image, select a registered overlay, and then touch [Overwrite]. – To delete a registered overlay, select a registered overlay, and then touch [Delete]. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 8-83 Application functions 8 – After touching the button for the registered overlay, the date that the overlay was registered appears. The Image Name Registration screen appears. 6 Type in the image name, and then touch [OK]. – Touch the buttons in the keyboard that appears in the screen to type. For details on typing in text, refer to "Entering text" on page 15-3. 8 Application functions 8-84 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 7 Check the original size of [Original Size], and then touch [OK]. – If the original size cannot be detected automatically or to specify the original size, touch [Original Size], and then specify the original size from any of the screens. To cancel changes to the settings, touch [Cancel]. 8 Touch [OK], and then touch [Close]. 9 Specify any other desired copy settings. 10 Press the [Start] key. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 8-85 Application functions 8 11 The original is scanned, then saved as a registered overlay. 2 Note With the "Restrict User Access" parameter in Administrator mode, changes to a registered overlay without administrator permission can be prevented. 8.15.8 Using a registered overlay ("Registered Overlay" function) 1 Position the original for overlay. 2 Touch [Application], and then touch [Stamp/Composition]. The Stamp/Composition screen appears. 8 Application functions 8-86 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 3 Touch [Registered Overlay]. The Registered Overlay screen appears. 4 Touch the button for the "Registered Overlay" to be used, and then touch [OK]. – To cancel the "Registered Overlay" function, touch [OK]. – After touching the button for the registered overlay, the date that the overlay was registered appears. – To print the overlay image only on the first copied page, touch [1st Page Only] under "Pages". 5 Touch [OK] and then touch [Close] in the next screen that appears. 6 Specify any other desired copy settings. 7 Using the keypad, type in the desired number of copies. 8 Press the [Start] key. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 8-87 Application functions 8 8.15.9 Printing a header/footer ("Header/Footer" function) 0 In order to use headers/footers, a header/footer must be registered in advance from Administrator mode. For details on registering headers/footers, refer to "Specifying headers/footers" on page 12-64. 1 Position the original to be copied. – For details on positioning the original, refer to "Feeding the original" on page 3-9. 2 Touch [Application], and then touch [Stamp/Composition]. 3 Touch [Header/Footer]. – To cancel changes to the settings for all Application functions, press the [Reset] key. All changes to the settings are canceled. – If no header/footer is registered in Administrator mode, [Header/Footer] does not appear. The Header/Footer screen appears. 8 Application functions 8-88 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 4 Under "Recall Header/Footer", touch the button of the header/footer to be used, and then touch [OK]. – To check or temporarily change the header/footer settings, touch [Check/Change Temporarily]. 5 Touch [OK], and then touch [Close]. 6 Specify any other desired copy settings. 7 Using the keypad, type in the desired number of copies. 8 Press the [Start] key. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 8-89 Application functions 8 8.15.10 Printing the distribution control number ("Distribution Control Number" function) 1 Position the original to be copied. – For details on positioning the original, refer to "Feeding the original" on page 3-9. 2 Touch [Application], and then touch [Stamp/Composition]. – To cancel changes to the settings for all Application functions, press the [Reset] key. All changes to the settings are canceled. The Stamp/Composition screen appears. 3 Touch [Distribution Control Number]. The Distribution Control Number screen appears. 8 Application functions 8-90 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 4 Using the keypad, type in the starting distribution control number for printing. – To cancel the Distribution Control Number function, touch [No]. 5 Select the desired setting under "Pages". – To print the distribution control number only on the first page, touch [1st Page Only]. – The distribution control number will not be printed on blank pages inserted using "Cover Sheet", "Insert Sheet", and "Chapters" functions. 6 If necessary, specify the other settings. – As the factory default, the following settings are selected. Density: Standard, Text Size: Standard – To specify the density, touch [Density], and then select the desired density. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 8-91 Application functions 8 – To specify the text size, touch [Text Size], and then select the desired size. 7 Touch [OK], and then touch [Close]. 8 Specify any other desired copy settings. 9 Using the keypad, type in the desired number of copies. 10 Press the [Start] key. 8.15.11 Printing the watermark onto copies ("Watermark" function) 1 Position the original to be copied. – For details on positioning the original, refer to "Feeding the original" on page 3-9. 2 Touch [Application], and then touch [Stamp/Composition]. – To cancel changes to the settings for all Application functions, press the [Reset] key. All changes to the settings are canceled. The Stamp/Composition screen appears. 8 Application functions 8-92 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 3 Touch [Watermark]. The Watermark screen appears. 4 Select the desired watermark. – To cancel the Watermark function, touch [No]. 5 Touch [OK], and then touch [Close]. 6 Specify any other desired copy settings. 7 Using the keypad, type in the desired number of copies. 8 Press the [Start] key. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 8-93 Application functions 8 8.16 Saving the scanned original in a user box ("Save in User Box" function) A scanned original can be saved in a user box. Documents saved in user boxes can be printed when necessary. ! Detail For details on the user box settings, refer to the User manual – Box Operations. 1 Position the original to be copied. 2 Touch [Application], and then touch [Save in User Box]. 3 Touch [User Box]. A screen for selecting a user box appears. 8 Application functions 8-94 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 4 Select the user box where the data is to be saved. – Touch the tab containing the desired user box, and then button for the user box. – To type in a user box number to specify the user box, touch [Enter User Box No.]. – It is not necessary to enter the password when saving data, even if a password has been specified for the box. – Touching [Search User Box] displays the Search User Box screen. User boxes can be searched for by the first letter of their name. Touch [etc] or the button that includes the first letter of the user box name to display a list of user boxes starting with the selected letter. A user box can be selected from this screen. 5 Touch [OK]. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 8-95 Application functions 8 6 Check the name of the document to be saved. To change the name that is automatically specified, touch [Document Name]. 7 After typing in the name, touch [OK]. – For details on typing in text, refer to "Entering text" on page 15-3. 8 Select whether or not a copy will also be printed when the data is saved. To print a copy, touch [Yes] beside "Save & Print". 8 Application functions 8-96 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 9 Touch [OK]. – To cancel the "Save in User Box" function, touch [No]. The Application screen appears again. 10 Specify any other desired copy settings. 11 Press the [Start] key. If [Yes] beside "Page Print" was selected, the scanned original is copied and the document data is saved in the specified user box. If [No] beside "Page Print" was selected, the data for the scanned original is saved in the specified user box. ! Detail For details on using documents saved in user boxes, refer to the User manual – Box Operations. If you cannot save a job with an overlay specified in a user box, select [Utility/Counter] - [User Settings] - [Copier Settings] - [Separate Scan Output Method], and set to [Page Print]. For details, refer to "Custom Display Settings" on page 12-19. 9 Replacing toner cartridges and staple cartridges and emptying hole-punch scrap box bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 9-3 Replacing toner cartridges and staple cartridges and emptying hole-punch scrap box 9 9 Replacing toner cartridges and staple cartridges and emptying hole-punch scrap box 9.1 Replacing the toner cartridge When the toner is about to run out, an advanced warning message similar to the one shown below appears. ! Detail When the message appears, prepare to replace the toner cartridge according to your maintenance agreement. 2 Note After the message appears, the machine stops operating. Replace the toner cartridge according to your maintenance agreement. ! Detail For details on replacing the toner cartridge, refer to "To replace the toner cartridge" on page 9-5. 9 Replacing toner cartridges and staple cartridges and emptying hole-punch scrap box 9-4 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) Display in Enlarge Display mode When the toner is about to run out, [ ! ] appears on the screen. Touch [ ! ] to display the following message. When the toner is empty, the screen shown below appears. 7 WARNING Precaution for the empty toner cartridge If it is thrown into a fire, the toner may ignite and cause a dangerous situation. % DO NOT THROW toner or the empty toner cartridge into a fire! 7 CAUTION Precaution for storing and handling the toner cartridge If too much of toner is inhaled or toner gets in your eyes, your health may be affected. % Keep the toner cartridge away from children. % Be careful not to spill toner inside the machine or get toner on your clothes or hands. % If your hands become soiled with toner, immediately wash them with soap and water. % If toner gets in your eyes, immediately flush them with water, and then seek professional medical attention. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 9-5 Replacing toner cartridges and staple cartridges and emptying hole-punch scrap box 9 9.1.1 To replace the toner cartridge 0 Use the same number toner cartridge as described on the label applied on the upper left side of the toner cartridge cover. Otherwise, machine trouble may occur. 1 Open the toner cartridge door. 2 Pull out the cartridge holder. – While pulling the toner unit lever toward you, pull the cartridge holder out toward you as far as possible. 3 Withdraw and pull up the used toner cartridge to remove it. 4 Remove the new toner cartridge form the box. – The toner within the toner cartridge may have become compacted. Be sure to handle steps 5 until the toner is mostly broken up before installing the cartridge. 5 Shake the new toner cartridge by turning it over about five times. 9 Replacing toner cartridges and staple cartridges and emptying hole-punch scrap box 9-6 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 6 Remove the cover from the new toner cartridge. 7 Set the toner cartridge, making sure that it is correctly oriented. – With the label at the end of the toner cartridge facing up, insert the bottom of the cartridge into the slot in the cartridge holder. 8 Return the cartridge holder to its original position 9 Close the toner cartridge door. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 9-7 Replacing toner cartridges and staple cartridges and emptying hole-punch scrap box 9 9.2 Replacing the staple cartridge When the staple cartridge is empty, the message "Replace staple cartridge." appears. Replace the staple cartridge. Display in Enlarge Display mode When staples are about to run out, [ ! ] appears on the screen. Touch [ ! ] to display the following message. 9 Replacing toner cartridges and staple cartridges and emptying hole-punch scrap box 9-8 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 2 Reminder Be sure to replace the staple cartridge only after the message appears, otherwise the machine may be damaged. 9.2.1 To replace the staple cartridge in Finisher FS-524 1 Open the front door. 2 Grab handle FN7, and then pull out the stacker unit. – Slowly pull out the stacker unit as far as possible. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 9-9 Replacing toner cartridges and staple cartridges and emptying hole-punch scrap box 9 3 Remove the staple cartridge holder. – Hold the lever on the staple cartridge holder, and then pull the holder down to remove it. 4 Remove the empty staple cartridge from the staple cartridge holder. 5 Load the new staple cartridge into the staple cartridge holder. – Do not remove the remaining staples, otherwise the machine will not be able to staple after the cartridge is replaced. 6 Install the staple cartridge holder. – Check that the staple cartridge holder is securely inserted as far as possible. 9 Replacing toner cartridges and staple cartridges and emptying hole-punch scrap box 9-10 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 7 Return the stacker unit to its original position. – When returning the stacker unit to its original position, do not grab any part other than handle FN7, otherwise your hand or fingers may be pinched. 8 Close the front door. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 9-11 Replacing toner cartridges and staple cartridges and emptying hole-punch scrap box 9 9.2.2 To replace the staple cartridge in Finisher FS-525 1 Open the front door. 2 Grab handle FN7, and then pull out the stacker unit. – Slowly pull out the stacker unit as far as possible. 3 Remove the staple cartridge holder. – Hold the lever on the staple cartridge holder to pull it up, and then pull it downward and out to remove it. 9 Replacing toner cartridges and staple cartridges and emptying hole-punch scrap box 9-12 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 4 Push the portion of the staple cartridge holder indicated by "PUSH" to open the cover of the staple cartridge holder. 5 Remove the empty staple cartridge. 6 Load a new staple cartridge. 7 Remove the tape from the staple cartridge, and then close the cover of the staple cartridge holder. – Do not remove the remaining staples, otherwise the machine will not be able to staple after the cartridge is replaced. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 9-13 Replacing toner cartridges and staple cartridges and emptying hole-punch scrap box 9 8 Install the staple cartridge holder. – Check that the staple cartridge holder is securely inserted as far as possible. 9 Return the stacker unit to its original position. 9 Replacing toner cartridges and staple cartridges and emptying hole-punch scrap box 9-14 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) – When returning the stacker unit to its original position, do not grab any part other than handle FN7, otherwise your hand or fingers may be pinched. 10 Close the front door. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 9-15 Replacing toner cartridges and staple cartridges and emptying hole-punch scrap box 9 9.2.3 To replace the staple cartridge in Finisher FS-610 1 Open the front door. 2 Grab handle FN6, and then pull out the stacker unit. – Slowly pull out the stacker unit as far as possible. 3 Remove the staple cartridge holder. – Hold the lever on the staple cartridge holder, and then pull the holder up to remove it. 9 Replacing toner cartridges and staple cartridges and emptying hole-punch scrap box 9-16 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 4 Remove the empty staple cartridge from the staple cartridge holder. 5 Load the new staple cartridge into the staple cartridge holder. – Do not remove the remaining staples, otherwise the machine will not be able to staple after the cartridge is replaced. 6 Slowly peel off the stopper tape. 7 Install the staple cartridge holder. – Check that the staple cartridge holder is securely inserted as far as possible. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 9-17 Replacing toner cartridges and staple cartridges and emptying hole-punch scrap box 9 8 Return the stacker unit to its original position. – When returning the stacker unit to its original position, do not grab any part other than handle FN6, otherwise your hand or fingers may be pinched. 9 Close the front door. 9 Replacing toner cartridges and staple cartridges and emptying hole-punch scrap box 9-18 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 9.3 Emptying hole-punch scrap boxes If the hole-punch scrap box of the punch kit installed with the finisher becomes full, the message shown below appears (if the box can be emptied by the user). 2 Note The setting for emptying the hole-punch scrap box should be specified by the service representative. For details, contact the service representative. The default setting is "Service". If a message appears, immediately contact the service representative. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 9-19 Replacing toner cartridges and staple cartridges and emptying hole-punch scrap box 9 ! Detail When performed by user If the hole-punch scrap box has become full while a job is being performed, the job being performed is paused. To continue the job without canceling the Punch setting, empty the hole-punch scrap box. To cancel the Punch setting and continue the job, touch [Cancel Punching]. When performed by service representative If the hole-punch scrap box has become full while a job is being performed, the job being performed is paused. To continue the job, touch [Cancel Punching]. However, the continued job is printed without holes being punched. 9 Replacing toner cartridges and staple cartridges and emptying hole-punch scrap box 9-20 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 9.3.1 To empty the hole-punch scrap box of the finisher Follow the procedure described below to empty the hole-punch scrap box. 1 Open the front door. 2 Pull out the hole-punch scrap box. 3 Empty the hole-punch scrap box. 4 Insert the hole-punch scrap box into its original position. 5 Close the front door. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 9-21 Replacing toner cartridges and staple cartridges and emptying hole-punch scrap box 9 9.3.2 To empty the hole-punch scrap box of the Z Folding Unit Follow the procedure described below to empty the hole-punch scrap box. 1 Open the front door. 2 Pull out the hole-punch scrap box. 3 Empty the hole-punch scrap box. 4 Insert the hole-punch scrap box into its original position. 5 Close the front door. 9 Replacing toner cartridges and staple cartridges and emptying hole-punch scrap box 9-22 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 10 Care of the machine bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 10-3 Care of the machine 10 10 Care of the machine 10.1 Cleaning This section describes the procedures for cleaning each part. Be sure to turn off the main power switch before cleaning it. 10.1.1 Cleaning the left partition glass Keep the glass clean; otherwise soil marks may be copied, resulting in dark lines on the copies. Raise the ADF, and clean the left partition glass by wiping it with a soft, dry cloth. 2 Reminder Never use solvents, such as benzene or thinner, to clean the left partition glass. 10.1.2 Cleaning the original glass Keep the glass clean; otherwise spots may be copied. Raise the ADF, and clean the surface of the original glass by wiping it with a soft, dry cloth. 2 Reminder Never use solvents, such as benzene or thinner, to clean the original glass. 10 Care of the machine 10-4 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 10.1.3 Cleaning the document pad Keep the pad clean; otherwise spots may be copied. Raise the ADF, and clean the document pad by wiping it with a soft, dry cloth. 2 Reminder Never use solvents, such as benzene or thinner, to clean the document pad. 10.1.4 Cleaning the paper take-up roller Keep the roller clean; otherwise soil marks may be copied, resulting in dark lines on the copies. Clean the paper take-up rollers by wiping them with a soft, dry cloth. 2 Reminder Never use solvents, such as benzene or thinner, to clean the paper take-up roller. 10.1.5 Cleaning the main unit Clean the surface of the main unit by wiping it with a soft cloth dampened with a mild household detergent. 2 Reminder Never use solvents, such as benzene or thinner, to clean the main unit. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 10-5 Care of the machine 10 10.1.6 Cleaning the control panel Clean the control panel by wiping it with a soft, dry cloth. 2 Reminder Pressing too hard on the control panel or the touch panel may damage them. Never use a mild household detergent, glass cleaner, benzin or thinner to clean the control panel or touch panel. 10 Care of the machine 10-6 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 10.1.7 Care of Authentication Unit (Biometric Type) AU-101 2 Reminder Before cleaning the authentication unit, disconnect it from the machine. If a force is applied to the USB port, it may be damaged. When cleaning the authentication unit, do not allow water to enter the authentication unit, otherwise the system may be damaged. Never use organic solvents, such as benzene or alcohol, to clean the authentication unit, otherwise it may be damaged. 2 Note When disconnecting or connecting the authentication unit, turn off the machine with the main power switch, and then wait at least 10 seconds before turning it on again. The machine may not operate correctly if it is turned on immediately after being turned off. Hold the plug when plugging and unplugging the USB cable, otherwise the cable may be damaged. Care of the housing Frequency: Once a month, or when it is dirty Wipe the housing with a soft, dry cloth. If the housing cannot be cleaned by wiping it, wash it with a cloth dampened with a mild detergent and wrung out well. After the housing is cleaned, rinse the cloth and wring it out well before wiping off the detergent. Care of the scanner Frequency: Once a month, or when it is dirty or covered with fingerprints Care of the scanner Frequency: Once a month, or when it is dirty or covered with fingerprints Clean the scanner with a soft cloth used to wipe eyeglass lenses. If it is extremely dirty, clean it with an eyeglass lens cleaner. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 10-7 Care of the machine 10 10.1.8 Care of Authentication Unit (IC Card Type) AU-201 2 Reminder Before cleaning the authentication unit, disconnect it from the machine. If a force is applied to the USB port, it may be damaged. When cleaning the authentication unit, do not allow water to enter the authentication unit, otherwise the system may be damaged. Never use organic solvents, such as benzene or alcohol, to clean the authentication unit, otherwise it may be damaged. 2 Note When disconnecting or connecting the authentication unit, turn off the machine with the main power switch, and then wait at least 10 seconds before turning it on again. The machine may not operate correctly if it is turned on immediately after being turned off. Hold the plug when plugging and unplugging the USB cable, otherwise the cable may be damaged. Frequency: Once a month, or when it is dirty Wipe the authentication unit with a soft, dry cloth. If the authentication unit cannot be cleaned by wiping it, wash it with a cloth dampened with a mild detergent and wrung out well. After the authentication unit is cleaned, rinse the cloth and wring it out well before wiping off the detergent. 10 Care of the machine 10-8 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 10.2 Viewing counters (Meter Count) 10.2.1 Viewing counters The Meter Count screen can be displayed so that the total number of prints since counting started can be viewed. In addition, the list of counters can be printed. 1 Press the [Utility/Counter] key. 2 Touch [Meter Count], and then touch [Check Details] in the left panel. 3 The Meter Count screen appears. ? Can the list of counters be printed? % Touch [Print List], select the paper size, and then press the [Start] key. 4 Touch [Close], and then touch [Close] in the next screen that appears. The Basic screen appears again. 2 Note The list of counters can be displayed even while the machine is copying or printing. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 10-9 Care of the machine 10 10.3 When the message "It is time for the scheduled inspection of the device." appears A periodic maintenance will be required after 250,000 copies for bizhub 751/601. If the message "It is time for the scheduled inspection of the device." appears, contact your service representative and request a periodic maintenance inspection. 10 Care of the machine 10-10 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 11 Managing jobs bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 11-3 Managing jobs 11 11 Managing jobs 11.1 Overview of Job List screen 11.1.1 Jobs Specifying the desired copy settings, then pressing the [Start] key queues the copy operation in this machine. This queued operation is called a job. In the same way, operations for making scans and computer printouts are also queued as jobs. - Jobs that are being performed and the job log can be checked from the Job List screens. - Jobs are printed starting with the one at the top of the Current Jobs list. - Jobs are numbered in the order that they were programmed and are queued to be performed (printed). 2 Note The job number identifies the job; it does not indicate the printing order. In addition, the job number does not change until the job is deleted. By using the "Increase Priority" function, the selected job can be moved to the front of the queue so that it is printed first. 11.1.2 Multi-job feature While one job is being printed, another job can be queued. A total of 250 jobs can be queued. The number of jobs possible for each operation is listed below. * The values listed above are for reference and may differ from the actual values depending on other settings. When one job is finished being printed, the next queued job automatically begins. 2 Note Up to 250 jobs, including print jobs, scanner transmission jobs, fax transmission jobs and received fax/save jobs, can be queued. Operation Number of jobs Copy 5 Interrupted copy 1 Scan 5 Print 10 Fax (Off Hook TX) 1 Fax (Memory TX) 50 Fax (Timer TX) 20 Fax RX 100 Fax (Polling RX) 1 Fax (Polling TX) 1 Sharing 56 Total 250 11 Managing jobs 11-4 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 11.1.3 Job List screens From the Job List screen, lists of jobs being performed by this machine and the jobs that have been performed in addition to the job details can be viewed, and the job settings can be changed. ! Detail To display the Job List screen, touch [Job List] in the left panel, and then touch [Job Details]. From the Job List screen, the following tabs for the various functions can be displayed. - Print Lists print jobs for copying, computer printing, and received faxes. - Send Lists fax and scanner transmission jobs. - Receive Lists fax transmission jobs. - Save Lists jobs for saving documents in user boxes. 2 Note As the factory default, the Current Jobs list on the Print tab is displayed in the Job List screen. The screen for each function listed above can be displayed from any other Job List screen. However, if a different tab is selected while a setting is being changed, that setting is canceled. A Current Jobs list and a Job History list can be displayed for each function. - Current Jobs: Lists jobs that are queued and being performed, allowing you to check the current status of the machine. - Job History: Lists jobs that have been completed, including jobs that were not performed due to an error, allowing you to check the history and result of all jobs. The type of jobs to be displayed can be selected from the Current Jobs list and Job History list. For example, the lists of stored jobs and active jobs can be displayed in the Current Jobs list on the Print tab, and the lists of deleted jobs, completed jobs and all jobs can be displayed in the Job History list. The types of jobs that can be selected differ depending on the selected tab. The function of each button in the Job List screens is described below. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 11-5 Managing jobs 11 *1 Displayed when the Current Jobs list is displayed. Button name Description [Print] button Touch to display the Print tab of the Job List screen. [Send] button Touch to display the Send tab of the Job List screen. For details, refer to the User manual – Network Scan/Fax/Network Fax Operations. [Receive] button Touch to display the Receive tab of the Job List screen. For details, refer to the User manual – Network Scan/Fax/Network Fax Operations. [Store] button Touch to display the Store tab of the Job List screen. For details, refer to the User manual – Box Operations. [Current Jobs] button A selected button indicates which job list is currently displayed. Touch to switch from the Job History list to the Current Jobs list. This lists the jobs that are currently being performed and the jobs that are queued (waiting) to be performed. [Job History] button Touch to switch from the Current Jobs list to the Job History list. This list the jobs that have been performed. [Delete] button*1 A job can be deleted from the Current Jobs list. For details, refer to "Deleting a job" on page 11-8. [Increase Priority] button (displayed on the Current Jobs list of the Print tab) The next job to be printed after the current job is finished can be changed. For details, refer to "Increasing printing priority" on page 11-17. The buttons that appear differ depending on the tab or list (Current Jobs or Job History) that is displayed. [Release Held Job] button (displayed on the Current Jobs list of the Print tab) Touch to display the list of stored jobs. The settings of a stored job can be changed, or the job can be printed or deleted. [Check Job Set.] button*1 The settings for a job in the Current Jobs list can be checked. For details, refer to "Checking job settings" on page 11-10. [Deleted Jobs] button [Finished Jobs] button [All Jobs] button (displayed on the Job History list of the Print tab) Touch to select the type of jobs displayed in the Job List screen. Change the display mode by touching the appropriate button. [Detail] button Touch to display screens for checking the status, results, error details, user name, queued time, completed time, number of original pages and number of copies for jobs in the Current Jobs and Job History lists. For details, refer to "Checking job details" on page 11-10. and buttons When there are more jobs than the seven that can be displayed at one time, touch these arrows to display jobs higher or lower in the list (higher or lower in the printing order). [Close] button Touch to quit Job List mode and returns to the screen that was displayed before [Job List] was touched. 11 Managing jobs 11-6 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) The following information is listed in the Print tab. Item Name Description No. Job identification number assigned when the job is queued User Name Displays the type (source) of the job. "COPY" is displayed for copy jobs. Status (Current Jobs list only) Displays the status of the job Document Name Displays the name of the file for print jobs sent from the computer. If user authentication settings have been applied, the names of documents are not displayed for other users. The name of confidential documents is not displayed. Time Stored Displays the time that the job was queued. Org. Displays the number of pages in the original. Copies Displays the number of Copies to be printed. With jobs listed as "Printing" in the Current Jobs list, a count of the number of Copies printed is displayed. Result (Job History list only) Displays the result of the operation (Job Complete, Deleted Due To Error, Deleted by User, Reset Modes). bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 11-7 Managing jobs 11 11.1.4 Left panel Job List The job list or the job status can be displayed in the left panel of the main screen. 1 Touch [Job List] in the left panel. A list of jobs appears in the left panel. – If the "Job Display Setting" parameter (available from the User Setting screen) is set to "Status Display", the job status is displayed in the left panel. – To display the Job List screen, touch [Job Details]. – To delete a job, select the job from the job list, and then touch [Delete]. – When there are more jobs than the seven that can be displayed at one time, touch and to display other jobs. ! Detail As the factory default, the display for the sub display area is that when "Job Display Setting" is set to "List Display". For details on specifying the default display for the left panel and the display method for the left panel Job List, refer to "Custom Display Settings" on page 12-19. 11 Managing jobs 11-8 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 11.2 Performing operations on jobs 11.2.1 Deleting a job A queued job or job being printed (job on the Current Jobs list) can be deleted. 1 Touch [Job List] in the left panel, and then touch [Job Details]. The Job List screen appears. 2 In the Print tab, display the job to be deleted. – Jobs on the Job History list cannot be deleted. 3 Select the job to be deleted, and then touch [Delete]. – If the job to be deleted is not displayed, touch or until the desired job is displayed. – If an incorrect job was selected, select a different job or touch the button for the selected job again to deselect it. A message requesting confirmation to delete the job appears. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 11-9 Managing jobs 11 4 Check the information that is displayed, touch [Yes] if the correct job is indicated, and then touch [OK]. – To quit deleting the job, touch [No], and then touch [OK]. The screen displayed before [Delete] was touched appears again, and the job is deleted from the Current Jobs list. 5 Touch [Close] or press the [Reset] key. The Basic screen appears again. 2 Note If user authentication settings have been applied and the machine is set so that jobs cannot be deleted by other users, the job is not deleted. A job being performed can also be deleted by selecting the job in the sub display area, then touching [Delete]. 11 Managing jobs 11-10 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 11.2.2 Checking job settings Job settings for stored jobs, jobs being printed, jobs queued to be printed and held jobs can be checked. 1 Touch [Job List] in the left panel, and then touch [Job Details]. The Job List screen appears. 2 Display the list containing the job whose settings are to be checked. 3 Select the job to be checked, and then touch [Check Job Set.]. – If an incorrect job was selected, select a different job or touch the button for the selected job again to deselect it. – The contents and number of Job Settings screens differ depending on the job that was selected. – The upper number to the left of [ Back] indicates the number of the currently displayed screen. The lower number indicates the total number of screens. – To display the previous screen, touch [ Back]. To display the next screen, touch [Forward ]. The Check Job Settings screen appears. 4 After checking the settings, touch [Close] or press the [Reset] key. – To return to the screen displayed before [Check Job Set.] was touched, touch [Close]. – To return to the Basic screen, press the [Reset] key. 11.2.3 Checking job details The following information can be checked from the Job List screen. - Print tab Status (Receiving, Print Wait, Printing, Stop Print, Print Err, Job Stored)*1, Result (Job Complete, Deleted Due To Error, Deleted by User, Reset Modes)*2, Error Details*2, User Name, Document Name, Output Tray, hours (Job Start, Job End*2), Prints (Original, # of Sets), External Server Information - Send tab Status (Transferring, Waiting, Dialing, Waiting To Redial)*1, Result (Job Complete, Deleted Due To Error, Deleted by User)*2, User Name, Document Name, Address Type (E-Mail, FTP, File (SMB), TWAIN, Fax, WebDAV, Others), Dest (Detail*3), hours (Job Start, Type), Prints (Document), External Server Information - Receive tab Status (Receiving, Dialing (only with polling reception), Print Wait, Printing, Stop Print, Print Err, Saving to Memory)*1, Result (Job Complete, Deleted Due To Error, Deleted by User, Reset Modes)*2, Error Details*2, User Name, Document Name, Output Tray, hours (Job Start, Type), Prints (Document), box number, box name, External Server Information - Save tab Status (Receiving, Saving to Memory)*1, Result (Job Complete, Deleted Due to Error, Deleted by User, Reset Modes)*2, Error Details*2, User Name, User Box (box number/box name), hours (Job Start), Prints (Original) *1 Displayed only for jobs on the Current Jobs list *2 Displayed only for jobs on the Job History list bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 11-11 Managing jobs 11 *3 Displayed only for jobs on the Currently Jobs list transmitted to multiple destinations 1 Touch [Job List] in the left panel, and then touch [Job Details]. The Job List screen appears. 2 Display the list containing the job whose details are to be checked. 3 Select the job whose details are to be checked, and then touch [Detail]. – If an incorrect job was selected, select a different job or touch the button for the selected job again to deselect it. The Detail screen appears. 4 After the desired information has been checked, touch [Close] or press the [Reset] key. – To return to the screen displayed before [Job Details] was touched, touch [Close]. – To return to the Basic screen, press the [Reset] key. ! Detail To delete the job, touch [Delete] in the Detail screen. If [Detail] appears in the Detail screen for a job selected from the Send tab, detailed information is available on the multiple destinations that the data was sent to with broadcast transmission. To view the information, touch [Detail]. 11 Managing jobs 11-12 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 11.2.4 Displaying the Current Jobs list (stored jobs and active jobs) The Current Jobs list of received print jobs for Copy mode and Fax mode and for computer printing is displayed. 1 Touch [Job List] in the left panel, and then touch [Job Details]. The Job List screen appears. 2 Touch the button for the desired list. – To display the stored jobs, touch [Release Held Job] to display the Release Held Job screen. To return to the Job List screen, touch [Cancel]. ! Detail For details on the function of each button, refer to "Job List screens" on page 11-4. From the Release Held Job screen, proof copies of stored jobs can be printed. For details, refer to "Printing a proof copy of a stored job" on page 11-14. Stored jobs can be printed from the Release Held Job screen. For details, refer to "Printing a stored job" on page 11-15. To give priority for output to a job, touch [Increase Priority] in the Current Jobs list. For more details, refer to "Increasing printing priority" on page 11-17. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 11-13 Managing jobs 11 11.2.5 Displaying the Job History list 1 Touch [Job List] in the left panel, and then touch [Job Details]. The Job List screen appears. 2 Touch [Job History]. The Job History list of the Print tab appears. 3 Touch the button for the desired list. – Deleted Jobs: Displays only jobs that were deleted before they were finished. – Finished Jobs: Displays only jobs that were correctly completed. – All Jobs: Displays all jobs. 11 Managing jobs 11-14 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 11.2.6 Printing a proof copy of a stored job A single copy of a stored job can be printed in order to be checked. The Held Jobs list contains jobs such as those for which a proof copy was being printed when the automatic system reset operation was performed. 2 Note For details on displaying the screen, refer to "Displaying the Current Jobs list (stored jobs and active jobs)" on page 11-12. 1 In the Current Jobs list of the Print tab, touch [Release Held Job]. The Release Held Job screen appears. 2 From the job list, select the job whose proof copy is to be printed, and then touch [Proof Copy] key. – If the job to be removed from the Held Jobs list is not displayed, touch or until the desired job is displayed. – If an incorrect job was selected, touch the button for the selected job again to deselect it. – After the single proof copy is printed, check the print result. ? How is printing of a proof copy stopped? % Press the [Stop] key. ! Detail To change the settings, touch [Check Job Set.] in the Release Held Job screen. For details, refer to "Printing a stored job" on page 11-15. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 11-15 Managing jobs 11 11.2.7 Printing a stored job A job is removed from the Held Jobs list and printed. 2 Note For details on displaying the screen, refer to "Displaying the Current Jobs list (stored jobs and active jobs)" on page 11-12. 1 In the Current Jobs list of the Print tab, touch [Release Held Job]. The Release Held Job screen appears. 2 Select the job to be removed from the Held Jobs list. – If the job to be removed from the Held Jobs list is not displayed, touch and until the desired job is displayed. – If an incorrect job was selected, select a different job or touch the button for the selected job again to deselect it. – To continue without changing the specified copy settings, continue with step 5. 3 Touch [Change Setting]. The Change Setting screen appears. 11 Managing jobs 11-16 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 4 In the Change Setting screen, change the copy settings as desired, and then touch [OK]. ? Is there more information about the settings? % Refer to the appropriate section. ? Can a proof copy be printed? % For details on printing a proof copy, refer to "Printing a proof copy of a stored job" on page 11-14. 5 In the Release Held Job screen, touch [OK] or press the [Start] key. The stored job appears in the Current Jobs list and is printed. ? How is the removal of a job from the Held Jobs list stopped? % Touch [Cancel]. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 11-17 Managing jobs 11 11.2.8 Increasing printing priority The next job to be printed after the current job being printed can be selected. If an Administrator mode parameter was set so that the output priority of jobs cannot be changed, [Increase Priority] does not appear and the output priority of the jobs cannot be specified. If the job currently being printed can be interrupted, printing is interrupted and printing of the job given priority begins. Printing of the interrupted job is automatically restarted once printing for the job given priority is finished. If the job currently being printed cannot be interrupted (a job has already been interrupted or a job was already given priority), printing is interrupted after printing for the current job is finished. 1 Display the Job History list of the Print tab. – For details on displaying the screen, refer to "Displaying the Current Jobs list (stored jobs and active jobs)" on page 11-12. 2 Touch [Increase Priority]. The Increase Priority screen appears. 3 In the job list, touch the button for the job to be given priority to select it, and then touch [OK]. – If the job to be given priority is not displayed, touch and until the desired job is displayed. – If an incorrect job was selected, select a different job or touch the button for the selected job again to deselect it. The selected job moves to the top of the list and printing of the job begins. ? How can the change in the printing priority be stopped? % Touch [Cancel]. 11 Managing jobs 11-18 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 12 Utility mode bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 12-3 Utility mode 12 12 Utility mode 12.1 Overview of Utility mode parameters 12.1.1 List of registration information and parameters This section describes the buttons available when the [Utility/Counter] key is pressed. 2 Note The buttons that appear in the Utility mode parameters differ depending on the specified settings. List of Utility mode parameters First-level menu Second-level menu Third-level menu Details [1] One-Touch/User Box Registration [1] Create One-Touch Destination [1] Address Book (Public) Refer to "Create One- Touch Destination" on [2] Address Book (Person- page 12-8. al) [3] Group [4] E-mail Settings [2] Create User Box [1] Public/Personal User Box* Refer to "Create User Box" on page 12-8. [2] Bulletin Board User Box [3] Relay User Box [3] Limiting Access to Destinations [1] Apply Levels/Groups to Destinations Refer to "Limiting Access to Destinations" on page 12-8 [2] User Settings [1] System Settings [1] Language Selection Refer to "System Settings" on page 12-17. [2] Measurement Unit Settings [3] Paper Tray Settings [4] Power Save Settings [5] Output Settings [6] Blank Page Print Settings [7] Density for Original Type [8] Page Number Print Position [2] Custom Display Settings [1] Copier Settings Refer to "Custom Display Settings" on page 12-19. [2] Scan/Fax Settings [3] Copy Screen [4] Fax Active Screen [5] Color Selection Settings [6] Left Panel Display Default [7] Search Option Settings 12 Utility mode 12-4 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) [2] User Settings [3] Copier Settings Auto Booklet ON when Fold & Staple (Machine with SD-507 only) Refer to "Copier Settings" on page 12-21. Auto Zoom For Combine/ Booklet Auto Sort/Group Selection Default Copy Settings Default Enlarge Display Settings When AMS Direction is Incorrect Separate Scan Output Method Enlargement Rotation Auto Zoom (Platen) Auto Zoom (ADF) Specify Default Tray when APS Off Select Tray for Insert Sheet Tri-Fold Print Side Print Jobs During Copy Operation Automatic Image Rotation Printed side when copying 1 sheet from Original Glass [4] Scan/Fax Settings Black Compression Level Refer to "Scan/Fax Settings" on page 12-23. Default Scan/Fax Settings Default Enlarge Display Settings [5] Printer Settings [1] Basic Settings Refer to "Printer Settings" on page 12-37. [2] Paper Setting [3] PCL Settings [4] PS Setting [5] XPS Settings [6] TIFF/PDF Image Paper Setting [7] Print Reports [8] Image Shift Settings [9] Stamp Settings [6] Change Password Changes the password for the user who is currently logged on. Refer to "Change Password" on page 12-23. [7] Change E-Mail Address E-Mail Address Changes the e-mail address for the user who is currently logged on. Refer to "Change E-Mail Address" on page 12-23 [8] Toner Supply Refer to "Toner Supply" on page 12-24. [8] Change Icon Changes the icon for the user who is currently logged on. First-level menu Second-level menu Third-level menu Details bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 12-5 Utility mode 12 [3] Administrator Settings [1] System Settings [1] Power Save Settings Refer to "System Settings" on page 12-26. [2] Output Settings [3] Date&Time Settings [4] Daylight Saving Time [5] Weekly Timer Settings [6] Restrict User Access [7] Expert Adjustment [8] List/Counter [9] Reset Settings [0] User Box Settings (next screen) [1] Size Settings For details of [1] Size Settings, contact your service [2] Stamp Settings representative. [3] Blank Page Print Settings [4] Page Number Print Position [5] Skip Job Setting [6] Application Key Settings [8] Advanced Preview Setting [2] Administrator/Machine Settings [1] Administrator Registration Refer to "Administrator/ Machine Settings" on page 12-32. [2] Input Machine Address [3] One-Touch/User Box Registration [1] Create One-Touch Destination Refer to "One-Touch/User Box Registration" on page 12-32. [2] Create User Box [3] One-Touch/User Box Registration List [4] Maximum Number of User Boxes [4] User Authentication/ Account Track [1] General Settings Refer to "User Authentication/ Account Track" on [2] User Authentication page 12-33. Settings [3] Account Track Settings [4] Print without Authentication [5] Print Counter List [6] External Server Settings [7] Limiting Access to Destinations [8] Authentication Device Setting [9] Auth/Acct Track Common Setting First-level menu Second-level menu Third-level menu Details 12 Utility mode 12-6 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) [3] Administrator Settings [5] Network Settings [1] Network Setting Refer to "Network Settings" on page 12-36. [2] TCP/IP Settings [3] NetWare Settings [4] HTTP Server Settings [5] FTP Settings [6] SMB Settings [7] LDAP Settings [8] E-Mail Settings [9] SNMP Settings [0] AppleTalk Settings (next screen) [1] Bonjour Setting [2] TCP Socket Settings [3] Network Fax Settings [4] WebDAV client Settings [5] Web Service Settings [7] SSDP Settings [8] Detail Settings [9] IEEE802.1X Authentication Settings [6] Copier Settings Auto Zoom (Platen) Refer to "Copier Settings" on page 12-21. Auto Zoom (ADF) Specify Default Tray when APS Off Select Tray for Insert Sheet Print Jobs During Copy Operation Tri-Fold Print Side Automatic Image Rotation Printed side when copying 1 sheet from Original Glass [7] Printer Settings USB Timeout Refer to "Printer Settings" on page 12-23. Network Timeout Print XPS Errors [8] Fax Settings [1] Header Information Refer to "Fax Settings" on page 12-38. [2] Header/Footer Position [3] Line Parameter Setting [4] TX/RX Settings [5] Function Settings [6] PBX Connection Setting [7] Report Settings [8] Job Settings List [9] Multi Line Setting [0] Network Fax Setting First-level menu Second-level menu Third-level menu Details bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 12-7 Utility mode 12 * If an optional hard disk is not installed, [Confidential RX User Box] appears. [3] Administrator Settings [9] System Connection [1] Open API Settings Refer to "System Connection" on page 12-38. [2] Admin. transmission [3] Prefix/Suffix Automatic Setting [0] Security Settings [1] Administrator Password Refer to "Security Settings" on page 12-38. [2] User Box Administrator Setting [3] Administrator Security Levels [4] Security Details [4] Security Detail provides [Audit Log Setting]. For details, please contact your service representative. [5] Enhanced Security Mode [6] HDD Settings [7] Function Management Settings [8] Stamp Settings [0] Driver Password Encryption Setting (next screen) [1] Flash Memory Lock Password (next screen) [1] License Settings [1] Get Request Code Refer to "License Settings" on page 12-41. [2] Install License [3] List of Enabled Functions [2] OpenAPI Certification Management Setting [1] Restriction Code Settings Refer to "OpenAPI Authentication Management Setting" on page 12-41. First-level menu Second-level menu Third-level menu Details 12 Utility mode 12-8 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 12.2 Registering a destination This section describes the function and main registration parameters that can be specified after pressing the [Utility/Counter] key, then touching [One-Touch/User Box Registration]. 12.2.1 Create One-Touch Destination 2 Note If user authentication settings have been specified, [1 One-Touch Destination/User Box Registration] cannot be selected when no user has logged on. However, after a user has logged on, [1 One-Touch Destination/User Box Registration] appears. Items for registering fax destinations appear only when the fax kit is installed or when Internet fax functions are available. 12.2.2 Create User Box 2 Note [2 Bulletin Board User Box] and [3 Relay User Box] appear only when the fax kit is installed or when Internet fax functions are available. If an optional hard disk is not installed, the [Confidential RX User Box] key appears instead of the [Public/Personal] key. 12.2.3 Limiting Access to Destinations Access Level Using the Access Level settings on this machine, the security of registered destinations can be managed by permitting/prohibiting viewing of the destination information or fax transmissions to the destination. Access permission levels can be set to one of six levels between 0 and 5, with the higher number indicating higher security. 2 Note The access level that is set for user, destination, and group level on the Limiting Access to Destinations can be used when user authentication settings have been specified. Parameter Description Address Book (Public) Specify settings for registering fax and scan destinations. For details, refer to the User manual – Network Scan/Fax/Network Fax Operations. Address Book (Personal) Group E-mail Settings Parameter Description Public/Personal User Box Specify settings for registering user box destinations. For details, refer to the User manual – Box Operations and the User manual – Network Scan/Fax/Network Fax Opera- Bulletin Board User Box tions. Relay User Box bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 12-9 Utility mode 12 Level settings The access permission level can be specified for each user and destination. The destinations that can be accessed by users can be limited according to the access permission levels specified for the user and destination. For example, a level 2 user can access destinations in levels 0 through 2, but cannot access destinations in levels 3 through 5. A level 5 user can access all destinations in levels 0 through 5. 2 Note For details on the access permission level settings for user, refer to "User Authentication/Account Track" on page 12-33. As a default, the access permission level specified for public users is level 0. Group In addition to users and destinations, groups with access permissions can be created and given a name. When users and destinations are registered in these groups, a destination registered in a group can be accessed by users registered to the same group. In addition, by applying access permission levels to groups, users not registered in a group can be given access permissions according to the conditions of the specified level. A destination can be registered in only one group. However, a user can be registered in multiple groups. Level 2 user access range Level 5 user access range Destinations Level 0 Level 1 Level 2 Level 3 Level 4 Level 5 User 3 Destination 1 Destination 2 User 1 User 2 Access Allow Level 3 12 Utility mode 12-10 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) Specifying a group setting 1 Display the Administrator Settings screen. – For details on displaying the Administrator Settings screen, refer to "Displaying the Administrator Settings screen" on page 12-42. 2 Touch [4 User Authentication/Account Track]. The User Authentication/Account Track screen appears. 3 Touch [7 Limiting Access to Destinations]. The Limiting Access to Destinations screen appears. 4 Touch [1 Create Group]. – A maximum of 20 groups can be registered. – In the Create Group screen, touch the button for a group, touch [Details], and then check the destinations and names of users belonging to that group. The Create Group screen appears. 5 Touch the button for the desired group, and then touch [Edit]. The Edit screen appears. 6 Touch [Group Name]. The Group Name screen appears. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 12-11 Utility mode 12 7 Type in the group name (up to 24 characters), and then touch [OK]. – For details on typing in text, refer to "Entering text" on page 15-3. The group name is specified. 8 Select the desired access permission level. The access permission level for the group is specified. 9 Touch [OK]. Specifying a destination level 1 Display the Administrator Settings screen. – For details on displaying the Administrator Settings screen, refer to "Displaying the Administrator Settings screen" on page 12-42. 2 Touch [4 User Authentication/Account Track]. The User Authentication/Account Track screen appears. 3 Touch [7 Limiting Access to Destinations]. The Limiting Access to Destinations screen appears. 4 Touch [2 Apply Levels/Groups to Destinations]. The Apply Levels/Groups to Destinations screen appears. 12 Utility mode 12-12 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 5 Touch the button for the desired destination. – For an address book destination, touch the index button for the first letter of the destination, and then search for the destination. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 12-13 Utility mode 12 6 Touch the button for the desired setting. – Either an access permission level or an access permission group can be specified for each destination. – Only one access permission group can be specified for a single destination. – To specify the destination group, touch [Apply Group]. Touch the button for the desired group, and then touch [OK]. – Touch the button for a group, touch [Details], and then check the destinations and names of users belonging to that group. – To specify the destination level, touch [Apply Level]. Touch the button for the desired level, and then touch [OK]. 12 Utility mode 12-14 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) Specifying a user level 1 Display the Administrator Settings screen. – For details on displaying the Administrator Settings screen, refer to "Displaying the Administrator Settings screen" on page 12-42. 2 Touch [4 User Authentication/Account Track]. The User Authentication/Account Track screen appears. 3 Touch [7 Limiting Access to Destinations]. The Limiting Access to Destinations screen appears. 4 Touch [3 Apply Levels/Groups to Users]. The Apply Levels/Groups to Users screen appears. 5 Select either "Public User Box" or "Personal User Box" as the user type, and then touch the button for the desired User. – The "Public User Box" and "Personal User Box" settings appear only when access by a public user is permitted. – If use by a public user is permitted, "Public" appears as the user name. As the default, level 0 is specified. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 12-15 Utility mode 12 6 Touch the button for the desired setting. – Both an access permission level and an access permission group can be specified for each user. – A single user can be registered in multiple access permission groups. – To specify the user group, touch [Apply Group]. Touch [Yes], touch the button for the desired group, and then touch [OK]. – Touch the button for a group, touch [Details], and then check the destinations and names of users belonging to that group. – To specify the user level, touch [Apply Level]. Touch [Yes], touch the button for the desired level, and then touch [OK]. 12 Utility mode 12-16 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 12.2.4 Displaying the destination registration screen Follow the procedure described below to display the One-Touch/User Box Registration screen by pressing [Utility/Counter] key. 1 Press the [Utility/Counter] key. 2 Touch [1 One-Touch/User Box Registration]. – An item can also be selected by pressing the key in the keypad for the number beside the desired button. For [1 One-Touch/User Box Registration], press the [1] key in the keypad. The One-Touch/User Box Registration screen appears. 2 Note To finish specifying settings in the Utility mode, press the [Utility/Counter] key. Otherwise, exit the Utility mode by touching [Close] in each screen until the screen for the Copy, Fax/Scan or Box mode appears. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 12-17 Utility mode 12 To exit the Utility mode, press the [Utility/Counter] key. Or, repeat touching [Close] until the Copy, Fax/Scan, or Box screen appears. With an optional i-Option LK-101 installed in the machine, the Utility mode can also be terminated by touching [Close] repeatedly until the screen specified in Application Key Settings appears. 12.3 Specifying user settings This section describes the function and main registration parameters that can be specified after pressing the [Utility/Counter] key, then touching [User Settings]. 12.3.1 System Settings Language Selection Measurement Unit Settings Paper Tray Settings * Appears when the optional Large capacity unit LU-405/406 is installed. Description Default Setting Select the language of the touch panel message. English Description Default Setting Select one of the following as the measurement units in which values are displayed in the touch panel. mm (Numerical Value), inch (Numerical Value), inch (Fraction) mm (Numericial Value) Parameter Description Default Setting Auto Tray Selection Settings Select the paper trays that are selected automatically when the "Auto" Paper setting is specified. In addition, specify the priority of the paper trays when the auto tray switch operation is performed. Tray priority order: Tray 1 % Tray 2 % Tray 3 % Tray 4 % Bypass % LCT* Auto Tray Switch ON/OFF Select whether or not a paper tray loaded with paper of the same size is selected automatically when a paper tray that was selected manually becomes empty while printing copies. Restrict No Matching Paper in Tray Setting Select the operation that is performed when there is no paper of the corresponding size in the specified paper tray. • Stop Printing (Tray Fixed): The machine stops operating. • Switch Trays (Tray Priority): When the corresponding size or type of paper is not loaded in the specified paper tray, a different paper tray is selected if it contains paper of the corresponding size. Stop Printing (Tray Fixed) Print Lists Select the paper tray used for printing lists, such as the sales counter and consumables indicators. Tray 1, 1-Sided Paper Type/Size Settings Specify the paper type to be use for each tray. Plain Paper Post Inserter Alert Display Setting Specify whether to display the paper size and paper orientation during the tray display or an alarm indication for the post inserter. Yes 12 Utility mode 12-18 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) Power Save Settings 2 Note [Low Power Mode Settings] appears only if the "Administrator Security Levels" parameter in Administrator mode is set to [Level 1], [Level 2]. ! Detail For details on the "Administrator Security Levels" parameter, refer to "Security Settings" on page 12-38. Output Settings 2 Note The "Output Tray Settings" parameter is available only if the optional finisher is installed. Blank Page Print Settings Density for Original Type Parameter Description Default Setting Low Power Mode Settings Specify the desired length of time (between 1 and 240 minutes) until the machine enters Power Save mode. 15 minutes Sleep Mode Settings Specify the desired length of time (between 1 and 240 minutes) until the machine enters Sleep mode. 60 minutes Parameter Description Default Setting Print/Fax Output Setting Specify settings for printing. For details, refer to the User manual – Print Operations. Output Tray Setting Select the copy output tray for each type of job (copies, printouts, reports and faxes). Copy: Tray 2 Print: Tray 2 Print Reports: Tray 2 Fax: Tray 2 Description Default Setting Select whether or not stamps and overlays are printed on blank pages. Do Not Print Description Default Setting Shift the exposure level darker/lighter within 6 levels for each original type, which will be reflected to 9 levels of the Density setting available on the Basic screen. Text/Photo: 3 Text: 3 Photo: 3 Dot Matrix Original: 2 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 12-19 Utility mode 12 Page Number Print Position 2 Note [Output Settings], [Blank Page Print Settings], [Density for Original Type], and [Page Number Print Position] appear only if the "Administrator Security Levels" parameter in Administrator mode is set to "Level 2". 12.3.2 Custom Display Settings Copier Settings Scan/Fax Settings Copy Screen Fax Active Screen Description Default Setting Specify the print position of the stamp on back pages when duplex printing and booklet are used in combination. All the same Parameter Description Default Setting Default Tab Specify the default display for the Basic screen in Copy mode. • Basic: This is the normal basic display. • Quick Copy: Displays all selectable items for the "Paper" function, "Zoom" function and "Duplex/Combine" function. The normal Basic screen appears as a different tab. Basic Shortcut Key 1 Shortcut keys for frequently used Application functions can be added to the Basic screen of Copy mode. OFF Shortcut Key 2 Parameter Description Default Tab Specify settings for faxing and scanning. For details, refer to the User manual – Network Scan/Fax/Network Fax Operations. Program Default Address Book Index Default Shortcut Key 1 Shortcut Key 2 Default Address Book Default Address Type Parameter Description Default Setting Copy Operating Screen Select the screen that is displayed while printing. • Yes: A screen for reserving a copy job appears while printing and, if [Program Next Job] is touched, a job can be reserved. • No: A copy job can be reserved while the Basic screen in Copy mode is displayed. No Parameter Description TX Display Specify settings for faxing. For details, refer to the User manual – Network Scan/Fax/Network Fax Operations. RX Display 12 Utility mode 12-20 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) Color Selection Settings Left Panel Display Default Search Option Settings Parameter Description Default Setting Select Color Select the color that indicates that the button is selected. Green Parameter Description Default Setting Left Panel Display Default Select the information displayed as the default in the left panel. • Job List: A list of the jobs that are being performed and queued to be performed is displayed. • Check Job Settings: The currently specified copy settings are displayed. Job List Job Display Setting Select the job list information displayed in the left panel. • List Display: A list of the jobs that are being performed and queued to be performed is displayed. • Status Display: The progress of the job being performed is displayed. List Display Parameter Description Default Setting Uppercase and Lowercase Letters Select whether or not to differentiate between uppercase and lowercase letters. Differentiate Search Option Screen Select whether or not to display [Uppercase and Lowercase Letters] setting in the advanced search. OFF bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 12-21 Utility mode 12 12.3.3 Copier Settings Parameter Description Default Setting Auto Booklet ON when Fold & Staple Select whether or not the "Booklet" function is selected automatically when the "Center Staple & Fold" setting is selected. This parameter is available only if optional finisher is installed. Auto Select Booklet Auto Zoom For Combine/ Booklet Select whether or not the preset zoom ratios are automatically selected when the "Auto" Paper setting is selected and a combined copy setting or the "Booklet" function is selected. • Auto Display Zoom Ratio: The following zoom ratios are specified. 2in1, Booklet: 64.7% 4in1: 50.0% 8in1: 32.3% • Off: The zoom ratio is not selected automatically. Auto Display Zoom Ratio Auto Sort/Group Selection Select whether or not the "Sort" setting is automatically selected when 2 or more copies are set to be printed in a single job. • Yes: When an original is loaded into the automatic document feeder and the [Start] key is pressed, the "Group" setting is automatically selected if the original consists of only one page, and the "Sort" setting is automatically selected if the original consists of two or more pages. • No: The "Sort" or "Group" setting is not selected automatically. Yes Default Copy Settings Specify the default settings for Copy mode. The copy settings selected when the machine is turned on (the power switch is set to "n") or the [Reset] key is pressed can be specified. • Current Setting: The settings specified from the touch panel before Utility mode was entered are set as the default settings for Copy mode. • Factory Default: The factory default settings are set as the default settings for Copy mode. Factory Default Default Enlarge Factory Default Specify the default settings for Enlarge Display mode. • Current Setting: The settings specified in the Enlarge Display mode before Utility mode was entered are set as default settings for the Enlarge Display mode. • Factory Default: The factory default settings are set as the default settings for the Enlarge Display mode. Factory Default When AMS Direction is Incorrect Select whether or not printing continues when the paper and original orientations are different with the "Auto Paper Select" setting selected. • Print: The Zoom setting is automatically set and the copy is printed on paper of the specified size in the specified orientation. • Delete Job: The job is deleted, and no copies are printed. Print Separate Scan Output Method Select whether copies are printed as the original is being scanned or after the entire original has been scanned when scanning an original in separate batches or when scanning a multiple-page document from the original glass. • Page Print: Printing of copies that can be printed begins while the original is being scanned. • Batch Print Printing begins after all pages of the original have been scanned. Page Print 12 Utility mode 12-22 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 2 Note [Auto Zoom (Platen)], [Auto Zoom (ADF)], [Specify Default Tray when APS Off], [Select Tray for Insert Sheet], and [Automatic Image Rotation] appear only if the "Administrator Security Levels" parameter in Administrator mode is set. [Print Jobs During Copy Operation] appears only if the "Administrator Security Levels" parameter in Administrator mode is set to "Level 2". Enlargement Rotation Select whether an image that exceeds 297 mm in the main scanning direction (left/right direction on the original glass and ADF) is rotated when the copies are printed. • Allow: An enlargement rotation is performed. • Restrict: The enlargement rotation is prohibited. Allow Auto Zoom (Platen) Select whether or not the "Auto" Zoom setting is automatically selected when a paper tray is selected (except when the "Auto" Paper setting is selected) while an original is placed on the original glass. OFF Auto Zoom (ADF) Select whether or not the "Auto" Zoom setting is automatically selected when a paper tray is selected (except when the "Auto" Paper setting is selected) while an original is loaded into the ADF. ON Specify Default Tray when APS Off Select which paper tray is selected when the "Auto" Paper setting is canceled. • Tray Before APS ON: The paper tray that was being used before the "Auto" Paper setting was selected is selected. • Default Tray: Tray 1 is used. Tray Before APS ON Select Tray for Insert Sheet Select the default paper tray loaded with paper for the cover pages (front cover), inserted pages and chapter title pages. Tray 2 Tri-Fold Print Side Whether to fold copies with the printed surface inward or outward can be selected when copies are output tri-folded. This function can be used if the optional Finisher FS-610 is installed. Inside Print Jobs During Copy Operation Select whether or not print data or fax data can be accepted for printing while a copy operation is being performed. • Accept: Print data and fax data can be accepted and printed. • Receive Only: Print data and fax data is printed after the copy operation is finished. Accept Automatic Image Rotation Select whether or not the image is automatically rotated when the original and copy paper orientations are different. • When Auto Paper / Auto Zoom / Reduce is set: If the "Auto" Paper setting, "Auto" Zoom setting or a Reduce setting is selected, the image is automatically rotated to fit the orientation of the paper. • When Auto Paper / Auto Zoom is set: If the "Auto" Paper setting or "Auto" Zoom setting is selected, the image is automatically rotated to fit the orientation of the paper. • When Auto Zoom / Reduce is set: If the "Auto" Zoom setting or a Reduce setting is selected, the image is automatically rotated to fit the orientation of the paper. • When Auto Zoom is set: If the "Auto" Zoom setting is selected, the image is automatically rotated to fit the orientation of the paper. When Auto Paper/Auto Zoom is set Printed side when copying 1 sheet from Original Glass Specify whether the copies of originals scanned from the original glass are output with the printed sides facing up or down. • Face Down: Copies are output with the printed sides facing down. • Face UP: Copies are output with the printed sides facing up. Face Down Parameter Description Default Setting bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 12-23 Utility mode 12 When the Enlarge Display mode is selected, the [Default Enlarge Display Setting] button appears to allow specifying the default settings of the copy and fax/scan operations in the Enlarge Display mode. ! Detail For details on the "Administrator Security Level" parameter, refer to "Security Settings" on page 12-38. For details on the default settings and the factory default settings, refer to page 2-31. To change the default settings for Fax/Scan mode, press the [Fax/Scan] key, enter Utility mode, and then select a setting for this parameter. 12.3.4 Scan/Fax Settings 12.3.5 Printer Settings 12.3.6 Change Password 12.3.7 Change E-Mail Address 2 Note [Change E-Mail Address] appears only if the "Administrator Security Levels" parameter in Administrator mode is set to "Level 2" Parameter Description Black Compression Level Specify settings for scanning. For details, refer to the User manual – Network Scan/Fax/Network Fax Operations. Default Scan/Fax Settings Default Enlarge Display Settings Parameter Description Basic Settings Specify settings for printing. For details, refer to User manual – Print Operations (IC-208). Paper Settings PCL Settings PS Setting XPS Settings TIFF/PDF Image Paper Setting Print Reports The Print function settings can be printed as a report. For details, refer to User manual – Print Operations (IC-208). Image Shift Settings Make adjustment on Image Shift function used in Printer mode. For details, refer to the User manual – Print Operations (IC-208). Stamp Settings Specify settings for Stamp function used in Printer mode. For details, refer to the User manual – Print Operations (IC-208). Available paper types depend on the paper tray. Description The password for the user who is currently logged on can be changed. After typing in the current password, type in the new password. This parameter is available when "User Authentication" is set to "ON (MFP)". Description The e-mail address for the user who is currently logged on can be changed. This parameter appears only when a user other than a public user is logged on. 12 Utility mode 12-24 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 12.3.8 Toner Supply 12.3.9 Change Icon 12.3.10 Displaying the User Settings screen Follow the procedure described below to display the User Settings screen by pressing [Utility/Counter] key. 1 Press the [Utility/Counter] key. 2 Touch [2 User Settings]. – An item can also be selected by pressing the key in the keypad for the number beside the desired button. For [2 User Settings], press the [2] key in the keypad. Description When the toner density becomes low, the density level can be restored while the machine is stopped. Description The icon registered for the user who is currently logged on can be changed. This parameter appears only when a user other than a public user is logged on. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 12-25 Utility mode 12 The User Settings screen appears. 2 Note To finish specifying settings in the Utility mode, press the [Utility/Counter] key. Otherwise, exit the Utility mode by touching [Close] in each screen until the screen for the Copy or Box mode appears. 12 Utility mode 12-26 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 12.4 Specifying administrator settings This section describes the function and main registration parameters that can be specified after pressing the [Utility/Counter] key, then touching [Administrator Settings]. 12.4.1 System Settings Power Save Settings * This item appears when an optional fax kit, hard disk or the image controller IC-208 is not installed, the USB memory is not connected, and the weekly timer is set to [OFF]. Output Settings Date/Time Settings Daylight Saving Time Parameter Description Default Setting Low Power Mode Settings Specify the desired length of time (between 1 and 240 minutes) until the machine enters Power Save mode. 15 minutes Sleep Mode Settings Specify the desired length of time (between 1 and 240 minutes) until the machine enters Sleep mode. 60 minutes Hibernation Setting* Specify whether to bring the machine to the same condition as the main power off when the machine enters Sleep mode or the sub power switch is turned off. ON Power Save Key Select which low power mode is entered when the [Power Save] key is pressed. • Low Power: The touch panel goes off and the machine enters a mode where it conserves energy. • Sleep: Although the machine conserves more energy in Sleep mode than in Power Save mode, the machine must warm up when Sleep mode is canceled, therefore taking more preparation time than Power Save mode. Low Power Enter Power Save Mode Specify settings for faxing. For details, refer to the User manual – Network Scan/Fax/Network Fax Operations. Normal Parameter Description Default Setting Print/Fax Output Setting Specify settings for printing. For details, refer to the User manual – Network Scan/Fax/Network Fax Operations and the User manual – Print Operations. Output Tray Settings Select the finishing tray for each type of job (copies, printouts, reports and faxes). Copy: Tray 2 Printer: Tray 2 Print Reports: Tray 2 Fax: Tray 2 Shift Output Each Job Select whether or not printed copies are fed out shifted when "Offset" is selected while a finisher is installed. • Yes: Pages are fed out shifted. • No: Pages are fed out without being shifted. Yes Description Default Setting Specify the current date and time. In addition, the time zone can be set between -12:00 and 13:00 (in 30-minute increments). Time Zone: +00:00 Description Default Setting Select whether or not the machine’s internal clock observes daylight saving time. If "Yes" is selected, a setting appears so that the length of time for adjusting the current time can be set. The length of time applied for daylight saving time can be set between 1 and 150 minutes in 1-minute increments. No bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 12-27 Utility mode 12 Weekly Timer Settings ! Detail If the weekly timer is set, the machine will be turned on/off at the specified time. Settings can be specified to require a password in order to turn the machine on or to allow fax and print jobs to be received after the machine has been turned off by the timer. Various weekly timer settings in the Weekly Timer Settings screen can be combined. For details on the various settings, refer to "Overview of weekly timer settings" on page 12-44. Restrict User Access Parameter Description Default Setting Weekly Timer ON/OFF Settings Select whether or not the weekly timer is used. OFF Time Settings Specify the time of each day that the machine is turned on/off. - Date Settings Specify the individual dates or the days of the week that the machine is turned on/off. - Select Time for Power Save If the machine is turned off at a specific time, for example, during the lunch break, the time for turning the machine off and on can be specified. No Password for Non- Business Hours If the machine is turned off with the weekly timer function, select whether or not use is limited with a password. In addition, if "Yes" is selected, specify the password that must be entered. No Parameter Description Default Setting Copy Program Lock Settings Select the registered copy programs that are prevented from being changed or deleted. - Delete Saved Copy Program Select the registered copy programs to be deleted. - Restrict Access to Job Settings Changing Job Priority Select whether or not to allow the print priority of jobs to be changed. Allow Delete Other User Jobs Select whether or not jobs from other users can deleted when the user authentication settings have been specified. Restrict Registering and Changing Addresses Select whether or not to allow registered destinations to be changed. Allow Changing Zoom Ratio Select whether or not to allow stored zoom ratios to be changed. Allow Change the "From" Address Select whether or not to allow the specified From address to be changed. Allow Change Registered Overlay Select whether or not to allow registered image overlays to be changed. Allow Restrict Operation Restrict Broadcasting Select whether to prevent multiple recipients from being specified for fax transmissions. OFF 12 Utility mode 12-28 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) Expert Adjustment Parameter Description Default Setting Density for Original Type Shift the exposure level darker/lighter within 5 levels for each original type, which will be reflected to 9 levels of the Density setting available on the Basic screen. Text: 3 Text/Photo: 3 Photo: 3 Dot Matrix Original: 2 Erase Adjustment Non-Image Area Erase Select the condition for Non-Image Area Erase to function. Except Original Glass e1.0 Non-Image Area Erase Setting Select the setting method, erasing mode, and original density for the Non-Image Area Erase function. Erase Setting: Specify How to Erase: Rectangular Original Density: Standard ADF Frame Erase Specify the erasing width for the ADF Frame Erase function. 3 mm Printer Adjustment Leading Edge Adjustment Adjust the starting print position between -3.0 mm and +6.0 mm at the leading edge of the paper (with respect to the paper feed direction). Adjustments can be specified for each paper type. 0.0 mm Centering Adjust the starting print position between -6.4 mm and +6.3 mm at the left edge of the paper (with respect to the paper feed direction). 0.0 mm Vertical Adjustment If the copy image is distorted (stretched or compressed), the paper feed speed and printing speed can be synchronized to adjust the distortion of the copy image between -1.35 and +5.00. 0.0% Horizontal Adjustment If the copy image is distorted (stretched or compressed), the zoom ratio in the transverse feed direction of the original can be adjusted between - 1.0% and +1.0%. 0.0% 2nd-Side Size Adjustment Adjust the zoom ratio for the back side of double-sided copies for each paper tray. Adjust Ratio:[No Selection], [-0.1%], [-0.2%], [-0.3%] No Selection bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 12-29 Utility mode 12 *1 Appears only when Finisher FS-610 is installed. *2 Appears only when finisher is installed with punch kit. *3 Appears only when Z folding unit is installed. *4 Appears only when post inserter is installed. ! Detail [Finisher Adjustment] appears only when an optional finisher is installed. The Finisher Adjustment parameters that are available differ depending on the model of the installed finisher. Finisher Adjustment Center Staple Position* 1 Adjust the stapling position (between -12, 8 mm and 12, 7 mm) when printing with the "Center Staple & Fold" setting. 0.0 mm Half-Fold Position* 1 Adjust the folding position (between -12, 8 mm and 12, 7 mm) when printing with the "Center Staple & Fold" setting. 0.0 mm Punch Vertical Position Adjustment*2 Adjust the vertical position of the punched holes between -5.0 mm and 5.0 mm. 0.0 mm Punch Unit Vertical Position Adjustment *3 Adjust the vertical position of the punched holes between - 5.0 mm and 5.0 mm for each paper size. 0.0 mm Punch Horizontal Position Adjustment* 2 Adjust the horizontal position of the punched holes between -5.0 mm and 5.0 mm. 0.0 mm Punch Unit Horizontal Position Adjustment *3 Adjust the horizontal position of the punched holes between - 5.0 mm and 5.0 mm. 0.0 mm Punch Resist Loop Size Adjustment*2 Adjust the hole-punching shift for double-sided printing and outputting cover pages between -16.0 mm and 16.0 mm. 0.0 mm 1st Z-Fold Position Adjustment*3 Adjust the 1st folding position between - 12.8 mm and + 12.7 mm for each paper size. 0.0 mm 2nd Z-Fold Position Adjustment*3 Adjust the 2nd folding position between - 12.8 mm and + 12.7 mm for each paper size. 0.0 mm Tri-Fold Position Adjustment*1 Adjust the folding positions (between -12.8 mm and 12.7 mm) when printing with the "Tri-Fold" setting. 0.0 mm 2-Position Staple Pitch Adjustment*1 Adjust the distance (between 128 mm and 160 mm) between staples when printing with the "2 Position" Staple setting ("Staple" and "Center Staple & Fold"). 128 mm Post Inserter Feeder Size Adjustment*4 Adjust the sensor for detecting the size of paper loaded in the paper trays of the post inserter. - Scanner Area Scanner Adjustment: Leading Edge Adjust the starting scan position between -2.0 mm and +6.0 mm at the leading edge of the original (with respect to the image scan direction). 0.0 mm Scanner Adjustment: Centering Adjust the starting scan position between -3.0 mm and +3.0 mm at the left edge of the original (with respect to the image scan direction). 0.0 mm Vertical Adjustment If the scanned image is distorted (stretched or compressed), the zoom ratio in the feed direction of the original in the scanner area can be adjusted between -2.0% and +2.0%. 1.00% ADF Centering Adjust the center position in the transverse feed direction of the original between -3.0 mm and +3.0 mm. 0.0 mm Copy Protect Density Adjustment Adjust the density of hidden text printed as copy protection. 200 to 255: 219 Parameter Description Default Setting 12 Utility mode 12-30 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) List/Counter Reset Settings 2 Reminder Even if the System Auto Reset Time is [OFF], the System Auto Reset function is activated after 1 minute of no operation of the machine during the User Authentication or Account Track. However, when in the Enlarge Display mode, the System Auto Reset function is not activated. If user authentication settings have been specified or "Enhanced Security Mode" has been set to "ON", the logoff from Administrator mode or user authentication mode will be performed according to the "System Auto Reset Time" parameter. Parameter Description Management List Job Settings List The machine settings can be printed. Paper Size/Type Counter Store combinations of paper sizes and paper types to be counted. Parameter Description Default Setting System Auto Reset Specify the desired length of time until the automatic system reset operation is performed. • Priority Mode: Select the setting ("Box", "Copy" or "Scan/Fax") for the mode that the machine enters when the automatic system reset operation is performed. • System Auto Reset Time: Specify the setting (between 1 and 9 minutes or "OFF") for the desired length of time until the automatic system reset operation is performed. Priority Mode: Copy System Auto Reset Time: 1 Minute Auto Reset Select the setting (between 1 and 9 minutes or "OFF") for the desired length of time until the automatic panel reset operation is performed for each mode (Copy, Scan/Fax and Box). Copy: 1 Minute Scan/Fax: 1 Minute Box: 1 Minute Job Reset When Account is changed Select whether or not the settings are reset (initialized) when the user has changed. This machine detects that the user has changed when the optional key counter has been removed or when the user has logged off if user authentication or account track settings are specified. Reset When original is set on ADF Select whether or not the settings are reset when an original is loaded into the automatic document feeder. Do Not Reset Next Job Staple Setting: Select whether the same Staple setting from the previous job is set or the setting is canceled when that job begins and the settings for the next job can be specified. OFF Original Set/Bind Direction: Select whether the same Original Direction and Binding Position settings from the previous job are set or the settings are canceled when that job begins and the settings for the next job can be specified. OFF Reset Data After Job: Select whether or not to reset the address and other settings after scanning or fax transmission. When "Confirm with User"* is specified, whether or not to hold the address and other settings can be selected after scanning or fax transmission. Reset All System Auto Reset for Proof Copy Select whether or not to activate the automatic system reset after the proof copy operation is performed. Yes bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 12-31 Utility mode 12 When the optional i-Option LK-101 is registered, the setting can be specified from Priority Mode: [Application Menu], [Fax/Scan], [Copy]. When LK-101 is registered, [Auto Reset] can be used to configure the Web Browser settings. Factory default: 1 minute If "Confirm Address (TX)" is set to "ON", "Confirm with User" in [Job Reset] - [Next Job] - [Reset Data After Job] cannot be used. User Box Settings Stamp Settings Blank Page Print Settings Page Number Print Position Skip Job Setting Parameter Description Default Setting Delete Unused User Box Specify settings for using boxes. For details, refer to the User manual – Box Operations. Delete Secure Print Documents Auto Delete Secure Document Specify settings for using boxes. For details, refer to the User manual – Box Operations. 1 day Encrypted PDF Delete Time 1 day ID & Print Delete Time 1 day Document Hold Setting ON External Memory Function Settings Save Document OFF Print Document ON ID & Print Delete after Print Setting Confirm with User Document Delete Time Setting 1 day Parameter Description Default Setting Header/Footer Settings Program or delete header/footer settings. - Fax TX Settings Select whether or not the stamp settings are canceled when a fax is sent. Cancel Description Default Setting Select whether or not stamps and overlays are printed on blank pages when a Stamp/Composition function is set. Do Not Print Description Default Setting Specify the print position of the stamp on back pages when duplex printing and booklet are used in combination. All the Same Parameter Description Default Setting Fax Select whether or not to skip jobs for the fax transmission. ON other than Fax Select whether or not to skip jobs for other functions than fax transmission. ON 12 Utility mode 12-32 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) Application Key Settings 12.4.2 Administrator/Machine Settings 2 Note When entering the device name while registering the machine address, do not use characters that cannot be used by the operating system. 12.4.3 One-Touch/User Box Registration Description Default Setting Functions can be assigned to Key 1 and Key 2. Key 1: Scan/Fax Key 2: Copy Parameter Description Default Setting Original Direction Confirmation Screen Configure settings to fax or scan a document. For details, refer to the User manual – Network Scan/Fax/Network Fax Operations. ON Parameter Description Administrator Registration Specify the administrator information displayed in the Service Representative/ Administrator Information screen of the Help screen and the From address for sending e-mail from the machine. Input Machine Address Register the name of the machine and its e-mail address. The registered machine name is added to the names of files that are sent and to originals saved in user boxes. As the factory default, the machine name is specified as "KMBT_751/601". The registered e-mail address is used with Internet faxing. Parameter Description Create One-Touch Destination Specify settings for registering fax, scan and user box destinations. For details, refer to the User manual – Network Scan/Fax/Network Fax Operations and the Create User Box User manual – Box Operations. One-Touch/User Box Registration List The lists of address book destinations, group destinations, program destinations and titles/text can be printed to be checked. For details, refer to the User manual – Network Scan/Fax/Network Fax Operations. Maximum Number of User Boxes Specify the maximum number of user boxes for each user. For details, refer to the User manual – Box Operations. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 12-33 Utility mode 12 12.4.4 User Authentication/Account Track General Settings User Authentication Settings Description Default Setting Specify user authentication and account track settings in order to control the use of this machine. • User Authentication: Select either "External Server Authentication" or "ON (MFP)" as the user authentication method. To quit user authentication, select "OFF". • Public User Access: Select whether or not the machine can be used by an unauthenticated user. This cannot be selected if "User Authentication" is set to "OFF". • The machine can be used without authentication if [ON (Without Login)] is touched when logging on as a public user. When logging on as an authorized user, the [Access] key must be pressed first to display the authentication screen. • Account Track: Select whether or not account tracking is used to control the machine. • Account Track Input Method: To authenticate using an account name and password, touch [Account Name & Password]. To authenticate using only a password, touch [Password Only]. No setting can be selected when "Account Track" is set to "OFF". If both user authentication and account track settings are specified, "Account Name & Password" cannot be selected. • Synchronize User Authentication & Account Track: Select whether or not user authentication and group authentication are synchronized. This appears only when "User Authentication" is set to "External Server Authentication" or "ON (MFP)" and "Account Track" is set to "On". • When # of Jobs Reach Maximum: To stop the job being printed and begin printing the next job when the limit specified for account track or user authentication is reached, touch [Skip Job]. To stop the all jobs when the limit is reached, select [Stop Job]. • Number of User Counters Assigned: Adjust the number of users and accounts that can be registered. Example: When "Number of User Counters Assigned" is set to "50", 950 accounts can be registered. • Ticket Hold Time Setting: Specify the desired length of holding time (between 1 and 60 minutes) of Kerveros authentication ticket. The holding time setting is applied when Active Directory is selected as the authentication server type. User Authentication: OFF Public User Access: Restrict Account Track: OFF Account Track Input Method: Account name & password Synchronize User Authentication & Account Track: Synchronize When # of Jobs Reach Maximum: Skip Job Number of User Counters Assigned: 500 Ticket Hold Times Settings: 60 min Parameter Description Default Setting Administrative Settings User Name List Select whether or not a list of user names is displayed in the user authentication screen. OFF Default Function Permission Operations that are possible with this machine can be limited when authenticating with an external server. Copy: Allow Scan: Allow Fax: Allow Print: Allow User Box: Allow Print Scan/Fax TX: Allow Save to External Memory: Allow ID & Print Settings Whether or not to use the ID & Print function can be selected. Also, whether to print unauthorized jobs or public user jobs immediately or to save them in the ID & Print User Box can be selected. ID & Print: OFF Public User: Print Immediately ID & Print Operation Settings Specify the printing method when using the ID & Print function. • Print All Jobs: All the jobs are printed with a single authentication operation. • Print Each Job: The stored jobs are printed one at a time. Print All Jobs User Registration Register the users of this machine. In addition, the password, number of prints allowed, authentication information and function permissions can be specified for each user. - User Counter The copy, print and fax/scan use for each user can be checked. - 12 Utility mode 12-34 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 2 Note The user authentication parameters appear only if "User Authentication" on the General Settings screen is set to any setting other than "OFF". [Save to External Memory] appears if "Save Document" is set to ON (displayed by touching [User Box Settings] on the System Settings screen, then [External Memory Function Settings]). If authentication is performed with PageScope Authentication Manager, [User Registration] does not appear. ! Detail When user authentication is performed using an optional authentication unit by placing your finger or IC card on the authentication unit, jobs saved in the ID & Print User Box can be printed. Account Track Settings 2 Note The account track parameters appear only if "Account Track" on the General Settings screen is set to "ON". If authentication is performed with PageScope Authentication Manager, [Account Track Settings] does not appear. Print Without Authentication Print Counter List External Server Settings Parameter Description Account Track Registration Register the accounts using this machine. In addition, the password and number of prints allowed can be specified for each account. Account Track Counter The copy, print and scan/fax use for each account can be checked. Description Default Setting Select whether or not printing is permitted without specifying a user or account. If printing is permitted, prints are counted for public users. Restrict Description Default Setting This parameter appears only if user authentication or account track settings have been specified. The use for each user or account can be checked. Paper Tray: Tray 1 Simplex/Duplex: 1-sided Print Item: All Info. Description Specify the external server that performs user authentication. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 12-35 Utility mode 12 Limiting Access to Destinations Authentication Device Settings ! Detail The Authentication Device Settings parameters are available only if the optional authentication unit is installed. The authentication units of the IC card type and the biometric type cannot be installed at the same time. If [SSFC] is selected for the IC card type, specify company code and company identification code. For details, refer to the manual provided with the authentication unit. Auth/Acct Track Common Setting Parameter Description Create Group Groups for permitting access to destinations can be registered and edited. Apply Levels/Groups to Destinations The access permission level and the group with access permissions can be specified for each destination. Apply Levels/Groups to Users The access permission level and the group with access permissions can be specified for each user. Parameter Description Default setting General Settings Specify the settings for the installed authentication unit. • Card Authentication: Select the IC card type and operation settings. • Bio Authentication: Select the beep and operation settings. When the authentication unit (IC card type) has been installed: IC Card Type: FeliCa Operation Settings: Card Authentication When the authentication unit (biometric type) has been installed: Beep Sound: ON Operation Settings: 1-tomany authentication Logoff Settings Select whether or not the user is logged off after a scan or fax is sent or after the copy original is scanned. Do not log off Parameter Description Default setting Logout Confirmation Screen Display Setting Select whether or not to display the logging-off confirmation screen after pressing the [Access] key. ON 12 Utility mode 12-36 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 12.4.5 Network Settings Parameter Description Network Setting Specify settings for using the network. For details, refer to the User manual – Network Scan/Fax/Network Fax Operations. TCP/IP Settings NetWare Settings HTTP Server Settings FTP Settings SMB Settings LDAP Settings E-mail Settings SNMP Settings AppleTalk Settings Bonjour Setting TCP Socket Settings WebDAV Client Settings Web Service Settings SSDP Settings Detail Settings IEEE 802.1x Authentication Settings Network Fax Settings Specify settings for using network faxing. For details, refer to the User manual – Network Scan/Fax/Network Fax Operations. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 12-37 Utility mode 12 12.4.6 Copier Setting 12.4.7 Printer Settings Parameter Description Default Setting Auto Zoom (Platen) Select whether or not the "Auto" Zoom setting is automatically selected when a paper tray is selected (except when the "Auto" Paper setting is selected) while an original is placed on the original glass. OFF Auto Zoom (ADF) Select whether or not the "Auto" Zoom setting is automatically selected when a paper tray is selected (except when the "Auto" Paper setting is selected) while an original is loaded into the ADF. ON Specify Default Tray when APS Off Select which paper tray is selected when the "Auto" Paper setting is canceled. • Tray Before APS ON: The paper tray that was being used before the "Auto" Paper setting was selected is selected. • Default Tray: Tray 1 is used. Tray Before APS ON Select Tray for Insert Sheet Select the default paper tray loaded with paper for the cover pages (front cover), inserted pages and chapter title pages. Tray 2 Print Jobs During Copy Operation Select whether or not print data or fax data can be accepted for printing while a copy operation is being performed. • Accept: Print data and fax data can be accepted and printed. • Receive Only: Print data and fax data is printed after the copy operation is finished. Accept Tri-Fold Print Side Whether to fold copies with the printed surface inward or outward can be selected when copies are output tri-folded. This function can be used if the optional Finisher FS-610 is installed. Outside Automatic Image Rotation Select whether or not the image is automatically rotated when the original and copy paper orientations are different. • When Auto Paper / Auto Zoom / Reduce is set: If the "Auto" Paper setting, "Auto" Zoom setting or a Reduce setting is selected, the image is automatically rotated to fit the orientation of the paper. • When Auto Paper / Auto Zoom is set: If the "Auto" Paper setting or "Auto" Zoom setting is selected, the image is automatically rotated to fit the orientation of the paper. • When Auto Zoom / Reduce is set: If the "Auto" Zoom setting or a Reduce setting is selected, the image is automatically rotated to fit the orientation of the paper. • When Auto Zoom is set: If the "Auto" Zoom setting is selected, the image is automatically rotated to fit the orientation of the paper. When Auto Paper/Auto Zoom is set Printed side when copying 1 sheet from Original Glass Specify whether the copies of originals scanned from the original glass are output with the printed sides facing up or down. • Face Down: Copies are output with the printed sides facing down. • Face UP: Copies are output with the printed sides facing up. Face Down Parameter Description USB Timeout Specify settings for registering print destinations. For details, refer to the User manual – Print Operations. Network Timeout Print XPS Error 12 Utility mode 12-38 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 12.4.8 Fax Settings 2 Note [8 Fax Settings] appears only when the fax kit is installed or when Internet fax functions are available. 12.4.9 System Connection 2 Note [2 Administrator Settings] is displayed when the machine is managed by CS Remote Care. 12.4.10 Security Settings Administrator Password User Box Administrator Setting Parameter Description Header Information Specify settings for registering fax destinations. For details, refer to the User manual – Network Scan/Fax/Network Fax Operations. Header/Footer Position Line Parameter Setting TX/RX Settings Function Settings PBX Connection Setting Report Settings Job Settings List Multi Line Setting Network Fax Settings Specify settings for using network faxing. For details, refer to the User manual – Network Scan/Fax/Network Fax Operations. Parameter Description Open API Settings Specify settings for registering network connections. For details, refer to the User manual – Network Scan/Fax/Network Fax Operations. Admin. transmission The administrator can send the machine status to the service representative. For details, contact your service representative [Prefix/Suffix Automatic Setting] Select whether to automatically add prefix and suffix to a destination number. If [Prefix/Suffix Automatic Setting] is set to [ON], the other settings will be restricted. For details, refer to the User manual – Network Administrator. Description Default Setting The administrator password used to specify the Administrator mode settings can be specified or changed. The administrator password can contain between 0 and 8 digits (characters). If the "Password Rules" parameter is set to "Enabled", only an administrator password with 8 digits can be specified. 12345678 Description Specify settings for using boxes. For details, refer to the User manual – Box Operations. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 12-39 Utility mode 12 Administrator Security Levels Security Details Description Default Setting Specify the range of Administrator mode parameters available to users. • Level 1: Low Power Mode Settings, Auto Zoom (Platen), Auto Zoom (ADF), Specify Default Tray when APS Off, Select Tray for Insert Sheet, Automatic Image Rotation are available to users. • Level 2: Low Power Mode Settings, Output Settings, Density for Original, Page Number Print Position, Blank Page Print Settings, Auto Zoom (Platen), Auto Zoom (ADF), Specify Default Tray when APS Off, Select Tray for Insert Sheet, Automatic Image Rotation, Copy Operating Screen, Change E-Mail Address are available to users. • Prohibit: None of the parameters that are available to users with "Level 1" or "Level 2" are available. Prohibit Parameter Description Default Setting Password Rules Select whether or not password rules are applied. Invalid Prohibited Functions When Authentication Error Select the operations that are prohibited if user authentication failed. • Mode 1: Operations cannot be performed for a fixed length of time. • Mode 2: When authentication has failed repeatedly, the control panel can no longer be operated. The number of times of failed authentication can be set between 1 and 5. If operation of the control panel is restricted, touch [Release], and then select the items whose operation restrictions are canceled. • Users & Accounts: Operations for user authentication and account track • Secure Print: Operations for confidential documents • User Box: Operations for password-protected boxes • SNMP: Operations for SNMP v3 Write user authentication • Release Time Settings: Specify the length of time until prohibited operations are automatically unlocked. The time can be set between 1 and 60 minutes. Mode 1 Release Time Settings: 5 min. Confidential Document Access Method The operation method for confidential documents can be viewed. If "Prohibited Functions When Authentication Failed" is set to "Mode 1", this parameter is set to "Mode 1". If "Prohibited Functions When Authentication Failed" is set to "Mode 2", this parameter is set to "Mode 2". Mode 1: Type in the ID and password for the confidential document, and then select the document. Mode 2: Enter the Secure Print ID, select the document, and then enter the password for authentication. Mode 1 Manual Destination Input Select whether or not a recipient can be typed in manually in a recipient input screen. Allow Print Data Capture Select whether or not data for a print job can be captured. For details, refer to the User manual – Print Operations. Restrict Fax TX Select whether or not fax transmissions are prohibited. OFF Hide Personal Information Select whether or not the file name and destination are hidden in the job log. OFF Display Activity Log Select whether or not the communication log is displayed. ON Delete Job Log The entire job log can be cleared. - Secure Print Only This setting is for the print operations. For details, refer to the User manual – Print Operations. Web browser contents access This setting is for the use of an application that interacts with the Web browser. For details, refer to the User manual – Advanced Function Operations. 12 Utility mode 12-40 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) ! Detail The operation of the "Prohibited Functions When Authentication Error" parameter applies to the following passwords. User passwords, account passwords, user box passwords, passwords for confidential documents, and the administrator password If the control panel cannot be operated even after touching [Release] from the "Prohibited Functions When Authentication Error" parameter to specify the items whose operation restrictions are canceled or if an operation is prohibited from a failed attempt to authenticate the administrator password, restart the machine. Restart the machine, wait for the time specified in "Release Time Settings", and then perform the administrator authentication. 2 Reminder When the machine is turned off, then on again with the main power switch, wait at least 10 seconds to turn the machine on after turning it off. The machine may not operate correctly if it is turned on immediately after being turned off. Enhanced Security Mode HDD Settings Description Settings necessary for applying enhanced security mode appear. Select whether or not to apply enhanced mode settings when the necessary settings are specified. For details, contact your service representative. Parameter Description Default Setting Check HDD Capacity Information concerning the hard disk capacity is displayed. Overwrite Temporary Data Specify whether or not to overwrite the temporary image data saved on the hard disk with all operations for copying, scanning, faxing and computer printing. For details on the settings, refer to the User manual – Box Operations. By specifying a setting to overwrite temporary data, the area of the hard disk where image data is saved after printing or sending can be overwritten, and the data can be erased. This process prevents disclosure of image data on the hard disk. NO Overwrite All Data Select this parameter to overwrite and delete all data on the entire hard disk in the specified patterns for mode 1 through mode 8 when returning the machine from lease or disposing the machine in order to prevent disclosure of the data. For details on the settings, refer to the User manual – Box Operations. Before performing this operation, contact your service representative. Mode 1 HDD Lock Password Specify the password for protecting data on the hard disk. For details, refer to the User manual – Box Operations. Format HDD Format the hard disk. For details, refer to the User manual – Box Operations. HDD Encryption Setting This setting appears when the optional Security kit is installed. Specify an encryption passphrase to encrypt data in the hard disk. For details, refer to the User manual – Box Operations. When a setting is specified, all data written to the hard disk is encrypted to protect it. If the encryption key is changed, the hard disk will be reformatted. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 12-41 Utility mode 12 Function Management Settings ! Detail The following functions cannot be used if "Network Function Usage Settings" is set to "OFF". PC-FAX transmission Using the HDD TWAIN driver to view and retrieve documents in user boxes Using PageScope Box Operator to view and retrieve documents in user boxes Using PageScope Scan Direct to retrieve documents in user boxes Using PageScope Job Spooler to view and retrieve documents in user boxes Box operations using the PageScope Web Connection (The User Box tab does not appear.) Stamp Settings Driver Password Encryption Setting Flash Memory Lock Password 12.4.11 License Settings 2 Note For details on Install License, refer to the Quick Guide [Copy/Print/Fax/Scan/Box Operations]. 12.4.12 OpenAPI Authentication Management Setting Parameter Description Default Setting Network Function Usage Settings Specify settings for network functions that are difficult to count when managing operations. ON Parameter Description Apply Stamps Select whether or not a stamp is added when printing or sending. Delete Registered Stamp Select whether or not stamps registered for copy protection can be deleted. Description Default setting The encryption password for the printer driver can be changed. For details, refer to the User manual – Print Operations. Use Factory Default Description Default setting The lock password of flash memory can be changed or released. Use Factory Default Parameter Description Get Request Code Issues the request code for this machine that registers in the License Management Server (LMS). Install License Select the function to be enabled, and then type in the license code acquired from the License Management Server (LMS). List of Enabled Functions Enabled functions can be checked. Parameter Description Restriction Code Settings Configure settings to prevent our deprecated OpenAPI connection application from being registered in this machine. For details, contact your service representative. 12 Utility mode 12-42 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 12.4.13 Displaying the Administrator Settings screen Follow the procedure described below to display the Administrator Settings screen by pressing [Utility/Counter] key. 1 Press the [Utility/Counter] key. 2 Touch [3 Administrator Settings]. – An item can also be selected by pressing the key in the keypad for the number beside the desired button. For [3 Administrator Setting], press the [3] key in the keypad. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 12-43 Utility mode 12 3 Type in the administrator password, and then touch [OK]. – For details on typing in text, refer to "Entering text" on page 15-3. The Administrator Settings screen appears. 2 Note To finish specifying settings in the Utility mode, press the [Utility/Counter] key. Otherwise, exit the Utility mode by touching [Close] in each screen until the screen for the Copy, Fax/Scan or Box mode appears. 2 Reminder The default administrator password is "12345678". The administrator of this machine should change the administrator password. Be sure to keep the administrator password in a safe place. If the administrator password is lost, it must be specified by the service representative. For details, contact the service representative. 12 Utility mode 12-44 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 12.5 Overview of weekly timer settings Various weekly timer settings in the Weekly Timer Setting screen can be combined. A general procedure is described below. 0 If the weekly timer has been set, leave the machine plugged into the electrical outlet even if the machine has been turned off. 0 Press the [Utility/Counter] key, touch [Administrator Settings], then [System Settings], then [Weekly Timer Setting], and correctly specify the necessary settings. 1 Set "Weekly Timer ON/OFF Settings" to "ON". 2 Specify times for "Time Settings". 3 Specify dates for "Date Settings". 4 Specify the desired settings for "Select Time for Power Save" and "Password for Non-Business Hours". The weekly timer is set. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 12-45 Utility mode 12 12.6 Finisher Adjustment 12.6.1 Center Staple Position Adjustment The stapling position when printing with the "Center Staple & Fold" setting can be adjusted for each paper size. 2 Note [Center Staple Position Adjustment] does not appear if optional Finisher FS-610 is not installed. If the angle of the staple must be adjusted, contact your service representative. ! Detail For details on the "Center Staple & Fold" setting, refer to "Binding copies at the center ("Center Staple & Fold" setting)" on page 3-79. For the procedure on adjusting the center folding position, refer to "Half-Fold Position" on page 12-47. 0 Adjust the center folding position before adjusting the center stapling position. 0 Before making any adjustments, use the "Center Staple & Fold" setting to print a single sample copy. Perform the adjustment while checking the sample that was created. 1 Display the Administrator Settings screen. – For details on displaying the Administrator Settings screen, refer to "Displaying the Administrator Settings screen" on page 12-42. 2 Touch [1 System Settings]. The System Settings screen appears. 3 Touch [7 Expert Adjustment]. The Expert Adjustment screen appears. 4 Touch [5 Finisher Adjustment]. The Finisher Adjustment screen appears. 5 Touch [1 Center Staple Position]. The Center Staple Position screen appears. 6 Touch the button for the paper size to be adjusted. – If the paper size to be adjusted is not displayed, touch and until the desired paper size is displayed. 12 Utility mode 12-46 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 7 Compare the width of the left pages of the copy sample with the width of the right pages to check for the center of the paper. – If the staple position is too far to the left of the center of the paper, touch [+] to increase the adjustment (between 0.1 mm and 12.7 mm). – Each time [+] or [-] is touched, the value is increased or decreased by one increment. – If the staple position is too far to the right of the center of the paper, touch [-] to reduce the adjustment (between -0.1 mm and -12.8 mm). 8 Touch [OK]. – To cancel the setting and select the default, press the [Reset] key. The stapling position is adjusted. If the stapling position was at the center of the paper in step 7, this completes the procedure. 9 Use the "Center Staple & Fold" setting to print another sample copy. 10 Check the print result. – Check that the stapling position is adjusted to the center of the paper. – If more adjustment is necessary, repeat steps 6 through 9. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 12-47 Utility mode 12 12.6.2 Half-Fold Position The folding position when printing with the "Half-Fold" setting can be adjusted for each paper size and for each paper type. 2 Note [Half-Fold Position] does not appear if optional Finisher FS-610 is not installed. If the angle of the center folding position must be adjusted, contact your service representative. ! Detail For details on the "Center Staple & Fold" setting, refer to "Binding copies at the center ("Center Staple & Fold" setting)" on page 3-79. 0 Before making any adjustments, use the "Half-Fold" setting to print a single sample copy. Perform the adjustment while checking the sample that was created. 1 Display the Administrator Settings screen. – For details on displaying the Administrator Settings screen, refer to "Displaying the Administrator Settings screen" on page 12-42. 2 Touch [1 System Settings]. The System Settings screen appears. 3 Touch [7 Expert Adjustment]. The Expert Adjustment screen appears. 4 Touch [5 Finisher Adjustment]. The Finisher Adjustment screen appears. 5 Touch [2 Half-Fold Position]. The Half-Fold Position screen appears. 6 Touch the button for the paper size to be adjusted. – If the paper size to be adjusted is not displayed, touch and until the desired paper size is displayed. 12 Utility mode 12-48 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 7 Compare the width of the left pages of the copy sample with the width of the right pages to check for the center of the paper. – If the folding position is too far to the left of the center of the paper, touch [+] to increase the adjustment (between 0.1 mm and 12.7 mm). – Each time [+] or [-] is touched, the value is increased or decreased by one increment. – If the folding position is too far to the right of the center of the paper, touch [-] to reduce the adjustment (between -0.1 mm and -12.8 mm). 8 Touch [OK]. – To cancel the setting and select the default, press the [Reset] key. The center folding position is adjusted. If the folding position was at the center of the paper in step 7, this completes the procedure. 9 Use the "Half-Fold" setting to print another sample copy. 10 Check the print result. – Check that the folding position is adjusted to the center of the paper. – If more adjustment is necessary, repeat steps 6 through 9. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 12-49 Utility mode 12 12.6.3 Punch Vertical Position Adjustment The vertical position of punched holes when printing with a Punch setting can be adjusted for each paper size. 2 Note [Punch Vertical Position Adjustment] appears only if optional punch kit is installed on the finisher. For details on the Punch settings, refer to "Punching holes in copies (Punch settings)" on page 3-74. 0 Before making any adjustments, use a Punch setting to print a sample copy. Perform the adjustment while checking the sample that was created. 1 Display the Administrator Settings screen. – For details on displaying the Administrator Settings screen, refer to "Displaying the Administrator Settings screen" on page 12-42. 2 Touch [1 System Settings]. The System Settings screen appears. 3 Touch [7 Expert Adjustment]. The Expert Adjustment screen appears. 4 Touch [5 Finisher Adjustment]. The Finisher Adjustment screen appears. 5 Touch [3 Punch Vertical Position Adjustment]. The Punch Vertical Position screen appears. 6 Touch the button for the paper size to be adjusted. – If the paper size to be adjusted is not displayed, touch and until the desired paper size is displayed. 12 Utility mode 12-50 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 7 Check the sample copy for the punch positions and for the center of the paper. – If the punch positions are too far above the center of the paper, touch [+] under "Adjust Value" to increase the adjustment (between 0.1 mm and 5.0 mm). – Each time [+] or [-] is touched, the value is increased or decreased by one increment. – If the punch positions are too far blow the center of the paper, touch [-] under "Adjust Value" to increase the adjustment (between -0.1 mm and -5.0 mm). 8 Touch [OK]. – To cancel the setting and select the default, press the [Reset] key. The vertical position of the punched holes is adjusted. If no adjustment of the vertical position of the punched holes was necessary in step 7, this completes the procedure. 9 Use a Punch setting to print another sample copy. 10 Check the print result. – Check that the vertical position of the punched holes was adjusted. – If more adjustment is necessary, repeat steps 6 through 9. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 12-51 Utility mode 12 12.6.4 Punch Unit Vertical Position Adjustment The vertical position of punched holes when printing with a Punch setting can be adjusted for each paper size. 2 Note [Punch Unit Vertical Position Adjustment] appears only if optional Z folding unit is installed. For details on the Punch settings, refer to "Punching holes in copies (Punch settings)" on page 3-74. 0 Before making any adjustments, use a Punch setting to print a sample copy. Perform the adjustment while checking the sample that was created. 1 Display the Administrator Settings screen. – For details on displaying the Administrator Settings screen, refer to "Displaying the Administrator Settings screen" on page 12-42. 2 Touch [1 System Settings]. The System Settings screen appears. 3 Touch [7 Expert Adjustment]. The Expert Adjustment screen appears. 4 Touch [5 Finisher Adjustment]. The Finisher Adjustment screen appears. 5 Touch [4 Punch Unit Vertical Position Adjustment]. The Punch Unit Vertical Position screen appears. 6 Touch the button for the paper size to be adjusted. – If the paper size to be adjusted is not displayed, touch and until the desired paper size is displayed. 12 Utility mode 12-52 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 7 Check the sample copy for the punch positions and for the center of the paper. – If the punch positions are too far above the center of the paper, touch [+] under "Adjust Value" to increase the adjustment (between 0.1 mm and 5.0 mm). – Each time [+] or [-] is touched, the value is increased or decreased by one increment. – If the punch positions are too far blow the center of the paper, touch [-] under "Adjust Value" to increase the adjustment (between -0.1 mm and -5.0 mm). 8 Touch [OK]. – To cancel the setting and select the default, press the [Reset] key. The vertical position of the punched holes is adjusted. If no adjustment of the vertical position of the punched holes was necessary in step 7, this completes the procedure. 9 Use a Punch setting to print another sample copy. 10 Check the print result. – Check that the vertical position of the punched holes was adjusted. – If more adjustment is necessary, repeat steps 6 through 9. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 12-53 Utility mode 12 12.6.5 Punch Horizontal Position Adjustment The horizontal position of punched holes when printing with a Punch setting can be adjusted for each paper size. 2 Note [Punch Horizontal Position Adjustment] appears only if optional punch kit is installed on the finisher. For details on the Punch settings, refer to "Punching holes in copies (Punch settings)" on page 3-74. 0 Before making any adjustments, use a Punch setting to print a sample copy. Perform the adjustment while checking the sample that was created. 1 Display the Administrator Settings screen. – For details on displaying the Administrator Settings screen, refer to "Displaying the Administrator Settings screen" on page 12-42. 2 Touch [1 System Settings]. The System Settings screen appears. 3 Touch [7 Expert Adjustment]. The Expert Adjustment screen appears. 4 Touch [5 Finisher Adjustment]. The Finisher Adjustment screen appears. 5 Touch [5 Punch Horizontal Position Adjustment]. The Punch Horizontal Position Adjustment screen appears. 12 Utility mode 12-54 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 6 Check the horizontal position of the punched holes. – To increase width A, touch [+] to increase the adjustment (between 0.1 mm and 5.0 mm). – Each time [+] or [-] is touched, the value is increased or decreased by one increment. – To decrease width A, touch [-] to decrease the adjustment (between -0.1 mm and -5.0 mm). 7 Touch [OK]. – To cancel the setting and select the default, press the [Reset] key. The horizontal position of the punched holes is adjusted. If no adjustment of the horizontal position of the punched holes was necessary in step 6, this completes the procedure. 8 Use a Punch setting to print another sample copy. 9 Check the print result. – Check that the horizontal position of the punched holes was adjusted. – If more adjustment is necessary, repeat steps 6 through 9. A A bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 12-55 Utility mode 12 12.6.6 Punch Unit Horizontal Position Adjustment The horizontal position of punched holes when printing with a Punch setting can be adjusted. 2 Note [Punch Unit Horizonal Position Adjustment] appears only if optical Z folding unit is installed. For details on the Punch settings, refer to "Punching holes in copies (Punch settings)" on page 3-74. 0 Before making any adjustments, use a Punch setting to print a sample copy. Perform the adjustment while checking the sample that was created. 1 Display the Administrator Settings screen. – For details on displaying the Administrator Settings screen, refer to "Displaying the Administrator Settings screen" on page 12-42. 2 Touch [1 System Settings]. The System Settings screen appears. 3 Touch [7 Expert Adjustment]. The Expert Adjustment screen appears. 4 Touch [5 Finisher Adjustment]. The Finisher Adjustment screen appears. 5 Touch [6 Punch Unit Horizontal Position Adjustment]. The Punch Unit Horizontal Position Adjustment screen appears. 6 Check the horizontal position of the punched holes. – To increase width A, touch [+] to increase the adjustment (between 0.1 mm and 5.0 mm). – Each time [+] or [-] is touched, the value is increased or decreased by one increment. A 12 Utility mode 12-56 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) – To decrease width A, touch [-] to decrease the adjustment (between -0.1 mm and -5.0 mm). 7 Touch [OK]. – To cancel the setting and select the default, press the [Reset] key. The horizontal position of the punched holes is adjusted. If no adjustment of the horizontal position of the punched holes was necessary in step 6, this completes the procedure. 8 Use a Punch setting to print another sample copy. 9 Check the print result. – Check that the horizontal position of the punched holes was adjusted. – If more adjustment is necessary, repeat steps 6 through 9. 12.6.7 Punch Resist Loop Size Adjustment When printing with a Punch setting, the angle of punched holes along the side of the paper can be adjusted. 2 Note [Punch Resist Loop Size Adjustment] appears only if optional punch kit is installed on the finisher. For details on the Punch settings, refer to "Punching holes in copies (Punch settings)" on page 3-74. 0 Before making any adjustments, use a Punch setting to print a sample copy. Perform the adjustment while checking the sample that was created. 1 Display the Administrator Settings screen. – For details on displaying the Administrator Setting screen, refer to "Displaying the Administrator Settings screen" on page 12-42. 2 Touch [1 System Settings]. The System Settings screen appears. 3 Touch [7 Expert Adjustment]. The Expert Adjustment screen appears. 4 Touch [5 Finisher Adjustment]. The Finisher Adjustment screen appears. A bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 12-57 Utility mode 12 5 Touch [7 Punch Resist Loop Size Adjustment]. The Punch Resist Loop Size Adjustment screen appears. 6 Touch the button for the desired adjustment parameter. 7 Check the angle of the punched holes. – If the punched holes are angled, touch [+] to change the adjustment. If the angle cannot be adjusted by touching [+] or if the paper is wrinkled, touch [-] to change the adjustment. – Each time [+] or [-] is touched, the value is increased or decreased by one increment. 8 Touch [OK]. – To cancel the setting and select the default, press the [Reset] key. The angle of the punched holes is adjusted. If no adjustment of the angle of the punched holes was necessary in step 6, this completes the procedure. 9 Use a Punch setting to print another sample copy. 10 Check the print result. – Check that the angle of the punched holes was adjusted. – If more adjustment is necessary, repeat steps 7 through 10. 12 Utility mode 12-58 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 12.6.8 1st Z-Fold Position Adjustment/2nd Z-Fold Position Adjustment The first and second folding position when printing with the "Z-Fold" setting can be adjusted for each paper size. 2 Note [1st Z-Fold Position Adjustment] and [2nd Z-Fold Position Adjustment] do not appear if optional Z folding unit is not installed. 0 Before making any adjustments, use the "Z-Fold" setting to print a single sample copy. Perform the adjustment while checking the sample that was created. In addition, to adjust both the 1st and 2nd folding positions for Z-folding, be sure to adjust the 1st folding position first. 1 Display the Administrator Settings screen. – For details on displaying the Administrator Settings screen, refer to "Displaying the Administrator Settings screen" on page 12-42. 2 Touch [1 System Settings]. The System Settings screen appears. 3 Touch [7 Expert Adjustment]. The Expert Adjustment screen appears. 4 Touch [5 Finisher Adjustment]. The Finisher Adjustment screen appears. 5 Touch [8 1st Z-Fold Position Adjustment] or [9 2nd Z-Fold Position Adjustment]. The Z-Fold Position Adjustment screen appears. 6 Touch the button for the paper size to be adjusted. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 12-59 Utility mode 12 7 Check the folding positions in the sample copy. – If the folding position is too far on the left side of the paper, touch [+] under "Adjust Value" to increase the adjustment (between 0.1 mm and 12.7 mm). – Each time [+] or [-] is touched, the value is increased or decreased by one increment. – If the folding position is too far on the right side of the paper, touch [-] under "Adjust Value" to increase the adjustment (between -0.1 mm and -12.8 mm). – Adjust values so that the distance between the left edge of the paper and the 2nd Z-folding position is 2 mm or more. 8 Touch [OK]. – To cancel the setting and select the default, press the [Reset] key. The folding positions are adjusted. If no adjustment of the folding positions were necessary in step 7, this completes the procedure. 1st Z-fold position 2nd Z-fold position 1st Z-fold position 2nd Z-fold position 2 mm or more 12 Utility mode 12-60 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 9 Use the "Z-Fold" setting to print another sample copy. 10 Check the print result. – Check that the folding positions were adjusted. – If more adjustment is necessary, repeat steps 6 through 10. 12.6.9 Tri-Fold Position Adjustment The folding position when printing with the "Tri-Fold" setting can be adjusted for each paper size. 2 Note [Tri-Fold Position Adjustment] does not appear if optional Finisher FS-610 is not installed. 0 Before making any adjustments, use the "Tri-Fold" setting to print a single sample copy. Perform the adjustment while checking the sample that was created. 1 Display the Administrator Settings screen. – For details on displaying the Administrator Settings screen, refer to "Displaying the Administrator Settings screen" on page 12-42. 2 Touch [1 System Settings]. The System Settings screen appears. 3 Touch [7 Expert Adjustment]. The Expert Adjustment screen appears. 4 Touch [5 Finisher Adjustment]. The Finisher Adjustment screen appears. 5 Touch [10 Tri-Fold Position Adjustment]. The Tri-Fold Position Adjustment screen appears. 6 Touch the button for the paper size to be adjusted. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 12-61 Utility mode 12 7 Check the folding positions in the sample copy. – If the folding position is too far on the right side of the paper, touch [+] under "Adjust Value" to increase the adjustment (between 0.1 mm and 12.7 mm). – Each time [+] or [-] is touched, the value is increased or decreased by one increment. – If the folding position is too far on the left side of the paper, touch [-] under "Adjust Value" to increase the adjustment (between -0.1 mm and -12.8 mm). 8 Touch [OK]. – To cancel the setting and select the default, press the [Reset] key. The folding positions are adjusted. If no adjustment of the folding positions were necessary in step 7, this completes the procedure. 9 Use the "Tri-Fold" setting to print another sample copy. 10 Check the print result. – Check that the folding positions were adjusted. – If more adjustment is necessary, repeat steps 6 through 10. 12 Utility mode 12-62 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 12.6.10 2-Position Staple Pitch Adjustment The distance between staples when printing with the "2 Position" Staple setting ("Staple" and "Center Staple & Fold") can be adjusted. 2 Note [2-Position Staple Pitch Adjustment] does not appear if optional Finisher FS-610 is not installed. 0 Before making any adjustments, use the "2 Position" Staple setting to print a sample copy. Perform the adjustment while checking the sample that was created. 1 Display the Administrator Settings screen. – For details on displaying the Administrator Settings screen, refer to "Displaying the Administrator Settings screen" on page 12-42. 2 Touch [1 System Settings]. The System Settings screen appears. 3 Touch [7 Expert Adjustment]. The Expert Adjustment screen appears. 4 Touch [5 Finisher Adjustment]. The Finisher Adjustment screen appears. 5 Touch [Forward ], and then touch [1 2-Position Staple Pitch Adjustment]. The Adjust Spacing of 2 Staples screen appears. 6 Touch the button for the setting to be adjusted. 7 Check the stapling positions in the sample copy. – Touch [+] or [-] under "Adjust Value" to adjust the distance (between 128 mm and 160 mm) between the staples. – Each time [+] or [-] is touched, the value is increased or decreased by one increment. 8 Touch [OK]. The distance between the staples is adjusted. If no adjustment of the distance between the staples was necessary in step 7, this completes the procedure. 9 Use the "2 Position" Staple setting to print another sample copy. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 12-63 Utility mode 12 10 Check the print result. – Check that the distance between the staples was adjusted. – If more adjustment is necessary, repeat steps 6 through 10. 12.6.11 Post Inserter Tray Size Adjustment The sensors for detecting the size of paper loaded in the paper trays of the optional post inserter can be adjusted. 2 Note [Post Inserter Tray Size Adjustment] appears only if optional post inserter is installed. 1 Display the Administrator Setting screen. – For details on displaying the Administrator Settings screen, refer to "Displaying the Administrator Settings screen" on page 12-42. 2 Touch [1 System Settings]. The System Settings screen appears. 3 Touch [7 Expert Adjustment]. The Expert Adjustment screen appears. 4 Touch [5 Finisher Adjustment]. The Finisher Adjustment screen appears. 5 Touch [Forward ], and then touch [2 Post Inserter Tray Size Adjustment]. The Post Inserter Tray Size Adj. screen appears. 6 Load the selected paper in the paper tray for the post inserter, and then press the [Start] key. 7 Touch [Close]. 12 Utility mode 12-64 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 12.7 Header/Footer Settings Follow the procedures described below to specify headers/footers used with the Stamp/Composition functions available from the Application tab. 12.7.1 Specifying headers/footers 1 Display the Administrator Settings screen. – For details on displaying the Administrator Settings screen, refer to "Displaying the Administrator Settings screen" on page 12-42. 2 Touch [1 System Settings]. The System Settings screen appears. 3 Touch [Forward ], and then touch [2 Stamp Settings]. The Stamp Settings screen appears. 4 Touch [1 Header/Footer Settings]. The Header/Footer Settings screen appears. 5 Touch [New]. The Header/Footer Settings > New screen appears. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 12-65 Utility mode 12 6 Touch [Name]. The New > Name screen appears. 7 Type in the header/footer name (up to 16 characters long), and then touch [OK]. – For details on typing in text, refer to "Entering text" on page 15-3. The header/footer name is specified. 12 Utility mode 12-66 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 8 Under "Header Settings" or "Footer Settings", touch [Print], and then select the type of header/footer to be printed. Touch [Close]. 9 Select the desired setting under "Pages", and specify the desired settings for "Text Size" and "Print Position". 10 Touch [OK]. ! Detail To print the header/footer only on the first page, touch [1st Page Only]. 12.7.2 Editing headers/footers 1 In the Header/Footer Settings screen, touch the button of the header/footer to be edited. 2 Touch [Check/Edit]. – To delete the header/footer, touch [Delete]. The Check/Edit screen appears. 3 Touch [OK]. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 12-67 Utility mode 12 12.8 Authentication Method Specify user authentication and account track settings in order to control the use of this machine. User authentication settings are specified to manage individuals, and account track settings are specified to manage groups and multiple users. By specifying both user authentication and account track settings, the number of prints made by each account can be managed for each individual user. 2 Note A total of 1,000 users and accounts can be registered on this machine. If an authentication mode is set, the authentication screen is displayed while this machine is in standby. In order to use this machine when user authentication or account track settings are specified, the user name and password must be entered. For details, refer to "Controlling each user’s use of this machine (User Authentication)" on page 2-38. User authentication and account track can be specified without synchronizing. 12.8.1 User authentication and account track User authentication and account track can be used to specify the following settings. - User Authentication – Limits on the available functions (copy operations, scanning operations, fax operations, printing, document storing operations, transmitted document printing and saving document to the external memory) – Counters for printing/scanning by each user – Management of group user boxes and personal user boxes for each owner – Management of the level and the group with permissions to access destinations by each owner – Delete jobs of other users - Account Track – Counters for printing/scanning from each account – Operates the group box 12.8.2 When user authentication and account track are synchronized This setup is used when the machine is used by multiple departments and the use by each employee is managed by each department. With this setup, statistics can be maintained on each employee (each user) and on each department (each account). To manage the use of this machine in this way, specify the following authentication settings. User 1 User 2 Group A Group B Account Parameter on Authentication Method screen Settings User Authentication Select "ON (External Server)" or "ON (MFP)". Account Track Select "ON", and then specify the account name and password. Synchronize User Authentication & Account Track Select "Synchronize". Account Name (on User Registration screen) Select an account name if "ON (MFP)" was selected. 12 Utility mode 12-68 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 2 Note For details on external server authentication, refer to the User manual – Network Administrator. 12.8.3 When user authentication and account track are used separately This setup is used when the machine is used by multiple employees with each employee performing multiple duties, which are to be totaled separately. With this setup, statistics can be maintained for each employee (each user) and on each duty of the employee (each account). In addition, totals can be maintained on each employee (each user) and each duty (each account) even if the same duty is performed by two different employees. To manage the use of this machine in this way, specify the following authentication settings. User 1 User 2 Account Group A Group B Group C Parameter on Authentication Method screen Settings User Authentication Select "ON (External Server)" or "ON (MFP)". Account Track Select "ON", and then specify the account name and password. Synchronize User Authentication & Account Track Select "Do Not Synchronize". bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 12-69 Utility mode 12 12.8.4 Selecting an authentication method 1 Display the Administrator Settings screen. – For details on displaying the Administrator Settings screen, refer to "Displaying the Administrator Settings screen" on page 12-42. 2 Touch [4 User Authentication/Account Track]. The User Authentication/Account Track screen appears. 3 Touch [1 General Settings]. The General Settings screen appears. 4 Specify a setting for "User Authentication". – To cancel user authentication, touch [OFF]. – To use an external server to perform user authentication, touch [External Server Authentication], and then select the server type. – In order to use an external server, the external server must first be registered. – To use this machine’s authentication system to perform user authentication, touch [ON (MFP)] 5 Specify a setting for "Public User Access". – To prohibit unregistered users from using this machine, touch [Restrict]. – To allow this machine to be used by touching [Public User Access] in the authentication screen without entering a user name or password even though user authentication settings have been applied, touch [Allow]. – "ON (Without Login)" allows the machine to be used without authentication when logging on as a public user. When logging on as an authorized user, the [Access] key must be pressed first to display the authentication screen. 6 Specify a setting for "Account Track". – To cancel account tracking, touch [OFF]. – To use the account track function, touch [ON]. 7 Specify a setting for "Account Track Input Method". – To allow this machine to be used after the account name and password are entered in the account track screen, touch [Account Name & Password]. – To allow this machine to be used after the password is entered in the account track screen, touch [Password Only]. 12 Utility mode 12-70 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 8 Specify a setting for "Synchronize User Authentication & Account Track". – Synchronize "ON (MFP)" is set and "Account Track" is set to "ON", this setting allows this machine to be used simply by entering user authentication information the first time that the machine is used if the corresponding account was specified during user registration. When "External Server Authentication" is selected and "Account Track" is "ON", and once the machine is used with the appropriate user authentication and account track information entered, this setting allows the machine to be used simply by entering user authentication information by being synchronized with the authenticated account. – Do Not Synchronize This setting requires that all information be entered for user authentication and account track each time that the machine is used. 9 Touch . The second screen is displayed. 10 Specify a setting for "When # of Jobs Reach Maximum". – To skip the job when the limit specified with user authentication or account track is reached, touch [Skip Job]. – To stop all jobs when the limit specified with user authentication or account track is reached, touch [Stop Job]. 11 Specify a setting for "Number of User Counters Assigned". – Press the [C] (clear) key to erase the value, and then use the keypad to specify the desired value (between 1 and 999). – If user authentication and account track settings have been applied, counters can be assigned to both accounts and users, and counts for both can be totaled. 12 Specify "Ticket Hold Time Setting". – Use the keypad to type in the time. (1 to 60 minutes) – Specify the holding time of Kerveros authentication ticket. The holding time setting is applied when Active Directory is selected as the authentication server type. 13 Touch [OK]. – If the setting for "User Authentication", "Account Track" or "Number of User Counters Assigned" was changed, the message "Are you sure you want to clear all data?" appears. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 12-71 Utility mode 12 14 Touch [Yes], and then touch [OK]. – To stop clearing the usage data without changing the settings, touch [No]. – If the setting for any of the following is changed, the data is not cleared. "Public User Access", "When # of Jobs Reach Maximum", "Synchronize User Authentication & Account Track" or "Ticket Hold Time Setting" – To cancel the setting and select the default, press the [Reset] key. The authentication method is set. Continue by specifying settings for user authentication and account track. 2 Reminder Do not use a name including uppercase and lowercase of the same character for the user name of the external server. Since bizhub 751/601 cannot differentiate between uppercase and lowercase letters, the operation may not be performed correctly. 2 Note "Synchronize User Authentication & Account Track" can be specified if "User Authentication" is set to "ON (External Server)" or "ON (MFP)" and "Account Track" is set to "ON". If "Synchronize User Authentication & Account Track" is set to "Synchronize", even when "Public User Access" is set to "Allow", "Public User Access" changes to "Restrict". "Number of User Counters Assigned for Users" can be specified if "User Authentication" is set to "ON (External Server)" or "ON (MFP)" and "Account Track" is set to "ON". If the number of user counters is set to "50", up to 950 accounts can be registered. ! Detail For details on external server authentication, refer to the User manual – Network Administrator. If "Synchronize User Authentication & Account Track" was set to "Do Not Synchronize", use by a public user is not permitted. If both user authentication and account track settings have been applied, "Account Name & Password" is selected. A public user can be set to provide temporary access to this machine. If public user access is permitted, it is recommended that limitations be placed on the machine functions that can be used. For details, refer to "User Registration" on page 12-74. If account track settings have been applied while "User Authentication" is set to "ON (MFP)" or "ON (External Server)", type in the user name and password in the user authentication screen, and then type in the account name and password in the account track screen. When "ON (MFP)" is selected and "Account Track" is "ON", and once the machine is used with the appropriate user authentication and account track information entered, the authenticated account is registered to the account name. The machine can be used simply by entering user authentication information from the next time. 12 Utility mode 12-72 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 12.9 User Authentication Setting User authentication settings can be specified. 12.9.1 Administrative Settings—List User authentication settings can be specified to display [List] in the user authentication screen and the User Name screen. Touch [List] to display a list of registered user names from which the desired user name can simply be selected. (The default setting is "OFF".) 1 Display the Administrator Settings screen. – For details on displaying the Administrator Settings screen, refer to "Displaying the Administrator Settings screen" on page 12-42. 2 Touch [4 User Authentication/Account Track]. The User Authentication/Account Track screen appears. 3 Touch [2 User Authentication Settings]. The User Authentication Setting screen appears. ? Why is [2 User Authentication Settings] not available? % [2 User Authentication Settings] is not available if "User Authentication" on the General Settings screen is set to "OFF". 4 Touch [1 Administrative Settings]. 5 Touch [User Name List]. Buttons for the available settings appear. 6 Touch the button for the desired setting. Whether or not a user name list button appears is set. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 12-73 Utility mode 12 12.9.2 Default Function Permission If external server authentication was selected, limitations can be placed on the machine functions that can be used by an authorized user. (The default setting is "Allow".) The following operations can be limited. - Copy operations - Scan operations - Fax operations - Printing from a printer - Saving documents on the hard disk - Printing the transmitted document - Saving the document to the external memory - Manual destination input 2 Note To limit machine use by registered users, specify settings in the User Registration screen. With "Print Scan/Fax TX", printing can be prevented when scanning or faxing a document saved in a box. 1 Display the Administrator Settings screen. – For details on displaying the Administrator Settings screen, refer to "Displaying the Administrator Settings screen" on page 12-42. 2 Touch [4 User Authentication/Account Track]. The User Authentication/Account Track screen appears. 3 Touch [2 User Authentication Settings]. The User Authentication Setting screen appears. ? Why is [2 User Authentication Settings] not available? % [2 User Authentication Settings] is not available if "User Authentication" on the General Settings screen is set to "OFF". 4 Touch [1 Administrative Settings]. 5 Touch [Default Function Permission]. The Function Permission screen appears. 6 Touch the button for the desired settings. 7 Touch [OK]. The default function permissions are set. 12 Utility mode 12-74 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 12.9.3 Public User Access If user authentication settings have been specified and public user access is permitted, there are two methods for authenticating the public user. Allow: Touch [Public User] in the authentication screen to display the Basic Screen and operate the machine. ON (Without Login): The machine can be used without authentication when logging on as a public user. When logging on as an authorized user, the [Access] key must be pressed first to display the authentication screen. (The default setting is "Restrict".) 1 Display the Administrator Settings screen. – For details on displaying the Administrator Settings screen, refer to "Displaying the Administrator Settings screen" on page 12-42. 2 Touch [4 User Authentication/Account Track]. The User Authentication/Account Track screen appears. 3 Touch [1 General Settings]. 4 Touch [Public User Access]. Buttons for the available settings appear. 5 Touch the button for the desired setting. The public user authentication method is set. ! Detail [Public User Access] is not available if "User Authentication" is set to "OFF". To log on as a general user when "Public User Access" is set to "On (Without Login)", press the [Access] key to display the Basic screen. 12.9.4 User Registration The password, number of prints allowed, and function permissions can be specified for each user of this machine. In addition, if an authentication unit is installed on this machine, the user’s IC card or the vein patterns of their finger can be registered. As an example, the following procedure describes how to register a user with authentication performed by the machine. 0 A total of 1,000 users and accounts can be registered on this machine. 0 If "Public User Access" on the General Settings screen is set to "Allow", a public user is added. Function limitations can be specified for the public user. 0 If "Account Track" on the General Settings screen is set to "ON", the number of users set for "Number of User Counters Assigned" can be registered. 1 Display the Administrator Settings screen. – For details on displaying the Administrator Settings screen, refer to "Displaying the Administrator Settings screen" on page 12-42. 2 Touch [4 User Authentication/Account Track]. The User Authentication/Account Track screen appears. 3 Touch [2 User Authentication Settings]. The User Authentication Setting screen appears. ? Why is [2 User Authentication Settings] not available? % [2 User Authentication Settings] is not available if "User Authentication" on the General Settings screen is set to "OFF". 4 Touch [2 User Registration]. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 12-75 Utility mode 12 5 Touch the button for the desired user, and then touch [Edit]. The Edit screen for the user appears. 6 Touch [User Name]. The User Name screen appears. 7 Type in the user name (up to 64 characters long), and then touch [OK]. – For details on typing in text, refer to "Entering text" on page 15-3. – Once a user name is registered, it cannot be changed. – A user name that has already been registered cannot be used again. The user name is set. 8 Touch [Password]. The Password screen appears. ? Why is [Password] not available? % [Password] is not available if "User Authentication" on the General Settings screen is set to "ON (External Server)". 9 Type in the password (up to 64 characters long), and then touch [OK]. For confirmation, the Password screen appears again. Retype the same password, and then touch [OK]. The user password is set. 10 Touch [E-Mail Address]. The E-Mail Address screen appears. 12 Utility mode 12-76 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 11 Type in the e-mail address (up to 320 characters), and then touch [OK]. The e-mail address is set. If the e-mail address exceeds 69 characters, [Detail] appears in the User Registration screen. Touch [Details] to display the E-Mail Address Details screen and the entire e-mail address. 12 To use the account track function, touch [Account Name]. – [Account Name] appears only if "Account Track" on the General Settings screen been set to "ON". The Account Name screen appears. 13 Touch the button for the desired account, and then touch [OK]. – Before an account name can be selected, accounts must have been registered. For details on registering accounts, refer to "Account Track Registration" on page 12-80. The account is set. 14 Touch [Max. Allowance Set]. The Max. Allowance Set screen appears. 15 To specify the maximum number of prints allowed, use the keypad to type in the desired value. – To specify no maximum for prints, touch [No Limit]. 16 Touch [OK]. The maximum number of prints allowed is set. 17 To use authentication unit (biometric type) or authentication unit (IC card type), touch [Register Auth. Info.]. – [Register Auth. Info.] appears only if an authentication unit is installed on this machine. The Register Auth. Info. screen appears. 18 Touch [Edit]. – When using authentication unit (biometric type), place a finger on the authentication unit and register the vein patterns. – When using authentication unit (IC card type), place an IC card on the authentication unit and register the card information. 19 Touch [Function Permission]. The Function Permission screen appears. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 12-77 Utility mode 12 20 Touch the button for the desired setting for each operation. – To permit the operation to be performed, touch [Allow]. – To prohibit the operation to be performed, touch [Restrict]. – Touch [All Users] to apply the settings in the current screen to all registered users. Touch [All Users], touch [OK], and then touch [OK] in the next screen that appears. – With "Print Scan/Fax TX", printing can be prevented when scanning or faxing a document saved in a box. – Depending on the function limitation settings that are specified, a different Basic screen may appear when logging on. The Basic screen that appears changes in the following order: Copy % Scan % Fax % Box. – If no operation is permitted, user authentication cannot be performed. 21 Touch [OK]. The function permissions are set. 22 Touch [Forward ], and then touch [Icon]. The Select Icon screen appears. 23 Select an icon to display in the user list, and then touch [OK]. The icon is set. 24 Touch [OK]. – To cancel the settings in the current screen, touch [Cancel]. – To delete the selected user information, touch [Delete] in the User Registration screen. 12 Utility mode 12-78 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 12.9.5 User Counter The following data for each user can be checked. Copy + Print This table shows the total number of pages printed with copy and print operations. - Total: Total number of printed pages - Max Allowance: Limits specified during user registration for the number of pages - Large Size: Total number of pages printed on large-sized paper Copy This table shows the total number of pages printed with copy operations. - Total: Total number of copied pages - Large Size: Total number of pages copied on large-sized paper Print This table shows the total number of pages printed with print operations. - Total: Total number of printout pages - Large Size: Total number of printout pages printed on large-sized paper Fax/Scan - Total: Total number of pages scanned/total number of prints in the Fax and Scan modes. - Large Size: Total number of pages scanned/total number of prints in the Fax and Scan modes for paper specified as large-size paper Original Counter - This counter shows the number of original pages that were scanned. Paper Counter - This counter shows the number of pages used for printing. Fax TX - Fax TX: Total number of pages transmitted with fax operations 2 Note Counting automatically continues with user counters when using external server authentication. The public user access is counted as "public" of the counter. The user box administrator access is counted as "BoxAdmin" of the counter. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 12-79 Utility mode 12 12.9.6 Viewing user counters 1 Display the Administrator Settings screen. – For details on displaying the Administrator Settings screen, refer to "Displaying the Administrator Settings screen" on page 12-42. 2 Touch [4 User Authentication/Account Track]. The User Authentication/Account Track screen appears. 3 Touch [2 User Authentication Settings]. The User Authentication Setting screen appears. ? Why is [2 User Authentication Settings] not available? % [2 User Authentication Settings] is not available if "User Authentication" on the General Settings screen is set to "OFF". 4 Touch [3 User Counter]. 5 Touch the button for the desired user, and then touch [Counter Details]. The Counter Details screen for the user appears. 6 Touch the button for the counter to be viewed, and then check the counter. – To clear the counters for the current user, touch [Clear Counter] in the Counter Details screen for the current user. A confirmation message appears, asking whether the counter should be cleared. To clear the counters for the displayed user, touch [Yes] in the confirmation message screen, and then touch [OK]. The maximum number allowed is not cleared. – To clear the counters for all users, touch [Reset All Counters] in the User Counter screen. A confirmation message appears, asking whether the counters should be cleared. To clear the counters for all users, touch [Yes] in the confirmation message screen, and then touch [OK]. The maximum number allowed is not cleared. 7 Touch [Close]. 12 Utility mode 12-80 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 12.10 Account Track Setting 12.10.1 Account Track Registration The password and number of prints allowed can be specified for each account using this machine. 2 Note A total of 1,000 users and accounts can be registered on this machine. 1 Display the Administrator Settings screen. – For details on displaying the Administrator Settings screen, refer to "Displaying the Administrator Settings screen" on page 12-42. 2 Touch [4 User Authentication/Account Track]. The User Authentication/Account Track screen appears. 3 Touch [3 Account Track Settings]. The Account Track Setting screen appears. 4 Touch [1 Account Track Registration]. 5 Touch the button for the desired account, and then touch [Edit]. The Edit screen for the account appears. If “Account Name & Password” was selected: bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 12-81 Utility mode 12 – If "Account Name & Password" was selected, the same account name cannot be used more than once. – The screen that appears differs depending on the setting selected for "Account Track Input Method". 6 Touch [Account Name]. The Account Name screen appears. 7 Type in the account name (up to 8 characters long), and then touch [OK]. – For details on typing in text, refer to "Entering text" on page 15-3. – If [Name] was displayed, type in the account name (up to 20 characters), and then touch [OK]. – If "Account Track Input Method" was set to "Account Name & Password", the same account name cannot be registered more than once. The account name is set. 8 Touch [Password]. – If "Account Track Input Method" was set to "Password Only", the same password cannot be registered more than once. The Password screen appears. 9 Type in the password (up to 8 characters long), and then touch [OK]. A screen for retyping the password appears. If “Password Only” was selected: 12 Utility mode 12-82 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 10 Retype the password specified in step 9, and then touch [OK]. The user password is set. 11 Touch [Max. Allowance Set]. The Max. Allowance Set screen appears. 12 To specify the maximum number of prints allowed, use the keypad to type in the desired value. – To specify no maximum for color and black prints, touch [No Limit]. – Touch [All Accounts] to apply the settings in the current screen to all registered accounts. Touch [All Accounts], touch [OK], and then touch [OK] in the next screen that appears in order to display a message and apply the settings to all accounts. At this time, do not turn off the machine with the main power switch. 13 Touch [OK]. The maximum number of prints allowed is set. 14 Touch [OK]. – To delete the selected account information, touch [Delete]. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 12-83 Utility mode 12 12.10.2 Account Track Counter The following data for each account can be checked. Copy + Print This table shows the total number of pages printed with copy and print operations. - Total: Total number of printed pages - Max Allowance: Limits specified during account registration for the number of pages - Large Size: Total number of pages printed on large-sized paper Copy This table shows the total number of pages printed with copy operations. - Total: Total number of copied pages - Large Size: Total number of pages copied on large-sized paper Print This table shows the total number of pages printed with print operations. - Total: Total number of printout pages - Large Size: Total number of printout pages printed on large-sized paper Fax/Scan - Total: Total number of pages scanned/total number of prints in the Fax and Scan modes. - Large Size: Total number of pages scanned/total number of prints in the Fax and Scan modes for paper specified as large-size paper Original Counter - This counter shows the number of original pages that were scanned. Paper Counter - This counter shows the number of pages used for printing. Fax TX Count - Total number of pages transmitted with fax operations 2 Note The public user access is counted as "public" of the counter. 12 Utility mode 12-84 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 12.10.3 Viewing account counters 1 Display the Administrator Settings screen. – For details on displaying the Administrator Settings screen, refer to "Displaying the Administrator Settings screen" on page 12-42. 2 Touch [4 User Authentication/Account Track]. The User Authentication/Account Track screen appears. 3 Touch [3 Account Track Settings]. The Account Track Setting screen appears. 4 Touch [2 Account Track Counter]. 5 Touch the button for the desired account, and then touch [Counter Details]. The Counter Details screen for the account appears. 6 Touch the button for the counter to be viewed, and then check the counter. – To clear the counters for the current account, touch [Clear Counter] in the Counter Details screen for the current account. A confirmation message appears, asking whether the counter should be cleared. To clear the counters for the displayed account, touch [Yes] in the confirmation message screen, and then touch [OK]. The maximum number allowed is not cleared. – To clear the counters for all accounts, touch [Reset All Counters] in the Account Track Counter screen containing a list of all accounts. A confirmation message appears, asking whether the counters should be cleared. To clear the counters for all accounts, touch [Yes] in the confirmation message screen, and then touch [OK]. The maximum number allowed is not cleared. 7 Touch [Close]. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 12-85 Utility mode 12 12.11 Password Rules If password rules have been applied, the following limitations are applied to the passwords in order to increase security. If password rules are applied and already specified passwords do not meet the password rules, those passwords are not accepted when they are entered. In that case, ask the administrator to change the passwords to meet the following conditions. ! Detail The following conditions apply to the characters used in passwords. Uppercase and lowercase letters are differentiated. Symbols other than the plus sign (+) and quotation mark (") can be used. 12.11.1 Conditions of the password rules Administrator password 2 Note Use when specifying administrator settings. User passwords 2 Note Use when specifying user authentication settings. Account passwords 2 Note Use when specifying account track settings. Limitations on the number of characters Limitations on registering/changing 8 alphanumeric characters and symbols • A password that consists of a repetition of the same character cannot be registered. • The same password as one before being changed cannot be registered. Limitations on the number of characters Limitations on registering/changing 8 or more alphanumeric characters and symbols • A password that consists of a repetition of the same character cannot be registered. • The same password as one before being changed cannot be registered. Limitations on the number of characters Limitations on registering/changing 8 alphanumeric characters and symbols • A password that consists of a repetition of the same character cannot be registered. • The same password as one before being changed cannot be registered. 12 Utility mode 12-86 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) Box passwords 2 Note Specify 8 characters (numbers, * or #) as the fax transmission password for boxes. Confidential document passwords 2 Note If any password not following the Password Rules, Secure Print cannot be performed. Limitations on the number of characters Limitations on registering/changing 8 alphanumeric characters and symbols • A password that consists of a repetition of the same character cannot be registered. • The same password as one before being changed cannot be registered. Limitations on the number of characters Limitations on registering/changing 8 alphanumeric characters and symbols • A password that consists of a repetition of the same character cannot be registered. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 12-87 Utility mode 12 12.12 Enhanced Security Mode When enhanced security mode is applied on this machine, various security settings are set in order to increase security when managing scan data. Restrictions are applied to user operations, public user access is prohibited, and box operations and print jobs are limited. There are various settings that must first be specified or are forcibly set in order for "Enhanced Security Mode" to be set to "ON". Before setting "Enhanced Security Mode" to "ON", be sure to check the settings for the security functions. 2 Reminder If there are settings that are incompatible with the enhanced security Mode, "Enhanced Security Mode" cannot be set to "ON". ! Detail Certain conditions must be met in order for the enhanced security features to be applied. For details, contact your service representative. The settings that must be specified or are forcibly set cannot be changed after "Enhanced Security Mode" is set to "ON". Required settings The following settings must first be specified in order to set "Enhanced Security Mode" to "ON". ! Detail If "Account Track" is set to "ON" in the General Settings screen, set "Account Track Input Method" to "Account Name & Password". [SSL] appears when a certificate is registered with PageScope Web Connection. Administrator mode parameters Settings User Authentication/Account Track—General Settings— User Authentication Select "ON (External Server)" or "ON (MFP)". System Connection—Open API Settings—SSL The button must be displayed. Security Settings—Administrator Password Specify a password that meets the password rules. Security Settings—HDD Settings—HDD Lock Password *Otherwise, install the optional security kit. Specify the hard disk locking password. Security Settings/Security Details/Prohibited Functions When Authentication Error/Release Time Settings Specify 5 minutes or longer. Security Settings/Flash Memory Lock Password Specify the flash memory locking password. 12 Utility mode 12-88 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) Changed settings For increased security, the following settings are set when "Enhanced Security Mode" is set to "ON". 2 Note The number of times for checking for "Prohibited Functions When Authentication Error" can be changed to a number between 1 and 3. A changed setting cannot be changed when "Enhanced Security Mode" is set to "OFF". When "Password Rules" is set to "Enable", a password that does not meet the password rules is considered a failed attempt during authentication. For details on the password rules, refer to "Password Rules" on page 12-85. When "Overwrite Temporary Data" is set to "Mode 2", it cannot be changed to "Mode 1" even if "Enhanced Security Mode" is "ON". For details on the changed network settings, refer to the User manual – Network Scan/Fax/Network Fax Operations. User operation limitations When "Enhanced Security Mode" is set to "ON", an icon appears in the screen and limitations are placed on the user for the following operations. - A public user cannot use this machine. - The list of users does not appear in the user authentication screen. - When user authentication has failed the specified number of times, the control panel can no longer be operated. If operation of the control panel is restricted, touch [Release], and then select the items whose operation restrictions are canceled. - The destination cannot be changed by the user. - This machine’s counter data cannot be retrieved by PageScope Net Care or PageScope VISUALCOUNT-MASTER. - An application performing the write operation with SNMP v1/v2c cannot be connected. - Write users using SNMP v3 must be authenticated. 2 Note For details on the limitations placed on the user for box operations, refer to the User manual – Box Operations. For details on the limitations placed on the user for printing, refer to the User manual – Print Operations. For details on canceling operation restrictions applied when authentication failed, refer to "Security Settings" on page 12-38. Administrator mode parameters Changed settings System Settings—Restrict User Access—Restrict Access to Job Settings—Registering and Changing Addresses Set to "Restrict". User Authentication/Account Track—General Settings— Public User Access Set to "Restrict". User Authentication/Account Track—User Authentication Settings—Administrative Settings—User Name List Set to "OFF". User Authentication/Account Track—Print Without Authentication Set to "Restrict". Security Settings—User Box Administrator Setting Set to "Restrict". Security Settings—Security Details—Password Rules Set to "Enable". Security Settings—Security Details—Prohibited Functions When Authentication Error Set to "Mode 2" and three times or less for checking. Security Settings—Security Details—Confidential Document Access Method Set to "Mode 2". Security Settings—HDD Setting—Overwrite Temporary Data Set to "Mode 1". 13 Authentication Unit (Biometric Type AU-101) bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 13-3 Authentication Unit (Biometric Type AU-101) 13 13 Authentication Unit (Biometric Type AU-101) 13.1 Safety information Carefully read this information, and then store it in a safe place. - Before using this device, carefully read this information and follow it to operate the device correctly. - After reading this information, store it in the designated holder with the warranty. Important information The reprinting or reproduction of the content of this publication, either in part or in full, is prohibited without prior permission. The content of this publication is subject to change without notice. This publication was created with careful attention to content; however, if inaccuracies or errors are noticed, please contact your sales representative. The marketing and authorization to use the our company’s product mentioned in this information are provided entirely on an "as is" basis. Our company’s assumes no responsibility for any damage (including lost profits or other related damages) caused by this product or its use as a result of operations not described in this information. For disclaimers and warranty and liability details, refer to the user manual Authentication unit (Biometric type AU-101). This product is designed, manufactured and intended for general business use. Do not use it for applications requiring high reliability and which may have an extreme impact on lives and property. (Applications requiring high reliability: Chemical plant management, medical equipment management and emergency communications management) Use with other authentication devices is not guaranteed. In order to incorporate improvements in the product, the specifications concerning this product are subject to change without notice. For safe use Warning Symbol • Do not this product near water, otherwise it may be damaged. • Do not cut, damage, modify or forcefully bend the USB cable. A malfunction may occur as a result of a damaged or cut USB cable. • Do not disassembly this device, otherwise it may be damaged. 13 Authentication Unit (Biometric Type AU-101) 13-4 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) Regulation notices USER INSTRUCTIONS FCC PART 15 - RADIO FREQUENCY DEVICES (For U.S.A. Users) NOTE: This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interface by one or more of the following measures: - Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. - Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver. - Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected. - Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help 7 WARNING The design and production of this unit conform to FCC regulations, and any changes or modifications must be registered with the FCC and are subject to FCC control. % Any changes made by the purchaser or user without first contacting the manufacturer will be subject to penalty under FCC regulations. INTERFERENCE-CAUSING EQUIPMENT STANDARD (ICES-003 ISSUE 4) (For Canada Users) This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003. Cet appareil numérique de la classe B est conforme à la norme NMB-003 du Canada. FCC part 15 FCC: Declaration of Conformity Product Type Authentication unit (Biometric type) Product Name AU-101 This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules Operation is subject to the following two conditions: • This device may not cause harmful interference, and this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 13-5 Authentication Unit (Biometric Type AU-101) 13 13.2 Using Authentication Unit (Biometric Type) AU-101 The Authentication Unit (Biometric Type) AU-101 is a biometric authentication system that performs user authentication by scanning vein patterns in a finger. Log on to this machine and print job operation can be authenticated with finger vein patterns when using this machine with user authentication settings specified. The status of the authentication unit is indicated by a status indicator and tone. In order to use the authentication unit, user finger vein patterns must first be registered with the machine. A registered user can log on to this machine or print a print job after completing authentication with their finger vein patterns. The following procedures describe how to specify the necessary settings on the machine, register users, and perform the logon and print job operations after completing authentication. 2 Note Align the index finger with the indentation and notch in the scanner, and then position the finger so that the tip lightly touches the edge of the scanner. Place your thumb and middle finger down to hold the authentication unit in place on both sides, and avoid moving the index finger being used for authentication. 2 Reminder Do not place any object other than your finger in the scanner of the authentication unit while scanning, otherwise the device may malfunction. Do not disconnect the cable connecting the authentication unit to the computer while scanning, otherwise the system may become unstable. Status indicator Device status Lit (green) Standing by/authentication completed Flashing (green) Authenticating/scanning Lit (red) Authentication failed/scanning failed Off The authentication unit is not detected. Tone Device status One short beep Starting to scan One short beep Retrying after authentication failed One short beep Authentication completed Two short beeps Authentication failed 13 Authentication Unit (Biometric Type AU-101) 13-6 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 13.2.1 Settings of this machine ! Detail User authentication on the machine must be set for machine authentication. 2 Note This device does not support external server authentication. To combine account track settings with user authentication settings, set Synchronize User Authentication & Account Track to "Synchronize". When you set "Do Not Synchronize", the ID & Print function cannot be used. 1 From the control panel of the multifunctional product, touch [4 User Authentication/Account Track] on the Administrator Settings screen, and then touch [1 General Settings]. 2 Set "User Authentication" to "ON (MFP)", and then touch [OK]. 3 Touch [8 Authentication Device Settings], then [1 General Settings], then [Bio Authentication]. 4 Select the desired settings under "Beep Sound" and "Operation Settings". – Under "Beep Sound", select whether or not a beep is produced when scanning of the finger vein pattern is completed successfully. – Under "Operation Settings", select the logon method after registration. 1-to-many authentication: Logon is possible simply by positioning the finger. 1-to-1 authentication: Logon is possible by entering a user name and positioning the finger. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 13-7 Authentication Unit (Biometric Type AU-101) 13 – For details on logging on, refer to "Logging on to this machine" on page 13-20. 5 Touch [OK], and then touch [OK] in the next screen that appears. 6 Touch [2 Logoff Settings]. 7 Select whether or not the user is logged off when scanning of the document is finished after the user has logged on to this machine. 8 Touch [OK]. 9 Touch [Close], and then touch [Close] in the next screen that appears. 13 Authentication Unit (Biometric Type AU-101) 13-8 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 13.2.2 Registering users There are two methods for registering users. - Connecting the authentication unit to the machine and registering directly from the machine - Connecting the authentication unit to a computer and registering using Data Administrator ! Detail Registered user data is stored on the hard disk of the machine. If the user authentication method on the machine is changed or the hard disk is reformatted, the registered user data is erased. Registering from the control panel of this machine 1 From the control panel of the machine, touch [4 User Authentication/Account Track] on the Administrator Settings screen, and then touch [2 Authentication System], then [2 User Registration]. – [2 User Authentication Settings] is not available if "User Authentication" on the General Settings screen is set to "OFF". 2 Touch the button for a registration number, and then touch [Edit]. 3 Touch [Register Auth. Info.]. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 13-9 Authentication Unit (Biometric Type AU-101) 13 4 Touch [Edit]. 5 Position the finger on the authentication unit to scan the finger vein pattern. – Scan the finger vein pattern three times, removing and repositioning the same finger, and touch [OK] after each time. 6 Touch [Close], and then touch [Close] in the next screen that appears. 7 Type the user name and the password. 8 If desired, specify the function limitations. 9 Touch [OK]. 10 Touch [Close]. Registering from Data Administrator In order to use Data Administrator, settings must be specified on the machine and the setup procedure must be performed. The setup procedure includes installing BioDriver (USB-Driver) of the authentication unit, then installing Data Administrator Bio Plugin. 2 Reminder Data Administrator ver. 4.0 or later must first be installed on the computer. For details on the operating environment and installation procedure for Data Administrator, refer to the user manual for the Data Administrator. 13 Authentication Unit (Biometric Type AU-101) 13-10 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) Checking the currently installed version 1 From the "Help" menu of Data Administrator, click "Version Information". – If the version appears as "3.x": This software cannot be used. Install version 4.x. – If Data Administrator ver. 3.x is installed, it is removed when version 4.x is installed. 2 Click the [Plug-in version] button. 3 From the "Plug-in information list", check the version of the Data Administrator plug-in. – If the plug-in version appears as "4.x": This software can be used. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 13-11 Authentication Unit (Biometric Type AU-101) 13 Setup 1 Turn off the machine with the main power switch, and then disconnect the authentication unit from the machine. 2 Install BioDriver (USB-Driver). – Plug the cable from the authentication unit into the USB port on the computer. – The Found New Hardware Wizard starts. 3 Select "Yes, now and every time I connect a device", and then click [Next]. 4 Insert the application DVD included with the authentication unit into the DVD drive of the computer. 5 Select "Install from a list or specific location (Advanced)", and then click [Next]. 13 Authentication Unit (Biometric Type AU-101) 13-12 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 6 Select the "Include this location in the search" check box, check that the application DVD appears as a location to be searched, and then click [Next]. – If the application DVD does not appear as a location to be searched for the driver, click [Browse], select the BioDriver (USB-Driver) folder on the DVD, and then click [OK]. The installation begins. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 13-13 Authentication Unit (Biometric Type AU-101) 13 7 Click [Finish]. 8 Repeat steps 5 through 7. The installation of BioDriver (USB-Driver) is completed. 9 Install Data Administrator Bio Plugin. Open the DA_Bio_Plugin folder on the application DVD, and then click "setup.exe". 10 Select the language, and then click [OK]. The installer starts up. 11 Follow the instructions that appear on the screen to complete the installation. 12 Click [Next]. 13 Authentication Unit (Biometric Type AU-101) 13-14 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 13 Select "I accept the terms of the license agreement", and then click [Next]. 14 Click [Install]. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 13-15 Authentication Unit (Biometric Type AU-101) 13 15 Click [Finish]. Data Administrator Bio Plugin is installed, and the setup is completed. Registering users 2 Reminder In order to register users with Data Administrator, the authentication unit must be connected to the USB port of the computer, and the computer and this machine must be connected over a network. 1 If the authentication unit is connected to the machine, turn off the machine with the main power switch, and then disconnect the authentication unit. – If the authentication unit is connected to the computer, continue with step 4. – When the machine is turned off, then on again with the main power switch, wait at least 10 seconds to turn the machine on after turning it off. The machine may not operate correctly if it is turned on immediately after being turned off. – Hold the plug when plugging and unplugging the USB cable, otherwise the cable may be damaged. 2 Turn on the machine with the main power switch. 3 Connect the authentication unit to the USB port of the computer installed with Data Administrator. – Do not connect other USB devices to the same port where the authentication unit is connected. If enough USB power is not provided, the authentication unit may not operate correctly. – When using a USB hub, be sure to use a self-powered USB hub that can provide 500 mA or more. – After connecting the authentication unit, wait at least 5 seconds before operating it. This machine Network USB Computer Authentication unit 13 Authentication Unit (Biometric Type AU-101) 13-16 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 4 Start up Data Administrator, and then import the device information for the machine. – For details on importing the device information, refer to the user manual for Data Administrator. The Device information pane appears. 5 Select "User authentication settings" in the Function selection pane, and then click [Add]. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 13-17 Authentication Unit (Biometric Type AU-101) 13 6 Select a template, and then click [OK]. The User settings dialog box appears. 7 Type in the user name and password, click the Vein Authentication tab, and then click [Import]. – If desired, type in the e-mail address. 13 Authentication Unit (Biometric Type AU-101) 13-18 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 8 Position the finger on the authentication unit, and then click [Start reading]. – Scan the finger vein pattern three times, removing and repositioning the same finger each time. – After scanning the finger vein patterns, place the same finger, and press [Authentication Test]. – If your finger vein patterns have been authenticated in the authentication test, press [New]. If authentication has failed, retry scanning the finger. 9 Click [Register]. 10 Click [OK]. – Repeat steps 5 through 10 until all users have been registered. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 13-19 Authentication Unit (Biometric Type AU-101) 13 11 Click [Export to the device]. – To change the registered data, select the user name, and then click [Edit]. 12 Click [Write]. – Data Administrator is equipped with a batch copy feature that allows the registered user data to be specified on multiple machines specified to be used with the authentication unit. The registered user data is specified on the machine. 13 Click [OK]. 13 Authentication Unit (Biometric Type AU-101) 13-20 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 14 Disconnect the authentication unit from this USB port of the computer. 15 Turn off the machine with the main power switch, connect the authentication unit, and then turn on the machine with the main power switch. – When the machine is turned off, then on again with the main power switch, wait at least 10 seconds to turn the machine on after turning it off. The machine may not operate correctly if it is turned on immediately after being turned off. – Hold the plug when plugging and unplugging the USB cable, otherwise the cable may be damaged. 13.2.3 Logging on to this machine Follow the procedures described below to log on to this machine by completing authentication with finger vein patterns. When "1-to-many authentication" has been specified 1 Position the registered finger on the authentication unit. 2 The user is authenticated, and the Basic screen appears. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 13-21 Authentication Unit (Biometric Type AU-101) 13 When "1-to-1 authentication" has been specified 1 Type in the user name. 2 Position the registered finger on the authentication unit. The user is authenticated, and the Basic screen appears. 2 Note If authentication fails many times, the authentication data may not be registered correctly. Therefore, register the user again. 13 Authentication Unit (Biometric Type AU-101) 13-22 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 13.2.4 ID & Print function Print jobs sent from a computer are saved in the ID & Print user box on the machine and can be printed after authentication is completed with finger vein patterns. This is called the ID & Print function. In addition, documents saved in the ID & Print user box can be checked and specified to be printed from the control panel of the machine. 2 Note For details on the printer driver settings and Box mode functions, refer to the user manual included with the machine. ID & Print (For Windows) Specifying settings on the Configure tab 1 For Windows 2000/NT 4.0, click the [Start] button, point to "Settings", and then click "Printers". For Windows XP/Server 2003, click the [Start] button, and then click "Printers and Faxes". For Windows Vista/Server 2008, click the [Start] button, and then click "Control panel", "Hardware and Sound", and "Printers". For Windows 7/Server 2008 R2, click the [Start] button, and then click "Control panel", and "Devices and Printers". – If "Printers and Faxes" does not appear in the Start menu in Windows XP/Server 2003, open the Control Panel from the Start menu, select "Printers and Other Hardware", and then select "Printers and Faxes". – For Windows Vista/Server 2008, if the control panel is in the classic view, double-click "Printers". – For Windows 7/Server 2008, if the control panel is in an icon view, click "Devices and Printers". 2 Right-click the icon of the installed printer, and then click "Properties". 3 Click the Configure tab. 4 Select "User Authentication" under "Device Option". 5 Select "ON (Device)" from the "Setting" drop-down list. 6 Select "ID & Print" under "Device Option". 7 Select "Allow" from the "Setting" drop-down list. 8 Click [Apply], and then click [OK]. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 13-23 Authentication Unit (Biometric Type AU-101) 13 Sending a print job 1 Open the data in the application, click [File], and then click [Print]. 2 Check that the printer name has been selected in "Printer Name" or "Select Printer". If the printer is not selected, click to select the printer. – The Print dialog box differs depending on the application. 3 Click [Preferences] (or [Properties]). 4 Click the Basic tab. 5 Click the [Authentication/Account Track] button. 13 Authentication Unit (Biometric Type AU-101) 13-24 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 6 Select "Recipient User", and then enter the user name and password. – If [User Authentication/Account Track] - [User Authentication Settings] - [Administrative Setting] - [ID & Print Settings] - "Public User" is set to "Save" in the Administrator Settings of the machine and the public user job is permitted, public user jobs are also saved in the [ID & Print User Box]. 7 Click [Verify] to check the user ID. 8 Click [OK]. – If the user name or the password is incorrect, type in the correct information. 9 Click the [OK] button. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 13-25 Authentication Unit (Biometric Type AU-101) 13 10 From the "Output Method" drop-down list, select "Print". – If [User Authentication/Account Track] - [User Authentication Settings] - [Administrative Setting] - [ID & Print Settings] - "ID & Print" is set to "ON" in the Administrator Settings of the machine, general print jobs are also saved in the [ID & Print User Box]. 11 Specify the desired settings, and then click [OK]. 12 Click [Apply], and then click [Print]. The print job is sent. 13 Print a print job. – "Begin Printing": The print job is printed. "Print & Access": The print job is printed, and the user is logged in to the Basic screen. "Access": The print job is not printed, and the user is logged in to the Basic screen. – Make sure that either "Begin Printing" or "Print & Access" is selected. – You can also select "Access" and select a print job to print. For details, refer to "Selecting the print job to be printed from the control panel" on page 13-30. – Place the finger you have registered on the authentication unit when 1-to-many authentication has been specified. – Enter the user name and place the finger you have registered on the authentication unit when 1-to- 1 authentication has been specified. The user is authenticated, and the print job is printed. 13 Authentication Unit (Biometric Type AU-101) 13-26 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) ID & Print (for Macintosh) Setting printer information 1 Open the "Print & Fax" dialog box (or "Printer Setup Utility"/"Print Center" dialog box.) – The "Print & Fax" dialog box can be opened from "System References" on the Apple menu (OS X 10.4/10.5/10.6). – The "Printer Setup Utility"/"Print Center" dialog box can be opened from "HDD" - "Applications" - "Utilities" (OSX 10.2/10.3). 2 Open the "Printer Info" dialog box. – For "Print & Fax" dialog box, click [Option & supply] (OSX 10.5/10.6) or [Printer Setup] (OSX 10.4). – For "Printer Setup Utility"/"Print Center" dialog box, select "Information" from the "Printer" menu. 3 Select "Installable Options". – For OSX 10.5/10.6, click [Driver]. – For OSX 10.2/10.3/10.4, select "Installable Options". 4 Click the "ID & Print" check box to put a check mark in it. 5 Click [Apply Changes], and then close the "Printer Info" dialog box. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 13-27 Authentication Unit (Biometric Type AU-101) 13 Sending a print job 1 Open the data in the application, click [File], and then click "Print". 2 Check that the printer name has been selected. – The Print dialog box differs depending on the application. 3 From the drop-down menu, select "Output Method". 4 Select the "User Authentication" check box. The User Authentication dialog box appears. 13 Authentication Unit (Biometric Type AU-101) 13-28 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 5 Select "Recipient User", and then enter the user name and password. – If [User Authentication/Account Track] - [User Authentication Settings] - [Administrative Setting] - [ID & Print Settings] - "Public User" is set to "Save" in the Administrator Settings of the machine and the public user job is permitted, public user jobs are also saved in the [ID & Print User Box]. 6 Click the [OK] button. 7 From the "Output Method" drop-down list, select "Print". – If [User Authentication/Account Track] - [User Authentication Settings] - [Administrative Setting] - [ID & Print Settings] - "ID & Print" is set to "ON" in the Administrator Settings of the machine, general print jobs are also saved in the [ID & Print User Box]. 8 Specify the desired settings, and then click [Print]. The print job is sent. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 13-29 Authentication Unit (Biometric Type AU-101) 13 9 Print a print job. – "Begin Printing": The print job is printed. "Print & Access": The print job is printed, and the user is logged in to the Basic screen. "Access": The print job is not printed, and the user is logged in to the Basic screen. – Make sure that either "Begin Printing" or "Print & Access" is selected. – You can also select "Access" and select a print job to print. For details, refer to "Selecting the print job to be printed from the control panel" on page 13-30. – Place the finger you have registered on the authentication unit when 1-to-many authentication has been specified. – Enter the user name and place the finger you have registered on the authentication unit when 1-to- 1 authentication has been specified. The user is authenticated, and the print job is printed. 13 Authentication Unit (Biometric Type AU-101) 13-30 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) Selecting the print job to be printed from the control panel Follow the procedure described below to select the document to be printed from those saved in the ID & Print user box. 1 Touch [Screen Operation]. 2 Log in to the machine. – Place the finger you have registered on the authentication unit when 1-to-many authentication has been specified. – Enter the user name and place the finger you have registered on the authentication unit when 1-to- 1 authentication has been specified. The user is authenticated, and the Basic screen appears. 3 Press the [User Box] key in the control panel. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 13-31 Authentication Unit (Biometric Type AU-101) 13 4 Touch [Use Document]. 5 Touch [System User Box]. 13 Authentication Unit (Biometric Type AU-101) 13-32 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 6 Touch [ID & Print User Box], and then touch [OK]. 7 Select the document to be printed. – Multiple documents can be selected. – To select all documents, touch [Select All]. – To cancel the selection of all documents, touch [Reset]. – To check various information, such as the date/time when the document was stored and the document name, touch [Detail View]. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 13-33 Authentication Unit (Biometric Type AU-101) 13 8 Touch [Print] under "Action". – To delete the document, touch [Delete]. – To check the document details, touch [Document Details]. – To cancel the operation, touch [Cancel]. The selected document is printed. 2 Note If authentication fails many times, the authentication data may not be registered correctly. Therefore, register the user again. 13 Authentication Unit (Biometric Type AU-101) 13-34 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 14 Authentication Unit (IC Card Type AU-201) bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 14-3 Authentication Unit (IC Card Type AU-201) 14 14 Authentication Unit (IC Card Type AU-201) 14.1 Safety information Carefully read this information, and then store it in a safe place. - Before using this device, carefully read this information and follow it to operate the device correctly. - After reading this information, store it in the designated holder with the warranty. Important information The reprinting or reproduction of the content of this publication, either in part or in full, is prohibited without prior permission. The content of this publication is subject to change without notice. This publication was created with careful attention to content; however, if inaccuracies or errors are noticed, please contact your sales representative. The marketing and authorization to use the our company’s product mentioned in this information are provided entirely on an "as is" basis. Our company’s assumes no responsibility for any damage (including lost profits or other related damages) caused by this product or its use as a result of operations not described in this information. For disclaimers and warranty and liability details, refer to the user manual Authentication unit (Biometric type AU-201). This product is designed, manufactured and intended for general business use. Do not use it for applications requiring high reliability and which may have an extreme impact on lives and property. (Applications requiring high reliability: Chemical plant management, medical equipment management and emergency communications management) Use with other authentication devices is not guaranteed. In order to incorporate improvements in the product, the specifications concerning this product are subject to change without notice. For safe use Warning Symbol • Do not this product near water, otherwise it may be damaged. • Do not cut, damage, modify or forcefully bend the USB cable. A malfunction may occur as a result of a damaged or cut USB cable. • Do not disassembly this device, otherwise it may be damaged. • Do not store the IC card within 40 mm of the card scanning area. 14 Authentication Unit (IC Card Type AU-201) 14-4 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) Regulation notices USER INSTRUCTIONS FCC PART 15 - RADIO FREQUENCY DEVICES (For U.S.A. Users) NOTE: This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interface by one or more of the following measures: - Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. - Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver. - Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected. - Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help 7 WARNING The design and production of this unit conform to FCC regulations, and any changes or modifications must be registered with the FCC and are subject to FCC control. % Any changes made by the purchaser or user without first contacting the manufacturer will be subject to penalty under FCC regulations. INTERFERENCE-CAUSING EQUIPMENT STANDARD (ICES-003 ISSUE 4) (For Canada Users) This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003. Cet appareil numérique de la classe B est conforme à la norme NMB-003 du Canada. FCC part 15 FCC: Declaration of Conformity Product Type Authentication unit (Biometric type) Product Name AU-201 This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules Operation is subject to the following two conditions: • This device may not cause harmful interference, and this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 14-5 Authentication Unit (IC Card Type AU-201) 14 14.2 Using Authentication Unit (IC Card Type) AU-201 Authentication Unit (IC Card Type) AU-201 is an IC card authentication system that performs user authentication by IC cards. Log on to this machine and print job operation can be authenticated with IC cards when using this machine with user authentication settings specified. In order to use the authentication unit, user IC card IDs must first be registered with the machine. A registered user can log on to this machine or print a print job after completing authentication with their IC card IDs. The following procedures describe how to specify the necessary settings on the machine, register users, and perform the logon and print job operations after completing authentication. 2 Reminder Do not disconnect the USB cable while the authentication unit is being used, otherwise the system may become unstable. Do not store the IC card within 40 mm of the card scanning area. 14.2.1 Settings of this machine ! Detail User authentication on this machine must be set for machine authentication. 2 Note This device does not support external server authentication. To combine account track settings with user authentication settings, set Synchronize User Authentication & Account Track to "Synchronize". When you set "Do Not Synchronize", the ID & Print function cannot be used. 1 From the control panel of this machine, touch [4 User Authentication/Account Track] on the Administrator Settings screen, and then touch [1 General Settings]. 2 Set "User Authentication" to "ON (MFP)", and then touch [OK]. – For details on specifying settings for "Public User Access" and "Account Track", refer to "Selecting an authentication method" on page 12-69 14 Authentication Unit (IC Card Type AU-201) 14-6 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 3 Touch [Yes], and then touch [OK]. 4 Touch [8 Authentication Device Settings], then [1 General Settings], then [Card Authentication]. 5 Select the desired settings under "IC Card Type" and "Operation Settings". – Under "Operation Settings", select the logon method after registration. Card Authentication: Logon is possible simply by positioning the IC card. Card Authentication + Password: Logon is possible by positioning the IC card and entering the password. – For details on logging on, refer to "Logging on to this machine" on page 14-22. 6 Touch [OK], and then touch [OK] in the next screen that appears. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 14-7 Authentication Unit (IC Card Type AU-201) 14 7 Touch [2 Logoff Settings]. 8 Select whether or not the user is logged off when scanning of the document is finished after the user has logged on to this machine. 9 Touch [OK]. 10 Touch [Close], and then touch [Close] in the next screen that appears. 14 Authentication Unit (IC Card Type AU-201) 14-8 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 14.2.2 Registering users There are two methods for registering users. - Connecting the authentication unit to this machine and registering directly from the machine - Connecting the authentication unit to a computer and registering using Data Administrator ! Detail Registered user data is stored on the hard disk of this machine. If the user authentication method on the machine is changed or the hard disk is reformatted, the registered user data is erased. Registering from the control panel of this machine 1 From the control panel of this machine, touch [4 User Authentication/Account Track] on the Administrator Settings screen, and then touch [2 User Authentication Settings], then [2 User Registration]. 2 Touch the button for a registration number, and then touch [Edit]. 3 Touch [Register Auth. Info.]. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 14-9 Authentication Unit (IC Card Type AU-201) 14 4 Touch [Edit]. 5 Position the IC card on the authentication unit, and then touch [OK]. 6 After the message "Registered" appears, touch [Close], and then touch [Close] in the next screen that appears. 7 Type the user name and the password. 8 If desired, specify the function limitations. 9 Touch [OK]. 10 Touch [Close]. 14 Authentication Unit (IC Card Type AU-201) 14-10 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) Registering from Data Administrator In order to use Data Administrator, settings must be specified on the machine and the setup procedure must be performed. The setup procedure includes installing IC Card Driver (USB-Driver) of the authentication unit, then installing Data Administrator IC Card Plugin. 2 Reminder Data Administrator ver. 3.0 or later must first be installed on the computer. For details on the operating environment and installation procedure for Data Administrator, refer to the user manual for the Data Administrator. Checking the currently installed version 1 From the "Help" menu of Data Administrator, click "Version Information". – If the version appears as "3.x": This software cannot be used. Install version 4.x. – If Data Administrator ver. 3.x is installed, it is removed when version 4.x is installed. 2 Click the [Plug-in version] button. 3 From the "Plug-in information list", check the version of the Data Administrator plug-in. – If the plug-in version appears as "4.x": This software can be used. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 14-11 Authentication Unit (IC Card Type AU-201) 14 Setup 1 Turn off the machine with the main power switch, and then disconnect the authentication unit from the machine. 2 Install IC Card Driver (USB-Driver). – Plug the cable from the authentication unit into the USB port on the computer. – The Found New Hardware Wizard starts. 3 Select "Yes, now and every time I connect a device", and then click [Next]. 4 Insert the application DVD included with the authentication unit into the DVD drive of the computer. 5 Select "Install from a list or specific location (Advanced)", and then click [Next]. 14 Authentication Unit (IC Card Type AU-201) 14-12 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 6 Select the "Include this location in the search" check box, check that the application DVD appears as a location to be searched, and then click [Next]. – If the application DVD does not appear as a location to be searched for the driver, click [Browse], select the IC Card Driver (USB-Driver) folder on the DVD, and then click [OK]. The installation begins. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 14-13 Authentication Unit (IC Card Type AU-201) 14 7 Click [Finish]. The installation of IC Card Driver (USB-Driver) is completed. 8 Install Data Administrator IC Card Plugin. Open the IC_Card_Plugin folder on the application DVD, and then click "setup.exe". 9 Select the language, and then click [OK]. The installer starts up. 14 Authentication Unit (IC Card Type AU-201) 14-14 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 10 Follow the instructions that appear on the screen to complete the installation. 11 Click [Next]. 12 Select "I accept the terms of the license agreement", and then click [Next]. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 14-15 Authentication Unit (IC Card Type AU-201) 14 13 Click [Install]. 14 Click [Finish]. Data Administrator IC Card Plugin is installed, and the setup is completed. 14 Authentication Unit (IC Card Type AU-201) 14-16 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) Registering users 2 Reminder In order to register users with Data Administrator, the authentication unit must be connected to the USB port of the computer, and the computer and machine must be connected over a network. 1 If the authentication unit is connected to this machine, turn off the machine with the main power switch, and then disconnect the authentication unit. – If the authentication unit is connected to the computer, continue with step 4. – When the machine is turned off, then on again with the main power switch, wait at least 10 seconds to turn the machine on after turning it off. The machine may not operate correctly if it is turned on immediately after being turned off. – Hold the plug when plugging and unplugging the USB cable, otherwise the cable may be damaged. 2 Turn on the machine with the main power switch. 3 Connect the authentication unit to the USB port of the computer installed with Data Administrator. – Do not connect other USB devices to the same port where the authentication unit is connected. If enough USB power is not provided, Authentication unit (IC Card Type) may not operate correctly. – When using a USB hub, be sure to use a self-powered USB hub that can provide 500 mA or more. – After connecting the authentication unit, wait at least 5 seconds before operating it. – If the data have already been read out, proceed to 7. 4 Find this device in the window, then double-click it. This machine Network USB Computer Authentication unit bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 14-17 Authentication Unit (IC Card Type AU-201) 14 5 Click [Import]. 6 Click [Yes]. 14 Authentication Unit (IC Card Type AU-201) 14-18 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 7 Start up Data Administrator, and then import the device information for this machine. – For details on importing the device information, refer to the user manual for Data Administrator. The Device information pane appears. 8 Select "User authentication settings" in the Function selection pane, and then click [Add]. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 14-19 Authentication Unit (IC Card Type AU-201) 14 9 Select a template, and then click [OK]. The User settings dialog box appears. 10 Type in the user name and password, click the IC card authentication tab. – If desired, type in the e-mail address. 11 Position the IC card on the authentication unit, and then click [Start reading]. – The card ID can also be registered by selecting "Input the card ID directly". 14 Authentication Unit (IC Card Type AU-201) 14-20 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 12 Click [OK]. – Repeat steps 8 through 12 until all users have been registered. 13 Click [Export to the device]. – To change the registered data, select the user name, and then click [Edit]. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 14-21 Authentication Unit (IC Card Type AU-201) 14 14 Click [Write]. – Data Administrator is equipped with a batch copy feature that allows the registered user data to be specified on the multiple machines specified to be used with the authentication unit. The registered user data is specified on the machine. 15 Click [OK]. 16 Disconnect the authentication unit from this USB port of the computer. 17 Turn off the machine with the main power switch, connect the authentication unit, and then turn on the machine with the main power switch. – When the this machine is turned off, then on again with the main power switch, wait at least 10 seconds to turn the machine on after turning it off. The machine may not operate correctly if it is turned on immediately after being turned off. – Hold the plug when plugging and unplugging the USB cable, otherwise the cable may be damaged. 14 Authentication Unit (IC Card Type AU-201) 14-22 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 14.2.3 Logging on to this machine Follow the procedures described below to log on to this machine by completing authentication with IC card IDs. When "Card Authentication” has been specified" has been specified 1 Position the registered IC card on the authentication unit. 2 The user is authenticated, and the Basic screen appears. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 14-23 Authentication Unit (IC Card Type AU-201) 14 When "Card Authentication + Password" has been specified 1 Position the registered IC card on the authentication unit, and then type in the password. 2 Touch [Login] or press the [Access] key. The user is authenticated, and the Basic screen appears. 2 Note The notification beep sounds while scanning. The notification beep is canceled by touching [Login] or pressing the [Access] key to complete authentication. This is a normal operation of the device. If authentication fails many times, the authentication data may not be registered correctly. Therefore, register the user again. 14 Authentication Unit (IC Card Type AU-201) 14-24 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 14.2.4 ID & Print function Print jobs sent from a computer are saved in the ID & Print user box on this machine and can be printed after authentication is completed with IC card IDs. This is called the ID & Print function. In addition, documents saved in the ID & Print user box can be checked and specified to be printed from the control panel of this machine. 2 Note For details on the printer driver settings and Box mode functions, refer to the user manual included with this machine. ID & Print (For Windows) Specifying settings on the Configure tab 1 For Windows 2000/NT 4.0, click the [Start] button, point to "Settings", and then click "Printers". For Windows XP/Server 2003, click the [Start] button, and then click "Printers and Faxes". For Windows Vista/Server 2008, click the [Start] button, and then click "Control Panel", then "Hardware and Sound", then "Printers". For Windows 7/Server 2008 R2, click the [Start] button, and then click "Control panel", and "Devices and Printers". – If "Printers and Faxes" does not appear in the Start menu, open the Control Panel from the Start menu, select "Printers and Other Hardware", and then select "Printers and Faxes". – If Control Panel in Windows Vista/Server 2008 is displayed in the Classic view, double-click "Printers". – For Windows 7/Server 2008, if the control panel is in an icon view, click "Devices and Printers". 2 Right-click the icon of the installed printer, and then click "Properties". 3 Click the Configure tab. 4 Select "User Authentication" under "Device Option". 5 Select "Device" from the "Setting" drop-down list. 6 Select "ID & Print" under "Device Option". 7 Select "Allow" from the "Setting" drop-down list. 8 Click [Apply], and then click [OK]. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 14-25 Authentication Unit (IC Card Type AU-201) 14 Sending a print job 1 Open the data in the application, click [File], and then click [Print]. 2 Check that the printer name has been selected in "Printer Name" or "Select Printer". If the printer is not selected, click to select the printer. – The Print dialog box differs depending on the application. 3 Click [Preferences] (or [Properties]). 4 Click the Basic tab. 5 Click the [Authentication/Account Track] button. 14 Authentication Unit (IC Card Type AU-201) 14-26 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 6 Select "Recipient User", and then enter the user name and password. – If [User Authentication/Account Track] - [User Authentication Settings] - [Administrative Setting] - [ID & Print Settings] - "Public User" is set to "Save" in the Administrator Settings of the machine and the public user job is permitted, public user jobs are also saved in the [ID & Print User Box]. 7 Click [Verify] to check the user ID. 8 Click [OK]. – If the user name or the password is incorrect, type in the correct information. 9 Click the [OK] button. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 14-27 Authentication Unit (IC Card Type AU-201) 14 10 From the "Output Method" drop-down list, select "Print". – If [User Authentication/Account Track] - [User Authentication Settings] - [Administrative Setting] - [ID & Print Settings] - "ID & Print" is set to "ON" in the Administrator Settings of the machine, general print jobs are also saved in the [ID & Print User Box]. 11 Specify the desired settings, and then click [OK]. 12 Click [Apply], and then click [Print]. The print job is sent. 13 Position the registered IC card on the authentication unit. – Make sure that "Begin Printing" is selected. – To select the print job to be printed, touch [Screen Operation]. For details, refer to "Selecting the print job to be printed from the control panel" on page 14-32. The user is authenticated, and the print job is printed. 14 Authentication Unit (IC Card Type AU-201) 14-28 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) ID & Print (for Macintosh) Setting printer information 1 Open the "Print & Fax" dialog box (or "Printer Setup Utility"/"Print Center" dialog box.) – The "Print & Fax" dialog box can be opened from "System References" on the Apple menu (OS X 10.4/10.5/10.6). – The "Printer Setup Utility"/"Print Center" dialog box can be opened from "HDD" - "Applications" - "Utilities" (OSX 10.2/10.3). 2 Open the "Printer Info" dialog box. – For "Print & Fax" dialog box, click [Option & supply] (OSX 10.5/10.6) or [Printer Setup] (OSX 10.4). – For "Printer Setup Utility"/"Print Center" dialog box, select "Information" from the "Printer" menu. 3 Select "Installable Options". – For OSX 10.5/10.6, click [Driver]. – For OSX 10.2/10.3/10.4, select "Installable Options". 4 Click the "ID & Print" check box to put a check mark in it. 5 Click [Apply Changes], and then close the "Printer Info" dialog box. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 14-29 Authentication Unit (IC Card Type AU-201) 14 Sending a print job 1 Open the data in the application, click [File], and then click "Print". 2 Check that the printer name has been selected. – The Print dialog box differs depending on the application. 3 From the drop-down menu, select "Output Method". 4 Select the "User Authentication" check box. The User Authentication dialog box appears 14 Authentication Unit (IC Card Type AU-201) 14-30 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 5 Select "Recipient User", and then enter the user name and password. – If [User Authentication/Account Track] - [User Authentication Settings] - [Administrative Setting] - [ID & Print Settings] - "Public User" is set to "Save" in the Administrator Settings of the machine and the public user job is permitted, public user jobs are also saved in the [ID & Print User Box]. 6 Click the [OK] button. 7 From the "Output Method" drop-down list, select "Print". – If [User Authentication/Account Track] - [User Authentication Settings] - [Administrative Setting] - [ID & Print Settings] - "ID & Print" is set to "ON" in the Administrator Settings of the machine, general print jobs are also saved in the [ID & Print User Box]. 8 Specify the desired settings, and then click [Print]. The print job is sent. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 14-31 Authentication Unit (IC Card Type AU-201) 14 9 Print a print job. – "Begin Printing": The print job is printed. "Print & Access": The print job is printed, and the user is logged in to the Basic screen. "Access": The print job is not printed, and the user is logged in to the Basic screen. – Make sure that either "Begin Printing" or "Print & Access" is selected. – You can also select "Access" and select a print job to print. For details, refer to "Selecting the print job to be printed from the control panel" on page 14-32. – Place the finger you have registered on the authentication unit when 1-to-many authentication has been specified. – Enter the user name and place the finger you have registered on the authentication unit when 1-to- 1 authentication has been specified. The user is authenticated, and the print job is printed. 14 Authentication Unit (IC Card Type AU-201) 14-32 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) Selecting the print job to be printed from the control panel Follow the procedure described below to select the document to be printed from those saved in the ID & Print user box. 1 Touch [Screen Operation]. 2 Log in to the machine. – Place the IC card you have registered on the authentication unit when IC card authentication has been specified. – Place the IC card you have registered on the authentication unit and enter the password when IC card authentication + password has been specified. The user is authenticated, and the Basic screen appears. 3 Press the [User Box] key in the control panel. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 14-33 Authentication Unit (IC Card Type AU-201) 14 4 Touch [Use Document]. 5 Touch [System User Box]. 6 Touch [ID & Print User Box], and then touch [OK]. 14 Authentication Unit (IC Card Type AU-201) 14-34 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 7 Select the document to be printed. – Multiple documents can be selected. – To select all documents, touch [Select All]. – To cancel the selection of all documents, touch [Reset]. – To check various information, such as the date/time when the document was stored and the document name, touch [Detail View]. 8 Touch [Print] under "Action", and then touch [OK]. – To delete the document, touch [Delete]. – To check the document details, touch [Document Details]. – To cancel the operation, touch [Cancel]. The selected document is printed. 2 Note If authentication fails many times, the authentication data may not be registered correctly. Therefore, register the user again. 15 Appendix bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 15-3 Appendix 15 15 Appendix 15.1 Entering text The following procedure describes how to use the keyboard that appears in the touch panel for typing in the names of registered users and custom paper sizes. The keypad can also be used to type in numbers. Any of the following keyboards may appear. Example Screen for entering the name of a custom paper size Password input screen 15 Appendix 15-4 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) Touching [Shift] switches the keyboard display between lowercase letters (numbers) and uppercase letters (symbols). bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 15-5 Appendix 15 15.1.1 Enlarging the keyboard The keyboard can be displayed larger so that it easier to read. 1 While the keyboard is displayed, touch [Enlarge ON]. The keyboard is displayed enlarged. 2 To cancel the enlarged display and return the keyboard to its normal size, touch [Enlarge OFF] while the keyboard is displayed enlarged. 2 Note The keyboard is used in the same way, even when it is displayed enlarged. 15 Appendix 15-6 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 15.1.2 To type text % Touch the button for the desired character from the keyboard that appeared. – To type in uppercase letters or symbols, touch [Shift]. – Numbers can also be typed in with the keypad. The entered characters appear in the text box. 2 Note To revert to the setting when the keyboard was displayed, touch [Cancel]. To clear all entered text, press the [C] (clear) key. Some buttons may not appear, depending on the characters being entered. ! Detail To change a character in the entered text, touch and to move the cursor to the character to be changed, touch [Delete], and then type in the desired letter or number. 15.1.3 List of available characters Type Characters Alphanumeric characters/ symbols bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 15-7 Appendix 15 15.2 Glossary The words used in Copy mode are described below. Abbreviation ADF Automatic document feeder; Can be used to automatically scan the original ADU Automatic duplex unit; used to print automatically on both sides of paper. APS "Auto Paper Select" setting ATS Automatic paper-tray-switching feature (ATS = Auto Tray Switch) LCT Large capacity tray; can be loaded with a large amount of paper to feed it into the copier main body. A Auto Zoom Select this setting to automatically select the appropriate zoom ratio after an original is placed on the original glass or loaded into the ADF and the paper size is selected. Auto Paper Select Select this setting to detect the original placed on the original glass or loaded into the ADF, then automatically select paper of the same size if "e1.0" is selected or select the paper size appropriate for the specified zoom ratio. B Background Removal Select a setting to adjust the density of the background color of the original to one of nine levels. C Change Tray Settings Touch this button to specify a paper size or type not loaded in a paper tray or to copy on paper other than normal paper. Chapters Set this function to specify chapter title pages that must be printed on the front side of the paper when printing double-sided copies. Combine Select a setting to arrange reduced copies of multiple original pages on a single copy page. The settings for the number of pages that can be combined are "2 in 1", "4 in 1" and "8 in 1". Copy Protection Set this function to print hidden text in order to prevent improper copying. When an original printed with copy protection text is copied, the hidden text appears clearly repeated in all pages of the copies so that the reader knows that it is a copy. Cover Mode Set this function to add paper from the specified paper tray to the copies as a cover page. D Density Select a setting to adjust the density of the print image to one of nine levels. Duplex Select the setting to specify if the scanned original and the printed copy are printed on just one side or both sides. F Fold & Staple Set this function to fold the copies in half and staple them together at the center. Finishing Select from the settings that are available for sorting and finishing copies when they are fed into the finishing tray. 15 Appendix 15-8 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) G Group (Copy/Finishing) Select this setting to separate the copies of each page in the original. The specified number of copies of the second page is printed after all copies of the first page are finished. Group (reference permission) Use this feature to limit the addresses that each user can reference and to manage security. I Insert Image Set this function to later scan multiple images from the original glass and insert them at the desired locations in an original scanned with the ADF, then feed out all copies together. Insert Sheet Set this function to insert paper from the specified paper tray into the copies as chapter title pages. M Margin Select the setting for the position of the binding margin for the loaded original. Selecting the appropriate setting prevents the copy from being printed upside-down when making double-sided copies from singlesided original or when making single-sided copies from double-sided originals. Minimal Select this setting to produce a copy with the original image slightly reduced. Mixed Original Select this setting to detect the size of each original page and print a copy on paper of the appropriate size when an original with different page sizes is loaded together into the ADF. N Neg-/Pos. Reverse Set this function to copy the original with the light- and dark-colored areas or the colors (gradations) of the image inversed. O Offset Select this setting to separate copies that are fed out. OHP Interleave Set this function to insert paper between OHP that are being copied.This prevents OHP from sticking together. Original Type Select the setting for the image type of the original to better adjust the copy quality. Original Direction Select the setting for the orientation that the original is placed on the original glass or loaded into the ADF. P Paper Select settings for the type and size of paper to be printed on. Preview Print image can be checked as a preview image before printing. Proof Copy Press this key to print a single sample copy and stop the machine so that it can be checked before printing a large number of copies. This prevents copy errors from occurring in a large number of copies. Punch Select the setting to punch holes in the copies for filing. S Save in User Box Temporarily saves the job on the hard disk so that it can later be recalled and used again Separate Scan Scans an original exceeding the maximum 80 pages that can be loaded into the ADF by scanning the original in separate batches. The original can be scanned and treated as a single copy job. In addition, the scanning location can be switched between the original glass and the ADF during the scanning operation. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 15-9 Appendix 15 Sheet/Cover/Chapter Insert Select from the functions that are available to edit copies as desired Sort Select this setting to separate each set of the copies. The second copy set is printed after all of the first copy set is finished. Staple Select a setting to staple copies together. X XY Zoom Touch this button to use the keypad to specify the zoom ratio for producing an enlarged/reduced copy of the loaded original. Z Zoom Specify the zoom ratio of the copy. 15 Appendix 15-10 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 16 Index bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 16-3 Index 16 16 Index Symbols [Power] (auxiliary power) key 2-31 Numerics 1st Z-Fold Position Adjustment/2nd Z-Fold Position Adjustment 12-58 2in1 3-55 2-Position Staple Pitch Adjustment 12-62 4in1 3-55 8in1 3-55 A Accessibility 4-27 Account track 2-42 Account Track Settings 12-80 ADF 3-9, 7-31, 15-7 Administrator Settings 12-26 Administrator/Machine Setting 12-32 Authentication method 12-67 Authentication unit 2-45, 2-47 Authentication unit (biometric type) 2-45 Authentication unit (IC card type) 2-47 Auto Paper setting 3-36 Auto Reset Confirmation 4-33 Auto Zoom setting 3-39 Automatic panel reset 2-34 B Background Removal 3-61, 3-63 Basic screen 2-26 Binding Position 3-29 Biometric authentication 2-45 Book Copy 8-27 Booklet 8-47 Bypass tray 2-6, 2-55 C Call service representative 5-3 Center Staple & Fold 3-77, 3-79 Center Staple Position 12-45 Change Icon 12-24 Chapters 8-17 Check Job 4-3 Cleaning 10-3 Combined pages 3-55 Conserving energy 2-34, 2-35, 2-36 Consumables 9-3 Control panel 2-24, 2-29 Copier Settings 12-21, 12-37 Cover Sheet 8-6 Create One-Touch Destination 12-8 Create User Box 12-8 Current Jobs list 11-12 Custom Display Settings 12-19 Custom Size settings 7-14, 7-25 D Deleting jobs 11-8 Density 3-61, 3-62 Destination registration 12-8, 12-32 Double-sided copying 3-52 E Emptying hole-punch scrap boxes 9-18 Enlarge Display Mode Confirmation 4-35 Enlarge/Reduce settings 3-44 Entering text 15-3 Erase 8-50, 8-51, 8-53, 8-55 F Face Up 3-64, 3-69 Fax Settings 12-38 Fax/Scan Settings 12-23 Features 1-3 Finisher FS-524 2-12 Finisher FS-525 2-14 Finisher FS-610 2-16 Finishing 3-64 Folding 3-77 Full Size 3-40 Fusing unit 2-9 G Glossary 15-7 Glossy 3-61 Group 3-64, 3-67 H Half-Fold 3-77, 3-78 Half-Fold Position 12-47 Header/Footer 12-64 Help 4-22 I IC card authentication 2-47 Icons 2-28 Image Adjustment 8-44 Image Repeat 8-33 Increase Priority 11-17 Individual Zoom 3-45 Insert Image 8-14 Insert Sheet 8-10 Internal 2-8 Interrupt 4-15 16-4 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 16 Index J Job History list 11-13 Job List screen 11-3 K Key Repeat Start/Interval Time 4-29 L Large Capacity Unit LU-405 2-10 Large Capacity Unit LU-406 2-11 Left panel Job List 11-7 Lever M4 2-60 License Settings 12-41 Limiting Access to Destinations 12-8 Loading paper 2-50, 2-51, 2-52, 2-55 Low power mode 2-34 M Machine Configuration 2-3 Main messages and their remedies 5-47 Main power switch 2-31 Manual conventions 1-9 Message 10-9 Message Display Time 4-37 Meter Count 10-8 Minimal 3-43 Mixed Original 3-21, 15-8 Mode Memory 4-16, 4-20 N Neg./Pos. Reverse 8-26 Network Setting 12-36 Non-standard-sized paper 7-12 O Offset 3-64 OHP Interleave 8-3 One-Touch Destination/User Box Registration 12-32 Options 2-3 Original > Copy settings 3-50 Original Direction 3-26, 15-8 Original feeding 3-9 Original glass 3-10 Original orientation 1-10 Original Type 3-59, 15-8 Originals 7-31 Output Tray OT-505 2-22 Oversized paper 7-17 Oversized paper settings 7-27 P Page Margin 8-41 Paper misfeed 5-5 Paper misfeed indications 5-7 Paper storage 7-8 Paper take-up roller 2-50 Password Rules 12-85 Periodic maintenance 10-9 Post Inserter PI-504 2-21, 3-86, 5-39 Post Inserter Tray Size Adjustment 12-63 Power save 2-34, 2-35, 2-36 Prefix/Suffix Automatic Setting 12-38 Preview 4-9 Printer Settings 12-23, 12-37 Program Jobs 8-21 Proof Copy 4-6 Punch Horizontal Position Adjustment 12-53 Punch Kit PK-504/PK-505 2-12, 2-14, 2-15, 2-16 Punch Resist Loop Adjustment 12-56 Punch settings 3-64, 3-74 Punch Unit Horizontal Position Adjustment 12-55 Punch Unit Vertical Position Adjustment 12-51 Punch Vertical Position Adjustment 12-49 Q Queuing copy jobs 3-90 Quick copy screen 2-26 R Recall Copy Program 4-20 Replacing the staple cartridge 9-7 S Save in User Box 8-93 Security Settings 12-38 Selecting the output tray 3-68 Separate Scan 3-11 Set Zoom 3-48 Shift Tray SF-602 2-22 Simple troubleshooting 5-43 Single-sided copying 3-51 Sleep mode 2-35 Sort 3-64, 3-66 Sound Setting 4-38 Special Size settings 7-24 Stamp/Composition 8-56 Standard Size 1 settings 7-23 Staple cartridge 9-7 Staple settings 3-64, 3-71 Stored jobs 11-14, 11-15 System Auto Reset 2-34 System Auto Reset Confirmation 4-31 System Connection 12-38 System Settings 12-17, 12-26 T Tab Original Settings 3-24 Temporarily stopping 3-91 Text Enhancement 3-61 Text entry 15-3 Toner cartridge 9-3 Touch panel 2-26, 4-27 Transport lever 2-60 Tray 1 2-5, 2-50 Tray 2 2-5, 2-50 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 16-5 Index 16 Tray 3 2-5, 2-51 Tray 4 2-5, 2-51 Tri-Fold 3-77, 3-81 Tri-Fold Position Adjustment 12-60 Trouble code 5-3 Trouble shooting 5-3 U User authentication 2-38 User Authentication Setting 12-72 User Authentication/Account Track 12-33 User manuals 1-11 User Settings 12-17 Utility mode 12-3 W Warm-up 2-32 Weekly timer 2-36, 12-44 Wide Paper settings 7-17 X XY Zoom 3-41 Z Z Folding Unit ZU-604/ZU-605 2-19 Z-Fold 3-77, 3-83 Z-Folded Original 3-23 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 16-6 Index 16 Guide de l’utilisateur Opérations de numérisation avancée . bizhub 362/282/222 Table des matières-1 Table des matières 1 Introduction 1.1 Energy Star®..................................................................................... 1-4 Définition d'un produit ENERGY STAR®....................................... 1-4 1.2 Marques commerciales et marques déposées ............................. 1-5 Information de licence.................................................................... 1-5 OpenSSL Statement ...................................................................... 1-6 1.3 A propos de ce manuel .................................................................... 1-9 Structure du Guide......................................................................... 1-9 Notation.......................................................................................... 1-9 Images présentées....................................................................... 1-10 Précautions d'utilisation............................................................... 1-10 Fonctions ne pouvant pas être utilisées ...................................... 1-10 1.4 Guides de l'utilisateur..................................................................... 1-12 Guide de l'utilisateur [Opérations Copie] ..................................... 1-12 Guide de l'utilisateur [Opérations Scanner réseau]...................... 1-12 Guide de l'utilisateur [Opérations Boîte] ...................................... 1-12 Guide de l'utilisateur [Opérations Impression] ............................. 1-12 Guide de l'utilisateur [Opérations Numérisation avancée] (le présent manuel)....................................................................... 1-12 Guide de l'utilisateur [Opérations Fax]......................................... 1-13 1.5 Explication des conventions.......................................................... 1-14 Recommandations de sécurité .................................................... 1-14 Séquence d'actions ..................................................................... 1-14 Astuces ........................................................................................ 1-15 Repères de texte spéciaux .......................................................... 1-15 2 Fonctions 2.1 Télécopie par adresse IP ................................................................. 2-3 2.2 Scan vers PC..................................................................................... 2-4 2.3 Scanner IP ......................................................................................... 2-6 2.4 Relais IP............................................................................................. 2-7 2.5 PageScope Web Connection........................................................... 2-8 Table des matières-2 bizhub 362/282/222 3 Télécopie par adresse IP 3.1 Spécifier un destinataire avec un bouton de numérotation 1-touche ............................................................................................. 3-3 Sélectionner un bouton une touche................................................ 3-3 Spécifier un destinataire en appuyant sur un bouton de numérotation 1-touche ................................................................... 3-3 Saisir le numéro du bouton 1-touche ............................................. 3-5 Recherche d'un destinataire une touche........................................ 3-7 3.2 Entrer une adresse............................................................................ 3-9 Pour entrer une adresse ................................................................. 3-9 3.3 Spécifier la qualité de numérisation et le taux zoom................... 3-12 Qualité........................................................................................... 3-12 Pour sélectionner un paramètre de qualité................................... 3-13 Densité .......................................................................................... 3-14 Pour sélectionner un paramètre Densité ...................................... 3-14 Réglage du Format Original .......................................................... 3-15 3.4 Spécifier des fonctions supplémentaires...................................... 3-16 Spécifier les informations sur l'identifiant ..................................... 3-18 Spécifier la condition d'impression du rapport d'émission .......... 3-20 Spécifier une émission 2en1......................................................... 3-21 Spécifier les paramètres d'émission recto-verso ......................... 3-22 Spécifier la priorité d'émission...................................................... 3-23 Spécifier les paramètres d'émission horloge................................ 3-23 Spécifier le paramètre Tampon .................................................... 3-25 3.5 Si l'émission n'est pas arrivée à son terme .................................. 3-26 Consulter le rapport d'émission.................................................... 3-26 Réexpédition ................................................................................. 3-27 3.6 Recevoir une télécopie par adresse IP.......................................... 3-28 3.7 Ajouter un destinataire ................................................................... 3-29 Pour programmer un bouton de numérotation 1-touche ............. 3-31 Changer/supprimer un bouton de numérotation 1-touche........... 3-34 Copier un bouton 1-touche .......................................................... 3-35 Enregistrer/Editer/Supprimer le destinataire secondaire.............. 3-36 Donner un nom à un index............................................................ 3-37 Pour nommer un index ................................................................. 3-37 Enregistrer un programme de courrier électronique..................... 3-39 Pour enregistrer une Programme E-mail ...................................... 3-41 Changer/Effacer un Programme E-mail........................................ 3-44 bizhub 362/282/222 Table des matières-3 4 Opérations Scan vers PC 4.1 Avant d'enregistrer ........................................................................... 4-3 Installer Scanner IP Scanner sur l'ordinateur................................. 4-3 Vérifier les paramètres réseau........................................................ 4-3 4.2 Spécifier une destination avec un bouton de numérotation 1-touche .................................................................... 4-4 Sélectionner un bouton une touche............................................... 4-4 Spécifier un destinataire en appuyant sur un bouton de numérotation 1-touche ............................................................. 4-5 Saisir le numéro du bouton 1-touche ............................................ 4-7 Recherche d'un destinataire une touche ....................................... 4-9 4.3 Entrer une adresse ......................................................................... 4-11 Pour entrer une adresse............................................................... 4-11 4.4 Spécifier la qualité de numérisation et le taux zoom.................. 4-14 Qualité .......................................................................................... 4-14 Pour sélectionner un paramètre de qualité .................................. 4-15 Densité ......................................................................................... 4-16 Pour sélectionner un paramètre Densité...................................... 4-16 Réglage du Format Original ......................................................... 4-17 4.5 Spécifier des fonctions supplémentaires..................................... 4-18 Spécifier la condition d'impression du rapport d'émission ......... 4-20 Spécifier une émission 2en1........................................................ 4-21 Spécifier les paramètres d'émission recto-verso ........................ 4-22 Spécifier la priorité d'émission..................................................... 4-24 Spécifier les paramètres d'émission horloge............................... 4-25 Spécifier le paramètre Tampon.................................................... 4-26 Spécifier le nom du fichier ........................................................... 4-27 4.6 Si les données n'ont pas pu être enregistrées ............................ 4-28 Consulter le rapport d'émission................................................... 4-28 Réexpédition ................................................................................ 4-29 4.7 Enregistrer une destination ........................................................... 4-30 Programmer un bouton 1-touche ................................................ 4-30 Pour programmer un bouton 1-touche........................................ 4-32 Changer/supprimer un bouton de numérotation 1-touche.......... 4-35 Copier un bouton 1-touche.......................................................... 4-36 Enregistrer/Editer/Supprimer le destinataire secondaire ............. 4-37 Table des matières-4 bizhub 362/282/222 5 Scanner IP 5.1 Avant d'utiliser Scanner IP ............................................................... 5-3 Scanner IP et ImageReceiver ......................................................... 5-3 Utiliser un routeur téléphonique...................................................... 5-4 Utiliser un modem ou un adaptateur de terminal ........................... 5-4 Utiliser Windows XP Service Pack 2/Windows Vista...................... 5-4 Autoriser l'utilisation de ImageReceiver.......................................... 5-6 Conflits de ports ImageReceiver .................................................... 5-7 Emissions SSL ................................................................................ 5-8 Installation des certificats ............................................................. 5-10 5.2 Installer/désinstaller les utilitaires................................................. 5-13 Méthodes d'installation du ImageReceiver................................... 5-13 Installer les utilitaires..................................................................... 5-14 Désinstaller les utilitaires (pour Windows 2000/XP/Server 2003).......................................... 5-17 5.3 Opérations de scanner IP ............................................................... 5-19 Fenêtre principale ......................................................................... 5-19 Commandes disponibles .............................................................. 5-21 Boîte de dialogue Scanner Settings ............................................. 5-24 Boîte de dialogue Sort Settings (Paramètres de tri) (onglet Scanner) ............................................................................ 5-26 Boîte de dialogue Sort Settings (onglet RX document (Réception document)).................................................................. 5-27 Boîte de dialogue Sort Settings (onglet TX document (Emission document)) ................................................................... 5-28 Boîte de dialogue Divided Settings (Paramètres de division) ....... 5-30 Boîte de dialogue Receive Notify Settings ................................... 5-31 FenêtreVisionner ........................................................................... 5-33 Boîte de dialogue Printer Setting .................................................. 5-34 Boîte de dialogue Print Property................................................... 5-35 5.4 Opérations ImageReceiver............................................................. 5-37 Icône ImageReceiver .................................................................... 5-37 Commandes ImageReceiver......................................................... 5-38 Boîte de dialogue Automatic Print Settings.................................. 5-41 Boîte de dialogue Folder and Printer Settings.............................. 5-42 5.5 Enregistrer les boutons et les opérations de numérisation .................................................................................... 5-43 Fonctionnement général ............................................................... 5-43 Démarrer Scanner IP .................................................................... 5-43 Enregistrer un bouton de numérisation ........................................ 5-44 Numériser un document à l'aide des paramètres enregistrés...... 5-47 Visionner l'image numérisée ......................................................... 5-49 Spécifier l'impression automatique avec IP Scanner ................... 5-50 bizhub 362/282/222 Table des matières-5 Imprimer automatiquement avec Scanner IP .............................. 5-54 Spécifier l'impression automatique avec ImageReceiver ............ 5-55 Imprimer automatiquement avec un bouton de numérotation 1-Touche...................................................................................... 5-58 Quitter Scanner IP........................................................................ 5-58 5.6 Autres opérations ........................................................................... 5-59 Transférer un document reçu vers Scanner IP ............................ 5-59 Transférer vers Scanner IP........................................................... 5-60 6 Opérations Relais IP 6.1 Avant l'émission................................................................................ 6-3 Définir "Restreindre" sous "Passerelle émission" .......................... 6-3 Spécifier les paramètres des stations de relais ............................. 6-3 6.2 Spécifier un destinataire avec un bouton de numérotation 1-touche ............................................................................................ 6-4 Sélectionner un bouton une touche............................................... 6-4 Spécifier un destinataire en appuyant sur un bouton de numérotation 1-touche ............................................................. 6-5 Saisir le numéro du bouton 1-touche ............................................ 6-7 Recherche d'un destinataire une touche ....................................... 6-9 Spécifier la chaîne de numérotation ............................................ 6-11 6.3 Entrer un numéro de fax ................................................................ 6-12 Pour entrer un numéro de fax ...................................................... 6-12 6.4 Spécifier la qualité de numérisation et le taux zoom.................. 6-15 Qualité .......................................................................................... 6-15 Pour sélectionner un paramètre de qualité .................................. 6-16 Densité ......................................................................................... 6-17 Pour sélectionner un paramètre Densité...................................... 6-17 Réglage du Format Original ......................................................... 6-18 6.5 Spécifier des fonctions supplémentaires..................................... 6-19 Spécifier la condition d'impression du rapport d'émission ......... 6-21 Spécifier une émission 2en1........................................................ 6-22 Spécifier les paramètres d'émission recto-verso ........................ 6-23 Spécifier le paramètre Priorité émission ...................................... 6-25 Spécifier les paramètres d'émission horloge............................... 6-26 Spécifier le paramètre Tampon.................................................... 6-27 6.6 Si l'émission n'est pas arrivée à son terme ................................. 6-28 Consulter le rapport d'émission................................................... 6-28 Réexpédition ................................................................................ 6-29 6.7 Enregistrer un destinataire ............................................................ 6-30 Programmer un bouton 1-touche ................................................ 6-30 Pour programmer un bouton 1-touche........................................ 6-32 Table des matières-6 bizhub 362/282/222 Changer/supprimer un bouton de numérotation 1-touche........... 6-35 Copier un bouton 1-touche .......................................................... 6-36 Enregistrer/Editer/Supprimer le destinataire secondaire.............. 6-37 7 Spécifier les paramètres avec PageScope Web Connection 7.1 Paramètres que vous pouvez définir avec PageScope Web Connection......................................................................................... 7-3 Onglet Lecture (mode Utilisateur) ................................................... 7-3 Onglet Réseau (Mode Administrateur)............................................ 7-4 7.2 Utiliser PageScope Web Connection .............................................. 7-5 Configuration minimale requise ...................................................... 7-5 Accéder à PageScope Web Connection ........................................ 7-6 Si les réglages Authentification Utilisateur ont été appliqués......... 7-7 Si les paramètres Authentification Groupe ont été appliqués ........ 7-7 Structure des pages ....................................................................... 7-8 Connexion en mode Administrateur ............................................. 7-10 Cache du navigateur Internet ....................................................... 7-12 Avec Internet Explorer .................................................................. 7-12 Avec Netscape.............................................................................. 7-12 7.3 Enregistrement adresse 1-touche (mode Utilisateur).................. 7-13 Donner un nom à un index............................................................ 7-17 Enregistrer un destinataire 1-touche ............................................ 7-19 Enregistrer une adresse secondaire ............................................. 7-21 Pour enregistrer un destinataire secondaire................................. 7-22 Modifier les paramètres d'un destinataire 1-touche..................... 7-25 Supprimer un destinataire 1-touche ............................................. 7-27 7.4 Paramètres relais IP (mode Administrateur)................................. 7-29 Sélectionner la station de relais IP à utiliser ................................. 7-29 Pour sélectionner une station de relais......................................... 7-30 Enregistrer une station de relais IP ............................................... 7-32 Pour enregistrer une station de relais IP....................................... 7-33 8 Spécifier les paramètres de gestion 8.1 Paramètres disponibles .................................................................... 8-3 Paramètres pouvant être spécifiés depuis l'écran Gestion administrateur ................................................................................. 8-3 Liste des paramètres réseau requis................................................ 8-3 8.2 Paramètres relais IP.......................................................................... 8-6 Enregistrer une station de relais IP ................................................. 8-6 Pour enregistrer une station de relais IP......................................... 8-6 bizhub 362/282/222 Table des matières-7 Sélectionner une station de relais IP.............................................. 8-9 Spécifier le port de résultat de relais ........................................... 8-10 8.3 Spécifier les paramètres d'activation du logiciel (fonctions de l'appareil) ......................................................................................... 8-11 Paramètres de logiciel SW........................................................... 8-11 Pour spécifier un paramètre de commutation logicielle .............. 8-13 Spécifier les réglages pour limiter la numérotation et les émissions de radiodiffusion (mode 018)............................. 8-15 Spécifier les réglages de l'image sur le rapport de résultats (mode 023) ............................................................... 8-16 Spécifier les paramètres pour les émissions de récepteur vérifiées (mode 200) ..................................................................... 8-17 Spécifier l'identification de la télécopie directe et la télécopie par adresse IP (mode 351) ........................................... 8-19 Spécifier si les informations de l'identifiant sont ajoutées en cas de télécopie directe, d'exécution d'une opération de relais IP ou de transfert de documents reçus (mode 352) ........... 8-20 Spécifier l'écran par défaut pour l'introduction d'adresses (mode 366)................................................................. 8-21 Spécifier les paramètres des informations censées figurer sur le rapport pour la télécopie directe/les émissions par relais IP (mode 368) ..................................................................... 8-22 Spécifier la méthode de codage des émissions par relais IP (mode 381) ................................................................................... 8-23 Spécifier les paramètres relatifs aux résultats d'émission des émissions par relais IP (mode 382) .............................................. 8-24 Spécifier des paramètres pour limiter l'utilisation des modes de communication–1 (mode 475)...................................................... 8-26 Spécifier des paramètres pour limiter l'utilisation des modes de communication–2 (mode 476)...................................................... 8-28 Spécifier des paramètres pour limiter l'utilisation des modes de communication–3/Spécifier des restrictions pour l'enregistrement des adresses Fax et l'impression de rapports et spécifier le mode d'affichage des destinataires 1-Touche (mode 477).................... 8-30 Spécifier la méthode de suppression pour [Supp] dans les écrans de saisie (mode 478) ........................................................ 8-33 Spécifier les paramètres de limitation de l'authentification utilisateur aux seules fonctions de Numérisation (mode 479) ..... 8-34 9 Localisation de pannes 9.1 A l'apparition d'un certain écran..................................................... 9-3 9.2 Codes d'erreur .................................................................................. 9-4 Opérations Scan vers PC............................................................... 9-4 Opérations de scanner IP .............................................................. 9-5 Opérations relais IP........................................................................ 9-6 Table des matières-8 bizhub 362/282/222 9.3 Localisation de pannes..................................................................... 9-7 Télécopie par adresse IP ................................................................ 9-7 Opérations Scan vers PC ............................................................... 9-8 Opérations de scanner IP ............................................................... 9-9 Opérations de relais IP et autres .................................................. 9-15 10 Annexe 10.1 Caractéristiques .............................................................................. 10-3 Caractéristiques de télécopie par adresse IP............................... 10-3 Caractéristiques Scan vers PC..................................................... 10-3 Caractéristiques scanner IP.......................................................... 10-4 Caractéristiques de relais IP ......................................................... 10-4 10.2 Saisir du texte .................................................................................. 10-5 Pour taper du texte ....................................................................... 10-5 Liste des caractères disponibles .................................................. 10-6 10.3 Glossaire .......................................................................................... 10-7 10.4 Index ............................................................................................... 10-11 1 Introduction Introduction 1 bizhub 362/282/222 1-3 1 Introduction Nous vous remercions d'avoir porté votre choix sur cet appareil. Le présent guide de l'utilisateur renferme les détails des opérations requises pour l'utilisation des fonctions de numérisation avancée des bizhub 362, 282 et 222, les précautions d'emploi ainsi que les procédures de dépannage fondamentales. Avant d'utiliser ces appareils, il y a lieu de lire entièrement ce Guide de l'utilisateur pour assurer un fonctionnement correct et efficace de l'appareil. Après avoir lu ce Guide de l'utilisateur, rangez-le dans le logement du guide de manière à pouvoir vous y référer en cas de besoin lors de l'utilisation de la machine. Les illustrations contenues dans ce Guide peuvent représenter l'équipement réel de manière légèrement différente. 1 Introduction 1-4 bizhub 362/282/222 1.1 Energy Star® En tant que partenaires ENERGY STAR®, nous avons pu déterminer que cet appareil satisfait aux directives ENERGY STAR® en matière d'efficience énergétique. Définition d'un produit ENERGY STAR® Un produit ENERGY STAR® intègre une fonction spéciale qui lui permet de basculer automatiquement en "mode d'économie d'énergie" à l'issue d'une certaine période d'inactivité. Un produit ENERGY STAR® utilise l'énergie avec plus d'efficacité, vous permet d'économiser de l'argent sur vos factures d'électricité et contribue à protéger l'environnement. Introduction 1 bizhub 362/282/222 1-5 1.2 Marques commerciales et marques déposées KONICA MINOLTA, le logo KONICA MINOLTA et The essentials of imaging sont des marques déposées ou des marques de fabrique de KONICA MINOLTA HOLDINGS, INC. PageScope et bizhub sont des marques déposées ou des marques de fabrique de KONICA MINOLTA BUSINESS TECHNOLOGIES, INC. Netscape Communications, le logo Netscape Communications, Netscape Navigator, Netscape Communicator et Netscape sont des marques de fabrique de Netscape Communications Corporation. Compact-VJE Copyright 1986-2003 VACS Corp. RC4® est une marque déposée ou une marque commerciale de RSA Security Inc. aux USA et/ou dans d'autres pays. RSA® est une marque déposée ou une marque commerciale de RSA Security Inc. RSA BSAFE® est une marque déposée ou une marque commerciale de RSA Security Inc. aux USA et/ou dans d'autres pays. Information de licence Ce produit contient un logiciel cryptographique RSA BSAFE de RSA Security Inc. 1 Introduction 1-6 bizhub 362/282/222 OpenSSL Statement OpenSSL License Copyright © 1998-2000 The OpenSSL Project. All rights reserved. Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met: 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer. 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution. 3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display the following acknowledgment: "This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit. (http://www.openssl.org/)" 4. The names "OpenSSL Toolkit" and "OpenSSL Project" must not be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without prior written permission. For written permission, please contact opensslcore@ openssl.org. 5. Products derived from this software may not be called "OpenSSL" nor may "OpenSSL" appear in their names without prior written permission of the OpenSSL Project. 6. Redistributions of any form whatsoever must retain the following acknowledgment: "This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit (http://www.openssl.org/)" THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE OpenSSL PROJECT "AS IS" AND ANY EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE OpenSSL PROJECT OR ITS CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE. This product includes cryptographic software written by Eric Young (eay@crypt-Soft.com). This product includes software written by Tim Hudson (tjh@cryptsoft.com). Introduction 1 bizhub 362/282/222 1-7 Original SSLeay License Copyright © 1995-1998 Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com) All rights reserved. This package is an SSL implementation written by Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com). The implementation was written so as to conform with Netscape's SSL. This library is free for commercial and non-commercial use as long as the following conditions are adhered to. The following conditions apply to all code found in this distribution, be it the RC4, RSA, Ihash, DES, etc., code; not just the SSL code. The SSL documentation included with this distribution is covered by the same copyright terms except that the holder is Tim Hudson (tjh@cryptsoft.com). Copyright remains Eric Young's, and as such any Copyright notices in the code are not to be removed. If this package is used in a product, Eric Young should be given attribution as the author of the parts of the library used. This can be in the form of a textual message at program startup or in documentation (online or textual) provided with the package. Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met: 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer. 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution. 3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display the following acknowledgement: "This product includes cryptographic software written by Eric Young (eay@crypt-soft.com)" The word 'cryptographic' can be left out if the routines from the library being used are not cryptographic related. 4. If you include any Windows-specific code (or a derivative thereof) from the apps directory (application code) you must include an acknowledgement: "This product includes software written by Tim Hudson (tjh@cryptsoft.com)" THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY ERIC YOUNG "AS IS" AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT 1 Introduction 1-8 bizhub 362/282/222 (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE. The licence and distribution terms for any publicly available version or derivative of this code cannot be changed, i.e., this code cannot simply be copied and put under another distribution licence [including the GNU Public Licence.] All other product names mentioned are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective companies. Information carried in this manual including design and related materials, and software contained in the machine and software attached to the CD-ROM are valuable assets of NEC, NEC AccessTechnica, Ltd. and respective licensee(s). NEC, NEC AccessTechnica, Ltd. and the licensee shall reserve all rights to design, produce, copy, use and sell this manual, including the patents, copyrights, and other proprietary rights, except when such an action is permitted to be transferred to another company with a written consent. Introduction 1 bizhub 362/282/222 1-9 1.3 A propos de ce manuel Le présent Guide de l'utilisateur couvre les fonctions qui sont ajoutées lorsque le scanner est installé sur les bizhub 362, 282 et 222. Ce chapitre présente la structure du manuel et les règles de notation des noms de produit, etc. Ce manuel s'adresse aux utilisateurs qui comprennent les opérations de base des ordinateurs et de cette machine. Pour les procédures d'exploitation du système d'exploitation Windows ou Macintosh et des applications logicielles, veuillez vous référer aux manuels correspondants. Structure du Guide Ce Guide comprend les chapitres suivants. Chapitre 1 Introduction Chapitre 2 Fonctions Chapitre 3 Télécopie par adresse IP Chapitre 4 Opérations Scan vers PC Chapitre 5 Scanner IP Chapitre 6 Opérations Relais IP Chapitre 7 Spécifier les paramètres avec PageScope Web Connection Chapitre 8 Spécifier les paramètres de gestion Chapitre 9 Localisation de pannes Chapitre 10 Annexe Notation Nom de produit Notation dans le manuel bizhub 362/282/222 cette machine ou son périphérique ou 362/282/222 Contrôleur réseau interne Contrôleur d'imprimante Microsoft Windows NT 4.0 Windows NT 4.0 Microsoft Windows 2000 Windows 2000 Microsoft Windows XP Windows XP Microsoft Windows Vista Windows Vista Microsoft Windows Server 2003 Windows Server 2003 Microsoft Windows Server 2008 Windows Server 2008 Quand les systèmes d'exploitation ci-dessus sont mentionnés tous ensemble Windows NT 4.0/2000/XP 1 Introduction 1-10 bizhub 362/282/222 Images présentées De manière générale, les écrans tactiles et les fenêtres d'application qui figurent dans ce manuel indiquent que seul le scanner optionnel a été installé. Précautions d'utilisation Veuillez suivre les précautions mentionnées ci-dessous lors de l'utilisation de ces fonctions. - Etant donné la restriction de la garantie du respect de la vie privée lors des émissions par Internet et Intranet, nous recommandons d'envoyer les documents importants directement au destinataire en utilisant une ligne téléphonique normale. - Les appareils téléphoniques connectés à un réseau local ne peuvent pas être utilisés. - L'envoi d'une émission peut prendre quelque temps en raison du trafic Internet/Intranet. - En fonction des serveurs de courrier électronique, il se peut que vous ne puissiez pas envoyer des documents avec un nombre important de pages ou d'images. Fonctions ne pouvant pas être utilisées Les fonctions suivantes peuvent être utilisées avec des émissions de télécopie normales en utilisant une ligne téléphonique ordinaire, mais elles ne peuvent pas être utilisées si seul le scanner est installé. - Emission par lots - Réception d'appel sélectif - Emission d'appel sélectif - Emission de numérisation rapide - Emission du mot de passe - Copie à distance - Emissions de boîtes confidentielles - Inscription au bulletin - Composition mains libres - Interrogation à distance du bulletin - Réglage "Pas de réduction" 2 Remarque L'émission du mot de passe et la copie à distance peuvent être spécifiées dans l'opération, toutefois elles ne fonctionneront pas. Introduction 1 bizhub 362/282/222 1-11 Les fonctions suivantes peuvent être utilisées. - Réglages de la qualité - Réglages de la densité - Réglage du Format Original - Rapport d'émission - 2en1 - Emission recto-verso - Tampon (en option) - Informations relatives à l'identifiant* - Emission prioritaire - Émission différée - Emission rotative* *Fonctions pouvant être utilisées avec une opération de télécopie par Internet et par adresse IP 1 Introduction 1-12 bizhub 362/282/222 1.4 Guides de l'utilisateur Les Guides de l'utilisateur suivants ont été préparés pour cette machine. Guide de l'utilisateur [Opérations Copie] Ce manuel contient des détails sur les opérations de base et les procédures d'exploitation des différentes fonctions de copie. - Consulter ce Guide de l'utilisateur pour obtenir des détails sur les procédures d'exploitation des fonctions de copie, ainsi que des précautions relatives à l'installation/l'utilisation, la mise sous tension et hors tension de la machine, le chargement du papier et les opérations de dépannage comme la résolution des problèmes de serrage papier. Guide de l'utilisateur [Opérations Scanner réseau] Ce manuel contient des détails sur la définition des fonctions réseau pour l'équipement standard et sur l'utilisation des fonctions de numérisation. - Consulter ce Guide de l'utilisateur pour obtenir des détails sur les procédures d'exploitation relatives aux fonctions réseau et sur les opérations Scan vers E-mail, Scan vers FTP et Scan vers SMB et Fax Internet. Guide de l'utilisateur [Opérations Boîte] Ce manuel décrit en détail les procédures liées aux fonctions Boîte. - Consulter ce Guide de l'utilisateur pour obtenir des détails sur l'impression d'une épreuve ou d'un travail verrouillé et sur les options utilisant le disque dur en option, comme le routage et l'enregistrement des documents dans des boîtes. Guide de l'utilisateur [Opérations Impression] Ce Guide contient des détails sur les procédures d'exploitation utilisant le contrôleur d'imprimante intégré standard. - Pour plus de détails sur les fonctions d'impression, consulter le Guide de l'utilisateur (fichier PDF) sur le CD-ROM Utilisateur. Guide de l'utilisateur [Opérations Numérisation avancée] (le présent manuel) Ce Guide renferme les détails des procédures d'exécution des fonctions pouvant être utilisées lorsque le scanner optionnel est installé. - Consulter ce Guide de l'utilisateur pour plus de détails sur l'utilisation des opérations de la télécopie par adresse IP, relais IP et Scan vers PC et sur l'utilisation du scanner IP. Introduction 1 bizhub 362/282/222 1-13 Guide de l'utilisateur [Opérations Fax] Ce Guide décrit en détail les procédures liées aux fonctions Fax. - Consulter ce Guide de l'utilisateur pour obtenir des détails sur les procédures d'exploitation des fonctions Fax quand le kit Fax en option est installé. 1 Introduction 1-14 bizhub 362/282/222 1.5 Explication des conventions Les repères et mises en forme utilisés dans le présent manuel sont décrits ci-dessous. Recommandations de sécurité 6 DANGER Tout manquement au respect des instructions mises en évidence de cette manière risquent de causer des blessures graves voire mortelles dues à l'énergie électrique. % Observer tous les dangers afin de prévenir toute blessure. 7 AVERTISSEMENT Tout manquement au respect des instructions mises en valeur de cette manière peut entraîner des blessures graves ou des dommages matériels. % Observer tous les avertissements afin de prévenir toute blessure et garantir l'utilisation correcte du copieur. 7 ATTENTION Tout manquement au respect des instructions mises en valeur de cette manière peut entraîner des blessures légères ou des dommages matériels. % Observer toutes les mises en garde pour éviter les blessures et assurer l'utilisation en toute sécurité du copieur. Séquence d'actions 1 Le chiffre 1 ainsi formaté indique la première étape d'une séquence d'actions. 2 Les nombres suivants ainsi formatés indiquent les étapes successives d'une série d'actions. Une illustration insérée ici montre les opérations à exécuter. Introduction 1 bizhub 362/282/222 1-15 ? Le texte formaté de cette manière fournit une assistance supplémentaire. % Le texte formaté de cette manière décrit l'action censée garantir que les résultats souhaités sont atteints. Astuces 2 Remarque Le texte présenté de cette manière apporte des informations utiles pour l'utilisation en toute sécurité du copieur. 2 Rappel Le texte mis en évidence de cette manière contient des informations importantes (Rappel). ! Détails Le texte mis en évidence de cette manière contient des renvois à des informations plus détaillées. Repères de texte spéciaux Touche [Copie] Les noms des touches du panneau de contrôle apparaissent dans le format indiqué ci-dessus. REGLAGE MACHINE Les textes affichés se présentent sous la forme ci-dessus. 1 Introduction 1-16 bizhub 362/282/222 2 Fonctions Fonctions 2 bizhub 362/282/222 2-3 2 Fonctions 2.1 Télécopie par adresse IP Les données de numérisation sont envoyées par Intranet, sans passer par un serveur de courrier électronique réseau. Seule une machine de type identique à celui-ci est en mesure de recevoir les données et d'être réglée de manière à recevoir les fax émis par l'adresse IP. - Cette machine doit être raccordée à un réseau local et les paramètres réseau doivent être spécifiés. Pour plus de détails sur la spécification des paramètres réseau, voir le Guide de l'utilisateur [Opérations Scanner réseau]. Pour plus de détails sur les réglages réseau liés à cette machine, voir "Paramètres disponibles" à la page 8-3. - Si une destination est enregistrée à l'aide d'un bouton de numérotation 1-Touche, un document à transmettre peut être envoyé en appuyant simplement sur le bouton de numérotation 1-Touche. - Pour plus de détails, voir chapitre 3, "Télécopie par adresse IP" à la page 3-3. Intranet AdresseIP Terminal Fax (Même type d’unité que cette machine) 2 Fonctions 2-4 bizhub 362/282/222 2.2 Scan vers PC Les données de numérisation sont envoyées à l'ordinateur spécifié sur le réseau et enregistrées dans un dossier déjà configuré. Cela permet d'enregistrer des documents papier sous la forme de données électroniques par une simple activation de touche, ce même dans un environnement dans lequel aucun serveur de courrier électronique n'est utilisé. Si vous utilisez le scanner IP inclus et les utilitaires ImageReceiver (récepteur d'images), le dossier dans lequel les données sont censées être enregistrées doit être spécifié à l'avance sur l'ordinateur qui reçoit les données. Qui plus est et en fonction des réglages spécifiés dans le scanner IP, il est possible de créer un dossier portant le nom du bouton à touche unique où les données peuvent être enregistrées. - Le document est envoyé comme fichier image TIFF ou PDF. - Les fichiers image TIFF peuvent être visualisés sur Windows à l'aide de la visionneuse d'images Tiff incluse. - Les fichiers image PDF peuvent être visualisés à l'aide de Adobe Reader. - Un câble croisé peut être utilisé même dans un environnement sans réseau local pour connecter directement cette machine à l'ordinateur afin de pouvoir utiliser la fonction Scan vers PC. - S'il existe un serveur DHCP faisant partie du réseau, il se peut que cette fonction soit perturbée étant donné que les adresses IP sont automatiquement assignées à chaque ordinateur. Si tel est le cas, spécifier une adresse IP fixe pour l'ordinateur, ou alors utiliser le scanner IP pour enregistrer les données. - Cette machine doit être raccordée à un réseau local et les paramètres réseau doivent être spécifiés. Pour plus de détails sur la spécification des paramètres réseau, voir le Guide de l'utilisateur [Opérations Scanner réseau]. Pour plus de détails sur les réglages réseau liés à cette machine, voir "Paramètres disponibles" à la page 8-3. - Pour plus de détails, voir chapitre 4, "Opérations Scan vers PC" à la page 4-3. Fonctions 2 bizhub 362/282/222 2-5 Intranet Ordinateur client 2 Fonctions 2-6 bizhub 362/282/222 2.3 Scanner IP Les données de numérisation sont envoyées à l'ordinateur spécifié sur le réseau et les données sont enregistrées dans un dossier portant le même nom que le bouton de numérisation enregistré. Depuis l'ordinateur, enregistrer les paramètres de numérisation comme bouton de numérisation sur cette machine pour enregistrer les documents papier sous la forme de données électroniques en appuyant tout simplement sur le bouton de numérisation. - Le document est envoyé comme fichier image TIFF ou PDF. - Les fichiers image TIFF peuvent être visualisés sur Windows à l'aide de la visionneuse d'images Tiff incluse. - Les fichiers image PDF peuvent être visualisés à l'aide de Adobe Reader. - Un câble croisé peut être utilisé même dans un environnement sans réseau local pour connecter directement cette machine à l'ordinateur afin de pouvoir utiliser le scanner IP. - Cette machine doit être raccordée à un réseau local et les paramètres réseau doivent être spécifiés. Pour plus de détails sur la spécification des paramètres réseau, voir le Guide de l'utilisateur [Opérations Scanner réseau]. Pour plus de détails sur les réglages réseau liés à cette machine, voir "Paramètres disponibles" à la page 8-3. - Pour plus de détails, voir chapitre 5, "Scanner IP" à la page 5-3. - Les documents envoyés comme émission fax ou fax Internet peuvent également être transférés vers l'ordinateur spécifié dans le scanner IP par l'administrateur. Paramètres Scanner Ordinateur client Fonctions 2 bizhub 362/282/222 2-7 2.4 Relais IP Un fax est envoyé par une machine de relais connectée au réseau local. Si une machine de relais est connectée à une ligne téléphonique dans un réseau intranet, spécifier la machine de relais depuis les machines (cette machine) connectées au réseau local pour envoyer un fax en utilisant la ligne téléphonique. Les résultats de l'émission de fax relayée peuvent être vérifiés dans la machine à partir de laquelle le fax a été émis. - Cette machine doit être raccordée à un réseau local et les paramètres réseau doivent être spécifiés. Pour plus de détails sur la spécification des paramètres réseau, voir le Guide de l'utilisateur [Opérations Scanner réseau]. Pour plus de détails sur les réglages réseau liés à cette machine, voir "Paramètres disponibles" à la page 8-3. - Si une destination est enregistrée à l'aide d'un bouton de numérotation 1-touche, un document à transmettre peut être envoyé en appuyant simplement sur le bouton de numérotation 1-touche. - Pour plus de détails, voir chapitre 6, "Opérations Relais IP" à la page 6-3. Terminal Transmission de télécopie de télécopie Ligne Téléphonique Machine de relais Machine d'où part la commande 2 Fonctions 2-8 bizhub 362/282/222 2.5 PageScope Web Connection L'ordinateur peut être utilisé pour vérifier l'état d'émission/d'impression de la machine et si oui ou non la télécopie est imprimée. Différents éléments peuvent en outre être enregistrés, à l'exemple de boutons à touche unique. PageScope Web Connection dispose d'un mode pour les opérations exécutées par les utilisateurs communs et d'un mode pour celles exécutées par l'administrateur. - Cette machine doit être raccordée à un réseau local et les paramètres réseau doivent être spécifiés. Pour plus de détails sur la spécification des paramètres réseau, voir le Guide de l'utilisateur [Opérations Scanner réseau]. - Pour plus de détails, voir chapitre 7, "Spécifier les paramètres avec PageScope Web Connection" à la page 7-3. 3 Télécopie par adresse IP Télécopie par adresse IP 3 bizhub 362/282/222 3-3 3 Télécopie par adresse IP 3.1 Spécifier un destinataire avec un bouton de numérotation 1-touche Si l'adresse IP d'un destinataire est enregistrée à l'aide d'un bouton de numérotation 1-touche, les données peuvent être envoyées en appuyant simplement sur le bouton de numérotation 1-touche. Qui plus est, il est possible d'ajouter d'autres fonctions d'émission ou d'enregistrer un programme de courrier électronique. Pour plus de détails sur l'enregistrement d'un bouton de numérotation 1-touche ou un programme de courrier électronique, voir "Ajouter un destinataire" à la page 3-29. Sélectionner un bouton une touche Voici les différentes manières de sélectionner un bouton de numérotation 1-touche. Utilisez la méthode appropriée selon le nombre de destinataires et l'utilisation souhaitée. - Pression directe sur le bouton 1-touche - Saisir le numéro du bouton 1-touche - Chercher le nom d'un destinataire Spécifier un destinataire en appuyant sur un bouton de numérotation 1-touche 1 Placez les documents à numériser. 2 Appuyez sur la touche [Fax/Scanner]. – L'écran qui s'affiche après l'activation de la touche [Fax/Scanner] peut être spécifié à l'aide du paramètre "Ecran par défaut" de l'écran Choix utilisateur. Pour plus de détails, consulter le Guide de l'utilisateur [Opérations Copie]. 3 Appuyez sur [1-touche]. 3 Télécopie par adresse IP 3-4 bizhub 362/282/222 4 Sélectionnez l'index contenant le destinataire souhaité et appuyez sur le bouton de numérotation 1-Touche. – Avec le même bouton de numérotation 1-touche, vous pouvez spécifier plusieurs destinataires pour une émission simultanée. Il est possible de spécifier 300 destinataires au maximum à l'aide d'un seul bouton de numérotation 1-touche. – Pour sélectionner un index, appuyer sur l'onglet de l'index souhaité ou appuyez sur ou pour sélectionner un autre onglet. – Si des paramètres de commutation logicielle avaient été spécifiés pour empêcher les radiodiffusions, un fax ne peut pas être envoyé à plusieurs destinataires. Pour plus de détails sur les paramètres de commutation logicielle, voir "Spécifier les paramètres d'activation du logiciel (fonctions de l'appareil)" à la page 8-11. 5 Spécifier les paramètres appropriés dans l'onglet Qualité & réduc. conformément au document à envoyer. – Pour plus de détails, voir "Spécifier la qualité de numérisation et le taux zoom" à la page 3-12. 6 Spécifier les paramètres nécessaires dans l'onglet Menu. – Si le kit Fax en option est installé, spécifiez les paramètres nécessaires sur l'onglet de Menu FAX. – Pour plus de détails, voir "Spécifier des fonctions supplémentaires." à la page 3-16. 7 Appuyez sur la touche [Départ]. Télécopie par adresse IP 3 bizhub 362/282/222 3-5 Saisir le numéro du bouton 1-touche Un numéro est assigné à chaque bouton de numérotation 1-touche, comme illustré ci-dessous. Au lieu d'appuyer sur un bouton de numérotation 1-touche, la spécification du numéro du bouton de numérotation 1-touche permet de sélectionner rapidement un destinataire. 1 Placez les documents à numériser. 2 Appuyez sur la touche [Fax/Scanner]. 3 Appuyez sur la touche [#] sur le panneau de contrôle. Index 1 Index 36 3 Télécopie par adresse IP 3-6 bizhub 362/282/222 4 Entrer le numéro du bouton de numérotation 1-touche sur le clavier numérique. – Le bouton 1-touche spécifié s'affiche en vidéo inverse. – Avec le même bouton de numérotation 1-touche, vous pouvez spécifier plusieurs destinataires pour une émission simultanée. Il est possible de spécifier 300 destinataires au maximum à l'aide d'un seul bouton de numérotation 1-touche. – Si des paramètres de commutation logicielle avaient été spécifiés pour empêcher les radiodiffusions, un fax ne peut pas être envoyé à plusieurs destinataires. Pour plus de détails sur les paramètres de commutation logicielle, voir "Spécifier les paramètres d'activation du logiciel (fonctions de l'appareil)" à la page 8-11. 5 Spécifier les paramètres appropriés dans l'onglet Qualité & réduc. conformément au document à envoyer. – Pour plus de détails, voir "Spécifier la qualité de numérisation et le taux zoom" à la page 3-12. 6 Spécifier les paramètres nécessaires dans l'onglet Menu. – Si le kit Fax en option est installé, spécifiez les paramètres nécessaires sur l'onglet de Menu FAX. – Pour plus de détails, voir "Spécifier des fonctions supplémentaires." à la page 3-16. 7 Appuyez sur la touche [Départ]. Télécopie par adresse IP 3 bizhub 362/282/222 3-7 Recherche d'un destinataire une touche Il est possible de rechercher le nom d'un destinataire enregistré à l'aide d'un bouton de numérotation 1-touche dans le but de sélectionner le bouton de numérotation 1-touche. 1 Placez les documents à numériser. 2 Appuyez sur la touche [Fax/Scanner]. 3 Appuyez sur [Recherche]. – Si une recherche LDAP est possible, appuyez sur [Recherche LDAP] pour chercher plus loin. 4 Tapez le nom du destinataire, puis appuyez sur [OK]. L'écran qui s'affiche renferme la liste des boutons de numérotation 1-touche programmés avec le destinataire dont le nom commence par le nom entré. 3 Télécopie par adresse IP 3-8 bizhub 362/282/222 5 Appuyer sur le bouton de numérotation 1-touche souhaité pour le sélectionner. – Avec le même bouton de numérotation 1-touche, vous pouvez spécifier plusieurs destinataires pour une émission simultanée. Il est possible de spécifier 300 destinataires au maximum à l'aide d'un seul bouton de numérotation 1-touche. – Si des paramètres de commutation logicielle avaient été spécifiés pour empêcher les radiodiffusions, un fax ne peut pas être envoyé à plusieurs destinataires. Pour plus de détails sur les paramètres de commutation logicielle, voir "Spécifier les paramètres d'activation du logiciel (fonctions de l'appareil)" à la page 8-11. 6 Spécifier les paramètres appropriés dans l'onglet Qualité & réduc. conformément au document à envoyer. – Pour plus de détails, voir "Spécifier la qualité de numérisation et le taux zoom" à la page 3-12. 7 Spécifier les paramètres nécessaires dans l'onglet Menu. – Si le kit Fax en option est installé, spécifiez les paramètres nécessaires sur l'onglet de Menu FAX. – Pour plus de détails, voir "Spécifier des fonctions supplémentaires." à la page 3-16. 8 Appuyez sur la touche [Départ]. Télécopie par adresse IP 3 bizhub 362/282/222 3-9 3.2 Entrer une adresse L'adresse d'un destinataire non enregistré dans un bouton de numérotation 1-touche peut être entrée directement afin d'être spécifiée. 2 Remarque Si des paramètres de commutation logicielle avaient été spécifiés pour limiter la numérotation, il n'est pas possible d'envoyer un fax en tapant directement l'adresse. Pour plus de détails sur les paramètres de commutation logicielle, voir "Spécifier les paramètres d'activation du logiciel (fonctions de l'appareil)" à la page 8-11. Pour entrer une adresse 1 Placez les documents à numériser. 2 Appuyez sur la touche [Fax/Scanner]. 3 Appuyez sur [Entrée adresse]. 4 Sélectionnez le mode de communication. Appuyez sur [Changer mode comm.]. 3 Télécopie par adresse IP 3-10 bizhub 362/282/222 5 Appuyez sur [FaxInternet], ensuite sur [IP-TX] et sur [Entrée]. 6 Tapez l'adresse IP de la machine du destinataire. – Si un serveur DNS est spécifié à l'écran Paramètres réseau, il est possible d'entrer le nom de l'hôte. Appuyez sur [Hôte], puis entrez le nom de l'hôte – Pour changer l'adresse qui a été entrée, appuyez sur la touche [C] (effacer), et entrez l'adresse correcte. 7 Pour sélectionner le volume d'émission maximum et la méthode de codage, appuyez sur [Mode email]. 8 Sur l'écran Mode email, les paramètres qui peuvent être spécifiés sont les suivants. Sélectionnez les paramètres souhaités, et appuyez sur [Entrée]. – Taille Emission (max.) : spécifiez le format de document maximum pouvant être émis. Sélectionnez "Letter/Legal" or "11 × 17". – Qualité Emission (max.) : sélectionnez la résolution maximum pouvant être envoyée. Sélectionnez "200 ppp", "400 ppp" ou "600 ppp". – Méthode de codage : sélectionnez la méthode de codage des données à envoyer. Sélectionnez "MH", "MR" ou "MMR". Le volume des données par ordre croissant est le suivant : MMR, MR, MH. Télécopie par adresse IP 3 bizhub 362/282/222 3-11 9 Pour changer le numéro de port, appuyez sur [Port]. – Pour changer le numéro de port, appuyez sur la touche [C] (effacer), puis tapez le numéro du port sur le clavier numérique et appuyez sur [Entrée]. – Pour restaurer le réglage précédent, [Par Défaut]. 10 Spécifier les paramètres appropriés dans l'onglet Qualité & réduc. conformément au document à envoyer. – Pour plus de détails, voir "Spécifier la qualité de numérisation et le taux zoom" à la page 3-12. 11 Spécifier les paramètres nécessaires dans l'onglet Menu. – Si le kit Fax en option est installé, spécifiez les paramètres nécessaires sur l'onglet de Menu FAX. – Pour plus de détails, voir "Spécifier des fonctions supplémentaires." à la page 3-16. 12 Appuyez sur la touche [Départ]. 3 Télécopie par adresse IP 3-12 bizhub 362/282/222 3.3 Spécifier la qualité de numérisation et le taux zoom Appuyez sur [Qualité & réduc.] à l'écran qui s'affiche lorsque la touche [Fax/Scanner] est activée pour spécifier la qualité de l'image numérisée et le taux zoom. ! Détails Une fois l'émission terminée, les paramètres d'émission reviennent à leurs valeurs par défaut. Qualité Sélectionner la définition de numérisation (quantité de détails). Parmi les paramètres de définition disponibles, sélectionnez la définition appropriée en fonction du type de document en cours de numérisation. ! Détails Si des données sont envoyées avec le réglage "Texte/Photo", des motifs moirés peuvent apparaître sur certaines photos. Ce n'est pas signe de mauvais fonctionnement. Pour réduire cet effet moiré, envoyez les données avec le réglage "Photo" ou "Super Photo". Si vous aviez sélectionné une haute résolution afin d'envoyer une image claire, il se peut que le format des données image envoyées s'agrandisse et que le fournisseur ou le serveur n'autorise pas l'envoi des données. Vérifiez tout d'abord les restrictions de format concernant les données pouvant être envoyées. Réglage Description Standard Pour les documents contenant du texte normal (comme l'écriture manuscrite) Fin Super Fin Texte 600 dpi Pour les documents comportant des parties imprimées en petits caractères, comme les journaux ou des documents contenant des illustrations détaillées Texte/Photo Texte/Photo 600 dpi Pour les documents contenant du texte et des images avec des nuances de couleur (comme les photos) Photo Super Photo Photo 600 dpi Pour les documents avec des nuances de couleur, comme les photos Télécopie par adresse IP 3 bizhub 362/282/222 3-13 Pour sélectionner un paramètre de qualité 1 Appuyez sur [Qualité & réduc.]. 2 Appuyez sur [Qualité] et ensuite sur le bouton du paramètre de qualité voulu. – Pour sélectionner une résolution plus élevée, appuyez sur [600 dpi]. 3 Télécopie par adresse IP 3-14 bizhub 362/282/222 Densité Parmi les paramètres de définition disponibles, sélectionnez la définition appropriée en fonction du type de document en cours de numérisation. Pour sélectionner un paramètre Densité 1 Appuyez sur [Qualité & réduc.]. 2 Appuyez sur [Densité] et ensuite sur le bouton du paramètre de densité voulu. Réglage Description Clair Normal Foncé Pour les documents dont la couleur de fond est sombre, comme le journal et les bleus Pour les documents standard Pour les documents comportant du texte pâle ou de couleur Télécopie par adresse IP 3 bizhub 362/282/222 3-15 Réglage du Format Original Vous pouvez spécifier la zone numérisée comme format standard. De toutes manières, vous pouvez envoyer une portion d'un document grand format ou envoyer un document de format non standard comme format standard. 1 Appuyez sur [Qualité & réduc.]. 2 Appuyez sur [Réduction/Zone] et ensuite sur [Réglage format orig.]. 3 Sélectionnez le format de numérisation voulu et appuyez ensuite sur [Entrée]. – Appuyez sur [DétectAuto] pour sélectionner automatiquement le format le plus proche du format du document. Cependant, si le document est plus petit que le format Letter, c'est le format Letter qui sera sélectionné. 3 Télécopie par adresse IP 3-16 bizhub 362/282/222 3.4 Spécifier des fonctions supplémentaires. Appuyez sur [Menu] sur l'écran qui s'affiche lorsque la touche [Fax/Scanner] est activée pour ajouter les fonctions suivantes. 2 Remarque Si le kit Fax en option est installé, le [Menu] passe à [Menu Fax]. Fonction Description Param. 1 *(onglet Param. 1) Identification Sélectionnez les informations, comme le nom, le numéro de fax ou l'adresse de cette machine ou le nom du destinataire, imprimés sur le bord de la page. Pour plus de détails sur l'enregistrement des informations relatives à l'identifiant, voir le Guide de l'utilisateur [Opérations Scanner réseau]. Si un nom de destinataire est sélectionné, le nom du destinataire enregistré dans le bouton de numérotation 1-Touche est imprimé. Rapport Emission Sélectionnez les conditions d'impression du rapport d'émission. Par défaut : Sélectionnez ce réglage pour que le rapport soit imprimé dans les conditions fixées depuis l'écran Gestion Administrateur. OUI : sélectionnez ce paramètre pour imprimer le rapport quelque soit le résultat de l'émission. En cas d'échec de l'émission : Sélectionnez ce réglage pour n'imprimer le rapport qu'en cas d'échec de l'émission. NON : Sélectionnez ce paramètre pour ne pas imprimer le rapport quelque soit le résultat de l'émission. 2 en 1 Sélectionnez s'il faut ou non envoyer les données à l'aide de la fonction "2en1" (réduire de pages pour qu'elles passent sur une seule page). Emission Recto/Verso Sélectionnez s'il faut procéder ou non à une émission recto/verso. Vous pouvez aussi spécifier la position de la marge de reliure et l'orientation de la page. Emission Rotation Sélectionnez s'il faut oui ou non pivoter l'image numérisée conformément à l'orientation du papier de la machine de réception. Vous pouvez spécifier cette fonction lors de l'envoi dune image au format A4 avec une résolution de 200 dpi ou moins. Télécopie par adresse IP 3 bizhub 362/282/222 3-17 * Passe à ( ) si le kit Fax en option est installé. 2 Remarque Les paramètres et fonctions suivants sont sans effet, même si les réglages en ont été spécifiés. - "Sélection objet" sur l'onglet Réseau - "Adresse de réponse" sur l'onglet Réseau - "Nom fich." sur l'onglet Réseau - "Notification Email" sur l'onglet Réseau Param. 2 *(onglet Param. 2) Emission Priorité Sélectionnez si l'émission des données est ou non prioritaire sur les autres tâches. Param. TX horloge Spécifiez l'heure d'envoi du fax. Tampon Spécifiez si l'image numérisée est tamponnée pour indiquer qu'elle a été numérisée. Le document doit être chargé dans l'introducteur ADF. 2 Remarque Afin d'utiliser la fonction "Tampon", l'unité de pose de tampon en option doit être installée. Fonction Description 3 Télécopie par adresse IP 3-18 bizhub 362/282/222 Spécifier les informations sur l'identifiant Sélectionnez les informations, comme le nom, le numéro de fax ou l'adresse de cette machine ou le nom du destinataire, imprimés sur le bord de la page. 1 Appuyez sur [Menu]. – Si le kit Fax en option est installé, appuyez sur [Menu FAX]. 2 Appuyez sur [Identif. EM] sur l'onglet Param. 1. – Si le kit Fax en option est installé, appuyez sur [Identif. EM] sur l'onglet Param. 1. 3 Sélectionnez le type d'impression pour les informations d'émission et appuyez ensuite sur [Sélection Identifiant]. 4 Sélectionnez l'identifiant, et appuyez sur [Entrée]. DE : NEWYORK Des données d'image ont été jointes à l'e-mail. Télécopie par adresse IP 3 bizhub 362/282/222 3-19 5 Appuyez sur [Entrée]. 3 Télécopie par adresse IP 3-20 bizhub 362/282/222 Spécifier la condition d'impression du rapport d'émission Vous pouvez spécifier le conditions d'impression du rapport du résultat d'émission. Les conditions d'impression du rapport du résultat d'émission sont prédéfinies par les réglages de "Paramètres de rapport" de l'écran de Gestion "Administrateur" 1. Suivez la procédure décrite ci-dessous pour changer ces conditions. 1 Appuyez sur [Menu]. – Si le kit Fax en option est installé, appuyez sur [Menu FAX]. 2 Appuyez sur [Rapport EM] sur l'onglet Param. 1 – Si le kit Fax en option est installé, appuyez sur [Rapport EM] sur l'onglet Param. 1. 3 Spécifiez la condition d'impression souhaitée, et appuyez sur [Entrée]. Télécopie par adresse IP 3 bizhub 362/282/222 3-21 Spécifier une émission 2en1 1 Appuyez sur [Menu]. – Si le kit Fax en option est installé, appuyez sur [Menu FAX]. 2 Appuyez sur [2en1] sur l'onglet Param. 1. – Si le kit Fax en option est installé, appuyez sur [2en1] sur l'onglet Param. 1. Le bouton s'affiche en vidéo inverse. Pour annuler la fonction, appuyez à nouveau sur le bouton pour le désélectionner. 3 Télécopie par adresse IP 3-22 bizhub 362/282/222 Spécifier les paramètres d'émission recto-verso 1 Appuyez sur [Menu]. – Si le kit Fax en option est installé, appuyez sur [Menu FAX]. 2 Appuyez sur [Emiss. R/V] sur l'onglet Param. 1. – Si le kit Fax en option est installé, appuyez sur [Emiss. R/V] sur l'onglet Param. 1. 3 Sélectionnez la marge originale appropriée. – ReliéGauche : le document est numérisé avec une marge de reliure sur le côté gauche. – ReliéHaut : le document est numérisé avec une marge de reliure en haut. – Auto : La marge de reliure est réglée en fonction du sens de numérisation. 4 Appuyez sur [Sens Original]. 5 Sélectionnez l'orientation du document et appuyez sur [Entrée]. – Auto : Le bord long du document est automatiquement configuré comme position de reliure. 6 Appuyez sur [Entrée]. – Pour annuler la fonction, appuyez sur [Annul.]. ! Détails En cas de chargement d'un document recto-verso comportant des pages de différentes largeurs, nous recommandons de charger les pages d'orientation identique. Lors de la numérisation d'un document avec des pages d'orientations différentes, l'orientation des données d'image peut être erronée. Télécopie par adresse IP 3 bizhub 362/282/222 3-23 Spécifier la priorité d'émission 1 Appuyez sur [Menu]. – Si le kit Fax en option est installé, appuyez sur [Menu FAX]. 2 Appuyez sur [Priorité EM] sur l'onglet Param. 2. – Si le kit Fax en option est installé, appuyez sur [Priorité EM] sur l'onglet Param. 2. Le bouton s'affiche en vidéo inverse. Pour annuler la fonction, appuyez à nouveau sur le bouton pour le désélectionner. Spécifier les paramètres d'émission horloge 1 Appuyez sur [Menu]. – Si le kit Fax en option est installé, appuyez sur [Menu FAX]. 2 Appuyez sur [Param. TX horloge] sur l'onglet Param. 2. – Si le kit Fax en option est installé, appuyez sur [Param. TX horloge] sur l'onglet Param. 2. 3 Spécifiez l'heure d'envoi de l'émission. – Appuyez sur [Heure] ou [Minute], et tapez sur le clavier numérique l'heure désirée. 4 Appuyez sur [Entrée]. – Pour annuler la fonction, appuyez sur [NON]. 3 Télécopie par adresse IP 3-24 bizhub 362/282/222 2 Remarque Il est possible de spécifier jusqu'à 200 documents avec une émission horloge. Télécopie par adresse IP 3 bizhub 362/282/222 3-25 Spécifier le paramètre Tampon 1 Appuyez sur [Menu]. – Si le kit Fax en option est installé, appuyez sur [Menu FAX]. 2 Appuyez sur [Tampon] sur l'onglet Param. 2. – Si le kit Fax en option est installé, appuyez sur [Tampon] sur l'onglet Param. 2. 3 Sélectionnez la position du tamponnage, et appuyez sur [Entrée]. 3 Télécopie par adresse IP 3-26 bizhub 362/282/222 3.5 Si l'émission n'est pas arrivée à son terme Si l'émission ne s'est pas achevée correctement, un rapport du résultat de l'émission est imprimé. ! Détails Vous pouvez modifier le paramètre d'impression du rapport d'émission. Pour plus de détails, voir le guide de l'utilisateur [Opérations Scanner Réseau]. Consulter le rapport d'émission No. Rubrique Description 1 Date d'émission du rapport Montre la date d'émission du rapport. 2 Nom de l'identifiant Indique le nom et l'adresse de l'identifiant. 3 Informa tion sur l'émission Montre le numéro du document émis, la durée requise et le mode de communication. 2 4 1 3 5 Rouleau Télécopie par adresse IP 3 bizhub 362/282/222 3-27 Réexpédition 20 documents au maximum n'ayant pas pu être envoyés sont enregistrés pour une nouvelle tentative. 1 Appuyez sur [Liste Tâches], puis [Type], et sélectionnez le document qui n'a pas pu être envoyé. – Si [Réessayer] ou [Changer Destination] apparaissent à l'écran, le document peut être envoyé une nouvelle fois sans qu'une nouvelle numérisation ne s'impose. 2 Pour envoyer le document au même destinataire, appuyez sur [Réessayer]. – Pour envoyer le document à un destinataire différent, appuyez sur [Changer Destination]. 4 Résultats d'émission Indique les résultats de l'émission. L'une des informations suivantes peut s'afficher. OK : l'émission s'est déroulée avec succès. INTERR : l'émission a été interrompue. F.MEM : la mémoire est pleine. NG : l'émission s'est soldée par un échec. PT.DEL : l'émission vers certains destinataires a échoué. F.DATA : le volume des données a dépassé la limite admissible. IMG NG : la résolution d'émission était incorrecte et l'émission a donc été interrompue. Code d'erreur : pour plus de détails, voir "Codes d'erreur" à la page 9-4. 5 Image transmise Reproduit une partie de l'image émise. No. Rubrique Description 3 Télécopie par adresse IP 3-28 bizhub 362/282/222 3.6 Recevoir une télécopie par adresse IP Si une télécopie par adresse IP est envoyée à cette machine, la réception et l'impression en sont automatiques. Il faut tout d'abord spécifier l'adresse IP de cette machine sur l'écran Paramètres réseau. ! Détails La méthode de réception spécifiée sur l'écran Paramètres fax (affiché depuis l'écran Gestion administrateur 1) ne s'applique que si la télécopie est reçue par le biais d'une ligne téléphonique ordinaire. Ce paramètre ne s'applique pas dans le cas de la réception d'une télécopie par adresse IP. Télécopie par adresse IP 3 bizhub 362/282/222 3-29 3.7 Ajouter un destinataire Si un destinataire est enregistré avec un bouton de numérotation 1-touche, l'émission peut être envoyée facilement et avec précision. Deux types de destinataires peuvent être enregistrées sous un bouton de numérotation 1-touche : un destinataire principal et un destinataire secondaire, les données étant envoyées à cette dernière en cas d'échec de l'émission au destinataire principal. 2 Remarque Si le paramètre "Limiter Edition 1-Touche" de l'écran Mode Administrateur (affiché à partir de l'écran de Gestion administrateur 1) est réglé sur "Oui", si des paramètres de commutation logicielle avaient été spécifiés pour limiter l'enregistrement de boutons de numérotation 1-Touche à l'administrateur, ou si "Sécurité renforcée" est réglé sur "Oui", les boutons de numérotation 1-Touche peuvent seulement être enregistrés, édités ou supprimés en mode Administrateur. Pour plus de détails sur les réglages en mode Administrateur, se référer au guide de l'utilisateur [Opérations Fax]. Pour plus de détails sur les paramètres de commutation logicielle, voir "Spécifier les paramètres d'activation du logiciel (fonctions de l'appareil)" à la page 8-11. ! Détails Les modes de communication suivants peuvent être spécifiés pour la destination secondaire. - PC (E-mail) - PC (Scanner) - Internet FAX (Internet FAX) - Internet FAX (EM-IP) - Internet FAX (Relais IP) - FAX (G3) Le mode de communication peut être spécifié si le kit Fax, en option, est installé. 2 Remarque Certains modes de communication risquent de ne pas être disponibles, selon les réglages de la machine. Pour plus de détails, consultez l'administrateur. 3 Télécopie par adresse IP 3-30 bizhub 362/282/222 Vous pouvez spécifier les paramètres suivants. 2 Rappel Si la touche [Utilitaire/Compteur] est actionnée pour enregistrer des éléments et spécifier des paramètres, n'oubliez pas d'appuyer sur la touche [Réinitialisation] sur le panneau de contrôle après être retourné à l'écran d'accueil. Rubrique Description Nom destination à distance Tapez le nom du destinataire censé figurer sur le bouton de numérotation 1-Touche. Ce champ peut comporter 12 caractères maximum. Destination Saisissez l'adresse IP ou le nom d'hôte du destinataire. Taille Emission (max.) Spécifiez la taille maximum du document qui peut être émis. Sélectionnez "Letter/Legal" ou "11 e 17". Qualité Emission (max.) Sélectionnez la résolution maximum pour l'émission. Sélectionnez "200 ppp", "400 ppp" ou "600 ppp". Méthode de codage Sélectionnez la méthode de codage des données à envoyer. Sélectionnez "MH", "MR" ou "MMR". Le volume des données par ordre croissant est le suivant : MMR, MR, MH. Port Entrez le numéro du port (entre 1 et 65535). Télécopie par adresse IP 3 bizhub 362/282/222 3-31 Pour programmer un bouton de numérotation 1-touche 1 Appuyez sur la touche [Utilitaire/Compteur]. 2 Appuyez sur [Paramètres Utilis.]. 3 Appuyez sur [Entrée E-mail]. – Si le kit Fax en option est installé, appuyez sur [FAX]. 4 Appuyez sur [1-Touche]. 3 Télécopie par adresse IP 3-32 bizhub 362/282/222 5 Appuyez sur le bouton de numérotation 1-touche à programmer. – Appuyez sur un onglet d'index ou sur [Répertoire] et appuyez ensuite sur le bouton de numérotation 1-touche souhaité. – Si l'appareil est réglé pour autoriser les recherches LDAP, un écran s'affiche pour permettre la définition du bouton 1-Touche pour interdire ou autoriser la possibilité de découverte de l'adresse par une recherche LDAP. Pour ce bouton, sélectionnez "Non". 6 Tapez le nom du destinataire qui apparaîtra sur le bouton de numérotation 1-touche, et appuyez sur [Suite]. 7 Sélectionnez le mode de communication. Appuyez sur [FaxInternet], ensuite sur [IP-TX] et sur [Suite]. 8 Tapez l'adresse IP du destinataire. – Si un serveur DNS est spécifié à l'écran Paramètres réseau, il est possible d'entrer le nom de l'hôte. Appuyez sur [Nom Host], puis entrez le nom de l'hôte. – Pour changer l'adresse qui a été entrée, appuyez sur la touche [C] (effacer), et entrez l'adresse correcte. Télécopie par adresse IP 3 bizhub 362/282/222 3-33 9 Pour sélectionner le volume d'émission maximum et la méthode de codage, appuyez sur [Mode e-mail]. 10 Sur l'écran mode E-mail, les paramètres qui peuvent être spécifiés sont les suivants. Sélectionnez les paramètres souhaités, et appuyez sur [Entrée]. – Taille Emission (max.) : spécifiez le format de document maximum pouvant être émis. Sélectionnez "Letter/Legal" ou "11 e 17". – Qualité Emission (max.) : sélectionnez la résolution maximum pouvant être envoyée. Sélectionnez "200 ppp", "400 ppp" ou "600 ppp". – Méthode de codage : sélectionnez la méthode de codage des données à envoyer. Sélectionnez "MH", "MR" ou "MMR". Le volume des données par ordre croissant est le suivant : MMR, MR, MH. 11 Pour changer le numéro de port, appuyez sur [Port]. – Pour changer le numéro de port, appuyez sur la touche [C] (effacer), puis tapez le numéro du port sur le clavier numérique et appuyez sur [Entrée]. – Pour restaurer le réglage précédent, [Par Défaut]. 12 Appuyez sur [Suite]. 13 Vérifiez les informations à enregistrer, et appuyez sur [Entrée]. 14 Appuyez sur [Entrée] dans chacun des écrans jusqu'à ce que l'écran d'accueil s'affiche. 3 Télécopie par adresse IP 3-34 bizhub 362/282/222 Changer/supprimer un bouton de numérotation 1-touche 1 Exécutez les étapes 1 à 4 de la procédure décrite dans "Pour programmer un bouton 1-touche". 2 Appuyez sur le bouton de numérotation 1-touche que vous voulez modifier ou supprimer. 3 Appuyez sur le bouton dont vous voulez changer le réglage, puis procédez à la modification. – Pour supprimer le bouton de numérotation 1-touche, appuyez sur la touche [Supprime]. 4 Vérifiez les informations à enregistrer, et appuyez sur [Entrée]. – En cas de suppression, un message de confirmation s'affiche. Appuyez sur [Oui]. 5 Appuyez sur [Entrée] dans chacun des écrans jusqu'à ce que l'écran d'accueil s'affiche. Télécopie par adresse IP 3 bizhub 362/282/222 3-35 Copier un bouton 1-touche 1 Exécutez les étapes 1 à 4 de la procédure décrite dans "Pour programmer un bouton 1-touche". 2 Appuyez sur le bouton du destinataire 1-Touche à copier. 3 Appuyez sur [1-Touche] et ensuite sur [Copie 1-Touche]. 4 Appuyez sur le bouton sous lequel les paramètres de bouton de numérotation 1-touche sont censés être copiés. – Sélectionnez un bouton de numérotation 1-touche ne comportant encore aucun paramètre enregistré. – Pour désélectionner le bouton 1-touche de destination pour la copie, il suffit d'appuyer une nouvelle fois sur le bouton sélectionné. 5 Appuyez sur [Entrée] dans chacun des écrans jusqu'à ce que l'écran d'accueil s'affiche. 3 Télécopie par adresse IP 3-36 bizhub 362/282/222 Enregistrer/Editer/Supprimer le destinataire secondaire 1 Exécutez les étapes 1 à 4 de la procédure décrite dans "Pour programmer un bouton 1-touche". 2 Appuyez sur le bouton de numérotation 1-touche sur lequel un destinataire secondaire est censé être programmé. 3 Appuyez sur [1-Touche], puis [Enregistrement adresse secondaire]. 4 Entrez les informations relatives au destinataire secondaire, et appuyez sur [Entrée]. – Si une destination secondaire est déjà enregistrée, vérifiez les paramètres qui s'affichent et appuyez ensuite sur [Changer Paramètres] ou sur [Supprime]. – En cas de suppression, un message de confirmation s'affiche. Appuyez sur [Oui]. 5 Appuyez sur [Entrée] dans chacun des écrans jusqu'à ce que l'écran d'accueil s'affiche. Télécopie par adresse IP 3 bizhub 362/282/222 3-37 Donner un nom à un index Pour faciliter la recherche du bouton de numérotation 1-touche désiré, vous pouvez classer les boutons de numérotation 1-touche dans des index que vous appellerez par exemple, "Bureaux" ou "Clients". ! Détails Le nom d'index entré peut contenir huit caractères au maximum. Il est possible d'enregistrer 36 index et 15 boutons de numérotation 1-touche au maximum dans chaque index. Pour nommer un index 1 Exécutez les étapes 1 à 3 de la procédure décrite dans "Pour programmer un bouton 1-touche". 2 Appuyez sur [Index]. 3 Appuyez sur le bouton d'index à programmer. 3 Télécopie par adresse IP 3-38 bizhub 362/282/222 4 Tapez le nom d'index, et appuyez sur [Entrée]. 5 Appuyez sur [Entrée] dans chacun des écrans jusqu'à ce que l'écran d'accueil s'affiche. Télécopie par adresse IP 3 bizhub 362/282/222 3-39 Enregistrer un programme de courrier électronique Si les fonctions utilisées lors de l'émission sont enregistrées avec les informations relatives au destinataire, une émission peut avoir lieu avec les paramètres enregistrés en appuyant tout simplement sur un bouton. C'est ce que l'on appelle programmes de courrier électronique. Ceux-ci sont pratiques quand il s'agit d'envoyer une émission à un destinataire spécifique et avec des paramètres spécifiques. ! Détails Il est possible d'enregistrer jusqu'à 30 programmes mail. Cependant, le nombre total de boutons de numérotation 1-touche et de programmes de courrier électronique est limité à 540. Il est possible d'enregistrer jusqu'à 300 destinataires avec un seul programme de courrier électronique. Certaines fonctions ou paramètres enregistrés dans un programme de courrier électronique peuvent être sans effet en fonction de l'opération effectuée, comme l'illustre le tableau ci-dessous. Pour plus de détails sur chaque fonction et paramètre, voir la page appropriée. o : A un effet + : A un effet sous certaines conditions - : N'a aucun effet Fonctionnement Fonction/Paramètre Télécopie par adresse IP Scan vers PC Relais IP Qualité o o o Densité o o o Zoom - - - Réglage du Format Original o o o Sélection Identification o - o Rapport EM o o o 2en1 o o o Emiss. R/V o o o Emission Rotation + - + Priorité EM o o o Param. TX horloge o o o Tampon + + + Sélection Objet - - - Adresse E-mail de réponse - - - Nom du fichier - o - Notification email - - - 3 Télécopie par adresse IP 3-40 bizhub 362/282/222 ! Détails Pour plus de détails sur les paramètres des opérations suivantes, voir le Guide de l'utilisateur [Opérations Scanner réseau]. - Scan vers Email - Scan vers FTP - Scan vers SMB - Scan vers HDD - Fax Internet 2 Remarque Afin d'utiliser la fonction "Tampon", l'unité de pose de tampon en option doit être installée. 2 Rappel Si la touche [Utilitaire/Compteur] est actionnée pour enregistrer des éléments et spécifier des paramètres, n'oubliez pas d'appuyer sur la touche [Réinitialisation] sur le panneau de contrôle après être retourné à l'écran d'accueil. Télécopie par adresse IP 3 bizhub 362/282/222 3-41 Pour enregistrer une Programme E-mail 1 Appuyez sur la touche [Utilitaire/Compteur]. 2 Appuyez sur [Paramètres Utilis.]. 3 Appuyez sur [Entrée E-mail]. – Si le kit Fax en option est installé, appuyez sur [FAX]. 4 Appuyez sur [Prog. Mail]. – Si le kit Fax en option, a été installé, appuyez sur [Prog. FAX]. 3 Télécopie par adresse IP 3-42 bizhub 362/282/222 5 Appuyez sur le bouton de numérotation 1-touche à programmer. – Appuyez sur un onglet d'index ou sur [Répertoire] et appuyez ensuite sur le bouton de numérotation 1-touche souhaité. 6 Tapez le programme qui apparaîtra sur le bouton de numérotation 1-touche, et appuyez sur [Suite]. – Le nom de programme peut comporter jusqu'à 12 caractères. – Si le kit Fax en option est installé, appuyez sur [Suite] pour afficher un écran et y sélectionner un programme. Sélectionnez le programme désiré et appuyez sur [Suite]. 7 Spécifiez de destinataire. – Pour spécifier un destinataire avec un bouton de numérotation 1-touche, appuyez sur [1-Touche], appuyez sur le bouton de numérotation 1-touche pour sélectionner un destinataire, et appuyez sur [Entrée]. – Pour rechercher un bouton 1-touche, appuyez sur [Recherche], spécifiez le destinataire, et appuyez sur [Entrée]. – Si aucun destinataire n'est à enregistrer, appuyez sur [Aucune destination]. 8 Appuyez sur [Suite]. Télécopie par adresse IP 3 bizhub 362/282/222 3-43 9 Appuyez sur [Param.Transmission]. 10 Spécifiez les fonctions à enregistrer. – Appuyez sur [Qualité] pour spécifier les paramètres de "Qualité", "Densité", "Zoom" et "Réglage format orig.". – Appuyez sur [Menu 1] pour spécifier les paramètres pour "Identif. EM", "Rapport EM", "Priorité EM", "Param. TX horloge", "2en1", "Emiss. R/V", "Rotation EM" et "Tampon". – Appuyez sur [Menu 2] pour spécifier les paramètres "Objet", "Adresse E-mail de réponse", "Nom fich.", et "Notification E-mail". 11 Appuyez sur [Entrée]. 12 Vérifiez les informations à enregistrer, et appuyez sur [Entrée]. 13 Appuyez sur [Entrée] dans chacun des écrans jusqu'à ce que l'écran d'accueil s'affiche. 3 Télécopie par adresse IP 3-44 bizhub 362/282/222 Changer/Effacer un Programme E-mail 1 Exécutez les étapes 1 à 4 de la procédure décrite dans "Enregistrer un programme de courrier électronique". 2 Appuyez sur le bouton 1-touche du programme de courrier électronique que vous voulez modifier ou supprimer. – Appuyez sur un onglet d'index ou sur [Répertoire] et appuyez ensuite sur le bouton de numérotation 1-touche souhaité. 3 Appuyez sur le bouton dont vous voulez changer le réglage, puis procédez à la modification. Pour effacer le Programme E-mail, appuyez sur [Supprime]. 4 Vérifiez les informations à enregistrer, et appuyez sur [Entrée]. – En cas de suppression, un message de confirmation s'affiche. Appuyez sur [Oui]. 5 Appuyez sur [Entrée] dans chacun des écrans jusqu'à ce que l'écran d'accueil s'affiche. 4 Opérations Scan vers PC Opérations Scan vers PC 4 bizhub 362/282/222 4-3 4 Opérations Scan vers PC 4.1 Avant d'enregistrer Exécutez les opérations suivantes avant d'utiliser la fonction Scan vers PC. Installer Scanner IP Scanner sur l'ordinateur Lorsque Scanner IP est installé, deux utilitaires (scanner IP et ImageReceiver) sont installés. Lorsque vous redémarrez l'ordinateur après l'installation des utilitaires, ImageReceiver est lancé automatiquement et son icône s'affiche dans la barre des tâches de Windows. Lors de l'exécution d'une opération Scan vers PC, assurez-vous que ImageReceiver a démarré normalement. L'icône du ImageReceiver s'affiche dans la barre des tâches de Windows pendant son exécution. ! Détails Si ImageReceiver ne démarre pas, cliquez sur "Démarrer" pour le lancer, allez sur "Programmes" (ou "Tous les programmes"), ensuite "Scanner IP" et cliquez ensuite sur "ImageReceiver". Vérifier les paramètres réseau S'il existe un serveur DHCP faisant partie du réseau, il se peut que les données ne soient pas envoyées correctement étant donné que les adresses IP sont automatiquement assignées à chaque ordinateur. Si tel est le cas, spécifiez une adresse IP fixe pour l'ordinateur, ou alors utiliser Scanner IP. ! Détails Pour plus de détails sur l'installation et l'utilisation du scanner IP et la vérification de l'image numérisée, voir chapitre 5 "Scanner IP" à la page 5-3. 4 Opérations Scan vers PC 4-4 bizhub 362/282/222 4.2 Spécifier une destination avec un bouton de numérotation 1-touche Si l'adresse IP d'un ordinateur est enregistrée à l'aide d'un bouton de numérotation 1-touche, les données peuvent être enregistrées sur l'ordinateur en appuyant simplement sur le bouton de numérotation 1-touche. Qui plus est, il est possible d'ajouter d'autres fonctions d'émission ou d'enregistrer un programme de courrier électronique. ! Détails Pour plus de détails sur l'enregistrement d'un bouton de numérotation 1-touche, voir "Enregistrer une destination" à la page 4-30. Pour plus de détails sur l'enregistrement d'un programme de courrier électronique, voir "Enregistrer un programme de courrier électronique" à la page 3-39. Sélectionner un bouton une touche Voici les différentes manières de sélectionner un bouton de numérotation 1-touche. Utilisez la méthode appropriée selon le nombre de destinations et l'utilisation souhaitée. - Pression directe sur le bouton 1-touche - Saisir le numéro du bouton 1-touche - Chercher le nom de la destination Opérations Scan vers PC 4 bizhub 362/282/222 4-5 Spécifier un destinataire en appuyant sur un bouton de numérotation 1-touche 1 Placez les documents à numériser. 2 Appuyez sur la touche [Fax/Scanner]. – L'écran qui s'affiche après l'activation de la touche [Fax/Scanner] peut être spécifié à l'aide du paramètre "Ecran par défaut" de l'écran Choix utilisateur. Pour plus de détails, consulter le Guide de l'utilisateur [Opérations Copie]. 3 Appuyez sur [1-touche]. 4 Sélectionnez l'index contenant le destinataire souhaité et appuyez sur le bouton de numérotation 1-Touche. – Pour sélectionner un index, appuyer sur l'onglet de l'index souhaité ou appuyez sur ou pour sélectionner un autre onglet. – Pour plus de détails sur la modification des noms d'index, voir "Donner un nom à un index" à la page 3-37. – Avec le même bouton de numérotation 1-touche, vous pouvez spécifier plusieurs destinataires pour une émission simultanée. Il est possible de spécifier 300 destinataires au maximum à l'aide d'un seul bouton de numérotation 1-touche. – Si des paramètres de commutation logicielle avaient été spécifiés pour empêcher les radiodiffusions, un fax ne peut pas être envoyé à plusieurs destinataires. Pour plus de détails sur les paramètres de commutation logicielle, voir "Spécifier les paramètres d'activation du logiciel (fonctions de l'appareil)" à la page 8-11. 4 Opérations Scan vers PC 4-6 bizhub 362/282/222 5 Spécifier les paramètres appropriés dans l'onglet Qualité & réduc. conformément au document à envoyer. – Pour plus de détails, voir "Spécifier la qualité de numérisation et le taux zoom" à la page 4-14. 6 Spécifier les paramètres nécessaires dans l'onglet Menu. – Si le kit Fax en option est installé, spécifiez les paramètres nécessaires sur l'onglet de Menu FAX. – Pour plus de détails, voir "Spécifier des fonctions supplémentaires." à la page 4-18. 7 Appuyez sur la touche [Départ]. Opérations Scan vers PC 4 bizhub 362/282/222 4-7 Saisir le numéro du bouton 1-touche Un numéro est assigné à chaque bouton de numérotation 1-touche, comme illustré ci-dessous. Au lieu d'appuyer sur un bouton de numérotation 1-touche, la spécification du numéro du bouton de numérotation 1-touche permet de sélectionner rapidement un destinataire. 1 Placez les documents à numériser. 2 Appuyez sur la touche [Fax/Scanner]. 3 Appuyez sur la touche [#] sur le panneau de contrôle. Index 1 Index 36 4 Opérations Scan vers PC 4-8 bizhub 362/282/222 4 Entrer le numéro du bouton de numérotation 1-touche sur le clavier numérique. – Le bouton 1-touche spécifié s'affiche en vidéo inverse. – Avec le même bouton de numérotation 1-touche, vous pouvez spécifier plusieurs destinataires pour une émission simultanée. Il est possible de spécifier 300 destinataires au maximum à l'aide d'un seul bouton de numérotation 1-touche. – Si des paramètres de commutation logicielle avaient été spécifiés pour empêcher les radiodiffusions, un fax ne peut pas être envoyé à plusieurs destinataires. Pour plus de détails sur les paramètres de commutation logicielle, voir "Spécifier les paramètres d'activation du logiciel (fonctions de l'appareil)" à la page 8-11. 5 Spécifier les paramètres appropriés dans l'onglet Qualité & réduc. conformément au document à envoyer. – Pour plus de détails, voir "Spécifier la qualité de numérisation et le taux zoom" à la page 4-14. 6 Spécifier les paramètres nécessaires dans l'onglet Menu. – Si le kit Fax en option est installé, spécifiez les paramètres nécessaires sur l'onglet de Menu FAX. – Pour plus de détails, voir "Spécifier des fonctions supplémentaires." à la page 4-18. 7 Appuyez sur la touche [Départ]. Opérations Scan vers PC 4 bizhub 362/282/222 4-9 Recherche d'un destinataire une touche Il est possible de rechercher le nom d'un destinataire enregistré à l'aide d'un bouton de numérotation 1-touche dans le but de sélectionner le bouton de numérotation 1-touche. 1 Placez les documents à numériser. 2 Appuyez sur la touche [Fax/Scanner]. 3 Appuyez sur [Recherche]. – Si une recherche LDAP est possible, appuyez sur [Recherche LDAP] pour chercher plus loin. 4 Tapez le nom du destinataire, puis appuyez sur [OK]. L'écran qui s'affiche renferme la liste des boutons de numérotation 1-touche programmés avec le destinataire dont le nom commence par le nom entré. 5 Appuyer sur le bouton de numérotation 1-touche souhaité pour le sélectionner. – Avec le même bouton de numérotation 1-touche, vous pouvez spécifier plusieurs destinataires pour une émission simultanée. Il est possible de spécifier 300 destinataires au maximum à l'aide d'un seul bouton de numérotation 1-touche. 4 Opérations Scan vers PC 4-10 bizhub 362/282/222 – Si des paramètres de commutation logicielle avaient été spécifiés pour empêcher les radiodiffusions, un fax ne peut pas être envoyé à plusieurs destinataires. Pour plus de détails sur les paramètres de commutation logicielle, voir "Spécifier les paramètres d'activation du logiciel (fonctions de l'appareil)" à la page 8-11. 6 Spécifier les paramètres appropriés dans l'onglet Qualité & réduc. conformément au document à envoyer. – Pour plus de détails, voir "Spécifier la qualité de numérisation et le taux zoom" à la page 4-14. 7 Spécifier les paramètres nécessaires dans l'onglet Menu. – Si le kit Fax en option est installé, spécifiez les paramètres nécessaires sur l'onglet de Menu FAX. – Pour plus de détails, voir "Spécifier des fonctions supplémentaires." à la page 4-18. 8 Appuyez sur la touche [Départ]. Opérations Scan vers PC 4 bizhub 362/282/222 4-11 4.3 Entrer une adresse L'adresse d'un destinataire non enregistré dans un bouton de numérotation 1-touche peut être entrée directement afin d'être spécifiée. 2 Remarque Si des paramètres de commutation logicielle avaient été spécifiés pour limiter la numérotation, il n'est pas possible d'enregistrer des données en tapant directement l'adresse. Pour plus de détails sur les paramètres de commutation logicielle, voir "Spécifier les paramètres d'activation du logiciel (fonctions de l'appareil)" à la page 8-11. Pour entrer une adresse 1 Placez les documents à numériser. 2 Appuyez sur la touche [Fax/Scanner]. 3 Appuyez sur [Entrée adresse]. 4 Sélectionnez le mode de communication. Appuyez sur [Changer mode comm]. 4 Opérations Scan vers PC 4-12 bizhub 362/282/222 5 Appuyez sur [PC], ensuite sur [Scanner] et sur [Entrée]. 6 Tapez l'adresse IP de la machine où les données doivent être enregistrées. – Si un serveur DNS est spécifié à l'écran Paramètres réseau, il est possible d'entrer le nom de l'hôte. Appuyez sur [Hôte], puis entrez le nom de l'hôte – Pour changer l'adresse qui a été entrée, appuyez sur la touche [C] (effacer), et entrez l'adresse correcte. 7 Pour sélectionner le format de fichier et la méthode de codage, appuyez sur [Mode Scan]. 8 Sur l'écran Mode numérisation, les paramètres qui peuvent être spécifiés sont les suivants. Sélectionnez les paramètres souhaités, et appuyez sur [Entrée]. – Type de fichier: sélectionnez soit "TIFF" soit "PDF". – Méthode de codage Sélectionnez la méthode de codage ("MH", MR ou "MMR") des données à envoyer. La quantité des données est moindre avec la méthode de codage MMR qu'avec la méthode MH. Opérations Scan vers PC 4 bizhub 362/282/222 4-13 9 Pour changer le numéro de port, appuyez sur [Port]. – Pour changer le numéro de port, appuyez sur la touche [C] (effacer), puis tapez le numéro du port sur le clavier numérique et appuyez sur [Entrée]. – Pour restaurer le réglage précédent, [Par Défaut]. 10 Spécifier les paramètres appropriés dans l'onglet Qualité & réduc. conformément au document à envoyer. – Pour plus de détails, voir "Spécifier la qualité de numérisation et le taux zoom" à la page 4-14. 11 Spécifier les paramètres nécessaires dans l'onglet Menu. – Si le kit Fax en option est installé, spécifiez les paramètres nécessaires sur l'onglet de Menu FAX. – Pour plus de détails, voir "Spécifier des fonctions supplémentaires." à la page 4-18. 12 Appuyez sur la touche [Départ]. 4 Opérations Scan vers PC 4-14 bizhub 362/282/222 4.4 Spécifier la qualité de numérisation et le taux zoom Appuyez sur [Qualité & réduc.] à l'écran qui s'affiche lorsque la touche [Fax/Scanner] est activée pour spécifier la qualité de l'image numérisée et le taux zoom. ! Détails Une fois l'émission terminée, les paramètres d'émission reviennent à leurs valeurs par défaut. Qualité Sélectionner la définition de numérisation (quantité de détails). Parmi les paramètres de définition disponibles, sélectionnez la définition appropriée en fonction du type de document en cours de numérisation. ! Détails Si des données sont envoyées avec le réglage "Texte/Photo", des motifs moirés peuvent apparaître sur certaines photos. Ce n'est pas signe de mauvais fonctionnement. Pour réduire cet effet moiré, envoyez les données avec le réglage "Photo" ou "Super Photo". Si vous aviez sélectionné une haute résolution afin d'envoyer une image claire, il se peut que le format des données image envoyées s'agrandisse et que le fournisseur ou le serveur n'autorise pas l'envoi des données. Vérifiez tout d'abord les restrictions de format concernant les données pouvant être envoyées. Réglage Description Standard Pour les documents contenant du texte normal (comme l'écriture manuscrite) Fin Super Fin Texte 600 dpi Pour les documents comportant des parties imprimées en petits caractères, comme les journaux ou des documents contenant des illustrations détaillées Texte/Photo Texte/Photo 600 dpi Pour les documents contenant du texte et des images avec des nuances de couleur (comme les photos) Photo Super Photo Photo 600 dpi Pour les documents avec des nuances de couleur, comme les photos Opérations Scan vers PC 4 bizhub 362/282/222 4-15 Pour sélectionner un paramètre de qualité 1 Appuyez sur [Qualité & réduc.]. 2 Appuyez sur [Qualité] et ensuite sur le bouton du paramètre de qualité voulu. – Pour sélectionner une résolution plus élevée, appuyez sur [600 dpi]. 4 Opérations Scan vers PC 4-16 bizhub 362/282/222 Densité Parmi les paramètres de définition disponibles, sélectionnez la définition appropriée en fonction du type de document en cours de numérisation. ! Détails Si vous sélectionnez "Texte 600 dpi" ou "Texte & Photo 600 dpi", vous pouvez régler la densité sur l'un des trois niveaux suivants : "Clair", "Normal", ou "Foncé". Pour sélectionner un paramètre Densité 1 Appuyez sur [Qualité & réduc.]. 2 Appuyez sur [Densité] et ensuite sur le bouton du paramètre de densité voulu. Réglage Description Clair Normal Foncé Pour les documents dont la couleur de fond est sombre, comme le journal et les bleus Pour les documents standard Pour les documents comportant du texte pâle ou de couleur Opérations Scan vers PC 4 bizhub 362/282/222 4-17 Réglage du Format Original Vous pouvez spécifier la zone numérisée comme format standard. De toutes manières, vous pouvez envoyer une portion d'un document grand format ou envoyer un document de format non standard comme format standard. 1 Appuyez sur [Qualité & réduc.]. 2 Appuyez sur [Réduction/Zone] et ensuite sur [Réglage format orig.]. 3 Sélectionnez le format de numérisation voulu et appuyez ensuite sur [Entrée]. – Appuyez sur [DétectAuto] pour sélectionner automatiquement le format le plus proche du format du document. Cependant, si le document est plus petit que le format Letter, c'est le format Letter qui sera sélectionné. 4 Opérations Scan vers PC 4-18 bizhub 362/282/222 4.5 Spécifier des fonctions supplémentaires. Appuyez sur [Menu] sur l'écran qui s'affiche lorsque la touche [Fax/Scanner] est activée pour ajouter les fonctions suivantes. 2 Remarque Si le kit Fax en option est installé, le [Menu] passe à [Menu Fax]. * Passe à ( ) si le kit Fax en option est installé. Fonction Description Param. 1 *(onglet Param. 1) Rapport Emission Sélectionnez les conditions d'impression du rapport d'émission. Par défaut : Sélectionnez ce réglage pour que le rapport soit imprimé dans les conditions fixées depuis l'écran Gestion Administrateur. OUI : sélectionnez ce paramètre pour imprimer le rapport quelque soit le résultat de l'émission. En cas d'échec de l'émission : Sélectionnez ce réglage pour n'imprimer le rapport qu'en cas d'échec de l'émission. NON : Sélectionnez ce paramètre pour ne pas imprimer le rapport quelque soit le résultat de l'émission. 2 en 1 Sélectionnez s'il faut ou non envoyer les données à l'aide de la fonction "2en1" (réduire de pages pour qu'elles passent sur une seule page). Emission Recto/Verso Sélectionnez s'il faut procéder ou non à une émission recto/verso. Vous pouvez aussi spécifier la position de la marge de reliure et l'orientation de la page. Param. 2 *(onglet Param. 2) Emission Priorité Sélectionnez si l'émission des données est ou non prioritaire sur les autres tâches. Param. TX horloge Spécifiez l'heure d'envoi du fax. Tampon Spécifiez si l'image numérisée est tamponnée pour indiquer qu'elle a été numérisée. Le document doit être chargé dans l'introducteur ADF. 2 Remarque Afin d'utiliser la fonction "Tampon", l'unité de pose de tampon en option doit être installée. Réseau *(Rés.) Nom du fichier Vous pouvez spécifier le nom du fichier de données enregistré. Ce champ peut comporter 16 caractères maximum. Opérations Scan vers PC 4 bizhub 362/282/222 4-19 2 Remarque Les paramètres et fonctions suivants sont sans effet, même si les réglages en ont été spécifiés. - "Identif. EM" sur l'onglet Param. 1 - "Rotation Em" sur l'onglet Param. 1 - "Sélection objet" sur l'onglet Réseau - "Adresse de réponse" sur l'onglet Réseau - "Notification Email" sur l'onglet Réseau 4 Opérations Scan vers PC 4-20 bizhub 362/282/222 Spécifier la condition d'impression du rapport d'émission Vous pouvez spécifier le conditions d'impression du rapport du résultat d'émission. Les conditions d'impression du rapport du résultat d'émission sont prédéfinies par les réglages de "Paramètres de rapport" de l'écran de Gestion "Administrateur" 1. Suivez la procédure décrite ci-dessous pour changer ces conditions. 1 Appuyez sur [Menu]. – Si le kit Fax en option est installé, appuyez sur [Menu FAX]. 2 Appuyez sur [Rapport EM] sur l'onglet Param. 1 – Si le kit Fax en option est installé, appuyez sur [Rapport EM] sur l'onglet Param. 1. 3 Spécifiez la condition d'impression souhaitée, et appuyez sur [Entrée]. Opérations Scan vers PC 4 bizhub 362/282/222 4-21 Spécifier une émission 2en1 1 Appuyez sur [Menu]. – Si le kit Fax en option est installé, appuyez sur [Menu FAX]. 2 Appuyez sur [2en1] sur l'onglet Param. 1. – Si le kit Fax en option est installé, appuyez sur [2en1] sur l'onglet Param. 1. Le bouton s'affiche en vidéo inverse. Pour annuler la fonction, appuyez à nouveau sur le bouton pour le désélectionner. 4 Opérations Scan vers PC 4-22 bizhub 362/282/222 Spécifier les paramètres d'émission recto-verso 1 Appuyez sur [Menu]. – Si le kit Fax en option est installé, appuyez sur [Menu FAX]. 2 Appuyez sur [Emiss. R/V] sur l'onglet Param. 1. – Si le kit Fax en option est installé, appuyez sur [Emiss. R/V] sur l'onglet Param. 1. 3 Sélectionnez la marge originale appropriée. – ReliéGauche : Le document est numérisé avec une marge de reliure sur le côté gauche. – ReliéHaut :Le document est numérisé avec une marge de reliure en haut. – Auto : La marge de reliure est réglée en fonction du sens de numérisation. 4 Appuyez sur [Sens Original]. 5 Sélectionnez l'orientation du document et appuyez sur [Entrée]. – Auto : Le bord long du document est automatiquement configuré comme position de reliure. 6 Appuyez sur [Entrée]. – Pour annuler la fonction, appuyez sur [NON]. Opérations Scan vers PC 4 bizhub 362/282/222 4-23 ! Détails En cas de chargement d'un document recto-verso comportant des pages de différentes largeurs, nous recommandons de charger les pages d'orientation identique. Lors de la numérisation d'un document avec des pages d'orientations différentes, l'orientation des données d'image peut être erronée. 4 Opérations Scan vers PC 4-24 bizhub 362/282/222 Spécifier la priorité d'émission 1 Appuyez sur [Menu]. – Si le kit Fax en option est installé, appuyez sur [Menu FAX]. 2 Appuyez sur [Priorité EM] sur l'onglet Param. 2. – Si le kit Fax en option est installé, appuyez sur [Priorité EM] sur l'onglet Param. 2. Le bouton s'affiche en vidéo inverse. Pour annuler la fonction, appuyez à nouveau sur le bouton pour le désélectionner. Opérations Scan vers PC 4 bizhub 362/282/222 4-25 Spécifier les paramètres d'émission horloge 1 Appuyez sur [Menu]. – Si le kit Fax en option est installé, appuyez sur [Menu FAX]. 2 Appuyez sur [Param. TX horloge] sur l'onglet Param. 2. – Si le kit Fax en option est installé, appuyez sur [Param TX horloge] sur l'onglet Param. 2 3 Spécifiez l'heure d'envoi de l'émission. – Appuyez sur [Heure] ou [Minute], et tapez sur le clavier numérique l'heure désirée. 4 Appuyez sur [Entrée]. – Pour annuler la fonction, appuyez sur [NON]. 2 Remarque Il est possible de spécifier jusqu'à 200 documents avec une émission horloge. 4 Opérations Scan vers PC 4-26 bizhub 362/282/222 Spécifier le paramètre Tampon 1 Appuyez sur [Menu]. – Si le kit Fax en option est installé, appuyez sur [Menu FAX]. 2 Appuyez sur [Tampon] sur l'onglet Param. 2. – Si le kit Fax en option est installé, appuyez sur [Tampon] sur l'onglet Param. 2. 3 Sélectionnez la position du tamponnage, et appuyez sur [Entrée]. Opérations Scan vers PC 4 bizhub 362/282/222 4-27 Spécifier le nom du fichier Vous pouvez spécifier le nom du fichier de données joint à un message électronique. Ce champ peut comporter 16 caractères maximum. 1 Appuyez sur [Menu]. – Si le kit Fax en option est installé, appuyez sur [Menu FAX]. 2 Appuyez sur [Nom fich.] sur l'onglet Réseau. – Si le kit Fax en option est installé, appuyez sur [Nom fich.] sur l'onglet Rés. 3 Tapez le Nom de fichier, et appuyez sur [Entrée]. – Ce n'est pas nécessaire de taper l'extension de fichier. – Pour annuler le réglage, appuyez sur [NON]. 4 Opérations Scan vers PC 4-28 bizhub 362/282/222 4.6 Si les données n'ont pas pu être enregistrées Si l'émission ne s'est pas achevée correctement, un rapport du résultat de l'émission est imprimé. ! Détails Vous pouvez modifier le paramètre d'impression du rapport d'émission. Pour plus de détails, voir le guide de l'utilisateur [Opérations Scanner Réseau]. Consulter le rapport d'émission 2 4 1 3 5 Rouleau No. Rubrique Description 1 Date d'émission du rapport Montre la date d'émission du rapport. 2 Nom de l'identifiant Indique le nom et l'adresse de l'identifiant. 3 Information sur l'émission Montre le numéro du document émis, la durée requise et le mode de communication. Opérations Scan vers PC 4 bizhub 362/282/222 4-29 Réexpédition 20 documents au maximum n'ayant pas pu être envoyés sont enregistrés pour une nouvelle tentative. 1 Appuyez sur [Liste Tâches], puis [Type], et sélectionnez le document qui n'a pas pu être envoyé. – Si [Réessayer] ou [Changer Destination] apparaissent à l'écran, le document peut être envoyé une nouvelle fois sans qu'une nouvelle numérisation ne s'impose. 2 Pour envoyer le document au même destinataire, appuyez sur [Réessayer]. – Pour envoyer le document à un destinataire différent, appuyez sur [Changer Destination]. 4 Résultats d'émission Indique les résultats de l'émission. L'une des informations suivantes peut s'afficher. OK : l'émission s'est déroulée avec succès. INTERR : l'émission a été interrompue. F.MEM : la mémoire est pleine. NG : l'émission s'est soldée par un échec. PT.DEL : l'émission vers certains destinataires a échoué. F.DATA : Le volume des données a dépassé la limite admissible. IMG NG : La résolution d'émission était incorrecte et l'émission a donc été interrompue. Code d'erreur : Pour plus de détails, voir "Codes d'erreur" à la page 9-4. 5 Image transmise Reproduit une partie de l'image émise. No. Rubrique Description 4 Opérations Scan vers PC 4-30 bizhub 362/282/222 4.7 Enregistrer une destination Programmer un bouton 1-touche Si un destinataire est enregistré avec un bouton de numérotation 1-touche, l'émission peut être envoyée facilement et avec précision. Deux types de destinataires peuvent être enregistrées sous un bouton de numérotation 1-touche : un destinataire principal et un destinataire secondaire, les données étant envoyées à cette dernière en cas d'échec de l'émission au destinataire principal. 2 Remarque Si le paramètre "Limiter Edition 1-Touche" de l'écran Mode Administrateur (affiché à partir de l'écran de Gestion administrateur 1) est réglé sur "Oui", si des paramètres de commutation logicielle avaient été spécifiés pour limiter l'enregistrement de boutons de numérotation 1-Touche à l'administrateur, ou si "Sécurité renforcée" est réglé sur "Oui", les boutons de numérotation 1-Touche peuvent seulement être enregistrés, édités ou supprimés en mode Administrateur. Pour plus de détails sur les réglages en mode Administrateur, se référer au guide de l'utilisateur [Opérations Fax]. Pour plus de détails sur les paramètres de commutation logicielle, voir "Spécifier les paramètres d'activation du logiciel (fonctions de l'appareil)" à la page 8-11. ! Détails Les modes de communication suivants peuvent être spécifiés pour la destination secondaire. - PC (E-mail) - PC (Scanner) - Internet FAX (Internet FAX) - Internet FAX (EM-IP) - Internet FAX (Relais IP) - FAX (G3) Le mode de communication peut être spécifié si le kit Fax, en option, est installé. 2 Remarque Certains modes de communication risquent de ne pas être disponibles, selon les réglages de la machine. Pour plus de détails, consultez l'administrateur. Opérations Scan vers PC 4 bizhub 362/282/222 4-31 Vous pouvez spécifier les paramètres suivants. 2 Rappel Si la touche [Utilitaire/Compteur] est actionnée pour enregistrer des éléments et spécifier des paramètres, n'oubliez pas d'appuyer sur la touche [Réinitialisation] sur le panneau de contrôle après être retourné à l'écran d'accueil. Rubrique Description Nom destination à distance Tapez le nom du destinataire censé figurer sur le bouton de numérotation 1-Touche. Ce champ peut comporter 12 caractères maximum. Exemple : Tokyo br Destination Tapez l'adresse IP de l'ordinateur où les données doivent être enregistrées. Port Entrez le numéro du port (entre 1 et 65535). Type de fichier Sélectionnez le format "TIFF" ou "PDF") du fichier à envoyer. Méthode de codage Sélectionnez la méthode de codage des données à envoyer. Sélectionnez "MH" ou "MMR". La quantité des données est moindre avec la méthode de codage MMR qu'avec la méthode MH. 4 Opérations Scan vers PC 4-32 bizhub 362/282/222 Pour programmer un bouton 1-touche 1 Appuyez sur la touche [Utilitaire/Compteur]. 2 Appuyez sur [Paramètres Utilis.]. 3 Appuyez sur [Entrée E-mail]. – Si le kit Fax en option est installé, appuyez sur [FAX]. 4 Appuyez sur [1-touche]. Opérations Scan vers PC 4 bizhub 362/282/222 4-33 5 Appuyez sur le bouton de numérotation 1-touche à programmer. – Appuyez sur un onglet d'index ou sur [Répertoire] et appuyez ensuite sur le bouton de numérotation 1-touche souhaité. – Si l'appareil est réglé pour autoriser les recherches LDAP, un écran s'affiche pour permettre la définition du bouton 1-Touche pour interdire ou autoriser la possibilité de découverte de l'adresse par une recherche LDAP. Pour ce bouton, sélectionnez "Non". 6 Tapez le nom du destinataire qui apparaîtra sur le bouton de numérotation 1-touche, et appuyez sur [Suite]. 7 Sélectionnez le mode de communication. Appuyez sur [PC], ensuite sur [Scanner] et sur [Suite]. 8 Entrez l'adresse IP de la machine où les données sont censées être enregistrées, puis appuyez sur [Suivant]. – Si un serveur DNS est spécifié à l'écran Paramètres réseau, il est possible d'entrer le nom de l'hôte. Appuyez sur [Nom Host], puis entrez le nom de l'hôte. – Pour changer l'adresse qui a été entrée, appuyez sur la touche [C] (effacer), et entrez l'adresse correcte. 4 Opérations Scan vers PC 4-34 bizhub 362/282/222 9 Pour sélectionner le format de fichier et la méthode de codage, appuyez sur [Mode Scan]. 10 Sur l'écran Mode numérisation, les paramètres qui peuvent être spécifiés sont les suivants. Sélectionnez les paramètres souhaités, et appuyez sur [Entrée]. – Type de fichier: sélectionnez soit "TIFF" soit "PDF". – Méthode de codage : sélectionnez la méthode de codage ("MH", MR ou "MMR") des données à envoyer. La quantité des données est moindre avec la méthode de codage MMR qu'avec la méthode MH. 11 Pour changer le numéro de port, appuyez sur [Port]. – Pour changer le numéro de port, appuyez sur la touche [C] (effacer), puis tapez le numéro du port sur le clavier numérique et appuyez sur [Entrée]. – Pour restaurer le réglage précédent, [Par Défaut]. 12 Appuyez sur [Suite]. 13 Vérifiez les informations à enregistrer, et appuyez sur [Entrée]. 14 Appuyez sur [Entrée] dans chacun des écrans jusqu'à ce que l'écran d'accueil s'affiche. Opérations Scan vers PC 4 bizhub 362/282/222 4-35 Changer/supprimer un bouton de numérotation 1-touche 1 Exécutez les étapes 1 à 4 de la procédure décrite dans "Pour programmer un bouton 1-touche". 2 Appuyez sur le bouton de numérotation 1-touche que vous voulez modifier ou supprimer. 3 Appuyez sur le bouton dont vous voulez changer le réglage, puis procédez à la modification. – Pour supprimer le bouton de numérotation 1-touche, appuyez sur la touche [Supprimer]. 4 Vérifiez les informations à enregistrer, et appuyez sur [Entrée]. – En cas de suppression, un message de confirmation s'affiche. Appuyez sur [Oui]. 5 Appuyez sur [Entrée] dans chacun des écrans jusqu'à ce que l'écran d'accueil s'affiche. 4 Opérations Scan vers PC 4-36 bizhub 362/282/222 Copier un bouton 1-touche 1 Exécutez les étapes 1 à 4 de la procédure décrite dans "Pour programmer un bouton 1-touche". 2 Appuyez sur le bouton du destinataire 1-Touche à copier. 3 Appuyez sur [1-Touche] et ensuite sur [Copie 1-Touche]. 4 Appuyez sur le bouton sous lequel les paramètres de bouton de numérotation 1-touche sont censés être copiés. – Sélectionnez un bouton de numérotation 1-touche ne comportant encore aucun paramètre enregistré. – Pour désélectionner le bouton 1-touche de destination pour la copie, il suffit d'appuyer une nouvelle fois sur le bouton sélectionné. 5 Appuyez sur [Entrée] dans chacun des écrans jusqu'à ce que l'écran d'accueil s'affiche. Opérations Scan vers PC 4 bizhub 362/282/222 4-37 Enregistrer/Editer/Supprimer le destinataire secondaire 1 Exécutez les étapes 1 à 4 de la procédure décrite dans "Pour programmer un bouton 1-touche". 2 Appuyez sur le bouton de numérotation 1-touche sur lequel un destinataire secondaire est censé être programmé. 3 Appuyez sur [1-Touche], puis [Enregistrement. adresse secondaire]. 4 Entrez les informations relatives au destinataire secondaire, et appuyez sur [Entrée]. – Si une destination secondaire est déjà enregistrée, vérifiez les paramètres qui s'affichent et appuyez ensuite sur [Changer Paramètres] ou sur [Supprime]. – En cas de suppression, un message de confirmation s'affiche. Appuyez sur [Oui]. 5 Appuyez sur [Entrée] dans chacun des écrans jusqu'à ce que l'écran d'accueil s'affiche. 4 Opérations Scan vers PC 4-38 bizhub 362/282/222 5 Scanner IP Scanner IP 5 bizhub 362/282/222 5-3 5 Scanner IP 5.1 Avant d'utiliser Scanner IP Ce chapitre contient de nombreuses informations que vous devez vous assurer de comprendre avant d'utiliser Scanner IP. Scanner IP et ImageReceiver Scanner IP et ImageReceiver sont décrits dans les lignes suivantes. - Ces utilitaires sont disponibles uniquement lorsqu'un document est numérisé. Pour plus de détails sur l'enregistrement d'une télécopie reçue et transférée vers Scanner IP, voir "Transférer un document reçu vers Scanner IP" à la page 5-59. - Les données numérisées avec cette machine et envoyées vers un ordinateur sont reçues avec ImageReceiver et enregistrées comme fichier image avec Scanner IP. Avant d'utiliser Scanner IP, vous devez démarrer ImageReceiver. - L'icône du ImageReceiver s'affiche dans la barre des tâches de Windows pendant son exécution. Normalement, ImageReceiver démarre automatiquement avec le démarrage de Windows. - Si ImageReceiver ne démarre pas, cliquez sur "Démarrer" pour le lancer, allez sur "Programmes" (ou "Tous les programmes" sous Windows XP), ensuite "Scanner IP" et cliquez ensuite sur "ImageReceiver". - Lorsque ImageReceiver commence à recevoir les données image, son icône clignote dans la barre des tâches de Windows. - En fonction des paramètres ImageReceiver spécifiés, les données image peuvent être reçues avec ImageReceiver, même si Scanner IP n'a pas démarré. ! Détails Les fichiers TIFF codés JBIG ne peuvent pas être lus avec Scanner IP. 5 Scanner IP 5-4 bizhub 362/282/222 Utiliser un routeur téléphonique Avant d'utiliser un scanner IP, spécifiez l'adresse IP correcte de cette machine. Vous devez être particulièrement prudent au cas où Scanner IP est utilisé dans un environnement avec routeur téléphonique. Si vous spécifiez une adresse IP incorrecte dans un environnement avec routeur téléphonique, ce dernier risque de composer inutilement. En outre et en fonction des paramètres réseau spécifiés sur l'ordinateur, le routeur téléphonique risque de composer inutilement même si l'adresse IP spécifiée est correcte. Utiliser un modem ou un adaptateur de terminal Si vous utilisez un ordinateur avec modem (ou connecté à un adaptateur de terminal) le modem (ou l'adaptateur de terminal) risque de composer. Dans ce cas, sélectionnez "Ne jamais établir de connexion" or "Connecter à chaque fois qu'une connexion réseau n'est pas établie" sous "Paramètres accès modem et réseau privé virtuel" sur l'onglet Connexions de la boîte de dialogue Propriétés Internet. Pour plus de détails, consulter le manuel du système d'exploitation. Utiliser Windows XP Service Pack 2/Windows Vista Avec Windows XP Service Pack 2 avec Sécurité Avancée (SP2)/Windows Vista, la transmission effectuée par ImageReceiver risque d'être affectée par les fonctions de sécurité avancée (le pare-feu Windows est activé par défaut). Pour utiliser ImageReceiver, cliquez sur [Débloquer] dans le message d'alerte de sécurité Windows. Toutes les émissions effectuées par ImageReceiver passent, par défaut, par le pare-feu Windows, et toutes les fonctions ImageReceiver peuvent être utilisées normalement. Scanner IP 5 bizhub 362/282/222 5-5 ! Détails Si vous avez cliqué sur [Keep Blocking] (Toujours bloquer), toutes les émissions effectuées par ImageReceiver sont bloquées par le pare-feu Windows, et les fonctions ImageReceiver ne peuvent plus être utilisées. Pour plus de détails sur la manière d'autoriser l'utilisation de ImageReceiver voir "Autoriser l'utilisation de ImageReceiver" à la page 5-6. ! Détails Le message d'alerte de sécurité Windows s'affiche lorsque ImageReceiver démarre sous les conditions suivantes. - Lorsque Windows XP SP2 ou Windows Vista est installé alors qu'ImageReceiver est déjà installé - Lorsqu'ImageReceiver est réinstallé sur un ordinateur équipé de Windows XP SP2 ou Windows Vista 5 Scanner IP 5-6 bizhub 362/282/222 Autoriser l'utilisation de ImageReceiver Si vous aviez cliqué sur [Keep Blocking] dans le message d'alerte de sécurité Windows, ImageReceiver ne peut plus être utilisé. Dans ce cas, suivez la procédure décrite ci-dessus pour autoriser l'utilisation de ImageReceiver. 1 Ouvrir le panneau de commande et double-cliquez sur "Centre de sécurité" installé avec Windows XP SP2. 2 Dans la boîte de dialogue Centre de sécurité Windows, cliquez sur "Pare-feu Windows". 3 Dans la boîte de dialogue Pare-feu Windows, cliquez sur l'onglet Exceptions. (Pour Windows Vista, sélectionnez "Autoriser un programme via le Pare-feu Windows".) 4 Dans la liste "Programmes et services", vérifier si "MGS" avec le nom du programme ImageReceiver est enregistré. 5 Cochez la case "MGS". 6 Cliquez sur [OK]. ! Détails Seul un utilisateur jouissant des privilèges de l'administrateur peut modifier les paramètres de pare-feu. Scanner IP 5 bizhub 362/282/222 5-7 Conflits de ports ImageReceiver Si un serveur de courrier électronique est installé sur un ordinateur équipé d'un scanner IP, un message de confirmation s'affiche. Si Scanner IP (et ImageReceiver) et le serveur de courrier électronique sont utilisés sur le même ordinateur, cliquez sur [Change ImageReceiver port] (Changer port ImageReceiver). Toutefois, pour utiliser cette fonction, les paramètres doivent correspondre aux Paramètres port du bouton de numérotation 1-touche utilisé avec Scan vers PC. Le numéro du port peut être vérifié après la modification en cliquant sur "Help", ensuite sur "Computer Information" dans scanner IP. Lorsque vous utilisez Scanner IP (et ImageReceiver) sans avoir modifié le numéro du port, arrêtez le serveur de courrier électronique, puis redémarrez ImageReceiver. Si le numéro de port a été modifié par inadvertance, désinstallez et réinstallez Scanner IP. 5 Scanner IP 5-8 bizhub 362/282/222 Emissions SSL - Les émissions pour l'utilisation de Scanner IP pour programmer/supprimer des boutons de numérisation peuvent être cryptées. - Si cette machine est configurée pour les émissions SSL, la boîte de dialogue suivante apparaît. Si cette boîte de dialogue apparaît, cliquez sur [View Certificate] et installez un certificat. Une fois que le certificat est installé, ce boîte de dialogue ne doit pas s'afficher pendant la période de validité du certificat. A l'expiration du certificat, cette boîte de dialogue va réapparaître et il faudra réinstaller le certificat. Pour plus de détails sur l'installation des certificats, voir "Installation des certificats" à la page 5-10. - Utilisez PageScope Web Connection pour créer des certificats. Pour plus de détails sur la création de certificats, consulter le Guide de l'utilisateur [Opérations Scanner réseau]. - Si Scanner IP communique avec un périphérique utilisant SSL, l'icône d'un cadenas s'affiche dans le coin inférieur droit de la fenêtre. Scanner IP 5 bizhub 362/282/222 5-9 ! Détails Pour que Scanner IP communique avec cette machine utilisant SSL, vous devez installer Internet Explorer 5.0 ou supérieur. Pour la communication SSL, il faut un niveau de cryptage Internet Explorer de 56 bits ou plus. Si le niveau de cryptage n'est pas de 56 bits ou plus, procurez-vous le pack de cryptage sur le site Internet Microsoft et installez-le. Pour activer les émissions SSL et utiliser Scanner IP, utilisez la version 1.55.x ou supérieure de Scanner IP. 5 Scanner IP 5-10 bizhub 362/282/222 Installation des certificats 1 Quand la boîte de dialogue Security Alert apparaît, cliquez sur [View Certificate]. 2 Cliquez sur [Install Certificate]. Scanner IP 5 bizhub 362/282/222 5-11 3 Cliquez sur [Next]. 4 Sélectionnez la case "Automatically select the certificate store based on the type of certificate" et cliquez ensuite sur [Next]. 5 Scanner IP 5-12 bizhub 362/282/222 5 Cliquez sur [Finish]. 6 Cliquez sur [Yes]. Le certificat est installé. Scanner IP 5 bizhub 362/282/222 5-13 5.2 Installer/désinstaller les utilitaires Scanner IP est disponible sur le disque utilitaires livré avec cette machine. Près de 35 Mo d'espace disque dur libre sont requis pour l'installation du scanner IP. Méthodes d'installation du ImageReceiver Utilisez l'une des méthodes d'installation de ImageReceiver suivantes, en fonction de votre environnement de travail. Méthode d'installation Description Installer comme application Cette méthode est la méthode d'installation normale. Les paramètres des données image enregistrées utilisées dans Scanner IP peuvent être utilisés Installer comme service Sélectionnez cette méthode lorsque vous travaillez sur un serveur ou un terminal partagé. L'utilitaire peut être installé sur des ordinateurs équipés de Windows Server 2003, XP, ou 2000. ImageReceiver peut être utilisé même dans le cas où l'utilisateur ne s'est pas connecté ; toutefois, les paramètres des données image enregistrées utilisées dans Scanner IP ne peuvent pas être utilisés. 5 Scanner IP 5-14 bizhub 362/282/222 Installer les utilitaires 1 Démarrer l'ordinateur et insérez ensuite le CD-ROM. L'installeur démarre. 2 Sélectionnez "Install IP Scanner". Scanner IP 5 bizhub 362/282/222 5-15 3 Vérifiez le contenu de la boîte de dialogue, puis cliquez sur le bouton [Next]. 4 Suivez les instructions qui s'affichent pour terminer l'installation. 5 Dans la boîte de dialogue Terminer l'installation, cliquez sur [Finish]. 6 Redémarrez l'ordinateur. 5 Scanner IP 5-16 bizhub 362/282/222 2 Remarque La communication avec ImageReceiver est affectée dans un environnement dans lequel Windows XP Service Pack 2 avec Sécurité Avancée (SP2)/Windows Vista est utilisé avec les fonctions de sécurité avancée. Voir "Utiliser Windows XP Service Pack 2/Windows Vista" à la page 5-4. Scanner IP 5 bizhub 362/282/222 5-17 Désinstaller les utilitaires (pour Windows 2000/XP/Server 2003) Avant de désinstaller Scanner IP, quittez ImageReceiver. 1 Sous Windows, sélectionnez "Démarrer" et ensuite "Panneau de configuration" pour ouvrir le Panneau de configuration. – Sous Windows 2000, sélectionnez "Démarrer", "Paramètres" et ensuite "Panneau de configuration" pour ouvrir le Panneau de configuration. 2 Double-cliquez sur "Ajouter ou supprimer des programmes". – Sous Windows 2000, double-cliquez sur "Ajout/Suppression de programmes". 3 Sélectionnez "Scanner IP" et cliquez ensuite sur [Changer/Supprimer]. – Sous Windows Vista, sélectionnez "Scanner IP" et cliquez ensuite sur [Désinstaller]. 5 Scanner IP 5-18 bizhub 362/282/222 4 Cliquez sur [Yes] (Oui). 5 Suivez les instructions qui s'affichent pour terminer la désinstallation. 6 Redémarrez l'ordinateur. Scanner IP 5 bizhub 362/282/222 5-19 5.3 Opérations de scanner IP La fenêtre et le menu du scanner IP sont décrits ci-dessous. Fenêtre principale Cette fenêtre s'affiche au démarrage du scanner IP. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 No. Nom de l'élément Description 1 Bouton Fermer Cliquez sur ce bouton pour quitter Scanner IP. 2 Bouton Contrôler réception maintenant Cliquez sur ce bouton pour vérifier la réception des données numérisées. 3 Boutons Grandes icônes, Petites icônes, Liste et Détails Cliquez sur ces boutons pour modifier l'affichage des icônes. 4 Bouton Imagettes Cliquez sur ce bouton pour démarrer FenêtreVisionner et afficher une liste d'imagettes pour tous les fichiers TIFF, PDF et JPG dans le dossier ouvert. Pour plus de détails, voir "FenêtreVisionner" à la page 5-33. 5 Bouton [Scanner Key Registration] Cliquez sur ce bouton pour afficher la boîte de dialogue Scanner Settings pour programmer un bouton sur la machine afin de spécifier l'ordinateur de destination des données. Pour plus de détails, voir "Boîte de dialogue Scanner Settings" à la page 5-24. Si la case "Same as Previous" est sélectionnée, le bouton sera programmé avec les mêmes paramètres que le bouton précédemment programmé. Si une machine n'est pas connectée, son illustration est floue. 5 Scanner IP 5-20 bizhub 362/282/222 6 Bouton [Delete Scanner Key] Cliquez sur ce bouton pour effacer le bouton de numérisation programmé sur la machine. 7 Case "Save folder as a key" Si cette case est sélectionnée, un dossier portant le même nom que le bouton est automatiquement créé lorsqu'un bouton de numérisation est programmé. 8 Case "Delete the key after image is saved" Si cette case est sélectionnée, le bouton de numérisation est automatiquement effacé dès l'enregistrement de l'image numérisée dans un dossier. 9 Case "Delete the key on exit" Si cette case est sélectionnée, le bouton de numérisation est automatiquement effacé lorsque vous quittez Scanner IP. 10 Barre de menus Cliquez sur les commandes des menus pour spécifier divers paramètres. Pour plus de détails, voir "Commandes disponibles" à la page 5-21. 11 Barre d'état Affiche l'état de fonctionnement de l'application. No. Nom de l'élément Description Scanner IP 5 bizhub 362/282/222 5-21 Commandes disponibles Les commandes des différents menus sont décrits ci-dessous. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 No. Menu Commande Description 1 File View file Sélectionnez cette commande pour visionner le fichier image sélectionné. New folder Sélectionnez cette commande pour créer un nouveau dossier dans le dossier affiché. Delete Sélectionnez cette commande pour supprimer le fichier ou le dossier sélectionné. Rename Sélectionnez cette commande pour changer le nom du fichier ou du dossier sélectionné. Exit Sélectionnez cette commande pour quitter Scanner IP. 2 Edit Cut Sélectionnez ces commandes pour sélectionner, déplacer ou copier les fichiers ou les Copy dossiers. Paste Select All 3 View Large Icons Sélectionnez ces commandes pour changer l'affichage des icônes. Small Icons List Details Thumbnails Sélectionnez cette commande pour afficher les imagettes des documents numérisés. Pour plus de détails, voir "FenêtreVisionner" à la page 5-33. Refresh Sélectionnez cette commande pour mettre à jour l'affichage des fichiers et des dossiers. 4 Go To Saving folder Sélectionnez cette commande pour afficher le dossier où les données ont été enregistrées. 5 Scanner IP 5-22 bizhub 362/282/222 5 Scanner Scanner Key Registration Sélectionnez cette commande pour programmer un bouton de numérisation sur la machine. Scanner Key Delete Sélectionnez cette commande pour effacer le bouton de numérisation programmé sur la machine. Reg. Same as Previous Sélectionnez cette commande pour programmer le bouton avec les même paramètre que le bouton précédemment programmé. 6 Image Check Check now Sélectionnez cette commande pour vérifier la réception des données numérisées. Automatic Sélectionnez cette commande pour activer le contrôle automatique de la réception des données numérisées. Manual Sélectionnez cette commande pour activer le contrôle manuel de la réception des données numérisées. No. Menu Commande Description Scanner IP 5 bizhub 362/282/222 5-23 7 Settings Connection Setting Sélectionnez cette commande pour spécifier l'adresse IP de la machine. Image Folder Setting Sélectionnez cette commande pour changer le dossier dans lequel l'image est enregistrée. 2 Remarque Il est impossible de spécifier un disque amovible, un lecteur CD-ROM ou un disque réseau comme dossier de destination. Viewer Settings Sélectionnez cette commande pour changer la visionneuse ouverte depuis Scanner IP. Sort Settings Sélectionnez cette commande pour spécifier les paramètres de tri des documents numérisés. Pour plus de détails, voir "Boîte de dialogue Sort Settings (onglet RX document (Réception document))" à la page 5-27. Divided Settings Sélectionnez cette commande pour spécifier les paramètres de division de documents numérisés. Pour plus de détails, voir "Boîte de dialogue Divided Settings (Paramètres de division)" à la page 5-30. Receive Notify Settings Sélectionnez cette commande pour spécifier les paramètres de notification de l'émission des documents numérisés de l'ordinateur. Pour plus de détails, voir "Boîte de dialogue Receive Notify Settings" à la page 5-31. Selected folder as saving location Sélectionnez cette commande pour spécifier le dossier affiché comme destination pour l'enregistrement. Configure Arrival Notification Sélectionnez cette commande pour spécifier le dossier affiché comme dossier de notification pour la réception de notifications sur l'ordinateur. Show dialog after received Sélectionnez cette commande pour afficher un message de notification de la réception de l'image. Notify other PC after received Sélectionnez cette commande pour envoyer une notification informant un ordinateur différent de la réception de l'image 8 Aide Computer Information Sélectionnez cette commande pour afficher l'adresse IP de l'ordinateur et le port de ImageReceiver. Help Topics Sélectionnez cette commande pour afficher le menu Aide du scanner IP. About This Product Sélectionnez cette commande pour afficher les informations sur la version du scanner IP. No. Menu Commande Description 5 Scanner IP 5-24 bizhub 362/282/222 Boîte de dialogue Scanner Settings Cette boîte de dialogue s'affiche pour permettre d'enregistrer les paramètres de numérisation sur la machine. 1 2 3 4 5 6 8 12 7 9 10 14 15 11 13 No. Nom de l'élément Description 1 Champ "Scanner Key Name" Entrez le nom du bouton de numérisation qui s'affichera sur l'écran tactile de la machine. Si vous aviez coché la case "Save folder as a key" dans la fenêtre principale, un dossier portant le même nom que le bouton est créé sur l'ordinateur. 2 Champ "Scan Area" Sélectionnez la surface à numériser. Si "Auto Detect" est sélectionné, la zone de numérisation est automatiquement déterminée conformément au format du document. 3 Champ "Quality" Sélectionnez la résolution de numérisation. 4 Curseur "Contrast" Spécifiez la densité de la numérisation. 5 Case "Drop Out Color" Cette rubrique n'est pas disponible sur cette machine. Scanner IP 5 bizhub 362/282/222 5-25 6 Champ "File Type" Sélectionnez "TIFF" ou "PDF" pour le format dans lequel le fichier est enregistré. 7 Paramètre "B/W Coding Method" Sélectionnez "MH" ou "MMR" comme méthode de codage pour l'enregistrement des fichiers. Certaines images ne peuvent pas être visionnées sur l'ordinateur ; cela dépend du codage. Dans ce cas, sélectionnez "MH" pour augmenter la possibilité de visionnage de l'image. La taille des données codées dépend des données image ; toutefois, les données MH sont généralement plus importantes que les MMR. 8 Paramètre "Specify File Name" "Yes" : sélectionnez ce paramètre pour enregistrer les données image avec le nom de fichier spécifié. "No" : sélectionnez ce paramètre pour enregistrer le fichier avec un nom composé du nom du périphérique et de la date de numérisation de l'image. 9 Champ "File Name" Entrez le nom avec lequel le fichier sera enregistré si "Specify File Name" est réglé sur "Yes". 10 Champ groupé "2in1" "Yes" : sélectionnez ce réglage pour enregistrer un document de deux pages sous la forme d'une image numérisée d'une page. Ce paramètre est disponible uniquement si un introducteur automatique de document est utilisé. 11 Champ groupé "Original" Sélectionnez si le document est recto ou recto-verso. Si vous sélectionnez "2 sided", l'emplacement de la marge de reliure et le sens du document peuvent être spécifiés. 12 Bouton [Scanner Key Registration] Cliquez sur ce bouton pour programmer un bouton sur la machine afin de spécifier l'emplacement pour l'enregistrement des données. 13 Champ groupé [Automatic Print] Si "Yes" est sélectionné, "Automatic Print Settings" devient disponible dans ImageReceiver. 14 Bouton [Printer Setting] Cliquez sur ce bouton pour afficher la boîte de dialogue Printer Setting. Ce bouton est disponible quand "Automatic Print" est réglé sur "Yes". 15 Bouton [Default] Si vous cliquez sur ce bouton, tous les paramètres retournent à leurs valeurs par défaut. No. Nom de l'élément Description 5 Scanner IP 5-26 bizhub 362/282/222 Boîte de dialogue Sort Settings (Paramètres de tri) (onglet Scanner) 2 1 No. Nom de l'élément Description 1 Case "Folder by key name" Si cette case est sélectionnée, un dossier portant le même nom que le bouton de numérisation programmé est automatiquement créé. Lors de l'envoi d'une émission Scan vers PC depuis cette machine, un dossier est automatiquement créé avec le même nom que la destination du bouton de numérotation 1-touche. Si une émission est envoyée avec l'adresse entrée directement, un dossier est automatiquement créé avec le nom "(Input)". Cette case est connectée à la case "Save folder as a key" de la fenêtre principale. 2 Case "Create new folder by Date" Si cette case est sélectionnée, les données sont enregistrées dans un dossier créé avec un nom à partir de la date d'envoi de l'image depuis cette machine. Il est possible de spécifier le format de la date. Exemple : pour le 24 décembre 2005 (Saturday) • aaaa.mm.jj : 2005.12.24 • aaaa.mm : 2005.12 • aaaa.mm.jj-jj : 2005.12.18-24 * Si "Start week on" était sur "Sun" (L'on considère qu'une semaine compte sept jours à partir du jour sélectionné. Toutefois, à la fin du mois, les mois ne se chevaucheront pas.) Scanner IP 5 bizhub 362/282/222 5-27 Boîte de dialogue Sort Settings (onglet RX document (Réception document)) 1 2 3 5 4 No. Nom de l'élément Description 1 Case "Folder by key name" Si vous cochez cette case, un dossier est créé automatiquement avec le même nom que le bouton de numérotation 1-touche programmé lors du transfert d'un document reçu vers Scanner IP. Cette case n'est pas connectée à la case "Save folder as a key" de la fenêtre principale. 2 Case "Create new folder by Date" Si cette case est sélectionnée, les données sont enregistrées dans un dossier créé avec un nom à partir de la date d'envoi du document. Il est possible de spécifier le format de la date. Exemple : pour le 24 décembre 2005 (Saturday) • aaaa.mm.jj : 2005.12.24 • aaaa.mm : 2005.12 • aaaa.mm.jj-jj : 2005.12.18-24 * Si "Start week on" était sur "Sun" (L'on considère qu'une semaine compte sept jours à partir du jour sélectionné. Toutefois, à la fin du mois, les mois ne se chevaucheront pas.) 3 Case "Sort by FAX information" Si vous cochez cette case, les données sont triées, par exemple à l'aide des informations sur le destinataire du fax, puis enregistrées dans un dossier. 4 Liste "FAX Information" Cliquez sur [Up] ou [Down] pour sélectionner les informations fax à utiliser pour le tri. Lors du tri des données, les éléments placés en haut de la liste sont prioritaires. 5 Case "Create new folder" Si vous cochez cette case, le document (les données image) est enregistré dans un nouveau dossier créé à partir des informations de l'expéditeur s'il n'existe aucun dossier créé avec les informations de l'expéditeur du document reçu. 5 Scanner IP 5-28 bizhub 362/282/222 Boîte de dialogue Sort Settings (onglet TX document (Emission document)) 1 2 3 4 5 6 No. Nom de l'élément Description 1 Case "Folder by key name" Si vous cochez cette case, un dossier est créé automatiquement avec le même nom que le bouton de numérotation 1-touche programmé lors du transfert d'un document envoyé vers Scanner IP. Cette case n'est pas connectée à la case "Save folder as a key" de la fenêtre principale. 2 Case "Create new folder by Sender Information" Si vous cochez cette case, les données sont enregistrées dans un fichier créé avec un nom à partir des informations relatives à l'expéditeur (nom utilisateur ou nom de compte) du document envoyé. 3 Champ "Sender Information" Cliquez sur [Up] ou [Down] pour sélectionner les informations expéditeur à utiliser pour le tri. Lors du tri des données, les éléments placés en haut de la liste sont prioritaires. Si aucun compte ne doit être spécifié, définir "Group Name" "Public". 4 Case "Create new folder by Communication mode" Si cette case est sélectionnée, les données sont enregistrées dans un dossier créé avec le numéro correspondant au mode de communication du document envoyé. Scanner IP 5 bizhub 362/282/222 5-29 5 Case "Create new folder by Date" Si cette case est sélectionnée, les données sont enregistrées dans un dossier créé avec un nom à partir de la date d'envoi du document. Il est possible de spécifier le format de la date. Exemple : pour le 24 décembre 2005 (Saturday) • aaaa.mm.jj : 2005.12.24 • aaaa.mm : 2005.12 • aaaa.mm.jj-jj : 2005.12.18-24 * Si "Start week on" était sur "Sun" (L'on considère qu'une semaine compte sept jours à partir du jour sélectionné. Toutefois, à la fin du mois, les mois ne se chevaucheront pas.) 6 Case "Create new folder by TX Destination Information" Si cette case est sélectionnée, les données sont enregistrées dans un dossier créé avec un nom à partir des informations relatives à l'expéditeur du document envoyé. No. Nom de l'élément Description 5 Scanner IP 5-30 bizhub 362/282/222 Boîte de dialogue Divided Settings (Paramètres de division) Cette boîte de dialogue s'affiche pour permettre de spécifier les paramètres de division et d'enregistrement de documents numérisés. 1 2 3 4 5 No. Nom de l'élément Description 1 Case "Divide a scanned document to save" Si vous cochez cette case, un document numérisé peut être divisé et enregistré dans des fichiers séparés. Un document à diviser et enregistrer peut être numérisé en une étape. 2 Paramètre "Divide by short separator" Si ce paramètre est sélectionné et un document aux pages de longueurs différentes numérisé, ces pages sont identifiées comme intercalaires, et le document est divisé par ces intercalaires et enregistré dans des fichiers différents. Lors du chargement d'un document dans l'ADF, chargez le document de sorte que les côtés gauches des pages (marges) soient alignés. Les formats des pages pouvant être mixées ne sont soumis à aucune restriction. Voir "Formats papier originaux mixtes". Ce paramètre est disponible uniquement si la case "Divide a scanned document to save" est cochée. 3 Case "Files separator" Si vous cochez cette case, les pages insérées comme intercalaires sont également enregistrées comme données image. 4 Paramètre "Divide by width" Si ce paramètre est sélectionné et un document aux pages de largeurs différentes numérisées, les pages de largeur identique sont enregistrées dans un fichier séparé. Lors du chargement d'un document dans l'ADF, chargez le document de sorte que les bords supérieurs des pages (bords orientés vers l'arrière de la machine) soient alignés. Ce paramètre est disponible uniquement si la case "Divide a scanned document to save" est cochée. 5 Paramètre "Divide document as single pages" Si ce paramètre est sélectionné, chaque page du document numérisé est enregistrée dans un fichier séparé. Ce paramètre est disponible uniquement si la case "Divide a scanned document to save" est cochée. Scanner IP 5 bizhub 362/282/222 5-31 Boîte de dialogue Receive Notify Settings 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 No. Nom de l'élément Description 1 Destination de l'enregistrement Un ordinateur différent peut être notifié lors de la réception d'une image dans un dossier spécial. Dans le cas présent, sélectionnez le dossier de destination dans lequel l'image est reçue et l'autre ordinateur notifié. 2 "Notify List" Affiche les informations sur la destination de notification spécifiée pour le dossier sélectionné. Une icône floue à proximité du dossier indique la destination de notification est définie pour un dossier conteneur. 3 Bouton [Add] Cliquez sur ce bouton pour ajouter une destination de notification. Entrez l'adresse IP de l'ordinateur qui recevra la notification, puis cliquez sur [OK]. Si un numéro de port est spécifié, sélectionnez la case "Specify Port" et spécifiez ensuite le numéro de port. Spécifiez le numéro de port SMTP utilisé par ImageReceiver sur l'ordinateur pour recevoir la notification (normalement "25"). 5 Scanner IP 5-32 bizhub 362/282/222 4 Bouton [Edit] Cliquez sur ce bouton pour éditer ou changer la destination de notification sélectionnée. Si la destination de notification et définie pour un dossier conteneur (icône floue), [Edit] n'est pas disponible. 5 Bouton [Delete] Cliquez sur ce bouton pour supprimer la destination de notification sélectionnée. Si la destination de notification et définie pour un dossier conteneur (icône floue), [Delete] n'est pas disponible. 6 Case "Apply to Sub-Folders" Si vous cochez cette case, les mêmes paramètres de notification s'appliquent à tous les sous-dossiers contenus dans le dossier sélectionné. 7 Bouton [Test] Cliquez sur ce bouton pour envoyer une notification test à la destination de notification sélectionnée. Le message suivant s'affiche sur l'ordinateur spécifié comme destination de notification. ImageReceiver doit démarrer sur une ordinateur spécifié comme destination de notification. En outre, une notification de test ne peut pas être envoyée vers une destination de notification spécifiée comme dossier conteneur (icône floue). No. Nom de l'élément Description Scanner IP 5 bizhub 362/282/222 5-33 FenêtreVisionner Si vous aviez cliqué sur l'affichage imagettes, une image réduite de toutes les images enregistrées dans le dossier sélectionné s'affiche. Cliquez sur une image pour visionner le fichier. 2 Remarque Les fichiers TIFF codés JBIG ne peuvent pas être affichés. Il se peut que les images créées avec un périphérique autre que cette machine (par ex. un ordinateur) ne s'affichent pas. No. Description 1 S'affiche lorsque le fichier contient plusieurs pages. Cliquez sur la barre pour changer de page. 1 5 Scanner IP 5-34 bizhub 362/282/222 Boîte de dialogue Printer Setting 1 2 3 No. Nom de l'élément Description 1 Champ "Printer Name" Parmi les imprimantes enregistrées dans le dossier Imprimantes de l'ordinateur, sélectionnez l'imprimante à utiliser pour l'impression automatique. 2 Bouton [Print Property] Cliquez sur ce bouton pour afficher la boîte de dialogue Print Property. 3 Case "Delete File After Printing" Si cette case est sélectionnée, les données image reçues seront supprimées après leur impression automatique. Scanner IP 5 bizhub 362/282/222 5-35 Boîte de dialogue Print Property 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 No. Nom de l'élément Description 1 Champ "Paper Select Method" Spécifiez la méthode de sélection du papier pour l'impression automatique. Si vous sélectionnez "Print on Selected Paper", les données sont imprimées sur le papier et selon l'orientation spécifiée dans cette boîte de dialogue, sans tenir compte de la taille de l'image. Si vous sélectionnez "Print on Paper Same as Image Size", les données sont imprimées sur le papier et selon l'orientation correspondant à celle de l'image, sans tenir compte des paramètres spécifiés dans cette boîte de dialogue. Si vous sélectionnez "Select When Printing", la boîte de dialogue Print Select s'ouvre avant l'impression. "Select When Printing" n'apparaît pas si ImageReceiver avait été installé en tant que service. 2 Case "Adjust Image to Fit to Paper Size" Si vous sélectionnez cette case, l'image est imprimée agrandie/réduite pour s'adapter au format du papier. 3 Case "Minimal" Si vous sélectionnez cette case, l'image est imprimée en taille réduite pour ne perdre aucune partie de l'image. 5 Scanner IP 5-36 bizhub 362/282/222 4 Case "Automatically Rotates Image when Image Orientation is different from Paper Orientation." Si vous sélectionnez cette case, l'image est pivotée avant l'impression quand l'orientation de l'image diffère de cette du papier. 5 Paramètre "Position" Sélectionnez comment les images sont disposées sur le papier lors de l'impression. 6 Champ "Paper Size" Sélectionnez le format du papier. Les formats de papier utilisables avec l'imprimante sélectionnée sont regroupés sous forme de liste. 7 Paramètre "Orientation" Sélectionnez l'orientation de l'impression. 8 Champ "Paper Source" Sélectionnez la méthode d'alimentation du papier. Les méthodes d'alimentation papier utilisables avec l'imprimante sélectionnée sont regroupées sous forme de liste. 9 Champ "Copies" Spécifiez le nombre de copies à imprimer. Spécifiez un nombre ne dépassant pas le nombre maximal de copies que vous pouvez spécifier avec l'imprimante sélectionnée. 10 Bouton [Properties] Cliquez sur ce bouton pour afficher les propriétés de l'imprimante sélectionnée. 11 Champ "Resolution" Sélectionnez la résolution d'impression. Les résolutions utilisables avec l'imprimante sélectionnée sont regroupées sous forme de liste. No. Nom de l'élément Description Scanner IP 5 bizhub 362/282/222 5-37 5.4 Opérations ImageReceiver Icône ImageReceiver Après l'installation du scanner IP, l'icône ImageReceiver s'affiche dans la barre des tâches de Windows au démarrage de l'ordinateur. Si cette icône ne s'affiche pas, l'ordinateur ne peur pas recevoir l'image numérisée. L'icône change comme illustré ci-dessous, en fonction des paramètres ImageReceiver. Icône Description Une image est ouverte dans Scanner IP. (verte) Une image est ouverte dans ImageReceiver. (bleue) Une image est ouverte dans ImageReceiver (si l'utilitaire a été installé comme service). (bleue) 5 Scanner IP 5-38 bizhub 362/282/222 Commandes ImageReceiver Avec le bouton droit de la souris, cliquez sur l'icône dans la barre des tâches pour afficher un menu. 1 2 3, 4, 5 6, 7 8, 9 10 No. Commande Description 1 Save received images Si cette commande est cochée, les données images sont ouvertes dans ImageReceiver au moment de la réception, même si Scanner IP n'a pas encore démarré. Si vous cliquez sur "Enregistrer les images reçues" un message permettant de confirmer si oui ou non le paramètre spécifié dans Scanner IP ou dans ImageReceiver doit être accepté s'affiche. Pour accepter le paramètre, cliquez sur [Oui]. 2 Automatic Print Settings Cliquez sur cette commande pour afficher la boîte de dialogue Automatic Print Settings. Pour plus de détails, voir "Boîte de dialogue Automatic Print Settings" à la page 5-41. 3 "Settings for saved images"–" Image Folder Setting" Cliquez sur cette commande pour changer le dossier dans lequel les données image sont enregistrées. Cette commande est disponible uniquement si "Save received images" est coché. Il est impossible de spécifier un disque amovible, un lecteur CD-ROM ou un disque réseau comme dossier de destination. 4 "Settings for saved images"–" Sort Settings" Sélectionnez cette commande pour spécifier les paramètres de tri des documents numérisés. Cette commande est disponible uniquement si "Save received images" est coché. Pour plus de détails, voir "Boîte de dialogue Sort Settings (Paramètres de tri) (onglet Scanner)" à la page 5-26. 5 "Settings for saved images"–" Divided Settings" Sélectionnez cette commande pour spécifier les paramètres de division de documents numérisés. Cette commande est disponible uniquement si "Save received images" est coché. Pour plus de détails, voir "Boîte de dialogue Divided Settings (Paramètres de division)" à la page 5-30. 6 "Notify Settings"–"Receive Notify Settings" Sélectionnez cette commande pour spécifier les paramètres de notification de l'émission des documents numérisés de l'ordinateur. Cette commande est disponible uniquement si "Save received images" est coché. Pour plus de détails, voir "Boîte de dialogue Receive Notify Settings" à la page 5-31. Scanner IP 5 bizhub 362/282/222 5-39 7 "Notify Settings"–"Error Notify Settings" Sélectionnez cette commande pour afficher la boîte de dialogue Error Notify Settings. Pour envoyer des notifications d'erreur à un autre ordinateur, sélectionnez la case "Error notify to other PC", tapez l'adresse IP de l'ordinateur censé recevoir la notification et cliquez sur [OK]. Pour spécifier un numéro de port, sélectionnez la case "Specify Port" et spécifiez ensuite le numéro de port. Spécifiez le numéro du port SMTP utilisé par ImageReceiver sur l'ordinateur pour recevoir la notification (normalement "25"). Cliquez sur [Test]. Une notification test est envoyée au destinataire spécifié. 8 "Receive Settings"–"RX Display" Si cette commande est cochée, une boîte de dialogue s'affiche pour notifier l'utilisateur de la réception de données image. Il est possible de démarrer la visionneuse depuis la boîte de dialogue Confirmation de l'image et de voir le dossier spécifié comme destination d'enregistrement des images. Il est en outre possible de supprimer ou de renommer des fichiers de données image dans cette boîte de dialogue. No. Commande Description 5 Scanner IP 5-40 bizhub 362/282/222 9 "Receive Settings"– "Connection Filter" Cliquez sur cette commande pour afficher la boîte de dialogue Connection Filter (Filtre de connexion). Si vous cochez la case "Filter", vous pouvez restreindre la destination de la connexion en cliquant sur [Add] pour enregistrer une adresse IP. Sur la liste "Allowed IP Address", enregistrez l'adresse IP de l'ordinateur qui reçoit les notifications envoyées entre cette machine et l'ordinateur. Si vous cochez la case "Display Received Image Notify" la notification de réception de l'ordinateur est reçue à partir d'un ordinateur différent. Si la case "Display Error Notify" est sélectionnée, les notifications d'erreur informatiques provenant d'un autre ordinateur sont reçues. 10 Help Affiche le menu Aide de ImageReceiver, les informations relatives à sa version, le journal de réception et le journal d'erreurs. No. Commande Description Scanner IP 5 bizhub 362/282/222 5-41 Boîte de dialogue Automatic Print Settings 6 2 3 4 5 1 No. Nom de l'élément Description 1 Liste "Folder For Printing" Cette liste montre le dossier spécifié pour l'impression automatique. Si la liste comporte plusieurs dossiers, les paramètres d'impression sont prioritaires, en commençant par le haut. Cliquez sur [Up] et [Down] pour spécifier la priorité des dossiers d'impression automatique. 2 [Add] Bouton Cliquez sur ce bouton pour afficher la boîte de dialogue Folder and Printer Settings. Vous pouvez ajouter des dossiers d'impression automatique. 3 Bouton [Edit] Cliquez sur ce bouton pour afficher la boîte de dialogue Folder and Printer Settings. Vous pouvez modifier les paramètres des dossiers d'impression automatique. 4 Bouton [Delete] Cliquez sur ce bouton pour supprimer le dossier d'impression automatique sélectionné. 5 Bouton [Copy] Cliquez sur ce bouton pour afficher la boîte de dialogue Folder and Printer Settings. Vous pouvez reproduire les paramètres pour le dossier d'impression automatique sélectionné. 6 Champ "Print Settings" Ce champ contient les paramètres du dossier figurant sur la liste "Folder For Printing". 5 Scanner IP 5-42 bizhub 362/282/222 Boîte de dialogue Folder and Printer Settings 1 2 3 4 5 No. Nom de l'élément Description 1 Champ "Folder" Ce champ montre le dossier spécifié pour l'impression automatique. Pour sélectionner un autre dossier, cliquez sur [Browse] et sélectionnez le dossier voulu. 2 Case "Apply to Sub- Folders" Si vous cochez cette case, les mêmes paramètres d'impression automatique s'appliquent à tous les sous-dossiers contenus dans le dossier sélectionné. 3 Champ "Printer Name" Parmi les imprimantes enregistrées dans le dossier Imprimantes de l'ordinateur, sélectionnez l'imprimante à utiliser pour l'impression automatique. 4 Bouton [Print Property] Cliquez sur ce bouton pour afficher la boîte de dialogue Print Property. Pour plus de détails, voir "Boîte de dialogue Print Property" à la page 5-35. 5 Case "Delete File After Printing" Si cette case est sélectionnée, les données image reçues seront supprimées après leur impression automatique. Scanner IP 5 bizhub 362/282/222 5-43 5.5 Enregistrer les boutons et les opérations de numérisation Fonctionnement général Suivez la procédure décrite ci-dessous pour numériser à l'aide du scanner IP. 1 Démarrez Scanner IP. (depuis l'ordinateur) 2 Programmez un bouton de numérisation. (depuis l'ordinateur) 3 Numérisez le document. (depuis la machine) 4 Visionnez l'image numérisée. (depuis l'ordinateur) 5 Quittez Scanner IP. (depuis l'ordinateur) Démarrer Scanner IP 1 Cliquez sur "Démarrer", allez sur "Programmes" (ou "Tous les programmes" sous Windows XP), ensuite sur "Scanner IP" et cliquez ensuite sur "Scanner IP". 2 Entrez l'adresse IP de la machine, puis cliquez sur [OK]. – Si l'adresse IP de la machine est déjà spécifiée, vous pouvez sauter cette étape. La fenêtre principale s'affiche. 5 Scanner IP 5-44 bizhub 362/282/222 Enregistrer un bouton de numérisation Spécifiez les paramètres de numérisation machine à partir du scanner IP, transférez-les ensuite vers la machine et enregistrez-les comme bouton de numérisation. Assurez-vous que ImageReceiver est en marche. 0 Un seul bouton de numérisation peut être programmé à partir d'un ordinateur unique (même adresse IP). 0 Six boutons de numérisation maximum peuvent être programmés sur cette machine. Si six boutons ont déjà été programmés, sélectionnez un bouton sur l'écran tactile de la machine et appuyez ensuite sur [Delete] pour le supprimer. Dans ce cas, "Scanner Available" reste affiché dans Scanner IP. Cliquez sur [Delete Scanner Key] pour afficher "Scanner Key Registration". 1 Dans la fenêtre principale, cliquez sur [Scanner Key Registration]. Scanner IP 5 bizhub 362/282/222 5-45 2 Spécifiez les paramètres de numérisation dans la boîte de dialogue Scanner Settings. – Pour plus de détails, voir "Boîte de dialogue Scanner Settings" à la page 5-24. 5 Scanner IP 5-46 bizhub 362/282/222 3 Cliquez sur [Scanner Key Registration]. 4 Cliquez sur [OK]. – Pour vérifier l'adresse IP de l'ordinateur, cliquez sur "Help", puis sur "Computer Information". Le bouton de numérisation machine est programmé. Scanner IP 5 bizhub 362/282/222 5-47 Numériser un document à l'aide des paramètres enregistrés 1 Placez les documents à numériser. 2 Appuyez sur la touche [Scanner Plus] sur le panneau de commande. 3 Appuyez sur le bouton de numérisation programmé. 5 Scanner IP 5-48 bizhub 362/282/222 4 Appuyez sur la touche [Départ]. Le document est numérisé et envoyé à l'ordinateur spécifié. Si vous aviez spécifié "Show dialogue after received", une boîte de dialogue indiquant que les données ont été reçues s'affiche à l'ordinateur. Scanner IP 5 bizhub 362/282/222 5-49 Visionner l'image numérisée 1 Démarrez Scanner IP. 2 Dans la fenêtre principale, sélectionnez le dossier dans lequel les données sont enregistrées, puis double-cliquez sur le fichier image. Le logiciel relié au fichier démarre et l'image est affichée. ! Détails Si vous aviez coché la case "Save folder as a key" dans la fenêtre principale, le fichier image est enregistré dans un dossier créé avec le même nom que le bouton. Si vous aviez sélectionné [Thumbnails], une image réduite des fichiers TIFF et PDF enregistrés dans le dossier ouvert peut être visionnée. Cliquez sur une imagette pour ouvrir la FenêtreVisionner et pour visionner les images. 5 Scanner IP 5-50 bizhub 362/282/222 Spécifier l'impression automatique avec IP Scanner 1 Démarrez Scanner IP. 2 Dans la fenêtre principale, cliquez sur [Scanner Key Registration]. Scanner IP 5 bizhub 362/282/222 5-51 3 Spécifiez le nom de la touche Scanner dans la boîte de dialogue Scanner Settings. – Pour plus de détails, voir "Boîte de dialogue Scanner Settings" à la page 5-24. 4 Spécifiez les paramètres "Scan Area", "Quality" et "Contrast". 5 Sélectionnez "Yes" à côté de "Automatic Print" et cliquez ensuite sur [Printer Setting]. 5 Scanner IP 5-52 bizhub 362/282/222 6 Sélectionnez une imprimante et cliquez ensuite sur [Print Property]. – Pour plus de détails, voir "Boîte de dialogue Printer Setting" à la page 5-34. 7 Spécifiez les paramètres nécessaires aux champs groupés "Page Settings" et "Printer Settings" et cliquez ensuite sur [OK]. – Pour plus de détails, voir "Boîte de dialogue Print Property" à la page 5-35. 8 Cliquez sur [OK]. Scanner IP 5 bizhub 362/282/222 5-53 9 Cliquez sur [Scanner Key Registration]. Le bouton de numérisation machine est programmé. 5 Scanner IP 5-54 bizhub 362/282/222 Imprimer automatiquement avec Scanner IP 1 Placez les documents à numériser. 2 Appuyez sur la touche [Scanner Plus]. 3 Appuyez sur le bouton de numérisation programmé pour l'impression automatique. – Appuyez sur le bouton du même nom que celui enregistré à partir de l'ordinateur. – Un seul bouton de numérisation peut être programmé à partir d'un ordinateur unique (même adresse IP). Le bouton apparaît en évidence. 4 Appuyez sur la touche [Départ]. L'émission vers l'ordinateur commence et, après la réception par l'ordinateur des données image, elles sont imprimées conformément aux paramètres d'impression automatique spécifiés. ! Détails Six boutons de numérisation maximum peuvent être programmés sur cette machine. Si le nombre maximal de boutons de numérisation est déjà programmé, sélectionnez un bouton sur l'écran tactile de la machine et appuyez ensuite sur [Delete] pour le supprimer. Dans ce cas, "Scanner Available" reste affiché dans Scanner IP. Si cette situation survient, cliquez sur [Delete Scanner Key] et suivez les instructions qui s'affichent à l'écran jusqu'à ce que [Scanner Key Registration] s'affiche. Scanner IP 5 bizhub 362/282/222 5-55 Spécifier l'impression automatique avec ImageReceiver 1 Effectuez un clic droit sur l'icône ImageReceiver et cliquez ensuite sur "Automatic Print Settings". – Pour plus de détails, voir "Opérations ImageReceiver" à la page 5-37. 2 Cliquez sur [Add] dans la boîte de dialogue Automatic Print Settings. 5 Scanner IP 5-56 bizhub 362/282/222 3 Spécifiez les paramètres nécessaires au champ groupé "Folder Setting" de la boîte de dialogue Folder and Printer Settings. – Assurez-vous que les paramètres de dossier spécifiés ici correspondent aux paramètres de tri. 4 Sélectionnez une imprimante et cliquez ensuite sur [Print Property]. Scanner IP 5 bizhub 362/282/222 5-57 5 Spécifiez les paramètres nécessaires aux champs groupés "Page Settings" et "Printer Settings" et cliquez ensuite sur [OK]. – Pour plus de détails, voir "Boîte de dialogue Print Property" à la page 5-35. 6 Cliquez sur [OK] dans la boîte de dialogue Folder and Printer Settings. 7 Cliquez sur [OK] dans la boîte de dialogue Automatic Print Settings. 5 Scanner IP 5-58 bizhub 362/282/222 Imprimer automatiquement avec un bouton de numérotation 1-Touche 1 Placez les documents à numériser. 2 Appuyez sur la touche [Fax/Scanner]. 3 Sélectionnez l'ordinateur spécifié pour l'impression automatique. – Pour plus de détails sur l'utilisation des boutons de numérotation 1-Touche, voir "Spécifier une destination avec un bouton de numérotation 1-touche" à la page 4-4. – Pour plus de détails sur la programmation des boutons de numérotation 1-Touche, voir "Programmer un bouton 1-touche" à la page 4-30. 4 Appuyez sur la touche [Départ]. L'émission vers l'ordinateur commence et, après la réception par l'ordinateur des données image, elles sont imprimées conformément aux paramètres d'impression automatique spécifiés. Quitter Scanner IP % Dans le menu "Fichier", cliquez sur "Sortie". Scanner IP 5 bizhub 362/282/222 5-59 5.6 Autres opérations Transférer un document reçu vers Scanner IP Les données image reçues peuvent être converties vers des fichiers image TIFF ou PDF pour ensuite être transférées vers Scanner IP sur l'ordinateur. Les étapes suivantes doivent être spécifiées si vous voulez transférer un document reçu vers Scanner IP. Si vous cochez la case "Sort by FAX information" dans l'onglet Réception document de la boîte de dialogue qui s'affiche lorsque vous cliquez sur "Sort Settings" dans le menu "Settings" du scanner IP, le fichier image est enregistré dans un dossier créé avec un nom à partir de l'identifiant (numéro de téléphone, etc.) pour le document fax reçu. Si les informations sur le destinataire contiennent des caractères qui ne peuvent pas être utilisés dans des noms de dossier (\ / : * ? " < > or |), aucun dossier n'est créé à l'aide des informations sur le destinataire. Dans ce cas, le fichier image est enregistré dans un dossier créé avec le nom du bouton ou la date. (Si des caractères ne pouvant être utilisés dans un nom de fichier sont utilisés pour enregistrer le nom du bouton, les caractères sont remplacés par "_" (souligner).) Toutefois, si vous ne cochez pas la case "Folder by key name" ou la case "Create new folder by Date", les données sont enregistrées dans le dossier "My Images". Si l'ordinateur de destination du transfert n'est pas en marche ou si ImageReceiver n'a pas encore démarré, le document transféré ne peut pas être reçu. Dans ce cas, le document reçu est imprimé et le fichier image est supprimé après l'impression. S'il est difficile d'identifier le destinataire à partir d'un nom de dossier créé uniquement avec les informations sur le destinataire, par exemple, si les informations sur le destinataire (identifiant) contiennent seulement un numéro de téléphone, il est possible d'ajouter un nom plus facilement identifiable devant les informations sur le destinataire. Pour changer le nom du dossier, cliquez sur "Renommer" dans Windows. Exemple : "Ventes $ 123456789" Entrez le nom comme suit : $ (Assurez-vous d'entrer.) Paramètre Référence de page Pour la gestion de documents F-Code Guide de l'utilisateur [Opérations Fax] Port Traitement Doc. reçus Destination pour faire suivre Guide de l'utilisateur [Opérations Scanner réseau] Pour enregistrer l'adresse IP d'une destination de distribution à l'aide d'un bouton de numérotation 1-touche "Enregistrer une destination" (p. 4-30) 5 Scanner IP 5-60 bizhub 362/282/222 2 Remarque Les données d'un même destinataire peuvent être enregistrées dans le même dossier, même si le nom du dossier est changé après. Transférer vers Scanner IP Spécifiez les paramètres suivants pour enregistrer les données de document reçues dans le dossier ordinateur spécifié. 1 Dans un bouton de numérotation 1-touche, enregistrez l'adresse IP de l'ordinateur vers lequel les données seront transférées. – Sélectionnez Scan vers PC comme mode d'émission. 2 Spécifiez les paramètres de transfert de l'écran Gestion de document (affiché depuis l'écran Gestion administrateur 1). – Pour plus de détails sur les paramètres de gestion de document, voir le Guide de l'utilisateur [Opérations Scanner réseau]. 3 Dans la boîte de dialogue Paramètres de tri (onglet Réception document) du scanner IP, spécifiez le dossier dans lequel les données sont censées être enregistrées. 6 Opérations Relais IP Opérations Relais IP 6 bizhub 362/282/222 6-3 6 Opérations Relais IP 6.1 Avant l'émission Exécutez les opérations suivantes avant d'utiliser la fonction relais IP. Spécifiez les paramètres suivants si vous voulez utiliser cette machine pour envoyer la commande d'émission d'une télécopie relayée par une autre machine. Définir "Restreindre" sous "Passerelle émission" Réglez "Passerelle TX" sur l'écran Paramètres Réseau (affiché en appuyant sur [Admin. 2] – [Paramètres réseau] – [Paramètres réseau 1]) sur "Restreindre". ! Détails Si vous voulez utiliser cette machine comme machine de relais, définir "Autoriser" sous "Passerelle émission". Pour plus de détails sur l'utilisation de cette machine comme machine de relais, voir le Guide de l'utilisateur [Opérations Fax]. Vous pouvez empêcher les émissions incorrectes vers des destinataires non visés. Pour plus de détails, voir "Spécifier les paramètres d'activation du logiciel (fonctions de l'appareil)" à la page 8-11. Spécifier les paramètres des stations de relais Spécifiez l'adresse IP et le nom de domaine des machines de relais. Sélectionnez les machines de relais connectées à la ligne téléphonique normale. Pour plus de détails, voir les pages qui suivent. Pour spécifier les paramètres depuis le panneau de commande de cette machine, voir "Paramètres relais IP" à la page 8-6. Pour spécifier les paramètres depuis PageScope Web Connection, voir "Paramètres relais IP (mode Administrateur)" à la page 7-29. 6 Opérations Relais IP 6-4 bizhub 362/282/222 6.2 Spécifier un destinataire avec un bouton de numérotation 1-touche Si un destinataire est enregistré à l'aide d'un bouton de numérotation 1-touche, les données peuvent être envoyées en appuyant simplement sur le bouton de numérotation 1-touche. Qui plus est, il est possible d'ajouter d'autres fonctions d'émission ou d'enregistrer un programme de courrier électronique. ! Détails Pour plus de détails sur l'enregistrement d'un bouton de numérotation 1-touche, voir "Enregistrer un destinataire" à la page 6-30. Pour plus de détails sur l'enregistrement d'un programme de courrier électronique, voir "Enregistrer un programme de courrier électronique" à la page 3-39. Sélectionner un bouton une touche Voici les différentes manières de sélectionner un bouton une touche. Utilisez la méthode appropriée selon le nombre de destinataires et l'utilisation souhaitée. - Pression directe sur le bouton 1-touche - Saisir le numéro du bouton 1-touche - Chercher le nom d'un destinataire - Spécifier la chaîne de numérotation Opérations Relais IP 6 bizhub 362/282/222 6-5 Spécifier un destinataire en appuyant sur un bouton de numérotation 1-touche 1 Placez les documents à numériser. 2 Appuyez sur la touche [Fax/Scanner]. – L'écran qui s'affiche après l'activation de la touche [Fax/Scanner] peut être spécifié à l'aide du paramètre "Ecran par défaut" de l'écran Choix utilisateur. Pour plus de détails, consulter le Guide de l'utilisateur [Opérations Copie]. 3 Appuyez sur [1-touche]. 4 Sélectionnez l'index contenant le destinataire souhaité et appuyez sur le bouton de numérotation 1-Touche. – Avec le même bouton de numérotation 1-touche, vous pouvez spécifier plusieurs destinataires pour une émission simultanée. Il est possible de spécifier 300 destinataires au maximum à l'aide d'un seul bouton de numérotation 1-touche. – Pour sélectionner un index, appuyer sur l'onglet de l'index souhaité ou appuyez sur ou pour sélectionner un autre onglet. – Pour plus de détails sur la modification des noms d'index, voir "Donner un nom à un index" à la page 3-37. – Si des paramètres de commutation logicielle avaient été spécifiés pour empêcher les radiodiffusions, un fax ne peut pas être envoyé à plusieurs destinataires. Pour plus de détails sur les paramètres de commutation logicielle, voir "Spécifier les paramètres d'activation du logiciel (fonctions de l'appareil)" à la page 8-11. 6 Opérations Relais IP 6-6 bizhub 362/282/222 5 Spécifier les paramètres appropriés dans l'onglet Qualité & réduc. conformément au document à envoyer. – Pour plus de détails, voir "Spécifier la qualité de numérisation et le taux zoom" à la page 6-15. 6 Spécifier les paramètres nécessaires dans l'onglet Menu. – Si le kit Fax en option est installé, spécifiez les paramètres nécessaires sur l'onglet de Menu FAX. – Pour plus de détails, voir "Spécifier des fonctions supplémentaires." à la page 6-19. 7 Appuyez sur la touche [Départ]. Opérations Relais IP 6 bizhub 362/282/222 6-7 Saisir le numéro du bouton 1-touche Un numéro est assigné à chaque bouton de numérotation 1-touche, comme illustré ci-dessous. Au lieu d'appuyer sur un bouton de numérotation 1-touche, la spécification du numéro du bouton de numérotation 1-touche permet de sélectionner rapidement un destinataire. 1 Placez les documents à numériser. 2 Appuyez sur la touche [Fax/Scanner]. 3 Appuyez sur la touche [#] sur le panneau de contrôle. Index 1 Index 36 6 Opérations Relais IP 6-8 bizhub 362/282/222 4 Entrer le numéro du bouton de numérotation 1-touche sur le clavier numérique. – Le bouton 1-touche spécifié s'affiche en vidéo inverse. – Avec le même bouton de numérotation 1-touche, vous pouvez spécifier plusieurs destinataires pour une émission simultanée. Il est possible de spécifier 300 destinataires au maximum à l'aide d'un seul bouton de numérotation 1-touche. – Si des paramètres de commutation logicielle avaient été spécifiés pour empêcher les radiodiffusions, un fax ne peut pas être envoyé à plusieurs destinataires. Pour plus de détails sur les paramètres de commutation logicielle, voir "Spécifier les paramètres d'activation du logiciel (fonctions de l'appareil)" à la page 8-11. 5 Spécifier les paramètres appropriés dans l'onglet Qualité & réduc. conformément au document à envoyer. – Pour plus de détails, voir "Spécifier la qualité de numérisation et le taux zoom" à la page 6-15. 6 Spécifier les paramètres nécessaires dans l'onglet Menu. – Si le kit Fax en option est installé, spécifiez les paramètres nécessaires sur l'onglet de Menu FAX. – Pour plus de détails, voir "Spécifier des fonctions supplémentaires." à la page 6-19. 7 Appuyez sur la touche [Départ]. Opérations Relais IP 6 bizhub 362/282/222 6-9 Recherche d'un destinataire une touche Il est possible de rechercher le nom d'un destinataire enregistré à l'aide d'un bouton de numérotation 1-touche dans le but de sélectionner le bouton de numérotation 1-touche. 1 Placez les documents à numériser. 2 Appuyez sur la touche [Fax/Scanner]. 3 Appuyez sur [Recherche]. – Si une recherche LDAP est possible, appuyez sur [Recherche LDAP] pour chercher plus loin. 4 Tapez le nom du destinataire, puis appuyez sur [OK]. L'écran qui s'affiche renferme la liste des boutons de numérotation 1-touche programmés avec le destinataire dont le nom commence par le nom entré. 5 Appuyer sur le bouton de numérotation 1-touche souhaité pour le sélectionner. – Avec le même bouton de numérotation 1-touche, vous pouvez spécifier plusieurs destinataires pour une émission simultanée. Il est possible de spécifier 300 destinataires au maximum à l'aide d'un seul bouton de numérotation 1-touche. 6 Opérations Relais IP 6-10 bizhub 362/282/222 – Si des paramètres de commutation logicielle avaient été spécifiés pour empêcher les radiodiffusions, un fax ne peut pas être envoyé à plusieurs destinataires. Pour plus de détails sur les paramètres de commutation logicielle, voir "Spécifier les paramètres d'activation du logiciel (fonctions de l'appareil)" à la page 8-11. 6 Spécifier les paramètres appropriés dans l'onglet Qualité & réduc. conformément au document à envoyer. – Pour plus de détails, voir "Spécifier la qualité de numérisation et le taux zoom" à la page 6-15. 7 Spécifier les paramètres nécessaires dans l'onglet Menu. – Si le kit Fax en option est installé, spécifiez les paramètres nécessaires sur l'onglet de Menu FAX. – Pour plus de détails, voir "Spécifier des fonctions supplémentaires." à la page 6-19. 8 Appuyez sur la touche [Départ]. Opérations Relais IP 6 bizhub 362/282/222 6-11 Spécifier la chaîne de numérotation Si l'adresse du destinataire compte plus de 64 caractères, on peut spécifier l'adresse en combinant des adresses enregistrées sous des boutons 1-touche et une adresse introduite manuellement. Appuyez sur [Num. en Chaîne], et sélectionnez des boutons 1-touche ou entrez une adresse. ! Détails La chaîne de numérotation ne peut servir qu'à un seul destinataire par émission. Dans le cadre de la chaîne de numérotation, l'adresse peut comporter jusqu'à 192 caractères (64 caractères d'un bouton 1-touche + 64 caractères d'un bouton 1-touche + 64 caractères d'une adresse introduite manuellement). 2 Remarque Les boutons 1-touche à utiliser dans la chaîne de numérotation doivent être programmés à l'avance. 6 Opérations Relais IP 6-12 bizhub 362/282/222 6.3 Entrer un numéro de fax Le numéro de fax d'un destinataire non enregistré dans un bouton de numérotation 1-touche peut être entrée directement afin d'être spécifiée. 2 Remarque Si des paramètres de commutation logicielle avaient été spécifiés pour limiter la numérotation, il n'est pas possible d'envoyer un fax en tapant directement le numéro de fax. Pour plus de détails sur les paramètres de commutation logicielle, voir "Spécifier les paramètres d'activation du logiciel (fonctions de l'appareil)" à la page 8-11. Pour entrer un numéro de fax 1 Placez les documents à numériser. 2 Appuyez sur la touche [Fax/Scanner]. 3 Appuyez sur [Entrée adresse]. 4 Sélectionnez le mode de communication. Appuyez sur [Changer mode comm]. Opérations Relais IP 6 bizhub 362/282/222 6-13 5 Appuyez sur [FaxInternet], ensuite sur [Relais IP] et sur [Entrée]. 6 Entrez le numéro de fax du destinataire. – Pour changer le numéro de fax qui a été entré, appuyez sur la touche [C] (effacer), et entrez le numéro de fax correct. – Le numéro entré peut comporter jusqu'à 64 caractères. 7 Pour changer la machine de relais, appuyez sur [Station relais], puis sélectionnez la station de relais souhaitée. – Cliquez sur "Paramètres relais IP" (page 8-6) à l'écran Paramètres réseau pour enregistrer la machine de relais d'avance. 8 Appuyez sur [Entrée]. 9 Spécifier les paramètres appropriés dans l'onglet Qualité & réduc. conformément au document à envoyer. – Pour plus de détails, voir "Spécifier la qualité de numérisation et le taux zoom" à la page 6-15. 6 Opérations Relais IP 6-14 bizhub 362/282/222 10 Spécifier les paramètres nécessaires dans l'onglet Menu. – Si le kit Fax en option est installé, spécifiez les paramètres nécessaires sur l'onglet de Menu FAX. – Pour plus de détails, voir "Spécifier des fonctions supplémentaires." à la page 6-19. 11 Appuyez sur la touche [Départ]. Opérations Relais IP 6 bizhub 362/282/222 6-15 6.4 Spécifier la qualité de numérisation et le taux zoom Appuyez sur [Qualité & réduc.] à l'écran qui s'affiche lorsque la touche [Fax/Scanner] est activée pour spécifier la qualité de l'image numérisée et le taux zoom. ! Détails Une fois l'émission terminée, les paramètres d'émission reviennent à leurs valeurs par défaut. Qualité Sélectionner la définition de numérisation (quantité de détails). Parmi les paramètres de définition disponibles, sélectionnez la définition appropriée en fonction du type de document en cours de numérisation. ! Détails Si des données sont envoyées avec le réglage "Texte/Photo", des motifs moirés peuvent apparaître sur certaines photos. Ce n'est pas signe de mauvais fonctionnement. Pour réduire cet effet moiré, envoyez les données avec le réglage "Photo" ou "Super Photo". Si vous aviez sélectionné une haute résolution afin d'envoyer une image claire, il se peut que le format des données image envoyées s'agrandisse et que le fournisseur ou le serveur n'autorise pas l'envoi des données. Vérifiez tout d'abord les restrictions de format concernant les données pouvant être envoyées. Réglage Description Standard Pour les documents contenant du texte normal (comme l'écriture manuscrite) Fin Super Fin Texte 600 dpi Pour les documents comportant des parties imprimées en petits caractères, comme les journaux ou des documents contenant des illustrations détaillées Texte/Photo Texte/Photo 600 dpi Pour les documents contenant du texte et des images avec des nuances de couleur (comme les photos) Photo Super Photo Photo 600 dpi Pour les documents avec des nuances de couleur, comme les photos 6 Opérations Relais IP 6-16 bizhub 362/282/222 Pour sélectionner un paramètre de qualité 1 Appuyez sur [Qualité & réduc.]. 2 Appuyez sur [Qualité] et ensuite sur le bouton du paramètre de qualité voulu. – Pour sélectionner une résolution plus élevée, appuyez sur [600 dpi]. Opérations Relais IP 6 bizhub 362/282/222 6-17 Densité Parmi les paramètres de définition disponibles, sélectionnez la définition appropriée en fonction du type de document en cours de numérisation. ! Détails Si vous sélectionnez "Texte 600 dpi" ou "Texte & Photo 600 dpi", vous pouvez régler la densité sur l'un des trois niveaux suivants : "Clair", "Normal", ou "Foncé". Pour sélectionner un paramètre Densité 1 Appuyez sur [Qualité & réduc.]. 2 Appuyez sur [Densité] et ensuite sur le bouton du paramètre de densité voulu. Réglage Description Clair Normal Foncé Pour les documents dont la couleur de fond est sombre, comme le journal et les bleus Pour les documents standard Pour les documents comportant du texte pâle ou de couleur 6 Opérations Relais IP 6-18 bizhub 362/282/222 Réglage du Format Original Vous pouvez spécifier la zone numérisée comme format standard. De toutes manières, vous pouvez envoyer une portion d'un document grand format ou envoyer un document de format non standard comme format standard. 1 Appuyez sur [Qualité & réduc.]. 2 Appuyez sur [Réduction/Zone] et ensuite sur [Réglage format orig.]. 3 Sélectionnez le format de numérisation voulu et appuyez ensuite sur [Entrée]. – Appuyez sur [DétectAuto] pour sélectionner automatiquement le format le plus proche du format du document. Cependant, si le document est plus petit que le format Letter, c'est le format Letter qui sera sélectionné. Opérations Relais IP 6 bizhub 362/282/222 6-19 6.5 Spécifier des fonctions supplémentaires. Appuyez sur [Menu] sur l'écran qui s'affiche lorsque la touche [Fax/Scanner] est activée pour ajouter les fonctions suivantes. 2 Remarque Si le kit Fax en option est installé, le [Menu] passe à [Menu Fax]. Fonction Description Param. 1 *(Param. 1) Identification Sélectionnez les informations, comme le nom, le numéro de fax ou l'adresse de cette machine ou le nom du destinataire, imprimés sur le bord de la page. Pour plus de détails sur l'enregistrement des informations relatives à l'identifiant, voir le Guide de l'utilisateur [Opérations Scanner réseau]. Si un nom de destinataire est sélectionné, le nom du destinataire enregistré dans le bouton de numérotation 1-Touche est imprimé. Rapport Emission Sélectionnez les conditions d'impression du rapport d'émission. Par défaut : Sélectionnez ce réglage pour que le rapport soit imprimé dans les conditions fixées depuis l'écran Gestion Administrateur. OUI : sélectionnez ce paramètre pour imprimer le rapport quelque soit le résultat de l'émission. En cas d'échec de l'émission : Sélectionnez ce réglage pour n'imprimer le rapport qu'en cas d'échec de l'émission. NON : Sélectionnez ce paramètre pour ne pas imprimer le rapport quelque soit le résultat de l'émission. 2 en 1 Sélectionnez s'il faut ou non envoyer les données à l'aide de la fonction "2en1" (réduire de pages pour qu'elles passent sur une seule page). Emission Recto/Verso Sélectionnez s'il faut procéder ou non à une émission recto/verso. Vous pouvez aussi spécifier la position de la marge de reliure et l'orientation de la page. Emission Rotation Sélectionnez s'il faut oui ou non pivoter l'image numérisée conformément à l'orientation du papier de la machine de réception. Vous pouvez spécifier cette fonction lors de l'envoi dune image au format A4 avec une résolution de 200 dpi ou moins. 6 Opérations Relais IP 6-20 bizhub 362/282/222 * Passe à ( ) si le kit Fax en option est installé. 2 Remarque Les paramètres suivants sont sans effet, même si les réglages en ont été spécifiés. - "Sélection objet" sur l'onglet Réseau - "Adresse de réponse" sur l'onglet Réseau - "Nom fich." sur l'onglet Réseau - "Notification Email" sur l'onglet Réseau Param. 2 *(Param. 2) Emission Priorité Sélectionnez si l'émission des données est ou non prioritaire sur les autres tâches. Param. TX horloge Spécifiez l'heure d'envoi du fax. Tampon Spécifiez si l'image numérisée est tamponnée pour indiquer qu'elle a été numérisée. Le document doit être chargé dans l'introducteur ADF. 2 Remarque Afin d'utiliser la fonction "Tampon", l'unité de pose de tampon en option doit être installée. Fonction Description Opérations Relais IP 6 bizhub 362/282/222 6-21 Spécifier la condition d'impression du rapport d'émission Vous pouvez spécifier le conditions d'impression du rapport du résultat d'émission. Les conditions d'impression du rapport du résultat d'émission sont prédéfinies par les réglages de "Paramètres de rapport" de l'écran de Gestion "Administrateur" 1. Suivez la procédure décrite ci-dessous pour changer ces conditions. 1 Appuyez sur [Menu]. – Si le kit Fax en option est installé, appuyez sur [Menu FAX]. 2 Appuyez sur [Rapport EM] sur l'onglet Param. 1 – Si le kit Fax en option est installé, appuyez sur [Rapport EM] sur l'onglet Param. 1. 3 Spécifiez la condition d'impression souhaitée, et appuyez sur [Entrée]. 6 Opérations Relais IP 6-22 bizhub 362/282/222 Spécifier une émission 2en1 1 Appuyez sur [Menu]. – Si le kit Fax en option est installé, appuyez sur [Menu FAX]. 2 Appuyez sur [2en1] sur l'onglet Param. 1. – Si le kit Fax en option est installé, appuyez sur [2en1] sur l'onglet Param. 1. Le bouton s'affiche en vidéo inverse. Pour annuler la fonction, appuyez à nouveau sur le bouton pour le désélectionner. Opérations Relais IP 6 bizhub 362/282/222 6-23 Spécifier les paramètres d'émission recto-verso 1 Appuyez sur [Menu]. – Si le kit Fax en option est installé, appuyez sur [Menu FAX]. 2 Appuyez sur [Emiss. R/V] sur l'onglet Param. 1. – Si le kit Fax en option est installé, appuyez sur [Emis. R/V] sur l'onglet Param. 1. 3 Sélectionnez la marge originale appropriée. – ReliéGauche : Le document est numérisé avec une marge de reliure sur le côté gauche. – ReliéHaut : Le document est numérisé avec une marge de reliure en haut. – Auto : La marge de reliure est réglée en fonction du sens de numérisation. 4 Appuyez sur [Sens Original]. 5 Sélectionnez l'orientation du document et appuyez sur [Entrée]. – Auto : Le bord long du document est automatiquement configuré comme position de reliure. 6 Appuyez sur [Entrée]. – Pour annuler la fonction, appuyez sur [NON]. 6 Opérations Relais IP 6-24 bizhub 362/282/222 ! Détails En cas de chargement d'un document recto-verso comportant des pages de différentes largeurs, nous recommandons de charger les pages d'orientation identique. Lors de la numérisation d'un document avec des pages d'orientations différentes, l'orientation des données d'image peut être erronée. Opérations Relais IP 6 bizhub 362/282/222 6-25 Spécifier le paramètre Priorité émission 1 Appuyez sur [Menu]. – Si le kit Fax en option est installé, appuyez sur [Menu FAX]. 2 Appuyez sur [Priorité EM] sur l'onglet Param. 2. – Si le kit Fax en option est installé, appuyez sur [Priorité EM] sur l'onglet Param. 2. Le bouton s'affiche en vidéo inverse. Pour annuler la fonction, appuyez à nouveau sur le bouton pour le désélectionner. 6 Opérations Relais IP 6-26 bizhub 362/282/222 Spécifier les paramètres d'émission horloge 1 Appuyez sur [Menu]. – Si le kit Fax en option est installé, appuyez sur [Menu FAX]. 2 Appuyez sur [Param. TX horloge] sur l'onglet Param. 2. – Si le kit Fax en option est installez, appuyez sur [Param TX horloge] sur l'onglet Param. 2 3 Spécifiez l'heure d'envoi de l'émission. – Appuyez sur [Heure] ou [Minute], et tapez sur le clavier numérique l'heure désirée. 4 Appuyez sur [Entrée]. – Pour annuler la fonction, appuyez sur [NON]. 2 Remarque Il est possible de spécifier jusqu'à 200 documents avec une émission horloge. Opérations Relais IP 6 bizhub 362/282/222 6-27 Spécifier le paramètre Tampon 1 Appuyez sur [Menu]. – Si le kit Fax en option est installé, appuyez sur [Menu FAX]. 2 Appuyez sur [Tampon] sur l'onglet Param. 2. – Si le kit Fax en option est installé, appuyez sur [Tampon] sur l'onglet Param. 2. 3 Sélectionnez la position du tamponnage, et appuyez sur [Entrée]. 6 Opérations Relais IP 6-28 bizhub 362/282/222 6.6 Si l'émission n'est pas arrivée à son terme Si l'émission ne s'est pas achevée correctement, un rapport du résultat de l'émission est imprimé. ! Détails Vous pouvez modifier le paramètre d'impression du rapport d'émission. Pour plus de détails, voir le guide de l'utilisateur [Opérations Scanner Réseau]. Consulter le rapport d'émission No. Rubrique Description 1 Date d'émission du rapport Montre la date d'émission du rapport. 2 Nom de l'identifiant Indique le nom de l'identifiant. 3 Informa tion sur l'émission Montre le numéro du document émis, la durée requise et le mode de communication. Rouleau 2 1 3 5 4 Opérations Relais IP 6 bizhub 362/282/222 6-29 Réexpédition 20 documents au maximum n'ayant pas pu être envoyés sont enregistrés pour une nouvelle tentative. 1 Appuyez sur [Liste Tâches], puis [Type], et sélectionnez le document qui n'a pas pu être envoyé. – Si [Réessayer] ou [Changer Destination] apparaissent à l'écran, le document peut être envoyé une nouvelle fois sans qu'une nouvelle numérisation ne s'impose. 2 Pour envoyer le document au même destinataire, appuyez sur [Réessayer]. – Pour envoyer le document à un destinataire différent, appuyez sur [Changer Destination]. 4 Résultats d'émission Indique les résultats de l'émission. L'une des informations suivantes peut s'afficher. OK : l'émission s'est déroulée avec succès. INTERR : l'émission a été interrompue. F.MEM : la mémoire est pleine. NG : l'émission s'est soldée par un échec. PT.DEL : l'émission vers certains destinataires a échoué. F.DATA : Le volume des données a dépassé la limite admissible. IMG NG : La résolution d'émission était incorrecte et l'émission a donc été interrompue. Code d'erreur : Pour plus de détails, voir "Codes d'erreur" à la page 9-4. 5 Image transmise Reproduit une partie de l'image émise. No. Rubrique Description 6 Opérations Relais IP 6-30 bizhub 362/282/222 6.7 Enregistrer un destinataire Programmer un bouton 1-touche Si un destinataire est enregistré avec un bouton de numérotation 1-touche, l'émission peut être envoyée facilement et avec précision. Deux types de destinataires peuvent être enregistrées sous un bouton de numérotation 1-touche : un destinataire principal et un destinataire secondaire, les données étant envoyées à cette dernière en cas d'échec de l'émission au destinataire principal. 2 Remarque Si le paramètre "Limiter Edition 1-Touche" de l'écran Mode Administrateur (affiché à partir de l'écran de Gestion administrateur 1) est réglé sur "Oui", si des paramètres de commutation logicielle avaient été spécifiés pour limiter l'enregistrement de boutons de numérotation 1-Touche à l'administrateur, ou si "Sécurité renforcée" est réglé sur "Oui", les boutons de numérotation 1-Touche peuvent seulement être enregistrés, édités ou supprimés en mode Administrateur. Pour plus de détails sur les réglages en mode Administrateur, se référer au guide de l'utilisateur [Opérations Fax]. Pour plus de détails sur les paramètres de commutation logicielle, voir "Spécifier les paramètres d'activation du logiciel (fonctions de l'appareil)" à la page 8-11. ! Détails Les modes de communication suivants peuvent être spécifiés pour la destination secondaire. - PC (E-mail) - PC (Scanner) - Internet FAX (Internet FAX) - Internet FAX (EM-IP) - Internet FAX (Relais IP) - FAX (G3) Le mode de communication peut être spécifié si le kit Fax, en option, est installé. 2 Remarque Certains modes de communication risquent de ne pas être disponibles, selon les réglages de la machine. Pour plus de détails, consultez l'administrateur. Opérations Relais IP 6 bizhub 362/282/222 6-31 Vous pouvez spécifier les paramètres suivants. 2 Rappel Si la touche [Utilitaire/Compteur] est actionnée pour enregistrer des éléments et spécifier des paramètres, n'oubliez pas d'appuyer sur la touche [Réinitialisation] sur le panneau de contrôle après être retourné à l'écran d'accueil. Rubrique Description Nom destination à distance Tapez le nom du destinataire censé figurer sur le bouton de numérotation 1-Touche. Ce champ peut comporter 12 caractères maximum. Exemple : Tokyo br Destination Entrez le numéro de fax du destinataire. Le numéro entré peut comporter jusqu'à 64 caractères. Paramètres station de relais IP Sélectionnez la station de relais. 6 Opérations Relais IP 6-32 bizhub 362/282/222 Pour programmer un bouton 1-touche 1 Appuyez sur la touche [Utilitaire/Compteur]. 2 Appuyez sur [Paramètres Utilis.]. 3 Appuyez sur [Entrée E-mail]. – Si le kit Fax en option est installé, appuyez sur [FAX]. 4 Appuyez sur [1-Touche]. Opérations Relais IP 6 bizhub 362/282/222 6-33 5 Appuyez sur le bouton du destinataire 1-Touche à enregistrer. – Appuyez sur un onglet d'index ou sur [Répertoire] et appuyez ensuite sur le bouton de numérotation 1-touche souhaité. – Si l'appareil est réglé pour autoriser les recherches LDAP, un écran s'affiche pour permettre la définition du bouton 1-Touche pour interdire ou autoriser la possibilité de découverte de l'adresse par une recherche LDAP. Pour ce bouton, sélectionnez "Non". 6 Tapez le nom du destinataire qui apparaîtra sur le bouton de numérotation 1-touche, et appuyez sur [Suite]. 7 Sélectionnez le mode de communication. Appuyez sur [FaxInternet], ensuite sur [Relais IP] et sur [Entrée]. 8 Entrez le numéro de fax du destinataire. – Le numéro entré peut comporter jusqu'à 64 caractères. – Pour changer le numéro de fax qui a été entré, appuyez sur la touche [C] (effacer), et entrez le numéro de fax correct. 6 Opérations Relais IP 6-34 bizhub 362/282/222 9 Pour changer la machine de relais, appuyez sur [Station relais], puis sélectionnez la station de relais souhaitée. 10 Appuyez sur [Entrée]. 11 Appuyez sur [Suite]. 12 Vérifiez les informations à enregistrer, et appuyez sur [Entrée]. 13 Appuyez sur [Entrée] dans chacun des écrans jusqu'à ce que l'écran d'accueil s'affiche. Opérations Relais IP 6 bizhub 362/282/222 6-35 Changer/supprimer un bouton de numérotation 1-touche 1 Exécutez les étapes 1 à 4 de la procédure décrite dans "Pour programmer un bouton 1-touche". 2 Appuyez sur le bouton de numérotation 1-touche que vous voulez modifier ou supprimer. 3 Appuyez sur le bouton dont vous voulez changer le réglage, puis procédez à la modification. – Pour supprimer le bouton de numérotation 1-touche, appuyez sur la touche [Supprime]. 4 Vérifiez les informations à enregistrer, et appuyez sur [Entrée]. 5 Appuyez sur [Entrée] dans chacun des écrans jusqu'à ce que l'écran d'accueil s'affiche. 6 Opérations Relais IP 6-36 bizhub 362/282/222 Copier un bouton 1-touche 1 Exécutez les étapes 1 à 4 de la procédure décrite dans "Pour programmer un bouton 1-touche". 2 Appuyez sur le bouton du destinataire 1-Touche à copier. 3 Appuyez sur [1-Touche] et ensuite sur [Copie 1-Touche]. 4 Appuyez sur le bouton sous lequel les paramètres de bouton de numérotation 1-touche sont censés être copiés. – Sélectionnez un bouton de numérotation 1-touche ne comportant encore aucun paramètre enregistré. – Pour désélectionner le bouton 1-touche de destination pour la copie, il suffit d'appuyer une nouvelle fois sur le bouton sélectionné. 5 Appuyez sur [Entrée] dans chacun des écrans jusqu'à ce que l'écran d'accueil s'affiche. Opérations Relais IP 6 bizhub 362/282/222 6-37 Enregistrer/Editer/Supprimer le destinataire secondaire 1 Exécutez les étapes 1 à 4 de la procédure décrite dans "Pour programmer un bouton 1-touche". 2 Appuyez sur le bouton de numérotation 1-touche sur lequel un destinataire secondaire est censé être programmé. 3 Appuyez sur [1-Touche], puis [Enregistrement adresse secondaire]. 4 Entrez les informations relatives au destinataire secondaire, et appuyez sur [Entrée]. – Si une destination secondaire est déjà enregistrée, vérifiez les paramètres qui s'affichent et appuyez ensuite sur [Changer Paramètres] ou sur [Supprime]. – En cas de suppression, un message de confirmation s'affiche. Appuyez sur [Oui]. 5 Appuyez sur [Entrée] dans chacun des écrans jusqu'à ce que l'écran d'accueil s'affiche. 6 Opérations Relais IP 6-38 bizhub 362/282/222 7 Spécifier les paramètres avec PageScope Web Connection Spécifier les paramètres avec PageScope Web Connection 7 bizhub 362/282/222 7-3 7 Spécifier les paramètres avec PageScope Web Connection 7.1 Paramètres que vous pouvez définir avec PageScope Web Connection PageScope Web Connection est un utilitaire de gestion de périphériques pris en charge par le serveur HTTP intégré à la machine. À partir d'un navigateur Internet installé sur un ordinateur relié au réseau, vous pouvez définir des paramètres de machine avec PageScope Web Connection. Il est commode de spécifier les paramètres avec l'utilitaire parce que le texte peut ainsi être facilement saisi depuis votre ordinateur au lieu du panneau de commande de la machine. Vous pouvez spécifier les paramètres de fonction de réseau et de numérisation suivante. PageScope Web Connection propose un mode Utilisateur, accessible à tous les utilisateurs, et un mode Administrateur, accessible seulement après introduction du code d'accès Administrateur approprié. Les paramètres suivants peuvent être spécifiés dans chaque mode. Onglet Lecture (mode Utilisateur) 2 Remarque Si le kit Fax en option est installé, l'onglet Lecture se transforme en Fax/Lecture. Paramètre Description Enregistrement adresse 1-touche Programmez les enregistrements 1-touche pour les destinataires du document envoyé en utilisant la fonction de télécopie par adresse IP et les opérations Scan vers PC et relais IP. Il est possible de modifier ou effacer les données enregistrées. Il est également possible de changer le nom d'index. Enregistrement d'un Programme FAX Enregistrer des programmes fax comme enregistrements 1-touche. Contrairement aux enregistrements 1-touche où seuls les destinataires sont enregistrés, il est possible d'enregistrer les paramètres de numérisation et plusieurs destinataires. Il est possible de modifier ou effacer les données enregistrées. Pour plus de détails, voir le guide de l'utilisateur [Opérations Scanner Réseau]. 7 Spécifier les paramètres avec PageScope Web Connection 7-4 bizhub 362/282/222 2 Remarque Si le paramètre "Limiter Edition 1-Touche" de l'écran Mode Administrateur (affiché à partir de l'écran de Gestion Administrateur) est réglé sur "Oui", l'onglet Scan (2) est ajouté à la page du mode Administrateur pour que les destinataires 1-Touche puissent être enregistrés, modifiés et supprimés. L'onglet Lecture n'apparaît pas sur la page du mode Utilisateur. Onglet Réseau (Mode Administrateur) Pour plus de détails sur les autres paramètres réseau requis pour l'utilisation de cette machine, voir le Guide de l'utilisateur [Opérations Scanner réseau]. Paramètre Description Paramètres relais IP Lorsque vous envoyez une télécopie en relais IP, spécifiez l'adresse IP et le nom de domaine des machines de relais. En outre, il est possible de sélectionner les principales stations de relais à utiliser. Spécifier les paramètres avec PageScope Web Connection 7 bizhub 362/282/222 7-5 7.2 Utiliser PageScope Web Connection Configuration minimale requise ! Détails PageScope Web Connection est un utilitaire de gestion de périphériques supporté par le serveur HTTP intégré au périphérique. À l'aide d'un navigateur Internet sur un ordinateur connecté au réseau, vous pouvez définir des paramètres de machine avec PageScope Web Connection. 2 Rappel Ne pas utiliser de serveur proxy en cas d'accès à partir de PageScope Web Connection. 2 Remarque Si cette machine a été réglée pour interdire l'utilisation de TCP/IP, vous ne pourrez pas utiliser PageScope Web Connection. Rubrique Environnement Réseau Ethernet (TCP/IP) Applications informatiques Pour Windows NT 4.0 : Microsoft Internet Explorer 4 ou ultérieur, ou Netscape Navigator 4.73 ou 7.0 Pour Windows 2000 : Microsoft Internet Explorer 5 ou ultérieur, ou Netscape Navigator 7.0 Pour Windows XP/Server 2003 : Microsoft Internet Explorer 6 ou ultérieur, ou Netscape Navigator 7.0 Pour Windows Vista/Server 2008 : Microsoft Internet Explorer 7 ou ultérieur, ou Netscape Navigator 7.0 * Avec Microsoft Internet Explorer 5.5, il se peut que les boutons 1-touche ne soient correctement exportés. Utilisez Microsoft Internet Explorer 5.5 Service Pack 1 ou ultérieur. 7 Spécifier les paramètres avec PageScope Web Connection 7-6 bizhub 362/282/222 Accéder à PageScope Web Connection Vous pouvez accéder à PageScope Web Connection à partir d'un navigateur Internet. 1 Lancez le navigateur Internet. 2 Dans la barre d'adresses, tapez l'adresse IP de cette machine et appuyez ensuite sur la touche [Entrée]. – http:/// Exemple : si l'adresse IP de cet appareil est 192.168.1.20 http://192.168.1.20/ ! Détails Si SSL/TLS est activé, l'URL devient : https:/// Même si "http://" est saisi, l'accès à l'URL sur "https://" est automatique. (Si "Sécurité renforcée" est réglé sur "Oui", SSL est activé de manière forcée.) Spécifier les paramètres avec PageScope Web Connection 7 bizhub 362/282/222 7-7 Si les réglages Authentification Utilisateur ont été appliqués. Si les paramètres d'Authentification Utilisateur ou d'Authentification serveur externe ont été appliqués, la page suivante apparaît. Tapez le Nom Utilisateur et le mot de passe et cliquez ensuite sur [Connexion]. ! Détails Pour plus de détails sur l'authentification utilisateur, voir le Guide de l'utilisateur [Opérations Copie]. Pour obtenir un nom d'utilisateur et un mot de passe, contactez l'Administrateur réseau. Lorsque vous êtes connecté en mode Authentification Utilisateur, la connexion est soumise à un délai ; vous serez automatiquement déconnecté du mode Administrateur si aucune opération n'est effectuée pendant 10 minutes. Si "Sécurité renforcée" est réglé sur "Oui" ou si des verrouillages d'accès sont spécifiés par l'intermédiaire des paramètres de commutation logicielle, la saisie incorrecte trois fois de suite d'un mot de passe verrouille la machine pour empêcher toute opération. Si cette machine est verrouillée, contactez l'administrateur de la machine. Pour vous déconnecter, cliquez sur [Déconnexion] dans le coin supérieur droit de la page. Si les paramètres Authentification Groupe ont été appliqués Si les paramètres Authentification Groupe ont été appliqués, il n'est pas nécessaire d'entrer le numéro de compte pour accéder à PageScope Web Connection. 7 Spécifier les paramètres avec PageScope Web Connection 7-8 bizhub 362/282/222 Structure des pages La page qui apparaît immédiatement après l'accès à PageScope Web Connection est la page du mode Utilisateur. Tous les utilisateurs peuvent voir cette page. ! Détails Si vous saisissez le mot de passe dans le champ "Mot de passe administrateur", vous pouvez afficher la page administrateur. Pour plus de détails, voir "Connexion en mode Administrateur" à la page 7-10. Les pages de PageScope Web Connection sont structurées comme illustré ci-dessous. 7 3 4 5 6 1 8 9 10 2 Spécifier les paramètres avec PageScope Web Connection 7 bizhub 362/282/222 7-9 2 Remarque Pour restaurer l'afficheur d'état et des messages, cliquez sur [Actualiser] dans le navigateur. No. Rubrique Description 1 Logo Konica Minolta Cliquez sur le logo pour accéder au site Konica Minolta Web à l'adresse suivante. http://konicaminolta.com 2 Logo PageScope Web Connection Cliquez sur le logo PageScope Web Connection pour afficher les informations de version. 3 Champ de connexion mode administrateur Entrez le mot de passe pour vous connecter au mode administrateur. 4 Affichage des états Les états des sections Imprimante et scanner de la machine s'affichent sous forme d'icônes. 5 Affichage des messages Si une erreur survient sur la machine, l'état du défaut/de l'erreur et d'autres informations d'erreur s'affichent. 6 Nom périphérique Affiche le nom du périphérique en cours d'accès. 7 Bouton [Déconnexion] Ce bouton apparaît une fois que vous êtes connecté lorsque les paramètres Authentification Utilisateur ont été appliqués. Cliquez sur ce bouton pour vous déconnecter. 8 Onglets Sélectionnez la catégorie des pages à afficher. Les onglets suivants s'affichent en mode Utilisateur. • Système • Tâche • Impression • Lecture 2 Remarque Si le kit Fax, en option, a été installé, l'onglet Fax/Lecture apparaît. 9 Menu Liste des informations et paramètres de l'onglet sélectionné. Le menu qui s'affiche varie en fonction de l'onglet sélectionné. 10 Informations et paramètres Affiche des détails du point de menu sélectionné. 7 Spécifier les paramètres avec PageScope Web Connection 7-10 bizhub 362/282/222 Connexion en mode Administrateur Vous pouvez passer du mode utilisateur au mode administrateur. Mais, pour définir des paramètres système ou réseau, vous devez être connecté en mode administrateur. 0 Quand vous êtes connecté en mode administrateur, le panneau de contrôle de cet appareil est verrouillé et ne peut pas être utilisé. 0 En fonction de l'état de la machine, vous pouvez ne pas pouvoir vous connecter en mode administrateur. 0 Quand vous êtes connecté en mode administrateur, si aucune opération n'est effectuée pendant une durée de 10 minutes, une temporisation survient et vous serez automatiquement déconnecté du mode administrateur. 1 Tapez le code d'accès administrateur et cliquez ensuite sur [Connexion]. Spécifier les paramètres avec PageScope Web Connection 7 bizhub 362/282/222 7-11 La page du mode administrateur s'affiche. 2 Pour retourner au mode Utilisateur, cliquez sur [Déconnexion]. 7 Spécifier les paramètres avec PageScope Web Connection 7-12 bizhub 362/282/222 Cache du navigateur Internet Les informations toutes récentes peuvent ne pas apparaître sur les pages de PageScope Web Connection parce que d'anciennes versions des pages sont enregistrées dans le cache du navigateur Internet. En outre, les problèmes suivants risquent de survenir lors de l'utilisation du cache. Quand vous utilisez PageScope Web Connection, désactivez le cache du navigateur Internet. ! Détails Si vous utilisez le programme avec le cache activé et que le mode administrateur a été désactivé, la page de désactivation risque d'apparaître même si vous réaccédez à PageScope Web Connection. En outre, comme le panneau de contrôle de la machine reste verrouillé et qu'il est inutilisable, il faut redémarrer la machine. Pour éviter ce problème, désactivez le cache. 2 Remarque Les menus et les commandes peuvent varier en fonction de la version du navigateur Internet. Pour plus de détails, voir l'Aide du navigateur Internet. Avec Internet Explorer 1 Dans le menu "Outils", cliquez sur "Options Internet". 2 Sur l'onglet Général, cliquez sur [Paramètres] sous "Fichiers Internet temporaires". 3 Sélectionnez "A chaque visite de la page" et cliquez ensuite sur [OK]. Avec Netscape 1 Dans le menu "Edition", cliquez sur "Préférences". 2 Dans le champ "Catégorie" sur la gauche de la boîte de dialogue, cliquez sur "Avancées", puis sur "Cache". 3 Sous "Comparer la page du cache à la page sur le réseau", sélectionnez "A chaque fois que je visite la page". Spécifier les paramètres avec PageScope Web Connection 7 bizhub 362/282/222 7-13 7.3 Enregistrement adresse 1-touche (mode Utilisateur) Enregistrer les destinataires de données numérisées comme enregistrements 1-touche. Il est également possible de spécifier le nom d'index. ! Détails Cette machine accepte l'enregistrement de 36 index, chacun pouvant contenir un maximum de 15 boutons 1-touche et Programmes Fax. Vous pouvez enregistrer les types de destinataires suivants. Type Description Emission : PC (Scanner) Permet d'enregistrer un destinataire pour une opération Scan vers PC. Vous pouvez également enregistrer un destinataire secondaire en cas d'échec de l'émission. Emission : FaxInternet (Réception IP) Enregistre un destinataire d'une télécopie par adresse IP. Vous pouvez enregistrer un destinataire secondaire en cas d'échec de l'émission. Emission : FaxInternet (Relais IP) Enregistre un destinataire d'une émission par relais IP. Vous pouvez enregistrer un destinataire secondaire en cas d'échec de l'émission. 7 Spécifier les paramètres avec PageScope Web Connection 7-14 bizhub 362/282/222 Les paramètres suivants sont disponibles sur la page de chaque mode de communication. Si vous aviez sélectionné "Emission : PC (Scanner)" Paramètre Description Nom destination à distance Introduisez le nom du destinataire tel qu'il apparaîtra sur le bouton de d'enregistrement 1-touche. Ce champ peut comporter 12 caractères maximum. Exemple : Tokyo br Adresse destination Saisissez l'adresse IP ou le nom d'hôte du destinataire. 2 Remarque Vous pouvez saisir un nom d'hôte si la "Configuration DNS" (spécifié depuis l'écran Paramètres réseau) est réglé sur "OUI". No de port Entrez le numéro du port (entre 1 et 65535). Type de fichier Sélectionnez le format "TIFF" ou "PDF") du fichier à envoyer. Méthode de codage Sélectionnez la méthode de codage des données à envoyer. Sélectionnez "MH" ou "MMR". La quantité des données est moindre avec la méthode de codage MMR qu'avec la méthode MH. Spécifier les paramètres avec PageScope Web Connection 7 bizhub 362/282/222 7-15 Si vous aviez sélectionné "Emission : IFAX (IP-TX)" Paramètre Description Nom destination à distance Introduisez le nom du destinataire tel qu'il apparaîtra sur le bouton de d'enregistrement 1-touche. Ce champ peut comporter 12 caractères maximum. Exemple : Tokyo br Adresse destination Saisissez l'adresse IP ou le nom d'hôte du destinataire. 2 Remarque Vous pouvez saisir un nom d'hôte si la "Configuration DNS" (spécifié depuis l'écran Paramètres réseau) est réglé sur "OUI". No de port Entrez le numéro du port (entre 1 et 65535). Taille Emission (Max.) Spécifiez la taille maximum du document qui peut être émis. Sélectionnez "Letter/Legal" ou "11 e 17". Qualité Emission (Max.) Sélectionnez la résolution maximum pour l'émission. Sélectionnez "200 ppp", "400 ppp" ou "600 ppp". Méthode de codage Sélectionnez la méthode de codage des données à envoyer. Sélectionnez "MH", "MR" ou "MMR". Le volume des données par ordre croissant est le suivant : MMR, MR, MH. 7 Spécifier les paramètres avec PageScope Web Connection 7-16 bizhub 362/282/222 Si vous aviez sélectionné "TX : Internet FAX (relais IP)" Paramètre Description Nom destination à distance Introduisez le nom du destinataire tel qu'il apparaîtra sur le bouton de d'enregistrement 1-touche. Ce champ peut comporter 12 caractères maximum. Exemple : Tokyo br Numéro de destination Entrez le numéro de fax du destinataire. Le numéro entré peut comporter jusqu'à 64 caractères. STA relai (Station de relais) Sélectionnez la station de relais. Spécifier les paramètres avec PageScope Web Connection 7 bizhub 362/282/222 7-17 Donner un nom à un index 1 Cliquez sur l'onglet Lecture. – Si le kit Fax en option est installé, cliquez sur l'onglet Fax/Lecture. 2 Cliquez sur [Enregistrement adresse une-touche]. 3 Dans la liste "Index", cliquez sur un nom d'index (centre du tableau). Les destinataires 1-touche enregistrés dans l'index sélectionné apparaissent en bas de la page. 7 Spécifier les paramètres avec PageScope Web Connection 7-18 bizhub 362/282/222 4 Tapez le nom de l'index, puis appuyez sur [Appliquer]. – Ce champ peut comporter 8 caractères maximum. Une liste des index s'affiche en haut de la page. Spécifier les paramètres avec PageScope Web Connection 7 bizhub 362/282/222 7-19 Enregistrer un destinataire 1-touche 1 Cliquez sur l'onglet Lecture. – Si le kit Fax en option est installé, cliquez sur l'onglet Fax/Lecture. 2 Cliquez sur [Enregistrement adresse une-touche]. 3 Dans la liste "Index", cliquez sur l'index où le destinataire 1-touche est censé être enregistré. Les destinataires 1-touche enregistrés dans l'index sélectionné apparaissent en bas de la page. 4 Cliquez sur un enregistrement 1-touche pas encore programmé. – Les enregistrement 1-touche qui ne sont pas encore programmés s'affichent comme "---". 7 Spécifier les paramètres avec PageScope Web Connection 7-20 bizhub 362/282/222 5 Sélectionnez le mode communication à enregistrer, puis cliquez sur [Suivant]. – Certains modes de communication risquent de ne pas être disponibles, selon les réglages de la machine. Pour plus de détails, consultez l'administrateur. 6 Spécifiez les paramètres dans la page du mode de communication sélectionné. 7 Cliquez sur [Appliquer]. Le destinataire 1-touche est désormais enregistré. Spécifier les paramètres avec PageScope Web Connection 7 bizhub 362/282/222 7-21 Enregistrer une adresse secondaire Si vous aviez sélectionné "Emission : PC (Scanner)", "Emission : IFAX (IP-TX)" ou "Emission : Internet FAX (Relais IP)", vous pouvez spécifier un destinataire secondaire en cas d'échec de l'émission. ! Détails Les modes de communication suivants peuvent être spécifiés pour la destination secondaire. - Emission : PC (E-mail) - Emission : PC (Scanner) - Emission : FaxInternet (Emission IP) - Emission : FaxInternet (E-mail) - Emission : FaxInternet (Relais IP) - FAX (G3)* * Vous pouvez spécifier le mode de communication si le kit Fax en option est installé. 2 Remarque Certains modes de communication risquent de ne pas être disponibles, selon les réglages de la machine. Pour plus de détails, consultez l'administrateur. 7 Spécifier les paramètres avec PageScope Web Connection 7-22 bizhub 362/282/222 Pour enregistrer un destinataire secondaire 1 Cliquez sur le champ du destinataire 1-touche à programmer avec une adresse secondaire. 2 Cliquez sur [Suivant]. 3 Cliquez sur [Enreg. adr. 2ndaire]. Spécifier les paramètres avec PageScope Web Connection 7 bizhub 362/282/222 7-23 4 Sélectionnez le mode de communication pour le destinataire secondaire, et cliquez sur [Suivant]. – Certains modes de communication risquent de ne pas être disponibles, selon les réglages de la machine. Pour plus de détails, consultez l'administrateur. 7 Spécifier les paramètres avec PageScope Web Connection 7-24 bizhub 362/282/222 5 Spécifiez les divers paramètres, et cliquez sur [Appliquer]. – Pour plus de détails sur les différents paramètres, voir "Enregistrer un destinataire 1-touche" à la page 7-19. 2 Remarque Le nom qui apparaît à côté de "Nom 1-touche" est le même que celui qui a été spécifié pour le destinataire principal. Vous avez la possibilité de spécifier tous les autres paramètres. Pour supprimer le destinataire secondaire enregistré, cliquez sur [Effacer adr. 2ndaire]. Spécifier les paramètres avec PageScope Web Connection 7 bizhub 362/282/222 7-25 Modifier les paramètres d'un destinataire 1-touche 1 Cliquez sur l'onglet Lecture. – Si le kit Fax en option est installé, cliquez sur l'onglet Fax/Lecture. 2 Cliquez sur [Enregistrement adresse une-touche]. 3 Dans la liste "Index", cliquez sur l'index qui contient le destinataire 1-touche à modifier. Les destinataires 1-touche enregistrés dans l'index sélectionné apparaissent en bas de la page. 4 Cliquez sur le destinataire 1-touche dont les valeurs sont à modifier. – Ceci est normal, car il n'est pas possible de sélectionner un Programme Fax, même par un clic. 7 Spécifier les paramètres avec PageScope Web Connection 7-26 bizhub 362/282/222 5 Pour changer le mode de communication, sélectionnez celui qui convient et cliquez sur [Suivant]. – Certains modes de communication risquent de ne pas être disponibles, selon les réglages de la machine. Pour plus de détails, consultez l'administrateur. – Si une destination secondaire est déjà enregistrée, "Emission : PC (Serveur FTP)" et "Emission : PC (SMB)" n'apparaissent pas. 6 Spécifiez les paramètres dans la page du mode de communication sélectionné. – Pour plus de détails sur les différents paramètres, voir "Enregistrer un destinataire 1-touche" à la page 7-19. Spécifier les paramètres avec PageScope Web Connection 7 bizhub 362/282/222 7-27 Supprimer un destinataire 1-touche 1 Cliquez sur l'onglet Lecture. – Si le kit Fax en option est installé, cliquez sur l'onglet Fax/Lecture. 2 Cliquez sur [Enregistrement adresse une-touche]. 3 Dans la liste "Index", cliquez sur l'index qui contient le destinataire 1-touche à modifier. Les destinataires 1-touche enregistrés dans l'index sélectionné apparaissent en bas de la page. 7 Spécifier les paramètres avec PageScope Web Connection 7-28 bizhub 362/282/222 4 Sélectionnez la case du destinataire une touche à supprimer. 5 Cliquez sur [Effacer]. Spécifier les paramètres avec PageScope Web Connection 7 bizhub 362/282/222 7-29 7.4 Paramètres relais IP (mode Administrateur) Lorsque vous envoyez une télécopie en relais IP, spécifiez l'adresse IP et le nom de domaine des machines de relais. En outre, il est possible de sélectionner les principales stations de relais à utiliser. Sélectionner la station de relais IP à utiliser Sélectionner une station de relais IP depuis les machines de relais IP enregistrées au préalable. Pour plus de détails sur l'enregistrement d'une station de relais IP, voir "Enregistrer une station de relais IP" à la page 7-32. Vous pouvez spécifier les paramètres suivants. Paramètre Description Destination de relais IP L'adresse IP de la station de relais actuellement sélectionnée s'affiche. Pour changer la station de relais, cliquez sur [Sélectionner]. Port de résultat de relais Entrez le numéro du port qui recevra les résultas. Si vous changez ce numéro, il sera appliqué après l'arrêt et le redémarrage de la machine. 7 Spécifier les paramètres avec PageScope Web Connection 7-30 bizhub 362/282/222 Pour sélectionner une station de relais 1 En mode Administrateur, cliquez sur l'onglet Réseau. 2 Cliquez sur [Paramètres relais IP], ensuite sur [Paramètres relais IP]. 3 Pour changer la station de relais, cliquez sur [Select]. Spécifier les paramètres avec PageScope Web Connection 7 bizhub 362/282/222 7-31 4 Sélectionnez une station de relais enregistrée et cliquez ensuite sur [Appliquer]. 5 Modifiez les Paramètres de port si cela s'avère nécessaire. 6 Cliquez sur [Appliquer]. 2 Rappel Si vous modifiez le numéro du port, veillez à éteindre la machine et à la remettre en marche après la spécification des paramètres. Lorsque la machine est arrêtée puis remise en marche à l'aide de l'interrupteur général, attendre environ 10 secondes pour mettre la machine sous tension après l'avoir arrêtée. La machine risque de ne pas fonctionner correctement si vous la rallumez immédiatement après l'avoir arrêtée. 7 Spécifier les paramètres avec PageScope Web Connection 7-32 bizhub 362/282/222 Enregistrer une station de relais IP Il est possible d'enregistrer une station de relais IP ou de modifier ses paramètres. Vous pouvez enregistrer jusqu'à 8 stations de relais. Vous pouvez spécifier les paramètres suivants. Paramètre Description Adresse relais IP Saisissez l'adresse IP ou le nom d'hôte de la machine de relais. 2 Remarque Vous pouvez saisir un nom d'hôte si la "Configuration DNS" (spécifié depuis l'écran Paramètres réseau) est réglé sur "OUI". Port Entrez le numéro du port (entre 1 et 65535). Nom de domaine Tapez le nom de domaine de la station de relais. Spécifier les paramètres avec PageScope Web Connection 7 bizhub 362/282/222 7-33 Pour enregistrer une station de relais IP 1 En mode Administrateur, cliquez sur l'onglet Réseau. 2 Cliquez sur [Paramètres relais IP], ensuite sur [Enregistrement destination relais IP]. 3 Pour enregistrer une nouvelle station de relais, cliquez dans un champ dans lequel aucune adresse de station de relais n'a encore été enregistrée ("---"). – Pour modifier les paramètres enregistrés, cliquez sur une adresse IP qui s'affiche. – Pour supprimer une station de relais, sélectionnez la case de la station IP à supprimer et cliquez ensuite sur [Effacer]. 7 Spécifier les paramètres avec PageScope Web Connection 7-34 bizhub 362/282/222 4 Spécifiez les paramètres de la station de relais, puis cliquez sur [Appliquer]. 8 Spécifier les paramètres de gestion Spécifier les paramètres de gestion 8 bizhub 362/282/222 8-3 8 Spécifier les paramètres de gestion 8.1 Paramètres disponibles Paramètres pouvant être spécifiés depuis l'écran Gestion administrateur Les paramètres Gestion Administrateur suivants se rapportent aux informations contenues dans ce manuel. 2 Rappel Si la touche [Utilitaire/Compteur] est actionnée pour enregistrer des éléments et spécifier des paramètres, n'oubliez pas d'appuyer sur la touche [Réinitialisation] sur le panneau de contrôle après être retourné à l'écran d'accueil. Liste des paramètres réseau requis Il est recommandé de spécifier les paramètres réseau comme indiqué cidessous afin de pouvoir utiliser les opérations décrites dans le présent manuel. Pour plus de détails sur les paramètres réseau autres que ceux disponibles sur l'écran Paramètres relais IP, voir le Guide de l'utilisateur [Opérations Scanner réseau]. o : Requis / : Disponible + : Nécessaire en fonction de l'environnement - : Pas disponible avec l'opération Paramètre Description Paramètres relais IP Lorsque vous envoyez une télécopie en relais IP, spécifiez l'adresse IP et le nom de domaine des machines de relais. En outre, il est possible de sélectionner les principales stations de relais à utiliser. Commutation logicielle A utiliser pour spécifier les paramètres de l'appareil. 8 Spécifier les paramètres de gestion 8-4 bizhub 362/282/222 ! Détails Lorsque vous utilisez les opérations de télécopie par adresse IP et de relais IP, ne spécifiez pas de paramètre pour "Nom de domaine propre". Fonctionnement Paramètre Télécopie par adresse IP Scan vers PC Scanner IP Relais IP Paramètres de base DHCP + + + + Paramètre adresse IP o o o o Masque Sous-Réseau o o o o Passerelle + + + + Nom Domaine Propre - - - - Paramètres Carte réseau + + + + Configuration DNS OUI/NON + + - + Nom hôte + + - + Nom de domaine + + - + Adresse serveur DNS + + - + Nom Equipement Nom Equipement / / / - Configuration SMTP Adresse du serveur SMTP - - - - Adresse E-mail - - - - Nom Utilisateur Authentification SMTP - - - - Mot de passe Authentification SMTP - - - - Configuration POP3 Adresse serveur POP3 - - - - Nom d'utilisateur POP3 - - - - Mot de passe POP3 - - - - Contrôle Réception Auto - - - - Niveau compression prioritaire Mode E-mail / - - - Mode Numérisation - / - - Scanner Settings (Paramètres Scanner) Spécifier les paramètres de gestion 8 bizhub 362/282/222 8-5 Rapport d'activité - - - - Impr.En-tête Doc. Reçu - - - - Texte En-tête E-mail - - - - Passerelle Emission - - - + Objet - - - - Paramètres Fractionnement - - - - Ping : spécifiez selon les besoins. Définir le type de cadre : spécifier un type de cadre pour la connexion au serveur NetWare et l'utilisation de la fonction d'impression PC. Paramètres LDAP : spécifier pour effectuer une recherche LDAP. Filtrage IP : spécifier quand vous utilisez la fonction de filtrage IP. Paramètres relais IP Enregistrement station de relais IP - - - o Paramètres station de relais IP - - - o Port de résultat de relais - - - o Fonctionnement Paramètre Télécopie par adresse IP Scan vers PC Scanner IP Relais IP 8 Spécifier les paramètres de gestion 8-6 bizhub 362/282/222 8.2 Paramètres relais IP Enregistrer une station de relais IP Il est possible d'enregistrer une station de relais IP. Vous pouvez enregistrer jusqu'à 8 stations de relais. Vous pouvez spécifier les paramètres suivants. Pour enregistrer une station de relais IP 1 Après avoir accédé au mode Administrateur, appuyez sur [Gestion Admin. 2]. 2 Appuyez sur [Paramètres Réseau], [Paramètres Réseau 2] et ensuite sur [Paramètres relais IP]. 3 Appuyez sur [Enregistrement Station relais IP]. Paramètre Description Adresse relais IP Saisissez l'adresse IP ou le nom d'hôte de la machine de relais. Port Entrez le numéro du port (entre 1 et 65535). Nom de domaine Tapez le nom de domaine de la station de relais. Spécifier les paramètres de gestion 8 bizhub 362/282/222 8-7 4 Appuyez sur le bouton du numéro de l'emplacement pour l'enregistrement de la station de relais. 5 Appuyez sur [Adresse relais IP]. 6 Tapez l'adresse IP de la station de relais. – Pour enregistrer la station de relais en utilisant le nom d'hôte, appuyez sur [Nom Host] et tapez ensuite le nom d'hôte. [Nom Host] s'affiche uniquement si "Paramètres DNS" est sur "OUI". 7 Pour modifier le numéro de port, appuyez sur [Port], puis entrez le numéro de port souhaité. 8 Appuyez sur [Entrée]. 8 Spécifier les paramètres de gestion 8-8 bizhub 362/282/222 9 Appuyez sur [Nom Domaine]. 10 Tapez le nom de domaine de la station de relais IP, et appuyez ensuite sur [Entrée]. 11 Appuyez sur [Entrée] dans chacun des écrans jusqu'à ce que l'écran d'accueil s'affiche. Spécifier les paramètres de gestion 8 bizhub 362/282/222 8-9 Sélectionner une station de relais IP 1 Après avoir accédé au mode Administrateur, appuyez sur [Gestion Admin. 2]. 2 Appuyez sur [Paramètres Réseau], [Paramètres Réseau 2] et ensuite sur [Paramètres relais IP]. 3 Appuyez sur [STA relais IP définie]. 4 Appuyez sur le bouton de la station de relais à utiliser et appuyez ensuite sur [Entrée]. 5 Appuyez sur [Entrée] dans chacun des écrans jusqu'à ce que l'écran d'accueil s'affiche. 8 Spécifier les paramètres de gestion 8-10 bizhub 362/282/222 Spécifier le port de résultat de relais 1 Après avoir accédé au mode Administrateur, appuyez sur [Gestion Admin. 2]. 2 Appuyez sur [Paramètres Réseau], [Paramètres Réseau 2] et ensuite sur [Paramètres relais IP]. 3 Appuyez sur [Port résultat relais]. 4 Entrez le numéro de port où le résultat est censé être reçu, puis appuyez sur [Entrée]. – Pour changer le paramètre actuel, appuyez sur la touche [C] (effacer), et entrez le paramètre souhaité. 5 Appuyez sur [Entrée] dans chacun des écrans jusqu'à ce que l'écran d'accueil s'affiche. Spécifier les paramètres de gestion 8 bizhub 362/282/222 8-11 8.3 Spécifier les paramètres d'activation du logiciel (fonctions de l'appareil) La spécification des paramètres de logiciel ("Sélection Mode", "Sélection Bit" et "Sélection HEXA") permet de modifier différentes fonctions de l'appareil en fonction de vos besoins spécifiques. 2 Rappel Ne changez aucun mode ou aucun bit qui n'est pas indiqué dans ce manuel. 2 Remarque Quand "Sécurité renforcée" est réglé sur "OUI", vous ne pouvez pas modifier les paramètres de commutation logicielle. Paramètres de logiciel SW Paramètre Description Sélection Mode Le paramètre à spécifier est exprimé par un nombre à trois chiffres. Utilisez le clavier pour saisir la valeur. Sélection Bit Les bits sont des nombres à 8 chiffres qui construisent l'état du mode. Vous pouvez spécifier une valeur pour chaque paramètre en attribuant un nombre binaire (0 ou 1) à chacun des bits (0 à 7). Sélection HEXA Spécifiez un paramètre pour chaque mode sous forme d'un nombre hexadécimal (0 à 9 et A à F). Le réglage de bit "0011 0000" est exprimé comme paramètre hexadécimal "30". Spécifiez un paramètre de mode en utilisant soit des bits soit des valeurs hexadécimales. 8 Spécifier les paramètres de gestion 8-12 bizhub 362/282/222 Vous trouverez ci-dessous des exemples de paramètres pour "Sélection Bit" (nombre binaires) et "Sélection HEXA" (nombres hexadécimaux). Nombre décimal Paramètre "Sélection Bit" (nombre binaire) Paramètre "Sélection HEXA" (nombre hexadécimal) 0 0000 0000 00 1 0000 0001 01 2 0000 0010 02 3 0000 0011 03 4 0000 0100 04 5 0000 0101 05 6 0000 0110 06 7 0000 0111 07 8 0000 1000 08 9 0000 1001 09 10 0000 1010 0A 11 0000 1011 0B 12 0000 1100 0C 13 0000 1101 0D 14 0000 1110 0E 15 0000 1111 0F 16 0001 0000 10 17 0001 0001 11 18 0001 0010 12 19 0001 0011 13 20 0001 0100 14 ··· ··· ··· 252 1111 1100 FC 253 1111 1101 FD 254 1111 1110 FE 255 1111 1111 FF Spécifier les paramètres de gestion 8 bizhub 362/282/222 8-13 Pour spécifier un paramètre de commutation logicielle 1 Après avoir accédé au mode Administrateur, appuyez sur [Gestion Admin. 2]. 2 Appuyez sur [Logiciel SW]. 3 Appuyez sur [Sélection Mode] et servez-vous ensuite du clavier pour taper le numéro du mode. 4 Spécifiez un paramètre de mode en utilisant soit des bits soit des valeurs hexadécimales. – Pour spécifier les bits, appuyez sur [Sélection Bit], puis sur [ ] ou [ ] pour déplacer le curseur sur le bit à changer, spécifiez le bit sur le clavier numérique, et appuyez ensuite sur [Entrée]. – Pour spécifier la valeur hexadécimale, appuyez sur [Sélection HEXA], spécifiez la valeur en vous servant du clavier numérique ou en appuyant sur les touches [A] à [F] et appuyez ensuite sur [Entrée]. 8 Spécifier les paramètres de gestion 8-14 bizhub 362/282/222 5 Pour modifier le paramètre pour un mode différent, répétez les étapes 3 et 4. 6 Appuyez sur [Entrée] dans chacun des écrans jusqu'à ce que l'écran d'accueil s'affiche. 7 Éteignez puis rallumez la machine. 2 Rappel Lorsque la machine est arrêtée puis remise en marche à l'aide de l'interrupteur général, attendre environ 10 secondes pour mettre la machine sous tension après l'avoir arrêtée. La machine risque de ne pas fonctionner correctement si vous la rallumez immédiatement après l'avoir arrêtée. Spécifier les paramètres de gestion 8 bizhub 362/282/222 8-15 Spécifier les réglages pour limiter la numérotation et les émissions de radiodiffusion (mode 018) Spécifiez si les émissions de radiodiffusion et la numérotation pour spécifier les destinations sont limitées ou non. Réglages d'usine Spécifier le paramètre Pendant la production de cette unité, les paramètres des cellules estompées ont été sélectionnées. Les nombres de droite indiquent les numéros de page et les descriptions de la fonction correspondante. *1 Interdit quand le bit 6 du mode 477 de commutation logicielle est réglé de manière à ce que les paramètres ne puissent être modifiés qu'en mode Administrateur Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Réglage 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 (HEXA : 01) Bit Description Réglage Description Page de référence 7, 6, 5, 4 ---------------------- 0000 *Ne pas modifier ces bits lors de la spécification des paramètres de cette fonction. ---------- 3 Spécifie si oui ou non la numérotation pour spécifier une destination est interdite. *1 0 Permis ---------- 1 Interdit 2 Spécifie si oui ou non les émissions de radiodiffusion sont interdites. 0 Permis ---------- 1 Interdit 1, 0 ---------------------- 01 *Ne pas modifier ces bits lors de la spécification des paramètres de cette fonction. ---------- 8 Spécifier les paramètres de gestion 8-16 bizhub 362/282/222 Spécifier les réglages de l'image sur le rapport de résultats (mode 023) Spécifiez si oui ou non une image du document transmis est ajoutée au rapport de résultats. Réglages d'usine Spécifier le paramètre Pendant la production de cette unité, les paramètres des cellules estompées ont été sélectionnées. Les nombres de droite indiquent les numéros de page et les descriptions de la fonction correspondante. Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Réglage 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 (HEXA : F8) Bit Description Réglage Description Page de référence 7, 6, 5, 4 ----------------------- 1111 *Ne pas modifier ces bits lors de la spécification des paramètres de cette fonction. ---------- 3 Spécifie si oui ou non une image du document transmis est ajoutée au rapport de résultats. 0 N'est pas ajoutée p. 3-20, p. 4-20, p. 6-21 1 Est ajoutée 2, 1, 0 ----------------------- 000 *Ne pas modifier ces bits lors de la spécification des paramètres de cette fonction. ---------- Spécifier les paramètres de gestion 8 bizhub 362/282/222 8-17 Spécifier les paramètres pour les émissions de récepteur vérifiées (mode 200) Spécifiez si oui ou non l'émission fax est envoyée après avoir vérifié le signal CSI (ID de l'abonné appelé) de la machine du destinataire. Réglages d'usine Spécifier le paramètre Pendant la production de cette unité, les paramètres des cellules estompées ont été sélectionnées. Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Réglage 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 (HEX : 04) Bit Description Réglage Description Page de référence 7, 6, 5 ----------------------- 000 *Ne pas modifier ces bits lors de la spécification des paramètres de cette fonction. ---------- 4 Spécifie si oui ou non la machine effectue une émission de récepteur vérifiée si le numéro appelé ne contient pas de caractères spéciaux pour une émission de récepteur vérifié. 0 N'effectue pas d'émission de récepteur vérifiée ---------- 1 Effectue une émission de récepteur vérifiée 3, 2, 1, 0 Spécifie le nombre de chiffres du signal CSI qui sera comparé lors de l'exécution d'une émission de récepteur vérifiée. (Si le numéro appelé ne comporte pas le nombre de chiffres spécifiés ici, une comparaison sera faite avec tous les chiffres du numéro appelé. En cas de comparaison avec un numéro de comparaison utilisant des caractères spéciaux, la comparaison est faite avec tous les chiffres du numéro de comparaison, sans tenir compte du nombre de chiffres spécifié pour ce paramètre.) 0000 Annuler ---------- 0001 1 chiffre 0010 2 chiffres 0011 3 chiffres 0100 4 chiffres 0101 5 chiffres 0110 6 chiffres 0111 7 chiffres 1000 8 chiffres 1001 9 chiffres 1010 10 chiffres 1011-1111 *Ne pas spécifier ce réglage pour cette fonction. 8 Spécifier les paramètres de gestion 8-18 bizhub 362/282/222 Elément comparé et réglage du nombre de chiffres comparé dans le signal CSI Exemple : quand le nombre de chiffres à comparer dans le signal CSI est réglé sur 6 et qu'un signal CSI de 10 chiffres est reçu Elément comparé Relation de comparaison Fonctionnement Numéro de téléphone du destinataire Quand le numéro de téléphone du destinataire comporte plus de chiffres que le nombre de chiffres à comparer dans le signal CSI La comparaison s'effectue en fonction du réglage de nombre de chiffres comparé au signal CSI. (avec un numéro appelé de 10 chiffres, le chiffre 6 à compter de la fin est comparé.) Quand le numéro de téléphone du destinataire comporte moins de chiffres que le nombre de chiffres à comparer dans le signal CSI La comparaison s'effectue uniquement avec le nombre de chiffres du numéro appelé. (avec un numéro appelé de 4 chiffres, le chiffre 4 à compter de la fin est comparé.) Numéro de comparaison Quand le numéro de comparaison comporte moins de chiffres que le nombre de chiffres dans le signal CSI La comparaison s'effectue uniquement avec le nombre de chiffres du numéro de comparaison. (avec un numéro de comparaison de 10 chiffres, le chiffre 10 à compter de la fin est comparé.) Quand le numéro de comparaison comporte plus de chiffres que le nombre de chiffres dans le signal CSI La comparaison s'effectue uniquement avec le nombre de chiffres du numéro de comparaison. (avec un numéro de comparaison de 11 chiffres ou plus, le chiffre 11 à compter de la fin est comparé.) Par conséquent, comme le signal CSI ne contient que 10 chiffres, il ne coïncidera pas, ce qui provoquera une erreur d'émission.) Spécifier les paramètres de gestion 8 bizhub 362/282/222 8-19 Spécifier l'identification de la télécopie directe et la télécopie par adresse IP (mode 351) Spécifiez l'identification de la télécopie directe ou le transfert de documents fax reçus par adresse IP. Réglages d'usine Spécifier le paramètre Pendant la production de cette unité, les paramètres des cellules estompées ont été sélectionnées. Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Réglage 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 (HEXA : 18) Bit Description Réglage Description Page de référence 7, 6, 5, 4, 3, 2 -------------------------- 000110 *Ne pas modifier ces bits lors de la spécification des paramètres de cette fonction. ---------- 1 Spécifie si le nom du périphérique de l'identifiant ou l'adresse IP est ajouté à la ligne Objet lors du transfert d'un document fax reçu par adresse IP. 0 Le nom du périphérique est prioritaire ---------- 1 L'adresse IP est prioritaire ---------- 0 -------------------------- 0 *Ne pas modifier ce bit lors de la spécification des paramètres de cette fonction. ---------- 8 Spécifier les paramètres de gestion 8-20 bizhub 362/282/222 Spécifier si les informations de l'identifiant sont ajoutées en cas de télécopie directe, d'exécution d'une opération de relais IP ou de transfert de documents reçus (mode 352) Spécifier comment les informations de l'identifiant sont ajoutées en cas de télécopie directe, d'exécution d'une opération de relais IP ou de transfert de documents reçus. Réglages d'usine Spécifier le paramètre Pendant la production de cette unité, les paramètres des cellules estompées ont été sélectionnées. Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Réglage 1 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 (HEXA : D0) Bit Description Réglage Description Page de référence 7 -------------------------- 1 *Ne pas modifier ce bit lors de la spécification des paramètres de cette fonction. ---------- 6 Spécifie où les informations de l'identifiant sont ajoutées en cas de télécopie directe et d'opérations de relais IP. 0 Hors du document ---------- 1 Sur le document 5 Pour spécifier si oui ou non des informations d'identification sont ajoutées aux documents reçus transférés. 0 Pas d'insertion ---------- 1 Insertion 4 Pour spécifier le mode d'ajout des informations d'identification dans le cas du transfert d'un document reçu. 0 Hors du document ---------- 1 Sur le document 3, 2, 1, 0 -------------------------- 0000 *Ne pas modifier ces bits lors de la spécification des paramètres de cette fonction. ---------- Spécifier les paramètres de gestion 8 bizhub 362/282/222 8-21 Spécifier l'écran par défaut pour l'introduction d'adresses (mode 366) Spécifier l'écran par défaut des opérations de télécopie par adresse IP et Scan vers PC. Réglages d'usine Spécifier le paramètre Pendant la production de cette unité, les paramètres des cellules estompées ont été sélectionnées. Les nombres de droite indiquent les numéros de page et les descriptions de la fonction correspondante. Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Réglage 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 (HEXA : 08) Bit Description Réglage Description Page de référence 7 -------------------------- 0 *Ne pas modifier ce bit lors de la spécification des paramètres de cette fonction. ---------- 6 Spécifier l'écran de saisie de l'adresse par défaut des opérations de télécopie par adresse IP et Scan vers PC. 0 Priorité à l'introduction de l'adresse IP p. 4-30 1 Priorité à l'introduction du nom d'hôte 5, 4, 3, 2, 1, 0 -------------------------- 001000 *Ne pas modifier ces bits lors de la spécification des paramètres de cette fonction. ---------- 8 Spécifier les paramètres de gestion 8-22 bizhub 362/282/222 Spécifier les paramètres des informations censées figurer sur le rapport pour la télécopie directe/les émissions par relais IP (mode 368) Spécifiez si oui ou non les résultats d'émission de télécopie directe ou par relais IP figurent sur le rapport de réception. Réglages d'usine Spécifier le paramètre Pendant la production de cette unité, les paramètres des cellules estompées ont été sélectionnées. Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Réglage 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 (HEXA : C2) Bit Description Réglage Description Page de référence 7 -------------------------- 1 *Ne pas modifier ce bit lors de la spécification des paramètres de cette fonction. ---------- 6 Spécifie la plage valide des mots de passe administrateur. *Sans tenir compte du réglage spécifié pour ce bit, cette machine est configurée pour demander le mot de passe administrateur pour la machine et avec PageScope Web Connection. 1 Le mot de passe administrateur est demandé pour la machine et avec Pagescope Web Connection. ---------- 5, 4, 3, 2 -------------------------- 0000 *Ne pas modifier ces bits lors de la spécification des paramètres de cette fonction. ---------- 1 Spécifie si oui ou non les résultats des émissions de document numérisé doivent figurer sur le rapport d'émission. 0 Aucune indication ---------- 1 Indication 0 Pour spécifier si oui ou non les résultats d'émission de télécopie directe ou par relais IP sont indiqués dans le rapport de réception. 0 Aucune indication ---------- 1 Indication Spécifier les paramètres de gestion 8 bizhub 362/282/222 8-23 Spécifier la méthode de codage des émissions par relais IP (mode 381) Spécifiez les paramètres par défaut de la méthode de codage des émissions par relais IP. Réglages d'usine Spécifier le paramètre Pendant la production de cette unité, les paramètres des cellules estompées ont été sélectionnées. Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Réglage 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 (HEXA : 80) Bit Description Réglage Description Page de référence 7, 6, 5, 4, 3, -------------------------- 10000 *Ne pas modifier ces bits lors de la spécification des paramètres de cette fonction. ---------- 2, 1, 0 Pour spécifier la méthode de codage des émissions par relais IP. 000 MH ---------- 001 MR 010 MMR 011 JBIG Autres *Ne pas spécifier d'autres paramètres que ceux mentionnés ci-dessus lors du paramétrage de cette fonction. 8 Spécifier les paramètres de gestion 8-24 bizhub 362/282/222 Spécifier les paramètres relatifs aux résultats d'émission des émissions par relais IP (mode 382) Spécifiez le délai des résultats d'émission dans le cas d'une émission par relais IP et l'opération exécutée lorsque le délai se produit. Réglages d'usine Spécifier le paramètre Pendant la production de cette unité, les paramètres des cellules estompées ont été sélectionnées. Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Réglage 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 (HEXA : 40) Bit Description Réglage Description Page de référence 7 Pour spécifier l'opération exécuté en cas de délai du retour des résultats d'émission d'une émission par relais IP. 0 Erreur d'émission ---------- 1 Emission normale 6, 5, 4, 3 Pour spécifier le délais des résultats d'émission dans le cas d'une émission par relais IP.* 0000 0 minute ---------- 0001 5 minutes 0010 10 minutes 0011 15 minutes 0100 20 minutes 0101 30 minutes 0110 40 minutes 0111 50 minutes 1000 1 heure 1001 2 heures 1010 3 heures 1011 4 heures 1100 5 heures 1101 6 heures 1110 7 heures 1111 8 heures 2, 1, 0 -------------------------- 000 *Ne pas modifier ces bits lors de la spécification des paramètres de cette fonction. ---------- Spécifier les paramètres de gestion 8 bizhub 362/282/222 8-25 * Si le délai spécifié est court, par exemple 5 ou 10 minutes, l'état d'un document en attente d'envoi à partir d'une machine de relais ou l'heure d'émission G3 de la machine de relais et du destinataire risquent de provoquer un délai (erreur d'émission). 8 Spécifier les paramètres de gestion 8-26 bizhub 362/282/222 Spécifier des paramètres pour limiter l'utilisation des modes de communication–1 (mode 475) Spécifiez s'il faut interdire ou autoriser l'utilisation des modes de communication individuels. Les modes de communication interdits n'apparaissent pas sur les écrans de sélection. 2 Remarque Vous pouvez utiliser des boutons de numérotation 1-Touche programmés pour l'émission même si un mode de communication interdit est spécifié. Si tous les modes de communication sont interdits (modes 475 à 477), certains écrans, comme ceux dédiés à la spécification des paramètres d'émission ne s'afficheront peut-être pas normalement. Réglages d'usine Spécifier le paramètre Pendant la production de cette unité, les paramètres des cellules estompées ont été sélectionnées. Les nombres de droite indiquent les numéros de page et les descriptions de la fonction correspondante. Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Réglage 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 (HEXA : 00) Bit Description Réglage Description Page de référence 7 Spécifie si oui ou non l'utilisation de TCP/IP est interdite. 0 Permis ---------- 1 Interdit 6 Spécifie si oui ou non l'utilisation de LPD est interdite. 0 Permis ---------- 1 Interdit 5 Spécifie si oui ou non l'utilisation d'un port RAW est interdite. 0 Permis ---------- 1 Interdit 4 Spécifie si oui ou non l'utilisation de SLP est interdite. 0 Permis ---------- 1 Interdit 3 Spécifie si oui ou non l'utilisation de Scan vers FTP est interdite. 0 Permis ---------- 1 Interdit Spécifier les paramètres de gestion 8 bizhub 362/282/222 8-27 2 Spécifie si oui ou non l'utilisation d'un serveur FTP est interdite. 0 Permis ---------- 1 Interdit 1 Spécifie si oui ou non l'utilisation de SNMP est interdite. 0 Permis ---------- 1 Interdit 0 ---------------------- 0 *Ne pas modifier ce bit lors de la spécification des paramètres de cette fonction. ---------- Bit Description Réglage Description Page de référence 8 Spécifier les paramètres de gestion 8-28 bizhub 362/282/222 Spécifier des paramètres pour limiter l'utilisation des modes de communication–2 (mode 476) Spécifiez s'il faut interdire ou autoriser l'utilisation des modes de communication individuels. Les modes de communication interdits n'apparaissent pas sur les écrans de sélection. 2 Remarque Vous pouvez utiliser des boutons de numérotation 1-Touche programmés pour l'émission même si un mode de communication interdit est spécifié. Si tous les modes de communication sont interdits (modes 475 à 477), certains écrans, comme ceux dédiés à la spécification des paramètres d'émission ne s'afficheront peut-être pas normalement. Réglages d'usine Spécifier le paramètre Pendant la production de cette unité, les paramètres des cellules estompées ont été sélectionnées. Les nombres de droite indiquent les numéros de page et les descriptions de la fonction correspondante. Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Réglage 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 (HEXA : 00) Bit Description Réglage Description Page de référence 7 Spécifie si oui ou non l'utilisation de l'opération de Scan vers SMB est interdite. 0 Permis ---------- 1 Interdit 6 Spécifie si oui ou non l'utilisation de l'impression SMB est interdite. 0 Permis ---------- 1 Interdit 5 Spécifie si oui ou non l'utilisation de la télécopie G3 est interdite. 0 Permis ---------- 1 Interdit 4 Spécifie si oui ou non l'utilisation de l'opération de Scan vers HDD est interdite. 0 Permis ---------- 1 Interdit Spécifier les paramètres de gestion 8 bizhub 362/282/222 8-29 3 Spécifie si oui ou non l'utilisation de l'opération de Scan vers E-Mail est interdite. 0 Permis ---------- 1 Interdit 2 Spécifie si oui ou non l'utilisation de l'opération de Fax Internet est interdite. 0 Permis ---------- 1 Interdit 1 Spécifie si oui ou non l'utilisation de relais IP est interdite. 0 Permis ---------- 1 Interdit 0 Spécifie si oui ou non l'utilisation de l'opération de Fax par adresse IP est interdite. 0 Permis ---------- 1 Interdit Bit Description Réglage Description Page de référence 8 Spécifier les paramètres de gestion 8-30 bizhub 362/282/222 Spécifier des paramètres pour limiter l'utilisation des modes de communication–3/Spécifier des restrictions pour l'enregistrement des adresses Fax et l'impression de rapports et spécifier le mode d'affichage des destinataires 1-Touche (mode 477) Spécifiez s'il faut interdire ou autoriser l'utilisation des modes de communication individuels. Les modes de communication interdits n'apparaissent pas sur les écrans de sélection. Spécifiez si oui ou non les adresses Fax peuvent être enregistrées et si les rapports peuvent être imprimés par des utilisateurs et spécifiez si les informations de numérotation 1-Touche doivent figurer sur les écrans et les rapports. 2 Remarque Vous pouvez utiliser des boutons de numérotation 1-Touche programmés pour l'émission même si un mode de communication interdit est spécifié. Si tous les modes de communication sont interdits (modes 475 à 477), certains écrans, comme ceux dédiés à la spécification des paramètres d'émission ne s'afficheront peut-être pas normalement. Spécifier les paramètres de gestion 8 bizhub 362/282/222 8-31 Réglages d'usine Spécifier le paramètre Pendant la production de cette unité, les paramètres des cellules estompées ont été sélectionnées. Les nombres de droite indiquent les numéros de page et les descriptions de la fonction correspondante. Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Réglage 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 (HEXA : 00) Bit Description Réglage Description Page de référence 7 Spécifie si oui ou non l'utilisation de l'ordinateur (Scanner) est interdite. 0 Permis ---------- 1 Interdit 6 Spécifie si les paramètres d'enregistrement des adresses Fax ou d'impression des rapports peuvent être spécifiés par l'utilisateur ou uniquement par l'administrateur. 0 Les utilisateurs peuvent aussi spécifier les paramètres. ---------- 1 Les paramètres peuvent uniquement être spécifiés en mode Administrateur. 5 Spécifie si oui ou non les noms de destinataire sont affichés (sans affichage du numéro de fax ou de l'adresse) sur les rapports et les écrans de Liste Travaux et lors de la pression sur un bouton de numérotation 1-Touche. *1, *2 0 Affichés ---------- 1 Non affichés 4 ----------------------- 0 *Ne pas modifier ce bit lors de la spécification des paramètres de cette fonction. ---------- 3 Spécifie si oui ou non l'utilisation de TCPSocket est interdite. 0 Permis ---------- 1 Interdit 2, 1, 0 ----------------------- 000 *Ne pas modifier ces bits lors de la spécification des paramètres de cette fonction. ---------- 8 Spécifier les paramètres de gestion 8-32 bizhub 362/282/222 *1 Si le bit 6 est réglé sur "1", les paramètres ne s'appliqueront pas si le bit 5 est réglé sur "1" (non affichés). Si vous ne voulez pas afficher le numéro de fax ni l'adresse du destinataire, il faut aussi régler le bit 6 sur "1" (paramètres uniquement réglables en mode Administrateur). *2 Si le destinataire est spécifié directement depuis l'onglet Entrée adresse, le destinataire s'affichera, même si vous sélectionnez "1" (non affichés). Spécifier les paramètres de gestion 8 bizhub 362/282/222 8-33 Spécifier la méthode de suppression pour [Supp] dans les écrans de saisie (mode 478) Spécifiez la méthode de suppression pour [Supp.] dans les écrans de saisie. Sélectionnez s'il faut supprimer ou non le caractère à l'emplacement du curseur ou le caractère à la gauche du curseur. Réglages d'usine Spécifier le paramètre Les cellules grises représentent le réglage en sortie d'usine. 2 Remarque Réglage par défaut : 0 Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Réglage 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 (HEXA : 00) Bit Description Réglage Description Page de référence 7 Spécifiez la méthode de suppression pour [Supp.] dans les écrans de saisie. 0 Supprime le caractère à l'emplacement du curseur p. 10-5 1 Supprime le caractère à la gauche du curseur 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1, 0 ---------------------- 0000000 *Ne pas modifier ces bits lors de la spécification des paramètres de cette fonction. ---------- 8 Spécifier les paramètres de gestion 8-34 bizhub 362/282/222 Spécifier les paramètres de limitation de l'authentification utilisateur aux seules fonctions de Numérisation (mode 479) Spécifiez s'il faut ou non procéder à l'authentification utilisateur seulement en cas de pression sur la touche [Fax/Scanner] ou [Scanner plus]. Réglages d'usine Spécifier le réglage Pendant la production de cette unité, les paramètres des cellules estompées ont été sélectionnées. Les nombres de droite indiquent les numéros de page et les descriptions de la fonction correspondante. 2 Rappel Ne pas spécifier de réglages pour le mode 479 autres que ceux décrits dans "Spécifier le réglage". ! Détails Si l'authentification utilisateur se limite aux fonctions de Numérisation, appuyez sur [Authentif. cpte/utilis] dans l'écran Gestion Administrateur 1 et sélectionnez ensuite "Serveur externe" comme méthode d'authentification utilisateur. Pour plus de détails sur les paramètres d'authentification serveur externe, voir le Guide de l'utilisateur [Opérations Copie]. Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Réglage 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 (HEXA : 00) Bit Description Réglage Description Page de référence 7, 6, 5 ---------------------- 000 *Ne pas modifier ces bits lors de la spécification des paramètres de cette fonction. ---------- 4, 3, 2, 1, 0 Spécifie s'il faut ou non limiter l'authentification aux fonctions de Fax et de Numérisation. 11001 Limitée ---------- 00000 Illimitée 9 Localisation de pannes Localisation de pannes 9 bizhub 362/282/222 9-3 9 Localisation de pannes 9.1 A l'apparition d'un certain écran Si l'écran suivant apparaît, procéder à l'opération décrite ci-dessous. L'administrateur est connecté sur l'appareil à partir d'un ordinateur du réseau. Attendez que l'administrateur ait terminé son opération et se soit déconnecté. Si l'administrateur quitte le navigateur sans se déconnecter, l'administrateur doit se connecter à nouveau avant de se déconnecter. 9 Localisation de pannes 9-4 bizhub 362/282/222 9.2 Codes d'erreur Si une erreur s'est produite au cours de l'émission, un code d'erreur s'affiche dans la Liste des tâches ou dans un rapport. Procédez aux opérations décrites ci-dessous. Opérations Scan vers PC Code d'erreur Origine Remède EAXXXX L'adresse IP spécifiée par le destinataire est incorrecte. Rectifiez l'adresse IP du destinataire. ImageReceiver n'avait pas démarré. Démarrez ImageReceiver. L'adresse IP du destinataire n'est pas correctement spécifiée dans la boîte de dialogue après l'activation de "Paramètres de réception", puis de "Filtre de connexion" dans ImageReceiver. Cliquez sur "Paramètres de réception", puis sur "Filtre de connexion" dans ImageReceiver, spécifiez l'adresse IP correcte, puis redémarrez ImageReceiver. ImageReceiver ne fonctionne pas correctement. Redémarrez l'ordinateur. Réinstallez Scanner IP. Vérifiez les paramètres TCP/IP de l'ordinateur. Le câble LAN n'est pas connecté. Vérifiez si le câble LAN est correctement connecté. Les paramètres réseau de l'ordinateur ne sont pas correctement spécifiés. Vérifiez les paramètres TCP/IP de l'ordinateur. La charge réseau de l'ordinateur du destinataire est trop élevée. Vérifiez si des messages électroniques de taille importante ne sont pas reçus sur l'ordinateur du destinataire et si des fichiers de taille importante ne sont pas téléchargés à partir d'Internet. Trop de données sont envoyées. Si vous avez spécifié une haute résolution de numérisation, réduisez le nombre de pages numérisées en une fois et procédez à une nouvelle numérisation du document. Accès bloqué par le paramètre de pare-feu de l'ordinateur (pare-feu Windows) spécifié pour la connexion à Internet. Modifiez le paramètre de pare-feu de l'ordinateur (pare-feu Windows) pour la connexion à Internet conformément aux instructions de votre administrateur réseau. Localisation de pannes 9 bizhub 362/282/222 9-5 Opérations de scanner IP Code d'erreur Origine Remède EAXXXX ImageReceiver n'avait pas démarré. Démarrez ImageReceiver. L'adresse IP du destinataire n'est pas correctement spécifiée dans la boîte de dialogue après l'activation de "Paramètres de réception", puis de "Filtre de connexion". Cliquez sur "Paramètres de réception", puis sur "Filtre de connexion", spécifiez l'adresse IP correcte, puis redémarrez ImageReceiver. ImageReceiver ne fonctionne pas correctement. Redémarrez l'ordinateur. Réinstallez Scanner IP. Vérifiez les paramètres TCP/IP de l'ordinateur. Le câble LAN n'est pas connecté. Vérifiez si le câble LAN est correctement connecté. Les paramètres réseau de l'ordinateur ne sont pas correctement spécifiés. Vérifiez les paramètres TCP/IP de l'ordinateur. La charge réseau de l'ordinateur du destinataire est trop élevée. Vérifiez si des messages électroniques de taille importante ne sont pas reçus sur l'ordinateur du destinataire et si des fichiers de taille importante ne sont pas téléchargés à partir d'Internet. Trop de données sont envoyées. Si vous avez spécifié une haute résolution de numérisation, réduisez la résolution ou le nombre de pages numérisées en une fois et procédez ensuite à une nouvelle numérisation du document. Accès bloqué par le paramètre de pare-feu de l'ordinateur (pare-feu Windows) spécifié pour la connexion à Internet. Modifiez le paramètre de pare-feu de l'ordinateur (pare-feu Windows) pour la connexion à Internet conformément aux instructions de votre administrateur réseau. 9 Localisation de pannes 9-6 bizhub 362/282/222 Opérations relais IP Code d'erreur Origine Remède E53XXX Emission impossible parce que le destinataire spécifié pour l'émission passerelle est incorrect. Vérifiez auprès de l'expéditeur. E65XXX Une tentative d'envoi de données ne pouvant pas être envoyées dans le cadre d'une émission passerelle a été faite. Une tentative d'envoi de message électronique avec un fichier joint dans un format autre que TIFF-F ou contenant du texte dont une ligne comporte plus de 1000 caractères, a été faite. Vérifiez auprès de l'expéditeur. EBXXXX Impossible de recevoir les données envoyées dans le cadre d'une émission passerelle. Vérifiez si le serveur de courrier électronique est en mesure d'émettre et si les paramètres réseau sont corrects. Localisation de pannes 9 bizhub 362/282/222 9-7 9.3 Localisation de pannes Ci-après la description de quelques problèmes possibles et leurs solutions. Télécopie par adresse IP Problème Origine Remède L'émission n'est pas possible. Les connexions sont incorrectes. Vérifiez le témoin LED sur le hub et contrôlez les raccordements. Un temps mort s'est produit en fin de réception en raison de la taille trop importante des données image. • Augmenter la valeur de temps mort en fin de réception. • Réduire la taille des données image et procédez une nouvelle fois à l'émission. Les paramètres nécessaires au périphérique ne sont pas enregistrés. Spécifiez les paramètres réseaux nécessaires. Le câble LAN est endommagé. Remplacez le câble LAN. IP a été limité avec le filtrage IP. Consultez l'administrateur de la machine. Autres origines Vérifiez la liste d'émissions sur l'écran Liste des tâches pour afficher les détails de l'erreur d'émission, puis consultez le tableau des codes d'erreur. 9 Localisation de pannes 9-8 bizhub 362/282/222 Opérations Scan vers PC Problème Origine Remède L'émission n'est pas possible. -------- Vérifiez la liste d'émissions sur l'écran Liste des tâches pour afficher les détails de l'erreur d'émission, puis consultez le tableau des codes d'erreur. Le câble LAN est endommagé. Remplacez le câble LAN. IP a été limité avec le filtrage IP. Consultez l'administrateur de la machine. L'ordinateur ne reçoit pas les données. -------- Vérifiez la liste d'émissions sur l'écran Liste des tâches pour afficher les détails de l'erreur d'émission, puis consultez le tableau des codes d'erreur. Les données ont été reçues, mais il est impossible de visionner l'image. Scanner IP n'a pas démarré. Démarrez Scanner IP, vérifiez les nouvelles émissions, puis replacez le fichier des données reçues avec le fichier image. Une application permettant de visionner les images n'est pas installée, ou alors l'application est installée, mais pas reliée aux images. Installez la visionneuse. Reliez le fichier à une visionneuse qui vous permet de visionner les fichiers TIFF et PDF. Une erreur s'est produite lors de la conversion de l'image par le scanner ou alors le fichier n'a pas été correctement créé. Ce fichier est inutilisable. Quittez ImageReceiver, puis procédez à nouveau à la numérisation. Si vous avez spécifié une haute résolution de numérisation, réduisez la résolution ou le nombre de pages numérisées en une fois et procédez ensuite à une nouvelle numérisation du document. Impossible d'interrompre l'émission d'un terminal ou d'une réception vers un ordinateur. L'interruption de l'opération n'est pas immédiate. Attendez l'interruption de l'opération. Pour interrompre rapidement l'opération, quittez ImageReceiver. Les données déjà reçues par l'ordinateur mais pas encore traitées à l'aide du scanner IP seront toutefois supprimées. Localisation de pannes 9 bizhub 362/282/222 9-9 Opérations de scanner IP Problème Origine Remède L'émission n'est pas possible. -------- Vérifiez la liste d'émissions sur l'écran Liste des tâches pour afficher les détails de l'erreur d'émission, puis consultez le tableau des codes d'erreur. Les paramètres ne sont pas spécifiés correctement dans la boîte de dialogue qui s'affiche après avoir cliqué sur "Paramètres de réception", puis sur "Filtre de connexion". Vérifiez les paramètres dans la boîte de dialogue qui s'affiche après avoir cliqué sur "Paramètres de réception", puis sur "Filtre de connexion". Le câble LAN est endommagé. Remplacez le câble LAN. Deux cartes LAN sont installées. Cette configuration ne peut pas être utilisée si deux cartes LAN sont installées. Changez l'ordre de priorité dans les paramètres réseau de l'ordinateur (Windows). L'ordinateur ne reçoit pas les données. -------- Vérifiez la liste d'émissions sur l'écran Liste des tâches pour afficher les détails de l'erreur d'émission, puis consultez le tableau des codes d'erreur. Un autre programme de courrier électronique a été lancé. Quittez le programme de courrier électronique. Les données ont été reçues, mais il est impossible de visionner l'image. Scanner IP n'a pas démarré. Démarrez Scanner IP, vérifiez les nouvelles émissions, puis replacez le fichier des données reçues avec le fichier image. Une application permettant de visionner les images n'est pas installée, ou alors l'application est installée, mais pas reliée aux images. Installez la visionneuse. Reliez le fichier à une visionneuse qui vous permet de visionner les fichiers TIFF et PDF. Une erreur s'est produite lors de la conversion de l'image par le scanner ou alors le fichier n'a pas été correctement créé. Ce fichier est inutilisable. Quittez ImageReceiver, puis procédez à nouveau à la numérisation. Si la résolution de l'image est haute, réduisez la résolution ou le nombre de pages avant de procéder à la numérisation. Impossible d'interrompre l'émission d'un terminal ou d'une réception vers un ordinateur. L'interruption de l'opération n'est pas immédiate. Attendez l'interruption de l'opération. Pour interrompre rapidement l'opération, quittez ImageReceiver. Les données déjà reçues par l'ordinateur mais pas encore traitées à l'aide du scanner IP seront toutefois supprimées. 9 Localisation de pannes 9-10 bizhub 362/282/222 Le message "Erreur de connexion à la machine" s'affiche. La machine n'est pas en marche. Mettez la machine en marche. L'adresse IP du périphérique entrée dans Scanner IP est incorrecte. Rectifiez l'adresse IP. Le paramètre TCP/IP de l'ordinateur est incorrect. Vérifiez les paramètres réseau de l'ordinateur. L'utilisation de TCP/IP à partir de cette machine est interdite. Consultez l'administrateur de la machine. L'ordinateur n'est pas connecté à un réseau. Vérifiez les connexions réseau de l'ordinateur. Le câble LAN n'est pas connecté Vérifiez si le câble LAN est correctement connecté. Même si les paramètres SSL sont activés, aucun certificat n'est installé. Installez un certificat. Pour plus de détails, voir le guide de l'utilisateur [Opérations Scanner Réseau]. Même si les paramètres SSL sont activés, vous utilisez une version d'Internet Explorer antérieure à 5.0. Utilisez une version d'Internet Explorer 5.0 ou supérieure. Même si les paramètres SSL sont activés, le niveau de cryptage pour Internet Explorer est inférieur à 56 bits. Procurez-vous le pack de cryptage sur le site de Microsoft et installez-le. Un message Security Alert s'affiche. Installez un certificat. Le message "Erreur de connexion à ImageReceiver. Voulez- vous démarrer ImageReceiver ?" s'affiche. ImageReceiver n'avait pas démarré. Démarrez ImageReceiver. ImageReceiver ne fonctionne pas correctement. Redémarrez l'ordinateur. 2 Rappel Lorsque la machine est arrêtée puis remise en marche à l'aide de l'interrupteur général, attendre environ 10 secondes pour mettre la machine sous tension après l'avoir arrêtée. La machine risque de ne pas fonctionner correctement si vous la rallumez immédiatement après l'avoir arrêtée. Problème Origine Remède Localisation de pannes 9 bizhub 362/282/222 9-11 Le message "ImageReceiver détecté par XXX" s'affiche. Un autre logiciel utilise ce port. • Le serveur de courrier électronique et Scanner IP ne peuvent pas être utilisés simultanément. Ne démarrez pas le serveur de courrier électronique. En outre, si un autre logiciel en est la cause, quittez le logiciel qui est la source du problème. • suivez les instructions pour le changement de port. Le message "Erreur de connexion à ImageReceiver." s'affiche. Scanner IP ou ImageReceiver ne fonctionne pas correctement. Redémarrez l'ordinateur. Si le problème persiste, désinstallez Scanner IP et réinstallez-le ensuite. Le message "Erreur de création de fichiers image." s'affiche. Les données reçues sont inutilisables. Quittez ImageReceiver, redémarrez-le, puis procédez à nouveau à la numérisation. Lorsque vous quittez ImageReceiver, les données reçues n'ayant pas encore été traitées avec Scanner IP sont supprimées. L'ordinateur a été provisoirement soumis à une charge élevée. L'ordinateur n'est pas en mesure d'exécuter des processus complexes lors de la réception de l'image numérisée. Le format du fichier des données reçues est important. Les données reçues ont peut-être dépassé la taille utilisable par cet ordinateur. Réduisez la résolution ou le nombre de pages avant une nouvelle numérisation et émission. Il n'existe pas de répertoire de stockage. Créez un répertoire. Le répertoire est à mémoire morte. Activez la fonction d'écriture du répertoire. Le message "Impossible de trouver la clé scanner sélectionnée." s'affiche. Le bouton a déjà été supprimé de la machine. Vérifiez si le bouton a déjà été supprimé de la machine et reprogrammez un bouton de numérisation. Bien que le bouton ait été supprimé de la machine, l'icône indiquant que l'émission peut être effectuée s'est transformée en une icône de programmation d'un bouton de numérisation. Supprimez le bouton de numérisation de la machine. Sinon, éteignez et rallumez la machine. Cliquez sur le bouton [Supprimer clé scanner]. Même si vous aviez cliqué sur [Check now] rien ne s'est produit. Aucun fichier n'a été reçu. Procédez à une nouvelle numérisation. Impossible d'ouvrir les fichiers image. Le fichier n'est pas un fichier image reçu depuis le périphérique. Utilisez une visionneuse compatible avec les fichiers TIFF et PDF. Problème Origine Remède 9 Localisation de pannes 9-12 bizhub 362/282/222 L'image du fichier image n'est pas affichée correctement. Affichez l'image dans la visionneuse dans un format réduit. Visionnez l'image avec un taux zoom de 100%. Les données reçues sont inutilisables. Numérisez le document à nouveau. Impossible de démarrer Scanner IP. TCP/IP n'est pas prêt. Ouvrez les Connexions réseau et d'accès dans Windows, ajoutez le protocole Microsoft TCP/IP et redémarrez ensuite l'ordinateur. Scanner IP a déjà démarré. Il est impossible d'utiliser simultanément deux copies de l'utilitaire. ImageReceiver n'avait pas démarré. TCP/IP n'est pas prêt. Ouvrez les Connexions réseau et d'accès dans Windows, ajoutez le protocole Microsoft TCP/IP et redémarrez ensuite l'ordinateur. Puisque vous avez démarré ImageReceiver pendant la désinstallation précédente, pour ensuite le réinstaller alors que vous n'aviez pas redémarré l'ordinateur, il se peut que ImageReceiver ait été supprimé après le redémarrage. Désinstallez Scanner IP et réinstallezle ensuite. Le message "Le nombre de clés scanner a atteint le maximum." s'affiche. Six boutons de numérisation par Scanner IP ont déjà été programmés. Supprimez tous les boutons inutiles. Le message "Le nom de la clé scanner comporte des caractères invalides." s'affiche. Des caractères autres que les caractères standard ne peuvent pas être utilisés dans les noms de boutons. Spécifiez un nom de bouton qui ne comporte que des caractères standard. Le message "Adresse IP incorrecte" s'affiche. Des lettres sont saisies dans l'adresse IP. Spécifiez l'adresse IP dans le format xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx. Le message "Cette commande n'est pas acceptée actuellement." s'affiche. L'émission suivante est exécutée pendant la communication avec le copieur, par exemple, pendant la programmation ou la suppression d'un bouton. Attendre que la connexion actuelle soit coupée (jusqu'à ce que le message "Cette fonction n'est pas disponible actuellement. Réessayez plus tard." disparaisse de la barre des tâches au bas de la fenêtre) avant d'exécuter l'opération suivante. Le message "Erreur d'écriture du fichier image" s'affiche. Il n'y pas assez d'espace dans la destination d'enregistrement. Changez la destination d'enregistrement ou bien créez plus d'espace libre sur le disque. Il y a un problème de disque ou de destination d'enregistrement. Changez la destination d'enregistrement. Problème Origine Remède Localisation de pannes 9 bizhub 362/282/222 9-13 Le message "Impossible de trouver le dossier image" s'affiche. Le dossier spécifié n'existe pas. • Vérifiez le nom du dossier de stockage. • Changez le nom du dossier de stockage. Le message "Correspondance de l'imprimante illicite" apparaît. Vous utilisez une ancienne version de Scanner IP. Installez la version la plus récente de Scanner IP. Les données ne s'impriment pas automatiquement. Le réglage de l'impression automatique n'est pas spécifié dans la boîte de dialogue Scanner Settings. Pour imprimer automatiquement par numérisation avec un bouton de Scanner IP, sélectionnez "Yes" à côté de "Automatic Print" dans la boîte de dialogue Scanner Settings. Les données ne sont pas triées dans le dossier spécifié pour l'impression automatique. Pour imprimer automatiquement avec un bouton de numérotation 1-Touche, vérifiez que les données sont triées dans le dossier spécifié pour l'impression automatique. Le réglage d'ouverture de fichiers dans ImageReceiver n'est pas spécifié. Sélectionnez "Save received images" dans ImageReceiver. Le message "-impossible d'imprimer la page" apparaît. L'espace mémoire disponible est insuffisant sur l'ordinateur. • Fermez toutes les applications non utilisées et essayez de nouveau d'imprimer automatiquement. • Changez la taille de la mémoire virtuelle de l'ordinateur et essayez de nouveau d'imprimer automatiquement. • Diminuez la résolution et essayez de nouveau d'imprimer automatiquement. Le format de papier spécifié n'est pas supporté par l'ordinateur. Vérifiez les paramètres spécifiés au champ "Paper Select Method" et au champ groupé "Paper Settings". Le message "Echec de l'impression parce que l'imprimante sélectionnée est introuvable" apparaît. L'imprimante spécifiée pour l'impression automatique n'est pas enregistrée. Vérifiez que l'imprimante spécifiée au champ "Printer Name" est bien enregistrée (installée). Vous utilisez la mauvaise imprimante pour l'impression. D'autres paramètres ont un caractère prioritaire plus élevé. Vérifiez la priorité sur la liste "Folder For Printing" dans la boîte de dialogue Automatic Print Settings. Problème Origine Remède 9 Localisation de pannes 9-14 bizhub 362/282/222 Vous utilisez un format de papier non valide pour l'impression. Le réglage au champ "Paper Select Method" n'est pas spécifié correctement. Vérifiez le réglage spécifié au champ "Paper Select Method". Les paramètres du champ groupé "Paper Settings" ne sont pas spécifiés correctement. Vérifiez les paramètres spécifiés au champ "Paper Settings". Vous utilisez un format de papier non valide pour la numérisation. Spécifiez un réglage à côté de "Scan Area" et essayez de nouveau d'imprimer automatiquement. Le réglage de rotation automatique de l'image n'est pas spécifié. Sélectionnez la case "Automatically Rotates Image when Image Orientation is different from Paper Orientation." dans la boîte de dialogue Print Property. Il y a une perte au niveau des bords sur le résultat de l'impression. Le réglage dédié à la zone imprimable de l'imprimante n'est pas sélectionné. En cas de légère perte au niveau des bords, sélectionnez la case "Minimal" dans la boîte de dialogue Print Property. "Top Left" est sélectionné à côté de "Position". En cas de légère perte au niveau des bords supérieur et gauche, sélectionnez "Center" à côté de "Position" dans la boîte de dialogue Print Property. Le résultat d'impression ne s'imprime pas entièrement sur le papier. Le réglage de réduction de l'image pour s'ajuster au format du papier n'est pas sélectionné. Sélectionnez la case "Adjust Image to Fit to Paper Size" dans la boîte de dialogue Print Property. Le résultat de l'impression n'est pas au même format que l'image d'origine. Vous avez sélectionné un papier différent. Sélectionnez "Print on Paper Same as Image Size" à côté de "Paper Select Method" dans la boîte de dialogue Print Property. La case "Minimal" est cochée. Décochez la case "Minimal" dans la boîte de dialogue Print Property. "Center" est sélectionné à côté de "Position". Sélectionnez "Top Left" à côté de "Position" dans la boîte de dialogue Print Property. Il y a un motif (motifs moiré) sur le résultat d'impression. Un motif peut apparaître avec certaines imprimantes. Changez la résolution et essayez de nouveau d'imprimer automatiquement. L'opération d'impression automatique est lente. Les données d'image sont volumineuses. Diminuez la résolution et essayez de nouveau d'imprimer automatiquement. Problème Origine Remède Localisation de pannes 9 bizhub 362/282/222 9-15 Opérations de relais IP et autres Problème Origine Remède Impossible d'envoyer un fax à partir de cette machine. Le mode de communication pour les émissions par passerelle n'est pas correctement spécifié. Vérifiez les paramètres des émissions passerelle. [Paramètres réseau] n'apparaît pas à l'écran Gestion Administrateur. Le périphérique ne fonctionne pas correctement. Veuillez contacter le S.A.V. 9 Localisation de pannes 9-16 bizhub 362/282/222 10 Annexe Annexe 10 bizhub 362/282/222 10-3 10 Annexe 10.1 Caractéristiques Caractéristiques de télécopie par adresse IP Caractéristiques Scan vers PC Rubrique Caractéristiques Protocole de transmission Emission d'e-mail : SMTP (IETF RFC2821 et RFC2822) et TCP/IP Formats des documents émis Letter w/v, Legal w, 11 e 17 w, A4 w/v, B4 w, A3 w Résolution 200 e 100 dpi, 200 e 200 dpi, 400 e 400 dpi, 600 e 600 dpi Format des données TIFF-F Méthode de codage MH, MR, MMR Lignes compatibles Ethernet LAN (connexions 100BASE-TX et 10BASE-T) Enregistrement de la destination Enregistrement de l'adresse IP d'un destinataire ou du nom de l'hôte : 540 enregistrements maximum Rubrique Caractéristiques Protocole de transmission TCP/IP Formats des documents émis Letter w/v, Legal w, 11 e 17 w, A4 w/v, B4 w, A3 w Résolution 200 e 100 dpi, 200 e 200 dpi, 400 e 400 dpi, 600 e 600 dpi Format des données TIFF, PDF Méthode de codage MH, MMR Lignes compatibles Ethernet LAN (connexions 100BASE-TX et 10BASE-T) Enregistrement de la destination Enregistrement de l'adresse IP de l'ordinateur ou du nom de l'hôte : 540 enregistrements maximum Caractéristique de dossier Spécifiez un dossier sur l'ordinateur. Les sous-dossiers spécifiés sur l'ordinateur peuvent être créés pour chaque type de données. 10 Annexe 10-4 bizhub 362/282/222 Caractéristiques scanner IP Caractéristiques de relais IP Rubrique Caractéristiques Protocole de transmission TCP/IP Formats des documents émis Letter w/v, Legal w, 11 e 17 w, A4 w/v, B4 w, A3 w Résolution 200 e 200 dpi, 400 e 400 dpi, 600 e 600 dpi Format des données TIFF, PDF Méthode de codage MH, MMR Lignes compatibles Ethernet LAN (connexions 100BASE-TX et 10BASE-T) Enregistrement de la destination Enregistrement de la destination inutile (notification automatique de l'adresse IP envoyée depuis l'ordinateur lors de l'attente de numérisation) : spécifiez les dossiers pour six boutons maximum Caractéristique de dossier Spécifiez un dossier sur l'ordinateur. Les sous-dossiers spécifiés sur l'ordinateur peuvent être créés pour chaque type de données. Rubrique Caractéristiques Stations de relais Huit stations de relais maximum Destinataire Fax Annexe 10 bizhub 362/282/222 10-5 10.2 Saisir du texte Cette section apporte des détails sur l'utilisation du clavier qui apparaît sur l'écran tactile pour permettre la saisie des mots de passe et l'introduction du texte pour l'enregistrement des destinations 1-touche. Vous pouvez aussi utiliser le clavier pour taper des chiffres. La procédure suivante décrit comment entrer les caractères sur l'écran Nom Utilisateur lors de l'enregistrement des utilisateurs pour l'Authentification Utilisateur. Pour taper du texte % Sur le clavier qui s'affiche, appuyez sur le bouton correspondant au caractère désiré. – Vous pouvez aussi taper des chiffres avec le clavier. – Pour taper des caractères en majuscules, appuyez sur [Caps.]. – Pour annuler le mode majuscule, appuyez de nouveau sur [Caps]. 2 Remarque Pour annuler le texte saisi, appuyez sur [Annul.]. Pour effacer tout le texte saisi, appuyez sur la touche [C] (correction). ! Détails Pour passer de la saisie de lettres à celle de symboles, appuyez sur le bouton de changement de mode. Pour modifier un caractère du texte saisi, appuyez sur et pour déplacer le curseur au niveau du caractère à modifier, appuyez sur [Supp] et tapez ensuite la lettre ou le chiffre voulu. Vous pouvez utiliser les paramètres de commutation logicielle pour changer le mode de suppression des caractères. Pour plus de détails sur les paramètres de commutation logicielle, voir "Spécifier les paramètres d'activation du logiciel (fonctions de l'appareil)" à la page 8-11. Si le nombre de caractères dépasse la limite autorisée, le dernier caractère est remplacé par le dernier caractère saisi. 10 Annexe 10-6 bizhub 362/282/222 Liste des caractères disponibles Type Caractères Caractères alphanumériques/symboles Annexe 10 bizhub 362/282/222 10-7 10.3 Glossaire Terme Définition 10Base-T/100Base- TX/1000Base-T Une norme pour Ethernet, connecté via un câble constitué de paires de fils de cuivre torsadés. La vitesse de transmission de 10Base-T est de 10 Mo, celle de 100Base-TX est de 100 Mo et celle de 1000Base-T est de 1000 Mo. Active Directory Un service qui gère toutes les informations comme les ressources matérielles pour les serveurs, les clients et les imprimantes sur un réseau supporté par Microsoft ainsi que les attributs et les droits d'accès des utilisateurs Adresse IP Un code (une adresse) utilisé pour identifier les différents périphériques réseau sur Internet. Comprend au maximum trois chiffres pour quatre nombres, comme 192.168.1.10. Les adresses IP sont attribuées à des périphériques (ordinateurs compris) connectés à Internet. Aperçu Fonction permettant de visionner une image avant d'effectuer une opération d'impression ou de numérisation APOP Abréviation de Authenticated Post Office Protocol. Une méthode d'authentification par mots de passe cryptés, entraînant une plus grande sécurité, comparé aux mots de passe non cryptés habituels utilisé par POP pour récupérer les messages électroniques Auto IP Une fonction d'acquisition automatique de l'adresse IP. En cas d'échec de l'acquisition de l'adresse IP avec DHCP, une adresse IP est acquise à partir de l'adresse 169.254.0.0. Bit Abréviation pour Binary Digit. La plus petite unité d'information (quantité de données) sur un ordinateur ou une imprimante. Affiche les données à l'aide de 0 ou 1. BMP Abréviation pour Bitmap. Un format de fichier pour sauvegarder les données d'image et utilisant l'extension .bmp. Généralement utilisé sur les plates-formes Windows. Vous pouvez spécifier l'intensité de couleur de monochrome (2 valeurs) à couleur (16 777 216 couleurs). Généralement, les images ne sont pas comprimées lors de la sauvegarde. Client Un ordinateur utilisant les services fournis par un serveur par l'intermédiaire d'un réseau Contraste Différence d'intensité entre les parties claires et foncées de l'image (variation clair/foncé). On dit qu'une image possédant peu de variations clair/foncé possède un faible contraste et qu'une image possédant de fortes variations clair/foncé possède un contraste élevé. Demi-teinte Méthode de production des parties claires et foncées d'une image en variant les tailles des points noirs et blancs Densité Une indication de la quantité de noircissement dans l'image. Désinstaller Supprimer un logiciel installé sur un ordinateur DHCP Abréviation pour Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol. Protocole permettant à un ordinateur client sur un réseau TCP/IP de spécifier automatiquement les paramètres de réseau à partir du serveur. Grâce à la gestion collective de l'adresse IP pour les clients DHCP sur le serveur DHCP, vous pouvez éviter la duplication d'une adresse et construire aisément un réseau. 10 Annexe 10-8 bizhub 362/282/222 Disque dur Périphérique de stockage grande capacité pour sauvegarder des données. Les données peuvent être sauvegardées même en cas de mise hors tension. DNS Abréviation pour Domain Name System. Un système d'acquisition des adresses IP supportées à partir de noms d'hôtes dans un environnement réseau. DNS permet à l'utilisateur d'accéder à d'autres ordinateurs sur un réseau en spécifiant des noms d'hôte à la place d'adresses IP difficiles à mémoriser et à comprendre. DPI (dpi) Abréviation pour Dots Per Inch. (points par pouce). Une résolution utilisée par les imprimantes et les scanners. Indique combien de points par pouce sont représentés dans une image. Plus la valeur est élevée, plus la résolution est importante. Ethernet Norme de ligne de transmission LAN Extension de fichier Les caractères ajoutés au nom de fichier pour différentier les formats de fichier. L'extension de fichier est ajoutée après un point, par exemple, ".bmp" ou ".jpg". Fréquence d'écran Indique la densité des points utilisée pour créer l'image Gradation Les niveaux clairs et foncés d'une image. Plus le nombre augmente, plus la reproduction des variations de luminosité est douce. GSS-SPNEGO/Simple/ Digest MD5 Méthodes d'authentification pour se connecter sur le serveur LDAP. La méthode d'authentification (GSS-SPENGO, SIMPLE or Digest MD5) pour le serveur LDAP diffère en fonction du serveur utilisé et des paramètres du serveur. HTTP Abréviation pour HyperText Transfer Protocol. Protocole utilisé pour envoyer et recevoir des données entre un serveur Internet et un client (Navigateur Internet). Vous pouvez échanger des documents contenant des images, des enregistrements et des clips vidéo avec les informations de forme expressive. IMAP Abréviation pour Internet Message Access Protocol. Protocole de récupération des messages électroniques avec la fonction de gestions des boîtes électroniques sur le serveur. Actuellement, on utilise le plus souvent IMAP4 (la quatrième version de IMAP). Installer Installer du matériel, des systèmes d'exploitation, des applications, des pilotes d'imprimante sur un ordinateur. IPP Abréviation pour Internet Printing Protocol. Protocole d'envoi et de réception de données d'impression et contrôlant des imprimantes sur Internet dans le cadre d'un réseau TCP/IP. Vous pouvez aussi envoyer des données à des imprimantes dans des zones distantes pour imprimer via Internet. LAN Abréviation pour Local Area Network. C'est un réseau qui connecte des ordinateurs sur le même étage, dans le même bâtiment, dans les bâtiments avoisinants. LDAP Abréviation pour Lightweight Directory Access Protocol. Sur un réseau TCP/IP, comme l’Internet ou un réseau Intranet, ce protocole sert à accéder à une base de données de gestion des informations d'environnement et des adresses électroniques des utilisateurs du réseau. Masque Sous-Réseau Unité utilisée pour diviser un réseau TCP/IP en plusieurs petits réseaux (sous-réseaux). Il sert à identifier les bits d'une adresse réseau supérieurs à l'adresse IP. Terme Définition Annexe 10 bizhub 362/282/222 10-9 Mémoire Périphérique de stockage pour sauvegarder temporairement les données. Lors de la mise hors tension, les données peuvent être effacées ou non. MH Abréviation pour Modified Huffman. Une méthode de codage de compression des données pour l'émission des télécopies. Les documents contenant essentiellement du texte sont comprimés à environ 1/10 de leur taille d'origine. MIB Abréviation pour Management Information Base. Lors d'une émission TCP/IP, elle utilise SNMP pour définir le format des informations de gestion pour un groupe de périphériques réseau. Il existe deux formats : le MIB spécifique au fabricant et le MIB normalisé. MMR Abréviation pour Modified Modified Read. Une méthode de codage de compression des données pour l'émission des télécopies. Les documents contenant essentiellement du texte sont comprimés à environ 1/20 de leur taille d'origine. Navigateur Internet Logiciel comme Internet Explorer et Netscape Navigator utilisé pour afficher les pages Internet NetWare Système d'exploitation réseau développé par Novell. NetWare IPX/SPX est utilisé comme protocole de communication. Niveaux de gris Forme monochrome d'expression de l'image utilisant les informations de dégradé du blanc et du noir Nom hôte Nom affiché d'un périphérique sur un réseau Numérisation L'opération de numérisation d'un scanner permet de lire une image pendant le déplacement progressif d'une rangée de capteurs. La direction dans laquelle les capteurs d'image se déplacement s'appelle le sens de lecture principal et la direction selon laquelle sont disposés les capteurs d'image s'appelle le sens de lecture auxiliaire. Numéro de port Le numéro identifiant le port d'émission pour chaque processus exécuté sur un ordinateur sur le réseau. Le même port ne peut pas être utilisé par plusieurs processus. Octet Unité d'information (quantité de données) sur un ordinateur ou une imprimante. Configurée comme 1 octet étant égal à 8 bits. OS Abréviation pour Operating System (système d'exploitation). Logiciel de base contrôlant le système d'un ordinateur. Par défaut Les paramètres par défaut. Les paramètres premièrement sélectionnés lors de la mise sous tension de la machine ou les paramètres premièrement spécifiés lors de la sélection de la fonction. Passerelle Matériel et logiciel utilisé comme point de connexion d'un réseau à un autre réseau. Une passerelle modifie également les formats de données, les adresses et les protocoles en fonction du réseau connecté. Passerelle par défaut Périphérique tel qu'un ordinateur ou un routeur, utilisé comme "passerelle" pour accéder à des ordinateurs ne se trouvant sur le même réseau LAN PDF Abréviation de Portable Document Format. Un document formaté électroniquement et utilisant l'extension .pdf. Sur base du format PostScript, vous pouvez utiliser le logiciel gratuit Adobe Acrobat Reader pour afficher des documents. Terme Définition 10 Annexe 10-10 bizhub 362/282/222 Pïlote Logiciel fonctionnant comme une passerelle entre un ordinateur et un périphérique. Pixel Un pixel d'image. La plus petite unité d'image. POP Abréviation de Post Office Protocol. Protocole de récupération des messages électroniques sur un serveur de messagerie. Actuellement, on utilise le plus souvent POP3 (la troisième version de POP). Propriété Informations d'attribut Lors de l'utilisation d'un pilote d'imprimante, vous pouvez spécifier diverses fonctions dans les propriétés du fichier. Dans les propriétés de fichier, vous pouvez vérifier les informations d'attribut du fichier. Protocole Règles permettant aux ordinateurs de communiquer avec d'autres ordinateurs ou périphériques Résolution Affiche la possibilité de reproduire correctement les détails des images et des documents imprimés. Serveur Proxy Serveur installé pour agir en tant que connexion intermédiaire entre chaque client et les différents serveurs pour assurer la sécurité de manière efficace sur tout le système pour les connexions Internet SMTP Abréviation pour Simple Mail Transfer Protocol. Protocole d'envoi et de transfert de messages électroniques. SNMP Abréviation pour Simple Network Management Protocol. Protocole de gestion dans un environnement réseau sous TCP/IP. SSL/TLS Abréviation pour Secure Socket Layer/Transport Layer Security. Méthode de codage de transfert en toute sécurité de données entre le serveur Internet et le navigateur. TCP/IP Abréviation de Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol. Le protocole standard par défaut utilisé par Internet et utilisant des adresses IP pour identifier chaque périphérique réseau. TIFF Abréviation de Tagged Image File Format. L'un des formats de fichier pour enregistrer les données image. (L'extension de fichier est ".tif".) En fonction du tag indiquant le type de données, les informations de différents formats d'image peuvent être enregistrés dans une seule donnée d'image. TIFF simple page Un seul fichier TIFF file ne contenant qu'une seule page Terme Définition Annexe 10 bizhub 362/282/222 10-11 10.4 Index 2en1 3-16, 3-21, 4-18, 4-21, 6-19, 6-22 A Accès 7-6 Adresse destination 3-30, 4-31, 7-14, 7-15 Authentification Groupe 7-7 Authentification Utilisateur 7-7 B Boîte de dialogue Automatic Print Settings 5-41 Boîte de dialogue Divided Settings 5-30 Boîte de dialogue Folder and Printer Settings 5-42 Boîte de dialogue Print Property 5-35 Boîte de dialogue Printer Setting 5-34 Boîte de dialogue Receive Notify Settings 5-31 Boîte de dialogue Scanner settings 5-24 Boîte de dialogue Sort Settings 5-26, 5-27, 5-28 Bouton de numérotation 1-touche 3-3, 4-4, 6-4 Boutons de numérisation 5-43 C Cache 7-12 Chaîne de numérotation 6-11 Check RX now 5-19 Codes d'erreur 9-4 Configuration requise 7-5 Conflits de ports 5-7 Connection setting 5-23 D Delete scanner key 5-20 Densité 3-14, 4-16, 6-17 Destinataire 3-29, 6-30 Destinataire secondaire 3-36, 4-37, 6-37, 7-21 Destination relais IP 8-6 Désinstallation 5-17 Divided settings 5-23 E Emiss. R/V 3-16, 3-22, 4-18, 4-22, 6-19, 6-23 Emission SSL 5-8 Enregistrement des Programmes Fax 7-3 Enregistrer des destinataires 1-Touche 7-3, 7-13 Entrer des adresses 3-9, 4-11 F FenêtreVisionner 5-33 Fermer 5-19 I Identifiant 3-16, 3-18, 6-19 Image folder setting 5-23 ImageReceiver 5-3, 5-37 Impression automatique 5-54, 5-58 Index 3-37, 7-17 Installation 4-3, 5-14 10 Annexe 10-12 bizhub 362/282/222 M Méthode de codage 3-10, 3-30, 3-33, 4-12, 4-31, 7-14, 7-15 Mode Administrateur 7-10 Modem/adaptateur de terminal 5-4 N Nom de destination 3-30, 4-31, 6-31, 7-14, 7-15, 7-16 Nom du fichier 4-18, 4-27 Notify settings 5-23 Numéro bouton de numérotation 1-touche 3-5, 4-7, 6-7 Numéro de destination 6-31, 7-16 Numéro de fax 6-12 Numéro de port 3-30, 4-31, 7-14, 7-15 P PageScope Web Connection 2-8, 7-3 Param. TX horloge 3-17, 3-23, 4-18, 4-25, 6-20, 6-26 Paramètres de commutation logicielle 8-3, 8-11 Paramètres relais IP 8-6 Paramètres relais IP 7-4, 7-29, 8-3 Paramètres réseau 8-3 Passerelle Emission 6-3 Port de résultat de relais 8-10 Priorité EM 3-17, 3-23, 4-18, 4-24, 6-20, 6-25 Programme de courrier électronique 3-39 Programmer les boutons de numérotation 1-touche 3-31, 4-30, 6-30 Q Qualité 3-12, 4-14, 6-15 Qualité Emission (Max.) 3-10, 3-30, 3-33, 7-15 R Rapport d'émission 3-16, 3-20, 3-26, 4-18, 4-20, 4-28, 6-19, 6-21, 6-28 Recevoir une télécopie par adresse IP 3-28 Recherche de boutons de numérotation 1-touche 3-7, 4-9, 6-9 Relais IP 2-7 Réglage de l'impression automatique 5-50, 5-55 Réglage du Format Original 3-15, 4-17, 6-18 Routeur téléphonique 5-4 S Scan vers PC 2-4 Scanner IP 2-6, 4-3, 5-3 Scanner Key Registration 5-19 Sélectionner les stations de relais 6-31 Sort settings 5-23 Station relais IP 8-9 Stations de relais 6-3, 7-16 T Taille Emission (Max.) 3-10, 3-30, 3-33, 7-15 Tampon 3-17, 3-25, 4-18, 4-26, 6-20, 6-27 Télécopie par adresse IP 2-3 Thumbnails 5-19 Transférer 5-59 Type de fichier 4-12, 4-31, 7-14 Annexe 10 bizhub 362/282/222 10-13 V Viewer settings 5-23 10 Annexe 10-14 bizhub 362/282/222 Guide de l’utilisateur GDI Printer Controller Table des matières-1 Table des matières 1 Introduction Copyright ....................................................................................... 1-4 1.1 Convention d'exploitation du logiciel par l'utilisateur final .......... 1-5 1.2 Explication des conventions............................................................ 1-9 Recommandations de sécurité ...................................................... 1-9 Séquence d'actions ....................................................................... 1-9 Conseils ....................................................................................... 1-10 Repères de texte spéciaux .......................................................... 1-10 1.3 Environnement d'exploitation........................................................ 1-11 Configuration minimale requise ................................................... 1-11 Environnement d'exploitation recommandé ................................ 1-11 1.4 Installation du pilote d'imprimante ............................................... 1-11 2 Spécifier les paramètres du pilote d'imprimante 2.1 Boîte de dialogue Paramètres du pilote d'imprimante ................. 2-3 Afficher la boîte de dialogue Paramètres....................................... 2-3 Boîte de dialogue Préférences d'impression ................................. 2-5 Boîte de dialogue Propriétés.......................................................... 2-7 2.2 Onglet Caractéristiques options ..................................................... 2-9 Caractéristiques options .............................................................. 2-10 Mémoire ....................................................................................... 2-10 2.3 Opérations communes................................................................... 2-11 Eléments communs ..................................................................... 2-11 Conf. aisée ................................................................................... 2-12 2.4 Onglet Installation .......................................................................... 2-14 Orientation.................................................................................... 2-14 Format doc. original ..................................................................... 2-15 Personnaliser ............................................................................... 2-17 Format papier sortie..................................................................... 2-20 Zoom............................................................................................ 2-21 Copie............................................................................................ 2-21 Assembler .................................................................................... 2-22 Source papier............................................................................... 2-23 Type de média ............................................................................. 2-24 Méthode de sortie........................................................................ 2-24 Utilisation de l'impression sécurisée............................................ 2-25 Table des matières-2 GDI Printer Controller Spécifier l'impression sécurisée depuis le pilote d'imprimante.... 2-25 Impression depuis la machine ...................................................... 2-27 2.5 Onglet Mise en page ....................................................................... 2-29 Combinaison................................................................................. 2-30 Détails Combinaison..................................................................... 2-31 Impression recto-verso................................................................. 2-32 2.6 Onglet Réglages par page.............................................................. 2-33 Couverture recto........................................................................... 2-34 Source Papier Couverture ............................................................ 2-34 Type de média .............................................................................. 2-34 2.7 Onglet Filigrane ............................................................................... 2-35 Sélection filigrane.......................................................................... 2-35 Créer un nouveau filigrane............................................................ 2-36 Modifier un filigrane ...................................................................... 2-38 2.8 Onglet Qualité .................................................................................. 2-41 Définition ....................................................................................... 2-41 Réglages ....................................................................................... 2-42 3 Opérations sur le panneau de contrôle 3.1 Opérations d'impression .................................................................. 3-3 Panneau de contrôle....................................................................... 3-3 Témoin Imprimante......................................................................... 3-5 Commencer une opération d'impression ....................................... 3-5 Annulation d'un travail d'impression............................................... 3-6 Utilise l'introducteur manuel ........................................................... 3-8 Mode Eco Energie ........................................................................ 3-10 4 Dépannage 4.1 Vérification des messages d'erreur................................................. 4-3 4.2 Principaux messages d'erreur ......................................................... 4-4 4.3 Traitement des données d'impression en cas d'erreur ................. 4-5 En cas d'erreur "PROBLEME MACHINE"....................................... 4-5 Erreurs temporaires ........................................................................ 4-5 5 Spécifications 1 Introduction Introduction 1 GDI Printer Controller 1-3 1 Introduction Nous vous remercions d'avoir porté votre choix sur cet appareil. Ce manuel fournit les informations nécessaires à l'utilisation de cette machine comme imprimante GDI. Veuillez prendre connaissance du contenu de ce manuel avant d'effectuer toute opération. En ce qui concerne les précautions relatives à l'utilisation et à la sécurité de cet appareil, veuillez vous reporter au Guide de l'utilisateur livré avec la machine. Rangez en lieu sûr le CD-ROM et le Guide de l'utilisateur qui accompagnent la machine. Marques commerciales et Copyright - Netscape est une marque déposée de Netscape Communications Corporation aux U.S.A. et d'autres pays. - Novell et Novell NetWare sont des marques déposées de Novell, Inc. aux U.S.A. et d'autres pays. - Microsoft, Windows, et Windows NT sont des marques déposées ou des marques commerciales de Microsoft Corporation aux U.S.A. et/ou d'autres pays. - Adobe, le logo Adobe, Acrobat et PostScript sont des marques déposées ou des marques commerciales de Adobe Systems Incorporated aux U.S.A. et/ou d'autres pays. - Ethernet est une marque déposée de Xerox Corporation. - PCL est une marque déposée de Hewlett-Packard Company Limited. - Tous les autres produits ou noms de marque sont des marques commerciales ou des marques déposées de leurs propriétaires respectifs. 1 Introduction 1-4 GDI Printer Controller Copyright © 2007 Develop GmbH. Tous droits réservés. Remarque - Toute reproduction partielle ou totale de ce guide de l'utilisateur est interdite sans autorisation. - Develop GmbH ne saurait être tenu pour responsable en cas d'incidents causés par l'utilisation de ce système d'impression ou de ce manuel utilisateur. - Les informations figurant dans ce manuel utilisateur sont susceptibles d'être modifiées sans préavis. - Develop GmbH détient le copyright des pilotes d'imprimante. Introduction 1 GDI Printer Controller 1-5 1.1 Convention d'exploitation du logiciel par l'utilisateur final VEUILLEZ LIRE ATTENTIVEMENT LA CONVENTION D'UTILISATION CIDESSOUS AVANT D'OUVRIR L'EMBALLAGE DU LOGICIEL ("LOGICIEL"), DE LE TELECHARGER, D'INSTALLER OU D'UTILISER LE LOGICIEL. LE FAIT D'OUVRIR L'EMBALLAGE, DE TELECHARGER, D'INSTALLER OU D'UTILISER LE LOGICIEL IMPLIQUE QUE VOUS ACCEPTEZ LEGALEMENT LES TERMES ET LES CONDITIONS CI-DESSOUS. SI VOUS PREFEREZ NE PAS LES ACCEPTER, N'OUVREZ PAS L'EMBALLAGE, ET NE TELECHARGEZ PAS, N'INSTALLEZ PAS ET N'UTILISEZ PAS LE LOGICIEL ; 1. DROITS DE REPRODUCTION ET DROITS LIES A LA PROPRIETE INTELLECTUELLE Ceci constitue une licence d'utilisation et non un contrat de vente. Develop GmbH ("Develop") détient, ou dispose d'une licence correspondante accordée par d'autres détenteurs ("Concédant de Develop"), les droits de reproduction et autres droits de propriété intellectuelle concernant le Logiciel, et tous les droits et titre de propriété du Logiciel et de toute copie qui en est tirée restent la propriété de Develop ou du Concédant de Develop. en aucun cas, cette convention ne sera réputée transférer en votre faveur un droit de reproduction ou un droit lié à la propriété intellectuelle du Logiciel de la part de Develop ou d'un Concédant de Develop. Le Logiciel est protégé par les lois sur le copyright et par les dispositions des traités internationaux. 2. LICENCE Par la présente, Develop vous accorde une licence non-exclusive et limitée qui vous autorise à : (i) installer et utiliser le Logiciel seulement sur votre ou vos ordinateurs raccordés à un produit Develop pour lequel ce Logiciel a été conçu ; (ii) permettre aux utilisateurs des ordinateurs susmentionnés d'utiliser le Logiciel, à condition que vous fassiez en sorte que ces utilisateurs respectent les termes de cette convention ; (iii) utiliser le Logiciel seulement pour votre activité professionnelle habituelle ou vos besoins personnels ; (iv) effectuer une copie du Logiciel à seule fin de sauvegarde et d'assistance à l'utilisation normale et prévue du Logiciel. 1 Introduction 1-6 GDI Printer Controller (v) céder le Logiciel à une partie tierce en transférant avec le Logiciel un exemplaire de cette convention et toute la documentation correspondante, dans la mesure où dans le même temps, (a) vous transfériez à cette tierce partie ou détruisiez toutes vos copies du Logiciel, (b) que cette cession de détention met un terme à votre accord de licence Develop, et que (c) vous vous assuriez que ladite tierce partie a accepté les termes et conditions de cette convention. Si la partie tierce n'accepte pas ces termes et conditions, il ne vous est pas possible de céder une quelconque copie du Logiciel. 3. RESTRICTIONS (1) Sauf avec l'autorisation écrite de Develop, il ne vous est pas permis de : (i) utiliser, copier, modifier, fusionner ou transférer des copies du Logiciel sauf dans les cas prévus dans les présentes ; (ii) démonter, rétro-assembler, rétro-compiler ou analyser de toute autre manière le Logiciel ; ou (iii) donner en licence secondaire, louer à bail ou en location-vente, ou distribuer le Logiciel ou une copie. (iv) enlever, utiliser ou altérer toute marque, logo, mention de copyright ou de propriété, légende, symboles ou étiquettes figurant sur le Logiciel. (2) Vous acceptez aussi de ne pas exporter le Logiciel sous une forme ou une autre, en violation des lois et des règles relatives au contrôle des exportations de tout pays. 4. EXCLUSIONS DE GARANTIE (1) Si le Logiciel est fourni sur un ou plusieurs CD-ROM ou autre support permettant le stockage de données numériques (collectivement désigné "Support de stockage"), Develop garantit que le support de stockage est exempt de vices matériels ou de fabrication dans les conditions normales d'utilisation, et ce pendant une période de quatre-vingt-dix (90) jour à compter de la date où il vous a été livré. A L'EXCEPTION DES GARANTIES EXPRESSES APPLICABLES AU SUPPORT DE STOCKAGE SEULEMENT, CE LOGICIEL VOUS EST FOURNI "EN L'ETAT" SANS AUTRE GARANTIE ; DEVELOP, SES SOCIETES AFFILIEES ET SON CONCÉDANT DE LICENCE REJETTENT TOUTE GARANTIE CONCERNANT LE LOGICIEL, EXPRESSE OU IMPLICITE, Y COMPRIS, ET SANS LIMITATION, LES GARANTIES IMPLICITES CONCERNANT LA COMMERCIALISATION, L'ADÉQUATION À UN USAGE PARTICULIER, LE TITRE ET LA NON-VIOLATION DES DROITS DES TIERS. Introduction 1 GDI Printer Controller 1-7 (2) EN AUCUN CAS DEVELOP, SES SOCIETES AFFILIEES ET SON CONCÉDANT DE LICENCE NE SAURAIENT ETRE TENUS RESPONSABLES DE PERTE DE BENEFICES, PERTE DE DONNEES, OU DE TOUS DOMMAGES INTERÊTS, SPECIAUX, MAJORES, ACCESSOIRES OU CONSECUTIFS RESULTANT DE L'UTILISATION OU DE L'IMPOSSIBILITE D'UTILISER LE LOGICIEL, Y COMPRIS MAIS SANS S'Y LIMITER, LES DOMMAGES INTERÊTS POUR PERTE DE CLIENTELE, PANNE OU DYSFONCTIONNEMENT D'ORDINATEUR, AINSI QUE TOUS DOMMAGES OU AUTRES PERTES COMMERCIALES, MÊME SI DEVELOP, SES SOCIETES AFFILIEES ET SON CONCÉDANT DE LICENCE ETAIENT INFORMES DE LA POSSIBILITE DE TELS DOMMAGES, OU POUR TOUTE RECLAMATION QUE VOUS PRESENTERIEZ A LA SUITE D'UNE PLAINTE EMANANT D'UNE AUTRE PARTIE TIERCE. (3) L'exclusion de garantie ci-dessous n'affecte pas vos droits réglementaires. Au cas où cette exclusion dans son intégralité n'est pas autorisée par la loi, elle s'appliquera dans toute la mesure permise par la loi. 5. RESILIATION Vous pouvez à tout moment mettre un terme à cette convention de licence en détruisant le Logiciel ainsi que toutes les copies qui en auraient été faites. Cette convention prendra également fin si vous ne respectez pas l'un de ses termes. Dès que cette convention s'éteint pour une telle raison, vous devez immédiatement détruire toutes les copies du Logiciel qui sont en votre possession. 6. NATIONALITE DU CONTRAT Cette convention est régie par les lois du Japon. 7. DIVISIBILITE Au cas où une ou des parties de cette convention seraient jugées illégales, ou nulles et non avenues par un tribunal ou l'autorité administrative de juridiction compétente, cette décision sera sans effet sur les autres dispositions de cette convention, lesquelles resteront en vigueur et applicables comme si les parties déclarées nulles ou illégales n'avaient pas été intégrées à la convention. 8. AVIS AUX UTILISATEURS DE L'ADMINISTRATION U.S. Le Logiciel est un "produit commercial," selon la définition donnée dans le 48 C.F.R. 2.101 (Octobre 1995), se composant d'un "logiciel informatique commercial" et "de la documentation logiciel informatique commercial," selon l'acception qui figure dans le 48 C.F.R. 12.212 (Septembre 1995). Conformément au 48 C.F.R. 12.212 et au 48 C.F.R. 227.7202-1 à 227.7202-4 (Juin 1995), tous les utilisateurs finals de l'administration U.S. devront acquérir le Logiciel accompagné des seuls droits établis dans les présentes. 1 Introduction 1-8 GDI Printer Controller VOUS DECLAREZ AVOIR PRIS CONNAISSANCE DE CETTE CONVENTION, L'AVOIR COMPRISE, ET ACCEPTER D'ÊTRE LIE PAR SES TERMES ET CONDITIONS. LES PARTIES NE SERONT LIEES PAR AUCUNE AUTRE DECLARATION OU ENGAGEMENT QUI NE SERAIT PAS CONFORME AVEC LES TERMES ET CONDITIONS DE CETTE CONVENTION. TOUTE MODIFICATION DE CETTE CONVENTION NE SAURAIT ÊTRE EFFECTIVE A MOINS D'ÊTRE ECRITE ET DUMENT SIGNEE PAR LES REPRESENTANTS AUTORISES DE CHAQUE PARTIE. PAR L'OUVERTURE DE L'EMBALLAGE, LE TELECHARGEMENT, L'INSTALLATION OU L'UTILISATION DU LOGICIEL, VOUS RECONNAISSEZ ACCEPTER LES TERMES DE CETTE CONVENTION. Introduction 1 GDI Printer Controller 1-9 1.2 Explication des conventions Les repères et mises en forme utilisés dans le présent manuel sont décrits ci-dessous. Recommandations de sécurité 6 DANGER Tout manquement au respect des instructions mises en évidence de cette manière risquent de causer des blessures graves voire mortelles dues à l'énergie électrique. % Observer tous les dangers afin de prévenir toute blessure. 7 AVERTISSEMENT Tout manquement au respect des instructions mises en valeur de cette manière peut entraîner des blessures graves ou des dommages matériels. % Observer tous les avertissements afin de prévenir toute blessure et garantir l'utilisation correcte de la machine. 7 ATTENTION Tout manquement au respect des instructions mises en valeur de cette manière peut entraîner des blessures légères ou des dommages matériels. % Observer toutes les mises en garde afin de prévenir toute blessure et garantir l'utilisation correcte de la machine. Séquence d'actions 1 Le chiffre 1 ainsi formaté indique la première étape d'une séquence d'actions. 2 Les nombres suivants présentés ainsi indiquent les étapes successives d'une série d'actions. Une illustration insérée ici montre les opérations à effectuer. 1 Introduction 1-10 GDI Printer Controller ? Le texte formaté dans ce style offre une assistance supplémentaire. % Le texte présenté ainsi décrit l'action permettant d'obtenir le résultat escompté. Conseils 2 Remarque Le texte présenté ainsi contient des informations utiles et des conseils pour garantir l'utilisation en toute sécurité de la machine. 2 Rappel Le texte présenté de cette manière contient des informations qu'il convient de mémoriser. ! Détails Le texte présenté de cette manière contient des références à des informations plus détaillées. Repères de texte spéciaux Touche [Stop] Les noms des touches du panneau de contrôle sont illustrées comme ci-dessus. RÉGLAGE MACHINE Les textes affichés se présentent sous la forme ci-dessus. Introduction 1 GDI Printer Controller 1-11 1.3 Environnement d'exploitation Configuration minimale requise L'environnement d'exploitation est nécessaire pour pouvoir utiliser le pilote d'imprimante. - Intel Pentium 200 MHz - Windows Serveur 2003, Windows XP (Service Pack 2 ou ultérieur), Windows 2000 (Service Pack 4 ou ultérieur), Windows Me, ou Windows 98 SE - 128 Mo RAM (Windows XP/Serveur 2003), 64 Mo RAM (Windows 2000/Me/98 SE) - Port USB compatible USB 2.0 - Lecteur CD-ROM/DVD 2 Remarque Le pilote d'imprimante n'est pas compatible avec Windows 95/98/NT 4.0. Environnement d'exploitation recommandé Pentium 4/1.6 GHz 256 Mo RAM 1.4 Installation du pilote d'imprimante % Référez-vous au dossier "Installation" sur le CD-ROM. 1 Introduction 1-12 GDI Printer Controller 2 Spécifier les paramètres du pilote d'imprimante Spécifier les paramètres du pilote d'imprimante 2 GDI Printer Controller 2-3 2 Spécifier les paramètres du pilote d'imprimante Les paramètres du pilote d'imprimante disponibles pour l'impression à partir d'un ordinateur sont décrits ci-dessous. 2.1 Boîte de dialogue Paramètres du pilote d'imprimante Afficher la boîte de dialogue Paramètres Sélectionnez l'imprimante dans la fenêtre Imprimantes et télécopieurs (fenêtre Imprimantes sous Windows 2000/Me/98 SE), et affichez ensuite la boîte de dialogue Paramètres du pilote d'imprimante. Les paramètres spécifiés dans cette boîte de dialogue sont effectifs pour toutes les applications. 1 Ouvrez la fenêtre Imprimantes et télécopieurs (ou la fenêtre Imprimantes). – Sous Windows XP/Serveur 2003, cliquez sur le bouton [Démarrer], et cliquez sur "Imprimantes et télécopieurs". – Sous Windows 2000/Me/98 SE, cliquez sur le bouton [Démarrer] pointez sur "Paramètres", et cliquez ensuite sur "Imprimantes". 2 Dans la fenêtre Imprimantes et télécopieurs (ou la fenêtre Imprimantes), sélectionnez l'icône d'imprimante pour cette machine. 3 Dans le menu "Fichier", sélectionnez la commande qui permet d'afficher la boîte de dialogue Paramètres du pilote d'imprimante. – Sous Windows XP/Serveur 2003/2000, cliquez sur "Préférences d'impression" dans le menu "Fichier". – Sous Windows Me/98 SE, cliquez sur "Propriétés" dans le menu "Fichier". 2 Spécifier les paramètres du pilote d'imprimante 2-4 GDI Printer Controller La boîte de dialogue Paramètres du pilote d'imprimante ci-dessous apparaît. 2 Remarque Pour modifier les paramètres pour chaque tâche d'impression, cliquez sur le bouton [Propriétés] (ou le bouton [Préférences]) dans la boîte de dialogue Impression qui apparaît quand on clique sur "Imprimer" depuis l'application. Les paramètres spécifiés dans la boîte de dialogue qui s'affiche à partir de la boîte de dialogue Impression n'ont qu'un effet temporaire, et dès que l'on quitte l'application, les paramètres reviendront à la valeur qui figure dans la boîte de dialogue Paramètres du pilote d'imprimante. Grâce à la fonction Configuration aisée, il est possible d'enregistrer et de rappeler selon les besoins un programme contenant des paramètres spécifiés particulièrement. Pour plus de détails sur la fonction Configuration aisée, voir "Conf. aisée" à la page 2-12. Pour afficher l'onglet Caractéristiques options sous Windows XP/Serveur 2003/2000, cliquez sur "Propriétés" dans le menu "Fichier" de la fenêtre Imprimantes et télécopieurs (ou la fenêtre Imprimantes). Spécifier les paramètres du pilote d'imprimante 2 GDI Printer Controller 2-5 Boîte de dialogue Préférences d'impression Les paramètres d'impression peuvent être spécifiés depuis la boîte de dialogue Paramètres du pilote d'imprimante. 2 Remarque Pour afficher la boîte de dialogue Préférences d'impression sous Windows XP/Serveur 2003/2000, cliquez sur "Propriétés" dans le menu "Fichier" de la fenêtre Imprimantes et télécopieurs (ou la fenêtre Imprimantes). Pour afficher la boîte de dialogue Préférences d'impression sous Windows Me/98 SE, cliquez sur "Propriétés" dans le menu "Fichier" de la fenêtre Imprimantes. 2 Spécifier les paramètres du pilote d'imprimante 2-6 GDI Printer Controller Onglet Sous-menu Description Installation Orientation Sélectionnez l'orientation papier du document. Format doc. original Spécifiez le format du papier pour le document. Bouton [Personnaliser] Spécifiez un format papier personnalisé. Format papier sortie Spécifiez le format du papier qui sera imprimé. Si ce format est différent du format document original, l'image sera automatiquement agrandie ou réduite. Zoom Spécifiez le taux d'agrandissement ou de réduction. Copie Spécifiez le nombre d'exemplaires à imprimer. Assembler Sélectionnez si de multiple copies d'un document de plusieurs pages doit être imprimé par jeux de documents ou par groupe de pages identiques. Source papier Sélectionnez le magasin dans lequel le papier doit être prélevé. Type de média Sélectionnez le type de papier à utiliser. Méthode de sortie Sélectionnez la méthode de sortie. Mise en page Combinaison Il est possible d'imprimer plusieurs pages d'un document sur une seule feuille de papier. Bouton [Détails Combinaison] Des paramètres tels que le nombre de pages à imprimer sur une seule page et l'ordre d'impression peuvent être spécifiés comme détails de combinaison. Recto-verso Sélectionnez si les pages doivent être imprimées sur les deux faces de la feuille. Position de reliure Sélectionnez la position de reliure. Réglages par page Couverture recto Sélectionnez s'il faut imprimer une page sur la couverture. Source Papier Couverture Sélectionnez le magasin qui contient le papier à couverture. Type de média Sélectionnez le type de papier à utiliser pour la couverture. Filigrane Filigrane Sélectionnez si le document sera imprimé pardessus un filigrane (tampon texte). Premier page uniquement Sélectionnez si le filigrane doit être imprimé seulement sur la première page. Bouton [Nouveau] Permet de créer de nouveaux filigranes. Bouton [Edition] Permet de modifier les filigranes. Bouton [Supprimer] Permet de supprimer un filigrane. Qualité Définition Pour spécifier la résolution d'impression. Bouton [Réglages] Spécifiez la luminosité et le contraste. A propos - Affiche les informations sur la version du logiciel. Spécifier les paramètres du pilote d'imprimante 2 GDI Printer Controller 2-7 Boîte de dialogue Propriétés Les options installées peuvent être sélectionnées depuis la boîte de dialogue Propriétés du pilote d'imprimante. 2 Rappel Si les options installées sur la machine ne sont pas spécifiées depuis l'onglet Caractéristiques, les fonctions disponibles avec l'option ne pourront pas être utilisées depuis le pilote d'imprimante. Veillez à spécifier les paramètres correspondants si des options sont installées. 2 Spécifier les paramètres du pilote d'imprimante 2-8 GDI Printer Controller 2 Remarque Pour afficher l'onglet Caractéristiques options, cliquez sur "Propriétés" dans le menu "Fichier" de la fenêtre Imprimantes et télécopieurs (ou la fenêtre Imprimantes). Onglet Sous-menu Description Caractéristiques options Caractéristiques options Spécifiez les paramètres concernant les magasins installés. Mémoire Spécifiez la taille de la mémoire installée. Spécifier les paramètres du pilote d'imprimante 2 GDI Printer Controller 2-9 2.2 Onglet Caractéristiques options % Spécifiez si les options sont ou non installées afin que les options installées sur la machine puissent être utilisées depuis le pilote d'imprimante. 2 Rappel Si les options installées sur la machine ne sont pas spécifiées depuis l'onglet Caractéristiques, les fonctions disponibles avec l'option ne pourront pas être utilisées depuis le pilote d'imprimante. Veillez à spécifier les paramètres correspondants si des options sont installées. 2 Remarque Pour afficher l'onglet Caractéristiques options, cliquez sur "Propriétés" dans le menu "Fichier" de la fenêtre Imprimantes et télécopieurs (ou la fenêtre Imprimantes). 2 Spécifier les paramètres du pilote d'imprimante 2-10 GDI Printer Controller Caractéristiques options % Spécifiez les paramètres concernant les magasins installés. – Dans la liste "Caractéristiques options", double-cliquez sur les noms des magasins installés afin d'indiquer s'ils sont installés. Double-cliquez une fois encore sur le nom si vous voulez restaurer le réglage "Non installé". Mémoire % Spécifiez la taille de la mémoire installée. – Cliquez sur [,] à droite de la case "Mémoire", et sélectionnez ensuite la taille de la mémoire installée. Spécifier les paramètres du pilote d'imprimante 2 GDI Printer Controller 2-11 2.3 Opérations communes Cette section décrit les boutons et les fonctions qui sont communs à tous les onglets de la boîte de dialogue. Les boutons affichés à l'écran peuvent présenter un aspect différent selon le système d'exploitation utilisé. Eléments communs Bouton Description Bouton [OK] Cliquez sur ce bouton pour appliquer les réglages spécifiés et fermer la boîte de dialogue. Bouton [Annuler] Cliquez sur ce bouton pour annuler les réglages spécifiés (et ne pas les appliquer) et fermer la boîte de dialogue. Bouton [Appliquer] Cliquez sur ce bouton pour appliquer les réglages spécifiés sans fermer la boîte de dialogue. Ce bouton ne s'affiche pas sur l'écran de configuration qui apparaît lorsque l'on clique sur le bouton [Propriétés] (ou sur le bouton [Préférences]) dans la boîte de dialogue Imprimer de l'application. Bouton [Aide] Ce bouton permet de faire apparaître des informations d'aide sur les réglages actuellement affichés à l'écran. Aperçu Affiche un aperçu du papier spécifié ou indique l'état de l'imprimante. Cliquez sur le bouton situé dans le coin inférieur gauche de la fenêtre d'aperçu pour passer alternativement de la [Aperçu Page] à la [Aperçu Imprimante] et sélectionner l'affichage de l'aperçu. Si la vue [Aperçu Page] a été sélectionnée, un aperçu de la mise en page s'affiche d'après les réglages sélectionnés afin que puisse être vérifié sur cette image le résultat attendu. Si la vue [Aperçu Imprimante] a été sélectionné, c'est une représentation de la configuration de l'imprimante, avec les options, comme les magasins actuellement installés, qui s'affiche. Les magasins papier sélectionnés dans la liste "Source papier" de l'onglet Installation s'affichent en bleu clair. Conf. aisée Les réglages actuellement sélectionnés peuvent être enregistrés en tant que programmes pour être éventuellement rappelés ultérieurement. Aperçu Imprimante Aperçu Page 2 Spécifier les paramètres du pilote d'imprimante 2-12 GDI Printer Controller Conf. aisée Les réglages actuellement sélectionnés peuvent être enregistrés comme programmes pour être rappelés lorsque vous voudrez réutiliser ces réglages par la suite. 1 Changez les paramètres du pilote dans les onglets Configuration et Mise en page. 2 Dans la case "Conf. aisée", tapez le nom du programme. 3 Cliquez sur le bouton [Enregistrer]. Le programme des réglages est enregistré. Spécifier les paramètres du pilote d'imprimante 2 GDI Printer Controller 2-13 2 Remarque Pour rappeler un programme enregistré, il suffit de le sélectionner dans la liste. Pour changer le nom d'un programme enregistré, sélectionnez le programme dans la liste, puis entrez le nouveau nom du programme. Le bouton laisse la place au bouton [Renommer]. Pour changer le nom du programme, cliquez sur le bouton [Renommer]. Pour supprimer un programme enregistré, sélectionnez le programme dans la liste. Le bouton laisse la place au bouton [Supprimer]. Pour effacer le nom du programme, cliquez sur le bouton [Supprimer]. Si on sélectionne "Réglage d’usine par default" dans la liste, tous les réglages reprennent leur valeur par défaut. Le nom à enregistrer peut comporter un maximum de 20 caractères. On peut enregistrer un maximum de 31 programmes. 2 Spécifier les paramètres du pilote d'imprimante 2-14 GDI Printer Controller 2.4 Onglet Installation L'onglet Installation permet de spécifier les réglages concernant le document et le papier sur lequel il sera imprimé. Le nombre de copies à imprimer ainsi que l'orientation de l'image d'impression peuvent aussi y être spécifiés. Orientation % Sélectionnez s'il faut imprimer le document selon l'orientation portrait ou l'orientation paysage. Portrait Paysage Spécifier les paramètres du pilote d'imprimante 2 GDI Printer Controller 2-15 Format doc. original % Dans la liste déroulante, cliquez sur le format papier correspondant au document pour sélectionner le format. Les formats standard suivants sont disponibles. Réglage Format réel Letter 8 1/2 e 11 in. Legal 8 1/2 e 14 in. 11 e 17 11 e 17 in. A3 297 e 420 mm A4 210 e 297 mm A5 148 e 210 mm B4 257 e 364 mm B5 182 e 257 mm Env.Com10 4 1/8 e 9 1/2 in. Env.DL 110 e 220 mm Env.C6Enveloppe 114 e 162 mm FLS 8 1/4 e 13 210 e 330 mm FLS 8 1/2 e 13 216 e 330 mm FLS 220 e 330 mm FLS 8 1/8 e 13 1/4 206 e 337 mm FLS 8 e 13 203 e 330 mm 11 e 14 11 e 14 in. Invoice 5 1/2 e 8 1/2 in. Env.You-1 120 e 176 mm Env.You-4 105 e 235 mm Env.You-6 98 e 190 mm 8K 270 e 390 mm 16K 195 e 270 mm Hagaki 100 e 148 mm Env.C6 3/4 3 5/8 e 6 1/2 in. 2 Spécifier les paramètres du pilote d'imprimante 2-16 GDI Printer Controller 2 Remarque Si "Hagaki" a été sélectionné, sélectionnez le réglage papier "Hagaki" pour le Magasin 1 depuis le panneau de contrôle de la machine. Pour sélectionner "Hagaki" ainsi que les enveloppes et les formats nonstandard, "Source papier" doit être réglé sur "Auto", "Mag 1" ou "Introd. manuel". Si "Type de média" est réglé sur "Transparent", seuls les formats "Letter" et "A4" seront disponibles. Spécifier les paramètres du pilote d'imprimante 2 GDI Printer Controller 2-17 Personnaliser Un format papier qui n'apparaît pas dans la liste peut être enregistré comme format personnalisé. 1 Cliquez sur le bouton [Personnaliser] sur l'onglet Installation. La boîte de dialogue Paramètres de format personnalisé apparaît. 2 Cliquez sur le bouton [Nouveau]. La boîte de dialogue Réglages Format personnalisé s'agrandit pour afficher les paramètres permettant de spécifier le format de papier. 2 Spécifier les paramètres du pilote d'imprimante 2-18 GDI Printer Controller 3 Dans la case "Nom", tapez le nom du format papier. 4 Dans la case de groupe "Dimensions", spécifiez la largeur et la longueur du papier. – Si vous désirez changer d'unité de mesure pour spécifier le format de papier, sélectionnez le réglage voulu dans la case de groupe "Unité". 5 Cliquez sur le bouton [OK] dans le coin inférieur droit de la boîte de dialogue Réglages Format personnalisé. Les réglages de format papier dans la boîte de dialogue Réglages Format personnalisé sont masqués. 6 Cliquez sur le bouton [OK] dans la boîte de dialogue Réglages Format personnalisé. Le format non-standard est enregistré et peut alors être sélectionné dans la liste des formats papier. Spécifier les paramètres du pilote d'imprimante 2 GDI Printer Controller 2-19 2 Remarque Pour changer la largeur et la longueur d'un format non-standard enregistré, sélectionnez le format dans la boîte de dialogue Réglages Format personnalisé, cliquez sur le bouton [Edition], et modifiez ensuite les réglages. Il n'est pas possible de changer le nom. Pour effacer un format non-standard enregistré, sélectionnez le format papier dans la boîte de dialogue Réglages Format personnalisé, et cliquez sur le bouton [Supprimer]. Le nom à enregistrer peut comporter un maximum de 20 caractères. On peut enregistrer un maximum de 32 formats. 2 Spécifier les paramètres du pilote d'imprimante 2-20 GDI Printer Controller Format papier sortie % Sélectionnez le format de papier à utiliser pour imprimer. – Les formats Papier ordinaire sont les mêmes que ceux qui sont disponibles dans la liste "Format doc. original". – Si le format papier est différent du format sélectionné dans la liste Format doc. original, l'image du document sera agrandie ou réduite lors de l'impression de manière à ce qu'elle puisse occuper la totalité de la page du format sélectionné. – Le taux d'agrandissement/réduction à appliquer pour l'impression peut être vérifié dans l'aperçu Mise en page. 2 Remarque Si vous sélectionnez "Manuel" dans la case groupe "Zoom", il n'est pas possible de sélectionner un réglage dans la liste "Format papier sortie". Si vous sélectionnez un autre réglage que "Disattivo" dans la liste "Combinaison" de l'onglet Mise en page, il n'est pas possible de sélectionner un réglage dans la liste "Format papier sortie". Spécifier les paramètres du pilote d'imprimante 2 GDI Printer Controller 2-21 Zoom 1 Spécifiez le taux d'agrandissement/réduction à appliquer pour l'impression. 2 Sélectionnez "Manuel", puis tapez un taux compris entre 25% et 400%, ou cliquez sur les flèches pour spécifier un réglage. 2 Remarque Si vous sélectionnez un autre réglage que "Identique au format Original" dans la liste "Format papier sortie", il n'est pas possible de sélectionner "Manuel". Copie 1 Spécifiez le nombre d'exemplaires à imprimer. 2 Tapez un nombre compris entre 1 et 99, ou cliquez sur les flèches pour spécifier un réglage. Réduction Original Agrandissement 2 Spécifier les paramètres du pilote d'imprimante 2-22 GDI Printer Controller Assembler % Si vous désirez imprimer plusieurs copies d'un même document, sélectionnez si le document sera imprimé par jeux entiers successifs ou par groupes de copies de chaque même page. – Si la case "Assembler" est cochée, le document sera imprimé par jeux entiers successifs. Par exemple, si "Copie" est réglé sur "5", le document entier (de la première à la dernière page) sera imprimé cinq fois. – Si la case "Assembler" n'est pas cochée, le nombre d'exemplaires spécifié sera imprimé en totalité pour chaque page du document. Par exemple, si "Copie" est réglé sur "5", la première page du document sera imprimée cinq fois, puis la seconde cinq fois aussi et ainsi de suite. L'impression s'achèvera lorsque la dernière page aura été imprimée cinq fois. 2 Remarque En fonction de l'application utilisée, la fonction Assembler peut ne pas être applicable. Si la fonction Assembler a été spécifiée dans le pilote d'imprimante, elle ne peut pas être sélectionnée depuis l'application. En outre, si vous spécifiez "1" dans la case "Copie", la fonction Assembler n'est pas disponible. Case cochée Case non cochée Spécifier les paramètres du pilote d'imprimante 2 GDI Printer Controller 2-23 Source papier % Sélectionnez le magasin qui contient le papier. – Si vous sélectionnez "Auto", c'est le magasin qui contient le papier spécifié dans la liste "Format papier" qui sera utilisé. – Les réglages disponibles diffèrent en fonction des options qui sont installées. – Réglages : Mag 1, Mag 2 à Mag 5 (options), Introd. manuel 2 Remarque Si vous sélectionnez "Hagaki" ou un format d'enveloppe ou de papier non-standard dans la liste "Format doc. original", seuls les réglages "Mag 1" et "Introd. manuel" seront disponibles. Seuls les réglages "Mag 1" et "Introd. manuel" sont disponibles quand "Type de média" est réglé sur "Transparent", "Papier épais" ou "Enveloppe". Magasin Introd. manuel 2 Spécifier les paramètres du pilote d'imprimante 2-24 GDI Printer Controller Type de média % Sélectionnez le type de papier qui sera imprimé. – Réglages : Papier ordinaire, Transparent, Papier épais, Enveloppe 2 Remarque Il n'est possible de sélectionner un réglage que si "Source papier" est réglé sur "Mag 1" ou "Introd. manuel". Le réglage "Transparent" ne peut être sélectionné que si "Format doc. original" est réglé sur "Letter" ou "A4". Méthode de sortie % Sélectionnez la méthode d'impression. – Les données peuvent être imprimées directement, mais elles peuvent l'être aussi par "Impression verrouillée", un mot de passe étant alors nécessaire pour réaliser l'impression sur cette machine. – Réglages : Impression, Impression verrouillée 2 Remarque Le réglage "Impression verrouillée" n'est disponible que si l'extension mémoire est installée. Spécifier les paramètres du pilote d'imprimante 2 GDI Printer Controller 2-25 Utilisation de l'impression sécurisée L'impression du document est subordonné à l'introduction du mot de passe correspondant préalablement spécifié. Le document destiné à être imprimé à partir d'un ordinateur est temporairement enregistré dans la mémoire de la machine, puis sera imprimé dès que le mot de passe approprié est entré sur le panneau de contrôle de la machine. Sélectionnez ce réglage si vous désirez imprimer des documents confidentiels. Spécifier l'impression sécurisée depuis le pilote d'imprimante 1 Cliquez sur l'onglet Installation. 2 Dans la liste déroulante "Méthode de sortie", sélectionnez "Impression verrouillée". L'écran qui apparaît vous permet de taper le mot de passe. 3 Introduisez le mot de passe, et cliquez sur le bouton [OK]. – Spécifiez le mot de passe composé d'un nombre compris entre 0000 et 9999. Introduction du mot de passe 2 Spécifier les paramètres du pilote d'imprimante 2-26 GDI Printer Controller 4 La tâche d'impression démarre. – L'impression normale a lieu quand l'impression est demandée depuis une application. Spécifier les paramètres du pilote d'imprimante 2 GDI Printer Controller 2-27 Impression depuis la machine Il est nécessaire d'entrer le mot de passe sur le panneau de contrôle de la machine pour pouvoir imprimer un document assorti d'un mot de passe si "Impression verrouillée" est sélectionné dans le pilote d'imprimante. 1 Vérifiez que le voyant "Imprimante" clignote ou est allumé, et appuyez ensuite sur la touche [Imprimante]. L'écran Mode d'impression apparaît. 2 Vérifiez que l'icône représentant une clé s'affiche dans le coin supérieur droit de l'écran. – Cette icône apparaît si un document confidentiel se trouve en mémoire. 3 Appuyez sur la touche [Code]. MODE IMPRIMANTE ATTENTE IMPRESSION 2 Spécifier les paramètres du pilote d'imprimante 2-28 GDI Printer Controller 4 Quand "MOT DE PASSE : – – – –" apparaît, tapez le mot de passe. – Tapez les même chiffres que ceux qui ont été spécifiés comme mot de passe dans le pilote d'imprimante. 5 Vérifiez que le document peut être imprimé. Si le mot de passe est correct, l'écran suivant apparaît, et la tâche d'impression est effectuée. 2 Remarque S'il y a plusieurs tâches qui ont le même mot de passe, toutes ces tâches seront alors imprimées. MODE IMPRIMANTE MOT DE PASSE :---- _________ACCEPTE________ MOT DE PASSE :**** Spécifier les paramètres du pilote d'imprimante 2 GDI Printer Controller 2-29 2.5 Onglet Mise en page % Dans l'onglet Mise en page, sélectionnez le nombre de pages du document à imprimer sur une seule feuille de papier. 2 Spécifier les paramètres du pilote d'imprimante 2-30 GDI Printer Controller Combinaison Il est possible d'imprimer plusieurs pages d'un document sur une seule feuille de papier. L'impression combinée permet de réduire le nombre de pages imprimées et d'économiser le papier. % Dans la liste déroulante, sélectionnez le nombre de pages du document à imprimer sur une seule feuille de papier. – Par exemple, si "2 en 1" est sélectionné, ce sont deux pages qui seront imprimées sur une seule feuille de papier. Si "Off" est sélectionné, une page sera imprimée sur une seule feuille de papier. – Réglages : Off, 2 en 1, 4 en 1, 6 en 1, 9 en 1, 16 en 1 2 en 1 4 en 1 6 en 1 9 en 1 16 en 1 Spécifier les paramètres du pilote d'imprimante 2 GDI Printer Controller 2-31 Détails Combinaison % Cliquez sur le bouton [Détails Combinaison] pour spécifier l'ordre d'impression et s'il faut ou non imprimer les limites de page. Sous-menu Description Combinaison Sélectionnez le nombre de pages à imprimer sur une seule feuille de papier. Il s'agit du même réglage qui a été sélectionné dans la liste "Combinaison" sur l'onglet Mise en page. Ordre Si plusieurs pages sont imprimées sur une seule feuille de papier, sélectionnez l'orientation et l'ordre d'impression des pages. Réglages : Bordure Si plusieurs pages sont imprimées sur une seule feuille de papier, cochez cette case pour imprimer autour de chaque page réduite les limites de page. Colonnes Gauche Colonnes. Haut- Droite Rangées Gauche Rangées Droite Haut- Haut- Haut2 Spécifier les paramètres du pilote d'imprimante 2-32 GDI Printer Controller Impression recto-verso Cette fonction permet d'imprimer des pages du document sur les deux faces de la feuille de papier. Si vous voulez relier un document de plusieurs page, il est judicieux d'imprimer les feuilles en recto-verso. 1 Cliquez sur l'onglet Mise en page. 2 Dans la liste déroulante "Recto-verso", sélectionnez "Recto double". 2 Remarque Dans la liste déroulante "Position de reliure", sélectionnez la position de reliure désirée. 2 Remarque L'impression Recto-verso n'est disponible que si l'unité recto-verso automatique, en option, est installée. Spécifier les paramètres du pilote d'imprimante 2 GDI Printer Controller 2-33 2.6 Onglet Réglages par page % Dans l'onglet Réglages par page, spécifiez si une page de couverture doit ou non être ajoutée. 2 Spécifier les paramètres du pilote d'imprimante 2-34 GDI Printer Controller Couverture recto % Sélectionnez s'il faut ou non ajouter une couverture, et dans l'affirmative, si la couverture doit ou non être imprimée. – Réglages : Source Papier Couverture % Sélectionnez le magasin qui contient le papier destiné aux couvertures. – Réglages : Mag 1, Mag 2 à Mag 5 (options), Introd. manuel Type de média % Sélectionnez le type de papier à utiliser pour la couverture. – Réglages : Papier ordinaire, Transparent, Papier épais, Enveloppe Sous-menu Description Sans Aucune couverture n'est ajoutée, le document tout entier sera imprimé sur du papier prélevé dans le même magasin. Vierge Une feuille vierge sera prélevée dans le magasin spécifié dans la liste "Source papier Couverture" et ajoutée comme couverture. Imprimé La première page du document est imprimée sur du papier prélevé dans le magasin spécifié dans la liste "Source Papier Couverture" et ajoutée comme couverture. Spécifier les paramètres du pilote d'imprimante 2 GDI Printer Controller 2-35 2.7 Onglet Filigrane L'onglet Filigrane permet d'imprimer en arrière-plan un texte spécifique. Sélection filigrane 1 Cliquez sur l'onglet Filigrane. 2 Dans la liste Filigrane, sélectionnez le filigrane à imprimer. – Réglages : Sans Filigrane, Confidentiel, Copie, Ne pas copier, Brouillon, Final, Epreuve, TOP SECRET 3 Pour n'imprimer le filigrane que sur la première page, cochez la case "Premiere page uniquement". – Décochez cette case si vous voulez que le filigrane apparaisse sur toutes les pages. 2 Spécifier les paramètres du pilote d'imprimante 2-36 GDI Printer Controller Créer un nouveau filigrane Il est possible d'enregistrer un nouveau filigrane. 1 Cliquez sur l'onglet Filigrane. 2 Cliquez sur le bouton [Nouveau]. La boîte de dialogue Nouveau apparaît. 3 Dans la case "Texte du filigrane", tapez le texte qui doit figurer sous forme de filigrane. – Le texte à enregistrer peut comporter un maximum de 20 caractères. – Il est possible d'enregistrer un maximum 32 filigranes (y compris "Sans Filigrane"). Spécifier les paramètres du pilote d'imprimante 2 GDI Printer Controller 2-37 4 Spécifiez les réglages désirés. – Police : Sélectionnez la police à utiliser pour le filigrane. Vous pouvez sélectionner toute police installée sur l'ordinateur. – Gras : Sélectionnez pour imprimer le texte en gras. – Italique : Sélectionnez pour imprimer le texte en italique. – Format : Spécifiez la taille des caractères, de 7 à 300 points. – Angle : Spécifiez l'inclinaison du texte à imprimer sur papier. Vous pouvez spécifier une inclinaison de 0° à 359°. – Noirceur : Spécifiez la densité du texte. Vous pouvez spécifier un réglage de 10° à 100°. – Position : Spécifiez les positions horizontale et verticale de l'emplacement où le texte sera imprimé. Vous pouvez spécifier des valeurs comprises entre -100 et 100. – Vous pouvez aussi changer la position en utilisant les curseurs cidessous et à droite de l'image d'aperçu. 5 Cliquez sur le bouton [Ajouter]. Le filigrane est ajouté à la liste "Sélection Filigrane". Sens horizontal : La réduction de la valeur déplace le texte vers la gauche. Sens vertical : L'augmentation de la valeur déplace le texte vers le haut. 2 Spécifier les paramètres du pilote d'imprimante 2-38 GDI Printer Controller Modifier un filigrane Vous pouvez éditer un filigrane enregistré et en changer le texte, la taille et la position. 1 Cliquez sur l'onglet Filigrane. 2 Dans la liste, sélectionnez le filigrane à éditer. 3 Cliquez sur le bouton [Edition]. La boîte de dialogue Edition apparaît. 4 Spécifiez les réglages désirés. – Texte du filigrane : Tapez le texte qui apparaîtra sous forme de filigrane. – Police : Sélectionnez la police à utiliser pour le filigrane. Vous pouvez sélectionner toute police installée sur l'ordinateur. – Gras : Sélectionnez pour imprimer le texte en gras. – Italique : Sélectionnez pour imprimer le texte en italique. – Format : Spécifiez la taille des caractères, de 7 à 300 points. – Angle : Spécifiez l'inclinaison du texte à imprimer sur papier. Vous pouvez spécifier une inclinaison de 0° à 359°. – Noirceur : Spécifiez la densité du texte. Vous pouvez spécifier un réglage de 10° à 100°. Spécifier les paramètres du pilote d'imprimante 2 GDI Printer Controller 2-39 – Décaler à partier du centre : Spécifiez les positions horizontale et verticale de l'emplacement où le texte sera imprimé. Vous pouvez spécifier des valeurs comprises entre -100 et 100. – Le texte à enregistrer peut comporter un maximum de 20 caractères. 2 Spécifier les paramètres du pilote d'imprimante 2-40 GDI Printer Controller – Vous pouvez aussi changer la position en utilisant les curseurs cidessous et à droite de l'image d'aperçu. 5 Cliquez sur la touche [OK]. Le filigrane est ainsi modifié. 2 Remarque Pour effacer un filigrane enregistré, sélectionnez le filigrane dans la liste, et cliquez sur le bouton [Supprimer]. Sens horizontal : La réduction de la valeur déplace le texte vers la gauche. Sens vertical : L'augmentation de la valeur déplace le texte vers le haut. Spécifier les paramètres du pilote d'imprimante 2 GDI Printer Controller 2-41 2.8 Onglet Qualité L'onglet Qualité permet de spécifier les paramètres relatifs à la qualité d'impression. Définition % Dans la liste déroulante, sélectionnez "600 e 600 dpi" ou "300 e 300 dpi" comme résolution d'impression. 2 Remarque Lorsque "600 × 600 dpi" est sélectionné, la qualité d'impression est améliorée, mais la durée de l'impression est plus longue que si "300 × 300 dpi" est sélectionné. 2 Spécifier les paramètres du pilote d'imprimante 2-42 GDI Printer Controller Réglages % Cliquez sur le bouton [Réglages] pour spécifier le contraste et la luminosité. Sous-menu Description Brillance Permet d'agir sur la luminosité de l'image imprimée. Vous pouvez spécifier un réglage de -50 à 50. Plus grande sera la valeur, et plus l'image sera contrastée et distincte. Contraste Permet d'agir sur le contraste de l'image imprimée. Vous pouvez spécifier un réglage de -50 à 50. Plus la valeur est élevée, plus l'image sera lumineuse. 3 Opérations sur le panneau de contrôle Opérations sur le panneau de contrôle 3 GDI Printer Controller 3-3 3 Opérations sur le panneau de contrôle Les opérations d'impression accessibles par le panneau de contrôle de la machine sont décrites ci-dessous. 3.1 Opérations d'impression Le mode par défaut de la machine est le mode Copie. Normalement, quand l'impression est initiée depuis un ordinateur raccordé à l'imprimante, l'impression commence automatiquement. Pour plus de détails, voir "Commencer une opération d'impression" à la page 3-5. Si vous désirez imprimer en sélectionnant "Introducteur manuel" dans la liste "Source papier" de l'onglet Installation, veuillez vous reporter à "Utilise l'introducteur manuel" à la page 3-8. Panneau de contrôle 1 2 3 4 5 8 7 6 3 Opérations sur le panneau de contrôle 3-4 GDI Printer Controller 2 Remarque La touche [Fax] et les touches de fonction fax ne peuvent être utilisées que si le kit Fax, en option, est installé sur la machine. La touche [Numérisation] ne peut être utilisée que si le kit Fax, en option, et la carte réseau NC-503 ou le contrôleur image IC-206, en option, sont installés sur la machine. No. Sous-menu Description 1 Afficheur • Pendant la réception des données, l'indication, ">>IMPRIMANTE :Impress." apparaît sur l'écran. • En outre, si l'on appuie sur la touche [Imprimante] pendant que la machine reçoit des données d'impression (le témoin Imprimante est allumé), les réglages Source papier et Format papier, ainsi que le nom de l'utilisateur pour la tâche d'impression en cours s'affichent. 2 Touche OK • Appuyez sur cette touche pour sélectionner la fonction affichée à l'écran. 3 Flèche (haut, bas, gauche et droite) • Appuyez sur ces touches pour changer le menu affiché à l'écran. 4 Voyant Imprimante • Ce témoin clignote que la machine reçoit des données d'impression. • Ce témoin s'allume quand la machine est en train d'imprimer les données. (Il s'allume en revanche si, en même temps, la machine reçoit des données.) • Ce témoin s'éteint s'il n'y a pas de données d'impression. • Voir "Témoin Imprimante" à la page 3-5. 5 Touche Imprimante • Appuyez sur cette touche quand la machine est en train de recevoir des données d'impression (le témoin Imprimante est allumé) pour afficher l'écran du mode Imprimante. • Pour revenir au mode précédant le passage au mode Imprimante, appuyez sur cette touche pendant que l'écran du mode Imprimante est affiché. • Si la mémoire de la machine ne contient aucune donnée d'impression, l'écran du mode Impression PC n'apparaît pas même si l'on appuie sur la touche [Imprimante]. 6 Touche Arrêt/Annul. • Pour annuler la tâche d'impression en cours pendant la réception des données d'impression, appuyez sur la touche [Imprimante] et appuyez sur cette touche lorsque l'écran du mode Imprimante apparaît. Voir "Annulation d'un travail d'impression" à la page 3-6. 7 Témoin Départ • Ce témoin s'allume en orange pendant que la machine reçoit des données d'impression. 8 Témoin Alerte • Ce témoin s'allume lorsqu'une erreur ou une anomalie se produit. Opérations sur le panneau de contrôle 3 GDI Printer Controller 3-5 Témoin Imprimante Le témoin "Imprimante" indique l'état des données transmises par l'ordinateur. Commencer une opération d'impression Normalement, l'impression commence si l'impression est initiée depuis un ordinateur raccordé à l'imprimante. - Normalement, quand l'impression est initiée depuis un ordinateur raccordé à l'imprimante, l'impression commence automatiquement. - Si une opération d'impression est commandée depuis un ordinateur raccordé à la machine alors qu'une tâche de copie est déjà en cours, l'impression commencera automatiquement 30 secondes après que la dernière copié ait été réalisée. - Avec le lit Fax en option : Si des données d'impression sont reçues alors que des données fax sont en cours de réception, ce sont les données d'impression qui sont prioritaires. Une fois que la réception en mode Fax est achevée, les données d'impression sont imprimées, puis le fax est imprimé à son tour. - Pendant l'impression, il est possible de spécifier les réglages copie et de réaliser des opérations Fax. (Copies et fax sont traitées après les données d'impression.) Voyant Imprimante Etat de l'impression Clignotant • La machine est en train de recevoir des données d'impression. Ce témoin clignote aussi dans d'autres modes. • Une erreur s'est produite sur la machine. Allumé • Les données sont en cours d'impression. Ce témoin, au lieu de clignoter, reste allumé si des données sont reçues pendant que des données sont en cours d'impression. Off (Dés.) • La mémoire de la machine ne contient aucune donnée d'impression. 3 Opérations sur le panneau de contrôle 3-6 GDI Printer Controller Annulation d'un travail d'impression On peut annuler l'impression d'une tâche depuis le panneau de contrôle de la machine. Cependant, cela ne peut se faire que si la machine est en mode Imprimante. 1 Vérifiez que le voyant Imprimante clignote ou est allumé, et appuyez ensuite sur la touche [Imprimante]. 2 Vérifiez que "MODE IMPRIMANTE IMPRESSION" apparaît sur l'écran de la machine. – Le message qui s'affiche dépend du statut (état) de la machine. 3 Appuyez sur la touche [Arrêt/Annul.]. Le message de confirmation "ABANDON TRAVAIL" apparaît. MODE IMPRIMANTE Utilisateur 01 Impression LTR ABANDON TRAVAIL NON OUI Opérations sur le panneau de contrôle 3 GDI Printer Controller 3-7 4 Appuyez sur la touche [+] ou [,] pour sélectionner "OUI", et appuyez sur la touche [OK]. – Pour continuer l'impression, sélectionnez "Non". – Si aucune touche n'est activée au bout de cinq secondes, l'impression reprend. "ACCEPTE" apparaît à l'écran et la tâche d'impression est annulée. Si l'un des messages suivants apparaît à l'écran, on peut aussi annuler la tâche d'impression en répétant les étapes 2 et 3 de la procédure décrite cidessus. - MAGASIN VIDE - SERRAGE PAPIER - ERREUR FORMAT PAPIER - REINSER. PAPIER - PAPIER NON CONFORME - RECEPTACLE SUP PLEIN - ENLEVER PAPIER EN INTRO MANUEL - CHARGER PAP. - FORMAT PAPIER INCOR. - ERREUR TYPE MEDIA - *RECEPTION* - PORTE FRONT. OUVERTE - PORTE COTE 1 OUVERTE - PORTE R/V OUVERTE - TONER VIDE _________ACCEPTE________ NON OUI 3 Opérations sur le panneau de contrôle 3-8 GDI Printer Controller Utilise l'introducteur manuel La procédure ci-dessous indique comme utiliser l'introducteur manuel pour imprimer une page à la fois. 1 Sur l'ordinateur, affichez l'onglet Installation du pilote d'imprimante, et sélectionnez ensuite "Introd. manuel" dans la liste "Source papier" (page 2-23). 2 Lancez l'opération d'impression à partir de votre ordinateur. 3 Quand le message "MODE IMPRIMANTE CHARGER PAPIER" apparaît, Insérez le papier dans l'introducteur manuel. – Insérez une feuille de papier, recto vers le bas, aussi loin que possible dans la fente de l'introducteur. – Faites coulisser les guides papier pour les ajuster au format du papier inséré. MODE IMPRIMANTE Utilisateur 01 CHARGER PAP. ( ) Opérations sur le panneau de contrôle 3 GDI Printer Controller 3-9 4 Répétez l'étape 3 autant de fois que nécessaire pour que le document soit complet. 2 Remarque Veillez à insérer le papier dans l'introducteur manuel une fois que l'opération d'impression a été commandée depuis l'ordinateur. Appliquez la procédure ci-dessous si vous avez inséré le papier dans l'introducteur manuel avant que l'opération d'impression n'ait été commandée depuis l'ordinateur. Enlevez le papier de l'introducteur manuel. Appuyez sur la touche [Réinitialiser]. Appuyez sur la touche [Imprimante]. Exécutez l'étape 3 de la procédure. Ne chargez qu'une feuille à la fois dans l'introducteur manuel. Si le multi introducteur manuel (en option) est installé, l'impression s'effectue de la même manière qu'avec tout autre magasin car il peut être chargé avec 100 feuilles de papier. Cet introducteur multi-feuilles peut recevoir 10 enveloppes, 20 transparents, 20 cartes postales, 20 planches d'étiquettes, ou 100 feuilles de papier standard. 3 Opérations sur le panneau de contrôle 3-10 GDI Printer Controller Mode Eco Energie Si des données sont reçues pendant que la machine est en mode Economie d'énergie, ce mode est alors automatiquement annulé. Lorsque les données d'impression sont reçues, elles sont imprimées une fois que la machine a terminé son cycle de préchauffage. 4 Dépannage Dépannage 4 GDI Printer Controller 4-3 4 Dépannage Les erreurs qui peuvent se produire au cours de l'impression à partir d'un ordinateur, et les procédures de correction sont décrites ci-dessous. Si un problème se produit pendant l'impression depuis un ordinateur, vérifiez les points suivants. 4.1 Vérification des messages d'erreur Si une erreur d'impression depuis un ordinateur se produit alors que tout autre écran que celui du mode Imprimante est affiché, le témoin Alerte s'allume et le message "Contrôle Mode Impr." apparaît à l'écran de la machine. Dans ce cas, appliquez la procédure suivante. 1 Appuyez sur la touche [Imprimante]. L'écran Mode d'impression apparaît. 2 Vérifiez le message d'erreur affiché à l'écran, puis effectuez l'opération voulue pour corriger l'erreur. PAPIER: TEXTE/PHOTO ZOOM:100% Contrôle Mode Impr. LTR _______ATTENTION________ CHARGER PAP.( ) PAPIER NON CONFORME 4 Dépannage 4-4 GDI Printer Controller 4.2 Principaux messages d'erreur Les principaux messages d'erreur qui s'affichent sur l'écran du mode Imprimante sot décrits ci-dessous. Messages d'erreur Cause Remède ERREUR FORMAT PAPIER Le format papier spécifié dans le pilote d'imprimante est différent du format du papier chargé dans le magasin. Ouvrez le magasin concerné par l'erreur de format, puis refermez- le. Vérifiez si un format personnalisé a été entré, et corrigez le format depuis le mode Utilitaire. PAPIER NON CONFORME "Auto" est sélectionné dans la liste "Source papier" du pilote d'imprimante, mais ce n'est pas le papier du format spécifié qui est chargé. Chargez du papier au format désiré dans un magasin. FORMAT PAPIER INCOR. Le papier du format spécifié dans le pilote d'imprimante n'est pas chargé dans le magasin spécifié. Changez le format papier depuis le mode Utilitaire, puis chargez le papier du format approprié dans un magasin. Si vous utilisez l'introducteur multi-feuilles en option, l'impression commence dès que le papier approprié est chargé. MAGASIN VIDE Le magasin spécifié ne contient pas le papier spécifié ou il n'est pas installé sur la machine. Chargez du papier du format spécifié dans le magasin indiqué. ERREUR TYPE MEDIA Le papier du type spécifié dans le pilote d'imprimante n'est pas chargé dans le magasin spécifié. Chargez le papier approprié dans un magasin, puis changez le type de papier depuis le mode Utilitaire. Si vous utilisez l'introducteur multi-feuilles en option, l'impression commence dès que le papier approprié est chargé. MEM PRESQUE PLEINE Les données image reçues de l'ordinateur excèdent la capacité de la mémoire. Presser une touche Éteignez puis rallumez la machine. IMPRESS. VERROUILLEE NON DISPONIBLE L'extension mémoire n'étant pas installée, il n'est pas possible de sélectionner "Impression verrouillée". La tâche est annulée. MOT DE PASSE REFUSE Le mot de passe d'impression sécurisée étant erroné, il n'est pas possible d'imprimer le document. Introduisez le mot de passe correct. Dépannage 4 GDI Printer Controller 4-5 4.3 Traitement des données d'impression en cas d'erreur L'opération effectuée avec les données d'impression diffère selon le type d'erreur qui s'est produite. En cas d'erreur "PROBLEME MACHINE" Cette erreur indique une grave anomalie sur la machine. Si ce message d'erreur apparaît à l'écran, la machine ne peut recevoir aucune des données d'impression. Contactez votre S.A.V. Erreurs temporaires Si les erreurs facilement remédiables suivantes se produisent, les données d'impression en mémoire sont sauvegardées. L'impression reprend automatiquement dès que l'erreur est corrigée. - SERRAGE PAPIER - FORMAT PAPIER INCOR. - ERREUR FORMAT PAPIER - PORTE FRONT. OUVERTE - PORTE COTE 1 OUVERTE - PORTE R/V OUVERTE - PAPIER NON CONFORME - MAGASIN VIDE - ERREUR TYPE MEDIA 2 Remarque Si l'une des erreurs énumérées ci-dessus apparaît, il est possible d'annuler la tâche d'impression en mémoire. Pour plus de détails, voir "Annulation d'un travail d'impression" à la page 3-6. 4 Dépannage 4-6 GDI Printer Controller 5 Spécifications Spécifications 5 GDI Printer Controller 5-3 5 Spécifications * La vitesse d'impression est mesurée dans les conditions d'impression suivantes. Le papier est prélevé dans le Magasin 1. Caractéristiques Vitesse d'impression* ineo 163 16 ppm (impression sur papier A4 v à 300 e 300 dpi) 12 ppm (impression sur papier A4 v à 600 e 600 dpi) ineo 211 21 ppm (impression sur papier A4 v à 300 e 300 dpi) 20 ppm (impression sur papier Letter v à 300 e 300 dpi) 12 ppm (impression sur papier A4 v à 600 e 600 dpi) Mémoire Partagée avec la machine Port Interface Compatible USB Révision 2.0 Langage de l'imprimante GDI Police Windows Systèmes d'exploitation compatibles Windows Serveur 2003, Windows XP (Service Pack 2 ou ultérieur), Windows 2000 (Service Pack 4 ou ultérieur), Windows Me, Windows 98 SE ou Windows Terminal Serveur (Windows 2000 Serveur/Windows Serveur 2003) 5 Spécifications 5-4 GDI Printer Controller Box operations www.develop.eu ineo 223/283/363/423 Contents-1 Table of contents 1 Introduction 1.1 Welcome .......................................................................................................................................... 1-3 1.1.1 User's guides ..................................................................................................................................... 1-3 1.1.2 User's Guide ...................................................................................................................................... 1-4 1.2 Conventions used in this manual .................................................................................................. 1-5 1.2.1 Symbols used in this manual ............................................................................................................. 1-5 To use this machine safely................................................................................................................. 1-5 Procedural instruction........................................................................................................................ 1-5 Key symbols....................................................................................................................................... 1-6 1.2.2 Original and paper indications ........................................................................................................... 1-6 Original and paper sizes .................................................................................................................... 1-6 Original and paper indications ........................................................................................................... 1-6 1.3 To check the function you want to use......................................................................................... 1-7 Understanding Operation Flow.......................................................................................................... 1-7 Using Menu Tree................................................................................................................................ 1-7 2 User Box Function Overview 2.1 User Box functions ......................................................................................................................... 2-3 2.1.1 Available User Box functions ............................................................................................................. 2-4 Saving documents ............................................................................................................................. 2-4 Using documents............................................................................................................................... 2-5 Organizing documents....................................................................................................................... 2-7 2.1.2 Configuring settings for using the User Box functions ...................................................................... 2-8 Registering a User Box ...................................................................................................................... 2-8 When using this machine as a relay device ....................................................................................... 2-8 The User Box to which data is saved for memory reception............................................................. 2-8 2.2 Information ...................................................................................................................................... 2-9 2.2.1 User authentication............................................................................................................................ 2-9 MFP authentication............................................................................................................................ 2-9 External server authentication ........................................................................................................... 2-9 Account track authentication ........................................................................................................... 2-10 2.2.2 Restriction of box registration.......................................................................................................... 2-10 Public/Personal/Group User Boxes ................................................................................................. 2-10 Bulletin Board User Box................................................................................................................... 2-10 Polling TX User Box ......................................................................................................................... 2-10 Memory RX User Box ...................................................................................................................... 2-11 Relay User Box ................................................................................................................................ 2-11 Confidential RX User Box ................................................................................................................ 2-11 2.2.3 Restriction of file name .................................................................................................................... 2-11 2.3 Authentication and accessible User Boxes................................................................................ 2-12 2.3.1 When User Authentication or Account Track is not enabled........................................................... 2-12 2.3.2 When only user authentication is enabled ....................................................................................... 2-12 2.3.3 When only account track is enabled................................................................................................ 2-13 2.3.4 When user authentication and account track are enabled and synchronized................................. 2-13 2.3.5 When user authentication and account track are enabled but not synchronized ........................... 2-14 Contents-2 ineo 223/283/363/423 3 Control Panel/Liquid Crystal Display 3.1 Control panel ................................................................................................................................... 3-3 3.2 Touch panel ..................................................................................................................................... 3-5 3.2.1 Screen component............................................................................................................................. 3-5 Icons that appear in the touch panel ................................................................................................. 3-5 3.2.2 Display and operation of Left panel ................................................................................................... 3-6 Job List .............................................................................................................................................. 3-7 Job List - Delete................................................................................................................................. 3-7 Job List - Job Details ......................................................................................................................... 3-8 User Box information ....................................................................................................................... 3-14 Use/File - Detail................................................................................................................................ 3-14 Use/File - Check Job Settings ......................................................................................................... 3-14 Use/File - Check Job Settings - Destination Settings ..................................................................... 3-15 Use/File - Check Job Settings - Document Setting Contents ......................................................... 3-15 Use/File - Check Job Settings - Communication Settings .............................................................. 3-16 Use/File - Check Job Settings - Check E-Mail Settings.................................................................. 3-16 Preview ............................................................................................................................................ 3-16 Preview ............................................................................................................................................ 3-17 Preview (Print/Combine) .................................................................................................................. 3-17 Preview (Send/Bind TX) ................................................................................................................... 3-18 4 User Box Operation Flow 4.1 Saving documents in User Boxes.................................................................................................. 4-3 4.2 Printing documents from a User Box............................................................................................ 4-5 4.3 Sending documents from a User Box ........................................................................................... 4-8 4.4 Saving a document in an external memory ................................................................................ 4-11 4.5 Saving a Document from the External Memory into a User Box.............................................. 4-13 4.6 Printing a document from an external memory ......................................................................... 4-15 4.7 Filing documents in a User Box................................................................................................... 4-17 4.8 Printing a Document Saved in a Cellular Phone or PDA ........................................................... 4-19 4.9 Saving a Document Stored in a Cellular Phone or PDA to a User Box.................................... 4-21 4.10 Menu tree of the User Box mode ................................................................................................ 4-23 4.10.1 Save Document................................................................................................................................ 4-23 Public, Personal, or Group User Box............................................................................................... 4-23 System User Box ............................................................................................................................. 4-24 4.10.2 Use/File ............................................................................................................................................ 4-26 Print (for Public/Personal/Group User Boxes) ................................................................................. 4-26 Send (for Public/Personal/Group User Boxes) ................................................................................ 4-29 Filing Settings (for public/personal/group User Boxes) ................................................................... 4-32 Application (for Public/Personal/Group User Boxes)....................................................................... 4-33 System User Box ............................................................................................................................. 4-34 5 Accessing the User Box mode 5.1 Accessing the User Box mode ...................................................................................................... 5-3 5.2 User Box Operation Menu.............................................................................................................. 5-4 5.2.1 Save Document.................................................................................................................................. 5-4 5.2.2 Use/File .............................................................................................................................................. 5-4 6 Save Document 6.1 Save Document Overview.............................................................................................................. 6-3 6.1.1 Functions ........................................................................................................................................... 6-3 Public/Personal/Group User Boxes ................................................................................................... 6-3 Annotation User Box.......................................................................................................................... 6-3 External Memory................................................................................................................................ 6-3 6.1.2 Initial Window of Save Document...................................................................................................... 6-4 Public/Personal/Group User Boxes ................................................................................................... 6-4 System User Box ............................................................................................................................... 6-4 ineo 223/283/363/423 Contents-3 6.1.3 Save Document window.................................................................................................................... 6-5 6.2 Scan Settings .................................................................................................................................. 6-6 6.2.1 Basic - Original Type.......................................................................................................................... 6-6 6.2.2 Basic - Simplex/Duplex ..................................................................................................................... 6-7 6.2.3 Basic - Resolution.............................................................................................................................. 6-7 6.2.4 Basic - File Type ................................................................................................................................ 6-8 File Type............................................................................................................................................. 6-8 Encryption .......................................................................................................................................... 6-9 Encryption - Detail Settings ............................................................................................................... 6-9 Outline PDF...................................................................................................................................... 6-11 Scan Setting..................................................................................................................................... 6-11 6.2.5 Basic - Density................................................................................................................................. 6-12 6.2.6 Basic - Color .................................................................................................................................... 6-12 6.2.7 Scan Size ......................................................................................................................................... 6-13 Standard size ................................................................................................................................... 6-13 Custom Size..................................................................................................................................... 6-13 Photo Size........................................................................................................................................ 6-13 6.2.8 Image Adjustment............................................................................................................................ 6-14 Background Removal ...................................................................................................................... 6-14 Sharpness ........................................................................................................................................ 6-15 6.2.9 Application - Frame Erase ............................................................................................................... 6-15 6.2.10 Application - Book Copy.................................................................................................................. 6-16 Book copy method .......................................................................................................................... 6-16 Book Erase - Frame Erase ............................................................................................................... 6-16 Book Erase - Center Erase .............................................................................................................. 6-17 Binding Position ............................................................................................................................... 6-17 6.2.11 Separate Scan ................................................................................................................................. 6-18 6.3 Original Settings............................................................................................................................ 6-19 6.3.1 Special Original ................................................................................................................................ 6-19 6.3.2 Direction Settings - Original Direction ............................................................................................. 6-19 6.3.3 Direction Settings - Binding Position ............................................................................................... 6-20 6.3.4 Despeckle ........................................................................................................................................ 6-20 7 Use/File 7.1 Overview of the Use/File operations............................................................................................. 7-3 7.1.1 Functions of Use/File ......................................................................................................................... 7-3 Printing a document........................................................................................................................... 7-3 Sending.............................................................................................................................................. 7-3 Filing................................................................................................................................................... 7-3 Application settings ........................................................................................................................... 7-3 7.1.2 Detail of the Use Document screen ................................................................................................... 7-4 7.1.3 If a password is specified for a User Box .......................................................................................... 7-5 7.2 Print .................................................................................................................................................. 7-6 7.2.1 Overview of the Print tab ................................................................................................................... 7-6 Description of the Print tab ................................................................................................................ 7-6 Print.................................................................................................................................................... 7-7 Combine............................................................................................................................................. 7-7 7.2.2 Print.................................................................................................................................................... 7-8 7.2.3 Combine............................................................................................................................................. 7-8 Document Order ................................................................................................................................ 7-8 Configurable items to combine and print documents ....................................................................... 7-9 7.3 Print - Basic (Public, Personal, or Group User Box) .................................................................. 7-10 7.3.1 Copies.............................................................................................................................................. 7-10 7.3.2 1-Sided/2-Sided............................................................................................................................... 7-10 7.3.3 Finishing........................................................................................................................................... 7-11 Sort/Group ....................................................................................................................................... 7-11 Offset ............................................................................................................................................... 7-11 Staple ............................................................................................................................................... 7-11 Staple - Position Setting .................................................................................................................. 7-12 Contents-4 ineo 223/283/363/423 Punch............................................................................................................................................... 7-12 Punch - Position Setting .................................................................................................................. 7-12 Fold/Bind.......................................................................................................................................... 7-13 7.3.4 Combine........................................................................................................................................... 7-14 7.3.5 Zoom................................................................................................................................................ 7-14 7.3.6 Continuous Print .............................................................................................................................. 7-15 7.4 Print - Application (Public, Personal, or Group User Box) ........................................................ 7-16 7.4.1 Page Margin..................................................................................................................................... 7-16 Page Margin..................................................................................................................................... 7-16 Image Shift ....................................................................................................................................... 7-16 Image Shift - Change Back Shift ..................................................................................................... 7-17 7.4.2 Sheet/Cover/Chapter Insert ............................................................................................................. 7-17 7.4.3 Sheet/Cover/Chapter Insert - Cover Sheet...................................................................................... 7-18 7.4.4 Sheet/Cover/Chapter Insert - Insert Sheet ...................................................................................... 7-19 7.4.5 Sheet/Cover/Chapter Insert - Chapters........................................................................................... 7-20 7.4.6 Stamp/Composition......................................................................................................................... 7-21 7.4.7 Stamp/Composition - Date/Time..................................................................................................... 7-21 7.4.8 Stamp/Composition - Page Number ............................................................................................... 7-22 Settings ............................................................................................................................................ 7-22 Insert Sheet Setting ......................................................................................................................... 7-23 7.4.9 Stamp/Composition - Stamp........................................................................................................... 7-23 7.4.10 Stamp/Composition -Copy Security -Copy Protect ........................................................................ 7-24 Copy Protect Type........................................................................................................................... 7-25 Detail Settings.................................................................................................................................. 7-25 Position ............................................................................................................................................ 7-25 7.4.11 Stamp/Composition - Copy Security - Copy Guard........................................................................ 7-26 Copy Guard Type............................................................................................................................. 7-26 Detail Settings.................................................................................................................................. 7-27 7.4.12 Stamp/Composition - Copy Security - Password Copy.................................................................. 7-27 Stamp Type...................................................................................................................................... 7-28 Detail Settings.................................................................................................................................. 7-28 7.4.13 Stamp/Composition - Stamp Repeat .............................................................................................. 7-28 Stamp Repeat Type ......................................................................................................................... 7-29 Detail Settings.................................................................................................................................. 7-30 Position ............................................................................................................................................ 7-30 7.4.14 Stamp/Composition - Header/Footer .............................................................................................. 7-30 Check/Change Temporarily ............................................................................................................. 7-31 7.4.15 Stamp/Composition - Registered Overlay....................................................................................... 7-32 Settings ............................................................................................................................................ 7-32 Overlay Setting................................................................................................................................. 7-33 7.5 Send ............................................................................................................................................... 7-34 7.5.1 Overview of the Transmission Settings............................................................................................ 7-34 Description of the Send tab ............................................................................................................. 7-34 Send................................................................................................................................................. 7-35 Bind TX............................................................................................................................................. 7-35 7.5.2 Transmission Settings...................................................................................................................... 7-36 7.5.3 Combine........................................................................................................................................... 7-37 Document Order .............................................................................................................................. 7-37 7.6 Send (Public, Personal, or Group User Box)............................................................................... 7-38 7.6.1 Address Book - Search.................................................................................................................... 7-38 Address Type................................................................................................................................... 7-38 Index ................................................................................................................................................ 7-39 Detail Search.................................................................................................................................... 7-39 Detail Search - Search options ........................................................................................................ 7-40 7.6.2 Direct Input ...................................................................................................................................... 7-40 7.6.3 Direct Input - Fax ............................................................................................................................. 7-41 Next Destination............................................................................................................................... 7-41 When the Confirm Address (TX) function is specified: .................................................................... 7-41 7.6.4 Direct Input - E-mail......................................................................................................................... 7-41 ineo 223/283/363/423 Contents-5 Next Destination............................................................................................................................... 7-41 7.6.5 Direct Input - Internet Fax................................................................................................................ 7-42 Next Destination............................................................................................................................... 7-42 Receiver RX Ability........................................................................................................................... 7-42 7.6.6 Direct Input - IP Address Fax........................................................................................................... 7-42 7.6.7 Direct Input - PC (SMB) ................................................................................................................... 7-43 Host Name....................................................................................................................................... 7-43 File Path ........................................................................................................................................... 7-43 User Name....................................................................................................................................... 7-43 Password ......................................................................................................................................... 7-43 Reference......................................................................................................................................... 7-43 Next Destination............................................................................................................................... 7-43 7.6.8 Direct Input - FTP............................................................................................................................. 7-44 Host Name....................................................................................................................................... 7-44 File Path ........................................................................................................................................... 7-44 User Name....................................................................................................................................... 7-44 Password ......................................................................................................................................... 7-44 Detail Settings.................................................................................................................................. 7-44 Next Destination............................................................................................................................... 7-44 7.6.9 Direct Input - WebDAV..................................................................................................................... 7-45 Host Name....................................................................................................................................... 7-45 File Path ........................................................................................................................................... 7-45 User Name....................................................................................................................................... 7-45 Password ......................................................................................................................................... 7-45 Detail Settings.................................................................................................................................. 7-45 Next Destination............................................................................................................................... 7-45 7.6.10 Job History....................................................................................................................................... 7-46 7.6.11 Address Search................................................................................................................................ 7-46 7.6.12 LDAP Search - Search..................................................................................................................... 7-47 7.6.13 LDAP Search - Advanced Search.................................................................................................... 7-47 Name................................................................................................................................................ 7-47 E-mail Addr. ..................................................................................................................................... 7-47 Fax Number ..................................................................................................................................... 7-47 Last Name........................................................................................................................................ 7-47 First Name........................................................................................................................................ 7-47 City................................................................................................................................................... 7-47 Company Name............................................................................................................................... 7-48 Department ...................................................................................................................................... 7-48 OR/AND/STARTS WITH/ENDS WITH.............................................................................................. 7-48 7.6.14 Overview of the Document Settings ................................................................................................ 7-48 7.6.15 Document Settings - Resolution...................................................................................................... 7-48 7.6.16 Document Settings - File Type ........................................................................................................ 7-49 File Type........................................................................................................................................... 7-49 Encryption ........................................................................................................................................ 7-50 Encryption - Detail Settings ............................................................................................................. 7-50 Stamp Composition ......................................................................................................................... 7-52 Outline PDF...................................................................................................................................... 7-52 Scan Setting..................................................................................................................................... 7-53 7.6.17 Document Settings - Color .............................................................................................................. 7-53 7.6.18 Overview of the Communication Settings ....................................................................................... 7-54 7.6.19 Communication Settings - Line Setting ........................................................................................... 7-54 Description of Line Settings............................................................................................................. 7-54 Overseas TX..................................................................................................................................... 7-54 ECM OFF ......................................................................................................................................... 7-55 V.34 OFF .......................................................................................................................................... 7-55 Check Dest. & Send......................................................................................................................... 7-55 Select Line ....................................................................................................................................... 7-55 7.6.20 Communication Settings - E-Mail Settings...................................................................................... 7-56 E-mail Settings................................................................................................................................. 7-56 Document Name.............................................................................................................................. 7-56 Subject ............................................................................................................................................. 7-56 From................................................................................................................................................. 7-57 Contents-6 ineo 223/283/363/423 Body................................................................................................................................................. 7-57 7.6.21 Communication Settings - URL Notification Setting ....................................................................... 7-58 URL Notification............................................................................................................................... 7-58 Detail Search.................................................................................................................................... 7-58 Direct Input ...................................................................................................................................... 7-58 7.6.22 Communication Settings - Communication Method Settings ......................................................... 7-59 Timer transmission (Timer TX).......................................................................................................... 7-59 Password transmission (Password TX)............................................................................................ 7-60 F-Code transmission (F-Code TX) ................................................................................................... 7-60 7.6.23 Communication Settings - E-mail Encryption.................................................................................. 7-61 7.6.24 Communication Settings - Digital Signature.................................................................................... 7-61 7.6.25 Communication Settings - Fax Header Settings ............................................................................. 7-61 7.6.26 Overview of the Application settings ............................................................................................... 7-62 7.6.27 Application - Stamp/Composition - Date/Time ............................................................................... 7-62 7.6.28 Application - Stamp/Composition - Page Number.......................................................................... 7-62 7.6.29 Application - Stamp/Composition - Stamp ..................................................................................... 7-62 7.6.30 Application - Stamp/Composition - Header/Footer......................................................................... 7-63 7.6.31 Application - Send & Print................................................................................................................ 7-63 7.7 Filing Settings (Public, Personal, or Group User Boxes) ........................................................... 7-64 7.7.1 Overview of the Filing Settings ........................................................................................................ 7-64 Description of the Filing Settings tab............................................................................................... 7-64 7.7.2 Deleting documents ......................................................................................................................... 7-65 7.7.3 Edit Name ........................................................................................................................................ 7-65 7.7.4 Moving documents .......................................................................................................................... 7-65 7.7.5 Copy................................................................................................................................................. 7-66 7.7.6 Save in external memory ................................................................................................................. 7-66 Document Settings .......................................................................................................................... 7-67 Document Settings - Resolution...................................................................................................... 7-67 Document Settings -File Type ......................................................................................................... 7-68 Document Settings - Color .............................................................................................................. 7-68 7.7.7 Document Details............................................................................................................................. 7-69 Displaying detailed information........................................................................................................ 7-69 Preview ............................................................................................................................................ 7-69 7.8 Application..................................................................................................................................... 7-70 7.8.1 Overview of the Application settings ............................................................................................... 7-70 Description of the Application tab ................................................................................................... 7-70 7.8.2 Edit Document ................................................................................................................................. 7-71 Edit Document - Delete Page .......................................................................................................... 7-71 Edit Document - Rotate Page.......................................................................................................... 7-72 Edit Document - Move Page............................................................................................................ 7-74 Preview/Set Range .......................................................................................................................... 7-76 Preview/Specify by Input ................................................................................................................. 7-77 7.8.3 Register Overlay............................................................................................................................... 7-78 Register Overlay - New.................................................................................................................... 7-79 Register Overlay - Overwrite............................................................................................................ 7-80 Detail Settings.................................................................................................................................. 7-81 7.9 Bulletin Board User Box (System User Box)............................................................................... 7-82 7.9.1 Overview of the Bulletin Board User Boxes..................................................................................... 7-82 7.9.2 Bulletin Board User Box screen....................................................................................................... 7-82 7.9.3 Printing a document in a Bulletin Board User Box .......................................................................... 7-82 7.9.4 Deleting a document in the Bulletin Board User Box ...................................................................... 7-82 7.10 Polling TX User Box (System User Box)...................................................................................... 7-83 7.10.1 Overview of the Polling Transmission User Boxes .......................................................................... 7-83 7.10.2 Printing a document in the Polling TX User Box.............................................................................. 7-83 7.10.3 Deleting a document in the Polling TX User Box............................................................................. 7-83 7.11 Secure Document User Box (System User Box) ........................................................................ 7-84 7.11.1 Overview of the Secure Document User Box .................................................................................. 7-84 7.11.2 Authentication procedure 1 ............................................................................................................. 7-84 ineo 223/283/363/423 Contents-7 7.11.3 Authentication procedure 2 ............................................................................................................. 7-84 7.11.4 Print - Printing .................................................................................................................................. 7-85 Copies.............................................................................................................................................. 7-85 Print.................................................................................................................................................. 7-85 Finishing........................................................................................................................................... 7-85 Combine........................................................................................................................................... 7-85 Zoom................................................................................................................................................ 7-85 Page Margin..................................................................................................................................... 7-85 Sheet/Cover/Chapter Insert ............................................................................................................. 7-85 Stamp/Composition......................................................................................................................... 7-85 7.11.5 Filing Settings .................................................................................................................................. 7-86 7.12 Memory RX User Box (System User Box)................................................................................... 7-87 7.12.1 Overview of the Memory RX User Box ............................................................................................ 7-87 7.12.2 Print.................................................................................................................................................. 7-87 7.12.3 Filing Settings .................................................................................................................................. 7-88 7.13 Annotation User Box (System User Box) .................................................................................... 7-89 7.13.1 Overview of the Annotation User Box.............................................................................................. 7-89 7.13.2 Print - Basic ..................................................................................................................................... 7-89 7.13.3 Print - Page Margin .......................................................................................................................... 7-89 7.13.4 Print - Sheet/Cover/Chapter Insert - Cover Sheet........................................................................... 7-90 7.13.5 Print - Sheet/Cover/Chapter Insert - Insert Sheet ........................................................................... 7-90 7.13.6 Print - Sheet/Cover/Chapter Insert - Chapters................................................................................ 7-90 7.13.7 Print - Stamp/Composition - Date/Time .......................................................................................... 7-90 7.13.8 Print - Stamp/Composition - Page Number .................................................................................... 7-90 7.13.9 Print - Stamp/Composition - Stamp................................................................................................ 7-90 7.13.10 Printing Preferences - Stamp/Composition - Copy Security - Copy Protect .................................. 7-90 7.13.11 Printing Preferences - Stamp/Composition - Copy Security - Copy Guard.................................... 7-90 7.13.12 Print - Stamp/Composition - Copy Security - Password Copy....................................................... 7-90 7.13.13 Print - Stamp/Composition - Stamp Repeat ................................................................................... 7-90 7.13.14 Print - Stamp/Composition - Registered Overlay ............................................................................ 7-90 7.13.15 Description of the Send tab ............................................................................................................. 7-90 7.13.16 Send - Direct Input - E-mail ............................................................................................................. 7-90 7.13.17 Send - Direct Input - PC (SMB)........................................................................................................ 7-90 7.13.18 Send - Direct Input - FTP................................................................................................................. 7-91 7.13.19 Send - Direct Input - WebDAV......................................................................................................... 7-91 7.13.20 Send - Job History........................................................................................................................... 7-91 7.13.21 Send - LDAP Search - Search ......................................................................................................... 7-91 7.13.22 Send - LDAP Search - Advanced Search........................................................................................ 7-91 7.13.23 Send - Document Settings - Resolution .......................................................................................... 7-91 7.13.24 Send - Document Settings - File Type............................................................................................. 7-91 7.13.25 Send - Document Settings - Color .................................................................................................. 7-91 7.13.26 Send - Communication Settings - E-mail Settings .......................................................................... 7-91 7.13.27 Send - Communication Settings - URL Notification Setting............................................................ 7-91 7.13.28 Send - Communication Settings - E-mail Encryption...................................................................... 7-91 7.13.29 Send - Communication Settings - Digital Signature........................................................................ 7-91 7.13.30 Send - Application - Stamp/Composition - Date/Time.................................................................... 7-91 7.13.31 Send - Application - Stamp/Composition - Page Number .............................................................. 7-91 7.13.32 Send - Application - Stamp/Composition - Stamp.......................................................................... 7-92 7.13.33 Send - Application - Send & Print.................................................................................................... 7-92 7.13.34 Send - Application - Stamp Element ............................................................................................... 7-92 Secondary Field ............................................................................................................................... 7-92 Date/Time......................................................................................................................................... 7-92 Density ............................................................................................................................................. 7-93 Number Type ................................................................................................................................... 7-93 Print Position.................................................................................................................................... 7-93 7.13.35 Filing Settings .................................................................................................................................. 7-94 7.13.36 Application - Register Overlay ......................................................................................................... 7-94 Contents-8 ineo 223/283/363/423 7.14 Fax Retransmit User Box (System User Box)............................................................................. 7-95 7.14.1 Overview of the Fax Retransmit User Box....................................................................................... 7-95 7.14.2 Print - Proof Print ............................................................................................................................. 7-95 7.14.3 Send - Fax........................................................................................................................................ 7-95 7.14.4 Filing Settings - Delete..................................................................................................................... 7-96 7.15 Password Encrypted PDF User Box (System User Box) ........................................................... 7-97 7.15.1 Overview of the Password Encrypted PDF User Box...................................................................... 7-97 7.15.2 Print/Save −Print/Save..................................................................................................................... 7-97 7.15.3 Filing Settings - Delete..................................................................................................................... 7-97 7.16 ID & Print User Box (System User Box)....................................................................................... 7-98 7.16.1 Overview of the ID & Print User Box................................................................................................ 7-98 Viewing documents.......................................................................................................................... 7-98 7.16.2 Print - Print....................................................................................................................................... 7-99 7.16.3 Filing Settings - Delete..................................................................................................................... 7-99 7.17 External Memory (System User Box) ........................................................................................ 7-100 7.17.1 External memory device ................................................................................................................ 7-100 Supported external memory devices............................................................................................. 7-100 Connecting the external memory device ....................................................................................... 7-100 7.17.2 External memory screen ................................................................................................................ 7-101 Entering a file path ......................................................................................................................... 7-101 Selecting a file................................................................................................................................ 7-101 Printing encrypted PDF data.......................................................................................................... 7-101 Moving to the parent folder............................................................................................................ 7-101 Opening a folder ............................................................................................................................ 7-102 Print................................................................................................................................................ 7-102 Document Details........................................................................................................................... 7-102 7.17.3 Print - Basic ................................................................................................................................... 7-102 Copies............................................................................................................................................ 7-102 Print................................................................................................................................................ 7-102 Binding Position ............................................................................................................................. 7-102 Finishing......................................................................................................................................... 7-103 Paper.............................................................................................................................................. 7-103 7.17.4 Print- Application ........................................................................................................................... 7-103 Stamp/Composition - Date/Time................................................................................................... 7-103 Stamp/Composition - Page Number ............................................................................................. 7-103 Stamp/Composition - Stamp......................................................................................................... 7-103 Stamp/Composition - Copy Security - Copy Protect .................................................................... 7-103 Stamp/Composition - Copy Security - Copy Guard...................................................................... 7-103 Stamp/Composition - Copy Security - Password Copy................................................................ 7-103 Stamp/Composition - Stamp Repeat ............................................................................................ 7-103 7.17.5 Filing Settings−Save in User Box................................................................................................... 7-104 7.18 Mobile/PDA (System User Box) ................................................................................................. 7-105 7.18.1 Operating environment .................................................................................................................. 7-105 7.18.2 Mobile/PDA - Print ......................................................................................................................... 7-106 Entering the PIN code.................................................................................................................... 7-106 Check printing preferences............................................................................................................ 7-106 7.18.3 Mobile/PDA - Save......................................................................................................................... 7-107 Entering the PIN code.................................................................................................................... 7-107 7.19 Confidential RX User Box (System User Box) .......................................................................... 7-108 7.19.1 Overview of the Confidential RX User Box .................................................................................... 7-108 7.19.2 Print................................................................................................................................................ 7-108 7.19.3 Filing Settings ................................................................................................................................ 7-109 8 User Box Settings 8.1 Menu tree of User Box Settings..................................................................................................... 8-2 8.1.1 User mode ......................................................................................................................................... 8-2 8.1.2 Administrator Settings ....................................................................................................................... 8-3 8.2 User mode settings......................................................................................................................... 8-5 ineo 223/283/363/423 Contents-9 8.2.1 Creating a User Box........................................................................................................................... 8-5 Public, Personal, or Group User Box................................................................................................. 8-5 Delete Empty User Box(es) (Administrator Settings) ......................................................................... 8-6 Bulletin Board User Box..................................................................................................................... 8-6 Relay User Box .................................................................................................................................. 8-8 Confidential RX User Box .................................................................................................................. 8-8 8.2.2 Custom Display Settings - User Box Setting................................................................................... 8-10 Default Tab....................................................................................................................................... 8-10 Shortcut key..................................................................................................................................... 8-10 8.2.3 Cellular Phone/PDA Setting - Link File Error Notification ................................................................ 8-11 8.2.4 Cellular Phone/PDA Setting - Proxy Server Use.............................................................................. 8-11 8.2.5 Cellular Phone/PDA Setting - Print Settings .................................................................................... 8-12 Basic - Print ..................................................................................................................................... 8-12 Basic - Paper ................................................................................................................................... 8-12 Basic - Finishing............................................................................................................................... 8-12 Application - Margin......................................................................................................................... 8-13 Application - Stamp/Composition - Date/Time ............................................................................... 8-13 Application - Stamp/Composition - Page Number.......................................................................... 8-13 Application - Stamp/Composition - Stamp ..................................................................................... 8-13 Application - Stamp/Composition - Copy Security - Copy Protect................................................. 8-13 Application - Stamp/Composition - Copy Security - Copy Guard .................................................. 8-13 Application - Stamp/Composition - Copy Security - Password Copy ............................................ 8-13 Application - Stamp/Composition - Stamp Repeat ......................................................................... 8-13 8.3 Administrator Settings.................................................................................................................. 8-14 8.3.1 User Box permissions...................................................................................................................... 8-14 User types........................................................................................................................................ 8-14 Public User Box and Personal or Group User Box.......................................................................... 8-14 8.3.2 Creating a User Box......................................................................................................................... 8-15 8.3.3 Creating Public, Personal, or Group User Box ................................................................................ 8-15 8.3.4 Creating Bulletin Board User Box.................................................................................................... 8-15 8.3.5 Creating Relay User Box.................................................................................................................. 8-15 8.3.6 Creating Annotation User Box ......................................................................................................... 8-16 8.3.7 Creating Confidential RX User Box.................................................................................................. 8-17 8.3.8 Maximum Number of User Boxes.................................................................................................... 8-18 Public, Personal, or Group User Box............................................................................................... 8-18 Max. No. Of Use Boxes ................................................................................................................... 8-18 Maximum Number of User Boxes.................................................................................................... 8-18 8.3.9 User Box Setting.............................................................................................................................. 8-19 Delete Unused User Box.................................................................................................................. 8-19 Delete Secure Print Documents....................................................................................................... 8-19 Auto Delete Secure Document ........................................................................................................ 8-20 Encrypted PDF Delete Time............................................................................................................. 8-20 ID & Print Delete Time...................................................................................................................... 8-21 Document Hold Setting.................................................................................................................... 8-21 External Memory Function Settings................................................................................................. 8-22 Allow/Restrict User Box................................................................................................................... 8-22 ID & Print Delete after Print Setting.................................................................................................. 8-23 Document Delete Time Setting ........................................................................................................ 8-23 ID & Print Settings............................................................................................................................ 8-24 8.3.10 Cellular Phone/PDA Setting ............................................................................................................. 8-24 8.3.11 User Box Administrator Setting ....................................................................................................... 8-25 Setting User Box administrator........................................................................................................ 8-25 Logging in to this machine as the User Box administrator.............................................................. 8-25 Administrator's available functions .................................................................................................. 8-25 8.3.12 Security Details ................................................................................................................................ 8-26 Security Print Only ........................................................................................................................... 8-26 8.3.13 HDD Settings/SSD Settings............................................................................................................. 8-26 Check HDD Capacity ....................................................................................................................... 8-26 Check SSD Capacity ....................................................................................................................... 8-27 Overwrite HDD Data......................................................................................................................... 8-27 Overwrite All Data ............................................................................................................................ 8-28 HDD Lock Password........................................................................................................................ 8-29 Contents-10 ineo 223/283/363/423 Format HDD ..................................................................................................................................... 8-30 Format SSD...................................................................................................................................... 8-31 HDD Encryption Setting................................................................................................................... 8-31 8.3.14 Stamp Settings ................................................................................................................................ 8-32 Apply Stamps................................................................................................................................... 8-32 9 Web Connection 9.1 Using Web Connection................................................................................................................... 9-3 9.1.1 Operating environment ...................................................................................................................... 9-3 9.1.2 Accessing Web Connection............................................................................................................... 9-3 9.1.3 Web browser cache ........................................................................................................................... 9-4 For Internet Explorer .......................................................................................................................... 9-4 For Netscape Navigator ..................................................................................................................... 9-4 For Mozilla Firefox.............................................................................................................................. 9-4 9.1.4 Online help function ........................................................................................................................... 9-4 9.2 Login and logout ............................................................................................................................. 9-5 9.2.1 Login and logout flows....................................................................................................................... 9-5 When user authentication or account track is not enabled ............................................................... 9-5 When User Authentication or Account Track is enabled ................................................................... 9-7 9.2.2 Logout................................................................................................................................................ 9-8 9.2.3 Login .................................................................................................................................................. 9-9 Login options ..................................................................................................................................... 9-9 Logging in as a public user .............................................................................................................. 9-10 Logging in as a registered user........................................................................................................ 9-11 Logging in to administrator mode.................................................................................................... 9-12 Display mode in administrator mode ............................................................................................... 9-13 Logging in as a User Box administrator........................................................................................... 9-14 9.3 Page Configuration....................................................................................................................... 9-15 9.4 User Mode Overview .................................................................................................................... 9-17 9.4.1 Information ....................................................................................................................................... 9-17 9.4.2 Job ................................................................................................................................................... 9-18 9.4.3 User Boxes....................................................................................................................................... 9-18 9.4.4 Direct Print ....................................................................................................................................... 9-19 9.4.5 Store Address .................................................................................................................................. 9-20 9.4.6 Customize ........................................................................................................................................ 9-21 9.5 Handling a document in a User Box............................................................................................ 9-22 9.5.1 Listing the documents saved in a User Box .................................................................................... 9-22 Open User Box ................................................................................................................................ 9-22 File List............................................................................................................................................. 9-23 9.5.2 Printing a document......................................................................................................................... 9-24 9.5.3 Sending a document to another machine........................................................................................ 9-27 9.5.4 Downloading document data to your computer .............................................................................. 9-29 9.5.5 Moving or copying a document to another User Box...................................................................... 9-32 9.5.6 Deleting a document........................................................................................................................ 9-33 9.6 Administrator Mode Overview ..................................................................................................... 9-35 9.6.1 Maintenance .................................................................................................................................... 9-35 9.6.2 System Settings............................................................................................................................... 9-36 9.6.3 Security ............................................................................................................................................ 9-37 9.6.4 User Authentication/Account Track................................................................................................. 9-38 9.6.5 Network............................................................................................................................................ 9-39 9.6.6 User Boxes....................................................................................................................................... 9-40 9.6.7 Printer Settings ................................................................................................................................ 9-41 9.6.8 Store Address .................................................................................................................................. 9-42 9.6.9 Fax Settings ..................................................................................................................................... 9-43 9.6.10 Setting for each purpose ................................................................................................................. 9-44 ineo 223/283/363/423 Contents-11 10 Appendix 10.1 Error message list ......................................................................................................................... 10-3 10.2 Glossary ......................................................................................................................................... 10-4 11 Index 11.1 Index by item ................................................................................................................................. 11-3 11.2 Index by button.............................................................................................................................. 11-6 Contents-12 ineo 223/283/363/423 1 Introduction ineo 223/283/363/423 1-3 1.1 Welcome 1 1 Introduction 1.1 Welcome Thank you for purchasing this machine. This User's Guide describes the functions, operating instructions, precautions for correct operation, and simple troubleshooting guidelines of this machine. In order to obtain maximum performance from this product and use it effectively, please read this User's Guide as necessary. 1.1.1 User's guides User's guide Overview [Quick Guide Copy/Print/Fax/Scan/Box Operations] This manual describes operating procedures and the functions that are most frequently used in order to enable you to begin using this machine immediately. This manual also contains notes and precautions that should be followed to ensure safe usage of this machine and describes details on trademarks and copyrights. Please be sure to read this manual before using this machine. [User's Guide Copy Operations] This manual describes details on copy mode operations and the settings of this machine. • Specifications of originals and copy paper • Copy function • Maintaining this machine • Troubleshooting [User's Guide Enlarge Display Operations] This manual describes details on operating procedures of the enlarge display mode. • Copy function • Scanning function • G3 fax function • Network fax function [User's Guide Print Operations] This manual describes details on printer functions. • Printer function • Setting the printer driver [User's Guide Box Operations] This manual describes details on User Box functions. • Saving data in user boxes • Retrieving data from user boxes • Transferring and printing data from user boxes [User's Guide Network Scan/Fax/Network Fax Operations] This manual describes details on transmitting scanned data. • E-mail TX, FTP TX, SMB TX, Save in User Box, WebDAV TX, Web Services • G3 fax • IP Address Fax, Internet Fax [User's Guide Fax Driver Operations] This manual describes details on the fax driver function that transmits faxes directly from a computer. • PC-FAX [User's Guide Network Administrator] This manual describes details on setting methods for each function using the network connection. • Network settings • Settings using Web Connection 1 Welcome 1-4 ineo 223/283/363/423 1.1 1.1.2 User's Guide This User's Guide is intended for users ranging from those using this machine for the first time to administrators. It describes basic operations, functions that enable more convenient operations, simple troubleshooting operations, and various setting methods of this machine. Note that basic technical knowledge about the product is required to enable users to perform maintenance work or troubleshooting operations. Limit your troubleshooting operations to the areas explained in this manual. Should you experience any problems, please contact our service representative. [User's Guide Advanced Function Operations] This manual describes details on functions that become available by registering the optional license kit and by connecting to an application. • Web browser function • Image panel • PDF Processing Function • Searchable PDF • My panel and My address functions User's guide Overview ineo 223/283/363/423 1-5 1.2 Conventions used in this manual 1 1.2 Conventions used in this manual 1.2.1 Symbols used in this manual Symbols are used in this manual to express various types of information. The following describes each symbol related to correct and safe usage of this machine. To use this machine safely 7 WARNING - This symbol indicates that a failure to heed the instructions may lead to death or serious injury. 7 CAUTION - This symbol indicates that negligence of the instructions may lead to mishandling that may cause injury or property damage. NOTICE This symbol indicates a risk that may result in damage to this machine or documents. Follow the instructions to avoid property damage. Procedural instruction 0 This check mark indicates an option that is required in order to use conditions or functions that are prerequisite for a procedure. 1 This format number "1" represents the first step. 2 This format number represents the order of serial steps. % This symbol indicates a supplementary explanation of a procedural instruction. % This symbol indicates transition of the control panel to access a desired menu item. This symbol indicates a desired page. The operation procedures are described using illustrations. 1 Conventions used in this manual 1-6 ineo 223/283/363/423 1.2 dReference This symbol indicates a reference. View the reference as required. Key symbols [ ] Key names on the touch panel or computer screen, or a name of user's guide are indicated by these brackets. Bold text This presents a key name, part name, product name or option name on the control panel. 1.2.2 Original and paper indications Original and paper sizes The following explains the indication for originals and paper described in this manual. When indicating the original or paper size, the Y side represents the width and the X side the length. Original and paper indications w indicates the paper size with the length (X) being longer than the width (Y). v indicates the paper size with the length (X) being shorter than the width (Y). ineo 223/283/363/423 1-7 1.3 To check the function you want to use 1 1.3 To check the function you want to use This manual contains details on setting up the functions. Understanding Operation Flow This manual provides a chapter "User Box Operation Flow" that describes how to use the major functions of this machine. The flow charts in the chapter will help you understand the general flow of operations such as saving and printing data. Clicking the link in the flow chart takes you to the relevant function setting pages where you can see more detail. Using Menu Tree Various functions can be configured for this machine. For information on what button to select to find specific setting items and the list of items that can be configured, refer to the Menu tree pages. In the menu tree pages, there is a hierarchy of functions under each button. Clicking the link in the menu tree takes you to the relevant function setting pages where you can see more details. 1 To check the function you want to use 1-8 ineo 223/283/363/423 1.3 2 User Box Function Overview ineo 223/283/363/423 2-3 2.1 User Box functions 2 2 User Box Function Overview 2.1 User Box functions The User Box functions allow you to save document data to the machine's internal hard disk and later print them. Documents that can be saved are data scanned for copying and saved scan data. To save data to a box, create the box, and then save the data to the specified box. The saved data can be printed, sent by Email, transferred via FTP, or sent to a computer as may be necessary. Using the User Box functions enables you to save the effort involved in scanning originals repeatedly or saving data to each computer. Reference - A Hard Disk must be installed in order to use the functions described in this manual. - Some User Boxes are available even when no Hard Disk is installed. - If no Hard Disk is installed, data is saved in the internal memory (SSD: Solid State Drive) installed in this machine. - A Hard Disk is installed as a standard feature in ineo 423. A hard disk is installed as a standard feature or offered as an option for ineo 363 depending on the area they are sold in. A hard disk can be installed as an option in ineo 223/283. - The following shows whether or not each function is available when no Hard Disk is installed. For details, refer to the explanation of each function. Functions Available o / Unavailable e with no HDD installed Note User Box - Public/Personal/Group User Boxes e Bulletin Board User Box o Polling TX User Box o Secure Document User Box e Memory RX User Box o Annotation User Box e Fax Retransmit User Box o Password Encrypted PDF User Box e ID & Print User Box e External Memory o Unavailable for some operations Cellular Phone/PDA o Unavailable for some operations Confidential RX User Box o 2 User Box functions 2-4 ineo 223/283/363/423 2.1 2.1.1 Available User Box functions Saving documents Data can be saved to the following boxes. *1 For details on how to send documents for print job from a computer and save them in the User Box, refer to the [User's Guide Print Operations]. 1 Mobile/PDA 2 Fax 3 Computer 4 FTP server, etc. 5 Original 6 External Memory User Box Description Reference Public/Personal/Group User Boxes (*1) Save a document copied or scanned using this machine. You can also save a document that was print-instructed through a computer connected to a network. Some User Authentication or Account Track settings restrict users who can use User Boxes such as the Personal or Group User Box. p. 6-3 Annotation User Box Save document data to be printed and sent with an image of the date/time or an annotation number to documents saved in Scan mode. p. 6-3 External Memory This item appears when an external memory device is installed. • You can save all scanned documents directly in an external memory connected to this machine. • You can save a document stored in a User Box in an external memory. • You can save a file stored in an external memory in a User Box. p. 6-3 Mobile/PDA Save a document stored in a cellular phone or PDA in the Public, Personal, or Group User Box. p. 7-107 Confidential RX User Box Save a document that was sent from the destination machine by confidential transmission. p. 7-108 2 4 5 6 1 3 ineo 223/283/363/423 2-5 2.1 User Box functions 2 Using documents Use the document data saved in boxes. Depending on the box, you can use the data as follows: *1 For details on how to send documents for print job from a computer and save them in the User Box, refer to the [User's Guide Print Operations]. *2 For details on polling transmission, polling reception, memory reception, and file retransmission, refer to the [User's Guide Network Scan/Fax/Network Fax Operations]. *3 For details on how to save documents to the Secure Document User Box, refer to the [User's Guide Print Operations]. *4 For print instruction of an encrypted PDF, refer to the Direct Print manual or the direct print in the Web Connection online help. Reference - The Public/Personal/Group, Secure Document, Annotation, Password Encrypted PDF, and ID & Print User Boxes are available only when a Hard Disk is installed. - The Confidential RX User Box is not available when a Hard Disk is installed. - If a Hard Disk is installed, Confidential RX can be enabled when the Confidential RX function is added to the Public/Personal/Group User Box. For details, refer to page 8-5. - The "Saving a Document from the External Memory into a User Box" function for external memory is available only when a Hard Disk is installed. - [Save in User Box] for Cellular Phone/PDA is available only when a Hard Disk is installed. User Box Description Reference Public/Personal/Group User Boxes (*1) Print and send saved documents. You can also select multiple documents for printing/transmission. Some User Authentication or Account Track settings restrict users who can use User Boxes such as the Personal or Group User Box. p. 7-10 Bulletin Board User Box This item appears when the optional Fax Kit is installed. You can print a document saved in the Bulletin Board User Box. p. 7-82 Polling TX User Box (*2) This item appears when the optional Fax Kit is installed. You can print documents sent via polling. p. 7-83 Secure Document User Box (*3) Print saved documents. Enter an ID and password for printing. p. 7-84 Memory RX User Box (*2) This item appears when the optional Fax Kit is installed. You can confirm and print the fax document received though the memory RX setting. p. 7-87 Annotation User Box Print or transmit document data saved in Scan mode with an image of the date/time or an annotation number. p. 7-89 Fax Retransmit User Box (*2) This item appears when the optional Fax Kit is installed. With this User Box, you can resend a saved document or print it for confirmation. p. 7-95 Password Encrypted PDF User Box (*4) Print a saved password encrypted PDF document. Encrypted PDF files saved in an external memory and sent for print jobs are also saved in this box. The predefined password is required for printing. p. 7-97 ID & Print User Box This item appears when user authentication settings are configured. You can log in as a user and print a document sent for print jobs from the printer driver. p. 7-98 External Memory This item appears when an external memory device is installed. You can print documents saved in an external memory connected to this machine. p. 7-100 Cellular Phone or PDA Print a document saved in a cellular phone or PDA. You can save a document stored in a cellular phone or PDA in the Public, Personal, or Group User Box. p. 7-106 Confidential RX User Box Print a document that was received by confidential reception. p. 7-108 2 User Box functions 2-6 ineo 223/283/363/423 2.1 1 Fax 2 Computer 3 E-mail, etc. 4 FTP server, etc. 5 Cellular phone or PDA 6 External memory 7 Printout 4 6 7 1 2 3 5 ineo 223/283/363/423 2-7 2.1 User Box functions 2 Organizing documents Organize documents by renaming the saved document, changing the boxes where they are saved, or duplicating or deleting them. * The function for saving a document in a User Box is available only when a Hard Disk is installed. 1 Mobile/PDA 2 External Memory User Box Delete Edit Name Move Copy Save in User Box Save in USB memory (when external memory is connected) Document Details Public/Personal/Group User Boxes o o o o − o o Bulletin Board User Box o − − − − − − Polling TX User Box o − − − − − − Secure Document User Box o o − − − − o Memory RX User Box o o − − − − o Annotation User Box o o − − − − o Fax Retransmit User Box o − − − − − o Password Encrypted PDF User Box o − − − − − o ID & Print User Box o − − − − − o External Memory, Mobile/ PDA − − − − o * − o Confidential RX User Box o o − − − − o 2 1 2 User Box functions 2-8 ineo 223/283/363/423 2.1 2.1.2 Configuring settings for using the User Box functions Before using the User Box functions, the following settings should be configured. Registering a User Box Save the User Box where documents will be registered. Configure boxes by using the machine's touch panel or by using Web Connection from a Web browser on a computer on the network. Reference - The following User Boxes are configurable. – Public/Personal/Group User Boxes(p. 8-5) – Bulletin Board User Box (when using the bulletin board function) (p. 8-6) – Annotation User Box (p. 8-16) – Confidential RX User Box (p. 8-17) When using this machine as a relay device If the optional Fax Kit is installed, and you want to use this machine for relaying fax transmission, create a Relay User Box for saving documents temporarily before they are relayed. (p. 8-8) To create a Relay User Box, specify in advance the group containing fax numbers of relay destinations. The User Box to which data is saved for memory reception If the optional Fax Kit is installed, and you do not want to print while receiving data, configure the memory reception settings. dReference For details on how to configure memory reception settings, refer to the [User's Guide Network Scan/Fax/Network Fax Operations]. ineo 223/283/363/423 2-9 2.2 Information 2 2.2 Information This section describes information you should know before using the User Box functions. 2.2.1 User authentication To use this machine, some devices have been preset so that you must enter an account or user name and a password. For details on the account or user name available for using the devices, contact your administrator. MFP authentication Enter the user name and password, and then press either [Login] in the touch panel or the Access key on the control panel. External server authentication Enter the user name and password, and then press either [Login] in the touch panel or the Access key on the control panel. 2 Information 2-10 ineo 223/283/363/423 2.2 Account track authentication Enter the account name and password, and then press either [Login] in the touch panel or the Access key on the control panel. Reference - When user authentication is enabled, the only the boxes accessible by the logged in users are displayed. For details, refer to page 2-12. - If a user enters an incorrect password a specified number of times when Mode 2 is selected in Prohibited Functions When Authentication Error in Administrator Settings, the user is locked, and cannot use the control panel. For details on how to disable Prohibit Functions When Authentication Error, contact your administrator. - If Authentication Manager is used for authentication, ask your server administrator about the login procedure. - When you use the optional Authentication Unit for authentication, refer to the [User's Guide Copy Operations] for the login procedure. 2.2.2 Restriction of box registration Public/Personal/Group User Boxes The User Box functions provide Public User Boxes, which can be used by more than one person, Personal User Boxes, which can be used only by a single person, and Group User Boxes, which can be used by the users who are logged in as members of the User Box owner account. The following lists the limitations on those User Boxes: - Before saving documents, create a User Box to save data. - Up to 1,000 User Boxes can be created. - Up to 200 documents can be saved in a single User Box. - A total of 10,000 pages can be saved in all User Boxes. - A total of 3,000 documents can be saved in all User Boxes. - This function is available only when a Hard Disk is installed. Bulletin Board User Box Reference - Up to 10 Bulletin Board User Boxes can be created. - Only one document can be saved in a single Bulletin Board User Box. Polling TX User Box Only one document can be saved in a single User Box. ineo 223/283/363/423 2-11 2.2 Information 2 Memory RX User Box Up to 500 documents can be saved in the Memory RX User Box. - If no Hard Disk is installed, the maximum number of documents may not be able to be saved depending on the amount of data currently stored. Relay User Box Reference - Up to 5 Relay User Boxes can be created. - Only one document can be saved in a single Relay User Box. Confidential RX User Box The following lists the limitations on this User Box: - Up to 20 User Boxes can be created. - Up to 180 documents can be saved in a single User Box. - A total of 180 pages can be saved in all User Boxes. - A total of 180 documents can be saved in all User Boxes. - The maximum number of documents may not be able to be saved depending on the amount of data currently stored. - This function is not available when a Hard Disk is installed. 2.2.3 Restriction of file name Name document data to be saved. Reference - The names can contain up to 30 characters. - You can edit the names after the documents have been saved. - Press this button to specify the name when saving data. Otherwise, a predefined name is applied to the data. If the data is saved without a name specified, names are created by combining the following elements. The following describes elements of an example document name "SMFP11102315230". Reference - The Public/Personal/Group User Box functions are available only when a Hard Disk is installed. Item Description S This character indicates the mode when the document is saved. "S" appears for documents saved in the Fax/Scan mode screen or the User Box screen. C: Copy S: Fax/Scan, User Box P: Print R: Received fax MFP This represents the name of the device that scanned the data. This item displays the name that is entered in [Device Name] under [Input Machine Address] of [Administrator/Machine Setting] in Administrator Settings. When changing the displayed name, specify it with up to 10 characters. 11102315230 This indicates the year (last two digits), month, day, hour and minute when the data was scanned. If a series of documents are scanned at the same time (minute), serial numbers are attached to the last digits. _0001 This indicates the page when multi-page data is scanned. This numeral does not appear in the Document Name column, but is added automatically as part of the name when the file is transmitted. Consider this part for FTP or other transmission when a server has restriction regarding file names. .TIF This is the extension for the specified data format. The characters do not appear in the Document Name column, but is added automatically as part of the name when the file is transmitted. 2 Authentication and accessible User Boxes 2-12 ineo 223/283/363/423 2.3 2.3 Authentication and accessible User Boxes When you apply user authentication and account track settings, the accessible User Boxes and the permissions change as shown in the following. Configure the user authentication and account track settings according to the desired functions. 2.3.1 When User Authentication or Account Track is not enabled Reference - Users can access all Public User Boxes. - User Boxes created by users and administrators are Public User Boxes. - Users cannot create any User Boxes when the Allow/Restrict User Box is set to Restrict in Administrator Settings. 2.3.2 When only user authentication is enabled Reference - Users can access all Public User Boxes and only Personal User Boxes that the user has created. - The Personal User Boxes are inaccessible by other users. - Press this button to set up a User Box administrator. - A User Box administrator can access all Public User Boxes and all Personal User Boxes. - If you delete authentication data by canceling user authentication settings or changing authentication methods, all Personal User Boxes become Public User Boxes. Create and access Public User Box User 1 User 2 Access allowed Personal User Box of user 2 Personal User Box of user 1 Public User Box User Box administrator ineo 223/283/363/423 2-13 2.3 Authentication and accessible User Boxes 2 2.3.3 When only account track is enabled Reference - Users can access all Public User Boxes and only Group User Boxes of accounts that the user belongs to. - If you delete authentication data by canceling account track settings or changing authentication methods, all Group User Boxes become Public User Boxes. 2.3.4 When user authentication and account track are enabled and synchronized As the account for users has been registered in advance, users cannot access Group User Boxes of accounts that they do not belong to. Account B Public User Box Account A Access allowed Group User Box of account A Group User Box of account B Account A Account B User 1 User 2 2 Authentication and accessible User Boxes 2-14 ineo 223/283/363/423 2.3 Reference - Users can access all Public User Boxes, only Group User Boxes of the account that the user belongs to, and only Personal User Boxes that the user has created. - The Personal User Boxes are inaccessible by other users. - Press this button to set up a User Box administrator. - A User Box administrator can access all Public User Boxes, all Personal User Boxes and all Group User Boxes. - If you delete authentication data by canceling user authentication settings or changing authentication methods, all Personal User Boxes and all group boxes become Public User Boxes. 2.3.5 When user authentication and account track are enabled but not synchronized As the account for a user has not been registered in advance, a user must enter an account name and password when logging in. Each time a user logging in, the user can access the Group User Boxes of a different account by as a member of the account. User 1 User 2 Account A Account B Public User Box Personal User Box of user 1 Group User Box of account A Personal User Box of user 2 Group User Box of account B Access allowed User Box administrator Account A Account B User 1 ineo 223/283/363/423 2-15 2.3 Authentication and accessible User Boxes 2 Reference - Users can access all Public User Boxes and only Personal User Boxes that the user has created. - The Personal User Boxes are inaccessible by other users. - A user can access Group User Boxes of an account simply by entering an account name and password of the account when logging in. - Press this button to set up a User Box administrator. - A User Box administrator can access all Public User Boxes, all Personal User Boxes and all Group User Boxes. - If you delete authentication data by canceling user authentication settings or changing authentication methods, all Personal User Boxes and all group boxes become Public User Boxes. User 1 Access allowed Access permitted through entry of account name and password User Box administrator Public User Box Personal User Box of user 1 Group User Box of account A Group User Box of account B 2 Authentication and accessible User Boxes 2-16 ineo 223/283/363/423 2.3 3 Control Panel/Liquid Crystal Display ineo 223/283/363/423 3-3 3.1 Control panel 3 3 Control Panel/Liquid Crystal Display 3.1 Control panel Use the control panel for User Box mode operation. The following describes the buttons and switches in the control panel. No. Name Description 1 Touch Panel Various screens and messages are displayed. Configure the various settings by directly touching the panel. 2 Power Indicator Lights up in blue when the machine is turned on with the main power switch. 3 Sub Power Switch Press this switch to turn on/off machine operations, including copying, printing and scanning. When turned off, the machine enters an energy conservation state. 4 Power Save Press this key to enter Power Save mode. While the machine is in Power Save mode, the indicator on the Power Save key lights up in green and the touch panel goes off. To exit from Power Save mode, press the Power Save key again. 5 Mode Memory Press this key to register (store) the desired copy/scan settings as a program or to recall a registered copy/scan program. 6 Utility/Counter Press this key to display the Utility screen and the Meter Count screen. 7 Reset Press this key to clear all settings (except programmed settings) entered using the control panel and touch panel. 1 2 5 4 6 3 7 8 9 1413 10 15 16 17 18 12 11 19 20 21 22 3 Control panel 3-4 ineo 223/283/363/423 3.1 7 CAUTION - Do not apply extreme pressure to the touch panel, otherwise the touch panel may be scratched or damaged. Never push down on the touch panel with force, and never use a hard or pointed object to make a selection in the touch panel. 8 Interrupt Press this key to enter Interrupt mode. While the machine is in Interrupt mode, the indicator on the Interrupt key lights up in green and the message "Now in Interrupt mode." appears on the touch panel. To cancel Interrupt mode, press the Interrupt key again. 9 Stop Pressing the Stop key during scanning temporarily stops the scan operation. 10 Proof Copy Press this key to print a single proof copy to be checked before printing a large number of copies. You can check the finishing state on the touch panel by pressing this key before scanning or copying. • This key is not available when saving documents by pressing the User Box key. • To check the preview image when saving in a User Box, press the Fax/Scan key. For checking preview procedure, refer to the [User's Guide Network Scan/Fax/Network Fax Operations]. 11 Start Press this key to start scanning. When this machine is ready to begin a scan operation, the indicator on the Start key lights up in blue. If the indicator on the Start key lights up in orange, scan operation cannot be started. Press this key to restart a stopped job. 12 Data Indicator Flashes in blue while a print job is being received. Lights up in blue when data is being printed. 13 C Press this key to erase a value (such as the number of copies, a zoom ratio, or a size) entered using the keypad. 14 Keypad Press this key to enter the number of copies, zoom ratio, and various other settings. 15 Guidance Press this key to display the Guidance screen. From this screen, you can view descriptions of the various functions and details of operations. 16 Enlarge Display Press this key to enter Enlarge Display mode. If you use Authentication Manager for authentication, the Enlarge Display screen is not available. 17 Accessibility Press this key to display the screen for configuring settings for user accessibility functions. 18 Access If user authentication or account track settings have been applied, press this key after entering the user name and password (for user authentication) or the account name and password (for account track) in order to use this machine. Press this key to log off from the machine as well. 19 Brightness adjustment dial Use this dial to adjust the brightness of the touch panel. 20 User Box Press this key to enter User Box mode. While the machine is in User Box mode, the indicator on the User Box key lights up in green. 21 Fax/Scan Press this key to enter Fax/Scan mode. While the machine is in Fax/Scan mode, the indicator on the Fax/Scan key lights up in green. For details on the fax and scan functions, refer to the [User's Guide Network Scan/Fax/Network Fax Operations]. 22 Copy Press this key to enter Copy mode. (As a default, the machine is in Copy mode.) While the machine is in Copy mode, the indicator on the Copy key lights up in green. For details, refer to the [User's Guide Copy Operations]. No. Name Description ineo 223/283/363/423 3-5 3.2 Touch panel 3 3.2 Touch panel 3.2.1 Screen component Icons that appear in the touch panel Icons indicating the status of this machine may appear in the icon display area. The following icons may be displayed. No. Name Description 1 Message display area Displays the status of the machine and details on operation procedures. 2 Functions/settings display area Displays tabs and buttons for displaying screens containing various functions. Use this area to configure various functions. Press a tab or button to display the corresponding screen for configuring the settings. 3 Icon display area Displays icons, which indicate the status of jobs and the machine, and shortcut keys. 4 Left panel Displays various buttons, such as [Job List] to display the jobs that are currently being performed/queued (waiting) to be performed, and [Check Job] to display the result of the specified settings. For details on the display and description of the left panel, refer to page 3-6. 5 Toner supply indicators Displays the remaining toner level. 4 5 1 2 3 Icon Description Indicates that data is being sent from the machine, regardless of the current mode. Indicates that the machine is receiving data, regardless of the current mode. Indicates that there is an error with the printing or scanning function. Press this icon to view a screen containing a warning code. If the warning screen has been closed while a warning occurs, press this button to display the warning screen again. 3 Touch panel 3-6 ineo 223/283/363/423 3.2 3.2.2 Display and operation of Left panel In the left panel of the touch panel, there are buttons for checking the status of jobs and the configuration of the machine. The following buttons are available in the left panel in the User Box mode. Appears when there is a message indicating that consumables must be replaced or the machine requires maintenance. Press this icon to display the message, and then perform the replacement or maintenance procedure. Appears when an error occurs with the connection to the POP server. Indicates that there is no paper in the paper tray. Indicates that very little paper remains in the paper tray. Indicates that the enhanced security mode is enabled. Indicates that an external memory device is connected to the machine. Indicates that a nonstandard external memory has been connected to this machine, therefore, USB connection is not enabled. Indicates that the job is in the waiting-for-redial status because, for example, the recipient's line is busy when sending with the G3 Fax or IP Address Fax function. Icon Description No. Name Description 1 [Job List] Press this button to check the job currently being performed and the job log. 2 [Check Job] Press this button to check information of the selected User Box, and various settings of the scan, print and transmission functions. 3 [Preview] Press this button to check the preview image of a saved document. 1 2 3 ineo 223/283/363/423 3-7 3.2 Touch panel 3 Job List A command to perform an operation such as saving data to a User Box, or printing or sending saved documents is called a job. Select [Job List] to display the job currently being performed. Reference - The Public/Personal/Group User Boxes are available only when a Hard Disk is installed. Job List - Delete Press this button to delete the job in process to cancel the operation. Select the job from the job list, and then press [Delete]. Check the message that appears, and delete the job. No documents in a User Box will be deleted even if the job currently being run is deleted. 3 Touch panel 3-8 ineo 223/283/363/423 3.2 Job List - Job Details Press this button to view the list of jobs being performed and the job log for confirmation. There are the following four types of jobs: Reference - The function for saving a document in the Public/Personal/Group User Box is available only when a Hard Disk is installed. - The Confidential RX User Box is not available when a Hard Disk is installed. - If a Hard Disk is installed, Confidential RX can be enabled when the Confidential RX function is added to the Public/Personal/Group User Box. For details, refer to page 8-5. Item Description [Print] Lists print jobs for copying, computer printout, received faxes, or reports. [Send] Lists scanner and fax transmission jobs. [Receive] Lists fax reception jobs. [Save] Lists User Box saving jobs. Item Description List items No.: Job identification number assigned when the job is queued. User Name: Displays the user name or user name/account name of the user who stored the document. Status: The status of the job (receiving/queued/printing/printing stopped/print error/saving to memory) is displayed. Document Name: File name being printed. Time Stored: Displays the time that the job was queued. Org.: Displays the number of pages in the original. Copies: Displays the number of copies to be printed. [ ][ ] When there are more than the upper limit of seven jobs to be displayed at one time, press these buttons to display other jobs. [Delete] Press this button to delete the selected job. [Increase Priority] Press this button to change the priority of the job. • If you set Changing Job Priority in Administrator Settings to "Restrict", you cannot specify the output priority of the jobs. • If the setting is specified so that the current print job can be interrupted, printing is interrupted and printing of the job given priority begins. Printing of the interrupted job restarts automatically once printing for the job given priority is finished. [Release Held Job] Press this button to change the settings of a stored job, or print or delete the job. [Check Job Set.] Press this button to check the settings of the selected job. Press either [ Back] or [Forward ] to check the settings. ineo 223/283/363/423 3-9 3.2 Touch panel 3 Reference - When user authentication settings are applied, the names of documents that have not been saved by logged in users cannot be viewed. - The names of confidential documents are not displayed. - The function for saving a document in the Public/Personal/Group User Box is available only when a Hard Disk is installed. - The Confidential RX User Box is not available when a Hard Disk is installed. - If a Hard Disk is installed, Confidential RX can be enabled when the Confidential RX function is added to the Public/Personal/Group User Box. For details, refer to page 8-5. Reference - When user authentication settings are applied, the names of documents that have not been saved by logged in users cannot be viewed. - The names of confidential documents are not displayed. - To view scanned images, you must set "Job History Thumbnail Display" to "ON" in Administrator Settings in advance. For details, refer to the [User's Guide Copy Operations]. - The function for saving a document in the Public/Personal/Group User Box is available only when a Hard Disk is installed. - The Confidential RX User Box is not available when a Hard Disk is installed. - If a Hard Disk is installed, Confidential RX can be enabled when the Confidential RX function is added to the Public/Personal/Group User Box. For details, refer to page 8-5. [Detail] Press this button to check the status, the registration source/user name, document name, output tray, stored time, number of original pages, number of copies, or external server information for the selected job. To delete a job, press [Delete]. • The external server information that is available by pressing [Detail] appears only when using external server authentication. Item Description List items No.: Job identification number assigned when the job is queued. User Name: Displays the user name or user name/account name of the user who stored the document. Document Name: File name being printed. Time Stored: Displays the time that the job was queued. Org.: Displays the number of pages in the original. Copies: Displays the number of copies to be printed. Result: Displays the result of the operation (completed successfully/deleted due to error/deleted by user/part of mode cancelled). [ ][ ] When there are more than the upper limit of seven jobs to be displayed at one time, press these buttons to display other jobs. [Deleted Jobs]/[Finished Jobs]/[All Jobs] Switch to display the job type. [Detail] Allows you to check the result, error details, registration source/user name, document name, output tray, stored time, completed time, number of original pages, number of copies, number of pages to be printed, or external server information for the selected job. • The external server information that is available by pressing [Detail] appears only when using external server authentication. [Scanned Image] Select the job to display the scanned image. Item Description 3 Touch panel 3-10 ineo 223/283/363/423 3.2 Reference - When user authentication settings are applied, the names of documents that have not been saved by logged in users cannot be viewed. - The names of confidential documents are not displayed. - The function for saving a document in the Public/Personal/Group User Box, Internet fax function, and IP address fax function are available only when a Hard Disk is installed. Item Description List items No.: Job identification number assigned when the job is queued. Address Type: Displays the destination type (including fax, E-Mail, FTP, PC (SMB), WebDAV, TWAIN, or setting disabled*). "TWAIN" appears for the job that is sent via Web service. Status: Displays the status of the job (sending/queued/dialing/pending for redial/deleting). Address: Displays the fax number, E-mail address, User Box name, etc. of the recipient's machine. Time Stored: Displays the time that the job was queued. Org.: Displays the number of pages in the original. * This is displayed when sending data while the address is deleted. [ ][ ] When there are more than the upper limit of seven jobs to be displayed at one time, press these buttons to display other jobs. [Timer TX Job] Displays the status of the reserved transmission in the memory. To delete a job, press [Delete]. [L1][L2] These buttons appear when two Fax Kit are installed. Press one of these buttons. The job list of the selected line appears. [Delete] Press this button to delete the selected job. [Redial] Select a job of which the status is set to "Waiting To Redial", to perform redialing. [Check Job Set.] Press this button to check the settings of the selected job. Press either [ Back] or [Forward ] to check the settings. [Detail] Press this button to check the registration source/user name, file name, destination type, destination, stored time, transmission, number of original pages and external server information for the selected job. To delete a job, press [Delete]. • The external server information that is available by pressing [Detail] appears only when using external server authentication. • [Type] is displayed only when the destination is a fax, Internet fax, or IP address fax. Item Description List items No.: Job identification number assigned when the job is queued. Address Type: Displays the destination type (including fax, E-Mail, FTP, PC (SMB), WebDAV, TWAIN, or setting disabled*). "TWAIN" appears for the job that is sent via Web service. Address: Displays the fax number, E-mail address, User Box name, etc. of the recipient's machine. Time Stored: Displays the time that the job was queued. Org.: Displays the number of pages in the original. Result: Displays the result of the operation (completed successfully/deleted due to error/deleted by user). "Error detected" is also displayed for broadcasting. * This is displayed when sending data while the address is deleted. [ ][ ] When there are more than the upper limit of seven jobs to be displayed at one time, press these buttons to display other jobs. [Deleted Jobs]/[Finished Jobs]/[All Jobs] Switch to display the job type. ineo 223/283/363/423 3-11 3.2 Touch panel 3 Reference - When user authentication settings are applied, the names of documents that have not been saved by logged in users cannot be viewed. - The names of confidential documents are not displayed. - To view scanned images, you must set "Job History Thumbnail Display" to "ON" in Administrator Settings in advance. For details, refer to the [User's Guide Copy Operations]. - The function for saving a document in the Public/Personal/Group User Box, Internet fax function, and IP address fax function are available only when a Hard Disk is installed. Reference - When user authentication settings are applied, the names of documents that have not been saved by logged in users cannot be viewed. - The names of confidential documents are not displayed. [Comm. List] Displays the list of scanner and fax transmission (sent/received) jobs. You can print Activity Report, TX Report and RX Report in respective list screens. [Detail] Press this button to check the result, error details, registration source/user name, file name, destination type, destination, stored time, communication, number of original pages and external server information for the selected job. • The external server information that is available by pressing [Detail] appears only when using external server authentication. • [Type] is displayed only when the destination is a fax, Internet fax, or IP address fax. [Scanned Image] Select the job to display the scanned image. Item Description List items No.: Job identification number assigned when the job is queued. User Name: Displays the user name or user name/account name of the user who stored the document. Status: Displays the status of the job (receiving/dialing (Polling RX)/queued/printing/printing stopped/print error/saving to memory/deleting). Document Name: Displays the name of the received or saved document. Time Stored: Displays the time that the job was queued. Org.: The number of original pages that were received. [ ][ ] When there are more than the upper limit of seven jobs to be displayed at one time, press these buttons to display other jobs. [L1][L2] These buttons appear when two Fax Kit are installed. Press one of these buttons. The job list of the selected line appears. [Delete] Press this button to delete the selected job. [Redial] Select a job of which the status is set to "Waiting To Redial", to perform redialing. [Forward] Forwards the fax received and stored in the memory (in-memory proxy reception). Specify the recipients either by selecting destinations registered in the address book or by entering directly. [Detail] Press this button to check the state, registration source/user name, document name, output tray, stored time, transmission time, number of original pages, or external server information for the selected job. To delete a job, press [Delete]. Item Description 3 Touch panel 3-12 ineo 223/283/363/423 3.2 Reference - When user authentication settings are applied, the names of documents that have not been saved by logged in users cannot be viewed. - The names of confidential documents are not displayed. - To view received images, you must set "Job History Thumbnail Display" to "ON" in Administrator Settings in advance. For details, refer to the [User's Guide Copy Operations]. Reference - When user authentication settings are applied, the names of documents that have not been saved by logged in users cannot be viewed. - The names of confidential documents are not displayed. - The function for saving a document in the Public/Personal/Group User Box is available only when a Hard Disk is installed. - The Confidential RX User Box is not available when a Hard Disk is installed. - If a Hard Disk is installed, Confidential RX can be enabled when the Confidential RX function is added to the Public/Personal/Group User Box. For details, refer to page 8-5. Item Description List items No.: Job identification number assigned when the job is queued. User Name: Displays the user name or user name/account name of the user who stored the document. Document Name: Displays the name of the received or saved document. Time Stored: Displays the time that the job was queued. Org.: Displays the number of pages in the original. Result: Displays the result of the operation (completed successfully/deleted due to error/deleted by user/part of mode cancelled). [ ][ ] When there are more than the upper limit of seven jobs to be displayed at one time, press these buttons to display other jobs. [Deleted Jobs]/[Finished Jobs]/[All Jobs] Switch to display the job type. [Comm. List] Displays the list of scanner and fax transmission (sent/received) jobs. You can print Activity Report, TX Report and RX Report in respective list screens.